Kele Building Automation Catalog 2014 2015

Browse the new 2014 - 2015 catalog from Kele! Shop our wide selection of building automation controls and products.

1. Kele.com
888.397.KELE (5353)

WORLDWIDE
DISTRIBUTOR
for
HUNDREDS
of
BUILDING
AUTOMATION
and

HVAC/R
MANUFACTURERS

$10
MILLION


OF

IN-STOCK
30
th ANNIVERSARY EDITION
BBC-SD
PG 724
450 SERIES
PG 1352
ENGENIUS
PG 913
231RS SERIES
PG 1045

2. PRODUCTS
• $10 Million...ready to ship
• 60,000 SKUs on demand
• We carry almost EVERY SKU from almost EVERY
manufacturer. If you don’t see what you need, just ask
• Same-day shipping available
• Adding in-stock inventory year-round
SERVICES
• Expertly trained sales team
• Technical assitance for product selection
and installation troubleshooting
• Experienced project scheduling and logistics
• UL
®
-Approved Panel Shop to save time and

money on your installation
• Custom tagging available for almost any need
• FREE valve assembly
• FREE calibration
SOLUTIONS
• Partner with us from bidding to completion
• Proven solutions to common BAS challenges
• Lower overall LARGE project costs by using

our experts to source and coordinate your job
• Pre-sale and post-sale support
• Total package solution

3. SECTION 1 PAGES 1-64
Dampers, Direct Coupled Actuators, Damper Accessories
SECTION 3 PAGES 105-208
Ball, Butterfly, Solenoid, Globe, Zone
SECTION 9 PAGES 497-568
RH, Dew Point, Wet Bulb, Enthalpy, Room, Duct, OSA
SECTION 10 PAGES 569-608
Fluid Level Switches, Ultrasonic Level Switches and
Transmitters, Water Detectors
SECTION 11 PAGES 609-680
Lighting Control Panels, Occupancy Sensors, Light Level Transmitters and Switches, Time Switches, Contactors, Relays
SECTION 12 PAGES 681-712
Variable Frequency Drives and Bypasses, Motor Starters, Motor Disconnects
SECTION 2 PAGES 65-104
Loop Powered Indicators, Tower Lights , Alarm Indication
Stations, Strobes and Horns, Emergency Operator Stations,
Runtime Accumulator
SECTION 4 PAGES 209-232
Flexible Conduit, Conduit Fittings, Boxes, Covers,
Weatherproof Boxes, Hangers, Wire, Terminals, Tape,
Markers, Switches, Receptacles, Plugs, Safety Switches
SECTION 5 PAGES 233-272
General Purpose, NEMA 1, 3R, 12, 4 and 4 X, Perforated
and Solid Panels
SECTION 6 PAGES 273-344
Transmitters, Sensors, Switches, BTU Meters, Flow Totalizers, Flow Devices for Air, Water, and Steam
SECTION 7 PAGES 345-440
Carbon Dioxide, Carbon Monoxide, Conductivity pH, Refrigerant, Toxic and Combustible Gas, IAQ, Weather Instruments
SECTION 8 PAGES 441-496
Controls, Explosionproof Enclosures, Intrinsic Safety Barriers, Intrinsically Safe and Explosionproof Sensors, Transmitters, Switches, Strobes, Accessories
SECTION 13 PAGES 713-840
Wireless Sensors, Transmitters, Receivers, Repeaters and Gateways, LON Sensors, N2 Sensors
SECTION 15 PAGES 873-912
Valve Actuators, Damper Actuators, Thermostats, Tubing, Fittings, EP Valves , Pressure Reducing Devices
SECTION 16 PAGES 913-976
Current and Potential Transformers, Current Switches, Current Transducers, Voltage Monitors, Phase Loss, Power Factor, Power Monitors
SECTION 17 PAGES 977-1008
Control Transformers, Linear, Switching, DIN Rail, DC Power Supplies, Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS)
PSI
SECTION 18 PAGES 1009-1120
Transmitters, Differential Transmitters, Switches, Gauges, Room Pressure Sensors, Snubbers
SECTION 19 PAGES 1121-1168
Plug-In, Power, Multi-Voltage, Time Delay, Alternating, Contactors, Enclosed Relays
SECTION 20 PAGES 1169-1304
Thermistors, RTDs, Transmitters, Infrared, Accessories
70
o
SECTION 21 PAGES 1305-1392
Thermostats, Electronic Controls, Setpoint Controllers
SECTION 22 PAGES 1393-1416
Signal Generators, Temperature Meters, Humidity Meters, Carbon Dioxide Meters, Multimeters, Data Loggers, Calibration Devices
SECTION 23 PAGES 1417-1472
Isolation, Multiplexers, Pneumatic, Resistance, Sequencers, Voltage and Current Conversion, Rescalers, Converters, Expanders
SECTION 14 PAGES 841-872
Fuses, Switches, Terminal Blocks, Pilot Lights, Wire Duct,
Wire Ties, Bridle Rings, J-Hooks, Beam Clamps,
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS NETWORK & WIRELESS
PANEL FABRICATION
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
POWER SUPPLIES
PRESSURE
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
TEMPERATURE
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
TRANSDUCERS
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
CONTROL VALVES
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
ENCLOSURES
FLOW
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HUMIDITY
LIGHTING CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
ALARMS & INDICATION
888-397-5353KELE • www.kele.com
© 2014 Kele, Inc. All Rights Reserved. The Kele name and logo are registered trademarks of Kele, Inc.

4. A2
ON-SITE
CUSTOM
PANEL
SHOP
Kele has been building panels for 30 years. In 2013,
the Kele Panel Shop assembled over 5,000 custom
panels. We’re here to help you with any of your panel
assembly needs.
All custom panel assembly is done in-house. Since
Kele’s headquarters, distribution center, and Panel
Shop are all strategically located in Memphis, TN,
we can immediately source panel fabrication
components to use in custom panel jobs directly
from our distribution center. This saves on lead time
and costs, because we have all of the expertise and
products needed to build your custom panel in one
location.
• UL Listed & Assembled in the USA
• Kele Performs Quality Control Testing
We don’t just build from specifications, we always
test finished panels to make sure all components
work in your application.
• Custom Panels, Repeat Panels & Insta-Panels
®
Available
We make it easy for our customers, all you have to
do is submit the panel specifications and drawing.
We then review and assemble your panels.
• Standard Two-Week Lead Time
With Kele’s process and on-site inventory we can
stay flexible and work to meet your deadline. Kele’s
standard lead time is 2 weeks, but requests can be
expedited.
For more information, contact our Panel Shop.
Call 888.397.5353 or email us at [email protected]
Call 888.397.5353 or email us at [email protected]

5. A3
ON-SITE
CUSTOM
PANEL
SHOP
Kele has been building panels for 30 years. In 2013,
the Kele Panel Shop assembled over 5,000 custom
panels. We’re here to help you with any of your panel
assembly needs.
All custom panel assembly is done in-house. Since
Kele’s headquarters, distribution center, and Panel
Shop are all strategically located in Memphis, TN,
we can immediately source panel fabrication
components to use in custom panel jobs directly
from our distribution center. This saves on lead time
and costs, because we have all of the expertise and
products needed to build your custom panel in one
location.
• UL Listed & Assembled in the USA
• Kele Performs Quality Control Testing
We don’t just build from specifications, we always
test finished panels to make sure all components
work in your application.
• Custom Panels, Repeat Panels & Insta-Panels
®
Available
We make it easy for our customers, all you have to
do is submit the panel specifications and drawing.
We then review and assemble your panels.
• Standard Two-Week Lead Time
With Kele’s process and on-site inventory we can
stay flexible and work to meet your deadline. Kele’s
standard lead time is 2 weeks, but requests can be
expedited.
For more information, contact our Panel Shop.
Call 888.397.5353 or email us at [email protected]
Call 888.397.5353 or email us at [email protected]
CUSTOM
VALVE
ASSEMBLY
PERSONALIZED
TAGGING
& LABELING
Because we have our own production shop Kele
can ship you product that is ready to install, saving
you time and keeping your projects on track. Our
custom valves are assembled and shipped the
same day you place your order. A free service to
you from the experts at Kele.
Many of our customers have discovered our ability
to furnish custom products. With our computerized
l
abel engraver we can produce engraved labels
and logos. We often get orders for custom stainless
steel plates with devices mounted. If you need
a digital display, some push-buttons and pilot
lights mounted on a stainless steel plate, we can
do it. We can even have the whole building silk-
screened on a plate to put on the enclosure front.

6. Kele, Inc. is an American company and we are proud to support the American workforce.
In an effort to unite our customers with some of the very best that American manufacturing
has to offer the building automation and HVAC/R industry, we’re proud to present our new
BUY AMERICAN collection.
Please visit kele.com/buyamerican to shop a variety
of American-assembled products, sorted by section.
KELE MAKES IT EASY FOR YOU TO BUY AMERICAN.
A4

7. WE BELIEVE POWER OF ONE
in the
CALL
PURCHASE
ORDER
SHIPMENT
ONE PRODUCT SOURCE:
60,000 SKUs from over 300 manufacturers
ONE SOURCE for AVAILABILITY:
Over $10 Million in inventory ready to ship same-day
ONE-CALL TECHNICAL SUPPORT:
One of the most responsive and experienced
technical sales team in the industry
Make Kele your ONE SOURCE SOLUTION for all
of your building automation and HVAC/R needs.

8. A6

9. A7

10. A8
888-397-5353KELE • www.kele.com
1. SALES POLICY:
All orders must be single release for immediate shipment to a single destination. Unless instructed otherwise, partial shipments will be made. Freight and handling fees
will be added to each shipment.
2. PRICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE:
In the event of a price change, the unshipped portion of any order could be billed at the new price.
Our minimum billing is $25.00 plus freight charges.
3. NONSTOCK AND NONCATALOG ITEMS:
Products not listed in the current price list or listed as “nonstock” items are considered to be special order items and may be subject to minimum order quantities,
special handling charges, and/or other conditions stipulated by our supplier.
Shipments will be made as soon as the items are received from our supplier. Special order items may carry cancellation charges once an order is placed and may also
be subject to a restricted return policy.
4. SHIPPING INFORMATION:
United States
• Options for material from stock:
A.
UPS Surface – One to six days anywhere in the continental United States
B. Federal Express “Express Saver” – Three-day service in the continental United States
C. UPS Blue and Federal Express Economy – Two-day service
D. UPS Three-day Select – Three-day service anywhere in the continental United States
E. Federal Express Standard Overnight – Delivery by 3:00 p.m. the next business day **
F.
UPS Red Label and Federal Express Priority One Overnight – Delivery by 10:30 a.m. the next business day **
• Freight plus a handling fee of up to $5.00 will be added to each shipment..
• Orders for in-stock items entered by 5:00 p.m. Central time will ship same day.
• Other shipping arrangements are available. Please consult your Kele Sales Associate for special requests.
**Deliver
y times may vary in some areas. Consult your UPS or Federal Express representative for details.
International • Options for material from stock:
A. Federal Express International Services B. UPS Other carriers available upon request.
•
Freight plus a $10.00 handling fee will be added to each shipment.
• Orders for in-stock items entered by 1:30 p.m. Central time will ship that day for open account customers pending original invoice requirements.
• International shipments may be sent freight collect at consignee’s discretion. Note that all freight collect shipments require the customer’s account number with the
selected forwarder. Any freight collect charges billed back to Kele will be invoiced to the customer’s Kele account.
• Other shipping arrangements are available. Please consult your international sales contact for special requests.
**Deliver
y times may vary by country and city locations. Consult your Federal Express or UPS representative for details.
5. FREIGHT:
Customer is responsible for all shipping and handling charges. All domestic shipments are FOB destination. All international shipments are Ex Works. Claims for loss or damage in transit must be made with the carrier by the customer. All shipments should be unpacked and inspected immediately upon receipt. If damage does not become apparent until shipment is unpacked, customer must make a request for inspection by the carrier’s agent and file with the carrier. Any external evidence of loss or damage must be noted on the freight bill or carrier’s receipt and signed by the carrier’s agent. Failure to do this will result in the carrier’s refusal to honor the claim.
6. PAYMENT TERMS:
United States and Canada A. New accounts: prepayment by a company check or credit card (Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, ACH, Wire)
A certified check or credit card is required if the total order amount is $1,000.00 or more.
A credit application must be submitted for open account consideration.
B. Established accounts: Net 30 days with a past due finance charge rate of 18% per annum. “In the event that it is necessar
y for seller to employ a collection agent or an attorney, or both, to obtain payment of any amounts due on the buyer’s account, the
buyer agrees to pay all of seller’s collection cost.”
C. The customer is responsible for all fees associated with wires including banking fees and intermediary fees. Each performa and invoice will have a line item wire fee
of $25.00 (domestic) and $50.00 (international).
D. There is a $25.00 return check fee charge. E. Accounts with balances exceeding 30 days past due will be subject to credit card terms
F
. Accounts with balances exceeding 60 days past due will be subject to restricted shipments
G. Accounts with balances exceeding 90 days past due will be subject to 3rd party collection and/or legal actions at customer’s expense.
International
Payment terms: Export orders are accepted on the basis of payment in advance of shipment by check in U.S. funds, wire transfer, international money order, credit card
(Visa, MasterCard, or American Express, Discover) or letter of credit.
A.
Open Accounts: Will be considered upon receipt of a credit application.
B-G. (See above) H.
Letter of Credit: Payment may be made by irrevocable confirmed L/C provided that the total invoice value of the export order is more than U.S. $10,000.00. Large
multi-line L/C orders must allow for two partial shipments and be valid for a period of at least one hundred and fifty (150) days. Payments will be made in U.S. dollars. A $500 or .05% of L/C (whichever is greater) fee will be charged for L/Cs.
I.
Duties and taxes for international shipments are the responsibility of the consignee. Duties and taxes inadvertently charged to Kele will be invoiced to the customer’s
Kele account.
TERMS OF SALE

11. A9
888-397-5353KELE • www.kele.com
7. CREDITS:
It is Kele’s Credit Apply Policy to leave credits on account up to 60 days. Customer is to apply credits and notify [email protected] immediately upon receipt of
credit. If credit is over 60 days old, a customer refund will be issued unless requested otherwise.
8. NEW/UNUSED RETURNS:
Any material returned must have a return authorization number to be considered for credit. Material returned for credit is subject to:
A.
15% restocking charge or $25.00, whichever is greater, if the product is unopened and returned within 90 days of shipment, or
B. 25% or $35.00, whichever is greater, if opened or returned over 90 days from shipment.
Returns resulting from errors by the seller will not be subject to these charges. Shipments not covered by a valid RMA number may be subject to refusal of delivery. New and used returned product shall be received in original packaging. No returns allowed on product over 180 days (six months from shipment date). Custom products are not returnable for credit. Freight or other costs incurred in restocking will be deducted from the product credit memo. Return of nonstocked items is subject to manufacturer’s acceptance. Returned material must be shipped prepaid.
9. WARRANTY RETURNS:
Warranty periods vary on products sold and period for each may be found under specifications on catalog page or Kele website. Any material returned must have a return authorization number. Returned material is to be shipped prepaid. Product returned may either be repaired, replaced or credited under warranty. An advance replacement may also be requested. Advance replacements will be billed for. Upon receipt, product will be returned to manufacturer for warranty evaluation. Standard lead time for warranty evaluation is 2-4 weeks from date manufacturer has received product back. Replacement/credit to be issued upon confirmation product is covered under warranty. Any product found to not be covered under warranty (customer damaged/no problem found) can either be returned to customer as is or scrapped.
10. WARRANTY:
Kele, seller of the products described in this catalog, believes that technical information, specifications, test results, and recommendations herein are correct, but does not guarantee their accuracy or completeness. The seller provides no warranties beyond those offered by the manufacturer. The seller will provide repaired or replacement material as directed by the manufacturer. Since the seller, Kele, does not control the use of its products, there are no express warranties that extend beyond the description contained herein. SELLER DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Since the seller cannot control the manner of use of its products after their sale, seller will not be responsible for any consequential or indirect damages. Since seller is only acting as a distributor of products manufactured by other companies, liability for breach of warranty claims shall be limited to the manufacturer. No manufacturer’s warranty will apply to products which are in any way altered or modified after delivery by seller. Terms of Buyer’s or User’s purchase order shall not supersede this disclaimer and no warranty, expressed or implied, other than stated herein, shall be effective unless contained in an agreement signed by an officer of Kele.
11. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES:
The seller shall not be liable for any consequential, contingent, or incidental damages whatsoever.
12. DISCLAIMER:
This Catalog comprises a general overview of the products described herein. It is solely for information purposes. Users must independently evaluate the suitability of, and test each product for their application. Kele, Inc. makes no warranties or guarantees as to the accuracy or completeness of the information in this Catalog and disclaims any liability resulting from its use.
Product dimensions in this catalog are nominal and are provided for the convenience of our customers. Kele, Inc. reserves the right to make product changes from
time to time, without prior notification, which may change the dimensions shown. We therefore recommend the customer checks each product before using for
customer projects or product development and specification.
Kele, Inc.’s only obligations are those in our Standard Terms and Conditions of
 Sale and in no case will Kele, Inc. be liable for any incidental, indirect, or
consequential damages arising from the sale, resale, use, or misuse of its products. No products should be used, alone, or in conjunction with others, in any product, for a safety related purpose. Kele, Inc. shall have no obligation or responsibility
to approve the sale of materials by distributors to customers, it being the sole responsibility of the distributor or customer to determine if the intended use involves
product safety issues.
The customer understands and acknowledges that dangers of personal injury are inherent in the event these products are used in violation of the warning set forth
herein and customer expressly and voluntarily assumes all risk for injury or death sustained in the event these products are used in violation of the warning set
forth herein. Customer indemnifies and holds Kele, Inc. harmless from any claim, loss or damage resulting there from, including Kele’s reasonable attorneys fees’.
 
The terms of this warning are incorporated by reference in all future purchase orders.
Kele, Inc. reserves the right to change or update, without notice, any information contained in this Catalog. We may change, without notice, the design,
construction, materials, processing, or specification of any products; and to discontinue or limit production or distribution of any products. For any items not
manufactured by Kele or Kele Precision Manufacturing, please consult the manufacturer’s customer service line or website for the most up to date information and
product details.
13. RIGHT TO SUBSTITUTE:
The seller reserves the right to substitute materials used in construction of equipment sold, provided said substitution does not modify the operational
characteristics of the equipment sold.
14. HOURS OF OPERATION:
Central Time Zone: Sales Office 6:30 AM - 7:00 PM - Business Office 8:00 AM - 5:00 PM
Fax/E-Mail/Web Orders: 24 hours a day - Orders will be acknowledged during normal hours of operation.
Voice mail messaging is available after normal hours.
THESE TERMS OF SALE MAY BE MODIFIED WITHOUT NOTICE. THE TERMS OF SALE AT THE TIME OF SALE SHALL APPLY.
THE SELLER AS REFERRED TO IN THE TERMS OF SALE IS KELE, INC.
TERMS OF SALE
continued

12. A10
APPLICATION INDEX
Application Pages Application Pages
Accumulator/Consumption Display................................102
Actuator............................................................................1-64
Actuator Accessories....................................................7-8
Direct Coupled Actuator.......................................1-2, 9-45
Fail-Safe.................................................................. 43-47
Fire and Smoke.........................................................48-56
Non Spring Return.......................................1, 9-12, 17-27
Spr
ing Return
........................................................2, 28-42
Rectangular Dampers...............................................61-64
Round Dampers........................................................57-60
Air Compressor Accessories
Filters.....................................................899-900, 903-909
Regulators..............................................899-900, 903-909
Air Differential Gauges.......................1101-1102, 1106-1108
Air Differential Switches.............................1070-1088, 1108
Air Flow Stations.......................................................273-275
Air Pressure Switches..........................................1084, 1091
Air Velocity Instruments....................................276, 278-285
Alarm
Audible......................................................................67-69
Beacon......................................................................69-75
Status Indicator.........................................................76-83
Visual Signal.......................................................67-68, 74
Alarm Dialer...............................................................750-751
Alarm Indication Station...............................................65-66
Averaging Sensors................................................1230-1244
B
ACnet
..................609-617, 713-730, 734-735, 739-747, 752,
756-758, 761-762, 766, 770, 774-775, 792-793, 812, 917-918
BACnet IP......................717-720, 727-730, 761-762, 813-815
BTU Monitor................................................299-300, 316-319
BTU Transmitter.................................................299, 312-313
Barometric Pressure.................................................432-433
Beam Clamps............................................................226, 229
Bridle Rings..............................................................226, 229
Bulb Wells.................................1204, 1210, 1229, 1293-1294
Butterfly Valves..........................................................193-205
Bypass Valve Assemblies..............................................1053
CANb
us
......................................................................813-815
Cable Clamps / Ties..........................................................229
Cable Hangers..........................................................226, 229
Calibration Equipment..........................................1393-1394
Calibration Kit............................................................436-437
Carbon Dioxide.....345-368,772-773,810-812, 836-837, 1400
Carbon Monoxide....369-377, 380-381, 386-387, 1039, 1405
Circuit Breaker...........................................................855-856
Combustible Gas Monitor..........382-385, 388-397, 400-401,
411, 413, 420,1403-1404 Condensate Pumps
..........................................................326
Conductivity Measurement...............................422-423, 425
Connectors (Crimp)...................................................227-228
Contactors...............................................664-665, 1151-1152
Control Cabinets...............................................................248
Control Mounting Panels..........................................239-269
Control Transformers.............................8, 977-982, 984-986
Controller (Setpoint)...........................1359-1360, 1363-1364
Current.................................................913-919, 921-924, 950
Current Switches....................................939-948, 953-954
Current Transducers.......................941, 948-949, 951-955
Isolation.............................................................1445-1446
Limiter...............................................................1295-1296
Transformers.........................................................932-938
Dampers.........................................................................57-64
Position Indication.........................................................3-8
Rectangular Dampers.......................................61-64, 891
Round Dampers........................................................57-60
Dataline Surge Protection................................................966
Data Logger..............................................913-917, 920, 1395
Dewpoint Transmitter.................................552-533, 555-556
Differential Pressure......................................................1070
Gauges.................................1101-1102, 1106-1107, 1111
Switches...............................1070-1083, 1085-1088, 1108
Transmitters (Air).......1009-1010, 1012-1034, 1092-1093,
1095-1096, 1099-1100 Transmitters (Water)
..........................................1039-1052
Disconnect................................................................845, 934
Electric / Pneumatic Valves Air (EP)........................891-898
Electrical Boxes and Covers..........218-221, 383, 389, 1100
Electrical Tapes and Wire Markers...........................230-232
Electr
onic/pneumatic transducer
...............1433-1436, 1454
Emergency Lighting Control....................................666-671
Emergency Operator Stations......................................84-91
EnOcean......................................................813-815, 817-838
Enclosures.................................................................233-272
Accessories...........................................................270-271
Aspirated.......................................................254-255, 567
Control Cabinets..........................................................248
Explosionproof .....................................................481-487
Flush Mount..........................................................246-247
General Purpose..................................................263, 269
NEMA 1..........................................239, 241-247, 249-251
NEMA 12...............................................................266-268
NEMA 12 Concept.......................................................267
NEMA 3R..............................................................252-255
NEMA 4.................................................256, 258, 267-268
NEMA 4X ..............................................260-262, 264-265
NEMA 4X (Stainless)...........................................257, 259
Non-metallic...........................................260-262, 264-267
Perf Panel.....................................................................240
Prefabricated.................................................234, 237-238
Screw Cover.................................................................244
Window Kits.................................................................269
Enthalpy / Wet Bulb Measurement...........................552-554
Ethernet........717-718, 720, 727, 726-738, 748-749, 759-764,
813-815, 921 Ethernet Switches
.....................................................736-738
Explosion Proof/Intrinsically Safe Products...........441-496
Filters, Pneumatic............................................................900
Fittings........................................................................903-909
Conduit..........................................................214-217, 272
Float Switches...........................................................587-594
Flow............................................................................273-344
Impeller Flow Sensors...........................................289-290
Magnetic................................................................303-306
Mass Flow.............................................................286-288
Meter.....................................................................335-340
Monitor..................................................................299-300
Switches........................................................320-325, 462
Target Meters........................................................310-311
Totalizers.........297-298, 301-306, 309, 316-319, 327-334

13. A11
Application Pages Application Pages
APPLICATION INDEX
Transmitters....................282-285, 289, 296-298, 312-313
Ultr
asonic
...............................301-302, 316-319, 327-330
Vortex....................................................................307-309
Water.....................................................................335-336
Flow Measurement.....................................273-319, 327-343
Airflow Stations.....................................................273-275
Natural Gas...........................................................286-288
Totalizers.........297-298, 301-306, 309, 316-319, 327-334
Transmitters....................282-285, 289, 296-298, 312-313
Velocity..................................................................278-285
Water.......................289-295, 301-311, 314-319, 327-340
Freezestats.............................................................1243-1244
Fuse Holders...............................................844-846, 851-854
Fuses.................................................................................854
Gas Monitor / Transmitter......345-440, 466-467, 1401-1405,
1413
Gauges...................................................................1101-1111
Goof Plate........................................................................1391
HMI Graphic Display Panel.......................................725-726
Handheld Thermometer................................................. 1397
Hazardous
Level...............................................455, 460-461, 463-464
Pressure................................................................456-459
Hook-up Wire....................................................................213
Humidity......................................................447-449, 497-568
Aspirated Enclosures...................................................567
Dewpoint................................................505-506, 552-556
Enthalpy................................................................552-554
Explosion Proof Transmitters.................................447-449
Humidistats...................................................557-563, 566
Meters, Handheld............................................1398, 1400
RH Transmitters (1%, 2%, 3%, 5%)....497-551, 557-563
Washdown....................................................................527
Wet Bulb................................................................552-554
Immersion Wells....................................................1205-1208
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ).........................364-368, 1305-1309 Infrared Temperature Transmitter
.........................1289-1290
Infrared Thermometer.................................................... 1399
Intrinsic Saf
ety Barriers
............................................474-477
Key Selector Switch.........................................................865
LCD Displays.........................................................93, 97-102
LED Displays.......................................................................96
Labels................................................................................872
Lamps (Panel)............................................................862-864
Leak Detection...........................................................573-581
Light Level Sensors and Switches................................ 625, 627-630, 643-651, 672-673 Lighting
......................................................................609-680
Contactor...............................................................664-665
Controllers / Panels...............................................609-623
Daylighting..............613-617, 643-644, 650-651, 668-669
Emergency Light Control.......................................666-671
Light Level Sensors and Switches..................611-612, 625,
627-630, 643-651, 672-673 Occupancy Sensors
..............................624-630, 633-636,
638-640, 654 Relays
....................................660-663, 668-671, 679-680
Switches.................................647-649, 652-657, 676-680
Zone Control.........................611-612, 615-619, 627-628,
640, 643-644, 650-651
Lightning Arresters..........................................................969
Liquid Differential Pressure Switches.................1085-1088
Liquid Differential Pressure Transmitters...........1043-1052 Liquid Level Control
..........................................582-584, 592
Liquid Level Switches........................572, 582-583, 585-595
Liquid Level Transmitters..........................582-583, 596-606
Leak Detection.......................569-571, 580-581, 587, 589
Lonworks......................273-274, 312-313, 622-623, 717-718,
733, 763-764, 774-775, 812, 913-918, 925-926, 930-931, 1139-1140, 1310-1320
Thermostat
........................................................1310-1320
Loop-powered Indicators...................................97, 100, 101
Magnehelic Gauges.....................................1106-1107, 1108
Magnetic Flowmeter..................................................303-306
Manual Override Boards................................................1470
Mass Flow..................................................................286-288
Mesh Network..............................766-769, 776-777, 780-793
Modbus........................................286-288, 299-300, 303-306,
312-319, 327-330, 367-368, 392-397, 406-407, 466-467, 575- 577, 622-623, 704-706, 713-720, 725-726, 734-735, 742-743, 770, 792-793, 810-812, 814-815, 831, 913-918, 921, 925-931 Modulating Electric Loads
....................................1361-1362
Motor Controls...........................................................681-712
Motor Disconnects........................................689, 692-694
Motor Starters........................................681-688, 690-694
V
ariable Frequency Drives
.....................695-697, 702-706
Variable Frequency Drives with Bypass.698-701, 707-709
N2............312-313, 622-623, 704-706, 713-714, 812, 913-918
Network Devices........................................................713-840
I/O Module......................................739-741, 745-747, 816
Protocol Translation...............................................713-714
Repeater...............................731-733, 778-779, 794-795,
817-819, 821, 824, 833 Router
....................................................727-732, 810-811
Terminator.............................................................734-735
Occupancy Sensors..................................624-630, 633-636,
638-640, 654, 817-818, 1372-1375 Oxygen Sensor
.............382-383. 390-393, 408-409, 466-467
Panels.........................................................................223-272
pH Measurement..............................................424-425, 1395
Phase Loss Monitoring..............................927-929, 956-961
Photo Cell (Light Sensitive Resistor)......................643-646
Photohelic
®
Gauges
.......................................................1108
Pilot Lights..................................................862-865, 870-871
Pitot Tubes.........................................................................277
Pneumatic.873-912, 1417-1420, 1425-1428, 1430-1436, 1453
Actuators for Dampers...........................883-884, 887-890
Actuators for Valves................879-880, 881-882, 885-886
Filters...........................................................................900
Fittings...................................................................903-909
Pressure Regulators....................................................899
Thermostats..................................................873-878, 910
Transducers......1417-1420, 1425-1428, 1430-1436, 1453
Tubing............................................................901-902, 907
VAV Kit...................................................883-884, 891-894
Potential Transformers......................................913, 927-928
Potentiometer........................................870-872, 1363-1364,
1443-1444, 1449-1452, 1456-1465 Power / Watts
...........................................925-926, 1435-1436
Power Control Stations......................................................92

14. A12
Application Pages Application Pages
APPLICATION INDEX
Power Monitor Interface............................................913-920
P
ower Supplies
........................................................977-1008
Pressure.................................................................1009-1120
Bypass Valve Assembly.............................................1053
Controllers...............................................1092-1093, 1119
Differential Switches (Air)........................1070-1083, 1108
Differential Switches (Liquid).............................1085-1088
Differential Transmitters (Air).........1009-1011, 1016-1019,
1023-1026, 1030-1034
Differential Transmitters (Liquid)........................1039-1052
Gauges..............................................................1101-1111
Manifolds....................................................................1054
Regulators....................................................................899
Transmitters....................456-458, 1103-1104, 1016-1068
Protocol Translation..................................................713-714
Pulse Divider...................................................................1471
Push Buttons.....................................................864, 868-891
RTD Sensors............................442-447, 493-494, 1169-1270
Radio Frequency (RF)...............................................770-773
Rain / Snow Sensor...................................................434-435
Rainfall Transmitter...................................................432-433
Receptacles and Switches........................................222-225
Refrigerant Sensors.........................................................438
Regulators..................................................................899-900
Relays.....................................................................1121-1168
Alternating..................................................................1155
LON............................................................................1139
Latching......................................................................1137
Lighting.......................1133-1136, 1145-1146, 1148, 1150
Motor Starter Interface...............................................1167
Multi-voltage............................................1143-1144, 1147
Plug-in..........................................1129, 1155, 1160, 1161
Power.................................1129, 1132, 1133, 1135-1150,
1155-1164 Pulse Initiators
.......................................................658-659
Sockets................................1123-1124, 1127-1128, 1131
Solid-State.........................................................1153-1154
Time Delay...........................1156-1158, 1160, 1162-1166
Resistance Output Transducers....................................1455
Room Pressure Monitor..............................1097, 1099-1100
SNMP..........................575, 578, 715, 719, 720, 748, 792, 812
Sequencers..................................................1456-1465, 1468
Setpoint Controllers 4-20 mA...................1119, 1359, 1360,
1363, 1364 Signal Generator
....................................................1393-1394
Smoke Detectors................................411-414, 418-421, 440
Snow Sensor..............................................................434-435
Snubbers.........................................................................1112
Solar Compensator........................................................1299
Spiralite (Wire Wrap)........................................................860
Standalone Control................382, 390,872,1305,1350,1351
Static Pressure Switches..................1070-1074, 1076-1078,
1080, 1083, 1113 Steam Flow Meter
.......................................182, 301,309-311
Strap-on Pipe Sensor / Bracket..................1251-1258, 1366
Subpanels (Perf Panel)...............................240, 256,257,267
Surge / Transient Protection......................957-968, 974-976
Switches
Controllers..................724, 739-747, 752-758, 1350-1366
EP Switch......................................................895-896, 911
Emergency.................84-91,103,104, 480, 609, 610, 614,
666-671, 868, 870 Engraved Plates
...................................................867, 872
Lighting..........................834, 819-821, 826, 830, 834, 835
Occupancy............................................615-616, 624, 640
Override Assembly.....................................................1470
PE Switch...................................................................1084
Pushbutton.............................................568-587, 864-865
Selector (Rotary)....................................864-867, 869-871
Time.....................................................................676, 677
Toggle.........................218, 219, 221, 222, 861, 866, 1300
Temperature......................................................1291-1252
Controllers.....30, 119, 426, 450, 578, 581, 615, 616, 643,
650, 689, 704, 725, 745, 755, 768, 770, 814-817, 826, 832, 840, 891, 892, 894, 911, 976, 999, 1005-1008, 1093, 1110, 1117, 1132, 1305-1392, 1416, 1445, 1466 Limit Controls
..........................................1354-1358, 1385
Temperature Sensors / Transmitters
Duct Sensor......................................445-449, 1186-1187,
1188-1190, 1195-1204, 1224-1229 Duct Transmitters
.........508, 522, 1195-1201, 1226, 1228,
1230, 1232, 1234, 1236, 1237, 1244, 1272, 1320 Explosion Proof
.....................................................443-449
High Temperature Probe............................................1266
Immersion Sensor.............................................1209-1216
Immersion Transmitters..................1277-1282, 1286-1287
Immersion Wells................................................1293-1294
Infared........................................................................1399
OSA Sensor..................................1186-1187, 1189-1190,
1204, 1216, 1224-1229 OSA Transmitters
...........................1277-1282, 1286-1287
Room Sensor............................................442, 1169-1194
RTD Sensors.............................................442, 1169-1170
RTD Transmitters..............................443-446, 1277-1283
Room Transmitters............................................1271-1276
Sensor Accessories..........................................1295-1300
Sensor Option...................................................1295-1300
Strap-on Pipe Sensor / Bracket.............1186, 1194, 1204,
1245-1258, 1260, 1262-1263, 1268, 1270
Terminal Blocks.........................................................841-850
Test Instruments....................................................1393-1414
Thermal Conducting Compound...................................1298
Thermal Ribbon..............................................................1268
Thermistors....................................................442, 1169-1170
Thermometers (Digital)............................1296, 1396, 1397
Thermostats...........................................................1305-1392
Bulb or Sensor Probe......453, 507, 509, 785, 1211, 1294,
1378, 1379 Communicating
.............615, 930, 1310-1314, 1316, 1320
Electronic Controller.........................................1352, 1433
Explosion Proof....................................................452, 454
Goof Plate............................................1331, 1335, 1391
Guards...............................1311, 1314, 1326, 1329, 1392
Line Voltage....1307, 1311, 1314, 1326, 1329, 1341, 1392
Multistage....1312-1314, 1323, 1327-1329, 1342, 1358,
1460, 1462, 1464, 1466 Pneumatic
.............................................................873-878
Programmable...........1305-1309, 1312-1320, 1323-1347,
1373-1374

15. A13
Application Pages Application Pages
APPLICATION INDEX
Proportional...................................1365-1366, 1370, 1377
Remote Sensor.1305-1314, 1321-1329, 1332, 1334-1346,
1348-1349, 1363, 1365-1366, 1370-1377
Room................1305, 1310-1349, 1363, 1365-1377, 1389
Tri-state (Floating)......................................................1370
Thermowell...............................1204, 1210, 1229, 1293-1294
Time Clocks - Electronic...........................................674-675
Time Switches - Manual............................................676-678
Timers...................................677-678, 1156-1159, 1162-1163
Timing Relays.....................................1160-1161, 1164-1166
Toggle Switches............................................................... 866 Totalizer Display
...............................................................102
Toxic Gas Sensors.............345-411, 413, 418, 420, 436-438,
1403-1404 Track (DIN Rail Mount)
.................474, 841-846, 1121, 1123,
1125, 1127-1132, 1432, 1434 Transducers
...........................................................1417-1472
Analog Input to Analog Output..................................1455
Analog to Floating Point.............................................1455
Averaging..........................................................1447-1448
Current / Voltage to Current / Voltage......1441-1444, 1447
Current / Voltage to Pressure............................1417-1428
Current / Voltage to Resistance.........................1449-1452
Current Isolation................................................1445-1446
Math Module.....................................................1447-1448
PWM to Current / Voltage..............1426-1428, 1453, 1455
PWM to Pressure...........................1419-1424, 1426-1428
PWM to Resistance.................................1449-1452, 1455
Signal Selector (Hi/Lo)......................................1447-1448
Square Root Extraction.....................................1447-1448
Tri-state to Analog Transducers.........................1437-1440
Tri-state to Current / Voltage..............................1437-1440
Tri-state to Pressure................................1417, 1419-1428
Transformers.....................................................................983
Control...................................................................977-991
Current..........................................................932, 934-937
Isolation.................................................................985-986
Power (120V)...............................................................981
Tri-State to Analog Transducers...........................1437-1440
Tri-State to Pressure Transducers..............1417, 1419-1428
Tubing (Pneumatic-Plastic)......................................901-902
Ultrasonic Flow Meter................................301-302, 316-319
Ultrasonic Level Transmitter / Switch......582-583, 585-586,
596-600 Valves
...................105-107, 127-132, 145-151, 167, 181, 193
ASCO....................................................................123-124
Air (EP Switch)......................................................896-898
Ball Valves.....................................................127-150, 162
Belimo...................................................................133-137
Butterfly Valves......................................................193-205
Danfoss Solenoid..................................................125-126
Erie.........................................................105-106, 119-122
Globe Valves..........................................156-161, 164-192
High Performance Rotary..............................145-150, 193
Honeywell...............................117-118, 140-144, 164-166
Johnson Controls...................138-139, 160-162, 178-181
Kele Electric Zone Valves......................................107-110
NEMA 4.................................................................193-205
Pressure Regulating..............................................151-155
Solenoid Valves.....................................................123-126
Spartan Zone Valves.............................................113-116
Stainless Steel......................................................136-137
Zone Valves...........................................................105-122
Varistors............................................................................970
Vibration.....................................................................430-431
Switches.................................................428-431, 470-473
Transmitters............................................426-429, 470-473
Voltage................................................................917-924, 930
Measurement Transducers.....................913-917, 930-931
Monitor...................913-917, 930, 956-963, 966-967, 969
Output Transducers....1417-1432, 1437-1442, 1456-1471
Power Transducer...................................913-917, 930-931
Transformers.........................................................977-991
Vortex Flow Meter......................................................307-309
Water Detector....................569-573, 575-579, 581, 587, 589
Watt Transducers.......................................................930-931
W
eather Instruments
.................................................432-433
Web Server......................727, 736, 742, 748-749, 1305-1308
Wells.........................................1204, 1210, 1229, 1293-1294
Wet Bulb Sensor........................................................552-553
Whisker Switch..................................................3-4, 478, 897
Wind Direction...........................................................432-433
Wind Speed................................................................432-433
Wire Duct....................................................................857-860
Wire Nuts.....................................................222-223, 228-229
Wire Terminals....................................226-229, 841-842, 853
Wire Ties.....................................................................226-229
Wire Communications & Control.............................209-213
Wire Panel Hook-up..........................................................213
Wireless.........679-680, 748, 759-838, 1141-1142, 1305-1308
ZigBee.........................................................................813-816

16. A14
MANUFACTURER INDEX
Manufacturer Pages Manufacturer Pages Manufacturer Pages
3M...............................230-232, 378-381
ABB, Inc..664, 681-686, 689, 842-845,
855, 858, 870-871, 968, 1432
ACI.............................497-498, 519-520,
538-539, 549-550, 774-791, 942-945, 952, 1180, 1194, 1201, 1213, 1221, 1238, 1256, 1453-1455 Advantech
...........725-726, 738, 745-747
AEG...................................................665
AIC Wireless.............................759-765
Air Draulics Engineering................899
Air Products & Controls, Inc...411-414,
417, 420, 987, 1143-1144, 1147 Akron Foundry Co...................482-483
Altech Corp.
....................263, 850, 856
American Auto-Matrix....................724
Amphenol Advanced Sensors .....347-
348, 357-358, 515-516, 527, 543-544, 547-548, 552-553, 555-556, 661-662, 1051-1052, 1034, 1113, 1400 Appleton
..........................................489
Artisan Controls Corp..........1156 -1157
ASCO .........................................123-124
Aschroft, Inc. .......456-458, 1023-1027,
1047-1048, 10 68, 1111 Aura, Inc.
...............................1293-1294
Bacharach ...............384-385, 390-391,
398-399, 410, 436, 1403-1404 Badger Meter
..........289-296, 299-300,
303-306, 312-315, 327-340 Balmac
.......................426-429, 470-473
BAPI ..................362-365, 377, 523-524,
540-541, 794-809, 1028-1029, 1181, 1202-1203, 1214-1215, 1222-1223, 1239-1240, 1257-1258, 1262-1265 Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.
............
1-2, 11-12, 30-33, 43-47, 55-56, 133-137, 151-155, 167-172, 202-205, 487, 1354- 1358 Bellofram
.........................................1431
Blue Ridge Technologies.609-612, 655
Burkert Contromatic Corp.....422-425
Burton Wire & Cable ......................209
Caleffi North America .............320-321
Carlton-Bates Company ................47 8
Circuit Breakers Industries, Inc....856
Clark Solutions .............................1053
Cleveland Controls, Inc.......1071-1072,
1075-1079 Columbus Electric
........................1367
Comptus, Inc............................432-433
Connect Air International ...............212
ContaClip ........................................848
Contemporary Controls .........72 7, 737
Continental Control Systems, LLC ....
925-926 Control Solutions, Inc............719-720,
742-744 Cooper
..............................474-477, 1397
Danfoss, Inc....................12 5-126, 1065
Deltrol Controls............1148 -1149, 1155
Det-tronics................................468-469
DITEK.........................................962-965
Dongan Electric MFG Co................984
Dwyer.... 277, 449, 459, 465, 593, 1080, 110 6 -1108, 1411-1412 Dynacon, Inc.
.................................1384
Dynasonics................3 01-302, 316-319
E Instruments.............1396, 1401-1402,
1406-1410, 1413 E.J. Brooks
......................................934
E+E Elektronik Corp.......282, 501-502,
505-506, 564-565, 810-811 EDC International, Inc............326, 572
EDCO
.........................................966-967
Edwards Signaling..........67, 69-81, 479
EE Controls, Inc......687-688, 690-694,
1152 EGS Electrical Group
......216-221, 226,
272, 488 Electromagnetic Industries
....935-937
Emco Flow System..................307-309
Extech Instruments...1398-1399, 1405
Filtersoft...........................................900
Flowline.....460-461, 463-464, 582-583,
585-586, 592, 596-604 Fluid Air Division of Memphis
.......899
Fox Thermal Instruments........286-288
Franklin Electrofluid.......................896
Fuji Electric...........................1359-1360
Functional Devices Inc..................670-
671, 679-680, 941, 946-947, 953-954, 983, 985-986, 988-991, 993, 1133-1142, 1145 -1146 Gentex Corporation
..........................68
Grasslin............................................675
Greystone Energy Systems.........1173,
1242, 1270 Hecheng Electrical
.........................1151
Hoffman Enclosures Co..........241-247,
252, 254, 256-257, 260-261, 266-267, 269-270
Honeywell
.......1-2, 17-18, 25-27, 34-35,
53-54, 57-58, 117-118, 140-144, 162-166, 210-211, 351-352, 452, 695-709, 873- 874, 879-880, 887-888, 930-931, 980, 1305-1309, 1315-1320, 1330-1337, 1346- 1351, 1382-1383, 1388 Honeywell Analytics
.............................
366-368, 375-376, 394-397, 400-401, 406-407, 466-467 Hubbell
..............................620-621, 653
I.C. Innovations, Inc......................1300
Iboco Corporation....................859-860
Ideal Industries, Inc.........................8 12
IDEC Corporation....863-865, 867-869,
10 0 0 -10 01, 1121-1124, 1132, 1153 -1154, 1158 -1159 IFM Efector
............430-431, 1089-1090,
1291-1292 Intelligent Lighting Control
....622-623,
652, 663 Illumra
........................................817-829
Industrial Control Communications...
713-714 Industrial Electronic
...............102, 862
Industrial Sales Company......450-451,
488, 854 Innovative Solutions LLC
.......587-588,
590-591 Intec Controls
...........................386-387
Integra Enclosures...................26 4-265
Intermatic..........................647-648, 674
Interstate Wire Company.................213
Invensys...........................................900
Johnson Controls.................................
1-2, 7-8, 21-22, 39-40, 63-64, 138-139, 160-161, 173-181, 324-325, 453, 566, 875-876, 881-882, 889, 897-898, 1081, 1084, 1087, 1186-1187, 1352-1353, 1368- 1369, 1378-1381, 1391 Kele
......................................1-2, 6, 9-10,
28-29, 65-66, 93, 96-101, 105-106, 109- 110, 156-159, 206, 237-240, 273-276, 278-279, 280, 283, 297-298, 322-323, 345-346, 349-350, 359-361, 369-374, 382-383, 388-389, 392-393, 402-405, 408-409, 434-436, 509-514, 528-533, 545-546, 567, 567, 570-571, 587, 589, 624-625, 645-646, 658-659, 672-673, 752-755, 766-769, 872, 895, 913-919, 939-940, 948-951, 979, 982, 994-997, 999, 1009-1013, 1039-1040, 1055-1060,

17. A15
MANUFACTURER INDEX
Manufacturer Pages Manufacturer Pages Manufacturer Pages
1066-1067, 1092-1093, 1054, 1070,
1011-1102, 1112, 1167, 1169 -1170, 1176 -
1177, 1182-1183, 1188, 1191, 1195 -119 6,
1199-1200, 1204-1206, 1209-1210, 1216,
1219-1220, 1224-1227, 1245-1246, 1249,
1251-1252, 1271-1274, 1277-1283, 1288,
1363-1366, 1393-1394, 1397, 1417-1429,
1433-1434, 1437-1452, 1456-1471
KMC Controls
........13-16, 281, 756-758,
883-884, 891-894, 1430 KNS Associates..............................999
Kunhung Electric Co.
..........................3
Lascar Electronics.............94-95, 1395
Leviton Manufacturing Co..............214,
222-225, 229 Littlefuse, Inc.
..................................854
Loytec .........717-718, 721-723, 728-732,
734-735, 739-741 Magenepull
.....................................1414
Magnelab...........................932-933, 938
Mamac Systems.1030-1031, 1035-1038,
1049-1050, 1241, 1435-1436 Marathon Special Products
...........8 47,
851-853 Marktime
..................................640, 676
MARS Motors and Armatures........225
McDonnell & Miller..................462, 481
Mercury Displacement....4-5, 591, 594
Meritek Electronics.........................9 70
MH Rhodes......................................677
Minco..441, 443-448, 507-508, 521-522,
1189-1190, 1232-1233, 1236-1237, 1243- 1244, 1266-1269, 1275-1276, 1284-1287 Neilsen-Kuljian
................................955
Neurologic Research Corporation.733
Newark Electronics...................68 , 866
Niagara Meters..........................3 10-311
NORCO, Inc......................................436
Omron Electronic Components LLC..
1125 -1128, 1150 Paragon
.....................................341-343
Parker Hannifin Corp...............905-907
PECO, Inc...........1342-1343, 1370-1377,
1386-1387 Performance Pipe
....................901-902
Pilla Electrical Products, Inc......90-92,
480 PLC-Multipoint, Inc.
.643-644, 650-651
Poteau Panel Shop..........................248
Power & Telephone Supply............969
PSL............................................920-924
RLE Technologies...........5 73-581, 595,
715-716, 792-793 Rotronics
..................................503-504
Ruskin Manufacturing.................59-62
Saginaw Control & Engineering...249-
250, 253, 255, 258-259, 268, 271 Schneider Electric................... 1-2, 7-8,
23-24, 41-42, 119-122, 182-192, 484- 486, 566, 813-816, 877-878, 885-886, 890, 900, 903-904, 909, 1129-1131, 1162-1163, 1389 Sensaphone
...............................748-749
SenseAir....................................355-356
Sensocon........................................111 0
Sensor Switch..........633-639, 654, 678
Setra.......525-526, 542, 551, 1014-1022,
1041-1046, 1061-1062, 1094-1100 Siemens Bldg Technologies, Inc.
..1-2,
19-20, 36-38, 48-52, 111-112, 127-132, 251 Sirena
............................................82-83
Sola Hevi-Duty................981, 992, 998,
1002-1003 Sontay
.......................................770-773
Spartan Peripheral Devices.....113 -116
SSAC, Inc.............1160 -1161, 1164 -1166
Stahlin Enclosures..........................262
Switchlab, Inc..................................849
SymCom Inc....................957-961, 1155
System Sensor ..415-416, 418-419, 421
Thermoken................................830-838
Thomas & Betts...................................3
Time Mark........................................956
TPI Corp...............454, 1073-1074, 1385
United Electric..1085-1086, 1088, 1091
Vaisala........353-354, 499-500, 517-518,
534-537, 554, 1398 Value Line
..................841, 857, 977-978
Valve Solutions..........145-150, 193-201
Vector Controls........................558-563
Veris...........................................927-929
Viconics Electronics....557, 1310-1314,
1321-1322, 1327-1329, 1361-1362 Visonic
.......................................750-751
Vynckier Enclosure Systems.........263
Wago.........................................228, 736
Waterline Controls..........................584
Wattstopper..............613-619, 626-632,
641-642, 649, 656-657, 660, 666-669 Weidmuller
.......................................846
WESCO..............................................214
White Rodgers...1323-1326, 1338-1341,
1344-1345 Wika
..................................284-285, 455,
605-606, 1032-1033, 1063-1064, 1069, 1082-1083, 1103-1105, 1109 Winters
............................................1111
Y
amatake Sensing Control, LTD
..........
1289-1290

18. AA16A16Indicates New Products
Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page
MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX
045 SENSEAIR SERIES. . . . . 355-356
050 SENSEAIR SERIES. . . . . 355-356
1.5KE56CA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
10316H2176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
105XBRM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
105XBRI SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 76-77
107XBR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 72-73
110A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
111.10 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
111.12 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
116EXMST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
125STR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
89STR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
869STR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
869 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
868STR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
868 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
125XBR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
125XBRI SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 78-79
1309K SERIES GAS CALIBRA
TION
KITS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
140T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426-427
140T
- HAZARDOUS
. . . . . . . . 472-473
14121-000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
160 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
1900-5-MR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080
1910 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080
1950G SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
1C SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
1F72 SERIES

THERMOSTATS
. . . . . . 1344-1345
1E78 SERIES

THERMOSTATS
. . . . . . 1344-1345
1F78 SERIES

THERMOSTATS
. . . . . . 1344-1345
1F80 SERIES

THERMOSTATS
. . . . . . 1338-1341
1F95 SERIES

THERMOSTATS
. . . . . . 1323-1326
1F95EZ SERIES

THERMOSTATS
. . . . . . 1323-1326
1F97 SERIES

THERMOSTATS
. . . . . . 1323-1326
200 CLASS CLEAR
VIEW
. . . . . . 80-81
200 SERIES O
VERVIEW
. . . . . . . . 290
2000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1106-1107
201A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
20307 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155
209 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1061-1062
209PF
, U3889
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934
21121
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1113
2151 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
22/07-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1432
2200 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 877-878
2200, 3100 SERIES. . . . . . . . 307-308
220B
, 220SS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
222 SERIES LEVER NUTS . . . . . . 228
225B SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
226B SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
226SS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
228B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
228C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
228SS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
228PV SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
231 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1043-1044
231RS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1045-1046
232.34 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
233.34 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
24-013. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085-1086
24-014. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085-1086
250A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
250B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
251 SERIES PICO FUSE. . . . . . . . 854
258, 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956
25W100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
260 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1018-1019
269 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
2R7CDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
2R9CDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
30-3003D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468-469
3000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
3000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 299-300
3050 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 299-300
310 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
33 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984
340 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312-313
35 VINYL
COLOR-CODING
TAPES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
355 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
35A SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896
380 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314-315
392-SVSR2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
3M
SCOTCHCODE TAPE
DISPENSER STD
. . . . . . . . . . 231
3M SCO
TCHCODE WRITE ON
DISPENSERS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
42000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
42540
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1399
42E SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
438USA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156-1157
438USA-INT. . . . . . . . . . . . 1156-1157
455 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
460 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
475-FM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
47B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
47S-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
747B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
747S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
490 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412
4BR
T SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
4BX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
4CTV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948-949
4CMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948-949
5 R
OOM SENSORS
. . . . . . . . . . . 1188
5 UNIVERSAL DUCT
,
IMMERSION, OSA
. . . . . . . . . 1204
50 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063-1064
50000 CONDUCTIVITY SERIES. . 423
50000 PH AND ORP SERIES
..
.424-425
500T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
501T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
51XBR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428-429
550-X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470-471
567 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
57 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
58-G1 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
58-N-1101 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
599 BALL
VALVE SERIES
. . . . 127-132
599 ZONE
VALVE SERIES
. . . 111-112
600T
, 601T
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
60101-0201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399
60681
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1113
626600A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320-321
691 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
691-U100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
694 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982
6G38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
6M30 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
6N1-ISO SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
6SC30 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
6SM30 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
6W30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
70-781D5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
70-782D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
70-783D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
70-784D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
7001
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1400
77 ROOM SENSORS
. . . . . . . . . . 1188
77 UNIVERSAL DUCT
,
IMMERSION, OSA
. . . . . . . . . 1204
78 R
OOM SENSORS
. . . . . . . . . . 1188
78 UNIVERSAL DUCT
,
IMMERSION, OSA
. . . . . . . . . 1204
781 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1129-1130
782 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1129-1130
783 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1129-1130
784 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1129-1130
8041
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347-348
8210 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 123-124
821TD10H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162-1163
852 ETHERNET SWITCH. . . . . . . . 736
878EX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
879EX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
8BX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
9002
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555-556
93000 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
94 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
A SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
A SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683-686
A-ALP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
A-BLP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
A-HCLO SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
A-LP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
A-SSLP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
A/A
CS SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . 942-943

19. AA17A17MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX
Indicates New Products
Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page
A/ASCS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 942-943
A/CS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 942-943
A/SCS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 942-943
A/CR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 942-943
A/CT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
A/SCT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
A/MCS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944-945
A/MSCS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944-945
A/MCS-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944-945
A/MSCS-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944-945
A/RH1 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 497-498
A/RH2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 519-520
A/RH3 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 538-539
A/RH5 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 549-550
A11 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
A19 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1378-1379
A28 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1378-1379
A319 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1378-1379
A419 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1378-1379
A19A
UC-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
A21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
A2G-05 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1103-1104
A2G-10 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1103-1104
A2G-15 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1103-1104
A2G-20 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 284-285
A2G-40 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1082-1083
A2G-50 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1032-1033
A300 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
A70 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432-433
A70 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381
AAR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
ABB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
ABB EO
T SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
ABW SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
A
C1A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
A
C1F01A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
A
CI AVERAGING SERIES
. . . . . . 1238
A
CI BULLET/BUTTON SERIES
. . 1194
A
CI DUCT SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
A
CI IMMERSION SERIES
. . . . . . . 1213
A
CI OSA SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221
A
CI ROOM SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 1180
A
CI STRAP-ON SERIES
. . . . . . . . 1256
A
CK6F
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
AF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-33
AF16 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
AFE SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
AFP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
AFS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1071-1072
A
GM-SZ
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
AIC900E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759-760
AIM1 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
AIM2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
ALD-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
AM-24830A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999
AMI300 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413
AMP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
A
OW SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
APW SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
A
Q100 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401
A
Q200 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401
A
QS00660
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
A
QS00661
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
ARM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
AS R
OOM, DUCT, OSA, AND
IMMERSION SENSORS
.1189-1190
AS10 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267
AS103759. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243-1244
ASG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
ASW SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
A
T150F
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
A
T175F
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
A
TL SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
A
UD SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
A
VS-200
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
AXJ SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482-483
A
CTUATOR ACCESSORIES
. . . . . . 7-8
ADDME SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
B114 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
B2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133-135
B3 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133-135
B SERIES AND
WINDOW KITS
. . . 269
B SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903-904
BA / A
VERAGING SERIES
. 1239-1240
BA / DUCT SERIES. . . . . . . 1202-1203
BA / IMMERSION SERIES. 1214-1215
BA / OSA SERIES. . . . . . . . 1222-1223
BA / R
OOM SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 1181
BA / STRAP-ON SERIES. . 1257-1258
BA / *-TB SERIES. . . . . . . . 1264-1265
BA / *-TB SERIES-OLD. . . . 1264-1265
BA / *RPFEP SERIES. . . . . 1262-1263
BA / 420CO SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 377
BA / BS2-WT(H). . . . . . . . . . . 804-805
BA / BS3XXC SERIES. . . . . . 362-363
BA / BS3XXV SERIES. . . . . . . 364-365
BA / COM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808-809
BA/R
OM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808-809
BA/R
YOM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808-809
BA/R
YOL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808-809
BA/SOM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808-809
BA/V
OM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808-809
BA/H200 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 523-524
BA/H300 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 540-541
BA/RCV
-EZ
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794-795
BA/RPT
-EZ
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794-795
BA/W
AI SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 796-797
BA/WDI,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796-797
BA/WTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796-797
BA/WT(H)-D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798-799
BA/WT
-I
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800-801
BA/WT
-O
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806-807
BA/WTH-O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806-807
BA/WT
-RPP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802-803
BAM1000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
BAS-3000BC SERIES. . . . . . . 745-747
BASR
T-B
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
BBC-SD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
BC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
BCXLS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 690-691
BDR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
BKA / 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
BLD7800. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400
BR200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1398
BTU1100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402
BV
A-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053
BZ-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641-642
BABEL B
USTER SERIES
. . . . 719-720
C-SD CONCEPT SERIES. . . . . . . . 267
C-SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905-907
C7232 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 351-352
CBL SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
CD-A SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 349-350
CD40 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61-62
CD50 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61-62
CD60 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61-62
CDRS25 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 59-60
CDU4N-G SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
CH SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
CA
T SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
CI-200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627-628
CI-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
CL WIRE
RETAINERS. . . . . . . . . . .859
CL SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870-871
CLL
V-SW
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
CM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633-634
CM-E1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378-379
CM6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380-381
CMRB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
CO10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
CORE VFD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695-697
CORE VFD
WITH BYPASS
. . . 698-701
CP-8500 SERIES. . . . . . . . 1433-1434
CS1A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939-940
CS1150A-LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . 939-940
SCS1.5A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939-940
SCS1150A-LED. . . . . . . . . . . . 939-940
CSC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891-894
CT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165
CT100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409
CVC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394
CX-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627-628
CX SERIES COMMERCIAL LIGHTING
CONTR
OL PANELS
. . . . . 620-621
CX SERIES (CURRENT). . . . . . . . 950
CX SERIES (V
OLTAGE)
. . . . . . . . . 951
CXJ SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
CXLDP SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1023-1024
CALIBRA
TION KITS
. . . . . . . . . . . . 436
CALIBRA
TION GASES
. . . . . . . . . . 437
COMPRESSION TERMINALS
AND
SPLICES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
CUST
OM SERVICES/PANEL
SHOP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233-234
D-3000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
D-4000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889

20. AA18A18Indicates New Products
Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page
MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX
D4120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418-419
D4120 SERIES REMO
TE
ACCESSORIES
. . . . . . . . 415-416
D690. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57-58
DCP-1.5-W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
DCP-250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
DCP-524. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
DCP
A-1.2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
DDP-109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
DE / DB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 316-319
DFS-221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
DIN-L1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429
DIN 3F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
DL-125C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750-751
DL10 SERIES ECHOPOD. . . . . . . . 596
DL14 SERIES ECHOPOD. . . . 582-583
DL24 SERIES ECHOPOD. . . . 582-583
DL34 SERIES ECHOPOD. . . . 582-583
DLM SERIES DIGIT
AL LIGHTING
MANAGEMENT
. . . . . . . . 615-617
DM7600 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 57-58
DP4A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552-553
DP
A II SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . 1012-1013
DP
A SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
DP
A-M SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
DPC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151
DPFS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
DPL SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1009-1010
DPW
-3VLV
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
DPW
-692 SERIES
. . . . . . . . 1039-1040
DRN 4 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
DRN3.1 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
DRS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
DS-2B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434-435
DT
-1K
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397
DT
-300 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . 629-630
DT13E SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1445-1446
DT2630. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786-787
DTFXL SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 301-302
DTK-120HW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962
DTK-120SR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963-964
DTK-2MHLP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963-964
DTK-120SRD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
DTK-2L
VLP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962
DTK-MRJ11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962
DTK-TSS4D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
DW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631-632
DXLDP SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1025-1026
DXN SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327-330
DURADRIVE SERIES. . . . . . . 188-190
ESB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84-85
ESM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86-87
ESP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88-89
E100E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
E150E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
E300E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
E500E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
E31 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501-502
E3R-R04FP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 822
E3T
-C2AWH
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
E3T
-MDCCP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
E3T
-RXX-2INTP SERIES
. . . . . . . . 823
E3T
-S2H SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
E3T
-SLICP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
E3T
-SXA SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
E3T
-SXE SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
E3X-DXXFP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 819
E3X-MRCFP SERIES. . . . . . . 817-818
E3X-RXX-3HO
TP SERIES
. . . . . . . 820
E3X-RXX-5IBTP SERIES. . . . . . . . 821
E3X-RXX-REPTP SERIES. . . . . . . 824
E3X-TXX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
E3X-X12GP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 818
E50 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927-929
EDC CONDENSA
TE PUMPS
. . . . . 326
EE23 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 505-506
EE240 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 810-811
EE46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564-565
EE65 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
EE66 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
EFP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
EHRH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
EIBA SWITCHES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
EKI SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
EL SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
EL-USB SERIES D
ATA LOGGER..1395
ELCU-100
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666-667
ELCU-200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668-669
ELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463-464
EM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
EMT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
ENG-485. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
EN4A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552-553
EP-311 / 313 SERIES. . . . . 1435-1436
EP3 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
EPC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
EPETD8S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
EPW SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
ESR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670-671
ET SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
ET SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367
ETH-1000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
EVSI SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 125-126
EYM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
EASYSENS INPUT MODULES. . . . 838
EASYSENS RECEIVER

GATEWAYS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
EASYSENS REPEA
TER
. . . . . . . . . 833
EASYSENS R
OOM SENSORS
. . . 836
EASYSENS SRC RECEIVER
CONTR
OLLERS
. . . . . . . . . . . 832
EASYSENS
SPECIALTY WIRELESS
TRANSMITTERS
. . . . . . . . . . . 835
EASYSENS SWITCHES. . . . . . . . . 834
EASYSENS TEMPERA
TURE
SENSORS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
EASYSENS THANOS. . . . . . . . . . . 830
ECHOSAFE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460-461
EF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-33
ENGENIUS - P
ATENT
PENDING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 913-917
ENGENIUS A
CCESSORIES
. . . . . . 919
EWK SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
F-1000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
F-1000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 908-909
F01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
F2B-D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
F2N-B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
F2S-D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
F6 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-205
F7 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-205
F61 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324-325
F7 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
F8-SSL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
F
ASTEL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
FC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
FCS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
FCXLS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 692-694
FE-1000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
FE-1050 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 342-343
FGD WEB
SERIES
. . . . . . . . . 748-749
FILN05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
FLEX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
FLM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
FLQ SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
FNQ SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
FM_D SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
FS1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322-323
FS7 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
FS7-4E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
FSLF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-56
FSNF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-56
FSAF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-56
FT2A SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 286-288
FXP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
FIXED AND HINGED
WINDOW
KITS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
FLEXST
AT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756-758
FOR
TA SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . 191-192
G2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167-169
G3 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167-169
G2R-S SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1125-1126
G7L SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150
GAP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20
GBB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20
GC51 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
GC52 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1047-1048
GCA SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-38
GD-2B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378-379
GD6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380-381
GDC150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384-385
GDC350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390-391
GDD SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 388-389
GDE SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20
GDN SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 392-393
GDS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382-383
GEB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20

21. AA19A19MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX
Indicates New Products
Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page
GEH2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 515-516
GEH3 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 543-544
GEH5 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 547-548
GF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
GGD SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-52
GIB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20
GLB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20
GK SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-45
GMA SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-38
GMD20 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 353-354
GMW21 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 353-354
GND SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-52
GNP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-38
GR
T SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
GENESIS WIRING. . . . . . . . . 210-211
GQD SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-38
G SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264-265
H-LP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
H-SSLP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
H-SERIES CLASS 500

SUBMETERS
. . . . . . . . . . 930-931
H SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264-265
HBX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
HC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
HC-101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
HC-201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
HD-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378-379
HD100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407
HD31K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532-533
HD400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
HDR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
HF5 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503-504
HGM-MZ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
HGM-SZ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
HHT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
HL600 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
HL
T SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
HM40A1AB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1398
HMD / S /
W8XD / H / W SERIES
. . 554
HMD42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536-537
HMD53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536-537
HMD60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517-518
HMD70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517-518
HMK41K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517-518
HMW80 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 534-535
HMW90 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 499-500
HO31K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532-533
HS-100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
HS-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656-657
HS-150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656-657
HS20K SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 513-514
HSP-121BT1R
U
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
HT2D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521-522
HT2O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521-522
HT2S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521-522
HT829. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507-508
HT839. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507-508
HT880 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 447-448
HTCCV SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 136-137
HW SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
HW
-76B
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
HW31K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532-533
HZLIM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 450-451
H_20K SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 511-512
H_30K SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 530-531
IA
Q-A SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
IA
Q-N SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . 367-368
IA
QPT SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
IL10 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
ILC APPRENTICE II. . . . . . . . 622-623
IP300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430
IR-F9 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 406-407
IXLDP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457-458
I.CANDOIT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 742
J21K SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088
J54 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
K SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647-648
K-332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900, 903-909
K-383. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899-900
K-384. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899-900
K-387. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899-900
K1 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455-456
K2000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1101-1102
K235 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
KA-44 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
KA-88 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
KA-175 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
KA-301 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
KAS-27 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-29
KAS-44 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-29
KAS-88 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-29
KAS-175 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 28-29
KB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
KCD SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345-346
KCFS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
KCO SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369-370
KCO2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
KCOC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 373-374
KCOP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 371-372
KDPS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070
KE375 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1148-1149
KE900 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1148-1149
KH2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509-510
KH3 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528-529
KH5 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545-546
KIP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
KLK SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
KLNJ-A2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
KMS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275-276
K
OAMS SERIES
. . . . . . . 273-274, 281
K
OV SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 206
KRDB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166
KRDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164
KSDB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166
KT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870-871
KT
A* SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 1205-1206
KTB* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
KTD* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1195-1196
KTEC ZONING SYSTEM. . . . 752-755
KTES* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1176-1177
KTM* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1245-1246
KTMR* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1245-1246
KTM*S SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251
KTM*SC SERIES. . . . . . . . 1251-1252
KTMP* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249
KT
O* SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216
KT
OSA* SERIES
. . . . . . . . . 1219-1220
KT
OS* SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . 1224-1225
KTP* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1182-1183
KTR* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1169-1170
KTS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360-361
KTU* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1226-1227
KTUS* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1224-1225
KTV* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1999-1200
KTW* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1209-1210
KVC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109-110
KZ SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105-106
L-IOB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 739-741
L-IP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728-730
L-SWITCH SERIES. . . . . . . . . 731-732
L-TERM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 734-735
L-VIS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 721-723
L4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
L4000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
L480 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1382-1383
L8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
LABELS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
LA
TCHES, LOCKS, VENTILATION,
HEATING, COOLING
.260-261, 271
LB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
LC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647-648
LC8 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618-619
LD1-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
LD1500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
LD2100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575-577
LD31 SERIES DEL
TASPAN
. . . 601-602
LD32 SERIES DEL
TASPAN
. . . 601-602
LD310 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
LD34 SERIES DEL
TASPAN
. . . 603-604
LD35 SERIES DEL
TASPAN
. . . 603-604
LD5200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578-579
LDIM2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672-673
LDRA6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
LF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-33
LGA
TE-9XX SERIES
. . . . . . . . 717-718
LH-10 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 605-606
LMCP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 613-614
LOCKS
, LATCHES, VENTILATION,
HEATING, COOLING
. . . . . . . 270
LPI-1C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
LPI-1C-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
LPI-1C-G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
LPI-1C-R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
LPI-3C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
LPI-3C-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
LPI-3C-G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
LPI-3C-R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

22. AA20A20Indicates New Products
Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page
MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX
LPI-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
LPI-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
LS-10 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 605-606
LS-PB-C SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
LS45M91B11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 4
LS7K SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
LU2 SERIES ECHOSONIC. . . 597-598
LU77 / 78 SERIES

ECHOSWITCH
. . . . . . . . . 585-586
LU80 / 81 / 83 / 84 SERIES

ECHOSPAN
. . . . . . . . . . . 599-600
L
V SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
L
V100 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408
L
V41 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
L
V42 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
LX-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
LX-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
L
Y SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125-1126
M SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870-871
M SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908-909
M-2000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 303-306
M10 / 16SFL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844-845
M230 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1041-1042
M230-3VL
V
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
M264 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1014-1015
M265 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1016-1017
M267-MR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020-1021
M4 / 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
M4 / 6SNBT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844-845
M4 / 8SF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844-845
M6 / 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
M9100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-22
M9200 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-40
MA SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-42
MA8 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484-486
MA
GNEPULL XP1000 SERIES
. . 1414
MAS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650-651
MBS 1900. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
MC6 / 7 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 484-486
MCP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 883-884
MEP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
MF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-42
MF4 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-24
MK SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125-1126
MK-2690 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 885-886
MK-46XX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 885-886
MK-6XXX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 885-886
MK-3000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
MK-7100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
MK7-B SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 643-644
ML SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164-166
ML61XX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-27
ML71XX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-27
MLS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587-588
MN SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-18
MNST SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
MOB-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470
MOB-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470
MOD9200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774-775
MP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870-871
MP100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410
MP200 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410
MP6 / 7 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 484-486
MP800 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 881-882
MP918A SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 887-888
MP918B SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 887-888
MP920B SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 887-888
MP953 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 879-880
MR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1143-1144
MRMS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094
MS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
MS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-35
MS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-42
MS4 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-24
MS4XXX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 53-54
MS81XX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 53-54
MST1 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
MTL5000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 474-477
MTL7000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 474-477
MTL7700 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 474-477
MVN SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 162-163
MODEL AL
T
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155
MODEL IOG SERIES. . . . . . . 331-334
N SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
NEMA 1 LARGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
NEMA 1 MEDIUM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
NEMA 1 SMALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
NEMA / IP RA
TINGS
. . . . . . . . 235-236
NF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-33
NFCXLS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 692-694
NFP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310-311
NG2D
W1500B
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
NKQ SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-47
NS2-0000-02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075
NST
A SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 237-238
OS-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408-409
O
VR DIN SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
P SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
P10 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084
P2RF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1127-1128
P32 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081
P51 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1055-1056
P74 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087
P
AM-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
P
AM-4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
PC642C SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
PCA3 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1403-1404
PCM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1092-1093
PDK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
PF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127-1128
PG SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
PICCV SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 151-155
PIL-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658-659
PIL-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167
PK SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089-1090
PLG50 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
POL
YPRO™ SERIES
. . . . . . . 260-261
PQ
UBE DC SENSORS
. . . . . . . . . . 924
PQ
UBE DC VOLTAGE MONITORS
. 924
PQ
UBE ETHERNET MODULES
. . . 921
PQ
UBE SCN SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 922
PQ
UBE SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
PQ
UBE WIRING DIAGRAM
. . . . . . 923
PQ
UBE TH SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . 924
PQ
UBE XCT CT MODULES
. . . . . . 921
PR264 SERIES . . . . . . . . . 1035-1036
PR274 / 275 SERIES. . . . . 1030-1031
PR276 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1037-1038
PR282 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
PRK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
PS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
PS5R SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1000-1001
PSB40AB10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
PSB100AB10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
PSC40AB10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
PSC100AB10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
PSD-30 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069
PSH SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989-990
PSH200A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
PSH300A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
PSH500A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
PSH550-UPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
PSMN300A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
PSMN500A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
PSR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681-682
PSR-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645-646
PSR-1-T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645-646
PSS2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1057-1058
PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
PT
-NTL-10
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
PT
A SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . 1453, 1455
PT
A2 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 1453, 1455
PTF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1127-1128
PTS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
PTX1 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1059-1060
PV600 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
PVI-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066-1067
PVI-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066-1067
PW2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999
PW
A SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 1437-1440
PXR4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359-1360
PERF P
ANEL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
PLA
TE PAL SERIES
. . . . . . 1300-1301
PRESTIGE 2.0. . . . . . . . . . 1305-1309
PRESTIGE IA
Q
. . . . . . . . . . 1305-1309
PW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631-632
QL SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
R-3710. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903-904
R-LP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
R820 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1361-1362
RAD-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
RBTS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
RCDL COMPOUND SERIES. 335-336
RCDL NUT
ATING DISC
. . . . . . 337-338
RCDL TURBO
SERIES
. . . . . . 339-340
RCT
-1800 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . 932-933
RES-1E SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1449-1452

23. AA21A21MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX
Indicates New Products
Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page
RET SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239, 247
RF-RR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
RF-RS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
RF-RX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 770-771
RF-RXS WIRELESS
NETWORK
RECEIVER
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
RFS-4001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076
RH SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121-1122
RH-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073-1074
RH-3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073-1074
RIB M SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1145-1146
RIB TR
SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . 985-986
RIB PILO
T SERIES
. . . . . . . 1133-1134
RIBT PILO
T SERIES
. . . . . . 1133-1134
RIB PO
WER SERIES
. . . . . 1135-1136
RIBT PO
WER SERIES
. . . . 1135-1136
RIB01 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138
RIB02 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138
RIBL LA
TCHING SERIES
. . . . . . . 1137
RIBTW SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
RIBTW2401B-BC. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1140
RIBW SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1141-1142
RIBX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 946-947
RIBX-V SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 953-954
RIBXG SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
RIBXK SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
RIBXK420 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
RIG SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216-217
RJ SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121-1122
RJ SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
RL SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
RLD-134A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404-405
RLD-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402-403
RM2402D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776-777
RM2432D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776-777
RP BASIC SERIES. . . . . . . . . 609-610
RR-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661-662
RR-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661-662
RR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121-1122
RR2552. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778-779
RSS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077
RSSDN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153-1154
R
T2602
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780-781
R
T2620
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780-781
R
T2630 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 782-783
R
TC-2P
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365-1366
R
TE SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . 1158-1159
R
V8H SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132
RAPT
OR PROTOCOL
CONVERTER
. . . . . . . . . . 715-716
REFRIGERANT VERIFICA
TION
KITS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
RPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
R SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222-224
S SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222-224
S-SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
S101144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268-1269
S1K SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
S200U-K SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
S241HC
, TT111H-0800
. . . . . . . . 1266
S469. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268-1269
S665PD
Y48BC
. . . . . . . . . . 1268-1269
S667PD
Y40BC
. . . . . . . . . . 1268-1269
SAK4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
SAK6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
SC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
SC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
SC-C SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
SC-SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
SC-H SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
SCE SERIES LARGE. . . . . . . . . . . 250
SCE SERIES SMALL. . . . . . . . . . . 249
SCT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
SCX SERIES (CURRENT). . . . . . . 950
SCX SERIES (V
OLTAGE)
. . . . . . . . 951
SD-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
SD-R
O1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
SDI SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
SDN-C COMP
ACT
SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . 1002-1003
SDN-P SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
SDU SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
SGD-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94-95
SGD-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94-95
SGVL RETR
OFIT SERIES
. . . 170-172
SH SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123-1124
SJ SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123-1124
SL-2000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 413-414
SL100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406
SL200 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406
SLS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
SM-501 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 411-412
SMAR
TVFD HVAC
. . . . . . . . . 704-706
SMAR
TVFD HVAC WITH BYPASS
ASSEMBLY
. . . . . . . . . . . 707-709
SP
A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
SPC3 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 386-387
SPODM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
SPXCD SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 466-467
SR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123-1124
SRCM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1095-1096
SRH12 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 525-526
SRH13 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
SRH15 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
SRIM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
SRMD SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
SRPM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1099-1100
SS / SP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
SSD SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
SSS-1000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
SST2630. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784-785
ST SUPPOR
T BRACKETS
. . . . . . . 860
ST
-A* SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 1207-1208
ST
-AV81H
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236
ST
-AV85H
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236
ST
-AV81R
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232-1233
ST
-AV85R
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232-1233
ST
-AV91R
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232-1233
ST
-AV91H
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237
ST
-B* SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192
ST
-BP SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1193
ST
-D* SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 1197-1198
ST
-FZ* SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . 1234-1235
ST
-FZR SERIES
. . . . . . . . . 1230-1231
ST
-L* SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 1260-1261
ST
-MP* SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
ST
-O* SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 1217-1218
ST
-R* SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248
ST
-R*R SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248
ST
-R*S SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . 1253-1254
ST
-R*SC SERIES
. . . . . . . . 1253-1254
ST
-S* SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 1184-1185
ST
-S*E SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . 1171-1172
ST
-S*EW SERIES
. . . . . . . . 1171-1172
ST
-S*K SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . 1174-1175
ST
-S*P SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . 1178-1179
ST-STP* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255
ST
-T90 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . 1271-1272
ST
-T91 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . 1273-1274
ST
-TS* SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259
ST
-U* SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 1228-1229
ST
-W* SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . 1211-1213
ST
-X SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
ST120 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
STB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
STB-H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
STS SUPPOR
T BRACKETS
. . . . . . 860
SW SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
SWBX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
SAFETY EQ
UIPMENT
. . . . . . . . . . 437
SENSOR MOUNTING

ACCESSORIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 1391
SENSOR OPTIONS. . . . . . 1295-1296
SENTR
Y 200-A SERIES
. . . . . . . . . 955
SERIES A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110
SMAR
TDRIVE COMPACT VFD
.702-703
SMAR
TSTRUXURE LITE MPM-GW
SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
SMAR
TSTRUXURE LITE MPM-UN
SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
SMAR
TSTRUXURE LITE MPM-VA
SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
SMAR
TSTRUXURE LITE SEC
SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
SUPER 33 AND 88 BLA
CK VINYL
ELECTRICAL TAPE
. . . . . . . . . 232
SURGE PR
OTECTION CHART
. . . 974
SYSTEM 450. . . . . . . . . . . . 1352-1353
T
-100 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 901-902
T
-141 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 901-902
T
-1000
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
T
-4000 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . 875-876
T
-PB SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
T1 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
T1E SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
T155 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1376-1377
T167 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1376-1377

24. AA22A22Indicates New Products
Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page
MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX
T158 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1370-1371
T168 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1370-1371
T170 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1372-1373
T180 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1374-1375
T22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368-1369
T25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368-1369
T26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368-1369
T46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368-1369
T30 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
T30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152
T40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152
T4000 SERIES

THERMOSTATS
. . . . . . 1342-1343
T60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152
T8000 SERIES

THERMOSTATS
. . . . . . 1342-1343
T90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152
T12000 SERIES

THERMOSTATS
. . . . . . 1342-1343
T5100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347-348
T5U SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
T6051B1006. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
T631F / G SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1388
T63U SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
T71U SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282
T7350 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1315-1320
T775 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1350-1351
T8000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 357-358
T81PNR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
T81U SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281
T85PNR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
T85U SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1279-1280
T87 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1330-1331
T90PNR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
T91H SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1277-1278
T91L SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1277-1278
T91U SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1277-1278
TA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165
TB6575 SUITEPR
O™
SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . 1346-1347
TB6980 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1348-1349
TB7100A100 MUL
TIPRO™
SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . 1332-1333
TB7980 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1348-1349
TB8575 SUITEPR
O™
SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . 1346-1347
TC-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
TC-105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
TC-1100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
TCI SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562-563
TCY
-BH SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 560-561
TDC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558-559
TDRSO
XP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162-1163
TDRSRXP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162-1163
TDUB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166
TE-6300 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1186-1187
TE200AD SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173
TE200FDC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1242
TE200G SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270
TE707C SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241
TEC COMP
ACT STARTERS
. . 687-688
TEMFLEX 1700 BLA
CK VINYL
ELECTRICAL TAPE
. . . . . . . . . 230
TF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-33
TF115 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1386-1387
TF142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1384
TH109 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1386-1387
TH3000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1330-1331
TH4000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1330-1331
TH5000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1334-1335
TH6000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1334-1335
TB7000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1334-1335
TH8000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1336-1337
TB8220 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1336-1337
TK SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291-1292
TK100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396
TK-1000 THR
U TK-5000
SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877-878
TL SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
TM99A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397
TMV8000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164
T
OOL-95-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
TP1-M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375-376
TP970 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 873-874
TRF115 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1386-1387
TR
U SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . 1160-1161
TS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
TS-470 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
TS-475 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
TSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1384
TT
-470 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
TT211. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443-444
TT801 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1284-1285
TT807 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1284-1285
TT809 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1286-1287
TT859. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275-1276
TT881. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445-446
TWS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-83
TY7321A1009. . . . . . . . . . . 1289-1290
T
ARTAN 3939 DUCT TAPE
. . . . . . . 232
TEMPERA
TURE SENSOR
ACCESSORIES
. . . . . . 1297-1299
TESTING DEVICES AND
TOOLS
. 1390
THERMOST
AT REMOTE SENSOR
ACCESORIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . 1391
THERMOST
AT GUARDS
. . . . . . . 1392
TRANSDUCER SELECTION

CHART
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472
TW155 / 255 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1388
TX-6-AM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380-381
TX-6-HS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380-381
TX-6-ND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380-381
U
AT-1 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 1441-1442
U
AT-2 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 1441-1442
UCK UNIVERSAL CALIBRA
TION
KIT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
UCM-420A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363-1364
UCO-44 OPTIONS. . . . . . . 1423-1424
UCO-44T OPTIONS. . . . . . 1423-1424
UCP-242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417-1418
UCP-422 SERIES. . . . . . . . 1419-1420
UCP-422 SERIES F
, V OPTIONS
.1422
UCP-422 SERIES M OPTION. . . . 1421
UCP-722 SERIES. . . . . . . . 1425-1426
UCP-822A SERIES. . . . . . . 1427-1428
UCS-121 SERIES. . . . . . . . 1456-1457
UCS-221E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458-1459
UCS-421E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460-1461
UCS-621E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462-1463
UCS-821E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464-1465
UCT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
UFT
-1 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 297-298
UGVL RETR
OFIT SERIES
. . . 170-172
UMM-1 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1447-1448
UMM-2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1447-1448
UMX-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466-1469
UMX-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466-1469
UPD SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
US TRANSFORMERS. . . . . . . . . . . 983
UT8001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367
UW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631-632
V
-3000 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . 881-882
V
-BAR 700
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
V
-BALL SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 145-150
V11 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897-898
V130LA1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
V39ZA1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
V47ZA1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
V200 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 113-116
V300 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 113-116
V4-2-U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
V5011 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 156-157
V5013 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 156-157
V5860 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 117-118
V
A-4233 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 178-181
V
A-7000 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 178-181
V
A301C-DLC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396-397
V
A301EM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394-395
V
ASQN8X
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400-401
VB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182-187
VBN2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 140-144
VBN3 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 140-144
VD SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
VD-1300 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 63-64
V
G1000 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 138-139
V
G2000 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 173-177
V
G7000 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . 160-161
V
GF SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158-159
VH7200 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
VK SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430-431
VM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119-120
VPI SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
VR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
VS-120R1R9L-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
VT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121-122
VT100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408
VT200 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408

25. Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page AA23A23
MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX
Indicates New Products
VT7200 COMMUNICATING..1310-1311
VT7300 COMMUNICATING..1310-1311
VT7200 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . 1321-1322
VT7300 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1321-1322
VT7600 COMMUNICA
TING .1312-1314
VT7600 SERIES
. . . . . . . . . 1327-1329
VTI SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443-1444
V
ALUPOINT VP4-23 SERIES
. . . . . 744
VERSA-CAB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
VICONICS WIRELESS. . . . . . 766-769
W181P SERIES
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
W221P SERIES
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
W241P SERIES
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
W30 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1051-1052
W30-3VL
V
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
W43A-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
W7350 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1315-1320
W
ALL PLATE ADAPTERS
. . . . . . . 1391
WB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293
WB4A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552-553
WBT900. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761-762
WBT900-IP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761-762
WBX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
WD-1B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
WD-2-T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570-571
WEBOP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 725-726
WEL-B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
WEL-S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
WF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
WGVL RETR
OFIT SERIES
. . . 170-172
WH2630. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788-789
WI-MGR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792-793
WIRE NUTS
, TIES,
ACCESSORIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . 229
WLC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
WL
T900
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763-764
WNC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 925-926
WPS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
WS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293
WSD SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
WSX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
WT2630. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790-791
WV SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
WWS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 679-680
XFMR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 977-978
XJ
AT SERIES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 482-483
XLDP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
XL
TR-1000
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
Z200 / Z300 SERIES. . . . . . . . 107-108
ZC BASIC SERIES. . . . . . . . . 611-612
ZIP ECONOMIZER SERIES.1354-1358
ZPS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1028-1029
ZS-260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
ZS4 SERIES DISCONNECT SWITCH
AND FUSE HOLDERS. . . . . . . 845
ZS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
ZS10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
CUSTOMIZED
CALIBRATION
Because we have our own production shop Kele
can ship you product that is ready to install,
saving
you time and keeping your projects on
track. We
use precision calibration equipment to set your
specified signal ranges and engineering
units. Our
custom calibration is a free service
from our technical
experts. Most orders are calibrated and shipped to
you the same day.

26. A24

27. ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS
& DAMPERS
ML61xx | p. 25
GMA/GCA Series | p. 36
KAS Series | p. 28
CDRS25 Series | p. 59
LMB, NMB, AMB, | p. 11
GMB Series
TS-470 Series | p. 4
Kele Carries All of the Major Manufacturers, Including Fire and Smoke Solutions.

28. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
kele.com
GND Series | p. 48
KA-44 Series | p. 9
VD-1300 Series | p. 63
ACTUATORS
& DAMPERS
Accessories
KLNJ-A2 — Whisker Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
LS45M91B11
— Whisker Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
TS-470 Series
— Damper Position Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
TS-475 Series
— Non-Mercury Damper Position Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
TT-470 Series
— Solid State Tilt Transducer for Damper / Valve Position
Feedback
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Actuator Accessories
— Mechanical and Electrical Accessories
. . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Fire/Smoke GND, GGD Series
— Fire and Smoke Damper Actuators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
MS4xxx, MS81xx Series
— Fire and Smoke Damper Actuators
. . . . . . . . . . . . 53
FSLF, FSNF, FSAF Series
— Fire and Smoke Damper Actuators
. . . . . . . . . . 55
Non-Spring Return Actuators KA-44, KA-88, KA-175, KA-301 Series
— Kele Revolution™ Direct Coupled
Actuators Non-spring return
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
LMB, NMB, AMB, GMB
— Direct Coupled Actuators Non-Spring Return
. . . . . 11
MN Series
— Direct Coupled Actuators Non-Spring Return
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
GBB, GDE, GEB, GIB, GLB, GAP Series
— Direct Coupled Actuators Non-
Spring Return
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
M9100 Series
— Direct Coupled Actuators Non-Spring Return
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
MF4, MS4 Series
— Direct Coupled Actuators Non-Spring Return
. . . . . . . . . . 23
ML61xx, ML71xx Series
— Direct Coupled Actuators Non-Spring Return
. . . . 25
Rectangular Dampers CD40, CD50, CD60 Series
— Rectangular Dampers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
VD-1300 Series
— Rectangular Dampers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Round Dampers D690 Series
— Round Dampers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
CDRS25 Series
— Round Control Dampers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Spring Return Actuator MEP Series
— KMC Actuators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
KAS-27, KAS-44, KAS-88, KAS-175 Series
— Kele Revolution™
Direct Coupled Actuators Spring Return
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
TF, LF, NF, AF, EF Series
— Direct Coupled Actuators Spring Return
. . . . . . . 30
MS Series
— Direct Coupled Actuators Spring Return
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
GMA, GCA, GQD, GNP Series
— Direct Coupled Actuators Spring Return
. . . 36
M9200 Series
— Direct Coupled Actuators Spring Return
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
MA, MF, MS Series
— Direct Coupled Actuators Spring Return
. . . . . . . . . . . . 41
GK Series
— Direct Coupled Actuators Fail-Safe
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
NKQ Series
— Fast-Acting Fail Safe Actuators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

29. WE MAKE IT EASY.
1ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
DIRECT-COUPLED ACTUATORS TORQUE AND DAMPER AREA RATINGS
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATOR CROSS REFERENCE CHART NON-SPRING RETURN
Brand Torque Supply Voltage Control Signal Model
Damper
Area (ft
2
)
Kele 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Two-position, floating KA-44-2T 6.3
Honeywell44 in-lb (5 Nm) 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Two-position, floating MN6105A1011 6.3
Johnson 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz Two-position, floating M9104-AGA-2S 5.0
Johnson 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz Two-position, floating M9106-AGA-2 7.6
Siemens 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz Two-position, floating GDE131.1P 6.3
Schneider35 in-lb (4 Nm) 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz Two-position, floating MF4E-60430-100 5.0
Schneider35 in-lb (4 Nm) 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz Two-position, floating MF41-6043 5.0
Belimo 45 in-lb, (5 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Two-position, floating LMB24-3 6.4
Kele 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA, two-pos., floatingKA-44-M 6.3
Honeywell44 in-lb (5 Nm) 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mAMN7505A2001 6.3
Johnson 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA M9104-GGA-2S 5.0
Johnson 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA M9106-GGA-2 7.6
Siemens 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz Proportional 0 to 10 VDC GDE161.1P 6.3
Schneider35 in-lb (4 Nm) 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz Proportional 0-10 VDC MS41-6043 5.0
Belimo 45 in-lb, (5 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA LMB24-SR 6.4
Kele 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Two-position, floating KA-88-2T 12.6
Honeywell88 in-lb (10 Nm) 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Two-position, floating MN6110A1003 12.6
Johnson 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz Two-position, floating M9108-AGA-2 10.0
Siemens 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz Two-position, floating GLB131.1P 12.6
Schneider70 in-lb (8 Nm) 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz Two-position, floating MF41-6083 10.0
Belimo 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Two-position, floating NMB24-3 12.9
Kele 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA, two-pos., floatingKA-88-M 12.6
Honeywell88 in-lb (10 Nm) 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mAMN7510A2001 12.6
Johnson 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA M9108-GGA-2 10.0
Siemens 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz Proportional 0 to 10 VDC GLB161.1P 12.6
Schneider70 in-lb (8 Nm) 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz Proportional 0-10 VDC MS41-6083 10.0
Belimo 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA NMB24-SR 12.9
Kele 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Two-position, floating KA-175-2T 25.0
Honeywell175 in-lb (20 Nm) 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Two-position, floating MN6120A1002 25.0
Johnson 140 in-lb (16 Nm) 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz Two-position, floating M9116-AGA-2 20.0
Siemens 132 in-lb (15 Nm) 20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz Two-position, floating GEB131.1P 18.9
Schneider133 in-lb (15 Nm) 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz Two-position, floating MF41-6153 19.0
Belimo 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Two-position, floating AMB24-3 25.7
Kele 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA, two-pos., floatingKA-175-P 25.0
Honeywell175 in-lb (20 Nm) 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mAMN7220A2007 25.0
Johnson 140 in-lb (16 Nm) 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA M9116-GGA-2 20.0
Siemens 132 in-lb (15 Nm) 20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz Proportional 0 to 10 VDC GEB161.1P 18.9
Siemens 177 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz Proportional 0 to 10 VDC GBB161.1P 25.3
Schneider133 in-lb (15 Nm) 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz Proportional 0/2-10 VDC MS41-6153 19.0
Belimo 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA AMB24-SR 25.7
Kele 301 in-lb (34 Nm) 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Two-position, floating KA-301-2T 43.0
Honeywell300 in-lb (34 Nm) 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Two-position, floating MN6134A1003 42.9
Johnson 210 in-lb (24 Nm) 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz Two-position, floating M9124-AGA-2 30.0
Johnson 280 in-lb (32 Nm) 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz Two-position, floating M9132-AGA-2 40.0
Schneider300 in-lb (34 Nm) 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz Two-position, floating MF41-6343 42.9
Belimo 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Two-position, floating GMB24-3 51.4
Kele 301 in-lb (34 Nm) 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA, two-pos., floatingKA-301-P 43.0
Honeywell300 in-lb (34 Nm) 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mAMN7234A2008 42.9
Johnson 210 in-lb (24 Nm) 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA M9124-GGA-2 30.0
Johnson 280 in-lb (32 Nm) 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA M9132-GGA-2 40.0
Siemens 310 in-lb (35 Nm) 20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz Proportional 0 to 10 VDC GIB161.1P 44.3
Schneider300 in-lb (34 Nm) 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA MS41-6343 42.9
Belimo 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA GMB24-SR 51.4
*Maximum damper area assuming 7 in-lb/sq. ft damper torque

30. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.
flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 2flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
*Maximum damper area assuming 7 in-lb/sq. ft damper torque
DIRECT-COUPLED ACTUATORS TORQUE AND DAMPER AREA RATINGS
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATOR CROSS REFERENCE CHART SPRING RETURN
Brand Torque Supply Voltage Control Signal Model
Damper
Area (ft
2
)
Kele 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Two-position KAS-44-2 6.3
Honeywell 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Two-position MS8103A1130 3.6
Honeywell 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Two-position MS8105A1030 6.3
Johnson 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Two-position M9203-BGA-2 3.6
Schneider 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Two-position MA40-7043 5.0
Belimo 18 in-lb (2 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Two-position TF24 2.6
Belimo 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Two-position LF24 5.0
Kele 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., floatingKAS-44-M 6.3
Honeywell 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., floatingMS7503A2030 3.6
Honeywell 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., floatingMS7505A2030 6.3
Johnson 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Tri-state, two-positionM9203-AGA-2Z 3.6
Schneider 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Floating MF40-7043 5.0
Belimo 18 in-lb (2 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Floating TF24-3 2.6
Belimo 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Floating LF24-3 5.0
Johnson 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mAM9203-GGA-2Z 3.6
Schneider 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA MS40-7043 5.0
Belimo 18 in-lb (2 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA TF24-SR 2.6
Belimo 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA LF24-SR 5.0
Kele 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Two-position KAS-88-2 12.6
Honeywell88 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Two-position MS8110A1008 12.6
Johnson 70 in-lb (80 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Two-position M9208-BGA-2 10.0
Johnson 89 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Two-position M9210-BGA-3 12.7
Siemens 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 21-27 VDC Two-position GMA121.1P 8.9
Schneider 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Two-position MA41-7073 8.6
Belimo 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Two-position NFB24 12.9
Kele 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., floatingKAS-88-M 12.6
Honeywell88 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., floatingMS7510A2008 12.6
Johnson 70 in-lb (80 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Two-position, floating M9208-AGA-2 10.0
Johnson 89 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Two-position, floating M9210-AGA-3 12.7
Siemens 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 21-27 VDC Floating GMA131.1P 8.9
Schneider 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Floating MF41-7073 8.6
Belimo 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Prop. (default 2-10 VDC) NFB24-MFT 12.9
Johnson 70 in-lb (80 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA M9208-GGA-2 10.0
Johnson 89 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA M9210-GGA-3 12.7
Siemens 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 21-27 VDC Prop. 0/2-10 VDC GMA151.1P 8.9
Siemens 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 21-27 VDC Prop. 0-10 VDC GMA161.1P 8.9
Schneider 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA MS41-7073 8.6
Belimo 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA NFB24-SR 12.9
Kele 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Two-position KAS-175-2 25.0
Honeywell175 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Two-position MS8120A1007 25.0
Johnson 177 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Two-position M9220-BGA-3 25.3
Siemens 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Two-position GCA121.1P 20.3
Schneider133 in-lb (15 Nm) 24 VAC ±20%, 22 to 30 VDC Two-position MA41-7153 19.0
Schneider150 in-lb (17 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Two-position MA40-7173 21.4
Belimo 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Two-position AFB24 25.7
Kele 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., floatingKAS-175-M 25.0
Honeywell175 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., floatingMS7520A2007 25.0
Johnson 177 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Two-position, floating M9220-AGA-3 25.3
Siemens 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Floating GCA131.1P 20.3
Schneider133 in-lb (15 Nm) 24 VAC ±20%, 22 to 30 VDC Floating MF41-7153 19.0
Schneider150 in-lb (17 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Floating MF40-7173 21.4
Belimo 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Prop. (default 2-10 VDC) AFB24-MFT 25.7
Johnson 177 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA M9220-GGA-3 25.3
Siemens 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Prop. 0-10 VDC GCA161.1P 20.3
Siemens 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC Prop. 0/2-10 VDC GCA151.1P 20.3
Schneider133 in-lb (15 Nm) 24 VAC ±20%, 22 to 30 VDC Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA MS41-7153 19.0
Schneider150 in-lb (17 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA MS40-7173 21.4

31. WE MAKE IT EASY.
flfi 3ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Conduit Connection 1/2" NPT
Contact Rating 10A @ 24 VAC, 10A @ 120 VAC,
6A @ 24 VDC
Contact Arrangement 1 N.O. and 1 N.C.
Switch Angle 15° make, 6° reset
Operating Temperature -13° to 131°F (-25° to 55°C)
Dimensions 8.0"H x 1.6"W x 1.7"D
(20 x 4.0 x 4.2 cm)
Weight 0.5 lb (0.2 kg)
Enclosure Rating IP67
Approvals CE, cUL recognized, NRNT8.
E117960
Warranty 1 year
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Conduit Connection 1/2" NPT
Contact Rating 10A @ 24 VAC, 5A @ 120 VAC,
2.8A @ 24 VDC
Contact Arrangement 1 N.O. and 1 N.C.
Switch Angle 14° make, 6° reset
Operating Temperature -13° to 158°F (-25° to 70°C)
Dimensions 7.9"H x 1.6"W x 1.8"D
(20 x 4.0 x 4.5 cm)
Weight 0.5 lb (0.2 kg)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X
Approvals CE, UL Listed, CSA
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The KLNJ-A2 whisker switch is a high-quality, multi-
directional contact switch with a plastic coated spring-rod
whisker
. It is perfect for sensing damper blade position and
can be used to provide position status of valve linkages or other mechanical devices
.
FEATURES
• Plastic coated spring-rod whisker for long life
• Captive wiring cover screws to save time
• Heavy duty 10A @ 120 VAC contacts
DIMENSIONS
WHISKER SWITCH
KLNJ-A2
SPECIFICATIONS
KLNJ-A2
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KLNJ-A2 Whisker switch with coated spring-rod and 10A @
120 V
AC contacts
M6x15
1.7"
(4.2)
0.25"
(0.65)
5.5"
(14.0)
2.3"
(5.9)
1.2"
(3.0)
1.6"
(4.0)
.20"
(.52)
8.0"
(20.3)
1.1" (2.9)
in (cm)
DESCRIPTION
The LS45M91B11 whisker switch is a multidirectional, metal
limit switch. This spring rod whisker version allows flexibility
when applying to damper, valve, and other HVAC applications that need position sensing
.
WHISKER SWITCH
LS45M91B11
SPECIFICATIONS
LS45M91B11
0.05 Ø
(0.13)
0.275 Ø
(0.7)
0.63
(1.60)
5.12
(130)
7.87
(200)
3.15
(8.0)
1.58
(4.0)
1.77
(4.5)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LS45M91B11 Whisker switch with steel spring-rod and 5A @
120 V
AC contacts
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)

32. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.
flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 4flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Wiring
TS(1)-470 3' length, AWG 18, 3-conductor
cable; green = common, black =
N.C., white = N.O.
TS(1)-470-2 3' length, AWG 18, two 3-conductor
cables; green = common, black = N
.C., white = N.O.
TS(1)-470-P 3' length, plenum AWG 18,
3-conductor cable; black = common, blue = N
.C., red = N.O.
Switch Type Encapsulated mercury switch,
contains 0.03 cc mercury
Contact Rating
Non-plenum SPDT; 2A @ 120 VAC, 1A @
240 VAC
-P models SPDT; 1A @ 120 VAC, 240 VAC
Switch Angle Makes at 15° below horizontal
Operating Temperature -30° to 130°F (-34° to 54°C)
Dimensions
TS- 1.4"H x 1.0"W x 4.4"L
(3.6 x 2.5 x 11.1 cm)
TS1- 1.5"H x 1.8"W x 5.5"L
(3.8 x 4.5 x 14.0 cm)
Weight
TS- 0.46 lb (0.21 kg)
TS1- 0.8 lb (0.36 kg)
Mounting
TS- 1/2" (1.3 cm) damper shaft
TS1- 1" (2.5 cm) damper shaft
Warranty 1 year
DAMPER POSITION SWITCHES
TS-470 SERIES
1/2
0 .5 dia
(1 .27)
1/2
4 .375
(11 .11)
Cord 3'
(91 .4)
TS-470
in
(cm)
1
1 .0 dia
(2 .54)
1
5 .5
(13 .97)
1/2
1 .0
(2 .54)
1
1 .75
(4 .45)
DESCRIPTION
The TS-470 Series damper position switches consist of an
encapsulated mercury switch mounted on a 1/2" (1.3 cm)
damper shaft crank arm. The TS1-470 Series includes the
same switch, mounted on a 1" (2.5 cm) crank arm. They are
mounted on a horizontal damper shaft to provide opened/ closed indication
. Switch contacts are normal when the cable
end of the switch is horizontal or above, and makes when the cable end drops more than 15° below horizontal
.
FEATURES
• Easy to install
• Easily adjustable
WIRING / DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
TS-470-2
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TS-470 Damper position switch with SPDT switch, for 1/2" shaft
TS-470-2 Damper position switch with two SPDT switches, for 1/2" shaft
TS-470-P Damper position switch with SPDT switch, for 1/2" shaft, stainless steel housing, and
plenum-rated cable
TS1-470 Damper position switch with SPDT switch, for 1" shaft
TS1-470-2 Damper position switch with two SPDT switches, for 1" shaft
TS1-470-P Damper position switch with SPDT switch, for 1" shaft, stainless steel housing and plenum-rated cable
TS1-470
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
KLNJ-A2 Whisker switch with coated spring-rod and 10A @ 120 VAC contacts 3
LS45M91B11 Whisker switch with steel spring-rod and 5A @ 120 VAC contacts 3
TS-475 Non-mercury damper position switch, SPDT, for 1/2" damper shaft 5
TT
-470
Tilt transducer with 1/2-in crank arm, 4-20 mA loop powered 6
TT1-470 Tilt transducer with 1-in crank arm 6

33. WE MAKE IT EASY.
flfi 5ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Wiring 3' length, AWG 18, 3-conductor
plenum-rated cable; black =
common, white = N.C., red = N.O.
Switch Type Mechanical roller ball, SPDT
Contact Rating 5A @ 120/250 VAC
Switch Angle N.O. makes at 20° above
horizontal, breaks at 15° below horizontal
Operating Temperature
-30° to 130°F (-34° to 54°C)
Dimensions
TS- 1.5"H x 1.5"W x 4.4"L
(3.8 x 3.8 x 11.1 cm)
TS1- 1.8"H x 1.5"W x 5.5"L
(4.5 x 3.8 x 14.0 cm)
Weight
TS- 0.4 lb (0.2 kg)
TS1- 0.7 lb (0.3 kg)
Mounting
TS- 1/2" (1.3 cm) damper shaft
TS1- 1" (2.5 cm) damper shaft
Enclosure Rating UL 94V-0 flammability rating
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The TS-475 Series damper position switches use a roller
ball and mechanical switch to provide open/closed damper
position status
. The TS-475 Series offers a non-mercury
alternative for applications and for projects which do not allow mercury
.
NON-MERCURY DAMPER POSITION SWITCH
TS-475 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TS-475 Non-mercury damper position switch, SPDT,
for 1/2" damper shaft
TS1-475 Non-mercury damper position switch, SPDT,
for 1" damper shaft
TS-475

34. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.
flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 6flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 9 to 40 VDC
Wiring 30" plenum-rated cable, 2-conductor 16
AWG unshielded
Sensor Measurement Range
Programmable from ±10° to 360°
rotation
Sensing Technology Solid state orientation sensor
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 2-wire loop powered
Output Resolution 0.8 mA @ 90° rotation, 0.2 mA @ 360°
rotation, ±0.1 mA
Maximum Output Impedance
1000Ω @ 24 VDC
Lamps Red LED for programming
Operating Temperature -20° to 150°F (-29° to 66°C)
Dimensions
TT-470 1.4"H x 1.0"W x 4.4" L
(3.4 x 2.5 x 11.1 cm)
TT1-470 1.4"H x 1.8"W x 5.5" L
(3.4 x 4.4 x 13.9 cm)
Weight
TT-470 0.5 lb (0.2 kg)
TT1-470 0.8 lb (0.4 kg)
Installation
TT-470 1/2" round shaft
TT1-470 1" round shaft
Enclosure Rating Indoors only, not suitable for outdoor
installation
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
SOLID STATE TILT TRANSDUCER FOR DAMPER/VALVE POSITION FEEDBACK
TT-470 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The TT-470 Series solid state tilt transducer is a
programmable, 2-wire, 4-20 mA loop-powered device
specifically designed to provide positive feedback of damper
or valve position to a building automation system
. The
transducer is quickly and easily field programmed, using an integral pushbutton, to span any shaft rotational range between 10° and 360° (one full rotation)
.
The TT-470 contains no mercury or other hazardous
substances and meets or exceeds all current RoHS environmental standards
. The transducer includes an integral
crankarm style mounting bracket and is available in 2 models; the TT-470 fits a 1/2" shaft and the TT1-470 fits a 1" shaft
.
The tr
ansducer must be mounted on a horizontal shaft,
typically a damper shaft or a globe valve linkage shaft (for example the Honeywell Q5020 linkage).
WIRING
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
TT-470
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TT-470 Tilt transducer with 1/2-in crank arm
TT1-470 Tilt transducer with 1-in crank arm
TT-470
0 .5 dia
(1 .2)
TT-470
4 .375
(11 .1)
Cable 30"
(76)
TT-470
in
(cm) TT1-470
1 .0 dia
(2 .5)
TT1-470
5 .5
(13 .9)
TT-470
1 .0 (2 .5)
TT1-470
1 .75 (4 .4)
9-40 VDC
Power Supply
30" Cable
4-20 mA Signal
+–
LED
Black
Red ±
Note: Transducer must be oriented in the snap-in clip as shown in
the drawing; the TT-470 text must be visible.
Note: The calibration button is near the LED, concealed under the flexible plastic end cap
. DO NOT REMOVE THE END CAP.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

35. WE MAKE IT EASY.
7ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
ACTUATOR ACCESSORIES
ESK050-K
AV10-18-K
ZG-NMSA-1-K
DMPR-KC008
DMPR-KC003 (shaft only)
205830A
KC-1405L-K
ZS-100
ZS-150
ZG-DC1-K
DMPR-KC054
ZG-DC2-K
DMPR-KC005-K
BJ-809-K
KG8-K
Model Description
DAMPER ACTUATOR WEATHER SHIELDS
ZS-100 Galvanized weather shield for Belimo AFB/NFB/LF/TF/GMB/AMB/NMB/LMB
ZS-150 Polycarbonate weather shield for Belimo AFB/NFB/LF/TF/GMB/AMB/NMB/LMB
DAMPER SHAFT CRANK ARMS
KH6-K Crank arm for 3/4" shaft, 3-1/2" length, use with BJ-809-K ball joint
KH8-K Crank arm for 3/4" shaft, 3-1/2" length, use with KG8-K ball joint
CA-1 Crank arm for 1" shaft, 3-1/2" length, use with BJ-809-K ball joint
205830A Crank arm/ball joint kit for KA-44, KA-88 actuators
KC1403S-KCrank arm for 3/8" shaft, 2-7/8" length, use with BJ-809-K ball joint
KC1405L-KCrank arm for 1/2" shaft, 4-3/4" length, use with BJ-809-K ball joint
BALL JOINTS BJ-809-K Ball joint, straight, use with 5/16" diameter pushrod
KG8-K Ball joint, 90° angle, use with 5/16" diameter pushrod
DAMPER BLADE CRANK ARMS ZG-DC1-K Universal damper blade crank arm, 3-1/2" length
ZG-DC2-K Universal damper blade crank arm, 6" length
DMPR-
KC054
Damper blade crank arm for JCI CD1300 dampers
SHAFT EXTENSIONS
AV10-18-KShaft extension for 3/8" to 9/16" diameter shafts, 9-1/2" length
ZG-NMSA-
1-K
Shaft extension for 1/2" diameter shaft, 2" length
DMPR-
KC008
Shaft extension for JCI damper square shaft, 7" length
DMPR-
KC005-K
Shaft extension for 1/2" shafts, 4 5/8" length w/coupler
ESK050-K Ruskin damper shaft extension kit
DMPR-
KC003
Shaft extension for 1/2" shafts, 7" length
KH8-K
KH6-K
CA-1
KC-1403S-K

36. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.
flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 8flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Model Description
PUSH RODS
SGA24 Remote control dial, proportional, surface mount
PR-245/16" dia. 24" (.61m) length push rod
PR-485/16" dia., 48" (1.2m) length push rod
FLOOR MOUNT BRACKETS
50001194-
001
Universal surface mount bracket with crank arm and 1/2" shaft
ZG-103Right angle horizontal mounting bracket for Belimo GMB, NMB, AMB
ZG-104Right angle vertical mounting bracket for Belimo GMB, NMB, AMB
ZG-107Floor mounting bracket, horizontal, for AF actuators
ZG-108Floor mounting bracket, vertical, for AF actuators
ZG-112Floor mount bracket, vertical, for LF actuators
DAMPER MOUNT BRACKETS
ZG-100Right angle mounting bracket for AFB/NFB and AMB/GMB actuators
ZG-101Right angle floor mount bracket for AFB/NFB and AMB/GMB actuators
ZG-102Tandem actuator mounting bracket for AF/AFB/GMB actuators
DMPR-
KC255
Internal-mount bracket for JCI M9000 actuators
POWER AND SIGNAL ACCESSORIES
ZG-R01500Ω, 1/2W, 1% resistor
691-K0AControl transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2
691-U100Class 2 control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 96 VA
SGF24 Remote control dial, proportional, flush mount
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
ACTUATOR ACCESSORIES
DMPR-KC255
50001194-001
SGA24SGF24
ZG-R01
691-KOA
691-U100
ZG-107
ZG-108
ZG-112
ZG-103
ZG-104
ZG-101
ZG-100
ZG-102
PR-24
PR-48

37. WE MAKE IT EASY.
flfi 9ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC (VAC
only for KA-175-2T, KA-301-2T)
Motor Synchronous with magnetic clutch
(2-pos
, floating), Brushless DC
(proportional)
Wiring
Enclosed terminals
Action Switch selectable direct/reverse
acting
Rotation 95° ± 3°
Drive Time 95 seconds @ 60Hz
Manual Override Disengage button
Noise
-44, -88 <35 db @ 3' (1m)
-175, -301 <40 db @ 3' (1m)
Resolution 400 steps
Life Expectancy 60,000 cycles, 1.5 million repositions
Operating Temperature -5° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH
Approvals cULus, CE, C-tick, plenum rated,
E4436/E179109
Warranty 5 years
KELE REVOLUTION™ DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN
KA-44, KA-88, KA-175, KA-301 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Revolution™ KA-44, KA-88, KA-175, and KA-301
Series actuators are designed and tested to provide reliable
non-spring return control for dampers and valves
. They are
powered by 24 VAC/VDC and accept tri-state/two-position and proportional control signals
.
FEATURES
• Switchable drive direction
• Service/Off switch (tri-state/two-position models)
• Auto-adapt switch (proportional models)
• Manual override
• Self-centering, reversible hub
• Adjustable mechanical rotation stops
• Dual SPDT auxiliary switches available
• 60,000 cycles nominal
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
KA-175-P
(KA-301 Higher torque)
KA-44-M
(KA-88 Higher torque)
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model Torque
Supply
VA
Control Signal Input Impedance Feedback
Auxiliary
Switch
KA-44-2T 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 5.0 VA Two-position, floating None None
KA-44-M 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 5.0 VA
Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA,
two-pos., floating
100 kΩ @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500Ω @ 4-20 mA 0/2-10 VDC None
KA-88-2T88 in-lb (10 Nm) 5.0 VA Two-position, floating None None
KA-88-M 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 5.0 VA
Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA,
two-pos., floating
100 kΩ @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500Ω @ 4-20 mA 0/2-10 VDC None
KA-175-2T175 in-lb (20 Nm) 6.0 VA Two-position, floating None SW2 accessory
KA-175-P175 in-lb (20 Nm) 6.0 VA
Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA,
two-pos., floating
100 kΩ @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500Ω @ 4-20 mA 0/2-10 VDC SW2 accessory
KA-301-2T301 in-lb (34 Nm) 9.0 VA Two-position, floating None SW2 accessory
KA-301-P301 in-lb (34 Nm) 8.0 VA
Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA,
two-pos., floating
100 kΩ @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500Ω @ 4-20 mA 0/2-10 VDC SW2 accessory

38. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 10flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
5
4
1
2
3
0/2-10 VDC Feedback
0/2-10 VDC or
0/4-20 mA,
* 500fl resistor
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
C
N.C.
N.O.
C
N.C.
N.O.
2
3
4
2
3
4
KA-44-2T, KA-88-2T, KA-175-2T, KA-301-2T
Two-position Control
KA-44-M, KA-88-M, KA-175-P, KA-301-P
Proportional Control
0 or 2-10 VDC / 0 or 4-20 mA Signal
(500Ω resistor required)
SW2 Auxiliary Switch Kit
KA-44-2T, KA-88-2T, KA-44-M,
KA-88-M, KA-175-2T, KA-301-2T
Floating Control
24 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
f
D
R
Contol wth 
f
D
R
Contol wth 
Service used for manual adjust
Service used for manual adjust
Service used for manual adjust
       D
f
       R
2... 10 V
0... 10 V
10. . . 0 V
10. . . 2 V
CCW switch
CW switch
Switch ratings: Adjustable between 5 and 85
degrees, 24 VAC/VDC, 5A resistive, 3A inductive
Floating
controller
WIRING
KELE REVOLUTION™ DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN
KA-44, KA-88, KA-175, KA-301 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KA-44-2T Non-spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position or tri-state (floating) control
KA-44-M Non-spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), proportional, two-position or tri-state (floating) control
KA-88-2T Non-spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position or tri-state (floating) control
KA-88-M Non-spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), proportional, two-position or tri-state (floating) control
KA-175-2T Non-spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), two-position or tri-state (floating) control
KA-175-P Non-spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), proportional, two-position or tri-state (floating) control
KA-301-2T Non-spring return, 301 in-lb (34 Nm), two-position or tri-state (floating) control
KA-301-P Non-spring return, 301 in-lb (34 Nm), proportional, two-position or tri-state (floating) control
Model Torque Dimensions
Maximum Shaft
Diameter
Minimum Shaft
Length
Enclosure
Rating
Weight
KA-44-2T 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 2.4"H x 2.6"W x 5.3"L (6.2 x 6.6 x 13.4 cm) 0.6" (1.6 cm) 1.6" (4.1 cm) NEMA 2 (IP54) 1.0 lb (0.4 kg)
KA-44-M 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 2.4"H x 2.6"W x 5.3"L (6.2 x 6.6 x 13.4 cm) 0.6" (1.6 cm) 1.6" (4.1 cm) NEMA 2 (IP54) 1.0 lb (0.4 kg)
KA-88-2T88 in-lb (10 Nm) 2.4"H x 2.6"W x 5.3"L (6.2 x 6.6 x 13.4 cm) 0.6" (1.6 cm) 1.6" (4.1 cm) NEMA 2 (IP54) 1.0 lb (0.4 kg)
KA-88-M 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 2.4"H x 2.6"W x 5.3"L (6.2 x 6.6 x 13.4 cm) 0.6" (1.6 cm) 1.6" (4.1 cm) NEMA 2 (IP54) 1.0 lb (0.4 kg)
KA-175-2T175 in-lb (20 Nm) 3.9"H x 3.6"W x 8.8"L (10.0 x 9.2 x 22.3 cm) 1.06 in (2.7 cm) 0.87 in (2.2 cm) NEMA 2 (IP54) 3.2 lb (1.45 kg)
KA-175-P175 in-lb (20 Nm) 3.9"H x 3.6"W x 8.8"L (10.0 x 9.2 x 22.3 cm) 1.06 in (2.7 cm) 0.87 in (2.2 cm) NEMA 2 (IP54) 3.2 lb (1.45 kg)
KA-301-2T301 in-lb (34 Nm) 3.9"H x 3.6"W x 8.8"L (10.0 x 9.2 x 22.3 cm) 1.06 in (2.7 cm) 0.87 in (2.2 cm) NEMA 2 (IP54) 3.2 lb (1.45 kg)
KA-301-P301 in-lb (34 Nm) 3.9"H x 3.6"W x 8.8"L (10.0 x 9.2 x 22.3 cm) 1.06 in (2.7 cm) 0.87 in (2.2 cm) NEMA 2 (IP54) 3.2 lb (1.45 kg)
ACCESSORIES
32004254-003 Replacement shaft coupler for KA-301, MNxx34
50000407-001 Tandem mount bracket for KAS-175 actuators
50001194-001 Universal surface mount bracket with crank arm and 1/2" shaft
SW2 2X/SPDT/AUX SWTCH/KA/KAS/1000-X
ZG-R01 500Ω, 1/2W, 1% resistor
DIMENSIONS

39. WE MAKE IT EASY.
flfi 11ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Model Torque Supply VA Control Signal Feedback Auxiliary Switch Drive Time
LMB24-3 45 in-lb, (5 Nm)2 VA Two-position, floating P1000A (1 kΩ option) S1A or S2A (option) 95 seconds
LMB24-3-S 45 in-lb, (5 Nm)2 VA Two-position, floating P1000A (1 kΩ option) 1 SPDT, 3A @ 250V 95 seconds
LMB24-SR 45 in-lb, (5 Nm)3 VA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 2-10 VDC S1A or S2A (option) 95 seconds
LMB24-MFT 45 in-lb, (5 Nm)5 VA Prop. (default 2-10 VDC) 2-10 VDC S1A or S2A (option) 150 seconds
NMB24-3 90 in-lb (10 Nm)4 VA Two-position, floating P1000A (1 kΩ option) S1A or S2A (option) 95 seconds
NMB24-SR 90 in-lb (10 Nm)5 VA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 2-10 VDC S1A or S2A (option) 95 seconds
NMB24-MFT 90 in-lb (10 Nm)6 VA Prop. (default 2-10 VDC) 2-10 VDC S1A or S2A (option) 150 seconds
AMB24-3 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 5.5 VA Two-position, floating P1000A (1 kΩ option) S1A or S2A (option) 95 seconds
AMB24-3-S 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 5.5 VA Two-position, floating P1000A (1 kΩ option) 1 SPDT, 3A @ 250V 95 seconds
AMB24-SR 180 in-lb (20 Nm)5 VA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 2-10 VDC S1A or S2A (option) 95 seconds
AMB24-MFT 180 in-lb (20 Nm)6 VA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 2-10 VDC S1A or S2A (option) 150 seconds
GMB24-3 360 in-lb (40 Nm)6 VA Two-position, floating P1000A (1 kΩ option) S1A or S2A (option) 95 seconds
GMB24-SR 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 6.5 VA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 2-10 VDC S1A or S2A (option) 95 seconds
GMB24-MFT 360 in-lb (40 Nm)7 VA Prop. (default 2-10 VDC) 2-10 VDC S1A or S2A (option) 150 seconds
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC ±10%
Input Impedance 100 kΩ @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500Ω @ 4-20 mA
(-SR and -MFT models)
Motor Brushless DC
Wiring 3-foot plenum cable, 18 AWG, terminals
Action Non-spring return
Rotation 95 degrees
Manual Override Pushbutton disengage
Noise <45 db @ 3' (1m); <35 db @ 3' (1m)
(LMB models)
Resolution 100 steps
Life Expectancy 100,000 cycles, 1 million repositions
Operating Temperature -22° to 122°F (-30° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH
Approvals cULus, CE, plenum rated
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 5 years
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN
LMB, NMB, AMB, GMB SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Belimo LMB, NMB, AMB, and GMB Series direct coupled
actuators provide control of dampers and valves for non-spring
return applications
. They come in two-position, tri-state (floating),
proportional, and Multi-Function Technology (MFT) models. All
actuators include a man
ual release mechanism for manual override
.
FEATURES
• Manual override for testing and verification
• Reversing switch for control flexibility
• UL, CSA, and CE approved for worldwide application
• Plenum-rated housing and cable connections
• NEMA 4 models available for outdoor locations
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
LMB, NMB, AMB, GMB Series
DIMENSIONS
Model Torque Dimensions
Maximum Shaft
Diameter
Minimum Shaft
Length
Enclosure
Rating
Weight
LMB 45 in-lb, (5 Nm) 2.3"H x 2.6"W x 7.4"L (5.9 x 6.6 x 18.9 cm) 0.75 in (1.9 cm) 1.8" (4.5 cm)
NEMA 2 (IP54)
UL94-5V
1.0 lb (0.5 kg)
NMB 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 2.4"H x 3.2"W x 7.7"L (6.1 x 8.0 x 19.6 cm) 1.05" (2.7 cm) 2.4" (6.0 cm)
NEMA 2 (IP54)
UL94-5V
1.65 lb (.75 kg)
NMB-N4 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 4.9"H x 5.3"W x 10.7"L (12.4 x 13.4 x 27.1 cm) 1.05" (2.7 cm) 2.4" (6.0 cm)
NEMA 4/4X
(IP66/IP67)
3.8 lb (1.7 kg)
AMB 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 2.5"H x 3.5"W x 8.3"L (6.3 x 8.8 x 21.1 cm) 1.05" (2.7 cm) 2.2" (5.6 cm)
NEMA 2 (IP54)
UL94-5V
2.2 lb (1.0 kg)
AMB-N4 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 4.9"H x 5.3"W x 10.7"L (12.4 x 13.4 x 27.1 cm) 1.05" (2.7 cm) 2.2" (5.6 cm)
NEMA 4/4X
(IP66/IP67)
4.4 lb (2.0 kg)
GMB 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 2.9"H x 4.6"W x 9.0"L (7.3 x 11.9 x 23.0 cm) 1.05" (2.7 cm) 2.4" (6.0 cm)
NEMA 2 (IP54)
UL94-5V
3.0 lb (1.1kg)

40. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 12flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
LMB24-3, AMB24-3, GMB24-3
Two-position
123
++
24 VAC/VDC or 120 VAC
(–) (+)
COM
Wire number
Control
switch
Tri-state
control
123
LMB24-3, AMB24-3, GMB24-3
Tri-state
++
24 VAC/VDC or 120 VAC
(–)(+)
COM
Wire number
LMB24-SR, NMB24-SR, AMB24-SR, GMB24-SR
4-20 mA, 2-10 VDC
(–)
(+)
(–)
(+)
Line
voltage
1 Blk
2 Red
3 Wht
4 Grn
Common
+ Hot
Input
2-10V Output
2-10 VDC
feedback signal
4-20 mA
control signal
500
24 VAC Transformer
LR
*Resistor is 500Ω, 1/4 wa tt
ZG-R01, required fo r 4-20 mA, leav e out for 2-10 VDC
*
AMB24-SR, GMB24-SR
Modulating (2-10 VDC) with slave actuator
Wire number123
Signal common
2-10 VDC signal
24 VAC/VDC
~COM
Y
~COM Y
Slave
Parallel connection of four motors is
possible. No more than 2 GMB motors
on the same shaft.
P1000A/S1A/S2A
for GM, AM, NM, and LM Motors (add-on auxiliary functions)
1
1
P1
P2
P3
P1000A
0
10
S1A/S2A
N.C.
S1A
and
S2A
S2A only
1 kΩ
1 W
potentiometer
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
Meets cULus and CSA
requirements without
the need of an electrical
ground connection.
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S1
MFT Function Codes
Signal
2-10 VDC
0-10 VDC
0-5 VDC
5-10 VDC
2-6 VDC
6-10 VDC
PWM
0.59 - 2.95 sec
PWM
0.02 - 5.00 sec
Floating
Two-positon
Code
A01
A02
A07
A09
A16
A17
W01
W02
F01
J2
Feedback
2-10 VDC
0-10 VDC
2-10 VDC
2-10 VDC
2-10 VDC
2-10 VDC
2-10 VDC
2-10 VDC
2-10 VDC
2-10 VDC
WIRING
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN
LMB, NMB, AMB, GMB SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LMB24-3 Non-spring return 45 in-lb (5 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position/tri-state control
LMB24-3-S Non-spring return 45 in-lb (5 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position/tri-state control, aux. switch
LMB24-3-T Non-spring return 45 in-lb (5 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position/tri-state control, terminals
LMB24-MFT Non-spring return 45 in-lb (5 Nm), configurable control
LMB24-MFT-C Non-spring return 45 in-lb (5 Nm), configurable control, pre-configured
LMB24-SR Non-spring return 45 in-lb (5 Nm), 2-10 VDC proportional control
LMB24-SR-T Non-spring return 45 in-lb (5 Nm), 2-10 VDC proportional control, terminals
NMB24-3 Non-spring return 90 in-lb (10 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position/tri-state control
NMB24-3-T-N4 Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position/tri-state control
NMB24-MFT Non-spring return 90 in-lb (10 Nm), configurable control
NMB24-MFT-C Non-spring return 90 in-lb (10 Nm), configurable control, pre-configured
NMB24-SR Non-spring return 90 in-lb (10 Nm), 2-10 VDC proportional control
NMB24-SR-T-N4 Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), 2-10 VDC proportional, terminals, NEMA 4 enclosure
AMB24-3 Non-spring return 180 in-lb (20 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position/tri-state control
AMB24-3-S Non-spring return 180 in-lb (20 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position/tri-state control, aux. switch
AMB24-3-T-N4 Non-spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-pos./tri-state, NEMA 4 enclosure
AMB24-3-T-N4H Non-spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-pos./tri-state, NEMA 4 encl. w/heater
AMB24-MFT Non-spring return 180 in-lb (20 Nm), configurable control
AMB24-MFT-C Non-spring return 180 in-lb (20 Nm), configurable control, pre-configured
AMB24-SR Non-spring return 180 in-lb (20 Nm), 2-10 VDC proportional control
AMB24-SR-T-N4 Non-spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), 2-10 VDC proportional control, NEMA 4 enclosure
AMB24-SR-T-N4H Non-spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), 2-10 VDC proportional control, NEMA 4 encl. w/heater
GMB24-3 Non-spring return 360 in-lb (40 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position/tri-state control
GMB24-MFT Non-spring return 360 in-lb (40 Nm), configurable control
GMB24-MFT-C Non-spring return 360 in-lb (40 Nm), configurable control, pre-configured
GMB24-SR Non-spring return 360 in-lb (40 Nm), 2-10 VDC proportional control
RELATED PRODUCTS
P1000A Optional 1000Ω feedback pot for LMB, NMB, AMB, GMB
S1A Optional SPDT auxiliary switch for LMB, NMB, AMB, GMB
S2A Optional dual SPDT auxiliary switch for LMB, NMB, AMB, GMB
ZG-LMSA Shaft extension for 1/2" diameter shafts, 3.8" length, for LMB actuators
ZG-NMSA-1-K Shaft extension for 1/2" diameter shaft, 2" length
ZG-R01 500Ω, 1/2W, 1% resistor

41. WE MAKE IT EASY.
flfi 13ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA
13ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1 March 2014
Supply Voltage
MEP-4xx5 Series 100 to 240 VAC
MEP-4000 (all others) 24 VDC/VAC (+20%/–15%),
Class 2 only
MEP-7000 Series 24 VDC/VAC (+20%/–15%),
Class 2 only or 22-35 VDC
Supply VA
MEP-4000 Series 2 VA Tri-state models, 4 VA
Proportional models
MEP-750X Series 6 VA
MEP-755X Series 8 VA
MEP-780X Series 8 VA
MEP-785X Series 10 VA
Control Signal Floating, Proportional, 2-Position
Wiring 14-22 AWG, 12-26 AWG
Wiring Terminations Screw Terminals, Cable Pigtail
Conduit Connection Yes, dual
Enclosure Flame-retardant plastic
Operating Torque 25 in-lbs to 320 in-lbs
Rotation 95 degrees
Drive Time 25 to 90 seconds
Operating Temperature -22 to 131°F (-30 to 55°C)
Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing
Maximum Shaft Diameter
MEP-4000 Series
1/4" to 5/8" round, 1/4" to 7/16" square

MEP-7000 Series
3/8" to 1.05" round, 5/16" to 5/8"
square
Noise Level Less than 45 dbA maximum at 1 meter
Approvals MEP-4000 Series
SASO PCP Registration KSA
R-103260; UL 873 Temperature Indicating
and Regulating Equipment; FCC Class
B, Part 15, Subpart B and complies with Canadian
ICES-003 Class B (MEP-4xx4 models
only are Class A)

MEP-7000 Series
UL 873 Temperature Indicating and
Regulating Equipment; FCC Class B, Part 15
Dimensions MEP-4003
5.3"H x 2.6"W x 1.8"D
(13.5 x 6.6 x 4.6 cm)
MEP-4003V 5.3"H (w/o handle extended) x 2.6"W x
2.59"D (13.5 x 6.6 x 6.6 cm)
MEP-4002V 5.3"H (w/o handle extended) x 2.6"W x
3.28"D (13.5 x 6.6 x 8.32 cm)
MEP-4201, 4501, 4901 6.0"H x 2.8"W x 3.4"D
(15.2 x 7.14 x 8.65 cm)
MEP-4000 (all others) 5.3"H x 2.6"W x 2.5"D
(13.5 x 6.6 x 6.35 cm)
MEP-7000 Series 10.1"H x 5"W x 3"D
(25.7 x 12.7x 7.6 cm)
Weight
MEP-4000 Series 1.1 lb (0.49 kg)
MEP-7x0x 5 lb (2.27 kg)
MEP-7x5x 5.4 lb (2.45 kg)
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The MEP-4000 Series are compact but powerful direct-coupled
actuators which provide tri-state or proportional control for small
dampers or valves in HVAC systems
. A minimum torque of 40
(MEP-40xx) or 80 (MEP-48xx) in-lbs. is available over the 95°
angular rotation. The MEP-7000 Series are powerful, efficient,
durable, direct-coupled actuators which also provide tri-state or proportional control for large control air dampers or valves in HVAC systems
. A minimum torque of 120, 180, or 320 in-lbs. is
a
vailable over the 94° angular rotation
. Capacitor-driven fail-safe
models provide efficient operation with switch-selectable fail direction
.
FEATURES
• Pr •
Switch-selectable feedback on selected models
• Fully adjustable, built-in auxiliary switch on selected
models
• Removable terminals and removable 1/2" NPS conduit
fitting (except the MEP-4003)
• Direct mounting to standard shaft sizes
• Gear disengagement button
• Adjustable mechanical end stop
• Valve body quick-mount option on MEP- 4002V/4003V
• A patent-pending noise reducer provides whisper-quiet
operation on the MEP-4201, 4501, 4901 series
• Fast rotation—less than 35 seconds for 90° with 25 or 45 in-lb. of torque or less than 45 seconds with 90 in-lb. torque on the MEP-4201, 4501, 4901 series
KMC ACTUATORS
MEP SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
MEP-4252
MEP-7852

42. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 14flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 14flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1 March 2014
KMC ACTUATORS
MEP SERIES
MEP-4x01/4x13/4x21 Wiring Detail
POWER
SUPPLY~
–
–
+
CONTRO L
SIGNAL
–
+
FEEDBA CK
OUT
MEP-4x02/4x22 Wiring Detail
CW
COM
CCW
FEEDBA CK POT:
(MEP-4013/4813 ONLY ) –
~POWER
SUPPLY
–
~
POWER SUPPLY
STRAIN RELIEF
MEP-4003 (Only) Wiring Detail
24 VAC/VDC
Power In
Feedback
Potentiometer
(MEP-7xx3 only)
24 VAC/VDC
Power In
24 VAC/VDC
Power In 0–10 VDC Control Signal
4–20 mA Control Signal
0–5 or 0–10 VDC Feedback Signal
Control Signal Common
(MEP-7x52 Only)
Feedback
Potentiometer
(MEP-7xx3 only)
CW
CCW
CW
CCW
MEP-7xx2 Wiring (Proportional)
MEP-7x01/7x03 Wiring (Tri-State, Non-Fail-Safe)
MEP-7x51/7x53 (Normal) Wiring
(Tri-State, Fail-Safe)

MEP-7x51/7x53 Two-Position Wiring
(Tri-State, Fail-Safe)

24 VAC/VDC
Power In
21
Switch/Contact Jumper
Feedback
Potentiometer
(MEP-7xx3 only)
1 2
WIRING

43. WE MAKE IT EASY.
15ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA
flfi 15ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1 March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION, NON-FAIL-SAFE MODELS
KMC ACTUATORS
MEP SERIES
MEP-4xx2
Proportional Contro l
–
–
–
~/+
+
Control Signal
2–10 VDC
Power Supply
24 VAC/VDC
OUT (Green)
2–10 IN (White)
T
COM (Black)
~24 V (Red)
+Feedback Output
1–5 or 2–10 VDC
MEP-4x51
Tri-State Floating Point Control
–
Power Supply
24 VAC/VDC
CW
CCW
T
COM
~24 V~/+
–
Switch
Position
12
MEP-4x51
2-Position Control, CW Leg
–
Power Supply
24 VAC/VDCContact Position:
Closed = CW Rotation
CW
CCW
T
COM
~24 V
~/+
Open = CCW Rotation
Switch Position
12
MEP-4x51
2-Position Control, CCW Leg
–
Power Supply
24 VAC/VDCContact Position:
Closed = CCW Rotation
CW CCW
T
COM
~24 V
~/+
Open = CW Rotation
Switch Position
12
MEP-4xx4
Two-Position 24 VAC/VDC
MEP-4xx5
Two-Position 100–240 VA C
Line/Hot
Neutral
(L1) Neutral (Black)
(L2) Line (Red)
100–240 VAC Power
NOTE: Double Insulated. Meets UL
requirements without the need
of an electrical ground connection.
–
Power Supply
24 VAC/VDC
TCOM (Black)
~24 V (Red)
~/+
WIRING (continued)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MEP-4001 Non-Failsafe, 40 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state
MEP-4002 Non-Failsafe, 40 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional
MEP-4003 Non-Failsafe, 40 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state 90 second no cover
MEP-4013 Non-Failsafe, 40 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state w/potentiometer
MEP-4021 Non-Failsafe, 40 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state w/auxilliary switch
MEP-4022 Non-Failsafe, 40 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional w/auxilliary switch
MEP-4201 Non-Failsafe, 25 in-lb, 24 VAC/VDC Tri-state or 2 position
MEP-4501 Non-Failsafe, 40 in-lb, 24 VAC/VDC Tri-state or 2 position
MEP-4801 Non-Failsafe, 80 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state
MEP-4802 Non-Failsafe, 80 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional
MEP-4813 Non-Failsafe, 80 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state w/potentiometer
MEP-4821 Non-Failsafe, 80 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state w/ auxilliary switch
MEP-4822 Non-Failsafe, 80 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional w/ auxilliary switch
MEP-4901 Non-Failsafe, 90 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state or 2 position
MEP-7501 Non-Failsafe, 180 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state
MEP-7502 Non-Failsafe, 180 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional
MEP-7503 Non-Failsafe, 180 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state w/potentiometer
MEP-7801 Non-Failsafe, 320 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state
MEP-7802 Non-Failsafe, 320 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional
MEP-7803 Non-Failsafe, 320 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state w/potentiometer

44. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 16flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA
flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 16flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1 March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION, ELECTRONIC FAIL-SAFE MODELS
KMC ACTUATORS
MEP SERIES
ACCESSORIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CTE
-5202
Proportional thermostat (MEP-4000 series)
HLO
-4001
Crank arm kit (MEP-4000 series)
HCO-1151 Weather shield kit (MEP-4000 series)
HMO-4001 non-rotation “t” bracket (MEP-4000 series)
HMO-4002 Replacement non-rotation bracket (MEP-4000 series)
HMO-4004 Non-rotation bracket kit for VEB series ball valves (MEP-4000 series)
HPO-5074 Ball valve to actuator quick mount kit for MEP-400xv only
HPO-5073 Ball valve to actuator repair kit for standard (MEP-4000 series)
CME-7001 Rotary auxilliary cam switch-single (MEP-7000 series)
CME-7002 Rotary auxilliary cam switch-double (MEP-7000 series)
HCO-1152 Weather shield kit (MEP-7000 series)
HLO-1020 Crank arm kit (MEP-7000 series)
HMO-4535 Replacement non-rotation bracket (MEP-7000 series)
HMO-4536 Adjustable end stop kit (MEP-7000 series)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MEP-4251 Failsafe, 25 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state
MEP-4252 Failsafe, 25 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional
MEP-4254 Failsafe, 25 in-lb, 24 VAC, 2-position
MEP-4255 Failsafe, 25 in-lb, 100-240 VAC, 2-position
MEP-4272 Failsafe, 25 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional w/auxilliary switch
MEP-4274 Failsafe, 25 in-lb, 24 VAC, 2-position w/auxilliary switch
MEP-4275 Failsafe, 25 in-lb, 100-240 VAC2-position w/auxilliary switch
MEP-4551 Failsafe, 45 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state
MEP-4552 Failsafe, 45 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional
MEP-4554 Failsafe, 45 in-lb, 24 VAC, 2-position
MEP-4555 Failsafe, 45 in-lb, 100-240 VAC, 2-position
MEP-4572 Failsafe, 45 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional w/auxilliary switch
MEP-4574 Failsafe, 45 in-lb, 24 VAC, 2-position w/auxilliary switch
MEP-4575 Failsafe, 45 in-lb, 100-240 VAC, 2-position w/auxilliary switch
MEP-4951 Failsafe, 90 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state
MEP-4952 Failsafe, 90 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional
MEP-4954 Failsafe, 90 in-lb, 24 VAC, 2-position
MEP-4955 Failsafe, 90 in-lb, 100-240 VAC, 2-position
MEP-4972 Failsafe, 90 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional w/2 auxilliary switches
MEP-4974 Failsafe, 90 in-lb, 24 VAC, 2-position w/2 auxilliary switches
MEP-4975 Failsafe, 90 in-lb, 100-240 VAC, 2-position w/2 auxilliary switches
MEP-7551 Failsafe, 180 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state
MEP-7552 Failsafe, 180 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional
MEP-7553 Failsafe, 180 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state w/potentiometer
MEP-7851 Failsafe, 320 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state
MEP-7852 Failsafe, 320 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional
MEP-7853 Failsafe, 320 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state w/potentiometer

45. WE MAKE IT EASY.
flfi 17ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC (except
MN6120, MN6134)
Motor Brushless DC; Synchronous with
magnetic clutch (floating 175,
300 in-lb)
Wiring Enclosed terminals
Rotation 95° ± 3°
Drive Time 95 seconds
Manual Override Disengage button
Noise
44, 88 in-lb <35 dB @ 3' (1m);
175, 300 in-lb <40 dB @ 3' (1m)
Resolution 400 steps
Life Expectancy 60,000 cycles, 1 million repositions
Operating Temperature -5° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH
Approvals UL, cUL, CE, C-tick, plenum rated,
E4996
Warranty 5 years
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN
MN SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MN Series actuators are non-spring return direct
coupled actuators from Honeywell. They are designed
and tested to provide reliable non-spring return control for dampers and valves that require up to 300 in-lb (34 Nm) of torque
. The MN Series is powered by 24 VAC/VDC and has
an excellent feature set that combines flexibility and simplicity.
FEATURES
• Adjustable mechanical range stops
• Auto adapt on modulating models
• Internal or field-installable auxiliary switches
• Signal mode switch
• Adjustable zero and span
• Mechanical override declutch
• Detachable wiring cover
• Consistent wiring
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
MN6105A1011, 44 in-lb MN7510A2209, 88 in-lb
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
MN6120A1002, 175 in-lb MN7234A2008, 300 in-lb
Model Torque Supply VA Control Signal Input Impedance Feedback Auxiliary Switch
MN6105A1011 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 5.0 VA Two-position, floating None SW2 add-on
MN6105A1201 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 5.0 VA Two-position, floating None
Internal, dual SPDT, class
II only
MN7505A2001 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 5.0 VA Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA
100 kΩ @ 0/2-10 VDC;
500Ω @ 4-20 mA
0/2-10 VDC SW2 add-on
MN7505A2209 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 5.0 VA Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA
100 kΩ @ 0/2-10 VDC;
500Ω @ 4-20 mA
0/2-10 VDC
Internal, dual SPDT, class
II only
MN6110A1003 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 5.0 VA Two-position, floating None SW2 add-on
MN6110A1201 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 5.0 VA Two-position, floating None
Internal, dual SPDT, class
II only
MN7510A2001 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 5.0 VA Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA
100 kΩ @ 0/2-10 VDC;
500Ω @ 4-20 mA
0/2-10 VDC SW2 add-on
MN7510A2209 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 5.0 VA Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA
100 kΩ @ 0/2-10 VDC;
500Ω @ 4-20 mA
0/2-10 VDC
Internal, dual SPDT, class
II only
MN6120A1002 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 6.0 VA Two-position, floating None SW2 add-on
MN6120A1200 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 6.0 VA Two-position, floating None
Internal, dual SPDT, class
II only
MN7220A2007 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 6.0 VA Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA
100 kΩ @ 0/2-10 VDC;
500Ω @ 4-20 mA
0/2-10 VDC SW2 add-on
MN7220A2205 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 6.0 VA Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA
100 kΩ @ 0/2-10 VDC;
500Ω @ 4-20 mA
0/2-10 VDC
Internal, dual SPDT, class
II only
MN6134A1003 300 in-lb (34 Nm) 9.0 VA Two-position, floating None SW2 add-on
MN7234A2008 300 in-lb (34 Nm) 8.0 VA Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA
100 kΩ @ 0/2-10 VDC;
500Ω @ 4-20 mA
0/2-10 VDC SW2 add-on

46. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 18flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
24 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
MN61xx
Two-position Control
MN61xx, MN75xx
Floating Control
Floating
controller
2
3
4
2
3
4
5
MN75xx/72xx
Proportional Control
0 or 2-10 VDC or 0 or 4-20 mA Signal*
(ZG-R01 500flfiresistor required for 4-20 mA signal)
1
2
3 +
–
+
–
0 or 2-10 VDC Feedback
0 or 2-10 VDC or
0 or 4-20 mA with
500flfiresistor
 
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
C
N.C.
N.O.
C
N.C.
N.O.
CCW switch
CW switch
Dir
Service/Off
Rev
+
+
–
+
–
Dir
Service/Off
Rev
Dir Service/Off Rev
2... 10 V
0... 10 V
10... 0 V
10... 2 V
SW2 Au xiliary Switch Kit
Switch ratings: Adjustable between 5 and 85 degrees, 24
VAC/VDC, 5A resistive, 3A inductive
Models with internal switches have same contact ratings
WIRING
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN
MN SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MN6105A1011 Non-spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position/tri-state control
MN6105A1201 Non-spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position/tri-state, aux switches
MN7505A2001 Non-spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), proportional/two-pos/tri-state control
MN7505A2209 Non-spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), proportional/two-pos/tri-state, aux sw.
MN6110A1003 Non-spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position and tri-state control
MN6110A1201 Non-spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position/tri-state, aux switches
MN7510A2001 Non-spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), proportional/two-pos/tri-state control
MN7510A2209 Non-spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), proportional/two-pos/tri-state control, aux sw.
MN6120A1002 Non-spring return, 175 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position and tri-state control
MN6120A1200 Non-spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), two-position/tri-state control, aux switches
MN7220A2007 Non-spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), proportional/two-pos/tri-state control
MN7220A2205 Non-spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), proportional/two-pos/tri-state, aux sw.
MN6134A1003 Non-spring return, 300 in-lb (34 Nm), two-position and tri-state control
MN7234A2008 Non-spring return, 300 in-lb (34 Nm), proportional control
Model Torque Dimensions
Maximum Shaft
Diameter
Minimum Shaft
Length
Weight
MNxx05 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 2.4"H x 2.6"W x 5.3"L (6.2 x 6.6 x 13.4 cm) 0.63" (1.6 cm) 1.62" (4.1 cm) 1.0 lb (0.4 kg)
MNxx10 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 2.4"H x 2.6"W x 5.3"L (6.2 x 6.6 x 13.4 cm) 0.63" (1.6 cm) 1.62" (4.1 cm) 1.0 lb (0.4 kg)
MNxx20 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 3.9"H x 3.6"W x 8.8"L (10.0 x 9.2 x 22.3 cm) 1.06 in (2.7 cm) 0.87" (2.2 cm) 3.2 lb (1.45 kg)
MNxx34 300 in-lb (34 Nm) 3.9"H x 3.6"W x 8.8"L (10.0 x 9.2 x 22.3 cm) 1.06 in (2.7 cm) 0.87" (2.2 cm) 3.2 lb (1.45 kg)
ACCESSORIES
32004254-003 Replacement shaft coupler for KA-301, MNxx34
50001194-001 Universal surface mount bracket with crank arm and 1/2" shaft
SW2 2X/SPDT/AUX SWTCH/KA/KAS/1000-X
ZG-R01 500Ω, 1/2W, 1% resistor
DIMENSIONS

47. WE MAKE IT EASY.
flfi 19ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Model Torque Supply VA Control Signal
Input
Impedance
Feedback
Auxiliary
Switch
Drive Time
GDE131.1P 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 2.3 VA Two-position, floating
None, order
GDE132.1P
None, order
GDE136.1P
90 seconds
GDE161.1P 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 3.3 VA Proportional 0 to 10 VDC 100 kΩ None
None, order
GDE166.1P
90 seconds
GAP191.1P 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 28 VA
Two-position, floating,
proportional 0/2-10 VDC
100 kΩ 0-10 VDC
None, order
GAP196.1P
2 seconds
GLB131.1P 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 2.3 VA Two-position, floating
None, order
GLB132.1P
None, order
GLB136.1P
125 seconds
GLB161.1P 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 3.3 VA Proportional 0 to 10 VDC 100 kΩ None
None, order
GLB166.1P
125 seconds
GEB131.1P 132 in-lb (15 Nm) 3.3 VA Two-position, floating
None, order
GEB132.1U
None, order
GEB136.1P
125 seconds
GEB161.1P 132 in-lb (15 Nm) 5.0 VA Proportional 0 to 10 VDC 100 kΩ None
None, order
GEB164.1P
125 seconds
GBB131.1P 177 in-lb (20 Nm) 7.0 VA Two-position, floating
None, order
GBB132.1P
None, order
GBB136.1P
150 seconds
GBB161.1P 177 in-lb (20 Nm) 8.0 VA Proportional 0 to 10 VDC 100 kΩ None
None, order
GBB166.1P
150 seconds
GIB131.1P 310 in-lb (35 Nm) 7.0 VA Two-position, floating
None, order
GIB132.1P
None, order
GIB136.1P
150 seconds
GIB161.1P 310 in-lb (35 Nm) 8.0 VA Proportional 0 to 10 VDC 100 kΩ None
None, order
GIB166.1P
150 seconds
Supply Voltage 20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz
GAP Series 24 VAC/VDC, ±20%, 50/60 Hz
Motor Brushless DC
Wiring 3" (0.9 m) AWG 18 plenum-rated
cable
Action DA/RA wire connections (2-pos,
floating), DA/RA switch selectable
(proportional)
Rotation 95°
Manual Override Disengage button
Noise <45 db @ 3" (1m), (except GAP
Series)
Life Expectancy 60,000 cycles, 1.5 million repositions
GAP Series 100,000 full stroke cycles, 7,000,000
repositions
Operating Temperature -25° to 130°F (-32° to 55°C)

GAP Series
0° to 122°F (-18° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing
Approvals UL, cUL, CE, plenum rated, E35198
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
Siemens GDE, GLB, GEB, GBB, GIB, and GAP Series direct coupled, non-spring return actuators provide actuation for a complete range of HVAC non-spring return damper applications, from terminal units to inlet vane dampers and more
. They range in torque from 44 in-lb (5 Nm), handling
approximately 11 sq ft of damper area, to 310 in-lb (35 Nm), handling approximately 77 sq ft of damper area
. These
actuators are available in all standard control signal types and offer a wide variety of options and accessories
.
FEATURES
• Self-centering shaft coupling
• Brushless motor technology on all models
• Rugged, lightweight housing
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
GBB GEB GDE
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN
GBB, GDE, GEB, GIB, GLB, GAP SERIES
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS

48. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 20flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN
GBB, GDE, GEB, GIB, GLB, GAP SERIES
1
L1
L2
24 VAC
2
8+
–
G
GO
Y
(red)
Isolation Class 2
24 VAC transformer.
Isolate secondary
from ground.
Analog
controller
0-10 VDC
feedback
(black)
(gray)
9U(pink)
GDE16x, GLB16x, GBB16x, GIB16x, GAP19x
0-10 VDC Control
M
GAP19x
2-Position Floating Control
(for 2-position, eliminate
connection 8 (gray))
1
L1
L2
24 VAC
2
8+
–
G
GO
Y
(red)
Isolation Class 2
24 VAC transformer.
Isolate secondary
from ground.
Analog
controller
0-10 VDC
feedback
(black)
(gray)
9U(pink)
M
6
L1
L2
24 VAC
1
7
Y1
G
Y2
(violet)
Isolation Class 2
24 VAC transformer.
Isolate secondary
from ground.
Floating
controller
(red)
(orange)
GDE13x, GLB13x, GBB13x, GIB13x
Floating Control
M
6
L1
L2
24 VAC
1
7
Y1
G
Y2
(violet)
Isolation Class 2
24 VAC transformer.
Isolate secondary
from ground.
Two-position switch
open = full clockwise
closed = full counterclockwise
(red)
(orange)
GBB17x, GIB17x
Two-position Control with Floating Control Actuator
M
1
24 VAC
24 VDC
OR
2
7
G
GO
Y1
(red)
Floating
controller
(black)
(gray)8Y 2
(orange)
M
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
GDE131.1P Non-spring return 44 in-lb (5 Nm), tri-state control
GDE161.1P Non-spring return 44 in-lb (5 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control
GAP191.1P Non-spring return 53 in-lb (6 Nm), 2-position, floating or proportional control
GLB131.1P Non-spring return 88 in-lb (10 Nm), tri-state control
GLB161.1P Non-spring return 88 in-lb (10 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control
GEB131.1U Non-spring return 132 in-lb (15 Nm), tri-state control
GEB161.1P Non-spring return 132 in-lb (15 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control
GBB131.1P Non-spring return 177 in-lb (20 Nm), tri-state control
GBB161.1P Non-spring return 177 in-lb (20 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control
GIB131.1P Non-spring return 310 in-lb (20 Nm), tri-state control
GIB161.1P Non-spring return 310 in-lb (35 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control
DIMENSIONS
ACCESSORIES PAGE
ASC77.2U Auxiliary switch kit (DPDT) for GIB, GBB, GEB actuators
ASK71.11 Combined foot mount/frame mount kit for GEB/GMA actuators
ASK71.1U Floor mount kit for GCA/GBB/GIB actuators
ASK71.2U Frame mount kit for GCA/GBB/GIB actuators
ASK71.4 Linear stroke kit for GEB/GMA actuators
ASK71.6 Universal mounting kit w/ball joints and crank arm, for GDE, GLB
ASK75.1U Weather shield for GBB/GIB/GCA actuators
ASK75.3U Weather shield for GEB/GMA actuators
ASK76.1U 1/2" conduit adapter for GDE, GLB
ZG-R01 500Ω, 1/2W, 1% resistor 8
Model Torque Dimensions
Maximum Shaft
Diameter
Minimum Shaft
Length
Enclosure
Rating
Weight
GDE 44 in-lb (5 Nm)
2.4”H x 2.8”W x 5.4”L
(6.0 x 7.0 x 13.7 cm)
0.63” (1.6 cm) 0.75” (2.0 cm) NEMA 2 (IP54) 1.0 lb (0.4 kg)
GAP 53 in-lb (6 Nm)
2.4”H x 3.3”W x 8.4”L
(6.0 x 8.3 x 21.2 cm)
0.75” (2.0 cm) 0.75” (2.0 cm) NEMA 1 (IP54) 3.4 lb (1.5 kg)
GLB 88 in-lb (10 Nm)
2.4”H x 2.8”W x 5.4”L
(6.0 x 7.0 x 13.7 cm)
0.63” (1.6 cm) 0.75” (2.0 cm) NEMA 2 (IP54) 1.0 lb (0.4 kg)
GEB 132 in-lb (15 Nm)
2.4”H x 3.3”W x 8.4”L
(6.0 x 8.3 x 21.2 cm)
0.75” (2.0 cm) 0.75” (2.0 cm) NEMA 1 (IP54) 2.8 lb (1.3 kg)
GBB 177 in-lb (20 Nm)
2.8”H x 3.9”W x 11.8”L
(7.2 x 10.0 x 30.0 cm)
1.0” (2.6 cm) 0.75” (2.0 cm) NEMA 2 (IP40) 4.8 lb (2.2 kg)
GIB 310 in-lb (35 Nm)
2.8”H x 3.9”W x 11.8”L
(7.2 x 10.0 x 30.0 cm)
1.0” (2.6 cm) 0.75” (2.0 cm) NEMA 2 (IP40) 4.8 lb (2.2 kg)

49. WE MAKE IT EASY.
flfi 21ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Motor
M9104, 06 Synchronous with magnetic clutch
M9108, 16, 24 32 Brushless DC
Wiring
M9104 48" (1.2 m) plenum leads
M9106 0.25" (6 mm) spade terminals
M9108, 16, 24, 32 Screw teminals 22-14 AWG
Action DA/RA wiring connections (2-pos.,
floating); Jumper selection
(proportional)
Rotation 90°
Manual Override Disengage button
Noise
M9104, 06 <35 dB @ 3" (1m)
M9108, 16, 24, 32 <45 dB @ 3" (1m)
Life Expectancy 100,000 cycles, 2.5 million
repositions
Operating Temperature -4° to 122°F (-20° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 90% RH
Approvals CE, cULus, C-tick, CSA (varies by
model)
Warranty 5 years
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN
M9100 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Johnson Controls M9100 Series non-spring return actuators offer consistent designs and operating features to make installation easy, and they have many built-in features to minimize the need for add-on options
. Manufactured in an
ISO-9001 facility, these actuators are high quality, reliable, and long lasting
.
FEATURES
• Manual override
• Electronic stall detection
• Travel indicator
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
M9108, M9116,
M9124, M9132
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
M9104
M9106
Model Torque
Supply
VA
Control Signal Input Impedance Feedback
Auxiliary
Switch
Drive Time
M9104-AGA-2S 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 2.1 VA Two-position, floating None None 60 seconds
M9104-GGA-2S 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 3.6 VA Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
100k
Ω (VDC input); 500Ω
(mA input)
None None 60 seconds
M9106-AGA-2 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 2.5 VA Two-position, floating None
No, order -AGC
model
60 seconds
M9106-GGA-2 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 3.2 VA Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
100k
Ω (VDC input); 500Ω
(mA input)
0/2-10 VDC None 60 seconds
M9108-AGA-2 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 6.5 VA Two-position, floating
No, order
-ACD, -AGE
No, order -AGC
model
25-50 seconds
M9108-GGA-2 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 7.5 VA Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
100k
Ω (VDC input); 500Ω
(mA input)
0/2-10 VDC
No, order -GGC
model
25-50 seconds
M9116-AGA-2 140 in-lb (16 Nm) 6.5 VA Two-position, floating
No, order
-ACD, -AGE
No, order -AGC
model
70-115 seconds
M9116-GGA-2 140 in-lb (16 Nm) 7.5 VA Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
100k
Ω (VDC input); 500Ω
(mA input)
0/2-10 VDC None 70-115 seconds
M9124-AGA-2 210 in-lb (24 Nm) 6.5 VA Two-position, floating
No, order
-ACD, -AGE
No, order -AGC
model
115-175 seconds
M9124-GGA-2 210 in-lb (24 Nm) 7.5 VA Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
100k
Ω (VDC input); 500Ω
(mA input)
0/2-10 VDC
No, order -GGC
model
115-175 seconds
M9132-AGA-2 280 in-lb (32 Nm) 6.5 VA Two-position, floating None None 115-205 seconds
M9132-GGA-2 280 in-lb (32 Nm) 7.5 VA Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
100k
Ω (VDC input); 500Ω
(mA input)
0/2-10 VDC None 115-205 seconds

50. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 22flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
M9106-GGA
Proportional
FB + 24
VDC
mACOM
0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC
24 VAC
0-10V
0-20 mA
FB
CCW
M9106-AGA
Tri-state
CCWCCW
24 VAC
COM
CW
COM
24 VAC
BLK RED ORG
CW CCW
M9104-AGA-2S
Tri-state
FB
0-10 VDC
ORGGRY BLK
VDC24VCOM
RED
24V
0-10 VDC
M9104-GGA-2S
Proportional
0-20 VDC, 2-20 VDC
0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC
0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
COM COMN/C
FB
M9108
M9116, M9124, M9132 (GGA)
Proportional
12 345 6
M9108
M9116, M9124, M9132 (AGA)
Tri-state/
Two-position
12 3
24 VAC/VDC
CW CCW
24
VAC/VDC
Terminal Description
4 Current input
5 Voltage input
6 Feedback * Provide constant power to terminal 2
for two-position control.
*
WIRING
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN
M9100 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
M9104-A
GA-2S
Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), two-position and tri-state control
M9104-GGA-2S Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control
M9106-A
GA-2
Non-spring return 53 in-lb (6 Nm), two-position and tri-state control
M9106-A
GC-2
Non-spring return 53 in-lb (6 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, aux. switches
M9106-GGA-2 Non-spring return 53 in-lb (6 Nm), 0-10VDC proportional control
M9108-A
GA-2
Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), two-position and tri-state control
M9108-A
GC-2
Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, aux. switches
M9108-A
GD-2
Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, 135Ω feedback
M9108-AGE-2 Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, 1000Ω feedback
M9108-GGA-2 Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control
M9108-GGC-2 Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control, aux. switches
M9116-A
GA-2
Non-spring return 140 in-lb (16 Nm), two-position and tri-state control
M9116-A
GC-2
Non-spring return 140 in-lb (16 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, aux. switches
M9116-A
GD-2
Non-spring return 140 in-lb (16 Nm), two-position/tri-state, aux. switches, 135Ω feedback
M9116-AGE-2 Non-spring return 140 in-lb (16 Nm), two-position/tri-state, aux. switches, 1000Ω feedback
M9116-GGA-2 Non-spring return 140 in-lb (16 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control
M9124-A
GA-2
Non-spring return 210 in-lb (24 Nm), two-position and tri-state control
M9124-A
GC-2
Non-spring return 210 in-lb (24 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, aux. switches
M9124-A
GD-2
Non-spring return 210 in-lb (24 Nm), two-position/tri-state, aux. switches, 135Ω feedback
M9124-AGE-2 Non-spring return 210 in-lb (24 Nm), two-position/tri-state, aux. switches, 1000Ω feedback
M9124-GGA-2 Non-spring return 210 in-lb (24 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control
M9124-GGC-2 Non-spring return 210 in-lb (24 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control, aux. switches
M9132-GGA-2 Non-spring return 280 in-lb (32 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control
M9132-AGA-2 Non-spring return 280 in-lb (32 Nm), two-position and tri-state control
Model Torque Dimensions
Maximum Shaft
Diameter
Minimum Shaft
Length
Weight
M9104-AGA 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 2.6"H x 2.8"W x 5.2"L (6.7 x 7.1 x 13.1 cm) 0.5" (1.3 cm) 1.25" (3.2 cm) 1.0 lb (0.4 kg)
M9104-GGA 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 2.6"H x 2.8"W x 5.2"L (6.7 x 7.1 x 13.1 cm) 0.5" (1.3 cm) 1.25" (3.2 cm) 1.3 lb (0.6 kg)
M9106 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 2.6"H x 4.2"W x 5.9"L (6.7 x 10.7 x 15.0 cm) 0.5" (1.3 cm) 1.75" (4.5 cm) 2.5 lb (1.0 kg)
M9108 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 2.5"H x 3.9"W x 7.1"L (6.5 x 10.0 x 18.0 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 2.25" (5.7 cm) 2.9 lb (1.3 kg)
M9116 140 in-lb (16 Nm) 2.5"H x 3.9"W x 7.1"L (6.5 x 10.0 x 18.0 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 2.25" (5.7 cm) 2.9 lb (1.3 kg)
M9124 210 in-lb (24 Nm) 2.5"H x 3.9"W x 7.1"L (6.5 x 10.0 x 18.0 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 2.25" (5.7 cm) 2.9 lb (1.3 kg)
M9132 280 in-lb (32 Nm) 2.5"H x 3.9"W x 7.1"L (6.5 x 10.0 x 18.0 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 2.25" (5.7 cm) 2.9 lb (1.3 kg)
ACCESSORIES PAGE
M9000-103 120/24 VAC, 14 VA inline transformer
M9000-151 Floor mount linkage kit
M9000-154 Jackshaft coupler, 1", for M9100 actuators
M9000-158 Tandem mount kit for M9132/M9220 actuators
ZG-R01 500Ω, 1/2W, 1% resistor 8
DIMENSIONS

51. WE MAKE IT EASY.
flfi 23ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz
MS41-6340 120 VAC 50/60 Hz
Wiring
MF4E Screw terminals
All others 24” (0.6 m) pigtails, 18 AWG
Rotation 90°
Manual Override
35, 70 in-lb Disengage button
133, 300 in-lb Crank
Resolution 100 steps
Operating Temperature
MF4E -22° to 140°F (-30° to 60°C)
All others -25° to 130°F (-32° to 55°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH
Approvals cULus, CE, C-tick (varies by model)
Warranty 5 years
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN
MF4, MS4 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MF4 and MS4 Series DuraDrive™ direct coupled,
non-spring return actuators are designed to accept tri-state
or proportional control signals from a DDC system or a
thermostat for HVAC damper applications
. Typical applications
include air handling unit dampers and inlet vanes, VAV boxes, and unitary equipment
. The actuators range in torque from 35
to 300 in-lb (4 to 34 Nm).
FEATURES
• Direct mount to round or square shaft
• Manual override on all models
• Compact, lightweight design
• Tri-state and proportional control models
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
MS41-6043
MF4E-60830MF41-6343
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model Torque Supply VA Control Signal Input Impedance Drive Time
MF4E-60430-100 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 2.0 VA Two-position, floating 90 seconds
MF41-6043 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 2.3 VA Two-position, floating 90 seconds
MS41-6043 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 3.3 VA Two-position, floating 100 kΩ 90 seconds
MF4E-60830-100 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 2.0 VA Two-position, floating 90 seconds
MF41-6083 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 2.3 VA Two-position, floating 125 seconds
MS41-6083 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 3.3 VA Two-position, floating 100 kΩ 125 seconds
MF41-6153 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 3.0 VA Two-position, floating 125 seconds
MS41-6153 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 5.0 VA Two-position, floating 100 kΩ 125 seconds
MF41-6343 300 in-lb (34 Nm) 7.0 VA Two-position, floating 145 seconds
MS41-6343 300 in-lb (34 Nm) 7.1 VA Two-position, floating 10 kΩ (2-10 VDC), 500Ω (4-20 mA) 145 seconds
MS41-6340 300 in-lb (34 Nm) 7.1 VA Two-position, floating 10 kΩ (2-10 VDC), 500Ω (4-20 mA) 145 seconds

52. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.
flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 24flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Model Torque Dimensions
Maximum Shaft
Diameter
Minimum Shaft
Length
Enclosure
Rating
Weight
MF4E-
XXXX 35 in-lb (4 Nm)
2.6"H x 3.5"W x 5.8"L
(6.9 x 8.9 x 14.8 cm)
0.5" (1.3 cm) 2.0" (5.1 cm) NEMA 1 (IP30) 3.5 lb (1.6 kg)
Mx41-6043 35 in-lb (4 Nm)
2.4"H x 2.7"W x 5.4"L
(6.1 x 6.9 x 13.7 cm)
0.63" (1.58 cm) 2.0" (5.1 cm) NEMA 2 (IP54) 1.0 lb (0.5 kg)
Mx41-6083 70 in-lb (8 Nm)
2.4"H x 2.7"W x 5.4"L
(6.1 x 6.9 x 13.7 cm)
0.63" (1.58 cm) 2.0" (5.1 cm) NEMA 2 (IP54) 1.0 lb (0.5 kg)
Mx41-6153133 in-lb (15 Nm)
2.4"H x 3.25"W x 8.4"L
(6.1 x 16. 0 x 21.3 cm)
0.75" (1.9 cm) 2.8" (7.0 cm) NEMA 1 (IP54) 2.2 lb (1.0 kg)
Mx41-6343300 in-lb (34 Nm)
4.0"H x 4.0"W x 10.8"L
(10.2 x 10.2 x 27.5 cm)
1.0" (2.5 cm) 4.7" (11.9 cm) NEMA 4 (IP56) 10.5 lb (4.8 kg)
MS41-6340300 in-lb (34 Nm)
4.0"H x 4.0"W x 10.8"L
(10.2 x 10.2 x 27.5 cm)
1.0" (2.5 cm) 4.7" (11.9 cm) NEMA 4 (IP56) 10.5 lb (4.8 kg)
Unused
(wire nut)
(red) 500fl
(white) (black)
(black/blue)
Ground
(black)
(+) In
(–) Common
MS41-6343 (300 in.-lb)
2-10 VDC Control
MS41-63432-10 VDC
controller
(+)
(–)
24 VAC
Transformer
Line
Voltage
0-10 VDC Control
24 VAC
transformer
Line
voltage
0-10 V
controller
(red)
(black)
(gray)
1 Supply
2 Neutral
8 0-10 VDC
Line
voltage
(black)
(red)
(white)
COM
500fl
+In
(green/yellow)
(black/blue)
3
(black)
Ground
24G
24H
MS41-6343
24 VAC
transformer
MS41-6343 (300 in.-lb)
4-20 mA Control
4-20 mA
(yellow/red)
24 VAC
transformer
Line
voltage
Floating Control
(red)
(violet)
(orange)
Floating
controller
1 Supply
6 CW
7 CCW
1 COM
2 CW
3 CCW
MF41-6043 (35 in.-lb)
MF41-6083 (70 in.-lb)
MF41-6153 (133 in.-lb)
MS41-6043 (35 in.-lb)
MS41-6083 (70 in.-lb)
MS41-6153 (133 in.-lb)
MF4E (35 in.-lb)
(black)
(white)
1 COM
2 CW
3 CCW
MF41-6343 (300 in.-lb)
CW and CCW as looking at
the top of the actuator.
Select DA/RA
by mounting
(turn motor ov er)
Select DA/RA
by mounting
(turn motor ov er)
DA/RA switchable
WIRING
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN
MF4, MS4 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MF4E-60430-100 Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), two-position, floating, terminals
MF41-6043 Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), tri-state control
MS41-6043 Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), proportional control
MF4E-60830-100 Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), tri-state control, terminals
MF41-6083 Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), tri-state control
MS41-6083 Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), proportional control
MF41-6153 Non-spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), tri-state control
MS41-6153 Non-spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), proportional control
MF41-6343 Non-spring return 300 in-lb (34 Nm), tri-state control
MS41-6343 Non-spring return 300 in-lb (34 Nm), proportional control
MS41-6340 Non-spring return 300 in-lb (34 Nm), proportional control, 120 VAC
ACCESSORIES
AM-756 Metric to 1/2" NPT conduit adapter for damper actuators
DIMENSIONS

53. WE MAKE IT EASY.
25ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA
25ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1 March 2014
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN
ML61XX, ML71XX SERIES
Input Signal Actuator Drive Relationship
1.50 ±0.2 VDC Actuator drives to extreme CCW position
2.00 ±0.2 VDC Actuator remains at CCW position
3.00 ±0.2 VDC Actuator leaves CCW position
10.70 ±0.7 VDC Actuator drives to extreme CW position
10.00 ±0.7 VDC Actuator remains at CW position
8.50 ±0.6 VDC Actuator leaves CW position
INPUT SIGNAL/ACTUATOR DRIVE RELATIONSHIP
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz
Control Signal Two-position, floating, proportional
0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
Auxiliary Switch NO or NC, 50 VA, 24 VAC,
Differential: 3 angular degree
minimum
Action Non-spring return
Torque 35 in-lb, 70 in-lb
Rotation CW and CCW
Noise 45-60 dBA at 1 meter maximum
Operating Temperature 20° to 125°F (-18° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH noncondensing
Stroke Selectable: 45 degree, 60 degree,
90 degree
Approvals UL Recognized: File # E4436;
Guide No. XAPX2, UL 94-5V:
meets plenum requirements, CE (select models only)
Weight
1.3 lb (0.59 kg)
DESCRIPTION
The Honeywell ML6161 and ML7161 actuators have 35 in-lb (4 Nm) torque ratings and the ML6174 and ML7174 have 70 in-lb (8 Nm) of torque
. These non-spring return actuator
families are designed to control VAV terminal unit dampers, or Honeywell ball valves
. The ML61xx models take an SPDT/
floating control signal and the ML71xx models take a 2-10 VDC (or 4-20 mA, with a 500 ohm resistor) control signal
.
FEATURES
• Superior A/C synchronous submotor for consistent
timing and long life
• Manual declutch lever for override
• Two minimum position setscrews included
• Perfect for Honeywell D690 Round Dampers
• Square shaft input only
SPECIFICATIONS
ML6161

54. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 26flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 26flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1 March 2014
ML6161 or ML6174 used with T87F in
heating-only or cooling-only application
201052B Auxiliary Switch wiring
ML7161 or ML7174 used with 2-10 VDC control
ML7161 or ML7174 used with 4-20 mA control
NOTE: See below for the 201052B Auxiliary Switch wiring.
EXTERNAL
SWITCH
R
W
Y
T87F
R8222
RED COM
BLUE CW
WHITE CCW
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
2
ML6161, ML6174
SPDT
CONTROL
ON/OFF CONTROL
RED COM
BLUE CW
WHITE CCW
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
1
4
2
3
2
3
4
ML6161, ML6174
201052B
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
2-10 VDC CONTROLLER
ML7161, ML7174
T1
T2
––
+ + mA
+ V
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
4-20 mA CONTROLLER
ML7161, ML7174
T1
T2
––
+ + mA
+ V
APPLICATION NOTES:
Auxiliary Switches: The 201052A or B Auxiliary Switch is used in conjunction with the actuator . It allows for control
of equipment external to the actuator (for example, electric reheat coils and fan) at an adjustable point in the stroke
(0° to 90°) of the actuator.
The 201052A and B Auxiliary Switches are field-addable. For mounting instructions, see fo rm 63-2218, provided with
the device.
IMPORTANT: When operating an ML6161 or ML6174 from a two-position controller, a 201052B Auxiliary Switch is required for
proper operation.
INSTALLATION NOTES:
Power supply . Provide disconnect means and overload protection as required.
Set switch to close when stroke reaches full CW position.
Set switch to close when stroke reaches full CCW position.
On-off control requires an R8222 SPDT relay in place of the SPDT control.
WIRING
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN
ML61XX, ML71XX SERIES

55. WE MAKE IT EASY.
27ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA
flfi 27ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1 March 2014
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN
ML61XX, ML71XX SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ML6161A2009 Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC floating 90 second stroke time with potentiometer option
ML6161A2017 Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC floating 7 minute stroke time with potentiometer option
ML6161B2024 Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC floating 90 second stroke time set point switch
ML6161B2032 Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC floating 7 minute stroke time with set point switch
ML6161B2073 Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC floating 3 minute stroke time with set point switch
ML6174B2019 Non-spring return 70 in-lb 24 VAC floating 90 second stroke time with set point switch
ML7161A2008 Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC proportional 90 second stroke time with potentiometer option
ML7174A2001 Non-spring return 70 in-lb 24 VAC proportional 90 second stroke time with set point switch
ML6161C2015 Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC floating 7 minute stroke time
ML6174A2002 Non-spring return 70 in-lb 24 VAC floating 90 second stroke time with potentiometer option
ML6161D2006 Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC floating 90 second stroke time with set point
ML6161C2007 Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC floating 90 second stroke time
ML6174D2009 Non-spring return 70 in-lb 24 VAC floating 90 second stroke time with set point switch
ML6174A2010 Non-spring return 70 in-lb 24 VAC floating 3 minute stroke time with potentiometer option
ML6161A2025 Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC floating 3 minute stroke time with potentiometer option
ACCESSORIES PAGE
201052A Auxiliary switch (1 SPDT) for ML6161/ML7161/KA-35 actuators
201052B Auxiliary switch (2 SPDT) for ML6161/ML7161/KA-35 actuators
7640Qw Metal enclosure for attaching conduit to ML61xx, ML71xx

56. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.
flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 28flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Model Torque Supply Voltage Supply VA Control Signal Feedback Auxiliary Switch
KAS-27-2 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC7 VA Two-position None None
KAS-27-2-1527 in-lb (3 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC7 VA Two-position None
One SPDT, 250 VAC,
8A res., 3A ind.
KAS-27-2-12027 in-lb (3 Nm) 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 10 VA Two-position None None
KAS-27-2-
120-15
27 in-lb (3 Nm) 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 10 VA Two-position None
One SPDT, 250 VAC,
8A res., 3A ind.
KAS-27-M 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC7 VA
Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA,
two-pos., floating
0/2-10 VDC None
KAS-27-M-1527 in-lb (3 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC7 VA
Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA,
two-pos., floating
0/2-10 VDC
One SPDT, 250 VAC,
8A res., 3A ind.
KAS-44-2 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC8 VA Two-position None None
KAS-44-2-1544 in-lb (5 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC8 VA Two-position None
One SPDT, 250 VAC,
8A res., 3A ind.
KAS-44-120 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 11 VA Two-position None None
KAS-44-120-
15
44 in-lb (5 Nm) 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 11 VA Two-position None
One SPDT, 250 VAC,
8A res., 3A ind.
KAS-44-M 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC8 VA
Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA,
two-pos., floating
0/2-10 VDC None
KAS-44-M-1544 in-lb (5 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC8 VA
Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA,
two-pos., floating
0/2-10 VDC
One SPDT, 250 VAC,
8A res., 3A ind.
KAS-88-2 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 30 VA Two-position None
Optional add-on SW2,
DPDT
KAS-88-120 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 45 VA Two-position None
Optional add-on SW2,
DPDT
KAS-88-M 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 14 VA
Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA,
two-pos., floating
0/2-10 VDC
Optional add-on SW2,
DPDT
KAS-175-2 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 40 VATwo-position None
Optional add-on SW2,
DPDT
KAS-175-120175 in-lb (20 Nm) 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 60 VA Two-position None
Optional add-on SW2,
DPDT
KAS-175-M 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 16 VA
Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA,
two-pos., floating
0/2-10 VDC
Optional add-on SW2,
DPDT
Input Impedance 100 kΩ @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500Ω @ 4-20 mA
Motor
2-position DC with brushes
Modulating Brushless DC
Wiring Enclosed terminals
Action
2-pos./float Mounting orientation direct/reverse acting
Proportional Switch selectable direct/reverse acting
Rotation 95°, ±3°
Drive Time
2-position 45 seconds
Modulating 90 seconds
Spring Return Time
27, 44 in-lb 25 seconds
88, 175 in-lb 20 seconds
Manual Override Crank (88, 175 in-lb only)
Noise <60 db @ 3' (1m)
Life Expectancy 60,000 cycles, 1.5 million repositions
Operating Temperature
KAS-27-2, -44-2 -22° to 150°F (-30° to 65°C)
KAS-27-M, -44-M -40° to 150°F (-40° to 65°C)
KAS-88, -175 -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH
Enclosure Rating NEMA 2 (IP54)
Approvals cULus, CE, C-tick, plenum rated, E179109
Warranty 5 years
KELE REVOLUTION™ DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN
KAS-27, KAS-44, KAS-88, KAS-175 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Revolution KAS-27, KAS-44, KAS-88, and KAS-
175 Series actuators are designed and tested to provide
accurate and reliable spring return control for dampers and
valves
. They accept two-position or modulating (tri-state and
proportional in one actuator) control signals.
FEATURES
• Auto-adapt feature for automatic stroke setting
• Signal mode switch for installation flexibility
• Self-centering hub for accurate control
• Built-in indicator shows position at a distance
• 60,000 cycles, 1.5 million repositions for long life
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
KAS-175-M
KAS-27-M-15
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS

57. WE MAKE IT EASY.
flfi 29ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Model Dimensions
Maximum Shaft
Diameter
Minimum Shaft
Length
Weight
KAS-27, KAS-44 3.2"H x 3.9"W x 7.0"L (8.0 x 10.0 x 17.7 cm) 0.6" (1.6 cm)1.0" (2.5 cm) 3.5 lb (1.6 kg)
KAS-88, KAS-175 2.9"H x 3.9"W x 9.8"L (7.5 x 10.0 x 25.0 cm) 1.06" (2.7 cm)1.0" (2.5 cm) 7.0 lb (3.2 kg)
ORDERING INFORMATION
1
2
C
N.C.
N.O.
C
N.C.
N.O.
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
SW2 Auxiliary Switch Kit
CCW switch
CW switch
Switch ratings: Adjustable between
5° and 85°, 24 VAC/VDC,
5A resistive, 3A inductive
Relay contact
or switch
KAS-27-M, KAS-44-M, KAS-88-M, KAS-175-M
Floating Point
KAS-27-2, KAS-44-2, KAS-88-2,
KAS-88-120, KAS-175-120
Two-position Control
24 VAC/VDC or 120 VAC
KAS-27-M, KAS-44-M, KAS-88-M, KAS-175-M
Proportional Control
3
* 500fl, 1/2W or greater resistor required
when control signal is 0/4-20 mA
Set switch to modulating
1
2
3 4
5
24 VAC/VDC
0/2-10 VDC or
0/4-20 mA
0/2-10 VDC Feedback
2-10 VDC
10-2 VDC
0-10 VDC
10-0 VDC
Floating forward
Floating reve rse
3
2-10 VDC
10-2 VDC
0-10 VDC
10-0 VDC
Floating forward
Floating reverse
1
+
–
1
2
3 4
5
24 VAC/VDC
Set switch to floating
Floating
Controller
1
S3S2S1
Switch adjustable from 0° to 95° 500 uA
resistive at 5 VDC (minimum) 250 VAC,
8A resistive, 3A inductive
Only av ailable on models with -15 suffix
Internal Auxiliary Switch
WIRING
KELE REVOLUTION™ DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN
KAS-27, KAS-44, KAS-88, KAS-175 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KAS-27-2 Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC/VDC, two-wire control
KAS-27-2-15 Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC/VDC, two-wire control, SPDT aux
KAS-27-2-120 Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control
KAS-27-2-120-15 Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control, SPDT aux
KAS-27-M Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), modulating control (proportional and tri-state), 24 VAC
KAS-27-M-15 Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), modulating control (proportional and tri-state), 24 VAC, SPDT aux
KAS-44-2 Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC/VDC, two-wire control
KAS-44-2-15 Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC/VDC, two-wire control, SPDT aux
KAS-44-120 Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control
KAS-44-120-15 Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control, SPDT aux
KAS-44-M Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), modulating control (proportional and tri-state), 24 VAC/VDC
KAS-44-M-15 Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), modulating control (prop./tri-state), 24 VAC/VDC, SPDT aux
KAS-88-2 Spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC/VDC, two-wire control
KAS-88-120 Spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control
KAS-88-M Spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), modulating control (proportional and tri-state), 24 VAC/VDC
KAS-175-2 Spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC/VDC, two-wire control
KAS-175-120 Spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control
KAS-175-M Spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), modulating control (proportional and tri-state), 24 VAC/VDC
ACCESSORIES PAGE
32004254-002 Replacement shaft coupler for KAS-88, -175
50000407-001 Tandem mount bracket for KAS-175 actuators
50001194-001 Universal surface mount bracket with crank arm and 1/2" shaft 8
SW2 Auxiliary switch kit for KA-175/301 and KAS-88/175
ZG-R01 500Ω, 1/2W, 1% resistor 8

58. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 30flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN
TF, LF, NF, AF, EF SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Belimo TF, LF, NF, AF, and EF Series direct coupled
actuators provide control of dampers and valves for spring
return applications
. They come in two-position, tri-state,
proportional, and Multi-Function Technology (MFT) models.
All include a spr
ing return to drive the damper or valve to a
“normal” position when power is lost
. Unique universal power
supply models work with 24 to 240 VAC or 24 to 125 VDC.
The ne
w EF Series is true spring return with a high 270 in-lb
torque output and most models are available with optional NEMA 4 housing. Dual-mount EF actuators on one shaft is
possib
le, for a total of 540 in-lb
.
FEATURES
• Symmetrical, reversible rotation design for installation
flexibility
• ISO 9001 manufacturing facility assures high quality
• New EF Series delivers 270 in-lb of spring return power
• Some models with NEMA 4 enclosure rating for
outdoor locations
• Low power consumption for high efficiency and
smaller transformer sizing
• MFT models offer flexibility to customize and adapt a single actuator to various controllers and applications
Input Impedance
-SR models 100 kΩ @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500Ω @
4-20 mA
-MFT models 100 kΩ @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500Ω @
4-20 mA; 1500Ω @ PWM, float,
on/off
Motor Brushless DC
Wiring
TF, LF 3' (0.9 m) cable, 18 AWG, plenum
rated
NF, AF, EF 3' (0.9 m) appliance cable, 18 AWG
NEMA 4 Terminal blocks inside housing
Conduit Connection
W/cables 1/2" NPT
NEMA 4 Four knockouts for waterproof
conduit fittings
Feedback 2-10 VDC (-SR and -MFT models
only)
Auxiliary Switch
TF, LF (-S) 1 SPDT, 3A @ 250V
NF, AF, EF (-S) 2 SPDT, 3A @ 250V
Action
2-position CW/CCW reversible mounting
Float/prop. DA/RA switch, CW/CCW rev. mt.
Rotation 95°
Manual Override Manual crank (except TF)
Noise
TF, LF, NF <62 db
AF <45 db
EF <71.4 db
Resolution 100 steps
Life Expectancy
2-position 60,000 cycles
Float/prop. 60,000 cycles; 500,000 repositions
Operating Temperature -22° to 122°F (-30° to 50°C); NEMA
4 models with heater option can go down to -40°F (-40°C)
Operating Humidity
5 to 95% RH
Enclosure Rating
TF NEMA 2 (IP42)
LF, NF, AF, EF NEMA 2 (IP54)
NEMA 4 NEMA 4 (IP66)
Approvals cULus, CE, RoHS
Warranty 5 years
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
LF24
TF24
NFB24
AFB24
EFB24

59. WE MAKE IT EASY.
flfi 31ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Model Torque Supply Voltage Supply VA Control Signal Feedback Drive Time
Spring Return
Time
TF24 22 in-lb (2.5 Nm)
24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz,
24 VDC ±10%
5.0 VA Two-position 75 seconds <60 seconds
TF120 22 in-lb (2.5 Nm) 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 5.0 VA Two-position 75 seconds <60 seconds
TF24-3 22 in-lb (2.5 Nm)
24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz,
24 VDC ±10%
4.0 VA Floating 95 seconds <60 seconds
TF24-SR 22 in-lb (2.5 Nm)
24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz,
24 VDC ±10%
4.0 VA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 2-10 VDC 95 seconds <60 seconds
TF24-MFT22 in-lb (2.5 Nm)
24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz,
24 VDC ±10%
4.0 VA Prop. (default 2-10 VDC) 2-10 VDC 150 seconds <60 seconds
LF24 35 in-lb (4 Nm)
24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz,
24 VDC ±10%
7.0 VA Two-position 40-75 seconds <60 seconds
LF120 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 7.5 VA Two-position 40-75 seconds <60 seconds
LF24-3 35 in-lb (4 Nm)
24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz,
24 VDC ±10%
5.0 VA Floating 150 seconds <60 seconds
LF24-SR 35 in-lb (4 Nm)
24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz,
24 VDC ±10%
5.0 VA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 2-10 VDC 150 seconds <60 seconds
LF24-MFT 35 in-lb (4 Nm)
24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz,
24 VDC ±10%
5.0 VA Prop. (default 2-10 VDC) 2-10 VDC 150 seconds <60 seconds
NFB24 90 in-lb (10 Nm)
24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz,
24 VDC ±10%
8.5 VA Two-position 75 seconds <60 seconds
NFBUP 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 24-240 VAC, 24-125 VDC
6.5 VA @ 120
VAC
Two-position 75 seconds <60 seconds
NFB24-SR 90 in-lb (10 Nm)
24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz,
24 VDC ±10%
6.0 VA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 2-10 VDC 95 seconds <60 seconds
NFB24-MFT90 in-lb (10 Nm)
24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz,
24 VDC ±10%
9.0 VA Prop. (default 2-10 VDC) 2-10 VDC 150 seconds <60 seconds
AFBUP 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 24-240 VAC, 24-125 VDC
8.5 VA @ 120
VAC
Two-position 75 seconds <60 seconds
AFB24-MFT180 in-lb (20 Nm)
24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz,
24 VDC ±10%
10 VA Prop. (default 2-10 VDC) 2-10 VDC 150 seconds <60 seconds
AFB24-
MFT95
180 in-lb (20 Nm)
24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz,
24 VDC ±10%
10 VA Prop. (default 0-135 ohms) 2-10 VDC 150 seconds <60 seconds
EFB24 270 in-lb (30 Nm)
24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz,
24 VDC +20%/-10%
16 VA Two-position 75 seconds <60 seconds
EFB120 270 in-lb (30 Nm)
100-240 VAC +10%/-20%
50/60 Hz
21 VA Two-position 75 seconds <60 seconds
EFB24-SR270 in-lb (30 Nm)
24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz,
24 VDC +20%/-10%
14 VA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 2-10 VDC 95 seconds <60 seconds
EFB24-MFT270 in-lb (30 Nm)
24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz,
24 VDC +20%/-10%
16 VA Prop. (default 2-10 VDC) 2-10 VDC 150 seconds <60 seconds
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
For models not shown please contact Kele for more information.
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN
TF, LF, NF, AF, EF SERIES

60. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.
flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 32flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Model Torque Dimensions Maximum Shaft
Diameter
Minimum Shaft
Length
Weight
TF 22 in-lb (2.5 Nm) 3.3”H x 3.0”W x 6.3”L (8.4 x 7.6 x 15.9 cm) 0.5” (1.3 cm)3.5” (8.9 cm) 1.4 lb (0.64 kg)
LF 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 3.2”H x 3.9”W x 7.7”L (8.1 x 9.8 x 19.5 cm) 0.5” (1.3 cm)3.5” (8.9 cm) 3.4 lb (1.5 kg)
NFB 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 3.4”H x 3.9”W x 9.7”L (8.7 x 9.8 x 24.6 cm) 1.05” (2.7 cm)3.5” (8.9 cm) 4.1 lb (1.8 kg)
AFB 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 3.4”H x 3.9”W x 9.7”L (8.7 x 9.8 x 24.6 cm) 1.05” (2.7 cm)3.5” (8.9 cm) 4.2 lb (1.9 kg)
EFB 270 in-lb (30 Nm) 4.7"H x 5.4"W x 13.1"L (12.1 x 13.8 x 33.3 cm) 1.05" (2.7 cm)3.5" (8.9 cm) 9.8 lb (4.5 kg)
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN
TF, LF, NF, AF, EF SERIES
Wire number
Control
switch12
+
24 VAC/VDC or (120 VAC)
(–)(+)
COM
TF24, AFB24, NFB24, LF24, EFB24
TF120, LF120, NF120, AF120, EFB120
Two-position
Parallel connection of several actuators is possible.
(See Note 1)
Note 1: See new Belimo NFB//AFB/EFB literature for
complete wiring info rmation on those models.
(See Note 1)
TF24-SR, NFB24-SR, LF24-SR, EFB24-SR
2-10 VDC
Wire Number
(except TF24-SR)
123
+
24 VAC/VDC
(–)(+)
COM
5
Signal common
2-10 VDC signal*
2-10 VDC feedback
1 2YY U
Parallel connection of up to four motors is possible.
Power consumption and polarity must be observed.
*4-20 mA signal with 500fl resistor across terminals 1 and 3.
Code
A01
A02
A07
A09
A16
A17
W01
W02
F01
J2
Signal
2-10 VDC
0-10 VDC
0-5 VDC
5-10 VDC
2-6 VDC
6-10 VDC
PWM
0.59 - 2.95 sec
PWM
0.02 - 5.00 sec
Floating
Two-position
Feedback
2-10 VDC
0-10 VDC
2-10 VDC
2-10 VDC
2-10 VDC
2-10 VDC
2-10 VDC
2-10 VDC
2-10 VDC
2-10 VDC
2-10 VDC
Feedback
U
24 VAC/VDC
NFB24-MFT, AFB24-MFT, EFB24-MFT
Tri-state
Tri-state or
floating controller
Wire #12
+Y
1Y
2
(–)(+)
COM
3 4 5
CCW CW
24 VAC/VDC
TF24-3, LF24-3
Tri-state
For each direction of rotation left or right selection switch,
arrows on actuator show rotation selected.
Tri-state contact or triac control
Wire Number
12
++ +
(–)(+)
COM
34
CCW CW
(may also be wired two-position)
*For two-position control, tie 2 and 3 together, connect 4 to sw itch or
relay contact (SPST)
MFT Function Codes
MFT Code = FØ1 (Pre-programmed at Kele)
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S1
Line
Volts
H1 HTR
H2 T
Common
+ Hot
24 VAC Transformer
Auxiliary Switch Wiring
3 A @ 250V maximum load
Heater Wiring - NEMA 4
models with heater
WIRING
DIMENSIONS

61. WE MAKE IT EASY.
33ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
* EF, LF and TF Models only. Use UP option for AF and NF to get 120 VAC.
EF and TF models have 100 to 240 Nominal Power Supply
** Only available on AF and NF models
*** Only available on LF models
**** Only av ailable on certain AF, EF, NF models
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL TORQUE
EF 270 in-lbs (30 Nm)
AF 180 in-lbs (20 Nm)
NF 90 in-lbs (10 Nm)
LF 35 in-lbs (4 Nm)
TF 22 in-lbs (2.5 Nm)
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS
BlankL Models Only
B Basic
X Customizable
POWER SUPPLY
2424 VAC/DC
120120 VAC*
230230 VAC
UP24 to 240 VA C or 24 to 125 VDC **
CONTROL TYPE
Blank On/Off
-SR 2-10 VDC
-3 Floating Point
-PC 0-20 Volt (Phasecut)
-ECON-R033K ohm NTC Type 10 Thermistor
-MFT Multifunction (Pcode required)
-MFT95 0 to 135K ohm
-MFT-20 6 to 9 VDC, 20 VDC Po wer Supply***
OPTIONAL AUXILLIARY
-SBuilt In Auxilliary
NEMA OPTION
-N4NEMA 4 Rated****
-N4HNEMA 4 Rated w/Internal Heater****
EF B2 4 -SR -S -N4 Example: EFB24-SR-S-N4
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN
TF, LF, NF, AF, EF SERIES
NOTES:
1) All functions and options are not available with all versions
2) Most models available with internal auxiliary switches; order with -S suffix (N4 models are shown with -S included).
3) MFT models can be ordered pre-configured at Kele if other than default configuration is needed; add -C suffix and
specify custom configuration parameters or MFT code.
ACCESSORIES PAGE
AV6-20 Shaft extension for 1/4" to 3/4" diameter shafts, 6.7" length, for LF/TF actuators
AV8-25 Shaft extension for 5/16" to 1" diameter shafts, 9.8" length, for LF, NFB, AFB actuators
KH-AFB Crank arm for shafts to 3/4", for AFB/NFB actuators
KH-LF Crank arm for shafts to 1/2", for LF actuators
ZG-100 Right angle mounting bracket for AFB/NFB and AMB/GMB actuators 8
ZG-102 Tandem actuator mounting bracket for AF/AFB/GMB actuators 8
ZG-112 Floor mount bracket, vertical, for LF actuators 8
ZG-113 Floor mount bracket for TF actuators
ZG-118 Channel mounting bracket for NFB/AFB actuators
ZG-JSL Jackshaft linkage for AFB/NFB and AMB/NMB
ZG-R01 500Ω, 1/2W, 1% resistor 8

62. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.
flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 34flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Model Torque Supply Voltage Supply VA Control Signal Feedback Auxiliary Switch
MS8103A1030 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC7 VA Two-position None None
MS8103A1130 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC7 VA Two-position None One SPDT
MS4103A1030 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 10 VA Two-position None None
MS4103A1130 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 10 VA Two-position None One SPDT
MS7503A2030 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC7 VAProp. VDC/mA, 2-pos., floating 0/2-10 VDC None
MS7503A2130 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC7 VAProp. VDC/mA, 2-pos., floating 0/2-10 VDC One SPDT
MS8105A1030 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC8 VA Two-position None None
MS8105A1130 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC8 VA Two-position None One SPDT
MS4105A1030 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 11 VA Two-position None None
MS4105A1130 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 11 VA Two-position None One SPDT
MS7505A2030 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC8 VAProp. VDC/mA, 2-pos., floating 0/2-10 VDC None
MS7505A2130 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC8 VAProp. VDC/mA, 2-pos., floating 0/2-10 VDC One SPDT
MS8110A1008 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 30 VATwo-position None None
MS8110A1206 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 30 VATwo-position None Two SPDT
MS4110A1002 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 45 VA Two-position None None
MS4110A1200 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 45 VA Two-position None Two SPDT
MS7510A2008 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 14 VA Prop. VDC/mA, 2-pos., floating 0/2-10 VDC None
MS7510A2206 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 14 VA Prop. VDC/mA, 2-pos., floating 0/2-10 VDC Two SPDT
MS8120A1007 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 40 VATwo-position None None
MS8120A1205 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 40 VATwo-position None Two SPDT
MS4120A1001 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 60 VA Two-position None None
MS4120A1209 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 60 VA Two-position None Two SPDT
MS7520A2007 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 16 VA Prop. VDC/mA, 2-pos., floating 0/2-10 VDC None
MS7520A2205 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 16 VA Prop. VDC/mA, 2-pos., floating 0/2-10 VDC Two SPDT
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN
MS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MS Series high-performance spring return direct coupled actuators
from Honeywell are designed and tested to provide reliable spring return
control for dampers and valves
. The MS Series has an excellent feature
set that combines flexibility and simplicity.
FEATURES
• Self-centering shaft adapter for steady operation
• Auto adapt on modulating models for stroke precision
• Selector switch for proportional or floating control
• Detachable wiring cover
Input Impedance 100 kΩ @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500Ω @ 4-20 mA
Motor
2-position DC with brushes
Modulating Brushless DC
Wiring Enclosed terminals
Action
2-position Mounting orientation direct/reverse acting
Modulating Switch selectable direct/reverse acting
Rotation 95° ± 3°
Drive Time
2-position 45 seconds
Modulating 90 seconds
Spring Return Time
27, 44 in-lb 25 seconds
88, 175 in-lb 20 seconds
Manual Override Manual crank (88, 175 in-lb only)
Noise <50 db @ 3' (1m)
Life Expectancy 60,000 cycles, 1.5 million repositions
Operating Temperature
MSxx03, xx05 2-pos. -22° to 150°F (-30° to 65°C)
MSxx03, xx05 Mod. -40° to 150°F (-40° to 65°C)
MXxx10, xx20 -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH
Enclosure Rating NEMA 2 (IP54)
Approvals cULus, CE, C-tick, plenum rated
Warranty 5 years
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
MS7510
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
MS8103A

63. WE MAKE IT EASY.
flfi 35ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Model Dimensions
Maximum Shaft
Diameter
Minimum Shaft
Length
Weight
MSxx03, MSxx05 3.2"H x 3.9"W x 7.0"L (8.0 x 10.0 x 17.7 cm) 0.6" (1.6 cm)1.0" (2.5 cm) 3.5 lb (1.6 kg)
MSxx10, MSxx20 2.9"H x 3.9"W x 9.8"L (7.5 x 10.0 x 25.0 cm) 1.06" (2.7 cm)1.0" (2.5 cm) 7.0 lb (3.2 kg)
1
2
Relay contact
or switch
MS81xx, MS41xx — Two-position Control
24 VAC/VDC or 120 VAC
+
–
MS75xx — Two-position Control
+
–
1 2
3 4
5
24 VAC/VDC
Set switch to floating
Relay contact
or switch
2
2-10 VDC
10-2 VDC
0-10 VDC
10-0 VDC
Floating forward
Floating reverse
2
CCW Switch
C
NC
NO
C
NC
NO
CW Switch
SW2 Au xiliary Switch Kit
Switch ratings: Adjustable between 5 and 85 degrees,
24 VAC/VDC, 5A resistive, 3A inductive
The SW2 is a field-adaptable
auxiliary switch kit that fits only the
88 and 175 in-lb actuators
MS75xx — Proportional Control
1
2
3 4
5 0 or 2-10 VDC Feedback
0 or 2-10 VDC or
0 or 4-20 mA
+
–
+
–
24 VAC/VDC
Set switch to modulating
3
2-10 VDC
10-2 VDC
0-10 VDC
10-0 VDC
Floating forward
Floating reverse
3
*ZG-R01 500Ω, 1/2W or greater resistor
required when control signal is 0/4-20 mA
MS75xx — Floating Contro l
2-10 VDC 10-2 VDC 0-10 VDC 10-0 VDC Floating forward Floating reverse
1
+
–
1
2
3 4
5
24 VAC/VDC
Set switch to floating
Floating
Controller
1
Internal Au xiliary Switch
Dual show n; 27 and 44 in-lb models have only one auxiliary switch.
Switch ratings: 250 VAC, 5A resistive,
must use same power source on both contact sets
S1S2S3 S4 S5 S6
7° 85°
WIRING
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN
MS SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MS8103A1030 Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire control
MS8103A1130 Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire, 1 aux sw.
MS4103A1030 Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control
MS4103A1130 Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire, 1 aux sw.
MS7503A2030 Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), modulating control (proportional or tri-state)
MS7503A2130 Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), modulating control (prop/tri-state), 1 aux sw.
MS8105A1030 Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire control
MS8105A1130 Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire, 1 aux sw.
MS4105A1030 Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control
MS4105A1130 Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire, 1 aux sw.
MS7505A2030 Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), modulating control (proportional or tri-state)
MS7505A2130 Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), modulating control (prop/tri-state), 1 aux sw.
MS8110A1008 Spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire control
MS8110A1206 Spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire, 2 aux sw.
MS4110A1002 Spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control
MS4110A1200 Spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire, 2 aux sw.
MS7510A2008 Spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), modulating control (proportional or tri-state)
MS7510A2206 Spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), modulating control (prop/tri-state), 2 aux sw.
MS8120A1007 Spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire control
MS8120A1205 Spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire, 2 aux sw.
MS4120A1001 Spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control
MS4120A1209 Spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire, 2 aux sw.
MS7520A2007 Spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), modulating control (proportional or tri-state)
MS7520A2205 Spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), modulating control (prop/tri-state), 2 aux sw.
DIMENSIONS
ACCESSORIES PAGE
32004254-002 Replacement shaft coupler for KAS-88, -175
50000407-001 Tandem mount bracket for KAS-175 actuators
50001194-001 Universal surface mount bracket with crank arm and 1/2" shaft
SW2 Auxiliary switch kit for KA-175/301 and KAS-88/175
ZG-R01 500Ω, 1/2W, 1% resistor 8

64. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.
flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 36flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Manual Override Manual crank (except GQD),
Disengage button (GNP)
Life Expectancy 60,000 cycles, 100,000 full stroke
cycles, 7,000,000 repositions (GNP)
Rotation 95°
Operating Temperature -25° to 130°F (-32° to 55°C),
0° to 122°F (-18° to 50°C) (GNP)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing
Motor Brushless DC
Wiring 3 ft (1.0 m), 18 AWG plenum cable
(.1P models), 3 ft (1.0 m), 18 AWG
standard cable (.1U models)
Input Impedance 100kΩ @ 0/2-10VDC
500Ω @ 4-20ma
Approvals cULus, CE, plenum rated, E35198
Warranty 2 years
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION
Siemens GMA, GCA, GQD and GNP Series direct coupled
spring return actuators provide control for a complete range
of HVAC damper applications
. These actuators are available
in all standard control signal types and offer a wide variety of options and accessories
.
FEATURES
• Self-centering shaft coupling
• Brushless DC motor technology
• Rugged, lightweight housings
• Manual override on GMA, GCA models
• Conduit connection on GMA, GCA models GCA, GMA, GQD Series
Model Torque
Supply
Voltage
Supply
VA
Control Signal
Input
Resistance
Feedback
Drive
Time
Spring
Return Time
Built-in Auxiliary
Switches
GQD121.1P 20 in-lb (2 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC 6.5 VA Two-position None 30 seconds 15 seconds
GQD126.1P 20 in-lb (2 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC 6.5 VA Two-position None 30 seconds 15 seconds X
GQD131.1P 20 in-lb (2 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC 4 VA Floating None 30 seconds 15 seconds
GQD136.1P 20 in-lb (2 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC 4.5 VA Floating None 30 seconds 15 seconds X
GQD151.1P 20 in-lb (2 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC 10 VA Prop. 2-10 VDC >100k
Ω 2-10 VDC 30 seconds 15 seconds
GQD156.1P 20 in-lb (2 Nm) 24 V
AC/VDC 10 VA Prop. 2-10 VDC >100k
Ω 2-10 VDC 30 seconds 15 seconds X
GQD221.1U 20 in-lb (2 Nm) 120 V
AC 6.5 VA Two-position None 30 seconds 15 seconds
GQD226.1U 20 in-lb (2 Nm) 120 VAC 6.5 VA Two-position None 30 seconds 15 seconds X
GNP191.1P 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC 20 VA Universal-Selectable >100k
Ω 0-10 VDC 2 seconds Fail-Safe* 2 seconds
GNP196.1P 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 24 V
AC/VDC 20 VA Universal-Selectable >100k
Ω 0-10 VDC 2 seconds Fail-Safe* 2 seconds X
GMA121.1P 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 24 V
AC/VDC 5 VA Two-position None 90 seconds 15 seconds
GMA121.1U 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC 5 VA Two-position None 90 seconds 15 seconds
GMA126.1U 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC 5 VA Two-position None 90 seconds 15 seconds X
GMA131.1P 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC 5 VA Floating None 90 seconds 15 seconds
GMA151.1P 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC 5 VA Prop. 2-10 VDC >100k
Ω 2-10 VDC 90 seconds 15 seconds
GMA161.1P 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 24 V
AC/VDC 5 VA Prop. 0-10 VDC >100k
Ω 0-10 VDC 90 seconds 15 seconds
GMA161.1U 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 24 V
AC/VDC 5 VA Prop. 0-10 VDC >100k
Ω 0-10 VDC 90 seconds 15 seconds
GMA166.1U 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 24 V
AC/VDC 5 VA Prop. 0-10 VDC >100k
Ω 0-10 VDC 90 seconds 15 seconds X
GMA221.1U 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 120 V
AC 5 VA Two-position None 90 seconds 15 seconds
GMA226.1U 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 120 VAC 5 VA Two-position None 90 seconds 15 seconds X
GCA121.1P 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC 8 VA Two-position None 90 seconds 15 seconds
GCA126.1P 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC 8 VA Two-position None 90 seconds 15 seconds X
GCA131.1P 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC 8 VA Floating None 90 seconds 15 seconds
GCA151.1P 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC 9 VA Prop. 0/2-10 VDC >100k
Ω 0-10 VDC 90 seconds 15 seconds
GCA151.1U 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 24 V
AC/VDC 9 VA Prop. 0/2-10 VDC >100k
Ω 0-10 VDC 90 seconds 15 seconds
GCA161.1P 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 24 V
AC/VDC 9 VA Prop. 0-10 VDC >100k
Ω 0-10 VDC 90 seconds 15 seconds
GCA161.1U 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 24 V
AC/VDC 9 VA Prop. 0-10 VDC >100k
Ω 0-10 VDC 90 seconds 15 seconds
GCA166.1U 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 24 V
AC/VDC 9 VA Prop. 0-10 VDC >100k
Ω 0-10 VDC 90 seconds 15 seconds X
GCA221.1U 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 120 V
AC 9 VA Two-position None 90 seconds 15 seconds
GCA226.1U 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 120 VAC 9 VA Two-position None 90 seconds 15 seconds X
*Fail Safe = capacitor, no physical spring
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN
GMA, GCA, GQD, GNP SERIES

65. WE MAKE IT EASY.
37ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
DIMENSIONS
1L1
L2
24 VAC
2
G
GO
(red)
Earth ground class 2
24 VAC transformer
(black)
GQD12x, GMA12x, GCA12x
24 VAC Two-position control
M
3L
N
120 VAC
4
L
N
(black)
(white)
GMA22x, GCA22x
120 VAC Two-position control
M
1
L1
L2
24 VAC
2
8+
–
G
GO
Y
(red)
Earth ground class 2
24 VAC transformer
Analog
controller
0-10 VDC
feedback
(black)
(gray)
9U(pink)
GMA16x, GCA16x, GNP19x
0-10 VDC control
M
1
L1
L2
24 VAC
2
8+
–
G
GO
Y
(red)
Earth ground class 2
24 VAC transformer
Analog
controller
0-10 VDC
feedback
(black)
(gray)
9U(pink)
GQD15x, GMA15x, GCA15x
4-20 mA control
M
1
L1
L2
24 VAC
2
6
G
GO
Y1
(red)
Earth ground class 2
24 VAC transformer
Floating
controller
(black)
(violet)
7Y 2(orange)
M
GMA13x, GCA13x
Floating control
External 500fl resistor
WIRING
Model Torque Dimensions
Maximum Shaft
Diameter
Minimum Shaft
Length
Enclosure Rating Weight
GQD 20 in-lb (2 Nm) 2.5”H x 2.8”W x 4.8”L (6.3 x 6.9 x 12.0 cm) 0.5” (1.3 cm) 0.75” (2.0 cm) NEMA 1 (IP40) 1.06 lb (.48 kg)
GNP 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 2.4”H x 3.3”W x 8.4”L (6.0 x 8.3 x 21.2 cm) 0.75” (2.0 cm) 0.75” (2.0 cm) NEMA 1 (IP54) 3.4 lb (1.5 kg)
GMA 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 2.7”H x 3.3”W x 8.4”L (6.8 x 8.3 x 21.2 cm) 0.75” (2.0 cm) 0.75” (2.0 cm) NEMA 1 (IP54) 2.9 lb (1.3 kg)
GCA 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 2.9”H x 4.8”W x 12.0”L (7.3 x 12.1 x 30.5 cm) 1.0” (2.6 cm) 0.75” (2.0 cm) NEMA 2 (IP54) 4.8 lb (2.2 kg)
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN
GMA, GCA, GQD, GNP SERIES

66. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.
flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 38flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES
ASC77.2U Auxiliary switch kit (DPDT) for GIB, GBB, GEB actuators
ASK71.11 Combined foot mount/frame mount kit for GEB/GMA actuators
ASK71.1U Floor mount kit for GCA/GBB/GIB actuators
ASK71.2U Frame mount kit for GCA/GBB/GIB actuators
ASK71.4 Linear stroke kit for GEB/GMA actuators
ASK75.1U Weather shield for GBB/GIB/GCA actuators
ASK75.3U Weather shield for GEB/GMA actuators
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN
GMA, GCA, GQD, GNP SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
GQD121.1P Spring return 20 in-lb (2 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, 2-position, plenum cable
GQD126.1P Spring return 20 in-lb (2 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, 2-position, plenum cable, aux. sw.
GQD131.1P Spring return 20 in-lb (2 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, floating control, plenum cable
GQD136.1P Spring return 20 in-lb (2 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, floating control, plenum cable, aux. sw.
GQD151.1P Spring return 20 in-lb (2 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, proportional 2-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC feedback, plenum cable
GQD156.1P Spring return 20 in-lb (2 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, proportional 2-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC feedback, plenum cable, aux. sw.
GQD221.1P Spring return 20 in-lb (2 Nm), 120 VAC, 2-position, standard cable
GQD226.1P Spring return 20 in-lb (2 Nm), 120 VAC, 2-position, standard cable, aux. sw.
GNP191.1P Fail-safe (capacitor) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC, universal selectable control signals, 0-10 VDC feedback,
plenum cable
GNP196.1P Fail-safe (capacitor) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC, universal selectable control signals, 0-10 VDC feedback,
plenum cable, aux. sw.
GMA121.1P Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, 2-position, plenum cable
GMA121.1U Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, 2-position, standard cable
GMA126.1U Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, 2-position, standard cable, auxillary switches
GMA131.1P Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), floating control, plenum cable
GMA151.1P Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, proportional 2-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC feedback, plenum cable
GMA161.1P Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, proportional 0-10 VDC, 0-10 VDC feedback, plenum cable
GMA161.1U Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, proportional 0-10 VDC, 0-10 VDC feedback, standard cable
GMA221.1U Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), 120 VAC, 2-position, standard cable
GMA166.1U Spring return 62 lb-in (7 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, proportional 0-10 VDC, 0-10 VDC feedback, standard cable, aux. sw.
GMA226.1U Spring return 62 lb-in (7 Nm), 120 VAC, 2-position, standard cable, auxillary switches
GCA121.1P Spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, 2-position, plenum cable
GCA131.1P Spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), floating control, plenum cable
GCA151.1P Spring return 160 lb-in (18 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, proportional 0/2-10 VDC, 0-10 VDC feedback, plenum cable
GCA151.1U Spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0-1K ohm feedback, standard cable
GCA161.1P Spring return 160 lb-in (18 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, proportional 0-10 VDC, 0-10 VDC feedback, plenum cable
GCA161.1U Spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), prop. 0-10 VDC, 0-1K ohm feedback, standard cable
GCA221.1U Spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), 120 VAC, 2-position, standard cable
GCA226.1U Spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), 120 VAC, 2-position, aux. switches, standard cable
GCA126.1P Spring return 160 lb0in (18 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, 2-position, plenum cable, auxillary switches
GCA166.1U Spring return 160 lb-in (18 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, proportional 0-10 VDC, 0-10 VDC feedback, standard cable

67. WE MAKE IT EASY.
flfi 39ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Model Torque Supply Voltage Supply VA Control Signal FeedbackDrive Time
Spring Return
Time
M9203-AGA-2Z 27 in-lb (3 Nm)
24 VAC ± 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24
VDC ± 10%
4.7 VA
Tri-state, two-
position
None 90 seconds 25 seconds
M9203-BGA-2 27 in-lb (3 Nm)
24 VAC ± 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24
VDC ± 10%
5.0 VA Two-position None 75 seconds 25 seconds
M9203-GGA-2Z 27 in-lb (3 Nm)
24 VAC ± 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24
VDC ± 10%
5.1 VA
Prop. 2-10 VDC,
4-20 mA
0/2-10 VDC 150 seconds 25 seconds
M9208-AGA-x 70 in-lb (80 Nm)
24 VAC ± 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24
VDC ± 10%
7.9 VA
Two-position,
floating
None 150 seconds 18 to 24 seconds
M9208-BGA-x 70 in-lb (80 Nm)
24 VAC ± 25%, 50/60 Hz, 24
VDC ± 10%
6.1 VA Two-position None 75 seconds 13 to 26 seconds
M9208-GGA-x 70 in-lb (80 Nm)
24 VAC ± 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24
VDC ± 10%
7.9 VA
Prop. 2-10 VDC,
4-20 mA
0/2-10 VDC 150 seconds 18 to 24 seconds
M9210-AGA-3 89 in-lb (10 Nm)
24 VAC ± 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24
VDC ± 10%
9.6 VA
Two-position,
floating
None 150 seconds 26 seconds
M9210-BAA-3 89 in-lb (10 Nm) 120 VAC, +10%/-15%, 60 Hz 25 VA Two-position None 150 seconds 11 to 15 seconds
M9210-BGA-3 89 in-lb (10 Nm)
24 VAC ± 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24
VDC ± 10%
17.7 VA Two-position None
24 to 57
seconds
11 to 15 seconds
M9210-GGA-3 89 in-lb (10 Nm)
24 VAC ± 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24
VDC ± 10%
9.6 VA
Prop. 2-10 VDC,
4-20 mA
0/2-10 VDC 150 seconds 26 seconds
M9210-HGA-3 89 in-lb (10 Nm)
24 VAC ± 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24
VDC ± 10%
9.6 VA Floating None 150 seconds 26 seconds
M9220-AGA-3177 in-lb (20 Nm)
24 VAC ± 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24
VDC ± 10%
15.5 VA
Two-position,
floating
None 150 seconds 20 seconds
M9220-BAA-3177 in-lb (20 Nm) 120 VAC, +10%/-15%, 60 Hz 25 VA Two-position None
24 to 57
seconds
11 to 15 seconds
M9220-BGA-3177 in-lb (20 Nm)
24 VAC ± 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24
VDC ± 10%
24.6 VA Two-position None
24 to 57
seconds
11 to 15 seconds
M9220-GGA-3 177 in-lb (20 Nm)
24 VAC ± 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24
VDC ± 10%
15.5 VA
Prop. 2-10 VDC,
4-20 mA
0/2-10 VDC 150 seconds 20 seconds
M9220-HGA-3177 in-lb (20 Nm)
24 VAC ± 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24
VDC ± 10%
15.5 VA Floating None 150 seconds 20 seconds
Input Impedance 200 kΩ @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500Ω @ 4-20 mA
Motor Brushless DC
Wiring 18 AWG, 120" (3m), plenum leads
(-2 models); 18 AWG, 48" (1.2m),
appliance cable (-3 models)
Conduit Connection 1/2" conduit connectors (M9203 only);
Integral 3/8" flex connectors (all others)
Action Select by wiring (2-pos./floating); Switch
or hub re-position (proportional)
Rotation 95° (M9203, M9208); 93° (M9210,
M9220)
Manual Override Manual crank (M9210, M9220 only)
Noise <55 db (M9203); <52 db (M9208);
<40 db (M9210/M9220 2-pos.);
<66 db (M9210/M9220 floating/prop.)
Resolution 120 steps
Life Expectancy 60,000 cycles, 1.5 million repositions
Operating Temperature -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C) (M9203,
M9208);
-40° to 131°F (-40° to 55°C)
(M9210, M9220)
Operating Humidity
0 to 95% RH
Enclosure Rating NEMA 2 (IP54)
Approvals cULus, CE (M9203, M9208); UL, CE,
CSA, C-tick (M9210, M9220)
Warranty 5 years
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN
M9200 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Johnson Controls M9200 Series spring return actuators are
designed to position return air, exhaust air, or outside air
dampers
. Torques range from 27 to 177 in-lbs and available
control signals are two-position (on/off), tri-state (floating), and proportional
.
FEATURES
• Reversible mounting design
• Electronic stall detection
• Models with auxiliary switches available (i.e. -AGC,
-GGC, etc.)
• Minimum 60,000 cycles life expectancy
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
M9210, M9220
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
M9203
M9208

68. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.
flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 40flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Model Dimensions
Maximum Shaft
Diameter
Minimum Shaft
Length
Weight
M9203 3.2"H x 3.2"W x 6.4"L (7.6 x 3.3 x 21.1 cm) 0.63" (1.6 cm)1.7" (5.2 cm) 4.2 lb (1.9 kg)
M9208 3.2"H x 3.2"W x 6.4"L (7.6 x 3.3 x 21.1 cm) 0.63" (1.6 cm)1.7" (5.2 cm) 4.2 lb (1.9 kg)
M9210/M9220, 24V 3.3"H x 4.0"W x 10.3"L (8.4 x 10.2 x 26.2 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm)1.2" (3.0 cm) 6.4 lb (2.9 kg)
M9210/M9220, 120V 3.3"H x 4.0"W x 10.3"L (8.4 x 10.2 x 26.2 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm)1.2" (3.0 cm) 7.6 lb (3.5 kg)
Proportional
123456
0-10 VDC
0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC
0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC
0-20 mA, 4-20 mA*
*500Ω resistor required
COM
24
VAC/VDC
TERMINAL DESCRIPTION
3 Calibration Out
4 Current Input
5 Voltage Input
6 Feedback
COM
M9206-, M9210-,
M9220-AG A
Tri-state/
Two-position
24 VAC/VDC
CW CCW
WHT
YEL
BRN
WHT/
BRN
6-9V, 0 or 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA*
*500 Ω resistor required
6-9V, 0 or 2-10 VDC
4-20 mA
COM
M9206-, M9210-, M9220-GGA
Proportional
24
VAC/VDC
WHT YEL
WHT/
REDRED
COM
M9206-, M9210-, M9220-
BGA/AGA
Two-position
WHT YEL*
24
VAC/VDC
*For AGA models, this wire color is BRN.
WIRING
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN
M9200 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
DIMENSIONS
ACCESSORIES
M9000-115 Universal mounting kit for M9203 includes crankarm
M9000-158 Tandem mount kit for M9132/M9220 actuators
M9000-171 Floor mount linkage kit for M9210 and M9220 actuators
M9000-321 Weathershield kit for M9203 and M9208 actuators on damper applications
M9220-600 Jackshaft coupler, 1", for M9210 and M9220
M9220-603 Adjustable stop kit for M9210 and M9220 proportional control actuators
MODEL DESCRIPTION
M9203-AGA-2Z Spring return 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, 10 ft. plenum cable
M9203-BGA-2 Spring return 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position control, 4 ft. cable
M9203-GGA-2Z Spring return 27 in-lb (3 Nm), 0/2-10 VDC proportional control, 10 ft. plenum cable
M9208-AGA-2 Spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, 10 ft. plenum cable
M9208-AGA-3 Spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, 4 ft. cable
M9208-BGA-2 Spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), two-position control, 10 ft. plenum cable
M9208-BGA-3 Spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), two-position control, 4 ft. cable
M9208-GGA-2 Spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), 0/2-10 VDC proportional control, 10 ft. plenum cable
M9208-GGA-3 Spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), 0/2-10 VDC proportional control, 4 ft. cable
M9210-AGA-3 Spring return 89 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, 4 ft. cable
M9210-BAA-3 Spring return 89 in-lb (10 Nm), 120 VAC two-position, two-wire control, 4 ft. cable
M9210-BGA-3 Spring return 89 in-lb (10 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position, two-wire control, 4 ft. cable
M9210-GGA-3 Spring return 89 in-lb (10 Nm), 0/2-10 VDC proportional control, 4 ft. cable
M9210-HGA-3 Spring return 89 in-lb (10 Nm), adjustable 0/2-10 VDC control, 4 ft. cable
M9220-AGA-3 Spring return 177 in-lb (20 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, 4 ft. cable
M9220-BAA-3 Spring return 177 in-lb (20 Nm), 120 VAC two-position, two-wire control, 4 ft. cable
M9220-BGA-3 Spring return 177 in-lb (20 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position, two-wire control, 4 ft. cable
M9220-GGA-3 Spring return 177 in-lb (20 Nm), 0/2-10 VDC proportional control, 4 ft. cable
M9220-HGA-3 Spring return 177 in-lb (20 Nm), adjustable 0/2-10 VDC control, 4 ft. cable

69. WE MAKE IT EASY.
flfi 41ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Model Torque Supply Voltage
Supply
VA
Control Signal Feedback
Drive
Time
Spring
Return
Time
MA40-7043 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 4.4 VA Two-position None 50 seconds 26 seconds
MA40-7040 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 4.3 VA Two-position None 50 seconds 26 seconds
MF40-7043 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 5.9 VA Floating None 130 seconds 25 seconds
MS40-7043 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 5.9 VA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 2-10 VDC 130 seconds 25 seconds
MA41-7073 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 4.8 VA Two-position None 80 seconds 40 seconds
MA41-7070 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 5.6 VA Two-position None 80 seconds 40 seconds
MF41-7073 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 6.2 VA Floating None 195 seconds 30 seconds
MS41-7073 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 5.8 VA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 2-10 VDC 195 seconds 30 seconds
MA41-7153 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 24 VAC ±20%, 22 to 30 VDC 9.7 VA Two-position None 190 seconds 30 seconds
MA41-7150 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 10.0 VA Two-position None 190 seconds 30 seconds
MF41-7153 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 24 VAC ±20%, 22 to 30 VDC 9.7 VA Floating None 190 seconds 30 seconds
MS41-7153 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 24 VAC ±20%, 22 to 30 VDC 9.7 VA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 2-10 VDC 190 seconds 30 seconds
MA40-7173 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 9.6 VA Two-position None 145 seconds 75 seconds
MA40-7170 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 11.4 VA Two-position None 145 seconds 75 seconds
MF40-7173 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 10.0 VA Floating None 145 seconds 75 seconds
MS40-7173 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 9.4 VA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA None 145 seconds 75 seconds
MS40-7170 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 11.1 VA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA None 145 seconds 75 seconds
Input Impedance 80 kΩ @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500Ω @
4-20 mA (proportional models)
Motor DC with brushes (MA40-70xx, MA41-
70xx, MF40-70xx, MF41-70xx);
Brushless DC (all others)
Wiring 3-foot cable, 18 AWG
Conduit Connection 1/2" FNPT
Action Mounting orientation direct/reverse
acting
Rotation 95° ±5°
Manual Override Crank (MA41, MF41, MS41 models)
Resolution 100 steps
Operating Temperature -22° to 140°F (-30° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 15 to 95% RH
Enclosure Rating NEMA 2 (IP54) (35, 60, 133 in-lb
models), NEMA 4 (IP56) (150 in-lb models)
Approvals
UL, CE, cUL (varies by model)
Warranty 5 years
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN
MA, MF, MS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Schneider Electric DuraDrive™ Series direct coupled, spring return actuators accept two-position, tri-state, or proportional control signals from a DDC control system or a thermostat and are designed to provide years of trouble-free control for HVAC dampers
.
FEATURES
• Direct mount to round or square shaft
• NEMA 4 models available
• Overload protection on all models
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
35 in-lb 150 in-lb 60/133 in-lb
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS

70. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.
flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 42flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Model Torque Dimensions
Maximum Shaft
Diameter
Minimum Shaft
Length
Weight
MA40-7043 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 6.8"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 17.2 cm) 0.63" (1.6 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 4.5 lb (2.0 kg)
MA40-7040 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 6.8"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 17.2 cm) 0.63" (1.6 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 4.5 lb (2.0 kg)
MF40-7043 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 6.8"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 17.2 cm) 0.63" (1.6 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 4.5 lb (2.0 kg)
MS40-7043 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 6.8"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 17.2 cm) 0.63" (1.6 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 4.5 lb (2.0 kg)
MA41-7073 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 10.5"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 26.7 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 7.5 lb (3.4 kg)
MA41-7070 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 10.5"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 26.7 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 7.5 lb (3.4 kg)
MF41-7073 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 10.5"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 26.7 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 7.5 lb (3.4 kg)
MS41-7073 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 10.5"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 26.7 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 7.5 lb (3.4 kg)
MA41-7153 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 10.5"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 26.7 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 7.5 lb (3.4 kg)
MA41-7150 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 10.5"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 26.7 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 7.5 lb (3.4 kg)
MF41-7153 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 10.5"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 26.7 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 7.5 lb (3.4 kg)
MS41-7153 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 10.5"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 26.7 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 7.5 lb (3.4 kg)
MA40-7173 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 4.0"H x 4.0"W x 10.8"L (10.2 x 10.2 x 27.5 cm) 1.05" (1.7 cm) 3.5" (8.9 cm) 10.5 lb (4.8 kg)
MA40-7170 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 4.0"H x 4.0"W x 10.8"L (10.2 x 10.2 x 27.5 cm) 1.05" (1.7 cm) 3.5" (8.9 cm) 10.5 lb (4.8 kg)
MF40-7173 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 4.0"H x 4.0"W x 10.8"L (10.2 x 10.2 x 27.5 cm) 1.05" (1.7 cm) 3.5" (8.9 cm) 10.5 lb (4.8 kg)
MS40-7173 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 4.0"H x 4.0"W x 10.8"L (10.2 x 10.2 x 27.5 cm) 1.05" (1.7 cm) 3.5" (8.9 cm) 10.5 lb (4.8 kg)
MS40-7170 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 4.0"H x 4.0"W x 10.8"L (10.2 x 10.2 x 27.5 cm) 1.05" (1.7 cm) 3.5" (8.9 cm) 10.5 lb (4.8 kg)
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN
MA, MF, MS SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MA40-7043 Spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire control
MA40-7040 Spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control
MF40-7043 Spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), floating, 24 VAC
MS40-7043 Spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), proportional control, 24 VAC
MA41-7073 Spring return 60 in-lb (7 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire control
MA41-7070 Spring return 60 in-lb (7 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control
MF41-7073 Spring return 60 in-lb (7 Nm), tri-state control, 24 VAC
MS41-7073 Spring return 60 in-lb (7 Nm), proportional control, 24 VAC
MA41-7153 Spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire control
MA41-7150 Spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control
MF41-7153 Spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), tri-state control, 24 VAC
MS41-7153 Spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), proportional control, 24 VAC
MA40-7173 Spring return 150 in-lb (17 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire control
MA40-7170 Spring return 150 in-lb (17 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control
MF40-7173 Spring return 150 in-lb (17 Nm), floating, 24 VAC
MS40-7173 Spring return 150 in-lb (17 Nm), proportional control, 24 VAC
MS40-7170 Spring return 150 in-lb (17 Nm), proportional control, 120 VAC
DIMENSIONS
1
24 VAC
transformer
MF40-7000 (35 or 150 in-lb)
MF41-7000 (60 or 133 in-lb)
Floating Control
Line
Voltage
Common
Hot
(black)
(red)
(green/yellow)
MF4x-7043/7
073
7153/7173
Drive open(blue)
Drive closed(yellow/black)
MA40-7000 (35 or 150 in-lb) MA41-7000 (60 or 133 in-lb)
Two-position Control
SPST control
contact
Power source
24 VAC or 120 VAC
Power Source
24 VAC or 120 VAC
Neutral (1)
Hot (2)
(green/yellow)
Typical
floating
controller
1
1
1
24 VAC
Transformer
24 VAC
Transformer
MA40/41-7043/7073/7153/7173
24 VAC Two-position Control
3
4
5
6
1
2
Provide ov erload protection and disconnect as required.
Actuators may be wired in parallel. All black actuator wires are connected to the transformer common, and all red wires are connected to the hot lead.
Power consumption must be observed.
If the controller uses a full-wave power supply and does not provide isolated outputs, a separate transformer is required.
Up to four actuators (mounted on separate shafts) may be connected in parallel. With four actuators wired to one 500fl resistor, a 2% shift will be noted.
Adjust if possible.
A 500fl resistor con verts the 4-20 mA DC control signal to 2-10 VDC.
To reverse control rotation, use the reversing switch. Both actuators must be set to operate in the same direction.
Line
Voltage
SPST Control
Contact
Common (2)
Hot (2)
(black)
(red)
(green/yellow)
MA4x-7043/
7073
7153/7173
2
MF40/41-7043/7073/7153/7173
Floating Control
Line
Voltage
Common
Hot
(black)
(red)
(green/yellow)
MF4x-7043/7
073
7153/7173
Drive Open(blue)
Drive Closed(yellow/black) 2 3
MA40-7040/7070/7150/7170
120 VAC Two-position Control
120 VAC
SPST Control
Contact
Neutral (1)
Hot (2)
(green/yellow)
MA40-7040/
7070
7150/7170
2
Typical
Floating
Controller
24 VAC
Transformer
MS40/41-7043/7073/7153
2-10 VDC Control
Line
Voltage
Common
Common
(grey)
(black)
(green/yellow)
MS4x-7043/
7073/
7153
Hot(red)
AI(yellow/black)
2
Control
Signal
2-10 VDC
(–)
(+)
1
24 VAC
Transformer
MS40/41-7043/7073/7153
4-20 mA Control
MS40-7173
2-10 VDC Control
Line
Voltage
CommonCommon
(grey)
(black)
(green/yellow)
MS4x-7043/
7073/
7153
Hot(red)
AI(yellow/black)
To other
actuators
2
2
5
4
4
Control
Signal
4-20 mA
(–)
(+)
24 VAC
Transformer
Line
Voltage
(white)
(red)
(green/yellow)
MS40-7173
(black)
(black)
(black/blue)
+
–
W
500fl
Ground
24G
24H
Common
500fl
+ IN
2-10 VDC
unused
(wire nut)
MS40-7000 (35 or 150 in-lb) MS41-7000 (60 or 133 in-lb)
2-10 VDC Control
(green/yellow)
Actuator+
Ground
Hot
Neutral
Common
500fl
+ IN
2-10 VDC
unused
(wire nut)
Previous Diagram
Connected in 24 VAC units only1
1
Power Source
24 VAC or 120 VAC
MS40-7000 (35 or 150 in-lb) MS41-7000 (60 or 133 in-lb)
4-20 mA Control
Actuator
+
Ground
Hot
Neutral
500flfiCommon
500fl
+ IN
4-20 mA
unused
(wire nut)
Connected in 24 VAC units only
1
1
WIRING

71. WE MAKE IT EASY.
flfi 43ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA
flfi 43ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1 March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC
±10%
Control Signal Two-position, floating, Proportional
2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH
Approvals UL, CE, cUL
Warranty 5 years
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS FAIL-SAFE
GK SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Belimo GK Series fail-safe actuators provide 360 in-lb
of torque for operation of dampers up to approximately 90
square feet
. The direction of rotation is reversible, the fail-
safe position is adjustable and a manual override button is standard
. Add-on field mount auxiliary switches and feedback
potentiometers are available.
FEATURES
• F
damper or valve positioning
• 360 in-lb is more power than spring return models
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
GKX24-MFT
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL TORQUE SUPPLY
VA
CONTROL SIGNAL FEEDBACK AUXILIARY DRIVE
TIME
GKB24-3 360 in-lb
(40 Nm)
21 VA On/Off or Floating None SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive)
(@ 250 VAC
150 seconds
GKB24-3-T N4 360 in-lb
(40 Nm)
21 VA On/Off or Floating None SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive)
(@ 250 VAC
150 seconds
GKB24-3-T N4H 360 in-lb
(40 Nm)
21 VA On/Off or Floating None SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive)
(@ 250 VAC
150 seconds
GKB24-MFT-T
N4H
360 in-lb
(40 Nm)
21 VA Proportional (2 to 10 VDC default) Variable (2 to 10 VDC default) SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive)
(@ 250 VAC
90 to 150
seconds
GKB24-SR 360 in-lb
(40 Nm)
21 VA Proportional 2 to 10 VDC (4 to 20 mA) 2 to 10 VDC SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive)
(@ 250 VAC
150 seconds
GKB24-SR-T N4 360 in-lb
(40 Nm)
21 VA Proportional 2 to 10 VDC (4 to 20 mA) 2 to 10 VDC SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive)
(@ 250 VAC
150 seconds
GKB24-SR-T N4H 360 in-lb
(40 Nm)
21 VA Proportional 2 to 10 VDC (4 to 20 mA) 2 to 10 VDC SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive)
(@ 250 VAC
150 seconds

72. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 44flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 44flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1 March 2014
On/Off control
Floating Point control
VDC/4-20 mA
GKB-24-3 / GKX24-3 SERIES (Includes Nema 4) GKB-24-SR / GKX24-SR-T SERIES (Includes Nema 4)
APPLICATION NOTES
INSTALLATION NOTES
WARNING: LIVE ELECTRICAL COMPENENTS
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product, it may
be necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualifi ed licensed
electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live
electrical components perform these tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety
precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or
serious injury.
The ZG-R01 500fl resistor may be used.
Meets UL requirements without the need for an electrical ground connection.
1 Provide overload protection and disconnect as required.
2 CAUTION EQUIPMENT DAMAGE! Actuators may be connected in parallel if not
mechanically mounted to the same shaft. Power consumption and input
impedance must be observed.
3 Actuators may also be powered by 24 VDC.
4 Position feedback cannot be used with Triac sink controller. The actuator internal
common reference is not compatible.
5 Control signal may be pulsed from either the Hot (source) or the Common (sink)
24 VAC line.
8 Contact closures A & B also can be triacs. A & B should both be closed for triac
source and open for triac sink.
9 For triac sink the common connection from the actuator must be connected to the
hot connection of the controller.
WIRING
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS FAIL-SAFE
GK SERIES

73. WE MAKE IT EASY.
45ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA
flfi 45ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1 March 2014
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS FAIL-SAFE
GK SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES PAGE
K-GM20 0.75" (1.91 cm) shaft clamp
P370 Shaft mount auxilliary switch
S1A Optional SPDT auxiliary switch for LM, NM, AM, GM, GK, NK
ZG-102 Tandem actuator mounting bracket for AF/AFB/GMB actuators 8
ZG-GMA Crank arm adapter kit
ZS-100 Galvanized weather shield for Belimo AFB/NFB/LF/TF/GMB/AMB/NMB/LMB 7
ZS-150 Polycarbonate weather shield for Belimo AFB/NFB/LF/TF/GMB/AMB/NMB/LMB 7
ZS-260 Explosion proof housing 487
MODEL DESCRIPTION
GKB24-3 Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC on-off or floating control
GKB24-3-T N4 Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC on-off or floating control Nema 4
GKB24-3-T N4H Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC on-off or floating control Nema 4 w/heater
GKB24-MFT-T N4H Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC MFT proportional control Nema 4 w/heater
GKB24-SR Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC 2-10VDC proportional control
GKB24-SR-T N4 Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC 2-10VDC proportional control Nema 4
GKB24-SR-T N4H Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC 2-10VDC proportional control Nema 4 w/heater
GKX24-3 Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC on-off or floating control w/custom option
GKX24-3-T N4 Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC on-off or floating control w/custom option Nema 4
GKX24-MFT Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC MFT proportional control w/custom option
GKX24-MFT-T N4 Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC MFT proportional control w/custom option Nema 4
GKX24-SR Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC 2-10VDC proportional control w/custom option
GKX24-SR-T N4 Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC 2-10VDC proportional control w/custom option Nema 4
DIMENSIONS
MODEL TORQUE DIMENSIONS MAXIMUM SHAFT
DIAMETER
MINIMUM
SHAFT LENGTH
ENCLOSURE
RATING
WEIGHT
GKB24-3 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 3.4"H x 4.5"W x 8.3"L
(8.6 x 11.43 x 21.08 cm)
1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.75" (4.5 cm) NEMA 2 3.85 lb (1.75 kg)
GKB24-3-T N4 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 12.99"H x 6.77"W x 6.42"L
(33 x 17.2 x 16.3 cm)
1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.75" (4.5 cm) NEMA 4 8.95 lb (4.05 kg)
GKB24-3-T N4H 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 12.99"H x 6.77"W x 6.42"L
(33 x 17.2 x 16.3 cm)
1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.75" (4.5 cm) NEMA 4 9.45 lb (4.3 kg)
GKB24-MFT-T N4H 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 12.99"H x 6.77"W x 6.42"L
(33 x 17.2 x 16.3 cm)
1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.75" (4.5 cm) NEMA 2 3.85 lb (1.75 kg)
GKB24-SR 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 3.4"H x 4.5"W x 8.3"L
(8.6 x 11.43 x 21.08 cm)
1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.75" (4.5 cm) NEMA 2 3.85 lb (1.75 kg)
GKB24-SR-T N4 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 12.99"H x 6.77"W x 6.42"L
(33 x 17.2 x 16.3 cm)
1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.75" (4.5 cm) NEMA 4 8.95 lb (4.05 kg)
GKB24-SR-T N4H 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 12.99"H x 6.77"W x 6.42"L
(33 x 17.2 x 16.3 cm)
1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.75" (4.5 cm) NEMA 4 9.45 lb (4.3 kg)

74. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.
flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 46flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA
flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 46flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1 March 2014
DESCRIPTION
The Belimo NKQ Series actuators are electronic, fail safe,
fast acting actuators. They are designed to deliver 4 to 10
second (4 second is standard) fail safe return. They are
not spring return, but rather they are driven by a super capacitor which allows a very fast return to the normal or fail safe position desired
. The basic models come in both
ON/OFF and 2-10VDC options. Auxillary switches and
feedback options are available on the NKQB24-1 model. The
NKQB24-SR
comes with a feedback of 2-10 VDC standard
and the auxillary switch is an optional add-on
. For more
customized control, the NKQx-MFT models can be custom ordered based on the options available
.
FEATURES
• Standar •
Standard 1/2" to 1.05" clamp
• 3' plenum rated cable with conduit connnector
• 24VAC/DC power supply
• Direct coupled
• 5 year warranty
FAST-ACTING FAIL SAFE ACTUATORS
NKQ SERIES
NQK Series
DIMENSIONS
TORQUE DIMENSIONS
MAXIMUM SHAFT
DIAMETER
MINIMUM SHAFT
LENGTH ENCLOSURE RATING WEIGHT
54 in-lb (6 Nm) 3.9"H x 3.0"W x 7.25"L (9.9x7.6x19.3 cm) 1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.75" (4.5 cm) NEMA2 / IP54 UL enclosure type 2 2.4 lb (1.0 kg)
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL TORQUE
SUPPLY
VA CONTROL SIGNAL FEEDBACK AUXILIARY
DRIVE
TIME
NKQB24-1 54 in-lb (6 Nm) 22 VA On/Off None SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive) @ 250 VAC 4 seconds
NKQB24-SR 54 in-lb (6 Nm) 22 VA Proportional 2 to 10 VDC (4-20 mA) Proportional (2-10 VDC) SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive) @ 250 VAC 4 seconds
NKQX24-MFT* 54 in-lb (6 Nm) 22 VA Proportional 2 to 10 VDC (4-20 mA) Proportional (2-10 VDC) SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive) @ 250 VAC 4 seconds
*Custom multi-function technology option. Default is 2 to 10 VDC.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
NKQB24-1 Electronic failsafe actuator, 54 in-lb, 24 VAC/VDC, On/Off
NKQB24-SR Electronic failsafe actuator, 54 in-lb, 24 VAC/VDC, 2-10 VDC proportional (4-20 mA)
NKQX24-MFT Electronic failsafe actuator, 54 in-lb, 24 VAC/VDC, 2-10 VDC proportional (4-20 mA) w/ MFT technology
ACCESSORIES PAGE
K-AM25 0.75" (1.91 cm) shaft clamp
P370 Shaft mount auxilliary switch
S1A Optional SPDT auxiliary switch for LM, NM, AM, GM, GK, NK
ZG-102 Tandem actuator mounting bracket for AF/AFB/GMB actuators 8
ZG-NMA Crank arm adapter kit for AMB, NMB
ZS-100 Galvanized weather shield for Belimo AFB/NFB/LF/TF/GMB/AMB/NMB/LMB 7
ZS-150 Polycarbonate weather shield for Belimo AFB/NFB/LF/TF/GMB/AMB/NMB/LMB 7
ZS-260 Explosion proof housing 487

75. WE MAKE IT EASY.
47ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA
47ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1 March 2014
FAST-ACTING FAIL SAFE ACTUATORS
NKQ SERIES
VDC/4-20 mA
APPLICATION NOTES
INSTALLATION NOTES
WARNING: LIVE ELECTRICAL COMPENENTS
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of
this product, it may be necessary to work with live electrical
components. Have a qualified licensed electrician or other
individual who has been properly trained in handling live
electrical components perform these tasks. Failure to follow
all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live
electrical components could result in death or serious injury.
Meets UL requirements without the need for an electrical
ground connection.
1 Provide overload protection and disconnect as required.
2 CAUTION EQUIPMENT DAMAGE! Actuators may be
connected in parallel if not mechanically mounted to the
same shaft. Power consumption and input impedance must
be observed.
3 Actuators may also be powered by 24 VDC.
4 Position feedback cannot be used with Triac sink controller.
The actuator internal common reference is not compatible.
5 Control signal may be pulsed from either the Hot (source) or
the Common (sink) 24 VAC line.
8 Contact closures A & B also can be triacs. A & B should both
be closed for triac source and open for triac sink.
9 For triac sink the common connection from the actuator must
be connected to the hot connection of the controller.
NKQ SERIES NKQX24-MFT SERIES
The ZG-R01 500fl resistor may be used.
Floating Point control
On/Off control
PWM
Proportional / 4-20 mA
WIRING

76. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.
flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 48flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA
flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 48flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1 March 2014
DESCRIPTION
Siemens fire/smoke damper actuators are spring return,
2-position, 15 second actuators designed to operate UL
Listed smoke control dampers and combination fire/smoke
dampers
. The GND Series has 53 in-lb (6 Nm) of torque
and the more powerful GGD Series has 142 in-lb (16 Nm) of torque
. These actuators have patented built-in electronic
fusible links; there is no need to buy/install separate parts to perform that function
.
FEATURES
• Re
in the same actuator
• Patented built-in electronic fusible link
• Fast, 15-second operation
• 2 year warranty
FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER ACTUATORS
GND, GGD SERIES
GGD221.1U GND221.1U
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL TORQUE
SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
SUPPLY VA CONTROL SIGNAL DRIVE TIME
SPRING
RETURN TIME
WEIGHT
GGD121.1U 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 24 VAC 150 VA running, 10 VA holding Two-position 15 seconds 15 seconds 7 lb (3.2 kg)
GGD121.3U 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 24 VAC Two-position 15 seconds 15 seconds 7 lb (3.2 kg)
GGD126.1U 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 24 VAC Two-position 15 seconds 15 seconds 7 lb (3.2 kg)
GGD221.1U 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 120 VAC Two-position 15 seconds 15 seconds 7 lb (3.2 kg)
GGD221.3U 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 120 VAC Two-position 15 seconds 15 seconds 7 lb (3.2 kg)
GGD226.1U 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 120 VAC Two-position 15 seconds 15 seconds 7 lb (3.2 kg)
GGD321.1U 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 230 VAC Two-position 15 seconds 15 seconds 7 lb (3.2 kg)
GGD326.1U 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 230 VAC Two-position 15 seconds 15 seconds 7 lb (3.2 kg)
GND121.1U 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 24 VAC 20 VA running, 8 VA holding Two-position 15 seconds 15 seconds 4 lb (1.8 kg)
GND126.1U 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 24 VAC Two Position 15 seconds 15 seconds 4 lb (1.8 kg)
GND221.1U 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 120 VAC 20 VA running, 9 VA holding Two-position 15 seconds 15 seconds 4 lb (1.8 kg)
GND226.1U 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 120 VAC Two-position 15 seconds 15 seconds 4 lb (1.8 kg)
GND321.1U 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 230 VAC Two-position 15 seconds 15 seconds 4 lb (1.8 kg)
GND326.1U 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 230 VAC Two-position 15 seconds 15 seconds 4 lb (1.8 kg)
Add /B for bulk pack (GGD Series is 8 per pack; GND is 10 per pack)
Add/F for fusible link (GND Series only)

77. WE MAKE IT EASY.
49ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele .com888-397-5353 USA
Ω≈ 49ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1 March 2014
FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER ACTUATORS
GND, GGD SERIES
Operating Voltage 24 VAC ±20%, 115 VAC ±15%
Power Supply 230 VAC ±10%
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
Running 150 VA
Holding 10 VA
Running Torque 142 lb-in (16 Nm)
Spring Return Torque 108 lb-in (12 Nm)
Minimum Stall Torque 350 lb-in (39 Nm)
Torque Reduction at Elevated Temperature
Less than 10%
Runtime for 90°
Operating with Motor at 60 Hz
15 seconds nominal
Closing (On Power Loss) with Spring Return
15 seconds maximum
Life Expectancy Minimum 35,000 stroke cycles
Damper Shaft Size
Standard 3/8" to 1" (8 to 25.6 mm)
Oversize 1.05 inch maximum (26.6 mm)
Enclosure NEMA 1
Housing Material Die cast aluminum alloy
Ambient Temperature
Operation 0° to 130°F (-18° to 55°C)
One time 350°F (177°C) for 1/2 hour
(per UL555S)
Storage and Transport
-25° to 158°F (-32° to 70°C)
Agency Certification UL listed to UL873, cUL certified to
Canadian standard C22.2 No. 24-93
Pre-Cabled Connection 18 AWG
Dimensions See dimensions table
Weight ≈7 lbs. (3.2 kg)
Eight pack ≈56 lbs. (25.4 kg)
Operating Voltage 24 VAC/VDC ±20%, 230 VAC ±10%,
50/60 Hz
120 VAC ±10%, 60 Hz only
Power Consumption 24 VAC/VDC
Running 20 VA/12W
Holding 8 VA/6W
Power Consumption 120 VAC/230 VDC
Running 20 VA
Holding 9 VA
Running Torque 53 lb-in (6 Nm) (minimum)
Stall Torque (Minimum) 160 lb-in (18 Nm)
Torque reduction at elevated temperature
Less than 10%
Runtime for 90° 15 seconds nominal
Closing (on power loss) with spring return
15 seconds maximum
Nominal angle of rotation
95°
Life Expectancy Minimum 35,000 full stroke cycles
Damper Shaft Size 0.5" (12.7 mm) round
Damper Shaft Length, Minimum
1.4" (36 mm)
Enclosure NEMA 1
Housing Material Die cast aluminum alloy
Ambient Conditions
Operation 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C) one time
350°F (177°C)
Storage and Transport
-40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C)
Humidity (Non-condensing)
Maximum 95% RH non-condensing
Teflon® Cable 400°F (200°C)
Fixed Dual End Switches
AC Rating 24 VAC to 250 VAC, 24 VDC 6A
resistive/ 2 FLA/12 LRA
Temperature Rating 350°F (177°C)
Agency Certification UL873 , cUL C22.2 No. 24-93 , AS/
NZS 2064 1/2:1997;
conforms to
CE requirements for the EMC and
low voltage directives; Australian
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
per AS/NZS 4251
.1/2:1999 (C-tick)
Pre-Cabled Connection
Type FEP Teflon® jacketed
Length 3 ft (0.9m), 19/30 strand 18 GA
Country of Origin USA
Dimensions See dimensions table
Weight ≈4 lb (1.8 kg)
Ten pack ≈40 lb (18 kg)
GGD SPECIFICATIONS
GND SPECIFICATIONS

78. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 50flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA
flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 50flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1 March 2014
FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER ACTUATORS
GND, GGD SERIES
DIMENSIONS
MODEL TORQUE DIMENSIONS MAXIMUM SHAFT
DIAMETER
MINIMUM SHAFT
LENGTH
ENCLOSURE
RATING
WEIGHT
GGD121.1U 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L
(8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm)
1" (2.54 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) Nema 1 4.8 (2.2 kg)
GGD121.3U 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L
(8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm)
1.05" (26.6mm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) Nema 1 4.8 (2.2 kg)t
GGD126.1U 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L
(8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm)
1" (2.54 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) Nema 1 4.8 (2.2 kg)
GGD221.1U 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L
(8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm)
1" (2.54 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) Nema 1 4.8 (2.2 kg)
GGD221.3U 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L
(8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm)
1.05" (26.6mm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) Nema 1 4.8 (2.2 kg)
GGD226.1U 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L
(8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm)
1" (2.54 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) Nema 1 4.8 (2.2 kg)
GGD321.1U 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L
(8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm)
1" (2.54 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) Nema 1 4.8 (2.2 kg)
GGD326.1U 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L
(8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm)
1" (2.54 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) Nema 1 4.8 (2.2 kg)
GND121.1U 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L
(8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm)
1" (2.54 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) Nema 1 2.9 (1.3 kg)
GND126.1U 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L
(8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm)
1" (2.54 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) Nema 1 2.9 (1.3 kg)
GND221.1U 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L
(8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm)
1" (2.54 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) Nema 1 2.9 (1.3 kg)
GND226.1U 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L
(8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm)
1" (2.54 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) Nema 1 2.9 (1.3 kg)
GND321.1U 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L
(8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm)
1" (2.54 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) Nema 1 2.9 (1.3 kg)
GND326.1U 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L
(8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm)
1" (2.54 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) Nema 1 2.9 (1.3 kg)

79. WE MAKE IT EASY.
51ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA
51ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1 March 2014
FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER ACTUATORS
GND, GGD SERIES
All wiring must conform to NEC and local codes and regulations.
Wire Designations
24 VAC
115 VAC
230 VAC
BLUE (N) GREEN (GND)
FunctionColor
Line Brown
Neutral Blue
Ground Green
M
BROWN (L)
Switch Switch Makes Switch BreaksWire Color
Fixed Dual
End Switches
5° Gray <5°
85° Yellow >85°
>5°
<85°
YELLOW
85°
GRAY
5°
M
WHITE (N)
BLACK (L)
GREEN (GND)
Function Color
Line Black
Neutral White
Ground Green
M
BLACK (G0)
RED (G)
GREEN (GND)
Function
Supply (SP)
Neutral (SN)
Ground
Color
Red
Black
Green
CAUTION: The actuator must be wired with a 230 VAC line with respect to neutral and the
ground lead must be connected for proper protection of the actuator. Any other connection, such
as phase to phase, can damage the actuator.
CAUTION: Mixed switch operation to the switching outputs of both dual end switches
(5° and 85°) is not permitted.
Either AC line voltage from the same phase must be applied to all four outputs of the fixed dual
end sw itches, or UL-Class 2 voltage must be applied to all four outputs.
NOTE: Both sets of contacts are open when actuator is
between 5° and 85°.
GND, GGD Actuators
GND Actuators ONLY
WIRING

80. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 52flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA
flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 52flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1 March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER ACTUATORS
GND, GGD SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
GGD121.1U F/S, 142 in-lb, 2-position, 24 VAC, 15-second return
GGD121.3U F/S, 142 in-lb, 2-position, 24 VAC, 15-second return, oversize shaft adapter
GGD126.1U F/S, 142 in-lb, 2-position, 24 VAC, 15-second return, auxiliary switches
GGD221.1U F/S, 142 in-lb, 2-position, 120 VAC, 15-second return
GGD221.3U F/S, 142 in-lb, 2-position, 120 VAC, 15-second return, oversize shaft adapter
GGD226.1U F/S, 142 in-lb, 2-position, 120 VAC, 15-second return, auxiliary switches
GGD321.1U F/S, 142 in-lb, 2-position, 230 VAC, 15-second return
GGD326.1U F/S, 142 in-lb, 2-position, 230 VAC, 15-second return, auxiliary switches
GND121.1U F/S, 53 in-lb, 2-position, 24 VAC, 15-second return
GND126.1U F/S, 53 in-lb, 2-position, 24 VAC, 15-second return, auxiliary switches
GND221.1U F/S, 53 in-lb, 2-position, 120 VAC, 15-second return
GND226.1U F/S, 53 in-lb, 2-position, 120 VAC, 15-second return, auxiliary switches
GND321.1U F/S, 53 in-lb, 2-position, 230 VAC, 15-second return, auxiliary switches
GND326.1U F/S, 53 in-lb, 2-position, 230 VAC, 15-second return, auxiliary switches

NOTES: Add /B for bulk pack (GGD Series is 8 per pack; GND is 10 per pack)
Add/F for fusible link (GND Series only)
Standard shaft adapter is 3/8 to 1 in (8 to 25.6mm)
Oversize shaft adapter is 1.05 in maximum (26.6mm) - (GGD series only)
ACCESSORIES
GND
SERIES

ASK79.165 Electronic fusible link 165°F, 74°C
ASK79.212 Electronic fusible link 212°F, 100°C
ASK79.250 Electronic fusible link 250°F, 121°C
ASK79.350 Electronic fusible link 350°F, 177°C
GGD SERIES
985-006 Anti-rotation bracket
985-004 Self centering adapater
ASK74.1 Oversized shaft adapter up to 1.05 in (26.6mm)
985-035P25 Conduit adapter male (box of 25 only)
985-008P20 Conduit adapter female 1/2 in (12mm) (box of 20 only)

81. WE MAKE IT EASY.
flfi 53ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Control Signal Two-position
Motor DC with brushes
Wiring
MS4xxx 32" leads, 18 AWG and 7/8"
knockout holes for conduit fittings
MS8xxx 39" leads, 18 AWG and 7/8"
knockout holes for conduit fittings
Action CW/CCW mounting method
Rotation 95° ±3°, mechanically limited
Noise
Driving Open 80 dBA @ 3' (1.0 m)
Holding 20 dBA @ 3' (1.0 m) no audible noise
Life Expectancy 30,000 cycles
Operating Temperature 0° to 130°F (-18° to 55°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing
Approvals CE, C-TICK, cULus,UL873, NEMA1
Warranty 5 years
FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER ACTUATORS
MS4XXX, MS81XX SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Honeywell fire and smoke damper actuators are designed to
meet both UL-555 and UL-555S 350°F safety requirements
for combined fire and smoke applications
. The fast-acting
actuators close dampers in 15-20 seconds, and the integral spring return ensures the consistent, proper level of torque
.
FEATURES
• Designed to meet UL-555 and UL-555S requirements
• Robust die-cast aluminum housing for protection and
long service life
• Maximum spring return timing of 15-20 seconds
• Reliably built by the industry leader
• Energy-saving patented design
• No audible noise during holding
APPLICATION
Fire and Smoke actuator replacement must be installed correctly, per local codes, and approved by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)
. Honeywell recommends
following all local, state and national codes for periodic testing of the entire smoke control system
. Refer to National
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
MS4120F1006
Fire Protection Association (NFPA) National Fire Codes NFPA90A, NFPA92A, and NFPA92B for the application
. NFPA
recommends periodic examination of each fire/smoke damper (annually or semi-annually) to ensure proper performance
.
MS4104F1210
Model Torque Dimensions
Maximum Shaft
Diameter
Minimum Shaft
Length
Weight Enclosure Rating
MS4xxx 30 in-lb (3.4 Nm)
8.94"H x 5.125"W x 3.25"D
(22.7 x 13.0 x 8.3 cm)
0.5” (1.3 cm) 2" (5.1 cm) 5.0 lb (2.3 kg) NEMA 1 (IP40)
MS8xxx 80 in-lb (9 Nm)
MSxx20 175 in-lb (20 Nm)
10.7"H x 2.9"W x 3.9"D
(2.71 x 7.5 x 10.0 cm)
1.03” (2.6 cm) 1.0” (2.5 cm) 7.0 lb (3.2 kg) NEMA 2 (IP54)
DIMENSIONS

82. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 54flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER ACTUATORS
MS4XXX, MS81XX SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MS4104F1010 Fire/smoke actuator, 30 in-lb, 120 VAC
MS4104F1210 Fire/smoke actuator, 30 in-lb, 120 VAC, w/ 2 aux. switches
MS4604F1010 Fire/smoke actuator, 30 in-lb, 230 VAC
MS4604F1210 Fire/smoke actuator, 30 in-lb, 230 VAC, w/ 2 aux. switches
MS8104F1010 Fire/smoke actuator, 30 in-lb, 24 VAC
MS8104F1210 Fire/smoke actuator, 30 in-lb, 24 VAC, w/ 2 aux. switches
MS4109F1010 Fire/smoke actuator, 80 in-lb, 120 VAC
MS4109F1210 Fire/smoke actuator, 80 in-lb, 120 VAC, w/ 2 aux. switches
MS4609F1010 Fire/smoke actuator, 80 in-lb, 230 VAC
MS4609F1210 Fire/smoke actuator, 80 in-lb, 230 VAC, w/ 2 aux. switches
MS8109F1010 Fire/smoke actuator, 80 in-lb, 24 VAC
MS8109F1210 Fire/smoke actuator, 80 in-lb, 24 VAC, w/ 2 aux. switches
MS8120F1002 Fire/smoke actuator, 175 in-lb, 24 VAC
MS8120F1200 Fire/smoke actuator, 175 in-lb, 24 VAC, w/ 2 aux. switches
MS4120F1006 Fire/smoke actuator, 175 in-lb, 120 VAC
MS4120F1204 Fire/smoke actuator, 175 in-lb, 120 VAC, w/ 2 aux. switches
ACCESSORIES
201391 Shaft adapter for 3/8" shafts
205649 Surface mounting bracket (not supplied with actuator) for MLxx15, MSxx09
32003532-005 Auxiliary switch, dual SPDT, for MLxx15, MSxx09 fire/smoke actuators
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model Torque Supply Voltage Supply Current Auxiliary Switch
Drive
Time
Spring
Return
Time
MS8104F1010
30 in-lb (3.4 Nm)
24 VAC +20%, -10%, 50/60 Hz 16 VA running, 8 VA holding
None
15 seconds 15 seconds
MS8104F1210 2 SPST, 5A res., 3A ind. @ 250 VAC
MS4104F1010
120 VAC +10%, 60 Hz 0.18A running, 0.11A holding
None
MS4104F1210 2 SPST, 5A res., 3A ind. @ 250 VAC
MS4604F1010
230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz 0.13A running, 0.10A holding
None
MS4604F1210 2 SPST, 5A res., 3A ind. @ 250 VAC
MS8109F1010
80 in-lb (9 Nm)
24 VAC +20%, -10%, 50/60 Hz 23VA running, 8VA holding
None
MS8109F1210 2 SPST, 5A res., 3A ind. @ 250 VAC
MS4109F1010
120 VAC ±10%, 50/60Hz 0.25A running, 0.13A holding
None
MS4109F1210 2 SPST, 5A res., 3A ind. @ 250 VAC
MS4609F1010
230 VAC ±10%, 50/60Hz 0.13A running, 0.09A holding
None
MS4609F1210 2 SPST, 5A res., 3A ind. @ 250 VAC
MS8109F1010
175 in-lb (20 Nm)
24 VAC +20%, -10%, 50/60 Hz
None
MS8109F1210 2 SPST, 5A res., 3A ind. @ 250 VAC
MS8120F1002
120 VAC +10%, 60 Hz 0.35A running, 0.15A holding
None
MS8120F1200 2 SPST, 5A res., 3A ind. @ 250 VAC
MS4120F1006
230 VAC +10%, 50/60 Hz 0.20A running, 0.14A holding
None
MS4120F1204 2 SPST, 5A res., 3A ind. @ 250 VAC

83. WE MAKE IT EASY.
flfi 55ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Motor Brushless DC
Wiring 3-foot leads, 18 AWG, 1/2" NPT
conduit connection
Feedback 2-10 VDC (FSAF24-SR only)
Action CW/CCW mounting method
Rotation 95°
Manual Override 3 mm hex crank (FSAF only)
Noise 40 db drive, 62 db spring
Life Expectancy 20,000 cycles per UL555S
Operating Temperature
FSLF, FSNF 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) normal
duty; 3 on/off cycles after 30 minutes
at ambient temperature of 350°F
(177°C) safety duty;
FSAF -22° to 122°F (-30° to 50°C) normal
duty; 3 on/off cycles after 30 minutes at ambient temperature of 250°F (121°C) safety duty
Operating Humidity
5 to 95% RH
Approvals cULus
Warranty 5 years
FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER ACTUATORS
FSLF, FSNF, FSAF SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Belimo’s broad product line of fire and smoke damper actuators covers the established range of system applications including active smoke control for stairwell, under-floor and other pressurization applications
.
FEATURES
• ISO 9001 Certified Quality Control and a 5-year warranty
assure reliable operation
• 24, 120 and 230 VAC availibility to meet various installation
requirements
• 24 VDC model (FSAF only) with 2-position and
proportional control for DC power applications
• Unique FSAF24-BAL actuator allows duct balancing
capabilities in fire and smoke dampers
• UL555 and UL555S listed with U.S. damper manufacturers
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION AND INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
Note: Add “-S” suffix to model number for models with auxiliary contacts: 2 SPST, 3A (0.5 A inductive) @ 125/250 VAC
Note: FSAFB24-SR model available with shorter 8" connection cable. Add “-SC” to the end of the model number.
FSAF24
FSLF120
Model Torque Supply Voltage Supply VA Control SignalDrive Time
Spring Return
Time
Weight
FSLF24 30 in-lb (3.5 Nm) 24 VAC 5 VA Two-position 15 seconds 15 seconds 3.4 lb (1.5 kg)
FSLF120 30 in-lb (3.5 Nm) 120 VAC 18 VA Two-position 15 seconds 15 seconds 4.0 lb (1.8 kg)
FSLF230 30 in-lb (3.5 Nm) 230 VAC 17 VA Two-position 15 seconds 15 seconds 4.0 lb (1.8 kg)
FSNF24 70 in-lb (7.8 Nm) 24 VAC 27 VA Two-position 15 seconds 15 seconds 6.0 lb (2.7 kg)
FSNF120 70 in-lb (7.8 Nm) 120 VAC 27 VA Two-position 15 seconds 15 seconds 6.1 lb (2.8 kg)
FSNF230 70 in-lb (7.8 Nm) 230 VAC 27 VA Two-position 15 seconds 15 seconds 6.1 lb (2.8 kg)
FSAF24 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC 10 VA Two-position 75 seconds 20 seconds 5.7 lb (2.6 kg)
FSAF120 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 120 VAC 11 VA Two-position 75 seconds 20 seconds 6.1 lb (2.8 kg)
FSAF230 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 230 VAC 11 VA Two-position 75 seconds 20 seconds 6.1 lb (2.8 kg)
FSAF24-SR 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC 11 VA
Proportional 2-10 VDC,
4-20 mA
75 seconds 20 seconds 5.7 lb (2.6 kg)
FSAF24-BAL133 in-lb (15 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC 10 VA
Floating/3-position, built-
in potentiometer
75 seconds 20 seconds 5.7 lb (2.6 kg)
FSAFB24-SR180 in-lb (20Nm) 24 VAC 9 VA
Proportional, 2-10 VDC,
4-20 mA
75 seconds 20 seconds 4.6 lb (2.1 kg)

84. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 56flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
FSAFxx-SFSAF24R-SR-S FSNFxx-S
10°
10°
85°
5°
85°
30° to
90°
FSLFxx-S
NOTE: Refer to Belimo FS Actuators Guide for complete wiring information.
Line Voltage
FSAF24-SR, Proportional FSLF, FSNF, FSAF, 2-position
6
FSxF120,
FSxF230
FSxF24
Provide overload protection and disconnect as required.
Actuator may also be powered by 24 VDC.
No ground connection required for AF models.
Double insulated.
Only connect common to neg. (–) leg of control circ uits.
6The ZG-R01-500 flfiresistor converts a 4 to 20 mA
control signal to 2 to 10 VDC.
AF models meet cULus or UL and CSA Standard requirments without the need of an electrical ground connection. LF and NF high voltage models require ground.
CAUTION Equipment Damage!
Actuators may be connected in parallel. Power consumption and input impedance must be observed.
NOTE: Refer to Belimo FS Actuators Guide for complete wiring information.
WIRING
FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER ACTUATORS
FSLF, FSNF, FSAF SERIES
Thermal sensor application
Smoke detector or relay from area smoke detection system
To alarm
system
HOT
120 or
24 VAC
N or
COM
165°F
BELIMO FSxx ACTUATOR
F & S Damper
Fusible link and shaft spring application
Smoke detector or relay from area smoke detection system
To alarm
system
HOT
120 or
24 VAC
N or
COM
BELIMO FSxx ACTUATOR
F & S Damper
AUXILIARY SWITCH WIRING
IMPORTANT: In most jurisdictions, replacement is considered a normal repair and no permit is required. A record must be kept
on site per NFPA 105. UL expects instructions to be used. See www.belimo.com/firesmoke. Confirm with Local Authority Having
Jurisdiction (AHJ).
APPLICATION WIRING

85. WE MAKE IT EASY.
57ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ZONE
CONTROLLER
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3
RETURN AIR
SUPPLY AIR
FROM ADDITIONAL ZONES
TO ADDITIONAL ZONES
Size 6" round through 16" round (even
sizes)
Type Round, single-blade, 90° rotation
Shaft 1/2" (1.3 cm) diameter shaft, 3.9"
(9.9 cm) length
Actuator Bracket Pre-drilled holes to fit Honeywell or
Kele 35 in-lb or 44 in-lb actuators
Operating Torque Less than 35 in-lb (4 Nm)
Maximum Static Pressure
4" WC (1.0 kPa)
Maximum Velocity 2500 ft/min (17.8 m/s)
Leakage Class 12.5 cfm per sq. ft. @ 1" WC
17.6 cfm per sq. ft. @ 2" WC
21.6 cfm per sq. ft. @ 3" WC
25.0 cfm per sq. ft. @ 4" WC
Frame
6" through 10" Mill galvanized, 24 gauge, sleeve-
type, spiral duct, crimped on
downstream side
12" through 16" Mill galvanized, 22 gauge, sleeve-
type, spiral duct, crimped on downstream side
Bearings
Flanged bronze oilite, pressed onto
frame
Blade Design 16 gauge galvanized steel blade
with closed-cell neoprene seal
Operating Temperature 32° to 130°F (0° to 54°C)
Warranty 1 year
ROUND DAMPERS
D690 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The D690 Series round control dampers are low-leakage, single blade dampers designed for use in conventional air handling system round ductwork
. They come standard with an
actuator mounting bracket that accommodates the Honeywell ML6161/ML7161/MN6105/MN7505 and the Kele KA-35/ KA-44 direct-coupled actuators
. The dampers are available
for standard same-day shipping from Kele with or without an actuator pre-mounted
.
FEATURES
• Neoprene seal for tight closing and low leakage
• Oilite bearings for long life
• Optional Honeywell or Kele actuator pre-mounted
APPLICATION
The D690 Series is intended to be used in commercial zoning systems as an individual zone damper controlled by a zone thermostat, or as a bypass damper controlled by a duct static pressure sensor/controller
.
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Pressure drop
"WC (kPa)
Flow rate CFM
D690A1002
0.05 (0.012) 180
0.075 (0.019) 210
0.10 (0.025) 240
D690A1010
0.05 (0.012) 410
0.075 (0.019) 485
0.10 (0.025) 580
D690A1028
0.05 (0.012) 693
0.075 (0.019) 849
0.10 (0.025) 980
D690A1036
0.05 (0.012) 1200
0.075 (0.019) 1460
0.10 (0.025) 1600
D690A1044
0.05 (0.012) 1336
0.075 (0.019) 1636
0.10 (0.025) 1890
D690A1051
0.05 (0.012) 1690
0.075 (0.019) 2080
0.10 (0.025) 2400
PRESSURE DROP AND FLOW RATE
D690A1044
D690A1044/KA-35-VAV
ZONE DAMPER APPLICATION

86. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 58flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
DIMENSIONS
ROUND DAMPERS
D690 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Note: Add the following weights when ordering with actuator:
KA-35-P or ML7161A2008 1.3 lb (.59 kg)
KA-35-VAV or ML6161A2009 1.1 lb (.50 kg)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
201052A Auxiliary switch (1 SPDT) for ML6161/ML7161/KA-35 actuators
TT-470 Tilt transducer with 1/2-in crank arm, 4-20 mA loop powered 6
Model Dimensions Weight
D690A1002 6” diameter, 12” length 3.0 lb (1.36 kg)
D690A1010 8” diameter, 12” length 4.0 lb (1.81 kg)
D690A1028 10” diameter, 12” length 5.0 lb (2.27 kg)
D690A1036 12” diameter, 13” length 6.0 lb (2.72 kg)
D690A1044 14” diameter, 15” length 8.0 lb (3.63 kg)
D690A1051 16” diameter, 17” length 10.0 lb (4.54 kg)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
D690A1002 6" round damper with actuator mounting plate, 12" spiral duct length
D690A1010 8" round damper with actuator mounting plate, 12" spiral duct length
D690A1028 10" round damper with actuator mounting plate, 12" spiral duct length
D690A1036 12" round damper with actuator mounting plate, 13" spiral duct length
D690A1044 14" round damper with actuator mounting plate, 15" spiral duct length
D690A1051 16" round damper with actuator mounting plate, 17" spiral duct length
D690A1002/KA-35-P 6" D690A1002 with Kele non-spring return proportional actuator
D690A1010/KA-35-P 8" D690A1010 with Kele non-spring return proportional actuator
D690A1028/KA-35-P 10" D690A1028 with Kele non-spring return proportional actuator
D690A1036/KA-35-P 12" D690A1036 with Kele non-spring return proportional actuator
D690A1044/KA-35-P 14" D690A1044 with Kele non-spring return proportional actuator
D690A1051/KA-35-P 16" D690A1051 with Kele non-spring return proportional actuator
D690A1002/KA-35-V
AV
6" D690A1002 with Kele non-spring return floating actuator
D690A1010/KA-35-V
AV
8" D690A1010 with Kele non-spring return floating actuator
D690A1028/KA-35-V
AV
10" D690A1028 with Kele non-spring return floating actuator
D690A1036/KA-35-V
AV
12" D690A1036 with Kele non-spring return floating actuator
D690A1044/KA-35-V
AV
14" D690A1044 with Kele non-spring return floating actuator
D690A1051/KA-35-V
AV
16" D690A1051 with Kele non-spring return floating actuator
D690A1002/ML7161A2008 6" D690A1002 with Honeywell non-spring return proportional actuator
D690A1010/ML7161A2008 8" D690A1010 with Honeywell non-spring return proportional actuator
D690A1028/ML7161A2008 10" D690A1028 with Honeywell non-spring return proportional actuator
D690A1036/ML7161A2008 12" D690A1036 with Honeywell non-spring return proportional actuator
D690A1044/ML7161A2008 14" D690A1044 with Honeywell non-spring return proportional actuator
D690A1051/ML7161A2008 16" D690A1051 with Honeywell non-spring return proportional actuator
D690A1002/ML6161A2009 6" D690A1002 with Honeywell non-spring return floating actuator
D690A1010/ML6161A2009 8" D690A1010 with Honeywell non-spring return floating actuator
D690A1028/ML6161A2009 10" D690A1028 with Honeywell non-spring return floating actuator
D690A1036/ML6161A2009 12" D690A1036 with Honeywell non-spring return floating actuator
D690A1044/ML6161A2009 14" D690A1044 with Honeywell non-spring return floating actuator
D690A1051/ML6161A2009 16" D690A1051 with Honeywell non-spring return floating actuator

87. WE MAKE IT EASY.
flfi 59ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Size 4", 5", 6", 7", 8", 9", 10" to 24" (even)
Type Round, single-blade, 90° rotation
Shaft 1/2" (1.3 cm) diameter shaft, 7" (17.8
cm) length
Actuator Bracket Optional, galvanized or stainless
steel, 5.5"W x 9.3"L (to shaft center)
Operating Torque (4xD") + 20 in-lb (with seals);
(1.5xD") + 20 in-lb (without seals)
Maximum Static Pressure
10" WC (4" to 6")
8" WC (7" to 12")
6" WC (>12")
Maximum Velocity 4000 ft/min (28.5 m/s)
Leakage Class AMCA Class 1 (with seals); 1.4%
to 5.5% of maximum flow (without
seals)
Frame Galvanized 20-gauge steel
Bearings Stainless steel
Blade Design Riveted double-layer galvanized
steel, full blade neoprene seals
(standard, others optional)
Operating Temperature -50° to 250°F (-46° to 121°C)
Dimensions 4" through 24" diameter, 7" frame
length
Weight Approximately 1 lb per inch diameter
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
ROUND CONTROL DAMPERS
CDRS25 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
CDRS25 Series round damper frames are made of 20-gauge welded, galvanized steel, 7" in length
. Blades are double-
skin galvanized steel, strength-equivalent to 14-gauge steel but lighter to handle
. Shaft extensions are half-inch diameter
with stainless steel bearings for long life damper actuation.
Standard neoprene b
lade edge seals offer superior low-
leakage performance
. Optional aluminum or stainless steel
construction is available, as well as an actuator mounting bracket
.
FEATURES
• Round sizes from 4" to 24"
• Velocities up to 4000 FPM
• Neoprene blade seal standard
• 20-gauge frame
• Two-ply blade, strength equivalent to 14-gauge steel
OPERATION
The CDRS25 is ideal for exhaust air modulation, supply air
volume control, zone temperature control, minimum outdoor
air intake control, and many other applications in both high-
velocity and high-pressure systems
. Made specifically for
easy installation in spiral ductwork, stiffener beads allow for easy sealing of duct connections
.
OPTIONS •
Edge seals (none, silicon, EPDM, Viton®)
• Stainless steel construction
• Aluminum construction
• Actuator mounting bracket
SPECIFICATIONS

88. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 60flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Pressure/
Class
Required Rating Extended Ranges (Opt.)
Leakage, FT
3
/MIN/FT
2
(L/S/M
2
)
4" (1.0 kPa)1" (0.25 kPa) 8" (2.0 kPa) 12" (3.0 kPa)
8 (40.6)3 (15.2)1A 11 (55.9) 14 (71.1)
8 (40.6)4 (20.3) 11 (55.9) 14 (71.1)
20 (102)10 (50.8) 28 (142) 35 (178)
80 (406)40 (203)
1
2
31 12 (569) 140 (711)
7”
(17.8)
in
(cm)
D - Diameter
Sheet metal screw
(outside bead)
Damper
Stiffener bead
Spiral DuctSpiral Duct
INSTALLATION
ROUND CONTROL DAMPERS
CDRS25 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: CDRS25N1B(12) CDRS25 round steel control damper, with seals and actuator mounting plate, 12" diameter.
* 316 stainless steel also av ailable as special order, call Kele
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CDRS25G Round galvanized steel control damper
CDRS25A Round aluminum control damper
CDRS25S Round 304* stainless steel control damper
BLADE SEAL OPTIONS
N Standard neoprene seals, AMCA Class 1 leakage
X No blade seals, no leakage class, approximate leakage 1.4% to 5.5% of maximum flow at 4" W.C., not recommended for OSA intake
E EPDM blade seals, AMCA Class 1 leakage
S Silicone blade seals, 400°F (204°C), AMCA Class 1 leakage
V Viton blade seals, AMCA Class 1 leakage
AXLE CONSTRUCTION
1 Standard galvanized steel axle, 1/2" diameter, extending 5.5" outside damper
2 Stainless steel axle, 1/2" diameter, extending 5.5" outside damper (Note: used on all stainless steel dampers)
MOTOR MOUNTING OPTIONS
X No mounting bracket, with 5.5" shaft extension
B Galvanized steel actuator mounting plate, 16 AWG, 5.5"W x 12"L, with 4" shaft extension
SSB Stainless steel actuator mounting plate, 16 AWG, 5.5"W x 12"L, with 4" shaft extension
SIZE (OUTSIDE DIAMETER IN INCHES)
(OD) Duct outside diameter (4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24) inches av ailable
Note: All units are furnished approximately 1/8" smaller than the outside diameter
dimension to facilitate spiral duct connection.
PERFORMANCE REFERENCE STANDARD PER AMCA
ACCESSORIES PAGE
TS-470 Damper position switch with SPDT switch, for 1/2" shaft 4
TS-470-2 Damper position switch with two SPDT switches, for 1/2" shaft 4
TS-470-P Damper position switch with SPDT switch, for 1/2" shaft,
stainless steel housing, and plenum-rated cable 4
TS-475 Non-mercury damper position switch, SPDT, for 1/2" damper shaft 5
TT
-470
Tilt transducer with 1/2-in crank arm, 4-20 mA loop powered 6

89. WE MAKE IT EASY.
flfi 61ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Type Parallel or opposed blade
Shaft 6"L x 0.5" Dia. (15.2 x 1.3 cm)
located on linkage side
Frame Equivalent 13 gauge galvanized
(CD 50 aluminum); 5" face-to-face
dimension
Bearings Synthetic
Blade Design 6" galvanized steel for CD40, CD60;
6" aluminum for CD50; blade pins 0
.5" steel hex
Side Seals Self-adjusting steel
(CD45, 46, 50, 60)
Linkage Concealed in frame
Available Options Flanges (front and/or rear)
Weight 7 lbs/sq. ft (shipping weight estimate)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
RECTANGULAR DAMPERS
CD40, CD50, CD60 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Ruskin parallel and opposed-blade HVAC control dampers are custom made-to-order
. The damper frames are made of
galvanized steel in a channel frame construction, offering an equivalent 13-gauge metal strength
. The CD40 Series has 6"
wide V-groove blades that are made of 16-gauge galvanized steel with synthetic bearings
. The CD50 has aluminum airfoil
blades with synthetic bearings. CD60 dampers offer 14-gauge
blades.
CD44 Basic control damper, approximately 4% leakage
CD45 Standard control damper, AMCA Class 3 CD46 Low leakage control damper, AMCA Class 2 CD50 Aluminum frame air foil, ultra-low AMCA Class 1A CD60 Steel air foil, ultra-low AMCA Class 1A
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
CD-46
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
CD44 CD45 CD46 CD50 CD60
Blades 16-gauge V-groove 16-gauge V-groove 16-gauge V-groove Aluminum airfoil 14-gauge steel airfoil
Jamb seals None Flexible steel Flexible steel Flexible steel Flexible steel
Blade seals None Foam PVC coated polyester Ruskiprene® Ruskiprene®
Leakage (% of
maximum flow)
2.7 to 4.3% @ 1" WC
differential pressure
0.7 to 1.1% @ 1" WC
differential pressure
0.4 to 0.5% @ 1" WC
differential pressure
<8 cfm/sq. ft. @ 4” WC
differential pressure
<3 cfm/sq. ft. @ 1” WC
differential pressure
AMCA Class Not classified Class 3 Class 2 Class 1A Class 1A
Operating
Temperature
-40° to 240°F
(-40° to 116°C)
-25° to 180°F
(-32° to 83°C)
-25° to 180°F
(-32° to 83°C)
-72° to 275°F
(-58° to 135°C)
-72° to 275°F
(-58° to 135°C)
Maximum
Velocity
2000 fpm @
2.5" WC
2000 fpm @
2.5" WC
2000 fpm @
2.5" WC
3000 fpm @
3.5" WC
3000 fpm @
3.5" WC
Torque required 2.5 in-lb/sq. ft.5 in-lb/sq. ft. 7 in-lb/sq. ft. 7 in-lb/sq. ft. 7 in-lb/sq. ft.

90. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 62flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
RECTANGULAR DAMPERS
CD40, CD50, CD60 SERIES
DAMPER OPTION DIAGRAMS
ORDERING INFORMATION
* All flanges are outside the ordered damper dimension (W x H). See damper option diagrams for flange dimensions.
** Vertical blade construction
*** Damper width is defined as the outside dimension parallel to the blade(s), regardless of ve rtical or horizontal orientation.
† Jackshaft is included in all multi-section dampers. Crank arm is not included.
‡ All single-section dampers have 1/2"Ø drive shaft
Example: CD46-OB-0X-12X18
CD46 steel control damper, opposed blade, no flange, standard horizontal construction, 12"W x 18"H
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CD44 Steel control damper without jamb or blade seals. No leakage class, 4% of maximum flow approximate leakage at 4" W.C., not recommended for OSA intake
CD45 Steel control damper with flexible stainless steel jamb seals and foam blade seals. AMCA Class 3 leakage, 40 CFM/ft
2
at 1" W.C.
CD46 Steel control damper with flexible stainless steel jamb seals and PVC blade seals. Very low AMCA Class 2 leakage, 10 CFM/ft
2
at 1" W.C.
CD50 Aluminum control damper with flexible stainless steel jamb seals and Ruskiprene
®
blade seals. Ultra-low AMCA Class 1A leakage, 3 CFM/ft
2
at 1" W.C.
CD60 Steel control damper with flexible stainless steel jamb seals and Ruskiprene
®
blade seals. Ultra-low AMCA Class 1A leakage, 3 CFM/ft
2
at 1" W.C.)
BLADE CONFIGURATION
OB Opposed blade (damper must ha ve two blades minimum)
PB Parallel blade (single blade av ailable)
MOUNTING OPTIONS
0 No flange
1* Flange on front of damper, opposite side of jack shaft (if jack shaft included)
2* Flange on back of damper, same side as jack shaft (if jack shaft included)
3* Flanges both front and back
4* T-flange frame option for wa fer-style mounting with increased free area (see T-Flange Fr ame drawing)
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
X Horizontal blade mounting, no special construction
T** Vertical blade mounting configuration (includes thrust bearings)**
SIZE - WIDTH*** by HEIGHT in INCHES (0.01" INCREMENTS), PLEASE OBSERVE LIMITS IN THIS TABLE
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
Opposed 5" x 10" 48" x 72" 48" x 72.01" Unlimited
Parallel 5" x 5" 48" x 72" 48" x 72.01" Unlimited
Opposed 5" x 10" 36" x 48"
Parallel 5" x 5" 36" x 48"
Opposed 6" x 9" 60" x 72" 48" x 72.01" Unlimited
Parallel 6" x 8" 60" x 72" 48" x 72.01" Unlimited
Opposed 6" x 9" 36" x 48"
Parallel 6" x 8" 36" x 48"
Opposed 8" x 11" 60" x 72" 48" x 72.01" Unlimited
Parallel 8" x 10" 60" x 72" 48" x 72.01" Unlimited
Opposed 8" x 11" 36" x 48"
Parallel 8" x 10" 36" x 48"
Multi-section
†
Special construction -- call Kele
Special construction -- call Kele
Special construction -- call Kele
(W*** x H)
Model and mounting Blade style
Single section
‡
CD4x models horizontal blade:
CD4x models ve rtical blade:
CD50 models horizontal blade:
CD50 models ve rtical blade:
CD60 models horizontal blade:
CD60 models ve rtical blade:
Opposed
Blade Action,
Front Flange
CD40, CD60, CD50 Dampers
Note: All flanges are outside W x H damper dimensions.
Frame in
(cm)
Lexan
Bearing
Idler
Axle
Blade
Clip
H
W
No flange
Depth = 5 (12.7)
Blade
Blade Stop
Outboard
Bracket
Extended Shaft
Spring Clip
Supplied with
Damper
Crossov er
Tiebar
Tiebar
1/2" shaft
Overtravel
Stop (All
axles are
drive blades)
Drive
Shaft
(Blade
axle)
Jackshaft bracket
as needed
1/2" for < 12.5 sq ft
1" for > 12.5 sq ft
F Linkage
Assembly
Truarc
Ring E-25
Linkage
Assembly
Truarc Ring E-25
Parallel
Blade Action,
Rear Flange
Parallel
Blade Action,
Double Flange
3.13
(7.9)
1.5 (3.8)
1.5 (3.8)
Jackshaft
bracket
as needed
Jackshaft
bracket
as needed
1 3/8"
(35)
1 3/8" (35)
1 3/8" (35)
W
1 3/8"
(35)
TYP
H
T-FLANGE

91. WE MAKE IT EASY.
63ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Leakage Resistance
VD-1310
VD-1320
VD-1330
17 cfm/sq ft maximum at 1 in. static pressure
45 cfm/sq ft maximum at 4 in. static pressure
3.4 cfm/sq ft maximum at 1 in. static pressure
6.0 cfm/sq ft maximum at 4 in. static pressure
2.2 cfm/sq ft maximum at 1 in. static pressure
3.7 cfm/sq ft maximum at 4 in. static pressure
Class
IA
I
II
III
1
3
4
10
40
1. Maximum allowable leakable in cfm/sq ft is m3/s x 196)
for all sizes.
4
--
8
20
80
8
--
11
28
112
12
--
14
35
140
TABLE 1. LEAKAGE RESISTANCE CLASSES
1
Static Pressure (inches water)March 2014
Type Parallel or opposed blade
Shaft 7"L x 0.5" Dia. (17.8 x 1.3 cm) with
holding clip
Frame 13 gauge galvanized steel; 3.1" face-
to-face dimension
Bearings Acetal (bronze optional)
Blade Design Single 16-gauge galvanized steel
(VD-1310); double 22-gauge
galvanized (VD-1320); 1/16"
extruded aluminum airfoil (VD-1330);
blade pins 3/8" square zinc-plated
steel; Santoprene blade seals (silicon
optional for VD-1320)
Side Seals
Self-adjusting stainless steel
Linkage 1/8" zinc-plated rolled steel
Operating Temperature -40° to 200°F (-40° to 93°C); high
temperature option with bronze bearings, silicon seals up to 250°F (121°C)
Weight
7 lbs/sq. ft (shipping weight estimate)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 3 years
RECTANGULAR DAMPERS
VD-1300 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Johnson Controls VD-1300 Series parallel/oppposed
blade HVAC control dampers are custom made to size
requirements
. Damper frames are constructed of formed
13-gauge galvanized sheet metal mechanically joined with dual linkage concealed in the side channels to eliminate noise and friction
. Compressible spring stainless steel side seals
and acetal or bronze bearings are also available. Dampers
are a
vailable in Class I, II, and III leakage performance
grades
.
FEATURES
• Three-day construction standard
• 24-hour fast track shipping available
• Tested to over 100,000 cycles
• Self-compensating, stainless steel side seals
• Blade rotation stops
• Square blade pins for non-slip pivoting
Leakage (see Table 1 above)
Blade construction
6" wide nominal
Operating torque @
0.5" W.C. (100 fpm)
1" W.C. (1000 fpm)
Velocity/Pressure limits for specified performance
Damper 24"W (60.96 cm)
Damper 48"W (121.9 cm)
VD-1310
Class III
Single 16-gauge
galvanized steel
4.25 in-lb
5.25 in-lb
4500 fpm @ 6" W.C.
1500 fpm @ 3" W.C.
VD-1320
Class I
Double 22-gauge
galvanized steel
4.5 in-lb
5.5 in-lb
6000 fpm@ 8" W.C.
2000 fpm @ 8" W.C.
VD-1330
Class IA
1/16" airfoil
extruded aluminum
4.5 in-lb
5.5 in-lb
8000 fpm @ 10" W.C.
4000 fpm @ 8" W.C.
Frame
Linkage
Blade pins
Bearings
Drive shaft
13-gauge galvanized steel
1/8" zinc-plated rolled steel
3/8" square steel, zinc-plated
Acetal (bronze optional)
7.0"L x 0.5"D (17.78 x 1.27 cm)
with holding clip
Blade seals
Side seals
Ambient temp
Hi temp option
Santoprene (silicone option VD-1320)
Self-adjusting stainless steel
-40° to 200°F (-40° to 93°C)
-40° to 250°F (-40° to 121°C)
Requires bronze bearings and silicon seals
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS

92. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 64flfi
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1
kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Dimensions notes
1) Unit furnished approximately 1/4" (0.6 cm) undercut for proper fit in duct. If no undercut wanted, order "E" Option code.
2) Dimensions shown are from the outside edges of the damper frame
DIMENSIONS
RECTANGULAR DAMPERS
VD-1300 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
VO
Note: The jackshaft components and dampers will be shipped as separate panels a maximum of 48"W and 76"H.
The required jackshafts, coupling kits, and support bars must be field-assembled.
Example: VOVSN-024-025 Opposed blade Class III damper 24" x 25", with standard bear ings/seal.
VS W W WH H H Option Code NumberN
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
V Product family
BLADE OPERATION
O Opposed
P Parallel
BLADE TYPE
A Class I VD-1330 airfoil design
P Class II VD-1320 double piece design
V Class III VD-1310 with seals single piece design (not recommended for outside air)
BEARING/SEAL TYPE
E Extended - bronze/santoprene
H High - bronze/silicone
S Standard - acetal/santoprene
ACTUATOR
N None (integral actuators available, special order, contact Ke le)
WIDTH
W W W See Ta ble 2 above for limitations (1" increments), use all 3 digits
HEIGHT
H H H See Ta ble 2 above for limitations (1" increments), use all 3 digits
OPTIONS (LIMIT TWO)
See Table 3 above
Holding Clip
Drive
Shaft
included
(DMPR-KC003)
Four holes 0.19 (0.48) diameter
top and bottom channel
Varies with
damper height
top and bottom
3.1
(7.9)
3.1
(7.9)
3.1
(7.9)
2.8
(7.2)
Approximately
6 (15)
Height
Width
Air Flow
in
(cm)
Holding Clip
Drive
Shaft
included
(DMPR-KC003)
4 holes 3/16" (0.19) dia
top and bottom channel
Varies with
damper height
top and bottom
3-1/8
(7.9)
3-1/8
(7.9)
3-1/8
(7.9)
2-27/32
(7.2)
Approximately
6 (15.24)
Height
Width
Air Flow
in
(cm)
VD-1310 Class III BladeVD-1320 Class II Blade
VD-1330 Class I Blade
Table 2. Damper Section Sizes (1" increments)
Single Section Dimension
Width (VD-1310) 8" to 36" (20 to 91 cm)
Width (VD-1320, -1330) 8" to 48" (20 to 122 cm)
Height (VD-1310, -1320, -1330)6" to 76" (15 to 193 cm)
Multi-section Dimension
Width (VD-1310) 36" to 108" (91 to 274 cm)
Width (VD-1320, -1330)48" to 192" (124 to 488 cm)
Height (VD-1310) 6" to 76" (15 to 193 cm)
Height (VD-1320, -1330) 6" to 228" (15 to 732 cm)
Table 3. Option Codes
E Exact, whole inch size, no undercut
F 1.5" flange on entering side
G 1.5" flange on leaving side
H 1.5" flange on both sides
J
Jackshaft, field-installed (must specify if
needed, not automatically included with
multi-section dampers)

93. HUMIDITY
ALARMS & INDICATION
RAD-1 | p. 66
51XBR Series | p. 69
AIS | p. 65
MNST/MST1 | p. 92
Series
869/869STR | p. 67
ST120 Series | p. 90
ALARMS &
INDICATION
Pilla
Electrical
Products, Inc.
Pilla
Electrical
Products, Inc.
Kele Offers Custom Assemblies and FREE Display Calibrations.

94. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
200 Class | p. 80
ClearView
ESM Series | p. 86
ESP Series | p. 88
ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS &
INDICATION
Alarm and Indication Stations
AIS — Kele Alarm Indication Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
RAD-1 — Kele Remote Alarm Indication Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Emergency Operator Stations E-Stop ESB Series — Operator Stations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
E-Stop ESM Series — Emergency Operator Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
E-Stop ESP Series — Emergency Operator Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
ST120 Series — Operator Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
WPS Series — Plate Mounted Operator Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
MNST and MST1 Series — Power Control Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Loop Powered Indicators VPI Series — 3-1/2 Digit LCD Panel Display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
SGD-24, -28 — PanelPilot Smart Graphical Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
BDR Series — Kele Big Display Readout, 3-1/2 Digit LED, Red / Blue /
Green. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
LPI-1C — 3-1/2 Digit LCD Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
LPI-1C-A, LPI-1C-G, LPI-1C-R — 3-1/2 Digit LCD Amber / Green / Red
Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
LPI-3C, LPI-3C-A, LPI-3C-G or LPI-3C-R — 4-1/2 Digit Black / Amber /
Green / Red Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
LPI-4 — Kele 3-1/2 Digit Large Black / Red / Green / Amber Panel Display. . .100
LPI-5 — Kele 3-1/2 Digit Small Black / Red Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Multi-Status Indicators 105XBRi Series — XTRA-BRITE LED Multi-Status Indicator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
125XBRi Series — XTRA-BRITE LED Multi-Status Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Run Time Accumulator ALD-1 — Pulse or Run-time Accumulator Display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Strobes and Horns 125STR, 89STR, 869STR, 869, 868STR, 868 — Strobes & Horns
. . . . . . . . . .67
SC-Series — Alarm Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
STB, STB-H — Wall-Mounted Strobe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
51XBR Series — XTRA-BRITE LED Beacon with Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
57 Series — Polaris Class LED Beacon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
94 Series — Polaris Class LED Beacon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
107XBR Series — XTRA-BRITE LED Hazardous Location Beacon. . . . . . . . .72
105XBRM Series — XTRA-BRITE LED Adverse Location Visual Signals. . . . .74
125XBR Series — XTRA-BRITE LED Beacons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Tower Lights 200 Class ClearView — LED Stacklight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
TWS Series — 75 mm Tower Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

95. fi 65ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/ VDC, 120 VAC,
100 mA max
Contact Rating
AIS-24D 24 VDC, 50 mA min
AIS-24A 24 VAC, 90 mA min
AIS-120A 120 VAC, 70 mA min
Alarm Horn 80 db
Dimensions 7.09"H x 4.33"W x 3.54"D
(18.0 x 11.0 x 9.0 cm)
Mounting Four screws through back
Enclosure Polystyrene, impact resistant,
knock-outs
Approvals RoHS
Weight 1.1 lb (0.5 kg)
Warranty 1 year
KELE ALARM INDICATION STATION

DESCRIPTION
The Model AIS Alarm Indication Station features an
indication light, alarm horn and an alarm horn silence switch.
FEATURES
• Long lasting, red LED indication
• Distinct continuous audible tone
• Horn silence switch
• Compact and rugged design
• Available in 24 VDC, 24 VAC, or 120 VAC
• Bright yellow panel face
Power Supply*
Controlling
Device
4 3 2 1
(+)(+) (–)(–)
L
H
S
(Alarm initiated by
contact closure)
Red LED Light
Alarm horn, 80 db
Alarm Horn
Silence Switch
* Power must be
supplied to the AIS
AIS
1
2
3
4
5 N.C.
Four-wire connection
Two-wire connection
Power supply
24 VAC/VDC or 120 VAC
Remote alarm device
Alarm initiated by
contact closure
A power interrupt or open alarm contact
will reset the AIS to normal.
A power interrupt or open alarm
contact will reset the AIS to normal.
AIS internal
terminal strip
1
2
3
4
5 N.C.
Power supply
24 VAC/VDC or 120 VAC
Remote alarm device
Alarm initiated by
contact closure
AIS internal
terminal strip
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.=no connection
N.C.=no connection
WIRING
APPLICATION
• Refrig
• Water level alarm indication
• Pressure alarm indication
• High/Low temperature limits
• Gas leak indication
• Humidity limit alarm indication
• Vibration limit
• Voltage/Current level limit
• Any contact closure alarm application
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Upon an alarm contact closure, the LED indicator will light, and the horn will sound
. The horn can be silenced through the alarm silence
switch, while the visual indication will continue to be lighted until the alarm condition has been corrected
. A power interruption or open
alarm contact will reset the AIS.
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AIS Alarm indication station
12VD 12 VDC powered
24D 24 VDC powered
24A 24 VAC powered
120A 120 VAC powered
Example: AIS-24A 24 VAC powered alarm
indication station
AIS 24A
March 2014

96. ALARMS & INDICATION 66ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage 24 VAC @ 100 mA or 24 VDC @ 34
mA
Alarm Delay Time None, or 1 to 31 seconds in one-
second increments, or 10 to 310
seconds in 10-second increments
Alarm Horn Continuous or pulsed tone, 70 db
min
Alarm Repeat Time None, or 1 to 7 in one-minute
increments, or 10 to 70 minutes in 10-minute increments
Alarm Status Relay
SPDT, 0.5A @ 24 VAC, 1.0A @ 30
VDC
Connections Screw terminals, 22 - 14 AWG wires
Dimensions 4.5"H x 2.75"W x 1.0"D
(11.4 x 7.0 x 2.5 cm)
Mounting Brushed stainless steel plate mounts
to standard single junction box, two screws provided
Approvals
RoHS
Weight 0.19 lb (0.07 Kg)
Warranty 18 months
DESCRIPTION
The RAD-1 is a wall mounted remote alarm indication station mounted on a stainless steel plate
. Any contact closure alarm
initiating device that can switch 24 VAC or DC can be used with the RAD-1
.
FEATURES
• Red alarm LED
• Alarm horn, continuous tone or pulsed
• Alarm horn silence switch
• Adjustable alarm delay time
• Adjustable alarm repeat time
• Alarm status SPDT relay
• Relay operates with the alarm horn option
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ON OFF
16
1
Repeat
time in
minutes
(add)
Repeat
time in
seconds
(add)
HORN PULSED
REPEAT TIME x10
DLY TIME x10
Relay
follows
horn
Alarm Repeat after
Silence Time*
SW6–SW8 OFF = No delay
SW6 ON = 1 minute
SW7 ON = 2 minutes
SW8 ON = 4 minutes
Initial Alarm Delay Time*
SW1–SW5 OFF = No delay
SW1 ON = 1 second
SW2 ON = 2 seconds
SW3 ON = 4 seconds
SW4 ON = 8 seconds
SW5 ON = 16 seconds
RAD-1
24
VAC/
VDC
Relay
Alarm
relay
+
–
NO
COM
NC
NO
COM
NC
+
–
Alarm initiating
device
No jumper Jumper installed
* Times are additive; for example, with SW3 and SW5 both ON, 4 sec + 16 sec = 20 sec delay
(or 200 sec if DLY TIME x10 jumper is installed)
Initial alarm
delay time x1
Continuous hornPulsed horn
1
2
4
2
4
8
•
•
•
Alarm repeat
after silence
time x1
•
•
•
Alarm repeat
after silence
time x10
Inital alarm
delay time x10
WIRING
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
When 24 VAC or VDC is applied to the RAD-1 through an
alarm-initiating device, the red alarm LED will light, the horn
will sound, and the alarm status relay will energize
. If an initial
alar
m delay has been set, when 24 VAC or VDC is applied, the
red alarm LED will blink until the delay period has expired
. Then
it will light continuously, the horn will sound continuously, and the relay will energize
. If power is interrupted, the RAD-1 will
reset to normal state.
Dur
ing an alarm (24V applied to the RAD-1), the horn may be
silenced by momentarily pressing the silence switch
. The alarm
LED will remain lighted, and the alarm status relay will remain energized when the horn is silenced until the alarm condition is cleared (24V removed)
. If an alarm repeat after silence time has
been set, the horn will re-sound at the end of the repeat time.
If the rela
y-follows-horn jumper is installed, the alarm status
relay will de-energize when the horn is silenced and re-energize when the horn sounds at the end of the repeat-after-silence time
.
If a pulsed (instead of contin
uous tone) horn is desired, the
horn-pulsed jumper may be installed
. If both the horn pulsed
jumper and the relay-follow-horn jumper are installed, the alarm status relay will energize and de-energize with the pulsed horn
.
KELE REMOTE ALARM INDICATION STATION
RAD-1
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RAD-1 Remote alarm indication station

97. NEW! 67ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage
N5 (89, 869, 868) 120 VAC
AQ (89, 869, 868) 24 VDC, 24 VAC
120A (125STRH) 120 VAC -20% to +10% of nominal
voltage
Current Rating 125STRH
120 mA
Horn/Strobe 24 VDC, 22 mA/390 mA
24 VAC, 72 mA/390 mA
120 VAC, 24 mA/87 mA
Average Candela Amber
90 cd
Blue 20 cd
Clear 150 cd
Green 70 cd
Red 21 cd
Color Amber, blue, clear, green, red
Horn Loudness 90 dba @ 10'
Peak Candela 300,000 cd
Strobe Tube Life 3,000 hrs, 1,000 hrs
Operating Humidity 868, 868 STR
95% RH @ 86°F (30°C)

869, 89 STR, 869 STR
85% RH @ 86°F (30°C)
Operating Temperature 868, 868 STR
-31° to 150°F (-35° to 66°C)

869, 89 STR, 869 STR
32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C)
Dimensions 89 STR
5"H x 3-3/8"W (12.7 x 8.6 cm)
869 STR, 868 STR, 869, 868
5-1/2"H x 5-1/2"W (14 x 14 cm),
Enclosure Rating 125 STRH
NEMA 4X
Mounting
868 Weatherproof surface box supplied –
no NEMA rating
869 3" sq x 1-1/2" electrical box with 1-1/2"
extension ring (need 3" depth)
Approvals UL 1638 listed, cUL
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
Signal strobes and horns available in wall-mount and panel- mount configurations with a variety of colors and voltages
.
Model
125STR is a 120 VAC panel-mount strobe in NEMA
4X enclosure
. Model 89STR mounts on a single-gang box
and is a single, indoor, flush-mount strobe. Model 869STR is
an indoor, flush-mount horn and strobe combination. Model
869 is an indoor, flush-mount horn only. Model 868 STR is an
outdoor, surface-mount horn and strobe combination. Model
868 is an outdoor, surface-mount horn.
FEATURES
• Indoor and outdoor applications
• Amber, blue, clear, green, and red colors
• 24 VAC, 24 VDC, and 120 VAC
• Surface and panel mount
868 STR/869 STR
Horn/Strobe
Strobe Horn
+
+
–
–
WIRING
STROBES & HORNS
125STR, 89STR, 869STR, 869, 868STR, 868
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION

868STR B AQExample: 868STR-B-AQ Outdoor surface-
mount electronic horn with blue
strobe and 24 VAC/VDC
MODEL DESCRIPTION
125STRH Panel-mount strobe
89STR Indoor flush-mount strobe
869STR Indoor flush-mount electronic horn/strobe
868STR Outdoor surface-mount electronic horn/strobe
869 Indoor flush- or panel-mount electronic horn
868 Outdoor surface-mount electronic horn
COLOR
A Amber
B Blue
C Clear
G Green
R Red
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
AQ 24 VAC/VDC (89, 869, 868)
N5 120 VAC (89, 869, 868)
120A 120 VAC (125STRH only)
869 869STR
868STR 125STRH

98. ALARMS & INDICATION 68ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage 20-31 VDC (24 VDC nominal)
Current Rating
STB 80 mA at 24 VDC
STB-H 136 mA at 24 VAC
Strobe Frequency 1 Hz
Horn Loudness 104 dB max
Strobe Intensity 15 (off-center) candela 75
(on-center) candela
Operating Temperature 32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C)
Dimensions 4.5"H x 4.56"W x 2.25"D
(11.43 x 11.58 x 5.72 cm)
Weight STB
1.0 lb (0.45 Kg)
STBH 1.1 lb (0.5 Kg)
Approvals UL Listed File S3406
Warranty 3 years
Supply Voltage
SC110 30-120 VAC/VDC
SC628 6-28 VDC
SC628A, AN 6-28 VAC/VDC
Current Rating SC100
6-21 mA
SC628 3-18 mA
SC628AN 4-30 mA
SC628A 6-23 mA
Horn Loudness Medium, 68-80 dB
(AN model Loud, 80-95 dB)
Tone Continuous
Panel Cutout Panel, cutout 1.13" (2.87 cm)
Weight 0.1 lb (0.05 Kg)
Approvals UL recognized component File# S1290
Warranty 1 year
ALARM HORN
SC-SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The SC Series Alarm Horns provide an audible tone when an electric signal is applied
. They can be used in applications
when an audible alarm is needed to indicate that immediate attention is required
.
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SC110 Alarm horn, 120 VAC
SC628 Alarm horn, 24 VDC
SC628A Alarm horn, 24 VAC/VDC
SC628AN Alarm horn, 24 VAC/VDC
WALL-MOUNTED STROBE
STB, STB-H
DESCRIPTION
The Model STB and STB-H wall-mounted strobes provide a
bright, eye-catching warning light for any alarm application.
The
STB-H features a distinct audible signal
.
FEATURES
• W
• Integral alarm horn (91 db)
• 24 VDC powered
• 15/75 candela strobe intensity
• Meets requirements of ADA4.28.3
• UL listed
• Xenon strobe for constant flash rate
• Strobe and horn powered separately if desired
• Jumper-selectable, continuous or temporal tone
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
STB Wall-mounted strobe
STB-H Wall-mounted strobe with horn
WIRING
WIRING
SC Horn
Horn
+
–
Note: Switch 1, 2 off
Signal
+
+
––
S+S+S-H-H+
March 2014

99. NEW! 69ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
1/2"
(12.7mm)
conduit hole
3 1/2"
(89mm)
3/4"
(19.05mm)
6"
(152mm)
7 3/8"
(187mm)H
in
(cm)
W
DESCRIPTION
The 51XBR Series XTRA-BRITE™ LED beacons are
combination visual and audible signaling devices, designed
for indoor or outdoor applications
. The integrated horn is
synchronized with the flashing LED. The unit features a cast
metal base that can be used as a junction box. The double
fresnel lens is made of shatter-resistant polycarbonate, and is designed to magnify the superbright LED
.
FEATURES
• LED light source with integrated horn
• Shatter-resistant double fresnel polycarbonate lens
• Five lens color options
• Immune to shock and vibration
• Cast metal base
• Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications
XTRA-BRITE LED BEACON WITH HORN
51XBR SERIES
Supply Voltage
51XBRFx120A 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz,
51XBRFx24D 24 VDC
Current 51XBRFx120A
175 mA
51XBRFx24D 275 mA
Max. Off State Leakeage Current
10 mA
Surge (inrush / duration) 51XBRFx120A
50 A / 260 μs
51XBRFx24D 10 A / 120 μs
Colors Amber, blue, green,red, white
Flash Rate 65 FPM
Projected LED Life 148,000 hours
Horn Loudness 85 dB @10'
Strobe Tube Life 148,000 hours
Operating Temperature -31°F to 150°F (-35°C to 66°C)
Dimensions 7.38"H x 6"W (18.7cm x 15.2cm)
Mounting • Direct surface mount • Mounted on 1/2 in. NPT conduit • Mounted on a 4 in. octagon box Approvals
cULus Listed, uL
Weight 2.14lbs (0.97 kg)
Warranty 18 months
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION 51XBRF Combination flashing LEDs with horns
COLOR
A Amber
B Blue
G Green
R Red
W White
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
24D 24 VDC
120A 120 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
57PLEDM G 24D Example: 51XBRFG24D Combination flashing LEDs with horns and 24V DC
51XBR
WIRING
24 VDC
WIRING
RED
BLACK
+–
BLACK
WHITE
120 VA C
WIRING
24 VDC
POWER
120 VA C
POWER
+
GREEN
GND –NEUTRAL
Wire nuts not included.

100. ALARMS & INDICATION 70ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
March 2014
POLARIS CLASS LED BEACON
57 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Edwards Polaris Class 57PLEDM LED beacons are NEMA
Type 4X and IP66 rated visual signals designed for indoor and
outdoor applications
.The Polaris Class is designed for industrial
or commercial applications that require the longevity of an LED combined with the brightness of a xenon strobe
. These units are
very effective in high noise areas where ear protection is worn or audible signals may not be heard
.
FEATURES
• Six lens colors
• Seven flash patterns (includes steady-on)
• Hidden in Plain Sight (HIPS) switch
• High level of immunity to shock and vibration
• Black or gray base option
Supply Voltage
57PLEDMx24ADx 12 VDC, 0.7A, 24 VAC/VDC, 0.55A
57PLEDMx120Ax 120 VAC, 50/60Hz, 0.25A
Leakage Current Off State Leakage 5 mA
Surge Current
57PLEDMx24ADx
8.5A/2ms
57PLEDMx120Ax 4.5A/1ms
Color Amber, blue, green, magenta, red, clear
Projected LED Life 148,000 hours
Flash Mode 7 selectable patterns with HIPS switch
Operating Temperature -31° to 150.8°F (-35° to 66°C)
Dimensions 8" x 6.5" (203 x 165 mm)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X
Mounting:

On 3/4" (19mm) NPT threaded conduit
Approvals UL 1638 and cUL Listed (E11459)
Weight 3.4 lbs (1.54 kg)
Warranty 18 months
SPECIFICATIONS DIMENSIONS

8"
(203mm)
6.5"
(165mm)
WIRING
ACCESSORIES
BLACK
RED
24 VAC
WIRING
24 VAC
POWER
+
GREEN
GND –NEUTRAL
24 VDC
WIRING
RED
BLACK
+–
24 VDC
POWER
BLACK
WHITE
120 VA C
WIRING
120 VA C
POWER
+
GREEN
GND –NEUTRAL
Wire nuts not included.
57PLEDMR
57PLEDMB
57PLEDMA
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION 57PLEDM LED beacon
COLOR
A Amber
B Blue
G Green
M Magenta
R Red
W White
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
24AD 12-24 VDC, 24 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
120A 120 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
BASE COLOR
(Blank) Gray
B Black
57PLEDM G 24AD Example: 57PLEDG24AD LED beacon with green lens, gray base, and 12-24 VDC, 24 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
CBR
Corner Mount Bracket
WBR
Wall Mount Bracket
ACCESSORIES PAGE
CBR Corner Mount Bracket 70-71
WBR Wall Mount Bracket 70-71

101. fi 71ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
March 2014
POLARIS CLASS LED BEACON
94 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Edwards Polaris Class 94PLEDM LED beacons are NEMA
Type 4X and IP66 rated visual signals designed for indoor
and outdoor applications
. The units are available in Edwards’
94 Series housing in 12-24 VDC, 24 VAC, 120 VAC and are field configurable with up to seven flashing patterns, including steady-on, utilizing a “Hidden In Plain Sight” (HIPS) switch
. The inner, double fresnel lens is made of a high grade
polycarbonate and is designed to magnify the ultra-bright LEDs inside
. A clear, outer, impact-resistant polycarbonate
dome offers additional protection against accidental impacts with machinery or falling objects
. It also acts as a protective
and simple to clean “dust and residue” cover. The Polaris
Class beacons are designed to be mounted on 3/4 inch NPT conduit (indoor or outdoor)
. For outdoor installation and
to maintain the NEMA and IP ratings, the beacon must be mounted with the dome facing directly up
. When installing
the beacon indoors in dry environments, it can be mounted in any position
. The 94 Series housing has a cast base that
can function as a junction box. The Polaris Class is designed
for any industrial or commercial applications that require the longevity of an LED and the brightness of a xenon strobe
.
These units are v
ery effective in high noise areas where ear
protection is worn or audible signals may not be heard
.
FEATURES
• 12-24 VDC, 24 VAC, 120 VAC
• Six lens colors
• Seven flash patterns (includes steady-on)
• Hidden in Plain Sight (HIPS) switch
•
3
/
4
" (19mm) NPT threaded conduit
• High level of immunity to shock and vibration
• Black or gray base option
Supply Voltage
94PLEDMx24ADx 12 VDC, 0.7A; 24 VAC/DC, 0.55A
94PLEDMx120Ax 120 VAC, 50/60Hz, 0.25A
Leakage Current Off State Leakage 5mA
Surge Current
94PLEDMx24ADx 8.5 A / 2 ms
94PLEDMx120Ax 4.5 A / 1 ms
Color Amber, blue, green, magenta, red,
white/clear
Projected LED Life 148,000 hours
Flash Mode 7 Selectable Patterns with HIPS
Switch
Operating Temperature -31° to 150.8°F (-35° to 66°C)
Dimensions
94PLEDMx Models 8.25" x 7.75" (210 x 200 mm)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X and IP66 Rated
Mounting On 3/4 inch NPT conduit
(indoor or outdoor)
Approvals UL 1638 and cUL Listed (E11459)
Weight 6.10 lbs (2.77 kg)
Warranty 18 months
94PLEDMA 94PLEDMR 94PLEDMG
BLACK
RED
24 VAC
WIRING
24 VAC
POWER
+
GREEN
GND –NEUTRAL
24 VDC
WIRING
RED
BLACK
+–
24 VDC
POWER
BLACK
WHITE
120 VA C
WIRING
120 VA C
POWER
+
GREEN
GND –NEUTRAL
Wire nuts not included.
DIMENSIONS
WIRING
7.75"
(200mm)
8.25"
(210mm)
HIPS
Programming
Switch
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
94PLEDM LED beacon
COLOR
A Amber
B Blue
G Green
M Magenta
R Red
W White
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
24AD 12-24 VDC, 24 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
120A 120 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
BASE COLOR
(Blank) Gray
B Black
94PLEDM G 24AD B Example: 94PLEDG24AD LED beacon
with green lens, black base, and
12-24 VDC, 24 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
ACCESSORIES PAGE
CBR Corner Mount Bracket 70-71
WBR Wall Mount Bracket 70-71
SPECIFICATIONS

102. ALARMS & INDICATION 72ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
March 2014
XTRA-BRITE LED HAZARDOUS LOCATION BEACON
107XBR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The 107XBR hazardous location XTRA-BRITE™ LED visual
signals are NEMA Type 3R and Type 4 heavy-duty visual
signals designed for indoor or outdoor applications
. The units
are available in 24 VDC or 120 VAC and are field configurable for steady-on or flashing (65 fpm)
. The inner, double fresnel
lens is made of a high grade polycarbonate and is designed to magnify the super-bright LEDs inside
. A clear, outer,
impact-resistant glass globe also covers the lens and an optional dome guard fits over the glass dome to protect it against accidental impacts with machinery or falling objects
.
The
107XBR has three different mounting configurations
including the pendant mount, bracket mount and ceiling mount and can be mounted on 3/4" NPT threaded conduit.
The
107XBR is designed for applications such as petroleum
refineries, utility gas plants, dry cleaning plants, fuel servicing areas and other similar applications.
FEATURES
• A •
Five lens colors
• Steady-on or flashing in every unit
• 3/4" NPT threaded conduit
• High level of immunity to shock and vibration
• Three mounting options: pendant, bracket or ceiling
• UL Listed for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II,
Division 1, Groups E, F, G; Class II, Division 2, Groups F & G and Class III, Division 1 locations
•
UL and cUL Listed for Marine environments (120VAC only)
107XBRBMA
Flash Rate
65 fpm
107XBRCMG
107XBRPMR
Supply Voltage 107XBRxMx24D
24 VDC
107XBRxMx120A 120 VAC, 60Hz
Current 107XBRxMx24D
220 mA
107XBRxMx120A 115 mA
Color Amber,blue,green,red,clear
Flash Mode Steady on or flashing
(65 FPM, field configurable)
Project LED Life 148,000 hours
Operating Temperature See Table on next page
Dimensions 7" X 10.13" (178 x 260 mm)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 3R and NEMA 4
Mounting Bracket mount, pendant mount, ceiling mount
Approvals UL & cUL Listed, UL Listed for Marine Use
Weight
107XBRBMx 10.87 lb (4.93 kg)
107XBRCMx 9.87 lb (4.47 kg)
107XBRPMx 8.97 lb (4.06 kg)
Warranty 18 months
SPECIFICATIONS
* Class II and Class III only apply to the pendant mount versions with clear globes.
** Marine Rating applies to UL listing only.
Wirenuts(notsupplied)
Yellow ,
NotConnected
(wirenutsupplied)
Connectleadsto
PowerSource
DCunits;Redpositive(+)
ACunits;BlackHot
DCunits;Blacknegative(-)
ACunits; Whiteneutral
Wirenuts(notsupplied)
Connectleadsto
PowerSource
DCunits;Redpositive(+)
ACunits;BlackHot
DCunits;Blacknegative(-)
ACunits;Whiteneutral
Yellow
DCunits:Connect
toPositive (+)
ACunits:ConnecttoHot
(Yellowwireconnected
forOptionalflashpattern)
WIRING

103. fi 73ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
March 2014
XTRA-BRITE LED HAZARDOUS LOCATION BEACON
107XBR SERIES
OPERATING TEMPERATURE CODES
11 3/8"
(289mm)
10 1/2"
(267mm)
10 7/8"
(276mm)
10 1/4"
(260mm)
7"
(172mm)
9 7/8"
(251mm)
10 1/8"
(260mm)
7"
(178mm)
9 3/4"
(248mm)
4"
(102mm)
DIMENSIONS
Pendant Mounting Bracket Mounting Ceiling Mounting
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
107XBR Hazardous Location LED Beacon
MOUNTING
PM Pendant
BM Bracket
CM Ceiling
COLOR
A Amber
B Blue
G Green
R Red
W White
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
24D 24V DC
120A 120V AC @ 60 Hz
107XBR BM W 120A Example: 107XBRBMW120A Hazardous Location
LED Beacon with bracket mounting, white
LED, and 120V AC @ 60 Hz
Ambient
temperature
Class I, Div. 2
Groups A, B, C, D
Class II, Div. 2,
Groups F, G; Class
III, Div. 2
Class II, Div. 1,
Groups E, F, G;
Class III, Div. 1
40°C 135°C (T4) 85°C (T6)
55°C 135°C (T4) 85°C (T6)
65°C 135°C (T4) 85°C (T6)
Note: Class II and Class III only apply to the pendant mount versions
with clear globes.
ACCESSORIES
EDVPGU1 Optional Dome Gaurd

104. ALARMS & INDICATION 74ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
WIRING
105-L Series
Lens
105XBR Base
Wire nuts
(not supplied)
DC units; Red Positive (+),
AC units; Black Hot
18” Wire Leads
DC units; Black Negative (-), AC units; White Neutral
Power Source Wires
OFF
OFF
ON
ON 1
2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON 1
2
STEADY
65 FPM
XTRA-BRITE LED ADVERSE LOCATION VISUAL SIGNALS
105XBRM SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The 105XBRM Series LED visual signals are heavy duty,
reliable, UL, cUL beacons
. The 105XBRM Series features a
UL listed Type 4X enclosure and is UL Listed for Marine Use.
The 105XBRM Ser
ies has three different configurations for
mounting that include the 105BX junction box, the 105BM mounting bracket, and the 105PM pipe mount attachment.
The unit can be mounted on 3/4 NPT using the 105PM pipe attachment
. It can also be surface mounted using the 105BX
junction box, or wall mounted using the 105BX junction box with the 105BM mounting bracket
. They can only be used with
metallic wiring systems when installed at the end of the run.
FEATURES
• A •
Three mounting bases: 3/4" pipe mount attachment,
outlet box attachment, or wall mounting bracket
• 65 fpm mode field-selectable via dipswitch
• Immune to shock and vibration
105XBRMB
(Dipswitches located
inside the unit)
MODEL 105XBRM
105XBRM Example: 105SLEDBN5 Steady-On LED with blue lens and light source and 120V 60 Hz supply voltage
BN 5
DESCRIPTION XTRA-BRITE LED Adverse Locations Visual Signals
COLOR
A
B
G
R
W
Amber
Blue
Green
Red
White
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
24D
120A
24V DC
120V AC
5"
(127 mm)
4.5"
(114 mm)
4.5"
(114 mm)
5.25"
(133 mm)
6"
(152 mm)
2"
(51 mm)
4.5"
(114 mm)
2.25"
(57 mm)
105PM Pipe Mount Attachment 105BM Mounting Bracket
(use with 105BX)
105BX Outlet Box Attachment
MODEL Class Division Group Operating Temperature
105XBRMx24D I 2 A, B, C, D T4A (120C, 248F)
105XBRMx120A I I 2 F, G T4A (120C, 248F)
I I I T4A (120C, 248F)
HAZARDOUS LOCATION RATINGS
Supply Voltage 105XBRMx24D
24 VDC
105XBRMx120A 120 VAC 50/60Hz
Current Rating
105XBRMx24D 0.215
105XBRMx120A 0.108A
Color Amber, blue, green, red, white
Flash Mode Steady on or 65 FPM (dipswitch
settings)
Projected LED Life 148,000 hours
Operating Temperature -31° to 212°F (-35° to 100°C)
Dimensions 4.75" X 3.75" (121 x 95mm)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X
Mounting ¾" pipe mount attachment, outlet bo
x attachment, or wall mounting
bracket
Approvals UL & cUL Listed, UL Listed for
Marine Use
Weight: 1.4 lbs (0.63 kg)
Warranty: 18 months
ACCESSORIES PAGE
105BM Wall-mount bracket (requires 105BX) 74,77,479-480
105BX Surface-mount box 74,77,479-480
105PM Pipe-mount base 74,77,479-480
SPECIFICATIONS

105. fi 75ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
March 2014
XTRA-BRITE LED BEACONS
125XBR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Edwards 125XBR Class XBR XTRA-BRITE™ LED
beacons are UL and cUL listed dual mode signaling devices,
available in two versions, Steady-On/Flashing (125XBRM)
and Steady-On/Lightburst (125XBRZ)
. Both versions feature
a corrosion resistant Type 4X enclosure and can be panel or conduit mounted
. The lens is made of shatter resistant
polycarbonate. Both the 125XBRM and 125XBRZ beacons
are dual mode de
vices, maximizing application flexibility while
reducing inventory costs
. It can also be panel-mounted using
the mounting gask
et provided with the unit
.
FEATURES
• A •
Available with amber, blue, green, red or white lens
• Available with gray or black base
• Option for panel or conduit mounting
• Available in dual mode Steady-On/Flashing LED or Steady-On/Lightburst LED versions
Gasket (provided for use
when direct panel mounting)
Locknut - 1.3625" O.D. (provided
for use when direct panel
mounting)
3.25"
(82.6mm)
3.875"
(98.4mm)
Double threaded for
panel mounting or
1/2" internal or
3/4" external
conduit mounting
DIMENSIONS
Supply Voltage
125XBRxx24Dx 24 VDC
125BRxx120Ax 120 VAC,50/60Hz
Current
125XBRxx24Dx 0.215A
125BRx120Ax 0.108A
Color Amber, blue, clear, green, red
Flash Rate
125XBRM STEADY-ON/FLASHING (65 FPM)
125XBRZ STEADY-ON/LIGHTBURST (420FPM)
Projected LED Life 148,000 hours
Operating Temperature -31° to 150°F (-35° to 66°C)
Dimensions 3.875"H3.875"H(98.4mm) X 3.25"W
(82.6mm)(98.4mm) X 3.25"W (82.6mm)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4x
Mounting On 1/2" or 3/4" NPT conduit using a 1/2" inter
nal or 3/4" external conduit hub
Approvals cULus Listed
Weight 0.5lbs
Warranty 18 months
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
125XBRZR120A Dual Mode XBR LED Beacons in NEMA 4X Enclosure, with Steady-On Lightburst, red LED, 120V AC @ 60 Hz, and gray base
MODEL DESCRIPTION 125XBR Dual Mode XBR LED Beacons in NEMA 4X Enclosure
OPERATION
M Steady-On/ Flashing LED
Z Steady-On/ Lightburst
COLOR A Amber
B Blue
G Green
R Red
W White
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
24D 24V DC
120A 120V AC @ 60 Hz
BASE COLOR
(BLANK) Gray
B Black
125XBR Z R 120A Example:
125XBR
WIRING
125XBR Series LED Vi sual Indicator
Gasket (supplied)Locking Nut -
1.3625" OD
(supplied)
Control panel
(Enclosure)
Wire Nuts (Not Supplied)
18” Wire Leads
Power Source Wires
DC units; Red Positive (+) AC units; Black Hot
DC units; Black negative (-) AC units; White neutral
Yellow,
Not connected (wire nut supplied)
ACCESSORIES
125GRD Optional Gaurd for use with 125 Class Beacons
CBR Corner Mount Bracket
WBR Wall Mount Bracket

106. ALARMS & INDICATION 76ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
March 2014
Supply Voltage
105XBRiRxA24D 24 VDC
105XBRiRxA120A 120 VAC, 50/60Hz
Current 105XBRiRxA24D
0.15A
105XBRiRxA120A 0.1A
Max. Off State Leakage Current
5mA
Surge (inrush/duration)
105XBRiRxA24D
28A/65uSeconds
105XBRiRxA120A 28.5A/212uSeconds
LED Colors Red/Green/Amber or Red/Blue/Amber
Flash Mode Dipswitch settings for use with or without
external control
Flash Rate XTRA-SAFE™ Mode; Red 240 FPM,
Amber120 FPM, Green or Blue 65 FPM
Projected LED Life 148,000 hours
Operating Temperature 31° to 150°F (-35° to 66°C)
Dimensions 4.5"W x 4.625"H (114 x 117 mm)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X
Mounting ¾" pipe mount attachment, outlet box
attachment, or wall mounting bracket
Approvals UL & cUL Listed
Weight 1.4 lb(0.63 kg)
Warranty 18 months
105XBRi-RGA
DESCRIPTION
The Edwards 105XBRi Series XTRA-BRITE™ LED Multi- Status Indicator is a heavy duty, reliable UL and cUL listed, multi-color visual signaling device
. It features a corrosion
resistant Type 4X enclosure that is UL listed for Marine use, and can be panel or conduit mounted
. The base is manufactured
from glass-reinforced thermoplastic polyester resin and the double fresnel lens is made of shatter resistant polycarbonate
.
The lights are a
vailable in 24 VDC and 120 VAC 50/60 Hz, in
either Red/Blue/Amber or Red/Green/Amber
.
FEATURES
• A •
Available in Red/Blue/Amber or Red/Green/Amber
• Three mounting bases: 3/4" pipe mount attachment, outlet
box attachment, or wall mounting bracket
• PLC compatible
• XTRA-SAFE™ Technology enables status indication for
those who are color blind
• Dip switch settings for use with or without external control
• Immune to shock and vibration
XTRA-BRITE LED MULTI-STATUS INDICATOR
105XBRI SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
4.625"
(92mm)
4.375"
(111mm)
4.5"
(114mm)
4.625"
(117mm)
Cat. No Class DivisionGroup Operating Temperature
105XBRIRGA24D l 2 A,B,C,D T5 (100°C, 212°F)
105XBRIRGA120A ll 2 F,G T5 (100°C, 212°F)
lll T5 (100°C, 212°F)
105XBRIRBA24D l 2 A,B,C,D T6 (85°C, 185°F)
105XBRIRBA120A ll 2 F,G T6 (85°C, 185°F)
lll T6 (85°C, 185°F)
HAZARDOUS LOCATION RATINGS
DIMENSIONS

107. fi 77ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
March 2014
XTRA-BRITE LED MULTI-STATUS INDICATOR
105XBRI SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
105XBRi LED Multi-Status Indicator in NEMA 4X Enclosure
COLORS
RGA Red, Green, Amber
RBA Red, Blue, Amber
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
24D 24 VDC
120A 120 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
105XBRi RGA 24D Example: 105XBRiRGA24D LED Multi-Status
Indicator in NEMA 4X Enclosure with
Red, Green, and Amber lens, and 24 VDC
5"
(127mm)
4.5"
(114mm)
2"
(51mm)
2.25"
(57mm)
5.25"
(133mm)
0.34"
(9mm)
Diameter
(4) 3/4"
Knockouts
6"
(152mm)
4.5"
(114mm)
4.5"
(114mm)
105BM Mounting Bracket
(use with 105BX)
105BX
Outlet Box Attachment
105PM
Pipe Mount Attachment
WIRING
105-LC Lens
(2) Screws to mount
105BX to the
mounting surface
Mounting
Surface
Power source wires
Wire Nuts (not supplied)
Amber (DC + or AC hot for Amber LED activation)
Red (DC + or AC hot for Red LED activation)
Black (DC -) or White (AC neutral)
Blue with Green tracer
(DC + or AC hot for Blue or Green
LED activation (depending on model))
Applications WITH a PLC or Controller*
Applications WITHOUT a PLC or Controller* - XTRA-SAFE Te chnology
Disabled
Applications WITHOUT a PLC or Controller* - XTRA-SAFE Technology
Enabled (Factory Default)
*It is generally recommended that both dipswitches, SW1 and SW2, be set to OFF for applications using an external Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) or other external controller. A PLC or controller, how-
ever, can be used with any of the shown configurations.
Dipswtich Settings:
(Dipswitch located inside the unit)
ACCESSORIES PAGE
105BM Wall-mount bracket (requires 105BX) 74,77,479-480
105BX Surface-mount box 74,77,479-480
105PM Pipe-mount base 74,77,479-480

108. ALARMS & INDICATION 78ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
March 2014
125XBRi
DESCRIPTION
The Edwards 125XBRi Series XTRA-BRITE™ LED Multi-
Status Indicator is a UL and cUL listed, multi-color visual
signaling device
. It features a corrosion resistant Type 4X
enclosure and can be panel or conduit mounted. The base
is manufactured from a 33% glass filled nylon, providing high resistance to heat and high chemical resistivity
. The
lens is made of shatter resistant polycarbonate. The lights
are available in 24 VDC and 120 VAC 50/60 Hz, in either Red/Blue/Amber or Red/Green/Amber
.
FEATURES
• A •
Available with gray or black base
• Available in Red/Blue/Amber or Red/Green/Amber
• Option for panel or conduit mounting
• PLC Compatible
• XTRA-SAFE™ Technology enables status indication for
those who are color-blind
• Dip switch settings for use with or without external control
• Immune to shock and vibration
• Protective wire guard available, Cat. No. 125GRD
Gasket (provided for use
when direct panel mounting)
Locknut - 1.3625" O.D. (provided
for use when direct panel
mounting)
3.25"
(82.6mm)
3.875"
(98.4mm)
Double threaded for
panel mounting or
1/2" internal or
3/4" external
conduit mounting
DIMENSIONS
XTRA-BRITE LED MULTI-STATUS INDICATOR
125XBRI SERIES
Supply Voltage
125XBRiRxA24Dx 24 VDC
125XBRiRxA120Ax 120 VAC, 50/60Hz
Current
125XBRiRxA24Dx 0.15A
125XBRiRxA120Ax 0.1A
Max. Off State Leakage Current
5 mA
Surge (inrush/duration)
125XBRiRxA24Dx 28.5A/65uSeconds
125XBRiRxA120Ax 28.5A/212uSeconds
LED Colors Red/Green/Amber or Red/Blue/
Amber
Flash Mode Dipswitch enabled
Flash Rate XTRA-SAFE™ Mode, Red 240
FPM, Amber120 FPM, Green or Blue 65 FPM
Projected LED Life
148,000 hours
Operating Temperature -31° to 150°F (-35° to 66°C)
Dimensions 3.25"W x 3.875"H (82.6 x 98.4mm)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X
Mounting Conduit or panel mount
Approvals UL & cUL Listed
Weight 0.5 lbs (0.22 kg)
Warranty 18 months
SPECIFICATIONS

109. fi 79ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
March 2014
WIRING
Applications WITH
a PLC or Controller*
Applications WITHOUT a PLC or Controller* - XTRA-SAFE Te chnology
Disabled
Applications WITHOUT a PLC or Controller* - XTRA-SAFE Technology
Enabled (Factory Default)
*It is generally recommended that both dipswitches, SW1 and SW2, be set to OFF for applications using an external Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) or other external controller. A PLC or controller, how-
ever, can be used with any of the shown configurations.
Dipswtich Settings:
(Dipswitch located inside the unit)
XTRA-BRITE LED MULTI-STATUS INDICATOR
125XBRI SERIES
125XBRI Series Chameleon LED Visual Indicator
Gasket (supplied)
Wire nuts
(not supplied)
Locking Nut -
1.3625" OD
(supplied)
Control panel
(Amber LED activation) DC Units; Amber Positive (+) AC Units; Amber Hot
(Red LED activation) (DC Units; Red positive (+) AC Units Red Hot
DC Units; Black DC common (-) AC Units; White AC neutral
(Blue or Green LED activation) DC Units; Blue with green stripe, Positive (+) AC Units; Blue with green stripe, Hot
Wire color corresponds with each indicated color.
Red wire = Red LED's
Y
ellow wire = Amber LED's
Blue with Green tracer wire = Green or Blue LED's
ORDERING INFORMATION
125XBRi-RGA-120A LED Multi-Status Indicator in NEMA 4X Enclosure, with red, green, and amber LEDs, with 120 VAC @ 60 Hz, and gray base
MODEL DESCRIPTION 125XBRi LED Multi-Status Indicator in NEMA 4X Enclosure
COLOR RGA Red, Green, Amber
RBA Red, Blue, Amber
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
24D 24 VDC
120A 120 VAC @ 60 Hz
BASE COLOR
(BLANK) Gray
B Black
125XBRi RGA 120A Example:
ACCESSORIES PAGE
125GRD Optional Guard for Use with 125 Class Beacons
CBR Corner Mount Bracket 70-71
WBR Wall Mount Bracket 70-71

110. ALARMS & INDICATION 80ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage
Light Modules 24 VDC, 0.065A; 24 VAC, 0.075A to 0.085A
120 VAC/DC, 0.035A
Piezoelectric
Sound Modules 12 VAC/DC, 0.003A; 24 VAC/DC, 0.006mA;
48 VAC/DC,
0.013A; 120 VAC, 0.004A; 240 VAC, 0.01A
Magnetodynamic
Sound Modules 12 VAC, 0.12-0.95A; 12 VDC, 0.03-0.335A;
24 VAC
0.17-1.06A; 24VDC, 0.045-0.45A; 120VAC,
0.04-0.105A; 240 VAC, 0.025-0.06A
Color White, red,green,blue, amber
Flash Mode Steady on, Single (75FPM), Double
(85FPM), Triple (85FPM)
Horn Loudness
Piezoelectric
Sound Modules 12 VAC/DC, 72-79dB; 24 VAC/DC, 77-85dB
48 VAC/DC, 79-89dB; 120 VAC, 75-81dB
240 VAC, 78-87dB
Magnetodynamic
Sound Modules 12 VAC/DC, 86.5-103.5dB; 24 VAC/DC,
91-107dB;
120 VAC, 93-103dB; 240 VAC, 93-103.5dB
Operating Temperature Light Modules
-22° to 122°F (-30° to 50°C)
Piezoelectric Sound
Modules -22° to 140°F (-30° to 60°C) at 12V to 48V;
-22° to 132.8°F (-30° to 56°C) at 120V to
240V
Magnetodynamic Sound
Modules -22° to 140°F (-30° to 60°C) at 12V to 24V;
-22°to 122°F (-30° to 50°C) at 120V to 240V
Dimensions Base
1.89"H x 2.678" dia (48 x 68 mm)
Light Module 2.323"H x 2.953"dia (59 x 75 mm)
Sound Module 4.095"H x 2.953"dia (104 x 75 mm)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 3R, 4X,IP66 rated base and light
modules, IP54 rated sound modules
Mounting Wall mount or Surface mount
Weight
Base 0.83 lb (0.38 Kg)
Light Modules 0.81 lb (0.37 Kg)
Piezoelectric
Sound Modules 1.04 lb (0.47 Kg)
Magnetodynamic
Sound Modules 1.28 lb (0.58 Kg)
Approvals cULus Listed, CE approved
Warranty 18 months
LED STACKLIGHT
200 CLASS CLEARVIEW
DESCRIPTION
The 200 Class 70mm ClearView™ LED Stacklight™ is a versatile, multi-mode signaling device that may contain up to five light modules, or four light modules and one sounder module in a single, integrated stack
. The lens modules are
clear, and are available with red, amber, blue, green, yellow and white LEDs in 24 VAC, 24 VDC and 120 VAC
. The lenses
are made from a self-extinguishing polycarbonate material and are scratch and impact resistant
. Optional piezoelectric
and magnetodynamic sounder modules complement the visual signals of the Stacklight™, offering several audible tones depending on the model chosen
. The sound module
has been designed so that it is always in the top position of the Stacklight™
. The 200 Class 70mm ClearView™
LED Stacklight™ features an interlocking system for quick assembly without any tools
. It is available in gray or black
and offers multiple voltage ranges to provide solutions for industrial applications, while also meeting machine builder and OEM requirements
.
FEATURES
• 24 V •
Stackable up to five modules including sounder
• Quick and simple assembly with NO tools required
• Multi-Mode (Steady, Single, Double or Triple Flash)
• Two optional sounders available; Piezoelectric: Six user
selectable tones, Magnetodynamic: 32 user selectable tones
• Clear lens
• LED light source
• Available in Gray or Black
• IP65 or IP54 available
• cULus Listed
• CE approved
270CLED
SPECIFICATIONS
WIRING
V DC (–) (+)
V AC
5
4
3
2
1
C
On the power supply line, use appropriate time-lag fuses according to the voltage.
March 2014

111. fi 81ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
LED STACKLIGHT
200 CLASS CLEARVIEW
MODEL DESCRIPTION
270CLED LED Stacklight Module
MODULE TYPE
S Steady
M Multimode
COLOR
A Amber
B Blue
G Green
R Red
Y Yellow
W White
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
24AD 24V AC/DC
120A 120V AC

270CLED M W 120A Example:
BASE COLOR
(BLANK) Gray
B Black
270CLEDMW120A LED Stacklight Module
with multimode module, white LED,
120 VAC, and gray base
SOUND MODULES
DIMENSIONS/ORDERING INFORMATION
LED LIGHT MODULES
LIGHT MODULE
Ø2.953"
(75mm)
2.323"
(59mm)
3.11"
(79mm)
Ø2.835"
(72mm)
2.717"
(69mm)
BASE AND COVER
.788"
(20mm)
2.323"
(59mm)
Ø2.678"
(68mm)
1/2" NPT
Ø2.953"
(75mm)
1.89"
(48mm)
ACOUSTIC MODULE
4.095"
(104mm)
Ø2.953"
(75mm)
4.567"
(116mm)
70MM PIEZOELECTRIC (PZO) ACOUSTIC MODULE DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
12 VDC/VAC 24 VDC/VAC 48 VDC/VAC 120 VAC 240 VAC
Sound Type Diagram
F (Hz)
1
A
dB
at 1m A
dB
at 1m A
dB
at 1m A
dB
at 1m A
dB
at 1m
Continuous reduced output 50/600.003 750.006 810.013 830.004 75 0.010 81
Continuous maximum output 50/600.003 790.006 850.013 890.004 81 0.010 87
Slow intermittent reduced output 50/600.003 720.006 770.013 790.004 76 0.010 78
Slow intermittent maximum output 50/600.003 770.006 840.013 860.004 81 0.010 85
Fast intermittent reduced output 50/600.003 740.006 790.013 810.004 76 0.010 79
Fast intermittent maximum output 50/600.003 780.006 850.013 870.004 81 0.010 85
1
For AC voltages only
on
21 3
on
21 3
on
21 3
on
21 3
on
21 3
on
21 3
March 2014
Piezoelectric Sounder
270PZO1248AD 12-48 AC/DC, Gray
270PZO1248ADB 12-48 AC/DC, Black
270PZO120240A 120-240 VAC, Gray
270PZO120240AB 120-240 VAC, Black
Magnetodynamic Sounder
270MDA1224AD 12-24 VAC/DV, Gray
270MDA1224ADB 12-24 VAC/DV, Black
270MDA120A 120 VAC, Gray
270MDA120AB 120 VAC, Black
270MDA240A 240 VAC, Gray
270MDA240AB 240 VAC, Black **NOTE: Add B to the end of the model number for black unit.
ACCESSORIES
270FLXT 270 Flexible Steel Extension Stem - 370mm
270FMLADAPT 270 Female Adapter Base - Gray
270JBX** Junction Box - Gray
270KIT** Footing with Extension - Gray
270SSXT100 270 Stainless Steel Extension Stem - 100mm
270SSXT200 270 Stainless Steel Extension Stem - 200mm
270SSXT400 270 Stainless Steel Extension Stem - 400mm
270TEP** Threaded Extension Pole 100mm - Gray
270THF** Threaded Footing - Gray
270TWM** Threaded Wall Mount - Gray
270TWM2** Double Threaded Wall Mount - Gray

112. ALARMS & INDICATION 82ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 12-24 VAC/VDC, 24-240 VAC
Voltage Range 24 VAC/ VDC, 110 VAC, 24 VAC , 24
VDC
Power
Light module 5W 12-120 VAC/VDC (7W 240 VAC)
Horn module 12V-2.7 mA, 24V-6 mA, 110V-4
mA,240V-8.5 mA
Color Blue, amber,red,green, yellow, clear
Flash Rate
Incandescent LED 110 FPM ±20 FPM
Strobe 65 FPM ±10 FPM(24 VAC/DC)
90 FPM ±20 FPM (110/240 VAC)
Horn Loudness Medium, 76-86 dB
Operating Temperature -22° to 140°F (-30° to 60°C)

Strobe
14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)
Dimensions
Base 2.68"H x 2.95" dia (6.8 x 7.5 cm)
Light 2.72"H x 2.95" dia (6.9 x 7.5 cm)
Horn 3.11"H x 2.95" dia (7.9 x 7.5 cm)
Mounting Wall, two holes; surface, four holes;
2.13" (5.4 cm) centers
Enclosure IP66
Horn IP20 upward mount
Ip 24 downward mount
Approvals CE UL Listed File E194312
Warranty 18 months
DESCRIPTION
The TWS Series Tower Lights enable stacking of up
to five signaling devices. Each device has its own set of
contacts. Starting with a bottom module, up to five devices
can be added in any combination of continuous and flashing incandescent lights, continuous and flashing LED lights, and Xenon strobes
. Each stack can be capped with a
horn. Each light comes in a variety of colors, and all lamps
are replaceable. Several wall- and pedestal-mounting
configurations are available.
OPERATION
• Horns
• IP20 upward mount
• IP24 downward moun
• Ratings IP66
SPECIFICATIONS
WIRING
75 MM TOWER LIGHTS
TWS SERIES
0 .5-1 .5 mm
2
(22-16 AWG)
5
4
3
2
1
COMMON
0 .4 Nm Max .
(3 .5 lb-in)
0
1
2
3
4
5
4
1
2
3
5
C
VDC
(VAC)
–+
Stack with
TWS-BS Stack with
TWS-BP1
Two stacks with
TWS-BP2
Stack with
TWS-KIT
March 2014

113. fi 83ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
75 MM TOWER LIGHTS
TWS SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION


Steps Direction Part Number Description
1
Select
Module
and Cap
(1 required)
TWS-BC Bottom module and cap
2
Select
Mounting
Base
(1 required)
TWS-BS Base with gasket
TWS-BP1 Single wall-mount base
TWS-BP2 Double wall-mount base
TWS-KIT Base and stem extension
3
Select
Lighting
Modules
(5 maximum)
Module Voltage
Range
Color Continuous
Incandescent
Flashing
Incandescent
Continuous
LED
Flashing
LED
Strobe
Part Number
24 VAC BLUE TWS-F1G TWS-L1G TWS-FL1G TWS-LL1G TWS-X1G
24 VDC BLUE TWS-F1N TWS-L1N TWS-FL1N TWS-LL1N TWS-X1N
110 VAC BLUE TWS-F1A TWS-L1A TWS-FL1A TWS-LL1A TWS-X1A
24 VAC AMBER TWS-F2G TWS-L2G TWS-FL2G TWS-LL2G TWS-X2G
24 VDC AMBER TWS-F2N TWS-L2N TWS-FL2N TWS-LL2N TWS-X2N
110 VAC AMBER TWS-F2A TWS-L2A TWS-FL2A TWS-LL2A TWS-X2A
24 VAC RED TWS-F3G TWS-L3G TWS-FL3G TWS-LL3G TWS-X3G
24 VDC RED TWS-F3N TWS-L3N TWS-FL3N TWS-LL3N TWS-X3N
110 VAC RED TWS-F3A TWS-L3A TWS-FL3A TWS-LL3A TWS-X3A
24 VAC GREEN TWS-F4G TWS-L4G TWS-FL4G TWS-LL4G TWS-X4G
24 VDC GREEN TWS-F4N TWS-L4N TWS-FL4N TWS-LL4N TWS-X4N
110 VAC GREEN TWS-F4A TWS-L4A TWS-FL4A TWS-LL4A TWS-X4A
24 VAC YELLOW TWS-F5G TWS-L5G TWS-FL5G TWS-LL5G TWS-X5G
24 VDC YELLOW TWS-F5N TWS-L5N TWS-FL5N TWS-LL5NT WS-X5N
110 VAC YELLOW TWS-F5A TWS-L5A TWS-FL5A TWS-LL5A TWS-X5A
24 VAC CLEAR TWS-F6G TWS-L6G TWS-X6G
24 VDC CLEAR TWS-F6N TWS-L6N TWS-X6N
110 VAC CLEAR TWS-F6A TWS-L6A -- TWS-X6A
4 Select Horn
(1 maximum)
24 VAC TWS-AG
24 VDC TWS-AN
110 VAC TWS-AA
-
--
-
March 2014
ACCESSORIES
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out
TWS-BA15D-A 110VAC Replacement IC Lamp
TWS-BA15D-G 24 VAC Replacement IC Lamp
TWS-BA15D-N 24 VDC Replacement IC Lamp
TWS-LED1-A 110 VAC Blue replacement LED
TWS-LED1-G 24 VAC Blue replacement LED
TWS-LED1-N 24 VDC Blue replacement LED
TWS-LED2-A 110 VAC Amber replacement LED
TWS-LED2-G 24 VAC Amber replacement LED
TWS-LED2-N 24 VDC Amber replacement LED
TWS-LED3-A 110 VAC Red replacement LED
TWS-LED3-G 24 VAC Red replacement LED
TWS-LED3-N 24 VDC Red replacement LED
TWS-LED4-A 110 VAC Green replacement LED
TWS-LED4-G 24 VAC Green replacement LED
TWS-LED4-N 24 VDC Green replacement LED
TWS-LED5-A 110 VAC Yellow replacement LED
TWS-LED5-G 24 VAC Yellow replacement LED
TWS-LED5-N 24 VDC Yellow replacement LED
TWS-LRX2J Universal Xenon replacement- requires solder connection

114. ALARMS & INDICATION 84ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC, 120 VAC
Contact Rating
A600 10A, 600 VAC
Q600 2.5A, 600 VDC
Contact Configuration 4 Maintained or 6 Momentary
maximum
Mechanical Life Contact 10 million operations
Contact Type Self-cleaning silver contacts
Contact Resistance <25 mΩ
Operating Temperature -13° to 158°F (-25° to 70°C)
Storage Temperature -22° to 185°F (-30° to 85°C)
Dimensions M1S, M2S, M3S
4"H x 4" W x 4"D
(10.2 x 10.2 x 10.2 cm)
M4S 5.91"H x 5.91"D x 4.72"D
(15 x 15 x 12 cm)
M1F 5.5"H x 5.5"W x 4"D
(14 x 14 x 10.2 cm)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Approvals UL Listed file # E352651, NKCR,
cUL
Weight M1S
2.63 lb (1.19 kg)
M2S,M1F 2.55 lb (1.16 kg)
M3S 2.83 lb (1.28 kg)
M4S 3.95 lb (1.79 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The ESB Series Operator Stations offer a highly visible method to shut down equipment, initiate alarms, or give a controller input during emergency conditions
. Operation
occurs with the breaking of a lens, and then pushing the red push-button inside
. Both break-lens to release button and
field replacement lens are available.
FEATURES
• Highl •
UL listed for Category NKCR, File #E352651
• Various NEMA rated enclosures
• Red push-button operators
• 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. contact included
OPERATOR STATIONS
ESB SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
ESB-M1F-BLR-BS
WIRING
TOP
3
4
1
2
1NO-1NC
Note: Typical contact connection
(4 momentary or 6 maintained maximum)
ESB-M3S-BLP-CS
March 2014

115. NEW! 85ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!
OPERATOR STATIONS
ESB SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Description
ESB Break-Lens Operator Station (UL NKCR)
Enclosure
M1S NEMA 1 Metal enclosure,  surface mount
M3S NEMA 3R Metal enclosure,  surface mount
M2S NEMA 12,13 Metal enclosure,  surface mount
M4S NEMA 4,12 Metal Enclosure, surface mount
M1F NEMA 1 Metal enclosure,  flush mount
Button Style
BLR“Break Lens to Release Button” model with red momentary  push button
BLP“Break Lens - Push Button” model maintained operator
Legend
BS Boiler Shut-dow n
CS Chiller Stop
FN Exhaust Fa n
HS HVAC Shut-dow n
PO Power Off
RP Refrigerant Purge
SD Shut Down
SO Shut Off
ST Stop
VP Ventilation Stop
VT Ventilation Start
XX*Custom Legend
ESB M1S BLP CS Example: ESB-M1S-BLP-CS Break-Lens Operator Station, 
NEMA 1 metal enclosur
e, surface mount, maintained 
“Break Lens Push Button” operator, labeled as “Chiller Stop”
-- -
*18 character max, no color changes, no font changes, 
  no company logos.
ACCESSORIES PAGE
ES-LENS Replacment Lens for ESB series Operator Stations
ES-NC Normally Closed Contact Block for Non-illuminated ESM, ESB, and ESP
Emergency Operator Stations 98
ES-NO Normally Open Contact Block for Non-illuminated ESM, ESB, and
ESP Operator Stations 98
March 2014

116. ALARMS & INDICATION 86ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC, 120 VAC
Contact Rating
A600 10A, 600 VAC
Q600 2.5A, 600 VDC
Contact Configuration 4 Maintained or 6 Momentary
maximum
Mechanical Life Contact 10 million operations
Contact Type Self-cleaning silver contacts
Contact Resistance <25 mΩ
Operating Temperature -13° to 158°F (-25° to 70°C)
Storage Temperature -22° to 185°F(-30° to 85°C)
Dimensions M1S, M2S
4"H x 4"DW x 3"D
(10.2 x 10.2 x 7.6 cm)
NXS 4.45"H x 2.87" W x 3.11"D
(10.2 x 7.6 x 7.9 cm)
SXS 3.5"H x 3.25"W x 2.75"D
(8.9 x 8.3 x 7.1 cm)
M3S 4"H x 4" W x 4"D
(10.2 x 10.2 x 10.2 cm)
M1F 5.5"H x 5.5"W x 3"D
(14 x 14 x 7.6 cm)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 availiable
Approvals UL Listed NISD File# E348889, CSA,
NEMA
Weight M1S
1.84 lb (0.84 kg)
NXS 1.93 lb (0.88 kg)
M2S 2.30 lb (1.04 kg)
SXS 1.90 lb (0.86 kg)
M3S 2.95 lb (1.34 kg)
M1F 2.39 lb (1.03 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The E-Stop ESM Series Emergency Operator Stations offer a highly visible method to shut down equipment, initiate alarms, or give a controller input during emergency conditions
.
Oper
ation is with the push of a red 40mm mushroom-head
push-button
. The button may be reset with a pull or twist of
the mushroom head, depending on the button style.
FEATURES
• Highl •
UL listed for Category NISD Emergency Stop Devices,
File #E348889
• Various NEMA rated enclosures
• 40mm Red Mushroom Operators
• 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. contact included
EMERGENCY OPERATOR STATIONS
ESM SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
WIRING
PTI24
1 NO-1NC
Note: Typical contact connection
TOP
3
4
1
2
PP0, PT0, PK
1NO-1NC
Note: Typical contact connection
(4 momentary or 6 maintained maximum)
ESM-M1S-PP0-BS
ESM-NXS-PP0-VT
March 2014

117. fi 87ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
EMERGENCY OPERATOR STATIONS
ESM SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Description
ESM Maintained Emerg ency Operator Station (UL NISD)
Enclosure
M1S NEMA 1 Metal enclosure, surface mount
NXS NEMA 4X,12 Non-metal enclosure, surface mount
M2S NEMA 12,13 Metal enclosure,  surface mount
SXS NEMA 4X Stainless steel enclosure,  surface mount
M3S NEMA 3R Metal enclosure, surface mount
M1F NEMA 1 Metal enclosure, flush mount
Button Style
PP0 Red maintained 40mm mushroom (push-pull)
PT0 Red maintained 40mm mushroom (push-twist)
PTL24* Illuminated 24V red maintained 40mm mushroom (push-twist, lamp included)
PK0 Red maintained 40mm mushroom (push- key release)
Legend
BS Emergency - Boiler Shut-dow n
CS Emergency - Chiller Stop
FN Emergency - Exhaust Fa n
HS Emergency- HVAC Shut-dow n
PO Emergency - Po wer Off
RP Emergency - Refrigerant Purge
SD Emergency - Shut Down
SO Emergency - Shut Off
ST Emergency - Stop
VP Emergency - Ventilation Stop
VT Emergency - Ventilation Start
XX** Custom Legend
ESM M1S PP0 CS
Example: ESM-M1S-PP0-CS Maintained 
Emergency Operator Station, NEMA1 
metal enclosur
e, surface mount, Red 
maintained 40mm push-pull mushroom, 
labeled as “Chiller Stop”
-- -
*Can only be used with M1S or M1F enclosure
**18 character max, no color changes, no font changes,     no company logos.
March 2014
ACCESSORIES PAGE
ES-KEY Replacement Key for PK0 option, ESM and ESP series 87,89
ES-NC Normally Closed Contact Block for Non-illuminated ESM, ESB, and ESP Emergency Operator Stations 85,87,89
ES-NO Normally Open Contact Block for Non-illuminated ESM, ESB, and ESP Emergency Operator Stations 85,87,89

118. ALARMS & INDICATION 88ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC, 120 VAC
Contact Rating
A600 10A, 600 VAC
Q600 2.5A, 600 VDC
Contact Configuration 4 Maintained or 6 Momentary
maximum
Mechanical Life Contact 10 million operations
Contact Type Self-cleaning silver contacts
Contact Resistance <25 milli ohms
Operating Temperature -13° to 158°F (-25° to 70°C)
Storage Temperature -22° to 185°F (-30° to 85°C)
Dimensions 4.5"H x 2.75"W x 0.63"D
(11.4 x 7 x 1.6 cm)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Approvals UL Listed NISD File# E348889
Weight 0.58 lb (0.26kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The E-Stop ESP Series Emergency Operator Stations offer a highly visible method to shut down equipment, initiate alarms, or give a controller input during emergency conditions
. The
ESP Series consists of a stainless steel plate with a 40mm mushroom head push-button
. The button may be reset with a
pull or twist of the mushroom head, depending on the button style
.
FEATURES
• Stainless steel plate mounted
• Highly visible yellow/black background
• UL listed for Category NISD Emergency Stop Devices,
File #E348889
• 40mm Red Mushroom Operators
• 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. contact included
EMERGENCY OPERATOR STATIONS
ESP SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
WIRING
PTI24
1 NO-1NC
Note: Typical contact connection
TOP
3
4
1
2
PP0, PT0, PK
ESP-PK0-SO
ESP-PP0-HS
1NO-1NC
Note: Typical contact connection
(4 momentary or 6 maintained maximum)
March 2014

119. fi 89ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
EMERGENCY OPERATOR STATIONS
ESP SERIES
Model Description
ESP Plate-mounted Emerg ency Operator Station (UL NISD)
Button Style
PP0 Red maintained 40mm mushroom (push-pull)
PT0 Red maintained 40mm mushroom (push-twist)
PTL24 Illuminated 24V Red maintained 40mm mushroom (push-twist, lamp included)
PK0 Red maintained 40mm mushroom (push- key release)
Legend
BS Emergency - Boiler Shut-dow n
CS Emergency - Chiller Stop
FN Emergency - Exhaust Fa n
HS Emergency- HVAC Shut-dow n
PO Emergency - Po wer Off
RP Emergency - Refrigerant Purge
SD Emergency - Shut Down
SO Emergency - Shut Off
ST Emergency - Stop
VP Emergency - Ventilation Stop
VT Emergency - Ventilation Start
XX* Custom Legend
ESP PP0 CS
Example: ESP-PP0-CS Plate mounted Emergency Operator
Station
. Red Maintained Push-Pull bu tton labeled as “Chiller
Stop”.
- -
*18 character max, no color changes, no font changes,
no company logos.
ACCESSORIES PAGE
ES-KEY Replacement Key for PK0 option, ESM and ESP series 98
ES-NC Normally Closed Contact Block for Non-illuminated ESM, ESB, and
ESP Emergency Operator Stations 98
ES-NO Normally Open Contact Block for Non-illuminated ESM, ESB, and
ESP Emergency Operator Stations 98
March 2014

120. ALARMS & INDICATION 90ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
OPERATOR STATIONS
ST120 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES PAGE
PILCLHCOV1 Clear hinged cover for push-pull model and ST120SN4XNM 90,92
PILCLHCOV5 Clear hinged cover for break-lens model except ST120SN4XNM
PILENS Replacement lens for break-lens model
PILNCCB N.C. stackable contact block for MST1 stations 90-92
PILNOCB N.O. stackable contact block for MST1 Stations 90-92
- Red maintained 40 mm mushroom (push-pull) labeled “Pull to Reset” NEMA 4X and 12 nonmetallic surface-mount box
F Red maintained 40 mm mushroom (push-pull) labeled
“Pull to Reset” NEMA 4 and 12 all-metal flush-mount box
FN1 Red maintained 40 mm mushroom (push-pull) labeled
“Pull to Reset” NEMA 1 all-metal flush-mount box
N1 Red maintained 40 mm mushroom (push-pull) labeled “Pull to Reset
” NEMA 1 all-metal surface-mount box
RP1 Red “Raised Lid - Push Button” padlockable solid lid ov er momentary flush round push button
RP2 Red “Raised Lid - Push Button” padlockable solid lid ov er maintained flush round push button
LEGENDS
BS EMERGENCY - BOILER SHUT-DOWN
CS EMERGENCY - CHILLER STOP
FAN EMERGENCY - EXHAUST FA N
HS EMERGENCY - HVAC SHUT-DOWN
PO EMERGENCY - POWER OFF
RPG EMERGENCY - REFRIGERANT PURGE
SD EMERGENCY - SHUT DOWN
SO EMERGENCY - SHUT OFF
ST EMERGENCY - STOP
VS EMERGENCY - VENTILATION STOP
VSTART EMERGENCY - VENTILATION START
PUSH-BUTTON OPERATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION ST120 Complete break-lens emergency operator station (spare lens included, contacts not included)
FN1 NEMA 1 all-metal flush-mount box FN4 NEMA 4 and 12 all-metal flush-mount box SN1 NEMA 1 all-metal surface-mount box
SN3R NEMA 3R rainproof all-metal surface-mount box
SN4 NEMA 4 and 12 all-metal surface-mount box SN4XNM NEMA 4X non-metalic surface-mount box
- Red “Break Lens to Release Button” model (use normally closed contact to close circuit when button releases)
BP1 Red
“Break Lens - Push Button” model, momentary operator
BP2 Red
“Break Lens - Push Button” model, maintained operator
P1
“Break Lens - Operate Switch” two-position selector switch, maintained both positions, short le ver
P3
“Break Lens - Operate Switch” three-position selector sw itch, maintained all positions, short le ver
BREAK-LENS OPERATION
LEGENDS - See above
MODEL DESCRIPTION ST120SL Complete push-pull emergency operator station (contacts not included)
Notes: Six contact blocks max (2 rows of 3) may be used on each break glass operator station and the -FN1 and -N1
modesl of push-button operation stations. The - model and F model push-button stations can only take three contact
blocks (1 row of 3).
All units use nor
mally open contacts to close circuit or normally closed to open circuit (except "Break Glass of Release
Button" model)
.
ST120-SN3R-BP2-CS ST120SL-N1-BSST120-FN1-BP2-RPG ST120SL-RP2-VSST120-SN4XNM-PO
March 2014
Pilla
Electrical
Products, Inc.
DESCRIPTION
ST120 Series Operator Stations offers a means of disconnect to
shut down equipment and/or initiate alarms during emergency
conditions
. Contacts are rated 600V @ 10A AC and 2.5A DC. All
models carr
y a one-year warranty
. UL file is E158147.

121. NEW! 91ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
The WPS Series Plate-mounted Operator Stations mount on
a single-gang wall box or a standard handy box and come
with brushed stainless steel plate
. They are rated NEMA 1 for
indoor applications. Many options are available for the WPS
Series in addition to the models shown on our catalog page.
FEATURES
• Mounted on brushed stainless steel wall plate
• Order contacts separately for wiring flexibility
• Hinged lockout lids options
• Special configurations and labeling are available
• Single-gang wall or handy box mounting
• Contacts rated 600V at 10A AC and 2.5A DC
• One-year warranty
• UL File E158147
PLATE MOUNTED OPERATOR STATIONS
WPS SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
WPS Wa ll plate, box mounted emergency operator station (order contacts separately) 
BUTTON STYLE
MO Red momentary 40 mm mushroom
MP Red maintained 40 mm mushroom (push-pull) labeled “Pull to Reset” TW     Red maintained 40 mm mushroom (push-turn to reset) labeled “Turn to Reset”
KR Red maintained key release 40 mm mushroom with two  keys, key required to reset only
RP1    Red “Raise Lid - Push Button” padlockable solid lid ov er momentary flush round push button
RP2    Red “Raise Lid - Push Button” padlockable solid lid ov er maintained flush round push button
CP1 Red “Raise Lid - Push Button” padlockable cl ear lid ov er momentary flush round push bu tton
CP2 Red “Raise Lid - Push Button” padlockable cl ear lid ov er maintained flush round push bu tton
BR Break Lens model with hammer (NC/NO contacts included)
LEGENDS CS EMERGENCY - CHILLER STOP PO       EMERGENCY - POWER OFF BS EMERGENCY - BOILER SHUT-DOW N
HS EMERGENCY - HV AC SHUT-DOWN
VS EMERGENCY - VENTILATION STOP ST EMERGENCY - STOP SD EMERGENCY - SHUT-DOWN VSTART EMERGENCY - VENTILATION START
    SO       EMERGENCY - SHUT-OFF       CLM   Clearhinged lockout lid for use with MO, MP, TW, KR 40mm mushroom button
      DLM   Hinged lockout lid for use with MO 40mm mushroom button.
      Requires lid to be lifted in order to automatically release/extend mushroom
      device.
WPS MP VSTART
Example: WPS-MP-VSTART Wa ll plate operator station red maintained 
       push-pull bu tton labeled “Ventilation Start”
WPS-KR-VS WPS-BR-POWPS-MP-BS-CLM
WPS-RP2-HS
WPS-MO-PO-DLM
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
PILCLM Clear cover for MO, MP, TW, KR stations
PILNCCB N.C. stackable contact block 103
PILNOCB N.O. stackable contact block 103
PILRPKEY Replacement key for WPS-KR series, specify model and key number when ordering
PILBRLENS Replacement lenses for WPSBR models only (3/pkg)
Note: Three contact blocks can be used for a depth of 1-5/8" (42 mm).
Three more can be added for a depth of 2-5/8" (67 mm).
March 2014
Pilla
Electrical
Products, Inc.

122. ALARMS & INDICATION 92ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
POWER CONTROL STATIONS
MNST AND MST1 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MNST and MST1 Series Power Control Stations offer
two push-button control for a variety of HVAC and other
equipment
. It comes with two round push-buttons (one green
and one red) and one set of normally open and normally closed contacts
.
FEATURES
• Models with non-metallic NEMA 4X & 12 enclosures for
outdoor and wet locations
• Models with metal NEMA 1 enclosures for indoor and dry
locations
• Bold, reflective legends on white enamel aluminum face
plate
• Two maintained/interlocked push buttons on MNST models
• Two momentary/non-interlocked ormomentary/
noninterloced, push buttons on MST1 models
• UL listed, File E158147
Contact Rating 600V, 10A continuous @120 VAC, 0.5A
continuous @24 VDC
Contact Configuration 1NC, 1 NO
Operating Temperature -13° to 158°F (-25° to 70°C)
Storage Temperature -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C)
Conduit Connection

MNSTxxN1x/MST1xxN1x
Knockouts in top, bottom & back for 1/2"
(1.27 cm) and 3/4" conduit
Mounting MNSTx/MST1x
Surface mount, external mounting tabs
top and bottom
MNSTxxN1x/MST1xxN1x Surface mount, two mounting holes in the
back
Approvals UL Listed file #E158147, cUL Listed
Enclosure Rating
MNSTx/MST1x NEMA 4X/4/12/3/1, Nonmetallic backbox
MNSTxxN1x/MST1xxN1x NEMA 1, Metal backbox
Dimensions
MNSTx/MST1x 4"W x 4"H x 2.4"D
(10.16 x 10.16 x 6.09 cm)
MNSTxxN1x/MST1xxN1x 4"W x 4"H x 3"D
(10.16 x 10.16 x 7.62 cm)
Weight MNSTx/MST1x
1 lb (0.45 kg)
MNSTxxN1x/MST1xxN1x 2.5 lbs (1.13 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
MNSTN1SS with
PILCLHCOV1 COVER
MNSTLGSS
Pilla
Electrical
Products, Inc.
ACCESSORIES
PILNCMN Additional specialty normally closed contact block for MNST stations only
PILNOMN Additional specialty normally open contact block for MNST stations only
PILCLHCOV 1
PILNCCB
PILNOCB
Clear hinged cover, tamperproof
N.C. stackable contact block for MST1 stations
N.O. stackable contact block for MST1 stations
Model
MNST
MNST
(BLANK)
LB
LB
LC
LE
LF
LG
LH
LP
LV
(BLANK)
N1
N1
SS
SS
OO
CI
Example: MNSTLBN1SS Boiler control station in NEMA 1 metal housing with start
and stop pushbuttons
Description
Power control stations, two maintained/interlocked pushbuttons, one set of NO/NC specialty contact blocks included
MST1 Power control stations, two momentary/non-interlocked pushbuttons, one set of NO/NC contact blocks included
Main legend "HVAC"
Main legend "POWER"
Main legend "VENTILATION"
Default main legend "POWER CONTROL SWITCH"
Main legend "BOILER"
Main legend "CHILLER"
Main legend "EXHAUST FAN"
Main legend "FUEL"
Main legend "GENERAT OR"
Custom inscriptions on pushbuttons (customer to provide inscription details)
NEMA 4X/4/12/3 non-metallic grey surface-mount box for outdoor or indoor/wet locations
NEMA 1 metal grey surface-mount box for indoor/dry locations
"START" and "STOP" pushbuttons
"ON" and "OFF" pushbuttons
March 2014
ACCESSORIES PAGE
PILCLHCOV1 Clear hinged cover for push-pull model and ST120SN4XNM 90,92
PILNCCB N.C. stackable contact block for MST1 stations 90-92
PILNCMN Additional specialty Normally Closed contact block for MNST stations only
PILNOCB N.O. stackable contact block for MST1 Stations 90-92
PILNOMN Additional specialty Normally Open contact block for MNST stations only

123. fi 93ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
March 2014
Supply Voltage
Black 24 VDC @ 10 mA
Color 24 VDC @ 35 mA
Input Signal 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC
Input Impedance 400 kΩ
Accuracy 0.1% of scale plus one digit
Digit Count
VPI-1, VPI-4 3-1/2 digits
VPI-3 4-1/2 digits
Digit Size VPI-1, VPI-3C
0.5" (1.27 cm)
VPI-4 1.0" (2.54 cm)
Digit Span (VPI-3) 2000 digits (20000 digits)
Decimal Point (VPI-3) Three positions or none, Four positions or none
Display Color Black, amber, green, red
Zero Range (VPI-3) -1999 to 1999, -19999 to 19999
Operating Humidity 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Panel Clearance 1.0" (5.08 cm)
Cutout Requirement VPI-1C
1.00"H x 2.40"W (2.54 x 6.10 cm)
VPI-4 1.77"H x 3.62"W (4.5 x 9.2 cm)
Dimensions VPI-1C, VPI-3C
1.10"H x 2.51"W (2.82 x 6.38 cm)
VPI-4 1.89"H x 3.62"W (4.8 x 9.6 cm)
E (NEMA4X) 6.0"H x 6.0"W x 3"D (15.2 x 15.2 x 7.6 cm)
WMB 2.12"H x 3.12"W x 1.75"D (5.4 x 7.94 x 4.45 cm)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1, NEMA 4X
Approvals RoHS
Weight 4 oz (113g)
Warranty 1 year
3-1/2 DIGIT LCD PANEL DISPLAY
VPI SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The VPI Series is a voltage (0-5V, 0-10V) input 24 VDC powered,
3-1/2 digit display. The VPI Series uses a voltage signal of 0-5 or
0-10 VDC that can be scaled to a span of 2000 digits within a range of -1999 to 1999
. This display also features jumper selectable, built-in
engineering units. The VPI-4 offers large, easy to read 1" (2.54 cm)
digits.
FEATURES
•
0-5 or 0-10 VDC input signal
• 3-1/2 digit, easy to read LCD display (VPI-1, VPI-4)
• 4-1/2 digit, easy to read LCD display (VPI-3)
• Available in black amber, green and red digits
• Snap-in panel mounting
• NEMA 4 enclosure available
• Precalibrated before shipping
• Positive-to-negative indication
• Jumper selectable engineering unit display of °F, °C, PSI, %
Power supply
24 VDC
+- +- +-
Voltage
input
* PWR- and SIG-
must be externally
connected together
PWR SIG BL
VPI
Power connection only
required for amber, green, or red display.
5V
10V
OFFSET
5V Span pot
10V Span pot
Offset (ZERO) pot
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
VPI-1C A E-DBLExample: VPI-1C-A-E-DBL Tw o amber 3-1/2 digit
displays mounted in a single enclosure
MODEL DESCRIPTION
VPI-4 3-1/2 digit panel display*, 1'' (2.54 cm) digits
VPI-1C 3-1/2 digit panel display*, 0.5'' (1.27 cm) digits
VPI-3C 4-1/2 digit panel display*, 0.5'' (1.27 cm) digits
– 3-1/2 digit display with black digits
A 3-1/2 digit display with amber digits
G 3-1/2 digit display with green digits
R 3-1/2 digit display with red digits
– No enclosure
E LCD panel display with NEMA 4X enclosure (VPI-1C and VPI-3C only)
WMB LCD panel display with small enclosure (VPI-1C and VPI-3C only)
E-DBL Two LCD panel displays in one NEMA 4X enclosure (VPI-1C and VPI-3C only)
VPI-1-C-WMB
VPI-4
VPI-1-C-G
(typical panel mount)
VPI-1-C-R-E VPI-1-C-R-E-DBL
APPLICATION
• Temperature
• Humidity
• Pressure
• Gallons per minute
• Voltage
• Kilowatt demand
Displays are custom calibrated at no charge
and require specification of input scale (VDC),
range, engineering units, and decimal point
placement
.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out
GP-3420 LPI-1C, LPI-3C, VPI-1C mounting goof plate, 3.40" x 2.00" (8.6 x 5.1 cm) 93,97-99
GP-3430 LPI-1C, LPI-3C, VPI-1C mounting goof plate, 3.40" x 3.00" (8.6 x 7.6 cm) 93,97-99

124. ALARMS & INDICATION 94ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
March 2014
Supply Voltage 4 to 30 VDC @ 35 mA
Input Signal 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20mA (with resistor)
0-40 VDC max
Input Impedance 110 mA @ 5 VDC
Wire Type Screw terminals, 16 to 26 AWG
Accuracy 0.05% typical, 0.1% maximum
Display Type
SGD-24 2.4 inch diagonal 320 x 240 pixels,
16-bit color
SGD-28 2.8 inch diagonal 320 x 240 pixels,
16-bit color
Interface Compatible with Windows XP, 2000,
Vista, Windows 7, mini USB cable connection
Sample Intervals
3 samples per second
Operating Temperature 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
Panel Cutout SGD-24
1.81"H x 2.91"W (4.60 x 7.40 cm) 0.11"
(3 mm) maximum panel thickness
SGD-28 2.15"H x 3.43"W (5.45 x 8.70 cm)
0.11" (3 mm) maximum panel thickness
Dimensions SGD-24
1.9"H x 3.0"W x 0.7"D
(4.8 x 7.6 x 1.8 cm)
SGD-28 2.2"H x 3.5"W x 0.8"D
(5.7 x 8.9 x 1.9 cm)
NEMA 4X enclosure 6.0"H x 6.0"W x 3.0"D
(15.2 x 15.2 x 7.6 cm)
Enclosure Options NEMA 1 standard NEMA 4X optional
Additional Specifications Meter choices- Bar graph, analog
needle, digital readout, combinations
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight
SGD-24 0.11 lb (0.05 kg)
SGD-28 0.14 lb (0.06 kg)
Warranty 1 year
PANELPILOT SMART GRAPHICAL DISPLAY
SGD-24, -28
DESCRIPTION
The PanelPilot Smart Graphics Display is a configurable panel-mount volt meter with selectable graph colors, input signal scales, and meter display types
. It can be used
to displa
y any proportional control or transmitter signal
represented by a voltage span within 0 to 40 VDC
. It is easily
and quic
kly field-configured using simple software, via a
USB cable, or is available preconfigured from Kele
. It has
a customizab
le splash screen and comes in a 2
.4" or 2.8"
screen size. A NEMA 4X enclosure is also available which
can house one or two displays, preassembled at Kele or separately available for field installation
.
FEATURES
• 2.4" or 2.8" color TFT screen for high visibility
• Free PanelPilot software saves money
• Simple USB cable connection for quick setup
• 6 standard meter types, selectable colors, scales, and
labels for display flexibility
• Splash screen accepts common picture files and allo
ws customization
• Snap-in panel mount for fast installation
• NEMA 4X enclosure option with single or double display mounting
APPLICATION
• T •
Humidity
• Pressure
• Air quality
• Valve or damper position
• Air or water flow
• Water level
• Light level
• Motor speed
• Any 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC transmitter signal
SPECIFICATIONS
SGD-28-M-C-E
METER CHOICES
SGD-28-M
Digital Analog Analog & Digital Bar Graph
Bar Graph Meter
Digital & Bar
Graph Meter

125. fi 95ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
WIRING
PANELPILOT SMART GRAPHICAL DISPLAY
SGD-24, -28
24 VDC
Power Supply
1-5 V
BAS Input
4-20 mA + -
+
+
-
+-
4-20 mA
Loop-powered
Transmitter
-
+
4-20 mA Wiring
1
1 = IN2 Input 2 (40 VDC max) (not used)
2 = IN1 Input 1 (40 VDC max)
3 = OV Common
4 = v+ Po wer (4-30 VDC)
+234
- *24 VDC POWER SUPPLY MUST BE
FLOATING (NOT GROUNDED TO
BAS COMMON)
*
250fi*
*Order Separately
*Meter must be configured for 1-5 V
input fo r 4-20 mA input signal, when
using the 250
fiflresistor. If using a 500fi
resistor, configure the meter fo r 2-10 V.
24 VDC
Power Supply
BAS Input
0-10V
-
+
-
+-
0-10 VDC
Transmitter+
-
+
0-10 VDC Wiring
+
1234
+
+
- SIG
PWR
-
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES
SFP66-258E Panel for SGD-24, single
SFP66-258F Panel for SGD-24, double
SFP66-258C Panel for SGD-28, single
SFP66-258D Panel for SGD-28, double
USB-A-MF USB Cable Type A TO Mini B
P6063C-P258 6x6x3 NEMA4X Encl Clear Hinge Cover w/ SOPK Kit
250R-3-1 250 OHM 3 WATT 1% Resistor Long Leads
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SGD-24-M Smart Graphics Display, 2.4 inch
SGD-24-M-C Smart Graphics Display, 2.4 inch, custom calibrated
SGD-24-M-C-E Smart Graphics Display, 2.4 inch, calibrated, enclosure
SGD-24-M-C-XK Smart Display, 2.4 inch, calibrated, custom graphic
SGD-24-M-C-XK-E Smart Display, 2.4 inch, calibrated, custom graphic, enclosure
SGD-24-M-CEDBL Smart Display, 2.4 inch, calibrated, enclosure, double
SGD-24-MCXKEDBL Smart Display, 2.4 inch, calibrated, custom graphic, enclosure, double
SGD-28-M Smart Graphics Display, 2.8 inch
SGD-28-M-C Smart Graphics Display, 2.8 inch, custom calibrated
SGD-28-M-C-E Smart Graphics Display, 2.8 inch, calibrated, enclosure
SGD-28-M-C-XK Smart Display, 2.8 inch, calibrated, custom graphic
SGD-28-M-C-XK-E Smart Display, 2.8 inch, calibrated, custom graphic, enclosure
SGD-28-M-CEDBL Smart Display, 2.8 inch, calibrated, enclosure, double
SGD-28-MCXKEDBL Smart Display, 2.8 inch, calibrated, custom graphic, enclosure, double
Note: Custom Calibrated Panels,
require completion of the panel
configuration worksheet
. Work-
sheet available on Kele website www
.kele.com
RELATED PRODUCTS
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT
March 2014

126. ALARMS & INDICATION 96ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
March 2014
Supply Voltage 90-240 VAC, 12 VA / 10.5 - 30 VAC/VDC 6VA
Input Current 4-20 mA, 300Ω
Input Voltage DC 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 1 MΩ
Input Monitor DC power (no offset, 10 MΩ 0-200 mVDC,
0-2 VDC, 0-20 VDC
Accuracy ±1% full scale plus 1 count
Digit Span 3-1/2 digit
Decimal Point Off, DP1, DP2, DP3
(1999, 199.9, 19.99, 1.999)
Display Color Red, green, blue
Display Size 2.3" (5.8 cm)
Display Type Seven-segment LED
Range -1999 to 1999
Calibration Zero and span, non-interactive
Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)
Cutout Requirement 4.0"H x 10.4"W x 2.0"D
(10.0 x 26.4 x 5.0 cm)
Dimensions 4.2"H x 10.6"W x 2.2"D
(10.6 x 27.0 x 5.5 cm)
Enclosure Options NEMA 1, aluminum and plastic
Mounting Panel: Steel U-bracket
Wall/ceiling: Steel swivel bracket
Approvals RoHS
Weight 2.8 lb (1.3 kg)
Warranty 1 year
KELE BIG DISPLAY READOUT, 3-1/2 DIGIT LED, RED/BLUE/GREEN
BDR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The BDR Big Display Readout has large 2.3" size LED digits. It
pro
vides 3-1/2 digits and comes in three bright LED colors: red,
green or blue
. The BDR has a selectable decimal point position
and accommodates negative sign readouts. The readouts are in
linear proportion to the 4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC, 0-5VDC signal inputs
or a voltage monitor input from 0-20VDC. These displays are
easy to field calibrate with non-interactive zero and span pots as well as free pre-calibration service from Kele at time of order
.
FEATURES
• Lar •
LED colors in red, green or blue
• 3-1/2 digit with negative signal as needed
• Standard signal inputs: 4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC, 0-5 VDC
• Wall, ceiling or panel mount
• Non-interactive zero and span pots
• Pre-calibration
Calibration pots (use varies with source; see installation manual) SPAN
IN–I N+
DCV
Power supply monitor
0-(0.2, 2, or 20) VDC
Voltage signal in
LPI = Current signal VPI = Voltage signal DCV = Voltage monitor DP = Decimal point placement LPI OFFSET = Negative (–) sign
Choice for V or I
signal
*LPI function disables RANGES
switch
0-5 or 0-10 VDC
Current signal in
4-20 mA
VPI
VPI
DCV
RANGES
200mV 200mV
2V 5V
20V 10V
INPUT
LPI
AC POWER
90V-250V
SIG– SIG+ SIG– SIG+ AC
GND
AC
DCV5 V10VLPI
VPI LPI
OFFSET
FUNCTION DECIMAL
LPI
VPI
DCV
DP1
DP2
DP3
+
*
*
–SPAN SPANSPAN
SPAN OR ZERO ADJ.
ZERO ZERO
BDR-999-[R/G/B]-24
10.5 to 30 VAC/VDC
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
BDR-G
BDR-B
Mounting Brackets included
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BDR-999-R-24 Red LED 3-1/2 digit display, 2.3" (5.8 cm) high 24 VAC/VDC
BDR-999-G-24 Green LED 3-1/2 digit display, 2.3" (5.8 cm) high 24 VAC/VDC
BDR-999-B-24 Blue LED 3-1/2 digit display, 2.3" (5.8 cm) high 24 VAC/VDC
BDR-999-R-120 Red LED 3-1/2 digit display, 2.3" (5.8 cm) high 120 VAC
BDR-999-G-120 Green LED 3-1/2 digit display, 2.3" (5.8 cm) high 120 VAC
BDR-999-B-120 Blue LED 3-1/2 digit display, 2.3" (5.8 cm) high 120 VAC
Displays are custom calibrated at no charge and require specification of input scale (mA, VDC), range, engineering units, and decimal point placement
.
BDR-R
RELATED PRODUCTS
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT

127. fi 97ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
March 2014
DESCRIPTION
Model LPI-1C is a loop-powered indicator featuring a
large 3-1/2 digit LCD display with black digits. The Model
LPI-1C displays engineering units of °F, °C, PSI, %, or no engineering units if desired
. It is directly powered by the
4-20 mA signal and scaled to specifications.
FEA
TURES
•
Indication of 4-20 mA signal in desired scale
• 3-1/2 digit LCD display
• Snap-in panel mounting
• Easy-to-read digits
• NEMA 4X enclosure available
• Precalibrated for desired range
• Negative-to-positive indication
• Jumper-selectable engineering unit display
Power
supply
Sensor/
transmitter
BAS input
or other
4-20 mA load
-
+ -
+
Z
E
R
O
S
P
A
N
+-
Factory calibrated
(no field calibration
needed)
- +
Back of display unit
Board unit
°F
°C
PSI
%
Connector pins Engineering unit jumpers
Unit selected displays to
the right of display reading.
4-20 mA
SIG
Connect the LPI-1C
indicator in series with
the 4-20 mA current
loop to be measured.
WIRING
APPLICATION
• T
• Humidity
• Pressure
• Differential or static pressure
• Kilowatt demand
3-1/2 DIGIT LCD PANEL DISPLAY
LPI-1C
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
LPI-1C E-DBLExample: LPI-1C-E-DBL Two LPI-1C displays mounted
in a single enclosure
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LPI-1C 3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with black digits*
– No enclosure
E 3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with NEMA 4X enclosure
WMB 3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with small enclosure
E-DBL Two 3-1/2 digit LCD panel displays in one NEMA 4X enclosure
• Gallons per minute
• Voltage
• Current
• Many other 4-20 mA applications
LPI-1C-WMB
Input Signal 4-20 mA loop-powered
Input Impedance 300Ω nominal @ 24 VDC
Accuracy 0.1% of scale
Digit Size 0.5" (1.27 cm)
Decimal Point Three positions or none (1.0.0.0)
Display Color Black
Range -1999 to 1999
Operating Humidity 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Panel Clearance 1.97" (5.00 cm)
Cutout Requirement 1.00" H x 2.40" W (2.54 x 6.10 cm)
Dimensions
Display 1.11" H x 2.51" W (2.82 x 6.38 cm)
E (NEMA 4X) 6.0"H x 6.0"W x 3.0"D
(15.2 x 15.2 x 7.62 cm)
WMB 2.12''H x 3.12''W x 1.75''D
(5.4 x 7.94 x 4.45 cm)
Approvals RoHS
Weight 0.14 lb (0.06 kg) (display only)
Warranty 1 year
LPI-1C (typical panel mount)
LPI-1C-E LPI-1C-E-DBL
Displays are custom calibrated at no charge
and require specification of input scale (mA),
range, engineering units, and decimal point
placement
.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out
GP-3420 LPI-1C, LPI-3C, VPI-1C mounting goof plate, 3.40" x 2.00" (8.6 x 5.1 cm) 93,97-99
GP-3430 LPI-1C, LPI-3C, VPI-1C mounting goof plate, 3.40" x 3.00" (8.6 x 7.6 cm) 93,97-99

128. ALARMS & INDICATION 98ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!
March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VDC @ 35 mA
Input Signal 4-20 mA loop powered
Input Impedance 300Ω nominal @ 24 VDC
Accuracy 0.1% of scale
Digit Size 0.5" (1.27 cm)
Decimal Point Three positions or none (1.0.0.0)
Display Color Amber
Display Size 0.5" (1.27 cm)
Range -1999 to 1999
Operating Humidity 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Panel Clearance 1.97" (5.00 cm)
Cutout Requirement 1.00"H x 2.40"W (2.54 x 6.10 cm)
Dimensions
Display 1.11"H x 2.51"W (2.82 x 6.38 cm)
E (NEMA 4x) 6.0"H x 6.0"W x 3.0"D
(15.2 x 15.2 x 7.62 cm)
WMB 2.12''H x 3.12''W x 1.75''D
(5.4 x 7.94 x 4.45 cm)
DBL 6.0"H x 6.0"W x 3.0"D
(15.2 x 15.2 x 7.62 cm)
Approvals RoHS
Weight 0.14 lb (0.06 kg) (Display only)
Warranty 1 year
3-1/2 DIGIT LCD AMBER / GREEN / RED PANEL DISPLAY
LPI-1C-A, LPI-1C-G, LPI-1C-R
DESCRIPTION
Models LPI-1CA, G, and R are 4-20 mA, 24 VDC-powered,
brightly lit 3-1/2 digit color LCD displays, available with
amber, green, or red digits
. Models LPI-1CA, G, and R also
feature jumper-selectable built-in engineering units of °F, °C, PSI, %, or no units
. The same 24 VDC power supply can be
used to provide power to the 4-20 mA loop and the display.
FEATURES
• Indication of 4-20 mA signal in desired scale
• Bright 3-1/2 digit LCD display
• Available in amber, green, and red
• Snap-in panel mounting
• Easy-to-read digits
• NEMA 4X enclosure available
• Precalibrated for desired range
• Negative-to-positive indication
• Jumper selectable engineering unit display
Power
supply
24 VDC
Sensor/
transmitter
BAS input or
other 4-20 mA
load
-
+ -
+
Z E R O
S P A
N
+-
+-
Factory calibrated
(no field calibration needed)
- +
Back of display unit
Board unit
°F
°C
PSI
%
Connector pins
Engineering unit jumpers
Unit selected displays
to the right of display
reading.
SIG B/L
4-20 mA
Connect the LPI-1C indicator in series with the 4-20 mA current loop to be measured.
WIRING
APPLICATION
• Temperature
• Humidity
• Pressure
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
LPI-1C-G-WMB
LPI-1C-G
(typical panel mount)
• Differential or static pressure
• Kilowatt demand
• Gallons per minute
• Voltage
• Current
• Many other 4-20 mA applications
LPI-1C-R-E
LPI-1C-R-E-DBL
LPI-1C-AE-DBLExample: LPI-1C-A-E-DBL Tw o amber 3-1/2 digit
LCD displays mounted in single enclosure
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LPI-1C-A 3-1/2 digit LCD with amber digits*
LPI-1C-G 3-1/2 digit LCD with green digits*
LPI-1C-R 3-1/2 digit LCD with red digits*
– No enclosure
E 3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with NEMA 4X enclosure
WMB 3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with small enclosure
E-DBL Two 3-1/2 digit LCD panel displays in one NEMA 4X enclosure
Displays are custom calibrated at no charge
and require specification of input scale (mA),
range, engineering units, and decimal point
placement
.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out
GP-3420 LPI-1C, LPI-3C, VPI-1C mounting goof plate, 3.40" x 2.00" (8.6 x 5.1 cm) 93,97-99
GP-3430 LPI-1C, LPI-3C, VPI-1C mounting goof plate, 3.40" x 3.00" (8.6 x 7.6 cm) 93,97-99

129. NEW! 99ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!
March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VDC @ 35 mA for colored digits
Input Signal Loop-powered 4-20 mA signal
Input Impedance 300Ω nominal @ 24 VDC
Accuracy 0.1% FS
Digit Size 0.5" (1.27 cm) LCD
Decimal Point Four positions or none (1.0.0.0.0)
Range -19999 to +19999
Operating Humidity 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Panel Clearance 1.97" (5.00 cm)
Cutout Requirement 1.00"H x 2.40"W (2.54 x 6.10 cm)
Dimensions
Display 1.11"H x 2.51"W (2.82 x 6.38 cm)
E (NEMA 4X) 6.0"H x 6.0"W x 3.0"D
(15.2 x 15.2 x 7.62 cm)
WMB 2.12''H x 3.12''W x 1.75''D
(5.4 x 7.94 x 4.45 cm)
Approvals RoHS, Except: (LPI-3CA)
Weight 0.14 lb (0.06 kg) (Display only)
Warranty 1 year
4-1/2 DIGIT BLACK / AMBER / GREEN / RED DISPLAY
LPI-3C, LPI-3C-A, LPI-3C-G OR LPI-3C-R
DESCRIPTION
Model LPI-3C is a 4-20 mA, brightly lit, 4-1/2 digit display.
Along with standard b
lack digits, amber, green, and red
(powered by 24 VDC) are also available
. The Model LPI-3C
also features jumper-selectable built-in engineering units of
°F, °C, PSI, %, or no units. For those units with colored digits,
the same 24 VDC power supply can be used to provide power to the 4-20 mA loop and the display
.
FEATURES
• Indication of 4-20 mA signal in desired scale
• Optional, bright 4-1/2 digit LCD colored display
• Available in black, amber, green, or red digits
• Snap-in panel mounting
• Easy-to-read digits
• NEMA 4X enclosure available
• Precalibrated for desired range
• Negative-to-positive indication
• Jumper-selectable engineering unit display
Power supply
24 VDC
Sensor/
transmitter
BAS input
or other
4-20 mA load
4-20
mA
ZERO
SIG B/L
+-+-
SPAN
Board unit
Display unit
Connector pins
Factory calibrated
(no field calibration
required)
Power connection only required
for amber, green, or red display.
°F
°C
PSI
%
Connect the LPI-3C
indicator in series
with the 4-20 mA
current loop to be
measured.
Engineering unit jumpers
Unit selected displays to the
right of display reading.
WIRING
APPLICATION
• Temperature
• Humidity
• Pressure
• Differential or static pressure
• Kilowatt demand
• Gallons per minute
• Voltage
• Current
• Many other 4-20 mA applications
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
LPI-3C A E-DBLExample: LPI-3C-A-E-DBL Tw o amber 4-1/2 digit LCD
displays mounted in a single enclosure.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LPI-3C 4-1/2 digit LCD panel display*
4-1/2 digit display with black digits
A 4-1/2 digit display with amber digits, (This unit not RoHS compliant)
G 4-1/2 digit display with green digits
R 4-1/2 digit display with red digits
– No enclosure
E 4-1/2 digit LCD panel display with NEMA 4X enclosure
WMB 4-1/2 digit LCD panel display with small enclosure
E-DBL Two 4-1/2 digit LCD panel displays in a single NEMA 4X enclosure
LPI-3C-A-WMB
LPI-3C
(typical panel mount)
LPI-3C-G-E
LPI-3C-R-E-DBL
Displays are custom calibrated at no charge
and require specification of input scale (mA),
range, engineering units, and decimal point
placement
.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out
GP-3420 LPI-1C, LPI-3C, VPI-1C mounting goof plate, 3.40" x 2.00" (8.6 x 5.1 cm) 93,97-99
GP-3430 LPI-1C, LPI-3C, VPI-1C mounting goof plate, 3.40" x 3.00" (8.6 x 7.6 cm) 93,97-99

130. ALARMS & INDICATION 100ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!
March 2014
Supply Voltage Black loop powered Red/Green/
Amber 24 VDC @ 35 mA
Input Signal 4-20 mA
Input Impedance 300Ω
Accuracy ± 0.05% of scale plus one digit
Digit Count 3-1/2 digits
Digit Size 1" (2.54 cm)
Decimal Point Three positions or none (1.0.0.0)
Range -1999 to 1999
Operating Humidity 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Cutout Requirement 1.77" x 3.62" (4.5 X 9.2 cm)
Dimensions 1.89"H x 3.78"W x 1.8"D
(4.8 x 9.6 x 4.6 cm)
Approvals RoHS
Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Model LPI-4 loop-powered indicator features a large
1" (2.54 cm) 3-1/2 digit display. It is designed to display any
4-20 mA signal in desired scale. The Model LPI-4 is powered
directly from the 4-20 mA signal loop, so there is no need for a power supply for the black digit model
. It is also available in
a 24 VDC powered version with red, green, or amber digits.
FEATURES
• Indication of 4-20 mA signal in desired scale
• 3-1/2 digit LCD display
• Large, easy-to-read digits
• Available in either black, red, green, or amber digits
• Precalibrated for desired range
• Snap-in panel mount with retainer
• Negative range indicator
• Includes weather-resistant seal
• Optional jumper-selectable display units °F, °C, %, PSI
LPI-4
Power supply
24 VDC
-
+ -
+
+-
- +
SIG
SPAN ZERO
Sensor/
transmitter
BAS input
or other
4-20 mA load
LPI-4R, G, A
Power supply
24 VDC
-
+ -
+
+-
- +
SIG
+-
B/L
SPAN ZERO
Sensor/
transmitter
BAS input
or other
4-20 mA load
WIRING
APPLICATION
• Temperature
• Humidity
• Pressure
• Killowatt demand
• Gallons per minute
KELE 3-1/2 DIGIT LARGE BLACK/RED/GREEN/AMBER PANEL DISPLAY
LPI-4
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
• Voltage/current
LPI-4
LPI-4G
LPI-4R
LPI-4A
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LPI-4 3-1/2 digit black panel display
LPI-4R 3-1/2 digit red panel display
LPI-4G 3-1/2 digit green panel display
LPI-4A 3-1/2 digit amber panel display
Displays are custom calibrated at no charge and require specification of input scale (mA), range, engineering units, and decimal point placement
.
RELATED PRODUCTS
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT
GP-5132 LPI-4 mounting goof plate, 5.13" x 3.25" (13.0 x 8.3 cm)

131. NEW! 101ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage 24 VDC @ 35 mA
Input Signal 4-20 mA
Input Impedance
Black 300Ω
Red 380Ω
Accuracy ± 0.1% of scale plus one digit
Digit Count 3-1/2 digits max
Digit Size 0.37" (0.94 cm)
Decimal Point Three positions of none (1.0.0.0)
Display Color Black, Red
Engineering Units (Black only) MΩ , kΩ, °C, m, V, °F, A, μ
Range Black
-1999 to 1999, min span 100 digit counts
Red
0 to 1999
Operating Humidity 95% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 130°F (0° to 54°C)
Cutout Requirement Black
0.86"H x 1.57"W (2.2 x 4.0 cm)
Red 0.8"H x 1.3"W (2.0 x 3.3 cm)
Dimensions Black
0.95"H x 1.73"W x 1.1"D
(2.4 x 4.4 x 2.8 cm)
Red 1.28"H x 1.82"W x 1.6"D
(3.25 x 4.64 x 4.0 cm)
Approvals RoHS
Weight 0.13 lb (0.06 Kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The LPI-5 loop-powered indicator features a small 0.37" (0.94
cm), 3-1/2 digit, b
lack LCD or red LED display
. The meter
displays any 4-20 mA signal in desired scale. The Model
LPI-5 is powered directly from the 4-20 mA signal loop, so
the black LCD display and red LED display do not require a
separate power supply
.
FEATURES
• Indication of 4-20 mA signal in desired scale
• Loop powered
• 3-1/2 digit display
• Snap-in panel mounting
• Small, easy-to-read display
• Precalibrated for desired range
• Selectable decimal point location
• Positive-to-negative indication (black LCD display)
24 VDC Po wer supply
SIG
4-20 mA
Sensor/
transmitter
BAS input
or other
4-20 mA load
-
+ -
+
- +
Factory calibrated
(No field calibration needed)
LPI-5
or
LPI-5R
WIRING
KELE 3-1/2 DIGIT SMALL BLACK/RED PANEL DISPLAY
LPI-5
SPECIFICATIONS
LPI-5
LPI-5R
APPLICATION
• Temperature
• Humidity
• Pressure
• GPM
• Kilowatt demand
• Voltage/Current
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LPI-5 3-1/2 digit small black LCD panel display
LPI-5R 3-1/2 digit small red LED panel display
Displays are custom calibrated at no
charge and require specification of
input scale (mA), range, engineering
units, and decimal point placement
.
RELATED PRODUCTS DCPA-1.2
Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT

132. ALARMS & INDICATION 102ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
March 2014
Battery Life 10 years nominal
Input Contact or solid-state switch
Count Speed
Accumulator 100 counts per second
Timer counts One-hour or 0.1-hour increments
Digit Size 0.2" (0.51 cm) high
Display 5-1/2 digit
Range 0-199999
Reset Push button or remote contact
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Panel Cutout 1.0"H x 2.0"W (2.54 x 5.08 cm)
Bezel 1.1"H x 2.09"W x 1.72"D
(2.79 x 5.3 x 4.37 cm)
Weight 0.13 lb (0.06 Kg)
Warranty 2 years
PULSE OR RUN-TIME ACCUMULATOR DISPLAY
ALD-1
DESCRIPTION
The ALD-1 is a 5-1/2 digit LCD resettable accumulator or run-
time counter. The lithium battery provides years of trouble-
free service. Two wires are all that are necessary to totalize
consumption, flow data, or run-time data. No external power
supply is necessary.
FEATURES
• Resettable accumulator or run-time counter
• Long life lithium battery
• No external power supply
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ALD-1 LCD push-button resettable accumulator counter
ALD-10C LCD run-time remote reset clock, one-hour increments
ALD-1C LCD run-time remote reset clock, 0.1-hour increments
ALD-1R LCD remote reset accumulator counter
WIRING
Run
Reset
Reset
Count
ALD-1R
Reset Wiring
(orange) (not used)
(+) (white)
(+) (blue)
(-) (orange/white)
(+) Cnt (white)
Rst (blue)
(-) Com (black)
N.O.
N.O.
Switch
Contact
Switch
Contact
ALD-1/R Accumulator Counter
ALD-1C/10C Run Time Clock
GROUND
SHIPPING
ONLY

133. fi 103ALARMS & INDICATION
ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
EDWARDS AUDIBLE AND VISUAL SIGNALS
SIGNALING BASICS
BEACON TYPES AND THEIR APPLICATIONS
Rotating Beacons
Used to signal over a large area such as in airports,
distribution centers and large process areas.
Flashing Beacons
Used to signal attention and equipment condition in process
control lines
, airport baggage areas, and other areas
requiring human interface
.
Double Flashing Beacons
Used to signal attention and equipment condition over wide areas
. Sometimes used in lieu of Rotating Beacons.
Steady Beacons
Used to identify a continuous source or process.
Strobe Lights
Used for equipment status and malfunction indication over large and high noise areas
.
Diode Supervised and UL 1971 Strobe Lights
Diode polarized strobes are used in electronically supervised alarm circuits
. When the strobe has a UL 1971
listing it may also be used in compatible fire alarm systems as a signaling device for the hearing impaired
.
LENS COLORS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS
Most Edwards strobes, steady and flashing beacons come in six lens colors: amber, blue, clear, green, magenta and red
.
Edwards LED signals come in amber, blue, green, red and,
in some cases, white. The following are examples of how
various lens colors are used in industrial and commercial signaling environments:
Amber
Denotes caution
.
Blue Used f
or safety and security.
Clear (or White) & Green
Used to indicate normal run operation.
Magenta
Used for radiation alarms.
Red Denotes emergency or w
arning.
LIGHT SOURCES AND THEIR
APPLICATIONS
Edwards signals use a variety of light sources: halogen,
standard incandescent, LED, and strobe
. The following is a
brief overview of these type of light sources and their use.
LED
Use in areas where vibr
ation resistance and long life are of
utmost concern
. Light output with older technology LEDs is
relativ
ely poor; newer technology LEDs have vastly
improved light output but are still expensive
.
Halogen
Use in areas where high light output and long life are
considerations. Halogen light sources work well in high
ambient light areas. However, halogen bulbs tend to perform
unfavorably in high vibration environments.
Incandescent
Incandescent light sources are typically the most
ine
xpensive
. They are often used in applications where cost
is a driving factor. Incandescent bulbs tend to have a
relatively short life span. Their light output, while usually
sufficient, is less than that of a halogen or strobe.
Strobes
Strobes are known for their exceptional bright burst of light energy
. A strobe light passes a brief, intense pulse of electric
current through a gas, which then emits a brilliant burst of light
. The gas is usually one of two inert gases, xenon or
krypton. Strobe lights are very vibration resistant and will
function for thousands of hours before requiring replacement
.
CAT. NUMBER VOLTAGE SUFFIXES
Edwards visual signals are available in a wide variety of voltages
. Each signal has a catalog number suffix which
indicates the voltage of that specific signal. The following is a
list of the cat. number suffixes and the voltages they
represent:
From the amber light of a rotating beacon at an airport to the double flash of a red strobe in a Division 2 area, Edwards provides the widest array of visual signaling solutions in the industry
. The following is a brief overview of some of the types of visual
signals and applications.
Suffix Voltage Suffix Voltage
-AQ 24V AC/DC -G5 24V AC 50/60 Hz
-E1 12V DC -GW 24-28V DC
-EK 12-48V DC -MP 72-125V DC
-FJ 20-30V DC -N5 120V AC 50/60 Hz
-FY 36V DC -R5 240V AV 50/60 Hz
-G1 24V DC -S1 250V DC
VISUAL SIGNALING BASICS BY EDWARDS SIGNALING

134. ALARMS & INDICATION 104ALARMS & INDICATION
2
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
AUDIBLE SIGNALING BASICS BY EDWARDS SIGNALING
EDWARDS AUDIBLE AND VISUAL SIGNALS
SIGNALING BASICS
AUDIBLE SIGNALS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS
Vibrating and Single Stroke Bells
6", 8", and 10" bells are used for alarms over large areas
such as distribution centers. 4" bells are used for smaller
applications. Single stroke bells are most useful for paging
applications.
Vibrating Horns
Used to signal attention and equipment condition in process
control lines and other areas requir
ing human interface
.
Buzzers
Most often used for local annunciation of noncritical events but can also be used when a distinctive paging signal is required
.
Chimes
Suitab
le for relatively quiet locations to page or locally
annunciate
.
Sirens and Outdoor Warning Signals
For use in general services and emergency warning over
large geographic areas.
Multiple Tone Signals
Used in stand-alone and signaling systems that require multiple tone selectability and flexibility
.
Voice Signals
Used where the delivery of specific instructions are required.
SOUND PRESSURE LEVELS
Sound pressure fluctuations diminish or “die out” with increasing distance from the sound source
. A distance must generally be
specified along with the dB rating to fully describe a sound. The
sound pressure level changes 6 dB for each halving or doubling of distance
. For a change in distance of ten times, the sound
pressure level changes 20 dB.
TYPICAL DB LEVELS WHEN SELECTING
AUDIBLE SIGNALS
In specifying a signaling device, the above characteristics
should be considered along with as many factors concerning
the application as can be gathered
. Selecting the proper device for
each signaling application need not be difficult if the following points are observed
.
1. Signal Function
Basically, the types of functions to which signals can be applied are: general alarm or emergency, start and dismissal, paging or coding, localized danger, and indication
.
The first step in selecting a signal is to carefully define this function
. Is the signal to be a warning, a call, or an instruction?
Will it be used to protect life or property? How much time will be available to take action?
Obviously, the more critical the application, the more startling the signal generated must be
. A horn is generally the most
startling signal. Its rasping tone commands immediate attention.
A single stroke bell can be used for paging applications
where danger is not at hand. A small buzzer may serve to
notify a machine operator that a particular operation is completed.
2. Uniform Sound Distribution
Usually, better signal distribution can be achieved by carefully positioning a number of smaller signals throughout a given area than by centrally locating a single large unit
.
3. Ambient Sound Conditions
The frequency of the signaling device selected should be as different from the background noise as possible
. The signal
should override this noise by a minimum of six decibels. Usually,
the noisier the area, the louder the signal required and the greater the number required
.
4. Size of Area to be Covered
The larger the area, the louder the signal required or the greater the number of units required
. Better coverage is
frequentlyobtained by the use of several signals of lower dB rating than by the use of one very loud signal, providing the
signals can be positioned to advantage
.
5. Mounting Considerations
The surface that the signal is mounted on can markedly affect
the signal’s performance. A horn, for example, should be rigidly
mounted to a sturdy surface so that all of its energy is directed into the sound output and not absorbed by the wall
. A
b
uzzer, however, can sound much louder if mounted on a
resonant surface because it will act as a “sound board” for the
device
.
CAT. NUMBER VOLTAGE SUFFIXES
Edwards audible signals are available in a wide variety of
voltages. Each signal has a catalog number suffix which
indicates the voltage of that specific signal. The following is a
list of the cat. number suffixes and the voltages they
represent:
Suffix Voltage Suffix Voltage
-AQ 24V AC/DC -G5 24V AC 50/60 Hz
-E1 12V DC -GW 24-28V DC
-EK 12-48V DC -MP 72-125V DC
-FJ 20-30V DC -N5 120V AC 50/60 Hz
-FY 36V DC -R5 240V AV 50/60 Hz
-G1 24V DC -S1 250V DC
From the soft melodic sound of a chime, to the ear piercing emergency blast of an outdoor warning signal, Edwards audible signals produce sounds that demand immediate attention
.

135. HUMIDITY
CONTROL VALVES
VBN2/VBN3 | p. 140
Series
EVSI Series | p. 125
V-Ball Series | p. 145
V200 Series | p. 113
VG2000 Series | p. 173
KOV Series | p. 206
CONTROL
VALVES
Kele Assembles Thousands of Custom Valves to Meet Your Actuator Preference,
Most Build and Ship Same-Day. We Also Offer FREE Tagging.

136. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
599 Series | p. 111
Ball Valves
VT Series | p. 121
KB Series | p. 193
CONTROL
VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
Accessories
KOV Series — Fabric Weatherproof Cover for Globe Valve Actuators. . . . . . . 206
Ball Valves B2, B3 Series
— Ball Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
HTCCV Series
— High Temperature Ball Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
VG1000 Series
— Ball Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
VBN2, VBN3 Series
— Ball Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
V-Ball Series
— Ball Valve- V-Ball
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
PICCV Series
— Pressure Independent Control Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
MVN Series
— MVN Ball Valve Actuators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Butterfly Valves KB Series
— Butterfly Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
F6, F7 Series
— Butterfly Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Globe Valve Actuators ML Series
— Direct-Mount Globe Valve Actuators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
UGVL, SGVL, WGVL Retrofit Series
— Universal Retrofit Linkage/
Actuator Kits
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
VA-4233, VA-7000 series
— Direct-mount Globe Valve Actuators
. . . . . . . . . 178
DuraDrive Series
— Globe Valve Actuators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Forta Series
— Globe Valve Actuators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Globe Valves V5011, V5013 Series
— Threaded Globe Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
VGF Series
— Flanged Globe Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
VG7000 Series
— Globe Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
G2, G3 Series
— Threaded Globe Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
VG2000 Series
— Flanged Globe Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
VB Series
— Threaded and Flanged Globe Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Solenoid Valves 8210 Series
— Red Hat Solenoid Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
EVSI Series
— Solenoid Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Zone Valves KZ Series
— Two-Position Poptop™ Zone Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Z200/Z300 Series
— Two-Position Zone Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
KVC Series
— Zone Valve
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
599 Zone Valve Series
— Zone Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
V200, V300 Series
— Zone Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
V5860 Series
— Modulating Zone Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
VM Series
— Modulating Poptop™ Zone Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
VT Series
— Two-Position Poptop™ Zone Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

137. flfi 105CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
KZT2221
KZG13A02A
KZ23B020
Two-position
snap acting
thermostat
SPDT
AC Power
Heating and Cooling ValveHeating or Cooling Valve
680-243
Changeover thermostat
pipe-mounted
Two-position
snap acting
thermostat
SPST
AC Power
WIRING
A Return
Coil
BA
Supply
Return
Coil
B
Supply
Two-way Normally Closed Piping Two-way Normally Open Piping
BA
Supply
Shown N.C. to the coil
Note: Reverse Po rts
A and B for N.O.
coil operation
Shown N.C. to the coil
Note: Reverse Po rts
A and B for N.O.
coil operation
Return
Coil
Three-way Valve in Mixing Configuration
BA
C
AB
Supply
Return
Coil
Three-way Valve in Diverting Configuration
N.C.
actuator
N.O.
actuator
N.C.
actuator
N.C.
actuator
E
3/4
(1.91)
7/8
(2.22)
3/4
(1.91)
F
3-1/4 (8.26)
H
G
3-5/16
(8.41)
B
Two-wayC
Three-way
A
D
Actuator release
(with power-off
push and pull up)
DIMENSIONS
VALVE BODY
SIZE A B C D
1/2" Sweat 1-5/16 (3.33) 7/8 (2.22) 1-5/16 (3.33) 3-5/16 (8.41)
3/4" Sweat 1-3/8 (3.49) 7/8 (2.22) 1-11/16 (4.29) 3-3/8 (8.57)
1" Sweat 1-11/16 (4.29) 7/8 (2.22) 1-11/16 (4.29) 3-5/8 (9.21)
1/2" NPT 1-3/8 (3.49) 7/8 (2.22) 1-5/16 (3.33) 3-3/8 (8.57)
3/4" NPT 1-11/16 (4.29) 7/8 (2.22) 1-7/16 (3.65) 3-5/8 (9.21)
1" NPT 1-7/8 (4.76) 1 (2.54) 1-3/4 (4.45) 3-7/8 (9.84)
Inverted flare union 1-3/8 (3.49) 7/8 (2.22) 1-5/16 (3.33) 4-1/8 (10.48)
ACTUATOR E F G H
KZG 2-3/8 (6.03) 3-11/16 (9.36) 2-3/8 (6.03) 1-1/4 (3.18)
KZH 2-5/8 (6.67) 3-7/8 (9.84) 2-3/8 (6.03) 1-1/4 (3.18)
DIMENSIONS - in (cm)
DESCRIPTION
The KZ Series Two-Position PopTop™ zone valves offer a wide range of models to handle chilled water, hot water, and 15 psig (103 kPa) steam applications
. PopTop™ valves
feature removable actuators to aid in both installation and service
. They are available in 2-way and 3-way body patterns
and with normally open or normally closed actuators.
FEATURES
• T •
Removable and replaceable actuator
• NPT, sweat, or inverted flare connections
• 2-position spring return control
TWO-POSITION POPTOP™ ZONE VALVES
KZ SERIES
PIPING

138. CONTROL VALVES 106CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Size 1/2", 3/4", 1"
Cv Range 1.0 to 8.0
Connections FNPT, Sweat, or inverted flare (3/4" only)
Flow Characteristic Quick Opening
Leakage Rating ANSI Class IV (0.01% of rated capacity)
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
Cv 1.0-1.5 60 psid (414 kPa) KZG actuator, 75 psid
(517 kPa) KZH actuator
Cv 2.5-3.0 40 psid (276 kPa) KZG actuator, 50 psid
(345 kPa) KZH actuator
Cv 3.5-4.0 25 psid (172 kPa) KZG actuator, 30 psid
(207 kPa) KZH actuator
Cv 5.0 20 psid (137 kPa) KZG actuator, 25 psid
(172 kPa) KZH actuator
Cv 7.5-8.0 17 psid (117 kPa) KZG actuator, 20 psid
(137 kPa) KZH actuator
Maximum Pressure Rating 300 psig (2067 kPa)
Materials Of Construction Brass valve body and seat, nickel-plated
stem, BUNA N paddle; stainless steel
base plate and aluminum cover on
actuator
Media Compatibility
Hot or chilled water; 50% or less ethylene
glycol; 15 psig steam
Media Temperature Range 32° to 200°F (0° to 93°C) for KZT valve;
up to 250°F (121°C) with for KZS valve with KZxx4 actuator
Supply Voltage
24 VAC ±10%; 120 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz;
208-277V models also available
Supply VA 7 VA
Supply Watts 6.5 W
Control Signal Two-position, two-wire
Wiring 18" (45.2 cm) leads
Action
Two-Way Valves N.O./N.C. determined by choice of
actuator
Three-Way Valves N.C. actuator only
Actuator Compatibility KZG (general purpose) or KZH (high
performance) type actuators only
Actuator Mounting PopTop™
Auxiliary Contacts N.O. contacts, 24-240 VAC, 5A
Auxiliary Switch Models with auxiliary switch available
Drive Time 25 seconds maximum @ 60 Hz
Manual Override N.C. actuators only
Operating Temperature
KZG Actuator Maximum ambient 104°F (40°C);
KZxx4 Actuator Maximum ambient 169°F (77°C)
Spring Return Time 9 seconds maximum
Weight Valve bodies: <1.4 lb (0.64 kg)
Actuators: 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Approvals UL and ULc Listed; CE
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS
SSTAG Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order
680-243-6 Changeover thermostat with conduit fitting
1 1 2 2 T KZ
TEMPERATURE
T
Water
S Steam (must use high temperature actuator)
Example: KZT2211
MODEL
VALVE
DESCRIPTION
KZ Two-position PopTop electric valve
2 Two-way
3 Three-way
CONFIGURATION
CONNECTION
CV CAPACITY
1
Sweat - 1/2", 3/4", 1"
2 NPT - 1/2", 3/4", 1"
4 Inverted flare - 3/4" only
CV SIZE
2
3
4
1/2"
3/4"
1"
1 1.0 1.5 1/2''
2 2.5 3.0 1/2'', 3/4''
3 3.5 4.0 1/2'', 3/4''
5 5.0 5.0 3/4'', 1''
7 7.5 7.5 3/4''
7 8.0 8.0 1''
2-way 3-way Size
Note: Valve and actuator
shipped separately.

*Inverted flare fittings not included
with valve. They are field-supplied.
002A31GKZ
CLOSEOFF
G
General operation
H High performance
Example: KZG13A020
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ACTUATOR
KZ VT Series actuator
1 Normally closed*
2 Normally open**
VALVE OPERATION
VOLTAGE
A
24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
B 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
D 208 VAC, 60 Hz
T 277 VAC, 60 Hz
U 230/220 VAC, 50 Hz
TEMPERATURE
3 4
Normal
Steam
LEADS
02
18'' Leads
OPTIONS
0 A
None
End sw itch
* Three-way valves use N.C. actuator only; reverse ports for N.O.
** No manual override.
ACCESSORIES
30-158-A KZG/KZH Series actuator replacement motor, 24 VAC
30-158-B KZG/KZH Series actuator replacement motor, 110/120 VAC
30-158-D KZG/KZH Series actuator replacement motor, 208 VAC
30-158-T KZG/KZH Series actuator replacement motor, 277 VAC
30-158-U KZG/KZH Series actuator replacement motor, 230/240 VAC
436-252 3/4" flare-to-sweat fitting
TWO-POSITION POPTOP™ ZONE VALVES
KZ SERIES

139. flfi 107CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
TWO-POSITION ZONE VALVES
Z200/Z300 SERIES
Size 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/4" (sweat
connections only)
Cv Range 1.0, 2.5, 3.5, 5.0, 7.5, 8.0
Connections FNPT, Sweat (BSP, inverted flare and
SAE flare available special order)
Body Pattern 2-way and 3-way (mixing/diverting)
Flow Characteristic Quick Opening
Leakage Class ANSI Class III (0.1%)
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
Cv = 1.0 75 psid (517 kPa)
Cv = 2.5 50 psid (345 kPa)
Cv = 3.5 30 psid (207 kPa)
Cv = 5.0 25 psid (172 kPa)
Cv = 7.5 20 psid (137 kPa)
Cv = 8.0 20 psid (137 kPa)
Maximum Pressure 300 psig (2067 kPa)
Materials Of Construction
Forged brass body, stainless
steel stem, brass seat, EPDM
paddle, aluminum actuator base,
polycarbonate actuator housing
Media Compatibility
Hot and chilled water, up to 50%
glycol; 15 psig (103 kPa) maximum steam (2-way valves only)
Media Temperature Range

32° to 250°F (0° to 121°C)
Supply Voltage 24 VAC models, 120 VAC models
(208, 240, 277 VAC models available special order)
Supply VA
7 VA
Conduit Connection 7/8" (2.2 cm) knockout for 1/2"
conduit
Wiring
24 VAC Actuators 18" (45.7 cm) leads;
120 VAC Actuators 6" (15.2 cm) leads
Auxiliary Switch Model dependant; switch closes
when actuator opens, operates with manual override
Contact Rating
24 VAC Actuators 0.4A @ 24 VAC
120 VAC Actuators 5.0A @ 120-277 VAC
Actuator Compatibility
2-way Valves N.O. or N.C. actuator
3-way Valves N.C. actuator only
Drive Time 10 to 60 seconds
Spring Return Time 6 seconds
Manual Override Included on N.C. actuators only
Operating Temperature Maximum ambient 104°F (40°C)
for models with auxiliary switches; maximum 169°F (77°C) for models without auxiliary switches
Weight
1/2" Valves 0.70 lb (0.32 kg)
3/4" Valves 0.80 lb (0.36 kg)
1" Valves 0.90 lb (0.41 kg)
1-1/4" Valves 0.90 lb (0.41 kg)
Actuators: 0.92 lb (0.42 kg)
Approvals ULC, CE, plenum rating,
cULus File #239721868P
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The Z200/Z300 Series zone valves are high-quality, cost- competitive, two-position, spring return valves made for chilled water, hot water, and 15 psig (103 kPa) steam applications
. The Z200/Z300 Series zone valves feature,
as standard, high temperature ratings and high close-off ratings
. They are available in a full range of common sizes,
connection types, and operating voltages.
FEATURES
• High-quality, long-life design
• High close-off pressures standard
• Drop-in replacement for existing zone valves
• Manual override lever for N.C. actuators
• Actuators available with end switch
• Front-mount, push-button actuator release
• Anti-water hammer gear motion
• Knockout for 1/2" conduit
• Available assembled or separate valve/actuator
SPECIFICATIONS
Z200411-Z12100 Z300411

140. CONTROL VALVES 108CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
TWO-POSITION ZONE VALVES
Z200/Z300 SERIES
A
B
C
Two-way
D
Three-way
1 .2 (3 .0)
2 .4 (6 .0)
E
3 .4 (8 .7)
4 (10 .2)
in
(cm)
CONNECTION
SIZE/TYPE AB CD E
1/2" Sweat 1 .3 (3 .4) 2 .6 (6 .8) 0 .9 (2 .4) 1 .3 (3 .4) 3 .5 (8 .9)
3/4" Sweat 1 .4 (3 .5) 2 .75 (7 .0) 0 .9 (2 .4) 1 .5 (3 .8) 3 .5 (8 .9)
1" Sweat 1 .7 (4 .3) 3 .4 (8 .6) 0 .9 (2 .4) 1 .6 (3 .9) 3 .7 (9 .3)
1 1/4" Sweat 1 .8 (4 .6) 3 .6 (9 .2) 0 .9 (2 .4) 1 .7 (4 .3) 3 .7 (9 .3)
1/2" NPT 1 .4 (3 .6) 2 .9 (7 .2) 0 .9 (2 .4) 1 .25 (3 .2) 3 .5 (8 .9)
3/4" NPT 1 .6 (3 .9) 3 .7 (7 .8) 0 .9 (2 .4) 1 .25 (3 .2) 3 .7 (9 .3)
1" NPT 1 .8 (4 .6) 3 .6 (9 .2) 0 .9 (2 .4) 1 .7 (4 .3) 3 .7 (9 .3)
M
(red)
(red)
(black)
(black)
Thermostat
(dry contact)
AC
Auxiliary switch
5A @ 24-250 VAC
(120 VAC models),
.4A @ 24 VAC
(24 VAC models)
power
WIRINGDIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
Z200 Two-way
Z300 Three-w ay (requires N.C. actuator)
CONNECTION SIZE
4 1/2"
5 3/4"
6 1"
7 1-1/4" (sweat connection only)
CONNECTION TYPE
1 NPT
3 Sweat
CV RATING
1 1.0 (1/2" only)
2 2.5 (1/2", 3/4")
3 3.5 (1/2", 3/4")
5 5.0 (3/4", 1")
7 7.5-8.0 (3/4", 1", 1-1/4")*
Example: Z200-512 Tw o-way, 3/4" NPT, Cv = 2.5
Note:
Above combinations are regularly stocke d
at Kele. Valves are also av ailable with BSP,
in verted flare, and SAE flare connections;
consult Kele for pricing and av ailability.
Z200 5 1 2
Example: Z123000 Normally closed,
two-position, spring return,
208 VAC
To order a valve/actuator assembly, append
the valve number with the actuator number,
separated by a dash. Example: Z200512-Z122000
is a two-way, 3/4" NPT, Cv = 2.5 valve with a
normally closed, two-position, spring return,
120 VAC actuator pre-assembled by Kele.

Other models av ailable from Caleffi. Call Kele
f or more information.
Z1 2 3000
MODEL DESCRIPTION
Z1 Two-position spring return
FUNCTION
1 N.C. with end switch, two- or three-way
2 N.C. without end switch, two- or three-way
3 N.O. with end switch, two-way only
4 N.O. without end switch, two-way only
VOLTAGE
1000 24 VAC, 8" wire
3000 208 VAC, 6" wire
4000 230 VAC, 6" wire
5000 277 VAC, 6" wire
6000 120 VAC, 6" wire
* 1-1/4" size only av ailable with sw eat connections.
VALVEA CTUATOR
Return
Coil
A
Supply
Return
Coil
Supply
Two-way Normally
Closed Piping
Two-way Normally
Open Piping
Supply
Shown N.C.
to the coil
Note: Reverse Po rts
A and B for N.O.
coil operation
Shown N.C.
to the coil
Note: Reverse Po rts
A and B for N.O.
coil operation
Return
Coil
Three-way Valve in
Mixing Configuration
Supply
Return
Coil
Three-way Valve in
Diverting Configuration
N.C.
Actuator
N.O.
Actuator
N.C.
Actuator
Only
N.C.
Actuator
Only
AB B
B (NO)A (NC)
AB
B (NO)A (NC)
AB
PIPING

141. flfi 109CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Common Common
A B
AB
A B
AB
Three-way Mixing or Diverting
Stem up Stem down
CARTRIDGE BOD Y
MODEL NO. PATTERN 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4"
VCZZ1100 3.2 4.7 6.6 7.1
VCZZ1400 2.9 3.9 4.2 4.3
VCZZ1500 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.8
VCZZ1600 1.3 1.5 1.5. 1.5
VCZZ6100 Three-way 3.8 6.6 8.7 8.7
Two-
way
Note: 1000 Series cartridges fit all two-w ay bodies.
6000 Series cartridges fit all three-w ay bodies.
Cartridge tool included with each cartridge.
VALVE SIZE AND CV

Common Common
A B
AB
A B
AB
Three-way Mixing or Diverting
Stem up Stem down
CARTRIDGE BOD Y
MODEL NO. PATTERN 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4"
VCZZ1100 3.2 4.7 6.6 7.1
VCZZ1400 2.9 3.9 4.2 4.3
VCZZ1500 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.8
VCZZ1600 1.3 1.5 1.5. 1.5
VCZZ6100 Three-way 3.8 6.6 8.7 8.7
Two-
way
Note: 1000 Series cartridges fit all two-w ay bodies.
6000 Series cartridges fit all three-w ay bodies.
Cartridge tool included with each cartridge.
VALVE SIZE AND CV

ZONE VALVES
KVC SERIES
Size 1/2", 3/4", 1-1/4", 1"
Cv 0.7, 4.7, 0.7, 2.9, 4.7, 8.7
Connections FNPT
Body Pattern 2-Way, 3-Way
Flow Characteristic Linear
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
60 psid (414 kPa)
Pressure Rating 300 psig (2069 kPa)
Materials Of Construction
Bronze valve body, stainless steel
stem, Ryton
®
and Noryl
®
trim, Noryl
®

and Ryton
®
plastic actuator housing
Media Compatibility Hot water, chilled water
Media Temperature Range
34° to 203°F (1° to 95°C)
Supply Voltage 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Supply VA 6 VA
Control Signal Two-position, floating, or proportional
Wiring 39" (99 cm) cable, 20 AWG conductors
Action
2-way Stem spring up on actuator removal,
stem up to close (bi-directional flow)
3-way Stem spring up on actuator removal,
stem up closes port A, stem down
closes port B
Connector Twist-lock mount with latch
Manual Override Combination override lever and position
indicator
Stroke Time
KVCx114 6 seconds
KVCx93x 120 seconds
Weight
KVC2050 1.2 lb (.54 kg)
KVC2075 1.8 lb (.80 kg)
KVC2100 2.1 lb (.95 kg)
KVC2125 2.2 lb (1.0 kg)
KVC3050 1.4 lb (.61 kg)
KVC3075 1.5 lb (.68 kg)
KVC3100 1.6 lb (.70 kg)
KVCxxx4 0.9 lb (.39 kg)
KVCxxx6 1.1 lb (.50 kg)
Approvals UL, CSA Listed, CE Certified
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KVC Series includes two- and three-way, hot and
chilled water control valves and fail-in-place or power-fail
return electric actuators
. The unique cartridge design enables
the valve to be piped mixing or diverting for the three-way valve, and either flow direction for the two-way valve
. The
actuator uses a unique twist-off mount for easy installation or servicing and is available with two-position, floating, or proportional control signals
.
FEATURES
• Three-way mixing and diverting in one body
• Two-way bi-directional flow for simple installation
• Linear flow characteristics
• Easily replaceable seat cartridge
• Twist-on low power/long life actuator
• Manual override
• Fail-in-place or power-fail return actuator models
• Selectable power fail return direction models
TABLE 1. KVC REPLACEMENT CARTRIDGES
SPECIFICATIONS
KVC 2100N66 valve with
KVC 6936 actuator
THREE-WAY VALVE FLOW CHARACTERISTICS

142. CONTROL VALVES 110CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ZONE VALVES
KVC SERIES
C
B
D
E
A
Port
3.6
(9.0)
3.7 (9.4)
2.7
(6.8)
Manual control
39"
Cable C
BA
AB
Port
3.6
(9.0)
3.7 (9.4)
Manual control
2.7
(6.8)
39"
Cable
in
(cm)
Two-way Assembly Three-way Assembly
Open
Close
24 VAC
KVC 6936
Valve
Actuator
Power-Fail Open Po rt A
(blue)
(orange)
Open
Close
(gray)
(white)
(black)
(brown)
(blue)
(orange)
(gray)
(white)
(black)
(brown)
24 VAC
H
G
H
G
H
G
H
G
24 VAC
KVC 6936
Valve
Actuator
(blue)
(black)
(orange)
2-10 VDC
*
signal
(gray)
(white)
(brown)
(gray)
(blue)
(white)
(brown)
24 VAC
KVC 7936
Valve
Actuator
KVC 7936
Valve
Actuator
Power-Fail Close Po rt A
24 VAC
Two-position
SPST
External control
24 VAC
(brown)
Port “A” closed
Open
Port “A” closed
Open
(black)
(blue)
(brown)
(black)
(blue)
(brown)
(black)
(blue)
Two-position or
Floating Controller
SPDT
External control
KVC 6934
KVC 2114
Valve
Actuator
24 VAC
2-10 VDC
*
signal
Proportional
Power-Fail Close Po rt A
(see table 3 above)
Power-Fail Open Po rt A
KVC 7934
Valve
Actuator
KVC 8114
Valve
Actuator
500Ω
* Use 500Ω resistor when signal is 4-20 mA
* Use 500Ω resistor when signal is 4-20 mA
500Ω
(black)
(orange)
2-10 VDC
*
signal
500Ω
H
G
H
G
H
G
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KVC8114 Two-position, three-wire SPST control, six-second timing actuator
KVC2114 Two-position, three-wire SPDT control, six-second timing actuator
KVC6934 Three-wire floating control, 120-second timing actuator
KVC6936 Three-wire floating control, 120-second timing power-fail return actuator
KVC7934 Proportional 2-10 VDC control, 120-second timing actuator
KVC7936 Proportional 2-10 VDC control, 120-second timing power-fail return actuator
RELATED PRODUCTS
SSTAG Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order
TABLE 2. SPECIFICATIONS AND DIMENSIONS
VALVE NUMBER SIZE PORT BODY Cv C in (cm) D in (cm) E in (cm)
KVC2050N07 1/2" two-way FNPT 0.7 3.87 (9.8) 4.37 (11.1) —
KVC2050N13 1/2" two-way FNPT 1.3 3.87 (9.8) 4.37 (11.1) —
KVC2050N29 1/2" two-way FNPT 2.9 3.87 (9.8) 4.37 (11.1) —
KVC2050N32 1/2" two-way FNPT 3.2 3.87 (9.8) 4.37 (11.1) —
KVC2075N47 3/4" two-way FNPT 4.7 3.7 (9.4) 4.45 (11.3) —
KVC2100N66 1" two-way FNPT 6.6 3.7 (9.4) 4.45 (11.3) —
KVC2125N71 1-1/4'' two-way FNPT 7.1 4.3 (11.0) 4.6 (11.8) —
KVC3050N37 1/2" three-way FNPT 3.7 3.7 (9.4) — 5.34 (13.6)
KVC3075N66 3/4" three-way FNPT 6.6 3.7 (9.4) — 5.12 (13.0)
KVC3100N87 1" three-way FNPT 8.7 3.7 (9.4) — 5.35 (13.6)
KVC3125N92 1-1/4'' three-w ay FNPT 9.2 4.3 (11.0) — 5.6 (14.2)

143. flfi 111CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ZONE VALVES
599 SERIES
Size 1/2", 3/4", 1"
Cv Range 1, 2.5, 4, 4.1, 7
Stroke 0.1" (2.5 mm)
Body Pattern 2-way, 3-way diverting
Flow Characteristic Linear
Leakage Rating ANSI Class III (0.1% of rated
capacity)
Body Rating ANSI Class 125
Media Temperature Range
34° to 230°F (1° to 110°C)
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±20%, 120 VAC ±20%, 50/60
Hz
Supply VA Two-position actuators: 9.8 VA; three-
position (floating) actuators: 0.8 VA;
proportional (0-10 VDC) actuators:
2.5 VA
Control Signal Two-position, three-position (floating),
and 0-10 VDC proportional
Action Two-way valves are stem-up-to-
open; three-way valves are diverting; normal position is determined by choice of actuator
Stroke Time
Two-position actuators: 35 seconds;
three-position (floating) actuators: 150 seconds; proportional (0-10 VDC) actuators: 34 seconds
Operating Temperature
41° to 122°F (5° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 90% RH non-condensing
Weight Two-position actuators: 1.2 lb
(0.54 kg); three-position (floating)
actuators: 0.5 lb (0.25 kg);
proportional (0-10 VDC) actuators: 0
.5 lb (0.25 kg)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1 (indoor only)
Approvals CE, EMC directive 89/336/EEC,
73/23/EEC low voltage; UL873, cUL Certified to Canadian Standard C22
.2 No. 24-93
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The 599 Series zone valves work with any SFA/P Series or SSA/P Series electric actuator
. The actuators provide
two-position, three-position or 0-10 VDC control. Typical
applications include hot or chilled water for zones with radiators, floor heating via manifolds, fan coil units, cooling ceilings, wall-mounted boilers, and VAV applications
.
FEATURES
• Direct-coupled universal bonnet
• Direct-coupled installation without tools
• Manual override with hex wrench
• Visual position indication
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Two-way Three-way
H
H1
W1
W
W1
W
H
H1
Valve Line
Size
H1 HW 1W
2-way 3-way 2-way 3-wa y2 -way 3-way2 -way3 -way
SR0.5 (1.5) 4.38 (11.2) 4.38 (11.2) 12.38 (31.5) 12.38 (31.5) 4.38 (11.2) 4.38 (11.2) 12.38 (31.5) 12.38 (31.5)
0.75 (2) 4.38 (11.2) 4.38 (11.2) 12.38 (31.5) 12.38 (31.5) 4.38 (11.2) 4.38 (11.2) 12.38 (31.5) 12.38 (31.5)
1 (2.5) 4.38 (11.2) 4.38 (11.2) 12.38 (31.5) 12.38 (31.5) 4.38 (11.2) 4.38 (11.2) 12.38 (31.5) 12.38 (31.5)
NSR0.5 (1.5) 4.26 (10.8) 4.26 (10.8) 12.26 (31.1) 12.26 (31.1) 3.26 (8.3)3 .26 (8.3)1 1.26 (28.6) 11.26 (28.6)
0.75 (2) 4.26 (10.8) 4.26 (10.8) 12.26 (31.1) 12.26 (31.1) 3.26 (8.3)3 .26 (8.3)1 1.26 (28.6) 11.26 (28.6)
1 (2.5) 4.26 (10.8) 4.26 (10.8) 12.26 (31.1) 12.26 (31.1) 3.26 (8.3)3 .26 (8.3)1 1.26 (28.6) 11.26 (28.6)
in (cm)

144. CONTROL VALVES 112CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ZONE VALVES
599 SERIES
+
-
Y
G0
G
24 VACNEUT
Grounded class 2
transformer for 24 VAC power
Grounded class 2
transformer for
24 VAC power
A0-V Board
SSA/P61U
SFA/PSSA81U
NEUT
Y2
Y1
G
24 VAC
(Red)24 VAC
WARNING:
Wire connection G is HOT,
not ground.
(Black)Neutral
G0
G
WIRING FLOW
ORDERING INFORMATION
NC
COM NO
A
B
AB
Three-way
Two-way,
Normally Open
*Actuator only
Example: A 240-00210 is a 599-00210 valve body and SFA11U actuator assembly.
The valve and actuator can also be ordered separately.
RELATED PRODUCTS
SSTAG Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order
2-Way
Line SizeClose OffFlow Rate
120 VA C2 4 VAC
Spring Return Spring Return Non-Spring Return
2 position 2-Position 3-position 0 to 10 VDC Modulating
Normally
Closed
Normally
Open
Normally
Closed
Normally
Open
Normally
Closed
Normally
Closed
Normally
Open
InchcmC v Kvs
SFA11U* SFP11U*S FA71U* SFP71U* SSA81U* SSA61U* SSP61U*
Actuator
Code 240
Actuator
Code 241
Actuator
Code 242
Actuator
Code 243
Actuator
Code 244
Actuator
Code 245
Actuator
Code 248psi kPa
NPT 0.5 1.5 44 303 1 0.85 599-00210 240-00210 241-002102 42-002102 43-002102 44-002102 45-002102 48-00210
0.5 1.5 44 303 2.5 2 599-00211 240-00211 241-002112 42-002112 43-002112 44-002112 45-002112 48-00211
0.5 1.5 44 303 4 3.4 599-00214 240-00214 241-002142 42-002142 43-002142 44-002142 45-002142 48-00214
0.7524 4 303 4.1 3.5 599-00212 240-00212 241-002122 42-002122 43-002122 44-002122 45-002122 48-00212
1 2.5 22 152 76 599-00213 240-00213 241-002132 42-002132 43-002132 44-002132 45-002132 48-00213
Sweat0.5 1.5 44 303 1 0.85 599-00510 240-00510 241-005102 42-005102 43-005102 44-005102 45-005102 48-00510
0.5 1.5 44 303 2.5 2 599-00511 240-00511 241-005112 42-005112 43-005112 44-005112 45-005112 48-00511
0.5 1.5 44 303 4 3.4 599-00514 240-00514 241-005142 42-005142 43-005142 44-005142 45-005142 48-00514
0.7524 4 303 4.1 3.5 599-00512 240-00512 241-005122 42-005122 43-005122 44-005122 45-005122 48-00512
1 2.5 22 152 76 599-00513 240-00513 241-005132 42-005132 43-005132 44-005132 45-005132 48-00513
Only
Valve Body
3-Way
120 VA C2 4 VAC
2 position2 -Position 3-position 0 to 10 VDC Modulating
SR AB B SR AB A SR AB B SR AB A
Non-Spring
Return
Non-Spring Return
SFA11U* SFP11U*S FA71U* SFP71U* SSA81U* SSA61U* SSP61U*
Line Size Close Off Flow Rate Actuator
Code 240
Actuator
Code 241
Actuator
Code 242
Actuator
Code 243
Actuator
Code 244
Actuator
Code 245
Actuator
Code 246Inchcm psi kP aCv Kvs Only
Valve Body
NPT 0.5 1.5 44 303 1 0.85 599-00230 240-00230 241-00230 242-002302 43-002302 44-002302 45-002302 48-00230
0.5 1.5 44 303 2.5 2 599-00231 240-00231 241-00231 242-002312 43-002312 44-002312 45-002312 48-00231
0.5 1.5 44 303 4 3.4 599-00234 240-00234 241-00234 242-002342 43-002342 44-002342 45-002342 48-00234
0.7524 4 303 4.1 3.5 599-00232 240-00232 241-00232 242-002322 43-002322 44-002322 45-002322 48-00232
1 2.5 22 152 76 599-00233 240-00233 241-00233 242-002332 43-002332 44-002332 45-002332 48-00233
Sweat0.5 1.5 44 303 1 0.85 599-00530 240-00530 241-00530 242-005302 43-005302 44-005302 45-005302 48-00530
0.5 1.5 44 303 2.5 2 599-00531 240-00531 241-00531 242-005312 43-005312 44-005312 45-005312 48-00531
0.5 1.5 44 303 4 3.4 599-00534 240-00534 241-00534 242-005342 43-005342 44-005342 45-005342 48-00534
0.7524 4 303 4.1 3.5 599-00532 240-00532 241-00532 242-005322 43-005322 44-005322 45-005322 48-00532
1 2.5 22 303 76 599-00533 240-00533 241-00533 242-005332 43-005332 44-005332 45-005332 48-00533

145. flfi 113CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Size 1/2", 3/4", 1"
Cv Range 0.15 to 9.0
Connections NPT, solder, union
Stroke 2-way valves: 0.16" (4.0 mm)
3-way valves: 0.11" (2.8 mm)
Life Expectancy 1.5 million cycles, 3 million full strokes
Body Pattern 2-way, 3-way diverting (mixing OK if
pressure drop <5 psid)
Leakage Class ANSI Class III (0.1%)
Body Rating ANSI 250 (400 psi @ 150°F, 250 psi @
250°F), PN16
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
OT-11, -21, -51: 30 psid (207 kPa); all
others 45 psid (311 kPa); EB cartridges
100 psid (689 kPa)
Materials Of Construction Low zinc bronze valve body alloy C84400,
stainless steel stem and spring, integral bronze seat, EPDM/brass disc/plunger, double EPDM o-rings
Media Compatibility
Hot and chilled water, up to 50% glycol; 15
psig (103 kPa) steam (1" valve not rated for steam)
Media Temperature Range
250°F (120°C) maximum media
temperature
Supply Voltage ME-16, -17: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
ME-4430, -4530: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
ME-4431, -4531: 110 VAC, 50/60 Hz
ME-46, -47, -48, -49: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
ME-41, -42, -43: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Supply VA ME-44, -45, -46, -47, -48, -49: 8 VA
Supply Watts ME-16, -17: 2W holding, 5W running
ME-41, -42, -43: 1W
Control Signal OT-11, -21, -51: thermostatic, modulating,
temperature up = stem down
MP-5100: pneumatic, SR, 3-6 psi
modulating or 2-position
MP-5300: pneumatic, SR, 7-11 psi
modulating or 2-position
ME-16, -17: 2-position, SR, two-wire, wax
technology, can be pulsed
ME-44, -45: 2-position, SR two-wire
ME-4640: floating, SR
ME-4740: PWM, SR, 0.2 to 5 second
pulse, 5 seconds full stroke
ME-48, -49: proportional, SR, 2-10/10-2
VDC or 4-20 mA
ME-4140: floating, NSR, triac or low
energy gold contacts
ME-4240: PWM, NSR
ME-4340: proportional, NSR, 2-10 VDC
Input Impedance ME-46, -47: 2 kΩ
ME-48, -49: 200 kΩ
ME-41, -42: 2 kΩ
ME-4340: 200 kΩ
Wiring ME-16, -17: 40" (100 cm) leads
ME-44, -45: 4" (10 cm) leads
ME-46, -47, -48, -49: 32" plenum-rated
cable
ME-41, -42, -43: 32" plenum-rated cable
Action Cartridges spring return valve stem up;
valve body designs are either stem-up-to- open (SUTO) or stem-up-to-close (SUTC); spring return actuators available in fail- stem-up or fail-stem-down
(Continued on next page)
ZONE VALVES
V200, V300 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Spartan V200 two-way and V300 three-way zone valve
product line is a complete offering in zone valves with a wide variety of connection sizes and types, and a wide selection of actuators, including electric, thermostatic, thermo-electric, and pneumatic
. All the valve bodies are interchangeable with
all the actuators for complete flexibility and easy selection.
FEATURES
• V •
Complete selection of NPT/Sweat/Union fittings
• Electric, thermostatic, thermo-electric and pneumatic
actuators
• Interchangeable cartridges for multiple Cvs
• Full service from the top of the valve body
SPECIFICATIONS
MP5100
V245-34
ME4840 OT-1100

146. CONTROL VALVES 114CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ZONE VALVES
V200, V300 SERIES
Actuator Compatibility All actuators: compatible with all valve
bodies (exception: V222 valves use MP
actuators only)
Actuator Mounting Knurled mounting ring, hand tighten
Air Connections Brass barbs for 5/32" or 1/4" OD flexible
tubing (MP actuators, maximum 60 psig)
Dimensions OT-11, -21, -51: 3.4"H x 2.4" Dia.
(8.6 x 6.0 cm)
MP-51, -53: 2.5"H x 3.1" Dia.
(6.4 x 7.8 cm)
ME-16, -17: 3.1"H x 1.8"W x 1.8"D
(7.9 x 4.6 x 4.6 cm)
ME-44, -45: 3.5"H x 2.8"W x 2.5"D
(8.9 x 7.1 x 6.3 cm)
ME-46, -47, -48, -49: 3.5"H x 3.0"W x
3.5"D (8.9 x 7.6 x 8.9 cm)
ME-41, -42, -43: 3.1"H x 2.5"W x 3.3"D
(7.9 x 6.4 x 8.5 cm)
Drive Time OT-11, -21, -51: variable
MP-51, -53: variable
ME-16, -17: <5 minutes
ME-44, -45: 10 seconds;
ME-46, -47, -48, -49: 60 seconds drive,
25 seconds spring
ME-41, -42: 90 seconds
ME-4340: 60 seconds
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1 (IP20)
Feedback ME-46, -47, -48, -49: 1-5 VDC,
100 kΩ impedance
ME-41, -42, -43: 1-5 VDC,
33 kΩ impedance
Manual Override ME-16, -17 actuators only
Operating Temperature OT-11, -21, -51: 40° to 85°F (4° to 29°C)
MP-51, -53: 41° to 122°F (5° to 50°C)
ME-16, -17: 46° to 122°F (8° to 50°C)
ME-44, -45: 41° to 122°F (5° to 50°C)
ME-46, -47, -48, -49: 32° to 122°F (0° to
50°C)
ME-41, -42, -43: 40° to 122°F (5° to 50°C)
Setpoint Range OT-11, -21, -51: 40° to 85°F (4° to 29°C)
Weight V222-12, -34: 1.5 lb (.68 kg)
V241-12: .60 lb (.27 kg)
V241-34: 1.0 lb (.45 kg)
V243-12: .55 lb (.25 kg)
V243-34: .75 lb (.34 kg)
V243-10: 2.1 lb (.95 kg)
V245-12: .50 lb (.23 kg)
V245-34: .70 lb (.32 kg)
V320-12: .95 lb (.43 kg)
V320-34: 1.0 lb (.45 kg)
V345-10: 2.1 lb (.95 kg)
V325-12: .60 lb (.27 kg)
V325-34: .80 lb (.35 kg)
OT-1100: .30 lb (.14 kg)
MP-51, -53: .40 lb (.18 kg)
ME-16, -17: .30 lb (.14 kg)
ME-44, -45: .75 lb (.34 kg)
ME-46, -47, -48, -49: .95 lb (.43 kg)
ME-41, -42: .55 lb (.25 kg)
Approvals CE
Warranty Valves: 5 years;
Actuators: 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS (continued)
A B C
V222-12 4.3 (10.9) 2.4 (6.2) 1.1 (2.8)
V222-34 5.2 (13.2) 2.4 (6.2) 1.1 (2.8)
C
MNPT
Unions
B
A
A B C D
V320-12 4.3 3.2 1.1 2.1
(10.8) (8.1) (2.8) (5.3)
V320-34 5.2 3.7 1.1 2.6
(13.2) (9.4) (2.8) (6.6)
V345-10 6.2 4.6 1.5 3.1
(15.8) (11.7) (4.0) (7.9)
C
MNPT
Unions
B
A
D
A B C D
V325-12 3.0 2.6 1.1 1.5
(7.7) (6.7) (2.8) (3.8)
V325-34 2.2 2.2 1.1 1.1
(5.7) (5.7) (2.8) (2.8)
C
Sweat*
B
A
D
A B C
V241-12 3.3 (8.4) 1.6 (4.1) 1.1 (2.8)
V241-34 3.8 (9.6) 2.2 (5.6) 1.1 (2.8)
C
MNPT Union
FNPT
B
A
A B C
V243-12 2.3 (5.8) 1.6 (4.1) 1.1 (2.8) V243-34 2.7 (6.9) 2.2 (5.6) 1.1 (2.8) V243-10 3.9 (9.9) 2.8 (7.1) 1.8 (4.6)
C
FNPT B
A
* V325-12 is the same valve body as V325-34 (3/4");
it has inserts for 1/2" sw eat.
A B
C
A B
C
C
Sweat
B
A
MP actuator only
Stem up to close Stem up to open
A B C
V245-12 2.2 (5.9) 1.6 (4.1) 1.1 (2.8)
V245-34 2.3 (5.8) 1.6 (4.1) 1.1 (2.8)
C
MNPT
Unions
B
A
Mounts to any Spartan actuator
Stem up to open
Mounts to any Spartan actuator
Mounts to any Spartan actuator
Mounts to any Spartan actuator
Stem up to open
Stem up A B Stem up A B
Mounts to any Spartan actuator
DIMENSIONS - in (cm)

147. flfi 115CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
WHT
GRN
COM
AC
power
H
Two-position Spring Return Actuators
(ME-4430, -4431, -4530, -4531)
WHT
BLK
RED
BRN
GRN
GRN
COM
24 AC
transformer
1-5 VDC
feedback
Control
contact
Floating control
H
Floating Spring Return Actuator
(ME-4640)
WHT
RED
BLK
COM
24 AC
transformer
Floating control
H
Floating Non-Spring Return Actuators
(ME-4140, -4142)
WHT
BLK
RED
COM
24 AC
transformer
1-5 VDC
feedback
  * Proportional: 2-10 VDC
  PWM: 0.02-5.0 seconds 24 AC pulse
 ** 500Ω, 1/2W, 1% resistor if control signal to actuator is 4-20 mA
Signal*
**
Common
H
PWM and Proportional Spring Return Actuators
(ME-4740, -4840, -4940)
GRN
WHT
1234
BLK
RED
COM
24 AC
transformer
1-5 VDC
feedback
*Signal
**
Common
H
Proportional and PWM
Non-Spring Return Actuator
(ME-4240, -4340)
Two-position
Wax Actuators
(ME1605, ME1705)
  * Proportional: 2-10 VDC   PWM: 0.02-5.0 seconds
  24VAC pulse
 ** 500Ω, 1/2W, 1% resistor if control
  signal to actuator is 4-20 mA
Manual oflerride
ME-1fl
24 AC
Control
contact
ORDERING INFORMATION
ZONE VALVES
V200, V300 SERIES
ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR WIRING
Valve Model No. Cv Description
V222-12-ER1.0 1.0
1/2", 2W, SUTC, MNPT unions
(MP actuators only)*
V222-12-ER2.0 2.0
V222-12-ER3.0 3.0
V222-34-ER1.0 1.0
3/4", 2W, SUTC, MNPT unions
(MP actuators only)*
V222-34-ER2.0 2.0
V222-34-ER3.0 3.0
V241-12-BC0.15 0.15
1/2", 2W, SUTO, FNPT X MNPT union
(Change “-EPxxx” to “-EVxxx” for steam applications)
V241-12-BC0.25 0.25
V241-12-EP0.5 0.5
V241-12-EP1.0 1
V241-12-EP1.5 1.5
V241-12-EP2.0 2
V241-12-EP2.5 2.5
V241-12-EP3.0 3
V241-12-EP3.5 3.5
V241-34-EP1.0 1
3/4", 2W, SUTO, FNPT X MNPT union
(Change “-EPxxx” to “-EVxxx” for steam applications)
V241-34-EP1.5 1.5
V241-34-EP2.0 2
V241-34-EP2.5 2.5
V241-34-EP4.5 4.5
V243-12-BC0.15 0.15
1/2", 2W, SUTO , FNPT
(Change “-EPxxx” to “-EVxxx” for steam applications)
V243-12-BC0.25 0.25
V243-12-EP0.5 0.5
V243-12-EP1.0 1
V243-12-EP1.5 1.5
V243-12-EP2.0 2
V243-12-EP2.5 2.5
V243-12-EP3.0 3
V243-12-EP3.5 3.5
V243-34-EP1.0 1
3/4", 2W, SUTO , FNPT
(Change “-EPxxx” to “-EVxxx” for steam applications)
V243-34-EP1.5 1.5
V243-34-EP2.0 2
V243-34-EP2.5 2.5
V243-34-EP4.5 4.5
V243-10-EB6.0 6
1", 2W, SUTO, FNPT
(Use EV6.4 or EV9.0 for steam)
V243-10-EB6.4 6.4
V243-10-EB8.0 8
V243-10-EB9.0 9
V245-12-BC0.15 0.15
1/2", 2W, SUTO , sweat
(Change “-EPxxx” to “-EVxxx” for steam applications)
V245-12-BC0.25 0.25
V245-12-EP0.5 0.5
V245-12-EP1.0 1
V245-12-EP1.5 1.5
1/2", 2W, SUTO , sweat
(Change “-EPxxx” to “-EVxxx” for steam applications)
V245-12-EP2.0 2
V245-12-EP2.5 2.5
V245-12-EP3.0 3
V245-12-EP3.5 3.5
Actuator Model No. Description
THERMO-ELECTRIC
ME-1605 Two-position SR, two-wire, 24 VAC, wax, fail stem up
ME-1705 Two-position SR, two-wire, 24 VAC, wax, fail stem down
ELECTRIC
ME-4140 Floating, NSR, 24 VAC with timeout
ME-4240 PWM 0.25-5 sec, NSR, 24 VAC
ME-4340 Proportional 2-10 VDC, NSR, 24 VAC
ME-4430 Two-position SR, two-wire, 24 VAC, fail stem up
ME-4431 Two-position SR, two-wire, 110 VAC, fail stem up
ME-4530 Two-position SR, two-wire, 24 VAC, fail stem down
ME-4531 Two-position SR, two-wire, 110 VAC, fail stem down
ME-4640 Floating, SR, 24 VAC, fail stem up
ME-4840 Proportional 2-10 VDC, SR, 24 VAC, fail stem up
ME-4740 PWM 0.25-5 sec, SR, 24 VAC, fail stem up
SELF-CONTAINED THERMOSTATIC
OT-1100 Valve mount thermostatic top 40° to 85°F (5° to 30°C)
OT-2100 6 -1/2' capillary, remote bulb 40° to 85°F (5° to 30°C)
OT-5100 6 -1/2' capillary, remote wall mount 40° to 85°F (5° to 30°C)
OM -1200 Locking cover for OT-1100
PNEUMATIC
MP-5100 4 sq in actuator, modulating 3-6 psi spring, fail stem up
MP-5300 4 sq in actuator, modulating 7-11 psi spring, fail stem up
Valve Model No.C v Description
V245-34-EP1.0 1
3/4", 2W, SUTO, sweat
(Change “-EPxxx” to “-EVxxx” for steam applications)
V245-34-EP1.5 1.5
V245-34-EP2.0 2
V245-34-EP2.5 2.5
V245-34-EP3.0 3
V245-34-EP3.5 3.5
V320-12-ED1.0 1.0
1/2", 3W, dive rting valve, MNPT unions
3/4", 3W, dive rting valve, MNPT unions
V320-12-ED2.0 2.0
V320-12-ED3.0 3.0
V320-12-ED3.5 3.5
V320-34-ED1.0 1.0
V320-34-ED2.0 2.0
V320-34-ED3.0 3.0
V320-34-ED3.5 3.5
V345-10-ED5.5 5.5 1", 3W, dive rting valve, MNPT unions
V325-12-ED1.0 1.0
1/2", 3W, dive rting valve, sweat
(uses 3/4" 1/2" bushing)
V325-12-ED2.0 2.0
V325-12-ED3.0 3.0
V325-12-ED3.5 3.5
V325-34-ED1.0 1.0
3/4", 3W, dive rting valve, sweat
V325-34-ED2.0 2.0
V325-34-ED3.0 3.0
V325-34-ED3.5 3.5
*Change “ER…” to “EVR…” for steam applications
ME-4940 Proportional 2-10 VDC, SR, 24 VAC, fail stem down

148. CONTROL VALVES 116CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ZONE VALVES
V200, V300 SERIES
VALVE SELECTION CHART ACTUATOR SELECTION CHART
Flow Pa ttern (SUTO/C = stem up to open/close)
Size/Connections Two-way Three-way
1/2" FNPT
V243 (SUTO )—3/4" FNPT
1" FNPT
1/2" sweat
V245 (SUTO ) V325
3/4" sweat
1/2" unions/MNPT
V222 (SUTC)
V240 (SUTO )
V3203/4" unions/MNPT
1" unions/MNPT
1/2" FNPT x union/MNPT
V241 (SUTO
)—
3/4" FNPT x union/MNPT
Fail Mode
Contro lF ail-in-Place Spring Return
Two-position electri c—
ME-4430 (24V, fail up)
ME-4431 (115V, fail up)
ME-4530 (24V, fail down)
ME-4531 (115V, fail down)
Floating electric
ME-4140 (with timeout)
ME-4142 (with timeout)
ME-4640 (fail up)
PWM electri cM E-4240 ME-4740 (fail up)
Proportional electri cM E-4340
ME-4840 (fail up)
Pneumatic
MP-5100 (3-6 psi, fail up)
MP-5300 (7-11 psi, fail up)
Two-position therm o-electri c
—
ME-1605 (fail up)
ME-1705 (fail down)
—
Thermostatic
OT-1100 (valve mount)
OT-2100 (remote bulb)
OT-5100 (wall mount)
—
ME-4940 (fail down)
Note: Match valve stem action to the action of the actuator to achieve
desired assembly action.
For example: a V243 (stem up to open) with an ME-4430 actuator (fail up) will be a normally open assembly
. That valve with an ME-4530
would be normally closed.
ACCESSORIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BC0.15 Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 0.15
BC0.25 Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 0.25
EB6.0 Cartridge for two-way 1" SUTO; Cv = 6.0
EB6.4 Cartridge for two-way 1" SUTO; Cv = 6.4
EB8.0 Cartridge for two-way 1" SUTO; Cv = 8.0
EB9.0 Cartridge for two-way 1" SUTO; Cv = 9.0
ED1.0 Cartridge for three-way; Cv = 1.0
ED2.0 Cartridge for three-way; Cv = 2.0
ED3.0 Cartridge for three-way; Cv = 3.0
ED3.5 Cartridge for three-way; Cv = 3.5
EP0.5 Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 0.5
EP1.0 Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 1.0
EP1.5 Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 1.5
EP2.0 Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 2.0
EP2.5 Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 2.5
EP3.0 Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 3.0
EP3.5 Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 3.5
EP4.5 Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 4.5
EV1.5 Cartridge for steam Cv=1.5, for 2W 1/2" or 3/4" valve
EV2.0 Cartridge for steam Cv=2.0, for 2W 1/2" or 3/4" valve
EV0.5 Cartridge for steam Cv=0.5, for 2W 1/2" valve
EV2.5 Cartridge for steam Cv=2.5, for 2W 1/2" or 3/4" valve
EV3.5 Cartridge for steam Cv=3.5, for 2W 1/2" or 3/4" valve
EV4.5 Cartridge for steam Cv=4.5, for 2W 3/4" valve
EV1.0 Cartridge for steam Cv=1.0, for 2W 1/2" or 3/4" valve
EV6.4 Cartridge for steam Cv=6.4, for 2W 1" valve
EV9.0 Cartridge for steam Cv=9.0, for 2W 1" valve
EV3.0 Cartridge for steam Cv=3.0, for 2W 1/2" or 3/4" valve
A
V-6112
1/2" union MNPT, for V320, 222
AV-6134 3/4" union MNPT, for V320, 222
AV-6312 1/2" union sweat, for V320, 222
A
V-6334
3/4" union sweat, for V320, 222
A
V07
Cartridge tool, 3/4" and 1/2" hex

149. flfi 117CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
MODULATING ZONE VALVES
V5860 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The V5860 Series valve is designed specifically for use in
small hot water or chilled water applications. The V5860
comes in two-way and three-way configurations in 1/2" and
3/4" FNPT. The wide selection of Cv's offer precise equal
percentage control, which is ideal for fan coils, baseboards, and small AHUs
. The field-mounted, non-spring return screw-
on actuators offer easy installation and modulating control using floating or proportional signals
.
FEATURES
• Very small Cv's from 0.19 up to 4.9
• High quality plug-seat design for precise control
• Very quiet operation
• Floating or proportional control
• Non-spring return actuators
B B
C
A
0.7
(1.83)
0.25
(0.64)
Stroke
B
B
B
D
E
A
0.7
(1.83)
0.25
(0.64)
Stroke
PIPE SIZE A B C D E
1/2 3 3/4 1-5/16 1-5/16 1-5/16
3/4 3-1/2 1 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2
Valve
in
(cm)
DIMENSION
DIMENSIONS
•
0.5
(1.27)
3.9
(10.00)
1.9
(4.84)
2.4
(6.11)
2.3
(5.79)
Actuator
1/2" NPT
in
(cm)
Model SizeCv
Maximum Closeoff
Pressure
Action Weight
V5862A2005 1/2"0.19 65 psid Stem up on actuator removal, valve open0.6 lb (.27 kg)
V5862A2013 1/2"0.29 65 psid Stem up on actuator removal, valve open0.6 lb (.27 kg)
V5862A2021 1/2"0.47 65 psid Stem up on actuator removal, valve open0.6 lb (.27 kg)
V5862A2039 1/2"0.74 65 psid Stem up on actuator removal, valve open0.6 lb (.27 kg)
V5862A2047 1/2"1.2 65 psid Stem up on actuator removal, valve open0.6 lb (.27 kg)
V5862A2054 1/2"1.9 65 psid Stem up on actuator removal, valve open0.6 lb (.27 kg)
V5862A2062 3/4"2.9 45 psid Stem up on actuator removal, valve open0.9 lb (.41 kg)
V5862A2070 3/4"4.9 45 psid Stem up on actuator removal, valve open0.9 lb (.41 kg)
V5863A2004 1/2"0.29 55 psid Stem up on actuator removal, ports B-AB open0.7 lb (.32 kg)
V5863A2012 1/2"0.47 55 psid Stem up on actuator removal, ports B-AB open0.7 lb (.32 kg)
V5863A2020 1/2"0.74 55 psid Stem up on actuator removal, ports B-AB open0.7 lb (.32 kg)
V5863A2038 1/2"1.2 22 psid Stem up on actuator removal, ports B-AB open0.7 lb (.32 kg)
V5863A2046 1/2"1.9 22 psid Stem up on actuator removal, ports B-AB open0.7 lb (.32 kg)
V5863A1006 3/4"2.9 26 psid Stem up on actuator removal, ports B-AB open1.0 lb (.45 kg)
V5863A1014 3/4"4.9 26 psid Stem up on actuator removal, ports B-AB open1.0 lb (.45 kg)
M6410A1029 NA NA NA Drive open, drive closed, fail-in-place1.0 lb (.45 kg)
M7410F1000 NA NA NA Direct or reverse acting, switch selectable, fail-in-place.55 lb (.25 kg)
V5863A1006/M7410F1000
M6410A1029
V5862A2013
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS

150. CONTROL VALVES 118CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Description
Maximum Closeoff
Pressure
Weight
V5862A2005 1/2", 2W, NPT, Cv=0.19 65 psid 0.6 lb (0.27 kg)
V5862A2013 1/2", 2W, NPT, Cv=0.29 65 psid 0.6 lb (0.27 kg)
V5862A2021 1/2", 2W, NPT, Cv=0.47 65 psid 0.6 lb (0.27 kg)
V5862A2039 1/2", 2W, NPT, Cv=0.74 65 psid 0.6 lb (0.27 kg)
V5862A2047 1/2", 2W, NPT, Cv=1.2 65 psid 0.6 lb (0.27 kg)
V5862A2054 1/2", 2W, NPT, Cv=1.9 65 psid 0.6 lb (0.27 kg)
V5862A2062 3/4", 2W, NPT, Cv=2.9 45 psid 0.9 lb (0.41 kg)
V5862A2070 3/4", 2W, NPT, Cv=4.9 45 psid 0.9 lb (0.41 kg)
V5863A2004 1/2", 3W, NPT, Cv=0.29 55 psid 0.7 lb (0.32 kg)
V5863A2012 1/2", 3W, NPT, Cv=0.47 55 psid 0.7 lb (0.32 kg)
V5863A2020 1/2", 3W, NPT, Cv=0.74 55 psid 0.7 lb (0.32 kg)
V5863A2038 1/2", 3W, NPT, Cv=1.2 22 psid 0.7 lb (0.32 kg)
V5863A2046 1/2", 3W, NPT, Cv=1.9 22 psid 0.7 lb (0.32 kg)
V5863A1006 3/4", 3W, NPT, Cv=2.9 26 psid 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
V5863A1014 3/4", 3W, NPT, Cv=4.9 26 psid 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
M6410A1029 Two-position or tri-state (floating), 24 VAC, fail-in-place1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
M7410F1000 Proportional (0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA), 24 VAC, fail-in-place 0.55 lb (0.25 kg)
Inlet Outlet
Port A
Port B
Port AB
With actuator removed
stem is up
With actuator removed
stem is up. B-AB open
Two-way Three-way
MODULATING ZONE VALVES
V5860 SERIES
M6410
Valve
actuator24 VAC
Floating controller
SPDT
Closed (stem down)
Open (stem up)
(white)
(blue)
(red)
M7410
Valve
actuator
(blue)
(red)
(white)
0-10 VDC
or
2-10 VDC
Signal
24 VAC
+
-
Proportional
Stem down on a signal increase
Stem up on a signal increase
Left switch
0-10 VDC signal
2-10 VDC signal
Right switch
* 4-20 mA signals with 500fl resistor
500fl*
WIRING
VALVE FLOW CHARACTERISTICS
RELATED PRODUCTS
SSTAG Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order
Connections FNPT
Str
oke
1/4"
Bod
y Pattern
2-Way, 3-Way mixing
Flow Characteristic Equal Percentage (two-way),
Linear (three-way)
Pressure Rating 230 psig (1586 kPa)
Materials Of Construction
Brass valve body and trim,
stainless steel stem
Media Compatibility Hot or chilled water, 50%
maximum glycol
Media Temperature Range
36° to 230°F (2° to 110°C)
Suppl
y Voltage
24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Supply VA 0.7 VA (M6410), 1.4 VA (M7410)
Control Signal Tri-state (floating) (M6410), 0/2-10
VDC or 4-20 mA (M7410)
Conduit Connection 1/2" FNPT hub
Wiring 4.9' (1.5 m) cable
Action Stem up on actuator removal,
valve open (B-AB open for 3-way)
Stroke Time 125 seconds @ 60 Hz,
150 seconds @ 50 Hz
Operating Temperature 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Enc
losure Rating
UL Listed for plenum use, UL94-5V
Warranty 1 year
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS

151. flfi 119CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Modulating Two-way ValveModulating Three-way Valve
(mixing only)
Return
Coil
BA
Supply
BA
C
Supply
Return
Coil
Note: Piping is the same for N.O. or N.C. type valves.
Normal (Open, Closed) position refers to flow through the coil.
MODULATING POPTOP™ ZONE VALVES
VM SERIES
Size 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/4"
Cv Range 1.0 to 8.0
Connections FNPT, Sweat, or 1/2" SAE flare valve
body connections
Flow Characteristic Equal Percentage for Cv 1 to 4; linear
for Cv 8.0
Leakage Rating ANSI Class IV (0.01% of rated
capacity)
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
Cv 1.0: 50 psid (344 kPa)
Cv 2.0: 50 psid (344 kPa), 20 psid
(137 kPa) spring return
Cv 4.0: 35 psid (241 kPa), 20 psid
(137 kPa) spring return
Cv 8.0: 35 psid (241 kPa), 15 psid
(103 kPa) spring return
Maximum Pressure Rating
300 psig (2067 kPa)
Materials Of Construction
Brass valve body and seat, chrome-
plated stem, thermoplastic plug;
high-temperature plastic actuator
housing
Media Compatibility
Hot or chilled water; 50% or less
ethylene glycol
Media Temperature Range
32° to 200°F (0° to 93°C)
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±15%, 50/60 Hz
Supply VA 1 VA (AT non-spring); 1.2 VA (AT w/
timeout); 1.7 VA (AP non-spring);
10 VA (AT/AP spring-return)
Control Signal AT actuators: tri-state (floating);
AP actuators: proportional (0-5, 0-10, 5-10 VDC or 4-20 mA) jumper selectable
Input Impedance
200 kΩ (0-10 VDC); 300Ω (4-20 mA)
Wiring Terminals
Action Two-way valves: N.O./N.C.
deter
mined by choice of actuator;
three-way valves: use only N
.C.
actuator
Actuator Compatibility AT (tri-state) or AP (proportional 0-10
VDC, 4-20 mA) type actuators only
Actuator Mounting Poptop®
Drive Time 150 seconds @ 60 Hz
Spring Return Time 9 seconds maximum
Manual Override Combination override lever and
position indicator, all actuators
Operating Temperature Maximum ambient 125°F (52°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing
Weight Valve plus actuator assembly, <1.9 lb
(0.86 kg)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1
Approvals UL873, File #E9429 Class 2; CUL
Canadian Standards C22.2 No. 24;
CE Approved; C-Tick
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The VM Series Modulating PopTop™ Zone Valves offer a
wide variety of Cv ranges and control signal options for hot
and chilled water
. The PopTop™ valves are designed with
removable actuators with tri-state or proportional control and either non-spring or spring return action
. The valves are
available in two- and three-way body patterns, 1/2" to 1-1/4" sizes, and in NPT or sweat pipe connections
. An optional
motor timeout actuator is a
vailable for controllers that do not
automatically turn off their signals after the full stroke of the valve.
FEATURES
• Two- or three-way mixing body patterns
• Removable and replaceable actuator
• NPT or sweat connections
• Manual override
• Time-out option (tri-state actuator)
• Non-spring or spring return actuators
PIPING
SPECIFICATIONS
VM2211
AT33A000AP23A000
with VM2313

152. CONTROL VALVES 120CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
MODULATING POPTOP™ ZONE VALVES
VM SERIES
Floating thermostat
24 VAC
transformer
AT Series
Tri-state Valve
CLOSE
COM
OPEN
24 VAC
AP Series
Proportional Valve
24V COM SIGNAL IN
24 VAC
transformer
Modulating
signal
+
-
Signal Jumper J3
0-10V
0-5V
5-10V
4-20 mA
DA/RA
Required for spring
return models
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
000A33A
ACTION
1
Normally closed spring return*
2 Normally open spring return
3 Non-spring return
T
Example: AT33A000
CONTROL
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A VM Series actuator
3 General temperature only
TEMPERATURE RATINGS
VOLTAGE
A
24 VAC only
LEADS
00
No leads
T Three-wire floating
P Proportional, 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
TIMEOUT CONFIGURATION
T
Time-out for AT models
0 No timeout for AT models
All AP models
* Three-way valves are compatible only with N.C. actuators.

For N.O. simply turn the valve around.
A
CTUATOR
1222VM
CONFIGURATION
2
Two-way
3 Three-way
Example: VM2221
MODEL DESCRIPTION
VM Modulating PopTop electric valve
2 1/2"
3 3/4"
4 1"
5 1-1/4"
VALVE SIZE
CONNECTION
1
Sweat - 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/4"
2 Threaded NPT - 1/2", 3/4", 1"
5 1/2'' SAE flare
CV SIZE
1
1.0
2 2.0
3 4.0
7
8.0
1/2"
1/2", 3/4"
1/2", 3/4", 1"
1", 1-1/4"
VALVE
BODY AND ACTUATOR REQUIREMENTS
Spring Return Action Configurations
Body Configuration
V X 3 X X X
Actuator Spring Return Mode
A X 1 X X X X
2 = Two-way
3 = Three-way
If body configuration is 2, actuator action can be 1 or 2.
If body configuration is 3, actuator action must be 1.
1 = Normally Closed
2 = Normally Open
If actuator action is 1, body configuration can be 2 or 3.
If actuator action is 2, body configuration must be 2.
0.13
(0.33)
4.25
(10.80)
3 .81
(9.68)
C
3-Way
1.63
(4.14)
3.06
(7.77)
2.25
(5.72)
B
2-Way
A
A
1.56
(3.96)
1.19
(3.02)
2.0
(5.08)
0.19
(0.48)
Non-Spring Return
0.13
(0.33)
4.25
(10.80)
3 .81
(9.68)
C
3-Way
1.63
(4.14)
3.06
(7.77)
2.25
(5.72)
B
2-Way
A
A
1.56
(3.96)
1.19
(3.02)
2.0
(5.08)
0.19
(0.48)
Spring Return
in
(cm)
VALVE BODY SIZE A B C
1/2" sweat 1-5/16 (3.33) 15/16 (2.38) 1-5/16 (3.33)
3/4" NPT 1-3/8 (3.49) 15/16 (2.38) 1-11/16 (3.33)
1'' sweat 1-11/16 (4.29) 15/16 (2.38) 1-11/16 (3.33)
1-1/4" sweat 1-7/8 (4.76) 1 (2.54) 1-13/16 (4.76)
1/2'' NPT/BSP 1-2/8 (3.49) 15/16 (2.38) 1-5/16 (3.33)
3/4" NPT/BSP 1-11/16 (4.29) 15/16 (2.38) 1-7/16 (3.65)
1" NPT/BSP 1-7/8 (4.76) 1 (2.54) 1-11/16 (4.29)
1/2" SAE flare 4-9/16 (11.59) 5/16 (0.31) 2-1/4 (5.72)
DIMENSIONS
WIRING

153. flfi 121CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
A Return
Coil
BA
Supply
Return
Coil
B
Supply
Two-way Normally Closed Piping Two-way Normally Open Piping
BA
Supply
Shown N.C.
to the coil
Note: Reverse Po rts
A and B for N.O.
coil operation
Shown N.C.
to the coil
Note: Reverse Po rts
A and B for N.O.
coil operation
Return
Coil
Three-way Valve in Mixing Configuration
BA
CC
Supply
Return
Coil
Three-way Valve in Diverting Configuration
N.C.
actuator
N.O.
actuator
N.C.
actuator
N.C.
actuator
E
3/4
(1.91)
7/8
(2.22)
3/4
(1.91)
F
3-1/4 (8.26)
H
G
3-5/16
(8.41)
B
Two-wayC
Three-way
A
D
Actuator release
(with power-off
push and pull up)
DESCRIPTION
The VT Series Two-Position PopTop™ zone valves offer a wide range of models to handle chilled water, hot water, and 15 psig (103 kPa) steam applications
. PopTop™ valves
feature removable actuators to aid in both installation and service
. They are available in 2-way and 3-way body patterns
and with normally open or normally closed actuators.
FEATURES
• Two- or three-way mixing/diverting body patterns
• Removable and replaceable actuator
• NPT, sweat, or inverted flare connections
• 2-position spring return control
DIMENSIONS
VT2221
AG13A02A
AH23B020
Two-position
snap acting
thermostat
SPDT
AC Power
Heating and Cooling ValveHeating or Cooling Valve
680-243 Changeover thermostat pipe-mounted
Two-position
snap acting
thermostat
SPST
AC Power
WIRING
PIPING
VALVE BODY
SIZE A B C D
1/2" Sweat 1-5/16 (3.33) 7/8 (2.22) 1-5/16 (3.33) 3-5/16 (8.41)
3/4" Sweat 1-3/8 (3.49) 7/8 (2.22) 1-11/16 (4.29) 3-3/8 (8.57)
1" Sweat 1-11/16 (4.29) 7/8 (2.22) 1-11/16 (4.29) 3-5/8 (9.21)
1/2" NPT 1-3/8 (3.49) 7/8 (2.22) 1-5/16 (3.33) 3-3/8 (8.57)
3/4" NPT 1-11/16 (4.29) 7/8 (2.22) 1-7/16 (3.65) 3-5/8 (9.21)
1" NPT 1-7/8 (4.76) 1 (2.54) 1-3/4 (4.45) 3-7/8 (9.84)
Inverted flare union 1-3/8 (3.49) 7/8 (2.22) 1-5/16 (3.33) 4-1/8 (10.48)
ACTUATOR E F G H
AG 2-3/8 (6.03) 3-11/16 (9.36) 2-3/8 (6.03) 1-1/4 (3.18)
AH 2-5/8 (6.67) 3-7/8 (9.84) 2-3/8 (6.03) 1-1/4 (3.18)
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS
TWO-POSITION POPTOP™ ZONE VALVES
VT SERIES

154. CONTROL VALVES 122CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Size 1/2", 3/4", 1"
Cv Range 1.0 to 8.0
Connections FNPT, Sweat, or inverted flare (3/4" only)
Flow Characteristic Quick Opening
Leakage Rating ANSI Class IV (0.01% of rated capacity)
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
Cv 1.0-1.5: 60 psid (414 kPa) AG
actuator, 75 psid (517 kPa) AH actuator
Cv 2.5-3.0: 40 psid (276 kPa) AG
actuator, 50 psid (345 kPa) AH actuator
Cv 3.5-4.0: 25 psid (172 kPa) AG
actuator, 30 psid (207 kPa) AH actuator
Cv 5.0: 20 psid (137 kPa) AG actuator, 25
psid (172 kPa) AH actuator
Cv 7.5-8.0: 17 psid (117 kPa) AG
actuator, 20 psid (137 kPa) AH actuator
Maximum Pressure Rating 300 psig (2067 kPa)
Materials Of Construction Brass valve body and seat, nickel-plated
stem, BUNA N paddle; stainless steel
base plate and aluminum cover on
actuator
Media Compatibility
Hot or chilled water; 50% or less ethylene
glycol; 15 psig steam
Media Temperature Range 32° to 200°F (0° to 93°C) with AG
actuator; up to 250°F (121°C) with AH actuator
Supply Voltage
24 VAC ±10%; 120 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz;
208-277V models also available
Supply VA 7 VA
Supply Watts 6.5 W
Control Signal Two-position, two-wire
Wiring 18" (45.2 cm) leads
Action Two-way valves: N.O./N.C. determined by
choice of actuator; three-way valves: N.C.
actuator only
Actuator Compatibility AG (general purpose) or AH (high
performance) type actuators only
Actuator Mounting Poptop®
Auxiliary Contacts N.O. contacts, 24-240 VAC, 5A
Auxiliary Switch Models with auxiliary switch available
Drive Time 25 seconds maximum @ 60 Hz
Manual Override N.C. actuators only
Operating Temperature AG actuator: maximum ambient 104°F
(40°C);
AH actuator: maximum ambient 169°F
(77°C)
Spring Return Time 9 seconds maximum
Weight Valve bodies: <1.4 lb (.64 kg)
Actuators: 1.0 lb (.45 kg)
Approvals UL and ULc Listed; CE
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS
SSTAG Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order
680-243-6 Changeover thermostat with conduit fitting
1 1 2 2 T V
TEMPERATURE
T
Water
S Steam (must use high temperature actuator)
Example: VT2211
MODEL
VALVE
DESCRIPTION
V Two-position PopTop electric valve
2 Two-way
3 Three-way
CONFIGURATION
CONNECTION
CV CAPACITY
1
Sweat - 1/2", 3/4", 1"
2 NPT - 1/2", 3/4", 1"
4 Inverted flare - 3/4" only
CV SIZE
2
3
4
1/2"
3/4"
1"
1 1.0 1.5 1/2''
2 2.5 3.0 1/2'', 3/4''
3 3.5 4.0 1/2'', 3/4''
5 5.0 5.0 3/4'', 1''
7 7.5 7.5 3/4''
7 8.0 8.0 1''
2-way 3-way Size
Note: Valve and actuator
shipped separately.

*Inverted flare fittings not included
with valve. They are field-supplied.
002A31GA
CLOSEOFF
G
General operation
H High performance
Example: A G13A020
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ACTUATOR
A VT Series actuator
1 Normally closed*
2 Normally open**
VALVE OPERATION
VOLTAGE
A
24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
B 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
D 208 VAC, 60 Hz
T 277 VAC, 60 Hz
U 230/220 VAC, 50 Hz
TEMPERATURE
3 4
Normal
Steam
LEADS
02
18'' Leads
OPTIONS
0 A
None
End sw itch
* Three-way valves use N.C. actuator only; reverse ports for N.O.
** No manual override.
TWO-POSITION POPTOP™ ZONE VALVES
VT SERIES
ACCESSORIES
30-158-A AG/AH Series actuator replacement motor, 24 VAC
30-158-B AG/AH Series actuator replacement motor, 110/120 VAC
30-158-D AG/AH Series actuator replacement motor, 208 VAC
30-158-T AG/AH Series actuator replacement motor, 277 VAC
30-158-Y AG/AH Series actuator replacement motor, 230/240 VAC
436-252 3/4" flare-to-sweat fitting

155. flfi 123CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
RED HAT SOLENOID VALVES
8210 SERIES
Size 1/2" NPT to 2" NPT
Cv 4.0, 5.0, 13, 15, 22, 43, 5.5
Materials Of Construction
Brass body, NBR or PTFE seals and
discs
Media Compatibility Clean hot or chilled water, air or inert
gas
Media Temperature Range
Maximum 180°F (82°C) water
temperature
Supply Voltage 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 24 VAC, 60 Hz
Action N.C., N.O. (valve body determines
action)
Operating Pressure Minimum 5 psid (35 kPa), maximum
125 to 150 psid (862 to 1034 kPa),
varies by model
Operating Temperature 32° to 125°F (0° to 52°C)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4 (standard Red Hat II
enclosure)
Approvals CSA, UL Listed, CE
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The ASCO 8210 Series solenoid valves are general service,
pilot operated, two-way solenoid valves for liquid and air/inert
gas applications
. They are available in normally closed or
normally open operation with coil voltages to meet any typical application
. The 8210 Series come completely assembled
with conduit connection and wire leads.
FEATURES
• Industry standard Red Hat II
• Wide range of sizes and options
• High flow rates, low pressure drop
• Long service life
• For hot or chilled water, air or inert gases
• 1/2" NPT conduit connection standard
• Lead wires standard
• Not polarity sensitive
APPLICATION
The 8210 Series valves are general purpose, and the
standard models are suitable for most clean liquids (hot and
chilled water, light oils), air and inert gas applications
. They
are ideal for boiler and cooling tower fill valves. There are
also many options available for the 8210 Series, such as explosionproof enclosures, manual operators, junction box/ terminal block wiring connections, and different seal materials for more demanding media
.
Many solenoid valves are pilot-operated and require a
differential pressure to open/close. Applications such as
g
ravity drain for tanks or vacuum applications may not
generate enough differential pressure across the valve for the valve to operate. In these applications, choose a direct-acting
valve which is indicated in the ASCO catalog with a minimum differential pressure of zero
.
Other types of ASCO valves, also available through Kele,
include valves for hot water/steam service, cryogenic service, fuel service, intrinsicially safe applications, and pneumatic control systems
.
SPECIFICATIONS
WIRING
RED
GRN
Power
(coil voltage)
Control contact
RED
Note: ASCO solenoid valves
are not polarity sensitive.
Grounding
the green wire is
strongly recommended
.

156. CONTROL VALVES 124CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
RED HAT SOLENOID VALVES
8210 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
8210G2-120/60 1/2" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 120 VAC coil
8210G2-24/60 1/2" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 24 VAC coil
8210G9-120/60 3/4" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 120 VAC coil
8210G9-24/60 3/4" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 24 VAC coil
8210G4-120/60 1" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 120 VAC coil
8210G4-24/60 1" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 24 VAC coil
8210G8-120/60 1-1/4" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 120 VAC coil
8210G8-24/60 1-1/4" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 24 VAC coil
8210G22-120/60 1-1/2" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 120 VAC coil
8210G22-24/60 1-1/2" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 24 VAC coil
8210G100-120/60 2" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 120 VAC coil
8210G100-24/60 2" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 24 VAC coil
8210G34-120/60 1/2" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 120 VAC coil
8210G34-24/60 1/2" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 24 VAC coil
8210G35-120/60 3/4" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 120 VAC coil
8210G35-24/60 3/4" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 24 VAC coil
8210G14-120/60 1" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 120 VAC coil
8210G14-24/60 1" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 24 VAC coil
8210G18-120/60 1-1/4" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 120 VAC coil
8210G18-24/60 1-1/4" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 24 VAC coil
8210G32-120/60 1-1/2" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 120 VAC coil
8210G32-24/60 1-1/2" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 24 VAC coil
8210G103-120/60 2" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 120 VAC coil
8210G103-24/60 2" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 24 VAC coil
ACCESSORIES
238210-005-D 24 VAC coil N.C., (1/2"-2")
238210-032-D 120 VAC coil N.C., (1/2"-2")
238610-005-D 24 VAC coil N.O., (1/2"-3/4")
238610-032-D 120 VAC coil N.O., (1/2"-3/4")
272610-005-D 24 VAC coil N.O., (1"-2")
272610-032-D 120 VAC coil N.O., (1"-2")
L W
P
H
NPT,
both ends
1/2 NPT
in (cm)
Model Size H L P Width
Weight
lb (kg)
8210G21/2" NPT3.1 (8.6)2.8 (7.0)2.8 (7.2)2.3 (5.9)1.9 (.86)
8210G93/4" NPT3.6 (9.2)2.8 (7.1)3.0 (7.6)2.3 (5.9)2.7 (1.2)
8210G41" NPT5.6 (14.3)3.8 (9.5)4.0 (10.2)2.9 (7.5)4.4 (2.0)
8218G81-1/4" NPT5.6 (14.3)3.7 (9.3)4.0 (10.2)3.4 (8.6)5.6 (2.5)
8210G221-1/2" NPT6.1 (15.6)4.4 (11.1)4.2 (10.6)3.4 (8.6)5.8 (2.6)
8210G1002" NPT7.3 (18.6)5.1 (12.9)4.7 (11.9)4.7 (11.9)7.2 (3.3)
8210G341/2" NPT4.3 (11.0)2.8 (7.0)3.8 (9.6)2.3 (5.8)1.9 (.86)
8210G353/4" NPT4.6 (11.6)2.8 (7.1)3.9 (10.0)2.3 (5.8)2.7 (1.2)
8210G141" NPT6.5 (16.6)3.7 (9.3)4.9 (12.5)3.4 (8.6)4.4 (2.0)
8210G181-1/4" NPT6.5 (16.6)3.7 (9.3)4.9 (12.5)3.4 (8.6)5.6 (2.5)
8210G321-1/2" NPT7.0 (17.9)4.4 (11.1)5.1 (12.9)3.8 (9.5)5.8 (2.6)
8210G1032" NPT8.2 (20.9)5.1 (12.9)4.7 (11.9)4.7 (11.9)7.2 (3.3)
RELATED PRODUCTS
SSTAG Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order

157. flfi 125CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
TYPE NPT L B H
1
H* Weight w/o coil
in (cm) in (cm) in (cm) in (cm) lbs (kg)
EVSI 15 0.5" 3.25 (8.3) 2.1 (5.2) 0.6 (1.5) 3.7 (9.4) 1.8 (0.80)
EVSI 20 0.75" 3.7 (9.4) 2.25 (5.8) 0.7 (1.8) 3.9 (9.8) 2.2 (1.0)
EVSI 25 1" 4.6 (11.6) 2.75 (7.0) 0.9 (2.2) 4.25 (10.8) 3.1 (1.4)
EVSI 32 1.25" 4.8 (12.2) 3.25 (8.2) 0.7 (2.7) 4.5 (11.5) 4.4 (2.0)
EVSI 40 1.5" 5.2 (13.2) 3.75 (9.5) 1.25 (3.2) 4.9 (12.4) 7.1 (3.2)
EVSI 50 2" 6.4 (16.2) 4.4 (11.3) 1.4 (3.7) 5.1 (13.0) 9.6 (4.3)
* For normally open valves + 3/16" (0.5 cm). 018F coil weight = 0.75 (0.34)
in
(cm)
B L
H H
1
SOLENOID VALVES
EVSI SERIES
Size 1/2" FNPT to 2" FNPT
Cv 4.6, 9.3, 12.3, 21, 28, 46.7
Life Expectancy 800,000 cycles minimum
Maximum System Pressure
225 psig (1550 kPa) for 1/2" and 3/4"
valves; 180 psig (1240 kPa) for 1" to
2" valves
Pressure Drop Minimum differential pressure 4.3
psid (30 kPa) to operate the pilot; maximum differential pressure 142 psid (980 kPa)
Materials Of Construction

Brass valve body, EPDM gasket
Media Compatibility Clean hot or chilled water or glycol,
steam ≤15 psig
Media Temperature Range
-22° to 248°F (-30° to 120°C)
Supply Voltage 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VAC, 50/60
Hz; 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Supply Watts 14 W
Conduit Connection 1/2" NPT
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals inside DIN
connector accept 16 to 18 AWG wire; DIN spades on encapsulated coil
Action
N.C., N.O. (valve body determines
action)
Stroke Time .04 seconds opening time, 0.35
seconds closing time for 1/2" valves; up to 5
.0 seconds opening time, 10.0
seconds closing time for 2" valves
Manual Override EVSI-MOM manual override magnet,
order seperately
Operating Temperature 32° to 120°F (0° to 50°C)
Dimensions Coil, 2.5"H x 1.8"W x 2.4"D
(5.7 x 4.6 x 6.1 cm)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4 (IP65) with waterproof
conduit connection
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The EVSI Series solenoid valves are two-way, two-position valves for clean water or low pressure steam applications and are available in normally closed or normally open operation
.
EVSI Series valves are pilot-operated and designed for non- water hammer operation
. They come completely assembled
with coil and are UL recognized and CSA listed. The coils
also include a gasketed conduit connector for NEMA 4 (IP65) environmental rating
.
FEATURES
• Anti-water hammer design
• For hot or chilled water and low pressure steam
• Fully encapsulated molded coils
• 1/2" threaded conduit connection
• Enclosed screw terminals
• NEMA 4 (IP56) environmental rating
• Modular conduit connection for easy installation
• Unique snap-on coil, no tools required
SPECIFICATIONS
EVSI-20-NC-24
DIMENSIONS

158. CONTROL VALVES 126CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
SOLENOID VALVES
EVSI SERIES
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
EVSI Solenoid valve
SIZE (NPT)
15 1/2", Cv = 4.6, opening time 0.04 sec, closing time 0.35 sec
20 3/4", Cv = 9.3, opening time 0.04 sec, closing time 1.0 sec
25 1", Cv = 12.3, opening time 0.30 sec, closing time 1.0 sec
32 1-1/4", Cv = 21.0, opening time 1.0 sec, closing time 2.5 sec
40 1-1/2", Cv = 28.0, opening time 1.5 sec, closing time 4.0 sec
50 2", Cv = 46.7, opening time 5.0 sec, closing time 10.0 sec
NORMAL MODE
NC Normally closed
NO Normally open
COIL VOLTAGE
24
120
240
MODEL DESCRIPTION
24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Example: EVSI-15-NC-24 Solenoid valve with 1/2'' NPT, normally closed, and 24 VAC coil
EVSI 15 NC 24
ACCESSORIES
018F7655 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz replacement coil only
018F7663 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz replacement coil only
018F7658 208/240 VAC, 60 Hz replacement coil only
1
2
Coflflrofl
floflflflflfl
24,120, or 240 VAC
Flathead
screwdriver
Conduit Connector Assembly
2
1
Note: The coil can rotate to any desirable
direction, and the conduit connector
can be oriented up, down, or to
either side.
RELATED PRODUCTS
EVSI-MOM Solenoid valve manual override magnet
SSTAG Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order

159. flfi 127CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
599 SERIES BALL VALVES
599 BALL VALVE SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Siemens 599 Series ball valves and valve actuators
deliver comprehensive control solutions for almost any
chilled water, hot water, or 50% glycol applications
. Available
in spring return, non-spring return, 2-position, floating, and proportional control these valves and actuators suit most applications
. Two-way valves are available with chrome-plated
brass ball and brass stem or stainless steel ball and stem for harsher conditions
. The 599 Series has a wide variety
of Cv ranges to help you size the control of your application correctly
.
FEATURES
• 200 psi close-off
• 0.4 to 160 Cv ranges depending on valve size
• 600/WOG/ANSI 250 pressure rating
• Double o-ring stem packing
• Blow-out proof stem for high pressure safety
• Thermal barrier on universal mounting bracket
599 Series
2-way Ball Valve
599 Series
3-way Ball Valve
Connections Female NPT
Body Pattern 3 Way, 2 Way
Leakage Class ANSI Class 1V
Body Rating Forged Brass ASTM B283, C37733
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
200 PSI
Materials Of Construction
Forged Brass or Stainless Steel
Media Compatibility 50% Water, Glycol Solution
Media temperature 35° to 250°F (2° to 121°C)
Actuator Compatibility Siemens GDE, GLB, GMA, GQD,
Static pressure 360 psi (2482 kPa)
Flow Optimizer Glass filled polymer
Ball Nickel-plated brass or Stainless Steel
Ball seals Reinforced PTFE seals with EPDM
O-rings
Female end connections
Brass
Stem Brass or stainless steel
Stem seals EPDM O-rings
Angle of rotation 0 to 90 degrees
Close-off ratings per ANSI/FCI 70-2
Class IV for A-AB, Class III for B-AB
Maximum operating differential pressure
60 psi
Dimensions See Dimensions table
Weight See Dimensions tables
Warranty 2 Years
SPECIFICATIONS

160. CONTROL VALVES 128CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
DIMENSIONS, 2-WAY REFERENCE GUIDE (See Figure 1)
Line Size
Inch (cm)
Cv Range
A
Length
C Length*
Actuator Codes
171A-D, 173A-D
C Length*
Actuator Codes
171H,J,K,L, N
C Length*
Actuator Codes
171E,F,G,M,P
172E,F,G,M,P
Fail-Safe
F
Height
Weight
lbs (kg)
GDE/GLB GQD GMA
1/2 (1.5)0.4 to 10.0 2-7/16 (61) 6-11/16 (170) 6 (153) – 7-5/8 (193) 0.50 (0.23)
3/4 (20) 6.3 to 25 2-3/4 (70) 6-11/16 (170) 6 (153) – 8 (204) 0.78 (0.35)
1 (25)
10 3 (77)
6-11/16 (170)
– 8-3/8 (213) 8 (204) .97 (.44)
16 3-1/4 (82)
– 8-3/8 (213) 8-5/15 (212)
1.75 (0.79)
40, 63 1.19 (54)
25 3-7/8 (98) 7 (178) – 8-11/16 (221) 8-13/16 (223) 1.19 (0.54)
1-1/4 (3.2)
16 3-3/8(86)
6-11/16 (170)
– 8-7/16 (214) 8-3/8 (213) 1.41 (0.64)
25 to 100 3-11/16 (94) – 8-11/16 (221) 8-13/16 (223) 1.81 (0.82)
1-1/2 (4.0)
25, 63 3-5/8 (92) 6-15/16 (176) – 8-7/16 (214) 8-13/16 (223) 1.19 (0.54)
40, 100, 160 3-15/16 (100) 7-1/16 (180) – 8-3/4 (223) 9-1/4 (235) 2.50 (1.13)
2 (5.0)
40, 100 4 (102) 7-1/16 (180) – 8-3/4 (223) 9-3/8 (238) 2.53 (1.14)
63
4-5/8 (11.8) 7-1/2 (190)
–
9-1/8 (223) 10-1/16 (255)
4.66 (2.11)
160 – 4.69 (2.13)
*Dimension “C” is maximum length, measured from the actuator, end fitting, or mounting plate, whichever extends the furthest.
DIMENSIONS, 3-WAY REFERENCE GUIDE (See Figure 2)
Line Size
Inches
(mm)
Product
Number
A Length
C Length * for
Actuator Codes
171A-D Codes
173A-D
C Length * for
Actuator Codes
171E-G
B
Height
G
Height
F
Height
Weight
lb (kg)
1/2 (15)
599-10350(S)
through
599-10357(S)
2-9/16 (65) 6-11/16 (170) 8-3/8 (213) 3-1/4 (83) 1-3/8 (35) 8-5/8 (219) 1.50 (0.68)
3/4 (20)
599-10358(S) 2-3/4 (70)
6-11/16 (170) 8-3/8 (213) 3-1/4 (83)
1-3/8 (35)
8-5/8 (219)
1.60 (0.73)
599-10359(S) 599-10360(S)
3-1/8 (79) 1-11/16 (43) 2.20 (1.00)
1 (25)
599-10361(S) 3-1/4 (83) 6-11/16 (170) 8-3/8 (213) 3-3/4 (95) 1-11/16 (43) 9-1/8 (232)
2.37 (1.08)
599-10362(S) 599-10363(S)
3-13/16 (77) 6-15/16 (176) 8-5/8 (219) 4 (102) 2 (51) 9-5/8 (244)
2.74 (1.24)
1-1/4 (32)
599-10364(S) 599-10365(S)
3-5/8 (92) 6-7/8 (174) 8-9/16 (217)
4 (102)
2-1/8 (54) 9-3/4 (248) 2.85 (1.29)
599-10366(S) 3-15/16 (100) 7 (178) 8-11/16 (221) 2-5/16 (59) 10-1/4 (260) 4.30 (1.95)
1-1/2 (40)
599-10367(S) 599-10368(S)
3-15/16 (100) 7 (178) 8-11/16 (221) 4 (102) 2-5/16 (59) 10-1/4 (260) 3.90 (1.76)
599-10369(S) 4-5/8 (117) 7-1/4 (184) 7-7/8 (200) 4-1/2 (114) 2-13/16 (71) 11 (279) 7.83 (17.16)
2 (50)
599-10370(S)
4-5/8 (117) 7-1/4 (184)
8-11/16 (221) 4-1/2 (114)
2-7/8 (73)
10-3/8 (264)
6.70 (3.04)
599-10371(S) 599-10372(S)
9-1/16 (230) 5-3/4 (146) 11-3/16 (284)
*Dimension C is maximum length, measured from the actuator, end fitting, or mounting plate, whichever extends the furthest.
599 SERIES BALL VALVES
599 BALL VALVE SERIES

161. flfi 129CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
599 SERIES BALL VALVES
599 BALL VALVE SERIES

2-12" (60 mm)
SERVICE ENVELOPE
Anti-rotation screw
must be driven
in fully for GDE/GLB
actuators ONLY
Anti-rotation screw
must be driven
in fully for GDE/GLB
actuators ONLY
1" (25 mm)
SERVICE ENVELOPE
AT SIDES
8" (200 mm)
SERVICE ENVELOPE
TOP VIEW
SIDE VIEWEND VIEW
B
D E
F
4" (100 mm)
SERVICE ENVELOPE
A
C
A
C
NOTES:
1. All dimensions are in inches (mm) and weights are in pounds (kg)
2. Dimension D, Depth, is 3.7 inches (94.5mm)
3. Dimension E, Handle, is 5.3 inches (135.9 mm)
FIGURE 1. DIMENSIONS WITH ACTUATOR
2-1/2" (60 mm)
SERVICE ENVELOPE
TOP VIEW
END VIEW DE
4" (100 mm)
SERVICE ENVELOPE
1" (25 mm)
SERVICE ENVELOPE
AT SIDES
8" (200 mm)
SERVICE ENVELOPE
SIDE VIEW
A
F
C
B
NOTES:
1. All dimensions are in inches (mm) and weights are in pounds (kg)
2. Dimension D, Depth, is 3 inches (76 mm)
3. Dimension E, Handle, is 4 inches (102 mm)
G
FIGURE 2. DIMENSIONS WITH ACTUATOR
2-WAY 3-WAY
DIMENSIONS

162. CONTROL VALVES 130CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
2-WAY Cv GUIDE
Product Numbers: 2-Way, Full-Port (No Flow Characterizer) Chrome-Plated Ball with Brass Stems or Stainless Steel Ball with
Stainless Steel Stems and Flow Coefficients
Valve Line
Size in
Inches
(mm)
Valve
Product
Number*
Effective (Installed) Cv (Kvs)
Supply Line Size in Inches (mm)
1/2
(13)
3/4
(20)
1
(25)
1-1/4
(32)
1-1/2
(38)
2
(51)
2-1/2
(63)
3
(76)
4
(102)
5
(127)
6
(152)
1/2
(15)
599-10307
599-10307S
10.00
(8.62)
6.94
(5.93)
6.19
(5.29)
— — — — — — — —
3/4
(20)
599-10311
599-10311S
—
25.00
(21.55)
18.66
(15.95)
15.35
(13.12)
— — — — — — —
1
(25)
599-10316
599-10316S
— —
63.00
(54.31)
39.78
(34.00)
33.56
(28.69)
— — — — — —
1-1/4
(32)
599-10321
599-10321S
— — —
100.00
(86.21)
69.19
(59.13)
51.45
(43.98)
— — — — —
1-1/2
(40)
599-10324
599-10324S
— — — —
63.00
(54.31)
55.34
(47.30)
51.00
(43.59)
— — — —
599-10326
599-10326S
— — — —
160.00
(137.93)
93.80
(80.17)
76.34
(65.25)
— — — —
2
(50)
599-10329
599-10329S
— — — — —
100.00
(86.21)
94.30
(80.60)
86.12
(73.61)
— — —
*S suffix = Stainless Steel
3-WAY Cv GUIDE
Product Numbers: 3-Way, Full-Port (No Flow Characterizer) Chrome-Plated Ball with Brass Stems or Stainless Steel Ball with Stainless Steel Stems and Flow Coefficients
Valve Line
Size in
Inches
(mm)
Valve
Product
Number*
Effective (Installed) Cv (Kvs)
Supply Line Size in Inches (mm)
1/2
(13)
3/4
(20)
1
(25)
1-1/4
(32)
1-1/2
(38)
2
(51)
2-1/2
(63)
3
(76)
4
(102)
5
(127)
6
(152)
1/2
(15)
599-10357 599-10357S
10.00
(8.62)
6.94
(5.93)
6.19
(5.29)
— — — — — — — —
3/4
(20)
599-10360 599-10360S
— 16.00
(13.79)
13.9
(11.98)
12.4
(10.69)
— — — — — — —
1
(25)
599-10363 599-10363S
— — 25.00
(21.55)
22.5
(19.40)
21.2
(18.27)
— — — — — —
1-1/4
(32)
599-10366 599-10366S
— — — 40.00
(34.48)
36.9
(31.81)
33.3
(28.70)
— — — — —
1-1/2
(40)
599-10369 599-10369S
— — — — 63.00
(54.31)
55.3
(47.67)
51.00
(43.96)
— — — —
2
(50)
599-10372 599-10372S
— — — — — 100
(86.21)
94.3
(81.29)
86.1
(74.23)
— — —
*S suffix = Stainless Steel
= Valve may be oversized = Optimal valve size = Valve may be undersized
= Valve may be oversized = Optimal valve size = Valve may be undersized
599 SERIES BALL VALVES
599 BALL VALVE SERIES

163. flfi 131CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
599 SERIES BALL VALVES
599 BALL VALVE SERIES
VALVE SELECTION INFORMATION
2-WAY 3-WAY
Valve Body
Valve
Size
in (mm)
Close-Off
PSI
Flow
Rate Cv
Weight
Lbs
Valve Body
Valve
Size
in (mm)
Close-Off
PSI
Flow
Rate Cv
Weight
(lbs)
599-10300 0.5 (15) 200 psi 0.4 0.5 599-10350 0.5 (15) 200 psi 0.4 1.64
599-10301 0.5 (15) 200 psi 0.63 0.5 599-10351 0.5 (15) 200 psi 0.63 1.64
599-10302 0.5 (15) 200 psi 1 0.5 599-10352 0.5 (15) 200 psi 1 1.64
599-10303 0.5 (15) 200 psi 1.6 0.5 599-10353 0.5 (15) 200 psi 1.6 1.64
599-10304 0.5 (15) 200 psi 2.5 0.5 599-10354 0.5 (15) 200 psi 2.5 1.64
599-10305 0.5 (15) 200 psi 4 0.5 599-10355 0.5 (15) 200 psi 4 1.64
599-10306 0.5 (15) 200 psi 6.3 0.5 599-10356 0.5 (15) 200 psi 6.3 1.64
599-10307* 0.5 (15) 200 psi 10 0.5 599-10357* 0.5 (15) 200 psi 10 1.64
599-10308 0.75 (20) 200 psi 6.3 0.78 599-10358 0.75 (20) 200 psi 6.3 2.26
599-10309 0.75 (20) 200 psi 10 0.78 599-10359 0.75 (20) 200 psi 10 2.26
599-10310 0.75 (20) 200 psi 16 0.78 599-10360* 0.75 (20) 200 psi 16 2.26
599-10311 0.75 (20) 200 psi 25 0.78 599-10361 1.0 (25) 200 psi 10 3.5
599-10312 1.0 (25) 200 psi 10 1.19 599-10362 1.0 (25) 200 psi 16 3.5
599-10313 1.0 (25) 200 psi 16 1.19 599-10363* 1.0 (25) 200 psi 25 3.5
599-10314 1.0 (25) 200 psi 25 1.19 599-10364 1.25 (32) 200 psi 16 5.16
599-10315 1.0 (25) 200 psi 40 1.19 599-10365 1.25 (32) 200 psi 25 5.16
599-10316* 1.0 (25) 200 psi 63 1.19 599-10366* 1.25 (32) 200 psi 40 5.16
599-10317 1.25 (32) 200 psi 16 1.81 599-10367 1.5 (40) 200 psi 25 5.16
599-10318 1.25 (32) 200 psi 25 1.81 599-10368 1.5 (40) 200 psi 40 5.16
599-10319 1.25 (32) 200 psi 40 1.81 599-10369* 1.5 (40) 200 psi 63 5.16
599-10320 1.25 (32) 200 psi 63 1.81 599-10370 2 (50) 200 psi 40 8.5
599-10321*1.25 (32) 200 psi 100 1.81 599-10371 2 (50) 200 psi 63 8.5
599-10322 1.5 (40) 200 psi 25 2.5 599-10372* 2 (50) 200 psi 100 8.5
599-10323 1.5 (40) 200 psi 40 2.5
599-10324* 1.5 (40) 200 psi 63 2.5
599-10325 1.5 (40) 200 psi 100 2.5
599-10326 1.5 (40) 200 psi 160 2.5
599-10327 2 (50) 200 psi 40 4.69
599-10328 2 (50) 200 psi 63 4.69
599-10329* 2 (50) 200 psi 100 4.69
599-10330* 2 (50) 200 psi 160 4.69
* Denotes a full-port valve without flow characterizer insert.
Add “S” to the end of the valve body number to indicate stainless steel ball and stem

164. CONTROL VALVES 132CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
599 SERIES BALL VALVES
599 BALL VALVE SERIES
ACTUATOR SELECTION INFORMATION
Actuator
Prefix
Code Actuator
Fail
Position
Supply
Voltage
Actuator
Type Control Signal
Manual
Override Valve Size
171C = GDE161.1P NO 24VAC NSR Proportional, 0-10V X 1/2" thru 1-1/4"
171D = GLB161.1P NO 24VAC NSR Proportional, 0-10V X 1-1/2" thru 2"
171G = GMA161.1P NO 24VAC SR Proportional, 0-10V X 1/2" thru 2"
173C = GDE161.1P NO 24VAC NSR Proportional, 0-10V X 1/2" thru 1-1/4"
173D = GLB161.1P NO 24VAC NSR Proportional, 0-10V X 1-1/2" thru 2"
171K = GQD151.1P NO 24VAC SR Proportional, 2-10V 1/2" thru 3/4"
171E = GMA121.1P NO 24VAC SR On-Off, 2 position X 1/2" thru 2"
171H = GQD121.1P NO 24VAC SR On-Off, 2 position 1/2" thru 3/4"
171L = GQD221.1U NO 120VAC SR On-Off, 2 position 1/2" thru 3/4"
171M = GMA221.1U NO 120VAC SR On-Off, 2 position X 1" thru 2"
171N = GQD126.1P NO 24VAC SR On-Off, 2 position 1/2" thru 3/4"
171P = GMA126.1P NO 24VAC SR On-Off, 2 position X 1" thru 2"
171A = GDE131.1P NO 24VAC NSR Tri-state (floating), 3 position X 1/2" thru 1-1/4"
171B = GLB131.1P NO 24VAC NSR Tri-state (floating), 3 position X 1" thru 2"
171F = GMA131.1P NO 24VAC SR Tri-state (floating), 3 position X 1" thru 2"
171J = GQD131.1P NO 24VAC SR Tri-state (floating), 3 position 1/2" thru 3/4"
173A = GDE131.1P NO 24VAC NSR Tri-state (floating), 3 position X 1/2" thru 1-1/4"
173B = GLB131.1P NO 24VAC NSR Tri-state (floating), 3 position X 1" thru 2"
172G =GMA161.1P* NC 24VAC SR Proportional, 0-10V X 1" thru 2"
172K =GQD151.1P* NC 24VAC SR Proportional, 2-10V 1/2" thru 3/4"
172E =GMA121.1P* NC 24VAC SR On-Off, 2 position X 1" thru 2"
172H =GQD121.1P* NC 24VAC SR On-Off, 2 position 1/2" thru 3/4"
172L =GQD221.1U* NC 120VAC SR On-Off, 2 position 1/2" thru 3/4"
172M =GMA221.1U* NC 120VAC SR On-Off, 2 position X 1" thru 2"
172N =GQD126.1P* NC 24VAC SR On-Off, 2 position 1/2" thru 3/4"
172P =GMA126.1P* NC 24VAC SR On-Off, 2 position X 1" thru 2"
172F =GMA131.1P* NC 24VAC SR Tri-state (floating), 3 position X 1" thru 2"
172J =GQD131.1P* NC 24VAC SR Tri-state (floating), 3 position 1/2" thru 3/4"
* Actuator is mounted upside down to provide NC setting
Example: 171C = GDE161.1P actuator
10357 = 599-10357 valve body
Part Number = 171C-10357
To Order a Valve Assembly, combine an Actuator Prefix Code with the suffix of the valve body number
from Valve Selection Table

165. flfi 133CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
BALL VALVES
B2, B3 SERIES
Size 1/2" to 2" NPT standard, larger sizes
also available
Cv Range 0.8 to 57
Body Pattern Two-way, three-way mixing or
diverting
Flow Characteristic Two-way equal percentage, three-
way linear
Leakage Rating 0% for port A to AB; 2% maximum for
port B to AB
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
200 psig (1380 kPa)

Materials Of Construction
Forged brass body with nickel
plating, chrome plated (or stainless
steel) ball, PTFE Teflon
®
seals,
Tefzel
®
characterized disc, EPDM
o-rings
Media Compatibility Hot or chilled water, <60% glycol
Media Temperature Range
0° to 212°F (-18° to 100°C)
Compatible Actuators Non-spring return TR, LRB, NRB,
ARB; spring return TF, LF, AF
Pressure Drop Maximum differential pressure 30
psid (207 kPa), higher could cause noise and/or damage
Pressure Rating
Two-way
1/2" to 1-1/4" 600 psig (4135 kPa)
1-1/4" (B231) to 2" 400 psig (2758 kPa)
Three-way
1/2" to 1" 600 psig (4135 kPa)
1-1/4" to 2" 400 psig (2758 kPa)
Approvals UL Listed, CSA, CE
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The B2 Series 2-way and B3 Series 3-way ball valves are used for two-position, floating or proportional control of HVAC hot or chilled water
. The valves come assembled with direct
coupled Belimo electric actuators with spring return or non- spring return operation
.
FEATURES
• Equal percentage characteristic (2-way)
• Large Cv range from 0.8 to 57
• Assembled, ready for installation
• Spring return or non-spring return actuators
• Floating, two-position, or proportional control
SPECIFICATIONS
B212/TR24-SR
B230/2F2N

166. CONTROL VALVES 134CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
BALL VALVES
B2, B3 SERIES
CAUTION: B port leakage rating on three-way valves is 0.5% to 2% of Cv. Do not pipe B port to the coil.
FLOW PATTERN
DIMENSIONS
B-2 Series B-3 Series
“B” Port must
be piped to the
bypass leg.
Brass
Dimensions - in (mm)Valve Nominal Size
Valve Body Inches DN (mm) AB
B207B-B211B 2.38 (60.8)
B212B-B216B 2.38 (60.8)
B217B-B221B
0.5
0.5
0.75
15
15
20 2.73 (69.3)
1.39 (35.2)
1.78 (45.2)
1.87 (47.4)
Brass
Dimensions - in (mm)
Valve Nominal Size
Valve Body Inches DN (mm) B
AC
Stainless
Steel Dimensions - in (mm)
Valve Nominal Size
Valve Body InchesDN (mm) B
AC
B307B-B311 0.5 15 2.41 (61.1) 1.39 (35.2) 1.20 (30.6)
B312B-B316B 0.5 15 2.38 (60.4) 1.78 (45.2) 1.29 (32.8)
B317B-B321B 0.75 20 2.73 (69.3) 1.87 (47.4) 1.47 (37.3)
Stainless Steel
B-2 Series B-3 Series
Dimensions - in (mm)Valve Nominal Size
Valve Body Inches DN (mm) AB
B207-B211 15 2.41 (61.1) 1.39 (35.2)
B212-B216 0.5
0.5
0.5
15 2.38 (60.4) 1.78 (45.2)
B217-B221 20 2.73 (69.3)
B222-B225 1.0 25 3.09 (78.4)
B229-B230 3.72 (94.6)
B231-B232 1.25 32
1.25 32
3.72 (94.6) 2.04 (51.9)
B238-B240 1.5 40 3.88 (98.5) 2.04 (51.9)
B248-B250 2.0 50
2.0 50
65
4.21 (107.0) 2.27 (57.7)
B251-B254 4.93 (125.2) 2.73 (69.5)
B261-B265 2.5
803.0
5.55 (140.9) 2.73 (69.5)
B277-B280 5.82 (147.9) 2.73 (69.5)
1.87 (47.4)
1.87 (47.4)
1.87 (47.4)
B307-B311 0.5 15 2.41 (61.1) 1.39 (35.2) 1.20 (30.6)
B312-B316 0.5 15 2.38 (60.4) 1.78 (45.2) 1.29 (32.8)
B317-B321 0.75 20 2.73 (69.3) 1.87 (47.4) 1.47 (37.3)
B322-B325 1.0 25 3.09 (78.4) 1.87 (47.4) 1.59 (40.3)
B329-B331 1.25 32
3.96 (100.6) 2.27 (57.7) 2.14 (54.3)
B338-B341 1.5 40
4.39 (111.6) 2.51 (63.7) 2.40 (61.1)
B347-B352 2.0 50
4.90 (124.5) 2.73 (69.5) 2.74 (69.7)

167. flfi 135CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
BALL VALVES
B2, B3 SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
B_ _ _ / Ball valve with brackets and mounting (select from above)
_ _ _ _ Compatible actuator (select from abo ve)
(other options for the actuator family are also av ailable)
Example: B209B / TR24-SR-T 1/2" ball valv e, Cv=0 .8, with proportional non-spring
return actuator
*No characterized disc; requires Cv adjustment for installation in pipe sizes larger than the va lve .
All valves are factory
assembled . No field
assembly required .
VALVE SPECIFICATION NON-SPRING RETURN SPRING RETURN (N.O. / CCW)
Port Valve #C v Size
Two-pos/Tri-state Proportional
Two-posT ri-stateP roportionalStandard NEMA 4 Standar dN EMA 4
Two-way B209B 0 .8 1/2"TR24-3-T NRB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T-N4T FRB24T FRB24-3T FRB24-SR
Two-way B211B 1 .9 1/2"TR24-3-T NRB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T- N4 TFRB24 TFRB24-3 TFRB24-SR
Two-way B212B 3 .0 1/2"TR24-3-T NRB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T- N4 TFRB24 TFRB24-3 TFRB24-SR
Two-way B213B 4 .7 1/2"TR24-3-T NRB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T- N4 TFRB24 TFRB24-3 TFRB24-SR
Two-way B214B 7 .4 1/2"TR24-3-T NRB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T- N4 TFRB24 TFRB24-3 TFRB24-SR
Two-way B218B 7 .4 3/4"TR24-3-T NRB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T- N4 TFRB24 TFRB24-3 TFRB24-SR
Two-way B219B10 .0 3/4"TR24-3-T NRB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T- N4 TFRB24 TFRB24-3 TFRB24-SR
Two-way B22310 .0 1" LRB24-3 NRB24-3-T-N4 LRB24-SR NRB24-SR-T- N4 LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR
Two-way B22419 .0 1" LRB24-3 NRB24-3-T-N4 LRB24-SR NRB24-SR-T- N4 LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR
Two-way* B22530 .0 1" LRB24-3 NRB24-3-T-N4 LRB24-SR NRB24-SR-T- N4 LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR
Two-way* B23019 .0 1-1/4"LRB24-3 NRB24-3-T-N4 LRB24-SR NRB24-SR-T- N4 LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR
Two-way B23125 .0 1-1/4"ARB24-3 NRB24-3-T-N4 ARB24-SR NRB24-SR-T- N4 AFRB24
AFRB24-MFTA FRB24-MFT
Two-way* B24037 .0 1-1/2"ARB24-3 ARB24-3-T-N4 ARB24-SR ARB24-SR-T- N4 AFRB24 AFRB24-MFTA FRB24-MFT
Two-way B24946 .0 2" ARB24-3 ARB24-3-T-N4 ARB24-SR ARB24-SR-T- N4 AFRB24 AFRB24-MFTA FRB24-MFT
Two-way* B25057 .0 2" ARB24-3 ARB24-3-T-N4 ARB24-SR ARB24-SR-T- N4 AFRB24 AFRB24-MFTA FRB24-MFT
Three-wayB309B 0 .8 1/2"TR24-3-T NRB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T- N4 TFRB24 TFRB24-3 TFRB24-SR
Three-wayB311B 1 .9 1/2"TR24-3-T NRB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T- N4 TFRB24 TFRB24-3 TFRB24-SR
Three-wayB312B 3 .0 1/2"TR24-3-T NRB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T- N4 TFRB24 TFRB24-3 TFRB24-SR
Three-wayB313B 4 .7 1/2"TR24-3-T NRB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T- N4 TFRB24 TFRB24-3 TFRB24-SR
Three-wayB318B 7 .4 3/4"TR24-3-T NRB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T- N4 TFRB24 TFRB24-3 TFRB24-SR
Three-wayB32310 .0 1" LRB24-3 NRB24-3-T-N4 LRB24-SR NRB24-SR-T- N4 LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR
Three-way*B32530 .0 1" LRB24-3 NRB24-3-T-N4 LRB24-SR NRB24-SR-T- N4 LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR
Three-wayB33019 .0 1-1/4"ARB24-3 ARB24-3-T-N4 ARB24-SR ARB24-SR-T- N4 AFRB24
AFRB24-MFT AFRB24-MFT
Three-wayB33125 .0 1-1/4"ARB24-3 ARB24-3-T-N4 ARB24-SR ARB24-SR-T- N4 AFRB24 AFRB24-MFTA FRB24-MFT
Three-wayB34037 .0 1-1/2"ARB24-3 ARB24-3-T-N4 ARB24-SR ARB24-SR- T-N4 AFRB24 AFRB24-MFTA FRB24-MFT
Three-wayB34946 .0 2" ARB24-3 ARB24-3-T-N4 ARB24-SR ARB24-SR-T- N4 AFRB24 AFRB24-MFTA FRB24-MFT
Three-wayB35057 .0 2" ARB24-3 ARB24-3-T-N4 ARB24-SR ARB24-SR-T-N4A FRB24 AFRB24-MFTA FRB24-MFT
Note: Standard ball valve construction is chrome-plated brass ball for 1/2" and 3/4" sizes (B suffix); stainless steel ball
available as an option. On 1" sizes and larger, stainless ball is standard.
Note: Multi-function Technology
®
(MFT) model actuators are also available. Add -MFT to the base model number and
specify the control signal configuration or the Belimo P-code for a pre-set MFT configuration (not required if to be field configured, or if the default configuration of 2-10 VDC is required)
.
RELATED PRODUCTS
ZS-CCV
-90
NEMA 4 weather shield for LF
SST
AG
Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order
ZS-CCV
-110
NEMA 4 weather shield for AFB/AFR
ZS-CCV
-100
Nema 4 weather shield for LR/AR

168. CONTROL VALVES 136CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
HIGH TEMPERATURE BALL VALVES
HTCCV SERIES
Size 1/2", 3/4" and 1" FNPT
Cv Range 0.29 to 28
Body Pattern 2-way only
Flow Characteristic Equal Percentage
Leakage Rating 0%, bubble tight
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
200 psid (1380 kPa)
Materials Of Construction
Brass body (DZR) P-CuZn35Pb2,
stainless steel ball and stem, Tefzel
®
characterized disc and seat, EPDM
o-rings
Media Compatibility
Hot water, <60% glycol, <15 psig
(104kPa) steam
Media Temperature Range
60° to 266°F (16° to 130°C) water,
limited to 250°F (121°C) for steam
Compatible Actuators Non-spring return: TR, LRB;
Spring return: TF, LF
Non-spring return: TR, LRB;
Spring return: TF, LF
Pressure Drop Maximum differential pressure 60
psid (414 kPa) for water, 15 psid (104 kPa) for steam
Pressure Rating
600 psig (4135 kPa)
Approvals UL Listed, CSA, CE
Warranty 5 years
Dimensions - inches (cm)
Valve Body ADN (mm)Inches BC
1/2" 15 3.33 (8.46) 0.53 (1.35)2.09 (5.32)B215HT
3/4" 20 3.96 (10.06) 2.37 (6.01) 0.67 (1.70)B220HT
B225HT 1" 5.14 (13.06)25 3.14 (7.98) 0.92 (2.325)
Valve Nominal Size
DESCRIPTION
The HTCCV Series 2-way high temperature ball valves are
used for two-position, floating or proportional control of HVAC
hot or chilled water, or low pressure steam
. The valves come
assembled with direct coupled Belimo electric actuators with spring return or non-spring return operation
. This valve
displays a true equal percentage characteristic. They come in
standard sizes from 1/2” to 1” and Cv’s from (0.29 to 28).
FEATURES
• Equal percentage flow characteristic
• Assembled, ready for installation
• Spring return or non-spring return actuators
• Floating, two-position, or proportional control
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
B215HT029/LRB24-SR
FLOW PATTERN
2-way High Temperature Characterized Control Valves
Flow direction
Upstream A
A
Open Closed
INLET OUTLET
AB
Downstream AB
Valve should be installed with the
characterization disc downstream
(unlike the CCV series valves).

169. flfi 137CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
HIGH TEMPERATURE BALL VALVES
HTCCV SERIES
MOUNTING / PIPING DIAGRAMS
ORDERING INFORMATION
Assembly can be mounted
horizontally or ve rtically for water
applications. For steam applica-
tions the valve can be mounted
vertically but if mounted
horizontally the valve must be
90° off center of the pipe. Do not
install with actuator below pipe.
Water application only
Steam or water
application
Note: Multi-Function Technology
®
(MFT) model actuators are available
. Add -MFT to the base model
number and specify the control signal configuration or the Belimo P-code for a pre-set MFT configuration
(not required if to be field configured, or if the default configuration of 2-10 VDC is required).
VALVE SPECIFICATION NON-SPRING RETURN SPRING RETURN
Port Valve# Cv Siz eTwo-Pos/Tri-state ProportionalTwo-PosTri-state Proportional
Two-wayB215HT029 0.29 1/2" TR24-3-T TR24-SR-T TF24 TF24-3 TF24-SR
Two-wayB215HT046 0.46 1/2" TR24-3-T TR24-SR-T TF24 TF24-3 TF24-SR
Two-wayB215HT073 0.73 1/2" TR24-3-T TR24-SR-T TF24 TF24-3 TF24-SR
Two-wayB215HT116 1.16 1/2" TR24-3-T TR24-SR-T TF24 TF24-3 TF24-SR
Two-wayB215HT186 1.86 1/2" TR24-3-T TR24-SR-T TF24 TF24-3 TF24-SR
Two-wayB215HT290 2.9 1/2" TR24-3-T TR24-SR-T TF24 TF24-3 TF24-SR
Two-wayB215HT455*4.55 1/2" TR24-3-T TR24-SR-T TF24 TF24-3 TF24-SR
Two-wayB220HT186 1.86 3/4" LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR
Two-wayB220HT290 2.9 3/4" LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR
Two-wayB220HT464 4.64 3/4" LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR
Two-wayB220HT731 7.31 3/4" LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR
Two-wayB220HT928 9.28 3/4" LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR
Two-wayB220HT132013.2 3/4" LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR
Two-wayB225HT464 4.64 1" LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR
Two-wayB225HT731 7.31 1" LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR
Two-wayB225HT116011.6 1" LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR
Two-wayB225HT185618.56 1” LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR
Two-wayB225HT2800 28 1" LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR
*Modified equal percentage characteristic
B_ _ _ /  Select ball valve # from list above (brackets and mounting are included). 
Select actuator # from list above (other options for the actuator family are also available)
Example: B215HT029 / TR24-SR  1/2" ball valve, Cv=0.29 with proportional non-spring return actuator
All valves are factory assembled. No field assembly required.
RELATED PRODUCTS
SSTAG Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order

170. CONTROL VALVES 138CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
E
D
Minimum Clearance Required
3-1/2 (89)
A
B
C
G
Three-WayValve
B
E
C
F
Three-WayValveT wo-WayValveTwo-Way Valve
5-1/2
(140)
2-13/16
(71)
BALL VALVES
VG1000 SERIES
Size 1/2" to 2" FNPT
Cv Range 1.2 to 73.7
Life Expectancy 200,000 leak-free cycles
Body Pattern Two-way and three-way mixing or
diverting
Flow Characteristic Equal percentage
Leakage Rating ANSI Class IV (0.01% of Cv)
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
200 psid (1378 kPa)
Pressure Drop 50 psid (345 kPa) maximum; full port
valves up to 150 psid (1034 kPa)
Pressure Rating 580 psig (3996 kPa), PN40
Materials Of Construction Forged brass body, stainless steel (or
chrome-plated brass) ball, stainless steel
(or nickel-plated brass) stem, EPDM
o-ring stem seals and graphite reinforced
PTFE seats
Media Compatibility
Hot or chilled water, <50% glycol,
<15 psi steam (stainless trim models only)
Media Temperature Range Stainless trim: 23° to 250°F
(-5° to 121°C);
Brass trim: 23° to 203°F (-5° to 95°C)
Compatible Actuators Non-spring return: VA9104 (integral
linkage) or M9109 w/M9000-520 linkage;
Spring return: VA9203, VA9208 (integral
linkage)
Operating Temperature See M9100 Series and M9200 Series
in ACTUATORS & DAMPERS catalog section
Warranty
1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Johnson Controls VG1000 Series ball valves are
available with two- and three-way body patterns with a
characterized insert for equal percentage flow control and
Cv ratings in the range of traditional globe valves
. They are
available in connection sizes from 1/2" to 2" (Cv's from 1.2
to 73.7). The V G1000 Series valves are used in combination
with spring return and non-spring return direct-coupled actuators from Johnson Controls
. The VG1000 Series are
designed to control chilled water, hot water, 50% glycol, and 15 psig steam (stainless trim models only)
.
FEATURES
• Minim
• Compatible with water, glycol, and low-pressure steam
• Equal percentage flow characteristics
• Assembled or ordered separately
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
A C
B
Mixing
flow
Top
view
A C
B
Diverting
flow
With actuator fully ccw,
port B = closed, Flow = A C
With actuator fully cw,
port A = closed, Flow = B C
Three-way
Flow Pattern
C
E
B
H
G
Two-wayTwo-way
Non-spring Return Spring Return
DIMENSIONS
Valve
Size
Dimensions in (cm)
A B C D E F G H J
1/2" 6.30 (15.99)0.66 (1.67) 2.52 (6.39)7.84 (19.91) 7.20* (18.30)4.20 (10.6)3.25 (8.25)7.25 (18.42) 1.25 (3.18)
3/4" 6.30 (15.99)0.66 (1.67) 2.80 (7.10)7.84 (19.91) 7.20* (18.30)4.20 (10.6)3.25 (8.25)7.25 (18.42) 1.41 (3.57)
1" 6.38 (16.19)0.75 (1.91) 3.41 (8.65)7.84 (19.91) 7.28* (18.49)4.20 (10.6)3.25 (8.25)7.25 (18.42) 1.70 (4.33)
1-1/4" 6.81 (17.30)1.03 (2.62) 3.94 (10.00) 7.84 (19.91) 7.69* (19.53)4.20 (10.6)3.25 (8.25)7.25 (18.42) 1.97 (5.00)
1-1/2" 6.97 (17.70)1.14 (2.90) 4.33 (10.99) 7.84 (19.91) 7.88* (20.00)4.20 (10.6)3.25 (8.25)7.25 (18.42) 2.17 (5.52)
2" 7.17 (18.22)1.47 (3.73) 4.84 (12.30) 7.84 (19.91) 8.03 (20.40) 3.94 (10.0)4.57 (11.6)9.81** (24.92)2.42 (6.16)
* Dimension “E” is reduced by 0.59" (1.5 cm) for M9206-Bxx-2S Series two-position actuators.
** Dimension “H” is increased by 3" (7.6 cm) for M9210-BAx-3 Series 120 VAC two-position actuators.
Actuator replacement clearance over dimension “A” is 3.50" (8.89 cm) for all non-spring return actuators.
Actuator replacement clearance over dimension “E” is 4.50" (11.43 cm) for all spring return actuators.
B C
D
A
F
Two-way Tw o-way
J
B
C
Three-way
Three-way

171. flfi 139CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
BALL VALVES
VG1000 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
VALVE NON-SPRING RETURN ACTUATOR SPRING RETURN ACTUATOR
2-WAY
BRASS
TRIM
2-WAY
SS TRIM
3-WAY
BRASS
TRIM
3-WAY
SS TRIM
SIZE CV
CLOSE-
OFF
TWO-
POSITION
FLOATING PROPORTIONAL LINKAGE
TWO-
POSITION
FLOATING PROPORTIONAL
VG1241AD VG1245AD VG1841AD VG1845AD 1/2" 1.2 200 PSIG
VA9104-IGA-3S VA9104-AGA-3S VA9104-GGA-3S INCLUDED
VA9203-BGA-2 VA9203-GGA-2Z VA9203-GGA-2Z
M9106-IGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9000-520
VG1241AE VG1245AE VG1841AE VG1845AE 1/2" 1.9 200 PSIG
VA9104-IGA-3S VA9104-AGA-3S VA9104-GGA-3S INCLUDED
VA9203-BGA-2 VA9203-GGA-2Z VA9203-GGA-2Z
M9106-IGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9000-520
VG1241AF VG1245AF VG1841AF VG1845AF 1/2" 2.9 200 PSIG
VA9104-IGA-3S VA9104-AGA-3S VA9104-GGA-3S INCLUDED
VA9203-BGA-2 VA9203-GGA-2Z VA9203-GGA-2Z
M9106-IGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9000-520
VG1241AG VG1241AG VG1841AG VG1841AG 1/2" 4.7 200 PSIG
VA9104-IGA-3S VA9104-AGA-3S VA9104-GGA-3S INCLUDED
VA9203-BGA-2 VA9203-GGA-2Z VA9203-GGA-2Z
M9106-IGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9000-520
VG1241AL VG1245AL VG1841AL VG1845AL 1/2" 7.4 200 PSIG
VA9104-IGA-3S VA9104-AGA-3S VA9104-GGA-3S INCLUDED
VA9203-BGA-2 VA9203-GGA-2Z VA9203-GGA-2Z
M9106-IGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9000-520
VG1241AN VG1245AN VG1841AN VG1845AN 1/2" 11.7 200 PSIG
VA9104-IGA-3S VA9104-AGA-3S VA9104-GGA-3S INCLUDED
VA9203-BGA-2 VA9203-GGA-2Z VA9203-GGA-2Z
M9106-IGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9000-520
VG1241BG VG1245BG VG1841BG VG1845BG 3/4" 4.7 200 PSIG
VA9104-IGA-3S VA9104-AGA-3S VA9104-GGA-3S INCLUDED
VA9203-BGA-2 VA9203-GGA-2Z VA9203-GGA-2Z
M9106-IGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9000-520
VG1241BL VG1245BL VG1841BL VG1845BL 3/4" 7.4 200 PSIG
VA9104-IGA-3S VA9104-AGA-3S VA9104-GGA-3S INCLUDED
VA9203-BGA-2 VA9203-GGA-2Z VA9203-GGA-2Z
M9106-IGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9000-520
VG1241BN VG1245BN VG1841BN VG1845BN 3/4" 11.7 200 PSIG
VA9104-IGA-3S VA9104-AGA-3S VA9104-GGA-3S INCLUDED
VA9203-BGA-2 VA9203-GGA-2Z VA9203-GGA-2Z
M9106-IGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9000-520
VG1241CL VG1245CL VG1841CL VG1845CL 1" 7.4 200 PSIG
VA9104-IGA-3S VA9104-AGA-3S VA9104-GGA-3S INCLUDED
VA9203-BGA-2 VA9203-GGA-2Z VA9203-GGA-2Z
M9106-IGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9000-520
VG1241CN VG1245CN VG1841CN VG1845CN 1" 11.7 200 PSIG
VA9104-IGA-3S VA9104-AGA-3S VA9104-GGA-3S INCLUDED
VA9203-BGA-2 VA9203-GGA-2Z VA9203-GGA-2Z
M9106-IGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9000-520
VG1241CP VG1245CP VG1841CP VG1845CP 1" 18.7 200 PSIG
VA9104-IGA-3S VA9104-AGA-3S VA9104-GGA-3S INCLUDED
VA9203-BGA-2 VA9203-GGA-2Z VA9203-GGA-2Z
M9106-IGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9000-520
VG1241DN VG1245DN VG1841DN VG1845DN 1-1/4" 11.7 200 PSIG M9106-IGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9000-520 VA9208-BGA-3 VA9208-AGA-2 VA9208-GGA-2
VG1241DP VG1245DP VG1841DP VG1845DP 1-1/4" 18.7 200 PSIG M9106-IGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9000-520 VA9208-BGA-3 VA9208-AGA-2 VA9208-GGA-2
VG1241DR VG1245DR VG1841DR VG1845DR 1-1/4" 29.2 200 PSIG M9106-IGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9000-520 VA9208-BGA-3 VA9208-AGA-2 VA9208-GGA-2
VG1241EP VG1245EP VG1841EP VG1845EP 1-1/2" 18.7 200 PSIG M9106-IGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9000-520 VA9208-BGA-3 VA9208-AGA-2 VA9208-GGA-2
VG1241ER VG1245ER VG1841ER VG1845ER 1-1/2" 29.2 200 PSIG M9106-IGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9000-520 VA9208-BGA-3 VA9208-AGA-2 VA9208-GGA-2
VG1241ES VG1245ES VG1841ES VG1845ES 1-1/2" 46.8 200 PSIG M9106-IGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9000-520 VA9208-BGA-3 VA9208-AGA-2 VA9208-GGA-2
VG1241FR VG1245FR VG1841FR VG1845FR 2" 29.2 200 PSIG M9109-AGA-2 M9109-AGA-2 M9109-GGA-2 M9000-520 VA9208-BGA-3 VA9208-AGA-2 VA9208-GGA-2
VG1241FS VG1245FS VG1841FS VG1845FS 2" 46.8 200 PSIG M9109-AGA-2 M9109-AGA-2 M9109-GGA-2 M9000-520 VA9208-BGA-3 VA9208-AGA-2 VA9208-GGA-2
VG1241FT VG1245FT VG1841FT VG1845FT 2" 73.7 200 PSIG M9109-AGA-2 M9109-AGA-2 M9109-GGA-2 M9000-520 VA9208-BGA-3 VA9208-AGA-2 VA9208-GGA-2
For models with switches, change to actuator model number to include “C” instead of “A” at the end of the three letter insert. Example: VA9203-GGC-2Z
Refer to actuator pages for wiring diagrams
Notes: 1. Order optional thermal barrier M9000-561 for steam applications when using VA actuators. Barrier is included with linkage M9000-520.
2. Order optional weather shield M9000-341 for assemblies using VA actuators. Not available for assemblies using M actuators + linkage.
3. Valves are also available with sweat connections; models are VG1275 instead of VG1245, for example.
4. Valves are also available with press connections; models are VG1295 instead of VG1245, for example.
5. Spring return assembly model numbers have either -NC (normally closed) or -NO (normally open) suffix and will be pre-assembled as such.
For 3W valves, “normal” refers to flow to the coil, port A.
6. Requires controller with timeout, or use M9106-IGA-2. No time out on M109. The M9106-IGA valve size limit is 1.5" maximum.
7. Valves, linkages, and actuators can be ordered separately or assembled (no extra charge).
8. Not all options shown in chart. Contact Kele for more information.

172. CONTROL VALVES 140CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
BALL VALVES
VBN2, VBN3 SERIES
Size 1/2" to 3" FNPT (three-way to 2-1/2")
Cv Range 0.38 to 162
Body Pattern Two-way and three-way (mixing or
diverting)
Flow Characteristic Two-way: equal percentage for
models with parabolic insert, linear
for full port models;
Three-way: equal percentage ports
A-to-AB and linear ports B-to-AB
Leakage Rating ANSI Class IV (0.01% of Cv)
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
Two-way 1/2" and 3/4": 130 psid
(897 kPa);
Two-way 1" to 3": 100 psid (690 kPa);
Three-way 1/2" to 1": 50 psid
(345 kPa);
Three-way 1-1/4" to 2-1/2": 40 psid
(276 kPa)
Materials Of Construction
Forged brass body (ASTM B283),
nickel-plated brass (or stainless steel) ball and stem, EPDM o-ring stem seals and EPDM with reinforced Teflon® ball seals
Media Compatibility
Hot or chilled water, <50% glycol
Media Temperature Range
-22° to 250°F (-30° to 121°C)
Compatible Actuators Any Honeywell or Kele 44 in-lb
non-spring return or spring return actuator will operate all VBN2, VBN3 assemblies up to 3"
Operating Temperature
See MN Series, MVN Series,
and MS Series in ACTUATORS & DAMPERS catalog section
Pressure Rating
360 psig (2482 kPa) @ 250°F
(121°C)
Warranty 1 year on valves, 5 years on
actuators
DESCRIPTION
The VBN2 and VBN3 Series are Honeywell's characterized flow, low torque, two- and three-way ball valves
. They are
designed to provide Cv ratings that closely match industry standard globe valves and they have equal percentage flow characteristics
. A single-style bracket maximizes simplicity
and flexibility in mounting spring or non-spring return actuators
. The valve bodies are 1/2" to 2" NPT sizes and use
low torque, low cost actuators.
FEATURES
• P •
Cv ratings similar to globe valves
• Three-way body pattern similar to globe valves
• Low torque means smaller, lower cost actuators
• Common mounting bracket
• Removable manual override handle
• Flexible bracket orientation
• Plenum rated
• Available with or without actuator
• Nema 3R option available
SPECIFICATIONS
VBN2, VBN3 Series

173. flfi 141CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
SUPPLY
RETURN
AB PORT A PORT
B PORT
COILSUPPLY
RETURN
AB PORT A PORT
B PORT
COIL
MIXINGDIVERTING
Three-way ball valve flow for orientation (not to scale).
BALL VALVES
VBN2, VBN3 SERIES
A AB
“T” POSITION ON TOP OF
3 WAY BALL VALVE STEM
A AB
B
A AB
Full flow
(only for
2-way bodies)
B
ABA
Stem
B
AB
B
AB
Full flow
A and B mixed
to AB, or A and B
diverted from AB,
depending on flow direction.
ORIENTATION OF BALL IN VALVE
FLOW ORIENTATION
RANGEABILITY
2-WAY AVAILABLE CV AND RANGEABILITY
VBN2A
CV 0.38 0.68 1.30 2.00 2.30 4.70 8.00 11.70
Rangeability 41 17 52 * 321 159 390 251
VBN2B
CV 0.31 0.63 1.20 2.50 4.30 7.40 10.10 14.70 29.00
Rangeability 41 17 52 321 159 * 390 251 1503
VBN2C
CV 4.40 9.00 15.30 26.00 44.00 54.00
Rangeability 159 390 1040 484 1263 1207
VBN2D
CV 4.40 8.30 14.90 25.00 37.00 41.00 102.00
Rangeability 159 390 1040 * 484 1207 1263
VBN2E
CV 23.00 30.00 41.00 74.00 172.00
Rangeability 484 * 603 1263 558
VBN2F
CV 42.00 57.00 71.00 100.00 108.00 210.00 266.00
Rangeability 603 * 287 * 558 750 877
VBN2G
Cv 45.00 55.00 72.00 101.00 162.00 202.00
Rangeability 250 * 287 558 750 877
VBN2H
Cv 49.00 63.00 82.00 124.00 145.00
Rangeability 250 287 558 750 877
Rangeability is a measure of a valve’s controllability. It is a measured property and is expressed as the ratio of a valve’s
maximum flow rate to its minimum controllable flow rate.

174. CONTROL VALVES 142CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
A
C
F
E D
B
Pipe Model C
V
thgieW )mm( sehcni snoisnemiD
)gk( bl F E D C B A .oN eziS
1/2" VBN2A 0.38, 0.68, 1.3, 2.0, 2.6, 4.7, 11 .7 2-3/8 (60) 3-7/16 (87) 6-5/8 (168) 3 (76) 4 (102) 8-1/8 (206) 1 (0.5)
)5.0( 1 )112( 61/5-8 )201( 4 )67( 3 )561( 2/1-6 )49( 61/11-3 )76( 8/5-2 0.8
3/4" VBN2B 0.31, 0.63, 1.2, 2.5, 4.3, 7.4, 14.7 2-3/8 (60) 3-7/16 (87) 6-7/16 (164) 3 (76) 4 (102) 8-1/8 (206) 1 (0.5)
)5.0( 1 )112( 61/5-8 )201( 4 )67( 3 )561( 2/1-6 )49( 61/11-3 )76( 8/5-2 92 ,1.01
)5.0( 1 )112( 61/5-8 )201( 4 )67( 3 )971( 61/1-7 )49( 61/11-3 )59( 4/3-3 0.9 C2NBV "1
)6.0( 4.1 )122( 61/11-8 )201( 4 )67( 3 )171( 4/3-6 )001( 61/51-3 )67( 3 45 ,3.51 ,4.4
)1.1( 4.2 )522( 8/7-8 )201( 4 )67( 3 )781( 8/3-7 )311( 61/7-4 )111( 8/3-4 44 ,62
1-1/4" VBN2D 4.4, 8.3, 14.9, 25, 41 3 (76) 3-15/16 (100) 6-
11/16 (170) 3 (76) 4 (102) 8-11 /16 (221) 1.4 (0.6)
)1.1( 4.2 )132( 61/1-9 )201( 4 )67( 3 )871( 7 )311( 61/7-4 )29( 8/5-3 201 ,73
)1.1( 4.2 )132( 61/1-9 )201( 4 )67( 3 )671( 61/51-6 )001( 61/51-3 )68( 8/3-3 47 ,03 ,32 E2NBV "2/1-1
)5.1( 2.3 )522( 8/7-8 )201( 4 )67( 3 )971( 61/1-7 )231( 61/3-5 )59( 4/3-3 271 ,14
)5.1( 2.3 )522( 8/7-8 )201( 4 )67( 3 )381( 61/3-7 )231( 61/3-5 )201( 4 801 ,24 F2NBV "2
57, 71, 100, 210, 266 4-3/8 (111) 5-3/4 (146) 7-7/16 (189) 3 (76) 4 (102) 10-1/2 (267) 5 (2.3
)
2-1/2" VBN2G 45, 55, 72, 101, 162, 202 4-3/4 (121) 5-3/4 (146) 7-9/16 (192) 3 (76) 4 (102) 10-1/2 (267) 5.5 (2.5)
3" VBN2H 49, 63, 82, 124, 145 5 (127) 5-7/8 (149) 7-11 /16 (195) 3 (76) 4 (102) 10-11/16 (271) 5.9 (2.7)
DE
B
G
A
C
F
Pipe Model C
V
Dimensions inches (mm) Weight
)gk( bl G F E D C B A .oN eziS
1/2" VBN3A 0.33, 0.59, 1.0, 2.4, 4.3, 8.0 3-1/2 (90) 3-5/16 (84) 7 (178) 3 (76) 4 (102) 9-3/8 (238) 2-3/8 (60) 2.4 (1.1) 3/4" VBN3B 0.40, 0.66, 1.3, 2.4, 3.8, 7.0, 11.0 2-13/16 (71) 3-5/16 (84) 6-1/2 (168) 3 (76) 4 (102) 8-13/16 (224) 2 (51) 2 (0.9)
1" VBN3C 0.40, 0.65, 1.3, 2.3, 3.5 3-13/16 (97) 3-5/16 (84) 7-5/16 (186) 3 (76) 4 (102) 9-1/2 (241) 2-3/4 (70) 2.8 (1.3)
)2.1( 6.2 )76( 8/5-2 )942( 61/31-9 )201( 4 )67( 3 )371( 61/31-6 61/31-3 )67( 3 22 ,6.8
)5.1( 3.3 )38( 4/1-3 )572( 61/31-01 )201( 4 )67( 3 )891( 61/31-7 )201( 4 )411( 2/1-4 13 ,9.41 ,5.4
)1.1( 5.2 )46( 2/1-2 )942( 61/31-9 )201( 4 )67( 3 )371( 61/31-6 61/31-3 )67( 3 0.91 ,7.8 ,1.4 D3NBV "4/1-1
)3.1( 8.2 )07( 4/3-2 )262( 61/5-01 )201( 4 )67( 3 )681( 61/5-7 )201( 4 )29( 8/5-3 43 ,72 ,7.21 1-1/2" VBN3E 4.0, 8.3, 13.4, 32 4-1/2 (114) 4 (102) 7-13/16 (198) 3 (76) 4 (102) 10-13/16 (275) 3-1/4 (83) 3.3 (1.5
)
)5.1( 3.3 )38( 4/1-3 )972( 11 )201( 4 )67( 3 )681( 61/5-7 )411( 2/1-4 )201( 4 16 ,42
)5.1( 3.3 )38( 4/1-3 )972( 11 )201( 4 )67( 3 )681( 61/5-7 )411( 2/1-4 )201( 4 75 ,83 ,42 F3NBV "2
)7.1( 8.3 )59( 4/3-3 )313( 61/5-21 )201( 4 )67( 3 )891( 61/31-7 61/31-5 )721( 5 901 ,38
)7.1( 8.3 )59( 4/3-3 )313( 61/5-21 )201( 4 )67( 3 )891( 61/31-7 61/31-5 )721( 5 001 ,47 ,83 G3NBV "2/1-2
VBN2 dimensions in inches (millimeters)
VBN3 dimensions in inches (millimeters)
DIMENSIONS
BALL VALVES
VBN2, VBN3 SERIES

175. flfi 143CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
BALL VALVES
VBN2, VBN3 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION, VALVE BODY WITH ACTUATOR
RELATED PRODUCTS
SSTAG Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order
MODEL
VBNVB Series Ball Valve with Female NPT threaded connections
CONFIGURATION
22-Way
33-Way
CONNECTION SIZE
A1/2"
B3/4"
C1"
D1-1/4"
E1-1/2"
F2"
G2-1/2"
H3" (2-Way valves only)
CODE for Cv SELECTION
xSee Tables 1 and 2 for the Ordering Code to place here
VALVE TRIM
P Nickel chrome plate brass
S316 stainless steel
VALVE PROFILE
AMVN standard (1/2", 3/4", 1" and 1-1/4" valves)
LMVN low profile (1/2", 3/4", 1" and 1-1/4" valves only)**
XMN, MS or Kele actuator base
ACTUATOR
0No actuator (valve body only)
1MVN613 On/Off or floating (90 second timing)
2MVN643 On/Off or floating (30 second timing)
3MVN713 Modulating
4MN6105A1011-Direct Coupled Actuator (DCA), floating On/Off (SPDT)
5MN7505A2001-Direct Coupled Actuator (DCA), floating, modulation, On/Off (SPDT), Non-spring return
6MS7505A2030- Direct Coupled Actuator (DCA), floating, modulation, On/Off (SPDT), Spring return
7MS8105A1030- Direct Coupled Actuator (DCA), 2-Position (SPST), Spring return
FAIL SAFE POSITION
0Fail in place/ No actuator
1Fail safe open
2Fail safe closed
3Fail A to AB Open
4Fail B to AB Open
OPTIONS
00Standard actuator- no options
011 meter cable
02NEMA 3R Enclosure (DCA actuators only)
VBN 2 A B P A 1 1 00 Example: VBN2ABPA1100
*Standard base provides clearance between valve and actuator for insulation
.
**Low profile base enables insallation of valve and actuator in tight spaces.
NOTE: All functions and options are not available with all versions

176. CONTROL VALVES 144CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
BALL VALVES
VBN2, VBN3 SERIES
TABLE 1: VBN2 2-WAY VALVE CV CODE SELECTION CHART
Valve Size
Cv
Ordering Code 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3"
B 0.38 0.31
D 0.68 0.63
E 1.3 1.2
F 2.0
G 2.6 2.5
H 4.7 4.3 4.4 4.4
J 8.0 7.4 9.0 8.3
K 11.7 10.1 14.9
L 14.7 15.3 25.0 23.0
M 29.0 26.0 37.0 30.0
N 44.0 41.0 41.0 42.0 45.0 49.0
P 54.0 57.0 55.0 63.0
R 74.0 71.0 72.0 82.0
S 102.0 100.0 101.0
T 108.0 124.0
U 162.0 145.0
1 172.0 210.0 202.0
2 266.0
TABLE 2: VBN3 3-WAY VALVE CV CODE SELECTION CHART
Valve Size
Cv
Ordering Code 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2"
B 0.33
C 0.59 0.4 0.4
D 0.66 0.65
E 1.0 1.3 1.3
F 2.4 2.4 2.3
G 3.8 3.5
H 4.3 4.5 4.1 4.0
J 8.0 7.0 8.6 8.7 8.3
K 11.0 14.9 12.7 13.4
L 22.0 19.4 24.0 24.0
M 31.0 27.0 32.0
N 34.0 38.0 38.0
P 61.0 57.0
R 83.0 74.0
S 100.0
T 109.0

177. flfi 145CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
Sizes
Threaded/Wafered 1" to 2"
Flanged 3" to 6"
Rangeability 300:1 turndown ratio
Flow Characteristic Equal percentage
Body Rating
1" to 2" ANSI 150/300 multi-rated
3" to 6" ANSI 150 or ANSI 300
Leakage Rating ANSI Class VI
Media Compatibility 125 psi steam, 50% glycol
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
250 psi
Maximum System Pressure
300 psi
Pressure Drop 100 psi
Dimensions ASME B16.10 face to ace
Materials (Standard):
Body Carbon steel
Ball 304 stainless steel
Stem 304 stainless steel
Seat PTFE
Packing Teflon®
Bushing Stanyl PA46
Materials (Optional):
Body 304 stainless steel
Shaft Bearing PTFE
Seat Graphite
Pressure Rating 250 psi
Temperature Range -50° to 400°F (-45°C to 204°C)
Approvals CSA US File 226201
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The VSI V-Ball Series is a unique, industrial-grade valve
with temperature, pressure, leakage, and close-ff ratings that
far exceed those of standard commercial grade valves. The
V-Ball Series assures positive low-leakage control in higher pressure systems such as those with variable speed pumps
.
With a standard carbon steel body and a Standard ANSI 150/300 pressure-temper
ature rating, the V-Ball Series can
handle up to 250 psi differential (closeoff) in hot or chilled water systems and up to 125 psi saturated steam. These
valves excel in high-rise building applications and any high- temperature/high-pressure/high-range-ability application
.
FEATURES
• Up to 250 psi close off
• Good for chilled or hot water, 50% Glycol, and steam
• ANSI 150/300
• Stainsless steel body available
• Thermal overload protection
• Internal heaters on selected actuators
• TFM 1700 seat
• Peek bearing
• ALFAS o-ring
CU S
SPECIFICATIONS
VSI V-Ball Series
BALL VALVE- V-BALL
V-BALL SERIES

178. CONTROL VALVES 146CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
BALL VALVE- V-BALL
V-BALL SERIES
CV VALUES
Flow Coefficients (Cv) for V-Series Ball Valves 1" - 6"
Flow
Coefficient
Valve
Size,
Inches
Valve Rotation in Degrees Torque Required
@ 250 psi Close Off
in-lb
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 75 80 90
Cv
V-1
(1")
0.04 0.5 3 5 8 12 17 24 29 31 40
V-1.5
(1.5")
0.07 3 7 12 21 29 40 55 68 73 80
V-2
(2")
0.09 4 10 21 34 43 65 77 85 96 130
V-3
(3")
1 12 29 49 68 117 157 207 215 270 200
V-4
(4")
4 22 46 86 130 195 279 350 421 529 400
V-6
(6")
5 33 79 148 230 330 440 507 575 850 650
ELECTRIC ACTUATOR SPECIFICATIONS (SIZED FOR 250 PSI CLOSE-OFF)
VALVE
SIZE
CLOSE
OFF PSI
ELECTRIC
ACTUATOR
ELECTRIC
POWER
CONTROL
SIGNAL
TORQUE
(IN/LB)
FAIL
SAFE
RUN TIME
(SECONDS)
DIMENSIONS
(HxWxL)
1" 250 KA-44 24 VAC (6VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10 VDC
44 YES 95 8" x 7" x 9.25"
(20.3 x 17.8 x 23.5 cm)
1.5" 250 KA-88 24 VAC (6VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10 VDC
88 YES 95 8" x 7" x 9.25"
(20.3 x 17.8 x 23.5 cm)
2" 250 KAS-175 24 VAC (16VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10 VDC
175 YES 95 8" x 7" x 9.25"
(20.3 x 17.8 x 23.5 cm)
3" 250 KA-301 24 VAC (9VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10 VDC
301 NO 95 8" x 7" x 9.25"
(20.3 x 17.8 x 23.5 cm)
3" 250 EFB24 24 VAC (6VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10 VDC
270 YES 95 8" x 7" x 9.25"
(20.3 x 17.8 x 23.5 cm)
4" 250 EFB24 (X2) 24 VAC (6VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10 VDC
540 YES 95 8" x 7" x 9.25"
(20.3 x 17.8 x 23.5 cm)
4"-6" 250 GMB24 (X2) 24 VAC (6VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10 VDC
360 NO 95 8" x 7" x 9.25"
(20.3 x 17.8 x 23.5 cm)
6" 250 GKX24MFT(X2) 24 VAC (42VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10 VDC
720 YES 95 13" x 7" x 9.25"
(33 x 17.8 x 23.5 cm)
1"- 3" 250 1005-X 24 VAC (40VA) or
120 VAC (40VA)
2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10 VDC,
4-20mA
443 NO 20 6.3" x 5.4" x 6.3"
(16 x 13.7 x 16 cm)
4"-6" 250 1010-X 24 VAC (46VA) or
120 VAC (97VA)
2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10 VDC,
4-20mA
885 NO 30 7.2" x 5.8" x 7.7"
(18.2 x 14.7 x 19.6 cm)
1
. Ser.
2. The KA and KAS actuators are Kele brand direct coupled actuators and are rated NEMA 2 - indoor use. They can be used on the smaller sized
2-4" valves. The same applies to the G Series Belimo brand.
3. The Series 1000-X actuators are standard equipped with a heater and are NEMA 4 rated for outdoor usage.

179. flfi 147CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
HEATER
PE
Grey
Brown
White
Pink
Purple
Orange
Black
Red
Blue
Full-close Signal
Full-open Signal
Com
+
Output Signal
-
L
Power Supply
N
+
Input Signal
-
Thermal Protector Push Button
M
C
L
1K
RP
1
2
3
SERVO-CONTROLLER
Field Wiring Field Wiring
PROPORTIONAL/MODULATING TWO-POSITION
*
Y&G
Grey
Brown
White
Black
Red
Blue
Full-close Signal
Full-open Signal
COM
Open
Close
K L
N
GND
Heater
OLS
CLS
C
Thermal Protector Push Button*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M
PE
ACTUATOR
ACTUATOR
1000 SERIES WIRING
KA / KAS ACTUATOR WIRING
Line
voltage
Line
voltage
Line
voltage24 VAC
KA-175-2T - KA-301-2T
Two-position Control
24 VAC
KA-175-2T - KA-301-2T
Floating Control
Floating
Controller
24 VAC
KA-301-P
Proportional Control
24 VAC Power
0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA Signal
+
–
0/2-10 VDC feedback
0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA
24 VDC
KA-175-P - KA-301-P
Proportional Control
24 VDC Po wer
0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA Signal
+
–
+
–
0/2-10 VDC feedback
0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA
1
2
Relay contact
or switch
Floating
controller
KAS-175-2
Two-position Control
KAS-175-M
Floating Control
KAS-175-M
Proportional Control
24 VAC
Line
voltage
Line
voltage
24 VAC
1 2
3 4
Line
voltage
24 VAC
0/2-10 VDC feedback
0/2-10 VDC or
0/4-20 mA
5
1
2
3 4
5
2
3 4
2
3 4
1 2
3 4
5
1 2
3 4
5
* 500Ω, 1/2"W or greater resistor required
when control signal is 4-20 mA
BALL VALVE- V-BALL
V-BALL SERIES

180. CONTROL VALVES 148CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
A
A
B
C
A
D
A
A
C
B
A
D
VALVE SIZE
SERIES V 2-WA Y FLANGED
ABCD
3" 22.5810.5 10
4" 2491 21 0
6" 26.5 10.5 14.5 10
VALVE SIZE
SERIES V 2-WA Y THREADED/WAFERED
ABCD
1" 15 57 10
1.5" 17 6.5 81 0
2" 19 79 10
DIMENSIONS
BALL VALVE- V-BALL
V-BALL SERIES

181. flfi 149CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
ELECTRIC ACTUATOR CODES (NEMA 4 ELECTRIC)
VALVE SIZE 1E2V 2E2V 1EMV2 / 1EMV4 2EMV2 / 2EMV4
1" 1005-X 1005-X-24V 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4)
1.5" 1005-X 1005-X-24V 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4)
2" 1005-X 1005-X-24V 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4)
3" 1005-X 1005-X-24V 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4)
4" 1010-X 1010-X-24V 1010/S-X 1010/S-X-24V-2(4)
6" 1010-X 1010-X-24V 1010/S-X 1010/S-X-24V-2(4)
ELECTRIC ACTUATOR CODES (NEMA 2 ELECTRIC)
VALVE SIZE 2E2D 2E2DSC / 2E2DS0 2EMD 2EMDSC / 2EMDSO
1" KA-44-2T KAS-44-2 KA-44-M KAS-44-M
1.5" KA-88-2T KAS-88-2 KA-88-M KAS-88-M
2" KA-175-2T KAS-175-2 KA-175-P KAS-175-M
3" KA-301-2T EFB24 KA-301-P EFB24-SR
4" GMB24-3(X2) EFB24(X2) GMB24-SR(X2) EFB24-SR(X2)
6" GMB24-3(X2) GKX24-MFT(X2) GMB24-SR(X2) GKX24-MFT(X2)
ACTUATOR CODES (LOW PRESSURE PNEUMATIC- 20PSI AIR)
VALVE SIZE LP2SC LP2SO LPMSC LPMSO
1" D-3153-5130 D-3153-5130 D-3153-5120 D-3153-5120
1.5" D-3153-5130 D-3153-5130 D-3153-5120 D-3153-5120
2" D-3153-5130 D-3153-5130 D-3153-5120 D-3153-5120
3" D-3244-5110 D-3244-5110 D-3244-5100 D-3244-5100
4" D-3246-5110 D-3246-5110 D-3246-5100 D-3246-5100
6" D-3246-5110 D-3246-5110 D-3246-5100 D-3246-5100
ACTUATOR CODES (HIGH PRESSURE PNEUMATIC-80 PSI AIR)
VALVE SIZE
HP21 / HP22
HP2S01 / HP2S02
HP2SC1 / HP2SC2 HPM HPMSC / HPMSO
1" C-DA63/WT8 C-SR63/WT8 C-DA63/VP7G C-SR63/VP7G
1.5" C-DA63/WT8 C-SR63/WT8 C-DA63/VP7G C-SR63/VP7G
2" C-DA63/WT8 C-SR83/WT8 C-DA63/VP7G C-SR83/VP7G
3" C-DA63/WT8 C-SR83/WT8 C-DA63/VP7G C-SR83/VP7G
4" C-DA83/WT8 C-SR105/WT8 C-DA83/VP7G C-SR105/VP7G
6" C-DA092/WT8 C-SR125/WT8 C-DA092/VP7G C-SR125/VP7G
BALL VALVE- V-BALL
V-BALL SERIES

182. CONTROL VALVES 150CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
V V-Ball
SIZE
-11"
-1.51.5"
-22"
-33"
-44"
-66"
ACTUATOR
-2E2V NEMA 4, 24V electric, 2-position -LP2SC Low pressure pneumatic, 2-position, spring return, NC
-2EMV2 NEMA 4, 24V electric, modulating, 2-10 VDC input-LP2SO Low pressure pneumatic, 2-position, spring return, NO
-2EMV4 NEMA 4, 24V electric, modulating, 4-20 mA input-LPMSC Low pressure pneumatic, 3-15 positioner, spring return, NC
-1E2V NEMA 4, 120V electric, 2-position -LPMSO Low pressure pneumatic, 3-15 positioner, spring return, NO
-1EMV2 NEMA 4, 120V electric, modulating, 2-10 VDC input-HP21 High pressure pneumatic, double acting, 120V solenoid
-1EMV4 NEMA 4, 120V electric, modulating, 4-20 mA input-HP22 High pressure pneumatic, double acting, 24V solenoid
-2E2D NEMA 2, 24V electric, 2-position -HPM High pressure pneumatic, double acting, 3-15 positioner
-2E2DSCNEMA 2, 24v electric, 2-position, spring return, NC-HP2SC1High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NC, 120V solenoid
-2E2DSONEMA 2, 24v electric, 2-position, spring return, NO-HP2SO1High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NO, 120V solenoid
-2EMD NEMA 2, 24V electric, modulating -HP2SC2High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NC, 24V solenoid
-2EMDSCNEMA 2, 24v electric, modulating, spring return, NC-HP2SO2High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NO, 24V solenoid
-2EMDSONEMA 2, 24v electric, modulating, spring return, NO-HPMSC High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NC, 3-15 positioner
V -2 -1EMV2 Example: V-2-1EMV2 Two-inch NEMA4, 120V electric, modulating 2-10 VDC output
RELATED PRODUCTS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
K
OV-3
NEMA 3R fabric weather cover 10" x 10"
K
OV-4
NEMA 3R fabric weather cover 14" x 12"
SST
AG
Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dog tag, custom engraved per order
BALL VALVE- V-BALL
V-BALL SERIES

183. 151CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
PRESSURE INDEPENDENT CONTROL VALVES
PICCV SERIES
Connections NPT female ends
Flow Characteristic Equal percentage
Flow Range 75°
Leakage Rating 0.01% of rated valve capacity at 50
psi differential
Leakage Class ANSI Class IV
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
200 psi
Pressure Drop 5 to 50 psid
Maximum Pressure Rating
1/2", 3/4", 1" 600 psi
1-1/4", 1-1/2", 2" 400 psi
Materials of Construction
Body Nickel-plated brass
Ball and Stem Chrome-plated brass
Media Compatibility Chilled or hot water, 60% Glycol
maximum
Weight, Valve Body Only
1/2" 5.8 lb (2.6 kg)
3/4" 3.8 lb (1.7 kg)
1" 13.1 lb (5.9 kg)
1-1/4" 10.7 lb (4.9 kg)
1-1/2" 12.5 lb (5.7 kg)
2" 10.1 lb (4.6 kg)
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The Belimo PICCV Series valves combine a differential
pressure regulator with a 2-way characterized control valve
to supply a specific flow rate regardless of system pressure
fluctuations. The valve performs the function of a balancing
valve and a control valve in one unit. PICCV valves can be
used to regulate flow through air handling unit heating and
cooling coils, fan coil units, unit ventilators and VAV reheat
coils.
FEATURES
•
Compensates for pressure variations to maintain
system performance at varying loads
• Predictable flow throughout valve travel provides
favorable energy savings
• Helps to maintain desired delta T and reduces ad
ditional chiller staging
• Constant flow performance reduces actuator
movement and hunting to extend actuator life
• Valve is sized based on coil flow rate and not Cv
simplifies valve selection and saves time APPLICATION
The Pressure Independent Characterized Control Valve is typically used in air handling units on heating and cooling coils, and fan coil unit heating or cooling coils. Some other common applications include unit ventilators and VAV reheat coils. This valve is suitable for use in a hydronic system with constant or variable flow.
This valve is designed with MFT functionality which facilitates
the use of various control input.
SPECIFICATIONS
PICCV_ARX24-MFT

184. CONTROL VALVES 152CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
Regulator
Section
Control Va lve
Section
Water exits valve 
– pressure is P2 
(low).
Ports sense pressure drop and 
transfer it through this channel 
below regulator.
Low pressure pulls regulator down 
against the spring forc e.
Water passes through 
regulator,  disc, and ball 
– pressure drops.
Water enters valve – 
pressure is P1 (high).
PICCV consists of a differential pressure 
regulator in series with a control valve.
The amount of fl ow that passes through 
the valve is controlled by the use of a 
pressure regulator that moves according 
to the change in pressure above and 
below it.
All pressure changes are absorbed by the 
pressure regulator allowing the differential 
pressure to be held constant over the 
control valve section thereby giving the 
same fl ow.
FLOW PATTERN
TYPICAL PARALLEL PIPING IN RELATION TO THE INPUT AND OUTPUT (SCALE: NONE)
BELIMO PICCV (TYP. )
UNION CONNECTION (TYP.)
P/T PORTP/T PORT
AIR VENT
H/C–COIL
P/T PORT
P/T PORT
P/T PORT
FLOW
TEE (TYP.)
SHUT–OFF
VALVE
SHUT–OFF
VALVE
PARALLEL PIPING ARRANGEMENT
FOR PICCV VALVES
FLOW
FLOW
FLOW
FLOWSTRAINERFLOW
P/T PORT
DRAIN
FLOW
(Optional)
TYPICAL PIPING IN RELATION TO THE INPUT AND OUTPUT (SCALE: NONE)
FLOW
H/C–COIL
AIR VENT
P/T PORT P/T PORT
BELIMO PICCV (TYP.)
FLOW
SHUT–OFF VALVE
FLOW
DRAIN
P/T PORT
FLOW FLOWSTRAINER SHUT–OFF VALVE
UNION CONNECTION (TYP. )
(Optional)
The Pressure Independent Characterized Control Valves can be piped in a parallel orientation to achieve increased flow rates.
Our PICCV va lves are av ailable in flows to 100 GPM. To achieve flows larger than this, it is recommended to connect two of these
valves in parallel leading to a common manifold. To correctly operate these valves, the Belimo Multi Function Technology (MFT) will
be employed to utilize one common control signal.
For example, the first valve will be outfitted with an MFT actuator that will correspond to a 2-5 or 2.6 VDC signal. The second valve
would be outfitted with an MFT actuator that would correspond to a 6-10 VDC signal. Therefore, through a single 2-10 VDC output,
the full flow range will be achieved. The actuators will be wired in a parallel arrangement. The established configured P Codes are
P-10137 fo r 2-5 VDC, P-10118 fo r 2-6 VDC, and P-10119 fo r 6-10 VDC.
This recommended application provides the control of flows up to 200 GPM by using two valves. The top diagram on the next page
details valves piped in a parallel arrangement. The bottom diagram features a typical single piping arrangement.
If more than three valves are piped in parallel, please call Belimo to discuss control options.
PRESSURE INDEPENDENT CONTROL VALVES
PICCV SERIES
TYPICAL APPLICATION

185. 153CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
PRESSURE INDEPENDENT CONTROL VALVES
PICCV SERIES
TYPICAL PARALLEL PIPING IN RELATION TO THE INPUT AND OUTPUT (SCALE: NONE)
BELIMO PICCV (TYP. )
UNION CONNECTION (TYP.)
P/T PORTP/T PORT
AIR VENT
H/C–COIL
P/T PORT
P/T PORT
P/T PORT
FLOW
TEE (TYP.)
SHUT–OFF
VALVE
SHUT–OFF
VALVE
PARALLEL PIPING ARRANGEMENT
FOR PICCV VALVES
FLOW
FLOW
FLOW
FLOWSTRAINERFLOW
P/T PORT
DRAIN
FLOW
(Optional)
TYPICAL PIPING IN RELATION TO THE INPUT AND OUTPUT (SCALE: NONE)
FLOW
H/C–COIL
AIR VENT
P/T PORT P/T PORT
BELIMO PICCV (TYP.)
FLOW
SHUT–OFF VALVE
FLOW
DRAIN
P/T PORT
FLOW FLOWSTRAINER SHUT–OFF VALVE
UNION CONNECTION (TYP. )
(Optional)
The Pressure Independent Characterized Control Valves can be piped in a parallel orientation to achieve increased flow rates.
Our PICCV va lves are av ailable in flows to 100 GPM. To achieve flows larger than this, it is recommended to connect two of these
valves in parallel leading to a common manifold. To correctly operate these valves, the Belimo Multi Function Technology (MFT) will
be employed to utilize one common control signal.
For example, the first valve will be outfitted with an MFT actuator that will correspond to a 2-5 or 2.6 VDC signal. The second valve
would be outfitted with an MFT actuator that would correspond to a 6-10 VDC signal. Therefore, through a single 2-10 VDC output,
the full flow range will be achieved. The actuators will be wired in a parallel arrangement. The established configured P Codes are
P-10137 fo r 2-5 VDC, P-10118 fo r 2-6 VDC, and P-10119 fo r 6-10 VDC.
This recommended application provides the control of flows up to 200 GPM by using two valves. The top diagram on the next page
details valves piped in a parallel arrangement. The bottom diagram features a typical single piping arrangement.
If more than three valves are piped in parallel, please call Belimo to discuss control options.
TYPICAL PARALLEL PIPING IN RELATION TO THE INPUT AND OUTPUT (SCALE: NONE)
BELIMO PICCV (TYP. )
UNION CONNECTION (TYP.)
P/T PORTP/T PORT
AIR VENT
H/C–COIL
P/T PORT
P/T PORT
P/T PORT
FLOW
TEE (TYP.)
SHUT–OFF
VALVE
SHUT–OFF
VALVE
PARALLEL PIPING ARRANGEMENT
FOR PICCV VALVES
FLOW
FLOW
FLOW
FLOWSTRAINERFLOW
P/T PORT
DRAIN
FLOW
(Optional)
TYPICAL PIPING IN RELATION TO THE INPUT AND OUTPUT (SCALE: NONE)
FLOW
H/C–COIL
AIR VENT
P/T PORT P/T PORT
BELIMO PICCV (TYP.)
FLOW
SHUT–OFF VALVE
FLOW
DRAIN
P/T PORT
FLOW FLOWSTRAINER SHUT–OFF VALVE
UNION CONNECTION (TYP. )
(Optional)
The Pressure Independent Characterized Control Valves can be piped in a parallel orientation to achieve increased flow rates.
Our PICCV va lves are av ailable in flows to 100 GPM. To achieve flows larger than this, it is recommended to connect two of these
valves in parallel leading to a common manifold. To correctly operate these valves, the Belimo Multi Function Technology (MFT) will
be employed to utilize one common control signal.
For example, the first valve will be outfitted with an MFT actuator that will correspond to a 2-5 or 2.6 VDC signal. The second valve
would be outfitted with an MFT actuator that would correspond to a 6-10 VDC signal. Therefore, through a single 2-10 VDC output,
the full flow range will be achieved. The actuators will be wired in a parallel arrangement. The established configured P Codes are
P-10137 fo r 2-5 VDC, P-10118 fo r 2-6 VDC, and P-10119 fo r 6-10 VDC.
This recommended application provides the control of flows up to 200 GPM by using two valves. The top diagram on the next page
details valves piped in a parallel arrangement. The bottom diagram features a typical single piping arrangement.
If more than three valves are piped in parallel, please call Belimo to discuss control options.

186. CONTROL VALVES 154CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION, NON-SPRING RETURN
ACTUATOR SELECTION, ON/OFF/FLOATING OR PROPORTIONAL
LRB24-3 = 1/2" to 1", 45 in-lb (5 Nm), on/off/floating
LRX24-MFT = 1/2" to 1", 45 in-lb (5 Nm), proportional/MFT technology
ARX24-MFT = 1/4" to 2", 180 in-lb (20 Nm), proportional/MFT technology
VALVE BODY SELECTION
Model Inches GPM Model Inches GPM
P2050B005 1/2 IN 0.5 PICCV-32-018 1 1/4 IN 18
P2050B010 1/2 IN 1 PICCV-32-020 1 1/4 IN 20
P2050B015 1/2 IN 1.5 PICCV-32-022 1 1/4 IN 22
P2050B020 1/2 IN 2 PICCV-32-024 1 1/4 IN 24
P2050B025 1/2 IN 2.5 PICCV-32-026 1 1/4 IN 26
P2050B030 1/2 IN 3 PICCV-40-027 1 1/2 IN 27
P2050B035 1/2 IN 3.5 PICCV-40-029 1 1/2 IN 29
P2050B040 1/2 IN 4 PICCV-40-031 1 1/2 IN 31
P2050B045 1/2 IN 4 PICCV-40-033 1 1/2 IN 33
P2050B045 1/2 IN 5 PICCV-50-033 2 IN 33
P2050B050 1/2 IN 5 PICCV-50-035 2 IN 35
P2050B055 1/2 IN 5.5 PICCV-50-036 2 IN 36
P2075B060 3/4 IN 6 PICCV-50-038 2 IN 38
P2075B065 3/4 IN 6.5 PICCV-50-039 2 IN 39
P2075B070 3/4 IN 7 PICCV-50-044 2 IN 44
P2075B075 3/4 IN 7.5 PICCV-50-048 2 IN 48
P2075B080 3/4 IN 8 PICCV-50-056 2 IN 56
P2075B085 3/4 IN 8.5 PICCV-50-060 2 IN 60
P2075B090 3/4 IN 9 PICCV-50-070 2 IN 70
P2075B095 3/4 IN 9.5 PICCV-50-075 2 IN 75
P2075B100 3/4 IN 10 PICCV-50-090 2 IN 90
PICCV-25-011 1 IN 11 PICCV-50-100 2 IN 100
PICCV-25-012 1 IN 12
To order valve and actuator assembly, append the valve
number and the actuator number with a “+” sign.
Example: P2050B005+LRB24-3 1/2", 0.5 GPM valve with a
45 in-lb actuator with on/off/floating control
PICCV-25-013 1 IN 13
PICCV-25-014 1 IN 14
PICCV-25-015 1 IN 15
PICCV-25-016 1 IN 16
PICCV-25-017 1 IN 17
PICCV-25-018 1 IN 18
Note: Other actuators available from Belimo. Ask your Kele sales representative.
PRESSURE INDEPENDENT CONTROL VALVES
PICCV SERIES

187. 155CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION, SPRING RETURN
PRESSURE INDEPENDENT CONTROL VALVES
PICCV SERIES
ACTUATOR SELECTION, PROPORTIONAL/MFT
TFRX24-MFT = 1/2" only, 22 in-lb (3 Nm)
LF24-MFT = 1/2" to 1", 44 in-lb (5 Nm)
AFRX24-MFT = 1-1/4" to 2", 180 in-lb (20 Nm)
VALVE BODY SELECTION
Model Inches GPM Model Inches GPM
P2050B005 1/2 IN 0.5 PICCV-40-026 1-1/2 IN 26
P2050B010 1/2 IN 1 PICCV-40-027 1-1/2 IN 27
P2050B015 1/2 IN 1.5 PICCV-40-028 1-1/2 IN 28
P2050B020 1/2 IN 2 PICCV-40-029 1-1/2 IN 29
P2050B025 1/2 IN 2.5 PICCV-40-030 1-1/2 IN 30
P2050B030 1/2 IN 3 PICCV-40-031 1-1/2 IN 31
P2050B035 1/2 IN 3.5 PICCV-40-032 1-1/2 IN 32
P2050B040 1/2 IN 4 PICCV-40-033 1-1/2 IN 33
P2050B045 1/2 IN 4.5 PICCV-50-033 2 IN 33
P2050B050 1/2 IN 5 PICCV-50-034 2 IN 34
P2050B055 1/2 IN 5.5 PICCV-50-035 2 IN 35
P2075B060 3/4 IN 6 PICCV-50-036 2 IN 36
P2075B065 3/4 IN 6.5 PICCV-50-037 2 IN 37
P2075B070 3/4 IN 7 PICCV-50-038 2 IN 38
P2075B075 3/4 IN 7.5 PICCV-50-039 2 IN 39
P2075B080 3/4 IN 8 PICCV-50-040 2 IN 40
P2075B085 3/4 IN 8.5 PICCV-50-044 2 IN 44
P2075B090 3/4 IN 9 PICCV-50-048 2 IN 48
P2075B095 3/4 IN 9.5 PICCV-50-052 2 IN 52
P2075B100 3/4 IN 10 PICCV-50-056 2 IN 56
PICCV-25-011 1 IN 11 PICCV-50-060 2 IN 60
PICCV-25-012 1 IN 12 PICCV-50-065 2 IN 65
PICCV-25-013 1 IN, 13 PICCV-50-070 2 IN 70
PICCV-25-014 1 IN 14 PICCV-50-075 2 IN 75
PICCV-25-015 1 IN 15 PICCV-50-080 2 IN 80
PICCV-25-016 1 IN 16 PICCV-50-090 2 IN 90
PICCV-25-017 1 IN 17 PICCV-50-100 2 IN 100
PICCV-25-018 1 IN 18
To order valve and actuator assembly, append the valve
number and the actuator number with a “+” sign.
Example: P2050B005+LF24-MFT 1/2", 0.5 GPM valve with
a 44 in-lb spring return actuator with
proportional control
PICCV-25-019 1 IN 19
PICCV-32-018 1-1/4 IN 18
PICCV-32-019 1-1/4 IN 19
PICCV-32-020 1-1/4 IN 20
PICCV-32-021 1-1/4 IN 21
PICCV-32-022 1-1/4 IN 22
PICCV-32-023 1-1/4 IN 23
PICCV-32-024 1-1/4 IN 24
PICCV-32-025 1-1/4 IN 25
PICCV-32-026 1-1/4 IN 26
Note: Other actuators available from Belimo. Ask your Kele sales representative.

188. CONTROL VALVES 156CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Size 1/2" to 2" FNPT
Cv Range 0.73 to 46.8
Stroke 3/4"
Body Pattern Two-way (stem up to open), three-
way mixing (stem up to open B-AB)
Flow Characteristic Two-way V5011N1xxx: equal
percentage;
Two-way V5011N2xxx: linear;
Three-way: ports A-AB equal
percentage, ports B-AB linear
Rangeability 50:1 per VDI/VDE 2173
Leakage Rating ANSI Class III, 0.05% of Cv
Life Expectancy 250,000 full cycles at maximum rated
temperature
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
Actuator dependant, see Selection
Char
t; maximum differential pressure
for quiet service 20 psid
Pressure Drop
Maximum water differential pressure
for quiet service 20 psid (138 kPa).
Maximum Pressure Rating
Water: 217 psi (1497 kPa) from 36°
to 248°F (2° to 120°C), 185 psi
(1277 kPa) from 248° to 337°F
(120° to 169°C);
Steam: 100 psi (690 kPa) at 337°F
(169°C), using stainless trim valve (V5011N2xxx)
Pressure Rating
ANSI 150
Materials Of Construction
Red brass body, stainless steel stem,
metal-to-metal brass/stainless plug and seat, spring-loaded carbon-fiber reinforced Teflon® V-ring packing
Media Compatibility
Hot or chilled water, <50% glycol,
steam (use V5011N2xxx for steam above 15 psig (103 kPa) to 100 psig (690 kPa))
Media Temperature Range

Brass trim: 36° to 248°F
(2° to 120°C), 15 psig (103 kPa)
steam;
Stainless trim: 36° to 340°F
(2° to 177°C), 100 psig (690 kPa)
steam
Action Stem up to open (2-way), stem up to
open B-AB, close A-AB (3-way)
Compatible Actuators Electric rotary Kele KA/KAS Series
or Honeywell MN/MS Series with appropriate Q5020 Linkage, or direct- mount ML Series shown on following pages
. For pneumatic actuation see
MP953 Series in PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS catalog section
.
Actuator Mounting U-bolt or set screws to fit 1-3/8" valve
yoke diameter, 3/4" stroke length
Operating Temperature Actuator dependant, refer to
appropriate ACTUATORS & DAMPERS section or ML Series
(on following pages) for specifications
Approvals Actuator dependant, refer to
appropriate ACTUATORS & DAMPERS section or ML Series
(on following pages) for specifications
Warranty 1 year on valves, 5 years on rotary
actuators, 1 year on direct-mount actuators
DESCRIPTION
The V5011 Series is a two-way threaded globe valve used for
control of water or steam. The V5013 Series is a three-way
threaded globe valve used for mixing control of water. The
valves can be ordered assembled with actuators for spring return or non-spring return operation, or the valve, linkage, and actuator may be ordered separately for field assembly
.
FEATURES
• Two- and three-way body patterns from 1/2" to 2"
• Two-way equal percentage characteristics
• Three-way linear characteristics
• Floating, two-position, or proportional control
actuators
• ANSI 150 body class
• Compatible with MP953 pneumatic actuators
SPECIFICATIONS
V5013N1097/
KA-175-P
THREADED GLOBE VALVES
V5011, V5013 SERIES

189. flfi 157CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
THREADED GLOBE VALVES
V5011, V5013 SERIES
C
12"
B
Valve bonnet
*Q5020
*Linkage
A
3-way port B
3-way port A
2-way port A
3-way port A/B
2-way port B
VALVE ANSI CLASS 150
SIZE Dimensions in (cm)
A B C
1/2" 3.3 (8.38) 1.6 (3.95) 2.6 (6.65)
3/4" 3.3 (8.38) 1.6 (3.95) 2.2 (6.50)
1" 4.1 (10.42) 1.6 (3.95) 2.6 (6.65)
1-1/4" 4.2 (10.67) 1.6 (3.95) 2.9 (7.25)
1-1/2" 4.7 (11.94) 1.8 (4.65) 3.0 (7.70)
2" 5.3 (13.46) 1.8 (4.65) 3.3 (8.35)
V501x Two-way and Three-way
in
(cm)
* Allow approximately 12" (30.5 cm) clearance above
the valve bonnet for installation and service of the
actuator and linkage.
DIMENSIONS
VALVE AND ACTUATOR SELECTION / ORDERING INFORMATION
GLOBE VALVE NON-SPRING RETURN * SPRING RETURN*
Body Size Cv Water and High- Floating Proportional Close- Two-
Proportional Close-
Type 15# Steam Pressure Two- off position or Floating off
Model Steam Model position (psid) (psid)
Two- 1/2" 0 .73 V5011N1008 V5011N2006
KA-44-2T KA-44-M 230 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 207
way 1/2" 1 .16 V5011N1016 V5011N2014
KA-44-2T KA-44-M 230 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 207
NPT 1/2" 1 .85 V5011N1024 V5011N2022
KA-44-2T KA-44-M 230 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 207
1/2" 2 .9 V5011N1032 V5011N2030
KA-44-2T KA-44-M 230 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 207
1/2" 4 .7 V5011N1040 V5011N2048
KA-44-2T KA-44-M 143 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 184
3/4" 7 .3 V5011N1057 V5011N2055
KA-44-2T KA-44-M 69 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 79
1" 11 .7 V5011N1065 V5011N2063 KA-44-2T KA-44-M 47 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 66
1-1/4" 18 .7 V5011N1073 V5011N2071 KA-88-2T KA-88-M 69 KAS-88-2 KAS-88-M 84
1-1/2" 29 .3 V5011N1081 V5011N2089
KA-88-2T KA-88-M 44 KAS-88-2 KAS-88-M 55
2" 46 .8 V5011N1099 V5011N2097
KA-175-2T KA-175-P 58 KAS-175-2 KAS-175-M 63
Three- 1/2" 2 .9 V5013N1030
KA-44-2T KA-44-M 230 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 207
way 1/2" 4 .7 V5013N1048
KA-44-2T KA-44-M 143 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 184
NPT 3/4" 7 .3 V5013N1055
KA-44-2T KA-44-M 69 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 79
1" 11 .7 V5013N1063 KA-44-2T KA-44-M 47 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 66
1-1/4" 18 .7 V5013N1071 KA-88-2T KA-88-M 69 KAS-88-2 KAS-88-M 84
1-1/2" 29 .3 V5013N1089
KA-88-2T KA-88-M 44 KAS-88-2 KAS-88-M 55
2" 46 .8 V5013N1097
KA-175-2T KA-175-P 58 KAS-175-2 KAS-175-M 63
Example: V5011N1008 / KA-44-2T 1/2" two-way globe valve, Cv=0 .73, with floating non-spring
return actuator, factory assembled .
* Specify normally open or normally closed when ordering an assembl y
with a KAS actuator .
For field assembly, order the Model Q5020A1003 linkage, the valv e,
and the actuator as separate line items .
* See KA and KAS Series direct-coupled actuator catalog pages for wiring and specs . Q5020A1003 linkage included with assembly .
DESCRIPTIONMODEL
VALVE SELECTION (INCLUDES Q5020A1003 LINKAGE)
Vxxxxxxxxx / Select 1/2" to 2" valve model number (from list abo ve)
ACTUATOR SELECTION*
KA_ _ _ _ KA actuator (from list abo ve)
RELATED PRODUCTS
Q5020A1003 Linkage for 1/2" to 2" valves
SSTAG Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order
SW2 Auxiliary switch kit for KA-175/301 and KAS-88/175
ACCESSORIES
0901786A Repack kit for V5011, V5013 valves with 1/4" diameter stem (1/2" to 1-1/4")

190. CONTROL VALVES 158CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Size 2-1/2" to 6", ANSI Flanges
Cv Range 72 to 370
Connections Flanges per ANSI/ISA 75.03; bolt
holes conform to ANSI B16.1
Stroke 3/4" (2-1/2" and 3" valves); 1-1/2" (4",
5" and 6" valves)
Body Pattern Two-way: stem up to open
Three-way mixing: stem up to open
B-AB
Three-way diverting: stem up to open
AB-A
Flow Characteristic Two-way: Equal percentage or linear
Three-way: Linear
Rangeability 50:1
Leakage Rating Single seat: ANSI Class III, 0.05%
Pressure balanced: ANSI Class IV,
0.01%
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
Actuator dependant, see Selection
Char
t
Maximum Pressure Rating

See Table 1
Pressure Rating ANSI Class 125 (Class 250 models
a
vailable)
Materials Of Construction

Cast iron ASTM A126 Class B (GG25) body
, stainless steel stem and trim,
spring-loaded PTFE cone ring packing
Media Compatibility Hot or chilled water, <50% glycol,
steam to 100 psig (690 kPa)
Media Temperature Range
See Table 1
Actuator Mounting U-bolt or set screws attach to valve
yoke;
2-1/2" and 3" valves: 1-3/8" yoke
diameter and 3/4" stroke length;
4", 5" and 6" valves: 1-7/8" yoke
diameter with 1-1/2" stroke length
Approvals Actuator dependant, refer to
appropriate ACTUATORS & DAMPERS section or ML Series (on following pages) for specifications
Compatible Actuators
Rotary Kele KA/KAS Series or
Honeywell MN/MS Series with appropriate Q5020/Q5022 Linkage, or direct-mount ML Series
Operating Temperature
Actuator dependant, refer to
appropriate ACTUATORS & DAMPERS section or ML Series (on following pages) for specifications
Warranty
1 year on valves, 5 years on rotary
actuators, 1 year on direct-mount actuators
DESCRIPTION
The VGF Series is a family of two- and three-way flanged
globe valves designed specifically for commercial HVAC
systems
. All models of the VGF Series have stainless steel
trim suitable for chilled water/glycol, heating water, and steam up to 100 psig
.
The v
alves are available with linear or equal percentage flow
characteristics
. They have ASME/ANSI standard dimensions
and pressure/temperature ratings, and there are models with pressure balanced trim for high close-off applications
.
The VGF Series come assembled with Kele Revolution
direct-coupled electric actuators or direct-mount Honeywell actuators, or the valves and actuators can be ordered separately
.
FEATURES
• Stainless steel trim - all models
• ANSI B16.3 pressure/temperature ratings
• ANSI 125 flanges standard, ANSI 250 special order
• Equal Percentage or linear flow characteristics
• Three-way mixing models or diverting models
• Pressure balanced models for high close off
• Available assembled with actuator or separate
• Spring or non-spring return assemblies
• Floating, two-position, or proportional control
SPECIFICATIONS
VGF31EM25/KAS-175-M
Q5022B1009/KAS-175-M
TABLE 1. MEDIA PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE RATING
System Pressure
Temperature
°F (°C)
ANSI Class 125
(VGF21, VGF31)
ANSI Class 250
(VGF22, VGF32)
35 to 130 (2-66) 175 psig (1206 kPa) 400 psig (2758 kPa)
Up to 200 (<93) 165 psig (1138 kPa) 370 psig (2251 kPa)
Up to 250 (<121) 150 psig (1034 kPa) 340 psig (2344 kPa)
Up to 300 (<149) 140 psig (965 kPa) 310 psig (2137 kPa)
Up to 356 (<180) 125 psig (862 kPa) 280 psig (1931 kPa)
NOTE: ANSI Class 250 valves are special order.
FLANGED GLOBE VALVES
VGF SERIES

191. flfi 159CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Body Type
Two-way
E = Equal %
L = Linear
Three-way mixing
Three-way diverting
Two-way pressure
balanced
Valve Model FloatingP roportional
NON-SPRING RETURN (NSR) ACTU ATORS SPRING RETURN (SR) AC TUATORS
Close Off (psd)L inkage Two-position Proportional/Floating Close off (psid)Linkage
VGF21 (E OR L) S25
VGF21 (E OR L) S30
VGF21 (E OR L) S40
VGF21 (E OR L) S50
VGF21 (E OR L) S60
VGF31EM25
VGF31EM30
VGF31EM40
VGF31EM50
VGF31EM60
VGF31LD25
VGF31LD30
VGF31LD40
VGF31LD50
VGF31LD60
VGF21 (E OR L) P25
VGF21 (E OR L) P30
VGF21 (E OR L) P40
VGF21 (E OR L) P50
VGF21 (E OR L) P60
2.5
3
4
5
6
2.5
3
4
5
6
2.5
3
4
5
6
2.5
3
4
5
6
72
120
150
320
370
70
115
150
285
365
72
120
150
320
370
70
115
150
285
365
KA-301-2T
KA-301-2T
(2 qty) KA-301-2T
(2 qty) KA-301-2T
(2 qty) KA-301-2T
KA-301-2T
KA-301-2T
(2 qty) KA-301-2T
(2 qty) KA-301-2T
(2 qty) KA-301-2T
KA-301-2T
KA-301-2T
(2 qty) KA-301-2T
(2 qty) KA-301-2T
(2 qty) KA-301-2T
ML6421A1017
ML6421A1017
ML6421B1040
ML6421B1040
ML6421B1040
ML7421A1032
ML7421A1032
ML7421B1023
ML7421B1023
ML7421B1023
Q5020B1001
Q5020B1001
Q5022B1009
Q5022B1009
Q5022B1009
Q5020B1001
Q5020B1001
Q5022B1009
Q5022B1009
Q5022B1009
Q5020B1001
Q5020B1001
Q5022B1009
Q5022B1009
Q5022B1009
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
(2 qty) KAS-175-2( 2 qty) KAS-175-M
112 Q5022A1001
Q5022A1001
Q5022B1009
Q5022B1009
Q5022B1009
Q5022A1001
Q5022A1001
Q5022B1009
Q5022B1009
Q5022B1009
Q5022A1001
Q5022A1001
Q5022B1009
Q5022B1009
Q5022B1009
Q5022A1001
Q5022A1001
Q5022B1009
Q5022B1009
Q5022B1009
KA-301-P
KA-301-P
(2 qty) KA-301-P
(2 qty) KA-301-P
(2 qty) KA-301-P
KA-301-P
KA-301-P
(2 qty) KA-301-P
(2 qty) KA-301-P
(2 qty) KA-301-P
KA-301-P
KA-301-P
(2 qty) KA-301-P
(2 qty) KA-301-P
(2 qty) KA-301-P
95
47
47
18
18
120
80
47
18
18
95
47
47
18
18
175
175
175
175
175
55
27
11
11
141
94
27
11
11
112
55
27
11
11
175
175
175
175
175
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Size Cv
FLANGED GLOBE VALVES
VGF SERIES
Two-way valves, Equal Pe rcentage or Linear, Standard or Pressure Balanced
A
B
E
Stroke Y
C
D1
Bonnet
Dotted line
represents
ANSI 125
valve body.Bonnet
1
Dotted line represents ANSI 125 valve body.
1
A
C
B
E
Stroke Y
D
1
Three-way Valve Flow Patterns
MIXING
Stem up = B AB
Stem down = A AB
A
B
AB
DIVERTING
Stem up = AB A
Stem down = AB B
A
B
AB
Stem up to open A B
Port AP ort B
Actuator Clearances
Above Bonnet
in (cm)
KA and KAS
ML 6421
ML 7421
Q5020B1001
(Requires 12" for service)
Weight 6 lb (2.7 kg)
12 (30.5)
14.25 (36.0)
14.25 (36.0)
9.5 (24.1)
VALVE
SIZE
(in)
2-1/2
3
4
5
6
A
10-7/8 (276)
11-1/2 (298)
13-7/8 (352)
15-1/2 (400)
17-1/2 (451)
B
10-7/8 (276)
11-1/2 (298)
13-7/8 (352)
15-1/2 (400)
17-1/2 (451)
C
7 (178)
7-1/2 (191)
9 (229)
10 (254)
11 (279)
D
–
–
–
–
–
E
3-1/2 (89)
3-1/2 (89)
5-1/2 (133)
5-1/2 (133)
5-1/2 (133)
Y
3/4 (20)
3/4 (20)
1-1/2 (38)
1-1/2 (38)
1-1/2 (38)
Weight
lb (kg)
42 (19.0)
53 (24.0)
73 (33.1)
120 (54.4)
166 (75.3)
Two-way Valve Dimensions, in (mm)
ANSI CLASS 125
Three-way Valves, Mixing or Diverting
VALVE
SIZE
(in)
2-1/2
3 4 5 6
A
10-7/8 (276) 11-3/4 (298) 13-7/8 (352) 15-1/2 (400) 17-1/2 (451)
B
3 (276)
4-3/16 (107)
5-1/2 (140) 5-3/8 (137)
5-11/16 (145)
C
7 (178)
7-1/2 (191)
9 (229)
10 (254) 11 (279)
D
3-1/2 (95)
4-3/8 (111) 5-1/8 (130) 5-1/2 (146) 6-5/8 (168)
E
4-3/16 (107) 4-3/16 (107)
6-11/16 (170) 6-11/16 (170) 6-11/16 (170)
Y
3/4 (20) 3/4 (20)
1-1/2 (38)
1-1/2 (38) 1-1/2 (38)
Weight
lb (kg)
42 (19.0) 53 (24.0)
73 (33.1)
120 (54.1) 166 (75.3)
Three-way Valve Dimensions, in (mm)
ANSI CLASS 125
TABLE 2. VGF SERIES FLANGED GLOBE VALVE AND ACTUATOR COMBINATIONS AND CLOSE-OFF RATINGS
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
VGF_ _ _ _ _ _ / Select valve model (from table abo ve)
KA_ _ _ _ or ML_ _ _ _ _ Select actuator model (from list above)
DESCRIPTIONMODEL
Example: VGF21ES25 / KAS-175-M is a two-way, 2-1/2" ANSI 125 flanged, Cv=63,
equal percentage valve assembled with a spri ng return , proportional/
floating actuator.
Note: V alve assemblies with KA and KAS actuators use
the Q5020B1001 linkage . If ordering va lve and
actuator separately for field assembly, order the
Q5020B1001 also.
Note: Specify normally open or normally closed when
ordering an assembly with KAS spring return
actuator.
RELATED PRODUCTS
SSTAG Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order
208638 Packing kit for all VGF Series flanged globe valves
R43176754-002 Repair kit for 2-1/2" and 3" VGF Series ANSI 125 flanged valves
R43176755-005 Repair kit for all 4" to 6" VGF Series flanged valves

192. CONTROL VALVES 160CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
GLOBE VALVES
VG7000 SERIES
Size 1/2” to 2” FNPT
Cv Range 0.73 to 46.2
Stroke 5/16” (8 mm): 1/2” and 3/4” valves
1/2” (13 mm): 1” and 1-1/4” valves
3/4” (19 mm): 1-1/2” and 2” valves
Flow Characteristic
Two-way equal percentage; three-
way linear
Rangeability 25:1 per EN 60534-2-4
Leakage Rating Brass trim: ANSI Class IV, 0.01% of
maximum flow per ANSI/FCI 70-2; stainless trim: 0
.05% of maximum
flow
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
Actuator dependant, see Ordering
Information
Pressure Drop Maximum recommended pressure
drop for water is 35 psid (241 kPa) for 1/2” to 1-1/4” valves, 30 psid for 1-1/2” and 2” valves; for steam 15 psid (103 kPa) for brass trim valves and 100 psid (690 kPa) for stainless trim valves
Maximum Pressure Rating

Brass trim with water: 400 psi (2756
kPa) up to 150°F (66°C), decreasing to 365 psi (2515 kPa) at 248°F (120°C);

Brass trim with steam: 35 psi (241
kPa) at 284°F (138°C);
Stainless trim with water: 400 psi
(2756 kPa) up to 150°F (66°C), decreasing to 308 psi (2122 kPa) at 338°F (170°C);

Stainless trim with steam: 100 psi
(241 kPa) at 338°F (170°C)
Pressure Rating ANSI B16.15, Class 250 (EN 12360)
Materials Of Construction
Cast bronze body, stainless steel
stem, brass trim models have brass plug, elastomer disc seat and rubber (EPR packing), stainless trim models have stainless plug/seat and spring- loaded PTFE/elastomer V-ring packing
Media Compatibility
Hot or chilled water; <50% glycol;
steam 35 psig (Fluid Group 1 according to 67/548/EEC)
Media Temperature Range

Water: 35° to 248°F (2° to 120°C);
Steam: maximum 338°F (170°C)
(actuator dependant), 35 psig
Actuator Mounting Threaded mounting collar
Compatible Actuators Electric VA-7000 or VA-4233 Series
shown on following pages; pneumatic see V-3000, MP800 Series in PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS catalog section
.
Operating Temperature Actuator dependent, refer to following
pages for specifications
Approvals Actuator dependent, refer to following
pages for specifications
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The VG7000 Series Valves are designed for hot water, chilled water, or steam control in HVAC systems
. The globe design
exhibits excellent control with two-way equal percentage and three-way linear response
. The valves come in two- or
three-way NPT thread configurations. All the valves can be
fitted with many different control actuators (both electric and pneumatic) and with a variety of control signals, spring ranges, and failsafe operation
.
FEATURES
• Wide actuator selection, electric and pneumatic
• Corrosion protection with brass and optional SS trim
• Equal percentage and linear characteristics
• Longevity with over one million cycles tested
• Serviceability with in-place valve repacking
SPECIFICATIONS
VG7241CT VG7842CT

193. flfi 161CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
VG7 Globe valve NPT thread
CODE Configuration code for brass trim (Order codes 243, 443, 844 for stainless steel trim respectively)
241 Two-way N.O. (stem down = closed)
441 Two-way N.C. (stem down = open)
842 Three-way mixing
VALVE FLOW CLOSEOFF FOR ELECTRIC ACTUATORS (psid)
CODE SIZE (FNPT) Cv 715x 720x 423x 926x
CT 1/2" 0.73 345 N/A 345 N/A
ET 1/2" 1.8 345 N/A 345 N/A
GT 1/2" 4.6 216 N/A 208 N/A
LT 3/4" 7.3 138 N/A 132 N/A
NT 1" 11.6 86 N/A 63 N/A
PT 1-1/4" 18.5 52 N/A 38 111
RT 1-1/2" 28.9 N/A 70 N/A 71
ST 2" 46.2 N/A 45 N/A 46
ASSEMBL Y CODE VALVE SIZE AND PNEUMATIC ACTU ATOR*
3008B 1/2" - 1", 3-6 psig, V-3000-8011 (with VG7000-100(1,4) spring kit)
3008D 1/2" - 1", 4-8 psig, V-3000-8011 (with VG7000-100(2,5) spring kit)
3008E 1/2" - 1", 9-13 psig, V-3000-8011 (with VG7000-100(3,6) spring kit)
821C 1/2" - 3/4", 3-7 psig, MP821C001 (SS trim only)
821D 1/2" - 3/4", 4-8 psig, MP821D001 (SS trim only)
821E 1/2" - 3/4", 9-13 psig, MP821E001 (SS trim only)
822C 1" - 1-1/4", 3-7 psig, MP822C001
822D 1" - 1-1/4", 4-8 psig, MP822D001
822E 1" - 1-1/4", 9-13 psig, MP822E001
823C 1-1/2" - 2", 3-7 psig, MP823C001
823D 1-1/2" - 2", 4-8 psig, MP823D001
823E 1-1/2" - 2", 9-13 psig, MP823E001
P Pilot positioner installed for any of the above
*See V-3000/MP8000 catalog page for specs and close off ratings
ASSEMBLY CODE VALVE SIZE AND ELECTRIC NON-SPRING RETURN **
7150G 1/2" - 1 1/4" VA-7150-1001, floating
7152G 1/2" - 1 1/4" VA-7152-1001, 0-10 VDC control
7200G 1-1/2" - 2" VA-7200-1001, floating
7202G 1-1/2" - 2" VA-7202-1001, 0-10 VDC / 0-20 mA control
**See VA-7000 catalog page for wiring and specs
ASSEMBLY CODE VALVE SIZE AND ELECTRIC SPRING RETURN ***
423A 1/2" - 1-1/4" VA-4233-AGA-2, floating
423B 1/2" - 1-1/4" VA-4233-BGA-2, two-position
423G 1/2" - 1-1/4" VA-4233-GGA-2, 0-10 VDC proportional
72CHGA 1-1/4" - 2" VA-7820HGA-2 Two-position or floating,
0-10 VDC proportional, spring up

74CHGA 1-1/4'' - 2'' VA-7830HGA-2 Two-position or floating, 0-10 VDC proportional, spri ng down
***See VA-4233 catalog page for wiring and specs
VG7241 CT 3008E P
Example: VG7241CT/3008EP 1/2" two-way N.O. 9-13 psig pneumatic valve
with positioner
RELATED PRODUCTS
SSTAG Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order
V
G7000-6001
0.5" to 0.75" packing kit
V
G7000-6002
1" to 2" packing kit
GLOBE VALVES
VG7000 SERIES
1/2 (DN15)
3/4 (DN20)
1 (DN25)
1-1/4 (DN32)
1-1/2 (DN40)
2 (DN50)
(Two-way valve)
Three-way valve
Actuator
mounting collar
in
(cm)
(N.O.)
N.C.
NO
A
B
D
(C)
C
Stem up
VALVE SIZE
in (DN)*
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
* DN is the European designation for the body size in metric units “cm.”
3 (7.6)
3-7/32 (8.1)
4-1/8 (10.4)
4-23/32 (11.9)
5-1/8 (13.0)
5-29/32 (15.0)
2.2 (1.0)
3.3 (1.5)
5.3 (2.4)
5.3 (2.4)
10.9 (5.0)
16.0 (7.3)
A
FACE TO FACE
ALL VALVES
D
ACTUATOR COLLAR
ALL VALVES
13/16 (2.1)
15/16 (2.4)
1-5/32 (2.9)
1-11/32 (3.4)
2-5/32 (5.5)
2-1/8 (5.3)
B
LOWER VALVE
Two-way Three-way
1-13/16(4.6) 2-1/8 (5.4) 2-9/19 (6.5) 2-25/32 (7.0) 3-3/8 (8.5) 3-3/4 (9.5)
1-3/4 (4.4) 1-3/4 (4.4) 2-11/16 (6.8) 2-13/16 (7.1) 3-7/16 (8.7) 3-3/4 (9.5)
DIMENSIONS
DIMENSIONS

194. CONTROL VALVES 162CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MVN BALL VALVE ACTUATORS
MVN SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MVN 3Nm (27 lb-in) Control Valve Actuator is used
with the VBN2 two-way and the VBN3 three-way control ball
valves to control hot and chilled water with glycol solutions
up to 50% in heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC)
systems to provide two-position or modulating functions
.
FEATURES
• Non-spring Return
• Floating and modulating
• Space saving, click-on installation – no tool required
• Extendable position indicator for easy commissioning
• Available with or without cable
• Compatible with control ball valves from 1/2 to 1-1/4
inches.
• Actuator can be mounted on the valve in any of four positions.
Actuator Type Valve
Rotational Stroke 90° ±3°
Fail Safe Mode Non-spring return, Fail in place
Torque 27 lb-in. (3 Nm).
External Auxiliary Switches Available
No
Supply Voltage 24 VAC +20%, -15%, 24 VDC
Power Consumption 5 VA- Modulating; 1.5 VA - Floating;
6 VA - Fast Acting SPDT
Environmental Rating NEMA2
Frequency 50 Hz; 60 Hz
Mounting Click-on installation – no tool
required
Noise Rating at 1m (Maximum)
35 dB(A) max at 1 m [50 dB(A) for
MVN643]
Materials Plenum rated plastic housing
Operating Humidity Range (% RH)
5 to 95% RH, noncondensing
Ambient Temperature Range
-4° to 131°F (-20° to 55°C)
Storage Temperature Range
-40° to 176°F (-40° to 80°C)
Timing 90 sec. for MVN613 and MVN713;
30 sec. for MVN643
Electrical Connections Field wiring 18 to 20 AWG to
screw terminals, located under the removable access cover
Humidity Ratings:
5% to 95% RH noncondensing
Design Life (at Rated Voltage)
60,000 cycles; 1 cycle = 0°…90°…0°
Cable Specification 18 AWG, Plenum Rated, 300 V, 10 A,
3 ft. length from end of access cover
Dimensions:
Standard base units 2-13/16"W x 3-7/8"H x 4-9/16"D
(7.1 x 9.8 x 11.6 cm)
Low Profile base units
2-13/16"W x 3-1/2"H x 4-9/16"D
(7.1 x 8.2 x 11.6 cm)
Weight 1.4 lb (0.64 kg)
Environmental Protection Ratings
IP40
Approvals UL/cUL; UL60730
SPECIFICATIONS
MVN643L
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MVN613A0000 Floating control ball valve actuator
MVN613L0000 Floating control ball valve actuator
MVN643A0000 Fast acting SPDT contol ball valve actuator
MVN643L0000 Fast acting SPDT contol ball valve actuator
MVN713A0000 Modulating control ball valve actuator
MVN713L0000 Modulating control ball valve actuator

195. flfi 163CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
MVN613 or MVN643 with Floating Control
FLOATING ACTUATOR
24 VAC
1POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
USE CLASS II 24V TRANSFORMER FOR MVN643.
FLOATING
CONTROLLER
2 34
1
BLACK
WHITE
BROWN
2
2
MVN613 or MVN643 with 2-Position Control
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
USE CLASS II 24V TRANSFORMER FOR MVN643.2
FLOATING ACTUATOR
24 VAC
1
FLOATING
CONTROLLER
2 3 4
1
BLACK
WHITE
BROWN
2
MVN643 with Two Position SPST Control
FLOATING ACTUATOR
1POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
USE CLASS II 24V TRANSFORMER.
2 34
1
24 VAC
BLACK
BROWN
WHITE
SPST
2
2
MVN713 with 4-20mA Control
PROPORTIONAL ACTUATOR
1POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
USE CLASS II 24V TRANSFORMER.
4-20mA
CONTROLLER
1 2 3
+
+
–
DIP SWITCH POSITION
1 2 MODE
OFF OFF 2-10V
OFF ON 0-10V
ON OFF 10-2V
ON ON 10-0V
PROPORTIONAL/MODULATING: 4-20mA CONTROLLER OUTPUT WITH 500Ω SERIES RESISTOR
TO OTHER ACTUATORS
500 OHMS,
1/2 W
MINIMUM
24 VAC
2
RED
BLACK
WHITE
1
2
MVN713 with 0 (2)-10 VDC Control
PROPORTIONAL ACTUATOR
24 VAC
1POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
24 VDC SUPPLY ACCEPTABLE.
0 (2)-10 VDC
CONTROLLER
1 2 3
+
+
–
DIP SWITCH POSITION
1 2 MODE
OFF OFF 2-10V
OFF ON 0-10V
ON OFF 10-2V
ON ON 10-0V
PROPORTIONAL/MODULATING: 0(2)...10 VDC OR 10...0(2) VDC CONTROLLER OUTPUT
2
RED
BLACK
WHITE
2
1
WIRING
MVN BALL VALVE ACTUATORS
MVN SERIES

196. CONTROL VALVES 164CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Life Expectancy 50,000 full stroke cycles or 1,000,000
repositions (ML6984, ML7984)
Input Impedance 100 kΩ for 2-10 VDC input, 500Ω for
4-20 mA input (ML74xx); 20 kΩ for
2-10 VDC input, 237Ω for 4-20 mA
input (ML7984)
Noise
55 dBA @ 3.3' (1m) for ML6984,
ML7984 only, others not rated
Spring Return Time 12 seconds, for ML6425, ML7425
only
Manual Override Yes, on ML6420, ML7420, ML6421,
ML7421 only
Operating Temperature 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C) for
ML64xx, ML74xx;
32° to 132°F (0° to 55°C) for
ML6984, ML7984
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH non-condensing for
ML64xx, ML74xx;
15% to 95% RH non-condensing for
ML6984, ML7984
Approvals UL Listed, CE
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The ML6420, ML6421, ML6984, ML7420, ML7421, and ML7984 are direct-mount, electric, non-spring return actuators designed for use on Honeywell V5011N/13N and VGF Series globe valves
.
The
ML6425 and ML7425 are direct-mount, electric spring
return
. The actuators can be ordered pre-assembled with a
valve, or they may be easily installed in the field; separate linkages are not required
.
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
ML7421,
ML6421 ML7420,
ML6420
ML7425,
ML6425
ML7984,
ML6984
Non-spring return (NSR) actuator Spring return (SR) actuator
Size Two-way valve Three-way valve Floating Proport ional Closeoff psid Floating Proportional Closeoff psid
1/2" V5011N1008 - N1040 V5013N1030, N1048 ML6984, ML6420 ML7984, ML7420 273, 230 ML6425 ML7425 230
3/4" V5011N1057 V5013N1055 ML6984, ML6420 ML7984, ML7420 273, 230 ML6425 ML7425 230
1" V5011N1065 V5013N1063 ML6984, ML6420 ML7984, ML7420 193, 163 ML6425 ML7425 163
1-1/4" V5011N1073 V5013N1071 ML6984, ML6420 ML7984, ML7420 123, 104 ML6425 ML7425 104
1-1/2" V5011N1081 V5013N1089 ML6984, ML6420 ML7984, ML7420 79, 67 ML6425 ML7425 67
2" V5011N1099 V5013N1097 ML6984, ML6420 ML7984, ML7420 44, 37 ML6425 ML7425 37
2-1/2" V GF31EM25 ML6421A ML7421A 87 ML6425 ML7425 29
3" V GF31EM30 ML6421A ML7421A 58 ML6425 ML7425 19
2-1/2" VGF21ES25, LS25 VGF31LD25 ML6421A ML7421A 69 ML6425 ML7425 23
3" VGF21ES30, LS30 VGF31LD30 ML6421A ML7421A 34 ML6425 ML7425 11
4" VGF21ES40, LS40 VGF31LD40, EM40 ML6421B ML7421B 34 N/A N/A N/A
5" VGF21ES50, LS50 VGF31LD50, EM50 ML6421B ML7421B 13 N/A N/A N/A
6" VGF21ES60, LS60 VGF31LD60, EM60 ML6421B ML7421B 13 N/A N/A N/A
2-1/2" VGF21EP25 ML6421A ML7421A 175 N/A N/A N/A
3" VGF21EP30 ML6421A ML7421A 175 N/A N/A N/A
4" VGF21EP40 ML6421B ML7421B 175 N/A N/A N/A
5" VGF21EP50 ML6421B ML7421B 175 N/A N/A N/A
6" VGF21EP60 ML6421B ML7421B 175 N/A N/A N/A
DIRECT-MOUNT ACTUATOR SELECTION CHART / CLOSE-OFF RATINGS
DIRECT-MOUNT GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS
ML SERIES

197. flfi 165CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
DIRECT-MOUNT GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS
ML SERIES
B Stem down
W Stem up
R
T5
T6
Floating
thermostat or DDC
ML6984
ML6984 Floating Control
1 Allow 0.5 amps maximum for each device. Actuators and controller can share the same transformer providing proper phasing is observed, except as noted.
2 “T5” and “W” terminal are connected internally. Device is compatible with the three-wire control system.
3 Use configuration DIP switches to select device functions. See installation instructions.
R
W
C
T5
T6
ML7984A
L1
L2
ML7984A VDC Proportional Control
1
2
3
+
–
24 VAC
FUNCTION DIP SWITCH CONFIGURATION
2-10 VDC direct acting
10-2 VDC reverse acting
On Off
On
Off
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
R
W
C
T5
T6
ML7984A
Current signal source
DC signal source
L1 L2
ML7984A mA Proportional Control
ML6420, ML6421 Floating Control
ML7420, ML7421 mA Proportional Control
ML6425 Floating Control
ML7425 VDC Proportional Control
1
2
3
3 3
+
–
24 VAC
FUNCTION DIP SWITCH CONFIGURATION
4-20 mA direct acting
20-4 mA reverse acting
On
Off
On
Off
1 2 3 41
1 1 2 3 4
Master actuator
Slave actuator
Master actuator
Slave actuator
ML7984A Resistance Control
FUNCTION DIP SWITCH CONFIGURATION
Mechanical
135
Ω input
On
Off
1 2 3 4
R
W
B
C T5
T6
ML7984A
135Ω
Signal source
L1
L2
1
2
3
24 VACW
R
B
FUNCTION DIP SWITCH CONFIGURATION
Direct Acting
Reverse Acting
On Off
On
Off
1 2 3 4
ML6421
T1
1 2
C
Extend
Retract
T1
W
B
C
Extend
Retract
L1 L2
24 VAC
ML6425
T1 T2
1 2
C H
Extend
Retract
Floating
controller
L1 L2
24 VAC
ML7425
F
+
-
T2 T1
O1 O2
TS
Feedback


L2
L1
Override extend
Override retract
Comm L2
Floating
controller
Internal
connection
L1
L2
24 VAC
ML7421ML7420
T1 T2
+
T1 T2
+
–
ML6420
2-10 VDC
signal
+
-
*Add a 500Ω resistor for 4-20mA signals
*
+
+
-
Feedback signal
2-10 VDC
Signal Direct/reverse action
10-2 VDC
Extends
2-10 VDC
Extends
(factory
setting)
L1
L2
24 VAC
L1 L2
24 VAC
Signal
CAUTION: Install actuator on valve before energizing.
WIRING

198. CONTROL VALVES 166CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model Force Supply Voltage
Supply
VA
Control Signal Action Stroke
Stroke
Time
ML6420A3049135 lbf (600 N)24 VAC 50/60 Hz 6 VA Two-position/floatingNSR, DA/RA by wiring3/4" (1.9 cm)60 seconds
ML7420A3055135 lbf (600 N)24 VAC 50/60 Hz 7 VA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mANSR, DA/RA by jumpers3/4" (1.9 cm)60 seconds
ML6984A4000160 lbf (710 N)24 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC12 VATwo-position/floatingNSR, DA/RA by wiring3/4" (1.9 cm)63 seconds
ML7984A4009160 lbf (710 N)24 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC12 VA
Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA,
0-135Ω
NSR, DA/RA by DIP switches
3/4" (1.9 cm)63 seconds
ML6421A1017405 lbf (1800 N)24 VAC 60 Hz 11 VATwo-position/floatingNSR, DA/RA by wiring3/4" (1.9 cm)95 seconds
ML7421A1032405 lbf (1800 N)24 VAC 60 Hz 12 VAProp. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mANSR, DA/RA by jumpers3/4" (1.9 cm)95 seconds
ML6421B1040405 lbf (1800 N)24 VAC 60 Hz 11 VATwo-position/floatingNSR, DA/RA by wiring1-1/2" (3.8 cm)175 seconds
ML7421B1023405 lbf (1800 N)24 VAC 60 Hz 12 VAProp. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mANSR, DA/RA by jumpers1-1/2" (3.8 cm)175 seconds
ML6425A3022135 lbf (600 N)24 VAC 50/60 Hz 11 VATwo-position/floating
SR stem down, DA/RA by wiring
3/4" (1.9 cm)90 seconds
ML6425B3013135 lbf (600 N)24 VAC 50/60 Hz 11 VATwo-position/floating
SR stem up, DA/RA by wiring
3/4" (1.9 cm)90 seconds
ML7425A3013135 lbf (600 N)24 VAC 50/60 Hz 12 VAProp. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
SR stem down, DA/RA by jumpers
3/4" (1.9 cm)90 seconds
ML7425B3012135 lbf (600 N)24 VAC 50/60 Hz 12 VAProp. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
SR stem up, DA/RA by jumpers
3/4" (1.9 cm)90 seconds
DIRECT-MOUNT GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS
ML SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
SSTAG Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order
KOV Series Fabric Weatherproof cover for globe actuators 206
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ML6420A3049 135 lbf, non-spring return, floating control for 1/2" to 2" valves
ML7420A3055 135 lbf, non-spring return, proportional control (2-10V, 4-20 mA) for 1/2" to 2" valves
ML6984A4000 160 lbf, non-spring return, floating control for 1/2" to 2" valves
ML7984A4009 160 lbf, non-spring return, proportional input (2-10V, 4-20 mA, 135Ω) for 1/2" to 2" valves
ML6421A1017 405 lbf, non-spring return, floating control for 2-1/2" to 3" valves
ML6421B1040 405 lbf, non-spring return, floating control for 4" to 6" valves
ML7421A1032 405 lbf, non-spring return, proportional control (2-10V, 4-20 mA) for 2-1/2" to 3" valves
ML7421B1023 405 lbf, non-spring return, proportional control (2-10V, 4-20 mA) for 4" to 6" valves
ML6425A3022 135 lbf, spring return stem down, floating control for 1/2" to 3" valves
ML6425B3013 135 lbf, spring return stem up, floating control for 1/2" to 3" valves
ML7425A3013 135 lbf, spring return stem down, proportional (2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA) for 1/2" to 3" valves
ML7425B3012 135 lbf, spring return stem up, proportional (2-10V, 4-20 mA) for 1/2" to 3" valves

199. flfi 167CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
Actuator Control Type Floating point, On-Off, 2-10 VDC
multi-function technology (MFT)
Actuator Manual Override
All models except LF
Actuator Electrical Connection
3' (1mm) cable with 1/2" conduit
fitting standard
Connections NPT female ends
Flow Characteristic
G2 Equal percentage
G2S, G3, G3D Linear
Maximum Inlet Pressure
241 kPa
Maximum Pressure Rating
250 psi
Media Compatibility Chilled or Hot Water, 60% Glycol,
Steam (G2, G2S)
Pipe Size Range 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/4", 1-1/2", 2"
Maximum Differential Pressure
Water 35 psi (241 kPa)
Steam 20 psi (138 kPa) to 35 psi (241 kPa)
Warranty 5 years
Weight Varies per valve
DESCRIPTION
The G2 Series 2-way and G3 Series 3-way globe valves
can be used for two-position, floating or proportional control
of HVAC hot water, chilled water or steam
. The valves come
assembled with Belimo electric actuators with spring return or non-spring return operation and are ideal for controlling unit ventilators, air handling units and a wide variety of HVAC heating and cooling systems
.
FEATURES
• Full line of spring and non-spring actuators for all
applications
• 2-position, floating and modulating control signals for
all control sequences
• Self-adjusting stroke
• Visual sliding stroke indicators; position indicators
adjusted automatically
• Assembly can be mounted with valve stem horizontal
to the pipe
• Self locking valve coupling
BENEFITS
•
Utiliz •
Speeds installation and system check
• Piping flexibility
• Proper valve-actuator connection is ensured
SPECIFICATIONS
G2-SVK
G3-LV
THREADED GLOBE VALVES
G2, G3 SERIES

200. CONTROL VALVES 168CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
THREADED GLOBE VALVES
G2, G3 SERIES
G2 SERIES FLOW PATTERNS & DIMENSIONS G3 SERIES FLOW PATTERNS & DIMENSIONS

201. flfi 169CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
THREADED GLOBE VALVES
G2, G3 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
VALVE SPECIFICATION NON-SPRING RETURN SPRING RETURN (N.O. / CCW) ELECTRONIC FAIL SAFE
Port Valve # Cv Size Two-pos/
Tri-state
Proportional Two-Pos Tri-state Proportional Two-pos/
Tri-state
Proportional
Two-way G212 0.4 1/2” LVB24-3 LVB24-SR LF-24 LF24-3 LF24-SR LVKB24-3 LVKB24-SR
Two-way G213 1.3 1/2” LVB24-3 LVB24-SR LF-24 LF24-3 LF24-SR LVKB24-3 LVKB24-SR
Two-way G214 2.2 1/2” LVB24-3 LVB24-SR LF-24 LF24-3 LF24-SR LVKB24-3 LVKB24-SR
Two-way G215 4.4 1/2” LVB24-3 LVB24-SR LF-24 LF24-3 LF24-SR LVKB24-3 LVKB24-SR
Two-way G219 5.5 3/4” LVB24-3 LVB24-SR LF-24 LF24-3 LF24-SR LVKB24-3 LVKB24-SR
Two-way G220 7.5 3/4” LVB24-3 LVB24-SR LF-24 LF24-3 LF24-SR LVKB24-3 LVKB24-SR
Two-way G224 10 1” SVB24-3 SVB24-SR NFBUP-X1 NFB24-SR-X1 SVKB24-3 SVKB24-SR
Two-way G225 14 1” SVB24-3 SVB24-SR NFBUP-X1 NFB24-SR-X1 SVKB24-3 SVKB24-SR
Two-way G232 20 1-1/4” SVB24-3 SVB24-SR NFBUP-X1 NFB24-SR-X1 SVKB24-3 SVKB24-SR
Two-way G240 28 1-1/2” SVB24-3 SVB24-SR AFBUP-X1 AFB24-SR-X1 SVKB24-3 SVKB24-SR
Two-way G250 40 2” SVB24-3 SVB24-SR AFBUP-X1 AFB24-SR-X1 SVKB24-3 SVKB24-SR
Three-way G314 2.2 1/2” LVB24-3 LVB24-SR LF-24 LF24-3 LF24-SR LVKB24-3 LVKB24-SR
Three-way G315 4.4 1/2” LVB24-3 LVB24-SR LF-24 LF24-3 LF24-SR LVKB24-4 LVKB24-SR
Three-way G320 7.5 3/4” LVB24-3 LVB24-SR LF-24 LF24-3 LF24-SR LVKB24-5 LVKB24-SR
Three-way G325 14 1” SVB24-3 SVB24-SR NFBUP-X1 NFB24-SR-X1 SVKB24-3 SVKB24-SR
Three-way G332 20 1-1/4” SVB24-3 SVB24-SR NFBUP-X1 NFB24-SR-X1 SVKB24-3 SVKB24-SR
Three-way G340 28 1-1/2” SVB24-3 SVB24-SR AFBUP-X1 AFB24-SR-X1 SVKB24-3 SVKB24-SR
Three-way G350 41 2” SVB24-3 SVB24-SR AFBUP-X1 AFB24-SR-X1 SVKB24-3 SVKB24-SR
MODEL DESCRIPTION
G_ _ _ _ /Globe valve with specifications listed above
- - - - -
Compatible actuator (select from above)
(other options for the actuator family are also available)
Note:
Standard globe valve construction is a bronze body and seat with a stainless steel stem and brass plug. Stainless steel
seat and plug is a
vailable as an option on the two-way valves only
. Add “S” to the end of the valve body number.
Note: Standard three-way valve is mixing valve. For diverting valve add “D” to the end of the valve body number.
Note: Multi-function Technology
® (MFT) model actuators are also available
. Add - MFT to the base model number of the actuator
and specify the control signal configuration or the Belimo P-code for a pre-set MFT configuration (not required if to be field
configured, or if the default configuration of 2-10 VDC is required)
ACCESSORIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
S1A Auxiliary switch, 1- single pole double throw
S2A Auxiliary switch, 2- single pole double throw
ZS-SPGV-20 Weather shield for single NF or AF actuators on G2 or G3 series valves
ZS-SPGV-60 Weather shield for LF actuators on G2 or G3 series valves

202. CONTROL VALVES 170CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
Connections 3' (0.9 m) 18GA plenum rated cable
Life Expectancy 100,000+ cycles
Materials of Construction Plastic, aluminum, steel
Color Orange actuator
Fail Safe 35 seconds (not on all models), 35 sec
Supply Voltage
UGVL+LVB24-3 24 VAC
UGVL+LVX120-3 120 VAC
Control Signal
UGVL+LVB24-3 Floating, on-off
UGVL+LVB24-SR Proportional
UGVL+LVX24-MFT MFT
Noise (Actuator Type)
SV Series 55 dB
LV Series 45 dB
EV/RV Series 65 dB
Conduit Connection 1/2" conduit fitting appliance cable
Feedback Dependent on model
Auxiliary Switch Add-on, @SPDT, 3A @ 250V,
Force (Actuator Type)
LV Series 112 foot lbs (lbf)
SV Series 337 foot lbs (lbf)
AVK Series 450 foot lbs (lbf)
EVB Series 562 foot lbs (lbf)
RVB Series 1011 foot lbs (lbf)
Compatible Actuators Actuator included in part number
Actuator Mounting Included in part number
Drive Time 90 sec (variable on MFT)
Operating Temperature -22° to 122°F (-30° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 5-95% non-condensating
Enclosure Rating NEMA 2 / IP54, UL enclosure type 2
Approvals cULus, UL 60730-1A/-2, -14, CAN/CSA
E60730-1:02, CE 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC
Warranty
5 years
DESCRIPTION
Belimo New Generation Linear Globe Valve Actuators and Retrofit
Linkages offer greater power and flexibility. Engineered to suit a broad
r
ange of HVAC applications, both the New Generation Actuators and
Retrofit Linkages are highly adaptable making selection, installation, and long-term service worry-free. New force ranges is from 112 lbf
[500N] to 1011 lbf [4500N] and there is a broader travel range from 0
.6" (15 mm) to 2" (50 mm). With a universal format, these retrofit
linkages and actuators will fit most globe valves on the market today.
FEATURES
• Increased force ranges for higher close-off pressures
• Field selectable fail-safe actuator positions
• Lower power consumption during operation
• Cast Aluminum linkage
• Locking coupler feature to prevent slipping
• Centering device on linkage to assure proper alignment
• Manual override capability
SPECIFICATIONS
UGVL-SVK
UGVL-LV
RETROFIT LINKAGE REPLACEMENT PRODUCT RANGE
Original Valve Manufacturer Valve Body Model Numbers Belimo Linkage Type
Honeywell
V5011 Series
UGVL
V5011N Series
V5013 Series
V5013N Series
Johnson Controls
V(B)-3754 Series, Bronze Trim
V(B)-3974 Series, Bronze Trim
V(B)-4324 Series, Bronze Trim
V(B)-5844 Series
V-4332
VG7000 Series
Siemens, Landis, Powers
591 Series
599 Series
656 Series
Robertshaw
V6600
V6700
V6800
Siebe (Belimo), Invensys, Barber Coleman
Belimo USA G2 series
SGVL
Belimo USA G2…S series
Belimo USA G3 series
VB7000 series
VB9000 series
Warren Controls
Type 20
WGVL
Type 22
Type 30
Type 32
UNIVERSAL RETROFIT LINKAGE/ACTUATOR KITS
UGVL, SGVL, WGVL RETROFIT SERIES

203. flfi 171CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
UNIVERSAL RETROFIT LINKAGE/ACTUATOR KITS
UGVL, SGVL, WGVL RETROFIT SERIES
C
A
B
H
1
B
H
2
New UGVL with LV , SV
New WGVL with AV , EV and RV
Dimensions - in (cm)
New SGVL with LV , SV
C
A
B
B
C
D
A
UGVL
SGVL
WGVL
A
8
(20.3)
6.7
(17)
10.4
(26.4)
B
4.4
(11.2)
3.9
(9.9)
5.5
(14)
C
9.6
(24.4)
8.2
(20.8)
10.3
(26.2)
D
—
—
10.9
(27.7)
H1
8.4
(21.3)
—
—
H2
12.1
(30.7)
—
—
DIMENSIONS / COMPARISON

204. CONTROL VALVES 172CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL RETROFIT LINKAGE/ACTUATOR KITS
UGVL, SGVL, WGVL RETROFIT SERIES
Example: UGVL+LVB24-3
Universal retrofit globe valve linkage, floating, on-off signal, 24V, NSR
MODEL DESCRIPTION
GLOBE VALVE LINKAGE
ACTUATOR
ACTUATOR
CONTROL TYPE
U GVL+ LVB 24 -3
U
S
W
24
120
-3
-MFT
-SR
GVL+
LVB
LVX
SVX
SVB
EVB
RVB
LVKX
LVKB
SVKX
SVKB
AVKB
Universal Retrofit
Schneider Valve Retrofit
Warren Valve Retrofit
Floating/On-off
Multifunction technology, proportional, default 2-10 VDC
Proportional
24 VAC/VDC
120 VAC-230 VAC
Non-spring return for 1/2" thru 3/4" valve
Non-spring return for 1/2" thru 3/4" valve (used with 120 VAC or MFT options only)
Non-spring return for 1" thru 2" valve
Non-spring return for 1" thru 2" valve (used with SR option only)
Non-spring return for 2-1/2" thru 6" valve (used with Warren valves only)
Non-spring return for 2-1/2" thru 6" valve (used with Warren valves only)
Electronic fail-safe for 1/2" thru 3/4" valve
Electronic fail-safe for 1/2" thru 3/4" valve (used with SR option only)
Electronic fail-safe for 1" thru 2" valve
Electronic fail-safe for 1" thru 2" valve (used with SR option only)
Electronic fail-safe for 2-1/2" thru 6" valve (used with Warren valves only)
Retrofit Globe Valve Linkage
NOTE: All functions and options are not av ailable with all versions.
RELATED PRODUCTS
S2A-GV Aux-Switch

205. flfi 173CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
FLANGED GLOBE VALVES
VG2000 SERIES
Service* Hot water, chilled water, 50%
glycol solutions, or steam for HVAC
systems
Valve Stroke
2-1/2" and 3" Valves 3/4" (19 mm)
3" and 4" Valves 1-1/8" (29 mm)
5" Valves 1-3/8" (35 mm)
6" Valves 1-1/2" (38 mm)
Valve Body Rating Meets requirements of ASME B16.1,
Class 125.
Valve Assembly Steam 35 psig (241 kPa) at 281°F
(138°C)
Maximum Allowable Water 175 psig (1,206 kPa) up to
150°F (66°C)
Pressure/Temperature Decreasing to 125 psig (861 kPa) at
281°F (138°C)
Leakage 0.1% of maximum flow
Inherent Flow Characteristics
Modified linear
Rangeability**
2-1/2" Valves 6.5:1
3" Valves 7.7:1
4" Valves 9.3:1
5" Valves 10.7:1
6" Valves 10.4:1
Spring Ranges (MP8000 Series Actuators)
3 to 7, 4 to 8, and 9 to 13 psig
(21 to 48, 28 to 55, and 62 to 90 kPa)
Maximum Recommended Operating Pressure Drop
35 psig (241 kPa) for all valve sizes
Maximum Actuator Supply Pressure (Pneumatically Actuated Valves Only)

25 psig (172 kPa) maximum
Maximum Closeoff Pressures
Dependent on valve size and
actuator used
Materials of construction
Body Cast iron with black lacquer finish
Stem 316 stainless steel
Plug Brass
Packing Ethylene propylene terpolymer (EPT)
ring packs
Valve Fluid Operating Temperature Limits
35° to 281°F (2° to 138°C), 35 psig (241 kP
a) saturated steam
* Proper water treatment is recommended; refer to VDI 2035
Standard.
** Rangeability is defined as the ratio of maximum flow to
minimum controllable flow.
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards
. For application at conditions
beyond these specifications, consult Johnson Controls, Inc.
Neither Kele, Inc., nor Johnson Controls, Inc., shall be liable
for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products
.
DESCRIPTION
The VG2000 Series flanged globe valves from Johnson Controls are designed to control the flow of water and steam in HVAC systems
. Available in 2-1/2" through 6" pipe sizes,
these ANSI Class 125 valves are available in normally open (N
.O.), normally closed (N.C.) and 3-way mixing
configurations.
FEATURES
• Complete family of 2-1/2" through 6" flanged cast iron
valves with several choices in electric and pneumatic actuation
•
Every valve factory tested to assure performance and
tight close-off
• Order valve body alone for field assembly, or pre-
assembled with actuator to fit the application
SPECIFICATIONS
VG2000 Series

206. CONTROL VALVES 174CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
FLANGED GLOBE VALVES
VG2000 SERIES
C
D
A
A
B
DIMENSIONS
Valve Body Size ABCD
2-1/2" 4-21/32" (118 mm) 7-1/4" (184 mm) 7" (178 mm)6 -25/32" (172 mm)
3" 5-5/16" (135 mm)8 -5/8" (219 mm) 7-1/2" (191 mm)6 -13/16" (175 mm)
4" 6-7/16" (164 mm)1 0-1/2" (267 mm) 9" (229 mm)8 -1/16" (205 mm)
5" 6-7/8" (175 mm) 12-1/2" (318 mm) 10" (254 mm)9 -5/32" (233 mm)
6" 8-3/16" (208 mm)1 4-1/2" (368 mm) 11" (279 mm)9 -15/16" (252 mm)
WEIGHTS
Valve Body Size 2-WAY3 -WAY
2-1/2" 40 lb (18.14 kg) 60 lb (27.22 kg)
3" 60 lb (27.22 kg) 85 lb (38.56 kg)
4" 90 lb (40.82 kg) 115 lb (52.16 kg)
5" 135 lb (61.24 kg) 180 lb (81.65 kg)
6" 140 lb (65.50 kg) 220 lb (99.79 kg)
Flange and Bolt Circle
Two-Way Three-Way Mixing
DIMENSIONS
Valve
Size
Flange
Diameter
Flange
Thickness
Bolt Circle
Diameter
Bolt Hole
Diameter
Bolt
Holes
2-1/2" 7"" (178 mm) 11/16" (17 mm) 5-1/2" (140 mm) 3/4" (19 mm) 4
3" 7-1/2" (191 mm) 3/4" (19 mm) 6" (152 mm) 3/4" (19 mm) 4
4" 9" (229 mm) 1" (25 mm) 7-1/2" (191 mm) 3/4" (19 mm) 8
5" 10" (254 mm) 1" (25 mm) 8-1/2" (216 mm) 7/8" (22 mm) 8
6" 11" (279 mm) 1" (25 mm) 9-1/2" (241 mm) 7/8" (22 mm) 8
DIMENSIONS

207. flfi 175CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
VG2231 TWO-WAY NORMALLY OPEN VALVES WITH PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS
Spring Range 3 to 7 psig 4 to 8 psig 9 to 13 psig
Size Cv
Closeoff
psig
Model Number
Closeoff
psig
Model Number
Closeoff
psig
Model Number
MP82 Series Actuators – 25 sq. in. Effective Diaphragm Area
2-1/2" 51 53 VG2231TL-823C00 49 VG2231TL-823D00 28 VG2231TL-823E00
3" 83 37 VG2231UL-823C00 34 VG2231UL-823D00 19 VG2231UL-823E00
MP84 Series Actuators – 50 sq. in. Effective Diaphragm Area
2-1/2" 51 109 VG2231TM-843C00 100 VG2231TM-843D00 58 VG2231TM-843E00
3" 83 75 VG2231UM-845C00 70 VG2231UM-845D00 40 VG2231UM-845E00
4" 150 42 VG2231VM-845C00 39 VG2231VM-845D00 23 VG2231VM-845E00
MP86 Series Actuators – 100 sq. in. Effective Diaphragm Area
3" 83 152 VG2231UN-865C00 140 VG2231UN-865D00 81 VG2231UN-865E00
4" 150 86 VG2231VN-865C00 79 VG2231VN-865D00 46 VG2231VN-865E00
5" 240 55 VG2231WN-867C00 51 VG2231WN-867D00 29 VG2231WN-867E00
6" 350 38 VG2231YN-867C00 35 VG2231YN-867CD0 20 VG2231YN-867E00
VG2431 TWO-WAY NORMALLY CLOSED VALVES WITH PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS
Spring Range 3 to 7 psig 4 to 8 psig 9 to 13 psig
Size Cv
Closeoff
psig
Model Number
Closeoff
psig
Model Number
Closeoff
psig
Model Number
MP84 Series Actuators – 50 sq. in. Effective Diaphragm Area
2-1/2" 54 24 VG2431TM-843C00 32 VG2431TM-843D00 75 VG2431TM-843E00
3" 83 17 VG2431UM-845C00 22 VG2431UM-845D00 52 VG2431UM-845E00
4" 150 9 VG2431VM-845C00 13 VG2431VM-845D00 29 VG2431VM-845E00
MP86 Series Actuators – 100 sq. in. Effective Diaphragm Area
3" 83 34 VG2431UN-865C00 46 VG2431UN-865D00 105 VG2431UN-865E00
4" 150 19 VG2431VN-865C00 26 VG2431VN-865D00 59 VG2431VN-865E00
5" 237 12 VG2431WN-867C00 17 VG2431WN-867D00 38 VG2431WN-867E00
6" 344 9 VG2431YN-867C00 11 VG2431YN-867D00 26 VG2431YN-867E00
VG2831 THREE-WAY MIXING VALVES WITH PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS
Spring Range 3 to 7 psig 4 to 8 psig 9 to 13 psig
Size Cv
Closeoff
psig
Model Number
Closeoff
psig
Model Number
Closeoff
psig
Model Number
MP84 Series Actuators – 50 sq. in. Effective Diaphragm Area
2-1/2" 54 65/14 VG2831TM-843C00 60/19 VG2831TM-843D00 35/45 VG2831TM-843E00
3 " 83 45/10 VG2831UM-845C00 42/13 VG2831UM-845D00 24/31 VG2831UM-845E00
4 " 150 25/6 VG2831VM-845C00 23/8 VG2831VM-845D00 14/18 VG2831VM-845E00
MP86 Series Actuators – 100 sq. in. Effective Diaphragm Area
3 83 91/21 VG2831UN-865C00 84/28 VG2831UN-865D00 49/63 VG2831UN-865E00
4 150 51/12 VG2831VN-865C00 47/16 VG2831VN-865D00 27/35 VG2831VN-865E00
5 237 33/7 VG2831WN-867C00 30/10 VG2831WN-867D00 18/23 VG2831WN-867E00
6 344 23/5 VG2831YN-867C00 21/7 VG2831YN-867CD0 12/16 VG2831YN-867E00
To add an optional positioner to the valve assembly, change the 00 at the end of the code number to 01 for a V-9502-95 pneumatic
positioner or to 02 for an EPP-1000-8 Electro-pneumatic positioner.
FLANGED GLOBE VALVES
VG2000 SERIES

208. CONTROL VALVES 176CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION — ELECTRIC SPRNG RETURN
VG2X31 VALVES WITH M9220-XGX-3 ACTUATORS
Spring Return
Floating On/Off Proportional
Valve Size Cv
Closeoff
psig
M9220-AGA-3 (w/switches)
M9220-AGC-3 (w/o switches)
M9220-BGA-3 (w/switches)
M9220-BGC-3 (w/o switches)
M9220-GGA-3 (w/switches)
M9220-GGC-3 (w/o switches)
Two-Way – Spring Return Normally Open – Valve Stem Up
VG2231TM2-1/2" 51 76 VG2231TM-92NAGx VG2231TM-92NBGx VG2231TM-92NGGx
VG2231UM 3" 83 33 VG2231UM-92NAGx VG2231UM-92NBGx VG2231UM-92NGGx
VG2231UM 3" 83 66 VG2231TM292NAGx VG2231UM292NBGx VG2231UM292NGGx
VG2231VM 4" 150 37 VG2231UM292NAGx VG2231VM292NBGx VG2231VM292NGGx
VG2231WN 5" 240 20 VG2231WN292NAGx VG2231WN292NBGx VG2231WN292NGGx
Two-Way – Spring Return Normally Closed – Valve Stem Down
VG2231TM2-1/2" 51 76 VG2231TM-94NAGx VG2231TM-94NBGx VG2231TM-94NGGx
VG2231UM 3" 83 33 VG2231UM-94NAGx VG2231UM-94NBGx VG2231UM-94NGGx
VG2231UM 3" 83 66 VG2231TM294NAGx VG2231UM294NBGx VG2231UM294NGGx
VG2231VM 4" 150 37 VG2231UM294NAGx VG2231VM294NBGx VG2231VM294NGGx
VG2231WN 5" 240 20 VG2231WN294NAGx VG2231WN294NBGx VG2231WN294NGGx
Three-Way Mixing – Spring Return – Valve Stem Up – Side Inlet Port Closed
VG2831TM2-1/2" 54 45 VG2831TM-92NAGx VG2831TM-92NBGx VG2831TM-92NGGx
VG2831UM 3" 80 20 VG2831UM-92NAGx VG2831UM-92NBGx VG2831UM-92NGGx
VG2831UM 3" 80 40 VG2831UM292NAGx VG2831UM292NBGx VG2831UM292NGGx
VG2831VM 4" 157 11 VG2831VM-92NAGx VG2831VM-92NBGx VG2831VM-92NGGx
VG2831VM 4" 157 22 VG2831VM292NAGx VG2831VM292NBGx VG2831VM292NGGx
VG2831WN 5" 238 12 VG2831WM292NAGx VG2831WN292NBGx VG2831WN292NGGx
VG2831YN 6" 347 7 VG2831YN292NAGx VG2831YN292NBGx VG2831YN292NGGx
Three-Way Mixing – Spring Return – Valve Stem Down – Side Inlet Port Open
VG2831TM2-1/2" 54 45 VG2831TM-94NAGx VG2831TM-94NBGx VG2831TM-94NGGx
VG2831UM 3" 80 20 VG2831UM-94NAGx VG2831UM-94NBGx VG2831UM-94NGGx
VG2831UM 3" 80 40 VG2831UM294NAGx VG2831UM294NBGx VG2831UM294NGGx
VG2831VM 4" 157 11 VG2831VM-92NAGx VG2831VM-94NBGx VG2831VM-94NGGx
VG2831VM 4" 157 22 VG2831VM294NAGx VG2831VM294NBGx VG2831VM294NGGx
VG2831WN 5" 238 12 VG2831WM294NAGx VG2831WN294NBGx VG2831WN294NGGx
VG2831YN 6" 347 7 VG2831YN294NAGx VG2831YN294NBGx VG2831YN294NGGx
FLANGED GLOBE VALVES
VG2000 SERIES

209. flfi 177CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION — ELECTRIC NON-SPRNG RETURN
VG2X31 VALVES WITH M91XX-XGX-2 ACTUATORS – NON-SPRING RETURN
Non-Spring Return
On/Off Floating
without Switches
Proportional without
Switches
On/Off Floating with
Two Switches
Proportional with
Two Switches
Size Cv
Closeoff
psig
M9116-AGA-2
M9124-AGA-2
M9116-GGA-2
M9124-GGA-2
M9116-AGC-2
M9124-AGC-2
M9116-GGC-2
M9124-GGC-2
Two-Way, Push-Down-To-Close
2-1/2" 51 62 VG2231TM+916AGA VG2231TM+916GGA VG2231TM+916AGC VG2231TM+916GGC
2-1/2" 51 101 VG2231TM+924AGA VG2231TM+924GGA VG2231TM+924AGC VG2231TM+924GGC
3" 83 27 VG2231UM+916AGA VG2231UM+916GGA VG2231UM+916AGC VG2231UM+916GGC
3" 83 43 VG2231UM+924AGA VG2231UM+924GGA VG2231UM+924AGC VG2231UM+924GGC
3" 83 88 VG2231UM2924AGA* VG2231UM2924GGA* VG2231UM2924AGC* VG2231UM2924GGC*
4" 150 24 VG2231VM+924AGA VG2231VM+924GGA VG2231VM+924AGC VG2231VM+924GGC
4" 150 49 VG2231VM2924AGA* VG2231VM2924GGA* VG2231VM2924AGC* VG2231VM2924GGC*
5" 240 26 VG2231WN2924AGA* VG2231WN2924GGA* VG2231WN2924AGC* VG2231WN2924GGC*
6" 350 16 VG2231YN2924AGA* VG2231YN2924GGA* VG2231YN2924AGC* VG2231YN2924GGC*
Three-Way, Mixing
2-1/2" 54 37 VG2831TM+916AGA VG2831TM+916GGA VG2831TM+916AGC VG2831TM+916GGC
2-1/2" 54 60 VG2831TM+924AGA VG2831TM+924GGA VG2831TM+924AGC VG2831TM+924GGC
3" 80 16 VG2831UM+916AGA VG2831UM+916GGA VG2831UM+916AGC VG2831UM+916GGC
3" 80 26 VG2831UM+924AGA VG2831UM+924GGA VG2831UM+924AGC VG2831UM+924GGC
3" 80 53 VG2831UM2924AGA* VG2831UM2924GGA* VG2831UM2924AGC* VG2831UM2924GGC*
4" 157 9 VG2831VM+916AGA VG2831VM+916GGA VG2831VM+916AGC VG2831VM+916GGC
4" 157 14 VG2831VM+924AGA VG2831VM+924GGA VG2831VM+924AGC VG2831VM+924GGC
4" 157 30 VG2831VM2924AGA* VG2831VM2924GGA* VG2831VM2924AGC* VG2831VM2924GGC*
5" 238 7 VG2831WN+924AGA VG2831WN+924GGA VG2831WN+924AGC VG2831WN+924GGC
5" 238 15 VG2831WN2924AGA* VG2831WN2924GGA* VG2831WN2924AGC* VG2831WN2924GGC*
6" 347 4 VG2831YN+924AGA VG2831YN+924GGA VG2831YN+924AGC VG2831YN+924GGC
6" 347 9 VG2831YN2924AGA* VG2831YN2924GGA* VG2831YN2924AGC* VG2831YN2924GGC*
*Valve assemblies require two actuators mounted in tandem
. On tandem assemblies with switches, only one actuator is
required to have switches. M9116-AGx-2 actuators are not designed for tandem operation.
FLANGED GLOBE VALVES
VG2000 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION — ELECTRIC NON-SPRNG RETURN
VG2x31 Valves with VA-3100-xGx Series Non-Spring Return Actuators
Non-Spring Return
On/Off Floating without
Switches
On/Off Floating with
Two Switches
Proportional with
Two Switches
Valve Size Cv
Closeoff
psig
VA-3100-AGA VA-3100-AGC VA-3100-HGC
Two-Way Push-Down-To-Close
VG2231TM 2-1/2 51 115 VG2231TM+300AGA VG2231TM+300AGC VG2231TM+300HGC
VG2231UM 3 83 79 VG2231UM+301AGA VG2231UM+301AGC VG2231UM+301HGC
VG2231VM 4 150 45 VG2231VM+301AGA VG2231VM+301AGC VG2231VM+301HGC
VG2231WN 5 240 29 VG2231WN+302AGA VG2231WN+302AGC VG2231WN+302HGC
VG2231YN 6 350 20 VG2231YN+302AGA VG2231YN+302AGC VG2231YN+302HGC
Three-Way Mixing
VG2831TM 2-1/2 54 69 VG2831TM+300AGA VG2831TM+300AGC VG2831TM+300HGC
VG2831UM 3 80 48 VG2831UM+301AGA VG2831UM+301AGC VG2831UM+301HGC
VG2831VM 4 157 27 VG2831VM+301AGA VG2831VM+301AGC VG2831VM+301HGC
VG2831WN 5 238 17 VG2831WN+302AGA VG2831WN+302AGC VG2831WN+302HGC
VG2831YN 6 347 12 VG2831YN+302AGA VG2831YN+302AGC VG2831YN+302HGC

210. CONTROL VALVES 178CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
DIRECT-MOUNT GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS
VA-4233, VA-7000 SERIES
Supply Voltage 24 VAC 50/60 Hz
Noise 35 dBa @ 3.3 ft (1m)
Feedback 0/2-10 VDC (VA-78xx-HGA only)
Auxiliary Contacts Two SPDT; 50 VA pilot duty @ 24
VAC; 5.8A resistive, 1/4 HP, 275 VA
pilot duty @ 120 VAC (VA-4233-GGC
only)
Valve Mounting
VA-71xx, -72xx Set screw to bonnet, 1/4-28 UNF-2B
threads for valve stem;
VA-4233, -78xx Set screw to bonnet, stem nut
connector
Spring Return Time 15 seconds (VA-4233 only)
Life Expectancy 100,000 full stroke cycles
Operating Temperature
VA-71xx 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
VA-72xx, -78xx 23° to 131°F (-5° to 55°C)
VA-4233 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 10% to 90% RH non-condensing
Approvals
VA-71xx, -72xx, -4233 UL 873 Listed, File E27734, Class
2, plen
um rated; CSA C22
.2 No. 139
Cer
tified, File LR85083; CE Directive
89/336/EEC VA-78 UL 60730 Listed, File E194024; ULc
60730-1 Listed; CE Directive 89/336/ EEC
Warranty
1 year
DESCRIPTION
The VA-7000 Series is a family of direct-mount non-spring
return actuators for use with 1/2" to 2" JCI VG7000 valves in a
wide range of HVAC applications
. They are available for three-
wire floating control or proportional control. The VA-4233
Series is a family of direct-mount spring return actuators, available for two-position, floating, or proportional control
.
FEATURES
• Compact size
• Simple installation and adjustment
• No separate linkages
• Economical, yet powerful
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
VA-7150
VA-4233-AGA-2

211. flfi 179CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Model Force Supply
VA
Control
Signal
Input Impedance Action Stroke Stroke
Time
VA-7150-1001
90 lbf (400 N)
2.7 VA Floating NSR, DA/RA by wiring
.78" (2.0 cm)
maximum
165 sec-
onds
VA-7152-1001 4.7 VA
Prop. 0-5 VDC,
0-10 VDC
100 kΩ NSR, DA/RA by jumpers
VA-7200-1001
180 lbf (800 N)
6.7 VA Floating NSR, DA/RA by wiring
62 seconds
VA-7202-1001 8.7 VA
Prop. 0-10 VDC,
0-20 mA
100 kΩ (0-10 VDC); 500Ω
(0-20 mA)
NSR, DA/RA by jumpers
VA-4233-AGA-2
61 lbf (271 N) 12 VA
Floating
SR stem up, DA/RA by
wiring
.91" (2.3 cm)
maximum
76 seconds
VA-4233-BGA-2 Two-position
SR stem up, power stem
down
VA-4233-GGA-2
Prop. 0/2-10
VDC, 6-9 VDC,
4-20 mA
200 kΩ (2-10 VDC); 500Ω
(4-20 mA)
SR stem up, DA/RA by
switch
VA-4233-GGC-2
Prop. 0/2-10
VDC, 6-9 VDC,
4-20 mA
200 kΩ (2-10 VDC); 500Ω
(4-20 mA)
SR stem up, DA/RA by
switch
VA7820-HGA-2
180 lbf (800 N) 11 VA
Prop. 0/2-10
VDC, 0/4-20 mA
100 kΩ (0-10 VDC); 500Ω
(0-20 mA)
SR stem up, DA/RA by DIP
switch
1.0" (2.5 cm)
maximum
114 or 57
seconds
VA7830-HGA-2
Prop. 0/2-10
VDC, 0/4-20 mA
100 kΩ (0-10 VDC); 500Ω
(0-20 mA)
SR stem down, DA/RA by
DIP switch
DIRECT-MOUNT GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS
VA-4233, VA-7000 SERIES
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS

212. CONTROL VALVES 180CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
DIRECT-MOUNT GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS
VA-4233, VA-7000 SERIES
PROPORTIONAL CONTROL SETUP COMPONENTS
FB
DA
RA
8mm
10mm
13mm
19mm
UPDOWN
Stroke
adjustment
Input signal
selection
Volts
mA
DOWN
UP
Fail safe
input signal
Action
selection
Span
value
Starting
point
Stroke
jumpers
VA-7202
Proportional Control
DA (direct acting)
Signal increase extends stem downward
RA (reverse acting)
Signal increase retracts stem upward
Setup
LED
1 2 3 4
0-10
0-5
5-10
DOWN UP
DA
RA
Direct/Reverse
action selection
jumper
Zero
adjust
Stroke
potentiometer
Long/short
selection
jumper
Input selection
jumper
Fail
position
VA-7152
Proportional Control
Setup
LED
1 2 3 4
Model Dimensions Enclosure Rating Wiring Conduit Connection Weight
VA-7150-1001
6.1"H x 3.8" Diameter
(15.4 x 9.8 cm)
NEMA 1 (IP40) Screw terminals, 24 to 14 AWG
Cable gland, 1/2" (6.4 mm) maximum
diameter
1.7 lb (0.8 kg)
VA-7152-1001
6.1"H x 3.8" Diameter
(15.4 x 9.8 cm)
NEMA 1 (IP40) Screw terminals, 24 to 14 AWG
Cable gland, 1/2" (6.4 mm) maximum
diameter
1.7 lb (0.8 kg)
VA-7200-1001
7.8"H x 4.2" Diameter
(19.7 x 10.6 cm)
NEMA 2 (IP42) Screw terminals, 24 to 14 AWG
Two 7/8" (2.2 cm) knockouts for 1/2"
fittings
2.2 lb (1.0 kg)
VA-7202-1001
7.8"H x 4.2" Diameter
(19.7 x 10.6 cm)
NEMA 2 (IP42) Screw terminals, 24 to 14 AWG
Two 7/8" (2.2 cm) knockouts for 1/2"
fittings
2.2 lb (1.0 kg)
VA-4233-AGA-2
6.8"H x 4.1"W x 3.3"D
(17.3 x 10.4 x 9.1 cm)
NEMA 2 (IP42) 48" (12.2 cm) cable with 20 AWG Fitting for 1/2" conduit 3.1 lb (1.4 kg)
VA-4233-BGA-2
6.8"H x 4.1"W x 3.3"D
(17.3 x 10.4 x 9.1 cm)
NEMA 2 (IP42) 48" (12.2 cm) cable with 20 AWG Fitting for 1/2" conduit 3.1 lb (1.4 kg)
VA-4233-GGA-2
6.8"H x 4.1"W x 3.3"D
(17.3 x 10.4 x 9.1 cm)
NEMA 2 (IP42) 48" (12.2 cm) cable with 20 AWG Fitting for 1/2" conduit 3.1 lb (1.4 kg)
VA-4233-GGC-2
6.8"H x 4.1"W x 3.3"D
(17.3 x 10.4 x 9.1 cm)
NEMA 2 (IP42) 48" (12.2 cm) cable with 18 AWG Fitting for 1/2" conduit 3.1 lb (1.4 kg)
VA7820-HGA-2
9.1"H x 4.5"W x 8.4"D
(23.1 x 11.5 x 21.2 cm)
NEMA 2 (IP54)
48" (12.2 cm) UL 758 AWM cable,
18 AWG
Integral connector for 3/8" (1.0 cm) flex
conduit
7.3 lb (3.3 kg)
VA7830-HGA-2
9.1"H x 4.5"W x 8.4"D
(23.1 x 11.5 x 21.2 cm)
NEMA 2 (IP54)
48" (12.2 cm) UL 758 AWM cable,
18 AWG
Integral connector for 3/8" (1.0 cm) flex
conduit
7.3 lb (3.3 kg)
DIMENSIONS

213. flfi 181CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES
V-9999-BC1 Kit for 1/2” to 1-1/4” Barber Colman VB9000 Series valves
V
G7000-1016
Bonnet adapter for replacing M100, V-400, V-500, MP8000 Series on VG7000 valves
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
M9000-200 Commissioning tool
K
OV-2
NEMA 3R fabric weather shield, 8" dia. x 10"H, fits Honeywell ML6420/7420/6425/7425
and Belimo NV/NVF 206
DIRECT-MOUNT GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS
VA-4233, VA-7000 SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
V
A-7150-1001
90 lbf, non-spring return, floating control, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" valves
V
A-7152-1001
90 lbf, non-spring return, proportional (0-5, 0-10 VDC) control, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" valves
V
A-7200-1001
180 lbf, non-spring return, floating control, for 1-1/2" and 2" valves
V
A-7202-1001
180 lbf, non-spring return, proportional (0-10 VDC, 0-20 mA) control, for 1-1/2" and 2" valves
V
A-4233-AGA-2
61 lbf, spring return stem up, floating control, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" valves
V
A-4233-BGA-2
61 lbf, spring return stem up, two-position control, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" valves
V
A-4233-GGA-2
61 lbf, spring return stem up, proportional control, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" valves
V
A-4233-GGC-2
61 lbf, spring return stem up, proportional control, with auxiliary switches, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" valves
VA7820-HGA-2 180 lbf, spring return stem up, proportional control, for 1/2" to 2" valves
V
A7830-HGA-2
181 lbf, spring return stem down, proportional control, for 1/2" to 2" valves

214. CONTROL VALVES 182CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
THREADED AND FLANGED GLOBE VALVES
VB SERIES
Size 1/2” to 2” FNPT, 2-1/2” to 6” flanged
Cv Range 0.4 to 40 (NPT bodies); 56 to 500
(flanged bodies)
Body Pattern Two-way, three-way mixing or
diverting
Rangeability 1/2” to 2”: from 5:1 (Cv=0.4), up to
75:1 (Cv=40)
2-1/2” to 6”: 100:1
Leakage Rating ANSI Class IV, 0.01% of Cv
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
Actuator dependant, see Ordering
Information
Pressure Drop 35 psid (241 kPa) for water; 20 psid
(138 kPa) for steam
Pressure Rating 1/2” to 2”: ANSI B16.15-1985, Class
250 (400 psi (2756 kPa) @ 20° to
150°F (-7° to 66°C), decreasing
to 321 psi (2215 kPa) at 281°F
(138°C));

2-1/2” to 6”: ANSI B16.1-1993, Class
125 (200 psi (1380 kPa) @ 20° to 150°F (-7° to 66°C), decreasing to 169 psi (1166 kPa) at 281°F (138°C))
Flow Characteristic
Two Way Equal %
Three Way Linear
Materials Of Construction
1/2” to 2”: Bronze body/plug/seat,
stainless steel stem and spring- loaded TFE packing;

2-1/2” to 6”: Cast iron body, bronze
plug/seat, stainless steel stem and spring-loaded TFE/EPDM packing
Media Compatibility
Hot or chilled water, steam (up to 35
psig (241 kPa)), glycol (up ro 50%)
Media Temperature Range
20° to 281°F (-7° to 138°C)
Action Two-way stem up to close and stem
up to open models; three-way mixing or diverting
Actuator Mounting
Threaded mounting yoke
Compatible Actuators Electric Forta Series or DuraDrive
Series shown on following pages; pneumatic see MK Series in PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS catalog section
.
Operating Temperature Actuator dependant, refer to following
pages for specifications
Approvals Actuator dependant, refer to following
pages for specifications
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The VB Series Globe Valves are available in 1/2" to 2" threaded bronze body VB-7XXX models, or in 2 1/2" to 6" flanged cast iron body VB-8XXX models
. The flanged valves
have a patented balanced plug design. The balanced plug
design allows water or steam to flow through the valve plug, equalizing the pressure on the top and bottom of the plug which greatly reduces the force required to operate and close these larger size valves
.The VB Series Valves are designed
for control of chilled water, hot water, or steam in the HVAC industry and have a long history of high quality and reliability
.
The
y are available pre-assembled with electric or pneumatic
actuators, or available without actuator for field assembly
.
FEATURES
• Lo •
High quality, proven history of performance
• Self-adjusting packing design
• Wide temperature range 20° to 281°F (-7° to 138°C)
• Pneumatic or electric actuation choices
• Available pre-assembled or separately
• Two- and three-way body patterns
• Mixing and diverting 3-way body patterns
• Balanced plug design on flanged models
SPECIFICATIONS
VF-8213-596-5-12

215. flfi 183CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
THREADED AND FLANGED GLOBE VALVES
VB SERIES
a
Stroke for rated flow. Add up to 1/16 inch (1.6mm) for disc seating and compression.
SUTO = Stem up to open, SUTC = Stem up to close
*See 3-way flow patterns on the next page
Typical VB-7000
Threaded Valve
D
E
A
C
B
Typical VB-8000
Flanged Valve
D
E
1/2-20"
1-1/4-16"
A
C
B
Note: Actuator dimensions
are listed on the DuraDrive
Series pages
1/2" 2-way SUTO
SUTO
SUTO
3-1/16 (78) 2.0
3.0
5.5
2.0
2.0
3.0
5.5
3-1/16 (78)
3-1/16 (78)
3-5/8 (92)
1-1/16 (27) 1-11/16 (43)
3/4 (19)
1-1/8 (29)
3/4 (19)
3/4 (19)
7/16 (11)
7/16 (11)
7/16 (11)
7/16 (11)
3-1/4 (83)
3-1/4 (83)
3-1/4 (83)
1 (25)
1 (25)
1 (25)
2-3/8 (60)
1-1/4 (32) 1-11/16 (43)
1-11/16 (43)
1-11/16 (43)
1-3/4 (45)
1-1/8 (29)
3-5/8 (92)
4-5/8 (118)
4-5/8 (118) 1-3/4 (45)
1-3/8 (35)
4-5/8 (118)
4-5/8 (118)
SUTC
SUTC
SUTC
MIXING*
2-way
2-way
2-way
2-way
2-way
3-way
3/4"
1"
1/2"
3/4"
1"
1/2"
Part
Number
VB-7213-0-4-01
VB-7213-0-4-02
VB-7213-0-4-03
VB-7213-0-4-04
VB-7213-0-4-05
VB-7213-0-4-06
VB-7213-0-4-07
VB-7213-0-4-08
VB-7213-0-4-09
VB-7213-0-4-10
VB-7213-0-4-11
VB-7223-0-4-01
VB-7223-0-4-02
VB-7223-0-4-03
VB-7223-0-4-04
VB-7223-0-4-05
VB-7223-0-4-06
VB-7223-0-4-07
VB-7223-0-4-08
VB-7223-0-4-09
VB-7223-0-4-10
VB-7223-0-4-11
VB-7313-0-4-02
VB-7313-0-4-04
VB-7313-0-4-06
VB-7313-0-4-08
VB-7313-0-4-09
VB-7313-0-4-10
VB-7313-0-4-11
VB-7323-0-4-04
VB-7323-0-4-06
VB-7323-0-4-08
VB-7323-0-4-09
VB-7323-0-4-10
VB-7323-0-4-11
VB-8213-0-5-12
VB-8213-0-5-13
VB-8213-0-5-14
VB-8213-0-5-15
VB-8213-0-5-16
VB-8223-0-5-12
VB-8223-0-5-13
VB-8223-0-5-14
VB-8223-0-5-15
VB-8223-0-5-16
VB-8303-0-5-12
VB-8303-0-5-13
VB-8303-0-5-14
VB-8303-0-5-15
VB-8303-0-5-16
Valve
Size
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
2"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
2"
3/4"
1"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
2"
1/2"
3/4"
1"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
2"
2-1/2"
3"
4"
5"
6"
2-1/2"
3"
4"
5"
6"
2-1/2"
3"
4"
5"
6"
Pattern
2-way
2-way
2-way
2-way
2-way
2-way
3-way
3-way
3-way
3-way
3-way
3-way
3-way
3-way
3-way
3-way
3-way
2-way
2-way
2-way
2-way
2-way
2-way
2-way
2-way
2-way
2-way
3-way
3-way
3-way
3-way
3-way
Stem
Position
SUTO
SUTO
SUTO
SUTC
SUTC
SUTC
MIXING*
MIXING*
MIXING*
MIXING*
MIXING*
DIVERTING*
DIVERTING*
DIVERTING*
DIVERTING*
DIVERTING*
DIVERTING*
SUTO
SUTO
SUTO
SUTO
SUTO
SUTC
SUTC
SUTC
SUTC
SUTC
MIX. & DIV.*
MIX. & DIV.*
MIX. & DIV.*
MIX. & DIV.*
MIX. & DIV.*
A
5-3/8 (137)
6-1/8 (156)
5-3/8 (137)
6-1/8 (156)
3-5/8 (92)
5-3/8 (137)
6-1/8 (156)
3-1/16 (78)
3-5/8 (92)
5-3/8 (137)
6-1/8 (156)
8-9/16 (217)
9-1/2 (241)
11-1/2 (292)
13 (330)
14 (356)
8-9/16 (217)
9-1/2 (241)
11-1/2 (292)
13 (330)
14 (356)
8-9/16 (217)
9-1/2 (241)
11-1/2 (292)
13 (330)
14 (356)
B
1-3/8 (35)
1-1/2 (38)
1-9/16 (40)
1-13/16 (46)
2-1/16 (53)
1-11/16 (43)
1-9/16 (40)
1-5/8 (41)
1-9/16 (40)
1-7/8 (53)
1-3/8 (53)
1-11/16 (43)
1-9/16 (40)
1-5/8 (41)
1-9/16 (40)
1-7/8 (53)
4 (102)
4-5/8 (117)
5-1/2 (140)
6-15/16 (176)
7-1/2 (190)
4 (102)
4-1/4 (108)
4-15/16 (125)
5-7/16 (138)
6-1/4 (159)
5-7/16 (138)
6-3/8 (162)
8-7/16 (214)
8-13/16 (224)
9-3/4 (248)
C
2-7/16 (57)
2-3/4 (70)
2 (51)
2-1/8 (54)
2-3/16 (56)
1-3/4 (45)
2 (51)
1-1/8 (29)
1-3/16 (30)
1-3/4 (45)
2 (51)
1-1/8 (29)
1-3/16 (30)
4-1/8 (105)
4-3/8 (111)
5-1/16 (129)
5-9/16 (141)
6-3/8 (162)
4-1/4 (108)
4-7/8 (124)
5-3/4 (146)
6-3/4 (172)
7-1/2 (191)
4-3/16 (106)
4-3/8 (111)
5-1/16 (129)
5-5/8 (143)
6-3/4 (171)
D
(Stem Down)
E
a
(Stem Down)
1-3/4 (45)
1-3/4 (45)
1-3/4 (45)
Weight
(lbs)
6.0
13
13
6.0
13
13
3.0
5.0
5.5
14
14
2.0
2.5
5.0
5.5
14
14
46
58
95
141
146
46
58
95
141
146
55
68
113
166
212
Dimensions in inches (mm)
MODEL NUMBERS AND DIMENSIONS FOR VB-7000 AND VB-8000 SERIES VALVES WITHOUT ACTUATORS

216. CONTROL VALVES 184CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
THREADED AND FLANGED GLOBE VALVES
VB SERIES
C
B
D
E
A
Flange Dimensions
Flange Detail for American Standard 125 psi Cast Iron Pipe Flanges
Nominal Pipe
Size
Flange
Diameter
A
Flanges Drilling Bolting
Flange
Thickness
B
Diameter of
Bolt Circl e
C
Diameter of
Bolt Holes
D
Length of
Machine Bolts
E
Number of
Bolts
Diameter of
Bolts
2-1/2" 7" 11/16" 5-1/2"
4

2-1/2"
3" 7-1/2" 3/4" 6" 3/4" 5/8"
4" 9"
15/16"
7-1/2"
3"
5" 10" 8-1/2"
7/8"
8
3/4"

6" 11" 1" 9-1/2" 3-1/4"
Flow Flow
Stem position Flow
Up
B to AB
A port closed
Down
A to AB
B port closed
Flow
AB
AB
VB-8303 Piped as mixing va lve
Three-way Flanged Valve Flow Patterns
Flow Flow
Note: A label on the side
of the valve provides
port identification.
Note: A label on the side of the valve provides port identification.
Stem Position Flow
Up
AB to B
A port closed
Down
AB to A
B port closed
Flow
AB
AB
VB-8303 Piped as diverting va lve
VB-7313
Mixing va lve
(Stem up = B-AB)
A
B
A
B
VB-7323
Diverting va lve
(Stem up = B-AB)
A
B
A B
Note: Two-way VB-7213 and VB-8213 valves are stem up to open (SUTO).
VB-7223 and VB-8223 are stem up to close (SUTC).
VALVE FLOW PATTERNS
FLANGE DIMENSIONS

217. flfi 185CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
THREADED AND FLANGED GLOBE VALVES
VB SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
TWO-WA Y ELECTRIC VALVE ASSEMBLIES - ORDERING INFORMATION SUTO = Stem Up To Open, SUTC = Stem Up To Close
Model Number SizeC vP atternF ail Contro l Actuator Linkage Closeoff
VF-7213-255-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4
Two-way
SUTO
Non-spring
return
Floating (24 VAC)
MF-22303 None
130
VF-7213-255-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3
VF-7213-255-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2
VF-7213-255-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4
VF-7213-255-4-05 3/4" NPT 5.5
80
VF-7213-255-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5
VA-7213-804-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4
Two-way
SUTO
Spring return
N.O.
Two-position
(24 VAC)
MA51-7103-100
None
250
VA-7213-804-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 250
VA-7213-804-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 250
VA-7213-804-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 250
VA-7213-804-4-05 3/4" NPT 5.5 200
VA-7213-804-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 200
VA-7213-804-4-07 1" NPT 10 150
VA-7213-804-4-08 1" NPT 14 150
VA-7213-593-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20
MA51-7203
150
VA-7213-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 100
VA-7213-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 65
VA-8213-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged5 6
MA61-7203
125
VA-8213-596-5-13 3" Flanged 85
VA-8213-596-5-14 4" Flanged 145
VA-8213-596-5-15 5" Flanged 240
VA-8213-556-5-16 6" Flanged 370 MA41-7153 AV-609
VA-7223-804-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4
Two-way
SUTC
Spring return
N.C.
Two-position
(24 VAC)
MA51-7103-100
None
250
VA-7223-804-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 250
VA-7223-804-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 250
VA-7223-804-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 250
VA-7223-804-4-05 3/4" NPT 5.5 200
VA-7223-804-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 200
VA-7223-804-4-07 1" NPT 10 90
VA-7223-804-4-08 1" NPT 14 90
VA-7223-593-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20
MA51-7203
150
VA-7223-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 100
VA-7223-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 65
VA-8223-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged5 6
MA61-7203
125
VA-8223-596-5-13 3" Flanged 85
VA-8223-596-5-14 4" Flanged 145
VA-8223-596-5-15 5" Flanged 240
VA-8223-556-5-16 6" Flanged 370 MA41-7153 AV-609
VF-7213-804-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4
Two-way
SUTO
Spring return
N.O.
Floating (24 VAC)
MF51-7103-100
None
250
VF-7213-804-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 250
VF-7213-804-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 250
VF-7213-804-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 250
VF-7213-804-4-05 3/4" NPT 5.5 200
VF-7213-804-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 200
VF-7213-804-4-07 1" NPT 10 150
VF-7213-804-4-08 1" NPT 14 150
VF-7213-593-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20
MF51-7203
150
VF-7213-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 100
VF-7213-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 65
VF-8213-596-5-12 2-1/2 " Flanged 56
MF61-7203
125
VF-8213-596-5-13 3" Flanged 85
VF-8213-596-5-14 4" Flanged 145
VF-8213-596-5-15 5" Flanged 240
VF-8213-556-5-16 6" Flanged 370 MF41-7153 AV-609
VU-7213-674-4-02 1/2" NPT 2.2
Two-way SUTO
Non-Spring
Return
Programmable
Floating/Proportional
M800A
Two-way SUTO
AV-821
M400A AV-821
AV-821
250
VU-7213-674-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 250
VU-7213-674-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 250
VU-7213-680-4-08 1" NPT 14 207
VU-7213-680-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20 130
VU-7213-680-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 88
VU-7213-680-4-11 2" NPT 40 48
VU-8213-686-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged5 6
125
VU-8213-686-5-13 3" Flanged 85
M1500AVU-8213-686-5-14 4" Flanged 145
VU-8213-686-5-15 5" Flanged 240
VU-8213-686-5-16 6" Flanged 370

218. CONTROL VALVES 186CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
THREADED AND FLANGED GLOBE VALVES
VB SERIES
TWO-WA Y ELECTRIC VALVE ASSEMBLIES - ORDERING INFORMATION (continued) SUTO = Stem Up To Open, SUTC = Stem Up To Close
Model Number SizeC vP attern Fail Contro l Actuator Linkage Closeoff
VF-7223-804-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4
Two-way
SUTC
Spring return
N.C.
Floating (24 VAC)
MF51-7103-100
None
250
VF-7223-804-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 250
VF-7223-804-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 250
VF-7223-804-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 250
VF-7223-804-4-05 3/4" NPT 5.5 200
VF-7223-804-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 200
VF-7223-804-4-07 1" NPT 10 90
VF-7223-804-4-08 1" NPT 14 90
VF-7223-593-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20
MF51-7203
150
VF-7223-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 100
VF-7223-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 65
VF-8223-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged 56
MF61-7203
125
VF-8223-596-5-13 3" Flanged 85
VF-8223-596-5-14 4" Flanged 145
VF-8223-596-5-15 5" Flanged 240
VF-8223-556-5-16 6" Flanged 370 MF41-7153 AV-609
VS-7213-814-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4
Two-way
SUTO
Spring return
N.O.
Proportional
(24 VAC, 4-20 mA)
MS51-7103-160
None
250
VS-7213-814-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 250
VS-7213-814-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 250
VS-7213-814-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 250
VS-7213-814-4-05 3/4" NPT 5.5 200
VS-7213-814-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 200
VS-7213-814-4-07 1" NPT 10 150
VS-7213-814-4-08 1" NPT 14 150
VS-7213-593-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20
MS51-7203
150
VS-7213-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 100
VS-7213-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 65
VS-8213-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged 56
MS61-7203
125
VS-8213-596-5-13 3" Flanged 85
VS-8213-596-5-14 4" Flanged 145
VS-8213-596-5-15 5" Flanged 240
VS-8213-556-5-16 6" Flanged 370 MS41-7153 AV-609
VS-7223-814-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4
Two-way
SUTC
Spring return
N.C.
Proportional
(24 VAC, 4-20 mA)
MS51-7103-160
None
250
VS-7223-814-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 250
VS-7223-814-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 250
VS-7223-814-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 250
VS-7223-814-4-05 3/4" NPT 5.5 200
VS-7223-814-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 200
VS-7223-814-4-07 1" NPT 10 90
VS-7223-814-4-08 1" NPT 14 90
VS-7223-593-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20
MS51-7203
150
VS-7223-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 100
VS-7223-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 65
VS-8223-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged 56
MS61-7203
125
VS-8223-596-5-13 3" Flanged 85
VS-8223-596-5-14 4" Flanged 145
VS-8223-596-5-15 5" Flanged 240
VS-8223-556-5-16 6" Flanged 370 MS41-7153 AV-609
THREE-WA Y ELECTRIC VALVE ASSEMBLIES - ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Number SizeC vP attern Fail Contro l Actuator Linkage Closeoff
VF-7313-255-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3
Three-way
Mixing
Non-spring
return
Floating (24 VAC)
MF-22303
Incl. two-position
None
130
VF-7313-255-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4
VF-7313-255-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 80
VA-7313-804-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3
Three-way
Mixing
Spring return
B-AB
Two-position
(24 VAC)
MA51-7103-100
None
250
VA-7313-804-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 250
VA-7313-804-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 200
VA-7313-804-4-08 1" NPT 14 90
VA-7313-593-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20
MA51-7203
150
VA-7313-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 100
VA-7313-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 65
VU-7313-674-4-02 1/2" NPT 2.2
Mixing
Non-Spring
Return
Programmable
Floating/Proportional
M400A
250
VU-7313-674-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 250
VU-7313-674-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 198
VU-7313-674-4-08 1" NPT 14 207
VU-7313-680-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20
M800A
130
VU-7313-680-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 88
VU-7313-680-4-11 2" NPT 40 48
VU-8303-686-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged8 0
Three-way
Mixing/Diverting
M1500A
AV-821
AV-821
AV-822
125
VU-8303-686-5-13 3" Flanged 110
VU-8303-686-5-14 4" Flanged 190
VU-8303-686-5-15 5" Flanged 290
VU-8303-686-5-16 6" Flanged 500

219. flfi 187CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
THREADED AND FLANGED GLOBE VALVES
VB SERIES
THREE-WA Y ELECTRIC VALVE ASSEMBLIES - ORDERING INFORMATION (continued)
Model Number SizeC vP atternF ail Contro l Actuator Linkage Closeoff
VA-8303-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged8 0
Three-way
Mixing/Diverting
Spring return
B-AB
Two-position
(24 VAC)
MA61-7203 None
35
VA-8303-596-5-13 3" Flanged 110
VA-8303-596-5-14 4" Flanged 190
VA-8303-596-5-15 5" Flanged 290
VA-8303-556-5-16 6" Flanged 500 MA41-7153 AV-609
VF-7313-804-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3
Three-way
Mixing
Spring return
B-AB
Floating (24 VAC)
MF51-7103-100
None
250
VF-7313-804-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 250
VF-7313-804-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 200
VF-7313-804-4-08 1" NPT 14 90
VF-7313-593-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20
MF51-7203
150
VF-7313-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 100
VF-7313-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 65
VF-8303-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged8 0
Three-way
Mixing/Diverting
MF61-7203
35
VF-8303-596-5-13 3" Flanged 110
VF-8303-596-5-14 4" Flanged 190
VF-8303-596-5-15 5" Flanged 290
VF-8303-556-5-16 6" Flanged 500 MF41-7153 AV-609
VS-7313-814-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3
Three-way
Mixing
Spring return
B-AB
Proportional
(24 VAC, 4-20 mA)
2-10 VDC
MS51-7103-160
None
250
VS-7313-814-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 250
VS-7313-814-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 200
VS-7313-814-4-08 1" NPT 14 90
VS-7313-593-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20
MS51-7203
150
VS-7313-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 100
VS-7313-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 65
VS-8303-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged8 0
Three-way
Mixing/Diverting
Three-way
Mixing/Diverting
Three-way
Mixing
MS61-7203
35
VS-8303-596-5-13 3" Flanged 110
VS-8303-596-5-14 4" Flanged 190
VS-8303-596-5-15 5" Flanged 290
VS-8303-556-5-16 6" Flanged 500 MS41-7153 AV-609
TWO-WA Y PNEUMATIC VALVE ASSEMBLIES - ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Number SizeC vP atternF ail Contro l Actuator Linkage Closeoff
VK4-7213-201-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4
Two-way Spring return
N.O.
3-7 psi spring
with positioner
MK-2690+AK-42309-500 AV-7400
220
VK4-7213-201-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3
VK4-7213-201-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2
VK4-7213-201-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4
VK4-7213-201-4-05 3/4" NPT 5.5
130
VK4-7213-201-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5
VK4-7213-301-4-07 1" NPT 10
3-6 psi spring
with positioner
MK-4601+AK-42309-500 AV-401
150
VK4-7213-301-4-08 1" NPT 14
VK4-7213-301-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20 90
VK4-7213-611-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 3-8 psi spring
with positioner
MK-6601+AK-42309-500 AV-430
250
VK4-7213-611-4-11 2" NPT 40 160
VK4-8213-602-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged5 6
5-10 psi spring
with positioner
MK-6811+AK-42309-500
AV-497 125
VK4-8213-602-5-13 3" Flanged 85
VK4-8213-602-5-14 4" Flanged 145
VK4-8213-602-5-15 5" Flanged 240
VK4-8213-652-5-16 6" Flanged 370 MK-6911+AK-42309-500
VK4-7223-203-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4
Two-way Spring return
N.C.
8-13 psi spring
with positioner
MK-2690+AK-42309-500 AV-7400
130
VK4-7223-203-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3
VK4-7223-203-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2
VK4-7223-203-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4
VK4-7223-203-4-05 3/4" NPT 5.5
60
VK4-7223-203-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5
VK4-7223-303-4-07 1" NPT 10
10-13 psi spring
with positioner
MK-4621+AK-42309-500 AV-401
60
VK4-7223-303-4-08 1" NPT 14
VK4-7223-303-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20 40
VK4-7223-613-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 8-13 psi spring
with positioner
MK-6621+AK-42309-500 AV-430
170
VK4-7223-613-4-11 2" NPT 40 90
VK4-8223-602-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged5 6
5-10 psi spring
with positioner
MK-6811+AK-42309-500
AV-497 125
VK4-8223-602-5-13 3" Flanged 85
VK4-8223-602-5-14 4" Flanged 145
VK4-8223-602-5-15 5" Flanged 240
VK4-8223-652-5-16 6" Flanged 370 MK-6911+AK-42309-500
THREE-WA Y PNEUMATIC VALVE ASSEMBLIES - ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Number SizeC vP atternF ail Contro l Actuator Linkage Closeoff
VK4-7313-303-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3
Spring return
B-AB
10-13 psi spring
with positioner
MK-4621+AK-42309-500 AV-401
200
VK4-7313-303-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4
VK4-7313-303-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 120
VK4-7313-303-4-08 1" NPT 14 60
VK4-7313-303-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20 40
VK4-7313-612-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28
MK-6611+AK-42309-500 AV-430
80
VK4-7313-612-4-11 2" NPT 40 50
VK4-8303-602-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged8 0
5-10 psi spring
with positionerMK-6811+AK-42309-500
AV-497 35
VK4-8303-602-5-13 3" Flanged 110
VK4-8303-602-5-14 4" Flanged 190
VK4-8303-602-5-15 5" Flanged 290
VK4-8303-652-5-16 6" Flanged 500 MK-6911+AK-42309-500

220. CONTROL VALVES 188CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS
DURADRIVE SERIES
Input Impedance
MS41-7153/AV-609-1 80 kΩ @ 0/2-10 VDC;
500Ω @ 4-20 mA
Conduit Connection 1/2” FNPT
Wiring
MF-22303 48" (122 cm) 18 AWG plenum cable
rated for UL
Mx51-7103 36" (91 cm) plenum cable
Mxxx-7203 36" (91 cm) appliance cable
Mx41-7153 36" (91 cm) cable, 18 AWG
Enclosure Rating
MF-22303 NEMA 1 (IP31)
All others NEMA 2 (IP54)
Feedback
MF51, MS51, MS41 2-10 VDC
Manual Override Crank
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature
MF-22303 40° to 281°F (4° to 138°C)
Mx51-7103, Mx41 -22° to 140°F (-30° to 60°C)
Mx51-7203, Mx61-7203
0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
Weight
MF-22303 1.5 lb (.68 kg)
Mxxx-7102, -7203 4.3 lb (1.9 kg)
Mx41-7153/AV-609 7.5 lb (3.4 kg)
Approvals
MF-22303 UL 873, File E9429; cUL, C22.2 No.
24-93;
CE EMC Directive 89/336/
EEC; Mx51, Mx61 UL 873, File E9429; cUL, C22.2 No.
24-93;
CE EMC Directive 89/336/
EEC; C-tick; Mx41-7153 UL, CE, cUL, C-tick
Warranty
MF-22303 2 years
All others 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The Schneider Electric DuraDrive Series linear globe valve
actuators are designed to mount directly onto two- and three-
way VB-7000 and VB-8000 Series globe valves
. They have
integral linkage to provide linear travel and are available in a wide selection of spring and non-spring return models
.
FEATURES
• Direct-mount, integral linkage (SR models)
• Wide selection of control signal inputs
• Rugged design, reliable performance
• Spring or non-spring return models
MA51-7103-000
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS

221. flfi 189CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS
DURADRIVE SERIES
Model NumberH WD
Mx51-7103 6-5/16 (16.0) 6-3/4 (17.2) 3-1/2 (8.9)
Mx51-7203 7 (17.8) 10-5/8 (27.0) 2-9/16 (6.5)
Mx61-7203 9-9/16 (24.2) 10-5/8 (27.0) 2-9/16 (6.5)
Mx223x3 3-5/16 (8.4) 5-9/16 (14.1) 3 (7.6)
Mx41-7153/AV- 609 11-5/8 (29.5) 4 (10.2) 6-1/8 (15.6)
* Mx41 assemb lies include separate AV-60x linkages.
Dimension diagrams are generic and for illustration purposes only.
WW DD
H
H
*Mx41/Mx51/Mx61
Mx-223x3
in (cm)
ACTUATOR DIMENSIONS
Model
Supply
Voltage
Supply
VA
Force/
Torque
Actuator
Code
Action Control Signal Stroke Drive Time
Spring
Return
Time
MF-22303 24 VAC 1.5 VA
45 lbf
(200 N)
255
NSR, DA/RA by
wiring terminations
Floating, contacts or
Triacs
9/16" (1.4 cm)
126 seconds
nominal
16 seconds
MA51-7103-100 24 VAC/VDC 5.3 VA
105 lbf
(467 N)
804 SR valve stem up Two-position 1/2" (1.3 cm) 44 seconds 19 seconds
MF51-7103-100 24 VAC/VDC 6.9 VA
105 lbf
(467 N)
804
SR valve stem up,
DA/RA by wiring
Floating 1/2" (1.3 cm) 60 seconds 16 seconds
MS51-7103-100 24 VAC/VDC 6.6 VA
105 lbf
(467 N)
814
SR, DA/RA by
jumpers
Prop. 2-10 VDC 1/2" (1.3 cm) 60 seconds 16 seconds
MS51-7103-160 24 VAC/VDC 6.6 VA
105 lbf
(467 N)
814
SR, DA/RA by
jumpers
Prop. 4-20 mA 1/2" (1.3 cm) 60 seconds 16 seconds
MA51-7203 24 VAC/VDC 9.7 VA
220 lbf
(979 N)
593 SR valve stem up Two-position 1/2" (1.3 cm)
190 seconds
maximum
35 seconds
MA61-7203 24 VAC/VDC 9.7 VA
220 lbf
(979 N)
596 SR valve stem up Two-position 1" (2.5 cm)
190 seconds
maximum
40 seconds
MF51-7203 24 VAC/VDC 9.7 VA
220 lbf
(979 N)
593
SR valve stem up,
DA/RA by wiring
Floating 1/2" (1.3 cm)
190 seconds
maximum
35 seconds
MF61-7203 24 VAC/VDC 9.7 VA
220 lbf
(979 N)
596
SR valve stem up,
DA/RA by wiring
Floating 1" (2.5 cm)
190 seconds
maximum
40 seconds
MS51-7203 24 VAC/VDC 9.7 VA
220 lbf
(979 N)
593
SR, DA/RA by
jumpers
Prop. 2-10 VDC or
4-20 mA
1/2" (1.3 cm)
190 seconds
maximum
35 seconds
MS61-7203 24 VAC/VDC 9.7 VA
220 lbf
(979 N)
596
SR, DA/RA by
jumpers
Prop. 2-10 VDC or
4-20 mA
1" (2.5 cm)
190 seconds
maximum
40 seconds
MA41-7153/AV-609-124 VAC/VDC 9.7 VA
133 in-lb
(15 Nm)
556
SR, Mounting
orientation DA/RA
Two-position
1" w/AV-609
linkage
190 seconds 30 seconds
MF41-7153/AV-609-124 VAC/VDC 9.7 VA
133 in-lb
(15 Nm)
556
SR, Mounting
orientation DA/RA
Floating
1" w/AV-609
linkage
190 seconds 30 seconds
MS41-7153/AV-609-124 VAC/VDC 9.7 VA
133 in-lb
(15 Nm)
556
SR, Mounting
orientation DA/RA
Prop. 2-10 VDC or
4-20 mA
1" w/AV-609
linkage
190 seconds 30 seconds
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS

222. CONTROL VALVES 190CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MF-22303 Non-spring return, 45 lbf, floating control, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" VB-7xxx valves
MA51-7103-100 Spring return stem up, 105 lbf, two-position, plenum cable, for 1/2" to 2" VB-7xxx
MF51-7103-100 Spring return stem up, 105 lbf, floating, plenum cable, for 1/2" to 2" VB-7xxx
MS51-7103-100 Spring return stem up, 105 lbf, proportional 2-10 VDC, plenum cable, for 1/2" to 2" VB-7xxx
MS51-7103-160 Spring return stem up, 105 lbf, proportional 4-20 mA, plenum cable, for 1/2" to 2" VB-7xxx
MA51-7203 Spring return stem up, 220 lbf, two-position, plenum cable, for 1-1/4" to 2" VB-7xxx
MA61-7203 Spring return stem up, 220 lbf, two-position, plenum cable, for 2-1/2" to 4" VB-7xxx
MF51-7203 Spring return stem up, 220 lbf, floating, plenum cable, for 1-1/4" to 2" VB-7xxx
MF61-7203 Spring return stem up, 220 lbf, floating, plenum cable, for 2-1/2" to 4" VB-7xxx
MS51-7203 Spring return stem up, 220 lbf, proportional, plenum cable, for 1-1/4" to 2" VB-7xxx
MS61-7203 Spring return stem up, 220 lbf, proportional, plenum cable, for 2-1/2" to 4" VB-7xxx
MA41-7153 Spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire control
MF41-7153 Spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), tri-state control, 24 VAC
MS41-7153 Spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), proportional control, 24 VAC
GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS
DURADRIVE SERIES
24 VAC
transformer
Green
Black
White (Retract)
SPDT floatingRed (Extend)
MF22303 Series
MF22303 Wiring
24 VAC transformer
or 20-30 VDC
SPST control contact
Black
Red
Com
Hot (+DC)
MA51-7103-100
MA51-7203
MA61-7203
MA51-7203, MA51-7103-100, MA61-7203 Wiring
24 VAC Transformer
or 20-30 VDC
Typical
floating
controller
Feedback signal
2 to 10 VDC
(–)
(+)
Black
Red
Common
Hot (+DC)
Retract
Extend
Blue
Yellow/Black
Violet
MF51-7103-100
MF51-7103-100 Wiring
24 VAC Transformer
or 20-30 VDC
mA DC
Control signal
VDC
Feedback signal
(–)
(–)
(+)
(+)
BlackC om
RedH ot (+DC)
Yellow/BlackA I
Violet AO
MS51-7103-160
MS51-7103-160 Wiring
24 VAC transformer
or 20-30 VDC
Typical
floating
controller
Black
Red
Common
Hot (+DC)
Extend
Retract
Blue
Yellow/Black
Green/Ye llow
MF51-7203
MF61-7203
MF41-7153, MF51/MF61-7203 Wiring
24 VAC transformer
or 22-30 VDC
To additional
actuators
Feedback signal
2 to 10 VDC
Control signal
4 to 20 mA
(+)
(+)
(–)
(–)
Com
Yellow/BlackAI
AO
Com
RedH ot (+DC)
MSX1-7203
2-10 VDC
MS51/MS61-7203 Wiring
LR
500Ω
Gray
Black
Violet
Green/Yellow
WIRING

223. flfi 191CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS
FORTA SERIES
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz
Supply VA
M400 6 VA
M800 15 VA
M1500 24 VA
Control Signal Floating or Proportional 0/2-10 VDC
or 4-20 mA
Motor Brushless DC
Noise 32 dBa maximum
Conduit Connection Two knockouts, 7/8" (2.2 cm)
Wiring Screw terminals
Feedback 2-10 VDC
Auxiliary Switch Two SPDT, 4A resistive @ 24 VAC
(model specific)
Action Non-spring return, direct or reverse
DIP switch selectable
Force
M400 90 lbf (400 N)
M800 180 lbf (800 N)
M1500 337 lbf (1500 N)
Stroke 3/8" to 2" (.9 to 5.2 cm)
Stroke Time Floating, 60 or 300 seconds;
Proportional, 15 seconds
(for 1/2" stroke)
Valve Mounting
Non "...VB" Requires AV-811 linkage for VB-7xxx,
AV-812 for VB-8xxx, VB-9xxx valves
"-VB" models Direct screw-mount to valve bonnet
Manual Override Yes
Operating Temperature 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C) for
chilled water applications; maximum
temperature reduces to 90°F (32°C)
when media temperature is 366°F
(186°C)
Operating Humidity
15% to 95% RH non-condensing
Dimensions
M400, M800 9.5"H x 6.3"W x 4.6"D
(24.2 x 16.0 x 11.7 cm)
M1500 6.8"H x 6.3"W x 4.6"D
(17.3 x 16.0 x 11.7 cm)
Weight 3.9 lb (1.8 kg)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 2 (IP54) if both conduit
connectors used, otherwise NEMA 1 (IP40)
Approvals
UL 873, cULus, C-tick, CE
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Forta Series globe valve actuator is a programmable
linear actuator family for use with VB7000, VB8000 and
VB9000 series two- and three-way valves
. The actuators are
easily configured for floating or proportional control, direct or reverse action, stroke timing and flow characteristics
. An
automatic input control signal setup allo
ws for easy field
installation onto existing Scheider Electric globe valves
. The
Forta actuator can also be purchased as part of a complete valve assembly for new applications/installations (order the VU Series)
.
FEATURES
• Floating or proportional control in the same actuator
• Proportional configuration 0-10, 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA,
500Ω resistor included
• Direct/Reverse action (switch selectable)
• Configurable run time
• Manual override
• Electronic valve sequencing and flow characteristic
(equal percentage or linear) selection
• Torque overload protection (full stroke)
• Easy auto zero and span
SPECIFICATIONS
M800A-VB
(screw-mount, linkage not
required)
M400A with AV-821
on a VB-7213-0-4-07
MOUNTING

224. CONTROL VALVES 192CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

M400A/
M400A-VB
(90 lbf)
M800A/
M800A-VB
(180 lbf)
M1500A/
M1500A-VB
(337 lbf)
Valve size
VB-7000 Bronze Valve
(AV-821 linkage required for M400A, M800A, M1500A)
VB-8000/9000 Flanged Iron Valve
(AV-822 linkage required)
1/2"
3/4"
1"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
2" M400A M800A M1500A
Valve size (90 lbf) (180 lbf) (337 lbf)
2-1/2" 3" 4" 5" 6"
* VB-9313 only
*
*
*

GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS
FORTA SERIES
AO
KC2K4K3KC1K2K1
AICDID2H G
Optional auxiliary switches
Terminal
G
H
AI
C
D1
D2
A0
Function
24 vac
24 vac
+
-
Floating
Floating
+
Description
power
power
input signal
signal common
Extend/
Retract*
Extend/
Retract*
feedback signal
*Exact operation will vary based on the setting
s
of DIP sw itch #1 and #7
*add- S2 to model number for auxiliary sw itch
Closed
Not Closed
Open
Not open
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
M400A 90 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/floating control, requires AV-81x linkage
M400A-S2 90 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/floating control, requires AV-81x linkage, auxiliary switch
M400A-S2-VB 90 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/floating control, screw-mount, auxiliary switch
M400A-VB 90 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/floating control, screw-mount
M800A 180 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/floating control, requires AV-81x linkage
M800A-S2 180 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/floating control, requires AV-81x linkage, auxiliary switch
M800A-S2-VB 180 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/floating control, screw-mount, auxiliary switch
M800A-VB 180 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/floating control, screw-mount
M1500A 337 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/floating control, requires AV-81x linkage
M1500A-S2 337 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/floating control, requires AV-81x linkage, auxiliary switch
M1500A-S2-VB 337 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/floating control, screw-mount, auxiliary switch
M1500A-VB 337 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/floating control, screw-mount
A
V-821
Linkage for VB-7xxx valves (required for M400A, M800A, M1500A)
AV-822 Linkage for VB-8xxx & VB-9xxx valves (required for M400A, M800A, M1500A)
COMPATIBILITY
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
DescriptionFunction in the
“OFF” position “ON” position Modulating Increase/decrease Control – Sequence Control
2-10 V 0-10 V Voltage range
6-10 V, 5-10 V 2-6 V, 0-5 V Part of voltage range 60 s 300 s Running time
Normal Inverted Direction of movement
Normal Linear/Logarithmic Valve characteristic Operation Operation/End position
adjustment
INC
6-10, 5-10
ADJ
LIN/LG
INV
300 s
0-10
2-6, 0-5
SEQ
OP
NORM
NORM
60 s
2-10
– – –
MOD
12 345678
O
N
End position
adjustment
ACCESSORIES
AV-821 Linkage for VB-7xxx valves (required for M400A, M800A, M1500A)
A
V-822
Linkage for VB-8xxx & VB-9xxx valves (required for M400A, M800A, M1500A)

225. flfi 193CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
BUTTERFLY VALVES
KB SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The KB Series butterfly valves from Valve Solutions are
available in sizes from 2" to 24" and come with a variety
of options to meet your needs
. The Fusion Bonded Epoxy
coated body along with the EPDM seat and o-ring make for a very durable and long lasting butterfly valve
. These valves are
available in 100 PSI, 150 PSI, and 200 PSI close off ratings for 2 position control
. These are available with low or high
pressure pneumatic actuators or with Valve Solutions’ new 1000X series actuators
.
FEATURES
• Good f
applications
• Ductile iron body construction
• PTFE bushing
• Stainless steel disc and stem
• Manual gear wheel available
• Actuators come with two 1/2" conduit entries
VSI Series 2100
with Series C and Solenoid
Size 2" thru 24"
Cv 135 thru 43116
Body Pattern Lugged 150 # butterfly
Flow Characteristic Modified EQ%
Rangeability 10:1 for 30° to 70° range
Leakage Rating Bubble tight
Mounting Flange ANSI 150
Body Rating ASME/ANSI Class 125
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
100 PSI, 200 PSI
Maximum Pressure Rating
ASME/ANSI Class 125
Media Compatibility H2O - 50% Glycol
Media Temperature Range
-30° to 225°F (-34° to 107°C)
Supply Voltage 24 VAC, 120 VAC
Supply Frequency 60 Hz
Supply VA Ranges from 38.4 VA to 474 VA
depending on actuator
Supply Current 0.34A to 7.2 A depending on actuator
Conduit Connection (1) 1/2" NPT conduit connection
Air Connections 80 PSI 1/4” NPT
Feedback 4-20 mA
Auxiliary Switch (2) SPDT, optional
Action Floating, modulating, 2-position
Rotation 90 degrees
Actuator Compatibility Dependent on model
Actuator Mounting ISO 5211, direct-coupled
Weight 32 to 1754 lbs. depending on model
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4 on select models
Approvals CSA US File 226201
Meets ARRA or BAA Yes
SPECIFICATIONS
VSI, 14-inch with 1060
VSI Butterfly Valve -
6-inch 3-way
with 1000-X
CU S

226. CONTROL VALVES 194CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
HEATER
PE
Grey
Brown
White
Pink
Purple
Orange
Black
Red
Blue
Full-close Signal
Full-open Signal
Com
+
Output Signal
-
L
Power Supply
N
+
Input Signal
-
Thermal Protector Push Button
M
C
L
1K
RP
1
2
3
SERVO-CONTROLLER
Field Wiring Field Wiring
PROPORTIONAL/MODULATING TWO-POSITION
*
Y&G
Grey
Brown
White
Black
Red
Blue
Full-close Signal
Full-open Signal
COM
Open
Close
K L
N
GND
Heater
OLS
CLS
C
Thermal Protector Push Button*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M
PE
ACTUATOR
ACTUATOR
Actuator
mounting plate
D
A
* For total valve height
add dimension “D”
to the
actuator coupling height
listed above.
BC
C
Two-way Valve Bodies
Three-way Tee-mounted Valve Bodies
VALVE DIMENSIONS in (mm)
PORT DIM 2" 2.5" 3" 4" 5" 6" 8" 10" 12" 14" 16" 18" 20" 24"
2-WAY A
1.693
(43)
1.811
(46)
1.811
(46)
2.047
(52)
2.205
(56)
2.205
(56)
2.632
(60)
2.677
(68)
3.071
(78)
3.071
(78)
4.016
(102)
4.488
(114)
5.000
(127)
6.053
(154)
3-WAY B
4.5
(114)
5 (127)
5.5
(140)
6.5
(165)
7.5
(190)
8 (203) 9 (228)
11
(280)
12
(305)
14
(356)
15
(381)
16.5
(419)
18
(457)
22
(559)
C
10.7
(272)
11.8
(300)
12.8
(325)
15
(381)
17.2
(437)
18.2
(462)
20.6
(523)
24.7
(627)
27
(686)
31
(788)
34
(864)
37.5
(953)
41
(1041)
50
(1270)
Height
without
actuator
D
6.34
(161)
6.89
(175)
7.13
(181)
7.9
(200)
8.4
(2.13)
8.9
(226)
10.24
(259)
11.5
(292)
13.27
(337)
14.49
(368)
15.75
(400)
16.61
(422)
18.9
(480)
22.13
(562)
Weight
2-WAY
LB
(KG)
9 (4.07)
10
(4.57)
12.75
(5.77)
19.25
(8.75)
24.25
(11.04)
28
(12.64)
44
(20.02)
70
(31.67)
103
(46.87)
152.5
(69.2)
253
(114.6)
333
(151.2)
408
(185)
626.5
(248.2)
Weight
3-WAY
LB
(KG)
MountingLUGS
(4ea)
5/8 -11
(4ea)
5/8 -11
(4ea)
5/8 -11
(8ea)
5/8 -11
(8ea)
3/4-10
(8ea)
3/4-10
(8ea)
3/4-10
(12ea)
7/8-9
(12ea)
7/8-9
(12ea)
1-8
(16ea)
1-8
(16ea)
1 1/8-7
(20ea)
1 1/8-7
(20ea)
1 1/4-7
1000 SERIES WIRING
BUTTERFLY VALVES
KB SERIES

227. flfi 195CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
KA / KAS ACTUATOR WIRING
Line
voltage
Line
voltage
Line
voltage24 VAC
KA-175-2T - KA-301-2T
Two-position Control
24 VAC
KA-175-2T - KA-301-2T
Floating Control
Floating
Controller
24 VAC
KA-301-P
Proportional Control
24 VAC Power
0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA Signal
+
–
0/2-10 VDC feedback
0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA
24 VDC
KA-175-P - KA-301-P
Proportional Control
24 VDC Po wer
0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA Signal
+
–
+
–
0/2-10 VDC feedback
0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA
1
2
Relay contact
or switch
Floating
controller
KAS-175-2
Two-position Control
KAS-175-M
Floating Control
KAS-175-M
Proportional Control
24 VAC
Line
voltage
Line
voltage
24 VAC
1 2
3 4
Line
voltage
24 VAC
0/2-10 VDC feedback
0/2-10 VDC or
0/4-20 mA
5
1
2
3 4
5
2
3 4
2
3 4
1 2
3 4
5
1 2
3 4
5
* 500Ω, 1/2"W or greater resistor required
when control signal is 4-20 mA
DOUBLE ACTING PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR SPECS (100PSI CLOSE OFF)
2-WAY
VALVE
SIZE
3-WAY
VALVE
SIZE
CLOSE
OFF
(PSI)
Pneu-
matic
Actuator
Air
Source
PSIG
Control Signal
Torque @
80PSIFailsafe
Timing
Seconds
Dimensions
HxWxL (in)
Coupling
Height (in)
Actuator
Weight
(lbs)2-POS Modulating In/LB
HIGH PRESSURE DOUBLE ACTING
(DA)
2”-3” 2”-3” 100 C-DA063 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 354 NO 0.5 4.25x3.25x6.6 DIRECT 4.41
4” 4” 100 C-DA083 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 761 NO 0.5 5.07x4.05x8.03 DIRECT 6.83
5-6” 5-6” 100 C-DA092 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 1097 NO 0.5 5.37x4.27x10.31 DIRECT 10.14
8” 8” 100 C-DA105 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 1611 NO 0.5 6.02x4.78x10.55 DIRECT 14.99
10” 10” 100 C-DA125 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 2443 NO 0.5 6.89x5.59x11.85 DIRECT 19.68
12” 12” 100 C-DA140 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 4160 NO 1 7.56x5.98x15.35 DIRECT 28.66
14” 14” 100 C-DA160 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 6470 NO 1 8.54x6.95x18.03 DIRECT 44.09
16”-18” 16” 100 C-DA190 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 10355 NO 2 10.24x8.12x20.67 DIRECT 68.37
20” 18” 100 C-DA210 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 12949 NO 2 11.22x8.90x20.94 DIRECT 103.62
20” 100 C-DA240 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 12949 NO 2 12.56x10.24x23.70 DIRECT 147.74
24” 24” 100 C-DA270 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 28464 NO 2 14.02x11.58x28.43 DIRECT 213.85
DOUBLE ACTING PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR SPECS (100PSI CLOSE OFF)
2-WAY
VALVE
SIZE
3-WAY
VALVE
SIZE
CLOSE
OFF
(PSI)
Pneu-
matic
Actuator
Air
Source
PSIG
Control Signal
Torque @
80PSIFailsafe
Timing
Seconds
Dimensions
HxWxL (in)
Coupling
Height (in)
Actuator
Weight
(lbs)2-POS Modulating In/LB
HIGH PRESSURE DOUBLE ACTING
(DA)
2”-3” 2”-2.5” 200 C-DA063 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 354 NO 0.5 4.25x3.25x6.6 DIRECT 4.41
4” 3”-4” 200 C-DA083 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 761 NO 0.5 5.07x4.05x8.03 DIRECT 6.83
5” 5” 200 C-DA092 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 1097 NO 0.5 5.37x4.27x10.31 DIRECT 10.14
6” 6” 200 C-DA105 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 1611 NO 0.5 6.02x4.78x10.55 DIRECT 14.99
8” 8” 200 C-DA125 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 2443 NO 0.5 6.89x5.59x11.85 DIRECT 19.68
10” 10” 200 C-DA140 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 4160 NO 1 7.56x5.98x15.35 DIRECT 28.66
12”-14” 12” 150 C-DA160 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 6470 NO 1 8.54x6.95x18.03 DIRECT 44.09
16” 14” 150 C-DA190 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 10355 NO 2 10.24x8.12x20.67 DIRECT 68.37
16” 150 C-DA210 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 12949 NO 2 11.22x8.90x20.94 DIRECT 103.62
18”-20” 18” 150 C-DA240 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 12949 NO 2 12.56x10.24x23.70 DIRECT 147.74
20” 150 C-DA270 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 28464 NO 2 14.02x11.58x28.43 DIRECT 213.85
24” 24” 150 C-DA300 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 37147 NO 3 14.88x12.76x29.21 DIRECT 242.51
BUTTERFLY VALVES
KB SERIES

228. CONTROL VALVES 196CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
SPRING RETURN PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR SPECS (100PSI CLOSE OFF)
2-WAY
VALVE
SIZE
3-WAY
VALVE
SIZE
CLOSE
OFF
(PSI)
Pneumatic
Actuator
Air
Source
PSIG
Control Signal
Torque @
80PSIFailsafe
Timing
Seconds
Dimensions
HxWxL (in)
Coupling
Height (in)
Actuator
Weight
(lbs)2-POS Modulating In/LB
HIGH PRESSURE SPRING RETURN
(SR)
2" 2" 100 C-SR063 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 121 YES 0.5 4.25x3.25x6.6 DIRECT 4.63
2.5"-3" 2.5"-3" 100 C-SR083 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA280 YES 0.5 5.07x4.05x8.03 DIRECT 7.94
4"-5" 4" 100 C-SR092 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA413 YES 0.5 5.37x4.27x10.31 DIRECT 11.46
5" 100 C-SR105 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA560 YES 0.5 6.02x4.78x10.55 DIRECT 15.24
6"-8" 6" 100 C-SR125 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA929 YES 0.5 6.89x5.59x11.85 DIRECT 22.27
10" 8"-10" 100 C-SR140 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA1522 YES 1 7.56x5.98x15.35 DIRECT 33.07
12" 12" 100 C-SR160 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA2469 YES 1 8.54x6.95x18.03 DIRECT 52.91
14" 14" 100 C-SR190 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA3540 YES 2 10.24x8.12x20.67 DIRECT 77.16
16" 100 C-SR210 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA4868 YES 2 11.22x8.90x20.94 DIRECT 121.25
18" 16" 100 C-SR240 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA7266 YES 2 12.56x10.24x23.70 DIRECT 176.37
20" 18" 100 C-SR270 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA9904 YES 2 14.02x11.58x28.43 DIRECT 260.15
20" 100 C-SR300 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA12922 YES 3 14.88x12.76x29.21 DIRECT 286.6
SPRING RETURN PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR SPECS (200PSI CLOSE OFF)
2-WAY
VALVE
SIZE
3-WAY
VALVE
SIZE
CLOSE
OFF
(PSI)
Pneumatic
Actuator
Air
Source
PSIG
Control Signal
Torque @
80PSIFailsafe
Timing
Seconds
Dimensions
HxWxL (in)
Coupling
Height (in)
Actuator
Weight
(lbs)2-POS Modulating In/LB
HIGH PRESSURE SPRING RETURN
(SR)
2" 200 C-SR063 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA121 YES 0.5 4.25x3.25x6.6 DIRECT 4.63
2.5"-3" 2"-2.5" 200 C-SR083 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA280 YES 0.5 5.07x4.05x8.03 DIRECT 7.94
4" 3" 200 C-SR092 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA413 YES 0.5 5.37x4.27x10.31 DIRECT 11.46
4" 200 C-SR105 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA560 YES 0.5 6.02x4.78x10.55 DIRECT 15.24
5"-6" 5" 200 C-SR125 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA929 YES 0.5 6.89x5.59x11.85 DIRECT 22.27
8" 6"-8" 200 C-SR140 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA1522 YES 1 7.56x5.98x15.35 DIRECT 33.07
10" 200 C-SR160 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA2469 YES 1 8.54x6.95x18.03 DIRECT 52.91
12" 10" 200 C-SR190 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA3540 YES 2 10.24x8.12x20.67 DIRECT 77.16
14" 12" 150 C-SR210 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA4868 YES 2 11.22x8.90x20.94 DIRECT 121.25
16" 14" 150 C-SR240 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA7266 YES 2 12.56x10.24x23.70 DIRECT 176.37
16" 150 C-SR270 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA9904 YES 2 14.02x11.58x28.43 DIRECT 260.15
18" 18" 150 C-SR300 40-130 24/120VAC 3-15PSI, 4-20mA12922 YES 3 14.88x12.76x29.21 DIRECT 286.6
LOW PRESSURE SPRING RETURN PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR SPECS (100PSI CLOSE OFF)
2-WAY
VALVE
SIZE
3-WAY
VALVE
SIZE
CLOSE
OFF
(PSI)
Pneumatic
Actuator
Air
Source
PSIG
Control Signal
Torque @
80PSIFailsafe
Timing
Seconds
Dimensions
HxWxL (in)
Coupling
Height (in)
Actuator
W
eight
(lbs)2-POS Modulating In/LB
LOW PRESSURE
SPRING RETURN (SR)
2"-3" 2"-2.5" 100 D31535130 20 20 PSI NA 201 YES 15 10x8x16 3" 14
4"-5" 3"-4" 100 D32445110 20 20 PSI NA 425 YES 15 12x10x20 4" 24
6"-8" 5"-6" 100 D32465110 20 20 PSI NA 602 YES 15 14x12x24 5" 35
10"-12" 8"-10" 100 D32465110(X2) 20 20 PSI NA 1204 YES 15 14x12x24 5" 70
2"-3" 2"-2.5" 100 D31535120 20 NA 3-15 PSI 201 YES 15 10x8x16 3" 14
4"-5" 3"-4" 100 D32445100 20 NA 3-15 PSI 425 YES 15 12x10x20 4" 24
6"-8" 5"-6" 100 D32465100 20 NA 3-15 PSI 602 YES 15 14x12x24 5" 35
10"-12" 8"-10" 100 D32465100(X2) 20 NA 3-15 PSI 1204 YES 15 14x12x24 5" 70
LOW PRESSURE SPRING RETURN PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR SPECS (100PSI CLOSE OFF)
2-WAY
VALVE
SIZE
3-WAY
VALVE
SIZE
CLOSE
OFF
(PSI)
Pneumatic
Actuator
Air
Source
PSIG
Control Signal
Torque @
80PSIFailsafe
Timing
Seconds
Dimensions
HxWxL (in)
Coupling
Height (in)
Actuator
Weight
(lbs)2-POS Modulating In/LB
LOW PRESSURE
SPRING RETURN (SR)
2"-2.5" 2" 200 D31535130 20 20 PSI NA 201 YES 15 10x8x16 3" 14
3"-4" 2.5"-3" 200 D32445110 20 20 PSI NA 425 YES 15 12x10x20 4" 24
5"-6" 4"-5" 200 D32465110 20 20 PSI NA 602 YES 15 14x12x24 5" 35
8" 6"-8" 200 D32465110(X2) 20 20 PSI NA 1204 YES 15 14x12x24 5" 70
2"-2.5" 2" 200 D31535120 20 NA 3-15 PSI 201 YES 15 10x8x16 3" 14
3"-4" 2.5"-3" 200 D32445100 20 NA 3-15 PSI 425 YES 15 12x10x20 4" 24
5"-6" 4"-5" 200 D32465100 20 NA 3-15 PSI 602 YES 15 14x12x24 5" 35
8" 6"-8" 200 D32465100(X2) 20 NA 3-15 PSI 1204 YES 15 14x12x24 5" 70
BUTTERFLY VALVES
KB SERIES

229. flfi 197CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
ELECTRIC ACTUATOR SPECIFICATIONS (SIZED FOR 100 PSI CLOSE-OFF)
2-Way
Valve Size
3Way
Valve Size
Close Off
Psi
Electric
Actuator
Electric
Power
Control
Signal
Torque
(in/lb)
Fail
Safe
Run Time
(Sec-
onds)
Dimensions
(HxWxL) In.
Coupling
Height
Coupling
Height
3Way
2"-3" 2"-2.5" 100 KA-175 24VAC(6VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC
175 NO 95 8"x7"x9.25" 8" 8"
2"-3" 2"-2.5" 100 KAS-175 24VAC(16VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC
175 YES 95 8"x7"x9.25" 8" 8"
4" 3" 100 KA-301 24VAC(9VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC
301 NO 95 8"x7"x9.25" 8" 8"
4"-5" 3"-4" 100 GKB24 24VAC(21VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC
360 YES 95 8"x7"x9.25" 8" 8"
5" 4" 100 GMB24 24VAC(6VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC
360 NO 95 8"x7"x9.25" 8" 8"
6" 5"-6" 100 GKX24MFT(X2) 24VAC(42VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC
720 YES 95 13"x7"x9.25" 13" 13"
2"-5" 2"-5" 100 1005-X 24VAC(40VA) or
120VAC(40VA)
2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC,
4-20mA
443 NO 20 6.3"x5.4"x6.3" DIRECT 2"
6" 6" 100 1010-X 24VAC(46VA) or
120VAC(97VA)
2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC,
4-20mA
885 NO 30 7.2"x5.8"x7.7" DIRECT 2"
8" - 10" 8" - 10" 100 1020-X 24VAC(116VA)
or
120VAC(201VA)
2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC,
4-20mA
1770 NO 30 8.6"x7.2"x10" DIRECT 3"
12"-14" 12" 100 1040-X 24VAC(173VA)
or
120VAC(410VA)
2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC,
4-20mA
3540 NO 30 8.6"x7.2"x10" DIRECT 3"
14" 100 1060-X 120VAC(432VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC,
4-20mA
5310 NO 45 8.6"x7.2"x10" DIRECT 3"
16"-18" 16"-18" 100 1100-X 120VAC(456VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC,
4-20mA
8851 NO 30 9.6"x9.5"x12.2" DIRECT 3"
20" 20" 100 1160-X 120VAC(472VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC,
4-20mA
14616 NO 48 9.6"x9.5"x12.2" DIRECT 3"
24" 24" 100 1250-X 120VAC(475VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC,
4-20mA
22127 NO 75 9.6"x9.5"x12.2" DIRECT 3"
1. Series 1000-X modulating units are equipped with control modules that accept 2-10V or 4-20mA control signal and feedback signal of 4-20mA.
2. The KA and KAS actuators are Kele brand direct coupled actuators and are rated NEMA 2 - indoor use. They can be used on the smaller sized 2-4" valves. The same applies to the
G Series Belimo brand.
3. The Series 1000-X actuators are standard equipped with a heater and are NEMA 4 rated for outdoor usage.
BUTTERFLY VALVES
KB SERIES

230. CONTROL VALVES 198CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
ELECTRIC ACTUATOR SPECIFICATIONS (SIZED FOR 150/200 PSI CLOSE-OFF)
2-Way
Valve Size
3Way
Valve Size
Electric
Actuator
Electric
Power
Control
Signal
Torque
(In/Lb)
Fail
Safe
Run Time
(Sec-
onds)
Dimensions
(HxWxL) In.
Coupling
Height
2Way
Coupling
Height
3Way
2" 2" 200 KA-175 24VAC(6VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC
175 NO 95 8"x7"x9.25" 8" 8"
2" 2" 200 KAS-175 24VAC(16VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC
175 YES 95 8"x7"x9.25" 8" 8"
2.5"-3" 2.5" 200 KA-301 24VAC(16VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC
175 NO 95 8"x7"x9.25" 8" 8"
2.5"-3" 2.5" 200 EFB24 24VAC(14VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC
270 YES 95 8"x7"x9.25" 13" 13"
4"-5" 3" 200 GMB24(X2) 24VAC(21VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC
720 NO 95 13"x7"x9.25" 13" 13"
4" 4" 200 EFB24(X2) 24VAC(28VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC
270 YES 95 13"x7"x9.25" 13" 13"
5" 5" 200 GKX24MFT 24VAC(42VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC
720 YES 95 13"x7"x9.25" 13" 13"
2"-4" 2"-4" 200 1005-X 24VAC(40VA) or
120VAC(40VA)
2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC,
4-20mA
443 NO 20 5.5"x4.4"x6.3" DIRECT 2"
5"-6" 5"-6" 200 1010-X 24VAC(46VA) or
120VAC(97VA)
2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC,
4-20mA
885 NO 30 7.2"x5.8"x7.7" DIRECT 2"
8" 8" 200 1020-X 24VAC(116VA)
or
120VAC(201VA)
2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC,
4-20mA
1770 NO 30 8.6"x7.2"x10" DIRECT 3"
10" -12" 10" 200 1040-X 24VAC(173VA)
or
120VAC(410VA)
2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC,
4-20mA
3540 NO 30 8.6"x7.2"x10" DIRECT 3"
14" 12" 200 1060-X 120VAC(432VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC,
4-20mA
5310 NO 45 8.6"x7.2"x10" DIRECT 3"
14" 14" 150 1060-X 120VAC(432VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC,
4-20mA
5310 NO 45 8.6"x7.2"x10" DIRECT 3"
16"-18" 16" 150 1100-X 120VAC(456VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC,
4-20mA
8851 NO 30 9.6"x9.5"x12.2" DIRECT 3"
20" 18" 150 1160-X 120VAC(472VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC,
4-20mA
14616 NO 48 9.6"x9.5"x12.2" DIRECT 3"
24" 20" 150 1250-X 120VAC(475VA) 2-POS, FLOAT,
2-10VDC,
4-20mA
22127 NO 75 9.6"x9.5"x12.2" DIRECT 3"
1. Series 1000-X modulating units are equipped with control modules that accept 2-10V or 4-20mA control signal and feedback signal of 4-20mA.
2. The KA and KAS actuators are Kele brand direct coupled actuators and are rated NEMA 2 - indoor use. They can be used on the smaller sized 2-4" valves. The same applies to the G Series Belimo
brand.
3. The Series 1000-X actuators are standard equipped with a heater and are NEMA 4 rated for outdoor usage.
BUTTERFLY VALVES
KB SERIES

231. flfi 199CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
ELECTRIC ACTUATOR CODES (NEMA 4 ELECTRIC)
VALVE TYPE/SIZE 1E2V 2E2V 1EMV2 / 1EMV4 2EMV2 / 2EMV4
2-WAY/2" 1005-X 1005-X-24V 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4)
2-WAY/2.5" 1005-X 1005-X-24V 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4)
2-WAY/3" 1005-X 1005-X-24V 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4)
2-WAY/4" 1005-X 1005-X-24V 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4)
2-WAY/5" 1005-X or 1010-X 1005-X-24V or 1010-X-24 1005/S -X-2(4) OR 1010/S-X 1005/S-X-24V-2(4) or 1010/S-X-24V-2(4)
2-WAY/6" 1010-X 1005-X-24V or 1010-X-24 1010/S-X 1010/S-X-24V-2(4)
2-WAY/8" 1020-X 1005-X-24V or 1020-X-24V 1020/S-X 1020/S-X-24V-2(4)
2-WAY/10" 1020-X or 1040-X 1005-X-24V or 1040-X-24V 1020/S-X or 1040/S-X 1020/S-X-24V-2(4) or 1040/S-X-24V-2(4)
2-WAY/12" 1040-X 1005-X-24V or 1040-X-24V 1040/S-X 1040/S-X-24V-2(4)
2-WAY/14" 1040-X or 1060-X 1005-X-24V 1040/S-X or 1060/S-X 1040/S-X-24V-2(4)
2-WAY/16" 1100-X — 1100/S-X —
2-WAY/18" 1100-X or 1160-X — 1100/S-X or 1160/S-X —
2-WAY/20" 1160-X — 1160/S-X —
2-WAY/24" 1250-X — 1250/S-X —
3-WAY/2" 1005-X 1005-X-24V 1005/S-X-2(4) or 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4)
3-WAY/2.5" 1005-X 1005-X-24V 1005/S-X-2(4) or 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4)
3-WAY/3" 1005-X 1005-X-24V 1005/S-X-2(4) or 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4)
3-WAY/4" 1005-X or 1010-X 1005-X-24V or 1010-X-24 1005/S-X-2(4) or 1010/S-X 1005/S-X-24V-2(4) or 1010/S-X-24V-2(4)
3-WAY/5" 1005-X or 1010-X 1005-X-24V or 1010-X-24 1005/S-X-2(4) or 1010/S-X 1005/S-X-24V-2(4) or 1010/S-X-24V-2(4)
3-WAY/6" 1010-X or 1020-X 1010-X-24V or 1020-X-24 1010/S-X or 1020/S-X 1010/S-X-24V-2(4) or 1020/S-X-24V-2(4)
3-WAY/8" 1020-X 1020-X-24V 1020/S-X 1020/S-X-24V-2(4)
3-WAY/10" 1020-X or 1040-X 1020-X-24V or 1040-X-24V 1020/S-X or 1040/S-X 1020/S-X-24V-2(4) or 1040/S-X-24V-2(4)
3-WAY/12" 1040-X or 1060-X 1040-X-24V 1040/S-X or 1060/S-X 1040/S-X-24V-2(4)
3-WAY/14" 1060-X — 1060/S-X —
3-WAY/16" 1100-X — 1100/S-X —
3-WAY/18" 1100-X or 1160-X — 1100/S-X or 1160/S-X —
3-WAY/20" 1160-X or 1250-X — 1160/S-X or 1250/S-X —
3-WAY/24" 1250-X — 1250/S-X —
ELECTRIC ACTUATOR CODES (NEMA 2 ELECTRIC)
VALVE TYPE/SIZE 2E2D 2E2DSC / 2E2DS0 2EMD 2EMDSC / 2EMDSO
2-WAY/2" KA-175-2T KAS-175-2 KA-175-P KAS-175-M
2-WAY/2.5" KA-175-2T or KA-301-2T KAS-175-2 or EFB24 KA-175-P or KA-301-P KAS-175-M or EFB24-SR
2-WAY/3" KA-175-2T or KA-301-2T KAS-175-2 or EFB24 KA-175-P or KA-301-P KAS-175-M or EFB24-SR
2-WAY/4" KA-301-2T or GMB24-3(x2) GKB24-3 or EFB24(x2) KA-301-P or GMB24-SR(x2) GKB24-SR or EFB24-SR(x2)
2-WAY/5" GMB24-3 or GMB24-3(x2) GKB24-3 or GKX24-MFT(x2) GMB24-SR or GMB24-SR(x2) GKB24-SR or GKX24-MFT(x2)
2-WAY/6" GMB24-3(x2) GKX24-MFT(x2) GMB24-SR(x2) GKX24-MFT(x2)
3-WAY/2" KA-175-2T KAS-175-2 KA-175-P KAS-175-M
3-WAY/2.5" KA-175-2T or KA-301-2T KAS-175-2 or EFB24 KA-175-P or KA-301-P KAS-175-M or EFB24-SR
3-WAY/3" KA-301-2T EFB24 or GKB24-3 KA-301-P EFB24-SR or GKB24-SR
3-WAY/4" GMB24-3 or GMB24-3(x2) GKB24-3 or EFB24(x2) GMB24-SR or GMB24-SR(x2) GKB24-SR or EFB24-SR(x2)
3-WAY/5" GMB24-3(x2) GKX24-MFT(x2) GMB24-SR(x2) GKX24-MFT(x2)
3-WAY/6" GMB24-3(x2) GKX24-MFT(x2) GMB24-SR(x2) GKX24-MFT(x2)
BUTTERFLY VALVES
KB SERIES

232. CONTROL VALVES 200CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014March 2014
ACTUATOR CODES (LOW PRESSURE PNEUMATIC- 20PSI AIR)
VALVE TYPE/SIZE LP2SC LP2SO LPMSC LPMSO
2-WAY/2" D-3153-5130 D-3153-5130 D-3153-5120 D-3153-5120
2-WAY/2.5" D-3153-5130 D-3153-5130 D-3153-5120 D-3153-5120
2-WAY/3" D-3153-5130 or D-3244-5110 D-3153-5130 or D-3244-5110 D-3153-5120 or D-3244-5100 D-3153-5120 or D-3244-5100
2-WAY/4" D-3244-5110 D-3244-5110 D-3244-5100 D-3244-5100
2-WAY/5" D-3244-5110 or D-3246-5110 D-3244-5110 or D-3246-5110 D-3244-5100 or D-3246-5100 D-3244-5100 or D-3246-5100
2-WAY/6" D-3246-5110 D-3246-5110 D-3246-5100 D-3246-5100
2-WAY/8" D-3246-5110 or D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5110 or D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5100 or D-3246-5100(x2) D-3246-5100 or D-3246-5100(x2)
2-WAY/10" D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5100(x2) D-3246-5100(x2)
2-WAY/12" D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5100(x2) D-3246-5100(x2)
3-WAY/2" D-3153-5130 D-3153-5130 D-3153-5120 D-3153-5120
3-WAY/2.5" D-3153-5130 or D-3244-5110 D-3153-5130 or D-3244-5110 D-3153-5120 or D-3244-5100 D-3153-5120 or D-3244-5100
3-WAY/3" D-3244-5110 D-3244-5110 D-3244-5100 D-3244-5100
3-WAY/4" D-3244-5110 or D-3246-5110 D-3244-5110 or D-3246-5110 D-3244-5100 or D-3246-5100 D-3244-5100 or D-3246-5100
3-WAY/5" D-3246-5110 D-3246-5110 D-3246-5100 D-3246-5100
3-WAY/6" D-3246-5110 or D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5110 or D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5100 or D-3246-5100(x2) D-3246-5100 or D-3246-5100(x2)
3-WAY/8" D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5100(x2) D-3246-5100(x2)
3-WAY/10" D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5100(x2) D-3246-5100(x2)
ACTUATOR CODES (HIGH PRESSURE PNEUMATIC-80 PSI AIR)
VALVE TYPE/SIZEHP21 / HP22
HP2SC1 / HP2SC2
HP2S01 / HP2S02
HPM HPMSC / HPMSO
2-WAY/2" C-DA63/WT8 C-SR63/WT8 C-DA63/VP7G C-SR63/VP7G
2-WAY/2.5" C-DA63/WT8 C-SR83/WT8 C-DA63/VP7G C-SR83/VP7G
2-WAY/3" C-DA63/WT8 C-SR83/WT8 C-DA63/VP7G C-SR83/VP7G
2-WAY/4" C-DA83/WT8 C-SR92/WT8 C-DA83/VP7G C-SR92/VP7G
2-WAY/5" C-DA83/WT8 or C-DA092/WT8 C-SR92/WT8 or C-SR125/WT8 C-DA83/VP7G or C-DA092/VP7G C-SR92/VP7G or C-SR125/VP7G
2-WAY/6" C-DA092/WT8 or C-DA105/WT8 C-SR125/WT8 C-DA092/VP7G or C-DA105/VP7G C-SR125/VP7G
2-WAY/8" C-DA105/WT8 or C-DA125/WT8 C-SR125/WT8 or C-SR140/WT8 C-DA105/VP7G or C-DA125/VP7G C-SR125/VP7G or C-SR140/VP7G
2-WAY/10" C-DA125/WT8 or C-DA140/WT8 C-SR140/WT8 or C-SR160/WT8 C-DA125/VP7G or C-DA140/VP7G C-SR140/VP7G or C-SR160/VP7G
2-WAY/12" C-DA140/WT8 or C-DA160/WT8 C-SR160/WT8 or C-SR190/WT8 C-DA140/VP7G or C-DA160/VP7G C-SR160/VP7G or C-SR190/VP7G
2-WAY/14" C-DA160/WT8 C-SR190/WT8 or C-SR210/WT8 C-DA160/VP7G C-SR190/VP7G or C-SR210/VP7G
2-WAY/16" C-DA190/WT8 C-SR210/WT8 or C-SR240/WT8 C-DA190/VP7G C-SR210/VP7G or C-SR240/VP7G
2-WAY/18" C-DA190/WT8 or C-DA240/WT8 C-SR240/WT8 or C-SR300/WT8 C-DA190/VP7G or C-DA240/VP7G C-SR240/VP7G or C-SR300/VP7G
2-WAY/20" C-DA210/WT8 or C-DA240/WT8 C-SR270/WT8 C-DA210/VP7G or C-DA240/VP7G C-SR270/VP7G
2-WAY/24" C-DA270/WT8 or C-DA300/WT8 — C-DA270/VP7G or C-DA300/VP7G —
3-WAY/2" C-DA63/WT8 C-SR63/WT8 or C-SR83/WT8 C-DA63/VP7G C-SR63/VP7G or C-SR83/VP7G
3-WAY/2.5" C-DA63/WT8 C-SR83/WT8 C-DA63/VP7G C-SR83/VP7G
3-WAY/3" C-DA63/WT8 or C-DA83/WT8 C-SR83/WT8 or C-SR92/WT8 C-DA63/VP7G or C-DA83/VP7G C-SR83/VP7G or C-SR92/VP7G
3-WAY/4" C-DA83/WT8 C-SR92/WT8 or C-SR105/WT8 C-DA83/VP7G C-SR92/VP7G or C-SR105/VP7G
3-WAY/5" C-DA83/WT8 or C-DA092/WT8 C-SR105/WT8 or C-SR125/WT8 C-DA83/VP7G or C-DA092/VP7G C-SR105/VP7G or C-SR125/VP7G
3-WAY/6" C-DA092/WT8 or C-DA105/WT8 C-SR125/WT8 or C-SR140/WT8 C-DA092/VP7G or C-DA105/VP7G C-SR125/VP7G or C-SR140/VP7G
3-WAY/8" C-DA105/WT8 or C-DA125/WT8 C-SR140/WT8 C-DA105/VP7G or C-DA125/VP7G C-SR140/VP7G
3-WAY/10" C-DA125/WT8 or C-DA140/WT8 C-SR140/WT8 or C-SR190/WT8 C-DA125/VP7G or C-DA140/VP7G C-SR140/VP7G or C-SR190/VP7G
3-WAY/12" C-DA140/WT8 or C-DA160/WT8 C-SR160/WT8 or C-SR210/WT8 C-DA140/VP7G or C-DA160/VP7G C-SR160/VP7G or C-SR210/VP7G
3-WAY/14" C-DA160/WT8 or C-DA190/WT8 C-SR190/WT8 or C-SR240/WT8 C-DA160/VP7G or C-DA190/VP7G C-SR190/VP7G or C-SR240/VP7G
3-WAY/16" C-DA190/WT8 or C-DA210/WT8 C-SR240/WT8 or C-SR270/WT8 C-DA190/VP7G or C-DA210/VP7G C-SR240/VP7G or C-SR270/VP7G
3-WAY/18" C-DA210/WT8 or C-DA240/WT8 C-SR270/WT8 or C-SR300/WT8 C-DA210/VP7G or C-DA240/VP7G C-SR270/VP7G or C-SR300/VP7G
3-WAY/20" C-DA240/WT8 or C-DA270/WT8 C-SR300/WT8 C-DA240/VP7G or C-DA270/V97G C-SR300/VP7G
3-WAY/24" C-DA270/WT8 — C-DA270/VP7G —
Note: Actuators listed in order depending on valve body pressure rating
.
Example:
C-DA125/VP7G or C-DA140/VP7G
100 psi pressure body or 150/200 psi pressure body
BUTTERFLY VALVES
KB SERIES

233. flfi 201CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Actuator
Normal
Closed
Slave
Normal
Open
1
Actuator
Normal
Closed
Slave
Normal
Open
5
Act.
Normal
Closed
Slave
Normal
Open
32
Actuator
Normal
Closed
Slave
Normal
Open
Slave
Normal
Open
6
Actuator
Normal
Closed
Act.
Normal
Closed
Slave
Normal
Open
4
MODEL
KB Butterfly Valve
PRESSURE
1100 psi (low pressure)
2150/200 psi (high pressure)
TYPE
-22-Way
-33-Way
SIZE
-022” -10 10”
-252.5” -12 12”
-033” -14 14”
-044” -16 16”
-055” -18 18”
-066” -20 20”
-088” -24 24”
ACTUATOR
-2E2V NEMA 4, 24V electric, 2-position -LP2SC Low pressure pneumatic, 2-position, spring return, NC
-2EMV2 NEMA 4, 24V electric, modulating, 2-10 VDC input-LP2SO Low pressure pneumatic, 2-position, spring return, NO
-2EMV4 NEMA 4, 24V electric, modulating, 4-20 mA input-LPMSC Low pressure pneumatic, 3-15 positioner, spring return, NC
-1E2V NEMA 4, 120V electric, 2-position -LPMSO Low pressure pneumatic, 3-15 positioner, spring return, NO
-1EMV2 NEMA 4, 120V electric, modulating, 2-10 VDC input-HP21 High pressure pneumatic, double acting, 120V solenoid
-1EMV4 NEMA 4, 120V electric, modulating, 4-20 mA input-HP22 High pressure pneumatic, double acting, 24V solenoid
-2E2D NEMA 2, 24V electric, 2-position -HPM High pressure pneumatic, double acting, 3-15 positioner
-2E2DSC NEMA 2, 24v electric, 2-position, spring return, NC-HP2SC1 High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NC, 120V solenoid
-2E2DSO NEMA 2, 24v electric, 2-position, spring return, NO-HP2SO1 High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NO, 120V solenoid
-2EMD NEMA 2, 24V electric, modulating -HP2SC2 High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NC, 24V solenoid
-2EMDSC NEMA 2, 24v electric, modulating, spring return, NC-HP2SO2 High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NO, 24V solenoid
-2EMDSO NEMA 2, 24v electric, modulating, spring return, NO-HPMSC High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NC, 3-15 positioner
-HPMSO High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NO, 3-15 positioner
3-Way ARRANGEMENT CODE
(See arrangement chart for diagram)*
-01 Arrangement 1
-02 Arrangement 2
-03 Arrangement 3
-04 Arrangement 4
-05 Arrangement 5
-06 Arrangement 6
KB 1 -3 -02 -1EMV2 -01 Example: KB1-3-02-1EMV2-01
* Note: Arrangement Code only needed when ordering 3-way valves
BUTTERFLY VALVES
KB SERIES
THREE-WAY CONFIGURATION

234. CONTROL VALVES 202CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
BUTTERFLY VALVES
F6, F7 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The F6, F7 Series butterfly valves fulfill the requirements
of commercial and industrial HVAC applications requiring
positive shutoff for water
. Applications include chiller isolation,
cooling to
wer isolation, change-over systems, large air
handler coil control and bypass, and various water distribution and storage systems. The F6 assemblies are two-way and
the F7 are three-way flow patterns. Undercut disc assemblies,
designated by "HDU" in the part number have a maximum close-off of 50 psid, and full-cut models, designated by "HD" part number, have full 200 psid close-off rating
. Small
siz
e valves are available with economical Belimo rotary
actuators and all sizes are available with industrial grade, NEMA 4 actuators, to meet most application requirements.
Other siz
es, assembly combinations, connection types, and
materials of construction are available
.
FEATURES
• Advanced seat and disc design provide bubble-tight
shutoff while maintaining a low seating torque
• Standard rotary actuators, or industrial grade NEMA 4
actuators for a variety of application requirements
• Internal valve body five bushing design isolates the
valve body from the shaft resulting in better control
• Standard stainless steel disc and shaft for strength, durability and long-lasting operation
Mounting Flange ANSI Class 125/150 lug style flanges
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
50 psid (345 kPa) (undercut models);
200 psid (1380 kPa) (full rated models)
Pressure Rating
200 psig (1379 kPa) @ -30°F
to 275°F per ASME/ANSI Class 125/150
Materials Of Construction

Ductile iron ASTM A536 (with epoxy
powder finish) valve body; EPDM seat; 416 stainless steel shaft; 304 stainless steel disc; EPDM o-ring; RPTFE bushings
Media Compatibility
Hot or chilled water, up to 60% glycol
Media Temperature Range
-22° to 250°F (-30° to 120°C)
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC (Belimo direct-coupled);
24 VAC or 120 VAC (SY Series)
Control Signal Two-position, floating, proportional
0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
Manual Override All models have manual override
Operating Temperature -22° to 122°F (-30° to 50°C)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 2 and NEMA 4 enclosed
(Belimo direct-coupled actuators);

NEMA 4/4X (SY Series industrial actuators)
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
APPLICATIONS
Butterfly valves allow high flows with relatively low pressure
loss, compared to globe valves, and are typically used for
isolation or flow control
. Good modulation is achieved between
30 and 70 degrees of full open. At valve openings greater
than 70 degrees, the pressure loss is too low to produce any significant effect on flow or the energy loss of a flow system
.
Butterfly valves can be controlled with a maintenance-free electronic actuator or manually, with an ergonomic, wear-free plastic handle or gear operator
.

235. flfi 203CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Non-Spring Return
2 Pos.
Set Up Required
Field Logic Determines Normal Position
Non-Spring Return
2 Pos.
Specify Flow Pattern [10-35]
No Set Up Required
Field Logic Determines Normal Position
Modulating
NC
(Normally Closed)
1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Closed
Modulating
Master (Actuated) Valve
NC (Normally Closed)
1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Closed
NO
(Normally Open)
1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Open
Master (Actuated) Valve
NO (Normally Open)
1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Open
Spring Return
NO/FO
(Normally Open/Fail Open)
Field Logic Determines Normal Position
Spring Fails Valve OPEN
Spring Return
Modulating 2 Pos.
Specify Flow Pattern [10-35]
NO/FO (Normally Open/Fail Open)
Field Logic Determines Normal Position
Spring Fails Master Valve OPEN
NC/FC
(Normally Closed/Fail Closed)
Field Logic Determines Normal Position
Spring Fails Valve CLOSED
NC/FC (Normally Closed/Fail Closed)
Field Logic Determines Normal Position
Spring Fails Master Valve CLOSED
NO/FO
(Normally Open/Fail Open)
1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Open
Spring Fails Valve OPEN
NO/FO (Normally Open/Fail Open)
1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Master Valve Open
Spring Fails Master Valve OPEN
NO/FC
(Normally Open/Fail Closed)
1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Open
Spring Fails Valve CLOSED
NO/FC (Normally Open/Fail Closed)
1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Maser Valve Open
Spring Fails Master Valve CLOSED
NC/FO
(Normally Closed/Fail Open)
1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Closed
Spring Fails Valve OPEN
NC/FO (Normally Closed/Fail Open)
1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Master Valve Closed
Spring Fails Master Valve OPEN
NC/FC
(Normally Closed/Fail Closed)
1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Closed
Spring Fails Valve CLOSED
NC/FC (Normally Closed/Fail Closed)
1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Master Valve Closed
Spring Fails Master Valve CLOSED
3-way Configuration2-way Configuration
THREE-WAY CONFIGURATION CODES
CONFIGURATION CODES
BUTTERFLY VALVES
F6, F7 SERIES

236. CONTROL VALVES 204CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
BUTTERFLY VALVES
F6, F7 SERIES
Ordering example: F6100HDU/GKRX24-MFT-7 two-way 4", undercut, 50 psid close-off, fail-safe, proportional/MFT
control, 24V actuator
ASSEMBLY COMBINATIONS/ORDERING INFORMATION - INDOOR LOCATIONS
ModelSize
Cv @
90°
Close-off
NSR
On/off/floating
NSR
Proportional/
MFT
SR or fail-safe
On/off/floating
SR or fail-safe
Proportional/MFT
2-way undercut
F650HDU2" (DN50)115
50
ARB24-3-5 ARB24-MFT-5
AFBUP-X1 AFX24-MFT-X1
F665HDU2-1/2" (DN65)196
F680HDU3" (DN80)302 AFBUP-X1 2xAFX24-MFT-X1
F6100HDU4" (DN100)600
GRB24-3-7 GRX24-MFT-72XAFBUP-X1 2XAFX24-MFT-X1
F6125HDU5" (DN125)1022
F6150HDU6" (DN150)1579 2XGMB24-3-X12XGMX24-MFT-X1 -- --
3-way undercut
F750HDU2" (DN50)115
50
AMB24-3-X1AMX24-MFT-X1
AFBUP-X1 AFX24-MFT-X1
F765HDU2-1/2" (DN65)196 AFBUP-X1 2xAFX24-MFT-X1
F780HDU3" (DN80)302 GMB24-3-X1GMX24-MFT-X12XAFBUP-X1 2XAFX24-MFT-X1
F7100HDU4" (DN100)600
2xGMB24-3-X12xGMX24-MFT-X1
-- --
F7125HDU5" (DN125)1022 -- --
F7150HDU6" (DN150)1579 -- --
2-way full rated
F650HD2" (DN50)115
200
ARB24-3-5 ARB24-MFT-5 AFBUP-X1
AFX24-MFT-X1
F665HD2-1/2" (DN65)196 AFX24-MFT-X1
F680HD3" (DN80)302 GMB24-3-X1 GMX24-MFT-5 GKRB24-3-5 GKRX24-MFT-5
F6100HD4" (DN100)600 2xGMB24-3-X12xGMX24-MFT-X1 -- --
F6125HD5" (DN125)600 -- --
F6150HD6" (DN150)1579 -- -- -- --
F6200HD8" (DN200)3136 -- -- -- --
F6250HD10" (DN250)5340 -- -- -- --
F6300HD12" (DN300)8250 -- -- -- --
F6350HD14" (DN350)11917 -- -- -- --
F6400HD16" (DN400)16388 -- -- -- --
F6450HD18" (DN450)21705 -- --
F6500HD20" (DN500)27908 -- -- -- --
3-way full rated
F750HD2" (DN50)115
200
AMB24-3-X1AMX24-MFT-X1 AFBUP-X1 AFX24-MFT-X1
F765HD2-1/2" (DN65)196 GMB24-3-X1GMX24-MFT-X12XAFBUP-X1 2XAFX24-MFT-X1
F780HD3" (DN80)302 2xGMB24-3-X12xGMX24-MFT-X1 -- --
F7100HD4" (DN100)600 -- -- -- --
F7125HD5" (DN125)600 -- -- -- --
F7150HD6" (DN150)1579 -- -- -- --
F7200HD8" (DN200)3136 -- -- -- --
F7250HD10" (DN250)5340 -- -- -- --
F7300HD12" (DN300)8250 -- -- -- --
F7350HD14" (DN350)11917 -- -- -- --
F7400HD16" (DN400)16388 -- -- -- --
F7450HD18" (DN450)21705 -- -- -- --
F7500HD20" (DN500)27908 -- -- -- --

237. flfi 205CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ModelSize
Cv @
90°
Close-off
NSR
On/off/floating
NEMA 4 hous-
ing
NSR
Proportional/MFT
NEMA 4 housing
NSR
On/off/floating
SY NEMA 4
NSR
Proportional/
MFT
SY NEMA 4
2-way undercut
F650HDU2" (DN50)115
50
GRCX24-3-T-N4GRX24-MFT-T-N4
-- --
F665HDU2-1/2" (DN65)196 -- --
F680HDU3" (DN80)302 -- --
F6100HDU4" (DN100)600
2xGRCX24-3-T-N42xGRX24-MFT-T-N4
-- --
F6125HDU5" (DN125)1022 -- --
F6150HDU6" (DN150)1579 DKRX24-3-T-N4DKRX24-MFT-T-N4 -- --
3-way undercut
F750HDU2" (DN50)115
50
GMCX24-3-T-X1-N4GMX24-MFT-T-X1-N4
-- --
F765HDU2-1/2" (DN65)196 -- --
F780HDU3" (DN80)302 GMCX24-3-T-X1-N4GMX24-MFT-T-X1-N4 -- --
F7100HDU4" (DN100)600
2xGMCX24-3-T-X1-
N4
2xGMX24-MFT-T-X1-
N4
-- --
F7125HDU5" (DN125)1022 -- --
F7150HDU6" (DN150)1579 -- --
2-way full rated
F650HD2" (DN50)115
200
GRCX-24-3-T-N4GRX24-MFT-T-N4
SY2-24 or
SY2-110
SY2-24MFT or
SY2-120MFT
F665HD2-1/2" (DN65)196
F680HD3" (DN80)302
F6100HD4" (DN100)600 -- --
F6125HD5" (DN125)600 -- --
F6150HD6" (DN150)1579 -- --
SY3-24 or
SY3-110
SY3-24MFT or
SY3-120MFT
F6200HD8" (DN200)3136 -- --
SY4-24 or
SY4-110
SY4-24MFT or
SY4-120MFT
F6250HD10" (DN250)5340 -- --
F6300HD12" (DN300)8250 -- --
F6350HD14" (DN350)11917 -- --
SY5-24 or
SY5-110
SY5-24MFT or
SY5-120MFT
F6400HD16" (DN400)16388 -- -- SY6-110 SY6-120MFT
F6450HD18" (DN450)21705
SY8-110 SY8-120MFT
F6500HD20" (DN500)27908 -- --
3-way full rated
F750HD2" (DN50)115
200
GMCX24-3-T-X1-N4GMX24-MFT-T-X1-N4
SY2-24 or
SY2-110
SY2-24MFT or
SY2-120MFT
F765HD2-1/2" (DN65)196
F780HD3" (DN80)302 -- --
F7100HD4" (DN100)600 -- --
F7125HD5" (DN125)600 -- --
SY3-24 or
SY3-110
SY3-24MFT or
SY3-120MFT
F7150HD6" (DN150)1579 -- --
F7200HD8" (DN200)3136 -- -- SY4-24 or
SY4-110
SY4-24MFT or
SY4-120MFTF7250HD10" (DN250)5340 -- --
F7300HD12" (DN300)8250 -- --
SY5-24 or
SY5-110
SY5-24MFT or
SY5-120MFT
F7350HD14" (DN350)11917 -- -- SY6-110 SY6-120MFT
F7400HD16" (DN400)16388 -- -- SY7-110 SY7-120MFT
F7450HD18" (DN450)21705 -- -- SY8-110 SY8-120MFT
F7500HD20" (DN500)27908 -- -- SY9-110 SY9-120MFT
BUTTERFLY VALVES
F6, F7 SERIES
ASSEMBLY COMBINATIONS/ORDERING INFORMATION - NEMA 4 RATED
Ordering example: F6100HDU/2XGRX24-MFT-T-N4 two-way 4", undercut, 50 psid close-off, non-spring return, propor-
tional control, 24V, NEMA4

238. CONTROL VALVES 206CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
FABRIC WEATHERPROOF COVER FOR GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS
KOV SERIES
Materials Of Construction
600D Oxford fabric, thickened and densified for
heavy duty protection; nylon webbing and straps;
nylon buckle
Dimensions
KOV-1 Approximately 6" diameter x 7"H (15 x 18 cm)
KOV-2 Approximately 8" diameter x 10"H (20 x 25 cm)
KOV-3 Approximately 10" diameter x 10"H (25 x 25 cm)
KOV-4 Approximately 14" diameter x 12"H (36 x 30 cm)
Color Light tan to minimize solar gain
DESCRIPTION
The KOV Series fabric cover offers an innovative and effective weather protection solution for low-voltage direct- mount globe valve actuators
. Made of heavy-duty, water
repellent, acrylic woven fabric, the KOV provides a significant
degree of protection against falling rain, sleet, snow and ice.
The light color minimiz
es solar heat gain to keep the actuator
cooler than traditional plastic or metal encosures and the fabric breathes to prevent condensation. It can be installed
and remo
ved in seconds and it is available in four sizes to fit
many popular globe valve direct-mount actuators
.
FEATURES
• Heavy-duty, water repellent fabric
• Keeps actuator cool in hot sun
• Breatheable design prevents condensation
• Cinch strap allows quick and easy installation
• Keeps actuator clean and protected
APPLICATION
The KOV Series has been tested to the NEMA 3R standard and will effectively protect a NEMA 2 (IP42 or equivalent) actuator from the weather when mounted vertically
. The cover
fabric is guaranteed for a period of five years against loss of color or strength from normal exposure conditions including sunlight, mildew, rot and atmospheric chemicals
. It is not
r
ated for high-voltage equipment
.
SPECIFICATIONS
KOV-3 on
ML7421B actuator
and 5" globe valve
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
10:30 11:30 12:30 13:30 14:30 15:30 16:30
Deg. F
Time of Day
Weather Shield Te mperature Comparisons
Enclosure air temperature test data
KOV Series
MetalBox
PlasticBox
MODEL DESCRIPTION
K
OV-1
NEMA 3R fabric weather shield, 6" dia. x 7"H, fits Honeywell ML6984/7984, JCI VA-4233
KOV-2 NEMA 3R fabric weather shield, 8" dia. x 10"H, fits Honeywell ML6420/7420/6425/7425 and Belimo NV/NVF
KOV-3 NEMA 3R fabric weather shield, 10" dia. x 10"H, fits Honeywell ML6421/7421
KOV-4 NEMA 3R fabric weather shield, 14" dia. x 12"H, fits Honeywell Q5022 linkage with dual actuators

239. flfi 207CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Cv =
Where: Cv = Coefficient of flow
 Q= lb per hour of steam
∆P= Differential pressure in psig (pressure drop)
 P= Outlet pressure in psia (absolute)
psig + 14.7 = psia (absolute)
 K= 1 + (0.0007 x ˚F super-heat)
Note: K normally is 1 (K = 1 for saturated steam).
Other fo rms of the fo rmula are:
 Q=
Note: K normally is 1.
∆P=
Note: K normally is 1.
 P=
Note: K normally is 1 (K = 1 for saturated steam).
These fo rmulas can be used to calculate one of the quantities if the 
others are known.

2
√ 23Cv   ∆P x P
K
2
3   ∆P x P
QK
√
 
 
2
2
QK
3 Cv( )
x
1
  P2
2
QK
3 Cv( )
x
1
∆P
See next page for Steam Valve Capacity Table
Refer to specific valve data for maximum allowable
pressure drops and close-off ratings.
Two-position Zone Valves and Direct Radiator Valves
Use a minimum of 10% of inlet pressure (psig).
Proportional Control Valves
Low pressure (15 psig or less): ∆P of 80% of gauge inlet
pressure.
When Cv required is between two valve sizes and closer
to the smaller valve size, resize for Cv using 42% of the
absolute inlet pressure as pressure drop. Use the valve that
is larger than the calculated Cv.
For steam pressures greater than 15 psig: 42% of the
absolute inlet pressure.
When Cv required is between two valve sizes, select the
larger size.
Note:
Do not size steam valves on higher system pressures using a
pressure drop greater than 42% of the
absolute inlet pressure.
The Steam Valve Capacity Table on the following page is based on the following formula:
1 Boiler hp = 34.5 lb/hr
EDR (equivalent direct radiation)
= 240 BTU/hr per FT
2
1 Therm = 100,000 BTU
To convert BTU/hr to lb/hr of steam, divide BTU/hr by

the latent heat of vaporization (h
fg
) at the corresponding
steam pressure.
Example:
100,000 BTU/hr = 105 lb/hr of 5 psig steam
100,000 BTU/hr = 105 lb/hr
954
USEFUL STEAM INFORMATION
0 (0)
5 (34)
15 (103)
50 (345)
100 (689)
STEAM DATA
212 (100) 237 (114) 250 (121) 298 (148) 338 (170)
psig (kPa) Temperature °F (°C) Latent Heat (h
fg)
970 954 945 912 880
( (
RECOMMENDED PRESSURE DROPS FOR STEAM Cv (FLOW COEFFICIENT) DETERMINATION
STEAM VALVE SIZING INFORMATION

240. CONTROL VALVES 208CONTROL VALVES
3 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
STEAM VALVE CAPACITY TABLE
Inlet
Pressure 2# 5# 10# 15# 20# 25# 40# 50# 100#
psig
2.2
5.4
7.1
9.8
13.6
18
19.6
22
27
33
41
49
57
60
82
95
136
195
218
245
305
354
409
463
545
627
790
926
1090
1281
1499
1907
2316
2398
0.4 0.99 1.3 1.8
2.5
3.3
3.6
4.0
5
6
7.5
9.0
10.5
11
15
17.4
25
35.8
40
45
56
65
75
85
100
115
145
170
200
235
275
350
425
440
0.2* 1.6 0.5* 4 1* 8 1.5* 12 2* 14 2.5* 16 4* 23 5* 27 10* 48
68
168
221
306
424
560
611
679
848
1018
1273
1528
1782
1867
2546
2954
4244
6077
6790
7639
9506
11034
12731
14429
16975
19521
24613
28857
33950
39891
46681
59412
72143
74689
38.8
96.1
126.2
174.7
242
320
349
388
485
582
728
874
1019
1068
1456
1689
2427
3475
3883
4368
5436
6310
7280
8251
9707
11163
14075
16502
19414
22812
26695
33975
41256
42712
38.3
94.8
124.4
172.3
239
316
345
383
479
574
718
861
1005
1053
1436
1665
2393
3427
3829
4307
5360
6221
7179
8136
9571
11007
13878
16271
19143
22493
26321
33500
40678
42114
20.7
51.3
67.4
93.3
130
171
187
207
259
311
389
466
544
570
777
902
1296
1856
2073
2332
2903
3369
3887
4406
5183
5961
7516
8811
10366
12180
14254
18141
22028
22806
32.4
80.2
104.3
145.8
203
267
292
324
405
486
608
729
851
891
1215
1409
2025
2900
3240
3645
4536
5265
6075
6885
8101
9316
11746
13771
16201
19036
22277
28352
34427
35642
17.1
42.3
55.5
76.9
107
141
154
171
214
256
320
385
449
470
641
743
1068
1529
1709
1923
2392
2777
3204
3631
4272
4913
6195
7263
8544
10040
11749
14953
18157
18798
23.4
57.8
75.9
105.2
146
193
210
234
292
351
438
526
613
643
876
1016
1460
2091
2337
2629
3271
3797
4381
4966
5842
6718
8471
9931
11684
13729
16065
20447
24828
25704
11.6
28.6
37.6
52.1
72
95
104
116
145
174
217
260
304
318
434
503
723
1036
1157
1302
1620
1881
2170
2459
2893
3327
4195
4918
5786
6799
7956
10126
12296
12730
20.4
50.6
66.4
91.9
128
169
184
204
255
306
383
460
536
562
766
889
1277
1828
2043
2298
2860
3320
3830
4341
5107
5873
7405
8682
10214
12002
14044
17875
21705
22471
9.7
24
31.5
43.7
61
80
87
97
121
146
182
218
255
267
304
422
607
867
970
1092
1359
1577
1820
2062
2426
2790
3518
4124
4852
5701
6672
8491
10311
10675
17.5
43.3
56.8
78.7
109
144
157
175
219
262
328
393
459
481
656
761
1093
1565
1749
1967
2448
2842
3279
3716
4372
5028
6340
7433
8744
10275
12024
15303
18582
19238
7.8
19.3
25.4
35.1
49
64
70
78
98
117
146
176
205
215
293
340
488
699
780
878
1093
1268
1463
1658
1951
2244
2829
3317
3902
4585
5366
6829
8292
8585
13.9
34.3
45.1
62.4
87
114
125
139
173
208
260
312
364
381
520
603
867
1241
1387
1560
1942
2254
2601
2947
3468
3988
5028
5895
6935
8149
9536
12136
14737
15257
5.9
14.5
19
26.3
37
48
53
58
73
88
110
131
153
161
219
254
365
523
584
657
818
949
1095
1241
1460
1680
2118
2483
2921
3432
4016
5112
6207
6426
9.5
23.5
31
43
59
79
86
95
119
143
178
214
250
262
357
414
594
851
951
1070
1331
1545
1783
2021
2377
2734
3447
4042
4755
5587
6538
8321
10104
10461
3.7
9.2
12.1
18.7
23
31
34
37
47
56
70
84
98
102
139
162
232
333
372
418
521
604
697
790
930
1069
1348
1580
1859
2184
2556
3253
3950
4090
5.9
14.6
19.2
27
37
49
53
59
74
89
111
133
155
162
221
257
369
528
590
664
826
958
1106
1253
1475
1696
2138
2507
2949
3465
4055
5161
6267
6488
Cv
fl
P
* For two-position control 1 MBH equals 1000 BTU/hr 1000 BTU/hr is approximately 1#/hr
STEAM CAPACITY IN POUNDS PER HOUR
(based on saturated steam)

241. HUMIDITY
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
CBL Series | p. 209 Genesis Wiring | p. 210
Super 33/88 Black | p. 232
Vinyl Electrical Tape
Compression | p. 227
Terminals & Splices
3M Scotchcode | p. 231
Tape Dispenser35 Vinyl | p. 230
Color-Coding Tape
ELECTRICAL
WIRING MATERIALS
We Offer Convenient Options to Complete Your Job.

242. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
W181P Series | p. 212
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
HW-76B | p. 213
222 Series | p. 228
ELETRICAL
WIRING
MATERIALS
Boxes
4BX Series — 4” Square Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
HBX Series
— Handy Boxes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
SWBX Series
— Switch Boxes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
8BX Series
— Octagonal Boxes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
WBX Series
— Weatherproof Boxes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Conduit/Connectors FLEX Series
— Flexible Conduit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
EMT Series
— EMT Conduit Fittings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
RIG Series
— Rigid Conduit Fittings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Tape/Markers 35 Vinyl Color-Coding Tapes
— Tapes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
TEMFLEX 1700 Black Vinyl Electrical Tape
— Tapes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
3M Scotchcode Tape Dispenser STD
— Wire Markers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
3M Scotchcode Write on Dispensers
— Wire Markers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Super 33 and 88 Black Vinyl Electrical Tape
— Tapes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Tartan 3939 Duct Tape
— Tapes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Wire CBL Series
— Communication and Control Cable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Genesis Wiring
— Genesis Communication and Control Cable
. . . . . . . . . . . 210
W181P, W221P, W241P Series
— Communication and Control Cable
. . . . . . 212
HW-76B
— Hook-up Wire
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Wiring Accessories CH, CAT, 4BRT, BC, EWK Series
— Cable Hangers and Seals
. . . . . . . . . . . 226
Compression Terminals and Splices
— Compression Terminals and
Splices
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
222 Series Lever Nuts
— Compact Splicing Connectors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Wire Nuts, Ties, Accessories
— Wire Nuts, Ties, Accessories
. . . . . . . . . . . 229
Wiring Devices S and R Series
— Switches and Receptacles
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
TL Series
— Twist-Lock Plugs, Connectors And Receptacles
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
SW Series
— Fusible and Non-Fusible Disconnects
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

243. NEW! 209ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
The CBL Series offers a selection of high quality wire and
cables that can be used for building communication and panel
wiring
. Additional cable types and sizes are avaialble for
order.
FEATURES
• Plen •
Thermostat wire for connecting to any thermostat
• Stocked at Kele
• 300 volts rated
• UL listed for Type CL3P or Type CL3R
WIRING
COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL CABLE
CBL SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
CBL-TP CBL-ETH CBL-TW
CBL-TP Series
CBL-TW Series
Model
Jacket
Color
Number Of
Conductors
Number Of PairsAWG Size
Plenum
Rating
ShieldingStandard Package
TWISTED PAIR (22 AWG)
CBL-TP222SN Gray 2 1 22 Non-plenumShielded 1000 ft (305 m)
CBL-TP224SN Gray 4 2 22 Non-plenumShielded 1000 ft (305 m)
CBL-TP226SN Gray 6 3 22 Non-plenumShielded 1000 ft (305 m)
CBL-TP222SP Gray 2 1 22 Plenum Shielded 1000 ft (305 m)
CBL-TP224SP Gray 4 2 22 Plenum Shielded 1000 ft (305 m)
CBL-TP226SP Gray 6 3 22 Plenum Shielded 1000 ft (305 m)
TWISTED PAIR (18 AWG)
CBL-TP182SN Gray 2 1 18 Non-plenumShielded 1000 ft (305 m)
CBL-TP184SN Gray 4 2 18 Non-plenumShielded 1000 ft (305 m)
CBL-TP186SN Gray 6 3 18 Non-plenumShielded 1000 ft (305 m)
CBL-TP182SP Gray 2 1 18 Plenum Shielded 1000 ft (305 m)
CBL-TP184SP Gray 4 2 18 Plenum Shielded 1000 ft (305 m)
CBL-TP186SP Gray 6 3 18 Plenum Shielded 1000 ft (305 m)
THERMOSTAT WIRE
CBL-TW185UN White 5 None 18 Non-plenumUnshielded 250 ft (76 m)
CBL-TW185UP White 5 None 18 PlenumUnshielded 250 ft (76 m)
CBL-TW186UN White 6 None 18 Non-plenumUnshielded 250 ft (76 m)
CBL-TW186UP White 6 None 18 PlenumUnshielded 250 ft (76 m)
CBL-TW188UN White 8 None 18 Non-plenumShielded 250 ft (76 m)
CBL-TW188UP White 8 None 18 PlenumUnshielded 250 ft (76 m)
CAT5E ETHERNET
CBL-ETH248UN Gray 8 4 24 Non-plenumUnshielded 1000 ft (305 m)
CBL-ETH248UP Gray 8 4 24 PlenumUnshielded 1000 ft (305 m)
MSTP
CBL-MSTP182SP Natural 2 1 18 Plenum Shielded 1000 ft (305 m)
CBL-MSTP222SP Teal 2 1 22 Plenum Shielded 1000 ft (305 m)

244. NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS 210NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!
GENESIS COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL CABLE
GENESIS WIRING
DESCRIPTION
The Genesis Series Low Voltage Cables are produced with
innovative equipment and technology in a state-of-the-art
facility for the HVAC controls contractor
. The Genesis Series
comes in color coded boxes with wrap-around labels for easy identification and alphanumeric coding to make field identification easier
. Each foot of cable is labeled in feet
with the amount of cable left in the box to easily manage any installation
. Wire is available in most any color with
some required minimums for special orders. Genesis is so
confident of their wire that the
y have included a "100% three
for one" replacement warranty for the lifetime of the original installation.
FEATURES
• Lo •
Countdown footage identification
• Easy field identification
• Color coded boxes
• UL and ETL tested
• Lifetime 100% three for one replacement warranty
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Number
Jacket
Color
Number of
Conductors
Number of
Pairs
AWG SizeStranding
Plenum
Rating
ShieldingA pprovals
Standard
Packaging
Package
Type
Pounds per
1000 ft
Multi-conductor
12021009 Gray 2 None 22 StrandedNon-plenumShield CM, CL2 1000 Reel 13
12041009 Gray 4 None 22 StrandedNon-plenumShield CM, CL2 1000 Reel 18
12061009 Gray 6 None 22 StrandedNon-plenumShield CM, CL2 1000 Reel 25
32021012 Natural 2 None 22 StrandedPlenum ShieldC(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P1000 Reel 14
32041012 Natural 4 None 22 StrandedPlenum ShieldC(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P1000 Reel 20
32061012 Natural 6 None 22 StrandedPlenum ShieldC(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P1000 Reel 27
12141009 Gray 2 None 18 StrandedNon-plenumShield CM, CL2 1000 Reel 20
12281009 Gray 3 None 18 StrandedNon-plenumShield CM, CL2 1000 Reel 27
12151009 Gray 4 None 18 StrandedNon-plenumShield CM, CL2 1000 Reel 32
12161009 Gray 6 None 18 StrandedNon-plenumShield CM, CL2 1000 Reel 45
12171009 Gray 8 None 18 StrandedNon-plenumShield CM, CL2 1000 Reel 59
31141012 Natural 2 None 18 StrandedPlenumUnshieldedC(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P1000 Reel 19
31261012 Natural 3 None 18 StrandedPlenumUnshieldedC(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P1000 Reel 26
31151012 Natural 4 None 18 StrandedPlenumUnshieldedC(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P1000 Reel 33
31161012 Natural 6 None 18 StrandedPlenumUnshieldedC(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P1000 Reel 47
31171012 Natural 8 None 18 StrandedPlenumUnshieldedC(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P1000 Reel 61
32141012 Natural 2 None 18 StrandedPlenum ShieldC(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P1000 Reel 23
32261012 Natural 3 None 18 StrandedPlenum ShieldC(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P1000 Reel 29
32151012 Natural 4 None 18 StrandedPlenum ShieldC(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P1000 Reel 33
32161012 Natural 6 None 18 StrandedPlenum ShieldC(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P1000 Reel 50
32171012 Natural 8 None 18 StrandedPlenum ShieldC(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P1000 Reel 61

245. NEW! 211ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!
March 2014
GENESIS COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL CABLE
GENESIS WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Number
Jacket
Color
Number of
Conductors
Number of
Pairs
AWG SizeStranding
Plenum
Rating
Shielding Approvals
Standard
Packaging
Package
Type
Pounds per
1000 ft
Stranded, Twisted Pair
12021009 Gray 2 1 22 StrandedNon-plenumShield CM, CL2 1000 Reel 13
12811009 Gray 4 2 22 StrandedNon-plenumShield CM, CL2 1000 Reel 21
12831009 Gray 6 3 22 StrandedNon-plenumShield CM, CL2 1000 Reel 27
32021009 Gray 2 1 22 StrandedPlenum ShieldC(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P1000 Reel 14
32811009 Gray 4 2 22 StrandedPlenum ShieldC(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P1000 Reel 24
32831009 Gray 6 3 22 StrandedPlenum ShieldC(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P1000 Reel 26
Thermostat
47104801 White 2 None 18 solidNon-plenumUnshielded CL2 500 Spool 16
47114801 White 3 None 18 solidNon-plenumUnshielded CL2 250 Spool 22
47120301 White 4 None 18 solidNon-plenumUnshielded CL2 250 Spool 27
47130301 White 5 None 18 solidNon-plenumUnshielded CL2 250 Spool 33
47140301 White 6 None 18 solidNon-plenumUnshielded CL2 250 Spool 38
47160301 White 8 None 18 solidNon-plenumUnshielded CL2 250 Spool 50
47104807 Brown 2 None 18 solidNon-plenumUnshielded CL2 500 Spool 16
47114807 Brown 3 None 18 solidNon-plenumUnshielded CL2 500 Spool 22
47120307 Brown 4 None 18 solidNon-plenumUnshielded CL2 250 Spool 27
47130307 Brown 5 None 18 solidNon-plenumUnshielded CL2 250 Spool 33
47140307 Brown 6 None 18 solidNon-plenumUnshielded CL2 250 Spool 38
47160307 Brown 8 None 18 solidNon-plenumUnshielded CL2 250 Spool 50
47614812 Natural 3 None 18 solidNon-plenumUnshielded CL2P 250 Spool 23
47630312 Natural 5 None 18 solidNon-plenumUnshielded CL2P 250 Spool 35
47640312 Natural 6 None 18 solidNon-plenumUnshielded CL2P 250 Spool 42
47660312 Natural 8 None 18 solidNon-plenumUnshielded CL2P 250 Spool 54
CAT5e Ethernet
50781106 Blue 8 4 24 solidNon-plenumUnshielded FT4, CMR, CL2R 1000 Pull-box 21
50881106 Blue 8 4 24 solid PlenumUnshielded FT4, CMP, CL2P 1000 Pull-box 27
CAT6
50922106 Blue 8 4 23 solidNon-plenumUnshielded FT4, CMR, CL2R 1000Reel-in-a box22
51022106 Blue 8 4 23 solid PlenumUnshielded FT6, CMP, CL2P 1000Reel-in-a box25
LonWorks
10621109 Gray 2 1 22 StrandedNon-plenumUnshieldedLevel 4, CM, CL2 1000 Pull-box 18
32522101 White 2 1 22 StrandedPlenumUnshieldedLevel 4, CM, CL2 1000Reel-in-a box13
32541101 White 2 1 22 StrandedNon-plenumShielded Level 4, CM, CL2 1000 Pull-box 21
MS/TP
32511005 Green 2 1 22 StrandedPlenum Shield CMP, CL2P 1000 Reel 21
33221003 Orange 2 1 18 StrandedPlenum Shield CMP, CL2P 1000 Reel 56
Other Temperature Controls
46522110 (Trane type)Purple 2 1 18 StrandedPlenum Shield CMP, CL2P 1000Reel-in-a box30
Security
11011101 White 2 None 22 SolidNon-plenumUnshielded CM, CL2 1000 Pull-box 8
11021101 White 2 None 22 StrandedNon-plenumUnshielded CM, CL2 1000 Pull-box 9
11031101 White 4 None 22 SolidNon-plenumUnshielded CM, CL2 1000 Pull-box 14
11041101 White 4 None 22 StrandedNon-plenumUnshielded CM, CL2 1000 Pull-box 15
32951099 None 16 Combo 18/22StrandedPlenumUnshielded CMP 1000 Reel 115
COAX
50031008 Black RG6 60% Aluminum CATV Non-plenumShielded CATV, CL2 1000 Reel 31
50011008 Black RG59 95% BC CCTV Non-plenumShielded CL2 1000 Reel 36
50131008 Black RG59 95% Aluminum CCTV Non-plenumShielded CL2 1000 Reel 60
*Minimum runs may apply.
**Estimated weight.

246. NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS 212NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
Communication and control cable for HVAC systems.
FEATURES
• B
• Low capacitance models
• UL listed
COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL CABLE
W181P, W221P, W241P SERIES
Violet Blue Orange Orange
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1
18 AWG 22 AWG 22 AWG 24 AWG
Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded
Plenum Plenum Plenum Plenum
Shielded Unshielded Shielded Shielded
23.1 pf/ft. nom. 15.0 pf/ft.±10% 12.5 pf/ft at 1 Khz nom. 12.5 pf/ft at 1 Khz nom.
FEP FEP FEP FEP
- Lonworks BACnet BACnet
UL type CMP/CL3P UL type CMP/CL3P/FPLP UL type CMP/CL3P UL type CMP/CL3P
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model
W181P-2028XRB
Wiring
Color
Number Of Conductors
Number Of Pairs
Wire Size
Stranding
Plenum Rating
Shielding
Capacitance
Insulation
0.178" nom 0.120" nom 0.174" nom 0.132" nomOverall Diameter
1,000 ft (305 m) 1,000 ft (305 m) 1,000 ft (305 m) 1,000 ft (305 m)Standard Package
Communication Standard
Approvals
W221P-2001B W221P-2003ORRB W241P-2000FRIB

247. NEW! 213ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!
March 2014
Voltage Rating
Non-UL 1000 V

UL
600 V
Conductor Tinned Copper
Insulation PVC
Insulation Thickness Non- UL
0.016" (0.041 cm)
UL 0.031" (0.079 cm)
Nominal OD Non-UL
0.09" (0.229 cm)
UL 0.122" (0.310 cm)
Operating Temperature Non-UL
176°F (80°C)

UL
221°F (105°C)
Approvals UL File # E68175
HOOK-UP WIRE
HW-76B
DESCRIPTION
The HW-76B is a tinned copper, PVC-insulated, stranded hook-up wire used for panel wiring of electric and electronic equipment
. The extruded PVC insulation is flame and ozone
resistant and inert to most chemicals, oils, and solvents.
FEATURES
• P •
Stranded, tinned copper conductor
• Easily molded for panel construction
• Excellent memory of molded position
• Easy to strip
• Available in various colors
• UL and non-UL available
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Color
Number Of
Conductors
AWG
Size
Plenum
Rating
ShieldingApprovals
Standard
Package
Weight
HW-76B-BK Black 1 16 None None MIL-W-76B500 Ft (152 M)6 lb (2.7kg)
HW-76B-WT White 1 16 None None MIL-W-76B500 Ft (152 M)6 lb (2.7kg)
HW-76B-RD Red 1 16 None None MIL-W-76B500 Ft (152 M)6 lb (2.7kg)
HW-76B-Y Yellow 1 16 None None MIL-W-76B500 Ft (152 M)6 lb (2.7kg)
HW-76B-GN Green 1 16 None None MIL-W-76B500 Ft (152 M)6 lb (2.7kg)
HW-76B-BL Blue 1 16 None None MIL-W-76B500 Ft (152 M)6 lb (2.7kg)
HW-76B-BN Brown 1 16 None None MIL-W-76B500 Ft (152 M)6 lb (2.7kg)
HW-76B-PU Purple 1 16 None None MIL-W-76B500 Ft (152 M)6 lb (2.7kg)
HW-76B-OR Orange 1 16 None None MIL-W-76B500 Ft (152 M)6 lb (2.7kg)
HW-76B-UL-BK Black 1 16 None None UL1015 CSA TEW500 Ft (152 M)7 lb (3.18 kg)
HW-76B-UL-WT White 1 16 None None UL1015 CSA TEW500 Ft (152 M)7 lb (3.18 kg)
HW-76B-UL-RD Red 1 16 None None UL1015 CSA TEW500 Ft (152 M)7 lb (3.18 kg)
HW-76B-UL-Y Yellow 1 16 None None UL1015 CSA TEW500 Ft (152 M)7 lb (3.18 kg)
HW-76B-UL-GN Green 1 16 None None UL1015 CSA TEW500 Ft (152 M)7 lb (3.18 kg)
HW-76B-UL-BL Blue 1 16 None None UL1015 CSA TEW500 Ft (152 M)7 lb (3.18 kg)
HW-76B-UL-BN Brown 1 16 None None UL1015 CSA TEW500 Ft (152 M)7 lb (3.18 kg)
HW-76B-UL-PU Purple 1 16 None None UL1015 CSA TEW500 Ft (152 M)7 lb (3.18 kg)
HW-76B-UL-OR Orange 1 16 None None UL1015 CSA TEW500 Ft (152 M)7 lb (3.18 kg)

248. NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS 214NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW! NEW!
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
FLEX SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete selection of 1/2" and 3/4" flexible conduit and fittings.
Flexible Steel Conduit
ORDERING INFORMATION
Flexible Steel Conduit Straight
Flexible Steel Conduit 90°
Liquid Tight Flexible Steel Conduit
Steel Liquid Tight Straight
Steel Liquid Tight 90°
Non-Metallic Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit
Non-Metallic Liquid Tight Straight
Non-Metallic Liquid Tight 90°
Model Description
Unit
Quantity
FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT
FLEX12 1/2" flexible steel conduit- 100 ft 1 roll
FLEX34 3/4" flexible steel conduit- 100 ft 1 roll
FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT STRAIGHT CONNECTOR
UL FILE E32539
FLEXCN12 1/2" flexible steel conduit straight connector1 piece
FLEXCN34 3/4" flexible steel conduit straight connector1 piece
FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT 90° CONNECTOR UL FILE E32539
FLEXCN9012 1/2" flexible steel conduit 90° connector1 piece
FLEXCN9034 3/4" flexible steel conduit 90° connector1 piece
LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT
FLEXLT12 1/2" liquid tight flexible steel conduit- 100 ft 1 roll
FLEXLT34 3/4" liquid tight flexible steel conduit- 100 ft 1 roll
STEEL LIQUID TIGHT STRAIGHT CONNECTOR UL FILE E11853
FLEXLTCN12 1/2" liquid tight straight connector 1 piece
FLEXLTCN34 3/4" liquid tight straight connector 1 piece
STEEL LIQUID TIGHT 90° CONNECTOR UL FILE E11853
FLEXLT9012 1/2" liquid tight 90° connector 1 piece
FLEXLT9034 3/4" liquid tight 90° connector 1 piece
NON-METALLIC LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
FLEXNM12 1/2" non-metallic liquid tight flexible conduit- 100 feet1 roll
FLEXNM34 3/4" non-metallic liquid tight flexible conduit- 100 feet1 roll
NON-METALLIC STRAIGHT CONNECTOR
(Must be used with FLEXNM Non-Metallic Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit)
FLEXNMCN12 1/2" non-metallic liquid tight straight connector1 piece
FLEXNMCN34 3/4" non-metallic liquid tight straight connector1 piece
NON-METALLIC CONNECTOR (Must be used with FLEXNM Non-Metallic Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit)
FLEXNM9012 1/2" non-metallic liquid tight 90° connector1 piece
FLEXNM9034 3/4" non-metallic liquid tight 90° connector1 piece

249. NEW! 215ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW! NEW!
March 2014
EMT CONDUIT FITTINGS
EMT SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete line of EMT fittings for 1/2" and 3/4".
ORDERING INFORMATION
Elbow
Offset Nipple
Set Screw Connector
Set Screw Coupling
Compression Connector
90° Compression Connector
1-hole Strap
2-hole Strap
Pulling Elbow
Model Description Unit Quantity
EMT 90° ELBOW
EMTEL12 1/2" EMT 90° elbow 1 piece
EMTEL34 3/4" EMT 90° elbow 1 piece
EMT OFFSET NIPPLE UL File E35001
EMTOFNP12 1/2" EMT offset nipple 1 piece
EMT SET SCREW CONNECTOR UL File E35001
EMTSCN12 1/2" EMT set screw connector1 piece
EMTSCN34 3/4" EMT set screw connector1 piece
EMT SET SCREW COUPLING UL File E35001
EMTSCU12 1/2" EMT set screw coupling 1 piece
EMTSCU34 3/4" EMT set screw coupling 1 piece
EMT COMPRESSION CONNECTOR UL File E35001
EMTCCN12 1/2" EMT compression connector1 piece
EMTCCN34 3/4" EMT compression connector1 piece
EMT COMPRESSION COUPLING UL File E35001
EMTCCU12 1/2" EMT compression coupling1 piece
EMTCCU34 3/4" EMT compression coupling1 piece
EMT 90° COMPRESSION CONNECTOR UL File E32539
EMTCCN9012 1/2" 90° compression connector1 piece
EMTCCN9034 3/4" 90° compression connector1 piece
EMT ONE-HOLE STRAP UL File E333806
EMT1STP12 1/2" EMT one-hole strap 1 piece
EMT1STP34 3/4" EMT one-hole strap 1 piece
EMT TWO-HOLE STRAP UL File E333806
EMT2STP12 1/2" EMT two-hole strap 1 piece
EMT2STP34 3/4" EMT two-hole strap 1 piece
EMT PULLING ELBOW
EMTPE12 1/2" EMT pulling elbow 1 piece
EMTPE34 3/4" EMT pulling elbow 1 piece

250. NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS 216NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!NEW!
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete line of 1/2" and 3/4" rigid conduit fittings.
1-hole Strap
ORDERING INFORMATION
Rigid Offset
Locknut
Bushing
Insulated Bushing
Reducing Washer
2-hole Strap
Pulling Elbow
RIGID CONDUIT FITTINGS
RIG SERIES
Model Description Unit Quantity
RIGID CONDUIT OFFSET UL File E32539
RIGOFF12 1/2" rigid conduit offset, threaded1 piece
RIGOFF34 3/4" rigid conduit offset, threaded1 piece
RIGID CONDUIT LOCKNUT UL File E32539
RIGLOC12 1/2" rigid conduit locknut 1 piece
RIGLOC34 3/4" rigid conduit locknut 1 piece
PLASTIC INSULATING BUSHING UL File E61301
RIGPBU12 1/2" plastic insulating bushing1 piece
RIGPBU34 3/4" plastic insulating bushing1 piece
RIGID METAL BUSHING UL File E14814
RIGMBU12 1/2" metal bushing 1 piece
RIGMBU34 3/4" metal bushing 1 piece
RIGID METAL BUSHING INSULATED UL File E32539
RIGMIBU12 1/2" metal bushing insulated 1 piece
RIGMIBU34 3/4" metal bushing insulated 1 piece
REDUCING WASHER UL File E32539
RIGRW3412 3/4" to 1/2" reducing washer 1 piece
RIGRW134 1" to 3/4" reducing washer 1 piece
RIGID ONE-HOLE STRAP UL File E333806
RIG1STP12 1/2" rigid one-hole strap 1 piece
RIG1STP34 3/4" rigid one-hole strap 1 piece
RIGID TWO-HOLE STRAP UL File E333806
RIG2STP12 1/2" rigid two-hole strap 1 piece
RIG2STP34 3/4" rigid two-hole strap 1 piece
RIGID PULLING ELBOW UL File E32539
RIGPE12 1/2" rigid pulling elbow 1 piece
RIGPE34 3/4" rigid pulling elbow 1 piece

251. NEW! 217ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!
March 2014
NEW!
RIGID CONDUIT FITTINGS
RIG SERIES
Reducing Bushing
Elbow
Conduit Coupling
Conduit Nipple
LB Conduit
T Conduit
Domed Cover
Cover Gasket
ORDERING INFORMATION
RIGT12 1/2" rigid T conduit 1 piece
RIGT34 3/4" rigid T conduit 1 piece
RIGID CONDUIT DOMED COVER
RIGCOV12 1/2" conduit domed cover 1 piece
RIGCOV34 3/4" conduit domed cover 1 piece
RIGID CONDUIT COVER GASKET
RIGG12 1/2" conduit cover gasket 1 piece
RIGG34 3/4" conduit cover gasket 1 piece
REDUCING BUSHING
RIGRB3412 3/4" x 1/2" reducing bushing 1 piece
RIGRB112 1" x 1/2" reducing bushing 1 piece
RIGRB134 1" x 3/4" reducing bushing 1 piece
RIGID 90° ELBOW
RIG90EL12 1/2" rigid 90° elbow 1 piece
RIG90EL34 3/4" rigid 90° elbow 1 piece
RIGID CONDUIT COUPLING
RIGC12 1/2" rigid conduit coupling 1 piece
RIGC34 3/4" rigid conduit coupling 1 piece
RIGID CONDUIT NIPPLES
RIGN120 1/2" x close rigid conduit nipple1 piece
RIGN123 1/2" x 3" rigid conduit nipple 1 piece
RIGN126 1/2 x 6" rigid conduit nipple 1 piece
RIGN340 3/4" close rigid conduit nipple1 piece
RIGN343 3/4" x 3" rigid conduit nipple 1 piece
RIGN346 3/4" x 6" rigid conduit nipple 1 piece
RIGID LB CONDUIT
RIGLB12 1/2" rigid LB conduit 1 piece
RIGLB34 3/4" rigid LB conduit 1 piece
RIGID T CONDUIT
Model Description Unit Quantity

252. NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS 218NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!
4" SQUARE BOXES
4BX SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete line of 4" square boxes.
ORDERING INFORMATION
1-1/2" D Square Box 1-1/2" Extension Ring Raised Blank Raised Toggle Flat Blank
Flat 1/2" KO Raised GFCI Raised Receptacle Raised Duplex Raised 2 Toggles
Raised 1 Toggle
1 Receptacle
Raised 2 Duplex
Raised 1 Duplex
1 GFCI Raised 1 Toggle
1 GFCI
Raised 1 Duplex
1 Toggle
Raised Receptacle
2-9/16" Opening
Raised Receptacle
2-1/2" Opening
Raised Receptacle
1-19/32" Opening
Model Description UL FILE E18095 & E2527 Unit Quantity
4BX11212 4" square steel box 1-1/2" deep, 1/2" KO 1 piece
4BX11234 4" square steel box 1-1/2" deep, 1/2" and 3/4" KO 1 piece
4BX112EX 4" square steel extension ring box 1-1/2" deep, 1/2" and 3/4" KO 1 piece
4BX21834 4" square steel box 2-1/8" deep, 1/2" and 3/4" KO 1 piece
4BXCVFBL 4" square steel box cover, flat, 1/2" KO 1 piece
4BXCVFKO 4" square steel box cover, flat, blank 1 piece
4BXCVRA2DUP 4" square steel box cover, flat, 1/2" raised, two duplex flush receptacles1 piece
4BXCVRA2TG 4" square steel box cover, flat, 1/2" raised, two toggle switches 1 piece
4BXCVRABL 4" square steel box cover, flat, 1/2" raised, blank 1 piece
4BXCVRADU 4" square steel box cover, flat, 1/2" raised, one duplex flush receptacle1 piece
4BXCVRADUGF 4" square steel box cover, flat, 1/2" raised, one duplex flush receptacle, one GFCI device1 piece
4BXCVRAGF 4" square steel box cover, flat, 1/2" raised, one GFCI device 1 piece
4BXCVRASR 4" square steel box cover, flat, 1/2" raised, one single flush receptacle 1-13/32" deep1 piece
4BXCVRASR1 4" square steel box cover, flat, 1/2" raised, one 30-50A single flush receptacle 2-9/64" dia.1 piece
4BXCVRASR2 4" square steel box cover, flat, 1/2" raised, one single flush receptacle 2-1/2" dia.1 piece
4BXCVRASR3 4" square steel box cover, flat, 1/2" raised, 20A twist-lock receptacle 1-19/32" dia.1 piece
4BXCVRATG 4" square steel box cover, flat, 1/2" raised, one toggle switch 1 piece
4BXCVRATGDU 4" square steel box cover, flat, 1/2" raised, one toggle switch, one duplex flush receptacle1 piece
4BXCVRATGGF 4" square steel box cover, flat, 1/2" raised, one toggle switch, one GFCI device1 piece
4BXCVRATGSR 4" square steel box cover, flat, 1/2" raised, one toggle switch, one single flush receptacle1 piece
4BXPLE112 4" square steel plenum box 1-1/2" deep, 1/2" and 3/4" KO 1 piece
4BXPLE218 4" square steel plenum box 2-1/8" deep, 1/2" and 3/4" KO 1 piece
4BXPLECVBL 4" square steel blank plenum box cover, gasketed, captive screws 1 piece

253. NEW! 219ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete selection of handy boxes.
HANDY BOXES
HBX SERIES
1-1/2" Deep Handy Box
ORDERING INFORMATION
Blank 1/2" Knockout Receptacle
1-19/32"
Handy Box Extension
Receptacle
1-13/32"
Duplex
Receptacle
One Toggle
Model Description UL FILES E18095, E2527 Unit Quantity
HBX112 1-1/2" deep steel handy box, 1/2" conduit 1 piece
HBX178 1-7/8" deep steel handy box, 1/2" conduit 1 piece
HBX17834 1-7/8" deep steel handy box, 3/4" conduit 1 piece
HBX218 2-1/8" deep steel handy box, 1/2" conduit 1 piece
HBX21834 2-1/8" deep steel handy box, 3/4" conduit 1 piece
HBX218EXT 2-1/8" x 4" steel handy box extension ring, 1-1/2" deep, 1/2" KO1 piece
HBXCVBL Handy box cover, blank 1 piece
HBXCVKO Handy box cover, one 1/2" KO 1 piece
HBXCVSR Handy box cover, single receptacle 1-19/32" KO 1 piece
HBXCVSR1 Handy box cover, single receptacle 1-13/32" KO 1 piece
HBXDU Handy box cover, one duplex receptacle 1 piece
HBXTG Handy box cover, one toggle switch 1 piece

254. NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS 220NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!NEW!
ORDERING INFORMATION
SWITCH BOXES
SWBX SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete assortment of switch boxes.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Switch Box
Switch Box
w/Cable Clamp
Model Description UL FILE E2527 Unit Quantity
SWBX 3" x 2" gangable switch box, 2 1/2" deep, 1/2" KO 1 piece
SWBX34 3" x 2" gangable switch box, 2 1/2" deep, 1/2" and 3/4" KO 1 piece
SWBXCBL 3" x 2" gangable switch box, 2 1/2" deep, nonmetallic sheathed cable clamp 1/2" KO1 piece
OCTAGONAL BOXES
8BX SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete selection of 4" octagonal boxes.
1-1/2" D Octagon
Blank
1/2" KO
Duplex
Raised1-1/2" D Octagon w/ Bracket
Model Description UL FILES E18095 & E2527 Unit Quantity
8BX11212 4" octagon steel box 1-1/2" deep, 1/2" KO 1 piece
8BX11234 4" octagon steel box 1-1/2" deep, 1/2"and 3/4" KO 1 piece
8BX112BK 4" octagon steel box with bracket 1-1/2" deep, 1/2" KO 1 piece
8BX21812 4" octagon steel box 2-1/8" deep, 1/2" KO 1 piece
8BX21834 4" octagon steel box 2-1/2" deep, 1/8"and 3/4" KO 1 piece
8BXCVBL 4" octagon steel box blank cover 1 piece
8BXCVDU 4" octagon steel box cover duplex receptacle 1 piece
8BXCVKO 4" octagon steel box blank cover 1/2" KO 1 piece
8BXCVRA 4" octagon steel box cover1/2" rasied with ears 1 piece

255. NEW! 221ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!NEW!
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete selection of weatherproof boxes.
WEATHERPROOF BOXES
WBX SERIES
3 Hub
ORDERING INFORMATION
4 Hub 5 Hub
Single Receptacle/
Switch
In Use
GFCI
Blank 2 Screw Blank 4 Screw Toggle Switch
Vertical Duplex
Receptacle
Horizontal Duplex
ReceptaclePhoto Cell
Raised 1 Hub Raised 2 Hub Raised 3 Hub
Model Description UL FILES E53330 & E2527 Unit Quantity
WBX312 One gang weatherproof outlet box with (3) 1/2" hubs 1 piece
WBX334 One gang weatherproof outlet box with (3) 3/4" hubs 1 piece
WBX412 One gang weatherproof outlet box with (4) 1/2" hubs 1 piece
WBX434 One gang weatherproof outlet box with (4) 3/4" hubs 1 piece
WBX512 One gang weatherproof outlet box with (5) 1/2" hubs 1 piece
WBX534 One gang weatherproof outlet box with (5) 3/4" hubs 1 piece
WBXCV112HUB Plate with (1) 1/2" hub 1 piece
WBXCV312HUB Plate with (3) 1/2" hub 1 piece
WBXCVBL2 Blank plate with two screws 1 piece
WBXCVBL4 Blank plate with four screws 1 piece
WBXCVGF GFCI self-closing cover 1 piece
WBXCVIU IN-use cover, 2 1/4" deep. Polycarbonate 1 piece
WBXCVPHO Photo cell plate (120 VAC, 300W photo cell included) 1 piece
WBXCVSR Single receptacle/ switch, self-closing cover 1 piece
WBXCVTG Toggle switch plate (switch not inlcuded) 1 piece
WBXCVVDU Vertical duplex receptacle/ switch, self-closing cover 1 piece
WBXCVHDU Horizontal duplex receptacle/ switch, self-closing cover 1 piece

256. NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS 222NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete selection of switches and receptacles.
SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
S AND R SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Toggle Switch
Decorator Toggle
Dual Decorator
Toggle
Toggle with Pilot
Toggle with Switch
Dual Toggle
TOGGLE SWITCHES WITH GROUND
Model Description Unit Quantity
Ivory
S1T15I Single pole toggle switch, 15A 120-277 VAC, ivory 1 piece
S1T20I Single pole toggle switch, 20A 120-277 VAC, ivory 1 piece
S3T15I Three way toggle switch, 15A 120-277 VAC, ivory 1 piece
S3T20I Three way toggle switch, 20A 120-277 VAC, ivory 1 piece
White
S1T15W Single pole toggle switch, 15A 120-277 VAC, white 1 piece
S1T20W Single pole toggle switch, 20A 120-277 VAC, white 1 piece
S3T15W Three way toggle switch, 15A 120-277 VAC, white 1 piece
S3T20W Three way toggle switch, 20A 120-277 VAC, white 1 piece
Ivory Decorator
SD1T15I Decorator single pole toggle switch, 15A 120-277 VAC, ivory1 piece
SD1T20I Decorator single pole toggle switch, 20A 120-277 VAC, ivory1 piece
SD3T15I Decorator three way toggle switch, 15A 120-277 VAC, ivory1 piece
SD3T20I Decorator three way toggle switch, 20A 120-277 VAC, ivory1 piece
White Decorator
SD1T15W Decorator single pole toggle switch, 15A 120-277 VAC, white1 piece
SD1T20W Decorator single pole toggle switch, 20A 120-277 VAC, white1 piece
SD3T15W Decorator three way toggle switch, 15A 120-277 VAC, white1 piece
SD3T20W Decorator three way toggle switch, 20A 120-277 VAC, white1 piece
COMBO UNITS
Model Description Unit Quantity
Ivory
SR15I Duplex style toggle switch & receptacle, 15A 120 VAC, ivory1 piece
S215I Duplex style dual toggle switch, 15A 120 VAC, ivory 1 piece
SP15I Duplex style toggle switch & pilot light, 15A 120 VAC, ivory1 piece
SD215I Decorator style dual toggle switch, 15A 120 VAC, ivory1 piece
White
SR15W Duplex style toggle switch & receptacle, 15A 120 VAC, white1 piece
S215W Duplex style dual toggle switch, 15A 120 VAC, white 1 piece
SP15W Duplex style toggle switch & pilot light, 15A 120 VAC, white1 piece
SD215W Decorator style dual toggle switch, 15A 120 VAC, white1 piece
UL File E7458

257. fl 223ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
S AND R SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Toggle
Single Receptacle
Decorator Duplex
GFCI
Duplex Receptacle
Single Receptacle
RECEPTACLES
Model Description Unit Quantity
Single Receptacle UL File E13399
R15I Single receptacle, 15A 125 VAC, 1.37” diameter, ivory 1 piece
R20I Single receptacle, 20A 125 VAC, 1.37” diameter, ivory 1 piece
R15W Single receptacle, 15A 125 VAC, 1.37” diameter, white 1 piece
R20W Single receptacle, 20A 125 VAC, 1.37” diameter, white 1 piece
Duplex Receptacle UL File E13399
RD15I Duplex receptacle, 15A 125 VAC, ivory 1 piece
RD20I Duplex receptacle, 20A 125 VAC, ivory 1 piece
RD15W Duplex receptacle, 15A 125 VAC, white 1 piece
RD20W Duplex receptacle, 20A 125 VAC, white 1 piece
Decorator Duplex Receptacle UL File E13399
RDD15I Decorator duplex receptacle, 15A 125 VAC, ivory 1 piece
RDD20I Decorator duplex receptacle, 20A 125 VAC, ivory 1 piece
RDD15W Decorator duplex receptacle, 15A 125 VAC, white 1 piece
RDD20W Decorator duplex receptacle, 20A 125 VAC, white 1 piece
GFCI DUPLEX RECEPTACLE UL File E13399
Model Description Unit Quantity
RGFI15I Duplex receptacle GFCI protected, 15A 125 VAC, ivory 1 piece
RGFI20I Duplex receptacle GFCI protected, 20A 125 VAC, ivory 1 piece
RGFI15W Duplex receptacle GFCI protected, 15A 125 VAC, white 1 piece
RGFI20W Duplex receptacle GFCI protected, 20A 125 VAC, white 1 piece
WALLPLATES (STANDARD SIZE)
Model Description Unit Quantity
Toggle
COV1TI 1 gang toggle wallplate ivory thermoplastic 1 piece
COV2TI 2 gang toggle wallplate ivory thermoplastic 1 piece
COV3TI 3 gang toggle wallplate ivory thermoplastic 1 piece
COV1TW 1 gang toggle wallplate white thermoplastic 1 piece
COV2TW 2 gang toggle wallplate white thermoplastic 1 piece
COV3TW 3 gang toggle wallplate white thermoplastic 1 piece
COV1TSS 1 gang toggle wallplate stainless steel 1 piece
COV2TSS 2 gang toggle wallplate stainless steel 1 piece
COV3TSS 3 gang toggle wallplate stainless steel 1 piece
Single Receptacle
COVRI 1 gang single receptacle wallplate ivory thermoplastic1 piece
COVRW 1 gang single receptacle wallplate white thermoplastic1 piece
COVRSS 1 gang single receptacle wallplate stainless steel 1 piece

258. fl
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS 224fl
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
S AND R SERIES
Duplex Opening
Blank
Decorator
RJ-45
Telephone/Cable
Combo
Duplex Receptacle
COV1RDI 1 gang duplex receptacle wallplate, ivory 1 piece
COV2RDI 2 gang duplex receptacle wallplate, ivory 1 piece
COV1RDW 1 gang duplex receptacle wallplate, white 1 piece
COV2RDW 2 gang duplex receptacle wallplate, white 1 piece
COV1RDSS 1 gang duplex receptacle wallplate, stainless steel 1 piece
COV2RDSS 2 gang duplex receptacle wallplate, stainless steel 1 piece
Blank
COV1BI 1 gang blank wallplate ivory thermoplastic 1 piece
COV2BI 2 gang blank wallplate ivory thermoplastic 1 piece
COV1BW 1 gang blank wallplate white thermoplastic 1 piece
COV2BW 2 gang blank wallplate white thermoplastic 1 piece
COV1BSS 1 gang blank wallplate stainless steel 1 piece
COV2BSS 2 gang blank wallplate stainless steel 1 piece
Decorator
COV1DI 1 gang decorator wallplate ivory 1 piece
COV2DI 2 gang decorator wallplate ivory 1 piece
COV1DW 1 gang decorator wallplate white 1 piece
COV2DW 2 gang decorator wallplate white 1 piece
WALLPLATES (STANDARD SIZE) (continued)
Model Description Unit Quantity
RJ-45 Wall Jack
COV1RJ45I 1 gang wall jack, 1 RJ-45 opening, ivory 1 piece
COV12RJ45I 1 gang wall jack, 2 RJ-45 openings, ivory 1 piece
COV1RJ45W 1 gang wall jack, 1 RJ-45 opening, white 1 piece
COV12RJ45W 1 gang wall jack, 2 RJ-45 openings, white 1 piece
Telephone / Cable
COV1TCI 1 gang telephone/cable 1 opening, ivory 1 piece
COV1TCW 1 gang telephone/cable 1 opening, white 1 piece
COV1TCSS 1 gang telephone/cable 1 opening, stainless steel 1 piece
Combination
COV2TRI 2 gang combination, 1 toggle, 1 duplex receptacle, ivory1 piece
COV2TRSS 2 gang combination, 1 toggle, 1 duplex receptacle, stainless steel1 piece
COV2TRW 2 gang combination, 1 toggle, 1 duplex receptacle, white1 piece

259. fl 225ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
March 2014
FUSIBLE AND NON-FUSIBLE DISCONNECTS
SW SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete selection of fusible and non-fusible
disconnects.
SW Series
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Description Unit Quantity
NON-FUSIBLE SINGLE-THROW SAFETY SWITCHES 240 VAC
SW3330 NEMA1, 3-pole, 3-wire, 30 amp 1 piece
SW3360 NEMA1, 3-pole, 3-wire, 60 amp 1 piece
SW33100 NEMA1, 3-pole, 3-wire, 100 amp 1 piece
FUSIBLE SINGLE-THROW SAFETY SWITCHES 600 VAC
(Fuses not included.)
SWF2330 NEMA1, 2-pole, 3-wire, 30 amp, class H 1 piece
SWF2360 NEMA1, 2-pole, 3-wire, 60 amp, class H 1 piece
SWF23100 NEMA1, 2-pole, 3-wire, 100 amp, class H 1 piece
SWF3330 NEMA1, 3-pole, 3-wire, 30 amp, class H 1 piece
SWF3360 NEMA1, 3-pole, 3-wire, 60 amp, class H 1 piece
SWF33100 NEMA1, 3-pole, 3-wire, 100 amp, class H 1 piece
SWF3430 NEMA1, 3-pole, 4-wire, 30 amp, class H 1 piece
SWF3460 NEMA1, 3-pole, 4-wire, 60 amp, class H 1 piece
SWF34100 NEMA1, 3-pole, 4-wire, 100 amp, class H 1 piece
TWIST-LOCK PLUGS, CONNECTORS AND RECEPTACLES
TL SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete selection of twist-lock plugs,
connectors and receptacles. UL file # E13399
ORDERING INFORMATION
Connector Plug
Receptacle
Connector
Connector
NEMA
Rating
Receptacle
Receptacle
NEMA
Rating
Plug
Plug
NEMA
Rating
Description
Unit
Quantity
TLC2P20A3W125 L5-20R
TLR-
2P20A3W125
L5-20R
TLP-
2P20A3W125
L5-20P20 amp, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, 125V1 piece
TLC2P20A3W250 L6-20R
TLR-
2P20A3W250
L6-20R
TLP-
2P20A3W250
L6-20P20 amp, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, 250V1 piece
TLC2P20A3W277 L7-20R
TLR-
2P20A3W277
L7-20R
TLP-
2P20A3W277
L7-20P20 amp, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, 277V1 piece
TLC2P20A3W480 L8-20R
TLR-
2P20A3W480
L8-20R
TLP-
2P20A3W480
L8-20P20 amp, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, 480V1 piece
TLC3P30A4W250 L15-30R
TLR-
3P30A4W250
L15-30R
TLP-
3P30A4W250
L15-30P30 amp, 3-pole, 4-wire grounding, 250V1 piece
TLC3P30A4W480 L16-30R
TLR-
3P30A4W480
L16-30R
TLP-
3P30A4W480
L16-30P30 amp, 3-pole, 4-wire grounding, 480V1 piece

260. fl
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS 226fl
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
CABLE HANGERS AND SEALS
CH, CAT, 4BRT, BC, EWK SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The CAT Series "J" hooks and Model 4BRT bridle rings
make a cumbersome job easy. Each hook or ring can be
attached using a beam clamp. The EWK Series is a sturdy,
easy to use Knockout Seal.
FEATURES
• Assor •
Easy mounting
• Hammer-on clips
• Clamp-type clips
CH-050-B, CH-100-B
ORDERING INFORMATION
CAT12
CAT1-4Z34
4Z34
4BRT20
BC200
BC
EWKO12, EWKO34
Model Description
Package
Quantity
CONDUIT HANGER UL File E333806
CH-050-B Hanger for 1/2" conduit 50 piece
CH-100-B Hanger for 3/4" conduit 100 piece
CABLECAT™ LOOPS
CAT 12
CableCat™ 3/4" loop, supports 16 four-pair UTP or two-strand fiber optic cable
50 piece
CAT21
CableCat™ 1-5/16" loop, supports 50 four- pair UTP or two-strand fiber optic cable
80 piece
CAT32
CableCat™ 2" loop, supports 80 four-pair UTP or two-strand fiber optic cable
60 piece
CAT64
CableCat™ 4" loop, supports 300 four-pair UTP or two-strand fiber optic cable
25 piece
CAT21-4Z34
CableCat™ CAT21 with 4Z34 multifunction drop-wire clip
40 piece
CAT32-4Z34
CableCat™ CAT32 with 4Z34 multifunction drop-wire clip
40 piece
4Z34 CableCat™ multifunction drop-wire clip100 piece
THREADED BRIDLE RING [For use with Beam Clamp BC , BC-200]
4BRT20 1/4"-20 threaded 1-1/4" (3.2 cm) bridle ring100 piece
4BRT32 1/4"-20 threaded 2" (5.1 cm) bridle ring100 piece
4BRT64 1/4"-20 threaded 4" (10.2 cm) bridle ring50 piece
BEAM CLAMP
BC
Beam Clamp up through 1/2" flanges, accepts 1/4" threaded rod
100 piece
BC-200
Beam Clamp up through 5/8" flanges, accepts 1/4" threaded rod
50 piece
KNOCK OUT (KO) SEALS
EWKO12 1/2" KO Seal 1 piece
EWKO34 3/4" KO Seal 1 piece

261. fl 227ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
DESCRIPTION
Compression terminals and splices are used for connecting,
securing, and terminating all types of electrical wiring
applications
. Each terminal is an assembly of a bare terminal
fitted with a funneled copper gripping sleeve and a tightly fitted insulation sleeve made of nylon
.
FEATURES
• Premium-grade, nylon-insulated terminals
• Excellent quality, reliability, and performance
• Low cost
• UL File# E76766, E32244, E79133, E68376
COMPRESSION TERMINALS AND SPLICES
COMPRESSION TERMINALS AND SPLICES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Ring
Block Spade
Female Disconnect
Piggyback Disconnect
Fully Insulated Female Disconnect
Butt Splice
Ring
Splice
Piggyback
Disconnect
Female
Disconnect
Model Wire Size Mating Tab ColorPackage Qty
FEMALE DISCONNECTS UL File E79133
NFD2218-110 22 -180.020 x 0.110 (0.05 x 0.28)Red 100
NFD2218-187 22 -180.020 x 0.187 (0.05 x 0.47)Red 100
NFD2218-250 22 -180.032 x 0.250 (0.05 x 0.64)Red 100
NFD1614-110 16 -140.020 x 0.110 (0.05 x 0.28)Blue 100
NFD1614-187 16 -140.020 x 0.187 (0.05 x 0.47)Blue 100
NFD1614-250 16 -140.032 x 0.250 (0.05 x 0.64)Blue 100
NFD1412-250 14 -120.032 x 0.250 (0.05 x 0.64)Yellow 100
NFD1210-250 12 -100.032 x 0.250 (0.05 x 0.64)Yellow 100
PIGGYBACK DISCONNECTS UL File E79133
NPBFD2218-250 22 -180.032 x 0.250 (0.05 x 0.64)Red 50
NPBFD1614-250 16 -140.032 x 0.250 (0.05 x 0.64)Blue 50
NPBFD1210-250 12 -100.032 x 0.250 (0.05 x 0.64)Yellow 50
FULLY INSULATED FEMALE DISCONNECTS UL File E79133
FIFD1614-187 16 -140.020 x 0.187 (0.05 x 0.47)Red 50
FIFD1614-250 16 -140.032 x 0.250 (0.05 x 0.64)Red 50
FIFD2218-187 22 -180.020 x 0.187 (0.05 x 0.47)Blue 50
FIFD2218-250 22 -180.032 x 0.250 (0.05 x 0.64)Blue 50
BUTT SPLICES UL File E68376
Model Wire Size Color Package Qty
NBS-2218 2218 Red 50
NBS-1614 16 -14 Blue 50
NBS-1210 12 -10 Yellow 50
Model Wire Size Stud Width ColorPackage Qty
RINGS UL File E76766
NR2218-8N 22-18 #8-0.178"0.268 (0.68)Red 100
NR1614-8N 16-14 #8-0.178"0.26 (0.66)Blue 100
NR1412-8N 14-12 #8-0.178".315 (.80)Yellow 100
BLOCK SPADES UL File E32244
NBS2218-4 22-18 #4-0.119"0.228 (0.58)Red 100
NBS2218-8N 22-18 #8-0.178"0.276 (0.70)Red 100
NBS1614-4 16-14 #4-0.119"0.232 (0.59)Blue 100
NBS1412-8 14-12 #8-0.178"0.315 (0.80)Yellow 100

262. NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS 228NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW! NEW!
March 2014
Integrated test port allows for easy
testing of connection integrity.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Voltage Rating 600 V (1000 V signs and fixtures)
Current Rating 20 A maximum
Wire Size 28-12 AWG
Number Of Conductors 2, 3, 5
Operating Temperature 221°F (105°C) maximum
Strip Length Strip to 0.37" (9-10 mm)
Dimensions
222-412 0.81" x 0.49" x 0.57"
(2.05 x 1.24 x 1.45 cm)
222-413 0.81" x 0.67" x 0.57"
(2.05 x 1.7 x 1.45 cm)
222-415 0.81" x 1.05" x 0.57"
(2.05 x 2.66 x 1.45 cm)
Approvals UL Listed E69654
DESCRIPTION
Compact Splicing Connectors for 2, 3, and 5 conductors.
FEATURES
• For all connections requiring:
• Stranded/solid wires
• Wide range of wire sizes
• Combination of different wire sizes in one connector
• Small space consumption
• Built-in test point
• Protection against electrical shock, touch safe
• Low installed cost and safe operation
• Maintenance free connection
• Resusable connector
COMPACT SPLICING CONNECTORS
222 SERIES LEVER NUTS
SPECIFICATIONS
INSTALLATION
ACCESSORIES
206-124 Wire cutting and stripping tool (34-8 AWG)
222-412
222-413 222-415
Step 1. Strip wire. Step 2. Push up lever. Step 3. Insert conductor and
push down lever.
Model Number Of Conductors Description
222-412 2 2 - conductor connector 50 pc box
222-413 3 3 - conductor connector 50 pc box
222-415 5 5 - conductor connector 40 pc box
222-412J 2 2 - conductor connector 350 pc jar
222-413J 3 3 - conductor connector 250 pc jar
222-415J 5 5 - conductor connector 150 pc jar

263. NEW! 229ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW! NEW!
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
KO SEALS
Model Description Unit Quanity
EWKO12 1/2" KO Seal 1 piece
EWKO34 3/4" KO Seal 1 piece
DESCRIPTION
These miscellaneous electrical products are used for
supporting and connecting conductors.
WIRE NUTS, TIES, ACCESSORIES
WIRE NUTS, TIES, ACCESSORIES
Tie Wraps
Moisture-Resistant
Butt Splice
KWN78G
Heavy-Duty
Cable Clamp
Waterproof Wire Nut
Wire Nut
EWKO12, EWKO34
Identification Tie
Mounting Tie
Cable Tie
Mounting Platform
MOISTURE-RESISTANT BUTT SPLICES (Pkg. 100)
Model Wire Size
UR 19-26
WIRE NUTS UL File E116091 (Pkg. 100)
Model Wire Size I.D. Color Volts
KWN72B 22-14 0.188 Blue 300
KWN73O 22-14 0.203 Orange 600
KWN74Y 18-12 0.235 Yellow 600
KWN76R 18-10 0.328 Red 600
KWN78G 14-8 0.453 Gray 600
HEAVY-DUTY CABLE CLAMPS UL File E76766 (Pkg. 25)
Model Size Width Thickness
Hole
Diameter
CC0625N 5/8"1/2" (1.27 cm)0.060" (0.15 cm)0.203" (0.52 cm)
CC0750N 3/4"1/2" (1.27 cm)0.060" (0.15 cm)0.203" (0.52 cm)
CC08750N 7/8"1/2" (1.27 cm)0.060" (0.15 cm)0.203" (0.52 cm)
CC1N 1"1/2" (1.27 cm)0.060" (0.15 cm)0.203" (0.52 cm)
CC1250N 1-1/4"1/2" (1.27 cm)0.060" (0.15 cm)0.203" (0.52 cm)
CC1250N 1-1/2"1/2" (1.27 cm)0.060" (0.15 cm)0.203" (0.52 cm)
Model Length Width Type Thickness Unit Quantity
CABLE TIES
K400CT 4.0" (10.16 cm)0.10" (0.25 cm) Miniature 100/ pkg.
K750CT 7.5" (19.05 cm)0.19" (0.48 cm ) Standard 100/ pkg.
K750PCT 7.5" (19.05 cm)0.19" (0.48 cm ) Plenum UL File E97527 100/ pkg.
K1970CT 19.7" (50.04 cm)0.19" (0.48 cm ) Standard 100/ pkg.
K1400PCT 14.5" (35.56 cm)0.19" (0.48 cm ) Plenum UL File E97527 100/ pkg.
MOUNTING TIES
KMT650-8 6.5" (16.51 cm) .14" (0.36 cm) Stud #8-0.178" 50/ pkg.
KMT800-10 8.0" (20.32 cm)0.19" (0.48 cm ) Stud #10-0.198" 50/ pkg.
IDENTIFICATION TIES
IDT400 4.0" (10.16 cm)0.10" (0.25 cm) Write-On 50/ pkg.
IDT750 7.5" (19.05 cm)0.19" (0.48 cm ) Write-On 50/ pkg.
MOUNTING PLATFORMS
MP7575 0.75" (1.91 cm)0.75" (1.91 cm) 4- way miniature 3/16" (0.48 cm) 50/ pkg.
MP1111 1.1" (2.79 cm) 1.1" (2.79 cm) 4- way standard 5/16" (0.79 cm) 50/ pkg.

264. NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS 230NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW! NEW!
DESCRIPTION
3M's Temflex™ 1700 Black Vinyl Electrical Tape is an
economical, flexible, general purpose tape.
FEATURES
• General purpose vinyl electrical tape
• Temperated rated to 176°F (80°C)
• Thickness 7 mils
• UL File# E129200
TAPES
TEMFLEX 1700 BLACK VINYL ELECTRICAL TAPE
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
1700 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m)
Temflex 1700
DESCRIPTION
3M’s 35 Vinyl Color-Coding Tape is available in nine fade- resistant colors, is super stretchy and conformable, and has excellent insulating properties
.
FEATURES
• Premium grade vinyl electrical insulating tape in nine
fade resistant colors
• Provides excellent mechanical and electrical insulation
• Resists UV rays, abrasion, corrosion, alkalies, and
acids
• Wraps smoothly and holds tight in temperatures to
220°F (105°C)
• Thickness 7 mils
• UL File# E129200
TAPES
35 VINYL COLOR-CODING TAPES
ORDERING INFORMATION
35
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Color Dimensions Standard Package
35-BLUE Blue 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m) 1 roll
35-BROWN Brown 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m) 1 roll
35-GRAY Gray 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m) 1 roll
35-GREEN Green 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m) 1 roll
35-ORANGE Orange 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m) 1 roll
35-RED Red 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m) 1 roll
35-VIOLET Violet 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m) 1 roll
35-WHITE White 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m) 1 roll
35-YELLOW Yellow 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m) 1 roll

265. NEW! 231ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW! NEW!
WIRE MARKERS
3M SCOTCHCODE TAPE DISPENSER STD
DESCRIPTION
The ScotchCode Tape Dispenser STD is a compact,
carry-along dispenser with ten refillable compartments that
hold eight-foot rolls of non-smear polyester tape
. Used for
marking binder groups, wire or cable, the tapes’ high tack, acrylic adhesive resists solvents, oil and water, and adheres firmly to insulation surfaces
. An end-loop hooks the dispenser
easily to a tool pouch or belt.
ORDERING INFORMATION
STD
WIRE MARKERS
3M SCOTCHCODE WRITE ON DISPENSERS
DESCRIPTION
This self-laminating, write-on marker dispenser is handy for
identifying wire and cable. It is easy to use, refillable, and
comes with an SMP permanent marking pen.
SWD
L
H
W
Write-On
Area
SPECIFICATIONS AND ORDERING INFORMATION
LABELS RECOMMENDED STANDARD
MODEL DESCRIPTION PER ROLL WIRE O.D. PACKAGE
SWD Regular dispenser with 250 0.75" (1.9 cm) 0.312" (0.8 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 1.375" (3.5 cm) 0.09-0.31" (0.23-0.78 cm) 1 card
tape and SMP pen
SWD-R Refill roll for SWD 250 0.75" (1.9 cm) 0.312" (0.8 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 1.375" (3.5 cm) 0.09-0.31" (0.23-0.78 cm) 1 card
WRITE-ON AREA
W H
MARKER SIZE
W L
DIMENSIONS
Model Description Standard Package
SDR-0 Number refill "0" 1 roll
SDR-1 Number refill "1" 1 roll
SDR-2 Number refill "2" 1 roll
SDR-3 Number refill "3" 1 roll
SDR-4 Number refill "4" 1 roll
SDR-5 Number refill "5" 1 roll
SDR-6 Number refill "6" 1 roll
SDR-7 Number refill "7" 1 roll
SDR-8 Number refill "8" 1 roll
SDR-9 Number refill "9" 1 roll
SDR-BK Black color refill 1 roll
SDR-BL Blue color refill 1 roll
SDR-BN Brown color refill 1 roll
SDR-GN Green color refill 1 roll
SDR-GY Grey color refill 1 roll
SDR-OR Orange color refill 1 roll
SDR-RD Red color refill 1 roll
SDR-VL Violet color refill 1 roll
SDR-WH White color refill 1 roll
SDR-YL Yellow color refill 1 roll
STD-0-9X Dispenser filled with 10 rolls of numbered tape (one each of 0-9) 1 dispenser
STD-CX
Dispenser filled with 10 rolls of colored tape (one each of black, blue, brown, green, gray, orange, red, violet,
white and yellow)
1 dispenser

266. NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS 232NEW!
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS
4
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!
TAPES
SUPER 33 AND 88 BLACK VINYL ELECTRICAL TAPE
DESCRIPTION
3M’s Super 33 and 88 Black Vinyl Tapes is all heavy duty
and for all weather use. It also resists UV rays, abrasion,
corrosion, alkalies and acids, and is flame retardant.
FEATURES
• Useab
high temperature environments up to 220°F (105°C)
• UL File#E129200, CSA certified
• Aggressive adhesive and elastic backing conforms to
irregular surfaces for moisture-tight protection.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Dimensions Thickness Standard Package
SUPER 33 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1 m) 7 mils 1 roll
SUPER 88 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1 m) 8.5 mils 1 roll
TAPES
DESCRIPTION
3M’s Tartan 3939 Duct Tape is a general purpose, silver duct tape with good adhesion and strong backing
.
FEATURES
• Seals HVAC ducts
• General-purpose, silver, laminated-cloth duct tape
• Temperature rated to 150°F (65°C)
• 9.8 mils thick
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Dimensions Standard Package
3939 2" x 180' (5.1 cm x 54.8 m) 1 roll

267. HUMIDITY
ENCLOSURES
NSTA Instapanels | p. 237
567 Series | p. 251
C-SD Concept | p. 267
SCE Series | p. 249
ENCLOSURES
H&G Series | p. 264
A-ALP/A-BLP | p. 256
Kele Has A Wide Selection of NEMA-Rated Enclosures.

268. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
RET Series | p. 239
ENCLOSURES
Polypro Series | p. 260
PS Series | p. 263
ENCLOSURES
Services
Custom Services / Panel Shop — Kele’s Custom Panel Shop. . . . . . . . . . . . 233
NEMA / IP Ratings
— Enclosure Selection Chart
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Accessories Perf Panel
— Kele Control Component Mounting Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Fixed and Hinged Window Kits
— Hoffman Enclosure Accessories
. . . . . . . 269
Locks, Latches, Ventilation, Heating, Cooling
— Hoffman Enclosure
Accessories
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Latches, Locks, Ventilation, Heating, Cooling
— Saginaw Enclosure
Accessories
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
EMT Series
— EMT Conduit Fittings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Multiple NEMA Ratings C-SD Concept Series
— Hoffman NEMA 4, 12, and 13 Enclosures
& Panels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
EL SERIES
— Saginaw NEMA 4, 12, and 13 Enclosures & Panels
. . . . . . . . . 268
NEMA 1 NSTA Series
— Kele Insta-Panel Enclosures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
RET Series
— Kele NEMA 1 Enclosures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
NEMA 1 Small
— Hoffman Enclosures and Panels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
NEMA 1 Medium
— Hoffman Enclosures and Panels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
NEMA 1 Large
— Hoffman Enclosures and Panels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
SC Series
— NEMA 1 Screw Cover Boxes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
HC Series
— NEMA 1 Hinge Cover Boxes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
AFE SERIES
— Flush Mounted, Screw Cover NEMA1 Boxes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
FC, FCS Series
— Flush Mounted, Screw Cover NEMA1 Boxes
. . . . . . . . . . . 247
Versa-Cab
— Control Cabinet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
SCE Series Small
— Saginaw NEMA 1 Enclosures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
SCE Series Large
— Saginaw NEMA 1 Enclosures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
567 Series
— Siemens NEMA 1 Enclosures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
B Series and Window Kits
— Miscellaneous Enclosures and Window
Kits
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
NEMA 12 A-LP Series
— Hoffman NEMA 12 Enclosures and Panels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
NEMA 3R A-HCLO Series
— Hoffman NEMA 3R Enclosures and Panels
. . . . . . . . . . . . 252
R-LP SERIES
— Saginaw NEMA 3R Enclosures and Panels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
WF Series
— Hoffman NEMA 3R Enclosure with Fan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
VR SERIES
— Saginaw NEMA 3R Enclosure with Fan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
NEMA 4/4X A-ALP, A-BLP Series
— Hoffman NEMA 4 Enclosures and Panels
. . . . . . . . 256
A-SSLP Series
— Hoffman NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Enclosures and
Panels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
H-LP SERIES
— Saginaw NEMA 4 Enclosures and Panels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
H-SSLP SERIES
— Saginaw NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Enclosures and
Panels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
POLYPRO™ Series
— POLYPRO™ Type 4X Non-Metallic Enclosures
. . . . . 260
RJ, N Series
— NEMA 4X Fiberglass Enclosures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Model 14121-000
— Miscellaneous Enclosures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
PS Series
— Non-Metallic Boxes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
H and G Series
— Non-Metallic Enclosures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

269. DESCRIPTION
Kele's Custom Panel Shop offers 123 years of combined
panel building experience. From complex one-time designs
to multiple standardized panels, Kele has the capacity and efficiency to help make and keep jobs profitable
. UL508A
and UL698A panels, done with complete labeling and doccumentation are available from Kele whenever the job requires them
. All Kele Custom Panel Shop panels are
inspected prior to shipment.
UL508A P
anels – typically equipment intended for
general industrial use and installed in ordinary locations in accordance with state, local and National Electrical codes
.
UL508A
panels are intended to operate using 600 volts or
less and where ambient temperatures do not exceed 104°F (40°C)
UL698A Panels – typically equipment intended for general
industrial use and installed in unclassified locations with
intrinsically safe circuit extensions into Class I, Class II,
and Class III, Division 1 hazardous (classified) locations in
accordance with local, state, and National Electric codes
.
UL698A
panels are intended to operate where ambient
temperatures do not exceed 104°F (40°C), have an oxygen concentration no greater than 21% by volume, and a normal barometric pressure of one atmosphere
.
Custom Panel Assemblies – one-time designs, specialty
builds for certain jobs, and complex designs
Repeat Panel Assemblies – multiple jobs, one model
number, consistent price, and standardized components
Contact the Kele Custom Panel Shop by e-mailing
[email protected] or call 888-397-5353 and ask to speak
to the panel shop
.
KELE'S CUSTOM PANEL SHOP
CUSTOM SERVICES/PANEL SHOP
FEATURES
• UL appr
CATEGORY NNNY
• 6000 sq. ft dedicated Panel Shop
• Specialized labeling/logos
• Expedite service
• 123 years of combined panel building experience
• 100% drawing inspection for accuracy on all drawings
• Documented panel inspection on 100% of panels
• Capable of cutting special hole sizes in stainless steel
• Optional wire tagging available
Custom Stainless Steel Face Plate
Custom Panel Door
233ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014

270. CONTACT INFORMATION
KELE'S CUSTOM PANEL SHOP
CUSTOM SERVICES/PANEL SHOP
Contact the Kele Custom Panel Shop by e-mailing [email protected] or call
888-397-5353 and ask to speak to the panel shop.
Custom Panel Assembly
Labeled Terminal Blocks
and Wires
Door Device Terminations
Door Device Terminations Labeled Relays
CAPABILITIES
Door Device Terminations
ENCLOSURES
234
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014

271. ENCLOSURE SELECTION CHART
NEMA/IP RATINGS
235ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ENCLOSURE
RATING
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 3R
Type 3S
Type 4
Type 4X
Type 6
Type 12
Type 13
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA Standard 250) and Electrical and Electronic
Manufacturer Association of Canada (EEMAC)
Enclosure intended for indoor use primarily to provide a
degree of protection against contact with the enclosed
equipment or locations where unusual service conditions do
not exist
Enclosure intended for indoor use primarily to provide a
degree of protection against limited amounts of falling water
and dirt
Enclosure intended for outdoor use primarily to provide a
degree of protection against windblown dust, rain, and sleet;
undamaged by the formation of ice
Enclosure intended for outdoor use primarily to provide a
degree of protection against falling rain and sleet;
undamaged by the formation of ice
Enclosure intended for indoor/outdoor use primarily to
provide a degree of protection against falling dirt, rain, sleet,
snow, windblown dust, and in which the external
mechanisms remain operable when ice laden
Enclosure intended for indoor/outdoor use primarily to
provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and
rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water; undamaged
by the formation of ice
Enclosure intended for indoor/outdoor use primarily to
provide a degree of protection against corrosion, windblown
dust and rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water;
undamaged by the formation of ice
Enclosure intended for indoor/outdoor use where occasional
submersion is encountered in limited depth; undamaged by
the formation of ice
Enclosure intended for indoor use primarily to provide a
degree of protection against dust, falling dirt, and dripping
noncorrosive liquids
Enclosure intended for indoor use primarily to provide a
degree of protection against dust, spraying of water, oil, and
noncorrosive coolant
This material is reproduced with permission from NEMA. The preceding
descriptions, however, are not intended to be complete representations of
NEMA standards for enclosures and not those of the EEMAC.
* See page 423 for enclosure types for hazardous locations.
NEMA ENCLOSURE TYPES*
March 2014

272. ENCLOSURE SELECTION CHART
NEMA/IP RATINGSNEW!
ENCLOSURES
236NEW!
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
IP IP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Test
No protection
Protection against solid
objects ov er 50 mm (i.e.,
accidental touch by hands)
Protection against solid
objects ov er 12 mm (i.e.,
fingers)
Protection against solid
objects ov er 2.5 mm (i.e.,
tools and wires)
Protections against solid
objects ov er 1 mm
Protection against dust
(limited ingress, no
harm-ful deposit)
Total protection against
dust
Test
No protection
Protection against ve rtically
falling drops of water (i.e.,
condensation)
Protection against direct
sprays of water up to 15
degrees from vertical
Protection against sprays up
to 60 degrees from vertical
Protection against water
sprayed from all directions
(limited ingress permitted)
Protection against low
pressure jets of water from all
directions (limited ingress
permitted)
Protection against strong jets
of water
Protection against the effects
of immersion between 15 cm
and 1m
Protection against long
periods of immersion under
pressure
FIRST NUMERALExample Rating SECOND NUMERAL
If 1st IP
number is
2
Protection
against solid
objects
and the 2nd IP
number is
3
Protection
against liquids
then the IP rating is
IP 2 3
Enclosure
protection against
penetration of solid
objects greater
than 12 mm and
against spraying
water
ENCLOSURE
RATING
Type 1
Type 3
Type 3R
Type 3S
Type 4
Type 4X
Type 6
Type 12
Type 13
IP20
CROSS-REFERENCE (approximate) NEMA, UL, CSA vs IEC Enclosure Type
(cannot be used to convert IEC classifications to NEMA Type numbers)
This material is reproduced with permission from Hoffman.
IEC 60529 has no
equivalents to NEMA
Enclosure Types 7, 8,
9, 10, or 11.
Indicates compliance
Enclosure Type Rating vs IP Rating
Electrical enclosures are rated by type (NEMA 250/UL 50) and/or (IEC 60529) based on the degree of protection provided.
Type ratings and IP ratings have only the following in common:
1. A degree of protection for persons from hazardous components inside the enclosure
2. A degree of protection for equipment inside the enclosure from ingress of solid foreign objects, including dust
3. A degree of protection for equipment inside the enclosure from ingress of water
NEMA 250 and UL 50 type rating documentation defines additional requirements that type-rated enclosures must meet. These include the following:
  •  Mechanical impact on enclosure walls
  •  Gasket aging and oil resistance
  •  Corrosion resistance
  •  Door and cover requirements
  •  Sheet metal gauge construction requirements
Note: Electrical enclosures that carry an IP rating only have not been designed to the additional type-rating requirements; therefore, a type-rating
cannot be assigned to an enclosure that has been only IP rated. Electrical enclosures manufactured by Hoffman are tested for both Type
r ating and IP rating and carry both Type and IP ratings.
IP22 IP55 IP64 IP65 IP66 IP67
March 2014

273. Supply Voltage
NSTA2018VA100,
NSTA2016412-GY
(1) 120/24 VAC transformer, 100 VA
NSTA2620VA200, NSTA2420412-GY
(2) 120/24 VAC transformers, 100 VA
(200 VA total)
NSTA3826VA300, NSTA3624412-GY
(3) 120/24 VAC transformers, 100 VA
(300 VA total)
Convenience Outlet 120 VAC, 3A maximum
Enclosure Size NSTA2018VA100
20"H x 18"W x 7"D
(50.8 x 45.7 x 17.8 cm)
NSTA2016412-GY 20"H x 16"W x 8"D
(51.0 x 30.0 x 20.0 cm)
NSTA2620VA200 26"H x 20"W x 7"D
(66 x 50.8 x 17.8 cm)
NSTA2420412-GY 24"H x 20"W x 8"D
(61.0 x 51.0 x 20.0 cm)
NSTA3826VA300 38"H x 26"W x 7"D
(96.5 x 66 x 17.8 cm)
NSTA3624412-GY 36"H x 24"W x 8"D
(91.0 x 61.0 x 20.0 cm)
Interior Panel Mounting Dimensions NSTA2018VA100
7.375"H x 13.125"W (18.7 x 33.3 cm)
NSTA2016412-GY 7.375"H x 13.125"W (18.7 x 33.3 cm)
NSTA2620VA200 13.0" H x 15.375" W (33.0 x 39.0 cm)
NSTA2420412-GY 13.0" H x 15.375" W (33.0 x 39.0 cm)
NSTA3825VA300 24.0" H x 20" W (61.0 x 50.8 cm)
NSTA3624412-GY 24.0" H x 20" W (61.0 x 50.8 cm)
Panel Color Dark brown body and light tan door,
Dark blue body and door, Gray body and door (NEMA 4/12 only) Dark blue body and poweder blue door
Weight NSTA2018VA100
31 lb (14 kg)
NSTA2016412-GY 36.2 lb (16.4 kg)
NSTA2620VA200 45 lb (20.4kg)
NSTA2420412-GY 53.3 lb (24.2 kg)
NSTA3826VA300 71 lb (32.2 kg)
NSTA3624412-GY 88.6 lb (40.2 kg)
KELE INSTA-PANEL
®
ENCLOSURES
NSTA SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Frequently jobs are done on a fast track basis in our industry.
Instapanels
were created for a fast turnaround on a control
panel job, saving time and labor
. Instapanels are built at Kele
in three sizes: small, medium, and large. Each panel is set
up with tr
ansformer(s), blocks, wire duct, convenience outlet,
additional DIN rail and a perforated back panel for easy mounting of customer parts. Pick the size panel based on the
interior space necessary for mounting components. Choose
from NEMA 1 or NEMA 4/12 enclosures.
FEATURES
• Three popular sizes of NEMA 1 enclosures (Gray, Dark
Blue, Light Blue and Tan/Brown)
• Convenience outlet
• Three popular sizes of NEMA 4/12 enclosures (Gray color only)
SPECIFICATIONS
NSTA2018VA100 NSTA2620VA200
NSTA3826VA300 NSTA2016412-GYNEW!
237ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014

274. WIRE DUCT
WIRE DUCT
W
I
R
E
D
U
C
T
W
I
R
E
D U C
T
WIRE DUCT
G
N
L
TX-1-A
TX-1-B
TX-2-A
TX-2-B
TX-1 TX-2 TX-3
W
I
R
E
D U C
T
TX-3-A
TX-3-B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
W
I
R
E
D U C
T
BAM-1000
11
12
3 AMP MA X
5.375
(13.6)14.75 (37.5)
10.0 (25.4)
24.0
(61.0)
10.0 (25.4)
24.0
(61.0)
5.0
(12.7)
8.125
(20.6)
23.5 (59.7)
33.5
(85.0)
4.0
(10.1)
WIRE DUCT
WIRE DUCT
W
I
R
E

D U C
T
W
I
R
E

D U C
T
WIRE DUCT
TX-1-A
TX-2-A
TX-1-B
TX-2-B
TX-1 TX-2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4" BAM-1000
W
I
R
E

D
U
C
T
11
12
3 AMP MA X
5.25
(13.3)9.0 (22.8)
4.75
(12.0)
7.375
(18.7)
15.375 (39.0)
13.0
(33.0)
17.5 (44.4)
23.5
(59.7)
WIRE DUCT
WIRE DUCT
W
I
R
E
D
U
C
T
W
I
R
E
D U C
T
WIRE DUCT
G
N
L
TX-1 A
TX-1 B
TX-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
W
I
R
E
D U C
T
4" BAM-1000
11
12
3 AMP MA X
4.25 (10.8)8.0 (20.3)
6.75
(17.1)
13.125 (33.3)
7.375
(18.7)
4.375
(11.1)
17.5
(44.5)
15.5 (39.4)
G
N
L
TX-1 A
TX-1 B
INCOMING
120VAC
L
N
G
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
M10/16SFL
M4/8SF
M4/6.P
M4/6.P M4/6.P
M4/6
M4/6
M4/6
L
N
A
B
TX-1
L
N
G
3 AMP MAX
L
N
A BL
N
A
B
TX-1 TX-2
G
N
L
TX-1 A
TX-1 B
INCOMING
120 VAC
L
N
G
A
B
TX-1 TX-2 A
TX-2B
A
B
TX-2 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
M10/16SFL
M4/8SF
G
N
L
TX-1A
TX-1B
INCOMING
120 VAC
L
N
G
A
B
TX-1 TX-2A
TX-2B
A
B
TX-2
A
B
TX-3
TX-3A
TX-3B
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
M10/16SFL
M4/8SF
L
N
G
3 AMP MAX
L
N
G
3 AMP MAX
L
N
A
B
L
N
A
B
TX-2 TX-3
TX-1
A
B
L
N
NEMA 1
NEMA 4/12
18
(45.7)
NEMA 1
NEMA 4/12
22
(55.9)
NEMA 1
NEMA 4/12
34.2
(86.9)
NEMA 1
NEMA 4/12
14.5 (36.8)
NEMA 1
NEMA 4/12
18 (45.7)
NEMA 1
NEMA 4/12
24 (61)
DIMENSIONS
KELE INSTA-PANEL
®
ENCLOSURES
NSTA SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
NST
A2018VA100
20" x 18" Insta-Panel, (1) 100 VA transformer, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA , Tan and Brown
NSTA2018VA100-DB 20" x 18" Insta-Panel, (1) 100 VA transformer, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1, Dark Blue
NSTA2018VA100-GY 20" x 18" Insta-Panel, (1) 100 VA transformer, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NMEA 1, Gray
NSTA2018VA100-PB 20" x 18" Insta-Panel, (1) 100 VA transformer, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1, Light Blue
NSTA2620VA200 26" x 20" Insta-Panel, (2) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1,Tan and Brown
NSTA2620VA200-DB 26" x 20" Insta-Panel, (2) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1, Dark Blue
NSTA2620VA200-GY 26" x 20" Insta-Panel, (2) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1, Gray
NSTA2620VA200-PB 26" x 20" Insta-Panel, (2) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1, Light Blue
NSTA3826VA300 38" x 26" Insta-Panel, (3) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1, Tan and Brown
NSTA3826VA300-DB 38" x 26" Insta-Panel, (3) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1, Dark Blue
NSTA3826VA300-GY 38" x 26" Insta-Panel, (3) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1, Gray
NSTA3826VA300-PB 38" x 26" Insta-Panel, (3) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1, Light Blue
NSTA3624412-GY 36" x 24" Insta-Panel, (3) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 4/12, Gray
NSTA2420412-GY 24" x 20" Insta-Panel, (2) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 4/12, Gray
NSTA2016412-GY 20" x 16" Insta-Panel, (1) 100 VA transformer, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 4/12, Gray
*No suffix: brown/tan, DB: dark blue, GY: gray, PB: dark blue/light blue NEW!
ENCLOSURES
238NEW!
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW! NEW!
March 2014

275. KELE NEMA 1 ENCLOSURES
RET SERIES
1
1
2
3
3
1
Perf
Panel
0.5
(1.27)
Stand-
off
#10-32 Washers,
Screws,
and Standoffs
Knockouts
Knockouts are for 3/4" conduit, two knockouts on both sides, three knockouts top
and bottom (except two on RET 1812).
0.64
(1.63)
7.0
(17.78)
Perf Panel is 16-ga powder-coated steel.
A
D
B
C
2
Keylock
Standard color is brown enclosure with tan door.
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The RET Series includes attractive, economical NEMA 1
enclosures designed to house controls and instruments in
areas which do not require oil-tight and dust-tight ratings
.
The
RET Series enclosures are furnished with a perforated
metal subpanel for easy mounting of components
. No drilling
or layout is needed. Simply set the control components on
the panel and attach with #7 or #8 self-tapping scre
ws in the
prepunched holes
. The RET Series is also available in a UL
listed version.
FEATURES
• Lo •
Mounted with door hinged on left or right side
• Removable door
• Attractive powder-coated finish, standard brown
enclosure with tan door
• Optional colors available
• Key lock, two keys, and attractive gray powder-coated
perf panel furnished
• Mounting of control components simplified with perf
panel
• Optional UL-listed enclosures available
• UL listed, File #E155405, for RET UL-listed panels
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
DIMENSIONS
ENCLOSURE in (cm) ENCLOSURE PERF WEIGHT PERF PANEL
MODEL A B C D MATERIAL PANEL lb (kg) H x W in (cm)
RET2620† 26 (66) 20 (51) 18.75 (47) 17.75 (51) 16-ga steel Included 36 (16.4) 23.5 x 17.5 (60 x 44)
RET3826† 38 (97) 26 (66) 24.75 (62) 29.75 (81) 16-ga steel Included 61 (27.8) 35.5 x 23.5 (90 x 60)
RET4230† 42 (107) 30 (76) 28.75 (66) 33.75 (97) 14-ga steel Included 83 (37.8) 39.5 x 27.5 (100 x 70)
RET1812ULP† 18 (46) 12 (31) 10.75 (28) 9.75 (36) 16-ga steel Included 16 (7.3) 15.5 x 9.0 (39 x 23)
RET2018ULP† 20 (51) 18 (46) 16.75 (42) 11.75 (36) 16-ga steel Included 27 (12.3) 17.5 x 15.5 (44 x 39)
RET2620ULP† 26 (66) 20 (51) 18.75 (47) 17.75 (51) 14-ga steel Included 41 (18.6) 23.5 x 17.5 (60 x 44)
RET3626ULP† 36 (91) 26 (66) 24.75 (62) 27.75 (76) 14-ga steel Included 69 (31.3) 33.5 x 23.5 (85 x 60)
† -DB: Dark Blue, -PB: Po wder Blue, -OR: Orange, -GN: Green, -GY: Gr ay (Note: No suffix - Brown/Tan)
DIMENSIONS
ENCLOSURE in (cm) PERF PANEL STAND- WEIGHT ENCLOSURE
MODEL "A "B "C "D "H x "W (cm) OFFS lb (kg) MATERIAL
RET1812 18 (46) 12 (31) 11 (28) 14 (36) 15.5 x 9.0 (39 x 23) Incl 16 (7.3) 16-ga steel
RET2018 20 (51) 18 (46) 16.5 (42) 14 (36) 17.5 x 15.5 (44 x 39) Incl 27 (12.3) 16-ga steel
RET2620 26 (66) 20 (51) 18.5 (47) 20 (51) 23.5 x 17.5 (60 x 44) Incl 36 (16.4) 16-ga steel
RET3826 38 (97) 26 (66) 24.5 (62) 32 (81) 35.5 x 23.5 (90 x 60) Incl 61 (27.8) 16-ga steel
RET4230 42 (107) 30 (76) 26.0 (66) 38 (97) 39.5 x 27.5 (100 x 70) Incl 83 (37.8) 14-ga steel
RET1812UL* 18 (46) 12 (31) 11 (28) 14 (36) None* RR1812 15 (6.8) 16-ga steel
RET2018UL* 20 (51) 18 (46) 16.5 (42) 14 (36) None* RP2018 24 (10.9) 16-ga steel
RET2620UL* 26 (66) 20 (51) 18.5 (47) 20 (51) None* RP2620 38 (17.3) 14-ga steel
RET3626UL* 36 (91) 26 (66) 24.5 (62) 30 (76) None* RP3626 63 (28.7) 14-ga steel
OPTIONAL COLOR SUFFIX**: -DB: Dark Blue, -PB: Po wder Blue, -OR: Orange, -G: Green, -GY: Grey
* Subpanels must be ordered separately for UL enclosures. Call Kele to order custom perf panels.
** See Color Chart above for available colors.
RET OPTIONAL COLOR CHART
Dark
Blue
Powder
Blue
Orange Green Gray
Optional colors shown in approximate hue
ACCESSORIES
RET-KEY Replacement Key for Ret-Lock
RET-LOCK Lock with key for RET enclosureNEW!
239ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW! NEW!
March 2014

276. ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
FT
-H x W (in)
Flat perf panel for enclosure smaller than 16" x 12" (40.6 x 30.5 cm)
FL-H x
W (in)
Flanged perf panel for enclosure 16" X 12" or larger (40.6 x 30.5 cm)
Note: Order customer perforated panels by exact size
Example: FT-14.5 x 10.25 flat perf panel, 14.50" x 10.25"
Note: Maximum painted flat/flanged panel 34"H x 58"W (86 x 147 cm) Maximum unpainted flanged panel 34"H x 78"W (86 x 198 cm)
KELE CONTROL COMPONENT MOUNTING PANEL
PERF PANEL
DESCRIPTION
Perf Panels easily mount control components in standard
control enclosures and are a product normally stocked by
Kele
. Perf Panels are made from perforated 16-gauge steel
and feature a gray powder-coated finish. Prepunched holes
allo
w for mounting almost any device without drilling
. Simply
set the control components on the panel and attach with #7 or #8 self-tapping scre
ws
. RET Enclosures come standard with
P
erf Panels
. Hoffman NEMA 1, 3R & 4 enclosures, H series,
non-metal and C-SD Concept series enclosures featured in the Kele catalog can be ordered with a perforated panel
.
Custom siz
es may also be ordered
.
SIZE (SAMPLE)
Size (Sample)
16 gauge steel, holes 1/8" staggered
STANDARD PERFORATED PANELS
Perf #
Size (in)
H x W
Flat/
Flanged
Perf #
Size (in)
H x W
Flat/Flanged Perf #
Size (in)
H x W
Flat/
Flanged
HP66 4.25" X 4.25" Flat RP2620 23.5" x 17.5" Flanged CSP2020 18.2" X 18,2" Flanged
HP86 6.25" X 4.25" Flat RP3626 33.25" x 23.25" FlangedCSP2416 22.2" X 14.2" Flanged
HP88 6.25" X 6.25" Flat RP3826 35.5" x 23.5" Flanged CSP2421 22.2" X 18.2" Flanged
HP108 8.25" x 6.25" Flat RP4230 39.25" x 27.25" FlangedCSP2424 22.2" X 22.2" Flanged
HP1010 8.25" x 8.25" Flat ST86 6.75" X4.88" Flat CSP3024 28.2" X 22.2" Flanged
HP128 10.25" x 6.25" Flat ST108 8.75" X 6.88" Flat CSP3624 34.2" X 22.2" Flanged
HP1210 10.25" x 8.25" Flat ST1210 10.75" X 8.88" Flat CSP3630 34.2" X 28.2" Flanged
HP1211 10.25" x 9.25" Flat ST1412 12.88" X 10.88" Flat CSP3636 34.2" X 34.2" Flanged
HP1212 10.25" x 10.25" Flat ST1614 14.88" X 12.88" Flat CSP4236 40.2" X 34.2" Flanged
HP1412 12.25" x 10.25" Flat ST1816 16.88" X 14.88" FlangedCSP4836 46.2" X 34.2" Flanged
HP1612 14.25" x 10.625" Flat ST2016 17" X 13" Flanged CSP6036 58.2" X 34.2" Flanged
HP1616 13" x 14.5" Flanged ST2412 21" X 9" Flanged HO1612 13" X 9" Flat
HP1620 13" x 18.5" Flanged ST2424 21" X 21" Flanged HO1616 13" X 13" Flat
HP1812 16.25" x 10.25" FlangedST3020 27" X 17" Flanged HO2016 17" X 13" Flanged
HP1818 16.25" X 16.25" FlangedST3024 27" X 21" Flanged HO2020 17" X 17" Flanged
HP2012 18.25" x 10.25" FlangedST3630 33" X 27" Flanged HO2416 21" X 13" Flanged
HP2016 17" x 14.5" Flanged IP66 4.88" X 4.88" Flat HO2420 21" X 17" Flanged
HP2020 17" x 18.5" Flanged IP86 6.75" X4.88" Flat HO2424 21" X 21" Flanged
HP2416 21" x 14.5" Flanged IP88 6.75" X 6.75" Flat HO3024 27" X 21" Flanged
HP2420 21" x 18.5" Flanged IP108 8.75" X 6.88" Flat HO3030 27" X 27" Flanged
HP2424 21" x 22.5" Flanged IP1210 10.75" X 8.88" Flat HO3624 33" X 21" Flanged
HP3024 26" x 22.5" Flanged IP1412 12.75" X 10.88" Flat HO3630 33" X 27" Flanged
HP3030 26" x 28.5" Flanged IP1614 14.75" X 12.88" Flat HO4224 39" X 21" Flanged
HP3624 32" x 22.5" Flanged IP1816 16.75" X 14.88" Flanged HO4230 39" X 27" Flanged
HP3630 32" x 28.5" Flanged CSP1212 10.2" X 10.2" Flat HO4236 39" X 33" Flanged
QP1812 17" X 11" Flat CSP1612 14.5" X 10.2" Flat HO4836 45" X 33" Flanged
RP1812 15.5" x 9" Flanged CSP2016 18.2" X 14.5" Flanged HO6036 57" X 33" Flanged
RP2018 17.5" x 15.5" Flanged NEW!
ENCLOSURES
240NEW!
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014

277. 0.5
(1.27)
0.56
(1.42)
0.53 (1.35) Flange width, typical
A
A - 3.0
(7.62)
B
B - 1.0 (2.54)
Panel
(optional)
Weldnut
C
Four mounting holes
0.28 (0.71) dia
1.81
(4.60)
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
Hoffman A Series Small NEMA 1 enclosures house controls
and instruments in areas which do not require oil-tight and
dust-tight ratings
.
FEATURES
• Remo •
Mounting holes on back of enclosure
• Easy operation of flush latch with a screwdriver or coin
• Weldnuts provided for mounting optional panels
• ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder coating inside and out
over phosphorized surfaces
• Optional steel panels with white finish
• UL listed, File #E27567
• CSA certified File #LL42184
• One-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
HOFFMAN ENCLOSURES AND PANELS
NEMA 1 SMALL
ORDERING INFORMATION
A-6N64
A-8N64
A-8N84
A-10N84
A-10N104
A-12N104
A-12N124
A-14N124
A-8N86
A-10N86
A-10N106
A-12N106
A-12N126
A-14N126
A-16N126
A-20N126
A-12N128
A-14N128
DIMENSIONS
A x B x C in (cm)
BODY
GAUGE
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
WEIGHT
lb (kg)GAUGE
A-6N6P
A-8N6P
A-8N8P
A-10N8P
A-10N10P
A-12N10P
A-12N12P
A-14N12P
A-8N8P
A-10N8P
A-10N10P
A-12N10P
A-12N12P
A-14N12P
A-16N12P
A-20N12P
A-12N12P
A-14N12P
DIMENSIONS
H x W in (cm)
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
6 x 6 x 4 (15 x 15 x 10) 8 x 6 x 4 (20 x 15 x 10) 8 x 8 x 4 (20 x 20 x 10)
10 x 8 x 4 (25 x 20 x 10)
10 x 10 x 4 (25 x 25 x 10) 12 x 10 x 4 (30 x 25 x 10) 12 x 12 x 4 (30 x 30 x 10) 14 x 12 x 4 (36 x 30 x 10)
8 x 8 x 6 (20 x 20 x 15)
10 x 8 x 6 (25 x 20 x 15)
10 x 10 x 6 (25 x 25 x 15) 12 x 10 x 6 (30 x 25 x 15) 12 x 12 x 6 (30 x 30 x 15) 14 x 12 x 6 (36 x 30 x 15) 16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15) 20 x 12 x 6 (51 x 35 x 15) 12 x 12 x 8 (30 x 30 x 20) 14 x 12 x 8 (36 x 30 x 20)
4.0 (1.8) 5.0 (2.3) 6.0 (2.7) 6.5 (3.0) 7.5 (3.4) 9.0 (4.1) 10.0 (4.6) 11.0 (5.0) 6.0 (2.7) 8.0 (3.6) 9.0 (4.1) 10.0 (4.6) 12.0 (5.5) 13.0 (5.9) 14.0 (6.4) 17.0 (7.8) 14.0 (6.4) 15.0 (6.8)
4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 10) 6.25 x 4.25 (16 x 11) 6.25 x 6.25 (16 x 16) 8.25 x 6.25 (21 x 16) 8.25 x 8.25 (21 x 21)
10.25 x 8.25 (26 x 21)
10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26) 12.25 x 10.25 (31 x 26)
6.25 x 6.25 (16 x 16) 8.25 x 6.25 (21 x 16) 8.25 x 8.25 (21 x 21)
10.25 x 8.25 (26 x 21)
10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26) 12.25 x 10.25 (31 x 26) 14.25 x 10.25 (36 x 26) 18.25 x 10.25 (46 x 36) 10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26) 12.25 x 10.25 (31 x 26)
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
0.5 (0.2)
0.75 (0.3)
1.0 (0.5) 1.0 (0.5) 1.5 (0.7) 2.0 (0.9) 2.5 (1.1) 3.0 (1.4) 1.0 (0.5) 1.0 (0.5) 1.5 (0.7) 2.0 (0.9) 2.5 (1.1) 3.0 (1.4) 3.5 (1.6) 4.0 (1.8) 2.5 (1.1) 3.0 (1.4)
ENCLOSURE
MODEL†
SOLID PANEL*
MODEL
† Add P to the end of the model number to order optional perf panel.
See Accessories page for locks, latches, heaters, fans, and ventilation kits.
* Order panels separatelyNEW!
241ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!NEW!
March 2014

278. HOFFMAN ENCLOSURES AND PANELS
NEMA 1 MEDIUM
0.62
(1.57)
0.56
(1.42)
0.53 (1.35) Flange width, typical
A
D
B
E
Panel
(optional)
3/8-16
Collar stud
C
Four mounting
holes (min)
0.31 (0.79) dia
1.81
(4.60)
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
Hoffman A Series Medium NEMA 1 enclosures house
controls and instruments in areas which do not require oil
tight and dust tight ratings
.
FEATURES
• Remo •
Mounting holes on back of enclosure
• Easy operation of flush latch with a screwdriver or coin
• Collar studs provided for mounting optional panels
• ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder coating inside and out
over phosphatized surfaces
• Optional steel panels with white finish
• UL listed File #E27567
• CSA certified, File #LL42184
• One-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
ENCLOSURE
MODEL†
SOLID PANEL*
MODEL
SIZE
H x W in (cm)GAUGE
WEIGHT
lb (kg)A x B x C in (cm)
DIMENSIONS
MOUNTING D x E in (cm)
BODY
GAUGE
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
A-16N12ALP
A-16N16ALP
A-16N20ALP
A-20N16ALP
A-20N20ALP
A-24N16ALP
A-24N20ALP
A-24N24ALP
A-30N24ALP
A-36N24ALP
A-36N30ALP
A-16N12BLP
A-20N16BLP
A-20N20BLP
A-24N20BLP
A-24N24BLP
A-30N24BLP
A-30N30BLP
A-36N24BLP
A-36N30BLP
A-24N20CLP
A-24N24DLP
A-30N24DLP
A-36N30DLP
A-16N12MP
A-16N16MP
A-16N20MP
A-20N16MP
A-20N20MP
A-24N16MP
A-24N20MP
A-24N24MP
A-30N24MP
A-36N24MP
A-36N30MP
A-16N12MP
A-20N16MP
A-20N20MP
A-24N20MP
A-24N24MP
A-30N24MP
A-30N30MP
A-36N24MP
A-36N30MP
A-24N20MP
A-24N24MP
A-30N24MP
A-36N30MP
16 x 12 x 6.62 (41 x 31 x 17)
16 x 16 x 6.62 (41 x 41 x 17)
16 x 20 x 6.62 (41 x 51 x 17)
20 x 16 x 6.62 (51 x 41 x 17)
20 x 20 x 6.62 (51 x 51 x 17)
24 x 16 x 6.62 (61 x 41 x 17)
24 x 20 x 6.62 (61 x 51 x 17)
24 x 24 x 6.62 (61 x 61 x 17)
30 x 24 x 6.62 (76 x 61 x 17)
36 x 24 x 6.62 (91 x 61 x 17)
36 x 30 x 6.62 (91 x 76 x 17)
16 x 12 x 8.62 (41 x 31 x 22)
20 x 16 x 8.62 (51 x 41 x 22)
20 x 20 x 8.62 (51 x 51 x 22)
24 x 20 x 8.62 (61 x 51 x 22)
24 x 24 x 8.62 (61 x 61 x 22)
30 x 24 x 8.62 (76 x 61 x 22)
30 x 30 x 8.62 (76 x 76 x 22)
36 x 24 x 8.62 (91 x 61 x 22)
36 x 30 x 8.62 (91 x 76 x 22)
24 x 20 x 10.62 (61 x 51 x 27)
24 x 24 x 12.62 (61 x 61 x 27)
30 x 24 x 12.62 (76 x 61 x 27)
36 x 30 x 12.62 (91 x 76 x 27)
13.88 x 7 (35 x 18)
13.88 x 11 (35 x 28)
13.88 x 15 (35 x 38)
17.88 x 11 (45 x 28)
17.88 x 15 (45 x 38)
21.88 x 11 (56 x 28)
21.88 x 15 (56 x 38)
21.88 x 19 (56 x 48)
27.5 x 16.75 (70 x 43)
33.5 x 16.75 (85 x 43)
33.5 x 22.75 (85 x 58)
13.88 x 7 (35 x 18)
17.88 x 11 (45 x 28)
17.88 x 15 (45 x 38)
21.88 x 15 (56 x 38)
21.88 x 19 (56 x 48)
27.5 x 16.75 (70 x 43)
27.5 x 22.75 (70 x 58)
33.5 x 16.75 (85 x 43)
33.5 x 22.75 (85 x 58)
21.88 x 15 (56 x 38)
21.88 x 19 (56 x 48)
27.5 x 16.75 (70 x 43)
33.5 x 22.75 (85 x 58)
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 14 14 14 14 16 16 16 16 14 14 14 14 14 16 14 14 14
15.0 (6.8) 22.5 (10.2)
21.5 (9.8) 21.5 (9.8)
26.0 (11.8) 26.0 (11.8) 30.0 (13.6) 40.0 (18.1) 49.5 (22.5) 52.2 (23.7) 69.0 (31.3)
17.0 (7.7)
25.5 (11.6) 30.5 (13.8) 33.0 (15.0) 42.0 (19.1) 50.5 (22.9) 61.5 (27.9) 54.2 (24.6) 68.0 (30.8) 36.0 (16.3) 51.0 (23.1) 62.5 (28.4) 81.0 (36.7)
13 x 10.5 (33 x 27) 13 x 14.5 (33 x 37) 13 x 18.5 (33 x 47) 17 x 14.5 (43 x 37) 17 x 18.5 (43 x 47) 21 x 14.5 (53 x 37) 21 x 18.5 (53 x 47) 21 x 22.5 (53 x 57) 26 x 22.5 (66 x 57) 32 x 22.5 (81 x 57) 32 x 28.5 (81 x 72) 13 x 10.5 (33 x 27) 17 x 14.5 (43 x 37) 17 x 18.5 (43 x 47) 21 x 18.5 (53 x 47) 21 x 22.5 (53 x 57) 26 x 22.5 (66 x 57) 26 x 28.5 (66 x 72) 32 x 22.5 (81 x 57) 32 x 28.5 (81 x 72) 21 x 18.5 (81 x 47) 21 x 22.5 (53 x 57) 26 x 22.5 (66 x 57) 32 x 28.5 (81 x 72)
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 12 12 12 12 14 14 14 14 12 12 12 12 12 14 12 12 12
3.0 (1.4) 5.0 (2.3) 6.0 (2.7) 6.0 (2.7) 7.0 (3.2) 7.0 (3.2) 9.0 (4.1)
15.0 (6.8)
18.5 (8.4)
23.0 (10.4)
29.0 (13.2)
6.0 (2.7) 6.0 (2.7) 7.0 (3.2) 9.0 (4.1)
15.0 (6.8)
18.5 (8.4)
23.5 (10.7) 23.0 (10.4) 29.0 (13.2)
9.0 (4.1)
15.0 (6.8)
18.5 (8.4)
29.0 (13.2)
* Order panels separately
† Add P to the end of the part number to order optional perf panel.
See Accessories page for locks, latches, louvers, fans and heaters.NEW!
ENCLOSURES
242NEW!
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014

279. 0.91
(2.31)
0.56
(1.42)
1.12 (2.85) Flange width,
typical
A
A - 2.12
(5.38)
B
B - 7.24
(18.39)
Panel
(optional)
3/8-16
Collar stud
C
Four mounting
holes (min)
0.44 (1.12) dia
Coin Latch
2.40 (6.11)
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
Hoffman A Series Large NEMA 1 enclosures house controls
and instruments in areas which do not require oil-tight and
dust-tight ratings
.
FEATURES
• Contin •
Mounting holes on back of enclosure
• Easy operation of flush latch with a screwdriver or coin
• Collar studs provided for mounting optional panels
• ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder coated
• Door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity
• Optional steel panels with white finish
• Optional locks and latches available
• UL listed, File #E27567
• CSA certified File #LL42186
• One-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
HOFFMAN ENCLOSURES AND PANELS
NEMA 1 LARGE
ORDERING INFORMATION
ENCLOSURE
MODEL
DIMENSIONS
H x W in (cm)
GAUGE WEIGHT
lb (kg)
DIMENSIONS
A x B x C in (cm)
BODY
GAUGE
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
SOLID
PANEL**
MODEL
A-42N3009*†
A-42N3609*†
A-48N3609*†
A-42N3013*†
A-42N3613†
A-48N3613†
39 x 27 (99 x 69)
39 x 33 (99 x 84)
45 x 33 (114 x 84)
39 x 27 (99 x 69)
39 x 33 (99 x 84)
45 x 33 (114 x 84)
42 x 30 x 9.25 (107 x 76 x 24)
42 x 36 x 9.25 (107 x 91 x 24)
48 x 36 x 9.25 (122 x 91 x 24)
42 x 30 x 13.25 (107 x 76 x 34)
42 x 36 x 13.25 (107 x 91 x 34)
48 x 36 x 13.25 (122 x 91 x 34)
14
14
14
14
14
14
101 (45.9) 122 (55.4) 124 (56.3) 112 (50.9) 132 (59.9) 144 (65.4)
A-42P30* A-42P36* A-48P36* A-42P30* A-42P36 A-48P36
12 12 12 12 12 12
33 (15.0) 39 (17.7) 46 (20.9) 33 (15.0) 39 (17.7) 46 (20.9)
* Stocked at Kele . Other size enclosures and panels are special order and cannot be returned for credit. ** Order panels separately
See Accessories page for locks, latches, louvers, fans, and heaters.
† Add P to the end of the part number to order optional perf panel.NEW!
243ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014

280. ORDERING INFORMATION
NEMA 1 SCREW COVER BOXES
SC SERIES
Knockouts on all sides.
Patterns and sizes vary
with enclosure size.
Four mounting
holes
0.28
(0.7) dia
in
(cm) 0.5
(1.27)
0.53
(1.35)
Typical
1.5
(3.81)
C
A
B
DESCRIPTION
The SC Series screw cover boxes serve as surface-mounted
junction boxes or switch boxes. With the addition of a field-
installed perforated subpanel, they can also house controls and instruments in areas that do not require oil tight and dust- tight ratings
.
FEATURES
• 16-gaug •
Flat, removable covers fastened with plated steel
screws
• Unique keyhole screw slots in cover for removal
without extracting the screws
• Mounting holes on back of enclosure
• Various sizes of easily removable knockouts on all
sides
• ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder finish inside and out
over phosphatized surfaces
• Available with optional perf panel
• UL listed File #E27525
• CSA certified, File #LL42184
• One-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
ENCLOSURE
MODEL†
SC664
SC666
SC884
SC886
SC1084
SC1284
SC12104
SC12106
SC12124
SC16124
SC18124
SC18126
† Add P to the end of part number to order optional perf panel. (Standoffs are field installed, drilling required).
DIMENSIONS
A x B x C in (cm)
6 x 6 x 4 (15 x 15 x 10)
6 x 6 x 6 (15 x 15 x 15)
8 x 8 x 4 (20 x 20 x 10)
8 x 8 x 6 (20 x 20 x 10)
10 x 8 x 4 (25 x 20 x 10)
12 x 8 x 4 (40 x 20 x 10)
12 x 10 x 4 (30 x 25 x 10)
12 x 10 x 6 (30 x 25 x 10)
12 x 12 x 4 (30 x 30 x 10)
16 x 12 x 4 (41 x 30 x 10)
18 x 12 x 4 (46 x 30 x 10)
18 x 12 x 6 (46 x 30 x 15)
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
3.1 (1.4)
4.0 (1.8)
4.7 (2.1)
6.0 (2.7)
6.1 (2.8)
6.3 (2.9)
7.3 (3.3)
8.8 (4.0)
8.5 (3.8)
12.0 (5.5)
12.0 (5.5)
14.0 (6.4)
OPTIONAL PERF PANEL
DIMENSIONS SIZE H x W in (cm)
4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11)
4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11)
6.25 x 6.25 (16 x 16)
6.25 x 6.25 (16 x 16)
8.25 x 6.25 (21 x 16)
10.25 x 6.25 (26 x 16)
10.25 x 8.25 (26 x 21)
10.25 x 8.25 (26 x 21)
10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26)
14.25 x 10.625 (36 x 26)
16.25 x 10.25 (41 x 26)
16.25 x 10.25 (41 x 26)
See Hoffman Enclosure Accessory page in the Enclosures section for locks, latches, heaters, fans, and
ventilation kits. Additional box sizes av ailable.NEW!
ENCLOSURES
244NEW!
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014

281. ORDERING INFORMATION
ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT OPTIONAL PERF PANEL
MODEL† A x B x C
in (cm) lb (kg) DIMENSION SIZE H x W in (cm)
HC664 6 x 6 x 4 (15 x 15 x 10) 3.2 (1.5) 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11 )
HC666 6 x 6 x 6 (15 x 15 x 15) 4.0 (1.8) 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11 )
HC886 8 x 8 x 6 (20 x 20 x 15) 6.0 (2.7) 6.25 x 6.25 (16 x 16)
HC1084 10 x 8 x 4 (25 x 20 x 10) 7.0 (3.2) 8.25 x 6.25 (21 x 16)
HC1284 12 x 8 x 4 (30 x 20 x 10) 8.0 (3.6) 10.25 x 6.25 (26 x 16)
HC12104 12 x 10 x 4 (30 x 25 x 10) 8.0 (3.6) 10.25 x 8.25 (26 x 21)
HC12124 12 x 12 x 4 (30 x 30 x 10) 8.8 (4.0) 10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26)
HC12126 12 x 12 x 6 (30 x 30 x 15) 10.3 (4.7) 10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26)
HC16124 16 x 12 x 4 (41 x 30 x 10) 12.0 (5.5) 14.25 x 10.625 (36 x 26)
HC16126 16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15) 13.0 (5.9) 14.25 x 10.25 (36 x 26)
HC18124 18 x 12 x 4 (46 x 30 x 10) 12.0 (5.4) 16.25 x 10.25 (41 x 26)
HC18126 18 x 12 x 6 (46 x 30 x 15) 14.0 (6.4) 16.25 x 10.25 (41 x 26)
See Hoffman Enclosure Accessory page in the Enclosure section for locks,
latches, heaters, fans, and ventilation kits. Additional box sizes available.
† Add P to the end of part number to order optional perf panel. (Standoffs are field installed, drilling required.)
Knockouts on all sides.
Patterns and sizes vary
with enclosure size.
C
B - 1.06 (2.69)
Opening
A - 1.06 (2.69)
Opening
A
B
Flush-
mounted
coin latch
Four mounting
holes
0.28
(0.71) dia
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The HC Series NEMA 1 hinge cover boxes serve as surface-
mounted junction boxes or switch boxes. With the addition
of a field-installed perforated subpanel, they can also house controls and instruments in areas that do not require oil-tight and dust-tight ratings
.
FEATURES
• 16-gaug •
Removable doors with butt hinges
• Door hinge on left or right side
• Mounting holes on back of enclosure
• Easy operation of flush latch with a screwdriver or coin
• Various sizes of easily removable knockouts on all
sides
• ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder finish inside and out
over phosphatized surfaces
• Available with optional perf panel
• UL listed, File #E27525
• CSA certified, File #LL42184
• One-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
NEMA 1 HINGE COVER BOXES
HC SERIESNEW!
245ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014

282. DESCRIPTION
The AFE Series flush mounted screw covered boxes are
designed to mount within a wall to serve as junction boxes or
switch boxes
. With the addition of a field-installed perforated
subpanel, they may also be used to house controls and instruments in areas that do not require oil-tight and dust- tight ratings
. The AFE Series is a gray powder coated steel
enclosure and cover.
FEATURES
• 16 gaug •
Flat, removeable covers fastened with plated steel
screws
• Mounting holes on back of enclosure
• Various sizes of easily removeable knockouts on all
sides
• Attractive, gray powder-coated box
• Available with perf panel
DIMENSIONS
FLUSH MOUNTED, SCREW COVER NEMA1 BOXES
AFE SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Knockouts on all sides.
Patterns and sizes vary
with enclosure size.
Four mounting holes
0.28 (0.7) dia
in
(cm)
0.5
(1.27)
0.53
(1.35)
Typical
1.5
(3.81)
B
A
D
H
W
AFE Flush cover enclosure
BOX SIZE H x W x D in (cm) A x B in (cm)
664B 6 x 6 x 4 (15 x 15 x 10) 7.5 x 7.5 (19 x 19)
666B 6 x 6 x 6 (15 x 15 x 15) 7.5 x 7.5 (19 x 19)
886B 8 x 8 x 6 (20 x 20 x 15) 9.5 x 9.5 (24 x 24)
1084B 10 x 8 x 4 (25 x 20 x 10) 11.5 x 9.5 (29 x 24)
1284B 12 x 8 x 4 (30 x 20 x 10) 13.5 x 9.5 (34 x 24)
12124B 12 x 12 x 4 (30 x 30 x 10) 13.5 x 13.5 (34 x 34)

OPTIONS
P Powder-coated perf panel (standoffs are field installed)
Example: AFE-664B-P Gr ay steel flush enclosure with perf panel

WEIGHT lb (kg) PERF PANEL DIM H x W in (cm)
4.3 (2.0) 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11)
5.2 (2.4) 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11)
7.6 (3.4) 6.25 x 6.25 (16 x 16)
8.2 (3.7) 8.25 x 6.25 (21 x 16)
8.6 (3.9) 10.25 x 6.25 (26 x 16)
12.2 (5.5) 10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26)
AFE 664B P
AFE SeriesNEW!
ENCLOSURES
246NEW!
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014

283. ORDERING INFORMATION
FLUSH MOUNTED SCREW COVER BOXES
FC, FCS SERIES
Knockouts on all sides.
Patterns and sizes vary
with enclosure size.
Four mounting holes
0.28 (0.7) dia
in
(cm)
0.5
(1.27)
0.53
(1.35)
Typical
1.5
(3.81)
B
A
D
H
W
DESCRIPTION
The FC/FCS Series flush mounted screw cover boxes are
designed to mount within a wall to serve as junction boxes or
switch boxes
. With the addition of a field-installed perforated
subpanel, they may also be used to house controls and instruments in areas that do not require oil-tight and dust- tight ratings
. The FC Series is a gray powder coated steel
enclosure and cover, while the FCS Series is a gray powder- coated steel enclosure with a 304 stainless steel cover
. Each
ser
ies is available with a locking door
.
FEATURES
• 16 gaug •
Flat, removable covers fastened with plated steel
screws
• Mounting holes on back of enclosure
• Various sizes of easily removable knockouts on all
sides
• Attractive, gray powder-coated box
• Available with gray powder-coated or stainless steel
cover
• Available with optional door and perf panel
DIMENSIONS
FC Flush cover enclosure
FCS Stainless steel flush cover enclosure
BOX SIZE H x W x D in (cm) A x B in (cm)
664 6 x 6 x 4 (15 x 15 x 10) 8 x 8 (20 x 20)
666 6 x 6 x 6 (15 x 15 x 15) 8 x 8 (20 x 20 cm)
886 8 x 8 x 6 (20 x 20 x 15) 10 x 10 (25 x 25)
1084 10 x 8 x 4 (25 x 20 x 10) 12 x 10 (30 x 25)
1284 12 x 8 x 4 (30 x 20 x 10) 14 x 10 (36 x 25)
12104 12 x 10 x 4 (30 x 25 x 10) 14 x 12 (36 x 30)
12124 12 x 12 x 4 (30 x 30 x 10) 14 x 14 (36 x 36)
16124 16 x 12 x 4 (41 x 30 x 10) 18 x 14 (46 x 36)
18124 18 x 12 x 4 (46 x 41 x 10) 20 x 14 (51 x 36)
18126 18 x 12 x 6 (46 x 41 x 15) 20 x 14 (51 x 36)
OPTIONS
D Continuously hinged door with key lock (8" x 8" / 20 x 20 cm or larger)
P Powder-coated perf panel (standoffs are field installed)
Example: FCS-1284-D-P Stainless steel flush-covered enclosure with locking door and perf panel
WEIGHT PERF PANEL D OPTION
FC and FCS FC-D and FCS-D DIMENSIONS DOOR DIMENSIONS
lb (kg) lb (kg) H x W in (cm) H x W in (cm)
4.00 (1.81) N/A 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11) N/A
4.80 (2.18) N/A 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11) N/A
6.90 (3.13) 7.50 (3.40) 6.25 x 6.25 (16 x 16) 3.57 x 5.94 (10 x 15)
8.00 (3.63) 8.75 (3.97) 8.25 x 6.25 (21 x 16) 5.57 x 5.94 (15 x 15)
9.00 (4.08) 9.70 (4.40) 10.25 x 6.25 (26 x 16) 7.57 x 5.94 (19 x 15)
9.10 (4.13) 9.80 (4.45) 10.25 x 8.25 (26 x 21) 7.57 x 7.94 (19 x 20)
9.95 (4.51) 10.45 (4.74) 10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26) 7.57 x 9.94 (19 x 25)
13.15 (5.96) 13.70 (6.21) 14.25 x 10.625 (36 x 26) 11.57 x 9.94 (29 x 25)
13.50 (6.12) 14.25 (6.46) 16.25 x 10.25 (41 x 26) 13.57 x 9.94 (34 x 25)
15.50 (7.03) 16.30 (7.39) 16.25 x 10.25 (41 x 26) 13.57 x 9.94 (34 x 25)
FCS 1284DPNEW!
247ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014

284. CONTROL CABINET
VERSA-CAB
W
H
D
DESCRIPTION
The Versa-Cab Control Cabinet is designed to make
mounting electrical and pneumatic components easy. The
front panel is aluminum bonded to plywood, which makes it simple to cut a large hole with just a saw
. Large meters,
gauges, indicators, and operator interface devices can be mounted easily
. If a change is needed later, replacement
panels can be ordered.
FEATURES
• Direct replacement for M8100 cabinets
• Extruded aluminum alloy frame
• Removable face and back panels
• Panels consist of aluminum bonded to both sides of
plywood core
• Face panel has gray baked enamel finish
• Piano hinge on the door
• Cabinet can be mounted so door opens left or right
• Includes key-lock latch
• UL Listed Type 1, file #E218484
DIMENSIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
Cabinet
Model No.
Dimensions Weight Lbs.
VC-1812 18" x 12" x 9.5" 17.0
VC-2418 24" x 18" x 9.5" 25
VC-2424 24" x 24" x 9.5" 30
VC-3024 30" x 24" x 9.5" 35
VC-3624 36" x 24" x 9.5" 40
VC-4230 42" x 30" x 9.5" 53
VC-4836 48" x 36" x 9.5" 72
Replacement
Face Panels
Dimensions Weight Lbs.
VC-1812-FP 16.5" x 10.5" 2.1
VC-2418-FP 22.5" x 16.5" 4.2
VC-2424-FP 22.5" x 22.5" 5.6
VC-3024-FP 28.5" x 22.5" 7
VC-3624-FP 34.5" x 22.5" 8.4
VC-4230-FP 40.5" x 28.5" 12.2
VC-4836-FP 46.5" x 34.5" 16.8
Replacement
Back Panels
Dimensions Weight Lbs.
VC-1812-BP 16.5" x 10.5" 2.1
VC-2418-BP 22.5" x 16.5" 4.2
VC-2424-BP 22.5" x 22.5" 5.6
VC-3024-BP 28.5" x 22.5" 7
VC-3624-BP 34.5" x 22.5" 8.4
VC-4230-BP 40.5" x 28.5" 12.2
VC-4836-BP 46.5" x 34.5" 16.8NEW!
ENCLOSURES
248NEW!
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014

285. W
D
H
RIGHT SIDE
VIEW
REAR VIEW
ORDERING INFORMATION
SAGINAW NEMA 1 ENCLOSURES
SCE SERIES SMALL
DESCRIPTION
The SCE Series small enclosures are designed to house
electrical controls, instruments and components in areas that
do not require oil, water and dust tight protection
.
FEATURES
• NEMA 1 construction
• 0.063 & 0.075 carbon steel depending on its size
• Spot weld construction
• Standoffs provided for mounting optional panels
• Butt hinge
• Doors open 180 degrees
• Black quarter turn latches
• Latches are opened or closed with a screwdriver
• Ground stud on door
• Mounting holes in back of enclosure
• Subpanel mounting hardware
• ANSI-61 gray powder coat finish (white sub panel)
• UL File #E69392
DIMENSIONS
Model
Dimensions in (cm)
H x W x D
Panel GaugeWeight lb (kg)Sub Panel
Sub Panel Dimensions
in (cm)
SCE6N604LP 6 x 6 x 4 (15 x 15 x 10)16 4 (1.8) SCE6N6MP 4 x 4 (10 x 10)
SCE8N604LP 8 x 6 x 4 (20 x 15 x 10)16 5 (2.27 SCE86MP 6 x 4 (15 x 10)
SCE8N804LP 8 x 8 x 4 (20 x 20 x10)16 6 (2.72) SCE8N8MP 6 x 6 (15 x 15)
SC8N0806LP 8 x 8 x 6 (20 x 20 x 15)16 7 (3.18) SCE8N8MP 6 x 6 (15 x 15)
SCE10N804LP 10 x 8 x 4 (25 x 20 x10)16 7 (3.18) SCE10N8MP 8 x 6 (20 x 15)
SCE10N806LP 10 x 8 x 6 (25 x 20 x15)16 8 (3.630 SCE10N8MP 8 x 6 (20 x 15)
SCE10N1004LP 10 x 10 x 4 (25 x 25 x 10)16 8.5 (3.86)SCE10N10MP 8 x 8 (20 x 20)
SCE10N1006LP 10 x 10 x 6 (25 x 25 x 15)16 9 (4.1) SCE10N10MP 8 x 8 (20 x 20)
SCE12N1004LP 12 x 10 x 4 (30 x 25 x 10)16 8 (3.63)SCE12N10MP 10 x 8 (25 x 20)
SCE12N1006LP 12 x 10 x 6 (30 x 25 x 15)16 10 (4.54)SCE12N10MP 10 x 8 (25 x 20)
SCE12N1204LP 12 x 12 x 4 (30 x 30 x 10)16 9 (4.1) SCE12N12MP 10 x 10 (25 x 25)
SCE12N1206LP 12 x 12 x 6 (30 x 30 x 15)16 10 (4.54)SCE12N12MP 10 x 10 (25 x 25)
SCE12N1208LP 12 x 12 x 8 (30 x 30 x 20)16 12 (5.45)SCE12N12MP 10 x 10 (25 x 25)
SCE14N1204LP 14 x 12 x 4 (36 x 30 x 10)16 10 (4.54)SCE14N12MP 12 x 10 (30 x 25)
SCE14N1206LP 14 x 12 x 6 (36 x 30 x 15)16 11 (4.99)SCE14N12MP 12 x 10 (30 x 25)
SCE14N1208LP 14 x 12 x 8 (36 x 30 x 20)16 14 (6.36)SCE14N12MP 12 x 10 (30 x 25)
SCE16N1206LP 16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15)16 11 (4.99)SCE16N12MP 14 x 10 (36 x 25)
SCE16N1208LP 16 x 12 x 8 (41 x 30 x20)16 17 (7.72)SCE16N12MP 14 x 10 (36 x 25)
SCE16N1606LP 16 x 16 x 6 (41 x 41 x 15)16 16 (7.26)SCE16N16MP 14 x 14 (36 x 36)
SCE16N1608LP 16 x 16 x 8 (41 x 41 x 20)16 20 (9.09)SCE16N16MP 14 x 14 (36 x 36)
SCE16N2006LP 16 x 20 x 6 (41 x 51 x 15)16 21 (9.53)SCE20N16MP 18 x 14 (46 x 36)
249ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014

286. W
D
H
RIGHT SIDE
VIEW
REAR VIEW
DESCRIPTION
The SCE Series large enclosures are designed to house
electrical controls, instruments and components in areas that
do not require oil, water and dust tight protection
.
FEATURES
• NEMA 1 construction
• 0.063 & 0.075 carbon steel depending on its size
• Spot weld construction
• Standoffs provided for mounting optional panels
• Butt hinge
• Doors open 180 degrees
• Black quarter turn latches
• Latches are opened or closed with a screwdriver
• Ground stud on door
• Mounting holes in back of enclosure
• Subpanel mounting hardware
• ANSI-61 gray powder coat finish (white sub panel)
SAGINAW NEMA 1 ENCLOSURES
SCE SERIES LARGE
ORDERING INFORMATION
DIMENSIONS
Model
Dimensions in (cm)
H x W x D
Panel GaugeWeight lb (kg)Sub Panel
Sub Panel Dimensions
in (cm)
SCE20N1606LP 20 x 16 x 6 (51 x 41 x 15)16 21 (9.5)SCE20N16MP 18 x 14 (46 x 36)
SCE20N1608LP 20 x 16 x 8 (51 x 41 x 15)16 24 (10.9)SCE20N16MP 18 x 14 (46 x 36)
SCE20N2006LP 20 x 20 x 6 (51 x 51 x 15)16 25 (11.4)SCE20N20MP 18 X 18 (46 X 46)
SCE20N2008LP 20 x 20 x 8 (51 x 51 x 20)16 28 (12.7)SCE20N20MP 18 X 18 (46 X 46)
SCE20N2010LP 20 x 20 x 10 (51 x 51 x 25)16 31 (14.1)SCE20N20MP 18 X 18 (46 X 46)
SCE24N1606LP 24 x 16 x 6 (61 x 41 x 15)16 27 (12.3)SCE24N16MP 22 X 14 (56 X 36)
SCE24N2006LP 24 x 20 x 6 (61 x 51 x 15)16 32 (14.5)SCE24N20MP 22 X 18 (56 X 46)
SCE24N2008LP 24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 51 x 20)16 33 (15)SCE24N20MP 22 X 18 (56 X 46)
SCE24N2010LP 24 x 20 x 10 (61 x 51 x 25)16 35 (16)SCE24N20MP 22 X 18 (56 X 46)
SCE24N2406LP 24 x 24 x 6 (61 x 61 x 15)14 41 (19)SCE24N24MP 22 X 22 (56 X 56)
SCE24N2408LP 24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 20)14 46 (21)SCE24N24MP 22 X 22 (56 X 56)
SCE24N2412LP 24 x 24 x 12 (61 x 61 x 30)14 53 (24.1)SCE24N24MP 22 X 22 (56 X 56)
SCE30N2406LP 30 x 24 x 6 (76 x 61 x 15)14 51 (23.2)SCE30N24MP 28 X 22 (71 X 56)
SCE30N2408LP 30 x 24 x 8 (76 x 61 x 20)14 54 (24.5)SCE30N24MP 28 X 22 (71 X 56)
SCE30N2412LP 30 x 24 x 12 (76 x 61 x 30)14 61 (27.7)SCE30N24MP 28 X 22 (71 X 56)
SCE30N3008LP 30 x 30 x 8 (76 x 76 x 20)14 60 (27.2)SCE30N30MP 28 X 28 (71 X 71)
SCE36N2406LP 36 x 24 x 6 (91 x 61 x 15)14 54 (24.5)SCE36N24MP 34 X 22 (86 X 56)
SCE36N2408LP 36 x 24 x 8 (91 x 61 x 20)14 62 (28)SCE36N24MP 34 X 22 (86 X 56)
SCE36N2412LP 36 x 24 x 12 (91 x 61 x 30)14 73 (33)SCE36N24MP 34 X 22 (86 X 56)
SCE36N3006LP 36 x 30 x 6 (91 x 76 x 15)14 68 (38.9)SCE36N30MP 34 X 28 (86 X 71)
SCE36N3008LP 36 x 30 x 8 (91 x 76 x 20)14 69 (31.3)SCE36N30MP 34 X 28 (86 X 71)
SCE36N3012LP 36 x 30 x 12 (91 x 76 x 30)14 83 (37.7)SCE36N30MP 34 X 28 (86 X 71)
ENCLOSURES
250
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014

287. ORDERING INFORMATION
SIEMENS NEMA 1 ENCLOSURES
567 SERIES
H
Mounting
plate
Door lock
Door
D
W
W
H
DESCRIPTION
The 567 Series includes attractive, economical NEMA 1
enclosures designed to house controls and instruments in
areas which do not require oil-tight and dust-tight ratings
.
The medium and large models are o
ver 9 inches deep
allowing the installation of larger components
. The 567 Series
enclosures are furnished with a perforated metal subpanel for easy mounting of components
. No drilling or layout. Just set
the control components on the panel and attach with #7 or #8 self-tapping screws in the prepunched holes
. The 567 Series
is UL listed and CSA approved.
FEATURES
• NEMA 1 enclosure
• Medium and Large are over 9 inches deep
• Removeable door hinged on left or right side
• Attractive gray finish
• Key lock, two keys, and an attractive powder-coated 16
gauge perf panel furnished
• Mounting of control components simplified with perf
panel
• UL File #E111475, CSA approved
• 1/2" to 2" knockouts on sides, top and bottom
DIMENSIONS
Model Size Dimensions MaterialsWeight Perf Panel
Mounting
Keyholes
567-351 Small
19.5" H x 16.38" W x 5.75" D
(49.5 x 41.6 x 14.6 cm)
16-ga steel20.0 lb (9 kg)
14.5" x 14.75"
(36.8 x 37.5 cm)
16.5" x 13.5"
(41.9 x 34.3 cm)
567-352 Medium
24.31" H x 24.38" W x 9.38" D
(61.7 x 61.9 x 23.8 cm)
16-ga steel39.0 lb (18 kg)
19.25" x 23.0"
(48.9 x 58.4 cm)
21" x 16"
(53.3 x 40.6 cm)
567-353 Large
36.5" H x 24.38" W x 9.38" D
(92.7 x 61.9 x 23.8 cm)
14-ga steel72.0 lb (33 kg)
31.5" x 22.0"
(80.0 x 55.9 cm)
33.5" x 16.75"
(85.1 x 42.5 cm)

ACCESSORIES
567-225 Key & Lock for 567 enclosures
251ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014

288. HOFFMAN NEMA 3R ENCLOSURES AND PANELS
A-HCLO SERIES
4.0
(10.16)
D
A
1.06
(2.70)
1.06
(2.70)
Optional external
mounting foot kit
Mounting holes
0.28 (0.71) dia
B
Knockout fo r
optional panel
mounting kit
C
16-gauge
16- and
14-
gauge
13.0
(33.0)
D
A
1.13
(2.90)
1.13
(2.90)
Optional external
mounting foot kit
Mounting holes
0.28 (0.71) dia
0.53 (1.35) Flange
width, typical
B
Knockout fo r
optional panel
mounting kit
14-gauge
0.53 (1.35) Flange width, typical
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
Hoffman A-HCLO Series NEMA 3R lift-off hinged cover
enclosures house controls and instruments and provide
protection in outdoor installations against rain, sleet, and
snow, or indoors against dripping water
.
FEATURES
• Drip-shield top and seam-free sides, front, and back
• Galvanized steel lift-off hinges with stainless steel pins
• Cover fastened securely with draw-pull catches
• Provisions for padlocking on each draw-pull catch
• Embossed mounting holes on back of enclosure
• Gasketing along top of door
• ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder coating inside and out
over galvanized steel
• Optional steel panels with white finish
• Fans, heaters, louvers, and windows available
• UL listed, File #E27567
• CSA certified, File #LL42184
• One-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
A-8R64HCLO
A-8R86HCLO
A-10R86HCLO
A-12R106HCLO
A-12R126HCLO
A-16R126HCLO
A-16R166HCLO
A-20R166HCLO
A-20R208HCLO
A-24R208HCLO
A-24R248HCLO
A-30R248HCLO
DIMENSIONS**
A x B x C in (cm)
BODY
GAUGE
MOUNTING
D
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
GAUGEWEIGHT
lb (kg)
A-6P6
†
A-8P6
†
A-8P8
†
A-10P10
†
A-12P10
†
A-14P12
†
A-16P16
††
A-20P16
††
A-20P20
††
A-24P20
††
A-24P24
††
A-30P24
††
DIMENSIONS
H x W in (cm)
16
16
16
16
16
16
14
14
14
14
14
14
8 x 6 x 4 (20 x 15 x 10)
8 x 8 x 6 (20 x 20 x 15)
10 x 8 x 6 (25 x 20 x 15)
12 x 10 x 6 (30 x 25 x 15)
12 x 12 x 6 (30 x 30 x 15)
16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15)
16 x 16 x 6 (41 x 41 x 15)
20 x 16 x 6 (51 x 41 x 15)
20 x 20 x 8 (51 x 51 x 20)
24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 51 x 20)
24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 20)
30 x 24 x 8 (76 x 61 x 20)
4.9 (2.2)
6.8 (3.1)
8.2 (3.7)
11 (5.0)
11.8 (5.4)
14.6 (6.6)
18.2 (8.3)
21.5 (9.8)
30.7 (13.9)
36 (16.3)
45 (20.4)
54 (24.5)
9.12 (23)
9.12 (23)
11.12 (28)
13.12 (33)
13.12 (33)
17.12 (43)
17.31 (44)
21.31 (54)
21.31 (54)
25.31 (64)
25.31 (64)
31.31 (80)
4.88 x 4.88 (12 x 12)
6.75 x 4.88 (17 x 12)
6.75 x 6.88 (17 x 17.5)
8.75 x 8.88 (22 x 22.5)
10.75 x 8.88 (27 x 22.5)
12.75 x 10.88 (32 x 28)
13 x 13 (33 x 33)
17 x 13 (43 x 33)
17 x 17 (43 x 43)
21 x 17 (53 x 43)
21 x 21 (53 x 53)
27 x 21 (69 x 53)
14
14
14
14
14
14
12
12
12
12
12
12
0.5 (0.32)
0.7 (0.3)
1 (0.5)
1.7 (0.8)
2.1 (0.95)
3 (1.4)
5.2 (2.4)
6.7 (3)
9 (4.1)
11 (5)
14 (6.4)
18.7 (8.5)
* Order panels separately ** Enclosures with B=8 or less have one latch
ENCLOSURE
MODEL
†††
SOLID
PANEL*
MODEL
†
Panel Mounting Kit A-PMK3RL016 is required. Order separately.
††
Panel Mounting Kit A-PMK3RL014 is required. Order separately.
†††
Add P to the end of part number to order optional perf panel.
(Includes panel mounting kit)
RELATED PRODUCTS
A-MFK3RL014 14-gauge enclosure mounting foot kit
A-MFK3RL016 16-gauge enclosure mounting foot kit NEW!
ENCLOSURES
252NEW!
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014

289. SAGINAW NEMA 3R ENCLOSURES AND PANELS
R-LP SERIES
A
1.06
(2.70)
1.06
(2.70)
B
C
16-gauge
16- and
14-
gauge
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
Saginaw R-LP Series NEMA 3R lift-off hinged cover
enclosures house controls and instruments and provide
protection in outdoor installations against rain, sleet, and
snow, or indoors against dripping water
.
FEATURES
• Drip-shield top and seam-free sides, front, and back
• Galvanized steel lift-off hinges with stainless steel pins
• Cover fastened securely with draw-pull catches
• Provisions for padlocking on each draw-pull catch
• ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder coating inside and out
over galvanized steel
• Optional steel panels with white finish
• UL listed, File #E69392
• CSA certified
• One-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
R-LP Series
ORDERING INFORMATION
SCE12R1206LP
SCE16R1206LP
SCE20R1606LP
SCE24R2008LP
SCE30R2408LP
(OVERALL)
DIMENSIONS
A x B x C in (cm)
BODY
GAUGE
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
SCE12DLP12
SCE16P12
SCE20P16
SCE24P20
SCE30P24
DIMENSIONS
H x W in (cm)
16 16 16 16 16
12 x 12.3 x 7.7 (30.5 x 31.2 x 19.6) 16 x 12.3 x 7.7 (40.6 x 31.2 x 19.6) 20 x 16.3 x 7.7 (50.8 x 41.4 x 19.6)
24 x 20.3 x 9.7 (61 x 51.6 x 24.6)
30 x 24.3 x 9.7 (76.2 x 61.7 x 24.6)
15 16 25 32 60
9 x 9 (22.9 x 22.9)
13 x 9 (33 x 22.9)
17 x 13 (43.2 x 33)
21 x 17 (53.3 x 43.2) 27 x 21 (68.6 x 53.3)
3 4
8
14
22
ENCLOSURE
MODEL
SOLID
PANEL
MODEL
253ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014

290. ORDERING INFORMATION
1.86
(4.70)
B - 2.94
(7.50)
Panel
(order
separately)
.34 x .16
Mounting
slot
(Typical)
B
H
E
D
AG
3.00 (7.60)
.97
(2.50)
in
(cm)
Door
bonding
provision
C
I
C
5.78
(14.7)
0.14
(0.4)
4.00
(10.2)
1.20
(30.0)
0.89
(23.0)
2.38
(6.0)
4.68
(11.9)
6.29
(16.0)
Door
vented
hood
Body
grounding
stud
1.90
(4.80)
2.37
(6.0)
DESCRIPTION
The WF Series enclosures have a forced-air ventilation
system for cooling drives or other heat producing equipment
in applications that require outdoor protection
. The enclosures
have a white polyester powder finish that will reduce the solar heat load by up to 70% compared to a gray enclosure
. An
integ
rated solar shield on the top adds additional solar heat
reduction
. The integral fan and vent placement optimizes heat
removal, by drawing in from the bottom and exhausting at the top
. Gasketing and the filter protects against contaminants
entering the enclosure. An adjustable thermostat (70° to
140° F) brings on the fan when needed.
FEATURES
• Active cooling ventilation system with factory-installed
fan and filter (115 VAC)
• Terminal power connection for fan
• Easy access washable expanded metal filter
• Front hood exhaust and intake saves interior space
• Quarter turn latch with padlock attachment
• Collar studs for mounting back panel
• Largest two sizes constructed of aluminum to reduce
weight
• Grounding provision on door and body
• DAH series heaters can be added to raise the
temperature and prevent condensation
• 16 and 14 gauge galvanized steel
• UL listed File #E61997
• One-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
HOFFMAN NEMA 3R ENCLOSURE WITH FAN
WF SERIES
† Add P to the end of part number to order optional perf panel.
Model
Drive
HP
Dimensions A x B
x C in (mm)
Weight lb
(kg)
Sub Panel
Sub Panel
Dimensions D
x E in (mm)
Mounting
Holes G x H in
(mm)
Weight
lb (kg)
Heater Part
number
WF3LP 3
29 x 24 x 12
(737 x 610 x 305)
106 (48.1)A-24P24
21 x 21
(533 x 533)
29.94 x 13
(760 x 330)
14 (6.4)DAH2001A
WF10LP 10
35 x 24 x 12
(889 x 610 x 305)
111 (50.3)A-30P24
27 x 21
(686 x 533)
35.94 x 13
(913 x 330)
18 (8.2)DAH2001A
WF25LP 25
41 x 24 x 12
(1041 x 610 x 305)
124 (56.2)A-36P24
33 x 21
(838 x 533)
41.94 x 13
(1065 x 330)
22 (10.0)DAH2001A
WF40LP 40
47 x 24 x 14
(1194 x 610 x 356)
135 (61.2)A-42P24
39 x 21
(991 x 533)
47.94 x 13
(1218 x 330)
27 (12.2)DAH2001A
WF75LP 75
55 x 36 x 16
(1397 x 914 x 406)
140 (63.5)A-48P36
45 x 33
(1143 x 838)
55.94 x 27
(1421 x 686)
46 (20.9)DAH4001B
WF100LP 100
67 x 36 x 16
(1702 x 914 x 706)
165 (74.8)A-60P36
57 x 33
(1448 x 838)
67.94 x 27
(1726 x 686)
59 (26.8)DAH4001BNEW!
ENCLOSURES
254NEW!
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014

291. SAGINAW NEMA 3R ENCLOSURE WITH FAN
VR SERIES
1.86
(4.70)
Panel
(order
separately)
B
E
D
A
3.00 (7.60)
in
(cm)
C
C
5.2
(14.5)
13.25
(33.7)
Door vented hood
DESCRIPTION
The VR Series enclosures have a forced-air ventilation
system for cooling drives or other heat-producing equipment
in applications that require outdoor protection
. The enclosures
have a white polyester powder finish that will reduce the solar heat load by up to 70% compared to a gray enclosure
. An
integ
rated solar shield on the top adds additional solar heat
reduction
. The integral fan and vent placement optimizes heat
removal, by drawing in from the bottom and exhausting at the top
. Gasketing and the filter protects against contaminants
entering the enclosure. An adjustable thermostat (50° to 90° F)
brings on the fan when needed.
FEATURES
• Active cooling ventilation system with factory-installed
fan and filter (115 VAC)
• Terminal power connection for fan
• Front hood exhaust and intake saves interior space
• Quarter turn latch with padlock attachment
• Grounding provision on enclosure
• 14 gauge galvanized steel
• UL listed, File #E69392
• One-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
VR Series
ORDERING INFORMATIONNEW!
255ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
MODEL
SCE29VR2412
SCE35VR2412
SCE41VR2412
SCE47VR2412
SCE53VR2412
SCE65VR2412
DIMENSIONS
A x B x C in (mm)
29 x 24 x 12 (737 x 610 x 305) 35 x 24 x 12 (889 x 610 x 305)
41 x 24 x 12 (1041 x 610 x 305) 47 x 24 x 14 (1194 x 610 x 356) 53 x 36 x 16 (1346 x 914 x 906)
65 x 36 x 16 (1651 x 914 x 906)
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
125 (56.7) 131 (59.4) 144 (65.3) 160 (72.6) 221 (100.2)
244 (110.7)
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
17 (7.7) 22 (10) 27 (12.2) 31 (14.1) 55 (25)
58 (26.3)
MODEL
SCE24P24 SCE30P24 SCE36P24 SCE42P24 SCE48P36
SCE60P36
DIMENSIONS
D x E in (mm)
21 x 21 (533 x 533) 27 x 21 (696 x 533) 33 x 21 (838 x 533) 39 x 21 (911 x 533)
45 x 33 (1143 x 838)
57 x 33 (1447 x 838)
ENCLOSURE SUB PANEL
)
DRIVE
HP
3 10 25 40 75
100
March 2014

292. HOFFMAN NEMA 4 ENCLOSURES AND PANELS
A-ALP, A-BLP SERIES
Data
pocket
3.38
(8.58)
Two clamps 30" (76.20)
or larger
A-1.81
(4.60)
B-1.84
(4.67)
Door
clamp
Mounting
holes
Door stiffener
used on panels
with “A”
dimensions of
42" and larger
in
(cm)
Padlocking
hasp and
staple
A
C
C
3.00
(7.6)
B
DESCRIPTION
Hoffman A-ALP and A-BLP Series NEMA 4 enclosures
are designed to house electrical and pneumatic controls,
instruments, and components
. These enclosures provide
protection from windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water
.
FEATURES
• Contin
holes or knockouts
• Seamless, watertight foam gasket for tight seal
• Hasp and staple for padlocking
• Removable door
• Data pocket included
• Collar studs provided for mounting optional subpanels
• Steel subpanels available
• Fans, heaters, louvers, and windows available
• UL listed File #E61997
• CSA certified, File #LR42186
• One-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
A-16H12ALP
A-16H16ALP
A-20H16ALP
A-20H20ALP
A-24H20ALP
A-24H24ALP
A-30H24ALP
A-36H24ALP
A-16H12BLP
A-20H16BLP
A-20H20BLP
A-24H20BLP
A-24H24BLP
A-30H24BLP
A-36H24BLP
A-36H30BLP
DIMENSIONS
A x B x C in (cm)
16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15)
16 x 16 x 6 (41 x 41 x 15)
20 x 16 x 6 (51 x 41 x 15)
20 x 20 x 6 (51 x 51 x 15)
24 x 20 x 6 (61 x 51 x 15)
24 x 24 x 6 (61 x 61 x 15)
30 x 24 x 6 (76 x 61 x 15)
36 x 24 x 6 (91 x 61 x 15)
16 x 12 x 8 (41 x 30 x 20)
20 x 16 x 8 (51 x 41 x 20)
20 x 20 x 8 (51 x 51 x 20)
24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 51 x 20)
24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 28)
30 x 24 x 8 (76 x 61 x 20)
36 x 24 x 8 (91 x 61 x 20)
36 x 30 x 8 (91 x 76 x 20)
BODY
GAUGE
16
16
16
16
16
16
14
14
16
16
16
16
16
14
14
14
GAUGE
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
17.9 (8.1)
24.4 (11.1)
25.5 (11.6)
29.7 (13.5)
34.1 (15.5)
39 (17.7)
54 (24.5)
61 (27.7)
19.8 (9.0)
27.8 (12.6)
32.5 (14.7)
40.7 (18.5)
43 (19.5)
58 (26.3)
67.0 (30.4)
80 (36.3)
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
3.7 (1.7)
5.2 (2.4)
6.9 (3.1)
8.9 (4.0)
11 (5.0)
14 (6.4)
18.7 (8.5)
22.0 (10.0)
3.7 (1.7)
6.9 (3.2)
8.9 (4.0)
11 (5.0)
14 (6.4)
18.7 (8.5)
22.0 (10.0)
29.6 (13.4)
MODEL
A-16P12
A-16P16
A-20P16
A-20P20
A-24P20
A-24P24
A-30P24
A-36P24
A-16P12
A-20P16
A-20P20
A-24P20
A-24P24
A-30P24
A-36P24
A-36P30
DIMENSIONS
A x B in (cm)
13 x 9 (33 x 23)
13 x 13 (33 x 33)
17 x 13 (43 x 33)
17 x 17 (43 x 43)
21 x 17 (53 x 43)
21 x 21 (53 x 53)
27 x 21 (69 x 53)
33 x 21 (83 x 53)
13 x 9 (33 x 23)
17 x 13 (43 x 33)
17 x 17 (43 x 43)
21 x 17 (53 x 43)
21 x 21 (53 x 53)
27 x 21 (69 x 53)
33 x 21 (83 x 53)
33 x 27 (83 x 69)
Call Kele for sizes other
than those listed.
* Add a P after enclosure number to include a solid steel subpanel. Perf panels are
not av ailable for this product.
** Order panels separately.
ENCLOSURE* SOLID STEEL SUBPANEL**
)NEW!
ENCLOSURES
256NEW!
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014

293. Data pocke t
Two clamps 30" (76.20) or larger
A - 1.81
(4.60)
B - 1.84
(4.67)
3.00
(7.6)
in
(cm)
Door
clamp
Padlocking
hasp and
staple
A
C
C
B
Mounting
holes
DESCRIPTION
Hoffman A-SSPL Series NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosures
house electrical and pneumatic controls, instruments, and
components. These enclosures provide protection from
corrosion, windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water
.
FEATURES
• 14 gaug •
Continuously welded or ground-smooth seam, no
holes or knockouts
• Seamless, watertight foam gasket for tight seal
• Hasp and staple for padlocking
• Removable door
• Data pocket included
• Collar studs provided for mounting optional subpanels
• Steel or stainless steel subpanels available
• Fans, heaters, louvers, and windows available
• UL listed, File #E61997
• CSA certified, File #LR42186
• One-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
HOFFMAN NEMA 4X STAINLESS STEEL ENCLOSURES AND PANELS
A-SSLP SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
A-16H1206SSLP†
A-16H1606SSLP†
A-20H1606SSLP†
A-20H2006SSLP†
A-24H2008SSLP†
A-24H2408SSLP†
A-30H2408SSLP†
A-30H3008SSLP†
A-36H2408SSLP†
A-36H3008SSLP†
DIMENSIONS
A x B x C in (cm)
16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15)
16 x 16 x 6 (41 x 41 x 15)
20 x 16 x 6 (51 x 41 x 15)
20 x 20 x 6 (51 x 51 x 15)
24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 51 x 20)
24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 20)
30 x 24 x 8 (76 x 61 x 20)
30 x 30 x 8 (76 x 76 x 20)
36 x 24 x 8 (91 x 61 x 20)
36 x 30 x 8 (91 x 76 x 20)
BODY
GAUGE
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
22.0 (10.0)
25.0 (11.3)
32.0 (14.5)
33.4 (15.2)
45.2 (20.5)
51.4 (23.3)
62.0 (28.1)
72.0 (32.7)
65.0 (29.5)
88.0 (39.9)
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
3.7 (1.7)
5.3 (2.4)
7.0 (3.2)
10.0 (4.5)
11.3 (5.1)
13.9 (6.3)
18.0 (8.2)
24.0 (10.9)
22.0 (10.0)
27.0 (12.2)
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
3.6 (1.6)
5.3 (2.4)
7.0 (3.2)
10.0 (4.5)
11.0 (5.0)
13.0 (5.9)
18.0 (8.2)
22.0 (10.0)
23.0 (10.4)
27.0 (12.2)
MODEL
A-16P12SS6
A-16P16SS6
A-20P16SS6
A-20P20SS6
A-24P20SS6
A-24P24SS6
A-30P24SS6
A-30P30SS6
A-36P24SS6
A-36P30SS6
DIMENSIONS
A x B in (cm)
13 x 9 (33 x 23)
13 x 13 (33 x 33)
17 x 13 (43 x 33)
17 x 17 (43 x 43)
21 x 17 (53 x 43)
21 x 21 (53 x 53)
27 x 21 (69 x 53)
27 x 27 (69 x 69)
33 x 21 (83 x 53)
33 x 27 (83 x 69)
MODEL
A-16P12
A-16P16
A-20P16
A-20P20
A-24P20
A-24P24
A-30P24
A-30P30
A-36P24
A-36P30
DIMENSIONS
A x B in (cm)
13 x 9 (33 x 23)
13 x 13 (33 x 33)
17 x 13 (43 x 33)
17 x 17 (43 x 43)
21 x 17 (53 x 43)
21 x 21 (53 x 53)
27 x 21 (69 x 53)
27 x 27 (69 x 69)
33 x 21 (83 x 53)
33 x 27 (83 x 69)
* Add an S after enclosure number to include a stainless steel subpanel; add a P after enclosure number to include a
solid steel subpanel.
** Order panels separately.
† Add PF to end of part number to order optional perf panel.
Call Kele for sizes other
than those listed.
SOLID STAINLESS STEEL
SUBPANEL**
ENCLOSURE* SOLID STEELNEW!
257ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014

294. SAGINAW NEMA 4 ENCLOSURES AND PANELS
H-LP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Saginaw H-LP Series NEMA 4 enclosures are designed
to house electrical and pneumatic controls, instruments,
and components
. These enclosures provide protection from
windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water
.
FEATURES
• Contin
holes or knockouts
• Seamless, watertight foam gasket for tight seal
• Hasp and staple for padlocking
• Collar studs provided for mounting optional subpanels
• Steel subpanels available
• UL listed File #E69392
• CSA certified
• One-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
A-1.81
(4.60)
B-1.84
(4.67)
Door
clamp
Mounting
holes
in
(cm)
Padlocking
hasp and
staple
A
C
B
ORDERING INFORMATION
ENCLOSURES
258
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
MODEL
SCE16H1206LP
SCE16H1208LP
SCE16H1606LP
SCE20H1606LP
SCE20H1608LP
SCE20H2006LP
SCE20H2008LP
SCE24H2006LP
SCE24H2008LP
SCE24H2406LP
SCE24H2408LP
SCE30H2406LP
SCE30H2408LP
SCE30H3008LP
SCE36H2406LP
SCE36H2408LP
SCE36H3008LP
DIMENSIONS
A x B x C in (cm)
16 x 12 x 6 (40.7 x 30.5 x 15.2)
16 x 12 x 8 (40.7 x 30.5 x 20.3)
16 x 16 x 6 (40.6 x 40.6 x 15.2)
20 x 16 x 6 (50.8 x 40.6 x 15.2)
20 x 16 x 8 (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3)
20 x 20 x 6 (50.8 x 50.8 x 15.2)
20 x 20 x 8 (50.8 x 50.8 x 20.3)
24 x 20 x 6 (61 x 50.8 x 15.2)
24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 50.8 x 20.3)
24 x 24 x 6 (61 x 61 x 15.2)
24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 20.3)
30 x 24 x 6 (76.2 x 61 x 15.2)
30 x 24 x 8 (76.2 x 61 x 20.3)
30 x 30 x 8 (76.2 x 76.2 x 20.3)
36 x 24 x 6 (91.4 x 61 x 15.2)
36 x 24 x 8 (91.4 x 61 x 20.3)
36 x 30 x 8 (91.4 x 76.2 x 20.3)
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
21 (9.5)
22 (10)
27 (12.3)
30 (13.6)
31 (14.1)
34 (15.5)
33 (15)
39 (17.7)
43 (19.5)
43 (19.5)
50 (22.7)
56 (25.5)
61 (27.7)
74 (33.6)
63 (28.6)
65 (29.5)
84 (38.2)
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
4 (1.8)
4 (1.8)
6 (2.7)
8 (3.6)
8 (3.6)
10 (4.5)
10 (4.5)
14 (6.4)
14 (6.4)
17 (7.7)
17 (7.7)
22 (10)
22 (10)
28 (12.7)
27 (12.3)
27 (12.3)
34 (15.5)
MODEL
SCE16P12
SCE16P12
SCE16P16
SCE20P16
SCE20P16
SCE20P20
SCE20P20
SCE24P20
SCE24P20
SCE24P24
SCE24P24
SCE30P24
SCE30P24
SCE30P30
SCE36P24
SCE36P24
SCE36P30
DIMENSIONS
A x B in (cm)
13 x 9 (33 x 22.9)
13 x 9 (33 x 22.9)
13 x 13 (33 x 33)
17 x 13 (43.2 x 33)
17 x 13 (43.2 x 33)
17 x 17 (43.2 x 43.2)
17 x 17 (43.2 x 43.2)
21 x 17 (53.3 x 43.2)
21 x 17 (53.3 x 43.2)
21 x 21 (53.3 x 53.3)
21 x 21 (53.3 x 53.3)
27 x 21 (68.6 x 53.3)
27 x 21 (68.6 x 53.3)
27 x 27 (68.6 x 68.6)
33 x 21 (83.8 x 53.3)
33 x 21 (83.8 x 53.3.)
33 x 27 (83.8 x 65.6)
ENCLOSURE SOLID STEEL PANEL
)
March 2014

295. DESCRIPTION
Saginaw H-SSLP Series NEMA 4X stainless steel
enclosures house electrical and pneumatic controls,
instruments, and components
. These enclosures provide
protection from corrosion, windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water
.
FEATURES
• 14 gaug •
Continuously welded or ground-smooth seam, no
holes or knockouts
• Seamless, watertight foam gasket for tight seal
• Hasp and staple for padlocking
• Data pocket included
• Collar studs provided for mounting optional subpanels
• Steel subpanels available
• UL listed, File #E69392
• CSA certified
• One-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
SAGINAW NEMA 4X STAINLESS STEEL ENCLOSURES AND PANELS
H-SSLP SERIES
H-SSLP Series
ORDERING INFORMATION
Data pocke t
in
(cm)
Door
clamp
Padlocking
hasp and
staple
A
C
B
Mounting
holes
MODEL
SCE16H1206SSLP
SCE16H1606SSLP
SCE20H1606SSLP
SCE20H2006SSLP
SCE24H1608SSLP
SCE24H2006SSLP
SCE24H2008SSLP
SCE24H2408SSLP
SCE30H2408SSLP
SCE30H3008SSLP
SCE36H2408SSLP
SCE36H3008SSLP
DIMENSIONS
A x B x C in (cm)
16 x 12 x 6 (40.7 x 30.5 x 15.2)
16 x 16 x 6 (40.6 x 40.6 x 15.2)
20 x 16 x 6 (50.8 x 40.6 x 15.2)
20 x 20 x 6 (50.8 x 50.8 x 15.2)
24 x 16 x 8 (61 x 40.6 x 20.3)
24 x 20 x 6 (61 x 50.8 x 15.2)
24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 50.8 x 20.3)
24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 20.3)
30 x 24 x 8 (76.2 x 61 x 20.3)
30 x 30 x 8 (76.2 x 76.2 x 20.3)
36 x 24 x 8 (91.4 x 61 x 20.3)
36 x 30 x 8 (91.4 x 76.2 x 20.3)
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
23 (10.5)
26 (11.8)
30 (13.6)
35 (15.9)
39 (17.7)
40 (18.2)
44 (20)
50 (22.7)
60 (27.3)
74 (33.6)
66 (30)
87 (39.5)
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
4 (1.8)
6 (2.7)
8 (3.6)
10 (4.5)
11 (5)
14 (6.4)
14 (6.4)
17 (7.7)
22 (10)
28 (12.7)
27 (12.3)
34 (15.5)

MODEL
SCE16P12 SCE16P16 SCE20P16 SCE20P20 SCE24P16 SCE24P20 SCE24P20 SCE24P24 SCE30P24 SCE30P30 SCE36P24 SCE36P30
DIMENSIONS
A x B in (cm)
13 x 9 (33 x 22.9)
13 x 13 (33 x 33)
17 x 13 (43.2 x 33)
17 x 17 (43.2 x 43.2)
21 x 13 (53.3 x 33)
21 x 17 (53.3 x 43.2) 21 x 17 (53.3 x 43.2) 21 x 21 (53.3 x 53.3) 27 x 21 (68.6 x 53.3) 27 x 27 (68.6 x 68.6) 33 x 21 (83.8 x 53.3) 33 x 27 (83.8 x 65.6)
ENCLOSURE SOLID STEEL PANEL
)
259ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014

296. POLYPRO™ TYPE 4X NON-METALLIC ENCLOSURES
POLYPRO™ SERIES
DESCRIPTION
POLYPRO™ polyester enclosures perform exceptionally well in applications where
harsh chemicals, weather extremes and corrosive environments demand toughness
from a lightweight enclosure
. Providing excellent ultraviolet protection and a tight
environmental seal, these versatile, feature-rich enclosures are also recyclable.
FEATURES
• Pr
solvents, alkalis and acids
• Resists cracking and provides excellent impact resistance
• Lighter-weight than fiberglass
• Easy, dustless in-field modifications using standard tools
• Overlapping tongue-and-groove raised cover and gasket provide a
secure Type 4X seal
• Removable snap-hinge cover allows for easy access to cover and
body for modifications
• Molded layout grid on inside of body and solid covers assists with
component mounting
• Molded-in embosses for rear panel mounting
• Optional cover screws included with all models
• Internal rail system and adjustable panel blocks allow for panel
height adjustment and installation of multiple panels
• Scratch-resistant polycarbonate windows
• Standard models include body and cover,two mounting feet,
two latch assemblies with optional cover screws and hardware (adjustable panel blocks and panels sold separately)
•
Non-glass-filled polyester material offers superior UV resistance; eliminates fiberbloom associated with fiberglass
A1816PSWPNL
Model D x E (in.) D x E (mm)
A64PSWPNL
A66PSWPNL
A86PSWPNL
A88PSWPNL
A108PSWPNL
A1010PSWPNL
A1210PSWPNL
A1412PSWPNL
A1614PSWPNL
5.00 x 3.62 127 x 92
5.00 x 5.62 127 x 143
7.00 x 5.62 178 x 143
7.00 x 7.62 178 x 194
9.00 x 7.62 229 x 194
9.00 x 9.62 229 x 244
11.00 x 9.62 279 x 244
13.00 x 11.62 330 x 295
15.00 x 13.62 381 x 346
17.00 x 15.62 432 x 397
J
X
LAM
W
Optional
Window
Section X-X
Section Y- Y
B
N
1.37
35 mm
.28
7 mm
.64
16 mm
.75
19 mm
.75
19 mm
ø.25
6 mm
(Slot 6X)
x .38
10 mm
.13 A
3 mm
≤12
305 mm
.15 A
4 mm
≥12
305 mm
YY
C
H
D
E
G
F
87825133
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
(Aluminum Swing-Out Panels)
Aluminum
Swing-Out Panels
ENCLOSURES
260
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014

297. ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
DIMENSIONS
AxBxC in./mm
F
in./mm
G
in./mm
H
in./mm
J
in./mm
L
in./mm
M
in./mm
N
in./mm
W
in./mm
A644PHC 6.12 x 4.12 x 4.38/155 x 105 x 111 4.32/110 7.38/187 2.56/65 3.91/99 8.15/207 —— 5.23/133
A644PHCW 6.12 x 4.12 x 4.38/155 x 105 x 111 4.32/110 7.38/187 2.56/65 3.91/99 8.15/207 4.25/108 2.25/57 5.23/133
A664PHC 6.12 x 6.12 x 4.38/155 x 155 x 111 4.32/110 7.38/187 4.56/116 3.91/99 8.15/207 —— 7.23/184
A664PHCW 6.12 x 6.12 x 4.38/155 x 155 x 111 4.32/110 7.38/187 4.56/116 3.91/99 8.15/207 4.25/108 4.25/108 7.23/184
A864PHC 8.12 x 6.12 x 4.38/206 x 155 x 111 4.32/110 9.38/238 4.56/116 3.91/99 10.15/258 —— 7.23/184
A864PHCW 8.12 x 6.12 x 4.38/206 x 155 x 111 4.32/110 9.38/238 4.56/116 3.91/99 10.15/258 6.25/159 4.25/108 7.23/184
A884PHC 8.12 x 8.12 x 4.38/206 x 206 x 111 4.32/110 9.38/238 6.56/167 3.91/99 10.15/258 —— 9.23/234
A884PHCW 8.12 x 8.12 x 4.38/206 x 206 x 111 4.32/110 9.38/238 6.56/167 3.91/99 10.15/258 6.25/159 6.25/159 9.23/234
A1084PHC 10.12 x 8.12 x 4.38/257 x 155 x 111 4.32/110 11.38/289 6.56/167 3.91/99 12.15/309 —— 9.23/234
A1084PHCW 10.12 x 8.12 x 4.38/257 x 155 x 111 4.32/110 11.38/289 6.56/167 3.91/99 12.15/309 8.25/210 6.25/159 9.23/234
A10106PHC 10.04 x 10.04 x 6.38/255 x 255 x 162 6.32/161 11.31/287 8.56/217 5.91/150 12.08/307—— 11.23/285
A10106PHCW 10.04 x 10.04 x 6.38/255 x 255 x 162 6.32/161 11.31/287 8.56/217 5.91/150 12.08/307 8.25/210 8.25/210 11.23/285
A12106PHC 12.08 x 10.09 x 6.38/307 x 256 x 162 6.32/161 13.34/339 8.56/217 5.91/150 14.08/358—— 11.23/285
A12106PHCW 12.08 x 10.09 x 6.38/307 x 256 x 162 6.32/161 13.34/339 8.56/217 5.91/150 14.08/358 10.25/260 8.25/210 11.23/285
A14128PHC 14.02 x 12.01 x 8.35/356 x 305 x 212 8.27/210 15.27/388 10.56/268 7.91/201 16.04/407—— 13.32/338
A14128PHCW 14.02 x 12.01 x 8.35/356 x 305 x 212 8.27/210 15.27/388 10.56/2687.91/201 16.04/407 12.25/311 10.25/260 13.32/338
A16148PHC 16.02 x 14.01 x 8.35/407 x 356 x 212 8.27/210 17.27/439 12.56/319 7.91/201 18.04/458—— 15.32/389
A16148PHCW 16.02 x 14.01 x 8.35/407 x 356 x 212 8.27/210 17.27/439 12.56/319 7.91/201 18.04/458 14.25/362 12.25/311 15.32/389
A181610PHC 17.95 x 15.94 x 10.35/456 x 405 x 263 10.27/261 19.20/488 14.56/370 9.91/252 19.97/507—— 17.32/440
A181610PHCW 17.95 x 15.94 x 10.35/456 x 405 x 263
Cover
Type
Steel
Panel
Aluminum
Panel
Panel Size
D x E in./mm
Solid A6P4 A6P4AL 4.88 x 2.88/124 x 73
Window A6P4 A6P4AL 4.88 x 2.88/124 x 73
Solid A6P6 A6P6AL 4.88 x 4.88/124 x 124
Window A6P6 A6P6AL 4.88 x 4.88/124 x 124
Solid A8P6 A8P6AL 6.75 x 4.88/171 x 124
Window A8P6 A8P6AL 6.75 x 4.88/171 x 124
Solid A8P8 A8P8AL 6.75 x 6.88/171 x 175
Window A8P8 A8P8AL 6.75 x 6.88/171 x 175
Solid A10P8 A10P8AL 8.75 x 6.88/222 x 175
Window A10P8 A10P8AL 8.75 x 6.88/222 x 175
Solid A10P10 A10P10AL 8.75 x 8.88/222 x 226
Window A10P10 A10P10AL 8.75 x 8.88/222 x 226
Solid A12P10 A12P10AL 10.75 x 8.88/273 x 226
Window A12P10 A12P10AL 10.75 x 8.88/273 x 226
Solid A14P12 A14P12AL 12.75 x 10.88/324 x 276
Window A14P12 A14P12AL 12.75 x 10.88/324 x 276
Solid A16P14 A16P14AL 14.75 x 12.88/375 x 327
Window A16P14 A16P14AL 14.75 x 12.88/375 x 327
Solid A18P16 A18P16AL 16.75 x 14.88/425 x 378
Window A18P16 A18P16AL 16.75 x 14.88/425 x 37810.27/261 19.20/488 14.56/370 9.91/252 19.97/507 16.25/413 14.25/362 17.32/440
Purchase panels separately. Panels are available in aluminum, mild steel, stainless steel, conductive and composite materials.
POLYPRO™ TYPE 4X NON-METALLIC ENCLOSURES
POLYPRO™ SERIES
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES
APNLBLK Adjustable panel block kit, 4/pkg
APOLYFT4 Polyester mounting bracket kit, 4in, 2/pkg
APOLYFT6 Polyester mounting bracket kit, 6in, 2/pkg
APOLYFT8 Polyester mounting bracket kit, 8in, 2/pkg
APOLYFT10 Polyester mounting bracket kit, 10in, 2/pkg
APOLYFT12 Polyester mounting bracket kit, 12in, 2/pkg
APOLYFT14 Polyester mounting bracket kit, 14in, 2/pkg
APOLYFT16 Polyester mounting bracket kit, 16in, 2/pkg
AQRLSS6 Padlockable stainless steel latches, 2/pkg
AHGCLP Polypro hinge retainers, 10/pkg
ADJUSTABLE PANEL
BLOCK KIT
POLYESTER MOUNTING
BRACKET KITS
STAINLESS STEEL
LATCHES (PADLOCKABLE)
HINGE RETAINERS
261ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014

298. NEMA 4X FIBERGLASS ENCLOSURES
RJ, N SERIES
B
J D
C
B
NP
W
Four mounting
holes
F
O
C
A E
E
F
W
M A
J
D
H
H
RJ Series
in
(cm)
N Series
DESCRIPTION
RJ and N Series NEMA 4X Enclosures are constructed
from compression-molded fiberglass-reinforced polyester.
These enclosures off
er excellent impact resistance, thermal
insulation, and corrosion resistance
. Smooth-surfaced,
lightweight, nonconductive, and flame-retardant, they can be easily drilled
. The gray color is molded in. The RJ Series has
captive stainless cover screws with fiberglass encapsulated heads
. The N Series has stainless steel latches. Both types
use a stainless steel piano hinge. All are UL listed, File
#E64358.
DIMENSIONS
RJ
ORDERING INFORMATION
ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS in (cm) COVER DIMENSIONS ALUMINUM PANEL* (OPTIONAL)
RJ Series
N Series
MODEL
INSIDE
A x B x C
MOUNTING
E x F
OVERALL
H x W x D
SURFACE AREA
O x P in (cm)
NO. OF
SCREWS
MODEL
DIMENSIONS in (cm)
J
RJ806HW†
RJ1008HW†
RJ1210HW†
RJ1412HW†
RJ1614HW†
RJ1816HW†
7.73 x 5.74 x 5.95 (20 x 14.5 x 15)
9.73 x 7.73 x 6.33 (25 x 20 x 16)
11.79 x 9.8 x 6.32 (30 x 25 x 16)
13.50 x 11.52 x 7.45 (34 x 29 x 19)
15.60 x 13.56 x 7.45 (40 x 35 x 19)
17.69 x 15.69 x 10.31 (45 x 40 x 26)
8.88 x 4 (23 x 10)
10.75 x 6 (27 x 15)
12.75 x 8 (32 x 20)
14.63 x 10 (37 x 25)
16.75 x 12 (43 x 30)
18.88 x 12 (48 x 30)
9.63 x 7.52 x 6.20 (24 x 19 x 16)
11.63 x 9.37 x 6.58 (30 x 24 x 17)
13.56 x 11.43 x 6.58 (34 x 29 x 17)
15.5 x 13.38 x 7.69 (39 x 34 x 20)
17.53 x 15.43 x 7.68 (45 x 39 x 20)
19.63 x 17.48 x 10.63 (50 x 44 x 27)
7.25 x 5.28 (18 x 13)
9.3 x 7.38 (24 x 18)
11.2 x 9.23 (28 x 23)
13.2 x 11.16 (34 x 28)
15.2 x 13.24 (39 x 34)
17.25 x 15.25 (44 x 39)
2
2
2
2
2
2
BP86AL
BP108AL
BP1210AL
BP1412AL
BP1614AL
BP1816AL
6.88 x 4.88 (17 x 12)
8.88 x 6.88 (23 x 17)
10.88 x 8.88 (28 x 23)
12.88 x 10.88 (33 x 28)
14.88 x 12.88 (38 x 33)
16.88 x 14.88 (43 x 38)
5.49
5.91
5.87
6.87
6.87
9.86
ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS in (cm) COVER DIMENSIONS STEEL PANEL* (OPTIONAL)
MODEL
INSIDE
A x B x C
MOUNTING
E x F
OVERALL
H x W x D
ENCLOSURE OPENING
M x N in (cm)
NO. OF
LATCHES
MODEL
H x W
H x W
DIMENSIONS in (cm)
J
N20166HWT† N20168HWT† N201610HWT† N242410HWT† N30208HWT† N302410HWT† N36308HWT† N363010HWT†
19.7 x 16.04 x 7.24 (50 x 41 x 18) 19.7 x 16.04 x 9.24 (50 x 41 x 24) 19.7 x 16.04 x 11.24 (50 x 41 x 29) 24.05 x 24.39 x 11.25 (61 x 62 x 29) 29.9 x 20.14 x 9.23 (76 x 51 x 24) 30.46 x 25.47 x 11.27 (77 x 65 x 29) 36.31 x 31.69 x 9.36 (92 x 80 x 24) 36.31 x 31.69 x 11.36 (92 x 80 x 29)
21.5 x 10.12 (56 x 26) 21.5 x 10.12 (56 x 26) 21.5 x 10.12 (56 x 26) 25.75 x 17.87 (65 x 45) 31.75 x 14.25 (81 x 36) 32.25 x 18.5 (82 x 47) 38.13 x 23.88 (97 x 61) 38.13 x 23.88 (97 x 61)
22.75 x 16.87 x 7.77 (58 x 43 x 20) 22.75 x 16.87 x 10.27 (58 x 43 x 26) 22.75 x 16.87 x 12.27 (58 x 43 x 31) 27.0 x 25.24 x 11.9 (69 x 64 x 30) 32.86 x 20.99 x 9.89 (83 x 53 x 25) 33.41 x 26.32 x 11.95 (85 x 67 x 30) 39.31 x 32.5 x 10.05 (100 x 83 x 25) 39.31 x 32.5 x 12.05 (100 x 83 x 34)
16.75 x 12.19 (43 x 31) 16.75 x 12.19 (43 x 31) 16.75 x 12.19 (43 x 31) 21.25 x 20.0 (54 x 51) 27.0 x 16.5 (69 x 42) 27.38 x 21.25 (70 x 54) 33.25 x 27.25 (84 x 69) 33.25 x 27.25 (84 x 69)
2 2 2 4 5 5 5 5
BP2016CS BP2016CS BP2016CS BP2424CS BP3020CS BP3024CS BP3630CS BP3630CS
17 x 13 (43 x 3) 17 x 13 (43 x 3) 17 x 13 (43 x 3) 21 x 21 (53 x 53) 27 x 17 (69 x 43) 27 x 21 (69 x 53) 33 x 27 (84 x 69) 33 x 27 (84 x 69)
6.26 8.26
10.26 10.25
8.23
10.27
8.36
10.36
* Order optional panels separately
† Add P to the end of part number to order optional perf panel.
N
ENCLOSURES
262
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014

299. MISCELLANEOUS ENCLOSURES
14121-000
DESCRIPTION
Model 14121-000 enclosures are constructed of impact-
resistant polycarbonate and feature a transparent, gasketed
cover that keeps out dust and water
.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
14121-000 Polycarbonate enclosure with transparent cover,
0.53 lb (0.24 kg)
DIMENSIONS
B
AC
DESCRIPTION
The versatile PS Series non-metallic boxes are constructed only of flame-resistant materials
. Rated for protection mode
IP66 (similar to Nema 4X), these boxes give complete protection from dust, water jets, and even temporary flooding
.
Standard bo
xes from Kele have knockout side walls, gray
bases, and gray covers
. Optional fitting plates are available
for easy mounting of control components inside the PS Series
.
DIMENSIONS
NON-METALLIC BOXES
PS SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
PS1313-7
ORDERING INFORMATION
BOX MODEL*
PS1111-7
PS1111-9
PS1313-7
PS1811-9
PS1818-9
PS2518-9
FITTING PLATE MODEL
TK1111
TK1111
TK1313
TK1811
TK1818
TK2518
DIMENSIONS A x B x C in (cm)
4 .33 x 4 .33 x 2 .60 (11 .0 x 11 .0 x 6 .6)
4 .33 x 4 .33 x 3 .54 (11 .0 x 11 .0 x 9 .0)
5 .11 x 5 .11 x 2 .95 (13 .0 x 13 .0 x 7 .5)
7 .09 x 4 .33 x 3 .54 (18 .0 x 11 .0 x 9 .0)
7 .09 x 7 .09 x 3 .54 (18 .0 x 18 .0 x 9 .0)
10 .0 x 7 .09 x 3 .54 (25 .4 x 18 .0 x 9 .0)
DIMENSIONS H x W in (cm)
3 .54 x 3 .54 (9 .0 x 9 .0)
3 .54 x 3 .54 (9 .0 x 9 .0)
4 .33 x 4 .33 (11 .0 x 11 .0)
5 .91 x 3 .54 (15 .0 x 9 .0)
5 .91 x 5 .91 (15 .0 x 15 .0)
8 .66 x 5 .91 (22 .0 x 15 .0)
* Add T to the end of model number for smoke-tinted transparent cover .
Fitting plates are plastic laminate 0 .10" (0 .25 cm) thick with screws furnished .
Call Kele for other box sizes and options .
PS1313-7-T
Materials Of Construction
Base/cover: Polystyrene, impact-resistant,
non-flammable
Seal: Polyurethane
Color Light gray or smoke tinted
(T option cover only)
Flammability Rating UL94 V2, 1760°F (960°C)
Temperature Rating -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C)
Knockouts 1/2" NPT (2.3 cm), 3/4" NPT
(2.9 cm)
263ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014

300. NON-METALLIC ENCLOSURES
H AND G SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Premium H and G Series enclosures have hinged covers
that close with stainless steel latches and are designed for
use in any electrical application requiring a sturdy enclosure
.
FEATURES
• NEMA 4X
• Polycarbonite construction
• Stainless steel latches
• Light gray gloss finish
• Gasketed opaque & lockable cover
• Unique Integra Panel Suspension System
• Multiple bosses for easy installation of devices or DIN
rails
• UL-50 / c-UL listed, File #E207562
DIMENSIONS/ORDERING INFORMATION
† Add P to the end of the H Series part number to order optional perf panel.
Enclosure
Model Dimensions in (cm)
Aluminum
Panel
Weight A B D C E F G H I J
H6064HLL 2.0 (0.91) 8.07 (20.5) 7.13 (18.11) 3.63 (9.22) 7.36 (18.68) 6.47 (16.43) 5.47 (13.89) 4.75 (12.07) 4.25 (10.80) 4.25 (10.80) 4.25 (10.80)ABP66
H6064HCLL 2.0 (0.91) 8.07 (20.5) 7.13 (18.11) 3.63 (9.22) 7.36 (18.69) 6.47 (16.43) 5.47 (13.89) 4.75 (12.07) 4.25 (10.80) 4.25 (10.80) 4.25 (10.80)ABP66
H8064HLL 2.5 (1.2) 9.75 (24.77) 8.75 (22.23) 4.00 (10.16) 7.36 (18.69) 8.44 (21.44) 5.35 (13.59) 4.75 (12.07) 4.25 (10.80) 4.25 (10.80) 6.25 (15.88)ABP86
H8064HCLL 2.5 (1.2) 9.75 (24.77) 8.75 (22.23) 4.00 (10.16) 7.36 (18.69) 8.44 (21.44) 5.35 (13.59) 4.75 (12.07) 4.25 (10.80) 4.25 (10.80) 6.25 (15.88)ABP86
H8084HLL 3.0 (1.4) 10.44 (26.52) 9.50 (24.13) 5.25 (13.34) 9.31 (23.65) 8.44 (21.44) 5.47 (13.89) 4.75 (12.07) 4.25 (10.80) 6.25 (15.88) 6.25 (15.88)ABP88
H8084HCLL 3.0 (1.4) 10.44 (26.52) 9.50 (24.13) 5.25 (13.34) 9.31 (23.65) 8.44 (21.44) 5.47 (13.89) 4.75 (12.07) 4.25 (10.80) 6.25 (15.88) 6.25 (15.88)ABP88
H10082HLL 3.0 (1.4) 11.06 (28.09) 10.12 (25.70) 9.54 (24.23) 8.54 (21.69) 9.54 (24.23) 3.51 (8.92) 3.21 (8.15) 3.21 (8.15) 6.25 (15.88) 6.25 (15.88)ABP108
H10082HCLL 3.0 (1.4) 11.06 (28.09) 10.12 (25.70) 9.54 (24.23) 8.54 (21.69) 9.54 (24.23) 3.51 (8.92) 3.21 (8.15) 3.21 (8.15) 6.25 (15.88) 6.25 (15.88)ABP108
H10084HLL 3.0 (1.4) 12.07 (33.66) 11.13 (28.27) 5.63 (14.30) 9.36 (23.77) 10.54 (26.77) 5.47 (13.89) 4.75 (12.07) 4.25 (10.80) 6.25 (15.88) 8.25 (20.96)ABP108
H10084HCLL 3.5 (1.6) 12.07 (33.66) 11.13 (28.27) 5.63 (14.30) 9.36 (23.77) 10.54 (26.77) 5.47 (13.89) 4.75 (12.07) 4.25 (10.80) 6.25 (15.88) 8.25 (20.96)ABP108
H10086HLL 3.5 (1.6) 12.07 (30.66) 11.13 (28.27) 5.63 (14.30) 9.36 (23.77) 10.54 (26.77) 7.47 (1897) 6.75 (17.15) 6.25 (15.88) 6.25 (15.88) 8.25 (20.96)ABP108
H10086HCLL 4.0 (1.8) 12.07 (30.66) 11.13 (28.27) 5.63 (14.30) 9.36 (23.77) 10.54 (26.77) 7.47 (1897) 6.75 (17.15) 6.25 (15.88) 6.25 (15.88) 8.25 (20.96)ABP108
H12104HLL 4.0 (1.8) 13.69 (34.77) 12.75 (32.39) 8.00 (20.32) 11.36 (28.85) 12.54 (31.85) 5.35 (13.59) 4.71 (11.96) 4.23 (10.74) 8.25 (20.96) 10.25 (26.04)ABP1210
H12104HCLL 4.0 (1.8) 13.69 (34.77) 12.75 (32.39) 8.00 (20.32) 11.36 (28.85) 12.54 (31.85) 5.35 (13.59) 4.71 (11.96) 4.23 (10.74) 8.25 (20.96) 10.25 (26.04)ABP1210
H12106HLL 4.5 (2.0) 14.07 (35.74) 13.13 (33.35) 7.63 (19.38) 11.36 (28.85) 12.54 (31.85) 7.35 (18.67) 6.71 (17.04) 6.23 (15.82) 8.25 (20.96) 10.25 (26.04)ABP1210
H12106HCLL 4.5 (2.0) 14.07 (35.74) 13.13 (35.35) 7.63 (19.38) 11.36 (28.85) 12.54 (31.85) 7.35 (18.67) 6.71 (17.04) 6.23 (15.82) 8.25 (20.96) 10.25 (26.04)ABP1210
H141206HLL 6.0 (2.7) 15.69 (39.85) 14.75 (37.47) 10.00 (25.40) 13.36 (33.93) 14.58 (37.03) 7.38 (18.75) 6.66 (19.62) 6.18 (15.70) 10.25 (26.04) 12.25 (31.12)ABP1412
H141206HCLL 6.0 (2.7) 15.69 (39.85) 14.75 (37.47) 10.00 (25.40) 13.36 (33.93) 14.58 (37.03) 7.38 (18.75) 6.66 (19.62) 6.18 (15.70) 10.25 (26.04) 12.25 (36.20)ABP1412
H161407HLL 9.0 (4.1) 17.69 (44.93) 16.75 (42.55) 12.00 (30.48) 15.00 (38.40) 16.70 (42.42) 8.38 (21.29) 8.38 (21.29) 7.18 (18.24) 12.25 (31.12) 14.25 (36.20)ABP1614
H161407HCLL 9.0 (4.1) 17.69 (44.93) 16.75 (42.55) 12.00 (30.48) 15.00 (38.40) 16.70 (42.42) 8.38 (21.29) 8.38 (21.29) 7.18 (18.24) 12.25 (31.12) 14.25 (36.20)ABP1614
H181610HLL 14.0 (6.4) 19.69 (50.01) 18.75 (47.63) 14.00 (35.56) 17.64 (44.81) 18.91 (48.03) 11.50 (29.22) 11.50 (29.21) 10.16 (25.81) 14.25 (36.20) 16.25 (41.28)ABP1816
H181610HCLL 14.0 (6.4) 19.69 (50.01) 18.75 (47.63) 14.00 (35.56) 17.64 (44.81) 18.91 (48.03) 11.50 (29.22) 11.50 (29.21) 10.16 (25.81) 14.25 (36.20) 16.25 (41.28)ABP1816
G242410
31 (14.1)27.16 (689.8)25.94 (659)18 (457)27.81 (706.3)25.25 (641)11.50 (292)11.50 (292)10.61 (269.5)19.25 (489)19.25 (489)ABP-2424
ENCLOSURES
264
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014

301. ACCESSORIES
NON-METALLIC ENCLOSURES
H AND G SERIES
ACCESSORIES
BACK PANEL
ABP-88
KEY LOCK
CAT60
PRE-CUT
DIN RAIL
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ABP108 Aluminum panel for 10"x8" enclosure
ABP1082 Aluminum panel for 10"x8"x2"enclosure
ABP108USPUSOPK Aluminum swing panel Kit for 10"x8"
ABP1210 Aluminum panel for 12"x10" enclosure
ABP1210USPUSOPK Aluminum swing panel Kit for 12"x10"
ABP1412 Aluminum panel 14"x12" enclosure
ABP1412USPUSOPK Aluminum swing panel Kit for 14"x12"
ABP1614 Aluminum panel for 16"x14" enclosure
ABP1614USPUSOPK Aluminum swing panel Kit for 16"x14"
ABP1816 Aluminum panel for 18"x16" enclosure
ABP1816USPUSOPK Aluminum swing panel Kit for 18"x16"
ABP66 Aluminum panel for 6"x6" enclosure
ABP66USPUSOPK Aluminum swing panel Kit for 6"x6"
ABP86 Aluminum panel for 8"x6" enclosure
ABP86USPUSOPK Aluminum swing panel Kit for 8"x6"
ABP88 Aluminum panel for 8"x8"enclosure
ABP88USPUSOPK Aluminum swing panel Kit for 8"x8"
CA
T60
Keylock
CGL
TF11
PC hub cord grip w/ lock nut (0.217-0.394)
CGL
TF16
PC hub cord grip w/ lock nut (0.315-0.551)
CGL
TF21
PC hub cord grip w/ lock nut (0.472-0.709)
CGL
TF29
PC hub cord grip w/ lock nut (0.669-0.984)
CGL
TF7
PC hub cord grip w/ lock nut (0.177-0.256)
CGL
TF9
PC hub cord grip w/ lock nut (197-0.315)
CGNPT1 NPT cord grip w/ lock nut (0.669-0.984)
CGNPT1/2 NPT cord grip w/ lock nut (0.236-0.472)
CGNPT3/4 NPT cord grip w/ lock nut (0.433-0.709)
CGNPT3/8 NPT cord grip w/ lock nut (0.197-0.315)
DIN10 DIN Rail Kit for 10" wide enclosure
(2 rails, 2 screws) DIN12
DIN Rail Kit for 12" wide enclosure
(2 rails, 4 screws)
DIN14 DIN Rail Kit for 14" wide enclosure
(2 rails, 4 screws)
DIN16 DIN Rail Kit for 16" wide enclosure (2 rails, 4 screws)
DIN18
DIN Rail Kit for 18" wide enclosure (2 rails, 4 screws)
DIN6
DIN Rail Kit for 6"wide enclosure (2 rails, 4 screws)
DIN8
DIN Rail Kit for 8"wide enclosure (2 rails, 4 screws)
ICGL
TF13.5
PC hub cord grip w/ lock nut (0.236-0.472)
SP10I Screw Pack (10 pcs)
USPOKB Swing panel kit - Black
USPOKG Swing panel kit - Gray
ABP2424 Aluminum back panel/swing panel only for G242410 Models
ABP2424GSOPK
Aluminum 24" back panel/swing panel and 24" hinge for swing panel for G242410 Models
ASP2424
Aluminum side panel only for Genesis G242410 Models
GMMR10 Kit
Multi-Max Rails with screws - 10" depth (set of 4 with screws) for G242410 Models
GPP Kit
Panel Pad kit - (four panel brackets that mount on Mulit-max rail) for G242410 Models
GSOPK24
24" aluminum hinge for swing panel (use standard back panel as swing panel) for G242410 Models
FULL SWING PANEL KIT
ABP88USPUSOPK
CORD GRIPS
SWING PANEL BRACKETS
USOPKG
265ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014

302. HOFFMAN NEMA 12 ENCLOSURES AND PANELS
A-LP SERIES
B
F
0.62
(1.57)in
(cm)
0.62
(1.57)
3.38
(8.6)
3.38
(8.59)
Padlocking
hasp and
staple
Door clamp
A
C2.0
(5.08)
Mounting holes
0.44 (1.1) dia
Data
pocket
Door stiffener
B - 1.84
(4.67)
A - 1.81
(4.60)
1.25
(3.18)
1.25
(3.18)
0.44
(1.12)
DESCRIPTION
Hoffman A-LP Series NEMA 12 single-door, wall-mounted
enclosures house electrical and pneumatic controls,
instruments, and components
. These enclosures provide
protection from dust, dirt, oil, and water.
FEA
TURES
•
16 gauge steel bodies and 14 gauge doors on sizes up
through 24" x 24"; larger sizes all 14 gauge
• Seams continuously welded and ground smooth, no
holes or knockouts
• External mounting feet
• Quick and easy operation of door clamps
• Door removable by pulling heavy gauge continuous-
hinge pin
• Hasp and staple for padlocking
• Oil-resistant gasket attached with adhesive and steel
retaining strips
• Collar studs for mounting optional panels
• White inside with ANSI 61 gray outside finish over
phosphatized surfaces
• Optional steel panels with white finish
• UL listed File #E61997
• CSA certified, File #LR42186
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
ENCLOSURE
MODEL A x B x C
SOLID PANEL*
MODEL
DIMENSIONS
H x W in (cm)F
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
DIMENSIONS in (cm)
16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15)
16 x 16 x 6 (41 x 41 x 15)
20 x 16 x 6 (51 x 41 x 15)
20 x 20 x 6 (51 x 51 x 15)
24 x 20 x 6 (61 x 51 x 15)
24 x 24 x 6 (61 x 61 x 15)
30 x 24 x 6 (76 x 61 x 15)
36 x 24 x 6 (91 x 61 x 15)
36 x 30 x 6 (91 x 76 x 15)
16 x 12 x 8 (41 x 30 x 20)
20 x 16 x 8 (51 x 41 x 20)
24 x 16 x 8 (61 x 41 x 20)
24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 51 x 20)
24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 20)
30 x 24 x 8 (76 x 61 x 20)
36 x 24 x 8 (91 x 61 x 20)
36 x 30 x 8 (91 x 76 x 20)
42 x 24 x 8 (107 x 61 x 20)
42 x 36 x 8 (107 x 91 x 20)
48 x 36 x 8 (122 x 91 x 20)
60 x 36 x 8 (152 x 76 x 20)
13 x 9 (33 x 23)
13 x 13 (33 x 33)
17 x 13 (43 x 33)
17 x 17 (43 x 43)
21 x 17 (53 x 43)
21 x 21 (53 x 53)
27 x 21 (69 x 53)
33 x 21 (83 x 53)
33 x 27 (83 x 69)
13 x 9 (33 x 23)
17 x 13 (43 x 33)
21 x 13 (53 x 33)
21 x 17 (53 x 43)
21 x 21 (53 x 53)
27 x 21 (69 x 53)
33 x 21 (83 x 53)
33 x 27 (83 x 69)
39 x 21 (99 x 53)
39 x 33 (99 x 83)
45 x 33 (114 x 83)
57 x 33 (145 x 83)
1.25 (3.1)
3.0 (7.6)
3.0 (7.6)
3.0 (7.6)
3.0 (7.6)
3.0 (7.6)
3.0 (7.6)
3.0 (7.6)
3.0 (7.6)
1.25 (3.1)
3.0 (7.6)
3.0 (7.6)
3.0 (7.6)
3.0 (7.6)
3.0 (7.6)
3.0 (7.6)
3.0 (7.6)
3.0 (7.6)
3.0 (7.6)
3.0 (7.6)
3.0 (7.6)
3.6 (1.6)
5.3 (2.4)
7.0 (3.2)
10.0 (4.5)
11.0 (5.0)
13.0 (5.9)
18.0 (8.2)
23.0 (10.4)
27.0 (12.2)
3.6 (1.6)
7.0 (3.2)
8.7 (3.9)
11.0 (5.0)
13.0 (5.9)
18.0 (8.2)
23.0 (10.4)
27.0 (12.2)
25.0 (11.3)
39.0 (17.7)
46.0 (20.9)
58.0 (26.3)
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
17.3 (7.8)
21.2 (9.6)
25.1 (11.4)
29.1 (13.2)
34.1 (15.5)
39.0 (17.7)
52.0 (23.6)
62.0 (28.1)
75.0 (34.0)
19.3 (8.8)
27.3 (12.4)
31.3 (14.2)
37.0 (16.8)
42.0 (19.1)
57.0 (25.9)
68.0 (30.8)
82.0 (37.2)
103.0 (46.7)
113.0 (51.3)
122.0 (55.3)
148.0 (67.1)
* Order panels separately. Contact Kele for additional NEMA 12 sizes.
Please see the Accessories page for latch kits, lock kits, electric heaters, ventilation kits, and cooling fans.
† Add P to the end of part number to order optional perf panel.
A-161206LP† A-161606LP† A-201606LP†
A-202006LP†
A-242006LP†
A-242406LP†
A-302406LP†
A-362406LP†
A-363006LP†
A-161208LP†
A-201608LP†
A-241608LP†
A-242008LP†
A-242408LP†
A-302408LP†
A-362408LP†
A-363008LP†
A-422408LP†
A-423608LP†
A-483608LP†
A-603608LP†
A-16P12
A-16P16
A-20P16
A-20P20
A-24P20
A-24P24
A-30P24
A-36P24
A-36P30
A-16P12
A-20P16
A-24P16
A-24P20
A-24P24
A-30P24
A-36P24
A-36P30
A-42P24
A-42P36
A-48P36
A-60P36
March 2014
ENCLOSURES
266
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA

303. ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
GRAY
C-SD12126†+
C-SD16126†+
C-SD20166†+
C-SD20206†+
C-SD24206†+
C-SD24246†+
C-SD16128†+
C-SD20168†+
C-SD24208†+
C-SD24248†+
C-SD30248†+
C-SD36248†+
C-SD36308†+
C-SD363010†+
C-SD423610†+
C-SD483610†+
C-SD603610†+
MODEL
BEIGE
C-SD12126-BG†+
C-SD16126-BG†+
C-SD20166-BG†+
C-SD24206-BG†+
C-SD30248-BG†+
C-SD36308-BG†+
DIMENSIONS
A x B x C in (cm)
12 x 12 x 6 (30 x 30 x 15)
16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15)
20 x 16 x 6 (51 x 41 x 15)
20 x 20 x 6 (51 x 51 x 15)
24 x 20 x 6 (61 x 20 x 15)
24 x 24 x 6 (61 x 61 x 15)
16 x 12 x 8 (41 x 30 x 20)
20 x 16 x 8 (51 x 30 x 20)
24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 51 x 20)
24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 20)
30 x 24 x 8 (76 x 61 x 20)
36 x 24 x 8 (91 x 61 x 20)
36 x 30 x 8 (91 x 76 x 20)
36 x 30 x 10 (91 x 76 x 25)
42 x 36 x 10 (107 x 91 x 25)
48 x 36 x 10 (122 x 91 x 25)
60 x 36 x 10 (152 x 91 x 25)
BODY
GAUGE
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
14
14
14
14
14
GAUGE
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
12.5 (5.7)
15.6 (7.1)
21.5 (9.8)
26.0 (11.8)
29.4 (13.3)
36.9 (16.7)
17.5 (7.9)
23.6 (10.7)
33.9 (15.4)
40.0 (18.1)
48.0 (21.8)
57.0 (25.9)
77.0 (34.9)
82.0 (37.2)
107.0 (48.5)
124.0 (56.2)
148.0 (67.1)
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
2.3 (1.1)
3.5 (1.6)
8.0 (3.6)
10.0 (4.5)
12.8 (5.8)
15 (6.8)
3.4 (1.5)
7.9 (3.6)
13.0 (5.9)
13.0 (5.9)
19.0 (8.9)
24.0 (10.9)
31.5 (14.3)
30.4 (13.8)
43.0 (19.5)
49.5 (22.5)
64.0 (29)
MODEL
C-P1212
C-P1612
C-P2016
C-P2020
C-P2420
C-P2424
C-P1612
C-P2016
C-P2420
C-P2424
C-P3024
C-P3624
C-P3630
C-P3630
C-P4236
C-P4836
C-P6036
DIMENSIONS
A x B in (cm)
10.2 x 10.2 (26 x 26)
14.5 x 10.2 (37 x 26)
18.2 x 14.5 (46 x 37)
18.2 x 18.2 (46 x 46)
22.2 x 18.2 (56 x 46)
22.2 x 22.2 (56 x 56)
14.2 x 10.2 (36 x 26)
18.2 x 14.2 (46 x 36)
22.2 x 18.2 (56 x 46)
22.2 x 22.2 (56 x 56)
28.2 x 22.2 (72 x 56)
34.2 x 22.2 (87 x 56)
34.2 x 28.2 (87 x 72)
34.2 x 28.2 (87 x 72)
40.2 x 34.2 (102 x 87)
46.2 x 34.2 (117 x 87)
58.2 x 34.2 (148 x 87)
ENCLOSURE SOLID STEEL PANEL*
Call Kele for sizes other than those listed.
See the Accessories page for heaters and fans.
† Add PF to the end of part number to oder optional perf panel.
* Order panels separately.
+ Add P to the end of model number to include solid steel subpanel.
RELATED PRODUCTS
C-WHK Keylock handle for Concept Series
B - 1.64 (4.17)
Body opening
A - 1.70
(4.32)
Door clear
space
Collar
stud
A
B
C
1.72
(4.37)
0.80
(2.03)
6.23
(15.82)
in
(cm)
1.16
(2.95)
DESCRIPTION
Hoffman Concept Series enclosures are attractive, single-
door wall-mounted enclosures designed to safely house
electrical and pneumatic components
. Manufactured from
14 gauge or 16 gauge steel, depending on size, seams are continuously welded and ground smooth, so there are no holes and knock-outs
. These enclosures provide protection
from dust, dirt, oil, and water. Concept Series enclosures are
rated NEMA 4, 12, and 13.
FEATURES
• Minimum width body flange for maximum door opening
• Hidden hinges for clean aesthetic appearance
• Door removable by pulling captive hinge pins
• Seamless foam-in-place one-piece gasket for oil-tight
and dust-tight seal
• Furnished with all hardware for wall mounting and
seals for the mounting holes
• Panel-mounting studs for optional subpanels and
accessories
• Door bar on hinge side for wire management and
ground
• Provisions on door for thermoplastic data pocket
• UL listed, File #E61997
• CSA certified, File #LR42186
• Rated NEMA 4, 12, and 13
• ANSI61 gray polyester powder coating inside and out
with white panels
• Six enclosure sizes available in RAL 9001 beige
polyester powder coating
DIMENSIONS
HOFFMAN NEMA 4, 12, AND 13 ENCLOSURES & PANELS
C-SD CONCEPT SERIES
C-SD16126
C-SD16126-BG
March 2014
267ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA

304. A
B
C
1.1
(27.9)
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
Saginaw Enviroline Series enclosures are attractive,
single-door wall-mounted enclosures designed to safely
house electrical and pneumatic components
. Manufactured
from 14 gauge steel seams are continuously welded and ground smooth, so there are no holes and knock-outs
. These
enclosures provide protection from dust, dirt, oil, and water.
Sa
ginaw Enviroline Series enclosures are rated NEMA 4,
12, and 13
.
FEATURES
• Minim •
Hidden hinges for clean aesthetic appearance
• Door removable
• Seamless foam-in-place one-piece gasket for oil-tight
and dust-tight seal
• Panel-mounting studs for optional subpanels and
accessories
• Removable data pocket
• UL listed, File #E69392
• CSA certified
• Rated NEMA 4, 12, and 13
• ANSI 61 gray polyester powder coating inside and out with white panels
DIMENSIONS
SAGINAW NEMA 4, 12, AND 13 ENCLOSURES & PANELS
EL SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
SCE12EL1206LP
SCE16EL1206LP
SCE16EL1208LP
SCE20EL1606LP
SCE24EL2008LP
SCE24EL2406LP
DIMENSIONS
A x B x C in (cm)
12 x 12 x 6 (30.5 x 30.5 x 15.2)
16 x 12 x 6 (40.7 x 30.5 x 15.2)
16 x 12 x 8 (40.7 x 30.5 x 20.3)
16 x 16 x 6 (40.6 x 40.6 x 15.2)
20 x 16 x 6 (50.8 x 40.6 x 15.2)
20 x 16 x 8 (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3)
20 x 20 x 6 (50.8 x 50.8 x 15.2)
20 x 20 x 8 (50.8 x 50.8 x 20.3)
24 x 16 x 8 (61 x 40.6 x 20.3)
24 x 20 x 6 (61 x 50.8 x 15.2)
24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 50.8 x 20.3)
24 x 20 x 10 (61 x 50.8 x 25.4)
24 x 24 x 6 (61 x 61 x 15.2)
24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 20.3)
30 x 24 x 8 (76.2 x 61 x 20.3)
36 x 24 x 8 (91.4 x 61 x 20.3)
36 x 24 x 12 (91.4 x 61 x 30.5)
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
16 (7.3)
15.6 (7.1)
21 (9.5)
24 (10.9)
28 (12.7)
30 (13.6)
33 (15)
36 (16.4)
36 (16.4)
38 (17.3)
48 (21.8)
50 (22.7)
45 (20.5)
48 (21.8)
68 (30.9)
71 (32.3)
77 (35)
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
3 (1.4)
4 (1.8)
4 (1.8)
8 (3.6)
8 (3.6)
8 (3.6)
10 (4.5)
10 (4.5)
11 (5)
14 (6.4)
14 (6.4)
14 (6.4)
17 (7.7)
17 (7.7)
22 (10)
27 (12.3)
27 (12.3)
MODEL
SCE12DLP12
SCE16P12
SCE16P12
SCE20P16
SCE20P16
SCE20P16
SCE20P20
SCE20P20
SCE24P16
SCE24P20
SCE24P20
SCE24P20
SCE24P24
SCE24P24
SCE30P24
SCE36P24
SCE36P24
DIMENSIONS
A x B in (cm)
9 x 9 (22.9 x 22.9)
13 x 9 (33 x 22.9)
13 x 9 (33 x 22.9)
17 x 13 (43.2 x 33)
17 x 13 (43.2 x 33)
17 x 13 (43.2 x 33)
17 x 17 (43.2 x 43.2)
17 x 17 (43.2 x 43.2)
21 x 13 (53.3 x 33)
21 x 17 (53.3 x 43.2)
21 x 17 (53.3 x 43.2)
21 x 17 (53.3 x 43.2)
21 x 21 (53.3 x 53.3)
21 x 21 (53.3 x 53.3)
27 x 21 (68.6 x 53.3)
33 x 21 (83.8 x 53.3)
33 x 21 (83.8 x 53.3)
ENCLOSURES OLID STEEL PANEL
SCE16EL1606LP
SCE20EL1608LP
SCE20EL2006LP
SCE20EL2008LP
SCE24EL1608LP
SCE24EL2006LP
SCE24EL2010LP
SCE24EL2408LP
SCE30EL2408LP
SCE36EL2408LP
SCE36EL2412LP
SCE36EL3008LP
SCE36EL3010LP
SCE36EL3608LP
SCE42EL3610LP
SCE42EL3612LP
SCE48EL3610LP
SCE48EL3612LP
SCE60EL3610LP
36 x 30 x 8 (91.4 x 76.2 x 20.3) 73 (33.2)
89 (40.5)
102 (46.4)
127 (57.7)
130 (59.1)
137 (62.3)
140 (63.6)
164 (74.5)
36 x 30 x 10 (91.4 x 76.2 x 25.4)
36 x 36 x 8 (91.4 x 91.4 x 20.3)
42 x 36 x 10 (106.7 x 91.4 x 25.4)
42 x 36 x 12 (106.7 x 91.4 x 30.5)
48 x 36 x 10 (121.9 x 91.4 x 25.4)
48 x 36 x 12 (121.9 x 91.4 x 30.5)
60 x 36 x 10 (152.4 x 91.4 x 25.4)
SCE60EL3612LP 60 x 36 x 12 (152.4 x 91.4 x 30.5) 167 (75.9)
SCE36P30
SCE36P30
SCE36P36
SCE42P36
SCE42P36
SCE48P36
SCE48P36
SCE60P36
SCE60P36
33 x 27 (83.8 x 65.6)
33 x 27 (83.8 x 65.6)
33 x 33 (83.8 x 83.8)
39 x 33 (99.1 x 83.8)
39 x 33 (99.1 x 83.8)
45 x 33 (114.3 x 83.8)
45 x 33 (114.3 x 83.8)
57 x 33 (144.8 x 83.8)
57 x 33 (144.8 x 83.8)
34 (15.5)
34 (15.5)
35 (15.9)
39 (17.7)
39 (17.7)
55 (25)
55 (25)
58 (26.4)
58 (26.4)
ENCLOSURES
268
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014

305. DESCRIPTION
B Series small enclosures are versatile boxes for relays,
transducers, and other remotely mounted devices. The two-
piece design allows easy access as the sections slip together and fasten with either a built-in snap lock or furnished sheet metal screws
.
FEATURES
• T •
Flanged sections to assure proper shielding
• 1/2" knockouts top and bottom
• Natural aluminum or galvanized steel finish
DIMENSIONS/ORDERING INFORMATION
MISCELLANEOUS ENCLOSURES AND WINDOW KITS
B SERIES AND WINDOW KITS
MISCELLANEOUS ENCLOSURES AND WINDOW KITS
FIXED AND HINGED WINDOW KITS
ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS in (cm) W EIGHT ACCESSORIES
MODEL L W H lb (kg) INCLUDED
B-5* 5 (12 .7) 4 (10 .16) 3 (7 .62) 0 .5 (0 .2) none
B-7* 7 (17 .78) 5 (12 .7) 3 (7 .62) 0 .75 (0 .34) none
B-12** 12 (30 .48) 12 (30 .48) 3 (7 .62) 5 .5 (2 .5) none
B-12-P 12 (30 .48) 12 (30 .48) 3 (7 .62) 7 (3 .2) QP1212 - 11" x 11"
perf-panel
* Natural aluminum finish ** Galvanized steel finish
DESCRIPTION
Hoffman Fixed and Hinged Window Kits are designed for
use with NEMA 1, 4, 4X, 12, and 13 enclosures. Each NEMA
1, 4, 12, and 13 kit comes with a clear 0.25" (.64 cm) acrylic
window, all of the essential hardware, and easy-to-follow instructions
. The NEMA 4X stainless steel Fixed Window
Kits are designed for use with NEMA 4X enclosures, have a clear 0
.25" (.64 cm) polycarbonate window, and also include
hardware and instructions. The Hinged Window Kits are
1.49" (3.78 cm) deep and provide an available working space
of 1.19" (3.02 cm) from the surface of the door to the inside of
the window.
DIMENSIONS
MODEL
A-PWK53NF*
A-PWK95NF*
A-PWK133NF
A-PWK138NF*
A-PWK175NF
A-PWK1711NF*
A-PWK2315NF*
A-PWK2919NF*
A-PWK3523NF
WINDOW SIZE
5.0 x 3.0 (13 x 8)
9.0 x 5.0 (23 x 13)
13.0 x 3.0 (33 x 8)
13.0 x 8.0 (33 x 20)
17.0 x 5.0 (43 x 13)
17.0 x 11.0 (43 x 28)
23.0 x 15.0 (58 x 38)
29.0 x 19.0 (74 x 48)
35.0 x 23.0 (89 x 58)
FRAME SIZE
7.5 x 5.5 (19 x 14)
11.5 x 8.0 (29 x 20)
15.5 x 5.5 (39 x 14)
15.5 x 10.5 (39 x 27)
19.5 x 8.0 (50 x 20)
19.5 x 13.5 (50 x 34)
25.5 x 17.5 (65 x 44)
31.5 x 21.5 (80 x 54)
37.5 x 25.5 (95 x 65)
FIXED WINDOW KIT DIMENSIONS H x W in (cm)
CUT-OUT SIZE
6.69 x 4.69 (17 x 12)
10.69 x 7.19 (27 x 18)
14.69 x 4.69 (37 x 12)
14.69 x 9.69 (37 x 25)
18.69 x 7.19 (47 x 18)
18.69 x 12.69 (47 x 32)
24.69 x 16.69 (63 x 42)
30.69 x 20.69 (78 x 53)
36.69 x 24.69 (93 x 63)
HINGED WINDOW KIT DIMENSIONS H x W in (cm)
KIT NUMBER
A-10P10-NADFK A-12P10-NADFK A-14P12-NADFK A-16P12-NADFK A-16P16-NADFK A-20P16-NADFK A-20P20-NADFK A-24P20-NADFK
INCLUDED SUBPANEL
A-10P10 A-12P10 A-14P12 A-16P12 A-16P16 A-20P16 A-20P20 A-24P20
KIT NUMBER
A-24P24-NADFK A-30P24-NADFK A-36P24-NADFK A-36P30-NADFK A-42P24-NADFK A-42P36-NADFK A-48P36-NADFK
A-NADFK
INCLUDED SUBPANEL
A-24P24 A-30P24 A-36P24 A-36P30 A-42P24 A-42P36 A-48P36
Swing-out panel hardware
* Available in stainless steel. Add SS after part number . Example: A-PWK53NFSS
Note: All steel fixed window kits meet UL Type 4 and Type 12, CSA Type 12. All stainless
steel fixed window kits meet UL/CSA Type 4, Type 4X, and Type 12. All hinged wind
ow
kits maintain UL Type 12 integrity.
MODEL
A-PWK1212H A-PWK1612H A-PWK2016H A-PWK2020H A-PWK2420H A-PWK3024H
WINDOW SIZE
10.28 x 10.28 (26 x 26) 14.28 x 10.28 (36 x 26) 18.28 x 14.28 (46 x 36) 18.28 x 18.28 (46 x 43) 22.28 x 18.28 (57 x 43) 28.28 x 22.28 (57 x 57)
FRAME SIZE
12.0 x 12.0 (30 x 30) 16.0 x 12.0 (41 x 30) 20.0 x 16.0 (51 x 41) 20.0 x 20.0 (51 x 51) 24.0 x 20.0 (61 x 51) 30.0 x 24.0 (76 x 61)
CUT-OUT SIZE
10.44 x 10.44 (27 x 27) 14.44 x 10.44 (37 x 27) 18.44 x 14.44 (47 x 37) 18.44 x 18.44 (47 x 47) 22.44 x 18.44 (57 x 47) 28.44 x 22.44 (72 x 57)NEW!
269ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014

306. ORDERING INFORMATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
HOFFMAN ENCLOSURE ACCESSORIES
LOCKS, LATCHES, VENTILATION, HEATING, COOLING
A-L12AR
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
A-L12AR
A-L7A
A-L2A
A-L2BR
A-L2CR
A-L2DR
DESCRIPTION
Cylinder lock
T-handle latch
One-point latch kit
Three-point latch kit for 16", 20",
24", or 30"H enclosures
Three-point latch kit for 36", 42", or
48"H enclosures
Three-point latch kit for 60" or
72"H enclosures
ENCLOSURE
NEMA 1
NEMA 1
NEMA 12
NEMA 12
NEMA 12
NEMA 12
FAN #
A-4AXFN
A-6AXFN
A-10AXFN
GUARD #
A-GARD4
A-GARD6
A-GARD10
BRACKET #
A-BRKT4
A-BRKT6
A-BRKT10
SHAPE
Square
Round
Round
COOLING FANS (1 guard included, 2 recommended) 115 VAC 50/60 Hz
CFM
100
240
560
SIZE in (cm)
4.69 (11.92)
6.72 (17.07)
10.00 (25.4)
ELECTRIC HEATERS
ENCLOSURE SURFACE AREA (Sq Ft) = 2[(LxW) + (LxD) + (WxD)]/144
Mounting - 100/200 watt requires 1" clearance on sides and bottom and 4" above
Heater 4"W x 5"H x 4"D (10.16 cm x 12.7 cm x 10.2 cm)
400/800 watt requires 1" clearance on sides and bottom and 6" above
Heater 4.25"W x 7"H x 4.38"D (10.8 cm x 17.8 cm x 11.1 cm)
Maximum enclosure surface area in sq ft
Desired ambient temperature rise °F
MODEL

D-AH1001A
D-AH2001A
D-AH4001B
D-AH8001B
WATTS

100
200
400
800
VOLTAGE
(VAC)
120
120
120
120
Hz

50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
AMPS

0.9
1.7
3.3
6.5
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
4 (1.8)
4 (1.8)
6 (2.7)
6 (2.7)
10 °F
30
50
–
–
20°F
15
25
50
–
30°F
10
15
30
–
40°F
5
14
23
50
50°F
–
12
19
35
60°F
–
8
16
28
A-L2A
A-L7A
Louver Plate Kit
A-VK33
Filters for
Louver Plate Kit
A-FLT33
Electric Heater
Decorative
Vent Kit
X-PV32
Fan Bracket
A-BRKT4
Additional
Fan Guard
A-GARD4
ORDERING INFORMATION
LOUVER KITS
A-VK33
A-VK43
A-VK64
A-VK84
FILTERS
A-FLT33
A-FLT43
A-FLT64
A-FLT84
X-PV32
DECORATIVE
VENT KIT DIMENSIONS
(includes filter) in (cm)
DIMENSIONS in (cm)
3.88 x 4.50 (9.9 x 11.4)
4.50 x 5.50 (11.4 x 14)
5.62 x 7.50 (14 .2 x 19)
5.81 x 9.50 (14.8 x 24.1)
DIMENSIONS in (cm)
3.22 x 3.25 (8.2 x 8.3)
3.84 x 4.25 (9.8 x 10.8)
4.45 x 6.25 (11.3 x 15.9)
4.64 x 8.25 (11.8 x 21)
11.81 x 7.88 x 1.03 (30 x 20 x 2.6)
CUT-OUT SIZE in (cm)
2.62 x 3.00 (6.7 x 7.6)
3.25 x 4.00 (8.3 x 10.2)
4.38 x 6.00 (11.1 x 15.2)
4.56 x 8.00 (11.6 x 20.3)
USED WITH
A-VK33
A-VK43
A-VK64
A-VK84
Cooling Fans
A-4AXFN
ENCLOSURES
270
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014

307. ORDERING INFORMATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
Many enclosure applications require keyed locks, venting,
heating and/or cooling. These accessories will help to
complete your panel projects.
SAGINAW ENCLOSURE ACCESSORIES
LATCHES, LOCKS, VENTILATION, HEATING, COOLING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
SCEDKLD
SCENLTH
DESCRIPTION Cylinder lock, chrome
T-handle latch, non-locking
ENCLOSURE NEMA 1
NEMA 1
LOUVER KITS
SCEAVK33 SCEAVK43 SCEAVK64 SCEAVK84
FILTERS
SCEFLT33 SCEFLT43 SCEFLT64 SCEFLT84
DIMENSIONS in (cm) 3.88 x 4.50 (9.9 x 11.4) 4.50 x 5.50 (11.4 x 14) 5.62 x 7.50 (14 .2 x 19) 5.81 x 9.50 (14.8 x 24.1)
DIMENSIONS in (cm) 3.22 x 3.25 (8.2 x 8.3) 3.84 x 4.25 (9.8 x 10.8) 4.45 x 6.25 (11.3 x 15.9)
4.64 x 8.25 (11.8 x 21)
CUT-OUT SIZE in (cm) 2.62 x 3.00 (6.7 x 7.6)
3.25 x 4.00 (8.3 x 10.2)
4.38 x 6.00 (11.1 x 15.2)
4.56 x 8.00 (11.6 x 20.3)
USED WITH
SCEAVK33 SCEAVK43 SCEAVK64 SCEAVK84
ELECTRIC HEATERS
ENCLOSURE SURFACE AREA (Sq Ft) = 2[(LxW) + (LxD) + (WxD)]/144
Mounting - 100/200 watt requires 1" clearance on sides and bottom and 4" above
Heater 4"W x 5"H x 4"D (10.16 cm x 12.7 cm x 114 cm)
400/800 watt requires 1" clearance on sides and bottom and 6" above
Heater 4"W x 7.5"H x 4.58"D (10 cm x 19 cm x 11.4 cm)
MODEL
SCEHF1251A
SCEHF2001A
SCEHF4001B
SCEHF8001B
WATTS
125
200
400
800
VOLTAGE
(VAC)
115
115
115
115
Hz
60
60
60
60
AMPS
1.1
1.7
3.5
7
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
4 (1.8)
4 (1.8)
4 (1.8)
4 (1.8)
FAN #
SCECF4
SCECF6
SCEC10
GUARD #
SCEGARD4
SCEGARD6
SCEGARD10
BRACKET #
SCE112399
SCE111252
SCE110551
SHAPE
Square
Round
Round
COOLING FANS (1 guard included, 2 recommended) 115 VAC 50/60 Hz
CFM
100 240 560
SIZE in (cm)
4.69 (11.92) 6.72 (17.07) 10.00 (25.4)
SCE-GARD4
SCEFLT33
SCENLTH
SCE112399
SCECF4
SCEAVK33
SCEDLKLD
SCEHF1251A
271ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
5
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014

308. EMT CONDUIT FITTINGS
MUT
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete line of EMT fittings for 1/2" and 3/4".
1-hole Strap 2-hole Strap
Pulling Elbow
90° Compression Connector
Compression Connector
Set Screw Coupling
Set Screw Connector
Offset Nipple
Elbow
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Description Unit Quantity
EMT 90° ELBOW
EMTEL12 1/2" EMT 90° elbow 1 piece
EMTEL34 3/4" EMT 90° elbow 1 piece
EMT OFFSET NIPPLE UL FILE E35001
EMTOFNP12 1/2" EMT offset nipple 1 piece
EMT SET SCREW CONNECTOR UL FILE E35001
EMTSCN12 1/2" EMT set screw connector1 piece
EMTSCN34 3/4" EMT set screw connector1 piece
EMT SET SCREW COUPLING UL FILE E35001
EMTSCU12 1/2" EMT set screw coupling 1 piece
EMTSCU34 3/4" EMT set screw coupling 1 piece
EMT COMPRESSION CONNECTOR UL FILE E35001
EMTCCN12 1/2" EMT compression connector1 piece
EMTCCN34 3/4" EMT compression connector1 piece
EMT COMPRESSION COUPLING UL FILE E32539
EMTCCU12 1/2" EMT compression coupling1 piece
EMTCCU34 3/4" EMT compression coupling1 piece
EMT 90° COMPRESSION CONNECTOR UL FILE E35001
EMTCCN9012 1/2" 90° compression connector1 piece
EMTCCN9034 3/4" 90° compression connector1 piece
EMT ONE-HOLE STRAP UL FILE E333806
EMT1STP12 1/2" EMT one-hole strap 1 piece
EMT1STP34 3/4" EMT one-hole strap 1 piece
EMT TWO-HOLE STRAP UL FILE E333806
EMT2STP12 1/2" EMT two-hole strap 1 piece
EMT2STP34 3/4" EMT two-hole strap 1 piece
EMT PULLING ELBOW
EMTPE12 1/2" EMT pulling elbow 1 piece
EMTPE34 3/4" EMT pulling elbow 1 piece
ENCLOSURES
272
ENCLOSURES
5
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014

309. HUMIDITY
FLOW
FLOW
220B | p. 291
KOAMS | p. 273
NFP Series | p. 310
Recordall | p. 337
Disc Meter
626600A | p. 320
EE65 | p. 282
Kele Provides Solutions for Air and Fluid Movement, Measurement, and Control.

310. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
FLOW
DTFXL Series | p. 301
FT2A Series | p. 286
DPFS Series | p. 280
FLOW
Air Flow
KOAMS Series — Kele Outdoor Airflow Measuring System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
KMS Series
— Airflow Measuring Station
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
KIP Series
— Fan Inlet Airflow Measuring Probe
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
160 Series
— Stainless Steel Pitot Tubes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
FXP Series
— Differential Pressure Air Velocity Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
AMP Series
— Ampliflow Air Velocity Sensor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
DPFS Series
— Low-Cost Differential Pressure Flow Sensor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
SSS-1000 Series
— Differential Pressure Flow Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
EE65 and EE66 Series
— Air Velocity Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
AVS-200
— Air Velocity Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
A2G-20 Series
— Air Flow
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
FE-1000 Series
— Insertion Type Airflow Sensing Element
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
FE-1050 Series
— Fan Inlet Airflow Sensing Element
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Gas Flo
w
FT2A Series — Thermal Mass Flow Meter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Liquid Flow SDI Series
— Flow Sensor with Integral Flow Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
200 Series Overview
— Flow Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
220B, 220SS
— Brass & Stainless Steel Flow Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
225B, 226B, 226SS Series
— Hot Tap Flow Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
228B, 228C, 228SS
— Tee-Mounted Flow Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
250B
— Tee Mounted Flow Sensor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
228PV Series
— PVC Tee Flow Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
310 Series
— Programmable Analog Flow Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
UFT-1 Series
— Universal Flow Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
3000, 3050 Series
— Flow and Energy Monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
DTFXL Series
— Ultrasonic Flowmeter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
M-2000 Series
— Magnetic Flow Meter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
2200, 3100 Series
— Fixed and Retractable Insertion Vortex Flow Meters
. . . 307
V-BAR 700
— Insertion Vortex Flow Meter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
NFP Series
— Target Flow Meter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
340 Series
— BTU Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
380 Series
— BTU Meter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
DE/DB Series
— Ultrasonic Energy Meter, Flow Meter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
626600A
— Paddle Flow Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
FS1-6
— Flow Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
F61 Series
— Flow Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
EDC Condensate Pumps
— COU, LIM, JAG, and PAN Models
. . . . . . . . . . . 326
DXN Series
— Portable Ultrasonic Flow and Energy Meter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
IOG Series
— Industrial Oval Gear Meter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
RCDL Compound Series
— Recordall
®
Compound Series Meter
. . . . . . . . . 335
RCDL Nutating Disc
— Recordall
®
Nutating Disc Meters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
RCDL Turbo Series
— Recordall
®
Turbo Series Meters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

311. flfi 273FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 20 to 28 VAC/VDC
Supply VA Standard processor: 4.6 VA at 24
VAC, 2.7 VA at 24 VDC
Full-option processor: 6 VA at 24
VAC/VDC
Accuracy Within ±0.5% of actual flow through
the range of 200 to 1,200 fpm,
and ±5% at 100 fpm velocity,
when installed in accordance with
publlished recommendations
Operating Temperature
Processor: 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Station: up to 350°F (177°C)
continuous operation
Operating Humidity Processor: 0 to 95% RH, non-
condensing
Station: 0 to 100% RH
Velocity Range 100 to 2,800 fpm
Materials Of Construction
Elements: 6063-T5 anodized
aluminum
Casing: 16 ga. G90 galvanized steel
(other materials available special order)
Enclosure Rating
NEMA 4X with proper connectors
Dimensions Processor housing 6.7"H x 4.7"W x
2.7"D (16.9 x 11.9 x 6.9 cm)
Analog Output Jumper selectable 0-5 VDC, 0-10
VDC (1KΩ minimum), or 4-20 mA (500Ω maximum)
Digital Outputs
Optional high/low alarm, two single
(one Form C) dry contact
Contact Rating 5A at 30 VAC/VDC, 10A at 120 VAC
resistive load
Communication LonWorks
®
, BACnet MS/TP
®
,
Modbus
KELE OUTDOOR AIRFLOW MEASURING SYSTEM
KOAMS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KOAMS Series outdoor airflow measuring system consists of multiple airflow elements, factory mounted and pre-piped in a casing designed for flanged connection to ductwork, control dampers, louvers, etc
. An
optional inlet bell is a
vailable for plenum applications
. The
integral signal processor utilizes current state-of-the-art digital microprocessor technology with unequaled 24-bit A/D and 12-bit D/A signal conversion resolution and has twelve-point linearization capability
. The K OAMS is capable of measuring
down to 100 fpm and providing full scale operating ranges as low as 693 fpm
. The signal processor accepts a temperature
input signal for air density compensation for standard (scfm) or actual (acfm) airflow calculations
.
SPECIFICATIONS
KOAMS with Inlet Bell
FEATURES
• Accurac
1,200 fpm and ±5% accuracy at 100 FPM
• Multiple total and static pressure sensing ports to
comply with ASHRAE Standard 111 for duct traversing
• Not affected by condensation or moisture
• Aerodynamically designed to resist fouling by airborne
particulates
• Factory mounted and pre-piped in a flanged duct
section (casing)
• Optional inlet bell for plenum applications
• Airflow station can be operated in humidity ranges of 0
to 100% with no effect on the station
• Full scale spans as low as 693 fpm (3.52 m/s) velocity
• Excellent AD/DA resolution: 24-bit A/D and 12 bit D/A
• Twelve point linearization and four point flow correction
• Large back lit LCD for configuration and local indication
of the measured process
• Auto zeroing function
• Temperature compensation for air density correction
• NEMA 4 rated enclosure
• Modbus communication
• Certified LonWorks
®
or BACnet MS/TP
®
communication
option

312. flfi
FLOW 274flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
KELE OUTDOOR AIRFLOW MEASURING SYSTEM
KOAMS SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
SIGNAL PROCESSOR FIELD CONNECTIONS
Flow
Total
pressure
port
Static
pressure
port
“H”
“F”
“W”“L”
DIMENSIONS
Total
pressure
port
Static
pressure
port
“F”
“L”
“H”
“W”
4"
Flow
RELATED PRODUCTS
KOAMS-TT Replacement outside air temperature transmitter
(-30° to 130°F)
Flanged Stations for Ducted Applications
Stations with Optional Inlet Bell for Plenum Applications
Note: Dimension "F"= 1-1/2' (stations 8'-72") or 2' (stations > 72")
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KOAMS
KOAMS
Outdoor airflow measuring system
CASING WIDTH (inches, minimum increments of 1/4")
CASING HEIGHT (inches, minimum increments of 1/4")
CASING LENGTH (5", 8", 12"; custom lengths available)
PROBE DIRECTION
2Casing height
3Remote
OUTPUT
14-20 mA
20-5 VDC
30-10 VDC
OPTIONS
1Inlet bell (not available w/5˚ casing)
3High/Lo alarm
6
7
Optional 0.1% F.S. Accuracy
5BACnet MS/TP Communication
4LonWorks Communication
130-- -- -- -1220
Example:  KO AMS-20-30-12-2-3-1-2-1
20" x 30" station with 12'' casing length, 
4-20 mA output, and inlet bell
SIGNAL PROCESSOR MOUNTING LOCATION
TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER 2
1-223
Modbus Communication

313. flfi 275FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Connections 1/2" FNPT HI/LO pressure pickups,
factory-mounted on the long
side dimension when station is
rectangular
Accuracy
±2% within design flow range
Minimum Velocity 1000 fpm (305 mpm)
Maximum Velocity 6000 fpm (1830 mpm)
Mounting Duct flanges standard
Media Compatibility Clean HVAC duct air
Media Temperature Range
400°F (204°C) maximum
Maximum Pressure 6" W.C. maximum duct static
Pressure Drop <0.13" W.C. @ 2000 fpm
Materials Of Construction
Casing: 16-gauge galvanized sheet
steel; pickup sensors: rigid copper (hard drawn to ANSI H23
.1 and
ASTM B88 standards); internal fittings: copper (ANSI B-16
.22);
straightening vanes: 3/8" aluminum hexagon cell
Dimensions
Casing depth 12" (30.5 cm);
H x W dimensions made-to-order
Warranty 1 year
AIRFLOW MEASURING STATION
KMS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KMS Series airflow measuring stations utilize
multiple averaging sensors for static pressure measurements
and a bullet-nose probe for total pressure
. The sensors are
distributed across the flow stream to conform to the industry standard rules for equal-area averaging (the standard pitot traverse)
. The standard unit includes a 16-gauge galvanized
casing with flanged duct connection, 3/8'' hexagon-celled aluminum flow straightening vanes, and internal copper sensors constructed to ASTM B88
. Instrument connections
are 1/2'' FNPT. Other configurations are available on request.
APPLICATION
When utilized with a differential pressure transmitter, the
KMS Series provides an accurate, repeatable airflow signal
for building automation and HVAC applications
. Air velocity
may be determined by the formula: Velocity (fpm) = 4004√∆P, where ∆P is differential pressure in "W
.C. Then, flow rate
may be determined by the formula: CFM = AV, where A is the effective area of the flow measuring station in square feet, and V is the velocity obtained above
. The proper range for a
differential pressure transmitter to use with the KMS Series airflow measuring station may be determined by the formula: ∆P = (Max Velocity/4004)
2
.
SPECIFICATIONS
KMS Front and
Back
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KMS Airflow measuring station
SHAPE
811 Round with flanges
911 Rectangular with flanges
DIMENSIONS
W x H Diameter or width x height (inches)
KMS 91148 x 24
Example: KMS-911-48 x 24 Rectangular airflow station with 16-gauge galvanized
casing, 3/8'' straightening vanes, and copper probes 48'' wide x 24'' high
Note: Standard location for flow connections is on the "long" dimensions side of a rectangular station. Stations can
be rotated. If connections must be located on the "short" side, specify it on the order;
a cost adder applies.
ACCESSORIES
KMS-PAK-B 1/2" FNPT to 1/4" OD tubing barb fitting

314. flfi
FLOW 276flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Inlet Flow View Isometric View Mount ultraprobe
in smallest diameter
Dimension Y is the smallest fan inlet diameter. The probes will be built
for proper spacing using this dimension, which is required for ordering.
Distance
varies with
inlet
diameter Y
1
22
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KIP Series fan inlet airflow measuring probe
provides a reliable and economical means to measure airflow
at fan inlets
. Similar to airflow stations, the probe measures
velocity pressure with multiple averaging pickups for total and static pressure
. Rugged, lightweight, and easy to install, it is
used with industry-standard differential pressure transmitters, gauges, or manometers
. KIP Series probes install easily at
the fan inlet and do not require straight duct runs. They are
particularly applicable for jobs where fitting a flow measuring station is difficult or impossible
.
FEATURES
• Easy and quick to install
• Accurate and repeatable
• Economical
• Lightweight and rugged
• No straight duct runs required
• High velocity, high differential
• Standard airflow calculations
The fan inlet diameter (dimension Y) shown in Figure 1, must be correctly determined and specified. Each set of probes is made to order and
cannot be retur
ned for credit if the dimensions are incorrectly specified
.
If the fan inlet depth is 3.5" (8.9 cm) or greater, order the KIP-Y-3.5. Each KIP Series probe will have both static (low) and total (high) pressure
pickup barbs. “Tee” the high-pressure pickups together and the low pickups together. If the fan inlet depth is less than 3.5" (8.9 cm), order the KIP-
Y-.5. One KIP Series probe will have a single static (low) pressure pickup barb, and the other probe will have a single total (high) pressure pickup
barb.
Determining the differential (velocity) pressure for a KIP Series probe is the same as for a pitot tube or flow measuring station (see KMS Series
catalog page for formulas).
FIGURE 1. FAN INLET
FAN INLET AIRFLOW MEASURING PROBE
KIP SERIES
Connections 3/16" barbs for 1/4" OD poly tubing
Accuracy ±2% within design flow range
Minimum Velocity 400 fpm (122 mpm)
Maximum Velocity 12,000 fpm (3658 mpm)
Mounting Drill/screw on fan inlet
Media Compatibility Clean HVAC duct air
Media Temperature Range
400°F (204°C) maximum
Materials Of Construction
Aluminum with anodized finish
Dimensions Made-to-order
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
For fan inlet depth > 3.5"
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Description
KIP-Y-.5 Probe set for fan inlet depth 0.5" to 3.5" (specify Y; = inlet diameter range 6" to 96" (15 to 244 cm)
KIP-Y-3.5 Probe set for fan inlet depth > 3.5" (specify Y; = inlet diameter range 6" to 96" (15 to 244 cm)
Note: One KIP includes a pair of pickup probes for measuring airflow at a fan inlet. For dual inlet fans, two KIPs must be ordered.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
CX, RX, XLdp Series Ashcroft differential pressure transmitters
M264 Series Setra differential pressure transmitter 1014
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
For fan inlet depth
0.5" to 3.5"
APPLICATION

315. flfi 277FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
STAINLESS STEEL PITOT TUBES
160 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Dwyer 160 Series stainless steel pitot tubes are
designed for use with differential pressure transmitters,
manometers, or air velocity gauges to measure air flow in
ducts
. See Measuring Air Flow in the Technical Reference
Section for complete application information. The 160 Series
is designed per ASME and meets AMCA and ASHRAE standards
. Insertion depth is stamped on the side of the pitot
tubes, and the static pressure port is parallel to the sensing tube to allow easy alignment with air flow
. A Model A-158 split
flange mounting kit allo
ws for simple, leak-free mounting of
the 160 Series
.
FEATURES
• 304 stainless steel construction
• ASME design
• Accurate even with up to 15° misalignment
• Insertion depth markings stamped on tube
• Air velocity calculator, flow charts, and instructions
included
• 1/4" connections for 3/8" OD tubing
• Handy A-158 split flange for duct mounting
• One year warranty
8.0 (20.32), 12.0 (30.48), 18.0 (45.72), 24.0 (60.96),
36.0 (91.44) or 48.0 (121.92)
0.31
(0.79)
0.5 (1.27)
Total pressure
connection
3.63
(9.21)
0.25
(0.64)
0.25
(0.64)
Static pressure
connection
Total pressure
0.125 diameter hole
(0.32) (face into air flow)
Static pressure
8 - 0.040 diameter holes
(0.10) equally spaced2.66
(6.75)
5.0
(12.7)
(Fits 3/8'' OD poly tubing, Model T-110)
(Fits 3/8'' OD poly tubing, Model T-110)
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS
160-12 tube and A-158 mounting flange
ORDERING INFORMATION
160 18 Example: 160-18 Pitot tube with 18" insertion length
MODEL DESCRIPTION
160 Stainless steel pitot tube
LENGTH
XX Length (inches) - 8, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48
ACCESSORIES
A-158 160 Series pitot tube mounting flange (required for duct mount)
Note: See Measuring Airflow in the Technical Reference section for application of 160 Series pilot
tubes for flow measurement.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
CX, RX, XLdp Series Ashcroft differential pressure transmitters
M264 Series Setra differential pressure transmitter 1014
T-110 3/8" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901

316. flfi
FLOW 278flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
FXP Calibration Curve fpm
100
0.001 0.010 0.100 1.000 10.000
1.000
10.000
Differential Pressure ("w.g.) Fpm=2213 mps=11242
Air Velocity (fpm )
∆P ∆P
• CFM- Cubic feet per minute (customer furnished)
• A- Area square feet (customer furnished)
• V- Velocity feet per minute (customer furnished)
• ∆P- Differential pressure in WC"
• Use formula B to calculate the ∆P for transmitter
DESCRIPTION
The Kele FXP Series probe is a differential air pressure
sensor designed to measure air velocities in HVAC ductwork.
It uses m
ultiple sensing points to measure total and static
pressures and incorporates a unique design to amplify the differential pressure by approximately 2.5 times for accurate
measurement of air velocities down to 200 fpm. It is easy to
install and cost eff
ective
.
FEATURES
• Multiple sensing points for greater accuracy
• Easy installation
• Chamfered sensing points for consistent readings
• 2% accuracy
• 2.5X signal amplification
• Accepts 1/4" OD tubing
Check that the FXP probe size corresponds with the duct or terminal where it is installed
.
The FXP probe is mounted in the duct by drilling a 1"
diameter hole.
Check that the air flow direction in the duct corresponds with
the arrow on the FXP probe.
For round ducts, install the FXP probe diagonally in the duct
for best results. This equalizes both horizontal and vertical
irregular air approach.
PERFORMANCE CHART
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE AIR VELOCITY SENSORS
FXP SERIES
SIZING THE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
FXP -10
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
FXP FXP air velocity sensor
WIDTH
XX Duct width (up to 48")
V(FPM) =
CFM
A
V = Kv
*
flP
∆P =
V
Kv
2
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
M264 Series Setra differential pressure transmitter 1014
CX, RX, XLdp Series Ashcroft differential pressure transmitters
INSTALLATION
Formula A Formula B
SizeKv SizeKv SizeKv
4" 2225 7" 2450 12 "2500
5" 2325 8" 2480 14 "2525
6" 2400 10" 2440 16 "2550
FXP Calibra tion Chart
18" and up 2550

317. flfi 279FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Velocity (fpm) = 2213 ∆P
Velocity (mps) = 11.242 ∆P
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
.01. 03 .04. 05 .06.07.08. 1. 2. 3.4.5.6.81.01.52.0.9.7.02
AMPLIFLOW
VELOCITY PRESSURE
∆P Pressure Drop ("W.C.)
Air Velocity (fpm)
AMPLIFLOW SENSOR CALIBRATION CURVE
AMPLIFLOW AIR VELOCITY SENSOR
AMP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele AMP Series ampliflow air velocity sensor is designed to measure air flow velocity in HVAC duct systems
.
The design of the
AMP Series allows it to amplify the
velocity pressure by a factor of three, which, in turn, allows low air flow velocities to be accurately measured. Sensing
holes along the length of the tube yield an a
verage velocity
pressure reading for greater accuracy
. The simple design
of the AMP Series allows quick, easy installation in new or existing ductwork
.
FEATURES
• Multipoint readings for average velocity pressure
• Simple installation
• Rugged, extruded aluminum construction
• Double taps allow field check connections
• Three-to-one ratio pressure signals
• Adaptable to round, square, or oval ducts
• 1/4" barbs for 3/8" OD tubing
• One year warranty
Mount the AMP Series at least three (10 is ideal) duct diameters downstream of coils, dampers, or elbows, and through the width of the duct for best results
. Cut a hole
0.75"H x 0.88"W (1.9 x 2.3 cm) in the duct. Drill holes in the
opposite side of the duct to allow the field pressure taps to protrude through the duct
. Remove the rubber caps from
the field pressure taps and insert the AMP Series into the duct so that the field pressure taps protrude
. Attach the AMP
Series to the duct with sheet metal screws and replace the rubber caps on the field pressure taps
.
AMP-18
PERFORMANCE
INSTALLATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
Note: The ampliflow will be constructed so that the field pressure taps
in the end of the sensing tube protrude through the duct.
Nailor Ind. U. S. Patent No. 4,735,100
* Lengths 30'' to 96'' av ailable by special order.

Provide field-constructed support for sensors >30''.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AMP Ampliflow air velocity sensor
WIDTH
XX Duct width (up to 30")*
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
CX, RX, XLdp Series Ashcroft differential pressure transmitters
M264 Series Setra differential pressure transmitter 1014
T-110 3/8" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901

318. flfi
FLOW 280flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
500 1000 1500 20002 5003 000
0.000
0.100
0.200
0.300
0.400
0.500
0.600
0.700
0.800
0.900
DPFS-1
DPFS-2
DPFS-3
DPFS-4
Velocity (FPM)
Differential Pressure ("WC)
Connections 3/16" (0.48 cm) OD connections for
1/4" (0.64 cm) OD poly tubing
Operating Temperature 40° to 120°F (4° to 49°C)
Mounting Flange 4" x 2" flange with integral foam
gasket and two 3/16" holes spaced
3.3" (8.4 cm) center-to-center
Materials Of Construction
ABS
Dimensions
DPFS-1 4.0"W x 2.1"H x 3.6"L
(10.2 x 5.3 x 9.1 cm)
DPFS-2 4.0"W x 2.1"H x 6.0"L
(10.2 x 5.3 x 15.2 cm)
DPFS-3 4.0"W x 2.1"H x 8.3"L
(10.2 x 5.3 x 21.1 cm)
DPFS-4 4.0"W x 2.1"H x 10.6"L
(10.2 x 5.3 x 26.9 cm)
Approvals RoHS
Weight
DPFS-1 0.04 lb (0.02 kg)
DPFS-2 0.06 lb (0.03 kg)
DPFS-3 0.07 lb (0.032 kg)
DPFS-4 0.08 lb (0.036 kg)
Warranty 2 years
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR
DPFS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele DPFS Series differential pressure flow sensor
is the most economical way to sense airflow velocity in VAV
ducts, and other small size branch ducts in HVAC systems
.
The
DPFS Series is available in 4 different lengths for flow
sensing in duct sizes from 4" to 18" (10 to 46 cm) and can reliably sense velocities above 1000 FPM (feet/minute) or 305 MPM (meters/minute)
.
INSTALLATION Select the appropriate DPFS model to fit the duct size; the flow sensor length needs to be at least half the duct width in order to get a good reading of the velocity pressure
. The
DPFS-1 is for 4" to 6" ducts; the DPFS-2 is for 6" to 8" ducts; the DPFS-3 is for 8" to 10" ducts and the DPFS-4 is for 10" to 18" ducts
. Mounting the DPFS Series sensor requires a 7/8"
(2.2 cm) hole in the duct, through which the probe insert.
The DPFS requires 10 straight duct diameters upstream and
10 downstream for accurate readings. The sensor must be
mounted with the flow direction arrow accurately pointing in the direction of the airflow
. To ensure reliable performance,
the sensor pickup openings must be kept free of dirt and dust accumulation
.
Using 1/4" OD poly tubing, connect the DPFS "H" port to a
differential pressure gauge or transmitter "High" input port, and the "L" port to the gauge or transmitter's "Low" input port
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DPFS-1 Differential pressure flow sensor, 3.0" insertion, for 4" to 6" ducts
DPFS-2 Differential pressure flow sensor, 5.2" insertion, for 6" to 8" ducts
DPFS-3 Differential pressure flow sensor, 7.5" insertion, for 8" to 10" ducts
DPFS-4 Differential pressure flow sensor, 9.7" insertion, for 10" to 18" ducts
Cost-saving 10-packs are available; order model with "...-10PAK" suffix.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
CX, RX, XLdp Series Ashcroft differential pressure transmitters
M264 Series Setra differential pressure transmitter 1014
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
FLOW PERFORMANCE
DPFS-2
DPFS-1
DPFS-3
DPFS-4
Velocity = 3285(flfiP)
Velocity = 3365(flfiP)
Velocity = 3490(flfiP)
Velocity = 3425(flfiP)
Notes:
1. T
10" (DPFS-3) and 12" (DPFS-4 )
2. Flow coefficients were derived by averaging data for each sensor size.

319. flfi 281FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
SSS-1002 Velocity = 3450 ∆P
SSS-1003 Velocity = 3300 ∆P
SSS-1004 Velocity = 3200 ∆P
SSS-1005 Velocity = 3200 ∆P
1000 2000
Velocity (fpm)
∆P Inches "W.C.
The SSS-1000 Series sensor requires a 7/8" (2.22 cm) diameter cutout for the insertion portion and two pilot holes for sheet
metal scre
ws or rivets to hold the flange against the ductwork
. Sensors should be installed as level as possible to ensure accurate
velocity pressure readings.
ORDERING INFORMA TION
INSTALLATION
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FLOW SENSORS
SSS-1000 SERIES
HL
Flow
3.5
(8.89)
1.25
(3.18)
2.75
(6.99)
0.1875 (0.477) diameter
mounting holes (2)
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The SSS-1000 Series airflow sensors sense differential (velocity)
pressure of VAV units and other locations in main or branch ducts.
F
our different lengths allow selection of the sensor to yield accurate
readings on terminal box inlet diameters from 4" to 16" (10
.2 to 40.6
cm).
PERFORMANCE
DIMENSIONS
SSS-1000 Series
Note: See specifications for insertion dimensions
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
CX, RX, XLdp Series Ashcroft differential pressure transmitters
M264 Series Setra differential pressure transmitter 1014
T-110 3/8" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
ACCESSORIES PAGE
B-265 Barb coupling, 3/8" OD tubing to 1/4" OD tubing 903
Connections 1/4" (6.4 mm) OD connections, fit 3/8"
(9.5 mm) OD polyethylene tubing
Operating Temperature 40°F to 120°F (4°C to 49°C)
Mounting Integral flange with foam gasket
Length
SSS-1002 3.16" (8.0 cm) insertion
(one sensing point)
SSS-1003 5.41" (13.7 cm) insertion
(two sensing points)
SSS-1004 7.66" (19.4 cm) insertion
(three sensing points)
SSS-1005 9.91" (25.2 cm) insertion
(four sensing points)
Storage Temperature -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Approvals RoHS
Weight
SSS-1002 0.04 lb (0.02 kg)
SSS-1003 0.05 lb (0.02 kg)
SSS-1004 0.06 lb (0.03 kg)
SSS-1005 0.07 lb (0.03 kg)
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
Model Description
SSS-1002Differential pressure flow sensor, 3.16" insertion
SSS-1003Differential pressure flow sensor, 5.41" insertion
SSS-1004Differential pressure flow sensor, 7.66" insertion
SSS-1005Differential pressure flow sensor, 9.91" insertion

320. flfi
FLOW 282flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC ±20%
Supply Current 150 mA @ 24 VAC, 90 mA @ 24 VDC
Output Signal 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA; jumper selectable
Loads 0-10 VDC output, 10kΩ minimum
resistance; 4-20 mA output, 450Ω
maximum resistance
Wiring Terminal strip with 1/2" NPT conduit
connector or M16x1.5 cable gland for
0.18" to 0.39" (0.45 to 10.0 cm) cable
diameter
Accuracy
EE65 ±40 fpm (0.2 m/s), plus 3% of measured
value, at 68°F (20°C) and 45% RH
EE66 ±7.9 fpm (0.04 m/s), plus 2% of measured
value, at 68°F (20°C) and 45% RH
Response Time 0.7 or 4 seconds, jumper selectable
Operating Temperature
Probe= -13°F to 122°F (-25°C to 50°C)
Electronics= 14°F to 122°F (-10°C to 50°C)
Velocity Range
EE65 0-2000 fpm (0-10 m/s), 0-3000 fpm
(0-15 m/s) or 0-4000 fpm (0-20 m/s)
EE66 0-200 fpm (0-1.0 m/s), 0-300 fpm
(0-1.5 m/s) or 0-400 fpm (0-2.0 m/s)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4 (IP 65)
Dimensions
-VB3 3.2"H x 3.2"W x 5.4"D
(8.0 x 8.0 x 13.7 cm)
-VB5 3.2"H x 3.2"W x 9.3"D
(8.0 x 8.0 x 23.7 cm)
Weight
-VB3 0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
-VB5 0.30 lb (0.14 kg)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The E+E EE65 and EE66 Series airflow velocity transmitters are ideal for accurate ventilation control applications
. They incorporate
innovative hot film anemometer technology which guarantees good accuracy at low airflow velocity and is superior to conventional anemometers with commercial temperature sensors or NTC bead thermistors
. The hot film sensor is also less sensitive to dust and dirt,
for high reliability and low maintenance costs. The EE65 and EE66
series are available with current or voltage output with the measuring range and the response time jumper selectable in the field
.
The EE66 is specifically designed for very low airflow velocities and is
accurate down to approximately 30 fpm (0.15 m/s).
AIR VELOCITY TRANSMITTERS
EE65 AND EE66 SERIES
EE65-01-VB5
SPECIFICATIONS
0.47 (12.0)
1.46
(37.2)
3.15
(80.0)
3.15
(80.0)
0.71
(18.0)
A
A = 3.9" (100) or
7.9" (200)
FEATURES
• Adjustable insertion length for precise measurement
• Jumper selectable ranges and outputs for application
flexibility
• Jumper selectable time constant for signal stability
• Dust and splash-proof NEMA 4 (IP65) enclosure allows
installation in potentially wet areas
• Very low flow velocity EE66 model for clean rooms and other
low velocity applications
V/mA
V1
2
3
GND
Power supply
24 VAC/VDC ± 20%
V+ = supply voltage
GND = ground
AV = airflow output
AV
~
+
+
~
-
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
EE65-01-VB3 Air velocity transmitter, probe length 3.9" (100 mm)
EE65-01-VB5 Air velocity transmitter, probe length 7.9" (200 mm)
EE66-01-VB3 Low flow transmitter, probe length 3.9" (100 mm)
EE66-01-VB5 Low flow transmitter, probe length 7.9" (200 mm)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

321. flfi 283FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
AVS-200 Internal Connection
1 2
24 VAC
3 4 5
0-20 mA
or
4-20 mA
0-10 VDC
Common
+-
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz
Supply VA 5 VA
Output Signal 0-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA
Loads 0-10 VDC output: 1kΩ minimum
resistance; 4-20 mA output: 600Ω
maximum resistance
Wiring 4.5' (1.4 m) cable from transmitter
to probe; screw terminals inside transmitter housing
Accuracy
±5% of measured value plus 0.5%
of measuring range
Repeatability 0.5% of measuring range
Temperature Effect Maximum 0.1%/°C (0.2%/°F)
Time Constant 63.2% for 3 or 10 seconds
Operating Temperature
Electronics 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)

Sensing Tip
-4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Velocity Range 0-1000 fpm (0.5.1 m/s), 0-2000 fpm
(10.2 m/s), or 0-3000 fpm (0-15.3
m/s); DIP switch selectable
Probe Length Range Adjustable 1" to 8" (2.5 to 20.3 cm)
Enclosure Rating IP44
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight 1.8 lb (0.8 kg)
Warranty 1 year
AIR VELOCITY TRANSMITTER
AVS-200
DESCRIPTION
The Kele AVS-200 is an electronic air velocity transmitter for use in HVAC systems, laboratories, and industrial applications
. It features three DIP switch-selectable velocity
ranges and two analog outputs (one voltage, one current).
The
AVS-200 also has a selectable time constant (the time
it takes to register 63
.2% of a velocity change) of 3 or 10
seconds. The sensing probe has an adjustable insertion
length of up to 8" (20.3 cm) and a 4.5' (1.4 m) cable.
FEATURES
• Three DIP switch-selectable velocity ranges
• Two analog outputs
• Selectable time constant
• Dust- and splash-proof (IP44) enclosure
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
AVS-200
The sensing probe must be installed through a 5/8"(16mm) hole in the duct with the arrow on the mounting flange pointing in the direction of the airflow
. The tab on the
mounting flange should be aligned with the line on the probe to ensure proper airflow measurement
. The insertion length is
adjustable. Loosen the set screw, and move the probe to the
selected position. The scale on the probe shows the insertion
length. Always install the sensing probe downstream of filters
and coils. Avoid placement directly in the outside air stream.
F
or best accuracy, locate the sensing probe a minimum of 10
duct diameters (or widths) upstream of any obstruction and a minimum of 10 duct diameters downstream.
INSTALLATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A
VS-200
Air velocity transmitter
Note: Any device sharing a transformer with the AVS-200 must have a com-
mon power negative "-" and signal negative "-" terminal, and polarity must be
observed. Otherwise, a separate transformer must be used.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979

322. flfi
FLOW 284flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
AIR FLOW
A2G-20 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Wika A2G-20 Series air velocity transmitter is
jumper selectable and features a separate signal out for
temperature, three velocity ranges, and one temperature
range
. Applications include supply and exhaust fan tracking;
clean room air; lab air handling and paint booth supply air. For
both the air velocity (FPM) and for the temperature signals, the user can select either of two outputs (0-10V or 4-20 mA)
.
Additional options include a digital displa
y and a SPDT relay
.
The digital displa
y shows both the measured value and the
relay settings
.
FEATURES
• Three ranges; jumper selectable: 0 to 390 FPM, 0 to
1970 FPM, 0 to 3940 FPM
• One temperature range 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
• User selectable output signals: 0-10V or 4-20 mA
• Duct installation
WIRING
Supply Voltage AC/DC 24V ± 10%
Output Signal (Air Velocity)
0-10 V (linear to FPM), load min or
4-20 mA (linear to FPM), load max
Output Signal (Temperature)
0-10 V (linear to °F), load min 1kΩ
or 4-20 mA (linear to °F), load max 400Ω
Wiring
PG-gland M16
Accuracy (Air) 0 to 390 FPM
<19.6 FPM (±5%)
0 to 1,970 FPM <98.1 FPM (±5%)
0 to 3940 FPM <196.2 FPM (±5%)
Accuracy (Temperature)
>1.2°F (<0.5°C)
Velocity Range (Air) 0 to 390 FPM
2 m/s range selectable by jumper
0 to 1,970 FPM 10 m/s range selectable by jumper
0 to 3940 FPM 20 m/s range selectable by jumper
Temperature Range 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C),
max. 85% rH
Enclosure Rating Plastic (ABS) Nema 3
Approvals RoHS, WEEE
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
A2G-20 Series

323. flfi 285FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
DIMENSIONS
AIR FLOW
A2G-20 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A2G20-V00-3X-1AAF-M-Z Air velocity transmitter, no digital display and no relay
A2G20-V00-3X-1AAF-M-A Air velocity transmitter with digital display, no relay
A2G20-V00-3X-1AAF-M-B Air velocity transmitter with digital display and SPDT relay

324. flfi
FLOW 286flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
DESCRIPTION
The Fox FT2A Series thermal mass flow meters are perfect
for measuring flow of natural gas, compressed air, propane,
oxygen, and most common gases. The flow meters measure
both flow rate and temperature with isolated 4-20 mA outputs for both variables
. In addition, a separate pulse output can be
used for logging total gas flow. The FT2A mass flow meters
measure gas flow velocity as low as 50 sfpm (standard feet/ minute) and as high as 50,000 sfpm, without the need for temperature or pressure compensation
.
Each flow meter is calibrated at the factory using the same
gas as the application. As a result, the FT2A more than
meets EPA accuracy requirements for monitoring both boiler intake gas and combustion emissions
.
Standard models include a 2 line x 16 character bright white
backlit display for viewing flow rate, flow total, elapsed time, process gas temperature and alarms
. The FT2A has an
integral keypad for setting parameters such as signal spans, pulse frequency scaling, pipe area, zero cutoff, filtering, diagnostics and alarms
.
The FT2A Series is available in two styles, inline or
insertion. The inline models (male NPT) include built-in flow
conditioners which reduce the need for long straight runs of upstream and downstream pipe
. The most common inline
sizes are 1/2" to 2" and other inline sizes are available. The
insertion models install in a 3/4" coupling (field provided) and are available in insertion lengths to fit pipes from 1-1/2" to 72"
.
Both inline and inser
tion styles come standard with stainless
steel wetted parts, an integral NEMA 4X enclosure rated for Class I, Div. 2, Groups B,C,D hazardous areas, and a NIST
calibration certificate.
FEATURES
• Measures gas flow rate in SCFM, SCFH, NM3M, NM3H,
KG/M, KG/H, and more, for complete choice in units
• Two 4-20 mA analog outputs, flow rate and temperature
• RS485-Modbus, Isolated BACnet MS/TP, Profibus-DP,
DeviceNet and Ethernet Modbus TCP models available
for network communication
• Insertion or inline mounting styles for installation
choices
• All welded 316SS sensor construction and no moving
parts for durability and long life
• Field programmable for flexibility in configuration
• Standard NEMA 4X enclosure designed for Class I,
Division 2, Groups B, C, and D
• NIST traceable calibration standard to assure accuracy
• Free FT2A View™ Software available
APPLICATION
Natural gas, air, ammonia, biogas, butane, compressed air,
carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, ethane, ethylene, helium,
hydrogen, methane, nitrogen, oxygen, propane, and more
THERMAL MASS FLOW METER
FT2A SERIES
Supply Voltage 24 VDC ±10%, 85-264 VAC
50/60 Hz
Supply Watts 20 Watts DC, 12 Watts AC
Output Signal 2 isolated 4-20 mA outputs (one
f
or flow and one for temperature);
1 isolated pulse output 0-100Hz,
10V p/p for flow (can be used for
alarming)
Wiring
Two 3/4" NPT conduit connections on
sides of housing
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Communication Interface
USB Port-optional: for connection
to computer, models available with RS485-Modbus
BACnet MS/TP, Profibus-DP,
DeviceNet and Ethernet Modbus TCP
Accuracy
Flow: ±1% of reading, ±0.2% of full
scale
Temperature ±1.8°F (±1.0°C) over -40° to 250°F
(-40° to 121°C)
Repeatability ±0.2% of full scale
Mounting 1/2" MNPT pipe section to 2" MNPT
pipe section (standard inline), 3/4"
MNPT coupling, 6" length probe f
or
1-1/2" to 6" pipes (standard insertion, other lengths available)
Operating Temperature
32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Media Compatibility Standard configuration for natural
gas; other gases such as air, biogas, butane, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, nitrogen, methane, oxygen, propane, etc
. optional.
Media Temperature Range
-40° to 250°F (-40° to 121°C)
Maximum Pressure Rating
300 psig (21 bar)
Materials Of Construction
316 stainless steel sensor and flow
body
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X, designed for Class
I, Division 2, Groups B, C & D hazardous areas
Approvals
CE, FM/FMc
Weight 8.0 lb (3.6 kg) to 10.0 lb (4.5 kg)
inline models, 6.0 lb (2.7 kg)
6" insertion model
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
FM
APPROVED
USC

325. flfi 287FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Earth Ground
24V Return
+24VDC
(+)(-)()
Figure 1: Connections for 24VDC Supply
Female
“H”
“L”
L
C
2x NPT Male Thread
5.35
(13.6)
Signal
Wiring
Input
Power
3.3
(8.4)
Gas Mass Flowmeter & Temperature Transmitter
MODEL TFH1000
1.50
(3.8)
1.4
(3.5)
7.12
(18.1)
THERMAL MASS FLOW METER
FT2A SERIES
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
767 6
76
76





















$&$&
Earth Ground
AC
AC
Figure 2: Connections for Optional AC Power
767 6
76
76



















+
+
-

24V
-
4 to 20mA FLOW RATE
4 to 20mA TEMPERATURE
OR FLOW RATE
Customer PLC or DCSFT2A
+-
Figure 4: 4 to 20mA Output Wiring for Loop Po wer Provided by FT2A
767 6
76
76



















+24VDC
24VDC Return
2.4K to 10K OHM
Frequency or Alarm Output
Customer PLC or DCSFT2A
Figure 5: Frequency/Alarm Output Isolated (Recommended)
“LL”
“HH”
2x 3/4 inch NPT Female
3.9
(10.0)
7.12
(18.1)
3.2
(8.1)
FLOW L
C
Signal
Wiring
Input
Power
Gas Mass Flowmeter & Temperature Transmitter
MODEL TFH1000
767 6
76
76



















+24VDC
+24VDC
4 to 20mA FLOW RATE
4 to 20mA TEMPERATURE OR
FLOW RATE
24VDC Return
Customer PLC or DCSFT2A
24VDC Return
Figure 3: 4 to 20mA Output Wiring for Customer-Supplied Power Source

326. flfi
FLOW 288flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
THERMAL MASS FLOW METER
FT2A SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
FT2A Gas Mass Flowmeter
PROBE/BODY
05P1/2" MNPT Inline,  flow range 0-48 scfm
075P3/4" MNPT Inline,  flow range 0-120 scfm
10P1" MNPT Inline,  flow range 0-192 scfm
125P1 1/4" MNPT Inline,  flow range 0-320 scfm
15P1 1/2" MNPT Inline,  flow range 0-450 scfm
20P2" MNPT Inline,  flow range 0-750 scfm
06IEInsertion, 6" probe,  flow range (see table)
SENSOR MATERIAL
SS316 Stainless steel sensor and flowbody
SENSOR TYPE
STStandard, -40-250°F (-40-121°C)
ENCLOSURE/POWER
E1Local NEMA 4X, 24 VDC Po wer
E2Local NEMA 4X, 85-264 VAC Power
BUS OPTIONS
B0No communication bus
MBModbus, BN, BACnet, MS/TP
BDDeviceNet
BPProfiBus-DP
BEEthernet Modbu s TCP
CALIBRAT ION
G1Air, N2; max flow less than 1200 SCFM (2040 NM3H)
G2Air, N2; max flow greater than 1200 SCFM (2040 NM3H)
G3
Ar, CO2, H2, CH4, Natural Gas, O2; max flow less than 1000 SCFM 
(1700 NM3H)
G4
Ar, CO2, H2, CH4, Natural Gas, O2; max flow greater than 1000 
SCFM (1700 NM3H)
G5
CO, He, Ammonia, Propane, Digester gas; max flow less than 700 
SCFM (1190 NM3H)
G6
CO, He, Ammonia, Propane, Digester gas; max flo w greater than 700 
SCFM (1190 NM3H)
 BACnet, MS/TPBN
Example: FT2A-05P-SS-ST-E1-B0-G3; 1/2" NPT inline, 316SS, standard temp., 24 VDC power,
display/keypad, no communication, for natural gas <1000 SCFM.
NOTE: An FT2A Series Application Data form must be filled out and sent in with the purchase order. Details
regarding application and media par
ameters are required for factory calibration
. The form is located at www.kele.
com under Flow/FT2 Series/Related Products.
ACCESSORIES PAGE
102299 90° elbow mounting kit, makes housing upright in vertical pipe installations
102878 Teflon ferrule kit, for ease in removal of the insertion models
104870 USB Cable
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC Out 995
DCP
A-1.2
Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994

327. flfi 289FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 8-35 VDC
Supply Current 25 mA
Maximum Output Impedance
750Ω @ 24 VDC
Output Signal Models with standard frequency pulse,
two-wire 4-20 mA, scaled pulse, or
bi-directional (hot-tap models only)
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Conduit Connection 1/2" FNPT
Configuration A-SDI Programming software kit,
includes 20' cable
Accuracy ± 1% of flow rate
Repeatability ± 0.5%
Display One line, eight character 3/8" (.95 cm)
LCD, annunciators for rate, total, input, output
Operating Temperature
14° to 150°F (20° to 65°C)
Velocity Range 0.3 to 20 fps (.09 to 6.1 mps)
Installation Install in straight pipe section with a
minimum distance of 10 pipe diameters upstream and 5 pipe diameters downstream to any bend, obstruction or transition
Mounting
1" MNPT, mount in Thredolet
®
or pipe
saddle
Media Temperature Range
Maximum 300°F (149°C) for PEEK tip;
180°F (82°C) for PPS tip
Maximum Pressure 1000 psig (6895 kPa) for stainless steel,
600 psig (4137 kPa) for brass
Pressure Drop 0.5 psid (3.5 kPa), or less, at 10 fps
velocity
Materials Of Construction Polypropylene enclosure with Viton
®
sealed dacrylic cover, probe and sensor materials vary by model number (see ORDERING INFORMATION)
Enclosure Rating
NEMA 4X
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter SDI Series flow sensor has an integral
transmitter and is available in either brass or stainless steel.
Hot tap stainless steel models include isolation v
alve and
mounting hardware which enables flowmeter installation and removal while the piping system is pressurized; system shutdown is unnecessary
. Hot tap stainless steel models
are also a
vailable for bidirectional flow measurement
. The
impeller is rugged and non-fouling and requires no custom calibration
. The SDI Series is available with a frequency
output, analog output, or a scaled-pulse output and the display is optional; programming is done using the A301-20 Programming Kit
. Stainless steel models are available with a
PEEK (polyetheretherketone) tip for high fluid temperatures (up to 300 °F)
.
FEATURES
• Direct insertion or hot tap installation
• Fits pipe sizes 1.5" to 36"+ (3.8 to 91+ cm)
• Mounts in 1" NPT tap, weld-on or pipe saddle
• Low pressure drop
• Optional 8 character 3/8" (0.95 cm) LCD
• NEMA 4X enclosure standard
• Bidirectional models available
• Field programmable with optional software
FLOW SENSOR WITH INTEGRAL FLOW TRANSMITTER
SDI SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
SDI Series
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SDI Flo w sensor with integral transmitter
MATERIAL
0D1N Stainless steel insertion with PPS tip fo r 1.5" to 10" pipes
0D2N Stainless steel insertion with PPS tip fo r 12"" to 36" pipes
0D3N Stainless steel insertion with PPS tip fo r 36"+ pipes
1D1N Brass insertion with PPS tip fo r 1.5" to 10" pipes
1D2N Brass insertion with PPS tip fo r 12" to 36" pipes
1D3N Brass insertion with PPS tip fo r 36"+ pipes
2D1N Stainless steel insertion with PEEK tip fo r 1.5" to 10" pipes
2D2N Stainless steel insertion with PEEK tip fo r 12" to 36" pipes
2D3N Stainless steel insertion with PEEK tip fo r 36"+ pipes
0H1N Stainless steel hot tap with PPS tip for 1.5" to 10" pipes
0H2N Stainless steel hot tap with PPS tip for 12" to 36" pipes
0H3N Stainless steel hot tap with PPS tip for 36"+ pipes
2H1N Stainless steel hot tap with PEEK tip for 1.5" to 10" pipes
2H2N Stainless steel hot tap with PEEK tip for 12" to 36" pipes
2H3N Stainless steel hot tap with PEEK tip for 36"+ pipes
OUTPUT
0 Standard frequency pulse
1 4-20 mA
2 Scaled pulse
5 Bidirectional, 4-20 mA + direction (hot tap, PPS tip only)
6 Bidirectional, scaled pulse (hot tap, PPS tip only)
DISPLAY
0 No display
1 LCD option (not av ailable with output option 0)
CONSTRUCTION
0200 Viton O-ring, Carbide shaft, stainless steel
impeller, Torlon bearing (std)
1200 EPDM O-ring, Carbide shaft, stainless steel
impeller, Torlon bearing
Example: SDI2D1N11200 Flow sensor with
integral transmitter, stainless steel
insertion with PEEK tip, 4-20 mA
output, display, standard construction.
SDI 2D1N 1 1 0200
ACCESSORIES
8132030 Replacement ball valve for hot tap install
A-1027 Hot tap adapter nipple, required for hot
tap
A301-20 Flow/BTU transmitter programming kit,
Includes cable

328. flfi
FLOW 290flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
MODEL DESCRIPTION PIPE SIZE in (cm)
220B
220SS
225B
226B
226SS
228C-2
228B-2
228SS-2
250B
228PV
4000 Series
2-1/2 (6.35) and up
2-1/2 (6.35) and up
2-1/2 (6.35) and up
2-1/2 (6.35) and up
2-1/2 (6.35) and up
2 (5.08)
2 (5.08)
2 (5.08)
1/2 (1.27) , 3/4 (1.91), 1 (2.54), 1-1/4 (3.18),
1-1/2 (3.81)
1-1/2 to 4 (3.81 to 10.16) PVC
1/2 (1.27), 3/4 (1.91), 1 (2.54) PVC
Brass, insertion type
Stainless steel, insertion type
Brass, retractable with gate valve
Brass, retractable with ball valve
Stainless steel, retractable with ball valve
Brass sensor in a 2" (5.08 cm) cast iron tee
Brass sensor in a 2" (5.08 cm) brass tee
Stainless steel sensor in a 2" (5.08 cm)
stainless steel tee
Removable sensor in a cast bronze tee
Removable sensor in a PVC tee
PVC
FLOW SENSORS
200 SERIES OVERVIEW
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter 200 Series flow sensors feature a six-
bladed impeller with a proprietary nonmagnetic sensing
mechanism
. The design provides higher and more constant
torque than four-bladed impeller designs and is less prone to be fouled by waterborne debris
. The forward curve-
shape, coupled with the absence of magnetic drag, provides improved operation and repeatability at lower flow rates
. This
is especially true where the impeller is exposed to metallic or rust particles found in steel or iron pipes
. As the liquid flow
turns the impeller, a low impedance signal is transmitted with a frequency proportional to the flow rate
. This signal
can travel up to 2,000' (610m) between the sensor and the transmitter without the need for amplification
. All sensors are
supplied with 20' (6.10m) of Belden type 9320 (two-conductor
shielded) cable. Standard construction of the 200 Series
sensors consists of EPDM O-rings, tungsten carbide shaft, nylon impeller, and UHMWPE bearings
.
A complete line of flow transmitters is available for use with
these flow sensors. The 200 Series can be used for potable
water and the following pages contain details on each model.
SELECTION CHART
220B
225B
226B
250B
228 SS-2

329. flfi 291FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Connections 2" MNPT
(mount in Thredolet
®
or tee)
Wiring
20' (6.1 m) Belden 9320 two-
conductor shielded cable
Accuracy ±1% of full scale
Repeatability ±0.3% of full scale
Linearity ±0.2% of full scale
Rangeability 60:1
Velocity Range 0.5 to 30 fps (.15 to 9.0 mps)
Media Compatibility Hot water, chilled water, water/glycol,
potable water (verify application is
compatible with flow sensor materials
of construction, check material
compatibility resources prior to
ordering)
Media Temperature Range

Maximum 221°F (105°C)
Maximum Pressure 400 psig (2758 kPa) @ 100°F
(37.8°C) media temperature
Materials Of Construction
220B Standard construction is Admiralty
brass UNS C44300 sleeve, glass- reinforced nylon impeller, Pennlon
®

UHMWPE bearings, tungsten carbide shaft, glass reinforced PPS housing, and ethylene propylene EPDM o-rings (other materials available special order)
.
220SS Standard construction is 300
series stainless steel sleeve, glass- reinforced nylon impeller, Pennlon
®

UHMWPE bearings, tungsten carbide shaft, glass reinforced PPS housing, and ethylene propylene EPDM o-rings (other materials available special order)
.
Dimensions 7.1"H x 3" diameter (18.1 x 7.6 cm)
Approvals CE
Weight 4.1 lb (1.9 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The 220B (brass) and 220SS (stainless steel) flow sensors mount in a 2" NPT pipe saddle or Thredolet
®
and are used
in general flow measuring applications in metallic or PVC pipes from 2-1/2" to 40" (6
.4 to 101 cm) size. Positioning nuts
on the three threaded retaining rods allow the sensor to be accurately positioned to a standard insertion depth of 1-1/2" into the pipe
. When this insertion depth is maintained, and
there are at least 10 upstream and 5 downstream diameters of straight uninterrupted flow, an accuracy of ±1% of actual flow rate can be obtained between flow velocities of 0
.5 to
30 ft/sec. The standard 200 Series flow sensor are rated
for water temperatures to 221 °F. For higher temperature
requirements, see the SDI Series.
BRASS & STAINLESS STEEL FLOW SENSORS
220B, 220SS
SPECIFICATIONS
220B
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
220B Brass flow sensor
220SS Stainless steel flow sensor
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
310-00 Programmable analog flow transmitter 296
UFT-1A Universal flow transmitter, pulse and calibrated 4-20 mA output 297
ACCESSORIES
230-FRK Repair kit for 200 Series flow sensors (includes impeller, shaft, bearing, and O-ring)
2X2.5-3THD 2" Thredolet
®
for 2-1/2" and 3" pipes
2X4-6THD
2" Thredolet
®
for 4", 5" and 6" pipes

2X8-36THD 2" Thredolet
®
for 8" to 36" pipes

330. flfi
FLOW 292flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Connections 2" MNPT
Wiring 20' (6.1 m) two-conductor 20 AWG U.L.
T
ype PTLC shielded cable
Accuracy
±1% of full scale
Repeatability ±0.3% of full scale
Linearity ±0.2% of full scale
Rangeability 60:1
Velocity Range 0.5 to 30 fps (.15 to 9.0 mps)
Media Compatibility Hot water, chilled water, water/glycol,
potable water (verify application is
compatible with flow sensor materials of
construction, check material compatibility
resources prior to ordering)
Media Temperature Range
Maximum 221°F (105°C)
Maximum Pressure
225B 300 psig (2069 kPa) @ 100°F (37.8°C)
media temperature
226B, 226SS 400 psig (2758 kPa) @ 100°F (37.8°C)
media temperature
Materials Of Construction
225B, 226B Standard construction is Admiralty brass
UNS C44300 sleeve, glass-reinforced nylon impeller, Pennlon
® UHMWPE
bearings, tungsten carbide shaft, glass reinforced PPS housing, and ethylene propylene EPDM o-rings (other materials available special order)
.
226SS Standard construction is 300 series
stainless steel sleeve, glass-reinforced nylon impeller, Pennlon
® UHMWPE
bearings, tungsten carbide shaft, glass reinforced PPS housing, and ethylene propylene EPDM o-rings (other materials available special order)
.
Dimensions 18"H x 3" diameter (46 x 7.6 cm) plus
valve handle
Approvals CE
Weight
225B 17.5 lb (7.9 kg)
226B, 226SS 13.0 lb (5.9 kg)
HTT 12.0 lb (5.4 kg)
Warranty 1 year
HOT TAP FLOW SENSORS
225B, 226B, 226SS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter 225B, 226B, 226SS Series hot
tap flow sensors feature an elongated sensor, special
mounting adapter, pipe nipple, and isolation valve to
allow the nonmagnetic impeller sensor to be installed
into a pressurized pipe while the pipe is in service
. This is
accomplished by first attaching a 2'' saddle or Thredolet® onto the pipe and screwing the nipple and isolation valve into the saddle or fitting
. A hole is then drilled through the pipe
using a commercial tapping machine. When complete, the
tapping apparatus is removed, the isolation valve is closed, and the sensor is installed
. The 225B, 226B, 226SS Series
can be used for pipe sizes 2-1/2" to 40" (6.4 to 101 cm).
The hot tap flow sensor is also recommended for any
application where it would be difficult to shut down or drain the pipeline to remove the sensor for service
. The overall
length of the sensor tube is 18" (46 cm); however, a clearance height of 36" (91 cm) should be allowed for the fully extended length of the insertion tool
.
SPECIFICATIONS
Model HTT
MODEL DESCRIPTION
225B Brass hot tap flow sensor with gate-type isolation valve
226B Brass hot tap flow sensor with ball-type isolation valve
226SS Stainless steel hot tap flow sensor with ball-type isolation valve
ACCESSORIES
230-FRK Repair kit for 200 Series flow sensors (includes impeller, shaft, bearing, and O-ring)
2X2.5-3THD 2" Thredolet
® for 2-1/2" and 3" pipes
2X4-6THD 2" Thredolet
® for 4", 5" and 6" pipes
2X8-36THD 2" Thredolet
® for 8" to 36" pipes
813144-1211 Replacement sleeve assembly for 225B, 226B flow sensors
HTT Hot tap tool
81873 Replacement gate valve for 225B, 2"
Model 225B
Model 226B
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
310-00 Programmable analog flow transmitter 296
UFT-1A Universal flow transmitter, pulse and calibrated 4-20 mA output 297

331. flfi 293FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Connection Type
228B 2" solder
228C, 228SS 2" FNPT
Wiring 20' (6.1 m) 2-conductor 20 AWG shielded
UL type PTLC wire, rated to 221°F
(105°C). May be extended to 2000’
maximum with similar cable
Accuracy ±1% of full scale
Repeatability ±0.3% of full scale
Linearity ±0.2% of full scale
Velocity Range 0.5 to 30 fps (.15 to 9.0 mps)
Media Compatibility Hot water, chilled water, water/glycol,
potable water (verify application is compatible with flow sensor materials of construction, check material compatibility resources prior to ordering)
Media Temperature Range
Maximum 221°F (105°C)
Maximum Pressure
228B 200 psig (1379 kPa) @ 100°F (37.8°C)
media temperature
228C 175 psig (1207 kPa) @ 100°F (37.8°C)
media temperature
228SS 400 psig (2758 kPa) @ 100°F (37.8°C)
media temperature
Materials Of Construction
228B Standard construction is cast bronze tee
(Class 125 per ASME B16.15), copper
couplings, admiralty brass UNS C44300 sleeve, glass-reinforced nylon impeller,
Pennlon
® UHMWPE bearings, tungsten
carbide shaft, glass reinforced PPS housing, and ethylene propylene EPDM o-rings (other materials available special order)
.
228C Standard construction is cast iron tee
(class 125 per ASME B16.4), admiralty
brass UNS C44300 sleeve, glass- reinforced nylon impeller, Pennlon
®
UHMWPE bearings, tungsten carbide shaft, glass reinforced PPS housing, and ethylene propylene EPDM o-rings (other materials available special order)
.
228SS Standard construction is 316 stainless
steel tee, 300 series SS sleeve, glass- reinforced nylon impeller, Pennlon
®

UHMWPE bearings, tungsten carbide shaft, glass reinforced PPS housing, and ethylene propylene EPDM o-rings (other materials available special order)
.
Dimensions 8.4"H x 7.9"W x 3.0"D
(21.3 x 20.0 x 7.6 cm)
Approvals CE
Weight
228B 8.8 (4.0 kg)
228C 7.2 lb (3.3 kg)
228SS 12.0 lb (5.4 kg)
Warranty 1 year
TEE-MOUNTED FLOW SENSORS
228B, 228C, 228SS
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter 228B is a brass flow sensor mounted in a 2" bronze tee with 2" copper solder couplings included, the 228C is a brass flow sensor mounted in a 2" cast iron tee, and the 228SS is a stainless steel flow sensor mounted in a 2" stainless steel tee
.
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
228B-2 Brass flow sensor mounted in a 2" (5.08 cm) bronze tee (copper solder couplings included)
228C-2 Brass flow sensor mounted in a 2" (5.08 cm) cast iron pipe tee
228SS-2 Stainless steel flow sensor mounted in a 2" (5.08 cm) stainless steel pipe tee
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
310-00 Programmable analog flow transmitter 296
UFT-1A Universal flow transmitter, pulse and calibrated 4-20 mA output 297
ACCESSORIES
230-FRK Repair kit for 200 Series flow sensors (includes impeller, shaft, bearing, and O-ring)
813124-1211 Replacement sleeve assembly for 220B, 228B, 228BC flow sensors
228 SS-2

332. flfi
FLOW 294flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Connection Type 1/2" FNPT to 1-1/2" FNPT
Wiring 20' (6.1 m) 2-conductor 20 AWG
shielded UL type PTLC wire, rated to
221°F (105°C). May be extended to
2000' maximum with similar cable
Accuracy ±1% of full scale
Repeatability ±0.7% of full scale
Linearity ±0.7% of full scale
Rangeability 60:1
Velocity Range 0.3 to 15 fps (.09 to 4.5 mps)
Media Compatibility Hot water, chilled water, water/glycol,
potable water (verify application is compatible with flow sensor materials of construction, check material compatibility resources prior to ordering)
Media Temperature Range

Maximum 221°F (105°C)
Maximum Pressure 400 psig (2758 kPa) @ 100°F
(37.8°C) media temperature
Materials Of Construction
Cast bronze UNS C83600 tee, glass-
reinforced nylon impeller, Pennlon
®

UHMWPE bearings, tungsten carbide shaft, glass reinforced PPS housing, and ethylene propylene EPDM o-rings
Dimensions
250B-0.5, -0.75 4.6"H x 4.0"W x 1.6"D
(11.7 x 10.2 x 4.1 cm)
250B-1 4.8"H x 5.5"W x 2.1"D
(12.2 x 14.0 x 5.3 cm)
250B-1.25 5.0"H x 6.1"W x 2.4"D
(12.7 x 15.5 x 6.1 cm)
250B-1.5 5.2"H x 6.5"W x 2.6"D
(13.2 x 16.5 x 6.6 cm)
Approvals CE
Weight
250B-0.5 4.6 lb (2.1 kg)
250B-0.75 4.8 lb (2.2 kg)
250B-1 6.2 lb (2.8 kg)
250B-1.25 6.5 lb (2.9 kg)
250B-1.5 7.6 lb (3.4 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter 250B Series flow sensors consist of a removable flow sensor mounted in a cast bronze housing
.
The
y are available for 1/2'' to 1-1/2'' (1
.3 to 3.8 cm) pipe sizes.
TEE MOUNTED FLOW SENSOR
250B
SPECIFICATIONS
250B-0.5
MODEL DESCRIPTION
250B-0.5 Brass flow sensor mounted in a 1/2" (1.3 cm) NPT bronze pipe tee
250B-0.75 Brass flow sensor mounted in a 3/4" (1.9 cm) NPT bronze pipe tee
250B-1 Brass flow sensor mounted in a 1" (2.5 cm) NPT bronze pipe tee
250B-1.25 Brass flow sensor mounted in a 1-1/4" (3.2 cm) NPT bronze pipe tee
250B-1.5 Brass flow sensor mounted in a 1-1/2" (3.8 cm) NPT bronze pipe tee
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
310-00 Programmable analog flow transmitter 296
813107-1211 Replacement sensor assembly for 250B, includes 20' cable
UFT-1A Universal flow transmitter, pulse and calibrated 4-20 mA output 297

333. flfi 295FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Connection Type Schedule 80 PVC
Wiring 20' (6.1 m), 20 AWG two-conductor
shielded UL type PTLC cable, rated
to 221°F (105°C), may be extended
to 2000' maximum with similar cable
Accuracy
±1% of full scale
Repeatability ±0.3% of full scale
Linearity ±0.2% of full scale
Pulse Rate 3.2 to 200 Hz, 5 ms ±25% width,
9-20 VDC power @ 2 mA maximum; 5V CMOS and LSTTL compatible
Velocity Range
0.5 to 30 fps (0.15 to 9 mps)
Media Compatibility Hot water, chilled water (verify
application is compatible with flow sensor materials of construction, check material compatibility resources prior to ordering)
Media Temperature Range

Maximum 140°F (60°C)
Maximum Pressure 100 psig (689 kPa) @ 77°F (25°C)
media temperature, decreasing to 40 psig (276 kPa) @ 140°F (60°C)
Materials Of Construction

PVC per ASTM D-2462 and D-2467 virgin unplasticiz
ed PVC resin,
approved for potable water, PPS housing, EPDM o-ring, tungsten shaft, nylon impeller, Pennlon bearings
Dimensions
228PV1505 5.2"H x 5.0"W x 2.4"D
(13.1 x 12.7 x 6.0 cm)
228PV2005 5.6"H x 5.6"W x 2.9"D
(14.3 x 14.3 x 7.3 cm)
228PV3005 6.8"H x 6.5"W x 4.2"D
(17.3 x 16.5 x 10.7 cm)
228PV4005 6.8"H x 7.4"W x 5.4"D
(17.3 x 18.7 x 13.7 cm)
Approvals CE
Weight
228PV1505 1.0 lb (.45 kg)
228PV2005 1.0 lb (.45 kg)
228PV3005 1.5 lb (.68 kg)
228PV4005 2.5 lb (1.1 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter 228PV flow sensors are designed to measure water flow in PVC pipes
. These sensors consist of
a removable, nonmagnetic sensor in a schedule 80 PVC tee with solvent-weld socket end connections
. They are available
in 1-1/2" to 4" (3.8 to 10.2 cm) sizes.
PVC TEE FLOW SENSORS
228PV SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
228PV
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
228PV1505-1211 Flow sensor in 1-1/2" PVC tee, pulse output
228PV2005-1211 Flow sensor in 2" PVC tee, pulse output
228PV3005-1211 Flow sensor in 3" PVC tee, pulse output
228PV4005-1211 Flow sensor in 4" PVC tee, pulse output
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
UFT-1A Universal flow transmitter, pulse and calibrated 4-20 mA output 297

334. flfi
FLOW 296flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage Loop powered, 9-35 VDC
Input Signal 0.4 to 10 kHz, unscaled raw pulses from
Data Industrial flow sensor, or sine wave
Output Signal 4-20 mA, 2-wire
Maximum Output
Impedance 750Ω @ 24 VDC
Configuration A301-20 programming kit (order
separately) cable connects to DIC communication port and DB9 COM port on a computer
. Transmitter must be loop-
powered for programming (9-24 VDC will work)
Accuracy
±0.04% of reading over entire span
Response Time Varies with filter, typically 1 second
10% to 90% step response
Operating Temperature -20° to 158°F (-29° to 70°C)
Mounting
310-00 Surface mount, transmitter only
310-01 Surface mount, in NEMA 4X enclosure
310-02 Surface mount, in metal enclosure
310-03 Surface mount, in plastic enclosure
310-04 DIN rail mount, with clips
Dimensions
310-00, -04 1.8"H x 3.7"W x 1.5"D
(4.4 x 9.3 x 3.8 cm)
310-01, -02, -03 2.8"H x 4.5"W x 2.0"D
(7.1 x 11.3 x 5.1 cm)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter 310 Series programmable analog flow transmitter is a loop-powered device that converts the signal from a 200 or 4000 Series flow sensor into a linear 4-20 mA signal
. An integral, adjustable electronic filter
dampens the analog output for smooth, stable operation.
The microprocessor-based
310 Series can be ordered pre-
configured, or it can be field-configured with a computer
.
An A301-20 Prog
ramming Kit will configure all 310 Series
transmitters
.
FEATURES
• 4-20 mA loop powered
• Compact size
• Computer programmable
• Electronic signal dampening
4-20 mA loop (-)
4-20 mA loop (+)
Shield Ground
Signal (-)
Signal (+)
Power (4000 only)
Sensor Inputs
24 VDC
Power
Supply
+
_
+
_
Model 310
200 Series
Flow Sensor
NOTE: Call Kele for
4000 Series wiring.
Calibration
Port
Shield (if applicable)
(black)
(red)
FLOW
4-20 mA
Signal
WIRING
PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG FLOW TRANSMITTER
310 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
310-00
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION 310 Programmable analog flow transmitter
MOUNTING
00 Transmitter only
01 Transmitter in NEMA 4X enclosure
02 Transmitter in metal enclosure
03 Transmitter in plastic enclosure
04 Transmitter with DIN rail mount
OPTIONS
XR Pre-configured option

310
For preconfigured flow sensors, specify pipe size, schedule,
and maximum flow rate at time of order.
Example: 310-00-XR Preconfigured programmable
analog flow transmitter for field mounting
00 XR
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
A301-20 Flow/BTU transmitter programming kit, includes cable
200 Series Data Industrial impeller type flow sensors with pulse output 290

335. flfi 297FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Pulse
out +
Pulse
out
Pulse
out –
mA signal
out
XDCR
signal in
24 VDC
power
Common
XDCR
Sig in
24 VDC
power supply
Flow
sensor
Transducer power option jumper
(Leave on for Data Industrial flow sensors.
Remove for devices with their own power supply.)
Typical
totalizer
hookup
4-20 mA
Output
+
+
+
+
–
–
–
–
Totalize
Power
Output pulse divider selection jumper (10 or 100)
(red)
(black)
PWR
100
10
Supply Voltage 24 VDC
Input Signal 15 to150 Hz FS, dry or electric contact
Maximum Output Impedance
750Ω @ 24 VDC
Output Signal
UFT-1 Solid state switch;
UFT-1A 4-20 mA
Pulse Output 40 VDC @ 200 mA
Configuration Factory configure only; provide pipe size/
schedule and maximum flow rate at time
of order
Accuracy ± 0.5%
Response Time 5 seconds from 10% to 90%
Operating Temperature 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 90% RH non-condensing
Mounting
UFT-1, -1A Snap track
UFT-1E, -1AE Surface mount, enclosed
Approvals RoHS
Warranty 18 months
UNIVERSAL FLOW TRANSMITTER
UFT-1 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele UFT-1 Series universal flow transmitter is a solid-
state, digital signal converter designed to operate with Data
Industrial 200 Series flow sensors
. Both analog (4-20 mA)
and pulse outputs are a
vailable
. The UFT-1 may be mounted
in an optional NEMA 4X enclosure or with digital display of gpm or totalized flow (in a non-watertight enclosure)
.
FEATURES
• Analog and pulse outputs
• Optional watertight (NEMA 4X) enclosure
• Optional displays for flow rate and totalization
• Excitation voltage for flow sensors
• LED indication of pulse activity
APPLICATION
ANALOG OUTPUT (RATE) The UFT-1 analog transmitter converts a Data Industrial digital flow signal into a precalibrated 4-20 mA signal
. It must be calibrated for
each Data Industrial flow sensor installation. The pipe type, size, and
maximum flow rate must be specified at the time of order if 4-20 mA output is to be used
.
PULSE OUTPUT (TOTALIZATION)
The UFT-1 pulse output divides the Data Industrial digital flow signal by a jumper-selectable 10 or 100 to provide a more usable digital pulse
. The pulse output is normally used where flow totalization is
required. A simple conversion formula (using the flow factors for Data
Industrial Flow Sensors on the next page) can convert the digital pulses to totalized gallons
.
The pulse output is an optoisolated transistor switch that can be
wired to source or sink pulses to totalizer equipment.
NOTE: The UFT-1 Series is not intended for field setup or field
calibration.
OPERATION
INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION The UFT-1 transmitter can be mounted in any position
. NEMA 4X
enclosed models ha
ve a watertight seal; when a display option is
selected, however, the enclosure becomes non-watertight
. Field
calibr
ation is not required with the UFT-1 and flow conversion must
be accomplished at the monitoring computer
. The information below
is provided for making the conversion calculations.
FLOW RATE
Flow (gpm) = ((mA measured - 4 mA) x Maximum gpm)/16 mA.
Maximum gpm is the flow rate at 20 mA output on the transmitter
and must be specified at the time the UFT-1 is ordered for proper calibration
.
TOTALIZED FLOW
Totalized gallons = (Flow factor) x (Output divider) x (Total pulses) For totalized m3, multiply the above by 0
.00379.
Output divider = 10 or 100 depending on jumper-selection. Flow
factors per pulse are shown in Table 1.
SPECIFICATIONS
UFT-1
WIRING
UFT-1E-1

336. flfi
FLOW 298flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
FLOW FACTORS FOR DATA INDUSTRIAL FLOW
SENSORS
ORDERING INFORMATION
Pulse
out +
Pulse
out –
mA signal
out
XDCR
signal in
24 VDC
power
Common
3 .25
(8 .25)
2 .19
(5 .56)
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS
Pipe size, schedule, and
maximum flow rate must be
specified at time of order.
When a UFT-1AE3 is ordered
the UFT-1A will be in one enclosure
and the totalizer and rate display
will be in a separate enclosure.
UFT-1
Example: UFT-1A-E-2 Basic transmitter with calibrated 4-20 mA flow rate
output (4 mA = no flow; 20 mA = max flow), enclosed with LCD
flow rate indication
1
*
**MODEL DESCRIPTION
UFT-1 Universal flow transmitter pulse output only
UFT-1A Universal flow transmitter with pulse and calibrated 4-20 mA output*
UFT-1E Universal flow transmitter pulse output in NEMA 4X enclosure
UFT-1AE Universal flow transmitter with pulse and calibrated 4-20 mA output* in NEMA 4X enclosure
DISPLAY OPTION (enclosed models onl y, enclosure changes to non-watertight)
1 Flow totalization only
2 Flow rate only
3 Flow totalization and flow rate**
,

UNIVERSAL FLOW TRANSMITTER
UFT-1 SERIES
MODEL PIPE SIZE FLOW GALLONS/PULSE
in (cm) FACTOR JUMPER IN JUMPER IN
10 POSITION 100 POSITION
228PV-1.5 1-1/2 (3.81) 0.03118 0.3118 3.118
228PV-2 2 (5.08) 0.04611 0.4611 4.611
228B-2 2 (5.08) 0.04579 0.4579 4.579
228C-2 2 (5.08) 0.04731 0.4731 4.731
250B-0.5 1/2 (1.27) 0.005646 0.05646 0.5646
250B-0.75 3/4 (1.91) 0.007514 0.07514 0.7514
250B-1 1 (2.54) 0.007015 0.07015 0.7015
250B-1.25 1-1/4 (3.18) 0.01280 0.1280 1.280
250B-1.5 1-1/2 (3.81) 0.01780 0.1780 1.780
220B-2.5 2-1/2 (6.35) 0.03800 0.3800 3.800
220B 3 (7.62) 0.07280 0.7280 7.280 220B 4 (10.16) 0.1396 1.396 13.96 220B 5 (12.7) 0.2457 2.457 24.57
220B 6 (15.24) 0.3611 3.611 36.11 220B 8 (20.32) 0.6710 6.710 67.10
220B 10 (25.40) 1.080 10.80 108.0
220B 12 (30.48) 1.630 16.30 163.0
220B 14 (35.56) 1.944 19.44 194.4
220B 16 (40.64) 2.502 25.02 250.2 220B 18 (45.72) 3.158 31.58 315.8
Notes
1. Flow factors for a Model 225 and 226 are the same as Model 220.
* 2. Flow factor for Model 228S is the same as 228C.
3. PV Series is sized for schedule 80 PVC pipe .
All other series are sized for schedule 40 black iron pipe.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
200 Series Data Industrial impeller type flow sensors with pulse output 290
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

337. flfi 299FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 8 to 28 VAC, 5 VA; 8-35 VDC,
280 mA
Input Data Industrial flow sensor or other
frequency (sine/pulse) device
Sensor Input Two 2-wire 10 kΩ type II thermistors
or 100Ω 3-wire platinum RTDs or
field-defined custom temperature
inputs
Maximum Output Impedance

1 kΩ @ 24 VDC
Output Solid state pulse output rated at 1A
@ 30 VAC or 35 VDC; closed 0.5Ω
@ 1A; open >10 MΩ
Relay Output Relay and pulse output are fully
functional as either totalizing or setpoint outputs
Relay Output Rating
5A @ 120 VAC or 30 VDC resistive;
1A @ 120 VAC or 30 VDC inductive
Analog Output 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA (isolated, sinking
or sourcing);
loop powered (sinking)
30 VDC @ 0 mA maximum, 3 VDC @ 20 mA minimum; self powered (sourcing) 600Ω maximum load
Pulse Rate
1 pulse per 1.0000000 to 99999999
units; any predefined or custom unit can be used for flow or BTU totalizing; contact time 1 to 9999 milliseconds
Setpoints
Setpoint alarm for flow rate, BTU
rate, Temp1, Temp2, DeltaT using
any predefined or custom unit
Zero Adjustments Compensation for variances between
input sensors by adjusting T2 to match T1
Communication Interface

USB 2.0A to mini-B 5-pin cable
required, provides access to all programming and operation features
Communication Protocol

RS485 supports Modbus and
BACnet/MSTP
Display Backlit LCD, 16 characters/line,
0.31"H (0.79 cm), two lines
Engineering Units Flow and Total in gal, liters, ft3,
acre-ft, or bbl; Energy rate kBTU/ hr, BTU/min, KW, Tons, J/sec or field-programmed custom; energy total units can be MBTU, kBTU, kWh, MWh, kJ, or field-programmed custom
Operating Temperature
-4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X
Approvals

CE
Weight
Panel mount 0.8 lb (0.34 kg)
Wall mount 1.2 lb (0.54 kg)
Warranty 1 year
FLOW AND ENGERY MONITOR
3000, 3050 SERIES
FEATURES
• Men
programming
• NEMA 4X rated enclosure
• Two-line x 16-character display
SPECIFICATIONS
3050-1-0
• Password-restricted access
• Non-volatile memory
• Temperature sensor zeroing
OPTIONAL FEATURES
An analog 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA output is optional and USB,
RS-485 Modbus, and BACnet/MSTP provide high-level
communication
. A two-line by 16-character, 3/8" high backlit
LCD display is configured by the user to display flow rate and flow total
. Custom units can be created during field setup. The
flow sensor input features flexible scaling options and signal type selections that permit the use of most Data Industrial meter sensors, or other frequency (sine/pulse) or linear devices
. Matched 10 kΩ thermistors (ordered separately)
provide temperature differential for BTU calculations.
One mechanical relay and one solid state relay output
Optional 0/4-20 mA output USB, RS-485, Modbus, and BACnet/MSTP all in one unit
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter 3000 and 3050 Series flow and energy
monitors are economical, full-featured, compact units
designed for flow and BTU measurement applications
. Outputs
include one mechanical rela
y and one solid state pulse output,
both featuring unit/pulse and set-point control independently based on flow or total readings.

338. flfi
FLOW 300flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Data
Industrial
®
3.78"
96 mm
3.78"
96 mm
3.23"
82 mm
3.49"
88.7 mm
3.49"
88.7 mmSIDE
TOP
2.21"
56 mm
3.57"-3.60"
90.6 mm-91.4 mm
3.57"-3.60"
90.6 mm-91.4 mm
PANEL
CUTOUT
Data
Industrial
®
SIDE
4.33"
110 mm
3.54"
90 mm
4.80"
122 mm
4.72"
120 mm
3.62"
92 mm
MOUNTING TEMPLATE
1/8"
3.2 mm
(4 PLACES)
Series 3050
Series 3050
J8-3 Shield
J8-4 Sensor Power
200 Series
Flow Sensor
10 K Type II
Thermistor
10 K Type II
Thermistor
J8-2 GND
J8-1 Sensor IN
J6-3 Shield
J6-2 Analog IN-
J6-1 Analog IN+
J17-1 Temp 2 IN+
J17-2 Temp 2 IN-
J17-3 GND
J1-4 Shield
J1-3 Temp GND
J1-2 Temp 1 IN-
J1-1 Temp 1 IN+ J14-1 Relay 1 NO
Badger 3050 BTU Monitor
J10-3 RS485 Iso GND
J9-3 GND
J9-2 Loop-
J9-1 Loop+
J10-2 RS485 B
J10-1 RS485 A
J12-4 N/C
J12-5 Shield
J12-3 USB Data+
J12-2 USB Data-
J12-1 USB Power
J14-2 Relay 1 NC
J14-3 Relay 1 COM
J13-1 Relay 1 OUT
J13-2 Relay 2 OUT
DC
Power
Pulse
Counter
24 VDC
Supply
4-20 mA
USB
Connection
(red)
(black)
bare wire
J1-3 ACL/DC +
J1-2 ACC/DC -
J1-1 Earth
12-24 VDC/VAC
Power Supply
WIRING
FLOW AND ENGERY MONITOR
3000, 3050 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
3000
3050
0
1
0
1
Flow meter with display
BTU monitor with display
ANALOG OUTPUTS
Wall mount
No analog output
Analog output, RS485 (BACnet/Modbus), and USB
MOUNTING
Panel mount
DESCRIPTIONMODEL
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
200 Series Data Industrial impeller type flow sensors with pulse output 290
ST
-U24B-XP
Temperature sensors, matched ±0.1°F, brass wells
ST-U24S-XP Temperature sensors, matched ±0.1°F, stainless steel wells

339. flfi 301FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 11 to 30 VDC
Frequency 0-1000 Hz for Turbine output (non-
ground referenced AC and 100 mV
pp minimum), switch selectable; 5
VDC pp ground-referenced square
wave for TTL output
Supply Current
0.25 A
Maximum Output Impedance
900Ω maximum for 4-20 mA output;
source power can share common with power supply
Outputs
4-20 mA and Turbine or TTL
Conduit Opening 1/2" conduit knockout (7/8" hole, 2.2
cm)
Cable Length Remote transducer models available
with 20' (6.1m), 50' (15m), or 100'
(30m) cables
Accuracy ± 1.0% of reading above 1 fps (0.3
mps) velocity, ± 0.01% of reading
below 1 fps (0.3 mps)
Response Time 0.3 to 30 seconds, adjustable
Display Two-line x eight-character LCD
Operating Temperature -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C); remote
DTTS/DTTN transducers have upper limit of 250°F (121°C) and high temperature DTTH transducers have upper limit of 400°F (200°C)
Velocity Range
0.1 to 40 fps (feet/second), 0.03
to 12.4 mps (meters/second),
bi-directional
Pipe Size Range 1/2" to 100" (1.2 to 254 cm)
Media Compatibility Most clean liquids or liquids with
some suspended solids or aer
ation,
not recommended for glycol solutions, not for steam; for water/ glycol systems the DE Series is recommended
Enclosure Rating
NEMA 4X as long as a liquid-tight
connector is used
Approvals ANSI/ISA 582.01;
CSA C22.2 No. 213, E79-15-95
Warranty 1 year
ULTRASONIC FLOWMETER
DTFXL SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Dynasonics DTFXL Series ultrasonic flow meter measures water flow in a wide variety of pipe sizes and pipe materials, using clamp-on sensors that attach to the outside of the pipe
. This non-invasive, non-contact flow
meter provides instantaneous flow rate and accumulated flow and provides a 4-20 mA output as well as pulse outputs
.
The
DTFXL Series flow meter is easy to install, has a large
bidirectional flow range, and comes with or without a display
.
Configur
ation, monitoring, and calibration of the DTXFL is
accomplished with an easy-to-use software package via a cable connection from a PC to the flow meter.
For systems using water/glycol solutions, the higher-powered
DB Series ultrasonic flow meter may perform better.
FEATURES
• T •
Can handle some suspended solids and gas pockets
• Bidirectional flow range for changeover systems
• Multiple totalizers for forward, reverse, net
• Models with or without display
• Selectable standard or metric engineering units
• Non-invasive, no system down time to install
• 4-20 mA output plus choice of pulse outputs
• Optional armored cable
• High temperature transducers available
APPLICATION
The DTFXL Series is available in 3 basic transmitter/ transducer arrangements for installation and application flexibility
.
Models with integral transducers are available for pipe sizes
1/2" to 2"; the transmitter is attached to the transducers which clamp on to the pipe for a local mount arrangement
.
Models with remote small pipe (1/2" to 2") clamp-on tr
ansducers require the transmitter to be wall- or panel-
mounted away from the pipe.
Models with remote large pipe (2-1/2" to 100") strap-on
transducers also require the transmitter to be wall or panel- mounted away from the pipe
.
Transmitters are available with or without display.
SPECIFICATIONS
DTFXL4-AN1-NN

340. flfi
FLOW 302flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
in (mm)
TRANSIT TIME FLOWMETER
6.66
(169.2)
3.17
(80.5)
2.57
(65.3)
B
C
0.875 (22.2)
diameter
conduit hole
A
D
+
+–
4-20 mA output
Turbine or TTL output
Note: Power ground and
4-20 mA common are
connected internally.
Note: Integral model transmitters have conduit knockout connection on the right
side of the enclosure. Remote models have two conduit holes on the bottom
side of the enclosure.
PC cable
connection
Turbine or TTL Pulse
Upstream (red)
Upstream (black)
Downstream (black)
Downstream red)
4-20 mA
24 VDC
power
supply
Power
Transducer
connections
–
+
–
+
–
ULTRASONIC FLOWMETER
DTFXL SERIES
WIRING DIMENSIONS- INTEGRAL MODELS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DTFXL1 Transmitter without display
DTFXL2 Transmitter with display
DTFXL3 Transmitter without display, UL enclosure
DTFXL4 Transmitter with display, UL enclosure
PIPE SIZE
A 1/2" ANSI carbon steel
B 3/4" ANSI carbon steel
C 1" ANSI carbon steel
D 1 1/4" ANSI carbon steel
E 1 1/2" ANSI carbon steel
F 2" ANSI carbon steel
G 1/2" copper
H 3/4" copper
I 1" copper
J 1 1/4" copper
K 1 1/2" copper
L 2" copper
M 1/2" tubing (plastic)
N 3/4" tubing (plastic)
P 1" tubing (plastic)
Q 1 1/4" tubing (plastic)
R 1 1/2" tubing (plastic)
S 2" tubing
X For DTTN, DTTH transducers
CONNECTOR OPTIONS
N1/2" conduit knockout
OUTPUT SIGNALS
1-NN4-20 mA and pulse
Remote transducers for small pipes (with “Y” pipe size)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DTTS Remote transducers for 1/2" to 2" pipes
PIPE SIZE
D1/2"
F3/4"
G1"
H1 1/4"
J1 1/2"
L2"
PIPE TYPE
PANSI carbon steel
CCopper
TTubing
CABLE LENGTH
02020 feet (6.1 m)
05050 feet (15 m)
100100 feet (30 m)
CABLE ARMOR OPTION
NNo armor
AFlexible armor
CABLE ARMOR LENGTH
000No armor
02020 feet (6.1 m)
05050 feet (15 m)
100100 feet (30 m)
Remote transducers for large pipes (with “X” pipe size)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CABLE LENGTH
02020 feet (6.1 m)
05050 feet (15 m)
100100 feet (30 m)
CABLE ARMOR OPTION
NNo armor
AFlexible armor
CABLE ARMOR LENGTH
000No armor
02020 feet (6.1 m)
05050 feet (15 m)
100100 feet (30 m)
OPTIONS
NNormal area rating
DTTN Standard transducer for 2 1/2" to 20" pipes
DTTH High temperature transducer for 2 1/2" to 100" pipes
YFor DTTS, DTTC transducers
DTTC High Temperature transducer for 1/2” to 2” pipes
NOTE: Add -C suffix to transmitter model
number for factory-configured transmitter and fill
out the application data sheet located on Kele's
website
. The UltraLink software is required to
reset the DTFXL totalizer and to field configure, monitor, and diagnose the DTFXL
. The PC cable
is required to connect a PC to the DTFXL and the software is available on CD or free from www
.dynasonics.com.
Dimensions A, B, C and D vary by pipe size, the D dimension being slightly larger than the outside diameter of the pipe.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
D002-2007-001 Additional 36" stainless straps for DTTN/H transducers
(two straps included standard with remote transducers)
D005-0803-104 UltraLink software CD
D005-2116-004 USB to DB-9 Serial Communications Cable
D010-0204-001 PC to transmitter cable
D010-2102-010 Mounting track assembly for DTTN/DTTH transducers, for <10" pipes
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994

341. flfi 303FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 85-265 VAC (45-65 Hz)
Supply Watts 15 W
Digital Inputs Maximum 30 VDC, programmable as
positive zero return, external totalizer
reset, or preset batch start
Maximum Output
Impedance
800 ohms @ 24 VDC
Outputs
Analog output 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-10 mA, or 2-10 mA
Digital outputs Four configurable, 24 VDC sourcing
outputs (maximum of two) 50 mA each or 100 mA total, sinking open collector outputs (maximum of four) 100 mA each or 30 VDC total, AC solid state relay (maximum of two) 48 VAC

500 mA maximum
Pulse outputs Scalable up to 10 kHz, passive open
collector up to 10 kHz active switched 24 VDC, up to two outputs (forward and reverse flow), pulse width programmable from 1 to 1,000 ms or 50% duty cycle
Frequency output
Scaleable up to 10 kHz open collector,
up to 1 kHz solid state relay
Alarm High/low flow alarm, error alarm, empty
pipe alarm outputs
Wiring Terminations 1/2" NPT conduit connection and 3
cord g
rips on amplifier housing; 30 ft
.
standard length cab
le for remote mount
configurations (other lengths available)
Communication
RS232 - Modbus RTU or remote display
Accuracy ±0.25% of flow rate for velocities
greater than 1.64 fps (0.5 mps;
±0.004% for lower velocities
Repeatability ±0.1%
Display Backlit, 4 line, 20 character LCD and
3-button progamming keys
Engineering Units Ounces, pounds, liters, US gallons,
imperial gallons, barrels, hectoliters, megagallons, cubic meters, cubic feet, acre feet
Pipe Size Range
1" to 24" standard (1/4", 1/2" and 28"
to 54" also a
vailable), ANSI 150 RF
flanges standard
Flow Range
Unidirectional or bidirectional with two
separate totalizers (programmable)
Velocity Range 0.10 to 39.4 fps (0.03 to 12 mps)
Operating Temperature -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity Up to 90% non-condensing
Media Compatibility Many fluid applications including hot or
chilled water, glycol solutions; minimum conductivity 5
.0 µΩ/cm
Media Temperature Range
178°F (80°C) with rubber liner; 212°F
(100°C) with PTFE liner and local mount amp; 311°F (155°C) with PTFE liner and remote mount amp
Maximum Pressure
285 psig at ambient temperature, refer
to ANSI B16.5 standard for 150 lb RF
flanges for temperature/pressure spec
Materials Of Construction
Meter housing and flanges: carbon steel
Liner: Rubber
Electrodes: Alloy C
Pipe spool: 316 SS
Grounding rings: stainless steel
Amplifier housing: cast aluminum with
powder-coat paint
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X (IP66) amplifier housing;
NEMA 4X or NEMA 6P detector housing junction box for remote mount configuration
Approvals
NSF Listed, CE
Warranty 1 year
MAGNETIC FLOW METER
M-2000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter M-2000 Series magnetic flow
meter is the result of years of research and field use in
electromagnetic flow meters
. The M-2000 can measure
almost any liquid, slurry or paste that has minimum electrical conductivity
. These meters are perfect for flow measurement
in commercial HVAC water systems, wastewater, reclaimed water, irrigation and industrial applications because they can handle suspended solids, have no pressure drop, no moving parts, and their accuracy is not affected by temperature, pressure, viscosity, density or flow profile
. They are NSF
listed for use in potable water. The ANSI 150 RF flanged
pipe spool makes them easy to install and they are available with the NEMA 4X (IP66) integral amplifier (transmitter and display housing) mounted atop the flow detector housing, or with the amplifier remotely mounted
. For the remote
mount configuration, a 30 ft. cable is standard (other lengths
available) and the detector housing comes with either a NEMA 4X or NEMA 6P (submersible) junction box
. Each
meter is f
actory calibrated and tested and a certificate is
included
.
SPECIFICATIONS
FEATURES
• High accuracy of +/- 0.25% and flow range of 300:1 for
reliable measurement
• Unaffected by most solids contained in the fluid for
application flexibility
• Pulsed DC magnetic field for zero point stability
• Corrosion resistant liners provide long life
• Grounding rings included for non-conductive piping
• Bidirectional flow sensing and totalization for reversing
system application
• Empty pipe detection feature generates error message
when pipe is not full
• NEMA 4X (IP66) enclosure for installation in exposed
areas
• Large backlit 4-line, 20 character LCD display for local
indication and programming even in low light conditions
• Modbus RTU via RS232 communications for network
systems

342. flfi
FLOW 304flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
WIRING
MAGNETIC FLOW METER
M-2000 SERIES

343. flfi 305FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
MAGNETIC FLOWMETER
M-2000 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
Note: Dimension D in table below is
overall height (similar to dimension
B) to the top of junction box, for
assemblies with remote amplifier
configuration.
Size A B C D Weight Flow Range
1" (DN25) 8.9" (22.5 cm) 14.4" (36.6 cm) 4.3" (10.8 cm) 11.7" (29.8 cm) 18 lb (8.0 kg) 0.3 to 93 gpm (1.2 to 350 lpm)
1-1/4" (DN32) 8.9" (22.5 cm) 15.2" (38.6 cm) 4.6" (11.7 cm) 12.5" (31.8 cm) 20 lb (9.0 kg) 0.5 to 150 gpm (2.0 to 575 lpm)
1-1/2" (DN40) 8.9" (22.5 cm) 15.4" (39.0 cm) 5.0" (12.7 cm) 12.7" (32.2 cm) 21 lb (9.5 kg) 0.8 to 239 gpm (3 to 900 lpm)
2" (DN50) 8.9" (22.5 cm) 15.9" (40.3 cm) 6.0" (15.2 cm) 13.2" (33.5 cm) 26 lb (11.5 kg) 1 to 373 gpm (4.7 to 1400 lpm)
2-1/2" (DN65) 11.0" (28.0 cm) 17.1" (43.4 cm) 7.0" (17.8 cm) 14.4" (36.6 cm) 52 lb (23.5 kg) 2 to 631 gpm (8 to 2400 lpm)
3" (DN80) 11.0" (28.0 cm) 17.3" (44.0 cm) 7.5" (19.1 cm) 14.7" (37.2 cm) 54 lb (24.5 kg) 3 to 956 gpm (12 to 3600 lpm)
4" (DN100) 11.0" (28.0 cm) 18.4" (46.6 cm) 9.0" (22.9 cm) 15.7" (39.8 cm) 56 lb (25.5 kg) 5 to 1493 gpm (19 to 5600 lpm)
5" (DN125) 15.8" (40.0 cm) 19.6" (49.8 cm) 10.0" (25.4 cm) 16.9" (43.0 cm) 58 lb (26.0 kg) 8 to 2334 gpm (30 to 8800 lpm)
6" (DN150) 15.8" (40.0 cm) 20.6" (52.4 cm) 11.0" (27.9 cm) 17.9" (45.6 cm) 60 lb (27.0 kg) 11 to 3361 gpm (40 to 12,700 lpm)
8" (DN200) 15.8" (40.0 cm) 22.5" (57.2 cm) 13.5" (34.3 cm) 20.4" (51.8 cm) 86 lb (39.0 kg) 20 to 5975 gpm (75 to 22,600 lpm)
10" (DN250) 19.7" (50.0 cm) 26.8" (68.1 cm) 16.0" (40.6 cm) 24.1" (61.3 cm) 178 lb (81 kg) 30 to 9336 gpm (120 to 35,300 lpm)
12" (DN300) 19.7" (50.0 cm) 28.9" (73.4 cm) 19.0" (48.3 cm) 26.2" (66.6 cm) 207 lb (94 kg) 45 to 13,444 gpm (170 to 50,800 lpm)
14" (DN350) 19.7" (50.0 cm) 30.8" (78.2 cm) 21.0" (53.3 cm) 28.2" (71.6 cm) 258 lb (117 kg) 60 to 18,299 gpm (230 to 69,200 lpm)
16" (DN400) 23.6" (59.0 cm) 33.7" (85.6 cm) 23.5" (59.7 cm) 31.0" (78.8 cm) 306 lb (139 kg) 80 to 23,901 gpm (300 to 90,400 lpm)
18" (DN450) 23.6" (59.0 cm) 35.0" (89.0 cm) 25.0" (63.5 cm) 32.4" (82.2 cm) 400 lb (181 kg) 100 to 30,250 gpm (380 to 114,000 lpm)
20" (DN500) 23.6" (59.0 cm) 38.2" (96.9 cm) 27.5" (69.9 cm) 35.5" (90.1 cm) 493 lb (224 kg) 125 to 37,346 gpm (470 to 140,000 lpm)
22" (DN550) 23.6" (59.0 cm) 39.6" (100 cm) 29.5" (74.9 cm) 36.9" (93.7 cm) 523 lb (237 kg) 150 to 45,188 gpm (570 to 170,000 lpm)
24" (DN600) 23.6" (59.0 cm) 42.2" (107 cm) 32.0" (81.3 cm) 39.5" (100 cm) 552 lb (251 kg) 180 to 53,778 gpm (680 to 200,000 lpm)
DIMENSIONS AND FLOW RANGES

344. flfi
FLOW 306flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
The M-2000 provides two amplifier mounting options, integral or remote. The amplifier housing is NEMA 4X rated and can be
located outdoors; observe the operating temperature range of -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C). If located outdoors, provide a roof or
shield over the amplifier to protect the LCD display from direct sunlight. If the amplifier is to be remote mounted, standard avail-
able cable lengths are 15', 30', 50' and 100' (up to 500' optional).
Magnetic flowmeters can operate accurately in any pipeline orientation and can measure flow in both directions. A "Forward
Flow" direction arrow is printed on the detector label. They also perform best when placed in a vertical pipe with the liquid flow-
ing upward; this assures a full pipe at all times and minimizes sediment deposits on the liner and electrodes. If mounting in a
hor
izontal pipe, mount the detector such that the electrodes are on the sides of the pipe, not the top and bottom, also to minimize
deposits and build-up on the electrodes
. Avoid locations where a partially-filled piping situation can occur; the meter will display
an "Empty Pipe Detection" message and will stop measuring flow until the pipe is full.
Sufficient str
aight-pipe runs are required for optimum accuracy and performance
. A minimum of 3 diameters upstream and 2
diameters downstream are required (more is better).
Grounding is critical for magnetic flow meters; they must be electrically connected to the liquid media. If using non-conductive
piping, the grounding rings (included) must be properly installed. See the M-2000 manual for details.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MAGNETIC FLOWMETER
M-2000 SERIES
APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
M2K-Magnetic flowmeter
SIZE CODE PIPE SIZE
010 1"
013 1-1/4"
015 1-1/2"
020 2"
025 2-1/2"
030 3"
040 4"
050 5"
060 6"
080 8"
100 10"
120 12"
140 14"
160 16"
180 18"
200 20"
220 22"
240 24"
LINER CODE LINER MATERIAL
R- Rubber
T- PTFE
AMPLIFIER OPTIONS
LC Local mount amplifier, NEMA 4X (IP66) housing
RM-N4XRemote mount amp, 30 ft. cable, NEMA 4X junction box on detector tube
RM-N6PRemote mount amp, 30 ft. cable, NEMA 6P junction box on detector tube
M2K- 040 R- LC
Example: M2K-040R-LC  4" magnetic flowmeter with 
rubber liner, local mount amplifie
r

345. flfi 307FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
FIXED AND RETRACTABLE INSERTION VORTEX FLOW METERS
2200, 3100 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The 2200 Series fixed insertion and 3100 Series
retractable vortex flow meters are used to measure the flow
rate of water or water/glycol mixtures in 2" to 20" pipes
. Each
flo
w meter is factory calibrated and scaled to provide precise
output signals
. No complex field adjustments or confusing
measurement routines are required to install the flow meters.
Simple design, easy installation, reliab
le performance, and
low cost make these flow meters an excellent choice for commercial HVAC applications.
OPERATION
As flow passes a bluff body in the flow stream, vortices are alternately formed on either side of the bluff body (Figure 1)
. According to well-proven physical laws, the frequency at
which vortices are alternately formed is directly proportional to the average flow velocity
. The vortices create low- and
high-pressure zones behind the bluff body. A vortex flow
meter has a sensing element that detects these low- and high-pressure zones and the frequency at which they are created to measure flow
.
The fluttering of a flag (Figure 2) is one example of how
vortices are created. The flag pole acts as a bluff body to the
blowing wind as the flag waves from the force of the vortices alternately created
.
2200 Series with optional
displa
y and Thredolet
®
mount
FIGURE 1.VORTICES CREATED BY
A BLUFF BODY
FIGURE 2. EXAMPLES OF
VORTEX EFFECT
Bluff
body
Bluff
body
Supply Voltage 10-32 VDC
Maximum Output Impedance
R(load) = 50 (Vs-10)
Output Signal 4-20 mA loop-powered standard
(pulse output available special order)
Connections 2200: 1-1/2" MNPT
3100: 2" MNPT
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals inside housing
Conduit Connection 3/4" FNPT
Configuration For factory pre-configuration, specify
pipe size, pipe material/schedule and maximum flow rate
. Separately
available Hydro-Flow Field-Pro software is available for field configuration
Accuracy
± 1% of full scale (combined linearity
and repeatability)
Display Optional, LCD alternates between
showing 4-digit flow rate and 8-digit total flow
Engineering Units
English, gallons; metric, cubic meters
(other units available upon request or can be configured using Hydro-Flow Field-Pro software)
Operating Temperature
-20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
Velocity Range 1 fps (0.3 mps) minimum, 15 fps
(4.5 mps) maximum
Pipe Size Range 2200: 2" to 20" (5 to 50 cm)
3100: 3" to 20" (8 to 50 cm)
Installation Install in straight pipe section with
a minimum distance of 10 pipe diameters upstream and 5 pipe diameters downstream to any bend, obstruction or transition
Mounting
Thredolet
®
, or piping tee (2200
Series only)
Media Compatibility Water, water/glycol mixtures,
condensate
Media Temperature Range
32° to 160°F (0° to 71°C)
Maximum Pressure 400 psig (2759 kPa) for Thredolet
®

mount, 150 psig (1035 kPa) for piping tee mount
Materials Of Construction

Reinforced polycarbonate enclosure,
Ultem
®
plastic vortex shedder, 316
SS shedder bar, stainless steel stem, EPDM o-rings, brass compression fitting, aluminum/nickel-plated retractor (3300 Series only)
Enclosure Rating
NEMA 6
Warranty 2 years
FEATURES
• No moving parts
• Easy to install
• Reliable and robust design
• Wide flow range - 15:1 turndown ratio
• Microprocessor based piezo resistive sensor
technology
• Optional integral display
SPECIFICATIONS

346. flfi
FLOW 308flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Pipe size in (mm) 2" (50) 3" (80) 4" (100) 6" (150) 8" (200) 10" (250) 12" (300) 14" (350) 16" (400) 18" (450) 20" (500)
Minimum flow
gpm (m
3
/h) 10.6 (2.4) 23.4 (5.4) 40 (9.2) 100 (23) 167 (38) 267 (61) 368 (83) 418 (95) 568 (129) 734 (167) 934 (212)
Maximum flow
gpm (m
3
/h) 160 (36.3) 350 (79.5) 600 (136) 1500 (341) 2500 (557) 4000 (909) 5500 (1249) 6250 (1420) 8500 (1931) 11000 (2498) 14000 (3180)
Minimum flow
gpm (m
3
/h) N/A 26.6 (6.0) 40 (9.0) 100 (23) 167 (38) 267 (61) 366 (83) 417 (95) 567 (129) 733 (167) 933 (212)
Maximum flow
gpm (m
3
/h) N/A 400 (90.8) 600 (136) 1500 (341) 2500 (557) 4000 (909) 5500 (1249) 6250 (1420) 8500 (1931) 11000 (2498) 14000 (3180)
2200
Series
3100
Series
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
2200 Fixed insertion vo rtex flow meter
3100 Retractable insertion vo rtex flow meter
PIPE SIZE DESCRIPTION
02 2" pipe (fixed insertion only) 03 3" pipe 04 4" pipe 06 6" pipe 08 8" pipe 10 10" pipe 12 12" pipe 14 14" pipe 16 16" pipe 18 18" pipe 20 20" pipe
MOUNTING DESCRIPTION
1 Thredolet
®
4 Tee (2" size only)
OUTPUT, DISPLAY OPTIONS DESCRIPTION
2-1-1 4-20 mA output, no display
2-2-1 4-20 mA output, display, English units
2200 06 1 2-1-1
Example: 2200-06-1-2-1-1 Fixed insertion flow meter,
6" pipe, Thredolet
® mount, 4-20 mA, no display
Notes: Other options and configurations available. Separately ordered configuration software also av ailable fo r
field configuration. Consult Kele with calibration information when ordering (pipe size, fluid temperature
and pressure, max flow rate).
Software - FieldPro - EC10011
FLOW RANGES
FIXED AND RETRACTABLE INSERTION VORTEX FLOW METERS
2200, 3100 SERIES
Vs
(10 to 32 VDC)
4-20 mA wiri ng
* R
load maximum = 50 (Vs - 10)
*R
load
WIRING

347. flfi 309FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage Isolated 18-40 VDC
Supply Current 35 mA maximum
Maximum Output Impedance
R(load) = 50 (Vs-18)
Output Signal 4-20 mA two-wire loop-powered, scalable
frequency voltage pulse (3-wire 0-3000
Hz square wave, 50% duty cycle, low level
= 0-1 V, high level = power supply
voltage-load)
Connections 2" MNPT process connection,
1/4" pressure tap
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals inside housing
Conduit Connection 3/4" FNPT
Configuration Factory pre-configuration required,
see Ordering Information
Accuracy ± 1.0% of flow rate for water applications,
± 1.5% of flow rate for steam and gas
Repeatability ± 0.15% of flow rate
Response Time Adjustable from 1 to 100 seconds
Display 2-line by 8-character LCD alternately
shows flow rate and total flow. Four-button
interface enables local programming modifications
Engineering Units
English, gallons; metric, cubic meters
(other units available upon request)
Operating Temperature -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 100% RH non-condensing
Velocity Range Liquid flow: 1.5 fps (0.5 mps) minimum,
32 fps (9 mps) maximum
Pipe Size Range 3" to 80" (8 to 200 cm)
Installation Straight pipe section, minimum 10 pipe
diameters upstream, 5 pipe diameters downstream
Mounting
Thredolet®, or piping tee
Media Compatibility Liquid, gas or steam
Media Temperature Range -200° to 500°F (-129° to 260°C)
Maximum Pressure 2000 psig (138 bar)
Materials Of Construction Wetted parts: 316 stainless steel
(or cast equivalent)
External parts: Aluminum, 316 SS,
carbon steel
Electrical enclosure: 383 Aluminum
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X
Dimensions Maximum overall height 32.5" (82.6 cm);
insertion 3" minimum to 10" maximum (7
.6 to 25.4 cm), recommended service
clearance 12" (30.5 cm)
Weight 9 lb (4.1 kg) maximum
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The V-Bar 700 insertion vortex flow meter can be used to
measure the flow rates of most liquids, gases, and steam.
The same
V-Bar 700 will fit pipe sizes from 3" to 80" (8 to 200
cm), features no moving parts, adds negligible head loss to the system, and comes with an easily programmable integral local flow rate indicator and totalizer
. The microprocessor-
based electronics condition the signal and provide a frequency output, a scaled pulse output, or a 4-20 mA output
.
FEATURES
• Measures flow rates of liquids, gases, or steam
• 2000 psig (13,790 kPa) pressure rating
• 500°F temperature rating
• No moving parts
• Integral transmitter with local display
• Stainless steel construction
OPERATION
Vortex flow meters are devices that measure the frequency
of vortices created in the flow stream. Vortices are like tiny
eddies produced by an obstruction (called a bluff body) in the flow and are actually areas of low pressure
. These vortices
travel with the flow downstream until they run out of energy.
Inser
ting a bluff body (Figure 1) into the stream creates these
vortices that alternate from side to side
. The frequency of
these vortices or pressure pulses can be measured and are directly proportional to the average flow rate
. A flag waving
in the wind is an example of this vortex effect (Figure 2). The
flagpole is the bluff body, and the high- and low-pressure areas are seen as high and low ridges in the flag
. These
ridges alternate as they travel across the flag and cause the flag to appear to be waving
.
INSERTION VORTEX FLOW METER
V-BAR 700
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
Please call Kele for specific application and prices. The following information is required:
1. Pipe size and schedule 4. Maximum flow rate (lb/hr, scfm)
2. Type of gas or liquid 5. Temperature
3. Operating pressure 6. Constant or varying pressure
FIGURE 1.VORTICES CREATED BY
A BLUFF BODY
FIGURE 2. EXAMPLES OF
VORTEX EFFECT
Bluff body
Bluff body

348. flfi
FLOW 310flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VDC ±10%
Output Signal 2-wire, 4-20 mA @ 500Ω
Accuracy ± 1.0% of rate
Repeatability ± 0.15% of flow rate
Response Time 0.33 mS
Display 2-line alphanumeric with bar graph
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Conduit Connection 3/4" FNPT
Configuration Factory pre-configuration required
to assure application/product match:
specify pipe size and material/
schedule, fluid/gas type, operating
pressure and temperatures, and
minimum/maximum flow rates
Flow Range
19.6 gpm (4" pipe) to 98,000 gpm
(60" pipe)
Pipe Size Range 4" to 60" (100 to 1500 cm)
Turn Down 15:1
Installation Install in straight pipe section with
a minimum distance of 10 pipe diameters upstream and 5 pipe diameters downstream to any bend, obstruction or transition
Mounting
ANSI flanges standard
Media Compatibility Liquid, non-volatile gases, or steam
Media Temperature Range
-65° to 425°F (-54° to 218°C), other r
anges special order
Operating Temperature -4° to 170°F (-20° to 75°C)
Maximum Pressure >1000 psi (69 bar) for primary
sensing elements; piping connections per applicable ANSI specs
Materials Of Construction

316L stainless steel wetted parts,
Polyester powder coated aluminum housing
Enclosure Rating
NEMA 4X
Dimensions Height 10.8" (32.4 cm) from
mounting flange to top of transmitter; insertion length depends on pipe size specified, force sensor locates in center of pipe
Approvals
CE, FM
Weight 9 lb (4.1 kg) maximum
Warranty 2 years
TARGET FLOW METER
NFP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Niagara NFP Series ForceMeter™ is an insertion
type flow meter that can measure water or steam. It
utiliz
es a hermetically sealed strain-gage bridge circuit to
convert flow force to a two-wire 4-20 mA output signal that is proportional to flow rate. All wetted parts are 316L stainless
steel and the meter mounts to 4" and larger pipes using a 2" or 4" ANSI 150# or 300# raised face flange
. The NFP Series
comes pre-calibrated and configured based on the application parameters provided at the time of order; the meter only needs to be zeroed to adjust for installation orientation
. Many
different models and configuration options are available, such as retractable insertion types, inline models, and hazardous approval
.
FEATURES
• Quic
than 1 second, can be dampened
• Rugged design includes no moving parts to wear out
• All welded sensor construction for durability
• Hermetically sealed to withstand challenging
environmental conditions
• Maintenance-free keeps cost of ownership down
• Integral display for local indication of flow and
totalization
FM
APPROVED
USC
SPECIFICATIONS
NFP Series

349. flfi 311FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
5.5
(13.97)
Typical Integral Enclosure
Typical Remote Enclosure
6.0
(15.2)
Flow
E
L
4
(10.2)
8.25
(20.96)
(approx.)
4.5
(11.4)
Power
Supply
18-36 VDC
BAS
Customer
Wiring
Conduit Entry
for Customer
Wiring
Conduit Entry
for Customer
Wiring
Enclosure Mounted on Flowmeter (Backside)
Integral Transmitter Wiring
4-20mA Output
+–
GND
+–
++ ––
WIRING DIMENSIONS
TARGET FLOW METER
NFP SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
NFP Flow Meter
LINE SIZE (inches) DESCRIPTION
4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, etc. Select pipe size (larger insertion and smaller in-line models are av ailable)
MOUNTING DESCRIPTION
M 2" raised flange
P 4" raised flange
FLANGE RATING DESCRIPTION
01 150 # raised-face ANSI
02 300 # raised-face ANSI
BODY, ELEMENT DESCRIPTION
Y1V1ZV SS316L Body, unidirectional
Gas, Liquid or Steam
G, L, or S
NFP 4 M 01 Y1V1ZV
Example: NFP-4-M-01-Y1V1ZV-G Insertion target flow meter for water, 4" pipe size,
2" RF 150 # mounting flange, 303/304 SS body, 1,000 psi, 425 DF -rating
G
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

350. flfi
FLOW 312flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 12-35 VAC ±5% or 12-24 VDC ±10%
Supply Current 60 mA @ 12 VDC
Input Signal All flow sensors: Excitation voltage
3-wire, 7.9-11.4 VDC, 270Ω source
impedance Pulse sensors: Signal
amplitude 2.5 VDC threshold, signal
limit <35V AC or DC peak, frequency 0-10 kHz, pull-up 8
.5 VDC @ 2
kΩ source impedance Sine wave sensors: Signal amplitude 10 mV p-p threshold, signal limit <35V AC or DC peak, frequency 0-10 kHz Temperature sensors: Two matched 10 kΩ @ 25°C, two-wire, type II
Output Signal
-- Output Pulse, isolated solid state switch
programmed for units of energy or flow
BN Output BACnet and Modbus communication
LW Output LonWorks communication
N2 Output N2 communication
Pulse Output Voltage range: 0 to ±60V (DC or
AC peak); On-state load current: 700 mA maximum; On-state load resistance: 700 mΩ; Off-state leakage: < 1µA @ 60 V peak; Pulse width: adjustable from
.05 to 5.0
seconds
User Interface Computer connection allows visibility
of real-time flow rate, flow total, temperature readings, energy rate and energy total
Communication
BACnet and Modbus, LonWorks,
Metasys N2, or Modbus
Configuration Windows® based A301-
20 programming kit (order separately) cable connects to DIC communication port and DB9 COM port on a computer for calibration of flow sensor information, units, output scaling; unit must be powered to configure
Mounting
-00 Enclosure Surface mount, no enclosure
-02 Enclosure Surface mount, in metal enclosure
-03 Enclosure Surface mount, in plastic enclosure
-04 Enclosure DIN rail mount, with clips
Operating Temperature -20° to 158°F (-29° to 70°C)
Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) without enclosure
Warranty 1 year
BTU TRANSMITTER
340 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter 340 Series is an inexpensive and easy-to- apply BTU transmitter which calculates energy usage based on liquid flow rate from a Data Industrial impeller flow sensor and differential temperature using two 10 kΩ thermistor inputs
. The onboard microcontroller and digital circuitry
provide precise measurements and produce accurate drift- free outputs
. Configuration is accomplished with a Windows
®

based software programming kit
. The 340 Series is available
with onboard communication technology for LonWorks, BACnet, Johnson Controls N2 Metasys, or Modbus networks
.
FEATURES
• A •
Field programmable makes changes easy
• Small footprint saves space
• Uses two matched 10Ωk thermistors
• Used with Data Industrial flow sensors
SPECIFICATIONS
340-00

351. flfi 313FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
3.65
(9.3)
1.6
(4.1)
in
(cm)
0.88
(2.2)
0.6
(1.5)
2.95
(7.5)
AC Line or DC+
AC Common or DC–
Pulse input
device
AC/DC
power
supply
(black)
Shield
(if applicable)
Flow
Sensor
Temperature
sensors
(red)
Power out
Signal (+)
Signal (–)
Shield
Temp 1
Temp 2
output +
Pulse –
+
–
(–) (+)
* Network communications terminals
vary slightly per model
WIRING DIMENSIONS
BTU TRANSMITTER
340 SERIES
340 –0 2
__
Example: 340 Series BTU meter with standard pulse output
and metal enclosure
MODEL DESCRIPTION
340 BTU meter
OUTPUT
LW Transmitter for use with LONWorks networks
N2 Transmitter for use with Johnson Metasys networks
BN Transmitter for use with BACnet and Modbus networks
ENCLOSURE
00 Transmitter only
02 Transmitter with metal enclosure
03 Transmitter with plastic enclosure
04 Transmitter with DIN rail mounting clips
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
200 Series Data Industrial impeller type flow sensors with pulse output 290
A301-20 Flow/BTU transmitter programming kit, includes cable
ST-U24B-XP Temperature sensors, matched ±0.1°F, brass wells
ST-U24S-XP Temperature sensors, matched ±0.1°F, stainless steel wells
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

352. flfi
FLOW 314flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 12-28 VAC or 12-35 VDC
Supply VA 5 VA
Supply Current 200 mA maximum
Sensor Input 0.24" diameter RTD probe, meets
IEC751 Class B; 6.5' (2 m) cable for
remote sensor, custom fitting for 1/8"
NPT pipe tap included
Output Scaled pulse: 10, 50, 150, 200 or
250 ms
Wiring Two cable glands, PG6 and PG9
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals inside enclosure
Communication Modbus RTU, BACnet
Repeatability ±0.5%
Size 3/4", 1", 1-1/4", 1-1/2", 2"
Connections FNPT
Velocity Range 1 to 15 fps
Accuracy ± 2% of range
Operating Temperature -4° to 149°F (-20° to 65°C)
Media Temperature Range
Cold service -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°F)
Hot service 39° to 257°F (4° to 125°C)
Materials Of Construction
Cast bronze tee, 316 SS impeller,
PEEK flow sensor, polyurethane potting material, polycarbonate housing
Enclosure Rating
NEMA 4
Weight
3/4" 6 lb (2.7 kg)
1" 7 lb (3.2 kg)
1-1/4" 8 lb (3.6 kg)
1-1/2" 9 lb (4.1 kg)
2" 13 lb (5.9.kg)
Warranty 1 year
BTU METER
380 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter 380 Series BTU meters provide an inexpensive solution to monitoring thermal energy consumption in cold or hot water systems
. The integrated flow
and temperature sensors along with the internal metering components make installation and commissioning easy
. With
on-board Modbus and BACnet communication and a compact design that will fit in a wall, the 380 Series is perfect for networking and multi-tenant billing applications
.
FEATURES
• A •
Field programmable
• Scaled pulse or RS-485 (Modbus and BACnet) output
standard
• Two temperature sensors included
• Compact, fits within a standard 2X4 stud wall
• Compatible with potable water and water/glycol mixtures
APPLICATION
• Strip Malls
• Multi-tenant buildings
• Office buildings
• Thermal storage systems
• Sustainable design buildings
1
2
2
3
1
2
1
GND
-
+
RS 485
POWER
PULSE
OUTPUT
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
380CS07

353. flfi 315FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Modbus or
BACnet
device
Series
380 Btu
meter
Series
380 Btu
meter
Series
380 Btu
meter
Series
380 Btu
meter
24 AWG twisted, shielded
pair
(Up to 32 units)
Model 3700 Data Acquisition
Server (Modbus) or similar
Modbus or BACnet device
B
Overall height
D
Hex
Ø0.24" (0.6 cm)
T2
length
6.5 ft. (2 m)
TOP VIEW
Ø8" (20.3 cm)
360°
Pivot area
case from
center
of tee
PG-7 PG-9
Custom
RTD fitting
1/8" NPT
A
Overall length
E
Width
C
Tee length
Dimensions in (cm)
TEE/NPT
SIZE A B C D E
2" 7.9 8.5 7.8) 3.3 3.5
(20.1) (21.6) (19.8) (8.4) (8.9)
1.5" 7.3 8.3 6.7 3.8 3.5
(18.5) (21.1) (17.1) (9.7) (8.9)
1.25" 7.1 8.1 6.3 2.4 3.5
(18) (20.6) (16) (6.1) (8.9)
1" 6.7 7.9 5.4 2 3.5
(17.1) (20.1) (13.7) (5.1) (8.9)
3/4" 6.7 7.9 5.4 2 3.5
(17.1) (20.1) (13.7) (5.1) (8.9)
INSTALLATION
DIMENSIONS
BTU METER
380 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS
3700 Data acquisition server
A304-1M Model 380 programming software
MODEL DESCRIPTION
380CS07 380 BTU System, cold service, 3/4" FNPT
380CS10 380 BTU System, cold service, 1" FNPT
380CS12 380 BTU System, cold service, 1-1/4" FNPT
380CS15 380 BTU System, cold service, 1-1/2" FNPT
380CS20 380 BTU System, cold service, 2" FNPT
380HS07 380 BTU System, hot service, 3/4" FNPT
380HS10 380 BTU System, hot service, 1" FNPT
380HS12 380 BTU System, hot service, 1-1/4" FNPT
380HS15 380 BTU System, hot service, 1-1/2" FNPT
380HS20 380 BTU System, hot service, 2" FNPT

354. flfi
FLOW 316flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 95-264 VAC, 47-63 Hz
20-28 VAC, 47-63 Hz
10-28 VDC
Frequency DTTS small transducers: 2 MHz
DTTN remote transducers: 1 MHz
DTTL large pipe transducers 500 kHz
Supply VA 17 VA maximum @ 95-264 VAC
Supply Watts 5W @ 10-28 VDC
Supply Current 0.35 A @ 20-28 VAC
Maximum Output Impedance AC powered: 400 Ω maximum
DC powered: Maximum loop resistance =
(Vsupply-7)/0.02
Outputs DE: 4-20 mA internal power, can span
negative-to-positive flow/energy rates
DB: 4-20 mA internal power, can span
negative-to-positive flow/energy rates; two
0-1,000 Hz open collector transistors that
can be configured for flow rate, alarming or
totalizing
Wiring
Transducer cables: RG59 coaxial 75 Ω or
Twinaxial 78 Ω, (optional armored conduit), maximum length 990' (300 m) in 10' (3m) increments
RTDs (DE meters only): Platinum 385, 1 kΩ,
3-wire PVC jacket cable
Conduit Opening Two 1/2" FNPT and one 3/4" FNPT
Cable Length Remote transducer models available with 20'
(6.1m), 50' (15m), or 100' (30m) cables
Communication USB: 2.0 for connection to PC running
ULTRALINK™ configuration utility
RS485: Modbus RTU command set,
ENERGYLINK network monitoring software
10/100 Base-T: RJ45 communication via
Modbus TCP/IP, Ethernet/IP and BACnet
®
/IP
Configuration
PC running free ULTRALINK™ software or
via integral display keypad (limited access to parameters)
Accuracy
Flow: ± 1.0% of reading above 1 fps (0.3
mps) velocity, ± 0.01% of reading below
1 fps (0.3 mps)
Temperature (DE only): 0.45°F (0.25°C)
Repeatability 0.5% of reading
Sensitivity Flow: 0.001 fps (.0003 mps)
Temperature: 0.05°F (.025°C)
Display Two-line LCD, LED backlit, top row: 0.7" (1.8
cm) height, 7-segment; bottom row: .35"
(0.9 cm) height, 14-segment; flow rate and
totalization indication
Engineering Units DB: flow rate in gallons, cubic feet, million
gallons, barrels, acre-feet, lbs., meters, cubic
meters, liters, million liters, kg.
DE: flow rates above plus BTU, MBTU,
MMBTU, Tons, kJ, kW, MW
Pipe Size Range 1/2" to 100" (1.2 to 254 cm)
Velocity Range 0.1 to 40 fps (feet/second), 0.03 to 12.4 mps
(meters/second), bi-directional
Operating Temperature -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C); remote DTTS/
DTTN transducers have upper limit of 250°F (121°C) and high temperature DTTH have upper limit of 400°F (200°C)
Media Compatibility
Most clean liquids or liquids with some
suspended solids or aer
ation
Materials Of Construction
Enclosure: powder-coated aluminum,
polycarbonate, stainless steel, polyurethane, nickel-plated steel mounting brackets
Transducers: NEMA 6 (IP67), PVC/CPVC,
Ultem
®
, Nylon cord grip, PVC cable jacket
Enclosure Rating
NEMA 4 (IP65) as long as a liquid-tight
connectors are used
Approvals CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1 (24 VDC, 120 VAC
only); CE EN61326-1:2006
Warranty 1 year
ULTRASONIC ENERGY METER, FLOW METER
DE/DB SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The DE Series ultrasonic energy meter and DB Series ultrasonic
flow meter attach externally to water distribution piping to measure
flow rate and (the DE Series) supply/return temperature difference
to calculate energy consumption
. Since they are non-invasive, they
add no pressure head loss to the system and can be installed on existing piping systems without shutdown or interruption
. Installation
is easy and f
ast, there are no moving parts, and they measure
bi-directional flow
. The DE energy meter measures energy usage
in BTU, MBTU, MMBTU, Tons, kJ, kW, MW and is perfect for retrofit of existing hot water or chilled water hydronic systems
. Network
communication models include Modbus RTU over RS485, Modbus TCP/IP, and Ethernet communication includes BACNet
®
/IP, EtherNet/
IP
®
protocols
.
The DE and DB meters have a backlit display (available with or
without a keypad interface), a USB port for programming, and integral or remote clamp-on flow transducer configurations
. The DE Series
uses strap-on RTD temperature sensors (immersion sensors are also available)
. The DE and DB meter s work with pipe sizes 1/2" to 100",
are available in 24 VAC, 120 VAC, or 24 VDC power, and have a 4-20 mA analog output for flow rate and a pulse output for totalizing
. Free
ULTRALINK™ software is used to configure the meters.
SPECIFICATIONS
FEATURES
• Backlit display for easy reading in low light
• USB Port for configuration and monitoring
• No fluid contact means no fluid compatibility issues,
no pressure drop, and no plant shutdown necessary for
installation
• Bi-directional flow measurement for reversing flow systems
• Selectable engineering units for international preferences
• No moving parts to maintain or replace minimizes service
costs
• Works with small amounts of suspended solids or aeration
• Totalizer options include forward, reverse and net total for
flow measurement flexibility
• Network communication models available for large projects
(up to 126 meters per network)
• Keypad models allow access to many parameters
• Free Ultralink™ software for configuration
APPLICA
TION
•
Heating/chilled/condenser water
• Potable water
• Irrigation water
• Rain/reclaimed water

355. flfi 317FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Integral System
Pipe
Material
Measuring
Range
1-¼"
Pipe
Size
½"
¾"
1"
1-½"
2"
* Varies due to U-bolt configuration
2.375
(60.3)*
2.125
(54.0)*
2 - 38 GPM
8 - 144 LPM
1.8 - 27 GPM
7 - 102 LPM
1.5 - 18 GPM
6 - 68 LPM
2.75 - 66 GPM
10 - 250 LPM
2.5 - 54 GPM
10 - 204 LPM
2.5 - 45 GPM
10 - 170 LPM
3.5 - 108 GPM
13 - 409 LPM
3.5 - 95 GPM
13 - 360 LPM
3.5 - 85 GPM
13 - 320 LPM
5 - 186 GPM
19 - 704 LPM
4.5 - 152 GPM
17 - 575 LPM
4 - 136 GPM
15 - 514 LPM
6 - 250 GPM
23 - 946 LPM
5 - 215 GPM
19 - 814 LPM
5 - 200 GPM
19 - 757 LPM
8 - 420 GPM
30 - 1590 LPM
8 - 375 GPM
30 - 1419 LPM
8 - 365 GPM
30 - 1381 LPM
C
2.12
(53.8)
B
A
D
4.32
(110)
4.20
(106.7)
2.12
(53.8)
6.00
(152.4)
Pipe mountWall mount
6.50
(165.1)
1.38
(35.1)
2.30
(58.4)
.19 DIA (4.8)
2 Mounting
holes
2.90
(73.7)
1.20
(30.5)
Mechanical Dimensions: Inches (MM)
Remote System
DTTS/DTTN Transducer Dimensions: Inches (MM)
ANSI/DN
ANSI/DN
ANSI/DN
ANSI/DN
ANSI/DN
ANSI/DN
DTTS U-Bolt Connections
ANSI/DN & Copper 2" (50 mm) Models
DTTN/DTTH
Pipes larger than 2" (50 mm) DTTS
Pipes/Tubing ½" to 2" (12 mm to 50 mm)
DTTN 2.95 2.75 3.00
(74.9) (69.8) (76.2)
DTTH
DTTL
2.95 2.75 3.00
(74.9) (69.8) (76.2)
3.40 2.94 3.20
(86.4) (74.7) ( 81.3)
A B C
A
B
C
(Min Clearance)
B
B
A
D
D
C A C
ULTRASONIC ENERGY METER, FLOW METER
DE/DB SERIES
Supply
Return
Remote
Flow Transducers
Temperature TransducersTemperature Transducers
Supply
Return
Integral Flow Transducer
Bottom View
Front View
m ViewBottoom
Transmitter with integral transducers Transmitter with remote transducers
INSTALLATION (DE MODEL SHOWN; DB DOES NOT HAVE TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCERS)
DIMENSIONS AND FLOW RANGES

356. flfi
FLOW 318flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
DE/DB Series
1
2
3
4
5
6
Signal Gnd.
Control 1
Control 2
FrequencyOut
4-20 mA Out
ResetT otal
*Loop
Resistance
*Loop resistancem aximum = 400 ohmsf or AC powered unitso r(supply voltage–7
VDC/0.02 forDCp owered units.
PIN #1
PIN #3
PIN #5
PIN #2
PIN #4
PIN #6
PIN #8
RTD2
RTD1
WHITE
RED
BLACK
GREEN
BROWN
BLUE
DRAIN
WHITE
BLACK
RED
GREEN
BLUE
BROWN
DRAIN
PIN#3
PIN#6
PIN#1
PIN#8
PIN#4
PIN#2
PIN#5
4-20 mA Out
Reset Total
Modbus Gnd
Modbus B
Modbus A
TD(A)-
TD(B)+
GND
GND
+12V
RS-485 Converter
Model 485SD9TB
RS-232
RS-485
To 12 VDC
Supply
24 VAC
Transformer
Downstream
Upstream
+
+
-
-
Modbus
TFX Rx
TFX Tx
Signal Gnd.
Control 1
Control 2
Frequency Out
4-20 mA Out
Reset Total
Modbus Gnd
Modbus B
Modbus A
1234O
N
-IN+
OUT+
OUT−
IN: 18-36VAC
OUT: 15VDC
ASD06-24S15
Test
P1
Chassis Gnd.
24 VAC
AC Neutral
10 - 28 VDC
Power Gnd.
Downstream
Upstream
+
+
-
-
Modbu s
TFX Rx
TFX Tx
1234O
N
Signal Gnd.
Control 1
Control 2
Frequency Out
4-20 mA Out
Reset Total
Modbus Gnd
Modbus B
Modbus A
10 -28
VDC
Power
Ground
10 - 28 VDC
Power Gnd.
Downstream
Upstream
+
+
-
-
Modbu s
TFX Rx
TFX Tx
Signal Gnd.
Control 1
Control 2
Frequency Out
4-20 mA Out
Reset Total
Modbus Gnd
Modbus B
Modbus A
R AC IN : 100-240V AC,50/60Hz
DC OUT :
+15V / 0.3A
PWC-15E
0.15A
R2807
www.astrodyne.com
-Vo
+Vo
ACL
ACN
strodyne
1234O
N
95 - 264 VAC
AC Neutral
COMMUNICATIONS WIRING ( model specific)
POWER WIRING FOR 120 VACPOWER WIRING FOR 24 VAC
POWER WIRING FOR 24 VDC
TEMPERATURE SENSOR WIRING
ULTRASONIC ENERGY METER, FLOW METER
DE/DB SERIES
4-20 mA OUTPUT WIRING

357. flfi 319FLOW
FLOW
6
 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES
D002-2007-005 72" stainless steel straps, 1 pair, for DTTN/DTTH, for pipes up to 20"
D005-0350-300 RTD Connector Kit (required for non-standard sensors)
D005-0803-104 UltraLink PC software for DE/DB Meters
D005-2117-003 USB A/B Cable, 10 ft. (3 m) for DE/DB Series Meters
D005-2117-004 USB A/B Cable, 15 ft. (4.6 m) for DE/DB Series Meters
D010-2102-010 Mounting track assembly for DTTN/DTTH transducers, for <10" pipes
D010-2102-016 Mounting track assembly for DTTN/DTTH transducers, for 10" to 16" pipes
D010-3000-120 RTD kit for DE Energy Meter, strap-on, 20 ft. cables
D010-3000-121 RTD kit for DE Energy Meter, strap-on, 50 ft. cables
D010-3000-122 RTD kit for DE Energy Meter, strap-on, 100 ft. cables
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DE BTU Meter
PIPE SIZE
IA1/2" ANSI pipe
IB3/4" ANSI pipe
IC1" ANSI pipe
ID1 1/4" ANSI pipe
IE1 1/2" ANSI pipe
IF2" ANSI pipe
IG1/2" copper
IH3/4" copper
II1" copper
IJ1 1/4" copper
IK1 1/2" copper
IL2" copper
IM1/2" OD tubing 
IN3/4" OD tubing
IP1" OD tubing
IQ1 1/4" OD tubing
IR1 1/2" OD tubing
IS2" OD tubing 
RZRemote Flow Transducers (see DT, DS tables)
H
None (select for Remote Transducer Only)
A90-264 VAC
TRANSDUCER MATERIAL/TEMPERATURE
L
N
PVC: -40 to +185˚F (-40 to +185˚C)
CPVC: -40 to +250˚F (-40 to +121˚C)
POWER
C
D
20-28 VAC
11-28 VDC
KEYPAD
Y
N
Keypad
No keypad
COMMUNICATIONS
Y
N
10/100 Base-T (EtherNet/IP, BACnet/IP, Modbus TCP/IP)
No communications
ENERGY TEMPERATURE RANGE (Separately ordered RTD kit required)
L
M
+32 to +122˚F (0 to +122˚C)
+32 to +212˚F (0 to +100˚C)
H
X
-40 to +350˚F (-40 to +177˚C)
-4 to +85˚F (-20 to +30˚C)
APPROVALS
NGeneral safety (power supply C only)
OPTIONS
0
1
None, plugged ports
Cable Gland Kit
Note: Shaded selections are special order.
Note: DT remote transducers come with 36"
         straps that fit pipes up to 10".
         (P/N D002-2007-001)
N None (for DB flowmeter)
DB Flowmeter
Remote transducers for small pipes (with “RZ” pipe size)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DTTS Remote transducers for 1/2" to 2" pipes
PIPE SIZE
D1/2"
F3/4"
G1"
H1 1/4"
J1 1/2"
L2"
PIPE TYPE
PANSI carbon steel
CCopper
TTubing
CABLE LENGTH
02020 feet (6.1 m)
05050 feet (15 m)
100100 feet (30 m)
CABLE ARMOR OPTION
NNo armor
AFlexible armor
CABLE ARMOR LENGTH
000No armor
02020 feet (6.1 m)
05050 feet (15 m)
100100 feet (30 m)
Remote transducers for large pipes (with “RZ” pipe size)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CABLE LENGTH
02020 feet (6.1 m)
05050 feet (15 m)
100100 feet (30 m)
CABLE ARMOR OPTION
NNo armor
AFlexible armor
CABLE ARMOR LENGTH
000No armor
02020 feet (6.1 m)
05050 feet (15 m)
100100 feet (30 m)
OPTIONS
NNormal area rating
DTTN Standard transducer for 2 1/2" to 20" pipes
DTTH High temperature transducer for 2 1/2" to 100" pipes
DTTC High Temperature transducer for 1/2” to 2” pipes
DTTL Large transducer for 22" to 100" pipes
ULTRASONIC ENERGY METER, FLOW METER
DE/DB SERIES

358. flfi
FLOW 320flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Contact Rating Resistive/Inductive: 15A @ 240
VAC maximum; Lamp load: 3A @
125 VAC for the N.C. contact, 1.5A
@ 125 VAC for the N.O. contact;
Motor load: 5A, 1/4 HP @ 125 VAC for the N
.C. contact, 2.5A, 1/8 HP
@ 125 VAC for the N.O. contact
Pipe Size Range 1" to 8" (2.5 to 20 cm)
Connections 1" MNPT
Operating Temperature 130°F (55°C) maximum ambient
Media Temperature Range
-22° to 250°F (-30° to 121°C)
Maximum System Pressure
150 psig (1 bar)
Materials Of Construction
Wetted parts: P-Cu Zn40 Pb2 brass
body, 316L stainless steel bellows, EPDM o-ring; Housing cover: Class UL94V-0 self-extinguishing polycarbonate
Approvals
CE, UL File E307420
Weight 1.7 lb (0.8 kg)
Warranty 2 years
PADDLE FLOW SWITCH
626600A
DESCRIPTION
The 626600A Flow Switch from Caleffi is used to prove liquid flow in 1" to 8" pipes containing water, 50% or less glycol solutions, or other liquids that are compatible with stainless steel, brass, and EPDM
. It is designed for use in
HVAC systems, heat exchangers, pumping systems, water treatment, and process systems in general
.
The high quality of Model 626600A makes it ideal for
controlling pumps, burners, compressors, refrigerators, motorized valves, or for activation of signaling units or warning devices
.
FEATURES
• 316L stainless steel bellows for durability and long life
• NEMA 5 (IP54) environmental rating for use in humid or
dusty environments
• Six stainless steel blades to fit 1" to 8" pipes
• Insulated cover over microswitch contacts for safety
• Large, easily-accessible calibration screw with locking
nut to maintain setpoint
3
NO
2
NC
1
COMMON
Shown in no-flow, normal position
WIRINGSPECIFICATIONS
626600A

359. flfi 321FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
$
1"
1.25"
1.5"
2"
2.5"
3"-DN 80
4"-DN100
5"-DN125
6"-DN150
DN 175
8"-DN200
1/2" FNPT
conduit
connection
3.4
(87)
5.5
(135)
3.1
(80)
Select the bl ade marked with the diameter of the pipe in which the sw itch will be installed. For pipe sizes 1" to 2.5", remo ve all extra pre-fitted
blades. For pipes 3" and above, leave all pre-fitted bl ades installed and add the long bl ade and trimming as show n for pipe size. Install the sw itch
in the pipe, observing the flow direction arrows shown on the body casting and housing cover. The distance between the top of the pipe and
the upper surface of the brass housing should be 3.1" (80 mm).
The switch can be installed in a horizontal or ve rtical pipe, bu t avoid installing the sw itch below hori zontal; dirt and deposits may collect in the
switching mechanism and affect operation.
in
(mm)
DIMENSIONS
Minimum calibration
Operating flow rate with
increasing flow
Minimum calibration
Operating flow rate with
decreasing flow
Maximum calibration
Operating flow rate with
increasing flow
Maximum calibration
Operating flow rate with
decreasing flow
5.7
(21.7)
4.0
(15.0)
12.3
(46.8)
11.9
(45.1)
1" 1.25"1.5" 2" 2.5"3" 4" 5" 6" 8"
7.5
(28.4)
5.5
(20.9)
16.7
(63.5)
16.3
(61.8)
11.4
(43.4)
8.4
(31.7)
26.0
(98.5)
25.5
(96.9)
13.2
(50.1)
9.7
(36.7)
29.5
(112)
29.0
(110)
22.0
(83.5)
16.3
(61.8)
51.5
(195)
50.6
(192)
29.9
(113)
22.9
(86, 8)
69.5
(264)
68.6
(260)
44.0
(167)
37.4
(142)
94.6
(359)
92.4
(351)
61.1
(232)
51.5
(197)
136
(518)
127
(484)
72.6
(275)
63.8
(242)
189
(718)
158
(601)
162
(618)
145
(551)
334
(1269)
308
(1169)
Diameter of PipeOperating flow rates:
gpm (lpm)
A
B
C
If the required operating flow rate differs from that given in the table below, the necessary correction
should be carried out as fo llows: turn the calibration screw (A) in a clockwise direction for the contacts
to close at higher flow rate values or in a counterclockwise direction for lower flow rate values. When the
adjustment has been made, lock the screw (A) with the locking ring nut (B). Av oid all contact with the
presetting screw (C). An incorrect setting would seriously impair the operation of the switch.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
626600A Paddle flow switch, 1" to 8" pipes, NEMA 5
CALIBRATION
PADDLE FLOW SWITCH
626600A
OPERATION

360. flfi
FLOW 322flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Contact Arrangement SPDT; black wire = common, red
wire = normally open (at no flow),
blue wire = normally closed (at no
flow)
Contact Rating
5A @ 125/250 VAC
Wiring 18" (46 cm) leads, 18 AWG
Pipe Size Range 1" to 12" (2.5 to 30 cm)
Connections 1" MNPT
Media Temperature Range
212°F (100°C) maximum
Maximum System Pressure
150 psig (1 bar)
Materials Of Construction
Wetted parts: Polyphenylene
sulfide vane, ceramic 8 magnet, 316 stainless steel spring and pin
Weight
1 lb (.45 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION
The Kele FS1-6 paddle flow switch is designed to prove liquid flow in a wide variety of HVAC and industrial applications
. The corrosion-resistant flow switch is mounted
in a weather-resistant box for simple wiring connections. The
polyphenylene sulfide plastic vane is field trimmable for 1" (2
.54 cm) and larger pipes, and it is magnetically coupled to
the SPDT switch to prevent liquid from entering the switch housing
.
FLOW SWITCH
FS1-6
13.25*
(33.66)
4.50
(11.43)
5.00*
(12.70)
2.75
(6.99)
in
(cm)
2.25
(5.72)
1.00
(2.54)
1" NPT pipe connection
* Dimension with vane full length for 6" and larger pipe installation
FEATURES
• W •
Simple installation
• Leak-proof magnetic switch operation
• Field adjustable for 1" (2.54 cm) and larger pipes
• SPDT snap-acting switch
DIMENSIONS
Black - Common Red - Normally open (no flow) Blue - Normally closed (no flow)
WIRING

361. flfi 323FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ACTUATION
gpm (lpm)
PIPE
SIZE
DEACTUATION
gpm (lpm)
10.7
9.5
8.1
9.8
12.4
20.2
43.0
74.2
116.7
167.1
(40.5)
(36.0)
(30.7)
(37.1)
(46.9)
(76.5)
(163)
(281)
(442)
(632)
9.3
7.7
6.3
8.5
8.9
12.7
32.8
56.6
89.0
127.4
(35.2)
(29.1)
(23.9)
(32.2)
(33.7)
(48.1)
(124)
(214)
(337)
(482)
1
1.25
1.5
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
1. Carefully unpack switch, making sure to remove any packing from the lower housing. Adjust the actuation or deactuation point
b
y trimming the vane to the length desired
. If using a pipe with weld-o-let, cond-o-let, or plastic PVC fittings, use graduations
indicated on the vane. If using standard 125 or 250 lb (57 or 113 kg) bronze, iron, or steel fittings, trim the vane 0.125" (0.32
cm) above the marking provided. Because of the great variation in fittings and process connections, it is recommended the unit
be checked when installed to ensure proper operation and that there is no interference between the vane and the fittings. For
pipes larger than 6" (15.24 cm), leave the vane full length.
2. This flow switch is intended to be used in clean process media where particles, scale, and debris are not present. Buildup of
such mater
ials may cause inaccurate signals
.
3. The switch must be indexed during installation in the line with the flow arrow on the side of the switch pointing in the direction
of the flow. Pipe sealant is required at the 1" NPT thread connection. It is important to not get the sealant in the vane assembly
as it may prevent proper operation and cause misleading signals. When installing the unit, be certain not to over-torque the
housing. Damage may occur if excessive force is used.
4. Connect the switch wires in accordance with local electrical codes. The FS1-6 is not intended to be a load-carrying conduit
connection. Loads may damage the switch and stop operation.
INSTALLATION
PERFORMANCE
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
FS1-6 Weather-resistant flow switch
FLOW SWITCH
FS1-6

362. flfi
FLOW 324flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Media Temperature Range
KB-11, KD-3, KD-4 32°F to 250°F (0°C to 121°C)
MB-1,
MD-1, MD-2
-20°F to 250°F (-30°C to 121°C)
Maxim
um System
Pressure
150 psig (1034 kPa)
Materials Of Construction KB-11, MB-1, KD-3,
KD-4
Brass fittings, phosper bronze
bellows, stainless steel paddle
MD-1, MD-2 Brass fittings, stainless steel
bellows, stainless steel paddle
Approvals UL recognized, File E5368
Warranty 1 year

FLOW SWITCH
F61 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Johnson Controls F61 Series paddle flow switches are used to prove flow on liquid lines using water, ethylene glycol solutions, or other liquids compatible with brass and phosphor bronze parts
. The SPDT contact switch is activated
by liquid flow through the pipe and the set point is adjustable.
The F61KD (NEMA 1 enclosure) and F61MD (NEMA 3R
enclosure) are inline models for 1/2" NPT and 3/4" NPT pipe.
The
F61KB-11 (NEMA 1 enclosure) and F61MB-1 (NEMA
3R enclosure) are for 1" (2
.5 cm) and larger pipes. They are
furnished with a stainless steel paddle in three segments for pipes 1" to 3" (2
.5 to 7.6 cm) in diameter. Paddle segments
may be removed or trimmed as needed. A 6" (15 cm) paddle
is also fur
nished for 4" (10 cm) diameter pipes and larger
.
B
Y
R
Action on increase
of flow
F61 Series
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
F61KB-11
ModelSizeConnections Dimensions Weight
Enclosure
Rating
F61KD-31/2" FNPT inline 5.0"H x 4.0"W x 2.8"D (12.8 x 10.1 x 7.1 cm)2.1 lb (.95 kg)NEMA 1
F61MD-11/2" FNPT inline 5.0"H x 4.0"W x 2.8"D (12.8 x 10.1 x 7.1 cm)2.2 lb (1.0 kg)NEMA 3R
F61KD-43/4" FNPT inline 5.0"H x 4.0"W x 2.8"D (12.8 x 10.1 x 7.1 cm)2.1 lb (.95 kg)NEMA 1
F61MD-23/4" FNPT inline 5.0"H x 4.0"W x 2.8"D (12.8 x 10.1 x 7.1 cm)2.2 lb (1.0 kg)NEMA 3R
F61KB-111"1" MNPT insertion8.4"H (3" paddle) x 4.0"W x 2.8"D (21.3 x 10.2 x 7.1 cm)1.7 lb (.77 kg)NEMA 1
F61MB-11"1" MNPT insertion8.7"H (3" paddle) x 4.8"W x 2.8"D (22.1 x 12.2 x 7.1 cm)2.4 lb (1.1 kg)NEMA 3R
F61KD-3
1
16
96
16 16 16 16
Noninductive or
Resistance load amps
Pilot duty – 125 VA 24/277 VAC
Horsepower
AC full load amps
AC locked rotor amps
120VMOTOR RATINGS
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
1
8.8
52.8
208V
1 8
48
240V
– – –
277V

363. flfi 325FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
F61KD-3 Flow switch inline 1/2" x 1/2" NPT, NEMA 1
F61MD-1 Flow switch inline 1/2" x 1/2" NPT, NEMA 3R
F61KD-4 Flow switch inline 3/4" x 3/4" NPT, NEMA 1
F61MD-2 Flow switch inline 3/4" x 3/4" NPT, NEMA 3R
F61KB-11 Flow switch for pipe 1" diameter and larger, NEMA 1
F61MB-1 Flow switch for pipe 1" diameter and larger, NEMA 3R
LINE PIPE SIZE (in) 1
MODEL
2 2-1/2 34 *5 *6 *8 *1-1/4 1-1/2
Flow
increases
R to Y
closes
Flow
decreases
R to B
closes
Flow
increases
R to Y
closes
Flow
decreases
R to B
closes
F61KB-11
F61MB-1
Minimum
adjustment
Maximum
adjustment
*Flow rates for these sizes are calculated.

†
These gpm figures are for switch with 6" paddle. For 4" and 5" line pipe the paddle is trimmed.
4.2
(1.0)
2.50
(0.6)
8.80
(2.0)
8.50
(1.9)
5.8
(1.3)
3.70
(0.8)
13.30
(3.0)
12.50
(2.8)
7.5
(1.7)
5.00
(1.1)
19.20
(4.4)
18.00
(4.1)
13.7
(3.1)
9.50
(2.2)
29.00
(6.6)
27.00
(6.1)
18.0
(4.1)
12.50
(2.8)
34.50
(7.8)
32.00
(7.3)
27.5
(6.2)
19.00
(4.3)
53.00
(12.0)
50.00
(11.4)
65.0
(14.8)
37.0
†
(8.4)
50.0
(11.4)
27.0
†
(6.1)
128.0
(29.1)
81.0
†
(13.4)
122.0
(27.7)
76.0
†
(17.3)
125.0
(28.4)
57.0
†
(12.9)
101.0
(22.9)
41.0
†
(9.3)
245.0
(55.6)
118.0
†
(26.8)
235.0
(53.4)
111.0
†
(25.2)
190.0
(43.1)
74.0
†
(16.8)
158.0
(35.9)
54.0
†
(12.3)
375.0
(85.2)
144.0
†
(32.7)
360.0
(81.8)
135.0
†
(30.7)
375.0
(85.2)
205.0
†
(46.6)
320.0
(72.7)
170.0
†
(38.6)
760.0
(172.6)
415.0
†
(94.2)
730.0
(165.8)
400.0
†
(90.8)
MODEL
F61KD-3
F61KD-4
F61MD-1
F61MD-2
1/2" x 1/2"
3/4" x 3/4"
1/2" x 1/2"
3/4" x 3/4"
1
1
3R
3R
INLET/OUTLET
SIZE
(Female NPT)
NEMA
Enclosure
ADJUSTMENT RANGE – gpm (m
3
/hr)
R to Y closes
flow increase
Minimum 0.6 (0.14)
Maximum 1.1 (0.25)
Minimum 0.3 (0.07)
Maximum 0.9 (0.2)
R to Y opens
flow decrease
ADJUSTMENTS: TYPICAL FLOW RATES — gpm (m 3/hr)
FLOW SWITCH
F61 SERIES

364. flfi
FLOW 326flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Model Dimensions Wiring
COU.6000.0 1.7"H x 1.3"W x 6.3"L (4.3 x 3.43 x 16.0 cm) with .25" (.6 cm) ID discharge tube
18" (46 cm) 5-conductor cable, alarm contacts rated
5A @ 250 VAC, 30 VDC, break on fault
LIM.6000.0 2.4"H x 2.0"W x 11.3"L (6.1 x 5.3 x 28.6 cm) with .25" (.6 cm) ID discharge tube
18" (46 cm) 5-conductor cable, alarm contacts rated
5A @ 250 VAC, 30 VDC, break on fault
JAG.6000.0 1.8"H x 1.6"W x 6.9"L (4.6 x 4.0 x 17.5 cm) with .25" (.6 cm) ID discharge tube
40" (1 m) 18 AWG 5-conductor cable, alarm contact
rating 5A @ 250 VAC maximum, break on fault
PAN.6000.0
Pump: 1.3"H x 1.8"W x 5.3"L (3.2 x 4.6 x 13.5 cm) with .25" (.6 cm) ID discharge tube
Remote Sensor: 1.4" dia. x 1.8"W (3.6 x 4.5 cm) with 5' (1.5m) x 0.125" (3.3 mm) tube
40" (1 m) 18 AWG 5-conductor cable, alarm contact
rating 5A @ 250 VAC maximum, break on fault
Supply Voltage 120-240 VAC 50/60 Hz auto sensing
Supply Watts 17W
Operating Temperature 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
Media Temperature Range 104°F (40°C) maximum
Alarm Relay 5A, 30 VDC, 250 VAC breaks on fault
Maximum Capacity 3.2 gallons/hour (12 liters/hour)
Maximum Discharge
Lift 65' (20 m)
Approvals CE, UL94 5 VA flame retardant
ABS material
Warranty 2 years
COU, LIM, JAG, AND PAN MODELS
EDC CONDENSATE PUMPS
FEATURES
DRAIN PAN PUMP (COU)
• Electronic Energy Control System (EECS) for quiet start/stop
• Designed for low-cost installations
• Compact dimensions
• Completely encapsulated electronics
• Auto-sensing power, one model for 110/120 or 208/240 VAC
LIMPET CONDENSATE DISCHARGE (LIM) •
Electronic Energy Control System (EECS) for quiet start/stop
• 120V or 240V auto sensing
• Built-in alarm circuit
• Thermal protection
• Built-in non-return valves
CONDENSATE PUMP (JAG) •
Electronic Energy Control System (EECS) for quiet start/stop
• Electronic control with high water alarm
• Fits all wall-mount air conditioners
• Mounts vertically or horizontally
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a variety of condensate removal pumps that are small,
quiet running, and high performance for air conditioning and
ventilation systems
. Rigorously tested for total efficiency over a long
life-span, these devices are in use all over the world.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
COU
.6000.0
Drain pan pump, 110-230 VAC auto sensing, 3.2 gph (12 lph)
LIM.6000.0 Condensate discharge system, 110-230 VAC auto sensing, 3.2 gph (12 lph)
JAG.6000.0 Condensate pump, 110-230V 50/60 Hz auto sensing, 3.2 gph (12 lph)
PAN.6000.0 Condensate pump with remote sensor, 110-230V 50/60 Hz auto sensing, 3.2 gph (12 lph)
ACCESSORIES
ACC.0038.0 Inline filter kit for PAN, JAG pumps
ACC.0056.0 Anti-syphon valve kit
DPP
.0076.0
Drain pan pump skirt filter
LIM.0071.0 Replacement filter element for LIM.4000 system
PCF
.0061.0
Acoustic jacket for JAG, PAN pumps
DIMENSIONS
COU
CONDENSATE REMOVAL (PAN)
• Electronic Energy Control System (EECS) for quiet start/stop
• Small footprint, low profile for ease of mounting
• Electronic control with high water alarm
• Tiny remote mount reservoir/sensing unit
• Fits all wall-mount splits
LIM JAG PAN

365. flfi 327FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Input Signal Voltage input. 0-5V or 0-10 V,
1% accuracy
Software Scaling
and Control 80kΩ input impedance
Sensor Input 14 V @ 50 mA max for powering current
or voltage sensors
Digital Inputs Totalizer reset, external pull-up
Cable Length Transit time: 20' (6 m) paired coaxial
cable, BNC to BNC,
Doppler: 20' (6 m) paired coaxial cable,
BNC to 4-pin
Repeatability ±0.1% of reading
Display 800 x 480 WVGA Color Outdoor
Readable Display; Gloved-operation resistive touch screen
Pipe Size Range
1/2" and larger; US standard pipe tables
are built into User interface
Velocity Range Transit Time: Bi-directional to 40 FPS
(12 MPS)
Doppler: Uni-directional to 40 FPS (12
MPS)
Storage Temperature Do not exceed 175°F (80°C)
Approvals Safety: UL61010-1, CSA C22.2 No.
61010-1, EN61010-1
Directives: 2006/95/EC Low Voltage,
2004/108/EC EMC
Ambient Conditions Battery powered: -4° to 110°F
(-20° to 45°C)
Externally powered: -20° to 140°F
(-30° to 60°C)
Battery Internal 11.1 V lithium ion battery, 75W-hr.
Pro
vides 6-9 hrs of continuous operation
with battery and indefinitely on external power. Charging 32° to 104°F (0° to
40°C), 12 hours while in use;
4 hours
powered off
Breakout Box
0.2" quick disconnect screw terminals;
15 pin to adapter box; 6' (1.8 m) of cable
(DSUB to DSUB connectors)
Connector 15-pin high-density DSUB
Digital Output Open collector, external or pull-up
Rate or Total Pulse User Selectable
Rate pulse: 0-1000 Hz
Total pulse: 33 ms duration
Enclosure Water/Dust resistant [IP 64]
Energy or Temperature 2x RTDs PT1000 tab type; can handle
various temperature ranges from -58° to 570°F (-50° to 300°C), based on RTD type
Flow Rate Accuracy
Transit Time: ±1% of reading or ±0.01
FPS (0.003 MPS), whichever is greater
Doppler: 2% of full scale
Flow Sensitivity 0.001 FPS (0.0003 MPS)
Housing Material DTTSU: CPVC, Ultem
®
, and anodized
aluminum track system; Nickel-plated brass connector with Teflon
®
insulation
DTTN/DTTL/DT94: CPVC, Ultem
®
;
Nickel-plated brass connector with Teflon
®
insulation
Liquid Types
Liquid dominant fluids
Logging Sampling Rate >300 sites stored in 1 GB; downloads to
USB Flash drive
Measurement Update 0.1-10 seconds update/filter rate. Transit
time, up to 50 Hz high speed mode
Output Current 4-20 mA active/passive 1% accuracy
Output Voltage 0-5 V or 0-10 V output voltage, 1%
accuracy
Software Scaling and Control
100Ω output impedance
Pipe Surface Temperature DTTSU/DTTN/DTTL: -40° to 250°F
(-40° to 121°C)
DT94: -40° to 250°F (-40° to 121°C)
Pipe Thickness Dual mode transducer with 6' (1.8 m) of
cable (BNC ends)
Power Cords North American plug (2 flat & 1 round
prong; NEMA 5/15P); China plug (3 flat prongs; GB2099); Euro plug (2 round prongs; CEE7/7); U
.K. plug (3 rectangular
prongs;
BS1363A); Japan plug (2 flat & 1
round, JIS8303, w/ 3-2 prong adapter)
Power Requirements
10-30 VDC via-3-pin connector, 40 W min;
3.6A resettable fuse
Supplies: Desktop adapter: 100-240 VAC
50/60 Hz 50 W 10V-18V; Cigarette lighter adapter: 5A fused
RTDs
2x platinum 385, 1000Ω, 3-wire PVC
jacketed cable standard with quick connector
Temperature Accuracy
Absolute 0.5°F (1°C); Difference 0.2°F
(0.5°C);
Resolution 0.02°F (0.01°C)
Transducer Frequency DTTSU: 2 MHz, DTTN: 1 MHz, DTTL: 500
kHz DT94: 625 kHz
User Menu Windows .NET fully integrated user
menu; multi-language: English, Spanish, German, French, Portuguese, Japanese, Russian, Italian, Dutch, Norwegian, and Swedish
Approvals
CSA
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter DXN Series portable ultrasonic flow
and energy meter is a true hybrid instrument, capable of
measuring liquid flow with multiple technologies, including:
Doppler, transit time and liquid thermal (heat energy) flow
.
Easy to install b
y clamping onto the outside of the pipe,
the DXN measures flow using non-invasive ultrasonic sensors. Compatible with a pipe wall thickness gauge,
inside pipe diameter can be verified to ensure accurate ultrasonic measurements when piping details are unknown or unavailable
.
The DXN Series has a number of advanced features
including a touchscreen interface, full-color graphing, wizard-based start-up configuration, USB connectivity, and Modbus TCP/IP connectivity
. These features make it easy for
technicians to obtain accurate readings while capturing flow surges and high-speed batch operations
. The DXN Series
captures and displays multiple user-defined and application parameters at once and can record the data with an easy-to- use data logging function
. The ability to monitor and record
several parameters at once allows technicians to verify and troubleshoot permanent flow installations with ease
.
SPECIFICATIONS
DXN w Transducers
PORTABLE ULTRASONIC FLOW AND ENERGY METER
DXN SERIES

366. flfi
FLOW 328flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
SENSOR AND HARDWARE KIT OPTIONS
Basic Small pipe and standard pipe transit time transducers
(1) Couplant, grease; 5.3 oz; Dow 111
(1) Couplant, Ultrasound gel; 0.25 liter bottle
(4) Stainless steel straps (1/2" wide, 12-5/16" max dia.,
worm drive clamp)
EnergyBasic kit and non-invasive RTDs
(1) Silicone Heat Sink Compound; 5 oz syringe
(1) RTD Installation tape, 36 ft
Full Basic kit plus all, transit time, Doppler, RTDs and pipe wall
thickness gauge
(1) Silicone Heat Sink Compound; 5 oz syringe
(1) RTD Installation tape, 36 ft
(2) Stainless steel straps (1/2" wide, 21-1/4" max dia.,
worm drive clamp)
All Transit
Time
Basic Kit and large pipe transducers
Hybrid Basic kit and Doppler transducers
PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
Power Cords/Cables
Part Number Description
D005-2109-013 North American plug (2 flat & 1 round prong; NEMA 5/15P)
D005-2109-015 UK plug (3 rectangular prongs; BS1363A)
D005-2109-016 Euro plug (2 round prongs; CEE7/7)
D005-2109-017 Japan plug (2 flat & 1 round, JIS8303, w/ 3-2 prong adapter)
D005-2109-014 China plug (3 flat prongs; GB2099)
D005-2129-020 Transit time Cables, 20' (6 m)
D005-2129-050 Transit time Cables, 50' (15 m)
D005-2129-100 Transit time Cables, 100' (30 m)
D005-2130-020 Doppler Cables, 20' (6 m)
D005-2130-050 Doppler Cables, 50' (15 m)
D005-2130-100 Doppler Cables, 100' (30 m)
Transducers (Heads with case)
Part Number Description Minimum Pipe O.D. Maximum Pipe O.D.
D010-2200-002-C DTTSU universal small pipe 0.5" (12 mm) 2.4" (60.3 mm)
D071-0110-000-C DTTN standard pipe 2" (50 mm) 98" (2500 mm)
D071-0110-200-C DTTL large pipe 16" (400 mm) 120" (3050 mm)
D071-0112-001-C DT94 Doppler transducer 1" (25 mm) 60" (1524 mm)
RTDs/Accessories/Spare Parts
Part Number Description
D002-2007-004 0… 392º F (200º C) RTD Silicone stretch tape D002-2007-001 36" (914 mm) SS Hose clamp / transducer strap D002-2007-005 72" (1829 mm) SS Hose clamp / transducer strap D002-2011-001 Acoustic couplant, grease (Dow 111), 150° F (65° C) 5.3 oz tube
D002-2011-011 Acoustic couplant, paste high temperature, 142 gram tube, 392° F (200° C)
D010-3000-128 Industrial RTD Kit,
1
1000 Ohm, 392° F (200° C); 20' (6 m) cable
D010-3000-129 Building Automation RTD Kit,
1
1000 Ohm, 266° F (130° C); 20' (6 m) cable
PORTABLE ULTRASONIC FLOW AND ENERGY METER
DXN SERIES

367. flfi 329FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
3.77
(95.7)
9.45
(240)
7.78
(197.6)
DTTN Transit Time Transducer
DTTL Transit Time Transducer
DTTSU Transit Time Transducer
DT94 Doppler Transducer
1.54
(39.1)
7.00
(177.8)
1.65
(41.9)
4.13
(104.9)
1.70
(43.2)
1.89
(48.0)
3.50
(88.9)
1.70
(43.2)
3.45
(87.6)
1.54
(39.1)
2.50
(63.5)
4.21
(106.9)
2.48
(63.0)
3.90
(99.0)
0.3 1.51.0 2.0
DXN Connection Panel
I/OAuxiliary
Transit Time Transducer (Downstream)
Transit Time Transducer (Upstream)
Doppler Transducer
EthernetUSB
Power/Charger
On/Of Switch
DIMENSIONS
Transducer Pipe Size Requirements
Minimum Pipe O.D. Maximum Pipe O.D.
DTTSU .5" (12 mm) 2.4" (60.3 mm)
DTTN 2" (50 mm) 98" (2500 mm)
DTTL 16" (400 mm) 120" (3050 mm)
DT94 1" (25 mm) 60" (1524 mm)
PORTABLE ULTRASONIC FLOW AND ENERGY METER
DXN SERIES

368. flfi
FLOW 330flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
PORTABLE ULTRASONIC FLOW AND ENERGY METER
DXN SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DXNP Portable Clamp-on Ultrasonic Flow Meter
POWER CORD
A North American
U U.K., Singapore
E Euro
J Japan
C China
SENSOR & HARDWARE KIT
B Basic
T All transit time
H Hybrid
E Energy
F Full
CARRYING CASE
S Standard - Outer case with shoulder strap
APPROVALS
N CE + General Safety, U. S., Canada, and EU
OPTIONS
N None
DXNP Example: DXNP-A-B-S-N-N Po rtable clamp-on
ultrasonic flow meter with North American
power cord, basic sensor and hardware kit,
standard carrying case, CE + General Safety
approvals and no optionsA B S N N

369. flfi 331FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter Model IOG (industrial oval gear
meter), is a modular flow meter design, economical yet
highly accurate and rugged
. The Model IOG is designed for
a variety of chemical applications including petroleum based fluids, water solutions, and any other liquid compatible with the materials of construction
.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
Fluid enters the inlet port and then passes through the metering chamber
. Inside the chamber, fluid forces the
internal gears to rotate before exiting through the outlet port.
Each rotation of the gears displaces a specific v
olume of
fluid
. As the gears rotate, a magnet on each end of the gear
passes a reed switch in the top-mounted register’s circuit board
. The reed switches send pulses to the microprocessor
in the register to change the LED display segments. The
oval gear meter can be used in conjunction with a variety of industrial registers
. See the online documentation for Oval
Gear Meter Registers, ER-420 Flow Rate/Totalizer, and the ER-500 Flow Monitor for more information on the available register options
.
FEATURES
• Compact size
• High accuracy and repeatability
• Factory calibrated (stated in pulses per liter)
• Flow range of 0.067-185 gpm
• Flexibility of installation options (vertical installation or
horizontal installation)
• Low pressure drop
• Minimum number of wearable parts for long product
life and easy field servicing
• Wide range of instrumentation available for control
system interfacing
• Certifcations: UL File#913, CSA
APPLICATION
Due to the rugged nature of this particular flow measurement technology, the Industrial Oval Gear Meter can be used in a number of applications where conventional meters are not acceptable
. Whether the liquid being measured is very
viscous or highly corrosive, the oval gear meter can handle it
. The Industrial Oval Gear Meter is designed for a variety
of applications including petroleum based fluids, water solutions, and any other liquid compatible with the materials of construction
.
Industrial Oval Gear
Rotor Material Operating Temperature Range
Stainless Steel -22° to 240°F (-30° to 120°C)
LCP -22° to 176°F (-30° to 80°C)
Pressure Rating (psi)
Port
Size
Housing
Material
NPT/BSP ANSI 150# ANSI 300#
1/4"
Stainless 1000 - -
Aluminum 1500 - -
1/2"
Stainless 3000
285
-
Aluminum 2000 -
3/4"
Stainless 3000
285
740
Aluminum 2000 -
1"
Stainless 3000
285
740
Aluminum 2000 -
1" HF
Stainless 3000
285
740
Aluminum 2000 -
1-1/2"
Stainless 2000
285
740
Aluminum 1500 -
2"
Stainless 1500
285
740
Aluminum 1000 -
3"
Stainless 1000
285
740
Aluminum 750 -
INDUSTRIAL OVAL GEAR METER
IOG SERIES
Approvals CSA

Warranty
1 year
SPECIFICATIONS

370. flfi
FLOW 332flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
INDUSTRIAL OVAL GEAR METER
IOG SERIES
DIMENSIONS
Port Size A B C D E F G H J K L M N
1/4"
2.17"
(55 mm)
1.54"
(39 mm)
2.05"
(52 mm)
— — — — — — — — — —
1/2"
3.94"
(100 mm)
3.44"
(87.5 mm)
3.62"
(92 mm)
9.70"
(246.4 mm)
5.12"
(130 mm)
8.93"
(226.8 mm)
10.10"
(256.5 mm)
6.69"
(170 mm)
8.45"
(214.6 mm)
7.68"
(195.1 mm)
8.89"
(225.8 mm)
3.94"
(100.2 mm)
4.84"
(122.9 mm)
3/4"
3.94"
(100 mm)
3.84"
(97.5 mm)
3.62"
(92 mm)
10.10"
(256.5 mm)
5.12"
(130 mm)
9.33"
(236.9 mm)
10.50"
(266.7 mm)
6.69"
(170 mm)
8.70"
(220.9 mm)
7.93"
(201.4 mm)
9.14"
(232.2 mm)
3.94"
(100.2 mm)
4.84"
(122.9 mm)
1"
3.94"
(100 mm)
3.84"
(97.5 mm)
3.62"
(92 mm)
10.10"
(256.5 mm)
5.12"
(130 mm)
9.33"
(236.9 mm)
10.50"
(266.7 mm)
6.69"
(170 mm)
8.70"
(220.9 mm)
7.93"
(201.4 mm)
9.14"
(232.2 mm)
3.94"
(100.2 mm)
4.84"
(122.9 mm)
1" HF
3.94"
(100 mm)
3.89"
(98.9 mm)
3.62"
(92 mm)
10.15"
(257.8 mm)
5.12"
(130 mm)
9.38"
(238.3 mm)
10.55"
(268.0 mm)
6.69"
(170 mm)
8.60"
(218.4 mm)
7.83"
(198.8 mm)
9.04"
(229.6 mm)
3.94"
(100.2 mm)
4.84"
(122.9 mm)
1-1/2"
5.51"
(140 mm)
4.93"
(125.3 mm)
4.92"
(125 mm)
11.15"
(283.2 mm)
5.12"
(130 mm)
10.38"
(263.7 mm)
11.51"
(292.4 mm)
8.35"
(212 mm)
8.90"
(226.1 mm)
8.13"
(206.5 mm)
9.31"
(236.5 mm)
— —
2"
5.91"
(150 mm)
5.34"
(135.6 mm)
5.28"
(134 mm)
11.60"
(294.6 mm)
5.12"
(130 mm)
10.83"
(275.1 mm)
11.96"
(303.8 mm)
10.39"
(264 mm)
9.16"
(232.7 mm)
8.39"
(213.1 mm)
9.57"
(243.1 mm)
— —
3"
8.27"
(210 mm)
6.35"
(161.4 mm)
7.09"
(180 mm)
12.57"
(319.3 mm)
5.12"
(130 mm)
11.80"
(299.7 mm)
12.93"
(328.4 mm)
13.54"
(344 mm)
9.58"
(243.3 mm)
8.81"
(223.8 mm)
9.99"
(253.8 mm)
— —

371. flfi 333FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
INDUSTRIAL OVAL GEAR METER
IOG SERIES
FLOW RANGE AND MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
FLOW RANGE
American (gpm) SI (lpm)
Port Size Low High Low High Fluid Viscosity
Accuracy
(%)
Repeatability
(%)
1/4"
.067 2.2 0.25 8.3 > 5.0 cP ± 1.0
± 0.03
0.11 2.2 0.44 8.3 < 5.0 cP ± 2.5
1/2"
0.25 8.0 1.0 30 > 5.0 cP ± 0.5
± 0.03
0.50 6.6 2.0 25 < 5.0 cP ± 2.0
3/4"
0.50 16 2.0 60 > 5.0 cP ± 0.5
± 0.03
1.20 14 4.5 53 < 5.0 cP ± 2.0
1"
0.6 18 2.3 68 > 5.0 cP ± 0.5
± 0.03
1.4 16 5.3 60 < 5.0 cP ± 2.0
1" HF
1.5 45 5.7 170 > 5.0 cP ± 0.5
± 0.03
2.5 40 9.5 151 < 5.0 cP ± 2.0
1-1/2"
2.5 65 9.5 246 > 5.0 cP ± 0.5
± 0.03
4.0 60 15 227 < 5.0 cP ± 1.0
2"
4.0 100 15 379 > 5.0 cP ± 0.5
± 0.03
6.0 100 23 379 < 5.0 cP ± 1.0
3"
5.0 185 19 700 > 5.0 cP ± 0.5
± 0.03
10 185 38 700 < 5.0 cP ± 1.0
MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
Wetted Parts
Port Size Housing Cover Spindle Gears Bearings Magnet O-Ring Bolts
1/4"
316 SS 316 SS
316 SS 316 SS
Fluorosint
500
Neodymium
Au Plated
Aflas
316 SS
6061 Al 6061 Al Viton
1/2"
316 SS 316 SS
316 SS
316 SS Graphalloy
Alnico
Aflas
316 SS
6061 Al 6061 Al LCP Viton
3/4"
316 SS 316 SS
316 SS
316 SS Graphalloy
Alnico
Aflas
316 SS
6061 Al 6061 Al LCP Viton
1"
316 SS 316 SS
316 SS
316 SS Graphalloy
Alnico
Aflas
316 SS
6061 Al 6061 Al LCP Viton
1" HF
316 SS 316 SS
316 SS 316 SS Fluorosint
Neodymium
Ni Plated
Aflas
316 SS
6061 Al 6061 Al Viton
1-1/2"
316 SS 316 SS
316 SS 316 SS Fluorosint
Neodymium
Ni Plated
Aflas
316 SS
6061 Al 6061 Al Viton
2"
316 SS 316 SS
316 SS 316 SS Fluorosint
Neodymium
Ni Plated
Aflas
316 SS
6061 Al 6061 Al Viton
3"
316 SS 316 SS
316 SS 316 SS Fluorosint
Neodymium
Ni Plated
Aflas
316 SS
6061 Al 6061 Al Viton
NOTE: Upon request, additional O-Ring options are Buna-N and EPDM.

372. flfi
FLOW 334flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
INDUSTRIAL OVAL GEAR METER
IOG SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
IOG Industrial Oval Gear Meter
PORT SIZE (for 1/4" port size see the 4 part numbers listed below)
050 1/2 inch port
075 3/4 inch port
100 1 inch port
HF 1 inch high flow
150 1.5 inch port
200 2 inch port
300 3 inch port
HOUSING
SS Stainless Steel
AL Aluminum
CONNECTIONS
NPT National Pipe Thread
BSP Britsh Standard Pipe
150 150 LB Flange
300 300 LB Flange
IOG 050 T1NPT Example: IOG-050-SS-NPT-T1 1.2 inch port, stainless
steel w/ IRL-710 Display w/ Scaled Pulse Output
1/4" Po rt Size Part Numbers
1/4" IOG, Aluminum, NPT - IOG-025-AL-NPT-01 1/4" IOG, Aluminum, BSP - IOG-025-AL-BSP-01 1/4" IOG, Stainless Steel, NPT - IOG-025-SS-NPT-11 1/4" IOG, Stainless Steel, BSP - IOG-025-SS-BSP-11
METER MOUNT REGISTER STANDARD
R0 ILR-700 Local Display w/ Rate and Total T1 ILR-710 Display w/ Scaled Pulse Output
T2 ILR-720 Display w/ Dual Scaled Pulse Output
T3 ILR-730 Local Display w/ Ananlog Output
METER MOUNT NON-SCALED TRANSMITTERS
T4 ILR-740 Unscaled Pulse Output
T5 ILR-741 Unscaled Pulse Output, Explosion Proof
METER MOUNT REGISTER LARGE DISPLAY
R1 ER-420 Scalable Rate Flow Counter 115-230 VAC
RJ ER-420 Scalable Rate Flow Counter 24 VDC RK ER-420 Scalable Rate Flow Counter, Loop Po wered
RL ER-500 Standard RM ER-500 Advanced w/ Modbus
NO REGISTER or TRANSMITTER
RX None
SS

373. flfi 335FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter Recordall Compound Series meters
meet or exceed the most recent revision of AWWA Standard
C700 and are available in a leadfree bronze alloy
. The
Compound Series meters comply with the lead-free provisions of the Safe Drinking Water Act, are certified to NSF/ANSI Standards 61 and 372 (Trade Designation: LL-NS) and carry the NSF-61 mark on the housing
. All components
of the lead-free bronz
e alloy meter (housing, measuring
element, seals, and so on) comprise the certified system
.
Badger Meter Recordall
®
Compound Series meters combine
two metering technologies in one innovative package
. A
positiv
e displacement chamber measures low flow, while a
turbine chamber records high flow
.
OPERATION
At low flow rates, the Compound Series meter diverts water up through a bypass to the disc chamber
. Leaving the
chamber’s outlet port, water flows beyond the turbine element and main valve
. As the flow rate increases, a pressure
differential is created that opens the main valve. The water
then flows straight through the turbine chamber. In addition, a
por
tion still flows through the disc chamber before exiting the
meter
.
METER INSTALLATION
The meter is designed for installations where flow is in one direction only
. A separate strainer is provided to ensure
optimum flow conditioning and protection of the measuring element
. Companion flanges for installation of meters on
various pipe types and sizes are available in cast iron or NL bronze as an option
.
FEATURES
• Offered in four sizes
• Patented design that eliminates the need for a trigger
valve and maintains crossover accuracy
• Permanently sealed, tamper-resistant register or encoder
APPLICATION
Use the Recordall Compound meter for measuring potable
cold water in commercial and industrial applications where
flow is in one direction only
. The meter is an ideal choice
for facilities that experience rapid and wide fluctuations in water demand, such as hospitals, universities, residential complexes and manufacturing or processing facilities
.
Compound Series Family
•
An optional summator can be provided as an integral
part of the register assembly. All register options are
removable from the meter without disrupting water
service
•
Certifcations: NSF/ANSI Standard 61 Certified, Annex G
RECORDALL® COMPOUND SERIES METER
RCDL COMPOUND SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
Compound Series Model 2" (50 mm) 3" (80 mm) 4" (100 mm) 6" (150 mm)
Meter Flanges, Class 150 2" elliptical or round 3" round 4" round 6" round
(50 mm) (80 mm) (100 mm) (150 mm)
Typical Operating Range 0.5…200 gpm 0.5…450 gpm 0.75…1000 gpm 0.75…2000 gpm
(100% ± 1.5%) (0.1…45 m
3
/h) (0.1…102 m
3
/h) (0.17…227 m
3
/h) (0.17…454.4 m
3
/h)
Low Flow Registration
(97% minimum)
0.25 gpm (0.06 m
3
/h) 0.25 gpm (0.06 m
3
/h) 0.375 gpm (0.09 m
3
/h) 0.375 gpm (0.09 m
3
/h)
Maximum Continuous Flow 170 gpm (38.3 m
3
/h) 400 gpm (90.3 m
3
/h) 800 gpm (181.6 m
3
/h) 1500 gpm (340.5 m
3
/h)
Pressure Loss at Maximum
Continuous Flow
5.4 psi at 170 gpm 6.0 psi at 400 gpm 11.0 psi at 800 gpm 9.3 psi at 1500 gpm
(0.38 bar at 38.3 m
3
/h) (0.41 bar at 90.3 m
3
/h) (0.75 bar at 181.6 m
3
/h) (0.64 bar at 340.5 m
3
/h)
Crossover Flow Rate, Typical 12 gpm 12 gpm 20 gpm 30 gpm
Pressure Loss at Crossover 3.5 psi (0.24 bar) 4.0 psi (0.28 bar) 4.0 psi (0.28 bar) 5.0 psi (0.35 bar)
Minimum Crossover Accuracy 97% 97% 97% 95%
Maximum Operating Pressure 150 psi (10 bar)
Maximum Operating
Temperature
105° F (41° C)
Test Plug 1-1/2" 2"

374. flfi
FLOW 336flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
RECORDALL® COMPOUND SERIES METER
RCDL COMPOUND SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
UM1-0008-6032 2" Compound Meter with Pulse
UM1-0008-6034 3" Compound Meter with Pulse
UM1-0008-6035 4" Compound Meter with Pulse
UM1-0008-6037 6" Compound Meter with Pulse
B
E
D
C
F
A
B
E
D
A
C
F
Elliptical Flange (2" only)
Round Flange
DIMENSIONS
Compound Series Model
2" Elliptical
(50 mm)
2" Round
(50 mm) 3" (80 mm) 4" (100 mm) 6" (150 mm)
Meter & Pipe Size 2" (50 mm) 3" (80 mm) 4" (100 mm) 6" (150 mm)
Net Weight 45 lb (20.4 kg) 71.5 lb (32.4 kg) 85 lb (38.4 kg) 152 lb (68.7 kg)
Shipping Weight 63 lb (28.5 kg) 99.5 lb (45 kg) 120 lb (53.8 kg) 200 lb (90.4 kg)
Length (A) 15-1/4" * (387 mm) 17" (432 mm) 20" (508 mm)** 24" (610 mm)
Width (B ) 7-3/8" (187 mm) 9-1/4" (235 mm) 9-1/8" (232 mm) 12-3/8" (314 mm)
Height (C) 5-7/8" (149 mm) 6-5/8" (168 mm) 7-1/4" (184 mm) 8-7/8" (225 mm)
Flange (D) 5/8" (16 mm) 3/4" (19 mm) 7/8" (22 mm) 15/16" (24 mm)
Bolt Circle (E) 4-1/2" (114 mm) 4-3/4" (121 mm) 6" (152 mm) 7-1/2" (190.5 mm) 9-1/2" (241 mm)
Centerline (C) to Base (F) 2-3/4" (70 mm) 3-5/8" (92 mm) 4-1/4" (108 mm) 5-3/8" (137 mm)
Number of Bolts 2 4 4 8 8
* Adapter available to increase total length to 17” (432 mm).
**Adapter available to increase total length to 24” (610 mm).

375. flfi 337FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
RECORDALL® NUTATING DISC METERS
RCDL NUTATING DISC
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter Recordall Model Nutating Disc Series
meters meet or exceed the most recent revision of AWWA
Standard C700 and are available in a lead-free bronze alloy
.
The meters comply with the lead-free pro
visions of the Safe
Drinking Water Act, are certified to NSF/ANSI Standards 61 and 372 (Trade Designation: M25-LL) and carry the NSF-61 mark on the housing
. All components of the lead-free bronze
alloy meter (housing, measuring element, seals, and so on) comprise the certified system
.
Operation: Water flows through the meter’s strainer and into
the measuring chamber where it causes the disc to nutate.
The disc
, which moves freely, nutates on its own ball, guided
by a thrust roller
. A drive magnet transmits the motion of the
disc to a follower magnet located within the permanently sealed register
. The follower magnet is connected to the
register gear train. The gear train reduces the disc nutations
into volume totalization units displayed on the register or encoder face
.
Operating Performance: The Recordall Nutating Disc
Series meters meet or exceed registration accuracy for the low flow rates (95%), normal operating flow rates (100 ± 1
.5%), and maximum continuous operation flow rates as
specifically stated in AWWA Standard C700.
Construction: Recordall Nutating Disc Series meter
construction, which complies with ANSI/AWWA standard C700, consists of three basic components: meter housing, measuring chamber, and permanently sealed register
. The
water meter is available in a lead-free bronze alloy with externally-threaded spuds
. A corrosion-resistant engineered
polymer mater
ial is used for the measuring chamber
.
SPECIFICATIONS
Industrial RCDL Disc Meters
APPLICATION
For use in measurement of potable cold water in residential,
commercial and industrial services where flow is in one
direction only
.
MODEL
25 35 70 120 170
T
ypical Operating Range
(100% ± 1.5%)
0.5…25 gpm
(0.11…5.7 m
3
/hr)
0.75…35 gpm
(0.17…7.9 m
3
/hr)
1.25…70 gpm
(0.28…16 m
3
/hr)
2.5…120 gpm
(0.57…27 m
3
/hr)
2.5…170 gpm
(0.57…39 m
3
/hr)
Low Flow (Min. 95.0%) n/a n/a 0.75 gpm (0.17 m
3
/hr) 1.25 gpm (0.28 m
3
/hr) 1.5 gpm (0.34 m
3
/hr)
Low Flow (Min. 97.0%) n/a
0.375 gpm
(0.085 m
3
/hr)
n/a n/a n/a
Low Flow (Min. 98.5%)0.25 gpm (0.057 m
3
/hr) n/a n/a n/a n/a
Maximum Continuous
Operation
15 gpm (3.4 m
3
/hr) 25 gpm (5.7 m
3
/hr) 50 gpm (11.3 m
3
/hr) 80 gpm (18 m
3
/hr) 100 gpm (23 m
3
/hr)
Pressure Loss at Maximum
Continuous Operation
3.5 psi at 15 gpm
(0.24 bar at 3.4 m
3
/hr)
5.0 psi at 25 gpm
(0.37 bar at 5.7 m
3
/hr)
6.5 psi at 50 gpm
(0.45 bar at 11.3 m
3
/hr)
4.8 psi at 80 gpm
(0.33 bar at 18 m
3
/hr)
3.3 psi at 100 gpm
(0.23 bar at 23 m
3
/hr)
Maximum Operating
Temperature
80°F (26°C)
Maximum Operating
Pressure
150 psi (10 bar)
Measuring Element Nutating disc, positive displacement
Meter Connections
Available in NL bronze
and thermoplastic to
fit 0.625" (DN 15mm)
spud thread bore
diameter sizes
Available in NL bronze
and engineered polymer
to fit 0.75" (DN 20
mm) spud thread bore
diameter sizes
Available in NL bronze
and engineered polymer
to fit 1.0" (DN 25 mm)
spud thread bore
diameter sizes
1.5" AWWA two-bolt el-
liptical flange, drilled or
1.5…11.5 NPT internal
pipe threads
2.0" AWWA two-bolt
elliptical flange, drilled
or 2…11.5 NPT internal
pipe threads
Test Plugs n/a n/a n/a
1.0" NPT test plug (TP)
available on elliptical
long and short versions
Optional 1.0" NPT test
plug (TP) available on
elliptical long and short
versions
Connections: Tailpieces/Unions for installations of meters on
various pipe types and sizes, including misaligned pipes, are
available as an option
.
Certifications: NSF/ANSI Standards 61 and 372 Certified

376. flfi
FLOW 338flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
RECORDALL® NUTATING DISC METERS
RCDL NUTATING DISC
Meter Size Meter Model A Laying
Length
B Height Reg. C Centerline Base Width Approx. Shipping
Weight
5
/
8
" (15 mm) 25 7-
1
/
2
" (190 mm) 4-
15
/
16
" (125 mm) 1-
11
/
16
" (42 mm) 4-
1
/
4
" (108 mm) 4-
1
/
2
lb (2 kg)
3
/
4
" (20 mm) 35 7-
1
/
2
" (190 mm) 5-
1
/
4
" (133 mm) 1-
5
/
8
" (41 mm) 5" (127 mm) 5-
1
/
2
lb (2.5 kg)
1" (25 mm) 70 10-
3
/
4
" (273 mm) 6-
1
/
2
" (165 mm) 2-
5
/
16
" (59 mm) 7-
3
/
4
" (197 mm) 11-
1
/
2
lb (5.2 kg)
1-
1
/
2
" (40
mm)
120 EL Hex
120 EL, TP
12-
5
/
8
" (321 mm) 7" (178 mm) 2-
3
/
8
" (60 mm) 8-
3
/
4
" (222 mm) 19 lb (8.6 kg)
2" (50 mm)
170 EL Hex
170 EL, TP
15-
1
/
4
" (387 mm) 8" (203 mm) 2-
7
/
8
" (73 mm) 9-
1
/
2
" (241 mm) 30 lb (13.6 kg)
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
UM1-0008-6014 Model 25 Pulse Water Meter
UM1-0007-5863 Model 35 Pulse Water Meter
UM1-0007-2649 Model 70 Pulse Water Meter
UM1-0008-6016 Model 120 Pulse Water Meter
UM1-0008-6017 Model 170 Pulse Water Meter
Meter Spud and Connection Sizes
Size Designation x
“L”
Laying
Length
“B”
Bore Dia.
Coupling
Nut and
Spud
Thread
Tailpiece Pipe
Thread (NPT)
5/8" x 7-1/2" 5/8" 3/4" (5/8") 1/2"
Meter Spud and Connection Sizes
Size Designation x
“L”
Laying
Length
“B”
Bore Dia.
Coupling
Nut and
Spud
Thread
Tailpiece
Pipe
Thread
(NPT)
3/4" x 7-1/2" 3/4" 1" (3/4") 3/4"
3/4" x 9" 3/4" 1" (3/4") 3/4"
3/4" x 1" x 9" 3/4" 1-1/4" (1") 1"
Meter Spud and Connection Sizes
Size
Designation
x
“L”
Laying
Length
“B”
Bore Dia.
Coupling
Nut and
Spud
Thread
Tailpiece
Pipe
Thread
(NPT)
1" x 10-3/4" 1" 1-1/4" (1") 1"

377. flfi 339FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter Recordall Turbo Series meters meet or
exceed the most recent revision of AWWA Standard C701 Class
II Standards and are available in a lead-free bronze alloy for sizes
1-1/2" through 10" and cast iron for 12" meters
. Turbo Series
meters comply with the lead-free provisions of the Safe Drinking Water Act
. Sizes 1-1/2" through 10" meters are also certified
to NSF/ANSI Standards 61 and 372 (Trade Designation: Turbo Series LL-NS) and carry the NSF-61 mark on the housing
. All
components of the lead-free allo
y meter (housing, measuring
element, seals and so on) comprise the certified system
.
Operation & Performance: Direct magnetic drive is achieved
when the magnet carrier is driven by a gear train coupled to the rotor
. The gear train consists of two sets of gears connected by a
vertical transmission shaft. One gear set is at the magnet carrier,
the other is a worm gear set at the rotor shaft. When water flows
into the Turbo Series meter measuring element, it contacts the multi-vaned rotor
. The resulting rotor rotation is then transmitted
by magnetic coupling to a sealed register or encoder. The direct
magnetic drive is built to provides a reliable meter-to-registration coupling
.
FEATURES
• Models 160 through 6200 are designed for 1-1/2" through
12" applications
• Direct coupled turbine based on an exclusive "floating
rotor"design that reduces bearing friction—and associated wear and tear
•
Low pressure loss for improved system efficiency
• Exceptional registration accuracy across low flow rate,
normal operating flow rate and maximum continuous operation flow
•
Permanently sealed, tamper-resistant register or encoder
• Integral strainer option for sizes 1-1/2" through 4" help
protect your system from damaging debris and related downtime
•
NSF/ANSI Standards 61 and 372 Certified
APPLICATION
Recordall Turbo Series meters are designed for cold water, commercial and industrial applications where flows are consistent medium to high flows
. Applications include hotels, apartment
buildings, irrigations centers and manufacturing and processing plants
. Turbo Series meters help reduce day-today maintenance
costs while delivering accurate and efficient performance.
Industrial Turbo Meters
RECORDALL® TURBO SERIES METERS
RCDL TURBO SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
Turbo Series Model
160
1-1/2" (40 mm)
200
2" (50 mm)
450
3" (80 mm)
1000
4" (100 mm)
2000
6" (150 mm)
3500
8" (200 mm)
5500
10" (250 mm)
6200
12" (300 mm)
Meter Flanges AWWA
125 Pound Class
Elliptical Elliptical or Round Round Round Round Round Round
Round
AWWA 125 lb class
Typical Operating
Range (100% ± 1.5%)
4…200 gpm
(0.9…45.4 m
3
/h)
4…310 gpm
(0.9…70.4 m
3
/h)
5…550 gpm
(1.1…124.9 m
3
/h)
10…1250 gpm
(2.3…284 m
3
/hr)
20…2500 gpm
(4.5…568 m
3
/h)
30…4500 gpm
(6.8…1022 m
3
/h)
50…7000 gpm
(11.4…1590 m
3
/h)
90…8800 gpm
(20.5…1998 m
3
/h)
Typical Low Flow
(95% min.)
2.5 gpm
(0.6 m
3
/h)
2.5 gpm
(0.6 m
3
/h)
4 gpm
(0.9 m
3
/h)
6 gpm
(1.4 m
3
/h)
12 gpm
(2.7 m
3
/h)
20 gpm
(4.5 m
3
/h)
30 gpm
(6.8 m
3
/h)
65 gpm
(14.8 m
3
/h)
Max. Continuous Flow
160 gpm
(36 m
3
/h)
200 gpm
(45.4 m
3
/h)
450 gpm
(102.2 m
3
/h)
1000 gpm
(227.1 m
3
/h)
2000 gpm
(454 m
3
/h)
3500 gpm
(795 m
3
/h)
5500 gpm
(1250 m
3
/h)
6200 gpm
(1408 m
3
/h)
Maximum Intermittent
Flow
200 gpm
(45.4 m
3
/h)
310 gpm
(70.4 m
3
/h)
550 gpm
(124.9 m
3
h)
1250 gpm
(284 m
3
h)
2500 gpm
(568 m
3
/h)
4500 gpm
(1022 m
3
/h)
7000 gpm
(1590 m
3
h)
8800 gpm
(1988 m
3
/h)
Pressure Loss at Max.
Continuous Flow
3.8 psi
(0.26 bar)
3.1 psi
(0.21 bar)
1.8 psi
(0.12 bar)
7.3 psi
(0.50 bar)
4.8 psi
(0.33 bar)
2.5 psi
(0.17 bar)
1.6 psi
(0.11 bar)
0.8 psi
(0.05 bar)
Pressure Loss at Max.
Continuous Flow: With
Integral Strainer
9.9 psi
(0.68 bar)
8.3 psi
(0.57 bar)
5 psi
(0.43 bar)
17.8 psi
(1.2 bar)
—
Max. Operating
Pressure
150 psi (10 bar)
Max. Operating
Temperature
120° F (49° C)
Optional Integral
Strainer
Built into inlet end.
Removable cover plate permits access to strainer for cleaning.
—
Optional External
Strainer
— Available for Models 200, 450, 1000, 2000, 3500, 5500 and 6200.
Test Plug Standard with integral strainer; optional for other models. Optional for Models 2000 and 3500. —

378. flfi
FLOW 340flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
RECORDALL® TURBO SERIES METERS
RCDL TURBO SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
UM1-0007-6445 1 1/2" Turbine Water Meter with Pulse
UM1-0008-6020 2" Turbine Water Meter with Pulse
UM1-0008-6021 3" Turbine Water Meter with Pulse
UM1-0008-6023 4" Turbine Water Meter with Pulse
UM1-0008-6024 6" Turbine Water Meter with Pulse
UM1-0008-6025 8" Turbine Water Meter with Pulse
UM1-0008-6026 10" Turbine Water Meter with Pulse
DIMENSIONS OF METERS WITH INTEGRAL STRAINER
Turbo Series Model 160 200 200 450 1000
Meter Flanges Elliptical Elliptical Round Round Round
Meter & Pipe Size 1-1/2" (40 mm) 2" (50 mm) 2" (50 mm) 3" (80 mm) 4" (100 mm)
Net Weight 14.3 lb (6.5 kg) 24 lb (11 kg) 26 lb (12 kg) 49 lb (22 kg) 60 lb (27.22 kg)
Shipping Weight 16.8 lb (7.6 kg) 28 lb (13 kg) 30 lb (14 kg) 55 lb (25 kg) 70 lb (31.75 kg)
Number of Bolts 2 2 4 4 8
NPT Test Port & Test
Plug (Standard)
1" (25.4 mm) 1-1/2" (40 mm) 1-1/2" (40 mm) 2" (50 mm) 2" (50 mm)
Length (A) 13" (330 mm) 17" (432 mm) 17" (432 mm) 19" (483 mm) 23" (584 mm)
Width (B ) 5-7/32" (133 mm) 5-27/32" (148 mm) 6" (152 mm) 7-1/2" (191 mm) 9" (229 mm)
Height (C) 6-9/32" (159 mm) 6-1/2" (165 mm) 7-3/32" (180 mm) 8-15/16" (227 mm) 9-21/32" (245 mm)
Flange (D) 51/64" (20 mm) 27/32" (47 mm) 5/8" (16 mm) 27/32" (21 mm) 13/16" (21 mm)
Bolt Circle (E) 4" (102 mm) 4-1/2" (114 mm) 4-3/4" (121 mm) 6" (152 mm) 7-1/2" (191 mm)
Centerline (F) 1-27/32" (47 mm) 2-1/16" (52 mm) 2-5/8" (67 mm) 3-19/32" (91 mm) 4-5/16" (109 mm)

379. flfi 341FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
INSERTION TYPE AIRFLOW SENSING ELEMENT
FE-1000 SERIES
Accuracy Within 2% of actual flow (even in
moderately turbulent flows) with
approach angle variation of ±20°,
when installed in accordance with
published recommendations
Connections
1/4" compression, suitable for use
with thermoplastic or copper tubing; thermoplastic tubing requires the use of tubing inserts, which are supplied with the fittings
Velocity Range
100 to 10,000 fpm
Operating Temperature 350°F (177°C) continuous operation
(in air)
400°F (204°C) intermittent operation
(in air)
Operating Humidity 0 to 100% RH, non-condensing
Materials Of Construction
6063-T5 anodized aluminum
(standard)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Paragon Controls FE-1000 insertion type airflow sensing element is designed for quick, easy installation through a small cutout in the existing ductwork
. Where
multiple elements are required for proper duct traversing, the output ports are manifolded together, external to the ductwork
. Each element is furnished complete with mounting
hardware, sealing gaskets and all brass compression fittings required to manifold the elements together
.
FEATURES
• Multiple total and static pressure sensing ports along
the length of the element
• Averaging internal manifold
• Insensitive to flow angle variations of as much as ±20°
when faced in the normal direction of flow
• ±2% accuracy throughout the velocity rages of 100 fpm
and over
SPECIFICATIONS
FE-1000
MODEL DESCRIPTION FE-1000 Insertion type airflow sensing element
DIMENSIONS
1 Inches
2 Millimeters
DUCT CONFIGURATION
1 Rectangular
2 Circular
3 Oval
ELEMENT LENGTH (SPECIFY)
INTERNAL INSULATION (SPECIFY)
MATERIAL TYPE
1 Aluminum (standard)
MOUNTING CONFIGUATION
1 Insertion (standard)
2 Internal Mount
3 Bayonet Tip
TAKEOFF CONFIGURATION
1 1/8-27 Female NPT (standard)

380. flfi
FLOW 342flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
FAN INLET AIRFLOW SENSING ELEMENT
FE-1050 SERIES
Accuracy Within 2% of actual flow when
installed in accordance with
published recommendations
Connections 1/4" compression, suitable for use
with thermoplastic or copper tubing; thermoplastic tubing requires the use of tubing inserts, which are supplied with the fittings
Velocity Range
100 to 8,000 fpm
Operating Temperature 350°F (177°C) continuous operation
(in air)
400°F (204°C) intermittent operation
(in air)
Operating Humidity 0 to 100% RH, non-condensing
Materials Of Construction
6063-T5 anodized aluminum
(standard)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Paragon Controls FE-1050 is an airflow measuring element assembly specifically designed for installation in the inlet cone of centrifugal fans or inlet bell of vane-axial fans
.
The design of these pr
imary elements provides a means
of accurate measurement of fan capacity along with ease of installation. Each assembly is complete with two airflow
measuring elements and pivot mounting hardware.
FEATURES
• Multiple total and static pressure sensing ports along
the length of the element
• Averaging internal manifold
• Insensitive to flow angle variations of as much as ±20°
when faced in the normal direction of flow
• ±2% accuracy throughout the velocity ranges of 100
fpm and over
SPECIFICATIONS
FE-1050

381. flfi 343FLOW
FLOW
6
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Note: The 0.585 inch diameter probe is used fo r minimum fan inlets less than
or equal to 28 inches and the 1 inch diameter probe is used fo r minimum fan
inlets greater than 28 inches.
ORDERING INFORMATION
FAN INLET AIRFLOW SENSING ELEMENT
FE-1050 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
FE-1050 Fan inlet airflow sensing element
DIMENSIONS
1 Inches
2 Millimeters
INLET CONFIGURATION
1 Single inlet (SWSI)
2 Double inlet (DWDI)
MOUNTING CONFIGUATION
1 Minimum inlet diameter (standard)
2 Mid-bell installation
DIAMETER OF SENSING PLANE (SPECIFY)
MATERIAL TYPE
1 Aluminum

382. flfi
FLOW 344flfi
FLOW
6
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
MEASURING AIRFLOW
Averaging Differential Pressure Devices
To take some of the guesswork out of determining average
duct velocity, an averaging tube may be used
. An averag-
ing tube operates basically the same way as a pitot tube to determine average duct velocity pressure, except instead of measuring one point within the duct, the averaging tube mea- sures multiple points to determine a true average velocity
. As
an added benefit, some averaging tubes are designed so that the differential pressure measured is two to three times the actual velocity pressure
. This amplification is accomplished
by the shape and design of the tube and results in greater resolution and the ability to measure lower air velocities
.
Device Placement in the Duct Wh
en measuring airflow with either a pitot tube or an aver-
aging tube, the best results will be obtained when the flow measuring device is located at least 7
.5 duct diameters down-
stream and 1.5 diameters upstream from any disturbance
(elbows, obstructions, etc.). Also, for best results, straighten-
ing vanes may be used 1.5 to 5 diameters upstream of the
flow measuring device.
In Summary
• Only the average duct velocity and duct cross-section area
must be known to determine airflow.
• By piping the total pressure to the high-pressure port
and the static pressure to the low-pressure port of a
differential pressure transmitter, the velocity pressure will
be measured
.
• When the duct center velocity is measured with a pitot
tube, the average velocity will be approximately 90% of the measured velocity
.
• By using an averaging tube, the average duct velocity
may be measured directly. The averaging tube may
also amplify pressure for greater resolution and higher accuracy at low flow rates
. Flow coefficients for use with
averaging tubes will be provided by the manufacturer.
• Always install airflow measurement devices at least 7.5
duct diameters downstream and 1.5 diameters upstream
of anything in the duct that could cause turbulence.
FIGURE 2. FLOW COEFFICIENTS FOR DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
(for use with pitot tubes only)

Differential
Pressure Maximum Flow
Transmitter Air Velocity Coefficient
Range (fpm) (C
f
)
"W.C.
0 .1 1265 316
0 .2 1790 448
0 .3 2190 549
0 .5 2830 708
1 .0 4000 1000
2 .0 5660 1420
3 .0 6930 1733
5 .0 8950 2240
QUICK TIPS
(for use with pitot tubes only)
By applying the two simple facts below, air velocity
may be quickly estimated in the field .
Fact 1. 4000 fpm velocity = 1" velocity pressure
Fact 2. Velocity pressure va ries as the flow squared or
P
2
= V
2
or V
2
= P
2

P
1
V
1
V
1
P
1
Example:
If a velocity pressure is know n, the ve locity may be
calculated by using 4000 fpm and 1" diffe rential as
V
1
and P
1
. Assume the ve locity pressure is 0 .25" .
What is the air ve locity?
V
2
= P
2
or V
2
= 0 .25
V
1
P
1
4000 1
or V
2
= 2000 fpm
If a velocity is know n, velocity pressure may be
calculated in a similar manner . Assume ve locity is
1000 fpm, what is velocity pressure?
P
2
= V
2
or P
2
= 1000
P
1
V
1
1 4000
or P
2
= 0 .0625" W .C .
22
2
()()
()

383. HUMIDITY
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GMD-20 | p. 353
IAQ-A | p. 366
CD-A | p. 349
BA/420CO | p. 377
GDC-150 | p. 384
RLD-134A | p. 404
GAS & SPECIALTY
SENSORS
We Carry A Wide Array of Brands to Meet Your Job’s Specified Needs.

384. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
IAQ-A | p. 366
GDS | p. 382
SM-501 | p. 411
GAS &
SPECIALTY
SENSORS
CO2/IAQ
KCD Series — Carbon Dioxide Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
T5100, 8041 — Carbon Dioxide Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
CD-A Series — Carbon Dioxide Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
C7232 Series — Carbon Dioxide Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
GMD20, GMW21 Series — Carbon Dioxide Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
045, 050 SenseAir Series — CO2 Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
T8000 Series
— CO2, Humidity and Temperature Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
KCO2 Series — CO2 and CO2/RH Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
KTS Series — Tri-Sense Transmitters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
BA/BS3xxC Series — CO2, Relative Humidity and Temperature Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
BA/BS3xxV Series — VOC/Indoor Air Quality Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
IAQ-A Series — Indoor Air Quality Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
IAQ-N Series — Network Compatible Indoor Air Quality Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
CM-E1, GD-2B, HD-11 — Toxic and Combustible Gas Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Calibration UCK Universal Calibration Kit — Universal Gas Calibration Kit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Refrigerant Verification Kits — Refrigerant Verification Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Gas-Series, NIOSHSCBA — Gas Cylinders and Safety Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Calibration Gases — Calibration Gas Cylinders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
1309K Series Gas Calibration Kits — Gas Calibration Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Carbon Monoxide KCO Series — Carbon Monoxide Sensor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
KCOP Series — Carbon Monoxide Detectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
KCOC Series — Combination Carbon Monoxide Sensor with CO2, RH, or VOC. . . . . . . . .373
TP1-M — Carbon Monoxide Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
BA/420CO Series — Carbon Monoxide Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
CM6, GD6,TX-6-AM,TX-6-HS, TX-6-ND — Toxic and Combustible Gas Sensors. . . . . . . . .380
PH/Conductivity 50000 Conductivity Series — Conductivity Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
50000 pH and ORP Series — pH or ORP Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Refrigerants VA301EM
— Gas Detection Expansion Module
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
HGM-SZ — Refrigerant Gas Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
HGM-MZ — Multi-Zone Refrigerant Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
VASQN8X — Multipoint Sample Draw Gas Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
RLD-5 — Refrigerant Leak Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
RLD-134A — Refrigerant Leak Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
IR-F9 Series — Infrared Refrigerant Gas Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
AGM-SZ — Single Zone Ammonia Gas Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Smoke Detectors SM-501 Series — Duct Smoke Detectors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
SL-2000 Series — Duct Smoke Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
MS Series — Remote Accessories for SM-501 and SL-2000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
D4120 — Photoelectric Duct Smoke Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
D4120 Series Remote Accessories — D4120 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
HS-100 Series — Plenum Smoke Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
2151 and B114 Series — Pendant Smoke Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Toxic and Combustibles GDS Series — Toxic and Combustible Gas Detector
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
GDC150 — Toxic and Combustible Gas Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
SPC3 Series — Single Point Transmitter and Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
GDD Series — Dual Sensor Gas Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
GDC 350 — Toxic and Combustible Stand-alone Gas Detector/Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
GDN Series — Network Compatible Gas Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
VA301C-DLC — Gas Detection Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
OS-1 — Oxygen Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Vibration 140T — Vibration Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
550 — Vibration Transmitter / Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
VK Series — Vibration Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Weather A70 Series — Weather Instruments
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
DS-2B — Rain/Snow Sensor Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434

385. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS
KCD SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KCD Series was designed to offer an economical,
reliable, non-dispersive infrared carbon dioxide sensor. It
measures en
vironmental carbon dioxide levels for use in
demand-controlled ventilation, air-quality monitoring, and other HVAC applications in accordance with ASHRAE standards
. Voltage or milliamp analog output and convenient
terminals on the wall mount make installation both simple and trouble-free
. The analog output is available in 0-10 VDC or
4-20 mA, over the industry standard 0-2000 ppm CO2 range.
Also has 1000 ohm platin
um 385 curve or 10K ohm Either
Type II or II sensor options avalible
.
FEATURES
• 24 V •
0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA output
• 0-2000 ppm CO2 range
• Wall-mount and duct versions
• Reverse polarity protected
• Simple push-button calibration
• Factory calibrated
• Temperature option
Supply Voltage 20-28 VAC @ 8 VA, 50/60 Hz,
reverse polarity protection or 18-30 VDC @ 330 mA
Signal Output
0-10V or 4-20 mA (600Ω max)
model dependant
Accuracy ±3% of reading or ±40 ppm
Repeatability ±20 ppm
Measurement Range 0-2000 ppm CO2
Sensing Technology Non-dispersive IR (NDIR)
Calibration Push button @ 2000 ppm
Calibration Interval 5 years
Life Expectancy 10 years typical
Visual Indication LED flashes above 1000 ppm of CO2
Warm Up Time 3 minutes
Response Time <1 minute
Temperature Thermistor
10,000Ω Type II & III
RTD 1,000Ω Platinum 385 curve
Operating Humidity 0% to 99% RH (noncondensing)
Operating Temperature 50° to 122°F (10° to 50°C)
Dimensions Wall
4.5"H x 2.8"W x 1.0"D
(11.4 x 7.3 x 2.54 cm)
Duct 4.5"H x 2.8"W x 6.9"D
(11.4 x 7.3 x 17.5 cm)
Duct probe 1.7" (4.3 cm) diameter
Weight
Wall 0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Duct 0.5 lb (0.23 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
345GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

386. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS
KCD SERIES
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KCD CO
2 sensor
MOUNTING
W Wall mount
D Duct mount
ANALOG OUTPUT
V 0-10 VDC
A 4-20 mA
T85 1kΩ 385 cur ve RTD
T24 10kΩ Type II thermistor
T3 10kΩ Type III thermistor
Example: KCD-W-V-T3 Wall-mount CO 2 sensor
with 0-10 VDC output
KCD WVT3
+–+–+–
Power input
20-30 VAC
18-30 VDC
Current or vo ltage output.
Two ‘–’ term inals are
electrically connected
24 VAC/VDC
OUTPUT
Temperature
(optional)
Wall Mount
Duct Mount - With Temp
+-+-

J

“
(
Power input
18-30 VDC 20-28 VAC
(polarity applies to VDC only)
Current output
4-20 mA
(optional)
0-10 V
Jumper "off"
0-5 V
Jumper "on"
OUTPUT 1 24 VAC/VDC
Temperature
(optional)
+-
Duct Mount - Without Temp
CO2 Cal Po rt UNUSED
+
-
+
-
24 VOLTS
AC or DC
CO2 OUTPUT
Voltage or current output '–' terminals of OUTPUT and power input are electrically connected.
Power input
18-30 VDC
20-28 VAC
(polarity applies to VDC only)
I V
Jumper
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994
GAS-CO2-2000 2000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L 437
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
346
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

387. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS
T5100, 8041
Supply Voltage 18-30 VAC @ 1.8 VA, 50/60 Hz
reverse polarity protected or 18-42
VDC @ 15 mA, 18-30 VAC @ 0.7 VA,
50/60 Hz; 18-42 VDC @ 29 mA
Signal Output 0-10 VDC, 0-5/10 VDC filed
selectable, 4- 20 mA
Maximum Output Impedance mA
500 Ω
Minimum Output Impedance VDC
1000Ω
Accuracy whichever is greater ±40 ppm or 3%
reading, Whichever is greater ±30 ppm or 3% reading
Linearity
<1% of Full scale
Stability <2% Full scale over life of sensor
Temperature Dependence
0.1% Full scale per °F
(0.2% FS per °C)
Measurement Range 0-2000 ppm (factory setting)
Calibration Interval None, uses ABC Logic (Automatic
Background Calibration)
Warm Up Time <2 minutes operational, 10 minutes
to maximum accuracy
Response Time 3-5 minutes for 90% step change
Pressure 0.13% of reading per 0.54" W.C.
(1 mm Hg)
Wiring Terminations Leads, Terminals
Operating Humidity 0% to 95% RH, noncondensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Dimensions 3.05"H x 3.05"W x 1.58"D
(7.46 x 7.46 x 4.02 cm)
4.6"H x 3.2"W x 1.0"D
(11.6 x 8.1 x2.5 cm)
Weight 0.5 lb (0.23 kg), 0.4 lb (0.11 kg)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The Amphenol Advanced Sensors Models T5100 and 8041 Carbon Dioxide sensors are designed to monitor the CO2 levels to provide an indication of occupancy for use in demand-controlled ventilation according to ASHRAE Standard 62
. Model T5100 wall-mount carbon dioxide
sensors are designed to monitor the CO2 concentration in a room
. The Model 8041 is a duct-mount sensors with 4"
probes that monitor the carbon dioxide levels inside a duct air stream
. Each model outputs a 0-10 VDC signal representing
a 0-2000 ppm concentration of CO2.
FEATURES
• Analog output, 0-5/10 VDC (field selectable) or 4-20 mA
models
• ABC Logic(TM) automated calibration
• Non-dispersive infrared technology
SPECIFICATIONS
T5100-X
8041
347GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

388. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS
T5100, 8041
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
8041 Duct-mount carbon dioxide sensor, 0-10 VDC analog output, 4" probe
T5100-V Wall-mount carbon dioxide sensor, 0-5/10 VDC analog output, field selectable
T5100-I Wall-mount carbon dioxide sensor,4-20 mA analog output
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
Sensor
7-pin
Connector
Thermistor
Interface
connector
Mounting
holes
Mounting
holes
Slot for
wiring
Wiring:
1 – ground
2 – CO2 (0-5/10 or 4-20 mA)
3 – 24 Volt input
4 – Not Used
5 – Not Used
6 – Not Used
7 – Not Used
T5100
T5100-I
T5100-V
OPTIONS
OUTPUTS
GND
76
STRIP GAUGE
0.25" (6mm)
ICO
2
UIP
J2
POWER
18-30 VAC
RMS
< 2W PEAK
18-42 VDC
AC-/DC-/GND
21
AC+/DC+
OUTPUTS
OPTIONS
UIP
5V-NC
10C-NO
J2
J3
GND
87
V CO
2
CO
2
POWER
18-30 VAC
RMS
< 2W PEAK 18-42 VDC
AC-/DC-/GND
21
AC+/DC+
STRIP GAUGE
0.25" (6mm)
Gasket
(Supplied)
Drill/Punch
1/8" Holes
Duct
Conduit
1. Before installing sensor, note the direction of the
airflow. Ensure all mounting holes are sealed tightly.
2. Drill/Cut one 1-1/2" hole / Punch/Drill one 1/8" hole.
3. Slide sensor into 1-1/2" hole and secure with screws.
4. Connect conduit and make necessary wire connections.
5. Install lid, ensure it snaps into place.
RED - 24V
BROWN - V out
BLACK - Ground
Wiring:
Drill/Cut
1 1/4" Hole
8041
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
348
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

389. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS
CD-A SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Model CD-A represents a new level of economy
in reliable non-dispersive infrared carbon dioxide sensors.
It measures en
vironmental carbon dioxide levels for use
in demand-controlled ventilation, air-quality monitoring, and other HVAC applications in accordance with ASHRAE standards
.Fully isolated analog outputs and a convenient
center wiring terminal make installation both simple and trouble-free
. The analog output is jumper-selectable, 4-20 mA
or 0-10 VDC, over the industry standard 0-2000 ppm CO2 range
. Models are also available with an optional LCD display
and/or control relay with adjustable setpoint.
FEATURES
• 24 V •
0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA analog output, jumper selectable
• 0-2000 ppm CO2 range
• Wall-mount and duct-sampling versions
• Isolation of output and power
• Compact, attractive enclosure
• Optional control relay with adjustable setpoint
• Simple single-point calibration
• Optional LCD display
• Factory calibrated
CD-AD-LCD
CD-AW-LCD
Duct Probe Assembly
(included with above)
Supply Voltage 20-30 VAC @ 2.5 VA or 18-30 VDC
@ 104 mA
Signal Output 0-10 VDC (factory setting) 4-20 mA
(field selectable), 500Ω max
Accuracy ±5% of reading or ±75 ppm,
whiche
ver is greater Max drift (per
year) ±75 ppm Repeatability ±20 ppm
Measurement Range 0-2000 ppm CO2
Sensing Technology Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR)
Calibration Interval Three years, Span only (automatic
electronic zero adjustment)
Life Expectancy 10 years typical
Visual Indication 0.35" LCD (0.88 cm), 4 digit
Warm Up Time 3 minutes
Response Time Less than 1 min
Deadband 50 ppm (alarm)
Relay Setpoint 1000 ppm (field adjustable 700-1300
ppm)
Relay Output N.O. (N.C. field selectable), 2A @
24 VAC
Operating Humidity 0% to 90% RH noncondensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Dimensions Wall
5.2"H x 3.2"W x 1.4"D
(13.2 x 8.1 x 3.6 cm)
Duct 5.2"H x 3.2"W x 3.4"D
(13.2 x 8.1 x 8.6 cm)
Weight
Wall 0.61 lb (0.27 kg)
Duct 1.35 lb (0.61 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
349GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

390. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS
CD-A SERIES
3.5
(8.89)
1.38
(3.08)
5.25
(13.34)
in
(cm)
Sensing Cell
24 VAC/VDC
No Polarity
Optional LCD
Display
*Optional Control Relay
Contacts 2A@
24 VAC/VDC
**Signal
4-20 mA
or 0-10 VDC
Analog
Selector
JP5
* Relay contacts are field-selectable N.O. or N.C. JP5 open -
N.C. closed - N.O. (factory setting)
** Output signal is field-selectable 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA,
fully isolated.
Voltage - outboard and middle pin jumpered
Current - inboard and middle pin jumpered
INSTALLATIONDIMENSIONS
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants)
GAS-CO2-1000 1000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L
89-0018-00 Replacement filter for CD-AD duct probe
The wall-mounted CD-AW must be placed
in an area that is representative of the entire
conditioned space
. Recommended mounting
height is 4' to 6' (1.22 to 1.83m) above the floor.
A
void drafts for locations where occupants may
routinely breathe toward the sensor
.
The duct-sampling style
CD-AD requires a
minimum air velocity of 400 fpm (3 m/s)
. Complete
installation and configuration instructions are included with each unit shipped
.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CD-A
W
CO2 wall mount sensor with analog output
CD-A
W-LCD
CO2 wall mount sensor with analog output, with LCD display
CD-A
W-R
CO2 wall mount sensor with analog output, with relay
CD-A
W-R-LCD
CO2 wall mount sensor with analog output, with LCD display and relay
CD-AD CO2 duct mount sensor with analog output
CD-AD-LCD CO2 duct mount sensor with analog output, with LCD display
CD-AD-R CO2 duct mount sensor with analog output, with relay
CD-AD-R-LCD CO2 duct mount sensor with analog output, with LCD display and relay
ACCESSORIES PAGE

691-K0A
Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
350
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

391. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR
C7232 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Used with HVAC control systems to control building
ventilation, the Honeywell Model C7232 Carbon Dioxide
Sensor measures CO2 concentration in a ventilated space
or duct
. These easy-to-install sensors provide long term CO2
monitoring at a low cost, and they are compact in size with selectable ranges
. They have an analog and relay output,
use non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) technology, and feature a unique corrosion-free sensing chamber for accurate, stable CO2 sensing
. Models are available for wall and duct-mount
applications, with or without an LCD display, and with or without the Honeywell logo
.
FEATURES
• A
status information
• NDIR technology to measure carbon dioxide gas
• Gold-plated sensor for long-term calibration stability
• Analog and relay outputs based on CO2 levels
• Automatic Background Calibration (ABC) algorithm based on long-term evaluation to reduce required maintenance
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±20% @ 3 VA, 50/60 Hz
(Class 2)
Signal Output 0-10, 2-10 VDC, 0-20, 4-20 mA,
(jumper selectable)
Maximum Output Impedance mA
<500Ω,
Minimum Output Impedance VDC
>5000Ω
Accuracy ±30 ppm + 2% of reading
Pressure
Depedence
1.4% change in reading per 0.15 psig
(1.0 kPa) deviation from 14.5 psig
(1000 kPa)
Measurement Range 0-2000 ppm ±5% and ±50 ppm
Calibration Interval Five years
Response Time 2 minutes
Display 4-Digit LCD
Relay Output Shipped N.O., close at 800 ppm
(selectable) Contact rating: 1A @
50 VAC/24 VDC Minimum load: 1mA
@ 5 VDC, SPST
Wiring Terminations 20 AWG, 8" cable, 20 AWG, 6" cable
Operating Humidity 0% to 95% RH noncondensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Enclosure Rating
Wall NEMA 1
Duct NEMA 3 Flammability rating UL95-
5V
Approvals UL File # E4436, CE
Weight
Wall 0.4 lb (0.18 kg)
Duct 1.6 lb (0.45 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
C7232A
C7232B
351GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

392. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR
C7232
1.0
(2.52)
5.06
(12.85)
3.16
(8.03)
2.38
(6.05)
2.38
(6.05)
in
(cm)
Standard Utility
Conduit Box
(2 x 4)
Mounting
Holes
Knockouts
for European
Applications
5.63
(14.30)
3.31
(8.41)
1.81
(4.60)
8.0
(20.32)
1.63
(4.14)
C7232A C7232B
C7232
(red)
(black)
(yellow)
(brown)
(orange)
(green)
+
_
24V
Analog
Out
L1
(HOT)
L2
Note: Provide disconnect means
and overload protection to
power supply as required.
Order transformer separately.

WIRING
INSTALLATION
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
C7232A1008 Wall-mount CO2 sensor, analog and relay output, LCD display
C7232A1016 Wall-mount CO2 sensor, analog and relay output
C7232A1032 Wall-mount CO2 sensor, analog and relay output, no logo
C7232B1006 Duct-mount CO2 sensor, analog and relay output, LCD display
C7232B1014 Duct-mount CO2 sensor, analog and relay output
C7232B1030 Duct-mount CO2 sensor, analog and relay output, no logo
WIRE COLOR DESIGNATION FUNCTION
Red
Black
Yellow
Brown
Orange
Green
G+
G0
OUT1
M
NO
COM
24 VAC Hot
24 VAC Common
Analog Output Signal
Analog Output Common
Relay Output Normally Open
Relay Output Common
The wall-mount C7232A must be installed in a ventilated place where it will not be affected directly by air from ducts, drafts, or in
dead spots behind doors or in corners.
The duct-mount C7232B mounts to the outside of the air duct, and its sampling tube installs through a 1" (2.54 cm) hole. Leakage
into the duct or the sensor bo
x cover will skew the sensor readings, so the box cover and duct must be completely sealed
.
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
352
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

393. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS
GMD20, GMW21 SERIES
4.27
(10.8) 3.26
(8.3)
2.62
(6.67)
3.26
(8.3)
2.36
(6.0)
3.15
(8.0) 2.36
(6.0)
1.65
(4.2)
1.65
(4.2)
2.52
(6.4)
in
(cm)
min 3.15 (8.0)
max 5.51 (14.0)
0.59
(1.5)
0.87
(2.2)
GMW21, GMW21D
GMD20, GMD20D
DESCRIPTION
The Vaisala GMW21 and GMD20 Series Carbon Dioxide
Sensors are specially designed for demand-controlled
ventilation
. The transmitters use the silicon-based
CARBOCAP sensor. The simple structure and reference
measurement capabilities make these single-beam, dual- wavelength NDIR sensors extremely stable and reliable
. The
temperature and flow dependence is negligible. Models are
a
vailable with a temperature output
.
FEATURES
• Silicon-based NDIR sensor
• Excellant long-term stability
• Negligible temperature dependence
• Easy installation
• Five-year recommended calibration interval
• Duct sensor measurement in the duct
DIMENSIONS
GMW21D
GMD20D
Supply Voltage 24 VAC @ 2.5 VA or 24 VDC @
104 mA
Signal Output 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA, and 0-10 VDC
Maximum Output Impedance mA
500Ω maximum
Minimum Output Impedance VDC
1 kΩ minimum
Accuracy 2% of reading ±30 ppm
Linearity ±1% FS
Stability <5% FS for 5 years
Air Velocity 0-2000 fpm (0-10 mps)
Measurement Range 0-2000 ppm
Warm Up Time 15 minutes
Response Time 1 minute
Relay Setpoint 1000 ppm (adjustable with
calibration software
Operating Humidity 0% to 85% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 23° to 113°F (-5° to 45°C)
Approvals CE
Weight Wall
0.35 lb (0.16 kg)
Duct 0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
353GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

394. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS
GMD20, GMW21 SERIES
V7
mA V 0
24V Po wer
Common
0-10 VDC
4-20 mA
Power Supply
Analog Outputs
Serial Com
0/mA
4-20 mA Standard
(remov e jumper for 0-20 mA)
Steady Red
for Fault
Blinks Green
Normally
V10
WIRING
INSTALLATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES PAGE
19222GM Calibration software kit (includes disk and serial adapter)
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
GAS-CO2-2000 2000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L
GMA20T Analog temperature option (GMW21 only)
GMR20 Relay option (GMW21 or GMD20 only)
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants)
CALIBRATION
The wall-mount GMW21 Series must be placed in an area representative of the entire conditioned space. Recommended
mounting height is 5' (1.5m), and the unit may be mounted onto a wall box or surface mounted.
The duct-mount
GMD20 Series mounts directly to the duct
. The duct probe insertion depth is adjustable using the mounting
plate. Since the CO2 level is sensed in the duct, there are no minimum airflow requirements.
The GM Series is factory calibrated. A recalibration is recommended every five years. A field check can be done with a
calibration gas and multimeter. A calibration adjustment requires the Model 19222 GM calibration software.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
GMD20 Duct-mount CO2 transmitter
GMD20D Duct-mount CO2 transmitter with relay and display
GMW21 Wall-mount CO2 transmitter
GMW21D Wall-mount CO2 transmitter with relay and display
GML20 Wall-mount CO2 transmitter with LONworks
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
354
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

395. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 CO2 TRANSMITTER
045, 050 SENSEAIR SERIES
Supply Voltage 24 VAC @ 3 VA ± 20%, 50/60 Hz;
24 VDC @ 125 mA ± 20 %
Signal Output
aSense
Output 1
0-10V models: CO2 0-10 VDC or
0/4-20 mA (500 ohms); 0-5V models CO2 0-5 VDC or 0/4-20 mA
(500 ohms)

Ouptut 2
0-10V models: Temperature 0-10
VDC or 0/4-20 mA (500 ohms); 0-5V models Temperature 0-5 VDC or
0/4-20 mA (500 ohms)

eSense
Output 1
0-10V models: CO2 0-10 VDC;
0-5V models CO2 0-5 VDC
Output 2 0-10V models: CO2 0-10 VDC or
4-20 mA (500 ohms); 0-5V models CO2 0-5 VDC or 4-20 mA (500 ohms)
Accuracy aSense
±1% of measurement range
eSense ±30 ppm ±3% of reading
Measurement Range CO2 0 to 2000 ppm, CO2 0-2000
ppm,
Temperature -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C)
Sensing Technology Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) with
ABC logic
Calibration Not needed
Visual Indication 4 Digits, 7 segments LCD
Warm Up Time ≤1 minute (@ full spec ≤15 minutes)
Relay Output aSense
SPDT 50 VAC @ 1 A; 24 VDC @ 1 A
(1000 ppm)
eSense No relay available
Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH (non condensing)
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Dimensions
Wall
aSense 4.74"H x 3.22"W x 1.18"D
(120 x 82 x 30 mm)

eSense
5.11"H x 3.35"W x 1.18"D
(130 x 85 x 30 mm)

Duct
11.5"H x 6.0"W x 3.3"D
(29.1 x 15.2 x 8.5 cm)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight
Wall 0.32 lbs (0.15 kg)
Duct 0.90 lbs (0.41 kg)
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The aSENSE™ Model 045 and eSENSE™ Model 050 CO2 transmitters from SenseAir utilize the latest NDIR technology to accurately and reliably measure indoor levels of CO2
.
The aSENSE™ Model 045 is a digital low-cost transmitter.
It measures both CO2 concentr
ation and temperature in
the ambient air and can transmit data to a BAS system or controller. The aSENSE ™ Model 045 is a key component
for climate control of buildings and other processes. The
eSENSE™ Model 050 is a new simple, low cost, state-of the- art, infrared and maintenance-free carbon dioxide transmitter for room or duct applications
. The eSENSE™ Model 050
measures the carbon dioxide concentration in the ambient air up to 2000 ppm and transforms the data into an analogue output
. Both the aSENSE™ and the eSENSE™ help you save
money by decreasing your energy consumption while creating a healthier indoor climate
.
FEATURES
• ABC logic needs no calibration
• Five-year warranty
• Platinum EQC coatings, unique to SenseAir products
• SenseAir track-individual serial number for every unit
• ISO 9001 & 14001 certified
SPECIFICATIONS
045-8-0341-F
045-8-0370-F
355GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

396. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 ORDERING INFORMATION
CO2 TRANSMITTER
045, 050 SENSEAIR SERIES
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
RELATED PRODUCTS
040-8-0049 aSense outside air
045-8-0340-F aSense wall relay 0 -10v CO2 & Temperature sensor
045-8-0341-F aSense wall relay 0 -10v display CO2 & Temperature sensor
045-8-0342-F aSense wall relay 0 -5v CO2 & Temperature sensor
045-8-0343-F aSense wall relay 0 -5v display CO2 & Temperature sensor
045-8-0370-F aSense duct relay 0 -10v CO2 & Temperature sensor
045-8-0371-F aSense duct relay 0 -10v display CO2 & Temperature sensor
045-8-0372-F aSense duct relay 0 -5v CO2 & Temperature sensor
045-8-0373-F aSense duct relay 0 -5v display CO2 & Temperature sensor
050-8-0140 eSense wall 0 -10v CO2 sensor
050-8-0141 eSense wall 0 -10v dispaly CO2 sensor
050-8-0142 eSense wall 0 -5v CO2 sensor
050-8-0143 eSense wall 0 -5v dispaly CO2 sensor
050-8-0158 eSense duct 0 -10v CO2 sensor
050-8-0159 eSense duct 0 -10v dispaly CO2 sensor
050-8-0160 eSense duct 0 -5v CO2 sensor
050-8-0161 eSense duct 0 -5v dispaly CO2 sensor
WIRING
+
COM
+ OUT 1
+ OUT 2
NC
COM RELAY
NO
NOT USED
aSense Wiring
+
COM
+ OUT 1
+ OUT 2
mA output (shown)
eSense Wiringfi
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
356fi
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

397. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 CO2, HUMIDITY & TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
T8000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Amphenol Advanced Sensors T8000 Series
Ventostat CO2/RH/Temperature Transmitter is the next
generation CO2 sensors from GE Sensing
. Each GE
V
entostat comes with a passive 10kΩ Type II thermistor and
has simultaneously active voltage and current outputs for CO2 measurement. The T8100 and T8300 features reliable
automatic calibration using patented Telaire ABC logic that will ensure accurate and stable calibration for the lifetime of the sensor
. The T8200 offers an accurate solution for
hospitals and other full time operational 24 hours a day facilities
. Both the T8100 and the T8200 are available with
optional and selectable analog humidity and temperature outputs
. The T8300 offers all of the accuracy of the T8100 but
utilizes a pitot tube kit for measuring duct levels of CO2.
FEATURES
• Sim •
Maintenance free lifetime self-calibration
• Passive temperature output
• Non-dispersive infrared sensor
• Ideal for 24 hours per day facilities (T8200)
• Optional display available
• Optional active temperature and humidity outputs
Supply Voltage 18-30 VAC @ 0.7 VA, 50/60 Hz or
18-42 VDC @ 29 mA
Signal Output 0-5V, 0-10V, or 4-20 mA (500 ohms)
selectable for CO2, humidity, or temperature (simultaneous current or voltage output for CO2)
Accuracy T8100/T8300
400-1250 ppm: 3% or 30 ppm,
whichever is greater; 1250-2000 ppm: ±5% +30ppm,
T8200
10% or 75 ppm, whichever is greater;
Humidity ±2.5% RH (20 to 80% RH)
Temperature ±0.8% @ 72°F (22°C)
Measurement Range
CO2 0 to 2000 ppm
Humidity 0 to 99% RH (non condensing)
Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Sensing Technology
CO2 Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR)
Humidity Capacitive polymer
Temperature Passive: 10kΩ Type II thermistor
Warm up time (CO2) 10 minutes
Display Scrolling LCD
Response Time 5 seconds
Operating Humidity 0% to 95% RH
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Approvals RoHS, CE
Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Warranty 1 year (lifetime on calibration)
SPECIFICATIONS
T8100-D
357GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

398. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 CO2, HUMIDITY & TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
T8000 SERIES
Non-Display Wiring Display Wiring
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
T8100 Wall-mount CO2 sensor, white
T8100-B Wall-mount CO2 sensor, black
T8100-D Wall-mount CO2 sensor, LCD display, white
T8100-DB Wall-mount CO2 sensor, LCD display, black
T8100-H Wall-mount CO2, RH, and active temperature
T8100-HD Wall-mount CO2, RH, and active temperature, LCD display
T8100-HDB Wall-mount CO2, RH, and active temperature, LCD display, black
T8200 Wall-mount CO2 sensor, no display, white
T8200-B Wall-mount CO2 sensor, no display, black
T8200-D Wall-mount CO2 sensor, LCD display, white
T8200-DB Wall-mount CO2 sensor, LCD display, black
T8300-B Duct mount, pitot tube kit CO2 sensor, black
T8300-DB Duct mount, pitot tube kit CO2 sensor LCD display, black
in
(cm)
RELATED PRODUCTS
T1508 Duct-mount accessory enclosure
T1552 OSA-mount accessory enclosure
Calibration Gases CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page)
T2090 UIP software configuration software for the T8100, T8200 and T8300 transmitters
T2075 Calibration Kit for T8100, T8200 and T8300 transmitters
T2076 Calibration kit for T8100, T8200 and T8300 transmitter with calibration flow meter
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
358
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

399. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 CO2 AND CO2/RH SENSORS
KCO2 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KCO2 Series Carbon Dioxide Sensors measure
environmental CO2 levels for use in demand-controlled ventilation,
air-quality monitoring, and other HVAC applications
. The sensor
provides visual indication and analog output of CO2 levels. The units
are equipped with push-button calibration and an easily accessible calibration port for field maintenance
. Optional audible alarm
indication, LCD display, or relay output is available.
FEATURES
• 24 V •
0-10V or 4-20 mA option
• Optional RH transmitter
• Push-button calibration
• Calibration port
• Visual LED alarm
• Optional relay, audible alarm and LCD display
• LCD displays either parameter
WIRING
Supply Voltage 20-28 VAC @ 5 VA, 50/60 Hz, reverse
polarity protected or 12-30 VDC @
200 mA
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 0-10V
Maximum Output
Impedance 600Ω max
Accuracy
CO2 ±3% of reading or ±40 ppm
Humidity 5% of reading 20% to 80% RH
Measurement Range
CO2 0-2000 ppm
Humidity 0% to 100%
Sensing Technology
CO2 Non-dispersive IR (NDIR)
Humidity Capacitive
Visual Indication LED Flashes above 1000 ppm of CO2
Display Optional, four-digit LCD
Warm Up Time <3 minutes
Relay Output (Optional)
SPST 2A @ 24 VAC (Normally Open)
Relay Setpoint 1000 ppm CO2
Alarm Auditory Levels [Db]
65 dB, set at 1000 ppm of CO2,
Optional, 65 dB, set at 1000 ppm of CO2
Operating Humidity
0% to 99% RH (noncondensing)
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Dimensions
Wall 4.5"H x 2.8"W x 1.0"D
(11.4 x 7.3 x 2.54 cm)
Duct 4.5"H x 2.8"W x 6.9"D
(11.4 x 7.3 x 17.5 cm)
Duct probe 1.7" (4.3 cm) diameter
Weight Wall
0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Duct 0.5 lb (0.23 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
KCO2 RH WALCD
Example: KCO2-RH-W-A-LCD Wall mount CO2/RH transmitter with
4-20 mA output, and LCD display
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KCO2 CO2 sensor with LED indication
OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL SENSOR
RH Relative humidity sensor
MOUNTING
W W all mount
D Duct mount
ANALOG OUTPUT
A 4-20 mA output
V 0-10V output
OPTIONS (Can be combined)
A Audible alarm
LCD Four-digit LCD display
R SPST relay output
+–+–+–
Power input
12-30 VDC
20-28 VAC
(Polarity matters for VDC only)
Voltage or current outputs.
All outputs are same type
Dry contact rated
24 VAC, 2A maximum
Relay is optional and
may not be present.
Not all outputs are used on
every unit. See product manual
for output assignments.
All ‘–’ term inals are electrically
connected, bu t isolated from
power supply.
24 VAC/VDC
Output 1
Output 2
Relay
Wall Mount
CO2 Cal Po rt
+
-
+
-
+
-
RH Output
Relay
CO2 Output
24 Volts
AC or DC
Voltage or current outputs.
All outputs are same type.
All '–' terminals are electri-
cally connected, but
isolated from power
supply.
Power input
18-30 VDC
20-28 VAC
(polarity applies to VDC
only)
Dry contact rated
24 VAC, 2A maximum
Relay is optional and may
not be present.
Optional RH sensor
output.
Duct Mount
359GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994

400. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 Wall Mount
Duct Mount with
Display
TRI-SENSE TRANSMITTERS
KTS SERIES
Supply Voltage
20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz @ 5 VA,
reverse polarity protected or 12-30
VDC @ 298 mA
Signal Output 4-20 mA (500 ohms) (500Ω), 0-10V
Accuracy CO
±2.5% full-scale
CO2 ±3% of reading or ±40 ppm
Humidity 5% of reading (20% to 80% RH)
VOC ±10% ethanol
Measurement Range CO
0-200 ppm
CO2 0-2000 ppm
Humidity 0% to 100%
VOC 0-1000 ppm ethanol
Sensing Technology CO
Electrochemical
CO2 Non-dispersive IR (NDIR)
Humidity Capacitive
VOC Sintered metal oxide
Visual Indication LED Flashes above alarm setpoint
Display Optional, four-digit LCD
Warm Up Time <15 minutes (maximum accuracy)
Relay Output Optional, SPST, N.O. 2A @
24 VAC/VDC
Relay Setpoint CO
Factory set at 20 ppm of CO
CO2 Factory set at 1000 ppm of CO2
Operating Humidity 0% to 99% RH (noncondensing)
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Dimensions Wall
4.5"H x 2.8"W x 1.0"D
(11.4 x 7.3 x 2.54 cm)
Duct 4.5"H x 2.8"W x 6.9"D
(11.4 x 7.3 x 17.5 cm)
Duct probe 1.7" (4.3 cm) diameter
Weight Wall
0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Duct 0.5 lb (0.23 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Tri-Sense Transmitters combine three different sensors in a stylish, compact enclosure-reducing installation time and space required
. The unit is designed to work in
tandem with building automation systems to provide proper ventilation in enclosed spaces such as schools, offices, conference rooms, malls, and theaters
. Each of the three
sensors has an independent analog output f
or 0-10V or
4-20 mA, but the output type is the same
. The unit is pre-
calibrated for LED indication with a factory default setting for the appropriate gas
. The sensors are equipped with push-
button calibration and an easily accessible calibration port for field maintenance
. Optional LCD display and relay output are
available. The optional LCD display is selectable for any one
of the three sensed variables.
FEATURES
• Three-in-one sensor combinations
• LED status indication
• Pre-calibrated to 20 ppm CO or 1000 ppm CO2 levels
• 0-10V or 4-20 mA output
• Optional relay output
• Isolated power and output
• Simple push-button calibration
• Optional LCD display
SPECIFICATIONS
Duct Mountfi
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
360fi
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

401. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 TRI-SENSE TRANSMITTERS
KTS SERIES
CO2 Cal Port
+
-OUTPUT 2
RELAY
CO Cal Port
+
-
+
-
+
-
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 3
24 VOLTS
AC or DC
Voltage or current outputs.
All outputs are same type.
All '-' terminals are electri-
cally connected, but iso-
lated from power supply.
See product manual for
sensor assigned to each
output.
Power Input
18-30 VDC
20-28 VAC
(polarity applies to VDC
only)
Dry contact rated
24 VAC, 2A max
Relay is optional and
may not be present.
WIRING
+–+–+–+–
Power input
12-30 VDC
20-28 VAC
(Polarity matters for VDC only)
Voltage or current outputs.
All outputs are same type
Dry contact rated
24 VAC, 2A max
Relay is optional and
may not be present.
Not all outputs are used on
every unit. See product manual
for output assignments.
All ‘–’ terminals are electrically
connected, but isolated from
power supply.
24 VAC/VDC
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3
RELAY
Wall Mount
Duct Mount
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KTS Kele Tri-Sense IAQ transmitter
SENSOR COMBINATION
134 CO, RH, VOC transmitter
213 CO2, CO, RH transmitter
234 CO2, RH, VOC transmitter
OUTPUT
C 4-20 mA current output
V 0-10 VDC voltage output
APPLICATION
W Wall mount
D Duct mount
OPTIONS
R Integral relay
LCD Four digit LCD display
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
GAS-CO-200 200 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L
GAS-CO2-2000 2000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
361GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

402. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 CO2, RELATIVE HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE SENSORS
BA/BS3XXC SERIES
Supply Voltage 0 to 5 VDC Output Units: 9-35 VDC
@ 200 mA Max 0 to 10 VDC Output
Units: 15-35 VDC @ 200 mA Max
Measurement Range 0 to 2000 CO2 ppm
RH: 0-100% or
35-70% RH
Accuracy RH: ±2%
Sensing Technology Humidity: Capacitive Polymer
Temperature: Thermistor, RTD
CO2: NDIR
Display Main Display: 0.76" 4-digit numeric
(Numeric Values)
Response Time Less than 120 seconds
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Enclosure Rating ABS, Plastic, Material Rated
UL84v-0
Mounting 2" x 4" J-Box or drywall mount
(screws provided)
Approvals RoHS
Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI model BA/BS3xxC, Relative Humidity and
Temperature Sensors measure and serve as an indicator
of space occupancy
. The BAPI BA/BS3xxC also has 2%
relative humidity and various temperature sensor options. All
units ha
ve no override, no LED and no legend
.
FEATURES
• Optional display available
• Output corresponds to 0 to 2000 ppm of CO2
• Available with optional temperature and humidity
outputs
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
BABS3
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
362
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

403. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 ORDERING INFORMATION
WIRING
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
CO2, RELATIVE HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE SENSORS
BA/BS3XXC SERIES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
BACO2 Room Sensor in the BAPI-Stat 3 Style Enclosure
Temperature Display Mode (Must select one)
BS3FTemperatures displayed in °F (t oggle on or off)
BS3XNo LCD display
CO2 Output (Must select one)
CO5 CO2  t ra nsmitted as 0 to 2,000 ppm, 0 to 5 VDC output
CO10 CO2  t ra nsmitted as 0 to 2,000 ppm, 0 to 10 VDC output
Humidity Output (optional)
-No Humidity Transmitter
H205-H205 ±2% humidity t ransmitter, 0 to 5 VDC output
H210-H210 ±2% humidity t ransmitter, 0 to 10 VDC output
H212-H212 ±2% humidity t ransmitter, 2 to 10 VDC output (special order)
Passive Temperature Output (must select one)
-No t emperature output option
0100 Platinum RTD, 100fi @ 0°C,  0.385fi/°C temp coefficient (special order)
3751K Platinum RTD, 1,000fi @ 0°C,  3.75fi/°C temp coefficient (special order)
11K Platinum RTD, 1,000fi @ 0°C,  3.85fi/°C temp coefficient (special order)
10210K-2 Thermistor, 10,000fi @ 25°C (special order)
10310K-3 Thermistor, 10,000fi @ 25°C (special order)
2020K Thermistor, 20,000fi @ 25°C (special order)
363GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

404. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 VOC/INDOOR AIR QUALITY SENSORS
BA/BS3XXV SERIES
Supply Voltage 0 to 5 VDC Output units: 9-35 VDC
@ 50 mA Max 0 to 10 VDC Output
Units: 15- 35 VDC @ 50 mA Max
Measurement Range VOC: 0-100% (0 to 2,000 CO2
PPM)
Accuracy RH: ±2%
Output
Duct 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC (model
specific)
Wall 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC
(model specific)
Sensing Technology Humidity: Capacitive Polymer
VOC: Micro-machined Metal Oxide
Display Main Display: 0.76" 4-digit numeric
(Numeric Values)
Minor Display: 0.34" 3-digit
Alpha-Numeric (PPM, %RH)
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Enclosure Rating
Duct
NEMA 4x
Wall NEMA 1
Mounting Duct
Directly to duct

Wall
2" x 4" J-Box or drywall mount
(screws provided)
Dimensions Duct
5" H x 3.2" W x 7.6" D
(12.7 x 8.2 x 19.3 cm)
Wall 5.5" H x 3.5" W x 1.1" D
(13.9 x 8.9 x 2.7 cm)
Approvals RoHS
Weight
Duct
0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Wall 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
Humans exhale Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) as well as CO2
. The BAPI BA/Bs3xxV Indoor Air Quaility Sensors
measure these VOCs and serve as an indicator of space occupancy with same reliability of CO2 transmitters
.
The BAPI sensor is different from other VOC sensors. Using
a calibr
ation algorithm, the sensor value is converted to an
output with a high correlation to a CO2 level
.
The sensor also picks up VOCS from other sources such
as building materials, perfumes, colognes, and furniture off gassing
. Using this sensor to ventilate helps to achieve true
indoor air quiality and not just CO2 dilution. All units have no
override, no LED, and no legend.
FEATURES
• Measures human sourced and environmental VOCs
• Calibration algorithm for CO2 correlation
• Output corresponds to 0 to 2000 ppm of CO2
• Optional display on wall unit only
• Available with optional temperature and humidity
outputs
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
BABS3
BS3F with LED VOC Level
Indication
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
364
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

405. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
VOC/INDOOR AIR QUALITY SENSORS
BA/BS3XXV SERIES
WIRING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
BSVOC Room Sensor in the BAPI-Stat 3 Style Enclosure
Temperature Display Mode (Must select one)
-Duct Option
BS3FTemperatures displayed in °F (t oggle on or off)
BS3C Temperatures displayed in °C (t oggle on or off) (special order)
BS3XNo LCD d isplay
VOC Output (Must select one)
VOC05VOCs t ransmitted as 0 to 2,000 ppm CO2 equivalent, 0 to 5 VDC output
VOC10VOCs t ransmitted as 0 to 2,000 ppm CO2 equivalent, 0 to 10 VDC output
Humidity Output
-No Humidity Transmitter
H205-H205 ±2% humidity t ransmitter, 0 to 5 VDC output
H210-H210 ±2% humidity t ransmitter, 0 to 10 VDC output
H212-H212 ±2% humidity t ransmitter, 2 to 10 VDC output (special order)
Passive Temperature Output 
-No t emperature output option
0100 Platinum RTD, 100fi @ 0°C, 0.385fi/°C temp coefficient (special order)
13751K Platinum RTD, 1,000fi @ 0°C, 3.75fi/°C temp coefficient (special order)
11K Platinum RTD, 1,000fi @ 0°C, 3.85fi/°C temp coefficient (special order)
10210K-2 Thermistor, 10,000fi @ 25°C (special order)
10310K-3 Thermistor, 10,000fi @ 25°C (special order)
2020K Thermistor, 20,000fi @ 25°C (special order)
Override Configuration
JOverride as a separate output (special order)
NOverride in pa rallel (//) with sensor (special order)
POverride in pa rallel (//) with setpoint: NOT av ailable on voltage setpoint models (special order)
ZNo override (needed if no override is required) (standard)
VOC Level Indication
-No level indication
LEDGreen/orange/red LED legend for good, fair and poor (special order)
ARWBlack arrow on display with legend to indicate good, fair and poor (special order)
BNKNo LED,  arrow indicators, legend (standard)
365GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

406. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 IAQ-DAC-TRH-D
IAQ-WAC-TRH-D
ORDERING INFORMATION
INDOOR AIR QUALITY MONITOR
IAQ-A SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Honeywell Analytics IAQ-A Series provides indoor air quality
monitoring of CO2, temperature, and RH for demand control
ventilation applications
. Its patented touchscreen monitor brings leap-
forward technology right to your fingertips, with benefits that extend from simplified installation and commissioning to user operation
. You
can set password levels and protect. The unit is available for wall or
duct mount installations and easily mounts to a standard electrical box
.
FEATURES
• Senses CO2, Temperature and RH
• Analog outputs: 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC
• Jumper selectable gas detection range
• Easy Calibration
• Optional backlit LCD
• Independent sensor operation
• ABC Logic
1 2345678 9 10
COMM
(-)(+)(+) (-)(+)
Not Used RH
(+)
Not UsedTEMPCO2
WIRING
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
GAS-CO2-2000 2000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
MODEL DESCRIPTION
IA
Q-WAC-TRH
CO2, temperature, and RH transmitter, wall mount, withou display
IAQ-WAC-TRH-D CO2, temperature, and RH transmitter, wall mount with display
IAQ-DAC-TRH CO2, temperature, and RH transmitter, duct mount without display
IAQ-DAC-TRH-D CO2, temperature, and RH tranmistter, duct mount with display
Supply Voltage 20 to 30 VAC @ 6.7 VA, 50/60 Hz or 18
to 28 VDC @ 281 mA
Signal Output 4-20 mA (500 ohms) or 0-10 VDC
selectable for CO2, Humidity or
Temperature
Accuracy
CO2: ±3%, 0-2000 ppm;
RH: 0% to 95% noncondensing
Temperature: 0.9°F @ 77°F (0.5°C @ 25°C)
Measurement Range CO2: 0-2000 ±ppm, 0-5,000 ppm
(jumper selectable)
Humidity: 0% to 95% noncondensing
Temperature: 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Sensing Technology
CO2: Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR)
RH and temperature: Capacitive
Display Graphic LCD; two-line, alphanumeric
Response Time CO2:<60 seconds for 90% step change
Humidity: 4 seconds Temperature: 30 seconds
Minimum Duct Velocity
420 ft/min (2 m/s)
Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH, Non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0 to 50°C)
Dimensions
Wall 4.6"H x 3.0"W x 1.5"D
(11.8 x 7.7 x 3.7 cm)
Duct 6.4"H x 8.7"W x 3.0"D
(16.3 x 22.2 x 7.7 cm)
Duct probe 1 1/16" (2.7 cm) diameter
Approvals CSA, RoHs, CE
Weight
Wall 0.44 lb (0.2 kg)
Duct 0.7 lb (0.32 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONSfi
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
366fi
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

407. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 NETWORK COMPATIBLE INDOOR AIR QUALITY MONITOR
IAQ-N SERIES
Supply Voltage 20-30 VAC @ 6.7 VA, 50/60 HZ or
18-30 VDC @ 281 mA
Accuracy
CO2: ± 3%, 0-2000 ppm;
RH: 0% to 95% noncondensing
Temperature: ± 0.9°F @ 77°F (0.5°C @ 25°C)
Measurement Range
CO2: 0-2000 ppm, 0-5,000 ppm
(jumper selectable)
Humidity: 0% to 95% noncondensing
Temperature: 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Sensing Technology
CO2: Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR)
RH and temperature:
Capacitive Display Graphic LCD; two-line, alphanumeric
Response Time
CO2: <60 seconds for 90% step change
Humidity: 4 seconds
Temperature: 30 seconds
Baud Rate 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,
76800, 115200
Communication Protocol
BACnet, MS/TP, Modbus
Minimum Duct Velocity 420 ft/min (2 m/s)
Operating Humidity 0% to 95% RH
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Dimensions
Wall 4.6"H x 3.0"W x 1.5"D
(11.8 x 7.7 x 3.8 cm)
Duct 6.4"H x 8.7"W x 3.0"D
(16.3 x 22.2 x 7.7 cm)
Duct probe 1 1/16" (2.7 cm) diameter
Approvals CSA, RoHs, CE
Weight Wall
0.44 lb (0.2 kg)
Duct 0.7 lb (0.32 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Honeywell Analytics IAQ-N Series provides indoor air quality monitoring of CO2, temperature, and RH for demand control ventilation applications
. The monitor can
be programmed for BACnet or Modbus communication for easy installation and integration into existing building automation systems
. The IA Q-N Series features a two-line
LCD display and programmable setpoints for CO2, humidity, and temperature
. The unit is available for wall or duct mount
installations and easily mounts to a standard electrical box.
FEATURES
• Senses CO2, temperature, and RH
• High accuracy
• BACnet or Modbus communication
• Menu driven operation
• User selectable gas detection range
• Easy calibration
• Backlit LCD
• Independent sensor operation
• ABC logic
SPECIFICATIONS
IAQ-DNC-TRH-D
IAQ-WNC-TRH-D
367GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

408. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 NETWORK COMPATIBLE INDOOR AIR QUALITY MONITOR
IAQ-N SERIES
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
IA
Q-WNC-TRH-D
CO2, temperature, and RH transmitter, wall mount, Modbus/BACnet
IAQ-DNC-TRH-D CO2, temperature, and RH transmitter, duct mount, Modbus/BACnet
RS-485 COMMUNICATION
Communication Wire Gauge:
2-24 AWG (Belden 9841)
Twisted and shielded cable
2000 feet (600 m) per channel
T-tap: 65 feet (20 m) / T-tap
130 feet (40 m) total
1 2345678 9 10
(-) COMM (-)(+)
Power Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Bacnet “-”,
Modbus D0
EIA/RS-485 “A”
Bacnet “+”,
Modbus DI
EIA/RS-485 “B”
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
GAS-CO2-2000 2000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L 437
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
368
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

409. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR
KCO SERIES
Supply Voltage
KCO-A 24 VAC @ 10 VA ±20%
KCO-R 24 VAC @ 10 VAC ±20% or 24 VDC
@ 260 mA ±20%
Signal Output (KCO-A) 4-20 mA
Maximum Output Impedance
500Ω max
Accuracy ±5%

Drift
±10% 2 years
Measurement Range KCO-A
0-200 ppm
KCO-R 0-250 ppm
Sensor Technology Solid-state metal oxide
semiconductor
Sensor Life Expectancy 10 years
Visual Indication
Warning Amber
Alarm Red
Power on Flashing Green/red
Warm Up Time 30 seconds
Response Time <30 sec
Time Delay (KCO-A) 10 minutes
Relay Output (KCO-R) 120 VAC, 2A resistive
Alarm Setpoints (KCO-R)
Warning 50 ppm, alarm 100 ppm
(reset 5-10 ppm change)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% noncondensing
Operating Temperature -4° to 185°F (-20° to 85°C)
Weight 2.0 lb (0.9 kg)
Warranty 18 months
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KCO Series Carbon Monoxide Sensors are available in analog or relay versions
. The sensors are
provided in heavy-duty steel enclosures, and the sensors use low-temperature components that are ideal for open parking garages in cold climates
.
The
KCO Series Carbon Monoxide Sensors is designed
to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained. For more information on the
proper application and use of this product please read “Environmental Safety Devices” in our technical reference section
.
FEATURES
• T •
0-200 ppm 4-20 mA output (KCO-A)
• Microprocessor controlled recalibration (KCO-A)
• Heavy-duty enclosures
• Operating temperature down to -4°F(-20°C)
• Low-temperature option available -20°F (-29°C)
• Temperature and humidity compensated
INSTALLATION
SPECIFICATIONS
KCO-R-H
KCO-A-H
Note: Front covers are blank
KCO-R The KCO-R is a two-stage carbon monoxide sensor with a relay output for each stage
. If the CO level rises above the warning
stage setpoint for over 30 seconds, the warning relay, amber warning LED, and a three-minute minimum “on” timer will activate.
Once belo
w the setpoint, the relay and LED will reset
. If the concentration continues to rise and exceeds the alarm stage setpoint
for 10 minutes, the alarm stage relay and red LED will activate. Calibration of the unit requires the application of a hydrated test
gas.
KCO-A The
KCO-A is a microprocessor-controlled sensor with a 4-20 mA analog output based on a 0-200 ppm sensing range
. The
microprocessor controls the heating of the sensor and subsequent reading of the CO level. The microprocessor compensates for
any drift in the sensor over time. The microprocessor system includes self-diagnostic, self-restarting, and remote failure reporting.
The output signal will drop belo
w 4 mA if a fault is discovered
. If power problems cause the unit to malfunction, the unit will self-
check and restart. Calibration of the unit requires the application of a hydrated test gas, and the push of a button performs the
recalibration.
369GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

410. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR
KCO SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
50 ppm 50/100 ppm relay settings (KCO-R only)
R Relay output carbon monoxide sensor
MODEL
KCO
DESCRIPTION
H Hinged-cover enclosure
KCO R H 50 ppm Example: KCO-RH-50 ppm Carbon monoxide sensor
with relay output and hinged cover enclosure.
A Analog output carbon monoxide sensor
LT Low-temperature option -20°F (-29°C)
INSTALLATION
WIRING
KCO-R
Relay
R2
Relay
R1
T
1
L
1 (+)
24 VAC/DC
Alarm
Relay
Factory setting
100 ppm
N.O.
N.C.
Warning
Relay
Factory setting
50 ppm
N.O.
N.C.
T
3
T
2
L
2
(–)
KCO-A
24 VAC
4-20 mA SIG OUT
L
1
L
2
–
+
CAUTION: Not for diesel fume applications.
The KCO Series senses levels of CO for up to 5000 ft2 (465m2) of coverage if there is normal air circulation within the area.
Mount on a w
all or column approximately 5' (1
.52m) above the floor. The sensors should not be mounted in corners where airflow
could be restricted.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
GAS-CO-100 100 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L
GAS-CO-200 200 ppm carbon monoxide (C) in air, 17L
GAS-CO-25 25 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L
GAS-CO-50 50 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases
(N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCP
A-1.2
Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
370
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

411. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS
KCOP SERIES
Supply Voltage
KCOP 20-30 VAC @ 5 VA or 24 VDC @
200 mA, 50/60 Hz
LT Option 20-30 VAC @ 26 VA or 24 VDC @
1.1 A, 50/60 Hz
Signal Output KCOP-R
Two SPDT relay contacts, 240 VAC,
2A resistive
KCOP-A 4-20 mA (600Ω)
Accuracy
KCOP ±2.5% full scale
LT Option ±4% full scale
Measurement Range 0-200 ppm
Sensing Technology Electrochemical
Calibration Recalibrate with 100 ppm CO gas
Visual Indication Status Green: Power on,
microprocessor operating properly; Yellow: Warning; Red: Alarm
Warm Up Time
Under 15 minutes
Response Time
KCOP (all) 30 Seconds to warning
KCOP-R 13 minutes to alarm
Sensing Technology Electrochemical
Sensor Life Expectancy Approximately 5 years
Relay Setpoints Warning/alarm: 10/20 ppm, 25/50
ppm or 50/100 ppm, jumper selectable, (KCOP-R only)
Operating Humidity
5% to 99% noncondensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C),
-22° to 122°F (-30° to 50°C)
Dimensions 6.50"H x 6.0"L x 2.13"D
(16.5 x 15.2 x 5.4 cm)
Weight
KCOP-A 3.5 lb (1.6 kg)
KCOP-R 4.0 lb (1.8 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KCOP Series Carbon Monoxide Detectors are designed to monitor CO levels in parking garages, loading docks, factories, warehouses, transportation terminals, and more
. Models are available with 4-20 mA output or dual relay
output for designated warning and alarm CO levels. The
detector features a tri-color LED which illuminates green to indicate the unit is powered and functioning properly
.
On the rela
y output models, the LED will illuminate amber
and red for warning and alarm status
. A red LED indicates
that the sensor needs to be replaced. The microprocessor-
based electronics are housed in a rugged, steel enclosure with hinged- or screw-covers
. A low-temperature option is
available for colder climates.
The KCOP Series Carbon Monoxide Detectors are
designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained
. For more information on
the proper application and use of this product please read "Environmental Safety Devices" in our technical reference section
.
FEATURES
• LED po •
4-20 mA or dual relay output
• Replaceable sensor
• Sensor end of life indication
• Jumper selectable warning/alarm levels (KCOP-R)
• Heavy-duty enclosures with hinge- or screw-cover
• Low-temperature option available -22°F (-30°C)
• Temperature compensated
SPECIFICATIONS
KCOP-A-S
KCOP-R-H
371GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

412. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS
KCOP SERIES
WIRING
INSTALLATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
25 ppm 25/50 ppm relay settings (KCOP-R only)
R Relay output carbon monoxide sensor
MODEL
KCOP
DESCRIPTION
H Hinged-cover enclosure
KCOP R H 50 ppm Example: KCOP-R-H-50 ppm Carbon monoxide sensor
with relay output and hinged cover enclosure.
A Analog output carbon monoxide sensor
LT Low-temperature option -20°F (-29°C)
S Screw-cover enclosure
10 ppm 10/20 ppm relay settings (KCOP-R only)
50 ppm 50/100 ppm relay settings (KCOP-R only)
CAUTION: Not for diesel fume applications.
18-28 VAC/VDC
Power input
(Observe proper polarity fo r
DC power applications.)
+
J3
WarningK1
NO
J1
NCCOM
24 VAC/DC
Alarm
Warning
Dry contacts rated
240 VAC, 2A max
Alarm
K2
NO
J2
NCCOM
-
Relay Output
18-28 VAC/VDC
Power input
(Observe proper polarity fo r
DC power applications.)
4-20 mA Output
(0-200 ppm)
+
J3
24 VAC/DC
+–
J3
4-20 mA
-
Terminals of output and
power input are electrically
connected.
Analog Output
The KCOP Series senses levels of CO for up to 5000 ft2 (465m2) of coverage if there is normal air circulation within the area.
Mount on a w
all or column approximately 5' (1
.52m) above the floor. The sensors should not be mounted in corners where airflow
could be restricted.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
KCOP-CAL KCOP calibration kit (Contains regulator, tubing and instructions. Gas is ordered separtely)
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
GAS-CO-100 100 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L
The KCOP has a non-isolateed bridge circuit. Circuit ground
is not electrically isolated from the input power. Use isolated
po
wer supply
.
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
372
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

413. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 COMBINATION CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR WITH CO2, RH, OR VOC
KCOC SERIES
Supply Voltage
KCOC 20-28 VAC @ 2.5 VA, 50/60 Hz or
12-30 VDC @ 104 mA
VOC 20-28 VAC @ 4 VA, 50/60 Hz or
12-30 VDC @ 166 mA
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 0-10V
Maximum Output
Impedance mA 600Ω
Accuracy
CO ±2.5% full scale
CO2 ±3% of reading or ±40 ppm

RH
5% of reading 20% to 80% RH

VOC
±10% ethanol equivalent
Measurement Range
CO 0-200 ppm

CO2
0-2000 ppm

RH
0 to 100% RH

VOC
0-1000 ppm ethanol equivalent
Sensing Technology
CO Electrochemical

CO2
Non-dispersive IR (NDIR)
RH Capacitive
VOC Sintered metal oxide
Visual Indication LED Flashes above 20 ppm of CO
Display Optional, four-digit LCD
Warm Up Time <15 minutes (maximum accuracy)
Relay Output Optional, SPST 2A @ 24 VAC/VDC,
closes <\>>20 ppm
Alarm Auditory Levels [Db]
Optional, 65 dB, set at 20 ppm of CO
Operating Humidity 0% to 99% RH (noncondensing)
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Dimensions Wall
4.5"H x 2.8"W x 1.0"D
(11.4 x 7.3 x 2.54 cm)
Duct 4.5"H x 2.8"W x 6.9"D
(11.4 x 7.3 x 17.5 cm)
Duct Probe 1.7" (4.3 cm) diameter
Weight Wall
0.3 lb (0.14 kg)
Duct 0.55 lb (0.25 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KCOC Series Combination Carbon Monoxide Sensors pair a CO sensor with a CO2, RH, or VOC sensor in the same enclosure-reducing installation time and space required
. The unit provides visual indication and analog output
of CO levels in enclosed spaces such as schools, offices, malls, and theaters
. Each transmitter is available with either
a 0-10V or 4-20 mA and is scaled from 0-200 ppm of CO and all outputs will use the same output
. They are designed with
push button calibration and an easily accessible calibration port for field maintenance
. Optional audible alarm indication,
LCD display, or relay output is available. The optional relay
option closes at 30 ppm and opens at 20 ppm, and the audible alarm will sound at 50 ppm
.
The
KCOC Series Carbon Monoxide Detectors are
designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained. For more information on
the proper application and use of this product please read “Environmental Safety Devices” in our technical reference section
.
FEATURES
• Combines CO sensor with CO2, RH, or VOC sensor
• LED status indication
• 0-10V or 4-20 mA output
• Optional relay output
SPECIFICATIONS
• Isolated power and output
• Simple push button calibration
• Optional audible alarm
• Optional LCD display
373GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

414. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 +–+–+–
Power input
12-30 VDC
20-28 VAC
(Polarity matters for VDC only)
Voltage or current outputs.
All outputs are same type
Dry contact rated
24 VAC, 2A max
Relay is optional and
may not be present.
Not all outputs are used on
every unit. See product manual
for output assignments.
All ‘–’ terminals are electrically
connected, but isolated from
power supply.
24 VAC/VDC
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
RELAY
COMBINATION CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR WITH CO2, RH, OR VOC
KCOC SERIES
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
Wall Mount
CO2 Cal Po rt
+
-
+
-
+
-
OUTPUT 2
RELAY
CO OUTPUT
CO Cal Po rt
24 VOLTS
AC or DC
Voltage or current outputs.
All outputs are same type.
All '–' terminals are electrically
connected, but isolated from
power supply.
Power input
18-30 VDC
20-28 VAC
(polarity applies to VDC only)
Dry contact rated
24 VAC, 2A max
Relay is optional and may not
be present.
2nd sensor output.
See product manual for
output type.
Duct Mount
KCOC WALCD
Example: KCOC-RH-W-A-LCD Wall mount CO and RH
transmitter with 4-20 mA output, and LCD display
MODEL DESCRIPTION KCOC CO sensor with LED indication
OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL SENSOR (limit of 2) CO2 Carbon dioxide sensor
RH Relative humidity sensor
VOC Volatile organic compound sensor
MOUNTING
W W all mount
D Duct mount
ANALOG OUTPUT
A 4-20 mA output
V 0-10V output
OPTIONS (Can be combined)
A Audible alarm
LCD Four-digit LCD display
R SPST relay output (for CO or VOC)
RH
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
GAS-CO-200 200 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L
GAS-CO2-2000 2000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
374
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

415. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 CARBON MONOXIDE TRANSMITTER
TP1-M
DESCRIPTION
The Honeywell Analytics Model TP1-M Carbon Monoxide
Sensor features a two-wire, 4-20 mA output signal and two
alarm outputs
. It is the first available zero-maintenance CO
gas monitor with an electrochemical sensor. The Model
TP1-M has a low initial cost and installs quickly and easily into a standard single-gang outlet box
. It has a two to three-
year operational life and never needs calibration.
The Model TP1-M Carbon Monoxide Sensor is designed
to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained
. For more information on the
proper application and use of this product please read “Environmental Safety Devices” in our technical reference section
.
FEATURES
• 0-500 ppm CO range(non-adjustable)
• High accuracy (5% of range) electrochemical industrial
sensor
• Two alarm levels (25 and 200 ppm)
• Two wire, loop-powered 4-20 mA analog output
• LED status/diagnostic indicator
• Low power consumption, only 50 mA
• Fits standard single-gang outlet box
• Automatic, full function self-test performed daily
• Unobtrusive design with rugged stainless steel screen
• Two to three-year operational life
TP1-M
Supply Voltage 10-28 VDC @ 50 mA
Signal Output Two-wire, 4-20 mA Output signal fail
modes Self-test fail 2 mA; Sensor expired 2 mA Overrange gas alarm 24 mA
Maximum Output Impedance mA

650Ω max
Accuracy ±5% of full range
Measurement Range 0-500 ppm
Life Expectancy 2-3 years (plus one-year shelf life)
Sensor Technology Electrochemical
Calibration None-Disposal
Visual Indication Power on: On No power:Off Self-test
fail: Fast flash (1 per 0.5 sec) Life
ending: Slow flash (1 per 2.0 sec)
provides one-month warning Life ended: Off
Alarm Contacts
250 mA @ 24 VDC max (transistor
switch)
Wiring Terminations 18-22 AWG
Operating Humidity 15% to 90% noncondensing
Operating Temperature 32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)
Dimensions 2.56"H x 1.75"W x 1.36"D
(6.5 x 4.5 x 3.5 cm)
Approvals CSA IEC No. 1010 ANSI/ISA S82.01
CSEC C22.2 No. 1010 EMC Directive
89/336/EEC
Weight 0.42 lb (0.18 kg)
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
375GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

416. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 24 VDC
20 mA
T
OXY
P
OINT
M: TP-M
S: XXXXX
O/P1
4-20 mA
24 VDC
O/P2

24 VDC
Power Supply
4-20 m
A
Signal
TP1-M
O/P2
O/P1
24 VDC AlarmA C Fan
Alarm Outputs: 24 VDC output,
250 mA max
24 VDC
20 mA
T
OXY
P
OINT
M: TP-M
S: XXXXX
O/P1
4-20 mA
24 VDC
O/P2

24 VDC
Power Supply
4-20 mA
Signal
Note: If only relay output is used,
4-20 mA terminal must be
connected to the power
supply (–).
Transistor switches
close on alarm
24 VDC
Relay
CARBON MONOXIDE TRANSMITTER
TP1-M
3.25
(8.26)
3.0
(7.62)
2.80
(7.11)
4.60
(11.68)
in
(cm)
Single-Gang
Electrical Box
(field-supplied)
TWO-WIRE INSTALLATION
ALARMS OUTPUTS INSTALLATION
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TP1-M Carbon monoxide sensor
ACCESSORIES PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
376
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

417. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR
BA/420CO
Supply Voltage 14-27 VDC
Signal Output Loop powered, 4 to 20 mA,
two-wire
Maximum Output Impedance mA
500Ω max @ 24 VDC
Resolution 1 ppm (models with display only)
Measurement Range
CO-1 1-100 ppm
CO-3 1-300 ppm
Sensing Technology Electrochemical
Life Expectancy > 4 years
Response Time 90%; < 40 seconds @ 77° F
(25° C)
Wiring Terminations 3/4” conduit adapter
Operating Humidity 15% to 90% RH (noncondensing)
Operating Temperature w/o Display
-4° to 104°F (-20° to 40°C)
w/ Display 14° to 104°F (-10° to 40°C)
Dimensions 3.8” diameter x 2.13”H
(9.65 x 5.41 cm)
Approvals CE, Rohs
Weight 0.3 lb (0.4 kg)
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
Continuously monitor for carbon monoxide (CO) with the BAPI Model BA/420CO Carbon Monoxide Sensor
. The
unit is equipped with an on-board electrochemical sensor and pro
vides a 4 to 20 mA output signal proportional to
the carbon monoxide concentration detected
. The Model
BA/420CO features a rugged housing with mounting tabs for easy installation
. An optional LCD display is available for
local indication. Units are factory calibrated and ready for field
installation and operation.
The Model BA/420CO Carbon Monoxide Sensor is
designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained
. For more information on
the proper application and use of this product please read "Environmental Safety Devices" in our technical reference section
.
FEATURES
• High accuracy at low concentrations
• Long life electrochemical sensor
• Rugged housing with mounting tabs
• Calibration certificate included
• Optional LCD display
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
B
A/420CO-1
CO sensor, 1-100 ppm
BA/420CO-1-D CO sensor, 1-100 ppm, with display
BA/420CO-1-D-PM CO sensor, 1-100 ppm with display, panel mount
BA/420CO-1-PM CO sensor, 1-100 ppm, panel mount
BA/420CO-3 CO sensor, 1-300 ppm
BA/420CO-3-D CO sensor, 1-300 ppm, with display
BA/420CO-3-D-PM CO sensor, 1-300 ppm with display, panel mount
BA/420CO-3-PM CO sensor, 1-300 ppm, panel mount
+ WHITE
- BLACK
BA/420CO-1-D
BA/420CO-1
377GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

418. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 N.O. Contact
N.C. Contact
CM-E1 & GD-2B
TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE GAS SWITCHES
CM-E1, GD-2B, HD-11
Supply Voltage
CM-E1 9-32 VDC @ 35 mA
GD-2B/HD-11 12-24 VAC @ 2 VA; 12-24 VDC @
35 mA
Range
CM-E1 70 ppm CO

GD-2B
25% L.E.L. Methane and Propane

HD-11
10% L.E.L. H2
Relay (1) Alarm, SPST, 40 VDC @ 100 mA
(1) Trouble, SPST, 40 VDC @
100 mA
Buzzer (CM-E1 & GD-2B only) 85 db @ 10 f
eet
Operating Humidity 10 to 90%, non-condensing
Operating Temperature CM-E1
40° to 100°F ( 4.4° to 37.8°C)
GD-2B/HD-11 32° to 120°F ( 0° to 48.9°C)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1
Dimensions
CM-E1/GD-2B 5.1" H x 3.1" W x 1.5" D
(13 x 7.9 x 3.8 cm)
HD-11 4.51" H x 5.0" W x 1.6" D
(11.4 x 12.7 x 4.1 cm)
Approvals ETL
Weight
CM-E1/GD-2B 1.0 lb (0.45 Kg)
HD-11 0.54 lb (0.25 Kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The 3M™ Macurco™ Toxic and combustible switches are wall mounted, low voltage, relay detector switches
. It is an
electronic detection system used to measure v
arious gases
to switch at a high limit which can be wired to fans, damper actuators and etc. Model CM-E1 measures CO, Model GD-2B
measures Methane and Propane and Model HD-11 measure Hydrogen
.
FEATURES
• Buzz •
Mounts on 2 x 4 electrical box
SPECIFICATIONS
HD-11
CM-E1
WIRING
HD-11
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
378
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

419. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 APPLICATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CM-E1 Wall mounted CO single gas switch
GD-2B Wall mounted Combustile single gas switch
HD-11 Wall mounted Hydrogen single gas switch
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE GAS SWITCHES
CM-E1, GD-2B, HD-11
7

Exhaust fa n
Controls
(transformer
& relay)
T
ypical layout
in small garage
CM6
mount centrally
Air inlet
door, louver
damper
Power
transformer
24VAC
to computer or
control panel
CM6
Relay
24VAC coil
to remote 24VAC alarm
4-20 mA
Loop
Exhaust fa n
Main
fan power
Power 12/24V
Alarm
Relay
SPDT fan
Relay
AC or DC
N.O.
Gray
Green
N.O.
Coil
Red (+)
Black
Blue
Yellow
379GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

420. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSORS
CM6, GD6,TX-6-AM,TX-6-HS, TX-6-ND
DESCRIPTION
The CM6, GD6, TX-6-AM, TX-6-HS & TX-6-ND from 3M™
Macurco™ are low voltage, dual relay detectors, controller
and transducer
. Each device has selectable 4-20 mA output,
buzzer and digital display options. It is an electronic detection
system used to measure the concentr
ation of various gases
.
The
CM6 is a low level meter capable of displaying from
0-200 ppm of carbon monoxide
. The GD6 is a low level meter
capable of displaying from 0-50% L.E.L of Methane, Propane
or Hydrogen.The TX-6-AM is a low level meter capable of
displaying from 0-100 ppm of NH3 (Ammonia). The TX-6-ND
is a low level meter capable of displaying from 0-20 ppm of NO2 (Nitric Oxide)
. The TX-6-HS is a low level meter capable
of displaying from 0-50 ppm of H2S (Hyrdogen Sulfide).
FEATURES
• Easy calibration
• Selectable fan and alarm activation
• Mounts on standard 4x4 electrical box
• Internally supervised system
• Easy functional verification
CM6
Supply Voltage 12 to 24 VAC @ 3 VA or 12 to 32
VDC @ 125 mA, reverse polarity protected
Supply Current
Stand by 23 mA @ 24 VDC
Fan relay 50 mA @ 24 VDC
Both relays (alarm) 75 mA @ 24
VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA
Maximum Output Impedance
900Ω
Output Range (4-20 mA)
CM-6 0-200 ppm

GD6
0-50% L.E.L Methane, Propane,
Hydrogen
TX-6-AM 0-100 ppm NH3
TX-6-ND 0-20 ppm N2O
TX-6-HS 0-50 ppm H2S
Life Expectancy 7+ years
Visual Indication LED (1) Status (green)
Display 3 digit LED Time Range
Fan and Alarm: relay minimum run
time: selectable Off (default), 3, 5, 10 or 15 minutes
Relay Output
Fan: 5A, 240 VAC, pilot duty SPDT
Alarm: 0.5A @ 200Volts, 10 VA
Time Delay Fan and Alarm: Selectable at 0, 1, 3
(default), 5 and 10 minutes
Wiring Terminations Plugs/terminals
Operating Humidity 10 to 90% RH
Operating Temperature 0° to 125°F (-18° to 52°C)
Dimensions 4.5"W x 4.0"H x 2.125"D
(11.4 x 10.2 x 5.4 cm)
Approvals ETL listed
Weight 1.0 lbs (0.45 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
380
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

421. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSORS
CM6, GD6,TX-6-AM,TX-6-HS, TX-6-ND
CM-6
GAS DETECTOR
Macurco
DO NOT PAINT
4.5
(11.4)
4.0
(10.2)
in
(cm)
2.125
(5.4)
7

Exhaust fa n
Controls
(transformer
& relay )
Typical layout
in small garage
CM6
mount centrally
Air inlet
door, louver
damper
Power
transformer
24VAC
to computer or
control panel
CM6
Relay
24VAC coil
to remote 24VAC alarm
4-20 mA
Loop
Exhaust fa n
Main
fan power
Power 12/24V
Alarm
Relay
SPDT fan
Relay
AC or DC No Polarity
A
B
N.O.
COM
N.C.
N.C.
or
N.O.
Coil
APPLICATION
DIMENSIONS/WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
Terminal designations
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
CME-FCK-C Calibration kit, 2 gas cylinders (50 and 200 ppm), does not include test hood
CME1-FTG Test hood
GAS-CO-200 200 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L 437
GAS-CO-50 50 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L 437
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CM6 Wall mounted CO single-point gas detector
GD6 Wall mount combustible single point gas detector
TX-6-AM Wall mount NH3 single point gas detector
TX-6-HS Wall mount H2S single point gas detector
TX-6-ND Wall mount N2O single point gas detector
381GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

422. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE GAS DETECTOR
GDS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele GDS Series Gas Detector is a standalone
micro-processor-based system for continuous, effective
monitoring of toxic and combustible gases
. The GDS Series
provides a 4-20 mA output in proportion to the level of gas present and two relay outputs to activate additional horns, strobes, or ventilation systems
. The modular design adds
functionality and flexibility with pre-calibrated plug-in sensors.
The unit f
eatures a two-line LCD for local indication, self
test diagnostics, and a built-in 85 dBA buzzer
. The rugged
polycarbonate housing is resistant to rust, corrosion, and dents
.
The GDS Series Gas Detector is designed to be used as
part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained
.
FEATURES
• Pre-calibrated plug-in sensors
• Built-in 85 dBA buzzer
• 4-20 mA and two relay outputs
• Wide variety of gases detected
• Two-line LCD display
• Wall or duct mount
GDS
• Easy installation, commissioning, and operation
• LED status indication
• Password protection
• Gases detected: Carbon monoxide (CO), Nitrogen dioxide (NO2 - diesel exhaust), Oxygen (O2), Hydrogen (H2), Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S), Methane (CH4), Propane (C3H8)
Supply Voltage
17-27 VAC @ 8.4 VA, 50/60 Hz or
24-38 VDC @ 350 Ma
(E3SAH base unit is 120 VAC only)
Signal Output 4-20 mA (500Ω)
Measurement Range CO
0-250 ppm

O2
0% to 25%

H2S
0-50 ppm

N2O
0-10 ppm

CH4,C3H8, H2
0% to 100% LEL
Sensing Technology
CO, O2, H2S, NO2
Electrochemical
CH4, C3H8, H2 Catalytic combustion
Calibration Interval 6 months
Life Expectancy CO
6 years
All Others 2 years
Visual Indication Green LED: power Amber LED 1:
Alarm/fault Amber LED 2: Alarm/fault
Display 8 character, two-line LCD
Display Resolution CO
1 ppm
O2 0.2%
H2S, NO2 0.2 ppm
CH4, C3H8, H2 0.5%
Relay Output DPDT pilot duty, 150 VA max
inductive, 5A @ 30 VDC, 250 VAC
Alarm Auditory Levels [Db]
85 dBA @ 10 ft (3m)
Operating Humidity 15 to 90% non-condensing
Operating Temperature
CO -4° to 122°F (-20° to 50°C)

All Others
-40° to 122°F (-40° to 50°C)
Dimensions 8.1''H x 5.9''W x 2.7''D
(20.6 x 14.9 x 6.7 cm)
Weight Wall
1.84 lb (0.83 kg)
Duct 7.96 lb (3.61 kg)
Approvals CSA C22.2
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
382
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

423. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE GAS DETECTOR
GDS SERIES
LEGEND
= One transmitter connected
= More than one tranmitter connected
24VDC DDC SYSTEM
24VAC
24VAC24VAC 4-20mA4-20mA
TRANSMITTER 1 TRANSMITTER X
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
GDS-WC3H8 Propane gas detector, wall mount
GDS-WCH4 Methane gas detector, wall mount
GDS-WCO-1 Carbon Monoxide gas detector, wall mount
GDS-WH2 Hydrogen gas detector, wall mount
GDS-WH2S Hydrogen Sulfide gas detector, wall mount
GDS-WNO2 Nitrogen Dioxide gas detector, wall mount
GDS-WO2 Oxygen gas detector, wall mount
GDS-DC3H8 Propane gas detector, duct mount
GDS-DCH4 Methane gas detector, duct mount
GDS-DCO-1 Carbon Monoxide gas detector, duct mount
GDS-DH2 Hydrogen gas detector, duct mount
GDS-DH2S Hydrogen Sulfide gas detector, duct mount
GDS-DNO2 Nitrogen Dioxide gas detector, duct mount
GDS-DO2 Oxygen gas detector, duct mount
RELATED PRODUCTS
E3SCO Replacement CO sensor cartridge
1309K0002 GDS, GDD, GDN calibration kit for 58 to 103L gas cylinders
1309K0004 GDS, GDD, GDN calibration kit for 17 to 34L gas cylinders
E3H2 Replacement H2 (Hydrogen) sensor cartridge
E3H2S Replacement H2S (Hydrogen Sulfide) sensor cartridge
E3M Replacement CH4 (Methane) sensor cartridge
E3NO2 Replacement NO2 (Nitrogen Dioxide) sensor cartridge
E3O2 Replacement O2 (Oxygen) sensor cartridge
E3P Replacement C3H8 (Propane) sensor cartridge
ECLAB Splash Guard for NEMA 4X
E3SAH Single Base Unit Wall mount, 120 VAC
Calibration Gases CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page)
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCP
A-1.2
Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO,
and refrigerants) 436
UCK-2 Universal calibration kit for corrosive gases (NO2, H2S, SO2, and NH3) 436
WBX334 One gang weatherproof outlet box with (3) 3/4" hubs
383GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

424. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 Supply Voltage 12-30 VAC @ 2.9 VA, 50/60 Hz or
16-30 VDC @ 120 mA (non-ground
reference supply only)
Signal Output 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC, jumper
selectable
Sensing Technology Electrochemical, Solid State,
Catalytic Bead, Photoionization Detector (PID)
Visual Indication
LED: Green = power,
Red = alarm,
Flashing Red = fail
Amber LED, internal relay coil status
indicator (only supplied with relay option)
Red LED 4-20 mA “open loop”
indicator for remote transmitter
Relay Output Optional, one only SPDT,
2 A at 30 VAC/VDC
Enclosure Rating
Standard Rugged PVC with hinged, secured,
dr
ip-proof door
NEMA 4X
Water and dust-tight, corrosion
resistant polycarbonate with hinged, secured door
Wiring Terminations
VDC 3 conductor shielded
VAC 4-conductor shielded
Operating Humidity 0-90% RH Non-condensing
Operating Temperature -4° F to 104° F (-20° C to 40° C)
Dimensions
Standard 4.43” L x 6.5” W x 2.54” D
(11.3 x 16.5 x 6.5 cm)
NEMA 4X 5.0” L x 5.0”W x 3.0”D
(12.5 x 12.5 x 3.0 cm)
Approvals C-Tick Certified
Weight
Standard 1.0 lb (0.5 kg)
NEMA 4X 1.3 lb (0.6 kg)
Warranty 1 year
TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE GAS DETECTOR
GDC150
DESCRIPTION
The all new GDC150 transmitter from Bacharach offers detection and protection for a wide range of hazards including toxic gases such as carbon monoxide (CO), oxygen depletion, combustible gases, refrigerant leaks and total volatile organic compounds (TVOCs)
.
The
GDC150 features 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC linear output
signals, an automatic thermal resetting fuse, RoHS compliant circuit boards and LED indicators for power and open loop
.
The onboard alar
m LED’s indicate when alarm threshold
values are exceeded
. The GDC150 is packaged in a
rugged, polycarbonate housing for both indoor and outdoor applications
. Automated calibration and simple maintenance
procedures performed in the field allow for continuous operation and high performance
.
FEATURES
• Wide range of gases detected
• 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC signal
• LED indicators
• Alpha numeric LED display
• NEMA 4X or standard housing
• Automated calibration
SPECIFICATIONS
WIRING
GDC-150
SIG+
SIG-
24 VAC
24 VAC
Power
4-20m A
Signal
-
+
-
+fi
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
384fi
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

425. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 ORDERING INFORMATION
TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE GAS DETECTOR
GDC150
RELATED PRODUCTS
5209-0004 Splash guard (for NEMA 4X sensors only)
5209-0006 Calibration adapter for all other sensors
5209-0016 Calibration adapter for catalytic sensor
5209-0019 Guard to protect GDC-150 (16 gauge galvanized metal)
GDC15001 Wall mount gas detector
Enclosure option
1Standard Enclosure
3NEMA 4X enclosure w/splash guard
Feature Options
1LED numeric display
2Relay
3Relay and display 
Sensor options
01 Carbon Monoxide (CO) 0-200 ppm
02 Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) 0-50 ppm
03 Oxygen (O2) 0-25% Volume
04 Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) 0-10 ppm
05 Ammonia (NH3) 0-500 ppm
06 Nitric Oxide (NO) 0-100 ppm
09 Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) 0-20 ppm
13 Formaldehyde (HCHO) 0-10 ppm
20 Combustible gases (catalytic sensor) 
28 VOC 0-50 ppm  
29 VOC 0-300 ppm 
30 Combustible gases (solid state sensor) 
31 Refrigerant (solid state sensor)
32 VOC 0-500 ppm
MODEL DESCRIPTION
0No option
METMETHANE 0-100% L.E.L. 
PROPROPANE 0-100% L.E.L. 
H2 H2 0-100% L.E.L. 
ISOISOBUTANE 0-100% L.E.L. 
HEXHEXANE 0-100% L.E.L. 
METMETHANE 0-50% L.E.L. 
PROPROPANE 0-50% L.E.L. 
H2 H2 0-50% L.E.L. 
ISOISOBUTANE 0-50% L.E.L. 
HEXHEXANE 0-50% L.E.L. 
R11R11 0-2000 ppm
R12R12 0-2000 ppm
R22R22 0-2000 ppm
134R134A 0-2000 ppm
401R401A 0-2000 ppm
402R402A 0-2000 ppm
404R404A 0-2000 ppm
407R407C 0-2000 ppm
410R410A 0-2000 ppm 
42D R422D 0-2000 ppm
438 R438A 0-2000 ppm
507 R507 0-2000 ppm 
42A R422A 0-2000 ppm
ACCESSORIES PAGE
Calibration Gases CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page)
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
UCK-3 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive or corrosive gases 436
385GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

426. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 SINGLE POINT TRANSMITTER AND CONTROLLER
SPC3 SERIES
Supply Voltage 24 VAC -20%/+15% @ 5 VA, 50/60
Hz or 24 VDC -20%/+15% @ 208
mA
Signal Output 0/4-20 mA
0/2-10 VDC
Maximum Output Impedance mA
500Ω
Minimum Output Impedance VDC
50 kΩ
Repeatability CO
±3 ppm of reading

NH3
3% of reading

NO2
2% of reading

O2
0.1% of reading
3000 models ±2% of reading
Measurement Range CO
0-250 ppm, span field calibratable
0 to 200-300

NH3
0-300 ppm

N02
0-10 ppm

O2
0-25 %

3000 models
0 to 100% L.E.L.
Sensing Technology 1000 models
Electrochemical
3000 models Catalytic bead
Life Expectancy 3-5 years
Visual Indication On, stage status, failure
Display 2 lines, 16 characters per line
Response Time t90 <50 seconds
Relay Output (1) SPDT. (1) NC-SPST or (1) NO
SPST. 30 VAC/VDC @ 0.5 A
Alarm Auditory Levels [Db]
83 db @ unit
Wiring Terminations Terminal blocks, screw type for lead
wire
Operating Humidity 15 to 95%, non-condensing
Operating Temperature 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)
Dimensions 5.12"W x 5.12"H x 2.95“D
(13 x 13 x 7.5 cm)
Approvals CE, City of Los Angeles
Weight 0.6 lbs (0.3 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The SPC3 Series single point gas detection system detects and controls levels of carbon monoxide (CO) and other gases in a wide variety of commercial and industrial applications
. These include Carbon Monoxide levels in
parking structures, engine repair shops, equipment rooms and ventilation systems, etc
. The controller can communicate
with any compatible electronic analog control, DDC/PLC control or automation system via binary and/or analog output signal
. The SPC3 Series has been tested by an independent
laboratory, is CE approved and also approved by the City of Los Angeles
.
FEATURES
• LCD display
• Selectable analog outputs
• 2 Relay outputs
• LED status indicators
• Simple menu driven programming
5.12
(13)
5.12
(13)
2.95
(7.5)
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
SPC3-1112-2-00
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
386
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

427. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 SINGLE POINT TRANSMITTER AND CONTROLLER
SPC3 SERIES
(0) 4-20 mA or
(0) 2-10 VDC***
24 VAC/VDC**
-20%/15%, 50/60 Hz
Over both pins = VDC
Pins not covered = mA
Over both pins = 4-20 mA / 2-10 VDC
Pins not covered = 0-20 mA / 0-10 VDC
***Jumper output signal “AO01” range selectors:
0-20%
V-A
24 VAC/VDC Input Po wer Supply,
and Analog Output
Relay Outputs
**Jumper SPST relay (R2) NC/NO selector:
S3 = Built-in horn S4 = Switched output
NC
NO
Covers top two pins = SPST-NC
Covers bottom two pins = SPST-NO
NC
NO
Common
NC/NO**
Common
Digital input
24 VDC, 50 mA
(output sw itch)
Relays are
normally
de-energized,
30 VAC/VDC
0.5 A
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
RELA TED PRODUCTS PAGE
GAS-CO-200 200 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L 437
CC-STANDARD -17 Briefcase style calibration kit with foam inserts for 17 liter cylinders
GR-17-300 Regulator precalibrated for SPC3
CONKIT-E/CH-LC Calibration cup with 6 ft of tubing
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
387GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7
SPC3-1112-200 Carbon Monoxide (CO) single point transmitter and controller
SPC3-1120-200 Ammonia (NH3) single point transmitter and controller
SPC3-1130-200 Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) single point transmitter and controller
SPC3-1195-200 Oxygen (O2) single point transmitter and controller
SPC3-3330-200 Benzene/Gasoline (C6H6) single point transmitter and controller
SPC3-3340-200 Hyrodgen (H2) single point transmitter and controller
SPC3-3355-200 Methane (CH4) single point transmitter and controller
SPC3-3380-200 Propane (C3H8) single point transmitter and controller
SPC3-3389-200 Jet A single point transmitter and controller

428. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 DUAL SENSOR GAS DETECTOR
GDD SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele GDD Series Dual Sensor Gas Detector
simultaneously monitors two different gases in two different
locations
. The detector consists of a base unit with built-in
sensor coupled with a remote sensor that can be installed up to 200 feet (6om) away
. The modular design adds functionality
and flexibility with pre-calibrated plug-in sensors. The GDD
Series provides a 4-20 mA output in proportion to the level of gas present and two relay outputs on base unit only to activate additional horns, strobes, or ventilation systems
.
The unit f
eatures a two-line LCD for local indication, self test
diagnostics, and a built-in 85 dBA buzzer
. The remote sensor
is sold seperately.
The GDD Series Dual Sensor Gas Detector is designed to
be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained
.
NO
TE: As an handy solution to a wall mounting application,
we recommend the WBX334 extra wide handi-box for easy mounting and installation
.
FEATURES
• Sim
locations
• Pre-calibrated plug-in sensors
• Built-in 85 dBA buzzer
• 4-20 mA and two relay outputs on base unit only
• Wide variety of gases detected
GDD
• T •
Easy installation, commissioning, and operation
• LED status indication
• Password protection
Supply Voltage 17-27 VAC @ 8.4 VA, 50/60 Hz or
24-38 VDC @ 350 mA
Signal Output 4-20 mA (500Ω) 9base unit only)
Measurement Range
CO 0-250 ppm

O2
0% to 25%

H2S
0-50 ppm

N2O
0-10 ppm

CH4, C3H6, H2
0% to 100% L.E.L.
Sensing Technology CO, O2, H2S, NO2
Electrochemical
CH4, C3H6, H2 Catalytic combustion
Calibration Interval 6 months
Life Expectancy CO
6 years
All Others 2 Years
Visual Indication Green LED: power Amber LED 1:
Alarm/fault Amber LED 2: Alarm/ fault
Display
8 character, two-line LCD
Display Resolution CO
1 ppm

O2
0.2%
H2S, NO2 0.2 ppm
CH4, C3H6, H2 0.5%
Relay Output DPDT pilot duty, 150 VA max
inductive, 5A @ 30 VDC, 250 VAC (base unit only)
Alarm Auditory Levels [Db]

85 dBA @ 10 ft (3m)
Operating Humidity 15 to 90% non-condensing
Operating Temperature
O2,H2S,N2O,CH4,C3H6,H2
-40° to 122°F (-40° to 50°C)

CO
-4° to 122°F (-20° to 50°C)
Dimensions Base unit 8.1’’H x 5.9’’W x 2.7’’D
(20.6 x 14.9 x 6.7 cm)
Remote sensor 2.6’’H x 1.8’’W x 1.4’’D
(6.5 x 4.5 x 3.5 cm)
Weight Wall
1.84 lb (0.83 kg)
Remote 0.42 lb (0.19 kg)
Approvals CSA C22.2
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
388
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

429. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 Second (remote) sensor allows
for dual gas monitoring. Two

on-board relays can activate
ventilation or strobes.
Remote
Unit
Base Unit
DUAL SENSOR GAS DETECTOR
GDD SERIES
WIRING APPLICATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
GDD-C3H8 Propane gas detector
GDD-CH4 Methane gas detector
GDD-CO-1 Carbon Monoxide gas detector
GDD-H2 Hydrogen gas detector
GDD-H2S Hydrogen Sulfide gas detector
GDD-NO2 Nitrogen Dioxide gas detector
GDD-O2 Oxygen gas detector
GDD-RC3H8 Remote Propane gas sensor
GDD-RCH4 Remote Methane gas sensor
GDD-RCO Remote Carbon Monoxide gas sensor
GDD-RH2 Remote Hydrogen gas sensor
GDD-RH2S Remote Hydrogen Sulfide gas sensor
GDD-RNO2 Remote Nitrogen Dioxide gas sensor
GDD-RO2 Remote Oxygen gas sensor
RELATED PRODUCTS
1309K0002 GDS, GDD, GDN calibration kit for 58 to 103L gas cylinders
Calibration Gases CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page)
E3H2 Replacement H2 (Hydrogen) sensor cartridge
E3H2S Replacement H2S (Hydrogen Sulfide) sensor cartridge
E3M Replacement CH4 (Methane) sensor cartridge
E3NO2 Replacement NO2 (Nitrogen Dioxide) sensor cartridge
E3O2 Replacement O2 (Oxygen) sensor cartridge
E3P Replacement C3H8 (Propane) sensor cartridge
E3SCO Replacement CO sensor cartridge
ECLAB Splash Guard for NEMA 4X
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants)
UCK-2 Universal calibration kit for corrosive gases (NO2, H2S, SO2, and NH3) 436
WBX334 One gang weatherproof outlet box with (3) 3/4" hubs
Note: No useble analog output on remote sensor. Only base
unit has analog output of base unit. Relay output is tripped
by whichever set point is tripped first.
389GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

430. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE STAND-ALONE GAS DETECTOR
GDC350
Supply Voltage 12-28 VAC @ 2.9 VA, 15-30 VDC
@ 120 mA (non-ground reference
supply only)
Signal Output 4-20 mA (dual outputs for 2 sensor
onboard configurations)
Sensing Technology Electrochemical, Solid State
Visual Indication LED indicators for Power, Fail, Low
Gas Alarm, High Gas Alarm
Contacts Two SPDT relays, 5A @ 240 VAC
Alarm Auditory Levels [Db]
80 dB Audible alarm w/ silence
Wiring Terminations VDC
3 conductor shielded

VAC
4 conductor shielded
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH Non-Condensing
Operating Temperature 32° F to 104° F (0° C to 40° C)
Enclosure Rating Standard
Rugged PVC
NEMA 4X Watertight polycarbonate
Dimensions
Standard 5.3” L x 6.8” W x 2.6” D
(13.5 x 17.3 x 6.6 cm)
NEMA 4X 5.1”L x 7.1”W x 3.9”D
(13.0 x 18.0 x 10.0 cm)
Approvals C-Tick Certified
Weight
Standard 1.2 lb (0.6 kg)
NEMA 4X 1.4 lb (0.7 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
Bacharach’s GDC350 full-featured fixed gas monitors
provide superior operation - standalone or as part of a larger
system utilizing the standard analog outputs
. This state-of-
the-art instrument can detect a wide range of gases including carbon monoxide (CO), oxygen (O2), combustible gases, refrigerants and total volatile organic compounds (TVOCs)
.
The
GDC350 provides a unique two sensor interface,
allowing for multiple gases to be detected with onboard or remote sensors. Sensors can be located integral to the
unit or remotely allowing for sensors to be placed directly in areas where potential leaks can occur
. Bacharach’s
proprietary calibration algorithms extend the amount of time required between calibrations, reducing maintenance costs and lowering the overall cost of ownership for non-critical applications
.
The GDC350 has all the features and functionality for any
application. LED alarm indicators visually indicate when
alarm conditions are met and an audible alarm alerts nearby personnel
. An onboard alpha numeric display shows gas
readings in real time for each sensor. Integral dry contact
relays are available to drive external audible / visual alarms, activate fans, or connect to building management and control systems
. Installation and maintenance is simple and easy,
reducing overall system cost. A pre-wired plug-in option is
a
vailable for out-of-the-box operation
. Simply plug the unit
into an
y standard AC outlet for immediate detection and
protection
.
FEATURES
• Can be used as a stand alone controller
• On board or remote sensing
• Wide range of gases detected
• Dual 4-20 mA signals
• Unique two sensor interface
• LED indicators
• Alpha numeric LED display
• NEMA 4X or standard housing
• Automated calibration
SPECIFICATIONS WIRING
SIG+
SIG-
24 VAC
GDC-350
24 VAC
Power
4-20m A
Signal
-
+
-
+
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
390
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

431. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 ORDERING INFORMATION
TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE STAND-ALONE GAS DETECTOR
GDC350
GDC350 Wall mount gas detector
Product option
1Single sensor, onboard
2Single sensor, remote
3Dual sensor, onboard
4Dual sensor, onboard & remote
Enclosure option
1Standard enclosure, no display
2Standard enclosure, w/ display
3
4
MET
NEMA 4X enclosure, w/ splash guard, no display
PRO
NEMA 4X enclosure, w/ splash guard & display
H2
METHANE 0-50% L.E.L.
ISO
PROPANE 0-50% L.E.L.
Sensor option 1
00No on board sensor
01Carbon Monoxide (CO) 0-200 ppm
03Oxygen (O2) 0-25% Volume
04Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) 0-10 ppm
06Nitrogen Oxide (NO) 0-100 ppm
09Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) 0-20 ppm
Sensor Option 2
00 No on board sensor
01 Carbon Monoxide (CO) 0-200 ppm
03 Oxygen (O2) 0-25% Volume
04 Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) 0-10 ppm
06 Nitric Oxide (NO) 0-100 ppm
09 Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) 0-20 ppm
30 Combustible gas (sold state sensor)
31 Refrigerants (solid state sensor)
32 TVOCs (must be remote)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
H2 0-50% L.E.L.
ISOBUTANE 0-50% L.E.L.
HEXANE 0-50% L.E.L.HEX
R11R11 0-2000 ppm
R12R12 0-2000 ppm
R22R22 0-2000 ppm
134R134A 0-2000 ppm
401R401A 0-2000 ppm
402R402A 0-2000 ppm
404R404A 0-2000 ppm
407R407C 0-2000 ppm
410R410A 0-2000 ppm
42D R422D 0-2000 ppm
438 R438A 0-2000 ppm
507 R507 0-2000 ppm
42A R422A 0-2000 ppm
RELATED PRODUCTS
5209-0004 Splash guard (for NEMA 4X sensors only)
5209-0006 Calibration adapter for all on board sensors
5909-0003 Guard to protect GDC350 (16 gauge galvanized metal)
5909-0004 Enclosed external transformer 120 VAC to 220 VAC)
ACCESSORIES PAGE
Calibration Gases CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page)
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO,
and refrigerants) 436
UCK-3 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive or corrosive gases 436
391GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

432. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 NETWORK COMPATIBLE GAS DETECTOR
GDN SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele GDN Series Network Compatible Gas Detector
optimizes BAS, fire, ventilation, and other security systems
by providing continuous monitoring of toxic and combustible
gases
. Modbus or BACnet MS/TP protocols are supported
by the GDN Series and can be quickly integrated into a BAS network
. Activate alarms, horns, strobes, and fans
through HVAC controls or directly from the on-board relay.
The modular design adds functionality and fle
xibility with pre-
calibrated plug-in sensors
. The unit features a two-line LCD
for local indication, self test diagnostics, and a built-in 85 dBA buzzer
.
The
GDN Series Network Compatible Gas Detector is
designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained.
FEATURES
• Modb •
Pre-calibrated plug-in sensors
• Built-in 85 dBA buzzer
• Wide variety of gases detected
• Two-line LCD display
• DPDT relay output
• Easy installation, commissioning, and operation
• LED status indication
GDN
• P •
Gases detected:
• Carbon monoxide (CO)
• Nitrogen dioxide (NO2 diesel exhaust)
• Oxygen (O2)
• Hydrogen (H2)
• Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S)
• Methane (CH4)
• Propane (C3H8)
Supply Voltage 17-27 VAC @ 8.4 VA, 50/60 Hz or
24-38 VDC @ 350 Ma
Communication RS485 Modbus, Bacnet MS/TP
Measurement Range CO
0-250 ppm
O2 0% to 25%
H2S 0-50 ppm
N2O 0-10 ppm
CH4, C3H8, H2 0% to 100% LEL
Sensing Technology
CO, O2, H2S,NO2 Electrochemical
CH4, C3H8, H2 Catalytic combustion
Calibration Interval 6 months
Life Expectancy
CO 6 years
Alll Others 2 years
Visual Indication
Green LED: Power
Amber LED 1: Alarm/fault
Amber LED 2: Alarm/fault
Display 8 character, two-line LCD
Relay Output DPDT pilot duty, 150 VA max
inductive, 5A @ 30 VDC, 250 VAC
Alarm Auditory Levels [Db]
85 dBA @ 10 ft (3m)
Display Resolution 0.5%, 1 ppm, 0.2 ppm, 0.2%, 0.5%
Operating Humidity 15 to 90% non-condensing
Operating Temperature
CO -4° to 122°F (-20° to 50°C)
All Others -40° to 122°F (-40° to 50°C)
Dimensions 8.1''H x 5.9''W x 2.7''D
(20.6 x 14.9 x 6.7 cm)
Approvals CSA
Weight 1.84 lb (0.83 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
392
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

433. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 NETWORK COMPATIBLE GAS DETECTOR
GDN SERIES
APPLICATIONS
BACnet (MS-TP) ConfigurationModbus Configuration
Supports Modbus protocol to daisy-chain detectors, providing up
to 96 points of monitoring on a serial bus. Excellent option for controller-
based (VA301C) installations common in larger applications. A re lay output
is provided as an option for activating ventilation directly (e.g. when fan is
located in close proximity to detector).
BACnet Communication
BAS
Network
DVC
HVAC
Alarms, Strobes, Horns
Modbus Communication
Modbus Communication
Up to 3 x 32 units
VA301C
VA301EM
BAS
GDN Series outputs directly to BACnet or other BAS (building automation
system). Alarms, strobes, and horns are activated through the BAS with
links to DCV/HVAC controls. The system design supports new and
retrofit installations for large buildings, and can couple with a controller to
effectively integrate wired and wireless system components. A relay
output is provided as an option for activating ventilation directly (e. g.
when fan is located in close proximity to the detector).
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
GDN-BC3H8 BACnet network Propane gas detector, wall mount
GDN-BCH4 BACnet network Methane gas detector, wall mount
GDN-BCO-1 BACnet network Carbon Monoxide gas detector, wall mount
GDN-BH2 BACnet network Hydrogen gas detector, wall mount
GDN-BH2S BACnet network Hydrogen Sulfide gas detector, wall mount
GDN-BNO2 BACnet network Nitrogen Dioxide gas detector, wall mount
GDN-BO2 BACnet network Oxygen gas detector, wall mount
GDN-MC3H8 Modbus network Propane gas detector, wall mount
GDN-MCH4 Modbus network Methane gas detector, wall mount
GDN-MCO-1 Modbus network Carbon Monoxide gas detector, wall mount
GDN-MH2 Modbus network Hydrogen gas detector, wall mount
GDN-MH2S Modbus network Hydrogen Sulfide gas detector, wall mount
GDN-MNO2 Modbus network Nitrogen Dioxide gas detector, wall mount
GDN-MO2 Modbus network Oxygen gas detector, wall mount
RELATED PRODUCTS
1309K0002 GDS, GDD, GDN calibration kit for 58 to 103L gas cylinders
1309K0004 GDS, GDD, GDN calibration kit for 17 to 34L gas cylinders
Calibration Gases CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page)
E3H2 Replacement H2 (Hydrogen) sensor cartridge
E3H2S Replacement H2S (Hydrogen Sulfide) sensor cartridge
E3M Replacement CH4 (Methane) sensor cartridge
E3NO2 Replacement NO2 (Nitrogen Dioxide) sensor cartridge
E3O2 Replacement O2 (Oxygen) sensor cartridge
E3P Replacement C3H8 (Propane) sensor cartridge
E3SCO Replacement CO sensor cartridge
ECLAB Splash Guard for NEMA 4X
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
UCK-2 Universal calibration kit for corrosive gases (NO2, H2S, SO2, and NH3) 436
393GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

434. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 GAS DETECTION EXPANSION MODULE
VA301EM
Supply Voltage 22-27 VAC @ 48 VA, 50/60 Hz or
22-38 VDC @ 2 A max.
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 1000Ω @ 24,
RS-485 Modbus
Accuracy ±40 ppm @ 500 ppm
Measurement Range
CO 0-250 ppm

NO2
0-10 ppm

Refrigerants 0-1000 ppm
Sensing Technology

CO Electrochemical

Refrigerants
Dual Infrared Sensor
Distance To Transmitters
Up to 500 feet (160 m), 200 ft
(60.9m) maximum- maximum;
Calibration Interval 6 months
Visual Indication Green - Normal Red - Alarms A,
B, & C Yellow - Fault/Service Alarm
Amber - Tx (network mode)
Display Backlit LCD
Response Time 60 seconds
Relay Output 4 DPDT relays
(4) 5A, 30 VDC or 250 VAC
(resistive load)
Alarm Auditory Levels [Db]
105 dBA @ 3 ft (1m)
Gases Detected CO, NO2, R11, R12, R123, R125,
R134A, R22
Operating Humidity 0% to 95% RH (noncondensing)
Operating Temperature VA301RF
32° to 104°F (0 to 40°C)
S301 -40° to 104°F (-40 to 40°C)
Dimensions
VA301EM 7.99"H x 11.02"W x 2.76"D
(20.3 x 28 x 7 cm)
VA301RF 4.02”H x 11.02”W x 2.48”D
(10.2 x 28 x 6.3 cm)
S301 3"H x 2" Diameter (7.6 x 5.1 cm)
Approvals CSA
Weight
VA301EM 3.1 lb (1.4 kg)
VA301RF 2.3 lb (1.0 kg)
S301 2.0 lb (0.9 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Honeywell Analytics VA301EM Expansion Module allows the monitoring of toxic and combustible gases and refrigerants
. Up to four sensors can be placed 500' away for
toxic and combustible gases, and 200' away for refrigerant gas monitoring
. The transmitter is equipped with a backlit
LCD display and keypad that can be placed in a safe area, remote from the sensors
. Alarm relays and Modbus
communication are standard. The unit is compatible with the
VA301C controller.
FEATURES
• Sense one to four zones
• Sensors available for toxic and combustible gases and
refrigerants
• RS-485 Modbus communication
• Contact input for manual break-glass switches
• Three 24VDC outputs to activate strobes and horns
• 4-20mA output for each sensor
• Four relay outputs
• Easy-to-read LCD display
• Explosionproof sensors for combustible and toxic
gases
SPECIFICATIONS
VA301IRFSR134A
VA301EM-RFSA
S301D2CO
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
394
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

435. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 GAS DETECTION EXPANSION MODULE
VA301EM


NC

RELAY 3 NO


NC
RELAY 4 NO
J8 J9
J17 RELAY 1 RELAY 2
+24
+
J10 VDC
J18
( )
A B A B GDN
NO NC NO NC

POWER
SENSOR
POWER
SENSOR
COMMUNICATION
SHIELD
NETWORK
J16 BREAK GLASS SWITCH INPUT
24 VDC OUTPUT
4-20 mA OUTPUT
NETWORK END OF LINE JUMPER
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES PAGE
1309K0002 GDS, GDD, GDN calibration kit for 58 to 103L gas cylinders
1309K0004 GDS, GDD, GDN calibration kit for 17 to 34L gas cylinders
691-K1A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 100 VA 979
Calibration Gases CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page)
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCP
A-1.2
Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
NIOSHSCB
A
Self-contained breathing apparatus kit 437
NIOSHSCB
A-WC
Self-contained breathing apparatus kit with SCBA-WALCASE wall case
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
UCK-2 Universal calibration kit for corrosive gases (NO2, H2S, SO2, and NH3)
UCK-3 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive or corrosive gases
MODEL DESCRIPTION
S301D2CO Remote Carbon Monoxide gas sensor
S301D2NO2 Remote Nitrogen Dioxide gas sensor
VA301IRFSR11 Remote R11 refrigerant sensor
VA301IRFSR12 Remote R12 refrigerant sensor
VA301IRFSR123 Remote R123 refrigerant sensor
VA301IRFSR125 Remote R125 refrigerant sensor
VA301IRFSR134A Remote R134A refrigerant sensor
VA301IRFSR22 Remote R22 refrigerant sensor
395GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

436. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 GAS DETECTION CONTROLLER
VA301C-DLC
VA-301R-8
DESCRIPTION
The Honeywell Analytics VA301C-DLC Gas Detection
Controller provides continuous monitoring of up to 96 inputs/
outputs, on three channels, at distances up to 2000'
. Modbus
communication channels are included. The VA301C-DLC is
pre-programmed at the factory, but menu driven changes can be made in the field
. The VA301C-DLC allows monitoring
of an entire network and will initiate an alarm or ventilation activation upon detection of a gas
. One model is available
with datalogging.
The VA301C-DLC Gas Detection Controller is designed to
be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained
.
FEATURES
• Full arra •
Multiple fully programmable alarm levels
• Programmable time delays
• Failure indicator
• Up to 96 transmitters and relay modules
• Up to 768 events
• Up to 128 zoning groups
• Graphic 122 x 32 dot-matrix display
• Datalogging available
Supply Voltage VA301C-DLC
17-27 VAC @ 8.6 VA or
24-38 VDC @ 350 mA
VA301R 17-27 VAC @ 8.6 VA or
24-38 VDC @ 250 mA
Relay Output 5A, 30 VDC or 250 VAC (resistive
load)
VA301C-DLC 4 DPDT relays (alarms/fault), buzzer
VA301R 8 DPDT relays
Relay Setpoint Multiple with high and low setpoints
Alarm Auditory Levels [Db]
6
Alarm Time Delay 0, 30 sec, 45 sec, 1-99 minute before
and after alarm
Network Capacity: Up to 96 transmitters and
96 relay modules
Communication Three Modbus zones
Distance To Transmitters
2000' (600m) maximum, 65 ft (20m)
T-Tap, 130 ft (40m) total T-Tap, 2000 ft (600m) maximum
User Interface
Dot-matrix display and keypad
Visual Indication Blinking Green LED: Normal
operation Red LED: Alarm Level 1, 2, and 3 Blinking Amber LED: Signal Tx Blinking Green LED: Signal Rx Yellow LED: Failure
Operating Humidity
0% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Operating Temperature -4° to 122°F (-20° to 50°C)
Dimensions VA301C-DLC
8.0" H x 11.0" W x 2.7" D
(20.3 x 28.0 x 7.0 cm)
VA301R 8.0"H x 9.5"W x 2.5"D
(20.3 x 24.4 x 5.7 cm)
Approvals CSA
Weight VA301C-DLC
2.3 lb (1.0 kg)
VA301R 3.0 lb (1.4 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
VA301C-DCL
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
396
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

437. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 GAS DETECTION CONTROLLER
VA301C-DLC
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
VA301EM Gas detection expansion module 394
GDN Series Network compatible gas detector 392
MODEL DESCRIPTION
VA301C-DLC Gas detection controller with datalogging
VA301R-8 Eight-relay module
VA301C Gas detection controller
Alarm
Fan
CH 3
B3
A3
VA301IRFS VA301IRFS VA301IRFS
SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR
S301D2
SENSOR
VA301EM
EXPANSION MODULE
GDN SERIES SENSOR
B2
A2
B1
A1
CH 2
CH 1
24 AWG
BELDEN 9841
MAX 2000’ (60 cm)
32 SENSORS +
32 RELAY MODULES
PER CHANNEL
VA-301R
RELAY MODULE
VA301C-DLC CONTROLLER
J24
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCP
A-1.2
Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
397GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

438. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 REFRIGERANT GAS MONITOR
HGM-SZ
DESCRIPTION
The Bacharach Model HGM-SZ Single Zone Refrigerant
Gas Monitor is designed for continuous monitoring of CFC,
HFC, and HCFC refrigerants and halogen gases
. The unit
features 30 pre-programmed refrigerants plus one custom gas
. Three adjustable alarm levels with relay output designate
leak, spill, and evacuation concentrations. Gas alarms and
system fault conditions are indicated by visual and audible alarms
. The Model HGM-SZ provides a system fault relay
output and a 4 to 20 mA output for integration with remote monitoring equipment or building management systems
.
The HGM-SZ Single Zone Refrigerant Gas Monitor is
designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained
.
FEATURES
• 43 pre-programmed refrigerants and one custom
• Self diagnostics verify operation
• Three alarm levels with SPDT alarm contacts
• System fault alarm
• 200 data point logging
• 4-20 mA output signal
• 50-foot sampling tube and end filter included
• Audible and visual alarm indication
• Local indication of current and peak gas levels
• Alarm-silence button
• NEMA 1
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HGM-SZ Single zone refrigerant monitor
INSTALLATION
The monitor should be located outside the mechanical room and readily accessible for verification and servicing
. The
sample line should be located as close as possible to the source of a potential leak
.
Supply Voltage 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 15 VA
Signal Output 3 alarm relays, 1 fault relay, 240
VAC, 5A, and 4-20 mA 500Ω
(non-isolated)
Accuracy ±1 ppm ±10% reading
Sensitivity 1 ppm
Measurement Range 0-1000 ppm
Sensing Technology Single pass, infrared non-dispersive
Gases Detected R-11, R-12, R-22, R-23, R-113,
R-114, R-123, R-124, R-125, R-134a, R-227, R-236f
a, R-245fa,
R-401a, R-402a, R- 402b,R-404a, R-407a, R-407c, R-408a, R-409a, R-410a, R-500, R-502, R-503, R-507, R-508b, H-1211, H-1301, H-2404, N-1230
Warm Up Time
15 minutes
Response Time 9 to 90 seconds depending on
sample tube length
Coverage Up to 50 ft (15m) from measuring
point to monitor
Operating Humidity 5% to 90% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Dimensions 7.7"H x 3.6"D x 13.7"L
(20 x 9 x 35 cm)
Approvals UL file E212266, CSA, CE
Weight 11.1 lb (5.0 kg)
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
CU S
LINE1
LINE 2 (LIVE)
LINE 1 (NEUTRAL)
GND
GROUND STUD
IMPORTANT! AC input
ground wire always on
bottom of Ground Stud
LINE2
NEUTRAL
Use supplied crimp-on ri ng term inals, washers, and nuts to connect AC ground wires
to Ground Stud as shown to meet approv al agency requirements.
WIRING
(+)
(-)
RELATED PRODUCTS
M1104KF Replacement line end filter
HGM-LON Lonworks Communication Adapter
HGM-N2 Metasys N2 Communication Adapter
NIOSHSCB
A-WC
Self-contained breathing apparatus kit
with SCBA-W
ALCASE wall case
UCK-1
Universal calibration kit for non- corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants)
125-SS-2
Replacement charcoal filter*
Calibration Gases CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants
(See calibration page)

3015-5705
BACnet Communication Adapater
*NOTE: Recommend replacing every six months
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
398
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

439. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 MULTI-ZONE REFRIGERANT MONITOR
HGM-MZ
DESCRIPTION
The Bacharach Model HGM-MZ Multi-Zone Refrigerant
Gas Monitor is designed for continuous multi-point
monitoring of CFC, HFC, and HCFC refrigerants and halogen
gases
. The standard unit monitors four discrete points and
can be expanded to sixteen point monitoring in four point increments
. The unit features 43 pre-programmed refrigerants
plus one custom gas. Three adjustable alarm levels with relay
output designate leak, spill, and evacuation concentrations.
Gas alar
ms and system fault conditions are indicated by
visual and audible alarms
. The Model HGM-MZ provides
a system fault relay output and RS-485 serial interface for integration with a building management system
.
The HGM-MZ Multi-Zone Refrigerant Gas Monitor is
designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained
.
FEATURES
• Four
• 43 pre-programmed refrigerants and one custom
• Up to 1200 ft (365m) distance between measuring point and monitor
•
Three alarm levels and system fault alarm with SPDT
contacts
• Self diagnostics verify operation
• 100 data point logging
• Audible and visual alarm indication with silence button
• Local indication of current and peak gas levels
• NEMA 1
LINE1
LINE 2 (LIVE)
LINE 1 (NEUTRAL)
GND
GROUND STUD
IMPORTANT! AC input
ground wire always on
bottom of Ground Stud
LINE2
NEUTRAL
Use supplied crimp-on ri ng term inals, washers, and nuts to connect AC ground wires
to Ground Stud as shown to meet approv al agency requirements.
WIRING
INSTALLATION
The monitor should be located outside the mechanical room
and readily accessible for verification and servicing. The
sample line should be located as close as possible to the source of a potential leak
.
Supply Voltage 100 to 240 VAC @ 21 VA, 50/60 Hz
Relay Output 3 SPDT alarm relays, 1 fault relay, 250
VAC, 3A; Dual 4-20mA output (optional)
Accuracy ±1 ppm ±10% reading
Sensitivity 1 ppm
Measuring Range 1000 ppm
Sensing Technology Single pass, infrared non-dispersive
Gases Detected R-11, R-12, R21, R-22, R-23, R-113,
R-114, R-123, R-124, R-125, R-134a,
R-227, R-236F
A, R-245FA, R-401a,
R-402a, R-402b, R-404a, R-407a,
R-407c, R-408a, R-409a, R-410a,
R-422a, R-422d, R-427a R-500, R-502,
R-503, R-507, R-508b, H-1211, H-1301,
H-2402, N-1230, FA188, FC72, HFP
Response Time
5 to 120 seconds depending on sample
tube length
Warm Up Time 15 minutes
Coverage Monitoring distance: 1200 ft (365m)
maximum per zone
Communication Optional: LON, N2 and BACnet
Operating Humidity 5% to 90% RH (noncondensing)
Operating Temperature 32° to 122° F (0° to 50°C),
32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C)
Dimensions 12.2"L x 13.7"H x 5.0"D
(31 x 35 x 12.7 cm)
Approvals UL file E212266, CSA, CE
Weight
MZ 15 lb (6.8 kg)
MZ-8 18 lb (8.2 kg)
MZ-12 20 lb (9.1 kg)
MZ-16 22 lb (10.0 kg)
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS
3015-5152 Dual 4-20mA output board
3015-5171 Four zone expansion kit*
HGM-RD Remote display
HGM-LON Lonworks Communication Adapter
HGM-N2 Metasys N2 Communication Adapter
NIOSHSCB
A-WC
Self-contained breathing apparatus kit with SCBA-W
ALCASE wall case
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non- corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants)
3015-5705
BACnet Communication Adapater
3015-3411 Line end filters (4)
Calibration Gases CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants
(See calibration page)
*NO
TE: Must order 3015-3411 filter kit.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HGM-MZ Multi zone refrigerant monitor (4-zone)
HGM-MZ-8 Multi zone refrigerant monitor (8-zone)
HGM-MZ-12 Multi zone refrigerant monitor (12-zone)
HGM-MZ-16 Multi zone refrigerant monitor (16-zone)
CU S
RELAY 1
LEAK
RELAY 2
SPILL
RELAY 3
EVACUATE
RELAY 4
FAULT
NO
NO
NO
NO
COMMON
COMMON
COMMON
COMMON
NC
NC
NC
NC
399GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

440. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 MULTIPOINT SAMPLE DRAW GAS MONITOR
VASQN8X
Supply Voltage 24 VAC @ 18 VA
Accuracy ±3%
Relay Output Three DPDT relays (three alarms)
Relay Output Rating 5A, 30 VDC or 250 VAC (resistive)
Alarm Auditory Levels 110 dBA at 3 ft (1m)
Measurement Range Oxygen: 0 to 25%
Refrigerants: 0 to 1000 ppm
Sensing Technology Oxygen: Diffusion fuel Cell
Refrigerants: Electrochemical
Sampling Distance 100 ft (30.5) per port (included);
Maximum 1000 ft (305m)
Visual Indication Green LED: Normal
Red LED: Alarm levels 1 and 2
Yellow LED: failure indication
Green LED: Aspirated zone indication
Operating Humidity
15% to 90% RH, noncondensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 100°F (0° to 40°C)
Dimensions 19"H x 13.0"W x 3.75"D
(48 x 33 x 10 cm)
Approvals CSA
Weight 26.5 lbs (12 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Honeywell Analytics VASQN8X is a sample draw gas monitor
. The standard unit (VASQN82) has two sampling
points and a three-relay output for different stages of alarm.
The unit is ideal f
or MRI rooms as the sampling point tubing
can be up to 1000’ from the monitor
. The optional two-gas
model will pick up both gases at each sampling point. Each
unit includes 100 ft lengths of sampling tubing per n
umber of
ports ordered
.
The
VASQN8X Multipoint Sample Draw Gas Monitor is
designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained.
FEATURES
• Visual indicators and audible alarm
• Programmable alarm levels
• Two sampling points
• Failure indicator
• Three alarm levels
• Integrated flow loss surveillance WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
VASQN8X
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
400
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

441. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 O2 Oxygen 3 - 5 foot 
(1 - 1.5 m) from floor
26 ft (7m) 1,257 ft2 (154 m2) 0-25% Vo lume 19.5% Volume 22% Vo lume 22.5% Volume
Refrigerants
(All except R-123)
1 foot 
(30 cm) from floor
31 ft (7m) 1,257 ft2 (154 m2) 0-1000 ppm 250 ppm 500 ppm 900 ppm
Refrigerants (R-123) 1 foot (
30 cm) from floor
32 ft (7m) 1,257 ft2 (154 m2) 0-1000 ppm 50 ppm 500 ppm 900 ppm
MULTIPOINT SAMPLE DRAW GAS MONITOR
VASQN8X
ORDERING INFORMATION
APPLICATION TABLE
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
Calibration Gases CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page)
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
UCK-3 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive or corrosive gases 436
VASQN8 Multipoint gas detector with tubing supplied per point
Points (Choose one)
2 Two points
4 Four points
8 Eight points
Gas (Choose one)
R22 R-22 refrigerant
R11 R-11 refrigerant
R123 R-123 refrigerant
R134 R-134a refrigerant
R404 R-404a refrigerant
R507 R-507 refrigerant
O2 Oxygen
Example: VASQN84O2, Four point multipoint gas
detector with tubing supplied per point
measuring Oxygen.
VASQN8O 24
401GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

442. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR
RLD-5
RLD-5
WARM-UP READ YWARNING ALARM
ALARM
RESET
CAL.
REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR
2
(5.08)
8
(20.32)
4.5
(11.43)
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The Kele RLD-5 is a solid-state CFC refrigerant leak
detector capable of detecting the presence of escaping
refrigerants
. It is field adjustable for five different CFC
refrigerant types: R-11, R-12, R-22, R-113, and R-502. An
analog output is pro
vided to allow interfacing to computer
monitoring equipment
. An alarm relay is also provided with
adjustable set point and jumper-selectable time delay function to prevent nuisance alarms
. Four LEDs provide status
indication for warm-up, ready, warning, and alarm.
The RLD-5 is designed to be used as part of a control
system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained
. For
more information on the proper application and use of this product please read "Environmental Safety Devices" in our technical reference section
.
FEATURES
• R-11, •
Selectable analog output
• LED status indication
• Alarm relay output
DIMENSIONS
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±10% @ 14 VA or 24 VDC
±10% @ 580 mA
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC,
1-6 VDC (jumper selectable)
Maximum Output Impedance mA
300Ω maximum
Minimum Output Impedance VDC
5 kΩ minimum
Accuracy ±5% Long term drift 8%
Measurement Range 0-1000 ppm
Relay Output SPDT 0.5A 24 VAC/VDC
(jumper selectable); Manual reset
(latched), Auto reset (unlatched)
Relay Setpoint Adjustable 0-1000 ppm
Factory set 500 ppm Time Delay
15 min., 30 min., 1 hr, 2 hr
(jumper selectable)
Operating Humidity 10% to 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32°F to 158°F (0°C to 70°C)
Weight 1.5 lb (0.45 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
• Field-replaceable sensor
• Refrigerant leak detection as described in ASHRAE
15-2004
• Minimum 15 minute time delay
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
402
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

443. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR
RLD-5
R-502
S1
ADJ
GND
Setpoint
R-113
R-11
Refrig
Type
R-12
GMA 1 AMP
F2
J6
J4
J5
J2
4-20 mA
1-6 VDC
AC pwr
DC pwr
Unlatched
Latched
0-10 VDC
0-5 VDC
K1
R-22
R-22
15 min
30 min
1 hr
2 hrs
Setpoint X 100
10
8
6 4
2
0
GMA 1 AMP
F1
Time Delay Selector for Alarm
Relay Output
Alarm Relay Setpoint Dial
(factory set at 500 ppm)
Refrigerant Selector Dial
Analog Output/Signal Selector
Alarm Relay Output Selector
AC/DC Selector
Power Fuse
24 VAC/VDC
Analog

Output
Alarm
Relay
Fuse
TB3 TB2
NO COM NC
Alarm
TB1
Analog
Output
Power
GND
WIRING
INSTALLATION / OPERATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS
170-0830 Replacement sensing element
NIOSHSCB
A-WC
Self-contained breathing apparatus kit with SCBA-WALCASE wall case
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RLD-5 Refrigerant leak detector
Installation
The RLD-5 is suitable for indoor use only. Mount the unit as close to the source of potential refrigerant leaks as
possible. Some recommended considerations are as follows:
1. Mount approximately 3' (0.9m) from floor (refrigerants are heavier than air and will settle on the floor).
2. Mount at least 5' (1.5m) from exhaust fans (direct airflow across sensing element will affect accuracy).
3. If used in refrigeration pits, mount 1' (0.3m) above floor.
Operation T
o test operation, place a small amount of alcohol below the sensing element. The analog output signal should
increase.
Note: Make all connections in accordance with national and local codes.
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
Calibration Gases CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page)
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO,
and refrigerants) 436
403GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

444. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR
RLD-134A
RLD-134A
WARM-UP READ YWARNING ALARM
ALARM
RESET
CAL.
REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTO R
2
(5.08)
8
(20.32)
4.5
(11.43)
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The Kele RLD-134A is a solid-state HFC refrigerant leak
detector capable of detecting the presence of escaping
refrigerant R-134A
. An analog output is provided to allow
interfacing to computer monitoring equipment. An alarm
relay is also provided with adjustable set point and jumper- selectable time delay function to prevent nuisance alarms
.
F
our LED's provide status indication for warm-up, ready,
warning, and alarm
.
The RLD-134A is designed to be used as part of a control
system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained
. For
more information on the proper application and use of this product please read "Environmental Safety Devices" in our technical reference section
.
FEATURES
• R-134A detection
• Selectable analog output
• LED status indication
• Alarm relay output
DIMENSIONS
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±10% @ 14 VA or 24 VDC
±10% @ 580 mA
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC,
1-6 VDC (jumper selectable)
Maximum Output Impedance mA
300Ω maximum
Minimum Output Impedance VDC
5 kΩ minimum
Accuracy ±5%; Long term drift 8%
Measurement Range 0-1000 ppm
Relay Output SPDT 0.5A 24 VAC/VDC Manual
reset (latched) Auto reset (unlatched) (jumper selectable)
Relay Setpoint
Adjustable 0-1000 ppm
Factory set 500 ppm Relay Time Delay
15 min., 30 min., 1 hr, 2 hr
(jumper selectable)
Operating Humidity 10% to 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Weight

1.5 lb (0.45 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
• Field-replaceable sensor
• Wall-mounting kit
• Refrigerant leak detection as described in
ASHRAE15-2004
• Minimum 15 minute time delay
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
404
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

445. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR
RLD-134A
J4
15 min
30 min
1 hr
2 hrs
Setpoint X 100
0
2
46
8
10
GMA 1 AMP
GMA 1 AMP
F2
F1
K1
4-20 mA
0-5 VDC
0-10 VDC
1-6 VDC
AC pwr
DC pwr
Unlatched
Latched
NO COM NC GND - +
Alarm Power
TB3 TB2 TB1
24 VAC/VDC
Analog
Output
Time Delay Selector for Alarm
Relay Output
Alarm Relay Setpoint Dial
(factory set at 500 ppm)
– +
Power Fuse
Analog Output/Signal Selector
Alarm Relay Output Selector
AC/DC Selector
Alarm
Relay
Fuse
-+
Analog
Output
WIRING
INSTALLATION / OPERATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS
170-0832 Replacement sensing element
NIOSHSCB
A-WC
Self-contained breathing apparatus kit with SCBA-WALCASE wall case
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RLD-134A Refrigerant leak detector
Installation The RLD-134A is suitable for indoor use only
. Mount the unit as close to the source of potential refrigerant leaks as possible.
Some recommended consider
ations are as follows: 1. Mount approximately 3' (0.9m) from floor (refrigerants are heavier than air and will settle on the floor).
2. Mount at least 5' (1.5m) from exhaust fans (direct airflow across sensing element will affect accuracy).
3. If used in refrigeration pits, mount 1' (0.3m) above floor.
Operation T
o test operation, place a small amount of alcohol below the sensing element. The analog output signal should increase.
Note: Make all connections in accordance with national and local codes. Not recommended for MRI rooms.
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
Calibration Gases CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page)
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO,
and refrigerants) 436
405GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

446. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 INFRARED REFRIGERANT GAS DETECTOR
IR-F9 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Honeywell Analytics IR-F9 Series refrigerant detector
is a highly accurate, affordable, micro-processor based
infrared sensor that will provide years of reliable service
. A
tr
ue “diffusion” sensor, the IR-F9 Series does not require
either the use of pumps or filters and allows all points of detection to be monitored perpetually. The versatile sensor
is housed in a high mass metal bench structure that enables thermal stability and freedom from the effects of vibration
.
FEATURES
• A •
R134a, R22, R404a, R407a, R410a, R422a, R507a
• Visual indication
• Infrared technology
• 4-20 mA output
• Easy calibration with cal kit
• No pump
• Continual monitoring
• Optional RS-485 Modbus communication
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
IR-F9
9.19"9.59"
3.68"
Side View
4.52"
1"
5.01"
7.71"
Top View
Supply Voltage 24 VDC regulated 1.2A maximum
Signal Output 4-20 mA
Maximum Output Impedance mA
500Ω
Accuracy ±3% full scale
Repeatability 1% full scale
Measurement Range 0-1000 ppm standard
(0-500 ppm to 0 to 3000 ppm)
Sensing Technology Dual infrared sensor
Calibration Interval Every 6 months
Visual Indication For testing and verification of
4-20 mA loop, calibration and
operation
Response Time 10 seconds with full scale
calibr
ation gas @ 0
.75 liters/
minimum flow rate
Gases Detected R134a, R22, R404a, R407a,
R410a, R422d, R507a
Operating Humidity 0% to 99% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature -20° to 140°F (-28° to 60°C)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4 fiberglass reinforced
polyester
Dimensions 9.59"H x 7.71"W x 4.52"D
(24.4 x 19.6 x 11.5 cm)
Weight 4.4 lb (2.0 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
406
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

447. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 INFRARED REFRIGERANT GAS DETECTOR
IR-F9 SERIES
TEST +
JP1
TEST -
SIG
+24
GND
SHLD
White connects to signal input of
monitoring equipment
Red connects to 24 VDC power
supply positive side
Black connects to 24 VDC ground
side
Bare wire wrap connects to case
ground at monitoring equipment
(earth ground)
DC ground (black)
Shield (bare)
Output (white)
+24 VDC (red)

WIRING
INSTALLATION / OPERATION
Installation The IR-F9 can only report what it is seeing at the moment and it is very important the sensor be located where leaks are most likely to occur
. CFC/HCFC/HFC vapor is heavier than ambient air, so in a room with no air movement it will tend to settle. For
quickest detection, mount the sensor about one to two feet from the floor, close to the potential leak source. Be aware the
indicated concentration may not be representative of personnel exposure and easy access for the required calibration and maintenance could be compromised
. Some recommended considerations are as follows:
1. Must be easily accessible for calibration and maintenance.
2. Always mount the sensor vertically.
3. Mount the sensor close to the potential leak source for fastest possible leak detection.
4. Protect sensor from water, excessive humidity, and wash-down.
5. Always make a drip loop in the conduit.
6. Never mount sensor on a vibrating surface.
Operation The
IR-F9 has two internal pushbutton(s), and two adjustment pots that are utilized for navigation of test functions, calibrations,
and operating modes. In addition, a pair of test points is also provided that assist in the connection to standard meter leads for
use in the upcoming calibration and diagnostic procedures.
*NO
TE: The pushbutton(s) must be pressed the correct number of times and at the correct rate
.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION IR-F9-R134A
Stand-alone infrared refrigerant detector for R134a
IR-F9-R22 Stand-alone infrared refrigerant detector for R22
IR-F9-R404A Stand-alone infrared refrigerant detector for R404a
IR-F9-R407A Stand-alone infrared refrigerant detector for R407a
IR-F9-R410A Stand-alone infrared refrigerant detector for R410a
IR-F9-R422D Stand-alone infrared refrigerant detector for R422d
IR-F9-R507A Stand-alone infrared refrigerant detector for R507a
RELATED PRODUCTS
DRM Dual relay module
RP Relay plug-in module with setpoint adjustment (uses 4-20 mA terminals)
NIOSHSCBA-WC Self-contained breathing apparatus kit with SCBA-WALCASE wall case
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants)
420MDBS Interface module 4 to 20 mA to RS485 with Phoenix connector
Calibration Gases CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page)
ACCESSORIES PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
407GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

448. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 OXYGEN SENSOR
OS-1
1.13
(2.9)
5.11
(13.0)
1.6
(4.1)
OS-1
in
(cm)
(13.0)
5.11
2.95
(7.5)
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Model OS-1 is a dependable, economical oxygen
sensor designed to monitor oxygen levels in ambient air. It
has a jumper-selectab
le analog output for interfacing with
a BAS controller and an SPDT relay output to activate an alarm in the event of oxygen depletion due to a refrigerant leak
. The units are powered by 24 VAC/VDC and are housed
in a rugged polystyrene enclosure for dust and moisture protection
.
The Model OS-1 is designed to be used as part of a control
system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained
.
FEATURES
• 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, or 0-10 VDC output, jumper-
selectable
• SPDT alarm relay
DIMENSIONS
Supply Voltage 24 VAC @ 6 VA or 24 VDC
@ 250 mA
Signal Output (jumper selectable)
4-20 mA (300Ω max)
0-5 VDC (20 kΩ min)
0-10 VDC (20 kΩ min)
Accuracy ±1%
Measurement Range 0% to 25% oxygen
Sensing Technology Galvanic cell
Life Expectancy Approximately five years @ 68°F
(20°C) in ambient air
Response Time Approximately 12 seconds
Relay Type SPDT 24 VAC/VDC @ 0.5A,
factory set @ 19.5%
Operating Humidity 10% to 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 40° to 104°F (5° to 40°C)
Weight 1.25 lb (0.57 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
• 24V •
0% to 25% range
• Rugged polystyrene enclosure
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
408
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

449. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 OFF
OPR
R29
R8
Offset
J2
F2 F1
J1
4-20 MA
0-5 VDC
0-10 VDC
AC
DC
NO
COM
NC
SENS+
SENS-
OUT+
OUT-
PWR-
PWR+
Span
Analog Out
R6
Setpoint Adjust Po t
Analog
Output
Select
Jumper
Power
Select
Jumper
Alarm Analog(factory
wired)
Setpoint
Adjust
Alarm
Fuse
Power
Fuse
Note:
AC power must be floating and may not
be grounded
. If AC power is grounded a
separate transformer is required for each OS-1
.
OXYGEN SENSOR
OS-1
WIRING
INSTALLATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
OS-1 Oxygen sensor, 0% to 25% range
The OS-1 is suitable for indoor use only. Mount the unit as close to the source of potential refrigerant leaks as possible. Some
recommended consider
ations are as follows: 1. Mount the unit with the sensor pointing down.
2. Mount the unit in a location with low vibration. Strong vibration may cause a change in the condition of the
internal membrane.
3. The sensor should be mounted 3' to 5' (0.9 to 1.5m) from the floor in equipment rooms or 1' (0.3m) above
the floor in refrigeration pits.
4. The OS-1 should cover about 1000-1500 square feet with adequate air movement.
5. Mount at least 5' (1.5m) from the exhaust fan.
6. Verify operation yearly.
Note: Make all connections in accordance with national and local codes. Not recommended for MRI rooms.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
GAS-O2-18 18% oxygen (O2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases
(N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
409GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

450. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 SINGLE ZONE AMMONIA GAS MONITOR
AGM-SZ
DESCRIPTION
The Bacharach Model AGM-SZ Single Zone Ammonia Gas
Monitor is designed for single point monitoring of ammonia
gas with up to 50 ft (15
.2 m) distance from measuring point to
monitor. The unit features a digital display for local indication
of current gas levels and peak value. Three adjustable alarm
levels with relay output designate leak, spill, and evacuation concentrations
. Gas alarms and system fault conditions are
indicated by visual and audible alarms. The Model AGM-SZ
provides a system fault relay output and a 4 to 20 mA output for integration with remote monitoring equipment or building management systems
.
The AGM-SZ Single Zone Ammonia Gas Monitor is
designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained
.
FEATURES
• Three alarm levels with SPDT alarm contacts
• Self diagnostics verify operation
• LED status indication
• System fault alarm
• 200 data point logging
• 4-20 mA output signal
• 50-foot sampling tube and end filter included
• Audible and visual alarm indication
• Local indication of current and peak gas levels
• Alarm-silence button
• NEMA 1
GND
RELAY 1
LEAK
FUSE
STROBE /HORN
LINE2LINE1
NEUTRAL
NO NCCOM NO NCCOM NO NCCOM NO NCCOM
RELAY 2
SPILL
RELAY 3
EVACUATE
RELAY 4
FAULT
WIRING
INSTALLATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A
GM-SZ
Single zone ammonia gas
monitor
RELATED PRODUCTS
304-2742 Replacement sample tubing
304-2743 Replacement exhaust/purge
tubing
NIOSHSCBA-WC Self-contained breathing
apparatus kit with SCBA- WALCASE wall case
UCK-2
Universal calibration kit for
corrosive gases (NO2, H2S, SO2, and NH3)
3015-3411
Line end filters (4)
Calibration Gases CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3,
N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page)
The monitor should be located outside the mechanical room
and readily accessible for verification and servicing. The
sample line should be located as close as possible to the source of a potential leak
.
Supply Voltage 100 to 240 VAC @ 21 VA, 50/60 Hz
Signal Output 3 alarm relays, 1 fault relay,
240 VAC, 3A, and 4-20 mA 500Ω
(non-isolated)
Accuracy ±10 ppm from 25 to 100 ppm or
±10% reading from 100 to
10,000 ppm
Sensitivity 1 ppm
Measurement Range 25-10,000 ppm
Gases Detected Ammonia (NH3, R-717)
Sensing Technology Single-pass, infrared non-dispersive
Coverage Up to 50 ft (15m) from measuring
point to monitor
Warm Up Time 15 minutes
Response Time 9 to 30 seconds depending on
sample tube length
Operating Humidity 5% to 90% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Dimensions 7.4"H x 15"L x 3.3"D
(18.8 x 38.1 x 8.4 cm)
Weight 10.0 lb (4.5 kg)
Approvals UL file E212266, CSA, CE
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
CU S
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
410
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

451. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS
SM-501 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Air Products & Controls SM-501 Series Duct Smoke
Detectors provide early detection of smoke and combustion
products present in air moving through HVAC ducts
. Air
sampling is accomplished b
y intake sampling tubes, which
are ordered separately
. A standard length exhaust tube is
provided with each detector. The SM-501 Series is designed
to operate in duct widths from 6" (15 cm) to 10.0' (3.05m) with
an air velocity from 500-4000 fpm (2.5-20.3 mps). Complete
systems ma
y be shut down in the event of smoke detection
.
FEATURES
• Univer •
Remote reset, alarm, and indication available
• Two alarm contacts and one trouble contact
• Interchangeable "plug-in" photoelectric or ionization
heads
• Compatible with building automation and fire alarm
systems
• Dust filtering included in detector head
• Interconnect up to 15 detectors for common functions
SM-501
OPERATION
The SM-501 Series will operate on any one of four input voltages: 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, or 230 VAC
. It uses
either photoelectr
ic or ionization smoke detector heads
. Each
detector contains tw
o alarm contacts, which transfer in the
event of smoke, and one trouble contact, which supervises the presence of input power and removal of the detector head. A
man
ual test/reset switch and visual indicators of pilot and alarm
are provided on the front of the detector
. Up to 30 SM-501
Series units may be wired to use a common test/reset function and to alarm simultaneously when a single unit alarms
. If
remote signal de
vices such as horns or strobes are used, up
to 15 detectors may be interconnected to operate with a single alarm.
Supply Voltage (without accessories)
24 VAC @ 35 mA standby,
74 mA alarm
24 VDC @ 15 mA standby,
56 mA alarm
115 VAC @ 25 mA standby,
32 mA alarm
230 VAC @ 12 mA standby,
16 mA alarm
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Relay Contacts Alarm 2-SPDT, 10A, 115 VAC,
resistive
Trouble 1-SPDT, 10A, 115 VAC,
resistive
Air Velocity 500-4000 fpm (2.5-20.3 mps)
Radioactive Element For SM-501-N only Americium 241,
0.9 μCi
Wiring Terminations Solid or stranded, 12 to 22 AWG
terminals
Operating Humidity 10% to 85% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature SM-501-N
32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)

SM-501-P
32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Enclosure Rating 18-gauge steel back box, clear
plastic cover (94V-0), Gray paint with clear cover, NEMA 1
Dimensions
9.13"H x 7.25"W x 2.25"D
(23.19 x 18.42 x 5.72 cm)
Weight 3.2 lb (1.45 kg)
Approvals UL & cUL listed UL268A; UROX,
UROX7, File #S2829 CSFM listed 3240-1004:108 MEA approved 73-92-E, Vol
. 26
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
411GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

452. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS
SM-501 SERIES
1 2 4
230 VAC 50/60 Hz
0.1A max
G H
1
H
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Power
Connections
(see below)
Alarm
Contacts
10A
Alarm
Contacts
10A
"Remote
Accessories"
(see MS Series)
Trouble
Contacts*
10A
24 VDC
0.1A max
5 6 1 2 3
115 VAC 50/60 Hz
0.1A max
24 VAC 50/60 Hz
0.2A max
*Trouble contacts are shown
in non-energized condition.
Under normal operation
contacts will be reversed.
CAUTION: For terminals 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12, do not use looped
wire under terminals. Break wire run to provide supervision of
connections.
5 6
+
_
G N H
Power Connections
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SM-501-N Ionization duct smoke detector for 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC
SM-501-P Photoelectric duct smoke detector for 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC
191919
181818
171717
161616
Unit #1 Unit #3Unit #2
181818
171717
161616
Unit #1 Unit #3Unit #2
All Relays Operating with Single Alarm (30 detectors max)
H H H
+Red
-Black- Black- Black
+Red+Red
All Relays Operating with Single Alarm; All Horns/Strobes Operating with Single Alarm (15 detectors max)
191919
181818
171717
161616
Unit #1 Unit #3Unit #2
H H H
+Red
-Black- Black- Black
+Red+Red
All Relays Operating with Single Alarm; Individual Horns/Strobes Operating on Alarmed Detector Only
(30 detectors max)
212121
202020
Unit #1 Unit #3Unit #2
N.O. Reset Switch
Common Test/Reset (30 detectors max)
Note: Use a common independent power supply for all interconnected detectors.
Stopper
Airflow
Intake
Tube
(order
separately)
Exhaust
Tube
(provided)
Top of Detector
Entire Width
of Duct
Note: Sampling tubes over 3' (0.9m) must be supported on
the opposite side of the duct from the detector.
Mount the detector in an air duct using the provided template
and four sheet metal screws. Detector must be mounted at least
six duct widths from the fan or other sources of turbulence with airflow from 500-4000 fpm (2
.5-20.3 mps). The intake sampling
tube has holes drilled the entire length of the tube and should extend the entire width of the duct
. The holes must be facing
into the airflow (see Figure 1 to the right). The exhaust tube is a
piece of steel piping approximately 7" long (17.8 cm).
Intake Sampling Tube Lengths
Model Duct Width
STS-2.5 6.0" to 2.5' (0.15 to 0.7m)
STS-5.0 2.5' to 5.0' (0.7 to 1.5m)
STS-10.0 5.0' to 10.0' (1.5 to 3m)
Installation 1
. Cut the intake sampling tube to the desired length.
2. Firmly insert the stopper (provided with the detector)
in the end of the intake sampling tube.
3. Follow instruction sheet provided with each detector.
RELATED PRODUCTS
55000-250APO Replacement ionization smoke detector head only
55000-350APO Replacement photoelectric smoke detector head only
STS-10.0 Sampling tube for 5.0' to 10.0' (1.5 to 3m) duct widths
STS-2.5 Sampling tube for 6.0" to 2.5' (0.15 to 0.7m) duct widths
STS-5.0 Sampling tube for 2.5' to 5.0' (0.7 to 1.5m) duct widths
TG-1000 Aerosol test gas
WP-1 NEMA 3R enclosure for SM Series duct smoke detector
WIRING INTERCONNECTING WIRING
MOUNTING FIGURE 1. TYPICAL DUCT NSTALLATION
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
412
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

453. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR
SL-2000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Air Products & Controls SL-2000 Series Duct Smoke
Detectors provide early detection of smoke and combustion
products present in air moving through HVAC ducts
. Air
sampling is accomplished b
y intake sampling tubes, which
are ordered separately
. A standard length exhaust tube is
provided with each detector. These devices are designed to
prevent the recirculation of smoke in areas by the air handling systems, fans and blowers
. Complete systems may be shut
down in the event of smoke detection.
FEATURES
• Lo •
Universal voltage: 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, or 230 VAC
• Two Form C and one Form A alarm contacts and one
trouble contact
• Interchangeable "plug-in" photoelectric or ionization
heads
• Compatible with building automation and fire alarm
systems
OPERATION
The SL-2000 Series is designed to operate in duct widths from 12
.0" to 10.0' (30.5 cm to 3.05m) with an air velocity
from 100-400 fpm (0.5-20.3 mps). The SL-2000 Series
will operate on any one of four input voltages: 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, or 230 VAC
. It uses either a photoelectric or
ionization smoke detector head. Each detector contains two
Form C and one Form A contact, which transfer in the event of smoke
. There is also one trouble contact, which supervises
the presence of input power and the removal of the detector head
. A manual test/reset switch and visual indicators of pilot
and alarm are provided on the front of the detector. Up to 30
SL-2000 Series units may be wired to use a common test/ reset function and to alarm simultaneously when a single unit alarms
.
Supply Voltage (without accessories)
24 VAC @ 55 mA standby,
190 mA alarm
24 VDC @ 15 mA standby,
70 mA alarm
115 VAC @ 16 mA standby,
32 mA alarm
230 VAC @ 10 mA standby,
20 mA alarm
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Relay Contacts Alarm (2) SPDT, 10A,
115 VAC, resistive
Alarm (1) SPST-NO, 2A,
115 VAC, resistive
Trouble (1) SPDT, 10A,
115 VAC, resistive
Air Velocity 100-4000 fpm (0.5-20.3 mps)
Radioactive Element Americium 241, 0.9 μCi
Operating Humidity 10% to 85% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature
SL-2000-N 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)

SL-2000-P
32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Enclosure Rating Gray plastic back box, clear plastic
cover, NEMA 1
Dimensions 4.5"H x 13.5"L x 2.25"D
(11.4 x 34.3 x 5.7 cm)
Approvals UL File S2829 CSFM 3240-1004:105
MEA 73-92-E,
Vol
. 27
Weight 3.5 lb (1.6 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
• Dust filtering included in detector head
• Interconnect up to 30 detectors for common functions
• Compatible with MS Series Remote Accessories
• Cover removal trouble indication
• Magnet test capability
• Front or rear loading sampling tubes
• Optional weatherproof enclosure
413GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

454. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR
SL-2000 SERIES
MOUNTING FIGURE 1. TYPICAL DUCT INSTALLATION
Mount the detector in an air duct using the provided template and
sheet metal screws. Detector should be mounted at least six duct
widths from the f
an or other sources of turbulence with airflow from
100-4000 fpm (0
.5-20.3 mps). The intake sampling tube has holes
drilled the entire length of the tube and should extend the entire width of the duct, with the end opposite the detector capped
. The holes
must be facing into the airflow (see Figure 1 to the right). The exhaust
tube is a piece of steel piping approximately 7" long (17.8 cm).
Intake Sampling
Tube Lengths
Model
Duct Width
STN-2.5 1.0' to 2.5' (0.3 to 0.7m)
STN-5.0 2.5' to 5.0' (0.7 to 1.5m)
STN-10.0 5.0' to 10.0' (1.5 to 3m)
Important For the correct installation, testing and maintenance of a duct smoke detector, follow the instructions provided with the detector and refer to your locally enforced fire, mechanical, and/or building codes
.
Please also re
view NFPA 72 (National Fire Alarm Code) and NFPA
90A (Standard for Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems). Your local authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) should also be
consulted.
Red Stopper
Airflow
Intake
Tube
(order
separately)
Exhaust
Tube
(provided)
Top of Detector
Entire Width
of Duct
Note: Sampling tubes over 3' (0.9m) must be supported
on the opposite side of the duct from the detector.
(+) PILOT OUT
10A
ALARM
CONTACT
1 23456789 10 G220115H
1112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
GROUND
(-) COMM
10A
*TROUBLE
CONTACTS
N.O.
POWER
INPUT
24
VAC/VDC
10A
ALARM
CONTACT
N.C.N.C. N.O.(-)(+)
CC
POWER
INPUT
220/240
VAC
120
VAC
N.C. N.O.
C
C N.O.
CONNECTION
INTERCONNECT
ALARM LINK
(-) (+)
AUX
POWER
OUT
2A
ALARM
CONTACT
N.O.
RESET INPUT
* Trouble contacts are shown in non-energized condition. Under normal operation

contacts will be reversed.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SL-2000-N Ionization duct smoke detector for 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC
SL-2000-P Photoelectric duct smoke detector for 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC
WIRING INTERCONNECTING WIRING
CAUTION: For terminals (7, 8, 18), (6, 16, 17), and (13, 14) do
not use looped wire under terminals. Break wire run to provide
supervision of connections.
– BLK
14
19
All alarm relays operate with single alarm
Individual horn/strobe operate on alarmed
detector only
30 detectors max
All alarm relays operate with single alarm
30 detectors max
Common test/reset
30 detectors max
All alarm relays operate with single alarm
All horns/strobes operate with single alarm
10 detectors max
Normally
open reset
switch
Detector #1
+ RED
– BLK
+ RED
– BLK
+ RED
Detector #2Detector #30Detector #1Detector #2Detector #10
Detector #1Detector #2Detector #30Detector #1Detector #2Detector #30
H H H
20
14
19
13
20
19
13
20
13
12 1212 12 1212
12 1212
20 2020
1 11
20 2020
14
– BLK
14
19
+ RED
– BLK
+ RED
– BLK
+ RED
H H H
20
14
19
13
20
19
13
20
13
14
NOTE: When using detector interconnection functions, wire all
detectors to a common power source. Use of multiple power
sources for interconnected detectors may cause damage
to the detectors and/or may prevent the detectors from
functioning properly
.
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
RELATED PRODUCTS
55000-250APO Replacement ionization smoke detector head only
55000-350APO Replacement photoelectric smoke detector head only
STN-10.0 Sampling tube for 5.0' to 10.0' (1.5 to 3m) duct widths
STN-2.5 Sampling tube for 1.0' to 2.5' (0.3 to 0.7m) duct widths
STN-5.0 Sampling tube for 2.5' to 5.0' (0.7 to 1.5m) duct widths
TG-1000 Aerosol test gas
WP-2000 NEMA type 3R enclosure 11.06"H x 18.13"W x 4.38"D (28.1 x 46.0 x 11.2 cm)
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
414
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

455. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 Remote Accessory Wiring
for SM-501, HS-100, and SL-2000 Smoke Detectors
(red) (black)
(red)(black)
Red
Alarm LED
SM-501 Terminal #19
HS-100 Terminal #12
SL-2000 Terminal #19
SM-501 Terminal #19
HS-100 Terminal #11
SL-2000 Terminal #19
SM-501 Terminal #21
HS-100 Terminal #14
SL-2000 Terminal #2
SM-501 Terminal #20
HS-100 Terminal #7
SL-2000 Terminal #20
Green
Pilot LED
Test/Reset
Switch
(red)(black)
Horn
SM-501 Terminal #17 HS-100 Terminal #13 SL-2000 Terminal #12
SM-501 Terminal #21
HS-100 Terminal #15
SL-2000 Terminal #1
Note: If duct smoke detectors are interconnected for common functions, refer to
detector installation guide for proper connection of remote alarm functions .
REMOTE ACCESSORIES FOR SM-501 AND SL-2000
MS SERIES
Supply Current
Alarm LEDs 15 mA @ 24 VDC from detector
Pilot LEDs 15 mA @ 24 VDC from detector
Horn 20 mA @ 24 VDC from detector
Alarm Auditory
Levels [Db] 78 db@10' (3.0m)
Reset Normally open
Wiring Terminations LEDs/Horn
6" (15.2cm)/24 AWG pigtails
Switches 6" (15.2cm)/22 AWG pigtails
Dimensions
Single-gang 2.75"W x 4.5"H (6.9 x 11.4 cm)
Double-gang 4.5"W x 4.5"H (11.4 x 11.4 cm)
Weight 0.5 lb (0.22 kg) maximum
Approvals UL File #S7425 CSFM 7300-
1004:107
MEA 73-92-E, Vol. 25
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Air Products & Controls MS Series remote accessories
are used with the SM-501, SL-2000, or HS-100 Series duct smoke detectors to provide audible and visual indication as well as remote test/reset functions
.
All de
vices have a brushed stainless steel face plate
. All
de
vices are also designed to be mounted on a single- or
double-gang box
.
FEATURES
• Remote indication for SM-501, SL-2000, and HS-100
smoke detectors
• Available with alarm and pilot LEDs and alarm horn
• Available with momentary push button or maintained
key-operated test/reset switch
• Mounts to standard single- or double-gang box
MS-RH/P/A
PILOT
ALARM
ALARM
MS-RA MS-RA/P
ALARM
PILOT
MS-RA/P/R
ALARM
PILOT
TEST/RESET
MS-KA/P/R
TEST/RESET
PILOT
ALARM
ALARM
TEST/RESET
MS-KA/R
MS-RA/R
ALARM
TEST/RESET
MS-RH
MS-RH/KA/P/R
TEST/RESET
PILOT
ALARM
WIRINGSPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MS-KA/R Remote red alarm LED and key-operated test/reset switch
MS-KA/P/R Remote red alarm LED, green pilot LED, and key-operated test/reset switch
MS-RA Remote red alarm LED
MS-RA/P Remote red alarm LED and green pilot LED
MS-RA/P/R Remote red alarm LED, green pilot LED, and push button test/reset switch
MS-RA/R Remote red alarm LED and push button test/reset switch
MS-RH Remote alarm horn
MS-RH/KA-P/A/T Remote duct smoke det w/alarm/horn/LED/pilot/fault-trouble/key operated test/reset
MS-RH/KA/P/R Remote alarm horn, red alarm LED, green pilot LED, and key-operated test/reset switch
MS-RH/P/A Remote alarm horn, red alarm LED, and green pilot LED
Ordering Note: For a complete selection of accessories please see the Remote accessories page for the SM-501 smoke
detectors. Smoke Dectctors require duct sampling tubes STN-2.5, STN-5.0 or STN-10.0.
415GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

456. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 PHOTOELECTRIC DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR
D4120
DESCRIPTION
The InnovairFlex D4120 4-wire photoelectric duct smoke
detector features a pivoting housing that fits both square and
rectangular footprints and mounts to round or rectangular
ductwork
. This unit senses smoke in the most challenging
conditions, operating in airflow speeds of 100 to 4,000 feet per minute, temperatures of -4ºF to 158°F, and a humidity range of 0 to 95 percent (non-condensing)
. A plug-in sensor
head off
ers improved false alarm immunity and simple
installation, testing, and maintenance
. An improved cover
design isolates the sensor head from the low-flow feature for simple maintenance
.
FEATURES
• Photoelectric, integrated low-flow technology
• NEMA 4 models for outdoor mounting
• Versatile mounting options: square or rectangular
configuration
• Plug-in sensor offers superb false alarm immunity and
the latest sensor technology
• 2:1 sensor-to-power capability allows one power board
to monitor both supply and return smoke sensors
• Patented sampling tube installs from front or back of
the detector with no tools required
• Increased wiring space with a newly added 3/4-inch
conduit knockout
FM
APPROVED
USC
D4120
Supply Voltage (without accesories)
24 VAC @ 65 mA (standby & alarm)
20-29 VDC@21 mA (standby &
alarm)
120 VAC @ 20 mA (standby & alarm)
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Alarm Contacts Alarm (SPST)
2.0A @ 30 VDC (resistive)
Aux (DPDT)
10A @ 250 VAC (resistive), 1/2 HP
@ 240 VAC, 1/4 HP @ 120 VAC
Supervisory (SPDT) 2.0A @ 30 VDC (resistive) 2.0A @
125 VAC (resistive)
Alarm Response Time 15 seconds
Reset Voltages 3.0 VDC minimum, 2.0 VAC
minimum, 10 VAC minimum, 3.0 VDC
minimum 2.0 VAC minimum 10 VAC
minimum
Air Velocity 100 to 4000 ft/min (0.5 to 20.32 m/
sec)
Warm Up Time 35 seconds maximum
Reset Time Using RTS45:1 0.03 to 0.3 seconds
powering down: 0.6 seconds
maximum
Enclosure Rating D4120
NEMA 1
D4120W NEMA 4
Operating Humidity 0% to 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature -4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)
Approvals UL file S911, MEA, FM, CSFM
Weight
D4120 3.2 lb (1.45 kg)
D4120W 3.3 lb (1.5 kg)
Warranty 3 years
SPECIFICATIONS
• One easy-access Test/Reset button and improved LED
status
• Patented interconnect feature for multi-fan shutdown •
New high contrast terminal designations
• Built-in short circuit protection from operator wiring
errors
• Field selectable settings for configuring the detector
• Two DPDT Form-C relay contacts
• 24 VAC/DC or 120VAC
• Backward compatibility
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
416
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

457. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 ORDERING INFORMATION
PHOTOELECTRIC DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR
D4120
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
D4120 4-wire photoelectric low-flow duct smoke detector
D4120W* Watertight 4-wire photoelectric low-flow duct smoke detector
*You must order two D4120W units for installations requiring two watertight detectors.

24VAC/DC
91 0
Auxiliary Contacts
for Fan Shutdown, etc.
(Note 2)
Auxiliary Contacts
for Fan Shutdown, etc.
(Note 2)
16 61 7 81 87
N.O.C.N.C.N.O.C.N.C.
16 61 7 81 87
N.O.C.N.C.N.O.C.N.C.
Supervisory Contacts
(Note 3)
24V
91 0
Supervisory Contacts
(Note 3)
SUP C. SUP N.O. SUP N.O.SUP C.
5
4
Alarm
Initiation
Contacts
(Note 4)
Alarm
Initiation
Contacts
(Note 4)
5
4
Alarm
Initiation
Loop
UL/FM Listed
4-wire
Control Panel
+
120
VAC
120
VAC
OR OR
AUX A AUX BAUX A AUX B
Alarm C.Alarm C.
Alarm N.O.Alarm N.O.
14 143 3
First Detector in the Loop
Power Inputs
(Note 1) Power Inputs (Note 1)
Last Detector in the Loop
EOL Resistor
Specified by
Panel
Manufacturer
NOTE 1: 24V Power Inputs accept a non-
polarized 24VDC or 24VAC 50-60Hz. 120VAC
Power Inputs accept only 120VAC 50-60Hz.
Connect po
wer source to appropriate terminals
of each detector
. See specifications for additional
power supply information.
NOTE 2: Auxiliary contacts shown in standby
position. Contacts switch during alarm as
indicated by arrows. Auxiliary contacts are not to
be used for connection to the control panel. See
specifications f
or contact ratings
.
NOTE 3: Supervisory contacts shown in standby
position. Open contacts indicate a trouble
condition in the panel. See specifications for
contact ratings.
NOTE 4: Alarm Initiation contacts shown in
standby position. Closed contacts indicate an
alar
m condition to the panel
. See specifications
f
or contact
ratings
.
*Please refer to the corresponding installation
manual for accessory wiring diagrams.

D4120W D4120 D4S D4P120 2D51
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
AOS Mini-alert add-on strobe, clear
AP
A151
Remote annunciator with piezo alarm
D4P120 Power board component only, 24 VAC/VDC, 120 VAC
D4S Remote or replacement sensor (not watertight)
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DST1 D4120 metal duct sampling tube, 1 ft (0.3m)
DST1.5 D4120 metal duct sampling tube, 1.5 ft (0.45 m)
DST10 D4120 metal duct sampling tube, 10 ft (3.0m)
DST3 D4120 metal duct sampling tube, 3.0 ft (0.91m)
DST5 D4120 metal duct sampling tube, 5 ft (1.5m)
MHR Mini Horn, Red
MHW Mini Horn, White
RA100Z Remote annunciator, red alarm LED
RTS151 Magnetic remote test station, red alarm LED
R
TS151KEY
Key-activated remote test/reset station with bi-color (green/red) power/alarm LED
RTS2 Key-activated remote test/reset station with sounder and power, trouble, and alarm LEDs
417GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

458. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 D4120 ACCESSORIES
D4120 SERIES REMOTE ACCESSORIES
DESCRIPTION
System Sensor provides flexibility with a variety of
accessories for notification and test purposes. The smoke
detector accessories add functionality to the detection system by allowing quick eye level inspections and audible/visual notification options
. All System Sensor accessories are UL
listed.
APA151
The APA151 piezo annunciator provides an audible alarm signal and LED for alarm and status indication
. The unit is
designed for applications without a system control panel to comply with NFPA 90 A
.
MHR/MHW The
MHR and MHW mini horns feature temporal or
continuous tones at high or low volume settings. Designed
f
or small or tight areas, the unit mounts to a single gang back
box
.
RA100Z The
RA100Z remote annunciators are designed for both
conventional and intelligent applications. A red LED provides
visual indication of an alarm condition.
RTS151/RTS151KEY
The RTS151 and RTS151KEY remote test stations are automatic fire detector accessories designed to test duct smoke detectors from a convenient location
. The RTS151
features a multi-colored LED that alternates between steady green and red for four-wire detectors and illuminates red to indicate alarm when used with two-wire detectors
.
RTS2/RTS2-AOS
The RTS2 and RTS2-AOS multi-signaling accessories are designed to work with four-wire conventional smoke detectors
. The units feature a key switch that can be used to
select one of two connected sensors to be tested, reset, or both by a push button switch
.
SPECIFICATIONS
Model Standby mA Trouble mA Alarm mA
RA100Z 0 mA - 10 mA maximum
APA151 12.5 mA maximum - 30 mA maximum
RTS151 12 mA maximum - 7.5 mA maximum
RTS151KEY 12 mA maximum - 7.5 mA maximum
RTS2 8 mA 16 mA 40 mA maximum
MHR/MHW 0 mA - 30 mA maximum
AOS 0 mA - 25 mA maximum
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
418
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

459. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 D4120 ACCESSORIES
D4120 SERIES REMOTE ACCESSORIES
NOTE: Wiring diagram shown is for D4120 4-wire duct smoke
detector system equipped without a control panel.
NOTE: A trouble condition is indicated when the green LED
is not illuminated.
10
9
19
20
1
12
15
3
2
1
D4120APA151
(Green LED) Power
Field
Installed
Jumper
11
2
+
–
Aux. Out +
Aux. Out –
Alarm
R Test
ACC +
ACC –
R Reset
7
18
8
17
6
16
14
3
13
5
4
SUP, NO
SUP, C
Common
(Red LED) Alarm
D4120 to APA151
10
9
19
20
1
12
15
2
6
1
5
4
3
D4120RTS151/RTS151KEY
(Green LED) Power
(Red LED) Alarm
Field
Installed
Jumper
11
2
+
–
Aux. Out +
Aux. Out –
Alarm
R Test
ACC +
ACC –
R Reset
7
18
8
17
6
16
14
3
13
5
4
SUP, NO
SUP, C
For RTS151KEY Only Without a Control Panel
Field
Installed
Jumpers
D4120 to MHR/MHW
Alarm
Aux. Out –
15
20
(+)
(–)
MHR/MHW
Audible Alert
D4120
Duct Detector
D4120RTS2/RTS2-AOS
Aux. Out +
Aux. Out –
+
–ACC –
ACC +
Aux. Out +
Aux. Out –
+
–ACC –
ACC +
D4120 to RTS2/RTS2-AOS
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A
OS
Mini-alert add-on strobe, clear
MHW Mini Horn, White
RA100Z Remote annunciator, red alarm LED
RTS151 Magnetic remote test station, red alarm LED
R
TS151KEY
Key-activated remote test/reset station with bi-color (green/red) power/alarm LED
R
TS2
Key-activated remote test/reset station with sounder and power, trouble, and alarm LEDs
APA151 Remote annunciator with piezo alarm
MHR Mini Horn, Red
419GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

460. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 HS-100
PLENUM SMOKE DETECTOR
HS-100 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Air Products & Controls HS-100 Series Plenum
Smoke Detectors provide early detection of smoke and
combustion products present in air moving through HVAC
plenum return systems in commercial rooftop package unit
applications
. The detectors are designed to prevent the
recirculation of smoke in areas by the air handling system's fans and blowers
.
FEATURES
• Univer •
Visual indication of power and alarm status
• Two alarm contacts and one trouble contact
• Interchangeable "plug-in" photoelectric or ionization
heads
• Compatible with building automation and fire alarm
systems
• Dust filtering included in detector head
• Interconnect up to 30 detectors for common function
CAUTION: Do not use looped wire under terminals. Break wire run to provide for proper supervision
of connections.
8 9 10
ALM - N.O.
ALM - COM
ALM - N.C.
15A @ 125VAC
10A @ 277VAC
7A @ 30VDC
¼ HP @ 125/250VA C (N.C.)
¹∕
³
 HP @ 125/250VA C (N.O.)
*
* Trouble contacts shown in “normal” unit energized state
16 17 18 18 19 19
TRB - COM
TRB - N.C.
ALM - COM
ALM - COM
ALM - N.O.
ALM - N.O.
15A @ 125VAC • 10A @ 277VA C • 7A @ 30VDC
¼ HP @ 125/250VAC
1.0A @ 30VDC
Ground to
Back Box
1  Neutral
2  115V
115VAC
50/60 HZ
0.1A MAX.
GN D
N
H
Ground to Back Box
1  Neutral
2  
3  230V
230VAC
50/60 HZ 0.1A MAX.
GN D
H2
H1
AC
AC
24VAC
50/60 HZ
0.2A MAX.
24V  5
  0/N  4
24VDC
0.1A MAX.
(+)
(–)
24V  5
  0/N  4
LOW VOLTAGEHIGH VOLTAGE
DRY CONTACT OUTPUTS
ALARM FACP
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HS-100-N Plenum ionization smoke detector
HS-100-P Plenum photoelectric smoke detector
Supply Voltage 24 VAC: @ 35 mA standby, 74 mA
alarm; 24 VDC:@ 15 mA standby,
56 mA alarm; 115 VAC: @ 25 mA
standby, 32 mA alarm; 230 VAC @
12 mA standby, 16 mA alarm
Frequency
50/60 Hz
Air Velocity
HS-100-N 0-2000 fpm (0-10.2 mps)
HS-100-P 0-3000 fpm (0-15.2 mps)
Radioactive Element For HS-100-N only Americium 241,
0.9 μCi
Relay Output Alarm 1-SPDT, 10A, 115 VAC,
resistive; 1-SPST-NO, 2A Trouble 1-SPST-NC, 10A, 115 VAC, resistive
Wiring Terminations
Solid or stranded, 12 to 22 AWG
terminals
Operating Humidity 0% to 85% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature HS-100-N 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
HS-100-P 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Enclosure Rating White plastic, NEMA 1
Dimensions 6" Dia. x 4.0"H (15.2 x 10.2 cm)
Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Approvals UL File #S2829 CSFM listed 3240-
1004:118 MEA appro
ved 73-92-E,
Vol
. 26
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
ACCESSORIES PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994fi
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
420fi
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

461. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 ORDERING INFORMATION
PENDANT SMOKE DETECTOR
2151 AND B114 SERIES
Supply Voltage
B114LP 120 VAC, Non-polarity reversal (any
color wires)
B114LPBT 24 VAC @ 0.8 VA; 24 VDC @ 35
mA; non-polarity reversal (any color wires)
Alarm Relay Output

Supervisory/Alarm 2.0 A @ 30 VAC/VDC (Form A)
Auxillary 2.0 A @ 30 VAC/VDC; 1.0 A @ 120
VAC (Form C)
Air Velocity 0-3000 fpm (0-15.2 mps)
Wiring Terminations Solid or stranded, 12 to 22 AWG
terminals
Operating Humidity 10% to 93% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1
Dimensions
2151 4" Dia. x 1.66"H (10.2 x4.2 cm)
B114LP 6.2" Dia. x 2.2"H (15.5 x 5.6 cm)
B114LPBT 6.2" Dia. x 0.95"H (15.5 x 2.4 cm)
Approvals UL Listed File S911
Weight
2151 0.2 lb (0.09 kg)
B114LP 0.8 lb (0.4 Kg)
B114LPBT 0.6 lb (0.27 Kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The System Sensor 2151 pendant smoke detector
and B114 bases provide early detection of smoke and
combustion products present in air moving through HVAC
plenum return systems in commercial rooftop package unit
applications
. The detectors are designed to prevent the
recirculation of smoke in areas by the air handling system's fans and blowers
.The 2151 must be mounted to B114 base
for either 120 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC supply voltages.
FEATURES
• 24 •
Visual indication of power and alarm status
• One alarm contact, Supervisory contact and Auxillary
contact
• Compatible with building automation and fire alarm
systems
• Dust filtering included in detector head
WIRING
FM
APPROVED
USC
MODEL DESCRIPTION
2151 Pendent photoelectric smoke detector (body only)
B114LP Base for 2151, 24 VAC/VDC
B114LPBT Base for 2151, 24 VAC/VDC
SPECIFICATIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
RA100Z Remote annunciator, red alarm LED 415
APA151 Remote annunciator with piezo alarm 415
2151
B114LP
STRIP GAUGE
1
2
3
5
4

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
24VDC/24VAC
Terminals
Spring
Base
Tamper
Resistant Tab
- +
RA1002
(0ptional)
APA151
(0ptional)
Auxillary
Contacts
Alarm
Contacts
Supervisory
Contacts
Note: 120VAC model B114LP
Transformer mounted below
Housing, non-polarity, reversal, any color wire
421GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

462. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 CONDUCTIVITY TRANSMITTER
50000 CONDUCTIVITY SERIES
Supply Voltage 14-36 VDC reversed polarity protection
Supply Current With Sensor:≤ 1 A (with transistor loads)
analog output: ≤ 25 mA (at 14 VDC
without transistor loads, with current loop)
Signal Output
Standard Switch: Transistor
Current: 4-20 mA
Neutrino Current: 4-20 mA
Maximum Output Impedance mA
610 Ω at 24 V DC
Accuracy Conductivity: ± 3% of measured value
Temperature ±1.8°F (1°C)
Resolution 1 nS/cm
Measurement Range Conductivity: 0.05 μS/cm to 10 mS/
cm Temperature: -40° to 266°F (-40° to +130°C)
Display
Grey dot matrix 128x64 with backlighting
Response Time 150 ms (10 to 90%)
Materials Of Construction Housing / cover: Stainless steel 1.4561,
PPS / PC Seals / Screws EPDM / Stainless steel Fixed connector mounting plate: Stainless steel Fixed connector: Brass nickel plated Display / navigation key: PC / PBT Nut: PVC or PVDF Wetted part materials Conductivity sensor: PVDF, stainless steel 1
.4571 (316Ti) Electrode:
Stainless steel 1.4571 (316Ti ) for cell
constant C=0.01 or C=0.1 or graphite for
cell constant C=1.0
Wiring Terminations Single analog output: 1x 5-pin M12 male
fixed connector
Fluid Pressure Limit 0 to 87 PSI (0 to 6 bar)
Maximum Pressure 58 psi (4 bar)
Media Temperature Range PVC nut connection: 32° to 122°F (0° to
+50°C)
Operating Humidity ≤ 85%, without condensation
Operating Temperature Transmitter: 14° to 140°F (-10° to +60°C);
Probe 32° to 140°F (0° to +60°C)
Enclosure Rating Standard: IP65 and IP67 with M12
cable plug mounted and cover tightened Neutrino: also includes NEMA 4X and NEMA 6P
Dimensions Standard
9.6"H x 2.6"W x 3.8" D
(24.4 x 6.5 x 9.7 cm)
Neutrino 7.4"H x 2.4"W x 3.4"D
(18.7 x 6.0 x 8.8 cm)
Approvals UL File E237737, CSA
Weight
Standard
0.88 lb (0.4 kg) complete unit
Neutrino 0.52 lb (0.24 kg) complete unit
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Burkert transmitter 50000 series is a compact
transmitter designed for measuring the conductivity of
fluids
. The transmitter consists of a sensor, enclosure with
cover, and an optional and removeable display. The sensor
comprises a cell with two electrodes and a platinum 1000 ohm temperature probe
. The sensor itself is available with
three different cell constants; C = 0.01, 0.1, and 1.0. The
C = 1.0 constant uses graphit electyrode, while the other
two incorporate stainless steel. The conductivity transmitter
can operate independant of the display but the display is required for programming the transmitter
. The 50000 Series is
available with three fully programmable outputs (two transistor and one 4-20 mA analog output)
.
The 50000 "Neutrino" Series, a less featured conductivity
transmitter, has only one 4-20 mA analog output and is not available with LCD display
.
FEATURES
• Programmable outputs: two transistor and single or
dual analog 4-20 mA
• Removable backlighted display
• Universal process connection
• Three cell constants for covering a wide measuring
range C = 0.01, 0.1 and 1.0 standard
• Diagnostic functions
• Additional material contruction: PVC or PVDF
SPECIFICATIONS
559638
Installation: The 50000 Series conductivity transmitters can
be installed into any adaptor with G 1-1/2" external threaded sensor connection by just fixing the main nut
. Select and
install the required SO22 adaptor (see related products) onto the pipe according to specific requirements of the sensor and mater
ial (temperature and pressure)
. For mounting on
a tank or direct mounting on a pipe (DN100 and DN110), an
adaptor with a G 1-1/2" external threaded sensor connection must be used
. The transmitter can be installed in any position.
In order to get reliab
le measurement air bubbles must be
avoided
. Please ensure that the mounting location provides a
continuous and complete immersion of the sensor in the flow stream
. Consult the installation manual for complete installation
instructions.
560693
559168
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
422
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

463. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 2
4
31
Transitor 1
V-
Transitor 2
- +
Power Supply
+
-
Standard
Neutrino
4-20 mA
signal
+
-
4-20 mA
signal
- +
Power Supply
(not used) Out 2
(not used) Out 1
+ V
0 V
CONDUCTIVITY TRANSMITTER
50000 CONDUCTIVITY SERIES
ø0.94 (23.8)
in
(mm)
ø2.6
(65)
2.8
(70)
ø0.87 (22)
3.8
(97)
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS
561228 SO22 threaded adapter for use with threaded tank or pipe, 1 1/4" NPT, PVC-U/FKM, EPD
561232 SO22 welded adapter for use directly on a pipe, Stainless steel/FKM, EPD
WIRING
ACCESSORIES PAGE
440015 Buffer solution, 500 ml, 5 μS
440016 Buffer solution, 500 ml, 15 μS
440017 Buffer solution, 500 ml, 100 μS
440018 Buffer solution, 500 ml, 706 μS
440019 Buffer solution, 500 ml, 1413 μS
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
Parts needed for unit with display and single 4-20 mA and two transistors
559168 Display programming module
559638 Standard transmitter constant C=1.0
560693 1 in NPT mounting adapter tee
917116 Electrical plug
Parts needed for unit without display and single 4-20 mA
562549 Neutrino transmitter constant C=1.0
560693 1 in NPT mounting adapter tee
917116 Electrical plug
423GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

464. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 PH OR ORP TRANSMITTER
50000 PH & ORP SERIES
Supply Voltage 14-36 VDC reversed polarity
protection
Supply Current With Sensor:≤ 1 A (with transistor
loads) analog output: ≤ 25 mA
(at 14 VDC without transistor loads,
with current loop)
Signal Output
Standard Switch:Transistor
Current: 4-20 mA
Neutrino Current: 4-20 mA
Maximum Output Impedance mA
610 Ω at 24 V DC
Accuracy
pH ±0.02 pH or 0.5 mV
ORP ± 3 mV temperature: ±1°C (1.8°F)
Resolution
pH 0.01 pH or 0.1 m
ORP 1 mV
Temperature 0.1°C (0.18°F)
Measurement Range
pH -2 to 16 pH or -580 to +580 mV
ORP -2000 to +2000 mV
Temperature -40 to +130°C (-40 to 266°F)
Display Grey dot matrix 128x64 with
backlighting
Response Time 150 ms (10 to 90%)
Wiring Terminations Single analog output: 1x 5-pin M12
male fixed connector
Fluid Pressure Limit 0 to 87 PSI (0 to 6 bar)
Maximum Pressure 58 psi (4 bar)
Media Compatibility
pH Contaminated fluids (viscous,
suspended solids, small volumes)

ORP Clean (cooling-water, waste water or
slightly contaminated)
Media Temperature Range

pH 32° to 176°F (0° to +80°C)
14° to 122°F (-10° to +50°C)
Operating Humidity ≤ 85%, without condensation
Operating Temperature
Transmitter 14° to 140°F
(-10° to +60°C)
Probe (Flatrobe) 32° to 140°F (0° to +60°C)
Enclosure Rating
Standard IP65 and IP67 with M12 cable plug
mounted and cover tightened
Neutrino also includes NEMA 4X and NEMA
6P
Dimensions 12"H x 3"W x 4.4"D
(30.5 x 7.6 x 11.2 cm)
Approvals UL file E27737, CAN/CSA-C22
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Burkert 50000 pH and ORP transmitter is a compact
device designed for measuring the pH or oxidation-reduction
potential (ORP) in clean liquids or liquids that may have
low conductivity
. The transmitter consists of a replaceable
standard 120 mm pH or ORP probe screwed in a probe holder with integrated Pt1000 temperature sensor
.
This assemb
ly is then mated to an enclosure containing
the electronic module and a removable display for a quick and easy installation
. The pH/ORP transmitter can
operate independent of the display, but it will be required for programming the transmitter and also for visualizing the measured and processed data
.
The 50000 Standard is available with either two transistors
and one 4-20 mA output or two transistors and two 4-20 mA outputs
. The 50000 Neutrino Series is a cost effective less
featured product measuring pH and ORP but with one 4-20 mA output and is not available with an LCD display
.
FEATURES
• Programmable outputs: two transistor and single or
dual analog 4-20 mA
• Removable backlighted display
• Universal process connection
• Compatible with pH/ ORP probes
• Diagnostic functions
• Additional material contruction: PVC or PVDF
SPECIFICATIONS
Principles of Operation: The 50000 device can be used as
a pH or a ORP transmitter according to the probe version
mounted into the holder
. The pH or redox probe is a glass
membrane with variable selectivity according to the pH or the redox, which must be calibrated with buffer solution before the
installation of the transmitter into the pipe
.
When a pH probe is immersed into the solution a difference
in potential is formed due to ions (H+) between the glass
membrane and the solution. This difference in potential
measured in relation to a reference electrode is directly proportional to the pH value
.
560693
559168
w/ 561025
559168
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
424
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

465. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 in
(mm)
0.94 (23.8)
0.78 (20.0)
4.4
(111)
3.0
(75)
PH OR ORP TRANSMITTER
50000 PH & ORP SERIES
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
WIRING
2
4
31
Transitor 1
V-
Transitor 2
- +
Power Supply
+
-
Standard
Neutrino
4-20 mA
signal
+
-
4-20 mA
signal
- +
Power Supply
(not used) Out 2
(not used) Out 1
+ V
0 V
RELATED PRODUCTS
561228 SO22 threaded adapter for use with threaded tank or pipe, 1 1/4" NPT, PVC-U/FKM, EPD
561232 SO22 welded adapter for use directly on a pipe, Stainless steel/FKM, EPD
ACCESSORIES PAGE
418540 Buffer solution, 500 ml, pH = 4
418541 Buffer solution, 500 ml, pH = 7
418543 Buffer solution, 500 ml, pH = 10
418555 Buffer solution, 500 ml, ORP = 475 mV
418557 Storage solution for probes (KCl 3M), 500 ml
560949 Cleaning solution set for probes, 3x 500 ml
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
Installation: The 50000 series pH/ORP transmitter can be
installed into 560693 Tee. Iinstall it in a vertical position with
an angle no greater than 75° from the vertical center line.
Parts needed for unit with display and single 4-20 mA and two transistors
559168 Display programming module
559634 Standard pH transmitter, PVC mounting nut
560693 1 in NPT mounting adapter tee
917116 Electrical plug
561025 pH probe 0 to 14 pH
For ORP, order 561027 probe instead of pH probe listed above
Parts needed for unit without display and single 4-20 mA
562557 Neutrino pH transmitter, PVC mounting nut
560693 1 in NPT mounting adapter tee
917116 Electrical plug
561025 pH probe 0 to 14 pH
For ORP, order 561027 probe instead of pH probe listed above
425GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

466. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 VIBRATION TRANSMITTER
140T
1.13
(2.86)
1.75
(4.44)
0.38 (0.95)
in
(cm)
1.31 dia
(3.33)
1/4-20, 0.38 deep (0.95)
1" NPT
Mounting Connection
DESCRIPTION
A low cost, highly accurate and rugged vibration transmitter,
the Balmac Model 140T is ideal for use with all machines,
even those that previously may have been considered
uneconomical to monitor
.The Model 140T easily mounts by
use of a standard 1/4-20 stud. It is a two-wire, loop-powered
transmitter that can feed the vibration level of operating machinery to a data logger, milliamp monitor, or process control computer
. Solid-state accelerometer and circuit
design pro
vide a 4-20 mA signal proportional to vibration
velocity
. Intrinsically safe, it can safely be used in hazardous
environments when coupled with a Model MTL7706 instrinsic safety barrier
.
FEATURES
• Reliab •
Easy to install
• 4-20 mA signal compatible with BAS controllers
• Intrinsically safe Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C;
Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
• Two year warranty
DIMENSIONS
APPLICATION
Vibration monitoring can provide help in alerting for the destructive effects of vibration on mechanical system equipment, such as the following:
•
Air handler fans
• Cooling tower fans
• Pumps
• Compressors
Supply Voltage 12-50 VDC, black=negative,
red=positive, reverse polarity
protection
Signal Output 4-20 mA
Maximum Output Impedance mA
RL = 50 (Vs-12)Ω; 600Ω @ 24 VDC
Accuracy 5% to 10% of scale
Measurement Range
140T-1 0-1 in/sec vibration (0-25.4 mm/sec)
140T-2 0-2 in/sec vibration (0-50.8 mm/sec)
Frequency Range 7-1300 Hz ±3% (420-78,000 rpm)
Vibration Range 140T-1
Output 4-20 mA, proportional to
vibration level, 0-1 in/sec
(0-25.4 mm/sec)

140T-2 Output 4-20 mA, proportional to
vibration level, 0-2 in/sec
(0-50.8 mm/sec)
Isolation 500V, circuit-to-case
Mounting 1/4''-20 stud, 3/8" deep
Process Connection 1" MNPT
Wiring Termination Terminals
Operating Temperature -4° to 185°F (-20° to 85°C)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4, weatherproof,
Cadmium-plated steel
Weight 1.4 lb (0.64 kg)
Approvals UL file #E126345
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
426
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

467. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 VIBRATION TRANSMITTER
140T
+
-
+
-
140T
4-20 mA
Signal
12-50 VDC
Power
Intrinsically Safe Wiring
Standard Wiring
140T
MTL7706
IS Barrier
Ground Here Only
4-20 mA
1
2
3
4
Max Cable
C=0.08 µF
L= 4.0 mH
Hazardous
Area
Safe
Area
1-5V
–
20-35 VDC
+
250fi
WIRING
INSTALLATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
140T-1 Intrinsically-safe vibration transmitter, range 0-1 in/sec (25.4 mm/sec)
140T-2 Intrinsically-safe vibration transmitter, range 0-2 in/sec (50.8 mm/sec)
NOTE: Ensure that the transmitter is rigidly attached to the monitoring point for the proper sensing of the vibration.
The mounting orientation can be in any position. This position should be in an area for the best vibration signal definition or where
there is a good transfer of the machine's (fan's, pump's, etc.) vibrations. The best location will vary from machine to machine. The
location of the transmitter should be selected carefully. When selecting the site for the mounting location, it is helpful to survey the
site with the aid of a vibration meter.
Wiring subject to physical damage should be
adequately protected. When installing electrical
conduit, it is recommended that a short length (12")
of flexible conduit be used between the transmitter
and an associated junction box
. This construction will
provide some vibration isolation in the conduit line.
Conduit and fittings should conf
orm to the environment
of the transmitter location
. Weather-resistant or rain-
tight fittings should be used to protect the transmitter wiring from a humid or corrosive atmosphere
.
Note:
Make all connections in accordance with

national and local codes.
RELATED PRODUCTS
MTL7706+ Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters
Note: Each application should be evaluated on an individual basis. Consult equipment manufacturers for specific
details concerning safe vibration levels.
ACCESSORIES PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
427GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

468. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 VIBRATION TRANSMITTER / SWITCH
550
1.0
(2.5)
1.0
(2.5)
Two Mounting Holes
5/16" dia
Three Mounting Holes
5/16" dia
0.38
(1.0)
6.75
(17.1)
6.0
(15.2)
4.06
(10.3)
5.25
(13.3)
3.44 (8.7)
4.19
(12.2)
1.75
(4.4)
550-X 550
0.38 (1.0)
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The Balmac Model 550 Vibration Transmitter/Switch
provides low cost, reliable vibration protection for rotating
machinery operating within the range of 120- 60,000 rpm
.
The s
witch's vibration sensor, mounted perpendicular to
the unit's base, responds to the velocity (in/sec) signal and effects automatic shutdown or alarm when preset limits are exceeded
. The unit may be mounted with the sensitive axis in
any plane (horizontal, vertical, or axial), even in an inverted position
. Two limit set points are provided. One is set for
the maximum allowable vibration (in/sec), while the other is set for a percentage of that setting, which trips the alarm relay when that percentage is reached
. A built-in, adjustable
time delay prevents triggering due to transient vibrations.
The s
witch can be wired for automatic reset when vibration
falls below setpoint, or it can be wired for latch and remote reset. The unit has a 4-20 mA output that may be used with
a panel meter or data logger, permitting analysis of vibration trends
. Once the switch has been installed and the limits set,
it requires no attention. The Model 550 is enclosed in heavy,
water-tight cast-aluminum housing. Explosionproof housings
are a
vailable
.
FEATURES
• Reliab •
Dual SPDT relay and 4-20 mA output
• Easy to install
• Two year warranty
DIMENSIONS
Supply Voltage 115 VAC
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Signal Output 4-20 mA DC
Maximum Output Impedance mA
500Ω
Accuracy ±5%
Vibration Sensitive Axis
Perpendicular to the base,
omnidirectional mounting
Measurement Range 0.1-2.75 in/sec (2.5-70 mm/sec)
Frequency Range 2-1000 Hz (120-60,000 rpm)
Relay Output SPDT relay 5A @ 125 VAC; 5A @
28 VDC
Time Delay 1-30 seconds
Limits Limit #1 (alarm) Set as a percent of
Limit #2 (shutdown)
Limit #2: (shutdown) Set at a velocity
level in inches/sec
Remote Reset Circuit closure between latch and
common will reset both outputs
Mounting 1/4" hardware, 3 mounting holes
Wiring Terminations Terminals accepts up to 12
AWG wire
Operating Temperature -30° to 165°F (-34° to 74°C)
Enclosure Rating 550
Rugged, water- and dust-tight cast
aluminum NEMA 3, 4, and 12
550-x NEMA 7CD, 9EFG
Dimensions
550 3 .44"W x 5.937"H x 3.88"D
(8.73 x 15.09 x 9.84 cm)
550-X 4.81"W x 7.13"H x 4.5"D
(12.2 x 18.1 x 11.4 cm)
Weight
550 3.6 lb (1.6 kg)
550-X 6 lb (2.7 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
428
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

469. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 VSVS
VS
VS
VS
VS
VSVSVS
VS
VS
Centrifugal Compressor
Reciprocating
Compressor
Y-Type Compressor Vertical Pump
Engine Gear Compressor Cooling Tower Fa n
VIBRATION TRANSMITTER / SWITCH
550
4-20mA
Mute
Latch
Common
C
N/C
N/O
C
N/C
N/O
L2
L1
Limit #1
Alarm
Limit #2
Shutdown
115 VAC 50/60 Hz
Reset (N.O.)
4-20 mA
Signal
Jumper fo r
Non-Latching
Operation Form C Contacts
to Alarm and
Shutdown Circuits
WIRING
OPERATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL RANGE OF LIMITS ENCLOSURE
550 0.1 to 2.75 in/sec 2 NEMA 3, 4, 12 Aluminum
550-X 0.1 to 2.75 in/sec 2 NEMA 7CD, 9EFG
NUMBER
TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS
NOTE: You must ensure that the switch is rigidly
attached to the monitoring point for the proper
sensing of the vibration.
The 550 is a self-contained, vibration protection limit switch.
It guards against destr
uctive levels of vibration by tripping
a relay that has a user-adjustable limit setpoint in terms of vibration velocity (in/sec). This relay output is connected
to an alarm or control system to provide a warning or shutdown
. It mounts at the monitoring point and is enclosed
in a watertight, heavy castaluminum housing. Terminals are
provided for remote or manual reset. A 4-20 mA output for
recording or metering can connect to a remote readout panel meter or BAS controller
.
The wiring access is through the 3/4" NPT conduit hole on
the side of the switch enclosure. Wiring subject to physical
damage should be adequately protected. When installing
electrical conduit, a short length (12") of flexible conduit must be used between the vibration switch and an associated junction box
. This construction will provide some vibration
isolation in the conduit line. Conduit and fittings should
conf
orm to the environment of the vibration switch location
.
In hazardous locations
, the proper explosionproof fittings
should be used
. Weather-resistant or rain-tight fittings
should be used to protect the switch wiring from a humid or corrosive atmosphere
.
Note: Make all connections in accordance with national and
local codes.
429GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

470. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 4
12
3
1: V+
2: switched NC
3: 4-20 mA
4: V-
V+
V-
1
4
2
3
Switched NC
4-20 mA
Brown
Black
White
Blue
VIBRATION SWITCH
VK SERIES
Supply Voltage 18 – 32 VDC, 525 mA
Signal Output 4-20 mA
Maximum Output
Impedance mA 500Ω
Contact Rating 0.5A DC PNP (Sourcing)
Contact Type 1 NC open collector transistor
Accuracy Transmitter
<±5% of full range
Switch <±4% of full range
Linearity <±0.25% of full range
Repeatability <0.5% of full range
Measurement Range VK021
0 to 1"/second (0-25 mm/second)

VK022
0 to 2"/second (0-50 mm/second)
Frequency Range 10 Hz to 1000 Hz
Visual Indication Power Green LED Switching status
Yellow LED (Energized = Switched)
Shock 400g
Switch Adjustment up to 50 mm/sec
Time Delay 1 to 60 seconds
Process Connection M8 (order mounting adapter
separ
ately)
Wiring Terminations
4 pin M12 reg foot connector (order
separately)
Operating Temperature 13° to 176°F (-25° to 80°C)
Enclosure Rating PBT (Pocan); PC (Makrolon); FPM
(Viton); stainless steel 316L, IP67, NEMA 1
Dimensions
1.06" diameter x 2.88"H
(2.7 x 7.31 cm)
Approvals UL File E174189, CE
Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The IFM Efector VK Series vibration monitor continuously monitors HVAC and industrial equipment to prevent machine downtime and expensive downtime
. The compact VK Series
switch is designed to be permanently mounted to monitor a machine's vibration level
. The monitor provides continuous
feedback of vibration within a range of 10Hz to 1000Hz with a 4-20 mA analog signal
. Setup is quick using two setup dials
to adjust the maximum RMS velocity setpoint and response delay time
. The sensor continuously monitors real-time
RMS vibration velocity (based on the ISO 10816 standard) and provides an analog output of the velocity as well as a switching output when an alarm value is exceeded
. Highly-
visib
le LEDs provide local indication for power and alarm
.
FEATURES
• T •
Solid state electronics
• Analog and switched outputs
• No software needed
• Local LEDs for power and switching status
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
2.50 (6.4)
0.43 (1.1)
M12x1
1.06 (2.7)
2.7
2.88 (7.3)
M82
1
in (cm)
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
430
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

471. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 VIBRATION SWITCH
VK SERIES
SETTING / CONNECTION DIAGRAM
ORDERING INFORMATION
FREQUENCY DIAGRAM
RMS Set
Delay Set
1
3
2
4
V+
GND
4 to 20 mA
1
2
3 5
4
6
1: Locking ring
2: Setting rings (manually adustable after unlock ing)
3: LED green: voltage supply
4: M8 process connection
5: LED yellow: lights when switching threshold and
time delay are exceeded
6: Setting marks
NC
MODEL DESCRIPTION
VK021 VK Series vibration monitor, switch point 0 to 25 mm/sec
VK022 VK Series vibration monitor, switch point 0 to 50 mm/sec
Ordering Note: Connector required, see below
RELATED PRODUCTS
EVC001 6' foot straight connector
EVC002 15' straight connector
EVC003 30' straight connector
EVC004 6' right-angled connector
EVC005 15' right-angled connector
EVC006 30' right-angled connector
F90037 Octavis mounting adhesive
F90042 Octavis mounting base
F90043 Octavis mounting magnet
Frequency
10Hz
Typical motor frequency Typical bearing fault frequency Typical harmonic frequency
1000Hz
ACCESSORIES PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
431GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

472. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 WEATHER INSTRUMENTS
A70 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Comptus A70 Series Weather Instruments with
signal conditioning provide a 4-20 mA output proportional to
wind speed (A70-SL), wind direction (A70-DL), barometric
pressure (A70-PL) or rainfall (A70-RL)
. The A70 Series
provides the user with weather information that can be used for monitoring purposes or as an input to control systems
.
FEATURES
• Rug •
Reliable operation
• Industry standard 4-20 mA output
• Track-mounted transmitter
Supply Voltage 12-24 VDC, 30 mA max; 24 VAC,
2.3 VA, 120 VAC (per model
ordered)
Signal Output 4-20 mA
Maximum Output Impedance
700Ω @ 24 VDC,
R=(Supply Voltage -10) x 50Ω
Accuracy ±1%
Warranty 1 year
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
ASSEMBLY / DIMENSIONS
APPLICATION
A70-DL
A70-RL
A70-SL
A96
Lightning Arrestor
A76-SD
5 .5 (13 .97)
24
(60 .96)
A76-T10
Tripod Mounting
9 .5
(24 .13)
60
(152 .4)
32
(81 .3)
in
(cm)
Wind Speed (A70-SL) The wind speed is measured with a three-cup anemometer, and a 4-20 mA output signal proportional to 0-100 mph is generated
. Accuracy from 3-9 mph is ±1 mph; above 10 mph,
accuracy is ±5% of reading. The A70-SL is supplied with
60' (18.28m) of cable and a 10" (25.40 cm) stub mast for
mounting the anemometer.
Wind Direction (A70-DL) Wind direction is measured with a precision potentiometr
ic
wind vane that produces a signal proportional to the azimuth of the wind
. This signal is converted to a 4-20 mA output over
0 to 360 degrees The vane has a four-degree deadband on either side of north
. The A70-DL is provided with 60' (18.28m)
of cable and an S mast for mounting.
Barometric Pressure (A70-PL)
The A70-PL senses barometric pressure by an integrated silicon, absolute pressure sensor with integral temperature compensation
. It outputs a 4-20 mA signal over 27'' to
31'' Hg. Accuracy is ±0.05'' Hg. The sensor is mounted to
the transmitter board, and a 3/16'' (0.48 cm) tube may be
attached to the sensor to provide remote pressure sensing.
Rainfall (A70-RL) The
A70-RL utilizes tipping bucket technology to measure
rainfall and outputs a 4-20 mA signal over a range of 0" to 1'' (0 to 2
.5 cm). When the output reaches 20 mA (1''), it resets
to 4 mA, and the cycle begins over again. Accuracy is ±4%.
The sensor includes 50' (15.24m) of cable.
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
432
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

473. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 WEATHER INSTRUMENTS
A70 SERIES
Wind Speed Wind Direction Barometric Pressure Rainfall
4-20 mA
Signal
12345
+ -
A70-DL
X2
Wind Direction
VaneCenter
Terminal
+-
Red
Dot
24 VDC
Power
Supply
Wind Speed Anemometer
4-20 mA
Signal
A70-SL
1234
X3
24 VDC
Power
Supply
12
X1
4-20 mA
Signal
A70-PL
+
24 VDC
Power
Supply
12
X4
4-20 mA
Signal
A70-RL
21
X1
Rain
Gauge
No
Polarity
+
24 VDC
Power
Supply
T1
X2
24 VAC or 120 VAC
power supply
A70-SL
4-20 mA sourcing signal
Identical fo r each output
A70-DL
01
AC
HOT
NEU
GND
H
N
Grd
+
–
02
03
04
05
DC
X3
01
ANEM
+
+–
–
+
–
SIG
02
03
04
05
VANE
X5
01
MTR
BARD
DIR
SPEED
+
+
+
–
+
–
–
–
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
WIRING
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES
A76-SD Mounting bracket for wind speed and direction transmitters
A76-T10 Tripod tower with mast (10 ft/3m total height) for wind speed and direction sensors
A96-100P Lightning arrestor for wind speed sensor (includes pipe-mounting clamp)
A96-200P Lightning arrestor for wind direction sensor (includes pipe-mounting clamp)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A70-DL Wind direction transmitter, 24 VDC loop powered
A70-PL Barometric pressure transmitter, 24 VDC loop powered
A70-RL Rainfall transmitter, 24 VDC loop powered
A70-SDL Wind speed/direction transmitters, 24 VDC loop powered
A70-SDPL Wind speed/direction and barometric pressure transmitters, 24 VDC loop powered
A70-SL Wind speed transmitter, 24 VDC loop powered
For 24 VAC models, add “4” to end of model number; for 120 VAC models add “6” to end of model number
433GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

474. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 RAIN/SNOW SENSOR CONTROLLER
DS-2B
DESCRIPTION
The Model DS-2B Rain/Snow Sensor Controller provides
reliable rain and snow detection and control for commercial
or residential applications
. It detects rain to control motorized
windows, roof vents, window wipers, etc., and detects snow to
control snow melt and deicing systems for wheelchair ramps, stairways, driveways, loading docks, roofs, and more
. The
Model DS-2B is a low cost, easy-to-install, energy-saving alternative to thermostats, manual switches, or timer controls
.
It can be used stand-alone or in combination with b
uilding
automation systems
.
FEATURES
• Lo •
Full 30A @ 240 VAC N.O. load contact rating
• UL listed and CE approved
• Replaceable precipitation sensor element
• Override switch for manual-on, auto, standby/reset
• Remote operation up to 1000' (305m)
• Adjustable temperature trigger point
• Adjustable delay-off time
• Activate or disable low temperature cutout
• Smart manual-on operates for one delay-off cycle
Supply Voltage 100-120/200-240 VAC @ 15 VA, field
selectable
Life Expectancy Minimum 100,000 cycles (relay)
Relay Output Load 30A @ 240 VAC
Monitor 24 VAC/VDC, 400 mA, 10W total
Alarm Relay Time Delay
Sensor 2 minutes
Controller 30-90 minutes, field selectable
Additional Specifications
Trigger temperature: 34°, 39°, or
44°F (1.1°, 3.9°, or 6.6°C),
field selectable
Mounting 3/4" rigid conduit or 4 mounting tabs
Wiring Terminations 18" (45.72 cm) leads
Power 14 AWG 18" (45.72 cm) leads
Load 10 AWG 18" (45.72 cm) leads
Remote control 22 AWG, five-wire cable
Operating Temperature -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Enclosure Rating Two-gang PVC NEMA 3R
Dimensions 7.0"H x 4.75"W x 2.75"D
(17.78 x 12.07 x 6.99 cm)
Approvals UL file E207482, CE
Weight 2.3 lb (1.04 kg)
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
DS-2B
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
434
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

475. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 RAIN/SNOW SENSOR CONTROLLER
DS-2B
(black)
(white)
(green)
L1
L2
GND
N.O.
N.O.
30A
@
240V
(red)
(red)
Load
Output
Input
Power
(red) (orange)
(red)
(orange)
(white)
(green)
(black)
Remote
Manual-
On
Monitor
Contact
Output
Pilot Duty
Remote
Standby/
Reset
Monitor
Contact
400 mA max
@ 24 VAC/VDC
DS-2B
Load
Contact
WIRING
OPERATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS
MG-1 Precipitation grid replacement kit
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DS-2B Rain/Snow sensor controller with remote control/monitor cable
The DS-2B senses precipitation and outdoor air temperature. It also provides on/off control for direct operation of rain or snow
control loads and on/off status indication to a building automation system or other light load. It installs out in the open. Rain and
sno
w will fall directly on the top of the enclosure where the sensing element is located
. When precipitation, in the form of rain
or snow, is present, the load and monitor relay contacts close based on the adjustable settings for the trigger (setpoint). When
precipitation stops, the contacts remain closed until the adjustable delay-off timer expires.
F
actory settings are 39°F (3
.9°C) trigger point, and the delay-off timer is enabled and set for one hour. Also, the lowtemperature
cutout is disabled, so the trigger will switch even below 15°F (-9.4°C).
A three-position toggle switch on the housing allows manual override. The manual-on position turns on the control (closes the
relay outputs). The automatic position allows automatic control based on the adjustable settings. If switched to manual-on then
back to automatic within two seconds, the control will execute one delay-off cycle. The toggle switch also has a standby/reset
position, which turns off the control and resets the off timer. These manual override functions may also be accomplished remotely
by wiring dry contacts to the remote control/monitoring cable (See Wiring below)
435GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

476. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 ORDERING INFORMATION
GAS CALIBRATION AND VERIFICATION KITS
CO/CO2/NO2-C KIT SERIES, 3015 SERIES, MODEL UCK
MODEL DESCRIPTION
1309K0002 GDS, GDD, GDN calibration kit for 58 to 103L gas cylinders
1309K0004 GDS, GDD, GDN calibration kit for 17 to 34L gas cylinders
REFRIGERANT CALIBRATION KITS
Perform operation validation on Bacharach refrigerant monitoring devices in the field with the 3015 Series Refrigerant Verification Kits
. Each kit includes a 1L filled
refr
igerant gas cylinder, 5 ft (1
.5m) of plastic tubing, variable
regulator, and a hard carrying case.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
3015-3430 R-22 Gas verification kit, 100 ppm
3015-3437 R-134a Gas verification kit, 100 ppm
3015-3438 R-123 Gas verification kit, 100 ppm
UNIVERSAL CALIBRATION KIT
The Model UCK Universal Calibration Kit contains essential items
to perform gas calibration on a variety of gas monitoring equipment.
The kit includes assor
ted tubing sizes, couplings, adapters,
restrictors, a regulator, pressure gage, and a hard carrying case
.
Gas cylinders are sold separ
ately
. The Model UCK-1 contains a
regulator to fit 17L cylinders for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants)
. For corrosive gases (NO2, H2S, SO2,
and NH3), use Model UCK-2 which contains a regulator for 58L cylinders
. Model UCK-3 contains both 17L and 58L regulators.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases
(N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants)
UCK-2 Universal calibration kit for corrosive gases
(NO2, H2S, SO2, and NH3)
UCK-3 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive or corrosive gases
(Gas Sold Seperately)
GROUND
SHIPPING
ONLY
GROUND
SHIPPING
ONLY
GAS CALIBRATION KITS
The 1309K0002 and the 1309K0004 calibration kits from Honeywell Analytics are designed to ensure optimal performance from each of their gas detection devices
. It is also
ideal f
or the Kele GDS, GDN, and GDD Series gas detectors
.
These gas calibr
ation kits include, tubing, regulator, calibration
adapter, carrying case, and instructions to properly test and maintain gas detection instrumentation. Calibration gases are
available in 17L, 58L, or 103L cylinder and must be ordered separately
. These kits are not applicable to the VASQN8X and
the SPXCD gas detectors.fi
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
436fi
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

477. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 GROUND
SHIPPING
ONLY
ORDERING INFORMATION
GAS CYLINDERS AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT
GAS SERIES AND MODEL NIOSHSCBA
The Model NIOSHSCBA Self-Contained Breathing
Apparatus Kit provides dependable respiratory protection
in hostile environments
. The unit meets NIOSH (National
Institute for Occupational Safety and Health) requirements and has an assigned OSHA protection factor of 10,000
.
The kit includes a nylon harness assembly, hood, compact
demand valve with adjustable flow by-pass, and a filled 30 minute aluminum cylinder
.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
NIOSHSCBA Self-contained breathing apparatus kit
SCBA-WALCASE Aluminum case deluxe storage unit for single NIOSHSCBA
DESCRIPTION
The GAS Series Gas Cylinders are available in 17L or 58L sizes for a variety of different gases and refrigerants
. The
weight for 17L cylinders is 0.94 lb (0.42 kg) and 1.7 lb (0.77
kg) for 58L cylinders.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
GAS-CH4-7.5 2.5% methane A12, 17L
GAS-CO-100 100 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L
GAS-CO-200 200 ppm carbon monoxide (C) in air, 17L
GAS-CO-25 25 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L
GAS-CO-50 50 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L
GAS-CO2-1000 1000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L
GAS-CO2-2000 2000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L
GAS-CO2-800 800 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L
GAS-H2-2 2.0% hydrogen (H2) in air, 17L
GAS-H2S-25 25 ppm hydrogen sulfide (H2S) in air, 58L
GAS-N2 Nitrogen (N2), 17L
GAS-NH3-50 50 ppm ammonia (NH3) in nitrogen (N2), 58L
GAS-NO2-5 5 ppm nitrogen dioxide (NO2) in air, 58L
GAS-O2-18 18% oxygen (O2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L
GAS-R11-500 500 ppm R-11 in air, 17L
GAS-R12-500 500 ppm R-12 in air, 17L
GAS-R123-100 100 ppm R-123 in air, 17L
GAS-R134A-500 500 ppm R-134a in air,17L
GAS-R22-500 500 ppm R-22 in air, 17L
GROUND
SHIPPING
ONLY
437GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

478. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 WHAT'S YOUR IAQ?
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) is a topic that has remained hot for over two decades. Thanks to several high-profile contaminant incidents,
the public has a heightened awareness of the potential effects of unintentional exposure to carbon monoxide, mold and mildew,
corona viruses, and legionella. Added to their concerns are threats of intentional exposure to anthrax, smallpox, and other unknown
agents of chemical and biological warfare.
In response to these potential dangers, mechanical engineers face the important challenge of changing the way ventilation is
designed. They are diligently searching for the types of sensors and controls that will help them take the best steps possible to
ensure that the air we breathe in our facilities is clean.
Through our network of manufacturers, research institutions, and military contacts, we’re aware of research that’s in progress, and
we’re among the first to evaluate any IAQ-related product that has the potential of being brought to market.
WHERE ARE WE WITH SENSORS TO DETECT CONTAMINANTS?
Our GDD, GDN, and GDS Series gas detectors offer state-of-the-art solutions for common toxic and combustible gases. They
can provide a reliable source of alarm and control when a potential hazard is known. Refrigerant sensors range from the RLD-5
and RLD-134A, to the AGM, HGM, VA301, VAQN8X and GDC Series for single and multizone applications. Look under the “Gas
& Specialty Sensors” and “Hazardous Locations” sections in the 2012 Kele Catalog for information on these products and their capabilities
.
WHAT ABOUT SENSORS FOR TOXINS AND MICROORGANISMS?
Sensors for the higher-profile toxins and microorganisms are on the way, but they’re not cost-effective yet. Even though success
has been proven for demand-controlled ventilation (DCV), its implementation rate remains low.
Cost is the typical reason f
or leaving out this important part of a project
. Trimming costs is understandable, but with a typical 6 to 18
month payback using DCV, it is far better even in the short run to maximize energy efficiency this way. Kele stocks a variety of CO2
sensors to help meet any specification. Our KCO2, KCD Series, 5001 and 8041 Specialty, and C7232A are all time-proven, low-
maintenance devices that do the job at a competitive price.
WHAT ABOUT MOLD AND MILDEW?
Mold and mildew are tough to sense, but Kele’s wide range of humidity sensors, water leak detectors, and float switches can all play a role in preventing these growths from occurring in the first place
. While they can’t prevent every growth, controlling humidity
adequately and detecting water are excellent steps to take to help prevent the proliferation of mold and mildew
. Leak detectors and float switches are also found in the “Level” section
of the catalog, and our “Humidity” section can also provide you with what you need.
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
438
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

479. WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014 DEMAND-BASED VENTILATION
Why Ventilate?
When a building is occupied, there are two primary sources of
air contaminants
. The building materials and furnishings emit
water vapor and other gases, and the people inside do, too.
Of these, the people component is by far the most significant in a typical office building, school, theater, or other similar commercial establishment
. The non-people component may
be heavier in industrial occupancies or places where volatile materials are stored
. In either case, the air contaminant level
must be controlled by introducing fresh air at an appropriate rate
.
Codes When an engineer
selects the amount of outdoor air to be
provided to a space, he/she must comply with the governing mechanical codes
. Nearly all of these refer to ASHRAE
Standard 62-1989, which specifies minimum ventilation rates for the most common types of occupancy on a cfm per person basis
. These are the occupancy types mentioned
above, in which the people component of contamination far outweighs the other sources
. Consider a school classroom
with 30 students plus a teacher. ASHRAE 62 calls for 15 cfm
of outdoor air per person, so the air handling system must be capable of supplying a minimum of 465 cfm of outdoor air
.
Depending on the type of construction and exposure, this

outdoor air can amount to as much as half of the heating and cooling load!
Variable Occupancy-Variable Ventilation
Now consider that the classroom in question only has 15
students enrolled for a school year
. Through a full heating
season and a partial cooling season, an unnecessary 225 cfm of outdoor air will be introduced if the damper controls are only designed for economizer with a minimum position
.
With typical Memphis weather and utility rates*, that is almost $300 lost for just one classroom in one year
. In most other
areas, the loss will be even higher.
Demand-based ventilation is the answer to this problem.
When people exhale, they tend to raise the level of carbon

dioxide (CO
2) in the space
. When the code-required amount
o
f outdoor air is being supplied, the indoor level of CO
2
tends to stabilize at about 700 ppm above the outdoor air CO
2 level
. Thus, if the outdoor air supply is modulated to
maintain a consistent CO
2 level of 700 ppm above ambient,
the code-required level of ventilation per person is being supplied based on the number of people actually present.
A
SHRAE has confirmed that this technique is valid with a
formal interpretation to Standard 62-1989
. Note that a CO
2
transmitter is needed
. Volatile organic compound-only (VOC)
sensors do not give a specific enough response to be used in this application
.
In most locations, the outdoor air CO2 level is very constant
at 350 to 450 ppm. In this case, control can be achieved with
return air or wall-mounted sensors. A control point of about
1000 ppm indoors will give the required ventilation rate with an adequate safety margin
. In large cities with heavy traffic,
or next to large parking structures, outdoor CO
2 levels can
vary
. In this case, both indoor and outdoor levels should be
sensed, and the control point should be around 700 ppm differential between the two
. In the school example above,
this type of control would automatically reduce the outdoor airflow from 465 to 240 cfm since the 15 missing people do not contribute to the CO
2 level in the room
.
Products Kele has a broad range of CO
2 level transmitters from
Honeywell, GE, Vaisala, and our own Kele brand label sensors
. Call Kele for the products that minimize ventilation
expenses without compromising indoor air quality or code compliance
.
* Average rates $0.065/kWh, $0.50/ccf
For more information, see the article “What’s Controlling Your Ventilation?” on the Kele web site in the Technical Reference section at www
.kele.com.
SYMBOL AREA (FT2) MOUNTING NAME RADIUS (FT)
C12H26 1250 1 FT from Ceiling JETA 20
C3H8 1250 1 FT from Ceiling PROPANE 20
C4H10 1250 1 FT from Floor ISO-BUTANE 20
C6H14 1250 1 FT from Ceiling HEXANE 20
C6H6 1250 1 FT from Ceiling GASOLINE/BENZENE 20
CG2O 1250 3-5 FT from Floor FORMALDEHYDE 20
CH4 1250 1 FT from Ceiling METHANE 20
CO 5000 3-5 FT from Floor CARBON MONOXIDE 50
CO2 5000 3-5 FT From Floor CARBON DIOX IDE 50
H2 1250 1 FT From Ceiling HYDROGEN 20
H2S 1250 1FT From Floor HYDROGEN SULFIDE 20
NH3 1250 1FT From Ceiling AMMONIA 20
NO 5000 1-3 FT From Ceiling NITRIC OXIDE 50
NO2 5000 1-3 FT From Ceiling NITROGEN DIOXIDE 50
O2 1250 3-5 FT From Floor OXYGEN 20
REFRIGERANTS 1250 1 FT From Floor REFRIGERANTS 20
SO2 1250 1FT From Floor SULFURIC OXYGEN 50
VOC 1250 3-5 FT From Floor VOTILE ORGANIC CHEMICALS 20
GAS COVERAGE CHART
439GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

480. WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014 This phrase appears in some form in a number of Kele
Catalogs including this one as a warning to customers that
the particular product (usually a gas detector) is not to be
relied upon to safeguard humans or animals from a particular
hazard
. It may, though, be part of a control system that helps
prevent the formation of a hazardous environment under normal conditions when the product is properly applied and maintained
. Even then, such devices, in most cases, cannot
protect persons or animals that are intimate with the hazard.
Occasionally, a specification may insist upon a device that is
listed or certified as a life safety device. However, there is no
such listing or certification available, except by manufacturers of certain firefighting equipment and personal portable gas monitors
. The only nationally recognized code that employs
the term "life safety" is the Life Safety Code, and products are not specified in this code
. Its official title is actually "NFPA 101,
Safety to Life from Fires in Buildings." There is no agency that
certifies compliance with this code.
Some common products, which may be required to be applied
as life safety devices, are classified into individual functional groups
. Fire alarm equipment, including smoke detectors, is
such a group. Boiler flame safety equipment is another group.
UL, F
actory Mutual, CSA, and other certifying agencies will
list and label approved equipment for use in these specific categories. They are not listed and labeled as “life safety
devices” but rather as “Fire Protection Signaling Equipment” or “Gas Flame Safety Equipment
.” Again, it must be emphasized
that there is no such certification as “Life Safety” unless it is being applied by a manufacturer to firefighting equipment or personal portable protective equipment
. The Life Safety Code
does not specify products; therefore, no product can claim compliance with it
.
Even a gas sensor that is listed and labeled as a sensor by
UL or another agency should never be used as a last line of defense for life
. Considering the following logic will give a bet-
ter appreciation for the underlying reasons why:
Time
Gas sensors have inherent response times that are signifi-
cant
. Even the fastest sensors cannot claim better than 30
seconds, and many refrigerant leak sensors may exceed 15 minutes in response to the presence of a gas
. If a multi-zone
sensor is considered, response time for any one zone can exceed even the 15-minute level
. Basically, if a person or
animal is in the machine room when a catastrophic release of refrigerant occurs, no sensor will save he/she or it from injury or death
.
Power
Gas sensors are powered by electricity, and there is rarely, if ever, a backup power system applied to them
. If the electricity
goes out, the sensor cannot function.
Life Span
The active portions of gas sensors have limited lives. If not
proper
ly maintained, the sensor cannot function
.
Location Ev
en if a gas sensor has an uninterruptible power supply and
is properly maintained, it can only measure gas concentration at its specific location
. At the source of the leak, the concen-
tration of the offending gas will be much higher. A person
or animal nearer to the source of the contaminant ma
y be
exposed to a lethal dose; however, the level may never rise to the personal exposure limit at the sensor location if the prevailing airflow is toward the source
.
Absolute Pr
otection
Absolute protection from inhalation hazards can only be provided by a source of known-to-be-clean air
. Self-contained
breathing appar
atus (SCBA) and remote air delivered by com-
pressors and tubing are options that can actually safeguard a life from a toxic gas. In areas where such exposure is likely,
other codes require that such clean air sources be available.
T
o detect combustible or toxic mixtures at very low levels in
order to protect lives in confined spaces or other potentially hazardous atmospheres, personal battery-operated moni- tors that perform well are available. These can also overcome
some of the shortfalls of fixed gas monitoring, as long as they are regularly tested and maintained
.
In conclusion, fix
ed gas detectors may be used as part of a
control system that is designed to prevent a hazardous situ- ation from occurring
. Excellent choices include Kele’s TP-1M
and GMT-CO-S1 Carbon Monoxide Sensors to control garage ventilation
. They may be used to signal a control system to
begin ventilating a potential hazard or one that has already occurred
. The same can be said of the reliable and cost-effec-
tive HGM Series and RLD Series Refrigerant Leak Detectors.
In neither case
, however, can they be relied upon absolutely
to prevent health effects due to inhalation or combustion in a space that is already occupied. Their reaction time, level of
maintenance, source of power, and proximity to the individuals in question cannot be guaranteed
.
“Not to be Used as a Life Safety Device”
ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY DEVICESfifl
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
440fifl
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS
7

481. HUMIDITY
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS
LOCATIONS
L4 | p. 465
TT881 | p. 445
HZLIM | p. 450
EPETD8S | p. 452
MTL5000 | p. 474
K1 | p. 456
Kele Has You Covered With Hard-to-Source Items
Designed for Hazardous Environments.

482. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
SPXCD | p. 466
ELP | p. 463
ST-X | p. 442
HAZARDOUS
LOCATIONS
Alarms and Control Stations for Hazardous Locations
878EX, 879EX, 116EXMST — Explosion Proof Horns & Strobes. . . . . . . . . . 479
HL600 Series — Hazardous Location Control Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Conduit Seals and Fittings for Hazardous Locations EYM Series — Close-up Plugs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
PLG50 Series — Close-up Plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
AC1A — Kwik
o
®
Sealing Cement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
ACK6F — Kwik
o
®
Twinpak Sealing Cement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
F01 — Fiber Filler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
AC1F01A — Kwik
o
®
Sealing Cement and Fiber Filler Kits
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Enclosures and Accessories for Hazardous Locations CXJ Series — Explosion Proof Custom Control Stations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
AXJ, XJAT Series — Explosion Proof Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
MA8, MC6/7, MP6/7 Series — Schneider Electr
ic Explosion Proof Actuator
Enclosure (for Valves and Dampers)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
ZS-260 —
Explosion Proof Direct Coupled Actuator Enclosure
(for Dampers)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
GRT Series — Explosion Proof Outlet Bo
x
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Flow and Level Monitoring for Hazardous Locations IL10 Series — Intr
insically Safe Level Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
FS7-4E — Explosion Proof
Water Flow Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
EchoSafe — Flo
wline Explosion Proof Level Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
ELP — Flo
wline Intrinsically Safe Ultrasonic Level Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
L4 — Explosion Proof Float Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
V4-2-U — Explosion Proof Flo
w Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Intrinsic Safety Barriers for Hazardous Locations MTL5000, MTL7000, MTL7700 Series — Intr
insic Safety Barriers
. . . . . . . . . 474
Pressure Sensors and Switches for Hazardous Locations K1 Series — Intr
insically Safe Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
IXLdp — Ashcroft Intr
insically Safe Differential Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . 457
1950G Series — Explosion Proof Air Diff
erential Pressure Switch
. . . . . . . . . . 459
Specialty Sensors for Hazardous Locations SPXCD Series — Explosion Proof Gas Monitor /
Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
30-3003D — Det-tronics Explosion Proof Duct Smok
e Detector
. . . . . . . . . . . 468
550-X — Balmac
Vibration Transmitter / Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
140T- Hazardous —
Intrinsically Safe Vibration Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
10316H2176 — Explosion Proof
Whisker Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Temperature Controls for Hazardous Locations HZLIM Series — Explosion Proof High and Lo
w Limit Controls
. . . . . . . . . . . . 450
EPETD8S, T6051B1006 — Explosion Proof
Thermostats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
A19AUC-2 — Explosion Proof Bulb
Thermostat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
HLT Series — Explosion Proof
Thermostat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Temperature and Humidity Sensors for Hazardous Locations ST-X Series — Precon Explosion Proof Room
Temperature Sensor
. . . . . . . . 442
TT211 — Minco Intr
insically Safe RTD Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
TT881 — Minco Explosion Proof Platin
um RTD Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
HT880 Series — Minco Explosion Proof / Intr
insically Safe Humidity and
Temperature Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
HHT Series — Explosion Proof / Intr
insically Safe Humidity & Temperature
Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

483. fifl 441HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Notes:
1. Dry contacts, thermistors, RTDs, and other devices conforming to the definition of “simple apparatus” require that the sensing circuit limit the applied voltage and current to 1.2V
and 100 mA maximum. Power dissipation and stored energy in the hazardous area must be limited to 25 mW and 20 mJ. Switches, thermistors, and RTDs used to sense ambient
conditions may generally be given a temperature rating of T6 (185°F/85°C), but they must always be checked against the ignition temperature of the hazardous atmosphere.
2. AXJ and XJAT enclosures are available in a wide range of sizes and configurations. If the project calls for something other than the standard products shown in this catalog,
contact Kele for availability of custom configurations.

APPLICATION GUIDE
The Application Guide below is a quick reference guide to applying Kele automation system interface devices in hazardous locations. Additional information on an explosion proof and instrinsically safe systems can be found in the Technical Reference section at the back of this catalog.The Application Guide covers the most common applications based upon customer requests and is not intended to be all-inclusive. If the application desired is not listed, please contact Kele for assistance at 888-397-KELE (5353)

484. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 442fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
Type 63 ±0.72°F (0.40°C)
Type 71 ±0.054°F (0.03°C)
Type 81 and 85 ±0.48°F (0.27°C) @ 32°F (0°C)
Type 91 ±0.91°F (0.46°C) @ 32°F (0°C)
Lead Wires #24 AWG, 8'L (2.4m)
Materials Of Construction
Copper-free aluminum enclosure
Sensor Type Thermistor, Platinum thin film RTD
Temperature Range -30° to 240°F (-34° to 115°C)
Dimensions 5.75"H x 1.63"W x 2.13"D
(14.1 x 4.1 x 5.2 cm)
Weight 0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Warranty 1 year
PRECON EXPLOSION PROOF ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR
ST-X SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Precon Model ST-X explosion proof room
temperature sensor provides accurate space temperature
sensing in a compact, unobtrusive housing suitable for
wall mounting
. The all aluminum NEMA 7 / NEMA 9
enclosure minimizes time lag and allows installation in most atmospheres containing flammable gases or dusts (Groups C, D, E, F, G)
.
FEATURES
• Class I, Division 1, Group C, D; Class II, Division 1,
Groups E, F, G
• NEMA 7CD, 9EFG
• RTD or thermistor styles available
• E-Z mount (1/2" NPT conduit entries top and bottom)
• Compact, unobtrusive package
TM
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST
-X3
10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads)
ST-X21 2252Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads)
ST-X22 3000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads)
ST-X24 10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads)
ST-X27 100,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads)
ST-X42 20,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads)
ST-X63 1000Ω nickel RTD @ 70°F (21°C) (yellow leads)
ST-X71 100Ω high accuracy RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C (yellow leads)
ST-X81 100Ω RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C (yellow leads)
ST-X85 1000Ω RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C (blue leads)
ST-X91 1000Ω RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 0.00375 Ω/Ω/°C (green leads)
CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code-required distance from sensor to maintain explosion proof rating.
WARNING: This device is not listed for use in areas classified as Group A (acetylene) or Group B (hydrogen and others). Where temperature sensing in these areas is required, an intrinsically safe system using the Model TT211 transmitter is recommended.
ST-X

485. fifl 443HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 8.5-35 VDC
Input Platinum RTD, 100Ω (0.00385
Ω/Ω/°C)
Configuration Two-wire, loop powered
Output 4-20 mA
Linearity (accuracy) ±0.1% of span
Maximum Output Impedance
775Ω @ 24 VDC, 575Ω @ 20 VDC,
325Ω @ 15 VDC
Operating Temperature -13° to 185°F (-25° to 85°C)
Operating Humidity 0% to 100% non-condensing
Thermal Effect ±0.007% of span per °F (± 0.013%
per℃)
Area Intrinsically safe Class I, Division 1,
Groups A,B,C,D
Entity Parameters Vmax: 25V; Imax: 150 mA; Ci: 0µF;
Li: 0 mH
Weight 0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Approvals FM approved
Warranty 3 years
DESCRIPTION
The Minco Model TT211 intrinsically safe RTD transmitter
takes a standard RTD input and provides an accurate 4-20
mA output over any of three factory-calibrated temperature
ranges
. When coupled with a Model MTL7706 Safety Barrier
and appropriate cabling, both the Model TT211 and the RTD are suitable for use in hazardous locations without the use of explosion proof enclosures
.
FEATURES
• Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D with intrinsic
safety barrier
• Nonincendive for use in Class I Division 2 areas
without barrier
• Accuracy ±0.1% of span
• Compact size
• Epoxy potted for moisture resistance
• Zero and span adjustable to ±5% of span
FM
APPROVED
USC
1.5
(3.81)
1.0
(2.54)
0.25
(6.4)
0.5
(1.27)
0.68
(1.71)
0.08
(0.20)
0.15 (0.38) I.D.
through
1.09
(2.71)
Mounting: Use #6 screw
through or #8 thread fo rming screw
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS
MINCO INTRINSICALLY SAFE RTD TRANSMITTER
TT211
SPECIFICATIONS
TT211

486. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 444fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
3 1
4 2
MTL7706+
Intrinsically Safe Barrier
Ground Here Only
Hazardous
Area
Safe Area
4-20 mA
250fi
4
3
2
1
RTD
Maximum Cable
C = 0.12 µF
L = 4.0 mH
TT211
Power Bus
20-35 VDC
1-5V
ORDERING INFORMATION
TT211PW 1EN Example: TT211-PW-1EN Transmitter with range of -20° to 140°F (-28.9° to 60°C)
for 1000fl platinum RTD (TCR=0.00375 fl/fl/°C)
Note: Contact Kele for additional
ranges and RTD types.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TT211 Intrinsically-safe RTD transmitter
PD For 100fl platinum RTD, TCR=0.00385 fl/fl/°C
PW For 1000fl platinum RTD, TCR=0.00375 fl/fl/°C
RANGE
1EN -20° to 140°F (-28.9° to 60°C)
1S 0° to 100°F (-17.8° to 37.8°C)
1BN 30° to 240°F (-1.1° to 115.6°C)
MINCO INTRINSICALLY SAFE RTD TRANSMITTER
TT211
WIRING
CAUTION: Intrinsically safe devices require the use of an intrinsic safety barrier when applied in hazardous locations.
Provide wiring and grounding strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. When the Model TT211
transmitter is combined with the Model MTL7706+ intrinsic safety barrier, total cable capacitance between the two
must be limited to 0.12 µF, and total cable inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent to 2200'/823m maximum
Belden
®
#8760 18/2 shielded twisted pair cable 0.18 µH/FT, 44 pF/FT).
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
250R-3-1 250Ω 3 WATT 1% Resistor Long Leads 1299
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
MTL7706+ Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters 474
ST-A81 100Ω platinum RTD all-purpose temperature probe
ST-A91 1000Ω platinum RTD all-purpose temperature probe
ST-D81 100Ω platinum RTD duct temperature sensor 1197
ST-D91 1000Ω platinum RTD duct temperature sensor 1197
ST-S81 100Ω platinum RTD space temperature sensor 1184
ST-S91 1000Ω platinum RTD space temperature sensor 1184
ST-W81 100Ω platinum immersion temperature probe 1211
ST-W91 1000Ω platinum immersion temperature probe 1211

487. fifl 445HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 10-35 VDC (reverse polarity
protector)
TT881
Accuracy ±0.01% of span
Rangeability
Zero -58° to 122°F (-50° to 50°C)

Span
45° to 1080°F (25° to 600°C)
Zero Span Adjust Noninteractive
Output 4-20 mA, two-wire standard
Input Voltage Effect 0.001% of span/volt max (negligible)
for 10-45 VDC
Linearity ±0.2% of span for any range from
-58° to 1022°F (-50° to 550°C)
Temperature Coefficient
±0.002% of span/°C
Housing Type NEMA 4X, FM approved, explosion-
proof Class I, Div 1, Groups B, C, D; Class II, Div 1, Groups E, F, G
Terminations
Terminal Screws
Mounting
Immersion Includes an integral sensor mounted
via 1/2” NPT threads with 1/4” probe
Wall/Pipe Mounting hardware available for
surface installations with accessory AC103168
Maximum Load
(Supply voltage - 10 VDC) / 0.02A,
i.e., (24-10 VDC) / 0.02 = 700Ω
SENSOR Temperature Range
-58° to 500°F (-50° to 260°C)
Sensing Element
PD 100Ω, 385 platinum, three-wire
sensor 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C
PF 1000Ω, 385 platinum, two-wire
sensor 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C
PW 1000Ω, 375 platinum, two-wire
sensor 0.00375 Ω/Ω/°C
Ice Point Resistance [Ro]
100Ω ±0.1Ω, ±0.12%
1000Ω ±1Ω, ±0.12%
Stability Better than 0.25°C per year
Insulation Resistance Sheath: 500°F (260°C), 100 mΩ @
50 VDC min
Probe Material Stainless steel body
Area Explosion proof Class I, Div 1,
Groups B
, C, D; Class II, Div 1,
Groups E, F, G; NEMA 4X with thermowell; without thermowell, explosion proof indoor only Factory Mutual, File #3012833
Pressure
2750 psig (18,961 kPa) max @
500°F
Operating Temperature -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
noncondensing
Standard Length 5.5”L (13.97 cm), 0.25” (0.64 cm)
probe, 1/2” NPT mounting
Approvals FM
Weight (5.5” length) 5.6 lb (2.54 kg)
Warranty 3 years
DESCRIPTION
The Minco Model TT881 explosion proof platinum RTD
transmitter is designed for temperature measurement in
applications calling for a rugged industrial housing
. This RTD
transmitter may be ordered for 100 ohm and 1000 ohm 385 platinum RTD or 1000 ohm 375 platinum RTD
.
FEA
TURES
•
Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D
• Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
• NEMA 4X, 7BCD, 9EFG
• Availible in 100Ω or 1000Ω RTDs
• High RFI/EMI immunity
• NIST certificate available
• 4-20 mA loop powered
• Substitute replacement for discontinued HCT-881
Hy-Cal transmitters
FM
APPROVED
USC
MINCO EXPLOSION PROOF PLATINUM RTD TRANSMITTER
TT881
SPECIFICATIONS
TT881-A with Probe

488. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 446fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
TT881 Assembly probe for two-wire RTDs
PD 100fi 0.00385 fi/fi/°C platinum curve, 6" leads
PF 1000 fi 0.00385 fi/fi/°C platinum curve, 6" leads
PW 1000 fi 0.00375 fi/fi/°C platinum curve, 6" leads
LLL Length LLL in .1" increments 055 = 5.5", 120 = 12.0"
E Duct mount, NEMA 4X box, LLL typically 8.0"
P Immersion, NEMA 4X box, LLL typically 5.5" for 6" well insertion
W W all mount, NEMA 4X box, LLL typically 2.0"
1  4-20 mA DC output
EN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-20°/140°F) or (-29°/60°C)
S Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°F) or (-18°/38°C)
N Range codes per Minco letter ranges (32°/122°F) or (0°/50°C)
H Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40°/90°F) or (4°/32°C)
C Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°C)
-- Range codes per Minco letter ranges in the catalog
SX Special range on next item line, -xxx/-yyyE, i.e., -40°/-10°F
1 No calibration data, sensor or transmitter
2 Sensor/Transmitter matched at 0°C with NIST
3 Sensor/Transmitter matched at 0°, 100°, and 260°C with NIST
fifiDEL DESCfifiPTfifiN
Example:  TT881PW055P1S2 Transmitter with 5.5" immersion probe,
1000 fi 375 curve platinum RTD, ranged for 0°/100°F, with
NIST matched @ 0°C
TT881 P055PW 1 2S
*
*Normally stocked item
*
*
*
*
*
MINCO EXPLOSION PROOF PLATINUM RTD TRANSMITTER
TT881
4.25
(10.80)
3.7
(9.4)
1.5
(3.81)
5.5
(13.97)
Zero and Span
Adjustments under
cover
Wall Mount
(AC103168 Option)
TT881
+–
Power Supply
10 to 45 VDC
4-20 mA
Signal
in
(cm)
RTD
DIMENSIONS
CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code-required distance from junction box to maintain explosion
proof rating. For Group B and C atmospheres, conduit seals must be installed within 2” (5.08 cm) of the enclosure
regardless of less stringent code requirements.
WARNING: All circuits MUST be de-energized before opening the cover of this device for any purpose, including resetting a manual reset controller or adjusting a set point. If work must be performed with an energized circuit, the atmosphere inside and outside the enclosure must be proven safe with a listed intrinsically safe combustible gas detector.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
AC103168 Separate pipe/wall mounting hardware kit
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
EYM-50 1/2" size, 1.06" turning radius, 1 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction 488
GFF-50 1/2" galvanized mounting flange
WB-6 Brass well 1293
WS-6 Stainless steel well 1293

489. fifl 447HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
DESCRIPTION
The Minco Model HT880 explosion proof / intrinsically
safe humidity transmitter is designed for rugged industrial
use
. Approved by FM for hazardous location, this system
provides safe, reliable, and accurate humidity and optional temperature measurement
. The capacitive film sensor is ideal
for low and high humidity measurement with 4-20mA outputs.
The
HT880 comes with a stainless steel sintered filter and an
optional NIST traceable certificate
. The HT885 has a digital
display.
FEATURES
• Replaces Hy-Cal HCT880 Series
• Available with digital display
• Intrinsically safe with MTL7706 barrier
FM
APPROVED
USC
HT885
MINCO EXPLOSION PROOF / INTRINSICALLY SAFE HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE
TRANSMITTER
HT880 SERIES
Supply Voltage
16.5 to 28.0 VDC
Maximum Output Impedance FI
725Ω
FX 375Ω
Entity Parameters Vamx 28V, Imax 100 mA, Ci Oµ,
Li O mH
Area FI
Class I, Div. 1, 2, Groups A, B, C, D;
Class II, Div. 1, 2, Groups E, F, G;
Class III, Div. 1, 2; Class I, Zone 0,
Aex [ia] IIC T4
FX Class I, Div. 1, 2, Groups B, C, D;
Class II, Div. 1, 2, Groups E, F, G;
Class III, Div. 1,2
Accuracy ±2.5% RH from 10 to 80% RH
Includes hysteresis, linearity, repeatability, and all temperature and voltage effects
Sensor Type
RH: Thin film capacitive element
Optional Temperature: 1000Ω platinum RTD, 385 curve
Response Time 50 seconds in slow moving air
Operating Humidity 0 to 100% RH
Operating Temperature
HT880 -40° to 176°F (-40° to 80°C)

HT885
-4° to 176°F (-20° to 80°C)
Conduit Connection 1/2" FNPT
Mounting 1/2" MNPT and bracket
sold separately
Adjustments Non-interacting zero/span
Display (HT885) 3.5 digit LCD display,
% RH and optional °F or °C
Enclosure Metal with screw-on cover
Sensor Filter 60 micron stainless steel
sintered filter
Sensor Range 0% to 100% RH
Wiring Terminals, 22-14 AWG
Approvals FM
Weight
HT880 2.8 lb (1.3 kg)
HT885 4.5 lb (2.02 kg)
Warranty 3 years
SPECIFICATIONS
HT880 with AC103168 bracket
CAUTION: Intrinsically safe devices require the use of an intrinsic safety barrier when applied in hazardous locations. Provide wiring and grounding in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. When the Model HT-880 is combined with the MTL7706 intrinsic safety barrier, total cable capacitance must be limited to 0.22 µF, and inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent to 2700’/823m maximum Belden® #8760 18/2 shielded cable 0.18 µH/FT, 44 pF/FT).
CAUTION: Conduit seals MUST be installed within code-required distance from the enclosure to maintain explosion
proof rating. For Group B and C atmospheres, conduit seals must be within 2” (5 cm) of the enclosure regardless of
less stringent code requirements. NOTE: When using the temperature option, both humidity and temperature loops
must be connected to operate.

490. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 448fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HT880 Industrial-grade, ±2.5% RH, 4-20 mA transmitter
HT885D Industrial-grade, ±2.5% RH, 4-20 mA transmitter with LCD display
CALIBRATION
N25 NIST three-point ±2.5% calibration certificate
S25 Standard ±2.5% calibration
TEMPERATURE OPTIONS (other ranges available)
NT No temperature transmitter
EN -20° to 140°F (-28° to 60°C)
S 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C)
- - Special calibration ranges available (must call)
PROBE LENGTH
60 6" inch probe length
12 12" inch probe length
AGENCY APPR OVAL
FX FM approved, explosion proof (NT option only)
*
FI FM approved, intrinsically safe

* Not for use as intrinsically safe
MINCO EXPLOSION PROOF / INTRINSICALLY SAFE HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
HT880 SERIES
4.15 ref
4.45 ref Insertion depth
Probe
1/2 NPT OR G1/2
process thread
Connection head
Model CH106
Conduit
thread
Sintered
cap
RL
DC
Supply
RL
Controller
and/or
Indicator
Control room
Line
Power
Associated
apparatus #2
Associated
apparatus #1
–
+
Temperature
Humidity
Temperature sensor
connection
Humidity sensor connection
Controller and/or Indicator
Hazardous area Safe area
3 1
4 2
Ground Here Only
MTL7706+
IS Barrier
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
20-28 VDC
Power Bus
3 1
4 2
Ground Here Only
MTL7706+
IS Barrier
4-20 mA
20-28 VDC
Power Bus
4-20 mA
FI Wiring
4-20 mA
PS
Temperature & Humidity
FX Wiring
WIRING DIMENSIONS
WARNING: All circuits MUST be de-energized before opening the cover of this device for any purpose. If work must be performed with an energized circuit, the atmosphere inside and outside the enclosure must be proven safe with a listed intrinsically safe combustible gas detector.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
AC102765 HT885 pipe/wall bracket
AC103168 Separate pipe/wall mounting hardware kit
AC103253 Duct mount kit for HT880
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
EYM-50 1/2" size, 1.06" turning radius, 1 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction 488
GFF-50 1/2" galvanized mounting flange
MTL7706+ Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters 474

491. fifl 449HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Temperature
RH
Temperature RH
Hazardous area Safe area
3 1
4 2
Ground Here Only
MTL7706+
IS Barrier
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
20-28 VDC
Power Bus
3 1
4 2
Ground Here Only
MTL7706+
IS Barrier
4-20 mA
20-28 VDC
Power Bus
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
PS
Temperature & RH
EXP Wiring
COM
Intrinsically Safe Wiring
ORDERING INFORMATION
Supply Voltage
Explosion proof 16.5 to 28 VDC
Intrinsically Safe 9.5 to 28 VDC
Entity Parameters Vmax= 28V, Imax= 100 mA, Ci= nF, Li=
7.7 µH
Area
Explosion proof Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D; Class II,
Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Div. 1,
Intrinsically Safe Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II,
Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Div. 1
Accuracy ±2% RH from 10 to 90% RH
Sensor Type
RH: Capacitive
Temperature: Solid state
Response Time 15 seconds
Conduit Connection 1/2" FNPT
Mounting Duct probe: 1/2" MNPT
Display LCD Display
Enclosure Aluminum
RH Sensor Range 0% to 100% RH
Temperature Sensor
Range -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Wiring Terminals
Approvals FM, CE
Weight 2.5 lb (1.1 Kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Dwyer HHT Series explosion proof / intrinsically safe
humidity transmitter is designed for rugged industrial use.
Appro
ved by FM for hazardous location, this system provides
safe, reliable, and accurate humidity and/or temperature measurement with 4-20 mA outputs. Two models have a
digital display.
FEATURES
• Available with digital display
• Intrinsically safe with MTL7706+ barrier
WIRING
FM
APPROVED
USC
EXPLOSION PROOF / INTRINSICALLY SAFE HUMIDITY & TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
HHT SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HHT
-IU
10 inch Intrinsically safe Humidity transmitter
HHT
-IT
10 inch Intrinsically safe Humidity and Temperature transmitter
HHT-IT-LCD 10 inch Intrinsically safe Humidity and Temperature transmitter with display
HHT-EU 10 inch Explosion proof Humidity transmitter
HHT
-EU-LCD
10 inch Explosion proof Humidity transmitter with display
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
GFF-50 1/2" galvanized mounting flange
MTL7706+ Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters 474
EYM-50 1/2" size, 1.06" turning radius, 1 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction 488
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994
A-287 Separate pipe/wall mounting hardware kit for TTE Series
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
HHT
CAUTION: Intrinsically safe devices require the use of an
intrinsic safety barrier when applied in hazardous
locations. Provide wiring and grounding in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions. When the Model HT-880
is combined with the MTL7706 intrinsic safety barrier, total
cable capacitance must be limited to 0.22 µF, and inductance
must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent to 2700’/823m
maximum Belden® #8760 18/2 shielded cable 0.18 µH/FT, 44
pF/FT).
CAUTION:CONDUIT seals MUST be installed within code-
required distance from the enclosure to maintain explosion
proof rating. For Group B and C atmospheres, conduit seals
must be within 2” (5 cm) of the enclosure regardless of
less stringent code requirements. NOTE: When using the
temperature option, both humidity and temperature loops
must be connected to operate.

492. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 450fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
DESCRIPTION
The HZLIM Series explosion proof high and low limit
controls are field-assembled combinations of industry
standard controls, heavy duty explosion proof enclosures,
and seals for use in atmospheres that may contain hazardous
gases or dusts (Groups B, C, D, E, F)
.
The HZLIM-LO-A includes the ultra reliable A11A-1 manual
reset low limit control, a XJA7514C2M2M explosion proof enclosure, two EYM-75 conduit seals, and an ACK6F fiber/ cement kit
.
The HZLIM-LO-B is identical to the HZLIM-LO-A but includes
the equally reliable A11B-1 automatic reset low limit control instead of the A11A-1
.
The HZLIM-HI is also identical to the HZLIM-LO-A but
includes the time proven A70KA-1 manual reset high limit control in place of the A11A-1
.
EXPLOSION PROOF HIGH AND LOW LIMIT CONTROLS
HZLIM SERIES
FEATURES
• Class I Division 1 Groups B, C, D
• Class II Division 1 Groups E, F,G
• NEMA 7BCD, 9EFG
• Long life, snap acting contacts
• Easy set point adjust
• Freeze protection for hazardous locations
• Code required AHU high limit protection for hazardous
locations
Refer to the A70 and A11 Series in the
Thermostats and Controllers section for
specifications, capillary, installation and wiring
information.
3.13
(7.95)
3.13
(7.95)
10
(25.40)
3/4" Rigid Conduit
EYM75 Seal
Wiring
EYM75 Seal
Sealing Cement
Sealing Cement
Fiber Dam
Fiber Dam
Capillary
Wiring
Controller
Capillary
Enclosure
10.25
(26.04)
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS
CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code-required distance from junction box to maintain explosion proof rating. For Group B and C atmospheres, conduit seals must be installed within 2” (5.08 cm) of the enclosure regardless of less stringent code requirements.
WARNING: All circuits MUST be de-energized before opening the cover of this device for any purpose, including resetting a manual reset controller or adjusting a set point. If work must be performed with an energized circuit, the atmosphere inside and outside the enclosure must be proven safe with a listed intrinsically safe combustible gas detector.
SPECIFICATIONS
HZLIM Series

493. fifl 451HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
OPERATION
Install the XJATS14C2M2N1 enclosure, included with each kit, in its intended location. Install the two EYM75 conduit
seals in the two tapped holes of the XJATS14C2M2N1 enclosure, making sure to engage a minimum of five full
threads. Also be sure that the plugs on the conduit seals are both facing up and to the front (cement will be poured
into them later). The male nipple, supplied with fittings, can be easily removed and replaced in the opposite side for
proper orientation.
Unpack the A11 or A70 controller, and fully uncoil the capillary tubing. Place plastic bushings in both openings inside
the enclosure and also in the bottom of the lower conduit seal. Gently feed the end of the capillary (or capillary and
bulb) through the bottom opening and conduit seal from inside the XJATS14C2M2N1 enclosure, taking care not to nick or kink the capillary
. Once the end is out, slowly feed the rest of the capillary fully through to the outside of the
conduit seal. Use an assistant, if needed, to make sure that the inner and outer plastic bushings stay in place to
protect the capillary from damage. Once this is accomplished, mount the A11 or A70 controller to the panel inside
the enclosure. Install the capillary (or capillary and bulb) on the equipment according to the included instructions.
Install r
igid conduit and wiring as required by code from the upper conduit seal, engaging a minimum of five full
threads at each joint
. Only individual insulated conductors may pass through the conduit seal. If jacketed cable
is used, the jacket must be stripped back beyond the seal or else a listed cable seal must be applied within the enclosure
. Remove the plugs from the two conduit seals. Make sure that the wires and capillary are centered in
the seals. Then install fiber dams and sealing compound in each according to the included instructions (minimum
0.75"/2 cm cement depth), and replace the plugs. Adjust the setpoint on the controller, install the cover for the
XJATS14C2M2N1 enclosure, and tighten securely.
ORDERING INFORMATION
INSTALLATION / MOUNTING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HZLIM-HI Kit with one A70KA-1 manual reset high limit control, one XJATS14C2M2N1 enclosure, two
EYM75 conduit seals, three plastic conduit bushings, and one ACK6F sealing kit
Weight: 26.9 lb (12.2 kg)
HZLIM-LO-A Kit with one A11A-1 manual reset low limit control, one XJATS14C2M2N1 enclosure, two
EYM75 conduit seals, three plastic conduit bushings, and one ACK6F sealing kit
Weight: 25.7 lb (11.7 kg)
HZLIM-LO-B Kit with one A11B-1 automatic reset low limit control, one XJATS14C2M2N1 enclosure, two
EYM75 conduit seals, three plastic conduit bushings, and one ACK6F sealing kit
Weight: 25.7 lb (11.7 kg)
EXPLOSION PROOF HIGH AND LOW LIMIT CONTROLS
HZLIM SERIES
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
ACK6F Cement: 1.9 lb * (0.85kg) Fiber: 0.3 lb (0.19 kg), 25 cu in (410 cu cm) volume when set
* Consists of five 0.4 lb (0.19 kkg) cement pouches 489
EYM-75 3/4" size, 1.19" turning radius, 2 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction 488

494. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 452fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Model Voltage Range Differential Contact Arrangement Weight Dimensions Setpoint Range
EPETD8S
24-244 VAC,
22A heating and cooling
Heating 2°F (1.1 °C),
Cooling 4°F (2.2°C)
SPDT 5.3 lb (2.4 kg)
5.6" x 6.4" x 4.5"
(14.3 x 16.2 x 11.4 cm)
50° to 90°F
(10° to 32°C)
T6051B1006
24-120 VAC 10A heating,
7A cooling; 240 VAC 6A
heating, 4A cooling
Heating 1°F (0.6°C),
Cooling 1°F (0.6°C)
SPDT 5.3 lb (2.4 kg)
5.6" x 6.4" x 4.75"
(14.3 x 16.2 x 12.1 cm)
46° to 84°F
(8° to 29°C)
SPECIFICATIONS
FEATURES
• Class I Division 1 Groups C, D; Class II Division 1
Groups E, F, G
• NEMA 7CD, 9EFG
• Line or low voltage control of heating or cooling
systems
• EPETD8S UL file #E114308
• T6051B1006 UL file #E12842
HLT-1 (SPDT) & HLT-2 (DPDT)
N.O.
N.C.
C
C - N.C. Open on temp rise
C - N.O. Close on temp rise
WIRING
Surface-mount explosion proof box using the mounting
ears for surface applications. Each includes two 3/4" tapped
conduit entries (top and bottom).
EXPLOSION PROOF THERMOSTATS
EPETD8S, T6051B1006
INSTALLATION/MOUNTING
EPETD8S T6051B1006
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
EPETD8S Line- or low-voltage heating/cooling thermostat
T6051B1006 Line- or low-voltage heating/cooling thermostat
CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code-required distance from thermostat to maintain explosion proof rating.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
ACK6F Cement: 1.9 lb * (0.9 kg) Fiber: 0.3 LB (0.14 kg), 25 cu in (410 cu cm) volume when set
* Consists of five 0.4 lb (0.19 kg) cement pouches 489
EYM-75 3/4" size, 1.19" turning radius, 2 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction 488
DESCRIPTION
The EPETD8S and T6051B1006 Series explosion proof
thermostats are two-position room thermostats designed for
on/off control with set points from 50° to 90°F (10° to 32°C)
(EPETD8S) and 46° to 84°F (8° to 29°C) (T6051B1006)
. These
snap-acting switch type devices are suitable for line- or low- voltage applications and have SPDT contacts for heating or cooling control
.

495. fifl 453HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
A19AUC
N.C.
C
N.O.
3
1
2
C - N.C. Open on temp ri se
C - N.O. Close on temp rise
Switch SPDT
Non Inductive Amps 22.0 A @ 277 VAC maximum
Full Load Amps 16.0 A @ 120VAC; 9.2 A @
208 VAC; 8.0 A @ 240 VAC
Locked Rotor Amps 96.0 A @ 120 VAC, 55.2A @
208 VAC, 48.0A @ 240 VAC
Pilot Duty 125 VA @ 24-600 VAC
Range 20° to 80℉ (-7° to 27)
Differential 3.5℉ (1.9)
Bulb 0.38" x 4.97" (0.95 x 12.6 cm)
Capillary 6' (1.83 m)
Dimensions 6.25" H x 3" W x 4.25" D
(15.9 x 7.6 x 10.8 cm)
Weight 2.6 lb (1.2 kg)
Approvals UL listed File #E37739, CSA
Area Explosion proof Class1, Division
1, Group D;
Class II, Division 2,
Groups E, F, G
Warranty
1 year
EXPLOSION PROOF BULB THERMOSTAT
A19AUC-2
DESCRIPTION
The Johnson Controls Model A19AUC-2 explosion
proof bulb thermostat is an ideal solution for air or fluid
temperature control in potentially hazardous areas
. Its 6'
capillar
y and bulb make mounting convenient, and its external
setpoint adjustment knob provides easy operation without having to verify that the atmosphere is safe. An optional
ther
mowell makes immersion applications a snap
.
Each explosion proof box has mounting ears for surface applications and includes 3/4" FNPT tapped conduit entry on the top side
.
INSTALLATION / MOUNTING
SPECIFICATIONS
A19AUC-2
ORDERING INFORMATION
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A19AUC-2 Remote bulb thermostat
CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code-required distance from thermostat to maintain explosion proof rating.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
TE-6001-1 Duct temperature element holder with box 1391
WEL14A-603R 5-13/16 Copper bulb well
FEATURES
• Class I, Division 1, Group D (NEMA 7)
• Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G (NEMA 9)
• Line or low voltage control of heating or cooling
systems
• 6' (1.83m) capillary for flexible bulb placement
• Immersion well available
• 20° to 80°F range (celcuis)
• Duct bulb holders available

496. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 454fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Model Contact Rating Differential Contact
Arrangement
Weight Dimensions Setpoint Range
HLT-1
24-277 VAC,
22A heating or cooling
Heating: 3°F (1.7°C);
Cooling 3°F (1.7°C)
SPDT 5.3 lb (2.4 kg)
5.8"H x 6.4"W x 5.6"D
(14.7 x 16.3 x 14.2 cm)
40° to 110°F (4° to 43°C)
HLT-2
24-277 VAC,
22A heating and cooling
Heating: 3°F (1.7°C);
Cooling 3°F (1.7°C)
DPDT 5.3 lb (2.4 kg)
5.8"H x 6.4"W x 5.6"D
(14.7 x 16.3 x 14.2 cm)
40° to 110°F (4° to 43°C)
CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within
coderequired distance from thermostat to maintain
explosion proof rating.
DESCRIPTION
The HLT Series explosion proof thermostats are two-
position room thermostats designed for on/off control with
setpoints from 40° to 110°F (4° to 43°C)
. The HLT Series has
a bulb and capillary room temperature sensor and adjustment slot for changing the setpoint
. The thermostats are suitable
for line- or low-voltage applications and have either SPDT or DPDT contacts for heating or cooling control
.
FEATURES
• Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; Class II, Division 1,
Groups E, F, G
• NEMA 7CD, 9EFG
• Line or low voltage control of heating or cooling
systems
• UL File #E114308
HLT-1 (SPDT) & HLT-2 (DPDT)
N.O.
N.C.
C
C - N.C. Open on temp rise C - N.O. Close on temp rise
WIRING
APPLICATION
On/Off control in hazardous classified areas.
Surface-mount explosion proof box using the mounting
ears for surface applications. Each includes two 3/4" tapped
conduit entries (top and bottom).
EXPLOSION PROOF THERMOSTAT
HLT SERIES
INSTALLATION/MOUNTING
SPECIFICATIONS
HLT
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HL
T-1
Line- or low-voltage heating/cooling thermostat, SPDT
HL
T-2
Line- or low-voltage heating/cooling thermostat, DPDT
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
ACK6F Cement: 30 oz * (850g) Fiber: 5 oz (142g), 25 cu in (410 cu cm) volume when set
* Consists of five 6 oz (187g) cement pouches 489
EYM-75 3/4" size, 1.19" turning radius, 2 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction 488

497. fifl 455HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
3 1
4 2
MTL7706+
Intrinsically Safe Barrier
Ground Here Only
Hazardous
Area
Safe Area
+
-
IL10
1-5V
–
10-30 VDC
+
250fi
Power
Bus
Green
Brown
Blue
Shield
ORDERING INFORMATION
Supply Voltage 10-30 VDC
Accuracy 0.25% of span
Signal Output 4-20 mA
Maximum Output
Impedance mA 695Ω @ 24 VDC
Overpressure Proof 30 psi, Burst 35 psi
Operating Temperature -22° to 140°F (-30° to 60°C)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X (IP65)
Dimensions 1.1" diameter x 5.8" long
(2.7 x 14.7 cm)
Materials of Construction
Stainless steel case
Entity Parameters Vmax = 30V, Imax = 100 mA, Ci = 22
nF, Li = 0.1 mH
Area Intrinsically safe Class I, II, III,
Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G
Approvals CSA, FM, CE
Weight 2.6 lb (1.2 Kg) maximum
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Wika IL10 Series Intrinsically Safe Level Transmitter
is exceptionally stable and is virtually unaffected by shock,
vibration and orientation
. These Instrinsically (IS) Safe
transmitters are ideal for monitoring water level in an explosive atmosphere with a safety barrier
. The IL10 Series
can be lowered into a tank of water and the 4-20 mA signal will directly correspond to the level
.
FEATURES
• Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G
• 0.25% accuracy, all ranges
• 4-20 mA, loop powered
• Ranges from 4.2 feet (1.3 m) to 34.9 feet (10.6 m)
FM
APPROVED
USC
INTRINSICALLY SAFE LEVEL TRANSMITTER
IL10 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
IL10ANGGGDZG12Z Intrinsically-safe level transmitter 4.2 foot range with 10 foot lead
IL10ANGUGDZG12Z Intrinsically-safe level transmitter 8.3 foot range with 20 foot lead
IL10ANCNGDZG12Z Intrinsically-safe level transmitter 11.6 foot range with 20 foot lead
IL10ANCPGDZG12Z Intrinsically-safe level transmitter 23.1 foot range with 30 foot lead
IL10ANBCGDZG12Z Intrinsically-safe level transmitter 34.9 foot range with 40 foot lead
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
MTL7706+ Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters 474
250R-3-1 250 OHM 3 WATT 1% resistor long leads 1299
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
WIRING
CAUTION: Intrinsically safe devices require the use of
an intrinsic safety barrier when applied in hazardous
locations. Provide wiring and grounding strictly
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
When a IL10 Series transmitter is combined with the
Model MTL7706 intrinsic safety barrier, total cable
capacitance between the two must be limited to 0.12
µF. Total cable inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH
(equivalent to 2700'/823m maximum Belden™ #8760
18/2 shielded twisted pair cable 0.18 µH/FT, 44 pF/FT).
IL10

498. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 456fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 10-36 VDC
Accuracy ±0.5% full scale
Thermal Effect ±0.03 full scale/°F zero and span
Output 4-20 mA
Maximum Output
Impedance 650Ω @ 24 VDC
Overpressure Proof: 150%; Burst: 300%
Temperature Compensation
-20° to 160°F (-29° to 71°C)
Operating Temperature -20° to 180°F (-29° to 82°C)
Response Time 5 ms
Materials Of Construction
304 stainless steel case
Process Connection 1'8" BNPT male 316 stainless steel
Diaphragm Material 17-4 PH stainless steel
Zero Span Adjust Field adjustable ±10%
Dimensions 4" L x 5/8" dia (10.2 x 1.6 cm)
Weight 0.65 lb (0.29 kg)
Area Intrinsically safe Class I, Division 1,
Groups C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups G; Class III
Approvals
UL File #E152893, FM
Entity Parameters Vmax=30V, Imax- 250 mA, Li = 0, Ci
= 0.1 µF
Warranty 1 year
INTRINSICALLY SAFE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
K1 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Ashcroft K1 Series intrinsically safe pressure
transmitter is exceptionally stable and is virtually unaffected
by shock, vibration, or orientation
. Performance is directly
traceable to NIST standards, and a calibration certificate is available for each unit upon request
. These intrinsically
safe (IS) transmitters are ideal for monitoring pressures in explosive atmospheres with barrier
.
FEATURES
• Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D;
Class II, Division 1, Group G; Class III •
Nonincendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C,
and D
• 0.5% accuracy, all ranges
• 4-20 mA, loop powered
• Ranges from 100-3000 psig (690-20,685 kPa)
3 1
4 2
MTL7706
Intrinsically Safe Barrier
Ground Here Only
Hazardous Area
Safe Area
R+
B-
K1
1-5V
–
20-35 VDC
+
250fi
Power
Bus
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
K15M0142F2100X 4-20 mA intrinsically safe pressure transmitter 0-100 psig (690 kPa)
K15M0142F2200X 4-20 mA intrinsically safe pressure transmitter 0-200 psig (1379 kPa)
K15M0142F2500X 4-20 mA intrinsically safe pressure transmitter 0-500 psig (3448 kPa)
K15M0142F21KX 4-20 mA intrinsically safe pressure transmitter 0-1000 psig (6895 kPa)
K15M0142F23KX 4-20 mA intrinsically safe pressure transmitter 0-3000 psig (20,685 kPa)
CAUTION: Intrinsically safe devices require the use of an
intrinsic safety barrier when applied in hazardous locations.
Provide wiring and grounding strictly in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. When a K1 Series transmitter
is combined with the Model MTL7706 intrinsic safety barrier,
total cable capacitance between the two must be limited to
0.12 µF. Total cable inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH
(equivalent to 2700'/823m maximum Belden™ #8760 18/2
shielded twisted pair cable 0.18 µH/FT, 44 pF/FT).
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
250R-3-1 250 OHM 3 WATT 1% Resistor Long Leads 1299
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
MTL7706+ Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters 474
PT 1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings
FM
APPROVED
USC

499. fifl 457HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
The transducer should be used with clean, dry air or other dry, noncorrosive gases. The unit should be mounted with #8 or #10
screws using the three mounting feet provided. The transducer can be mounted in any orientation with virtually no effect on
calibration. Any minor zero pressure offsets that are encountered can be adjusted using the zero-adjust potentiometer. The high-
and low-pressure connection ports are plugged to avoid debris entering the unit. The plugs should be left in place until the tubing
and fittings are connected. The two 1/4" NPT pressure connections should be sealed to the transducer housing using Teflon
®
tape
. Do not use dope-type sealant.
Supply Voltage 12-36 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA @ 545Ω
Entity Parameters Vmax = 36V, Imax = 250 mA, Ci = 12
nF, Li =0
Maximum Supply
Voltage 36V
Maximum Supply Current
250 mA
Area Intrinsically Safe Class I, II, III;Div
1 and 2, Groups A through G Non- incendive Class I, Div 2,
Groups A through D; Class II, Div 2,
Groups F, G, Class III
Accuracy 0.25 % or 0.5%
Response Time 250 ms
Operating Temperature -20° to 185°F (-29° to 85°C)
Conduit Connection Two 1/2" female
Process Connection Two 1/4" NPT female
Enclosure NEMA 4X
Maximum Static Pressure
100 psig
Media Clean, dry, noncorrosive gas
Proof Pressure 15 psid
Burst Differential Pressure
50 psid
Aprovals FM
Weight 2 lb (0.9 kg)
Warranty 1 year
ASHCROFT INTRINSICALLY SAFE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
IXLDP
DESCRIPTION
The Ashcroft Model IXLdp (XFM option) is an intrinsically
safe, industrial-quality, differential pressure transmitter
for use on air and other noncorrosive gases
. The Model
IXLdp is available with accuracies of 0.25% and 0.50% in
pressure ranges of 0.1 "W.C. to 200 "W.C. uni-directional or
bi-directional.
FEATURES
• 100 psig static line pressure
• 0.25% or 0.5% accuracy down to 0.05 "W.C.
• Uni-directional or bidirectional ranges
• 300 Series cast stainless steel body
• NEMA 4X
• NIST certificate included
FM
APPROVED
USC
Span Po t
Zero Po t
Location
4.3
(10.9)
1.4 (3.6)
2.7
(6.9)
0.2 Type
Two Places
in
(cm)
Access Cover
(terminal block)Mounting Foot
Mounting Foot
Mounting
Foot
Ø0.2 (0.5)
0.7 (1.8)
1/2 NPSM Thread Type
(both sides fo r conduit piping)
4.6
(11.7)
2.7
(6.9)
5.0 (12.7)
Access Cover
(zero and span pots)
1/4 NPT
Pressure
Fittings
High Low
2.5
(6.4)
3.0
(7.6)
3.0
(7.6)
1.4
(3.6)
0.8
(2.0)
0.7 (1.8)
DIMENSIONS
INSTALLATION
SPECIFICATIONS
IXLdp

500. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 458fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
CAUTION: Intrinsically safe devices require the use of an intrinsic safety barrier when applied in hazardous locations.
Provide wiring and grounding strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. When the Model IXLdp
transmitter is combined with the Model MTL7706+ intrinsic safety barrier, total cable capacitance between the two
must be limited to 0.12 µF, and total cable inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent to 2700'/823m maximum
Belden® #8760 18/2 shielded twisted pair cable 0.18 µH/FT, 44 pF/FT).
3 1
4 2
Ground Here Only
Hazardous AreaSafe Area
MTL7706+
Intrinsically Safe Barrier
4-20 mA
1-5V
Earth
Ground
20-35
VDC
250fi
Power Bus
WIRING
ASHCROFT INTRINSICALLY SAFE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
IXLDP
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
IX Differential pressure transmitter
ACCURACY
3 0.25% accuracy
5 0.5% accuracy
PRESSURE CONNECTION
F 1/4" NPT fe male pressure connection
OUTPUT SIGNAL
4 4-20 mA output signal
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
S Screw terminals
PRESSURE RANGE
Differential or Gauge Compound
P1IW 0.10" W.C. (24.9 Pa ) P05IWL ±0.05" W.C. (12.4 Pa )
P25IW 0.25" W.C. (62.24 Pa ) P1IWL ±0.10" W.C. (24.9 Pa )
P5IW 0.50" W.C. (124.6 Pa ) P2IWL ±0.20" W.C. (49.8 Pa )
1IW 1.00" W.C. (249.1 Pa ) P25IWL ±0.25" W.C. (62.24 Pa )
2IW 2.00" W.C. (498.2 Pa ) P5IWL ±0.50" W.C. (124.6 Pa )
2P5IW 2.50" W.C. (622.4 Pa ) 1IWL ±1.00" W.C. (249.1 Pa )
3IW 3.00" W.C. (747.3 Pa ) 2IWL ±2.00" W.C. (498.2 Pa )
5IW 5.00" W.C. (1245.5 Pa ) 2P5IWL ±2.50" W.C. (622.4 Pa )
10IW 10.00" W.C. (2491.0 Pa ) 3IWL ±3.00" W.C. (747.3 Pa )
15IW 15.00" W.C. (3734.5 Pa ) 5IWL ±5.00" W.C. (1245.5 Pa )
20IW 20.00" W.C. (4979.3 Pa ) 10IWL ±10.00" W.C. (2491.0 Pa )
25IW 25.00" W.C. (6224.1 Pa ) 15IWL ±15.00" W.C. (3734.5 Pa )
50IW 50.00" W.C. (12.4 kPa) 20IWL ±20.00" W.C. (4979.3 Pa )
100IW 100.00" W.C. (24.9 kPa) 25IWL ±25.00" W.C. (6224.1 Pa )
150IW 150.00" W.C. (37.3 kPa) 50IWL ±50.00" W.C. (12.4 kPa)
200IW 200.00" W.C. (49.8 kPa) 100IWL ±
100.00" W.C. (24.9 kPa)
OPTIONS
XFM Factory mutual approval (required for intrinsically safe)

IX 3FO242ST10IWXFMExample: IX3FO242ST10IWXFMX41 Intrinsically safe differential
pressure transducer with 0.25% accuracy, 4-20 mA output,
and 10" W.C. range.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
250R-3-1 250 OHM 3 WATT 1% Resistor Long Leads 1299
A-602 Mounting kit for air filter applications. Includes two pressure tips,
two 5-foot lengths of aluminum tubing and two adapters.
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
MTL7706+ Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters 474

501. fifl 459HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
FM
APPROVED
USC
Supply Voltage 24 VDC ± 10%, 208 mA; 120/240
VAC @ 5 VA
Switch SPDT, 10A @ 240 VAC/28 VDC
Operating Temperature 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
Connections 1/8" NPT
Diaphragm Buna-N
Area Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C,
D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E,
D, G; Class III
Burst Pressure 10 psig (69 kPa)
Approvals UL File #E62583, FM, CSA, CE, A
TEX
Weight 3 lb (1.4 kg)
Warranty 1 year
4.87
(12.37)
0.26" dia (0.66)
Mounting Holes (2)
1/2" NPT Electrical Conduit Connection
1/8" NPT High Pressure Po rt
1/8" NPT Low Pressure Po rt
1.68
(4.27)
5.43
(13.79)
1.43
(3.63)
0.38
(0.95)
3.5
(8.89)
Range Adjustment
Screw
Vent Drain
Plug
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The Dwyer 1950G Series explosion proof air differential
pressure switch monitors differential air pressure in a
hazardous environment
. The 1950G Series has an external
screw type setpoint adjustment and a NEMA 7 and 9 rated enclosure
. The enclosure is anodized cast aluminum with
explosion proof rating for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D and Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
. The optional Model
A-602 pressure probe kit allows the 1950G Series to monitor filter pressure drop
.
FEATURES
• Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D
• Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III
• Ranges from 0.07" to 20" W.C. (17.4 to 4981 Pa)
• Adjustable setpoint within range
• SPDT 10A contacts
C.
N.O.
N.C.
+
–
Closes on high differential pressure
Opens on high differential pressure
VAC
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF AIR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
1950G SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code-required distance from DP switch to maintain explosion proof rating.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
"W.C." Pa
APPRO XIMATE DEADBAND "W.C."(Pa )
1950G Explosion proof air differential pressure switch
0.07-0.15
0.15-0.5
0.4-1.6
1.4-5.5
3.0-11.0
4.0-20
17.4-37.3
37.3-124.5
99.6-398.5
348.7-1370
747.2-2740
996-4981
0.04 (10)
0.06 (14.9)
0.11 (27.4)
0.4 (99.6)
0.9 (224)
1.2 (299)
0.06 (14.9)
0.11 (27.4)
0.29 (72.2)
0.9 (224)
1.8 (448)
3.0 (747)
OPERATING RANGE
At Min Setpoint At Max Setpoint
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
00 0 1 5 10 20
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
B-24 B-120 B-24024 VDC 120 VAC
240 VAC
Example: 1950G-1-B-120 - NA 0.4-1.6" W.C." ,
explosion proof air differential pressure switch
with 120 VAC supply voltage - non atex
1950G 1 B-120
NON-ATEX
NA For Non CE approval models
NA
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
A-602 Mounting kit for air filter applications. Includes two pressure tips,
two 5-foot lengths of aluminum tubing and two adapters.
ACK6F Cement: 1.9 lb * (0.9 kg) Fiber: 0.3 LB (0.14 kg), 25 cu in (410 cu cm) volume when set
* Consists of five 0.4 lb (0.19 kg) cement pouches 489
EYM-50 1/2" size, 1.06" turning radius, 1 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction 488

502. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 460fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
FM
APPROVED
USC
FLOWLINE EXPLOSION PROOF LEVEL TRANSMITTER
ECHOSAFE
DESCRIPTION
The Flowline Model EchoSafe is an explosion proof,
industrial-grade ultrasonic liquid-level transmitter with
automatic temperature compensation
. Liquid conductivity,
clarity, foam, or suspended solids do not affect the highly accurate 4-20 mA output since no contact is made with the material being measured
.
FEATURES
• Class I Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Groups
E, F, G; Class III Division 1, Groups E, F, G
• Compact XP enclosure with viewing window and dual
conduit ports
• Narrow (3") beam for use in tight locations
• Integral display
• Simple pushbutton calibration
• Suitable for a wide variety of liquids
• Not affected by foam, dirty liquids, etc.
• 8' to 24.6' range (20 cm to 7.5m)
• Fail-Safe intelligence with diagnostic feedback
• Display in inches or centimeters
(red)
(black)
24 VDC
Power
Supply
+4-20 mA Signal
The EchoSafe requires 14-28 VDC power and a load that receives a 4-20 mA current input. Connect the red wire of the transmitter to
the positive VDC terminal on the power supply. Connect the black wire on the transmitter to the (+) terminal on the load. Connect the
(–) of the load to the (–) of the power supply.
EchoSafe
™
UP DOWNSELECT
ASTF
WIRING
Supply Voltage 18-28 VDC (loop-powered)
Accuracy 0.2% of maximum range
Resolution 0.079" (2 mm)
Range
XP88-0 8" to 24.6' (20 cm to 7.5 m)
XP89-0 8" to 32.8' (20 cm to 10 m)
Signal Output 4-20 mA or 20-4 mA, two-wire
Maximum Output Impedance
250Ω @ 24 VDC
Display Type LCD, 6-digits
Display Units Inch, cm, ft, m, percent
Fail Safe 4 mA, 20 mA, 21 mA, 22 mA,
or hold last
Operating Temperature -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Temperature Compensation
Automatic over entire range
Pressure Rating 30 psig (207 kPa)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X
Mounting 2" NPT threads
Conduit Connection two 1/2" NPT
Materials Of Construction
Transducer: PVDF, Enclosure:
Aluminum, Window: Glass
Area Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C,
D; Class II, Groups E,F,G: Class III
Approvals FM, RoHS, CE
Weight 6 lb (2.7 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
EchoSafe

503. fifl 461HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
4.00"
(10.2)
Top View
4.44" (11.3)
2" NPT
1/2" NPT
Side View
6.06"
(15.4)
3.89"
(9.9)
6.06"
(15.4)
EchoSafe
™
Front View
UP DOWNSELECT
ASTF
DIMENSIONS
FLOWLINE EXPLOSION PROOF LEVEL TRANSMITTER
ECHOSAFE
MODEL DESCRIPTION
XP88-00 Explosion proof level transmitter, 8" to 24.6'
XP89-00 Explosion proof level transmitter, 8" to 32.8'
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
ACK6F Cement: 30 oz * (850g) Fiber: 5 oz (142g), 25 cu in (410 cu cm) volume when set
* Consists of five 6 oz (187g) cement pouches 489
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
EYM-50 1/2" size, 1.06" turning radius, 1 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction 488
ACCESSORIES
LM50-1001 2" Mounting bracket (included with "B" option)

504. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 462fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Line Pipe Size
(inch)
GPM(LPM) 1 1/4"1 1/2" 2" 2 1/2" 3" 4" 5" 6" 8"
Minimum Flow 4.8 (18.2)6.3 (23.8)9.9 (37.5)15.3 (57.9)24.4 (92.4)33.3 (126)44.4 (168.1)56.3 (213.1)104 (393.6)
Minimum No Flow3 (11.4)3.6 (13.6)5.9 (22.3)9.5 (36)15.4 (58.3)21.1 (79.9)31 (117.3)48.7 (184.3)89 (336.9)
Maximum Flow 7.7 (29.1)10 (37.9)15.8 (59.8)23.7 (89.7)35.5 (134.4)61.4 (232.4)84 (317.9)114.8 (434.5)210 (794.9)
Maximum No Flow5.9 (22.3)7 (26.5)11 (41.6)17 (64.3)29.2 (110.5)37.7 (142.7)51 (193)71 (270.6)131 (495.8)
ADJUSTMENTS: TYPICAL FLOW RATES
7.4
44.4
Pilot duty – 125 VA @ 120/240VAC 50/60 Hz
AC full load amps
AC locked rotor amps
120VMOTOR RATINGS
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
3.7
22.2
240V
EXPLOSION PROOF WATER FLOW SWITCH
FS7-4E
Contact Type SPDT
Media Temperature 32° to 300°F (0° to 149°C)
Connection 1/2" female conduit
Maximum Pressure 300 psi (2068 kPa)
Enclosure NEMA 7 & 9
Area Explosion proof Class I, Division
1, Group C
, D; Class II, Division 1,
Groups E, F, G
Installation
Vertical
Dimensions 9.7" H x 7.3" W x 4.6" D
(24.7 x 18.4 x 11.7 cm)
Approvals UL File E33552, CSA
Weight 12.3 lb (5.6 Kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION
The McDonnell & Miller Model FS7-4E explosion proof
water flow switches are used to prove flow on liquid lines in
hazardous areas
. The FS7-4E has an external adjustment of
setpoint so one does not have to remove the explosion proof housing
. A trimmable paddle allows for handling 1 1/4" to 16"
pipe sizes.
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
FS7-4E Explosion proof water flow switch
NOC
FLOW
NC
NO FLOW
NOCNC
FS7-4E

505. fifl 463HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
2.8
(7.11)
1.3
(3.30)
6.3 (16.00)
4.9 (12.45)
3.6 (9.14)
2" NPT
in
(cm)
Supply Voltage 20-35 VDC
Accuracy 0.25% of span
Resolution 0.125" (0.3 cm)
Range 5" to 18' (15 cm to 5.5 m)
Signal Output 4-20 mA
Maximum Output
Impedance 600Ω @ 24 VDC
Pulse Rate Two per second
Operating Temperature -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Temperature Compensation
Automatic over entire range
Pressure Rating 30 psig (207 kPa) @ 77°F (25°C)
derated 0.93 psig per °F
(11.6 kPa per°C ) above 77°F
(25°C)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X (IP65)
Mounting 2" NPT threads
Conduit Connection 1/2" NPT
Area Intrinsically safe Class I, Division 1,
Groups A, B, C, D; Class II,
Division 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III,
Division 1
Approvals CSA approved, CE
Entity Parameters Vmax = 32V, Imax = 130 mA, Ci = 0
µF, Li = 0 mH
Weight ELP: 3.0 lb (1.4 kg),
ELP-B 3.6 lb (1.6 kg)
Warranty 1 year
FLOWLINE INTRINSICALLY SAFE ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER
ELP
DESCRIPTION
The Flowline Model ELP Echo Touch is an industrial-
grade ultrasonic liquid-level transmitter with automatic
temperature compensation
. Liquid conductivity, clarity, foam,
or suspended solids do not affect the highly accurate 4-20 mA output since no contact is made with the material being measured
. When coupled with Model MTL7706 intrinsic
safety barrier, the intrinsically safe design and NEMA 4X(IP65) housing allow use in nearly all atmospheres containing hazardous gases, dusts, or fibers
.
FEATURES
• Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Division
1, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Division 1
• Continuous level measurement with 4-20 mA output
• Narrow (eight-degree) beam for use in tight locations
• Simple pushbutton calibration
• Automatic temperature compensation
• NEMA 4X (IP65) housing
• Suitable for a wide variety of liquids
• Not affected by foam, dirty liquids, etc.
• 0.5" to 18' range (0.15 to 5.5m)
SPECIFICATIONS
ELP
DIMENSIONS
CAUTION: Intrinsically safe devices require the use of an intrinsic safety barrier when applied in hazardous locations. Provide wiring and grounding strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. When the Model ELP transmitter is combined with the Model MTL7706+ intrinsic safety barrier, total cable capacitance between the two must be limited to 0.12 µF, and total cable inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent to 2700'/823m maximum Belden™ #8760 18/2 shielded twisted pair cable 0.18 µH/FT, 44 pF/F).

506. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 464fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
B Option
Side Mount
Bracket*
R
D
DEPTH RADIUS
feet meters inches cm
1 0.3 1.2 3.1
2 0.61 2.1 5.2
3 0.91 2.9 7.3
4 1.22 3.7 9.5
5 1.5 4.6 11.6
6 1.8 5.4 13.7
7 2.1 6.2 15.9
8 2.4 7.1 18.0
9 2.7 7.9 20.1
10 3.0 8.8 22.3
11 3.4 9.6 24.4
12 3.7 10.4 26.5
13 4.0 11.3 28.7
14 4.3 12.1 30.8
15 4.6 13.0 32.9
16 4.9 13.8 35.1
17 5.2 14.6 37.2
18 5.5 15.5 39.3
TABLE 1. BEAM RADIUS
The ELP can be mounted through any
threaded (2" NPT) opening in a tank top
or with the optional side-mount bracket.
Care should be taken to locate the ELP far
enough from tank walls to avoid
inter-ference with the beam. Avoid
locations near motors or other sources of
vibration.
* For depths (D) greater than 5' (1.5m), the
side-mount bracket must be extended
away from the tank wall according to
Table 1. The side-mount bracket provides
4.5" (11.4 cm) clearance from the wall only.
FLOWLINE INTRINSICALLY SAFE ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER
ELP
ELP
Level Probe
+ -
31
42
MTL7706+
Intrinsically Safe Barrier
Ground Here Only
4-20 mA
Max Cable
C = 0.12 fiF
L = 4.0 mH
Hazardous
Area
Safe Area
1-5V
–
20-35 VDC
+
250fl
Power
Bus
MOUNTING
INSTALLATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ELP Intrinsically-safe ultrasonic level transmitter
ELP-B Intrinsically-safe ultrasonic level transmitter with side-mount bracket
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
250R-3-1 250 OHM 3 WATT 1% Resistor Long Leads 1299
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
MTL7706+ Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters 474

507. fifl 465HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Limits Temperature: -4° to 275°F
(-20° to 135°C)
Operating Pressure 1000 psig (6900 kPa)
Contact Rating SPDT, 10A @ 125/250 VAC
Installation Within 5 degrees of vertical
Area Explosion proof Class I, Division
1, Group C
, D; Class II, Division 1,
Groups E,F,G
Dimensions
13-1/2" (34.3 cm) overall length;
6-3/4" (17.1 cm) top of cover to
bottom of threads
Approvals UL listed File #E31755, CSA, CE,
FM
Weight 4.5 lb (2.0 kg)
Warranty 1 year
FM
APPROVED
USC
FM
APPROVED
USC
Limits Temperature: -4° to 275°F
(-20° to 135°C)
Operating Pressure 100 psig (690 kPa)
Contact Rating SPDT, 10A, 125/250 VAC
Installation Horizontal
Area Explosion proof Class I, Division 1,
Groups C
, D; Class II, Division 1,
Groups E, F, G
Dimensions
19-5/32" L (48.7 cm) x 3.34" Ø
(8.5 cm)
Approvals UL File #E31755, CSA, CE, FM
Weight 4.3 lb (1.95 kg)
Warranty 1 year
EXPLOSION PROOF FLOAT SWITCH
L4
DESCRIPTION
The Model L4 explosion proof float switch is a heavy duty
explosion proof switch for the most critical applications.
FEATURES
• Explosion proof construction
• Stainless steel float
• Magnetically actuated
• Good for specific gravities 0.7 and up
• CE, CSA and UL listed; FM approved
• 1-1/2" NPT mounting
• Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D;
• Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
SPECIFICATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF FLOW SWITCH
V4-2-U
DESCRIPTION
The Model V4-2-U explosion proof flow switch is a
dependable solution for protecting against low flow conditions
in pipelines for liquids, gases, and flowing solids
.
FEATURES
• Explosion-proof construction
• Stainless steel vanes
• Accommodates pipe sizes 1-1/2" and up
• Magnetically actuated
• CE, CSA, and UL listed; FM approved
• 1-1/2" NPT mounting
• Class I Division 1 Groups C, D;
• Class II Division 1 Groups E, F, G
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
V4-2-U Explosion proof flow switch
L4 Explosion proof float switch
WARNING: Models L4 and V4-2-U are not listed for use in areas classified as Group A (acetylene) or Group B (hydrogen and others). For these atmospheres, an intrinsically safe system using standard dry-contact switch, intrinsic safety barriers, and voltage-limiting circuitry is recommended.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
ACK6F Cement: 30 oz * (850g) Fiber: 5 oz (142g), 25 cu in (410 cu cm) volume when set
* Consists of five 6 oz (187g) cement pouches 489
EYM-75 3/4" size, 1.19" turning radius, 2 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction 488

508. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 466fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
FM
APPROVED
USC
Supply Voltage 16 to 32 VDC @ 208.3 mA
Operating Temperature -40° to 149°F (-40° to 65°C)
Conduit Connection 2 x 3/4" NPT
Materials Of
Construction Housing: Epoxy painted aluminum
alloy LM25; Sensor: stainless steel
Housing Type IP66
Mounting Integral mounting plate with 4 x
mounting holes suitable for M8 bolts
Communication RS485, MODBUS RTU
Inrush Current 800 mA @ 24 VDC maximum
Output Current 4 - 20 mA sink or source
Relays 3 x 5A@250VAC. Selectable
normally open or normally closed (switch) and energized/de-energized
(programmable)
. Alarm relays
default normally open/de-energized.
F
ault relay default normally open/
energized
Terminals
15 x screw terminals
Wire Size 20 to 14 AWG
Approvals Class I, Division 1 Groups B, C, and
D; Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, and D; Class II, Division 1 Groups E, F, and G; Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G, UL File #E186567, CE
Weight
4.4 lb (2 kg)
Warranty 1 Year
EXPLOSION PROOF GAS MONITOR / TRANSMITTER
SPXCD SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Honeywell Analytics XCD Series explosion proof gas
monitor/transmitter provides comprehensive monitoring
of flammmable, toxic, and oxygen gas hazards in potentially
explosive atmospheres
. Users can modify detector operation
using the LCD and magnet switches without ever needing to open the unit
. This enables one-man, non-intrusive operation
and reduces routine maintenance time and costs. The XCD
series is suitable for both indoor and outdoor use.
FEATURES
• User friendly and intuitive tri-colored backlit display
with digits, bar graph, and icons
• Fully configurable via magnetic switches
• Selectable sink or source 4-20 mA output
• Built in Alarm and Fault relays
• MODBUS communications for remote diagnostics/
configuration
• Removable plug in display module provides easy
access to terminal area
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
SPXCD
1
2
3
4
5
6
24 VDC
0 VDC
4-20 mA Signal
Common
TxD
RxD
+
-
24 VDC Power Supply
+
-
4-20 mA Signal
+
-
Modbus Communication
NC
COM
NO
NC
COM
NO
NC
COM
NO
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
RLY 1
RLY 2
RLY 1
WIRING
• Integral mounting bracket
• 2 x M20 or 3/4" NPT cable/conduit entries
• Epoxy painted aluminum alloy housing
• Class I, Division 1 Groups B, C, and D; Class I, Division
2, Groups B, C, and D; Class II, Division 1 Groups E, F,
and G; Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G

509. fifl 467HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF GAS MONITOR / TRANSMITTER
SPXCD SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SPXCDULNCXM UL/CSA Approved Carbon Monoxide 0-250ppm, 4-20mA, 3 Relays, ModBus, Aluminum Enclosure
SPXCDULNFXM UL/CSA Approved Combustibles 0-100% LEL, 4-20mA, 3 Relays, ModBus, Aluminum Enclosure
SPXCDULNHXM UL/CSA Approved Hydrogen Sulfide 0-50ppm, 4-20mA, 3 Relays, ModBus, Aluminum Enclosure
SPXCDULNNXM UL/CSA Approved Nitrogen Dioxide 0-50ppm, 4-20mA, 3 Relays, ModBus, Aluminum Enclosure
SPXCDULNO1M UL/CSA Approved Oxygen 0-25%, 4-20mA, 3 Relays, ModBus, Aluminum Enclosure
SPXCDULNG1M UL/CSA Approved Hydrogen 0-1000ppm, 4-20mA, 3 Relays, ModBus, Aluminum Enclosure
SPXCDULNRXM UL Approved Methane 0-100% LEL, 4-20mA, 3 Relays, ModBus, Aluminum Enclosure
SPXCDULNPXM UL Approved Propane 0-100% LEL, 4-20mA, 3 Relays, ModBus, Aluminum Enclosure
SPXCDULNB1M UL Approved Carbon Dioxide 0-2% VOL, 4-20mA, 3 Relays, ModBus, Aluminum Enclosure
S3KCAL Calibration cap
SPXCDCC Collecting cone for use with lighter than air gases
SPXCDDMK Duct mounting kit
SPXCDMTBR Mounting bracket (inc. bolts, nuts, brackets)
SPXCDSPD Sunshade / Deluge Protection
GAS
User Selectable
Full Scale Range
Default
Range
Steps
User Selectable
Calibration Gas
Range
Default
Calibration
Point
Response
Time (T90)
Accuracy
Default Alarm Points
A1 A2
Electrochemical Sensors
Oxygen (O
2
) 25.0% V/V only 25.0% V/V n/a 20.9 V/V (fixed) 20.9 V/V <30 sec
≤± 0.5%
Vol.
19.5 V/V▼▼▼ 23.5 V/V ▲
Hydrogen Sulfide
(H
2
S)
10 to 100 ppm 50 ppm 1.0 ppm
30 to 70% of selected
full scale range
25 ppm <50 sec ≤± 1 ppm 10 ppm ▲
▲20 ppm ▲▲
Carbon Monoxide
(CO)
100 to 1000 ppm 300 ppm
100
ppm
100 ppm <30 sec ≤
± 6 ppm100 ppm ▲
▲200 ppm ▲ ▲
Hydrogen (H
2
) 1000 ppm only 1000 ppm n/a 500 ppm <65 sec ≤ ± 25 ppm200 ppm ▲▲400 ppm ▲▲
Nitrogen Dioxide
(NO
2
)
10 to 50 ppm 10 ppm 5.0 ppm 5 ppm <40 sec
± 3 ppm or
± 20%
5.0 ppm ▲▲10.0 ppm ▲▲
Catalytic Bead Sensors
Flammable 20 to 100% LEL 100% LEL
10%
LEL
25 to 95% of selected
full scale range
50% LEL <25 sec ≤± 1.5% LEL 20% LEL ▲▲40% LEL ▲▲
Infrared Sensors
Methane (CH
4
) 20 to 100% 100% LEL
10%
LEL
30 to 70% of selected
full scale range
50% LEL <40 sec ≤± 1.5% LEL 20% LEL ▲▲40% LEL▲ ▲
Propane (C
3
H
8
) 20 to 100% LEL 100% LEL
10%
LEL
50% LEL <40 sec ≤± 1.5% LEL 20% LEL ▲▲40% LEL ▲▲
Carbon Dioxide
(CO
2
)
2% V
ol only 2% V/V N/A 1% V/V <40 sec ≤± 2% Vol.
0.40% V/V
▲
▲
0.80% V/V▲ ▲
▲ ▲Rising AlarmFalling Alarm
▲ ▲

510. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 468fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 20-28 VDC @ 10 mA standby, 50
mA alarm
Contact Rating
Alarm SPST, 1A @ 30 VDC
Auxillary SPDT, 2A @ 30 VDC
Air Velocity 600-4000 fpm (3-20 mps)
Area Explosion proof Class I, Division
2, Groups C
,D; Class II, Division 2,
Groups E, F, G; Class III
Enclosure Rating
Detector :NEMA 4X fiberglass;
Detector and junction box: NEMA3, 7CD, 9EF, 12
Sampling Tube
3/4" galvanized EMT in 1', 3', 6', or
10'L (0.3, 0.9, 1.8, or 3m)
Return Tube 12"L (30.5 cm), included
Dimensions 12.75" H x 3.5" W x 6" D
(32.4 x 8.9 x 15.2 cm)
Approvals CSA
Weight 13.0 lb (5.9 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DET-TRONICS EXPLOSION PROOF DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR
30-3003D
DESCRIPTION
The Det-Tronics Model 30-3003D explosion proof duct
smoke detector provides early detection of smoke and
products of combustion in air moving through HVAC ducts
.
An intak
e tube accomplishes air sampling
. A return tube, duct
enclosure, junction box, and instruction manual are included with the base unit
. The detector and junction box are listed for
use in atmospheres with hazardous gases or dusts (Groups C, D, E ,F )
.
FEATURES
• Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D
• Trouble-free photoelectric detector
• 24 VDC operation
• Contacts (3): N.O. (alarm), N.C. (supervisory), SPDT
(auxiliary)
SPECIFICATIONS
123456
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
TB-2
TB-3
+
C
NO
NC
Ground
–
Normally Closed
Supervisory
Contacts
24 VDC Po wer Supply
Normally Open
Alarm Contacts
Auxiliary
SPDT Contacts
Note: Circuit shown in the normal standby energized mode.
(yellow)
(yellow)
(violet)
(violet)
(black)
(red)
Factory Wiring
to Detector
Wiring Terminal
Box
WIRING
30-3003D

511. fifl 469HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
6.12 (155) 11.62 (295)
9.38
(238)
14.75
(375)
0.31 (7.9) DIA
Mounting
4 Places
Alarm Indicator
Stopper
Air Flow
Intake
Tube
Exhaust
Tube
Top of Detector
Entire Width
of Duct
Mount the detector in an air duct using the provided template.
Detector must be mounted at least six duct widths from the fan
or other sources of turbulence.
The intake sampling tube has holes drilled the entire length of
the tube and should extend the entire width of the duct. The
holes must be facing into the air flow.
1. Cut the intake sampling tube to the desired length.
2. Firmly insert the stopper (packaged in the installation kit)
in the end of the intake sampling tube.
3. Follow instruction sheet provided with each detector.
DET-TRONICS EXPLOSION PROOF DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR
30-3003D
ORDERING INFORMATION
MOUNTING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
30-300D-1 Explosion proof duct smoke detector, photoelectric with 1' duct sampling tube
30-3003D-3 Explosion proof duct smoke detector, photoelectric with 3' duct sampling tube
30-3003D-6 Explosion proof duct smoke detector, photoelectric with 6' duct sampling tube
30-3003D-10 Explosion proof duct smoke detector, photoelectric with 10' duct sampling tube
CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code required
distance from junction box to maintain explosion proof rating.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
ACK6F Cement: 30 oz * (850g) Fiber: 5 oz (142g), 25 cu in (410 cu cm) volume when set
* Consists of five 6 oz (187g) cement pouches 489
EYM-100 1" size, 1.38" turning radius, 4 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction 488
DIMENSIONS

512. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 470fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
FM
APPROVED
USC
BALMAC VIBRATION TRANSMITTER / SWITCH
550-X
DESCRIPTION
The Balmac Model 550-X vibration switch provides low
cost, reliable vibration protection for rotating machinery
operating within the range of 120-60,000 rpm
. The switch's
vibration sensor, mounted perpendicular to the unit's base, responds to the velocity signal (in/sec) and effects automatic shut-down or alarm when pre-set limits are exceeded
. The
unit may be mounted with the sensitive axis in any plane (horizontal, vertical or axial), even in an inverted position
.
T
wo limit set points are provided
. One is set for the maximum
allowable vibration (in/sec), while the other is set for a percentage of that setting, tripping the alarm relay when that percentage is reached
. A built-in, adjustable time delay
prevents triggering due to transient vibrations. The switch
can be wired for latch and remote reset or for automatic reset when vibration falls below set point
. The unit has a 4-20 mA
output that may be used with a panel meter or data logger, permitting analysis of vibration trends
. Once the switch has
been installed and the limits set, it requires no attention. The
Model 550-X vibration switch is enclosed in an explosion proof housing suitable for Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D and Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 100-130 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Limits
Limit #1 (alarm) Set as a percent of Limit #2
(shutdo
wn) Limit #2 (shutdown) Set at a velocity level in inches/sec
Measurement Range 0.1-2.75 in/sec (2.5-70 mm/sec)
Frequency Range 2-1000 Hz (120-60,000 rpm)
Time Delay 1-30 seconds
Relay Output SPDT relay 5A @ 125 VAC; 5A @
28 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA DC
Accuracy ±5%
Maximum Output Impedance
500Ω
Vibration Sensitive Axis
Perpendicular to the base,
omnidirectional mounting
Remote Reset Circuit closure between latch and
common will reset both outputs
Area Explosion proof housing Class I,
Div 1, Groups C
, D: Class II, Div 1,
Groups E, F, G; NEMA 7CD, 9EG
Conduit Connections
3/4" NPT
Wiring Terminations Accept 12 AWG wire
Operating Temperature -30° to 165°F (-34° to 74°C)
Mounting 1/4" hardware, 3 mounting holes
Dimensions 4.81"W x 7.13"H x 4.5"D
(12.2 x 18.1 x 11.4 cm)
Approvals CSA
Weight 5.5 lb (2.5 kg)
Warranty 2 years
4.06
(10.32)
6.75
(17.15)
0.38
(0.95) Two Mounting Holes
5/16" dia
0.38 (0.95)
6
(15.24)
4.19
550-X
in
(cm)
FEATURES
• Reliable performance
• Dual SPDT relay and 4-20 mA output
• Easy to install
• Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; Class II, Division 1,
Groups E, F, G
DIMENSIONS
550-X

513. fifl 471HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
4-20mA
Mute
Latch
Common
C
N/C
N/O
C
N/C
N/O
L2
L1
Limit #1
Alarm
Limit #2
Shutdown
115 VAC 50/60 Hz
Reset (N.O.)
4-20 mA
Signal
Jumper fo r
Non-Latching
Operation Form C Contacts
to Alarm and
Shutdown Circuits
BALMAC VIBRATION TRANSMITTER / SWITCH
550-X
The wiring access is through the 3/4" NPT conduit hole on
the side of the switch enclosure. Wiring subject to physical
damage should be adequately protected. When installing
electrical conduit, a short length (12"/30 cm) of flexible conduit must be used between the vibration switch and an associated junction box
. This construction will provide some
vibration isolation in the conduit line. Conduit and fittings
should conf
orm to the environment of the vibration switch
location
. Weather-resistant or rain-tight fittings should be
used to protect the switch wiring from a humid or corrosive atmosphere
. Make all connections in accordance with
national and local codes.
Note:
Model EYM-75 conduit seal is required within 18" (45
cm) of the enclosure to maintain explosion proof rating
.
ORDERING INFORMATION
WIRING
The Model 550-X is a self-contained, vibration protection limit switch
. It guards against destructive levels of vibration
by tripping a relay that has a user-adjustable limit setpoint in terms of vibration velocity (in/sec)
. This relay output
is connected to an alarm or control system to provide a warning or shutdown
. It mounts at the monitoring point and
is enclosed in a water-tight, heavy-cast aluminum housing.
T
erminals are provided for remote or manual reset
. A 4-20
mA output f
or recording or metering can connect to a remote
readout panel meter or BAS controller
.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
550-X Vibration transmitter/switch with 0.1-2.75 in/sec (2.5-70 mm/sec) range, two limits, and NEMA 7CD,
9EFG enclosure
TYPICAL INSTALLATION
VSVS
VS
VS
VS
VS
VSVSVS
VS
VS
Centrifugal Compressor
Reciprocating
Compressor
Y-Type CompressorV ertical Pump
Engine Gear Compressor Cooling Tower Fa n
OPERATION
CAUTION: Ensure that the switch is rigidly attached to the monitoring point for the proper sensing of the vibration.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
ACK6F Cement: 1.9 lb * (0.9 kg) Fiber: 0.3 LB (0.14 kg), 25 cu in (410 cu cm) volume when set
* Consists of five 0.4 lb (0.19 kg) cement pouches 489
EYM-50 1/2" size, 1.06" turning radius, 1 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction 488

514. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 472fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 12-50 VDC, black=negative,
red=positive, reverse polarity
protection
Frequency Range 7-1300 Hz ±3% (420-78,000 rpm)
Isolation 500V, circuit-to-case
Maximum Output Impedance
RL = 50 (Vs-12)Ω; 600Ω @ 24 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA
Accuracy 5% to 10% of scale
Vibration Range Output 4-20 mA, proportional to
vibration level, 0-1 in/sec (0-25.4 mm/
sec), Output 4-20 mA, proportional to vibration level, 0-2 in/sec (0-50
.8
mm/sec)
Operating Temperature -4° to 185°F (-20° to 85°C)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4, weatherproof,
Cadmium-plated steel
Process Connection 1" MNPT
Mounting 1/4''-20 stud, 3/8" deep
Approvals UL listed file #E126345
Weight 0.41 lb (0.18 kg)
Warranty 1 year
INTRINSICALLY SAFE VIBRATION TRANSMITTER
140T- HAZARDOUS
DESCRIPTION
The Balmac Model 140T intrinsically safe vibration
transmitter is low cost, yet highly accurate and rugged. It is
ideal f
or use with all machines, even those which previously
may have been considered uneconomical to monitor
. The
Model 140T easily mounts by use of a standard 1/4"-20 stud.
It is a tw
o-wire, loop-powered transmitter which can feed
the vibration level of operating machinery to a data logger, milliamp monitor, or process control computer. Solid state
accelerometer and circuit design pro
vide a 4-20 mA signal
proportional to vibration velocity
. Intrinsically safe, it can be
used in hazardous environments when coupled with a Model MTL7706 Intrinsic Safety barrier
.
SPECIFICATIONS
1.13
(2.86)
1.75
(4.44)
0.38 (0.95)
in
(cm)
1.31 dia
(3.33)
1/4-20 0.38 (0.95)
1" NPT
Mounting Connection
FEATURES
• Reliable performance
• Easy to install
• 4-20 mA output
• Intrinsically safe Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D;
Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
APPLICATION Vibration monitoring can help alert the maintenance staff
to the destructive effects of vibration on mechanical system
equipment such as air handler fans, cooling
tower fans, pumps, and compressors
.
DIMENSIONS

515. fifl 473HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
CAUTION: Intrinsically safe devices require the use of an intrinsic safety barrier when applied in hazardous locations.
Provide wiring and grounding strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. When the Model 140T
transmitter is combined with the Model MTL7706 intrinsic safety barrier, total cable capacitance between the two
must be limited to 0.08 µF, and total cable inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent to 1800'/548m maximum
Belden
®
#8760 18/2 twisted pair cable 0.18 µH/FT, 44 pF/F).
You must ensure that the transmitter is rigidly attached to the monitoring point for the proper sensing of the vibration.
The mounting orientation can be in any position. This position should be in an area for the best vibration signal definition or where
there is a good transfer of the machines (fans, pumps, etc.) vibrations. The best location will vary from machine to machine. The
location of the transmitter should be selected carefully. When selecting the site for the mounting location, it is helpful to survey the
site with the aid of a vibration meter.
INTRINSICALLY SAFE VIBRATION TRANSMITTER
140T- HAZARDOUS
140T
MTL7706 +
IS Barrier
Intrinsically Safe Wiring
Ground Here Only
4-20 mA
1
2
3
4
Max Cable
C=0.08 fiF
L= 4.0 mH
Hazardous
Area
Safe
Area
1-5V
–
20-35 VDC
+
250fl
WIRING
Wiring subject to physical damage should be adequately protected
. When installing electrical conduit, it is
recommended that a short length (12"/30 cm) of flexible conduit be used between the transmitter and an associated junction box
. This construction will provide some vibration
isolation in the conduit line. Conduit and fittings should
conf
orm to the environment of the transmitter location
.
W
eather-resistant or rain-tight fittings should be used to
protect the transmitter wiring from a humid or corrosive atmosphere. Make all connections in accordance with
national and local codes.
INSTALLATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
140T
-1
Intrinsically-safe vibration transmitter, range 0-1 in/sec (25.4 mm/sec)
140T-2 Intrinsically-safe vibration transmitter, range 0-2 in/sec (50.8 mm/sec)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
250R-3-1 250 OHM 3 WATT 1% resistor long leads 1299
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
MTL7706+ Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters 474

516. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 474fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
41
5
6
2
3
Hazardous Area
Terminals
Safe Area
Terminals
3.98
(10.13)
4.02
(10.21)
0.75 cm
Rail
3.89
(9.88)
0.27±0.01
(0.7±0.03)
in
(cm)
3.543
(9 cm)
4.134
(10.5 cm)
Hazardous Area
Terminals
Safe Area
Terminals
Installation and approval side label
0.496
(1.26 cm)
Color-coded top labelProduct top label
MTL7700 SERIES MTL7000/5000
1
2
3
4
INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS
MTL5000, MTL7000, MTL7700 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MTL7000, MTL7700 and MTL5000 Series of ultra-
slim intrinsic safety barriers are the worldwide standard in
protection and accuracy for intrinsically safe sensing and
controlling devices in hazardous locations
. The electronic
design limits the amount of electrical energy that can be transmitted into the hazardous area to a level below the ignition energy of even the worst-case explosive mixture of fuel and air
. This level of protection remains intact even in the
event of two simultaneous faults, thus providing the highest possible safety rating for this type of system
.
All
MTL7000, MTL7700 and MTL5000 Series barriers are
FM approved for use in intrinsically safe systems under the entity concept and can thus be applied with the widest possible array of intrinsically safe devices
.Designed for ease
of installation, these barriers provide a positive intrinsic safety ground through the DIN rail
. Isolating spacers are available
for applications in which the intrinsic safety ground must be separate from the mounting panel's earth ground (ANSI / ISA RP-12
.6 specifies grounding requirements).
FM
APPROVED
USC
FEATURES
• FM entity approval Class I, II, and III, Division 1,
Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G
• BASEEFA approval EEx [ia], IIC
• DIN rail mounting with integral intrinsic safety ground
• Compact size
APPLICATION
According to the entity concept, barriers must be selected
to limit the available hazardous area voltage (V) and current
(I) to levels below the rating of the intrinsically safe device
(Vmax, Imax)
. Also, the combined capacitance (C) and
inductance (L) of the intrinsically safe device and cabling must be less than the maximum ratings for the barrier (La, Ca)
. The great majority of applications can be satisfied with
one of the six key barrier types stocked by Kele. Other types
are a
vailable to suit most every application, contact Kele
for assistance
. Refer to the Hazardous Location Application
Guide in the Technical Reference section for more detailed barrier selection procedures
.
DIMENSIONS
MLT7700 SERIES

517. fifl 475HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS
INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS
MTL5000, MTL7000, MTL7700 SERIES
WARNING: Check compatibility of the electrical safety parameters of the field equipment with those of the barriers to
make sure that the combination is safe. If an intrinsically safe device does not have entity approval, it must be paired
with a barrier specifically listed in its intrinsic safety drawing (control drawing).
Entity Safety Parameters End to End
Application Model V I fi C(max) L(max) Max Resistance
(mA) (µF) (mH) V oltage (fi)
4-20 mA MTL7706+ 28 93 300 0.083 4.2 35 N/A
Two-wire transmitter
DI 200 Series MTL7765ac 15 150 100 0.58 1.45 12.5 124
flow sensors
Controller output MTL7728+ 28 93 300 0.12 4.2 27 333
4-20 mA
Dry contact/Dry contact MTL5011B 10.5 14 800 2.4 165 35 N/A *
Digital output MTL7728+ 28 93 300 0.083 4.2 35 333
* The MTL5011B is isolated end to end.
SAFETY SPECIFICATIONSSupply Current 45 mA tyipica @ 20 mAl with 24 VDC supply; 60 mA maximum @ 20 mA with a 20 VCD supply
Supply Voltage 20-35 VDC
Accuracy 2
Maximum Safe Area Voltage 250 VAC/VDC
Safe Area Load 500fi maximum
Transmitter 16 VDC minimum @ 20 mA with 250fi load; 11 VDC @ 20 mA with 500fi loadEach explosion proof box
has mounting ears for surface applications and includes 3/4" FNPT tapped conduit entry on the top side.
MTL7706+ (for loop-powered 4-20 mA transmitters) Supply Voltage
20-35 VDC
Current 45 mA typical @ 20 mA with24 VDC supply
60 mA max @ 20 mA with20 VDC supply
T
ransmitter voltage
16 VDC min @ 20 mA with 250Ω load
11 VDC min @ 20 mA with 500Ω load
Safe area load 500Ω max
Accuracy ±2 μA over 4-20 mA range
Max saf
e area voltage
250 VAC/VDC
Area Class I, II, III, Div 1, Groups A, B, C,D, E, F, G
Agency approvals FM BASEEFA EEx [ia] IIC
Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg)
MTL7765ac (for DI 200 Series flow sensors and other generalAC and DC systems) Working voltage
12.0 VDC @ 10 μA leakage current
Max saf
e area voltage
250 VAC/VDC
Area Class I, II, III, Div 1, Groups A, B, C,D, E, F, G
Agency approvals FM BASEEFA EEx [ia] IIC
Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg)
MTL5011B (dry contact to dry contact isolator) Supply voltage
20-35 VDC, 40 mA max
Contacts 2A @ 250 VAC, 40 VDC
Max safe area voltage 250 VAC/VDC
Area Class I, II, III, Div 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G
Agency approvals FM/UL BASEEFA EEx [ia] IIC
Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg)
MTL 7728+ (for switched digital outputs) Supply voltage
10-35 VDC (regulated)
Suppl
y current
1.5 mA plus load current, actively limited to 50 mA totalto protect safety fusing (50 mA)
Output current (Iout) Up to 35 mA Max safe area voltage
250 VAC/VDC
Area Class I, I, III, Div 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G
Agency approvals FM BASEEFA EEx ia IIC
Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg)

518. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 476fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Hazardous Area
4
1
2
3
MTL7728+
MTL5011B
Ground Here Only
4-20 mA Output to Hazardous Area
Safe Area
Shield
4-20 mA
Signal
from
Controller
4-20 mA
Signal to
Controlled
Device or
Display
Iout
LED,
Alarm,
Solenoid,
etc.
Hazardous Area
MTL7728+
Ground Here Only
Safe Area
Digital Output
10-35 VDC (regulated)
Digital Output to Hazardous Area
3 1
4
2
MTL7706+
Ground Here Only
Power 20-35 VDC
Hazardous AreaSafe Area
Two-wire
Transmitter
Hazardous AreaSafe Area
4-20 mA
4-20 mA Input from Hazardous Area
Dry Contact to Dry Contact
Digital Input
Resistors only
required for
line fault
detection
13
14
Vs-
Vs+
20-35 VDC
Output SPDT
10
11
12
7 8 9
3 2 1
680fi
22 kfi
I/P
6 5
4-20 mA 250fi
1-5V
Power Bus
3 1
4 2
WIRING
INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS
MTL5000, MTL7000, MTL7700 SERIES

519. fifl 477HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MTL5011B Isolator for digital (dry contact) inputs, SPDT
MTL7706+ Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters
MTL7728+ Active barrier for 4-20 mA outputs to hazardous area devices
MTL7765A
C
Intrinsic safety barrier
INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS
MTL5000, MTL7000, MTL7700 SERIES
Hazardous Area
3 1
4
2
MTL7765ac
UFT-1
Ground Here Only
Shield
DI 200 Series Flow Sensors
Safe Area
RED
BLK
Shield
DI 200 Series
Flow Sensors
SIG
COM
Iout
6
Hazardous Area
4 1
5
2
3
MTL7207+
Ground Here Only
Digital Input from Hazardous Area
(to discrete voltage)
Safe Area
10 to 35 VDC
Digital
Input
Sense
WIRING (CONTINUED)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
250R-3-1 250 OHM 3 WATT 1% resistor long leads 1299
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DIN-3F 35 mm DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m), RoHS compliant 860

520. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 478fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
3.0
(7.6)
Adjustable Side Pushbutton Head
2.36
(6.0)
3.5
(8.9)
0.325
(0.8)
3/4 - 14 TAPER
PIPE TAP
0.257 (0.7) DIA.
4 MTG. HOLES
.685
(1.7)
5.35
(13.6)
3.08
(7.8)
0.5
(1.3)
0.277 (0.7)
4.165
(10.6)
TYPE CBX
TYPE CX
2.54
(6.5)
0.945
(2.4)
9.65
(38)
28.45
(1.12)
12.7
(.50)
6.35
(.25)
16.26
(6.4)
295.15
(11.62)
228.6
(9.0)
2.29
(0.9)
DIA.
STEEL
SPRING ROD
E50KL421
DIMENSIONS
Electrical Data — Maximum Contact Ratings, per Pole
AC Volts Current, Amperes Volt Amperes DC Volts DC Current, Ampere
Make Break Cont. Make Break
B600
120 30 3 5 3600 360 120 0.1
240 15 1.5 240 0.05
480 7.5 0.75
600 6 0.60
Switch 1 N.O. & N.C., 120 VAC; 60A make,
6A break
Materials Of
Construction Cast aluminum die cast
Conduit Entrance 3/4" pipe tap
Mounting Surface mount
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1, 4, 13, 7 Division 1, Class
I BCD
, 9 Division 1, Class II EFG
(Note: a conduit seal-off kit is required for these switches)
Operating Temperature -20° to 200°F (-29° to 93°C)
Materials Of Construction
Stainless steel
Rod Diameter 0.09 in (0.23 cm)
Rod Length 11.612 in (29.5 cm)
Minimum Return Torque
4.5 in-oz
Weight
10316H2176 1.65 lb (0.75 kg)
E50LK421 0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Warranty 1 year
EXPLOSION PROOF WHISKER SWITCH
10316H2176
DESCRIPTION
The Model 10316H2176 explosion proof limit switch
combined with the Model E50KL421 whisker spring rod offers
an ideal solution for sensing equipment position in extreme
environments
. The switch also carries standard NEMA ratings
for most environments. Isolated normally-open and normally-
closed contacts are included. The aluminum housing and
stainless steel whisker gives corrosion resistance.
FEATURES
• One-way gasket keeps liquids out, but allows gases to
escape
• Aluminum housing offers corrosion resistance
• Whisker spring rod gives mounting options
• NEMA 1,4, 7, 9, 13 ratings
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
10316H2176 Explosion proof whisker switch 1 normally-open, 1 normally-closed contact
E50KL421 Whisker spring rod
10316H2176
E50LK421

521. fifl 479HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
FEATURES
• Heavy-duty, high-decibel vibrating horn
• Corrosion-resistant epoxy finish
• NEMA 4X
• Wall-mounting with side brackets
• Power connection wires embedded in sealing
compound
• Tapped for 3/4" conduit
• 97 dB at 10 feet
• 120 VAC (878EX-N5), 24 VDC @ 160 mA (879EX-G1)
• UL listed for Class 1, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups B, C,
D; Class II, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups E, F; Class III
locations
• UL File E14660
DIVISION 1 & 2 STR
OBE MODEL 116EXMST
FEATURES
•
High-impact glass dome
• 65 flashes per minute
• 800,000 peak candlepower
• 3000-hour lamp rating
• NEMA 3R and 4X rated
• UL listed 1638, 1203, Marine 1598A; CUL listed C22.2
No. 205; Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; Class I,
Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Division 1,
Groups E, F, G; Class II, Division 2, Group F, G; Class III,
Division 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Division 2, Group G
•
UL File E212211
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
116EXMSTR-N5* Divisions 1 and 2 strobe, red lens 120 VAC
116EXMSTA-N5* Divisions 1 and 2 strobe, amber lens 120 VAC
116EXMSTB-N5* Divisions 1 and 2 strobe, blue lens 120 VAC
116-GRD Optional dome guard
92-ST Replacement strobe tube
116EX-P Pendant mount
116EX-B Wall bracket mount (requires 116EX-C)
116EX-C Ceiling mount
116EX-S Stanchion mount
* Requires mount
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION 878EX-N5 Divisions 1 and 2 horn 120 VAC 879EX-G1 Divisions 1 and 2 horn 24 VDC
DESCRIPTION
These Edwards horns and stobes offer a selection that
should meet any hazardous location alarming need.
DIVISION 1 & 2 HORNS MODELS 8783X, 879EX
EXPLOSION PROOF HORNS & STROBES
878EX, 879EX, 116EXMST

522. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 480fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
AC - NEMA TYPE B600 DC - NEMA TYPE P600
Inductive 35% Po wer Factor Resistive 75% Po wer Factor Inductive and Resistive
Make Break Continuous Make, Break, and Make and Continuous
Volts Amps VA Amps VA Carrying Amps Continuous Carrying Amps Volts Break Amps Carrying Amps
120 30.5 3600 3.75 360 5 5 120 1.1 5
240 15.0 3600 1.5 360 5 5 240 0.55 5
480 7.5 3600 0.75 360 5 5 600 0.2 5
600 6.0 3600 0.6 360 5 5
MODEL HL600
HAZARDOUS LOCATION CONTROL STATIONS
HL600 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The HL600 Series hazardous location control stations
allow alarm and control interface in a hazardous environment.
The standard unit enclosure is r
ated NEMA 7/9 in a diecast
aluminum enclosure
. Contacts are included. A 1/2" - 14 NPT
threaded opening is on the bottom. There are 12 standard
legends, but special legends can be provided.
FEATURES
• NEMA 7/NEMA 9 diecast aluminum enclosure surface
mount
• Rated Class I, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D; Class
II, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups E, F, G
• Contacts included
• Momentary contacts available on special order
• Twelve standard legends, specials available
• Mechanically interlocked maintained contacts
• Weight 5 lb (2.27 kg)
• UL Listed
• One year warranty
CONTACT ELECTRICAL RATINGS
HL600-FUEL-CI
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HL600 Hazardous location control station - surface mount - buttons labeled “ON” and “OFF”
STOP EMERGENCY - STOP
POWER EMERGENCY - POWER OFF
SHUTDOWN EMERGENCY - SHUTDOWN
FUEL FUEL SHUT-OFF
FUEL PUMP FUEL PUMP CONTROL
GAS GAS SHUT-OFF
BOILER BOILER SHUTDOWN
HVAC HV AC SHUTDOWN
VENT VENTILATION STOP
VENTSTART VENTILATION START
REFRIG REFRIGERATION STOP
CHILLER CHILLER STOP
SL SPECIFIC LEGEND - SPECIFY
– Maintained mechanically interlocked contacts (1 N.O. and 1 N.C.)
MO Momentary contacts (2 N.O.)
EX Extended head on red button
RS Green button labeled “RESET ,” red button labeled “STOP”
CI Custom inscriptions on one or both buttons (specify)
Example: HL600-CHILLER-EX Hazardous location control
station labeled “CHILLER STOP” with extended
head on “OFF” button.
HL600 CHILLER EX – –

523. fifl 481HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
EXPLOSION PROOF CUSTOM CONTROL STATIONS
CXJ SERIES
DESCRIPTION
CXJ Series explosion proof custom control stations can be built to customer specifications with door-mounted pushbuttons,
pilot lights, selector switches, or potentiometers. Any combination of devices can be assembled in one of 75 sizes of aluminum
enclosures.
CUSTOM PUSH-BUTTON STATIONS
FEATURES
• Copper-free aluminum enclosures
• Integral cast mounting feet
• Enclosures suitable for drilling and tapping
• Factory-installed operators in the cover
• Controls installed and wired per specifications
• Windows available
• NEMA 3, 7, and 9 (4X optional)
• UL and CSA available
• Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B,C, D; Class II,
Division 1 and 2, Groups E,F, G; Class III
• Separate operator devices available
WINDOW ENCLOSURES
CUSTOM CONTROL STATIONS
Custom Push-button stations are for applications requiring
only operator interface and/or pilot light indication. Stations
are a
vailable in one-hole to nine-hole arrangements
.
Oper
ators can be purchased separately
.
Control stations are used to house control components and have the ability to add operators on the cover
. The enclosures
are available in 75 shapes and sizes that fit any application.
Window enclosures are available with square or rectangular windows
. This provides convenient viewing of gauges,
meters, or control device displays.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Circuit breakers provide overload and short-circuit protection
on feeder or branch circuits, as well as lighting, heating, and
motor circuits
. The enclosure includes an external breaker
operator handle that can be padlocked in on or off position.
The circuit break
er can be used as a general service
disconnect
.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Call Kele to Order

524. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 482fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
EXPLOSION PROOF ENCLOSURES
AXJ, XJAT SERIES
AXJ JUNCTION BOX DIMENSIONS in (cm)
MODEL MODEL with BA CKPLATE W L D Dc A B C E F Lug bolt Weight lb (kg)
AXJ664-H1-C2-M2 AXJ664-H1-C2-M2-N1
AXJ886-H1-C2-M2 AXJ886-H1-C2-M2-N1
AXJ12126-H1-C2-M2 AXJ12126-H1-C2-M2-N1
AXJ12186-H1-C2-M2 AXJ12186-H1-C2-M2-N1
AXJ18248-H1-C2-M2 AXJ18248-H1-C2-M2-N1
6.0
(15.24)
8.0
(20.32)
12.0
(30.48)
12.0
(30.48)
18.0
(45.72)
6.0
(15.24)
8.0
(20.32)
12.0
(30.48)
18.0
(45.72)
24.0
(60.96)
4.0
(10.16)
6.0
(15.24)
6.0
(15.24)
6.0
(15.24)
8.0
(20.32)
1.0
(2.54)
1.0
(2.54)
1.5
(3.81)
1.5
(3.81)
1.5
(3.81)
9.75
(24.76)
12.5
(31.75)
17.0
(43.18)
17.0
(43.18)
23.125
(58.73)
9.75
(24.76)
12.5
(31.75)
17.0
(43.18)
23.0
(58.42)
29.125
(73.97)
6.25
(15.87)
8.5625
(21.74)
9.5
(24.13)
9.5
(24.13)
11.875
(30.16)
5.12
(13.01)
4.5
(11.43)
8.62
(21.90)
14.12
(35.87)
18.37
(46.67)
9.12
(23.17)
10.75
(27.30)
15.75
(40.00)
15.75
(40.00)
21.75
(55.24)
3/8"
3/8"
1/2"
1/2"
5/8"
17
(7.71)
36
(16.32)
77
(34.92)
116
(52.61)
210
(95.25)
E B
F
A
L
W
Dc
D C
XJATS JUNCTION BOX (SOLID COVER) DIMENSIONS in (cm)
MODEL MODEL with BA CKPLATE W L D Throat Opening A B C E F Weight lb (kg)
XJATS2-C2-M2 XJATS2-C2-M2-N1
XJATS14-C2-M2 XJATS14-C2-M2-N1
XJATS11-C2-M2 XJATS11-C2-M2-N1
6.0
(15.24)
7.0
(17.78)
12.0
(30.48)
6.0
(15.24)
9.0
(22.86)
12.0
(30.48)
4.12
(10.47)
4.15
(10.55)
6.12
(15.55)
5.75
(14.60)
7.12
(18.09)
9.12
(23.17)
7.25
(18.41)
10.5
(26.67)
13.75
(34.92)
7.25
(18.41)
8.37
(21.27)
13.75
(34.92)
7.0
(17.78)
7.37
(18.73)
9.75
(24.76)
5.0
(12.7)
8.5
(21.59)
10.5
(26.67)
8.5
(21.59)
9.75
(24.76)
15.5
(39.37)
12.0
(5.44)
33.0
(14.97)
54.0
(24.49)
L F
E
A
W
B
AXJ SERIES
XJATS SERIES
H
D
C
XJATG JUNCTION BOX (with WINDOW) DIMENSIONS in (cm)
MODEL MODEL with WINDOW Throat Glass Viewing
with WINDOW and BA CKPLATE W L D Opening A B C E F Weight lb (kg) Area
XJATG2-C2-M2 XJATG2-C2-M2-N1
XJATG14-C2-M2 XJATG14-C2-M2-N1
XJATG11-C2-M2 XJATG11-C2-M2-N1
6.0
(15.24)
7.0
(17.78)
12.0
(30.48)
6.0
(15.24)
9.0
(22.86)
12.0
(30.48)
4.12
(10.47)
4.15
(10.55)
6.12
(15.55)
5.75
(14.60)
7.12
(18.09)
9.12
(23.17)
7.25
(18.41)
10.5
(26.67)
13.75
(34.92)
7.25
(18.41)
8.37
(21.27)
13.75
(34.92)
7
(17.8)
7.37
(18.73)
9.75
(24.8)
5.0
(12.7)
8.5
(21.59)
10.5
(26.67)
8.5
(21.59)
9.75
(24.76)
15.5
(39.37)
12.0
(5.44)
33.0
(14.96)
54.0
(24.49)
L F
E
A
W
B
XJATG SERIES
H
D
C
4.0
(10.16)
5.25
(13.33)
6.75
(17.14)
*
*
*
Two diagonal mounting feet
*
*
*
Two diagonal mounting feet
*
*
*
*
w/o Back Plate
w/o Back Plate
w/o Back Plate
DESCRIPTION
The AXJ Series and XJAT Series explosion proof
enclosures consist of cast aluminum instrument housings
and junction boxes for explosion proof and dust ignition
proof applications
. They are suitable for Class I, Division 1
and 2, Groups B, C, D; Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups E, F, G; and Class III
. They are furnished with mounting feet,
a cover, and two 3/4" drilled and tapped conduit openings.
AXJ Series
enclosures include cover hinges
. The N1 suffix
adds a mounting panel which is 3/16" (0.476 cm) thick
aluminum. The XJ AT Series is available in a glass window
and backplate version.
FEATURES
• Machined flange on AXJ Series
• Threaded opening on XJAT Series
• Cast copper-free aluminum
• Stainless steel hinge on AXJ Series
• Optional aluminum backplate
• 3/4" NPT holes, top and bottom
• Class I, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups B,C,D
• Class II, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups E,F,G
• UL File #146600 (AXJ, XJATG)
• UL File #E94590 (XJATS)
• XJAT Series Class III Nema 3, 4x, 7, and 9
• AXJ Series Class III Nema 3, 7, and 9
DIMENSIONS
XJATG AXJ
XJATS
WARNING:All conduit runs must be sealed within six
inches of the enclosure.

525. fifl 483HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
AXJ JUNCTION BOX DIMENSIONS in (cm)
MODEL MODEL with BA CKPLATE W L D Dc A B C E F Lug bolt Weight lb (kg)
AXJ664-H1-C2-M2 AXJ664-H1-C2-M2-N1
AXJ886-H1-C2-M2 AXJ886-H1-C2-M2-N1
AXJ12126-H1-C2-M2 AXJ12126-H1-C2-M2-N1
AXJ12186-H1-C2-M2 AXJ12186-H1-C2-M2-N1
AXJ18248-H1-C2-M2 AXJ18248-H1-C2-M2-N1
6.0
(15.24)
8.0
(20.32)
12.0
(30.48)
12.0
(30.48)
18.0
(45.72)
6.0
(15.24)
8.0
(20.32)
12.0
(30.48)
18.0
(45.72)
24.0
(60.96)
4.0
(10.16)
6.0
(15.24)
6.0
(15.24)
6.0
(15.24)
8.0
(20.32)
1.0
(2.54)
1.0
(2.54)
1.5
(3.81)
1.5
(3.81)
1.5
(3.81)
9.75
(24.76)
12.5
(31.75)
17.0
(43.18)
17.0
(43.18)
23.125
(58.73)
9.75
(24.76)
12.5
(31.75)
17.0
(43.18)
23.0
(58.42)
29.125
(73.97)
6.25
(15.87)
8.5625
(21.74)
9.5
(24.13)
9.5
(24.13)
11.875
(30.16)
5.12
(13.01)
4.5
(11.43)
8.62
(21.90)
14.12
(35.87)
18.37
(46.67)
9.12
(23.17)
10.75
(27.30)
15.75
(40.00)
15.75
(40.00)
21.75
(55.24)
3/8" 3/8" 1/2" 1/2" 5/8"
17
(7.71)
36
(16.32)
77
(34.92)
116
(52.61)
210
(95.25)
E B
F
A
L
W
Dc
D C
XJATS JUNCTION BOX (SOLID COVER) DIMENSIONS in (cm)
MODEL MODEL with BA CKPLATE W L D Throat Opening A B C E F Weight lb (kg)
XJATS2-C2-M2 XJATS2-C2-M2-N1
XJATS14-C2-M2 XJATS14-C2-M2-N1
XJATS11-C2-M2 XJATS11-C2-M2-N1
6.0
(15.24)
7.0
(17.78)
12.0
(30.48)
6.0
(15.24)
9.0
(22.86)
12.0
(30.48)
4.12
(10.47)
4.15
(10.55)
6.12
(15.55)
5.75
(14.60)
7.12
(18.09)
9.12
(23.17)
7.25
(18.41)
10.5
(26.67)
13.75
(34.92)
7.25
(18.41)
8.37
(21.27)
13.75
(34.92)
7.0
(17.78)
7.37
(18.73)
9.75
(24.76)
5.0
(12.7)
8.5
(21.59)
10.5
(26.67)
8.5
(21.59)
9.75
(24.76)
15.5
(39.37)
12.0
(5.44)
33.0
(14.97)
54.0
(24.49)
L F
E
A
W
B
AXJ SERIES
XJATS SERIES
H
D
C
XJATG JUNCTION BOX (with WINDOW) DIMENSIONS in (cm)
MODEL MODEL with WINDOW Throat Glass Viewing
with WINDOW and BA CKPLATE W L D Opening A B C E F Weight lb (kg) Area
XJATG2-C2-M2 XJATG2-C2-M2-N1
XJATG14-C2-M2 XJATG14-C2-M2-N1
XJATG11-C2-M2 XJATG11-C2-M2-N1
6.0
(15.24)
7.0
(17.78)
12.0
(30.48)
6.0
(15.24)
9.0
(22.86)
12.0
(30.48)
4.12
(10.47)
4.15
(10.55)
6.12
(15.55)
5.75
(14.60)
7.12
(18.09)
9.12
(23.17)
7.25
(18.41)
10.5
(26.67)
13.75
(34.92)
7.25
(18.41)
8.37
(21.27)
13.75
(34.92)
7
(17.8)
7.37
(18.73)
9.75
(24.8)
5.0
(12.7)
8.5
(21.59)
10.5
(26.67)
8.5
(21.59)
9.75
(24.76)
15.5
(39.37)
12.0
(5.44)
33.0
(14.96)
54.0
(24.49)
L F
E
A
W
B
XJATG SERIES
H
D
C
4.0
(10.16)
5.25
(13.33)
6.75
(17.14)
*
*
*
Two diagonal mounting feet
*
*
*
Two diagonal mounting feet
*
*
*
*
w/o Back Plate
w/o Back Plate
w/o Back Plate
EXPLOSION PROOF ENCLOSURES
AXJ, XJAT SERIES
DIMENSIONS (CONTINUED)

526. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 484fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Conduit Opening Two, 3/4" NPT
Assembly Factory only
Materials Of
Construction Cast aluminum, bolted cover
enclosure
Area Explosion proof Class I, Division 1, Groups C
, D; Class II, Division 1,
Groups E, F, G
Dimensions
Actuators (Only) (not to exceed) 9"H x 8.25"W x 11"D
(22.9 x 21 x 28 cm)
Drive Shaft 1/2" dia I1.27 cm), 0.93" L (2.38 cm)
Weight varies per model
Approvals UL (actuator only), CSA (assembly)
Warranty 2 years
EXPLOSION PROOF ACTUATOR ENCLOSURE (FOR VALVES AND DAMPERS)
MA8, MC6/7, MP6/7 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Schneider Electric MA8, MC6/7, and MP6/7 Series
explosion proof actuator enclosures are designed for
installation in a hazardous environment
. Each of these
actuators are f
actory assembled to order
. The enclosure is
a cast aluminum housing and bolted cover with explosion proof ratings for Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D and Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
. They are for use with any damper
with appropriate linkage and with Schneider Electric globe valve sizes 1/2" through 2", two- or three-way
.
FEATURES
• Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; Class II, Division 1,
Groups E, F, G
• Full range of approved actuators
• Approved for valves or dampers
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
AM-116 Splined crank arm for 1/2" (1.27cm) shaft (damper linkage required)
AM-123 Ball joint connector (damper linkage required)
CPX9301 6 to 9 VDC (fixed) actuator drive kit for hazardous locations
CPX9301456 0 to 10 VDC (fixed) actuator drive kit for hazardous locations
CPX9302 4 to 20 mA (fixed) actuator drive kit for hazardous locations
PR-48 5/16" dia., 48" (1.2m) length push rod 8

527. fifl 485HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
EXPLOSION PROOF ACTUATOR ENCLOSURE (FOR VALVES AND DAMPERS)
MA8, MC6/7, MP6/7 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Valve Body Actuator Linkage Size (NPT) PowerF low (Cv) Close-off (psid)
2-POSITION, FLOATING, 2-WAY VALVES, NON-SPRING RETURN
VB-7213-0-4-02
MP6-381 AV-293
1/2"
24 VAC, 52.8 VA
1.3 250
VB-7213-0-4-04 1/2" 4.4 250
VB-7213-0-4-06 3/4" 7.5 250
VB-7213-0-4-08 1" 14 150
VB-7213-0-4-09 1-1/4" 20 90
VB-7213-0-4-10 1-1/2" 28 60
VB-7213-0-4-112 "4 03 5
PROPORTIONAL 2-W AY VALVES, NON-SPRING RETURN – Requires separate CPX explosion proof actuator drive kit
VB-7213-0-4-02
MP6-381
+CPX Drive Kit
AV-293
1/2"
24 VAC, 52.8 VA
1.3 250
VB-7213-0-4-04 1/2" 4.4 250
VB-7213-0-4-06 3/4" 7.5 250
VB-7213-0-4-08 1" 14 150
VB-7213-0-4-09 1-1/4" 20 90
VB-7213-0-4-10 1-1/2" 28 60
VB-7213-0-4-11 2" 40 35
2-POSITION, 2-WAY VALVES, SPRING RETURN – Can be linked spring return open or spring return closed - specify at time of order.
VB-7213-0-4-02
MA8-318 AV-291
1/2"
24 VAC, 92 VA
1.3 250
VB-7213-0-4-04 1/2" 4.4 250
VB-7213-0-4-06 3/4" 7.5 250
VB-7213-0-4-08 1" 14 150
VB-7213-0-4-09 1-1/4" 20 90
VB-7213-0-4-10 1-1/2" 28 60
VB-7213-0-4-11 2" 40 35
FLOATING 2-WAY VALVES, SPRING RETURN – Can be linked spring return open or spring return closed - specify at time of order.
VB-7213-0-4-02
MP6-361 AV-291
1/2"
24 VAC, 60 VA
1.3 250
VB-7213-0-4-04 1/2" 4.4 250
VB-7213-0-4-06 3/4" 7.5 250
VB-7213-0-4-08 1" 14 150
VB-7213-0-4-09 1-1/4" 20 90
VB-7213-0-4-10 1-1/2" 28 60
VB-7213-0-4-11 2" 40 35
PROPORTIONAL 2-W AY VALVES, SPRING RETURN – Can be linked spring return open or spring return closed - specify at time of order.
Requires separate CPX explosion proof actuator drive kit
VB-7213-0-4-02
MP6-361
+ CPX Drive Kit
AV-291
1/2"
24 VAC, 60 VA
1.3 250
VB-7213-0-4-04 1/2" 4.4 250
VB-7213-0-4-06 3/4" 7.5 250
VB-7213-0-4-08 1" 14 150
VB-7213-0-4-09 1-1/4" 20 90
VB-7213-0-4-10 1-1/2" 28 60
VB-7213-0-4-11 2" 40 35
2-POSITION / FLOATING 3-WAY VALVES, NON-SPRING RETURN
VB-7313-0-4-02
MP6-381 AV-293
1/2"
24 VAC, 52.8 VA
1.3 250
VB-7313-0-4-04 1/2" 4.4 250
VB-7313-0-4-06 3/4" 7.5 200
VB-7313-0-4-08 1" 14 150
VB-7313-0-4-09 1-1/4" 20 90
VB-7313-0-4-10 1-1/2" 28 60
VB-7313-0-4-11 2" 40 35

528. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 486fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Valve Body Actuator Linkage Size (NPT)P ower Flow (Cv) Close-off (psid)
PROPORTIONAL 3-W AY VALVES, NON-SPRING RETURN – Requires separate CPX explosion proof actuator drive kit
VB-7313-0-4-02
      MP6-381
+ CPX Drive Kit
AV-293
1/2" 
24 VAC, 52.8 VA 
1.3 250
VB-7313-0-4-04 1/2"  4.4 250
VB-7313-0-4-06 3/4" 7.5 250
VB-7313-0-4-08 1" 14 150
VB-7313-0-4-09 1-1/4" 20 90
VB-7313-0-4-10 1-1/2" 28 60
VB-7313-0-4-11 2"  40 35
2-POSITION 3-WAY VALVES, SPRING RETURN – Can be linked spring return open or spring return closed - specify at time of order.
VB-7313-0-4-02
MA8-318 AV-291
1/2" 
24 VAC, 92 VA
1.3 250
VB-7313-0-4-04 1/2"  4.4 250
VB-7313-0-4-06 3/4" 7.5 250
VB-7313-0-4-08 1" 14 150
VB-7313-0-4-09 1-1/4" 20 90
VB-7313-0-4-10 1-1/2" 28 60
VB-7313-0-4-11 2"  40 35
FLOATING 3-WAY VALVES, SPRING RETURN – Can be linked spring return open or spring return closed - specify at time of order.
VB-7313-0-4-02
MP6-361 AV-291
1/2" 
24 VAC, 60 VA
1.3 250
VB-7313-0-4-04 1/2"  4.4 250
VB-7313-0-4-06 3/4" 7.5 250
VB-7313-0-4-08 1" 14 150
VB-7313-0-4-09 1-1/4" 20 90
VB-7313-0-4-10 1-1/2" 28 60
VB-7313-0-4-11 2"  40 35
PROPORTIONAL 3-W AY VALVES, SPRING RETURN – Can be linked spring return open or spring return closed - specify at time of order.
Requires separate CPX explosion proof actuator drive kit
VB-7313-0-4-02
      MP6-361
+ CPX Drive Kit
AV-291
1/2" 
24 VAC, 60 VA
1.3 250
VB-7313-0-4-04 1/2"  4.4 250
VB-7313-0-4-06 3/4" 7.5 250
VB-7313-0-4-08 1" 14 150
VB-7313-0-4-09 1-1/4" 20 90
VB-7313-0-4-10 1-1/2" 28 60
VB-7313-0-4-11 2"  40 35
DAMPER ACTUA TORS
Model NumberD escription
Timing
(no load, seconds) Power
Torque
in-lb (N-m)
MA8-318 Explosion proof 2-wire, 2-position, spring return CCW   20 24 VAC, 92 VA 60 (6.8)
MA8-318-500 Explosion proof 2-wire, 2-position, spring return CCW, end switch  20 24 VAC, 92 VA 60 (6.8)
60 (6.8)
MA8-418 Explosion proof 2-wire, 2-position, spring return CCW   20 120 VAC, 108 VA 60 (6.8)
MA8-418-500 Explosion proof 2-wire, 2-position, spring return CCW, end switch  20 120 VAC, 108 VA
MC6-351 Explosion proof 3 wire 2-position, non-spring return   70 24 VAC, 53 VA 220 (25)
MC6-421 Explosion proof 3 wire 2-position, non-spring return  20 120 VAC, 96 VA 175 (19)
MC6-431 Explosion proof 3 wire 2-position, non-spring return  30 120 VAC, 96 VA 220 (25)
MC7-4311 Explosion proof 3 wire 2-position, non-spring return  36 240 VAC, 96 VA 220 (25)
MP6-381 Explosion proof proportional / fl oating, non-spring return  130 24 VAC, 52.8 VA  220 (25)
MP6-361 Explosion proof proportional / fl oating, spring return CW  90 24 VAC, 60 VA 50 (5.6)
MP6-371 Explosion proof proportional / fl oating, spring return CCW  90 24 VAC, 60 VA 50 (5.6)
MP6-421 Explosion proof proportional / fl oating, non-spring return  25 120 VAC, 78 VA 60 (6.8)
MP6-485 Explosion proof proportional / fl oating, non-spring return  130 120 VAC, 60 VA 220 (25)
MP6-465 Explosion proof proportional / fl oating, spring return CW  90 120 VAC, 60 VA 50 (5.6)
MP6-475 Explosion proof proportional / fl oating, spring return CCW  90 120 VAC, 60 VA 90 (10)
MP7-4651 Explosion proof proportional / fl oating, spring return CW  108 240 VAC, 60 VA 50 (5.6)
MP7-4751 Explosion proof proportional / fl oating, spring return CCW  108 240 VAC, 60 VA 50 (5.6)
MP6-367 Explosion proof sequencing, non-spring return   90 24 VAC, 60 VA 50 (5.6)
MP6-377 Explosion proof sequencing, spring return CCW   90 24 VAC, 60 VA 50 (5.6)
MP6-379 Explosion proof 5-position, spring return CCW  90 24 VAC, 60 VA 50 (5.6)
MP6-470 Explosion proof 5-position, spring return CCW  90 120 VAC, 60 VA 50 (5.6)
EXPLOSION PROOF ACTUATOR ENCLOSURE (FOR VALVES AND DAMPERS)
MA8, MC6/7, MP6/7 SERIES

529. fifl 487HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Conduit Opening Two, 3/4" FNPT
Materials Of
Construction Cast aluminum, bolted cover
Drive Shaft SS, 1/2" dia (1.27 cm), 1.5" L
(3.8 cm)
Area Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D;
Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
Compatible Actuators AFB, AFX, AF, NFB, NFX, GMB,
GMX, AMB, AMX (see actuator specification for torque and control details)
Enclosure Rating
NEMA 7CD, NEMA 9EG
Dimensions 16" H x 10" W x 9.5" D
(40.6 x 25.4 x 24.1 cm)
Approvals UL listed File #E171998, CSA
Weight 31 lb (14.1 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Belimo Model ZS-260 explosion proof direct coupled
actuator enclosure is designed for Belimo Models GM,
AFB, LF, and NFB direct-mount style actuators installed in a
hazardous environment
. The ZS-260 Series has NEMA 7 and
NEMA 9 construction for field-mounted actuators with a drive shaft in front or rear depending on application
. The enclosure
is a cast aluminum housing with explosion proof ratings for Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D and Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
. They are for use with any damper with
appropriate linkage.
FEATURES
• Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; Class II, Division 1,
Groups E, F, G
• Full range of approved actuators
EXPLOSION PROOF DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATOR ENCLOSURE (FOR DAMPERS)
ZS-260
SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code-required distance from enclosure to maintain explosion proof rating.
WARNING: This device is not listed for use in areas classified as Group A (acetylene) or Group B (hydrogen).
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ZS-260 Damper actuator enclosure with front or rear drive shaft
(Or
der linkage and actuator separately)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
KG8-K Ball joint, 90° angle, use with 5/16" diameter pushrod 7
KH8-K Crank arm for 3/4" shaft, 3-1/2" length, use with KG8-K ball joint 7
PR-48 5/16" dia., 48" (1.2m) length push rod 8
ZG-109 10-ga galvanized right angle mounting plate, 13"H x 10"W x 6"D (25.4 x 33 x 15.2 cm)

530. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 488fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
EXPLOSION CONDUIT ACCESSORIES
GRT, EYM, PLG50 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
These explosion proof, dust-ignition proof, cast-aluminum
conduit outlet boxes are used with threaded metal conduit
and are furnished with a cover and internal ground screw
.
The
y are suitable for Class I, Div 1 and 2, Groups B,C,D:
Class II, Div 1 and 2, Groups E,F,G; and Class III, Div 1 and 2
.
In Class I, Group B atmospheres
, all conduit runs must have
a sealing fitting field installed adjacent to the enclosure
. The
UL File # is E10444.
CONDUIT OUTLET BOX
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL CONDUIT COVER CONSTRUCTION WEIGHT
SIZE OPENING lb (kg)

GRT50-A 1/2" 3.38" Cast Aluminum 1.4 (0.6)
GRT75-A 3/4" 3.38" Cast Aluminum 1.4 (0.6)
GRT SERIES EXPLOSION PROOF OUTLET BOX
DESCRIPTION
These explosion proof, dust-ignition proof, malleable iron
conduit sealing fittings are used with threaded metal
conduit in horizontal or vertical applications
. Fittings have
female connections with one removable male nipple. They are
suitable for Class I, Div 1 and 2, Groups A,B,C,D: Class II, Div 1 and 2, Groups E,F,G; Class III, Div 1 and 2
. The UL File # is
E10444
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL SIZE TURNING KWIKO® CONSTRUCTION WEIGHT
RADIUS CEMENT lb (kg)
REQUIRED
EYM-50 1/2" 1.06" 1 oz Malleable Iron 0.8 (0.4)
EYM-75 3/4" 1.19" 2 oz Malleable Iron 1.1 (0.5)
EYM-100 1" 1.38" 4 oz Malleable Iron 1.5 (0.7)
DESCRIPTION
These explosion proof, dust-ignition proof, steel close-
up plugs are used with threaded metal conduit. They are
suitable for Class I, Div 1 and 2, Groups A,B,C,D; Class II, Div 1 and 2, Groups E,F
.G; and Class III, Div 1 and 2.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL SIZE CONSTRUCTION WEIGHT
lb (kg)
PLG50R 1/2" Steel, Recessed Head 0.1 (0.05)
PLG75R 3/4" Steel, Recessed Head 0.1 (0.05)
PLG100R 1" Steel, Recessed Head 0.2 (0.1)
CONDUIT SEALING FITTING EYM SERIES
CLOSE-UP PLUGS PLG50 SERIES

531. fifl 489HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
EXPLOSION PROOF CONDUIT ACCESSORIES
AC1A, ACK6F, F01, AC1F01A
KWIKO
®
SEALING CEMENT
MODEL AC1A
When mixed with water, according to label directions, Kwiko
Sealing Cement forms a pourable cement for conduit sealing
fittings
.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AC1A 1 lb (0.5kg), 23 cu in
(377.0 cu cm) volume when set
Each plastic pouch in the Kwiko® Twinpak contains
premeasured Kwiko
®
cement and premeasured water (in an
inner bag)
. Squeeze the pouch to break the inner water bag,
knead the mixture thoroughly and pour. The Kwiko® Twinpak
includes an adequate amount of fiber filler packed separately.
KWIKO
®
TWINPAK SEALING CEMENT
MODEL ACK6F
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A
CK6F
Cement: 1.9 lb * (850g) Fiber:
0.3 lb (0.14kg), 25 cu in
(410 cu cm) volume when set
* Consists of five 6 oz (187g) cement pouc
hes
ORDERING INFORMATION
Fiber Filler is used to prevent cement from leaking while it is in the fluid state
.
KWIKO
®
SEALING CEMENT AND FIBER FILLER KITS
MODEL AC1F01A
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A
C1F01A
Cement: 1 lb (0.5kg)
Fiber: 0.06 lb (0.03kg), 23 cu in
(377.0 cu cm) volume when set
The Model AC1F01A combines Model AC1A cement and
Model F01 filler in a handy kit.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
F01 Quantity: 0.06 lb (0.03kg)

532. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 490fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
HAZARDOUS ATMOSPHERES
FIRE
Oxygen
Fuel
Ignition Source
Automation dealers are continuing to gain business
that was once reserved only for specialty and industrial
contractors. It’s a trend that is accelerating very rapidly,
and the fastest growth is in the areas of hazardous locations
and the monitoring of toxic and combustible gases. Kele is
committed to providing the products and technical support
needed to assist our customers in these important areas.
By way of introduction, this article covers the basics of a
hazardous atmosphere and the equipment used to monitor
combustible gases. See additional articles in Technical
Reference for information relating to principles and
application of intrinsically safe systems, explosion proof
systems, and other available means of dealing with electrical
equipment in hazardous atmospheres.
What Is “Hazardous?”
The widely known Fire Triangle illustration (Figure 1) shows
the three components required to support combustion.
All three must be present, and the methods we use to
prevent explosions are designed to eliminate one of the
three legs of the triangle. What the triangle doesn’t show,
though, is that fuel and oxygen must be mixed in the proper
proportion in order to burn. If the fuel is methane (CH
4)
,
the major component of natural gas, the concentration in
air must be between 5% and 15% or else the mixture will
not ignite. Those of us old enough to have worked with
finicky carburetors on gasoline engines are familiar with this
principle. If the mixture was too lean (not enough fuel) or too
rich (too much fuel), the engine would not start. The same
applies to ignition of any combustible gas in air.
Get the Mixture Right
The lowest concentration of a gas in air that will ignite is its
lower explosive limit (LEL), and the highest concentration
that will ignite is its upper explosive limit (UEL). These values
are also sometimes referred to as the lower and upper
flammability limits (LFL, UFL). Limits for some common
fuels are shown in Table 1 below. If a system is designed
to keep the fuel concentration below the LEL, the fuel leg
is effectively removed from the fire triangle. Under certain
conditions (in an oil field, for example), it is easier to maintain
the concentration above the UEL. In this case, the oxygen
leg is eliminated. In either case, combustion cannot happen.
Silent Sentries
It is often advisable to monitor the concentration
of fuel in air in order to take action or sound an
alarm if it is moving toward an explosive level. The
GDS Series combustible gas monitors are ideal
for this purpose. The GDS-WCH4 provides a
4-20 mA signal over the range of 0% to 100% of the
LEL, and it has an alarm relay set to energize at 25% of
the LEL (an industry standard alarm point). The sensor
responds to a very wide range of combustible gases,
and the outputs (analog and relay) are factory-
calibrated for the gas specified at the time of order.
For example, if the gas is methane (5% LEL), the
GDS-WCH4 will output 4 mA at 0% methane and 20 mA
at 5% methane. The alarm relay will energize at 1.25%
methane. With this device, the alarm relay or an automation
system responding to the analog signal can cause electricity
(source of ignition) to be shut off in an area if the gas
concentration is rising toward the explosive level (LEL). If
the sensor itself must remain energized, an explosion proof
enclosure is available (use SPXCD Series) to prevent it from
becoming the source of ignition itself.
The system described here is based on removing the fuel
leg from the fire triangle, then having an automatic means of
removing the ignition source leg if the fuel begins to return.
This is the first of many ways we will discuss to work safely
with electricity in hazardous locations.
Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) Upper Explosive Limit (UEL)
(Percent by volume in air) (Percent by volume in air)
Methane
Butane
Propane
Ethanol
Gasoline (100 Octane)
Isopropyl alcohol
Ethyl ether
Xylene
Toluene
Hydrogen
Acetylene
5 .0
1 .6
2 .1
3 .3
1 .4
2 .0
1 .9
0 .9
1 .0
4 .0
2 .5
15 .0
8 .4
9 .6
19 .0
7 .8
12 .7
36 .0
7 .0
7 .1
75 .0
85 .0
Note: Multiply percentages by 10,000 to convert to parts per million (ppm)
Fuel
FIGURE 1. FIRE TRIANGLE

533. fifl 491HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
EXPLOSION PROOF CONTROLS
Recap
In hazardous locations there are three elements that must be
present in order to produce an explosion (see the Hazardous
Atmospheres article in Technical Reference for more infor-
mation). The three legs of the fire triangle (fuel, oxygen, and
an ignition source) are required to support combustion
. In
addition, the volume ratio of fuel to air must be within the fuel’s explosive limits, and the ignition source must release sufficient energy to ignite the mixture
. Removing any of these
three elements will eliminate the explosion hazard.
Explosion proof Defined
Perhaps the most common and familiar way to eliminate igni- tion sources from a hazardous location is through the use of explosion proof construction
. An enclosure that is rated explo-
sion proof (NEMA 7, 8, 9, or 10) for a particular hazard group (see Figure 1) is strong enough to withstand the pressure of a worst-case explosion inside itself
. Additionally, it is designed
to vent the resulting hot gases in such a way that they are cooled below the ignition temperature of a worst-case explo- sive mixture outside the box
.
How It Works T
o contain the pressures of an explosion, these enclosures
are made from heavy cast steel or cast aluminum. To cool
escaping gases, flanged enclosures have extra-wide flanges that are ground to a smooth finish and tight tolerance, thus yielding a very thin, long path to the outside as shown in Figure 1
. Enclosures with threaded covers (and threaded
connections to either type of enclosure) produce the same effect by virtue of the long, narrow path through the threads
.
As the hot gases from an internal explosion pass through these long, narrow channels, they give up heat to the metal and their pressure is reduced
. These two effects team up to
lower the temperature of the gases to a safe level before they can come in contact with the atmosphere surrounding the enclosure
.
With flanged enclosures, it is very important to torque the
cover bolts evenly and as close as possible to the rec- ommended value
. Also, the flange surfaces must not be
scratched or marred in any way. Improper torque or damaged
surfaces can allow hot gases to escape and ignite an explo- sive mixture outside the enclosure
. Threaded connections or
covers must engage at least five full threads to maintain the integrity of the system
.
One additional step is needed to control the spread of hot
gases. Conduits entering the enclosure must be sealed within
the code-required distance (usually 18”) of the box to prevent the buildup of pressure within the raceway system or the leakage of combustion products into the room
. If a jacketed
cable passes through a conduit seal, the jacket should be removed within the seal so that the sealing compound can completely surround each insulated conductor
. An alternative
is to seal the cable at the end of the jacket as shown in the illustration
.
Classification So where can these types of enclosures be used? As usual i
n our industry, there are no easy answers! Each explosion
proof enclosure will be listed or labeled for use in a particular environment as defined in the National Electrical Code (NEC) or IEC Standards
. In turn, the hazardous area itself must be
classified according to the same standards. The enclosure
must have a listing that meets or exceeds the classification of the area in which it is to be used
. In the NEC, considerations
are Class, Division, and Group as shown in Table 1. IEC
standards use different code letters from the NEC but gener- ally follow the same logic
.
NEMA Classifications - Marked with Rated Class, Division, and Group
NEMA 7 Class 1 (Gases) Indoor Hazardous Locations, Air-Break
NEMA 8 Class 1 (Gases) Indoor/Outdoor Hazardous Locations, Oil-Immersed
NEMA 9 Class 2 (Dusts) Indoor Hazardous Locations
NEMA 10 Meets U . S . Bureau of Mines Safe ty Requirements
Summary of NEC Classes and Group Examples
A Acetylene
B Hydrogen, Ethy lene Oxide, Propylene Oxide
C Ether, Hydrogen Sulfide, Hydrazine, Nitroethane
D Methane, Acetone, Benzene, Gasoline, Naphtha
E Metallic Dusts (all metals)
F Carbonaceous Dusts
(coal, asphalt, etc .)
G Nonconductive Dusts
(grain, drugs, pesticides,
plastics, dyes, etc . .)
Group Class 1 (Gases) Class 2 (Dusts)
Summary of NEC Divisions
Division 1
Hazard always or frequently present, or may be present duri ng norm al operation,
or high probability of hazard ex isting at the same time as electrical malfunction
Division 2 Hazard norm ally not present, or highly unlikely to be present at the same time
as electrical malfunction, or area adjacent to Division 1
TABLE 1. CLASS, DIVISION, AND GROUP
Cable Seal
Required
Explosion
Inside Box
Hot gases cooled by
long expansion path
through threads
Fibrous Pa cking
Sealing Compound
Conduit Seal
Ground Flange
Joint prov ides long,
narrow path to cool
escaping gases
Jacketed
Cable
FIGURE 1. FLANGED AND THREADED OPENINGS

534. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 492fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
EXPLOSION PROOF CONTROLS
For gases, which comprise the majority of our industry’s
hazards, explosion proof enclosures are readily available
for Class 1, Division 1, Groups C and D
. Enclosures rated
for Group B (hydrogen) can also be found but generally only in small sizes since hydrogen is so easily ignitable and has high explosive energy
. Almost nothing is offered for Group A
(acetylene) environments because of acetylene’s easy igni- tion and tremendous explosive energy
.
Using explosion proof enclosures removes the ignition leg
from the fire triangle in a potentially hazardous location.
Although it is costly and requires care to maintain the sys
-
tem’s integrity, it is an effective method for working with electricity in combustible atmospheres. The Intrinsically Safe
Controls article in the Technical Reference section outlines an alternative method of applying controls to hazardous loca- tions
.
HZLIM
Temperature Controller
1950G
Differential Pressure Switch
30-3003D
Smoke Detector
EPET
Thermostat
AXJ, XJAT
Control Enclosures

535. fifl 493HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
INTRINSICALLY SAFE CONTROLS
One answer for applying controls in hazardous locations
is the use of explosion proof construction to prevent a
source of ignition from coming in contact with a room full
of fuel and air. Strong enclosures with threaded or flanged
covers can confine explosive forces within themselves
and cool the escaping gases enough to prevent ignition of
the surrounding atmosphere. Wouldn’t it be even better to
prevent any explosion at all?
What IS Means
Intrinsically safe systems are designed to be just that
.
Remember that even if the ideally explosive mixture of fuel

and air exists, an ignition source of sufficient energy and duration is required to light it up. Intrinsically safe design limits
the available release of energy in the hazardous area to a level well below the minimum ignition energy of the worst- case gas mixture
. It also maintains this limiting function in the
event of two simultaneous worst-case faults. Since this type
of protection is very failsafe and requires no enclosure main- tenance, most engineers (and property insurance carriers) consider it to be even safer than explosion proof construction
.
Surprisingly, it is usually less expensive to boot! How does it work? First of all, let’s consider a room filled with
hydrogen and air in exactly the best proportion for ignition, about 30% hydrogen by volume (see Figure 1)
. This mixture
takes an instantaneous release of about 20 mJ in order to start burning, or else its temperature must be raised above the autoignition temperature of hydrogen (932°F/500°C)
. For
electrical devices we wish to place in this room, the amount of stored energy and the rate at which it can be released under worst-case conditions must be kept below these critical levels, and the surface temperature (see Table 2 for ratings) must be kept below the autoignition temperature
. If these con-
ditions are met to the satisfaction of UL, FM, CSA, BASEEFA, etc
., then the device may be listed and labeled as intrinsi-
cally safe. This means that with a properly applied safety bar-
rier, cabling, and ground, the device cannot start a fire even under the worst-case conditions
. There is one subset of such
intrinsically safe devices that can be used without a listing or label, although a barrier, proper cabling, and ground are still required
. These are designated “simple apparatus” and are a
group of things that obviously neither produce nor store any energy, such as RTDs, thermistors, switches, and a few oth- ers
. They may be used as if they do have a label, as long as
the operating limitations shown in Table 1 are strictly adhered to
.
Barriers So, if we have an RTD and an intrinsically safe temperature transmitter in a hazardous location, can we wire them up to our controller and power supply in the safe area and turn

them on? Not yet! Three more steps are needed first. While
the devices in the hazardous area cannot ignite the gas mix- ture on their own, the controller and power supply in the safe area may each be capable of transmitting enough energy through the wires into the hazardous area to do the job any- way! An intrinsic safety barrier will prevent this and is required for every intrinsically safe device, except listed self-contained battery-powered units
. Barriers range from simple to sophis-
ticated, but they all use failsafe components to limit the volt- age and current that can be passed through them even in the event of worst-case wiring errors
. For example, suppose
Safe
Area
Fused Zener Barrier
50 mA Fuse 220Ω 120Ω
30V
Zener
Diode
28V
Zener Diode
Hazardous
Area
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
1 .0
0 .1
0 .01
Ignition of Energy (mJ)
Propane - Air, 1 ATM
Volume Concentration (%)
Hydrogen - Air, 1ATM
FIGURE 1. EFFECT OF CONCENTRATION ON IGNITION
ENERGY
FIGURE 2. SIMPLE ZENER DIODE BARRIER

536. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 494fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
INTRINSICALLY SAFE CONTROLS
someone in the safe area accidentally hooks 240 VAC up to
our temperature transmitter signal lines, and one of the lines
is frayed enough at the transmitter to cause an arc at that
voltage
. Without an intrinsic safety barrier, there may not be
enough evidence left to figure out what happened. However,
a barrier rated for the atmosphere, cabling, and its field device will save the day even under these circumstances
.
Figure 2 illustrates a simple zener diode barrier circuit. A high
voltage at the safe- side terminals will cause the zener diode to draw a high current and blow the input fuse
. The series
resistors limit the current to the hazardous side. Barriers are
also rated for how much capacitance and inductance are allowed on the hazardous side
.
Cable Requirements This leads us into the cabling between the hazardous area

device and its barrier. If the cable is very long and has a high
capacitance, it could possibly store enough energy to cause an ignition in the event of a wiring fault
. It must be checked
against the rating of the barrier. If the field device, the trans-
mitter in our example, has a high capacitance, the combined capacitance of the cable and device must be less than the barrier rating
. Cable and device inductance are treated in the
same manner.
IS Grounding The final factor to consider is grounding
. What good is all this
built-in electronic safety if a nearby lightning strike raises the ground potential a couple of thousand volts above the poten- tial of the cable shield in our hazardous area? The resulting arc from the shield to ground can be every bit as effective as a butane lighter in touching off an explosion, so we needn’t have bothered with using intrinsically safe products
. An
intrinsic safety ground, bonded to the earth ground, is the last essential link that makes the system work
. Normally provided
at the barrier location, it keeps the cable shields at or near the same potential as the earth, even as that value moves around during storms
.
Once it is all together, as shown in Figure 3, the benefits of an intrinsically safe system are many
. There is no need to
power systems down and “safe” the atmosphere for mainte- nance
. Calibrate, adjust, even swap out bad parts with the
system turned on and the atmosphere at its worst. A properly
designed system cannot release enough energy to do any damage
.
Applied Voltage 1.2 VAC or VDC
Current Through 100 mA
Power Dissipation 25 mW
Stored Energy 20 µJ
Temperature class: Simple apparatus with surface area
between 20 mm
2
and 10 cm2
are classified as T4 275°F
(135°C) when the matched output power of the barrier
is less than 1
.3W into a 104°F (40°C) ambient. Switches
and other contacts that dissipate no power may be classi- fied T6 185°F (85°C)
.
TABLE 1. OPERATING LIMITS FOR A SIMPLE
APPARATUS (RTDs, THERMISTORS,
SWITCHES, ETC.)
T1 842°F (450°C)
T2 572°F (300°C)
T3 392°F (200°C)
T4 275°F (135°C)
T5 212°F (100°C)
T6 185°F (85°C)
Remember, simply using a barrier does not make the

circuit intrinsically safe
. An intrinsically safe device must
be used with the intrinsically safe barrier.
TABLE 2. INTRINSIC SAFETY TEMPERATURE
CLASSIFICATION
RTD
(Simple Apparatus)
Seal to Prevent
Passage of
Hazardous Gases
Intrinsically
Safe Temperature
Transmitter
4-20 mA
Loop to
Controller
Shield
Intrinsic
Safety
Ground
Intrinsic
Safety
Barrier
Hazardous AreaSafe Area
Shield
FIGURE 3. SPECIAL INTRINSIC SAFETY GROUNDING

537. fifl 495HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
SELECTING INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS
Here is a closer look at assembling the right combination
of parts to produce a properly-coordinated intrinsically safe
(IS)
 system.
Hazardous Area Equipment Selection of an IS device or simple apparatus to be used in a hazardous area is fairly easy. For explosion protection, ensure that the device rating is equal to or better than the classification of the hazardous area (Class, Division, Group, and Temperature Classification under the NEC or Category, Zone, Group, and Temperature Classification under the IEC). Then, as with any device, also make sure that its construction is suitable for any corrosive or other adverse environmental conditions that may be present.
Safety Parameters
Selecting an appropriate intrinsic safety barrier is often even
simpler, since a conscientious supplier of IS solutions, such
as Kele, will usually include a barrier recommendation and
wiring diagram with the product in question. In the absence
of such a recommendation, it is not an insurmountable chore
to select an appropriate barrier under the Entity Concept
described in ISA Technical Report TR-12.2-1995. Under this
concept, the IS device to be applied in a hazardous location
is labeled by its manufacturer with the maximum voltage
(V
max) and current (Imax) that can be applied to it without
degrading its level of safety. The IS device is also labeled
with the amount of internal capacitance (C
i) and inductance
(L
i) that it adds to the circuit.
Barrier Parameters
Each intrinsic safety barrier is listed with the maximum
voltage (V
oc) and current (Isc) that can be passed through
to the hazardous side terminals under fault conditions, and
the maximum capacitance (C
a) and inductance (La) that can
be connected safely to the hazardous side terminals. Finally,
the cable capacitance (C
cable) and inductance (Lcable) can
usually be gleaned from the cable manufacturer’s literature
or technical support line. Or, if the exact cable parameters
cannot be located, the default values recommended in
ANSI/ISA-RP12.6 can be used (C
cable = 60 pF/ft or 197 pF/m
and L
cable = 0.20 µH/ft or 0.67 µH/m).
Matching Them Up
For simple loops (i. e., two-wire IS devices that can function
with one wire grounded), matching up a barrier with
an IS device is as simple as making sure the following
relationships are true:
V
max
must be greater than or equal to Voc
Imax must be greater than or equal to Isc
Ci + Ccable must be less than or equal to Ca
Li + Lcable must be less than or equal to La
Note that this is for a simple system like the one described and that each ungrounded conductor in the hazardous area requires either a separate barrier or a multichannel barrier designed for its purpose. More complex systems need more complex analysis to make sure that no more than V
max can
be developed between any two conductors and that no more than I
max can be driven through any terminal in the
IS device. Usually, the manufacturer or supplier of an IS device requiring more than one ungrounded conductor can provide a barrier recommendation that meets these criteria. Fortunately, most applications in the building automation industry can be handled with a simple loop. If grounding one side of a current loop is a problem, a signal isolator such as the Model DT-13E can be applied in the safe area as a solution.
Example
Consider a need to monitor a ventilator’s vibration level in a
battery room. The project electrical engineer has classified
the area as Class 1, Division 1, Group B, and the hazardous
material in question is hydrogen. Special corrosion
protection is not required, and the cable run from the
transmitter to its barrier will be about 200’ (61m). Hydrogen’s
autoignition temperature is 968°F (520°C), so the vibration
transmitter need only have a temperature classification of
T1 (842°F or 450°C) or lower. The Model 140T is a good
choice. It is rated IS for Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B,
C, and D, and its temperature classification is T6 (less
than 185°F or 85°C). Its entity parameters are shown in
Figure 2. The Model MTL7706+ barrier was chosen since
it is designed for loop-powered 4-20 mA devices, and its
V
oc

and I
sc parameters are less than or equal to the Vmax
and I
max parameters of the 140T. In addition, its C a and La
ratings leave plenty of allowable cable capacitance and
inductance for the length of our run. Refer to Figure 1 on
the following page for the cable calculations related to our
example.
The shorter of these two results is the limiting distance,
so our cable run from the MTL7706+ barrier to the 140T
vibration transmitter must not exceed 717’ (218m). The
estimated 200’ (61m) run in our example is well within
this limit. All that remains is to ensure proper grounding
and installation according to NEC Article 504. As with all
such systems, an IS drawing that shows all relevant entity
parameters must accompany the installation (see Figure 2).
With a little care and a little math, selection of IS barriers
for simple loops can be straightforward. It’s even easier
when the selection is already made for you — look for
the Hazardous Locations section in the Kele Catalog for
engineered intrinsically safe solutions to your automation
interface needs!

538. fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 496fifl
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
8
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
SELECTING INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS
These calculations assume default values of 60 pF and 0.20 µH per foot of cable
(197 pF and 0.67 µH per meter). Lower values are available and may be obtained from
cable manufacturers.
Capacitive cable length limit = (Ca – Ci) / (Cable capacitance per unit length)
= (0.083 µF – 0.04 µF) / (60 pf/ft or 197 pf/m)
= 717’ (218m)
Inductive cable length limit = (La – Li) / (Cable inductance per foot)
= (4.2 mH – 0.0 mH) / (0.20 µH/ft or 0.67 µH/m)
= 21,000’ (6400m)
Hazardous (Classified) Location
Class 1, Division 1, Group B
140T Vibration Transmitter
Entity Pa rameters
V 28V
I 110 mA
C 0.04 fiF
L 0 mH
max
max
i
i
–
+
Non-Hazardous Location
MTL7706+ Intrinsic Safety Barrier
Entity (Safety) Pa rameters
V 28V
I 93 mA
C 0.083 fiF
L 4.2 mH
oc
sc
a
a
4
2
–
+
–+
I.S. Ground3
1
Power Supply
24-35
VDC
4-20 mA
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
4-20 mA
The MTL7706 must not be connected to any device that uses or generates in excess of 250V rms or DC
unless it has been determined that the voltage has been adequately isolated from the barrier.
The installation must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code
®, NFPA 70, Article 504, and
ANSI/ISA-RP12.6.
The MTL7706+ must be connected to a suitable ground electrode per NFPA 70, Article 504. The resistance of
the ground path must be less than 1=.
T otal interconnecting cable capacitance must be limited to 0.043 µF and inductance limited to 4.2 mH.
1
2
3
4
Notes:
FIGURE 1. CABLE LIMIT CALCULATION
FIGURE 2. INTRINSIC SAFETY CONTROL DRAWING

539. HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
GEH2 | p. 515
HW30K | p. 530
KH2 | p. 509 HS20K | p. 513
HW31K | p. 532SRH12 | p. 525
Kele Carries Nine Brands to Meet Your Sensing Needs.

540. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
HUMIDITY
A/RH2 | p. 519
HS20K | p. 513
SRH | p. 525
HUMIDITY
Humidistats
VH7200 Series — 3% Humidistats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
TDC Series — 5% Duct Mount Humidistat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
TCY-BH Series — 5%
Wall Mount Humidistat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
TCI Series — 3%
Wall and Duct Proportional Controller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
EE46 — Condensation Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
HC-101, HC-201 — Room and Duct Humidistats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
W43A-14 — Room Humidistat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
RH Transmitters A/RH1 Series — A
utomation Components BAS/HVAC RH Transmitters
. . . . . 497
HMW90 Series — W
all-Mounted Humicap
®
Humidity and Temperature Transmitter
.
499
E31 Series — Multifunction Humidity/T
emperature Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . 501
HF5 Series — 1% Room and Duct Multi-P
arameter Humidity and
Temperature Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
EE23 Series — Room or Duct Humidity
, Temperature, Dew Point
Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
HT829, HT839 — 1% and 2%
Wall, Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters
. . . . 507
H_20K Series — 2%
Wall, Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . . 511
HS20K Series — 2% Room Humidity
Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
GEH2 Series — 2%
Wall, Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . . 515
HMD60, HMD70, and HMK41K — 2% Duct and OSA Humidity
T
ransmitters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
A/RH2 Series — 2%
Wall, Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . . 519
HT2D, HT2O, HT2S — 2%
Wall, Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters
. . . . . . 521
BA/H200 Series — 2%
Wall, Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . 523
SRH12 Series — 2%
Wall, Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . 525
EHRH — 2%
Waterproof / Washdown Humidity Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
KH3 Series — 3% Room, Duct, and OSA Humidity
Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . . 528
H_30K Series — 3%
Wall, Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . . 530
HD31K, HO31K, HW31K — 3% Humidity
Transmitter & Optional Temperature
Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
HMW80 Series — 3% Room Humidity and
Temperature Transmitter
. . . . . . . 534
HMD42, HMD53 — 3% Duct Humidity and
Temperature Transmitter
. . . . . . . 536
A/RH3 Series — 3% Room, Duct, and OSA Humidity
Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . 538
BA/H300 Series — 3% Room, Duct, and OSA Humidity
Transmitters
. . . . . . . 540
SRH13 Series — 3%Room, Duct, and OSA Humidity
Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . 542
GEH3 Series — 3% Room, Duct and OSA Humidity
Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . 543
KH5 Series — 5% Room, Duct, and OSA Humidity
Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . . 545
GEH5 Series — 5% Room, Duct, and OSA Humidity
Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . 547
A/RH5 Series — 5% Room, Duct, and OSA Humidity
Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . 549
SRH15 Series — 5% Room, Duct, and OSA Humidity
Transmitters
. . . . . . . . 551
Specialty Transmitters KH2 Series — 2%
Wall, Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
DP4A, EN4A, WB4A — De
w Point, Enthalpy & Wet Bulb Transmitters
. . . . . . 552
HMD/S/W8XD/H/W Series — De
w Point, Enthalpy and Wet Bulb
Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
9002 — Infr
ared Dew Point & Grains Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
A21 — Outdoor Aspir
ated Humidity / Temperature Housing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

541. 497HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
AUTOMATION COMPONENTS BAS/HVAC RH TRANSMITTERS
A/RH1 SERIES
Supply Voltage 12-40 VDC or 24 VAC, selectable
Accuracy ±1% @ 77°F (25°C) over a
selectable 20% span from 50 to 70%,
60 to 80%, or 70 to 90% RH
Thermal Effect <0.005% per °F (<0.01 per °C)
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC
(field selectable)
Measurement Range 0% to 100%
Sensing Technology Capacitive
Operating Temperature Room
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Duct/OSA -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Enclosure Room
Plastic Delta-style
Duct/OSA Plastic weatherproof
Dimensions Room
3.8"H x 2.8"W x 0.9"D
(9.8 x 7 x 2.3 cm)
Duct 3.6" (9 cm) Ø head with 8.15"L
(20 cm) probe 0.75” (1.9 cm) Ø
OSA 3.6" (9 cm) Ø head with 3.0"L
(7.6 cm) probe 1.4" (3.6 cm) Ø
Weight Room
0.22 lb (0.1 kg)
Duct 1.2 lb (0.54 kg)
OSA 0.6 lb (0.27 kg)
Wall Pack 0.22 lb (0.1 kg)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
Model A/RH1 Relative Humidity Transmitters provide RH
readings at ±1% accuracy using a ceramic resistive sensor
offering a 20% to 90% operating range
. The transmitters
come in wall, duct, and OSA mounting styles. They have
multiple field-selectable outputs, including 4-20 mA, 0-10V, and 0-5V signals
. The supply power is also selectable as 24
VDC or 24 VAC.
FEA
TURES
•
Accuracy of ±1%
• Duct and OSA twist-off weatherproof housing
• 24 VDC or 24 VAC power (field-selectable)
• 4-20 mA, 0-10V, or 0-5V signal (field-selectable)
• Field-calibratable
• Optional temperature sensor
SPECIFICATIONS
A/RH1-R
A/RH1-SP
A/RH1-O
A/RH1-D
WIRING
Output Selection Switches (SW 1)
4-20 mA Output
0-10 VDC Output
0-5 VDC Output
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
2 Wire Current Output Signal
3 Wire Current Output Signal
Voltage Output Signal
DC Supply Voltage
4-20 mA Output
Supply Ground / Signal Common
AC or DC Supply Voltage
0-10 or 0-5 VDC Output Signal
4-20 mA Output
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
AC or DC Supply Voltage
Supply Ground / Signal Common
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
Output Selection Switches (SW 1)
4-20 mA Output
0-10 VDC Output
0-5 VDC Output
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
2 Wire Current Output Signal
3 Wire Current Output Signal
Voltage Output Signal
DC Supply Voltage
4-20 mA Output
Supply Ground / Signal Common
AC or DC Supply Voltage
0-10 or 0-5 VDC Output Signal
4-20 mA Output
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
AC or DC Supply Voltage
Supply Ground / Signal Common
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT

542. HUMIDITY 498HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
AUTOMATION COMPONENTS BAS/HVAC RH TRANSMITTERS
A/RH1 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: A/RH1- (5070) - AN-R Room
humidity transmitter with
1% accuracy over 50 to 70%
r ange and Type III 10,000
flfithermistor
A/RH1 RAN --(5070)-
MODEL DESCRIPTION A/RH1 1% accuracy humidity transmitter (5070) 20% Range 50 to 70%
(6080) 20% Range 60 to 80%
(7090) 20% Range 70 to 90%
AN Type III 10,000flfithermistor
CP Type II 10,000flfithermistor
20K 20,000flfithermistor
100 100flfi385 PT RTD
IK 1,000flfi385 PT RT D

R Room
D Duct
O Outside air
SP W all plate
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
2.25
(5.7)
7.15
(18.2)
1.07
(2.7)
Stainless
Plate
Duct
0.65 (1.7)
0.75 (1.9)
80 Micron Sintered
Stainless Steel Filter
0.75 (1.9)
0.18
(0.5)
O.D. Ref
0.46
(1.2)
0.58
(1.5)
Outside
2.69
(6.8)
0.86 (2.2)
4.68 (11.9)
3.95 (10.0)
0.75 (1.9)
2.25 (5.7)
(4) PG11/0.5" (1.27) NPT
Knockouts
4.24 (10.8)
3.60 (9.1)
6.10
(15.5)
3.00 (7.6)
1.40 (3.6)
1.00
(2.5)
PG11 Watertight Fitting
(Cable Dia. 0.12 to 0.28"/
0.3 to 0.7 cm)
Plastic Cover fo r
Stainless Steel Filter to
Protect Sensor during
Wash Down
Stainless Plate
4.5
(1.4)
0.75
(1.9)
2.75 (7.0)
1.40
(3.6)
Plastic
Washer
80 Micron
Stainless
Steel
Sintered
FIlter
2.70
(6.9)
1.00
(2.5)
in
(cm)
2.25 (5.7)
2.75
(7.0)
3.84
(9.8)
Room
3.84 (9.8)0.89 (2.3)
0.79
(2.0)
0.60
(1.5)
0.92
(2.3)
4.51
(11.5)
DIMENSIONS

543. 499HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
WALL-MOUNTED HUMICAP
®
HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
HMW90 SERIES
Accuracy ±1.7% RH @ 50° to 104°F
(10° to 40°C) from 0 to 90% RH
Stability ±0.5% RH/year
Supply Voltage
HMW92 10 to 28 VDC
HMW93 18 to 35 VDC, 24 VAC ±20%,
50/60 Hz
Signal Output HMW92
4-20 mA
HMW93 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC
Maximum Output Impedance mA
HMW92
500Ω
Minimum Output
Impedance VDC HMW93
10 kΩ minimum
Measurement Range 0 to 100% RH, 23° to 131°F
(-5° to 55°C)
Sensing Technology HUMICAP
®
180R
Operating Temperature 23° to 131°F (-5° to 55°C)
Enclosure ABS/PC
Enclosure Rating IP30, UL-V0 approved
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Dimensions 5.22"H X 3.19"W X 1.18"D
(13.27 X 8.1 X 3.0 cm)
Approvals CE
Weight 0.34 lb (0.16 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Wall-Mounted Vaisala HMW90 Series HUMICAP
®

Humidity and Temperature Transmitters measure the
relative humidity and temperature of indoor environments,
where high accuracy, stability, and reliable operation are
required
. The HMW90 Series includes models for both
current and voltage output. These flexible transmitters offer a
variety of options and features. Transmitters are available with
an optional display. The HMW90 Series humidity transmitters
are quick and easy to install. The wiring is connected secured
to the wall through the back plate and the electronics with the sensors can then be easily snapped on
. Dip switches
for transmitter configuration can be accessed when the enclosure is open
.
FEATURES
• Easy installation, configuration and field adjustment
• ±1.7% accuracy
• Optional relay (HMW93 only)
• NIST calibration certificate included
• Long term stability with HUMICAP
®
180R sensor
APPLICA
TION
•
Museums and archive facilities
• Production and warehouse
• facilities
SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS
29.8
47.5
5
9
59.5
34
33.5
30.5
27
Ø 4.4
HMW90
Series
132.7
30
81
HMW90 Series Dimensions HMW90 Series Mounting Base Dimensions
• Data centers
• Laboratories
• Testing environments

544. HUMIDITY 500HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HMW92 Humidity and Temperature transmitters with two current outputs
HMW92D Humidity and Temperature transmitters with two current outputs, with visible display
HMW93 Humidity and Temperature transmitters with two voltage outputs
HMW93D Humidity and Temperature transmitters with two voltage outputs, with visible display
WALL-MOUNTED HUMICAP
®
HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
HMW90 SERIES
WIRING
-T -RH+T +RH
Power supply
10 ... 28 VDC
R
L = 0 ... 600 Ω
Power supply 10 ... 28 VDC R
L
 = 0 ... 600 Ω
mA
mA
-
+
-
+
-T -RH+T +RH
mA
mA
Power supply 10 ... 28 VDC R
L
 = 0 ... 600 Ω
-
+
-T -Vs+T +Vs
Power supply 18 ... 35 VDC or 24 VAC ±20%  R
L = 10 kΩ min.
-RH+RH
VV
Relay
max. 50 VDC
500 mA
-
+
-T -Vs+T +Vs
Power supply
18 ... 35 VDC
or 24VAC ±20%
R
L
 = 10 kΩ min.
-RH+RH
V
V
Relay
-
+
HMW92 Wiring (2 Power Supplies) HMW92 (Three-wire connection)
HMW93 Wiring HMW93 (Three-wire connection)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
HTM10 HMW90 series replacement sensor element
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

545. 501HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
in
(cm) 2.6
(6.7)
5.3 (13.5)
3.5
(9.0)
6.4 (16.3)
2.6
(6.7)
5.3 (13.5)
3.5
(9.0)
Plastic enclosure
Metal enclosure
1
Serial data output2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Analog output
Supply
RxD/B-
TxD/A+
GNDS er
Out2
Out1
GND
GND
V+
Power Supply
8-35 VDC
12-30VAC
4-20 mA + 4-20 mA +
-
MULTIFUNCTION HUMIDITY/TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
E31 SERIES
Accuracy
Humidity ±1.3% RH, <90% RH, 5° to 104°F
(-15° to 40°C)
Temperature ±0.27°F (±0.14°C) ±0.06
Supply Voltage
0-5/10 VDC:
8-35 VDC, 40 mA; 12-30 VAC,
1.0 VA
4- 20 mA: 8-35 VDC, 80 mA; 12-30 VAC,
1.9 VA
Signal Output Field selectable: 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA,
(500Ω max load), 0-5 V, or 0-10 V,
Communication Serial interface RS232C
Measurement Range Humidity
0 to 100% RH
Temperature -40° to 120°F (-40° to 48.9°C)
Sensing Technology Humidity
Capacitive
Temperature Pt1000Ω RTD, 385 curve
Sensor Protection Stainless steel sintered filter
Display Type Optional, two line, alphanumeric
LCD, English units
Display Dewpoint
-40° to 120°F (-40° to 48.9°C)
Enthalpy 0-64 Btu/lb (0 to 400 kJ/kg)
Wetbulb 0° to 100°F (-17.8° to 37.8°C)
Operating Temperature
Display: -40° to 140°F
(-40° to 60°C)
No Display -4° to 122°F (-20° to 50°C)
Enclosure NEMA 4, IP65
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The E+E E31 Series Multifunction Humidity/Temperature
Transmitters offer precise measurement of humidity and
temperature with field selectable analog outputs for both
parameters
. The unit can also be ordered with enthalpy, dew
point, and wet bulb. Two-point calibration can be performed
using push-buttons on the circuit board-no need for dismounting which makes it ideal for regulatory environments
.
Built-in LEDs indicate tr
ansmitter status and errors
. An
optional displa
y is available for local indication of measured
values and minimum and maximum values
.
FEATURES
• Accuracy of ±1.3% RH
• Derived values for dew point, enthalpy, and wet bulb
• Simple calibration
• Stainless steel sintered filter
• Optional display available
• Dual output signals
• RS232 output
SPECIFICATIONS
WIRING
DIMENSIONS

546. HUMIDITY 502HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
MULTIFUNCTION HUMIDITY/TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
E31 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODELDESCRIPTION
E31*Humidity and temperature transmitter, 8 to 35 VDC, 12 to 30 VAC
HOUSING
MHumidity and temperature transmitter with metal housing
PHumidity and temperature transmitter with polycarbonate housing
APPLICATION
AWall mount
BDuct mount
DWall mount with remote sensing probe and 6.6' (2m) cable
PROBE LENGTH (MODEL “B” ONLY)
5Probe length, 7.9" (200 mm)
6Probe length, 15.8" (400 mm)
DISPLAY
-No display
LCD displayD
ALARM OUTPUT
-No alarm  relay
SWith alarm relay
Example: E31MA5DS EE31 duct humidity and temperature transmitter with polycarbonate housing, wall
mount, probe length, 7.9", LCD display, with alarm relay.
* Each E31 is shipped with setup software and required cable.
3) Scaling (T - temperature,
Td - dew point
, Tf - frost point)
2) Output Signals
2) - 0 to 5 VDC
3) - 0 to 10 VDC
Chart 1 Chart 2 Chart 3
Physical Parameters
A) - RH
05 0° to 100°B) - temperature
12 -40° to 120°C) - dew point
E) - wet bulb
I) - specific enthalpy
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
HA010502 EE23/EE31 Radiation Shield
HA011101 1/2" conduit connector

547. 503HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Terminals Description
K1-2: H-OUT Relative humidity or dew point (+) OUT-1
K1-1: V+ Power supply: 10…28 VDC (+)
Terminals Description
K2-2: T-OUT Temperature output (+) OUT-2
K2-1: V+ Power supply: 10…28 VDC (+)
Note: Connect the + of the power supply to only one of the V+ terminals.
The two terminals marked V+ are internally connected.
2
K2
1 V +
T-OUT
2
K1
1 V + H-OUT
1% ROOM AND DUCT MULTI-PARAMETER HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE
TRANSMITTER
HF5 SERIES
Supply Voltage
HF52
10 to 28 VDC, 40 mA
HF53 15 to 40 VDC, 50 mA; 12 to 28 VAC,
1.2 VA
Accuracy ±0.8% RH @ 73°F (23°C) from
5% to 95% RH

Stability
0.5% drift per year
Repeatability 0.3% RH
Long Term Stability <1% RH/year
Response Time RH: Typically 10 seconds for 63 % of
a jump 35 to 80 %RH
(1 m/sec air flow at sensor)
Temperature: Typically 4 seconds for 63 % of a
change from 23 to 80 °C
(1 m/sec air flow at sensor)
Signal Output 4-20 mA
Maximum Output Impedance
500Ω
Minimum Output Impedance
1000Ω
Range
Humidity 0-100%
Temperature -148° to 392°F (-100° to 200°C)
Display Optional: LCD, 1 or 2 decimals
Operating Humidity 0 to 100% non-condensing
Operating Temperature -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Enclosure Rating ABS/IP65 conforms to UL94-HB
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals/ M16 cable gland or
½" conduit adapter
Dimensions
Case 5.1"H x 5.1"W x 1.8"D
(13 x 13 x 4.5 cm)
Wall Plate 0.6" Ø x 3.5"L (1.5 x 9 cm)
Duct Probe 0.6" Ø x 8.3"L (1.5 x 21 cm)
Approvals CE/EMC: EMC Directive 2004/108/
EC
Weight 1 lb (0.45 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Rotronic HF5 Series High Performance Multi
Parameter Humidity and Temperature Transmitters
are ideal for all applications where exact measurement of
humidity, enthalpy, dry bulb, wet bulb, temperatures plus other
psychrometric parameters are critical
. This high performance
transmitter using air chip technology accurately measures relative humidity to within ±0
.8% RH. The HydroClip2 probe
can be individually calibrated and adjusted to increase measurement precision where you need it the most
. The
HF5 Series is available in a duct mount or wall mount configuration
. This unit can be factory configured or software
is available for field configuration.
FEA
TURES
•
Interchangeable probe
• Calculates all psychrometric values
• Automatic sensor and drift compensation
• Optional DIN rail mounting
• Field configurable with software
APPLICATION
The HF5 is ideal for high accuracy HVAC applications,
building management systems, museums, libraries,
environmental monitoring systems
. The HF5 Series measures
dew point, wet bulb, enthalpy, specific humidity, absolute humidity and mixing ratio
.
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
HydroClip2
The new HygroClip2 is available in various formats: from a
simple plug-in probe for handheld instruments and data loggers
to the highly developed cable probes for high temperature and
other special applications
. As standard, they all have high ac-
curacy, which can be increased further by specific adjustments within our patented AirChip, making every HygroClip2 a high- end product for all applications
.
HFxxW HF5xxD

548. HUMIDITY 504HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
1% ROOM AND DUCT MULTI-PARAMETER HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE
TRANSMITTER
HF5 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HF520 2-wire (loop powered), 4-20 mA
HF532 3-wire, 4-20 mA
HF534 3-wire, 0-5 V
HF535 3-wire, 0-10 V
INSTALLATION/MOUNTING
DDuct mount (through wall)
WWall mount
PSYCHROMETRIC PARAMETERS
BHumidity (0 to 100 %RH) and Temperature - see range below
ATemperature & Dew / Frost point - see range below
CTemperature & Wet Bulb temperature (Tw) - see range below
DTemperature & Enthalpy (H) - see range below
OUTPUT RANGES
6X 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C)
OPTIONAL KEYPAD AND DISPLAY
D Keypad and display (HF52: no backlight – HF53: w. backlight)
X No keypad and display
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
31x ½" conduit adapter (horizontal mounting)
41x ½" conduit adapter (vertical mounting - type D w/o display)
DEWPOINT, WETBULB OR ENTHALPY RANGES (optional)
4X0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C)
S Hydroclip standard climate probe
Example: HF520DB6XD4S 2 Wire psychrometric transmitter, duct mount, humidity and temperature
outputs, display and HydroClip Standard Climate probe.
HF520 6XBD D 4 S
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994

549. 505HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ROOM OR DUCT HUMIDITY, TEMPERATURE, DEW POINT TRANSMITTER
EE23 SERIES
Accuracy
Humidity ±1.3%, ≤90% RH, 5° to 104°F
(-15° to 40°C)
Temperature ±0.27°F (±0.14°C)
Hysteresis < 2% RH
Supply Voltage
0-5 VDC: 10.5 - 35 VDC, 35 mA;
12 - 28 VAC, 0.8 VA
0-10 VDC: 15 - 35 VDC, 35 mA;
15 - 28 VAC, 1.4 VA
4-20 mA: 15 to 35 VDC, 60 mA;
15 to 28 VAC, 2.6 VA
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC
Maximum Output
Impedance 470Ω
Minimum Output Impedance
5000Ω
Measurement Range Humdity: 0-100%
Sensing Technology Humidity: Capacitive, HC1000-200
Temperature: 1000Ω Platinum
(class A, DIN EN 60751)
Sensor Protection sintered stainless steel filter
Operating Temperature
Non-display -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
With display -22° to 140°F (-30° to 60°C)
Display LCD, English units
Enclosure Polycarbonate or Aluminum alloy
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4 (IP65)
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals maximum size wire
AWG 16 (1.5 mm2)
Approvals CE
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The E+E EE23 series Humidity and Temperature
Transmitter has been developed for high-precision
measurement of relative humidity and temperature
.
EE23 Series transmitters are available for wall and duct
mounting with or without the snap inmounting kit, which allows a quick and easy exchange of the transmitter
. Outputs
can be selected betw
een voltage and current
.
A special protection coating for the sensing element permits
the permanent use in very polluted environments.
FEATURES
• Humidity and temperature calibration
• NEMA 4 housing
• Stainless steel sintered filter
• Optional alarm switch
• Optional display
APPLICATION
• Green houses
• Storage rooms
• Swimming halls
• Meteorology
SPECIFICATIONS
Output and Supply
with active temperature output with passive temperature output
Analog
outputs
Analog
output
Alarm Output
WIRING
Plastic:
Metal: 3.5 (9.0)
Both metal and plastic casings are 2.6" (6.7 cm) deep
2.6
(6.7)
5.3 (13.5)in
(cm)
3.5
(9.0)
DIMENSIONS

550. HUMIDITY 506HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ROOM OR DUCT HUMIDITY, TEMPERATURE, DEW POINT TRANSMITTER
EE23 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
EE23 Humidity and temperature transmitter, 8 to 35 VDC, 12 to 30 VAC
HOUSING
MHumidity and temperature transmitter with metal housing
PHumidity and temperature transmitter with polycarbonate housing
APPLICATION
AWall mount
BDuct mount
PROBE LENGTH (MODEL “B” ONLY)
6 Duct probe length, 15.8" (40.0 cm)
5 Duct probe length, 7.9" (20.0 cm)
DISPLAY
– No display
D LCD display
ALARM OUTPUT
–No alarm relay
SWith alarm relay
RH and temperatureAB
OUTPUT
20-5 VDC
30-10 VDC
64-20 mA
RANGE FOR TEMPERATURE
050° to 100°F (-17° to 37.8°C)
10-20° to 120°F (-28.9° to 48.9°C)
12-40° to 120°F (-40° to 48.9°C)
1520° to 120°F (-6.7° to 48.9°C)
Example: EE223PB6DSAB212 EE23 duct humidity and temperature transmitter with
plastic case, 15.8" (40.0 cm) probe, LCD display, 0-5 VDC outputs for RH
and temperature (0-100%; -40° to 120°F (-40° to 120°C)
EE23
6XBP DSAB212
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
HA010502 EE23/EE31 Radiation Shield
HA010502 1/2" conduit connector

551. 507HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Duct
Housing
(D)
Room
Housing
(S)
OSA / Wall
Housing
(O)
1% AND 2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
HT829, HT839
Accuracy
1% units ±1% from 10% to 80% RH
2% units ±2% from 0% to 90% RH
Time Constant 60 sec in slow-moving air
Supply Voltage 9.4 VDC min to 35 VDC max
Signal Output Two-wire, 4-20 mA over 0% to 100%
RH and temperature (HT839)
Maximum Output
Impedance 730Ω @ 24 VDC (Power supply - 9.4)
/ 0.02 A = Ω
Sensing Technology Capacitive monolithic IC (Humidity)
Sensor Protection Sintered filter (Humidity)
Calibration One-point adjustment
Adjustments Zero, noninteracting
Operating Temperature
Room -10° to 150°F (-23° to 66°C)
Duct/OSA -10° to 185°F (-23° to 85°C),
Wiring Terminations Nonpolar terminals, connect either
way (22-14 AWG wire)
Dimensions
Room 4.5"H x 2.8"W x 1.5"D
(11 x 7 x 4 cm)
Duct 4.6"L x 2.9"W x 2.3"D
(22 x 7.3 x 5.7 cm), 4.6" (11.8 cm)
probe length 0.38" (0.95 cm) Ø
OSA 10.2"L x 2.7"W x 2.3"D
(26x 7 x 5.7 cm), 8" (20 cm) probe
length 1.25" (3.2 cm) Ø
Weight
Room 0.3 lb (0.13 kg)
Duct 1.1 lb (0.5 kg)
OSA 1.16 lb (0.53 kg)
Warranty 3 years
DESCRIPTION
The Minco Model HT829 Relative Humidity Transmitter
measures 0% to 100% RH over a range of -10° to 185°F
(-23° to 85°C)
. The standard two-wire, 4-20 mA output
provides low-cost space, duct, and outdoor monitoring or process and industrial building control
. A temperature
sensor built into the integrated circuit provides temperature compensation over the full temperature range
.The HT839
Series has temperature transmitter output.
FEATURES
• Temperature-compensated IC sensor
• One-point field calibration, RH or temperature
• Weatherproof housing for OSA and duct
• 1% or 2% RH accuracy
• Sintered filter
24VDC
RH
4-20mA
Signal
S
Z
*Non-polar connections
Hum*
Hum
+
-
+
–
24VDC
RH Signal
4-20mA
**Temp Signal
4-20mA
S
H
Hum*
Hum
Temp*
Temp
* Non-polar connections
** Need humidity connection
to output temperature
signal properly
T
Z SZ
+-
–
+
–
+
WIRING — HT829, RH ONLY WIRING — HT839, RH AND TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
FM
APPROVED

552. HUMIDITY 508HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
1% AND 2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
HT829, HT839
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
Example: HT839D1S2A 2% RH and temperature duct transmitter with 8" probe,
temperature ranged for 20°/120°F
HT839 S21D A
HT829 Relative humidity transmitter only
HT839 Relative humidity transmitter and temperature transmitter
D Duct mount, weather resistant box, 8" probe
O Outside air mounting, weather resistant box with weather shield
S Space room/off ice mounting
1 4-20 mA DC output
N1 1% RH from 10/80% @ 25°C, temperature matched at 0°C with NIST certificate
N2 2% accuracy from 0/90% @ 25°C, temperature matched at 0°C with NIST certificate
S2 2% accuracy from 0/90% @ 25°C, no calibration data
EN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-20°/140°F) or (-29°/60°C) (HT839 only)
S Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°F) or (-18°/38°C) (HT839 only)
A Range codes per Minco letter ranges (20°/120°F) or (-7°/49°C) (HT839 only)
BI Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/130°F) or (-1°/54°C) (HT839 only)
N Range codes per Minco letter ranges (32°/122°F) or (0°/50°C) (HT839 only)
H Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40°/90°F) or (4°/32°C) (HT839 only)
-- Range codes per Minco letter ranges in the catalog (HT839 only)
SX Special range on next item line, -xxx/-yyyE, i.e., -20°/120°F (HT839 only)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP
A-1.2
Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

553. 509HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
KH2 SERIES
Accuracy 2% RH @ 73°F (23°C) from 5% to
90%;
(0-5% & 90%-100%) add 3%
Drift
<±0.5% per year
Thermal Effect 0.05% / °F
Supply Voltage 9.5-28 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA two-wire, loop-powered
Maximum Output
Impedance 725Ω @ 24 VDC
(Supply voltage - 9.5 VDC) / 0.02
Sensing Technology Precon HS-2000 capacitive
Operating Humidity 0-100% Non-condensing
Operating Temperature -20° to 158°F (-29° to 70°C)
Enclosure

KHR
White plastic, UL94HB
KHD Metal handy box
KHO NEMA 3R plastic box
Probe
Duct Probe: 1/2" aluminum tube with
expanded Teflon® filter
OSA Probe: 1/2" aluminum tube with 40
micron stainless steel sintered filter
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Weight (Without Options) KHR
0.21 lb (0.09 kg)
KHD 1.2 lb (0.59 kg)
KHO 0.52 lb (0.24 kg)
Approvals RoHS
Warranty 18 months
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KHR, KHD, and KHO Series Humidity Transmitters
are specifically designed for use in HVAC/BAS applications. These
instruments measure relative humidity from 0% to 100%. The
standard two-wire, 4-20 mA output provides low-cost humidity monitoring for building control
. The RH transmitters are available with
thermistor or RTD temperature sensors. They come in room (KHR),
duct (KHD), and OSA (KHO) mounting styles.
FEATURES
• Calibration-free interchangeable sensors
• Twelve-point computerized calibration
• ±2% accuracy (5% to 95% RH)
• Replaceable sensor probe (no re-calibration)
• No need to remove box to replace sensor probe
• Attractive room enclosure design
• Two-wire, 4-20 mA output, 0% to 100% RH
OPERATION
The transmitter converts the relative humidity into a 4-20 mA
signal with the latest microprocessor capacitive design. Multipoint
f
actoryautomated calibration improves accuracy and repeatability
.
The optional temper
ature sensors, thermistor or RTD, offer direct
connections to most automation systems
.
SPECIFICATIONS
KHR
WIRING
KHD
KHO
RH
LOOP
+V
J5
J4
SENSOR
Temperature
sensor output to
BAS Controller
12-28
VDC
4-20mA
RH
Signal
24 VDC
Power
Supply

554. HUMIDITY 510HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
2.75
(6.98)
PC Board Clips
Plug-in Replaceable Sensor
FrontBack Plate Side
0.94
(2.38)
4.5
(11.43)
3.31
(8.40)
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES
HSR Replacement 2% humidity sensor for wall
HSD Replacement 2% humidity sensor
HSO Replacement 2% humidity sensor
2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
KH2 SERIES
3.30
(8.38)
2.50 (6.35)
4.10 (10.4)
1/2" Conduit Hole*
(face down)
1/2" Conduit Hole*
(face down)
* Must fa ce down
to maintain wa ter-
tight integrity
Removeable
Sensor Cover
Mounting Tabs (2
)
1.30 (3.30)
3.20 (8.12)
2.50
(6.35)
Mounting Box
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KHD2 Duct mounted 2% humidity transmitter
KHO2 Outside air 2% humidity transmitter
KHR2 Wall mounted room/space 2% humidity transmitter
    OPTIONAL TEMPERATURE RANGES
T3 10,000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III
T21 2252fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II
T22 3000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II
T24 10,000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II
T27 100,000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II
T42 20,000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type IV
T81 100fi  RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C), 385 platinum curve
T85 1000fi RTD @32˚F (0˚C), 385 platinum curve
T91 1000fi RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C), 375 platinum curve 
OPTIONS
CL1 Custom one  color logo, KHR2 only
WP Weatherproof housing, KHD2 only 
XJ1 RJ11 externally-accessible communication jack (CCRJ11AD required), KHR2 only
XJ2 Internal RJ11 communication jack, KHR2 only
XLED LED indicator lamp 24V AC/DC green, KHR2 only
XMB Momentary pushbutton switch, jumpered across sensor or pot (JP1), KHR2 only
Example: KHD2-T3-WP  Duct mounted 2% humidity transmitter with
10,000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III and weatherproof housing 
KHD2 T3 WP
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

555. 511HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
H_20K SERIES
Accuracy 2% RH @ 73°F (23°C) from 5% to
90% RH;
(0-5% & 90%-100%) add 3%

Stability
0.5% drift per year
Thermal Effect 0.05% per °F
Supply Voltage 9.5-28 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA, thermistor, RTD
Maximum Output Impedance
725Ω @ 24VDC
(Supply voltage - 9.5V) / 0.02
Measurement Range
RH 0-100%

Temperature
-20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
(see ordering information)
Sensor Protection (Duct and OSA)
Sintered filter
Operating Humidity 0-100% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature -20° to 158°F (-29° to 70°C)
Enclosure Room
White plastic
Duct Weather resistant cast aluminum
Wiring Terminations Terminal block (22 to 16 AWG)
Weight Room
0.3 lb (0.09 kg)
Duct 1.14 lb (0.52 kg)
OSA 1.2 lb (0.54 kg)
Approvals RoHs
Warranty 1.5 year
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Series H_20K Humidity Transmitters have been
specifically designed for use in HVAC/BAS applications.
These instr
uments measure relative humidity from 5% to
90% RH with 2% accuracy and produce a two wire 4-20 mA linear output. All are available with an optional passive RTD or
thermistor. The duct and OSA versions may also be fitted with
a 4-20mA temperature transmitter.
FEATURES
• 2% accuracy (5% to 90%)
• Two-wire, 4-20 mA RH output
• Optional temperature thermistor
• Optional temperature RTD
• Optional temperature 4-20mA (duct or OSA)
APPLICATION
The temperature compensated circuitry converts the relative
humidity into a 4-20 mA signal. The optional temperature
sensors, RTDs or thermistors, offer direct connection to most automation systems
. On duct and OSA units, an optional 4-20
mA temperature transmitter may also be employed and is rangeable from -30° to 250°F (-34° to 121°C)
.
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
HW20K
4.50
(11.43)
3.23
(8.20)
in
(cm)
2.875
(7.3)
4.625
(11.7)
2.13
(5.4)
7.0
(17.8)
0.25
(0.64)
HD20K
Foam gasket
5.25
(13.3)
4.43
(11.3)
2.88
(7.30)
2.125
(5.4)
1.25
(3.18)
HO20K

556. HUMIDITY 512HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
H_20K SERIES
Duct and OSA with TT option only
Temperature
4-20 mA
signal
Power supply
24 VDC
Humidity
4-20 mA
signal
T
V+
RH
Room, Duct, OSA (RH or RH-T)
Humidity
4-20 mA
signal
T
V+
Optional
temperature
sensor
RH
Power Supply
24 VDC
WIRING FOR RH ONLY AND "T" TEMPERATURE OPTION WIRING OR RH AND "TT" TEMPERATURE OPTION
MOUNTING ROOM AND DUCT SENSOR
ORDERING INFORMATION
MOUNTING OSA SENSOR
North
The transmitter should be mounted
preferably on the north side (Northern
Hemisphere) of a building under the eave,
not above windows or doors
. The transmitter
should be mounted vertically with the sensor slots pointing down
.
White
Faceplate
(standard)
Plate
Mounting
Screws
Wire Access
Hole
Optional Customer-
Supplied Handy Box
Cover
Mounting
1/16 Allen Screw s
DIAGRAM 1: The transmitter should be mounted so that the 9" (22.86 cm) probe is in the center of the duct. The transmitter should be duct mounted away from fans, corners, heating and cooling coils, and other equipment that will affect the measurement of relative humidity
.
Diagram 2: The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (12.7 cm) above the floor, on an interior wall, away from
any heating or cooling generating devices. Basic model comes with screw terminal block, two #6-32 screws for handybox mounting, and two #6 x 1" screws for direct wall mounting. Cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16 allen key head. Precautions should be taken to prevent air infiltration from inside the wall.

MODEL DESCRIPTION
HW20K  2% beige room humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
HW21K  2% white room humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
HD20K  2% duct-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
HO20K  2% OSA-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
OPTIONS (Temperature Sensors or Transmitters)
--  No temperature sensor
T3   10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III
T21 2252fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II
T22 3000 thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II
T24   10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
T27
100,000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II
T42  20,000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type IV
T63
1000fi nickel SS flush mounted plate RTD @ 70˚F (26˚C), Type III (yellow leads)
T71 100fi SS flush mounted plate  RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C), Type III (blue leads)
T81  100fi  RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C), 385 platinum curve
T85 1000Ω 385 platinum RTD
T91  1000Ω 375 platinum RTD
TT-2 -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) transmitter, 4-20 mA (duct and OSA only)
TT-3 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) transmitter, 4-20 mA (duct and OSA only)
HD20K T3 Example: HD20K-T3 Duct-mount humidity sensor with 10 kΩ Type III temperature sensor
Diagram 1
Diagram 2
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

557. 513HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
2% ROOM HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER
HS20K SERIES
Accuracy 2% RH @ 73°F (23°C) from 5% to
90%;
(0-5% & 90-100%) add 3%
Thermal Effect
0.05% per °F
Supply Voltage
HS20K-C 9.5-28VDC
HS20K-V 5 VDC
Signal Output HS20K-C
4-20 mA, two wire loop powered,
passive thermistor or RTD
HS20K-V 0 to 5 VDC, passive thermistor or
RTD
Maximum Output Impedance
725Ω @ 24VDC
(Supply voltage – 9.5V) / 0.02
Sensing Technology Precon HS-2000 capacitive
Operating Humidity 0-100% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature -20° to 158°F (-29° to 70°C)
Enclosure Flush mounted stainless steel plate
Wiring Terminations Terminal block (22 to 16 AWG)
Weight 0.34 lb (0.15 kg)
Approvals RoHS
Warranty 18 months
in
(cm)
2.75
(6.99)
4.50
(11.43)
3.25
(8.25)
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Model HS20K-C and HS20K-V Humidity
Transmitters has been specifically designed for use
with HVAC/BAS applications and, with its unique low-
profile design, is perfect for museums, institutions or other
architecturally challenging locations
. The HS20K will monitor
humidity from 5% to 95% with 2% accuracy with an 4-20 mA analog current output or a 0-5 VDC voltage output
. The
HS20K Series is available with optional passive temperature sensors
.
FEA
TURES
•
2% accuracy
• 4-20mA or 0-5 VDC analog outputs
• Passive temperature sensors output optional
• Stainless steel plate mounted
4-20 mA
Signal
Power
Supply
24 VDC
Temperature
(optional)
+
–
WIRING
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
HS20K
4 3 2 1
Pin 1 - not used
Pin 2 - Power (5 VDC)
Pin 3 - RH Out (5 VDC)
Pin 4 - Ground
(DCP-524 power supply
recommended)VOLTAGE WIRING
HS20K-C 4-20mA Current Output

558. HUMIDITY 514HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
2% ROOM HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER
HS20K SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HS20K-V Stainless steel wall plate humidity sensor with 0-5 VDC output
HS20K-C Stainless steel wall plate humidity sensor with 4-20 mA output
OPTIONS
T3 10,000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III (gray leads)
T21 2252fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II (green leads)
T22 3000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II (blue leads)
T24 10,000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II (yellow leads)
T27 100,000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II (gray leads)
T42 20,000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type IV(green leads)
T63 1000fi nickel RTD @ 70˚F (26˚C) (yellow leads)
T71 100fi RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C) (blue leads)
T81 100fi RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C), 385 curve (yellow leads)
T85 1000fi RTD @32˚F (0˚C), 385 curve (blue leads)
T91 1000fi RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C), 375 curve (green leads)
HS20K-V T3 Example: HS20K-V-T3 2% SS wall plate humidity transmitter with 
  0-5 VDC output with Type III 10,000fi thermistor
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W-C Power supply, 24 VAC In to special DC output
(Specify output voltage when ordering, 1.5-24 VDC) 995
DCP-524 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC and 5 VDC OUT 997
DCPA-1.2-C Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/ Special DC output
(Specify output voltage when ordering, 1.3-27 VDC) 994

559. 515HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
GEH2 SERIES
Accuracy 2% (10% to 90%)
Supply Voltage 18-30 VDC, 100mA
Signal Output 4-20 mA/0-5V/0-10V selectable;
0-100% RH
Maximum Output
Impedance 700Ω maximum @ 24 VDC
Minimum Output Impedance
10 kΩ minimum
Sensing Technology Capacitive and replaceable
Operating Humidity 0% to 99%, non-condensing
Operating Temperature -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Enclosure Rating Room
ABS plastic, UL94V Room Installed
IP20, NEMA 1
Duct/OSA IP42, NEMA 3R Stainless steel with remo
vable tip, PTFE Teflon
®
shield,
Wiring Terminations
16 to 22 AWG terminals
Weight Room
0.34 lb (0.15 Kg)
Duct 0.96 lb (0.44 Kg)
OSA 1.22 lb (0.55 Kg)
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The Amphenol Advanced Sensors Model GEH2 Series 2%
Accuracy Humidity Transmitters are designed specifically
for commercial building automation systems (BAS)
. The
room, duct and OSA transmitters use replaceable sensor tips and switch selectable transmission including 4-20mA, 0-5V or 0-10VDC
. The GEH also has an optional temperature
transmitter output with selectable outputs(RH&T must be the same type)
. All duct and OSA enclosures are rated for IP42
or NEMA 3R applications.
FEATURES
• ±2% accuracy
• Temperature compensated
• Field-selectable 4-20 mA, 0-10V, or 0-5V outputs
• Replaceable sensor
• Optional temperature transmitter
APPLICATIONS
• HVAC building controls
• Clean rooms
• Museums / archives
SPECIFICATIONS
OSA
Room
Duct
• Hospitals/pharmaceuticals
• Swimming pools
• Animal rooms
SW3SW1
VI VI
J8
TH
TH
I2-TMP
I2RH/P–
I1RH/P+24 VDC
4-20 mA/RH
4-20 mA/Temp
Switch Positions for Voltage Mode Switch Positions for Current Mode
VOLTAGE MODE
SW3SW1
VI VI
RH and Temperature - Voltage
CURRENT MODE
RH and Temperature - Current Loop
Switch Selectable 0-5 V or 0-10 V Output
I1RH/P+
I2RH/P–
V-RH
GND
V-TMP
J7
10V
SW2
5V
24 VDC
+
RH
Input
Temp
Input
J7
J8
Voltage
Current
JPR1
3K
10K
10V
SW2
5V
SW1
VI
SW3
VI
Connector and Switch Locations
+
+
–
–
–
Not
used
Only one term inal block provided; move for
either vo ltage or current.
WIRING

560. HUMIDITY 516HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Space (Wall) MountCover (all mounts) Duct Mount
1.28
(3.24)
Cover Base
Wiring
Access
4.70
(11.92)
4.70
(11.92)
3.80
(9.63)
2.37
(6.03)
1/2''
(1.27)
knockout
(each side)
Outside
Air
Mount
4.70
(11.92)
6.38
(16.2)
2.75
(7.0) 8.80 (22.37)
4.70
(11.92)
0.5
(1.27)
2.75
(7.0)
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS
2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
GEH2 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
GEH2 RH transmitter 2% accuracy
RH MOUNTING ENCLOSURE
S Decorative room mounting enclosure
D Duct mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure
O OSA mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure and weather shield
SN Decorative room mounting enclosure with NIST certificate
DN Duct mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure with NIST certificate
ON OSA mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure and weather shield with NIST certificate
TEMPERATURE OPTION
TT0 Transmitter, 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C) (S, D, SN, and DN only)
TT2 Transmitter, -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) (D, O, DN, and ON only)
TT3 Transmitter, 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) (All enclosure mounts)
Example: GEH2-SN 2% room RH transmitter with NIST certificate
GEH2-D 2% duct RH transmitter
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
GEH2-RH Replaceable 25% humidity sensor for room, duct, and OSA
GEH2-RHTT Replaceable 2% humidity and temperature sensor for room, duct and OSA transmitters
DCP
A-1.2
Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

561. 517HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
2% DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
HMD60, HMD70, AND HMK41K
HMD60, HMD70
Accuracy
Humidity
±2% RH (0% to 90% RH) @68°F (20°C)
Temperature
±0.2°C
Supply Voltage 60 Series
10 to 35 VDC
70 Series 10 to 35 VDC, 9 to 24 VAC @ 0.3 VA
(signal dependant)
Maximum Output Impedance
500Ω @ 24 VDC
Minimum Output Impedance
3000Ω min
Measurement Range Humidity Duct Mount
0% to 100%
Temperature Duct Mount
-4° to 176°F (-20° to 80°C)
Sensing Technology Capacative and replaceable, Vaisala
HUMICAP
®
180
Operating Temperature Electronics
23° to 131°F (-5° to 55°C)
Sensor Head (Duct) -4° to 176°F (-20° to 80°C),
Enclosure Rating Cast aluminum NEMA 4 (IP55),
ABS plastic
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals (20-16 AWG)
Approvals CE
Weight Duct
1.68 lb (0.76 kg)
Warranty 1 year
HM41K Sensor
Capacitive and replaceable
Operation Handheld, onsite calibrator
Reference Probe Accuracy
±1% RH (0% to 90% RH)
±2% RH (90% to 100% RH)
Measuring range

0% to 100% RH,
-40° to 140°F (-22° to 78°C)
Operating temperature

-40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Storage temperature

-4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Temperature coefficient


+0.04% RH/°C typical
Agency approvals CE, NIST certificate
Weight 2.1 lb (0.95 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
Vaisala’s Models HMD60 and HMD70 Duct Mount Relative
Humidity Transmitters have been specifically designed
for use in HVAC/BAS and pharmaceutical applications
.
These instr
uments measure relative humidity from 0% to
100%
. They are easily installed and meet the European CE
standards.
Five-minute field calibration is possible using the Model
HMK41K Humidity Calibrator. When accuracy adjustment
or sensor replacement is necessary, the transmitter can be calibrated in seconds with a single potentiometer without disturbing operation
. This saves hours of maintenance time
and assures high accuracy.
FEA
TURES
•
Comes with NIST certificate
• Full 0% to 100% RH measurement
• State-of-the-art replaceable sensor technology
SPECIFICATIONS
HMD 60
or
HMD 70

562. HUMIDITY 518HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
2% DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
HMD60, HMD70, AND HMK41K
in
(cm)
HMD 60/70 Duct RH WMK-20 Outside Air Bracket
3.94 (10.01)
3.94
(10.01)
3.23
(8.20)
3.23 (8.20)
2.44 (6.20)9.85 (25.01)
0.47
(1.19)
Mounting Bracket
1.75
(4.45)
3.50 (8.89)
10.0 (25.40)
Sun/Rain Shield
Side View
2.50
(6.35) 4.50
(11.43)
End View
into Sensor
Outside Wall
Northern Exposure
(Northern Hemisphere)
Us RH
out
1 2 3 4 5
T
out
GND
T offset
RH offset
Output Selections
T gain
RH
gain
0-1V
T
RH
0-5V
T
RH
0-10V
T
RH
Power
SupplyDuct Voltage OutputDuct Current Output
+RH- RH
1 2 3 4 5
+T -T
T offset
RH offset
T gain
RH
gain
HMD 60U or HMD 60Y HMD 70U or HMD 70Y
T Test
Power
Supply
Y Option
Voltage
Temperature Signal
Voltage
RH Signal
4-20 mA
RH Signal
Y Option 4-20 mA Temperature Signal
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
HMK41K 2% handheld calibrator with calibration cable
HUMICAP180 Replacement humidity sensor (replaces 0062HM)
WMK-20 OSA/Wall-mount bracket
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HMD60U Duct RH transmitter, 4-20 mA output
HMD60Y Duct RH and temperature transmitter, 4-20 mA output
HMD70U Duct RH transmitter 0-1V, 0-5V, 0-10V output
HMD70Y Duct RH and temperature transmitter, 0-1V, 0-5V, 0-10V output
HMW60U Wall mount, RH transmitter, 4-20 mA output
HMW60Y Wall mount, humidity with 4-20 mA output , temperature with 4-20 mA output
HMW70U Wall mount, RH transmitter, 0-1 VDC, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC outputs
HMW70Y Wall mount, humidity, and temperature, 0-1 VDC, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC outputs

563. 519HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
A/RH2 SERIES
Accuracy ±2% @ 77°F (25°C) from 10% to 95%
Thermal Effect <0.005% per °F (<0.01 per °C)
Supply Voltage 12-40 VDC or 24 VAC, selectable
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC (field
selectable)
Measurement Range 0% to 100%
Sensing Technology Capacitive
Operating Temperature
Room 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Duct/OSA -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Enclosure Room
Plastic Delta-style
Duct/OSA Plastic weatherproof
Dimensions Room
3.8"H x 2.8"W x 0.9"D
(9.8 x 7 x 2.3 cm)
Duct 3.6" (9 cm) Ø head with 8.15"L
(20 cm) probe 0.75" (1.9 cm) Ø
OSA 3.6" (9 cm) Ø head with 3.0"L (7.6 cm)
probe 1.4" (3.6 cm) Ø
Weight
Room 0.22 lb (0.1 kg)
Duct 1.21 lb (0.54 kg)
OSA 0.6 lb (0.27 kg)
SP 0.2 lb (0.09 kg)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The ACI A/RH2 Series Relative Humidity Transmitters utilize
a capacitive sensing element to deliver a proportional 4 to 20 mA,
0 to 5 VDC, or 0 to 10 VDC output
. It is available for room, duct,
outside, and stainless steel wall plate applications. The A/RH2
Series has on board DIP switches which allow the user to select the desired output signal and can be powered by AC or DC power sources
.
Each A/RH2 Series humidity transmitter is calibrated using a
NIST Traceable Temperature/Humidity Chamber. Three and five
point NIST calibration certificates are available and optional.
FEATURES
• Popular room housing
• Accuracies of 2%, 3% or 5%
• Three-year warranty
• Duct and OSA twist-off NEMA 4 housing
• 24 VDC or 24 VAC power (field-selectable)
• 4-20 mA, 0-10V, or 0-5V signal (field-selectable)
• Field calibratable
• Digital display option
• Optional temperature sensor
Output Selection Switches (SW 1)
4-20 mA Output
0-10 VDC Output
0-5 VDC Output
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
A/RH2-R
A/RH2-SP
A/RH2-O
2 Wire Current Output Signal
3 Wire Current Output Signal
Voltage Output Signal
DC Supply Voltage
4-20 mA Output
Supply Ground / Signal Common
AC or DC Supply Voltage
0-10 or 0-5 VDC Output Signal
4-20 mA Output
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
AC or DC Supply Voltage
Supply Ground / Signal Common
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
A/RH2-D

564. HUMIDITY 520HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
2.25
(5.7)
7.15
(18.2)
1.07
(2.7)
Stainless
Plate
Duct
0.65 (1.7)
0.75 (1.9)
80 Micron Sintered
Stainless Steel Filter
0.75 (1.9)
0.18
(0.5)
O.D. Ref
0.46
(1.2)
0.58
(1.5)
Outside
2.69
(6.8)
0.86 (2.2)
4.68 (11.9)
3.95 (10.0)
0.75 (1.9)
2.25 (5.7)
(4) PG11/0.5" (1.27) NPT
Knockouts
4.24 (10.8)
3.60 (9.1)
6.10
(15.5)
3.00 (7.6)
1.40 (3.6)
1.00
(2.5)
PG11 Watertight Fitting
(Cable Dia. 0.12 to 0.28"/
0.3 to 0.7 cm)
Plastic Cover fo r
Stainless Steel Filter to
Protect Sensor during
Wash Down
Stainless Plate
4.5
(1.4)
0.75
(1.9)
2.75 (7.0)
1.40
(3.6)
Plastic
Washer
80 Micron
Stainless
Steel
Sintered
FIlter
2.70
(6.9)
1.00
(2.5)
in
(cm)
2.25 (5.7)
2.75
(7.0)
3.84
(9.8)
Room
3.84 (9.8)0.89 (2.3)
0.79
(2.0)
0.60
(1.5)
0.92
(2.3)
4.51
(11.5)
2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
A/RH2 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: A/RH2-100-R A 2% accuracy room
humidity transmitter with 100 flfi
RTD
A/RH2 R100--
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A/RH2 2% accuracy humidity transmitter
AN T ype III 10,000flfithermistor
CP Type II 10,000flfithermistor
20K 20,000flfithermistor
100 100flfi385 PT RTD
1K 1,000flfi385 PT RT D
R Room
D Duct
O Outside air
SP Stainless steel plate passive sensors only
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979

565. 521HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 2% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
HT2D, HT2O, HT2S
Accuracy
Humidity ±2% (5 to 90% RH)
Temperature ±0.5°F (0.27°C)
Supply Voltage 9.4-35 VDC (24V nominal)
Signal Output 4-20 mA
Maximum Output Impedance
(Power supply – 9.4V) / 0.02 = load,
i.e., (24V – 9.4V) / 0.02 = 730Ω
Measurement Range Humidity
0 to 100% RH
Temperature “EN” Range
-20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
“S” Range -0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C)
“H” Range 40° to 90°F (4° to 32°C)
Sensing Technology Humidity
Capacitive monolithic IC
Temperature Platinum 1000Ω RTD 385 curve
Operating Temperature Room
-10° to 150°F (-23° to 65°C)
Duct/OSA -10° to 185°F (-23° to 85°C)
Wiring Terminations Nonpolar terminals
(22-14 AWG wire)
Weight Room
0.3 lb (0.13 kg)
Duct 1.1 lb (0.50 kg)
OSA 1.16 lb (0.53 kg)
Warranty 3 years
DESCRIPTION
The Minco Model HT relative humidity transmitters are
full-range, high-accuracy building automation transmitters.
Model HT
covers 0% to 100% RH over a wide temperature
.
The standard tw
o-wire, 4-20 mA output provides low cost
space, duct, and outdoor monitoring for building control
.
FEA
TURES
•
100% replacement for discontinued Hycal transmitters
• Advanced wall-mount design
• Weather-resistant housing for duct and OSA use
• Dual output option (humidity and temperature)
OPERATION
The transmitter converts the relative humidity into a 4-20
mA signal. The HT transmitters have a microprocessor that
performs the temperature compensation calculations from an onboard RTD
. The microprocessor maintains both high
accuracy and low cost with a wide humidity and operational temperature span
.
An added optional temperature output is available in the
same enclosure. It comes with a 4-20 mA signal and a large
selection of temper
ature ranges
.
The housings for the duct- and OSA-mount configurations are
suitable for outdoor use. The aluminum cast box is gasketed
to maintain a rain-tight environment for the transmitter.
SPECIFICATIONS
HT2D
HT2O
HT2S
FM
APPROVED
USC

566. HUMIDITY 522HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 2% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
HT2D, HT2O, HT2S
2.75
(6.99)
4.5
(11.43)
2.25
(5.72)
8.0
(20.32)
0.38
(0.953)
HT2OHT2S HT2D
2.88
(7.30)
4.63
(11.75)
2.0
(5.08)
1.25
(3.18)
4.0
(10.16)
Foam Gasket
Housing Bottom View
Housing To p View
2.75
(6.98)
1.58
(4.01)
4.50
(11.43)
HT2S
24 VDC
Power Supply
4-20 mA
Humidity
Signal
Hum*
Hum
Temp*
Temp
4-20 mA
Optional
Temperature
Signal**
* Non-polar connection
** Needs humidity connection
to output temperature
signal properly
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
HT2 2% relative humidity transmitter
D Duct mount, weather resistant box, 8" probe
O Outside air mounting, weather resistant box with weather shield
S Space room/off ice mounting
1 4-20 mA DC output
NT No temperature transmitter
EN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-20°/140°F) or (-29°/60°C)
S Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°F) or (-18°/38°C)
H Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40°/90°F) or (4°/32°C)
fiODEfi DESfifififiTfiON
Example: HT2D1NT 
 2% RH duct transmitter with 8" probe,
no temperature output
HT2
NT1D
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

567. 523HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Weatherproof
(WP) Duct Unit
2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
BA/H200 SERIES
Accuracy
2% from 20% to 95% RH
Supply Voltage 15-26 VAC/VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC
Maximum Output
Impedance 700Ω maximum @24 VDC
Minimum Output Impedance
10 kΩ minimum
Sensing Technology Resistive with ceramic substrate
Sensor Protection Room
Room Gore-Tex®
Duct/OSA 100 micron stainless steel sintered filter
Operating Humidity
0-100%, non-condensing
Operating Temperature Room
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Duct/OSA -22° to 158°F (-30° to 70°C)
Enclosure Room
BAPI STAT 4: ABS Plastic, UL94V-0
Duct/OSA
BAPIBox (BB) IP66, UV resistant polycarbonate

BAPIBox II (BB2)
IP66, UV resistant polycarbonate
WP Weatherproof, NEMA 3R cast
aluminum
Wiring Terminations Four wire, 16 to 22 AWG terminals
Weight Room
0.25 lb (0.11kg)
OSA/Duct BB/BB2
1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
WP 1.3 lb (0.59 kg)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI BA/H200 Series ±2% Accuracy Humidity
Transmitters from BAPI are designed specifically for HVAC
systems
. Room sensors are available in the traditional
Delta style enclosure or the new BAPI STAT 4. All Duct Units
f
eature medical-grade closed cell foam to seal the probe
insertion hole and to absorb vibration
. All Outside Air Units
ha
ve etched Teflon leadwires and are built to withstand high
humidity and condensation and perform under real world conditions. Duct and OSA units are available in weatherproof
enclosures selectable from IP66 or NEMA 3R. RH transmitter
outputs include 4-20 mA, 0-5V, and 0-10V with replaceable sensor tips
.
FEATURES
• Popular room housing
• 2% Accuracy
• Three-year warranty
• Duct and OSA twist-off NEMA 4 housing
• 24 VDC or 24 VAC power (field-selectable)
• 4-20 mA, 0-10V, or 0-5V signal (field-selectable)
• Field calibratable
• Optional temperature sensor
SPECIFICATIONS
NEMA 4
(BB) Duct Unit
BAPIStat 4
Enclosure
Delta-Style
Enclosure
YELLOW
Voltage Output: 0-5V (white) or
0 to 10V
(green)
Ground: 4-20 mA output (two-wire loop)
to controller or vo ltage output
ground
Power: 15 to 26 VDC
Optional Temperature
Sensor Wires
Blue wire (3%);
Blue with Black stripe (2%)
Humidity Transmitter
Module
Duct and OSA
Room Humidity Circ uit Board
Sintered
Sensor Tip
YELLOW
BLUE
BLUE
WHITE or GREEN
BLACK
RED
4 TO 20 mA TERMINATION
Terminal Legend Function
GND ........... 4 to 20 mA signal
(to analog input of controller)
V+ ............. +15 to +26 VDC
TEMP..........Optional temperature sensor
TEMP..........Optional temperature sensor
0 TO 5 VDC TERMINATION
Terminal Legend Function
GND ...........To controller ground
(GND or common)
V+ ............. +15 to +26 VAC/VDC
V OUT.......... 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10V signal
(to analog input of controller)
TEMP..........Optional temperature sensor
TEMP..........Optional temperature sensor
J6
J1
POT 1
RTH1 RTH2
J2
12
–
% RH ADJUST
Display Cycle
in Seconds
HT
3
10
20
ON DEG F
OFF DEG C
F/C
J7
GND
V+
V OUT
TEMP
TEMP +
POT 2
RH ZERO
WIRING
BAPIBox 2
Enclosure

568. HUMIDITY 524HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
BAPI ROOM DUCT, AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
BA/H200 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
BAPI ROOM HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BA/H200R 2% Humidity Transmitter, 4-20 mA output, Delta enclosure
BA/H210R 2% Humidity Transmitter, 0-10 VDC output, Delta Enclosure
BA/H220B4XZCG 2% Humidity Transmitter, 4-20 mA output, BAPI STAT 4
BA/H205B4XZCG 2% Humidity Transmitter, 0-5 VDC output, BAPI STAT 4
BA/H210B4XZCG 2% Humidity Transmitter, 0-10 VDC output, BAPI STAT 4
BA/H212B4XZCG 2% Humidity Transmitter, 2-10 VDC output, BAPI STAT 4
DISPLAY OPTION (optional)
D LCD Display
F Delta (BAPI STAT 4)
Example: BA/H220B4XZCGDF 2% Room humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output, BAPI STAT 4 with LCD display
BAPI DUCT HUMIDITY SENSOR
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BA/H200 2% Humidity w/ Interchangeable Output of 0-5 VDC or 4-20 mA output
BA/H210 2% Humidity, 0-10 VDC output
BA/H212 2% Humidity, 2-10 VDC output
ENCLOSURE OPTION (Must choose one)
DBB BapiBox Enclosure, IP66 Rated, UV Resistant Polycarbonate
DBB2 BapiBox2 Enclosure, IP66 Rated, UV Resistant Polycarbonate
DWP Weatherproof Enclosure, NEMA 3R Rated Metal Enclosure
Example: BA/H200DBB2 2% Duct mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output, BB2 enclosure
BAPI OSA HUMIDITY SENSOR
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BA/H200 2% Humidity w/ Interchangeable Output of 0-5 VDC or 4-20 mA output
BA/H210 2% Humidity, 0-10 VDC output
BA/H212 2% Humidity, 2-10 VDC output
ENCLOSURE OPTION (Must choose one)
OBB BapiBox Enclosure, IP66 Rated, UV Resistant Polycarbonate
OBB2 BapiBox2 Enclosure, IP66 Rated, UV Resistant Polycarbonate
OWP Weatherproof Enclosure, NEMA 3R Rated Metal Enclosure
Example: BA/H200OWP 2% OSA mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output, weather proof housing
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
BA/ADP-525-7-CPW Copla white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate 1391
BA/ADP-525-7-OFW Off white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate 1391
BA/ADP-525-7-WMW Warm white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate 1391
BA/FOAMBACK White foam back insulator 1391
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice

569. 525HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 2% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
SRH12 SERIES
Accuracy 2% RH (0-100% RH) @ 73°F (23°C)

Drift
<1% RH/yr @ 73°F (23°C), 50% RH
Supply Voltage 12-30 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 2-wire
Maximum Output
Impedance 700Ω @ 24 VDC Ω = (supply - 10) /
0.02
Sensing Technology Replaceable capacitive
Sensor Protection Porous Polyethylene
Protection Reverse polarity protection
Operating Humidity 0 to100%
Operating Temperature -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Enclosure Room
ABS plastic (flammability, 94V-0)
Duct Polycarbonate (flammability, 94V-0),
NEMA 4 (IP65),
Wiring Terminations Pluggable terminal block
Dimensions Room
4.7"H x 2.8"W x 1.0"D
(12 x 7 x 2.5 cm)
Duct 5.1"L x 2.7"W x 2.4"D
(13 x 6.8 x 7 cm)
8.5" (21.6 cm) probe length 1/2"
probe Ø
OSA 6.1"L x 4"W x 12.5"D
(15.5 x 10 x 32 cm)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight Room
0.5 lb (0.23 kg)
Duct 1.3 lb (0.59 kg)
OSA 2.6 lb (1.2 kg)
Warranty 1 year (sensor) 3 years
(electronics only)
DESCRIPTION
Designed for the HVAC control system, the Setra SRH12
Series of humidity transmitters offer reliable measurement of
RH levels from 0 to 100% with an accuracy of 2%
. Available in
wall, duct, and outside air configurations, the SRH12 Series is easy to install and service if necessary
. The transmitters
utilize a field replaceable sensor tip that allows the end user to replace sensors on-site
. This eliminates factory calibration
and downtime.
FEATURES
• ±2% RH accuracy
• No recalibration required
• Replaceable sensor
• Capacitive sensor technology
• Reverse polarity protection
Shield
RTN/COM
+EXC
6
5
4
3
Ground connection
(not used)
(not used)
(not used)
2 RH (4 to 20 mA) output
1 Vin
WIRING
APPLICATION
• HVAC/R building controls
• Indoor air quality
• Laboratories
• Antiquities preservation
• Swimming pools
• Clean rooms
SPECIFICATIONS
Outside Air
Duct
Wall

570. HUMIDITY 526HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 2% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
SRH12 SERIES
4.69
(11.9)
0.98
(2.47)
2.81
(7.15)
Security
Lock
Security
Latch
Wall Mount
12.52
(31.8)
Universal
Wall/Pipe
Mounting
Flange
Porous
Weather
Shield
2.38
(6.04)
4.50
(11.44)
6.10 (15.49)
4.05
(10.27)
2.68
(6.8)
4.04
(10.26)
Outside Air
5.10 (12.95)
5.60 (14.22)
2.68
(6.81)
Duct Mount
Conduit Knockouts Both Sides
Duct Probe
2.38
(6.04)
8.56
(21.75)
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SRH2PO11T0N 2% Outside air humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
SRH12PD11T0N 2% Duct mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
SRH12PW11T0N 2% Wall mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
ACCESSORIES
SRH32PT0 Replacement 2% humidity sensor
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

571. 527HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
2% WATERPROOF / WASHDOWN HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER
EHRH
Accuracy
Humidity 2% (30% to 95%)
Temperature (EHRHT) ±0.5°F (±0.3°C)
Supply Voltage 24 VDC ±20% (loop powered)
Signal Output 4-20 mA
Maximum Output Impedance
700Ω @ 24 VDC
Measurement Range Humidity
0% to 100%
Temperature -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
Sensing Technology Humidity
Bulk polymer resistive
Temperature Platinum 1000Ω 385 RTD (EHRHT)
Type III 10 kΩ
Adjustments Zero
±20%
Span ±10%
Sensitivity 0.1% RH
Operating Temperature -4° to 129°F (-20° to 54°C)
Enclosure Rating Epoxy-hardened waterproof case
Cover: Stainless steel
Wiring Terminations Flying leads
Weight 0.98 lb (0.44 kg)
Warranty 1 year
1.12
(2.86)
2.75
(6.98)
1.25
(3.17)
3.30
(8.25)
5.37
(13.64)
2.75
(6.98)
Front view Side View Top View
Shown with customer-
supplied wiring box
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The Amphenol Advance Systems EHRH Series Humidity
Transmitters are specifically designed for washdown areas
and condensing atmospheres and offer thermistor or 4-20
mA temperature output
. The EHRH Series measures relative
humidity with a 2% resistive sensor and can withstand 100% saturation
. It is made to be surface mounted to a single-gang
outlet box or mounted directly to the wall. The EHRH Series
are furnished with a waterproof case, connector, and stainless steel cover with leads for termination inside the wall
.
FEA
TURES
•
Wash down waterproof design
• 4-20 mA output
• Easy one-point field calibration
• Rugged metal cover
• Temperature output: thermistor or 4-20 mA
Power Supply
G
A
I
N
O
F
F
S
E
T
4-20 mA
Signal
RH
4-20 mA
Temp
(red/white)
(white/brown)
(white/orange)
(green/yellow)
ZS
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
EHRH Waterproof/Washdown 2% RH transmitter
EHRHT Waterproof/Washdown 2% RH temperature
transmitter
APPLICATION
• Swimming pools
• Green houses
• Hospital suites
• Food processing
• Gymnasium
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Supply
G
A
I
N
O
F
F
S
E
T
4-20 mA
Signal
(red/white)
(white/brown)
(white/brown)
(green/yellow)
ZS
Type 3
ThermistorEHRH
EHRHT
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

572. HUMIDITY 528HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
J1
12-28
VDC
4-20 mA
RH signal
Optional
temperature
sensor to
controller
V+ TTRH
THRM THRM
24 VDC
Power
supply
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
KH3 SERIES
Accuracy 3% RH @ 73°F from 5% to 90% RH;
(0%-5% & 90%-100%) add 4%
Drift <±0.5% per year
Thermal Effect 0.05% per °F
Supply Voltage 9.5-28VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA two-wire, loop-powered
Maximum Output
Impedance mA 725Ω @ 24 VDC (Supply voltage -
9.5 VDC) / 0.02
Sensing Technology Precon HS-2000 capacitive
Operating Humidity 0-100% non-condensing
Operating Temperature

-20° to 158°F (-29° to 70°C)
Enclosure
KHR White plastic, UL94HB
KHD Metal handy box
KHO NEMA 3R plastic box
Probe
KHR 1/2" aluminum tube with expanded
Teflon
®
filter
KHD 1/2" aluminum tube with 40 micron
stainless steel sintered filter
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Weight
KHR 0.2 lb (0.09 kg)
KHD 1.2 lb (0.54 kg)
KHO 0.52 lb (0.24 kg)
Approvals RoHS
Warranty 18 months
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Model KHR, KHD, and KHO Humidity
Transmitters are specifically designed for use in HVAC/BAS
applications
. These instruments measure relative humidity
from 0% to 100%. The standard two-wire, 4-20 mA output
provides low cost humidity monitoring for building control.
The RH tr
ansmitter is available with thermistor or RTD
temperature sensors or a 4-20 mA rangeable temperature transmitter. They are available in room, duct, and OSA
mounting styles.
FEATURES
• Packaged for Price and Performance
• Calibration free Interchangeable sensors
• Twelve point computerized calibration
• 0% to 100% RH measurement
• ±3% accuracy (5% to 95% RH)
• Temperature compensated
• No need to remove mounting box to replace sensor
• Attractive new room enclosure design
• Two-wire, 4-20 mA output
• Custom Logo's
• Optional push button, LED and comm. jack
• Optional temperature sensor (Thermistor or RTD)
RH
LOOP
+V
J5
J4
SENSOR
Temperature
sensor output to
BAS Controller
12-28
VDC
4-20mA
RH
Signal
24 VDC
Power
Supply
WIRING - KHR
SPECIFICATIONS
KHR
KHO
KHD
WIRING - KHD AND KHR

573. 529HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
KH3 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KHD3 Duct mounted 3% humidity transmitter
KHO3 Outside air 3% humidity transmitter
KHR3 Wall mounted room/space 3% humidity transmitter
Optional temperature ranges
T3 10,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (26°C), Type III
T21 2252fi thermistor @ 77°F (26°C), Type II
T22 3000fi thermistor @ 77°F (26°C), Type II
T24 10,000flfithermistor @ 77°F (26°C), Type II
T27 100,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (26°C), Type II
T42 20,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (26°C), Type IV
T81 100fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve
T85 1000fi RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve
T91 1000fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve
OPTIONS
CL1 Custom one color logo, KHR3 only
WP Weatherproof housing, KHD3 only
XJ1 RJ11 externally-accessible communication jack (CCRJ11AD required), KHR3 only
XJ2 Internal RJ11 communication jack, KHR3 only
XLED LED indicator lamp 24 VAC/VDC green, KHR3 only
XMB Momentary pushbutton switch, jumpered across sensor or pot (JP1), KHR3 only
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F (0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F (0°C/25°C/70°C)
Example: KHD3-T3-WP Duct mounted 3% humidity transmitter with
10,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (26°C), Type III and weatherproof housing
KHD3 T3 WP
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
HSD3 Replaceable 3% humidity sensor for KHD3
HSO3 Replaceable 3% humidity sensor for KHO3
HSR3 Replaceable 3% humidity sensor for KHR3

574. HUMIDITY 530HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
3% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
H_30K SERIES
Accuracy 3% RH @ 73°F (23°C) from 5% to
90%;
(0-5% & 90%-100%) add 4%
Stability
typically <0.5% drift per year
Thermal Effect 0.05% per °F
Supply Voltage 9.5-28 VDC
Signal Output RH: 4-20 mA
Temperature: 4-20 mA, optional thermistor, RTD
Maximum Output Impedance
725Ω @ 24VDC (Supply voltage -
9.5V) / 0.02)
Measurement Range
RH 0-100%

Temperature
-20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
(see ordering information)
Sensor Protection Sintered filter (duct and OSA)
Operating Humidity 0-100% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature -20° to 158°F (-29° to 70°C)
Enclosure Beige plastic (room), weather
resistant cast aluminum (duct and OSA)
Wiring Terminations
Terminal block (22 to 16 AWG)
Weight
Wall 0.3 lb (0.09 kg)
Duct 1.14 lb (0.52 kg)
OSA 1.2 lb (0.54 kg)
Approvals RoHs
Warranty 18 months
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Series H_30K Humidity Transmitters have been
specifically designed for use with HVAC/BAS applications.
These instr
uments measure relative humidity from 5 to 90%
with 3% accuracy and produce a two wire, 4-20mA linear output. All can come equipped with an optional passive RTD
or thermistor. The duct and OSA versions may also be fitted
with a 4-20mA temperature transmitter.
FEATURES
• 3% accuracy (5% to 90%)
• Two wire, 4-20mA RH output
• Optional temperature thermistor
• Optional temperature RTD
• Optional temperature 4-20mA (Duct or OSA)
OPERATION
The temperature compensated circuitry converts the relative
humidity into a 4-20 mA signal. The optional temperature
sensors, RTDs or thermistors, offer direct connection to most automation systems
. On duct and OSA units, an optional 4-20
mA temperature transmitter may also be employed and is rangeable from -30° to 250°F (-34° to 121°C)
.
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Foam gasket
5.25
(13.3)
4.43
(11.3)
2.88
(7.30)
2.125
(5.4)
1.25
(3.18)
HO30K
2.875
(7.3)
4.625
(11.7)
2.13
(5.4)
7.0
(17.8)
0.25
(0.64)
4.50
(11.43)
3.23
(8.20)
in
(cm)
HW30K
HD30K
HO30K
HD30K
HW30K

575. 531HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
3% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
H_30K SERIES
Duct and OSA with TT option only
Temperature
4-20 mA
signal
Power supply
24 VDC
Humidity
4-20 mA
signal
T
V+
RH
Room, Duct, OSA (RH or RH-T)
Humidity
4-20 mA
signal
T
V+
Optional
temperature
sensor
RH
Power Supply
24 VDC
WIRING FOR RH ONLY AND "T" TEMPERATURE OPTION WIRING FOR RH AND "TT" TEMPERATURE OPTION
MOUNTING ROOM SENSOR
ORDERING INFORMATION
MOUNTING OSA SENSOR
DIAGRAM 1: The transmitter should be mounted so that the 9" (22.86 cm) probe is in
the center of the duct. The transmitter should be duct mounted away from fans, corners,
heating and cooling coils, and other equipment that will affect the measurement of
relative humidity.
White
Faceplate
(standard)
Plate
Mounting
Screws
Wire Access
Hole
Optional Customer-
Supplied Handy Box
Cover
Mounting
1/16 Allen Screw s
DIAGRAM 2: The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (12.7 cm) above the floor,
on an inter
ior wall, away from any heating or cooling generating devices
. Basic model
comes with scre
w terminal block, two #6-32 screws for handybox mounting, and two #6 x
1" screws for direct wall mounting
. Cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16 allen key head.
Precautions should be taken to prevent air infiltration from inside the wall.
DIAGRAM 2
North
The transmitter should be mounted preferably
on the north side (Northern Hemisphere) of a
building under the eave, not above windows
or doors
. The transmitter should be mounted
vertically with the sensor slots pointing down.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HW30K  3% beige room humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
HD30K  3% duct-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
HO30K  3% OSA-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
OPTIONS (Temperature Sensors or Transmitters)
--  No temperature sensor
T3   10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III
T21 2252fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II
T22 3000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II
T24   10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
T27
100,000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II
T42  20,000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type IV
T63
1000fi nickel SS flush mounted plate RTD @ 70˚F (26˚C), Type III (yellow leads)
T81  100fi  RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C), 385 platinum curve
T85 1000Ω 385 platinum RTD
T91  1000Ω 375 platinum RTD
TT-2 -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) transmitter, 4-20 mA (duct and OSA only)
TT-3 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) transmitter, 4-20 mA (duct and OSA only)
XN1 NIST 1 point, 30% (Humidity only)
XN2 NIST 2 point, 30% and 50% (Humidity only)
XN3 NIST 3 point, 30%, 50% and 70% (Humidity only)
HD30K T3 Example: HD30K-T3 Duct-mount humidity sensor with 
  10 kΩ T ype III temperature sensor
DIAGRAM 1
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

576. HUMIDITY 532HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER & OPTIONAL TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS
HD31K, HO31K, HW31K
Accuracy 3% RH @ 73°F (23°C) from 5% to
90%;
(0-5% & 90%-100%) add 4%
Thermal Effect
0.05% per °F
Stability typically <±1% drift per year
Supply Voltage 9.5-28 VDC
Signal Output RH: 4-20 mA Temperature: 4-20 mA
optional thermistor, RTD
Maximum Output Impedance
725Ω @ 24VDC
(Supply voltage - 9.5V) / 0.02)
Measurement Range RH
0-100%

Temperature
-20° to 140°F (29° to 60°C) (see
order
ing information)
Sensor Protection
Sintered filter (duct and OSA)
Operating Humidity 0-100% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature -20° to 158°F (-29° to 70°C)
Enclosure Rating White plastic
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals for loop termination
Weight
Room 0.3 lb (0.09 Kg)
Duct 0.58 lb (0.26 Kg)
OSA 0.72 lb (0.33 Kg)
Approvals RoHs
Warranty 18 months
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Models HW31K, HD31K, and HO31K 3%
Humidity Transmitters are specifically designed for use in
HVAC/BAS applications. These instruments measure relative
humidity from 0% to 100%. The standard twowire, 4-20 mA
output provides low-cost humidity monitoring for building control
. The RH transmitters are available with thermistor
or RTD temperature sensors or a 4-20 mA rangeable temperature transmitter
. They are available in room, duct, and
OSA mounting styles.
FEATURES
• 0% to 100% RH measurement
• 3% accuracy (5% to 90% RH)
• Two-wire, 4-20 mA output
• White plastic design
OPERATION
The transmitter converts the relative humidity into a 4-20
mA signal with 3% accuracy. The optional temperature
sensors, thermistor or RTD, offer direct connections to most automation systems
. The optional rangeable temperature
transmitter offers a 4-20 mA signal and is rangeable from -30° to 250°F (-34° to 121°C)
.
OPTIONS:
• Temperature thermistor
• Temperature RTD
• Temperature 4-20 mA for duct and OSA
SPECIFICATIONS
HW31K
HD31K
HO31K

577. 533HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Room, HW31K
(RH or RH-T)
Humidity
4-20 mA
Signal
T
V+
Optional
Temperature
Sensor
RH
Power Supply
24 VDC
0.75
(1.90)
Cover Hooks
Board
Hooks
Cover Securing Screws
and Back Plate
Wire-way
hole
3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER & OPTIONAL TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS
HD31K, HO31K, HW31K
WIRING FOR ROOM UNIT
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
HD31K T3 Example: HD31K-T3 Duct-mount humidity transmitter with 
  10 kfi T ype III temperature sensor
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HW31K 3% room-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
HD31K  3% duct-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
HO31K  3% OSA-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
OPTIONS (temperature sensor or transmitter)
--  No temperature sensor
T3   10,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III
T21 2252fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II
T22 3000 thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II
T24   10,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
T27
100,000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II
T42  20,000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type IV
T63
1000fi nickel RTD @ 70˚F (26˚C), Type III 
T81  100fi  RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C), 385 platinum curve
T85 1000fi @ 32˚F (0˚C), 385 platinum RTD
T91  1000fi @ 32˚F (0˚C), 375 platinum RTD
MOUNTING
Correct position for mounting outdoor air sensor
1/2"
Conduit Hole
Gasket
5.5
(13.98)
4.75
(12.07)
8.38
(21.29)
0.75 (1.91)
HO31K
4.87
(12.38)
0.25
(0.64)
3.25 (8.26)
2.5 (6.35)
1/8" NPT
2.3
(5.84)
0.88 (2.24)
Mounting
Tabs
HD31K
1.20
(3.05)
Side V
iew
4.50
(11.43)
2.75
(7.0)
Front View
in
(cm)
HW31K
MOUNTING OSA SENSOR
The transmitter should be mounted preferably
on the north side (Northern Hemisphere) of a
building under the eave, not above windows
or doors
. The transmitter should be mounted
vertically with the sensor slots pointing down.
North
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP
A-1.2
Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

578. HUMIDITY 534HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
You must connect the RH channel of the
HMW82, ev en if you only wa nt to measure
temperature. Connecting the temperature
channel is optional.
Power Supply -10 to 28 VDC
Power Supply -10 to 28 VDC
+_
+_
+
+
_
_
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
0 to 10 VDC0 to 10 VDC
__
++
Power Supply
+Power supply
_
15 to 35 VDC
3% ROOM HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
HMW80 SERIES
Accuracy
HMW Series Humidity ±3%, 0 to 70% RH, 50° to
86°F (10° to 30°C)
TMW Series Temperature ±0.9°F (± 0.50°C)
Thermal Effect Temperature compensated with less
than 0.005% per °F (0.01% per °C)
Supply Voltage HMW82/TMW82
20 to 28 VDC
HMW83/TMW83 18 to 35 VDC/24 VAC ±20%
Signal Output HMW82/TMW82
4-20 mA (loop powered)
HMW83/TMW83 0 to 10 VDC
Maximum Output Impedance
600Ω
Minimum Output Impedance
10 kΩ
Measurement Range Humidity
0 to 100% RH
Temperature 23° to 131°F (-5° to 55°C)
Sensing Technology Humidity
Replaceable Vaisala Intercap®
Temperature Digital Temperature Sensor
Operating Humidity 0 to 100% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature 23° to 131°F (-5° to 55°C)
Enclosure ABS/ Polycarbonate UL-V0
approved, IP30
Wiring Terminations Terminal block (22 to 16 AWG)
Approvals CE (EN61326-1)
Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The Vaisala HMW80 Series Room Humidity and
Temperature Transmitter features the interchangeable
INTERCAP® sensor and is designed for use in energy
management systems in buildings
. They combine excellent
stability with reliable operation. The HMW80 Series is easy
to install, requires no recalibration if the sensor is changed and is insensitive to dust as well as to most chemicals
.. This
means great savings in overall maintenance costs.
The
HMW80 Series transmitters are available in four models:
HMW82 and HMW83 transmitters measure both humidity and temperature
. The TMW82 and TMW83 measure temperature
only. HMW80 Series is available in both 2- and 3-wire and
4-20 mA and voltage analog signals.
FEATURES
• 3% accuracy
• Easy to replace interchangeable humidity sensor
• Two-year warranty
• No recalibration required
• Low maintenance costs
• Temperature and humidity outputs
• 2-wire or 3-wire models
SPECIFICATIONS
WIRING

579. 535HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
3% ROOM HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
HMW80 SERIES
in
(cm) 3.2 (8.1) 3.0 (7.7)
Ø0.17
(0.44)
Ø0.17
(0.44)
0.35 (0.9)
0.20 (0.5)
1.28
(3.24)
0.21 (0.55)
2.37 (6.03)
3.07 (7.8)
0.95
(2.4)
5.0 (12.7)
4.9 (12.4)
2.32 (5.9)
0.79 (0.20)
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HMW82 3% Room humidity and temperature transmitter, 4-20 mA
HMW83 3% Room humidity and temperature transmitter, 0-10 VDC
TMW82 Room temperature transmitter, 2-wire 4-20 mA output
TMW83 Room temperature transmitter, 3-wire 0-10V output
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979

580. HUMIDITY 536HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
3% DUCT HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
HMD42, HMD53
Accuracy
Humidity ±3% RH
Temperature ±0.72°F (0.4°C)
Stability RH: ±2% RH/2 years
Supply Voltage HMD42
10-35 VDC
HMD53 10 to 35 VDC, 9 to 24 VAC @ 0.3
VA (signal dependent) @ 0.3 VA
(signal dependent)
Signal Output HMD42
4-20 mA
HMD53 0 to 1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10 VDC
Maximum Output Impedance mA
500Ω
Minimum Output Impedance VDC
20 kΩ
Measurement Range Humidity
0 to 100%
Temperature -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Sensing Technology Humidity
Replaceable Vaisala INTERCAP®
Temperature Pt 1000Ω RTD
Operating Humidity 0 to 100% RH
Operating Temperature 23° to 131°F (-5° to 55°C)
Enclosure Cast aluminum
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4 (IP65)
Probe Stainless steel
Wiring Terminations Screw terminal
Approvals CE (EN61326-1, EN55022)
Weight 0.6 lb (0.3 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Vaisala HMD42 and HMD53 Duct Mounted Humidity
Transmiitters are designed for building automation
applications
. They combine reliable operation with excellent
stability, providing low cost of ownership to the user. The
HMD42 and HMD53 transmitters measure humidity with a ±3% RH accuracy and temperature with a ±0
.54°F (±0.3°C)
accuracy. They feature various selectable analog output
signals and they can be powered by either AC or DC voltage.
The
HMD42 and HMD53 humidity transmitters use
the interchangeable Vaisala INTERCAP® Sensor
. The
transmitters require no recalibration if the sensor is changed.
The duct mount
HMD42 and HMD53 transmitters can be
installed in various measurement environments due to the robust IP65 (NEMA4) rated metal enclosure which protects the sensor from dust and splashes of water
.
FEATURES
• Duct mount
• ±3% RH accuracy
• No recalibration required
• Easy to replace interchangeable sensor
• Current or selectable voltage output
SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRONICS
Lid
Screw terminal
Screws
18941HM
Glands
10528HM
INTERCAP
®
sensor
part no. 15778HM
Membrane filter part no. DRW010525
Stainless stell sintered filter part no. HM46670SP
Electronics, Accessories, Spare Pa rts
Removing and Reinstalling the Sensor Head
Replacement of the Intercap Sensor
If the INTERCAP
®
sensor is damaged, remove it and insert a
new one. Recalibration is not needed.
If the filter is dirty, replace it to ensure a maximum lifetime and fast response for the sensor. Do not attempt to clean the filter.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Open the lid. Disconnect the screw terminal. Open the screws (2 pcs.) Pull the sensor head out carefully. To reinstall, push in the sensor head.
Reassemble in reverse order.
PRODUCT DIAGRAM

581. 537HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
3% DUCT HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
HMD42, HMD53
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HMD42 Duct mount, humidity 4-20 mA output
HMD53 Duct mount, humidity and temperature, 0-1 V, 0-5V, and 0-10 V output
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
15778HM Replaceable humidity sensor
DCP
A-1.2
Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
2.36 (60) 9.84 (250)
0.47
(12)
3.99 (100)
3.23 (82)
3.23 (82)
3.94 (100)
HMD42 Dimensions
2.36 (60) 9.84 (250)
0.47
(12)
3.99 (100)
3.23 (82)
3.23 (82)
3.94 (100)
HMD53 Dimensions
OUTPUT SELECTIONS
INSTALLATION OF THE
CURRENT MODULE
Take off the jumpers
Connect the module; note the
right direction!
Connect the power supply
HMD 42 HMD 53
10 - 35 VDC
1
2
3
HMD 42 4-20 mA RH
+RH
–RH
Power
Supply
+T
–T
+
–
4
5
HMD 42 4-20 mA Temp
+
+
Supply

1
3
2
5
4
+
RH
out
V
s
DC/AC
Power
–
T
out
GND
VDCout Temp
VDCout RH
(–)
+
+
WIRING

582. HUMIDITY 538HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
A/RH3 SERIES
Accuracy ±3% @ 77°F (25°C) from 10% to
95%
Thermal Effect <0.005% per °F (<0.01 per °C)
Supply Voltage 12-40 VDC or 24 VAC, selectable
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC (field
selectable)
Measurement Range 0% to 100%
Sensing Technology Capacitive
Operating Temperature Room
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Duct/OSA -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Enclosure Room
Plastic Delta-style
Duct/OSA Plastic weatherproof
Dimensions Room
3.8"H x 2.8"W x 0.9"D
(9.8 x 7 x 2.3 cm)
Duct 3.6" (9 cm) Ø head with 8.15"L
(20 cm) probe 0.75" (1.9 cm) Ø
OSA 3.6" (9 cm) Ø head with 3.0"L
(7.6 cm) probe 1.4" (3.6 cm) Ø
Weight
Room 0.22 lb (0.1 kg)
Duct 1.21 lb (0.54 kg)
OSA 0.6 lb (0.27 kg)
SP 0.2 lb (0.09 kg)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The ACI A/RH3 Series Relative Humidity Transmitters
utilize a capacitive sensing element to deliver a proportional
4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5 VDC, or 0 to 10 VDC output
. it is available
for room, duct, outside, and stainless steel wall plate applications
. The A/RH3 Series has on board DIP switches
which allow the user to select the desired output signal and can be powered by AC or DC power sources
.
Each A/RH3 Series humidity transmitter is calibrated using
a NIST Traceable Temperature/Humidity Chamber. Three
and fiv
e point NIST calibration certificates are available and
optional
.
FEATURES
• ±3% accuracy
• Three-year warranty
• Duct and OSA twist-off weatherproof housing
• 24 VDC or 24 VAC power (field-selectable)
• 4-20 mA, 0-10V, or 0-5V signal (field-selectable)
• Field-calibratable
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
A/RH3-R
A/RH3-SP
A/RH3-O
A/RH3-D
Output Selection Switches (SW 1)
4-20 mA Output
0-10 VDC Output
0-5 VDC Output
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
2 Wire Current Output Signal
3 Wire Current Output Signal
Voltage Output Signal
DC Supply Voltage
4-20 mA Output
Supply Ground / Signal Common
AC or DC Supply Voltage
0-10 or 0-5 VDC Output Signal
4-20 mA Output
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
AC or DC Supply Voltage
Supply Ground / Signal Common
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
Output Selection Switches (SW 1)
4-20 mA Output
0-10 VDC Output
0-5 VDC Output
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
2 Wire Current Output Signal
3 Wire Current Output Signal
Voltage Output Signal
DC Supply Voltage
4-20 mA Output
Supply Ground / Signal Common
AC or DC Supply Voltage
0-10 or 0-5 VDC Output Signal
4-20 mA Output
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
AC or DC Supply Voltage
Supply Ground / Signal Common
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT

583. 539HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: A/RH3-100-R A 3% accuracy room
humidity transmitter with 100 flfi
RTD
A/RH3 R100--
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A/RH3 3% accuracy humidity transmitter
AN T ype III 10,000flfithermistor
CP Type II 10,000flfithermistor
20K 20,000flfithermistor
100 100flfi385 PT RTD
1K 1,000flfi385 PT RT D
R Room
D Duct
O Outside air
SP Stainless steel plate passive sensors only
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
A/RH3 SERIES
2.25
(5.7)
7.15
(18.2)
1.07
(2.7)
Stainless
Plate
Duct
0.65 (1.7)
0.75 (1.9)
80 Micron Sintered
Stainless Steel Filter
0.75 (1.9)
0.18
(0.5)
O.D. Ref
0.46
(1.2)
0.58
(1.5)
Outside
2.69
(6.8)
0.86 (2.2)
4.68 (11.9)
3.95 (10.0)
0.75 (1.9)
2.25 (5.7)
(4) PG11/0.5" (1.27) NPT
Knockouts
4.24 (10.8)
3.60 (9.1)
6.10
(15.5)
3.00 (7.6)
1.40 (3.6)
1.00
(2.5)
PG11 Watertight Fitting
(Cable Dia. 0.12 to 0.28"/
0.3 to 0.7 cm)
Plastic Cover fo r
Stainless Steel Filter to
Protect Sensor during
Wash Down
Stainless Plate
4.5
(1.4)
0.75
(1.9)
2.75 (7.0)
1.40
(3.6)
Plastic
Washer
80 Micron
Stainless
Steel
Sintered
FIlter
2.70
(6.9)
1.00
(2.5)
in
(cm)
2.25 (5.7)
2.75
(7.0)
3.84
(9.8)
Room
3.84 (9.8)0.89 (2.3)
0.79
(2.0)
0.60
(1.5)
0.92
(2.3)
4.51
(11.5)
DIMENSIONS

584. HUMIDITY 540HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
3% ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
BA/H300 SERIES
Accuracy 3%, from 20% to 95% RH
Supply Voltage 15-26 VAC/VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC
Maximum Output
Impedance 700Ω maximum @24 VDC
Minimum Output Impedance
10 kΩ minimum
Sensing Technology Resistive with ceramic substrate
Sensor Protection Room
Room Gore-Tex®
Duct/OSA 100 micron stainless steel sintered filter
Operating Humidity
0-100%, non-condensing
Operating Temperature Room
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Duct/OSA -22° to 158°F (-30° to 70°C)
Enclosure Room
ABS Plastic, UL94V-0
Duct/OSA BAPIBox (BB)
IP66 rated UV resistant
polycarbonate
BAPIBox II (BB2) IP66 rated, UV resistant
polycarbonate
WP Weather Proof, NEMA 3R, Cast
aluminum
Wiring Terminations Four wire, 16 to 22 AWG terminals
Weight
Room 0.25 lb (0.11 Kg)
Duct/OSA BB/BB2
1.0 lb (0.45 Kg)
WP 1.3 lb (0.55 Kg)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI Model BA/H Series 3% Accuracy Humidity
Transmitters are designed specifically for HVAC systems.
The room tr
ansmitters use Delta or BAPI-Stat II enclosures
with optional communication jacks
. All duct and OSA units
come in w
eatherproof enclosures selectable for NEMA 3R
or IP66 applications
. All BA/H transmitters have optional
temperature sensors or temperature transmitters. Transmitter
outputs include 4-20mA, 0-5V ad 0-10V with replaceable sensors
.
FEATURES
• Popular room housing
• Accuracies of 3%
• Three-year warranty
• Duct and OSA twist-off NEMA 4 housing
• 24 VDC or 24 VAC power (field-selectable)
• 4-20 mA, 0-10V, or 0-5V signal (field-selectable)
• Field calibratable
• Optional temperature sensor
SPECIFICATIONS
Delta-Style
Enclosure
NEMA 4 (BB)
Duct Unit
Weatherproof (WP)
Duct Unit
BAPIBox 2
Enclosure

585. 541HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
BA/ADP-525-7-CPW Copla white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate
BA/FOAMBACK White foam back insulator
BA/FOAMBACK-GRAY Gray foam back insulator
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
BA/ADP-525-7-OFW Off white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate
BA/ADP-525-7-WMW Warm white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
BA/H300 SERIES
YELLOW
Voltage Output: 0-5V (white) or
0 to 10V
(green)
Ground: 4-20 mA output (two-wire loop)
to controller or vo ltage output
ground
Power: 15 to 26 VDC
Optional Temperature
Sensor Wires
Blue wire (3%);
Blue with Black stripe (2%)
Humidity Transmitter
Module
Duct and OSA
Room Humidity Circ uit Board
Sintered
Sensor Tip
YELLOW
BLUE
BLUE
WHITE or GREEN
BLACK
RED
4 TO 20 mA TERMINATION
Terminal Legend Function
GND ........... 4 to 20 mA signal
(to analog input of controller)
V+ ............. +15 to +26 VDC
TEMP..........Optional temperature sensor
TEMP..........Optional temperature sensor
0 TO 5 VDC TERMINATION
Terminal Legend Function
GND ...........To controller ground
(GND or common)
V+ ............. +15 to +26 VAC/VDC
V OUT.......... 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10V signal
(to analog input of controller)
TEMP..........Optional temperature sensor
TEMP..........Optional temperature sensor
J6
J1
POT 1
RTH1 RTH2
J2
12
–
% RH ADJUST
Display Cycle
in Seconds
HT
3
10
20
ON DEG F
OFF DEG C
F/C
J7
GND
V+
V OUT
TEMP
TEMP +
POT 2
RH ZERO
WIRING
BAPI ROOM HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BA/H300R 3% Humidity Transmitter, 4-20 mA output, Delta enclosure
BA/H310R 3% Humidity Transmitter, 0-10 VDC output, Delta Enclosure
DISPLAY OPTION
D LCD Display
Example: BA/H300RD
3% Room humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output, with LCD display
BAPI DUCT HUMIDITY SENSOR
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BA/H300 3% Humidity w/ Interchangeable Output of 0-5 VDC or 4-20 mA output
BA/H310 3% Humidity, 0-10 VDC output
BA/H312 3% Humidity, 2-10 VDC output
ENCLOSURE OPTION
DBB BapiBox Enclosure, IP66 Rated, UV Resistant Polycarbonate
DBB2 BapiBox2 Enclosure, IP66 Rated, UV Resistant Polycarbonate
DWP Weatherproof Enclosure, NEMA 3R Rated Metal Enclosure
Example: BA/H300DBB2
3% Duct mount humidity transmitter, 0-10 VDC output, BB2 enclosure
BAPI OSA HUMIDITY SENSOR
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BA/H300 3% Humidity w/ Interchangeable Output of 0-5 VDC or 4-20 mA output
BA/H310 3% Humidity, 0-10 VDC output
BA/H312 3% Humidity, 2-10 VDC output
ENCLOSURE OPTION
OBB BapiBox Enclosure, IP66 Rated, UV Resistant Polycarbonate
OBB2 BapiBox2 Enclosure, IP66 Rated, UV Resistant Polycarbonate
OWP Weatherproof Enclosure, NEMA 3R Rated Metal Enclosure
Example: BA/H300OWP
3% OSA mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output, weather proof housing

586. HUMIDITY 542HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
SRH13 SERIES
Accuracy 3% RH (0-100% RH) @ 73°F (23°C)

Stability
<1%RH/yr @ 73°F (23°C), 50% RH
Supply Voltage 12-30 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 2-wire
Maximum Output
Impedance 700Ω @ 24 VDC, Ω = (supply - 10) /
0.02
Sensing Technology Replaceable capacitive
Sensor Protection Porous polyethylene
Protection Reverse polarity protection
Operating Humidity 0 to100%
Operating Temperature -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Enclosure
Room ABS plastic (flammability 94V-0)
Duct/OSA Polycarbonate (flammability, 94V-0),
NEMA 4 (IP65)
Wiring Terminations Pluggable terminal block
Dimensions
Room 4.7"H x 2.8"W x 1.0"D
(12 x 7 x 2.5 cm)
Duct 5.1"L x 2.7"W x 2.4"D
(13 x 6.8 x 7 cm) 8.5" (21.6 cm)
probe length 1/2" probe Ø
OSA 6.1"L x 4"W x 12.5"D
(15.5 x 10 x 32 cm)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight Room
0.5 lb (0.23 kg)
Duct 1.3 lb (0.59 kg)
OSA 2.6 lb (1.2 kg)
Warranty 1 year (sensor) 3 years
(electronics only)
DESCRIPTION
Designed for the HVAC control system, the Setra SRH13
Series of humidity transmitters offer reliable measurement
of RH levels from 0 to 100% RH with an accuracy of ±3%
.
A
vailable in wall, duct, and outside air configurations, the
SRH13 Series transmitters are easy to install and service if necessary. The transmitters have a field replaceable sensor
tip that allows the end user to replace sensors in the field eliminating factory calibration and downtime
.
FEATURES
• ±3% RH accuracy
• No recalibration required
• Replaceable sensor
• Capacitive sensor technology
• Reverse polarity protection
Shield
RTN/COM
+EXC
6
5
4
3
Ground connection
(not used)
(not used)
(not used)
2 RH (4 to 20 mA) output
1 Vin
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
SRH13P0
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SRH13PO11T0N 3% Outside air humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
SRH13PD11T0N 3% Duct mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
SRH13PW11T0N 3% Wall mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
ACCESSORIES
SR33PT0 Replacement 3% humidity sensor
SRH13PD
SRH113PW
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

587. 543HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ROOM, DUCT AND OSA 3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
GEH3 SERIES
Accuracy 3% (10% to 90%)
Supply Voltage 12-30 VDC, 2.4 VA
Signal Output 4-20 mA/0-5V/0-10V selectable;
0-100% RH
Maximum Output Impedance mA
700Ω maximum @ 24 VDC
Minimum Output Impedance VDC
10 kΩ minimum
Sensing Technology Capacitive and replaceable
Operating Humidity 0% to 99%, non-condensing
Operating Temperature -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Enclosure Rating
Room ABS plastic, UL94V Room Installed
IP20, NEMA 1
Duct/OSA IP42, NEMA 3R Stainless steel with
remo
vable tip, PTFE Teflon® Shield
Wiring Terminations
16 to 22 AWG terminals
Weight
Room 0.5 lb. (0.23 kg)
Duct/OSA 1.3 lb. (0.59 Kg)
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The Amphenol Advance Systems Model GEH3 Series 3%
Accuracy Humidity Transmitters are designed specifically
for commercial building automation systems (BAS)
. The room,
duct, and OSA transmitters have replaceable sensor tips and switch-selectable outputs of 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC
. The GEH3 Series also has an optional temperature
transmitter, which has the same selectable outputs as humidity
. All duct and OSA units come in weather-resistant
enclosures rated for IP42 or NEMA 3R applications.
FEATURES
• ±3% accuracy
• Temperature compensated
• Field-selectable 4-20 mA, 0-10V, or 0-5V outputs
• Replaceable sensor
• Optional temperature transmitter
SPECIFICATIONS
SW3SW1
VI VI
J8
TH
TH
I2-TMP
I2RH/P–
I1RH/P+24 VDC
4-20 mA/RH
4-20 mA/Temp
Switch Positions for Voltage Mode Switch Positions for Current Mode
VOLTAGE MODE
SW3SW1
VI VI
RH and Temperature - Voltage
CURRENT MODE
RH and Temperature - Current Loop
Switch Selectable 0-5 V or 0-10 V Output
I1RH/P+
I2RH/P–
V-RH
GND
V-TMP
J7
10V
SW2
5V
24 VDC
+
RH
Input
Temp
Input
J7
J8
Voltage
Current
JPR1
3K
10K
10V
SW2
5V
SW1
VI
SW3
VI
Connector and Switch Locations
+
+
–
–
–
Not
used
Only one term inal block provided; move for
either vo ltage or current.
WIRING
OSA
Room
Duct

588. HUMIDITY 544HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Space (Wall) MountCover (all mounts) Duct Mount
1.28
(3.24)
Cover Base
Wiring
Access
4.70
(11.92)
4.70
(11.92)
3.80
(9.63)
2.37
(6.03)
1/2''
(1.27)
knockout
(each side)
Outside
Air
Mount
4.70
(11.92)
6.38
(16.2)
2.75
(7.0) 8.80 (22.37)
4.70
(11.92)
0.5
(1.27)
2.75
(7.0)
in
(cm)
ROOM, DUCT AND OSA 3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
GEH3 SERIES
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
GEH3 RH transmitter 3% accuracy
RH MOUNTING ENCLOSURE
S Decorative room mounting enclosure
D Duct mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure
O OSA mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure and weather shield
SN Decorative room mounting enclosure with NIST certificate
DN Duct mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure with NIST certificate
ON OSA mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure and weather shield with NIST certificate
TEMPERATURE OPTION
TT0 Transmitter, 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C) (S, D, SN, and DN only)
TT2 Transmitter, -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) (D, O, DN, and ON only)
TT3 Transmitter, 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) (All enclosure mounts)
Example: GEH3-SN 3% room RH transmitter with NIST certificate
GEH3-D 3% duct RH transmitter
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994
GEH3-RH Replaceable 3% humidity sensor for room, duct, and OSA
GEH3-RHTT Replaceable 3% humidity and temperature sensor for room, duct and OSA transmitters
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

589. 545HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 5% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
KH5 SERIES
Accuracy 5% RH @ 73°F (23°C) from 5% to
90% RH;
(0%-5% & 90%-100%) add 5%
Drift <±0.5% drift per year
Thermal Effect 0.05%/°F
Supply Voltage 9.5- 28 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA = 0% to 100% RH, two-wire,
loop-powered Passive temperature
output: All Kele standard thermistors
and RTDs
Maximum Output Impedance
(Supply voltage - 9.5 VDC) / 0.02,
725Ω @ 24 VDC
Sensing Technology Precon HS-2000 capacitive
Operating Temperature -20° to 158°F (-29° to 70°C)
Enclosure Rating
KHR White plastic, UL94HB
KHD Metal handy box
KHO NEMA 3R plastic box
Probe KHD
1/2" aluminum tube with expanded
Teflon® filter
KHO 1/2" aluminum tube with 40 micron
stainless steel sintered filter
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Weight (without options)
KHR 0.2 lb (0.09 kg)
KHD 1.2 lb (0.54 kg)
KHR 0.5 lb (0.23 kg)
Approvals RoHS
Warranty 18 months
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KHR, KHD, and KHO Series Humidity
Transmitters are specifically designed for use in HVAC/BAS
applications
. These instruments measure relative humidity
from 0% to 100%. The standard two-wire, 4-20 mA output
provides low-cost humidity monitoring for building control.
The RH tr
ansmitters are available with thermistor or RTD
temperature sensors
. They come in room (KHR), duct (KHD),
and OSA (KHO) mounting styles.
FEATURES
• Calibration-free interchangeable sensors
• Twelve-point computerized calibration
J1
12-28
VDC
4-20 mA
RH signal
Optional
temperature
sensor to
controller
V+ TTRH
THRM THRM
24 VDC
Power
supply
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS

590. HUMIDITY 546HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
RH
LOOP
+V
J5
J4
SENSOR
Temperature
sensor output to
BAS Controller
12-28
VDC
4-20mA
RH
Signal
24 VDC
Power
Supply
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 5% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
KH5 SERIES
INSTALLATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KHD5 Duct mounted 5% humidity transmitter
KHO5 Outside air 5% humidity transmitter
KHR5 Wall mounted room/space 5% humidity transmitter
    Optional temperature ranges
T3 10,000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III
T21 2252fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II
T22 3000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II
T24 10,000 thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II
T27 100,000 thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II
T42 20,000 thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type IV
T81 100  RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C), 385 platinum curve
T85 1000 RTD @32˚F (0˚C), 385 platinum curve
T91 1000 RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C), 375 platinum curve 
OPTIONS
CL1 Custom one  color logo, KHR5 only
XJ1
RJ11 externally-accessible communication jack (CCRJ11AD required), KHR5 only
XJ2 Internal RJ11 communication jack, KHR5 only
XLED LED indicator lamp 24V AC/DC green, KHR5 only
XMB
Momentary pushbutton switch, jumpered across sensor or pot (JP1), KHR5 only
WP Weatherproof housing, KHD5 only 
Example: KHD5-T3-WP  Duct mounted 5% humidity transmitter with
10,000fi thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III and weatherproof housing 
KHD5 T3 WP
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

591. 547HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 5% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
GEH5 SERIES
Accuracy 5% (10% to 90%)
Supply Voltage 18-30 VDC, 100 mA
Signal Output 4-20 mA/0-5V/0-10V selectable;
0-100% RH
Maximum Output
Impedance 700Ω maximum @ 24 VDC
Minimum Output Impedance
10 kΩ minimum
Sensing Technology Capacitive and replaceable
Operating Humidity 0% to 99%, non-condensing
Operating Temperature -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Enclosure Rating Room
ABS plastic, UL94V Room Installed
IP20, NEMA 1
Duct/OSA IP42, NEMA 3R Stainless steel with remo
vable tip, PTFE Teflon®
shield
Wiring Terminations 16 to 22 AWG terminals
Weight Room
0.34 lb (0.15 Kg)
Duct 0.96 lb (0.44 Kg)
OSA 1.22 lb (0.55 Kg)
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The Amphenol Advanced Sensors Model GEH5 Series 5%
Accuracy Humidity Transmitters are designed specifically
for commercial building automation systems (BAS)
. The room,
duct, and OSA transmitters have replaceable sensor tips and switch-selectable outputs of 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC
. The GEH5 Series also has an optional temperature
transmitter, which has the same selectable outputs as humidity
. All duct and OSA units come in weather-resistant
enclosures rated for IP42 or NEMA 3R applications.
FEATURES
• ±5% accuracy
• Temperature compensated
• Field-selectable 4-20 mA, 0-10V, or 0-5V outputs
• Replaceable sensor
• Optional temperature transmitter
SW3SW1
VI VI
J8
TH
TH
I2-TMP
I2RH/P–
I1RH/P+24 VDC
4-20 mA/RH
4-20 mA/Temp
Switch Positions for Voltage Mode Switch Positions for Current Mode
VOLTAGE MODE
SW3SW1
VI VI
RH and Temperature - Voltage
CURRENT MODE
RH and Temperature - Current Loop
Switch Selectable 0-5 V or 0-10 V Output
I1RH/P+
I2RH/P–
V-RH
GND
V-TMP
J7
10V
SW2
5V
24 VDC
+
RH
Input
Temp
Input
J7
J8
Voltage
Current
JPR1
3K
10K
10V
SW2
5V
SW1
VI
SW3
VI
Connector and Switch Locations
+
+
–
–
–
Not
used
Only one term inal block provided; move for
either vo ltage or current.
WIRINGSPECIFICATIONS
OSA
Room
Duct

592. HUMIDITY 548HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 5% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
GEH5 SERIES
Space (Wall) MountCover (all mounts) Duct Mount
1.28
(3.24)
Cover Base
Wiring
Access
4.70
(11.92)
4.70
(11.92)
3.80
(9.63)
2.37
(6.03)
1/2''
(1.27)
knockout
(each side)
Outside
Air
Mount
4.70
(11.92)
6.38
(16.2)
2.75
(7.0) 8.80 (22.37)
4.70
(11.92)
0.5
(1.27)
2.75
(7.0)
in
(cm)
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
GEH5 RH transmitter 5% accuracy
RH MOUNTING ENCLOSURE
S Decorative room mounting enclosure
D Duct mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure
O OSA mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure and weather shield
SN Decorative room mounting enclosure with NIST certificate
DN Duct mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure with NIST certificate
ON OSA mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure and weather shield with NIST certificate
TEMPERATURE OPTION
TT0 Transmitter, 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C) (S, D, SN, and DN only)
TT2 Transmitter, -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) (D, O, DN, and ON only)
TT3 Transmitter, 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) (All enclosure mounts)
Example: GEH5-SN 5% room RH transmitter with NIST certificate
GEH5-D 5% duct RH transmitter
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
GEH5-RH Replaceable 5% humidity sensor for room, duct, and OSA transmitters
GEH5-RHTT Replaceable 5% humidity and temperature sensor for room, duct and OSA transmitters
DCP
A-1.2
Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

593. 549HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 5% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
A/RH5 SERIES
Accuracy ±5% @ 77°F (25°C) from
10% to 95%
Thermal Effect <0.005% per °F (<0.01 per °C)
Supply Voltage 12-40 VDC or 24 VAC, selectable
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC
(field selectable)
Measurement Range 0% to 100%
Sensing Technology Capacitive
Operating Temperature
Room 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Duct/OSA -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Dimensions Room
3.8"H x 2.8"W x 0.9"D
(9.8 x 7 x 2.3 cm)

Duct 3.6" (9 cm) Ø head with 8.15"L
(20 cm) probe 0.75" (1.9 cm) Ø
OSA 3.6" (9 cm) Ø head with 3.0"L
(7.6 cm) probe 1.4" (3.6 cm) Ø
Enclosure Room
Plastic Delta-style
Duct/OSA Plastic weatherproof
Weight Room
0.22 lb (0.1 kg)
Duct 1.2 lb (0.54 kg)
OSA 0.6 lb (0.27 kg)
SP 0.2 lb (0.09 kg)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The ACI A/RH5 Series Relative Humidity Transmitters
utilize a capacitive sensing element to deliver a proportional
4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5 VDC, or 0 to 10 VDC output
. It is available
for room, duct, outside, and stainless steel wall plate applications
. The A/RH5 Series has on board DIP switches
which allow the user to select the desired output signal and can be powered by AC or DC power sources
.
FEATURES
• Popular room housing
• Five-year warranty
• Duct and OSA twist-off NEMA 4 housing
• 24 VDC or 24 VAC power
• Field selectable current or voltage outputs
• Single point field calibration
• Digital display option
• Optional temperature sensor
SPECIFICATIONS
A/RH5-R
A/RH5-SP
A/RH5-O
A/RH5-D
Output Selection Switches (SW 1)
4-20 mA Output
0-10 VDC Output
0-5 VDC Output
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
WIRING
2 Wire Current Output Signal
3 Wire Current Output Signal
Voltage Output Signal
DC Supply Voltage
4-20 mA Output
Supply Ground / Signal Common
AC or DC Supply Voltage
0-10 or 0-5 VDC Output Signal
4-20 mA Output
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
AC or DC Supply Voltage
Supply Ground / Signal Common
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT

594. HUMIDITY 550HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 5% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
A/RH5 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: A/RH5-100-R A 5% accuracy room
humidity transmitter with 100 flfi
RTD
A/RH5 R100--
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A/RH5 5% accuracy humidity transmitter
AN T ype III 10,000flfithermistor
CP Type II 10,000flfithermistor
20K 20,000flfithermistor
100 100flfi385 PT RTD
1K 1,000flfi385 PT RT D
R Room
D Duct
O Outside air
SP Stainless steel plate passive sensors only
2.25
(5.7)
7.15
(18.2)
1.07
(2.7)
Stainless
Plate
Duct
0.65 (1.7)
0.75 (1.9)
80 Micron Sintered
Stainless Steel Filter
0.75 (1.9)
0.18
(0.5)
O.D. Ref
0.46
(1.2)
0.58
(1.5)
Outside
2.69
(6.8)
0.86 (2.2)
4.68 (11.9)
3.95 (10.0)
0.75 (1.9)
2.25 (5.7)
(4) PG11/0.5" (1.27) NPT
Knockouts
4.24 (10.8)
3.60 (9.1)
6.10
(15.5)
3.00 (7.6)
1.40 (3.6)
1.00
(2.5)
PG11 Watertight Fitting
(Cable Dia. 0.12 to 0.28"/
0.3 to 0.7 cm)
Plastic Cover fo r
Stainless Steel Filter to
Protect Sensor during
Wash Down
Stainless Plate
4.5
(1.4)
0.75
(1.9)
2.75 (7.0)
1.40
(3.6)
Plastic
Washer
80 Micron
Stainless
Steel
Sintered
FIlter
2.70
(6.9)
1.00
(2.5)
in
(cm)
2.25 (5.7)
2.75
(7.0)
3.84
(9.8)
Room
3.84 (9.8)0.89 (2.3)
0.79
(2.0)
0.60
(1.5)
0.92
(2.3)
4.51
(11.5)
DIMENSIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979

595. 551HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
SRH13PD
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 5% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
SRH15 SERIES
Accuracy 5% RH (0-100% RH) @ 73°F (23°C)

Drift
<1% RH/yr @ 73°F (23°C), 50% RH
Supply Voltage 12-30 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 2-wire
Maximum Output
Impedance 700Ω @ 24 VDC Ω = (supply - 10) /
0.02
Sensing Technology Replaceable capacitive polymer
Sensor Protection Porous polyethylene
Protection Reverse polarity protection
Operating Humidity 0 to100%
Operating Temperature -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Enclosure Room
ABS plastic (flammability, 94V-0)
Duct/OSA Polycarbonate (flammability, 94V-0),
NEMA 4 (IP65)
Wiring Terminations Pluggable terminal block
Dimensions
Room 4.7"H x 2.8"W x 1.0"D
(12 x 7 x 2.5 cm)
Duct 5.1"L x 2.7"W x 2.4"D
(13 x 6.8 x 7 cm) 8.5" (21.6 cm)
probe length 1/2" probe Ø
OSA 6.1"L x 4"W x 12.5"D
(15.5 x 10 x 32 cm)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight Room
0.5 lb (0.23 kg)
Duct 1.3 lb (0.59 kg)
OSA 2.6 lb (1.2 kg)
Warranty 1 year (sensor) 3 years
(electronics only)
DESCRIPTION
Designed for the HVAC control system, the Setra SRH15
Series Humidity Transmitters offer reliable measurement of
RH levels from 0 to 100% with an accuracy of ±5%
. Available
in wall, duct, and outside air configurations, the SRH Series transmitters are easy to install and service if necessary
. The
transmitters utilize a field replaceable sensor tip that allows the end user to replace sensors on-site—eliminating factory calibration and downtime
.
FEATURES
• ±5% RH accuracy
• No recalibration required
• Replaceable sensor
• Capacitive sensor technology
• Reverse polarity protection
Shield
RTN/COM
+EXC
6
5
4
3
Ground connection
(not used)
(not used)
(not used)
2 RH (4 to 20 mA) output
1 Vin
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
SRH13P0
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES
SR35PT0 Replaceable 5% humidity sensor
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SRH5PO11T0N 5% Outside air humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
SRH5PD11T0N 5% Duct mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
SRH5PW11T0N 5% Wall mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output
SRH113PW
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

596. HUMIDITY 552HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
DEW POINT, ENTHALPY & WET BULB TRANSMITTERS
DP4A, EN4A, WB4A
Supply Voltage 18-30 VDC, 100 mA
Accuracy
Enthalpy ±2 BTU/lb
Dew Point ±1.8°F (±1°C)
Wet Bulb ±3°F (±1.7°C)
Dry Bulb ±0.5°F (±0.9°C)
Signal Output Field selectable: 4-20 mA (700Ω max
load), 0-5 V, or 0-10 V Humidity and dry bulb temperature
Measurement Range Dew Point Duct/OSA
-20° to 120°F (-28.8° to 49°C)
Space 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C)
Enthalpy Space/Duct/OSA
0-50 BTU/lb
Wet Bulb Duct/OSA
0° to 100°F (-17.8° to 37.8°C)
Space 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C)
Dry Bulb Duct/OSA
-20° to 120°F (-28.8° to 49°C)
Space 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C)
Sensing Technology Capacitive and replaceable
Operating Humidity 0 to 99% RH, non-condensing
Operating Temperature -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Weight
Room 0.34 lb (0.15 Kg)
Duct 0.96 lb (0.44 Kg)
OSA 1.22 lb (0.55 Kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Amphenol Advanced Sensors Model DP4 Dew
Point, WB4 Wet Bulb, and EN4 Enthalpy Transmitters are
rugged, compact, and ideally suited for monitoring dew point,
wet bulb, or enthalpy in building automation and process
applications
. Using a capacitive RH sensor and an RTD
temperature sensor, the unit’s microprocessor computes the dew point, wet bulb, or enthalpy
. Two linear outputs provide a
4-20mA signal for dew point, wet bulb, or enthalpy, and a 4-20 mA signal for dry bulb
. temperature.
FEA
TURES
•
Dew point accuracy of ±1.8°F (±1°C) over the specified
range
• Enthalpy accuracy of ±2 BTU/lb over specified range
• Wet bulb accuracy of ±3°F over the specified range
• Dry bulb accuracy of ±.05°F (±0.9°C)over the specified
range
• Two 4-20 mA output signals
• Microprocessor-based signal processing
• Weather resistant duct/OSA mounting
• Temperature compensated
APPLICATIONS
• DP4 supply air setpoint (condensation prevention)
• EN4 economizer efficiency
• WB4 evaporative cooling decision potential
SPECIFICATIONS
OSA
Room
Duct

597. 553HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Space (Wall) MountCover (all mounts) Duct Mount
1.28
(3.24)
Cover Base
Wiring
Access
4.70
(11.92)
4.70
(11.92)
3.80
(9.63)
2.37
(6.03)
1/2''
(1.27)
knockout
(each side)
Outside
Air
Mount
4.70
(11.92)
6.38
(16.2)
2.75
(7.0) 8.80 (22.37)
4.70
(11.92)
0.5
(1.27)
2.75
(7.0)
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS
DEW POINT, ENTHALPY & WET BULB TRANSMITTERS
DP4A, EN4A, WB4A
SW3SW1
VI VI
J8
TH
TH
I2-TMP
I2XR/P–
I1XR/P+Vin
XR RTN
TEMP RTN
Switch Positions for Voltage Mode Switch Positions for Current Mode
VOLTAGE MODE
SW3SW1
VI VI
XR and Temperature - Voltage
CURRENT MODE
XR and Temperature - Current Loop
Switch Selectable 0-5 V or 0-10 V Output
I1DP/P+
I2DP/P–
V-XR
GND
V-TMP
J7
10V
SW2
5V
24 VDC
+
XR
Temp
J7
J8
Voltage
Current
JPR1
3K
10K
10V
SW2
5V
SW1
VI
SW3
VI
Connector and Switch Locations
+
+
–
–
–
Not
used
Only one terminal bl ock provided; move for
either voltage or current.
*XR represents; DP - Dewpoint;
EN-Enthalpy; WB - Wet bulb
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
EN4A-D Duct enthalpy and dry bulb transmitter
EN4A-O OSA enthalpy and dry bulb transmitter
DP4A-D Duct dew point and dry bulb transmitter
EN4A-S Room enthalpy and dry bulb transmitter
DP4A-O OSA/Wall dew point and dry bulb transmitter
DP4A-S Room dew point and dry bulb transmitter
WB4A-D Duct wet bulb and dry bulb transmitter
WB4A-O OSA wet bulb and dry bulb transmitter
WB4A-S Room wet bulb and dry bulb transmitter
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

598. HUMIDITY 554HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
DEW POINT, ENTHALPY & WET BULB TRANSMITTERS
HMD/S/W8XD/H/W SERIES
Supply Voltage 10 - 28 VDC
Accuracy
Dew Point, Wet Bulb & Dry Bulb
±1.8°F (1.0°C)
Enthalpy ±2 BTU/lb
Relative Humidity ±3% RH
Signal Output (2, Dry Bulb Temperature & Model
Specific) 4-20 mA @ 600Ω
Measurement Range
Dew Point, Wet Bulb & Dry Bulb
-40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)

Enthalpy
-10 tp 190 BTU/lb (-40 to 460 kj/hg)

Relative Humidity
0 to 199%
Sensing Technology Viasal Intercap®
Operating Humidity 0 to 99 % non-condensing
Operating Temperature -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Dimensions
Duct 5.2" H x 2.8" W x 11.5" D
(13.1 x 7.2 x 29.1 cm)
OSA 8.1" H x 4.8" W x 3.9" D
(20.7 x 12.2 x 10 cm)
Room 7.6" H x 2.8" W x 1.6" D
(19.3 x 7.2 x 4.1 cm)
Approvals CE
Weight
Duct 0.65 lb (0.29 Kg)
OSA 1.6 lb (0.72 Kg)
Room 0.25 lb (0.11 Kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Vaisala Model HMX8XD Dew Point, HMX8XW Wet
Bulb, and HMX8XH Enthalpy Transmitters are rugged,
compact, and ideally suited for monitoring dew point,
wet bulb, or enthalpy in building automation and process
applications
. Using a Vaisala Intercap
®
RH sensor and an
RTD temperature sensor, the unit's microprocessor computes the dew point, wet bulb, or enthalpy
. Two linear outputs
provide a 4-20mA signal for dew point, wet bulb, or enthalpy, and a 4-20 mA signal for dry bulb
. temperature.
FEA
TURES
•
Dew point, Wet Bulb and Dry Bulb accuracy of ±1.8°F
(±1°C) over the specified range
• Enthalpy accuracy of ±2 BTU/lb over specified range
• Two 4-20 mA output signals
• Microprocessor-based signal processing
• Weather resistant duct/OSA mounting
• Temperature compensated
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HMD82TD Duct dew point and dry bulb transmitter
HMS82TD Outside Air dew point and dry bulb transmitter
HMW88TD Room dew point and dry bulb transmitter
HMD82H Duct ehtanlpy and dry bulb transmitter
HMS82H Outside Air enthalpy and dry bulb transmitter
HMW88H Room enthalpy and dry bulb transmitter
HMD82W Duct wet bulb and dry bulb transmitter
HMS82W Outside Air wet bulb and dry bulb transmitter
HMW88W Room wet bulb and dry bulb transmitter
HMD82 Duct dry bulb and dry bulb transmitter
HMS82 Outside Air dry bulb and dry bulb transmitter
HMW88 Room dry bulb and dry bulb transmitter
APPLICATION
• Dew point for supply air setpoint (condensation
prevention)
• Enthalpy for economizer efficiency
• Wet bulb for evaporative cooling decision potential
SPECIFICATIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
HMD82
HMS82
HWM88

599. 555HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
INFRARED DEW POINT & GRAINS TRANSMITTER
9002
Accuracy Dew point: ±3.6°F (2.0°C) @ 77°F
Supply Voltage 24 VAC, ±25%, 2.75 VA
Signal Output simultaneous outputs:
0-10V @ 1000Ω min
4-20 mA @ 500Ω max
Relay Output SPDT, 2A @ 24 VAC
Measurement Range Dew point: 27° to 80°F (-3° to 27°C)
Sensing Technology Nondispersive infrared
Calibration In field with nitrogen gas
Adjustments Setpoint: Adjustable, full range
Differential: Adjustable, full range
Altitude Limits Correctable to 5000' (1524m)
Keypads Four-key menu control
Life Expectancy 15 years
Display Two-line, 1/2" (1.27 cm) LCD
Output Range Adjust Within 0° to 80°F (-17 to 26°C)
Operating Humidity 0% to 98%
Operating Temperature 32° to 120°F (0° to 50°C)
Warranty 18 months
DESCRIPTION
The Amphenol Advanced Sensors VaporStat Model
9002 is an absolute humidity transmitter that measures the
amount of water vapor in the air with adversity to temperature
variations
. The moisture level is then calculated as dew point
and transmitted simultaneously as 0-10 VDC and 4-20 mA.
A display and keyboard are incorporated for local indication and parameter adjustment
. A contact closure is also
incor
porated with keyboard entries for set point and
differential
. The Model 9002 is wall-mounted and available
with accessories for duct and OSA applications.
APPLICATION
The Model 9002 sampling chamber measures the infrared
light absorbed by the moisture in the air and processes
it as dew point or grains of moisture per pound of dry air
.
The 0-10
VDC or 4-20 mA output ranges are selected at
the keyboard and displayed on the LCD readout
. A control
contact energiz
es at the set point entered on the keyboard
.
The
Model 9002 is ideally suited for local alarm and signaling
for clean room controls, desiccant system controls, paper mill controls, and textile process controls as well as condensation prevention
.
SPECIFICATIONS
9002
9002 and
T1508 Enclosure
FEATURES
• De •
0-10V and 4-20 mA output
• Digital display or blank cover
• Patented infrared absorption platform
• Gold-plated element for durability
• Built-in keyboard for range adjust
• Elevation correction via keyboard
• Tamper-resistant keyboard cover
• 10-minute field calibration with gas

600. HUMIDITY 556HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
INFRARED DEW POINT & GRAINS TRANSMITTER
9002
5.63
(14.30)
3.25
(8.26)
1.37
(3.48)
in
(cm)
MOUNTINGDIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
9002 Dew point and grains 0-10 VDC/4-20 mA transmitter and SPDT contact
Tamper Set Screw
+
L1N
NONCInput
AC
COM
Mounting Bracket
24 VACUse either or both
outputs below
0-10V Out
Signal Common
4-20 mA Out
123 8765412
WIRING
clear set enter
Mode
Button
Clear
Button
Arrow
Button
Enter
Button
CONTROLS
SETUP
FACTORY OUTPUT SETTINGS
Dew point, 0° to 80°F (-22° to 25°C) @ sea level
Moisture = 0-140 grains per lb of dry air @ sea level
Relay on @ 50°F (10°C), off @ 59°F (15°C)
CHANGING SETTINGS
1. Press mode and clear at the same time for five seconds
to enter the adjust mode.
2. Press mode key to display item to change:
elevation, dew point, grains, or relay.
3. Use arrow keys to select ranges.
4. Press enter to confirm selection.
5. Press clear to finish and return to normal display.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T1508 Duct-mount accessory enclosure
T1551 OSA-mount accessory enclosure
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979

601. 557HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
3% HUMIDISTATS
VH7200 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The Viconics VH7200 Series Humidistats are designed for
controlling humidification and dehumidification equipment
in HVAC and energy management systems
. The humidistat
utilizes a PI time proportional control algorithm to accurately control relative humidity
. The VH7200 Series features
adjustable control setpoint, and the ability to set the maximum number of output cycles from 3 to 8 per hour
. Units accept a
remote outdoor air temper
ature sensor which can be used to
reset the humidity set point-minimizing energy consumption and condensation on windows and building structures. The
high limit protection (available only on Model VH7270 when
used with a remote humidity sensor) prevents damage due to over-humidification
.
FEA
TURES
•
Designer wall mounting
• 3% RH control accuracy
• Two status LEDs
• Proportional high limit override eliminates
condensation problems
• Sensor failure protection
• Outdoor temperature reset
• Keypad lockout
• Backlit LCD two line display
CU S
MODEL DESCRIPTION
VH7200A1000 Humidistat, on/off (humidify), on/off (dehumidify)
VH7270F1000 Humidistat, 0-10 VDC (humidify), on/off (dehumidify)
VH7270K1000 Humidistat, 0-10 VDC and on/off (humidify), on/off (dehumidify)
Accuracy ±5% RH (20-100% RH) @ 50°F° to 90°F (10°C to 32°C)
Supply Voltage
19-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 2 VA
Signal Output 0-10 VDC, 2 kΩ minimum load
impedance
Relay Output 1A continuous, 3A in-rush maximum
@ 30 VAC
Setpoint Range Humidification 10 to 90% RH
Dehumidification 15 to 95% RH
Binary Inputs Relay dry contact
Sensing Technology Bulk polymer
Display Two line, 16 character LCD
Resolution Humidity 0.1% Temperature ± 0.2°F
(±0.1°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Temperature Range Outdoor Air: -40° to 122°F
(-40° to 50°C)
Enclosure ABS plastic
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Dimensions 4.9"H x 3.4"W x 1.1"D
(12.4 x 8.6 x 2.8 cm)
Approvals UL File E27734, CSA, CE
Weight 0.5 lb (0.23 Kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
On/Off Humidification
On/Off Humidification
24VacCom.24VAC Hot
DEH
HUM RHUM C
On/Off Dehumidification
On/Off Dehumidification
DEH
VH7270K1000
Universal
HL
Digitalinput,drycontact to “Scom”
Remotehumiditysensor(0-10 VDC)
Analog0-10VDC Humidification
DI1 OSHSScom
Outsideair temperaturesensor(thermistor)
Sensor(s)andBI inputcommon
Supply Humidity HighLimit Sensor(0-10 VDC)
HUM
0-10
WIRING
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
HD20K 2% duct-mount humidity sensor 511
KHD2 2% duct mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 509
KTO24 OSA thermistor sensor, Type 2, model 24, ±0.5°F (0.28°C) 1216
ST-O24 OSA thermistor sensor, Type 2, model 24, ±0.36°F (0.20°C) 1217

602. HUMIDITY 558HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Humidify / Fa n Dehumidify / Fa n
24 VAC/VDC
GND 10kfi T ype II thermistor
Terminal-description:
1. Connection for power-supply (24 VAC/VDC, ±10%). In case of DC,
connect the negative power-terminal. Common connection for analog
inputs and outputs.
2. Connection for power-supply (24 VAC/VDC, ±10%). In case of DC,
connect the positive power-terminal.
3. Contact “DO 1” Humidify or Fa n, 2A maximum
4. Contact “DO 1” Humidify or Fa n, 2A maximum
5. Contact “DO 2” Dehumidify or Fan, 2A maximum
6. Contact “DO 2” Dehumidify or Fan, 2A maximum
7. Thermistor input “RT” (10kfi Type II thermistor)
8. Thermistor input “RT” (10kfi Type II thermistor)


TDC-BH-U
Accuracy ±5% RH (10-90%)
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±10%, 50-60 Hz 1.5 VA,
24 VDC, 63 mA
Anolog Input 10K Type II (Type 24) thermistor
Relay Output 2 NO SPST Relays, 2 Amps @ 24
VAC
Operating Humidity 0% to 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Enclosure Rating Polycarbonate PC (UL class V-0)
Wiring Terminations Terminal block (12 to 24 AWG
Approvals CE
Weight 0.48 lb (0.22 kg)
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The Vector Model TDC-BH-U Duct Mount Humidistat is a
stand-alone programmable electronic humidistat designed
for controlling humidification and dehumidification equipment
in HVAC and energy management systems
. The TDC-BH-U
Series features one internal humidity sensor, one external temperature sensor input and two relay outputs
. Humidity
reset is possib
le using the ST-O24 outdoor air temperature
sensor for cold weather applications to prevent condensation
.
The
TDC-BH-U-D Series comes with all of the features
of the base model plus a time clock feature for advanced programming with 48 hour backup.
FEATURES
• Humidification and Dehumidification control
• External temperature input for set point setback
• Programmable user interface
• Optional time clock
• 2 relay outputs
• Easy to read display
• Replaceable sensor
CONNECTION TERMINALS
SPECIFICATIONS
5% DUCT MOUNT HUMIDSTAT
TDC SERIES

603. 559HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
24 VAC
(GND)
TDC-BH-U
2
G
3
Q13
5
Q23
1
G0
4
Q14
6
Q24
7
B1
8
M
Humidify / Dehumidify, TDC-BH-U (-D) Y Binary output 1: Humidify 0 to 24 VAC or 0 to 30 VDC
Y Binary output 2: Dehumidify 0 to 24 VAC or 0 to 30 VDC
R Temperature input for setback: 10kfi T ype II thermistor
Humidify plus fan control, TDC-BH-U (-D) – W04 Y Binary output 1: Humidify 0 to 24 VAC or 0 to 30 VDC
Y Binary output 2: Fan 0 to 24 VAC or 0 to 30 VDC
R Temperature input for setback: 10kfi T ype II thermistor
Dehumidify plus fan control, TDC-BH-U (-D) – W05 Y Binary output 1: Fan 0 to 24 VAC or 0 to 30 VDC
Y Binary output 2: Dehumidify 0 to 24 VAC or 0 to 30 VDC
R Temperature input for setback: 10kfi T ype II thermistor
5% DUCT MOUNT HUMIDSTAT
TDC SERIES
3.0 (7.6) 1.9 (4.7) 3.6 (9.1)
2.7 (6.8)
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
AES-HT-A5 5% Replacement humidity element
AMC-1 Cable gland for SDC-H1
AMC-2 Conduit fitting, 1/2 in NPT for SDC-H
ST-R24 Raw temperature sensor with six foot cable, 10kΩ Type II thermistor 1247
ST-D24 Eight inch duct sensor with six foot cable, 10kΩ Type II thermistor 1197
SD-TN10-20-2 Eight inch duct sensor with six foot cable, 10kΩ Type II thermistor
SDB-TN10-12-W Five inch duct sensor with housing and six foot cable, 10kΩ Type II thermistor
SDB-TN10-20-W Eight inch duct sensor with housing and six foot cable, 10kΩ Type II thermistor
ST-O24 Outdoor temperature sensor 1217
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TDC-BH-U-W20 5% duct mount humidistat for humidification and dehumidification with display
TDC-BH-U-W24 5% duct mount humidifying humidistat with display and fan control option
TDC-BH-U-W25 5% duct mount dehumidifying humidistat with display and fan control option
TDC-BH-U-D-W20 5% duct mount humidistat for humidification and dehumidification with display with programmable time clock
TDC-BH-U-D-W24 5% duct mount humidifying humidistat with display, fan control option and programmable time clock
TDC-BH-U-D-W25 5% duct mount dehumidifying humidistat with display, fan control option and programmable time clock
WIRING

604. HUMIDITY 560HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Humidify / Fa n Dehumidify / Fa n
24 VAC/VDC
GND 10kfi T ype II thermistor
Terminal-description:
1. Connection for power-supply (24 VAC/VDC, ±10%). In case of DC,
connect the negative power-terminal. Common connection for analog
inputs and outputs.
2. Connection for power-supply (24 VAC/VDC, ±10%). In case of DC,
connect the positive power-terminal.
3. Contact “DO 1” Humidify or Fa n, 2A maximum
4. Contact “DO 1” Humidify or Fa n, 2A maximum
5. Contact “DO 2” Dehumidify or Fan, 2A maximum
6. Contact “DO 2” Dehumidify or Fan, 2A maximum
7. Thermistor input “RT” (10kfi Type II thermistor)
8. Thermistor input “RT” (10kfi Type II thermistor)


5% WALL MOUNT HUMIDISTAT
TCY-BH SERIES
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±10%, 50-60 Hz 3 VA,
24 VDC, 125 mA
Accuracy ±5% RH (10-90%)
Anolog Input 10k Type II (Type 24) Thermistor
Relay Output 2 NO SPST Relays, 2 Amps @
24 VAC
Operating Humidity 0% to 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Enclosure Rating ABS plastic (UL94 class V-0)
Wiring Terminations Terminal block (12 to 24 AWG)
Dimensions 4.4"H x 2.9"W x 1.8"D
(11.2 x 7.3 x 4.7 cm)
Approvals CE
Weight 0.58 lb (0.26 kg)
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The Vector Model TCY-BH-U Wall Mount Humidistat is a
stand-alone programmable electronic humidistat designed
for controlling humidification and dehumidification equipment
in HVAC and energy management systems
. The TCY-BH-U
Series features one internal humidity sensor, one external temperature sensor input and two relay outputs
. Humidity
reset is possib
le using the ST-024 outdoor air temperature
sensor for cold weather applications to prevent condensation
.
The
TCY-BH-U-D Series comes with all of the features
of the base model plus a time clock feature for advanced programming with 48 hour backup.
FEATURES
• Humidification and dehumidification control
• External temperature input for set point setback
• Programmable user interface
• Optional time clock
• 2 relay outputs
• Easy to read display
• Replaceable sensor
CONNECTION TERMINALS
SPECIFICATIONS
TCY-BH-U

605. 561HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
5% WALL MOUNT HUMIDISTAT
TCY-BH SERIES
4.45
(11.3)
4.7
(1.8)
2.87 (7.3)
1.69 (4.3)
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
AES-HT-A5 5% Replacement humidity element
AMC-1 Cable gland for SDC-H1
AMC-2 Conduit fitting, 1/2 in NPT for SDC-H
S-TN10-2 Raw temperature sensor with six foot cable, 10kΩ Type II thermistor
SD-TN10-12-2 Eight inch duct sensor with six foot cable, 10kΩ Type II thermistor
SD-TN10-20-2 Eight inch duct sensor with six foot cable, 10kΩ Type II thermistor
SDB-TN10-12-W Five inch duct sensor with housing and six foot cable, 10kΩ Type II thermistor
SDB-TN10-20-W Eight inch duct sensor with housing and six foot cable, 10kΩ Type II thermistor
SOD-TN10 Outdoor temperature sensor
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TCY-BH-U-W20 5% wall mount humidistat for humidification and dehumidification with display with programmable time clock
TCY-BH-U-W24 5% wall mount humidifying humidistat with display, fan control option and programmable time clock
TCY-BH-U-W25 5% wall mount dehumidifying humidistat with display, fan control option and programmable time clock
TCY-BH-U-D-W20 5% wall mount humidistat for humidification and dehumidification with display
TCY-BH-U-D-W24 5% wall mount humidifying humidistat with display and fan control option
TCY-BH-U-D-W25 5% wall mount dehumidifying humidistat with display and fan control option
0...250V AC
24V AC
OV (GND)
TCY-BH-U
2 G
3 Q13
5 Q23
1 G0
4 Q14
6 Q24
7 B1
8 M
YB1
RT
YB2
Humidify/Dehumidify, TCY-BH-U (-D)
YB1 Humidifier 0…24 VAC or 0…30 VDC
YB2 De-humidifier 0…24 VAC or 0…30 VDC
RT Temperature input for setback: NTC 10kfi @ 25°C (77°F)
Humidify plus fan cont
rol, TCY-BH-U (-D) – W04
YB1 Humidifier 0…24 VAC or 0…30 VDC
YB2 F an 0…24 VAC or 0…30 VDC
RT Temperature input for setback: NTC 10kfi @ 25°C (77°F)
Dehumidify plus fan cont
rol, TCY-BH-U (-D) – W05
YB1 F an 0…24 VAC or 0…30 VDC
YB2 De-humidifier 0…24 VAC or 0…30 VDC
RT Temperature input for setback: NTC 10kfi @ 25°C (77°F)

606. HUMIDITY 562HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±10% 3 VA, 50-60 Hz; 24
VDC, 125 mA
Accuracy ±3% RH (20%-80%)
Signal Output
Analog 0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA @250Ω
Digital 24 VAC/VDC @ 2 A
Signal Input
13 0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA @ 240Ω
23 0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA @ 240Ω &
10kΩ Type II thermistor (24)
Measurement Range 0 to 100 % RH
Operating Humidity 0% to 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (-25° to 50°C)
Enclosure Rating ABS Plastic
Sensing Technology Capacitive sensor
Wiring Terminations Terminal block (12 to 24 AWG)
Dimensions 4.4" H x 2.9" W x 1.8" D
(11.2 x 7.3 x 4.7 cm)
Approvals CE
Weight 13
0.58 lb (0.26 Kg)
23 0.6 LB (0.27 kG)
Warranty 2 years
3% WALL AND DUCT PROPORTIONAL CONTROLLER
TCI SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Vector Model TCI Wall and Duct Proportional
Controller is designed for proportional control of
humidification and dehumidification equipment in HVAC and
energy management systems
. The "23" models comes with
a time clock for advanced programming with 48 hour backup and the "13" models do not
. The "H" models have internal
relative humidity sensors and the others without "H" in model number must use a remote relative humidity sensor (ordered separately) for RH measurement
.
FEATURES
• Humidification and dehumidification control
• External temperature input for set point setback
• Programmable user interface
• Optional time clock
• 2 analog outputs and one digital output
• Easy to read display
SPECIFICATIONS
TCI

607. 563HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Thermistor Input
AC/DC
Power Supply
Analog Output
Digital Output
Univseral Input
+–
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
13 Models
23 Models
Com
24+
Output Com
Analog Output
AC/DC
Power Supply
Analog Output
Digital Output
+–
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Com
24+
Output Com
8
Analog Output
Univseral Input
Logic:
13 models with "U" in model number
#7 is Remote Temperature
13 models with "U" in modle number
#7 is Remote Humidity
Logic:
23 models with "U" in model number
#7 is Remote Humidity or Temperature
#8 is Temperature only
23 models with "U" in modle number
#7 is Remote Humidity
#8 is Temperature only
WIRING
3% WALL AND DUCT PROPORTIONAL CONTROLLER
TCI SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TCY3-T1102-H-U-W24 3% wall mount proportional humidistat with display for humidification
TCY3-T1102-H-U-W25 3% wall mount proportional humidistat with display for dehumidification
TCY3-T1102-H-U-D-W24 3% wall mount proportional humidistat with display for humidification plus clock and time schedules
TCY3-T1102-H-U-D-W25 3% wall mount proportional humidistat with display for dehumidification plus clock and time schedules
TCY3-T1102-U-W26 Wall mount proportional humidistat with display for humidification
TCY3-T1102-U-W27 Wall mount proportional humidistat with display for dehumidification
TCY3-T1102-U-D-W26 Wall mount proportional humidistat with display for humidification plus clock and time schedules
TCY3-T1102-U-D-W27 Wall mount proportional humidistat with display for dehumidification plus clock and time schedules
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
HD30K AMC-2 Conduit fitting, 1/2 in NPT for SDC-H 530
KHD3 3% Duct mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 528
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
ST-D24-XH Duct 10KΩ Tpye II thermistor with handi box

608. HUMIDITY 564HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NO
NC
COM
GND
V+
Power Supply
24V AC/DC ±20%
LED continuous red: Operating < 90% RH
LED blinking red: Condensation danger
CONDENSATION MONITOR
EE46
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±20%. 0.1 VA; 24 VDC
±20%, 3 mA
Switch Point 90% RH, ±3%
Relay Output 24 VAC/VDC, 1A
Display Single red LED
Operating Humidity 10 to 100% RH
Operating Temperature 32˚ to 122˚F (0˚ to 50˚C)
Materials Of Construction
Polycarbonate
Enclosure Rating Fire resistant UL94-V0
Dimensions 2.5" H x 2.1" W x 0.9" D
(6.4 x 5.3 x 2.2 cm)
Approvals CE
Weight 0.13 lb (0.95 Kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The E+E EE46 Condensation Monitors are used to monitor
the formation of condensation on chilled ceilings or to prevent
condensation at critical spots of heating, ventilation and air
conditioning systems
. It is also used as a dew point monitor
for systems operating near the dew point.
The condensation monitor measures the relativ
e humidity
near the dew point using its high-quality capacitive sensor
.
Once a 90% RH condition is reached, a contact will energiz
e
signaling an approaching condensation condition and that an appropriate action is required to avoid condensation forming.
An additional status light indicates and visually confir
ms the
condensation danger
.
The EE46 is highly insensitive to dust and dirt and is ideal
for mounting on walls, ducts and pipes up to 2". Each EE46
comes with an adjustab
le and removable cable tie for
mounting but also has an adhesive back for added security
.
FEATURES
• Compact design
• Fast response time
• Dust protection
• Easy mounting
• Visual status indication
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
EE46
Connection Diagram Status Indication

609. 565HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
DIMENSIONS
CONDENSATION MONITOR
EE46
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
EE46 Pipe, wall or duct mounted condensation monitor
Pipe mounting
Dimensions - in (mm) Installation
heat-conductive film
heat-conductive film
Wall mounting
Maximum Ø 2"
(50)
1.32 (33.5)
0.18 (4.5) Ø
0.9 (23)
Maximum 2" (50)
1.70 (43)
2.09 (53)
2.50 (63.5)
0.87
(22.0)

610. HUMIDITY 566HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ROOM AND DUCT HUMIDISTATS
HC-101, HC-201
DESCRIPTION
The Schneider Electric Models HC-101 and HC-201 Humidistats
are used for low or line voltage ON/OFF single-stage control of
humidifiers, dehumidifiers, valves, solenoids, compressors, relays,
and other electrical components
.
FEATURES
• 18-month warranty
• Economical and reliable humidity control
(brown) N .O .
(red) N .C .
(orange)
Common
Drop in RH
Brown make s on drop in humidity .
All units prov ided with green
grounding lead ( ) .
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS / ORDERING INFORMATION
HC-101
10% to 90%
15% to 95%
RH 5%
RH 5%
40 to 125
(4 to 52)
40 to 125
(4 to 52)
-40 to 140
(-40 to 60)
-40 to 140
(-40 to 60)
6" (15.0 cm)
Color-coded leads
Coded screw
terminals
1.0 lb
(0.45 kg)
1.5 lb
(0.68 kg)
Beige
plastic
Metal
4.38 x 2.88 x 1.63
(11.13 x 7.32 x 4.14)
4.38 x 6.50 x 2.25
(11.13 x 16.51 x 5.72)
MODEL
HC-101 HC-201
DESCRIPTION
Room
Duct
SCALE
RANGE
AMBIENT LIMITS °F (°C)
CONNECTION WEIGHT COVER DIMENSIONS
in (cm) (HxWxD)
Operating
Shipping and
Storage
DIFF
HC-201
MAXIMUM ELECTRICAL RATINGS
VAC FLA LRA RESISTIVE PILOT DUTY
MODEL50/60 Hz AMPS VA
HC-101 24 —— 86 0
HC-201 120 7 .2 43 .2 8 345
MAXIMUM ELECTRICAL RATINGS
MOTOR RATINGS VAC 120 208 240 WEIGHT lb (kg)
AC full load amps 6.0 3.5 3.0 1.0 (0.45)
AC locked rotor amps36.0 21.0 18.0 —
Pilot Duty 125 VA, 24-277 VAC (low or line voltage)
ROOM HUMIDISTAT
W43A-14
DESCRIPTION
The SPDT contact action of the Johnson Controls Model W43A-
14 Humidistat provides control of humidifying or dehumidifying
equipment
. A flush-mounting bracket that fita a standard outlet box
is supplied. The Model W43A features field-adjustable high and low
stops. Stops can be set for locked setting.
ACCESSORIES
The Model W43A-14 includes A faceplate for horizontal mounting.
The plate is f
or on-the-job installation over vertical plate
. It can be field
con
verted to concealed adjustment
. Specify plate kit PLT333-12R
(vertical) or PLT333-9R (horizontal).
FEATURES
• One-year warranty
• Horizontal or vertical mounting
H
L
C
Action on increase of humidity
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
W43A-14
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL SWITCH RANGE DIFF % DIMENSIONS
ACTION in (cm) (HxW)
W43A-14 SPDT 0% to 70% RH 4% RH 4.71 x 2.96
(12.0 x 7.5)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
W43A-14C SPDT switch action, 4% RH Diff % Humidistat

611. 567HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
9 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
OUTDOOR ASPIRATED HUMIDITY / TEMPERATURE HOUSING
A21
Supply Voltage 24 VDC @ 110 mA (plus power
requirements for the humidity/
temperature transmitters)
Maximum Output
Impedance
47Ω added to the 4-20 mA transmitter
Fan 12 CFM
Filter Type Washable foam filter
Operating Temperature
-40° to 120°F (-40° to 49°C)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 3R with white enamel paint and latch f
or padlock
Hinge Piano-type, left-hand side
Weight 6.31 lb (2.9 Kg)
Warranty 1 year
5.0
(12.7)
0.5
(1.27)
1.75
(4.44)
6.5
(16.51)
5.25
(13.34)
0.5
(1.27)
0.5 (1.27)
1.0 (2.54)
FanBCDEFA
Lower Back Plate*
4.25"W x 4.25"H x 3"D
Conduit Entry
1/2" & 3/4" Knockouts
Interior
0.37
(0.95)
3.65
(9.27)
1.0
(2.54)
*Estimated usable dimensions
Terminal Strip
(projected
forward
3.5 (8.89) for
easy wiring)
Front View
Right Side
Left Side
Air Intake
Air Exhaust
Bottom View
1.64
(4.15)
7.0 (17.78)
4.7
(12.06)
3.0 (7.62)
0.25
(0.64)
0.20
(0.50)
6.32 (16.05)
0.5" and 0.75"
knockouts on
centerline and
height shown
10.0
(25.40)
9.0
(22.86)
Mounting
3.0
(7.62)
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
Model A21 Outdoor Aspirated Humidity/Temperature
Housing provides powered aspiration for outdoor monitoring
of humidity and temperature
. The NEMA 3R enclosure
is painted white to reduce the effect of radiation, and the enclosure has a lockable latch for security
.
BCDE FA
24VDC
Power
Supply
Do not use
or terminate
A21
4-20 mA to
Controller Input
Installed
Transmitter
–
Not used
+ – +
+
To Controller Input
Dry Bulb Temperature
+
+
*
Temperature sensors are directly wired to the controller. They do not wire to the terminal strip.*
-
-
WIRING
OPERATION
The fan pulls air in from the lower vent intake and exhausts
the air out the upper opposing vent of the enclosure at 12
CFM
. The 24 VDC power is supplied for both the fan and
transmitters. The transmitter power is internally filtered from
any fan motor noise that might affect the transmitter signal.
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A21 Outdoor aspirated humidity/temperature housing
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
A21-FAN Replacement fan assembly
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
HW20K 2% wall-mount humidity sensor 511
HW30K 3% wall-mount humidity sensor 530
KTM* Series KTM* Series raw encapsulated thermistor and RTD sensors 1245
PN-46 Aluminum sensor holder with adhesive backing 1298
ST-R* Series ST-R* Series raw encapsulated thermistor and RTD sensors

612. HUMIDITY 568HUMIDITY
9 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
HUMIDITY SELECTION CHART
HUMIDITY SELECTION CHART
PRODUCT MNFR ACCURACY MOUNTING SIGNAL MEASUREMENT ATTRIBUTES APPLICATION
W43A-14 JCI 4% diff . Wall SPDT RH Accuracy Limit control
HC-101 Schneider 5% diff . Wall SPDT RH Aesthetics Limit control
HC-201 Schneider 5% diff . Duct SPDT RH Duct Limit control
GEH5S GE 5% Wall 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional Replacea ble sensor Monitori ng
SHR-5P-W Setra 5% Wall 4-20/0-10 RH Replaceabl e sensor Monitori ng
GEH5D GE 5% Duct 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional Replaceable sensor Monitori ng
SRH-5P-D Setra 5% Duct 4-20/0-10 RH Replaceable sensor Monitori ng
GEH5O GE 5% OSA 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional Replaceable sensor Monitori ng
SRH-5P-O Setra 5% OSA 4-20/0-10 RH Replaceable sensor Monitori ng
KHR3 Kele 3% Wall 4-20 mA RH/T optional Replaceabl e sensor Monitori ng
SHR-3P-W Setra 3% Wall 4-20 mA RH Replaceabl e sensor Monitori ng
HW30K/HW31K Kele 3% Wall 4-20 mA RH/T optional Executive housing Monitori ng
HMW40/50 Vaisala 3% Wall 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional Replaceable sensor Monitori ng
ACI-3-R ACI 3% Wall 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional Delta housing Monitori ng
BA/H300-B BAPI 3% Wall 4-20/0-5 RH/T optional BAPI housing Monitori ng
KHD3 Kele 3% Duct 4-20 mA RH/T optional Replaceable sensor Monitori ng
SHR-3P-D Setra 3% Duct 4-20 mA RH Replaceable sensor Monitori ng
HD30K/31K Kele 3% Duct 4-20 mA RH/T optional Metal/unive rsal enclosure Monitori ng
HMD40/50 Vaisala 3% Duct 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional Replacea ble sensor Monitori ng
ACI-3-D ACI 3% Duct 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-10V Monitori ng
BA/H300-D BAPI 3% Duct 4-20/0-5 RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-5V Monitori ng
KHO3 Kele 3% OSA 4-20 mA RH/T optional Replaceable sensor Monitori ng
SHR-3P-O Setra 3% OSA 4-20 mA RH Replaceabl e sensor Monitori ng
HO30K Kele 3% OSA 4-20 mA RH/T optional Metal enclosure Monitori ng
HO31K Kele 3% OSA 4-20 mA RH/T optional Universal enclosure Monitori ng
ACI-3-O ACI 3% OSA 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-10V Monitori ng
BA/H300-O BAPI 3% OSA 4-20/0-5 RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-5V Monitoring
VH7200 Viconics 3% Wall 0-10 V RH Humidistat Limit control
KHR2 Kele 2% Wall 4-20 mA RH/T optional Replaceabl e sensor RH control
HW20K Kele 2% Wall 4-20 mA RH/T optional Executive housing RH control
ACI-2-R ACI 2% Wall 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional Delta housing RH control
GEH2S GE 2% Wall 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional Replacea ble sensor RH control
EHRH GE 2% Wall 4-20 mA RH/T optional Wash-d
own housing RH control, pool
HT2-S Minco 2% Wall 4-20 mA RH/T optional Minco housing RH control
HT829-S Minco 2% Wall 4-20 mA RH, RH/T One-point calibration RH control
HMW-60U Vaisala 2% Wall 4-20 mA RH/T optional Vaisala housing RH control
HMW-70U Vaisala 2% Wall 0-5 VDC RH/T optional Voltage output RH control
BA/H200-B BAPI 2% Wall 4-20/0-5 RH/T optional BAPI housing RH control
KHD2 Kele 2% Duct 4-20 mA RH/T optional Replaceable sensor RH control
HD20K Kele 2% Duct 4-20 mA RH/T optional Metal enclosure RH control
ACI-2-D ACI 2% Duct 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-10V RH control
GEH2D GE 2% Duct 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional Replaceable sensor RH control
HT2D Minco 2% Duct 4-20 mA RH/T optional Metal enclosure RH control
HT829-D Minco 2% Duct 4-20 mA RH, RH/T One-point calibration RH control
HMD-60U Vaisala 2% Duct 4-20 mA RH/T optional Metal enclosure RH control
HMD-70U Vaisala 2% Duct 0-5 VDC RH/T optional Metal enclosure RH control
BA/H200-D BAPI 2% Duct 4-20/0-5 RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-5V RH control
KHO2 Kele 2% OSA 4-20 mA RH/T optional Replaceable sensor RH control
HO20K Kele 2% OSA 4-20 mA RH/T optional Metal enclosure RH control
ACI-2-O ACI 2% OSA 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-10V RH control
GEH2O GE 2% OSA 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional Replaceable sensor RH control
HT2O Minco 2% OSA 4-20 mA RH/T optional Metal enclosure RH control
HT829-O Minco 2% OSA 4-20 mA RH, RH/T One-point calibration RH control
BA/H200-O BAPI 2% OSA 4-20/0-5 RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-5V RH control
EE29 E&E 1.3% Wall 4-20/0-5/0-10 RH/T Metal or plastic housing Clean room control
ACI/RH1-R ACI 1% Wall 4-20 mA RH/T optional Executive housing Clean room control
HT829-S1N1 Minco 1% Wall 4-20 mA RH Minco housing Clean room control
ACI-RH1-D ACI 1% Duct 4-20 mA RH/T optional Plastic enclosure Clean room control
HT829-D1N1 Minco 1% Duct 4-20 mA RH One-point calibration Clean room control
ACI-RH1-O ACI 1% OSA 4-20 mA RH/T optional Plastic enclosure Calculation input
HT829-O1N1 Minco 1% OSA 4-20 mA RH One-point calibration Calculation input
9002 Telair 1.8F Wall/Duct 4-20 mA DP/T IR measurement Condensation control
RH Relative Humidity is the ratio of actual water vapor in the air vs. the wa ter vapor that the air can hold at saturation.
DB Dry bu lb temperature is the temperature of the air using a dry sensor without any effe ct from ev aporative cooling.
WB Wet bulb temperature is the temperature of the air using a wet sensor, which measures the cooling effect from ev aporation.
DP Dew point temperature is the temperature at which water vapor begins to condense into wa ter liquid, which is at 100% RH.
EN Enthalpy is the measure of the heat energy in the air.

613. HUMIDITY
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK
DETECTION
WD2 | p. 570
LU81 | p. 599
LU2 | p. 597
F7-SS | p. 590
SC Cables | p. 581
LD310 | p. 574
Manage and Contain Liquid Assets, As Well As Maintained
Around-the-Clock Monitoring with Leak Detection Sensors.

614. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
DL14 Series | p. 582
WD-1B | p. 569
LD5200 | p. 578
LEVEL & LEAK
DETECTION
Float Switches
MLS Series — Multi-Level Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
KCFS Series
— Float Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
FS7 Series
— Float Level Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
F7 Series
— Float Level Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
F8-SSL
— Stainless Steel Float Level Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
NG2DW1500B
— Mechanical Float Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
LV41, LV42 Series
— Level Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
L8
— General-Purpose Float Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
VS-120R1R9L-01
— Vertical Float Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Leak Detection WD-1B
— Kele Water Detector
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
WD-2-T
— Kele Tape Style Water Detector
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
AQS00660, AQS00661, LD1-24
— Water Sensor / Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
SD-RO1
— Spot Leak Detector
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
LD310 Series
— Cable-Style Water Detector
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
LD1500
— Web-Accessible Leak Detector
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
LD2100
— Web-Accessible Leak Detector
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
LD5200
— Cable-Style Leak Detector
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
LDRA6
— Leak Detection Monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
SC Series, SC-C Series, SC-H Series
— Water, Chemical
(Conductive Fluids) and Hydrocarbon Sensing Cable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Level Controllers DL14, 24, 34 Series EchoPod
— Ultrasonic Level Switch, Transmitter,
and Controller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
WLC Series
— Water Level Controller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Liquid Level Switch LU77/78 Series EchoSwitch
— Ultrasonic Level Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
SS/SP Series
— Condensate Overflow Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Liquid Level Transmitters DL10 Series EchoPod
— Ultrasonic Level Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
LU2 Series EchoSonic
— Ultrasonic Level Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
LU80/81/83/84 Series EchoSpan
— Ultrasonic Level Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . 599
LD31, LD32 Series DeltaSpan
— Level Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
LD34, LD35 Series DeltaSpan
— Level Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
LS-10, LH-10 Series
— Level Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

615. fifl 569LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
KELE WATER DETECTOR
WD-1B
4.5
(11.43)
LED
Window
1/2" FNPT
Conduit
Connection
Gasketed
SS Cover
2.75
(6.99)
0.12
(0.32)
in
(cm)
2.0
(5.08)
0.31 (0.79)
max
1.8
(4.57)
min
0.20
(0.51)
1.75
(4.45)
Mounting Holes 0.187" dia (0.47)
3.75
(9.53 )
Probe height adjustable 0'' to 1.5" (0 to 3.8 cm)
DESCRIPTION
The Kele WD-1B water detector features gold-plated
probes and microchip technology for dependable detection
of conductive liquids
. The Model WD-1B can be operated
from 11-27 VAC/VDC. For application flexibility, SPDT
contacts are provided to connect to a monitoring system. A
height-adjustab
le, cast-aluminum, weatherproof enclosure
is standard
. A green LED visible outside the box indicates
power. A red LED indicates water detected. The Model
WD-1B is also available with an external tape style sensor, the Model WD-2-T
.
FEATURES
• Weatherproof enclosure
• Easy to install
• SPDT alarm contacts
• 11-27 VAC/DC (50/60 Hz)
• Reliable operation
• LEDs for power and alarm indication (green, red)
• Adjustable detection level
(red)
(white)
(yellow)
(blue)
(orange)
Input
Voltage
11-27
VAC/VDC
SPDT
Alarm
Contacts
The WD-1B is provided with a 1/2" FNPT conduit connection in
the end of the enclosure. Terminations are made to the color-coded
wires with field-supplied connectors. All interconnect wiring should
be 18 AWG or larger.
If grounded AC power is used, the grounded power supply
lead must be connected to the white lead on the WD-1B,
or the unit may fail to operate.
*E/D Option Jumper:
E = Output relay is energized when water is detected.
(No alarm on power loss)
D = Output relay is de-energized when water is detected
or when power is lost. (Alarm on when water is present
or power loss)
•
•
E
D
•
E/D Option Jumper*
WIRING
MOUNTING
Secure by applying a silicone adhesive to the mounting feet
and placing the sensor in the area to be protected. For more
permanent installations, fasten the sensor using the 0.19"
(0.48 cm) holes provided in the mounting feet with #6 or #8
screws. The legs are adjustable 1.5" (3.81 cm) for precise
water level signaling.
OPERA
TION
The Model WD-1B can be used with any contact-closure monitoring panel
. The SPDT contacts may be wired normally
open or normally closed, allowing wiring flexibility to handle most installations
.
DIMENSIONS
WD-1B
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
WD-1B Water detector
Supply Voltage 11-27 VAC/VDC
Supply Current
VDC 10 mA typical,
30 mA maximum
VAC 30 mA typical, 70 mA maximum
Relay Type SPDT
Relay Outputs 1A @ 24 VAC/VDC, 1/2A @
120 VAC
Operating Temperature 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Enclosure Rating Cast aluminum, weather resistant
with adjustable legs
Dimensions 4.3"H X 3.75"W X 4.5"L
(10.7 X 9.5 X 11.4 cm)
Approvals CE
Weight 0.98 lb (6.44 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS
WD-2-T Water detector (tape style sensor)

616. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 570fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Floor Mounting
Mount the Model WD-2-T box adjacent to the area to be protected. Unroll the sensor tape, remove vinyl release layer from the
back, and hand press onto a surface that is dry and free of all debris and dust.
Note 1: Once the sensor is activated (wet), the contacts will remain in alarm until the netted cover is completely dry.
Note 2: To convert the tape integrity check relay to a second alarm relay, remove the jumper in the lower right corner of the
circuit board. If the sensing tape is not used, install the jumper labeled “NO TBL CHK.”
4.5
(11.43)
LED
Window
0.5 (1.27)
FNPT
Conduit
Connection
Gasketed
SS Cover
2.75
(6.99)
0.12
(0.32)

2.0
(5.08)
0.31 (0.79)
1.8
(4.57)
1.75
(4.45)
Mounting Holes 0.187 (0.47) dia
3.75
(9.53 )
in (cm)
0.75
(1.91)
0.125
(.32)
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Model WD-2-T tape style water detector uses a self-adhesive sensor tape with copper fiber electrodes and a durable netted cover for dependable detection of conductive liquids anywhere along the length of tape
. The Model WD-2-T
includes a tape integrity self-check feature, which activates a trouble output if the tape is unplugged, broken, or cut
.
Alar
m relays may be independently jumpered to energize or
de-energize upon water or trouble detection
.
FEATURES
• W •
Designed to minimize external noise pickup
• SPDT alarm and trouble relay contacts
• Relay action jumper selectable
• Continuous tape integrity self-check
• Power/Alarm/Trouble status LED (green, red, green/red)
• Sensor tape lengths of 10 ft (3.1m), 25 ft (7.6m), 50 ft
(15.2m), 100 ft (30.5m)
• Floor or under-pipe mounting
• Able to convert to two alarm relays
DIMENSIONS
INSTALLATION
WD-2
OPERATION
The Model WD-2-T can be used with any contact-closure
monitoring device, wiring to either the normally open or
normally closed contacts for flexibility.
TAPE STYLE WATER DETECTOR
WD-2-T
Supply Voltage 11 -27 VAC/VDC
Supply Current
VDC 15mA typical, 60 mA maximum
VAC 35 mA typical, 120 mA maximum
Relay Type SPDT
Relay Output Rating 1A @ 24 VAC/VDC, 1/2A @ 120 VAC
Operating Temperature Detector: 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Tape: 32° to 180°F (0° to 82°C)
Sensor Electrodes 3 mil copper fiber, 1/4" gap
Enclosure Cast aluminum, weather resistant
Dimensions 4.23"H x 3.75"W x 4.5"D
(10.7 x 9.5 x 11.4 cm)
Approvals CE
Weight WD-2
0.98 lb (6.44 kg) (without tape)
WD-2-T-10 1.8 lb (0.8 kg)
WD-2-T-25 2.2 lb (1.0 kg)
WD-2-T-50 3.0 lb (1.4 kg)
WD-2-T-100 4.6 lb (2.1 kg)
Warranty 18 Months
SPECIFICATIONS

617. fifl 571LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
The Model WD-2-T is provided with a 1/2" FNPT conduit connection in the end of the enclosure. Terminations are made using the
color-coded wires with field-supplied connectors. All interconnect wiring should be 18 AWG or larger.
The
Model WD-2-T tape includes a supervisory resistor mounted on the far end for the tape integrity self-check
. A self-check
disable jumper is provided inside for use with older or cut-down tapes that do not have the supervisory resistor.
STATUS INDICATOR
• Green blink Normal
• Red blink Water detected
• Red/green alternating Tape sensor problem
JUMPER POSITIONS
• NO TBL CHK Install jumper to disable tape trouble check
• OPT Remove jumper to convert trouble contacts to second set of alarm contacts
• ALM (position D) De-energize relay on alarm (position E) Energize relay on alarm
• TBL (position D) De-energize relay on trouble (position E) Energize relay on trouble
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
WD-2 Water detector without sensor tape
WD-2-T-10 Water detector with 10 (3.1m) sensor tape
WD-2-T-25 Water detector with 25 (15.2m) sensor tape
WD-2-T-50 Water detector with 50 (30.5m) sensor tape
WD-2-T-100 Water detector with 100 (7.6m) sensor tape
TAPE STYLE WATER DETECTOR
WD-2-T
WIRING
RELATED PRODUCTS
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT
WD-CLIP-5 Pack of five mounting clips (space 18"/45.7 cm for under-pipe installation)
K2
NO NC COM
K1
NO NC COM
TBL ALM
TBL ALM
D
E
OPT
TBL
CHK
NO
WD-2
Water Detector
Probe
Probe
Intall Jumper if
no resistor on end
of water tape
Remov e Jumper to
convert trouble relay
into second alarm relay
Energize (E) or
De-energize (D)
relay on water detected
Energize (E) or
De-energize (D)
relay on trouble
Orange
Blue
Yellow
Brown
Purple
Gray
White
Red
Input
Voltage
11-27
VAC/VDC

618. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 572fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage
AQS00660 95-254V 50/60 Hz, 2W
AQS00661 24 VAC/VDC 50/60 Hz
LD1-24 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Relay Output Rating 240 VAC 50/60 Hz, 5A; 24 VDC,
2.5A
Switch Off Level AQS00660/1
0.32" (0.8 cm) nominal
LD1-24 0.43" (1.1 cm) nominal
Switch On Level AQS00660/1
0.40" (1 cm) nominal
LD1-24 0.31" (0.8 cm) nominal
Operating Temperature 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Cable Length AQS00660/1
5 ft (1.5m)
LD1-24 18" (0.46m)
Dimensions AQS00660
1.2"H x 2.0"W x 1.25"L
(3.0 x 5.0 x 3.1 cm)
AQS00661 1.2"H x 2.0"W x 1.25"L
(3.0 x 5.0 x 3.1 cm)
LD1-24 0.9"H x 2.0"W x 1.25"L
(2.2 x 5.0 x 3.1 cm)
Approvals CE
Warranty 1 year
ORDERING INFORMATION
WATER SENSOR / SWITCH
AQS00660, AQS00661, LD1-24
DESCRIPTION
The Model LD1-24 and the AQS models are small electronic
control relays for detecting a rising water level. Inside a
w
aterproof enclosure, each model features a medium-power
relay, which is operated by water reaching the trip level, and
can be used to control alarms or other equipment
. The relay
is normally energized when the power supply is switched on and no water is present
. When water rises up the side
of the box to reach the switching level, the relay drops out.
This sequence is f
ailsafe, allowing each model to be used as
a water spillage alarm switch or to turn off a valve or an air conditioning unit before the water overflows its containment.
FEATURES
• All components safely encapsulated against moisture
ingress
• Switching capability 5A at 240 VAC
(red)
Control
Circuit
AQS
Note: Relay is energized to make black and yellow
when powered-up and dr y.
(mauve)
(red)
3A max Fuse
(blue)
(black)
Isolated Switch Output
Common
Supply Voltage
Supply Neutral
Break on Water Rise
Make on Water Rise
Note: Relay contacts shown in alarm (or power-off) condition.
(pink)
Supply
24 VAC 50/60 Hz
(red)
(grey)
N/O
N/C
COM
Isolated
Switch
Output
LD1-24
AQS00660: 95-254V 50/60 Hz
AQS00661: 24V 50/60 Hz or DC
(yellow)
(white)
WIRING
A piece of double-sided tape is fitted to the base of each
model and can be used to fix it to the surface being protected.
Clean the mounting surf
ace thoroughly to ensure good
adhesion
. Pull off the protective paper covering and press the
models down into position. The AQS models also have slots
for mounting with #4 self-tapping screws.
INSTALLATION
AQS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A
QS00660
95-254 VAC water sensor/switch
AQS00661 24 VAC/VDC water sensor/switch
LD1-24 24 VAC water sensor/switch
WARNING: Although the LD1-24 is totally
encapsulated and resistant to water ingress when
used as intended (to detect rising water levels), it
should not be installed where the encapsulated
surface is permanently under water.
SPECIFICATIONS
LDI-24

619. fifl 573LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
SPOT LEAK DETECTOR
SD-RO1
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC, 0.1A
Contact Rating 1A @ 24 VDC, 0.5A resistive @
120 VAC
Contact Type SPDT
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% non-condensing
Cable Length 14 ft (4.27m)
Dimensions 2.0"H x 1.55"W x 1.0"D
(5.1 x 3.9 x 2.5 cm)
Approvals CE, RoHS, ETL, conforms to UL
61010-1, EN61010-1
Weight 0.4 lb (0.2 kg)
Warranty 1 year
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The RLE Technologies SD-RO1 spot leak detector is an
economical solution for detecting fluids in small, confined
areas, such as drip pans
. The unit is designed with polymer
coated sensing probes to detect conductive fluids at a single point
. The height of the probes can easily be adjusted to
the desired position by simply bending them. Units can
be scre
wed or glued to the floor or baseboard for quick
installation
.
FEATURES
• Adjustable sensing probe height
• Small footprint
• No exposed metal sensing posts
• All components encapsulated against moisture
• Switching capability 0.5A at 120 VAC
• Simple installation
Connect the white (N/O) and green (Com) or blue (N/C) leads to the alarm device. Connect the black (-) and red
(+) leads to the power source. Test the SD-RO1 by placing water under the sensing probes.
(Note: The SD-RO1 latches if powered by DC voltage and a reset switch must be installed on the positive or negative wire.
The SD-RO1 will automatically reset with AC voltage applied.)
Red (+)
Black (-)
White (N.O.)
Green (Com)
Blue (N.C.)
Brown (Not Used)
Reset switch diagram
(used with VDC applications
only, see VDC latching note)

VDC latching note: When powered by VDC,
contacts remain latched until reset switch
is used. (See reset switch diagram)
24 VAC/VDC
+
-
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SD-R01 Spot leak detector, 24 VAC/VDC
SPECIFICATIONS
SD-R01

620. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 574fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
CABLE-STYLE WATER DETECTOR
LD310 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The RLE Technologies LD310 cable-style water detector
reports the presence of water within a predetermined zone.
The
LD310 is a single zone system with both a visual and
audible alarm indicator as well as a separate output relay for leaks and fault detection.
The LD310 continuously monitors leak sensing cable and is
ideal for small areas. If conductive fluid contacts the sensing
cable anywhere along its length, the module will activate a leak relay and audible alert, and flash the LED, clearly indicating fluid has been detected
. If the sensing cable is
cut or comes loose, the module will activate a cable fault by flashing the LED and activating a fault relay
.
The LD310 also features three jumper selectable leak
detection thresholds for adjusting the sensitivity of the leak/ fault detection circuit
.
FEATURES
• Dual dr •
Three adjustable alarm thresholds
• Bi-color LED indication for normal/alarm conditions
• Audible alert that is jumper selectable on/off
• Push-button switch allows users to test and reset the
system and silence audible alarm
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LD310 Water detector includes 15’ (4.6m) leader cable and end-of-line connector (order sensing cable separately)
LD310-10KIT Water detector kit includes LD310 detector, 15’ (4.6m) leader cable, 10' (3.05m) sensing cable and end of line connector
LD310-25KIT Water detector kit includes LD310 detector, 15’ (4.6m) leader cable, 25' (7.62m) sensing cable and end of line connector
LD310-50KIT Water detector kit includes LD310 detector, 15’ (4.6m) leader cable, 50' (15.2m) sensing cable and end of line connector
LD310-100KIT Water detector kit includes LD310 detector, 15’ (4.6m) leader cable, 100' (30.5m) sensing cable and end of line connector
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
JC-25 Package of 25 cable-securing J clips
NSC-10 10' non-sensing cable
NSC-100 100' non-sensing cable
NSC-25 25' non-sensing cable
NSC-50 50' non-sensing cable
SC-C-10 10 ft (3.1m) Chemical sensing cable 581
SC-C-25 25 ft (7.7m) Chemical sensing cable 581
SC-C-50 50 ft (15.4m) Chemical sensing cable 581
SC-C-100 100 ft (30.8m) Chemical sensing cable 581
LC-KIT-REPLACEMENT Replacement 15' (4.6m) leader cable and end-of-line connector
SC-10 10 ft. (3.1 m) sensing cable 581
SC-17 17 ft. (5.2 m) sensing cable 581
SC-25 25 ft. (7.7 m) sensing cable 581
SC-50 50 ft. (15.4 m) sensing cable 581
SC-100 100 ft. (30.8 m) sensing cable 581
DCP-524 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC and 5 VDC OUT
LD310
• Monitors up to 300 ft (91 m) of sensing cable (SC) / 210 ft
(64m) of chemical sensing cable (SC-C)
• Lightweight enclosure with easy installation
• Use non-sensing cable between sections of sensing cable
Supply Voltage
5 VDC (± 10%) @ 100 mA
Relay Type Two Form C alarm relays
(leak and fault)
Relay Outputs 1A @ 24 VDC, 0.5A resisitive @
120 VAC
LED Indication Normal Operation: Green; Cable
Fault: Flashing Orange; Leak Detected: Flashing Red
Response Time
<20 seconds, 10 sec typical
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (°0 to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% non-condensing
Altitude Limits 15,000 ft (4,572m) maximum
Mounting Surface mount
Cable Length 300 ft (91m) maximum of conductive
fluid sensing cable or 210 ft (64m) of chemical sensing cable
Dimensions
2.7"W x 4.4"H x 1.38"D
(6.8 x 11.2 x 3.5 cm)
Approvals CE, ETL listed, RoHS compliant
Weight 0.2 lb (0.09 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS

621. fifl 575LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
End
Terminator Sensing Cable Leader Cable
Basic installation of LD1500,leader cabl e, sensing cable and EOL terminator
WEB-ACCESSIBLE LEAK DETECTOR
LD1500
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC @ 600 mA max
Relay Type SPDT
Relay Outputs 1A @ 24 VDC, 0.5A resisitive @ 120 VAC
Accuracy ±2 ft (0.6m) plus ±0.5% of the cable
length
Repeatability ±2 ft (0.6m) plus ±0.25% of the cable
length
Communication Ports
Ethernet 10/100 BASE-T, 500 VAC RMS isolation
RS-232 9600 baud, no parity, 9 data bits,
1 stop bit
RS-485 1200, 2400, 9600 or 19200 baud (selectab
le), no parity, 8 data bits,
1 stop bit
RJ-45 10/100BASE-T Ethernet Port
Protocol Terminal Emulation (RS-232)
VT100 compatible
SNMP V1: V2C MIB-2 compliant; NMS
Manageable with Get, Set, Traps
Modbus (RS-485/IP) Slave, RTU mode; supports function
codes 03, 04, 06, and 16
BACnet (MS/TP & IP) EIA-485

LED Indication 1 bi-color power/status (green=power on,
red=alarm)
Response Time Adjustable from 5-995 seconds
Alarm Bi-color status LED
Logging Samples Logging capabilities: Logs last 10 events
Security Login Web browser access: 1 Web password
read only, 1 password read/write
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (°0 to 50°C)
Mounting Wall mount
Cable Length 1500 ft (457.2m) maximum
Cable Type Water detection cable
Dimensions 3.6"H x 7.0"W x 1.25"D
(9.2 x 17.8.0 x 3.2 cm)
Approvals CE, ETL Listed, RoHS compliant
Weight 1.5 lb (0.68 kg)
Warranty 1 year
ORDERING INFORMATION
FEATURES
• Adjustable leak, delay and cable contamination alarm
thresholds
• SNMP, Modbus and BACnet communications
• Quick return to normal status after cable is wiped dry
• Modbus (RS-485) integration with LD2100 and LD5100
• HTML interface
• Self calibrating
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LD1500 Water detector includes 15' leader cable and end-of-line connector (order sensing cable separately)
SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION
The RLE Technologies LD1500 web-accessible leak
detector offers a reliable leak detection solution that
mitigates potential water damage, costly business outages,
and downtime
. The unit detects the presence of any
conductive fluid and identifies the distance to the leak.
The distance to the leak can be comm
unicated via various
protocols to alarm monitoring and notification systems
. The
physical location of the leak can be determined by cross- referencing the distance with a cable reference map of your site
.
Sensing cable is available in standard lengths with pre-
installed mating end connectors. Linked end-to-end these
connections allow for easy installation of additional length.
The
LD1500 can monitor up to 1500 ft (457m) of sensing
cable or 1050 ft (320m) or chemical sensing cable
.
LD1500
JC-200 Package of 200 cable-securing J clips
JC-25 Package of 25 cable-securing J clips
NSC-10 10' non-sensing cable
NSC-100 100' non-sensing cable
NSC-25 25' non-sensing cable
NSC-50 50' non-sensing cable
SC-10 10' sensing cable 581
SC-100 100' sensing cable 581
SC-25 25' sensing cable 581
SC-50 50' sensing cable 581
WCCS-50 Weighted cable connector;
simulates 50' of sensing cable
X-CON X connector single SC input,
3 SC outputs
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
WIRING

622. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 576fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
WEB-ACCESSIBLE LEAK DETECTOR
LD2100
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC @ 600 mA max
Relay Outputs 1A @ 24 VDC, 0.5A resisitive @ 120
VAC SPDT
Detection Accuracy ±2 ft (0.6m) ±0.5% of the cable
length
Detection Repeatability ±2 ft (0.6m) ±0.25% of the cable
length
Response Time Adjustable from 5 to 995 seconds
Communication Ports
Ethernet 10/100 BASE-T, 500 VAC RMA
isolation
RS-232 9600 baud, no parity, 9 data bits, 1
stop bit
RS-485 1200, 2400, 9600 or 19200 baud selectab
le, no parity, 8 data bits, 1
stop bit
Protocol Terminal Emulation (RS-232)
VT100 compatible
SNMP V1: V2C MIB-2 compliant; NMS
Manageable with Get, Set, Traps: V3 optional
Modbus (RS-485/IP)
Slave, RTU mode; supports function
codes 03, 04, 06, and 16
BACnet (MS/TP & IP) EIA-485
Display Green, alphanumeric, dot matrix LED
LED Indication 1 bi-color power/status (green=power
on, red=alarm)
Alarm Visual: Green, alphanumeric, dot
matrix LED display, Bi-color status LED
Audible: 70 dBA @ 2' (0.6 m)
Email (Ethernet): 4 Email recipients
SNMP: 4 community strings
Altitude Limits 15,000 ft (4,572m) maximum
Logging Samples Logging capabilities: Logs last 500
events
Security Login 1 Web password Read Only, 1 Web
password Read/Write
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Mounting Wall mount
Cable Length 5000 ft (1524m) maximum
Cable Type All SeaHawk cables
Dimensions 4.25"H x 8.0"W x 1.25"D
(10.8 x 20.3 x 3.2 cm)
Approvals CE, ETL Listed, certified to CSA
C22.2 No. 61010-1, RoHS compliant
Weight 1.5 lb (0.68 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The RLE Technologies LD2100 web-accessible leak detector monitors up to 5000 ft (1524m) of sensing cable (SC) or 3500 ft (1067m) of chemical sensing cable (SC-C)
.
The LED displa
y provides basic information about alarm
conditions, while a browser offers a convenient way to configure the unit, access and acknowledge alarms, and view alarm logs
. Output communications include a Form C relay,
SNMP, Modbus and BACnet. SMTP allows for direct email
alarm notification which can be routed to cell phones, PDAs, or other wireless devices
.
FEATURES
• Adjustable leak, delay and contamination alarm
thresholds
• 32 configurable virtual zones
• Single person cable mapping
• HTML interface
• SNMP, Modbus, BACnet and relay output
• Monitors up to 5000 ft (1524m) of sensing cable or 3500
ft (1067m) of chemical sensing cable
• Alarm notification via email
• Quick return to normal status after cable is wiped dry
• Self calibrating
SPECIFICATIONS
LD2100
SC Cable - Sold Separately

623. fifl 577LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
WEB-ACCESSIBLE LEAK DETECTOR
LD2100
A
+
B
–SHWBGRNL
TB4
RS-485
ModBus
TB3
Relay
output
RS-232
LD2100
TB2
Leader
cable
RJ45
Ethernet
Power
input
NOCNC
LEAK
LC-KIT
Leader
Cable
NSC-50
Non-sensing
SC-100
Sensing
End-of-Line
Terminator
(Included in LC-KIT)
EOL (Included)
EOL (Included)
EOL
(Included)
NSC-10
Non-Sensing
SC-100
Distance
reads 350-450'
WCCS
Weighted Cable
Connector
SENSOR WIRING
COMPLEX SYSTEM
SIMPLE SYSTEM
LD2100
LC-KIT
Leader
Cable
SC-100'
Distance reads
200-300'
Distance reads 0-50'
SC-50
SC-50
Distance reads 100-150'
Input
LD2100 X-CON
Output
Branch #1
Branch #2
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LD2100 Water detector includes 15' leader cable and end-of-line connector (order sensing cable separately)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
JC-25 Package of 25 cable-securing J clips
JC-200 Package of 200 cable-securing J clips
NSC-10 10' non-sensing cable
NSC-25 25' non-sensing cable
NSC-50 50' non-sensing cable
NSC-100 100' non-sensing cable
SC-10 10' sensing cable 581
SC-25 25' sensing cable 581
SC-50 50' sensing cable 581
SC-100 100' sensing cable 581
X-CON X connector single SC input, 3 SC outputs

624. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 578fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
CABLE-STYLE WATER DETECTOR
LD5200
DESCRIPTION
The RLE Technologies LD5200 cable-style water detector
pairs superior leak detection technology with an easy-to-
use interface
. This integration helps users to quickly and
efficiently establish a distance-read leak detection system that reliably protects valuable assets
. All basic device functionality
is available from the LCD touch screen - configure, monitor, locate, and acknowledge leaks from the front panel. While the Model LD5200 can function as a stand-alone device, it also has powerful integration capabilities
. A robust web interface
supports remote access - any time, any place.
FEATURES
• Access the device remotely.
• Manage an entire building's leak detection system
through one IP address
• Monitor up to 10,000 feet of conductive fluid sensing
cable or 7,000 feet of chemical sensing cable
• Master device for up to 127 RLE leak detection
controllers
• Configure up to 32 virtual zones
• Send direct email alarm notification
• Access the device remotely via the web interface
• Create up to 10 interactive leak detection reference maps
SC Cable
LD5200
Supply Voltage 100-240 VAC @ 500mA max, 50/60
Hz
Analog Output 4-20 mA loop powered, 18-36 VDC,
RL=500Ω max.
Relay Type 2 Form C Leak Relays, 2 Form C
Cable Break Relays
Relay Outputs 1A @ 24VDC, 0.5A resistive @
120VAC
Accuracy ±2 ft (0.6 m) ±0.5% of the cable
length
Repeatability ±2 ft (0.6 m) ±0.25% of the cable
length
Communication Ports EIA-485 (Port 1, Port 2, Port 3):
9600, 19200, or 38400 baud
(selectable); No parity, 8 data bits,
1 stop bit
EIA-232: 9600 baud; No parity, 8
data bits, 1 stop bit
RJ-45: 10/100BaseT Ethernet port
(TCP/IP)
Protocol EIA-485: Modbus RTU, Master &
Slave; BACnet MS/TP; N2, Slave
EIA-232: Terminal emulation, VT100
compatible
RJ-45: Ethernet, TCP/IP; Modbus/
TCP/UDP, Master & Slave; SNMP V1, V2, V3, NTP, SMTP, DNS; BACnet/IP
Display
480 x 272 pixel color backlit LCD
touch screen; 95.04mm x 53.85mm
Alarm Audible: 85 dBA @ 2 ft (0.6 m);
re-sound 0-999 min
Visible: Alarm indicated on LCD
touch screen and through web interface
Logging
Event log: last 1024 events
Trend log: Cable current level every
day, for the last 365 days
Security Login LCD Touch Screen: No password
required to view controller status and data
.
Web Interface: Username and
password can be configured. This is
optimal.
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing
Mounting Type 1 wall mount enclosure
Cable Length Up to 10,000 ft (3048 m) of
conductiv
e fluid sensing cable
or 7,000 ft (2134 m) of chemical sensing cable
Cable Type Fluid or chemical sensing cable
Dimensions 12.5"W x 10.0"H x 3.25"D
(318 x 254 x 83 mm)
Approvals CE, ETL listed, CSA, RoHS
compliant
Weight 8.2 lbs (3.7 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS

625. fifl 579LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
TB1
4-20mA
Output
TB2
Cable Interface
(W - B - G - R)
TB3
Form C
Maintenance
Relay
P1
EIA-232 Connector
SW1
EIA-485
Port 3
Termination
SW2
EIA-485
Port 2
Termination
SW3
EIA-485
Port 1
Termination
TB5
EIA-485
Port 3
TB6 To p
EIA-485
Port 1
TB6 Bottom
EIA-485
Port 2
P2
Ethernet Jack
TB7
Input Power
TB4
(2) Form C Leak
Relay Outputs
and
(2) Form C Fault
Relay Outputs
RLE Technologies
LD5200
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
JC-200 Package of 200 cable-securing J clips
JC-25 Package of 25 cable-securing J clips
NSC-10 10' non-sensing cable
NSC-25 25' non-sensing cable
NSC-50 50' non-sensing cable
NSC-100 100' non-sensing cable
SC-10 10 ft. (3.1 m) sensing cable 581
SC-25 25 ft. (7.7 m) sensing cable 581
SC-50 50 ft. (15.4 m) sensing cable 581
SC-100 100 ft. (30.8 m) sensing cable 581
WCCS-50 Weighted cable connector; simulates 50' of sensing cable
X-CON X connector single SC input, 3 SC outputs
CABLE-STYLE WATER DETECTOR
LD5200
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LD5200 Leak detector includes 15' leader cable and end-of-line terminator

626. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 580fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
LEAK DETECTION MONITOR
LDRA6
Supply Voltage 24VDC@ 600mA max.; requires RLE
power supply: PSWA-DC-24 (not
included)
Relay Type 1 Form C Summary Alarm Relay, 6 Form
C alarms, one per input/zone
Relay Outputs 1A @ 24VDC, 0.5A resistive @ 120VAC
configurable for supervised or non- supervised, latched or non-latched
Communication Ports
EIA-232: 9600 baud; Parity none; 8 data
bits, 1 stop bit
EIA-485: 1200, 2400, 9600 or
19,200 baud; Parity none, odd, even (programmable); 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
Protocol
Terminal Emulation (EIA-232): VT100
compatible
Modbus (EIA-485): Slave; RTU Mode;
Supports function codes 03, 04, 06, and 16
Audible Alarm
85DBA @ 2ft (0.6m); re-sound
(disabled, 8,16 or 24 hours)
Input Leak Detection Cable: Compatible with
SeaHawk sensing cable (not included) or SeaHawk spot detectors (SD-Z or SD-Z1 only; not included)
Cable Input: Each input requires
SeaHawk LC-Kit: 15ft (4.57m) leader
cable and EOL (not included)
Maximum Length: Up to 1,000ft (305m) of
conductive fluid sensing cable and/or spot detectors per zone; 6,000ft (1830m) total, or 700ft (213m) of chemical sensing cable per zone; 4,200ft (1280m) total
LED Indication
Alarm: red; Cable Fault: yellow
Response Time When used with conductive fluid sensing
cable or chemical sensing cable, 20-3600sec, software adjustable in 10 second increments; ±2sec Dry Contact NO/NC
Operating Temperature
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH, non-condensing
Altitude Limits 15,000ft (4572m) max.
Mounting Wall mount enclosure
Dimensions 10.5"W x 8.0"H x 2.0"D
(267 x 203 x 51 mm)
Approvals CE, ETL listed, CSA, RoHS compliant
Weight 4 lbs. (1.82kg)
Warranty 1 year
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The RLE Technologies LDRA6 leak detection monitor
detects the presence of water, conductive fluids, and
chemicals
. When a leak is detected, the unit annunciates
an alarm for the corresponding zone. The Model LDRA6
accommodates up to six inputs which can be configured for zone leak detection or as remote alarm annunciators
. Each
of the six z
ones can accommodate up to 1,000 ft (305m) of
sensing cable or 700 ft (213m) of chemical sensing cable
. As
a remote alar
m status panel, each of the six inputs can be
configured to relay and annunciate alarms from equipment and sensors that provide a digital dry contact signal.
FEATURES
• Multi-functional controller with audible alarm
• Adjustable leak thresholds
• Accommodates up to six inputs
• Tri-color LEDs
• Quiet, test, reset push button
SPECIFICATIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
JC-25 Package of 25 cable-securing J clips
NSC-10 10' non-sensing cable
NSC-100 100' non-sensing cable
NSC-25 25' non-sensing cable
NSC-50 50' non-sensing cable
SC-C-10 10 ft (3.1m) Chemical sensing cable 581
SC-C-25 25 ft (7.7m) Chemical sensing cable 581
SC-C-50 50 ft (15.4m) Chemical sensing cable 581
SC-C-100 100 ft (30.8m) Chemical sensing cable 581
LC-KIT-REPLACEMENT Replacement 15' (4.6m) leader cable and end-of-line connector
PSW
A-DC-24
85-264VAC, 50/60 Hz to 24VDC power adapter
SC-10 10 ft. (3.1 m) sensing cable 581
SC-17 17 ft. (5.2 m) sensing cable 581
SC-25 25 ft. (7.7 m) sensing cable 581
SC-50 50 ft. (15.4 m) sensing cable 581
SC-100 100 ft. (30.8 m) sensing cable 581
LDRA6
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LDRA6 Six zone leak detection monitor

627. fifl 581LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
When using SC-H and SC-C sensing and non-sensing cables with a
SeaHawk controller, reduce the controller's capacity distance by 30%.
For example, the LD300 monitors up to 300 feet of water detection cable (SC)
. When used with hydrocarbon or chemical sensing cable,
the maximum length of cable the LD300 can monitor is reduced to 210 feet
.
Note: Prolonged exposure to concentrated ketones may cause
temporary reduction of sensitivity.
ORDERING INFORMATION
WATER AND CHEMICAL (CONDUCTIVE FLUIDS) & HYDROCARBON SENSING CABLE
SC SERIES, SC-C SERIES, SC-H SERIES
Cable Type
SC Conductive fluid detection
SC-C Chemical detection
SC-H Hydrocarbon detection
Bend Radius SC-H
0.75 in. (19.05mm) minimum
Operating Temperature SC
32° to 167°F (0° to 75°C)
SC-C -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
SC-H -4° to 140°F (-20° to 90°C)
Dimensions SC
Cable diameter: 0.25" (6.4mm) Connector
diameter: 0.96" (24.4mm)
SC-C Cable diameter: 0.24" (6.0mm) Connector
diameter: 0.45" (11.4mm)
SC-H Cable diameter: 0.28" (7.0mm) Connector
diameter: 0.45" (11.4mm)
Approvals SC
CE, RoHS compliant, Plenum rated
SC-C UL, RoHS compliant, Plenum rated
Weight SC
0.02 lb (0.009kg), 1 ft. (0.305m) length
SC-C 0.035 lb (0.016kg), 1 ft. (0.305m) length
SC-H 0.05 lb (0.023kg), 1 ft. (0.305m) length
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The RLE Technologies' SeaHawk Sensing Cable reliably senses the presence of liquids in a wide variety of industrial, business, and residential settings
. Sensing cables are
durable, highly flexible, and resistant to bends and kinks.
The Conductiv
e Fluid Sensing Cable (SC Series) detects
the presence of any conductive fluid
. The Chemical Sensing
Cable (SC-C Series) detects the presence of aqueous acids, bases, and other conductive fluids, including water
.
The Hydrocarbon Sensing Cab
le (SC-H Series) detects the
presence of hydrocarbons while remaining impervious to the presence of water. RLE's sensing cables are engineered to
minimize false alarms, and are available in standard, custom, and bulk lengths
.
Use sensing cables in conjunction with RLE's SeaHawk
zone or distance-read leak detection controllers to detect a leak along the length of the sensing cable
. RLE controllers
are super
vised systems - not only do they locate leaks, but
they also monitor the cable for contamination, breaks, and disconnects.
RLE's sensing cables and controllers offer reliable leak
detection solutions that mitigate potential damage, costly business outages, and downtime
.
FEATURES
• Resistant to bends and kinks
• Highly flexible
• Compatible with SeaHawk zone and distance-read leak
detection controllers
• Available in standard and custom lengths
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SC-H-10 10 ft (3.1m) Hydrocarbon sensing cable
SC-H-25 25 ft (7.7m) Hydrocarbon sensing cable
SC-H-50 50 ft (15.4m) Hydrocarbon sensing cable
SC-H-100 100 ft (30.8m) Hydrocarbon sensing cable
SC-C-10 10 ft (3.1m) Chemical sensing cable
SC-C-25 25 ft (7.7m) Chemical sensing cable
SC-C-50 50 ft (15.4m) Chemical sensing cable
SC-C-100 100 ft (30.8m) Chemical sensing cable
SC-H Series detects the
presence of:
•
Petroleum
• Unleaded gasoline
• Diesel #1 and #2
• Home heating oil
• Kerosene
• Jet fuel
• Xylene
SC-C Series
detects the
presence of: • Acids
• Bases
• Other conductive fluids
INSTALLATION
SPECIFICATIONS
APPLICATION
SC-H
SC-C
RELATED PRODUCTS
JC-25 Package of 25 cable-securing J clips
NSC-10 10' non-sensing cable
NSC-25 25' non-sensing cable
NSC-50 50' non-sensing cable
NSC-10-M 10 ft (3.1m) Hydrocarbon/chemical non-sensing cable
NSC-25-M 25 ft (7.7m) Hydrocarbon/chemical non-sensing cable
NSC-50-M 50 ft (15.4m) Hydrocarbon/chemical non-sensing cable
JC-C-25 Package of 25 cable-securing J clips for SC-C sensing
cable
JC-H-25 Package of 25 cable-securing J clips for SC-H sensing
cable
LC-KIT-REPLACEMENT Replacement 15' (4.6m) leader cable and
end-of-line connector
X-CON X connector single SC input, 3 SC outputs
SC Cable
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SC-10 10 ft. (3.1 m) sensing cable
SC-17 17 ft. (5.2 m) sensing cable
SC-25 25 ft. (7.7 m) sensing cable
SC-50 50 ft. (15.4 m) sensing cable
SC-100 100 ft. (30.8 m) sensing cable
SC-C-10 10 ft (3.1m) Chemical sensing cable
SC-C-25 25 ft (7.7m) Chemical sensing cable
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SC-C-50 50 ft (15.4m) Chemical sensing cable
SC-C-100 100 ft (30.8m) Chemical sensing cable
SC-H-10 10 ft (3.1m) Hydrocarbon sensing cable
SC-H-25 25 ft (7.7m) Hydrocarbon sensing cable
SC-H-50 50 ft (15.4m) Hydrocarbon sensing cable
SC-H-100 100 ft (30.8m) Hydrocarbon sensing cable

628. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 582fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VDC, 35 mA maximum
Signal Output 4-20 mA, two wire loop powered
Maximum Output
Impedance 400Ω @ 24 VDC
Contact Rating 1A maximum @ 24 VAC/VDC
Contact Type 4 - SPST relays (normally open)
Deadband DL14
2" (5 cm)
DL24 4" (10 cm)
DL34 8" (20 cm)
Accuracy DL14
±0.125" (0.3 cm)
DL24/34 ±0.2% of range
Temperature Effect Automatic compensation
Measurement Range Dl14
Up to 49.2" (1.25m)
DL24 Up to 9.8' (3m)
DL34 Up to 18.0' (5.5m)
Beam Width DL14
2" (5 cm)
DL24 2" (5.08 cm)
DL34 3" (7.62 cm)
Configuration Free WebCal software (USB port fob
tool L99-1001 required)
Fail Safe Signal 4 mA, 20 mA, 21 mA 22 mA, or hold last signal, Rela
y: Power loss
Hold last signal, Relay: Power on Hold last signal, open, closed
Resolution DL14
0.019" (0.05 cm)
DL24 0.039" (1 mm)
DL34 0.079" (2 mm)
Operating Temperature 20° to 160°F (-7° to 60°C)
Enclosure Plycarbonate/ABS FR
Transmitter PVDF
Cable Jacket Polyurethene
Enclosure Rating Encapsulated, corrosion resistant,
submersib
le, NEMA 4X
Process Connection DL14 1" NPT with Viton gasket
DL24 1" NPT (1" G) with Viton gasket
DL34 2" NPT (2" G) with Viton gasket
Cable Length 48" (1.2m)
Dimensions DL14
3.2"H x 2.0" diameter
(8.1 x 5.1 cm)
DL24 4.9"H x 3.06" diameter
(12.5 x 7.8 cm)
DL34 6.5"H x 3.06" diameter
(16.5 x 7.8 cm)
Approvals CE, RoHS, FM
Warranty 1 year
ULTRASONIC LEVEL SWITCH, TRANSMITTER, AND CONTROLLER
DL14, 24, 34 SERIES ECHOPOD
DESCRIPTION
The EchoPod DL14, 24 and 34 Series ultrasonic level switch, transmitter and controller provide non-contact measurement of fluid level in tanks up to 18 ft (5
.5 m) in
depth. The Ec hoPod is a compact multi-function sensor
enabled by WebCal, a PC user interface for configuration and calibration
. The DL Series combines 4 relays, a 4-20 mA
output, and control for 1 or 2 pumps or valves.The rugged
PVDF enclosure is well suited for a wide range of corrosive, waste, or slurry type media
. It can be broadly applied to
atmospher
ic day tanks, process vessels, dispensers, pump lift
stations and waste sumps
. Level indication and control may
be monitored via a local display or through the BAS.
FEATURES
• Pr
one device
• Replaces multi-point, conductivity, and pressure level
devices
• Free WebCal PC software provides fast and easy
configuration
• Well suited for corrosive and dirty applications
• Maintenance free
• Encapsulated, corrosion resistant submersible NEMA
4X enclosure
SPECIFICATIONS
DL14-00
APPLICATION
• Cooling tower tanks
• Wastewater tanks
• Diesel fuel tanks
• Chemical feed tanks
• Rinse tanks
FM
APPROVED
USC

629. fifl 583LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
48.0
(121.9)
3.2
(8.1)
2.7
(6.9)
0.89
(2.3)
2.0
(5.1)
DL-14, 24:
1" NPT (4" G)
DL-34:
2" NPT (2" G)
ULTRASONIC LEVEL SWITCH, TRANSMITTER, AND CONTROLLER
DL14, 24, 34 SERIES ECHOPOD
Red - Po wer
Blk - Return
Wht - TX (Out)
Grn - RX (In)
Blu - Rly 1
Org - Rly 2
Yel - Rly 3
Pur - Rly 4
Brn - Rly Com
WIRING
DIMENSIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
PART NO.: LI99-1001
RED
BLACK
GREEN
WHITE
USB
®
Fob Interface
EchoPod communicates with WebCal through a USB
®
interface called a fob. Before
plugging your fob into your computer’s USB
®
port, be sure that you have installed WebCal
on your computer
.
Connect the red, green, white and black wires from EchoPod into the correct terminals on
the fob. Tighten the screws on the terminals and plug your fob into the USB
®
port of your
computer
.
RELATED PRODUCTS
LI99-1001 Fob calibration key
LM52-1400 2”NPT x 1” NPT (Sch. 40) fitting
LM52-1800 2” NPT x 1” NPT (Sch. 80) fitting
LM52-1410 2” Socket x 1” NPT (Sch. 40) fitting
LM52-1810 2” Socket x 1” NPT (Sch. 80) fitting
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DL14 EchoPod level sensor, up to 49.2" (1.25m)
DL24 EchoPod level sensor, up to 9.8' (3m)
DL34 EchoPod level sensor, up to 18.0" (5.5m)
0
NPT process connection, DL14 & 24 - 1" NPT,
DL34 - 2" NPT
1
Metric process connection, DL14 & 24 - 1" G,
DL34 - 2" G
0
Without FOB USB adapter (order separately
see related products)
1Includes FOB USB adapter
*Note: Specify alarm levels when ordering

630. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 584fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ELECTRONIC WATER LEVEL CONTROL SYSTEM
WLC SERIES
Supply Voltage 110 VAC 60 Hz, 250 mA @
110 VAC
Contact Rating
Internal 30A @ 250 VAC
Dry Contacts 0.5 @ 50 VAC/VDC
Contact Type SPST
Accuracy ±0.125" (3.175 mm) of
operating range
LED Indication Power on, Status indication
Dimensions 8.75” X 10.5” X 6.0”
(22.2 x 26.7 x 15.2 cm)
including the hinge and latch
Enclosure NEMA 4X
Mounting Orientation Vertical
Approvals ETL listed
Warranty Limited lifetime warranty
DESCRIPTION
The Waterline Controls WLC Series electronic water level
control system may look like the competition but the unit is
revolutionary in its design
. The WLC Series is perfect in any
application where water level management is important such as cooling tower basins and water holding tanks for cooling towers
. It uses a microprocessor that monitors all probes
f
or correct operation and then provides the corresponding
outputs to drive the power relays, the Building Automation System and a visual indication of the operational status. The
Modular construction and a self-test feature insure user- friendly operation
. By using a very low voltage and current,
WLC Series sensors never foul or degrade. So when we say
"Never Replace A Water Level Controller Again" we mean it!
FEATURES
•
Easy installation
• Simple, reliable, and automatic
• Compensates for wave action
• No moving parts or mechanical floats
• Liquid tight enclosure
• Accurately manages levels to within 1/8" of operating
range
• Easy to read LED display
S ensor Low Voltage R aceway
POWER
ALARM
FILL
HIGH
ALARM
LOW
ALARM
HEAT
CUT OUT
TESTING
PRESS TO TEST
Green (Ground)
Black
Black
220VAC OR 110VAC White
Black
HEAT CUT OFF
(HCO)
LOW ALARM
(LA)
HIGH ALARM
(HA)
FILL
Blue
Pair
Brown
Pair
Green
Pair
Red
Pair
Quantity of re lays
and lights are a
function of the
model.
*Bottom plate
removed in
illustration
WLC-3000 thro ugh 6000
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
WLC Series
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
WLC-3000 Water level controller, fill only
WLC-4000 Water level controller, fill with high alarm and built-in diagnostics
WLC-4500 Water level controller, fill with low alarm and built-in diagnostics
WLC-5000 Water level controller, fill with high and low alarm and built-in diagnostics
WLC-6000 Water level controller, fill with high, low, and ultra-low (heat cut off) alarms and diagnostics

631. fifl 585LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ULTRASONIC LEVEL SWITCH
LU77/78 SERIES ECHOSWITCH
Supply Voltage 95-250 VAC
Power 20 watts @ 120 VAC
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 2-wire isolated sinking
Memory Non Volatile
Relay Output 3 SPDT, 60 VA, 1A maximum
Deadband
LU77 4" (10.1 cm)
LU78 8" (20.3 cm)
Repeatability ±0.25" (6.35 mm)
Operating Pressure 30 psig (206.9 kPA)
Process Temperature -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Measurement Range LU77

4” to 9.8’ (10 cm to 3m)
LU78 8” to 26.2’ (20 cm to 8m)
Beam Width
LU77 2" (5.1 cm) diameter
LU78 3" (7.6 cm) diameter
Fail Safe Selectable: open, closed or last hold
Operating Temperature -7° to 140°F (-22° to 60°C) Enclosure
PVDF, Polycarbonate
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X (IP65)
Conduit Connection Dual, 1/2" NPT
Process Connection LU77
1" NPT
LU78 2" NPT
Dimensions 5.2"H x 5.2"W x 3.9"D
(13.3 x 13.3 x 10.0 cm)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Flowline EchoSwitch LU77/78 ultrasonic level switch provides non-contact liquid level measurement up to 26
.2'
(8m) with integral three-channel relay control and a 4-20 mA signal output
. Each relay can be configured for a single
setpoint alarm or two latched setpoints for automatic fill or empty in simplex, duplex, or triplex control modes
. Calibration
is quick and easy using a sequence of push-button entries.
Local LCD indication re
veals level values and relay status
.
The
LU77/78 is designed with a NEMA 4X enclosure, suitable
for outdoor applications
.
FEATURES
• Select sensing range of 9.8' (3.0m) or 26.2' (8.0m)
• LCD display with digital push-button calibration
• NEMA 4X enclosure
• Non-volatile memory
• 3" maximum beam width
• Integral timer for pump or valve delay
• Pump simplex, duplex, or triplex control modes
• 4-20 mA output can be used to provide local or remote level indication
APPLICATIONS
• Cooling tower sumps
• Tanks
• Wells
• Water/waste sumps
• Process vessels
• Lift stations
• Day tanks
SPECIFICATIONS
LU77
LU78

632. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 586fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
The LU77/78 is configured using three push buttons. To
access the configuration menu, hold down the SELECT
button for five seconds. The display will scroll through the
top level of the configuration menu [units, tank, relay 1, relay 2, relay 3, safe, mplex, help, run]
. Press the SELECT button
to choose the displayed menu item. Use the UP and DOWN
buttons to set parameters. Hold down the SELECT button to
save. Select EXIT to return to the main configuration menu.
T
o return to operational mode, press SELECT when RUN
appears on the display
.
ULTRASONIC LEVEL SWITCH
LU77/78 SERIES ECHOSWITCH
3.5
(8.8)
5.5
(13.9)
5.2 (13.3)
LU78
LU77
4.0
(10.1)
2" NPT
(2" G)
2.7
(6.9)
1" NPT
(1" G)1.25
(3.2)
3.9
(10.0)
in
(cm)
5.2 (13.3)
2.4
(6.2)
1.9
(4.9)
CONFIGURATIONDIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LU77-5004 Ultrasonic level switch, up to 9.8 ft (3m)
LU77-5005-B Ultrasonic level switch, up to 9.8 ft (3m) with mounting bracket
LU78-5004 Ultrasonic level switch, up to 26.2 ft (8m)
LU78-5005-B Ultrasonic level switch, up to 26.2 ft (8m) with mounting bracket
RELAY 1
L1 L2
R1
95 to 250 VAC PowerSPDT Relay
60 VA
NC / COM / NO
POWER
UP
SELECT
™
R2 R3
RELAY 2 RELAY 3
DOWN
EchoSwitch II
FAST
RELATED PRODUCTS
LM50-1001 2" Mounting bracket (included with "B" option)
LM50-1001-1 1" Mounting bracket (included with "B" option)
LM52-1400 2"NPT x 1” NPT (Sch. 40) fitting
LM52-2400 3" NPT x 2” NPT (Sch. 40) fitting

633. fifl 587LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
MULTI-LEVEL SWITCH
MLS SERIES
Operating Pressure
Stainless steel: 120 psig (8.3 bar)
Buna-N: 150 psig (10.3 bar)
Specific Gravity
Stainless Steel 0.85
Buna-N 0.65
Operating Temperature
Stainless steel -40° to 300°F (-40° to 149°C)
Buna-N -40° to 180°F (-40° to 82°C)
Switch Rating 50 VA SPST @ 120 VAC
Wetted Materials Brass stem, Buna-N float, 316 SS
stem, Buna-N float, 316 SS stem,
316 SS float
Mounting Orientation Vertical (± 30°)
Process Connection 1/2" NPT(M), 1" NPT(M)
Dimensions Up to 48" L x 1.0" diameter
Approvals UL File E203716
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Innovative Solutions MLS Series multi-level switch
can be customized to meet application requirements. The unit
can be configured with up to four independent switch points and stem lengths up to 48" (122 cm)
. The MLS Series is
mounted vertically and shipped in the normally open position.
F
or normally closed operation, simply invert the float
.
FEATURES
• Up to f
• 50 VA SPST switch operation (120-240 VAC)
• Easy installation
• Hermetically sealed
SPECIFICATIONS
MLS
ORDERING INFORMATION
FLOAT SWITCH
KCFS SERIES
Switch 5A @ 125 VAC 3A @ 250 VAC
Operating Temperature Maximum 150°F (70°C)
Mounting Orientation Horizontal
Dimensions 3.5" (8.9 cm) clip to float
Wiring Terminations 6" (15 cm) leads 18 AWG
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KCFS Series float switches provide a cost
effective solution for applications such as condensate drip
pan monitoring
. The KCFS-SC features a spring clip and the
KCFS-LB an L bracket for mounting.
FEATURES
• Simple installation
• Low cost
• SPDT contacts
Common
Normally Open
Normally Closed
KCFS
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KCFS-LB Float switch with L bracket mount
KCFS-SC Float switch with spring clip mount
SPECIFICATIONS
KCFS-SC
KCFS-LB

634. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 588fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
A= Minimum distance from actuation
point to bottom of mounting.
B= Minimum distance between
actuation levels.
C= Minimum distance from end of
unit to lowest actuation point.
Notes:
1. A, B, and C dimensions are
based on a specific gravity of 1.0.
2.
3. Actuation levels are calibrated on
descending fluid level, with water
as the fluid, unless otherwise
specified.
4. Standard tolerance on actuation
levels is ± 1/8" (3mm).
L1
LO
L2
L3
L4 A
B
C
Minimum distances A= 1” (2.5 cm) B= 1.75” (4.4 cm) C= 1” (2.5 cm)
ORDERING INFORMATION
Float Materials Dimensions Temperature Pressure Minimum Specific Gravity
316 stainless steel  1" × 1" -40° to +300° F 300 psig 0.95
Buna-N 1" × 1" -40° to +180° F 150 psig0 .80
FLOAT SIZES AND OPERATING SPECIFICATONS
MLS ACTUATION LEVELS
Wiring Options Wire Color
Common Wire Black
NO or NC
L1 Red
L2 Yellow
L3 Blue
L4 Brown
L5 Orange
Common
Notes: All SPST switches are set normally open in their  “dry”, “no level” condition unless specified otherwise. 
  “White-Red” and “White-Yellow” denote single white
wire with red or yellow stripes.
SWITCH WIRING
MULTI-LEVEL SWITCH
MLS SERIES

635. fifl 589LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
11.81 inch (30.1 cm) leads
FS7 Series
Shipped
Normally Open
WIRING
FLOAT LEVEL SWITCHES
FS7 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele FS7 Series Float Level Switches provide an
economic solution to monitoring the most common liquid
levels applications in tanks and other vessels
. Magnets within
the float actuate the sealed reed s
witch on rising or falling
levels
. These switches are mounted in the vertical position
and are shipped in the normally open position. The switch
action can easily be reversed (normally closed position) by removing the float, rotating it 180° (end-to-end), and replacing the float on the stem
.
FEATURES
• Lo •
50 W SPST switch operation (120-240 VAC)
• Easy installation
• Vertical mounting
• UL File E161587
ACTUATION LEVELS
APPLICATIONS
• Condensate vessels
• Storage tanks
• Humidifiers and de-humidifiers
• Chemical storage
• Chillers
in
(cm)
0.78 (200) HEX FLATS
1/8-27 NPT
11.81 (30.1) LEADS
0.19
(0.50)
0.64 (1.60)
0.90
(2.30)
ø 0.31 (0.80)
TOPT OP
NC NO
2.02
(5.10)
ø 1.00 (2.54)
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
FS7-BN Vertical float switch, Polysulfone stem / Buna-N float, 11.81" (30 cm) leads
FS7-SS Vertical float switch, 316 Stainless Steel stem / 316 Stainless Steel float, 11.8" (30 cm) leads
in
(cm)
1/8-27 NPT
1/2 HEX
0.32 (0.80) Actuation
3/4 Submergence
1.10 (2.80)
MAX ø OVER WELD
0.32 (8.00)
2.20
(5.60)
1.60
(4.10)1.00
(2.54)
11.8 (30.1)
LEADS
Model
Number
Material
(stem/ float)
Specific
Gravity 
Temperature Limits
Operating
Pressure
Installation
Mounting
Connection
Dimensions Weight
FS7-BN PS/Buna-N 0.7
-4° to 248°F (-20° to 120°C)
57 psig Vertical 1/8" NPT 2.0"L Ø x 1.0" 0.03 lb (0.02kg)
FS7-SS
Note: PS = Polysulfone, SS = 316 Stainless steel.
SS/SS 0.7
-4° to 176°F (-20° to 80°C)
170 psig Vertical 1/8" NPT 2.2"L Ø x 1.1" 0.06 lb (0.03kg)
SPECIFICATIONS
FS7-BN FS7-SS

636. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 590fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
FLOAT LEVEL SWITCHES
F7 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The Innovative Solutions F-7 Series Float Level Switches
provide an economical solution to monitoring liquid levels
in tanks and other vessels
. Magnets within the float actuate
the her
metically sealed reed switch on rising or falling levels
.
Switches are a
vailable in horizontal or vertical mounting
configurations
. Vertical floats are shipped in the normally
open position. The switch action can easily be reversed by
removing the float, rotating it 180° (end-to-end), and replacing the float on the stem
. The operation of the horizontal floats
can be changed by rotating the entire switch 180°.
FEATURES
• Lo
• 50 VA SPST switch operation (120-240 VAC)
• Hermetically sealed
• Easy installation
• Vertical or horizontal mounting
• UL File E203716
MODEL DESCRIPTION
F7-BT Vertical float switch, Polysulfone stem / Buna-N float
F7-PS Vertical float switch, Polysulfone stem / Polysulfone float
F7-SS Vertical float switch, 316 Stainless Steel stem / 316 Stainless Steel float
F7-LL Vertical low level float switch, Polysulfone stem / Buna-N float
F7-HPP External horizontal float switch, Polypropylene stem / Polypropylene float
F7-HIP Internal horizontal float switch, Polypropylene stem / Polypropylene float
F7-HSS External horizontal float switch, 316 Stainless Steel stem / 316 Stainless Steel float
APPLICATION
• Condensate vessels
• Storage tanks
• Humidifiers and de-humidifiers
• Chemical storage
• Chillers
RED
RED
Open
Closed
Model
Number
Material
(stem/ float)
Specific
Gravity
Temperature Limits
Operating
Pressure
Installation
Mounting
Connection
Dimensions Weight
F7-BT PS/Buna-N 0.75 -40° to 180°F (-40° to 82°C) 150 psig Vertical 1/8" NPT 2.21"L Ø x 1.0" 0.1 lb (0.05kg)
F7-PS PS/PS 0.65 -40° to 225°F (-40° to 107°C) 50 psig Vertical 1/8" NPT 2.21"L Ø x 1.0" 0.1 lb (0.05kg)
F7-SS SS/SS 0.90 -40° to 300°F (-40° to 149°C) 300 psig Vertical 1/8" NPT 2.06"L Ø x 1.0" 0.2 lb (0.09kg)
F7-LL PS/Buna-N 0.75 -40° to 180°F (-40° to 82°C) 150 psig Vertical 1/8" NPT 1.62"L Ø x 1.13" 0.09 lb (0.04kg)
F7-HPP PP/PP 0.80 -40° to 150°F (-40° to 66°C) 100 psig Horizontal (Ext) 1/2" NPT 4.24"L Ø x 0.69" 0.09 lb (0.04kg)
F7-HIP PP/PP 0.55 -40° to 150°F (-40° to 66°C) 100 psig Horizontal (Int) 5/8"-11 3.94"L Ø x 0.69" 0.2 lb (0.09kg)
F7-HSS
Note: PS = Polysulfone, PP = Polypropylene, SS = 31 Stainless steel.
SS/SS 0.80 -40° to 300°F (-40° to 149°C) 300 psig Horizontal (Ext) 1/2" NPT 4.24"L Ø x 0.69" 0.2 lb (0.09kg)
SPECIFICATIONS
WIRING
F7-BT
F7-HIP
F7-LL F7-SS
F7-HPP
F7-HSS
F7-PS

637. fifl 591LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
STAINLESS STEEL FLOAT LEVEL SWITCH
F8-SSL
Contact Rating 50 VA, SPST, NO/NC
Specific Gravity 0.75
Operating Temperature -40° to 300°F (-40° to 149°C)
Wetted Materials 316 Stainless Steel (stem/float)
Mounting Orientation Vertical
Actuation 1 3/16"
Process Connection 1/4" NPT(M)
Dimensions 2.06" L x 1.0" diameter
Wiring Terminaltions 2 Red lead wires
Approvals UR, UL File E203716
Weight 0.2 lb (0.09 kg)
Warranty 1 year
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The Innovative Solutions Model F8-SSL Stainless Steel
Float Level Switch is designed for high pressure or high
temperature level monitoring applications
. Magnets within the
float actuate the her
metically sealed reed switch on rising or
falling levels
. The unit is mounted vertically and shipped in the
normally open position. For normally closed operation, simply
invert the float.
FEATURES
• High pressure and high temperature performance
• 50 VA SPST switching
• Hermetically sealed
• Easy installation
• Vertical mounting
• Normally open or closed operation
MODEL DESCRIPTION
F8-SSL Vertical float switch
SPECIFICATIONS
F8-SSL
MECHANICAL FLOAT SWITCH
NG2DW1500B
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The Model NG2DW1500B is an economical mechanical float
switch. The switch can be installed by tie-wrapping it to a
support structure or by adding an external weight to the cable.
The unit is ultr
asonically welded and potted for a complete
seal
. SPDT contacts are included so the unit can be used to
empty or fill a tank or sump.
FEATURES
• SPDT mechanical switch
• 10A contacts rated for 1/4 hp
• Float suitable for sewage and high temperature
• CPE-jacketed 15' (4.6m) cord
• Extra cord weight available
MODEL DESCRIPTION
NG2D
W1500B
Mechanical float switch
PM-590 External weight 1.27 lb (0.58 kg)
Contact Rating 10A 120/240 VAC, 1/4 hp 120/240 VAC
Contact Configuration SPDT
Operating Temperature 140°F (60°C) maximum
Wetted Materials ABS plastic
Operation Angle 25 degrees above,
10 degrees below horizontal
Wiring

Tank Full Black-red closed
Tank Empty Black-white closed
Cable Length
15' (4.6m)
Cable Type 16/3 CPE jacketed
Dimensions 4.6"H x 2.6" diameter (11.7 x 6.6 cm)
Approvals CSA
Weight 1.65 lb (0.7 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
NG2DW1500B
25
PM-590
External
Weight
Horizontal
Pumping
Range
10
TYPICAL INSTALLATION

638. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 592fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
LEVEL SWITCH
LV41, LV42 SERIES
Contact Rating 10 A @ 250 VAC
Contact Type SPDT (NO/NC)
Operating Pressure
LV41 14.5 psi (1 bar)
LV42 29 psi (2 bar)
Process Temperature
LV41 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)

LV42
-4° to 176°F (-20° to 80°C)
Sensor Rating IP68
Cable Length available in 20 ft (6.1 m) and
50 ft (15.2 m)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight 2.4 lb (1.1 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Flowline LV41 and LV42 Series general purpose sump
float level switches provide reliable liquid level detection.
The
LV41 Series is perfect for simple liquid level control for
filling or draining reservoirs and tanks
. The float switches
are universally used for pump automation due to reliability,
inexpensiveness and ease of installation.
The LV42 Series is designed for the automation of pumps,
specifically filling and draining of tanks, wells and reservoirs.
The body is free of an
y irregularities, making it ideal for use in
sewage water applications
. The polypropylene body consists
of a double airtight chamber with high-pressure melted polypropylene re-injection sealing to ensure a perfect seal against infiltration
.
FEATURES
• Mec
automatic start / stop of electrical components (LV41 only)
•
Submersible polypropylene body and PVC cable for
corrosive liquids
• 10A @ 250 VAC dry contact selectable NO
• Compatible with counter weights and cable hangers for simple installation
SPECIFICATIONS
LV41
ORDERING INFORMATION
LV42
Blue (N.O.)
Black (Com)
Brown (N.C.)
4.14"
(105.0 mm)
1.64"
(41.5 mm)
Blue (N.O.)
Black (Com)
Brown (N.C.)
3.18"
(81.0 mm)
5.5"
(139.7 mm)
Side View
Top View
DIMENSIONS
LV41
Blue (N.O.)
Black (Com)
Brown (N.C.)
8.36"
(212.5 mm)
4.36"
(110.83 mm)
LV42
MODEL DESCRIPTION
L
V41-7201
Small sump float level switch with 20 ft of cable
L
V41-7501
Small sump float level switch with 50 ft of cable
L
V42-7201
Large sump float level switch with 20 ft of cable
L
V42-7501
Large sump float level switch with 50 ft of cable

639. fifl 593LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Contact Rating 5A @ 125/250 VAC
Contact Type SPDT
Operating Pressure 150 psig (10.34 bar)
Specific Gravity 0.6 minimum
Operating Temperature 212°F (100°C) maximum
Mounting Horizontal with index arrow pointing
down
Process Connection 1" NPT
Dimensions 8.31" L (21.1 cm)
Conduit Connection 1/2" NPT
Wiring Terminations 18 AWG, 18" (460 mm) long
Red Normally Closed
Blue Normally Open
Black Common
Approvals CE, UL File E38115
Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg)
Warranty 1 year
GENERAL-PURPOSE FLOAT SWITCH
L8
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The Dwyer Model L8 Flotect
®
Liquid Level Switch
featues a leak proof body and float constructed from tough,
durable polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) which has excellent
chemical resistance
. Because the liquid level snap switch
is magnetically actuated, ther-e is no direct mechanical linkage to leak or fail, assuring longer life and decreased maintenance costs
.
FEATURES
• CE appr •
Polyphenylene sulfide float
• Magnetically actuated
• Good for specific gravities 0.6 and greater
• 1" NPT(M) mounting
L8
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
L8 Level switch
L8-WP Level switch with phenylpolioxide weatherproof enclosure
L8-WP2 Level switch with aluminum weatherproof enclosure
L8 WP2INSTALLATION / WIRING GUIDE
Wire in accordance with local electrical codes. Lead wire
color codes are as f
ollows
. Black - Common, Red - Nor-
mally Closed, Blue - Normally Open. Normal is the contact
condition when liquid level is below the actuation point.
Closed contacts open and open contacts close when liquid le
vel lifts the float to the actuation point
.

640. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 594fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
VERTICAL FLOAT SWITCH
VS-120R1R9L-01
Supply Voltage 115 VAC
Contact Rating 10A 120/240 VAC, 1/2 hp 120/240
VAC, 50/60 Hz
Operating Temperature 150°F (66°C) maximum
Enclosure ABS plastic
Wetted Materials Black Polypropylene
Mounting Orientation Vertical
Cable Length 10 ft (3.1m)
Dimensions 12.5"H (31.8 cm), 2.4" (6 cm)
diameter float
Wiring Terminaltions Piggy-back three-prong
standard plug
Approvals CSA
Weight 1.3 lb (0.6 kg)
Warranty 1 year
Rod Guide
Bracket
12.5
(31.8)
2.38
(6.0)
in
(cm)
Float
Pipe Clamp Mount
Adjustable Stop
Rod
Adjustable
Stop
3.75
(9.5)
DESCRIPTION
The Model VS-120R1R9L-01 vertical float switch is designed for sump pump control
. The unit features adjustable float
stops, a rod guide, pipe clamp, and stainless steel bracket.
The s
witch and cord assembly is suitable for exposure to
sewage environments
. The plug assembly fits into a standard
three-prong, 120 VAC electrical outlet and has an integral three-prong switched socket for sump pump control
. The
pump connects into the back of the power plug and switching level actuation is controlled though the positioning of the float using the adjustable stops
. The VS-120RIR9L-01 contact
makes on a level rise.
FEATURES
• SPDT mechanical switch
• 10A contacts rated for 1/2 hp
• Float suitable for sewage and high temperature
• Adjustable float stops
• Mounts to sump discharge pipes up to 2.5" (6 cm)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
VS-120R1R9L-01 Vertical float switch
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
VS-120R1R9L-01
12.5"H (31.8 cm) with 2.4" (6 cm) diameter float

641. fifl 595LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
CONDENSATE OVERFLOW SWITCHES
SS/SP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The RLE Technologies SS/SP Series condensate overflow
switches detect rising water in A/C condensate drain pans
and shut off the system to prevent overflow and water
damage
. Designed for installation on auxiliary drain pan
outlets or inline on primary drains, models are available with a solid state electronic probe or magnetic reed switch
. Switches
include mounting adapters and hardw
are
.
Model SG1
condensate overflow alarm is wired across the
normally closed contacts of the condensate switch
. As the
w
ater level rises, the switch opens allowing current to flow
through the alarm which sounds a buzzer and flashes an LED indicating a possible overflow condition. The SG1 works with
most 24-volt overflow switches and pumps and comes pre- wired with 4-foot 18 AWG lead wires and 2-sided tape
.
FEATURES
• Waterproof
• Primary or auxiliary installation
• Easy to install and service
• Low voltage
• UL 508 listed
• Plenum rated models
Normal Position
Closed Contacts
Contacts Open
On rising water
WIRING
SS1
SP1P
SS3
SS2AP
SG1
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SS1 Inline magnetic reed condensate overflow switch
SS2AP Auxiliary condensate overflow switch
SS3 Auxiliary condensate pan overflow switch
SP1P Inline solid state condensate overflow switch
RELATED PRODUCTS
SG1 Condensate overflow alarm
SPECIFICATIONS
ModelSwitch Type
Supply
Voltage
Switching
Capability
Installation
Plenum
Rated
Mounting
Adapter
Lead Length Weight
SS1 Magnetic 24 VAC 1.25A Primary (inline) or auxillary No 3/4" adapter 6 ft (1.8m), 18 AWG 0.2 lb (0.09 kg)
SS2AP Magnetic 24 VAC 1.25A Auxillary Yes 3/4" adapter 4 ft (1.2m), 18 AWG 0.2 lb (0.09 kg)
SS3 Magnetic 24 VAC 1.25A Drain Pan No NA 6 ft (1.8m), 18 AWG 0.09 lb (0.04 kg)
SP1P Solid state 24 VAC 2.3A Primary (inline) or auxillaryYes 3/4" adapter 6 ft (1.8m), 18 AWG 0.2 lb (0.09 kg)

642. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 596fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VDC, 25 mA
Signal Output 4-20 mA loop powered
Maximum Output
Impedance 400Ω @ 24 VDC
Memory Non-volatile
Deadband 2" (5.1 cm)
Accuracy ±0.125" (3 mm)
Operating Pressure 30 psig (206.9 kPa)
Process Temperature 20° to 140°F (-7° to 60°C)
Measurement Range 2" to 49.2" (50.8 to 1.25m)
Beam Width 2" (5.1 cm)
Fail Safe Signal 4 mA, 20 mA, 21 mA 22 mA, or hold last signal
Resolution
0.019" (0.5 mm)
Temperature Compensation
Automatic
Operating Temperature -31° to 140°F (-35° to 60°C)
Enclosure Polycarbonate, NEMA 6P
Process Connection 1" NPT
Cable Length 48" (1.2m)
Dimensions 3.2"H x 2.0"W x 2.0"D
(8.1 x 5.1 x 5.1 cm)
Approvals CE, FM, RoHS
Weight 3.0 lbs (1.4 kg)
Warranty 1 year
48.0
(121.9)
in
(cm)
3.2
(8.1)
2.7
(6.9)
0.89
(2.3)
2.0
(5.1)
1" NPT
(1" G)
DESCRIPTION
The compact Flowline EchoPod DL10 Ultrasonic Level Transmitter provides non-contact liquid level measurement up to 49
.2" (1.25m) with reversible 4-20 mA output. The
Model DL10 is ideal for corrosive, sticky, and dirty media.
T
ransmitters can be quickly configured using WebCal
software
. The software offers pre-programmed menus, tank
setpoint graphics, and custom wiring diagrams. User can
define loop f
ailsafe, start-up condition, output at empty and
specific tank levels
.
FEATURES
• Ideal f •
Simple configuration
• PC enclosure designed to be corrosion resistant
• Minimal dead band optimizes filling capacity
• Adjustable loop failsafe
• 2" (5.1 cm) beam diameter for restricted spaces
FM
APPROVED
USC
APPLICATION
• Small atmospheric day tanks
• Skid or process vessels
• Lift stations
• Drums
• Sumps
• Chemical feed applications
DIMENSIONS
RED
(+) VDC
(+) (–)
DISPLAY / PLC / CONTROLLER
8888
(–) VDC
24 VDC
BLACK
SHIELD
WHITE
GREEN
KEY
RED = POWER
BLACK = RETURN
SHIELD = _
WHITE = TX
GREEN = RX
TYPICAL WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
DL10
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION 
DL10-00 Ultrasonic level transmitter
DL10-01 Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob
ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER
DL10 SERIES ECHOPOD
RELATED PRODUCTS
LI99-1001 Fob calibration key
LM52-1400 2”NPT x 1” NPT (Sch. 40) fitting
LM52-1800 2” NPT x 1” NPT (Sch. 80) fitting
LM52-1850 1” NPT flange (Sch. 80)

643. fifl 597LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER
LU2 SERIES ECHOSONIC
Supply Voltage 24 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA two-wire
Maximum Output
Impedance 500Ω @24VDC
Memory Non-volatile
Deadband LU23
8" (20 cm) from sensor
LU27 4" (10 cm) from sensor
LU28/29 8" (20 cm) from sensor
Accuracy ±0.2% of span in air
Operating Pressure 30 psig (206.9 kPa)
Process Temperature -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Measurement Range
LU23
8" to 18.0' (20 cm to 5.5 m)
LU27 4" to 9.8' (10 cm to 3.0 m)
LU28 8" to 26.2' (20 cm to 8.0 m)
LU29 8" to 32.8' (20cm to 10 m)
Beam Width LU23
3" (7.6 cm)
LU27 2" (5.1 cm)
LU28/29 3" (7.6 cm)
Fail Safe Selectable: 4 mA, 20 mA, 21 mA, 22
mA, or hold last signal
Resolution LU27
0.019" (0.5 mm)
LU28/29 0.079" (2.0 mm)
Operating Temperature -31° to 140°F (-35° to 60°C)
Enclosure Polycarbonate
Enclosure Rating NEMA 6P (UL 50 Type 6P)
Process Connection LU23
2" NPT
LU27 1" NPT
LU28/29 2" NPT
Cable Length 10' (3m) length
Dimensions 2.9"H x 4.1"W x 4.1"D
(7.4 x 10.5 x 10.5 cm)
Approvals CE, FM, RoHS
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Flowline EchoSonic LU2 Series ultrasonic level transmitter provides non-contact liquid level measurement with a reversible 4-20 mA output
. Models are available in three
measurement ranges from 9.8 ft to 32.8 ft (3m to 10m), and
an accuracy of ±0.2%. The LU2 Series is ideal for ultrapure,
corrosive, waste, and slurry applications. Transmitters can
be quickly configured using WebCal software. The software
offers pre-programmed menus, tank set point graphics, and custom wiring diagrams
. User can define loop failsafe, start-
up condition, output at empty, and specific tank levels.
FEATURES
• 9.8', •
Simple configuration
• Polycarbonate enclosure designed to be corrosion
resistant and submersible
• Minimal deadband optimizes the filling capacity of
tanks and sumps
• Adjustable loop failsafe
• 2" (5.1 cm) beam diameter for applications with restricted space
FM
APPROVED
USC
APPLICATIONS
• Cooling tower sumps
• Tanks
• Wells
• Ice storage
• Waste sumps
• Process vessels
SPECIFICATIONS
LU2 Series

644. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 598fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER
LU2 SERIES ECHOSONIC
Red - Power
Black - Return
White - Tx (out)
Green - Rx (in)
Shld
LU27
LU28/29
1.2
(3.2)
1.9
(4.9)
Red - Power
Black - Return
White - Tx (out)
Green - Rx (in)
Shld
2.9
(7.4)
1.7
(4.4)
2.4
(6.1)
4.1 (10.5) 10' Cable (3m)
3.4
(8.6)
2" NPT
(2" G)
4.1 (10.5) 10' Cable (3m)
1" NPT
(1" G)
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LU27-01 Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 9.0 ft (3.0m)
LU27-01-B Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 9.0 ft (3.0m) with bracket
LU27-01-B-C Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 9.0 ft (3.0m) with bracket, custom calibration
LU27-01-C Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 9.0 ft (3.0m) custom calibration
LU28-01 Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 26.2 ft (8.0m)
LU28-01-B Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 26.2 ft (8.0m) with bracket
LU28-01-B-C Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 26.2 ft (8.0m) with bracket, custom calibration
LU28-01-C Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 26.2 ft (8.0m) custom calibration
LU29-01 Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 32.8 ft (10m)
LU29-01-B Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 32.8 ft (10m) with bracket
LU29-01-B-C Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 32.8 ft (10m) with bracket, custom calibration
LU29-01-C Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 32.8 ft (10m) custom calibration
RELATED PRODUCTS
LI99-1001 Fob calibration key
LM50-1001 2” Mounting bracket (included with "B" option)
LM50-1001-1 1” Mounting bracket (included with "B" option)
LM52-1400 2”NPT x 1” NPT (Sch. 40) fitting
LM52-2400 3” NPT x 2” NPT (Sch. 40) fitting
LM52-2800 3” NPT x 2” NPT (Sch. 80) fitting
LM52-3800 4” NPT x 2” NPT (Sch. 80) fitting

645. fifl 599LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
DESCRIPTION
The Flowline EchoSpan LU80/81/83/84 Series ultrasonic
level transmitter provides non-contact liquid level
measurement up to 32
.8' (10m), with an accuracy of ±0.2%.
Setup is f
ast and easy using the push button menu and
LCD display
. The LU80/81/83/84 Series features fail-safe
intelligence with diagnostic feedback for easy troubleshooting.
The electronics are housed in a r
ugged NEMA 4X enclosure–
ideal for ultrapure, corrosive, waste, and slurry applications
.
FEATURES
• 9.8', •
Simple configuration
• Polycarbonate/ABS enclosure rated NEMA 4X (IP65)
• Fail-safe intelligence
• 3" (7.6 cm) beam diameter for applications with
restricted space (LU81/83/84)
• Six segment LCD display indicates liquid level in inches or centimeters
3.5
(8.8)
5.5
(13.8)
5.2 (13.3)
4.0
(10.1)
2" NPT
(5.1)
2.7
(6.9)
1" NPT
(2.5)
(81/83/84
models)
(80 model)
(81/83/84
models)
3.9
(10)
4.0
(10.1)
(80 model)
DIMENSIONS
ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTERS
LU80/81/83/84 SERIES ECHOSPAN
Supply Voltage 12-28 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA, two-wire @ 500Ω
Memory Non-volatile
Deadband
LU80 4" (10 cm)

LU81/83
8" (20 cm)

LU84
12" (30 cm)
Accuracy ±0.2% of span in air
Operating Pressure 30 psig (206.9 kPa)
Measurement Range
LU80 4" to 9.8' (10 cm to 3m)
LU81 8" to 18.0' (20 cm to 5.5m)
LU83 8" to 26.2' (20 cm to 8m)
LU84 12" to 32.8' (30 cm to 10m)
Beam Width
LU80 2" (5.0 cm)
LU81/83/84 3" (7.6 cm)
Fail Safe Selectable: 4mA, 20 mA, 21 mA,
22 mA, or hold last signal
Temperature Compensation
Automatic
Operating Temperature -7° to 140°F (-22° to 60°C)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X (IP65)
Process Connection
LU80 1" NPT
LU81/83/84 2" NPT
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight
LU80 2.0 lbs (0.9 kg)
LU81/83/84 3.0 lbs (1.4 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
LU80/81/83/84 Series

646. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 600fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Wiring to a Flowline LC52-1001 Controller Wiring to a Typical Two-Wire Loop Po wered Indicator
Wiring to a Typical Programmable Logic Controller Wiring to a Flowline LI1_-1001 Universal Pa nel Meter
Wiring to a Flowline LI42-1001 MicroPoint Indicator
JWA mode
Transmitter #1
Transmitter #2
Black
Red
Gray
White
Brown
Yellow
Purple
Blue
Green
Orange
ORDERING INFORMATION
ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTERS
LU80/81/83/84 SERIES ECHOSPAN
WIRING
RELATED PRODUCTS
LM50-1001 2" Mounting bracket (included with "B" option)
LI99-1001 Fob calibration key
LM50-1001-1 1" Mounting bracket (included with "B" option)
LM52-1400 2"NPT x 1" NPT (Sch. 40) fitting
LM52-2400 3" NPT x 2" NPT (Sch. 40) fitting
LM52-2800 3" NPT x 2" NPT (Sch. 80) fitting
LM52-3800 4" NPT x 2" NPT (Sch. 80) fitting
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LU80-5101 Ultrasonic level transmitter, 9.8 ft (3m)
LU80-5101 Ultrasonic level transmitter, 9.8 ft (3m) with bracket
LU81-5101 Ultrasonic level transmitter, 18.0 ft (5.5m)
LU81-5101-B Ultrasonic level transmitter, 18.0 ft (5.5m) with bracket
LU83-5101 Ultrasonic level transmitter, 26.2 ft (8m)
LU83-5101-B Ultrasonic level transmitter, 26.2 ft (8m) with bracket
LU84-5101 Ultrasonic level transmitter, 32.8 ft (10m)
LU84-5101-B Ultrasonic level transmitter, 32.8 ft (10m) with bracket

647. fifl 601LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
LEVEL TRANSMITTER
LD31, LD32 SERIES DELTASPAN
Supply Voltage 13 to 30 VDC
Signal Output
LD31 4-20 mA, two-wire @ 900Ω
LD32 4-20 mA, two-wire @ 850Ω
Maximum Output Impedance mA
LD31 900Ω @ 30 VDC
LD32 850Ω @ 30 VDC
Accuracy ± 0.25% of full scale
Proof Pressure 2 x full scale
Process Temperature
LD31 0° to 150°F (-18° to 66°C)

LD32
0° to 180°F (-18° to 82°C)
Measurement Range up to 46 ft (14m)
Cable Length
SX01 & SX11 40 ft (12.2m)
SX21 & SX31 60 ft (18.3m)
Cable Type Polyurethane cable jacket and ETFE
cable jacket
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight
LD31 2.2 lb (1.0 kg)
LD32 4.3 lb (2.0 kg)
Warranty 1 year
1/2" NPT
(+) Red
(-) Black
(Clear) Vent
Shld
1.0"
(25.4 mm)
4.08"
(104 mm)
DESCRIPTION
The Flowline DeltaSpan LD31 and LD32 Series
submersible pressure level transmitters provide
continuous level measurement up to 46 ft (14m) of water
column with a 4-20 mA signal output
. Select the LD31 Series
liquid level sensor for relatively clean water, light weight oil or diluted chemical
. Application examples include water wells
and ponds. Select the LD32 Series liquid level sensor for
dirty, foaming or slurry type liquids. Application examples
include municipal sewer or storm pump lift stations.
FEATURES
• Corr
ETFE cable
• Strong cable design with maintenance free breather
tube and vent filter
• Automatic temperature compensation for accurate
measurement
• Rugged clog and damage resistant diaphragm design
(LD32 Series only)
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
LD31
LD31
1/2" NPT
(+) Red
(-) Black
(Clear) Vent
Shld
1.5"
(38.1 mm)
7.98"
(202.8 mm)
2.19"
(55.6 mm)
LD32
LD32

648. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 602fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
LEVEL TRANSMITTER
LD31, LD32 SERIES DELTASPAN
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LD31 Submersible pressure level transmitter, clean liquid applications
LD32
S1

CABLE JACKET
Polyurethane
RANGE ft (m)
S2ETFE
010-11 (0-3.4)
11
21
31
LD31 S111Example: LD31-S111 Model pressure
transmitter with polyurenthance cable
jacket and 0-23 ft range
Submersible pressure level transmitter, dirty liquid applications
0-23 (0-7)
0-34 (0-10.4)
0-46 (0-14)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

649. fifl 603LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
LEVEL TRANSMITTER
LD34, LD35 SERIES DELTASPAN
Supply Voltage 10 to 33 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA, two-wire @ 1000Ω
Maximum Output
Impedance mA 1000Ω @ 30 VDC
Accuracy ± 0.25% of full scale
Proof Pressure 2 x full scale
Process Temperature -4° to 176°F (-20° to 80°C)
Measurement Range
LD34 up to 100 ft (30.5m)
LD35 up to 30 ft (9.1m)
Cable Length
S101 & S111 40 ft (12.2m) (LD34)
S121 & S131 60 ft (18.3m) (LD34)
S141 70 ft (21.3m) (LD34)
S151 100 ft (30.5m) (LD34)
SX01 & SX11 40 ft (12.2m) (LD35)
SX21 & SX31 60 ft (18.3m) (LD35)
Cable Type Polyurethane cable jacket, ETFE
cable jacket (LD35 only)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight LD34
0.24 lb (0.11 kg)

LD35 0.30 lb (0.14 kg)
Warranty 1 year
(+) Red
(-) Black
(Clear) Vent
Shld
0.625" (15.87 mm)
6.25"
(158.30 mm)
DESCRIPTION
The Flowline DeltaSpan LD34 and LD35 Series small-
bore submersible pressure level transmitters provide
continuous level measurement up to 100 ft (30
.4m) of water
column with a 4-20 mA signal output. Select the LD34 Series
liquid level sensor for monitoring of relatively clean water.
Application e
xamples include ballast tanks, ground water,
surface water, dewatering, down hole and remediation
. Select
the
LD35 Series liquid level sensor for dirty, foaming or
slurry type liquids
. Application examples include sewage lift
stations industrial slurries, industrial sumps, landfill leachate, reservoirs, sludge pits and oil tankers
.
FEATURES
• W
years of trouble free service (LD34)
• Tapered body top prevents damage or snaring when
removing from installation (LD34)
• Incorporates lighting and surge protection
• Provides precise output readings with its ±0.25% of full
scale accuracy (LD34)
• Robust PTFE coated FKM fluroelsatomer diaphragm provides a non-stick surface for aggressive fluids (LD35)
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
LD34
LD34
LD35
LD35
(+) Red
(-) Black
(Clear) Vent
Shld
5.94"
(150.83 mm)
1.188"
(30.16 mm)
0.625" (15.87 mm)

650. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 604fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
LEVEL TRANSMITTER
LD34, LD35 SERIES DELTASPAN
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LD34 Small-bore pressure level transmitter, clean liquid applications
LD35
S1

CABLE JACKET
Polyurethane
RANGE ft (m)
S2*ETFE
010-11.55 (0-3.5)
11
21
31
LD34 S111Example: LD34-S111 Small-bore pressure level
transmitter for clean liquid applications
with polyurenthane cable jacket and
0-15 ft range
Small-bore pressure level transmitter, dirty liquid applications
0-15 (0-4.6)
0-20 (0-6.1)
0-30 (0-9.1)
41**
51**
0-50 (0-15.2)
0-100 (0-30.5)
*Cable jacket option only available for LD35 Series
**Ranges only available for LD34 Series
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

651. fifl 605LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
LEVEL TRANSMITTER
LS-10, LH-10 SERIES
Supply Voltage 10-30 VDC
Accuracy
LS-10 0.25% of span
LH-10 0.125% of span
Signal Output 4-20 mA
Maximum Output
Impedance mA 695Ω @ 24 VDC
Overpressure Proof 30 psi, Burst 35 psi
Operating Temperature -22° to 140°F (-30° to 60°C)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X (IP65)
Dimensions 1.1" diameter x 5.8" long
(2.7 x 14.7 cm)
Materials Of Construction
Stainless steel case
Approvals CE, CSA
Weight 2.6 lb (1.2 kg) maximum
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Wika LH10 & LS-10 Series Level Transmitter is exceptionally stable and is virtually unaffected by shock, vibration and orientation
. The LH-10 series level transmitters
have 0.125% accuracy for the 4-20 mA signal while the LS-10
series has 0.25%. Both the LH-10 & LS-10 Series can be
lowered into a tank of water and the 4-20 mA signal will directly correspond to the level
.
FEATURES
• 0.125% (LH-10). 0.25% (LS-10) accuracy, all ranges
• 4-20 mA, loop powered
• Ranges from 4.2 feet (1.3 m) to 34.9 feet (10.6 m)
SPECIFICATIONS LS-10
Vented PUR-cable
tensile strength 220 lbs
(110 lbs with FEP-cable)
Legend:
Sig+ output signal postive
UB+ power supply postive
OV power supply negative
Sig+ output signal negative
WIRING
LH-10

652. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 606fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
LEVEL TRANSMITTER
LS-10, LH-10 SERIES
LS-10
LH-10 with FEP-cable
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LS-10 Submersible liquid level transmitter with 40' cable
LH-10 High performance submersible liquid level transmitter with 40' cable
01*

*Range only available for LH-10 model
** Range only available for LS-10 model
PRESSURE RANGE ft (m)
0-4.2 (0-1.3)
020-8.3 (0-2.5)
030-11.6 (0-3.5)
04**0-23.1 (0-7.0)
050-34.9 (0-10.6)
LS-10 05 Example: LS-10-05 Submersible liquid level transmitter with 40' cable, 0-34.9 ft range

653. fifl 607LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
LIQUID LEVEL MEASUREMENT
One of the features of the M230 that makes it ideal for liquid
level applications is the wide variety of ranges available.
Assume you
want to monitor a water level of 0-60” in a
vented tank
. To select the correct range for the M230, simply
convert the 60” W.C. to psid.
60" W.C. = 5' W.C.

5 ft
= 2.16 psid
2.31 ft/psid
The M230 is available in many standard ranges. The best
selection for an application measuring 0-2.16 psid is the M230-
005PD-C with a standard range of 0-5 psid. Assume a cooling
tower with a 3’ deep sump is mounted on a roof, and a M230 used to monitor the level is in an equipment room on the top floor (see Figure 3)
.
The pressure at the M230 when the sump is full is
3 ft + 10 ft
= 5.6 psid
2.31

Of this 5.6 psid, the pressure caused by the water in the
cooling tower sump is 3 ft
= 1.3 psid
2.31
The remaining 4.3 psid is created by the water in the tube
between the M230 and the bottom of the sump.
An M23 0-010PD-C (0-10 psid range) would be the proper
transmitter.
When using pressure transmitters for liquid-level measurement, the following precautions should be taken:
1
. Verify that the pressure transmitter is compatible with the liquid being monitored
.
2. Protect the pressure transmitter from freezing and over-
temperature.
3. To protect the pressure transmitter from rust, scale, sand, etc
., do not connect the sensing tube to the low
point of the sump. Either connect into the side of the
tank, or insert the sensing tube into the bottom of the tank so the tip of the tube is slightly above the bottom of the sump
.
4. When used on pressurized systems, be sure that the system pressure plus the liquid pressure does not exceed the static pressure rating of the differential pressure transmitter
.
If you have any questions, please call Kele.
Temperature ft/psid
°F (°C) for water

32 (0) 2.307
40 (4.4) 2.307
60 (15.6) 2.309
80 (26.7) 2.314
100 (37.8) 2.323
120 (48.9) 2.333
140 (60) 2.346
160 (71.1) 2.361
180 (82.2) 2.377
200 (93.3) 2.396
210 (98.9) 2.406
(mA out - 4) x R x ft/psid
16
mA out = mA output of the M230 R = Range of the M230 in psid ft/psid = Feet of water per psid at a
specific temperature
(from Figure 2)
(17.8 - 4) x 2 x 2.323
16
Level = = 4 ft
Level (ft) =
Level (ft) =
Where:
What if the liquid being monitored is not water? Simply modify the fo rmula to account for the specific gravity of
the liquid being monitored.
(mA out - 4) x R x 2.31
16 x specific gravity of liquid
M230
3'
10'
FIGURE 3. COOLING TOWER SUMP
What if the liquid being monitored is not water? Simply
modify the formula to account for the specific gravity of the liquid being monitored
.
Temperature ft/psid
°F (°C) for water

32 (0) 2.307
40 (4.4) 2.307
60 (15.6) 2.309
80 (26.7) 2.314
100 (37.8) 2.323
120 (48.9) 2.333
140 (60) 2.346
160 (71.1) 2.361
180 (82.2) 2.377
200 (93.3) 2.396
210 (98.9) 2.406
(mA out - 4) x R x ft/psid
16
mA out = mA output of the M230 R = Range of the M230 in psid ft/psid = Feet of water per psid at a
specific temperature
(from Figure 2)
(17.8 - 4) x 2 x 2.323
16
Level = = 4 ft
Level (ft) =
Level (ft) =
Where:
What if the liquid being monitored is not water? Simply modify the fo rmula to account for the specific gravity of
the liquid being monitored.
(mA out - 4) x R x 2.31
16 x specific gravity of liquid

654. fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION 608fifl
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION
10
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
LIQUID LEVEL MEASUREMENT
The Bubbler System
One of the most difficult applications frequently encountered
in the building automation industry involves measuring the
level of liquid in a tank
. The Bubbler System is one solution
for continuously measuring liquid level. This system involves
forcing a stream of compressed air through a tube that is inserted into a tank
. The pressure required to force the air
out of the tube is equal to the pressure created by the liquid above the end of the tube
. By measuring this pressure, the
level in the tank may be determined.
Using a Pressure Transmitter A simpler method of measuring liquid level is to install a pressure transmitter level with the bottom of the tank or at the lowest level that must be monitored
. If the specific gravity
of the liquid in the tank is known, then the liquid level may be easily calculated
. The Model M230 differential pressure
transmitter is excellent for this application.
Remember, the water height, or “L” (see Figure 2), is
measured from the low port of the pressure transmitter to the top of the water level
.
When used on a vented (non-pressurized) tank, the high- pressure port is piped to the liquid at the bottom of the tank, and the low-pressure port is vented to the atmosphere
. The
M230 then measures the pressure created by the liquid (see Figure 1)
. This method may also be used to measure liquid
level in a pressurized tank by piping the low-pressure port to the top of the tank above the liquid
. The M230 will then
measure the difference in pressure created by the liquid in the tank (see Figure 2)
.
Now that we know the pressure created by the liquid in the tank, how can we convert this to liquid level? Due to gravity, a column of water at 70°F, 2
.31’ high creates a pressure of 1
psig. Therefore, if the liquid in the tank is water, multiplying
the pressure indicated by the M230 by 2.31 will provide the
level of water in the tank in feet. As shown in Table 1, the
value of 2.31 ft/psid is relatively accurate for the temperature
of water in most HVAC processes. If the temperature of water
being monitored is known, the value for ft/psid corresponding to the water temperature in Table 1 may be used in place of 2
.31.
For example, assume the tank in Figure 1 contains 100°F
water. The M230-002PD-C has a range of 0-2 psid (4 mA
output at zero pressure and 20 mA at 2 psid). If the output
from the M230 is 17.8 mA, what is the water level?
M230
L
FIGURE 2. PRESSURIZED TANK
Temperature ft/psid
°F (°C) for water

32 (0) 2.307
40 (4.4) 2.307
60 (15.6) 2.309
80 (26.7) 2.314
100 (37.8) 2.323
120 (48.9) 2.333
140 (60) 2.346
160 (71.1) 2.361
180 (82.2) 2.377
200 (93.3) 2.396
210 (98.9) 2.406
(mA out - 4) x R x ft/psid
16
mA out = mA output of the M230 R = Range of the M230 in psid ft/psid = Feet of water per psid at a
specific temperature
(from Figure 2)
(17.8 - 4) x 2 x 2.323
16
Level = = 4 ft
Level (ft) =
Level (ft) =
Where:
What if the liquid being monitored is not water? Simply
modify the fo rmula to account for the specific gravity of
the liquid being monitored.
(mA out - 4) x R x 2.31
16 x specific gravity of liquid
TABLE 1. CONVERSION FACTOR VS TEMPERATURE
Model M230
M230-002PD-C
L
Low-pressure
port open to
atmosphere
FIGURE 1. VENTED TANK

655. HUMIDITY
LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING
CONTROLS
DLM Series | p. 615
WSD Series | p. 637
LX-24 | p. 624
ET Series | p. 674
AF16 Series | p. 664
CI-24 | p. 626
Kele Provides System and Zone Controls, with a Wide Variety
of Peripheral Sensors and Switches.

656. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
LIGHTING CONTROLS
LMCP Series | p. 613
MK7-B Series | p. 643
CM Series | p. 633
LIGHTING
CONTROLS
Emergency Lighting Control
ELCU-100 — WattStopper Emergency Lighting Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
ELCU-200
— Emergency UL924 Bypass/ Shunt Relays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
ESR Series
— Functional Devices UL924 Emergency Bypass / Shunt Relays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
Light Sensors MK7-B Series
— PLC-Multipoint Celestial Self-Contained Ambient Light Sensors,
Voltage Based
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
PSR-1, PSR-1-T
— Kele Photo-Sensitive Resistor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
K, LC Series
— Photo Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
EM Series
— Photo Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
MAS Series
— PLC-Multipoint Self-Contained Ambient Light Sensors, Current Based
. . . . . . . . . 650
Lighting Contactors and Relays HDR
— Relay 5 Wire with Override and Connector
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
RR-7, RR-9
— GE Lighting Relays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
2R7CDD, 2R9CDD
— ILC Lighting Relays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
AF16 Series
— ABB Lighting Contactors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
LS7K Series
— AEG Lighting Contactors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Lighting Panels and Control Products RP Basic Series
— BlueRidge Relay Panels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
ZC Basic Series
— BlueRidge Lighting Zone Controller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
LMCP Series
— WattStopper Lighting Integrator Panels with Digital Lighting Management
(DLM) Support
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
DLM Series Digital Lighting Management
— Digital Lighting Controls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
LC8 Series
— WattStopper Modular Contractor Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
CX Series Commercial Lighting Control Panels
— Standalone Programmable Lighting
Control Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
ILC Apprentice II
— Programmable Lighting Control Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
PIL-1
— Kele Pulse Initiator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
LDIM2
— Kele Fluorescent Dimming Control Module
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Lighting Switches- Addressable, Override, Smart, Time and Wireless LS-PB-C series
— ILC Light Sync Adressable Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
LV Series
— Lighting Override Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
SPODM Series
— SensorSwitch Low Voltage Sensor Interface Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
CLLV-SW
— Lighting Override Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
HS-100, HS-150
— WattStopper Card Key Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
42000 Series
— Marktime Fan Light Time Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
93000 Series
— Manual Time Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
PTS Series
— SensorSwitch Line Voltage Timer Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
WWS Series
— Wireless Switch Transmitter and Control Relay Receiver
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
Occupancy Sensors and Related Power Packs LX-24
— Kele Occupancy Sensor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
LX-100
— Kele Occupancy Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
CI-24
— WattStopper Occupancy Sensor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
CI-200, CX-100
— WattStopper Occupancy Sensor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
DT-300 Series
— WattStopper Dual-Technology Occupancy and Light Sensor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
DW, PW, and UW
— WattStopper Wall Switch Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
CM Series
— SensorSwitch PIR and PDT Ceiling Mount Occupancy Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
CMRB Series
— SensorSwitch High Bay Line Voltage Occupancy Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
SSD Series
— SensorSwitch PIR Wall Switch Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
WSD Series
— SensorSwitch PIR and PDT Wall Switch Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
WSX Series
— SensorSwitch PIR and PDT Wall Switch Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
WV Series
— SensorSwitch PIR and PDT Wide View Occupancy Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
42E Series
— PIR and Dual Technology Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
BZ-50
— WattStopper Universal Voltage Power Pack
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Time Clocks ET Series
— Electronic Time Clocks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
FM_D Series
— Electronic Time Clocks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675

657. Power LED
Run LED
Controller Board Te rminations
UI (Universal Input) / GND (Ground)
SW3
COMM
J2
J1
1’s10’s
TEST
RELAY 33-64
LEXP
Bluetooth
CAN/DDN
Term
OUTIN
RELAY 1-32
1
ON
2345678
Bluetooth Plug
(for configuration changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit)
Input Terminals
24VDC
UI 21
UI 22
24VDC
UI 23
UI 24
24VDC
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
5VDC
GND
24VDC
UI 1 UI 2
24VDC
UI 3 UI 4
24VDC
UI 5 UI 6
24VDC
UI 7 UI 8
24VDC
UI 9
UI 10
24VDC
UI 11
UI 12
24VDC
UI 13 UI 14
24VDC
UI 15 UI 16
24VDC
UI 17 UI 18
24VDC
UI 19 UI 20
BT485 Terminator Plug
(if applicable)
BACnet(+) In/Out
BACnet(-) In/Out
Shield In
Programing / Protocol
Dip Switch Network Address Rotary Switch 10’s
Network Address
Rotary Switch 1’s
Test Button
24VAC(+) Power In 24VAC(-) Power In
24VAC(+) Auxiliary Out
24VAC(-) Auxiliary Out
Relays 1-32
Relays 33-64
PWR RUN
0 1
2
3
4 5 6
7
8
9
0 1
2
3
4 5 6
7
8
9
Micro-B USB Port
(for configuration changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit)
Transformer Terminations
120VAC Black
Neutral White
Earth Ground
277VAC Brown
LTR Te rminations
Line In
Relay Output
Wire Strip Length Indicator
Manual Override Lever
General Architecture
BAS Router
Internet
Field DevicesField Devices Field Devices Field Devices
Retrofit Interior (RI) Retrofit Kit (RK)
IP
BACnet MS/TP
LVS (Low Vo ltage Switch) / OCC (Occupancy Sensor) / LS5 (Light Sensor)
LVS OCC
LS5
Field Devices
Zone Control (ZC) Relay Panel (RP)
Power LED
Run LED
Controller Board Te rminations
UI (Universal Input) / GND (Ground)
SW3
COMM
J2
J1
1’s10’s
TEST
RELAY 33-64
LEXP
Bluetooth
CAN/DDN
Term
OUTIN
RELAY 1-32
1
ON
2345678
Bluetooth Plug
(for configuration changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit)
Input Terminals
24VDC
UI 21
UI 22
24VDC
UI 23
UI 24
24VDC
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
5VDC
GND
24VDC
UI 1 UI 2
24VDC
UI 3 UI 4
24VDC
UI 5 UI 6
24VDC
UI 7 UI 8
24VDC
UI 9
UI 10
24VDC
UI 11
UI 12
24VDC
UI 13 UI 14
24VDC
UI 15 UI 16
24VDC
UI 17 UI 18
24VDC
UI 19 UI 20
BT485 Terminator Plug
(if applicable)
BACnet(+) In/Out
BACnet(-) In/Out
Shield In
Programing / Protocol
Dip Switch Network Address Rotary Switch 10’s
Network Address
Rotary Switch 1’s
Test Button
24VAC(+) Power In 24VAC(-) Power In
24VAC(+) Auxiliary Out
24VAC(-) Auxiliary Out
Relays 1-32
Relays 33-64
PWR RUN
0 1
2
3
4 5 6
7
8
9
0 1
2
3
4 5 6
7
8
9
Micro-B USB Port
(for configuration changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit)
Transformer Terminations
120VAC Black
Neutral White
Earth Ground
277VAC Brown
LTR Te rminations
Line In
Relay Output
Wire Strip Length Indicator
Manual Override Lever
General Architecture
BAS Router
Internet
Field DevicesField Devices Field Devices Field Devices
Retrofit Interior (RI) Retrofit Kit (RK)
IP
BACnet MS/TP
LVS (Low Vo ltage Switch) / OCC (Occupancy Sensor) / LS5 (Light Sensor)
LVS OCC
LS5
Field Devices
Zone Control (ZC) Relay Panel (RP)
Power LED
Run LED
Controller Board Te rminations
UI (Universal Input) / GND (Ground)
SW3
COMM
J2
J1
1’s10’s
TEST
RELAY 33-64
LEXP
Bluetooth
CAN/DDN
Term
OUTIN
RELAY 1-32
1
ON
2345678
Bluetooth Plug
(for configuration changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit)
Input Terminals
24VDC
UI 21
UI 22
24VDC
UI 23
UI 24
24VDC
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
5VDC
GND
24VDC
UI 1 UI 2
24VDC
UI 3 UI 4
24VDC
UI 5 UI 6
24VDC
UI 7 UI 8
24VDC
UI 9
UI 10
24VDC
UI 11
UI 12
24VDC
UI 13 UI 14
24VDC
UI 15 UI 16
24VDC
UI 17 UI 18
24VDC
UI 19 UI 20
BT485 Terminator Plug
(if applicable)
BACnet(+) In/Out
BACnet(-) In/Out
Shield In
Programing / Protocol
Dip Switch Network Address Rotary Switch 10’s
Network Address
Rotary Switch 1’s
Test Button
24VAC(+) Power In 24VAC(-) Power In
24VAC(+) Auxiliary Out
24VAC(-) Auxiliary Out
Relays 1-32
Relays 33-64
PWR RUN
0 1
2
3
4 5 6
7
8
9
0 1
2
3
4 5 6
7
8
9
Micro-B USB Port
(for configuration changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit)
Transformer Terminations
120VAC Black
Neutral White
Earth Ground
277VAC Brown
LTR Te rminations
Line In
Relay Output
Wire Strip Length Indicator
Manual Override Lever
General Architecture
BAS Router
Internet
Field DevicesField Devices Field Devices Field Devices
Retrofit Interior (RI) Retrofit Kit (RK)
IP
BACnet MS/TP
LVS (Low Vo ltage Switch) / OCC (Occupancy Sensor) / LS5 (Light Sensor)
LVS OCC
LS5
Field Devices
Zone Control (ZC) Relay Panel (RP)
DESCRIPTION
Relay Panel Basic (RP Basic) is a UL Listed lighting control panel. RP
Basic may be scheduled from any BACnet BAS and is compatible with
all low voltage switches as well as occupancy sensors. RP Basic mounts
near the circuit breaker panel to provide centralized control of branch lighting circuits
. The relay panels come with a black powder coated steel
enclosure and a removable door for 8 relay capacity panels, or a hinged reversable door for 16 relay capacity panels and above
.
FEATURES
• UL Listed (UL E133813)
• BACnet MS/TP communication to BAS network
• Line and low voltage compartment separation
• Upgradable controller board firmware
• 347 VAC Transformer (optional)
• Other available options for 16 or more relay capacity panels:
• Low/Line voltage bays (optional)
• Multi-pole lighting contactors (optional)
• 24 VAC auxiliary transformer
• 24 VDC power supply
• BACnet IP router (optional)
• UL924 emergency bypass (optional)
BLUERIDGE RELAY PANELS
RP BASIC SERIES
WIRING
RPSB08
Power LED
Run LED
Controller Board Te rminations
UI (Universal Input) / GND (Ground)
SW3
COMM
J2
J1
1’s10’s
TEST
RELAY 33-64
LEXP
Bluetooth
CAN/DDN
Term
OUTIN
RELAY 1-32
1
ON
2345678
Bluetooth Plug
(for configuration changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit)
Input Terminals
24VDC
UI 21
UI 22
24VDC
UI 23
UI 24
24VDC
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
5VDC
GND
24VDC
UI 1 UI 2
24VDC
UI 3 UI 4
24VDC
UI 5 UI 6
24VDC
UI 7 UI 8
24VDC
UI 9
UI 10
24VDC
UI 11
UI 12
24VDC
UI 13 UI 14
24VDC
UI 15 UI 16
24VDC
UI 17 UI 18
24VDC
UI 19 UI 20
BT485 Terminator Plug
(if applicable)
BACnet(+) In/Out
BACnet(-) In/Out
Shield In
Programing / Protocol
Dip Switch Network Address Rotary Switch 10’s
Network Address
Rotary Switch 1’s
Test Button
24VAC(+) Power In 24VAC(-) Power In
24VAC(+) Auxiliary Out
24VAC(-) Auxiliary Out
Relays 1-32
Relays 33-64
PWR RUN
0 1
2
3
4 5 6
7
8
9
0 1
2
3
4 5 6
7
8
9
Micro-B USB Port
(for configuration changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit)
Transformer Terminations
120VAC Black
Neutral White
Earth Ground
277VAC Brown
LTR Te rminations
Line In
Relay Output
Wire Strip Length Indicator
Manual Override Lever
General Architecture
BAS Router
Internet
Field DevicesField Devices Field Devices Field Devices
Retrofit Interior (RI) Retrofit Kit (RK)
IP
BACnet MS/TP
LVS (Low Vo ltage Switch) / OCC (Occupancy Sensor) / LS5 (Light Sensor)
LVS OCC
LS5
Field Devices
Zone Control (ZC) Relay Panel (RP)
Power LED
Run LED
Controller Board Te rminations
UI (Universal Input) / GND (Ground)
SW3
COMM
J2
J1
1’s10’s
TEST
RELAY 33-64
LEXP
Bluetooth
CAN/DDN
Term
OUTIN
RELAY 1-32
1
ON
2345678
Bluetooth Plug
(for configuration changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit)
Input Terminals
24VDC
UI 21
UI 22
24VDC
UI 23
UI 24
24VDC
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
5VDC
GND
24VDC
UI 1 UI 2
24VDC
UI 3 UI 4
24VDC
UI 5 UI 6
24VDC
UI 7 UI 8
24VDC
UI 9
UI 10
24VDC
UI 11
UI 12
24VDC
UI 13 UI 14
24VDC
UI 15 UI 16
24VDC
UI 17 UI 18
24VDC
UI 19 UI 20
BT485 Terminator Plug
(if applicable)
BACnet(+) In/Out
BACnet(-) In/Out
Shield In
Programing / Protocol
Dip Switch Network Address Rotary Switch 10’s
Network Address
Rotary Switch 1’s
Test Button
24VAC(+) Power In 24VAC(-) Power In
24VAC(+) Auxiliary Out
24VAC(-) Auxiliary Out
Relays 1-32
Relays 33-64
PWR RUN
0 1
2
3
4 5 6
7
8
9
0 1
2
3
4 5 6
7
8
9
Micro-B USB Port
(for configuration changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit)
Transformer Terminations
120VAC Black
Neutral White
Earth Ground
277VAC Brown
LTR Te rminations
Line In
Relay Output
Wire Strip Length Indicator
Manual Override Lever
General Architecture
BAS Router
Internet
Field DevicesField Devices Field Devices Field Devices
Retrofit Interior (RI) Retrofit Kit (RK)
IP
BACnet MS/TP
LVS (Low Vo ltage Switch) / OCC (Occupancy Sensor) / LS5 (Light Sensor)
LVS OCC
LS5
Field Devices
Zone Control (ZC) Relay Panel (RP)
609LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

658. BLUERIDGE RELAY PANELS
RP BASIC SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Supply Voltage 120, 277, 347 VAC ±10%, 50-60 Hz
Auxiliary Out 24VAC, 800mA (devices with full wave
rectified power supply only)
Analog Switch Inputs 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, or 4-20 mA
Lighting Tough Relay (LTR)
Resistive Load 20A @ 347 VAC / 1.5 HP @ 120 VAC
Short Circuit
Current Rating 30,000A @ 277 VAC
Contactor Ballast 30A @ 347 VAC
Contactor Tungsten 20A @ 347 VAC
Relay Type SPST latching with manual override lever,
pulse driven
Relay Terminals Universal screw terminal, box type clamp,
accepts double 14-10 AWG or single
8AWG (solid or stranded copper wire)
Relay Life Cycles 300,000 on/off cycles @ full load
Relay Life 1 million
Connection Style Micro-B USB or Bluetooth wireless
Communication Protocol BACnet MS/TP
Communication Ports Network ready, RS-485, half duplex, daisy
chain wiring
Network Max length 4000 ft
Configuration Tech Kit 2.0
Override Manual
Operating Temperature 32° to 125°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 20-95% RH non-condensing
Mounting Surface Mounted
Enclosure Rating Type 1, (dry / indoor environment)
Enclosure 16ga steel with black powder coat finish
Dimensions

RPSB08-
13.00"W x 14.75"H x 5.75"D
( 33.0 x 37.5 x 14.6 cm)
RPSB16- 18.00"W x 16.20"H x 5.75"D
(45.7 x 41.1 x 14.6 cm)
RPSB32- 18.00"W x 25.00"H x 5.75"D
(63.5 x 45.7 x 14.6 mm)
RPSB48- 18.00"W x 33.80"H x 5.75"D
(45.7 x 85.9 x 14.6 cm)
RPSB64- 18.00"W x 42.60"H x 5.75"D
(45.7 x 10.82 x 14.6 cm)
Approvals UL 916, FCC Part 15, CEC Title 24,
Electronics meet or exceed IEC Level 3
Weight RPSB08-
20.5 lb (9.3 kg)
RPSB16- 32 lb (14.5 kg)
RPSB32- 47.5 lb (21.5 kg)
RPSB48- 63.5 lb (28.8 kg)
RPSB64- 82.5 lb (37.4 kg)
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL DESCRPITION
RPSB08 Relay Panel Switching Basic, 8 relays capacity, 24 Universal Inputs
RPSB16 Relay Panel Switching Basic, 16 relays capacity, 24 Universal Inputs
RPSB32 Relay Panel Switching Basic, 32 relays capacity, 24 Universal Inputs
RPSB48 Relay Panel Switching Basic, 48 relays capacity, 24 Universal Inputs
RPSB64 Relay Panel Switching Basic, 64 relays capacity, 24 Universal Inputs
NUMBER OF RELAYS INSTALLED
XX Replace “XX” with the number of relays installed
POWER OPTIONS
0 120/277V AC transformer
1 347V AC transformer
2 120/277V AC transformer plus 120/277V AC auxiliary transformer (for 16 relays capacity and above panels only)
3 347V AC transformer plus 347V AC auxiliary transformer (for 16 relays capacity and above panels only)
SPECIAL OPTIONS (for 16 relays capacity and above panels only)
00 None
X1 With UL924 Emergency Bypass (Relays 17-32 only)
Low Voltage Bay Options (Bottom of panel, for 16 re lays capacity and above panels only)
(BLANK) None
L1 9" bay
LA 9" bay plus one 2.5A 24V DC power supply
LB 9" bay plus two 2.5A 24V DC power supplies
LC 9" bay plus one BACnet IP router
LD 9" bay plus one BACnet IP router and one 2.5A 24V DC power supply
LE 9" bay plus one BACnet IP router and two 2.5A 24V DC power supply
LINE VOLTAGE BAY OPTIONS WITH DEAD FRONT COVER (Top of panel, for 16 relays capacity and above panels only)
(BLANK) None
H1 9" bay
HA 9" bay plus one 4 pole 30A electrically held lighting contactor, 120V coil
HB 9" bay plus two 4 pole 30A electrically held lighting contactor, 120V coil
HC 9" bay plus four 4 pole 30A electrically held lighting contactor, 120V coil
HD 9" bay plus one 4 pole 30A electrically held lighting contactor, 277V coil
HE 9" bay plus two 4 pole 30A electrically held lighting contactor, 277V coil
HF 9" bay plus four 4 pole 30A electrically held lighting contactor, 277V coil
RPSB16 Example: RPSB161X1 Relay Panel Switching Basic w/ UL924, 16 Relay Capacity, 16 Relays Installed,
24 Universal Inputs, 347V AC Control Power Transformer
16 1 X1
ACCESSORIES
LTR1 Relay, Lighting Tough Relay, Field Installation, 20A
RPRVD Relay Voltage Divider
RPSB-CTRL Relay Panel Switiching Basic, Replacement Controller, PCB ONLY
TK- 2.0 Technicians Kit, includes Micro-USB Cable, USB flash drive with Essentials software,
USB Bluetooth Dongle, Bluetooth module, and Screwdriver
LIGHTING CONTROLS
610
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

659. BLUERIDGE LIGHTING ZONE CONTROLLER
ZC BASIC SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Zone Control Basic (ZC Basic) is a UL Listed distributed
lighting controller in a compact junction box mounted package.
ZC Basic
may be scheduled from any BACnet BAS, and it is
compatible with all low voltage override switches, occupancy sensors, and light level sensors. ZC Basic is suited for new or
existing buildings, and may be scaled from basic to advanced occupancy and vacancy detection control sequences
.
FEATURES
• UL Listed and Plenum Rated (UL E133813)
• BACnet MS/TP communication to BAS network
• Line and low voltage compartment separation
• Micro-USB and Bluetooth (optional) ports for configuration
• Monitor and measure equipment performance
• Track lamp, ballast, and relay life
• Track schedule, occupancy sensor, and manual control savings
WIRING
R1
R2
L
N
G
S1
S2 Relay Output 1
Relay Output 2
Line In*
Neutral
Earth Ground
Switch Input 1*
Switch Input 2*
Controller Board
FI-1 Board Terminations FI-2 Board Terminations Controller Board Terminations
BN+
BN-
S
DN+
DN-
UI-1
UI-2
+24V
GND
UI-3
UI-4
+24V
GND
UI-5
UI-6
+24V
GND
J1
BN+
BN-
S
10’s 1’s
TEST
ON
OFF
+5V
GND
AO-1V
AO-1G
AO-2V
AO-2G
AO-3V
AO-3G
+24V
SN+
SN-
GND
J5
J2
J4J3
JP1
PWR RUN
SW5
J2
J3
BACnet (+) Ou t
BACnet (-) Ou t
FI-1
FI-2
Power Switch
Power LED / Run LED Micro-B USB Port
Bluetooth Plug*
(for configuration changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit)
Test Button
Programing/Protocol Dip Switch
Network Address Rotary Switch 10’s
Network Address Rotary Switch 1’s
5VDC
Ground
BACnet (+) In
BACnet (-) In
Shield
Universal Input 1
Universal Input 2
24VDC
Ground
Universal Input 3
Universal Input 4
24VD C
Ground
Universal Input 5
Universal Input 6
24VDC
Ground
BT485 Terminator Plug (if applicable)
*FI-1 terminations are compatible with 120, 230, or 277VAC
single phase circuits. Do not mix voltages or phase on the same
unit. Refer to install guide for wiring details. *Applicable on ZC with Bluetooth Wireless Option only.
0
1
2
3
4 5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4 5
6
7
8
9
1
ON
2345678
J1
J4
J6
J2
Controller Board
FI-2 Board
FI-1 Board
General Architecture
BAS Router
Relay Panel (RP)
Internet
Field DevicesField Devices Field Devices Field Devices
Retrofit Interior (RI) Retrofit Kit (RK)
IP
BACnet MS/TP
LVS (Low Vo ltage Switch) / OCC (Occupancy Sensor) / LS5 (Light Sensor)
LVS OCC
LS5
Field Devices
Zone Control (ZC)
ZCSB-00-00
611LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

660. ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ZCSB-00-00 Zone Controller, Switching Basic, 120/277, Max of 2-CH
ZCSB-00-BT Zone Controller, Switching Basic w/ BlueTooth, 120/277, Max of 2-CH
Supply Voltage 120, 230 or 277 VAC ± 10%,
50/60 Hz
Resistive Load 20A @ 277VAC / 1.5HP @ 120VAC
Relay Type Mechanicall latching relays with
manual override lever
Relays 2
Connection Style Micro-B USB or Bluetooth Wireless
Communication
Protocol BACnet MS/TP to BAS network
Network Max Length 4000 ft
Configuration Tech Kit 2.0
Override Manual
Operating Temperature 0 to 140°F (-18 to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 10-90% RH non-condensing
Mounting 4" or 4 11/16" juntion box
Enclosure 20ga steel white powder coat finish
Enclosure Rating Plenum Rated, Type 1,
(dry / indoor envirnment)
Dimensions 10.0"W x 5.06"H x 2.50"D
(25.4 x 12.9 x 6.4 cm)
Weight 3 lb (1.36 kg)
Approval UL listed, UL916, FCC Part 15,
CEC Title 24
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
BLUERIDGE LIGHTING ZONE CONTROLLER
ZC BASIC SERIES
Zone Controller-ZCSB-00-00
R1
+5V
GND
R2
L
N G S1 S2
BN- S

AO-1V
AO-1G
AO-2V
AO-2G
AO-3V
AO-3G
+24V
CN+
CN- GND

BN-
S
DN+
DN-
UI-1
UI-2
+24V
GND
UI-3
UI-4
+24V
GND
UI-5
UI-6
+24V
GND
FI-1 BOARD
FI-2 BOARD
BN+ BN+
GRN
CIRCUIT BREAKER
20A MAX
NEUTRAL
LINE (120V-277V)
GROUND
OI
OI
CL3P 22/2 SHEILDED LOW CAP MAX 4, 000' MSTP NETWORK CL3P 22/2 SHEILDED LOW CAP MAX 4, 000' MSTP NETWORK
SHIELD
BLK
INCOMING SHIELD
IS NOT CONNECTED
RED BLK
SHIELD
WHT
BLK
RED
BLK
BLK
RED
GRN
WHT
TERMINALS
10-14 AWG
BLK
RED-24VDC
BLK-GND
WHT-OCC
BRN-COM
GRY-N.O.
VIO-N.C.
OCCUPANCY
SENSOR RED
WHT
WHT RED BLK
CL3P 18/ 3 MAX 500'
CM-9-R
(SET TIMER TO MINIMUM)
BLK
RED
BALLAST-2
LIGHT FIXTURE
WHTWHT
BALLAST-1
BLK
RED
BLK
SWITCH B
OUTBOARD
BLK
WHT
REDBLK
WHT
NEXT FIXTURENEXT FIXTURE
RED
BLK
SWITCH A
OUTBOARD
BLK
BLK
ZC 2-Channel Line Voltage 2-Way Switch Application Example
ACCESSORIES
TK- 2.0 Technicians Kit, includes Micro-USB Cable, USB flash drive with Essentials software,
USB Bluetooth Dongle, Bluetooth module, and Screwdriver
APPLICATIONfi
LIGHTING CONTROLS
612fi
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

661. MODEL WIDTH HEIGHT ENCLOSURE WIDTH HEIGHT DEPTH
8-relay Interior 13" (33 cm) 10.5" (26.7 cm) LENC8S 15.8" (40.1 cm) 16.6" (42.2 cm) 4.6" (11.7 cm)
LENC8F 17.1" (43.4 cm) 18.5" (47 cm) 4.6" (11.7 cm)
24-relay Interior 14" (35.6 cm) 23.4" (59.4 cm) LENC24S 24" (61 cm) 32" (81.3 cm) 4.6" (11.7 cm)
LENC24F 25.9" (65.8 cm) 33.4" (84.8 cm) 4.6" (11.7 cm)
48-relay Interior 14" (35.6 cm) 35.8" (90.8 cm) LENC48S 24" (61 cm) 44.5" (113 cm) 4.6" (11.7 cm)
LENC48F 25.9" (65.8 cm) 45.9" (116.6 cm) 4.6" (11.7 cm)
WATTSTOPPER LIGHTING INTEGRATOR PANELS WITH DIGITAL LIGHTING
MANAGEMENT DLM SUPPORT
LMCP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The LMCP Series panel provides simple network-capable lighting
control enabling the automation of lighting functions throughout
an entire facility
. The HDR relays in the panel can respond directly
to inputs from Digital Lighting Management (DLM) switches, occupancy sensors, daylight sensors, and input modules
.
FEATURES
• Standar
both lighting and plug loads
• Availabe in interiors sized for 8,24, or 48 relays maximum
• LMCT -100 handheld Configuration tool recommended for setup
• Runs event-based schedule routines independently (does not
require BAS or Segment Manager)
• Supports astronomical, time- based, and photocell-based event
types
• Two free topology DLM Category 5e local networks for DLM
sensors, switches, and LMIO series input modules
• Additional power available for low voltage switiches or
accessories
• Qualifies for use in ARRA-funded projects
DIMENSIONS
Input voltage 120/277 VAC 60 Hz, 120/347 VAC 60 Hz,
240 VAC 50 Hz
Secondary Class 2 Power Supply
24 VDC output, up to 250 mA across 2
RJ45 ports per local network
Local Network Segments Free-topology DLM local network
segments may include digital switches and sensors
Category 5e cable, 150 ft. per DLM
de
vice, up to 1,000 ft
. total per local
netw
ork
Segment Network Parameters WattStopper LM-MSTP wire
Linear topology; 4000 ft. maximum per
segment
Network Connections Terminals for connection to DLM segment
network (BACnet MS/TP)
Communication Protocol BACnet MS/TP
Accessory Power Available
LMCP8 800 mA @ 24 VDC
LMCP24 1000 mA @ 24 VDC
LMCP48 1000 mA @ 24 VDC
HDR Relays Coil voltage, 24 VDC,
pulse ON and pulse OFF
Individually replaceable
Mechanically latched contacts
Relay Contact Ratings 30 Amps ballast @ 277V
20 Amps ballast @ 347V
20 Amps tungsten @ 120V
30 Amps resistive @ 347V
1.5 HP @ 120V
SCCR (short circuit current rating)
14,000 Amps with HDR Heavy Duty Relay
Operating Temperature 32 to 131°F (0 to 55°C)
Operating Humidity 5-95% RH noncondensing
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1
Enclosure Options Surface (LENCxxS) or Flush (LENCxxF)
Dimensions
LMCP8 13"W x 10.5"H x 4.25"D
(33.02 x 26.67 x 10.79 cm)
LMCP24 14"W x 23.37"H x 4.25"D
(35.56 x 59.36 x 10.79 cm)
LMCP48 14"W x 35.75"H x 4.25"D
(35.56 x 90.81 x 10.79 cm)
Approvals UL and cUL Listed (E207852)
Weight
LMCP8 16 lb (7.3 kg)
LMCP24 30 lb (13.6 kg)
LMCP48 46 lb (20.9 kg)
8 Relay Enclosure 20 lb (9.1 kg)
24 Relay Enclosure 50 lb (22.7 kg)
48 Relay Enclosure 66 lb (29.9 kg)
Warranty 5 years
SPECIFICATIONS
LMCP LENC-08-Sfi
613LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

662. Typical of up to
48 loads
Segment Network
To
Segment
Manager
or BAS
(optional)
Switch Occupancy
Sensor
LM-MSTP Wire
(linear topology twisted pair dataline)
Switch
LMRJ Cables
Local Network A
To additional
LMCP Panels or
DLM Local
Networks (optional)
Line Voltage
LMCP Panel Local Network B
DLM Panel Connection Diagram Emergency Relay Wiring
(Fail-safe, bypassed operation)
Class 2 wiring
#20 AWG up to 250'
#18 AWG up to 1000'
LMPO-200
Sensor
Watertight J Bo x
Sensor Hood
LMIO-301
Occupancy
Sensor
Switch
LMRJ Cables
To LMCP
Local Network A or B
LM10-301 Connection and Wiring Diagram
277
115
NEU
GND
277
115
NEU
GND
P115/277 wiring
115V AC Supply 277V AC Supply
(see installation instructions for additional vo ltages)
Line
Load
H
N
HDR
Relay
N.C.
Contactor
C
Emergency
Lighting
Circuit
Normal
Power
Sense
WIRING
WATTSTOPPER LIGHTING INTEGRATOR PANELS WITH DIGITAL LIGHTING
MANAGEMENT SUPPORT
LMCP SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
LENC
F
S
Flush mounted style
Surface mounted style
ENCLOSURE TYPE / SIZE
LENC 24 S Example: LENC24S 24 relay surface mounted enclosure.
Lighting panel enclosure
ENCLOSURES
8 relay capacity 24 relay capacity 48 relay capacity
08 24 48
PANEL TYPE
Enclosure sold separately.
MODEL
LMCP8
LMCP24
LMCP48
XXHD
Replace “XX” with number of HDR relays installed
(max. of interior relay capacity)
XXEM
Replace “XX” with number of UL924 fail-safe emergency relays installed
(max. of 24 relays, not av ailable for 8 relay capacity panels)
VOLTAGE OPTIONS
LMCP48115/27748HD24EM 277Example: LMCP48-115/277-48HD-24EM277
48 Relay capacity panel with 115/277 VAC, 48 HDR relays,
24 Emergency relays, 277VAC coil voltage
*Order enclosure separately.
Network-capable lighting control panel with maximum of 8 relay capacity*
Network-capable lighting control panel with maximum of 24 relay capacity*
Network-capable lighting control panel with maximum of 48 relay capacity*
PANEL INTERIOR
With 115/277 VAC supply
With 115/347 VAC supply
With 240 VAC supply
115/277
115/347
240
115
240
277
347
115 VAC coil voltage
240 VAC coil voltage
277 VAC coil voltage
347 VAC coil voltage
NUMBER OF HDR RELAYS INS
TALLED
NUMBER OF EMERGENCY RELAYS INSTA LLED
EMERGENCY RELAY COIL VOLTAGE
Sensor Configuration
Load Config (PnL)
Daylighting Config
Button Configuration
Dimming Configuration
Adjust Light Level
Home/
Main Menu
Up
Select
Down
Right/NextLeft
Back
Power
On/Of f
IR Window
BA T=
IR Window
Panel Interior
LMCT-100
ACCESSORIES PAGE
HDR Mechanically latching relay with
5-pin plug-in connector, pilot contacts,
override switch 660
LMCT - 100 Digital Wireless Configuration tool
INSTALLATION
LIGHTING CONTROLS
614
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

663. Supply Voltage 24 VDC from DLM local network,
Segment Manager 15 VDC from 120
VAC plug-in power supply (included)
Connection Type Removable terminal block for
twisted pair DLM segment network connection
Cable Length
Local DLM network up to 1,000 feet
of cable, max of 300 feet between communicating devices
Wire Type
Local Network LMRJ-XX cables with RJ45
connectors
Segment Network Equivalent rated for BACnet MS/TP
(RS485)
Room Controllers
LMRC-100, LMPL-101 150 mA per controller (maximum 4)
Up to 24 communicating devices
Up to 8 loads (20 A)
LMRC-2XX, LMPL-201 Up to 250 mA per room controller
(output is limited if network is fully
powered)
Up to 48 communicating devices
Up to 64 loads (20 A)
Up to 4 LMRC-100 or LMPL-101 controllers
Communication Interface

Up to 127 DLM local networks,
connected via LMBC-300 Network Bridge or LMRC-xxx Series Room Controller
Communication Protocol

RS485 network, BACnet MS/TP
twisted pair, baud rate 9600, 19200, 38400 or 76800 selectable
Connection Style
Free topology permits both star and
daisy chain connection patterns Linear topology for MS/TP network daisy chain connection; 4000 feet maximum per segment
LED Indication
Normal operation
Operating Temperature 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 5-90% RH, non-condensing
Approvals BTL, FCC Part 15, ASHRAE 90.1,
IECC, EPAct, California Title 24,
Warranty 1 year
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS
T
DESCRIPTION
Digital Lighting Management, DLM Series is an intelligent, distributed control system that automatically maximizes lighting energy efficiency
. DLM is designed to scale from
stand-alone control of individual rooms to centralized control of a floor, a building, or an entire campus
. With DLM,
you layer your choice of control strategies to meet project goals, from energy code compliance to building aesthetics, simplified maintenance and enhanced energy performance
.
Control options include room controllers f
or switched or
dimmed lighting loads, or for plug loads; digital occupancy sensors; sleek switches and handheld remotes; versatile daylighting sensors; lighting control panels; tools for remote configuration, scheduling and system management; and interfaces providing connectivity to third party devices
.
For building-wide monitoring and management, multiple DLM
local networks may be connected to an industry standard open protocol network for control by a segment manager or building automation system (BAS)
.
FEATURES
• On/off and dimming control options
• Plugged components on a free-topology Category 5e
DLM local network
• Capable of bi-level control, daylight harvesting, plug load control, and dimming
SPECIFICATIONS
DLM Seriesfi
615LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

664. DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS
DLM SERIES DIGITAL LIGHTING MANAGEMENT
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
51
Line Voltage
Line Voltage
J-Box
Dimming Switch
Occupancy
Sensor
LMRC-312
On/Off/
Dimming
Room
Controller
with
Network
Bridge
Scene Switch

Dimming Switch
Class 2 0-10 Volt Control Wiring
0-10 Vo lt
Ballast
0-10 Vo lt
Ballast
LMRJ Cables
LM-MSTP WireSegment Network
To
Segment Manager
or BAS
To
additional DLM
Local Networks
(linear topology twisted pair dataline)
Room Controller
J-Box
Daylight
Sensor
Switch
Corner Mount
Occupancy Sensor
(optional)
Ceiling Mount
Occupancy Sensor
Loads
2
1
LMPL-201
Plug Load
Room
Controller
Network Bridge
DLM Local Network for Room 2
DLM Local Network for Room 1
Line Voltage
LMRJ Cables
Digital Lighting Management
local network components plug
together in any configuration
(free topology)
Each segment network can connect up to 127 local networks for centralized monitoring and control
Two DLM local networks connected to optional DLM segment network
Dual Relay
LMRC-102
APPLICATION
Digital Lighting Management (DLM) components operate on a free-topology DLM local network. Each DLM local network is
managed by one or more room controllers that, upon startup, automatically configure system components for the most energy-
efficient sequence of operation using Plug n’ Go technology. Plug n’ Go establishes default functionality based on the installed
components. The DLM architecture is designed from the bottom up, the segment network operation is simple, and builds on the
Plug n’ Go and Push n’ Learn functionality of each local network. New or existing DLM systems can easily be incorporated into
BACnet MS/TP networks. DLM Network Bridge devices are standard MS/TP master devices, and the MS/TP MAC address and
communication baud rate are automatically configured through arbitration with other devies on the network. Building operators
create normal and after hours lighting control schedules and monitor operation for energy savings and real-time consumption.
[F
or more product information and data sheets go to WWW
.KELE.COM]
APPLICATIONNEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
616NEW!
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!NEW!

665. DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS
DLM SERIES DIGITAL LIGHTING MANAGEMENT
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LMBC-300 BACnet network bridge
LMCI-100 Computer Interface Tools and Software
LMCT-100 Digital Wireless Configuration Tool
LMDC-100 Digital Dual Technology Ceiling Mount Occupancy Sensor
LMDM-101-I-P Digital 1-Button Dimming Wall Switch with Ivory plate
LMDX-100 Digital Dual Technology Corner Mount Occupancy Sensor
LMIO-101 Digital Input/Output Interface
LMIR-100 Digital IR Ceiling Mount Receiver
LMLS-105 On/Off Photosensor
LMLS-305 0-10 Volt Dimming Photosensor
LMLS-400 Digital on/off dimming Closed Loop Photo sensor
LMLS-500 Open Loop Multi-zone DLM Photo sensor with extened tube
LMLS-MB1 Photo sensor mounting bracket J box
LMLS-MB2 Photo sensor mounting bracket wall mount
LMPC-100 Digital PIR Ceiling Mount Occupancy Sensor
LMPL-101 Digital Plug Load Room Controller
LMPL-201 Digital Plug Load Room Controller
LMPX-100 Digital PIR Corner Mount Occupancy Sensor
LMRC-101 Digital On/ Off room controller with one relay
LMRC-102 Digital On/Off Room Controller with 2 relays
LMRC-211 Digital On/Off/0-10 Volt Dimming Room Controller with 1 relay and 1 0-10 volt dimming output
LMRC-212 Digital On/Off/0-10 Volt Dimming Room Controller with 2 relays and 2 0-10 volt dimming outputs
LMRC-213 Digital On/Off/0-10 Volt Dimming Room Controller with 3 relays and 3 0-10 volt dimming outputs
LMRC-CA Conduit adapter LV connection
LMRH-101 Digital Dimming IR Remote Control
LMRH-102 Digital 2-Button IR Remote Control
LMRH-105 Digital Scene IR Remote Control
LMRJ-25 RJ45 cables 25 feet nonplenum rated
LMRL-100 Isolated Relay Interface
LMSM-ENC1 Enclosure for Segment Manager, 14"L x 8.5"W x 5"D, include 120VAC duplex outlet
LMSM-201 Segment Manager, one BACnet MS/TP segment network
LMSM-603 Segment Manager, three BACnet MS/TP segment network
LMSW-101-I-P Digital 1-Button Wall Switch with Ivory plate
LMSW-102-I-P Digital 2-Button Wall Switch with Ivory plate
LMSW-103-I-P Digital 3-Button Wall Switch with Ivory plate
LMSW-104-I-P Digital 4-Button Wall Switch with Ivory plate
LMSW-105-I-P Digital 5-Button Scene Switch with Ivory plate
LMSW-108-I-P Digital 8-Button Wall Switch with Ivory plate
LMUC-100 Digital Ultrasonic Ceiling Mount Occupany SensorNEW!
617LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!NEW!

666. Supply Voltage 120/277 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Contactor Ballast 20A @ 120 or 277VAC, 20A @ 208,
240 or 480 VAC
Contactor Motor 0.5 HP @ 120VAC, 1 HP @ 208,
240 or 480VAC
Short Circuit Current
Rating 14,000 Amps
Relays Modular; dual 1-pole or single 2-pole
Relay Type Electically held
Relay Terminals Screw compression
User Interface Touchscreen interface to configure
relays and input switches
Operating Temperature 32° to 139°F (0° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5-95% RH noncondensing
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1
Enclosure Options Surface
Relay Mounting DIN rail
Dimensions 12"W x 14"H x 3"D
(30.48 x 35.56 x 7.62 cm)
Approvals UL, cUL E131150
Weight
LC8-120/277 8.1 lb (3.67 kg)
LCSP-1 0.37 lb (0.17 kg)
LCSP-2 0.49 lb (0.22 kg)
Warranty 1 year
WATTSTOPPER MODULAR CONTRACTOR PANEL
LC8 SERIES

12.0"
(304.8mm)
14.0"
(355.6mm)
3.0"
(76.2mm)
in
(mm)
Modules clip onto DIN rail, and plug to panel power supply and each other via integral connectors.
DESCRIPTION
The LC8 Series panel provides zone-based control of up to eight channels, or zones, of interior and exterior lighting
.
Zones respond to control signals from the system cloc
k, or an
accessory photocell, to automatically turn lighting on and off
.
The LC8 panel uses interchangeab
le relay modules, available
separately, that can be selected to suit project needs
. Relay
options include the LCSP-2 dual single-pole module and LCDP-1 double-pole module
.
FEATURES
• Non
during power outages
• Interchangeable single-pole and double-pole relay
modules
• Manual override of relays and channels via
touchscreen interface
• Eight universal switch inputs for low voltage switches,
occupancy sensors or other devices to directly control each relay
•
Pilot light output for each switch input
• Accepts most types of switch inputs
• Compatible with LVSW-100 Series Low Voltage
Switches and AS-100 Automatic Wall Switch
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
LC8 Seriesfi
LIGHTING CONTROLS
618fi
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

667. Standard 3-Wire
Momentary
WHITE
BLACK
RED
Y - Pilot
R - On
B - Off
+24 - +24
W - Gnd
Y - Pilot
R - On
B - Off
+24 - +24
W - Gnd
2-Wire Momentary
Push Button
RED
WHITE
Jumper between B and +24
Y - Pilot
R - On
B - Off
+24 - +24
W - Gnd
B -to- W Jumper
2-Wire Maintained
Contact
RED
WHITE
Low Voltage Switches
Y - Pilot
R - On
B - Off
+24 - +24
W - Gnd
Occupancy Sensor or Indoor Photocell
BLACK
BLUE
RED
Blue
Black
Red
COMMON
CONTROL
24VDC
Connecting Occupancy Sensors
Connecting an EM-24D2 Exterior Photocell
BLACK
White
RED
RED
GND
+24
GND
PCELL
J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 J10J 11
24V GND PCELL GND
Dual Single Pole
Relay Module
LED lit when
relay is on.
Line
Pat. Pend.800.879.8585
www.wattstopper.com14001r1
Line
Load
Load
LED lit when
relay is on.
A B
LCSP 2
APPLIANCE
CONTROL
88T9
Dual Single Pole
Relay Module
LED lit when
relay is on.
Line
Pat. Pend.800.879.8585
www.wattstopper.com14001r1
Line
Load
Load
LED lit when
relay is on.
AB
LCSP 2
APPLIANCE
CONTROL
88T9
Pat. Pend.
Double Po le
Relay Module
APPLIANCE
CONTROL
88T9
LED lit when
relay is on.
Line
Load
Line
Load
14000r1
800.879.8585
www.wattstopper.com
LCDP 1
Pat. Pend.
Double Po le
Relay Module
APPLIANCE
CONTROL
88T9
LED lit when
relay is on.
Line
Load
Line
Load
14000r1
800.879.8585
www.wattstopper.com
LCDP 1
Pat. Pend.
120/277V Power Supply
for use with
LC8 Lighting Control Panel
LED lit when
relay active.
13999r1
LCPS 120/277
800.879.8585
www.wattstopper.com
APPLIANCE
CONTROL
88T9
Double Pole
Relay Module LCDP 1
Dual Single Pole Relay Module LCSP 2
Power Supply
Module
EM-24D2
Photocell
Connection
24 Pin to Power Supply Module
GROUND
GROUND
120/277V
NEUTRAL
Conduit
YRB+24W
YRB+24W
YRB+24W
YRB+24W
YRB+24W
YRB+24W
YRB+24W
YRB+24W
LCD with
Touch Screen
Inputs
Reset Button
LV Switch
Relay modules can be mixed and matched to configure the LC 8 for a 
variety of single-pole and double-pole  lighting control applications.
Pat. Pend.
Double Pole
Relay Module
Energy Management Equipment
86WA
LED lit when
relay is on.
Line
Load
Line
Load
14000r1
800.879.8585
www.wattstopper.com
LCDP 1
LED
Input 1
Output 1
Input 2
Output 2
To Relay Module or

Power Supply Module
To Relay Module
Dual Single Pole
Relay Module
LED lit when
relay is on.
Line
Pat. Pend.800.879.8585
www.wattstopper.com14001r1
Line
Load
Load
LED lit when
relay is on.
AB
LCSP 2
Energy Management Equipment
86WA
LED
To Relay Module or

Power Supply Module
To Relay Module
Input 1
Output 1
Input 2
Output 2LED
WIRING
WATTSTOPPER MODULAR CONTRACTOR PANEL
LC8 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LC8-120/277 Relay panel with power supply, 4 modules capacity
LCSP-2 Dual SPST Relay Module, two 20A relays
LCDP-1 Single DPST Relay Module, one 20A relay
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
AS-100-W Automated sweep switch (A=Almond, I=Ivory, W=White)
CI-24 Ceiling-mount occupancy sensor with SPDT isolated contact 626
EM-24VD2 24 VDC Exterior photocell with relay contact 649
619LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

668. Supply Voltage 120/208/240/277 VAC
Digital Switch Inputs 6 standard, additional 1 input for
each installed relay
Program Port SD card
User Interface Door mounted LCD graphical
Time Range Real time clock and astronomical
clock
Time Schedules 64 schedules with date range,
32 groups
Timing Functions 99 Holiday dates, 4 holiday
schedules, recurring dates Open/
Close time, after hour sweeps
Operating Temperature 32°-112°F (0°-50°C)
Operating Humidity 10% - 90% Non-condensing
Lockout Hinged lockable door
Dimensions
CX04, 08 17"H x 14.5"W x 4"D
(43 x 37 x 10 cm)
CX16, 24 24"H x 20"W x 4"D
(61 x 51 x 10 cm)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1
Mounting Surface
Approvals ETL, UL File E174097
Weight
CX04 22 lb (10 kg)
CX08 28 lb (13 kg)
CX16 37 lb (17 kg)
CX24 40 lb (18 kg)
Warranty 2 years
PROGRAMMABLE LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
CX SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The CX Series Commercial Lighting Control Panels provide cost-effective lighting control for maximum energy savings
.
The LCD user interf
ace is located in the door and utilizes
simple and intuitive scrolling menus to program, check status or update the panel. The easy to use Pre-Programmed
Scenarios Menu makes project commissioning simple and fast
.
The CX panels can save up to 50% in labor and materials
when used in place of conventional time clock and contactor combinations
.
FEATURES
• Four relay panel sizes 4, 8, 16, and 24 relay spaces
• Five types of relays 20A/1P and 20A/2P, NO, NC
(14K SCCR) and 30A/P latching (18K SCCR)
• Door mounted LCD user interface with keypad
• 365 day programming with 64 schedules
• Astronomical and real time clock
• Selectable pre-programmed scenarios
• Programmable inputs accept low voltage switches,
photocells, or motion sensors
• Two low voltage dry contact output relays on 8 relay
panel
• Program uploads via removable SD memory card
SPECIFICATIONS
CX Series
Relay Type Poles
Supply
Voltage
Contactor
Tungsten
Contactor
Ballast
Contactor
Motor
Short Circuit
Current Rating
CXR2N Electrically Held, NO
1 120 15A 20A 1 Hp 14K
1 277 n/a 20A 3/4 Hp 14K
CXR2C Electrically Held, NC
1 120 15A 20A 1 Hp 14K
1 277 n/a 20A 3/4 Hp 14K
CXR3L Latching
1 120 20A 30A 1 Hp 18K
1 277 n/a 30A n/a 18K
1 347 n/a 20A n/a 18K
CXRTN Electrically Held, NO2 480 - 20A 2 Hp 14K
CXRTC Electrically Held, NC2 480 - 20A 2 Hp 14KNEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
620NEW!
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!NEW!

669. WIRING
PROGRAMMABLE LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
CX SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Power Wiring
BLACK
COMMON
WHITE
120 VAC
RED
208 VAC
ORANGE
240 VAC
BROWN
277 VAC
Internal
Transformer
Relay Wiring
20AMP 1 POLE RELAY24V CTRL COM LED LINE
LOAD
(120/277/347/480)
CXR-Relays
Relay Panels
4 4 30A/1P Latching
CX042S00SPN
CX082S08TNM
CX083S00SPM
CXR Relays
Model Relays Capacity Relays Installed Supply Voltage Relay Type
CX042S042NN 4 4 120/208/240/277 VAC 20A/1P NO
CX042S043LN 120/208/240/277 VAC
CX042S04TNN 4 4 120/208/240/277 VAC 20A/2P NO
4 0 120/208/240/277 VACCXR Field Installed relay
CX043S043LN 4 4 120/277/347 VAC 30A/1P Latching
CX043S00SPN 4 0 120/277/347 VAC CXR Field Installed relay
CX082S082NM 8 8 120/208/240/277 VAC 20A/1P NO
CX082S083LM 8 8 120/208/240/277 VAC 30A/1P Latching
8 8 120/208/240/277 VAC 20A/2P NO
CX082S00SPM 8 0 120/208/240/277 VACCXR Field Installed relay
CX083S083LM 8 8 120/277/347 VAC 30A/1P Latching
8 0 120/277/347 VAC CXR Field Installed relay
CX162S162NM 16 16 120/208/240/277 VAC 20A/1P NO
CX242S242NM 24 24 120/208/240/277 VAC 20A/1P NO
CXR2N - - 120/ 277 VAC 20A/1P NO Electrically Held
CXR2C - - 120/277 VAC 20A/1P NC Electrically Held
CXR3L - - 120/277/347 VAC 30A/1P Latching
CXRTN - - 480 VAC 20A/ 2P NO Electrically Held
CXRTC - - 480 VAC 20A/2P NC Electrically Held
Power Wiring Relay WiringNEW!
621LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!NEW!

670. Supply Voltage 120 or 277 ± 10% VAC
Supply Frequency 50 to 60 Hz
Relay Type 4, 8, or 16 SPST Zero Cross,
electrically held N.O. or N.C.
Relay Life 10,000,000 cycles
Contactor Ballast 20A at 120/277 VAC
Resistive Load 20A at 120/277 VAC
Switch Input 4 expandable
Relay Terminals #14–10AWG solid or stranded
copper wire
Communication Ports RJ-45
Communication
Protocol BACnet/ MSTP, BACnet/ IP,
LonWorks, N2,MODBUS, TCP/IP
Operating Temperature 32° to 112°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 10% to 90% non-condensing
Dimensions

APII 04
12.0" H x 14.0" W x 4.0"D
(30.5 x 35.6 x 10.2 cm)
APII 08 16.0" H x 14.0" W x 4.0"D
(40.6 x 35.6 x 10.2 cm)
APII 16 24.0" H x 14.0" W x 4.0"D
(61.0 x 35.6 x 10.2 cm)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1, surface mount
Additional Specifications
Soft configuration with greater than
50-year EEPROM memory retention in absence of power Minimum 30-day clock retention
Approvals
UL, cUL, File #E141518 FCC appro
val for commercial use
California Title 24
Warranty 1 year
PROGRAMMABLE LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
ILC APPRENTICE II
DESCRIPTION
The ILC Apprentice II (APII) is a programmable lighting control panel that can network up to 48 control points and up to 32 LightSync™ devices via RJ-45 ports
. The onboard
USB 2.0 port connected to a PC with the Apprentice II Pro
software allows control of the panel via a PC. Add-on cards
are easy to install and add capabilities such as Metasys N2, Modb
us, LonWorks, BACnet, and DTMF telephone switching
.
The lighting control panel incor
porates a user friendly
interface, solid reliability, and the flexibility to easily comply with energy codes.
FEATURES
• Stand alone lighting control
• Ships complete, easy to install
• Pre-drilled mounting holes
• Low cost
• 365-day programmable lighting control panel
• Removable hinged locking door standard
• ILC LightSync switch and accessory ready
• Network up to 48 control points
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
• P •
Available with 4 to 48 hardwired inputs
• 48 programmable relay groups, presets, and timers
• Uses ILCs new cost-effective Softcross (zero crossing)
relays
• All ON, All OFF push buttons for relay override
• Daylight Saving Time adjustment and astronomical clock
standard
• Optional add-on input and communication modules
1b 1a1
Typical momentary switch with LED (Up to 4 switches)
1 PILOT
1 ON
1 OFF
1 COM
1b 1a1
Typical momentary switch with LED (Up to 4 switches)
1 PILOT
1 ON
1 OFF
1 COM
Power transformer termination detail
Dedicated 120/277 VAC circuit
Cap unused lead
Secondary Primary
BROWN
WHITE
BLACK
RED 12VAC
YELLOW
(Center Tap)
RED 12VAC
USE FOR 277 VAC
USE FOR 120 VACfi
LIGHTING CONTROLS
622fi
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Low Voltage Power Wiring

671. INTELLIGENT LIGHTING CONTROLS, INC. MINNEAPOLIS , MN 800 922 8004
INTELLIGENT LIGHTING CONTROLS, INC. MINNEAPOLI S, MN 800 922 8004
INTELLIGENT LIGHTING CONTROLS, IN C. MINNEAPOLIS , MN 800 922 8004
Up to 48 control points
per network
to hard-wired switch inputs
Up to 32 LightSync
addressable network devices
Expansion panel
Master
CAT-5
APPLICATION ADD-ON INTERFACE MODULES (CARDS)
PROGRAMMABLE LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
ILC APPRENTICE II
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
APII
A
X
Stand alone master panel with display and keypad
Expansion panel (no display or keypad).
RELAY TYPE
SR1NO Normally open (04-4 relays, 08-8 relays, 16-16 relays)**
SR1NC Normally closed (04-4 relays, 08-8 relay s, 16-16 relays)**
ENCLOSURE TYPE / SIZE
APII
04ASRINO Example: APII-04A-SR1NO ILC Apprentice II standard
controller in a 04 enclosure type with4 N.O . relays.
ILC Apprentice II Lighting Control Panel*
DESCRIPTION
Four relays
Eight relays (Accepts one additional IB-4 interface board)
Sixteen relays (Accepts three additional IB-4 interface boards)
04
08
16
PANEL TYPE
* All panels ship with one IB-4 input board installed. One additional IB-4 can be added to the
08 enclosure type for a total of 8 inputs, and three additional IB-4 can be added to the16
enclosure type for a total of 16 inputs.
**No mixing of NO vs NC
ADD-ON INTERFACE MODULES
MB: Modbus interface module – The Modbus interface
add on module can easily be added to any Apprentice II
lighting control panel to provide for integration to your Modbus
communication and control system
.
N2: N2 Metasys interface module – The Metasys N2
interface module can be integrated into a building automation system that includes the N2 communications protocol
. The
host system can then poll the status of the Apprentice II lighting control panel inputs and outputs and issue commands to the lighting control panels relay outputs
.
LON: LONWorks interface module – The LONWorks
interface add-on module can easily be added to any Apprentice II lighting control panel to provide integration with a
LONWorks control system
.
TL: DTMF telephone interface module – The DTMF
telephone add-on module provides voice prompted DTMF touch-tone telephone control and monitoring
. Through the use
of DTMF control signals the system user can command relays or groups of relays ON or OFF or activate preset scenes, from any touch-tone telephone, including cellular phones
.
BNMSTP/BNIP: BACnet interface module – The Apprentice
II BACnet interface add-on module can easily be added to any Apprentice II lighting control panel to provide integration with a BACnet control system
.
TCPIP:
TCP/IP Interface – The TCP/IP module gives the
controller the ability to have an IP address on a 10/100Base-T Ethernet network
. Connect to the panels, monitor, and
program using the Apprentice II Pro software or connect from anywhere on the local are network or from the wide area network
.
Network Note: Communication network is 3000 FT max. For networks greater than, 3000 FT add PSR.
DEVICE NETWORK
ACCESSORIES PAGE
93000378 Lightsync Addressable Photocell
APII-BNIP APII BACnet /IP interface card
APII-BNMSTP APII BACnet/MSTP interface card 622
APII-LON APII LONWorks interface card 622
APII-MB APII MODBUS interface card 622
APII-N2 APII Metasys N2 protocol interface card 622
APII-TL APII Telephone override touch and voice 622
APIITCP/IP APII TCPIP Interface card 622
IB-4 APII 4 Input expansion board
PSR Power Source Repeater for network's greater than 3000 ft
SR1-NC APII Lighting panel relay (NC)
SR1-NO APII Lighting panel relay (NO)
623LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

672. Supply Voltage 24 VDC, ±10%, 37mA
Contact Rating 1A @ 24 VDC, 24 VAC
Coverage Pattern 360 degrees up to 1200 ft2
(111.48m2)
Time Delay Adjust Digital (DIP switch setting) for 30
seconds, 10 minutes, 20 minutes,
or 30 minutes
Operating Temperature 32° to 98°F (0° to 36°C)
Mounting 2.75" to 3" hole in ceiling
Color White
Dimensions 3.3" dia x 2.2" deep (8.5 x 5.6 cm),
extends approx. 0.36" (0.91 cm)
from ceiling
Weight 1.0 lb (0.46 kg)
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The Model LX-24 is a ceiling-mount passive infrared (PIR) occupancy sensor specifically designed to interface with building automation systems through an internal isolated relay
. A user-adjustable time delay (30 seconds to 30
minutes) on deactivation may be programmed through DIP switches to prevent unnecessary cycling
. The Model LX-24
includes two levels of sensitivity selectable through DIP switches
.
FEATURES
• P •
Adjustable time delay
• Adjustable sensitivity
• Isolated relay for use with BAS and other control
systems
• 360-degree coverage up to 1200 ft2
• Red LED to indicate occupancy detection
• Five-year warranty
OPERATION
WIRING
KELE OCCUPANCY SENSOR
LX-24
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LX-24 24 VDC ceiling-mount occupancy
sensor with SPDT isolated contact
The Model LX-24 is powered by 24 VDC, and uses PIR technology to detect occupancy
. When the unit senses the
difference between infrared emissions from a human body and the background space, detection occurs
. The Model
LX-24 transfers an SPDT contact set, when occupancy is detected
. The contacts return to their normal state after a
user-selectable time delay once the space is unoccupied.
Isolated Relay
Contacts
1-(red)
2-(green)
3-(orange)
4-(yellow)
5-(black)
Cable
Wires
DIP Switch Control for Time
Delay, Sensitivity, and Override
LED
24 VDC Supply
Normally Closed Contact
Common
Normally Open Contact
24 VDC Return
1 2 3 4ON
DIP SWITCH # 1 2 3 4
TIME DELAYS
30 sec X X
10 min . X O
20 min . O X
30 min . O O
SENSITIVITY
Minimum O
Maximum X
OVERRIDE
Normal O
Override X
X=on O=off
= factory setting
LX-24fi
LIGHTING CONTROLS
624fi
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

673. NEW! 625LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
NEW!
Supply Voltage 24 VDC 20 mA
Contact Rating 1A @ 24 VDC, 1/2A @ 120 VAC,
SPDT
Ambient Light From 2.5 to 430 fc
Coverage Pattern See patterns
Time Delay Adjust Digital (DIP switch setting) from
30 seconds to 30 minutes
Operating Temperature 32° to 98°F (0° to 36°C)
Dimensions 3.38"L x 3.35"W x 2.05"D
(8.6 x 8.5 x 5.2 cm)
Weight 1.0 lb (0.46 kg)
Warranty 5 years
KELE OCCUPANCY SENSORS
LX-100
DESCRIPTION
The Model LX-100 Wall-/Corner-Mount passive infrared (PIR)
occupancy sensor controls lighting and HVAC equipment.
This de
vice can control equipment directly through a BAS
with the SPDT isolated relay built into the sensors
.
FEATURES
• P
• Advanced PIR technology
• Adjustable time delay
• Adjustable unit sensitivity
• Contains isolated relay for use with BAS and other
control systems
• LED indicator
4-(yellow)
5-(green)
6-(blue)
7-(violet)
8-(gray)
1-(brown)
2-(red)
3-(orange)
For Digital Input to BA S
+ -
Building
Automation
System
Not
Used
Shown with
DCP 1.5W
Power Supply
(Optional)
To Other Sensors
24 VAC IN
LX-100
N.C. Contact
N.O. Contact
Common
Common
Control Output 24 VDC
Control Return
+24 VDC
Light Level Output 24 VDC
Cable
Wires
WIRING
COVERAGE PATTERNS
SPECIFICATIONS
LX-100
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LX-100 Dense wide-angle sensor with mounting bracket
OPERATION
The LX-100 uses Passive infrared technology to detect oc-
cupancy. Detection occurs when the unit senses the differ-
ence between infrared emissions from a human body and the background space
. Operation occurs by sending a low-
voltage signal and energizing the SPDT relay when a person enters the controlled area
. LX-100 has an adjustable time
delay for turning the lights off when no occupancy is detect- ed, and adjustable sensitivity setting
. LX-100 contains an
adjustable light-level sensor for controlling lighting based on ambient light level
. It is wired differently than the occupancy-
only output, and does not work with the SPDT-isolated relay.
18
(5 .49)
ft
(m)
Dense Wide Angle (Standard)
10
(3 .05)
5
(1 .52)
14
(4 .27)
28
(8 .53)
48
(14 .63)
Coverages shown are maxium and represent coverage for
half-step walking motion. For building spaces with lower
levels of activity or with obstacles and barriers, coverage size
may vary.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

674. Supply Voltage 24 VAC/DC ±10% 37 mA
Contact Rating 1A @ 24 VAC/DC, 1/2A @ 120 VAC
Coverage Pattern 360 degrees up to 1200 ft
2

(111.48 m
2
)
Time Delay Adjust Digital (DIP switch setting) for 30
seconds, 10 minutes, 20 minutes,
or 30 minutes
Operating Temperature 32° to 98°F (0° to 36°C)
Mounting 2.75" to 3" hole in ceiling
Color White
Dimensions 3.3" dia x 2.2" deep (8.5 x 5.6 cm),
protrudes approximately 0.4 from
ceiling surface
Approvals cUL listed UL Listed file E101196
Weight 1.0 lb (0.46 kg)

DESCRIPTION
The CI-24 is a ceiling-mount passive infrared occupancy sensor specifically designed to interface with Building Automation Systems through an internal isolated relay
.
A user-adjustab
le time delay (30 seconds to 30 minutes) on
deactivation may be programmed through DIP switches to prevent unnecessary cycling. The CI-24 includes a built-in
override switch. Two levels of sensitivity are also selectable
through DIP switches. The four-level patented Fresnel lens
allows the CI-24 to cover up to 1200 ft2 (111.48 m2).
FEATURES
• Ad •
Adjustable time delay
• Adjustable sensitivity
• Contains isolated relay for use with BAS and other
control systems
• Patented Fresnel lens
• 360° coverage up to 1200 ft
2
(111.48m
2
)
• Red LED indicates occupancy detection
• Five-year warranty
• Manual override switch
Isolated Relay
Contacts
1-(red)
2-(green)
3-(orange)
4-(yellow)
5-(black)
Cable
Wires
DIP Switch Control for Time
Delay, Sensitivity, and Override
LED
24 VAC/VDC Supply
Normally Closed Contact
Common
Normally Open Contact
24 Return
WIRING
OPERATION
WATTSTOPPER OCCUPANCY SENSOR
CI-24
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CI-24 Ceiling-mount occupancy sensor
with SPDT isolated contact
Powered by 24 VAC/VDC, the Model CI-24 uses advanced
PIR technology to detect occupancy. Detection occurs when
the unit senses the diff
erence between infrared emissions
from a human body and the background space
. When
occupancy is detected, the Model CI-24 transfers an SPDT contact set
. The contacts return to their normal state after a
user-selectable time delay once the space is unoccupied.
Note: Exceeding voltage rating may damage sensor.
1 2 3 4ON
DIP SWITCH # 1 2 3 4
TIME DELAYS
30 sec X X
10 min . X O
20 min . O X
30 min . O O
SENSITIVITY
Minimum O
Maximum X
OVERRIDE
Normal O
Override X
X=on O=off
= factory setting
CI-24NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
626NEW!
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!

675. Models CX-100 and CI-200 use advanced PIR technology to detect occupancy. Detection occurs when the units sense the
diff
erence between infrared emissions from a human body and the background space
. They are powered by 24 VDC either
from a power pack or separate 24 VDC power supply. Both units operate by sending a low-voltage signal to the power pack and
energizing the SPDT relay when a person enters the controlled area. Both units have an adjustable time delay for turning the
lights off when no occupancy is detected, and both have an adjustable sensitivity setting.
Each unit contains an adjustable light-level sensor for controlling lighting based on ambient light level. This feature is wired
differently than the occupancy-only output, and does not work with the SPDT-isolated relay.
Supply Voltage
CI200 24 VDC, 26 mA
CX100 24 VDC, 20 mA
Contact Rating 1A @ 24 VDC, 1/2A @ 120 VAC,
SPDT
Ambient Light From 2.5 to 430 fc
Coverage Pattern See patterns
Time Delay Adjust Digital (DIP switch setting) from
30 sec to 30 min
Operating Temperature 32° to 98°F (0° to 36°C)
Dimensions
CX-100 3.38"L x 3.35"W x 2.05"D
(8.6 x 8.5 x 5.2 cm)
CI-200 3.30" Dia. x 2.2" D (8.5 x 5.6 cm),
extends approximately 0.36" from
ceiling
Approvals UL and cUL listed File E101196
Weight 1.0 lb (0.46 kg)
Warranty 5 years
WATTSTOPPER OCCUPANCY SENSOR
CI-200, CX-100
DESCRIPTION
The CX-100 wall-/corner-mount and CI-200 ceiling mount devices are full-featured passive infrared occupancy sensors that control lighting and HVAC equipment
. Both units can
control equipment directly through a po
wer pack or through a
BAS with the SPDT isolated relay built into the sensors
. Both
models ha
ve adjustable sensitivity and time delays
.
FEATURES
• Ad •
Adjustable time delay
• Adjustable unit sensitivity
• Contains isolated relay for use with BAS and other
control systems
• Fresnel lens with choice of 3 coverage patterns
(CX-100)
• 360° coverage (CI-200)
• LED indicator
• 5-year warranty
OPERATION
SPECIFICATIONS
CI-200
CX-100NEW!
627LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!

676. Note: See power pack in this section for switching lighting loads or other line voltage loads
For Digital Input to BA S
4-(yellow)
5-(green)
6-(blue)
7-(purple)
8-(gray)
1-(brown)
2-(red)
3-(orange)
24 VDC
Power Input
CX-100
or
CI-200
N.C. Contact
N.O. Contact
Common
Common
Control Output 24 VDC
Control Return
+24 VDC
Light Level Output 24 VDC
Cable
Wires
WIRING
COVERAGE PATTERNS
WATTSTOPPER OCCUPANCY SENSOR
CI-200, CX-100
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CI-200 Ceiling-mount sensor
CI-200-1 Long-range sensor with mounting bracket * Special order
CX-100 Dense wide-angle sensor with mounting bracket
CX-100-1 Long-range sensor with mounting bracket * Special order
CX-100-3 Aisle-way sensor with mounting bracket * Special order
0
(0 .31)
5
(1 .52)
30
(9 .14)
15
(4 .57)
Aisle Way
67
(20 .42)
67
(20 .42)
38
(11 .58)
38
(11 .58)
0
(0 .31)
21
(6 .40)
10
(3 .05)
10
(3 .05)
21
(6 .40)
33 .5
(10 .21)
33 .5
(10 .21)
Dense Wide Angle (Standard) Long Range
Extra Wide Angle (CI-100-2)
10 ft
6 15 25 ft 50 ft
18
(5 .49)
10
(3 .05)

Coverages shown are maximum and represent coverage for half-step walking motion . For building spaces with lower levels of activity or
with obstacles and barriers, coverage size may decrease .
16
(4 .88)
ft
(m)
5
(1 .52)
5
(1 .52)
14
(4 .27)
14
(4 .27)
28
(8 .53)
48
(14 .63)
16
(4 .88)
50
(15 .24)
80
(24 .38)
90
(27 .43)
CX-100
44
(13 .4)
8
(2 .44)
ft
(m)
22
(6 .71)
22
(6 .71)
13
(3 .96)
13
(3 .96)
7
(2 .13)
7
(2 .13)
3
(0 .91)
3
(0 .91)
0
(0 .31)CI-200
Coverages shown are maxium and represent coverage for half-step walking motion. For building spaces with lower levels of activity or with
obstacles and barriers, coverage size may vary.
Coverage shown is maxium and represents coverage for half-step walking motion. Under ideal conditions,
with no barriers or obstacles, coverage can reach up to 1200 ft2 for half-step walking motion and up to 500
ft2 for hand motion (typical desktop level of activity).
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
B347-P 347 VAC to 24 VDC power pack
BZ-50 120-277 VAC to 24 VDC power pack 641
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
LMLS-MB1 Photo sensor mounting bracket J box
S-120/277/347-E Slave pack 64NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
628NEW!
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!

677. Supply Voltage
DT300 24 VDC/VAC ±10% 43 mA
DT305 24 VDC/VAC ±10% 35 mA
Switch Input Low voltage, momentary for manual
ON or OFF operation
Relay Output
DT300 Isolated SPDT contacts rated for
1A @ 30 VAC/VDC
Ambient Light
DT300 10 to 300 footcandles
(108 to 3230 lux)
Coverage Pattern Up to 1000 ft
2
(92.9 m
2
)
Sensitivity Adjustment SmartSet™ (automatic) or reduced
sensitivity (for PIR sensitivity); ultrasonic sensitivity is variable with trimpot
Time Delay Adjust
SmartSet™ (automatic), fixed
(5, 10,15, 20, or 30 minutes), walkthrough, test-mode
Ultrasonic Frequency
40kHz
Mounting Ceiling tile 4" square junction box
with double gang mud ring
Dimensions 4.50"Ø x 1.02"D
(114.3mm x 25.9mm)
Approvals UL and CUL listed file E101196
Weight 1.0 lb (0.46 kg)
Warranty 5 years
WATTSTOPPER DUAL-TECHNOLOGY OCCUPANCY AND LIGHT SENSOR
DT-300 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The low-profile DT-300 dual-technology occupancy sensor with light level sensor combines the benefits of passive infrared (PIR) and ultrasonic technologies
. The sensor mounts
in the ceiling with a flat, unobtrusive appearance and provides 360 degrees of coverage
. Using SmartSet™ technology, the
DT-300 requires no adjustment at installation. SmartSet™
continuously monitors the controlled space to identify usage patterns
.
Using this inf
ormation, it automatically adjusts the time delay
and sensitivity settings for optimal performance and energy efficiency
. The sensor assigns short delays (as low as 5
minutes) for times when the space is usually vacant, and longer delays (up to 30 minutes) for busier times
. The DT-305
is a lower cost version of the DT-300 without isolated relay or light level sensor
.
FEATURES
• Smar •
Walk-through mode turns lights off
• Ultrasonic diffusion technology
• LED occupancy indication
• Pluggable terminal wiring
In normal operation, the DT-300 turns lighting on when both the PIR and ultrasonic technologies detect occupancy.
It can also work with a low voltage switch for manual-on operation. PIR technology senses the difference between
infrared energy from a human body in motion and the background space. Ultrasonic technology uses the Doppler
principle and high frequency (40 KHz) ultrasound to sense motion.
Once lighting is on, detection by either technology holds lighting on. When no occupancy is detected for the length of
the time delay, lighting turns off.
The DT-300 can also be configured so that one or both technologies are needed to turn lighting on or hold lighting
on.
OPERATION
SPECIFICATIONS
DT-300fi
629LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

678. Momentary switch
Lighting
load
(white) Neutral
(red) Load
(red) Line
(white)
(black)Hot
N
(red)
(black)
(blue)
Switch
Control (24VDC) out
Common
Manual switch
+24V (in)
Power pack
DT-305 Terminals
DT300
DT305
Occupancy and Light Level Controlled Lighting
Occupancy
Momentary Switch
(blue)
Light level (24VDC) out
Lighting
load
(white) Neutral
(red) Load
(red) Line
(white)
(black)Hot
N
Light
level
lighting
load
(red) load
Hot
OFF switch
(black)
(red)
(black)
(blue)
Switch
N
Auxiliary
relay
pack
Control (24VDC) out
Common
Manual switch
+24V (in)
Isolated relay outputs
Common
Normally open contact
Normally closed contact
Power Pack
N.C.
N.O.
Relay common
DT-300 Terminals
WIRING DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
WATTSTOPPER DUAL-TECHNOLOGY OCCUPANCY AND LIGHT SENSOR
DT-300 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DT-300 Dual technology occupancy sensor with isolated relay and light level actuation
DT-305 Dual technology occupancy sensor with 24 VDC control output only (no light level or relay)
Standard
Option 2
Option 3
Option 1
Trigger
Option 4
Option 5
Option 6
Option 7
Initial
Occupancy
Maintain
Occupancy
Re-trigger
(seconds
duration)
Occupancy Logic
Both
BothB oth
Both Both(30)
Both(5)
Either(5)
Either
EitherEither
Either
Either(5)
Either(5)
Either
PIR
PIR
PIR PIR(5)
Either(30)
Ultra(5)UltraUltra
Man.
Man.
8
Minimum
Maximum/SmartSet
PIR Sensitivity
LEDs
Disabled
Enabled
= walk-through mode
= ON
= Factory Setting
= OFF 123Logic
Switch#
Occupancy
7
5 sec/SmartSet
10 min
10 min
15 min
15 min
20 min
30 min
5 min
456
Time Delay
Standard
Option 2
Option 3
Option 1
Option 4
Option 5
Option 6
Option 7
COVERAGE MOUNTING
44'
(13.4m)
40' x 40'
(12m x 12m)
PIR
Coverage
Ultrasonic
Coverage
Rear
housing
Front
cover
Ceiling
Spring clips (2)
Depluggable terminal
Ceiling MountJ-Box Mount
Depluggable terminal
Rear
Housing
4" Octagonal J-Box
(at least 1.5" deep)
Front
Cover
Ceiling
Screws
Notes: Exceeding voltage rating may damage sensor.
Shown with BZ-50 power pack (optional).NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
630NEW!
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!

679. Supply Voltage 18-24 VDC, 35 mA 24 VAC ± 10%
35 mA 120 VAC ±10% 50/60 Hz
240/277± 10% VAC 50/60 Hz
Relay Type
24 volt models SPDT
120 volt models SPST
Contactor Ballast 800 watt @ 120 VAC, 1200 watt @
277 VAC (120 volt models only)
Relay Output 1A @ 30 VDC/VAC
(24 volt models only)
Coverage Pattern PIR major motion 35' x 30' PIR minor
motion 20' x 15' Ultr
asonic major
motion 20' x20' Ultrasonic minor motion 15' x15', PIR Major motion 35' x 30', minor motion 20' X 15', Ultrasonic Major motion 20' x 20' minor motion 15' x 15'
Sensitivity Adjustment
PIR (high/low), Ultrasonic (fully
variable), PIR (high/low), Ultrasonic (fully variable)
Time Delay Adjust
SmartSet™ (automatic), fixed (5,
15 or 30 minutes), walk-through, testmode
Dimensions
2.73"L x 1.76"W x 1.83"D
(6.9 x 4.5 x 4.7 cm)
Approvals UL Listed, File E101196
Weight 0.41 lb (0.19 kg)
Warranty 5 years
WATTSTOPPER WALL SWITCH SENSORS
DW, PW, AND UW
DESCRIPTION
PW SERIES Passive Infrared PIR technology senses occupancy by detecting the difference between heat emitted from the human body in motion and the background space
.
UW SERIES Passive Ultrasonic
Ultrasonic detection works by transmitting ultrasonic sound waves throughout an area and measuring the speed at which they return
. Occupant movement changes the frequency at
which these sound waves return, resulting in a Doppler shift and occupancy detection
.
DW SERIES Dual Technology (Infrared and Ultrasonic)
The Dual Technology combines the best of both PIR and ultrasonic technologies
. While PIR and ultrasonic
sensors provide optimal control for many spaces, some applications pose difficulty for single technology products
.
Dual
Technology sensors ensure maximum sensitivity and
coverage in tough applications for optimal reliability and energy savings.
FEATURES
• Detection Signature Processing eliminates false
triggers and provides immunity to RFI and EMI
• Zero-crossing technology relay
• Vandal resistant lens
• Choice of Auto-ON or Manual-ON operation
• SmartSet™ automatically adjusts time delay and
sensitivity setting from occupants patterns
• Selectable walk-through mode
• Selectable test mode
• Selectable audible and/or visual alerts
• LED occupancy indication
• Built-in light level sensing
• Override mode
SPECIFICATIONS
PW-100
PW-100-24
UW-100, UW-100-24
DW-100, DW-100-24
UW-200
DW-200
PW-200NEW!
631LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!

680. Common
white (Neutral)
red
(Load)
red (Line)
white
black
Hot
Neutral
Power
pack
blue
black
red
Lighting
load
Control outputs
+24 VDC
Isolated relay outputs
Normally closed contact
Common
Normally open contact
Not used
UW-100 and
DW-100 Wiring
PW-100-24, UW-100-24 and
DW-100-24 Wiring
24 VDC Wiring Only
Note: 24 volt units available with one relay only
PW-200 Wiring
(Two Circuit)
PW-100 Wiring
PW-200 Wiring
(Bi-Level)
UW-200, DW-200
Wiring
(Two Circuit)
UW-200, DW-200
Wiring (Bi-Level)
blue
Primary
load
Secondary
load
Neutral
red
brown
Line 2
Line 1 black
Neutral
Ground
Groundgreen/yellow
green
Neutral
blue
Line black
Secondary
load
brown
Primary
load
red
Ground
Ground green/yellow
green
blue
Ground
Primary
load
Secondary
load
Neutral white
red
brown
Line 2
Line 1 white
Neutral white
Neutral white
green
Neutral
Ground
blue
Line black
Secondary
load
brown
Primary
load
red
white
Neutral white
green
Load
redLine black
Neutral
Ground green
Neutral white
Load
redLine black
Neutral
Ground green
Ground green/yellow
24 VAC Wiring Only
Common
blue
black
red
Control outputs
+24 VAC
Isolated relay outputs
Normally closed contact
Common
Normally open contact
Not used
WIRING
COVERAGE
WATTSTOPPER WALL SWITCH SENSORS
DW, PW, AND UW
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: UW-200-LA-P = Passive ultrasonic, two relays, light almond
with wall plate
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PW Passive Infrared
UW Passive Ultrasonic
DW Dual Technology (Infrared and Ultrasonic)
POWER AND NUMBER OF RELAYS
100 One relay 120/230/277 VAC power
100-24 One relay 24 VAC/VDC power
200 Two relays 120/230/277 VAC power
COLOR
X-P W = white , LA = light almond, G = grey, B = black
200 LA-P
UW
Passive Infrared
PIR
Coverage
7.5'
(2.2m)
15'
(4.5m)
20'
(6.1m)
35'
(10.6m)
Major motion
Minor motion
4'
(1.2m)
20'
(6.1m)
35'
(10.6m)
0
* For best performance, Watt Stopper/Legrand recommends
using this sensor in space s no larger than 15' x 12'
Dual Technology (Infrared & Ultrasonic)
* For best performance, Watt Stopper/Legrand recommends
using this sensor in space s no larger than 18' x 15'
PIR
Coverage
7.5'
(2.2m)
15'
(4.5m)
20'
(6.1m)
35'
(10.6m)
Major motion
Minor motion
Ultrasonic
Coverage
10'
(3.0m)
7.5'
(2.2m)
20'
(6.1m)
15'
(4.5m)
Major motion
Minor motion
4'
(1.2m)
20'
(6.1m)
35'
(10.6m)
0
Passive Ultrasonic
10'
(3.0m)
7.5'
(2.2m)
20'
(6.1m)
15'
(4.5m)
Ultrasonic
Coverage
Major motion
Minor motion
* For best performance, Watt Stopper/Legrand recommends
using this sensor in space s no larger than 15' x 15'

ACCESSORIES
BZ-50 120-277 VAC TO 24 VDC POWER PACK
LIGHTING CONTROLS
632
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

681. SENSOR SWITCH PIR AND PDT CEILING MOUNT OCCUPANCY SENSORS
CM SERIES
Supply Voltage
CM 12-24 VAC/VDC
CMR 800/1200/
1500 W @ 120/277/347 VAC
Supply Current
CMx 4mA, 16mA w/R option
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Motor Load
CMRx 1/4 HP
Dimming Load Sinks <20mA
Coverage
CMx-9 500 sq. ft
CMx-PDT-9 1000 sq. ft
CMx-10 2000 sq. ft.
CMx-PDT-10 2500 sq. ft,
Coverage Pattern 360°
Sensor Type
CMx Passive Infrared (PIR)
CMx-PDT Dual Technology
(PIR and Microphonics)
Operating Temperature 14 to 160°F (-10 to 71°C)
Operating Humidity 20-90% non-condensing
Mounting Ceiling mount
Dimensions 4.55"Ø (11.56 cm),
1.55" (3.94 cm) deep
Approvals UL, cUL (E167435)
Weight 0.38 lb (0.17 kg)
Warranty 5 year limited
DESCRIPTION
The CM Series occupancy sensor offers amazing
peformance and sensitivity to small motions. There are
variety of model options to fit the applcation needs. The CM
9 models offers standard range PIR sensor for smaller rooms and the CM 10 models provide extended range for larger spaces
. The CM PDT models offers dual technolgoy PIR with
Microphonics for excellent detection. The CMR line voltage
models are economical solution for automatic lighting control with no power pack needed
. The CM series is light weight
and ceiling mounted with 360 degree coverage pattern.
FEATURES
• 100% digital PIR detection with excellent RF immunity
• Push-button programmable
• User adjustable time delays (30 sec to 20 min)
• No field calibration or sensitivity adjustments required
• Convenient test mode
• 100 hr lamp burn-in timer
• Green LED indicator
INSTALLATION
SPECIFICATIONS
CM9
PUSH BUTTON FOR TIMER PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 1
. Press button twice for function 2, occupancy time delay.
2. LED will flash back the selected function's current setting
(5 flashes for 10 minutes time delay).
3. Press button the number of times indicated in Occupancy
Time Delay table below to change.
4. To exit the current setting, wait for LED flsh dequence to
repeat 3 times then return to step 1.
633LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

682. Relay Option
Photocell / Dimming Options
POWER PACK
(PP20)
RED
WHT
BLK
VIO w/ WHT STRIPE (+)
( - )
RED

- Power Input (12-24 VAC/VDC)
BLACK - Common
WHITE - Occupancy State (high VDC for occupied)
- Direct output to power pack for providing photocell
control and/or secondary dim time out. Output is high VDC
with occupancy & low light. Output also held high during
secondary dim time out. For multi-level control, use two
power packs and connect White wire to primary load and
Blue to daylight load.
VIOLET w/ WHITE STRIPE - Connect to 0-10 VDC control
wire (typically Violet) from 0-10 VDC dimmable ballast
- Connect to sensor Black wire
STANDARD WIRING
PHOTOCELL/DIMMING OPTIONS
GRAY from BALLAST
BLUE
BLK
BLK
VIO (+)
WHT
GRY (-)
Dimming Options
H N
SWITCH
LOAD
N
N
LOAD
HOT
WHT WHT
BLKB LK
BLKB LK
SENSORS IN PARALLEL
Sensors may be wired in parallel; however, the
maximum load ratings stay the same. Do not wire
sensors with Photocell and dimming option in parallel.
CM MODEL
CMR MODEL
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CM-10 Extended Range 360 Degree Sensor-Ceiling Mount, Low Voltage, PIR
CM-9 Standard Range 360 Degree Sensor-Ceiling Mount, Low Voltage, PIR
CM-PDT-10 Extended Range 360 Degree Sensor-Ceiling Mount, Low Voltage, PDT
CM-PDT-9 Standard Range 360 Degree Sensor-Ceiling Mount, Low Voltage, PDT
CMR-10 Extended Range 360 Degree Sensor-Ceiling Mount, Line Voltage, PIR
CMR-9 Standard Range 360 Degree Sensor-Ceiling Mount, Line Voltage, PIR
CMR-PDT-10 Extended Range 360 Degree Sensor-Ceiling Mount, Line Voltage, PDT
CMR-PDT-9 Standard Range 360 Degree Sensor-Ceiling Mount, Line Voltage, PDT
Note: Call Kele for models with low voltage relay, photocell, dimming, and low temperature options availabilty.
SENSOR SWITCH PIR AND PDT CEILING MOUNT OCCUPANCY SENSORS
CM SERIES
RELATED PRODUCTS
PP20 Power Pack, 120/277 VAC
LIGHTING CONTROLS
634
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

683. Supply Voltage 800/1200/1500 W @
120/277/347 VAC
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Motor Load 1/4 HP,0-10VDC
Dimming load Sinks <20mA
Co
verage

CMRB-50 7854 sq. ft.
CMRB-6 1257 sq. ft
Co
verage Pattern
360°
Sensor Type PIR, line voltage
Operating Temperature 14 to 160°F (-10 to 71°C)
Operating Humidity 20-90% non-condensing
Mounting Fixture, 1/2" knockout
Dimensions 3.63"H x 3.63"W x 1.50"D
(9.22 x 9.22 x 3.81 cm)
Approvals UL, cUL (E167435)
W
eight
0.38 lb (0.17 kg)
Warranty 5 year limited
SENSOR SWITCH HIGH BAY LINE VOLTAGE OCCUPANCY SENSORS
CMRB SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The CMRB Series is fixture mounted, high bay, line voltage
occupancy sensor. The CMRB 6 provides Passive Infrared
(PIR) occupancy detection over a 15-30 ft (4.57-9.1m) radial
coverage pattern that overlaps the areas lit by a typical high bay fixture when mounted at 15 to 45 ft (4
.57 to 13.72m) heights.
The CMRB 50 Ser
ies High Bay Aisleway occupancy sensor
provides bi-directional detection extending 50 ft (15
.24m) in
either direction when mounted at height of 40 ft (12.19m).
FEATURES
• Self-contained relay, no power pack needed
• No minimum load requirements
• Compatible w/electronic & magnetic ballasts, CFLs,
LED, & incandescents
• Interchangeable hot & load wires, impossible to wire
backwards
• Push-button programmable
• Non-volatile settings memory
• Adjustable time delays
• No field calibration or sensitivity adjustments required
• Convenient test mode
• 100 hr lamp burn-in timer
• Green LED indicator
BLK
BLK
WHT
VIO (+)
GRY ( - )
[D] Dimming Option
Snap Plate
Main Bracket Housing
Blank Plate
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CMRB-50 High Bay Aisleway Sensor-Fixture Mount Line Voltage, PIR
CMRB-50-KIT High Bay Aisleway Sensor-Fixture Mount Line Voltage, BRACKET
CMRB-6 High Bay 360 Sensor-Fixture Mount, Line Voltage, PIR
CMRB-6-KIT High Bay 360 Sensor-Fixture Mount, Line Voltage, BRACKET
Note: Call Kele for models with low voltage relay, photocell, dimming, and low temperature options availability.
CMRB-50 CMRB-6
ACCESSORIES
FB3 Snap-in Fixture Mount Bracket
30 20 10 0 ft 10 20 30
9.1 6 3 0 m 3 6 9.1
0 ft
15
30
45
0 m
4.6
9.1
13.7
CMRB-6 Coverage Pattern
(High View)
CMRB-50 Coverage Pattern
(Side View)
0 ft
10
20
30
40
0 m
3
6
9.1
12.2
50 25 0 ft 25 50
15.2 7.6 0 m 7.6 15.2
FB3 Bracket
COVERAGE PATTERNS
SPECIFICATIONSfi
635LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

684. ORDERING INFORMATION
SENSOR SWITCH PIR WALL SWITCH SENSORS
SSD SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The SSD Series is a residential grade wall switch occupancy
sensor that utilizes Passive Infrared detection. Unlike other
wall switch sensors, it does not require a neutral connection, nor is there a minimum load requirement
.
FEATURES
• PIR occupancy detection
• No minimum load required
• Switches incandescent, CFL, LED, and electronic & magnetic
fluorescent lighting
• Interchangeable hot & load wires - impossible to wire backwards
• No neutral connection required
• Green LED indicator
Note: Connection to Ground
required for sensor to function
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SSD-120-IV Wall Switch Sensor-PIR, 120V, Ivory
SSD-120-WH Wall Switch Sensor-PIR, 120V, White
SSD-SA-120 IV Wall Switch Sensor-PIR, 1 Sw/Man On, 120V, Ivory
SSD-SA-120 WH Wall Switch Sensor-PIR, 1 Sw/Man On, 120V, White
SSD-VA-120 IV Wall Switch Sensor-PIR, 120V, Vacancy, Ivory
SSD-VA-120 WH Wall Switch Sensor-PIR, 120V, Vacancy, White
Wall Plate not included
SSD-VA-120
Supply Voltage 800 W @ 120 VAC
Frequency 60 Hz
Motor Load 1/4 HP
Coverage 7584 sq. ft.
Coverage Pattern 180°
Time Range 30 seconds to 20 minutes
Sensor Type PIR, line voltage
Time Delay Adjust 9 programmable settings
Operating Temperature 14 to 160°F (-10 to 71°C)
Operating Humidity 20-90% non-condsensing
Mounting Wall, Single Gang Switch Box,
30-48 in (76.2-121.9 cm) Height
Color Ivory, White
Dimensions 4.2"H x 1.8"W x 1.5"D
(10.67 x 4.57 x 3.81 cm)
Approvals UL,cUL(E253721)
Weight 0.32 lb (0.15 kg)
Warranty 5 year limited
SPECIFICATIONS
March 2014
PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR TIME DELAY 1
. Press and hold button until LED flashes rapidly
2. Enter the Time Delay function by pressing button twice
3. The number of LED flashes indicates current setting
(five flashes for 10 minutes) 4
. Press button the number of times according to the table
below to change 5
. Press and hold button until LED flashes rapidly then
release button 6
. Press button twice to confirm. LED will flash twice
indicating acceptance.
Time Delay Settings
Function
Number
Function
Name
Settings (*indicates default setting)
2 Time Delay2 - 2.5 min *
3 - 5 min
INSTALLATIONfi
LIGHTING CONTROLS
636fi
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

685. SENSOR SWITCH PIR AND PDT WALL SWITCH SENSORS
WSD SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The WSD Series is a stylish, easy to install, and simple
to use Wall Switch Decorator style Passive Infrared (PIR)
sensor
. It is ideal for private offices, copy rooms, closets, or
any small enclosed space without obstructions. For rooms
with obstructions, the Dual Technology WSD PDT Series sensor is recommended
.The WSD family sensors have a
patent-pending wiring method that enables them to function either with or without a neutral connection
.
FEATURES
• 100% digital PIR detection - excellent RF immunity
• Self-grounding mounting strap
• Green LED status indicator
• Device accommodates powering over ground or
neutral connection
• Line power and load wires are interchangeable -
impossible to wire backwards
• Compatible w/ LEDs, electronic & magnetic ballasts,
CFLs, & incandescents
• Integrated LampMaximizer minimum on time provides
increased fluorescent lamp life - disabled by default
• Includes matching wall plate
Supply Voltage 120/277/347 VAC @ 800/1200/1500 W
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Motor Load 1/4 HP
Coverage
WSD 7854 sq. ft.
WSD-PDT 9425 sq. ft.
Coverage Pattern 180°
Time Range 30 seconds to 30 minutes
Time Delay Adjust 10 programmable settings
Sensor Type
WSD Passive Infrared (PIR)
WSD-PDT Dual Technology (PIR and Microphonics)
Operating Temperature 14 to 122°F (-10 to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 20-75% non-condensing
Mounting Wall, Single Gang Switch Box,
30-48 in (76.2-121.9 cm) Height
Dimensions 1.68"W x 2.74"H x 1.63"D
(4.27 x 6.96 x 4.14 cm)
Approvals UL, cUL (E253721)
Weight 0.32 lb (0.15 kg)
Warranty 5 year limited
SPECIFICATIONS
WSD WSD-2P
WIRING
120/277 VAC WIRING
BLACK - Line 1 Input
BLACK- Load 1 Output
BLACK wires
can be reversed
}
}
BLUE - Line 2 Input
BLUE - Load 2 Output BLUE wires
can be reversed
WIRE COLOR KEY
347 VAC WIRING (-347 Option)
Red wires replace Black wires.
Notes:
- Unit will draw power from
either line connection.
- Both poles’ line connection
must be same phase.
GND
H N
LOAD 1
BLK
BLK
N
SINGLE RELAY
*
GND
H N
LOAD 1
BLK
BLK
NHN
LOAD 2
BLU
BLU
DUAL RELAY
*
*WIRING TO NEUTRAL
Remove jumper between Neutral and Ground
ORDERING INFORMATION
March 2014
Example: WSD-PDT-SA-GY
Wall Switch Sensor, PDT, Semi-Auto, Gray
MODEL DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MODES
(reprogrammable via push-button except for VA version models)
COLOR FINISH
(blank)
SA
VA
2SA
AL
BK
GY
IV
WH
WSD-PDT - SA - GY
WSD
WSD-2P
WSD-PDT
WSD-PDT-2P
Decorator Style wall switch with passive infrared (PIR) sensor
Decorator Style wall switch with passive infrared (PIR) sensor, dual relay
Decorator Style wall switch with dual technology sensors (PIR and Microphonics)
Decorator Style wall switch with dual technology sensors (PIR and Microphonics), dual relay
Auto On (default) or vacancy for WSD and WSD-PDT models;
Pole 1- Auto on, Pole 2- Vacancy (default) for WSD-2P and WSD-PDT-2P models
Vacancy (manual on, default) or Auto On for WSD and WSD-PDT models
Vacancy (manual on) only for WSD and WSD-PDT models
Both poles vacancy (default), for WSD-2P and WSD-PDT-2P models
Light Almond
Black
Gray
Ivory
White
637LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

686. SENSOR SWITCH PIR AND PDT WALL SWITCH SENSORS
WSX SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The WSX Series of wall switch occupancy sensors provides
simple and cost effective solutions for commercial and
residential lighting control applications
. All WSX Series sensors
have a stylish low profile appearance, soft-click buttons, and provide small motion detection up to 20 ft (6
.10 m), making
them perfect for private offices, private rest rooms, closets, copy rooms, or any other small enclosed space
. The WSX family
sensors have a patent-pending wiring method that enables them to function either with or without a neutral connection
.
FEATURES
• 100% digital PIR detection - excellent RF immunity
• Ruggedized assembly, vandal resistant lens standard
• Small motion detection to 20 ft
• Dual Technology (PDT) utilizes PIR / Microphonics
sound detection (patented)
• 100% passive detection, no potential for interference
with other building systems
• Self-grounding mounting strap
• Device accommodates powering over ground or
neutral connection (patent pending)
• White LED status indicator
• Matching wall plate included
120/277 VAC WIRING
BLACK - Line 1 Input
BLACK- Load 1 Output
BLACK wires
can be reversed
}
}
BLUE - Line 2 Input
BLUE - Load 2 Output BLUE wires
can be reversed
WIRE COLOR KEY
347 VAC WIRING (-347 Option)
Red wires replace Black wires.
Notes:
- Unit will draw power from
either line connection.
- Both poles’ line connection
must be same phase.
GND
H N
LOAD 1
BLK
BLK
N
SINGLE RELAY
*
GND
H N
LOAD 1
BLK
BLK
NHN
LOAD 2
BLU
BLU
DUAL RELAY
*
*WIRING TO NEUTRAL
Remove jumper between
Neutral and Ground
Supply Voltage 120/277/347 VAC @800/1200/1500 W
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Motor Load 1/4 HP
Coverage
WSX 7854 sq. ft.
WSX-PDT 9425 sq. ft.
WSX-PDT-NL 1508 sq. ft.
Coverage Pattern 180°
Sensor Type
WSX Passive Infrared (PIR)
WSX-PDT Dual Technology (PIR and Microphonics)
Time Range 30 seconds to 30 minutes
Time Delay Adjust 10 programmable settings
Operating Temperature 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 20-75% non-condensing
Mounting Wall, Single Gang Switch Box,
30-48in (76.2-121.9cm) Height
Dimensions 1.68"W x 2.74"H x 1.63"D
(4.27 x 6.96 x 4.14 cm)
Approvals UL, cUL E167435
Weight 0.32 lbs (0.15 kg)
Warranty 5 year limited
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
WSX WSX-NL WSX-2P
Example: WSX-PDT-NL-GY
Wall Switch Sensor Neural/Ground, PDT, Night light, Gray
MODEL DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MODES
(reprogrammable via push-button except for VA version models)
COLOR FINISH
(blank)
SA
VA
2SA
2VA
NL
AL
BK
GY
IV
RD
WH
WSX-PDT - NL - GY
WSX
WSX-2P
WSX-PDT
WSX-PDT-2P
Wall switch with passive infrared (PIR) sensor
Wall switch with passive infrared (PIR) sensor, dual relay
Wall switch with dual technology sensors (PIR and Microphonics)
Wall switch with dual technology sensors (PIR and Microphonics), dual relay
Auto On (default) or vacancy fo r WSX and WSX-PDT models;
Pole 1- Auto on, Pole 2- Vacancy (default) for WSX-2P and WSX-PDT-2P models
Vacancy (manual on, default) or Auto On for WSX and WSX-PDT models
Vacancy (manual on) only for WSX and WSX-PDT models
Both poles vacancy (default), for WSX-2P and WSX-PDT-2P models
Both poles vacancy only, for WSX-2P and WSX-PDT-2P models
Night light, Manual On/Auto Off operation of lights (default)
Light Almond
Black
Gray
Ivory
Red
White
WIRING
LIGHTING CONTROLS
638
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

687. ORDERING INFORMATION
SENSOR SWITCH PIR AND PDT WIDE VIEW OCCUPANCY SENSORS
WV SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The WV Series Wide View occupancy sensor is designed to
mount in a corner and detect small motions up to 40 ft
(12
.19 m) away, and larger motions up to 70 ft (21.34 m)
away. This makes it ideal for 30 ft x 30 ft (9.14 m x 9.14 m)
classrooms or corridors up to 70 ft (21.34 m) long. For rooms
with obstructions, use the WV PDT 16 Series sensor which adds Microphonics™ detection
.
FEATURES
• 100% digital PIR detection, excellent RF immunity
• 120º by 40 ft (12.19 m) coverage for small motion
• Push-button programmable
• Adjustable time delays
• Convenient test mode
• No field calibration or sensitivity adjustments required
• 100 hr lamp burn-in timer
• Green LED indicator
Relay Option
Photocell Option
POWER PACK
(PP20)RED, 12-24 VAC/VDC input
WHT, Occupancy State (high VDC for occupied)
BLK, Common
WIRING/COVERAGE PATTERN
MODEL DESCRIPTION
WV
-16
Wide View Sensor-Corner Mount, Low Voltage, PIR
WV-16-KIT Wide View Sensor-Corner Mount, Low Voltage, PIR, WV Bracket, Kit
WV-PDT-16-KIT Wide View Sensor-Corner Mount, Low Voltage, PDT, WV Bracket, Kit
Note:
Call Kele for models with low voltage relay, photocell, dimming, and low temperature options availability.
Supply Voltage 12-24 VAC/VDC
Coverage Small motion - 40ft (12.19m); Large
motion - 70ft (21.34m)
Coverage Pattern 120°
Sensor Type
WV-16 Passive Infrared (PIR)
WV-PDT-16 Dual Technology
(PIR and Microphonics)
Time Range 30 seconds to 20 minutes
Time Delay Adjust 9 programmable settings
Operating Temperature 14 to 160°F (-10 to 71°C)
Operating Humidity 20-90% non-condensing
Mounting Corner or ceiling using WV BR bracket
Dimensions 3.6"W x 3.0"H x 1.75"D
(9.14 x 7.62 x 4.45 cm)
Approvals UL, cUL (E167435)
Weight 0.32 lb(0.15 kg)
Warranty 5 year limited
SPECIFICATIONS
WV16
(SHOWN WITH WV-BR-SS MOUNTING BRACKET)
TOP VIEW
30 20 10 0 ft 10 20 30
9 6 3 0 m 3 6 9
12.2
9.1
6
3
0 m
40 30 20 10 0 ft
WV16 Coverage Pattern
ACCESSORIES
PP20 Power Pack, 120/277 VAC
WV-BR-SS Ceiling Mount Bracket fi
639LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

688. Neutral
White
Hot
Black
Ground
Green
Load
Red
Neutral
Load
White
WIRING COVERAGE PATTERNS
ORDERING INFORMATION
42ESD1
42ESD1
DESCRIPTION
The MarkTime® 42E Series Occupancy Sensors with LED
sensor indicator are ideal for lighting control in rooms that are
not occupied all the time
. Time delay and sensor sensitivity
are field adjustable. Use with Incandescent, fluorescent and
CFL lighting. Indoor use only.
FEATURES
• LED sensor indicator
• Time delay, sensor sensitivity, & light level field
adjustable
• Pushbutton manual override
• Use with incandescent, fluorescent and CFL lighting
• Wall plate included
• California title 24 compliant
MODEL DESCRIPTION
42ES624-I PIR sensor, manual on/auto off, ivory
42ES624-W PIR sensor, manual on/auto off, white
42EDS1-I Dual-tech,occupancy, auto on/auto off, vacancy, manual on/auto off, ivory
42EDS1-W Dual-tech,occupancy, auto on/auto off, vacancy, manual on/auto off, white
42ES5HD-I PIR sensor, auto on/auto off, vacancy, manual on/auto off, ivory
42ES5HD-W PIR sensor, auto on/auto off, vacancy, manual on/auto off, white
PIR AND DUAL TECHNOLOGY OCCUPANCY/VACANCY SENSOR SWITCH
42E SERIES
Rating
42ES624 120VAC, 50/60Hz, 500W, 500VA, 1/8HP
42ES5HD 120VAC, 50/60Hz, 800W, 800VA, 1/4HP
42EDS1 120VAC, 50/60Hz, 800W, 800VA, 1/4HP;
277VAC, 50/60Hz, 1600VA
Coverage
42ES624 PIR 150° x 20FT, 450 sq. ft.
42ES5HD PIR 180° x 20FT, 650 sq. ft.
42EDS1 PIR 180° x 40FT, 1200 sq. ft. / US 180° x
20FT
, 400 sq
. ft.
Sensitivity Adjustment
42ES624 Field adjustable sensor sensitivity 30% to
100%
42ES5HD/42EDS1 Field adjustbale sensor sensitivity 30% to
100% and light le
vel, 100Lux to Daylight
Time Delay Adjust
Delay Off,
Field Adjustable 15 sec to 30 min
Operating Temperature 32° to 131°F (0 to 55°C)
Dimensions
42ES624 4 1/8”H X 1 ¾”W X 2”D
42ES5HD 4”H X 1 ¾”W X 1 ¾”D
42EDS1 4 1/8”H X 1 ¾”W X 1 ¾”D
Mounting Standard wall box (Wall plate included)
Approvals UL, cUL Listed
Weight 0.4 lbs (0.181 kg)
Warranty
42EDS1 3 years
42ES5HD 5 years
42ES624-W 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
42ES5HD
42ES5HD
42ES624
42ES624
Top View
20'
10'
0
10'
20'
Top View
10'
0
10'
Top View
10'
0
10'
LIGHTING CONTROLS
640
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

689. ORDERING INFORMATION
Secondary Voltage 24 VDC, 100 mA
Operating Temperature 32° to 98°F (0° to 36°C)
Dimensions 1.6" H x 2.75" W x 1.6" D
(4.1 x 7.0 x 4.1 cm) with 1/2" snap-in
nipple
Enclosure Rating UL 2043-listed 94V-0 plastic
enclosure (plenum rated)
Approvals UL and cUL listed, File #E101196
Weight 0.48 lb (0.22 kg)
Warranty 5 years
WATTSTOPPER UNIVERSAL VOLTAGE POWER PACK
BZ-50
DESCRIPTION
The Power Pack provides 24 VDC operating voltage for
occupancy sensors and light level sensors. Each is capable
of switching up to 20A electrical load. The Slave Pack is
similar to the Power Pack but has no transformer power supply, only an isolated relay
. Power and Slave Packs can
be combined to switch almost any lighting or HVAC load controlled by occupancy or light sensor controls
. They can
also be used for low voltage switching.
FEATURES
• P
and isolated relay; Slave Pack includes isolated relay only
•
Available in several AC voltage inputs
• Zero-crossing switching technology for increased
reliability and product life
• Attaches easily to standard 1/2" knockouts
OPERATION
SPECIFICATIONS
BZ-50S-120/277/347E-P
The Power Pack consists of a transformer and high-current relay combined in one small, powerful package. The transformer
has a primary high voltage input and a secondary 24 VDC, 100 mA output. The Slave Pack contains a high current relay only
and is controlled by the sensor. When occupancy is detected by the sensor (and inadequate ambient light is detected if this
feature is used), the sensor electrically closes an internal circuit that sends 24 VDC back to the Power and/or Slave Packs, which switch the line voltage to control lighting or other equipment
.
• Housed in ABS, UL listed 94V-0 plastic enclosure
• Can be used to switch low voltage control wiring
• UL and cUL listed
• Five-year warrantyNEW!
641LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!
Model Type Supply Voltage
Contactor
Ballast
Contactor
Tungsten
Contactor Motor
24 VDC
Output Current
BZ-50 Power Pack120/ 277 VAC 20A 20A 1 hp 225 mA
B347-P Power Pack 347 VAC 15A - - 100 mA
S-120/277/347-ESlave Pack120/ 277 VAC 20A - - -
S-120/277/347-ESlave Pack 347 VAC 15A - - -

690. 3 Wire
24 VDC
Sensor
(CX-100 or
CI-200)
1-(brown)
2-(red)
3-(orange)
Slave
Pack
Power Pack
(blue)
(black)
(white)
(black)
(red) Load
(red) Line
N
Hot
(red)
(black)
(blue)
(red) Line
Switch
(red) Load
N.C. Contact
Common
N.O. Contact
4-(yellow)
5-(green)
6-(blue)
7-(purple)
8-(gray)
Control Output 24 VDC
Control Return
Light Level Output 24 VDC
+24 VDC
Common
Load
Wires
N
Hot
Switch
Load
WIRING
INSTALLATION
Note: All power packs should be installed in accordance with state, local, and national electrical codes and requirements.
Power Packs are designed to attach to existing or new electrical enclosures with 1/2" knockouts.
1. Disconnect power at the circuit breaker prior to doing any work.
2. Connect the white wire to neutral and the black wire to the appropriate hot leg.
3. Connect one red wire to the line side of the voltage to be controlled and the other red wire to the load to be controlled.
4. Make all low-voltage connections to the occupancy sensor (see wiring below).
5. Verify all connections are correct, and reset the circuit breaker.
WATTSTOPPER UNIVERSAL VOLTAGE POWER PACK
BZ-50
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BZ-50 120-277 VAC to 24 VDC power pack
B347-P 347 VAC to 24 VDC power pack
S-120/277/347-E Slave pack
3 Wire
24 VDC
Sensor
(CX-100 or
CI-200)
Power Pack
N Hot
N.C. Contact
Common
N.O. Contact
Control Output 24 VDC
Control Return
Light Level Output 24 VDC
+24 VDC
Common
Switch
Load
(white)
(black)
(red)
(black)
(blue)
(red) Line
(red) Load
1-(brown)
2-(red)
3-(orange)
4-(yellow)
5-(green)
6-(blue)
7-(purple)
8-(gray)
Cable
Wires
High Voltage
Connection Made
Inside J-Box
Power Pack
(white) Neutral
(black) Hot
(red)
(red)
High Voltage Low Voltage
(red) +24 VDC
(black) COM
(blue) +SWNEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
642NEW!
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!

691. Supply Voltage 12-24 VDC; 20 mA max
Analog Output 4-20 mA (750Ω impedance), 0-10
VDC, 0-5 VDC, 1-10 VDC, 1-5 VDC
Wire Type Three-wire, 18-gauge, stranded
Calibration
Indoor
Factory 0-100 fc
Field Adjustable 0 fc minimum - 750 fc maximum
Outdoor
Factory 0 - 250 fc
Field Adjustable 0 fc minimum - 750 fc maximum
Skylight
Factory 10 - 2000 fc
Field Adjustable 10 fc minimum - 7500 fc maximum
Sensor Type Blue-enhanced photo-diode
Linearity 2%
Protection Non-Polarized
Repeatability ±0.5%
Operating Temperature -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Temperature Accuracy ±10%
Dimensions
Indoor 1.5" x 1.5" x 1.7" (38 x 38 x 43 mm)
Outdoor 1.4" x 1.4" x 2.4" (36 x 36 x 61 mm)
Skylight 1.3" x 1.3" x 2.8" (33 x 33 x 71 mm)
Weight 0.13 lb (0.06 kg)
Approvals ETL, NEC Class 2, RoHS, Title 24
Warranty
2 years
PLC-MULTIPOINT CELESTIAL SELF-CONTAINED AMBIENT LIGHT SENSORS
MK7-B SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MK7-B Series Celestial Series Self-contained Sensors
develop a variable output voltage that corresponds to the
amount of present ambient light
. These precise ambient light-
level measurement units are designed to detect and transmit, via an analog signal, the amount of light present at their location to the remote analog input point of most Building Automation Controllers
. The sensors contain a precision
photo-diode type cell that provides an exact, proportional output over a wide range of light levels, allowing for accurate lighting control
.
FEATURES
• F •
Analog voltage models
• Wide range of light-level monitoring
• Compatible with most BAS controllers
• Extremely accurate and reliable
• Three basic models for monitoring: indoor light levels
(ceiling mount), outdoor light levels (roof mount), skylight light levels (skylight mount)
•
Day lighting control for three application zones
Sensors allow most building automation controllers to become sophisticated lighting control computers to control any type of lighting at any light level based on the amount of ambient light available
. There are three basic types of
sensors: Indoor Designed to monitor the ambient light levels in offices, schools, etc
., the sensor mounts in a 3/8" hole bored in a
ceiling tile central to the electrical lighting being controlled. It
f
eatures an adjustable maximum range from 5-750 fc at the
sensor face and a 60° field of view with special flat Fresnel lens configuration.
Outdoor Designed to mount hor
izontally in a 1/2" conduit fitting to
monitor the outside ambient light levels for parking garages, security lighting, sign lighting, etc
., the sensor is generally
roof-top mounted facing the northern sky. It features an
adjustable maximum range from 5-750 fc at the sensor face.
Completely w
eathertight and temperature stable
. At very
low ambient temperatures (below 13°F), the sensor will still function but will lose some accuracy and light level sensitivity
.
Skylight Designed to mount v
ertically in a 1/2" conduit fitting to
monitor the ambient light levels from inside a skylight well in warehouses, shopping malls, etc
., the sensor features an
adjustable maximum range from 1000-7500 fc at the sensor face
.
The sensor heads contain patented solid-state circuitry designed to be extremely accurate, adjustable, and flexible over a wide range of input and output voltages
. The standard
three-wire sensors operate from any input voltage between 12-24 VDC and give a return output signal of 0-5, 1-5, 0-10, 1-10 VDC
. The sensors come factory calibrated. The sensor is
equipped with a variable range potentiometer, but calibration equipment, such as a foot-candle meter, would be required to change the range of the unit
. Note: There is a charge for
recalibration of the unit by the manufacturer.
APPLICATION
OPERATION
SPECIFICATIONS
MK7-B-CCF
Indoor
MK7-B-CS
Skylight
MK7-B-CR
OutdoorNEW!
643LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!

692. The sensors come factory calibrated. Each sensor is equipped with a variable range potentiometer, but calibration equipment,
such as a foot-candle meter, would be required to change the range of the unit. Note: there is a charge for recalibration of
the unit by the manufacturer. Rotating the potentiometer one way or the other causes the upper limit voltage that the sensor
produces to correspond to lower or higher foot-candle readings. For example, with a 5V model at the minimum gain setting,
the sensor will deliver 5 VDC at 750 fc; at the maximum setting, the sensor will deliver 5 VDC at 50 fc. The zero light level
setting is fixed and will not change. The adjustment procedure allows for precise light level monitoring and can compensate
for the physical light sensing location of the unit, which may differ from the actual light level present at the task level. Once the
calibr
ation procedure is completed, it will remain constant with no further adjustments
. Complete installation instructions are
provided with the unit. The lower end output (zero light level) and the upper end light level outputs can be custom-ordered for
specific voltages. A range of the standard output voltages supplied are listed in Specifications.
To prevent electrical shock and possible equipment damage, disconnect power coming from the controller prior
to hookup. Wiring from the sensor to the controller should be with 18- or 22-gauge stranded wire. Do not run the
low-voltage wire with or near power wiring. For long wire runs or where there is excessive electrical noise, shielded
cable or cable in conduit is required. Cable length should not exceed 500' (152m). Wire the sensor to the appropriate
analog port of the controller according to the controller manufacturer’s instructions and the specific details of the
particular sensor listed on this page.
WIRING / CALIBRATION
PLC-MULTIPOINT CELESTIAL SELF-CONTAINED AMBIENT LIGHT SENSORS
MK7-B SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Celestial Ambient Light Sensor
DESCRIPTION
OUTPUT SIGNAL
MODEL
MK7-B
Indoor
Outdoor
Skylight
CCF
CR
CS
0-5 VDC
1-5 VDC
0-10 VDC
1-10 VDC
0/5
1/5
0/10
1/10
MK7-B CCF 1/5Example: MK7-B-CCF-1/5 Light sensor, indoor
housing, 1-5 VDC output signal
VTI 4-20 mA
MK7-B
Power
Com
Signal
4-20 mA Signal
(red)
(black)
(yellow)
24 VDC
VTI-1Com
24V Power
V Sig In
Ref V Out
mA Sig OutMK7-B
POWER
COM
SIGNAL
(red)
(black)
(yellow)
24 VDC
Voltage
Output
Signal
Wiring the MK7-B Wiring the MK7-B to VTI-1NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
644NEW!
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!

693. Supply Voltage
PSR-1-T 12-35 VDC
Maximum Current Draw PSR-1-T
22 mA
Output Impedance 750Ω
Outputs PSR-1
>1 MΩ in dark, <1.5 kΩ in bright
light, non-linear within span
PSR-1-T 4 mA = bright light; 20 mA = dark
Non-linear within span
Operating Temperature -13° to 167°F (-25° to 75°C)
Weight
PSR-1 0.05 lb (0.02 kg)
PSR-1-T 0.35 lb (0.16 kg)
PSR-1-E 0.65 lb (0.3 kg)
PSR-1-T-E 0.95lb (0.43 kg)
Warranty 1 year
KELE PHOTO-SENSITIVE RESISTOR
PSR-1, PSR-1-T
DESCRIPTION
The Model PSR-1 Photo-Sensitive Resistor may be used as an input to indicate the presence or absense of light at the sensor location
. The Model PSR1-T is a PSR-1 coupled with
a 4-20 mA transmitter. The sensor is designed to be mounted
in the end of a weatherproof conduit box.
FEATURES
• Economical dark/light sensing
• 1/2" NPT design
• Track-mounted PSR-1-T transmitter
• Optional weatherproof enclosure
APPLICATION
The Model PSR-1 has a resistance in darkness in excess of 1 MW and a resistance in bright light of less than 1
.5
kW. Models PSR-1 and PSR1-T indicate the presence or
absence of light. They should not be used for footcandle
control of occupied spaces. The PSR-1-T is calibrated for 4
mA in bright light (>100 footcandles) and 20 mA in darkness (0
.1 footcandles).
RESISTANCE CURVESPECIFICATIONS
PSR-1-T
1M
100k
10k
1k
100
10
0 0.1 0.5 1.0 5.0 10 50 100
Illumination (fc)
Resistance
(ohms)fi
645LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

694. OPERATION
Due to the wide tolerance and non-linear nature of the low-cost
PSR-1 and PSR-1-T, the values for resistance versus light level (or
mA versus light level) cannot be predicated accurately
. As stated
in the data sheet, it is not intended f
or control of lighting levels in
occupied spaces
.
Ho
wever, an installed device will give very repeatable performance
through its span
. Note the following procedure is required for each
individual PSR-1 and PSR-1-T installed, as interchangeability is not guaranteed
.
1. Install the PSR-1 or PSR-1-T in its intended location and
connect to controller. Preferred direction of mounting is due north
toward the sky or toward a location where the sun can never appear
.
2. Arrange for the sensed lighting to be darkened to the control
point that is desired, use of a reliable light level meter is
recommended. For outdoor lighting, the most common on/off
control points are turn lights on at a point between 1 and 3 foot candles
. Without a light meter, the lowest level (on point) can be
estimated by observation on a cloudless day at about 5 minutes prior to sunset, or about 5 minutes after sunrise
. The high (off
point) level can be estimated by observation on a cloudless day at about 15 minutes prior to sunset, or about 15 minutes after sunrise
. Sunrise and sunset time for your locality on a given day
may be obtained at www.srrb.noaa.gov.
3. Record the value (Ohms or mA) at which each lighting control
point is reached.
4. While the method is NOT recommended for analog control
of lighting level in occupied spaces, the same procedure may be employed to control artificial lighting in areas that otherwise illuminated by skylights or other overwhelming sources of natural light
.
5. Any exposure to direct sun may allow the temperature of the
device to approach or exceed 167 F (75 c ) limit.
5 4 3 2 1
4 mA ADJ
20 mA ADJ
24 VDC Po wer Supply
PSR-1
in
(cm)
K420-P
1.75
(4.45)
2.25
(5.72)
4-20 mA
Transmitter
Board
4-20 mA
Signal
P2
P1
WIRING
APPLICATION NOTES
KELE PHOTO-SENSITIVE RESISTOR
PSR-1, PSR-1-T
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PSR-1 Photo-sensitive resistor
PSR-1-T Photo-sensitive resistor with 4-20 mA output
PSR-1-E Photo-sensitive resistor with waterproof enclosure
PSR-1-T-E Photo-sensitive resistor with waterproof enclosure and 4-20 mA output
Typical Application Using ST-O(X)
Outdoor Air Sensor with PSR-1
Model AD-2 3/4" x 1/2" Adapter Required
ACCESSORIES
AD-2 Knock-out adapter -3/4" TO 1/2"
1/2" NPT
(red)
(black)
Controller Input Terminals
(Non-polarized resistance)
17"
PSR-1
PSR-1-Tfi
LIGHTING CONTROLS
646fi
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

695. Supply Voltage 120 VAC 50/60 Hz, 208-277 VAC
50/60 Hz, 105-480 VAC 50/60 Hz
Switch Type SPST
Lead Length 6" (15.24 cm)
Lead Wire Type Pigtail leads, 14 AWG
Foot Candles On 1-5 Off 3-15, On 5 Off 15
Operating Temperature -40° to 150°F (-40° to 65°C)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 3R weatherproof
Approvals UL Listed E42722, CSA, UL Listed
E59121, CSA
Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Warranty
K Series 5 years
LC Series 3 years
PHOTO SWITCHES
K, LC SERIES
2.0
(5.08)
in
(cm)
LCK4221C K122 K4251
3.0
(7.62)
1.38
(3.5)
2.5
(6.35)
2.5
(6.35)
5.25
(13.35)
1.88
(4.76)
2.94(7.46)
dia
3.5
(8.89) 1/2" NPT
3.5
(8.90)
1/2'' NPT
DESCRIPTION
Models K and LC Photo Switches are universally employed
to control lighting loads in response to available natural light.
Each will tur
n on at dusk and off at dawn, and each may be
connected to directly switchloads up to its continuous rating or to switch larger loads through relays or contactors. Stem
mount types (see specifications belo
w) are equipped with a
1/2" MNPT nipple and locknut for mounting to a weatherproof box or conduit body.Stem/swivel mount types attach in the
same manner, but include a swivel for directional aiming.
FEATURES
• On at dusk, off at dawn operation
• Weatherproof enclosure
• Simple installation and wiring
• Heavy-duty switch to control loads directly
• Contacts remain closed in case of cell failure
• Ideal for outdoor lighting, billboard lighting, security
lighting
• UL listed, CSA approved
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
K4251
K122
LC
K41
K4221Cfi
647LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

696. WIRING
INSTALLATION
PHOTO SWITCHES
K, LC SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model LC
120, 208, 240, or 277V
(black) (red)
Lamp
Load
(white)
(white)
(black) (black)
(red or
white)
Line
Line
or
Neutral
Twist Lock
Receptacle
K
Photo Switches
Models K
120, 208, 240, or 277V
(black)
(red)
Lamp
Load
(white)
(white)
(black) (black)
(red or
white)
Line
Line
or
Neutral
When exposed to weather, mount Models K and LC to a weatherproof hub or conduit body via 1/2" threaded nipple. They may be
mounted to a 1/2" knockout in a handy box in locations protected from weather, such as parking garages or beneath substantial
overhangs. The LC plugs into a standard mating twist-lock socket supplied by lighting fixture manufacturers or the K122 twist-lock
base. K122 base includes the mounting bracket. Mount in a location facing north for normal outdoor light control application, and
wire to switch the load directly or through a lighting contactor. Switching level may be adjusted on K41 by moving the slide to block
more or less of the photocell window. Covering more of the window will cause lights to come on earlier in the evening (at a higher
ambient light level). The K42 model is more directional and may be aimed at darker areas to adjust the level at which lights come
on, or it may be aimed toward another light source to provide coordination between multiple light groups. Aiming of the LC series
is set by the position of the socket base.
Model Mounting Supply VoltageContactor BallastContactor TungstenFoot Candles Weight
K4121C Stem 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 8.3A 15A On 1-5 Off 3-154.0 oz (0.10 kg)
K4123C Stem 208-277 VAC 50/60 Hz 8.3A 15A On 1-5 Off 3-154.0 oz (0.10 kg)
K4221C Stem/Swivel120 VAC 50/60 Hz 8.3A 15A On 1-5 Off 3-154.0 oz (0.10 kg)
K4251 Stem/Swivel120 VAC 50/60 Hz 8.3A 15A On 1-5 Off 3-154.0 oz (0.10 kg)
LC4521C Twist lock120 VAC 50/60 Hz 8.3A 8.3A On 5 Off 154.0 oz (0.10 kg)
LC4523C Twist lock208-277 VAC 50/60 Hz 8.3A 8.3A On 5 Off 153.0 oz (0.09 kg)
K122
Twist lock
base
105-480 VAC 50/60 Hz 3.0 oz (0.09 kg)fi
LIGHTING CONTROLS
648fi
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

697. Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC, 1 VA
Relay Type N.O. SPST
Relay Output 1 A at 30 VAC/VDC
Lead Length 8" (20.32 cm)
Lead Wire Type Pigtail leads, 20 AWG
Accuracy ±10% FC
Operating Temperature -25° to 125°F (-31.7° to 51.7°C)
Mounting Stem with 1/2" thread fitting
Dimensions 2.64" x 1.57"x 1.89"
(67.1 x 39.9 x 48.0 mm)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 3R weatherproof
Weight 0.4 lb (0.18 kg)
Warranty 1 year
PHOTO SWITCHES
EM SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The EM is a low voltage photocell used for controlling exterior
lighting and signage. The photocell provides an ON signal
when the ambient light level drops below a preset dark setpoint
. It then provides a signal OFF as the ambient light
level rises above the preset light setpoint. The photocell relay
contact red wires are connected to a panel, to a low voltage controlled loads or directly to a Building Automation System
.
FEATURES
•
On at dusk, off at dawn operation
• Simple installation and wiring
• One set of normally open, isolated relay contacts;
contacts are closed when sensed light level is below dark setpoint, open when light level is above light setpoint
•
8-second time delay and built-in setpoint deadband
prevent cycling
• 1/2" threaded male conduit base for easy mounting on
conduit fittings or junction boxes.
• Weatherproof enclosure
• Economical input to BAS or lighting control systems
• Ideal for outdoor lighting, billboard lighting, security lighting
Model EM
Light Sensing
Window
BLK
24 VAC
BLK
RED
RED
Sliding Window
Aperture
1/2" Thread Fitting
N/O Relay Contacts
1A @ 30 VAC/VDC
(closes below dark
setpoint)

24 VDC
BLK (24+)
WHT (com)
WIRINGSPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
EM-24A2 24 VAC Exterior photocell with relay contact
EM-24VD2 24 VDC Exterior photocell with relay contact
OPERATION
INSTALLATION/ MOUNTING
Mount on exterior or roof of building. Point light sensing
window North. The photocell provides an ON signal when
the ambient light level drops below a preset dark setpoint. It
then pro
vides a signal OFF as the ambient light level rises
above the preset light setpoint
. The setpoint can be changed
for specific applications by opening and closing the photocell aperture window
.
EM SeriesNEW!
649LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!

698. Supply Voltage 18 to 30 VDC
Current Rating 20mA
Analog Output Low 4mA, High 20mA, 250Ω output
impedance
Calibration MAS-CAL tool
Linearity 2%
Filter Type Clear, Opaque, Dark
Lens Fresnel, Flat, Dome
Protection Non-polarized
Repeatability ±0.5%
Operating Temperature -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Temperature Accuracy ±10%
RoHS Statement Yes
Dimensions
Indoor 1.5" X 1.5" X 1.7" (38 X 38 X 43 mm)
Outdoor 1.4" X 1.4" X 2.4" (36 X 36 X 61)
Atrium/Skylight 1.3" X 1.3" X 2.8" (33 X 33 X 71 mm)
Approvals ETL, NEC Class 2, RoHS, Title 24
Weight 0.13 lb (0.06 kg)
Warranty 2 years
PLC-MULTIPOINT SELF-CONTAINED AMBIENT LIGHT SENSORS
MAS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MAS sensors are microprocessor-based light monitors
that measure ambient light levels. They provide an analog DC
signal to various microprocessors and energy management systems
. The sensor is powered by 24 VDC and provides a
4-20 mA analog signal over 2 wires. The MAS can be set to
a range of 0 to 10,000 fc. It comes in many styles of housing,
including indoor, outdoor, atrium and skylight. The MAS
sensor's range can be changed with the MAS-CAL from up to 4000 feet away
.
FEATURES
• Compatible with many lighting and building automation
controllers
• Measuring range 0-10,000 Fc
• Output 4-20 mA
• Adjustable response time
• Day lighting control for four application zones
• Indoor sensor adhesive ceiling mount
• All others 1/2 inch NPT mount
• Class 2 wiring device
• NIST traceable factory calibration available
• Title 24 Listed
• RoHS compliant
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
®
Supplied by others
MASSMASS
MASO MASA
MASI
Indoor Sensor Type
MASS
Skylight Sensor
Type
Outdoor Sensor Type Atrium Sensor Type
(Correct Orientation Shown)fi
LIGHTING CONTROLS
650fi
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

699. PLC-MULTIPOINT SELF-CONTAINED AMBIENT LIGHT SENSORS
MAS SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES
MAS-CAL Calibration unit for MAS series light level sensors
Model Ordering description
Filter
Type
Foot Candles LensLocationMounting
Mounting
Orientation
MASI-12X0T Indoor light sensor 50 Fc instant time responseClear Min 0 Fc Max 200 FcFresnelIndoor Ceiling Down
MASI-12X1T Indoor light sensor 50 Fc 10 min time responseClear Min 0 Fc Max 200 FcFresnelIndoor Ceiling Down
MASI-12X2T Indoor light sensor 50 Fc 20 min time responseClear Min 0 Fc Max 200 FcFresnelIndoor Ceiling Down
MASI-1X0T Indoor light sensor 100 Fc instant time responseClear Min 0 Fc Max 200 FcFresnelIndoor Ceiling Down
MASI-1X1T Indoor light sensor 100 Fc 10 min time responseClear Min 0 Fc Max 200 FcFresnelIndoor Ceiling Down
MASI-1X2T Indoor light sensor 100 Fc 20 min time responseClear Min 0 Fc Max 200 FcFresnelIndoor Ceiling Down
MASI-2X0T Indoor light sensor 200 Fc instant time responseClear Min 0 Fc Max 200 FcFresnelIndoor Ceiling Down
MASI-2X1T Indoor light sensor 200 Fc 10 min time responseClear Min 0 Fc Max 200 FcFresnelIndoor Ceiling Down
MASI-2X2T Indoor light sensor 200 Fc 20 min time responseClear Min 0 Fc Max 200 FcFresnelIndoor Ceiling Down
MASO-12X0T Outdoor light sensor 125 Fc instant time responseClear Min 0 Fc Max 500 FcFlatOutdoor1/2" NPT Horizontal
MASO-12X1T Outdoor light sensor 125 Fc 10 min time responseClear Min 0 Fc Max 500 FcFlatOutdoor1/2" NPT Horizontal
MASO-12X2T Outdoor light sensor 125 Fc 20 min time responseClear Min 0 Fc Max 500 FcFlatOutdoor1/2" NPT Horizontal
MASO-1X0T Outdoor light sensor 250 Fc instant time responseClear Min 0 Fc Max 500 FcFlatOutdoor1/2" NPT Horizontal
MASO-1X1T Outdoor light sensor 250 Fc 10 min time responseClear Min 0 Fc Max 500 FcFlatOutdoor1/2" NPT Horizontal
MASO-1X2T Outdoor light sensor 250 Fc 20 min time responseClear Min 0 Fc Max 500 FcFlatOutdoor1/2" NPT Horizontal
MASO-2X0T Outdoor light sensor 500 Fc instant time responseClear Min 0 Fc Max 500 FcFlatOutdoor1/2" NPT Horizontal
MASO-2X1T Outdoor light sensor 500 Fc 10 min time responseClear Min 0 Fc Max 500 FcFlatOutdoor1/2" NPT Horizontal
MASO-2X2T Outdoor light sensor 500 Fc 20 min time responseClear Min 0 Fc Max 500 FcFlatOutdoor1/2" NPT Horizontal
MASA-12X0T Atrium light sensor 500 Fc instant time responseOpaqueMin 50 Fc Max 2,000 Fc Dome Atrium 1/2" NPT Horizontal
MASA-12X1T Atrium light sensor 500 Fc 10 min time responseOpaqueMin 50 Fc Max 2,000 Fc Dome Atrium 1/2" NPT Horizontal
MASA-12X2T Atrium light sensor 500 Fc 20 min time responseOpaqueMin 50 Fc Max 2,000 Fc Dome Atrium 1/2" NPT Horizontal
MASA-1X0T Atrium light sensor 1000 Fc instant time responseOpaqueMin 50 Fc Max 2,000 Fc Dome Atrium 1/2" NPT Horizontal
MASA-1X1T Atrium light sensor 1000 Fc 10 min time responseOpaqueMin 50 Fc Max 2,000 Fc Dome Atrium 1/2" NPT Horizontal
MASA-1X2T Atrium light sensor 1000 Fc 20 min time responseOpaqueMin 50 Fc Max 2,000 Fc Dome Atrium 1/2" NPT Horizontal
MASA-2X0T Atrium light sensor 2000 Fc instant time responseOpaqueMin 50 Fc Max 2,000 Fc Dome Atrium 1/2" NPT Horizontal
MASA-2X1T Atrium light sensor 2000 Fc 10 min time responseOpaqueMin 50 Fc Max 2,000 Fc Dome Atrium 1/2" NPT Horizontal
MASA-2X2T Atrium light sensor 2000 Fc 20 min time responseOpaqueMin 50 Fc Max 2,000 Fc Dome Atrium 1/2" NPT Horizontal
MASS-12X0T Skylight light sensor 2500 Fc instant time responseDarkMin 100 Fc Max 10,000 FcDome Skylight1/2" NPT Up
MASS-12X1T Skylight light sensor 2500 Fc 10 min time responseDarkMin 100 Fc Max 10,000 FcDome Skylight1/2" NPT Up
MASS-12X2T Skylight light sensor 2500 Fc 20 min time responseDarkMin 100 Fc Max 10,000 FcDome Skylight1/2" NPT Up
MASS-1X0T Skylight light sensor 5000 Fc instant time responseDarkMin 100 Fc Max 10,000 FcDome Skylight1/2" NPT Up
MASS-1X1T Skylight light sensor 5000 Fc 10 min time responseDarkMin 100 Fc Max 10,000 FcDome Skylight1/2" NPT Up
MASS-1X2T Skylight light sensor 5000 Fc 20 min time responseDarkMin 100 Fc Max 10,000 FcDome Skylight1/2" NPT Up
MASS-2X0T Skylight light sensor 10000 Fc instant time responseDarkMin 100 Fc Max 10,000 FcDome Skylight1/2" NPT Up
MASS-2X1T Skylight light sensor 10000 Fc 10 min time responseDarkMin 100 Fc Max 10,000 FcDome Skylight1/2" NPT Up
MASS-2X2T Skylight light sensor 10000 Fc 20 min time responseDarkMin 100 Fc Max 10,000 FcDome Skylight1/2" NPT Up
651LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

700. DESCRIPTION
LightSync™ LS-PB-C Series switches provide the flexibility
needed for ILC lighting control panel applications that require
multiple bypass switches
. Each addressable switch button may be
individually programmed to control a single relay or group of relays within an individual ILC lighting panel or a network of panels on the LightSync(tm) data line network
. LightSync(tm) switches are
equipped with common CAT-5 cable RJ-45 connectors. The data line
network CAT-5 cable plugs into the RJ-45 plug in the ILC Apprentice II lighting control panel
. Switch assembly and cover plate are ordered
separately. Warranty is one year.
FEATURES
• Digitall •
1 to 6-button configuration
• Mounts in standard single-gang box spacing
• LED status indicators provide true relay group/preset
status
• Fits standard Decoratype plate
• Available in four colors and stainless steel
• Up to 3000 feet without a repeater
Supply Voltage 12/24 VDC; 7 mA typical
Data Transmission LightSync CAT-5 data line
Communication Port RJ45
LED Indication Relay group / preset status
Operating Temperature 32° to 112°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 10% to 95% Non-condensing
Dimensions 2.75" x 4.5" x 1.3"
(6.9 x 11.4 x 3.2 cm)
Approvals FCC and UL approved
Weight 0.7 lbs (0.32 kg)
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
Additional LightSync Devices or Power supply
repeater (PSR)
CAT-5 Cable
To ILC
Lighting Panel or Power supply
repeater (PSR) RJ45 port
WIRING
ILC LIGHT SYNC ADRESSABLE SWITCHES
LS-PB-C SERIES
LightSync™ switch assembly*
DESCRIPTION
SWITCH COLOR
MODEL
LS-PB-C
Ivory
White
Black
Gray
Stainless steel
IV
WH
BL
GY
SS
Number of pushbuttons (up to 6 max.)X
LS-PB-C WH 4
Example: LS-PB-WH-4 White, four pushbutton switch assembl y
*Switch cover plates included
ACCESSORIES PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
PSR Power Source Repeater for network's greater than 3000 ft
LS-PB-C-WH-6fi
LIGHTING CONTROLS
652fi
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

701. LVS 4-Button Momentary Switch,
No Pilot LED’s
LVS 4-Button Momentary Switch,
with Pilot LEDs*
*Note Pilot Polarity Marks
L4
L2
L3
L1
S1
S2
S3
S4
S1
S2
S3
S4
Contact Rating
Switch 30 VDC Max @100 mA
Pilot LED 18-30VDC, internal 2.2kohm, ½
Watt resistor
Actuation Type Momentary
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 10% - 90% non-condensing
Number Of Switches 1-4
Mounting Single-gang NEMA 1 style switch
box (wall plate sold seperately)
Color White,ivory
Dimensions 4.3" x 1.9" x 1.6" (10.9 x 4.8 x 4.1 cm)
Materials Of Construction
Housing Rugged, high impact, injection molded
Plastic Leads
Color coded
Weight 0.19 lb (0.09 kg)
Warranty 2 years
LIGHTING OVERRIDE SWITCHES
LV SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Hubbell Building Automation Low Voltage Wall Switches are designed for virtually any area
. The soft contours of
its architecturally pleasing design fit easily into any decor.
Switches are a
vailable momentary and feature multiple button
configurations with and without a pilot LED
.
FEATURES
• Attractive, architecturally pleasing design
• Momentary and latching versions available
• 1-4 buttons with or without LED
• Mounts to standard single-gang box
• 2-year warranty
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
L
VSMINPIV
Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 1 Button, No Pilot, Ivory
LVSMINPWH Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 1 Button, No Pilot, White
LVSMIPLIV Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 1 Button, w/Pilot LED, Ivory
LVSMIPLWH Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 1 Button, w/Pilot LED, White
LVSM2NPIV Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 2 Button, No Pilot, Ivory
LVSM2NPWH Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 2 Button, No Pilot, White
LVSM2PLIV Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 2 Button, w/Pilot LED’s, Ivory
LVSM2PLWH Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 2 Button, w/Pilot LED’s, White
LVSM3NPIV Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 3 Button, No Pilot, Ivory
LVSM3NPWH Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 3 Button, No Pilot, White
LVSM3PLIV Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 3 Button, w/Pilot LEDs, Ivory
LVSM3PLWH Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 3 Button, w/Pilot LEDs, White
LVSM4NPIV Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 4 Button, No Pilot, Ivory
LVSM4NPWH Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 4 Button, No Pilot, White
LVSM4PLIV Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 4 Button, w/Pilot LEDs, Ivory
LVSM4PLWH Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 4 Button, w/Pilot LEDs, White
WIRING
Standard Decora style wallplates not included. Add "P" at end of model to include wall plate.
LVSM2PLWH
LVSM2NPWH
LVSM1NPWH
LVSMIPLWH
653LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

702. ORDERING INFORMATION
SENSOR SWITCH LOW VOLTAGE SENSOR INTERFACE SWITCH
SPODM SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The sPODM Series of low voltage wall stations interface with standard
Sensor Switch occupancy sensors and power packs in order to
implement a wide range of single and bi-level switching applications.
These s
witch devices provide an elegant and cost effective way of
deploying bi-level lighting control that meet energy and building codes without having to source special sensors or power packs.
FEATURES
• Enab •
Alternative usage as override switch for auto-on applicaitons
• Single gang decorator style with either 1 or 2 on/off switches
• Soft-click push-buttons
• Programmable without removing switch plate
• Wall plate included
SPECIFICATIONS
Conductor 18AW G wire is recommended for all wiring
BI-LEVEL (MANUAL ON / AUTO ON) SOLUTION
w/ OCCUPA NCY SENSOR: 1 GANG
BI-LEVEL (AUTO-ON / MANUAL ON) SOLUTION
w/ OCCUPA NCY SENSOR: 2 GANG
BLK
RED
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
WHT
BLK/ORN
BLK
WHT
RED
WHT / BLU STRIPE
BLU / WHT STRIPE
RED
BLK
WHT
RED
BLK
NH
sPODM 2P
WHT
WHTBLU
PP20 SP20
MANUAL
ON LOAD
AUTO ON
LOAD
Class 1 Connections
SP20
PP20
BLK
RED
BLU
BLU
BLU
WHT
BLK/ORN
BLK
WHT
RED
WHT / BLU STRIPE
RED
WHT
WHT
WHT / BLU STRIPE
BLK
RED
BLK
WHT
RED
BLK
NH
sPODM
sPODM SA
WHT
Class 1 Connections
AUTO ON
LOAD
BLU
H
MANUA L
ON LOAD
Note: If sensor also has dimming output, connect sensor VIO wire
to SPODM and ballast VIO wire. Lowest output level always takes
precedence.
WHT
BLK RED
BLK
WHT
VIO
WHT / BLU STRIPE
VIO
BLK
REDsPODM SA D
PP20
Class 1 Connections
BLU
BLU
WHTWHT
BLK / ORN
NH
0-10 VDC
BALLAST
GRY
RED
MANUA L ON w/ DIMMING & OCCU PANCY SENSOR
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
sPODM Low voltage sensor interface switch
# of Switches / Default on Operation
(blank) 1 Switch, Auto-On
SA 1 Switch, Manual On
2P 2 Switches (Pole 1 Manual / Pole 2 Auto-On)
Color Finish
AL Light Almond
BK Black
GY Gray
IV Ivory
WH White
WH2PsPODM Example: SPODM-2P-WH Interface Switch, 2 Poles, Manual / Auto-on, White
SPODM
Supply Voltage 12-24 VAC/VDC
Current Draw 5 mA
Dimming load Sinks < 20mA
Operating T
emperature
14 to 160°F (-10 to 71°C)
Operating Humidity 20-90% RH,
non-condensing
Mounting Wall, single gang switch
box
Dimensions 2.74"H x 1.68"W x 1.63"D
(6.96 x 4.27 x 4.14 cm)
Approvals Title 24 compliant
W
eight
0.32 lb (0.15 kg)
Warranty 5 year limited
ACCESSORIES
PP20 POWER PACK, 120/277 VAC fi
LIGHTING CONTROLS
654fi
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

703. Contact Rating 24 VDC
Contact Type Momentary (digital input only)
Life Rating 1,000,000 mechanical operations
Operating Temperature 14° to 160°F (-10° to 71.1°C )
Operating Humidity 20%-95% RH, non-condensing
Color White
Dimensions 4.1" H x 1.5" W x10" D
(10.3 x3.8 x2.5 cm)
Materials Of Construction
Plastic
Weight 0.06 lb (0.03 kg)
Warranty 2 years
LIGHTING OVERRIDE SWITCHES
CLLV-SW
DESCRIPTION
The CLLV-SW lighting override switch is a low voltage input
into a lighting control panel. Each button registers a solid,
audible click when pushed.
FEATURES
• Switc •
Includes white wall plate
• One or two button
• DIgital input
To switch input
To switch input
CLLV-SW2 CLLV-SW1
To switch input
To switch input common
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CLL
V-SW1
1 button, low voltage momentary switch
without wall plate
CLLV-SW2 2 button, low voltage momentary switch
without wall palte
CLLV-SW1P 1 Button, Low voltage momentary switch with
white wall plate
CLLV-SW2P 2 Button, Low voltage momentary switch with
white wall plate
CLLV-SW1 CLLV-SW2fi
655LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

704. Supply Voltage
HS100 24 VAC/VDC Half wave rectified
HS150 120/247/277 VAC, 50/60 Hz Zero
cross
Contact Rating 0-8000W Ballast. Tungsten, 1/4 hp
@ 240/277 VAC, switches at zero
crossing, SPDT
Relay Output 1A/ 30VDC/VSC SPDT Isolated
Egress Time Delay 30 seconds
Color Black, gray, ivory, light almond, white
Dimensions
Card Key (Fob) 3.4"H x 2.1"W x 0.03"D
(8.6 x 5.4 x 0.09 cm)
Casing (WP) 2.6"H x 1.7""W x 1.9"D
(6.8 x 4.3 x 4.8 cm)
Casing (WLP/WPR) 4.7 "H x 6.4"W x 1.9"D
(11.9 x 16.3 x 4.8 cm)
HS100/HS150 2.6"H x 1.7"W x 1.9"D
(6.8 x 4.3 x 4.8 cm)
Approvals UL File E101196
Weight
Card Key (Fob) 0.04 lb (0.02 kg)
Casing (WP) 0.06 lb (0.03 kg)
Casing (WPL/WPR) 0.12 lb ( 0.05 kg)
HS100/HS150 0.3 lb (0.14 kg)
Warranty 5 years
WATTSTOPPER CARD KEY SWITCHES
HS-100, HS-150
DESCRIPTION
The HS Series Card Key Switch turns electrical circuits on or off when a card key or HS-FOB Key Fob is inserted or removed from its slot
. The HS-100 is a low voltage unit with
a normally open and normally closed isolated relay, allowing it to interface with a third party energy management and/or lighting management control system
. Additionally, the HS-100
can connect to one or more Watt Stopper Power Packs. The
HS-150 is a line voltage unit that serves as a master switch for a single guest room circuit
.
FEATURES
• Attractive, low-profile styling
• Choice of five decorator colors
• Backlit card key slot provides visibility in darkened
rooms 30-second egress time delay
• Zero crossing for reliability and increased product
longevity (HS-150)
• Can connect with one or more Watt Stopper
• Power packs mounted remotely (HS-100)
• Uses the same card key that unlocks the door
• More effective compliance with code than a simple
master wall switch, as only the HS card
• Key switch ensures that guests will turn the lights off
when leaving the room
• Compliant with current requirements in both the
• IECC and ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1
• Compatible with building automation systems, energy management systems, and lighting control panels
OPERATION
HS card key switches are ideal for guest rooms in hotels, motels, boarding houses, or similar applications with guest rooms
.
OPERATION
Inserting a door entry card key or HS-FOB into the HS card key switch energizes the controlled circuits and loads
.
Remo
ving the card key initiates a 30-second time delay to
allow a safe egress from the hotel room
. Once this time delay
elapses, the power to the circuits is terminated. To restore
power to the room controlled circuits, reinsert the card key into the HS card key switch
.
SPECIFICATIONS
HS-100/HS-150
Shown with
coverplate HS-WDNEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
656NEW!
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!

705. 4.7
(11.94)
2.63
(6.78)
HS-WP
HS-WPR
6.36
(16.16)
4.7
(11.94)
HS-WPL
4.7
(11.94)
6.36
(16.16)
HS-150
white (Neutral)
white
Neutral
black Hot/Line
white
red*
(Load)
Local
switches
Controlled re ceptacles
inside the room
Lighting
load
Lighting
load
Lighting
load
*When using the Wattstoppers Power Pack do not
exceed its maximum load rating.
GROUND
HS-100 with Power Pack
white (Neutral)
red (Line)
white
Neutral
black
Hot/Line
Power pack
blue
black
red*
(Load)
Local
switches
GND
N.O.
COMM
+24V IN
N.C.
RLY COMM
Relay
Common
Common
N.O.
24V In
red
Controlled re ceptacles
inside the room
Lighting
load
Lighting
load
Lighting
load
*When using the Wattstoppers Power Pack do not
exceed its maximum load rating.
HS-100 with BAS or
Lighting Control Panel
Relay Common
Common
N.O.
+24V In
N.C.
Lighting
control
panel
or other
building
control
system
GND
N.O.
COMM
+24V IN
N.C.
RLY COMM
BZ-50
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
WATTSTOPPER CARD KEY SWITCHES
HS-100, HS-150
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Color Description
HS-100-B Black Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered separately
HS-100-G Gray Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered seperately
HS-100-I Ivory Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered seperately
HS-100-LA Light almond Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered seperately
HS-100-W White Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered seperately
HS-150-B Black Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered seperately
HS-150-G Gray Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered seperately
HS-150-I Ivory Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered seperately
HS-150-LA Light almond Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered seperately
HS-150-W White Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered seperately
HS-FOB-B Black Optional key fob accessory for guest rooms that do not use a card key
HS-FOB-I Ivory Optional key fob accessory for guest rooms that do not use a card key
HS-FOB-LA Light almond Optional key fob accessory for guest rooms that do not use a card key
HS-FOB-W White Optional key fob accessory for guest rooms that do not use a card key
HS-WP-B Black Cover plate for single-gang box
HS-WP-G Gray Cover plate for single-gang box
HS-WP-I Ivory Cover plate for single-gang box
HS-WP-LA Light almond Cover plate for single-gang box
HS-WP-W White Cover plate for single-gang box
HS-WPL-I Ivory Cover plate for three-gang box with decorator switch option; card slot on the left
HS-WPL-LA Light almond Cover plate for three-gang box with decorator switch option; card slot on the left
HS-WPL-W White Cover plate for three-gang box with decorator switch option; card slot on the left
HS-WPR-B Black Cover plate for three-gang box with decorator switch option; card slot on the right
HS-WPR-G Gray Cover plate for three-gang box with decorator switch option; card slot on the right
HS-WPR-I Ivory Cover plate for three-gang box with decorator switch option; card slot on the right
HS-WPR-LA Light almond Cover plate for three-gang box with decorator switch option; card slot on the right
HS-WPR-W White Cover plate for three-gang box with decorator switch option; card slot on the rightNEW!
657LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!

706. Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC @ 50 mA
Input SPST switch or relay
Output Two N.O. pulsed contacts rated for
120 VAC @ 5A
Output Pulse Time 100 ms standard, others availiable
upon request (5 sec max)
Operating Temperature 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing
Dimensions 2.375"H x 3"W x 1.375"D
(6.03 x 7.62 x 3.5 cm)
Weight 0.25 lb (0.12 kg)
Warranty 18 months
KELE PULSE INITIATOR
PIL-1
PIL-1
PULSE OUT
UL L
CMD IN
OFF ON
3
(7.62)
2.38
(6.03)
PUP
PWRCMD
IN
PWR
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The PIL-1 Pulse Initiator is designed to provide pulses to
latch and unlatch mechanically held or magnetically held
lighting contactors (such as the RR-7, RR-9, or TR Series)
from maintained contact outputs
.
FEATURES
• LED indicators:
• Pulse out (unlatch/latch)
• Command in (off/on)
• AC or DC operation
• Selectable power-up (PUP) state
• Snap-track mounted
OPERATION DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
The Model PIL-1 is controlled by a single SPST N.C. or N.O.
s
witch or relay
. Closing the input contact causes the latch
output to close momentar
ily for 100 ms
. Opening the input
contact causes the unlatch output to close momentar
ily for
100 ms
. A power-up feature allows the operator to select
either an immediate pulse out (PUP position), depending on the present command of the controller, or a pulse out only when the controller input changes state
. LEDs indicate
input state and output latch or unlatch pulses. Typical control
signals would be a digital output from a BAS panel, a light or toggle switch, or a contact on a timer
.NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
658NEW!
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!

707. Latch
+
-
24 VAC/VDC
Command
Contact
Unlatch
Power
Command
PULSE OUT
To Lighting
Circuits
CMD IN
OFF ON
UL LPUP
Common
(black)
(blue)
(red)
RR-7 / RR-9
Lighting Contactor
(Up to 10 per PIL-1)
UL L
PWRCMD
IN
PWR
Multiple PIL-1s may be controlled by
the same command contact. Wiring polarity must be observed.
Typical Wiring for Driving
24V Lighting Contactors
WIRING
KELE PULSE INITIATOR
PIL-1
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PIL-1 Pulse initiator
PIL-1-C Pulse initiator with factory-calibrated pulse duration (specify when ordering)
Latch
+ -
24 VAC/VDC
Command Contact
Unlatch
Power
Power
Command
PULSE OUT
CMD IN
OFF ON
UL LPUP
Switch Leg to Latch Circuits
Switch Leg
to Unlatch Circuits
UL L
PWRCMD
IN
PWR
Typical Wiring for Driving
Loads other than 24VNEW!
659LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!

708. Relay Type SPST contacts latching with
man
ual override lever
Short Circuit Current Rating

14,000 Amps @ 277 VAC
Contactor Ballast 30 Amp @ 277 VAC, 20 Amp @
347 VAC
Contactor Tungsten 20 Amp @ 120 VAC
Resistive Load 30 Amp @ 347 VAC
Relay Terminals #10-#14 AWG gauge wire solid or
stranded
Operating Temperature 32°F to 149°F (0°C to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 90% non-condensing
Approvals UL FIle E258542, CSA
Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 Kg)
Warranty 5 years
RELAY 5 WIRE WITH OVERRIDE & CONNECTOR
HDR
DESCRIPTION
This low voltage relay is used for control of lighting circuits and other electrical loads
. Momentary, low voltage pulses
from the light control panel control system switch the relays on or off
. Mechanical latching operation results in a lower
power consumption. The relay will remain in the last switched
state in the event of power loss. A manual override switch
allow lights to be turned on in the event of panel or relay failure
. The relay mounts in a standard knockout and comes
with pluggable cable for easy panel connection.
FEATURES
• Integral manual override
• Suitable for use with all HID ballasted loads
• Expected service life is over 25 years at nominal load
and cycle rate
• 5-pin pluggable connection
Ylw = Isolated pilot contacts
Black = Off wire
Red = On wire
Blue = 24 VDC to center coil
Ylw
Ylw
Black
Red
Blue
Manual override switch
Power terminal connections
Pluggable wire connection
C
C
C
C
C
WIRINGSPECIFICATIONS
HDR
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HDR Mechanically latching relay with 5-pin plug-in connector, pilot contacts, override switch
RELATED PRODUCTS
LIB Series Bacnet lighting panel
RR-BRACKET-4 Optional mounting bracket with 4 1/2" KO fi
LIGHTING CONTROLS
660fi
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

709. Supply Voltage 21-30 VAC (class 2) momentary
30-38 VDC momentary
Relay Type SPST Maintained mechanically
latching, SPST Maintained
mechanical latching
Coil Impedance 75-85Ω @60 Hz unrectified, 55-60Ω
DC resistance
Coil Inrush Current 325 mA @ 24 VAC, 450 mA @ 35
VDC
Contactor Ballast 20A at 277 VAC
Contactor Motor 1/2 hp @ 110-125 VAC, 1/2 hp @
220-277 VAC
Contactor Tungsten 20A filament 125 VAC
Resistive Load 30A at 277 VAC
Pilot Contact 1A, 24 VAC isolated (RR-9 only)
Pulse Rate Minimum activating 50 ms
Lead Length 6" (15 cm)
Wiring Two terminals, two back wiring holes
per terminal for use with 14-10 AWG solid or stranded wire (copper wire only)
Endurance
50,000 cycles, full load 100,000
cycles, no load
Operating Temperature 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 10% to 95% RH noncondensing
Mounting Mounts in standard 1/2" KO in 14 or
16 gauge material
Approvals UL listed File # E18830, CSA
cer
tified
Weight
0.3 lb (0.12 kg)
Warranty 1 year
GE LIGHTING RELAYS
RR-7, RR-9
DESCRIPTION
GE Model RR-7 and RR-9 Lighting Relays are mechanical latching-type units requiring only momentary 24 VAC switch circuit pulses to open or close line voltage circuits
. All GE
lo
w voltage relays may be used to full-rated capacity for
tungsten filament, ballast, or resistive loads
. The Model RR-9
includes an auxiliary contact on the low voltage side for status indication
.
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
RR-7
Optional Bracket
for RR-7/RR-9
and HDR Relay
CAUTION: The coil is designed to resist burnout if continuous voltage is applied, but coil life will be shortened with prolonged, continuous voltage.
1.61
(41)
inches (millimeters)
1.53
(39)
1.41
(36)
1.72
(44)
.91
(23)
.67
(17)
LINE TERMINALS
RR7
—
—
BLACK
RED
BLUE
RR9
YELLOW
YELLOW
BLACK
RED
BLUE
6 .13
(15 .57)
0 .75
(1 .91)
1 .25
(3 .18)
2 .50
(6 .35)
2 .50
(6 .35)
0 .72
(1 .83)
0 .60
(1 .52)
0 .75
(1 .91)
1 .54
(3 .91)
1 .54
(3 .91)
1 .54
(3 .91)
C
L
C
L
C
L
C
L
C
Lfi
661LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

710. NEW!NEW!
Line Load
On Coil
Pilot
Contacts
(maintained
contact)
Power
Contacts
(maintained
contact)
Line
RR-7
RR-9
Load
Armature
Off Coil
20A, 277 VAC
(line contacts)
(blue)
On (red)
Common
(blue)
OFF (black)
Pilot (yellow)
On (red)
Common (blue)
Off (black)
Armature
WIRING
INSTALLATION
The relay employs a split low-voltage coil to move the line voltage contact armature to the on or off latched position. The on coil
moves the armature to the on position when a 24 VAC control signal is impressed across its leads. This is analogous to a magnet
attracting the handle of a standard single-pole switch to the on position when energized. The armature (handle) latches in the on
position and will remain there until the off coil is energized, drawing the armature into the off position.
This control operation provides several key control features:
Positive action
The relay always goes to the state commanded. For example, multiple off commands will simply keep the contacts in the off
position.
Stable operation
Since the relay latches in the on or off position, power outages do not result in a change of state.
Minimal power consumption
Control power is only required when the relay changes state.
Additive control functions
Pulse control signals coupled with latching allow any number of switches or electronic control devices to operate the same relay.
The rela
y position is always dictated by the last signal
.
GE LIGHTING RELAYS
RR-7, RR-9
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RR-7 Three-wire low voltage leads
RR-7-B RR-7 with banana plug connectors
RR-7-T RR-7 with connector
RR-9 Five-wire low voltage leads with isolated pilot auxiliary contact
RR-9-B RR-9 with banana plug connectors
RR-BRACKET-4 Optional mounting bracket with 4 1/2" KOs
Important Restriction
1. Do not use these relays to switch
DC loads. Doing so will damage the power contacts.NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
662NEW!
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

711. The relay with a minimum of 17 millisecond and maximum
of 250 milisecond pulse, by either 24 vac or 24 vdc, will
command the relay on
. The relay will latch and remain on
until the off coil is energized.
This control operation provides several key control features:
Stable operation Since the relay latches in the on or off position, power outages do not result in a change of state
.
Minimal power consumption
Control power is only required when the relay changes state.
DESCRIPTION
ILC Model 2R7CDD and 2R9CDD Lighting Relays are mechanical latching-type units requiring only a momentary 24 VDC or VDC switch circuit pulses to open or close line voltage circuits
. All ILC low voltage relays may be used to
full rated capacity for ballast or resistive loads. The Model
2R9CDD includes an auxillary contact on the low voltage side for status indication
.
ILC LIGHTING RELAYS
2R7CDD, 2R9CDD
Supply Voltage 18-30 VAC momentary, 12-24 VDC
momentary
Relay Type SPST Maintained mechanically
latching
Coil Impedance 68-73 Ω, 50-60 Ω DC resistance
Coil Inrush Current 350 mA @ 24 VDC
Contactor Ballast 20 A @ 347 VAC
Contactor Motor 1 hp @ 120 VAC
Resistive Load 20 A @ 347 VAC
Pilot Contact 1 A, 30 VAC/VDC (2R9CDD only)
Pulse Rate Minimum activing 17 ms, maximum
250 ms
Lead Length 6" (15 cm)
Wiring Two terminals, use with 14-10 AWG
solid or stranded (copper wire only), wo terminals, use with 14-10 AWG solid or stranded (copper wire only)
Operating Temperature
32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 10% to 90% RH noncondensing
Mounting Mounts in standard 1/2" KO
Approvals UL File E66211, FCC
Weight 1.0 lb (2.2 kg)
Warranty 3 years
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
2R7CDD Three-wire low voltage leads
2R9CDD Five-wire low voltage leads with isolated pilot auxiliary contact
2R9CDD
Optional RR-Bracket-4
for 2R7CDD and
2R9CDD Relay
DIMENSIONS
2.1 (5.3)
1.5
(3.8)
1.8
(4.6)
.52
(1.3)
TOP FRONT
LINE
LOAD
SIDE
2R7CDD 2R7CDD
Orange Pilot
Orange Pilot
Black Black Off
Red Red On
Blue Blue Common
INSTALLATION
NEW!NEW!NEW!
663LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

712. Frequency 50/60 Hz
Coil Bur
den
50 VA inrush, 2.2 VA Holding
Coil Voltage 24 to 60 VAC, 100 to 500 VAC/VDC
Contactor Type Four (N.O. or N.C) Electrically held
Contactor Current 30A tungsten,
ballast or general purpose
Contactor Voltage Max 347 VAC, 1-phase, per pole;
Max 600 VAC, 3 phase,
break all lines
Wiring 16-10 AWG copper solid or
stranded 75°C, max two wires
per terminal
Mounting Surface or DIN rail
Approvals cULus Listed, File E319322, CE,
RoHS compliant
Weight 0.69 lb (0.31 kg)
Warranty 1 year
A1 O A2
L1 L2 L3 L4
T1 T2 T3 T4
Four-pole N.O.
Contactor
A1 O A2
1R 3R57
2R 4R68
2 N.O. + 2 N.C.
Contactor
ABB LIGHTING CONTACTORS
AF16 SERIES
45 1.77"
80 3.15"
6 0.24"
77 3.03"
71 2.80"
5.5 0.22"
35 mm
EN/IEC 60715
10 0.39"
5.5 0.22"
35 1.38 "
70 2.76"
60 2.36"
5 0.20"
5 0.20 "
ø 4.2 0.17"
2 x
M4 8-32 UNC
60 2.36"
AF16 AF16
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
AF16-40
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AF16-22-00-14 2 N.O. + 2 N.C., 30A contactor, 250-500 VAC/VDC coil
AF16-22-00-41 2 N.O. + 2 N.C., 30A contactor, 24-60 VAC coil
AF16-22-00-13 2 N.O. + 2 N.C., 30A contactor, 100-250 VAC/VDC coil
AF16-40-00-14 4 N.O., 30A contactor, 250-500 VAC/VDC coil
AF16-40-00-41 4 N.O., 30A contactor, 24-60 VAC coil
AF16-40-00-13 4 N.O., 30A contactor, 100-250 VAC/VDC coil
DESCRIPTION
AF16 Series lighting contactors are electrically-held four-pole
contactors available with normally closed or normally open contacts.
The contacts are r
ated for 30A general purpose, ballast and
tungsten
. Compact size, surface or DIN rail mounting, and a unique
detachable coil interface make installation simple. Normally closed
contacts ensure the lights stay on if the control circuit fails.
FEATURES
• Up to four single-phase loads per contactor
• 277 VAC and 347 VAC in a single coil
• Electronic coils eliminate chatter and hum
• Integral coil surge suppression
• Four normally open (N.O.) or combo two normally open
(N.O.) & two normally closed (N.C.) stylesNEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
664NEW!
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!NEW!

713. fi 665LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Coil Burden 45 VA inrush, 6 VA Holding
Coil Voltage 24 VAC, 120 VAC or 277 VAC
Contact Type Four (N.O. or N.C.)
Electronically Held
Contactor Ballast 30 A @ 600 VAC
Contactor Tungsten 20A at 277 VAC
Wiring 14-10 AWG 75°C copper only
Mounting Surface or DIN rail
Approvals UL listed File #E76233, CE
Weight 0.66 lb (0.3 kg)
Warranty 1 year
1.77
(4.50)
LS7K-04-A/G
LS7K-40-A/G
3.18
(8.1)
3.35
(8.5)
R8
R7R5R1 R3
R2 R4R6 R8
R7R5R1 R3
R2 R4R6
Four-poleN .C.
Contactor
Four-pole N.O.
Contactor
A2A1 A2A1
DESCRIPTION
The LS7K Series Lighting Contactors are electrically held
and are available in four-pole normally closed or normally
open configurations
. The 30 amp contacts are fully rated for
general purpose and ballast lighting loads. Compact size and
two mounting methods make installation easy, and use of the normally-closed style may eliminate the need for a more expensive latching contactor to keep lights on should the control circuit fail
.
FEATURES
• DIN or surface mounting
• Easy parts replacement
• Normally closed (N.C.) or normally-open (N.O.) four- pole style
NOTE: Electrically held contactors and starters can emit a humming noise when the coil is energized
.
DIMENSIONSDIMENSIONS
AEG LIGHTING CONTACTORS
LS7K SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
LS7K-04
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LS7K-04-A Four-pole, N.C., 30A contactor, 120 VAC coil
LS7K-04-G Four-pole, N.C., 30A contactor, 24 VAC coil
LS7K-40-A Four-pole, N.O., 30A contactor, 120 VAC coil
LS7K-40-G Four-pole, N.O., 30A contactor, 24 VAC coil
LS7K-04-H Four-pole, N.C., 30A contactor, 277 VAC coil
LS7K-40-H Four-pole, N.O., 30A contactor, 277 VAC coil

714. Supply Voltage 120/277 VAC; 60 Hz
Contactor Ballast 10A @ 120 VAC; 10A @ 277 VAC
Contactor Motor 1HP @ 120 VAC maximum load
Contactor Tungsten 2A @ 120 VAC maximum load
Activation Supplies 24 VDC source for dry
contact closure
Test Control Push-to-test button on unit
Dimensions 2.78"H x 3.44"W x 2.63"D
(7.1 x 8.7 x 6.7 cm)
Housing Type Fire rated V-0, 80°C
Approvals UL 924 listed, file #E302768
Meets NFPA, OSHA, and NEC safety codes
Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Warranty 5 years
APPLICATION
The ELCU is designed to control lighting in areas where emergency lighting fixtures are connected to dedicated circuits that are typically on 24 hours per day
. The ELCU
allows normal control of emergency lighting for energy savings and/or task related reasons while strictly adhering to National Electric Code requirements
. It is suitable for any
application where enhanced energy saving is desired.
SPECIFICATIONSfi
LIGHTING CONTROLS
666fi
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
WATTSTOPPER EMERGENCY LIGHTING CONTROL
ELCU-100
DESCRIPTION
Watt Stopper/Legrand's Emergency Lighting Control Unit ELCU-100 is a self-contained, reliable, easy-to-install device
.
The
ELCU provides all required functionality to allow any
standard lighting control device to control emergency lighting in conjunction with normal lighting in any area within a building
.
FEATURES
• Eliminates energy waste caused by "always ON"
emergency lighting
• Integral push-to-test button activates emergency mode
for a true test condition
• Connects to remote test switch or other input to
activate emergency ON from a remote location
• Operates as a control device or as a shunt
• Senses local single circuit power failure
• Zero-crossing switching relay technology
®
MOUNTING
The ELCU is equipped with an integral DIN rail mounting groove and retaining clip mechanism
. It can be installed on
the DIN r
ail track provided within a WattStopper enclosure
(e
.g., LS-E8, LSE12), or in a WattStopper lighting control
panel.
OPERATION
The ELCU monitors a single circuit that provides normal lighting to an area
. As long as normal power is present,
the ELCU permits lighting control devices (i.e., occupancy
sensors, panels, dimmers, or wall switches) to control the emergency lighting fixtures as well as the general lighting
. If
po
wer is lost for any reason, including the tripping of a single
branch circuit breaker, the ELCU will force the emergency fixtures for that area on. The ELCU can be wired either as a
control device, so that emergency lighting follows the control of normal lighting, or as a bypass device to shunt emergency power around a control device when normal power fails
.
• LED indication for emergency and normal power
• Half-second delayed ON positively identifies emergency
• Provides absolute fail-to-on emergency lighting

715. ELCU-100
Emergency
Power
Emergency Line
Emergency Line
Normal Neutral
Emergency Neutral
Line
Out
Line
In
Normal
Power
“Sensing”
Line
“Switching”
Line
Jumper Wire or Normally
Closed Input from
Test Switch
Fire Alarm Input
Security Input
Other
Neutral Switch
In
Remote
In
Remote
Out
+24 VDC
Line
In
Neutral
Emergency
Lighting
ELCU-100
Emergency
Power
Line
Out
Line
In
Nor mal
Power
Neut. Switch
In
Remote
In
Remote Out
+24 VDC
Line
In
Neut
ON/OFF
Control
Device
Normal
Lighting
ELCU-100
Emergency
Power
Emergency Line
Emergency Line
Wired as a control device Wired as a shunt
Normal Neutral
Emergency Neutral
Line
Out
Line
In
Normal
Power
“Sensing”
Line
Jumper Wire or Normally
Closed Input from
Test Switch
Fire Alarm Input
Security Input
Other
Neutral Switch
In
Remote
In
Remote
Out
+24 VDC
Line
In
Neutral
Emergency
Lighting
Dimmer
Dimmer
Normal
Lighting
When wired as a control device, the ECLU receives a switching signal
from the output of the control device (relay, switch, power pack, etc.)
When wired as a shunt, the switching line is not used.
Note: Use with WattStopper universal dimmers or contact dimmer
manufacturer to determine the suitability of the specified dimmer for
shunt operation.
Normal
Control
Device
Normal Lighting
Emergency
Lighting
Emergency ON
Emergency Po wer
Normal Po wer
Normal Po wer
Sense
Normal ON/OFF
Normal ON/OFF
Normal Switching Signal
ELCU-100
Emergency
Power
Line
Out
Line
In
Nor mal
Power
Neut. Switch
In
Remote
In
Remote Out
+24 VDC
Line
In
Neut
Emergency
Lighting
Emergency ON
Emergency
Power
Normal Po wer
Normal Po wer Sense
Normal Control
Control
Device
WIRING
WATTSTOPPER EMERGENCY LIGHTING CONTROL
ELCU-100
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ELCU-100 Emergency lighting control unit, 120/277 VAC 60 Hz
ACCESSORIES
EMTS-100 Remote test switch on single gang plate, 24 VDC, normally closed contact
LS-E12 Surface mount enclosure for up to 6 ECLU units, includes screw cover and DIN rail
LS-E8 Surface mount enclosure for 1 or 2 ECLU units, includes screw cover and DIN rail
667LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

716. Supply Voltage 120/277 VAC
Supply Frequency 60 Hz
Maximum Load
Ballast 20A @ 120/277 VAC
Incandescent 10A @ 120 VAC
Motor 1HP @ 120 VAC
Activation Supplies 24 VDC source for dry
contact closure. Push-to-test button
on unit.
Operating Temperature 32° to 131°F (0° to 55°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95%, noncondensing
Dimensions 1.7"H x 2.97"W x 1.64"D
(43.2mm x 75.4mm x 41.7mm)
with a
1
/
2
"
(12.7mm) threaded nipple
Housing Type Fire rated V-0, 176°F (80°C)
Approvals UL Listed, cUL listed for Emergency
Lighting and Power, E302768 Meets
NEC, OSHA, and NFPA safety
codes; UL 2043 plenum rated
Weight
0.44 lb (0.2 kg)
Warranty 5 years
EMERGENCY UL924 BYPASS/ SHUNT RELAYS
ELCU-200
DESCRIPTION
The ELCU-200 Emergency Lighting Control Unit is a self- contained device that allows any standard lighting control device to control emergency lighting in conjunction with normal lighting in any area within a building
. If power is lost
for any reason, including the tripping of a single branch circuit breaker, the ELCU-200 will force on the emergency fixtures for that area
. The ELCU-200 can be wired either as a control
device, so that emergency lighting follows the control of normal lighting, or as a bypass device to shunt emergency power around a control device (e
.g., a dimmer) when normal
power fails.
FEATURES
• Eliminates energy waste caused by emergency lighting
that is always on
• Integral push-to-test button activates emergency mode
for a true test condition
• Connects to EMTS-100 Remote Test Switch or other
input to activate emergency on from a remote location
• Operates as a control device or as a shunt
• Senses local single circuit power failure
• Zero cross switching technology for reliability and
increased product life
• Compatible with WattStopper occupancy sensors,
daylighting controls, lighting control panels, and dimmers
•
LED indication for emergency and normal power
• Half-second delayed on positively identifies emergency
fixtures for required maintenance
• Provides absolute fail-to-on emergency lighting
• Qualifies for use on ARRA-funded projects
SPECIFICATIONS
ELCU-200fi
LIGHTING CONTROLS
668fi
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

717. WIRING
EMERGENCY UL924 BYPASS/ SHUNT RELAYS
ELCU-200
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ELCU-200 Emergency Lighting Control Unit
ELCU-200-U Emergency Lighting Control unit, ARRA- compliant
Emergency
Power Out
09860r1
Cir.#_______
Emergenc y
Power
Remote
Activation
Normal
Power
Push to Test
R8.5
mm
Circle
CUT-OUT
EMERGENCY CIRCUIT
Normal Line
Normal Neutral
Cut Jumper Loop
to use with
normally closed
- Test switch
- Fire alarm panel
- Security panel
- Other
Emergency
Power In
Emergency
Neutral
Normal
Neutral
Dimmer
Normal
Lighting
Emergency Neutral
Emergency
Lighting
Dimmer
Cap
Emergency Line
“Always On”
Normal Switch Sense
Normal
Power Sense
Wiring for a Shunt or Bypass Device
When wired as a shunt, the switching line is not used.
Note: Use with WattStopper universal dimmers or contact dimmer manufacturer to
determine the suitablity of the specified dimmer for shunt operation.
Wiring for a Control Device
09860r1
Cir.#_______
Emergenc y
Power
Remote
Activation
Normal
Power
Push to Test
R8.5
mm
Circle
CUT-OUT
EMERGENCY CIRCUIT
Normal Line
Normal Neutral
Cut Jumper Loop
to use with
normally closed
- Test switch
- Fire alarm panel
- Security panel
- Other
Emergency
Power In
Emergency
Neutral
Emergency
Power Out
Normal
Neutral
Normal
Switch Sens
e
Normal
Power Sense
Control
Device
Normal
Lighting
Emergency Line
“Always On”
Emergency Neutral
Emergency
Lighting
When wired as a control device, the ELCU-200 receives a switching signal
from the output of the control device (relay, switch, power pack, etc.)
ACCESSORIES
EMTS-100 Remote test switch on single gang plate, 24 VDC, normally closed contactfi
669LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

718. Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC, 120 VAC, 208-277 VAC
Relay Life 10 million cycles minimum
mechanical
Coil Continuous duty
Frequency 50 - 60 Hz
Operate Time 18-20 ms
Operating Temperature -30° to 140°F (-34° to 60°C)
Enclosure Rating Plenum, NEMA 1
LED Indication Relay status LED, on = activated
Dimensions
Size A: 2.3" x 3.2" x 1.8" (5.8 x 8.1 x 4.6 cm)
Size B: 4" x 4" x 1.8" (10.2 x 10.2 x 4.6 cm)
Size J: 1.7" x 2.8" x 1.5" (4.3 x 7.1 x 3.8 cm)
Size M: 1.6" x 4" x 1.8" (4.1 x 10.2 x 4.6 cm)
Size N: 1.7" x 2.8" x 1.80" (4.3 x 7.1 x 4.6 cm)
Size O: 1.3" x 4" x 1.80" (3.3 x10.2 x 4.6 cm)
Approvals UL Listed, UL924, C-UL, CE
Warranty 5 year
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES EMERGENCY BYPASS / SHUNT RELAYS
ESR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
These ESR Series UL924 Emergency Lighting
Shunt Relays, or Bypass Relays, are designed
for applications that require an emergency load,
such as exit lighting or any other emergency
lighting, to be switched on during a loss of normal
power
. The economically priced relays are available
prepackaged in their own Nema 1 enclosure or in panel versions to be installed inside an existing enclosure
. Emergency lighting relays can be ordered
with a standard two-position on/auto override switch.
The override switch models can be used for testing
purposes to verify your emergency load is being switched properly
.
SPECIFICATIONS
ESRU1C
APPLICATION
When normal power is present, the ESR relay coil is activated and the emergency panel is fed from normal power
. The lighting load can be switched on/off using
an individual wall switch.
When normal power drops out, the ESR coil is
deactivated and N/C contact falls closed. The
automatic transfer switch changes over to backup (generator) power, and the lighting load is illuminated regardless of the position of the wall switch
.
Models that have override test switches are set in the
auto position from the factory. This allows emergency
power to be switched to the load. To test field wiring
connections at the time of installation, the override test switch should be changed to the "closed" position (illuminating emergency lighting), and then placed back to the "auto" position
. The red LED shows the
normal utility power is connected correctly.
WIRING
Normal
Power
Transfer
Switch
Emergency
Power
ie. Generator/
Battery Backup
Normal
Circuit
Breaker
Panel
Emergency
Circuit
Breaker
Panel
Wht/Blk
Wht/Yel
Hot
Neutral
Hot Blu Yel
Neutral
Light
Switch
ESRU1C
Emergency
Lighting
EXAMPLE WIRING FOR ESRU1Cfi
LIGHTING CONTROLS
670fi
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

719. HIGH VAC
LOW
VAC/VDC
Common
N.C.
Common
N.O.
HIGH VAC
Common
CLOSED
AUTO
LOW
VAC/VDC
Not
used
Selectable jumper wire
HIGH VAC
LOW
VAC/VDC
Common
Org
Org
CLOSED AUTO
Typical of ESRM2402SB Typical of ESR1S-NC, 2401SB-NC,
2402SB-NC, RU1S-NC
Typical of ESR2402B, U1C, H1C, 2401B,
MU1C, MNU1C, 2402B
N/C
Comm
N/O LOW
VAC/DC
HIGH VAC
Comm
N/C
Comm
N/O
Typical of ESRM2402B
LOW VAC/DC
Comm
Comm
N/O
N/C
HIGH VAC
Typical of ESR01P, 02P, 24P
Color Coding Of Wires
White/Yellow Common Coil
White/Blue 24 VAC/VDC Coil
White/Black 120 VAC Coil
White/Brown 208-277 VAC Coil
Blue Normally Closed Contact
Yellow Common Contact
Orange Normally Open Contact
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES UL924 EMERGENCY BYPASS / SHUNT RELAYS
ESR SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
WIRING
Model
Coil
Voltage
Relay
Type
Resistive
Load
Contactor
Ballast
Coil
Current
OverrideWeight Size
ESRU1C
10-30 VAC/ VDC;
120 VAC
SPDT
10A @ 120-277
VAC, 28 VDC
480 VA @ 277
24 VAC-46 mA, 24 VDC-18
mA, 120 VAC-28 mA
0.4 lb (0.2 kg)J
ESRU1S-NC
10-30 VAC/ VDC;
120 VAC
SPST-NC10A @ 277 VAC480 VA @ 277
24 VAC-46 mA, 24 VDC-18
mA, 120 VAC-28 mA
Yes0.5 lb ( 0.22 kg)A
ESRH1C
10-30 VAC/ VDC;
208-277 VAC
SPDT
10A @ 120-277
VAC
480 VA @ 277
24 VAC-46 mA, 24 VDC-18
mA, 208-277 VAC-39 mA
0.4 lb (0.2 kg)J
ESRH1S-NC
10-30 VAC/ VDC;
208-277 VAC
SPST-NC10A @ 277 VAC
10A @
120/277
24 VAC-46 mA, 24 VDC-18
mA, 208-277 VAC-39 mA
Yes0.5 lb ( 0.22 kg)A
ESR2401B
24 VAC/ VDC;
120 VAC
SPDT20A @ 277 VAC
10A @
120/277
24 VAC-83 mA, 24 VDC-35
mA, 120 VAC-47 mA
0.5 lb ( 0.22 kg)A
ESR2401SB-NC
24 VAC/ VDC;
120 VAC
SPST-NC20A @ 277 VAC
10A @
120/277
24 VAC-83 mA, 24 VDC-35
mA, 120 VAC-47 mA
Yes0.5 lb ( 0.22 kg)A
ESR2402B
24 VAC/ VDC;
208-277 VAC
SPDT20A @ 277 VAC
10A @
120/277
24 VAC-83 mA, 24 VDC-35
mA, 208-277 VAC-69 mA
0.5 lb ( 0.22 kg)A
ESR2402SB-NC
24 VAC/ VDC;
208-277 VAC
SPST-NC20A @ 277 VAC
10A @
120/277
24 VAC-83 mA, 24 VDC-35
mA, 208-277 VAC-69 mA
Yes0.5 lb ( 0.22 kg)A
ESR24P 24 VAC/ VDCDPDT
20A @300 VAC,
28 VDC
20A @ 277-
480
24 VAC-138 mA, 24 VDC-55
mA
1 lb (0.5 kg)B
ESR01P 120 VAC DPDT
20A @300 VAC,
28 VDC
20A @ 277-
480
120 VAC-105 mA 0.5 lb ( 0.22 kg)B
ESR02P 208-277 VACDPDT
20A @300 VAC,
28 VDC
20A @ 277-
480
208-277 VAC-105 mA 1 lb (0.5 kg)B
ESRMU1C
10-30 VAC/ VDC;
120 VAC
SPDT
15A @ 150
VAC, 28 VDC
480 VA @ 277
24 VAC-46 mA, 24 VDC-18
mA, 120 VAC-28 mA
0.2 lb (0.09 kg)O
ESRMNU1C
10-30 VAC/ VDC;
120 VAC
SPDT
15A @ 150
VAC, 28 VDC
480 VA @ 277
24 VAC-46 mA, 24 VDC-18
mA, 120 VAC-28 mA
0.2 lb (0.09 kg)N
ESRM2402B
24 VAC/ VDC;
208-277 VAC
SPDT20A @ 277 VAC
10A @
120/277
24 VAC-83 mA, 24 VDC-35
mA, 208-277 VAC-69 mA
0.2 lb (0.09 kg)M
ESRM2402SB
24 VAC/ VDC;
208-277 VAC
SPST 20A @ 277 VAC
10A @
120/277
24 VAC-83 mA, 24 VDC-35
mA, 208-277 VAC-69 mA
Yes0.2 lb (0.09 kg)O
671LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

720. Supply Voltage 24 VAC @ 250 mA±10%
Input Impedance 50 kΩ
Input Signal 0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC, or PWM
(Adjustable 0.1 to 25.6 seconds)
Output 0-10 VDC, sinking, 0.50 amp max
load
Wiring Terminations Removable terminal block
Manual Override 40% to 100% (adjustable)
Dip Switches 8 postition
Feedback Two 4-20 mA (setpoint and output)
Operating Temperature 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing
Warranty 2 years
KELE FLUORESCENT DIMMING CONTROL MODULE
LDIM2
DESCRIPTION
The Model LDIM2 is a fluorescent dimming control for
dimmable electronic ballasts. It is designed for single 0-10V
output with a 0-10V input or a PWM input. Feedback is
provided for light level setpointand light level output. It is an
energy sa
ving, low cost device that is easily installed
. The
LDIM2 requires dimmable ballasts designed for an analog 0-10V input
.
FEATURES
• For controlling 0-10 VDC electronically dimmable
ballasts
• 0.5 amp output capacity
• Fused output
• 0-10 VDC light level setpoint
• 24 VAC/VDC PWM light level setpoint
• 4-20 mA light level setpoint feedback
• 4-20 mA light level output feedback
• 24 VAC power
• Status LED
• Light output electrically isolated from automation
system signals
• Fail-safe feature sets output to full-bright if input signal
is lost
• Manual override of setpoint input
• 3.25" x 6.00" snap-track mount
GREEN STATUS LED OPERATION
Solid Off (No Power) Indicates that 24VAC power is missing
. Any time power is
applied, the LED should not be solid off.
Solid On (Normal) The LED is solid on f
or:
Analog input, no override, no PWM pulse present, not in Lost Analog Input state
.
PWM input, no override, no PWM pulse present, not in Lost
PWM state.
Blink-Blink-Pause (Override)
This occurs when the board is in Override state and no PWM pulse is present
.
Blink-Blink-Blink-Pause (Lost PWM or Lost Analog Input)
This occurs in the PWM state, no override, when a pulse has not been received for 10 seconds (i
.e.,Lost PWM state). This
occurs in the analog input state, no override, no PWM pulse present, when the input value drops below 0
.3 volts (i.e., Lost
Analog Input state). The input value must rise above 0.5V to
return to normal operation.
Rapid Blink (PWM Pulse Active) An
y time a PWM pulse is active, the Status LED will blink
rapidly. This is true even in the analog input and override
modes. The rationale for this is that you may have the board in
the analog input or override mode because there is a problem with the pulses coming from the controller, and this way you can visually tell when the pulses have been restored
. The
PWM pulse does not affect the output in the analog input and override modes, just the Status LED
.
SPECIFICATIONS
“LDIM” Light Dimmer
DIP Switch Assignments
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
PWM Input 0
Analog Input 1
Go 100% Bright On Signal Loss
0
Maintain Current Brightness On Signal Loss
1
No Manual Override 000
Manual Override 40% 001
Manual Override 50% 010
Manual Override 60% 011
Manual Override 70% 100
Manual Override 80% 101
Manual Override 90% 110
Manual Override 100% 11 1
PWM Timebase, 0.59-2.93 sec (SW1 = Off) 00
0.1-2.65 sec Timebase 01
0.1-5.2 sec Timebase 10
0.1-12.85 sec Timebase 11
0.1-25.6 sec Timebase 00
0
0
0
0
1
Analog Input Range (SW1 = On)
0
0-10V 00
2-10V 010
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS (0 = OFF, 1 = ON)NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
672NEW!
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!NEW!NEW!NEW!

721. Powering Both mA Feedback Signals with External 24 VDC Loop Supply
LDIM2
Setpoint PWM Input
+
–
24
VDC
24
VAC
24 VDC Po wer
Light Output Feedback (4-20 mA)
Setpoint Fe edback
(4-20 mA)
Setpoint PWM Input
24 VDC Loop Po wer IN
Light Output Fe edback mA
Setpoint Fe edback mA
0-10V Setpoint Input
24 VAC Power
Common
Jumpers
EXT
FBK
PWR
SPT
INT
OUT
EXT
+
–
Automation
mA Input
+
–
Automation
mA Input
0-10V Dimmable
Electronic Ballast
24 VAC V OUT
Power Supply
Transformer
+
–
0-10V / 2-10V
Light Level Setpoint
from
Automation System
V
IN
SIG
GND
0-10V Dimmable
Electronic Ballast
0-10V / 2-10V Analog Setpoint Signal from Au tomation System
(Feedback circuits not shown)
LDIM2
Setpoint PWM Input
Setpoint PWM Input
24 VDC Loop Power IN
Light Output Feedback mA
Setpoint Feedback mA
0-10V Setpoint Input
24 VAC Power
Common
+
–
To dimming ballast
0.5A max
Electrical Isolation
SIG
GND
0-10V Dimmable
Electronic Ballast
24 VAC V out
Power Supply
Transformer
V
in
SIG GND
0-10V Dimmable
Electronic Ballast
Pulse-Width Setpoint Input Using Board’s Po wer Supply
(Feedback circuits not shown)
LDIM2
Setpoint PWM Input
Setpoint PWM Input
24 VDC Loop Po wer IN
Light Output Feedback mA
Setpoint Feedback mA
PWM Input is isolated and
polarity insensitive
Automation System
PWM Contacts
0-10V Setpoint Input
24 VAC Power
Common
+
–
To dimming ballast
0.5A max
Electrical Isolation
SIG
GND
0-10V Dimmable
Electronic Ballast
24 VAC V out
Power Supply
Transformer
V
in
SIG GND
0-10V Dimmable
Electronic Ballast
Pulse-Width Setpoint Input Using Independent Power Supply
(Feedback circuits not shown)
LDIM2
Setpoint PWM Input
Setpoint PWM Input
24 VDC Loop Power IN
Light Output Feedback mA
Setpoint Feedback mA
PWM Input is isolated and
polarity insensitive
Automation System
PWM Contacts
Independent
Power Supply
24 VAC or VDC
0-10V Setpoint Input
24 VAC Power
Common
+
–
To dimming ballast
0.5A max
Electrical Isolation
SIG
GND
Powering Single mA Feedback Signal Internally from LDIM2
LDIM2
Setpoint PWM Input
24
VAC
Light Output Feedback (4-20 mA)
Setpoint Feedback
(4-20 mA)
Setpoint PWM Input
24 VDC Loop Po wer IN
Light Output Feedback mA
Setpoint Feedback mA
0-10V Setpoint Input
24 VAC Power
Common
Jumpers
EXT
FBK
PWR
Choose
one
output
SPT
INT
OUT
EXT
+
–
Automation
mA Input
Either mA output
may be powered internally,
but not both
+
–
Automation
mA Input
Powering One mA Feedback Signal with External 24 VDC Loop Supply
and One mA Feedback Signal Internally from LDIM2
Testing LDIM2 Output Without Lighting Ballast(s) Attached
LDIM2
Setpoint PWM Input
+
–
24
VDC
24
VAC
24 VDC Po wer
Light Output Feedback (4-20 mA)
Setpoint Fe edback
(4-20 mA)
Setpoint PWM Input
24 VDC Loop Po wer IN
Light Output Fe edback mA
Setpoint Feedback mA
0-10V Setpoint Input
24 VAC Power
Common
Jumpers
EXT
FBK
PWR
Setpoint fe edback powered
by external supply
Either output can
be powered
from either source
Output fe edback powered
by internal supply
SPT
INT
OUT
EXT
+
–
Automation
mA Input
+
–
Automation
mA Input
Light
Output
Voltmeter
+24 VDC
2.7K-10K
Resistor
LDIM2
+
–
+
–
24 VDC–
WIRING
KELE FLUORESCENT DIMMING CONTROL MODULE
LDIM2
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LDIM2 Fluorescent dimming controlNEW!
673LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!NEW!

722. Supply Voltage 120–277 VAC, 27 watts
Supply Frequency 50/60 Hz
Contact Resistance 20A (NO), 10A (NC) @ 12-240
V
AC, 28 VDC
Contactor Ballast
20A (NO), 3A (NC) @ 120-277 VAC
Contactor Motor 1 hp @ 120 VAC, 2 hp @ 240 VAC
470 VA pilot duty @ 12-240 VAC
Contactor Tungsten 5A (NO) @ 12-240 VAC
Relay Output SPDT contacts
Channels One, Two
Operating Temperature -40°F to 120°F (-40°C to 50°C)
Dimensions
NEMA 1 7.88"H x 5.0"W x 3.0"D
(20 x 12.7 x 7.6 cm)
NEMA 3R 9.88"H x 5.6"W x 3.6"D
(25.1 x 14.3 x 9.2 cm)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1, NEMA 3R
Approvals CSA certified
Weight
NEMA 1 2.5 lb (1.1 kg)
NEMA 3R 3.4 lb (1.5 kg)
Warranty 1 year
ELECTRONIC TIME CLOCKS
ET SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Models ET90115C/CR and ET90215C/CR are one- and
two-channel electronic time clocks that provide simple,
inexpensive control of lighting, HVAC equipment, commercial
ovens, fans, blowers and pumps or any electrical load with
a time-of-day schedule
. These microprocessor-controlled
models offer the ultimate in control and application flexibility.
A simple k
eypad combined with a large backlit menu based
display make models ET90115C/CR and ET90215C/CR easy to program.
FEATURES
• 24 hour •
Automatically adjust for daylight savings time
• Holiday programming (up to 99 schedules)
• Lifetime memory for program data with 4000+ events
• Power loss back up of 100 hours
• Remote override option
• One- and Two-circuit models
• Large backlit menu based display and simple keyboard
• Auto review for easy programming review, with help
message for omissions
• Available in NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R (lockable enclosures
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
ET Series
NO-2NC-2NO-1NC-1INAC
T
COM1 COM2
TIMER
Circuit #1 Circuit #2 *
*Model-specific
Neutral
Hot
120/277 VAC
{
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ET90115C Single-channel time clock, 120 VAC, NEMA 1
ET90115CR Single-channel time clock, 120 VAC, NEMA 3R
ET90215C Two-channel time clock, 120 VAC, NEMA 1
ET79215CR Two-channel time clock, 120 VAC, NEMA 3RNEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
674NEW!
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!NEW!

723. Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC, 120V, 240 V
Supply VA 4.4 VA max
Supply Frequency 50/60 Hz
Battery Three year battery life
Connection Type Screw terminals, 12 AWG maximum
Contactor Ballast (NO) 8A @ 240 VAC, 12A @120 VAC
Contactor Motor (NO) 1/2 hp, 120 VAC; 1 hp, 240 VAC;
(NC) 360 VA @ 120 VAC
Contactor Tungsten (NO) 1000W @ 240 VAC, 600W @120
VAC
Resistive Load (NC) 16A @ 277 VAC
Relay Output SPDT
Accuracy ±4 minutes per year
Shortest Switch Time 1 minute
Operating Temperature -13° to 131°F (-25° to 55°C)
Enclosure Plastic with terminal cover
Dimensions
1 Channel 2.4"H x 2.4"W x 2.3"D
(6.0 x 6.0 x 5.8 cm)
2 Channel 4"H x 2.8"W x 2.3"D
(10.2 x 7.2 x 5.8 cm)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 3R
Approvals UL recognized component, file E10694;
CE certified
Weight 0.5 lb ( 0.23 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The FM1D50 Series Electronic Time Clocks are compact
time controls providing 24-hour or 7-day time-based switching
of HVAC control circuits, lighting, or machinery
. The FM1D50
is a single-circuit control and the FM2D50 is a two-circuit control
. They utilize heavy-duty, 16A, SPDT relay contacts
suitable for low- or line- voltage loads.
FEATURES
• 24-hour or 7-day programming with easy 4-button interface
• 50 programs and 20 program models
• 24 VAC or 120 VAC models
• Automatic daylight time changeover
• Large LCD display of day, time, and load status
• Manual override of each circuit
• Eighth-day holiday programming
• UL recognized, CE certified
1
M
M
N.O.
N.O. N.C. N.C.N.O.
Input
Power
Input
Power
FM1D50A FM2D50
Isolated Contacts
Output
Isolated Contacts
Output
Circuit 1 Circuit 2
Note: Screw terminals accept up to #12 AW G wire
Note: Screw terminals accept up to #12 AW G wire
N.C.
23 45
12 345678
WIRING
ELECTRONIC TIME CLOCKS
FM_D SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
FM1D50A-120
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Supply Voltage Channels Mounting Additional Specifications
FM1D20A-24 24 VAC/VDC 1 Surface/ DIN rail 20 programs
FM1D20A-120 120V 1 Surface/ DIN rail 20 programs
FM1D20A-240 240 V 1 Surface/ DIN rail 20 programs
FM1D50A-24 24 VAC/VDC 1 Surface/ DIN rail 50 programs
FM1D50A-120 120V 1 Surface/ DIN rail 50 programs
FM1D50E-24 24 VAC/VDC 1 Flush 50 programs
FM2D50-24 24 VAC/VDC 2 Surface/ DIN rail 50 programs
FM2D50-120 120V 2 Surface/ DIN rail 50 programsNEW!
675LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!NEW!

724. MARKTIME FAN LIGHT TIME SWITCH
42000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
42000 Series In-Wall Timers are perfect for automatic shut-
off control of ventilation in high humidity areas, bath fans and
whole house fans
. For high humidity areas; switch turns ON a
light and fan simultaneously. Turn light OFF, fan remains ON for
a preset time.
FEATURES
• Contr •
Solid state components for long life
• Single or multi-ganged installation
• 1 to 60 minute time delay setting
• Two position switch: On/Timed Fan
• Three position switch: On/Off/Timed Fan
• White or Ivory available
• Standard wall box mount
• Package includes installation hardware
• Wall Plate not included
42513
Model Maximum Time
Setting
Mode of
Activation
Mounting
Style
Switch
Configuration
Contact
Position
Power Approvals Color
42503 60 mins. 3 Position
Toggle
Wall Box 2 SPST OFF 1/3 hp
500 Watts
cUL UL
Ivory
42507 60 mins. 3 Position
Toggle
Wall Box 2 SPST OFF 1/3 hp
500 Watts
cUL UL
White
42513 60 mins. 2 Position
Toggle
Wall Box 2 SPST OFF 1/3 hp
500 Watts
cUL UL
Ivory
42517 60 mins. 2 Position
Toggle
Wall Box 2 SPST OFF 1/3 hp
500 Watts
cUL UL
White
42702-1 20 mins
40 mins.
60 mins.
Push Button Wall Box 2 SPST OFF 1/6 hp
500 Watts
cUL
UL
Ivory
White
WIRING
I. Standard Fan/Light ApplicationII. Single Timed Load Application
LIN
E
BLACK
WIRE
WHITE
WIRE
GREEN
WIRE
BLACK
WIRE
BLUE
WIRE
RED
WIRE
FAN
MOTOR
BLUE
WIRE
RED
WIRE
LIGHT
WHITE
WIRE
GREEN
WIRE
NEUTRAL
GROUND
LINE
LOAD
ATTACH TO
WIRE NUT
NEUTRAL
GROUND
I. Standard Fan/Light ApplicationII. Single Timed Load Application
LINE
BLACK
WIRE
WHITE
WIRE
GREEN
WIRE
BLACK
WIRE
BLUE
WIRE
RED
WIRE
FAN
MOTOR
BLUE
WIRE
RED
WIRE
LIGHT
WHITE
WIRE
GREEN
WIRE
NEUTRAL
GROUND
LINE
LOAD
ATTACH TO
WIRE NUT
NEUTRAL
GROUND
42702-1
SPECIFICATIONS
42513
42702-1
Supply Voltage 120 VAC, 60 Hz
Power Rating
Models 425xx 1/3 HP; 500W Incandescent
(Do not use with fluorescent lamp ballasts or CFLs)

Model 42702-1
1/6 HP; 500 watts incandescent/tungsten;
200VA fluorescent ballasts
Contact Type N.O., SPST
Time Delay Models 425xx
1 to 60 minutes settings
Model 42702-1 20 to 60 minutes preset range
Lead Wire 6"
Enc
losure
ABS, UL94 5V-A, UL94V0
Dimensions 42503/42507
4-1/8"H x 1-¾"W x 1 ½"D mm

42513/42517
4"H X 1-¾"W X 1-½"D mm

42702-1
4-1/8"H x 1-¾"W x 2"D mm
Mounting Standard wall box
Approvals UL, cUL
W
eight
0.4 lb (0.181kg)
Warranty 1 year
(Shown with wall plate)
ORDERING INFORMATIONNEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
676NEW!
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEW!

725. MANUAL TIME SWITCH
93000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Marktime 93000 Series Wall Box Time Switch is a spring
wound, manually set time switch for the control of electrical
current
. Interchangeable with standard toggle switches to turn
circuits either off or on at the end of a preset time period, the 93000 Series is ideally suited for new installations or retrofit projects
.
FEATURES
• White and ivory plates and knobs included with each
time switch
• Time range from minutes to 12 hours, all with ±5%
accuracy
• Easy-to-install two-wire design to fit standard single-
gang wall box
• Heavy motor loads without the need of contactors
• Hold-Change of state without timer
• No Hold-Change of state with timer
ORDERING INFORMATION
Current Rating 7A Tungsten @ 125 VAC 20A non-
inuductive, 1 Hp 125 VAC 10A non- inductive @ 277 VAC
Contact Type
N.O./ N.C. SPDT
Operating Temperature -40° to 120°C ( -40° to 49°C)
Mounting Single gang wallbox
Color Ivory and White included
Approvals UL Listed, File E13151
Weight 0.4 lb (0.18 kg)
Warranty 1 year
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
93501C 0-15 min. timer includes knob and trim plate
93502C 0-30 min. timer includes knob and trim plate
93503C 0-60 min. timer includes knob and trim plate
93504C 0-120 min. timer includes knob and trim plate
93505C 0-6 hr. timer includes knob and trim plate
93506C 0-12 hr. timer includes knob and trim plate
93507C 0-4 hr. timer includes knob and trim plate
93511C 0-15 min. timer with Hold, includes knob and trim plate
93512C 0-30 min. timer with Hold, includes knob and trim plate
93513C 0-60 min. timer with Hold, includes knob and trim plate
93516C 0-12 hr. timer with Hold, includes knob and trim plate
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
93504C
0.28 (0.7)
2 x 0.2 (0.5)
1.8 (4.5)
1.1 (2.9)
1.2 (3.1)
0.1 (0.2)
0.7 (1.8)
Ø 0.18 (0.5)
2.7 (6.9)
3.3 (8.4)
3.8 (9.7)
in
(cm)
Line 1
Line 2
Load 1
N.O.
N.C.
Load 2
Note: For SPDT operation, install jumper wire from
Line 1 terminal to the Line 2 terminal NEW!
677LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEW!

726. SENSOR SWITCH LINE VOLTAGE TIMER SWITCH
PTS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The PTS Series Electronic Auto Shut-off Timer Switches
provide a simple to use and simple to apply lighting control
alternative to wall switch occupancy sensors
. These elegant
decorator style wall stations each provide six preset countdown timer selections as well as an on/off push-button
.
FEATURES
• Self-contained relay
• Interchangeable hot & load wires
• No neutral connection required
• Self-grounding mounting strap
• No minimum load requirement
• Push-button programmable w/o removing switch plate
• Fixed or Adjustable Preset Times
• LED flashes for last 30 sec of button’s time setting
• Green on/off switch status LED
• Green LED time indicators
• Wall plate included
H N
BLK
BLK
GND
LOAD
Note: Connection to Ground required for sensor to function
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PTS-60-AL Prog. Interval Timer Switch, Line Voltage, 60Min, Lite Almond
PTS-60-GY Prog. Interval Timer Switch, Line Voltage, 60Min, Gray
PTS-60-IV Prog. Interval Timer Switch, Line Voltage, 60Min, Ivory
PTS-60-WH Prog. Interval Timer Switch, Line Voltage, 60Min, White
PTS-720-AL Prog. Interval Timer Switch, Line Voltage, 60Min, Lite Almond
PTS-720-GY Prog. Interval Timer Switch, Line Voltage, 12Hr, Gray
PTS-720-IV Prog. Interval Timer Switch, Line Voltage, 12Hr, Ivory
PTS-720-WH Prog. Interval Timer Switch, Line Voltage, 12Hr, White
Supply Voltage 800/1200/1500 W @ 120/277/347
VAC
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Motor Load 1/4 HP
Time Scale
PTS-60 60, 30, 15, 10, 5, 2 min
PTS-720 12hr, 8hr, 4hr, 2hr, 60min, 30min
Operating Temperature 14 to 160°F (-10 to 71°C)
Operating Humidity 20-90% non-condensing
Mounting Wall, single gang switch box
Dimensions 4.2"H x 1.8"W x 1.5"D
(10.67 x 4.57 x 3.81 cm)
Approvals ETL listed
Weight 0.32 lb (0.15 kg)
Warranty 5 year limited
SPECIFICATIONS
Function
Number
Function
Name
Settings (*indicates default setting)
2 Blink Warning
1. Enabled 2 min & 1 min* 3. Enabled 1 min
2. Disabled 4. Enabled 2 min
3 Beep Warning 1. Enabled* 2. Disabled
4 Status Tick
1. Enabled
(ticks every 1 sec)
2. Disabled*
3. Enabled,
(ticks every 0.5s ec)
5
Max Time Allowable
(model # PTS 60)
1. 60 min* 3. 15 min5 . 5 min
2. 30 min 4. 10 min6 . 2 min
5
Max Time Allowable
(model # PTS 720)
1. 12 hr* 3. 4 hr 5. 60 min
2. 8 hr 4. 2 hr 6. 30 min
6
Default Time - when on/off
button pressed
(model # PTS 60)
1. 60 min 4. 10 min7 . Last time selected*
2. 30 min 5. 5 min
3. 15 min 6. 2 min
6
Default Time - when on/off
button pressed
(model # PTS 720)
1. 12 hr 4. 2 hr 7. Last time selected*
2. 8 hr 5. 60 min
3. 4 hr 6. 30 min
9 Factory Defaults 1. Maintain current* 2. Restore defaults
PROGRAMMING
PTS-720PTS-60
LIGHTING CONTROLS
678
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

727. Supply Voltage
WR 120 VAC, 73 mA, 60 Hz
277 VAC, 73 mA, 60 Hz
WWS None
Frequency 315 mHz
Relay Life WR
10 million cycles min mechanical
Contact Type WR
(1) 20 A SPDT Continuous Duty Coil
Contactor Ballast WR
20A N.O. @ 277 VAC,
10A N.C. @ 277 VAC
Contactor Motor WR
2 Hp @ 277 VAC, 1 Hp @ 120 VAC
Contactor Tungsten WR
10A N.O. @ 120 VAC
Contact Resistance WR
20A @ 277 VAC, 5A @ 480 VAC
Pilot Duty WR
770 VA @ 120 VAC,
1,110 VA @ 277 VAC
Transmission Power WWS
Max 10 mW equivalent isotropic
radiated power
Receiver Sensitivity WR
-93 dBm typical
Lead Wires WR
16", 600V Rated
Antenna Integrated 15 cm
LED Indication WR
Red Relay Status / Learn Mode
Status (Flashing)
Switch Type Rocker, Momentary, Toggle
WR Override None
Range Up to 100 feet (typical)
Operating Temperature WWS
-13° to 149°F (-25° to 65°C)

WR
-30° to 140°F (-2° to 61°C)
Dimensions WWS
2.75" x 4.50" x 0.62"
(7.0 x 11.4 x 1.6 cm)
WR 2.30" x 3.20" x 1.80" with .50" NPT
Nipple
Enclosure Rating WR
NEMA 1, plenum
Approvals WWS
FCC (US), IC (Canada)

WR
UL Listed File E268805, CE
Weight
WWS
1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
WR 0.4 lb (0.2 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
Battery-free WWS Wireless Switch Transmitters are used to
control lighting, but they can be used to control virtually any on/off device
. Each self-powered wireless switch transmitter
can be placed anywhere within range of a receiver.
Switch transmitters are powered by EnOcean’s energy
harvesting technology that converts the press of the switch into a small amount of electricity
. This electricity is used to
transmit a wireless signal that communicates with a wireless relay receiver
. The WR Wireless Relay Receivers are
prepackaged with relay, LED, socket, mounting rail, transient protection, and housing
. The relay receiver has built-in
repeater function. Relay receives signal from wireless switch
transmitter and rebroadcasts the signal to the next relay receiver
.
FEATURES
• Decora style with several color choices
• EnOcean enabled "energy harvesting" technology
• No hardwiring for wireless switch transmitter
• Battery free
• 120 or 277 VAC receiver
• Up to 100' (30 m) typical indoor transmission distance
• Made in the USA
WIRELESS SWITCH TRANSMITTER AND CONTROL RELAY RECEIVER
WWS SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
WWS
Wireless Switch
WR
Wireless Receiverfi
679LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
11
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

728. The radio coverage in commercial buildings is usually restricted by fire safety walls that must be considered as screening. Inside
the fire protected sections lightw
eight or glass partition walls are used with good radio wave propagation properties (except for
metal reinforcements or metalized walls)
.
The following are two common installation architectures
• 1. Radio sensors control the actuators directly (RF bus). Usually, the radio paths to be covered are not very long (cubicle
installation).
• 2. Radio sensors control the actuators via automation system
Centrally-placed radio Gateways to the Building Automation System (e.g. BACnet, TCP/IP, LON,EIB) are used for system
coverage. In the following a reliable radio planning is shown that can be done in quick time and using simple tools only:
STEP 1: Take a building floor plan and a drawing circle
STEP 2: Mark relevant radio shadings into the floor plan
• Fire protection walls
• Lavatories, staircases, elevator shafts, supply areas
STEP 3: Draw circles area wide •
The circle center points are the ideal positions of the radio gateways.
• By that the gateways should be positioned in such a way that no screens block the connection to any corner inside the fire
safety section (potential sensor positions).
Planning with 32-39 feet range offers extensive reserve to avoid most typical bad conditions. For a highly robust radio
transmission system it is advisable to implement a redundant radio receiver path. To do so, program two gateways for parallel
reception of radio transmitters.
ORDERING INFORMATION
WIRELESS SWITCH TRANSMITTER AND CONTROL RELAY RECEIVER
WWS SERIES
WIRING
APPLICATION
WR120E20 WR277E20
Blu
N/C
Yel
Comm
Org
N/O
Blk
120 Vac
Wht
Neutral
Wireless
Receiver
Control
Circuit
Wireless
Receiver
Control
Circuit
Blu
N/C
Yel
Comm
Org
N/O
Blk
277 Vac
Red
Neutral or Other Phase
MODEL DESCRIPTION
WWS-A Wireless Switch Transmitter, Almond
WWS-BK Wireless Switch Transmitter, Black
WWS-BR Wireless Switch Transmitter, Brown
WWS-W Wireless Switch Transmitter, White
WWSP-A Switch Cover Plate, Almond
WWSP-BK Switch Cover Plate, Black
WWSP-BR Switch Cover Plate, Brown
WWSP-W Switch Cover Plate, White
WR120E20 Wireless Relay Receiver / Repeater Relay 20 Amp SPDT, 120 VAC
WR277E20 Wireless Relay Receiver / Repeater Relay 20 Amp SPDT, 277 VACfifl
LIGHTING CONTROLS
680fifl
LIGHITING CONTROLS
11
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

729. HUMIDITY
MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR
CONTROLS
Core VFD Series | p. 695 FCXLS/NFCXLS | p. 692PSR Series | p. 681
Kele Has Soft Starters and VFDs to Extend the Life of Your Motor
and Help Save Energy and Maintenance Costs.

730. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
MOTOR CONTROLS
A Series | p. 683
TEC Compact | p. 687
Starters
Smart VFD | p. 704
HVAC
MOTOR
CONTROLS
Motor Disconnects
ABB EOT Series — Enclosed Non-Fused Disconnect Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
BCXLS Series
— Breaker Combination Motor Starters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
FCXLS, NFCXLS Series
— Fusible and Non-Fusible Motor Starters
. . . . . . . 692
Motor Starters PSR Series
— Softstarters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
A Series
— ABB 3 Phase Motor Starter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
TEC Compact Starters
— 3 Phase Motor Starters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) and Bypasses CORE VFD
— Honeywell Variable Frequency Drives
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
CORE VFD With Bypass
— Honeywell Variable Frequency Drives
. . . . . . . . . 698
SmartDrive Compact VFD
— Honeywell Compact Variable Frequency
Drive
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
SMARTVFD HVAC
— Honeywell All Purpose Variable Frequency Drives
. . . . 704
SMARTVFD HVAC With Bypass Assembly
— Variable Frequency Drives
with Bypass
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707

731. fi 681MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Model PSR3 - 16 with MCCB Model PSR25 - 45 with MCCB
L/+N /C
PSR
Fuse
(customer
supplied)
Circuit
protection
by customer
Note: ve rify motor nameplate
voltage and horsepower
rating for soft starter selection
Supply
Voltage
COM
L/+ N/C
PSR
Fuse (customer supplied)
Circuit
protection
by customer
Note: ve rify motor nameplate
voltage and horsepower
rating for soft starter selection
Supply Voltage
COM
SOFTSTARTERS
PSR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Constant-speed AC motors are used to drive HVAC fans and
pumps. During start and stop, both mechanical and electrical
stresses are high, causing undesirable load peaks each time the motors are started
. An ABB Softstarter eliminates many
of these problems. The voltage is smoothly applied to, and
removed from, the motor. Both the torque and the current
consequently beha
ve in the same way
. The result is that
mechanical and electrical stresses are significantly lower than with conventional starting methods
.
The PSR series Compact Softstarters range covers motor
currents from 3 to 46A. All sizes include a Run signal relay.
The 25A and abo
ve are also provided with an output signal
for TOR (Top Of Ramp, i
.e. full voltage). With standard
performance the PSR Softstarters handle ten starts per hour.
When an auxiliar
y cooling fan is added, the starting capacity
is increased to 20 starts per hour
.
FEA
TURES
•
Compact size
• Easy to install and adjust
• DIN rail or screw mounting
Supply Voltage 100/ 240 V, 24 VDC
Motor Voltage Rating 208 to 600 VAC
Current Rating
PSR3 3.9A Starting capacity 15.6A for 6s
PSR6 6.8A Starting capacity 27.2A for 6s
PSR9 9A Starting capacity 36A for 6s
PSR12 12A Starting capacity 48A for 6s
PSR16 16A Starting capacity 64A for 6s
PSR25 25A Starting capacity 100A for 6s
PSR30 30A Starting capacity 120A for 6s
PSR37 37A Starting capacity 148A for 6s
PSR45 46A Starting capacity 180A for 6s
Horsepower Based on rated Voltage and FLA
Acceleration Time 1-10 seconds
Deceleration Time 0-20 seconds
Altitude Limits 13,123 ft. (4000 m)
Protection Rating Main circuit IP20 Control Circuit IP20
LED Indication On/ Ready Green On/ Ready Green
Run/
Top of Ramp Green

Run/ Top of Ramp Green
Operating Temperature -13° to 140°F (-25° to 60°C)
Storage Temperature -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C)
Number of Starts/ hr 10 standard; 20 with Aux. Fan
Approvals UL ListedFile E161428
Warranty 12 months from installation, maxim
um 18 months from factory
SPECIFICATIONS
WIRING
PSR30-600-70PSR45-600-70PSR16-600-70
• Run signal relay
• 25A and above includes "Top Of Ramp" output signal
• Motor ratings up to 600 VAC and 40Hp
• Seperate Acceleration/ Deceleration times

732. fi
MOTOR CONTROLS 682fi
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
SOFTSTARTERS
PSR SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES
PSR-FAN Cooling Fan for increased starting capacity (field-installable)
Model
Control
Supply
Voltage
Full
Load
Amps
Horsepower Circuit
Breaker
Max.
Fuse Size Dimensions Weight
208V240V480V600V
PSR3-600-70 100/ 240 V3.4 .50.752 2 50 A40 A J-Type
5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47"
(140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm)
0.99 lbs.
(0.45 kg)
PSR6-600-70 100/ 240 V6.1 1 1.53 5 50 A40 A J-Type
5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47"
(140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm)
0.99 lbs.
(0.45 kg)
PSR9-600-70 100/ 240 V9 2 2 5 7.550 A40 A J-Type
5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47"
(140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm)
0.99 lbs.
(0.45 kg)
PSR12-600-70100/ 240 V11 3 3 7.510 50 A40 A J-Type
5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47"
(140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm)
0.99 lbs.
(0.45 kg)
PSR16-600-70100/ 240 V15.23 3 1010 50 A40 A J-Type
5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47"
(140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm)
0.99 lbs.
(0.45 kg)
PSR25-600-70100/ 240 V24.27.57.51520 50 A40 A J-Type
6.30" x 1.77" x 5.04"
(160mm x 45mm x 128mm)
1.43 lbs.
(0.65 kg)
PSR30-600-70100/ 240 V28 7.57.52025 50 A40 A J-Type
6.30" x 1.77" x 5.04"
(160mm x 45mm x 128mm)
1.43 lbs.
(0.65 kg)
PSR37-600-70100/ 240 V34 10102530 50 A40 A J-Type
7.36" x 1.77" x 6.02"
(187mm x 45mm x 153mm)
2.20 lbs.
(1.00 kg)
PSR45-600-70100/ 240 V46.215153040 50 A40 A J-Type
7.36" x 1.77" x 6.02"
(187mm x 45mm x 153mm)
2.20 lbs.
(1.00 kg)
PSR3-600-81 24 VDC 3.4 .5.52 2 50 A40 A J-Type
5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47"
(140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm)
2.20 lbs.
(1.00 kg)
PSR6-600-81 24 VDC 6.1 1 1 3 5 50 A40 A J-Type
5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47"
(140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm)
0.99 lbs.
(0.45 kg)
PSR9-600-81 24 VDC 9 2 2 5 7.550 A40 A J-Type
5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47"
(140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm)
0.99 lbs.
(0.45 kg)
PSR12-600-81 24 VDC 11 3 3 7.510 50 A40 A J-Type
5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47"
(140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm)
0.99 lbs.
(0.45 kg)
PSR16-600-81 24 VDC15.23 3 1010 50 A40 A J-Type
5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47"
(140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm)
0.99 lbs.
(0.45 kg)
PSR25-600-81 24 VDC24.27.57.51520 100 A60 A J- Type
6.30" x 1.77" x 5.04"
(160mm x 45mm x 128mm)
1.43 lbs.
(0.65 kg)
PSR30-600-81 24 VDC 28 7.5102025 100 A70 A J- Type
6.30" x 1.77" x 5.04"
(160mm x 45mm x 128mm)
1.43 lbs.
(0.65 kg)
PSR37-600-81 24 VDC 34 10102530 150 A100 A J- Type
7.36" x 1.77" x 6.02"
(187mm x 45mm x 153mm)
2.20 lbs.
(1.00 kg)
PSR45-600-81 24 VDC46.215153040 150 A100 A J- Type
7.36" x 1.77" x 6.02"
(187mm x 45mm x 153mm)
2.20 lbs.
(1.00 kg)

733. fi 683MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
MODEL SIZE
A9, A16
A26
A50, A75
A145
A260
5.3"H x 1.7"W x 3.7"D
(13.3 x 4.4 x 9.5 cm)
5.8"H x 2.1"W x 4.3"D
(9.0 x 2.1 x 11.0 cm)
6.9"H x 2.8"W x 4.4"D
(17.7 x 7.0 x 11.3 cm)
12.9"H x 4.1"W x 6.3"D
(32.9 x 10.5 x 16.0 cm)
17.5"H x 5.5"W x 7.1"D
(44.4 x 14 x 18.1 cm)
Open Frame Starters in (cm)
Enclosed Starters in (cm)
NEMA 1
11"H x 6"W x 5"D
(27.9 x 15.2 x 12.7 cm)
13"H x 9"W x 7"D
(33.0 x 22.9 x 17.8 cm)
30"H x 24"W x 12"D
(76.2 x 61.0 x 30.5 cm)
30"H x 24"W x 12"D
(76.2 x 61.0 x 30.5 cm)
NEMA 1 fused
14"H x 12"W x 8"D
(35.6 x 30.5 x 20.3 cm)
20"H x 16"W x 8"D
(50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3 cm)
30"H x 24"W x 12"D
(76.2 x 61.0 x 30.5 cm)
36"H x 30"W x 12"D
(91.4 x 76.2 x 30.5 cm)
NEMA 1 circuit breaker
14"H x 12"W x 8"D
(35.6 x 30.5 x 20.3 cm)
14"H x 12"W x 8"D
(35.6 x 30.5 x 20.3cm)
24"H x 20"W x 8"D
(61.0 x 50.8 x 20.3 cm)
30"H x 24"W x 12"D
(76.2 x 61.0 x 30.5 cm)
MODEL SIZE
A9, A16, A26
A50, A75
A145
A260
DESCRIPTION
The A Series ABB starter line offers motor start/stop and
protection. The double-break contacts allow stopping a motor
with minimal conact wear. The thermal overloads are sized
for the motor FLA and keep motor windings from over-heating during overload conditions
. We offer these starters in open,
enclosed, enclosed with fusible disconnect, and enclosed with circuit breaker
. Auxiliary contacts are available for field
installation.
FEATURES
• NEMA sizes 00 thru 5
• UL508A panel program, file #E105450
• Compact space-saving design
• Auxiliary contacts available
• Coil operates 85 to 110% of rated voltage
• Solid-state adjustable overload relays standard
• Conventional bimetallic overloads available
DIMENSIONS
ABB 3 PHASE MOTOR STARTER
A SERIES
A50NSF1-84A6B A9NS1-81E

734. fi
MOTOR CONTROLS 684fi
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ABB 3 PHASE MOTOR STARTER
A SERIES
All units ship with a NO and NC contacts.
Additional contacts can be added in the field.
Incoming Lines
L1
L1 L2 L3
Incoming Lines
L1 L2 L3
Disconnect
Fuse
Disconnect Breaker
1
X1
L1 L2 L3
T1
M
FR
OL
OL
OL
T2 T3
T1T2
MOTOR
MOTOR
T3
X2
35 1
External Control
Supply Standard 120 VAC
External Control
Supply Standard 120 VAC
CX1
2-1 1-1
3-4 3-4
3-2 3-2
3-1
3-7
3-7
3-6
3-5
3-3
3-6
3-3
1-2 2-2
2-1 1-1 1-2 2-2
CX2
35
98
JUMPER
97
OL
9695
OL
M
Remote Contact
Customer
*
15
A1 A2
14
12
24 6
24 6
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2
X1
X2
L3
T1 T2 T3
T1 T2 T3
T1 T2 T3
Disconnect
Fuse
Disconnect Breaker
13 5 13 5
24 6
24 6
CX1 CX2
3-4 3-4
3-2 3-2
JUMPER
F
A1 A2F
F
14 13
01
21
01
22
01
21
01
22
R
F
R
R
14 13
R
A1 A2
Remote Contact
Customer
*
*
134 2
Non-reversing, reversing
AF09 - AF750, AFN00 - AFN4
WIRING

735. fi 685MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ABB 3 PHASE MOTOR STARTER
A SERIES
All units ship with a NO and NC contacts.
Additional contacts can be added in the field.
2-1 1-1
3-4
Jumper
3-4
3-2 3-2
3-7
3-3
3-5
3-9
3-6
1-2 2-2
2-1 1-1 1-2 2-2
Disconnect
Incoming Lines
L1
SOL
SOL FOL
S
S
F
F
S
F
S
*
*
F
SF
FOL
L2 L3
Fuse
Disconnect
External Control
Supply Standard 120VAC
Remote Contact
Customer
Breaker
1
X1
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
T1
95
14 13
14
31 24
13
96 95 96
T1 T11MOTOR*
T2 T12
T13
T2 T3 T1T2 T3
X2
35 1
CX1C X2
35
24 6
24 6
Disconnect
Fuse
Disconnect Breaker
13 51 35
24 6
24 6
01
21
01
22
01
21
01
22
A1 A2
A1 A2
3-2 3-2
3-7
3-3
3-5
3-9
3-6
SOL FOL
95 96 95 96
S
2F
14 13
14 13
1F
S
01
21
01
22
01
21
01
22
2F
1F
14 13
21 22
S
*
*
F
Remote Contact
Customer
31 24
A1 A2
2F
1F
A1A2
S
A1 A2
Jumper
3-4 3-4
External Control
Supply Standard 120VAC
CX1C X2
2 speed, 1 winding; 2 speed, 2 winding
AF09 - AF75
WIRING

736. fi
MOTOR CONTROLS 686fi
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
NEMA
SIZE
00
0
1
2
3
4
5
200V
–
–
–
1/3, 1/4
1/2
3/4
–
1
1.5
–
2
3
–
5
7.5
–
–
10
–
15
20
25
–
–
30
40
50
60
–
230V
–
1/4 1/3 1/2
–
3/4
1
1.5
– – 2 3 – 5
7.5
–
10 15
– –
20
25, 30
– –
40 50
–
60
100
460V
1/4
1/3, 1/2
3/4
1 –
1.5, 2
– – – 3 5 –
7.5
10
–
15 20 25
–
30 40 50
–
60 75
100
–
125 200
575V
1/2
–
3/4
1
1.5, 2
– – – – 5 – –
10
– –
20 25
–
30 40 50
–
60 75
100
–
125 150
–
OVERLOAD
RELAY
SETTING
RANGE
0.63 - 1.0
1.0 - 1.4 1.3 - 1.6 1.7 - 2.4 2.2 - 3.1 2.8 - 4.0 3.5 - 5.0 4.5 - 6.5 6.0 - 8.5 4.5 - 6.5 6.0 - 8.5
7.5 - 11
10 - 14 13 - 19 18 - 25 18 - 25 22 - 32 29 - 42 29 - 42 36 - 52 45 - 63 60 - 80 65 - 90 65 - 90 65 - 90 65 - 90
110 - 150 130 - 185 220 - 310
MODEL
OPEN STYLE
A9N00S-*E
A9N00S-*F
A9N00S-*G
A9N00S-*H
A9N00S-*J
A9N00S-*K
A9N00S-*L
A9N00S-*M
A9N00S-*N
A16N0S-*M
A16N0S-*N
A16N0S-*P
A26N1S-*Q
A26N1S-*R
A26N1S-*S A50N2S-*A A50N2S-*B
A50N2S-*C A75N3S-*C A75N3S-*D
A75N3S-*E
A75N3S-*F
A145N4S-*R
A145N4S-*A A145N4S-*B
A145N4S-*C
A260N5S-*T
A260N5S-*A
A260N5S-*C
MODEL
NEMA 1
ENCLOSED
A9NS1-*E
A9NS1-*F
A9NS1-*G
A9NS1-*H
A9NS1-*J
A9NS1-*K
A9NS1-*L
A9NS1-*M
A9NS1-*N
A16NS1-*M
A16NS1-*N
A16NS1-*P
A26NS1-*Q
A26NS1-*R
A26NS1-*S A50NS1-*A A50NS1-*B
A50NS1-*C A75NS1-*C A75NS1-*D
A75NS1-*E
A75NS1-*F
A145NS1-*R
A145NS1-*A A145NS1-*B
A145NS1-*C
A260NS1-*T
A260NS1-*A
A260NS1-*C
FUSE
CLIP
SIZE
CLASS
J
30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 60A 60A 60A
100A 100A 100A 100A 400A 400A 400A 400A 400A 400A 400A MODEL
NEMA 1
ENCL.
FUSIBLE
DISCONNECT
A9NSF1-*E6A
A9NSF1-*F6A
A9NSF1-*G6A
A9NSF1-*H6A
A9NSF1-*J6A
A9NSF1-*K6A
A9NSF1-*L6A
A9NSF1-*M6A
A9NSF1-*N6A
A16NSF1-*M6A
A16NSF1-*N6A
A16NSF1-*P6A
A26NSF1-*Q6A
A26NSF1-*R6A
A26NSF1-*S6A A50NSF1-*A6B A50NSF1-*B6B
A50NSF1-*C6B
A75NSF1-*C6C A75NSF1-*D6C
A75NSF1-*E6C
A75NSF1-*F6C
A145NSF1-*R6E
A145NSF1-*A6E A145NSF1-*B6E
A145NSF1-*C6E
A260NSF1-*T6E
A260NSF1-*A6E
A260NSF1-*C6E
MODEL
NEMA 1
ENCL.
W/CIRCUIT
BREAKER
A9NSM1-*E4A
A9NSM1-*F4A
A9NSM1-*G4A
A9NSM1-*H4A
A9NSM1-*J4B
A9NSM1-*K4B
A9NSM1-*L4C
A9NSM1-*M4C
A9NSM1-*N4C
A16NSM1-*M4C
A16NSM1-*N4C
A16NSM1-*P4D
A26NSM1-*Q4D
A26NSM1-*R4D
A26NSM1-*S4E A50NSM1-*A4E A50NSM1-*B4E
A50NSM1-*C4E A75NSM1-*C4E
A75NSM1-*D4F
A75NSM1-*E4F
A75NSM1-*F4F
A145NSM1-*R4F
A145NSM1-*A4F A145NSM1-*B4F
A145NSM1-*C4F A260NSM1-*T4H
A260NSM1-*A4H
A260NSM1-*C4J
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
RATING
(480 V MAX)
3 3 3 3 5 5
10 10 10 10 10 25 25 25 50 50 50 50 50
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 250 250 400
MOTOR HORSEPOWE R
3-PHASE, 1800 RPM**
*Insert code 84 for 120 VAC 60Hz, code 80 for 240 VAC, code 81 for 24 VAC 50/60 Hz
**Check full load amp rating on motor nameplate to ensure proper overload protection
Note - for additional auxiliary contacts add suffix 10 for 1 N.O., 20 for 2 N.O., 01 for 1 N.C., 02 for 2 N.C., 11 for 1 N.O. & 1 N.C.
Example: A50N2S-84A-20 Open frame style, 10 HP, 120 VAC coil, 2 N.O. auxiliary contacts
ABB 3 PHASE MOTOR STARTER
A SERIES
All units ship with a NO and NC contacts.
Additional contacts can be added in the field.
Incoming Lines
L1
L1 L2
Disconnect
Fuse
Disconnect Breaker
1
X1
L1 L2 L3
T1
M
OL
OL
T2 T3
T1T2
MOTOR
T3
X2
35 1
External Control
Supply Standard 120 VAC
CX1
2-1 1-1
3-4 3-4
3-2 3-2
3-1
3-7
3-6
3-3
1-2 2-2
CX2
35
98
JUMPER
97
OL
9695
OL
M
Remote Contact
Customer
*
15
A1 A2
14
12
24 6
24 6
Non-reversing, single phase
AF09 - AF110, AFN00 - AFN2
WIRING

737. fi 687MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
C
D
TEC12, TEC18 Starters TEC25 Starter
A 4.72" (11.98 cm) 5.31" (13.48 cm)
B 5.51" (18.99 cm) 6.1" (15.49 cm)
C 6.54" (16.61 cm) 7.28" (18.49 cm)
D 5.9" (14.98 cm) 6.5" (16.51 cm)
E 3.46" (8.78 cm) 3.98" (10.10 cm)
A
B
E
DESCRIPTION
TEC Compact Starters are compact 3 phase motor starters.
They have an enameled copper wire coil and have finger-
safe contacts.These starters are UL 508SB rated. There is an
external window indicator that shows contact wear.
FEA
TURES
•
Compact design
• cULus, CE, and UL508 approved
• Available with reset or start stop
• NEMA 4X enclosed
• Single or three phase
• Class 10 overloads
DIMENSIONS
3 PHASE MOTOR STARTERS
TEC COMPACT STARTERS
TEC18-AKSS3-18A
SPECIFICATIONS
HORSE POWER - 3PHASE
Part Number 200V 230V 480V 600V
Coil
Voltage
Enc
losure
NEMA Rating
Control Type/
Version
Overload Amp
Range
Weight
lbs (kg)
TEC12-A4XR-8A 2 2.5 5 7.5 120V 4X Reset only 5.5 - 8A 2.3 (1.04)
TEC12-G4XR-8A 2 2.5 5 7.5 24V 4X Reset only 5.5 - 8A 2.3 (1.04)
TEC12-AKSS3-8A 2 2.5 5 7.5 120V 4X Start/stop 5.5 - 8A 2.3 (1.04)
TEC12-GKSS3-8A 2 2.5 5 7.5 24V 4X Start/stop 5.5 - 8A 2.3 (1.04)
TEC12-A4XR-13A 3 3 7.5 10 120V 4X Reset only 9 - 13A 2.3 (1.04)
TEC12-G4XR-13A 3 3 7.5 10 24V 4X Reset only 9 - 13A 2.3 (1.04)
TEC12-AKSS3-13A 3 3 7.5 10 120V 4X Start/stop 9 - 13A 2.3 (1.04)
TEC12-GKSS3-13A 3 3 7.5 10 24V 4X Start/stop 9 - 13A 2.3 (1.04)
TEC18-A4XR-18A 5 5 10 15 120V 4X Reset only 7 - 10A 2.3 (1.04)
TEC18-G4XR-18A 5 5 10 15 24V 4X Reset only 7 - 10A 2.3 (1.04)
TEC18-AKSS3-18A 5 5 10 15 120V 4X Start/stop 7 - 10A 2.3 (1.04)
TEC18-GKSS3-18A 5 5 10 15 24V 4X Start/stop 7 - 10A 2.3 (1.04)
TEC25-A4XR-25A 5 7.5 15 20 120V 4X Reset only 17- 25A 2.7 (1.22)
TEC25-G4XR-25A 5 7.5 15 20 24V 4X Reset only 17- 25A 2.7 (1.22)
TEC25-AKSS3-25A 5 7.5 15 20 120V 4X Start/stop 17- 25A 2.7 (1.22)
TEC25-GKSS3-25A 5 7.5 15 20 24V 4X Start/stop 17- 25A 2.7 (1.22)
Other options and models available from manufacturer
.

738. fi
MOTOR CONTROLS 688fi
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TEC12-A4XR-8A Compact starter, 3 phase, 120 VAC, with reset and overload,5.5 to 8 Amps
TEC12-G4XR-8A Compact starter, 3 phase, 24 VAC, with reset and overload, 5.5 to 8 Amps
TEC12-AKSS3-8A Compact starter, 3 phase, 120 VAC, start/stop and overload, 5.5 to 8 Amps
TEC12-GKSS3-8A Compact starter, 3 phase, 24 VAC, start/stop and overload, 5.5 to 8 Amps
TEC12-A4XR-13A Compact starter, 3 phase, 120 VAC, with reset and overload, 9 to 13 Amps
TEC12-G4XR-13A Compact starter, 3 phase, 24 VAC, with reset and overload, 9 to 13 Amps
TEC12-AKSS3-13A Compact starter, 3 phase, 120 VAC, start/stop and overload, 9 to 13 Amps
TEC12-GKSS3-13A Compact starter, 3 phase, 24 VAC, start/stop and overload, 9 to 13 Amps
TEC18-A4XR-18A Compact starter, 3 phase, 120 VAC, with reset and overload, 12 to 18 Amps
TEC18-G4XR-18A Compact starter, 3 phase, 24 VAC, with reset and overload, 12 to 18 Amps
TEC18-AKSS3-18A Compact starter, 3 phase, 120 VAC, start/stop and overload, 12 to 18 Amps
TEC18-GKSS3-18A Compact starter, 3 phase, 24 VAC, start/stop and overload, 12 to 18 Amps
TEC25-A4XR-25A Compact starter, 3 phase, 120 VAC, with reset and overload, 17 to 25 Amps
TEC25-G4XR-25A Compact starter, 3 phase, 24 VAC, with reset and overload, 17 to 25 Amps
TEC25-AKSS3-25A Compact starter, 3 phase, 120 VAC, start/stop and overload, 17 to 25 Amps
TEC25-GKSS3-25A Compact starter, 3 phase, 24 VAC, start/stop and overload, 17 to 25 Amps
ACCESSORIES
EEC0.63-1A Overload relay TEC Series/0.63-1 Amps
EEC1-1.6A Overload relay TEC Series/1-1.6 Amps
EEC1.6-2.5A Overload relay TEC Series/1.6-2.5 Amps
EEC2.5-4A Overload relay TEC Series/2.5-4 Amps
EEC4-6A Overload relay TEC Series/4-6 Amps
EEC5.5-8A Overload relay TEC Series/5.5-8 Amps
EEC7-10A Overload relay TEC Series/7-10 Amps
EEC9-13A Overload relay TEC Series/9-13 Amps
EEC12-18A Overload relay TEC Series/12-18 Amps
EEC17-25A Overload relay TEC Series/17-25 Amps
3 PHASE MOTOR STARTERS
TEC COMPACT STARTERS
L1
13
M
L1(X1)
14 A1 A2 95 96
(A) (B)
17 18
T1
L1
L2
M
OL
OL RESET
STOP L2(X2)
T2
L2
T3
MTR
M
START
THREE-PHASE*
* L2 on control circuit should be connected to neutral for 120V control vo ltage.
Dashed lines indicate field connection.
START-STOP PUSHBUTTONS Series TEC…KSS3…*
L3
L1
T1
L1
L2
M
13
14
Aux. NO
OL
L2
T2
MTR
SINGLE-PHASE*
13
M
L1(X1)
14 A1 A2 95 96
(A) (B)
17 18
OL RESET
STOP L2(X2)
M
START
REMOTE START-STOP PUSHBUTTONS Series TEC…4XR… (Reset only )*
WIRING

739. fi 689MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 600V MAX
Enclosure Rating NEMA 3R/12
Auxiliary Contacts (optional)
Maximum number allowed: 2NO +
1NC
Meets ARRA or BAA Yes
Dimensions, Including Handle
EOT16 & EOT32 6.36"H x 3.94"W x 4.55"D
(16.2 x 10 x 11.6 cm)
EOT45 7.87"H x 5.75"W x 5.43"D
(19.8 x 14.6 x 18.8 cm)
EOT63 11.81"H x 8.27"W x 7.12"D
(30 x 21 x 181 cm)
Approvals UL Listed E63822, IEC947-3, UL 508
Note:
Only 1 additional pole per switch allowed
DESCRIPTION
The EOT Series of enclosed manual motor controllers are
rotary operated, 3 pole, 600V Hp rated switches, housed in
thermoplastic/polycarbonate enclosures suitable for wet and
corrosive environments
. These NEMA 3R/12 models are
equipped with selector style handles. They are compact in size
have touch safe operation. cUL/IEC-47-3 approvals and UL508
listed.
FEATURES
• Suitab •
Horsepower rated
• Touch safe construction
• Positive operation
• Clear position indication
• Self lifting tunnel terminals
• Extremely compact size
• Accessories include 4th Power Pole & Snap-on auxiliary
contacts
• OSHA Lock Out/Tag Out
ENCLOSED NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH
ABB EOT SERIES
Selector switch style
EOT products are properly installed on the load side of a
branch circuit protective device and are suitabl e for use as
motor disconnects as illustrated above.
Disconnect means
Short Circuit protective device
Controller
Overload protection
EOT Motor disconnect
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
EO
T16U3P3-S
Black selector handle; 16 Amp rating
EO
T16U3P3-1S
Black selector handle; 16 Amp rating;
1 NO auxiliary contact
EOT16U3P3-S1 Red/Yellow selector handle; 16 Amp rating
EOT16U3P3-1S1 Red/Yellow selector handle; 16 Amp rating;
1 NO auxiliary contact
EOT32U3P3-S Black selector handle; 40 Amp rating
EO
T32U3P3-1S
Black selector handle; 40 Amp rating;
1 NO auxiliary contact
EOT32U3P3-S1 Red/Yellow selector handle; 40 Amp rating
EOT32U3P3-1S1 Red/Yellow selector handle; 40 Amp rating;
1 NO auxiliary contact
EOT45U3P3-S Black selector handle; 60 Amp rating
EO
T45U3P3-1S
Black selector handle; 60 Amp rating;
1 NO auxiliarycontact
EOT45U3P3-S1 Red/Yellow selector handle; 60 Amp rating
EOT45U3P3-1S1 Red/Yellow selector handle; 60 Amp rating;
1 NO auxiliary contact
EOT63U3P3-P Black pistol handle; 80 Amp rating
EO
T63U3P3-1P
Black pistol handle; 80 Amp rating;
1 NO auxiliary contact
EOT63U3P3-P1 Red/Yellow pistol handle; 80 Amp rating
EOT63U3P3-1P1 Red/Yellow pistol handle; 80 Amp rating;
1 NO auxiliary contact
ACCESSORIES
OA1G01 Auxiliary contact NC, mounts on left side of switch only
OA1G10 Auxiliary contact, NO mounts on right side of switch only
OTPL40FP 4th Pole, late-break/early-make function (eOT16 & eOT32)
O
TPL80FP
4th Pole, late-break/early-make function (eOT45 & eOT63)
O
TPS40FP
4th Pole (EOT16 & eOT32)
O
TPS80FP
4th Pole (EOT45 & eOT63)
HORSEPOWER RATINGS
Model Series eOT16 eOT32 eOT45 eOT63
Three Phase Max HP
200-208V 3 10 15 20
240V 6 10 15 20
480V 10 20 30 40
600V 10 25 30 40
Single Phase Max HP
120V 1 2 2 2
240V 2 5 7.5 10
SPECIFICATIONS

740. fi
MOTOR CONTROLS 690fi
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
BREAKER COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS
BCXLS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Breaker combnation motor starters are UL508. They include
600 Volt internatinally accepted industrial control breakers
with instantaneous and thermal trip. They all have door
handle safety interlocks and pilot lights. Magnetic starters
with percision and consisten overload protection and different single phasing protection
.
FEATURES
• Breakers with instantaneous and thermal trip
• NEMA 1 or NEMA 12/4 enclosure
• Space and drilling for fused control circuit transformer
• HOA switch
• Pilot light
• Door safety interlocks
• 24V or 120V coil voltage
• UL File #E90628
BCXLS11K-1G-0N-M01-H0A-PL
FUSIBLE CONTROL TRANSFORMERS
Model Primary Volts Secondary Volts Continuous VA Contactors to use with Height Width Depth
B050MBT713RK 208V, 230V, 460V 115V, 24V 50VA LS07,4,7,17,27,37, LS05,4K,7K,11K,18K 3.25" (83 mm) 3.0" (76 mm) 3.93" (100 mm)
B100MBT713RK 208V, 230V, 460V 115V, 24V 100VA LS47,57,77,87,107 ,LS22K,30K,37K,45K, LS55K 3.62"(92 mm) 3.75" (95 mm) 4.55" (76 mm)
B150MBT713RK 208V, 230V, 460V 115V, 24V 150VA LS177, LS75K LS90K(3P) 4.37" (111 mm) 3.75" (95 mm) 4.55" (76 mm)
B200MBT713RK 208V, 230V, 460V 115V, 24V 200VA LS247 LS110K, 132K, 160K 4.5" (114 mm) 4.5" (114 mm) 5.18" (132 mm)
B250MBT713RK 208V, 230V, 460V 115V, 24V 250VA LS220K, 280K, 375K 5.25" (133 mm) 4.5" (114 mm) 5.18" (132 mm)
B300MBT713RK 208V, 230V, 460V 115V, 24V 300VA LS450K 5.12" (130 mm) 5.25" (133 mm) 6.12" (155 mm)
B350MBT713RK 208V, 230V, 460V 115V, 24V 350VA 5.37" (137 mm) 5.25" (133 mm) 6.12" (155 mm)
BREAKER COMBINATION
L1
H1
T1
L2
H4
L3
T3
14
13
M
M
A1
A1
X2
95 96
L2
A2
OL
Aux. NO
OL
T2
MTR
RA1 A2
X2
L2
X1
L1
ON PL
OFF PL
PILOT LIGHTSTRANSFORMER
CONTROL CIRCUIT
21 22
M
H3 H2
FU
X1 X2
G
H1(L1) H4(L2)
X2
L2
X1
L1
95 96A1 A2
13 14
OFF
HAND AUTO
REMOTE SWITCH
23 24 1
OL
M
2
X1
L1
START
AUX
STOP
X2
L2
95 96A1 A221
13 14
13 14
22
OL
M
X1
L1
OFF ON
X2
L2
95 96A1 A2
13 14
OL
M
WIRING

741. fi 691MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
BREAKER COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS
BCXLS SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION/SPECIFICATIONS
Part Number HP Voltage
Coil
Voltage
Enclosure
NEMA Rating
Coil
Inrush
Coil Holding
Current
Overload
Range
Breaker
Rating
Dimensions
in (lb)
Weight
lb (kg)
BCXLS7K-1G-O-M01-HOA-PL
5 200/230
24 VAC
1
45 VA 6 VA
14.5-18
Amps
30A
16" x 12" x 8"
(40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3)
31 (14.1)
BCXLS7K-1G-O-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS7K-1A-O-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
BCXLS7K-1A-O-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS7K-2G-O-M01-HOA-PL
10 460
24 VAC
1
45 VA 6 VA
14.5-18
Amps
30A
16" x 12" x 8"
(40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3)
31 (14.1)
BCXLS7K-2G-O-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS7K-2A-O-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
BCXLS7K-2A-O-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS11K-1G-ON-M01-HOA-PL
7.5 230
24 VAC
1
88 VA 9 VA 21-26 Amps 50A
16" x 12" x 8"
(40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3)
32 (14.5)
BCXLS11K-1G-ON-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS11K-1A-ON-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
BCXLS11K-1A-ON-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS11K-2G-ON-M01-HOA-PL
15 460
24 VAC
1
88 VA 9 VA 21-26 Amps 50A
16" x 12" x 8"
(40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3)
32 (14.5)
BCXLS11K-2G-ON-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS11K-2A-ON-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
BCXLS11K-2A-ON-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS15K-1G-Q-M01-HOA-PL
10 200
24 VAC
1
88 VA 9 VA 30-40 Amps 80A
16" x 12" x 8"
(40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3)
33 (15)
BCXLS15K-1G-Q-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS15K-1A-Q-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
BCXLS15K-1A-Q-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS15K-2G-Q-M01-HOA-PL
10 230
24 VAC
1
88 VA 9 VA 30-40 Amps 80A
16" x 12" x 8"
(40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3)
33 (15)
BCXLS15K-2G-Q-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS15K-2A-Q-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
BCXLS15K-2A-Q-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS15K-3G-Q-M01-HOA-PL
20 460
24 VAC
1
88 VA 9 VA 30-40 Amps 80A
16" x 12" x 8"
(40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3)
33 (15)
BCXLS15K-3G-Q-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS15K-3A-Q-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
BCXLS15K-3A-Q-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS22K-1G-RN-M01-HOA-PL
15 200/230
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 54-65 Amps 125A
20" x 16" x 8"
(50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3)
45 (20.4)
BCXLS22K-1G-RN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS22K-1A-RN-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
BCXLS22K-1A-RN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS22K-2G-QN-M01-HOA-PL
30 460
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 42-55 Amps 100A
20" x 16" x 8"
(50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3)
45 (20.4)
BCXLS22K-2G-QN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS22K-2A-QN-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
BCXLS22K-2A-QN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS37K-1G-SN-M01-HOA-PL
20/25 200/230
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 64-82 Amps 150A
20" x 16" x 8"
(50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3)
47 (21.3)
BCXLS37K-1G-SN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS37K-1A-SN-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
BCXLS37K-1A-SN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS37K-2G-SN-M01-HOA-PL
50 460
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 64-82 Amps 150A
20" x 16" x 8"
(50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3)
47 (21.3)
BCXLS37K-2G-SN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS37K-2A-SN-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
BCXLS37K-2A-SN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS45K-1G-TM-M01-HOA-PL
25/30 200/230
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 78-97 Amps 150A
24" x 20" x 8"
(61 x 50.8 x 20.3)
61 (27.7)
BCXLS45K-1G-TM-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS45K-1A-TM-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
BCXLS45K-1A-TM-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS45K-2G-TM-M01-HOA-PL
60 460
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 78-97 Amps 150A
24" x 20" x 8"
(61 x 50.8 x 20.3)
61 (27.7)
BCXLS45K-2G-TM-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS45K-2A-TM-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
BCXLS45K-2A-TM-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS55K-1G-TN-M01-HOA-PL
40 230
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 90-110 Amps 175A
24" x 20" x 8"
(61 x 50.8 x 20.3)
63 (28.6)
BCXLS55K-1G-TN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS55K-1A-TN-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
BCXLS55K-1A-TN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS55K-2G-TN-M01-HOA-PL
75 460 24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 90-110 Amps 175A
24" x 20" x 8"
(61 x 50.8 x 20.3)
63 (28.6)
BCXLS55K-2G-TN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS55K-2A-TN-M01-HOA-PL 1
BCXLS55K-2A-TN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS75K-1G-TT-M01-HOA-PL
40/50 200/230
24 VAC
1
400 VA 32 VA
140-190
Amps
225A
30" x 24" x 8"
(76.2 x 61 x 20.3)
97 (44)
BCXLS75K-1G-TT-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS75K-1A-TT-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
BCXLS75K-1A-TT-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS75K-2G-TT-M01-HOA-PL
100 460
24 VAC
1
400 VA 32 VA
140-190
Amps
225A
30" x 24" x 8"
(76.2 x 61 x 20.3)
97 (44)
BCXLS75K-2G-TT-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
BCXLS75K-2A-TT-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
BCXLS75K-2A-TT-M4-HOA-PL 12/4

742. fi
MOTOR CONTROLS 692fi
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
FUSIBLE AND NON-FUSIBLE MOTOR STARTERS
FCXLS, NFCXLS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Fusible and Non-Fusible combination controls for your
motor. These have UL/CSA manual motor disconnects with
door safety interlocks. Industrial controls disconnects are
load make, load break, UL listed for motor load switching duty
. Starter and overload relay complete with precision
ambient compensated heaters and differential single phasing protection
.
FEATURES
• NEMA 1 or NEMA 12/4 enclosure
• Space and drilling for fused control circuit transformer
• HOA switch
• Pilot light
• Door safety interlocks
• 24V or 120V coil voltage
• UL File #E90628
FCXLS7K-2A-0-M4-HOA-PL
FUSIBLE CONTROL TRANSFORMERS
Model Primary Volts Secondary Volts Continuous VA Contactors to use with Height Width Depth
B050MBT713RK
208V, 230V, 460V 115V, 24V 50VA LS07, 4, 7, 17, 27, 37, LS05, 4K, 7K, 11K, 18K
3.25"
(83 mm)
3.0"
(76 mm)
3.93"
(100 mm)
B100MBT713RK
B150MBT713RK
B200MBT713RK
B250MBT713RK
B300MBT713RK
B350MBT713RK
RA1 A2
X2
L2
X1
L1
ON PL
OFF PL
PILOT LIGHTSTRANSFORMER
CONTROL CIRCUIT
21 22
M
H3 H2
FU
X1 X2
G
X2
L2
X1
L1
95 96A1 A2
13 14
OFF
HAND AUTO
REMOTE SWITCH
23 24 1
OL
M
H1(L1) H4(L2)
2
M
X1
L1
START
AUX
STOP
X2
L2
95 96A1 A221
13 14
13 14
22
OL
X1
L1
OFF ON
X2
L2
95 96A1 A2
13 14
OL
M
FUSIBLE COMBINATION
M
A1
A1
X2
95 96
L2
A2
OL
L1
H1
T1
L2
H4
L3
T3
M
OL
T2
MTR
WIRING

743. fi 693MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
FUSIBLE AND NON-FUSIBLE MOTOR STARTERS
FCXLS, NFCXLS SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION - FCXLS
Part
Number
HP Voltage
Coil
Voltage
Enclosure
NEMA Rating
Coil
Inrush
Coil Holding
Current
Overload
Range
Fuse Block
Rating
Dimensions
in (cm)
Weight
lb (kg)
FCXLS7K-1G-O-M01-HOA-PL
5 200/230
24 VAC
1
45 VA 6 VA 14.5-18 30A
12" x 10" x 6"
(30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2)
18 (8.16)
FCXLS7K-1G-O-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS7K-1A-O-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
FCXLS7K-1A-O-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS7K-2G-O-M01-HOA-PL
10 460
24 VAC
1
45 VA 6 VA
14.5-18

Amps
30A
12" x 10" x 6"
(30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2)
18 (8.16)
FCXLS7K-2G-O-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS7K-2A-O-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
FCXLS7K-2A-O-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS11K-1G-ON-M01-HOA-PL
7.5 230
24 VAC
1
88 VA 9 VA 21-26
Amps 60A
16" x 12" x 8"
(40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3)
18 (8.16)
FCXLS11K-1G-ON-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS11K-1A-ON-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
FCXLS11K-1A-ON-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS11K-2G-ON-M01-HOA-PL
15 460
24 VAC
1
88 VA 9 VA 21-26
Amps 30A
12" x 10" x 6"
(30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2)
18 (8.16)
18 (8.16)
18 (8.16)
18 (8.16)
FCXLS11K-2G-ON-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS11K-2A-ON-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
FCXLS11K-2A-ON-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS15K-1G-Q-M01-HOA-PL
10 200
24 VAC
1
88 VA 9 VA 30-40
Amps 60A
16" x 12" x 8"
(40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3)
27 (12.2)
FCXLS15K-1G-Q-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS15K-1A-Q-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
FCXLS15K-1A-Q-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS15K-2G-Q-M01-HOA-PL
10 230
24 VAC
1
88 VA 9 VA 30-40
Amps 60A
16" x 12" x 8"
(40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3)
27 (12.2)
FCXLS15K-2G-Q-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS15K-2A-Q-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
FCXLS15K-2A-Q-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS15K-3G-Q-M01-HOA-PL
20 460
24 VAC
1
88 VA 9 VA 30-40
Amps 60A
16" x 12" x 8"
(40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3)
27 (12.2)
FCXLS15K-3G-Q-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS15K-3A-Q-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
FCXLS15K-3A-Q-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS22K-1G-RN-M01-HOA-PL
15 200/230
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 54-65 Amps 100A
20" x 16" x 8"
(50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3)
41 (18.6)
FCXLS22K-1G-RN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS22K-1A-RN-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
FCXLS22K-1A-RN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS22K-2G-QN-M01-HOA-PL
30 460
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 42-55 Amps 60A
20" x 16" x 8"
(50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3)
41 (18.6)
FCXLS22K-2G-QN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS22K-2A-QN-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
FCXLS22K-2A-QN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS37K-1G-SN-M01-HOA-PL
20/25 200/230
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 64-82 Amps 100A
20" x 16" x 8"
(50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3)
42 (19.1)
FCXLS37K-1G-SN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS37K-1A-SN-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
FCXLS37K-1A-SN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS37K-2G-SN-M01-HOA-PL
50 460
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 64-82 Amps 100A
20" x 16" x 8"
(50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3)
42 (19.1)
FCXLS37K-2G-SN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS37K-2A-SN-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
FCXLS37K-2A-SN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS45K-1G-TM-M01-HOA-PL
25/30 200/230
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 78-97 Amps 100A
20" x 16" x 8"
(50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3)
44 (20)
FCXLS45K-1G-TM-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS45K-1A-TM-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
FCXLS45K-1A-TM-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS45K-2G-TM-M01-HOA-PL
60 460
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 78-97 Amps 100A
20" x 16" x 8"
(50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3)
44 (20)
FCXLS45K-2G-TM-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS45K-2A-TM-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
FCXLS45K-2A-TM-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS55K-1G-TN-M01-HOA-PL
40 230
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 90-110 Amps200A
30" x 24" x 8"
(76.2 x 61 x 20.3)
88 (40)
FCXLS55K-1G-TN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS55K-1A-TN-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
FCXLS55K-1A-TN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS55K-2G-TN-M01-HOA-PL
75 460
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 90-110 Amps200A
30" x 24" x 8"
(76.2 x 61 x 20.3)
88 (40)
FCXLS55K-2G-TN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS55K-2A-TN-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
FCXLS55K-2A-TN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS75K-1G-TT-M01-HOA-PL
40/50 200/230
24 VAC
1
400 VA 32 VA
140-190
Amps
200A
36" x 24" x 10"
(91.4 x 61 x 25.4)
124 (56.2)
FCXLS75K-1G-TT-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS75K-1A-TT-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
FCXLS75K-1A-TT-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS75K-2G-TT-M01-HOA-PL
100 460
24 VAC
1
400 VA 32 VA
140-190
Amps
200A
36" x 24" x 10"
(91.4 x 61 x 25.4)
124 (56.2)
FCXLS75K-2G-TT-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FCXLS75K-2A-TT-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
FCXLS75K-2A-TT-M4-HOA-PL 12/4

744. fi
MOTOR CONTROLS 694fi
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION - NFCXLS
Part Number HP Voltage
Coil
Voltage
Enclosure
NEMA Rating
Coil
Inrush
Coil Holding
Current
Overload
Range
Dimensions
in (cm)
Weight
lb (kg)
NFCXLS7K-1G-O-M01-HOA-PL
5 200/230
24 VAC
1
45 VA 6 VA
14.5-18
Amps
12" x 10" x 6" (30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2) 17 (7.7)
NFCXLS7K-1G-O-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS7K-1A-O-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
NFCXLS7K-1A-O-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS7K-2G-O-M01-HOA-PL
10 460
24 VAC
1
45 VA 6 VA
14.5-18
Amps
12" x 10" x 6" (30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2) 17 (7.7)
NFCXLS7K-2G-O-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS7K-2A-O-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
NFCXLS7K-2A-O-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS11K-1G-ON-M01-HOA-PL
7.5 230
24 VAC
1
88 VA 9 VA 21-26 Amps 12" x 10" x 6" (30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2) 17 (7.7)
NFCXLS11K-1G-ON-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS11K-1A-ON-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
NFCXLS11K-1A-ON-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS11K-2G-ON-M01-HOA-PL
15 460
24 VAC
1
88 VA 9 VA 21-26 Amps 12" x 10" x 6" (30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2) 17 (7.7)
NFCXLS11K-2G-ON-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS11K-2A-ON-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
NFCXLS11K-2A-ON-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS15K-1G-Q-M01-HOA-PL
10 200
24 VAC
1
88 VA 9 VA 30-40 Amps 12" x 10" x 6" (30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2) 18 (8.2)
NFCXLS15K-1G-Q-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS15K-1A-Q-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
NFCXLS15K-1A-Q-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS15K-2G-Q-M01-HOA-PL
10 230
24 VAC
1
88 VA 9 VA 30-40 Amps 12" x 10" x 6" (30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2) 18 (8.2)
NFCXLS15K-2G-Q-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS15K-2A-Q-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
NFCXLS15K-2A-Q-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS15K-3G-Q-M01-HOA-PL
20 460
24 VAC
1
88 VA 9 VA 30-40 Amps 12" x 10" x 6" (30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2) 18 (8.2)
NFCXLS15K-3G-Q-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS15K-3A-Q-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
NFCXLS15K-3A-Q-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS22K-1G-RN-M01-HOA-PL
15 200/230
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 54-65 Amps 16" x 12" x 8" (40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3) 27 (12.2)
NFCXLS22K-1G-RN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS22K-1A-RN-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
NFCXLS22K-1A-RN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS22K-2G-QN-M01-HOA-PL
30 460
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 42-55 Amps 16" x 12" x 8" (40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3) 27 (12.2)
NFCXLS22K-2G-QN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS22K-2A-QN-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
NFCXLS22K-2A-QN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS37K-1G-SN-M01-HOA-PL
20/25 200/230
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 64-82 Amps 16" x 12" x 8" (40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3) 28 (12.7)
NFCXLS37K-1G-SN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS37K-1A-SN-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
NFCXLS37K-1A-SN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS37K-2G-SN-M01-HOA-PL
50 460
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 64-82 Amps 16" x 12" x 8" (40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3) 28 (12.7)
NFCXLS37K-2G-SN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS37K-2A-SN-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
NFCXLS37K-2A-SN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS45K-1G-TM-M01-HOA-PL
25/30 200/230
24 VAC
120 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 78-97 Amps 20" x 16" x 8" (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3) 38 (17.2)
NFCXLS45K-1G-TM-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS45K-1A-TM-M01-HOA-PL 1
NFCXLS45K-1A-TM-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS45K-2G-TM-M01-HOA-PL
60 460
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA 78-97 Amps 20" x 16" x 8" (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3) 38 (17.2)
NFCXLS45K-2G-TM-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS45K-2A-TM-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
NFCXLS45K-2A-TM-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS55K-1G-TN-M01-HOA-PL
40 230
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA
90-110
Amps
20" x 16" x 8" (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3) 40 (18.1)
NFCXLS55K-1G-TN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS55K-1A-TN-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
NFCXLS55K-1A-TN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS55K-2G-TN-M01-HOA-PL
75 460
24 VAC
1
191 VA 17 VA
90-110
Amps
20" x 16" x 8" (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3) 40 (18.1)
NFCXLS55K-2G-TN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS55K-2A-TN-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
NFCXLS55K-2A-TN-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS75K-1G-TT-M01-HOA-PL
40/50 200/230
24 VAC
1
400 VA 32 VA
140-190
Amps
24" x 20" x 8" (60.1 x 50.8 x 20.3) 65 (29.4)
NFCXLS75K-1G-TT-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS75K-1A-TT-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
NFCXLS75K-1A-TT-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS75K-2G-TT-M01-HOA-PL
100 460
24 VAC
1
400 VA 32 VA
140-190
Amps
24" x 20" x 8" (60.1 x 50.8 x 20.3) 65 (29.4)
NFCXLS75K-2G-TT-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
NFCXLS75K-2A-TT-M01-HOA-PL
120 VAC
1
NFCXLS75K-2A-TT-M4-HOA-PL 12/4
FUSIBLE AND NON-FUSIBLE MOTOR STARTERS
FCXLS, NFCXLS SERIES

745. fi 695MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage Model specific, 3 phase, 60 Hz,
380-480 VAC or 200-240 VAC
Motor Rating 0.75 to 250 Hp
Frequency Range 0-320 Hz
Acceleration Time 0.1 - 3000 seconds
Deceleration Time 0.1 - 3000 seconds
Digital Input 6 logical, 24 VDC= on, 0 VDC= off,
all configurable
Analog Input 2; 0-010v or 4-20 mA voltage
Input impedance 200Ω k
Current impedance 250Ω
Digital Output Open collector, max. load
48V/ 50 mA
Analog Output 1; 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA
programmable
500Ω maximum load
Relay Outputs 2; SPDT 8A at 24VDC or 250 VAC
0.4A at 125 VDC minimum load
10mA at 5 VAC/VDC
Filter Type 5% DC choke (Frame D and E
standard; 3% built in) -- Optional for
frames A, B, C
Class 2 GMC/ RFI
EMC Complies with EN50082-1, -2
EN61800-3
Communication Protocol
RS485 MODBUS, BACnet
Operating Humidity 0 to 90% RH, non-condensing
Operating Temperature 14° to 104°F (-10° to 40°C)
Approvals UL Listed File E190898, CE, RoHS
Eco Friendly Yes
Warranty 3 years
HONEYWELL VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
CORE VFD
DESCRIPTION
CORE VFDs are an economical option drive option with easy
to set up functionality. The firmware includes special features
that make start-up and commissioning of HVAC applications especially easy
. The Wizard consists of critical commissioning
questions to intuitively guide users through parameter setup process, which covers nearly all your commercial heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) applications
.
Additionally
, the VFD CORE is rated for constant torque for
industrial applications
. The CORE VFD line is also available
with a bypass option which is also easy to integrate. The
by-pass comes with a control transformer, time delay fuses, 3 contactors, primary and secondary fuses
. The CORE line of
VFDs is a time saver as well as an energy saver.
FEATURES
• Intuitive commissioning
• Start-up wizard
• Real-time clock
• Detachable keypad
• PID with sleep control
SPECIFICATIONS
HCRDA005DA1000T
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Frame 208/230 VAC 460 VAC
Enclosure
NEMA type
Width
in (cm)
Height
in (cm)
Depth
in (cm)
Weight
lb (kg)
A 1.0 - 7.5 HP 1.0 - 10 HP NEMA 1 5.12 (13.0) 9.84 (25.0) 6.69 (17.0) 6.17 (2.8)
B 10 - 15 HP 15 HP NEMA 1 7.48 (19.0) 12.6 (32.0) 7.48 (19.0) 10.14 (4.6)
B 20 HP 20 - 25 HP NEMA 1 7.48 (19.0) 12.6 (32.0) 7.48 (19.0) 12.35 (5.6)
C 25 - 40 HP NEMA 1 9.84 (25.0) 15.75 (40.0) 8.27 (21.0) 23.15 (10.5)
C 30 - 40 HP NEMA 1 9.84 (25.0) 15.75 (40.0) 8.27 (21.0) 19.18 (8.7)
C 50 HP NEMA 1 9.84 (25.0) 15.75 (40.0) 8.27 (21.0) 20.72 (9.4)
D 50 - 60 HP 60 - 75 HP NEMA 1 12.99 (33.0) 27.10 (68.83) 10.83 (27.5) 78.26 (35.5)
D 100 - 125 HP NEMA 1 12.99 (33.0) 27.10 (68.83) 10.83 (27.5) 89.29 (40.5)
E 75 HP NEMA 1 14.57 (37.0) 28.18 (71.58) 11.81 (30.0) 100.75 (45.7)
E 100 HP NEMA 1 14.57 (37.0) 28.18 (71.58) 11.81 (30.0) 101.85 (46.2)
E 125 HP NEMA 1 14.57 (37.0) 28.18 (71.58) 11.81 (30.0) 120.59 (54.7)

746. fi
MOTOR CONTROLS 696fi
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Frame Sizes A, B, and C
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
FWD
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
NFB
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
MOTOR
JUMPER
DC CHOKE
(OPTIONAL)BREAKING RESISTOR
(OPTIONAL)
IM
3~
REV
MI1
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
3-PHASE POWER IS PROVIDED
FUSE/NO FUSE BREAKER
FACTORY SETTING:
PNP SOURCE
PRESET SPD 1
PRESET SPD 2
PRESET SPD3
PRESET SPD 4
EXT FA ULT
FAULT RESET
NA
NA
MI3
MI2
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
MI8
MULTI-FUNCTION
OUTPUT TERMINALS
RA1
RB1
RC1
RA2
RC2
RA3
RC3
250VAC/6A
30VDC/6A
30VDC/5A
MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT
FREQUENCY TERMINALS
250VAC/5A
MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT
FREQUENCY TERMINALS
250VAC/5A
30VDC/5A
DCM
SCM
S1
DIGITA L SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL WHILE
USING INTERNAL POWER TO RUN SINK MODE
FACTORY
SETTING
POWER REMOV AL SAFETY FUNCTION
FOR EMERGENCY STOP
DIGITA L SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL
+10V/20mA
0~10V/0~20mA
0-20mA/0~10V
ANALOG SIGNAL
COMMON TERMINAL
3
2
1
5Kfi
MAIN CIRCUIT (POWER)
TERMINALS
CONTRO L
TERMINALS
SHIELDED
LEADS &
CABLES
+10V
AVI1
ACI
AVI2
ACM
AFM1
ACM
AFM2
ANALOG MULT I-FUNCTION
OUTPUT TERMINAL
0~10V/0~20mA
ANALOG SIGNAL
COMMON TERMINAL
ANALOG MULT I-FUNCTION
OUTPUT TERMINAL
0~10V/0~20mA
OPTION SLOT 1
OPTION SLOT 3
COMMUNICATION EXTENSION CARD
I/O & RELAY EXTENSION CARD
8 1
8 1MODBUS RS-485 PIN 1~2, 7, 8: RESERVED PIN 3, 6: GND PIN 4: SG- PIN 5: SG+
SG+
SG-
0~+10V
COM
DCM
+24V
RA1 (RELAY OUT 1): RU N
RA2 (RELAY OUT 2): FA ULT
RA3 (RELAY OUT 3): READY
MI: MULT IFUNCTION INPUT
AVI: ANALOG VOLTAGE INPUT
ACI: ANALOG CURRENT INPUT
+24V
Frame Sizes D and E
FWD
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
MOTOR
IM
3~
REV
MI1
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
3-PHASE POWER IS PROVIDED
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
NFB
FUSE/NO FUSE BREAKER
FACTORY SETTING:
PNP SOURCE
PRESET SPD 1
PRESET SPD 2
PRESET SPD 3
PRESET SPD 4
EXT FA ULT
FAULT RESET
NA
NA
MI3
MI2
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
MI8
MULTI-FUNCTION
OUTPUT TERMINALS
RA1
RB1
RC1
RA2
RC2
RA3
RC3
250VAC/6A
30VDC/6A
30VDC/5A
250VAC/5A
MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT
FREQUENCY TERMINALS
250VAC/5A
MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT
FREQUENCY TERMINALS
30VDC/5A
DCM
SCM
S1
DIGITA L SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL WHILE
USING INTERNAL POWER TO RUN SINK MODE
FACTORY
SETTING
POWER REMOV AL SAFETY FUNCTION
FOR EMERGENCY STOP
DIGITA L SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL
+10V/20mA
0~10V/0~20mA
0-20mA/0~10V
ANALOG SIGNAL
COMMON TERMINAL
3
2
1
5Kfi
MAIN CIRCUIT
(POWER)
TERMINALS
CONTROL
TERMINALS
SHIELDED
LEADS &
CABLES
+10V
AVI1
ACI
AVI2
ACM
AFM1
ACM
AFM2
ANALOG MULT I-FUNCTION
OUTPUT TERMINAL
0~10V/0~20mA
ANALOG SIGNAL
COMMON TERMINAL
ANALOG MULT I-FUNCTION
OUTPUT TERMINAL
0~10V/0~20mA
OPTION SLOT 1
OPTION SLOT 3
COMMUNICATION EXTENSION CARD
I/O & RELAY EXTENSION CARD
8 1
8 1MODBUS RS-485 PIN 1~2, 7, 8: RESERVED PIN 3, 6: GND PIN 4: SG- PIN 5: SG+
SG+
SG-
0~+10V
COM
DCM
+24V
+1/DC+ -/DC+
r
s
R
S
FRAME E
RA1 (RELAY OUT 1): RU N
RA2 (RELAY OUT 2): FA ULT
RA3 (RELAY OUT 3): READY
MI: MULT IFUNCTION INPUT
AVI: ANALOG VOLTAGE INPUT
ACI: ANALOG CURRENT INPUT
+24V
Source Mode with internal power (+24 VDC)
M1
M2
M8
+24V
DCM
COM
INTERNAL CIRCUIT
WIRING
HONEYWELL VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
CORE VFD

747. fi 697MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HCRD
A0020A1000T
Core VFD 230 V, 2 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDA0030A1000T Core VFD 230 V, 3 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDA0050A1000T Core VFD 230 V, 5 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDA0075A1000T Core VFD 230 V, 7.5 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDA0100B1000T Core VFD 230 V, 10 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDA0150B1000T Core VFD 230 V, 15 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDA0200B1000T Core VFD 230 V, 20 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDA0250C1000T Core VFD 230 V, 25 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDA0300C1000T Core VFD 230 V, 30 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDA0400C1000T Core VFD 230 V, 40 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDA0500D1000T Core VFD 230 V, 50 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDA0600D1000T Core VFD 230 V, 60 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDA0750E1000T Core VFD 230 V, 75 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDA1000E1000T Core VFD 230 V, 100 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDA1250E1000T Core VFD 230 V, 125 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDC0010A1000T Core VFD 460 V, 1 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDC0020A1000T Core VFD 460 V, 2 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDC0030A1000T Core VFD 460 V, 3 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDC0050A1000T Core VFD 460 V, 5 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDC0075A1000T Core VFD 460 V, 7.5 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDC0100A1000T Core VFD 460 V, 10 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDC0150B1000T Core VFD 460 V, 15 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDC0200B1000T Core VFD 460 V, 20 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDC0250B1000T Core VFD 460 V, 25 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDC0300C1000T Core VFD 460 V, 30 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDC0400C1000T Core VFD 460 V, 40 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDC0500C1000T Core VFD 460 V, 50 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDC0600D1000T Core VFD 460 V, 60 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDC0750D1000T Core VFD 460 V, 75 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDC1000D1000T Core VFD 460 V, 100 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDC1250D1000T Core VFD 460 V, 125 HP, NEMA 1
HCRDA0010A1000T Core VFD 230 V, 1 HP, NEMA 1
HONEYWELL VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
CORE VFD

748. fi
MOTOR CONTROLS 698fi
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage Model specific, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 380-
480 VAC or 200-240 VAC
Motor Rating 0.75 to 250 Hp
Frequency Range 0-320 Hz
Acceleration Time 0.1 - 3000 seconds
Deceleration Time 0.1 - 3000 seconds
Digital Inputs 6 logical, 24 VDC = on, 0 VDC = off,
all configurable
Analog Input 2; 0-010V or 4-20 mA voltage
Input Impedance 200Ω k
Current Impedance 250Ω
Digital Output Open collector, max. load 48V/ 50
mA
Analog Output 1; 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA
programmable
500Ω maximum load
Relay Outputs 2; SPDT 8A at 24VDC or 250 VAC
0.4A at 125 VDC minimum load
10mA at 5 VAC/VDC
Filter Type 5% DC choke optional on frames
A, B, and C
Class 2 GMC/ RFI
EMC Complies with EN50082-1, -2
EN61800-3
Communication Protocol
RS485 MODBUS, BACnet
Operating Humidity 0 to 90% RH, non-condensing
Operating Temperature 14° to 104°F (-10° to 40°C)
Approvals UL Listed File #E190898, CE, RoHS
Eco Friendly Yes
Warranty 3 years
HONEYWELL VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
CORE VFD WITH BYPASS
DESCRIPTION
The CORE VFD with a bypass option comes with a control
transformer, time delay fuses, three contactors, primary and
secondary fuses
. CORE VFDs are an economical option drive
option with easy to set up functionality. The firmware includes
special features that make start-up and commissioning of HVAC applications especially easy
. The Wizard consists of
critical commissioning questions to intuitively guide users through a parameter setup process, which covers nearly all your commercial heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) applications
. Additionally, the VFD CORE is rated for
constant torque for industrial applications. The CORE line of
VFDs is a time saver as well as an energy saver.
FEATURES
• Intuitive commissioning
• Start-up wizard
• Real-time clock
• Detachable keypad
• PID with sleep control
SPECIFICATIONS
Core VFD with Bypass
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Frame 208/230 VAC 460 VAC
Enclosure
NEMA type
Width
in (cm)
Height
in (cm)
Depth
in (cm)
Weight
lb (kg)
A 1.0 - 7.5 HP 1.0 - 10 HP NEMA 1 8.9 (22.7) 22.0 (55.9) 9.3 (23.6) 37.0 (16.78)
B 10 - 20 HP 15 - 25 HP NEMA 1 12.4 (31.6) 48.0 (121.9) 9.66 (24.5) 67.0(30.39)
C 25 - 40 hp 30 - 50 HP NEMA 1 12.4 (31.6) 48.0 (121.9) 9.66 (24.5) 83.0 (37.65)
D 50 - 60 HP 60 - 125 HP NEMA 1 19.5 (49.7) 53.5 (135.9) 11.4 (29.1) 193.0 (87.54)
E 75 - 125 HP NEMA 1 23.0 (48.3) 66.5 (168.9) 14.4 (36.7) 225 (102.06)

749. fi 699MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Frame Sizes A, B, and C
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
FWD
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
NFB
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
MOTOR
JUMPER
DC CHOKE
(OPTIONAL)BREAKING RESISTO R
(OPTIONAL)
IM
3~
REV
MI1
FWD/STO P
REV/STOP
3-PHASE POWER IS PROVIDED
FUSE/NO FUSE BREAKER
FACTORY SETTING:
PNP SOURCE
PRESET SPD 1
PRESET SPD 2
PRESET SPD3
PRESET SPD 4
EXT FA ULT
FAULT RESET
NA
NA
MI3
MI2
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
MI8
MULTI-FUNCTION
OUTPUT TERMINALS
RA1
RB1
RC1
RA2
RC2
RA3
RC3
250VAC/6A
30VDC/6A
30VDC/5A
MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT
FREQUENCY TERMINALS
250VAC/5A
MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT
FREQUENCY TERMINALS
250VAC/5A
30VDC/5A
DCM
SCM
S1
DIGITA L SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL WHILE
USING INTERNAL POWER TO RUN SINK MODE
FACTORY
SETTING
POWER REMOV AL SAFETY FUNCTION
FOR EMERGENCY STOP
DIGITA L SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL
+10V/20mA
0~10V/0~20mA
0-20mA/0~10V
ANALOG SIGNAL
COMMON TERMINAL
3
2
1
5Kfi
MAIN CIRCUIT (POW ER)
TERMINALS
CONTROL
TERMINALS
SHIELDED
LEADS &
CABLES
+10V
AVI1
ACI
AVI2
ACM
AFM1
ACM
AFM2
ANALOG MULTI-FUNCTION
OUTPUT TERMINAL
0~10V/0~20mA
ANALOG SIGNAL
COMMON TERMINAL
ANALOG MULTI-FUNCTION
OUTPUT TERMINAL
0~10V/0~20mA
OPTION SLOT 1
OPTION SLOT 3
COMMUNICATION EXTENSION CARD
I/O & RELAY EXTENSION CARD
8 1
8 1MODBUS RS-485 PIN 1~2, 7, 8: RESERVED PIN 3, 6: GND PIN 4: SG- PIN 5: SG+
SG+
SG-
0~+10V
COM
DCM
+24V
RA1 (RELAY OUT 1): RU N
RA2 (RELAY OUT 2): FA ULT
RA3 (RELAY OUT 3): READY
MI: MULT IFUNCTION INPUT
AVI: ANALOG VOLTAGE INPUT
ACI: ANALOG CURRENT INPUT
+24V
WIRING
HONEYWELL VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
CORE VFD WITH BYPASS

750. fi
MOTOR CONTROLS 700fi
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Frame Sizes D and E
FWD
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
MOTOR
IM
3~
REV
MI1
FWD/STO P
REV/STOP
3-PHASE POWER IS PROVIDED
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
NFB
FUSE/NO FUSE BREAKER
FACTORY SETTING:
PNP SOURCE
PRESET SPD 1
PRESET SPD 2
PRESET SPD 3
PRESET SPD 4
EXT FA ULT
FAULT RESET
NA
NA
MI3
MI2
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
MI8
MULTI-FUNCTION
OUTPUT TERMINALS
RA1
RB1
RC1
RA2
RC2
RA3
RC3
250VAC/6A
30VDC/6A
30VDC/5A
250VAC/5A
MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT
FREQUENCY TERMINALS
250VAC/5A
MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT
FREQUENCY TERMINALS
30VDC/5A
DCM
SCM
S1
DIGITA L SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL WHILE
USING INTERNAL POWER TO RUN SINK MODE
FACTORY
SETTING
POWER REMOVAL SAFETY FUNCTION
FOR EMERGENCY STOP
DIGITA L SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL
+10V/20mA
0~10V/0~20mA
0-20mA/0~10V
ANALOG SIGNAL
COMMON TERMINAL
3
2
1
5Kfi
MAIN CIRCUIT
(POWER)
TERMINALS
CONTRO L
TERMINALS
SHIELDED
LEADS &
CABLES
+10V
AVI1
ACI
AVI2
ACM
AFM1
ACM
AFM2
ANALOG MULTI-FUNCTION
OUTPUT TERMINAL
0~10V/0~20mA
ANALOG SIGNAL
COMMON TERMINAL
ANALOG MULTI-FUNCTION
OUTPUT TERMINAL
0~10V/0~20mA
OPTION SLOT 1
OPTION SLOT 3
COMMUNICATION EXTENSION CARD
I/O & RELAY EXTENSION CARD
8 1
8 1MODBUS RS-485 PIN 1~2, 7, 8: RESERVED PIN 3, 6: GND PIN 4: SG- PIN 5: SG+
SG+
SG-
0~+10V
COM
DCM
+24V
+1/DC+ -/DC+
r
s
R
S
FRAME E
RA1 (RELAY OUT 1): RU N
RA2 (RELAY OUT 2): FA ULT
RA3 (RELAY OUT 3): READY
MI: MULTIFUNCTION INPUT
AVI: ANALOG VOLTAGE INPUT
ACI: ANALOG CURRENT INPUT
+24V
WIRING (continued)
HONEYWELL VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
CORE VFD WITH BYPASS

751. fi 701MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HCRB
A0010A1300T
CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/1 HP/NEMA 1
HCRBA0020A1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/2HP/NEMA 1/FRA
HCRBA0030A1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/3HP/NEMA 1/FRA
HCRBA0050A1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/5HP/NEMA 1/FRA
HCRBA0075A1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/7.5HP/NEMA 1/FRA
HCRBA0100B1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/10HP/NEMA 1/FRB
HCRBA0150B1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/15HP/NEMA 1/FRB
HCRBA0200B1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/20HP/NEMA 1/FRB
HCRBA0250C1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/25HP/NEMA 1/FRC
HCRBA0300C1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/30HP/NEMA 1/FRC
HCRBA0400C1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/40HP/NEMA 1/FRC
HCRBA0500D1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/50HP/NEMA 1/FRD
HCRBA0600D1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/60HP/NEMA 1/FRD
HCRBA0750E1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/75HP/NEMA 1/FRE
HCRBA1000E1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/100HP/NEMA 1/FRE
HCRBA1250E1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/125HP/NEMA 1/FRE
HCRBB0010A1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/1HP/NEMA 1/FRA
HCRBB0020A1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/2HP/NEMA 1/FRA
HCRBB0030A1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/3HP/NEMA 1/FRA
HCRBB0050A1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/5HP/NEMA 1/FRA
HCRBB0075A1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/7.5HP/NEMA 1/FRA
HCRBB0100B1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/10HP/NEMA 1/FRB
HCRBB0150B1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/15HP/NEMA 1/FRB
HCRBB0200B1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/20HP/NEMA 1/FRB
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HCRBB0250C1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/25HP/NEMA 1/FRC
HCRBB0300C1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/30HP/NEMA 1/FRC
HCRBB0400C1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/40HP/NEMA 1/FRC
HCRBB0500D1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/50HP/NEMA 1/FRD
HCRBB0600D1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/60HP/NEMA 1/FRD
HCRBB0750E1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/75HP/NEMA 1/FRE
HCRBB1000E1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/100HP/NEMA 1/FRE
HCRBB1250E1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/125HP/NEMA 1/FRE
HCRBC0010A1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/1HP/NEMA 1/FRA
HCRBC0020A1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/2HP/NEMA 1/FRA
HCRBC0030A1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/3HP/NEMA 1/FRA
HCRBC0050A1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/5HP/NEMA 1/FRA
HCRBC0075A1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/7.5HP/NEMA 1/FRA
HCRBC0100A1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/10HP/NEMA 1/FRA
HCRBC0150B1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/15HP/NEMA 1/FRB
HCRBC0200B1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/20HP/NEMA 1/FRB
HCRBC0250B1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/25HP/NEMA 1/FRB
HCRBC0300C1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/30HP/NEMA 1/FRC
HCRBC0400C1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/40HP/NEMA 1/FRC
HCRBC0500C1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/50HP/NEMA 1/FRC
HCRBC0600D1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/60HP/NEMA 1/FRD
HCRBC0750D1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/75HP/NEMA 1/FRD
HCRBC1000D1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/100HP/NEMA 1/FRD
HCRBC1250D1300T CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/125HP/NEMA 1/FRD
Transformer
Three bypass contactors
shown (BC-1, BC-2, BC-3).
BC-3 not supplied in a two
contactor bypass
M
HVFDSB3
Main Disconnect
L1
L2
L3
U
V
W
L1
L2
L3
BC-3 BC-1
BC-2
To factory wired bypass controls
(switches, coils, etc.)
Note: Typical wiring shown. Refer to product installation manual for electrical wiring connections and requirements.
WIRING (continued)
HONEYWELL VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
CORE VFD WITH BYPASS

752. 1+0V
MOTOR CONTROLS 7021+0V
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3
phase output
380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/
output
Motor Rating 0.25 - 7.5 hp
Acceleration Time 0.1- 3000 seconds
Deceleration Time 0.1 - 3000 seconds
Frequency Range 30 - 320 Hz
Digital Switch Inputs
6; 0 - 30 VDC programmable
Analog Inputs
2; (1) 0-10 VDC, (1) 0-20 mA or
4-20 mA
Digital Outputs
1 Open Collector, max. load 48V/
50mA
Analog Output
1, 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA, RL=500Ω
Relay Outputs
2; (1) SPST N.O. (1) SPDT 250
V
AC/2A, 250 VDC/0
.4A
Filter Type RFI
Communication Protocol
RS485 (Modbus protocol), Serial
Operating Humidity 0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Operating Temperature 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)
Frame Size MI1, MI2, MI3
Dimensions Frame sizes
MI1 6.1"H x 2.6"W x 3.9"D
(15.5 x 6.6 x 9.9 cm)
MI2 7.7"H x 3.5"W x 4.0"D
(19.6 x 8.9 x 10.2 cm)
MI3 10.3"D x3.9"W x 4.3"D
(26.2 x 9.9 x 10.9 cm)
Weights MI1
1.20 lb (0.55 kg)
MI2 1.50 lb (0.65 kg)
MI3 2.18 lb (0.99 kg)
Approvals CE, UL, cUL FILE #E190898
Warranty 3 years
HONEYWELL COMPACT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
SMARTDRIVE COMPACT VFD
DESCRIPTION
This compact VFD is a true micro drive, which saves space
in the equipment cabinet and makes installation easy.
The Smar
tDrive architecture allows for ease and speed
in drive configuration
. The intuitive user interface makes
commissioning a breeze. The SmartDrive Compact VFD
provides a standard PI Controller. Choose options to fit
an
y application
. Interface type, filter, enclosure, inputs, and
outputs are available in a wide array of combinations. For wall
mounting, a frame kit is recommended. Frame kits are not
necessary for installation inside a panel.
FEATURES
• Small, compact micro drive design
• PI controller standard
• No main power supply required for programming
• Intuitive user interface
• DIN rail or screw mounting
• Flexible options include inputs, outputs, field bus, and
filtering
• Application interface "touch wheel" makes
programming easy
SPECIFICATIONS
TerminalSignal Factory preset Description
1+10VreRef. voltage out Maximum load 10 mA
2AI1A nalog signal in 1
Freq. reference  P)
0 - +10 V Ri =  200 k 
(min)
3GNDI /O signal ground
624Vout 24V output for DI's
±20%, max. load 50 mA
7GNDI /O signal ground
8DI1D igital input 1
Start forward  P)
      0 - +30 V Ri = 12 k min
9DI2D igital input 2
Start reverse  P)
  
10DI3D igital input 3
Preset speed B0  P)
 
AAR S485 signal AF B Communication
BBR S485 signal BF B Communication
4AI2A nalog signal in 2
PI actual value  P)
 0(4) - 20 mA, Ri = 200
5GNDI /O signal ground
13GNDI /O signal ground
14DI4D igital input 4
Preset speed B1 P)
 0 - +30 V Ri = 12 k (min)
15DI5D igital input 5
Fault reset  P)
16DI6D igital input 6
Disable PI contr.  P)
18AO
Output frequency  P)
 0(4) - 20 mA, RL = 500
20DO Digital signal out
Active = READY  P)
 
Open collector, max. load 
48V/50mA
22RO 11            Relay out 1  
Active = RUN  P)
 
Max. switching load:
250 VAC/2A or 250 VDC/
0.4A
23RO 12
24RO 21             Relay out 2
Active = FAULT  P)Max. switching load:
250 VAC/2A or 250 VDC/
0.4A
25RO 22
26RO 23
P) = Programmable function, see parameter lists and descriptions in installation manual.
mA
API FULL
Note: NEMA 1 frame kits include the top protection from
vertically dripping water with additional physical contact
protection over the wiring terminals
. Recommended for non-
enclosed VFD mounting.
CONTROL I/O

753. fi 703MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
HONEYWELL COMPACT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
SMARTDRIVE COMPACT VFD
ORDERING INFORMATION
Full IO ModelLimited IO Model Supply Voltage
Current
Rating
HorsepowerEMC
Frame
Size
HVFDCD1B0003F00 HVFDCD1B0003L00 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output1.7A 0.25 NO MI1
HVFDCD1B0003F01 HVFDCD1B0003L01 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output1.7A 0.25 YES MI1
HVFDCD1B0005F00 HVFDCD1B0005L00 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output2.4A 0.5 NO MI1
HVFDCD1B0005F01 HVFDCD1B0005L01 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output2.4A 0.5 YES MI1
HVFDCD1B0007F00 HVFDCD1B0007L00 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output2.8A 0.75 NO MI1
HVFDCD1B0007F01 HVFDCD1B0007L01 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output2.8A 0.75 YES MI1
HVFDCD1B0010F00 HVFDCD1B0010L00 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output3.7A 1 NO MI1
HVFDCD1B0010F01 HVFDCD1B0010L01 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output3.7A 1 YES MI1
HVFDCD1B0015F00 HVFDCD1B0015L00 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output4.8A 1.5 NO MI2
HVFDCD1B0015F01 HVFDCD1B0015L01 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output4.8A 1.5 YES MI2
HVFDCD1B0020F00 HVFDCD1B0020L00 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output7.0A 2 NO MI2
HVFDCD1B0020F01 HVFDCD1B0020L01 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output7.0A 2 YES MI2
HVFDCD1B0030F00 HVFDCD1B0030L00 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output11.0A 3 NO MI3
HVFDCD1B0030F01 HVFDCD1B0030L01 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output11.0A 3 YES MI3
HVFDCD3C0005F00 HVFDCD3C0005L00 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output1.3A 0.5 NO MI1
HVFDCD3C0005F01 HVFDCD3C0005L01 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output1.3A 0.5 YES MI1
HVFDCD3C0007F00 HVFDCD3C0007L00 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output1.9A 0.75 NO MI1
HVFDCD3C0007F01 HVFDCD3C0007L01 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output1.9A 0.75 YES MI1
HVFDCD3C0010F00 HVFDCD3C0010L00 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output2.4A 1 NO MI1
HVFDCD3C0010F01 HVFDCD3C0010L01 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output2.4A 1 YES MI1
HVFDCD3C0015F00 HVFDCD3C0015L00 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output3.3A 1.5 NO MI1
HVFDCD3C0015F01 HVFDCD3C0015L01 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output3.3A 1.5 YES MI1
HVFDCD3C0020F00 HVFDCD3C0020L00 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output4.3A 2 NO MI2
HVFDCD3C0020F01 HVFDCD3C0020L01 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output4.3A 2 YES MI2
HVFDCD3C0030F00 HVFDCD3C0030L00 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output5.6A 3 NO MI2
HVFDCD3C0030F01 HVFDCD3C0030L01 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output5.6A 3 YES MI2
HVFDCD3C0040F00 HVFDCD3C0040L00 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output7.6A 4 NO MI3
HVFDCD3C0040F01 HVFDCD3C0040L01 460 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output7.6A 4 YES MI3
HVFDCD3C0050F00 HVFDCD3C0050L00 460 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output9.0A 5 NO MI3
HVFDCD3C0050F01 HVFDCD3C0050L01 460 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output9.0A 5 YES MI3
HVFDCD3C0075F00 HVFDCD3C0075L00 460 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output12.0A 7.5 NO MI3
HVFDCD3C0075F01 HVFDCD3C0075L01 460 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output12.0A 7.5 YES MI3
ACCESSORIES
HVFDCABLE Commissioning cable and USB adaptor
HVFDCDMCA VFD commissioning device
HVFDCDMCAKIT Commisioning kit
HVFDCDNEMA1FR1 Enclosure upgrade Nema 1 kit frame size1
HVFDCDNEMA1FR2 Enclosure upgrade Nema 1 kit frame size2
HVFDCDNEMA1FR3 Enclosure upgrade Nema 1 kit frame size3

754. fi
MOTOR CONTROLS 704fi
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
HONEYWELL ALL PURPOSE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
SMARTVFD HVAC
Supply Voltage Model specific, 3 phase, 60 Hz,
380-480 VAC or 200-240 VAC
Motor Rating 0.75 to 250 Hp
Frequency Range 0-320 Hz
Acceleration Time 0.1 - 3000 seconds
Deceleration Time 0.1 - 3000 seconds
Digital Inputs 6 logical, 24 VDC= on, 0 VDC= off,
all configurable
Analog Input 2; 0-10V or 4-20 mA voltage
input impedance 200Ω k
current impedance 250Ω
Digital Output Open collector,
max. load 48V/ 50 mA
Analog Output 1; 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA
programmable
500Ω maximum load
Relay Outputs 2; SPDT 8A at 24 VDC or 250 VAC
0.4A at 125 VDC minimum load
10mA at 5 VAC/VDC
Filter Type 5% DC choke
Class 2 GMC/ RFI
EMC Complies with EN50082-1, -2
EN61800-3
Communication Protocol
RS485 JCI N2, MODBUS, BACnet MS/TP
Ethernet BACnet/ IP, Modbus/TCP
Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Operating Temperature 14° to 104°F (-10° to 40°C)
Approvals UL Listed File E190898 CE RoHS
Eco Friendly Yes
Warranty 3 years
DESCRIPTION
SmartVFD HVAC drives are all-purpose, and can handle
both constant-torque and variable-torque loads. The
firmware includes special features that make start-up and commissioning of HVAC applications especially easy
.
Application-specific star
tup wizards for pumps and fans,
combined with the simple and intuitive user interface, make the SmartVFD a pleasure rather than a chore. Integration
is a snap with the SmartVFD. It includes both Ethernet and
RS485 connections, and will talk BACnet, Modbus, and JCI N2
. Take the complexity out of drive selection, installation,
and startup - choose SmartVFD for your HVAC projects and start saving time, money, and manpower as well as energy
.
FEATURES
• Intuitive commissioning
• High resolution graphic interface
• User manual included in firmware
• Simple start-up wizard - pump or fan
• Fire mode
• 2 PID controllers
• Real-time clock
SPECIFICATIONS
TerminalS ignal Technical information
1 Reference output+10 VDC, +3%; Maximum current 10 mA
2
Analog input,
voltage or current
Analog input channel 1; Short-circuited protected
0- +10VDC (Ri = 200 kfi)
4-20 mA (Ri = 250 fi) 
Resolution 0.1%, accuracy ±1%
Selection V/mA with dip-switches
3
Analog input 
common (current)
Differential input if not connected to ground; 
Allows ±20V differential mode voltage to GND
4
Analog input
voltage or current
Analog input channel 2; Short-circuited protected
Default: 4-20 mA (Ri =250 fi) 
0-10 VDC (Ri = 200kfi)
Resolution 0.1%, accuracy ±1%
Selection V/mA with dip-switches
5
Analog input 
common (current)
Differential input if not connected to ground; 
Allows 20V differential mode voltage to GND
6 24VDC aux. voltage
+24 VDC, ±10%, max volt. ripple < 100mVrms; max. 250mA
Dimensioning: max. 1000mA/control unit. Short-circuit protected
7 I/O ground
Ground for reference and controls (connected internally to 
frame earth through 1Mfi)
8 Digital input 1 Positive or negative logic
Ri = min. 5kfi
0...5VDC = “0”
15…30VDC = “1”
9 Digital input 2
10 Digital input 3
11
Common A for
DIN1-DIN6
Digital inputs can be disconnected from ground
12 24 VDC aux. voltage
+24 VDC, ±10%, max volt. ripple < 100mVrms; max. 250mA
Dimensioning: max. 1000mA/control unit.
Short-circuit protected
13 I/O ground
Ground for reference and controls (connected internally to 
frame earth through 1Mfi)
14 Digital input 4 Positive or negative logic
Ri = min. 5kfi
0...5VDC = “0”
15…30VDC = “1”
15 Digital input 5
16 Digital input 6
17
Common A for
DIN1-DIN6
Digital inputs can be isolated from ground.
18
Analog signal 
(+output)
Analog output channel 1, selection 0 -20mA, load <500fi
Default: 0-20 mA/0-10 VDC
Resolution 0.1%, accuracy ±2%
Selection V/mA with dip-switches
Short-circuited protected.
19
Analog output 
common
30
24 VDC auxiliary
input voltage
Can be used as external power backup for the control unit
A RS485 Differential receiver/transmitter
Set bus termination with dip switchesB RS485
STANDARD I/O BOARD

755. Rela 705MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
HONEYWELL ALL PURPOSE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
SMARTVFD HVAC
Relay
board
21
Relay
Output 1*
Switching capacity 2 4VDC/8A
250 VAC/8A
125 VDC/0.4A
Min.switching load 5V/10mA
22
23
24
Relay
Output 2*
Switching capacity 24 VDC/8A
250 VAC/8A
125 VDC/0.4A
Min.switching load 5V/10mA
25
26
28
Thermistor
Input
Rtrip = 4.7 kƒ (PTC); 
Measuring voltage 3.5V
29
* If 230VAC is used as control voltage from the 
output relays, the control circuitry must be 
powered with a separate isolation transformer 
to limit short circuit current and ovrvoltage 
spikes. This is to prevent welding on the relay 
contacts. Refer to standard EN 60204-1, 
section 7.2.9
Relay board with two change-over 
contact (SPDT) relays and one relay 
with normally-open (NO or SPST) 
contact. 
5.5 mm isolation between channels.
Relay
Board
TerminalS ignal
21RO1/1 Relay output 1
22RO1/2
23RO1/3
24RO2/1 Relay output 2
25RO2/2
26RO2/3
28TI1+
Thermistor input
29TI1-
From
Standard I/O board
From term.
#13
From term.
#12
RUN
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
RELAY BOARD TECHNICAL INFORMATION RELAY CONNECTIONS
Frame 208/ 230 VAC 460 VAC
Enclosure
NEMA type
Width
in. (cm)
Height
in. (cm)
Depth
in. (cm)
Weight
lb (kg)
4 0.75-4 HP 1.5-7.5 HP 15 (12.7) 12.9 (32.77) 7.5 (19.05) 13.0 (5.9)
4 0.75-4 HP 1.5-7.5 HP 12 5 (12.7) 12.9 (32.77) 7.5 (19.05) 13.0 (5.9)
4 0.75-4 HP 1.5-7.5 HP 3 20.5 (52.07) 20 (50.8) 10 (25.4) 13.0 (5.9)
5 5-10 Hp 10-20 Hp 1 5.7 (14.48) 16.5 (41.91) 8.4 (21.34) 22.0 (10.0)
5 5-10 Hp 10-20 Hp 12 5.7 (14.48) 16.5 (41.91) 8.4 (21.34) 22.0 (10.0)
5 5-10 Hp 10-20 Hp 3 20.5 (52.07) 24 (60.96) 10 (25.4) 22.0 (10.0)
6 15-20 Hp 25-40 Hp 1 7.7 (19.56) 21.9 (55.63) 9 (22.86) 44.0 (20.0)
6 15-20 Hp 25-40 Hp 12 7.7 (19.56) 21.9 (55.63) 9 (22.86) 44.0 (20.0)
6 15-20 Hp 25-40 Hp 3 28.5 (72.39) 36 (88.9) 10 (25.4) 44.0 (20.0)
7 25-40 Hp 50-75 Hp 1 9.3 (23.62) 25.4 (64.51) 10.2 (25.91) 83.0 (37.7)
7 25-40 Hp 50-75 Hp 12 9.3 (23.62) 25.4 (64.51) 10.2 (25.91) 83.0 (37.7)
7 25-40 Hp 50-75 Hp 3 28.8 (73.15) 48 (121.92) 12 (30.48) 83.0 (37.7)
8 50-75 Hp 100-150 Hp 1 11.4 (28.96) 38 (96.52) 13.5 (34.29) 154.0 (70.0)
8 50-75 Hp 100-150 Hp 12 11.4 (28.96) 38 (96.52) 13.5 (34.29) 154.0 (70.0)
8 50-75 Hp 100-150 Hp 3 11.4 (28.96) 38 (96.52) 13.5 (34.29) 154.0 (70.0)
9 100-125 Hp 200-250 Hp 1 18.9 (48.00) 45.3 (115.06) 14.4 (36.58) 238.0 (108.2)
9 100-125 Hp 200-250 Hp 12 18.9 (48.00) 45.3 (115.06) 14.4 (36.58) 238.0 (108.2)

756. fi
MOTOR CONTROLS 706fi
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
HONEYWELL ALL PURPOSE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
SMARTVFD HVAC
HP Amps Frame NEMA 1 NEMA 12 NEMA3R
460 VAC
1.5
3.4 4 HVFDSD3C0015G100 HVFDSD3C0015G200 HVFDSD3C0015G300
2 4.8 4 HVFDSD3C0020G100 HVFDSD3C0020G200 HVFDSD3C0020G300
3 5.6 4 HVFDSD3C0030G100 HVFDSD3C0030G200 HVFDSD3C0030G300
4 84 HVFDSD3C0040G100 HVFDSD3C0040G200 HVFDSD3C0040G300
5 9.6 4 HVFDSD3C0050G100 HVFDSD3C0050G200 HVFDSD3C0050G300
7.5 12 4 HVFDSD3C0075G100 HVFDSD3C0075G200 HVFDSD3C0075G300
10 16 5 HVFDSD3C0100G100 HVFDSD3C0100G200 HVFDSD3C0100G300
15 23 5 HVFDSD3C0150G100 HVFDSD3C0150G200 HVFDSD3C0150G300
20 31 5 HVFDSD3C0200G100 HVFDSD3C0200G200 HVFDSD3C0200G300
25 38 6 HVFDSD3C0250G100 HVFDSD3C0250G200 HVFDSD3C0250G300
30 46 6 HVFDSD3C0300G100 HVFDSD3C0300G200 HVFDSD3C0300G300
40 61 6 HVFDSD3C0400G100 HVFDSD3C0400G200 HVFDSD3C0400G300
50 72 7 HVFDSD3C0500G100 HVFDSD3C0500G200 HVFDSD3C0500G300
60 87 7 HVFDSD3C0600G100 HVFDSD3C0600G200 HVFDSD3C0600G300
75 105 7 HVFDSD3C0750G100 HVFDSD3C0750G200 HVFDSD3C0750G300
100 140 8 HVFDSD3C1000G100 HVFDSD3C1000G200 HVFDSD3C1000G300
125 170 8 HVFDSD3C1250G100 HVFDSD3C1250G200 HVFDSD3C1250G300
150 205 8 HVFDSD3C1500G100 HVFDSD3C1500G200 HVFDSD3C1500G300
200 261 9 HVFDSD3C2000G100 HVFDSD3C2000G200 -
250 310 9 HVFDSD3C2500G100 HVFDSD3C2500G200 -
208/ 230 VAC
0.75
3.7 4 HVFDSD3A0007G100 HVFDSD3A0007G200 HVFDSD3A0007G300
1 4.8 4 HVFDSD3A0010G100 HVFDSD3A0010G200 HVFDSD3A0010G300
1.5 6.6 4 HVFDSD3A0015G100 HVFDSD3A0015G200 HVFDSD3A0015G300
2 84 HVFDSD3A0020G100 HVFDSD3A0020G200 HVFDSD3A0020G300
3 11 4 HVFDSD3A0030G100 HVFDSD3A0030G200 HVFDSD3A0030G300
5 18 5 HVFDSD3A0050G100 HVFDSD3A0050G200 HVFDSD3A0050G300
7.5 24 5 HVFDSD3A0075G100 HVFDSD3A0075G200 HVFDSD3A0075G300
10 31 5 HVFDSD3A0100G100 HVFDSD3A0100G200 HVFDSD3A0100G300
15 48 6 HVFDSD3A0150G100 HVFDSD3A0150G200 HVFDSD3A0150G300
20 62 6 HVFDSD3A0200G100 HVFDSD3A0200G200 HVFDSD3A0200G300
25 75 7 HVFDSD3A0250G100 HVFDSD3A0250G200 HVFDSD3A0250G300
30 88 7 HVFDSD3A0300G100 HVFDSD3A0300G200 HVFDSD3A0300G300
40 105 7 HVFDSD3A0400G100 HVFDSD3A0400G200 HVFDSD3A0400G300
50 140 8 HVFDSD3A0500G100 HVFDSD3A0500G200 HVFDSD3A0500G300
60 170 8 HVFDSD3A0600G100 HVFDSD3A0600G200 HVFDSD3A0600G300
75 205 8 HVFDSD3A0750G100 HVFDSD3A0750G200 HVFDSD3A0750G300
100 261 9 HVFDSD3A1000G100 HVFDSD3A1000G200 -
125 310 9 HVFDSD3A1250G100 HVFDSD3A1250G200 -
Drives are typically sized to match the horsepower rating of the motor, which will be accurate 95 percent of the time. For greatest accuracy, drives
should be sized based upon the Full Load Amps or current draw of the motor. The VFD must have a slightly larger current rating maximum.
ACCESSORIES
32006630-001 LON communication card
HVFDCABLE Commissioning cable and USB adaptor

757. fi 707MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Transformer
Three bypass contactors
shown (BC-1, BC-2, BC-3).
BC-3 not supplied in a two
contactor bypass
M
HVFDSB3
Main Disconnect
L1
L2
L3
U
V
W
L1
L2
L3
BC-3 BC-1
BC-2
To factory wired bypass controls
(switches, coils, etc.)
WIRING
Supply Voltage 208 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz
230 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz
480 VAC, 3 phase, 60Hz
Motor Rating 1.0 to 250 Hp
Frequency Range 0 - 320 Hz
Acceleration Time 0.1 - 3000 seconds
Deceleration Time 0.1 - 3000 seconds
Digital Inputs 6 factory preset
Analog Input 2; 0-10V or 4-20 mA programmable
Digital Output Open collector,
max. load 48V / 50 mA
Analog Output 1; 4-20 mA
Relay Outputs 2 each SPDT 8A at 24 VDC or
250 VAC 0.4A at 125 VDC Minimum
load 10Ma at 5 VAC/VDC
Filter Type 5% DC choke , and class 2 GMC/RFI
EMC Complies with EN50082-1, -2
Communication Protocol
RS485 BACnet MS/TP, N2, Modbus
Ethernet BACnet/ IP, Modbus/TCP
Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Operating Temperature 14° to 104°F (-10° to 40°C)
Approvals UL Listed File #E190898 cUL CE
RoHS
Eco Friendly Yes
Warranty 3 years
HONEYWELL VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE WITH BYPASS
SMARTVFD HVAC WITH BYPASS ASSEMBLY
DESCRIPTION
Honeywell’s integral bypass and disconnect system make
applying the SmartVFD drive a snap. Available with a simple
fused disconnect switch, a 2-contactor bypass assembly, or a 3-contactor bypass assembly, it simplifies installation
. All
the f
eatures of the SmartVFD are included -- a wide array
of configurable inputs and outputs, and all the most popular network protocols, and the super easy startup wizards that speed commissioning
. All drives feature Hand-Off-Auto
operation as a is fully integrated keypad function. Make the
SmartVFD choice for your variable speed drive needs.
FEA
TURES
•
Disconnect, 2-, or 3-contactor bypass
• Fused disconnect
• Auto bypass available
• Available in NEMA 1, 12, or 3R enclosure types
• Compact size
• SmartVFD wizard for pump or fan control
• Intuitive commissioning
• High resolution graphic interface
• User manual built in to firmware
SPECIFICATIONS
Note: Typical wiring shown. Refer to product installation manual for electrical wiring connections and requirements.

758. fi
MOTOR CONTROLS 708fi
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Our five configurations make it easy for you to select the right bypass to complete your drive package. All bundles are available in
NEMA 1, NEMA 12 and ventilated NEMA 3R HOA (HAND OFF AUTO).
Smar
tVFD Disconnect Only
•
Adds a fused disconnect to the VFD.
SmartVFD 2-Contactor Bypass
Provides an economical means of bypassing the VFD.
• Freeze/Fire/Smoke Interlock
SmartVFD 3-Contactor Bypass
Commission, service or replace the VFD without affecting the
operation of the motor
.
• Fused Disconnect
• Freeze/Fire/Smoke Interlock
• VFD is isolated from power with motor running in BYPASS
mode
• TEST position powers the VFD without sending power to the
motor
SmartVFD 3-Contactor Bypass with Auto-Bypass The package adds the control capabilities below to the standard three contactor bypass
.
• Any VFD fault will automatically send the bypass to BYPASS
mode
• A contact closure sends the bypass to BYPASS mode
• Dry contacts indicate when the bypass is in BYPASS mode,
alerting the building management system
SMART VFD BYPASS CONFIGURATIONS
HONEYWELL VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE WITH BYPASS
SMARTVFD HVAC WITH BYPASS ASSEMBLY
DIMENSIONS - IN (CM)
Frame
Size
Horsepower and
Voltage
NEMA 1 NEMA 12 NEMA 3 R
208/ 230
VAC
460 VACConfiguration Width Height Depth Width Height Depth Width Height Depth
4 0.75-4 Hp 1.5-7.5 Hp
Disconnect 8.9 (22.6) 8.9 (22.6) 10.7 (26.2) 12.0 (29.4) 36.0 (88.2) 8.8 (21.6) 20.5 (50.2) 20.0 (49.0) 10.0 (24.5)
2-Contactor 8.9 (22.6) 8.9 (22.6) 10.7 (26.2) 16.0 (39.2) 36.0 (88.2) 8.8 (21.6) 24.5 (60.0) 24.0 (58.8) 10.0 (24.5)
3-Contactor,
3-Contactor
w/ Auto- Bypass
8.9 (22.6) 8.9 (22.6) 10.7 (26.2) 16.0 (39.2) 36.0 (88.2) 8.8 (21.6) 24.5 (60.0) 24.0 (58.8) 10.0 (24.5)
5 5-10Hp 10-20 Hp
Disconnect 8.9 (22.6) 34.5 (84.5) 10.7 (26.2) 12.0 (29.4) 40.0 (98) 8.8 (21.6) 24.5 (60.0) 24.0 (58.8) 10.0 (24.5)
2-Contactor 8.9 (22.6) 34.5 (84.5) 10.7 (26.2) 16.0 (39.2) 44.0 (107.8) 8.8 (21.6) 28.5 (69.8) 30.0 (73.5) 10.0 (24.5)
3-Contactor,
3-Contactor
w/ Auto- Bypass
8.9 (22.6) 41.5 (101.7) 10.7 (26.2) 16.0 (39.2) 44.0 (107.8) 8.8 (21.6) 28.5 (69.8) 30.0 (73.5) 10.0 (24.5)
6 15-20Hp 25-40 Hp
Disconnect 12.4 (30.4) 45.0 (110.3) 12.6 (30.9) 16.0 (39.2) 46.0 (112.7) 10.8 (26.5) 28.5 (69.8) 36.0 (88.2) 10.0 (24.5)
2-Contactor 12.4 (30.4) 45.0 (110.3) 12.6 (30.9) 20.0 (49.0) 54.0 (132.3) 10.8 (26.5) 34.5 (84.5) 36.0 (88.2) 10.0 (24.5)
3-Contactor,
3-Contactor
w/ Auto- Bypass
12.4 (30.4) 55.0 (134.8) 12.6 (30.9) 20.0 (49.0) 54.0 (132.3) 10.8 (26.5) 34.5 (84.5) 36.0 (88.2) 10.0 (24.5)
7 25-40Hp 50-75 Hp
Disconnect 20.84 (51.1) 51.5 (126.2) 11.4 (27.9) 16.0 (39.2) 50.0 (122.5) 11.8 (28.9) 28.5 (69.8) 48.0 (117.6) 12.0 (29.4)
2-Contactor 20.84 (51.1) 51.5 (126.2) 11.4 (27.9) 24.0 (58.8) 64.0 (156.8) 13.6 (33.3) 40.4 (98.9) 48.0 (117.6) 12.0 (29.4)
3-Contactor,
3-Contactor
w/ Auto- Bypass
20.84 (51.1) 59.0 (144.6) 11.4 (27.9) 24.0 (58.8) 64.0 (156.8) 13.6 (33.3) 40.4 (98.9) 48.0 (117.6) 12.0 (29.4)
8 50-75 Hp 100-150 Hp
Disconnect 25.0 (61.3) 60.0 (147.0) 16.2 (39.7) 20.0 (49.0) 64.0 (156.8) 15.1 (36.9) 40.4 (98.9) 48.0 (117.6) 12.0 (29.4)
2-Contactor 25.0 (61.3) 60.0 (147.0) 16.2 (39.7) 56.0 (137.2) 48.0 (117.6) 15.1 (36.9) 40.4 (98.9) 60.0 (147.0) 12.0 (29.4)
3-Contactor,
3-Contactor
w/ Auto- Bypass
25.0 (61.3) 70.0 (171.5) 16.2 (39.7) 56.0 (137.2) 48.0 (117.6) 15.1 (36.9) 40.4 (98.9) 60.0 (147.0) 12.0 (29.4)

759. fi 709MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
HONEYWELL VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE WITH BYPASS
SMARTVFD HVAC WITH BYPASS ASSEMBLY
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: HVDSB3C0400G130 480 VAC, 40 Hp, Smart VFD NEMA 1
with graphic keypad display, 3 contractor bypass
HVFDSB3 Honeywell SmartVFD HVAC
A208 VAC - up to 75 Hp
B230 VAC - up to 75 Hp
C480 VAC - up to 150 Hp
Motor Horsepower
0007.75 Hp 208, 230 & 480 VAC
00101 Hp 208, 230 & 480 VAC
00151.5 Hp 208, 230 & 480 VAC
00202 Hp 208, 230 & 480 VAC
00303 Hp 208, 230 & 480 VAC
00404 Hp 208, 230 & 480 VAC
00505 Hp 208, 230 & 480 VAC
00757.5 Hp 208, 230 & 480 VAC
010010 Hp 208, 230 & 480 VAC
015015 Hp 208, 230 & 480 VAC
020020 Hp 208, 230 & 480 VAC
025025 Hp 208, 230 & 480 VAC
030030 Hp 208, 230 & 480 VAC
040040 Hp 208, 230 & 480 VAC
050050 Hp 208, 230 & 480 VAC
060060 Hp 208, 230 & 480 VAC
075075 Hp 208, 230 & 480 VAC
1000100 Hp 480 VAC
1250125 Hp 480 VAC
1500150 Hp 480 VAC
User Interface
G Graphic User Interface
Enclosure
1 NEMA 1
2 NEMA 12
3 NEMA 3R
Options
10Disconnect only
20Drive with 2 contractor BYPASS
30Drive with 3 contactor BYPASS
31Drive with 3 contactor BYPASS, w/ Fused disconnect and Auto-bypass
HVFDSB3 C 0400G 13 0
ACCESSORIES PAGE
32006630-001 LON communication card
HVFDCABLE Commissioning cable and USB adaptor

760. fi
MOTOR CONTROLS 710fi
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
MOTOR CONTROL ACRONYMS, CALCULATIONS & CONVERSION FORMULAS
AC = alternating current
ANSI = American National Standards Institute
ASD = adjustable speed drive
BHP = brake horsepower
CFM = cubic feet per minute
CSA = Canadian Standards Association
CSI = current source inverter
DC = direct current
DSP = digital signal processor
ECC = eddy current coupling
FPM = feet per minute
GPM = gallon per minute
GTO = gate turnoff (thyristor)
HDF = harmonic distortion factor
IGBT = insulated gate bi-thermal thyristor
IEEE = Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
LCI = load-commutated inverter
NEMA = National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NPV = net present value
PAM = pulse amplitude modulation
PLC = programmable logic controller
PWM = pulse width modulated (inverter)
SCR = silicon-controlled rectifier
SR = switched reluctance
THD = total harmonic distortion
V = voltage
VSI = variable source inverter
VVI = variable voltage inverter
Calculating the Horsepower Requirement
of a Load
The mechanical load required by the driven equipment is
known as the Brake Horsepower (BHP)
. The BHP value
can be calculated by the following: BHP =
T x N (required HP)
5,250
Where: HP = horsepower supplied by the motor T = Torque (lb-ft) force x radius N = base speed of motor (rpm)
Once the machine BHP (speed times torque) requirement is
determined, horsepower (HP) can be calculated:
Rated motor HP =
Motor Efficiency (%) / 100 = available HP
If the calculated horsepower falls between standard
available motor ratings, select the higher available
horsepower rating
. It is good practice to allow some margin
when selecting the motor horsepower.
CONVERSION FORMULAS/FACTORS
Multiply By To Obtain
Length Meters 3.281 Feet
Meters 39.37 Inches
Inches 0.025 Meters
Feet 0.305 Meters
Torque Newton-Meters 0.738 lb-ft
lb-ft 1.356 Newton-Meters
lb-in 0.083 lb-ft
lb-ft 12.00 lb-in
Rotation RPM 6.00 Degrees per second
RPM 0.105 Radius per second
Degrees per second 0.167 RPM
Radius per second 9.549 RPM
Power Watts 0.001 HP
lb-ft per minute 0.000 HP
HP 746 Watts
HP 30300 lb-ft/min
TemperatureDegrees C = (Degrees F-32) x 5/9
Degrees F = (Degrees C x 9/5) + 32

761. fi 711MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
GLOSSARY OF COMMON TERMS
Alternating Current: The flow of electricity which changes direction on a regular continuous cycle reaching a
maximum in one direction, decreasing to zero, then reversing to reach a maximum in the opposite direction.
Air Gap: The space between the rotating and stationary part of an electric motor. Magnetic energy is transferred
across this gap.
Ambient: The air which surrounds a motor for air cooled machines.
Ampere: A unit of current which is a measure of the rate of electron flow. It is often abbreviated as Amp. The
unit of current flow is the amp.
Breakdown Torque: The maximum torque that a motor can develop at rated voltage without stalling or an abrupt drop in speed
.
Brush: A current carrying material which is in contact with an armature or slip ring assembly to provide an elec- trical connection between rotating and stationary components of a motor
. Capacitor: A device which can store
electrical charge. In an AC circuit, a capacitor causes the voltage to lead the current. The unit of capacitance is
the Farad.
Commutator: An assembly which is mounted on the shaft of a DC motor to provide the switching functions between the armature coils and the power supply
.
Conductor: Any material which offers little resistance to the flow of electricity such as copper.
Duty Cycle: The relationship between the operating time and the resting time of an electric motor.
Eddy Current: Localized currents in electrical steels that are caused by alternating magnetic flux resulting in losses and heating
.
Efficiency: The ratio of mechanical output to the electrical input power of a motor.
Electromotive Force (emf): A synonym for voltage usually used to describe induced or generated voltages in an electric circuit
.
Field: The term used to describe the stationary part of a DC machine. The field provides the magnetic flux which
interacts with the armature.
Flux: The magnetic field which is established around a current carrying conductor or a permanent magnet.
Frequency: The rate at which alternating current reverses its direction of flow. The unit of frequency is either
Hertz or cycles per second.
Full Load Current: The current that a motor draws at rated voltage, frequency and load.
Full Load Slip: The difference between the synchronous speed of a motor and full load speed. It is often ex-
pressed as a ratio of the synchronous speed to full load speed in percent.
Full Load Speed: The speed of the motor at rated voltage, frequency and load.
Full Load Torque: The torque that is necessary to produce rated horsepower at full load speed.
Horsepower: A measurement of power used to rate electric motors. The unit of power rating in motors is either
horsepower or kilowatts. One horsepower is equal to 746 watts.

762. fi
MOTOR CONTROLS 712fi
MOTOR CONTROLS
12
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Impedance: The total opposition a circuit offers to the flow of alternating current. It is the vector sum of resis-
tance and reactance.
Inductance: The property of an electrical circuit which opposes a change in current due to the magnetic field
induced by that current.
Inertia: Inertia is the resistance an object has to a change in its state of motion. It is determined by the weight of
the object multiplied by the square of the radius of gyration (k). Rotating parts do not operate at the same speed,
therefore calculating the inertia for each moving part allows rotating parts to be considered as a single unit work- ing together
.
Line Voltage: The voltage supplied to the input terminals of an electric device.
Magnetomotive Force (mmf): The magnetic energy supplied in the establishment of magnetic flux. It is analo-
gous to the electromotive force in an electric circuit.
Phase: A term used to describe the spatial relationship of windings in an electric motor or voltages and currents in an electric circuit
.
Power Factor: A measurement of the difference in phase between voltage and current in an electric circuit.
Most electrical devices cause the current to lag the voltage because of inductance. The voltage leads the cur-
rent in capacitive circuits.
Reactance (inductive): The property of a magnetic circuit which causes the voltage to lag the current.
Resistance: The property of an electrical conductor which impedes the flow of electricity. The unit of resistance
is the ohm.
Rotor: The rotating member of an electric motor.
Service Factor: The service factor of an AC motor is a multiplier which when applied to the rated horsepower indicates the permissible loading which may be carried under the conditions specified for the service factor
.
Slip: The ratio between the synchronous speed and the operating speed of an induction motor, often expressed as a percent
.
Stator: The stationary part of an AC motor housing the steel laminations and the windings.
Temperature Rise: The difference between the temperature of the windings of an operating motor and the am- bient temperature
.
Torque: The turning force applied to a shaft, usually expressed as pound-feet (English) or Newton-meters (met- ric)
.
Voltage: The standard unit of electromotive force which produces a flow of current in a conductor. The unit of
electromotive force is the volt.
Watt: A measurement of power in an electrical circuit which is equal to one joule of energy being expended in one second
.
GLOSSARY OF COMMON TERMS

763. HUMIDITY
NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK
& WIRELESS
Babel Buster | p. 719
Series
110A | p. 733
L-VIS Series | p. 721
ValuPoint VP4-23 | p. 744
Series
BASRT-B | p. 727
EKI Series | p. 738
Kele Has Doubled the Offering of Network and Wireless Solutions,
and Continues to Add to Our Options to Meet Your Needs.

764. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
WebOP Series | p. 725
MPM-GW | p. 813
Series
NETWORK & WIRELESS
L-IP Series | p. 728
NETWORK
& WIRELESS
Network Display and Control Panels
L-VIS Series — BACnet and LON Touch Panel. . 721
BBC-SD
— BACnet Graphic Display
. . . . . . . . . . 724
WebOP Series
— Touchscreen Operator Display
Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725

Network Gateways
ETH-1000 — Provides connectivity between Ethernet
and RS-485 based networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . 713
XLTR-1000
— Provides Connectivity Between Two
Rs-485 Based Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
Raptor Protocol Converter
— RLE Technologies
Protocol Coverter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
LGATE-9xx Series
— Lonworks/Bacnet And
Universal Gateways
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Babel Buster Series
— BACnet - Modbus - SNMP
Gateways
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
AddMe
®
Series — BACnet - Modbus Network I/O. 743

Network I/O Modules
L-IOB Series — BACnet and LON I/O Module. . . 739
i.CanDoIt Series
— Embedded Network Servers
.742
AddMe
®
Series — BACnet - Modbus Network I/O. 743
ValuPoint VP4-23 Series — BACnet MS/TP
Programmable I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
BAS-3000BC Series
— BACnet Remote I/O
Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745

Network Monitoring and Control Devices
and Zone Systems
FGD Web Series — Remote Web-Based Monitoring
System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
DL-125C
— Auto Dialer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
KTEC Zoning System
— Kele Constant Volume
Zoning System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
FlexStat
— Flexible BACnet Thermostat
. . . . . . . 756

Network Routers, Repeaters, Switches and Terminators
BASRT-B — BACnet Multi-Network Router
. . . . . 727
L-IP Series
— BACnet/IP and LON/IP Router
. . . 728
L-Switch Series
— LON Switch Router
. . . . . . . . 731
110A
— FTT-10 LonWorks Repeater
. . . . . . . . . . 733
L-Term Series
— BACnet, LON, Modbus
Terminator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
852 Ethernet Switch
— Industrial Ethernet
Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
EIBA Switches
— BAS Ethernet Switches
. . . . . 737
EKI Series
— Unmanaged Ethernet Switches
. . . 738

Wireless EnOcean and ZigBee Devices and Systems
SmartStruxure Lite MPM-GW Series — EnOcean
and Zigbee Wireless Manager and Gateway
.813
SmartStruxure Lite MPM-UN Series
— Multi-
purpose Manager and Gateway
. . . . . . . . . . 814
SmartStruxure Lite MPM-VA Series
— Multi-
purpose VAV Manager and Gateway
. . . . . . 815
SmartStruxure Lite SEC Series
— Zigbee Wireless
I/O Module
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
E3X-MRCFP Series
— EnOcean Wireless Room
Controller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
E3X-DxxFP Series
— EnOcean Wireless Dimmer/
Controller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
E3X-Rxx-3HOTP Series
— 3 Wire EnOcean
Wireless Relay Receiver
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
E3X-Rxx-5IBTP Series
— 5 Wire EnOcean
Wireless Relay Receiver and Repeater
. . . . 821
E3R-R04FP Series
— EnOcean Wireless Low
Voltage Relay Receiver
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
E3X-x12GP Series
— EnOcean Wireless Plug-in
Relay Receiver and Dimmer
. . . . . . . . . . . . .818
E3X-Rxx-REPTP Series
— EnOcean Wireless
Repeater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
E3T-Rxx-2INTP Series
— EnOcean Wireless
Switch Leg Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
E3T-SLICP
— EnOcean Wireless Light Sensor
. . 826
E3T-MDCCP
— EnOcean Wireless Window/Door
Sensor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
E3X-Txx Series
— EnOcean Wireless
Thermostat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
E3T-C2AWH
— EnOcean Wireless Key Card
Reader
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
E3T-SxA Series
— EnOcean Wireless Switches
. 828
Wireless EnOcean and ZigBee Devices and Systems (cont.)
E3T-SxE Series — EnOcean Wireless European
Light Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
E3T-S2H Series
— EnOcean Wireless Handheld
Remote
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
EasySens Thanos
— EnOcean Room Operating
Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
EasySens Receiver Gateways
— EnOcean Receiver
Gateways
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
EasySens SRC Receiver Controllers
— EnOcean
Receiver Controllers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
EasySens Repeater
— EnOcean Wireless
Repeater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
EasySens Switches
— EnOcean Lighting, Blinds
and Shutters Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
EasySens Specialty Wireless Transmitters
—
EnOcean Remote Control, Key Card Switch,
Window/Door Contact
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
EasySens Room Sensors
— EnOcean Temperature,
Humidity and CO2 Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
EasySens Temperature Sensors
— EnOcean
Surface, Duct, Remote and Outdoor Temperature Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
EasySens Input Modules
— EnOcean Input
Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838

Wireless Long Range Transceivers
AIC900E — Wireless Ethernet transceiver
.. . . . . . 759
WBT900, WBT900-IP
— Wireless BACnet MSTP
And BACnet Ip Transceivers
. . . . . . . . . . . . 761
WLT900
— Wireless LonWorks Transceiver
. . . . . 763

Wireless Sensing and Control Devices
and Systems
Viconics Wireless — Wireless Thermostat
System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
RF-RXS Wireless Network Receiver
— SonNet
Wireless Network Receiver
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
RF-RX Series
— SonNet Wireless Receivers
. . . . 770
RF-RR Series
— SonNet Wireless Router-
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
RF-RS Series
— SonNet Wireless Temperature,
Humidity and CO
2
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
MOD9200
— Frontier 2
.0 Gateway transceivers. . 774
RM2402D and RM2432D
— Frontier 2
.0 Wireless
Analog And Digital Receivers. . . . . . . . . . . . 776
RR2552
— Frontier 2
.0 Spread Spectrum
Repeater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
RT2602, RT2620
— Frontier 2
.0 Wireless Digital
Input Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
RT2630 Series
— Frontier 2
.0 Wireless Universal
input transmitter module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
SST2630
— Frontier 2
.0 Wireless Remote
Temperature System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
DT2630
— Frontier 2
.0 Wireless Duct Temperature
Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
WH2630
— Frontier 2
.0 Wireless Humidity And
Temperature Wall Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
WT2630
— Frontier 2
.0 Wireless Temperature Wall
Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
Wi-MGR
— Wireless Sensor Gateway
. . . . . . . . . 792
BA/RCV-EZ and BA/RPT-EZ
— BAPI Wireless
Receiver and Repeater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
BA/WAI Series, BA/WDI, BA/WTS
— BAPI Wireless
Universal Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
BA/WT(H)-D
— BAPI Wireless Duct Temperature &
Humidity Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
BA/WT-I
— BAPI Wireless Immersion Temperature
Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
BA/WT-RPP
— BAPI Wireless Remote Probe
Temperature Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
BA/BS2-WT(H)
— BAPI Wireless Room Temperature
& Humidity Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
BA/WT-O, BA/WTH-O
— BAPI Wireless OSA
Temperature & Humidity Transmitters
. . . . . . 806
BA/COM, BA/ROM, BA/RYOM, BA/RYOL, BA/SOM,
BA/VOM
— BAPI Wireless System
Output Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
EE240 Series
— E+E Wireless Humidity/Temperature/
CO2 Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
58-G1 and 58-N-1101 Series
— Ideal Wireless
Sensor System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812

765. fi 713NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
PROVIDES CONNECTIVITY BETWEEN ETHERNET AND RS-485 BASED NETWORKS
ETH-1000
Supply Voltage 7 - 24 VDC
Supply Current 70 mA @ 24VDC
Communication Ethernet Communications
IEEE 802.3 10/100 Mbps data rate
10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX physical
layer 100 m (max) CAT5 cable
length
MS/TP Communications

ANSI/ASHRAE 135 (ISO 16484-5) 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800, 115
.2k
baud rate EIA-485 physical layer 1200 m (max) cable length
LED Indication

Module Status Off = No power
Green = Power normal function
Flashing Green = Gateway is
connected via USB
Flashing Red = Fatal error
Network Status Off = No IP address
Green = Has IP and connection
Flashing Green = Has IP no Connection
Red = Critical Fail / Duplicate IP
Flashing Red = Connection time out
Alternating Red/Green = Start up
RS485 Green (TX) = Transmitting data
Red (RX) = Receiving data
Operating Temperature 14 to 122°F (-10 to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 20 to 90% non-condensing
Dimensions 4" x 3" x 1.5"
(10.16 x 7.62 x 3.81 cm)
Weight 1 lb (0.45 kg)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ETH-1000 Provides protocol translation between Ethernet and RS-485 based networks
SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION
The ETH-1000 Ethernet Gateway allows information to be
transferred seamlessly between Ethernet and RS-485 networks
with minimal configuration requirements
. The ETH-1000
provides a 10/100BaseT Ethernet port and an RS-485 port.
ETHERNET PROTOCOLS SUPPORT:
• Allen Bradley CSP (also known as "PCCC" and "AB
Ethernet") (client and server)
• BACnet/IP (client and server)
• EtherNet/IP (client and server)
• Mitsubishi MELSEC (also known as "MC") (client)
• Modbus/TCP (client and server)
• Profinet IO
ETH-1000
RS-485 PROTOCOLS SUPPORT: •
Modbus RTU (master, slave, and sniffer)
• BACnet MS/TP (client and server)
• Toshiba ASD (master)
• Johnson Controls, Inc. Metasys N2 (slave)
• Sullair Supervisor (master)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
XLTR-1000 Provides protocol translation between RS485 based networks 714
WIRING
3.0
4.0
1.5

766. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 714fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
Supply Voltage 7 - 24 VDC
Supply Current 15 mA @ 24VDC
Communication MS/TP
ANSI/ASHRAE 135, (ISO 16484-5)
9600, 19200, 38400, 76800, 115.2k
baud rate EIA-485 physical layer 1200 m (max) cable length
LED Indication

Module Status Off = No power
Green = Power normal function
Flashing Green = Gateway is
connected via USB
Flashing Red = Fatal error
RS485 Green (TX) = Transmitting data
Red (RX) = Receiving data
Operating Temperature 14 to 122°F (-10 to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 20 to 90% non-condensing
Dimensions 4" x 3" x 1.5"
(10.16 x 7.62 x 3.81 cm)
Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
ORDERING INFORMATION
PROVIDES CONNECTIVITY BETWEEN TWO RS-485 BASED NETWORKS.
XLTR-1000
DESCRIPTION
The XLTR-1000 provides simultaneous support for many
different communication protocols, allowing complex
interchanges of data between otherwise incompatible networks
.
When proper
ly configured, the gateway will become essentially
"transparent" on the networks, and the various network devices can engage in seamless dialogs with each other.
FEATURES
• USB connectivity
• Can be powered via USB
• 32 bit processor
• Baud rates up to 115.2K
• Mounting options: Desktop, DIN-Rail, Panel/Wall
MODEL DESCRIPTION
XL
TR-1000
Provides protocol translation between RS485 based networks
SPECIFICATIONS
RS-485 PROTOCOLS SUPPORT:
• BACnet MS/TP (client and server)
• Johnson Controls, Inc. Metasys N2 (master and slave)
• Modbus RTU (master, slave, and sniffer)
• MSA Chillgard (monitor)
• Siemens FLN (slave)
• Sullair Supervisor (master)
• TCS Basys (master)
• Toshiba ASD (master)
XLTR-1000
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
ETH-1000 Provides protocol translation between Ethernet and RS-485 based networks 713
DIMENSIONS
3.0
4.0
1.5

767. fi 715NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
RLE TECHNOLOGIES PROTOCOL COVERTER
RAPTOR PROTOCOL CONVERTER
DESCRIPTION
The Raptor Protocol Converter connects directly to equipment
and converts the SNMP, BACnet, and Modbus protocols to
one or more of these same protocols for integration into a
building management system (BMS) or network management
system (NMS)
. The Pr otocol Converter is ideal for situations
where data from monitored equipment is incompatible with the protocols used by the BMS or NMS, such as in cases where legacy monitoring systems are present
. The ability of
the Protocol Converter to accept up to 1,024 inputs over 32
modules means flexible integration with multiple alarm and management systems with the use of one simple device
. In
addition, the Dual Port Protocol Converter provides a cost- effective means to connect to multiple trunk lines with two additional Modbus EIA-485 ports
.
FEATURES
• Multiple input and output protocols
• Monitor up to 1,024 Modbus registers, OIDs, or instances
• Connect up to 32 units/modules/nodes
• Connect to multiple trunk lines with Dual Port Protocol Converter
• Alarm notification through email, SNMP
• Web configuration
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC @ 600mA max,
50/60 Hz
Communication Ports
Ethernet 10/100BaseT, RJ45 connector;
500VAC RMS isolation
EIA-232 DB9 female connector; 9600 baud;
No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
EIA-485 1200, 2400, 9600 or 19200 baud
(selectab
le); Parity: none, even or
odd, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
Protocol

TCP/IP; HTML, TFTP
SNMP V1: V2C MIB-2 compliant; NMS
Manageable with Get
Modbus (EIA-485) Modbus Master/Slave; RTU mode;
Supports Master codes 01, 02, 03, 04; Slave code 03
Modbus TCP/IP
Modbus Master/Slave; TCP/IP
transmission protocol
BACNet/IP ASHRAE STD 135-2004 Annex
J; Port 3 on Dual Port Protocol Converter is BACnet MS/TP capable (Slave only)
SMTP (email)
Supports Client Authentication (plain
and login); compatible with ESMTP Servers
Terminal Emulation (EIA-232)

VT100 compatible (for configuration
and diagnostics only)
Indicator
Network 1 Green/Red LED: Link/No Link; 1
Green Active (additional LEDs for Dual Port Protocol Converter)
EIA-485 Status
2 Green Transmit and Receive
LEDs (additional LEDs for Dual Port Protocol Converter)
Security Login

Web Browser Access (Ethernet)
1 Web password Read Only; 1 Web
password Read/Write
Terminal Emulation Access
None
Protocols In SNMP, Modbus EIA-485, Modbus
TCP/IP, BACnet/IP
Protocols Out SNMP, Modbus EIA-485, Modbus
TCP/IP, BACnet/IP; BACnet MS/ TP (Port 3 of Dual Port Protocol Converter only)
Maximum Number of units/modules/nodes
32
Maximum Number of registers/OIDSs/instances

1024
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Storage Temperature -4°to 185°F (-20° to 85°C)
Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing
Mounting Desktop or rack mount (brackets
included)
Dimensions 9.8"W x 5.3"D x 1.8"H
(248 x 135 x 46 mm)
Weight 2.32 lb. (1.05kg)
Approvals CE; ETL listed: conforms to UL
61010-1, EN 61010-1; certified to CSA C22
.2 NO. 61010-1; RoHS
compliant
SPECIFICATIONS
FDS-PC-DP
FDS-PC

768. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 716fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
EIA-232 COM Connection
Connect the straight through, 9-pin, serial cable:
Modbus EIA-485 Connections
Terminal Block Designation
ORDERING INFORMATION
RLE TECHNOLOGIES PROTOCOL COVERTER
RAPTOR PROTOCOL CONVERTER
MODEL DESCRIPTION
FDS-PC Protocol converter for BMS and NMS integration, Single port
FDS-PC-DP Protocol converter for BMS and NMS integration, Dual port
Power Supply and Ground Connections
RJ45 Ethernet Connection
EIA-232 COM Connection
Connect the straight through, 9-pin, serial cable:
Modbus EIA-485 Connections
WIRING
Item No. Item Description
1
Power 24 VDC/VAC Power Terminal Block
2
Jack Power connector for wall wart adapter
3
Status Status LED
4
EIA-232 Port DB9 Female connector
5
RX TX EIA-485 LED Receive/Transmit status LED. Dual Port Protocol Converter contains two additional sets of LEDs.
6
EIA-485 Termination Switch
Dual Port Protocol Converter contains two additional sets of switches; EIA-485 Port 2, the 5-pin port,
can be configured as a 2-wire (half-duplex) or 4-wire (full-duplex) connection.Ports 1 and 3: Switch
1 - unused; Switch 2 - On = 100 Ohm terminationPort 2: Switch 1 -Duplex (On = 4-wire; Off = 2-wire);
Switch 2 - On = 100 Ohm termination
7
EIA-485 Port
Dual Port Protocol Converter contains two additional EIA-485 ports. Port2 (the middle port) can be
configured as a 2-wire or 4-wire connection. In addition to all other supported protocols, Port 3 (the left
most port) of the Dual Port Protocol Converter is BACnet MS/TP capable (Slave only).
8
RJ45 Ethernet Port 10/100 BaseT connector
Terminal Block Designation

769. fi 717NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
LONWORKS/BACNET AND UNIVERSAL GATEWAYS
LGATE-9XX SERIES
DESCRIPTION
LGATE-900 is a CEA-709/BACnet gateway which allows
seamless integration of systems using both communication
standards by mapping CEA-709 network variables (NVs)
to standard BACnet server objects
. LGATE-900 is fully
compliant with the standards CEA-709, CEA-852, and EN 14908 (LonMark system) as well as ASHRAE 135-2008 and ISO 16484-5
. Analog, binary, and multistate BACnet objects
(input/output) are mapped to NVs based on the CEN/TS 15231:2005 standard
. BACnet properties are automatically
configured with default values from the SNVT self-description.
Scalar NVs are mapped to one BA
Cnet object each
.
Str
uctured NVs are mapped to several BACnet object, one for
each member (members can be selected individually)
. Each
LGA
TE-900 can handle up to 750 BACnet Objects
. Several
devices can be installed in a network at the same time.
LGA
TE-95x allows a smooth integration between LonMark
Systems, BACnet networks, KNX networks, Modbus devices, M-Bus devices as well as ZigBee PRO wireless devices
.
Netw
ork variables are mapped to binary, analog, or multi-
state objects (input, output, value) according to the CEN/ TS 15231:2005 standard. Data points can be manually or
automatically generated across multiple protocols. In addition
to analog, binar
y and multistate objects LGATE-95x supports
alarming, scheduling and trending
. They can be either
connected through their Ethernet/IP ports to LonMark IP-852, BACnet/IP, KNXnet/IP and Modbus TCP simultaneously or to TP/FT-10, BACnet MS/TP channels, Modbus RTU and KNX TP1 respectively
.
FEATURES
• Full
16484-5 (BACnet)
• Fully compliant with CEA-709, CEA-852 and EN 14908
(LON)
• Built-in Web server for device configuration
• Support alarming, scheduling and trending
• Network diagnostic LEDs (LGATE-900)
• 128x64 display with backlight (LGATE-95x)
• Local and remote access to information about device
status and data points (LGATE-95x)
• DIN rail mountable
Supply Voltage
LGATE-900 12 to 24 VAC / 50-60 Hz, 12-35
VDC
LGATE-95x 24 VAC / 50-60 Hz, 24 VDC
Supply Watts LGATE-900
3 Watts
LGATE-95x 2.5 Watts
Communication
LGATE-900 Type CEA-709, BACnet, OPC XML-
DA
LGATE-95x Type CEA-709, BACnet, Modbus,
OPC XML-DA, KNX, M-Bus
Channels
LGATE-900 1x Ethernet (100Base-T) Lonmark
IP-852, BACnet/IP, HTTP, FTP, 1x TP/FT-10, 1x BACnet MS/TP
LGATE-95x
2x Ethernet (100Base-T), Lonmark
IP-852, BACnet/IP, HTTP, FTP, KNXnet/IP, Modbus TCP (Master or Slave); 1x TP/FT-10 (Lonmark System); 1x BACnet MS/TP; 1x Modbus RTU (Master or Slave); 1x EXT (alternatively for M-Bus Master EN13757-3 with L-MBUS20/80, KNX TP1 with LKNX-300)
Dimensions

LGATE-900 4.21"W x 3.94"H x 2.36"D
(10.7 x 10.0 x 6.0 cm)
LGATE-95x 6.26"W x 3.94"H x 2.95"D
(15.9 x 10.0 x 7.5 cm)
Operating Temperature 32° to 112°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0-90% RH non-condensing
Weight
LGATE-900 0.55 lbs (0.25 kg)
LGATE-95x 0.77 lbs (0.35 kg)
Approvals CE, FCC
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
LGATE 900
LGATE 95x

770. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 718fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
BACNET AND UNIVERSAL GATEWAYS
LGATE-9XX SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LGA
TE-900
Lonworks to BACNET LGATE Gateway
LGATE-950 Universal LGATE Gateway with one ext. port
LGATE-951 Universal LGATE Gateway with two ext. ports
10/100Base-T
(RJ45)
-12-35 VDC 12-24 VAC+
MS/TP Port
Termination (L-Term)
CEA-709
123456 81 51617
POWEREthernetRS-485
Serial Terminal
RESET
ACT
LINK
ACT
ACT
BACnet/IPEthernet
BACnet/IP
POWER
STATUS
Connectors
MS/TP 1 Input GND
2 Input + (B) non-inverting input
3 Input
- (A) inverting input
CEA-709 4 Input EART H GND
5 Input B
6 Input A
Ethernet 8 10/100Base-T (RJ45)
POWER 15 Power supply input EARTH GND
16 Power supply input MINUS
17 Power supply input PLUS
Do NOT connect to
EARTH GND
SERIAL 40 EIA-232 (DB9 male)

Buttons
RESET Reset
STATUS Send “I AM” message
Status LEDs
A Green flashing fast Traffic on MS/TP port
B Green flashing fast Traffic on CEA-709 port
Green flashing at Port not commissioned
1 HZ
Red permanent CEA-709 port damaged
Red flashing fast Traffic overload on port
C Green IP port is fully functional
Yellow IP port functional but
config. is not up-to-date
Red IP port is non-functional
Flashing at 1 Hz IP port is not commissioned
OFF IP port is not active
D Green Ethernet link
E Green flashing Ethernet traffic
F Green BACnet IP enabled
G Green Power
H OFF Normal operation
NOTE: If terminal 1 is not connected make a
short between terminal 15 and 16,
and connect to EARTH GND.
40
A
B
C
F
E
D
G
H
FT
2 x USB-A
USB1
USB2
USB-B
2 x 10/100Base-T (RJ45)
Ethernet1
Ethernet2
BA
M-Bus, KNX TP1, ZigBee PRO
GND
131415
EXT2
BA
GND
101112
EXT1
789456
BA
FT
TP/FT- 10-+
GND
RS-485
Modbus RT U,
BACnet MS/TP
-24-35 VDC 24 VAC+
123
POWER
microSD
Connectors
POWER 1 Power supply input EARTH GND
2 Power supply input MINUS
Can be connected to EARTH GND
3 Power supply input PLUS
Do NOT connect to
EARTH GND
Modbus 4 Input GND
BACnet 5 Input +
MS/TP 6 Input
-
TP/FT-10 7 Input EART H GND
8 Input B
9 Input A
EXT1 10 Input GND
M-Bus, 11 Input B
KNX TP1 12 Input A
ZigBee
EXT2 13 Input GND
M-Bus 14 Input B
KNX TP1 15 Input A
ZigBee
Connectors
USB1 USB-A USB Host
USB2 USB-A USB Host
USB-B USB-B PC
Ethernet1 RJ45 10/100Base-T
Ethernet2 RJ45 10/100Base-T
microSD slot microSD card
max. 2 GB
Buttons
RESET Reset
DIAL Turn-and-Push Dial
0.2 - 2.5 mm
2
7
Weidmüller BLZP 5.08/03/180
RESET
DIAL
DISPLAY
LGATE 900 LGATE 95x
WIRING

771. fi 719NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
!"#$%&!'()$*&+")$,"-(&.'//0*)$1&2*0)030%(&
+")$,"-( & 4$#&
.$*5$
*&
!678$)&
9.:;2&
.$*5$*&<&
7%=$8)&
!678$)&
>2&
.$*5$*&
<&7%=$
8&
901#'(&?;@&
9"()$*&<&
.%"5$&
901#'(&
;27&
.$*5$*&
<&7%=$
8&
.A92&.$*5$*&
<&
7%=$8)&
B;;2&
7%=$8
&
!!C DEFGF& ! "#$ !! "#$!! !!
!!C DHFGF& "#$!! ! "#$! "#$! "#$ !!
!!C DIFGF DFG&
"#$!! "#$! "#$! "#$ !! !
!!C DIFGF DFC&
"#$!! "#$! "#$! "#$! "#$ !!
!!C DIFEF D
FG&
"#$! "#$! "#$ !! "#$!! !
!!C DIFEF D
FC&
"#$! "#$! "#$ !! ! "#$ !!
!!C DIFEF D
FE&
"#$! "#$! "#$ !! !! "#$!
!
!"#$%&!'()$*&+")$,"-(&.'//0*)$1&2*0)030%(&
+")$,"-( & 4$#&
.$*5$
*&
!678$)&
9.:;2&
.$*5$*&<&
7%=$8)&
!678$)&
>2&
.$*5$*&
<&7%=$
8&
901#'(&?;@&
9"()$*&<&
.%"5$&
901#'(&
;27&
.$*5$*&
<&7%=$
8&
.A92&.$*5$*&
<&
7%=$8)&
B;;2&
7%=$8
&
!!C DEFGF& ! "#$ !! "#$!! !!
!!C DHFGF& "#$!! ! "#$! "#$! "#$ !!
!!C DIFGF DFG&
"#$!! "#$! "#$! "#$ !! !
!!C DIFGF DFC&
"#$!! "#$! "#$! "#$! "#$ !!
!!C DIFEF D
FG&
"#$! "#$! "#$ !! "#$!! !
!!C DIFEF D
FC&
"#$! "#$! "#$ !! ! "#$ !!
!!C DIFEF D
FE&
"#$! "#$! "#$ !! !! "#$!
!
!"#$%&!'()$*&+")$,"-(&.'//0*)$1&2*0)030%(&
+")$,"-( & 4$#&
.$*5$
*&
!678$)&
9.:;2&
.$*5$*&<&
7%=$8)&
!678$)&
>2&
.$*5$*&
<&7%=$
8&
901#'(&?;@&
9"()$*&<&
.%"5$&
901#'(&
;27&
.$*5$*&
<&7%=$
8&
.A92&.$*5$*&
<&
7%=$8)&
B;;2&
7%=$8
&
!!C DEFGF& ! "#$ !! "#$!! !!
!!C DHFGF& "#$!! ! "#$! "#$! "#$ !!
!!C DIFGF DFG&
"#$!! "#$! "#$! "#$ !! !
!!C DIFGF DFC&
"#$!! "#$! "#$! "#$! "#$ !!
!!C DIFEF D
FG&
"#$! "#$! "#$ !! "#$!! !
!!C DIFEF D
FC&
"#$! "#$! "#$ !! ! "#$ !!
!!C DIFEF D
FE&
"#$! "#$! "#$ !! !! "#$!
!
!"#$%&!'()$*&+")$,"-(&.'//0*)$1&2*0)030%(&
+")$,"-( & 4$#&
.$*5$
*&
!678$)&
9.:;2&
.$*5$*&<&
7%=$8)&
!678$)&
>2&
.$*5$*&
<&7%=$
8&
901#'(&?;@&
9"()$*&<&
.%"5$&
901#'(&
;27&
.$*5$*&
<&7%=$
8&
.A92&.$*5$*&
<&
7%=$8)&
B;;2&
7%=$8
&
!!C DEFGF& ! "#$ !! "#$!! !!
!!C DHFGF& "#$!! ! "#$! "#$! "#$ !!
!!C DIFGF DFG&
"#$!! "#$! "#$! "#$ !! !
!!C DIFGF DFC&
"#$!! "#$! "#$! "#$! "#$ !!
!!C DIFEF D
FG&
"#$! "#$! "#$ !! "#$!! !
!!C DIFEF D
FC&
"#$! "#$! "#$ !! ! "#$ !!
!!C DIFEF D
FE&
"#$! "#$! "#$ !! !! "#$!
!
Gateways Web
Server
BB2-3010
BB2-6010
BB2-7010-01
BB2-7010-02
BB2-7030-01
BB2-7030-02
BB2-7030-03
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
BACnet
IP Server
& Client
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Modbus
RTU Master
& Slave
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Modbus
TPC
Server
& Client
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
SNMP
Server &
Client
Yes
Yes
Yes
HTTP
Client
Yes
BACnet MS/TP
Server &
Client
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
BACNET - MODBUS - SNMP GATEWAYS
BABEL BUSTER SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Control Solutions' Babel Buster Series gateways are to put devices having a common building automation protocol on a network having a different protocol than the device was made for
. They provide support for building automation with BACnet
and Modbus. Support for data centers and IT infrastructure
with SNMP. The gateways are easy to use and cost effective
for building automation applications.
FEATURES
• Easy to use and cost effective
• Models support all major building automation
protocols
• SNMP to Modbus and Modbus to SNMP translation
• Modbus to BACnet and BACnet to Modbus translation
SPECIFICATIONS
BABEL BUSTER GATEWAYS SUPPORTED PROTOCOLS
BB2-3010 BB2-6010
Supply Voltage 10-30 VDC or 12-24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Supply Current
BB2-3010/6010/7010 0.1 A @ 24 VDC
BB2-7030 0.15 A @ 24 VDC
Communication Ports
BB2-3010 2 RS-485 ports
BB2-6010/7010/7030 1 RS-485 and 1 RJ-45 port
Baud Rate MS/TP baud rates: 9600, 19200,
38400, 76800;
Modbus RTU baud rates: 4800,
9600, 19200, 38400
Signal LEDS
BB2-3010/7030 4; device data/status,
BUS data/status
BB2-6010/7010 2; device data/status
Operating Temperature -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing
Mounting DIN rail
Dimensions 3.94"H x 2.76"W x 2.36"D
(100 x 70 x 60 mm)
Weight 2 lbs (0.91 kg)
Approvals
BB2-3010 FCC, CE, UL916 Listed, BTL Listed
BB2-6010/7010/7030 FCC Class A, CE
Warranty 1 year

772. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 720fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
BACNET - LONWORKS - MODBUS - SNMP - WIRELESS GATEWAYS
BABEL BUSTER SERIES
WIRING
Power LED
Communications LEDsEthernet activity LED
Ethernet Link LED
Modbus RTU RS-485
(EIA-485), or
MS/TP Network
Power, +12 to
+24VDC or
24VAC
Ground, Power Common
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BB2-3010 Modbus RTU to BACnet MS/TP
BB2-6010 Modbus to SNMP and Modbus to Modbus
BB2-7010-01 Modbus to BACnet IP
BB2-7010-02 Modbus to BACnet IP to SNMP
BB2-7030-01 BACnet Gateway and Router with Modbus TCP
BB2-7030-02 BACnet Gateway and Router with SNMP
BB2-7030-03 BACnet Gateway and Router with HTTP Client
ACCESSORIES
0SUP12INT 12VDC International power supply
0SUP24VP 24VDC Power Supply
MTX002 USB to MS/TP Port Adapter
BB2-3010
BB2-6010/7010/7030
March 2014

773. fi 721NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
BACNET AND LON TOUCH PANEL
L-VIS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
L-VIS Series Touch Panel is an extremely flexible graphical
user interface with an unprecedented range of functions.
An
y data point can be displayed on or controlled by the high-
resolution touch display, surrounded by an an anodized frame
.
Three diff
erent models support BACnet MS/TP or BACnet/
IP and three different models support LonMark TP/FT-10 or IP-852 Ethernet (CEA-852) are available. Touch display
sizes are available in 5.7", 12.1" or 15". The L-VIS Touch
Panels are designed for extremely low power consumption.
The
y save energy and can be wall mounted without fear of
overheating
. All L-VIS Touch Panels are configured using the
same configuration tool - the L-VIS Configurator and it is free to download from Loytec
.
FEATURES
• High resolution TFT touch display with dimmable
backlight
• Anodized aluminum front frame
• Flush-mounting in combination with the mounting frame
•
External temperature sensor L-TEMP1 (optional, up to
4 sensors) and 2 inputs for external light switches
• Models support routing connectivity to BACnet MS/TP
or BACnet/IP channel
• Models support connectivity to LonMark TP/FT-10 or
IP-852 Ethernet (CEA-852) channel
• Simple graphical programming with L-VIS configuration software included
Supply Voltage LVIS-3E100/LVIS-ME200
20 to 35 VDC, 24 VAC ± 10%
LVIS-3E112/LVIS-ME212 24 VDC ± 10% or 85 to 240 VAC
LVIS-3E115/LVIS-ME215 24 VDC ± 10% or 85 to 240 VAC
Supply Watts
LVIS-3E100/LVIS-ME200 3 Watts/8 Watts with backlight
LVIS-3E112/LVIS-ME212 2.5 Watts/13 Watts with backlight
LVIS-3E115/LVIS-ME215 2.5 Watts/16 Watts with backlight
Channels LVIS-3E100
1x Ethernet (100Base-T) LonMark IP-852,
1x TP/FT-10
LVIS-3E112/LVIS-3E115 2x Ethernet (100Base-T) LonMark IP-852,
1x TP/FT-10
LVIS-ME200 1x Ethernet (100Base-T)BACnet/IP, 1x
BACnet MS/TP
LVIS-ME212/LVIS-ME215 2x Ethernet (100Base-T)BACnet/IP, 1x
BACnet MS/TP
Communication
LVIS-3Exxx CEA-709 (LON)

LVIS-MExxx
BACnet
Display Type TFT Touch Display
Display
LVIS-3E100/LVIS-ME200 5.7" (14.48 cm)
LVIS-3E112/LVIS-ME212 12.1" (30.73 cm)
LVIS-3E115/LVIS-ME215 15" (38.1 cm)
Dimensions LVIS-3E100/LVIS-ME200
8.27"W x 6.46"H x 2.48"D
(21.0 x 16.4 x 6.3 cm)
LVIS-3E112/LVIS-ME212 12.93"W x 10.56"H x 2.56"D
(32.9 x 26.83 x 6.5 cm)
LVIS-3E115/LVIS-ME215 15.51"W x 12.52"H x 2.56"D
(39.4 x 31.8 x 6.5 cm)
LVIS-FRAME1 6.93"W x 5.83"H x 2.24"D
(17.6 x 14.8 x 5.7 cm)
LVIS-FRAME12 11.77"W x 9.80"H x 2.40"D
(35.3 x 29.37 x 6.1 cm)
LVIS-FRAME15 13.89"W x 11.56"H x 2.40"D
(35.3 x 29.37 x 6.1 cm),
Operating Humidity 10-90% RH @ 122°F (50°C)
(non-condensing)
Operating Temperature 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C)
Weight
LVIS-3E100/LVIS-ME200 3.04 lb (1.38 kg)
LVIS-3E112/LVIS-ME212 5.51 lb (2.50 kg)
LVIS-3E115/LVIS-ME215 7.72 lb (3.50 kg)
LVIS-FRAME1 1.08 lb (0.49 kg)
LVIS-FRAME12 2.31 lb (1.05 kg)
LVIS-FRAME15 3.19 lb (1.45 kg)
Approvals CE, FCC
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
LVIS-3E112/LIVS-ME212
LVIS-3E115/LVIS-ME215 LVIS-3E100/LVIS-ME200
March 2014

774. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 722fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
BACNET AND LON TOUCH PANEL
L-VIS SERIES
Mounting Frame
L-VIS Touch Panel
12.1”: LVIS-FRAME12
15”: LVIS-FRAME15
5-7”: LVIS-FRAME1
INSTALLATION
Status LEDs
ACT709 GREEN flashing fast Traffic on CEA-709 port
GREEN flashing at 1 Hz CEA-709 port not commissioned
RED permanent CEA-709 port is damaged
RED flashing fast Traffic overload on CEA-709 port
CNIP GREEN IP port is fully functional
YELLOW IP port functional but config. is not up-to-date
RED IP port is non-functional
Flashing at 1Hz IP port not commissioned

OFF IP port not active
LINK GREEN Ethernet link
CN/IP GREEN flashing Traffic on BACnet IP port
MS/TP GREEN flashing Traffic on BACnet MS/TP port
ACT GREEN flashing Ethernet traffic
ONLINE GREEN Node is in configured online state
PWR GREEN Power
STAT OFF Normal operation
LVIS-3E100 Buttons
RESET Reset
STATUS Send service pin message
STAT
PWR
STATUS
RESET
ONLINE
CNIP, CN/IP
ACT709, MS/TP
ACT
LINK
LVIS-ME Buttons
RESET Reset
STATUS Send “I AM” message
WIRING
0,2 - 2,5 mm
2
Weidmüller BLZP 5.08/03/180
7
Ethernet
100Base-T
+-20-35 VDC
24 VAC +/-10%
TEMP
12 34 56
7 8910 111213
SWITCH POWER
EARTH
JP1 JP2
L-TEMP External temperature sensor

MS/TP
or
CEA-709 (LON
)
RS-485
or
FT/LPT (LON)
Jumpers
JP1 Normal operation
Clear configuration
JP2 MS/TP channel active/FT-10/
LPT-10 channel active
BIP channel active/CEA-852
(IP-10) channel active
Connectors
1 Temperatur sensor data
2 Temperatur sensor GND
3 Temperatur sensor +3V
4 MS/TP input GND/CEA-709 input EARTH GND
5 MS/TP +/CEA-709 input B
6 MS/TP -/CEA-709 input A
7 Ethernet 10/100 Base-T (RJ45)
8 Digital input GND
9 Digital input 1
10 Digital input 0
11 Power supply input earth ground
12 Power supply input MINUS
13 Power supply input PLUS
Do not connect PLUS to GND
L-VIS 5.7" PANEL
March 2014

775. fi 723NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
PROTECTIVE EARTH MUST BE CONNECTED!
12 345
POWER1 POWER2 USB1
USB2
Ethernet1
Ethernet267891011
Extension
85 - 264 VA C
-
24 VDC
EIA-485
L-TERM
Termination
+ 2 x USB
2 x 10/100Base-T (RJ45)
Extension cable 61006001
AUDIO OUT
-+
GND
EARTH
Stereo Plug
TRS connector Stereo 3.5 mm
0,2 - 2,5 mm
2
Weidmüller BLZP 5.08/03/180
7
GND TEMP +3 V DIGIN1 GND DIGIN0
Extension cable Nr. 61006001
Modular connector 6p6c (RJ12)
black GND green TEMP red +3 V white DIGIN1 blue GND yellow DIGIN0
PE
DC only!
Connectors
POWER1 1 Power supply AC input
85-264 VAC 2 Power supply AC input
POWER2 3 Power supply DC input earth ground
24 VDC 4 Power supply DC input MINUS
5 Power supply DC input PLUS
do not connect PLUS to GND
BACnet/ 6 Input earth ground
CEA-709
TP/FT-10 7 Input +/Input B
MS/TP
(Blank)/ 8 Input -/Input A
TP/LPT
EIA-485 9 Input GND
10 Input +
11 Input
-
BA
BACnet or CEA-709 (LON)
MS/TP
or
FT/LPT(LON)
RS-485
RS-485
MS/TP
or
FTCNIP
LINK
ACT
ONLINE
Ethernet2
Ethernet1
MICROSD
PC USB
RESET
STATUS
POWER
STAT
Status LEDs (LON)
FT GREEN flashing fast Traffic on CEA-709 port
GREEN flashing at 1 Hz CEA-709 port not commissioned
RED permanent CEA-709 port is damaged
RED flashing fast Traffic overload on CEA-709 port
CNIP GREEN IP port is fully functional
YELLOW IP port functional but config. is not up-to-date
RED IP port is non-functional
Flashing at 1Hz IP port not commissioned
OFF IP port not active
LINK GREEN Ethernet link
ACT GREEN flashing Ethernet traffic
ONLINE GREEN Node is in configured online state
PWR GREEN Power
STAT OFF Normal operation
Buttons (LON)
RESET Reset
STATUS Send service pin message
Buttons (BACnet)
RESET Reset
STATUS Send “I AM” message
Status LEDs (BACnet)
MS/TP GREEN flashing Traffic on BACnet MS/TP port
CNIP GREEN flashing Traffic on BACnet IP port
LINK GREEN Ethernet link
ACT GREEN flashing Ethernet traffic
ONLINE GREEN Node is online
PWR GREEN Power
STAT OFF Normal operation
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
L
VIS-3E100
5.7 inch L-VIS Touch Panel with LON
LVIS-3E112 12.1 inch L-VIS Touch Panel with LON
LVIS-3E115 15 inch L-VIS Touch Panel with LON
LVIS-ME200 5.7 inch L-VIS Touch Panel with BACnet
LVIS-ME212 12.1 inch L-VIS Touch Panel with BACnet
LVIS-ME215 15 inch L-VIS Touch Panel with BACnet
LVIS-FRAME1 Mounting frame for 5.7 inch L-VIS Touch Panel
LVIS-FRAME12 Mounting frame for 12.1 inch L-VIS Touch Panel
LVIS-FRAME15 Mounting frame for 15 inch L-VIS Touch Panel
BACNET AND LON TOUCH PANEL
L-VIS SERIES
WIRING
L-VIS 12.1" AND 15" PANEL
March 2014

776. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 724fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
BACNET GRAPHIC DISPLAY
BBC-SD
Supply Voltage 14 to 29 VAC/DC, 50/60 Hz
Supply Watts 4 Watts
Communication Type BACnet MS/TP Master Speed
9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 76.8 kbps, 57.6k,
115.2k SD/MMC Card Socket:
Supports 2GB storage capacity
Supported Protocols BACnet MS/TP
Memory 1 MB SRAM; 8MB Intel on board
Flash
Processor High-speed 32-bit processor
r
unning at 86 MHz
Display Type
Touch screen Backlit 16:9
widescreen TFT color LCD, 480 x
272 pixels
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 80% (non-condensing)
Dimensions 6.0" x 3.4" x 1.0"
(15.24 x 8.64 x 2.54 cm)
Weight 0.90 lb (0.41 kg)
Approvals UL File E95642, E120096, CE
Warranty 1 year (120 days on software)
DESCRIPTION
The BACnet Building Controller Small Display (BBC-SD)
is a compact, addressable network display device for MS/TP
based BACnet networks
. It enables users to quickly monitor
their system, and easily make changes to the way their building is controlled
. The wall mounted BBC-SD has a touch-
screen operator interface with permission based menu icons, allowing simple navigation to read and write BACnet values, view alarms, grouped data, and point descriptions
. The BBC-
SD is easily configured via the Windows-based BBC-SD- Pro™ Configuration Utility
.
FEATURES
• Able to automatically display and modify up to 150
BACnet object properties
• Can manually address, view and modify any primitive
data points on the BACnet network
• 50 configurable data screens containing live BACnet
network data and/or hyper links to other data screens allow unique point groupings
•
12-bit color, 480 x 272 pixel TFT-based touch screen
allows local user interface for data display and modification
•
Conforms to BACnet MS/TP LAN Standard
• Multi-tiered icon-driven screen navigation
• Multi-level numeric password-based access protection
• Able to "sniff" network traffic, store and display up to
128 notification or summary alarms
• Flash program upgradeable through use of standard
SD/MMC card port
• Non-volatile memory stored on the BBC-SD for back-up
and cloning over the network
• Network time synchronization capabilities (requires
interaction with a live time master)
• Advanced MS/TP diagnostics utilities
• Up to 16 linked BACnet schedules and calendars
• AUTOPHOS
®
compatible
O
N
12
EARTH
N+
N -
J2
X2
X1
J3
BIAS
TERM
SW1
Term J3 - BACnet MS/TP
network connection
Use 18-22 AWG - shielded,
twisted-pair cable .
Term J0 - earth
ground connection
Term SW1 -
network
termination
and bias
Term J2 - 24VAC/DC
power connection
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BBC-SD BACnet Graphic Display
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ACCESSORIES
BBC-SD-PRO Configuration Software (required)
3 .2"
2 .3"
1 .1"
0 .9"
1 .3"
2 .5"
0 .9"
5 .8"
5 .3"
2 .3"
3 .2"
BBC-SD back,
terminal view
BBC-SD
March 2014

777. fi 725NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
TOUCHSCREEN OPERATOR DISPLAY PANEL
WEBOP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The WebOP Series of touchscreen operator panels are designed to
satisfy the stringent standards required in the automation market for
both commercial and industrial applications
. This series of operator
panels are designed with ARM-based RISC platform. It provides
Real-Time OS which bundles WebOP Designer software and lets the Operator Panel become a control HMI for flexible system integration
. WebOP Designer 2.0 is a free software development tool
which runs on a standard PC and helps create application screens.
This ser
ies of operator panels also support a variety of LCD sizes
from 4
.3" to 10.1" and are suitable for any HMI applications, and will
interface to different DDCs, motion/thermal controllers, inverters and sensors
. It has variety of communication interface connections make
it very flexible for many applications. It supports BACnet MSTP,
BACnet IP, Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP/IP, Rockwell and Siemens PLCs and many others
.
FEATURES
• V •
Supports BACnet MS/TP, BACnet IP, Modbus RTU,
Modbus TCP/IP, and other PLC protocols
• Supports ARM9-based CPUs with 200MHz and 128MB
flash memory
• Supports RTC, battery backup RAM, and Ethernet-based
operator panels
• Supports runtime data downloads through Serial,
Ethernet, USB
• Supports adjustable brightness controls via touch panel
• Reliable firmware for 24/7 operation
• Supports Windows XP/ Vista-based WebOP Designer
development tool
• Supports vertical and horizontal application screen
rotation
• Communicates with up to four types of devices
• Panel mounting for machinery
• IP65 approved front panel
8 3 9
5
2 7
10
WOP-2050T / WOP-2070T / WOP-2080T / WOP-2100T
WOP-2040T
2 5
9
3
7
8
10
Power Connector (DC Jack)
Power Connector (Terminal)
COM 1 9-Pin Female / COM 1 9-Pin
COM 2 9-Pin Male / COM 2 9-Pin
COM 2 5-Pin (Terminal)
COM 3 6-Pin (Terminal)
USB Connector (Type-A)
USB Connector (Type-B)
Ethernet port (N models only)
Micro-SD Slot / Micro-SD
Audio /
Mic /
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
WIRING
Supply Voltage 24 VDC ± 10%
Supply Watts 5W, 10W
Protocol BACnet, Modbus, and other PLC
Protocols
Processor 32 bit RISC, 200MHz
Operating System HMI RTOS
LED Indication Power on LED
Mounting Panel
Housing Type Plastic
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 10-90% RH, non-condensing
Storage Temperature -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Approvals CE, BSMI, CCC, UL, FCC Class A
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
Fixing Screw
Panel fixing
WOP-2000T Series
COM 1 DB-9 Female
Download Cable
Pin Description
1 RS-422 TXD+ / RS-485+
2 RS-232 RXD
3 RS-232 TXD
4 RS-422 RXD+
5 GND
6 RS-422 TXD- / RS-485-
7 RS-232 TXD (COM 3)
RS-232 RXD (COM 3)8
9 RS-422 RXD-
COM 1
COM 1 Connector 9-Pin Female PC Connector 9-Pin Male
COM 2 (5 Pins)
COM 3 (6 Pins)
RS-422
RS-485
RS-232
RXD
SG
TXD
TXD
SG
RXD
2
5
3
3
5
2
COM 2
COM 2 Connector 9-Pin Male PC Connector 9-Pin Male
RXD
SG
TXD
TXD
SG
RXD
2
5
3
3
5
2
COM 3 DB-9 (T series only)
COM 3 Connector 9-Pin Female PC Connector 9-Pin Male
RXD
SG
TXD
TXD
SG
RXD
8
5
7
3
5
2
Power supply
Powered by a Low Voltage / Limited Energy power source.
Fixing Screw
Panel fixing
WOP-2000T Series
COM 1 DB-9 Female
Download Cable
Pin Description
1 RS-422 TXD+ / RS-485+
2 RS-232 RXD
3 RS-232 TXD
4 RS-422 RXD+
5 GND
6 RS-422 TXD- / RS-485-
7 RS-232 TXD (COM 3)
RS-232 RXD (COM 3)8
9 RS-422 RXD-
COM 1
COM 1 Connector 9-Pin Female PC Connector 9-Pin Male
COM 2 (5 Pins)
COM 3 (6 Pins)
RS-422
RS-485
RS-232
RXD
SG
TXD
TXD
SG
RXD
2
5
3
3
5
2
COM 2
COM 2 Connector 9-Pin Male PC Connector 9-Pin Male
RXD
SG
TXD
TXD
SG
RXD
2
5
3
3
5
2
COM 3 DB-9 (T series only)
COM 3 Connector 9-Pin Female PC Connector 9-Pin Male
RXD
SG
TXD
TXD
SG
RXD
8
5
7
3
5
2
Power supply
Powered by a Low Voltage / Limited Energy power source.
Fixing Screw
Panel fixing
WOP-2000T Series
COM 1 DB-9 Female
Download Cable
Pin Description
1 RS-422 TXD+ / RS-485+
2 RS-232 RXD
3 RS-232 TXD
4 RS-422 RXD+
5 GND
6 RS-422 TXD- / RS-485-
7 RS-232 TXD (COM 3)
RS-232 RXD (COM 3)8
9 RS-422 RXD-
COM 1
COM 1 Connector 9-Pin Female PC Connector 9-Pin Male
COM 2 (5 Pins)
COM 3 (6 Pins)
RS-422
RS-485
RS-232
RXD
SG
TXD
TXD
SG
RXD
2
5
3
3
5
2
COM 2
COM 2 Connector 9-Pin Male PC Connector 9-Pin Male
RXD
SG
TXD
TXD
SG
RXD
2
5
3
3
5
2
COM 3 DB-9 (T series only)
COM 3 Connector 9-Pin Female PC Connector 9-Pin Male
RXD
SG
TXD
TXD
SG
RXD
8
5
7
3
5
2
Power supply
Powered by a Low Voltage / Limited Energy power source.
Mounting
March 2014
WOP-2100T

778. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 726fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
TOUCHSCREEN OPERATOR DISPLAY PANEL
WEBOP SERIES
Model
WOP-2040T
WOP-2050T
WOP-2070T
WOP-2080T
WOP-2100T
A 130 mm / 5.11”
188 mm / 7.4”
188 mm / 7.4”
231.5 mm / 9.11”
269.8 mm / 10.62”
BC
LH
106.2 mm / 4.18” 143.3 mm / 5.64” 143.3 mm / 5.64” 174.6 mm / 6.87”
212 mm / 8.35”
36.4 mm / 1.43”
30 mm / 1.18” 30 mm / 1.18” 37 mm / 1.46”
37.4 mm / 1.47”
118.5 mm / 4.66”
175 mm / 6.89” 175 mm / 6.89”
221 mm / 8.7”
259.5 mm / 10.22”
92.5 mm / 3.64”
132.5 mm / 5.21” 132.5 mm / 5.21”
164 mm / 6.46”
201.5 mm / 7.93”
Outlet Cut-out
B
AC 6mm
H
L
0.23”
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
COMMUNICATION
PORTS
DATA
LOGGING WEIGHT DISPLAY
WIRING
TERMINATIONS
WOP-2040T-N1AE RS-232/422/485,
USB, Ethernet
Internal + MicroSD 0.66 lbs (0.3 kg) 4.3" WQVGA LCD1 x RJ-45, 1 x USB, 1 x DB-9,
2 x plug-in terminal block (#16 ~ 24 AWG)
WOP-2040T-S1AE RS-232/422/485,
USB
Internal 0.66 lbs (0.3 kg) 4.3" WQVGA LCD1 x USB, 1 x DB-9,
2 x plug-in terminal block (#16 ~ 24 AWG)
WOP-2050T-S1AE RS-232/422/485,
USB
Internal + MicroSD 1.12 lbs (0.51 kg) 5.6" QVGA LCD1 x USB, 1 x DB-9,
2 x plug-in terminal block (#16 ~ 24 AWG)
WOP-2070T-N2AE RS-232/422/485,
USB, Ethernet
Internal + MicroSD 1.32 lbs (0.6 kg) 7" WVGA LCD 1 x RJ-45, 1 x USB, 1 x DB-9,
2 x plug-in terminal block (#16 ~ 24 AWG)
WOP-2070T-S2AE RS-232/422/485,
USB
Internal 1.32 lbs (0.6 kg) 7" WVGA LCD 1 x USB, 1 x DB-9,
2 x plug-in terminal block (#16 ~ 24 AWG)
WOP-2080T-N2AE RS-232/422/485,
USB, Ethernet
Internal + MicroSD 2.05 lbs (0.93 kg) 8" SVGA LCD 1 x RJ-45, 1 x USB, 1 x DB-9,
2 x plug-in terminal block (#16 ~ 24 AWG)
WOP-2080T-S2AE RS-232/422/485,
USB
Internal 2.05 lbs (0.93 kg) 8" SVGA LCD 1 x USB, 1 x DB-9,
2 x plug-in terminal block (#16 ~ 24 AWG)
WOP-2100T-N2AE RS-232/422/485,
USB, Ethernet
Internal + MicroSD 2.64 lbs (1.2 kg) 10.1" WSVGA LCD1 x RJ-45, 1 x USB, 1 x DB-9,
2 x plug-in terminal block (#16 ~ 24 AWG)
WOP-2100T-S2AE RS-232/422/485,
USB
Internal 2.64 lbs (1.2 kg) 10.1" WSVGA LCD1 x USB, 1 x DB-9,
2 x plug-in terminal block (#16 ~ 24 AWG)
PINOUTS
Fixing Screw
Panel fixing
WOP-2000T Series
COM 1 DB-9 Female
Download Cable
Pin Description
1 RS-422 TXD+ / RS-485+
2 RS-232 RXD
3 RS-232 TXD
4 RS-422 RXD+
5 GND
6 RS-422 TXD- / RS-485-
7 RS-232 TXD (COM 3)
RS-232 RXD (COM 3)8
9 RS-422 RXD-
COM 1
COM 1 Connector 9-Pin Female PC Connector 9-Pin Male
COM 2 (5 Pins)
COM 3 (6 Pins)
RS-422
RS-485
RS-232
RXD
SG
TXD
TXD
SG
RXD
2
5
3
3
5
2
COM 2
COM 2 Connector 9-Pin Male PC Connector 9-Pin Male
RXD
SG
TXD
TXD
SG
RXD
2
5
3
3
5
2
COM 3 DB-9 (T series only)
COM 3 Connector 9-Pin Female PC Connector 9-Pin Male
RXD
SG
TXD
TXD
SG
RXD
8
5
7
3
5
2
Power supply
Powered by a Low Voltage / Limited Energy power source.
ACCESSORIES
1702002600 Power Cable US Plug 1.8 M
CW
OP-P2HAB-ADU2E
PC to HMI program download cable, USB/2m
CW
OP-P2HFM-AD12E
PC to HMI program download cable, DB9/2m
PWR-247-AE 24 V 50 W AC-DC Power Adapter

779. fi 727NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
Power Input
24 VAC/VDC 4 VA
half-wave regulated
design allows power
sharing with other
half-wave devices.
Ethernet
10/100 Mbps Ethernet
with auto-negotiation
and Auto-MDIX.
Protocols supported
include HTTP, IP, UDP,
TCP, and BACnet/IP.
Aux USB Connection
Allows firmware upgrades
in the field
MS/TP
3-wire isolated EIA-485
connection with support
for 2-wire non-isolated
devices
Power LED:
Power OK indicator
MS/TP LED
Monitors MS/TP activity
Reset IP
Switch returns BAS
Router to default IP
address and default
password settings.
Ethernet LED
Monitors Ethernet activity
BACNET MULTI-NETWORK ROUTER
BASRT-B
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC
Supply Current 4 VA
Communication
Ethernet BACnet IP, IEEE 802.3 10/100
Mbps data rate 10BASE-T,
100BASE-TX (100 m (max) CAT5
cable length)
MS/TP BACnet MS/TP, ANSI/ASHRAE 135
(ISO 16484-5) 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800 bps data rate EIA-485 (1200 m (max) cable length)
LED Indication
Power Green = power OK
Ethernet Green = 100 Mbps
Yellow = 10 Mbps
Flash = activity
MS/TP Flashing green = receive activity
Operating Temperature 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 10 to 90% (non-condensing)
Dimensions 4.85"H x 2.74"W x 1.0"D
(12.3 x 1.9 x 2.5 cm)
Weight 0.6 lbs (0.27 kg)
Approvals CE Mark; CFR 47, Part 15 Class A
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The BASRT-B provides stand-alone routing between BACnet
networks such as BACnet/IP, BACnet Ethernet, and BACnet
MSTP
. This allows the system integrator to mix BACnet
network technologies within a single BACnet internetwork.
There are tw
o physical communication ports on the BAS
Router
. One is a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port and the other an
isolated MS/TP port. Configuration is accomplished via a web
page.
FEATURES
• Versatile Routing
• Flexible communications
• IP network support
• Easy installation
Termination
and bias
applied
internally
Connect shield to chassis
at only one pointBASRT-B
Up to 31 Full-load
Field MS/TP
Devices
D+ D–
24V
MS/TP
SC
+
–
Power
HIB
HI
24 VAC
Ground Ground Ground
LO
HI
24 VAC
LO
HI
24 VAC
LO
HI
COM
GND
D+ D–
24V GND
WIRING
DIAGRAM
SPECIFICATIONS
BASRT-B
BASRTP-B
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BASRT-B BACnet multi-network router
BASRTP-B Portable BACnet multi-network router
(powered via usb port)

780. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 728fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
DESCRIPTION
The L-IP LON models connects CEA-709 channels (e.g. TP/
FT-10 or TP/XF-1250) through IP networks. The BACnet model
connects BACnet MS/TP to a BACnet/IP network. It routes data
pac
kets back and forth through an IP based network, such as
a LAN (Ethernet), an Intranet, or even the Internet
. They also
connect to the IP network via a 100Base-T Ethernet channel.
Ev
ery CEA-709 (LON) L-IP router supports the operating
modes “Smart Switch Mode” and “Configured Router Mode”
.
FEATURES
• B
• Configuration via built-in Web server or serial port
• Status and activity LED
• 100baseT connection
• DIN-rail mountable
Supply Voltage 12 to 35 VDC, 12 to 24 VAC ± 10%
Supply Watts 3 Watts
Communication
LIP-1ECTB Type CEA-709, IP (10/100Base-T +
TP/XF-1250)
LIP-3xxxx Type CEA-709, IP (10/100Base-T +
TP/FT-10)
LIP-ME201 Type BACnet, IP (10/100Base-T +
BACnet MS/TP)
Channels
LIP-1ECTB 1x TP/XF-1250, 1x Ethernet
(100Base-T) Lonmark IP-852, HTTP, FTP
LIP-3333ECTB
4x TP/FT-10, 1x Ethernet
(100Base-T) Lonmark IP-852, HTTP, FTP
LIP-33ECRB/LIP-33ECTB

2x TP/FT-10, 1x Ethernet
(100Base-T) Lonmark IP-852, HTTP, FTP
LIP-3ECTB
1x TP/FT-10, 1x Ethernet
(100Base-T) Lonmark IP-852, HTTP, FTP
LIP-ME201
1x BACnet MS/TP, 1x Ethernet
(100Base-T) BACnet/IP, HTTP,FTP
Operating Temperature 0° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 10-90% RH @ 122°F (50°C) non-
condensing
Mounting DIN rail
Dimensions
All other models 4.21"W x 3.94"H x 2.36"D
(10.7 x 10.0 x 6.0 cm)
LIP-3333ECTB 6.26"W x 3.94"H x 2.36"D
(15.9 x 10.0 x 6.0 cm)
Weight LIP-3333ECTB
0.68 lbs (0.31 kg)
All other models 0.49 lbs (0.22 kg)
Approvals CE, FCC
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
WIRING
10/100Base-T (RJ45)
-12-35 VDC
12-24 VAC
+
MS/TP Port
CEA-852
4568 15 16 17
POWEREthernet
Serial Terminal
RESET
LINK
ACT
ACT
BACnet/IPEthernet
BBMD
POWER
STATUS
Connectors
MS/TP 4 Input GND
5 Input +
6 Input
-
Ethernet 8 10/100Base-T (RJ45)
POWER 15 Power supply input EARTH GND
16 Power supply input MINUS
Can be connected to EARTH GND
17 Power supply input PLUS
Do NOT be connect to
EARTH GND
SERIAL 40 EIA-232 (DB9 male)

Buttons
RESET Reset
STATUS Send “I AM” pin message
Status LEDs
B Green flashing fast Traffic on MS/TP port
Orange flashing Sole master
Red Communication error
C Green flashing Traffic on BACnet IP port
D Green Ethernet link
E Green flashing Ethernet traffic
F Green BBMD enabled
G Green Power
H OFF Normal operation
40
B
C
F
E
D
G
H
MSTP
10/100Base-T
(RJ45)
-12-35 VDC 12-24 VAC+
MS/TP Port
CEA-852
4568 15 16 17
POWEREthernet
Serial Terminal
RESET
LINK
ACT
ACT
BACnet/IPEthernet
BBMD
POWER
STATUS
Connectors
MS/TP 4 Input GND
5 Input +
6 Input
-
Ethernet 8 10/100Base-T (RJ45)
POWER 15 Power supply input EARTH GND
16 Power supply input MINUS
Can be connected to EARTH GND
17 Power supply input PLUS
Do NOT be connect to
EARTH GND
SERIAL 40 EIA-232 (DB9 male)

Buttons
RESET Reset
STATUS Send “I AM” pin message
Status LEDs
B Green flashing fast Traffic on MS/TP port
Orange flashing Sole master
Red Communication error
C Green flashing Traffic on BACnet IP port
D Green Ethernet link
E Green flashing Ethernet traffic
F Green BBMD enabled
G Green Power
H OFF Normal operation
40
B
C
F
E
D
G
H
MSTP
LIP-ME201
LIP-ME201
BACNET/IP AND LON/IP ROUTER
L-IP SERIES

781. fi 729NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
BACNET/IP AND LON/IP ROUTER
L-IP SERIES
WIRING
LIP-xECTB
LIP-xxECRB
LIP-xxECTB
10/100Base-T
(RJ45)
-12-35 VDC 12-24 VAC+
Termination (L-Term)
CEA-709
CEA-852
4568 15 16 17
POWEREthernet
Serial Terminal
RESET
LINK
ACT
ACT
CNIP Ethernet
Server
POWER
STATUS
40
B
C
F
E
D
G
H
FT
Connectors
CEA-709 4 Input EARTH GND port 1
5 Input B port 1
6 Input A port 1
Ethernet 8 10/100Base-T (RJ45)
POWER 15 Power supply input EARTH GND
16 Power supply input MINUS
17 Power supply input PLUS
Do NOT connect to
EARTH GND
SERIAL 40 EIA-232 (DB9 male)

Buttons
RESET Reset
STATUS Send service pin message
Status LEDs
B Green flashing fast Traffic on port 1
Green flashing at
1 HZ
Red permanent
Red flashing fast
Green
Yellow
Red
Flashing at 1 Hz
OFF
Port not commissioned
CEA-709 port damaged
Traffic overload on port 1
IP port is fully functional
IP port functional but
config. is not up-to-date
IP port in non-functional
IP port is not commissioned
IP port is not active
C
D Green Ethernet link
E Green flashing Ethernet traffic
F Green BBMD enabled
G Green Power
H OFF Normal operation
10/100Base-T (RJ45)
-12-35 VDC
12-24 VAC
+
Termination (L-Term)
CEA-709
Loop
Side 1
CEA-852
4568 15 16 17
POWEREthernet
Serial Terminal
RESET
LINK
ACTPRIM
ACT
CNIP Ethernet
Server
POWER
STATUS
40
B
A
C
F
E
D
G
H
FT
123
FT
CEA-709
Loop
Side 2
Connectors
CEA-709 1 Do not connect
2 Input B loop side 2
3 Input A loop side 2
CEA-709 4 Input EARTH GND port 2
5 Input B loop side 1
6 Input A loop side 1
Ethernet 8 10/100Base-T (RJ45)
POWER 15 Power supply input EARTH GND
16 Power supply input MINUS
17 Power supply input PLUS
Do NOT connect to
EARTH GND
SERIAL 40 EIA-232 (DB9 male)

Buttons
RESET Reset
STATUS Send service pin message
Status LEDs
A Green Device is active
Off
Orange
Red
Green flashing fast Traffic on CEA-709 loop
Green flashing at
1 HZ
Red permanent
Red flashing fast
Green
Yellow
Red
Flashing at 1 Hz
OFF
Device is inactive (standby)
Problem with twin router
Device is inactive due to
error
Port not commissioned
CEA-709 port damaged
Loop open/Traffic overload
IP port is fully functional
IP port functional but
config. is not up-to-date
IP port in non-functional
IP port is not commissioned
IP port is not active
B
C
D Green Ethernet link
E Green flashing Ethernet traffic
F Green BBMD enabled
G Green Power
H OFF Normal operation
10/100Base-T (RJ45)
-12-35 VDC
12-24 VAC
+
Termination (L-Term)
CEA-709
Port 1
CEA-852
4568 15 16 17
POWEREthernet
Serial Terminal
RESET
LINK
ACT
ACT
CNIP Ethernet
Server
POWER
STATUS
40
B
C
F
E
D
G
H
FT
123
FT
CEA-709
Port 2
Connectors
CEA-709 1 Input EARTH GND port 2
2 Input B port 2
3 Input A port 2
CEA-709 4 Input EARTH GND port 1
5 Input B port 1
6 Input A port 1
Ethernet 8 10/100Base-T (RJ45)
POWER 15 Power supply input EARTH GND
16 Power supply input MINUS
17 Power supply input PLUS
Do NOT connect to
EARTH GND
SERIAL 40 EIA-232 (DB9 male)

Buttons
RESET Reset
STATUS Send service pin message
Status LEDs
A Green flashing fast Traffic on port 2
Green flashing at
1 HZ
Red permanent
Red flashing fast
Green flashing fast Traffic on port 1
Green flashing at
1 HZ
Red permanent
Red flashing fast
Green
Yellow
Red
Flashing at 1 Hz
OFF
Port not commissioned
CEA-709 port damaged
Traffic overload on port 2
Port not commissioned
CEA-709 port damaged
Traffic overload on port 1
IP port is fully functional
IP port functional but
config. is not up-to-date
IP port in non-functional
IP port is not commissioned
IP port is not active
B
C
D Green Ethernet link
E Green flashing Ethernet traffic
F Green BBMD enabled
G Green Power
H OFF Normal operation

782. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 730fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
BACNET/IP AND LON/IP ROUTER
L-IP SERIES
WIRING
LIP-xxxECTB
10/100Base-T
(RJ45)
-12-35 VDC 12-24 VAC+
Termination (L-Term)
CEA-852
1231 72 42526
POWEREthernet
Serial Terminal
RESET
LINK
ACTACTACTACT
ACT
CNIP
Ethernet
L-IP
Server
POWER
STATUS
40
E
A
B
C
D
F
I
G
J
H
FT
456
FT
789
FT
10 1112 13 1415
FT
CEA-709
Port 4CEA-709
Port 3
CEA-709
Port 2CEA-709
Port 1
Connectors
CEA-709 4 Input EARTH GND port 4
5 Input B port 4
6 Input A port 4
CEA-709 7 Input EARTH GND port 3
8 Input B port 3
9 Input A port 3
CEA-709 10 Input EARTH GND port 2
11 Input B port 2
12 Input A port 2
CEA-709 13 Input EARTH GND port 1
14 Input B port 1
15 Input A port 1
Ethernet 17 10/100Base-T (RJ45)
POWER 15 Power supply input EARTH GND
16 Power supply input MINUS
17 Power supply input PLUS
Do NOT connect to
EARTH GND
SERIAL 40 EIA-232 (DB9 male)

Buttons
RESET Reset
STATUS Send service pin message
Status LEDs
A Green flashing fast Traffic on port 4
Green flashing at
1 HZ
Red permanent
Red flashing fast
Green flashing fast Traffic on port 3
Green flashing at
1 HZ
Red permanent
Red flashing fast
Green flashing fast
Green flashing at
1 HZ
Red permanent
Red flashing fast
Green flashing fast
Green flashing at
1 HZ
Red permanent
Red flashing fast
Green
Yellow
Red
Flashing at 1 Hz
OFF
Port not commissioned
CEA-709 port damaged
Traffic overload on port 4
Port not commissioned
CEA-709 port damaged
Traffic overload on port 3
Traffic on port 2
Port not commissioned
CEA-709 port damaged
Traffic overload on port 2
Traffic on port 1
Port not commissioned
CEA-709 port damaged
Traffic overload on port 1
IP port is fully functional
IP port functional but
config. is not up-to-date
IP port in non-functional
IP port is not commissioned
IP port is not active
B
C
D
E
F Green Ethernet link
G Green flashing Ethernet traffic
H Green BBMD enabled
I Green Power
J OFF Normal operation
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LIP-1ECTB L-IP Lon Router, 1 TP/XF-1250, 1 ethernet port (IP-852)
LIP-3333ECTB L-IP Lon Router, 4 TP/FT-10, 1 ethernet port (IP-852)
LIP-33ECRB L-IP Lon Router with redundancy, 2 TP/FT-10, 1 ethernet port (IP-852)
LIP-33ECTB L-IP Lon Router, 2TP/FT-10 , 1 ethernet port (IP-852)
LIP-3ECTB L-IP Lon Router, 1TP/FT-10, 1 ethernet port (IP-852)
LIP-ME201 BACnet/IP Router, MS/TP to BACnet/IP

783. fi 731NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
LON SWITCH ROUTER
L-SWITCH SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The L-Switch is the solution for interconnecting multiple CEA-
709 channels. It provides up to five ports and routes packets
between these ports. In spite of its small size, the L-Switch
router delivers first class performance and flexibility in use. In
order to pro
vide the optimal router configuration, the L-Switch
comes with 2 to 5 ports as well as the two operating modes “Smart Switch Mode” and “Configured Router Mode”.
FEATURES
• For ph
5 CEA-709 network segments
• Can be used as configured router
• Can be used as learning switch or repeater in Smart
Switch Mode
• Plug & Play installation in Smart Switch Mode
• Forwards packets of up to 256 bytes length
• Supports up to four domains in Smart Switch Mode
• DIN-rail mountable
Supply Voltage 12 to 35 VDC, 12 to 24 VAC ± 10%
Supply Watts 3 Watts
Communication Type CEA-709 (LON)
Channels LS-11333CB
LonMark System 2x TP/XF-1250, 3x
TP/FT-10
LS-11CB LonMark System 2x TP/XF-1250
LS-13300CB LonMark System 1x TP/XF-1250, 2x
TP/FT-10
LS-13333CB LonMark System 1x TP/XF-1250, 4x
TP/FT-10
LS-13CB LonMark System 1x TP/XF-1250, 1x
TP/FT-10
LS-33300CB LonMark System 3x TP/FT-10
LS-33CB LonMark System 2x TP/FT-10
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 10-90% RH @ 122°F (50°C) non-
condensing
Dimensions
LS-xxxxxCB 6.26"W x 3.94"H x 2.36"D (15.9 x
10.0 x 6.0 cm)
LS-xxCB 4.21"W x 3.94"H x 2.36"D (10.7 x
10.0 x 6.0 cm)
Weight
LS-xxxxxCB 0.66 lb (0.30 kg)
LS-xxCB 0.49 lb (0.22 kg)
Approvals CE, FCC
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
LS-11CB
LS-11333CB
DIP1 DIP2 Function
ON ON Smart switch mode
ON OFF Repeater mode
OFF ON Smart switch mode/ subnet learning
OFF OFF Configured CEA-709 router
†
Configured EIA-709 router
‡

DIP3 Function (RS-485 version only)
ON Bit-rate auto detection on
OFF Bit-rate auto detection off
DIP4 Must be OFF
DIP5 Must be OFF
DIP6 Must be OFF
DIP7 Must be OFF
1234567
OFF
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
OFF ON
LS-xxxxxCB
‡
LS-xxCB
†

784. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 732fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
LON SWITCH ROUTER
L-SWITCH SERIES
-12-35 VDC
12-24 VA C+
CEA-709
Port 2
Termination
(L-Term)
CEA-709
Port 1
123456 15 16 17
POWERFT
Serial Terminal
(Console Connector)
RESET
ACTA CT POWER
STATUS
Connectors
CEA-709 1 Input EART H GND port 2
2 Input B port 2
3 Input A port 2
CEA-709 4 Input EART H GND port 1
5 Input B port 1
6 Input A port 1
POWER 15 Power supply input EARTH GND
16 Power supply input MINUS
17 Power supply input PLUS
Do NOT connect to
EARTH GND
SERIAL 40 RS-232 Interface (DB9 male)

Buttons
teseR TESER
STATUS Send service pin message
Status LEDs
A Green flashing fast Traffic port 2
Green flashing at Port not commissioned
1 HZ
Red permanent CEA-709 port damaged
Red flashing fast Traffic overload on port 2
B Green flashing fast Traffic on port 1
Green flashing at Port not commissioned
1 HZ
Red permanent CEA-709 port damaged
Red flashing fast Traffic overload on port 1
G Green Power
H OFF Normal operation
40
A
B
G
H
FT
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LS-11333CB L-Switch 2 x TP/XF-1250, 3 x TP/FT-10
LS-11CB L-Switch 2 x TP/XF-1250
LS-13300CB L-Switch 1 x TP/XF-1250, 2 x TP/FT-10
LS-13333CB L-Switch 1 x TP/XF-1250, 4 x TP/FT-10
LS-13CB L-Switch 1 x TP/XF-1250, 1 x TP/FT-10
LS-33300CB L-Switch 3 x TP/FT-10
LS-33CB L-Switch 2 x TP/FT-10
LS-xxCB
CEA-709
Port 4
Termination
(L-Term)
CEA-709
Port 3
CEA-709
Port 2CEA-709
Port 1
-12-35 VDC
12-24 VA C+
CEA-709
Port 5
ACT ACT ACT ACT
RESET
Serial Terminal
(Console Connector)
POWER40
STATUS
A
D
C
B
I
J
ACT
E
456789 24 25 26
POWER
Connectors
CEA-709 1 Input EARTH GND port 5
2 Input B port 5
3 Input A port 5
CEA-709 4 Input EARTH GND port 4
5 Input B port 4
6 Input A port 4
CEA-709 7 Input EARTH GND port 3
8 Input B port 3
9 Input A port 3
CEA-709 10 Input EARTH GND port 2
11 Input B port 2
12 Input A port 2
CEA-709 13 Input EARTH GND port 1
14 Input B port 1
15 Input A port 1
POWER 24 Power supply input EARTH GND
25 Power supply input MINUS
26 Power supply input PLUS
Do NOT connect to
EARTH GND
SERIAL 40 EIA-232 (DB9 male)

Buttons
RESET Reset
STATUS Send service pin message
Status LEDs
A Green flashing fast Traffic port 5
Green flashing at Port not commissioned
1 HZ
Red permanent CEA-709 port damaged
Red flashing fast Traffic overload on port 5
B Green flashing fast Traffic on port 4
Green flashing at Port not commissioned
1 HZ
Red permanent CEA-709 port damaged
Red flashing fast Traffic overload on port 4
C Green flashing fast Traffic on port 3
Green flashing at Port not commissioned
1 HZ
Red permanent CEA-709 port damaged
Red flashing fast Traffic overload on port 3
D Green flashing fast Traffic on port 2
Green flashing at Port not commissioned
1 HZ
Red permanent CEA-709 port damaged
Red flashing fast Traffic overload on port 2
E Green flashing fast Traffic on port 1
Green flashing at Port not commissioned
1 HZ
Red permanent CEA-709 port damaged
Red flashing fast Traffic overload on port 1
I Green Power
J OFF Normal operation
101112 13 14 15123
FT FT FT FTFT
LS-xxxxxCB

785. fi 733NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
FTT-10 LONWORKS REPEATER
110A
Input Power 12-36 VDC or 9-26 VAC @ 30 mA
typical. Polarity insensitive wiring.
Network Transceiver Type Two Echelon FTT-10A transceivers at
78 kbps. DC blocking capacitors forLink
Power network are installed.
Network Termination Separate jumpers for each channel
support free and bus topology
termination.
Multi-Segment Operation Max of 5 repeaters can be daisy chained to constr
uct a 10-channel
repeater hub.
Protection Input power is fused and transient
voltage protected. Fuse automatically
resets when f
ault is removed
.
Enclosure Material Grey frame retardant Noryl
UL94_V0
Operating Temperature 32° to 176°F (0° to 80°C)
Operating Humidity 0-90% RH non-condensing
Dimensions 3.54"H x 1.42"W x 2.28"D
(90 x 36 x 58 mm)
Enclosure Type DIN rail mount to 35 mm rail
Weight 0.3 lb (0.14kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
Model 110A is a two-channel physical layer repeater for FTT-10 LonWorks networks
. Data received on one channel
is reconditioned and re-transmitted on the other channel.
Each Model 110A eff
ectively doubles the wiring distance
and the number of nodes that can be placed on the network
.
On-board jumpers allo
w each channel to be terminated
independently for bus or free topology
.
A local 3.5 mm network jack allows a convenient way to
connect an installation or diagnostic tool to the network without disconnecting any wires
.
Three LEDs provide diagnostic information for
troubleshooting. A green LED indicates when power is
applied. Two red LEDs indicate when data is being received
on each of the two local channels.
FEATURES
• Extends wiring distance of FTT-10 LonWorks Networks
• Up to 5 repeaters can be daisy chained together to
create a multi-segment repeater of up to 10 channels
• Low cost alternative to routers configured as repeaters
• All wiring is to removable terminal blocks for ease of
service
• Polarity insensitive AC/DC wide input voltage range
• Input power has over current and transient voltage
suppression
• Termination for bus and free topology
• 3.5 mm network jack for local installation tool
connection
• Communication and power indicators to assist in field
diagnostics
• DIN Rail mount enclosure
WIRING AND INSTALLATION
All wiring is done via two sets of removable terminal blocks. The
top terminal block has two positions and supplies power to the unit.
12-36 VDC or 9-26 VAC can be used. The terminals are polarity
insensitive.
The bottom terminal block has four positions. Two
terminals for each network. The terminals for the first
network are labeled Network A1 and Network B1. The
second network channel is labeled Network A2 and
Network B2. The network wiring is polarity insensitive.
The network jack provides an access point for a network
Daisy Chain
Connectors
Vin B
(Input Power)
Vin A
Network Jack Network A1 Network B1 Network A2 Network B2
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
110A
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
110A Model 110A FTT-10 Physical Layer Repeater

786. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 734fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
L-Term
Bus Terminator
LOYTEC
www.loytec.com
LT-03
busfreecom
topology
busfreecom
TP/FT-10
topology
18
L-Term
Bus Terminator
LOYTEC
www.loytec. com
TP/FT-10
busfree
comtopology
busfreecom
TP/FT-10
topology
LT-33
LT-13
LT-33 LT-03
L-Term
Bus Terminator
LOYTEC
www.loytec. com
LT-04
RS-485
A
A
B
+-
B
+-
NC
18
L-Term
Bus Terminator
LOYTEC
www.loytec. com
LT-B4
RS-485
AB
+-
NC
120
5V
510510
NC
24V
AC/DC
GND
LT-B4 LT-04
BACNET, LON, MODBUS TERMINATOR
L-TERM SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The LON TP/FT-10, TP/LPT-10, TP/XF-1250 and BACnet MS/
TP networks need to be terminated using a defined network
terminator
.
L-T
erm LT-03 offers one standard network terminator for a
TP/FT-10 or TP/LPT-10 channel
. In addition, LT-03 comes
with a network access connector for a simple and reliable connection to the CEA-709 network e
.g. for maintenance or
analyzing the network locally.
L-T
erm LT-13 and LT-33 offer two standard network
terminators in a slim housing which makes them a perfect solution for LOYTEC active network infrastructure products (e.g. L-IP, L-Switch, L-Proxy etc.) at a very competitive price.
L-T
erm LT-04 and LT-B4 offer one standard network
terminator for a EIA-485 channel such as BACnet MS/ TP, Modbus or TP/RS-485 (CEA-709)
. LT-04 comes with
a network access connector for a simple and reliable connection to the network e
.g. for maintenance or analyzing
the network locally. The LT-B4 is a bus termination with
biasing circuit (failsafe biasing) and needs a power supply.
This biasing circuit dr
aws the level of the bus in standby mode
(idle) to a safe value (logic "1")
.
FEATURES
• B •
Supports bus and free topology termination (LT-03,
LT-13, LT-33)
• TP/FT-10 side can also be used to terminate link power
channels
• Pluggable screw terminals (0.5 - 2.5 mm²)
• DIN-rail mountable
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC ± 10%
Channels
LT-03 LonMark System 1x TP/FT-10 or TP/
LPT-10
LT-04 1 x EIA-485 (BACnet MS/TP,
Modbus RTU)
LT-13 LonMark System 1x TP/XF-1250,
1x TP/FT-10 or TP/LPT-10
LT-33 LonMark System 2x TP/FT-10 or
TP/LPT-10
LT-B4 Active 1 x EIA-485 (BACnet MS/
TP, Modbus RTUActive 1 x EIA-485
(BACnet MS/TP, Modbus RTU)
Communication LON, BACnet MS/TP, Modbus RTU
Operating Humidity 10-90% RH @ 122°F (50°C) non-
condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Dimensions 0.71"W x 2.28"H x 3.54"L
(18 x 58 x 90 mm)
Approvals CE
Weight 0.15 lb (0.07 kg)
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
L-Term Series
WIRING

787. fi 735NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
L
T-03
L-Term LON Network Terminator, 1 x TP/FT-10 or TP/LPT-10, 1 x RJ45
LT-13 L-Term LON Network Terminator, 1 x TP/FT-10, 1 x TP/XF-1250
LT-33 L-Term LON Network Terminator, 2 x TP/FT-10 or TP/LPT-10
LT-04 L-Term BACnet and Modbus Network Terminator, 1 x EIA-485, 1 x RJ45
LT-B4 L-Term BACnet and Modbus Network Terminator, 1 x EIA-485 w/ failsafe
LT-04 Modular Plug RJ-45(8P8C)
PinM arking Description
1A + non-inverting pin, B (EIA-485)
2B – inverting pin, A (EIA-485)
3 ... 8N Cn ot connected
Modbus RTU: LINX-100 Automation Server and terminator LT-B4 with biasing circuit (failsave biasing)
status
LOYTEC
www.loytec. com
Made in Austria
L
L-POW
Power Supply
Input
N 50/60 Hz
85-265VAC
LPOW-2415B
24VDC/15W
+GND
L-Term
Bus Terminator
LOYTEC
www.loytec.com
LT-B4
RS-485
AB
+-
NC
120
5V
510510
NC
24V
AC/D C
GND
LT-B4
L-Term
Bus Terminator
LOYTEC
www.loytec.com
LT-04
RS-485
A
A
B
+-
B
+-
NC
18
LT-04
serial
12-35 VDC INPUT or
12-24 VAC, 40-70 Hz
15 16 174 5 6
~~
+-
DC
AC
statuspower
ACT
LINK
ACT
100Base-T100Base-T
L-INX
Automation Server
Made in EC
1
LOYTEC
www.loytec. com
12 3
2
RS-485RS-485
AB
LINX-100
FT
OPC
CS/RNI
CNIP
AB
EIA-485 A Line (inverting) - , DA0
EIA-485 B Line (non-inverting) + , DA 1
85−265 VAC
50 / 60 Hz
Modbus Device
RS-485 NETWORK TERMINATOR APPLICATION EXAMPLE
LON NETWORK TERMINATOR APPLICATION EXAMPLELON Network Terminator
Application Examples
1)
LT-33 in a typical free topology installation on
two TP/FT-10 channels together with an LS-33CB
2-port L-Switch
busfreecom
TP/FT-10
topology
L-Term
Bus Terminator
LOYTEC
www.loytec.com
TP/FT-10
busfree
comtopology
LT-33
TP/FT-10
TP/FT-10
2) LT-13 in a typical network with TP/XF-1250
backbone and free typology on TP/FT-10
together with two LS-13CB L-Switches
busfreecom
TP/FT- 10
topology
L-Term
Bus Terminator
LOYTEC
www.loytec.com
TP/XF-1250
ABNC
LT-13
busfreecom
TP/FT- 10
topology
L-Term
Bus Terminator
LOYTEC
www.loytec.com
TP/XF-1250
ABNC
LT-13
TP/XF-1250 Backbone TP/XF-1250 Stub
TP/XF-1250 Stub
TP/FT-10
TP/FT-10
serial
12-35 VDC INPUT or
12-24 VAC, 40-70 Hz
15 161712 3 4 5 6
~~
+-
DC
AC
ABB
12
A
statuspower
ACTA CT
LOYTEC
www.loytec.com
L-switch
EIA709 router
Made in EU
XP
LS-13CBTP-1250FT
serial
12-35 VDC INPUT or
12-24 VAC, 40-70 Hz
15 161712 3 4 5 6
~~ +-
DC
ACABB
12
A
statuspower
ACTA CT
LOYTEC
www.loytec.com
L-switch
EIA709 router
Made in EU
XP
LS-13CBTP-1250FT
3) LT-03 in a free topology installation together
with a LINX-100 Automation Server
L-Term
Bus Terminator
LOYTEC
www.loy tec.com
LT-03
busfree com
topology
busfreecom
TP/FT- 10
topology
18
TP/FT-10
serial
12-35 VDC INPUT or
12-24 VAC, 40-70 Hz
15 16174 5 6
~~ +-
DC
AC
statuspower
ACT
LINK
ACT
100Base-T100Base-T
L-INX
CS/RNI
Automation Server
Made in EC
1
OPC
LINX-100
LOYTEC
www.loytec.com
CNIP
FT
AB
LT-03 Modular Plug RJ-45(8P8C)
Pin Marking Description
1c om tie point
2f reef ree topology
3 bus bus topology
4 ... 8- not connected
BACNET, LON, MODBUS TERMINATOR
L-TERM SERIES

788. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 736fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET SWITCH
852 ETHERNET SWITCH
Supply Voltage 18 to 30 VDC
Supply Watts 3 W
Communication Ethernet communications IEEE
802.3 10/100 Mbps data rate 10
BASE-T, 100 BASE-TX physical layer
100 m (max) CAT 5 cable length
LED Indication
Power Green
Speed Green (100 Mbps)
Flash Activity
Operating Temperature 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 0.92" x 2.9" x 4.29"
(2.34 x 7.38 x 10.92 cm)
Weight 0.77 lb (0.35 kg)
Warranty 1 year

DESCRIPTION
The 852-111 has 5 ports with each port featuring auto-
negotiation and auto MDI/MDI-X detection. Existing 10Mbps
netw
orks can now be upgraded effortlessly to higher speed
100Mbps Fast ETHERNET networks
.
The 852-111 5-port density can be used to create multiple
segments to alleviate client congestion and provide dedicated bandwidth to each user node
. The 852-111 is a cost-effective
solution to keep up with the constant demands for emerging IP-based industry communication needs
. The switch can be
easily configured and installed and is also ideally suited for small to medium-sized networks
.
FEATURES
• 5-port 10/100 Mbps Auto-negotiation ETHERNET ports
• Comprehensive front-panel diagnostic LEDs
• Supports Auto-MDI/MDI-X
• Full/half-duplex transfer modes for each port
• Wire speed reception and transmission
• Store-and-forward switching method
• Integrated address Look-Up Engine, supports 2K
absolute MAC addresses
• Supports surge protection
• IEEE 802.3x flow control for fullduplex
• Supports DIN 35 rail
MODEL DESCRIPTION
852-111 5 port industrial Ethernet switch
SPECIFICATIONS
1
2
3
Power
Status
Ground
Top view of Industrial Eco Switch
WIRING
852-111

789. fi 737NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
BAS ETHERNET SWITCHES
EIBA SWITCHES
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC ±10%
Supply Current 4 VA
Communication Ethernet communications IEEE
802.3 10/100 Mbps data rate 10
BASE-T, 100 BASE-TX physical
layer 100 m (max) CAT 5 cable
length
LED Indication

Ethernet Green = 100 Mbps
Yellow = 10 Mbps
Flash = activity
Operating Temperature 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 10 to 95% non-condensing
Dimensions 4.13"H x 3.5"W x 1.25"D
(10.5 x 8.9 x 3.2 cm)
Weight 0.6 lbs (0.272 kg)
Approvals CE Mark, UL 508, C-UL,
File #E225652
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The Plug-and-Play (PnP) EIBA switches provide the needed
functionality, mounting convenience, and ruggedness to fit
most BAS applications
. The popular EIBA5-100T which is
designed for panel mounting is complemented by its DIN-rail cousin, the EIBA5-100T/R
.
Utilizing switching technology, the compact and low-cost EIBA switches provide five 10/100 Mbps shielded RJ-45 ports
. Each port is Auto-MDIX compliant and can operate
as an uplink port, eliminating the need for crossover cables.
All por
ts automatically negotiate data rate, duplex, and flow
control
.
FEA
TURES
•
Compact size
• 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX compliant
• Auto-MDIX ports
• Auto-negotiated data rate, duplex and flow control
• Panel and DIN-rail mountable versions
• Powered from an unregulated DC source (10-36 V) or
an AC source (8-24 V, 47-63 Hz) via a quick-disconnect
terminal strip
PWR HI
PWR HI
PWR HI
PWR COM
PWR COM
PWR COM
(customer supplied)
(customer supplied)
(customer supplied)
optional chassis connection
optional chassis connection
optional chassis connection
AC Powered
DC Powered
AC Powered with
Grounded Secondary
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
EIBA5-100T Five-port 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, panel mount
EIBA5-100T/R Five-port 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, DIN-rail mount
SPECIFICATIONS
EIBA5-100T
EIBA5-100T/R

790. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 738fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
(+12 ~ 48 VDC)
Pin Assignment of the Power Connector
PWR2
V2- V2+ V1- V1+
PWR1P-Fail
UNMANAGED ETHERNET SWITCHES
EKI SERIES
FEATURES
• Slim siz
• Redundant 12-48Vdc power input
• Rugged extruded aluminum enclosure IP30 and IP40
rating
• Hardware status LED light
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
EKI-2525-AE 5-port 10/100Mbps Unmanaged Ethernet Switch
EKI-2525M-AE 4-port 10/100M +1 MM Fiber Unmanaged Ethernet Switch
EKI-2528-AE 8-port 10/100Mbps Unmanaged Ethernet Switch
EKI-3525-AE 5-port 10/100Mbps Unmanaged Industrial
EKI-3528-AE 8-port 10/100Mbps Unmanaged Industrial
Power Input 12~48 VDC, redundant dual inputs
Power Consumption
EKI-2525-AE 3w
EKI-2525M/2528-AE 5w
EKI-3525/3528-AE 2.4W/ 2.5W
Fault Output 1 Relay Output
Communication Ethernet
Communication Ports
EKI-2525/3525-AE 5 - 10/100 Mbps ports
EKI-2525M-AE 4 - 10/100 Mbps ports and 1 - 100
M.M Fiber port
EKI-2528/3528-AE 8 - 10/100 Mbps ports
Data Throughput 100Mbps
Protocol
EKI-2525/2525M/
2528-AE IEEE 802.3, 802.3u, 802.3x
EKI-3525/3528-AE IEEE 802.3, 802.3u, 802.3x, 802.1p,
802.3az
LED Indication
EKI-2525/2525M/
2528-AE P1,P2,P-Fail, 10/100T(X):Link/
Activity and Duplex/Collision,
EKI-3525/3528-AE P1, P2, P-Fail, Loop Detection,
10/100T (X): Link/Activity, Speed
Operating Temperature 14° to 140°F (-10° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing
Enclosure IP30, IP40
Mounting DIN/panel
Flow Control Yes
Housing Type Metal, Plastic+Metal
Dimensions
EKI-2525/2525M/
2528-AE 1.46"H x 5.51"W x 3.74"D
(37 x 140 x 95 mm)
EKI-3525-AE 1.02"H x 4.73"W x 3.35"D
(28.5 x 120 x 85.3 mm)
EKI-3528-AE 1.75"H x 4.73"W x 3.35"D
(44.5 x 120 x 85.3 mm)
Approvals CE/FCC/UL, C1D2
(EKI-2525/2528/2525M)
Warranty 5 years
SPECIFICATIONS
EKI-2525 EKI-3525
DESCRIPTION The EKI Series Unmanaged Industrial Ethernet Switches are designed for use in demanding industrial environments, offering unmatched performance, reliability, and value
. With
no setup required, they are truly plug-and-play. Models are
a
vailable in standard 10/100Mbps with both copper wire and
fiber optic connections
.
March 2014

791. fi 739NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
BACNET AND LON I/O MODULE
L-IOB SERIES
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC ± 10 %
Power Consumption 1.7W, 2.5-2.7W with relays on
Channels
LIOB-1xx 1x LIOB-FT or LonMark TP/FT-10
LIOB-4xx 2x Ethernet (100Base-T) LIOB-IP or
LonMark IP-852
LIOB-5xx 2x Ethernet (100Base-T) LIOB-IP or
BACnet/IP, OPC XML-DA
Communication
LIOB-1xx Type LIOB-FT, CEA-709 (LON)
LIOB-4xx Type LIOB-IP, LonMark IP-852
LIOB-5xx Type LIOB-BIP, BACnet/IP, LIOB-IP,
OPC XML-DA
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 10-90% RH @ 122°F (50°C) non-
condensing
Dimensions 4.21"W x 3.94"H x 2.95"D (10.7 x
10.0 x 7.5 cm)
Weight 0.71 lbs (0.32 kg)
Approvals CE, FCC, LonMark 3.4
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The L-IOB I/O Module family of products consists of smart I/O
devices featuring different I/O setups. Based on LOYTEC's
32-bit L-CORE platform the L-IOB I/O Modules provide first class performance and extensive resources
. The L-IOB I/O
Modules contain a 128x64 display with backlight. The display
shows device and data point information. A jog dial is used for
local operation by navigating through detailed information on the display and for operating and overriding of data points
. The
configuration of the L-IOB I/O Modules is done with the L-INX Configuration Tool which is free to download from Loytec
.
FEATURES
• Ph •
Stackable I/O Modules supporting LIOB-Connect
• Models available for LonMark (TP/FT-10 and IP-852) and
BACnet Networks (BACnet/IP)
• 128x64 display with backlight
• Local access to information about device status and data
points
• Manual operation using the jog dial
• Configuration through L-INX configuration tool
• Removable terminal with a clamping yoke connection to
accomodate diameters from 0.2-2.5 mm² (26-12 AWG)
• Simple device replacement without software tool
SPECIFICATIONS
LIOB-150
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LIOB-150 LON TP/FT-10 I/O MODULES 8UI 2DI 2AO 8DO
LIOB-151 LON TP/FT-10 I/O MODULES 8UI 12DI
LIOB-152 LON TP/FT-10 I/O MODULES 6UI 6AO 8DO
LIOB-153 LON TP/FT-10 I/O MODULES 6UI 6AO 5DO
LIOB-450 LON IP-852 I/O MODULES 8UI 2DI 2AO 8DO
LIOB-451 LON IP-852 I/O MODULES 8UI 12DI
LIOB-452 LON IP-852 I/O MODULES 6UI 6AO 8DO
LIOB-453 LON IP-852 I/O MODULES 6UI 6AO 5DO
LIOB-550 BACNET/IP I/O MODULES 8UI 2DI 2AO 8DO
LIOB-551 BACNET/IP I/O MODULES 8UI 12DI
LIOB-552 BACNET/IP I/O MODULES 6UI 6AO 8DO
LIOB-553 BACNET/IP I/O MODULES 6UI 6AO 5DO
March 2014
Note: See next page for wiring and terminals layout.

792. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 740fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
BACNET AND LON I/O MODULE
L-IOB SERIES
WIRING
24VDC/VAC
+ -
LIOB-15X
LIOB-150
LIOB-152
LIOB-151
LIOB-153
March 2014

793. fi 741NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
BACNET AND LON I/O MODULE
L-IOB SERIES
WIRING
24VDC/VAC
+ -
LIOB-450/550
LIOB-452/552
LIOB-45X/55X
LIOB-451/551
LIOB-453/553
March 2014

794. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 742fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
DESCRIPTION
Control Solutions' i.CanDoIt® Series provides a simple and
cost eff
ective facility management and remote monitoring
solution suitable for use in small sites
. It has no site licenses
or installation f
ees
. The only software tool needed is a web
browser. Multi-protocol support for BACnet and Modbus.
The i.CanDoIt® is programmable, even though it is powerful
without programming.
FEATURES
• Embed
• Data Logging & Trending
• Time & Date Scheduling
• Astronomical Clock
• Email Event Notifications
• Fill-in-the-blank Alarm Templates
• Field Programmable
• User Web Pages
Supply Voltage
AM3x 18-30 VDC or 24 VAC 50/60 Hz
AMJRx 10-30 VDC or 24 VAC 50/60 Hz
Communication Ports RS-485 Port
Analog Input
AM3x 18 (16 universal + 2 analog)
AMJRx 12 universal
Discrete Inputs TTL to 24VDC
2, Pulse count frequency input T
otalizing count input
Analog Output
AM3x 4, 4-20mA (0-20mA) 8-bit resolution
Discrete Outputs
AM3x 8, Form A relay, 5A @ 120 VAC
AMJRx 2, Open drain FET, 1A @ 24VDC
Processor 32-bit ARM
Signal LEDs Power and communication
AM3x 8
AMJRx 2
Resolution
AM3x 0.1% reference up to 16-bit
AMJRx 10-bit
Data Logging Yes
Operating Temperature -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 5-90% RH non-condensing
Mounting DIN rail
Dimensions
AM3x 3.94"H x 6.1"W x 2.36"D (100 x 155
x 60 mm)
AMJRx 3.94"H x 2.76"W x 2.36"D (100 x 70
x 60 mm)
Weight
AM3x 2.0 lbs (0.91kg)
AMJRx 1.5 lbs (0.68kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
AMJR-14xAM3-IPx
EMBEDDED NETWORK SERVERS
I.CANDOIT SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AM3-IP-BN BACnet IP Client & Server
AM3-IP-MB Modbus TCP Client & Server and SNMP Agent
AMJR-14-BN BACnet IP Client/Server, Modbus RTU Master
AMJR-14-IP Modbus RTU Master & TCP Client/Server,
SNMP Agent
ORDERING INFORMATION
AMJRx
Wiring Terminals
AM3x
Wiring Terminals
TX / +
TX / -
POWER
GND
GND
A/UI 1
A/UI 2
A/UI 3
A/UI 4
GND
DO 1
DO 2
GND
A/UI 5
A/UI 6
A/UI 7
A/UI 8
GND
GND
A/UI 9
A/UI 10
A/UI 11
A/UI 12
GND
RS-485 Port
Analog /
Universal
Inputs
Power Input
Discrete
Outputs
Analog /
Universal
Inputs
WIRING
March 2014

795. fi 743NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
BACNET - MODBUS NETWORK I/O
ADDME SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Control Solutions' AddMe® Series I/O devices are ideal for
expansion of virtually any distributed building automation
control system
. These devices can be used as slave I/O or
programmable controllers. The AddMe® series is Control
Solutions' original line of general purpose programmable I/O devices that have a long history as work horses in the industry
.
FEATURES
• Easy to use slave I/O and programmable I/O
• Models for BACnet MS/TP
• Models for Modbus RTU
Supply Voltage
AMJRx 10-30 VDC or 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
AM3x 18-30 VDC or 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Supply Current
AMJRx 0.15A @ 24VDC
AM3x 0.3A @ 24VDC
Communication Ports RS-485 Port
Baud Rate BACnet supports 9600, 19200,
38400, 76800
Modbus supports 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400
Analog Input
AMJRx 12 universal
AM3x 18 (16 universal + 2 analog)
Analog Output
AM3x 4, 4-20 mA (0-20 mA), 8-bit resolution
Discrete Outputs
AMJRx 2, open drain FET,1A @ 30 VDC
AM3x 8, form A relay, 5A @120VAC
Supported Protocols
AMJR-14-SB/AM3-SB BACnet MS/TP Slave
AMJR-14-SM/AM3-SM Modbus RTU Slave
Signal LEDs
AM3x 8, power and consumption
Resolution
AMJRx 10-bit
AM3x up to 16-bit
Operating Temperature
AMJRx -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C)
AM3x -22° to 158°F (-30° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing
Mounting DIN rail
Dimensions
AM3x 3.94"H x 6.1"W x 2.36"D
(100 x 155 x 60mm)
AMJRx 3.94"H x 2.76"W x 2.36"D
(100x 70 x 60mm)
Weight
AMJRx 1.5 lbs (0.68kg)
AM3x 2 lbs (0.91kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
AMJR-14x
AMJRx
Wiring Terminals
AM3x
Wiring Terminals
AM3-Sx
TX / +
TX / -
POWER
GND
GND
A/UI 1
A/UI 2
A/UI 3
A/UI 4
GND
DO 1
DO 2
GND
A/UI 5
A/UI 6
A/UI 7
A/UI 8
GND
GND
A/UI 9
A/UI 10
A/UI 11
A/UI 12
GND
RS-485 Port
Analog /
Universal
Inputs
Power Input
Discrete
Outputs
Analog /
Universal
Inputs
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AMJR-14-SB BACnet MS/TP Slave, 14 I/O
AM3-SB BACnet MS/TP Slave, 32 I/O
AM3-SM Modbus RTU Slave, 32 I/O
AMJR-14-SM Modbus RTU Slave, 14 I/O
WIRING
March 2014

796. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 744fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
BACNET MS/TP PROGRAMMABLE I/O
VALUPOINT VP4-23 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Control Solutions’ ValuPoint® Model VP4-2330 Programmable I/O
for BACnet MS/TP is a BACnet Application Specific Controller
(B-ASC) that includes user programmable control, 14 analog/
universal inputs, 3 analog outputs, and 6 relay outputs
. VP4-
2330 also includes a BACnet client for interface with other MS/ TP devices
. It includes an enhanced processor and expanded
memory capacity along with a robust feature set.
FEATURES
• 14 Analog/Universal Inputs
• 3 Analog and 6 Discrete Outputs
• Implements B-ASC BACnet Standard Profile
• Freely programmable - i.CanDrawIt® graphical
programming
• COV Subscription support
• BACnet client for interface to other slave devices
• Configurable object allocation, up to 200 objects
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
VP4-2330 BACnet MS/TP, 14 universal / analog inputs, 9 outputs
Supply Voltage 18-30 VDC or 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Supply Current 0.3A @ 24 VDC
Communication Ports RS-485
Baud Rate BACnet MS/TP at 9600 to 76800 baud
Analog Input 14 Universal Inputs
0-10 VDC, thermistor, discrete, dry
contact, pulse
0.1% reference, up to 16-bit resolution
Continuously self-calibrating sigma-
delta converter
Non-volatile totalizing count inputs
(10Hz on all channels, to 1kHz on 2 channels)

10-bit fast scan mode
Analog Output 3 Output
4-20mA (0-20mA), 8-bit resolution, 500
ohm load max.
Discrete Outputs 6 Outputs
Form A relay
2A @ 120 VAC or 2A @ 30 VDC
Protocol
VP4-2330 BACnet MS/TP
Processor ARM 32-bit
64K Flash for User Program
Freely programmable
i.CanDrawIt® graphical programming
Data Logging Ye s
Operating Temperature -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing
Mounting DIN rail
Dimensions 3.94" H x 4.13" W x 2.36"D
(100 x 105 x 60mm)
Weight 1.5 lbs (0.68 kg)
Approvals FCC, CE, UL 916 Listed
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
VP4-23 Series
Wiring Terminals
March 2014

797. fi 745NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
BACNET REMOTE I/O MODULES
BAS-3000BC SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The BAS-3000BC series are BACNet MS/TP remote IO
modules with RS-485 interfaces that can be expanded
as remote IO modules for 3rd party BACNet MS/TP DDC
controllers
. BAS-3000BC series provides IO models with
predefined BACNet objects and services listed as PICS to ensure seamless communication with each other
.
Adv
antech's domain focused configuration tool is a BACnet
utility specially designed for building automation systems, and is a powerful graphical configuration tool. After simple
tr
aining, general engineering technicians will be able to easily
configure their Advantech BACnet 3000BC IO modules
.
FEATURES
• 24 •
3000 VDC isolation protection (DO)
• BACNet MS/TP Server
• Supports PWM output (BAS-3024BC and BAS-3050BC)
Supply Voltage 24 VDC/24 VAC
Supply Watts
BAS-3018BC-AE 3 W @ 24 VDC
BAS-3024BC-AE 4 W @ 24 VDC
BAS-3050BC/3051BC 3 W @ 24 VDC
Communication Serial RS-485
Protocol BACnet MS/TP
Baud Rate 1200-78K
Universal Input supports 0 - 10V, 0 - 20 mA, 4 - 20
mA, RTD, Thermistor (3K, 10K), and digital input (dry contact)
Analog Output
supports 0 - 10V, 0 - 20 mA, and 4 -
20 mA
Digital Output 1A per channel, 10-35 VDC
PWM Output PWM period: 2 ms-3600 sec; Pulse
Width: 0.2 ms minimum
Accuracy ±0.1% of FSR (Voltage, Current)
Operating Temperature 14° - 140°F (-10° - 60°C)
Operating Humidity 20 - 95% RH non-condensing
Storage Temperature -4° - 176°F (-20° - 80°C)
Storage Humidity 0 - 95% RH non-condensing
Enclosure ABS + PC
Wiring Terminations 2 x plug-in terminal block
(#16 - 24 AWG)
Mounting DIN/panel
Dimensions 4.7"H x 4.7"W x 1.7"D
(120 x 120 x 44 mm)
Weight 0.57 lbs (0.26 kg)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
March 2014

798. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 746fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
BACNET REMOTE I/O MODULES
BAS-3000BC SERIES
BAS-3051
BAS-3050
DATA+
DATA-
GND
DO0
DO1
DO2
DO3
DO4
DO5
DO6
DO7
VCC
VCC
GND
GND
DI0 COM DI1 COM DI2 COM DI3 COM DI4
COM
DI5
COM
DI6
COM
DI7
COM
VS+
VS-
FG
DATA+
DATA-
GND
DI8
COM
DI9
COM
DI10
COM
DI11
COM
DI12
COM
DI13
COM
DI14
COM
DI15
COM
DI0 COM DI1 COM DI2 COM DI3 COM DI4
COM
DI5
COM
DI6
COM
DI7
COM
VS+
VS-
FG
BAS-3051
BAS-3024
DATA+
DATA-
GND
UI0+
UI0-
UI1+
UI1-
UI2+
UI2-
UI3+
UI3-
AO0+
AGND
AO1+
AGND
AO2+
AGND
A03+
AGND
DO0 DO1 DO2 DO3 VCC VCC COM COM
VS+
VS-
FG
BAS-3024
BAS-3050
LOAD
DC
+
LOAD LOAD
DC
+
+
RTD DI 0~20MA 0~20MA0~10V 0~10V
*:For single ended AI,
UIx- need extra wire
connected with AGND
*:For single ended AI,
UIx- need extra wire
connected with AGND
LOAD
DC+
BAS-3018
DATA+
DATA-
GND
UI0+
UI0-
UI1+
UI1-
UI2+
UI2-
UI3+
UI3-
UI4+
AGND
UI5+
AGND
UI6+
AGND
UI7+
AGND
VS+
VS-
FG
BAS-3018
DC
+
RTD DI 0~20MA 0~10V
WIRING

799. fi 747NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
B
AS-3018BC-AE
8-ch UI BACNet MS/TP Remote I/O Module
B
AS-3024BC-AE
4-ch UI,4-ch DO, 4-ch AO BACNet MS/TP Remote I/O module
B
AS-3050BC-AE
8-ch DI,8-ch DO BACNet MS/TP Remote I/O Module
B
AS-3051BC-AE
16-ch DI BACNet MS/TP Remote I/O Module
March 2014
BACNET REMOTE I/O MODULES
BAS-3000BC SERIES
BAS-3051
BAS-3050
DATA+
DATA-
GND
DO0
DO1
DO2
DO3
DO4
DO5
DO6
DO7
VCC
VCC
GND
GND
DI0
COM
DI1
COM
DI2
COM
DI3
COM
DI4
COM
DI5
COM
DI6
COM
DI7
COM
VS+
VS-
FG
DATA+
DATA-
GND
DI8
COM
DI9
COM
DI10
COM
DI11
COM
DI12
COM
DI13
COM
DI14
COM
DI15
COM
DI0
COM
DI1
COM
DI2
COM
DI3
COM
DI4
COM
DI5
COM
DI6
COM
DI7
COM
VS+
VS-
FG
BAS-3051
BAS-3024
DATA+
DATA-
GND
UI0+
UI0-
UI1+
UI1-
UI2+
UI2-
UI3+
UI3-
AO0+
AGND
AO1+
AGND
AO2+
AGND
A03+
AGND
DO0
DO1
DO2
DO3
VCC
VCC
COM
COM
VS+ VS- FG
BAS-3024
BAS-3050
LOAD
DC
+
LOAD LOAD
DC
+
+
RTD DI 0~20MA 0~20MA0~10V 0~10V
*:For single ended AI,
UIx- need extra wire
connected with AGND
*:For single ended AI,
UIx- need extra wire
connected with AGND
LOAD
DC+
BAS-3018
DATA+
DATA-
GND
UI0+
UI0-
UI1+
UI1-
UI2+
UI2-
UI3+
UI3-
UI4+
AGND
UI5+
AGND
UI6+
AGND
UI7+
AGND
VS+
VS-
FG
BAS-3018
DC
+
RTD DI 0~20MA 0~10V
WIRING

800. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 748fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
REMOTE WEB-BASED MONITORING SYSTEM
FGD WEB SERIES
Supply Voltage 120 VAC/5 VDC 50/60Hz (plug-in
transformer with 6’ cord included)
Supply Current 6W
Communication E-mail – SMTP
Text Messages
Web Page – Supported formats
HTTP, PDA, WAP, and XML
SNMP – MIB with traps, GET,
GETNEXT, and SET
MODBUS®/TCP Slave Conformance
Class 0 & 1
Communication Ports Ethernet 10/100Base-T
Inputs 6 Universal Inputs
Normally closed/normally open dry
contact
10K thermistor, Type 3
4-20 mA current loop (Requires 24
VDC po
wer) (12 bit resolution)
Input Impedance
250 Ω
Supported Protocols Modbus TCP
Signal LEDs Alarm status LED
Power status LED
Ethernet link and activity LEDs
Data Logging 32,000 samples (all samples include
data, date and time) 1 second
to 1 month sampling r
ate
. User
prog
rammable channel selection
(Zones 1-6, battery, and input power)
Additional Specifications Optional Battery Backup
Module (FGD-W610) Provides 2
hours of backup (rechargable)
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0-90% RH, (non-condensing)
Dimensions 3.25"H x 5.5"W x 1.25"D
(8.3 x 14 x 3.2 cm)
Weight
FGD-W600 0.5 lb (0.23 kg)
FGD-W610 1 lb (0.45 kg)
Approvals FCC Part 15-B compliant
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Sensaphone Web600 provides flexible web-based
remote monitoring. It keeps track of critical temperatures and
other conditions and users can be notified immediately when current values exceed the normal range
.
Completely stand-alone and easy to use
, the Web600 can be
used for monitoring cold food storage, medical cold storage, and other temperature-sensitive areas like computer rooms and data centers
. In addition to temperature monitoring, the
Web600 can also read values from humidity sensors, air quality sensors, water leak detection sensors and much more
.
FEATURES
• Six sensor inputs to monitor environmental conditions
and/or alarm contacts
• 10/100BASE-T Ethernet port
• Optional battery backup for uninterrupted performance
• Compact design allows wall-mount or tabletop
installation
• Embedded web page to program and manage your
Web600 system
• Notification via e-mail, SMS (text message) or SNMP
trap
• Connectable to up to six external sensors
• Includes Software
SPECIFICATIONS
FGD-W600
March 2014

801. fi 749NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Zone
+ 1 -
Zone
+ 2 -
Zone
+ 3 -
Zone
+ 4 -
Zone
+ 5 -
Zone
+ 6 -
Power
Alarm
5V DC
Power
Battery
Backup
Ethernet
NO or NC
Dry
Contacts
10 K type 3 Thermistor
24VDC- +
4-20 mA
Transducer
+
-
Battery Backup
(Sold Separately)
ORDERING INFORMATION
REMOTE WEB-BASED MONITORING SYSTEM
FGD WEB SERIES
WIRING
BATTERY BACKUP (NOT INCLUDED)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
FGD-W600 Sensaphone Web600
FGD-W610 Backup battery for Web600
With the addition of the optional battery backup module, the
Web600 can monitor for power failures and stay operational for
two full hours while the power is out
.
Dimensions 3.25"H x 5.5"W x 1.25"D (8.3 x 14 x 3.2 cm)
Weight 1 lb (0.45 kg)
FGD-W610
ACCESSORIES PAGE
KHR3 3% Wall mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 529
KTR3 10k Type 3 wall sensor 1170
March 2014

802. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 750fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
VISONIC AUTO DIALER
DL-125C
Supply Voltage 11-28 VDC
Supply Current 20 mA standby, 105 mA maximum
Connection Terminal strip
Phone Tone (DTMF) or pulse
Impedance 600Ω
Alarm Input (AL) 2 alarm inputs
AL 1 Configurable NO or NC
AL 2 Configurable NO or NC
Alarm Out (LF) Phone line fail, 30 Volt triac
Dial Alert LED indication during use
Microphone Built-in
Controls 12-key number pad
1 program and 1 stop button
2 alarm buttons (AL-1, AL-2)
Memory EEPROM, non-volatile
No. of Calls 4 calls per alarm maximum or 2
pager calls maximum
Numbers / dial-out 20 numbers maximum
Messages 2, each using 2 segments
Message 1, segment 1 & 2
Message 2, segment 1 & 3
Segment 1 14.5 seconds, activated for both
alarms
Segment 2 2.5 seconds, identifies alarm AL-1
Segment 3 2.5 seconds, identifies alarm AL-1
Message Length
Overall 20 seconds for all segments
Dialing Attempts Adjustable, 1-15
Message Repeats Adjustable, 1-255
Time Between Repeats 3 seconds
Dialer trigger delay Adjustable, 1-255 seconds
Listen-in Function Adjustable (enable/disable)
Listen-in Duration Adjustable, 1-255 seconds
Acknowledge First call or all calls (enable/disable)
Enclosure NEMA 1
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Dimensions 4.25"H x 6.0"W x 1.4"D
(10.5 x 15.0 x 3.5 cm)
Weight 0.5 lb (0.24 kg)
Approvals CE
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The DL-125C automatic programmable speech dialer is
designed for twin contact closure input. It will automatically
dial out and aler
t up to four numbers per alarm
. The
20-second voice message is digitally stored in non-volatile memory and may be changed at any time
. The unit is
powered by 12 VDC and may be connected to any phone line with pulse or tone dialing
. The DL-125C is ideal for
panel mounting and alarming any contact input such as temperature high or low limits, water leak detection, efrigerant leak, CO2 limit alarm, control failure, and a host of other purposes
.
FEATURES
• Normally-open or normally-closed dual contact input
• Screw terminal strip connection
• 20 seconds of digitally stored voice
• Site monitor microphone
• Line seizure capability
• Compact design
• Keypad interface
• Phone line failure output
For a secure way of life
SPECIFICATIONS
DL-125-C
OPERATION/APPLICATION
Upon alarm initiation, the DL-125C pauses for a
programmable time (1-255 sec), then hangs up any device
on the same phone line (line seizure) and dials out to the first
of four possible phone numbers
. If someone answers, the
20-second message is delivered. The DL-125C will attempt to
dial each phone number between 1 and 15 times (decided at set-up) before abandoning any further attempts
. Once a call
is
answered and the 20-second message is delivered, the unit
waits three seconds for an acknowledgment (touch tone digit 1). The recipient can cancel further call-outs, or the device
will continue to call the remainder of the phone numbers. If
ac
knowledged, a "listen in" feature is enabled so the called
party can audibly monitor the site for 10 seconds (this can be programmed for a longer time). After the call cycle is
complete
, the DL-125C moves on to the next phone number
or stops (as programmed) after first acknowledgment
.
March 2014

803. fi 751NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
VISONIC AUTO DIALER
DL-125C
Telephone line
failure alert
24 to 30 VAC
Alarm-2
RedRed
Grn
Alarm-1
No alarm
internal
connection
(opens on alarm)
Phone
Line
Hand
Set
To wall jack
To phone
Earth
12/24
VDC
11-28 VDC
Z1 Z2
L FWIRING
PROGRAM MEMORY LOCATION CHART
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DL-125C Auto dialer for remote alarm voice indication
DL-125C
Memory Location Description (code option) Entry Limits Program Format Factory Default
1 1st phone number for Z1, (Alarm 1)20 digits [PR] [1] [#] [NUM] [#] NONE
2 2nd phone number for Z1, (Alarm 1)20 digits [PR] [2] [#] [NUM] [#] NONE
3 3rd phone number for Z1, (Alarm 1)20 digits [PR] [3] [#] [NUM] [#] NONE
4 4th phone number for Z1, (Alarm 1)20 digits [PR] [4] [#] [NUM] [#] NONE
5 1st phone number for Z2, (Alarm 2)20 digits [PR] [1] [#] [NUM] [#] NONE
6 2nd phone number for Z2, (Alarm 2)20 digits [PR] [2] [#] [NUM] [#] NONE
7 3rd phone number for Z2, (Alarm 2)20 digits [PR] [3] [#] [NUM] [#] NONE
8 4th phone number for Z2, (Alarm 2)20 digits [PR] [4] [#] [NUM] [#] NONE
9 Not used or accessible N/A N/A N/A
10 0 = enable, 1 = disable listen-in0 or 1 [PR] [10] [#] [CODE] [#] 1
11 Dialing method, 0 = DTMF, 1= Pulse 0 or 1 [PR] [11] [#] [CODE] [#] 0
12 Alarm Z1 dialing attempts 1 - 15 [PR] [12] [#] [NUM] [#] 4
13 Alarm Z2 dialing attempts 1 - 15 [PR] [13] [#] [NUM] [#] 4
14 Alarm delay before callout, (seconds)1 - 255 [PR] [14] [#] [SEC] [#] 3
15
Order of segment messages
0 = Alarm segment first
1 = Location segment first
0 or 1 [PR] [15] [#] [CODE] [#] 1
16 LF output logic 0 = NC, 1 = NO 0 or 1 [PR] [16] [#] [NUM] [#] 1
17-19 Not used or accessible N/A N/A N/A
20 Recorded message repeats 1 - 255 [PR] [20] [#] [NUM] [#] 4
21 Listen-in duration (seconds) 1 - 255 [PR] [21] [#] [SEC] [#] 60
22 Z1 input definition, 0 = NO, 1 = NC0 or 1 [PR] [22] [#] [CODE] [#] 0
23 Z2 input definition, 0 = NO, 1 = NC0 or 1 [PR] [23] [#] [CODE] [#] 0
24 Acknowledgement reset 0 or 1 [PR] [24] [#] [CODE] [#] 1
Backup = 1, All numbers are called regardless of acknowledgement. Non-backup = 0, after the first acknowledgement no other calls are made.
CAUTION: Additional comments and/or requirements This device is not a life safety device and should not be used for life safety applications.
March 2014

804. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 752fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
KELE CONSTANT VOLUME ZONING SYSTEM
KTEC ZONING SYSTEM
Supply Voltage 19 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Supply Current 2 VA @ 24 VAC
Analog Input
KTEC2647Z Resistive inputs (RS and UI3) for
10KΩ Type II thermistor
KTEC2664Z Resistive inputs (RS, OS, and DS) for
10KΩ Type II thermistor
Analog Output 0 to 10 VDC into 2kΩ resistance load
(minimum)
Digital Inputs
KTEC2647Z Dry contacts across terminal scom to
terminals BI1 and BI2
KTEC2664Z Dry contact across terminal scom to
terminal BI1
Auxiliary Contacts Triac output 19 to 30 VAC, 15 mA
to 1 A continuous current, 3A peak
in-rush current
Static Pressure 0 to 5 VDC for full static pressure
range selected
Accuracy ±0.9°F (±0.5°C) at 70°F (21°C)
Sensor Type 10k ohm NTC thermistor (Local)
Setpoint Range Heating 40° to 90°F (4.5° to 32°C)
Cooling 54° to 100°F (12° to 37.5°C)
Deadband 2°F (1°C)
Number of Zones 31 zones maximum per 1 rooftop
controller
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Display -40° to 122°F (-40° to 50°C) in 0.5°
increments
Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 4.9"H x 3.4"W x 1.1"D
(12.5 x 8.6 x 2.9 cm)
Weight 0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Approvals
United States UL Listed, CCN XAPX, Under
UL 873,
Temperature Indicating
and Regulating Equipment FCC Compliant to CFR 47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A, RoHS
Canada UL Listed, CCN XAPX7, Under CAN/
CSA C22.2 No. 24
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 3 years
DESCRIPTION
The technologically advanced KTEC Zoning Control
System provides efficient space temperature control for
constant volume zoning systems in multi-zone heating and
cooling applications
. This cost-effective zoning control system
can operate as a stand-alone system, or it can be mapped into a supervisory controller via a BACnet - Master-Slave/ Token-Passing (MS/TP) Bus to enable remote monitoring and programmability within a Building Automation System (BAS)
.
FEATURES
• Fully scalable zoning control system meets the
requirements of small and large zoning control
systems
• BACnet MS/TP communication provides compatibility
with a proven communication network
• True stand-alone zoning control system offers
additional application flexibility
• Backlit Display offers real-time control status of
the environment in easy-to-read, English plain text messages with constant backlight that brightens during user interaction
•
Simplified setpoint adjustment enables the user to
change the setpoint by simply pressing the UP/DOWN arrow keys
•
Configurable binary inputs provide additional inputs
for advanced functions such as remote night setback, service or filter alarms, motion detector, and window status
•
Over 20 configurable parameters enable the zoning
control system to adapt to applications with varying requirements, allowing installer parameter access without opening the controller cover
CONTROL LAYOUT
SPECIFICATIONS
KTEC2664Z Rooftop
Controller
KTEC2647Z Zone
Controller
70.0°F
Room Temp
YES NO
SCROLL
FAN
MENU
HEAT COOL
Backlit, plain text
LCD is easy to read
in any condition
Five keys on the zone controller
make operation easy and intuitive
LEDs indicate
system activity
KTEC2664Z Rooftop Controller
OVERRIDE
HEAT COOL
70.0°F
Room Temp
Backlit, plain text
LCD is easy to read
in any condition
Three keys on the zone controller
make operation easy and intuitive
LEDs indicate
system activity
KTEC2647Z Zone Controller
See installation instructions for wiring diagrams
March 2014

805. fi 753NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
KELE CONSTANT VOLUME ZONING SYSTEM
KTEC ZONING SYSTEM
TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION - KTEC2664Z
WIRING - KTEC2664Z

Y2 Y1 G RC CR H W1 W2 BPD DI1SP RS DSOSScom
Cool
Stage 2
Cool
Stage 1
Fan
Heat
Stage 1
Heat
Stage 2
0-10 VDC
By-Pass
Damper
Actuator
24VCom
Transfo.
Discharge
Air Sensor
Return Air
Sensor
Outdoor
Sensor
Digital Input
Jumper
Dry contact
Thermostat internal contacts
System wiring
24 Vac
0-5 VDC
Static
Pressure
Transducer
Com24V
Auxiliary
Output
Aux
BPDAuxSPDI1RSSComOSDS
GY1Y2
W2W1RH
CRC
KTEC2664Z Thermostat Terminals
Terminal Use Terminal
Identification
Description
1 – Cool2 Y2 Output for RTU cooling stage number 2.
2 – Cool1 Y1 Output for RTU cooling stage number 1.
3 - Fan G Output for the fan.
4 - 24 V ~ Hot RC Power supply of thermostat, hot side (Delivered from the RTU ).
5 - 0 V ~ Com C
Power supply of thermostat, common side. Also used as reference for the
analog BPD output when used (Delivered from the RTU ).

6 – Heat Switch Leg RH
24 VAC switched leg for the heating stages.
• If heating stages are part or RTU, install a jumper across RC & RH.
• If heating stages are part of a separate equipment with a different
power supply, feed external switched power leg through RH without
installing a jumper across RC & RH.
7 – Heat1 W1 Output for heating stage number 1.
8 – Heat2 W2 Output for heating stage number 2.

9 – By-pass damper BPD Local analog 0 - 10 VDC by-pass damper output.
10 – Aux output AU
Auxiliary output used to disable economizer damper minimum position or
control lighting during unoccupied periods.
11 – Static pressure SP Local analog 0 – 5 VDC static pressure input.
12 - DI1 DI1 Configurable extra digital input. See parameter section for more information.
13 - RS RS
Return air temperature sensor input. If sensor fails, thermostat will use the
on-board thermistor sensor to control if the communication is lost.
14 - Scom Scom Reference input for DI 1, RS, OS & DS.
15 - OS BI2 Outside air temperature sensor input.
16 - DS UI 3 Discharge air temperature sensor input.

BACnet Network Connections
BACnet Com Com + BACnet communication bus + connection.
BACnet Com Com - BACnet communication bus – connection.
Ref Ref
Communication bus reference terminal.
o DO NOT USE FOR OTHER THAN SERVICING ISSUES
o DO NOT WIRE SHIELD TO THAT POSITION






Y2 Y1 G RC CR H W1 W2 BPD DI1SP RS DSOSScom
Cool
Stage 2
Cool
Stage 1
Fan
Heat
Stage 1
Heat
Stage 2
0-10 VDC
By-Pass
Damper
Actuator
24VCom
Transfo.
Discharge
Air Sensor
Return Air
Sensor
Outdoor
Sensor
Digital Input
Jumper
Dry contact
Thermostat internal contacts
System wiring
24 Vac
0-5 VDC
Static
Pressure
Transducer
Com24V
Auxiliary
Output
Aux
BPDAuxSPDI1RSSComOSDS
GY1Y2
W2W1RH
CRC
KTEC2664Z Thermostat Terminals
Terminal Use Terminal Identification
Description
1 – Cool2 Y2 Output for RTU cooling stage number 2.
2 – Cool1 Y1 Output for RTU cooling stage number 1.
3 - Fan G Output for the fan.
4 - 24 V ~ Hot RC Power supply of thermostat, hot side (Delivered from the RTU ).
5 - 0 V ~ Com C
Power supply of thermostat, common side. Also used as reference for the
analog BPD output when used (Delivered from the RTU ).

6 – Heat Switch Leg RH
24 VAC switched leg for the heating stages.
• If heating stages are part or RTU, install a jumper across RC & RH.
• If heating stages are part of a separate equipment with a different
power supply, feed external switched power leg through RH without
installing a jumper across RC & RH.
7 – Heat1 W1 Output for heating stage number 1.
8 – Heat2 W2 Output for heating stage number 2.

9 – By-pass damper BPD Local analog 0 - 10 VDC by-pass damper output.
10 – Aux output AU
Auxiliary output used to disable economizer damper minimum position or
control lighting during unoccupied periods.
11 – Static pressure SP Local analog 0 – 5 VDC static pressure input.
12 - DI1 DI1 Configurable extra digital input. See parameter section for more information.
13 - RS RS
Return air temperature sensor input. If sensor fails, thermostat will use the
on-board thermistor sensor to control if the communication is lost.
14 - Scom Scom Reference input for DI 1, RS, OS & DS.
15 - OS BI2 Outside air temperature sensor input.
16 - DS UI 3 Discharge air temperature sensor input.

BACnet Network Connections
BACnet Com Com + BACnet communication bus + connection.
BACnet Com Com - BACnet communication bus – connection.
Ref Ref
Communication bus reference terminal.
o DO NOT USE FOR OTHER THAN SERVICING ISSUES
o DO NOT WIRE SHIELD TO THAT POSITION





March 2014

806. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 754fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION - KTEC2647Z
WIRING - KTEC2647Z
APPLICATION - KTEC2647Z
Terminal Use Terminal
Identification
Description
4 - 24 V ~ Hot 24 V~ Hot Power supply of thermostat, hot side.
5 - 0 V ~ Com 0 V~ Com
Power supply of thermostat, common side. Also used as reference for
the analog outputs when used.
6 - On/Off Rht BO 5 Local isolated triac reheat output when used.
7 - On/Off Rht BO 5 Local isolated triac reheat output when used.
9 - Analog Rht AO 2 Local analog 0 - 10 VDC reheat output when used.
10 - VAV Damper AO 1 Local VAV analog 0 - 10 VDC output.
Not Used Blank Blank unused terminal.
12 - BI1 BI 1
Configurable extra digital input. See parameter section for more
information.
13 - RS RS
Remote room sensor input when used. Input auto-detects a remote
sensor and will automatically by-pass the internal sensor when used.
14 - Scom Scom Reference input for BI 1, BI 2, UI3 and RS.
15 - BI2 BI2
Non-configurable extra digital input for monitoring local functions over
the network.
16 - UI3 SS UI 3
Non-configurable extra analog input for monitoring local discharge or supply temperatures over the network.
BACnet Network Connections
BACnet Com Com + BACnet communication bus + connection.
BACnet Com Com - BACnet communication bus – connection.
Ref Ref
Communication bus reference terminal.
oDO NOT USE FOR OTHER THAN SERVICING ISSUES
oDO NOT WIRE SHIELD TO THAT POSITION
VAV Damper Wiring VAV Damper and Analog Reheat Wiring
sgnitteSgniriW citamehcS
Pressure dependent VAV cooling only system
Mandatory
• RehtConf = 0 None
VAV Damper
Motor
Com
24 VAC
0-10 VDC
24 V~ Hot
24 V~ Com
AO 1
24 V~ Hot
24 V~ Com
AO 2
AO 1
Com 24 VAC
0-10 VDC
Reheat Valve or SCR
VAV Damper Motor
Com
24 VAC
0-10 VDC
Analog VAV Actuator
Room Temperature Control
Minimum & Maximum Position
Adjusted at Th ermostat
0 to 10
VDC
UI3
0 V~ Com
24 V~ Hot
AO1
Terminal Use Terminal
Identification
Description
4 - 24 V ~ Hot 24 V~ Hot Power supply of thermostat, hot side.
5 - 0 V ~ Com 0 V~ Com
Power supply of thermostat, common side. Also used as reference for
the analog outputs when used.
6 - On/Off Rht BO 5 Local isolated triac reheat output when used.
7 - On/Off Rht BO 5 Local isolated triac reheat output when used.
9 - Analog Rht AO 2 Local analog 0 - 10 VDC reheat output when used.
10 - VAV Damper AO 1 Local VAV analog 0 - 10 VDC output.
Not Used Blank Blank unused terminal.
12 - BI1 BI 1
Configurable extra digital input. See parameter section for more
information.
13 - RS RS
Remote room sensor input when used. Input auto-detects a remote
sensor and will automatically by-pass the internal sensor when used.
14 - Scom Scom Reference input for BI 1, BI 2, UI3 and RS.
15 - BI2 BI2
Non-configurable extra digital input for monitoring local functions over
the network.
16 - UI3 SS UI 3
Non-configurable extra analog input for monitoring local discharge or
supply temperatures over the network.
BACnet Network Connections
BACnet Com Com + BACnet communication bus + connection.
BACnet Com Com - BACnet communication bus – connection.
Ref Ref
Communication bus reference terminal.
oDO NOT USE FOR OTHER THAN SERVICING ISSUES
oDO NOT WIRE SHIELD TO THAT POSITION
VAV Damper Wiring VAV Damper and Analog Reheat Wiring
sgnitteSgniriW citamehcS
Pressure dependent VAV cooling only system
Mandatory
• RehtConf = 0 None
VAV Damper
Motor
Com
24 VAC
0-10 VDC
24 V~ Hot
24 V~ Com
AO 1
24 V~ Hot
24 V~ Com
AO 2
AO 1
Com 24 VAC
0-10 VDC
Reheat Valve or SCR
VAV Damper Motor
Com
24 VAC
0-10 VDC
Analog VAV Actuator
Room Temperature Control
Minimum & Maximum Position
Adjusted at Th ermostat
0 to 10
VDC
UI3
0 V~ Com
24 V~ Hot
AO1
Terminal Use Terminal
Identification
Description
4 - 24 V ~ Hot 24 V~ Hot Power supply of thermostat, hot side.
5 - 0 V ~ Com 0 V~ Com
Power supply of thermostat, common side. Also used as reference for
the analog outputs when used.
6 - On/Off Rht BO 5 Local isolated triac reheat output when used.
7 - On/Off Rht BO 5 Local isolated triac reheat output when used.
9 - Analog Rht AO 2 Local analog 0 - 10 VDC reheat output when used.
10 - VAV Damper AO 1 Local VAV analog 0 - 10 VDC output.
Not Used Blank Blank unused terminal.
12 - BI1 BI 1
Configurable extra digital input. See parameter section for more
information.
13 - RS RS
Remote room sensor input when used. Input auto-detects a remote
sensor and will automatically by-pass the internal sensor when used.
14 - Scom Scom Reference input for BI 1, BI 2, UI3 and RS.
15 - BI2 BI2
Non-configurable extra digital input for monitoring local functions over
the network.
16 - UI3 SS UI 3
Non-configurable extra analog input for monitoring local discharge or
supply temperatures over the network.
BACnet Network Connections
BACnet Com Com + BACnet communication bus + connection.
BACnet Com Com - BACnet communication bus – connection.
Ref Ref
Communication bus reference terminal.
oDO NOT USE FOR OTHER THAN SERVICING ISSUES
oDO NOT WIRE SHIELD TO THAT POSITION
VAV Damper Wiring VAV Damper and Analog Reheat Wiring
sgnitteSgniriW citamehcS
Pressure dependent VAV cooling only system
Mandatory
• RehtConf = 0 None
VAV Damper
Motor
Com
24 VAC
0-10 VDC
24 V~ Hot
24 V~ Com
AO 1
24 V~ Hot
24 V~ Com
AO 2
AO 1
Com 24 VAC
0-10 VDC
Reheat Valve or SCR
VAV Damper Motor
Com
24 VAC
0-10 VDC
Analog VAV Actuator
Room Temperature Control
Minimum & Maximum Position
Adjusted at Th ermostat
0 to 10
VDC
UI3
0 V~ Com
24 V~ Hot
AO1
KELE CONSTANT VOLUME ZONING SYSTEM
KTEC ZONING SYSTEM
March 2014

807. fi 755NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
KELE CONSTANT VOLUME ZONING SYSTEM
KTEC ZONING SYSTEM
ORDERING INFORMATION
KTEC2664Z ROOFTOP CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION KTEC2647Z ZONE CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KTEC2647Z-2 Zone Controller for Proportional Zone Damper, On/Off, or Proportional Reheat Control
KTEC2664Z-2 Rooftop Controller for Control of Up to Two Stages of Heating and Two Stages of Cooling in Rooftop
Rooftop
Controller
Zone
Controller
Zone
Controller
Zone
Controller
RS485 End-of-Line Terminator
(MS-BSCEOL-0)
MS/TP
Bus
Supply Return
Mixed Airflow
Bypass
Damper
Bypass
Airflow
Return
Airflow
Zone
Damper
Zone
Damper
Zone
Damper
Rooftop Unit
Typical Zoning Control System Installed on a Single MS/TP Bus
This installation consists of multiple KTEC2647 Zone Controllers, each controlling a single zone damper; and a KTEC2664Z
Rooftop Controller controlling a rooftop unit. Optionally, the MS/TP Bus can be wired to a supervisory controller to provide
centralized monitoring and control of the system. Refer to the Installation Instructions document under "Related Documents" at
www.Kele.com for complete wiring and setup details.
Parameters that must be configured locally at start of initial commissioning
...
RTC Mac
• RTC network address • Default - 4 •
Address must be unique on the network
• Valid range - 4 to 127
RTC Baud Rate •
One controller per bus
• Default - Auto
• Sets the network baud rate, 38400
recommended
• Baud rates - 9600,19200, 38400,
76800, Auto
Parameters that must be configured locally at start of initial commissioning
...
ZONE Mac • ZONE netw
ork address
• Default - 255 •
Address must be unique on the network
• Valid range - 1 to 127 RTC MAC •
Network address must be specified to
RTC
• Default - 4 •
Rooftop controller to which this zone
controller is tied
• Valid range - 1 to 127
* See installation instructions for wiring diagrams
March 2014
ACCESSORIES PAGE
M230-005PD-V5 Differential pressure transducer, 0-5" WC, 0-5 VDC 1041
MS-BACEOL-0 EOL BACnet R485 terminator
ST-D24 10K Type 2 duct temperature themistor 1197

808. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 756fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
55°
10 m
32.8 ft
10 m
32.8 ft
X
0°
Top View
Side View
10 m
32.8 ft
10 m
32.8 ft
0°
46.5°
Y
SPECIFICATIONS
FLEXIBLE BACNET THERMOSTAT
FLEXSTAT
DESCRIPTION
The FlexStat Series of intelligent thermostats can monitor
temperature/humidity/motion-sensing, and are wall-
mounted
. In addition the FlexStat comes with BACnet MS/TP
communications standard. The FlexStat simplifies networked
zone control for common HVAC equipment. Example
applications are pac
kaged rooftop units, air handlers, fan
coil units, and heat pumps
. The on-board library of programs
permits rapid configuration of a wide range of HVAC control applications via the FlexStat’s display and buttons
.
FEATURES
• User-friendly English-language menus on a 64 x 128
pixel, dot-matrix LCD display with 5 buttons for data
selection and entry
• Built-in, factory-tested libraries of configurable
application control sequences
• Schedules can easily be set by weekdays (Mon. -
Fri.), weekend (Sat. - Sun.), entire week (Mon. -Sun.), individual days, and/or holidays
•
Six On/Off and independent heating and cooling set point periods are a
vailable per day
• Three levels of password-protected access (user/
operator/administrator)
MOTION / OCCUPANCY SENSOR (OPTIONAL) PATTERN
BACnet 120000 Series
• Integral temperature and optional humidity and/or motion sensor
s
• Multiple models available
• 72-hour power (capacitor) backup and a real time clock
for network time synchronization or full stand alone operation
Supply Voltage 24VAC 50/60 Hz
Supply Current 13 VA
Display 64 x 128 pixel dot matrix LCD
Analog Input 0-12 VDC (Active/Passive)
10K thermistor (type 2 or 3)
Analog Output 0-12 VDC, 20 mA (maximum)
Digital Output 1 A maximum each or total of
1.5 A per bank of relays
Sensor Type
Humidity (optional) CMOS
Temperature (with humidity)
CMOS
Temperature (without humidity)
10K Type 2
Motion (optional) Passive infrared with 33 feet
(10 meter) range
Accuracy
Humidity (optional) ±2% RH (10 to 90% RH)

Temperature (with humidity)
±0.9°F (±0.5°C)
Temperature (without humidity)
±0.36°F (±0.2°C)
Range
Humidity (optional) 0 to 100% RH
Temperature (with humidity)
36° to 120°F (2.2 to 48.8°C)
Temperature (without humidity)
48° to 96°F (8.8 to 35.5°C)
Response Time Humidity (optional)
< 4 seconds
Operating Temperature 34° to 125°F (1.1 to 51.6°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 4.1"H x 5.5"W x 1.1"D
(10.6 x 14.1 x 1.1 cm)
Weight 0.48 lb (0.22 kg)
Approvals cULus Listed File #E145832, FCC
Warranty 5 years
March 2014

809. fi 757NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
FLEXIBLE BACNET THERMOSTAT
FLEXSTAT
APPLICATIONS

BAC-120063C BAC-120163C BAC-121063C BAC-121163C BAC-120036C BAC-120136C BAC-121036C BAC-121136C
To order white instead of light almond, add W to the end of the model number (e.g., BAC -120036CW).
March 2014

810. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 758fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
10K W0-12 V
Input Pull-Up Switches
ONOFF
Pushed Left
Pushed Right IN2
IN3
IN4
IN7
IN8
IN9
NOTE: Inputs
configurable fo r
Type 3 (default) or
Type 2 thermistors
in FlexStat’s menu
NOTE: EOL = End
Of Line of BACnet
MS/TP network
EOL Switches
ORDERING INFORMATION
FLEXIBLE BACNET THERMOSTAT
FLEXSTAT
MODEL DESCRIPTION
B
AC-120036C
3 relays and 6 analog outputs almond
B
AC-120063C
6 relays and 3 analog ouputs almond
B
AC-120136C
3 relays and 6 analog outputs humidity almond
B
AC-120163C
6 relays and 3 analog outputs humidity almond
B
AC-121036C
3 relays and 6 analog outputs motion sensor almond
B
AC-121063C
6 relays and 3 analog outputs motion sensor almond
B
AC-121136C
3 relays and 6 analog outputs humidity motion sensor almond
BAC-121163C 6 relays and 3 analog outputs humidity motion sensor almond
WIRING
IN9
IN8
GND
IN7
+B
–A
IN4
IN3
GND
IN2
Common/–/C
Phase//R
Analog 9
GND 7–9
Analog 8
Analog 7
Analog 6
GND 4–6
Analog 5
Analog 4
Relay 3
SC 1–3
Relay 2
Relay 1
Outputs
(Wiring Cutout in Backplate)
MS/TP
Network
Inputs
24 VAC
(Wiring is
dependent on
application)
Inputs
NOTE: IN1 and IN5–6 are
reserved fo r internal sensors
NOTE: SC = Switched
(Relay) Common
IN9 IN8
GND
IN7
+B
–A IN4 IN3
GND
IN2
Common/–/C
Phase//R
Analog 9 GND 7–9 Analog 8 Analog 7 Relay 6 SC 4–6 Relay 5 Relay 4 Relay 3 SC 1–3 Relay 2 Relay 1
Outputs
(Wiring Cutout in Backplate)
MS/TP
Network
Inputs
24 VAC
(Wiring is
dependent on
application)
Inputs
NOTE: IN1 and IN5–6 are
reserved fo r internal sensors
NOTE: SC = Switched
(Relay) Common
6/3 & 3/6 Wiring

811. fi 759NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
AIC WIRELESS ETHERNET TRANSCEIVER
AIC900E
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC (requires isolated power
supply)
Supply Current 100 mA @ 24 VAC
Frequency 902-928 MHz
Connections RPSMA female
Protocol Ethernet
Tranmission Power +21 dBm (4 Watts EIRP when used
with 15 dBi antenna)
Range Up to 40 miles (64 km)- Requires 15
dBi antenna
Receiver Sensitivity -97 dBm at 10e-4 BER (-112 dBm
with 15 dBi antenna)
Modulation DSSS (Direct Sequence Spread
Spectr
um)
Channels
12 non-overlapping
Operating Temperature -4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 10 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 4.3"H x 1.75"W x 3.35"D
(10.9 x 8.5 x 4.45 cm)
Weight 0.65 lb (0.28 kg)
Approvals FCC ID: R4N-AW900M IC:5303A-
AW900M
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The AIC900E-K Series of wireless ethernet devices
are readily available for any building automation, control
or monitoring application
. The devices are a reliable
lowcost alternative to long runs of communication cable to previously hard to reach locations, due to a lack of existing communications architecture
. The AIC900E-K Series
wireless de
vices are shipped ready to install, with a true plug-
and-play set-up requiring no special programming or network management tools.
FEATURES
• 902-928 MHz frequency provides excellent non-line-of-
sight performance to penetrate foliage, building walls, and floors
•
Highest Quality of Service (QoS) available-
synchronous point-to-multipoint protocol enables extremely low data latency and jitter
•
128 bit encrypted payload protection provides secure
data delivery
• Simple plug-and-play setup with minimal configuration
required
• Flexible input power, 12-24 VAC/DC
• Up to 40 mile range
SPECIFICATIONS
AIC900E-K
Wireless Channel
Display
Link Quality
Display
LED Indication
Ethernet
Connection
Power 24
VAC/VDC
WIRING
RD3DB
RD5DB
ANTENNA SELECTION CHARTS

812. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 760fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
CABLES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AIC900E-K Wireless Ethernet transceiver 900 MHz (Antenna not included)
AIC900-E-51 AIC900-E, CC3 cable, WPENCL100808 NEMA 4X enclosure, 3dB low profile antenna
AIC WIRELESS ETHERNET TRANSCEIVER
AIC900E
CC1 (Custom Cable 1)
Length: 1 ft
Use when connecting to
another listed cable
CC3 (Custom Cable 3)
Length: 1 ft
Used when connecting antenna
directly to transceiver
LMR600-15
Length: 15 ft
Must be used with CC1
LMR600-30
Length: 30 ft
Must be used with CC1
CC2 (Custom Cable 2)
Length: 6 ft
Must be used with CC1
ACCESSORIES PAGE
3DB BASE 3dB Base Station, Omni-Directional Antenna 765
3DB LOW PROFILE 3dB Low Profile Omni-Directional Antenna 765
6DB BASE 6dB Base Station, Omni-Directional Antenna 765
AIC10.5P 10.5dBi Panel Antenna 765
AIC11AW 9dB Yagi Antenna 765
AIC12.5P 12.5dBi Panel Antenna 765
AIC15AW 13dB Yagi Antenna 765
CC1 Custom cable, RPSMA – N-female bulkhead
CC2 Custom cable, N-male to N-male, 6’ (LMR195)
CC3 Custom cable, N-male to N-male, 6’ (LMR195)
COAX SURGE Coax surge suppressor, in-line
LMR600-15 LMR600 Cable, 15’ with N-male connectors
LMR600-30 LMR600 Cable, 30’ with N-male connectors
POLE CLAMP Pole clamp assembly (for 3db and 6db base antenna)
RD3DB 3 dBi Rubber Duck Style Antenna 765
RD5DB 5 dBi Rubber Duck Style Antenna 765
WPENCL100804 10X8X4 NEMA 4X, Weatherproof enclosure with hinged clear lid

813. fi 761NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
AIC WIRELESS BACNET MSTP AND BACNET IP WIRELESS TRANSCEIVER
WBT900, WBT900-IP
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC (requires isolated power
supply)
Supply Current 100 mA @ 24 VAC
Frequency 902-928 MHz
Connections RPSMA female
Protocol
WBT900-K BACnet MS/TP
WBT900-IP-K BACnet IP
Transmission Power +21 dBm (4 Watts EIRP when used
with 15 dBi antenna)
Range Up to 40 miles (64 km)- Requires 15
dBi antenna
Receiver Sensitivity -97 dBm at 10e-4 BER
(-112 dBm with 15 dBi antenna)
Modulation DSSS (Direct Sequence Spread
Spectr
um)
Channels
12 non-overlapping
Operating Temperature -4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 10 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 4.3"H x 1.75"W x 3.35"D
(10.9 x 8.5 x 4.45 cm)
Weight 0.65 lb (0.28 kg)
Approvals FCC ID: R4N-AW900M IC:5303A-
AW900M
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The WBT900-K and WBT900-IP-K transceivers allow you
to install a close or long range, non line-of-sight, point-to-
multipoint, wireless BACnet MSTP or BACnet IP network, at a
fraction of the cost of installation labor, conduit and cable
.
The
WBT900-K and WBT900-IP-K transceivers are plug
and play, requiring no special programming tools or network management software
.
FEATURES
• 902-928 MHz frequency provides excellent non-line-of-
sight performance to penetrate foliage, building walls, and floors
•
Highest Quality of Service (QoS) available-synchronous
point-to-multipoint protocol enables extremely low data latency and jitter
•
128 bit encrypted payload protection provides secure
data delivery
• Simple plug-and-play setup with minimal configuration
required
• Flexible input power, 12-24 VAC/DC
• Up to 50 mile range
USB
Connection
Wire Channel
Display
Link Quality
Display
LED Indication
RS485
Connection
Power 24
VAC/VDC
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
WBT900-K
Wireless Channel
Display
Link Quality
Display
LED Indication
Ethernet
Connection
Power 24
VAC/VDC
WBT900-IP-K
RD3DB
RD5DB
ANTENNA SELECTION CHARTS

814. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 762fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
AIC WIRELESS BACNET MSTP AND BACNET IP WIRELESS TRANSCEIVER
WBT900, WBT900-IP
MODEL DESCRIPTION
WBT900-K Wireless BACnet MSTP Transceiver 900m MHz (Antenna not included)
WBT900-51 WBT900, CC 3 cable, WPENCL100808 NEMA 4X enclosure, 3DB LOW PROFILE antenna
WBT900-IP-K Wireless BACnet IP Transceiver 900 MHz (Antenna not included)
WBT900-IP-51 WBT900-IP, CC 3 cable, WPENCL100808 NEMA 4X enclosure, 3DB LOW PROFILE antenna
CABLES
CC1 (Custom Cable 1)
Length: 1 ft
Use when connecting to
another listed cable
CC3 (Custom Cable 3)
Length: 1 ft
Used when connecting antenna
directly to transceiver
LMR600-15
Length: 15 ft
Must be used with CC1
LMR600-30
Length: 30 ft
Must be used with CC1
CC2 (Custom Cable 2)
Length: 6 ft
Must be used with CC1
ACCESSORIES PAGE
3DB BASE 3dB Base Station, Omni-Directional Antenna 765
3DB LOW PROFILE 3dB Low Profile Omni-Directional Antenna 765
6DB BASE 6dB Base Station, Omni-Directional Antenna 765
AIC10.5P 10.5dBi Panel Antenna 765
AIC11AW 9dB Yagi Antenna 765
AIC12.5P 12.5dBi Panel Antenna 765
AIC15AW 13dB Yagi Antenna 765
CC1 Custom cable, RPSMA – N-female bulkhead
CC2 Custom cable, N-male to N-male, 6’ (LMR195)
CC3 Custom cable, N-male to N-male, 6’ (LMR195)
COAX SURGE Coax surge suppressor, in-line
LMR600-15 LMR600 Cable, 15’ with N-male connectors
LMR600-30 LMR600 Cable, 30’ with N-male connectors
POLE CLAMP Pole clamp assembly (for 3db and 6db base antenna)
RD3DB 3 dBi Rubber Duck Style Antenna 765
RD5DB 5 dBi Rubber Duck Style Antenna 765
WPENCL100804 10X8X4 NEMA 4X, Weatherproof enclosure with hinged clear lid
March 2014

815. fi 763NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
DESCRIPTION
The WLT900-K Wireless LonWorks Transceiver provides a
reliable and cost effective solution for networking buildings
and other remote sites without long runs of Lon cable
.
LonW
orks communication can be established for close range
of 100 feet or up to 40 miles with a higher gain antenna
. The
wireless protocol features a dynamic addressing scheme that simplifies node-to-node communication in point-to-point or point-to-multipoint applications
. The WLT900-K Wireless
LonWorks Transceiver offers true plug-and-play setup requiring no special programming or network management tools
. A minimum of two transceivers is required for operation.
WIRELESS LONWORKS TRANSCEIVER
WLT900
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC (requires isolated power
supply)
Supply Current 100 mA @ 24 VAC
Frequency 902-928 MHz
Connections RPSMA female
Protocol Lonworks
Transmission Power +21 dBm (4 Watts EIRP when used
with 15 dBi antenna)
Range Up to 40 miles (64 km)- Requires 15
dBi antenna
Receiver Sensitivity -97 dBm at 10e-4 BER (-112 dBm
with 15 dBi antenna)
Modulation DSSS (Direct Sequence Spread
Spectr
um)
Channels
12 non-overlapping
Operating Temperature -4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 10 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 4.3"H x 1.75"W x 3.35"D
(10.9 x 8.5 x 4.45 cm)
Weight 0.65 lb (0.28 kg)
Approvals FCC ID: R4N-AW900M IC:5303A-
AW900M
RoHS Statement
Yes
Warranty 1 year
FEATURES
• P
• Ultra-fast sync time
• Variable output 5 mW to 1000 mW
• No complex programming required
• Ranges from 100 feet to several miles
USB
Connection
Wireless Channel
Display
Link Quality
Display
LED Indication
TP/FT-10
Connection
Power 24
VAC/VDC
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
WLT900-K
RD3DB
RD5DB
March 2014
ANTENNA SELECTION CHARTS

816. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 764fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
WLT900-K Wireless LonWorks Transceiver 900 MHz (Antenna not included)
WLT900-51 WLT900-K, CC3 cable, WPENCL100808 NEMA 4X enclosure, 3dB low profile antenna
AIC WIRELESS LONWORKS TRANSCEIVER
WLT900
CABLES
CC1 (Custom Cable 1)
Length: 1 ft
Use when connecting to another
listed cable
LMR600-30
Length: 30 ft
Must be used with CC1
LMR600-15
Length: 15 ft
Must be used with CC1
CC2 (Custom Cable 2)
Length: 6 ft
Must be used with CC1
CC3 (Custom Cable 3)
Length: 1 ft
Used when connecting antenna
directly to transceiver
ACCESSORIES PAGE
3DB BASE 3dB Base Station, Omni-Directional Antenna 765
3DB LOW PROFILE 3dB Low Profile Omni-Directional Antenna 765
6DB BASE 6dB Base Station, Omni-Directional Antenna 765
AIC10.5P 10.5dBi Panel Antenna 765
AIC11AW 9dB Yagi Antenna 765
AIC12.5P 12.5dBi Panel Antenna 765
AIC15AW 13dB Yagi Antenna 765
CC1 Custom cable, RPSMA – N-female bulkhead
CC2 Custom cable, N-male to N-male, 6’ (LMR195)
CC3 Custom cable, N-male to N-male, 6’ (LMR195)
COAX SURGE Coax surge suppressor, in-line
LMR600-15 LMR600 Cable, 15’ with N-male connectors
LMR600-30 LMR600 Cable, 30’ with N-male connectors
POLE CLAMP Pole clamp assembly (for 3db and 6db base antenna)
RD3DB 3 dBi Rubber Duck Style Antenna 765
RD5DB 5 dBi Rubber Duck Style Antenna 765
WPENCL100804 10X8X4 NEMA 4X, Weatherproof enclosure with hinged clear lid
March 2014

817. fi 765NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
AIC WIRELESS ANTENNAS
ANTENNAS: DIRECTIONAL
Line-of-sight: 5 miles*
Maximum Non Line-of-Sight: 1500 ft with trees*
*Range may vary based on terrain and noise environment
Dimensions: 23
.12 in long x 1.31 in diameter (31.75 x 3.3 cm)
Line-of-sight: .5 miles*
Maximum Non Line-of-Sight: 6 Walls/500 ft*
*Range may vary based on terrain and noise environment
Dimensions: 4 in long x 1 in diameter (10
.16 x 2.54 cm)
Line-of-sight: 20 miles*
Maximum Non Line-of-Sight: 2000 ft with trees*
*Range may vary based on terrain and noise environment
Dimensions: 61 in long x 1
.31 in diameter (155 x 3.3 cm)
Line-of-sight: 2 miles*
Maximum Non Line-of-Sight: 1200 ft with trees*
*Range may vary based on terrain and noise environment
Dimensions: 13
.3 x 13.3 x 1.7 in (33.8 x 33.8 x 4.3 cm)
Line-of-sight: 5 miles*
Maximum Non Line-of-Sight: 1300 ft with trees*
*Range may vary based on terrain and noise environment
Dimensions: 15
.4 x 15.4 x 1.7 in (39.1 x 39.1 x 4.3 cm)
Line-of-sight: 20 miles*
Maximum Non Line-of-Sight: 1500 ft with trees*
*Range may vary based on terrain and noise environment
Dimensions: 21
.06 x 6.8 x 1.5 in (53.5 x 17.5 x 4.3 cm)
Line-of-sight: 40 miles*
Maximum Non Line-of-Sight: 1500 ft with trees*
*Range may vary based on terrain and noise environment
Dimensions: 39
.5 x 12.6 x 6.8 in (100.5 x 32.0 x 17.5 cm)
Line-of-sight: .25 miles*
Maximum Non Line-of-Sight: 5 Walls/300 ft*
*Range may vary based on terrain and noise environment
Dimensions: 8
.75 x .5 in (22.2 x 1.27 cm)
Line-of-sight: .5 miles*
Maximum Non Line-of-Sight: 6 Walls/500 ft*
*Range may vary based on terrain and noise environment
Dimensions: 17
.0 in long x .5 in diameter (43.18 x 1.27 cm)
AIC10.5P
AIC11AW
AIC12.5P
AIC15AW
RD3DB
RD5DB
3dB Low Profile
3dB Base
6db Base
ANTENNAS: OMNI - DIRECTIONAL
March 2014

818. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 766fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
WIRELESS THERMOSTAT SYSTEM
VICONICS WIRELESS
Supply Voltage
Coordinator 15 VDC
Thermostats 19 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Supply Current 2 VA
Supply Watts 15 W maximum (coordinator)
Coordinator
Operating System NiagaraAX
Platform IBM® PowerPC 405EP 250 MHz
Processor 64 MB SDRAM & 64
MB Serial Flash Battery Backup -
shutdown begins within 10 seconds
Real-time clock - 3 month backup
maximum with battery
Frequency
2.4Ghz
Modulation DSSS (Direct-sequence spread-
spectr
um transmission)
Communication (coordinator)

Ethernet Two 10/100 Mbps Ports
(RJ-45 Connection), BACnet IP (VWG-40-IP -1000) RS-232 9-Pin
D-Shell Connection RS-485 3-Pin Non-Isolated Port, BACnet MS/TP (VWG-40-MSTP-1000)
Fan Switching
(VT7300) 30 VAC, 1.0 A maximum,
3.0 A inrush
Relay Output (VT7300A, C, VT7600) 30 VAC, 1.0
A maximum, 15 mA minimum, 3.0 A
in-rush
Analog Output (VT72xxF, VT73xxF) 0 to 10 VDC
Auxiliary Contacts 30 VAC, 1.0 A Maximum, 3.0 A
inrush
Digital Inputs Dry contacts
Accuracy
Temperature ±0.9°F (±0.5°C) at 70°F (21°C
Models with Humidity
±5% RH from 20 to 80% RH at 50° to 90°F (10° to 32°C)
Sensor Type
Thermostat (local) 10K NTC
DESCRIPTION
The Viconics Wireless thermostat system provides wireless
networked control of Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
(HVAC) equipment on a Building Automation System (BAS)
.
The Viconics Wireless thermostats integrate into a
supervisory controller using BACnet(R) Internet Protocol (IP) or BACnet Master- Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) communications
. VWG-40 Coordinators allow the supervisory
controller to communicate with multiple Viconics wireless thermostats
.
The wireless mesh network uses ZigBee(R) technology to
enable remote monitoring and programming and to enhance reliability by providing redundant transmission paths through other Viconics wireless thermostats, creating a resilient, self healing mesh network
.
FEATURES
• Wireless communication
• Integral humidity sensing capability (dehumidification models)
•
On/off, floating, or proportional 0 to 10 VDC control
• Three speeds of fan control (model-dependent)
• Integral wireless signal strength testing built into
wireless thermostats and coordinators
• Backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
• Two configurable binary inputs
• Over 20 configurable parameters
SPECIFICATIONS
VT7300A5031W
Thermostat
APPLICATION •
Commercial structures with brick or solid concrete
walls and/or ceilings that impede hard-wired thermostat applications
•
Office buildings, retail stores, and other commercial
real estate where tenant turnover is frequent
• Museums, historical buildings, atriums, and other sites
where building aesthetics and historical preservation are important
•
Buildings with marble, granite, glass, mirrored, wood
veneer, or other decorative surfaces that present challenges to hard-wired applications
•
Buildings with asbestos or other hazardous materials
that must not be penetrated or disturbed
• Buildings with occupants sensitive to disruptions to b
usiness
• College dorms, hotels, and condos
VWG-40
Coordinator
VWG-RA-1000
March 2014

819. fi 767NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Setpoint Range Heating 40° to 90°F (4.5° to 32°C) in
0.5° increments Cooling 54° to 100°F
(12° to 38°C) in 0.5° increments
Transmission Power 10 mW Maximum
Range Through walls 30 ft (10 m) Line-of-
sight 100 ft (30 m) Open space
Deadband 2°F (1°C) between heating and
cooling
Number of Zones 30 Maximum
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Display -40° to 122°F (-40° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 95% RH maximum (non-condensing)
Weight
Coordinator 1.10 lb (0.49 kg)
Thermostat 0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Approvals
Coordinator UL916, C-UL listed to Canadian
Standards Association, (CSA) C22.2
No. 205-m1983 "Signal Equipment",
CE, FCC par
t 15 Class A, C-Tick, Thermostat United States UL Listed, CCN
XAPX, Under UL 873,
Temperature
Indicating and Regulating
Equipment FCC Compliant to
Part 15
.247 Regulations for Low
Power Unlicensed Transmitters, C-Tick Canada UL Listed, CCN XAPX7, Under CSA C22
.2 No.
24,
Temperature Indicating and
Regulating Equipment Industry Canada, ICES-003
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
Room Te mp
70.0˚F
MODE
Status LED
(beneath cover)
System activity LEDs
Backlit plain-text LCD
Intuitive operation keys
FAN
FAN HEAT
OVERRIDE
COOL
4.94
(12.5)

3.375 (8.6)
1.13
(2.9)
tatsomrehT sseleriW
SEC
2.44 (61.9)
6.31 (160.4)
4.82
LAN2 (SEC)
RJ-45 Ethernet port
LAN1 (PRI)
RJ-45 Ethernet port
(122.4)
Diagnostic light emitting diodes
PRI BEATSTATUS
rotanidrooC
WIRELESS THERMOSTAT SYSTEM
VICONICS WIRELESS
SPECIFICATIONS (CONTINUED)
DIMENSIONS, CONTROLS, AND CONNECTIONS - in (cm)
March 2014

820. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 768fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controller System Overview
A Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controller System consists of:
A supervisory controller
At least one VWG-40 Coordinator
Multiple Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers
Component Descriptions
Supervisory Controllers (building automation system)
The Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controller System interfaces
with Web-enabled, Ethernet-based, supervisory controllers that
connect BAS networks to IP networks and the Web
. Supervisory
controllers provide scheduling, alarm and event management, trending, energy management, data exchange, dial-out capability, and password protection with a computer running Microsoft
®

Internet Explorer
®
Web browser
.
VWG-40 Coordinators
A VWG-40 Coordinator provides a wireless interface between a supervisory controller and the Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers, allowing the exchange of BACnet IP (VWG-40- IP-1000 model) or BACnet MS/TP (VWG-40-MSTP-1000 model) messages
. The VWG-40 Coordinator initiates the formation of
the wireless mesh network - one is required per wireless mesh network
. Each VWG-40 Coordinator and the Viconics Wireless
Thermostat Controllers assigned to it share a "Personal Area Network Identification" (PAN ID)
. A VWG-40 Coordinator requires
a 15 VDC power source. An optional remote-mount antenna and
cab
le is available to allow transmission when the coordinator is
mounted inside a metal panel
.
A VWG-40 Coordinator enables the Viconics Wireless Thermostat
Controllers to communicate with the supervisory controller, which schedules zone occupancy of the wireless system, collects trend data, overrides points, and monitors alarms
. The Viconics Wireless
Thermostat Controller System confirms and synchronizes data transmissions between the Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers and VWG-40 Coordinators
.
Together, these components provide wireless monitoring and
temperature control of building Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) equipment
. Figure 1 illustrates a simple
Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controller System using a BACnet MS/TP Version of the VWG-40 Coordinator
Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers Depending on the model, the Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers can communicate sensed temperature, setpoint temperature, and other data with an associated supervisory controller and control a variety of fan coil and zoning equipment
.
The
Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers are designed for
indoor, intra-building applications only
. The Viconics Wireless
Thermostat Controllers can also serve as repeaters to extend the range of the BACnet data communications within the wireless mesh network
.
Component Quantities A
Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controller System can support up
to: •
100 Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers per MS/TP trunk
on the supervisory controller
• 254 Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers integrated through
BACnet IP on a supervisory controller
• 30 Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers per VWG-40
Coordinator
Each increment of 30 Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers requires one additional VWG-40 Coordinator
. Viconics Wireless
Thermostat Controllers can be added as repeaters, as required, to extend range and provide redundant pathways
. Viconics Wireless
Thermostat Controllers serving only as repeaters do not count towards the totals shown in Table 1; however, indiscriminate use of Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers as repeaters can lead to reduced performance
.
wireless
thermostat
controller
Supervisory
controller
coordinator
(BACnet MS/TP)
wireless
thermostat
controller
wireless
thermostat
controller
wireless
thermostat
controller
wireless
thermostat
controller
10 m (30 ft) through walls
30 m (100 ft) open space
recommended signal range
wireless
thermostat
controller
Figure 1
Battery connector
(Bottom board)
On board wireless adapter
with antenna connection
Antenna connector
LAN2
(SEC)
LAN2
(SEC)
Antenna connector
Battery connectorBACnet MS/TP port
(RS-485)
Connector fo r
coaxial power
Earth ground
spade lug
Battery in bracket
(On top of option
cards, if present)
BACnet IP ports (RJ-45 ethernet)
RJ-45 Ethernet ports LAN2 and LAN1 on top board.
RS-485 Po rt COM2 on bottom board.
LAN1
(PRI)
LAN1
(PRI)
Earth ground
spade lug
Coaxial powe
r
connector fo r
wall mounted power modul
e
Serial port
not used
VWG-40 Coordinator (Cover Removed)
VWG-40 Coordinator Communications Port (Cover
Removed)
WIRELESS THERMOSTAT SYSTEM
VICONICS WIRELESS
March 2014

821. fi 769NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
WIRELESS THERMOSTAT SYSTEM
VICONICS WIRELESS
CAUTION: APPLICATIONS TO AVOID
Locations or applications that prohibit cellular
telephones or Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) systems are
unsuitable for the wireless products. Examples
include:
• Operating rooms or radiation therapy rooms
• Critical environments
•
Department of defense applications requiring Diacap
certification (for example, military bases and military hospitals) Do not use the products in applications that cannot tolerate intermittent interference, or where:
•
Critical control features would impact life-safety or
result in large monetary loss, including secondary (backup) lifesafety applications
•
Data centers, production lines, or critical areas would
be shut down
• Loss of critical control would result from loss of data
from humidity or temperature sensor communications
•
Operation of exhaust fans or Air Handling Units
(AHUs) would impair a purge or pressurization mode
• Missing data would invalidate reporting required by
the customer security points being monitored
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
VWG-40-IP-1000 Coordinator BACnet IP version
VWG-40-MSTP-1000 Coordinator BACnet MS/TP version
VWG-APP-1000 Wireless Niagara card
VT7200C5031W 2 Outputs-on/off / floating - no fan
VT7200F5031W 2 Outputs - 0 -10 VDC analog - no fan
VT7300A5031W Commercial - 2 outputs-on/off
VT7300F5031W Commercial - 2 outputs - 0-10 VDC
VT7305A5031W Hotel - 2 outputs-on/off
VT7305F5031W Hotel - 2 outputs - 0-10 VDC
VT7350C5031W 6 Commercial - 2 outputs-on/off / floating / RH
VT7350F5031W Commercial - 2 outputs - 0-10 VDC / RH
VT7355C5031W Hotel - 2 outputs - on/off / floating / RH
VT7355F5031W Hotel - 2 outputs - 0 - 10 VDC / RH
VT7600A5031W Single stage, non-programmable
VT7600B5031W Multi-stage, non-programmable
VT7600H5031W Heat pump, non-programmable
VT7605B5031W Multi-stage economizer
VT7652H5031W Commercial - 2 outputs-on/off / floating
ACCESSORIES
VWGPSNAAC1201000 120 VAC to 15 VDC power supply
VWG-PS-AC24-1000 24 VAC to 15 VDC power supply for VWG-40
VWG-WA-1000 Relacement antenna for VWG-40 Coordinator
VWG-RA-1000 Remote antenna for VWG-40 Coordinator
VWG-BB-1000 Replacement battery pack for VWG-40 Coordinator
Viconics Wireless Communication
The Viconics Wireless Thermostat System uses DSSS RF
wireless technology and operates on the 2
.4 GHz ISM band. The
system meets the IEEE 802.15.4 standard for low power, low duty-
cycle RF transmitting systems and is compatible with wireless mesh networks compliant with the ZigBee
®
standard
. The Viconics
Ther
mostats have a transmission power of 10 mW
.
A successful Viconics Wireless Thermostat System requires that
a minimum RF (wireless) signal strength be maintained between the VWG-40 Coordinators and Viconics Wireless Thermostats
.
VWG-40 Coordinator and
Viconics Wireless Thermostat locations
are important considerations in system design
. Distance, metal
objects, and other obstructions can reduce or completely block the RF signal transmission between a VWG-40 Coordinator and Viconics Wireless Thermostat
.
Number of Viconics wireless
thermostats
VWG-40 Coordinators Re-
quired
1-30 1
31-60 2
61-90 3
91-100 4
TABLE 1
* Hotel
Commercial Version: Center button is for occupancy override
March 2014

822. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 770fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Power Supply 24 VAC/VDC, 50/60 Hz
Radio Output Frequency 2.4 GHz, 16 channels,
direct-sequence spread spectrum
Power Output + 10 dBm
Aerial Characteristics Gain 3.0 dBi, VSWR < 2:1
Data Encryption AES 128
Serial Communications USB 2.0, serial 9-pin RS-232
Operating Temperature -14° to 122°F (10° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0-90% RH non-condensing
Dimensions 3.94"H x 2.76"W x 2.28"D
(10.0 x 7.0 x 5.8 cm)
Weight 0.84 lbs (0.38 kg)
Warranty 3 years
SONNET WIRELESS NETWORK RECEIVER
RF-RXS WIRELESS NETWORK RECEIVER
DESCRIPTION
The RF-RXS Wireless Network Receivers allow quick and seamless integration with
Tridium’s range of JACE controllers, with all supported building automation system
protocols, such as BACnet, LonTalk and ModBus
. The integral web interface allows
an engineer to not only gather measurement data from SonNet wireless devices but perform radio network management services such as auto-commissioning of SonNet wireless devices and setting device configuration parameters
.
FEATURES
• DIN rail mounted housing
• Serial connection to COM1 or COM2 of JACE
SPECIFICATIONS
RF-RXS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RF-RXS Serial reciever for Niagara, supports CMS/USB
RF-RXS-N Option card for Tridium Jace, with JAR file
SONNET WIRELESS RECEIVERS
RF-RX SERIES
March 2014
SonNet Wireless System Deployment
A SonNet Wireless system is comprised of a receiver, battery powered sensors and permanently powered routers.
Routers, though permanently powered, can also have sensing elements, accomplishing both router and sensors functions. Routers and sensors can either communicate directly with the receiver or via other routers. Routers are require d to be permanently powered as they need to stay “awake” at all times to
allow signals from “child” nodes to be instantly forwarded to their “parent” nodes. Battery powered sensors only “wake” for very short periods to send data.
In the schematic to the left, routers R2 to R7 have 5 children each, all battery powered sensors. Their parent is the receiver. Router R1 has 8 children and R8 has 4 children, giving a total number of network devices of 51, including the receiver.
There can be a maximum depth of 8 layers of ro uters in a network
and a maximum of 50 nodes per network with the RF-RX series
of receivers.
Note that battery powered devices can only route their signals to the receiver directly or through ro uters, and not through other battery powered devices.
The receiver can support a maximum of 16 directly connected
“child” devices, of which only 12 can be battery powered nodes,
plus up to 4 routers.
Routers can support a maximum of 16 directly connected “child”
devices, of which only 8 can be battery powered nodes, plus up
to 8 routers.

823. fi 771NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
SONNET WIRELESS RECEIVERS
RF-RX SERIES
Power Supply 24 VAC / VDC
Radio Output Frequency 2.4GHz, 16 channels,
direct-sequence spread spectrum,
Compliance IEEE 802.15.4-2006
Range 328 ft (100 m)
Aerial Characteristics Gain 1.2dBi, VSWR 2:1
Data Encryption AES 128
Power Output +10dBm
Analogue Outputs RF-RX20 20 x 0-10Vdc analogue
outputs @10mA max. each,
RF-RX40 40 x 0-10Vdc analogue outputs @10mA max
. each
Housing 4.09"H x 8"W x 1.5" D,DIN-rail
(104mm)H x (203mm)W x (38mm) D
(e
xcluding aerial)
Operating Conitions
14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)
0 to 90% RH non-condensing
Weight 1.21 lb (0.55kg)
Warranty 3 years
DESCRIPTION
The RF-RX Series of SonNet Wireless Receivers collect data from all other devices on the wireless network, including measurements from sensors, link quality for all links formed in the network, battery levels for all battery powered devices, hours run for all devices and the current status of all devices
.
Note: Each receiver can support a maximum of 16 ‘children’,
which can consist of a maximum of 12 battery powered nodes and 4 routers, or up to 16 routers if there are no battery powered nodes
.
A USB socket is provided for connection to a PC or laptop running
the Sontay SonNet CMS software.
FEATURES
• Pr •
Encrypted data transmission
• 20 or 40 output models
• Short-circuit protected analogue outputs
• Overvoltage protected analogue outputs to +36V
• Self-healing tree topology
• Lower installation costs
• Easy to install and commission
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RF-RX20 Receiver with 20 x 0-10VDC outputs
RF-RX40 Receiver with 40 x 0-10VDC outputs
ACCESSORIES
RF-AERIAL-PM2 Aerial extension with bulk head fitting, 2M
RF-AERIAL-PM5 Aerial extension with bulk head fitting, 5M
RF-RX
March 2014
RF-RX20 Wiring Terminals
Terminal Assignments:
•G = Common 0V
•V = 0-10Vdc output
Example: Output 2, G02 = 0V, V02 = 0-10Vdc
V19
G19
V17
G17
V15
G15
V13
G13
V11
G11
V09
G09
V07
G07
V05
G05
V03
G03
V01
G01
V20
G20
V18
G18
V16
G16
V14
G14
V12
G12
V10
G10
V08
G08
V06
G06
V04
G04
V02
G02
Alarm Supply
2 1
0V
24V
ALM
ALM
USB Connector
Reset Button
WIRING

824. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 772fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
SONNET WIRELESS ROUTER-SENSORS
RF-RR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The RF-RR Series of SonNet Wireless Routers-Sensors are used
in conjunction with the SonNet RF-RX20 or RF-RX40 receiver units,
and RF-RS series of battery powered wireless sensors, and are used
to route signals from battery powered nodes and other routers to
the receiver module, where the signal strength of a direct path is not
sufficient for reliable communications
.
Note: Each router can support a maximum of 16 ‘children’, which can
consist of a maximum of 8 battery powered nodes and 8 routers, or up to 16 routers if there are no battery powered nodes
. Consideration
should be given to network planning for redundancy in case of router failure or damage
. Routers automatically find the best path back to
the receiver, which may be directly to the receiver or via other ‘parent’ routers
.
FEATURES
• Pr
• Complete range of sensor types
• Allows networks to be expanded
• Self-healing tree topology
• Lower installation costs
• Easy to install and commission
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RF-RR-R-622 Duct humidity and temperature sensor/router, 24 VAC
RF-RR-R-631 Wall humidity and temperature sensor/router, 24 VAC
RF-RR-R-632 Outside humidity and temperature sensor/router, 24 VAC
RF-RR-T-322 Duct temperature sensor/router, 150 MM probe, 24 VAC
RF-RR-T-331 Outside air temperature sensor/router, 24 VAC
RF-RR-T-332 Outside air temperature sensor/router, with rad. Sheild, 24 VAC
RF-RR-T-341 Immersion temperature sensor/router, 150 MM probe, 24 VAC
RF-RR-T-351 Clamp-on temperature sensor/router, 24 VAC
RF-RR-T-555-2 Flyind lead temperature sensor/router, 2M, 24 VAC
RF-RR-T-555-5 Flying lead temperature sensor/router, 5M, 24 VAC
RF-RR-1000 Room temperature sensor/router, 24VAC
RF-RR-1000-MS Room temperature sensor/router, 24VAC, override button
RF-RR-1000-SP Room temperature sensor/router, 24VAC, set point
RF-RR-1000-MS-SP Room temperature sensor/router, 24VAC, override button, set point
RF-RR-RH-1000 Room humidity/temperature sensor/router, 24VAC
RF-RR-RH-1000-MS Room humidity/temperature sensor/router, 24VAC, override button
RF-RR-RH-1000-SP Room humidity/temperature sensor/router, 24VAC, set point
RF-RR-RH-1000-MS-SP Room humidity/temperature sensor/router, 24VAC, override button, set point
RF-RR-CO2-1000 Room CO2 sensor/router, 24VAC
RF-RR-CO2-RH-1000 Room CO2/humidity/temperature sensor/router, 24VAC
Supply Voltage 24 VAC / VDC
Transmission Power +10 dBm
Baud Rate 250Kbps
Transmit Frequency 2.4 GHz
Beam Pattern Isotropic
Range 328 ft (100 m)
Communication SonNet
Channels 16
Sensor Accuracy Termperature: ± 0.3°C, RH ± 3%, CO
2
: ± 75
ppm
Operating Temperature -4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 90% RH non-condensing
Wiring Terminations 22 AWG
Dimensions
Space Housing 4.53"H x 3.35"W x 1.10"D
(115 x 85 x 28 mm)
Plant Housing 4.57"H x 4.17"W x 2.05"D
(116 x 106 x 52 mm)
Approvals CE, FCC
Weight
RF-RR-R-6xx 0.79 lb (0.36 kg)
RF-RR-T-3xx 0.46 lb (0.21 kg)
RF-RR-T-5xx 0.55 lb (0.25 kg)
RF-RR-1000/CO2/RH 0.26 lb (0.12 kg)
Warranty 3 years
SPECIFICATIONS
March 2014
Plant Housing
Router-Sensor
Space Housing
Router-Sensor
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
RF-RX20 Receiver with 20 x 0-10VDC outputs 771
RF-RX40 Receiver with 40 x 0-10VDC outputs 771

825. fi 773NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Plant Housing
Sensor
Space Housing
Sensor
ORDERING INFORMATION
SONNET WIRELESS TEMPERATURE, HUMIDITY AND CO
2
SENSORS
RF-RS SERIES
Radio Output Frequency 2.4GHz, 16 channels, direct-
sequencespread spectrum, Compliance IEEE
802.15.4-2006
Range 328 ft (100 m)
Aerial Characteristics Space Gain 1.2dBi, VSWR 1.5:1, Plant Gain
2.0dBi, VSWR 2:1
Data Encryption AES 128
Power Output +10 dBm
Accuracy Temperature ±0.3°C, RH ±3% RH,CO
2 ±75ppm
Battery Type Space 3.6V AA 2.4Ah Li-SOCl2, non-
rechargeable, Plant 3.6V 2.1Ah 2/3 A Li-SOCl2,
non-rechargeable
Battery Life >3 years (depending on configuration)
Plant Sensor Types Duct, outside air, outside air with solar radiation
shield, immersion, strap-on and flying lead
Operating Temperature 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)
Opertaing Humidity 0-90% RH non-condensing
Dimensions
Space Housing
4.53"H x 3.35"W x 1.10"D
(115 x 85 x 28 mm)

Plant Housing
4.57"H x 4.17"W x 2.05"D
(116 x 106 x 52 mm)
Weight
RF-RS-R-6xx 0.79 lb (0.36 kg)
RF-RS-T-3xx 0.46 lb (0.21 kg)
RF-RS-T-5xx 0.55 lb (0.25 kg)
RF-RS-1000/CO2/RH 0.26 lb (0.12 kg)
Approval CE, FCC
Warranty 3 years
DESCRIPTION
The RF-RS Series of SonNet Wireless Temperature and Humidity, CO
2
Senors are used in conjunction with the SonNet RF-RX20
or RF-RX40 receiver units, and if required (depending on installation topography), SonNet RF-RR series of routers
. Data is
tr
ansmitted back to the receiver at configurable time intervals, or
on a configurable change in measured value
. Each sensor retains
these configur
ations if the battery becomes discharged or requires
replacement
. The sensors automatically find the best path back to the
receiver, which may be directly to the receiver or via ‘parent’ routers.
FEATURES
• Up to 5 years battery life
• Encrypted data transmission
• Configurable parameters
• Self-healing tree topology
• Lower installation costs
• Easy to install and commission
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RF-RS-R-622 Duct humidity and temperature sensor
RF-RS-R-631 Wall humidity and temperature sensor
RF-RS-R-632 Outside humidity temperature sensor
RF-RS-T
-322
Duct temperature sensor, 150MM probe
RF-RS-T-331 Outside air temperature sensor
RF-RS-T
-332
Outside air temperature sensor with rad. Sheild
RF-RS-T
-341
Immersion temperature sensor, 150MM probe
RF-RS-T-351 Clamp-on temperature sensor
RF-RS-T
-555-2
Flying lead temperature sensor, 2M
RF-RS-T-555-5 Flying lead temperature sensor, 5M
RF-RS-1000 Room temperature sensor, end device, with battery
RF-RS-1000-MS Room temperature sensor, end device, with battery, override button
RF-RS-1000-SP Room temperature sensor, end device, with battery, set point
RF-RS-1000-MS-SP Room temperature sensor, end device, with battery, override button and set point
RF-RS-RH-1000 Room humidity temperature sensor, end device, with battery
RF-RS-RH-1000-SP Room humidity temperature sensor, end device, with battery, set point
RF-RS-RH-1000-MS Room humidity temperature sensor, end device, with battery, override button
RF-RS-RH-1000-MS-SP Room humidity temperature sensor, end device, with battery, override button and set point
RF-RS-CO2-1000 Room CO2 sensor, end device, with battery
RF-RS-CO2-RH-1000 Room CO2/Humidity temperature sensor, end device, with battery
SPECIFICATIONS
ACCESSORIES
RF-RP Battery for plant sensors
RF-RS Battery for space sensors
March 2014

826. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 774fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
8.8" (22.35)
4.7" (11.93)
8.25"
3.5"
FRONTIER 2.0 GATEWAY TRANSCEIVERS
MOD9200
Supply Voltage 24 VAC 60 Hz
Supply Current 500 mA
Frequency 902-928 MHz
Protocol BACnet MS/TP, Modbus, LonWorks
(model dependent)
Transmission Power 11 dBm
Range 1 mile (line-of-sight)
Indoor 200 to 500 ft
Receiver Sensitivity -110 dBm
Operating Temperature 32° to 150°F (0° to 66°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 8.8"H x 4.7"W x 2.25"D
(22.35 x 11.93 x 5.58 cm)
Weight 1.2 lb (0.54 kg)
Approvals FCC certified
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Frontier 2.0 network transceiver utilizes reliable Spread
Spectrum Mesh Network Radio technology. Together with
other Frontier 2.0 sensors and controls, the system can
be used to wirelessly transmit remote sensor readings,
status/alarm indications, control signals and outputs. It is
compatib
le with any control panels or Automation systems
that utilize BACnet MSTP (MOD9200BNT) or LonWorks® (MOD9200LON).
Up to 50 separate physical wireless sensor transmitters and/
or wireless remote output (analog & digital) modules can be used with (1) MOD9200 transceiver
. Up to 100 data points
can be monitored and controlled.
The maximum radio transmission distance is dependent on
building type. The maximum open-air transmission distance
is one mile. In a typical commercial building with steel
I-beam construction, concrete floors with reinforcing rod, and metal stud walls, it can be expected that transmissions will penetrate vertically through floors and horizontally through 200 to 500 feet of walls, furniture and air
.
Generally a wireless system will cover about three floors -
one floor above and one floor below the transceiver location.
In some b
uildings with favorable transmission characteristics
the system may cover more floors
.
FEATURES
• Monitor up to 100 data points; control up to 50 wireless
digital output points and 50 wireless analog output
points
• Multiple MOD9200 Transceivers can be used for large
systems
• MOD9200LON requires standard Lon network
management tool such as LonMaker®, Tridium® software or equivalent
•
MOD9200BNT requires standard BACnet networking
tools
• Simple PC Windows® based wireless sensor setup tool
• Low battery and lost sensor alarm indications per
wireless sensor
• Supports LonWorks® Protocol (MOD9200LON)
• Supports BACnet MSTP Protocol (MOD9200BNT)
• Reliable Spread Spectrum technology
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
MOD9200
March 2014

827. fi 775NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Refer to the configuration setup instruction manual for configuration of the MOD9200BNT registers and BACnet variables setup.
A PC is required for the setup of the Transceiver.
Refer to the configuration setup instruction manual for configuration of the MOD9200LON registers and SNVT variables setup.
A PC is required f
or the setup of the Transceiver
.
Choose a location close to the Gateway network connection and away from the ground.
Mount the gateway on the wall using four #8 screws.
24 VAC Input - Connect 24VAC 60 Hz to the input terminals using 18-20 AWG wire.
MSTP (RS485) - Use 20 or 22 gauge shielded twisted pair wire to connect the Transceiver (Terminals A+ & B-) to the MSTP
network.
FTT-10 (LonWorks) - Use 20 or 22 gauge shielded twisted pair wire to connect the Transceiver (Terminals A+ & B-) to the LON
network. Must be Echelon approved cable.
ORDERING INFORMATION
FRONTIER 2.0 GATEWAY TRANSCEIVERS
MOD9200
INSTALLATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MOD9200BNT BACnet MSTP network transceiver
MOD9200D Modbus network transceiver
MOD9200LON-A Up to 30 wireless wall temp sensors with setpoint adjustments and/or push button override switches, up to 6
humidity sensors, up to 50 wireless digital outputs & up to 50 wireless analog out.
MOD9200LON-B Up to 50 wireless temperature only sensors (50 wall, duct or immersion types), up to 50 wireless digital
outputs & up to 50 wireless analog out.
MOD9200LON-C Up to 50 wireless sensors (up to 50 temperature points and up to 50 humidity points), up to 50 wireless digital outputs & up to 50 wireless analog out.
MOD9200LON-D
Up to 50 wireless devices (40 0-10VDC point types, 40 discrete inputs, 10 temperature,10 humidity point
types), up to 50 wireless digital outputs & up to 50 wireless analog out.
MOD9200LON-E Up to 50 wireless sensors/transmitters (26 temperature points, 26 setpoint adjustments, 26 push button
override switches, 12 CO2 PPM inputs, 6 humidity points, 4 digital status inputs), up to 50 wireless digital outputs & up to 50 wireless analog out.
MOD9200LON-F
Up to 50 wireless sensors (up 40 temperature points, up to 20 humidity points & 40 discrete inputs), up to 50
wireless digital outputs & up to 50 wireless analog out.
CAUTION: Sensors, Repeaters and receivers should NOT be installed in the following areas: - Inside metal enclosure or panel - Inside or immediately next to elevator shaft or elevator banks - In front of or immediately next to large trees or a large body of water Transmission distance and performance will be drastically reduced.
CAUTION:
Do not use this product in any safety related applications where human life may be affected.
March 2014

828. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 776fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS ANALOG AND DIGITAL RECEIVERS
RM2402D AND RM2432D
Supply Voltage 24 VAC 60 HZ or 24 VDC
Supply Current 300 mA maximum
Frequency 902-928 MHz
Analog Output
RM2432 4x - 0-10 VDC or 0-5 VDC Minimum
controller input resistance should
be greater than 20KΩ
Digital Output
RM2402 2x - Pilot duty relay contact closure
Contact rating - 1 A at 24VAC maximum
2x - Pilot duty relay contact closure
Contact rating - 1 A at 24VAC maximum
RM2432 4x - Pilot duty relay contact closure
Contact rating - 1 A at 24VAC maximum
Low Battery
1x - Pilot duty relay contact closure
Contact rating - 1 A at 24VAC maximum
Receiver Sensitivity
-110 dBm
Operating Temperature -40° to 160°F (-40° to 71°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions (2432) 8.8"H x 4.7"W x 2.25"D
(22.35 x 11.93 x 5.58 cm)
Weight 1.2 lb (0.54 kg)
Approvals FCC certified
Warranty 1 year
8.8" (22.35)
4.7" (11.93)
RM2432
in
(cm)
3.5"
8.25"
DESCRIPTION
The RM2402D and RM2432D paired with other Frontier
2.0 sensors and controls can be used to transmit remote
sensor readings, status/alarm indications and control signals wirelessly
. It is compatible with any control systems or DDC
panels that accept 0-10 VDC, 0-5 VDC inputs and dry contact inputs
. Up to eight (8) separate wireless sensor transmitters
can be used with one RM2432D. Two digital transmitters can
be used with one RM2402D.
A Data-Link LED is used to confirm the receiver has received
the data transmission. This eliminates the need for special
wireless installation equipment or tools and allows for quick installation
.
FEATURES
• Up to 4 analog outputs (0-10 VDC or 0-5 VDC field
selectable) and 4 digital outputs (relay contact)
(RM2432D only)
• Up to 2 digital outputs (RM2402 only)
• Mesh Network
• Real time sensor status indications
• Individual low battery and lost sensor alarm
indications (RM2432D only)
• Common alarm relay output for external indication
• Adjustable digital capture time (up to 4 hours) for
application such as temporary occupancy
• Reliable Spread Spectrum technology
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
RM2432D
4.7" (11.93)
7.3" (18.54)
RM2402
in
(cm)

3.5
6.75
DIMENSIONS
RM2432D
March 2014

829. fi 777NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Configuration
The RM2432 Receiver can be configured to accept inputs from up to 8 wireless sensors. Refer to the RM2432D Configuration
Manual for instruction.
Installation

Mount the RM2402/RM2432 Receiver as close to the controller as possible using four #8 screws
.
Select 0-10VDC or 0-5VDC output b
y moving the J4 jumper (RM2432 only)
.
Using the
RM2402/RM2432 configuration information, connect the analog and digital outputs to the appropriate control input
terminals on the controller using 20 AWG wire
. The controller input connecting to the RM2432 should have a minimum analog
input resistance of 20K Ω.
Note:
Always connect the Low Battery (or Lost Sensor) relay contact output to the appropriate alarm input on the
controller. (RM2432D)
Connect 24 VAC 60 Hz or 24 VDC to the input terminals using 20 AWG wire
. Check all connections before applying power to the
unit.
Wireless Sensor Status Indications
The status of the sensors assigned to the outputs of the RM2402/RM2432D are displayed by 8 for (RM2432) 2 for (RM2402) LEDs on the top of the plug-in status module board as shown:
- Sensor Out (Lost) = Off
- Sensor In (Normal) = On
- Battery Low (Alarm) = Blink
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS ANALOG AND DIGITAL RECEIVERS
RM2402D AND RM2432D
INSTALLATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RM2402D Output receiver with two (2) digital outputs (relay contacts)
RM2402D-24DC Same as RM2402D except 24 VDC power
RM2402DE Same as RM2402D except in NEMA4 enclosure
RM2402DE-24DC Same as RM2402DE except 24 VDC power
RM2432D Output receiver with four (4) analog output (0-10 VDC or 0-5 VDC selectable)
and four (4) digital outputs (relay contacts)
RM2432D-24DC Same as RM2432D except 24 VDC power
RM2432DE Same as RM2432D except in NEMA4 enclosure
RM2432DE-24DC Same as RM2432DE except 24 VDC power
CK2432-K Programming Set-Up Cable
CAUTION:
Sensors, Repeaters and receivers should NOT be installed in the following areas:
- Inside metal enclosure or panel
- Inside or immediately next to elevator shaft or elevator banks
- In front of or immediately next to large trees or a large body of water
Transmission distance and performance will be drastically reduced.
CAUTION:
Do not use this product in any safety related applications where human life may be affected.
CAUTION:
Observe polarity when connecting analog outputs to the controller inputs.
March 2014

830. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 778fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
FRONTIER 2.0 SPREAD SPECTRUM REPEATER
RR2552
Supply Voltage 24 VAC 60 Hz
Battery Lithium 3.0V 1400 mAh (Duracell
DL123A) *Use only for testing
Frequency 902-928 MHz
Transmission Power 11 dBm
Range 1 mile (line-of-sight)
Indoor 200 to 500 ft
Receiver Sensitivity -110 dBm
Operating Temperature -30° to 160°F (-34° to 71°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 7.3"H x 4.7"W x 2.25"D
(18.5 x 11.9 x 5.7 cm)
Weight 1.2 lb (0.54 kg)
Approvals FCC certified
Warranty 1 year
Network ID
Selector
Data Link LED
Active LED
Power LED Antenna
4.7"
(11.9)
7.3" (18.5)
in
(cm)
6.75"
3.5"
DESCRIPTION
The Frontier 2.0 RR2552 signal repeater utilizes reliable
Spread Spectrum Radio technology. It can be easily installed
in min
utes to increase the transmission distance between
wireless sensors and the receivers
. Multiple repeaters can be
used to e
xtend the transmission distance to thousands of feet
inside any commercial and industrial buildings
.
FEATURES
• For wireless sensor and wireless control applications
• Receives wireless sensor/relay information and
outputs a corresponding signal to any DDC controller/
panel
• Real time sensor status indications
REPEATER NETWORK ID DIP SWITCH SETTING DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
SETTING THE REPEATER NETWORK ID
The repeater must have the same Network ID as the receiver
(1 to 64). The repeater Network ID is field programmable
using the Network ID Selector Switch to add numbers to the Base Network ID of "1
."
When all (6) switches are set to the top "OFF" the Network ID is set to "1
." To set a different Network ID depress the
appropriate DIP Switch. Each switch adds a number to the
Base Network ID of 1.
For example, to set the Network ID to "2", depress the "+1"
switch to "ON" which adds "1" to the Base ID of "1."
To set the Network ID to "3", set the "+1" switch to "OFF" and the "+2" switch to "ON" which adds "2" to the Base ID of "1" equaling "3
." See table below for switch positions.
Figure 1
RR2552
March 2014

831. fi 779NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Determining Repeater Location:
To select the proper repeater location, first install and power the receiver or transceiver. The receiver will have a Network ID
assigned to it during initial programming. The repeater must have the same Network ID as the receiver or transceiver. Set the
Netw
ork ID on the repeater using the Network ID DIP Switch
.
The battery operated Test Mode is intended to be used only during the initial installation to determine the optimum location for a
repeater in the system prior to wiring 24 VAC to the repeater. To operate the unit in Test Mode, move the jumper (J1 located near
the battery terminals on the PWB) from 24 VAC to Battery. Install (2) batteries - Type 3.0V LiMNO2 1400 mAH (Duracell DL123A).
The repeater is no
w functional and can be moved to different locations to determine optimal system performance
.
While the repeater is attempting to connect to the receiver, the Data LED will blink rapidly. Once a connection has been
estab
lished, the Data-Link LED will blink once to indicate the data transmission has been received and transmitted successfully
.
The Activ
e LED will blink once every second to indicate that the repeater is functional
.
A signal repeater can be installed 200 to 500 feet from a receiver as needed to improve transmission distance/reliability between
sensors and the receiver.
Performance of the device is generally better when the repeater is installed elevated from the ground as much as possible.
Mount the RR2552 to the wall using four #10 screws.
Check to see that the Test Mode Jumper (J1) has been moved from " Battery" to "24 VAC."
Connect 24 V 60 Hz to the power input terminals using 16-20 AWG wire.
FRONTIER 2.0 SPREAD SPECTRUM REPEATER
RR2552
INSTALLATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RR2552B Two way repeater
RR2552BE Two way reapeater in NEMA4 enclosure
CAUTION:
Sensors, Repeaters and receivers should NOT be installed in the following areas:
- Inside metal enclosure or panel
- Inside or immediately next to elevator shaft or elevator banks
- In front of or immediately next to large trees or a large body of water
Transmission distance and performance will be drastically reduced.
CAUTION:
Do not use this product in any safety related applications where human life may be affected.
CAUTION:
For long term operation the repeater requires 24 VAC. The repeater will function for only 4 to 6 hours in "Test
Mode" on a set of batteries. Observe polarity when connecting analog outputs to the controller inputs.
March 2014

832. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 780fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS DIGITAL INPUT MODULES
RT2602, RT2620
Supply Voltage 24 VAC 60 Hz (A model only)
Battery Lithium 3.0V 1400 mAh (Duracell
DL123A)
Supply Current 500mA
Frequency 923.58 MHz
Digital Inputs
RT2602 2 dry contacts
RT2620 4 dry contacts
Transmission Power 11 dBm
Range 1 mile (line-of-sight)
Indoor 200 to 500 ft
Operating Temperature 15° to 125°F (9° to 51°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 7.3"H x 4.7"W x 2.25"D
(18.5 x 11.9 x 5.7 cm)
Weight 1.2 lb (0.54 kg)
Approvals FCC certified
Warranty 1 year
4.7''
(11.9)
7.3'' (18.5)

*
Digital Input 1
Digital Input 2
Digital Input 3
Digital Input 4
24 VAC
Input Voltage
Selection Jumper
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The Frontier 2.0 RT2602 and RT2620 wireless remote digital
input modules accept a v
ariety of digital sensor/control inputs
and transmits wirelessly to Frontier 2
.0 receivers. They can
be used for remote alarm/status indications and wireless on/
off control applications. Up to 4 dry contact inputs can be
monitored.
A Data-Link LED is used to confirm the receiver has received
the data transmission. This eliminates the need for special
wireless installation equipment or tools and allows for quick installation
.
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
RT2620
FEATURES
• Batter
sensor input modules
• Up to 4 digital inputs (relay contact)
• No calibration required
• Mesh Network - easy to install and relocate sensors
without additional wireless installation tools
• Sensor Data-Link LED confirms connection with Fr
ontier 2.0 receivers
• Long battery life (approximately 4 to 5 years)
• Low battery LED + remote low battery alarm
notification
• Optional 24VAC power (RT2620A)
• Reliable Spread Spectrum technology
RT2620A
March 2014

833. fi 781NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Wireless digital transmitters should be installed within 200 to 500 feet of the receiver. RR2552 signal repeaters can be installed as
needed to increase tr
ansmission distance between sensors and receivers
.
Sensor Location:
T
o select the proper sensor location, first install and power the receiver
. Observing polarity, insert the battery into the sensor to
activate it (for RT2620A, move the voltage selection jumper to battery operation before inserting the battery). The mesh networked
Frontier 2.0 system does not require any additional wireless equipment to determine the proper location of the sensors.
While the sensor is attempting to connect to the receiver, the Data-Link LED will blink rapidly 8-10 times every 10 seconds. Once
a connection has been estab
lished the Data-Link LED will blink once to indicate the data transmission has been received
successfully
. The Data-Link LED will continue to blink once for every data transmission. The data transmission rate is programmed
into the sensor (normally 1 minute intervals). To manually initiate a data transmission, press the push button switch located by
the negative terminal of the battery.
Installation: Once the location has been deter
mined, mount the RT2602/RT2620 remote transmitter on a wall using four #8 screws.
Determine if the RT2602/RT2620 remote transmitter will be powered by 24 VAC or by batteries on a permanent basis.
For 24 VAC Operation (RT2620A only):
If the device is to be powered by 24 VAC, move the voltage selection jumper to 24 VAC position and connect 24 V 60 Hz to the input terminals using 18-20 AWG wire
.
For Battery Operation:
If the device is to be powered using the 3.0 volt batteries – remove the voltage selection jumper and reposition it for battery
operation (RT2620A only).
NOTE:
For RT2620A, the device is shipped with the voltage selection jumper installed in the 24 VAC position. For proper operation it is important to use the correct type of battery
. Lithium 3.0V 1400 mAh (Duracell DL123A) batteries.
Installing the batter
y or applying 24 VAC (RT2620A only) will activate the transmitter again
.
Sensor Inputs: Wire the sensor inputs to the appropr
iate terminals using 18 AWG wire. Record the sensor location on the wiring label located
inside the cover.
ORDERING INFORMATION
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS DIGITAL INPUT MODULES
RT2602, RT2620
INSTALLATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
R
T2602B
Battery powered device with 2 digital inputs
RT2620A Battery powered or 24 VAC powered (field selectable) device with four (4) digital sensor inputs
RT2620B Battery powered only device with (4) digital sensor inputs
CAUTION:
Sensors, Repeaters and receivers should NOT be installed in the following areas: - Inside metal enclosure or panel - Inside or immediately next to elevator shaft or elevator banks - In front of or immediately next to large trees or a large body of water Transmission distance and performance will be drastically reduced.
CAUTION:
Do not use this product in any safety related applications where human life may be affected.
March 2014

834. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 782fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS UNIVERSAL INPUT TRANSMITTER MODULE
RT2630 SERIES
Supply Voltage 24 VAC 60 Hz or 24 VDC
Supply Current 300 mA
Battery Lithium 3.0V 1400 mAh (Duracell
DL123A)
Frequency 923.58 MHz
Analog Input 12 bit resolution
RT2630A 4x - resistance inputs (20KΩ)
RT2630B 4x - voltage inputs (0-10VDC)
RT2630C 4x - current inputs (0-20 mA)
Digital Inputs 4x - dry contacts
Transmission Power 11 dBm
Range
1 mile (line-of-sight)
Indoor 200 to 500 ft
Operating Temperature 15° to 125°F (-9° to 51°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 7.3"H x 4.7"W x 2.25"D
(18.5 x 11.9 x 5.7 cm)
Weight 1.2 lb (0.54 kg)
Approvals FCC certified
Warranty 1 year
Input Voltage Source
7.3” (18.54)
4.7”
(11.93)
Dig In 4
Dig In 3
Dig In 2
Dig In 1
DIGITAL IN
Volt In 4
Volt In 3
Volt In 2
Volt In 1
ANALOG IN
PWR
PWR
24 VAC
BATT
- +
DL123A
6.75”
3.5”
DESCRIPTION
The Frontier 2.0 RT2630 wireless remote analog and digital
input module accepts a v
ariety of analog and digital sensor/
control inputs and transmits wirelessly to Frontier 2
.0
receivers. It can be used for remote alarm/status indications
and wireless on/off control applications. Up to 4 analog input
and 4 dr
y contact inputs can be monitored
.
A Data-Link LED is used to confirm the receiver has received
the data transmission. This eliminates the need for special
wireless installation equipment or tools and allows for quick
installation.
FEATURES
• Battery powered (battery included) or 24 VAC powered
remote wireless sensor input modules
• Up to 4 analog inputs (20K , 0-10VDC and 0-20mA
types) and 4 digital inputs (relay contact)
• No calibration required
• Mesh Network - easy to install and relocate sensors
without additional wireless installation tools
• Sensor Data-Link LED confirms connection with Fr
ontier 2.0 receivers
• Long battery life (approxiamately 4 to 5 years)
• Low battery LED + remote low battery alarm
notification
• Optional 24VAC or 24VDC power
• Reliable Spread Spectrum technology
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
RT2630
in
(cm)
March 2014

835.  4Re 783NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Wireless digital transmitters should be installed within 200 to 500 feet of the receiver. RR2552 signal repeaters can be installed
as needed to increase tr
ansmission distance between sensors and receivers
.
Sensor Location:
T
o select the proper sensor location, first install and power the receiver
. Observing polarity, insert the battery into the sensor
to activate it (for battery operation, move the voltage selection jumper to battery mode before inserting the battery). The mesh
networked Frontier 2.0 system does not require any additional wireless equipment to determine the proper location of the
sensors.
While the sensor is attempting to connect to the receiver, the Data-Link LED will blink rapidly 8-10 times every 10 seconds.
Once a connection has been estab
lished the Data-Link LED will blink once to indicate the data transmission has been
received successfully
. The Data-Link LED will continue to blink once for every data transmission. The data transmission rate is
programmed into the sensor (normally 1 minute intervals). To manually initiate a data transmission, press the push button switch
located by the negative terminal of the battery. Once the location has been determined, mount the RT2630 remote transmitter on
a wall using four #8 screws.
Determine if the RT2630 transmitter will be powered by 24 VAC/VDC or by batteries on a permanent basis.
For 24 V Operation:
If the device is to be powered by 24 V (AC or DC), connect 24 V to the input terminals using 18-20 AWG wire.
For Battery Operation:
If the device is to be powered using the optional DL123A batteries (included) – remove the voltage selection jumper and reposition it for battery operation
.
NOTE:
The device is shipped with the voltage selection jumper installed in the 24 V position. For proper operation it is important to use the correct type of battery. Lithium 3.0V 1400 mAh (Duracell DL123A) batteries. Installing the battery or applying 24 VAC will activate the transmitter.
Sensor Inputs:
Wire the sensor inputs to the appropriate terminals using 18 AWG wire
. Record the sensor location on the wiring label located
inside the cover. Attach the cover using the four screws.
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS UNIVERSAL INPUT TRANSMITTER MODULE
RT2630 SERIES
INSTALLATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
CAUTION: Sensors, repeaters and receivers should NOT be installed in the following areas:
- Inside metal enclosure or panel
- Inside or immediately next to elevator shaft or elevator banks
- In front of or immediately next to large trees or a large body of water
Transmission distance and performance will be drastically reduced.
CAUTION:
Do not use this product in any safety related applications where human life may be affected.
CAUTION:
Observe polarity when connecting analog outputs to controller inputs
RT2630  Input Module with 4 Digital Inputs and 4 Analog Inputs
A 4 Resistance inputs (20KΩ)
   B 4 Voltage inputs (0-10VDC)  
   C 4 Current inputs (0-20 mA)
     Power options
     DC  24VDC or battery
     AC 24VAC or battery
             
       
Example: RT2630-A-AC Input module with 4 digital inputs 
  and 4 resistance inputs (20KΩ), 24VAC or battery.
RT2630 A- - AC
March 2014

836. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 784fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS REMOTE TEMPERATURE SYSTEM
SST2630
Battery Lithium 3.0V 1400 mAh (Duracell
DL123A)
Frequency 923.58 MHz
Probe Length 2" (5 cm) , cable length 15 ft.
(4.5 meters)
Temperature Range
SST2630A 25° to 125°F (-3 to 51°C)
SST2630B 0° to 200°F (-17 to 93°C)
SST2630C -40° to 160°F (-40 to 71°C)
Accuracy ±1°F
Resolution 12 Bit
Transmission Power 11 dBm
Range 1 mile (line-of-sight)
Indoor 200 to 500 ft
Operating Temperature 0° to 125°F (-17 to 51°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 1.75"H x 3.12"W x 5.75"D
(4.4 x 7.9 x 14.6 cm)
Weight 1.2 lb (0.54 kg)
Approvals FCC certified
Warranty 1 year
3/16
Dia (4)
1.75
(4.44)
3.12
(7.92)
5.75
(14.6)
5.25
2.25
(13.3)
(5.7)
DESCRIPTION
The Frontier 2.0 SST2630 wireless remote sensor is
encapsulated in a 0.25" OD 304 stainless steel probe. The
sensor is used typically for a single point of temperature
measurement in piping or ductwork.
A Data-Link LED is used to confirm the receiver has received
the data transmission. This eliminates the need for special
wireless installation equipment or tools and allows for quick installation
.
FEATURES
• Battery included
• No calibration required
• No wiring needed
• Easy to install
• Battery powered sensors
• Mesh Network - easy to install and relocate sensors
without additional wireless installation tools
• Sensor Data-Link LED confirms connection with
Fr
ontier 2.0 receivers
•
Long battery life (approximately 4 to 5 years)
• Low battery LED plus remote low battery alarm
notification
• Reliable Spread Spectrum technology
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
in
(cm)
SST2630
(Battery Included)

837. fi 785NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS REMOTE TEMPERATURE SYSTEM
SST2630
INSTALLATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
SST2630 Wireless Remote/Strap-on Temperature Sensor
Temperature ranges
A 25° to 125°F
B 0° to 200°F
C - 40° to 160°F
Enclosure
E NEMA4 enclosure (Optional)

Example: SST2630AE Sensors in NEMA4 enclosure with
25°F to 125°F range.
SST2630 A- - E
Wireless SST2630 sensors should be installed within 200 to 500 feet of the receiver. RR2552 signal repeaters can be installed as
needed to increase tr
ansmission distance between sensors and receivers
.
To select the proper sensor location, first install and power the receiver. Observing polarity, insert the battery into the sensor to
activate it. The mesh networked Frontier 2.0 system does not require any additional wireless equipment to determine the proper
location of the sensors.
While the sensor is attempting to connect to the receiver, the Data-Link LED will blink rapidly 8-10 times every 10 seconds.
Once a connection has been estab
lished, the Data-Link LED will blink once to indicate the data transmission has been received
successfully
. The Data-Link LED will continue to blink once for every data transmission. The data transmission rate is programmed
into the sensor (normally 1 minute intervals). To manually initiate a data transmission press the push button switch located by the
negative terminal of the battery.
The sensor probe should be mounted under any insulation in direct contact with the pipe using metal pipe straps. For proper
measurement of temperature, thermal conductive compound should be used in between the sensor probe and the pipe. The
installation should be wrapped with insulation to reduce the effect of ambient air.
The plastic housing of the sensor can either be mounted on the pipe with metal pipe strap or wall mounted.
Locate and record the sensor TXID numbers located on a label on the inside of the enclosure cover. This information will be
needed later to set up the receiver.
The sensor has a Low Battery LED that will start to blink continuously when the battery voltage is low. A low battery signal is also
sent to the receiver for remote indication that the battery should be replaced. If the battery is not replaced in approximately 2
months the battery voltage will become so low that the Low Battery and Data-Link LEDs will not blink. Replace the battery and the
Data-Link LED will start blinking while the sensor is re-establishing communications with the receiver.
Then attach the cover of the sensor by installing the four screws.
CAUTION:
Sensors, repeaters and receivers should NOT be installed in the following areas:
- Inside metal enclosure or panel
- Inside or immediately next to elevator shaft or elevator banks
- In front of or immediately next to large trees or a large body of water
Transmission distance and performance will be drastically reduced.
CAUTION:
Do not use this product in any safety related applications where human life may be affected.

838. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 786fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
DT2630
Battery Lithium 3.0V 1400 mAh
(Duracell DL123A)
Frequency 923.58 MHz
Probe Length 4", 6", 8", 12", 18"
(10.6, 15.24, 20.32, 30.48 cm)
Temperature Range
DT2630A 25° to 150°F, (-3° to 65°C)
DT2630B -40° to 160°F (-40° to 71°C)
Accuracy ±1°F
Resolution 12 Bit
Transmission Power 11 dBm
Range 1 mile (line-of-sight)
Indoor 200 to 500 ft
Operating Temperature -40° to 160°F (-40° to 71°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 1.75"H x 3"W x 5"D, Probe Ø 0.25"
(4.44 x 7.92 x 14.6 cm),
(Ø 0.63 cm)
Weight 1.2 lb (0.54 kg)
Approvals FCC certified
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The DT2630 is a battery operated spread spectrum wireless
duct temperature sensor. The sensor is encapsulated in a
0.25" OD 304 stainless steel probe with various probe lengths
(4", 6", 8", 12" & 18") available. Each sensor is configured
from the f
actory with a unique transmitter ID
. Frontier 2.0
wireless sensors utilize Spread Spectrum Radio technology.
A Data-Link LED is used to confirm the receiver has received
the data transmission. This eliminates the need for special
wireless installation equipment or tools and allows for quick installation
.
FEATURES
• Batter •
No calibration required
• No wiring needed
• Easy to install
• Various probe lengths
• Battery powered sensors
• Mesh Network - easy to install and relocate sensors
without additional wireless installation tools
• Sensor Data-Link LED confirms connection with Fr
ontier 2.0 receivers
• Long battery life (approximately 4 to 5 years) with
standard models
• Low battery LED + remote low battery alarm
notification
• Reliable Spread Spectrum technology
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
DT2630
March 2014

839. fi 787NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Wireless duct sensors should be installed within 200 to 500 feet of the receiver. RR2552 signal repeaters can be installed as to
increase tr
ansmission distance between sensors and receivers
.
To select the proper sensor location, first install and power the receiver. Observing polarity, insert the battery into the sensor to
activate it. The mesh networked Frontier 2.0 system does not require any additional wireless equipment to determine the proper
location of the sensors.
While the sensor is attempting to connect to the receiver, the Data-Link LED will blink rapidly 8-10 times every 10 seconds.
Once a connection has been estab
lished, the Data-Link LED will blink once to indicate the data transmission has been received
successfully
. The Data-Link LED will continue to blink once for every data transmission. The data transmission rate is programmed
into the sensor (normally 1 minute intervals). To manually initiate a data transmission press the push button switch located by the
negative terminal of the battery.
Install the duct sensor through a 1" opening in the side of the duct. Since the sensor is located at the tip of the probe,
consideration should be made to place the tip of the probe in the middle of the airflow. Mount the plastic housing of the sensor
onto the ductw
ork using four (4) sheet metal screws
. Locate the sensor at a straight section of the duct and away from heating,
cooling or humidifying elements.
Locate and record the duct sensor TXID numbers located on a label on the inside of the enclosure cover. This information will be
needed when setting up the receiver.
The sensor has a Low Battery LED that will start to blink continuously when the battery voltage is low. A low battery signal is also
sent to the receiver for remote indication that the battery should be replaced. If the battery is not replaced in approximately 2
months the battery voltage will become so low that the Low Battery and Data-Link LEDs will not blink. Replace the battery and the
Data-Link LED will start blinking while the sensor is re-establishing communications with the receiver. Attach the cover of the duct
sensor by installing the four screws to complete the installation.
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
DT2630
ORDERING INFORMATION
DT2630 Wireless Duct Temperature Sensor
Temperature ranges
A 25° to 150°F
B -40° to 160°F
Enclosure
Standard black case
E NEMA4 enclosure
Probe lengths
-04 4" probe
-06 6" probe
-08 8" probe
-12 12" probe
-18 18" probe

Example: DT2630A-04 Duct temperature sensor with
4" probe 25° to 150°F .
DT2630 -04A- --
CAUTION:
Sensors, repeaters and receivers should NOT be installed in the following areas:
- Inside metal enclosure or panel
- Inside or immediately next to elevator shaft or elevator banks
- In front of or immediately next to large trees or a large body of water
Transmission distance and performance will be drastically reduced.
CAUTION:
Do not use this product in any safety related applications where human life may be affected.
March 2014
INSTALLATION

840. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 788fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE WALL SENSOR
WH2630
Battery Lithium 3.0V 1400 mAh (Duracell
DL123A)
Frequency 923.58 MHz
Accuracy
WH2630A Humidity ±3% RH (10 to 90% RH)
WH2630B Temperature ±1°F, Humidity ±3%
RH (10 to 90% RH)
Humidity Range 0 to 100% RH
Temperature Range 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
Transmission Power 11 dBm
Range 1 mile (line-of-sight)
Indoor 200 to 500 ft
Operating Temperature 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 100% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 4.50"H x 2.75"W x 1.50"D
(11.4 x 6.9 x 3.8 cm)
Weight 0.2 lb (0.09 kg)
Approvals FCC certified
Warranty 1 year
1.50'' (3.8)
2.75'' (6.9)
4.50'' (11.4)
DESCRIPTION
The Frontier 2.0 WH2630 wireless humidity and temperature
sensors are prog
rammed with unique transmitter IDs so
that individual room information can be identified
. No field
prog
ramming is required
. The sensors are available with 3%
accuracy.
A Data-Link LED is used to confirm the receiver has received
the data transmission. This eliminates the need for special
wireless installation equipment or tools and allows for quick installation
.
FEATURES
• Battery included
• Advanced RH sensor technology
• No calibration required
• Excellent long term stability, response time and reset rate
• Battery powered sensors
• Mesh Network - easy to install and relocate sensors
without additional wireless installation tools
• Sensor Data-Link LED confirms connection with Frontier
2.0 receivers
• Long battery life (approximately 3 years with one battery)
• Low battery LED plus remote low battery alarm
notification
• Reliable Spread Spectrum technology
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
WH2630
in
(cm)
(Battery Included)
March 2014

841. fi 789NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Wireless wall sensors should be installed within 200 to 500 feet of the receiver. RR2552 signal repeaters can be installed as
needed to increase tr
ansmission distance between sensors and receivers
.
To select the proper sensor location, first install and power the receiver. Observing polarity, insert the battery into the sensor to
activate it. The mesh networked Frontier 2.0 system does not require any additional wireless equipment to determine the proper
location of the sensors.
While the sensor is attempting to connect to the receiver, the Data-Link LED will blink rapidly 8-10 times every 10 seconds.
Once a connection has been estab
lished, the Data-Link LED will blink once to indicate the data transmission has been received
successfully
. The Data-Link LED will continue to blink once for every data transmission. The data transmission rate is programmed
into the sensor (normally 1 minute intervals). To manually initiate a data transmission press the push button switch located by the
negative terminal of the battery.
Once the sensor location has been determined, mount the sub base on an inside wall approximately 4.5 ft. from the floor (or in
the specified location) to allo
w exposure to the average zone temperature using two #8 screws, Velcro™ or double-sided tape
.
Locate and record the wall sensor ID Number located on a label on the back of the sub base prior to mounting.
Do not mount the sensors on an outside wall, on a wall containing water pipes or near air ducts. Avoid locations that are exposed
to discharge air from registers or radiation from lights, appliances, or the sun.
Attach the wall sensor to the sub base by tightening the two locking screws at the bottom of the sub base. This information will be
needed later to set up the receiver.
NOTE: The locking screw must be installed for a secure installation. The screws are turned counter-clockwise to secure
the cover.
The sensor has a Low Battery LED that will start to blink continuously when the battery voltage is low. A low battery signal is also
sent to the receiver for remote indication that the battery should be replaced. If the battery is not replaced in approximately 2
months the battery voltage will become so low that the Low Battery and Data-Link LEDs will not blink. Replace the battery and the
Data-Link LED will start blinking while the sensor is re-establishing communications with the receiver.
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE WALL SENSOR
WH2630
INSTALLATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
CAUTION:
Sensors, repeaters and receivers should NOT be installed in the following areas:
- Inside metal enclosure or panel
- Inside or immediately next to elevator shaft or elevator banks
- In front of or immediately next to large trees or a large body of water
Transmission distance and performance will be drastically reduced.
CAUTION:
Do not use this product in any safety related applications where human life may be affected.
March 2014
MODEL DESCRIPTION
WH2630A Wireless wall humidity (3%) sensor
WH2630B Wireless wall humidity (3%) and temperature sensor

842. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 790fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS TEMPERATURE WALL SENSOR
WT2630
Battery Lithium 3.0V 1400 mAh (Duracell
DL123A)
Frequency 923.58 MHz
Temperature Range 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
Setpoint Label Warm - cool or 65° to 85°F
Accuracy ±1°F
Resolution 12 Bit
Transmission Power 11 dBm
Range 1 mile (line-of-sight)
Indoor 200 to 500 ft
Operating Temperature 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 100% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 4.50"H x 2.75"W x 1.50"D
(11.4 x 6.9 x 3.8 cm)
Weight 0.2 lb (0.09 kg)
Approvals FCC certified
Warranty 1 year

1.50''
(3.8)
2.75''
(6.9)
4.50''
(11.4)
COOL WARM
DESCRIPTION
The Frontier 2.0 WT2630 wireless temperature sensors are
programmed with unique transmitter IDs so that individual
room information can be identified. No field programming
required.
The override button (B & C models only) located on the side
of the sensor housing can be assigned to a digital output in the Frontier 2
.0 family of receivers for occupancy override or
similar applications.
The setpoint adjustment (B Model only) can be assigned to an analog output in a F
rontier 2.0 receiver. The output will
then be used by a controller for a variety of control setpoint ranges (user defined) and other applications such as dimming of light and window blinds control
.
A Data-Link LED is used to confirm the receiver has received
the data transmission. This eliminates the need for special
wireless installation equipment or tools and allows for quick installation
.
FEATURES
• Batter
• No calibration required
• No wiring needed
• Flexible user defined set point range
• Set point slider can be used for a variety of other
applications
• Battery powered sensors
• Mesh Network - easy to install and relocate sensors
without additional wireless installation tools
• Sensor Data-Link LED confirms connection with Fr
ontier 2.0 receivers
• Long battery life (approximately 4 to 5 years)
• Low battery LED + remote low battery alarm
notification
• Reliable Spread Spectrum technology
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
WT2630
(Battery Included)
in
(cm)
March 2014

843. fi 791NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Wireless wall sensors should be installed within 200 to 500 feet of the receiver. RR2552 signal repeaters can be installed as to
increase tr
ansmission distance between sensors and receivers
.
To select the proper sensor location, first install and power the receiver. Observing polarity insert the battery into the sensor to
activate it. The mesh networked Frontier 2.0 system does not require any additional wireless equipment to determine the proper
location of the sensors.
While the sensor is attempting to connect to the receiver, the Data-Link LED will blink rapidly 8-10 times every 10 seconds.
Once a connection has been estab
lished the Data-Link LED will blink once to indicate the data transmission has been received
successfully
.
The Data-Link LED will continue to blink once for every data transmission The data transmission rate is programmed
into the sensor (normally 1 minute intervals). To manually initiate a data transmission, press the push button switch located by the
negative terminal of the battery.
Once the sensor location has been determined, mount the sub base on an inside wall approximately 4.5 ft. from the floor (or in
the specified location) to allo
w exposure to the average zone temperature using two #8 screws, Velcro™ or double sided tape
.
Locate and record the wall sensor ID Number located on a label on the back of the sub base prior to mounting.
Do not mount the sensors on an outside wall, on a wall containing water pipes or near air ducts. Avoid locations that are exposed
to discharge air from registers or radiation from lights, appliances, or the sun.
Attach the wall sensor to the sub base by tightening the two locking screws at the bottom of the sub base. This information will be
needed later to set up the receiver.
NOTE: The locking screw must be installed for a secure installation. The screws are turned counter-clockwise to
secure the cover.
The sensor has a Low Battery LED that will start to blink continuously when the battery voltage is low. A low battery signal is also
sent to the receiver for remote indication that the battery should be replaced. If the battery is not replaced in approximately 2
months the battery voltage will become so low that the Low Battery and Data-Link LEDs will not blink. Replace the battery and the
Data-Link LED will start blinking while the sensor is re-establishing communications with the receiver.
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS TEMPERATURE WALL SENSOR
WT2630
INSTALLATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
WT2630A Wall sensor only
WT2630B Wall sensor with set point adjustment and override push button
WT2630C Wall sensor with override push button
CAUTION:
Sensors, repeaters and receivers should NOT be installed in the following areas:
- Inside metal enclosure or panel
- Inside or immediately next to elevator shaft or elevator banks
- In front of or immediately next to large trees or a large body of water
Transmission distance and performance will be drastically reduced.
CAUTION:
Do not use this product in any safety related applications where human life may be affected.
March 2014

844. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 792fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
418MHz
418MHz
900MHz
900MHz
900MHz
418MHz
418MHz
The Wi-MGR operates as part of a wireless mesh network.
WIRELESS SENSOR GATEWAY
WI-MGR
DESCRIPTION
The Wi-MGR is a wireless gateway designed for easy
integration with facility monitoring and management systems.
The con
venient wireless design helps reduce installation
costs associated with hard-wired sensors and systems
.
The Wi-MGR comes equipped with a 418 megahertz radio
receiver capable of receiving signals from select transmitters
sensing temperature, humidity, motion, power transmitters,
dry contact, analog (0-20mA), 0-5 VDC, and 0-10 VDC
signals
. Also included is a 900 megahertz receiver capable
of receiving signals from sensors and point repeaters. The
Wi-MGR integrates these signals to facilities monitoring systems in the form of SNMP, Modbus TCP/IP, Modbus RTU, and BACnet/IP
.
The Wi-MGR can receive signals within 100 feet (30.5m) in
open air space with the 418 MHz frequency and up to 1300 feet (396m) of open air space with the 900 MHz frequency
.
Repeaters are used to add additional distance betw
een the
Wi-MGR and the wireless sensors (transmitters)
.
FEATURES
• Wireless design
• Includes applicable receiver & antennas for indoor
open air transmission
• 418MHz antenna - receives transmissions up to 100 f
eet (30.5m)
• 900MHz antenna - receives transmissions up to 1300 f
eet (396m)
• Additional wired inputs and outputs provides
expanded functionality
• Ability to output to Modbus, BACnet, and SNMP
APPLICATION
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC. 50/60Hz
Supply Current 600mA @ 24VAC/VDC Maximum
Frequency 900MHz and 418MHz
Maximum Number of Wireless Modules
400 with repeaters; 150 without
repeaters
LED Indication
Network 2 Green Active & Speed
Status 1 Red LED
EIA-485 Status 2 Green Transmit & Receive
Communication Ports
Ethernet 10/100 BASE-T, RJ45 connector;
500VAC RMS isolation
EIA-232 DB9 female connector; 9600 baud;
No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
EIA-485 1200, 2400, 9600 or 19200 baud
(selectab
le); Parity: none, even or
odd, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
Protocol
TCP/IP, HTML, TFTP, SNMP Modbus
(EIA-485), Modbus TCP/IP UDP/IP, BACnet/IP, BACnet/MSTP, Terminal Emulation (EIA-232)
Operating Temperature
32° to 122°F(0° to 50°C )
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Mounting Desktop or rack (brackets included)
Dimensions 9.7”W x 4.8”D x 1.6”H (24.6 x 12.2 x
4.1 cm)
Weight 2.3 lbs(1.04 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
Wi-MGR
March 2014

845. fi 793NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Item
Antenna 418MHz
Antenna 900MHz
Relay 1
Relay 2
DI #1
DI #2
DI #3
DI #4
Power 24 VDC/VAC
Jack
Status
RS232 Po rt
RX TX RS485 LED
RS485 Termination switch
RS485 Po rt
RJ45 Ethern et port
Description
RP-SMA connector
RP-SMA connector
Relay output 1 terminal block (NC/NO/C)
Relay output 2 terminal block (NC/NO/C)
Digital input 1 (+ -)
Digital input 2 (+ -)
Digital input 3 (+ -)
Digital input 4 (+ -)
Power terminal block
Wall adapter connector
Status LED
DB9 female connector
Receive/Tr ansmit status LED
1 (unused); 2 100 ohm termination
EIA-485 circuit connector
10/100 BASE-T connector
ORDERING INFORMATION
WIRELESS SENSOR GATEWAY
WI-MGR
MODEL DESCRIPTION
WI-MGR Wireless Gateway, 418/900 MHz receiver, includes 24VDC power adapter
WI-TS Temperature sensor; 418 MHz wireless transmitter
WI-DIT Temperature sensor and digital input; 418 MHz wireless transmitter
WI-TH2 Temp/Humidity sensor; 418 MHz wireless transmitter
WI-LD Water Sensor; 418MHZ wireless transmitter (requires Wi-LD-SPOT or Wi-LD-25)
WI-LD-SPOT Spot detector for use with Wi-LD
WI-AS420 Analog input (0-20mA); 418 MHz wireless transmitter
WI-AS5 Analog input (0-5v); 418 MHz wireless transmitter
WI-AS10 Analog input (0-10v); 418 MHz wireless transmitter
WI-TS9 Temperature sensor; 900 MHz wireless transmitter
WI-THS9 Temp/Humidity sensor; 900 MHz wireless transmitter
WI-PR Point repeater, 418MHz Receiver, 900 MHz transmitter
March 2014
WIRING
Wi-MGR Physical connections Wi-MGR Physical connection Descriptions
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
BA/BS2-WT Room temperature battery transmitter, 418 MHz at 1 mW, (batteries included) 804
BA/BS2-WTH Room temperature and humidity battery transmitter, 418 MHz @ 1 mW,
(batteries included) 804
BA/RPT49-EZ 9-15 VDC power BAPI repeater for 418 MHz signals with repeat at 900 MHz 794
BA/WAI-05 0-5VDC Analog Input Transmitter, 418 MHz 796
BA/WAI-10 0-10VDC Analog Input Transmitter, 418 MHz 796
BA/WAI-420 4-20 mA Analog Input Transmitter, 418 MHz 796
BA/WDI Digital Input Transmitter, 418 MHz 796
BA/WT-D-4 Duct temperature probe, 418 MHz transmitter, 4" insertion probe, batteries included 798
BA/WT-D-8 Duct temperature probe, 418 MHz transmitter, 8" insertion probe, batteries included 798
BA/WT-I-4 Four-inch immersion temperature probe, 418 MHz transmitter, (batteries included) 800
BA/WT-O-BB OSA temperature probe, 418 MHz transmitter, batteries included 806
BA/WT-RPP-10-BB Remote stainless steel temperature probe, with 418 MHz transmitter and 10 feet
of plenum cable, batteries included 802
BA/WT-RPP-25-BB Remote stainless steel temperature probe, with 418 MHz transmitter and 25 feet
of plenum cable, batteries included 802
BA/WTH-D Duct temperature and humidity probe, 418 MHz transmitter, 6" insertion probe,
batteries included 798
BA/WTH-O-BB OSA temperature and humidity probe, 418 MHz transmitter, batteries included 806

846. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 794fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
WIRING
BAPI WIRELESS RECEIVER AND REPEATER
BA/RCV-EZ AND BA/RPT-EZ
Supply Voltage
RCV-418 17-30 VAC/VDC
RCV-900, RPT 9-15 VDC,
Supply Current
RCV-418 20 mA
RCV-900, RPT 150 mA
Frequency
RCV-418 418 MHz
RCV-900, RPT 900 MHz
Transmission Power 100 mW (repeater)
Range
RCV-418 100 ft
RCV-900, RPT 1000 ft
Receiver Sensitivity
RCV-418, RPT -106 dBm
RCV-900 -110 dBm
Operating Temperature 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Materials of Construction
ABS Plastic, UL94V-0
Dimensions 2.75"H x 4.8"W x 1.2"D
(7.0 x 12.0 x 3.0 cm)
Weight 0.5 lb (0.2 kg)
Approvals FCC ID#T4F16963N16964 (418 MHz
models only) FCC CFR par
t 15
.247
(900 MHz models)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI BA/RCV Wireless Receivers detect the radio
signals from sensor transmitters or BA/RPT repeaters and
send the value through a hard-wired RS485 bus to dedicated
output modules
. Each receiver can accommodate 127 output
modules, which come in a variety of output types including thermistor simulation (10K Ω type 2 or 3), 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, and solid-state switch
. The BA/RCV418 receives
signals directly from sensor transmitters at 418 MHz. The BA/
RCV900 receives signals only from repeaters at 900 MHz.
The BAPI BA/RPT Wireless Repeater detects all 418 MHz
sensor transmitter signals, and re-transmits the signal at 900 MHz to extend useable wireless distance to as far as 1000 feet
. These signals are received with a BA/RCV900 for
RS485 communication distribution to the output modules.
FEATURES
• Eliminates point wiring
• FCC license pre-approved
• Receivers accommodate 127 output modules each
• Receiver sensitivity -106 dBm minimum
• Built In error detection
• Repeater transmit power 100 mW
• 1000-foot repeater range (open air)
• Snap-track mounting
SPECIFICATIONS
BA/RCV900-EZ
OPERATION/APPLICATION
The receiver detects the wireless signal from one or more
transmitters, then outputs the value through an RS485
communication line to attached output modules selected
specifically for the input requirements
. Module addressing is
made simple b
y pushing a button on the output module and
transmitter at the same time, thus completing a permanent wireless address link between transmitter and output module.
BA/EZ RCV 418
Receiver
418 MHz
BA/EZ RO M
Output
1
BA/EZ COM
Output
127
BA/TEMP
Transmitter
BA/EZ RCV 900
Receiver
900 MHz
BA/EZ RO M
Output
1
BA/EZ COM
Output
127
BA/EZ RPT
Repeater
418 MHz
BA/TEMP
Transmitter
* The transmission range from repeater to receiver is 1000 feet.
March 2014

847. fi 795NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
BAPI WIRELESS RECEIVER AND REPEATER
BA/RCV-EZ AND BA/RPT-EZ
17-30 VAC/VDC
Power
Snap track
mount
418 MHZ
Antenna
Power
bus
SG
PG
Power
bus
RS485
Comm.
bus
RS485
Comm.
bus
Output
Typical
output moduleBA/RCV-418-EZ
418 MHZ Receiver
WIRING
INSTALLATION / MOUNTING
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS
BA/AOM-CONN Pluggable terminal block kit
VC350-12 Power supply 24 VAC to 12 VDC, 350 mA
MODEL DESCRIPTION
B
A/RCV418-EZ
BAPI receiver for 418 MHz transmitter signals to RS485
B
A/RCV900-EZ
BAPI receiver for RPT repeater 900 MHz signals to RS485
B
A/RCV900-EA-EZ
BAPI receiver for RPT repeater 900 MHz signals to RS485 with extendable antenna
BA/RPT49-EZ 9-15 VDC power BAPI repeater for 418 MHz signals with repeat at 900 MHz
418 MHZ
Antenna
9-15 VDC Power
900 MHZ
Antenna
Power
9-15 VDC
BA/RPT49-EZ
Repeater
9-15 VDC Power
900 MHZ
Antenna
Power
bus
SG PG
Power
bus
RS485
Comm.
bus
RS485
Comm.
bus
Output
Typical
output moduleBA/RCV-900-EZ
900 MHZ Receiver
Snap track
mount
Install horizontally at highest practical elevation. If installed in a metal enclosure, be sure the antenna is mounted outside
enclosure, preferably on the top. A plastic enclosure will enable the antenna to be located within. Keep the RS485 bus as short as
possible but definitely less then 4000 feet. Each PG terminal should be earth grounded. Shield is continuous through the Twisted
Shielded Pair and each module.
March 2014

848. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 796fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
WIRING
Battery Two AA 3.6V lithium batteries
(included)
Frequency 418 MHz
Transmission Power 1 mW
Range 100 ft
Update Interval 10-17 seconds (fixed)
Analog Input
BA/WAI-05 0-5VDC, Impedance > 30KΩ
BA/WAI-10 0-10VDC, Impedance > 50KΩ
BA/WAI-420 4-20 mA, Impedance = 100Ω
BA/WTS Any 10K Type 2 Thermistor, range
-40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C)
Digital Inputs
BA/WDI Dry contact, > 20 seconds
(< 10Ω closed, >250Ω open)
Operating Temperature 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH, (non-condensing)
Enclosure NEMA 4 (IP66)
Dimensions 5.0"H x 4.1"W x 2.5"D
(12.7 x 10.4 x 5.4 cm)
Weight 0.5 lb (0.22 kg)
Approvals FCC ID# T4F16963N16964
(418 MHz only)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 2 year
BAPI WIRELESS UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTERS
BA/WAI SERIES, BA/WDI, BA/WTS
DESCRIPTION
The BA/W Series Wireless Universal Input Transmitters are
designed to monitor 0-5VDC, 0-10VDC or 4-20 mA signals
and transmit that analog value to a receiver
. The Digital
Input version monitors any dry contact status input and transmits that On/Off status to the receiver
. The Thermistor
Temperature Input version takes any 10K Type 2 thermistor sensor and transmits it to any BAPI receiver
. All models
tr
ansmit their data every 10-17 seconds
. The units are battery
operated and only require wiring from the remote input sensor
.
FEATURES
• T •
0-5, 0-10 and 4-20mA Analog Input Models
• Digital Input (dry contact) Model
• Thermistor Temperature Input Model
• 100' open air range, 1,000' range with a Repeater
• Transmission Interval from 10-17 seconds
• Easy Two-Wire Termination and Easy Setup Mode
WIRING - FIGURES ARE ON NEXT PAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
BA/EZ RCV 418
Receiver
418 MHz
BA/EZ RO M
Output
1
BA/EZ COM
Output
127
BA/TEMP
Transmitter
BA/EZ RCV 900
Receiver
900 MHz
BA/EZ RO M
Output
1
BA/EZ COM
Output
127
BA/EZ RPT
Repeater
418 MHz
BA/TEMP
Transmitter
Battery Installation:
Battery supplied: Two-3.6 VDC Lithium batteries
(Figure 1) Install both batteries per the +/- indication on the battery holder board.
Note: Both batteries face the same way. (Unit will run on one battery if needed)
Input Sensor Wiring Description: Voltage: Wire the + signal to the + terminal on the battery board
.
(Figure 2) Wire the – signal to the – terminal on the battery board.
Current (sync): Wire the 4-20 mA current signal (-) from the sensor to + terminal on the battery board.
(Figure 3) Wire the – of the power supply feeding the sensor to the sensor to the – terminal on the battery board.
Wire the + of the power supply feeding the sensor to the + of the sensor.
Current (source): Wire the + signal to the + terminal on the battery board.
(Figure 4) Wire the – signal to the – terminal on the battery board.
Provide + power to sensor
Provide – power to sensor
Thermistor Sensor: Wire either lead to the + terminal of the battery board. (Non-Polar)
(Figure 5) Wire the other lead to the – terminal of the battery board. (Non-Polar)
Contact Input: Wire either lead to the + terminal of the battery board. (Non-Polar)
(Figure 6) Wire the other lead to the – terminal of the battery board. (Non-Polar)
* The transmission range from repeater to receiver is 1000 feet.
March 2014

849. fi 797NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
BAPI WIRELESS UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTERS
BA/WAI SERIES, BA/WDI, BA/WTS
APPLICATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
B
A/WAI-05
0-5VDC Analog Input Transmitter, 418 MHz
BA/WAI-10 0-10VDC Analog Input Transmitter, 418 MHz
BA/WAI-420 4-20 mA Analog Input Transmitter, 418 MHz
BA/WDI Digital Input Transmitter, 418 MHz
BA/WTS Thermistor Sensor Transmitter, 418 MHz
Fig. 1: Battery Installation Fig. 2a: 0-5V Transmitter TerminationFig. 2b: 0-10V Transmitter Termination
Fig. 3: 4-20 mA Loop Po wered Transmitter Termination Fig. 4: 4-20 mA 4-wire Transmitter Termination
Fig. 5: 10K-2 Thermistor Termination Fig. 6: Digital Input (DI) Termination
3.6 VDC
Lithium
Typical of 2
SIGNAL
OUT
SIGNAL
OUT
SIGNAL
OUT
SIGNAL
IN
SIGNAL
IN
SIGNAL
IN
SIGNAL
IN
SENSOR
IN
0-5V 0-10V
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
SEPARAT E
POWER
SUPPLY
BA/WAI-05
Battery & Termination Board
BA/WAI-10
Battery & Termination Board
BA/WAI-420 Battery & Termination Board BA/WAI-420 Battery & Termination Board
BA/WTS Battery & Termination Board BA/WDI Battery & Termination Board
TRANSISTOR OR CONTACT
SWITCH
Customer Provided
Voltage Transmitter
Customer Provided
Voltage Transmitter
Customer Provided
Switch/Contact
Customer Provided
10K-2 Thermistor
10K-2
NO-POLARITY
*Customer Provided *Customer Provided
Power Supply* Power Supply*
4-20 mA Loop
Transmitter*
4-20 mA
Transmitter*
March 2014

850. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 798fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
BAPI WIRELESS DUCT TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
BA/WT(H)-D
Battery Two AA 3.6 VDC lithium batteries
(included)
Frequency 418 MHz
Transmission Power 1 mW
Range 100 ft
Update Interval 10 seconds (fixed)
Humidity Accuracy ±2%, (5% to 95%)
Humidity Range 0 to 100% RH
Sensor Type
WT Temperature: 10K type 2
WTH Temperature: 10K type 2 Humidity
Capacitive
Temperature Range -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Temperature Accuracy ±0.36°F (±0.2°C)
Operating Temperature -40° to 212°F (-40° to 100°C)
Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing
Enclosure NEMA 4 (IP66)
Dimensions 4.1"H x 5.0"W x 2.5"D
(10.4 x 12.7 x 6.4 cm)
Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Approvals FCC ID# T4F16963N16964
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI wireless duct temperature and humidity
transmitters sense in-duct conditions with a battery operated
418 MHz RF transmitter
. The sensor/transmitter is mounted
in a NEMA 4, (IP66) enclosure with 4" or 8", stainless steel temperature duct probe or 6" temperature/RH probe and has an in-building range of 100’ (30
.5m). The battery has
an estimated eight-year life with transmission updates approximately every 10 seconds
. Other duct insertion probe
lengths are available.
FEATURES
• Wireless temperature and humidity sensing
• Eight-year battery life
• Built-in error detection
• Repeater available for 1000-foot range
• Available receiver with signal outputs of voltage,
current, or resistance
• NEMA 4 (IP66) enclosure
• Stainless steel temperature probe
• Sintered filter humidity probe
• Two-year warranty
SPECIFICATIONS
BA/WTH-D-4
OPERATION/APPLICATION
Temperature and humidity data is transmitted via 418 MHz RF to a receiver
. Minimum in-building range is 100 feet and
battery life is estimated to be eight years with high-capacity 3
.6V lithium batteries (at a 10-second transmit interval). Each
tr
ansmitter has a unique address and includes built-in error
detection
. Each variable sent by the transmitter is converted
by a BAPI Analog Output Module to a voltage, current, or resistance signal for input to a controller or monitor
. The unit
can also be set up to send low-battery information to the controller
.
BA/WT-D-4
BA/EZ RCV 418
Receiver
418 MHz
BA/EZ RO M
Output
1
BA/EZ COM
Output
127
BA/TEMP
Transmitter
BA/EZ RCV 900
Receiver
900 MHz
BA/EZ RO M
Output
1
BA/EZ COM
Output
127
BA/EZ RPT
Repeater
418 MHz
BA/TEMP
Transmitter
* The transmission range from repeater to receiver is 1000 feet.
March 2014
WIRING

851. fi 799NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
BAPI WIRELESS DUCT TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
BA/WT(H)-D
INSTALLATION / MOUNTING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
B
A/WT-D-4
Duct temperature probe, 418 MHz transmitter, 4" insertion probe, batteries included
BA/WT-D-8 Duct temperature probe, 418 MHz transmitter, 8" insertion probe, batteries included
BA/WTH-D Duct temperature and humidity probe, 418 MHz transmitter, 6" insertion probe, batteries included
DIMENSIONS
BA/WTH-D
BA/WT-D
Note: Batteries included
Install the probe horizontally on the duct. The enclosure should not be installed inside a metal duct. Installing the batteries starts
the wireless transmission immediately. Pushing the button on the transmitter and the button on the associated output module
simultaneously will confirm that the address link between the units is correct. This should be done one at a time to avoid cross-
addressing.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
BA/LI3620 AA lithium 3.6V battery, two required for each transmitter
BA/RCV418-EZ BAPI receiver for 418 MHz transmitter signals to RS485 794
BA/RCV900-EZ BAPI receiver for RPT repeater 900 MHz signals to RS485 794
BA/RPT49-EZ 9-15 VDC power BAPI repeater for 418 MHz signals with repeat at 900 MHz 794
March 2014

852. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 800fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
BAPI WIRELESS IMMERSION TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
BA/WT-I
Battery Two AA 3.6 VDC lithium batteries
(included)
Frequency 418 MHz
Transmission Power 1 mW
Range 100 ft
Update Interval 10 seconds (fixed)
Sensor Type Temperature: 10 kΩ Type 2
thermistor
Temperature Range -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Temperature Accuracy ±0.36°F (±0.2°C)
Operating Temperature -40° to 212°F (-40° to 100°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Enclosure NEMA 4 (IP66)
Mounting 1/2" NPT, 1/4" probe
Dimensions 4.1"H x 5.0"W x 2.5"D
(10.4 x 12.7 x 6.4 cm)
Probe Length
2" 1.5"L from tip to 1/2" NPT thread,
1/4" diameter
4" 3.5"L from tip to 1/2" NPT thread,
1/4" diameter
8" 7.5"L from tip to 1/2" NPT thread,
1/4" diameter
Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Approvals FCC ID# T4F16963N16964
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 2 year
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI wireless immersion temperature transmitters sense
in-pipe conditions and send data with a battery operated
418 MHz transmitter
. The sensor / transmitter is mounted
in a NEMA 4 (IP66) enclosure with a 2", 4" or 8" stainless steel temperature immersion probe suited for four inch well insertion
. The transmitter has an in-building range of 100 feet.
The batter
y has an estimated eight-year life with transmission
updates approximately every 10 seconds
. Other immersion
probe lengths are a
vailable
.
FEATURES
• Wireless temperature sensing
• Eight-year battery life
• Built-in error detection
• Repeater available for 1000-foot range
• Output modules available with voltage, current, or
resistance outputs
• Stainless steel temperature probe
• Standard 316-stainless steel wells available
• Two-year warranty
SPECIFICATIONS
BA/WT-I-4
OPERATION/APPLICATION
Temperature data is transmitted via 418 MHz to a receiver.
Minim
um in-building range is 100 feet, and battery life is
estimated to be eight years with high-capacity 3
.6 VDC
lithium batteries (at a 10-second transmit interval). Each
tr
ansmitter has a unique address and includes built-in error
detection
. Each variable sent by the transmitter is converted
by a BAPI analog output module to a voltage, current, or
resistance signal for input to a controller or monitor. The unit
can also be set up to send low-battery information to the controller
.
BA/EZ RCV 418
Receiver
418 MHz
BA/EZ RO M
Output
1
BA/EZ COM
Output
127
BA/TEMP
Transmitter
BA/EZ RCV 900
Receiver
900 MHz
BA/EZ RO M
Output
1
BA/EZ COM
Output
127
BA/EZ RPT
Repeater
418 MHz
BA/TEMP
Transmitter
* The transmission range from repeater to receiver is 1000 feet.
WIRING
March 2014

853. fi 801NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Install the probe horizontally or vertically at the highest practical elevation into the pipe. The enclosure should not be installed
inside a metal box or inverted. Installing the batteries starts the wireless transmission immediately. Pushing the button of the
transmitter and the button of the associated output module simultaneously will establish an address link between the two units.
This should be done one at a time to a
void cross-addressing
.
BAPI WIRELESS IMMERSION TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
BA/WT-I
INSTALLATION / MOUNTING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
B
A/WT-I-2
Two-inch immmersion temperature probe, 418 MHz transmitter, (batteries included)
BA/WT-I-4 Four-inch immersion temperature probe, 418 MHz transmitter, (batteries included)
BA/WT-I-8 Eight-inch immersion temperature probe, 418 MHz, (batteries included)
DIMENSIONS
Note: Batteries included
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
BA/LI3620 AA lithium 3.6V battery, two required for each transmitter
BA/RCV418-EZ BAPI receiver for 418 MHz transmitter signals to RS485 794
BA/RCV900-EZ BAPI receiver for RPT repeater 900 MHz signals to RS485 794
BA/RPT49-EZ 9-15 VDC power BAPI repeater for 418 MHz signals with repeat at 900 MHz 794
BA/WT-I
March 2014

854. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 802fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
BAPI WIRELESS REMOTE PROBE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
BA/WT-RPP
Battery AA 3.6 VDC lithium batteries
(included)
Frequency 418 MHz
Transmission Power 1 mW
Range 100 ft
Update Interval 10 seconds
Sensor Type Temperature: 10K type 2
Temperature Range -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Temperature Accuracy ±0.36°F (±0.2°C)
Operating Temperature -40° to 212°F (-40° to 100°C)
Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing
Enclosure NEMA 4 (IP66)
Dimensions 4.1"H x 5.0"W x 2.5"D
(10.4 x 12.7 x 6.4 cm)
Weight 1 lb (0.45 kg)
Approvals FCC ID# T4F16963N16964
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
BAPI wireless remote temperature probes feature a stainless
steel probe with 5, 10 or 25 feet of plenum-rated cable. The
watertight BAPI-Box enclosure houses a 418 MHz, battery- operated transmitter
. Remote probes are commonly used
in refr
igerated case or strap-on applications
. They are ideal
for hard-to-access areas or for applications where the usual immersion or duct sensors do not fit well
. Additional cable
options, lead lengths, and probe styles are available upon request
.
FEATURES
• Wireless temperature sensing
• Eight-year battery life
• Built-in error detection
• Repeater available for 1000-foot range
• Output modules available with outputs of voltage,
current, or resistance
• Plenum rated cable
• Stainless steel probe sensor
• Two-year warranty
SPECIFICATIONS
BA/WT-RPP-10-BB
OPERATION/APPLICATION
Temperature data is transmitted via 418 MHz to a receiver.
Minim
um in-building range is 100 feet, and battery life is
estimated to be eight years with high-capacity 3
.6 VDC lithium
batteries (at a 10-second transmit interval). Each transmitter
has a unique address and includes built-in error detection.
Each v
ariable sent by the transmitter is converted by a BAPI
analog output module to a voltage, current, or resistance
signal for input to a controller or monitor
. They can also be set
up to send low-battery information to the controller.
BA/EZ RCV 418
Receiver
418 MHz
BA/EZ RO M
Output
1
BA/EZ COM
Output
127
BA/TEMP
Transmitter
BA/EZ RCV 900
Receiver
900 MHz
BA/EZ RO M
Output
1
BA/EZ COM
Output
127
BA/EZ RPT
Repeater
418 MHz
BA/TEMP
Transmitter
* The transmission range from repeater to receiver is 1000 feet.
March 2014
WIRING

855. fi 803NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
BAPI WIRELESS REMOTE PROBE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
BA/WT-RPP
INSTALLATION / MOUNTING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
B
A/WT-RPP-5-BB
Remote stainless steel temperature probe, with 418 MHz transmitter and 5 feet of plenum cable, batteries
included
B
A/WT-RPP-10-BB
Remote stainless steel temperature probe, with 418 MHz transmitter and 10 feet of plenum cable, batteries included
BA/WT-RPP-25-BB
Remote stainless steel temperature probe, with 418 MHz transmitter and 25 feet of plenum cable, batteries included
APPLICATION
Install the enclosure horizontally (probe down) at the highest practical elevation on the north side of a building or in permanent
shade. The transmitter should not be installed inside a metal enclosure. Installing the batteries starts the wireless transmission
immediately. Pushing the button of the transmitter and the button of the associated output module simultaneously will establish an
address link between the two units. This should be done one at a time to avoid cross-addressing.
Note: Batteries included
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
BA/LI3620 AA lithium 3.6V battery, two required for each transmitter
BA/RCV418-EZ BAPI receiver for 418 MHz transmitter signals to RS485 794
BA/RCV900-EZ BAPI receiver for RPT repeater 900 MHz signals to RS485 794
BA/RPT49-EZ 9-15 VDC power BAPI repeater for 418 MHz signals with repeat at 900 MHz 794
BA/WT-RPP
March 2014

856. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 804fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
BAPI WIRELESS ROOM TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
BA/BS2-WT(H)
Battery Two AA 3.6V lithium batteries
(included)
Frequency 418 MHz
Transmission Power 1 mW
Range 100 ft
Update Interval 10 seconds (fixed)
Humidity Accuracy ±2%, (5% to 95%)
Humidity Range 0%-100% RH
Sensor Type
BA/BS2-WT Temperature: 10K type 2
BA/BS2-WTH Temperature: 10K type 2
Humidity: Capacitive
Temperature Range -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Temperature Accuracy ±0.36°F (±0.2°C)
Operating Temperature 32°-140°F (0° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH non-condensing
Dimensions 4.5"H x 2.75"W x 1.1"D
(11.4 x 7.0 x 2.7 cm)
Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Approvals FCC ID# T4F16963N16964
(418 MHz only)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 2 year
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI wireless room temperature and humidity
transmitters measure in-room conditions with a battery
operated 418 MHz transmitter
. The sensor / transmitter
is mounted in a BAPI-Stat 2 style enclosure and has an in-building range of 100 feet
. The battery has an estimated
eight-year life with transmission updates approximately every ten seconds
.
FEATURES
• Wireless temperature and humidity sensing
• Eight-year battery life
• Built-in error detection
• Repeater available for 1000-foot range
• Output modules available with signal outputs of
voltage, current, or resistance
• BAPI-Stat 2 enclosure
• Two-year warranty
SPECIFICATIONS
BA/BS2-WT
OPERATION/APPLICATION
Temperature and humidity data is transmitted via 418 MHz
RF to a receiver. Minimum in-building range is 100 feet, and
battery life is estimated to be eight years with high-capacity 3
.6V lithium batteries (at a 10-second transmit interval). Each
tr
ansmitter has a unique address and includes built-in error
detection
. Each variable sent by the transmitter is converted
by a BAPI Analog Output Module to a voltage, current, or resistance signal for input to a controller or monitor
. They
can also be set up to include low-battery information to the controller
.
BA/EZ RCV 418
Receiver
418 MHz
BA/EZ RO M
Output
1
BA/EZ COM
Output
127
BA/TEMP
Transmitter
BA/EZ RCV 900
Receiver
900 MHz
BA/EZ RO M
Output
1
BA/EZ COM
Output
127
BA/EZ RPT
Repeater
418 MHz
BA/TEMP
Transmitter
* The transmission range from repeater to receiver is 1000 feet.
March 2014
WIRING

857. fi 805NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
BAPI WIRELESS ROOM TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
BA/BS2-WT(H)
Transmitter training button
Battery polarity important
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
B
A/BS2-WT
Room temperature battery transmitter, 418 MHz at 1 mW, (batteries included)
BA/BS2-WT-S Room temperature with setpoint adjust, 418 MHz 1mW, (batteries included)
BA/BS2-WT-O Room temperature with push button, 418 MHz 1mW, (batteries included)
BA/BS2-WT-SO Room temperature with push button and set point adjust, 418 MHz 1mW, (batteries included)
BA/BS2-WTH Room temperature and humidity battery transmitter, 418 MHz @ 1 mW, (batteries included)
INSTALLATION / MOUNTING
Note Batteries included
Note: The unit starts transmitting as
soon as the batteries are installed.
Install as you would any wall sensor, about 4' to 5' from the floor. The box should not be installed inside a metal box. Installing the
batter
ies starts the RF transmission immediately
. Pushing the training button of the transmitter and the button of the associated
output module simultaneously will confirm the address link between the correct units. This should be done one at a time to avoid
cross-addressing.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
BA/LI3620 AA lithium 3.6V battery, two required for each transmitter
BA/RCV418-EZ BAPI receiver for 418 MHz transmitter signals to RS485 794
BA/RCV900-EZ BAPI receiver for RPT repeater 900 MHz signals to RS485 794
BA/RPT49-EZ 9-15 VDC power BAPI repeater for 418 MHz signals with repeat at 900 MHz 794
March 2014

858. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 806fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
BAPI WIRELESS OSA TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
BA/WT-O, BA/WTH-O
Battery Two AA 3.6 VDC lithium batteries
(included)
Frequency 418 MHz
Transmission Power 1 mW
Range 100 ft
Update Interval 10 seconds (fixed)
Humidity Accuracy ±2%, (5 to 95%)
Humidity Range 0 to 100% RH
Sensor Type
BA/WT-O Temperature: 10K type 2
BA/WTH-O Temperature: 10K type 2
Humidity: Capacitive
Temperature Range -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Temperature Accuracy ±0.36°F (±0.2°C)
Operating Temperature -40° to 212°F (-40° to 100°C)
Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing
Enclosure NEMA 4 (IP66)
Dimensions 4.1"H x 5.0"W x 2.5"D
(10.4 x 12.7 x 6.4 cm)
Probe
BA/WT-O 1.58" (4.02 cm)
BA/WTH-O 2.58" (6.56 cm)
Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Approvals FCC ID#T4F16963N16964
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI wireless outside air temperature and humidity
transmitters sense outside conditions and transmit them
with a battery-operated 418 MHz transmitter
. The sensor
/ transmitter is mounted in a NEMA 4 (IP66) enclosure with a 2
.58” stainless steel temperature probe or a 1.58”
temperature / humidity probe. The transmitter has a minimum
in-building range of 100 feet. The battery has an estimated
eight-year life with transmission updates approximately every 10 seconds
. Other duct insertion probe lengths are available.
FEATURES
• Wireless temperature and humidity sensing
• Eight-year battery life
• Built-in error detection
• Repeater available for 1000-foot range
• Output modules available with signal outputs of
voltage, current, or resistance
• Stainless steel temperature probe
• PVC weather shield (temperature model)
• Sintered filter (temperature / RH model)
• Two-year warranty
SPECIFICATIONS
BA/WT-O
OPERATION/APPLICATION
Temperature and humidity data is transmitted via 418 MHz to
a receiver. Minimum in-building range is 100 feet and battery
life is estimated to be eight years with high-capacity 3.6 VDC
lithium batteries (at a 10-second transmit interval). Each
tr
ansmitter has a unique address and includes built-in error
detection
. Each variable sent by the transmitter is converted
by a BAPI analog output module to a voltage, current, or resistance signal for input to a controller or monitor
. The unit
can also be set up to send low-battery information to the controller
.
BA/WTH-O
BA/EZ RCV 418
Receiver
418 MHz
BA/EZ RO M
Output
1
BA/EZ COM
Output
127
BA/TEMP
Transmitter
BA/EZ RCV 900
Receiver
900 MHz
BA/EZ RO M
Output
1
BA/EZ COM
Output
127
BA/EZ RPT
Repeater
418 MHz
BA/TEMP
Transmitter
* The transmission range from repeater to receiver is 1000 feet.
March 2014
WIRING

859. fi 807NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
BAPI WIRELESS OSA TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS
BA/WT-O, BA/WTH-O
INSTALLATION / MOUNTING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BA/WT-O-BB OSA temperature probe, 418 MHz transmitter, batteries included
BA/WTH-O-BB OSA temperature and humidity probe, 418 MHz transmitter, batteries included
DIMENSIONS
Install the enclosure horizontally (probe down) at the highest practical elevation on the north side of a building or in permanent
shade. The transmitter should not be installed inside a metal enclosure. Installing the batteries starts the wireless transmission
immediately. Pushing the button of the transmitter and the button of the associated output module simultaneously will establish an
address link between the two units. This should be done one at a time to avoid cross-addressing.
Note: Batteries included
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
BA/LI3620 AA lithium 3.6V battery, two required for each transmitter
BA/RCV418-EZ BAPI receiver for 418 MHz transmitter signals to RS485 794
BA/RCV900-EZ BAPI receiver for RPT repeater 900 MHz signals to RS485 794
BA/RPT49-EZ 9-15 VDC power BAPI repeater for 418 MHz signals with repeat at 900 MHz 794
BA/WT-O-BB
BA/WTH-O-BB
March 2014

860. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 808fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
BAPI WIRELESS SYSTEM OUTPUT MODULES
BA/COM, BA/ROM, BA/RYOM, BA/RYOL, BA/SOM, BA/VOM
Supply Voltage
COM Externally (loop) powered 9-36 VDC,
20 mA
ROM, VOM 9-30 VDC at 3 mA, or 17 to 30 VAC
at 0.1 VA
RYOM/RYOL 9-30 VDC at 15 mA, or 17 to 30 VAC
at 0.5 VA
SOM See SOM data sheet located under
"Related Documents" at

www
.Kele.com
Analog Output
COM 4-20 mA, 9-36 VDC, loop powered
Impedance 750Ω at 24 VDC
ROM-102 10 kΩ type 2 thermistor curve, 5 VDC
excitation maximum
ROM-103 10 kΩ type 3 thermistor curve, 5 VDC
excitation maximum
SOM-10 0 to 10 VDC, 10 kΩ maximum
SOM-60 0 to 10 kΩ, linear
SOM-80 0 to 20 kΩ, linear
SOM-84 10 to 30 kΩ, linear
SOM-102 10 k Type 2 thermistor 50° to 90°F
(10° to 32°C)
VOM-10 0-10 VDC, 10 kΩ maximum
Digital Outputs Solid state dual FETs, NO or NC 40
VAC/VDC, 150 mA maximum 1μA
leakage in off state 15Ω on-state
resistance
Connections
Terminal strip (inter-lockable)
Update Interval 10 seconds
Operating Temperature 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing
Materials Of Construction
ABS Plastic, UL94V-0
Dimensions 2.75"H x 2.34"W x 1.2"D
(7.0 x 5.9 x 3.0 cm)
Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI BA/ROM, VOM, COM, and RYOM Wireless
System Output Modules are specifically designed to
connect to any BA/RCV receiver and communicate over an
RS485 communication trunk to generate standard output
signals for any BAS system
. A total of 127 modules may be
interspersed on the RS485 trunk. Each will output a signal
representativ
e of its assigned wireless transmitter located
remotely
. Each module may be powered from the receiver
power bus, or individually, based on overall system power requirements
.
The BAPI BA/ROM Thermistor Simulation Output Module
converts a wireless transmitter temperature signal according to a standard thermistor curve
. The two standard curves
are 10 KΩ Type 3 and a 10 KΩ Type 2, with a resistance temperature response of 35° to 120°F (1° to 50°C)
.
The BAPI BA/VOM Voltage Output Module converts a
wireless transmitter temperature signal to a standard voltage signal
. The two standard voltage outputs are 0-5 VDC and
0-10 VDC, with voltage temperature responses based on individual models
.
The BAPI BA/COM Current Output Module converts
a wireless transmitter temperature signal to a standard 4-20 mA current signal
. The 4-20 mA current is typical of a
loop powered (9-36 VDC) device with current temperature responses based on individual models
.
The BAPI BA/RYOM Digital Output Module converts the
pushbutton on a wireless room temperature transmitter to a solid-state relay closure for AC or DC voltages (5 second momentary actuation)
. NO or NC solid-state contacts are
a
vailable, based on individual models
.
The BAPI BA/RYOL Digital Output Module converts the BA/
WDI digital input tranmitter signal to a latching relay output.
NO or NC contacts are a
vailable, based on individual models
.
The BAPI BA/SOM Setpoint Output Module converts the
setpoint data from a wireless receiver to a resistance or voltage output
.
FEATURES
• Pr
• 127 modules per system include:
• Thermistor simulation for temperature
• 0-10 VDC or 0-5 VDC signals
• 4-20 mA signals
• Solid-state contacts
• FCC license pre-approved
• Built-in error detection
• Built-in fail-safe positions
• Snap-track mounting
SPECIFICATIONS
BA/SOM-16-EZ, BA/VOM-05-C-EZ,
BA/ROM-102-EZ
March 2014

861. fi 809NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
BAPI WIRELESS SYSTEM OUTPUT MODULES
BA/COM, BA/ROM, BA/RYOM, BA/RYOL, BA/SOM, BA/VOM
SG
PG
Comm
SG
PG
Comm
Service
Button
Power Bus
Not Required
Loop Voltage
9 to 36 VDC
Current
+ Output --
www.buplhvac.com
SG PG
Comm
SG PG
Comm
Service
Button
Power Bus*
9 to 36 VDC
17 to 31 VAC
Votage
+ Output --
www.buplhvac.com
SG PG
Comm
SG PG
Comm
Service
Button
Power Bus*
9 to 36 VDC
17 to 31 VAC
Relative
Output
www.buplhvac.com
SG PG
Comm
SG PG
Comm
Service
Button
Power Bus*
9 to 36 VDC
17 to 31 VAC
Switched
Output
www.buplhvac.com
www.buplhvac.com
Power Bus*
9 to 36 VDC
17 to 31 VAC
SG PG
Comm
418 MHz
Activator
*17-30 VAC
Power
To Controller
Thermistor
Input
24 VDC
Signal
To Controller
O-5 VDC or
O-10 VDC
To Controller
To Controller
Device
(Typically A Relay)
Typically Hard Wired
or Interlocked On Rail
Typically Service Button to
Program Output Modules
To RF Transmitters
Typical BA/RCV
RF Receiver
With RS485
Communication
BA/R YOM
Digital Output
N.O. or N.C.
BA/ROM
T
hirmistor Simulat
0K type 2 @ 77°F
or 10K type 3 @ 77°F
BA/VOM
O-5 VDC Output
or
O-10 VDC Output
BA/COM
4-20 MA Output
SG
PG
Comm
SG
PG
Comm
Ser vice
Button
Power bus
not required
Loop voltage
9 to 36 VDC
Current
+ output --
www.buplhvac.com
SG PG
Comm
SG PG
Comm
Ser vice
Button
Power bus*
9 to 36 VDC
17 to 31 VAC
Votage
+ output --
www.buplhvac.comSG
PG
Comm
SG
PG
Comm
Ser vice
Button
Power bus*
9 to 36 VDC
17 to 31 VAC
Relative
output
www.buplhvac.comSG
PG
Comm
SG
PG
Comm
Ser vice
Button
Power bus*
9 to 36 VDC
17 to 31 VAC
Switched
output
www.buplhvac.com
www.bapihvac.com
Power bus*
9 to 36 VDC
17 to 31 VAC
SG
PG
Comm
418 MHz
Antenna
*17-30 VAC
Power
To controller
ther mistor
input
9 to 36 VDC
Current cignal
to controller
0-5 VDC or
0-10 VDC
To controller
To controller
device
(typically a relay)
(17–30 VAC or 9–30 VDC)
Interlocking wiring plugs with
screw ter minals, hard wire or
snap together on DIN rail
Ser vice button, used
to assign output
modules to transmitters
Typical BA/EZ-RCV
RF receiver
with RS485
communication
BA/EZ-RYOM
Digital output
N.O. or N.C.
BA/EZ-ROM
Thermistor simulator
10 k
Ω type 2 @ 77°F
or 10 k
Ω type 3 @ 77°F
BA/EZ-VOM
0-5 VDC output
or
0-10 VDC output
BA/EZ-COM
4-20 mA output
*The power bus maybe split when needed and is required when module current draw exceeds the
system power supply. If the power bus is split re-established with an indendently power source.
Do not parallel power sources.
*The power bus may be split when needed and is required when module current draw exceeds the
system power supply. If the power bus is split, re-establish with an independent power source.
Do not parallel power sources.
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS
BA/AOM-CONN Pluggable terminal block kit
VC350-12 Power supply 24 VAC to 12 VDC, 350 mA
MODEL DESCRIPTION
B
A/COM-C-EZ
BAPI wireless current output module, 4-20 mA = 50°F to 90°F
B
A/COM-E-EZ
BAPI wireless current output module, 4-20 mA = 60°F to 80°F
B
A/COM-H-EZ
BAPI wireless current output module, 4-20 mA = -20°F to 120°F
B
A/COM-M-EZ
BAPI wireless current output module, 4-20 mA = 0 to 100% RH
B
A/ROM-102-EZ
BAPI wireless thermistor simulation output module, 10K type 24 (35°F to 120°F )
B
A/ROM-103-EZ
BAPI wireless thermistor simulation output module, 10K type 3 (32°F to 120°F )
B
A/RYOM-NC-EZ
Relay output momentary, normally open output
BA/RYOM-NO-EZ Relay output momentary, normally closed output
BA/SOM-10-EZ BAPI wireless setpoint output module, 0 to 10 VDC
BA/SOM-60-EZ BAPI wireless setpoint output module, 0 to 10K Ω
BA/SOM-80-EZ 0 to 20K Ω output
BA/SOM-84-EZ 10 to 30K Ω output
BA/SOM-102-C-EZ 10 kΩ-2 thermistor, 50°F to 90°F
BA/VOM-10-C-EZ BAPI wireless voltage output module, 0-10 VDC = 50°F to 90°F
BA/VOM-10-E-EZ BAPI wireless voltage output module, 0-10 VDC = 60°F to 80°F
BA/VOM-10-H-EZ BAPI wireless voltage output module, 0-10 VDC = -20°F to 120°F
BA/VOM-10-M-EZ BAPI wireless voltage output module, 0-10 VDC = 0 to 100% RH
BA/RYOL-NC-EZ Relay output latching, normally closed default
BA/RYOL-NO-EZ Relay output latching, normally open default
March 2014

862. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 810fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
WIRELESS SENSOR FOR HUMIDITY / TEMPERATURE / CO2
EE240 SERIES
Supply Voltage
EE241/EE242 24V AC/DC ±20%
EE244 24 VDC
EE245/-R 8-28 VDC / 12 VAC
Battery
EE244, EE245 4 x 1.5V AA
Supply Current
EE241 70mA at 24 VDC
EE242 150mA at 24 VDC
EE244 20mA at 24 VDC
Frequency 2.4 GHz
Communication
EE242 Webserver, Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP
Outputs
EE241/EE242-
2 4 x 0-5 VDC
3 4 x 0-10 VDC
6 4 x 4-20mA
Measurement Range
EE07-PFT1/-MFT9 0-100% RH / -40° to 176°F
(-40° to 80°C)
EE03-FT9 0-95% RH / -40° to 185°F
(-40° to 85°C)
EE07-PT1/MT -40°-176°F (-40° to 80°C)
EE871 0 to 2000ppm
0 to 5000ppm
0 to 10000ppm
Accuracy
EE07-PFT1/-MFT9 ±2% RH (0 to 90% RH); ±3% RH (90
to 100% RH); ±0.18°F (±0.1°C) at 68°F
(20°C)
EE03-FT9 ±3% RH (10 to 100% RH) at 69.8°F
(21°C); ±0.54°F (±0.3°C) at 68°F (20°C)
EE07-PT1/MT ±0.18°F (±0.1°C) at 68°F (20°C)
EE871 ±(50ppm+2% of m.v.)
±(50ppm+3% of m.v.)
±(100ppm+5% of m.v.)
EE245
Temperature ± 0,3 °C (at 20 °C) / ± 0,4 °C (20...55 °C)
RH ± 3 % (30...70 %) / ± 5 % (70...90 %)
CO2 2000ppm (± 50ppm +2 % of m.v.)
5000ppm (± 50ppm +3 % of mv.v)
Transmission Power 10mW
Range Up to 330 ft (100 m) indoors
Up to 3300 ft (1000 m) line of sight
Operating Temperature
EE241/EE242 Without display -22° to 122°F
(-30° to 50°C)
With display -4° to 122°F (-20° to 50°C)
EE244 Without display -40° to 122°F
(-40° to 50°C)
With display -4° to 122°F (-20° to 50°C)
EE245/-R 23° to 131°F (-5° to 55°C)
Materials Of Construction
EE241/EE242 Polycarbonate (PC), IP20
EE244 Polycarbonate (PC), IP65
EE245 Polycarbonate (PC), IP30
Dimensions
EE241/EE242 4.3" x 3.5" x 2.4"(10.8 x 9.0 x 6.2 cm)
EE244 5.3" x 3.5" x 2.4"(13.5 x 9.0 x 6.2 cm)
EE245 1.25" x 3.34" x 5.35" (3.2 x 8.5 x 13.6
cm)
Weight 1.94 lbs (0.88 kg)
Approvals ETSI / FCC Part 15.247 / IC
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year

DESCRIPTION
The EE240 Series feature advanced sensor technology and ease of
installation. An extendable assortment of sensing probes allows for
usage in many applications. The EE240 Series is capable of point to
point or complex networking.
Wireless Transmitter EE244
Every transmitter can be equipped with up to three sensing probes.
An optional displa
y is available to provide local indication
. As a
standard, batter
ies provide for the power supply
. For more power
demanding applications the device can be powered through an external adapter
.
Wireless Transmitter EE245
The elegant housing combines the measurement of temperature, humidity and CO2
. An optional display is available to provide local
indication. As a standard, batteries provide for the power supply. For
more power demanding applications the device can be powered through an external adapter
.
Base Station EE241 and EE242
The point-to-point connection can be accomplished with the
EE241. The configuration at the factory of the up to four transmitted
measurement values is done in accordance with your specifications, meaning that the values are available as analog outputs (0 - 5 / 10 V or 4 - 20 mA) immediately after installation
.
For more complex networks (up to 500 transmitters or up to 2000
measurement values) the user-configurable EE242 is available.
Independent of the topology of the netw
ork, the integrated Webserver
and the Ethernet interface warrants highest flexibility in the configuration of the network with a computer.
A simple integration of the measurement system in the customer's
network and the easy remote access and diagnostic of the measurement data are additional helpful features
. The output values
FEATURES
•
Interchangeable Sensing Probes
• Remote Probes up to 33 ft (10 m)
• Battery Operating Life up to 1 Year
• Webserver
• Ethernet
• Long Rangeability
SPECIFICATIONS
can be transferred as an analog signal, as well as in digital form via
Ethernet. For network integration, Modbus is supported.
Router Series EE244-R,
EE245-R
The radio range depends greatly on local circumstances
. With
the router series EE244-R obstacles can be bypassed or the transmission distance expanded
.
EE244*
EE241
*Temperature sensor sold separately
EE245
March 2014

863. fi 811NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
WIRELESS SENSOR FOR HUMIDITY / TEMPERATURE / CO2
EE240 SERIES
OPERATION WIRING CONNECTION
The data transmission is based on the IEEE 802.15.4
protocol with a tr
ansmission frequency of 2
.4 GHz, which
can be used worldwide without any additional cost. A
special identification address
, checksums, handshakes, and
bidirectional communication provide the highest transmission
reliability
.
Typical radio ranges are 330 ft (100 m) for indoor applications
and 3300 ft (1000 m) in the open field. Greater radio ranges
are easily obtainable with routers. The self-configuring,
scalable, and self-healing mesh network - even when a connection fails - is another component contributing to the improvement of the transmission reliability and security
. The
highest possible data security level is accomplished with a preset encryption key according to AES-128
.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
EE242-A2 Base station "wireless network" 0-5V without display
EE242-A2D Base station "wireless network" 0-5V without display
EE242-A3 Base station "wireless net work" 0-10V without display
EE242-A3D Base station "wireless net work" 0-10V with display
EE242-A6 Base station "wireless net work" 4-20mA without display
EE242-A6D Base station "wireless net work" 4-20mA wtih display
EE241-A2 Base station "point-to-point" 0-5V without display
EE241-A2D Base station "point-to-point" 0-5V with display
EE241-A3 Base station "point-to-point" 0-10V without display
EE241-A3D Base station "point-to-point" 0-10V with display
EE241-A6 Base station "point-to-point" 4-20mA without display
EE241-A6D Base station "point-to-point" 4-20mA with display
EE244-RA Router 2.4 GHz
EE244-AA1 Transmitter with 1 probe option without display
EE244-AA1D Transmitter with 1 probe option with display
EE244-AA2 Transmitter with 2 probe option without display
EE244-AA2D Transmitter with 2 probe option with display
EE244-AA3 Transmitter with 3 probe option without display
EE244-AA3D Transmitter with 3 probe option with display
EE245 RH/CO2/Temperature wall sensor transmitter
EE245-R Router 2.4 GHz wall mount
EE07-PFT1 RH/T probe for standard applications
EE07-MFT9 RH/T probe for clean room applications, food and pharmaceutical industry
EE03-FT9 RH/T module for installation in small spaces or obtrusive mounting applications
EE07-PT1 T probe for standard applications
EE07-MT T probe for clean room applications, food and pharmaceutical industry
EE871-2C95 C02 probe for standard applications 0-2000ppm
EE871-5C95 C02 probe for standard applications 0-5000ppm
EE871-10C95 C02 probe for standard applications 0-10000ppm
HA010801 Probe cable for EE07 6.5 ft (2 m)
HA010802 Probe cable for EE07 16.4 ft (5 m)
HA010803 Probe cable for EE07 32.8 ft (10 m)
HA010328 Connection cable for EE03 6.5 ft (2 m)
HA010329 Connection cable for EE03 16.4 ft (5 m)
HA010330 Antenna cable 6.5 ft (2 m)
HA010203 Bracket for rail installation
HA010403 Reference probes
HA010209 Duct mounting kit for EE07
HA010333 Crossover cable (PC to base station)
March 2014

864. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 812fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
IDEAL WIRELESS SENSOR SYSTEM
58-G1 AND 58-N-1101 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The IDEAL Wireless Sensor System enables wireless
monitoring of environmental conditions for building
automation, HVAC control, and energy management
. The
system includes a growing list of wireless sensor devices for measuring temperature, humidity, light, pressure, CO2, and other parameters
. All sensor devices communicate wirelessly
to a common gateway which supports a wide range of industry standard BAS protocols
.
FEATURES
• Wide range of sensor types
• Integrates easily into existing BAS systems including
BACnet,Modbus, LonWorks, Metasys N2, and XML.
• Gateway supports up to 100 senssors and 800 sensor
points
• Gateway can be congigured for redundancy in critical
applications
• All devices approved for use in the US and Canada
Supply Voltage
58-N-1101-x-N Non-Replaceable +25 year battery
58-G1 24 VAC/VDC
Supply Current 1A
Frequency
58-G1, 58-N-1101 2.4 GHz
Protocol
58-G1 Serial ,BACnet IP,BACnet Ethernet
BACnet MSTP,
Modbus TCP,Modbus RTU
SNMP, N2,LonWorks
Accuracy
Temperature +/- 1°F (50-100°F )
Humidity +/- 3% (10-90%)
Range
58-N-1101 Data - 100 ft typically
Operating Temperature -4° to 122°F(-20° to 50°C) indoor
use only
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing
Materials Of Construction
ABS plastic, UL94-5VA rating
Dimensions
58-N-1101-x-N 4.2"W x 2.1"H x 1.1"D
(10.6 x 5.3 x 2.7 cm)
58-G1 6.6"W x 4.4"H x 1.75"D
(16.7 x 11.1 x 4.4 cm)
Weight
58-N-110 0.5 lbs (0.22 kg)
58-G1 1.0 lbs (.45 kg)
Approvals FCC Part 15 and Industry Canada
Contains FCC ID: OA3MRF24J0MA Contains IC: 7693A-24J40MA
RoHS Statement
Yes
Warranty 2 year
SPECIFICATIONS
March 2014
MODEL DESCRIPTION
58-N-1101-T
-N
Wireless temperature sensor
(Non-replaceable 25+ year battery)
58-N-1101-TH-N Wireless temperature and humidity sensor (Non-replaceable 25+ year batter
y)
58-N-1101-TT-N Wireless temperature sensor – internal and external 10K R
TD (Non-replaceable 25+ year
battery)
58-N-1101-L-N Wireless light sensor (Non-replaceable 25+ year batter
y)
58-G1-101-SERIAL BAS Gateway - Serial output to PC via USB
58-G1-101-B
ACNET-IP
BAS Gateway - BACNET/IP via Ethernet interface and serial output via USB
58-G1-101-B
ACNET-ETH
BAS Gateway - BACNET/Ethernet via Ethernet interface and serial output via USB
58-G1-101-B
ACNET-MSTP
BAS Gateway - BACNET/MSTP via RS-485 interface and serial output via USB
58-G1-101-MODB
US-TCP
BAS Gateway - MODBUS TCP via Ethernet interface and serial output via USB
58-G1-101-MODB
US-RTU
BAS Gateway - MODBUS RTU via Ethernet
interface and serial output via USB
58-G1-101-SNMP BAS Gateway - SNMP via Ethernet interface and serial output via USB
58-G1-101-MET
ASYS-N2
BAS Gateway - METASYS N2 via RS-485
interface and serial output via USB
58-G1-101-LON BAS Gateway - LonWorks via FTT-10
interface and serial output via USB
58-N-1101 58-G1
INSTALLATION
The 58-N-1101 series sensors have integrated flanges for
wall mounting, no wiring is needed. The sensors need to be
configured to a gateway prior to installation.
The 58-G1 wireless gateway can be wall mounted using the
integrated mounting flanges or set on a tabletop. 24V AC/DC
power is required and connects through a removable terminal block
. It has a USB Type A port for sensor interface and a
USB Type B port for PC interface configuration. It also has a
netw
ork port for ethernet, RS-485, or FTT-10
(model dependant)
.

865. fi 813NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Note:• Certification training through Schneider Electric is required before ordering.
Call Kele for details.
• USA uses 902 MHz and 315 MHz frequencies for EnOcean.
Europe uses 868 MHz frequency.
Manager EnOcean ZigBee
Part numbers
Building
Expert
StruxureWare
integration
315 MHz
868 MHz
902 MHz
High
power
MPM-NW-000-5045 xx
MPM-GW-C00-5045x xx
MPM-GW-D00-5045x xx
MPM-GW-E00-5045x xx
MPM-GW-CI0-5045x xx x
MPM-GW-DI0-5045x xx x
MPM-GW-EI0-5045 xx xx
MPM-GW-0I0-5045x
xx
ENOCEAN AND ZIGBEE WIRELESS MANAGER AND GATEWAY
SMARTSTRUXURE LITE MPM-GW SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MPM-GW Series multi-purpose wireless manager and gateway enable the control, monitoring and management of entire sites via StruxureWare™ Building Expert
. It has an aesthetic look, similar to a router, allowing for
in-room deployment. It supports control and gateway functionalities for wireless
peripherals for variety of applications. All models have an embedded web server
hosting Building Expert, a web-based intelligent building management system that allows complete configuration and management of small sites
.
FEATURES
• Wireless control of EnOcean end-devices (128 points per MPM)
• Wireless control of ZigBee end-devices (30 peripherals per MPM)
• Programmable via StruxureWare™ Building Expert
• Points visible through BACnet, EcoStruxure Web Services (EWS) & oBIX
• Real-time response to scripting/graphical programming
MPM-GW
DIMENSIONS
191mm
(7.52 in)
116mm (4.57 in)
Ethernet 100B/T
EnOcean (optional antenna)
(Green striped antenna for 315MHz)
(Gray striped antenna for 868MHz)
(Yellow striped antenna for 902MHz)
ZigBee (optional antenna)
(Pink striped antenna for 2.4GHz)
45mm
(1.77 in)
for DIN rail mount
24V AC/DC
CANbus H
CANbus L
GND
SPECIFICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC, 50/60Hz
Frequency EnOcean: 315MHz, 868MHz or 902MHz;
ZigBee: 2.4GHz, 16RF Channels
Receiver Sensitivity EnOcean -95dBm; ZigBee -101dBm/-105dBm
(amplified)
Range Line of sight: EnOcean 100ft/30m; ZigBee
peripherals 100ft/30m, ZigBee MPM 300ft/100m
Communication ZigBee Pro, EnOcean, BACnet/IP. CANbus (125-
500Kbps), Ethernet(10/100Mbps)
Supported Protocols BACnet, EWS, oBIX, FTP, EnOcean, ZigBee,
CANbus
Memory 64MB Flash
Antenna External whip, RP SMA Connector
Clock Backup Real-time clock, Battery backed (10,000 hrs)
Processor ARM9 32-bit, 400MHz
Enclosure Rigid ABS, UL94V0-5VB
Maximum Number Of Wireless Modules
EnOcean (wireless): 128 points; ZigBee
(wireless): 30 peripherals
Data Storage 2GB flash for local storage
Operating Temperature 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 0-90% RH non-codensing
Storage Temperature -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C )
Mounting Din-rail, wall or ceiling mount
Dimensions 7.52"H x 4.57"W x 1.77"D (191 x 116 x 45 mm)
Weight 0.7 lbs (0.32 kg)
Approvals UL916, CSA, FCC, ICES-003, CE, Japanese
Radio Law, RoHS
Warranty 1.5 year

866. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 814fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
UNIVERSAL NETWORK AND WIRELESS CONTROLLERS
SMARTSTRUXURE LITE MPM-UN SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MPM-UN Series multi-purpose manager and controllers enable the control,
monitoring and management of entire sites via StruxureWare™ Building Expert. They
can also be used for wired and wireless zone control in larger buildings. They support
variety of HVAC, lighting and metering applications. All models have an embedded
web server hosting Building Expert, a web-based intelligent building management system that allows complete configuration and management of small sites
.
FEATURES
• Contr •
Wireless control of EnOcean end-devices (optional, 128
points per MPM)
• Wireless control of ZigBee end-devices (optional, 30
peripherals per MPM)
• Modbus (optional).
• Programmable via StruxureWare™ Building Expert
• Points visible through BACnet, EcoStruxure Web
Services (EWS) & oBIX
• Real-time response to scripting/graphical programming
Output port
Ethernet 100B/T
Input port
B
A
GND
AI6
GND
AI5
GND
AI4
GND
AI3
GND
AI2
GND
AI1
24V AC/DC
CANbus H
CANbus L
GND
OP 1A
OP 1B
OP 2A
OP 2B
15VDC AO1 GND
AO2 GND
AO3 GND
AO4
EnOcean (optional)
(Green striped antenna for 315MHz)
(Gray striped antenna for 868MHz)
(Yellow striped antenna for 902MHz)
ZigBee (optional)
(Pink striped antenna for 2.4GHz)
RS 485 connectors for
Modbus (optional)
24V AC/DC
CANbus H
CANbus L
GND
WIRING
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC, 50/60Hz
Frequency EnOcean: 315MHz, 868MHz or 902MHz; ZigBee:
2.4GHz, 16RF Channels
Receiver Sensitivity EnOcean -95dBm; ZigBee -101dBm/-105dBm
(amplified)
Range Line of sight: EnOcean 100ft/30m; ZigBee
peripherals 100ft/30m, ZigBee MPM 300ft/100m
Communication ZigBee Pro, EnOcean, BACnet, CANbus (125-
500Kbps), Ethernet(10/100Mbps), Modbus
Supported Protocols BACnet, EWS, oBIX, FTP, EnOcean, ZigBee,
CANbus, Modbus
Memory 64MB Flash
Processor ARM9 32-bit, 400MHz
Data Storage

2GB flash for local storage
Antenna External whip, RP SMA Connector
Clock Backup Real-time clock, Battery backed (10,000 hrs)
Input 6 universal, configurable, 14-bit resolution (analog:
4-20mA, 0-10V; digital: dry contact, thermistor:
1-100K)
Maximum Number Of Wireless
Modules
EnOcean (wireless): 128 points; ZigBee (wireless):
30 peripherals
Outputs 2 relay (24V, 1.1A each), 4 analog (0-12V, 50mA
max, 12-bit resolution)
Storage Temperature -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Operating Temperature 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 0-90% RH non-codensing
Enclosure Rigid ABS, UL94V0-5VB
Mounting Din-rail, wall or ceiling mount
Dimensions 4.96"H x 5.20"W x 1.34"D (126 x 132 x 34 mm)
Weight 0.5lbs (0.23 kg)
Approvals UL916, CSA, FCC, ICES-003, CE, Japanese
Radio Law, RoHS
Warranty 1.5 years
SPECIFICATIONS
126mm
(4.96 in)
132mm (5.20 in)
34mm
(1.34 in)
for DIN rail mount
126mm
(4.96 in)
132mm (5.20 in)
34mm
(1.34 in)
for DIN rail mount
DIMENSIONS
MPMUN
ORDERING INFORMATION
ManagerE nOcean ZigBee I/O
Part numbers
Building
Expert
StruxureWare
integration
315 MHz
868 MHz
902 MHz
High
power
6 inputs
6 outputs
Modbus
MPM-UN-004-5045 xx xxx
MPM-UN-0I4-5045x xx xxx
MPM-UN-C00-5045x xx xx
MPM-UN-C04-5045x xx xxx
MPM-UN-CI4-5045
xx x x xxx
MPM-UN-D04-5045x xx xxx
MPM-UN-DI4-5045x xx x xxx
MPM-UN-E00-5045 xx xx x
MPM-UN-E04-5045 xx x xxx
MPM-UN-EI4-5045 xx xx xxx
Note:• Certification training through Schneider Electric is required before ordering.
Call Kele for details.
• USA uses 902 MHz and 315 MHz frequencies for EnOcean.
Europe uses 868 MHz frequency.
March 2014

867. fi 815NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
NETWORK AND WIRELESS VARIABLE AIR VOLUME CONTROLLER AND MANAGER
SMARTSTRUXURE LITE MPM-VA SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MPM-VA Series VAV controllers and managers enable the control, monitoring
and management of entire sites via StruxureWare™ Building Expert. They can
also be used for wired and wireless zone control in larger buildings. This series
of controllers support variety of variable-air-volume, HVAC, lighting and metering applications
. All models have an embedded web server hosting Building
Expert, a web-based intelligent building management system that allows complete configuration and management of small sites
.
FEATURES
• Pressure sensor with actuator as an option
• Supports VAV functionalities and applications
• Control of wired end-devices (6 inputs, 6 outputs).
• Wireless control of EnOcean end-devices (optional, 128
points per MPM)
• Wireless control of ZigBee end-devices (optional, 30
peripherals per MPM)
• Supports Modbus
• Programmable via StruxureWare™ Building Expert
• Points visible through BACnet, EcoStruxure Web Services
(EWS) & oBIX
• Real-time response to scripting/graphical programming
MPMVA
Output port
Ethernet 100B/T
24V AC/DC
CAN H
CAN L
GND
OP 1A
OP 1B
OP 2A
OP 2B
15VDC
AO1
GND
AO2
GND
AO3
GND
AO4
EnOcean (optional)
(Green striped antenna for 315MHz)
(Gray striped antenna for 868MHz)
(Yellow striped antenna for 902MHz)
ZigBee (optional)
(Pink striped an-
tenna for 2.4GHz)
Actuator
(optional)
Input port
B
A
GND
AI6
GND
AI5
GND
AI4
GND
AI3
GND
AI2
GND
AI1
RS 485 connectors for Modbus
WIRING
141mm (5.55 in)
63mm
(2.48 in)
for DIN rail mount
191mm
(7.52 in)
DIMENSIONS
Supply Voltage 24 VAC /VDC, 50/60Hz
Frequency EnOcean: 315MHz, 868MHz or 902MHz; ZigBee: 2.4GHz, 16RF
Channels
Receiver Sensitivity EnOcean -95dBm; ZigBee -101dBm/-105dBm (amplified)
Range Line of sight: EnOcean 100ft/30m; ZigBee peripherals 100ft/30m,
ZigBee MPM 300ft/100m
Communication ZigBee Pro, EnOcean, BACnet, CANbus (125-500Kbps),
Ethernet(10/100Mbps), Modbus
Supported Protocols BACnet, EWS, oBIX, FTP, EnOcean, ZigBee, CANbus, Modbus
Memory 64MB Flash
Processor ARM9 32-bit, 400MHz
Sensor Type Flow Sensor
Range -2 to 2 in WC, Accuracy: 3% m.v.
Data Storage 2GB flash for local storage
Actuation Type Damper Actuator
Torque 45in-lb (5Nm), Rotation: 0 to 95°, Shaft Diameter: 1/4" to 3/4"
Antenna External whip, RP SMA Connector
Clock Backup Real-time clock, Battery backed (10,000 hrs)
Enclosure Rigid ABS, UL94V0-5VB
Input 6 universal, configurable, 14-bit resolution (analog: 4-20mA, 0-10V;
digital: dry contact, thermistor: 1-100K)
Maximum Number Of Wireless
Modules EnOcean (wireless): 128 points; ZigBee (wireless): 30 peripherals
Output 2 relay (24V, 1.1A each), 4 analog
(0-12V, 50mA max, 12-bit resolution)
Storage Temperature -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Operating Temperature 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C
Operating Humidity 00 to 90% non-codensing90% RH non-codensing
Mounting Din-rail, wall or ceiling mount
Dimensions 7.52"H x 5.55"W x 2.48"D (191 x 141 x 63 mm)
Weight 1.5 lbs (0.68 kg)
Approvals UL916, CSA, FCC, ICES-003, CE, Japanese Radio Law, RoHS
Warranty 1.5 years
SPECIFICATIONS
Manager EnOceanZ igBeeI/O VAV
Part numbers
Building
Expert
StruxureWare
integration
315 MHz
868 MHz
902 MHz
High
power
6 inputs
6 outputs
Modbus
Flow sensor
Actuator
MPM-VA-004-5045 xx xxxx x
MPM-VA-0I4-5045 xx x xxx
xx
MPM-VA-C04-5045 xx x xxxx x
MPM-VA-CI4-5045
xx x x xx x
xx
MPM-VA-D04-5045 xx x xxxx x
MPM-VA-DI4-5045 xx xx xxxx x
MPM-VA-E04-5045 xx x xxxx x
MPM-VA-EI4-5045 xx xx xxxx x
MPM-VS-004-5045
xx xx xx
MPM-VS-0I4-5045 xx x xxxx
MPM-VS-C04-5045
xx x xx xx
MPM-VS-CI4-5045 xx xx xxx x
MPM-VS-D04-5045
xx x xx xx
MPM-VS-DI4-5045 xx xx xxxx
MPM-VS-E04-5045
xx x xx xx
MPM-VS-EI4-5045 xx xx xxxx
Note:• Certification training through Schneider Electric is required before ordering.
Call Kele for details.
• USA uses 902 MHz and 315 MHz frequencies for EnOcean.
Europe uses 868 MHz frequency.
March 2014

868. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 816fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ZIGBEE WIRELESS I/O MODULE
SMARTSTRUXURE LITE SEC SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The SEC Series Smart Terminal Controllers enable the
wireless control of a wide variety of equipment to optimize
use, comfort and power consumption
. They are the control
arm of MPM series devices, all part of the SmartStruxure™ Lite line of products
. The SEC-TE is equipped with the
smallest control engine in the industry. It supports local
scripting/programmability, providing distributed intelligence and enabling redundant control solutions
.
FEATURES
• Pr •
Real-time response to scripting
• 802.15.4 Wireless Zigbee protocol
Transformer wiring
ZigBee
(optional pink striped
antenna for 2.4GHz)
R5A
R5B
R4A
R4B
R3B
Live
R2B
Live
R1B
Live
Neutral
Neutral
Neutral
Neutral
GND
AI1 AI2
AI3*
AI4
GND
AO1 AO2 AO3 AO4
NC NC
24VAC
GND
*AI3 can be used
for pulse counting
GND
AI1 AI2
AI3*
AI4
GND
AO1 AO2 AO3 AO4
NC NC
24VAC
GND
R5A R5B R4A R4B R3B Live R2B Live R1B Live Neutral Neutral Neutral Neutral
Only on 115VAC
and 230VAC
models
WIRING
108mm
(4.25 in)
176mm (6.93 in)
56mm
(2.20 in)
for DIN rail mount
DIMENSIONS
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC,
50/60Hz
Frequency ZigBee: 2.4GHz, 16RF Channels
Receiver Sensitivity -101dBm/-105dBm (amplified)
Range Line of sight: 100ft/30m
Communication 802.15.4 ZigBee
Supported Protocols ZigBee
Antenna Internal, Optional external whip, RP
SMA Connector
Enclosure Rigid ABS, UL94V0-5VB
Input 4 universal, configurable, 14-bit
resolution (analog: 4-20mA, 0-10V;
digital: dry contact, thermistor: 1-100K)
Output 5 line-power relays
(230VAC max, 5A each), 4 analog (0-12V, 50mA max, 12-bit resolution)
Storage Temperature
-4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Operating Temperature 0° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 00 to 90% non-codensing90% RH non-
condensing
Mounting Din-rail, wall or ceiling mount
Dimensions 4.25"H x 6.93"w x 2.20"D
(108 x 176 x 56 mm)
Weight 1.3 lbs (0.59 kg)
Approvals UL916, CSA, FCC, ICES-003, CE,
Japanese Radio Law, RoHS
Warranty 1.5 years
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
SECTE
ZigBee I/OP ower
Part numbers
High power
External
antenna
4 universal
inputs
4 analog
outputs
5 digital
outputs
110-120 VAC
220-240 VAC
24 VAC
SEC-TEA-115-5045 xx xx x
SEC-TEA-230-5045 xx xx x
SEC-TEA-24-5045x xx
xx
SEC-TEA-R-115-5045 xx xxxx
SEC-TEA-R-230-5045 xx xxxx
SEC-TEA-R-24-5045x xxxx x
SEC-TEB-115-5045 xx xx
SEC-TEB-230-5045 xx xx
SEC-TEB-24-5045x xx x
SEC-TEB-R-115-5045 xx xx x
SEC-TEB-R-230-5045 xx xx x
SEC-TEB-R-24-5045x xx xx
Note:• Certification training through Schneider Electric is required before ordering.
Call Kele for details.
March 2014

869. fi 817NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ENOCEAN WIRELESS ROOM CONTROLLER
E3X-MRCFP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
These small transceivers respond to self-powered wireless
occupancy sensors and light switches and other ILLUMRA
RF transmitters
. The Room Controllers may receive input
from wired occupancy sensors to automatically turn off lights when no one is in a room
. Additionally, the room controllers
can extend the reach of wired sensors by wirelessly transmitting sensor status to other ILLUMRA receivers
.
FEATURES
• Installs in minutes
• Easy configuration
• Requires no switch leg wires
• Communicates with ILLUMRA switches, sensors and transmitters
• Error checking ensures response only to appropriate wireless switches
• One transmitter can control unlimited receivers within range
• Can act as a repeater to extend range
Single Pole or Multi-way Wireless Switch (1 or more wireless light switches)
BATTERY-FREE,
WIRELESSSWITCHES
MANYSWITCHES,WIREDSENSORAND/ORWIRELESSSENSOR,1RECEIVER,3ZONES
ACPOWERRELAYCONTACT
+24VDC
FIXTURE
HOT
WHITE
BLACK
GREENORBARE
NEUTRAL
GROUND
BREAKERPANEL
GND
VCC
OUT2
OUT3
OUT1
+24VDC
CONTROLON
HOLDOFF
YELLOW
BROWN
RED
BLACK
COMMON
HOLDON
BLUE
NWO-R12-R27NP1
CONTROLON
HOLDOFF
YELLOW
BROWN
BLUE
BLACK
RED
HOLDON
COMMON
RED
RELAYCONTACT
RED
ACPOWERNEUTRAL
ACPOWER277V
RELAYCONTACT
ACPOWER120V
BLACK
WHITE
BROWN
RED
ACPOWER
BLACK
GROUND
GREENORBARE
ACPOWER
WHITE
BLACK
FIXTURE
FIXTURE
RED
NWO-R12-R27NP1
CONTROLON
HOLDOFF
BROWN
COMMON
BLUE
HOLDON
YELLOW
BLACK
NWO-R12-R27NP1
+24VDC
RED
ACPOWERNEUTRAL
BROWN
ACPOWER120V
RELAYCONTACT
RED
WHITE
BLACK
ACPOWER277V
ACPOWERNEUTRAL
ACPOWER120V
RELAYCONTACT
RELAYCONTACT
WHITE
BLACK
RED
ACPOWER277V
BROWN
BLACK
GROUND
GREENORBARE
ACPOWER
WHITE
ACPOWER
GREENORBARE
GROUND
ACPOWER
WHITE
COMMON
+24VDC
CONTROLOUTPUT
IN1
ANY3-WIRE24VDCSENSOR
BATTERY-FREE,WIRELESS
SENSOR
E3X-MRCFP-04
WIRING
E3X-MRCFP-04
March 2014

870. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 818fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
ENOCEAN WIRELESS ROOM CONTROLLER
E3X-MRCFP SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
E3X-MRCFP-04 Room controller, 0 inputs, 4 outputs, 8-28VDC, 315MHz
E3X-MRCFP-13 Room controller, 1 input, 3 outputs, 8-28VDC, 315 MHz
E3X-MRCFP-22 Room controller, 2 inputs, 2 outputs, 8-28VDC, 315 MHz
Supply Voltage 8-30VDC
Channels
E3X-MRCFP-04 4 outputs

E3X-MRCFP-13
3 outputs, 1 input
ESX-MRCFP-22 2 outputs, 2 inputs
Communication EnOcean wireless
Output Rating 100mA max. per channel
Transmit Frequency 315 MHz
Transmit Range 50-150 feet
Operating Temperature -13° to 140°F (-25° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing
Dimensions 1.30"W x 2.88"H x 0.67"L
(3.30 x 7.32 x 1.70 cm)
Weight 0.1 lbs (0.05 kg)
Approvals FCC, IC
Warranty 3 years
SPECIFICATIONS
ENOCEAN WIRELESS PLUG-IN RELAY RECEIVER AND DIMMER
E3X-X12GP SERIES
Supply Voltage 120VAC
Supply Watts 1W
Transmit Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz
Transmit Range 50-150 feet
Contact Rating
E3X-D12GP 2.5A
E3X/E9X-R12GP 6A
Connections 110V plug & receptacle
Communication EnOcean wireless
Operating Temperature -13° to 122°F (-25° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing
Enclosure Plastic
Mounting Plug in
Dimensions 2.07"W x 3.26"H x 1.42"D
(8.2 x 5.3 x 3.6 cm)
Weight 0.5 lbs (0.23 kg)
Approvals ETL: UL244A (USA), CSAc22.2#14-05
(Canada); FCC, IC
Warranty 3 years
DESCRIPTION
The wirelessly controlled ILLUMRA Plug-in Relay Receiver responds to self- powered wireless light switches and other ILLUMRA transmitters to provide ON/ OFF control of lights and other plug-in devices
. The receiver may also respond
to signals from wireless occupancy sensors to provide automatic control of electrical loads
. The easy-to-install Plug-in Dimmer/Relay Receiver provides
dimming and relay (on/off) control of lamps and other devices.
FEATURES
• Plugs into any 120V outlet
• Fast, simple programming
• Requires no switch-leg wires
• DIM or ON/OFF control of lights
SPECIFICATIONS
E3X-R12GP
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
E3X-D12GP Plug-in dimmer/relay, 120 VAC, 300W, 50/60 Hz, 315 MHz
E3X-R12GP Plug-in relay, 120 VAC, 500W, 3A ballast, 6A general 50/60 Hz, 315 MHz
E9X-R12GP Plug-in relay, 120 VAC, 500W, 3A ballast, 6A general 50/60 Hz, 902 MHz
March 2014

871. fi 819NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ENOCEAN WIRELESS DIMMER/CONTROLLER
E3X-DXXFP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The ILLUMRA Dimmers respond to wireless light switches
and transmitters to control dimmable LED power supplies or
dimmable fluorescent ballasts
. The dimmer can also turn off
or dim lights based on signals from wireless or wired sensors detecting occupancy or available natural light
. The wirelessly
controlled LED dimmer is perfect for energy-saving applications such as architectural dimming, daylighting, load shedding, and manual ON / automatic OFF control
. The dimmer may also be
used for custom lighting applications.
FEATURES
• Installs in minutes
• Easy configuration
• Requires no switch leg wires
• Variable or ON/OFF control of LEDs, fluorescent lights, or actuators
• A single transmitter can control unlimited dimmers in range
• Can function as a repeater
TWO-WIRE CONTROL INTERFACE .
ANY 24VDC WIRED SENSOR
WIRELESS CONT ROL
SIGNAL
E3X-D02FP
OR
E3X-D02FP-M
WIRELESS CONT ROL
SIGNAL
IN-
8-28 VDC IN+
MOT IN+
CTL IN+
OUT-
OUT+
ALWAYS
INSTALL
DEVICES IN
ACCORDANCE
WITH LO CAL
ELECTRICAL
CODES AND
REGULATIONS
HIGH
VOLTAGE
WIRING
LOW
VOLTAGE
WIRING
BLACK COMMON (-)
RED +12VDC OR 24VDC OUT (+)
ANY 12VDC OR
24VDC POWER
SUPPLY
ANY 12VDC OR
24VDC
DIMMABLE LED
FIXTURE UP TO
5 AMPS
BREAKER PANEL
WHITE NEUTRAL
BLACK LINE
- +
GREY VIOLET
ILLUMRA EnOcean
Wireless
Switch
Wired
Switch
EnOcean
Wireless
Sensors
LED DIMMER WITH
WIRELESS CONTROL,
HARD-WIRED CONTROL
AND OCCUPANCY SENSOR
INPUT
WIRING
E3X-DxxFP
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
E3X-D01FP Wireless 0-10V controller, on/off control, 12-30VDC, 315 MHz
E3X-D02FP Wireless constant voltage LED dimmer, PWM, 8-30VDC, 315 MHz
E3X-D02FP-M Wireless constant voltage LED dimmer, master, 315 MHz
Supply Voltage 8-30VDC
Communication EnOcean wireless
Output Rating 5A
Connections
E3X-D01FP Power, 0-10V output, relay control output
E3X-D02FP Power, PWM dimming output
E3X-D02FP-M Power, PWM dimming output, 0-10V input
Transmit Frequency 315 MHz
Transmit Range 50-150 feet
Operating Temperature -13° to 140°F (-25° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing
Enclosure Plastic
Dimensions 1.30"W x 2.88"H x 0.67"D
(3.30 x 7.32 x 1.70 cm)
Weight 0.1 lbs (0.05 kg)
Approvals FCC, IC
Warranty 3 years
SPECIFICATIONS

872. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 820fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
3 WIRE ENOCEAN WIRELESS RELAY RECEIVER
E3X-RXX-3HOTP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
ILLUMRA single channel relay receivers allow lights to be
controlled by ILUMRA self-powered switches, remotes, and
sensors
. The line-voltage relays help simplify advanced
wireless lighting control.
FEATURES
• Installs in minutes, programs in seconds
• Requires no switch leg or traveler wires
• Compatible with ILLUMRA transmitters
• Each unit stores up to 25 light switch IDs
• Error checking on all packet transfers
NEUTRAL
WHITE
GROUND
GREEN OR BARE
N.O.
RED
AC POWER
AC POWER
BLACK
WHITE
HOT
BLACK
BREAKER PANEL
FIXTURE
GROUND
GREEN OR BARE
AC POWER
WHITE
RED
BATTER Y-FREE,
WIRELESS SWITCH ES
OR OTHER TRANSMITTERS
WIRELESS
CONTROL
SIGNAL
UP TO
150 FT.
E3T-S2AWHE3T-S1AWH
E3X-R12-3HOTP
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
E3X-R12-3HO
TP
3 wire relay receiver, nipple mounted, 120 VAC, 500W, 315 MHz
E3X-R24-3HOTP 3 wire relay receiver, nipple mounted, 240 VAC, 1000W, 315 MHz
E3X-R27-3HOTP 3 wire relay receiver, nipple mounted, 277 VAC, 1150W, 315 MHz
E9X-R12-3HOTP 3 wire relay receiver, nipple mounted, 120 VAC, 1500W, 902 MHz
E9X-R24-3HOTP 3 wire relay receiver, nipple mounted, 240 VAC, 3000W, 902 MHz
E9X-R27-3HOTP 3 wire relay receiver, nipple mounted, 277 VAC, 3400W, 902 MHz
Supply Voltage
ExR-R12-3HOTP 120 VAC
ExR-R24-3HOTP 240 VAC
ExR-R27-3HOTP 277 VAC
Supply Watts 1W
Contact Rating 3A, 8A
Relay Type A
Transmit Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz
Transmit Range 50-150 feet
Operating Temperature 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing
Communication EnOcean wireless
Mounting Threaded nipple
Enclosure Plastic
Color White
Dimensions 1.73"W x 2.11"H x 1.09"D (4.39 x
5.36 x 2.77 cm)
Weight 0.3 lbs (0.14 kg)
Approvals ETL: UL244A (USA), CSAc22.2#14-
05 (Canada); FCC, IC
Warranty 3 years
SPECIFICATIONS
E3X-R12-3HOTP

873. fi 821NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
5 WIRE ENOCEAN WIRELESS RELAY RECEIVER AND REPEATER
E3X-RXX-5IBTP SERIES
Supply Voltage
E3X-R02-5IBTP 24 VAC
E3X-R12-5IBTP 120 VAC
E3X-R24-5IBTP 240 VAC
E3X-R27-5IBTP 277 VAC
Transmit Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz
Transmit Range 50-150 feet
Contact Rating 8A
Relay Type C
Communication EnOcean wireless
Operating Temperature 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing
Mounting Threaded nipple
Enclosure Plastic
Dimensions 1.73"W x 2.11"H x 1.09"D
(4.39 x 5.36 x 2.77 cm)
Weight 0.3 lbs (0.14 kg)
Approvals ETL: UL244A (USA), CSAc22.2#14-
05 (Canada); FCC, IC
Warranty 3 years
DESCRIPTION
ILLUMRA single channel relay receivers and repeaters allow
lights and fans to be controlled by ILUMRA self-powered
wireless switches and sensors
. The line-voltage relays help
simplify advanced wireless lighting control.
FEATURES
• Installs in minutes, programs in seconds
• Requires no switch leg or traveler wires
• Compatible with all ILLUMRA transmitters
• 50-150 foot range (typical)
• Each unit stores up to 25 light switch IDs
• Error checking ensures receiver only responds to
appropriate wireless transmitters
Single Pole or Multi-way Wireless Switch (1 or more wireless light switches)*
E3R-R12-5IBBP
BREAKER PANEL
HOT
NEUTRAL
GREEN OR BARE
WHITE
GROUND
BLACK
RED
N.O.
COMMON
YELLOW
BLUE
N.C.
AC POWER
AC POWER
WHITE
BLACK
GREEN OR BARE
AC POWER
WHITE
GROUND
FIXTURE
RED
BATTERY-FREE,
WIRELESS SWITCH ES
WIRELESS
CONTROL
SIGNAL
UP TO
150 FT.
E3T-S1AWHE 3T-S2AWH
E3X-R12-5IBTP
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
E3X-Rxx-5IBTP
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
E3X-R02-5IBTP 5 wire relay receiver w/repeater, nipple mounted, 24 VAC, 315 MHz
E3X-R12-5IBTP 5 wire relay receiver w/repeater, nipple mounted, 120 VAC, 315 MHz
E3X-R24-5IBTP 5 wire relay receiver w/repeater, nipple mounted, 240 VAC, 315 MHz
E3X-R27-5IBTP 5 wire relay receiver w/repeater, nipple mounted, 277 VAC, 315 MHz
E9X-R02-5IBTP 5 wire relay receiver w/repeater, nipple mounted, 24 VAC, 902 MHz
E9X-R12-5IBTP 5 wire relay receiver w/repeater, nipple mounted, 120 VAC, 902 MHz
E9X-R24-5IBTP 5 wire relay receiver w/repeater, nipple mounted, 240 VAC, 902 MHz
E9X-R27-5IBTP 5 wire relay receiver w/repeater, nipple mounted, 277 VAC, 902 MHz

874. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 822fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
ENOCEAN WIRELESS LOW VOLTAGE RELAY RECEIVER
E3R-R04FP SERIES
Supply Voltage 8-30VAC, 8-28VDC
Supply Watts 2W max.
Transmit Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz
Transmit Range 50-150 feet
Relay Type C, A
Communication EnOcean wireless
Digital Outputs 4, 8 relay outputs
Contact Rating 2A
Operating Temperature -13° to 140°F (-25° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing
Enclosure Plastic
Mounting Panel
Dimensions 3.2"W x 5.1"H x 1.13"D
(8.13 x 12.95 x 2.87 cm)
Weight 0.3 lbs (0.14 kg)
Approvals FCC, IC
Warranty 3 years
DESCRIPTION
The Low Voltage Relay Receiver connects wireless light
switches and sensors to new or existing control systems. The
low voltage receiver responds to up to 80 different transmitters and provides 4 or 8 output channels (dry contact or 8-30V for relay and contactor applications)
. The outputs can be
programmed as either momentary or maintained contacts.
FEATURES
• Contr •
Responds to up to 80 transmitters
• Dry contact output channels for relay/contactor applications
• Outputs can be programmed as either momentary or maintained contacts.
FORM- C RELAYS:
THERE ARE FOUR RELAYS IN THE DEVICE . EACH
RELAY HAS THREE TERMINALS AVAILABLE FOR
EXTERN AL CONNECTIONS: COMMON, NORMALLY OPEN,
AND NORMALLY CLOSED.
RELAY COMMON TERMINALS:
EACH OF THE FOUR RELAYS HAS A COMMON
TERMINAL. THE COMMON TERMINALS ARE NOT
CONNECTED TO EACH OTHER INSIDE THE DEVICE. IN
THE EXAMPLE SHOWN, THE COM MON TERMINALS ARE
EXTERN ALLY CONNECTED TO THE PO SITIVE SUPPLY
VOLTAGE. HOWEVER, THE COMMON TERMINALS CAN
BE CONNECTED TO ANY VOLTAGE WITHIN THE
SPECIFICATIONS OF THE RELAY TERMINALS. SEE
DATASHEET.
WIRELESS
CONTROL
SIGNAL
UP TO
150 FT.
LINE OF SIGHT
ANY 8-28VAC
OR 8-30VDC
POWER
ADAPTER
(SOLD
SEPARATELY) ANY LOW
VOLTAGE
LOAD
(FLASHLIGHT
BULBS
SHOWN) .
LD-4C
LD-3C
LD-2C
LD-1C
8-30VDC
8-28VAC
POWER
+ -
NO1 C1 NC1
NO2 C2 NC2NO3 C3 NC3NO4 C4 NC4
R1 R2 R2 R2
LD-4O
LD-3O
LD-2O
LD-1O
E3T-S1AWH
BATTERY-FREE,
WIRELESS SWITCHES
E3T-S2AWH
LOADS CONNECTED
TO THE NORMALLY
CLOSED CONTACTS
WILL BE TURNED
ON UNTIL A
WIRELESS SWITCH
ACTIVATES THEIR
RESPECTIVE
CHANNEL. HERE,
LOAD LD-2C IS OFF,
BECAUSE CHANNEL
2 HAS BEEN
ACTIVED BY ONE OF
THE WIRE LESS
SWITCHES.
LOADS CONNECTED
TO THE NORMALLY
OPEN CONTACTS
WILL BE TURNED
OFF UNTIL A
WIRELESS SWITCH
ACTIVATES THEIR
RESPECTIVE
CHANNEL. HERE,
LOAD LD-2O IS ON,
BECAUSE CHANNEL
2 HAS BEEN
ACTIVED BY ONE OF
THE WIRE LESS
SWITCHES.
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
E3R-R04FP-4 4 channel low voltage relay receiver, 8-28VAC/VDC, 315 MHz
E3R-R04FP-8 8 channel low voltage relay receiver, 8-28VAC/VDC, 315 MHz
E9R-R04FP-4 4 channel low voltage relay receiver, 8-28VAC/VDC, 902 MHz
E9R-R04FP-8 8 channel low voltage relay receiver, 8-28VAC/VDC, 902 MHz
SPECIFICATIONS
E3R-R04FP

875. fi 823NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
ENOCEAN WIRELESS SWITCH LEG TRANSMITTER
E3T-RXX-2INTP SERIES
Supply Voltage
E3T-R02-2INTP 24VAC, 50/60Hz
E3T-R12-2INTP 120VAC, 50/60Hz
E3T-R24-2INTP 240VAC, 50/60Hz
E3T-R27-2INTP 277VAC, 50/60Hz
Transmit Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz
Transmit Range 50-150 feet
Operating Temperature 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing
Communication EnOcean Wireless
Mounting Threaded nipple
Enclosure Plastic
Dimensions

1.73"W x 2.11"H x 1.09"D
(4.39 x 5.36 x 2.77 cm)
Weight 0.15 lbs (0.07kg)
Approvals ETL: UL244A (USA), CSAc22.2
#14-05 (Canada); FCC, IC
Warranty 3 years
DESCRIPTION
The ILLUMRA Single Channel Switch Leg Transmitter (SLT)
replaces wire between an electrical device and a control switch.
The SL
T senses status of photocell, timer, or manual switch
master circuit to control wireless slave receiver(s)
.
These transmitters communicate with ILLUMRA's E3R-x and
E9R-x series of receivers and E3X-x and E9X-x series of transceiver controllers (model frequency dependent)
.
FEATURES
• Installs in minutes
• Easy-to-configure
• Eliminates need for switch-leg wires
• Unique ID of each SLT activates only the intended reciever(s)
Basic Installation of Switch Leg Transmitter
BATTER Y-FREE,
WIRELESS SWITCHES
CAN ALSO CONTROL
NEW LOAD
BLACK
GROUND
NEUTRAL
GREEN OR BARE
WHITE
BREAKER PANEL #1
HOT
GREEN OR BARE
GROUND
AC POWER
BLACK
WHITE
AC POWER
LOAD
ON/OFF SWITCH
OFF
N.O.
RED
COM.
BLACK
E3T-R12-2INTP
BLACK
ACPOWER
ACPOWER
WHITE
BLACK
E3X-R12-5IBTP
YELLOW
RED
N.O.
COMMON
GROUND
GREEN OR BARE
N.C.
BLUE
ACPOWER
BROWN
BROWN
ACPOWER
GROUND
GREEN OR BARE
AC POWER
RED
BREAKER PANEL #2
AC POWER
WIRELESS CONTROL SIGNAL
REPLACES SWITCH-LEG WIRES
EXISTING CIRCUIT WITH
SWITCHED LOAD
ADD A SWITCH-LEG
TRANSMITTER
ADD A NEW LOAD, WHICH MA Y BE
CONNECTED TO A DIFFERENT
BRANCH CIRCUIT. THE NEW LO AD
WILL BE CONTROLLED BY THE
EXISTING ON/OFF SWITCH.
LOAD
WIRELE SS SWITCH LEG SOLUTION
HOT
BLACK
NEUTRAL
WHITE
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
E3T
-R02-2INTP
Wireless SLT circuit interlock transmitter, 24V, 315 MHz
E3T-R12-2INTP Wireless SLT circuit interlock transmitter, 120V, 315 MHz
E3T-R24-2INTP Wireless SLT circuit interlock transmitter, 240V, 315 MHz
E3T-R27-2INTP Wireless SLT circuit interlock transmitter, 277V, 315 MHz
E9T-R02-2INTP Wireless SLT circuit interlock transmitter, 24V, 902 MHz
E9T-R12-2INTP Wireless SLT circuit interlock transmitter, 120V, 902 MHz
E9T-R24-2INTP Wireless SLT circuit interlock transmitter, 240V, 902 MHz
E9T-R27-2INTP Wireless SLT circuit interlock transmitter, 277V, 902 MHz
SPECIFICATIONS
E3T-Rxx-2INTP

876. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 824fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ENOCEAN WIRELESS REPEATER
E3X-RXX-REPTP SERIES
Supply Voltage
E3X-R02-REPTP 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
E3X-R12-REPTP 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
E3X-R24-REPTP 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
E3X-R27-REPTP 277 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Transmit Frequency 315 MHz
Transmit Range 50-150 feet
Operating Temperature 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing
Communication EnOcean wireless
Mounting Threaded Nipple
Enclosure Plastic
Dimensions 2.11"H x 1.73"W x 1.09"D
(5.36 x 4.39 x 2.77 cm)
Weight 0.15 lbs (0.07 kg)
Approvals ETL: UL244A (USA), CSAc22.2
#14-05 (Canada); FCC, IC
Warranty 3 yrs
DESCRIPTION
The ILLUMRA Repeater works to extend the wireless coverage area of ILLUMRA wireless networks
. It receives
wireless control signals and retransmits them to distant receivers or other repeaters
. The device is capable of one-
level and two-level repeating, effectively tripling the coverage distance otherwise achievable without using repeaters
. It is
easy to install and requires no setup or commissioning.
These repeaters communicate with ILLUMRA's E3T-x series
of transmitters, E3R-x series of receivers and E3X-x series of transceiver controllers
.
FEATURES
• One-le •
Fast, easy installation
• No setup required
• No commissioning required
SPECIFICATIONS
E3X-Rxx-REPTP
APPLICATION DIAGRAM
Transmitter
Level 1 repeater
Level 2 repeater
Coverage area without repeaters
Coverage area with Level-1 repeaters
Coverage area with Level-2 repeaters
x
2x
3x
*Using two levels of repeaters achieves up to triple the distance achievable without repeaters. Results will
vary, depending on site-specific conditions.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
E3X-R02-REPTP Repeater, 24 VAC, 315 MHz
E3X-R12-REPTP Repeater, 120 VAC, 315 MHZ
E3X-R24-REPTP Repeater, 240 VAC, 315 MHZ
E3X-R27-REPTP Repeater, 277 VAC, 315 MHZ
WIRING

877. fi 825NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ENOCEAN WIRELESS THERMOSTAT
E3X-TXX SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The ILLUMRA Thermostat uses wireless communication to provide quick and
easy implementation of energy-saving HVAC controls. When the thermostat
receives an “occupied” signal from an ILLUMRA wireless switch or sensor, it adjusts temperature set point to a narrow preset range (i
.e. 70°-72°F). When the
thermostat receives an “unoccupied” signal, it adjusts temperature set points to a wider range (i
.e. 62°-80°F).
This thermostat communicates with ILLUMRA's E3T-x series of transmitters,
E3R-x series of receivers and E3X-x series of transceiver controllers.
FEATURES
• Installs in minutes
• Easy configuration
• Requires no switch leg wires
• Responds automatically to occupancy or vacancy
WIRING
E3X-T02-U2W
Disable HVAC Unit When Existing Light Circuit is Turned Off
WIRELESS
CONTROL
SIGNAL
HOT
NEUTRAL
WHITE
GREEN OR BARE
GROUND
BLACK
BREAKER PANEL #1
ON/OFF SWITCH
OFF
N.O.
RED
BLACK
COM.
E3T-R12-2INTP
BLACK
WHITE
ACPOWER
ACPOWER
GREEN OR BARE
AC POWER
WHITE
AC POWER
GROUND
BLACK
LOAD
HVAC UNIT
E3X-T02-U2W
Key Card Switch Control of Thermostat
WIRELESS
CONTROL
SIGNAL
E3X-T02-U2 W
HVAC UNIT
E3T-C2AWH
KEY CARD SWITCH
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
E3X-T02-U2W 24VAC thermostat, 315 MHz
Supply Voltage 24 VAC
Transmit Frequency 315 MHz
Transmit Range 50-150 feet
Temp. Monitor Range 32.0° to 99.9°F (0.0° to 37.7°C)
Temp. Set Point Range 60° to 85°F (15.5° to 29.5°C)
Accuracy ± 1°F (0.5°C)
Max Loads 1.5 amp/circuit
Fan Control Selectable: Auto cycle, low, medium, high,
economy, off
Heat/Cool Control 1 heat and cool circuit, heat pump reversing
valve circuit
Communication EnOcean wireless
Display Type LCD
Operating Temperature 14° to 131°F (10° to 55°C)
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing
Enclosure Plastic
Dimensions 3.5"W x 5.0"H x 1.5"D
(8.9 x 12.7 x 3.8 cm)
Weight 0.5 lbs (0.23 kg)
Approvals FCC, IC
Warranty 3 years
SPECIFICATIONS

878. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 826fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ENOCEAN WIRELESS EUROPEAN LIGHT SWITCHES
E3T-SXE SERIES
ENOCEAN WIRELESS LIGHT SENSOR
E3T-SLICP
Supply Voltage Self-powered with solar cell
Battery Optional 1/2 AA Lithium (#14250)
Transmit Frequency 315 MHz
Transmit Range 50-150 feet
Communication EnOcean wireless
LED Indication TX
Illuminance Range 0-1024 lux ± 10%
Operating Temperature -13° to 140°F (-25° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing
Enclosure Plastic
Mounting Screws / 2 sided tape
Dimensions 3.7"W x 3.5"H x 1.1"D
(9.39 x 8.89 x 2.79 cm)
Weight 0.2 lbs (0.09 kg)
Approvals FCC, IC, RoHS
Warranty 3 years
DESCRIPTION
ILLUMRA Wireless Battery-Free Light Sensor saves time,
energy, and money by avoiding costly and time-consuming
installation of hardwired daylighting controls
. The light sensor
saves energy by lowering the output of artificial light when daylight is present in a room, saving up to 60 percent of the energy
. The sensor can be used in open-loop and closed-loop
daylight-harvesting applications.
This light sensor communicates with ILLUMRA's E3R-x
series of receivers and E3X-x series of transceiver controllers.
FEATURES
• Installs in minutes
• Easy configuration
• Compatible with a wide variety of ILLUMRA dimmers
and relays
• Open-loop or closed-loop applications
• Turn off or dim lights to save energy
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
E3T-SLICP Wireless light sensor, 315 MHz
SPECIFICATIONS
E3T-SLICP
DESCRIPTION
ILLUMRA European style light switches are wireless and battery-free, delivering a no maintenance solution
. Pressing the switch provides the energy needed to transmit a
wireless signal that controls lights or other devices connected to ILLUMRA receivers.
These switches communicate with ILLUMRA's E3R-x and E9R-x series of receivers
and E3X-x and E9X-x series of transceiver controllers (model frequency dependent).
FEATURES
• Mount s •
Create 3-way and 4-way switches
• Control lights, motors, or other electrical loads
• Reconfigure or relocate as needed
• Unique (theft) tamper-resistant design
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
E3T
-S1EBK
European single rocker, 315 MHz, black
E3T-S1EWH European single rocker, 315 MHz, white
E3T-S2EBK European dual rocker, 315 MHz, black
E3T-S2EWH European dual rocker, 315 MHz, white
E9T-S1EBK European single rocker, 902 MHz, black
E9T-S1EWH European single rocker, 902 MHz, white
E9T-S2EBK European dual rocker, 902 MHz, black
E9T-S2EWH European dual rocker, 902 MHz, white
Supply Voltage Self-powered when switch is pressed
Transmit Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz
Transmit Range 50-150 feet
Communication EnOcean wireless
Operating Temperature -13° to 149°F (-25° to 65°C)
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH, non-condensing
Enclosure Plastic
Mounting Screws / 2 sided tape
Dimensions 3.16"W x 3.16"D x 0.40"D
(8.03 x 8.03 x 1.02 cm)
Weight 0.15 lbs (0.07 kg)
Approvals FCC, IC
Warranty 3 years
SPECIFICATIONS
E3T-S1Exx

879. fi 827NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ENOCEAN WIRELESS HANDHELD REMOTE
E3T-S2H SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
ENOCEAN WIRELESS KEY CARD READER
E3T-C2AWH
DESCRIPTION
The ILLUMRA Key Card Switch needs no wires or batteries. Inserting
a key card provides the energy to transmit a wireless signal that
controls lights or other devices connected to ILLUMRA receivers.
These key card readers communicate with ILLUMRA's E3R-x and
E9R-x series of receivers and E3X-x and E9X-x series of transceiver controllers (model frequency dependent)
.
FEATURES
• Contr •
Use with most room key cards
• Installs in minutes
Supply Voltage Self-powered when key card is inserted/
removed
Transmit Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz
Transmit Range 50-150 feet
Communication EnOcean wireless
Operating Temperature -13° to 149°F (-25° to 65°C)
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing
Enclosure Plastic
Mounting Screws / 2 sided tape
Dimensions 3.05"W x4.65"H x 1.04"D
(7.75 x 11.81 x 2.64 cm)
Weight 0.3 lbs (0.14 kg)
Approvals FCC, IC
Warranty 3 years
SPECIFICATIONS
E3T-C2AWH
MODEL DESCRIPTION
E3T-C2AWH Wireless key card reader, 315 MHz
E9T-C2AWH Wireless key card reader, 902 MHz
March 2014
DESCRIPTION
ILLUMRA self-powered light switches use no wires or batteries. Pressing the switch
provides the energy needed to transmit a wireless signal that controls lights or other devices connected to ILLUMRA recievers
. The Handheld Self-Powered Wireless Light
Switch is small enough to fit in the palm of your hand – keep it in your pocket, on a table, or leave it in your car to turn on lights as you pull up to a house or building
.
These handheld remotes communicate with ILLUMRA's E3R-x and E9R-x series of
receivers and E3X-x and E9X-x series of transceiver controllers (model frequency dependent)
.
FEATURES
• Contr •
Use in single pole, 3-way, or 4-way switch applications
• One switch can control unlimited receivers within range
• Experience wireless dimming control or rocker, toggle, or momentary switch functionality
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
E3T
-S2HBK
Handheld remote wireless light switch, 315 MHz, black
E3T-S2HWH Handheld remote wireless light switch, 315 MHz, white
E9T-S2HBK Handheld remote wireless light switch, 902 MHz, black
E9T-S2HWH Handheld remote wireless light switch, 902 MHz, white
Supply Voltage Self-powered when switch is pressed
Transmit Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz
Transmit Range 50-150 feet
Communication EnOcean wireless
Operating Temperature -13° to 149°F (-25° to 65°C)
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing
Enclosure Plastic
Mounting Screws / 2 sided tape
Dimensions 1.85"W x 3.15"H x 0.7"D
(4.70 x 8.00 x 1.78 cm)
Weight 0.15 lbs (0.07 kg)
Approvals FCC, IC
Warranty 3 years
SPECIFICATIONS
E3T-S2HWH

880. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 828fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
ENOCEAN WIRELESS SWITCHES
E3T-SXA SERIES
Supply Voltage Self-powered when switch is pressed
Transmit Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz
Transmit Range 50-150 feet
Communication EnOcean wireless
Operating Temperature -13° to 149°F (-25° to 65°C)
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing
Enclosure Plastic
Mounting Standard switch box or surface mounted
using screws or adhesive
Dimensions 2.75"W x 4.5"H x 0.62"D
(6.99 x 11.43 x 1.58 cm)
Weight 0.25 lbs (0.11 kg)
Approvals FCC, IC
Warranty 3 years
DESCRIPTION
ILLUMRA Self-powered Wireless Light Switches are powered
by EnOcean technology that converts the press of the switch
into a small amount of electricity
. This electricity is used to
transmit a wireless signal that communicates with a wide variety of ILLUMRA Receivers
. Battery-free wireless light
switches are primarily used to control lights in homes or businesses but they can be used to control virtually any on/ off device
. Each Self-powered Wireless Light Switch can be
placed anywhere within range of a receiver. Traditionally the
wireless light switch is surface mounted on a wall with screws or industrial tape but can also be used in a standard switch box or as a wireless hand held remote
.
These switches communicate with ILLUMRA's E3R-x and
E9R-x series of receivers and E3X-x and E9X-x series of transceiver controllers (model frequency dependent)
.
FEATURES
• Installs in minutes
• Requires no wiring
• Easy to configure
• Unique ID of each switch activates only the intended reciever(s)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
EST
-S1ABK
Single rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, black
E3T
-S1ABR
Single rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, brown
E3T
-S1AGY
Single rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, gray
E3T
-S1AIV
Single rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, ivory
E3T-S1ALA Single rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, lt almond
E3T
-S1AWH
Single rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, white
E3T
-S2ABK
Dual rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, black
E3T
-S2ABR
Dual rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, brown
E3T
-S2AGY
Dual rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, gray
E3T
-S2AIV
Dual rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, ivory
E3T-S2ALA Dual rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, lt almond
E3T
-S2AWH
Dual rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, white
E9T
-S1ABK
Single rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, black
E9T
-S1ABR
Single rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, brown
E9T
-S1AGY
Single rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, gray
E9T
-S1AIV
Single rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, ivory
E9T-S1ALA Single rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, lt almond
E9T
-S1AWH
Single rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, white
E9T
-S2ABK
Dual rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, black
E9T
-S2ABR
Dual rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, brown
E9T
-S2AGY
Dual rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, gray
E9T
-S2AIV
Dual rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, ivory
E9T-S2ALA Dual rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, lt almond
E9T-S2AWH Dual rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, white
SPECIFICATIONS
E3T-S2AWHE3T-S1AWH
March 2014

881. fi 829NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ENOCEAN WIRELESS WINDOW/DOOR SENSOR
E3T-MDCCP
DESCRIPTION
The ILLUMRA Wireless Door/Window Sensor maximizes
the energy savings of heating and air conditioning systems
by providing wireless status of windows and/or doors
. The
sensor uses a magnet contact switch that is powered by a solar cell and communicates with a wide variety of ILLUMRA products
.
Energy waste can be reduced by 20 to 60 percent by
disabling blowers and/or adjusting temperature setpoints in HVAC systems when windows and doors are left open
.
The wireless Door/Windo
w Sensor is a key component to
reducing energy waste in hotel, condominium and dormitory buildings.
These sensors comm
unicate with ILLUMRA's E3R-x and
E9R-x series of receivers and E3X-x and E9X-x series of transceiver controllers (model frequency dependent)
.
FEATURES
• Solar powered — when fully charged, can run in total
darkness for several days
• No batteries - No Maintenance
• Install in minutes
• Eliminate the need to pull wires to sensors
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
E3T-MDCCP Window/door sensor with magnet contact, 315 MHz
E9T-MDCCP Window/door sensor with magnet contact, 902 MHz
Supply Voltage Self-powered, integrated solar cell
Transmit Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz
Transmit Range 15-60 feet
Communication EnOcean wireless
Operating Temperature -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing
Enclosure Plastic
Mounting Screws / 2 sided tape
Dimensions 0.62"W x 3.86"H x 0.81"L
(1.57 x 9.80 x 2.06 cm)
Weight 0.11 lbs (0.05 kg)
Approvals FCC, IC
Warranty 3 years
SPECIFICATIONS
E3T-MDCCP

882. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 830fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
March 2014
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TH-SR-L-WH Thanos Room,Large, White, 24V
TH-SR-L-BL Thanos Room, Large Black, 24V
TH-SR-LQ-WH Thanos Landscape,Large,White,24V
TH-SR-LQ-BL Thanos Landscape,Large,Black,24V
TH-SR-S-WH Thanos Room,Small, White, 24V
TH-SR-S-BL Thanos Room, Small, Black, 24V
MODEL
TH-SR-RH-L-WH Thanos Temp/RH,Large, White, 24V
TH-SR-RH-L-BL Thanos Temp/RH, Large Black, 24V
TH-SR-RH-LQ-WH Thanos,Temp/RH Landscape,White,24V
TH-SR-RH-LQ-BL Thanos,Temp/RH Landscape,Black,24V
TH-SR-RH-S-WH Thanos Temp/RH,Small, White, 24V
TH-SR-RH-S-BL Thanos Temp/RH,Small,Black, 24V
Supply Voltage 24 VAC, ±10%; 15-25 VDC, ±10%
Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz
Range Typical 70-100 ft
Communication EnOcean
Digital Inputs 4
Display Type Capacitive Touch, 3.5" TFT, 320x240
pixels, 262 colors
Humidity Accuracy ±3% (20-80% RH)
Humidity Range 0-100% RH
Setpoint Range Programmable
Temperature Range 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
Temperature Accuracy ±0.5K (0.9°F)
Interface Touch screen,SD card, Anodised
function clip, changeable function keypad
Operating Temperature
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 85% RH non condensing
Color White, Black
Antenna Internal
Enclosure NEMA 1
Dimensions TH-SR-L
7.76"W x 3.23"H x 0.73"D
(19.7 x 8.2 x 1.9 cm)

TH-SR-S
4.96"W x 3.23"H x 0.73"D
(12.6 x 8.2 x 1.9 cm)
Weight TH-SR-L
1.16 lb (0.53 kg)
TH-SR-S 0.83 lb (0.38 kg)
Approvals CE, FCC, Canada RSS, MIC, RoHS
Warranty 2 Years
ENOCEAN ROOM OPERATING PANEL
EASYSENS THANOS
DESCRIPTION
The EasySens Thanos is a touchscreen room operating panel designed for temperature and humidity detection as well as for integrated operation of HVAC, lighting and blind for single room control
. The device is ideal for design-oriented
applications. The operating functions can be flexibly adapted
to the most different room layouts.
FEATURES
• Contr •
Integrated temperature detection
• Optional with integrated humidity detection
• Bi-directional EnOcean Wireless Communication
• Touch surface made of glass for intuitive operation
SPECIFICATIONS
TH-SR-L-BL
WIRING
24V 100-240V
1
2
3
4
510
9 8
7
6
GND
UV 15-24VDC / 24AC
Power supply
DI4
DI2
DI3
DI1
1
2
3
4
510
9 8
7
6
Power supply100...240V AC
L(N)
N(L)
† Add -315 for 315 MHz or -902 for 902 MHz at the end of the part number to order.
† †

883. fi 831NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
ENOCEAN RECEIVER GATEWAYS
EASYSENS RECEIVER GATEWAYS
DESCRIPTION
The EasySens Recievers and Gateways are receiver interface
devices for EnOcean wireless sensors and switches to higher
level control systems via BACnet MS/TP, Modbus or LON
. The
STC65-x models are bi-directional transceiver gateways and the SRC65 model is an uni-directional receiver gateway
.
FEATURES
• EnOcean Wireless Technology
• Models Support Major Building Automation
Communication Protocols
• Easy to Install and Setup
Supply Voltage 15-24 VDC/24VAC +/-10%
Power Consumption SRC65-BACNET
1 watt
STC65-RS485-MODBUS 0.6 watt
STC65-FTT 0.5 watt
Antenna External with magnetic stand
Communication SRC65-BACNET
EnOcean Wireless/ BACNET
STC65-RS485- MODBUS
EnOcean Wireless/ MODBUS
STC65-FTT EnOcean Wireless/ LON
Frequency 315MHZ, 902MHz
Range 70 -100 FT, typical in building
Max Number of Wireless Devices SRC65-BACNET
32
STC65-RS485- MODBUS
32
STC65-FTT 16 uni-directional / 11bi-directional
Enclosure Plastic
Mounting Surface mount with screw terminals
Operating Temperature -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C)
Opperating Humidity 0 to 70% RH, non-condensing
Dimensions 3.07" x 2.28" x 1.79"
(78x 58 x 45.5mm)
Weight 0.62 lbs (0.28kg)
Approval CE,FCC,RoHS
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
SRC65-BACNET-315
March 2014
+vU
- dnG
A-suB
B-suB
+15-24VDC / 24VAC
GND
Bus B
BusA
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SRC65-B
ACNET
EnOcean/BACnet Receiver Gateway
STC65-FTT
-LON
EnOcean/LON Receiver and Transmitter
Gateway
STC65- RS485- MODBUS EnOcean/Modbus Receiver and Transmitter Gateway
STCx and SRCx
Wiring
†
† Add -315 for 315 MHz or -902 for 902 MHz at the end
of the part number to order.

884. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 832fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ENOCEAN RECEIVER CONTROLLERS
EASYSENS SRC RECEIVER CONTROLLERS
DESCRIPTION
The EasySens SRC Receiver Controller is a simple wireless
solution for room climate control. There are several model
options for heating and cooling control and analog outputs for variety of applications
.
FEATURES
• EnOcean Wireless Technology
• Easy to Setup with "Prog" and "Learn" buttons
• Model with Dimmer Capability Available
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC
Power Consumption SRC-DO2-24V-1
1.5 watts
SRC-AO-x 1 watt
Outputs SRC-DO2-24V-1
2 Relay Outputs
SRC-AO-x-V 1 analog 0-10V output, 20 mA max

SRC-AO-x-VV
2 analog 0-10V outputs, 20 mA max
Communication EnOcean Wireless
Antenna Internal
Frequency 315MHz, 902MHz
Range 70-100 ft, typical in building
Max Number of Wireless Devices
Up to 32 EnOcean Transmitters
Enclosure ABS plastic, Red
Mounting Surface mount with screw terminal
Operating Temperature -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 0-70% RH non-condensing
Dimensions 1.89" x 2.76" x 1.77"
(48 x 70 x 45 mm)
Weight 0.13 lb (0.06 kg)
Approval CE,FCC, RoHS
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
SRC-DO2
SRC-AO* Wiring Diagram
+24V /A C1
GND /A C2
AO1 0...10V
AO2 0...10V
-+
1OA
2OA
WIRING
GND
24V AC/DC
SRC-DO2 Wiring Diagram
+-
C
CSHSC
SHSC
R1 R2
Heat
MCool
M
PWM
PWM
max. 24V/ 3A
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SRC-DO2-24V
-1
Thermostat-Actuator, 2xDO, 24V
SRC-AO-MULTI-V Multi-Actuator, 1xAO, 0-10V, 24V
SRC-AO-MULTI-VV Multi-Actuator, 2xAO, 0-10V, 24V
SRC-AO-CLIMATE-VV Actuator for heating/cooling,
2xAO, 0-10V, 24V
SRC-AO-DIM-V Dimming-Actuator, 1xAO, 0-10V, 24V
SRC-AO-DIM-VV Dimming-Actuator, 2xAO, 0-10V, 24V
† Add -315 for 315 MHz or -902 for 902 MHz at the end
of the part number to order.

885. fi 833NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
N
L
Uv
Radio Rx
LEVIN2
LEVIN1
Externe Antenne
ExternalA ntenna
ORDERING INFORMATION
ENOCEAN WIRELESS REPEATER
EASYSENS REPEATER
DESCRIPTION
The EasySens Repeater is designed for low-level amplification
of radio signals between EnOcean sensors and receivers.
T
ypically, the repeater is used if the sensor location is outside
the receiving range or if there are range problems between sender and receiver with existing installations such as walls and appliances interfering the radio signals
.
FEATURES
• EnOcean Wireless Technology
• Easy to Use and Setup
• Internal and External Antenna Options
• Upto 2 Levels Repeating
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SRE-Repet/B-ext Repeater with Antenna, 315 MHz
Power Supply 24 VAC/VDC
Communication EnOcean Wireless
Antenna External
Frequency 315 MHz
Range 70-100ft, typical in building
Enclosure Plastic
Mounting Surface mount with screw terminal
Operating Temperature -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 70% RH, non-condensing
Dimensions 3.07"W x 1.79"H x 2.28"D
(78 x 45.5 x 58 mm)
Approvals CE, FCC, RoHS
Weight 0.8 lb (0.36 kg)
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
EasySens Repeater
March 2014
ACCESSORIES
ANT10 Extension for external antenna, length 32ft
ANT20 Extension for external antenna, length 65ft
WIRING

886. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 834fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
ENOCEAN LIGHTING, BLINDS AND SHUTTERS SWITCHES
EASYSENS SWITCHES
DESCRIPTION
The EasySens Switches are EnOcean wireless switches.
The
y are maintenance-free and self-powered through
electrodynamic energy generator inside the switch
.
These s
witches communicate with the Easysens Thanos,
SRCx and STCx series of receiver gateways, and SRCx
series of receiver controllers (model frequency dependent)
.
FEATURES
• EnOcean Wireless, Maintenance Free
• Lighting, Dimmer and Blind Control Models Available
• Single or Dual Swiches Models Available
• Multiple Decor Options
MODEL DESCRIPTION
LBJ-2CH-WH 2-CH Switch,lighting,White
LBJ-2CH-CR 2-CH Switch,lighting,Cream white
LBJ-2CH-ALU 2-CH Switch,lighting,Aluminium
LBJ-2CH-ANT 2-CH Switch,lighting,Anthracite
BBJ-2CH-WH 2-CH Switch,blinds/shutters,Davos White
BBJ-2CH-CR 2-CH Switch,blinds/shutters,Cream White
BBJ-2CH-ALU 2-CH Switch,blinds/shutters,Aluminium
BBJ-2CH-ANT 2-CH Switch,blinds/shutters,Anthracite
LBJ-4CH-PWH 4-CH Switch,Lighting,Pure White
LBJ-4CH-CR 4-CH Switch,lighting,Cream White
LBJ-4CH-ALU 4-CH Switch,Lighting,Aluminium
LBJ-4CH-ANT 4-CH Switch,Lighting,Anthracite
BBJ-4CH-WH 4-CH Switch,blinds/shutters,Pure White
BBJ-4CH-CR 4-CH Switch,blinds/shutters,Cream White
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BBJ-4CH-ALU 4-CH Switch,blinds/shutters,Aluminium
BBJ-4CH-ANT 4-CH Switch,blinds/shutters,Anthracite
LMI-2CH-WH 2-CH switch for lighting, Mini,White
LMI-2CH-ALU 2-CH Switch lighting, Mini, Aluminium
LMI-2CH-ANT 2-CH Switch, lighting, Mini, Anthracite
BMI-2CH-WH 2-CH Switch, blinds/shutters, Mini, pure white
BMI-2CH-ALU 2-CH Switch, blinds/shutters, Mini, Aluminium
BMI-2CH-ANT 2-CH Switch, blinds/shutters, Mini, Anthracite
LMI-4CH-WH 4-CH Switch,lighting, Mini, pure white
LMI-4CH-ALU 4-CH Switch, lighting, Mini, aluminium
LMI-4CH-ANT 4-CH Switch, lighting control, Mini, Anthracite
BMI-4CH-WH 4-CH Switch blinds/shutters, Mini, pure white
BMI-4CH-ALU 4-CH Switch, blinds/shutters,Mini, Aluminium
BMI-4CH-ANT 4-CH Switch blinds/shutters, Mini, Anthracite
Power Supply Self-powered when switch pressed
Communication EnOcean Wireless
Antenna Internal
Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz
Range 70-100 ft, typical in building
Enclosure Plastic
Mounting Surface mount
Operating Temperature -13° to 149°F (-25° to 65°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing
Dimensions
LBJ-x/BBJ-x 3.15"H x 3.15"W x 0.59"D
(80 x 80 x 15 mm)
LMI-x/BMI-x 2.4"H x 2.4"W x 0.59"D
(61 x 61 x 15 mm)
Approvals CE, FCC, RoHS
Weight
LBJ-x/BBJ-x 0.24 lb (0.11 kg)
LMI-x/BMI-x 0.15 lb (0.07 kg)
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
BBJ-2CH-WH
LBJ-2CH-CR
BBJ-4CH-WH
LBJ-4CH-ALU
March 2014
† Add -315 for 315 MHz or -902 for 902 MHz at the end of the part number to order.
† †

887. fi 835NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
ENOCEAN REMOTE CONTROL, KEY CARD SWITCH, WINDOW/DOOR CONTACT
EASYSENS SPECIALTY WIRELESS TRANSMITTERS
Power Supply Self-powered
Communication EnOcean Wireless
Antenna Internal
Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz
Range 70-100 ft, typical in building
Enclosure Plastic
Mounting Surface mount
Operating Temperature -13° to 149°F (-25° to 65°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing
Dimensions
4-CH-EC 3.27"H x 1.97"W x 0.98"D
(83 x 50 x 25 mm)
SR-KCS 4"H x 2.38"W x 0.75"D
(102 x 60 x 19 mm)
SRW01 Sensor: 3.63"H x 0.81"W x 0.63"D
(168 x 21 x16 mm)
Magnet: 0.81"H x 0.5"W x 0.38"D
(21 x 13 x10 mm)
Approvals CE, FCC, RoHS
Weight
4-CH-EC 0.18 lb (0.08 kg)
SR-KCS 0.35 lb (0.16 kg)
SRW01 0.13 lb (0.06 kg)
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The EasySens Specialty Transmitters are EnOcean wireless
devices. They are energy harvesting, battery free wireless
transmitters could be used for variety of applications.
Model 4-CH-EC is a four button remote control could be used
for dimmer and roller blind control. SR-KCS model is wireless
k
ey card switches could be used for room or office lighting
control when occupied
. Model SRW01 is a wireless window or
door contact for status monitoring in connection with receiver SRC-x and higher level control systems
.
These transmitters communicate with the Easysens Thanos,
SRCx and STCx series of receiver gateways, and SRCx series of receiver controllers (model frequency dependent)
.
FEATURES
• EnOcean Wireless, Energy Harvesting
• Batteryless, Maintenance Free
• Use in Variety of Applications
MODEL DESCRIPTION
4-CH-EC 4 Button Remote Control
SR-KCS Key Card Switch
SRW01 Wireless window/door contact switch
SPECIFICATIONS
SR-KCS
4-CH-EC
SRW01
March 2014
† Add -315 for 315 MHz or -902 for 902 MHz at the end of the part number to order.
†

888. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 836fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
ENOCEAN TEMPERATURE, HUMIDITY AND CO2 SENSORS
EASYSENS ROOM SENSORS
Supply Voltage 24 VAC, ±10%; 15-25 VDC, ±10%
Battery Backup Optional LS14250
Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz
Range Typical 70-100 ft
Communication EnOcean Wireless
Display Type
SR04-CO2-Z,
RHLCDZ,LCD-Z Transmission LED
SR04-CO2-LCD,
RH-LCD LCD
CO
2
Accuracy ±40 ppm +4% @21°C
Humidity Accuracy ±3% (20-80% RH)
Humidity Range 0-100% RH
Temperature Range 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
Temperature Accuracy ±0.4K (0.72°F), 1% of measuring range
Resolution ±0.15K / 0.27°F,0.4% RH
Antenna Internal
Enclosure NEMA 1
Housing Type Wall mount
Response Time <10 mins CO2
Storage Humidity 70% RH, non-condensing
Storage Temperature 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 85% RH, non-condensing
Color White
Dimensions 0.98"H x 3.3"W x 3.3"D
(25 x 84.5 x 84.5 mm)
Approvals CE, FCC, Canada RSS, MIC
Weight 0.29 lb (0.13 kg)
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The EasySens Room Sensors are EnOcean wireless sensors
with variety of options in temperature, humidity, and CO2
sensing
. Models with setpoint control, override, and occupancy
detection are also available.
These sensors comm
unicate with the Easysens Thanos, SRCx
and STCx series of receiver gateways, and SRCx series of receiver controllers (model frequency dependent)
.
FEATURES
• EnOcean Wireless with Battery Backup
• Easy to Install with Learn Button
• Adjustable Transmission Interval
• Variety of Sensing and Control Model Options
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SR04 Room Temp Sensor
SR04P Room Temp Sensor,Setpoint
SR04T Room Temp, Occupancy
SR04P-MS Room Temp, setpoint,Night mode
SR04PT Room Temp,Setpoint,Occupancy
SR04PS Room Temp,Setpoint,Fan speed
SR04PST Room Temp,setpoint,Fan,Occupancy
SR04-RH Room Temp/RH
SR04PT-RH Room Temp/RH,Setpoint,Occupancy
SR04P-MS-RH Temp/RH setpoint,Night mode
SR04-CO2 Room Temp/CO2
SR04-CO2-RH Room Temp/RH/CO2
SR04-CO2-Z Room Temp/CO2 LED
SR04-CO2-LCD Room Temp/CO2 LCD
SR04-CO2-RHLCDZ Room Temp/RH/CO2 LCD/LED
SR04-CO2-RH-LCD Room Temp/RH/CO2 LCD
SR04-CO2-LCD-Z Room Temp/CO2 LCD/LED
SPECIFICATIONS
SR04-CO2-RHLCDZ SR04PST
March 2014
† Add -315 for 315 MHz or -902 for 902 MHz at the end of the part number to order.
†
ACCESSORIES
LS14250 Lithium batteries for external power supply

889. fi 837NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
ENOCEAN SURFACE, DUCT, REMOTE AND OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSORS
EASYSENS TEMPERATURE SENSORS
Power Supply Solar cell
Battery Backup Optional LS14250
Frequency 315 mhz
Range Typical 70-100ft
Communication EnOcean Wireless
Temperature Range
SR65/SR65-TF -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)

SR65-AKF/SR65-VFG
10° to 194°F (-12° to 90°C)
Resolution ± 0.55°F
Accuracy ± 1.5°F
Probe Length SR65-AKF-135
5.3" (13.5 cm)
SR65-TF 2" (5.1 cm) probe, cable 3.2"
(8.1 cm)
Antenna Internal
Enclosure NEMA 4/IP65
Housing Type SR65
Outdoor

SR65-AKF
Duct

SR65-TF
Cable
SR65-VFG Clamp onPipe
Operating Temperature -13° to 149°F (-25° to 65°C)
Operating Humidity 0-85% RH non-condensing
Dimensions 1.8"H x 2.3"W x 3.1"D
(45.5 x 58 x 78 mm)
Approvals CE, FCC, Canada RSS, MIC
RoHS Statement Yes
Weight SR65/SR65-VFG
0.29 lb (0.13 kg)
SR65-AKF 0.33 lb (0.15 kg)
SR65-TF 0.35 lb (0.16 kg)
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The EasySens Temperature Sensors are solar powered EnOcean wireless sensors
. They provids wireless
temperature sensing for variety of applicaitons; duct, immersion, surface contact and outdoor sensing
.
These temperature sensors communicate with the Easysens
Thanos, SRCx and STCx series of receiver gateways, and SRCx series of receiver controllers (models with 315MHz frequency only)
.
FEATURES
• EnOcean Wireless with Battery Backup
• Easy to Install with Learn Button
• Adjustable Transmission Interval
• Model Options for Variety of Applications
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SR65 Outdoor Air Temp
SR65-AKF-135 Duct Temp, 5.3" probe
SR65-TF Cable Temp, 3.2ft
SR65-VFG Pipe Contract Temp
SPECIFICATIONS
SR65 SR65-AKF
SR65-VFGSR65-TF
March 2014
ACCESSORIES
LS14250 Lithium batteries for external power supply

890. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 838fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
ENOCEAN INPUT MODULES
EASYSENS INPUT MODULES
DESCRIPTION
The EasySens Input Modules are EnOcean wireless input modules provide
information and status to a higher level controller. The module SR65 DI
has one digital input for dry contacts by which the switch status can be evaluated
. The status of the contact (opened/closed) is transmitted by radio
signal to a receiver.
The module SR-MI-HS has three inputs for receiving pulses from water,
gas, electric or BTU meters with S0 interfaces (DIN 43864). Pulses of every
inputs are totaled independently and the total will be transmitted every 5, 10, 100 or 1000 seconds, depending on the settings
. In addition, a signal
can be gener
ated and transmitted every 10th or every 100th pulse
.
These input modules communicate with the Easysens Thanos, SRCx and
STCx series of receiver gateways, and SRCx series of receiver controllers (model frequency dependent)
.
FEATURES
• EnOcean Wireless
• Adjustable Transmission Intervals
• Easy to Setup "Learn Button"
dry cont act
TI
TW
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SR65-DI-315 Digital Input-module, 315 MHz
SR-MI-HS-315 Energy Meter 3x Pulse Inputs, 315 MHz
SR-MI-HS-902 Energy Meter 3x Pulse Inputs, 902 MHz
SPECIFICATIONS
SR65-DI
SR65-DI-315
SR-MI-HS-315
SR-MI
Learn- / Transmit Button
Status LED (Transmit)
Dipswitch transmission
confguration
Power Supply
24V
+
~
-
~
S01  S02 S03
+   -+   -+   -
Antenna
March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC, ±10%; 15-24 VDC, ±10%
Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz
Rang
e
Typical building 70-100 ft
Communication EnOcean
Digital Inputs 3 x Pulse inputs, ASK modulation
Protocol EnOcean
Color White
Antenna External
Enclosure NEMA 1
Housing T
ype
Din Rail
Wiring T
erminations
Terminal block max 16 AWG
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0-85% RH non-condensing
Dimensions 2.4"H x 2.0"W x 3.6"D
(60 x 51 x 91 mm)
Appr
ovals
CE, FCC, Canada RSS, MIC
RoHS Statement Yes
Weight 0.57 lb (0.26 kg)
Warranty 2 Years

891. fi 839NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
APPLYING SURGE PROTECTORS
Surge protectors are relatively simple devices, yet they must
be carefully selected and applied to function properly. When
selecting and applying surge protectors, there are a few essentials to keep in mind
.
First, the operating voltage of the system is important. Surge
protectors are v
oltage sensitive switches and must not clamp
the normal system voltage
. The surge protector clamp voltage
must be higher than the system voltage. For example, a 24
VDC system voltage generally uses a 30 volt surge protector.
Second, some surge protectors have an input side and an
output side. If installed backwards, they will fail prematurely.
Lastly, grounding is often misunderstood when it comes to
proper installation of surge suppressors. This can seriously
affect the performance of protection systems and lead to electronics damage
. Use the Protection Zone Concept to
effectively apply surge protectors to EMS and BAS installations
.
The Protection Zone
The protection zone is an imaginary circle drawn around and encompassing electronic equipment items that are located in close proximity to each other (see Figure 1)
. Everything
passing through the imaginary circle should be commonly grounded and should have surge protection
.
Figure 1. The Protection Zone, Window, and Single Point Ground
S P G
SP
To Approved
Ground
Data Line
PC642C
Surge Protector
AC Service
Power Strip
Data Line
Single Point Ground
AC Service
Surge Protector
HSP-121BT1RU
*Ground wires between
single point ground and
surge protectors must
be very short.
The Protection Zone
Window
*
The Protection Zone
*
The single point ground is a common ground point or node used in the protection zone to bond together all ground references inside the zone
. Surge currents passing through
a ground conductor generate a voltage across the conductor.
T
his is primarily due to inductance of the wire
. Inductance
is highly dependent on conductor length; therefore, it is very important to keep suppressor ground wires to the single point ground very short
.
The protection zone window is a hypothetical small opening
in the zone through which all electrical conductors enter or leave
. The single point ground is located at the protection zone
window. Figure 2 illustrates a typical installation of equipment
within a small area; however, there are three problems associated with the installation depicted
.
Problem #1
There are four ground references in Figure 2. AC outlet #1, AC
outlet #2, AC outlet #3, and the data line all present separate ground references
. The three AC outlet grounds are connected
together at the power panel many feet away. The ground wire
lengths offer enough inductance to effectively create separate grounds
. In addition, the data line may run hundreds of feet to
yet another ground reference in remote circuitry.
Problem #2
Notice in Figure 2 there is substantial distance between various conductors leaving the imaginary circle of the protection zone
. Even if ground conductors were bonded
together, destructive voltages would exist during a surge due to wire inductance
.
Problem #3
While the data line shows a surge suppressor, the lack of suppressors in the power receptacles leaves an opening in the protection zone
. Even the best data line suppressor cannot
prevent damage under these conditions.
Solving the Problems
The problems listed for the installation in Figure 2 are solved using the Protection Zone Concept
. Figure 1 illustrates the
proper installation:
• All devices are powered from the same AC outlet.
• The AC service incorporates a Model HSP-121BT1RU surge
suppressor.
• The single point ground is established in the protection zone
window.
• Data line suppressor(s), Model PC642C, are added at the
single point ground.
• A ground bus bar is located at the ground area to facilitate
multiple ground connections
March 2014

892. fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS 840fi
NETWORK & WIRELESS
13
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
Building 1 Building 2 Building N
CPU
CMain Processing EquipmentD istributed EMS/BAS Controllers
SP
C
SP
AC Power
*
SP
C
SP
AC Power
*
CPU
SP
*
SP
C
SP
AC Power
*
SP
C
SP
AC Power
*
SP
C
SP
AC Power
*
Data
Line
SP
C
SP
AC Power
*
SP
C
SP
AC Power
*
SP
C
SP
AC Power
*
*Conductor from data line SP ground and AC power
SP ground to single point ground must be very short
SP
AC
Power
SPSurge Protector
Model HSP-121BT1RU AC Power Surge Protector
Model PC642C Data Line Surge Protector<
APPLYING SURGE PROTECTORS
Figure 2. Typical Installation of Equipment within a Small Area
• Ground wires to the suppressors are very short.
• An optional (depending on code) ground conductor connects
the ground bus to the main building power ground. This
conductor may be quite long, but that does not create a
problem now that the ground area has been established.
Protecting Multibuilding Data and Control Systems
The Protection Zone Concept can also be applied to multibuilding, multidrop data and control systems
. In Figure
3, the surge protectors located at the building entrance are improperly positioned to protect the CPU and the controllers
.
Dur
ing lightning activity, ground potentials at opposite ends
of a building can be thousands of volts, causing damage to electronic equipment. Also, surge protectors for data lines that
enter buildings have series resistance. The series resistance
of the surge protectors is additive. The total series resistance
often is too great and can cause communication or data line problems
. The installation in Figure 3 shows five protectors in
series over the length of the data line.
To properly configure surge protection on a multibuilding,
multidrop system (see Figure 4), connect the surge protector on each controller drop so that the protector is not in series with the main data line
. When connected in this manner,
no more than two surge protectors are connected in series.
Using the
Protection Zone Concept, locate the data line surge
protectors within the protection zone window along with an AC service outlet surge protector for each respective controller.
Remember to k
eep the ground connections to the single point
ground very short
.
SP
Data
Ground
Data Line
Surge Protector
Data Line
AC Power
Ground #2
Data Line
AC Power
Ground #1
Ground #3
AC Power
The Protection Zone
AC Outlet #1
AC Outlet #3
AC Outlet #2
March 2014
Building 1
CPU SP
CC
Building 2
SP
C C
Data Line
C
SP
Building N
SP
C CC
SP
SPCPU
CMain Processing Equipment Distributed EMS/BAS Controller sS urge Protector
Summary Remember the following when applying surge protection:
1
. Keep all grounds inside the protection zone at the same
potential. If different ground potentials are present on
electronic equipment, damage will occur regardless of the
suppression used.
2. Protect all electrical and data circuits entering or leaving
the protection zone at the protection zone ground window.
Doing this k
eeps circuits at a safe voltage with respect to the
ground window
. This safe voltage is the clamp voltage (let-
through voltage) of the respective suppressors.
The majority of surge protection installations are fairly simple
and only involve bonding suppressor grounds to AC service grounds at the ground window
. Existing sites may involve
some rewiring to accomplish the best results. In order to keep
the data line surge suppressor ground and AC service ground wires very short, wiring must sometimes be moved
. When
applying surge protectors, using the Protection Zone Concept will effectively protect EMS and BAS installations
.
Figure 3. Improper Positioning of Surge Protectors
Figure 4. Proper Positioning of Surge Protectors

893. HUMIDITY
PANEL FABRICATION
PANEL
FABRICATION
ZS6 Series | p. 843
BAM-1000 | p. 860
S200U-K Series | p. 855
LB Series | p. 865
HW Series | p. 869
ZS4 Series | p. 845
Utilize Kele’s UL Certified Panel Shop, or Shop for Your Panel Components
and Projects. Also, Check Out Kele’s Configurable InstaPanel.

894. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
PANEL FABRICATION
VD Series | p. 857
TS Series C | p. 850
1C16UL | p. 856
PANEL
FABRICATION
Fittings and Mounting Hardware
BAM1000, DIN 3F — DIN Rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Fuse Holders M4/6SNBT, M4/8SF, M10/16SFL
— ABB DIN Rail Switch & Fuse Holders
. . . 844
ZS4 Series Disconnect Switch and Fuse Holders
— SNK Series DIN Rail
Disconnect Switch and Fuse Holders
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
6SC30, 6SM30 Series
— Class CC Enclosed Fuse Holders
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
6M30 Series
— Class M Base-Mount Fuse Holder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
6W30
— Sectional Fuse Holders
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
Fuses and Circuit Breakers FLM, FLQ, FNQ, KLK Series
— Midget Fuses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
GF, K235, 251 Series
— Fuses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
S200U-K Series
— ABB Miniature Circuit Breakers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
QL Series
— Circuit Breaker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
1C SERIES
— Circuit Breaker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
Labels and Accessories PDK, PRK
— Panel Receptacle & Disconnect Switch Assemblies
. . . . . . . . . . 861
SPA
— Plate-Mounted Potentiometer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
Labels
— Engraved Phenolic Labels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
Pilot Lights and Selector Switches L4000 Series
— Pilot Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
APW Series
— IDEC Pilot Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
A Series
— IDEC Pilot Lights and Miniature Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
LB Series
— Flush Mount Pilot Lights, Pushbuttons and Switches
. . . . . . . . . 865
RBTS Series
— Toggle Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
ASW Series
— IDEC General Purpose Selector Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
CL, KT, M, MP Series
— ABB Pushbuttons, Selector Switches, Pilot Lights,
Potentiometers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
Push Button Switches ABW, AOW Series
— IDEC Pushbutton Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
HW Series
— Push Buttons and Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
Terminal Blocks CDU4N-G Series
— Value Line DIN Rail Terminal Blocks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
M4/6, M6/8
— ABB DIN Rail Terminal Blocks (Standard Gray)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
ZS6, ZS10
— SNK Series DIN Rail Terminal Blocks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
SAK4, SAK6
— Weidmüller DIN Rail Terminal Blocks (Standard Beige)
. . . . . 846
6G38
— 3/8” Sectional Terminal Blocks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
BKA/1
— Panel Mount Terminal Blocks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
100 Series
— Double Row Terminal Blocks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
TS Series
— Double Row Terminal Strips
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
Wire Duct VD Series
— Wiring Duct
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
ABB Series
— ABB Wiring Duct
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
T1 Series
— Iboco Wiring Duct
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
T1E Series
— Iboco Small Finger Wiring Duct
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
P Series
— Wiring Aids
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
ST, STS Support Brackets
— DIN Rail Support Brackets
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
CL Wire Retainers
— Wire Duct Retainers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859

895. fi 841PANEL FABRICATION
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
1.685
(4.28)
.240
(.610)
1.811
(4.6)
CDU4N-G
VALUE LINE DIN RAIL TERMINAL BLOCKS
CDU4N-G SERIES
Rated Voltage 600 VAC/VDC
Rated Current 30A UL
Wire Size 22-10 AWG
Approvals UL recognized component,
File #E167040
Warranty 1 year
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The Model CDU4N-G DIN rail terminal block offers a modular design for flexibility in layout and reduced installation time
.
The narro
w width of the terminal block offers maximum circuit
density
. These models offer a favorable cost solution for basic
installations.
FEATURES
• Wire secured by ribbed compression clamp
• Universal DIN rail mounting
• Reduced installation time
• Block removable without displacing adjacent blocks
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CDU4N-G DIN rail terminal block, gray
CEP6-G End section (1 required), gray
SEW35-G End stop (2 required), gray
CPE4 Grounding block, green and yellow
CTR4SI/EN-120-G Fuse holder w/indicator, gray (K235 style fuse not included)
CEP1-G Fuse holder end section, gray
W6 Blank markers (50 per card)
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
CDU-4N-G
CDU-4N-G (Top View)
SEW35-B (Two required)
DINRALU
CEP6-G
(One required)
CDU4N-G
CPE4
CEP1-G
CTR4SI/EN-120-G
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
AQU75S 75-pole jumper strip
BAM-1000 35 mm aluminum DIN mounting rail 39.4" (1m) 860
DIN-3F 35 mm DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m), RoHS compliant 860
DINRALU DIN rail, aluminum, 39.4" (1m) 860
DINRSTL DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m) 860
K235 Series Fast-acting fuse 854
in
(cm)

896. NEW!
PANEL FABRICATION 842NEW!
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014
ABB DIN RAIL TERMINAL BLOCKS (STANDARD GRAY)
M4/6, M6/8
M4/6D2
2 .57
(6 .55)
2 .34
(5 .95)
DESCRIPTION
Model M4/6 and M6/8 DIN rail terminal blocks offer a modular
design for flexibility in layout and reduced installation time.
Unique mar
ker holders provide optional top- or side-mount
marking capability
. The Model M4/6 offers maximum circuit
density while the Model M6/8 offers the convenience of larger
screws for conventional screwdriver installation.
FEATURES
• Wire secured by ribbed compression clamp
• Universal DIN rail mounting
• Reduced installation time
• Block removable without displacing adjacent blocks
• Various marking options
DIMENSIONS
1.75
(4.45)in
(cm)
M4/6, M6/8 M4/6M 6/8
1.89
(4.80)
0.24
(0.61)
0.315
(0.8)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SINGLE 6 mm TERMINAL BLOCKS M4/6 DIN rail terminal block, gray
M4/6-BK DIN rail terminal block, black
M4/6-BL DIN rail terminal block, blue
M4/6-GR DIN rail terminal block, green M4/6-RD DIN rail terminal block, red M4/6-OR DIN rail terminal block, orange M4/6-YW DIN rail terminal block, yellow
M4/6.P Grounding block, green and yellow
SINGLE 8 mm TERMINAL BLOCKS (use M4/6 accessories) M6/8 8 mm DIN rail terminal block, gray
M6/8.P 8 mm grounding block, green and yellow
ACCESSORIES DINRSTL 35 mm steel DIN mounting rail, 39.4"L (1m) DINRALU 35 mm aluminum DIN mounting rail, 39.4"L (1m) BAM2 End stop (two required), gray
FEM6 End section (one required), gray
SCF6 Circuit separator, gray
BJS6 J umper bar for M4/6, 20 poles per bar
BJS6-2 Jumper bar for M4/6, two poles per bar
BJS6-3 Jumper bar for M4/6, three poles per bar
BJS6-4 J umper bar for M4/6, four poles per bar
BJS6-5 J umper bar for M4/6, five poles per bar
BJS6-10 J umper bar for M4/6, 10 poles per bar
BJS8 J umper bar for M6/8, 20 poles per bar
EV6 J umper bar hardware (screw and post, package 20)
DOUBLE STACK 6 mm TERMINAL BLOCKS M4/6D2 Double stack terminal bloc k, gray
FEM6D Double stac k end section, gray
BAMH Double stack end stop , gray
SCF6D Double stack circuit separator , gray
BEIGE SINGLE 6 mm TERMINAL BLOCKS M4/6-BG DIN rail terminal block, beige FEM6-BG End section, beige BAM2-BG End stop, beige SCF6-BG Circuit separator, beige MARKERS RC610B Blank strips (100 blanks) RC610/1-10 10 strips of 1-10 RC610/1-50 Two strips of 1-50 RC610/1-100 One strip of 1-100 RC610/X01-X00 One strip of 100 numbers (fill in range, i.e., 201-300)
RC610-G Ground marker strip (100) RC610-L Line marker strip (100) RC610-N Neutral marker strip (100) RC610-CUSTOM Custom markers printed at Kele; 3 max horizontal,
7 max vertical (vertical shown in picture)
RTM7 Top mount, blank, 19.7" (50 cm)
ORDERING INFORMATION
Rated Voltage 600 VAC/VDC
Rated Current 30A UL, 25A CSA
Rated Wire Size
M4/6 22-10 AWG
M6/8 22-8 AWG
Approvals UL-recognized component,
File #E60645; CSA certified; CE
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
BAM2
SCF6
M6/8
M4/6
M4/6-RD

897. fi 843PANEL FABRICATION
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
SNK SERIES DIN RAIL TERMINAL BLOCKS
ZS6, ZS10
DESCRIPTION
Model ZS6 and ZS10 DIN rail terminal blocks offer a modular
design for flexibility in layout and reduced installation time.
Their unique profile allo
ws for easy and ergonomic mounting
.
Mar
king surfaces can be read clearly from any angle in
an enclosure and are larger than standard markers in the industry.The two terminal blocks central channels-aligned
from 4mm-12AWG up to 16mm-4AWG terminal blocks offer flexibility of use
. They offer common and polarity distribution
with JB screwless jumper bars. One unique end section and
circuit separ
ator fits all feed-through terminal blocks
.
FEATURES
• Re •
20% more marking surface
• Double deck blocks have 2 marking areas
• 1 end section and 1 circuit separator
• Complete set of accessories
Rated Voltage 600V
Rated Current 20A, 42A
Rated Wire Size 24-12 AWG, 20-6 AWG
Operating Temperature -67° to 230°F (-55° to 110°C)
Spacing 0.236", 0.315"
Approvals CE;UR File #E60645; CSA
#2329965
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
2.22 (56.3)
1.92 (48.8)
1.05 (26.7)
2.09 (53.0)
DIMENSIONS
in
(mm)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SINGLE 6mm TERMINAL BLOCKS
ZS6 DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-grey
ZS6-BK DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-black
ZS6-BL DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-blue
ZS6-BR DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-brown
ZS6-GN DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-green
ZS6-OR DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-orange
ZS6-PR DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-purple
ZS6-RD DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-red
ZS6-WH DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-white
ZS6-YL DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-yellow
ZS6-PE Grounding block-green and yellow
6mm TERMINAL BLOCK ACCESSORIES
DIN-3F 35mm steel DIN mounting rail, 39
.4”L (1 meter)
BAM-1000 35mm aluminum DIN mounting rail, 39.4”L (1 meter)
BAM3 End stop - dark grey
ES4 End section - dark grey
JB6-2 Jumper bar - 2 poles - orange
JB6-3 Jumper bar - 3 poles - orange
JB6-4 Jumper bar - 4 poles - orange
JB6-5 Jumper bar - 5 poles - orange
JB6-10 Jumper bar - 10 poles - orange
CS Circuit separator - dark grey
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DOUBLE DECK 6mm TERMINAL BLOCKS ZS6-D2 DIN rail mount double deck terminal block - grey
ZS6-D2-BL DIN rail mount double deck terminal block - blue
ZS6-D2-OR DIN rail mount double deck terminal block - orange
BAZH1 Double deck end stop - dark grey
ES4-D2 Double deck end section - dark grey
ES-TC6 Double deck spacer - dark grey
SINGLE 8mm TERMINAL BLOCKS (use ZS6 accessories) ZS10 DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-grey
ZS10-PE Grounding block-green and yellow
MARKERS FOR 6mm TERMINAL BLOCKS MC612 Blank strips (100 blanks)-white
MC612PA/1-10 10 strips of 1-10
MC612PA/1-100 1 strip of 1-100
MC612-CUSTOM
Custom markers printed at Kele; 3 max horizontal; 7 max
vertical
ZS6-D2
CS
ZS6-PE
ES4
ZS6

898. NEW!
PANEL FABRICATION 844NEW!
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014
ABB DIN RAIL SWITCH & FUSE HOLDERS
M4/6SNBT, M4/8SF, M10/16SFL
Rated Voltage 600 VAC/VDC
Rated Current 10A UL (6.3A IEC)
Rated Wire Size
M4/6 22-10 AWG
M4/8 22-12 AWG
M10/16 24-8 AWG
Fuse Size
M10/16SFL GF Series
0.25" x 1.25" (0.63 x 3.17 cm)
M4/8 K235 Series
0.197" x 0.787" (0.5 x 2.0 cm)
Approvals UL-recognized component, File
#E60645; CSA certified; CE
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
Model M4/8SF, M4/8SFL, and M10/16SFL fuse holders
provide a safe method for protecting or isolating a circuit.
Once installed, the fuse is enclosed and prohibits the installer from coming in contact with a liv
e circuit
. The fuse can be
disengaged by pulling up on the fuseholder. Optional blown
fuse indicators are available. Model M4/6SNT is a non-fusible
disconnect switch that provides a safe method for isolating a circuit
.
FEATURES
• Wire secured by ribbed compression clamp
• Universal DIN rail mounting
• Unique disconnect design
SPECIFICATIONS
M4/8SF
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SWITCH
M4/6SNBT1 6 mm blade switch block (with test sockets). gray/orange handle
FEM62 End section for M4/6SNBT
M4/8 FUSEHOLDER
M4/8SF 8 mm fuseholder (K235 fuse not included)
M4/8SFL 8 mm fuseholder with neon lamp (K235 fuse not included)
FEM8S 8 mm fuseholder end section
K235-(amp) Fast acting fuses for 8 mm fuse holder (10A fuse maximum)
M10/16SFL FUSEHOLDER
M10/16SFL 16 mm fuseholder (GF fuse not included)
LEN Fuse indicator lamp (110-220 VAC only)
GF-(amp) Fast acting fuse
2.68
(6.82)
in
(cm)
0.63
(1.60)
2.32*
(5.89)
* With holder closed
0.315
(0.8)
2.23
(56.5)
1.9*
(48.5)
Closed
0.24
(0.6)
2.05
(5.2)
Closed
M4/8SF, SFLM10/16SFL M4/6SNBT
1.75
(4.45)
DIMENSIONS
M4/6SNBT
M10/16SFL
LEN (lamp)
Fuse
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
BAM2 End stop 842
DINRALU DIN rail, aluminum, 39.4" (1m) 860
DINRSTL DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m) 860
M4/6 DIN rail terminal block 6 mm 842

899. NEW! 845PANEL FABRICATION
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
SNK SERIES DIN RAIL DISCONNECT SWITCH AND FUSE HOLDERS
ZS4 SERIES DISCONNECT SWITCH AND FUSE HOLDERS
Rated Voltage 150V, 600V
Rated Current 25A, 10A, 22A
Pole Spacing 0.205", 0.315"
Rated Wire Size 24-10 AWG
Operating Temperature 67° to 230°F (-55° to 110°C)
Approvals CE;UR File #E60645; CSA #2329965
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
SNK ZS4 Series disconnect switches and fuse holders
provide a safe method for protecting or isolating a circuit.
Once installed the fuse is enclosed and prohibits the installer from coming in contact with liv
e circuit
. You can quickly
identify the defective circuit by the blown fuse indicator.
FEATURES
• Fits both 5x20mm and 5x25mm fuses
• Wiring of terminal block can be done when fuseholder
is in closed position
• Blown fuse indicator for quick identification of fuse failures
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ZS4-S-T2 4mm Disconnect with blade; with 2 test sockets - grey
ZS4-SF1 4mm Fuseholder - grey/dark grey (fuse not included)
ZS4-SF1-R1 4mm Fuseholder with blown fuse indicator 24-60V - grey/dark grey (fuse not included)
ZS4-SF1-R3 4mm Fuseholder with blown fuse indicator 115-250V - grey/dark grey (fuse not included)
ES4-SF End section - dark grey
180°
90°
90°
1.30” (32.9)
1.85” (47.1)
2.15” (54.6)
3.5” (88.8)
2.35” (59.7)
3.79” (96.3)
(60.4) 2.37"
(52.9) 2.08"
(26.7) 1.05"
(53) 2.09"
(67.2) 2.64"
(59.7) 2.35"
1.05” (26.7)
3.10” (78.8)
3.40” (86.3)
2.77” (70.3)
ZS4-ST-2ZS4-SF1-R1 ZS4-SF1
in
(mm)
ZS4-SF1-R1 ZS4-S-T2
ZS4-SF1
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
GF-(amp) Fast acting fuse 854
K235-(amp) Fast acting fuses for 8 mm fuse holder (10A fuse maximum) 854

900. fi
PANEL FABRICATION 846fi
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
WEIDMÜLLER DIN RAIL TERMINAL BLOCKS (STANDARD BEIGE)
SAK4, SAK6
Rated Voltage 600 VAC/VDC
Rated Current 30A UL, 36A CSA
Rated Wire Size
SAK4 22-10 AWG
SAK6 22-8 AWG
Approvals UL-recognized component,
File #E60693; CSA certified
SAK4 SAK6
1.87
(4.75)
0.256
(0.65)
0.315
(0.8)
1.654 (4.2)in
(cm)
SAK4
DESCRIPTION
Model SAK4 and SAK6 DIN rail terminal blocks offer a
modular design for flexibility in layout and reduced installation
time
. The standard color is beige for the terminal blocks and
accessories, but other color terminal blocks are available.
The
Model SAK4 offers maximum circuit density while the
Model SAK6 offers the convenience of larger screws for conventional screwdriver installation. Double-stacks and
fuseholders are available. The markers are side mount in
horizontal printing.
FEATURES
• Wire secured by ribbed compression clamp
• Universal DIN rail mounting
• Reduced installation time
• Block removable without displacing adjacent blocks
ORDERING INFORMATION
DIMENSIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION STDRD
SINGLE BEIGE 6 mm TERMINAL BLOCK PKG*
SAK4 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, beige 100
EK4 6 mm grounding block, green and yellow 100
AP-SAK End section, beige (one required) 100
EW35 End stop, beige (two required) 50
TW Circuit separator, beige 20
FUSEHOLDERS
ASK1 Fuseholder beige (K235 style fuse not included) 100
ASK1-LD Fuseholder beige with 120 VAC/VDC indicator
(K235 style fuse not included)
AP-ASK1 Fuseholder end section, beige (one required) 20
SINGLE BEIGE 8 mm TERMINAL BLOCK
SAK6 8 mm DIN rail terminal block, beige 100
EK6 8 mm grounding block, green and yellow 100
AP-SAK End section, beige (one required) 100
EW35 End stop, beige (two required) 50
TW Circuit separator, beige 20
DOUBLE STACK BEIGE 6 mm TERMINAL BLOCK
DK4 6 mm double stack terminal block, beige 100
AP-DK End section, beige (one required) 20
EW35 End stop, beige (two required) 50
TW Circuit separator, beige 20
SINGLE 6 mm TERMINAL BLOCK IN COLORS
SAK4-BL 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, blue 100
SAK4-RD 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, red 100
SAK4-YW 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, yellow 100
SAK4-OR 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, orange 100
SAK4-GR 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, green 100
SAK4-GY 6 mm DIN rail terminal bloc k, gray 100
SAK4-BK 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, black 100
SAK4-BR 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, brown 100
ACCESSORIES
DINRSTL 35 mm steel DIN mounting rail, 39.4" (1m) 40
DINRALU 35 mm aluminum DIN mounting rail, 39.4" (1m) 40
Q10-6 6 mm 10 pole jumper bar with screws and spacers 20
Q10-8 8 mm 10 pole jumper bar with screws and spacers 20
DEKH-1/50 Horizontal numbers (one strip of 1-50) 10
DEKH-x/xx Horizontal numbers (one strip of 50 numbers,
fill in range, i.e. 51-100)
DEKH-LNG Horizontal markers labeled L1, L2, L3, N, G 10
DEK-B Blank markers 10
K235 Fuses 5
* May be ordered by piece
25
10
SPECIFICATIONS
2.244
(5.7)
0.236
(0.6)
1.969
(5.0)
in
(cm)
DK4
1.339
(3.4)
0.315
(0.8)
2.283 (5.8)in
(cm)
ASK1
EW35
DIN-3F
TW
SAK4
SAK6
ASK1
EW35

901. fi 847PANEL FABRICATION
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
3/8" SECTIONAL TERMINAL BLOCKS
6G38
Rated Voltage 600V
Rated Current 30A
Rated Wire Size 22-10 AWG
Connections Tin-plated copper
Materials Of Construction Gray glass-filled polycarbonate,
257°F (125°C)
Circuits Per Foot 32
Approvals UL-recognized component,
File #E62806, CSA certified,
File #LR19766
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
Model 6G38 sectional terminal blocks are individually molded blocks that can be assembled to produce a terminal strip for the required number of circuits
. The larger size of these
3/8" blocks makes wiring terminations easier for both small and large wire gauges
. The Model 6G38-TSKK-C is channel
mounted and can be used in conjunction with the Model 6W30 sectional fuse holder
.
FEATURES
• Sectional design for layout flexibility
• Channel mounting
• 32 circuits per foot
• Kant Kut wiring connectors
• Touch-proof design
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CHANNEL MOUNT
6G38-TSKK-C 3/8" sectional terminal block, MPC channel mount
6G38-E-C End section, MPC channel mount (one required)
MC Mounting clamps (2 required)
MPC-3 Pre-punched aluminum mounting channel, 3' (0.91m)
MPC-6 Pre-punched aluminum mounting channel, 6' (1.83m)
DIN RAIL MOUNT
6G38-TSKK-DIN 3/8" sectional terminal block, DIN rail mount
6G38-E-DIN End section, DIN rail mount (one required)
MSK End bracket (two required) for DIN terminal blocks
DINRSTL DIN rail, steel
DIN-3F 35 mm DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m), RoHS compliant
DINRALU DIN rail, aluminum
BAM-1000 35 mm aluminum DIN mounting rail 39.4" (1m)
A
CCESSORIES J-38 Individual jumpers for 3/8" (0.95 cm) blocks
SPECIFICATIONS
1.54
(3.91)
1.25 (3.17)
1.78 (4.51)
1.26
(3.19)
DIMENSIONS
A
0.375 (0.95) TYP.
A = 0.84 + (0.375 x No. of Blocks) in
= (2.13) + (0.95 x No of Blocks)cm
1.54
(3.92)
1.50
(3.81)
1.25 (3.17)
6G38-TSKK-C 6G38-TSKK-DIN
6G38-TSKK-C
6G38-TSKK-DIN
in
(cm)

902. fi
PANEL FABRICATION 848fi
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
PANEL MOUNT TERMINAL BLOCKS
BKA/1
Rated Voltage 300V
Rated Current 20A
Rated Wire Size 22-12 AWG
Materials Of Construction Polyamide 6.6
Circuits Per Foot 50
Approvals UL-recognized component,
File #E95701; CSA certified,
File #LPR42110
Warranty 1 year
0.87
(2.2)in
(cm) 0.24
(0.60)
0.87
(2.2)
BKA/1 Terminal
DESCRIPTION
Model BKA/1 panel-mount terminal blocks are compact and modular
. They are used for applications where space saving,
direct mount, multiple terminal assemblies are required.
These modular b
locks can be used to replace barrier strips
.
Because of the compact size, these terminals are appropriate
for use in small enclosures, equipment housings, or confined locations where space is a constraint
.
Model BKA/1 terminal blocks are individual, single-pole
components that snap-together to any required number of poles
. This design also permits modules to be added
or subtracted to meet changing electrical requirements.
Mounting sections snap on to the ends of the ter
minal
assembly or between terminal blocks to provide additional mounting points where required.
FEATURES
• Extremely compact
• Cost effective
• 50 terminations per foot
• Screw-cage clamp
• Modular design
• Surface mount
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BKA/1 Single terminal block module, 0.236" (0.60 cm)
EH2 Mounting section (2 required, min)
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
0.24
(0.62)
0.87 (2.21)
0.13
(0.34)
0.87 (2.21)
0.29
(0.73)
EH2 Mounting Section
ACCESSORIES
AQU75S 75-pole jumper strip
SB6/10 Blank marker strip for 10 blocks

903. fi 849PANEL FABRICATION
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
NO. OF DIMENSIONS in (cm)
POLES A B
5 2.25 (5.72) 2.53 (6.43)
10 4.12 (10.46) 4.41 (11.20)
15 6.00 (15.24) 6.28 (15.95)
20 7.88 (20.02) 8.16 (20.73)
25 9.75 (24.77) 10.03 (25.48)
30 11.62 (29.51) 11.91 (30.25)
ORDERING INFORMATION
DOUBLE ROW TERMINAL BLOCKS
100 SERIES
Rated Voltage 250V
Rated Current 15A
Rated Wire Size 22-14 AWG
Materials Of Construction
Thermoplastic base, plated steel
terminals with Sems pressure
saddle screws
Spacing 3/8" centers
Approvals UL-recognized component,
File #E167040
Warranty 1 year
0.28
(0.71)
A
B
#6-32 X 1/4
Screw
0.3
(0.78)
0.38
(0.96)
Mounting Holes
0.165 dia
(0.41)
0.31
(0.79)
0.88
(2.24)
0.48
(1.22)
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
100 Series double row terminal blocks are designed for low voltage/amperage wire terminations
. These double-row
terminal blocks provide an insulation barrier between circuits to prevent short circuits in factory or field wiring applications
.
FEATURES
• Closed-back design
• Insulation barrier between poles
• Multiple pole arrangements
• Easy to install
• Surface mounted
MODEL DESCRIPTION
105SP Double row terminal blocks, five poles
110SP Double row terminal blocks, 10 poles
115SP Double row terminal blocks, 15 poles
120SP Double row terminal blocks, 20 poles
125SP Double row terminal blocks, 25 poles
130SP Double row terminal blocks, 30 poles
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS
JSPS 10-pole jumper strip

904. fi
PANEL FABRICATION 850fi
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
TS1.5 TS6
Rated voltage 300V
Rated current 15A 40A
Rated wire size 22-14 AWG 18-8 AW G
Housing material Polyamide 6.6
Connections Tubular screw clamp
with wire protector
Recommended
tightening torque
Pole spacing 0.32" (0.8 cm) 0.47" (1.2 cm)
38 terminals/ft 25 terminals/ft
Agency approv als UL-recognized component,
File #E103245;
CSA certified, File #LR38962
Warranty 1 year
6.6 in-lb (0.75 Nm)
ORDERING INFORMATION
DOUBLE ROW TERMINAL STRIPS
TS SERIES

H
in
(cm)
W
L
B
C
A
MODEL
TS1.5/2WP
TS1.5/3WP
TS1.5/4WP
TS1.5/10WP
TS1.5/12WP

0.53 (1.35)
0.85 (2.16)
1.16 (2.95)
3.04 (7.72)
3.66 (9.30)
0.72
(1.82)
0.61
(1.55)
0.32
(0.8)
Ø0.11
(0.28)
0.32
(0.81)
0.91
(2.32)
0.70
(1.77)
0.47
(1.19)
Ø0.17
(0.42)
0.47
(1.19)
L W H A B C
5.51 (13.99) TS6/12WP
DESCRIPTION
TS Series double row tubular screw terminal strips are a
cost-effective alternative to barrier strips or other types of
terminal blocks
. They're easy to use; simply strip the wire
and insert and tighten the terminal screw. The tubular screw
terminal strips feature a dead front design that prevents shocks and shorts
. The polyamide nylon strips can be readily
field-cut to the desired number of poles using only a utility or pocket knife
.
FEATURES
• T •
Opaque white polyamide 6.6 housing
• Panel mounting or free floating
• Recessed metal parts for finger protection
• Easily cut to the required number of poles
• Surface mounted
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TS1.5/2WP Double row terminal strip, two poles
TS1.5/3WP Double row terminal strip, three poles
TS1.5/4WP Double row terminal strip, four poles
TS1.5/10WP Double row terminal strip, 10 poles
TS1.5/12WP Double row terminal strip, 12 poles
TS6/12WP Heavy-duty double row terminal strip, 12 poles
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ACCESSORIES
MPB6 Marking plate, blank (for use with TS6/12WP)

905. fi 851PANEL FABRICATION
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
CLASS CC ENCLOSED FUSE HOLDERS
6SC30, 6SM30 SERIES
Voltage Rating 600 VAC/VDC
Current Rating 30 Amps
Wire Size 18-6 AWG
Indicator Light 65 VAC minimum, 90 VDC minimum
Materials of Construction
Thermoplastic
Fuse Size 13/32" diameter by 1 1/2" long
Mounting DIN rail
Approvals UL File E35113
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
6SC30 & 6SM30 Series fuse holders can be used for various
applications including control panels, lighting, heating and air
conditioning, refrigeration equipment, transformer protection,
and power monitoring
. The 6SC30 & 6SM30 Series feature
the convenience of DIN rail mounting and blown fuse protection
.
FEATURES
• Tested and approved for 200,000 RMS symmetrical
amps withstand rating and short circuit current ratings
(SCCR)
• DIN rail mount
• Touchsafe design IEC type IP20
• Handle for quick, easy fuse change
• Blown fuse indication
• AC and DC rated
DIMENSIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
6SC30A1I-C Fuse holder, one pole, with blown fuse indication; (use FNQ fuse)
6SC30A2I-C Fuse holder, two poles, with blown fuse indication; (use FNQ fuse)
6SC30A3I-C Fuse holder, three poles, with blown fuse indication; (use FNQ fuse)
6SC30A4I-C Fuse holder, four poles, with blown fuse indication; (use FNQ fuse)
6SM30A1I-C Fuse holder, one pole, with blown fuse indication; (use FLM/FLQ fuse)
6SM30A2I-C Fuse holder, two poles, with blown fuse indication; (use FLM/FLQ fuse)
6SM30A3I-C Fuse holder, three poles, with blown fuse indication; (use FLM/FLQ fuse)
6SM30A4I-C Fuse holder, four poles, with blown fuse indication (use FLM/FLQ fuse)
SPECIFICATIONS
6SC30A1I-C
6SM30A1I-C
6SC30A2I-C
6SM30A2I-C
6SC30A3I-C
6SM30A3I-C
Dim. Inches (cm)
0.70 (1.78)
1.40 (3.56)
2.10 (5.33)
2.80 (7.11)
1.70 (4.32)
2.35 (5.97)
0.48 (1.22)
3.12 (7.92)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
INDICATOR
E
F
A
G
H
D
B
C
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
FLM/FLQ 250/500 V fuses 854
FNQ-R 600 V fuses 854

906. fi
PANEL FABRICATION 852fi
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
CLASS M BASE-MOUNT FUSE HOLDER
6M30 SERIES
Rated Voltage 600V
Rated Current 30A
Connections Quick connects and sems pressure
plate
Wire Size 10-18 AWG
Materials Of Construction
High impact thermoplastic, 257°F
(125°C)
Clip Material Copper alloy, tin plated
Fuse Size 0.41" dia (1.03 cm), 1.5"L
(3.81 cm) (FLM/FLQ Series)
Flammability Rating UL 94V-0
Approvals UL-recognized component,
File #E35113; CSA certified,
File #LR21455
Warranty 1 year
2 Poles 3 Poles1 Pole
0.85
(2.16)
0.375
(0.95)
1.56
(3.96)
0.24
(0.61)
0.42
(1.06)
0.42
(1.06)
0.75
(1.91)
0.50
(1.27)
1.290
(3.28)
0.172 x 0.218 Slots
(0.44 x 0.55)
3.13
(7.95)
2.35
(5.97)
1.50
(3.81)
1.60
(4.06)
0.75
(1.91)
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
6M30 Series class M base-mount fuse holders can be used for various applications including control panels, lighting, heating, air conditioning, refrigeration equipment, and transformer protection
.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
6M30A1SPQ Fuse holder, one pole
6M30A2SPQ Fuse holder, two poles
6M30A3SPQ Fuse holder, three poles
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
6M30 Series
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
CCM630 Fuse holder cover
FLM/FLQ 250/500 V fuses 854
KLK-PAK Fuse package includes fues holder, three poles, the KLK-3 fuses 854

907. fi 853PANEL FABRICATION
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
0.21
(0.53)
0.34
(0.86)
0.49
(1.24)
0.68
(1.73)
L
C
1.00
(2.54)
2.00
(5.08)
1.70
(4.32)
2.00
(5.08)
2.03
(5.16)
(4.95)
1.95
1.70
(4.32)
2.00
(5.08)
2.80
(7.11)
in
(cm)
Sectional Dimensions
L = 0.88 + (0.68 x N)
C = 0.48 + (0.68 x N)
N = Number of poles
ORDERING INFORMATION
SECTIONAL FUSE HOLDERS
6W30
Rated Voltage 600V
Rated Current 30A
Wire Size 22-10 AWG
Materials of Construction
White nylon, 221°F (105°C)
Clip Material Copper alloy, tin plated
Fuse Size 0.41" dia x 1.5"L (1.03 x 3.81 cm)
(FLM/FLQ Series)
Flammability Rating 94V-0
Approvals UL-recognized component,
File #E35113; CSA certified,
File #LR21455
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Model 6W30 sectional fuse holders are used with Model 6H38 Marathon sectional terminal blocks and may be mounted on the same mounting channel
. Each row of fuse
holders requires an end section. If the fuse holders are to be
mounted alone
, two mounting clamps are required in addition
to the end section and mounting channel
.
FEATURES
• Sectional design for layout flexibility
• Channel mounting
• Built-in fuse puller
• Compatible with 6H38 sectional terminal blocks
MODEL DESCRIPTION
6W30A1-C Sectional fuse holder, channel mount
6WE-C Fuse holder end section, channel mount
MC Mounting clamps (2 required)
MPC-3 Pre-punched aluminum mounting channel, 3' (0.91m)
MPC-6 Pre-punched aluminum mounting channel, 6' (1.83m)
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
FLM/FLQ 250/500 V fuses 854

908. fi
PANEL FABRICATION 854fi
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
AMP RATING 250V MODEL 500V MODEL 600V MODEL
0.5 FLM-0.5 FLQ-0.5 FNQ-R-0.5
0.8 FLM-0.8 FLQ-0.8 FNQ-R-0.8
1.0 FLM-1 FLQ-1 FNQ-R-1
1.25 FLM-1.25 FLQ-1.25 FNQ-R-1.25
1.5 FLM-1.5 FLQ-1.5 FNQ-R-1.5
2.0 FLM-2 FLQ-2 FNQ-R-2
2.5 FLM-2.5 FLQ-2.5 FNQ-R-2.5
3.0 FLM-3 FLQ-3 FNQ-R-3
4.0 FLM-4 FLQ-4 FNQ-R-4
5.0 FLM-5 FLQ-5 FNQ-R-5
7.0 FLM-7 FLQ-7 FNQ-R-7
10.0 FLM-10 FLQ-10 FNQ-R-10
15.0 FLM-15 (125 VAC) FLQ-15 FNQ-R-15
20.0 FLM-20 (32 VAC) FLQ-20 FNQ-R-20
30.0 FLM-30 (32 VAC) FLQ-30 FNQ-R-30
AMP RATING 600V MODEL
3.0A KLK-3
0.41
(1.03)
1.50
(3.81)
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
FLM, FLQ, FNQ series midget fuses are slow-acting fuses
used with 6SC30 & 6SM30 Series, 6M30 Series, 6W30
Series, and FB2X Series fuse holders
. The KLK-3 series
fuses are fast-acting fuses.
APPLICATION
• FLM/FLQ/FNQ Series - Inductive loads, power supplies,
control transformers, control circuits with high inrush
currents
• KLK-3 - Watt meters, watt transducers, and control circuits
without high inrush currents
• FLM/FLQ/KLK UL File E19180; FNQ UL File E4273
DIMENSIONS
FLM/FLQ/KLK Series
SPECIFICATIONS/ORDERING INFORMATION
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
5
7
10
15
* Ceramic tube fuse
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
GF-0.5
GF-1
GF-1.5
GF-2
GF-2.5
GF-3
GF-5
GF-7
GF-10
GF-15*
GF-0.5S
GF-1S
GF-1.5S
GF-2S
GF-2.5S
GF-3S
GF-5S
GF-7S
GF-10S*
GF-15S*
AMP RATING SLOW-BLOW FUSE
K235-0.5
K235-1
K235-1.5
K235-2
K235-2.5
K235-3
K235-5 (125V) K235-7 (125V)
K235-10 (125V)
FAST-ACTINGVOLTAGEFAST-ACTING FUSE
HRK Inline fuseholder, 32V, 15A, for 1/4" fuses 7/8"-1-1/4" HKP-HH P anel mount fuseholder, 250V, 15A, fo r 1/4" x 1-1/4" fuses
in
(cm)
GF = 1.25 (3.17)
K235 = 0.787 (2.0)
GF =
0.25 (0.63)
K235 = 0.197 (0.5)
DESCRIPTION GF and K235 series glass fuses are available in slow-blow and fast-acting models
.
FEA
TURES
•
GF Series for use with M10/16SFL fuse holder,HKP-HH and HRK
• K235 Series for use with M4/8 and ZS4 Series Disconnect
Switch and Fuse Holders
• GF & K235 UL File E19180; HKP-HH & HRK UL File E72169
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS / ORDERING INFORMATION
(Order QTY 1 = standard package of 5) Ex. 5 GF-5 = 25 fuses
HKP-HH
GF, K235 Series
HRK
AMP RATING 125V MODEL
1/8 #251.125
1/2 #251.500
1 #251001
2 #251002
Epoxy Coating
0.095 (0.238) dia
1.47
(3.74)
0.28
(0.70)
in
(cm) 1.47
(3.74)
LF 1A
DESCRIPTION 251 Series fast-acting circuit board type fuses are sold in packs of 5 and range from 0
.125 A to 2.0 A ratings.
APPLICATION
• UL File E19180
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS / ORDERING INFORMATION
(Sold in packs of 5) (Order QTY 1 = PACKAGE of 5)
251 Series
FUSES
FLM, FLQ, FNQ, GF, K235, 251 SERIES
FNQ-R

909. fi 855PANEL FABRICATION
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ABB MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
S200U-K SERIES
Rated Voltage 240 VAC
Rated Current 0.2 to 63A
Rated Interruption
Capacity 10,000A
Protection Rating IP 20
Poles Single, 2, 3
Operating Temperature -13° to 131°F (-25° to 55°C)
Mounting Vertical and Horizontal on 35mm
DIN rail
Additional Specifications
Short Circuit Capacity
10kA
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Protection Method Electromechanical
(thermal/magnetic)
Dimensions
Single 0.73"W x 2.72"D x 3.47"H
(1.8 x 6.9 x 8.8 cm)
2 Pole 1.38"W x 2.72"D x 3.47"H
(3.5 x 6.9 x 8.8cm)
3 Pole 2.19"W x 2.72"D x 3.47"H
(5.25 x 6.9 x 8.8cm)
Approvals UL Listed 489; File #E212323
Weight
Single 0.33 lb (0.15kg)
2 Pole 0.62 lb (0.28kg)
3 Pole 0.93 lb (0.42kg)
Warranty 1 Year
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The S200U-K Series of miniature circuit breakers are effective products for both commercial and industrial applications
. The
K-"power" characteristic-function asures protection and control for circuits like transformer and auxiliary circuits, and against overloads and short-circuits
. Two terminal spaces on top or bottom can be used
for cables wth differnt cross-sections or combination of cables and busbars
. The S200U-K Series also feature a quick fastening system
for easy removal of the devices from the busbar and have a patented IP 20 finger safe terminals
.
SPECIFICATIONS
S201U-K20
MODEL DESCRIPTION

MODEL DESCRIPTION
S201U-K1 Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 1 Amp

S202U-K8 Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 8 AMP
S201U-K2 Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 2 Amp

S202U-K10 Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 10 AMP
S201U-K3 Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 3 AMP

S202U-K15 Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 15 AMP
S201U-K4 Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 4 AMP

S202U-K20 Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 20 AMP
S201U-K5 Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 5 AMP

S202U-K25 Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 25 AMP
S201U-K8 Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 8 AMP

S203U-K1 Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 1 AMP
S201U-K10 Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 10 AMP

S203U-K2 Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 2 AMP
S201U-K15 Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 15 AMP

S203U-K3 Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 3 AMP
S201U-K20 Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 20 AMP

S203U-K4 Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 4 AMP
S201U-K25 Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 25 AMP

S203U-K5 Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 5 AMP
S202U-K1 Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 1 AMP

S203U-K8 Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 8 AMP
S202U-K2 Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 2 AMP

S203U-K10 Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 10 AMP
S202U-K3 Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 3 AMP

S203U-K15 Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 15 AMP
S202U-K4 Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 4 AMP

S203U-K20 Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 20 AMP
S202U-K5 Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 5 AMP

S203U-K25 Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 25 AMP
FEATURES
• Current limiting
• Fast breaking time (2.5-3.5 msec)
• DIN rail or front panel mounting
• Finger safe terminals

910. fi
PANEL FABRICATION 856fi
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
CIRCUIT BREAKER
QL SERIES, 1C SERIES
Rated Voltage 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Rated Current 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 5A, 8A, 10A, 15A, 20A,
25A
Rated Interruption Capacity
10,000A
Protection Method Hydraulic magnetic technology
Poles Single pole
Time Delay 150% rated current, 8-90 sec; 200%
rated current 4-28 sec
Operating Temperature -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Dimensions 3.8"H x 0.51"W x 2.7"D
(9.7 x 1.3 x 6.8 cm)
Weight 0.22 lb (0.1 kg)
Approvals UL 489 listed, File #E192487, CSA, CE,
VDE
Warranty 1 year
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
QL Series circuit breakers provide excellent protection
against overloads and short circuits for electrical circuits and
small-sized electrical equipment
.
FEATURES
• Holds 100% rated current independent of ambient temperature
•
Resets immediately after tripping
• Mounts to DIN rail
MODEL DESCRIPTION
QL-1 1A Circuit breaker
QL-2 2A Circuit breaker
QL-3 3A Circuit breaker
QL-4 4A Circuit breaker
QL-5 5A Circuit breaker
QL-8 8A Circuit breaker
QL-10 10A Circuit breaker
QL-15 15A Circuit breaker
QL-20 20A Circuit breaker
QL-25 25A Circuit breaker
SPECIFICATIONS
QL Series
Rated Voltage 120/240/277 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Rated Current 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A ,5A, 8A, 10A, 15A,
20A, 25A
Rated Interruption
Capacity 10,000A
Protection Method Thermal magnetic technology
Poles Single pole
Operating Temperature -13° to 131°F (-25° to 55°C)
Dimensions 4.3"H x 0.57"W x 2.8"D
(10.9 x 1.4 x 7.1 cm)
Weight 0.31 lb (0.14kg)
Approvals UL File #E329510, CE
Warranty 1 year
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
1C Series circuit breakers provide excellent protection against overloads and short circuits for electrical circuits and small-sized electrical equipment
.
FEATURES
• Line/load reversible
• Current limiting
• Mounts to DIN rail
SPECIFICATIONS
1C15UL
Model Description
1C1UL 1A Circuit breaker
1C2UL 2A Circuit breaker
1C3UL 3A Circuit breaker
1C4UL 4A Circuit breaker
1C5UL 5A Circuit breaker
1C8UL 8A Circuit breaker
1C10UL 10A Circuit breaker
1C15UL 15A Circuit breaker
1C20UL 20A Circuit breaker
1C25UL 25A Circuit breaker

911. fi 857PANEL FABRICATION
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
WIRING DUCT
VD SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
VD Series wiring duct allows the simplification and
acceleration of panel-building operations such as wire
retention, identification of equipment and circuits, and wire
separation
.
FEATURES
• High impact PVC, self extinguishing
• Equipped with cover
• Attractive white or gray finish
• UL recognized, file E97527
• One year warranty
MODEL DESCRIPTION
VD1-15G 1.5"H x 1"W x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 2.54 cm x 2m), includes cover (**56)
VD1-15W 1.5"H x 1"W x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 2.54 cm x 2m), includes cover (**56)
VD1-3G 3"H x 1"W x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 2.54 cm x 2m), includes cover (**28)
VD1-3W 3"H x 1"W x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 2.54 cm x 2m), includes cover (**28)
VD15-15G 1.5"H x 1.5"W x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover (**38)
VD15-15W 1.5"H x 1.5"W x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover (**38)
VD15-3G 3"H x 1.5"W x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover (**28)
VD15-3W 3"H x 1.5"W x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover (**28)
VD22-22G 2.25"H x 2.25"W x 6.5'L (5.72 cm x 5.72 cm x 2m), includes cover (**18)
VD22-22W 2.25"H x 2.25"W x 6.5'L (5.72 cm x 5.72 cm x 2m), includes cover (**18)
VD22-3G 3"H x 2.25"W x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 5.72 cm x 2m), includes cover (**20)
VD22-3W 3"H x 2.25"W x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 5.72 cm x 2m), includes cover (**20)
VD3-3G 3"H x 3"W x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**16)
VD3-3W 3"H x 3"W x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**16)
** Carton quantity, order per piece

912. fi
PANEL FABRICATION 858fi
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ABB WIRING DUCT
ABB SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
ABB Series wiring duct allows for the simplification and
acceleration of panel-building operations such as wire
retention, identification of equipment and circuits, and wire
separation
.
FEATURES
• UL94V
(516°C)
• Equipped with cover
• Attractive white or gray finish
• Accessories available to minimize panel planning and
construction time
• UL File# E125800, IEC 695-2-1 Standard
• One-year warranty
MODEL DESCRIPTION
Gra
y
ABB-5043
1"W x 1.5"H x 6.5'L ( 2.54 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover (**24)
ABB-5083 1"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (2.54 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**14)
ABB-5045 1.5"W x 1.5"H x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover (**15)
ABB-5085 1.5"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**18)
ABB-5067 2.25"W x 2.25"H x 6.5'L (5.72 cm x 5.72 cm x 2m), includes cover (**16)
ABB-5087 2.25"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (5.72 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**12)
ABB-5089 3"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**8)
White ABB-1SL5043A00
1"W x 1.5"H x 6.5'L (2.54 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover (**24)
ABB-1SL5083A00 1"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (2.54 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**14)
ABB-1SL5045A00 1.5"W x 1.5"H x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover (**15)
ABB-1SL5085A00 1.5"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**18)
ABB-1SL5067A00 2.25"W x 2.25"H x 6.5'L (5.72 cm x 5.72 cm x 2m), includes cover (**16)
ABB-1SL5087A00 2.25"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (5.72 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**12)
ABB-1SL5089A00 3"H x 3"W x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**8)
ACCESSORIES
Gray ABB-5302
Gray cover for 1"W wire duct
ABB-5304 Gray cover for 1.5"W wire duct
ABB-5306 Gray cover for 2.25"W wire duct
ABB-5308 Gray cover for 3"W wire duct
ABB-05240 Plastic label for slot mounting
White ABB-1SL5302A00
White cover for 1"W wire duct
ABB-1SL5304A00 White cover for 1.5"W wire duct
ABB-1SL5306A00 White cover for 2.25"W wire duct
ABB-1SL5308A00 White cover for 3"W wire duct
ABB Series
** Carton quantity, order per piece

913. fi 859PANEL FABRICATION
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
IBOCO WIRING DUCT
T1, T1E SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
T1 Series wiring duct allows for the simplification and
acceleration of panel-building operations such as wire
retention, identification of equipment and circuits, and wire
separation
. T1E Series wiring ducts have smaller width
fingers. They are 0.16" wide compared to the T1 Series
which are 0.47" wide.
FEATURES
• Self-e •
Equipped with cover
• Attractive white or gray finish
• UL recognized component File E123572, CSA certified
• Accessories available to minimize panel planning and
construction time
• All models are 6.5' (1.98 m) long and include cover
• One-year warranty
INSTALLATION
T1 Series
CL Wire Retainer

COV-10* 1"W x 6.56'L (2.54 x cm x 2m) duct cover
CO
V-15*
1.5"W x 6.56'L (3.81cm x 2m) duct cover
CO
V-22*
2.25"W x 6.56'L (5.72 cm x 2m) duct cover
CO
V-30*
3"W x 6.56'L (7.62 cm x 2m) duct cover
SEP-15 Circuit separator, 1.5"H x 6.56'L (3.81 cm x 2m),
use with duct 1.5"H (3.8 cm)
SEP-22 Circuit separator, 2.25"H x 6.56'L (5.72 cm x 2 m),
use with duct 2.25"H (5.72 cm)
SEP-30 Circuit separator, 3"H x 6.56'L (7.62 cm x 2m),
use with duct 3"H (7.62 cm)
ZP1 Wire tie attatchment
ZP2 Wire tie attachment
CL-1515 Wire retainer for 1.5" x 1.5" (3.81 x 3.81 cm) duct
CL-1522 Wire retainer for 1.5" x 2.25" (3.81 x 5.72 cm) duct
CL-1530 Wire retainer for 1.5" x 3" (3.81 x 7.62 cm) duct
CL-2215 Wire retainer for 2.25" x 1.5" (5.72 x 3.81 cm) duct
CL-2222 Wire retainer for 2.25" x 2.25" (5.72 x 5.72 cm) duct
CL-2230 Wire retainer for 2.25" x 3" (5.72 x 7.62 cm) duct
CL-2240 Wire retainer for 2.25" x 4" (5.72 x 10.16 cm) duct
CL-3022 Wire retainer for 3" x 2.25" (7.62 x 5.72 cm) duct
CL-3030 Wire retainer for 3" x 3" (7.62 x 7.62 cm) duct
CL-3040 Wire retainer for 3" x 4" (7.62 x 10.16 cm) duct
DINBLOK3 DIN rail mounting block
T1E
Model
T1
T1E
Description
10
15
22
30
15
22
30
40
50
G
W
T1 Series wiring duct (0.47” wide fingers)
T1E Series wiring duct (0.16” wide fingers)
1.0” (2.54 cm) width
1.5” (3.81 cm) width
2.25” (5.72 cm) width
3.0” (7.62 cm) width
1.5” (3.81 cm) height
2.25” (5.72 cm) height
3.0” (7.62 cm) height
4.0” (10.16 cm) height
5.0” 12.7 cm height †
Grey cover
White cover
T1 22 30 W
† - Only available with T1(E)-30 models
Example - T1-2230W
T1 Series wiring duct, 2.25”W x 3.0”H x 6.5’L
(5.72 cm x 7.62 cm x 1.98 m), with white cover
Sold individually or in packages.
Ask your sales person or check kele.com
for package quantity purchases
ACCESSORIES
*Add W for White or G for Gray.

914. fi
PANEL FABRICATION 860fi
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
DESCRIPTION
The P Series Spiralite universal spiral wrapping is great for
fast and economical grouping of wire bundles.
FEATURES •
Polyethylene construction
• Provides flexible connection between panel and door
• Strong, yet simple to install and remove
P Series
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL FOR WIRE BUNDLES in (cm) FT (m) (per carton*)
P2 1/4 to 1 (0.64 to 2.54) 80 (24)
P3 3/8 to 2 (0.95 to 5.08) 80 (24)
P4 1/2 to 3 (1.27 to 7.62) 65 (20)
* Available in carton quantities only – order quantity 1 = 1 carton
WIRING AIDS
P, ST, STS SERIES, DIN RAIL
ORDERING INFORMATION
25mm = 1”
50mm = 2”
70mm = 2.75”
90mm = 3.5”
ST and STS screw size 6mm
STS
3.15”
(80)
2.36”
(60)
1” (25)
o0.23”
(6)
ST
M6
2”
(50)
2.36”
(60)
1.18”
(30)
0.08”
(2)
in. (mm)
1.38” (35)
0.28” x 0.47”
(7 x 12)
0.79” (20)
0.23”
(6)
0.31”
(8)
2.05”
(52)
6MA
2.36” (60)
2.52” (64)
2.75” (70)
3.15” (80)
Height
DESCRIPTION
ST, STS support brackets give you options in mounting your DIN rail
. These are made of cold-rolled steel treated with
galvanic zinc plating and passivation.
FEATURES
• Includes 6mm screws
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST DIN Rail support bracket
STS-25 1" din rail support bracket
STS-50 2" din rail support bracket
STS-70 2.75" din rail support bracket
STS-90 3.5" din rail support bracket
DIMENSIONS
ST SeriesSTS Series
1.38
(3.51)
0.30
(0.75)
1.06
(2.69)
1.38
(3.51)
0.39
(0.99)
1.23
(3.12)
in
(cm)
DIN-3F
1.38
(3.5)
0.59
(1.5)
1.06
(2.7)
.24
(.63)
BAM-1500
BAM-1000
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
DIN rail is the standard method for mounting relays and terminal
blocks. Kele offers five models with different features.
FEATURES
• One meter length (39.4")
• Perforated
DIMENSIONS
DIN-3F
BAM-1000
with DINCLIC-FM4
Mounting Clips
• Steel or aluminum
MODEL DESCRIPTION
B
AM-1000
35 mm aluminum DIN mounting rail 39.4" (1m)
B
AM-1500
35 mm aluminum DIN mounting rail 39.4" (1m) 15mm height
DIN-3F 35 mm DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m), RoHS compliant
DINRALU DIN rail, aluminum, 39.4" (1m)
DINRSTL DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m)
RELATED PRODUCTS
DINCLIC-FM4 Mounting clips, 4 mm screw size

915. fi 861PANEL FABRICATION
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
PANEL RECEPTACLE & DISCONNECT SWITCH ASSEMBLIES
PDK, PRK
Supply Voltage 120 VAC
Current Rating
Non-GFI 20A @ 120 VAC
GFI 15A @ 120 VAC
Switch 20A @120 VAC
Indicator 25 mA @120 VAC
Wire Type 12 AWG (UL) MTW 600V, 13 AWG
(UL) MTW 600V
Fuse Size 250V (0-15A ordered separately)
Dimensions
PDK, PDK-F, PRK, 51012218, PRK-GFI
4.75" H x 2.75" W
(12.07 x 6.99 cm),
PRK-S, PRK-FS, PRK-FLS
4.50" H x 4.50" W
(11.43 x 11.43 cm)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
These panel receptacle and disconnect switch assemblies
combine convenience and function. Models PRK-S, PRK-
FS, and PRK-FLS provide constant power to the receptacle and can be used to power down the rest of the panel with the toggle switch
. Models PRK-FS and PRK-FLS include a fuse
holder for circuit protection (fuse sold separately). Models
PDK and PRK use the standard single-gang configuration and the Models PRK-FLS, PRK-FS, and PRK-S use the double-gang configuration
. The 51012218 offers DIN rail
mounting and convenient push-on wiring.
FEATURES
• Prewired
• Handy box included
• Cost effective
• Always hot receptacle
• Panel disconnect switch
• Pilot light option to indicate closed switch
F
S
L
GLN (OUT)
GLN (IN)
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PDK Panel disconnect switch assembly
PDK-F-2P Panel disconnect switch assembly, 2 pole, 1 leg fused
PDK-L Panel disconnect switch assembly with green light
PRK Panel receptacle assembly
PRK-FLS Panel switch and receptacle assembly with fuse holder and green light
PRK-FS Panel switch and receptacle assembly with fuse holder
PRK-GFI Panel receptacle assembly with GFI receptacle
PRK-S Panel switch and receptacle assembly
51012218 Din mounted duplex receptacle
CAUTION: Receptacle is always hot.
PRK-GFI
51012218
PRK-S
PRK-FLS
PRK-FLS PDK-L
PRK
PDK
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
GF Series Fuses (fuses ordered separately) 854
PDK-F-2P

916. fi
PANEL FABRICATION 862fi
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
PILOT LIGHTS
L4000 SERIES
0.25 to 0.34
(0.64 to 0.86)
Panel thickness
(when hex nut
is reversed
as shown)
Flat lens
Dome lens
0.53
(1.35)
0.53
(1.35)
0.09
(0.23)
0.84
(2.13)
0.63
(1.60)
0.81
(2.06)
0.38
(0.97)
0 to 0.25
(0 to 0.64)
Panel
thickness
0.81 (2.06)
Across flats
11/16-27
Threads
0.187 (0.48)
Terminals
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
L4000 Series replaceable incandescent pilot lights with
associated colored lenses can be mounted to control panels
to provide instantaneous status indication of mechanical
equipment such as fans, pumps, compressors, or control
circuits
.
FEATURES
• Low cost
• Noncorrosive black polyester body
• Nickel-plated brass terminals for positive contact
• Sturdy polycarbonate lenses
• Simple installation with nylon hex nut
• Replaceable incandescent lamps
DIMENSIONS
SSG1-11/16
with
L4017/L4018
ORDERING INFORMATION
LAMPS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
12PSB5 Lamp, 12 VA C/VDC
24PSB5 Lamp, 24 VA C/VDC
28PSB5 Lamp, 28 VA C/VDC
120PSB5 Lamp, 120 VA C/VDC
5SBF200-OCW- 028B LED, 24/28 VDC
5SBF200-OCW- 120A LED, 120 VA C
FLAT LENSES L4025 Flat lens, red
L4026 Flat lens, clear
L4027 Flat lens, amber
L4028 Flat lens, white
L4029 Flat lens, green
L4030 Flat lens, blue
L4031 Flat lens, yellow
SOCKET MODEL DESCRIPTION
L4017 Lamp socket, 11/16" dia threaded
ROUND LENSES L4018 Round lens, red
L4019 Round lens, clear
L4020 Round lens, amber
L4021 Round lens, white
L4022 Round lens, green
L4023 Round lens, blue
L4024 Round lens, yellow
Terminals Nickel plated brass
Body Material Black polyester
Bezel Polished stainless steel
Lens Polycarbonate
Mounting 11/16" (1.75 cm) dia hole, supplied
with polyester hex nut, Threaded
Approvals UL-recognized component,
File #E20325; CSA recognized, File #LR13346
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Supply
Voltage
Supply
Current
Life
Expectancy
12PSB5 12 VAC/VDC 0.17A 12,000 hours
24PSB5 24 VAC/VDC 0.073A 10,000 hours
28PSB5 28 VAC/VDC 0.04A 5,000 hours
120PSB5 120 VAC/VDC0.025A 5,000 hours
5SBF200OCW028B 24/28 VDC 0.015A 50,000 hours
5SBF200OCW120A 120 VAC 0.010A 50,000 hours
*Average life ratings are based on shock-free, vibration-free, transient-free continu-
ous operation. Incandescent lamps should not be connected across inductive
loads, such as a relay coil or solenoid, without a varistor or transzorb to prevent
voltage transients from damaging the filament.
RELATED PRODUCTS
SSG1-11/16 Wall plate box mount 11/16" hole

917. fi 863PANEL FABRICATION
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
IDEC PILOT LIGHTS
APW SERIES
B
A
1.11
(2.85)
PILOT LIGHTS A B
Dome 0.98 (2.49) Ø 0.94 (2.36)
Flush 0.62 (1.57) Ø 0.94 (2.36)
Panel
cutout
0.86
(2.18)
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
APW Series replaceable incandescent and LED pilot lights
can be mounted on control panels to provide immediate
visual status of mechanical equipment such as fans, pumps,
compressors, or control circuits
.
FEATURES
• Rugged, oil-tight construction
• Bezel-threaded lock ring for easy panel installation
• Incandescent or LED lamps
• Small size
• Excellent visibility
• Multiple voltage input ranges
DIMENSIONS
APW199D-R-24
ORDERING INFORMATION
INCANDESCENT
MODEL STYLE
APW299 - † - †† Dome
APW199 - † - †† Round flush
† Lens Color Code: R-Red, G-Green, A-Amber, S-Blue, W- White
†† Lamp Voltage Code: 6-6 VAC/VDC, 12-12 VAC/VDC, 24-24 VAC/VDC
PILOT LIGHTS
LED
MODEL STYLE
APW299D - † - †† Dome
APW199D - † - †† Round flush
† Lens Color Code: R-Red, G-Green, A-Amber, S-Blue, W- White, Y-Yellow
†† Lamp Voltage Code: 6-6 VDC, 12-12 VAC/VDC, 24-24 VAC/VDC, 120-120 VAC
INCANDESCENT LED
MODEL VOLTAGE MODEL VOLTAGE COLOR
IS-6 6.3V LSTD-6† 6 VDC G - Green
IS-12 12V LSTD-1† 12 VAC/VDC R - Red A - Amber
IS-24 24V LSTD-2† 24 VAC/VDC W - White
LSTD-H2† 120 VAC PW - Pure White S - Blue
REPLACEMENT LAMPS
IS-120 120V
APW299D-G-24
mounted in
E-1PBG
APW299D-G-24
Materials Of Construction
Lens Acrylic
Base Nylon
Bezel Chrome-plated die-cast zinc
Applicable Wire Size
Minimum 1 x 22 AWG
Maximum 2 x 14 AWG or 1 x 12 AWG
Mounting 0.86” (2.2 cm) hole
Panel Thickness Panel thickness adjustment ring
0.04" to 0.24" (0.10 to 0.61 cm)
Lamps T3-1/4 miniature bayonet base
LED 6 VDC, 52 mA; 12 VAC/VDC, 26
mA; 24 VAC/VDC,13 mA; 120 VAC,
8 mA; 1,000,000 hrs average life
Incandescent 6.3V, 1W; 12V, 1W; 24V, 1W;
3000 hrs average life
Protection Rating NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Approvals UL listed, File #E65961; CSA cer
tified, File #LR48366
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
SSG1-67
RELATED PRODUCTS
E-1PBG One-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure
E-2PBG Two-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure
E-3PBG Three-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure
E-4PBG Four-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure
SSG1-67 Wall plate box mount 7/8" hole
*Holes are 22.5 mm in a vertical arrangement.

918. fi
PANEL FABRICATION 864fi
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
IDEC PILOT LIGHTS AND MINIATURE SWITCHES
A SERIES
0.32
(0.81)
0.11
(0.28)
0.87
(2.2)
0.35
(0.89)
1.18
(3.00)
in
(cm)
UL file #E55996
DESCRIPTION
A Series pilot lights and illuminated push buttons are low-cost,
lighted operator devices.
A Series selector switches and non-illuminated push buttons are
low-cost operator devices.
NC
COM
NO
(+) (-)
Lamp Lamp
NC
COM
NO
(DPDT for three-position
switch only)
Illuminated Push Buttons
and Pilot Lights
Non-Illuminated Push Buttons
and Selector Switches
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
SSG1-5/8
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: AB6M-M1P-R Round non-illuminated push button,
momentar y, SPDT contacts, red buttonAB6MM 1P R
NON-ILLUMINATED PUSH BUTTONS
Example: AL6M-M14P-A Round illuminated push button,
momentar y, SPDT contacts, amber lensAL6M M 14P A
ILLUMINATED PUSH BUTTONS
Example: AL6MP4P-A Round pilot light, amber lensAL6M-P4P A
PILOT LIGHTS
AS6M Round selector switch
2Y2P Two-position, maintained operation
3Y2P Three-position, maintained operation
2KT2PA Two-position keylock, remov eable any position
Example: AL6M-2Y2P Two-position round selector switch, maintained operationAS6M2 Y2P
SELECTOR SWITCHES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AB6M Round non-illuminated push button
M Momentary operation
A Maintained operation
1P SPDT contacts
2P DPDT contacts
BUTTON COLOR G (green), R (red), S (blue), W (white), Y (yellow), B (black)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AL6M Round illuminated push button, 24 VAC/VDC
M Momentary operation
A Maintained operation
14P SPDT contacts
24P DPDT contacts
BUTTON COLOR A (amber), G (green), R (red), S (blue), W (white), Y (yellow)
AL6M-P4P Round pilot light, 24 VAC/VDC
LENS COLOR A (amber), G (green), R (red), S (blue), W (white), Y (yellow)
RELATED PRODUCTS
SSG1-5/8 Wall plate box mount 5/8" hole
AL6M-M14P-S
AB6M-M1PB
AS6M-3Y2P
AS6M-2Y2P
FEATURES
Pilot Lights
• Attractive housing with bright LED indication
• Smaller 5/8'' (1.6 cm) cutout required
• Long-lasting LED lamps, 24 VAC/DC ±5%
• 1 Amp contacts, 24/120V
• Oil tight (IP65 when mounted in enclosure)
• SPDT switches
• Momentary or maintained switches
• Illuminated push buttons ideal for push-to-test applications
• Solder connections
• One-year warranty
• UL file #E55996
Selector Switc
hes
•
Smaller 5/8" (1.59 cm) cutout required
• Oil-tight (IP65 when mounted in enclosure)
• 1-amp contacts, 24/120V
• SPDT switches
• Momentary and maintained pushbuttons
• Maintained two- and three-position selector switch
• Solder connections
• One-year warranty
• UL file #E55996

919. fi 865PANEL FABRICATION
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
FLUSH MOUNT PILOT LIGHTS, PUSHBUTTONS AND SWITCHES
LB SERIES
Rated Voltage 250V
Continuous Current 5A
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ (minimum)
Operating Temperature -13° to 140°F (-25° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 45 to 85% RH (no condensation)
Storage Temperature -22° to 176°F (-30° to 80°C)
Contact Type SPDT, DPDT
Terminals Solder/tab terminal #110, PC board
terminal (optional)
Action Momentary, Maintained
Mechanical Life Momentary 2M minimum operations
Maintained 250K minimum operations
Approvals UR File #E55996, CSA #LR21451, CE
Warranty 1 year
0.27”
(6.95)
0.15”
(3.85)
Panel Thickness:
0.020 to 0.13”
(0.5 to 3.2)
Gasket
Locking Ring
Mounting
Bracket
ø0.86”
(ø22)
0.86” (22)
SquareRound
0.89”
(22.5)0.43”
(11)
Square with Guard
0.86” (22) 0.07” (2)
0.20” (5.2)
1.19”
(30.4)
0.95”
(24.2)
DESCRIPTION
The LB Series add style and safety to any application. The
LB Series flush mount style of pushbuttons and pilot lights
project only 2mm in front of the panel and just 34.9mm depth
behind the panel. They are available in both illuminated and
non-illuminated styles.
FEATURES
• 5A contact ratings
• Black or metallic bezels available
• Bright and clear LED illumination
• Round bezel mounts in an 18mm hole
• Square bezel mounts in an 18 x 18 mm hole
• IP65 degree of protection
SPDT/DPDT Contacts
(SPDT contacts on the right only)
X1
X2
11
14
12
24
22
21
Lamp  Terminal (+)
Lamp 
Terminal (−)
X2
X1
Lamp 
Terminal (+)
Lamp 
Terminal (−)
TOPTOP
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
LB6MB-A1T5-S
LB7MK-25TA
LB7GL-A1T54-S
PILOT LIGHTS
MODEL
LB
6 7
M
B
P-1T04
†
DESCRIPTION
16mm Flush Mount LED Pilot Light Models
Round
Square
Metallic Bezel
Black Bezel
24V AC/DC Operating Voltage
Color
PUSHBUTTONS
MODEL
LB
6
7
M
B
G
B-A1
B-M1
L-A1
L-M1
T5
T6
T54*
T64*
†
DESCRIPTION
16mm Flush Mount LED Pushbutton Models
Round Button
Square Button
Metallic Bezel
Black Bezel
Black Bezel with Guard
Standard Maintained
Standard Momentary
Illuminated Maintained
Illuminated Momentary
SPDT
DPDT
SPDT 24V AC/DC
SPST 24V AC/DC
Color
* Illuminated Models Only
Color†
A - Amber (Only lighted models) B - Black (Only non-illuminated pushbuttons) G - Green PW - Pure White (Only lighted models) R - Red S - Blue W - White Y - Yellow
KEY SELECTOR SWITCH WITH FLUSH BEZEL
LB
6 7
M
B
K-2T5A
K-2T6A
16mm Ke y Switch, 2 position
Round Flush bezel shape
Square Flush bezel shape
Metallic Bezel
Black Bezel
SPDT
DPDT
Example: LB6MB-A1T5-S
16mm Flush Mount Pushbutton
Model, Round
button,Metallic Bezel,
Standard Maintained, silver SPDT
contacts, Blue
LB 6 M B - A1 T5 - S
Note: All options are not ava ilable
with all models.

920. fi
PANEL FABRICATION 866fi
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
SWITCH A
A
B
B
H
H
W
W
D
D
Single Pole
Double Pole
Three Pole
Four Pole 0.687 (1.74)
0.687 (1.74)
0.687 (1.74)
0.687 (1.74)
0.465 (1.18)
0.465 (1.18)
0.465 (1.18)
0.465 (1.18)
0.67 (1.70)
0.778 (1.98)
0.803 (2.04)
1.218 (3.09)
1.134 (2.88)
1.308 (3.32)
1.308 (3.32)
1.44 (3.65)
0.634 (1.61)
0.75 (1.91)
1.088 (2.76)
1.34 (3.41)
Typical Switch
Mounting hole
0.5" (1.27) diameter
in
(cm)
TOGGLE SWITCHES
RBTS SERIES
Contact Rating 10A @ 250 VAC
15A @ 125 VAC
3/4 hp, 120-240 VAC
Terminals Screw
Housing Material Phenolic, metal
(bright nickel plated brass)
Mounting Single hole type, 0.5" dia (1.27 cm)
Approvals UL-recognized component,
File #E7560, E67774
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
RBTS Series toggle switches are general-purpose toggle
switches for pilot duty control of electric equipment such as
fans, pumps, and compressors or control of electric control
circuits
.
FEATURES
• Non-corrosive, phenolic and metal housing
• Durable slow-make/slow-break contact mechanism
• Simple installation requires single hole
• Conveniently installed with one hexagon locknut and
one knurled facenut (furnished)
• Compression spring provides positive contact
pressure in closed position
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
SSG1-1/2
ORDERING INFORMATION
LEGEND PLATES MODEL DESCRIPTION
SYZE-212 On/Off/Auto plate
MODEL DESCRIPTION MODEL DESCRIPTION
RBTS308 Toggle switch SPST on-off RBTS114 Toggle switch 3PST on-off
RBTS312 Toggle switch SPDT on-on RBTS111 Toggle switch 3PDT on-on
RBTS310 Toggle switch SPDT on-off-on RBTS117 Toggle switch 3PDT on-off-on
RBTS314 Toggle switch DPST on-off RBTS413 Toggle switch 4PST on-off
RBTS315 Toggle switch DPDT on-on RBTS415 Toggle switch 4PDT on-on
RBTS316 Toggle switch DPDT on-off-on RBTS414 Toggle switch 4PDT on-off-on
RELATED PRODUCTS
SSG1-1/2 Wall plate box mount 1/2" hole
LEGEND PLATES MODEL DESCRIPTION
SYZE-212 On/Off/Auto plate
MODEL DESCRIPTION MODEL DESCRIPTION
RBTS308 Toggle switch SPST on-off RBTS114 Toggle switch 3PST on-off
RBTS312 Toggle switch SPDT on-on RBTS111 Toggle switch 3PDT on-on
RBTS310 Toggle switch SPDT on-off-on RBTS117 Toggle switch 3PDT on-off-on
RBTS314 Toggle switch DPST on-off RBTS413 Toggle switch 4PST on-off
RBTS315 Toggle switch DPDT on-on RBTS415 Toggle switch 4PDT on-on
RBTS316 Toggle switch DPDT on-off-on RBTS414 Toggle switch 4PDT on-off-on
RBTS308RBTS114
RBTS314

921. fi 867PANEL FABRICATION
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
Panel
cutout
0.878
(2.23)
0.14
(0.35)*
0.94
(2.39)
0.98
(2.5)
1.92
(4.84)
2.7
(6.86)
1.5
(3.81)in
(cm)
Knob Style
* Required for legend plates
or anti-rotation ring
2 Blocks
4 Blocks
IDEC GENERAL PURPOSE SELECTOR SWITCHES
ASW SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The ASW Series general-purpose selector switches are for
pilot duty control of electrical equipment such as fans, pumps,
compressors, or control circuits
.
FEA
TURES
•
Rugged, oil-tight construction
• Snap-fit blocks with N.O. and N.C. contacts
• Self-cleaning silver contacts
• Durable nylon operator base
• Optional key or lever styles available
DIMENSIONS
Contact Rating 10A, 600 VAC/VDC; 5 mA, 3 VAC/
VDC minimum
Contact Resistance 50 mΩ maximum (inital value)
Contact Material Silver
Electrical Life 500,000 minimum operations
Protection Rating NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Applicable Wire Size
Minimum 1 x 22 AWG
Maximum 2 x 14 AWG or 1 x 12 AWG
Mechanical Life 500,000 minimum operations,
Mounting 0.878" (2.23 cm) hole
Panel Thickness Panel thickness adjustment ring,
0.04" to 0.24" (0.10 to 0.61 cm)
Approvals UL listed, File #E68961; CSA
certified, File #LR48366,
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
Knob Style Selector Switch
ORDERING INFORMATION
Contact #
Operator
PositionModel Model HW-C10 Normally open
contact
HW-C01 Normally cl ose
contact
TW-DB Dummy block (needed when only one HW-C10
or HW-C01 is used)
ASW210
ASW2K10 (Key)
ASW201-116
ASW211
ASW2K11 (Key)
NWAL-212 NWAL-317
ASW320
ASW3K20 (Key)
ASW321-255
ASW322
ASW3K22 (Key)
LR
1 N.O.
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
1 N.C.
Contact
Configuration
1
1
1
2
O X
X O
X
O
O
X
Legend Plate-
Off-On
TWO-POSITION MAINTAINED THREE-POSITION MAINTA INED ADDITIONAL CONTACT BLOCKS
SELECTOR SWITCHES
Contact #
2 N.O.
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
2 N.O.
2 N.C.
CContac t
Configuration
Operator
Position
L
R
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
X
O
X
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
X
O
O
X
O
X
X
O
Legend Plate-
Hand-Off-Au to
Note: Ke y is removeable in any position.
X = Contacts closed O = Contacts open
X X = Contacts remain closed when sw itch is moved between these two positions.
CAM SWITCHES
ACSNO-244-YB-C2008 Four-position, contact made each position onl y, 45 degrees (1.2", 3.05 cm mounting hole)
ACSNO-354-YB-C3016 Five-position, contact made each position onl y, 45 degrees (1.2", 3.05 cm mounting hole)
ASW320 mounted
in E-1PBG
ACSNO-354-YB-C3016
SSG1-67
RELATED PRODUCTS
E-1PBG One-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure
E-2PBG Two-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure
E-3PBG Three-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure
E-4PBG Four-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure
NWAL-CUSTOM Custom engraved nameplate
SSG1-67 Wall plate box mount 7/8" hole

*Holes are 22.5 mm in a vertical arrangement.

922. fi
PANEL FABRICATION 868fi
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
IDEC PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES
ABW, AOW SERIES
Panel
cutout
0.86
(2.20)
B
A
1.89
(4.85)
2.67
(6.85)
2 Blocks:
4 Blocks:
0.78
(2.00)
PUSHBUTTONS A B
Flush 0.507 (1.30) Ø 0.936 (2.40)
Extended 0.741 (1.90) Ø 0.936 (2.40)
Panel thickness
0.04 to 0.24
(0.10 to 0.60)
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The ABW and AOW Series push button switches are for
manual control of fans, pumps, compressors, or control
circuits
.
FEATURES
• Flush, •
Snap-fit blocks with N.O. and N.C. contacts
• Self-cleaning silver contacts
• Rugged, oil-tight construction
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ABW Momentary action push-button switch
AOW Maintained action push-button switch
1 Flush (includes colored buttons of red, green, and black)
2 Extended (specify color below, red standard)
4 Mushroom (specify color below, red standard)
# Normally open contacts (max 2)
# Normally closed contacts (max 2)
Button color for extended and mushroom models
B = Black, G = Green, R = Red
ABW
110
Example: ABW101 Momentary flush push button with
one normally closed contact
AOW411R
mounted in
E-1PBG
Extended
Flush
Mushroom
Contact Rating 10A, 600 VAC/VDC; 5mA, 3 VAC/
VDC minimum
Contact Resistance 50 mΩ maximum (inital value)
Contact Material Silver
Electrical Life 500,000 minimum operations
Protection Rating NEMA 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Insulation 600V
Applicable Wire Size
Minimum 1 x 22 AWG
Maximum 2 x 14 AWG or 1 x 12 AWG
Mechanical Life 500,000 minimum operations
Operating Temperature -13° to 122°F (-25° to 50°C)
Panel Thickness Panel thickness adjustment ring,
0.04" to 0.24" (0.10 to 0.61 cm)
Approvals UL listed, File #E68961; CSA
certified, File #LR48366
Warranty 1.5 years
SPECIFICATIONS
SSG1-67
RELATED PRODUCTS
E-1PBG One-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure
E-2PBG Two-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure
E-3PBG Three-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure
E-4PBG Four-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure
HW-C01 Normally closed contact
HW-C10 Normally open contact
NWAR-27 Emergency stop label 2.75" (6.99 cm) round
SSG1-67 Wall plate box mount 7/8" hole
TW-DB Dummy block (needed when only 1 HW-C10 or HW-C01 is used)

*Holes are 22.5 mm in a vertical arrangement.

923. fi 869PANEL FABRICATION
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
UNIBODY PUSH BUTTONS AND SWITCHES
HW SERIES
Voltage Rating 600V
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ (minimum)
Continuous Current 10A
Operating Temperature -13° to 122°F (-25° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 45 to 85% RH (no condensation)
Storage Temperature -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C)
Mechanical Life 500K minimum operations
Approvals UL Listed File #E68961;
CSA File #LR92374; CE
Warranty 1 year
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The ies are IEC style devices that feature tamperproof
mounting and construction, modular stackable contact blocks
with IP20 fingersafe screw terminals, and pure silver contacts
with a self cleaning action
. Models include illuminated and
non-illuminated pushb
uttons in both round and square flush
and extended styles
.
FEATURES
• Loc •
Non-illuminated or LED illumination
• Self-cleaning rolling action contacts
• IP65 protection
1 contact block 2 contact blocks
4 contact blocks
Contact Block (Bottom View) Terminal Wiring
Arrows indicate access
directions for wiring.
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
HW4B-M1F11-G
HW4B-M2F11-R
HW4K-2AF11
HW1S-2TF11
HW4L-M2F
MODEL
HW
4B
4L
2B
2L
Round Standard
Round Illuminated
Square Standard
Square Illuminated
Momentary
Maintained
Flush Style
Extended Style
Color Standard
Color Illuminated
Illumination Voltage
Contact Blocks
DESCRIPTION
22mm Pushbutton
M
A
1
2
‡
QD‡
*D
F†
MODEL
HW
DESCRIPTION
22mm Model Switch
Selector Switch
Key Switch
1S-2T
1K-2A
†Contact Blocks
F† Contacts - HW Series Models
10 - 1 NO
01 - 1NC
11 - 1NO & 1NC
20 - 2NO
02 - 2NC
22 - 2NO & 2NC
‡
Colors - HW Series Models
B - Black
G - Green
R - Red
S - Blue
W - White
Y - Yellow
QD‡
Colors - HW Series Models
A - Amber
G - Green
R - Red
S - Blue
W - White
Y - Yellow
PW - Pure White
Example: HW4B-M110-G
22mm Pushbutton, Round Standard, Momentary, Flush Style, 1 NO, Green
HW 4B - M 1 F† - ‡ - *D
PUSHBUTTON STYLE SWITCH STYLE
Illumination Voltage*D
6V - AC/DC
12V - AC/DC
24V - AC/DC
120V - AC
240V - AC
Note: All options are not av ailable
with all models.
Flush
Extended
Selector
Key Switch
0.51” (1.3cm)
0.75” (1.9cm)
0.83” (2.1cm)
1.20” (30.5cm)
Dimensions for A
A
1.16”
(29.4)
1.63”
(41.4)
Locking Ring
Panel Thickness
0.031 to 0.24”
(0.8 to 6)
0.98”
(25)
M3.5 Terminal
Screw
ø0.93”
(ø23.6)
ø1.14”
(ø29)
LOCK
LOCK
1.16” (29.4)
0.98” (25)
1.63” (41.4)
0.98” (24.8)
1.17” (29.6)
in.
(mm)
2.76” (70.2) (4 blocks)
1.98” (50.2) (1 or 2 blocks)

924. fi
PANEL FABRICATION 870fi
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
Contact Rating AC: 120V, 6A; 240V, 3A; 480V,
1.5A; 600V, 1.2A DC: 120V,0.55A;
240V, 0.27A; 480V, 0.1A; 600V,
0.1A
Rated Insulation Voltage
690V
Mechanical Life 10 million operations
(contact block)
Terminals #14-20 AWG
Contact Material Silver
Mounting 0.874" (2.25 cm) hole
Operating Temperature -13° to 122°F (-25° to 50°C)
Panel Thickness 0.059" to 0.236" (0.15 to 0.6 cm)
Protection Rating NEMA type 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Approvals UL listed, File #E76003;
CSA certified, File #LR19700
Warranty 1 year
ABB PUSHBUTTONS, SELECTOR SWITCHES, PILOT LIGHTS, POTENTIOMETERS
CL, KT, M, MP SERIES
1.18
(3.0)
1.69
(4.3)
1.04
(2.65)
1.91
(4.85)
1.18
(3.0)
1.14
(2.9)
0.06-0.24
(0.15-0.6)
Selector sw itch Key-operated selector sw itch
1.67
(4.25)
0.51
(1.3)
Push bu tton
0.69
(1.75)
Extended
1.04
(2.65)
Emergency stop push bu tton
0.55
(1.4)
1.02
(2.6)
Potentiometer
1.75H x 1.17W
(4.45 x 2.96)
100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1.75H x 1.91W
(4.45 x 4.85)
Pilot light
13 14
2221
X1 X2
L1 L2
Light color
per order
Customer’s
control
contact
Control
voltage source
Wiring
included
Press-to-test
Pilot light schematic
Selector switch contact functions
O = not actuated (normal state)
X = actuated (state changed)
in
(cm)
in
(cm)
1.18
(3.0)
1.04
(2.65)
1.91
(4.85)
0.06-0.24
(0.15-0.6)
1.14
(2.9)
0.06-0.24
(0.15-0.6)
1.69
(4.3)
1.18
(3.0)
1.04
(2.65)
1.18
(3.0)
1.69
(4.3)
1.69
(4.3)
1.91
(4.85)
1.14
(2.9)
1.14
(2.9)
0.06-0.24
(0.15-06
1.65
(4.2)
0.57
(1.3)
1.14
(2.9)
0.06-0.24
(0.15-0.6)
1.0
(2.55)1.91
(4.85)
0.06-0.24
(0.15-0.6)
1.58
(4.0)
0.28
(0.7)
0.91
(2.31)
0.91
(2.31)
0.91
(2.31)
0.91
(2.31)
1.13
(2.87)
0.79
(2.0)
1.68
(4.27)
0.91
(2.31)
AC
A
B
C
DESCRIPTION
This series of operator interface devices offers a wide
variety of pushbuttons, selectors switches, and pilot
lights
. There are also press-to-test pilot lights and a
potentiometer added to the product line. These devices
use the IEC style of buttons, plus offer economical pricing.
FEATURES
• 22.5 mm size
• Quick release contact blocks
• Press-to-test pilot light offered
• Potentiometer model
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
SPA
Key Switch Push Button
Pilot Light Selector Switch
SSG1-67

925. fi 871PANEL FABRICATION
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ABB PUSHBUTTONS, SELECTOR SWITCHES, PILOT LIGHTS, POTENTIOMETERS
CL, KT, M, MP SERIES
1.18
(3.0)
1.69
(4.3)
1.04
(2.65)
1.91
(4.85)
1.18
(3.0)
1.14
(2.9)
0.06-0.24
(0.15-0.6)
Selector sw itch Key-operated selector sw itch
1.67
(4.25)
0.51
(1.3)
Push bu tton
0.69
(1.75)
Extended
1.04
(2.65)
Emergency stop push bu tton
0.55
(1.4)
1.02
(2.6)
Potentiometer
1.75H x 1.17W
(4.45 x 2.96)
100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1.75H x 1.91W
(4.45 x 4.85)
Pilot light
13 14
2221
X1 X2
L1 L2
Light color
per order
Customer’s
control
contact
Control
voltage source
Wiring
included
Press-to-test
Pilot light schematic
Selector switch contact functions
O = not actuated (normal state)
X = actuated (state changed)
in
(cm)
in
(cm)
1.18
(3.0)
1.04
(2.65)
1.91
(4.85)
0.06-0.24
(0.15-0.6)
1.14
(2.9)
0.06-0.24
(0.15-0.6)
1.69
(4.3)
1.18
(3.0)
1.04
(2.65)
1.18
(3.0)
1.69
(4.3)
1.69
(4.3)
1.91
(4.85)
1.14
(2.9)
1.14
(2.9)
0.06-0.24
(0.15-06
1.65
(4.2)
0.57
(1.3)
1.14
(2.9)
0.06-0.24
(0.15-0.6)
1.0
(2.55)1.91
(4.85)
0.06-0.24
(0.15-0.6)
1.58
(4.0)
0.28
(0.7)
0.91
(2.31)
0.91
(2.31)
0.91
(2.31)
0.91
(2.31)
1.13
(2.87)
0.79
(2.0)
1.68
(4.27)
0.91
(2.31)
AC
A
B
C
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
0-10 kfi cermet potentiometer, 280-degree rotation,
metal housing, black knob w/ white marking
MT-310B, SS plate, custom plate
Sweep symbol legend plate
Legend plate with 0 to 10 scale
CL Pilot light with integrated LED 502 24 VAC/VDC
513 110-130 VAC
Color R-Red, G-Green, Y-Yellow, L-Blue, W-White
MP Flush and extended push buttons 1 Flush momentary operator 2 Flush maintained operator 3 Extended momentary operator 4 Extended maintained operator 30 Chrome bezel
Color R-Red, G-Green, Y-Yellow, L-Blue, W-White, B-Black
# Normally open contacts (max 3)
# Normally closed contacts (max 3)
MPM1-60R Red mushroom momentar y, chrome bezel, 40 mm
MPMP3-20R Red mushroom maintained - pull to release, no bezel, 40 mm # Normally open contacts (max 3)
# Normally closed contacts (max 3)
M2SS2 Tw o-position selector switch, maintained each position
M3SS1 Three-position selector switch, maintained each position 30 Chrome bezel
B Black operator
# Normally open contacts (max 2)
# Normally closed contacts (max 2)
M2SSK1 Two-position, key-operated selector switch, key removed each position
M3SSK1 Three-position, key-operated selector switch, key removed each position
30 Chrome bezel
1 Standard key code
# Normally open contacts (max 2 for 3 pos, 1 for 2 pos)
# Normally closed contacts (max 2 for 3 pos, 1 for 2 pos)
Press-to-test illuminated pilot light including one normally open and one normally closed contact 8 24V full voltage incandescent 1 120V full voltage incandescent L8 24V LED L1 120V LED R-Red, G-Green, Y- Yellow,
L- Blue, W-White
MP1-MLFPT
SELECTOR SWITCHES (Center off only)
PUSH BUTTONS
MT-310B
SPA
SK615562-87
SK615562-88
POTENTIOMETER
PILOT LIGHTS
KEY SWITCHES
PRESS-TO-TEST PILOT LIGHTS
MUSHROOM PUSH BUTTONS
Color
RELATED PRODUCTS
E-1PBG One-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure
E-2PBG Two-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure
E-3PBG Three-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure
E-4PBG Four-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure
MCB-01 Normally closed contact block
MCB-10 Normally open contact block
RELATED PRODUCTS
SK615540-1 29.6 x 39 mm blank legend plate
SK615541-1 29.6 x 44.5 mm blank legend plate
SK616021-71 Spare key for key switch
SSG1-67 Wall plate box mount 7/8" hole
*Holes are 22.5 mm in a vertical arrangement.
** Custom plates from factory only

926. fi
PANEL FABRICATION 872fi
PANEL FABRICATION
14
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
PLATE-MOUNTED POTENTIOMETER
SPA
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The SPA plate-mounted potentiometer is used as a setpoint
input. This 0-10 kΩ 3-wire potentiometer can be used as
a direct input to a controller. When combined with a VTI or
UAT to convert to an analog signal, the SPA can be used
to manually position a valve or damper actuator. When
combined with a UCM-420A or UCS-121-R you get the advantage of stand-alone control
. The plate is custom
designed, so it can be made with any desired color, unit, and range
. The S PA unit has three terminals with the center
terminal as the wiper.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SPA 0-10 kΩ Plate mounted potentiometer slotted solder lugs ± 10% linear accuracy – specify color, unit, range
SPA-UAT-1 SPA potentiometer with UAT-1 calibrated for mA or voltage output – specify output (requires 24 VAC/DC power,
see UAT page in our Transducer section)
SP
A-VTI-1
SPA potentiometer with VTI-1 calibrated for 4-20 mA output (requires 24 VDC power, see VTI page in our Transducer section)
SPA
ENGRAVED PHENOLIC LABELS
LABELS
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a large selection of custom engraved labels for assembled panels, tags for valves, terminal blocks, or stand- alone user interface products
. Our computerized engraver
allows us to create designs with unusual shapes, colors, holes, and lettering on the screen
. We offer standard sizes for
rectangular labels, but specials are easily done.
STANDARD SIZES
ORDERING INFORMATION
STANDARD SIZES
SIZES NUMBER # OF LETTER
in (cm) LINES* CHARACTERS SIZE
PER LINE in (mm)
1/2 x 1 (1.3 x 2.5) 1 4 1/8 (3.2)
3/4 x 1-1/2 (1.9 x 3.8) 2 7 1/8 (3.2)
3/4 x 1-1/2 (1.9 x 3.8) 2 5 3/16 (4.8)
3/4 x 1-1/2 (1.9 x 3.8) 1 4 1/4 (6.4)
3/4 x 3 (1.9 x 9.6) 2 16 1/8 (3.2)
3/4 x 3 (1.9 x 9.6) 2 11 3/16 (4.8)
3/4 x 3 (1.9 x 9.6) 1 8 1/4 (6.4)
1 x 2 (2.5 x 5.1) 3 10 1/8 (2.2)
1 x 2 (2.5 x 5.1) 2 7 3/16 (4.8)
1 x 2 (2.5 x 5.1) 2 6 1/4 (6.4)
1 x 3 (2.5 x 9.6) 2 8 1/4 (6.4)
1 x 3 (2.5 x 9.6) 2 11 3/16 (4.8)
1 x 3 (2.5 x 9.6) 1 5 3/8 (9.5)
1 x 3 (2.5 x 9.6) 3 16 1/8 (3.2)
1 x 4 (2.5 x 10.2) 2 11 1/4 (6.4)
1 x 4 (2.5 x 10.2) 2 14 3/16 (4.8)
1 x 4 (2.5 x 10.2) 1 7 3/8 (9.5)
1 x 4 (2.5 x 10.2) 3 21 1/8 (3.2)
* Each line of text must be indicated by a separate set of quotation
marks.
Example: Order a 1" x 3" label, 1/4" lettering, black background
with white lettering, “BEST” “SERVICE”
ORDERING INFORMATION
1. Label size 2. Label / text color
Black background with white letters White background with black letters Red background with white letters White background with red letters Blue background with white letters White background with blue letters Metallic silver background with black letters
3. Letter size – Upper case is standard 4. Text – row 1
Text – row 2 Text – row 3
5. Standard options
Chain hole, chain hole with chain Two screw holes (subtract 3 characters) Toggle switch hole Pushbutton / selector switch / pilot light hole
6. Non-standard labels – send drawing

927. HUMIDITY
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS
& FITTINGS
T-4000 Series | p. 875
MCP Series | p. 883
EP3 Series | p. 895
MP953 Series | p. 879
T-100 Series | p. 901
B Series | p. 903
Kele is STILL Your Source for Controls, Accessories and Fittings to
Meet Your Repair and Replacement Needs of Pneumatic Controls and Accessories.

928. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
TP970 Series | p. 873
V11 Series | p. 897
MK-3000 | p. 890
Series
PNEUMATICS
& FITTINGS
Damper Actuators
MCP Series — KMC Pneumatic Actuators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
MP918A, MP918B, MP920B Series
— Pneumatic Damper Actuators
. . . . . . 887
D-3000, D-4000 Series
— Pneumatic Damper Actuators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
MK-3000, MK-7100 Series
— Pneumatic Damper Actuators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
E/P Valves EP3 Series
— Electric/Pneumatic Three-Way Air Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
35A Series
— Electric/Pneumatic Three-Way Air Valves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896
V11 Series
— Three-Way Solenoid Air Valve
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
Fittings T-100 Series, T-141
— Pneumatic Tubing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
B Series, R-3710, F-1000 Series
— Pneumatic Air Supply Barb Fittings
. . . . 903
C-Series
— Pneumatic Air Supply Compression Fittings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
M Series, F-1000 Series
— Miscellaneous Pipe Fittings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
S-Series
— Pneumatic Air Supply Solder Fittings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
Pressure Reducing Devices and Accessories PV600 Series
— Isolation Valves and Pressure Regulators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
K-383, K-384, K-387
— Pressure Regulators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
K-332, FILN05, Tool-95-1
— PRV Station, Filters, Calibration Kit
. . . . . . . . . . 900
Thermostats TP970 Series
— Single Setpoint Pneumatic Thermostats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873
T-4000 Series
— Single and Dual Setpoint Pneumatic Room Thermostats
. . . 875
2200 Series, TK-1000 thru TK-5000 Series
— Single Setpoint Room
Pneumatic Thermostats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .877
VAV Controls CSC Series
— KMC Pneumatic VAV Controls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
Valve Actuators MP953 Series
— Pneumatic Globe Valve Actuators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
V-3000, MP800 Series
— Pneumatic Globe Valve Actuators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
MK-2690, MK-46XX, MK-6XXX Series
— Pneumatic Globe
Valve Actuators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885

929. fi 873PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Connections Barbs for 5/32" OD poly tubing
Number Of Pipes 2
Sensor Element Bimetal
Setpoints Single
Throttling Range Adjustable, 2° to 10°F (1° to 5°C),
factory set at 4°F (2°C)
Remote Bulb No
Air Consumption 0.011 scfm (5.2 mL/s)
Operating Temperature 100°F (37.8°C) maximum
Storage Temperature 150°F (66°C) maximum
Maximum Operating Pressure
25 psi (170 kPa)
Dimensions 3.3"H x 2.0"W x 1.6"D
(8.3 x 5.2 x 4.1 cm)
Weight 0.35 lb (0.2 kg) to 1.3 lb (0.6 kg)
depending on kit/cover
Mounting Wall
Warranty 1 year
SINGLE SETPOINT PNEUMATIC THERMOSTAT
TP970 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The TP970 Series pneumatic thermostat is a two-pipe, single
setpoint thermostat used to provide proportional control of
pneumatic valves and damper actuators in heating and air
conditioning systems
. Replacement kits are available for
Johnson, Powers, Robertshaw, Barber-Colman, and older Honeywell two-pipe pneumatic thermostats
.
FEA
TURES
•
Shock-resistant, suspension-mounted thermostats
provide dependable performance and responsiveness
• Pilot operated for high capacity
• Direct Acting (DA) and Reverse Acting (RA) models
• Adapter plate kits cover existing thermostat wallmark
• Backplate has molded air connections-no separate
fittings needed
• Universal locking cover with satin chrome finish and
horizontal, vertical, or blank window options
SPECIFICATIONS
TP970
MB
N.O.
TP970A,B OR TP9600A,B
M
Typical piping diagram
DIMENSIONS
DIAGRAM
Branch line pressure gage port
Throttling range adjustment
Bimetel
Nozzle
Valve unit
Flapper
Setpoint knob
Calibration screw
Setpoint cam
Setpoint knob
TP970 High Capacity Pilot Operated Thermostat

930. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 874fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
SINGLE SETPOINT PNEUMATIC THERMOSTAT
TP970 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TP970A2004 Direct acting, 60°F to 90°F, (does not include cover)
TP970A2012 Direct acting, 40°F to 70°F, (does not include cover)
TP970A2020 Direct acting, 15°C to 30°C, (does not include cover)
TP970A2038 Direct acting, 60°F to 90°F, large wall plate and satin chrome cover
TP970A2145 Direct acting, 60°F to 90°F, small wall plate and satin chrome cover
TP970A2234 Direct acting, 15°C to 30°C, small wall plate and satin chrome cover
TP970A2242 Direct acting, 60°F to 90°F, thermostat, small wall plate and beige cover
TP970A2259 Direct acting, 60°F to 90°F, thermostat and satin chrome cover
TP970B2002 Reverse acting, 60°F to 90°F, (does not include cover)
TP970B2010 Reverse acting, 15°C to 30°C, (does not include cover)
TP970B2077 Reverse acting, 60°F to 90°F, small wall plate and satin chrome cover
TP970B2150 Reverse acting, 15°C to 30°C, small wall plate and satin chrome cover
TP970B2166 Reverse acting, 60°F to 90°F, small wall plate and beige cover
TP970B2182 Reverse acting, 60°F to 90°F, satin chrome cover
TP970C2000 Direct acting, 60°F to 90°F, (does not include cover)
ACCESSORIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
14001865-001 Filter cartridge assembly
14002053-001 Back plate assembly
14002374-004 Restrictor block assembly, .005 in., For TP970A-D; TP971A-E except C; TP972A; TP973A-B; TP9600 family;
HP970A-B; and HP972B
14002573-001 Modernization kit to convert all 1 & 2 pipe Honeywell & competitive pneumatic
stats to TP970, TP971A, TP972, TP973,TP974, TP9600 family, HP970, HP971 and HP972
14003192-001 Wallplate adapter kit. Adapts HP970 or TP970 series stats to HP900 and TP900 flush mounted
and TP910 series flush or surface mounted installations
14004406-910 Cover kit, satin chrome include a cover, setpoint cover and 6 window inserts for 60°F to 90°F scale
14004407-910 Cover kit, beige, includes cover, setpoint insert cover and 6 window inserts for 60°F to 90°F scale
AK3863 Honeywell thermostat tool kit, TP970/TP900
CCT735A Thermostat calibration tool includes allen wrench for cover installation
14002362-001 Duct sampling chamber for TP970 pneumatic thermostats
14004447-001 Setpoint cam assembly for TP970A1004, A1012, A1020, A1038, A1046, A1053,
A1095, A2004, A2012, A2020, A2038, A2053, A2095; TP970C
14004447-002 Setpoint cam assembly for TP970B1002, B1010, B1028, B1036, B2002, B2010, B2028, B2036; TP970D
14004459-001 Repair kit consisting of a thermometer assembly, a thermometer post and a 60° to 90°F Aluminum Scaleplate
14004460-001 Nozzle, throttling plate and bimetal assembly, DA, left side
14004787-910 Cover kit, bright chrome includes cover, setpoint insert cover and 6 window inserts for 60°F to 90°F scale
14004878-910 Cover kit, premier white includes cover, setpoint insert cover and 6 window inserts for 60°F to 90°F scale
CCT729A Gauge adapter for calibration. Add 305965 0-30 psi gauge for complete tool.
14004447-005 Setpoint Cam Assembly for TP970B1044
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
FILN05 Inline disposable air filter, straight, with barbs for 1/4" OD tubing 900
FILN05-B Inline disposable air filter, 90° bent barbs for 1/4" OD tubing 900
T-100 5/32" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 500 ft (152 m) 901
T-100-2 5/32" OD black poly tubing, twin, 1 coil, 500 ft (152 m) 901
TOOL-95-1 Pneumatic controls calibration kit 900

931. fi 875PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
N.O.
Heating
3-6 psig
(21-42 kPa)
Two-pipe, Dual
Temperature Thermostat
N.C.
Cooling
9-13 psig
(63-91 kPa)
Direct acting pneumatic thermostat
(temperature up, output pressure up)
(8 psi @ setpoint)
S
20
S O
Two-pipe
Thermostat
T-4002
S
20
S O
One-pipe Thermostat (constant bleed)
T-4100
0.005
or 0.007
S
20
Restrictor
(0 psi @ setpoint)
DA/RA pneumatic thermostat (8 psi @ setpoint)
T-4054-1
Connections Barbs for 5/32" OD poly tubing
Number of Pipes 1 or 2 depending on model selected
Sensor Element Bimetal
Sensitivity
T4002 Adjustable from 0.75 to 4 psig/°F
(9 to 50 kPa/°C)
T4054/T4100 Adjustable from 1 to 3 psig/°F
(12 to 38 kPa/°C)
Setpoint Range 55° to 85°F (13° to 29°C)
Setpoints
T4002/T4100 Single
T4054 Dual
Remote Bulb No
Air Consumption
T4002 20 scim (5 mL/s)
T4054 38 scim (10 mL/s)
T4100 25 or 45 scim (7 or 12 mL/s),
depending on restr
ictor
Operating Temperature
-20° to 130°F (-29° to 54°C)
Storage Temperature -20° to 150°F (-29° to 66°C)
Maximum Operating Pressure
25 psi (170 kPa)
Dimensions 2.1"H x 3.1"W x 1.8"D
(5.3 x 8.0 x 4.5 cm)
Weight 0.4 lb (0.2 kg)
Mounting Wall
Warranty 1 year
SINGLE AND DUAL SETPOINT PNEUMATIC ROOM THERMOSTATS
T-4000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The T4000 Series pneumatic room thermostats provide
individual space temperature control in all types of heating
and cooling applications
. By producing a proportional output
signal, these thermostats modulate pneumatic valves and damper actuators in response to load changes in the space
. A
v
ariety of high volume and low volume output thermostats are
available to meet the functional requirements of any control system. The T4000 Series is provided in one- and two-pipe,
dual temperature, horizontal, and vertical configurations.
FEATURES
• Adjustable sensitivities and set points
• Individual set points on dual temperature thermostats
• Pneumatic feedback for greater accuracy
• Vibration and shock resistant
• Meets governmental and commercial requirements
• Single and dual bimetal sensing elements
• Optional all-metal covers
SPECIFICATIONS
T-4002-201
T-4000-2141
T-4002-124
INSTALLATION

932. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 876fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
SINGLE AND DUAL SETPOINT PNEUMATIC ROOM THERMOSTATS
T-4000 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
For other Johnson Controls pneumatic products, call Kele.
COVER
T-4000-2141
with setpoint
T-4000-2141
with setpoint
T-4000-2145
with setpoint
T-4000-2145
with setpoint
Included
in kit
Included
in kit
T-4756-2141
T-4756-2145
T-4756-2141
T-4756-2145
Included
Included
MODEL T-4002-201* T-4002-202* T-4002-203* T-4002-204* T-4002-303
retrofit kit
T-4002-304
retrofit kit
T-4054-1*
T-4054-2*
T-4100-1
T-4100-2
TYPE
Single temperature
Two-pipe
Single temperature
Two-pipe
Single temperature
Two-pipe
Single temperature
Two-pipe
Single temperature
Two-pipe
Single temperature
Two-pipe
Dual temperature
Two-pipe
Dual temperature
Two-pipe
Single temperature
One-pipe
Single temperature
One-pipe
PROPORTIONAL
ACTION
Direct

Reverse

Direct

Reverse

Direct

Reverse

Direct

Reverse

Direct

Reverse
MOUNTING

Horizontal

Horizontal

Vertical

Vertical

Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
Vertical

Vertical
BRACKET
T-4002-124
T-4002-124
T-4002-124
T-4002-124
Included
in kit
Included
in kit
T-4002-124
T-4002-124
Included
Included
* Order T-4000 Series cover and T-4002-124 mounting bracket separately when ordering these Johnson thermostats.
Call Kele for white, nickel, or brass covers.
REQUIRED ACCESSORIES
T-4756-2145 T-4000-2145
T-4756-2141 T-4000-2141
T-4000-2138
Horizontal/Vertical
T-4002-3004
(metal)
Thermostat guards
(wire)
Thermostat
bracket
Setpoint
adjust knob
Covers
Surface bracket
for exposed tubing
T-4002-3000
T-4002-5012
T-4002-124
T-4002-125
Retrofit cover plate
Included in T-4002-303, 304
Flex allen
screwdriver
JC5309
ACCESSORIES

933. fi 877PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Connections
TK-1000/5000 5/32" spring-reinforced plastic tubing
2200 3/16" spring-reinforced plastic tubing
Number of Pipes 1, 2, or 3 with manual override
Sensor Element Bimetal
Mounting Wall
Setpoint Range 55° to 85°F (13° to 29°C)
Setpoints Single, Dual (TK1201, TK1281 only)
Throttling Range
TK1000/5000 Adjustable, 2° to 10°F (1° to 5°C),
factory set at 4°F (2°C)
2200 Adjustable, 2° to 12°F (1° to 6°C),
factory set at 3°F (2°C)
Remote Bulb No
Air Consumption
TK1000 13.8 scim (3.8 mL/s)
TKR-5x01 41.5 scim (11.3 mL/s)
2212 15.6 scim (4.3 mL/s)
2211 29.4 scim (8.0 mL/s)
Operating Temperature 40° to 150°F (4° to 65°C)
Supply Air Pressure
TK1000/5000 15 or 20 psig (103 or 138 kPa),
30 psig maximum
2200 20 psig (138 kPa), 30 psig maximum
Maximum Operating Pressure
30 psi (207 kPa)
Color
TK1000/5000 Beige; plastic cover has setpoint
and thermometer, blank cover also
provided
2200 White; plastic cover has setpoint
and thermometer, blank cover also provided
Dimensions
TK1000/5000 4.4"H x 2.8"W x 1.6"D
(11.1 x 7.0 x 4.1 cm)
2200 2.0"H x 2.0"W x 1.3"D
(5.2 x 5.2 x 3.2 cm)
Weight 0.4 lb (0.2 kg)
Warranty 2 years
SINGLE SETPOINT ROOM PNEUMATIC THERMOSTATS
2200 SERIES, TK-1000 THRU TK-5000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The 2200 Series and TK Series thermostats provide
proportional temperature control of pneumatically actuated
valves and dampers to maintain room air temperatures in
heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems
.
FEATURES
• Classic appearance
• Setpoint and thermometer
• Blank cover or covers included with exposed setpoint
and thermometer
• Bimetal sensing element
• Adjustable throttling range models
SPECIFICATIONS
TK-1001
2212-618

934. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 878fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC SINGLE SETPOINT ROOM PNEUMATIC THERMOSTATS
2200 SERIES, TK-1000 THRU TK-5000 SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TK-1001 Direct acting, 55° to 85°F, two-pipe, heating or cooling
TK-1001-116 Direct acting, 13° to 29°C, two-pipe, heating or cooling
TK-5001 Direct acting, 55° to 85°F, one-pipe, heating or cooling
TK-5001-116 Direct acting, 13° to 29°C, one-pipe, heating or cooling
TK-1101 Reverse acting, 55° to 85°F, two-pipe, heating or cooling
TK-1101-116 Reverse acting, 13° to 29°C, two-pipe, heating or cooling
TKR-5101 Reverse acting, 55° to 85°F, one-pipe, heating or cooling
TK-1301 Direct acting, 55° to 85°F, two- or three-pipe, heating or cooling with day or night
TK-1301-116 Direct acting, 13° to 29°C, two- or three-pipe, heating or cooling with day or night
TK-1381 Reverse acting, 55° to 85°F, two- or three-pipe, heating or cooling with day or night
TK-1601 Direct acting, 55° to 85°F, two- or three-pipe, heating or cooling with day or night and 0/20 output line for PE switch
TK-1201 Reverse/direct acting, 55° to 85°F, two-pipe, heating/cooling
TK-1281 Direct/reverse acting, 55° to 85°F, two-pipe, heating/cooling
2212-618 Direct acting, 55° to 85°F, two-pipe, heating or cooling
2212-619 Reverse acting, 55° to 85°F, two-pipe, heating or cooling
2211-612 Direct acting, 55° to 85°F, one-pipe, heating or cooling
2211-613 Reverse acting, 55° to 85°F, one-pipe, heating or cooling

935. fi 879PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
PNEUMATIC GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS
MP953 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MP953 Series pneumatic globe valve actuators operate
Honeywell V5011 and V5013 Series valves to provide
proportional control of steam or hot water or cold water in
HVAC systems
.
FEATURES
• Rolling diaphragm for long life and low hysteresis
• Easily attached to valve
• May be installed after piping valve
• Slide lock feature permits simple engagement to stem
• Direct or reverse-action control
• Models available with pilot positioner
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
MP953C1000 MP953F1101
Model Action Positioner Diaphragm Stroke Spring Range
MP953C1000
Direct acting, normally
stem up
No
5" (13 cm) diameter, 11 sq. in. (28 sq. cm) effective area
3/4" (1.9 cm)
2-7 psi
MP953C1018 8-12 psi
MP953C1026 4-11 psi
MP953C1067
8" (20 cm) diameter, 33 sq. in. (84 sq. cm) effective area
2-7 psi
MP953C1075 8-12 psi
MP953C1083 4-11 psi
MP953C1471 13" (33 cm) diameter, 99 sq. in. (251 sq. cm) effective
area
1-1/2" (3.8 cm)
2-7 psi
MP953C1489 4-11 psi
MP953C1547 8" (20 cm) diameter, 33 sq. in. (84 sq. cm) effective area 1-1/2" (3.8 cm) 3-15 psi
MP953C1554 13" (33 cm) diameter, 99 sq. in. (251 sq. cm) effective
area
3/4" (1.9 cm)
2-7 psi
MP953C1562 4-11 psi
MP953D1107
Reverse acting, normally
stem down
No 7" (18 cm) diameter, 22 sq. in. (56 sq. cm) effective area 3/4" (1.9 cm)
8-13 psi
MP953D1131 4-11 psi
MP953D1172 3-7 psi
MP953E1301
Direct acting, normally
stem up
Yes
5" (13 cm) diameter, 11 sq. in. (28 sq. cm) effective area
3/4" (1.9 cm)
3 psi span
MP953E1319 5 psi span
MP953E1327 10 psi span
MP953E1368
8" (20 cm) diameter, 33 sq. in. (84 sq. cm) effective area
3 psi span
MP953E1376 5 psi span
MP953E1384 10 psi span
MP953E1400
13" (33 cm) diameter, 99 sq. in. (251 sq. cm) effective
area
1-1/2" (3.8 cm)
5 psi span
MP953E1418 10 psi span
MP953E1443 3/4" (1.9 cm) 10 psi span
MP953F1093
Reverse acting, normally
stem down
Yes 7" (18 cm) diameter, 22 sq. in. (56 sq. cm) effective area 3/4" (1.9 cm)
3 psi span
MP953F1101 5 psi span
MP953F1119 10 psi span

936. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 880fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
4
1
2
3
Minimum
Clearance
Positioner on
MP953E only
MP953E
MP953C
MP953C, E
Positioner on
MP953F only
MP953F
4.25 (10.8)
4.375
(11.1)
Minimum
clearance
MP953F
10.5
(26.7)
MP952D
5.625
(14.3)
in
(cm)
7.125Ø (18.1)
MP953D, F
Operator size
nominal dia
13-inch
8-inch
5-inch
13.5
(34.3)
8.25
(21.0)
5.125
(13.0)
18.125
(46.0)
11.125
(28.3)
9.25
(23.5)
10.0
(25.4)
6.5
(16.5)
4.625
(11.7)
7.6875
(19.5)
5.375
(13.7)
4.375
(11.1)
12 34
(7-inch shown in diagram)
DIMENSIONS
PNEUMATIC GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS
MP953 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MP953C1000 2-7 psi spring range, 5" diameter, 3/4" stroke, for 1/2" to 2" valves, normally stem up
MP953C1018 8-12 psi spring range, 5" diameter, 3/4" stroke, for 1/2" to 2" valves, normally stem up
MP953C1026 4-11 psi spring range, 5" diameter, 3/4" stroke, for 1/2" to 2" valves, normally stem up
MP953C1067 2-7 psi spring range, 8" diameter, 3/4" stroke, w/stem ext., for 3/4" to 3" valves, normally stem up
MP953C1075 8-12 psi spring range, 8" diameter, 3/4" stroke, w/stem ext., for 3/4" to 3" valves, normally stem up
MP953C1083 4-11 psi spring range, 8" diameter, 3/4" stroke,w/stem ext., for 3/4" to 3" valves, normally stem up
MP953C1471 2-7 psi spring range, 13" diameter, 1-1/2" travel w/stem ext., for 4" to 6" valves, normally stem up
MP953C1489 4-11 psi spring range, 13" diameter, 1-1/2" stroke, w/stem ext., for 4" to 6" valves, normally stem up
MP953C1547 3-15 psi spring range, 8" diameter, 1-1/2" travel, w/stem ext., for 4" to 6" valves, normally stem up
MP953C1554 2-7 psi spring range, 13" diameter, 3/4" stroke, w/stem ext., for 2-1/2" and 3" valves, normally stem up
MP953C1562 4-11 psi spring range, 13" diameter, 3/4" stroke, w/stem ext., for 2-1/2" and 3" valves, normally stem up
MP953D1107 8-13 psi spring range,7" diameter, 3/4" stroke, for 1/2" to 3" valves, normally stem down
MP953D1131 4-11 psi spring range, 7" diameter, 3/4" stroke, for 1/2" to 3" valves, normally stem down
MP953D1172 3-7 psi spring range, 7" diameter, 3/4" stroke, for 1/2" to 3" valves, normally stem down
MP953E1301 3 psi spring range, 5" diameter, 3/4 stroke, with positioner, for 1/2" to 2" valves, normally stem up
MP953E1319 5 psi spring range, 5" diameter, 3/4 stroke, with positioner, for 1/2" to 2" valves, normally stem up
MP953E1327 10 psi spring range, 5" diameter, 3/4 stroke, with positioner, for 1/2" to 2" valves, normally stem up
MP953E1368 3 psi spring range, 8" diameter, 3/4 stroke, w/stem ext., with positioner, for 3/4" to 3" valves, normally stem up
MP953E1376 5 psi spring range, 8 diameter, 3/4 stroke, with positioner, for 3/4" to 3" valves, normally stem up
MP953E1384 10 psi spring range, 8 diameter, 3/4 stroke, with positioner, for 3/4" to 3" valves, normally stem up
MP953E1400 5 psi spring range, 13 diameter, 1-1/2 stroke, with positioner, for 4" to 6" valves, normally stem up
MP953E1418 10 psi spring range, 13" diameter, 1-1/2 stroke, w/stem ext., with positioner, for 4" to 6" valves, normally stem up
MP953E1443 10 psi spring range, 13" diameter, 3/4 stroke, with positioner, for 2-1/2" and 3" valves, normally stem up
MP953F1093 3 psi spring range, 7" diameter, 3/4 stroke, with positioner, for 2-1/2" and 3" valves, normally stem down
MP953F1101 5 psi spring range, 7" diameter, 3/4 stroke, with positioner, for 2-1/2" and 3" valves, normally stem down
MP953F1119 10 psi spring range, 7" diameter, 3/4 stroke, with positioner, for 2-1/2" and 3" valves, normally stem down
Operating Temperature
MP953C/E 160°F (71°C) maximum diaphragm
temperature
MP953D/F 248°F (120°C) maximum diaphragm
temperature
Maximum Pressure 25 psi (172 kPa)
Weight
MP953C - 5" 2.0 lb (0.9 kg)
MP953C - 8" 6.7 lb (3.0 kg)
MP953C - 13" 22.4 lb (10.2 kg)
MP953D - 7" 5.2 lb (2.4 kg)
MP953E - 5" 3.7 lb (1.7 kg)
MP953E - 8" 8.6 lb (3.9 kg)
MP953E - 13" 24.4 lb (11.1 kg)
MP953F - 7" 8.0 lb (3.6 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS

937. fi 881PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
MP800
Action
V-3000 Spring return up
MP800 Field reversible action
Connections Barb for 1/4" or 1/8" OD poly tubing;
1/8" NPT for brass fitting
Positioner
V-3000 Order separately V-9502-75
(and spring kit V-9502-6801)
MP800 Order separately V-9502-95
(and mounting kit MP8000-6002)
Diaphragm
V-3000 4.5" (11.4 cm) diameter, 8 sq. in.
(20 sq. cm) effective area
MP800 8.7" (22.1 cm) diameter, 25 sq. in.
(64 sq. cm) effective area
Spring Range
V-3000 Depends on separately ordered spring
VG7000-100x
MP82xC001 3-7 psi
MP82xD001 4-8 psi
MP82xE001 9-13 psi
Stroke
V-3000 5/16" to 3/4" (0.8 to 1.9 cm) depends on
separately ordered spring
MP821 5/16" (0.8 cm)
MP822 1/2" (1.3 cm)
MP823 3/4" (1.9 cm)
Operating Temperature -20° to 150°F (-29° to 66°C)
Media Temperature Range Maximum fluid temperature 338°F
(170°C), 100 psig (103 kPa) steam
Maximum Pressure 25 psig (172 kPa)
Dimensions
V-3000 3.5"H x 4.1"DIA (8.8 x 10.5 cm)
MP800 10.7"H x 8.7"DIA (27.2 x 22.1 cm)
Weight
V-3000 0.9 lb (0.41 kg)
MP800 14.0 lb (6.4 kg)
Mounting
V-3000 Set screw to VG-7000 valve bonnet
MP800 Threaded nut to VG-7000 valve bonnet
Warranty 1 year
PNEUMATIC GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS
V-3000, MP800 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Johnson Controls pneumatic valve assemblies accurately
control the flow of steam, hot water, or cold water through
coils and heat exchangers of all types
. These actuators have
a molded, synthetic rubber diaphragm contained in a sturdy metal housing that protects against dirt and damage
. Optional
V
-9502 pilot positioners offer increased force for very stable,
accurate control, or for sequencing heating/cooling valves
.
FEATURES
• Low profile fits tight spaces
• Barbs for 1/4" or 1/8" OD poly tubing, or 1/8" FNPT air
connections
• Fits all VG7000 valves from 1/2" to 2"
• Replaceable synthetic rubber diaphragm
• Full selection of spring ranges
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
V-3000 (installed)
A B C C
VALVE SIZE FACE TO FACE LOWER VALVE V -3000 MP8000
ALL VALVES Two-way Three-way ALL VALVES ALL VALVES
1/2 3 (7.62) 13/16 (0.81) 1-13/16 (4.60) 4.75 (12.07) N/A
3/4 3-7/32 (8.18) 15/16 (0.94) 2-1/8 (5.40) 4.75 (12.07) N/A
1 4-1/8 (10.48) 1-5/32 (2.94) 2-9/16 (6.51) 6 (15.24) 10.6 (26.92)
1-1/4 4-23/32 (11.99) 1-11/32 (3.41) 2-25/32 (7.06) N/A 10.6 (26.92)
1-1/2 5-1/8 (13.02) 2-5/32 (5.48) 3-3/8 (8.57) N/A 10.6 (26.92)
2 5-29/32 (15.00) 2-1/8 (5.40) 3-3/4 (9.53) N/A 10.6 (26.92)
* DN is the European designation for the body size in metric units “cm.”
DIMENSIONS
Note: See VG7000 Series catalog sheet for valve specifications.
Valve + Actuator
C
B
Stem Up
A
(C)
C
NO
(N.O.)
N.C.
( Two-way Valve)
Three-wa y Valve
in
(cm)

938. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 882fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
VALVE CLOSE-OFF TABLE VG SERIES VALVES (shown in N.O./N.C. configurations)
PNEUMATIC GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS
V-3000, MP800 SERIES
Valve 3-6 psid 4-8 psid 9-13 psid 3-7 psid 4-8 psid 9-13 psid
code Size Cv
(VG-7000-1001) (VG-7000-1002) (VG-7000-1003) (MP821C001B) (MP821D001B) (MP821E001B)
CT 1/2" 0.73 345/100 339/142 191/348 308/280 308/308 308/308
ET 1/2" 1.8 345/100 339/142 191/348 308/280 308/308 308/308
GT 1/2" 4.6 225/49 192/68 108/168 308/175 308/183 275/308
LT 3/4" 7.3 144/29 122/41 69/100 308/81 304/109 175/252
Valve 3-6 psid 4-8 psid 9-13 psid 3-7 psid 4-8 psid 9-13 psid
code Size Cv
(VG-7000-1004) (VG-7000-1005) (VG-7000-1006) (MP822C001A) (MP822D001A) (MP822E001A)
NT 1" 11.6 90/17 76/25 42/65 279/70 257/96 148/223
PT 1-1/4" 18.5 55/10 47/14 26/37 170/40 157/55 90/128
Valve 3-7 psid 4-8 psid 9-13 psid
code Size Cv
(MP823C001A) (MP823D001A) (MP823E001A)
RT 1-1/2" 28.9 109/25 100/34 58/79
ST 2" 46.2 70/16 64/21 37/50
Valve size
(See VG7000 page)
Closeoff (psid) - N.O./N.C.
for V-3000 actuator
Closeoff (psid) - N.O./N.C.
for MP800 actuator
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES
MP8000-6002 Mounting kit for V-9502-95 positioner (MP800 actuators)
V-9502-6801 Spring kit for V-9502-75 positioner (V-3000 actuator)
V-9502-75 Pilot positioner for V-3000 actuator, order VG7000-100x spring kit separately
V-9502-95 Pilot positioner for MP800 actuator, includes six springs
MODEL DESCRIPTION
V
-3000-8011
Valve actuator housing (appropriate VG7000-100x spring kit required, order separately)
VG7000-1001 Spring kit for V-3000-8011 valve actuator, 3-6 psig (21-41 kPa) range, use with 1/2" and 3/4" valves
VG7000-1002 Spring kit for V-3000-8011 valve actuator, 4-8 psig (28-55 kPa) range, use with 1/2" and 3/4" valves
VG7000-1003 Spring kit for V-3000-8011 valve actuator, 9-13 psig (62-90 kPa) range, use with 1/2" and 3/4" valves
VG7000-1004 Spring kit for V-3000-8011 valve actuator, 3-6 psig (21-41 kPa) range, use with 1" valves
VG7000-1005 Spring kit for V-3000-8011 valve actuator, 4-8 psig (28-55 kPa) range, use with 1" valves
VG7000-1006 Spring kit for V-3000-8011 valve actuator, 9-13 psig (62-90 kPa) range, use with 1" valves
MP821C001B Actuator and spring 3-7 psig (28-55 kPa), includes linkage, for use with 1/2" and 3/4" valves
(stainless steel trim models only)
MP821D001B Actuator and spring 4-8 psig (28-55 kPa), includes linkage, for use with 1/2" and 3/4" valves
(stainless steel trim models only)
MP821E001B Actuator and spring 9-13 psig (62-90 kPa), includes linkage, for use with 1/2" and 3/4" valves
(stainless steel trim models only)
MP822C001A Actuator and spring 3-7 psig (28-55 kPa), includes linkage, for use with 1" and 1-1/4" valves
MP822D001A Actuator and spring 4-8 psig (28-55 kPa), includes linkage, for use with 1" and 1-1/4" valves
MP822E001A Actuator and spring 9-13 psig (62-90 kPa), includes linkage, for use with 1" and 1-1/4" valves
MP823C001A Actuator and spring 3-7 psig (28-55 kPa), includes linkage, for use with 1-1/2" and 2" valves
MP823D001A Actuator and spring 4-8 psig (28-55 kPa), includes linkage, for use with 1-1/2" and 2" valves
MP823E001A Actuator and spring 9-13 psig (62-90 kPa), includes linkage, for use with 1-1/2" and 2" valves

939. fi 883PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Effective Area 8 sq. inches (52 sq. cm)
Stroke 1-11/16" (43 mm)
Supply Connection 3/16" (5 mm) OD metal fittings
Supply Pressure 0 to 20 psi (138 kPa) operating,
30 psi (207 kPa) maximum
NOTE: If application requires operation near
maximum temperature AND maximum
pressure, install a tubing restraint at the
actuator connection.
Temperature Limits:

Operating -20° to 180°F (-29° to 82°C)
Shipping -40° to 180°F (-40° to 82°C)
Material
Body CRS with zinc and dichromate
Diaphragm Neoprene
Bearings Bronze or Delrin (plastic)
Shaft CRS with nickel plating
Weight 2.0 lb. (0.9 kg)
Damper Rating @ 1000 fpm (5.08 m/s)
Gradual 8 sq. ft. (0.74 sq. m)
Two-position 10 sq. ft. (0.93 sq. m)
Spring Ranges and Retracted/Extended Torque (Based on 0 and 20 psi applied)
3–8 psi (21–55 kPa), 20/81 in-lb.
(2/9 N•m) @ 90°
4–8 psi (28–55 kPa), 27/81 in-lb.
(3/9 N•m) @ 90°
3–12 psi (21–83 kPa), 20/54 in-lb.
(2/6 N•m) @ 90°
5–10 psi (34–69 kPa), 34/67 in-lb.
(4/8 N•m) @ 90°
8–13 psi (55–90 kPa), 54/47 in-lb.
(6/5 N•m) @ 90°
Tolerance +0.5/-1.0 psi at start point and
±1.0 psi at finish point
DESCRIPTION
KMC MCP-8031 Pneumatic Actuators are designed to
control small dampers in HVAC air handling systems or air
terminal units
. They feature a right-angle bracket for mounting
to the side of VAV terminals, ductwork, or damper frame.
The metal body is also suited to ceiling plen
um installations
where nonmetallic actuators are not allowed
. The actuator
may be rotated in its bracket (supplied on most models) so air connections can be made where needed
. Actuators are
supplied with a cle
vis and optional clevis/cotter pins or crank
arm linkage
.
FEATURES
• The metal body is ideal for ceiling installations
• Mounting bracket supplied on all models except -2099
and -3003
• Crank arm linkage or direct connection between
damper and actuator shaft available
SPECIFICATIONS
MCP-8031-2111
KMC PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS
MCP SERIES

940. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 884fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
KMC PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS
MCP SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
DAMPER TYPE Up to 1000 FPM 1000 to 2500 FPM 2500 to 3000 FPM
Opposed blade without seals 3 in-lb / sq.ft. 4.5 in-lb / sq.ft. 6 in-lb / sq.ft.
Parallel blade without seals 4 in-lb / sq.ft. 6.0 in-lb / sq.ft. 8 in-lb / sq.ft.
Opposed blade with seals 5 in-lb / sq.ft. 7.5 in-lb / sq.ft. 10 in-lb / sq.ft.
Parallel blade with seals 7 in-lb / sq.ft. 10.5 in-lb / sq.ft. 14 in-lb / sq.ft.
CAUTION: Pneumatic devices must be supplied with
clean, dry control air. Any other medium (e.g. oil or
moisture contamination will cause the device to fail.)
ROTATION DIM A. DIM B.
90° 2-25/32" 1-3/16"
(71) (30)
60° 3-13/32" 1-11/16"
(87) (43)
45° 3-31/32" 2-3/16"
(108) (56)
5-1/2" (140)
25/32"
(20)
3-7/8"
(98)
4-3/8"
(111)
5" (127)
A
B
9-13/32" (239)
9/32" (7)
DIA. MTG.
HOLES (4)
25/32"
(20)
Half
Stroke
2-5/16"
(59)
3-9/16" (91)
1-1/2"
(38)
1-15/16"
(49)
REF.
3/16"
(5)
DIA.
PUSH
ON
FITTING
5-1/2" (140)
15/32"
(12) 7/16" (11) DIA.
PIN 1/4" (6)
DIA.
5/8"
(16)
4-1/4"
(108)
25/32"
(20)
4-3/8"
(111)
9/32" (7) DIA. MTG. HOLES (4)
25/32"
(20)
2-5/16"
(59)
3-9/16" (90)
1-1/2"
(38)
2-3/8"
(60)
Rotate body for
desired fitting position
on bronze bushing
actuators only
15/32" (5) DIA.
PUSH-ON
FITTING
3/16"
(5)
DIMENSIONS
ACCESSORIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HPO-0004 Retainer, bracket
HPO-0005 Clevis pin
HPO-0006 Cotter pin
MODEL DESCRIPTION
VTD-1611 Push rod
VTD-1403 Short crank arm, 3/8” shafts
VTD-1404 Short crank arm, 1/2” shafts
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MCP-36312000 Actuator: Rotary, 3-12 PSI, Round Shaft
MCP-36313000 Actuator: Rotary, 5-10 PSI, Round Shaft
MCP-36313001 Actuator: Rotary, 5-10 PSI, Square Shaft
MCP-36315000 Actuator: Rotary, 8-13 PSI, Round Shaft
MCP-36315001 Actuator: Rotary, 8-13 PSI, Square Shaft
MCP-36318000 Actuator: Rotary, 3-8 PSI, Round Shaft
MCP-36318001 Actuator: Rotary, 3-8 PSI, Square Shaft
MCP-80312100 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 3-12 PSI, No Linkage
MCP-80312101 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 3-12 PSI, Clevis
MCP-80312102 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 3-12 PSI, Bracket Only
MCP-80312111 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 3-12 PSI, 1/2" Crank Arm
MCP-80312112 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 3-12 PSI, 3/8" Crank Arm
MCP-80313003 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 5-10 PSI, Clevis Only
MCP-80313100 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 5-10 PSI, No Linkage
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MCP-80313101 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 5-10 PSI, Clevis
MCP-80313102 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 5-10 PSI, Bracket Only
MCP-80313111 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 5-10 PSI, 1/2"Crank Arm
MCP-80313112 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 5-10 PSI, 3/8" Crank Arm
MCP-80315100 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 8-13 PSI, No Linkage
MCP-80315101 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 8-13 PSI, Clevis
MCP-80315102 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 8-13 PSI, Bracket Only
MCP-80315111 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 8-13 PSI, 1/2" Crank Arm
MCP-80315112 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 8-13 PSI, 3/8" Crank Arm
MCP-80318100 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 4-8 PSI, No Linkage
MCP-80318101 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 4-8 PSI, Clevis
MCP-80318102 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 4-8 PSI, Bracket Only
MCP-80318111 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 4-8 PSI, 1/2" Crank Arm
MCP-80318112 Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 4-8 PSI, 3/8"Crank Arm

941. fi 885PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Model Number
Nominal Spring Range
a
(Spring Color Code)
aPkgisp
MK-2690
3 to 7 (Yellow)
5 to 10 (Black)
8 to 13 (Blue)
21 to 48
34 to 69
55 to 90
a
Nominal (no load) condition, spring range based on 1/2" (13mm) maximum stroke, provided by AV-7400 or
AV-400 linkage
Action Spring return valve stem up
Connections 1/8" NPT
Positioner Order separately AK-42309-500
Operating Temperature -20° to 220°F (-29° to 104°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing
Maximum Pressure 30 psig (207 kPa)
Dimensions
MK-2690 3.6"H x 5.0"W x 2.3"D
(9.0 x 12.7 x 5.7 cm)
MK-46xx 3.9"H x 4.8"DIA (9.9 x 12.1 cm)
MK-6xxx 7.8"H x 10.5"DIA (19.9 x 26.7 cm)
Mounting Vertical upright
Warranty 1 year
PNEUMATIC GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS
MK-2690, MK-46XX, MK-6XXX SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MK Series actuators provide proportional pneumatic
control of Schneider Electric VB-7000 and VB-8000 Series
globe valves
.
FEATURES
• Rugged die cast aluminum construction
• MK-46xx, MK-6xxx have rolling diaphragms for long life
• Multiple spring ranges for various applications
MK2690
NOMINAL SPRING RANGES
MK-46xx
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model Spring Range Stroke Diaphragm Linkage
MK-2690
Springs provided in AV-7400 or
AV-400 linkage (order separately)
1/2" (1.3 cm) nominal6 sq. in. (39 sq. cm)AV-400 or AV-7400, order separately
MK-4601 3-6 psi (21-41 kPa) 1/2" (1.3 cm) nominal11 sq. in. (71 sq. cm)AV-401 required, order separately
MK-4611 5-10 psi (34-69 kPa) 1/2" (1.3 cm) nominal11 sq. in. (71 sq. cm)AV-401 required, order separately
MK-4621 10-13 psi (69-90 kPa) 1/2" (1.3 cm) nominal11 sq. in. (71 sq. cm)AV-401 required, order separately
MK-4641 3-13 psi (21-90 kPa) 1/2" (1.3 cm) nominal11 sq. in. (71 sq. cm)AV-401 required, order separately
MK-6601 3-8 psi (21-55 kPa) 1/2" (1.3 cm) nominal50 sq. in. (323 sq. cm)AV-430 required, order separately
MK-6611 5-10 psi (34-69 kPa) 1/2" (1.3 cm) nominal50 sq. in. (323 sq. cm)AV-430 required, order separately
MK-6621 8-13 psi (55-90 kPa) 1/2" (1.3 cm) nominal50 sq. in. (323 sq. cm)AV-430 required, order separately
MK-6801 3-8 psi (21-55 kPa) 1" (2.5 cm) nominal50 sq. in. (323 sq. cm)AV-497 required, order separately
MK-6811 5-10 psi (34-69 kPa) 1" (2.5 cm) nominal50 sq. in. (323 sq. cm)AV-497 required, order separately
MK-6821 8-13 psi (55-90 kPa) 1" (2.5 cm) nominal50 sq. in. (323 sq. cm)AV-497 required, order separately
MK-6911 5-10 psi (34-69 kPa) 1-3/4" (4.4 cm) nominal50 sq. in. (323 sq. cm)AV-497 required, order separately

942. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 886fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NOMINAL SPRING RANGES (CONTINUED)
PNEUMATIC GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS
MK-2690, MK-46XX, MK-6XXX SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES
AV-400 Linkage kit for assembling MK-2690 pneumatic actuators to 1-1/2" & 2" globe valves
A
V-7400
Linkage kit for assembling MK-2690 pneumatic actuator to 1/2" to 2" VB-7xxx globe valves
AK-42309-500 Positive positioner kit for MK-2690, MK-46xx, MK-6xxx actuators
Model number
Nominal spring range
a
(Spring color code)
aPkgisp
MK-4601
MK-4611
MK-4621
MK-4641
3 to 6
5 to 10
10 to 13
3 to 13
21 to 41
34 to 69
69 to 90
21 to 90
a
Nominal (no load) condition, spring range based on 1/2" (13mm) maximum stroke.
Model number
Nominal spring range
a
(Spring color code)
aPkgisp
MK-6601
MK-6611
MK-6621
MK-6801
MK-6811
3 to 8
5 to 10
8 to 13
3 to 8
5 to 10
21 to 55
34 to 69
55 to 90
21 to 55
34 to 69
MK-6821
MK-6911
bc
8 to 13
5 to 10
55 to 90
34 to 69
Nominal stroke
in (cm)
0.5 (1.37)
0.5 (1.37)
0.5 (1.37)
1.0 (2.54)
1.5 (3.31)
a
Nominal (no load) condition, spring range based on 0.5" (13mm) maximum stroke, 1" (25.4mm), or 1.5" (33.1mm) stroke for
MK-6911.
b
MK-6911 is only used on 6.0" VB-8xx3-0-5-16. The MK-6911 was used on discontinued 4" to 6" VB-9323-0-5-x.
c
Recommended for field replacements only where 20 psi air supply pressure is not available and/or required close-off pressure
is less than 125 psi.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MK-2690 Pneumatic valve actuator, 1/2" stroke, no springs (order AV-400 or AV-7400 linkage kit)
MK-4601 Pneumatic valve actuator, 1/2" stroke, 3-6 psi spring range, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" VB-7xxx globe valves
MK-4611 Pneumatic valve actuator, 1/2" stroke, 5-10 psi spring range, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" VB-7xxx globe valves
MK-4621 Pneumatic valve actuator, 1/2" stroke, 10-13 psi spring range, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" VB-7xxx globe valves
MK-4641 Pneumatic valve actuator, 1/2" stroke, 3-13 psi spring range, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" VB-7xxx globe valves
MK-6601 Pneumatic valve actuator, 1/2" stroke, 3-8 psi spring range, for 1-1/2" to 2" VB-7xxx globe valves
MK-6611 Pneumatic valve actuator, 1/2" stroke, 5-10 psi spring range, for 1-1/2" to 2" VB-7xxx globe valves
MK-6621 Pneumatic valve actuator, 1/2" stroke, 3-13 psi spring range, for 1-1/2" to 2" VB-7xxx globe valves
MK-6801 Pneumatic valve actuator, 1" stroke, 3-8 psi spring range, for 2-1/2" to 5" VB-8xxx globe valves
MK-6811 Pneumatic valve actuator, 1" stroke, 5-10 psi spring range, for 2-1/2" to 5" VB-8xxx globe valves
MK-6821 Pneumatic valve actuator, 1" stroke, 8-13 psi spring range, for 2-1/2" to 5" VB-8xxx globe valves
MK-6911 Pneumatic valve actuator, 1-3/4" stroke, 5-10 psi spring range, for 6" VB-8xxx globe valves

943. fi 887PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
PNEUMATIC DAMPER ACTUATORS
MP918A, MP918B, MP920B SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MP918A and MP918B pneumatic actuators position
damper blades to control airflow in HVAC systems. The
MP918A has a positive positioner, otherwise is the same as the MP918B
. MP920B actuators have a long 6" stroke and
are suitable for fan inlet vane control applications in a VAV system
.
FEATURES, MP918A AND B
• Rolling diaphragm for long life
• Low friction shaft bearing
• Close tolerance on operating range and stroke
• Versatile mounting and connecting hardware
• Nonoverlapping spring ranges for sequencing
FEATURES, MP920B
• Rolling diaphragm operated for long life
• Fail-safe on over pressure
• Actuator can be swivel mounted from either end to
pipe, floor, or wall surface
• Optional positive positioner provides accurate
positioning under varying load conditions
Connections
MP918A, MP920 Barbs for 5/32" OD (4 mm) tubing for
pilot; 1/4" OD (6 mm) tubing for main
and branch
MP920 Barbs for 1/4" OD (6 mm) tubing
Diaphragm
MP918 Neoprene, rolling type, 23.8 sq. in.
(154 sq. cm) effective area
MP920 Neoprene, rolling type, 24.8 sq. in.
(160 sq. cm) effective area
Air Consumption
MP918A, MP920 0.021 scfm (9.9 mL/s) @ 18 psi
(124 kPa)
MP918B None
Operating Temperature
MP918A -20° to 160°F (-29° to 70°C)
MP918B -40° to 160°F (-40° to 70°C)
MP920 -40° to 160°F (-40° to 70°C)
Maximum Pressure Rating
MP918A 25 psi (172 kPa)
MP918B, MP920 25 psi (172 kPa)
Weight
MP918A 13.9 lb (6.3 kg)
MP918B 10.5 lb (4.8 kg)
MP920 13.1 lb (5.9 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
MP918B1014
DIMENSIONS
18.75 (475) MP918B
21.0 (5.35) MP918A, Internal N.C. Mounting
Edge of Damper
6.875 (175) wide
8.5
(215)
MP918A
8.5
(215)
MP918B
MP918 A and B
11.81 (300)
13.0 (330)
4.0
(100) MIN.
6.18
(157)
3.06
(78)
36.0
(914)
MAX.
3.0
(76)
0.44" to 0.5" (11 to 13)
1.25" Pipe Clamp
MP920B

944. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 888fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ACCESSORIES
PAGE
14004345-001 Positive
MP918A
Damper
Model
Operating Range
psi (kPa)
Modulating Service 2-Pos. Service
13 psi
(90 kPa)
18 psi
(124 kPa)
18 psi
(124 kPa)
D640, D641 3 to 7 (21 to 48) 123" (84.8) 123" (84.8) 123" (84.8)
3 to 13 (21 to 90) N/A 123" (84.8) 123" (84.8)
5 to 10 (34 to 69) 123" (84.8) 123" (84.8) 205" (141.3)
8 to 13 (55 to 90) N/A 123" (84.8) 205" (141.3)
D642, D643,
D644, D645
3 to 7 (21 to 48) 101" (69.6) 101" (69.6) 101" (69.6)
3 to 13 (21 to 90) N/A 101" (69.6) 101" (69.6)
5 to 10 (34 to 69) 101" (69.6) 101" (69.6) 169" (116.5)
8 to 13 (55 to 90) N/A 101" (69.6) 169" (116.5)
MP918B
Damper
Model
Operating
Range
psi (kPa)
Modulating Service 2-Position Service
18 psi
(124 kPa)
20 psi
(138 kPa)
18 psi
(124 kPa)
20 psi
(138 kPa)
D640, D641 8 to 13
(55 to 90)
1
205" (141.5) 287" (197.9) 205" (141.5) 287" (197.9)
D642, D643
D644, D645 169" (116.5) 236" (162.7) 169" (116.5) 236" (116.5)
Note: 1. With positive positioner (3, 5, or 10 psi span). Also applies to
MP918B 8-13 psi (55 to 90 kPa) slaves used with MP918A.
N/A = Not applicable
Model
Operating Range
psi (kPa )
Stroke
in (cm)
Net Forc e in Pounds (N)
Exerted at Various Pressures
0 psi (0 kPa) 18 psi (124 kPa)
ModelOperating Range Stroke 0 psi (0 kPa) 20 psi (138 kPa)
MP918B 3 to 7 (21 to 48) 3.5 (9.0) 52 (231)2 44 (1086)
3 to 13 (21 to 90) 3.5 (9.0) 50 (222)8 9 (396)
5 to 10 (34 to 69) 3.5 (9.0) 96 (427)1 62 (721)
8 to 13 (55 to 90) 3.5 (9.0) 160 (712) 83 (370)
MP918A8 to 13 (55 to 90)
1
3.5 (9.0) 160 (712) 83 (370)
MP920B
7.25 to 13 (50 to 90)6 (15.0) 173 (770) 298 (1326)
Note: 1. Also see MP918A Operating Range and Startpoint Pressure.
A
B
B
A
in
(cm)
PNEUMATIC DAMPER ACTUATORS
MP918A, MP918B, MP920B SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
DAMPER “A” AND “B” DIMENSIONS
MAXIMUM DAMPER RATING FOR "B" DIMENSIONS - in (cm)
NET FORCE EXERTED AND STROKE
Vertical Blade Horizontal Blade
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MP918A1024 Damper actuator with 10 psi span positioner, includes mounting bracket and crank arm
MP918A1057 Damper actuator with 10 psi span positioner, includes internal NC mounting bracket
MP918A1081 Damper actuator with 10 psi span positioner, includes internal NO mounting bracket
MP918B1006 Damper actuator 3-13 psi spring range, includes external mounting bracket and crank arm
MP918B1014 Damper actuator 3-13 psi spring range, includes internal NC mounting bracket
MP918B1022 Damper actuator 3-13 psi spring range, includes internal NO mounting bracket
MP918B1030 Damper actuator 3-13 psi spring range, does not include mounting bracket
MP918B1048 Damper actuator 5-10 psi spring range, includes external mounting bracket and crank arm
MP918B1063 Damper actuator 3-7 psi spring range, includes external mounting bracket
MP918B1071 Damper actuator 3-7 psi spring range, includes internal NC mounting bracket
MP918B1089 Damper actuator 8-13 psi spring range, includes external mounting bracket and crank arm
MP918B1097 Damper actuator 8-13 psi spring range, includes internal NC mounting bracket
MP918B1105 Damper actuator 8-13 psi spring range, includes internal NO mounting bracket
MP918B1113 Damper actuator 8-13 psi spring range, does not include bracket
MP918B1196 Damper actuator 8-13 psi spring range, includes external trunnion mounting bracket
MP920B1002 Damper actuator 7-13 psi spring range, 6" stroke
ACCESSORIES
14004345-001 Positive positioner kit for MP920 damper actuator

945. fi 889PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Connections Barb for 1/4" OD poly tubing
Diaphragm Synthetic elastomer
Operating Temperature -20° to 150°F (-29° to 66°C)
Maximum Pressure Rating 25 psig (172 kPa)
Warranty 1 year
PNEUMATIC DAMPER ACTUATOR
D-3000, D-4000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Johnson Controls D-3000 Series pneumatic damper
actuators provide a wide range of forces to handle
applications from VAV control dampers to inlet vanes
. The
D-3062 and D-3153 have models that are UL/ULC listed for smoke damper applications
.The D-4000 Series actuators
are constructed of a glass reinforced polymer with synthetic elastomer diaphragms
.They include barb fittings for 5/32" or
1/4" OD poly tubing.
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES
D-3062-101 Mounting bracket kit for D-3062 actuators
D-4073-1 D-3153-4
D-3062-3 with D-3062-101
D-3062-1
D-3062-2
D-3062-3
D-4073-1
D-4073-2
D-4073-3
D-4073-4
D-4073-5
D-4073-6
D-3153-1
D-3153-2
D-3153-3
D-3153-4
D-3153-5
D-3153-6
D-3244-1
D-3244-2
D-3244-3
D-3246-1
D-3246-3
MAXIMUM ACTUATOR FORCE
NOMINAL
SPRING
RANGE
Value at 20 psig
(140 kPa) Supply
psig
3-7
5-10
8-13
8-13
8-13
5-10
8-13
8-13
5-10
8-13
8-13
5-10
8-13
8-13
5-10
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
kPa
21-49
35-70
56-91
56-91
56-91
35-70
56-91
56-91
35-70
56-91
56-91
35-70
56-91
56-91
56-91
56-91
56-91
56-91
56-91
56-91
lbf
85.8
66
46.2
47
47
67
47
47
67
105
105
150
105
105
105
164
328
164
164
328
N
38.2
294
206
209
209
298
209
209
298
467
467
667
467
467
467
729
1458
729
729
1458
lbf
19.8
33
52.8
54
54
34
54
54
34
120
120
75
120
120
120
187
374
187
187
374
N
80
147
235
240
240
151
240
240
151
534
534
534
534
534
534
833
1666
833
833
1666
Power Return
MOUNTING
NOTES†
(see below)
ESTIMATED
TORQUE*
@90°
20 psig
5
5
5
3
3
3
4
4
4
3
3
3
4
4
4
1
1, 6
2
2
1, 6
in-lb (Nm)
20 (2.3)
33 (3.7)
46 (5.2)
71 (8)
71 (8)
51 (5.8)
71 (8)
71 (8)
51 (5.8)
158 (17.9)
158 (17.9)
113 (12.8)
158 (17.9)
158 (17.9)
158 (17.9)
328 (37)
656 (74.1)
328 (37)
492 (55.6)
984 (55.6)
in
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
6
6
cm
5.1
5.1
5.1
7.6
7.6
7.6
7.6
7.6
7.6
7.6
7.6
7.6
7.6
7.6
7.6
10.2
10.2
10.2
15.2
15.2
ft
6.25
6.25
6.25
11.7
11.7
11.7
11.7
11.7
11.7
25
25
25
25
25
25
50
100
50
75
150
ft
4
4
4
6.75
6.75
6.75
6.75
6.75
6.75
16
16
16
16
16
16
30
60
30
45
90
STROKE
LENGTH
EFFECTIVE
DAMPER CONTROL
PILOT
POSITIONER
-
-
-
Yes
-
-
Yes
-
-
Yes
-
-
Yes
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
2 2
1 - Floor-mounted assembly included
2 - Swivel-mounted assembly included
3 - Universal-mounting bracket included
4 - Auxiliary-mounting bracket included
5 - D-3062-101 mounting kit (Order separately)
6 - Two actuators
WEIGHT
1.2 (0.54)
1.2 (0.54)
1.2 (0.54)
7.9 (3.6)
6.4 (2.9)
6.4 (2.9)
6.4 (2.9)
4.9 (2.2)
4.9 (2.2)
11.5 (5.2)
10.0 (4.5)
10.0 (4.5)
10.0 (4.5)
8.5 (3.9)
8.5 (3.9)
45.5 (20.7)
63 (28.4)
15 (6.8)
16 (7.0)
75 (34.0)
MODEL
2 PosProp.
* Torque = crank arm length x force x 0.5
(crank arm length = stroke length @ 90-degree rotation)
NOTES†
Order the DS-3062-1 and DS-2153-1 for high temperature
smoke damper operation.
lb (kg)
SPECIFICATIONS

946. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 890fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
APPLICATION
Actuator Model
MK-3101, MK-3111, MK-3121
MK4-3121**, MK4-3821**
MK-7101
MK-7121*
MK4-7121**
NOMINAL CONTROL DAMPER AREA
Proportional
11.6 (1.07)
34.8 (3.23)
37.5 (3.48)
37.5 (3.48)
112.5 (10.45)
Two-position
34.8 (3.23)
34.8 (3.23)
112.5 (10.45)
112.5 (10.45)
112.5 (10.45)
Proportional
15 (1.39)
45 (4.18)
48.2 (4.48)
48.2 (4.48)
144.6 (10.65)
Two-position
45 (4.18)
45 (4.18)
144.6 (10.65)
144.6 (10.65)
144.6 (10.65)
Damper ratings are nominal and based on standard (not low leakage) dampers at 1" W.C. static pressure and 2000 fpm (10 m/s) ve locity.
* MK-7121 requires 15 psig (103 kPa) to be av ailable to actuator. **Requires 20 psig (140 kPa) be av ailable to the actuator
PARALLEL BLADES ft
2
(m
2
) OPPOSED BLADES ft
2
(m
2
)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MK-3101
MK-3111
MK-3121
MK4-3121*
MK-7101
MK-7121
MK4-7121*
MODEL
MAXIMUM FORCE ††
NOMINAL
OPERATING
RANGE
RETURN STROKE
Based on
1.5 psig
(10 kPa)
pressure
to actuator
15 psig
(103 kPa)
Supply
dual pressure
system
15 psig
(103 kPa)
Supply
single pressure
system†
20 psig
(138 kPa)
Supply single
or dual pressure
system†
15 psig
(103 kPa)
Supply
dual pressure
system
15 psig
(103 kPa)
Supply
single pressure
system†
20 psig
(103 kPa)
Supply single
or dual pressure
system†
POWER STROKE
NOMINAL TORQUE**
PROPORTIONAL CONTROL ††
*Factory-installed positive positioner (AK-42309-500) start point adjustable 1 to 12 psig (7 to 83 kPa) with range adjustable 2 to 13 psig (14 to 90 kPa).
**Nominal torque for actuators without positive positioner is based on 1.5 psig (10 kPa) pressure change at the actuator.
†Adjust pressure reducing valve so that listed pressures are available at the actuator.
††Force and torque based on factory set stroke and starting pressure.
psig
3-8
5-10
8-13
8-13
3-8
8-13
8-13
kPa
21-55
34-69
55-90
55-90
21-55
55-90
55-90
lb
12
28
52
52
30
130
130
N
53
125
231
231
133
578
578
lb
44
28
4
4
110
10
10
N
196
125
18
18
489
44.5
44.5
lb
56
40
16
16
140
40
40
N
249
178
71
71
623
178
178
lb
96
80
56
56
240
140
140
N
427
356
249
249
1068
623
623
in-lb
21
21
7
7
67.5
22.5
22.5
Nm
2.37
2.37
0.79
0.79
7.62
2.54
2.54
in-lb
21
21
21
28
67.5
67.5
90
Nm
2.37
2.37
2.37
3.16
7.62
7.62
10.17
in-lb
21
21
21
91
67.5
67.5
293
Nm
2.37
2.37
2.37
10.28
7.62
7.62
33.10
Connections 1/8" NPT
Diaphragm Beaded, molded neoprene
Operating Temperature -20° to 160°F (-29° to 71°C)
Maximum Pressure Rating 30 psig (207 kPa)
Dimensions
MK-3000 12.0"H x 5.9"W x 5.5"L
(30.5 x 14.9 x 14.0 cm)
MK-7100 17.6"H x 7.8"W x 7.6"L
(44.8 x 19.7 x 19.4 cm)
Weight
MK-3000 5.0 lb (2.2 kg) to 5.5 lb (2.5 kg)
MK-7100 15.0 lb (6.8 kg) to 15.5 lb (7.1 kg)
Mounting Any position
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Schneider Electric MK-3000, MK-7100 Series pneumatic
actuators provide damper control for 3-8, 5-10, and 8-13 psig (21-
55, 34-69, and 55-90 kPa) pressure ranges
. The MK-3000 has a
3.5" (8.9 cm) nominal stroke and is adjustable 2" to 4" (5.1 to 10.2
cm) for smaller applications such as zone dampers and VAV boxes.
The
MK-7100 has a 4
.5" (11.4 cm) nominal stroke and is adjustable
4" to 5" (10.2 to 12.7 cm) for larger applications such as air handler
dampers.
SPECIFICATIONS
ACCESSORIES
AK-42309-500 Positive positioner kit for MK-2690, MK-46xx, MK-6xxx actuators
AM-530 Crank arm for 1/2" dia. damper shaft, holes for 3-1/2" and 4-1/2" stroke
AM-542 End connector for 5/16" dia. push rod
AM-122 Linkage connector straight type
AM-533 Actuator shaft extension
AM-161-3 Damper linkage kit
AM-123 Ball joint connector (damper linkage required)
MK-7100
MK-3101
PNEUMATIC DAMPER ACTUATORS
MK-3000, MK-7100 SERIES

947. fi 891PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Output Sensitivity 0 to 1" range unit, 5 psig/0.02" WC
(35 kPa/5 Pa)
0 to 2" range units, 5 psig/0.04" WC
(35 kPa/10 Pa)
Main Air Pressure 15 to 30 psig (103 to 207 kPa)
Max. Signal Pressure 6" wc (1493 Pa) applied to either
port (X or Y)
Material ABS (beige or gray)
Output Capability 0 to supply pressure
Weight 0.47 lb (0.21 kg)
Temperature Limits
Operating 40° to 120°F (4° to 49°C)
Shipping -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
DESCRIPTION
The pneumatic CSC-2000 Series are designed for use on
VAV terminal units in HVAC systems. These are differential-
pressure, sub-master controllers with adjustable minimum and maximum airflow settings
. A master controller, typically a
room thermostat, resets the CSC-2000 velocity setpoint.
Direct acting models are for normally open VAV terminal units.
Re
verse acting are for normal closed VAV terminal units
.
Each is equipped with separate adjustment knobs for
minimum and maximum airflow settings. All models should be
calibr
ated with the use of airflow measuring equipment
.
FEATURES
• Separate adjustments for minimum and maximum
airflow settings
• CSC-2001/2003/2007/2009/2017 are designed for
normally open dampers with direct-acting thermostats for cooling and reverse-acting thermostats for heating
•
CSC-2002/2004/2008/2010/2018 are designed for
normally closed dampers with reverse-acting thermostats for cooling and direct-acting thermostats for heating
•
CSC-2001/2002 are equipped with 0 to 10 molded plastic reference dials; others have blind adjustments
KMC PNEUMATIC VAV CONTROLS
CSC SERIES
CSC-2000 Beige
NO Molded
CSC-2000 Gray
NC Molded
CSC-2000 Beige
NO with Dial
CSC-2000 Gray
NC with Dial
SPECIFICATIONS
MOUNTING POSITION
The controllers are position sensitive. The min. and max.
flo
w limits must be set (calibrated) in the same position the
controller will be mounted
. The CSC-2001/2002 (with molded
plastic dials) must be mounted horizontally with dials facing
up. The CSC-2003 through CSC-2018 may be mounted
horizontally (preferred), with the adjustment knobs up or down, or mounted vertically
.

948. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 892fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
KMC PNEUMATIC VAV CONTROLS
CSC SERIES
MODELS
REVERSE ACTING (GRAY CONTROLLERS) FOR NORMALLY CLOSED DAMPERS
Model
Thermostat Required Setpoint Range Reset
Pressure Band
Air Consumption
0–10 Molded
Plastic DialFor Cooling For Heating Minimum Maximum
CSC-2002
Reverse Acting Direct Acting
0 to Max
0 to 1.0" wc
(249 Pa)
3 ±0.5 to 8 psig
(21 ±3.5 to 55 kPa)
14.4 scim @ 20 psig
(3.93 mL/s @ 138 kPa)
Yes
CSC-2004
14.4 scim @ 20 psig
(3.93 mL/s @ 138 kPa)
No molded
plastic dial—
has paper label
instead
CSC-2008
11.5 scim @ 20 psig
(3.1 mL/s @ 138 kPa)
CSC-2010
0 to Max
0 to 2.0" wc
(498 Pa)
14.4 scim @ 20 psig
(3.93 mL/s @ 138 kPa)
CSC-2018
11.5 scim @ 20 psig
(3.1 mL/s @ 138 kPa)
The tables below illustrate the appropriate model for each application. If replacing a CSC-2001-22 or CSC-2002-22 (now
obsolete), use the CSC-2001, CSC-2002, CSC-2003, or CSC-2004 and mount appropriately.
Specifications and design subject to change without notice.
DIRECT ACTING (BEIGE CONTROLLERS) FOR NORMALLY OPEN DAMPERS
Model
Thermostat Required Setpoint Range Reset
Pressure Band
Air Consumption
0–10 Molded
Plastic DialFor Cooling For Heating Minimum Maximum
CSC-2001
Direct Acting Reverse Acting
0 to 1.0" wc
(249 Pa)
Min. plus 1.0" wc
(249 Pa)
8 ±0.5 to 13 psig
(55 ±3.5 to 90 kPa)
14.4 scim @ 20 psig
(3.93 mL/s @ 138 kPa)
Yes
CSC-2003
14.4 scim @ 20 psig
(3.93 mL/s @ 138 kPa)
No molded
plastic dial—
has paper label
instead
CSC-2007
11.5 scim @ 20 psig
(3.1 mL/s @ 138 kPa)
CSC-2009
0 to 2.0" wc
(498 Pa)
Min. plus 2.0" wc
(498 Pa)
14.4 scim @ 20 psig
(3.93 mL/s @ 138 kPa)
CSC-2017
11.5 scim @ 20 psig
(3.1 mL/s @ 138 kPa)

949. fi 893PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Y
3-1/4" (83)
Connections Adjustments
CAUTION: Pneumatic devices
must be supplied with clean,
dry control air. Any other medium
(e.g. oil or moisture contamination
will cause the device to fail.
1-3/4"
(45)
3-13/16" (97)
Setpoint
T
MB
xx
2-5/8" (67)
3-9/16"
(91)
1" (25)
1" (25)
3/16" (5) Ø
Mtg. Holes, 2
in
(mm)
DIMENSIONS
KMC PNEUMATIC VAV CONTROLS
CSC SERIES

950. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 894fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CSC-2001 VAV Controller direct acting normally open 0-1" WC beige with molded dial
CSC-2002 VAV Controller reverse acting normally closed 0-1" WC gray with molded dial
CSC-2003 VAV Controller direct acting normally open 0-1" WC beige
CSC-2004 VAV Controller reverse acting normally closed 0-1" WC gray
CSC-2007 VAV Controller direct acting normally open 0-1" WC beige low consumption
CSC-2008 VAV Controller reverse acting normally closed 0-1" WC gray low consumption
CSC-2009 VAV Controller direct acting normally open 0-2" WC beige
CSC-2010 VAV Controller reverse acting normally closed 0-2" WC gray
CSC-2017 VAV Controller direct acting normally open 0-2" WC beige low consumption
CSC-2018 VAV Controller reverse acting normally closed 0-2" WC gray low consumption
CSC-3011-10 VAV Controller universal 0-1" WC with 8psi start
CSC-3025-10 VAV Controller universal 0-2" WC with 8psi start high flow
ACCESSORIES
FILN-05 In-line filter with straight fitting
HMO-4505 Mounting bracket
PG-05 0-30 PJIG GUAGE
SSS-100x SSS-1000 series flow sensors
KMC PNEUMATIC VAV CONTROLS
CSC SERIES
REPLACEMENT CROSS REFERENCE - VAV RESET VOLUME CONTROLLERS
Model Robertshaw Kreuter Staefa
Titus, Honeywell, Johnson,
Barber-Colman
CSC-2001 R77-21, R77-L21 CSC-2001, CSC-2011
VCV2100-201, -251
VCV2200-251
Titus I
(Typically Robertshaw R77 Series or Kreuter
CSC-2000 Series controller. If complete
Robertshaw or Kreuter part number is shown on
the Titus controller, use Cross Reference at left
to select Oynacon replacement. If Robertshaw
or Kreuter number is notavailable, replace with
Oynacon CSC-3011 Universal Flow Controller.)
CSC-2002 R77-22, R77-L22 CSC-2002, CSC-2012
CSC-2003 R77-23, R77-L23, R77-23DA CSC-2003, CSC-2013
CSC-2004 R77-24, R77-L24, R77-24RA CSC-2004, CSC-2014
CSC-2007 R77-25 CSC-2007
CSC-2008 R77-26 CSC-2008
CSC-2009 R77-27 CSC-2009, CSC-2015
CSC-2010 R77-28 CSC-2010, CSC-2016
CSC-3011
Universal
Controller
R78 Series
(all models)

R77 Series
(all models)
CSC-3004
CSC-3011
CSC-3017
CSC-3021
CSC-3023
CSC-2000 Series
(all models) [a]
VCV2500-101 [a]
VCV2500-201 [a]
VCV2500-301 [a]
VCV2500-401 [a]
VCV2100 (all models)
VCV2200 (all models)
Titus I, Titus II, Titus IIA, Titus III Johnson
P-3800-1, P-3800-2 [a]
Honeywell CP980C, D, E & F [b]
Barber-Colman PPR-9100
and HYUR-2700 Series
(all models)
CSC-3016
CSC-3016, CSC-3020,
CSC-3026
CSC-3025
Universal
Controller for
Trane Boxes
CSC-3025
CSC-2017
CSC-2018
VCV2500-101
VCV2500-201
VCV2500-301
VCV2500-401
(on TRANE VAV Units)
Johnson P-3800-1, P-3800-2
(on TRANE VAV Units)
[a] When applied on VAV terminal units manufactured by The Trane Company, Dynacon CSC -3025 flow controller should be used.
[b] For Honeywell CP980 Velocitrol controllers, existing inlet sensor must be replaced with Dynacon SSS-1000 series sensor.

951. fi 895PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Control Branch
Controlled
Device Back-Up
Control
R
A
N.O.
N.C.C P
Note: Energize EP for
back-up control
Supply Voltage
EP3-24VAC 24 VAC, +15%, -10%
EP3-24VDC 24 VDC, +15%, -10%
EP3-120VAC 120 VAC, +15%, -10%
Supply Watts 2.5 W
Supply Current
EP3-24VAC, -24VDC 104 mA continuous duty,
157 mA inrush
EP3-120VAC 20 mA continuous duty,
157 mA inrush
Connections Three barbed fittings for
1/4" OD poly tubing
Cv 0.04
Override Momentary pushbutton
Indicator Red LED - on when energized
Air Capacity 500 scim (0.29 scfm) @ 15 psig
(103 kPa)
Operating Temperature 0° to 122°F (-18° to 50°C)
Pressure Range 0-50 psig (0-345 kPa)
Wiring 16" (40.6 cm) leads with connector
Approvals UL-recognized component
Warranty 1 year
ELECTRIC/PNEUMATIC THREE-WAY AIR VALVES
EP3 SERIES
2.39
(6.07)
1.5
(3.81)
Mounting holes
0.17" (0.44) diameter
through two places
Manual
override
Manual
override
LED
LED
"P" Port #10-32
"A" Port #10-32 on
opposite side
Removable lead
wire connector
2.2
(5.59)
0.37
(0.94)
0.19
(0.48)
0.63
(1.59)
0.38
(0.97)
Mounting holes
0.13" (0.32) diameter
through two places
2-+1
black - red +
A – Common
R – N.O.
P
P
A
R
P – N.C.
Ports
(de-energized)
A – Common
P – Normally closed
R – Normally open
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The EP3 Series is an industrial quality, two-position,
three-way solenoid air valve with a capacity of 500 scim. A
momentar
y manual override push button provides operation
without closing the electrical circuit
. An LED provides visual
indication of the air valve's status. The valve can be mounted
in any position with body mounting holes or with the mounting plate furnished with the valve
. Each EP3 also comes with 16"
lead wires and three barbed fittings for 1/4" plastic tubing.
FEATURES
• LED indication
• Integral mounting plate
• Low capacity
• Manual override
• Universal porting
• N.C., N.O., diverter, or selector determined by piping
BACK-UP APPLICATIONS DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
EP3-24 VAC
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
EP3-24V
AC
24 VAC three-way air valve
EP3-24VDC 24 VDC three-way air valve
EP3-120V
AC
120 VAC three-way air valve

952. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 896fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
0.13
(0.33)
1.97
(5.00)
0.55
(1.40)
0.85
(2.15)
0.43
(1.08)
1.10
(2.79)
0.95
(2.41)
0.65
(1.65)
0.39
(0.99)
0.46
(1.17)
0.3
(0.77)
Two mounting
holes 0.13
diameter
(0.34 cm)
Manual pushbutton
12
23
Ports
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The 35A Series is an industrial-quality, two-position, three-
way solenoid air valve with a capacity of 1728 scim.
A non-locking manual override push button provides
operation without closing the electrical circuit. Two mounting
holes at the base of the valve body provide easy mounting to control panels
. Each 35A also comes with 18" lead wires and
three barbed fittings for 1/4" OD plastic tubing.
FEATURES
• Industrial quality
• Medium capacity
• Manual override
• Universal porting
• N.C., N.O., diverter, or selector determined by piping
DIMENSIONS
ELECTRIC/PNEUMATIC THREE-WAY AIR VALVES
35A SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
PIPING
C
N.O.
N.C.
2
3
1
Ports (de-energized)
1 - Normally closed
2 - Common
3 - Normally open
Supply Voltage
35A-FW-24VAC 24 VAC/VDC 50/60 Hz
35A-FW-120VAC 120 VAC 60 Hz, 110 VAC 50 Hz
35A-24VDC 24 VDC
Supply Watts
35A-FW-24VAC 1.8 W
35A-FW-120VAC 1.7 W
35A-24VDC 5.4 W
Connections 1/8" NPT or barb for 1/4" OD tubing
Cv 0.18
Override Momentary pushbutton
Air Capacity 1728 scim, 1 scfm (28 lpm) @ 20
psig (138 kP
a)
Operating Temperature
0° to 104°F (-18° to 40°C)
Pressure Range 28" Hg vacuum to 120 psig (827 kPa)
Wiring 18" leads, 22 AWG
Approvals CE
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
35A-FW
-24VAC
24 VAC three-way air valve
35A-FW-120VAC 120 VAC three-way air valve
35A-24VDC 24 VDC three-way air valve

953. fi 897PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
FEATURES
• Three-port connection C, N.O., N.C.
• Two-position operation
• Positive air seal
• Manual operation for testing and checkout of some
models
• Compact and lightweight
• Mounts in any position
• High capacity
Supply Voltage See ordering information
Supply Watts
AC models 6W
DC model 9W
Connections 1/8" NPT normally open port; barbs
for 1/4" OD tubing on common and
normally closed port
Override Separately ordered key, Y99AA-4
Air Capacity 2592 scim, 1.5 scfm (42 lpm) @
15 psig (105 kPa) supply
Operating Temperature
AC models 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
DC models 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
Pressure Range 0 to 20 psig (0 to 138 kPa)
Wiring 18" leads, 18 AWG, 7/8" knockout for
1/2" conduit connector
Approvals UL Listed, CSA
Warranty 1 year
THREE-WAY SOLENOID AIR VALVE
V11 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
V11 Series three-way solenoid air valves have a capacity
of 2592 scim and have three connections: a normally open
(N
.O.) port with 1/8" FNPT connection, and normally closed
(N.C.) and common (COM) ports with barbed fittings for 1/4"
OD tubing. The posts in the die cast aluminum valve body
have No. 60 mesh (217 micron openings) monel screens to
pre
vent foreign material from entering the valve ports
.
APPLICATION
The V11 Series is used in applications where the operation of a pneumatic device is dependent upon an electrical circuit
.
The v
alves direct supply air to the pneumatic device when the
coil is energized or de-energized, depending on the supply and exhaust air connections.
All V11 Series valves are designed for use only as HVAC
control system devices. Where system closure, improper
flow, or loss of pressure due to valve failure can result in personal injury and/or loss of property, it is recommended that additional devices be added to accommodate proper system operation, such as using a whisker switch to monitor the blade position on smoke dampers
.
SPECIFICATIONS
ND
2.0
(5.08)
0.88
(2.24)
1/4 Barb
connector
1/8-27 NPT
Diameter
conduit
hole
0.97
(2.46)
1.75
(4.43)
1.75
(4.45)
0.20
(0.51)
0.38
(0.97)
0.19
(0.48)
0.68
(1.73)
(1.70)
0.67 0.41
(1.04)
0.18
(0.46)
0.38
(0.97)
0.37
(0.94)
0.22
(0.56)
0.19
0.5
1.0
(1.54)
2.56
(6.50)
1.50
(3.81)
0.25
(0.64)
0.50
(1.27)
0.57
(1.45)
1/4 Barb
connector
0.97
(2.46)
0.19
(0.48)
3.13
(7.95)
COM
NC
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS

954. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 898fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
In a typical application, supply air is connected to the normally closed port, and the control device is connected to the common
port. When the solenoid is energized, a magnetic field activates a plunger-type valve stem, and supply air is directed to the control
device. When the solenoid is de-energized, the supply air connection is closed, and the normally open port exhausts air from the
control device. Reverse action may be obtained by connecting the supply air to the normally open port, using the normally closed
port for exhaust (see Application Diagram). For day/night or summer/winter two-pressure switching, see the example Three-
pipe Application Diagram. To manually operate, remove the access plug, and insert the Y99AA-4 key. The manual opener key is
ordered separately.
Access plug
for key
20 psig
(138 kPa)
15 psig
(103 kPa)
To
system
Electrical
leads
Electrical
leads
Control
air
Exhaust
air
Access plug
for key
Supply
air N.C.
N.O.N.C.
C
N.O.
C
Two-Pipe Three-Pipe
ORDERING INFORMATION
OPERATION
THREE-WAY SOLENOID AIR VALVE
V11 SERIES
APPLICATION DIAGRAM
ACCESSORIES
Y99AA-4 Manual opener key
MODEL DESCRIPTION
V11HAA-100 110/120 VAC, 50/60 Hz three-way air va lve
V11HBA-100 220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz three-way air valve
V11HCA-100 208 VAC, 50/60 Hz three-way air valve
V11HDA-100 440/480 VAC, 50/60 Hz three-way air valve
V11HFA-100 277 VAC, 50/60 Hz three-way air valve
V11HGA-100 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz three-way air valve
V11PNA-105 24 VDC three-way air valve

955. fi 899PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
K-383 Pressure regulator, 1/4" pipe, 16 scfm capacity
K-384 Pressure regulator, 1/2" pipe, 32 scfm capacity
K-387 Pressure regulator, 3/8" pipe, 22 scfm capacity
ORDERING INFORMATION
ISOLATION VALVES AND PRESSURE REGULATORS
PV600 SERIES
PLUG VALVE
PV608
PLUG VALVE
PV609
1.67 (4.24)
1.38
(3.51)
1.34
(3.40)
D
M
N
N
1
L
H
D
M
N
N
1
L
H
Top View
Isolation Valve
PV600
0.15 lb
(.07 kg)
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
PV600 Series air and water two-way isolation valves are
rated to 200 psig (1379 kPa) at -40° to 175°F (-40° to 79°C).
The
y are useful in isolating transducers for removal or for
bypass operations
. They are constructed of a brass body and
plastic hand valves. Fittings are 1/8 threaded NPT male or
f
emale
.
DIMENSIONS
PV608-2 PV607-2
Connections
K-383 1/4" FNPT pipe connection
K-384 1/2" FNPT pipe connection
K-387 3/8" FNPT pipe connection
Output 0-50 psig (0-345 kPa)
Operating Temperature -40° to 200°F (-40° to 93°C)
Maximum Pressure 400 psig (2,758 kPa)
Weight
K-383 2.0 lb (1.0 kg)
K-384 3.4 lb (1.3 kg)
K-387 5.0 lb (2.3 kg)
Mounting Inline piping
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The K-383, K-384 and K-387 pressure regulators have a
large flow capacity to reduce supply air pressure from the
compressor down to the requirements of the pneumatic
control system
.The regulators have 1/8" gauge ports.
SPECIFICATIONS
ACCESSORIES
AL-322 2" gauge, 0-30 psi, center back 1/8" NPT connection
AL-327 2" gauge, 0-100 psi, center back 1/8" NPT connection
K-312 Safety pop-off valve, 1/2" MNPT, 30 psi setpoint,
24 scfm
K-383 K-384
K-312
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PV607-2 Male to Male 1/8" NPT isolation valve
PV608-2 Female to Male 1/8" NPT isolation valve

956. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 900fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
DESCRIPTION
The K-332 PRV station is a cartridge-style filter element that
removes oil vapor, moisture, and dirt to one micron size. The
K-332-B assembly includes a wall mounting bracket, filter cartridge, pressure reducing valve (PRV) and three shut-off/ bypass valves for uninterrupted filter servicing
. This complete
airflow station is designed for airflow rates and pressure regulation up to 8 scfm and 30 psig (200 kPa)
. The regulator
is adjustable up to 35 psig (241 kPa).
PRV STATION, FILTERS, CALIBRATION KIT
K-332
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
K-332 PRV station with filters
K-332-B PRV station with wall bracket, bypass and three isolating valves
PRV Station
Model K-332-B
17"
(4.32 cm)
12"
(3.05 cm)
3/8"
3/8"
TOOL-95-1
TOOL-M-225
DESCRIPTION
The TOOL-95-1 is a pneumatic controls calibration kit.
It includes gauges
, wrenches, tees, screwdrivers and
a squeeze-bulb pump
. The TOOL-M-225 is a larger
replacement squeeze bulb pump for higher air volumes.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
T
OOL-95-1
Pneumatic thermostat calibration kit
T
OOL-M-225
Large-capacity squeeze bulb pump
FILN05
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION The FILN05 is a final-device pneumatic air filter with straight
plastic barb fittings for 1/4" OD poly tubing
. The FILN05-B
model comes with 90° bent fittings. The microfibre disposable
filter unit consists of a HEPA Microflex™ filter tube permanently bonded into a sealed nylon casting
. As the filter
sho
ws signs of contamination, simply remove and replace
.
A replacement model FILN05-R is available without the barb fittings
. NOTE: Not for use with synthetic lubricants.
Connections
FILN05-B Plastic barbs, 90 degree, for 1/4" OD
poly tubing
FILN05 Plastic barbs, straight, for 1/4" OD poly
tubing
FILN05-R Replacement filter, no barb fittings
Air Capacity 1.4 scfm, 1.5 psid
Operating Temperature 32° to 200°F (0° to 93°C)
Maximum Pressure Rating 100 psi (689 kPa) @ 100°F (38°C)
Materials Of Construction Transparent nylon housing, HEPA
Microflex™ filter
Dimensions 2.8"L x 1"DIA (7.0 x 2.5 cm)
Weight 0.3 oz (8.5 g)
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
FILN05-B Inline disposable air filter, 90° bent barbs for 1/4" OD
tubing
FILN05 Inline disposable air filter, straight, with barbs for
1/4" OD tubing
FILN05-R Inline disposable air filter, replacement, without barbs

957. fi 901PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Specifications for T-100 Series
Burst Pressure
T-100 Series ASTM Test D-1599; typical value
>500 psig (3,448 kPa)
T-141 only 320 psig (2,206 kPa) @ 75°F (24°C)
derated to 160 psig (1,103 kPa) @ 150°F (66°C)
Bending Modulus
ASTM Test D-747; typical value
3000 psig ±5000
Density ASTM Test D-792; typical value
1.1 ±0.005 g/cc
Elongation ASTM Test D-638; typical value
600%
Melt Index ASTM Test D-1238; typical value
0.6 ±0.1 g/10 min
Polyethylene Classification
ASTM Test D-1248; Type I, Class B
or C, Category 4
Shore A Hardness ASTM Test D-1700; typical value
97 ±3
Shore D Hardness ASTM Test D-1700; typical value
45 ±3
Smoke Density UL 1820; peak optical density 0.5,
maximum optical density 0.15
Stress Crack Resistance
ASTM Test D-1693; typical value
V 200 hours
Flame Propagation UL 1820; typical value 0.5
Tensile Strength ASTM Test D-638; typical value
>2000 psig (13,790 kPa)
Water Absorption ASTM Test D-576; maximum value 5
Flammability Rating UL 94 V-2; UL 910 NFPA 90A
SPECIFICATIONS
PNEUMATIC TUBING
T-100 SERIES, T-141
DESCRIPTION
T-100 Series pneumatic tubing is a superior quality, flame-
retardant, stress-crack resistant, exclusively compounded
polyethylene tubing that provides long-term, reliable
performance
. This tubing is suitable for installation in air
ducts, plenums, and other spaces used for environmental air.
The
T-141 is made of extremely flexible, clear-blue
polyurethane that is not flame-retardant-rated and is used only for inside panels. It is kink-resistant, has an excellent
memory, and features high compression strength and outstanding abrasive resistance
.
FEATURES
T-100 SERIES POLYETHYLENE: •
Flexible and lightweight
• Flame retardant
• High stress-crack resistance
• Easy to handle and install
• Resistant to ultraviolet breakdown
• Meets or exceeds every requirement for flame
retardant polyethylene tubing set by the pneumatic controls industry
•
Numbering system for multitube identification
• Available with colored stripes
PERFORMANCE CHART - POLYETHYLENE TUBING
T-100
CAUTION: The polyethylene performance chart indicates short term burst pressures, not long term operating pressures, as indicated in laboratory testing. No representations of operating burst pressures are expressed or implied.
T-141
INSTANTANEOUS BURST PRESSURE VS TEMPERATURE
Temperature °F (°C)
75°
(24°)
100°
(38°)
125°
(52°)
150°
(66°)
175°
(79°)
100
(690)
200
(1379)
300
(2069)
400
(2758)
500
(3448)
600
(4137)
Burst Pressure (psig/kPa)
1/4" OD x 0.040"
3/8" OD x 0.062"
1/2" OD x 0.062"

958. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 902fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
T
-100
5/32" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 500 ft (152 m)
T
-100-2
5/32" OD black poly tubing, twin, 1 coil, 500 ft (152 m)
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
T-101-2 1/4" OD black poly tubing, twin, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
T-101-B 1/4" OD black with blue stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
T
-101-G
1/4" OD black with green stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
T
-101-O
1/4" OD black with orange stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
T
-101-R
1/4" OD black with red stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
T
-101-V
1/4" OD black with violet stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
T
-101-W
1/4" OD black with white stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
T
-101-Y
1/4" OD black with yellow stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
T
-110
3/8" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
T-130 1/2" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
T-141 1/4" OD clear blue poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
PNEUMATIC TUBING
T-100 SERIES, T-141
DIMENSIONS
Model Description Dimensions Weight
T-100 5/32" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 500 ft (152 m)0.156" OD, 0.096" ID, 0.030 Wall, 500 ft (152 m) coil3.0 lb (1.4 kg) per coil
T-100-25/32" OD black poly tubing, twin, 1 coil, 500 ft (152 m)0.156" OD, 0.096" ID, 0.030 Wall, 500 ft (152 m) coil6.0 lb (2.8 kg) per coil
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)0.250" OD, 0.170" ID, 0.040 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil3.3 lb (1.5 kg) per coil
T-101-21/4" OD black poly tubing, twin, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)0.250" OD, 0.170" ID, 0.040 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil6.6 lb (3.0 kg) per coil
T-101-B1/4" OD black with blue stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)0.250" OD, 0.170" ID, 0.040 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil3.3 lb (1.5 kg) per coil
T-101-G1/4" OD black with green stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)0.250" OD, 0.170" ID, 0.040 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil3.3 lb (1.5 kg) per coil
T-101-O1/4" OD black with orange stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)0.250" OD, 0.170" ID, 0.040 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil3.3 lb (1.5 kg) per coil
T-101-R1/4" OD black with red stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)0.250" OD, 0.170" ID, 0.040 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil3.3 lb (1.5 kg) per coil
T-101-V1/4" OD black with violet stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)0.250" OD, 0.170" ID, 0.040 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil3.3 lb (1.5 kg) per coil
T-101-W1/4" OD black with white stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)0.250" OD, 0.170" ID, 0.040 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil3.3 lb (1.5 kg) per coil
T-101-Y1/4" OD black with yellow stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)0.250" OD, 0.170" ID, 0.040 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil3.3 lb (1.5 kg) per coil
T-110 3/8" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)0.375" OD, 0.250" ID, 0.062 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil7.6 lb (3.4 kg) per coil
T-130 1/2" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)0.500" OD, 0.375" ID, 0.062 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil10.6 lb (4.8 kg) per coil
T-141 1/4" OD clear blue poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)0.250" OD, 0.159" ID, 0.045 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil7.2 lb (3.3 kg) per coil

959. fi 903PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
SOLDER ADAPTERS
Model Cross Reference Description (in) Std. Pa ck
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell
B-121 - - - - 3/16 ID 1/4 OD 100
to 5/32 B
B-122 - - - 1610B 3/16 ID 1/4 OD 100
to 1/4 B
B-123 21-375 F-100-12 141-425 1586B 1/4 ID to 1/4 B 100
FEMALE ADAPTERS Model Cross Reference Description (in) Std. Pa ck
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell B-135 20-925 - 141-211 1594B 1/4 x 1/8 FPT 100
MALE ADAPTERS Model Cross Reference Description (in) Std. Pa ck
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell B-130 - - - - 3/16 x 1/8 MPT 100
B-131-10 21-784 F-100-21 141-249 - 1/4 or 5/32 100
x 1/8 MPT
B-132 20-885 F-100-11 141-202 1590BT 1/4 x 1/8 MPT 100
B-133 21-005 F-100-35 141-354 1591BT 3/8 x 1/8 MPT 100
B-134 - - 141-209 1592BT 3/8 x 1/4 MPT 50
COMPRESSION ADAPTERS Model Cross Reference Description (in) Std. Pa ck
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell B-136 20-892 - - - 3/16 x 1/4 Comp 100
B-137 20-893 F -200-33 141-233 1635B 1/4 x 1/4 Comp 50
MALE BRANCH TEES Model Cross Reference Description Std. Pa ck
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell
"Left x "Right x "Top
B-371 20-897 F-700-79 141-220 1600 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/8 MPT 25
B-372 20-905 F-700-63 - 1609BT 1/4 x 1/8 MPT x 1/4 100
FEMALE BRANCH TEE Model Cross Reference Description Std. Pa ck
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell
"Left x "Right x "Top
B-373 20-904 F-700-76 141-227 1614B 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/8 FPT 25
B-373-1 --- --- --- ---
1/4 x 1/4 x 1/8 FPT Drop Ear 10
COUPLINGS Model Cross Reference Description (in) Std. Pa ck
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell B-260 20-875 F-300-31 141-247 1628B 5/32 x 5/32 50
B-261 21-064 F-300-30 141-246 1606B 1/4 x 5/32 50
B-262 - - - - 1/4 x 3/16 Solder 100
B-263 20-886 F-300-26 141-201 1607B 1/4 x 1/4 50 B-264 20-887 F-300-27 141-216 1608B 3/8 x 3/8 50 B-265 20-890 F-300-21 141-217 1610B 3/8 x 1/4 50 B-266 20-891 F-300-19 141-219 1611B 1/2 x 3/8 25 B-267 20-888 F-300-36 141-218 1617B 1/2 x 1/2 25
Solder Adapter
Male Adapter
Female Adapter
Compression
Adapter
Bulkhead Barb
Coupling
Male Branch Tees
Female Branch Tees
BULKHEAD BARBS Model Cross Reference Description (in) Std. Pa ck
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell B-138 20-894 - - 1619B 1/4 B x 1/4 Comp 25 B-139 21-377 - - - 3/8 B x 3/8 Comp 25 B-142 20-874 - - - 1/4 B x 1/4 B 50
PNEUMATIC AIR SUPPLY BARB FITTINGS
B SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Sold in package quantities only
Order quantity 1=1 package

960. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 904fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
PNEUMATIC AIR SUPPLY BARB FITTINGS
B SERIES, R-3710, F-1000 SERIES
GAUGE TEE
Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell
"Left x "Right x "Top Pack
B-387 20-906 F-700-62 141-213 1604BT 1/4 x 1/8 MPT 5
x 1/8 FPT
BARB TEES
Model Cross Reference Description Std. Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell
"Left x "Right x "Top Pack
B-374 20-876 F-700-83 141-245 1637B 5/32 x 5/32 x 5/32 100
B-375 21-785 F-700-84 - 1630B 1/4 x 1/4 x 5/32 100 B-376 20-898 F-700-73 141-203 1612B 1/4 x1/4 x1/4 100 B-377 20-899 F-700-74 141-214 1615B 3/8 x 3/8 x 1/4 100 B-378 20-900 F-700-75 141-204 1613B 3/8 x 3/8 x 3/8 100 B-379 20-901 F-700-67 141-223 1616B 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/4 5 B-381 20-903 F-700-65 141-221 1620B 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 5
BARB 90° ELL Model Cross Reference Description (in) Std. Pa ck
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell B-569 - - - - 3/16 x 1/4 100
B-573 20-908 F-500-39 141-230 1642 1/4 x 1/4 100
B-574 20-909 F-500-38 141-231 1598B 3/8 x 3/8 100
B-575 - F-500-37 141-232 1599B 1/2 x 1/2 5
INLINE RESTRICTORS Model Number Description
R-3710-2007 Orifice 0.007", 1/4" x 1/4" barbs, aqua-colored thermoplastic
R-3710-2005 Orifice 0.005", 1/4" x 1/4" barbs, red-colored thermoplastic
R-3710-2010 Adjustable restrictor, 5/32" x 5/32", brass
BARB TO MPT 90° ELL
Model Cross Reference Description (in) Std. Pa ck
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell B-570 - - 141-242 - 5/32 x 1/8 MPT 100
B-571 20-895 F-500-41 141-200 1595BT 1/4 x 1/8 MPT 100
BARB TO FPT 90° ELL
Model Cross Reference Description (in) Std. Pa ck
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell B-572 20-896 F-500-42 141-208 1589B 1/4 x 1/8 FPT 100
Barb Tee
Gauge Tee
Barb Plug
Barb to MPT 90° Ell
Barb to FPT 90° Ell
Barb 90° Ell
Inline Restrictors
BARB PLUGS Model Cross Reference Description (in) Std. Pa ck
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell
F-1000-323 - - - - 5/32 and 1/4 Plug 100
B-391 20-910 - 141-237 1640 1/4 Plug 50 B-392 21-378 F-1000-241 141-238 - 3/8 Plug 50
B-393 21-379 - - - 1/2 Plug 100
ORDERING INFORMATION
Sold in package quantities only
Order quantity 1=1 package

961. fi 905PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
PNEUMATIC AIR SUPPLY COMPRESSION FITTINGS
C-SERIES
COMPRESSION ADAPTERS TO MPT
Model Cross Reference Description (in) Std. Pa ck
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell
C-132 - F-200-2 044-126 1433T 3/16 x 1/8 MPT 50
C-133 20-930 F-200-3 044-128 1435T 1/4 x 1/8 MPT 50
C-134 20-931 F-1000-36 044-129 1436T 1/4 x 1/4 MPT 50
C-135 20-933 F-200-4 044-135 1442T 3/8 x 1/8 MPT 25
C-136 20-934 F-200-5 044-137 1443T 3/8 x 1/4 MPT 25
C-137 20-935 F-200-6 044-138 1444T 3/8 x 3/8 MPT 25
C-138 - F-200-7 - 1446T 1/2 x 1/4 MPT 10
C-139 - F-200-8 - 1447T 1/2 x 3/8 MPT 25
C-140 - F-200-9 - 1448T 1/2 x 1/2 MPT 25
COMPRESSION UNIONS Model Cross Reference Description (in) Std. Pa ck
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell C-231 - F-800-1 - 1420 3/16 x 3/16 25 C-232 - F-800-2 - - 1/4 x 3/16 10
C-233 20-939 F-800-3 - 1421 1/4 x 1/4 50 C-234 20-941 F-800-4 - 1428 3/8 x 1/4 10 C-235 20-940 F-800-5 - 1423 3/8 x 3/8 50
C-236 - F-800-6 - 1429 1/2 x 3/8 10
C-237 - F-800-7 - 1424 1/2 x 1/2 25
COMPRESSION LINE VALVES
Model Cross Reference Description (in) Std. Pa ck
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell C-151 20-914 F-1000-93 - 2135 1/4 10
C-152 20-919 F-1000-94 - 2136 3/8 10
COMPRESSION TEES Model Cross Reference Description Std. Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell
"Left x "Right x "Top Pack
C-331 - F-700-8 - 1528 3/16 x 3/16 x 3/16 10 C-333 20-949 F-700-9 - 1529 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/4 25
C-335 20-951 F-700-10 - 1538 3/8 x 3/8 x 1/4 10
C-336 20-950 F-700-11 - 1531 3/8 x 3/8 x 3/8 25
C-337 - - - 1540 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/4 10
C-338 - F-700-12 - 1539 1/2 x 1/2 x 3/8 10
Compression
Tee
Compression
Union
Compression
Line Valve
Compression
Adapter to FPT
Compression
Adapter to MPT
COMPRESSION ADAPTERS TO FPT
Model Cross Reference Description (in) Std. Pa ck
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell C-146 20-942 - - 1459 1/4 x 1/8 FPT 25 C-147 20-943 - - 1460 1/4 x 1/4 FPT 10 C-149 - - - 1465 3/8 x 1/4 FPT 10
ORDERING INFORMATION
Sold in package quantities only
Order quantity 1=1 package

962. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 906fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
PNEUMATIC AIR SUPPLY COMPRESSION FITTINGS
C-SERIES
COMPRESSION ADAPTERS TO MPT
Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell "Left x "Right x "Top Pack
C-361 20-956 F-700-4 - 1551T 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/8 MPT 10
C-362 20-952 - - 1542T 1/4 x 1/8 MPT x 1/4 10
BULKHEAD FITTINGS Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell (in) Pack
C-375 - F-800-8 - - 1/4 x 1/4 10
C-376 - - - - 3/8 x 3/8 10
PLASTIC FERRULES Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell (in) Pack
C-381 20-961 F-1000-9 - 1571 1/4 200
C-382 20-962 F-1000-10 - 1572 3/8 100
C-383 - F-1000-11 - 1573 1/2 100
ANGLE GAUGE TEE Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell "Left x "Right x "Top Pack
C-369 20-958 - - 1557T
1/8 MPT x 1/8 FPT x 1/4 10
BRANCH FEMALE TEE Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell "Left x "Right x "Top Pack
C-372 20-957 F-700-7 - 1564T 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/8 FPT 10
COMPRESSION PLUG Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell (in) Pack
C-378 21-381 F-1000-14 - 1568 1/4 50
Tees with MPT
Angle Gauge Tee
Gauge Tee
Branch Female Tee
Bulkhead Fitting
Compression Plug
Plastic Ferrule
GAUGE TEE Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell "Left x "Right x "Top Pack
C-370 20-955 - - 1559T
1/4 x 1/8 MPT x 1/8 FPT 10
ORDERING INFORMATION
Sold in package quantities only
Order quantity 1=1 package

963. fi 907PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
PNEUMATIC AIR SUPPLY COMPRESSION FITTINGS
C-SERIES
PLASTIC TUBING INSERTS
Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell (in) Pack
C-384 20-966 F-1000-198 - 1575 1/4 200
C-385 20-967 F-1000-184 - 1576 3/8 200
C-386 - F-1000-8 - 1577 1/2 100
COMPRESSION 90° ELL TO FPT Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell (in) Pack
C-552 20-948 - - 1511 1/4 x1/8 FPT 25
COMPRESSION 90° ELLS Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell (in) Pack
C-521 - F-800-3 - 1479 1/4 x 1/4 10
C-522 - F-800-4 - - 3/8 x 1/4 25
C-523 - F-800-5 - 1481 3/8 x 3/8 10
C-524 - F-800-7 - 1482 1/2 x 1/2 10
Plastic Tubing
Insert
Compression
90° Ell
Compression
90° Ell to MPT
Compression
90° Ell to FPT
COMPRESSION 90° ELL TO MPT
Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell (in) Pack
C-532 - F-500-2 - 1488T 3/16 x 1/8 MPT 100
C-535 20-945 F-500-3 - 1490T 1/4 x 1/8 MPT 50 C-536 20-946 - - 1491T 1/4 X 1/4 MPT 50 C-538 20-947 F-500-5 - 1497T 3/8 x 1/4 MPT 25 C-539 - F-500-6 - 1498T 3/8 x 3/8 MPT 25
ORDERING INFORMATION
Sold in package quantities only
Order quantity 1=1 package

964. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 908fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
MISCELLANEOUS PIPE FITTINGS
M SERIES, F-1000 SERIES
GLOBE VALVES
Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell (in) Pack
M-132 20-973 F-1000-98 - 2030 1/2 FPT 10
SHUT OFF COCKS
Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell (in) Pack
M-135 - F-1000-218 - - 1/8 FPT 10
M-136 - F-1000-219 - 2108 1/4 FPT 10
HEX NIPPLES Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell (in) Pack
M-141 20-990 - - 1739T 1/8 MPT 25
M-142 20-992 - - 1751T 1/4 MPT 50
M-143 - - - 1762T 3/8 MPT 25
90˚ DROP EAR ELBOW Model  Description  Std. Pa ck
M-127 1/8" FPT 25
GANG STRAPS AND CLIPS Model  Description  Std. Pa ck
M-633 Copper-plated 100 six-gang strap M-648-K Capillary 1 mounting clip 1/8" maximum CC-1G Non-metallic 1 capillary clip 3/8" maximum
PIPE CLAMPS - Copper Plated Model 
Description (in)  Std. Pa ck
M-622 1/4 single 100 M-623 3/8 single 100 M-628 1/4-1/4 dual 100
Snap-In Bushing
Drop Ear Elbow
Globe Valve
Shut Off
Hex Nipples
M-633
M-648-K
SNAP-IN BUSHINGS Model Description Std. Pa ck
F-1000-331 Nylon bushing, 1/2" EMT thru-wall conduit 50 F-1000-332 Nylon bushing, 3/4" EMT thru-wall conduit 50 NB12K Nylon bushing, 1/2" knockout (7/8" hole) 50 CCT1820 Nylon bushing, 1/2" EMT and 1/2" knockout 50
2157 Nylon bushing, 3/4" knockout 1
CC-1G
BUSHINGS
ORDERING INFORMATION
Sold in package quantities only
Order quantity 1=1 package

965. fi 909PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
PNEUMATIC AIR SUPPLY SOLDER FITTINGS
S-SERIES
SOLDER CAPS
Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell (in) Pack
S-141 - - - 1161 1/4 50
S-142 - - - 1162 3/8 50
S-143 - - - 1163 1/2 50
SOLDER TEES Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell "
Left x "Right x "Top Pack
S-302 - F-700-17 - 1251 3/16 x 3/16 x 3/16 50
S-306 - F-700-18 - 1252 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/4 50 S-308 - F-700-24 - 1270 3/8 x 3/8 x 1/4 50 S-310 - F-700-20 - 1254 3/8 x 3/8 x 3/8 50
S-312 - F-700-27 - 1275 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/4 50 S-314 - F-700-28 - 1276 1/2 x 1/2 x 3/8 50 S-316 - F-700-25 - 1255 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 25
SOLDER COUPLINGS Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell (in) Pack
S-202 - F-300-1 - 1002 3/16 x 3/16 100
S-205 - F-300-2 - 1003 1/4 x 1/4 100
S-206 - F-300-4 - 1025 3/8 x 1/4 50
S-207 - F-300-3 - 1005 3/8 x 3/8 100
S-208 - F-300-7 - 1029 3/8 x 1/2 50
S-209 - F-300-5 - 1006 1/2 x 1/2 100
Solder Cap
Solder Coupling
Solder Tee
Solder 90° Elbow
Solder
Adapter to MPT
Solder 45° Elbow
SOLDER ADAPTERS TO MALE PIPE THREAD
Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell (in) Pack
S-104 - F-100-3 - 1104 3/8 OD x 1/4 MPT 25
S-109 - F-100-7 - 1109 1/2 OD x 1/2 MPT 100
SOLDER 90° ELBOWS Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell (in) Pack
S-502 - F-500-19 - 1172 1/4 x 1/4 50 S-504 - F-500-20 - 1174 3/8 x 3/8 50 S-506 - F-500-22 - 1175 1/2 x 1/2 50
SOLDER 45° ELBOWS Model Cross Reference Description Std.
Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell (in) Pack
S-515 - - - 1202 3/8 x 3/8 50
S-516 - - - 1203 1/2 x1/2 50
ORDERING INFORMATION
Sold in package quantities only
Order quantity 1=1 package

966. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 910fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
PNEUMATIC THERMOSTATS CROSS-REFERENCE
Model # Manufacturer
Direct Acting or
Reverse Acting
One or
Two Pipe Other
Includes
Cover
Includes Mounting
Bracket
TK-5001 Schneider Electric Direct One — Yes Yes
TP973A2259 Honeywell Direct One — Yes Yes
T4100-1 Johnson Direct One — Yes Yes
TK-5101 Schneider Electric Reverse One — Yes Yes
TP973B2171 Honeywell Reverse One — Yes Yes
T4100-2 Johnson Reverse One — Yes Yes
TK-1001 Schneider Electric Direct Two — Yes Yes
TP970A2259 Honeywell Direct Two — Yes Yes
T-4002-201 Johnson Direct Two — No No
2212-118 Robertshaw Direct Two — Yes Yes
TK-1101 Schneider Electric Reverse — Two Yes Yes
TP970B2182 Honeywell Reverse — Two Yes Yes
T-4002-202 Johnson Reverse Two — No No
2212-119 Robertshaw Reverse Two — Yes Yes
TK-1301 Schneider Electric Direct Two Day/Night Yes Yes
TP971A2102 Honeywell Direct Two Day/Night Yes Yes
T-4506-203 Johnson Direct Two Day/Night No No
TK-1201 Schneider Electric — Two Heat/Cool Yes Yes
TP972A2192 Honeywell — Two Heat/Cool Yes Yes
T4752 Johnson — Two Heat/Cool No No
PNEUMATIC THERMOSTATS
CROSS-REFERENCE TABLE
CONTROLLER ACTION
CONTROLLER ACTION HEATING COOLING
INSTRUCTIONS
1. Pick system application
2. Pick fail safe condition
3. Intersection shows action
Humid. Pressure
sensed downstream
Dehumid. Pressure
sensed upstream
FAILS TO ON
(Normally Open Ports)
(Normally Closed Contacts)
D.A. R.A.
FAILS TO OFF
(Normally Closed Ports)
(Normally Open Contacts)
R.A. D.A.

967. fi 911PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
BASIC PNEUMATIC TERMS
Action: The direction of magnitude change of the output of a controller with respect to the change in the variable
that is being sensed.
Example: Direct Action: Variable increases, output increases.
Reverse Action: Variable increases, output decreases.
Branch Lines: The tubing in a pneumatic control system which carries the output signal from controllers to aux-
iliary devices or actuators.
Constant Volume Control: An air system in which the total quantity of air flow remains the same. The load is
matched by changing the temperature of the air delivered.
Day/Night Thermostat: A pneumatic thermostat which can be indexed by a change in main pressure to control
at one setpoint during the day and another setpoint during the night. Example: 15 psig main during the day and
20 psig main during the night. (Synonymous to night setback or set-up).
Direct Acting (DA): The action of a controller that produces an increase in output pressure as the variable
increases.
Electric-Pneumatic Switch (EP): An electrically operated air flow switch with normally closed and normally
opened inputs which lead to a common output. Also known as solenoid air valve.
Mains: The tubing in a pneumatic control system which carries the supply pressure from the air supply equip-
ment to the controllers.
Normally Closed (N.C.): A controlled device that reduces the flow of the controlled medium as the branch pres-
sure is reduced, and will go to shut-off if the branch pressure goes to zero.
Normally Open (N.O.): A controlled device that increases the flow of the controlled medium as the branch pres-
sure is reduced, and will go to full-flow if the branch pressure goes to zero.
Pneumatic-Electric Switch (PE): An air pressure operated switch in which the contacts are made or broken in
order to operate electrical devices in a pneumatic control system.
Positive Positioning: The characteristic of a controlled device in which it has the maximum force available at
any point of the stroke.
Restrictor: A device which has a minute opening (such as 0.005" or 0.0075") which changes the velocity pres-
sure of the air line to static pressure.
Reverse Acting (RA): The action of a controller that produces a decrease in output pressure as the variable
increases.
Reversing Relay: An auxiliary device that produces a decrease in the output pressure to the controlled device
as the input from the controller increases.
Summer/Winter: A pneumatic thermostat which can be indexed by a change in main pressure to control at one
action during the summer and another action during the winter. This is necessary because it is controlling the
same controlled device.
Example: 15 psi during summer - reverse action;
20 psi during winter - direct action.

968. fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS 912fi
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS
15
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS, SENSORS AND ACTUATORS
• Pneumatic control systems start with a compressed air supply system consisting of a compressor, tank, dryer and pressure reducing valve
assembly. “Main air”, typically 25 psi (pounds per square inch) pressure, is used to operate thermostats, actuators, relays and other pneumatic
devices.
• Pneumatic systems have some advantages over electric systems:
°
Spring return (fail-safe) functionality is built in to most pneumatic devices.
°
Pneumatic systems provide safe control for hazardous locations (no electricity, no spark) and cost less than explosion proof and
intrinsically safe equipment.
°
A pneumatic system has built-in backup capability for power outage situations (until compressed air tank runs down).
°
Pneumatic actuators are powerful and cost effective, especially for spring-return control of large butterfly valves (for example).
• Pneumatic systems are reliable, powerful, and long lasting when properly installed and maintained.
• Control devices consume air to maintain branch pressure and provide modulation. Typically rated in scim (standard cubic inches per minute),
pneumatic devices bleed off system pressure, reducing storage tank pressure. The compressor cycles to maintain tank pressure.
• Temperature sensors, for example, consist of a bimetal element linked to a flapper. Changes in temperature move the flapper to open/close the
nozzle. The nozzle (in this 1-pipe example) can pass more air than the restrictor, thus controlling (modulating) the branch air and ultimately the
device at the end of the branch line.
• In a spring return actuator, branch air pressure force opposes spring force. Increasing branch pressure compresses the spring, and vice-versa.
• A flexible diaphragm separates the air chamber and spring chamber.
• Linear motion drives a pushrod, connected to damper linkage or valve stem, to position the damper or valve.
• Spring range and branch air pressure determine the balance of forces, and thus the end device position.
• Spring ranges make sequencing valves or actuators simple; controlling a hot water valve and a cooling valve with one branch signal is common
and very effective.
M
FLAPPER
BRANCH
NOZZLE
SETPOINT
SCREW
CONTA CT POINT FOR
THROTTING RANGE ADJUSTMENT
BIMETA L
AIR DRYER
MOTOR
INTAKE FILTER
COMPRESSOR
PRESSURE SWITCH
HIGH PRESSURE SAFETY RELIEF VALVE
DRIVE BELT
STORAGE
TANK
NORMALLY OPEN
SERVICE/TEST VALVE
NORMALLY CLOSED
SERVICE/TEST VALVE
HIGH-PRESSURE
GAGE
DRAIN COCK
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
SAFETY REFIEF VALVE
LOW-PRESSURE GAGE
MAIN AIR
TO SYSTEM
TEST COCK
TEST COCK
AUTO TRAP
AUTO SEPARATOR FILTER/TRAP
SERVICE BYPASS VALVE
PIPED TO DRAIN
SUBMICRON FILTER
DAMPER
AIRFLOW
PUSH
ROD
DAMPER
ACTUATOR
SPRING
PISTON
ROLLING
DIAPHRAGM
BRANCH
LINE
BRANCH LINE
FLOW
F1
F2
F3
PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC SENSORS
PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS

969. HUMIDITY
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING
& PROTECTION
DTK-120SRD | p. 965
ENG Accessories | p. 919
E50 Series | p. 927
H Series | p. 930
OVR DIN Series | p. 968
CS1150A | p. 939
TM
We Stock a Wide Variety to Meet Your Energy Management Requirements.

970. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
EnGenius | p. 913
SCX Series | p. 950
A/CR-12DC-12A | p. 942
POWER
MONITORING
& PROTECTION
Current Operated Switches
RIBXG, RIBXK, RIBXK420 Series — Current-Operated Switches & Transducers. . . . 941
CS1A, CS1150A-LED, SCS1.5A, SCS1150A-LED
— Current-Operated Switches
. . . 939
A/ACS, A/ASCS, A/CS, A/SCS, A/CR Series
— ACI Current-Operated Switches
. . . . 942
A/MCS, A/MSCS, A/MCS-A, A/MSCS-A
— ACI Mini Current-Operated Switches
. . . . 944
RIBX Series
— Functional Devices Current Switch and Relay
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
Current, Voltage and Power Monitoring Transducers EnGenius™ - Patent Pending
— Intelligent Power Monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
ENG-485, PT-NTL-10
— Communication Modules for EnGenius™
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
EnGenius™ Accessories
— Intelligent Power Monitor Accessories
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
PQube Series
— PQube Power Quality Meters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
PQube Ethernet Modules
— Ethernet and Combined CT/Ethernet Modules
. . . . . . . . 921
PQube TH Series
— Temperature/Humidity Probe
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
PQube DC Voltage Monitors
— DC Voltage and Energy Monitors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
E50 Series
— E50 Series Power Meter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
H-Series Class 500 Submeters
— Advanced KWH/DEMAND Meter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
U3889, 209PF
— Voltage Disconnect Switch Block, Ct Shorting Switches
. . . . . . . . . . 934
4CTV, 4CMA
— Kele AC Current Transducer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
CX, SCX Series (Current)
— AC Current Transducer with Current Output
. . . . . . . . . . 950
CX, SCX Series (Voltage)
— AC Current Transducers with Voltage Output
. . . . . . . . . 951
A/CT, A/SCT Series
— Current Transducers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
RIBX-V Series
— Current Transducer and Relay
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
Sentry 200-A Series
— High AC Current Transducers With Current Output
. . . . . . . . . 955
258, 269
— Three-Phase Voltage Monitors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956
201A
— MotorSaver™ Three-Phase Voltage Monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
250A
— MotorSaver™ Three-Phase Voltage Monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
355 Series
— MotorSaver™ Three-Phase Voltage Monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
455 Series
— MotorSaver™ Three-Phase Voltage Monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
460
— MotorSaver™ Three-Phase Voltage Monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
Potential and Current Transformers PQube XCT CT Modules
— Current Transformer Interface Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
PQube SCN Series
— High Accuracy Split Core Current Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922
PQube DC Sensors
— DC Hall Effect Current Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
SCT Series
— Current Transformers With Voltage Output
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
RCT-1800 Series
— Rope CT AC Current Sensor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
500T, 501T
— Split-Core Current Transformers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
600T, 601T
— Split-Core Current Transformers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
RL Series
— Solid-Core Current Transformers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
Power Monitoring & Protection WNC SERIES
— WattNode AC Power Meter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
UCT Series
— Solid Core Current Transformers with Voltage Output
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
Protection DTK-120HW
— Surge Protectors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962
DTK-MRJ11
— Surge Protection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962
DTK-2LVLP
— Surge Protection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962
DTK-120SR, DTK-2MHLP
— Power/Data Surge Protector
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
DTK-120SRD, DTK-TSS4D
— 54kA Series Connected Surge Protector with
Dry Contacts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
DRS, PC642C Series
— Data Line Surge Protector
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
FAS-TEL, HSP-121BT1RU
— Power & Data Line Surge Protector
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
OVR DIN Series
— DIN Rail Mount Surge Protection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
392-SVSR2
— Lightning Arrester
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
V130LA1, V39ZA1, V47ZA1, 1.5KE56CA
— Metal Oxide Varistor, Transzorb
. . . . . . . . 970

971. fifl 913POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
EnGenius™ Patent Pending
INTELLIGENT POWER MONITOR
ENGENIUS
TM
- PATENT PENDING
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ± 10% 60Hz
Supply Current 250 mA maximum
Monitored Voltage

Line to Line
120 to 600 VAC
Line to Line with
potential transformer
601 to 32000 VAC
Monitored Current 5 to 6000A using current
tr
ansformers
System Type
2-Wire Single Phase
3-Wire Single Phase
4-Wire Wye
3-Wire Delta
4-Wire Delta
Communication
Data Port Serial interface to EnGenius™
Desktop Software
OPTIONAL Communications (not field installable)
BACnet MS/TP
Lonworks
Modbus RTU
N2
Analog Output 1 Output
Type 4-20 mA (loop powered)
Accuracy 0.5% full scale
Maximum Loop Supply Voltage
30 VDC
Maximum Impedance 850Ω @ 24 VDC
Digital Output 2 Outputs
Type Optically isolated solid state
FET switch
Rated Voltage 28 VAC/40 VDC maximum
Rated Current 00 mA maximum
Operating Temperature -22° to 158°F (-30° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 95% (non-condensing)
Enclosure NEMA 4, UL94 rated 5VA
Dimensions 6.5” x 6.5” x 4”
(16.5 x 16.5 x 10.1 cm)
Weight 3.1 lb (1.4 kg)
Approvals ETL, CE File #4004284
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The EnGenius™ is a two processor based power monitoring
device that monitors and records numerous power system
parameters
. The EnGenius™ continuously measures
voltage and current to calculate and display over 57 values.
120 to 600V can be monitored without the need of potential tr
ansformers
. 601 to 32000 V can be monitored with the use
of potential transformers. All scaling calculations are handled
b
y the meter
.
The
Engenius™ comes standard in a NEMA 4 rated
enclosure ready to be mounted
. A data port is provided
on the front interface for easy setup and trend retrieval via EnGenius™ desktop software
. Built for the future, the
EnGenius™ allows for feature upgrades through the data port
.
FEATURES
• NEMA 4 enclosure standard
• KWH Accuracy class 0.5% ANSI C12.20 For meter alone with
unmatched CT's OR for Meter-CT set with factory calibrated
matched CT's
• Data port for setup and trend retrieval
• Measure voltages up to 32000 VAC (*voltages over 600VAC
require the use of a potential transformer, not included)
• Supports 0.333V safe CTs and 5 AMP CTs (must use optional
5 AMP adapter board)
• Supports 1V and 2 V CT's (must use ENG-2VT/1V-ADPTR)
• BACnet MSTP, Lonworks, N2 and Modbus RTU available
• Password protected configuration
• Powered by separate 24 VAC supply
• On board data logging
• Auto configuration
• Upgradable firmware through data port
• Bidirectional power measurement
• CSI approved
SPECIFICATIONS
Parameters that can assigned to 4-20 mA output:
• Total Positive KW
• Total Bi-directional KW (12 mA = 0 KW)
• Total Sliding Window KW (user configured, 5 to 60 min.)
• Peak Sliding Window KW
• Total KVA
• Total PF
• Average System Volts
• Average System Amps
Parameters that can be assigned to Digital Outputs: •
Positive KWH pulse
• Negative KWH pulse
• Low volts - alarm
• Unbalanced volts - alarm
• Low or unbalanced volts - alarm
PARAMETERS
March 2014

972. RABC
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 914RABC
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
INTELLIGENT POWER MONITOR
ENGENIUS
TM
- PATENT PENDING
WIRING - .333 V CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, 3-PHASE POWER SYSTEMS
NETWORK CARD
tgbplaeEr
X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1
CTCC TB CTA
RISK OF 
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
0.333V CT INPUTS
SYSTEM VOLTAGE INPUTS
120 – 600 VOLTS AC
* READ ALL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS *FUNCTIONAL 
EARTH
CONTACT
1
MA OUT
CONTACT
2
24 VOLT
POWER
CR2032
BATTERY
APPLY 24VAC POWER
BEFORE MOVING JUMPER
FROM OFF TO ON
BATTERY 
JUMPER
OFF  ON
NETWORK CARD 
CABLE RIBBON
FRONT PANEL
CTC
0.333V
CTB
0.333V
CTA
0.333V
24 VAC 
POWER 
SUPPLY
NL 1L 2L 3
ALARM 
OR
PULSE
OUTPUT
ALARM
OR
PULSE
OUTPUT
4 – 20 MA
24 VDC 
POWER 
SUPPLY
+
-
-
+
L3
N
Building Automa€on Device
L
O
A
D
H1
H1
H1
Route Thro ugh 
HietEnrhcSd
Route Thro ugh 
Center Conduit
L2
L1
Lug on conduit 
bonding plate
Earth Safety 
Ground
Earth Ground for 
CT/Comm Cable 
Shields
Route Thro ugh 
Right Conduit
(For 3-Wire  Delta neutra l not present)
NETWORK CARD
(Op€onal)
X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1
CTCC TB CTA
RISK OF 
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
0.333V CT INPUTS
SYSTEM VOLTAGE INPUTS
120 – 600 VOLTS AC
* READ ALL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS *FUNCTIONAL 
EARTH
CONTACT
1
MA OUT
CONTACT
2
24 VOLT
POWER
CR2032
BATTERY
APPLY 24VAC POWER
BEFORE MOVING JUMPER
FROM OFF TO ON
BATTERY 
JUMPER
OFF  ON
NETWORK CARD 
CABLE RIBBON
FRONT PANEL
NL 1L 2L 3
CTCC TB CTA
5 AMP CT INPUTS
PUYMGRM–6URY*DYG4W
5 AMP Adapter Board
RA
RB
RA
X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1
A
B
C
CTC
5 AMP
CTB
5 AMP
CTA
5 AMP
L1
L2
L3
N
L
O
A
D
4 – 20 MA
24 VDC 
POWER 
SUPPLY
+
-
-
+
??????????
24 VAC 
POWER 
SUPPLY
H1
H1
H1
Lug on conduit 
bonding plate
Earth Safety 
Ground
Route Through 
Right Conduit
Route Thro ugh 
Center Conduit
Route Through 
1H–BGARSCK 
(For 3-Wire  Delta neutra l not present)
ALARM
OR
PULSE
OUTPUT
ALARM
OR
PULSE
OUTPUT
RISK OF 
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
*See addi onal CT INPUT 
  diagrams below.
March 2014

973. NETW 915POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NETWORK CARD
 TOFELH0.
X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1
CTCC TB CTA
RISK OF 
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
0.333V CT INPUTS
SYSTEM VOLTAGE INPUTS
120 – 600 VOLTS AC
* READ ALL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS *FUNCTIONAL 
EARTH
CONTACT
1
MA OUT
CONTACT
2
24 VOLT
POWER
CR2032
BATTERY
APPLY 24VAC POWER
BEFORE MOVING JUMPER
FROM OFF TO ON
BATTERY 
JUMPER
OFF  ON
NETWORK CARD 
CABLE RIBBON
FRONT PANEL
CTC
0.333V
CTB
0.333V
CTA
0.333V
24 VAC 
POWER 
SUPPLY
NL 1L 2L 3
ALARM 
OR
PULSE
OUTPUT
ALARM
OR
PULSE
OUTPUT
4 – 20 MA
24 VDC 
POWER 
SUPPLY
+
-
-
+
L3
N
Building Automa€on Device
L
O
A
D
H1
H1
H1
Route Thro ugh 
NDa(l )CA
Route Thro ugh 
Center Conduit
L2
L1
Lug on conduit 
bonding plate
Earth Safety 
Ground
Earth Ground for 
CT/Comm Cable 
Shields
Route Thro ugh 
Right Conduit
(For 3-Wire  Delta neutra l not present)
NETWORK CARD
(Op€onal)
X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1
CTCC TB CTA
RISK OF 
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
0.333V CT INPUTS
SYSTEM VOLTAGE INPUTS
120 – 600 VOLTS AC
* READ ALL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS *FUNCTIONAL 
EARTH
CONTACT
1
MA OUT
CONTACT
2
24 VOLT
POWER
CR2032
BATTERY
APPLY 24VAC POWER
BEFORE MOVING JUMPER
FROM OFF TO ON
BATTERY 
JUMPER
OFF  ON
NETWORK CARD 
CABLE RIBBON
FRONT PANEL
NL 1L 2L 3
CTCC TB CTA
5 AMP CT INPUTS
PUYMGRM–6URY*DYG4W
5 AMP Adapter Board
RA
RB
RA
X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1
A
B
C
CTC
5 AMP
CTB
5 AMP
CTA
5 AMP
L1
L2
L3
N
L
O
A
D
4 – 20 MA
24 VDC 
POWER 
SUPPLY
+
-
-
+
??????????
24 VAC 
POWER 
SUPPLY
H1
H1
H1
Lug on conduit 
bonding plate
Earth Safety 
Ground
Route Through 
Right Conduit
Route Thro ugh 
Center Conduit
Route Through 
1H–BGARSCK 
(For 3-Wire  Delta neutra l not present)
ALARM
OR
PULSE
OUTPUT
ALARM
OR
PULSE
OUTPUT
RISK OF 
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
*See addi onal CT INPUT 
  diagrams below.
WIRING - 5 AMP CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, 3-PHASE POWER SYSTEMS
1V CT INPUTS 2V CT INPUTS
INTELLIGENT POWER MONITOR
ENGENIUS
TM
- PATENT PENDING
RISK OF
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
INSTALL
JUMPERS
FOR 2V CTS
2V/1V CT INPUTS
CTCC TB CTA
X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1
ENG-2V/1 V-ADPTR
HDR4
+
*Use 2v CT
RISK OF
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
INSTALL
JUMPERS FOR 1V CTS
2V/1V CT INPUTS
CTCC TB CTA
X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1
ENG-2V/1 V-ADPTR
HDR4
+
*Use 1v CT
RISK OF
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
INSTALL
JUMPERS
FOR 2V CTS
2V/1V CT INPUTS
CTCC TB CTA
X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1
ENG-2V/1 V-ADPTR
HDR4
+
*Use 2v CT
RISK OF
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
INSTALL
JUMPERS FOR 1V CTS
2V/1V CT INPUTS
CTCC TB CTA
X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1
ENG-2V/1 V-ADPTR
HDR4
+
*Use 1v CT
March 2014

974. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 916fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
INTELLIGENT POWER MONITOR
ENGENIUS
TM
- PATENT PENDING
RIBBON CABLE
LONWORKS
FT-10 NWK
TO ENGENIUS MAIN BOARD
PT-NTL-10
LonWorks Network
GND
B (-)
A(+)
TX
RX
RS-485 NETWORK
MODULE
STATUS
RIBBON CABLE
TO ENGENIUS MAIN BOARD
ENG-485
IN1 IN2 GND
ENG-485
RS-485 Network
(BACnet, Modbus, N2)
COMMUNICATION CARDS
Parameters Available Via Display/Network*
Total KW*
Total Sliding Window KW (period programmable 5-60 minutes)
Total KVAR
Total KVA*
Phase A KW*
Phase B KW*
Phase C KW*
Phase A KVAR*
Phase B KVAR*
Phase C KVAR*
Phase A KVA
Phase B KVA
Phase C KVA
Total PF*
Phase A PF*
Phase B PF*
Phase C PF*
Average L-N Volts
Average L-L Volts
L1-L2 Volts**
L2-L3 Volts**
L3-L1 Volts**
L1-N Volts**
L2-N Volts**
L3-N Volts**
Average Amps
Phase A Amps*
Phase B Amps*
Phase C Amps*
Total Positive KWH*
Total Negative KWH
Total Absolute KWH (Sum of positive and negative )
Total Net KWH (Positive minus negative)
Phase A Positive KWH
Phase B Positive KWH
Phase C Positive KWH
Phase A Negative KWH
Phase B Negative KWH
Phase C Negative KWH Total Positive KVARH Total Negative KVARH Total Absolute KVARH Total Net KVARH
Phase A Positive KVARH
Phase B Positive KVARH
Phase C Positive KVARH
Phase A Negative KVARH
Phase B Negative KVARH
Phase C Negative KVARH Timestamp (When energy counters were last cleared) Peak Sliding Window KW (since last cleared)* Timestamp (when Peak Sliding Window occured) Timestamp (when Peak Sliding Window KW was last cleared)
*ONLY Values with asterisk are available for LONWORKS
** For Delta System For WYE System
Phase A = L1-L2 Phase A = L1-N
Phase B = L2-L3 Phase B = L2-N
Phase C = L3-L1 Phase C = L3-N
March 2014

975. fifl 917POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
INTELLIGENT POWER MONITOR
ENGENIUS
TM
- PATENT PENDING
ORDERING INFORMATION
ENGEnGenius Intelligent Power Monitor
9500
9000.333V input
D
B
L
M
N
Example: ENG-9000-B-D = EnGenius .333V input with BACnet and display.
ENG-9000-B-D-T = Additional feature of trend data logging.

5 Amp input
Display
BACnet Communication Board
Modbus Communication Board
N2 Communication Board
LonWorks Communication Board
Note: CT’s are ordered separately and not included in the above part numbers.

TTrend Data Logging
March 2014
ACCESSORIES PAGE
ENG-2V/1V-ADPTR 2V or 1V input adapter board for ENG-9000 919
ENG-485 BACnet, Modbus, N2 Communication Board 918
ENG-5AMPBRD 5 Amp Input adapter board for ENG-9000 919
ENG-CABLE Data Cable for EnGenius™ 919
ENG-SOFTWARE Desktop Software for EnGenius™ 919
PT-NTL-10 LonWorks communications module 918
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
500T, 501T Split-Core Current Transformer, 5A Secondary 935
600T, 601T Split-Core Current Transformer, 5A Secondary 935
RCT-1800 Series Rogowski Coil Flexible Current Sensor, 0.333V Secondary 933
SCT Series Split-Core Current Transformer, 0.333V Secondary 932
UCT Series Solid-Core Current Transformer, 0.333V Secondary 938

976. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 918fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ENG-485
Mounting Holes
IN1IN2
1
2
GND
RX
TX
GND
RS-485 Communications
Terminals
RS-485 Reference Conductor (if used)
RS-485 Twisted Pair ‘A’ Conductor
RS-485 twisted pair is polarity sensitive.
If unable to communicate, try reversing the ‘A’ and ‘B’ conductors.
Optional
External Status or
Pulse Count contacts
Ribbon Cable
Plugs Into EnGenius Main Board
(Disconnect 24 VA C power before
plugging or unplugging)
Module Status LED
Receive Data,
Transmit Data
Statuts LEDs
RS-485 Twisted Pair ‘B’ Conductor
A(+)
B(–)
ORDERING INFORMATION
COMMUNICATION MODULES FOR ENGENIUS™
ENG-485, PT-NTL-10
Communication
PT-NTL-10 LonWorks FTT-10 transceiver
ENG-485 BACNet, Modbus, N2
Connections Pluggable screw terminals
Operating Temperature
PT-NTL-10 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)

ENG-485
14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing
Dimensions
PT-NTL-10 4.5"H x 2.6"W x 1.7"D
(11.4 x 6.6 x 4.3 cm)
ENG-485 4.5"H x 2.6"W x 0.6"D
(11.4 x 6.6 x 1.5cm)
Weight
PT-NTL-10 0.7 lb (0.32kg)
ENG-485 0.1 lb (0.05 kg)
Approvals UL listed, File #E161500

PT-NTL-10
Certified to LonMark Interoperability
Guidelines v 3.1
Warranty 18 months
DESCRIPTION
The ENG-485 and PT-NTL-10 are communication modules for EnGenius™ Intelligent Power Monitor
. They read data from the
EnGenius™ main processor, format the data, and transmit it to a network
. They allow all of the power system parameters measured
by the EnGenius™ to be monitored over a single pair of wires.
The
ENG-485 contains BACNET, Modbus and N2 communication
protocols
. The chosen communication protocol is selected either
through the front panel display/keypad or the desktop software.
The ENG-485 f
eatures 2 contact-closure inputs for monitoing
external equipment. Each input can be configured to read contact state (On/Off) or as a Pulse Counter to count pulses from flow meters or other power meters. In the Pulse Counter mode, a Clear command is available to reset the pulse count when desired.
The PT-NTL-10 is a a dedicated Lonworks communication module
.
This module does not ha
ve the 2 contact-closure inputs
.
FEATURES
• ENG-485 contains BACnet, Modbus & N2 communication
protocols on one board. The chosen one is selected either
through the the front panel display/keypad or through the
optional Desktop Software.
•
2 Contact-closure inputs
• PT-NTL-10 is a dedicated Lonworks module. This protocol has
a subset of values. See data sheet for details.
PT-NTL-10
Ribbon
Cable
Status
LED
To LonWorks
FT-10 Network
Service Button
Not Polarity
Sensitive
Service LED
FTT-10
CONTROL
MODULE
FT-10 NWK
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
ENG-485
ENG-485 PT-NTL-10
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ENG-485 BACnet, Modbus, N2 Communication Board
PT-NTL-10 LonWorks communications module
March 2014

977. fifl 919POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
INTELLIGENT POWER MONITOR ACCESSORIES
ENGENIUS™ ACCESSORIES
Dimensions
Cable 36" (0.9m) length
Flash Drive 2.25" x 0.625" (5.72 x 1.59 cm)
5AMP and 2V/1V Adapter boards
2" x 3.5" (5.08 x 8.89cm)
Weight
Cable 0.55 lb (0.25 kg)
Flash Drive 0.01 lb (0.004 kg)
5AMP and 2V/1V Adapter boards
0.35 lb (0.16 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
EnGenius™ Accessories help you get the most out of the EnGenius power monitor
. With these and future available
accessories, the EnGenius can be kept up to date. Available
accessories are the software, data cable, 5 Amp CT input adapter board and a safe current transformer 2V/1V input adapter board
. The 2V/1V adapter board is configurable to
the application you need.
FEATURES
• ENG-CABLE - LED lights indicate when the Desktop Software is being transmitted to the EnGenius™ intellig
ent power monitor and when data is being
downloaded into the computer.
• ENG-SOFTWARE - The Desktop Software is
conveniently loaded on this flash drive. This software will enable you to easily and conveniently interact with EnGenius™ intelligent power monitor via the data cable. You can quickly program one power monitor, save to your desktop/laptop and then program several more power monitors in a timely fashion. You will also be able to download the information from the EnGenius™ and analyze the data.
•
ENG-2V/1V-ADPTR - Use this adapter board to retrofit
an EnGenius™ to accept safe CTs with either 2V or 1V secondary output. The same board can be used for either application. Just change the DIP switches to the configuration you need.
•
ENG-5AMPBD - Use this adapter board to retrofit an EnGenius™ to accept current transformers with 5A secondary output.
SPECIFICATIONS
ENG-SOFTWARE
ENG-CABLE
ENG-2V/1V-ADPTR
ENG-5AMPBRD
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ENG-CABLE Data Cable for EnGenius™
ENG-SOFTW
ARE
Desktop Software for EnGenius™
ENG-5AMPBRD 5 Amp Input adapter board for ENG-9000
ENG-2V/1V-ADPTR 2V or 1V input adapter board for ENG-9000
RELATED PRODUCTS
AH04 Fuse pack, 3 Phase
March 2014

978. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 920fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
POWER QUALITY METERS
PQUBE SERIES
Supply Voltage 24 VAC 60/60 Hz 5 VA, 24-48 VDC
Monitored Voltage 100 to 690V
System Type Three-phase (Wye or Delta), single-
phase
Frequency Range 40 to 70 Hz and 320 to 560 Hz
Measurement Channels L-N, L-L, N-E
Monitored Current Up to 6000 A with input module
Relay Output 30 VAC/VDC, 300 mA max
Communication Connection
Mini-B USB socket
Data Storage 4 GB Scan Disk card (included)
Operating Temperature -4° to 122°F (-20° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity up to 95% RH
Mounting DIN rail
Weight 0.73 lbs (0.331 kg)
Approvals CE, RoHS, UL file#E220936
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The PQube is a high-precision power quality and energy
monitor. This will record the details of every power
disturbance on a removable SD card. The PQube AC power
monitor can handle up to 690V, 50/60/400Hz three-phase systems
. It will recored voltage dips, swells and interruptions
and will give you waveforms and RMS graphs. No software is
required, the programming is embedded. The PQube system
hsa been designed to be plug and play so modules are easily added
. DIN rail mount or optional panel mount bracket.
FEATURES
• Three-phase and single phase monitoring up to 690V,
50/60/400Hz
• Auto power configuration
• Voltge dips, swells, and interruptions - waveforms and
RMS graphs - recorded on removable SD card
• Email alerts and Excel reports available with optional
ethernet module
• 1-microsecond high-frequencey events
• Power from 24VAC, 24VDC~48VDC
• Optional power supply modules for 100V~240V supply
• All modules are DIN rail mount
SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PQube-02-0000 PQube power quality meter-4 AC voltage inputs, 2 analog inputs, 1 digital input, 1 relay output
PQube-02-0100 PQube power quality meter-4 AC voltage inputs, 2 analog inputs, 1 digital input, 4 relay outputs
PS1-100~240-00 Power supply PQube from 100V~240V, 50/60 Hz
ENCL-EXT1074-01 Enclosure for PQube Assembly, 10 x 7.2 x 4.3", IP65 rated
PQUBE BATTERY Replacement battery, lithium polymer; 0.6 AMP-hour
PQube
PS1
1.76” (44.8)
1.13”
(28.6)
3.54”
(89.9)
3.01”
(76.5)in.
(mm) 2.82”
(71.7)
N
15
L3
13
L2
11
L1
9
Power In
24VAC
24-48VDC
21 22 23 24
29 30 31 32
Relay Out
Earth
Digital In
Analog In
Joystick
Selector
Button
23 & 31
22 & 30
- +
CAUTION: MUST HAVE EARTH GROUND
TO WORK PROPERLY
March 2014

979. fifl 921POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The XCT current transformer modules connects your existing CT's
to your PQube. The external CT input ratio range is 1:1 to 1000:1. The
XCT4 Series connect directly to current transformer secondary wires and has 4 channels of current monitoring
. The XCT5 Series connects
directly to voltage output current transformer wires and has 5 channels of current monitoring
. The CT4 is a current sensing module that has
20Amp input. Just feed the wires through the opening.
FEATURES
• Accuracy ±1% (plus uncertainty of external CT's)
• Adds current waveforms to PQube events
• Enables power consumption and energy monitoring
• Crest factor typically 3.5 times rated input
XCT4
MODEL DESCRIPTION
XCT4-1A-00 Interface module for CT's with 1 Amp output
XCT4-5A-00 Interface module for CT's with 5 Amp output
XCT5-0.333V
-00
Interface module for CT's with 0.333V output
XCT5-1V
-00
Interface module for CT's with 1V output
XCT5-5V
-00
Interface module for CT's with 5V output
XCT5-10V
-00
Interface module for CT's with 10V output
CT4-20A-00 Current sensing module 20Amp input
XCT5
CURRENT TRANSFORMER INTERFACE MODULES
PQUBE XCT, CT, ETHERNET MODULES
DESCRIPTION
The ETH1 Ethernet module automatically sends you an email whenever a disturbance occurs, complete with picture and Excel compatible attachments
. The CTE1 Modules combine the XCT5
current sensing and the ETH1 ethernet into a single package.
FEATURES
• Built in web server
• See status of the PQube and look at event and trend
recordings
• Update firmware and reset remotely
• Free email account with each PQube
• Synchronize to UTC time standard
• DHCP/Fixed IP, POP, SMTP, FTP, Modbus/TCP
CTE1
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ETH1-10T
-00
Ethernet module with email account
CTE110T0.333V00 Combined ethernet & CT module for 0.333V CT's
CTE1-10T
-1V-00
Combined ethernet & CT module for 1V CT's
CTE1-10T
-5V-00
Combined ethernet & CT module for 5V CT's
CTE1-10T-10V-00 Combined ethernet & CT module for 10V CT's
ETH1
SPECIFICATIONS
• 2.8"W x 3.5"H x 3.2"L (7.1 x 8.9 x 8.1 cm)
• 0.5 lbs (0.22 kg)
SPECIFICATIONS
• 2.8"W x 3.5"H x 3.2"L (7.1 x 8.9 x 8.1 cm)
• 0.5 lbs (0.22 kg)
March 2014

980. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 922fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
HIGH ACCURACY SPLIT CORE CURRENT SENSORS
PQUBE SCN SERIES
DESCRIPTION
These SCN Series of split core current sensors easily clamp
around existing conductors. They range from 1A - 600A
primary input/ 333mV output. They are for use with the XCT5
and CTE1 Series of current transformer interface modules.
FEATURES
• Accurac •
Phase angle: 0.2 °
• Crest factor 3.5 times nominal CT rating
• 8ft. leads, 18 AWG twisted pair
• 1 year warranty
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SCN2-1A:333mV
-0.4
0.2% accuracy;1A:333mV; 0.4"X0.4"
SCN2-5A:333mV-0.4 0.2% accuracy;5A:333mV; 0.4"X0.4"
SCN3-20A:333mV-0.7 0.2% accuracy;20A:333mV; 0.7"X0.7"
SCN3-50A:333mV-0.7 0.2% accuracy;50A:333mV; 0.7"X0.7"
SCN3-100A:333mV-0.7 0.2% accuracy;100A:333mV; 0.7"X0.7"
SCN3-150A:333mV-0.7 0.2% accuracy;150A:333mV; 0.7"X0.7"
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SCN4-200A:333mV
-1.25
0.2% accuracy;200A:333mV; 1.25"X1.25"
SCN4-300A:333mV-1.25 0.2% accuracy;300A:333mV; 1.25"X1.25"
SCN4-400A:333mV-1.25 0.2% accuracy;400A:333mV; 1.25"X1.25"
SCN4-500A:333mV-1.25 0.2% accuracy;500A:333mV; 1.25"X1.25"
SCN4-600A:333mV-1.25 0.2% accuracy;600A:333mV; 1.25"X1.25"
SCN Snaptop
PSL Part Number Dimensions - mm (inches)
A B C D E
SCN2-1A:333mV-0.4
61
(2.40")
42
(1.65")
29
(1.12")
10
(0.4")
10
(0.4")
SCN2-5A:333mV-0.4
61
(2.40")
42
(1.65")
29
(1.12")
10
(0.4")
10
(0.4")
SCN3-20A:333mV-0.7
78
(3.08")
60
(2.37")
29
(1.12")
18
(0.7")
18
(0.7")
SCN3-50A:333mV-0.7
78
(3.08")
60
(2.37")
29
(1.12")
18
(0.7")
18
(0.7")
SCN3-100A:333mV-0.7
78
(3.08")
60
(2.37")
29
(1.12")
18
(0.7")
18
(0.7")
SCN3-150A:333mV-0.7
78
(3.08")
60
(2.37")
29
(1.12")
18
(0.7")
18
(0.7")
SCN4-200A:333mV-1.25
83
(3.27")
81
(3.17")
35
(1.39")
32
(1.25")
32
(1.25")
SCN4-300A:333mV-1.25
83
(3.27")
81
(3.17")
35
(1.39")
32
(1.25")
32
(1.25")
SCN4-400A:333mV-1.25
83
(3.27")
81
(3.17")
35
(1.39")
32
(1.25")
32
(1.25")
SCN4-500A:333mV-1.25
83
(3.27")
81
(3.17")
35
(1.39")
32
(1.25")
32
(1.25")
SCN4-600A:333mV-1.25
83
(3.27")
81
(3.17")
35
(1.39")
32
(1.25")
32
(1.25")
A
D
B
C
E
DIMENSIONS
March 2014

981. fifl 923POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
WIRING
N
L
3
L
2
L
1
65
43
21 13 11 9
L3
L2
L1
PE
32
13 11 9
L3
L2
L1
PE
32
13 11 9
L3
L2
L1
PE
32
PQUBE MONITORS COMPLETE 
VOLTAGE QUALITY WITH CT4 CURRENT MODULE
WITH XCT5/CTE1 CURRENT MODULE, 3 CURRENT 
TRANSFORMERS − PQUBE MEASURES CURRENT
ON ALL PHASES
13 11 9
PE
32
43
21
L3
L2
L1
65
WITH XCT4 CURRENT MODULE, 3 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
− PQUBE MEASURES CURRENT ON ALL PHASES
POWER QUALITY METERS
PQUBE WIRING DIAGRAM
March 2014

982. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 924fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY PROBE
PQUBE TH SERIES, DC VOLTAGE MONITORS, DC SENSORS
DESCRIPTION
The TH1 probe monitors ambient temperature and humidity.
The PQube can no
w record temperature and humidity
events with the addition of the probe
. Every PQube accepts
2 electrically isolated probes. Use one for local conditions
and the other on the optional 10 meter extension cable for
monitoring remote conditions.
FEATURES
• T •
Max temp -4 to 176°F (-20 to 80°C)
• Humidity accuracy ±4.5% RH (20-80% RH) maximum
±7.5% 10-100% RH
• 1.42 x 0.6" (3.61 x 1.53cm)
• 0.4 lb (0.018 kg)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TH1-80C-00 TH1 temperature/humidity probe
THC-2M-00 Extension cable for TH180C-00; 2 meter length (6ft. 6.74")
DESCRIPTION
Compact DC Voltage Attenuators connect to PQube's
analog channels. This can be used to monitor high voltage
DC power. ATT1 models measure 1 differential voltge or 2
voltages relative to earth. ATT2 model measured DC voltage
and DC current (with Hall effect sensors).
FEATURES
• ± 600VDC or 1200VDC (CAT IV 300VAC)
• Termnals are standard shrouded safety banana jacks
• Shielded cables
• ATT1 = 4 x 2 x 1.5" (10.2 x 5.1 x 3.8cm)
• 1.08 lb (0.49 kg)
• ATT2 = 5 x 2.6 x 1.2" (12.7 x 6.6 x 3.0cm)
• 3.40 lb (1.54 kg)
ATT1
ORDERING INFORMATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A
TT1-0600V-00
Voltage module ±600VDC (CAT lV 300VAC)
ATT1-1200V-00 Voltage module ±1200VDC (CAT lV 300VAC)
ATT2-0600V-00 Voltage/current module ±600VDC (CAT lV 300VAC)
ATT2-1200V-00 Voltage/current module ±1200VDC (CAT lV 300VAC)
ATT2
DESCRIPTION
DC Hall Effect Sensors are for use with the ATT2 Voltage / Current Modules. They measure AC or DC current
. 50A to
600A pr
imary input to ±4V output
. They are powered fromt he
DC output of the ATT2 module.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CSDC-RCL0050:4V DC current sensor,solid core, 50A:4V 0.81X0.41"
CSDC-RCL0100:4V DC current sensor,solid core, 100A:4V 0.81X0.41"
CSDC-RCL0200:4V DC current sensor,solid core, 200A:4V 0.81X0.41"
CSDC-RCL0400:4V DC current sensor,solid core, 400A:4V 0.81X0.41"
CSDC-RCL0600:4V DC current sensor,solid core, 600A:4V 0.81X0.41"
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SCSDC-O-0050:4V DC current sensor, split-core, 50A:4V 0.83" dia.
SCSDC-O-0100:4V DC current sensor, split-core, 100A:4V 0.83" dia.
SCSDC-O-0200:4V DC current sensor, split-core, 200A:4V 0.83" dia.
SCSDC-O-0400:4V DC current sensor, split-core, 400A:4V 0.83" dia.
SCSDC-O-0600:4V DC current sensor, split-core, 600A:4V 0.83" dia.
FEATURES
• Measures AC or DC current
TH Series
CSDC-RCL0050:4VSCSDC-O-0050:4V
March 2014

983. fifl 925POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Drawn to Scale
6.1 (15.5)
3.35
(8.5)
in
(cm)
1.50 (3.8) High
Ø 0.386 (1.0)
Ø0.200 (0.5)
5.375 (13.66)
3.35 (8.5 )
WATTNODE AC POWER METER
WNC SERIES
Supply Voltage 120 to 600VAC
CT Input 0.333V nominal, 3V maximum
Operating Temperature -22°F to 131°F (-30°C to 55°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 90% RH up to 104°F (40°C)
Dimensions

6.1" x 3.35" x 1.5"
(15.5 x 8.5 x 3.8 cm)
Weight 11oz.
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 5 Years
Communication Protocol
BACnet MS/TP (RS-485)
Modbus RTU
LonWorks Network Variables (SNVTs)
Meets ARRA or BAA
Yes
Signal LEDs Diagnostic LEDs Provide per-phase
indication of power (green flashing) and negative power (red flashing) on BACnet, Modbus and Pulse models only
Approvals
CE, UL & cUL File #312220 FCC
Class B
, EN 55022 Class B
Additional Specifications

Assembled in the USA
DESCRIPTION
WNC Series of AC Power measurement meters are available in pulse output or will support several communication protocol outputs
. True power, kWh reactive power, VARs,
power factor, and indivitdual phase measurements.
Diagnostic LEDs pro
vide a per-phase indication of power
(green flashing) and negative power (red flashing) to help troubleshoot connection problems such as swapped CT's or excessive live voltage
. The meters use the safe Ct's
producing 0.333 VAC at rated current. They have a small
form factor for easy installation inside most electrical panels with pluggable screw terminals for easy wiring
. Power
Related Measurements - 50+ for BACnet and Modbus; 27+ for LonWorks
.
FEATURES
• B •
1 to 3 Phase 120VAC to 600VAC
• 0.5% nominal accuracy (see manual for details)
• Euroblock style pluggable screw terminal blocks
• Line powered
• Uses safe current transformers; 0.333V output
• Bidirectional
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
WNC Series
WIRING
Ground
WHITE
BLACK
ØB  CT
ØC  CT
ØA  CT
ØB
ØC
N
ØA
Common
B+, D1, RxD+/TxD+
EIA-485
PC or BACnet Host
A−, D0, RxD−/TxD−
Status
Status
Status
X
C
B+
A-
PT/SM
Com
WNC-
WNC-
WATTNODE
®
BAC NET
-BN
-BN
Phase A
Neutral
Phase B
WHITE
BLACK
120 VAC
240 VAC
120 VAC
LINE
LOAD
Shorting
Jumper
Source
Faces
Current
Transformers
3Y-208
3D-240
Ground
WHITE
BLACK
ØB  CT
ØC  CT
ØA  CT
ØB
ØC
N
ØA
Common
B+, D1, RxD+/TxD+
EIA-485
PC or BACnet Host
A−, D0, RxD−/TxD−
Status
Status
Status
X
C
B+
A-
PT/SM
Com
WNC-
WATTNODE
®
BAC NET
-BN
Phase A
Phase B
WHITE
BLACK
208-240 VAC
LINE
LOAD
Shorting
Jumper
Source
Faces
Current
Transformers
3D-240
Single Phase Three-Wire, Mid-Point Neutral Wire
Single Phase Two-Wire without Neutral
March 2014

984. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 926fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
WATTNODE AC POWER METER
WNC SERIES
WIRING
Ground
WHITE
BLACK
ØB  CT
ØC  CT
ØA  CT
ØB
ØC
N
ØA
Common
B+, D1, RxD+/TxD+
EIA-485
PC or BACnet Host
A−, D0, RxD−/TxD−
Status
Status
Status
X
C
B+
A-
PT/SM
Com
WNC-
WNC-
WATTNODE
®
BAC NET
-BN
-BN
Neutral
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
LOAD
WHITE
BLACK
WHITE
BLACK
LINE
Source
Faces
Current
Transformers
3Y-xxx
3D-xxx
Ground
WHITE
BLACK
ØB  CT
ØC  CT
ØA  CT
ØB
ØC
N
ØA
Common
B+, D1, RxD+/TxD+
EIA-485
PC or BACnet Host
A−, D0, RxD−/TxD−
Status
Status
Status
X
C
B+
A-
PT/SM
Com
WNC-
WATTNODE
®
BAC NET
-BN
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
WHITE
BLACK
WHITE
BLACK
LINE
LOAD
Source
Faces
Current
Transformers
3D-xxx
Three Phase Four-Wire Wye Three Phase Three-Wire Delta without Neutral
March 2014
MODEL DESCRIPTION
WNC-3Y-208-BN 3 Phase 4 Wire 120V/208V BACnet
WNC-3Y-400-BN 3 Phase 4 Wire 230V/400V BACnet
WNC-3Y-480-BN 3 Phase 4Wire 277V/480V BACnet
WNC-3Y-600-BN 3 Phase 4 Wire 347V/600V BACnet
WNC-3D-240-BN 3 Phase 3 Wire 120V/208V BACnet
WNC-3D-400-BN 3 Phase 3 Wire 230V/400V BACnet
WNC-3D-480-BN 3 Phase 3Wire 277V/480V BACnet
WNC-3D-240-MB 3 Phase 3 Wire 120V/208V Modbus
WNC-3D-400-MB 3 Phase 3 Wire 230V/400V Modbus
WNC-3D-480-MB 3 Phase 3Wire 277V/480V Modbus
WNC-3Y-400-MB 3 Phase 4 Wire 230V/400V Modbus
WNC-3Y-208-MB 3 Phase 4 Wire 120V/208V Modbus
WNC-3Y-480-MB 3 Phase 4Wire 277V/480V Modbus
WNC-3Y-600-MB 3 Phase 4 Wire 347V/600V Modbus
WNC-3D-240-P 3 Phase 3 Wire 120V/208V Pulse
WNC-3D-400-P 3 Phase 3 Wire 230V/400V Pulse
WNC-3D-480-P 3 Phase 3Wire 277V/480V Pulse
WNC-3Y-208-P 3 Phase 4 Wire 120V/208V Pulse
WNC-3Y-400-P 3 Phase 4 Wire 230V/400V Pulse
WNC-3Y-480-P 3 Phase 4Wire 277V/480V Pulse
WNC-3Y-600-P 3 Phase 4 Wire 347V/600V Modbus
WNC-3Y-208-FT10 3 Phase 4 Wire 120V/208V LonWorks
WNC-3Y-400-FT10 3 Phase 4 Wire 230V/400V LonWorks
WNC-3Y-480-FT10 3 Phase 4Wire 277V/480V LonWorks
WNC-3Y-600-FT10 3 Phase 4 Wire 347V/600V LonWorks
WNC-3D-240-FT10 3 Phase 3 Wire 120V/208V LonWorks
WNC-3D-400-FT10 3 Phase 3 Wire 230V/400V LonWorks
WNC-3D-480-FT10 3 Phase 3Wire 277V/480V LonWorks

985. fifl 927POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
E50 SERIES POWER METER
E50 SERIES
Supply Voltage
UL 90 VAC (L-N) to 600 VAC (L-L),
50/60Hz
CE 90 VAC (L-N) to 300 VAC (L-L),
50/60Hz, UL 90 VAC (L-N) to
600 VAC (L-L), 50/60Hz
Monitored Voltage Line to Line: 90 to 600 VAC
Line to Line with
Potential Transformer 601 to 32000 VAC
Monitored Current
5 to 32,000 Amps
Current Transformer Input

0 to 0.333V to 0 to 1 V
Input Signal 2 (E50H5 only) Pulse Solid-State
or mechanical contacts (current less than 1 mA) Minim
um Pulse Width
20 msec
Outputs E50B1 Reactive energy pulse 30 VAC/DC,
E50C1 RS-485 2-wire Modbus RTU Basic
Data Set

E50C2/E51C2 RS-485 2-wire, Modbus RTU Full
Data Set,
E50C3/E51C3 RS-485 2-wire Modbus RTU Full
Data Set, data logging,
E50H3 RS-485 2-wire BACnet MS/TP Full
Data Set, data logging
Accuracy Real power and energy 0.5% (ANSI
C12.20, IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S)
Operating Temperature
Meter: -22° to 158°F (-30° to 70°C)
Display: 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity < 95% RH non-condensing
Mounting DIN Rail or 3-point screw mount
Dimensions 2.3" x 4.2" x 3.6"
(5.9 cm x 10.7 cm 9.1 cm)
Weight 0.62 lb (0.28 kg)
Approvals CE, UL508, File #E339785,
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The E50 Series power meter provides a solution for measuring energy data with a single device
. Inputs include
Control P
ower, CT, and 3-phase voltage
. The E50 supports
multiple output options, including solid state relay contacts, BACnet, Modbus RTU (with or without data logging), and pulse
. The LCD screen on the faceplate allows instant output
viewing. The meter is housed in a plastic enclosure suitable
for installation on T35 DIN rail according to EN50022. The
E50 can be mounted with any orientation over the entire ambient temperature range, either on a DIN rail or in a panel
. The meter is not sensitive to CT orientation to reduce
installation errors.
FEATURES
• Monitor •
Monitors services up to 600 VAC directly and 32,000
VAC with use of a potential transformer
• Accepts .333 VAC or 1V Current Transformer's (sold
separately)
• DIN mounting for easy installation
• ANSI 12.20 0.5% accuracy
• BACnet, Modbus RTU or pulse output
• 90-600 VAC for application versatility
• Bright backlit LCD with easy visibility
• Pulse and phase loss alarms standard
• User-enabled password protection
• Approved for California Solar applications
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
E50
3.6
(9.1)
4.2 (10.7)
0.2
(0.4)
3.9
(9.9)
2.4 (6.1)
++
+
4.3
(10.9)
1.2
(3.1)
0.3 (0.8)
0.4 (1.0)
DIN Mount Option Screw Mount Option
TM
March 2014

986. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 928fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
E50 SERIES POWER METER
E50 SERIES
WIRING
1-Phase Line-to-Neutral 2 - Wire System 1 CT
Customer Supplied (1/2 Amp Fuse)
Control Power Transformer (CPT) Connection
1-Phase Line-to-Line-Wire System 1 CT
Customer Supplied (1/2 Amp Fuse)
1-Phase Direct Voltage Connection 2 CT
Customer Supplied (1/2 Amp Fuse)
3-Phase 4-Wire Wye Direct Voltage Input Connection 3 CT
Customer Supplied (1/2 Amp Fuse)
Direct Connect Control Power (Phase to Phase)
Direct Connect Control Power (DC Control Power)
3-Phase 3-Wire 3 CT no PT
Customer Supplied (1/2 Amp Fuse)
Direct Connect Control Power (Phase to Neutral)
3-Phase 4-Wire Wye Connection 3 CT 3 PT
Customer Supplied (1/2 Amp Fuse)
March 2014

987. fifl 929POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
E50 SERIES POWER METER
E50 SERIES
BACNET/MODBUS DATA OUTPUTS
Basic Data Set (BDS):
Power (kW)
Energy (kWh)
Full Data Set (FDS) inc
ludes BDS plus:
Configurable for CT & PT ratios, system type,
and passwords
Diagnostic alerts
Current: 3-phase average
Volts: 3-phase average
Current: by phase
Volts: by phase Line-Line and Line-Neutral
Power: Real, Reactive, and Apparent 3-phase total
and per phase
Power Factor: 3-phase average and per phase
Frequency
Power Demand: Most Recent and Peak
Demand Configuration: Fixed, Rolling Block, and
External Sync (Modbus only)
Data Logging (includes all FDS outputs, plus):
Real Time Clock: user configurable
10 user configurable log buffers: each buffer holds
5760 16-bit entries
(User configures which 10 data points are stored in
these buffers)
User configurable logging interval(When configured
for a 15 minute interval, each buffer holds 60 days
of data)
Continuous and Single Shot logging modes: user
selectable
Auto write pause: read logs without disabling the
meter's data logging mode
B
ACNET DATA LOGGING (includes all FDS outputs, plus):
Real Time Clock: uses BACnet Time
Synchronization services
3 BACnet log events: each buffer holds 5760 32-bit
entries
(User configures which 3 data points are stored in
these buffers)
User configurable logging interval,
(When configured for a 15 minute interval, each
buffer holds 60 days of data)
Continuous and single shot logging modes: user
selectable
Auto write pause: read logs without disabling the
meter's data logging mode
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES
AE010 Nema 4 enclosure for AE Series meters
AE011 Lock and key for AE010 enclosure
AH02 Fuse pack, 1 Phase
AH03 Fuse pack, 2 Phase
AH04 Fuse pack, 3 Phase
MODEL DESCRIPTION
E51C2 Power meter bi-dIrectional, Modbus, pulse output
E51C3 Power meter bi-dIrectional, Modbus, pulse output , data logging
E50B1 Pulse output only
E50C1 Modbus output, basic data set
E50C2 Modbus output, full data set
E50C3 Modbus output, full data set, data logging
E50H5 Power meter FDS BACnet, 2 pulse inputs,data logging
March 2014

988. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 930fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ADVANCED KWH/DEMAND METER
H-SERIES CLASS 500 SUBMETERS
Voltage Input Up to 600 VAC RMS available,
50/60Hz
Communication
Modbus RTU or TCP/IP
BACnet IP or MS/TP
LonWorks
Input
Voltage Configuration 3-wire (Delta) or 4-wire (WYE)
CT Input
0-2 VDC current sensors included
Available CT's Sensors - Up to 3200 Amp RMS
AC available
Overload Rating
Voltage Overload +25% continuously; +100% for 20
cycles
Current Sensor
Overload 100% for 1 minute without damaging
meter
Accuracy Certified to ANSI C12.20
Range
(4 Wire Wye) 115/208 VAC: 100, 200, 400, 800,
1600, 3200 Amp
(4 Wire Wye) 277/480 VAC: 100, 200, 400, 800,
1600, 3200 Amp
(3 Wire Delta) 220/240 VAC: 100, 200, 400, 800,
1600, 3200 Amp
(3 Wire Delta) 480 VAC: 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600,
3200 Amp
Operating Temperature
NEMA 4 (Outdoor) Housing: -4° to 158°F
(-20° to 70°C)
NEMA 12 (Indoor) Housing: -4° to 122°F
(-20° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Housing Type
Models with R NEMA 4
Models without R NEMA 12
Dimensions-Meter 7.5"H x 7"W x 3.75"D
(19.1 x 17.8 x 8.3 cm)
Dimensions-Current Sensors Interior Window
100A and 200A = 7/8" x 1-1/2"
400A = 1-1/2" x 2-3/4"
800A and 1600A = 3-1/4" x 4-1/2"
3200A = 5-7/16" x 7-7/8"
Approvals UL file#E249361
Battery
Description
Non-rechargeable cell used for
memory retention
Manufacturer Eagle-picher
Mfg Part No. LTC-3PN
Working Voltage 3.5 Vdc
Current Capacity 350 mAHr
Electrolyte Lithium thionyl nitrate
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The H-Series Class 500 Submeters come with enclosure,
display, and does include split core current sensors. Available
outputs include pulse, LonWorks, BACnet, BACnet IP, Modbus RTU, or Modbus TCP
. There are 38 different points
of information available on the communicating models. The
dual protocol output allows operation for both RS-485 and Ethernet communication simultaneously
. In addition, they will
accept up to two pulse inputs from other meters (water, gas, sewer, etc
.) and communicate this information as two more
data points. Accuracy meets or exceeds +/- 0.5%.
FEATURES
• Direct-read 8-digit LCD display of cumulative kWh
• Includes 0-2 volt output split-core current sensors
• Remote mounting of current sensors up to 500 feet
from meter (using 22 Awg wire)
• Current sensor installation diagnostic indicator
• Available in standard JIC Industrial-grade steel
enclosure
• UL Listed; meets or exceeds ANSI C12 national
accuracy standards
• Optional power failure contact for alarming
• Dual protocol output
SPECIFICATIONS
H Series Class 500
March 2014

989. fifl 931POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
ADVANCED KWH/DEMAND METER
H-SERIES CLASS 500 SUBMETERS
MAINS LINE VOLTAGE AND CURRENT SENSOR WIRING DIAGRAMS (CURRENT SENSORS INCLUDED)
H50-
07KIT
H Series Class 500 Submeter
208
480
600
100
200
400
800
1600
3200
208V meter
480V meter
600V meter
100A input
200A input
400A input
800A input
1600A input
3200A input
Indoor use onlyJ
MODEL DESCRIPTION
Outdoor use (NEMA 4x)R
H50- 480 100 J 03KITExample: 480V, 100A meter, BACnet MS/TP
and Ethernet
H50- 480 100 J N Example: 480V, 100A Green Net meter, BACnet MS/TP and Ethernet EZ-7 03KIT
-or-
Lonworks and Ethernet EZ-7
03KIT
05KIT
06KIT
BACnet MS/TP and Ethernet
BACnet IP and RS-485 EZ-7
Modbus RCP/IP and Modbus RT U
Modbus RTU and Ethernet EZ-702KIT
07KIT
N Green Net Option
62-0304—05 6
3-phase, 4-wire installation diagram. 3-phase, 3-wire installation diagram.
B W N
LINE VOLTAGE
ØA
ØC
ECRUOSDAOL
ØB
B W
M32788
ØA
ØA ØB ØC
ØB
B W
CURRENT SENSORS
ØC
N
NOTES: LINE VOLTAGE CONNECTIONS: 14-22 AWG
SENSOR CONNECTIONS: B=BLACK LEAD, W=WHITE LEAD
1/10A, 600 VAC INLINE FUSE PER CONDUCTOR.
LITTLEFUSE PART NUMBER KLDR 100.
NEUTRAL NOT USED IN DELTA SYSTEM. REMOVE NEUTRAL
TERMINAL BLOCK SCREW FOR DELTA SYSTEMS.
B W N
LINE VO LTAGE
ØA
ØC
ECRUOSDAOL
ØB
B W
M32797
ØA
ØA ØB ØC
ØB
B W
CURRENT SENSORS
ØC
NOTES: LINE VOLTAGE CONNECTIONS: 14-22 AWG

SENSOR CONNECTIONS: B=BLACK LEAD, W=WHITE LEAD

1/10A, 600 VAC INLINE FUSE PER CONDUCTOR.
LITTLEFUSE PART NUMBER KLDR 100.
NEUTRAL NOT USED IN DELTA SYSTEM. REMOVE NEUTRAL
TERMINAL BLOCK SCREW FOR DELTA SYSTEMS.
March 2014

990. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 932fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS WITH VOLTAGE OUTPUT
SCT SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The SCT Series of current transformers provides a low-
voltage (0-0.333 V) output proportional to line current and
is used in conjunction with the PowerTrak PT-9300 and the EnGenius to monitor electrical power systems
. Often referred
to as "Safe CTs," the mV output of these current transformers eliminates the need for shorting switches, and their split-core design makes them easy to install
.
FEATURES
• Millivolt output (0-0.333V)
• Split-core design
• Low-cost
• No need for shorting switches
Primary Current 5-3000A (see Ordering Information)
Secondary Voltage 0-0.333 VAC, 0% to 100% rated
current
Frequency 50-400 Hz
Insulation Class 600V
Accuracy ±1%, (10% to 130% rated current)
Lead Wires 8' (2.44m) twisted pair leads,
22 AWG
Weight 1 lb (0.45 kg) maximum
Approvals UL-recognized component,
File #E96927 CE
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 3 years
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
SCT-0400
SCT-0750
SCT-2000
SCT-1250
ORDERING INFORMATION
SCT-0400 SCT-0750 SCT-1250 SCT-2000 SCT-3000
A 1.00 (1.54) 2.00 (5.1) 3.25 (8.25) 4.75 (12.07) 5.75 (14.6) B 1.55 (3.9) 2.10 (5.3) 3.35 (8.51) 5.00 (12.70) 7.50 (19.1) C 1.05 (2.7) 0.61 (1.5) 1.00 (2.54) 1.20 (3.05) 1.20 (3) D 0.40 (1.0) 0.75 (1.9) 1.25 (3.18) 2.00 (5.08) 3.00 (7.6) E 1.09 (2.8) 0.75 (1.9) 1.25 (3.18) 2.00 (5.08) 5.00 (12.7)
MODEL
DIMENSIONS
in
(cm)
{Window
A
C
SOURCE
LOAD
B
E
D
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SCT-0400-000Split-core current transformer, 0.333V no burden resistor
SCT-0400-005Split-core current transformer, 5A:0.333V
SCT-0400-010Split-core current transformer, 10A:0.333V
SCT-0400-015Split-core current transformer, 15A:0.333V
SCT-0400-020Split-core current transformer, 20A:0.333V
SCT-0400-025Split-core current transformer, 25A:0.333V
SCT-0400-030Split-core current transformer, 30A:0.333V
SCT-0400-040Split-core current transformer, 40A:0.333V
SCT-0400-050Split-core current transformer, 50A:0.333V
SCT-0400-060Split-core current transformer, 60A:0.333V
SCT-0400-075Split-core current transformer, 75A:0.333V
SCT-0750-000Split-core current transformer, no burden resistor
SCT-0750-005Split-core current transformer, 5A:0.333V
SCT-0750-010Split-core current transformer, 10A:0.333V
SCT-0750-020Split-core current transformer, 20A:0.333V
SCT-0750-030Split-core current transformer, 30A:0.333V
SCT-0750-050Split-core current transformer, 50A:0.333V
SCT-0750-070Split-core current transformer, 70A:0.333V
SCT-0750-0100Split-core current transformer, 100A:0.333V
SCT-0750-0150Split-core current transformer, 150A:0.333V
SCT-0750-0200Split-core current transformer, 200A:0.333V
SCT-1250-000Split-core current transformer, no burden resistor
SCT-1250-050Split-core current transformer, 50A:0.333V
SCT-1250-100Split-core current transformer, 100A:0.333V
SCT-1250-150Split-core current transformer, 150A:0.333V
SCT-1250-200Split-core current transformer, 200A:0.333V
SCT-1250-250Split-core current transformer, 250A:0.333V
SCT-1250-300Split-core current transformer, 300A:0.333V
SCT-1250-400Split-core current transformer, 400A:0.333V
SCT-1250-600Split-core current transformer, 600A:0.333V
SCT-2000-000Split-core current transformer, no burden resistor
SCT-2000-100Split-core current transformer, 100A:0.333V
SCT-2000-200Split-core current transformer, 200A:0.333V
SCT-2000-400Split-core current transformer, 400A:0.333V
SCT-2000-600Split-core current transformer, 600A:0.333V
SCT-2000-800Split-core current transformer, 800A:0.333V
SCT-2000-1000Split-core current transformer, 1000A:0.333V
SCT-2000-1200Split-core current transformer, 1200A:0.333V
SCT-2000-1500Split-core current transformer, 1500A:0.333V
SCT-3000-000Split core current transformer, no burden resistor
SCT-3000-400Split-core current transformer, 400A:0.333V
SCT-3000-600Split-core current transformer, 600A:0.333V
SCT-3000-800Split-core current transformer, 800A:0.333V
SCT-3000-1000Split-core current transformer, 1000A:0.333V
SCT-3000-1200Split-core current transformer, 1200A:0.333V
SCT-3000-1500Split-core current transformer, 1500A:0.333V
SCT-3000-2000Split-core current transformer, 2000A:0.333V
SCT-3000-3000Split-core current transformer, 3000A:0.333V
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
ENG-9000 Powertrak, 0.333 V input 913
March 2014

991. fifl 933POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
ROPECT AC CURRENT SENSOR
RCT-1800 SERIES
Supply Voltage 12 to 30 VAC/VDC
Primary Current 250A to 5000A
Secondary Voltage

0-0.333 V
Frequency 50 to 10,000 Hz
Insulation Class 600V
Accuracy ±1%
Lead Wires 8' twisted pair leads
Weight 0.4 lb (0.18 kg)
Rope Length 48"
Approvals CE, UL recognized File #E96927
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
Magnelab’ s innovative RopeCT is based on the Rogowski
principle of mutual inductance, which allows accurate
measurement of AC current in a flexible medium
. The
resulting rope-like CT is highly accurate throughout its range and is easy to install by snaking it around parallel conductors or buswork
. The RopeCT is both the ultimate in convenience
and, often, the only solution to tough installation situations.
FEATURES
• A •
Phase angle error < 0.5 degrees measured at 50% rated
current
• 0-0.333 VAC safe output, no shorting switches required
• Eight-foot twisted pair leads
• One percent accuracy from 10 to 300 percent of rating
1(red)
(black)
(white) high
Rope CT
Output
One turn
primary
Power supply
12 to 30 VAC or VDC
+
–
(black) common
2
3
6
5
4
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
RCT-1800-1000
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RCT
-1800-0250
250A, 18-inch Rogowski coil flexible current sensor
RCT
-1800-0500
500A, 18-inch Rogowski coil flexible current sensor
RCT
-1800-1000
1000A, 18-inch Rogowski coil flexible current sensor
RCT
-1800-2000
2000A, 18-inch Rogowski coil flexible current sensor
RCT
-1800-3000
3000A, 18-inch Rogowski coil flexible current sensor
RCT
-1800-4000
4000A, 18-inch Rogowski coil flexible current sensor
RCT-1800-5000 5000A, 18-inch Rogowski coil flexible current sensor
0.999
0.333
0.266
0.199
0.133
0.066
0
02 040
Percentage of Input Current
Output Voltage
60 80 100 300
March 2014

992. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 934fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
VOLTAGE DISCONNECT SWITCH BLOCK, CT SHORTING SWITCHES
U3889, 209PF
Voltage Rating 600V
Current Rating 30 A
Dimensions
Switch 9.5"L x 3.5"W x 2.75"D
(24.1 x 8.9 x 7 cm)
Cover (209PF) 10.1"L x 4.6"W x 3.1"D
(25.7 x 11.7 x 7.9 cm)
Optional enclosure Metal screw cover box, NEMA 1
12"L x 10"W x 4"D
(30.5 x 25.4 x 10.2 cm)
Weight 2.9 lb (1.3 kg)
3.5 lb (1.5 kg) with cover
11 lb (5 kg) with enclosure
Approvals UL-recognized component,
File #E109317
Warranty Lifetime (normal use)
DESCRIPTION
The Model U3889 Voltage Disconnect Switch Block provides
a means for disconnecting power monitoring equipment. It
pro
vides isolation from line voltage and will short out and
disconnect current transformer secondaries, preventing transformer damage that may occur when the circuit is opened under load
. One side of the switch is connected to
the circuits being measured; the other side of the switch is connected to the power monitoring equipment
. The black
plastic cover (209PF) is constructed so that all switches must be in the closed position before the cover can be sealed
.
FEATURES
• Provides voltage disconnect and CT shorting/
disconnect for power instrumentation
• Available in convenient metal screw cover enclosure
• Color-coded switch handles
• UL recognized
To Power Monitoring
Equipment
To Phase
Voltage
To CT
Secondary
Notes:
1 . Red switch pulled up disconnects voltage .
2 . Black switch pair pulled up shorts CT secondary
and disconnects load from CT .
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
209PF
MODEL DESCRIPTION
U3889-E Switch block mounted in a 12" x 10" x 4" metal screw cover box
U3889 Switch block
209PF Switch cover (not for use with U3889-E)
U3889
U3889-E
March 2014

993. fifl 935POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Secondary 0-5A
Frequency 50-400 Hz
Terminations Brass stud terminal with nut, flat
washer, lockwasher
Materials Of Construction
Plastic, UL94V-1
Insulation Class 600V, 10 kV BIL
Continuous Thermal Current
Resistor Factor 1.33 @ 30°C ambient (86°F) 1.0 @
55°C ambient (131°F)
Window Size 4.1" x 7.1" (10.4 x 18.0 cm),
4.1" x 11.7" (10.4 x 29.7 cm)
Weight 8 lb (3.6 kg)
Approvals UL-recognized component,
File #E238872; CSA certified,
File #245941
Warranty 1 year
SPLIT-CORE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
500T, 501T
0.75 (1.91)
Four
Mounting
Holes
0.31" (0.79)
dia
LABEL
0.44
(1.12)
B3
1.63
(4.14)
B2
B1
A3
A2
THIS END REMOVABLE
A1
H1
X1
500T
4.1 (10.4)
6.4 (16.3)
7.3 (18.5)
7.1 (18.0)
10.0 (25.4)
10.9 (27.7)
501T
4.1 (10.4)
6.4 (16.3)
7.3 (18.5)
11.7 (29.7)
14.5 (36.8)
15.4 (39.1)
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
DIMENSIONS
MODEL
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
Model 500T and 501T Split-Core Current Transformers
provide a low-amperage current output proportional to line
current and are for use in energy management control and
metering applications
. These transformers are ideal for
use as inputs to power monitors such as the EnGenius™ and current transducers such as Models 4CTV and 4CMA
.
These transformers are designed to be assembled around an
existing insulated conductor without the need for dismantling the primary bus or cables
. The portion of the transformers
marked "This End Removable" can be disassembled and then reassembled around the conductors that require current monitoring
.
FEATURES
• 5A secondary
• Split-core construction for easy installation
• Brass stud terminals #8-32 with one flat washer,
lockwasher, and regular nut
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCURACY CLASS
WITH UNITY
POWER FA CTOR
MODEL 500T - 4.1" x 7.1" (10.4 x 18.0 cm) Window
CURRENT
RATIO
300:5
400:5
500:5
600:5
750:5
800:5
1000:5
1200:5
1500:5
1600:5
2000:5
2500:5
3000:5
4000:5
B0.1
2.5 VA
–
–
–
4.8
4.8
2.4
2.4
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.3
B0.2
5 VA
–
–
–
–
–
–
4.8
2.4
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.6
0.6
0.6
B0.5
12.5 VA
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
2.4
2.4
2.4
1.2
1.2
0.6
ANSI METER CLASS @ 60Hz ACCURACY CLASS
WITH UNITY
POWER FA CTOR
MODEL 501T - 4.1" x 11.7" (10.4 x 29.7 cm) Window
MODEL
501T-102 501T-122 501T-152 501T-202 501T-252 501T-302 501T-352 501T-402
CURRENT
RATIO
1000:5 1200:5 1500:5 2000:5 2500:5 3000:5 3500:5 4000:5
B0.1
2.5 VA
2.4 1.2 1.2 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.3
B0.2
5 VA
4.8 2.4 1.2 1.2 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
B0.5
12.5 VA
– –
2.4 2.4 1.2 1.2 0.6 0.6
ANSI METER CLASS @ 60Hz
Example: 500T-102 Split-core current transformer
with a current ratio of 1000:5 and a window
size of 4.1" x 7.1" (10.4 x 18.0 cm)
MODEL
500T-301
500T-401
500T-501
500T-601
500T-751
500T-801
500T-102
500T-122
500T-152
500T-162
500T-202
500T-252
500T-302
500T-402
±1% @ 7.5 VA
±1% @ 10.0 VA
±1% @ 12.5 VA
±1% @ 15.0 VA
±1% @ 25.0 VA
±1% @ 25.0 VA
±1% @ 25.0 VA
±1% @ 25.0 VA
±5% @ 1.5 VA
±3% @ 2.5 VA
±2% @ 2.5 VA
±1% @ 4.0 VA
±1% @ 5.0 VA
±1% @ 5.0 VA
±1% @ 7.5 VA
±1% @ 10.0 VA
±1% @ 12.5 VA
±1% @ 12.5 VA
±1% @ 15.0 VA
±1% @ 25.0 VA
±1% @ 25.0 VA
±1% @ 25.0 VA
500T
(shown with end removed)
CAUTION: Proper safety precautions must be followed
by a trained electrician during installation. It is
recommended that the incoming power be de-energized
before installation. The current transformer must have
its secondary terminals short-circuited or the burden
(load) connected before energizing the primary circuit.
For indoor use only. Use on insulated conductors only.
March 2014

994. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 936fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
SPLIT-CORE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
600T, 601T
Secondary 0-5A
Frequency 50-400 Hz
Insulation Class 600V, 10 kV BIL Full Wave
Continuous Thermal
Current Resistor Factor 1.33 @ 30°C (86°F) ambient 1.0
@ 55°C (131°F) ambient
Terminations Brass stud terminals with nut, flat
washer, lockwasher
Materials Of Construction
Plastic, UL94V-1
Window Size 2.0" x 5.5" (5.08 x 13.97 cm),
4.5" x 4.5" (11.43 x 11.43 cm)
Weight 1.5 lb (0.68 kg)
Approvals UL-recognized component,
File #E238872; CSA certified,
File #245941
Warranty 1 year
A
D
1 .13
(2 .87)
C
B
0 .44
(1 .12)
Two Mounting Holes
0 .19 (0 .48) dia
LABEL
601 6 .75 (17 .15) 4 .50 (11 .43) 4 .50 (11 .43) 6 .75 (17 .15)
DIMENSIONS
MODEL
A B C D
X1
H1
This End Removable
600
7 .75 (19 .69)
5 .50 (13 .97)
2 .00 (5 .08)
4 .25 (10 .80)
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The Model 600T and 601T Split-Core Current Transformers
provide a low amperage current output proportional to line
current
. They are for use in energy management control
and metering applications, and are ideal for use as inputs to power monitors like the EnGenius™ and current transducers like Models 4CTV and 4CMA
.These transformers are
designed to be assembled around an existing insulated conductor without the need for dismantling the primary bus or cables
. The portion of the transformers marked "This End
Removable" can be disassembled and then reassembled around the conductors that require current monitoring
.
FEATURES
• 5A secondary
• Split-core construction for easy installation
• Brass stud terminals #8-32 with one flat washer,
lockwasher and regular nut
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
601T
(shown with end removed)
ORDERING INFORMATION
CURRENT RATIO
1200/800:5
MODEL 600T - 2.0" x 5.5" (5.1 x 14 cm) Window
MODEL CURRENT
RATIO
B0.1
2.5 VA
B0.2
5 VA
B0.5
12.5 VA
ANSI METER CLASS @ 60 Hz ANSI METER CLASS @ 60 Hz
MULTI RATIO
600T-122-801
ACCURACY CLASS
WITH UNITY POWER FA CTOR
4.8
4.8
2.4
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.6
0.6
2.4
2.4
2.4
1.2
1.2
0.6
0.6
0.6
400:5
500:5
600:5
800:5
1000:5
1200:5
1600:5
2000:5
600T-401
600T-501
600T-601
600T-801
600T-102
600T-122
600T-162
600T-202
± 1% @ 1.5 VA
± 1% @ 2.0 VA
± 1% @ 2.5 VA
± 1% @ 5.0 VA
± 1% @ 7.5 VA
± 1% @ 15.0 VA
± 1% @ 20.0 VA
± 1% @ 30.0 VA
--
--
--
2.4
2.4
1.2
1.2
0.6
MODEL CURRENT
RATIO
B0.1
2.5 VA
B0.2
5 VA
B0.5
12.5 VA
-- -- 4.8 4.8 2.4 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 0.6
-- -- -- --
4.8 4.8 2.4 1.2 1.2 1.2
601T-301 601T-401 601T-501 601T-601 601T-801 601T-102 601T-122 601T-152 601T-162 601T-202
MODEL 601T - 4.5" x 4.5" (11.4 x 11.4 cm) Window
ACCURACY CLASS
WITH UNITY POWER FA CTOR
± 1% @ 0.5 VA
± 1% @ 1.0 VA
± 1% @ 1.5 VA
± 1% @ 2.0 VA
± 1% @ 2.5 VA
± 1% @ 5.0 VA
± 1% @ 10.0 VA
± 1% @ 15.0 VA
± 1% @ 15.0 VA
± 1% @ 20.0 VA
300:5
400:5 500:5 600:5 800:5
1000:5 1200:5 1500:5 1600:5
2000:5
-- 4.8 4.8 2.4 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 0.6
CURRENT RATIO 1200/800/400:5
MULTI RATIO 601T-122-MR
CAUTION: Proper safety precautions must be followed
by a trained electrician during installation. It is
recommended that the incoming power be deenergized
before installation. The current transformer must have its
secondary terminals short-circuited or the burden (load)
connected before energizing the primary circuit. For
indoor use only. Use on insulated conductor only.
Example: 601T-102 Split-core current transformer with a current ratio of 1000:5 and a window size of 4.5" x 4.5" (11.4 x 11.4 cm)
March 2014

995. fifl 937POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Secondary 0-5A
Frequency 50-400 Hz
Insulation Class 600V, 10 kV BIL, Full Wave
Lead Wires 24" (61 cm), 16 AWG
Materials Of Construction
Plastic, UL94V-1
Weight
2RL 0.5 lb (0.23 kg)
5RL 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
7RL 1.5 lb (0.63 kg)
8RL 2.5 lb (1.2 kg)
Approvals UL-recognized component,
File #E238872; CSA File #245941
Warranty 1 year
SOLID-CORE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
RL SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The RL Series Solid-Core Current Transformers provide a
low-amperage current output proportional to line current and
are for use in building automation and metering applications
.
These lo
w-cost current transformers are ideal as inputs
to power monitors, such as the EnGenius and current transducers, such as Models 4CTV and 4CMA.
FEATURES
• 5A secondary
• Flexible leads are UL 1015 105°C, CSA approved, #16
AWG, 24"L (61 cm)
• UL recognized component, CSA certified
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
CURRENT
RATIO
MODELS
CURRENT
RATIO
CODE
MODEL
2RL
Outer
dia 2.46" (6.25 cm)
Window
dia 1.05" (2.67 cm)
MODEL
5RL
Outer
dia 3.56'' (9.0 cm)
Window
dia 1.56'' (3.9 cm)
MODEL
7RL
Outer
dia 4.58" (11.6 cm)
Window
dia 2.50" (6.4 cm)
MODEL
8RL
Outer
dia 5.73'' (14.6 cm)
Window
dia 3.25'' (8.3 cm)
Accuracy
%
50:5
75:5
100:5
150:5
200:5
250:5
300:5
400:5
500:5
600:5
750:5
800:5
1000:5
1200:5
1600:5
2000:5
2500:5
500
750
101
151
201
251
301
401
501
601
751
801
102
122
162
202
252
±3
±2
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.0
2.0
2.0
4.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1.0
1.5
2.0
5.0
5.0
10.0
12.5
12.5
20.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
±2
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
--
--
Example:
Model Current
Ratio
Code
Important! Shaded items in Ordering Information are av ailable by special order and are not returnable for credit.
5RL 201 5RL201 Model RL current transformer with
1.56" (3.9 cm) window diameter and a 200:5
current ratio
VA Accuracy % VA Accuracy % VA Accuracy % VA
±2
±2
±2
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
±1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
±1
±1
--
±1
±1
±1
--
±1
±1
--
--
±1
±1
--
--
--
--
5.0
7.5
--
25.0
35.0
50.0
--
60.0
75.0
--
--
120.0
50.0
-- --
2.5 5.0 5.0 5.0
12.5 15.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 45.0
-- --
CAUTION: Proper safety precautions must be followed
by a trained electrician during installation. It is
recommended that the incoming power be de-energized
before installation. The current transformer must have its
secondary terminals short-circuited or the burden (load)
connected before energizing the primary circuit. For
indoor use only. Use on insulated conductors only.
RL
March 2014

996. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 938fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
SOLID CORE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS WITH VOLTAGE OUTPUT
UCT SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The UCT Series of solid core current sensors provide a
low voltage (0.333V) output proportional to line current and
is used in conjuction with the EnGenius power monitoring meter
. These are often referred to as "safe", the mV output
eliminates theneed for shorting switches. The rugged epoxy
encapsulated construction comes with 8-foot twisted leads.
White
ONE TURN
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
Black
Internal Burden Resistor
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
Primary 5A to 400A, 250A to 5000A
Secondary 0 - 0.333V, 0-0.333 V
Frequency 50 to 10,000 Hz
Insulation Class 600V
Accuracy ±1%; Accuracy at 10% to 130% of
rated current
Lead Wires 8' twisted pair leads
Weight 0.4 lb (0.18 kg)
Approvals CE, UL recognized File #E96927
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
FEATURES
• Rated input current from 5A to 400A
• Phase angle < 1° measured at 50% rated current
• 8 ft. twisted-pair lead
• UL recognized
MODEL DESCRIPTION
UCT-0300-005 Solid core current sensor 5A:0.333VAC
UCT-1000-050 Solid core current sensor 50A:0.333VAC
UCT-1250-100 Solid core current sensor 100A:0.333VAC
UCT-1250-150 Solid core current sensor 150A:0.333VAC
UCT-1250-200 Solid core current sensor 200A:0.333VAC
UCT-1250-250 Solid core current sensor 250A:0.333VAC
UCT-1250-300 Solid core current sensor 300A:0.333VAC
UCT-1250-400 Solid core current sensor 400A:0.333VAC
Model Dimensions (in)
A B C
UCT-0300 0.30 1.70 0.75
UCT-0500 0.50 1.90 0.75
UCT-0750 0.75 2.10 0.75
UCT-1000 1.00 2.40 0.80
UCT-1250 1.25 2.70 0.80
March 2014

997. NEW! 939POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES
CS1A, CS1150A-LED, SCS1.5A, SCS1150A-LED
Frequency 6-100 Hz
Switch Type Normally open, solid state (SC250-
NC is normally closed)
Rating 1-135 VAC/VDC, 0.3A (SC250-NC
model 0.2A)
Insulation Class 600V
Trip Point
CS1A Fixed, 1A
SCS1.5A Fixed, 1.25A
CS1150A Adjustable 1-200A
SCS1150A,
SC250-NC Adjustable 1.25-200A

Range
CS1A, CS1150 1 - 200A, Jumper High
SCS1.5A, SCS1150A,
SC250-NC 1.25 - 200A, Jumper High
Deadband 5% of setpoint
Response Time Less than 250 milliseconds
Off State Leakage < 25 mA
Jumper
None = 0-100A
Mid = 0-150A
High = 0-200A
Operating Temperature -22° to 158°F (-30° to 70°C)
Mounting 3.5"L (8.9 cm) with 3.0" (7.6 cm)
mounting centers
Dimensions
CS1A, CS1150 1.9" x 3.45" x 1"
(4.82 x 8.76 x 2.54 cm)
SCS1.5A, SCS1150A,
SC250-NC 2.75" x 3.45" x 1.2"
(6.98 x 8.76 x 3.04 cm)
Window Size
CS1A, CS1150 0.75" (1.9 cm) dia, for up to 250
MCM cable
SCS1.5A, SCS1150A,
SC250-NC 0.85" (2.2 cm) square aperture, for
up to 350 MCM cable
Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Approvals UL listed, File #E320368 CE certified
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Models CS1A, SCS1.5A, CS1150A and SCS1150A are solid-state switches that operate when the AC current level sensed by the internal current transformer exceeds a fixed or adjustable trip point
. Internal circuits
are totally powered by induction from the conductor being monitored
. There is zero off-state leakage current in the
solid-state relay output that can switch AC or DC circuits. The
Smart LED indication option eliminates the need for meters when setting the adjustable trip point of the current switch
.
Solid-core and split-core models are a
vailable
.
FEATURES
• Models with fixed or adjustable trip point
• Switch AC or DC circuits
• Power and status LED
• Applicable for VFD applications down to 6Hz
• Powered by monitored line
• Available in solid-core models or split-core models that
clamp easily around cables
• One-year warranty
• UL listed, CE certified
SPECIFICATIONS
SCS1150A-LED
CS1150A-LED
March 2014

998. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 940fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES
CS1A, CS1150A-LED, SCS1.5A, SCS1150A-LED
Bldg Automation
System, Energy
Mgmt System,
1-135V
VAC/VDC max
0 .3A
Relay, Lamp,
Small Contactor,
or Similar AC
or DC Load
Terminals not
polarity
sensitive
Digital
Input
Terminals not
polarity
sensitive
Monitored Conductor Monitored Conductor
WIRING
INSTALLATION / ADJUSTMENT
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CS1A Solid-core current switch, fixed 1.0A trip, normally open
SCS1.5A Split-core current switch, fixed 1.25A trip, normally open
CS1150A-LED Solid-core current switch, adjustable, normally open with LED
SCS1150A-LED Split-core current switch, adjustable, normally open with LED
SC250-NC Split-core current switch, adjustable, normally closed with LED
Sensors can be mounted in any position or hung directly on wires. For larger mounting screws, drill out mounting holes. Use up to
#14 A
WG copper wire to terminals
. Tighten to 7 in-lb torque.
Adjustment for CS1150A and SCS1150A
1. With the sensor wired as shown, use a voltmeter across the sensor contacts. A full voltage across the contact confirms the
switch is open. Turn on the motor or other load being monitored.
2. The sensor is shipped with the multiturn adjustment set to the most sensitive position. If the sensor now operates, turn the
adjustment counter-clockwise (CCW) until the operation reverses. The meter will indicate this action.
3. Now, turn the adjustment clockwise (CW) until the sensor just operates its controlled circuit. It is desirable to turn the
adjustment slightly beyond this threshold point to provide a margin for normal current variations.
Status LED Indicator
1. Light: Sufficient current is flowing to opposite device.
2. No light: Current is either OFF or below the bottom of the range.
Application Notes 1
. Make sure that switched current (connected to terminals) is limited to 0.3A continuous. Switched voltage should be no higher
than 135 VAC/VDC.
2. Important! Monitoring excessive current can damage the sensor. Make sure monitored currents do not exceed maximum
ratings.
3. For proper operation of the split-core model, make certain that the mating surfaces of the magnetic core are clean.
Troubleshooting
Problem Probable Causes and Corrections
1. Sensor does not switch at all, Adjustment pot is probably backed off completely, which disables the sensor.
regardless of current level. See Installation/Adjustment immediately above for instructions.
Verify that mating surfaces of the split core are free of foreign particles.
2. Adjustment has no stops; The multiturn adjustment pot has a slip-clutch that prevents damage at either end of its
keeps turning. rotation.
March 2014

999. fifl 941POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES & TRANSDUCERS
RIBXG, RIBXK, RIBXK420 SERIES
RIBXK, RIBXG SERIES
Monitored AC Current
RIBXKF, RIBXKTF 0.25-150A
RIBXKA, RIBXKTA 0.5-150A
RIBXGF, RIBXGTF 0.35-150A
RIBXGA, RIBXGTA 0.75-150A
Switch Trip Point
RIBXKF, RIBXKTF 0.25A, fixed
RIBXKA, RIBXKTA 0.5-150A, adjustable
RIBXGF, RIBXGTF 0.35A, fixed
RIBXGFL, RIBXGTFL 0.75A, fixed
RIBXGA, RIBXGTA 0.75-150A, adjustable
Switch Type Solid state, normally open
Switch Rating 30 VAC/VDC, 0.4A maximum
Off State Leakage <30 µA @ 30 VAC/VDC
On State Voltage Drop <0.3 VAC/VDC @ 0.1A
<1.6 VAC/VDC @ 0.4A
RIBXK420 SERIES
Supply Voltage
24 VDC
Output

4-20 mA, 30 mA maximum
Accuracy ±5% FS
Linearity

±1% FS
Output Impedanc
e
600Ω maximum @ 24 VDC
Input Range 20, 50, or 100A
General
Frequency Suitable for most VFD applications
Maximum Sensed Voltage
600 VAC
Connections 16" (40.6 cm), 18 AWG, 600V wires
or terminals for 14-22 AWG
Operating Temperature -30° to 140°F (-34.4° to 60°C)
Weight 0.3 lb (0.13 kg)
Approvals UL listed, UL916, UL864 File #57312
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
0.50
(1.27)
dia.
1.46
(3.7)
1.86
(4.73)
1.508
(3.83)
1.008
(2.56)
Ratcheting
Cam
Clamp
Remov able
Mounting Tab
RIBXK420 RIBXK , RIBXG
RIBXK
in
(cm)
24 VDC
Power Supply
(black)
(red)
BAS Input
or Other
4-20 mA Load
+–
2.52 (6.4)
2.00
(5.1)
1.10
(2.8)
1.75
(4.4)
Load Wire Opening
0.52 x 0.52 (1.3 x 1.3)
Optional
LEDs
Optional
Trip
Adjust
Wire Clamp
Removable
Mounting Tab
Wh/Yel
Load
Wire
Load
Wire
Wh/Yel
Wh/Yel
Normally open
solid-state
switch is
not polarity
sensitive
Models with
Screw Terminals
Models with
Wire Leads
Wh/Yel
RIBXG
DESCRIPTION
The RIBXK, RIBXG, RIBXK420 Series include both current-
operated switches and current transducers. Solid-core and
split-core current-oper
ated switch models have a solid-state
switch that operates when the current level sensed by the internal current transformer exceeds a fixed or adjustable set point
. Solid-core current transducer models output a 4-20 mA
signal proportional to the line current being monitored.
FEATURES
• Solid- and split-core switch models have fixed (go/no go)
or adjustable trip points
• Solid-core transducer models have a 4-20 mA output
• Low cost
• Ratcheting cam clamp to secure switch to wire
• Removable mounting tab
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RIBXKF Solid-core current-operated switch, wire leads, fixed-trip
RIBXKTF Solid-core current-operated switch, terminals, fixed-trip
RIBXKA Solid-core current-operated switch, wire leads, adjustable-trip
RIBXKT
A
Solid-core current-operated switch, terminals, adjustable-trip
RIBXK420-20 Solid-core current transducer, 0-20A
RIBXK420-50 Solid-core current transducer, 0-50A
RIBXK420-100 Solid-core current transducer, 0-100A
RIBXGF Split-core current-operated switch, fixed 0.35A trip, wire leads
RIBXGTF Split-core current-operated switch, fixed 0.35A trip, terminal strip
RIBXGFL Split-core current-operated switch, fixed 0.75A trip, wire leads, LEDs
RIBXGTFL Split-core current-operated switch, fixed 0.75A trip, terminal strip, LEDs
RIBXGA Split-core current-operated switch, adjustable trip, wire leads, LEDs
RIBXGTA Split-core current-operated switch, adjustable trip, terminal strip, LEDs
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
RIBXKF
RIBXKA
RIBXGTF
RIBXK420
RIBXKTF
RIBXKTA
March 2014

1000. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 942fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
A/CR-DC-5A A/CR-DC-12A A/CR-12DC-12A
Relay Type Contact Rating Relay Type Contact Rating Relay Type Contact Rating
SPDT 5A @ 250 VAC General Use SPDT 12A @ 250 VAC General Use SPDT 12A @ 250 VAC General Use
Coil Voltage5A @ 125 VAC ResistiveCoil Voltage 12A @ 125 VAC ResistiveCoil Voltage12A @ 250 VAC Resistive
23-31.2 VDC 5A @ 30 VAC Resistive 20-31.2 VDC 12A @ 30 VAC Resistive 10-15.6 VDC 12A @ 30 VDC Resistive
Coil Current1/4HP, 120/250/277 VACCoil Current 1/2HP, 120/250/480 VAC-NCCoil Current1/2HP, 120/240/480 VAC-NC
15mA @ 24 VDC C 150 Pilot Duty 16mA @ 24 VDC A300 Pilot Duty 30mA @ 24 VDC A300 Pilot Duty
A/CR-24AC-10A A/CR-115AC-8A A/CR-230AC-8A
Relay Type Contact Rating Relay Type Contact Rating Relay Type Contact Rating
SPDT 10A @ 250 VAC General Use SPDT 8A @ 250 VAC General Use SPDT 8A @ 250 VAC General Use
Coil Voltage10A @ 250 VAC ResistiveCoil Voltage 8A @ 250 VAC ResistiveCoil Voltage8A @ 125 VAC Resistive
16-25.4 VAC 10A @ 30 VAC Resistive 80-132 VAC 8A @ 30 VAC Resistive 165-264 VAC 8A @ 30 VAC Resistive
Coil Current1HP, 120/240/480 VAC-NOCoil Current 1HP, 120/240/480 VAC-NOCoil Current1HP, 120/240/480 VAC-NO
28mA @ 24 VAC 1/2HP, 120/240/480 VAC-NO 10mA @ 115 VAC 1/2HP, 120/240/480 VAC-NC 5mA @ 230 VDC 1/2HP, 120/240/480 VAC-NC
A300 Pilot Duty A300 Pilot Duty A300 Pilot Duty
ACI CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES
A/ACS, A/ASCS, A/CS, A/SCS, A/CR SERIES
Supply Voltage
Induced from monitored conductor
Frequency 40 Hz to 1 kHz
Outputs
Normally Open 0.3A @ 200 VAC/VDC
Normally Closed 0.15A @ 300 VAC/VDC
Isolation Rating 1270 VAC
Insulation 600 VAC
LED Indication
Adjustable Red = Above trip point
Green = Below trip point
Fixed Red LED only
Deadband 10% Setpoint
Operating Temperature 5° to 104°F (-15° to 40°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH,(non-condensing)
Mounting DIN rail (35 mm), screw
Window Size 0.75" (1.9 cm), accepts up to 350
MCM cables
Weight 0.21 lb (0.1 kg)
Approvals UL and cUL listed, file #E309723 and
#E179139 CE
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 5 years, limited
DESCRIPTION
The ACI current switches are solid-state devices that
operate when the sensed AC current level exceeds a fixed
or adjustable trip point
. The A/CS Series is solid-core with a
fixed trip point. The A/SCS Series is split-core with a fixed
trip point. The A/ACS Series is solid-core with adjustable
trip point. The A/ASCS Series is split-core with adjustable
trip point. All models monitor either a 0-200 or 0-250 amp
current flo
w in the wire and are available in normally-open or
normally-closed configurations
. The A/CR Series command
relay brings control to monitoring applications.
FEATURES
• Available in solid or split-core
• Fixed or adjustable trip points
• Switches AC or DC circuits
• Status LED's
• Integral DIN rail mount
• Powered by monitored line
• Enclosure rated UL94-5VB
• Pilot duty rated (A/CR Series)
SPECIFICATIONS
RELAY SPECIFICATIONS (COMMAND RELAY)
A/CR-D-12A
A/CS, A/ACS
A/SCS, A/ASCS
March 2014

1001. fifl 943POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ACI CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES
A/ACS, A/ASCS, A/CS, A/SCS, A/CR SERIES
3.38 (8.6)
1.38 (3.5)
0.14
(0.4)
2.84
(7.2)
0.40 (1.0)
in
(cm)
Ø0.21
(0.5)
Typ.
Ø0.78
(2.0)
Front View
Top View
Trip on = Above trip point
Adjustment range: 3.0-200A
Use Insulated Conductors Only
Top View
Ø0.188 (.4)
(2X)
1.107 (2.8)1.320 (3.3)
2.884 (7.3)
3.290 (8.3)
1.632 (4.1)
0.76
(1.9)
0.74
(1.9)
3.33 (7.8)
1.38 (3.5)
2.84 (7.2)
Front View
0.50 (1.3)
in
(cm)
Ø0.22
(0.6)
Typ.
Top View
0.14
(0.4)
Trip on = Above trip point
Adjustment range: 3.0-200A
Use Insulated Conductors Only
Front View
1.516 (3.8)
1.351 (3.4)
Din rail size
A/ASCS only
A/ASCS, A/SCS
A/CR-CD-12A
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A/CS Solid-core current switch, 0.5A trip, normally-open, 0-250A range
A/CS-L Solid-core current switch, 0.2A trip, normally-open, 0-250A range
A/CS-X Solid-core current switch, 1A trip, normally-closed, 0-250A range
A/CS-X-L Solid-core current switch, 0.5A trip, normally-closed, 0-250A range
A/A
CS
Solid-core current switch, adjustable trip, normally-open, 1-250A range
A/A
CS-L
Solid-core current switch, adjustable trip, normally-open, 0.5-250A range
A/A
CSX
Solid-core current switch, adjustable trip, normally-closed, 1-250A range
A/SCS Split-core current switch, 2.5A trip, normally-open, 0-200A range
A/SCS-L Split-core current switch, 1.5A trip, normally-open, 0-200A range
A/SCSX Split-core current switch, 2.5A trip, normally-closed, 0-250A range
A/ASCS Split-core current switch, adjustable trip, normally-open, 3-200A range
A/ASCS-L Split-core current switch, adjustable trip, normally-open, 2-200A range
A/ASCSX Split-core current switch, adjustable trip, normally-closed, 3-250A range
A/ASCSX-L Split-core current switch, adjustable trip, normally-closed, 2.5-250A range
A/CR-DC-5A 5 Amp SPDT relay, 23-31.2 VDC coil voltage
A/CR-DC-12A 12 Amp SPDT relay, 20-31.2 VDC coil voltage
A/CR-12DC-12A 12 Amp SPDT relay, 10-15.6 VDC coil voltage
A/CR-24AC-10A 10 Amp SPDT relay, 16-26.4 VAC coil voltage
A/CR-115AC-8A 8 Amp SPDT relay, 80-132 VAC coil voltage
A/CR-230AC-8A 8 Amp SPDT relay, 165-264 VAC coil voltage
March 2014

1002. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 944fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACI MINI CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES
A/MCS, A/MSCS, A/MCS-A, A/MSCS-A
Supply Voltage Induced by monitored conductor
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Rating
A/MCS, A/MSCS 0.5 A continuous 36 VAC/VDC
A/MCS-A, A/MSCS-A 0.5 A continuos 36 VAC/VDC
Insulation Class 600 VAC
Isolation Rating 2,200 VAC
LED Indication
Red Above trip point
Green Below trip point
Trip Point
A/MCS Fixed 0.20A
A/MCS-A 0.32 - 150A
A/MSCS Fixed 0.55A
A/MSCS-A 0.70 - 150A
Range
A/MCS 0.20 - 150A
A/MCS-A 0.32 - 150A
A/MSCS 0.55 - 150A
A/MSCS-A 0.70 - 150A
Operating Temperature -22° to 140°F (-30° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH, (non condensing)
Dimensions
A/MCS, A/MCS-A 2.50" x 1.96" x 0.95"
( 6.35 x 4.97 x 2.41 cm)
A/MSCS, A/MSCS-A 2.65" x 2.35" x 0.95"
(6.73 x 5.08 x 2.43 cm)
Window Size
A/MCS, A/MCS-A 0.55" (1.39 cm) dia., up to 1 AWG
cables
A/MSCS, A/MSCS-A 0.53" (1.34 cm) dia., up to 1 AWG
cables
Weight 0.21 lb (0.1 kg)
Approvals UL and cUL, file #E309723, CE,
UL94-5UB
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The ACI Mini Current Switch line has a normally-open,
solid state contact that is non-polarity sensitive. They can be
used to switch both AC and DC circuits up to 36 volts. The
adjustable switches also include two status LED indicators that will indicate three states: tripped on, current present but below trip point, and current off or below the low end of the adjustable trip point range
.
The A/MCS and A/MSCS current switches should be used
in applications in which a go/no-go current status switch is required
. A current status switch can be used to monitor
fan and pump status, motors, compressors, and any other electrical equipment for on or off status
. The A/MCS-A and
A/MSCS-A adjustable current switches should be used in applications such as monitoring over and under loads, changes in the normal operating current or equipment status
.
FEATURES
• Go / no-go status switch
• Rated up to 150A
• 5-year warranty
• UL94V-0 enclosure rating
• LED indication (adjustable models)
• Small size
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A/MCS Solid-core, fixed current switch, N.O., 0-150A <0.20A
A/MCS-A Solid-core, adjustable current switch, N.O., 0-150A 0.32 – 150A
A/MSCS Split-core, fixed current switch, N.O., 0-150A <0.55A
A/MSCS-A Split-core, adjustable current switch, N.O., 0-150A 0.70 – 150A
SPECIFICATIONS
March 2014

1003. fifl 945POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ACI MINI CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES
A/MCS, A/MSCS, A/MCS-A, A/MSCS-A
Dimensions
2.0 (5.1)
2.0 (5.1)
Ø 0.188 (2x)
(0.5)
Ø 0.188 (2x)
(0.5)
2.5
(6.4)
1.991
(5.1)
0.942 (2.4)
Solid Core
Split Core
2.645
(6.7)
2.356
(6.0)
0.94 (2.4)
Output: 0.50A,
36.0 VAC/VDC
Trip on = Above 0.20A
Terminals accept 16-22 AW G
copper wire only
Sense range: 0.20-150A
Output: 0.50A,
36.0 Vac/Vdc
TRIP ON = Above 0.20A
Ter minals accept 16-22 AWG
copper wire only
Sense Range: 0.20-150A
Output: 0.50A,
36.0 Vac/Vdc
TRIP ON = Above Tr ip Point
Ter minals accept 16-22 AWG
copper wire only
Sense Range: 0.55-150A
Output: 0.50A,
36.0 VAC/VDC
Trip on = Above trip point
Terminals accept 16-22 AW G
copper wire only
Sense range: 0.55-150A
ACI
A/MCS
ACI
A/MSCS
Automation Components,
Middleton, WI
Automation Components,
Middleton, WI
DIMENSIONS
Output: 1.0A,
36.0 VAC/VDC
Trip on = Above trip point
Terminals accept 16-22 AW G copper
wire only
TRIP
ADJ
TRIP
OFFO N
Adjustment range: 0.32-150A
TRIP ON = Above Tr ip Point
TRIP
ADJ
TRIP
OFFON
Ter minals accept 16-22 AWG copper
wire only
Adj. Range: 0.32-150A
Output: 1.0A,
36.0 Vac/Vdc
ACI
A/MCS-A
ACI
A/MSCS-A
Automation Components,
Middleton, WI
Automation Components,
Middleton, WI
Output: 0.50A,
36.0 VAC/VDC
Trip on = Above trip point
Terminals accept 16-22 AW G
copper wire only
Sense range: 0.20-150A
TRIP ON = Above Tr ip Point
TRIP
ADJ
TRIP
OFFON
Ter minals accept 16-22 AWG
copper wire only
Adj. Range: 0.32-150A
Output: 1.0A,
36.0 Vac/Vdc
2.0 (5.1)
Ø 0.188 (2x)
(0.5)
2.5
(6.4)
1.991
(5.1)
0.942 (2.4)
2.0 (5.1)
Ø 0.188 (2x)
(0.5)
2.645
(6.7)
2.356
(6.0)
0.94 (2.4)
Solid Core
Split Core
A/MCS
A/MSCS
A/MCS-A
A/MSCS-A
in
(cm)
March 2014

1004. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 946fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES CURRENT SWITCH AND RELAY
RIBX SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Relay in a Box RIBX Series provides a unique and cost-
effective solution to on/off motor control and current sensing
status indication
. Combined in a single, convenient junction
box with high- and low-voltage separation are a control relay and a current sensing status switch
. A three-position closed/
open/auto s
witch is available to override the output of the
relay
. This versatile product allows both control and status
sensing of electrical loads by a BAS, all in a self-contained, easy-to-install housing
.
FEATURES
• Cost-effective current sensing with a control relay
• Self-contained housing with high and low voltage
separation
• LED indication of relay and current sensor trip
• Optional relay contact override switch
• Plenum-rated housing
• UL and ULC listed for UL 916 Energy Management and
UL 864 Fire
RIBX Split-Core
Remote Current
Sensing
RIBX Solid-Core
Remote Current
Sensing RIBX Internal
Current Sensing
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Switch Rating 30 VAC/VDC @ 0.4A maximum
LED Indication
LED#1 ON
Relay activated
LED#2 ON
Current trip point exceeded
Response Time 20mS
Relay
Life Rating 10 million cycles minimum
mechanical
Coil Pull In Voltage
10-30 VAC/VDC models
9 VAC, 10 VDC
24 VAC/VDC models 18 VAC, 22 VDC
Coil Drop Out Voltage
10-30 VAC/VDC models
2.1 VAC, 2.8 VDC
24 VAC/VDC models 3 VAC, 3.8 VDC
Off State Leakage < .03 mA @ 30 VAC/VDC
On State Voltage Drop <0.3 VAC/VDC @ 0.1A
<1.6 VAC/VDC @ 0.4A
Lead Wires 16" (40.6 cm) 600V Rated
Operating Temperature -30° to 140°F (-34° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Dimensions
Enclosure 4"H x 4"W x 1.8"D
(10.2 x 10.2 x 4.6 cm),
NEMA 1 with 1/2" NPT
Solid Core 1.86'' x 1.46'' (3 x 3.71 cm )
Split Core 2.52'' x 2.0'' (6.4 x 5.08 cm)
Window Size
Solid Core 0.5'' (1.27 cm)
Split Core 0.52'' x 0.52'' (1.32 x 1.32 cm)
Weight 1 lb (0.45 kg)
Approvals UL and cUL listed, File #E68805
(UL 916) and #S7312 (UL 864)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
March 2014

1005. fifl 947POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Internal Current Sensing (for single-phase loads)
Models with internal current-sensing are great for direct-control and current-sensing of
exhaust fans, pumps, and other single-phase electrical loads up to 20A
. The control relay
contacts of these models wire directly in series with single-phase motors using the wires that exit the housing through the 1/2" conduit hub
. The current of the load is sensed within
the housing. Low-voltage wiring from the controller for the control relay coil and status
switch enter the separate Class 2 wiring compartment in the housing through star bushings or conduit and are connected to screw terminals
.
Remote Current Sensing (for loads with motor starters)
Models with remote current-sensing are great for control and status sensing of electrical loads that require a motor starter
. The control relay contacts of these models are wired
in series with the motor starter coil using the two wires that exit the housing through the 1/2'' conduit hub
. Currents up to 150A are sensed externally with a current sensing ring
connected to the two gray wires that also exit through the 1/2'' conduit hub. Low-voltage
wiring from the controller for the control relay coil and status switch enter the separate Class 2 wiring compartment in the housing through star bushings or conduit and are connected to screw terminals
.
APPLICATION
BAS Controller
Status In
Control Out
Current is sensed internally.
RIBX
Optional Override Switch
Closed/Open/Auto
Single Phase
Exhaust Fan
120-277 VA C
10 or 20A
Class 2
Current Sensor
and Control Relay
with Override Switch
On/Off
Internal Current Sensing
BAS Controller
Status In
Control Out
RIBX
Optional Override Switch
Closed/Open/Auto
Three-Phase
Power
Class 2
On/Off
Contactor
Motor
Starter
Relay Switches Motor
Starter Coil
Current Sensor
and Control Relay
with Override Switch
Toroid has no open
circuit voltage eliminating
electrical shock hazard .
Three-Phase
MotorRemote Current Sensing
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES CURRENT SWITCH AND RELAY
RIBX SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
CURRENT
SENSING
CURRENT SENSING
RANGE/THRESHOLD
OVER
SW
RELAY CONTACT
WIRING
RELAY CONTACT
RATINGS *
RELAY COIL AND
CURRENT SWITCH
RIBXLCA
RIBXLCEA
RIBXLCF
RIBXLCJA
RIBXLCJF
RIBXLCRA
RIBXLCRF
RIBXLSA
RIBXLSEA
RIBXLSF
RIBXLSJA
RIBXLSJF
RIBXLSRA
RIBXLSRF
RIBX24SBA
RIBX24SBF
Internal
Internal
–
–
Yes
Yes
0 .5-10A/Adjustable
0 .125-5A/Adustable
0 .5-10A/Fixed, 0 .5A
3-150A/Adjustable
3-150A/Fixed, 3A
1 .25-150A/Adjustable
1 .25-150A/Fixed, 1 .25A
Split-core
Solid-core
–
0 .5-20A/Adjustable
Internal
0 .5-10A/Adjustable
0 .125-5A/Adustable
0 .5-10A/Fixed, 0 .5A
10A resistive 120/240/277 VAC - 28 VDC
480 VA pilot duty 240/277 VA C
480 VA ballast 277 VA C
600W tungsten 120 VAC N.O
240W tungsten 120 VAC N.C.
1/3 hp for N.O. 120/240 VA C
1/6 hp for N.C. 120/240 VA C
1/4 hp for N.O. 277 VA C
1/8 hp for N.C. 277 VA C
10A resistive 277 VA C
480 VA pilot duty 277 VA C
480 VA ballast 277 VA C
600W tungsten 120 VAC N.O
240W tungsten 120 VAC N.C.
1/3 hp for N.O. 120/240 VA C
1/6 hp for N.C. 120/240 VA C
1/4 hp for N.O. 277 VA C
1/8 hp for N.C. 277 VA C
20A resistive 277 VA C
1110 VA pilot duty 277 VA C
770 VA pilot duty 120 VA C
20A ballast 277 VAC N.O.
10A ballast 277 VAC N.C.
10A tungsten 120 VAC N.O.
240W tungsten 120 VAC N.C.
2 hp 277 VAC
1 hp 120 VAC
1-SPDT
Relay
1-SPDT Relay
1-SPST Relay
1-SPST Relay
(blue)
(yellow)
(orange)
N.C.
COM
N.O.
(blue)
(yellow)
(orange)
N.C.
COM
N.O.
33 mA @ 10 VAC 13 mA @ 10 VDC
35 mA @ 12 VAC 15 mA @ 12 VDC
46 mA @ 24 VAC 18 mA @ 24 VDC
55 mA @ 30 VAC 20 mA @ 30 VDC
50 mA @ 18 VAC 33 mA @ 22 VDC
83 mA @ 24 VAC 35 mA @ 24 VDC
47 mA @ 30 VDC
Current
Sensor Status
10-30 VAC/VDC
Common
(orange)
(orange)
Closed
Open
Auto
(orange)
(orange)
Closed
Open
Auto
1
1
Relay
input current
Relay
input current
Relay coil wiring
Relay coil wiring
}
}
Current
Sensor Status
}
24 VAC/VDC
Common}
Split-core
Solid-core
3-150A/Adjustable
3-150A/Fixed, 3A

1 .25-150A/Adjustable
1 .25-150A/Fixed, 1 .25A
Internal
RIBX24BF
RIBXF
RIBXA
RIBXRF
RIBXRA
RIBXJF
RIBXJA
Internal
Internal
Solid-core
Solid-core
Split-core
Split-core
0 .5-30A/Fixed, 0 .5A
0 .5-30A/Adjustable
1 .25-150A/Fixed, 1 .25A
1 .25-150A/Adjustable
3-150A/Fixed, 3A
3-150A/Adjustable
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Current switch only
Current switch only
Current switch only
Current switch only
Current switch only
Current switch only
RIBX24BA
0 .5-20A/Fixed, 0 .5A
0 .5-20A/Adjustable
0 .5-20A/Fixed, 0 .5A
Current Sensor Wiring
Internal Models
(purple)
(purple)
Current
Sensor
(gray)
(gray)
Current
Sensor
Solid- and split-core models
(gray)
(gray)
Current
Sensor
Solid- and split-core models
Current switch wiring
Current
Sensor Status
}
Current switch output
Current switch wiring
RIBX243PA
RIBX243PF
0 .5-20A/Adjustable
0 .5-20A/Fixed, 0 .5A
–
Internal
20A resistive @ 300 VAC, 28 VDC
20A ballast @ 277-480 VA C
15A resistive @ 600 VA C
770 VA pilot duty @ 120 VAC, 1 Ph
1158 VA pilot duty @ 240 VAC, 1 Ph
1110 VA pilot duty @ 277 VAC, 1 Ph
1640 VA pilot duty @ 480 VAC, 1 Ph
1466 VA pilot duty @ 240 VAC, 1 Ph
2112 VA pilot duty @ 480 VAC, 1Ph
Heavy Pilot Duty @ 600 VA C
7.5 HP @ 480 VAC, 3 Ph
5 HP @ 240 VAC, 3 Ph
3 HP @ 480-600 VAC, 1 Ph
2 HP @ 240-277 VAC, 1 Ph
1 HP @ 120 VAC, 1 Ph
(blue)
(blue)
N .O .
(yellow) (yellow)
N .O .
(orange) (orange)
N .O .
2
210 mA @ 24 VAC 154 mA @ 30 VDC
Relay input current
Current switch output
24 VAC/VDC
Common
}
Relay coil wiring
}
Current
Sensor Status
Note: 1 Internal yellow jumper determines if SPST contacts are N .O . or N .C . 2 Can be ordered N .C . by adding -NC after model number .
* Not rated for electronic ballast .
March 2014

1006. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 948fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
KELE AC CURRENT TRANSDUCER
4CTV, 4CMA
Supply Voltage
4CMA 24 VDC
4CTV Induced by monitored conductor
Inputs 0-20A (change jumper to 0 to 50A)
Outputs
4CMA 4-20 mA, 600Ω maximum load
4CTV 0-5 VDC, 30 kΩ minimum load
Insulation Class 600V
Ripple <2% FS
Accuracy ±1% FS (24 VDC @ 25°C)
Operating Temperature -22° to 158°F (-30° to 70°C)
Dimensions 2.9" x 1" x 2.45"
(7.4 x 2.5 x .6.2 cm)
Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Approvals UL File# E320368, CE, RoHS
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
2.45
(6.2)
3.5 (8.9)
0.75
(1.9)
2.9 (7.4)
0.70
(1.8)
0.5 (1.3)
2.5 (6.4)
1.0
(2.5)
Solid-Core
DESCRIPTION
Models 4CTV and 4CMA are AC amperage-to-analog DC
transducers that can be used to directly monitor loads of up to
20A
. For loads of 20-5000A, an external current transformer
can be used. Developed for building automation and energy
management, the Model 4CTV converts an AC current to a 0-5 VDC voltage and the Model 4CMA converts an AC current to a 4-20 mA current that can be monitored by any processor that accepts analog DC voltage or current
.
FEATURES
• 4CTV requires no external power supply
• Rugged design to withstand momentary AC inrushes
of 120A (6x rating)
• Easy to install, only two connections
• 50/60 Hz operation
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
4CTV
APPLICATION
•
A •
Monitoring of AC current of motors, lighting, heating,
industrial processes, etc.
• Monitoring of chiller loads using existing current
transformers
4CMA
in
(cm)
March 2014

1007. fifl 949POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
KELE AC CURRENT TRANSDUCER
4CTV, 4CMA
4CTV Formula:
I
L
(load amps) =

20 V
o
turns 5
x( )
V
o
= VDC from 4CTV
turns= number of times conductor
passes through 4CTV
APPLICATION #1. Monitoring Loads Under 20A
Note: If I
L
is always below 10A, multiple passes of the conductor will improve
scaling . The sum of these amperages must remain below 20A .
APPLICATION #2. Monitoring Loads Over 20A with a Current Transformer
Note: If the CT is oversized, multiple conductor passes or more
secondary turns through the 4CTV or 4CMA will impro ve
scaling . The CT output should not exceed 5A or the CT
secondary turns should not total more than 20A .
4CTV Formula:
I
L
(load amps) =
5
x( )
V
o
= VDC from 4CTV
CT primary
rating
V
o
APPLICATION #3. Monitoring and Summing Multiple Loads
Note: If the loads are from secondaries of current transformers, the CT ratios and the turns on the 4CTVs and
4CMA must all be the same . If CTs are used, the CT primary amps would be the total for all CTs used .
4CTV Formula: For loads under 20 amps
I
LT
(load amps) =
5 x N
x
( )
V
o
= VDC from 4CTVs
turns = number of times conductor passes
through 4CTV
N = number of loads monitored
20 x N
turns
V
o
4CTV Formula:
For loads ov er 20 amps
I
LT
(load amps) =
x( )
CT primary
rating total
V
o
5 x N
Conductor
4CTV
4CTV
LOAD #1
I
L1
LOAD #2
I
L2
LOAD #3
I
L3
4CTV 4CTV 4CTV
Current
TransformerI
L

0
-
5

A
M
PS
Conductor
Current Transformer
4CTV
4 turns for CTs with 5A secondaries
20 turns for CTs with 1A secondaries
Power
Supply
24 VDC ± 10%
I
O
(4-20 mA)
4CMA
Conductor
Load
600
Max
Vo = (0-5 VDC)
30 k
I
o
= mA from UMM
N= number of loads monitored
4CMA Formula: For loads under 20 amps
I
LT
(load amps) =
20 x N I
o
- 4
turns 16
x( )
I
LT
(load amps) =
I
o
- 4
16
CT Primary
rating total
x ( )
4CMA Formula: For loads ov er 20 amps
turns = number of times conductor passes
through
4CMA
4CMA Formula:
I
L
(load amps) =
I
o
- 4
16
( )
I
o
= mA DC from 4CMA
CT primary x rating
I
O
(4-20 mA)
Power
Supply
24 VDC ± 10%I
L
4CMA
4 turns for CTs with 5A secondaries
20 turns for CTs with 1A secondaries


0
-
5
A
Conductor
Load
600
Max
4CMA Formula:
I
L
(load amps) =

20 I
o
- 4
turns 16
x( )
I
o
= mA DC from 4CMA
turns= number of times conductor
passes through 4CMA
I
L
I
L

Power
Supply
24 VDC ± 10%
Current
Output
4-20 mA
SIG OUT
COM
24 PWR
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
UMM
I
LT
= I
L1
+ I
L2
+ I
L3
I
O
Universal
Math
Module
LOAD #1
I
L1

LOAD #2
I
L2
LOAD #3
I
L3
4CMA 4CMA
Minimum
Load
Voltage Output
Vo = (0-5 VDC)
30 k
Minimum
Load
Voltage Output
Vo = (0-5N VDC)
30 k
Minimum
Load
Voltage Output
4CMA
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
4CTV Current transducer, 0-5 VDC voltage output
4CMA Current transducer, 4-20 mA current output
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
500T/501T Split-core current transformers 935
600T/601T Split-core current transformers 936
AL/RL Solid-core current transformers 937
March 2014

1008. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 950fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
AC CURRENT TRANSDUCER WITH CURRENT OUTPUT
CX, SCX SERIES (CURRENT)
Frequency 10-400 Hz
Output 4-20 mA
Output Impedance 500Ω maximum @ 24 VDC
Isolation Rating 1270 VAC
Accuracy ±1% FS
Response Time 250 ms, 0-90%
Internal Protection Reverse voltage protection
Overrange Limit Sensor self-limits output to 40 mA
Operating Temperature -22° to 158°F (-30° to 70°C)
Materials Of Construction
Thermoplastic (meets UL
flammability rating 94V-0)
Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Approvals UL and ULC listed, File #E320368,
CE
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 5 years
2.75
(7.0)
2.4 (6.10)
3.45 (8.7)
0.85 (2.18)
0.85
(2.18)
3.04 (7.73)
1.2
(3.05)
3.45 (8.7)
2.4 (6.0)
0.8
(2.0)
1 (2.5)
1.95
(4.9)
0.95 (2.4)
1.5 (3.9)
3.08 (7.8)
1.0
(2.5)
0.17
(0.45)
Split-Core Solid-Core
DESCRIPTION
The Kele CX/SCX Series AC Current Transducers can be
used to directly monitor up to 200 amps and output a 4-20 mA
signal
. Available in a split-core design that allows for easy
installation of the transducer on existing wiring or in a lower cost solid-core version
.
FEATURES
• May eliminate the need for a current transformer
• Small size
• Loop powered
• Easily installed over existing cable with split-core
design
• UL listed, CE certified
+
–
4-20 mA
Load
Power
Supply
500fi max
@24 VDC
24 VDC
Typical
–
+
+ –
Monitored Conductor
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CX42050 Solid-core current transducer, 0-50A, 4-20 mA output
CX420200 Solid-core current transducer, 0-200A, 4-20 mA output
SCX42050 Split-core current transducer, 0-50A, 4-20 mA output
SCX420200 Split-core current transducer, 0-200A, 4-20 mA output
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
CX42050
SCX42050
CX420200SCX420200
MODEL RANGE JUMPER MAX CONT
(amps) (amps)
CX42050 0-10 None 80
SCX42050 0-20 Mid 120
0-50 High 200
CX420200 0-100 None 175
SCX420200 0-150 Mid 300
0-200 High 400 in
(cm)
March 2014

1009. fifl 951POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Frequency 50-60 Hz
Output 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC
Output Impedance 1 MΩ required for rated accuracy
100 kΩ load add 1.3% error
Isolation Rating 1270 VAC
Accuracy ±1% FS over 5% to 100% of range
Response Time 250 ms, 0-90%
Operating Temperature
-22° to 158°F (-30° to 70°C)
Materials Of Construction
Thermoplastic (meets UL
flammability rating 94V-0)
Window Size 0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Approvals UL and ULC listed, File #E320368,
CE
Warranty 5 years
MODEL RANGE OUTPUT JUMPER MAX CONT
(amps) (amps)
CX05V50 0-10 None 80
SCX05V50 0-20 0-5 VDC Mid 120
0-50 High 200
CX05V200 0-100 None 175
SCX05V200 0-150 0-5 VDC Mid 300
0-200 High 400
CX10V50 0-10 None 80
SCX10V50 0-20 0-10 VDC Mid 120
0-50 High 200
CX10V200 0-100 None 125
SCX10V200 0-150 0-10 VDC Mid 300
0-200 High 400
ORDERING INFORMATION
AC CURRENT TRANSDUCERS WITH VOLTAGE OUTPUT
CX, SCX SERIES (VOLTAGE)
4.0 (10.2)
2.5
(6.4)0.85
(2.2)
0.85 (2.2)
0.20
(0.5)
3.5 (8.9)
2.75 (7.0)
0.65 (1.7)
1.25
(3.2)
2.45
(6.2)
3.5 (8.9)
0.75
(1.9)
2.9 (7.4)
0.70
(1.8)
0.5 (1.3)
2.5 (6.4)
1.0
(2.5)
Split-Core Solid-Core
DESCRIPTION
The Kele CX/SCX Series AC Current Transducers with
Voltage Output can be used to directly monitor up to 200A
and output a 0-5 or 0-10 VDC signal
. Available in a split-core
design that allows for easy installation of the transducer on existing wiring or in a lower-cost solid-core version
.
FEATURES
• May eliminate the need for a current transformer
• Small size
• No power supply needed
• Split-core model easily installed over existing cable
• UL listed, CE certified
+ –
0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC Load*
+
–
Monitored Conductor
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CX05V50 Solid-core current transducer, 0-50A, 0-5 VDC output
CX05V200 Solid-core current transducer, 0-200A, 0-5 VDC output
CX10V50 Solid-core current transducer, 0-50A, 0-10 VDC output
CX10V200 Solid-core current transducer, 0-200A, 0-10 VDC output
SCX05V50 Split-core current transducer, 0-50A, 0-5 VDC output
SCX05V200 Split-core current transducer, 0-200A, 0-5 VDC output
SCX10V50 Split-core current transducer, 0-50A, 0-10 VDC output
SCX10V200 Split-core current transducer, 0-200A, 0-10 VDC output
DIMENSIONS
SCX05V50
SCX10V200
CX05V50
CX10V200
in
(cm)
March 2014
SPECIFICATIONS

1010. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 952fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
CURRENT TRANSDUCERS
A/CT, A/SCT SERIES
Supply Voltage
A/CTA, A/SCTA 12 to 30 VDC
A/CTE, A/CTV,
A/SCTE, A/SCTV Induced from monitored conductor
Supply Current
A/CTA, A/SCTA 36 mA maximum
Frequency
A/CTA, A/SCTA 30 to 60 Hz
A/CTE, A/CTV,
A/SCTE, A/SCTV 50 to 600 Hz
Output
A/CTA, A/SCTA 4-20 mA, 2-wire, loop-powered
A/CTE, A/SCTE 0-5 VDC
A/CTV, A/SCTV 0-10 VDC
Output Impedance
A/SCTA 700Ω @ 24 VDC
A/SCTA-VFD 700Ω @ 24 VDC
Maximum Sensing Current Voltage
600 VAC
Isolation Rating 2200 VAC
Accuracy
A/CTA, A/SCTA ±0.5%
A/CTE, A/CTV,
A/SCTE, A/SCTV ±1%
Operating Temperature 5° to 104°F (-15° to 40°C)
VFD models 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 95% (non-condensing)
Mounting DIN rail size 35 mm
Window Size 0.75", accepts up to 350 MCM cables
Weight 0.24 lbs (0.109 kg)
Approvals UL listed, File #E309723, CE
Warranty 5 years, limited
RoHS Statement Yes
Enclosure Rating UL94-5VB
DESCRIPTION
Current sensors monitor the current flowing to electrical equipment.
The magnitude of the analog output signal is propor
tional to the
current flow through the wire
. The A/CT series offers solid-core
sensors with 4-20mA, 0-5VDC, or 0-10VDC outputs. The A/SCT
series offers split-core sensors for retrofit applications with the same
available outputs. Sensors are available with various input current
ranges from 5 to 250 amps. True RMS models make monitoring of
VFD applications a snap.
FEATURES
• A •
5 VDC, 10 VDC or 4-20mA outputs
• Voltage output models are self-
powered
• Integral DIN rail mount
• True RMS versions for VFD applications
SPECIFICATIONS
A/CT
A/SCT
ORDERING INFORMATION
DIMENSIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A/CT
A-5
Solid-core, loop-powered current sensor, 0-5A input, 4-20 mA output
A/CTA-50 Solid-core, loop-powered current sensor, 0-10/20/50A input, 4-20 mA output
A/CTA-250 Solid-core, loop-powered current sensor, 0-100/200/250A input, 4-20 mA output
A/CTA-50-VFD Solid-core, loop-powered true RMS current sensor, 0-10/20/50A input, 4-20 mA output
A/CTA-250-VFD Solid-core, loop-powered true RMS current sensor, 0-100/200/250A input, 4-20 mA output
A/SCTA-5 Split-core, loop-powered current sensor, 0-5A input, 4-20 mA output
A/SCTA-50 Split-core, loop-powered current sensor, 0-10/20/50A input, 4-20 mA output
A/SCTA-200 Split-core, loop-powered current sensor, 0-100/150/200A input, 4-20 mA output
A/SCTA-50-VFD Split-core, loop-powered true RMS current sensor, 0-10/20/50A input, 4-20 mA output
A/SCTA-200-VFD Split-core, loop-powered true RMS current sensor, 0-100/150/200A input, 4-20 mA output
A/CTE-50 Solid-core, self-powered current sensor, 0-10/20/50A input, 0-5 VDC output
A/CTE-250 Solid-core, self-powered current sensor, 0-100/200/250A input, 0-5 VDC output
A/CTV-50 Solid-core, self-powered current sensor, 0-10/20/50A input, 0-10 VDC output
A/CTV-250 Solid-core, self-powered current sensor, 0-100/200/250A input, 0-10 VDC output
A/SCTE-50 Split-core, self-powered current sensor, 0-10/20/50A input, 0-5 VDC output
A/SCTE-250 Split-core, self-powered current sensor, 0-100/200/250A input, 0-5 VDC output
A/SCTV-50 Split-core, self-powered current sensor, 0-10/20/50A input, 0-10 VDC output
A/SCTV-250 Split-core, self-powered current sensor, 0-100/200/250A input, 0-10 VDC output
2.84
(7.2)
0.50 (1.3)
Ø0.22
(0.6)
Typ.
Top View
0.76
(1.9)
0.74
(1.9)
3.33 (3.8)
1.38 (3.5)
0.14
(0.4)
in
(cm)
3.38 (8.6)
1.38 (3.5)
0.14
(0.4)
Ø0.78
(2.0)
2.84
(7.2)
0.40 (1.0)
Ø0.21
(0.5)
Typ.
Top View
A/SCTA, A/SCTE, A/SCTVA/CTA, A/CTE, A/CTV
March 2014

1011. fifl 953POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
CURRENT TRANSDUCER AND RELAY
RIBX-V SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Relay In a Box RIBX-V Series provides a unique and
cost-effective solution to on/off motor control and analog
current sensing
. Combined in a single, convenient junction
box with high- and low-voltage separation are a control relay and a current sensing transducer that outputs 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC
. A three-position closed/open/auto switch is
available to override the output of the relay. This versatile
product allows both control and analog current sensing of electrical loads by a building automation system, all in a self- contained, easy-to-install housing
.
FEATURES
• Cost-effective analog current sensing with a control
relay
• Self-contained housing with high- and low-voltage
separation
• LED indication of relay
• Optional relay contact override switch
• Plenum-rated housing
• UL and ULC listed for UL 916 Energy Management and
UL 864 Fire
RIBX-V
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Output 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC, proportional
to current sensing range
Output Impedance 30 kΩ minimum
LED Indication LED on = relay activated
Relay Life Rating
10 million cycles minimum
mechanical
Pull In Voltage
10-30 VAC/VDC models
9 VAC, 10 VDC
24 VAC/VDC models 18 VAC, 22 VDC
Drop Out Voltage
10-30 VAC/VDC models
2.1 VAC, 2.8 VDC
24 VAC/VDC models 3 VAC, 3.8 VDC
Accuracy ±1% FS
Lead Wires 16" (40.6 cm)
Operating Temperature -30° to 140°F (-34° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% (non-condensing)
Dimensions 4"H x 4"W x 1.8"D
(10.2 x 10.2 x 4.6 cm),
NEMA 1 th 1/2" NPT
Weight Approximately 1 lb (0.45 kg)
Approvals UL and cUL listed, file #E68805
(UL 916) and #S7312 (UL 864)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year

SPECIFICATIONS
March 2014

1012. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 954fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
APPLICATION
Internal Current Sensing
The RIBX-V Series with internal current sensing is great for direct control and analog current sensing of exhaust fans, pumps, and other
single-phase electrical loads up to 20A. The control relay contacts of these models wire directly in series with single-phase motors using
the wires that exit the housing through the 1/2" conduit hub. The current of the load is sensed within the housing. Low-voltage wiring from
the controller for the control relay coil and analog current signal enter the separate Class 2 wiring compartment in the housing through
star bushings or conduit and are connected to screw terminals.
BAS Contoller
Analog In
Control Out
Current is sensed internally.
RIBX-V
Optional Override Switch
Closed/Open/Auto
Single Phase
Exhaust Fan
120-277 VA C
5, 10, 20, or 30A
Class 2
0-5 or 0-10 VDC
Analog Current Sensor
and Control Relay
with Override Switch
On/Off
Internal Current Sensing
CURRENT TRANSDUCER AND RELAY
RIBX-V SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL CURRENT
SENSING
CURRENT SENSING
RANGE (amps)
OVER
SW
RELAY CONTACT
WIRING
RELAY CONTACT
RATINGS
RELAY COIL AND
ANALOG OUTPUT
RIBXLCEV
RIBXLSEV
RIBXLCV
RIBXLSV
RIBX24BV
RIBX24SBV
RIBXV
Internal
Internal
Yes
Yes
0-5
0-30
0-10
Internal
–
–
0-20
Internal
RIBX243PV 0-20 –Internal
10A resistive 120/240/277 VAC - 28 VDC
480 VA pilot duty 240/277 VAC
480 VA ballast 277 VAC
600W tungsten 120 VAC N.O
240W tungsten 120 VAC N.C.
1/3 hp for N.O. 120/240 VAC
1/6 hp for N.C. 120/240 VAC
1/4 hp for N.O. 277 VAC
1/8 hp for N.C. 277 VAC
5A resistive 277 VAC
345 VA pilot duty 120/240 VAC N.O.
211 VA pilot duty 120/240 VAC N.C.
268 VA pilot duty 277 VAC N.O.
175 VA pilot duty 277 VAC N.C.
1/3 hp for N.O. 120/240 VAC
1/6 hp for N.C. 120/240 VAC
1/4 hp for N.O. 277 VAC
1/8 hp for N.C. 277 VAC
20A resistive 277 VAC
1110 VA pilot duty 277 VAC
240W tungsten N.C. 120 VAC
770 VA pilot duty 120 VAC
1 hp 120 VAC
2 hp 277 VAC
20A ballast N.O. 277 VAC
10A ballast N.C. 277 VAC
10A tungsten N.O. 120 VAC
Not rated for electrical.
20A resistive 300 VAC
20A resistive 28 VDC
15A resistive 600 VAC
1 hp 120 VAC, 1 Ph
2 hp 240-277 VAC, 1 Ph
3 hp 480-600 VAC, 1 Ph
5 hp 240 VAC, 3 Ph
7.5 hp 480 VAC, 3 Ph
20A ballast 277-480 VAC
RIBXLCEV, RIBXLCV
1-SPDT Relay
1-SPDT Relay
RIBXLSEV, RIBXLSV
1-SPST Relay
1-SPST Relay
(blue)
(yellow)
(orange)
N.C.
COM
N.O.
(blue)
(yellow)
(orange)
N.C.
COM
N.O.
(blue)
(blue)
N.O.
(yellow)
(yellow)
N.O.
(orange)
(orange)
N.O.
30 mA @ 10 VAC 12 mA @ 10 VDC
32 mA @ 12 VAC 14 mA @ 12 VDC
42 mA @ 24 VAC 16 mA @ 24 VDC
50 mA @ 30 VAC 18 mA @ 30 VDC
75 mA @ 24 VAC, 32 mA @ 24 VDC
(orange)*
(orange)*
Closed
Open
Auto
(orange)
(orange)
Closed
Open
Auto
Internal yellow jumper determines if SPST contacts are N.O. or N.C.
* Not rated for electrical ballast.
Order N.C. by adding -NC after model number.
1
1
2
Relay input current
Relay input current
0-10 VDC
0-5 VDC
Common
Analog out wiring
}
Analog out wiring
10-30 VAC/VDC
Common}
24 VAC/VDC
Common}
Current transducer only, 0-30A
–
–
Note:
Yes
*Gray wire on RIBXLSEV
Current Sensor
Wiring
(purple)
(purple)
Current
Sensor
Relay coil wiring
Relay coil wiring
}
0-10 VDC
0-5 VDC
Common
190 mA @ 24 VA C
Relay input current
Analog out wiring
24 VAC/VDC
Common
}
Relay coil wiring
}
0-10 VDC
Common
}
0-10 VDC
0-5 VDC
Common
Analog out wiring
21
*
*
*
*

1013. fifl 955POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Supply Voltage 24 - 40 VDC
Frequency 50 - 60 Hz
V Models 10 - 400 Hz
Output 4 - 20 mA, loop-powered
Output Impedance 600Ω max @ 24 VDC
Insulation Voltage 600 VAC
Accuracy 1.0% FS
Response Time 500 ms to 90% of step change
Overrange Limit Sensor self-limits to 25 mA output
Terminations Screw terminals
Materials Of Construction
UL 94 flammability rated
thermoplastic
Weight 1.3 lb (0.6 kg)
Approvals UL and ULC listed, File #E129625,
CE pending
Warranty 5 years
ORDERING INFORMATION
HIGH AC CURRENT TRANSDUCERS WITH CURRENT OUTPUT
SENTRY 200-A SERIES
Aperture
3
(7 .63)
4 .22
(10 .7)
4 .5
(11 .43)
in
(cm)
1 .9
(4 .83)
Depth
DESCRIPTION
The Sentry 200-A Series High AC Current Transducers with
Current Output can be used to directly monitor up to 2000A without requiring an additional current transformer
. The output
from these transducers is a 4-20 mA signal.
FEATURES
• Eliminates the need for a current transformer
• Large aperture to accommodate large conductors or
wire bundles
• Loop powered 4-20 mA output
• Multi-range input eliminates zero and span
adjustments
• Easy installation with integral mounting brackets
+
–
4-20 mA
Load
Power
Supply
24 VDC
Typical
–
+
+ -
Sentry
200-A
Monitored Conductor
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
200-3-A
MODEL DESCRIPTION
200-3-A Solid-core high current transducer, 0-750A, 4-20 mA output
200-3-A-V Solid-core high current transducer, 0-750A, 4-20 mA output (10 - 400 Hz)
200-4-A Solid-core high current transducer, 0-2000A, 4-20 mA output
200-4-A-V Solid-core high current transducer, 0-2000A, 4-20 mA output (10 -400 Hz)
MODEL RANGE SWITCH MAX CONT MAX FOR MAX FOR
POSITION 6 SEC 1 SEC
(amps)
200-3-A 0-375 375 750 1500 3750
0-500 500
0-750 750
200-4-A 0-1000 1000 2000 4000 10,000
0-1333 1333
0-2000 2000
Output 4-20 mA, loop-powered
Supply voltage 24-40 VDC
Output load 600Ω max @ 24 VDC
Rmax = (V supply-12)/0 .020
Accuracy 1 .0% FS
Frequency 50-60 Hz, (V models 10-400 Hz)
Response time 500 ms to 90% of step change
Case UL 94 flammability rated thermoplastic
Weight 1 .3 lb (0 .6 kg)
Agency approv als UL and ULC listed, File # E129625,
CE certified
Insulation class 600 VAC
Overrange limit Sensor self-limits to 25 mA output
Termination Screw terminals
Warranty 5 years
Note: The standard models are av erage responding . Also
available are va riable frequency integration models
f or monitoring the load side of a VFD .
Note: The standard models are average responding. Also
a
vailable are variable frequency integration models for
monitoring the load side of a VFD
.

1014. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 956fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
B258B 258B A258B A269 B269 C269
Nominal AC Voltage (VAC phase to phase) 120 208/240 480 120 208/240 480
Adjustment Range (V AC) 85-120 160-240 380-480 110-145 210-280 400-540
80-115 170-240 380-460
Frequency (Hz) 60 60 60 60 60 60
Power Consumption (W) 0 .75 1 .5 4 .5 1 .5 3 .0 6 .0
Response Time 50ms 50ms 50ms Adj . 1-10 sec Adj . 1-10 sec Adj . 1-10 sec
Reset Time 50ms 50ms 50ms 0 .25 sec 0 .25 sec 0 .25 sec
Mounting RB08-PC RB08-PC RB08-PC Surface Surface Surface
Weight oz (g) 5 (141 .7) 5 (141 .7) 5 (141 .7) 9 (255 .1) 9 (255 .1) 9 (255 .1)
Agency Approv als (UL file #E60400) UR, CSA UR, CSA UR*, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA
Repeat Accuracy ±0 .1% of setpoint (fixed conditions)
Reset Type Automatic
Deadband Approx 2%
Output Contacts SPDT
Contact Rating 10A @ 240 VAC, resistive

* Condition of acceptability: A258B must be used with the
RB08-PC socket .
Operating temp -20° to 131°F (-30° to 55°C)
Humidity 0-97% noncondensing
Dimensions
258 1 .95"H x 1 .95"W x 3 .25"D
(4 .96 x 4 .96 x 8 .25 cm)
RB08-PC 2 .25"H x 2 .0"W x 0 .625"D
(5 .7 x 5 .1 x 1 .6 cm)
269 6 .06"H x 3 .88"W x 2 .82"D
(15 .4 x 9 .9 x 7 .1 cm)
Warranty 5 years
ORDERING INFORMATION
THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE MONITORS
258, 269
DESCRIPTION
Models 258 and 269 continuously monitor three-phase
power lines for phase loss, phase reversal, and low voltage.
Model 269 also monitors for high voltage. Models 258 and
269 do not require a neutral connection and can be used with any Wye or Delta systems
. When correct voltage and
phase rotation are applied, the internal relay will energize.
A f
ault condition will de-energize the relay
. When the fault is
corrected, the monitor will automatically reset.
L3
L2
L1
Control
Voltage
Optional Alarm Indicator
M
M
M
M
Start
Stop
Model 269
Motor
CBA
M
M
M
1
2
8
543
L3
Control
Voltage
Motor
Stop
Model
258
Start
L2
L1
M
M
M
Shown de-energized
258
Shown de-energized
269
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A258B Three-phase voltage monitor, 480 VAC
258B Three-phase voltage monitor, 208/240 VAC
B258B Three-phase voltage monitor, 120 VAC (use with Model 3PT3 potential transformer)
RB08-PC 600V/10A socket (required with each 258 voltage monitor)
A269 Three-phase voltage monitor, 120 VAC (use with Model 3PT3 potential transformer)
B269 Three-phase voltage monitor, 208/240 VAC
C269 Three-phase voltage monitor, 480 VAC
SPECIFICATIONS
258 269
March 2014

1015. fifl 957POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
MOTORSAVER™ THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE MONITOR
201A
Supply Watts 5W
Frequency 50* or 60 Hz
Transient Protection 2500V for 10 ms
Line Voltage Monitored Three-phase, 190-480
VAC, adjustable
Low Voltage Trip 90% of setpoint
Low Voltage Reset 93% of setpoint
Reset Delay Time after Fault 2 seconds
Reset Delay Time after Power Loss
2 seconds
Trip Delay Time Low Voltage 4 seconds
Trip Delay Time Phase Fault 2 seconds
Trip Delay Time Unbalance 2 seconds
Voltage Unbalance Reset 4.5%
Voltage Unbalance Trip 6%
Dimensions 2.37"W x 1.75"H x 4.25"L
(6.0 x 4.4 x 10.8cm)
Weight 0.56 lb (0.25 kg)
Approvals UL Listed, File #E68520,
CE cer
tified
Warranty
5 years
DESCRIPTION
The MotorSaver™ 201A Three-Phase Voltage Monitor is an autoranging plug-in voltage monitor designed to protect three-phase motors regardless of size
. It is used on 190-
480
VAC 50/60 Hz motors to prevent damage caused by
single phasing, low voltage, phase reversal, or voltage unbalance. To detect harmful power line conditions, the
unique microprocessor-based voltage and phase sensing circuit constantly monitors the three-phase voltages
. When a
harmful condition is detected, the Model 201A MotorSaver's output relay is deactivated after a fixed trip-delay time period
.
The output rela
y reactivates after power line conditions return
to an acceptable level for a fixed restart delay time
. The trip
delay prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions
.
FEATURES
• Protection of three-phase motors against single
phasing, low voltage, phase reversal, and voltage unbalance
•
DIN rail- or surface-mounted socket
• UL and ULC listed, CE certified
• Bicolor LED indication of normal and fault conditions
• Single-phase condition detection regardless of
regenerated voltages
OL
OL
OL
OL
Motor
L1
L1
L2
L3
L2 L3
M
Start
M
M
M
M
StopHand
Auto Pilot
Off
Control
Voltage
240 VAC max
201A
2
81
435
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
201A MotorSaver three-phase voltage monitor
OT08PC Socket, 600 VAC, DIN rail or surface mount
SPECIFICATIONS
Shown de-energized
Model 201A
* 50 Hz will increase all delay times by 20%
.
201A
OT08PC
March 2014

1016. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 958fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
MOTORSAVER™ THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE MONITOR
250A
Supply Watts 5W
Frequency 50* or 60 Hz
Contact Rating DPDT, pilot duty 480 VA @
240 VAC General-purpose
10A @ 240 VAC
Transient Protection IEC 1000-4-5
Line Voltage Monitored 190-480 VAC, adjustable
Low Voltage Trip 90% of setpoint
Low Voltage Reset 93% of setpoint
Reset Delay Time after Fault Manual or 2-300 seconds
Reset Delay Time after
Power Loss Manual or 2-300 seconds
Trip Delay Time High Voltage 4 seconds
Trip Delay Time Low Voltage 4 seconds
Trip Delay Time Phase Fault 2 seconds
Trip Delay Time Unbalance 2 seconds
Voltage Unbalance Reset 4.5%
Voltage Unbalance Trip 6%
Operating Temperature -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C)
Dimensions 5.25"W x 2.9"H x 2.92"D
(13.3 x 7.4 x 7.4 cm)
Weight 0.875 lb (0.396 kg)
Approvals UL and cUL listed, File #E68520
Warranty
5 years
DESCRIPTION
The MotorSaver™ 250A Three-Phase Voltage Monitor is an
autoranging voltage monitor designed to protect three-phase
motors regardless of size
. It is used on 190-480 VAC, 50/60
Hz motors to prevent damage caused by single phasing, low voltage, phase reversal, voltage unbalance, and high voltage
.
Added f
eatures include DPDT contacts and an adjustable
restart time-delay setting
. The unique microprocessor-based
voltage and phase-sensing circuit constantly monitors the three-phase voltages to detect harmful power line conditions
. When a harmful condition is detected, the Model
250A's output relays are deactivated after a fixed trip-delay time period
. The output relay reactivates after power line
conditions return to an acceptable level for an adjustable restart delay time
. The trip and reset delays prevent nuisance
tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions.
FEATURES
• Pr
low-voltage, phase reversal, voltage unbalance, and high voltage
•
Adjustable restart delay
• DPDT contacts
• UL and cUL listed
• Bicolor LED indication of normal and fault conditions
• Detection of single-phase conditions regardless of regenerated voltages
OL
OL
OL
OL
Motor
L1
L1
L2
L3
L2 L3
M
Start
M
M
M
M
StopHand
Auto Pilot
Off
Input
Power
Control
Power
Alarm
Power
Alarm
250A
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
250A MotorSaver three-phase voltage monitor
SPECIFICATIONS
Run Green
Restart Delay Green
Reverse Phase Red
Unbalance/Single Phase Red
High/Low Voltage Red
LED INDICATOR
250A
shown de-energized
Motor Protection with Local Alarm
* 50 Hz will increase all delay times by 20%.
March 2014

1017. fifl 959POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
MOTORSAVER™ THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE MONITOR
355 SERIES
Supply Watts 6W maximum
Frequency 50*/60 Hz
Contact Rating

SPDT, pilot duty 470 VA @ 600
VAC (400 or 600V range) General-
purpose 10A @ 240 VAC (200V
range) 1hp @ 240 VAC (200V range)
Transient Protection
2500V for 10 ms
Line Voltage Monitored 190-240, 380-480, or 575-600 VAC
Low Voltage Trip 90% of setpoint (±1%)
Low Voltage Reset 93% of setpoint (±1%)
Reset Delay Time after Fault
Manual or 2-300 seconds
Reset Delay Time after Power Loss
Manual or 2-300 seconds
Trip Delay Time High Voltage
2-30 seconds, adjustable
Trip Delay Time Low Voltage
2-30 seconds, adjustable
Trip Delay Time Phase Fault
0.5 seconds
Trip Delay Time Unbalance
2-30 seconds, adjustable
Voltage Unbalance Reset
Trip setting minus 1%
Voltage Unbalance Trip 2% to 8%, adjustable
Dimensions 2.9”H x 5.25”W x 2.9”D
(7.4 x 13.3 x 7.4 cm) Weight
1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Approvals UL and cUL listed, File #E68520
Warranty

5 years
DESCRIPTION
The MotorSaver™ 355 Series Three-Phase Voltage Monitors are designed to protect three-phase motors regardless of size
. The 355-200 model monitors 190-240
VAC input voltages, the 355-400 model monitors 380-480 VAC input voltages, and the 355-600 model monitors 575- 600 VAC input voltages
. The unique microprocessor-based
voltage and phase-sensing circuit constantly monitors the three-phase voltages to detect harmful power line conditions, including single phasing, low-voltage, phase reversal, voltage unbalance, and high voltage
. When a harmful condition
is detected, the 355 Series output relays are deactivated after an adjustable trip-delay time period
. The output relay
reactivates after power line conditions return to an acceptable level for an adjustable restart delay time
. The trip and reset
delays prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions
.
FEATURES
• Protection of three-phase motors from loss of any
phase, low-voltage, phase reversal, voltage unbalance,
and high voltage
• Adjustable restart delay
• Adjustable trip delay
• Adjustable voltage-unbalance trip point
• Four diagnostic LEDs show overvoltage, undervoltage,
voltage unbalance, reverse-phase and normal conditions
•
UL and ULC listed
• Single-phase condition detection regardless of
regenerated voltages
OL
OL
OL
OL
Motor
L1
L1
L2
L3
L2 L3
M
Start
M
M
M
M
StopHand
Auto Pilot
Off
Control
Voltage355 Series
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
355-200 Three-phase voltage monitor, 190-240 VAC
355-400 Three-phase voltage monitor, 380-480 VAC
355-600 Three-phase voltage monitor, 575-600 VAC
SPECIFICATIONS
355-400
Shown de-energized
* 50 Hz will increase all delay times by 20%.
March 2014

1018. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 960fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
MOTORSAVER™ THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE MONITOR
455 SERIES
Supply Watts 6W maximum
Frequency 50*/60 Hz
Contact Rating SPDT 480 VA @ 240 VAC pilot duty
10A general purpose SPDT high
voltage relay (-480R) 470 VA @
600 VAC pilot duty
Transient Protection IEC 1000-4-5; 1995 ± 6K1
Line Voltage Monitored
455 190 - 480 VAC
455 - 480R 380 - 480 VAC
455 - 575 475 - 600 VAC
Low Voltage Trip 90% of setpoint (±1%)
Low Voltage Reset 93% of setpoint (±1%)
Reset Delay Time after Fault
Manual or 2-300 seconds
Reset Delay Time after Power Loss
Manual or 2-300 seconds
Trip Delay Time High Voltage
2-30 seconds, adjustable
Trip Delay Time Low Voltage
2-30 seconds, adjustable
Trip Delay Time Phase Fault
0.5 seconds
Trip Delay Time Unbalance
2-30 seconds, adjustable
Voltage Unbalance Reset
Trip setting minus 1%
Voltage Unbalance Trip 2% to 8%, adjustable
Dimensions 2.9"H x 5.25"W x 2.9"D
(7.4 x 13.3 x 7.4 cm)
Weight 0.88 lb (0.396 kg)
Approvals UL and cUL listed, #E68520, CS1,
C1
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The Model 455 three-phase voltage monitor combines load
and line-side monitoring to alert the user of contact failure or
impending contact failure
. The line-side monitoring will protect
the motor from damaging line-side conditions prior to the motor starting
. With the Model 455, your motor is fully protected at all
times. The motor will not start if a power problem is present.
The monitor is equipped with an infrared LED to communicate
with the handheld diagnostic tool, the Informer-MS, to display MotorSaver
®
data to assist in monitoring and troubleshooting the
system
. Motor run hours, displayed by the Informer-MS can now
be reset on the Model 455.
INPUT
POWER
L1
M1 M2 M3
L2 L3
OL
OL
OL
B
A
C
MAGNETIC
CONTACTOR
MOTOR
MS455
THERMOSTAT
OPTIONAL
CONTROL
POWER
24 - 240 VAC
TM
M
MAG.
COIL
HAND STOP
OFF
AUTO PILOT
START
OL
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
455 Three-phase voltage monitor, 190-480 VAC
455-480R Three-phase voltage monitor, 380-480 VAC
455-575 Three-phase voltage monitor, 575-600 VAC
INFORMER-MS Hand held diagnostic/trouble shooting tool
SPECIFICATIONS
FEATURES
• The 455's universal range from 190-480VAC 50/60 Hz provides
the versatility needed to handle global applications.
• Four adjustment pots provide versatility for a variety of
applications.
• Load and line-side monitoring provides contactor protection.
• Diagnostic LEDs indicate trip status and provide simple
troubleshooting.
• Microcontroller-based circuitry for better accuracy and higher
reliability.
L1 L2 L3
190-480 VAC, 3Ø, 50/60 HZ
MODEL 455
OVER
VOLT.
PHASING
FAULT
UNDER
VOLT.
PILOT DUTY RATING
480 VA AT 240 VAC
RUN
VOLT. ADJ.
(VAC)
208
416
220
440
200
400
230
460
190
380
240
480
UNBALANCE
TRIP (NEMA %)
82
M1 M2 M3
SymCom. Inc.
300
100
2
MAN
RESTART
(SEC)
302
15
TRIP
DELAY
(SEC)
IR
LINK
IND. CONT. EQ.
LISTED
784X
4.030 (102.36)
5.250 (133.35)
4.500 (114.30)
Ø 0.375
(9.53)
2.9
(73.66)
0.150 (3.81)
2.163
(54.94)
2.913
(73.99)
Model 455
* 50 Hz will increase all delay times by 20%.
• Single-phase conditions are detected regardless of
regenerated voltages.
• Transient protection meets IEEE and IEC standards and
permits operation under tough conditions.
in
(cm)
March 2014

1019. fifl 961POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
MOTORSAVER™ THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE MONITOR
460
Supply Watts 6W maximum
Frequency 50*/60 Hz
Humidity 10-95% RH, non-condensing
Contact Rating SPDT, pilot duty 480 VA @ 240 VAC
General-purpose 10A @ 240 VAC
Transient Protection IEC 1000-4-5, ANSI/IEEE C62.41,
UL508
Line Voltage Monitored 190-480
Low Voltage Trip 90% of setpoint (±1%)
Low Voltage Reset 93% of setpoint (±1%)
Reset Delay Time
after Fault 1-500 second adjustable
Reset Delay Time after Power Loss
1-500 second adjustable
Trip Delay Time High Voltage
1-30 second adjustable
Trip Delay Time
Low Voltage 1-30 second adjustable
Trip Delay Time Phase Fault
1 second fixed
Trip Delay Time Unbalance
1-30 second adjustable
Voltage Unbalance Reset
Trip setting minus 1% (5-8%) Trip
setting minus 0.5% (2-4%)
Voltage Unbalance Trip 2% to 8%, adjustable
Operating Temperature -4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)
Dimensions 3.5"H x 2.1"W x 2.4"D
(8.9 x 5.3 x 6.1 cm)
Weight 0.9 lb (0.4 kg)
Approvals UL and cUL listed, File #E68520, CE
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The MotorSaver™ Model 460 microcontroller-based
voltage and phase sensing circuit constantly monitors the
three phase voltage to detect harmful power line conditions
.
When a har
mful condition is detected, the Model 460 output
relay is deactivated after an adjustable trip delay time
. The
output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to an acceptable level for an adjustable restart delay time
. If
equipped with the man
ual reset option, an external normally
open momentary reset switch must be closed to reactivate the output relay. The trip and restart delays prevent nuisance
tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions.
The Model 460 automatically senses whether it is connected
to a 190-240V 60 Hz system, a 440-480V 60 Hz system, or a 380-416V 50 Hz system
. An adjustment is provided to set
the nominal line voltage from 190-240 or 380-480 VAC. Other
adjustments include a 1-30
second trip delay, a 1-500 second
restart delay, and a 2% to 8% voltage-unbalance trip point adjustment.
FEATURES
• Protection of three-phase motors from loss of any
phase, low-voltage, phase reversal, voltage unbalance,
and high voltage
• Adjustable restart delay
• Adjustable trip delay
• Adjustable voltage unbalance trip point
• Optional manual reset
• Diagnostic LEDs for indication of trip status
• Single-phase condition detection regardless of
regenerated voltages
• Surface or DIN rail mounting
Control Po wer
24-240 VAC
External
Normally Open
Momentary Manual
Reset Switch
(customer
supplied)
Shown de-energized
Model 460
Input
Power
Motor
OL
OL
OL
OL
L1
L1
L2
L3
L2 L3
4 5 6
12 3
Auto
Pilot Contact
Manual Reset
on 460-MR only
Off
ManualStop
Start
M
M
Magnetic
Contactor
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
460
* 50 Hz will increase all delay times by 20%.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
460 Three-phase voltage monitor, 190-480 VAC
460-MR Three-phase voltage monitor, 190-480 VAC with manual reset
460-575 Three-phase voltage monitor, 190-480 VAC, 1-30 second trip delay, 1-500 second restart delay, 2-8% voltage unbalance trip point
March 2014

1020. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 962fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
SURGE PROTECTORS
DTK-120HW, DTK-MRJ11, DTK-2LVLP
DTK-120HW Hard-Wired Surge Protection
Service Voltage 110/125 VAC
Frequency 0 Hz- 400 Hz
Filtering RFI/EMI noise
Continuous Current Unlimited
Protection 700 V L-N, L-G
600V N-G
Clamping Level 130 VRMS/185V peak
Surge Current 19,500A
Response Time <1 ns
Connections 3/4" hub-mount 3-12 AWG leads
Dimensions 2.9"H x 2.8"W x 1.7"D
(7.3 x 7.1 x 4.3 cm)
Weight 0.5 lb (0.22 kg)
Approvals UL 1449 3rd Edition, cUL 1449, IEEE
C62.41B, File #E136659
Warranty 10 years
DESCRIPTION
The DTK Series products are general-purpose MOV based
power line, telephone line, and data line surge protectors.
The
y are designed to protect electronic equipment from
surges and spikes that may be present on power inputs, communications, or data lines.
FEATURES
• Metal-Oxide Varistor (MOV) technology
• Self-restoring after each surge within ratings
• Nanosecond response time
• UL listed
DTK-2LVLP
DTK-120HW
Protected Equipment
Protected Line 120 VAC
Ground
Protected Equipment
To Building Ground
To Building Ground
If a shield is used, then
ground at one end only.
Data
Line In
DTK-RJ11
Wall Jack
Neutral
(white) (green)(black)
Hot
Unprotected
Pair #1
Unprotected
Pair #2
Protected
Pair #1
Protected
Pair #2
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
DTK-MRJ11
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DTK-120HW 120V inline surge protector
DTK-120/240CM+ 120/240 VAC surge protector
DTK-MRJ11 130V telephone line surge protector
DTK-2L
VLPLV
27V four-wire data line surge protector
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DTK-2L
VLPX
15V four-wire data line surge protector
DTK-1LVLPLV 1 pair 30V terminal strip surge protector
DTK-1L
VLPX
1 pair 14V terminal strip surge protector
DTK-2L
VLP-SCP-D
Low voltage surge protector
DTK-120HW
DTK-2LVLP
DTK-MRJ11 Data/Phone Line Protection
Service Voltage 130 VRMS
Clamp Voltage 20V
Continuous Current 150 mA
Protection RJ11/RJ14/RJ45 female to ground
Energy Dissipation 76 joules
Surge Current 2000 amps/pair (6V - 50V)
9000 amps/pair (75V - 130V)
Response Time <5 ns
Connections RJ11/RJ14/RJ45 female in/out +
ground wire
Operating Temperature -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity Maximum 95% (non-condensing)
Dimensions 1.7"H x 3.0"W x 1.2"D (6.9 x 7.8 x 2.9
cm)
Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Approvals UL 497A, File #E163310
Warranty 10 year limited
DTK-2LVLP Low-Voltage Data Line Protection
Let Through Voltage
X: 15 VRMS
LV: 27 VRMS
Continuous Current Unlimited
Accuracy
X: 15 VRMS
LV: 27 VRMS
Protection L-G (all lines protected)
Energy Dissipation
X: 8 joules/pair
LV: 17 joules/pair
Surge Current 2000 amps/pair
Response Time <5 ns
Connections Screw terminals 22-16 AWG wire
Dimensions 1.6"H x 3.0"W x 1.6"D
(4.1 x 7.6 x 4.1 cm)
Weight 0.15 lb (0.07 kg)
Approvals UL 497B, File #E163310
Warranty 10 year limited
March 2014

1021. fifl 963POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
DTK-120SR
Service Voltage 120V
MCOV

150V
Suppressed Voltage Rating

600V
Max Continuous Current
20A
EMI/RFI Attenuation

Up to 35dB, 100kHz-100MHz
Peak Surge Current 54,000 amps
Protection

L-N, L-G, N-G
Operating Temperature 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
Dimensions

6.87"W x 3.50"H x 2.50"D
(17.45 x 9.06 x 6.35 cm)
Weight 0.76 lb (0.45 kg)
Approvals UL1449, 3rd Edition
Warranty 10-year limited
DTK-2MHLPWB
Service voltage
5B 0-5 VDC 36B 36 VDC
12B 12 VDC 48B 48 VDC
24B 24 VDC 75B 75 VDC
MCOV/Let-Through Voltage
5B 5/6.8 VDC 36B 48/57 VDC
12B 18/21.6 VDC 48B 64/76 VDC
24B 33/39 VDC 75B 90/108 VDC
Max Continuous Current
5A
Peak Surge Current 20kA
Data Rate

200kbps (5V) to 2Mbps (130V)
Protection

L-G (all lines protected)
Connections

Edge card into DTK-MB mounting
base
Operating Temperature -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C)
Dimensions 2.1"H x 0.9"W x 1.4"D
(5.3 x 2.3 x3.6 cm)
Weight 0.078 lb (0.036 kg) - with base
Approvals UL 497B, DTK-120SR Recognition,
File # E328921, DTK-2MHLP UL File #E14557
Warranty
10-year limited
DESCRIPTION
The new Model DTK-120SR is an in-line, four-stage, power- line surge protector with EMI/RFI filtering
. It is designed for
mounting in an enclosure or control panel. Series installation
eliminates the need to dedicate a circuit breaker for surge protection while allowing for installation flexibility
. The 120SR
meets stringent government and military specs for fire panel applications and is suitable for use on critical 20 Amp loads
.
The Model DTK-2MHLP series of signal, data and loop
circuit surge protectors provide robust protection in a compact package
. Designed for ease of installation with convenient
field-replaceable modules. The 2MHLP protects two circuit
pairs per module. Applications include protection of 4-20mA
current loops
, alarm pane NAC, SLC and IDC loops, and
burglar alarm panels
.
FEATURES
DTK-120SR
• Series design for fast response and best protection
• Four-stage hybrid circuit design
• User replaceable fusing
• EMI/RFI filtering
• Compact design
• Screw terminals w/safety cover
• LED's for protection status, ground presence, ground
fault indication and fuse status
SPECIFICATIONS
DTK-120SR
DTK-2MHLPWB •
Multi-stage, SAD technology, hybrid design
• Hard-wire mounting base
• Field replaceable, hot swappable, modular edge card
connection design
• Multiple voltage levels for variety of voice/data
applications
• Two pairs protected per module, can be extended to ten
pairs using a common ground using DTK-MB base
DTK-2MHLP
POWER/DATA SURGE PROTECTOR
DTK-120SR, DTK-2MHLP
March 2014

1022. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 964fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
in
(cm)
2.50 (6.35)
2.04 (5.18)
6.00 (15.24)
6.20 (15.74)
6.87 (17.45)
3.57 (9.06)
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
POWER/DATA SURGE PROTECTOR
DTK-120SR, DTK-2MHLP
GNDG ND
UNPROTECTED
1+ 2–2+1–
GNDG ND
PROTECTED1+ 2–2+1–
DTK-MB
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DTK-2MHLP5BWB Surge protector, 5 VDC data line with base
DTK-2MHLP12BWB Surge protector, 12 VDC data line with base
DTK-2MHLP24BWB Surge protector, 24 VDC data line with base
DTK-120SR Surge protector, 120 VAC in-line, 20A continuous
DTK-120SR
1.42
(3.6)
2.09
(5.3)
1.69 (4.3)
2.02 (5.1)
1.89
(4.8)
1.54
(3.9)
DTK-2MHLP
4.13
(10.5)
1.17
(3.0)
1.65 (4.2)
0.27 (0.7)
0.96
(2.4)
2.21
(5.6)
0.27
(0.7)
0.96
(2.4)
Ø 0.16
(2 PLCS TYP)
1.07
(2.7)
DTK-MB
Line 1
Neut
GND
Line 1
Neut
GND
IN
SUPPLY
OUT
EQUIPMENT
Note: If the DTK-120S15A is not installed inside the control panel/cabinet, provide
an appropriate enclosure per NEC, NFPA, and all applicable codes.
Expected System Voltages
120 VAC L-N L-G N-G
Voltages 120 120 0
BLK
WHT
GRN
BLK
WHT
GRN
DTK-120SR
March 2014

1023. fifl 965POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Supply Voltage 120VAC
Maximum Continuous
Operating Voltage 150VAC
Short Circuit Current Rating
10kA
Nominal Discharge Current Rating
3kA
Maximum
Continuous
Current
20A
Peak Surge Current 54,000 Amps
Temperature Range 32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C)
Protection DTK-120SRD
Type 2 component assembly
DTK-TSS4D Type 2 SPD
Housing Type
DTK-120SRD ABS

DTK-TSS4D
Polycarbonate
Dimensions
DTK-120SRD 6.87" W x 3.50" H x 2.50" D
(17.45 x 8.89 x 6.35 cm)
DTK-TSS4D 9.50" W x 6.25" H x 3.63" D
(24.1 x 15.9 x 9.2 cm)
Weight
DTK-120SRD 0.76 lb (0.34 kg)
DTK-TSS4D 1.85 lb (0.84 kg)
Approvals cUL, UL 1283, UL1449 3rd Edition
Warranty 10 year limited
ORDERING INFORMATION
54KA SERIES CONNECTED SURGE PROTECTOR WITH DRY CONTACTS
DTK-120SRD, DTK-TSS4D
DESCRIPTION
Ditek's 54kA Series Connected Surge Protectors with Dry Contacts protects 120V power on electrical circuits and control panels and has Dry Contacts for remote notification of surge protection status
. The hybrid series design provides
maximum critical load protection, with EMI/RFI filtering. The
DTK-120SRD is ideal for use in UL listed control panels where a UL Recognized component is required
. LED
indicates the protection status. DTK-TSS4D is ideal for use
when a UL Listed SPD is required.
FEATURES
• Series design for fast response and best protection
• Multi-stage hybrid circuit design
• Suitable for use on circuit breakers rated at 10kA AIC
• UL 1449 & 1283 EMI/RFI filtering
• Form C Dry Contact circuit
• DTK-TSS4D only in NEMA 4X weatherproof enclosure
• 10 Year limited warranty
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DTK120-SRD 120V surge protector, dry contacts, hybrid design, ABS housing
DTK-TSS4D 120V surge protector, dry contacts, hybrid design, NEMA 4X
DTK-120SRD
SURGE PROTECTOR
(TYPICAL)
L
N
G
NO C NC
L
N
G
NC
C
NO
BLACK
WHITE
GREEN120VAC - 1 SINGLE POLE
25 Amp Max BREAKER,
TO BE FIELD VERIFIED
120VAC TO FACP
TO FACP AUX. CONTACTS OR
ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MODULE
DRY CONTACT
120VAC(+)
NEUTRAL (-)
LOAD: 120VAC. 0.5AMP (MAX)
EXAMPLE REMOTE MONIT ORING
USING FACP FOR NOTIFICATION
EXAMPLE MONITORING CIRCUIT
DTK-120SRD
SURGE PROTECTOR
(TYPICAL)
L
N
G
NO C NC
L
N
G
NC
C
NO
BLACK
WHITE
GREEN120VAC - 1 SINGLE POLE
25 Amp Max BREAKER,
TO BE FIELD VERIFIED
120VAC TO FACP
TO FACP AUX. CONTACTS OR
ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MODULE
DRY CONTACT
120VAC(+)
NEUTRAL (-)
LOAD: 120VAC. 0.5AMP (MAX)
EXAMPLE REMOTE MONIT ORING
USING FACP FOR NOTIFICATION
EXAMPLE MONITORING CIRCUIT
DTK-TSS4D
DTK-120SRD
March 2014

1024. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 966fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PC642C Dual-pair (four-wire) surge protector, base mount (PCB1B required)
DRS Single-pair (two-wire) surge protector, DIN rail mount
-008 Clamp voltage, 8V
-015 Clamp voltage, 15V
-030 Clamp voltage, 30V
-036 Clamp voltage, 36V
-LC Low capacitance option (PC642C only)
PCB1B Mounting/connector base for PC642C
DATA LINE SURGE PROTECTOR
DRS, PC642C SERIES
Voltage Clamp (±10%) 8, 15, 30, or 36V
Response Time <1 ns
Peak Surge Current <10 kA (8 x 20 μs)
Life Expectancy >100 occurrences @ 2000A,
8 x 20 μs
Series Resistance 5Ω nominal
Operating Temperature -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Dimensions
PC642C, PCB1B 2.5"H x 1.0"W x 2.0"D
(6.1 x 2.5 x 5.1 cm)
DRS 2.95"H x 0.8"W x 2.35"D
(7.5 x 2.0 x 6.0 cm)
Capacitance 1500 pF; PC642 w/ LC option: 50 pF
Operational Current Maximum 150 mA @ clamp voltage
Protector
Primary Three-element gas tube (GDT)
Secondary Rugged solid-state avalanche diode
(SAD)
Third Positive temp coefficient device
(PTC)
Approvals UL497B, File #E175287
Weight 0.06 lb (0.03 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Model PC642C Series surge suppressor is a dual-pair
(four wire) and the DRS Series is a single pair (two-wire)
DIN rail mount module implementing three-stage hybrid
technology
. These modules protect against over-voltage
transients with gas tubes and silicon avalanche components.
In addition, sneak and f
ault currents are mitigated with
automatic resetting fuses (PTCs)
. The PTCs increase
resistance several orders of magnitude when over currents are present and return to normal when over-currents are removed
. The ability to self-restore in this manner significantly
increases suppressor performance and survivability.
FEATURES
• Lightning protection for low voltage signal lines
• Three-stage protection
• Plug-in and DIN rail mount modules
• Automatic recovery
• Nanosecond response time
Ground
Equipment
Side
Field Side
DRS
Shield
Line
Line
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
If a shield is used, then
ground at one end only.
Keying Pin
PC642C on PCB1B
10
8
6
4
2
9
7
5
3
1
Pin 1 or 10 grounded
to local building-
approved ground
Do not install your
own ground rod.
Unprotected
Pair 1
Unprotected
Pair 2
Protected
Pair 1
Protected
Pair 2
Data Line In
Data Line Out
Field Side Electronics Side
DRS
PC642C
PCB1B
March 2014

1025. fifl 967POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
Building-Approved
Ground
Unprotected
Side
Hardwire or use
provided 7' (2.13m)
cord with male RJ
TELCO
RD
GN
BL
SL-WT
Protected
Side
RJ or
Hardwire
To Phone
or Computers
FAS-TELHSP-121BT1RU
Building-
Approved
Ground
From
Power
Panel
To
Protected
Equipment
LIGHT ON - NORMAL
LIGHT OFF - REQUIRES SERVICE
GRD
NEUT
AC
120VAC
GRD
NEUT
AC
15 AMPS MAX
L
I
N
E
E
Q
U
I
P
ORDERING INFORMATION
POWER & DATA LINE SURGE PROTECTOR
FAS-TEL, HSP-121BT1RU
HSP-121BT1RU
Supply Voltage 120 VAC, 60 Hz
Supply Current 15A
LED Indication Extinguishes on overload or internal
protection failure
Clamping Level Maximum 325V L-N, 350V L-G
Clamping Category 330V L-N, 400V L-G ANSI/IEEE
C62.41 1991-CAT.C1/B3
Surge Current Maximum 10,000A
Fusing 15A slowblow (GF-15S) Blown fuse
will disconnect load from power
source.
Response Time <5 ns
Connections Terminals
Operating Temperature -3° to 186°F (-20° to 85°C)
Dimensions 2.95”H x 5.25”W x 2.0”D (7.5 x 13.3 x
5.1 cm)
Weight 0.83 lb (0.38 kg)
Approvals UL 1449A recognized component,
File# E324279
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The HSP-121BT1RU is an advanced, three-stage, hybrid
solid-state power line protector. It is an in-line style surge
protector designed f
or mounting in an enclosure or control
panel to protect sensitive electronic controls from noise, surges, and spikes that are present on the power lines. The
HSP-121 is UL recognized.
The FAS-TEL is an advanced two-stage hybrid, solid-state
phone and data line surge protector. It is designed to protect
electronic equipment from unw
anted surges and transients
that may be present on the phone line or communications data lines. The F AS-TEL is UL Listed.
FEATURES
• Protection from overvoltage transients
• Three-stage hybrid technology
• Automatic recovery
• Fast response time
SPECIFICATIONS
HSP-121BT1RU
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HSP-121BT1RU 120 VAC inline surge protector with terminal block
FAS-TEL Data line/telephone line protector
FAS-TEL
WIRING
FAS-TEL
Signal Voltage 220V Peak
Continuous Current Unlimited
Nominal Breakdown Voltage
270V
Protection Between TIP/RING/GND
Capacitance 50 pF
Series Resistance 8Ω
Surge Current Maximum 100A, 10 x 1000 μs
Response Time <1 ns
Connections 1 female, 1 male RJ11 jacks
Operating Temperature -40° to 149°F(-40° to 65°C)
Dimensions 2.0" H x 2.0" W x 1.0" D
(5.1 x 5.1 x 2.5 cm)
Weight 0.5 lb (0.22 kg)
Approvals UL 1449 listed, File #E118759
Warranty 1 year
March 2014

1026. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 968fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA

DIN RAIL MOUNT SURGE PROTECTION
OVR DIN SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The OVR DIN Rail Surge Protection Devices are the
pluggable AC DIN rail devices. They are UL 1449 3rd
edition. Over 80% of transient surges are caused by internal
sources such as load switching and normal equipment operations
. Installation of these SPD's will provide protection
to valuable equipment and help keep an operation up and running
. Installation at branch panels, control panels and
terminal equipment is recommended to provide the most comple protection
. The O VR DIN Rail series utilize fast acting
metal oxide varistor technology to limit overvoltage to values compatible with the sensitive equipment connected to the network
.
FEATURES
• MO •
End of life indicator
• Pluggable replaceable cartidges
• Remote indication (only on -TSU models)
OVRT23N40320PTSU
Type 2 surge protector, 2 phase + neutral, 40 kA surge capacity, 320V, pluggable, with optional auxiliary contact
(Blank)
(Blank)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 120 VAC, 277 VAC, 347 VAC, 480
VAC, 600 VAC, 230 VAC
Let Through Voltage See technical data sheet for
specifications
Surge Current 15 kA, 40 kA, 70 kA
Response Time <25ns
Dimensions
One Pole 0.7" W x 3.3" H x 2.6" D
(1.8 x 8.4 x 6.4cm)
Two Pole 1.4" W x 3.3" H x 2.6" D
(3.6 x 8.4 x 6.4 cm)
Three Pole 2.1" W x 3.3" H x 2.6" D
(5.3 x 8.4 x 6.4 cm)
One Pole + N 1.4" W x 3.3" H x 2.6" D
(3.6 x 8.4 x 6.4 cm)
Two pole + N 2.1" W x 3.3" H x 2.6" D
(5.3 x 8.4 x 6.4 cm)
Three Pole + N 2.8" W x 3.3" H x 2.6" D
(7.1 x 8.4 x 6.4 cm)
Weight
One Pole 0.25 lb (0.1 kg)
Two Pole/ One Pole + N
0.5 lb (0.2 kg)
Three Pole/Two Pole + N
0.75 lb (0.3 kg)
Three Pole + N 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Approvals CE, RoHS, UR File #E322885
Warranty 1 year
March 2014

1027. fifl 969POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
LIGHTNING ARRESTER
392-SVSR2
Impulse Breakdown
@100/V/μsec 300-750V
DC Holder 150 VDC extinguishing in
less than 150 ms
Insulation Resistance
(initial) <100 MΩ
Capacitance 5 pF
Impulse Life Specification Rated Heavy-Duty


80% survival to 400
surges of 500A
AC Discharge
Current 65A, 11 cycle, 60 Hz
End-Of-Life Limits
Insulation Resistance <1 MΩ
DC Breakdown Voltage <180V
Impulse Breakdown Voltage <900V
Vented (back-up)
DC Breakdown Voltage <1600V (100-200 avg)
Max Single
Impulse Discharge Current 10 kA, 8 x 20 μsec surge
Dimensions 3.5"H x 3.75"W x 2.5"D
(8.9 x 9.5 x 6.4 cm)
Weight 0.85 lb (0.39 kg)
Approvals UL listed File #E2332
DESCRIPTION
The Model 392-SVSR2 is a two-pair gas tube lightning
arrester in a plastic outdoor enclosure. It protects the
comm
unication lines that run between buildings against high
voltage transients caused by motors, transmitters, lightning, etc.
Transients can be harmful and even capable of destroying
building automation systems. It is recommended that
the
Model 392-SVSR2 be used at all points where
communication cables exit or enter a building
. To protect
low voltage communication inputs on Building Automation Systems, this device should be used in conjunction with an appropriate voltage level surge protector such as a Model DTK-2LVLP
.
If a shield is used, then
ground at one end only .
Use #6 AWG solid wire to
copper clad steel ground
rod (min . 8'/2 .4m deep)
through shortest path with
no sharp bends .
(white) (white)
(orange)
(red)
(red)
(blue) (blue)
(orange)
392-SVSR2
Notes: To protect low-voltage communication circuits, this device
should be used in conjunction with an appropriate vo ltage
level surge protector such as the Model DTK-2LVLP .
When applying surge protectors, use of the protection
zone concept is recommended .
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
392-SVSR2
MODEL DESCRIPTION
392-SVSR2 Lightning arrester
March 2014

1028. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 970fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
ORDERING INFORMATION
METAL OXIDE VARISTOR, TRANSZORB
V130LA1, V39ZA1, V47ZA1, 1.5KE56CA
DESCRIPTION
Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV) and Transzorb Voltage
Transient Suppressors reduce high voltage spikes that
could damage or confuse sensitive electronic circuits
. Voltage
spikes often will cause digital logic circuits to select an incorrect logic state or lock up entirely
.
Power Transformer
120 VAC 24 VAC
120V
MOV
24V
MOV
Suppresses external voltage spikes coming from
the power distribution bus and the spikes from
switching the power transformer off.
Circuit Hot
Circuit Return
MOV (both places)
Reduces mechanical switch arcs and electronic switch over-voltage breakdown. MOV voltage should match load circuit voltage.
Inductive Load (relay, EP valve, etc.)
Load Switch (mechanical or electrical)
Transformer Installation
Coil and Switch Installation
WIRING
V130LA1
CAUSES OF VOLTAGE SPIKES
Voltage spikes appear in the user's circuit in three main ways:
1
. Voltage spikes come in on the power distribution bus and
are coupled to the user's circuits by the winding-to-winding
capacitance of the user's power transformers.
2. Voltage spikes are generated in the power transformer
secondary when the power transformer primary is turned off and the transformer's magnetic field collapses
.
3. Voltage spikes are generated within the user's circuits
when an inductive load is switched off and the load's magnetic field collapses
. Voltage noise is also generated at
the switched contacts and is radiated to the wires leading to the user's microprocessor
.
OPERATION
When a voltage at or below the suppressor's nominal voltage is applied, the suppressor acts essentially like an open circuit
. When a high-voltage spike appears across the
suppressor the suppressor conducts or turns on, shunting the excess energy to the circuit return path, thereby reducing the amplitude of the voltage spike
. When the voltage spike
subsides, the suppressor reverts back to its open circuit state.
M
OV suppressors are bi-directional and can be used to
protect both AC and DC circuits
. They provide a somewhat
soft clamping action in that the amplitude of the reduced voltage spike rises noticeably with the amount of energy contained in the spike
. Transzorb suppressors come in
unidirectional and bi-directional versions. The uni-directional
versions are polarity-sensitive and can only be used in DC applications
. The bi-directional versions may be used in both
AC and DC circuits just like the M OV. Transzorbs have a
faster response time and a much harder clamping action than MOVs because voltage spikes are clipped at a more consistent level independent of their energy content
. The
Transzorb sold by Kele is a bi-directional version.
Note:
Kele carries the varistors and transzorbs most often
specified by the BAS manufacturers
. They are general-
purpose in nature and should cover most applications at the recommended voltage
.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
V130LA1 130 VAC/175 VDC varistor voltage transient suppressor
V39ZA1 25 VAC/31 VDC varistor voltage transient suppressor
V47ZA1 30 VAC/38 VDC varistor voltage transient suppressor
1.5KE56CA 24 VAC/VDC transzorb voltage transient suppressor
V39ZA1
V47ZA1
1.5KE56CA
V130LA UL-recognized component,
File #E75961 and E56529
V39ZA1/V47ZA1 UL-recognized component,
File #E135010
1.5KE56CA UL-recognized component,
File #E116110
AGENCY APPROVALS
March 2014

1029. fifl 971POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
POWER EQUATIONS
FORMULAS TO DETERMINE AMPERES, hp, kW, and kVA

To Find

Direct Current
Alternating Current
Single-Phase Three-Phase
Amperes (I) when hp x 746 hp x 746 hp x 746
horsepower is known E x %eff E x %eff x pf 1 .73 x E x %eff x pf
Amperes (I) when kW x 1000 kW x 1000 kW x 1000
kilowatts is known E E x pf 1 .73 x E x pf
Amperes (I) when kVA x 1000 kVA x 1000
kVA is known E 1 .73 x E
Kilowatts (kW) I x E I x E x pf I x E x 1 .73 x pf
1000 1000 1000
kVA I x E I x E x 1 .73
1000 1000
Horsepower (output) I x E x %eff I x E x %eff x pf I x E x 1 .73 x %eff x pf
746 746 746

COMMON ELECTRICAL TERMS
Ampere (I) Unit of current or rate of flow of electricity
V olt (E) Unit of electromotive force
Ohm (R) Unit of resistance
Ohms Law: I = E
R (DC or 100% pf)
%eff Motor efficiency Note: If unknown assume %eff x pf = 0 .7 for 25 hp or less
0 .8 above 25 hp
Megohm 1,000,000 ohms
V olt amperes (VA) Unit of apparent power
E x I (single-phase)
E x I x 1 .73 (three-phase)
Kilovolt Amperes (kVA) 1000 volt - amperes
Power Factor (pf) Ratio of true to apparent power
W or kW
VA kVA
Watt Hour (Wh) Unit of electrical work
One watt for one hour
3 .413 Btu
Kilowatt Hour (kWh) 1000 watt hours
Horsepower (hp) Measure of time rate of doing work
Equivalent of raising 33,000 pounds 1 foot in 1 minute
746 watts
MOTOR APPLICATION FORMULAS
T orque (lb-ft) = hp x 5250
rpm
Shaft stress = hp x 321,000
(pounds per square inch) rpm x shaft dia
3

For pumps
Horsepower = gpm x head in feet x specific gravity* (*Water - 1 .00, Ethylene glycol - 1 .125)
3960 x mechanical efficiency of pump
Speed
Synchronous rpm = Hertz x 120
Poles
Percent slip = synchronous rpm - full load rpm x 100
synchronous rpm
= COSØ (Ø = angle current leads or lags voltage)
()
March 2014

1030. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 972fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
POWER EQUATIONS
A
C
B
120(240)(480)
120(240)(480)
120(240)(480)
Three-phase Three-wire
POLYPHASE (VAC)
SINGLE-PHASE (VAC)
A
C
B
208(416)
240(480)
120(240)
Three-phase Four-wire Delta
120(240)
240(480)
120(277)
120(277)
120(277)
208(480)
208(480)
208(480)
Three-phase Four-wire Wye
C
BA
N
N
A
120(240)(480)
Two-wire
N
Ground
Line
A
120(240)
Three-wire
N
Ground
Line
120(240)
B
240(480)
Line
= amps x (length of circuit in ft) x 2* x (ohms per 1000 ft)
1000
= I x L x 2* x R
* Change to 1.73 for three-phase
SINGLE-PHASE VOLTAGE DROP
fiV
fiV
W ire Size AWG ohms/1000 ft (@ 77 °F)
(Stranded)
24 25.67
22 16.46
20 10.35
18 6.512
16 4.095
14 2.576
12 1.620
March 2014

1031. fifl 973POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
DETERMINING BURDEN FOR CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
You can see from the above example that if the total burden (wire plus device) is only 2.5 VA, the accuracy of the reading will be
±0.6%. If a higher burden (up to 12.5 VA) is used, the accuracy will be ±1.2%.
For lower-line currents, the accuracy at 10% of the CT rating (120A through a 1200:5 CT) is double the published value. On the
above example, at 2.5 VA burden, the accuracy would be ±1.2%. At a 12.5 VA burden, the accuracy would be ±2.4%.
BURDEN CALCULATION
STEP 1: Determine the burden of the connected device in VA or ohms impedance. This should be on the device data sheet.
STEP 2: Add impedance of the secondary wire run. Measure the length of the wire run between current transformer and the
burden (e.g., meter, relay, transducer, etc.). Refer to Nomogram No. 2 and determine the resistance, in ohms, of the
wires that connect the secondary of the current transformer to the devices. The Nomogram makes allowances for
the return wire. Add this resistance from Nomogram No. 2 to the impedance of the connected burdens. Nomogram
No.1 will help convert ohms to VA.
STEP 3: Make sure the total burden does not exceed the specified limits for the chosen CT.
If a current transformer (CT) reads low, then the secondary is probably overloaded. Burden is the load which may be imposed
on a transformer secondary by cables and connected devices without causing an error greater than the stated accuracy
classification. Lower burden and proper sizing can improve the accuracy of the CT. It is a good idea to check your CT burden if
the CT primary rating is under 200A.
Burden is expressed in ohms impedance or volt-amperes for current transformers. The standard burden limits are defined by
ANSI C57.13.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
CTs carry an ANSI burden designation "B" followed by the ohms limit (e.g., B0.1). Below is a typical CT specification in our
catalog:
Allowable burden in ohms (0.5Ω max)

Allowable burden in volt-amperes (12.5 VA max)

Accuracy at burden above (e.g., ±1.2%)

CT primary to secondary ratio
Model # Current ANSI Meter Class at 60 Hz
Ratio B0.1 B0.2 B0.5
2.5 VA 5 VA 12.5 VA
600T-122 1200:5 0.6 1.2 1.2
Line
CT
Devices
(Meter, Relay,
Transducer, etc.)
RD
Wire = Rw
Burden = RW + RD
March 2014

1032. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 974fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
SURGE PROTECTION CHART
SURGE PROTECTION TECHNOLOGIES
SURGE PROTECTION CHART
SURGE PROTECTION CHART & TECHNOLOGIES
Device Technology
Fuse (F) Fuses are used to suppress high currents by failing open to the protected circuit if other
surge devices fail. Response time is less than one second.
LC Inductive/Capacitive LC passive filter @ 60 Hz.
Thermal Fuse Thermal fuses are used to cut out on high temperatures by failing open to the protected
circuit. Response time is several seconds.
Gas Tube (GT) Gas tubes are used to shunt to ground very high voltages (>300V), such as lightning.
Response time is about 150 milliseconds.
MOV or Varistor Metal oxide varistors (MOV) are used to shunt to ground low to medium voltages
(15-130V) at low current. Typical response time is five nanoseconds.
Zener Diode Zener diodes are used to clip and shunt to ground medium voltages (200V). Typical
response time is less than one nanosecond.
PTC Positive temperature coefficient (PTC) thermistors open the circuit during a surge and
suppress low voltages (8-30V). Typical response time is less than one second.
Avalanche Diode (AD) Silicon avalanche suppression diodes are used to clip and shunt to ground low
or Transorb
TP MOV
to medium voltages (8-30V). Typical response time is less than five nanoseconds.
Thermal Protected MOV
Types of Surges
Lightning Typical rise time of 1-20 microseconds, surge currents 20 kA (20,000A) to 250 kA
Power Fluctuations Typically occur in 20-300 microseconds.
SURGE PROTECTION POWER AC/DC DDC POINTS
Device
HSP-121BT1RU
FAS-TEL
PC642C-008
PC642C-012
PC642C-015
PC642C-030
392-SVSR2
DTK-RJ11
DTK-2LVLP
DTK-120HW
V130LA1
V39ZA1
1.5KE56CA
DRS-008
DRS-015
DRS-030
DRS-036
Technology
1st/2nd/3rd/4th Stage
MOV, F, LC, MOV
AD, F
GT, AD, PTC
GT, AD, PTC
GT, AD, PTC
GT, AD, PTC
Dual GT
MOV, F
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
Transzorb (AD)
GT, AD, PTC
GT, AD, PTC
GT, AD, PTC
GT, AD, PTC
Clamp
Level
315V
300V
8V
12V
15V
30V
300-750V
184-224V
15V or 27V
130V
130V
25V
56V
8V
15V
30V
36V
5V
X
12V
X
24V
X
X
120V
X
X
X
X
DI
X
X
X
X
X
X
AI/AO
X
X
X
X
X
X
DO-24V
Fltg Ctrl
X
X
X
X
X
X
DO-120V
X
X
X
X
RS
232
X
X
X
X
RS
422
X
X
X
X
RS
485
X
X
X
X
Phone
X
Ethernet
X
X
X
X
Arcnet
X
X
X
X
X
Modem
Short Haul
X
X
X
X
COMMUNICATION
X-> (model dial in w/ring)
X-> (no ring direct connect)
1. Select a surge protector with a clamping voltage that is higher than the system voltage that is being protected.
2. Apply the "Protection Zone Concept," and keep all grounds inside the protection zone at the same potential. If
different ground potentials are present on electronic equipment, damage will occur regardless of the suppression
used.
3. Protect all electrical and data circuits entering or leaving the protection zone at the protection zone ground win-
dow. Doing this keeps circuits at a safe voltage with respect to the ground window. This safe voltage is the clamp
voltage (let-through voltage) of the respective suppressors.
NOTACINUMMOCSTNIOP CDDCD/CA REWOPNOITCETORP EGRUS
Device
Technology
1st/2nd/3rd/4th Stage
Clamp
Level 5V 12V 24V 36 48 75 120VD I AI/AO
DO-24V
Fltg Ctrl
DO-
120V
RS
232
RS
422 485 Phone EthernetA rcnet
Modem
Short Haul
DTK-120SR XXV061
HSP-121BT1RU XXV513VOM ,CL ,F ,VOM
FAS-TEL AD, F 300V X-> (model dial in w/ring)
PC642C-008 GT, AD, PTC8 V XX
PC642C-012 XXV21CTP ,DA ,TG
PC642C-015 XV51CTP ,DA ,TG X
PC642C-030 XXXXV03CTP ,DA ,TG
DTK-2MHLP5BWB XXXXXX8.6
DTK-2MHLP12BWB XXXXX6.12
DTK-2MHLP24BWB XXXXX93
DTK-2MHLP36BWB XXX75
DTK-2MHLP48BWB XXX67
DTK-2MHLP75BWB XXX801
392-SVSR2 Dual GT 300-750V XXX XX XXX XX XX XX X
DTK-MRJ11 MOV, F 184-224V X-> (no ring direct connect)
DTK-2LVLP MOV 15V or 27V XX XX X
DTK-120HW XXV031VOM
V130LA1 XXV031VOM
V39ZA1 / V47ZA1 XXXXV52VOM
1.5KE56CA XXXV65)DA( brozsnarT
DRS-008 GT, AD, PTC8 V XX
DRS-015 XXXV51CTP ,DA ,TG
DRS-030 XXXXV03CTP ,DA ,TG
DRS-036 XXXXV63CTP ,DA ,TG
AD, GT, F
AD, GT, F
AD, GT, F
AD, GT, F
AD, GT, F
AD, GT, F
TP MOV, LC, Fused MOV
Device Technology
Fuse (F) Fuses are used to suppress high currents by failing open to the protected circuit if other
surge devices fail. Response time is less than one second.
LC Inductive/Capacitive LC passive filter @ 60 Hz.
Thermal Fuse Thermal fuses are used to cut out on high temperatures by failing open to the protected
circuit. Response time is several seconds.
Gas Tube (GT) Gas tubes are used to shunt to ground very high voltages (>300V), such as lightning.
Response time is about 150 milliseconds.
MOV or Varistor Metal oxide varistors (MOV) are used to shunt to ground low to medium voltages
(15-130V) at low current. Typical response time is five nanoseconds.
Zener Diode Zener diodes are used to clip and shunt to ground medium voltages (200V). Typical
response time is less than one nanosecond.
PTC Positive temperature coefficient (PTC) thermistors open the circuit during a surge and
suppress low voltages (8-30V). Typical response time is less than one second.
Avalanche Diode (AD) Silicon avalanche suppression diodes are used to clip and shunt to ground low
or Transorb
TP MOV
to medium voltages (8-30V). Typical response time is less than five nanoseconds.
Thermal Protected MOV
Types of Surges
Lightning Typical rise time of 1-20 microseconds, surge currents 20 kA (20,000A) to 250 kA
Power Fluctuations Typically occur in 20-300 microseconds.
SURGE PROTECTION POWER AC/DC DDC POINTS
Device
HSP-121BT1RU
FAS-TEL
PC642C-008
PC642C-012
PC642C-015
PC642C-030
392-SVSR2
DTK-RJ11
DTK-2LVLP
DTK-120HW
V130LA1
V39ZA1
1.5KE56CA
DRS-008
DRS-015
DRS-030
DRS-036
Technology
1st/2nd/3rd/4th Stage
MOV, F, LC, MOV
AD, F
GT, AD, PTC
GT, AD, PTC
GT, AD, PTC
GT, AD, PTC
Dual GT
MOV, F
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
Transzorb (AD)
GT, AD, PTC
GT, AD, PTC
GT, AD, PTC
GT, AD, PTC
Clamp
Level
315V
300V
8V
12V
15V
30V
300-750V
184-224V
15V or 27V
130V
130V
25V
56V
8V
15V
30V
36V
5V
X
12V
X
24V
X
X
120V
X
X
X
X
DI
X
X
X
X
X
X
AI/AO
X
X
X
X
X
X
DO-24V
Fltg Ctrl
X
X
X
X
X
X
DO-120V
X
X
X
X
RS
232
X
X
X
X
RS
422
X
X
X
X
RS
485
X
X
X
X
Phone
X
Ethernet
X
X
X
X
Arcnet
X
X
X
X
X
Modem
Short Haul
X
X
X
X
COMMUNICATION
X-> (model dial in w/ring)
X-> (no ring direct connect)
1. Select a surge protector with a clamping voltage that is higher than the system voltage that is being protected.
2. Apply the "Protection Zone Concept," and keep all grounds inside the protection zone at the same potential. If
different ground potentials are present on electronic equipment, damage will occur regardless of the suppression
used.
3. Protect all electrical and data circuits entering or leaving the protection zone at the protection zone ground win-
dow. Doing this keeps circuits at a safe voltage with respect to the ground window. This safe voltage is the clamp
voltage (let-through voltage) of the respective suppressors.
NOTACINUMMOCSTNIOP CDDCD/CA REWOPNOITCETORP EGRUS
Device
Technology
1st/2nd/3rd/4th Stage
Clamp
Level 5V 12V 24V 36 48 75 120VD I AI/AO
DO-24V
Fltg Ctrl
DO-
120V
RS
232
RS
422 485 Phone EthernetA rcnet
Modem
Short Haul
DTK-120SR XXV061
HSP-121BT1RU XXV513VOM ,CL ,F ,VOM
FAS-TEL AD, F 300V X-> (model dial in w/ring)
PC642C-008 GT, AD, PTC8 V XX
PC642C-012 XXV21CTP ,DA ,TG
PC642C-015 XV51CTP ,DA ,TG X
PC642C-030 XXXXV03CTP ,DA ,TG
DTK-2MHLP5BWB XXXXXX8.6
DTK-2MHLP12BWB XXXXX6.12
DTK-2MHLP24BWB XXXXX93
DTK-2MHLP36BWB XXX75
DTK-2MHLP48BWB XXX67
DTK-2MHLP75BWB XXX801
392-SVSR2 Dual GT 300-750V XXX XX XXX XX XX XX X
DTK-MRJ11 MOV, F 184-224V X-> (no ring direct connect)
DTK-2LVLP MOV 15V or 27V XX XX X
DTK-120HW XXV031VOM
V130LA1 XXV031VOM
V39ZA1 / V47ZA1 XXXXV52VOM
1.5KE56CA XXXV65)DA( brozsnarT
DRS-008 GT, AD, PT
C8 V XX
DRS-015 XXXV51CTP ,DA ,TG
DRS-030 XXXXV03CTP ,DA ,TG
DRS-036 XXXXV63CTP ,DA ,TG
AD, GT, F
AD, GT, F
AD, GT, F
AD, GT, F
AD, GT, F
AD, GT, F
TP MOV, LC, Fused MOV
Device Technology Fuse (F) Fuses are used to suppress high currents by failing open to the protected circuit if other surge devices fail. Response time is less than one second.
LC Inductive/Capacitive LC passive filter @ 60 Hz.
Thermal Fuse Thermal fuses are used to cut out on high temperatures by failing open to the protected circuit. Response time is several seconds.
Gas Tube (GT) Gas tubes are used to shunt to ground very high voltages (>300V), such as lightning. Response time is about 150 milliseconds.
MOV or Varistor Metal oxide varistors (MOV) are used to shunt to ground low to medium voltages (15-130V) at low current. Typical response time is five nanoseconds.
Zener Diode Zener diodes are used to clip and shunt to ground medium voltages (200V). Typical response time is less than one nanosecond.
PTC Positive temperature coefficient (PTC) thermistors open the circuit during a surge and suppress low voltages (8-30V). Typical response time is less than one second.
Avalanche Diode (AD) Silicon avalanche suppression diodes are used to clip and shunt to ground low
or Transorb TP MOV
to medium voltages (8-30V). Typical response time is less than five nanoseconds. Thermal Protected MOV
Types of Surges Lightning Typical rise time of 1-20 microseconds, surge currents 20 kA (20,000A) to 250 kA
Power Fluctuations Typically occur in 20-300 microseconds.
SURGE PROTECTION POWER AC/DC DDC POINTS
Device
HSP-121BT1RU
FAS-TEL
PC642C-008
PC642C-012
PC642C-015
PC642C-030
392-SVSR2
DTK-RJ11
DTK-2LVLP
DTK-120HW
V130LA1
V39ZA1
1.5KE56CA
DRS-008
DRS-015
DRS-030
DRS-036
Technology
1st/2nd/3rd/4th Stage
MOV, F, LC, MOV
AD, F
GT, AD, PTC
GT, AD, PTC
GT, AD, PTC
GT, AD, PTC
Dual GT
MOV, F
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
Transzorb (AD)
GT, AD, PTC
GT, AD, PTC
GT, AD, PTC
GT, AD, PTC
Clamp
Level
315V
300V
8V
12V
15V
30V
300-750V
184-224V
15V or 27V
130V
130V
25V
56V
8V
15V
30V
36V
5V
X
12V
X
24V
X
X
120V
X
X
X
X
DI
X
X
X
X
X
X
AI/AO
X
X
X
X
X
X
DO-24V
Fltg Ctrl
X
X
X
X
X
X
DO-120V
X
X
X
X
RS
232
X
X
X
X
RS
422
X
X
X
X
RS
485
X
X
X
X
Phone
X
Ethernet
X
X
X
X
Arcnet
X
X
X
X
X
Modem
Short Haul
X
X
X
X
COMMUNICATION
X-> (model dial in w/ring)
X-> (no ring direct connect)
1. Select a surge protector with a clamping voltage that is higher than the system voltage that is being protected.
2. Apply the "Protection Zone Concept," and keep all grounds inside the protection zone at the same potential. If
different ground potentials are present on electronic equipment, damage will occur regardless of the suppression
used.
3. Protect all electrical and data circuits entering or leaving the protection zone at the protection zone ground win-
dow. Doing this keeps circuits at a safe voltage with respect to the ground window. This safe voltage is the clamp
voltage (let-through voltage) of the respective suppressors.
NOTACINUMMOCSTNIOP CDDCD/CA REWOPNOITCETORP EGRUS
Device
Technology
1st/2nd/3rd/4th Stage
Clamp
Level 5V 12V 24V 36 48 75 120VD I AI/AO
DO-24V
Fltg Ctrl
DO-
120V
RS
232
RS
422 485 Phone EthernetA rcnet
Modem
Short Haul
DTK-120SR XXV061
HSP-121BT1RU XXV513VOM ,CL ,F ,VOM
FAS-TEL AD, F 300V X-> (model dial in w/ring)
PC642C-008 GT, AD, PTC8 V XX
PC642C-012 XXV21CTP ,DA ,TG
PC642C-015 XV51CTP ,DA ,TG X
PC642C-030 XXXXV03CTP ,DA ,TG
DTK-2MHLP5BWB XXXXXX8.6
DTK-2MHLP12BWB XXXXX6.12
DTK-2MHLP24BWB XXXXX93
DTK-2MHLP36BWB XXX75
DTK-2MHLP48BWB XXX67
DTK-2MHLP75BWB XXX801
392-SVSR2 Dual GT 300-750V XXX XX XXX XX XX XX X
DTK-MRJ11 MOV, F 184-224V X-> (no ring direct connect)
DTK-2LVLP MOV 15V or 27V XX XX X
DTK-120HW XXV031VOM
V130LA1 XXV031VOM
V39ZA1 / V47ZA1 XXXXV52VOM
1.5KE56CA XXXV65)DA( brozsnarT
DRS-008 GT, AD, PTC8 V XX
DRS-015 XXXV51CTP ,DA ,TG
DRS-030 XXXXV03CTP ,DA ,TG
DRS-036 XXXXV63CTP ,DA ,TG
AD, GT, F
AD, GT, F
AD, GT, F
AD, GT, F
AD, GT, F
AD, GT, F
TP MOV, LC, Fused MOV
March 2014

1033. fifl 975POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
APPLYING SURGE PROTECTORS
Surge protectors are relatively simple devices, yet they must
be carefully selected and applied to function properly. When
selecting and applying surge protectors, there are a few essentials to keep in mind
.
First, the operating voltage of the system is important.
Surge protectors are v
oltage sensitive switches and must
not clamp the normal system voltage
. The surge protector
clamp voltage must be higher than the system voltage. For
example, a 24 VDC system voltage generally uses a 30 volt surge protector
.
Second, some surge protectors have an input side and an
output side. If installed backwards, they will fail prematurely.
Lastly, grounding is often misunderstood when it comes to
proper installation of surge suppressors. This can seriously
affect the performance of protection systems and lead to electronics damage
. Use the Protection Zone Concept
to effectively apply surge protectors to EMS and BAS installations
.
The Protection Zone
The protection zone is an imaginary circle drawn around and encompassing electronic equipment items that are located in close proximity to each other (see Figure 1)
. Everything
passing through the imaginary circle should be commonly grounded and should have surge protection
.
Figure 1. The Protection Zone, Window, and Single Point
Ground
S P G
SP
To Approved
Ground
Data Line
PC642C
Surge Protector
AC Service
Power Strip
Data Line
Single Point Ground
AC Service
Surge Protector
HSP-121BT1RU
*Ground wires between
single point ground and
surge protectors must
be very short.
The Protection Zone
Window
*
The Protection Zone
*
The single point ground is a common ground point or node used in the protection zone to bond together all ground references inside the zone
. Surge currents passing through
a ground conductor generate a voltage across the conductor.
This is pr
imarily due to inductance of the wire
. Inductance is
h
ighly dependent on conductor length; therefore, it is very
important to keep suppressor ground wires to the single point ground very short.
The protection zone window is a hypothetical small opening
in the zone through which all electrical conductors enter or leave
. The single point ground is located at the protection
zone window. Figure 2 illustrates a typical installation of
equipment within a small area; however, there are three problems associated with the installation depicted
.
Problem #1
There are four ground references in Figure 2. AC outlet #1,
AC outlet #2, AC outlet #3, and the data line all present separate ground references
. The three AC outlet grounds are
connected together at the power panel many feet away. The
ground wire lengths offer enough inductance to effectively create separate grounds
. In addition, the data line may run
hundreds of feet to yet another ground reference in remote circuitry
.
Problem #2
Notice in Figure 2 there is substantial distance between various conductors leaving the imaginary circle of the protection zone
. Even if ground conductors were bonded
together, destructive voltages would exist during a surge due to wire inductance
.
Problem #3
While the data line shows a surge suppressor, the lack of suppressors in the power receptacles leaves an opening in the protection zone
. Even the best data line suppressor
cannot prevent damage under these conditions.
Solving the Problems
The problems listed for the installation in Figure 2 are solved using the Protection Zone Concept
. Figure 1 illustrates the
proper installation:
• All devices are powered from the same AC outlet.
• The AC service incorporates a Model HSP-121BT1RU
surge suppressor.
• The single point ground is established in the protection
zone window.
• Data line suppressor(s), Model PC642C, are added at the
single point ground.
• A ground bus bar is located at the ground area to facilitate
multiple ground connections.
March 2014

1034. fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION 976fifl
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION
16
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
APPLYING SURGE PROTECTORS
Figure 2. Typical Installation of Equipment within a Small
Area
• Ground wires to the suppressors are very short.
• An optional (depending on code) ground conductor
connects the ground bus to the main building power
ground. This conductor may be quite long, but that does
not create a problem now that the ground area has been established
.
Protecting Multibuilding Data and Control Systems
The Protection Zone Concept can also be applied to multibuilding, multidrop data and control systems
. In Figure
3, the surge protectors located at the building entrance are improperly positioned to protect the CPU and the controllers
.
Dur
ing lightning activity, ground potentials at opposite ends
of a building can be thousands of volts, causing damage to electronic equipment. Also, surge protectors for data
lines that enter buildings have series resistance. The series
resistance of the surge protectors is additive. The total series
resistance often is too great and can cause communication or data line problems
. The installation in Figure 3 shows five
protectors in series over the length of the data line.
To properly configure surge protection on a multibuilding,
multidrop system (see Figure 4), connect the surge protector on each controller drop so that the protector is not in series
with the main data line. When connected in this manner,
no more than two surge protectors are connected in series.
Using the Protection Zone Concept, locate the data line

surge protectors within the protection zone window along with an AC service outlet surge protector for each respective controller
. Remember to keep the ground connections to the
single point ground very short.
Summary
Remember the following when applying surge protection:
1. Keep all grounds inside the protection zone at the same
potential. If different ground potentials are present on
electronic equipment, damage will occur regardless of
the suppression used.
2. Protect all electrical and data circuits entering or leaving
the protection zone at the protection zone ground window
. Doing this keeps circuits at a safe voltage with
respect to the ground window. This safe voltage is the
clamp voltage (let-through voltage) of the respective suppressors
.
The majority of surge protection installations are fairly simple
and only involve bonding suppressor grounds to AC service grounds at the ground window
. Existing sites may involve
some rewiring to accomplish the best results. In order to
keep the data line surge suppressor ground and AC service ground wires very short, wiring must sometimes be moved
.
When applying surge protectors
, using the Protection Zone
Concept will effectively protect EMS and BAS installations
.
SP
Data
Ground
Data Line
Surge Protector
Data Line
AC Power
Ground #2
Data Line
AC Power
Ground #1
Ground #3
AC Power
The Protection Zone
AC Outlet #1
AC Outlet #3
AC Outlet #2
Building 1
CPU SP
CC
Building 2
SP
C C
Data Line
C
SP
Building N
SP
C CC
SP
SPCPU
CMain Processing Equipment Distributed EMS/BAS Controller sS urge Protector
Figure 3. Improper Positioning of Surge Protectors
Building 1 Building 2 Building N
CPU
CMain Processing EquipmentD istributed EMS/BAS Controllers
SP
C
SP
AC Power
*
SP
C
SP
AC Power
*
CPU
SP
*
SP
C
SP
AC Power
*
SP
C
SP
AC Power
*
SP
C
SP
AC Power
*
Data
Line
SP
C
SP
AC Power
*
SP
C
SP
AC Power
*
SP
C
SP
AC Power
*
*Conductor from data line SP ground and AC power
SP ground to single point ground must be very short
SP
AC
Power
SPSurge Protector
Model HSP-121BT1RU AC Power Surge Protector
Model PC642C Data Line Surge Protector< Figure 4. Proper Positioning of Surge Protectors
March 2014

1035. HUMIDITY
POWER SUPPLIES
POWER
SUPPLIES
XFMR Series | p. 977
T-PB Series | p. 987 DCP-1.5-W | p. 995
RIB TR Series | p. 985
DCP-250 Series | p. 996
E100E | p. 981
Kele Stocks Most Major Brands and a Huge Inventory of Power Supplies
You Need to Get the Job Done.

1036. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
POWER SUPPLIES
PSH500A | p. 991
691 Series | p. 979
US Transformers | p. 983
POWER
SUPPLIES
Power Supplies
T-PB Series — Air Products and Controls Enclosed 24 VAC
Power Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
PSB40AB10, PSB100AB10, PSC40AB10, PSC100AB10
— Functional
Devices Enclosed 24 VAC Class 2 Power Source
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
PSH Series
— Functional Devices Enclosed 24 VAC Class 2
Power Source
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
PSH200A, PSH300A, PSH500A, PSMN300A, and PSMN500A
— Functional
Devices Enclosed Power Source - 100 VA, 24 VAC Class 2 Outputs
. . . . . 991
S1K and SDU Series
— Sola/Hevi-Duty Uninterruptible Power
Supplies - UPS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
PSH550-UPS
— Functional Devices Uninterruptible Power Supply
. . . . . . . . . 993
DCPA-1.2
— Kele AC / DC Power Supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
DCP-1.5-W
— Kele DC Power Supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
DCP-250
— Kele Enclosed DC Power Supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
DCP-524
— Kele DC Power Supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
SLS Series
— DC Power Supplies
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
PW2
— Compact DC Power Supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999
AM-24830A
— Plug-in Class 2 Transformer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999
PS5R Series
— IDEC Switching Power Supplies
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
SDN-P Series
— Din Rail Mount Power Supplies
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
SDN-C Compact Series
— Compact Din Rail Mount Power Supplies
. . . . . . 1003
Transformers XFMR Series
— Control Transformers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977
691 Series
— Kele Control Transformers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
691-U100
— Kele Class 2 Control Transformer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
AT150F, AT175F
— Class 2 Control Transformers with Breaker
. . . . . . . . . . . 980
E100E, E150E, E300E, E500E
— Control Transformers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
694 Series
— Multi-Tap Control Transformers with Breaker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982
US Transformers
— US Made Transformers by Functional Devices
. . . . . . . . 983
33 Series
— 120 VAC Secondary Transformers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984
RIB TR Series
— Functional Devices Control Transformers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985

1037. NEW! 977POWER SUPPLIES
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014
CONTROL TRANSFORMERS
XFMR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The XFMR Series of voltage transformers provide nominal
24 VAC control voltage. These transformers are intended for
NEMA 1 installation and should be installed in compliance with all national and local electrical codes
.
FEATURES
• V •
Low cost
• One year warranty
• UL Listed (File #E223965) (#E223966 for HD models)
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
XFMR50JA
XFMR75HB
XFMR100HC XFMR150FA
XFMRHD300E
Model VA Rating Primary Voltage Secondary Voltage Frequency Circuit Breaker Mounting
XFMR50HA 50 VA 120/208/240 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 No 1 Hub + Foot
XFMR50JA 75 VA 120/208/240 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 No 1 Hub + Foot
XFMR40FB 40 VA 120 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 No 2 Hub + Foot
XFMR40FC 40 VA 24 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 No 1 Hub + Foot
XFMR50FA 50 VA 120 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 No 2 Hub + Foot
XFMR150FA 150 VA 120 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 Yes, 10A trip point 1 Hub + Foot
XFMR175FA 175 VA 208/240 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 No 2 Hub + Foot
XFMR240FA 240 VA 120 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 No 1 Hub + Foot
XFMR375FA 375 VA 120 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 No 1 Hub + Foot
XFMR40HA 40 VA 120/208/240 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 No 1 Hub + Foot
XFMR50HB 50 VA 120/208/240/277/480 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 Yes, 2.5A trip point 1 Hub + Foot
XFMR75HB 75 VA 120/208/240/277/480 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 Yes, 4A trip point 1 Hub + Foot
XFMR75HC 75 VA 120/208/240/277/480 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 Yes, 4A trip point 2 Hub + Foot
XFMR100HC 100 VA 120/208/240/480 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 Yes, 4A trip point 2 Hub + Foot
XFMRHD100E 100 VA 120/240 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 No Foot
XFMRHD150E 150 VA 120/240 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 No Foot
XFMRHD300E 300 VA 120/240 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 No Foot
XFMRHD500E 500 VA 120/240 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 No Foot
Primary Wires*
480 VAC Gray 120 VAC White
277 V
AC
Brown Common Black
240 VAC Orange
208 VAC Red
Secondar
y Wires**
24 VAC
Brown or Blue
*XFMR40FC isolation tranformer features red 24 VAC primary
wires
**XFMR40HA, XFMR50HA feature secondary terminals

1038. NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES 978NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW! NEW!
March 2014
CONTROL TRANSFORMERS
XFMR SERIES
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
XFMR50HA Transformer 120/208/240:24 V 50 VA
XFMR50JA Transformer 120/208/240:24 V 75 VA
XFMR40FB Transformer 120:24 VAC 40 VA
XFMR40FC Transformer 24:24 VAC 40 VA
XFMR50FA Transformer 120:24 VAC 50 VA
XFMR150FA Transformer 120:24 VAC 150 VA
XFMR175FA Transformer 208/240:24 VAC 175 VA
XFMR240FA Transformer 120:24 VAC 240 VA
XFMR375FA Transformer 120:24 VAC 375 VA
XFMR40HA Transformer 120/208/240:24V 40VA
XFMR50HB Transformer 120/208/240/277/480:24 VAC 50 VA
XFMR75HB Transformer 120/208/240/277/480:24 VAC 75 VA
XFMR75HC Transformer 120/208/240/277/480:24 VAC 75 VA
XFMR100HC Transformer 120/208/240/480:24 VAC 100 VA
XFMRHD100E Transformer 120/240:24 V 100 VA
XFMRHD150E Transformer 120/240:24 V 150 VA
XFMRHD300E Transformer 120/240:24 V 300 VA
XFMRHD500E Transformer 120/240:24 V 500 VA
Mounting
Hole
D
E
A
B
C
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS in (cm) WEIGHT
MODEL A B C D E WIRES lb (kg) STYLE
XFMR50HA 2.79 (7.09) 2.17 (5.5) 2.88 (7.3) 1.81 (4.6) 2.01 (5.1) 8.0 (20.3) 2.56 (1.16) 6
XFMR50JA 3.88 (9.85) 2.5 (6.35) 3.04 (7.62) 2 (5.08) 2.3 (5.84) 8.0 (20.3) 1.73 (0.79) 1
XFMR40FB 2.48 (6.3) 2.17 (5.5) 2.88 (7.3) 1.81 (4.6) 1.75 (4.4) 8.0 (20.3) 1.73 (0.79) 7
XFMR40FC 2.48 (6.3) 2.17 (5.5) 2.88 (7.3) 1.81 (4.6) 1.75 (4.4) 8.0 (20.3) 1.56 (0.71) 1
XFMR40HA 2.48 (6.3) 2.17 (5.5) 2.88 (7.30) 1.81 (4.6) 1.75 (4.4) 8.0 (20.3) 4.32 (1.95) 9
XFMR50FA 2.79 (7.09) 2.17 (5.5) 2.88 (7.3) 1.81 (4.6) 2.01 (5.1) 8.0 (20.3) 3.86 (1.75) 4
XFMR150FA 3.55 (9.01) 3.79 (9.6) 3.2 (8.1) 3.14 (7.76) 2.48 (6.30) 8.0 (20.3) 5.16 (2.45) 3
XFMR175FA 4.12 (10.46) 3.8 (9.7) 3.2 (8.13) 3.14 (7.98) 3.19 (8.10) 8.0 (20.3) 7.28 (3.09) 4
XFMR240FA 3.72 (9.4) 3.8 (9.7) 4.52 (11.4) 3.18 (8.1) 3.242 (8.2) 8.0 (20.3) 8.60 (3.91) 1
XFMR375FA 4.315 (11.0) 3.8 (9.7) 4.52 (11.4) 3.18 (8.1) 3.83 (9.7) 8.0 (20.3) 12.57 (5.71) 1
XFMR50HB 3.45 (9.3) 2.5 (6.4) 3.06 (7.8) 2.03 (5.2) 1.91 (4.9) 8.0 (20.3) 3.31 (1.50) 2
XFMR75HB 2.79 (7.09) 2.17 (5.50) 2.88 (7.30) 1.81 (4.60) 2.01 (5.1) 8.0 (20.3) 3.86 (1.75) 2
XFMR75HC 3.87 (9.8) 2.5 (6.4) 3.06 (7.80) 2.03 (5.2) 2.31 (5.9) 8.0 (20.3) 3.86 (1.75) 5
XFMR100HC 4.05 (10.29) 2.5 (6.4) 3.06 (7.80) 2.03 (5.2) 2.51 (6.38) 8.0 (20.3) 4.85 (2.20) 5
XFMRHD100E 3.35 (8.50) 2.89 (7.33) 3.38 (8.58) 2.93 (74.5) 2.81 (7.15) Terminals 4.20 (1.91) 8
XFMRHD150E 3.60 (9.15) 3.78 (9.60) 3.22 (8.18) 3.43 (8.72) 3.12 (7.93) Terminals 6 (2.73) 8
XFMRHD300E 4.80 (12.20) 4.49 (11.40) 3.88 (9.68) 3.13 (7.95) 3.74 (9.51) Terminals 9 (4.10) 8
XFMRHD500E 5.93 (13.70) 4.49 (11.40) 3.88 (9.68) 4.13 (10.50) 3.74 (9.51) Terminals 12.5 (5.68) 8
STYLE 4STYLE 3
Circuit Breaker
Circuit Breaker
STYLE 5 STYLE 6
STYLE 8
STYLE 1 STYLE 2
Circuit Breaker
Secondary Screw Terminals
STYLE 9
Secondary Screw Terminals
Circuit Breaker
STYLE 7
Double-Gang
Plate

1039. NEW! 979POWER SUPPLIES
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW! NEW!
March 2014
8" (20.32) Primary Wires (120 VA C)
Black (120V) / White (N)
8" (20.32) Secondary Wires (24 VA C)
Brown (COM) / Orange (24V)
Circuit Breaker
3.80
(9.65)
3.2
(8.13)
3.12
(7.93)
4.0
(10.16)
3.13
(7.95)
3/8" x 3/16" Slots (4)
(0.953) x (0.476)
3.13
(7.95)
2.5
(6.35)
3.0
(7.62)
2.06
(5.23)
1/2" (1.3 cm) Male
Conduit Threads
Primary Wires (120 VAC)
Black (120 V), White (N)
Secondary Wires (24 VA C)
Brown (COM), Red (24 V)
B
C
E
D
1/2" (1.3 cm) Male
Conduit Threads
A
Secondary (24 VA C)
Red, Red
Primary (120 VA C)
Black (120V), White (N)
in
(cm)
MODEL
691-K1A
691-K2A
A
2.6
(6.7)
3.1
(8.0)
B
3.0
(7.7)
3.8
(9.6)
C
3.2
(8.2)
4.1
(10.3)
D
2.5
(6.4)
3.3
(8.3)
E
2.2
(5.7)
2.4
(6.1)
DIMENSIONS
KELE CONTROL TRANSFORMERS
691 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The 691 Series of stepdown voltage transformers provide
nominal 24 VAC control voltage from 120 VAC primary supply.
These tr
ansformers are designed for NEMA 1 locations
. They
should be installed in compliance with all national and local electrical codes
.
FEATURES
• Lo •
Fully enclosed with metal end bells
• Compact size
• Resettable secondary circuit breaker (691-U100 Only)
• Dual threaded hubs (691-U100 Only)
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
691-K0A
691-K1A
691-K2A
ORDERING INFORMATION
691-K1A/691-K2A Transformers 691-K0A Transformer 691-U100
Model 691-K0A 691-K1A 691-K2A 691-U100
Primary Voltage 120 VAC 120 VAC 120 VAC 120 VAC
Secondary Voltage 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC
Frequency 60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 60 Hz
VA Rating 40 VA 100 VA 170 VA 96 VA
Mounting Hub or foot Hub or foot Hub or foot Hub or foot
Conduit Connection 1/2" (1.3 cm) male threads 1/2" (1.3 cm) male threads 1/2" (1.3 cm) male threads Two 1/2" (1.27 cm) male connections
Operating Temperature14° to 104°F (-10° to 40°C) 14° to 104°F (-10° to 40°C) 14° to 104°F (-10° to 40°C) 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
Wire Length 8" (20.3 cm) 8" (20.3 cm) 8" (20.3 cm) 8" (20.3 cm)
Weight 2.1 lb (0.95 kg) 3.5 lb (1.6 kg) 6.3 lb (2.9 kg) 4.9 lb (2.2 kg)
Warranty 1 year 1 year 1 year 3 years
Approvals
UL1585, UL5085-1 & 3 listed,
Class 2 File #E99227
UL1585, UL5085-1 & 2 listed,
(not class 2) File #E250952
UL1585, UL5085-1 & 2 listed,
(not class 2) File #E250952
UL1585 listed, Class 2, File #E316704
Circuit Breaker - - - Manual reset, 4A trip
691-U100
MODEL DESCRIPTION
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2
691-K1A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 100 VA
691-K2A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 170 VA
691-U100 Class 2 control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 96 VA

1040. NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES 980NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014
CLASS 2 CONTROL TRANSFORMERS WITH BREAKER
AT150F, AT175F
Primary Voltage 120/208/240 VAC, 208/277/480
VAC
Secondary Voltage 24 VAC
Frequency 60 Hz
VA Rating AT150F: 50 VA, AT175F:75 VA
Mounting Foot or hub
Conduit Connection 1/2" male NPT
Lead Wires 9" (22.8 cm), color coded
Weight 3 lb (1.36 kg)
Approvals UL1585, UL5085-3 listed, File
#E14881, CSA appro
ved, File
#LR95329-18 NEC Class 2 "not
wet", Class 3 "wet"
Warranty
1 year
B
B
A
A
C
C
0.44
(1.18)
0.44
(1.18)
1/2" NPT
0.69
(1.78)
2.19
(5.56)
3.19
(8.10)
MODEL
AT150F
AT175F
1.75
2.13
(4.5)
(5.4)
1.75
1.75
(4.5)
(4.5)
3.63
3.94
(9.3)
(10.2)
Reset Button
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS
DESCRIPTION
Model AT150F and AT175F transformers provide power to nominal 24 VAC circuits in heating/cooling systems
. Although
the tr
ansformers are typically used in heating/cooling
systems, they can be used in any application that does not exceed the load ratings. The transformers include a manual
reset button for resetting the circuit breaker. They also meet
NEC Class 2 "not wet" and Class 3 "wet" requirements and are UL listed under UL1585
. These transformers can be foot
or hub mounted.
FEATURES
• Multi-tap primary connections
• Color-coded lead wires
• Manually resettable circuit breaker
• Meets NEC Class 2 "not wet" and Class 3 "wet" transf
ormer requirements
(black)
(white)
(red)
(yellow)
(blue)
(orange)
120V
208V
240V
Common**
Primary*
Wires
24 VAC
Secondary
Wires
(yellow)
(blue)
24 VAC
Secondary
Wires
(black)
(red)
(brown)
(black/red)
208V
277V
480V
Common**
Primary*
Wires
120/208/240 VAC Models 208/277/480 VAC Models
* Insulate the ends of the unused primary leads by taping or capping with a solderless connector. ** Black is common with respect to the transformer windings only, not the external circuit.
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A
T150F1022
Control transformer, 120/208/240:24 VAC, 50 VA with breaker
AT150F1030 Control transformer, 208/277/480:24 VAC, 50 VA with breaker
AT175F1023 Control transformer, 120/208/240:24 VAC, 75 VA with breaker
AT175F1031 Control transformer, 208/277/480:24 VAC, 75 VA with breaker

1041. NEW! 981POWER SUPPLIES
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!NEW!
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
E100E Control transformer, 120/240:24V, 100 VA
E150E Control transformer, 120/240:24V, 150 VA
E300E Control transformer, 120/240:24V, 300 VA
E500E Control transformer, 120/240:24V, 500 VA
CONTROL TRANSFORMERS
E100E, E150E, E300E, E500E
Primary Voltage 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Secondary Voltage 24 VAC
VA Rating 100 VA, 150 VA, 300 VA, 500 VA
Insulation Class 221°F (105°C)
Terminals Plated brass binder head screws
Temperature Rise 131°F (55°C)
Mounting Slotted feet
Weight
E100E 4.2 lb (1.9 kg)
E150E 7.0 lb (3.2 kg)
E300E 11.8 lb (5.4 kg)
E500E 17.6 lb (7.99 kg)
Approvals UL506, UL5085-1 & 2 listed,
File #E77014 CSA certified,
File #LR14328-22
Warranty 10 years
D
W
H
H1 H3 H2 H4
X2 X1
D
W
H
E100E E150E E300E
4 .64 (11 .8)
3 .38 (8 .6)
2 .87 (7 .31)
4 .48 (11 .4)
4 .50 (11 .4)
3 .82 (9 .7)5 .09 (12 .9) 5 .25 (13 .3) 4 .45 (11 .3)
E500E
6 .32 (16 .1) 5 .25 (13 .3) 4 .45 (11 .3)
DIMENSION
in
(cm)
MODEL
DESCRIPTION
Models E100E, E150E, E300E, and E500E are premium
performance, epoxy-encapsulated control transformers used
in temperature control systems and industrial applications
.
These tr
ansformers are able to meet high inrush loads while
providing outstanding voltage regulation, more efficient (cooler) operation, and simple installation and wiring. They
are designed to provide 24 VAC control voltage from a 120/240 VAC primary supply
.
FEATURES
• Precise spacing between interleaved windings for
maximized voltage regulation
• Oversized copper windings contribute to low
temperature rise
• Solid epoxy-encapsulation to dissipate heat efficiently
and completely seal coil against moisture, dirt, and
other airborne contaminants
• Ten year warranty
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
H1 H3 H2 H4 H1 H3 H2 H4 X2 X1
120 VA C
*Jumper clips provided.
240 VA C 24 VAC
Primary Wiring Secondary Wiring
** *
Recommended Fuses (max amps)
E100E: FLM-5
E150E: FLM-10
E300E: FLM-20
E500E: FLM-30
Secondary fuse holders (FB2X) are
included with all tranformers
.
Use a 13/32" x 1-1/2" car
tridge fuse
.
ACCESSORIES
IP20 Terminal cover kit for E Series Transformers
SBEDIN DIN circuit breaker mounting kit

1042.
POWER SUPPLIES 982
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
MULTI-TAP CONTROL TRANSFORMERS WITH BREAKER
694 SERIES
Primary Voltage 120, 208, 240, 480 VAC
Secondary Voltage 24 VAC
Frequency 60 Hz
VA Rating 694-M1A:
75 VA, 694-M2A: 100 VA,
694-M3A: 180 VA, 694-M4: 300 VA
Circuit Breaker
694-M1A: Manual reset, 5A trip,
694-M2A: Manual reset, 6A trip,
694-M3A: Manual reset, 12A trip,
694-M4: Manual reset, 16A trip
Insulation Class
356°F (180°C)
Wire Length 10" (25.4 cm)
Temperature Rise 144°F (80°C)
Mounting Foot
Approvals UL506 listed, File #E67824,
UL506 listed, File #E3210
Weight
694-M1A, 694-M2A 3.8 lb (1.7 kg)
694-M3A 6.5 lb (3.0 kg)
694-M4 15.0 lb (6.8 kg)
Warranty 1 year
C
E
D B
A
Circuit Breaker
in
(cm)
MODELA BC DE
694-M1A2.50 3.00 4.52 2.50 2.25
(6.35) (7.62) (11.48) (6.35) (5.72)
694-M2A2.50 3.00 4.52 2.50 2.25
(6.35) (7.62) (11.48) (6.35) (5.72)
694-M3A3.78 3.15 5.05 2.45 3.51
(9.60) (8.00) (12.83) (6.22) (8.92)
694-M4 4.52
(11.48) (9.53) (13.77) (8.03) (9.65)
DIMENSIONS
3.75 5.42 3.16 3.8
DESCRIPTION
The 694 Series of industrial-grade multi-tap stepdown
voltage transformers with manual resettable current-limiting
secondary circuit breakers is ideal for use in temperature
control systems
. These UL listed transformers provide 24 VAC
control voltage from a 120-480 VAC primary supply. The leads
are clearly marked for ease of wiring. These foot-mounted
transformers are designed for NEMA 1 locations and should be installed in compliance with all national and local electrical codes
.
FEATURES
• Multi-tap primary from 120-480 VAC
• Manual resettable secondary circuit breaker
• Foot mounting
Common
120 VA C
208 VA C
240 VA C
480 VA C
Circuit
Breaker
* Insulate the ends of unused primary leads.
24 VAC
Neutral
(Brown)
(Blue)
Primary Wiring* Secondary Wiring
24
0
0
120
208
240
480
Black
White
Red
Orange
Gray
Black
M4M1A/M2A/M3A
White
Orange
Brown
Gray
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
694-M1A Control Transformer, 120/208/240/480:24 VAC, 75 VA
694-M2A Control Transformer, 120/208/240/480:24 VAC, 100 VA
694-M3A Control Transformer, 120/208/240/480:24 VAC, 180 VA
694-M4 Control Transformer, 120/208/240/480:24 VAC, 300 VA

1043. 983POWER SUPPLIES
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
US MADE TRANSFORMERS BY FUNCTIONAL DEVICES
US TRANSFORMERS
DESCRIPTION
These US Made Transformers come in 40VA, 50VA and
100VA options. They are Class 2 and have UL, CE and cUL
approvals. They all feature split bobbin construction. Some
also ha
ve a secondary circuit breaker
.
FEATURES
• Foot and Hub mounted models available
• Class 2 rated
• Color coded wire leads
• Meets Buy American ARRA 2009
SPECIFICATIONS
TR100VA100US
Primary Wires
480 VAC Gray 120 VAC White
277 VAC Brown
240 VAC Orange
Common Black
208 VAC Red
Secondary Wires
24 VAC Yellow 24 VAC Yellow/White
WIRING
Model Supply Voltage
Supply
Frequency
Secondary
Voltage
Over Current
Protection
Mounting Weight
TR40VA001US 120VAC 50/60Hz 24VAC Inherently Limited Foot & Single Threaded Hub 2.02 lbs.
TR40VA002US 120VAC 50/60Hz 24VAC Inherently Limited Foot & Dual Threaded Hubs 2.05 lbs.
TR50VA001US 120VAC 50/60Hz 24VAC 3 Amp Fuse Foot & Single Threaded Hub 2.14 lbs.
TR50VA004US 120/240/277/480VAC 50/60Hz 24VAC Circuit Breaker Foot & Dual Threaded Hubs 3.04 lbs.
TR50VA005US 120VAC 50/60Hz 24VAC Circuit Breaker Foot & Single Threaded Hub 2.60 lbs.
TR100VA001US 120VAC 50/60Hz 24VAC Circuit Breaker Foot & Single Threaded Hub 4.06 lbs.
TR100VA002US 120VAC 50/60Hz 24VAC Circuit Breaker Foot & Dual Threaded Hubs 4.13 lbs.
TR100VA004US 120/240/277/480VAC 50/60Hz 24VAC Circuit Breaker Foot & Dual Threaded Hubs 4.60 lbs.
DIMENSIONS
Mounting
Hole
D
E
A
B
C
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS in (cm)
MODEL A B C D E STYLE
TR40VA001US 2.7 (6.9) 2.2 (5.6) 2.875 (7.3) 1.75 (4.4) 1.93 (4.9) 1
TR40VA002US 2.7 (6.9) 2.2 (5.6) 2.875 (7.3) 1.75 (4.4) 1.93 (4.9) 2
TR50VA001US 2.75 (7) 2.2 (5.6) 2.875 (7.3) 1.75 (4.4) 1.93 (4.9) 1
TR50VA004US 3.5 (8.9) 2.525 (6.4) 3.25 (8.3) 2 (5.1) 1.95 (5) 4
TR50VA005US 3.5 (8.9) 2.525 (6.4) 3.25 (8.3) 2 (5.1) 1.95 (5) 5
TR100VA001US 3.5 (8.9) 2.5 (6.4) 3.25 (8.3) 2 (5.1) 2.55 (6.5) 1
TR100VA002US 3.5 (8.9) 2.5 (6.4) 3.25 (8.3) 2 (5.1) 2.55 (6.5) 2
TR100VA004US 3.5 (8.9) 2.5 (6.4) 3.25 (8.3) 2 (5.1) 2.75 (7) 4

STYLE 4
Circuit Breaker
STYLE 5
STYLE 1 STYLE 2
Circuit Breaker
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TR40V
A001US
US made 40VA, 120-24V inherent limit, 1 HUB
TR40VA002US US made 40VA, 120-24V inherent limit, 2 HUB
TR50VA001US US made 50VA, 120-24V, 1 HUB, 3A fuse
TR50VA004US US made 50VA, 480/277/240/120, 24V, 2 HUB, circuit breaker
TR50VA005US US made 50VA, 120-24V, 1 HUB, circuit breaker
TR100VA001US US made 96VA, 120-24V, 1 HUB, circuit breaker
TR100VA002US US made 96VA, 120-24V, 2 HUB, circuit breaker
TR100VA004US US made 96VA, 480/277/240/120, 24V, 2 HUB, circuit breaker

1044. NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES 984NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW! NEW!
March 2014
120 VAC SECONDARY TRANSFORMERS
33 SERIES
Primary Voltage 120 VAC, 208 VAC, 480/240 VAC,
277 VAC
Secondary Voltage 24 VAC, 120 VAC
Frequency 50/60 Hz
VA Rating 50 VA, 100 VA
Insulation Class 221°F (105°C)
Wire Length 8.0" (20.32 cm), labeled
Temperature Rise 131°F (55°C)
Conduit Connection 1/2" (1.27 cm) male threads
Mounting Hub or foot, NEMA 1
Dimensions 50 VA models: 3.19"H x 3.0"W x
2.5"D (8.10 x 7.62 x 6.35 cm), 100
VA models: 3.63"H x 3.38"W 2.81"D
(9.22 x 8.59 x 7.14 cm)
Weight 2.7 lb (1.2 kg), 4.0 lb (1.8 kg)
Approvals UL 506, UL5085-1 & 2 listed, File
#E3210 CSA cer
tified, File #LR560
Warranty
10 years
VA
DIMENSIONS
A
3.19
(8.10)
3.63
(9.22)
B
3.0
(7.62)
3.38
(8.59)
C
2.50
(6.35)
2.81
(7.14)
D
1.69
(4.29)
2.13
(5.41)
E
2.50
(6.35)
2.50
(6.35)
0.38
(0.95)
1/2"
(1.27)
Conduit
Hub
C
E
B
DA
50
100
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The 33 Series of industrial-grade control transformers
with 120 VAC secondary voltage is ideal for use in building
automation and temperature control systems
.
FEATURES
• 24 or 120 VAC secondary voltage
• Single hub or foot mounting
• Fully enclosed
• Compact size
• Low cost
H3 H2
X2 120V X1
480V
H1 H4
H1 H3
Model -HLK, PM
Models -K, 17, 18,
26, 82
X2 120V X1
H1 H2208 or
277V
240V
H2 H4
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
33-050-17 Control transformer, 208:120V, 50 VA
33-050-18 Control transformer, 208:24V, 50 VA
33-050-82 Control transformer, 277:120V, 50 VA
33-050-HLK Control transformer, 480/240:24V, 50 VA
33-050-PM Control transformer, 480/240:120V, 50 VA
33-100-17 Control transformer, 208:120V, 100 VA
33-100-26 Control transformer, 277:24V, 100 VA
33-100-82 Control transformer, 277:120V, 100 VA
33-100-K Control transformer, 120:24V, 100 VA
33-100-PM Control transformer, 480/240:120V, 100 VA

1045. NEW! 985POWER SUPPLIES
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW! NEW!
March 2014
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES CONTROL TRANSFORMERS
RIB TR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The RIB TR Series offers a complete line of control
transformers for use in building automation and temperature
control systems
. The series includes transformer VA ratings
from 20 VA up through 375 VA and primary voltages of 120, 208, 240, 277, and 480 VAC
. Isolation transformers for 24
VAC circuits are also included. All RIB TR Series transformers
are UL listed and feature split-bobbin construction. Some also
ha
ve a secondary circuit breaker
.
FEATURES
• Complete line of control transformers from 20 VA to
375 VA
• Foot and hub mounting on most models
• All models UL listed, many are Class 2 rated
• Ambient temp -30° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
• Color-coded wire leads
• One year warranty
RIB TR Series
VA PRIMARY: SECONDARY FREQ CIRCUIT MOUNTING
MODEL RATING VOLTAGE (VAC) (Hz) BREAKER H = Hub A GENCY APPROVALS
TR20VA001 20 120:24 50/60 No 1H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR20VA002 20 208:24 50/60 No 2H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR20VA003 20 24:24 (isolation) 50/60 No 1H + Foot UL506 listed US/Canada, E197147
TR20VA007 20 277:24 50/60 No 1H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR40VA001 40 120:24 50/60 No 1H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR40VA002 40 120:24 50/60 No 2H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR40VA003 40 24:24 (isolation) 50/60 No 1H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR40VA004 40 120/208/240/277:24 50/60 No 2H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR40VA015 40 120/208/240:24 50/60 No 1H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR40VA040 40 120/208/240:24 (terminals) 50/60 No 1H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR50VA001 50 120:24 50/60 No 1H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR50VA002 50 120:24 50/60 No 2H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR50VA003 50 208/240:24 50/60 No 2H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR50VA004 50 120/240/277/480:24 50/60 Yes 2H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR50VA005 50 120:24 50/60 Yes 1H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR50VA006 50 277:24 50/60 No 1H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR50VA007 50 277:24 50/60 No 2H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR50VA009 50 120/208/240 50/60 Yes 2H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR50VA014 50 277:24 50/60 Yes 1H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR50VA015 50 120/208/240/277/480:24 50/60 Yes 1H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR50VA016 50 120/208/240:24 50/60 Yes 1H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR50VA017 50 208/277/480:24 50/60 Yes 1H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR75VA001 75 120:24 50/60 Yes 1H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR75VA002 75 120:24 50/60 Yes 2H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR75VA003 75 277:24 50/60 Yes 1H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR75VA004 75 120/208/240/480:24 50/60 Yes 1H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR75VA005 75 120/208/240/480:24 50/60 Yes 1H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR85VA002 85 120:24 50/60 No 1H + Foot UL506 listed US/Canada, E197147
TR100VA001 96 120:24 50/60 Yes 1H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR100VA002 96 120:24 50/60 Yes 2H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR100VA004 96 120/240/277/480:24 50/60 Yes 2H + Foot Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146
TR150VA001 150 120:24 50/60 Yes 1H + Foot UL506 listed US/Canada, E197147
TR175VA001 175 208/240:24 50/60 No Foot UL506 listed US/Canada, E197147
TR175VA002 175 120:24 50/60 No 2H + Foot UL506 listed US/Canada, E197147
TR240VA001 240 120:24 50/60 No 1H + Foot UL506 listed US/Canada, E197147
TR300VA002 300 120/208/240/480:24 50/60 Yes Foot UL506 listed US/Canada, E197147
TR375VA001
375 120:24 50/60 No Foot UL506 listed US/Canada, E197147
SPECIFICATIONS

1046. NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES 986NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!NEW!
March 2014
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES CONTROL TRANSFORMERS
RIB TR SERIES
Mounting
Hole
D
E
A
B
C
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS WEIGHT
MODEL A B C D E WIRES lb (kg) STYLE
TR20VA001 2.13 (5.4) 1.90 (4.8) 2.6 (6.6) 1.63 (4.1) 1.54 (3.9) 8.0 (20.3) 1.35 (0.61) 1
TR20VA002 2.31 (5.86) 1.89 (4.80) 2.63 (6.68) 1.63 (4.1) 1.54 (3.9) 8.0 (20.3) 1.32 (0.61) 4
TR20VA003 2.13 (5.4) 1.90 (4.8) 2.6 (6.6) 1.63 (4.1) 1.54 (3.9) 8.0 (20.3) 1.39 (0.63) 1
TR20VA007 2.13 (5.4) 1.90 (4.8) 2.6 (6.6) 1.63 (4.1) 1.54 (3.9) 8.0 (20.3) 1.38 (0.63) 1
TR40VA001 2.7 (6.9) 2.2 (5.6) 2.9 (7.4) 1.75 (4.4) 1.93 (4.9) 8.0 (20.3) 2.02 (0.92) 1
TR40VA002 2.7 (6.9) 2.2 (5.6) 2.9 (7.4) 1.75 (4.4) 1.93 (4.9) 8.0 (20.3) 2.05 (0.93) 4
TR40VA003 2.7 (6.9) 2.2 (5.6) 2.9 (7.4) 1.75 (4.4) 1.93 (4.9) 8.0 (20.3) 2.05 (0.93) 1
TR40VA004 2.75 (7.0) 2.2 (5.6) 2.88 (7.31) 1.75 (4.4) 2.06 (5.23) 8.0 (20.3) 2.02 (0.92) 4
TR40VA015 2.7 (6.9) 2.2 (5.6) 2.88 (7.31) 1.75 (4.4) 1.95 (4.95) 8.0 (20.3) 1.96 (0.89) 1
TR40VA040 2.7 (6.9) 2.2 (5.6) 2.88 (7.31) 1.75 (4.4) 1.95 (4.95) 8.0 (20.3) 1.96 (0.89) 9
TR50VA001 2.75 (7.0) 2.2 (5.6) 2.9 (7.4) 1.75 (4.4) 1.93 (4.9) 8.0 (20.3) 2.14 (0.97) 1
TR50VA002 2.75 (7.0) 2.2 (5.6) 2.9 (7.4) 1.75 (4.4) 1.93 (4.9) 8.0 (20.3) 2.18 (0.99) 4
TR50VA003 2.75 (7.0) 2.2 (5.6) 2.9 (7.4) 1.75 (4.4) 2.01 (5.1) 8.0 (20.3) 2.17 (0.98) 4
TR50VA004 3.48 (8.8) 2.52 (6.4) 3.0 (7.6) 2.0 (5.1) 1.95 (5.0) 9.5 (24.1) 3.04 (1.38) 5
TR50VA005 3.5 (8.9) 2.52 (6.4) 3.0 (7.6) 2.0 (5.1) 2.0 (5.1) 9.0 (22.9) 2.6 (1.18) 2
TR50VA006 2.79 (7.1) 2.2 (5.6) 2.9 (7.4) 1.75 (4.4) 2.01 (5.1) 8.0 (20.3) 2.16 (0.98) 1
TR50VA007 2.79 (7.1) 2.2 (5.6) 2.9 (7.4) 1.75 (4.4) 2.01 (5.1) 8.0 (20.3) 2.17 (0.98) 4
TR50VA009 3.48 (8.8) 2.52 (6.4) 3.0 (7.6) 2.0 (5.1) 1.95 (5.0) 9.5 (24.1) 3.04 (1.38) 5
TR50VA014 3.45 (8.76) 2.5 (6.4) 3.05 (7.74) 2.0 (5.1) 1.95 (4.95) 9.0 (22.9) 2.8 (1.27) 2
TR50VA015 3.475 (8.82) 2.53 (6.42) 3.04 (7.72) 2.0 (5.1) 1.95 (4.95) 9.5 (24.1) 2.98 (1.35) 2
TR50VA016 3.475 (8.82) 2.53 (6.42) 3.06 (7.77) 2.0 (5.1) 1.95 (4.95) 9.5 (24.1) 2.90 (1.32) 2
TR50VA017 3.475 (8.82) 2.53 (6.42) 3.05 (7.74) 2.0 (5.1) 1.95 (4.95) 9.5 (24.1) 2.86 (1.29) 2
TR75VA001, 005 3.9 (9.9) 2.5 (6.4) 3.0 (7.6) 2.0 (5.1) 2.4 (6.1) 9.5 (24.1) 3.66 (1.66) 2
TR75VA002 3.9 (9.9) 2.5 (6.4) 3.0 (7.6) 2.0 (5.1) 2.4 (6.1) 9.5 (24.1) 3.70 (1.68) 5
TR75VA003 3.875 (9.84) 2.5 (6.4) 3.06 (7.77) 2.0 (5.1) 2.4 (6.1) 9.5 (24.1) 3.60 (1.63) 2
TR75VA004 3.9 (9.9) 2.5 (6.4) 3.0 (7.6) 2.0 (5.1) 2.4 (6.1) 9.5 (24.1) 3.78 (1.71) 6
TR85VA002 2.80 (7.1) 3.75 (9.5) 3.18 (8.1) 3.10 (7.9) 2.0 (5.1) 9.5 (24.1) 4.35 (1.97) 1
TR100VA001 4.0 (10.2) 2.5 (6.4) 3.0 (7.6) 2.0 (5.1) 2.55 (6.4) 9.5 (24.1) 4.06 (1.84) 2
TR100VA002 4.0 (10.2) 2.5 (6.4) 3.0 (7.6) 2.0 (5.1) 2.55 (6.5) 9.5 (24.1) 4.13 (1.87) 5
TR100VA004 4.25 (10.8) 2.5 (6.4) 3.0 (7.6) 1.97 (5.0) 2.75 (7.0) 9.5 (24.1) 4.60 (2.08) 5
TR150VA001 3.5 (8.9) 3.75 (9.5) 3.25 (8.3) 3.23 (8.2) 2.0 (5.1) 9.5 (24.1) 4.92 (2.23) 3
TR175VA001 3.8 (9.7) 3.8 (9.7) 3.2 (8.1) 3.1 (7.9) 3.0 (7.6) 9.5 (24.1) 7.05 (3.19) 7
TR175VA002 3.9 (9.9) 3.75 (9.5) 3.18 (8.1) 3.1 (7.9) 3.0 (7.6) 9.5 (24.1) 7.10 (3.22) 4
TR240VA001 3.75 (9.5) 3.75 (9.5) 4.5 (11.4) 3.13 (8.0) 3.23 (8.2) 9.5 (24.1) 9.12 (4.13) 8
TR300VA002 5.4 (13.7) 3.75 (9.5) 4.5 (11.4) 3.18 (8.07) 3.84 (9.75) 8.5 (21.6) 12.1 (5.49) 10
TR375VA001
4.33 (11.0) 3.75 (9.5) 4.5 (11.4) 3.15 (8.0) 3.83 (9.7) 7.0 (17.8) 11.44 (5.18) 7
STYLE 7 STYLE 8
STYLE 4STYLE 3
Circuit Breake r
Circuit Breake r
STYLE 5 STYLE 6
Circuit Breake r
Secondary
STYLE 9 STYLE 10
STYLE 1 STYLE 2
Circuit Breaker
TRANSFORMER STYLES
Circuit Breake rSecondary
Screw
Terminals
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
Order by transformer model as listed under Specifications on the previous page.
Primary Wires
480 VAC Gray 120 VAC White
277 VAC Brown
240 VAC Orange
Common Black
208 VAC Red
Secondary Wires
24 VAC Yellow
24 VAC Yellow/White
WIRING

1047. NEW! 987POWER SUPPLIES
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!NEW!
March 2014
AIR PRODUCTS AND CONTROLS ENCLOSED 24 VAC POWER SOURCE
T-PB SERIES
Primary Voltage 115 VAC
Supply Current 6A maximum
Supply Frequency 60 Hz
Convenience Outlet 115 VAC, 5A
Secondary Voltage 24 VAC
Output Current/VA Rating
T-PB202: 4.0A, 96 VA (Class 1),
T-PB303: 3.0A, 72 VA (Class 2)
Over Current
Protection Circuit breaker
Operating Temperature -13° to 140°F (-25° to 60°C)
Mounting Panel mount, Enclosed
Dimensions 4.75"H x 5.0"W x 3.75"D
(12.1 x 12.7 x 9.5 cm),
6.12"H x 5.19"W x 4.12"D
(15.5 x 13.2 x 10.5 cm)
Weight 5.5 lb (2.65 kg)
Approvals UL-recognized component File
#E160579, UL1012 Listed, File #E160579
Warranty
1 year
DESCRIPTION
The T-PB Series power source provides 24 VAC from a
115 VAC input. Each T-PB Series unit contains an LED
that illuminates when the 24 VAC output is operational. An
on/off s
witch is provided in the 115 VAC input
. This switch
disconnects or connects both the hot and neutral of the input power
. A convenience outlet is located on the front panel.
This con
venience outlet is not controlled by the on/off switch
and is always hot
. A circuit breaker is incorporated in the 24
VAC circuit, which must be manually reset if the rated 3.0A
(Class 2) or 4.0A (Class 1) is exceeded and the breaker
operates.The T-PB Series is available in a metal enclosure
(UL Listed) for field applications or without the enclosure (UL Recognized) for panel mounting
.
FEATURES
• Enc •
On/Off switch
• Convenience outlet, non-switched
• Circuit breaker
• Enclosure with removable access panel to on/off
switch, breaker, and outlet
ON
OFF
ON
115 VAC 60 Hz
6.0 A
Input Po wer
115 VAC 60 Hz
6.0 A max
Switched
Output
Power
24 VAC 60 Hz
24 VAC
60 Hz
24 VAC
LED
Indicator
On/Off
Switch
Circuit
Breaker
Unswitched
Convenience
Outlet
115 VAC
60 Hz, 5A max
H N G
CAUTION
OUTLET
ALWAYS
HOT
5A MAX
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
T-PB202-1
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
T
-PB202-1
24 VAC Power source, 4A (Class 1) with enclosure
T-PB202-0 24 VAC Power source, 4A (Class 1) panel mount
T-PB303-1 24 VAC Power source, 3A (Class 2) with enclosure
T-PB303-0 24 VAC Power source, 3A (Class 2) panel mount

1048.
POWER SUPPLIES 988
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES ENCLOSED 24 VAC CLASS 2 POWER SOURCE
PSB40AB10, PSB100AB10, PSC40AB10, PSC100AB10
Primary Voltage 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Input Control Combination on/off switch and 10A
circuit breaker. Controls input power
to entire unit.
Convenience Outlet 120 VAC, 9A
Secondary Voltage 24 VAC
Output Control PSB100AB10 has combination
on/off s
witch and circuit breaker
(4A)
. Controls 24 VAC output only.,
PSB40AB10 has combination on/
off switch and circuit breaker (3A).
Controls 24
VAC output only
.
Output Indication Red LED for 24 VAC output
Over Current Protection
PSC100AB10 4A circuit breaker,
PSC40AB10 3A circuit breaker
Approvals UL listed, Class 2, UL916,
File E190394, CUL
Weight
PSC40
:
5.31 lb (2.41 kg)
PSC100: 6.70 lb (3.04 kg)
PSB40: 3.21 lb (1.5 kg)
PSB100: 4.51 lb (2.05 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The PSC40AB10 and PSC100AB10 are 24VAC Class 2
power sources pre-packaged in a metal enclosure. The
panel-mount versions, PSB40AB10 and PSB100AB10, are provided without the metal enclosure
. These units are
available with either 40VA or 100VA power ratings. All models
accept 120V
AC input and are provided with a combination
on/off switch/circuit breaker to control the output and a combination on/off switch/breaker to control the incoming 120VAC power
. Other handy features include a 120VAC
convenience outlet, LED indication of the output and terminal strip wiring
.
FEA
TURES
•
Enclosed or panel mount models
• Combination on/off switch/circuit breakers for the input
and output
• Convenience outlet
• Terminal strip wiring
• LED indication of the output
• Class 2 UL Listed
RESET
OFF
RESET
OFF
Com2 4 VAC
120 VAC
Neutral Ground
120 VAC Aux. Ou tput
120 VAC Convenience Outlet in
(cm)
10A Main Breaker/Switch
24 VAC On/Off
LED
Indicator
5.62 (14.3)
PSC Enclosed Models PSB Panel-Mount Models
2.245
(5.7)
3.90
(9.9)
6.25
(15.9)
4.50
(11.4)
Removable
Access
Plate
RESET
OFF
RESET
OFF
5.25 (13.3)
2.25
(5.7)
2.25
(5.7)
3.00
(7.6)
5.20
(13.2)
4.61
(11.7)
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
PSB40AB10
ORDERING INFORMATION
PSC40AB10
PSC40AB10, covered
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PSB40AB10 Enclosed power source, 120 VAC to 24 VAC, 40 VA, panel mount
PSB40AB10-IC-TC UL508 OPEN BRACKET 40VA 120-24VAC; 10A BRKR & TC
PSB100AB10 Enclosed power source, 120 VAC to 24 VAC, 100 VA, panel mount
PSB100AB10-IC-TC UL508 OPEN BRACKET 100VA 120-24VAC; 10A BRKR & TC
PSC40AB10 Enclosed power source, 120 VAC to 24 VAC, 40 VA with enclosure
PSC100AB10 Enclosed power source, 120 VAC to 24 VAC, 100 VA with enclosure
* -IC indicates UL508 and -TC indicates terminal cover

1049. 989POWER SUPPLIES
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES ENCLOSED 24 VAC CLASS 2 POWER SOURCE
PSH SERIES
Primary Voltage 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 120 VAC, 50/60
Hz (40 VA), 480/277/240/208/120
VAC 50/60 Hz (75VA) ,
480/277/240/208/120 VAC 50/60 Hz
(75 VA), 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz (100 VA)
Input Control
Combination on/off switch and 10A
circuit breaker
Convenience Outlet 120 VAC, 15A maximum.
Secondary Voltage
PSH40A: 24 VAC, 40VA
PSH75A: 24 VAC, 75V
PSH100A: 24 VAC, 100V
PSH40A40A: Dual 40 24 VAC, 40 VA
PSH40A75A: Dual 24 VAC, 40VA and 75 VA
PSH40A100A: Dual 24 VAC, 40VA and 100 VA
PSH75A75A: Dual 24 VAC, 75 VA
PSH75A100A: Dual 24 VAC, 75VA and 100VA
PSH100A100A: Dual 24 VAC, 100VA
Note for dual power supplies:
Output derating may exceed 20%
due to elevated ambient temperature or heat buildup in device over time
.
Output Control Combination of on/off switch and
circuit breaker. Controls 24 VAC
output only.
Output Indication Red LED, one for each 24 VAC
output
Dimensions
Single Transformer
Models: 4.50"H x 8.25"W x 4.50"D
(11.4 x 20.96 x 11.4 cm)
Two Transformer
Models: 4.50"H x 8.25"W x 4.50"D
(11.4 x 20.96 x 11.4 cm)
Approvals UL listed, Class 2, UL916, File
E190394 CUL
Weight
PSH40A: 3.1 lb (1.41 kg)
PSH75A: 4.5 lb (2.04 kg)
PSH100A: 4.6 lb (2.09 kg)
PSH40A40A: 5.4 lb (2.45 kg)
PSH40A75A: 6.8 lb (3.09 kg)
PSH40A100A: 6.9 lb (3.13 kg)
PSH75A75A: 8.4 lb (3.86 kg)
PSH75A100A: 8.5 lb (3.86 kg)
PSH100A100A: 8.6 lb (3.90 kg)
Warranty 1 Year
DESCRIPTION
The PSH Series of Power Sources from Functional Devices includes one or two transformers pre-packaged in a metal enclosure
. The transformers are available in 40VA, 75VA and
100VA sizes. A switch/circuit breaker is provided for switching
the output of each transformer. An optional switch/circuit
breaker is available for controlling power to the entire unit.
Other handy f
eatures include an LED to indicate the presence
of 24VAC at the Class 2 output terminals or wires, an internal high-voltage wiring compartment, and two optional 120VAC grounded convenience outlets
.
FEATURES
• One or two transformers in pre-packaged metal
enclosure
• 40, 75 and 100 VA Class 2 transformers
• Output switch/circuit breaker and LED indication
• Optional primary switch/circuit breaker
• Optional 120 VAC convenience outlets
• To order UL508 add 1C to the end
SPECIFICATIONS
PSH,
Two Transformer Model
with Options
PSH,
Single Transformer
Model with Options

1050. NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES 990NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW! NEW!
March 2014
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES ENCLOSED 24 VAC CLASS 2 POWER SOURCE
PSH SERIES
Two Transformer Models
RESET
OFF
RESET
OFF
RESET
OFF
4.50 (11.4)
8.625 (21.9)
8.25 (20.96)
4.25
(10.8)
4.5
(11.4)
Single Transformer Models
in
(cm)
RESET
OFF
RESET
OFF
5.438 (13.8)
5.15 (13.1)
4.25
(10.8)
4.50
(11.4)
4.50 (11.4)
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PSH40A Enclosed single 40 VA power source, 120 to 24 VAC
PSH75A Enclosed single 75 VA power source, 480/277/240/208/120 to 24 VAC
PSH100A Enclosed single 100 VA power source, 120 to 24 VAC
PSH40A40A Enclosed dual 40 VA power sources, 120 to 24 VAC
PSH40A75A Enclosed 40 VA, 120 to 24 VAC, and 75 VA, multi-tap to 24 VAC power sources
PSH40A100A Enclosed 40 VA and 100 VA power sources, 120 to 24 VAC
PSH75A75A Enclosed dual 75 VA power sources, 480/277/240/208/120 to 24 VAC
PSH75A100A Enclosed 75 VA, 480/277/240/208/120 to 24 VAC and 100 VA, 120 to 24 VAC sources
PSH100A100A Enclosed dual 100 VA power sources, 120 to 24 VAC
OPTIONS
– External secondary terminals, 120 VAC convenience outlets
N External secondary terminals, without 120 VAC convenience outlets
W Internal secondary wires, 120 VAC convenience outlets
NW Internal secondary wires, without 120 VAC convenience outlets
– Without 10A main switch/breaker and without auxiliary output wire
B10 10A main switch/breaker and auxiliary output wire
(75 VA transformers are 120 VAC input only with “B10” option)
1C UL508
EXT2 With power cord
RESET
OFF
RESET
OFF
Optional 120 VAC
Convenience Outlet
Optional
Terminal
Strip
Optional
Terminal
Strip
Com2 4 VAC
LED
Indicator
Optional 10A Main Breaker/Switch
24 VAC
Breaker/Switch
Optional 120 VAC
Convenience Outlet
Optional 120 VAC
Convenience Outlet
RESET
OFF
RESET
OFF
RESET
OFF
Com 24 VACCom 24 VAC
LED Indicator
Optional 10A Main Breaker/Switch
Optional120 VAC
Convenience Outlet
24 VAC
Breaker/Switch
24 VAC
Breaker/Switch
WIRING
OUTPUT:
Models with
Terminals
HOT: 24 VAC
COM: Common
“W” Option
Models Only
Yellow/White: 24 VAC
White/Blue: Common
“B10” Option
Models Only
Blue: 120 VAC
auxiliary output
“B10” Option Models Only 40 VA, 75 VA, or 100 VA Black: 120 VAC White: Neutral Green: GroundINPUT: Transformer Primary Wires 40 VA or 100 VA Black: 120 VAC White: Common 75 VA Gray: 480 VAC Brown: 277 VAC Orange: 240 VAC Red: 208 VAC White: 120 VAC Black: Common "EXT2" Option Models Only AC Power Supply Cord
*Output derating may exceed 20% due to elevated ambient temperature or heat buildup in device over time.

1051. NEW! 991POWER SUPPLIES
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
NEW! NEW!
March 2014
Primary Voltage 480/277/240/120 VAC 50/60 Hz
Output Voltage Isolated 24 VAC, 100 VA Class 2
Output Control Combination on/off switch and 4A
circuit breaker for each 24 VAC
output
Output Indication Red LED for each 24 VAC output
Dimensions PSH Models:
12.125"H x 12.125"W x 6.0"D (30.8
x 30.8 x 15.2 cm)
PSMN Models: 11.33"H x 11.4"W x 7.0"D (22.8 x
28.9 x 17.8 cm)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight PSH200A:
18.6 lb (8.44 kg)
PSH300A: 18.0 lb (8.17 kg)
PSH500A: 30.16 lb (13.68 kg)
PSMN200A: 12.38 lb (5.62 kg)
PSMN300A: 12.55 lb (5.69 kg)
PSMN500A: 20.6 lb (9.34 kg)
Warranty 1 Year
ENCLOSED POWER SOURCE - 100 VA, 24 VAC CLASS 2 OUTPUTS
PSH200A, PSH300A, PSH500A, PSMN300A, PSMN500A
DESCRIPTION
The PSH200A, PSH300A and PSH500A are power sources that are pre-packaged in a metal enclosure and provide isolated, 24 VAC, 100VA, Class 2 outputs
. The panel mount
versions PSMN200A, PSMN300A and PSMN500A are provided without the metal enclosure
. All models accept
480/277/240/120
VAC input and have combination on/off
switch/circuit breakers to control each output
. Other handy
f
eatures include LED indication of each output and terminal
strip wiring
. The PSH200A and PSMN200A have five 40VA
Class 2 outputs; the PSH300A and PSMN300A have three 100VA Class 2 outputs and the PSH500A and PSMN500A have five 100VA Class 2 outputs
.
FEATURES
• NEMA 1 enclosed or panel mount models
• Combination on/off switch/circuit breakers for each
output
• Terminal strip wiring
• LED indication of each output
• Class 2, UL Listed
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PSH200A Enclosed power source 480/277/240/120 VAC to 24 VAC, five 40 VA outputs with enclosure
PSH300A Enclosed power source 480/277/240/120 VAC to 24 VAC, three 100 VA outputs with enclosure
PSH500A Enclosed power source 480/277/240/120 VAC to 24 VAC, five 100 VA outputs with enclosure
PSMN200A Panel mount power source 480/277/240/120 VAC to 24 VAC, five 40 VA outputs, panel mount
PSMN300A Panel mount power source 480/277/240/120 VAC to 24 VAC, three 100 VA outputs, panel mount
PSMN500A Panel mount power source 480/277/240/120 VAC to 24 VAC, five 100 VA outputs, panel mount
PSH300A

1
2
3
480
277
240
120
COM
BREAKER
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
11.40"
11.30"
INDICATOR
SWITCH
USER CONNECTIONS
24V
COM
24V
COM
24V
COM
ACCESSORIES
APS53-TC Terminal cover for PSH500A/PSH300A

1052. NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES 992NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!NEW!
March 2014
SOLA/HEVI-DUTY UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES - UPS
S1K, SDU SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Sola/Hevi-Duty S1K and SDU Series of off-line
Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) provides economical
protection from damaging power interruptions and impulses
.
The S1K units f
eature three separate outlets for critical
devices needing battery backup and surge protection and one surge-protected-only outlet for non-critical devices.
Connections are made to the DIN-r
ail mount SDU units on
easy-to-wire screw terminals
. In addition, RJ-45 connections
f
or phone/data line surge protection are provided with both
the S1K and SDU
. UPS monitoring software and cable are
included for communication with the protected computer by RS-232 interface
. The SDU has an optional relay module that
can be connected to the model's port. S1K, SDU Series
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
S1K320 Uninterruptible power supply, 320 VA
S1K520 Uninterruptible power supply, 520 VA
S1K650 Uninterruptible power supply, 650 VA
S1K850 Uninterruptible power supply, 850 VA
S1K1200 Uninterruptible power supply, 1200 VA
S1K-PMBRK Wall/panel mount bracket for S1K UPS
SDU500 Uninterruptible power supply, 500 VA, DIN rail mount
SDU850 Uninterruptible power supply, 850 VA, DIN rail mount
SDU-PMBRK DIN rail mount bracket for SDU UPS
RELAYCARD-SDU Form C dry contact relay module for SDU UPS
MODEL S1K320 S1K520 S1K650 S1K850 S1K1200 SDU500 SDU850
PRIMARY
VOLTAGE
Capacity VA/Watts 320/240 520/340 650/390 850/600 1200/720 500/300 850/510
Voltage (Single phase) 115V ±20% 120V +10%, -20%
Frequency 50 or 60Hz ±10% (auto sensing)
SECONDARY
VOLTAGE
Voltage (on battery)
Simulated sine wave
115 ±10% 115 ±5% 120V ±5%
Frequency (on battery)
50 or 60 Hz
±1 Hz ±0.3 Hz ±0.5% au tosensing
Transfer Time 4 milliseconds, typical
PROTECTION
Unit Input Circuit breaker fo r overload and short circuit protection
Overload ProtectionUPS automatic shutdown if ov erload exceeds 105% of nominal at 20 seconds, 120% at 10 seconds, 130% at 3 seconds
*For typical 15" monitor **At full load
Short Circuit UPS output cut off immediately
BATTERY
Type Sealed, maintenance-free lead acid batteries
Typical Recharge Time
(to 90% of full capacity)
4 hours 6 hours8 hours
Backup Time (minutes) 10-20* 15-25* 15-30* 25-40* 30-45* 4** 2**
ALARM
Battery Back-up Slow beeping sound ev ery 4 seconds
Battery Low Rapid beeping sound every second
Overload Continue beeping sound
ENVIRONMENT
Ambient operation 0% to 95% humidity non-condensing 0° to 40°C up to 10,000 ft (3000 m)
Audible noise < 40 dBA (1 meter from surface)
PHYSICAL
Net Weight - lbs (kg) 8.8 (4.0) 11.6 (5.3) 8.1 (3.7) 10.8 (4.9) 10.8 (4.9) 10.7 (4.7) 11.4 (5.0)
Dimensions -
H x W x D (in/cm)
5.3" x 3.8" x 10.4"
(13.5 x 9.7 x 26.5)
5.3" x 3.8" x 10.4"
(13.5 x 9.7 x 26.5) 5.3" x 3.8" x 12.6"
(9.7 x 32.0 x 13.5) 5.3" x 3.8" x 12.6"
(9.7 x 32.0 x 13.5) 4.55" x 4.88" x 11.1"
(11.6 x 12.4 x 28.2)
AGENCY APPRO VALS
WARRANTY
UL1778 listed
1 year
UL recognize dE179213 E179213
SPECIFICATIONS

1053. NEW! 993POWER SUPPLIES
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!NEW!
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
PSH550-UPS
Input 120 VAC, 12 Amp
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Circuit Breaker Combination on/off switch and 10A
circuit breaker. Controls input to
entire unit.
Convenience Outlet 120 VAC
Output
PSH550 120 VAC, 4.6A, 330 Watt
PSH850 120 VAC, 7.1 A, 510 Watt
Dimensions
PSH550 12.0"H x 14.0"W x 6.0"D
(30.5 x 35.6 x 15.2 cm)
PSH850 14.0"H x 16.0"W x 6.0"D
(35.6 x 40.6 x 15.2 cm) metal
housing with screw cover
Approvals UL listed, UL916,C-UL, CE, UL
Listed, UL916,UL1778, C-UL, CE,
RoHS
Weight
PSH550 23.6 lb (10.7 kg)
PSH850-UPS-STAT 29 lb (13.2kg)
Warranty 1 year
Temperature Stability 32° to 95°F (0° to 35°C)
Backup Time
PSH550 3 minutes @ full 550 VA load; 13
minutes at 1/2 load
PSH850 2 minutes @ full 850 VA load; 8
minutes at 1/2 load
Housing Type Metal housing with screw cover
DESCRIPTION
The Model PSH550-UPS uninterruptible power supply
(UPS) provides economical protection from damaging power
interruptions and impulses in critical environments such as
hospitals, laboratories, research and surgery centers
. The Model
PSH550-UPS features an extra 120 VAC outlet and a 10A circuit breaker on/off switch
. The switch controls the incoming
line voltage and can be used to verify the functionality of the UPS
. The Model PSH550-UPS is ideal for those hard-to-install
applications and locations where you need a UPS but also must use conduit to run your wiring
. Models numbers ending in STAT
have status contacts and LED Indicator Lights.
FEATURES
• 10 Amp circuit breaker
• On/off switch
• Additional 120 VAC outlet
• Metal enclosure
• STAT Models with LED Lights
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
PSH550-UPS
UPS
Wired to
Protected
Device
120 VAC
line input
On/Off Switch,
Breaker, Light
Computer Outlet
UPS Output Line Input
RESET
OFF
HOT
HOT
NEUT
NEUT
GND
GND
Power to UPS
Protected power from UPS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PSH550-UPS Uninterruptible power supply, 120 VAC, 550 VA with enclosure
PSH550-UPS-STAT Uninterruptible power supply, 120 VAC, 550 VA with enclosure with contacts and LED Lights
PSH850-UPS-STAT Uninterruptible power supply, 120 VAC, 850 VA with enclosure with contacts and LED Lights
GND
Line
Neut.
GND
Line
Neut.
N/C
N/O
COM
N/C
N/O
COM
RESET
OFF
}} }
}
GND
Line
Neut.}


UPS Status
Contacts &
LED Indicator
120 Vac
Line Input
Input Po wer
Status Contacts &
LED Indicator
UPS plugged
into one of two
outlets. Other
outlet spare.
To Protected
Device
From UPS
Backed-Up
Outlet
To UPS
UPS
UPS-STAT

1054. NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES 994NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!NEW!
March 2014
KELE AC / DC POWER SUPPLY
DCPA-1.2
Supply Voltage 120 VAC
Supply Frequency 50/60 Hz
Regulation 1.5% @ full rated current
Output Voltage 24 VAC 24 VDC (regulated)
Adjustable 1.3-27 VDC
Output Current Total combined current from both
outputs not to exceed 1.2A @ 24V
Over Current
Protection 2.5A for combined outputs
(GF-2.5 fuse)
Operating Temperature 32° to 130°F (0° to 55°C)
Operating Humidity 95% RH non-condensing
Mounting Snap-track (included)
Temperature Stability 1%
Dimensions 3.0"H x 3.25"W x 6"L
(7.62 x 8.26 x 15.24 cm)
Weight 2.3 lb (1 kg)
Warranty 18 months
DESCRIPTION
The DCPA-1.2 universal AC/DC power supply can deliver 30 VA of power
. This compact, track-mounted supply accepts
120 VAC and delivers both 24 VAC and regulated 24 VDC power for control circuits
.
FEATURES
• 24 •
LED indication of AC input and DC output status
• Overload protection
• Screw terminals with pressure plates
• Snap-track mounted
• Adjustable DC output
• Full-wave rectified
120
VAC IN
24
VAC OUT
24
VDC OUT
24 VAC*
Output
24 VDC*
Output
Fuse 2 .5A (GF- 2 .5)
120 VAC
Input
AC
IN
DC
OUT
DC Output
Adjust Po t
L
N G H +
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out
DCPA-1.2-C Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/ Special DC Out
(Specify output voltage when ordering, 1.3-27 VDC)
*The AC and DC load circuits
must be isolated from each
other. Either may be grounded
but not both. Failure to isolate
can result in damage to unit.
DC Voltage Adjustment 1
. Apply 120 VAC to 120 VAC IN terminals.
2. Adjust DC output adjust pot until the desired DC v
oltage is displayed with a
voltmeter at the 24 VDC OUT terminals.
Note: Adjusting the DC output voltage will
reduce the output current rating by the ratio of the output voltage divided
by 24.
Example: 6 VDC output will have a reduced
output current of 300 mA.
(6/24) x 1.2 = 300 mA

1055. NEW! 995POWER SUPPLIES
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!NEW!
March 2014
KELE DC POWER SUPPLY
DCP-1.5-W
DESCRIPTION
The DCP-1.5-W is a regulated 1.5A power supply that
accepts 24
VAC at the input and provides 24 VDC at the
output
. The DCP-1.5-W can be ordered with any output
voltage from 1.5V to 27 VDC. Field voltage adjustments may
also be made using only a screwdriver. The power supply is
provided with a mounting track for easy field application. This
low cost power supply features good regulation and has full
overcurrent protection.
FEATURES
• Lo •
Regulated DC output
• Snap-track mounted
• Screw terminals with pressure plates
• Adjustable DC output
• Full-wave rectified
Supply Voltage 24 VAC
Supply Frequency 50/60 Hz
Regulation 1.5% at full rated current
Output Voltage 24 VDC (full wave rectified and
regulated), 1.5 - 27 VDC (full
wave rectified and regulated)
Output Current 1.5A (with 75 VA transformer)
Over Current Protection 3A fuse (GF-3)
Operating Temperature 32° to 130°F (0° to 55°C)
Operating Humidity 95% RH non-condensing
Mounting Snap track (included)
Temperature Stability 1%
Dimensions 1.63"H x 2.19"W x 4.0"D
(4.13 x 5.56 x 10.16 cm)
Weight 0.4 lb (0.18 kg)
Warranty 18 months
SPECIFICATIONS
VAC INVDC OUT
24 VAC IN
FUSE 3A
Regulated
DC Voltage
Output
DCP-1.5-W
VOLT
OUT
ADJ
Line
Voltage
Transformer*
4.0
(10.16)
2.19
(5.56)
D3
Output
Voltage
Adjustment
Snap-Track
Mounting
(included)
+
+
–
- HG
GF-3
Fuse
in
(cm)
* Input Transformer Required VA Rating @ 24 VAC = 43.2 x Desired DC Output Current
For full 1.5A capacity, use a 75 VA transformer.
Depth =
1.63 (4.13)
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
APPLICATION
In general, the output current rating will be reduced
by the ratio of the output voltage divided by the input
voltage. For example, a 6 VDC supply powered by a 24 VAC
transformer will have a reduced-rated output current of 375
mA
. (6/24) x 1.5 = 0.375
To obtain the full-rated output current at reduced output voltages, the standard power supply input voltage must be reduced
. It is a good practice to maintain the same AC input
voltage as the desired DC output voltage.
A grounded DC minus terminal and a grounded
secondary 24 VAC input transformer will blow the unit's
fuse. If this is a problem, there are three possible solutions:
Option 1: Remove the ground on the transformer secondary
to float the voltage output, or use a separate ungrounded
transformer
.
Option 2: Add a Model Y65G13-0 40 VA isolation transformer.
This option reduces the po
wer supply capacity to 920 mA
.
Option 3: Remove diode D3 (marked on board). Jumper
the VDC OUT (-) terminal to the VAC IN (G) terminal. The
grounded side of the AC supply should be wired to the VAC IN (G) terminal
. This option reduces the power supply
capacity to 400 mA.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT
DCP-1.5-W-C Power supply, 24 VAC In to special DC output
(Specify output voltage when ordering, 1.5-24 VDC)

1056. NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES 996NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW! NEW!
March 2014
KELE ENCLOSED DC POWER SUPPLY
DCP-250
Supply Voltage 110-125 VAC, 10 VA
Supply Frequency 50/60 Hz
Regulation ±0.5V
Output Voltage 24 VDC (regulated)
Output Current 250 mA
Operating Temperature -22° to 104°F (-30° to 40°C)
Operating Humidity 95% RH non-condensing
Mounting DIN rail mount, Hub mount,
Panel/surface mount
Temperature Stability 1%
Dimensions 4.0"H x 2.25"W x 1.75"D
(10.16 x 5.71 x 4.45 cm)
Approvals UL916 listed, File #E185225
Weight 1.0 lb (0.5 kg)
Warranty 18 months
2 .25
(5 .71)
1 .75
(4 .45)
4 .0
(10 .16)
1/2" (1 .27) Threaded Hub*
(DCP-250-H only)
(2) Mounting holes
Power Supply
ON LED
Lead Wires
in
(cm)
Models DCP-250-P and DCP-250-D do not ha ve
the 1/2" (1 .27 cm) hub . Wires exit through two holes
in the top of the enclosure on these models .
DESCRIPTION
The DCP-250 is a unique DC power supply that provides
regulated 24 VDC power from a 120 VAC input. It is well
suited for powering transmitters, transducers, actuators, and other equipment in building automation and temperature control systems
. The DCP-250 can be ordered for hub
mounting, surface mounting in a panel, or DIN rail mounting.
FEATURES
• Fle •
Compact size
• Fully enclosed
• Color-coded wiring
• LED indication
• Transformer isolated
(black)
(white)
(white/red)
(white/black)
L
N
+
–
120 VAC INPUT
24 VDC OUTPUT
WIRING
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
DCP-250 Series
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DCP-250-H DC power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT, hub mount
DCP-250-P DC power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT, panel/surface mount
DCP-250-D DC power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT, DIN rail mount

1057. NEW! 997POWER SUPPLIES
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW! NEW!
March 2014
KELE DC POWER SUPPLY
DCP-524
Supply Voltage 22-28 VAC @ 630 mA
Supply Frequency 50/60 Hz
Output Voltage 5 VDC (regulated) and 24 VDC
(regulated)
Output Current 250 mA maximum @ 5 VDC; 80 mA
maximum @ 24 VDC
Operating Temperature 32° to 130°F (0° to 55°C)
Operating Humidity 95% RH non-condensing
Mounting Snap-track (included)
Dimensions 2.38"H x 4.0"W x 2.0"D
(6.0 x 10.2 x 5.0 cm)
Weight 0.9 lb ( 0.4 kg)
Warranty 18 months
DESCRIPTION
The Model DCP-524 is a power supply with dual isolated-
outputs. Powered by 24 VAC, it provides 5 VDC and 24 VDC.
The outputs are highly regulated, require no field adjustment, and are isolated from each other and the input v
oltage
. The
Model DCP-524 is used any time an isolated 5 VDC, 24 VDC, or combination is needed
.
FEATURES
• Lo •
Snap-track mounted
• Dual isolated DC outputs, 5 VDC and 24 VDC
• Requires no field adjustment
• Transformer isolated
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DCP-524 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC and 5 VDC OUT
24 VAC Input
(may be grounded)
5 VDC Output (isolated)
G H
24 VDC
OUTPUT
24 VAC
INPUT
5 VDC
OUTPUT
24 VDC Output (isolated)

1058. NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES 998NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014
Supply Voltage 100, 120, 220, 230, 240 VAC ±
10%
Supply Frequency 47-63 Hz
Output Voltage 12 VDC, Adjustable ± 5% of rated
voltage, 24 VDC, Adjustable ± 5%
of rated voltage
Output Current 1.7A, 1.2A, 2.4A, 3.6A, 4.8A, 7.2A
Line Regulation ± 0.05% for 10% line change
Load Regulation 5% for 50% load change
Ripple 3 mV p-p maximum
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals, input and output
16-gauge wire maximum
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Approvals UL1310, CUL-recognized
component, File #E137632: CE certified
Weight
2.3 lb (1.10 kg), 4.06 lb (1.84 kg),
7.28 lb (3.30 kg), 7.88 lb (3.57 kg),
14.00 (6.35 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DC POWER SUPPLIES
SLS SERIES
H
Din
(cm)
W
DESCRIPTION
The SLS Series of DC Power Supplies from Sola/Hevi- Duty are used to transform various AC voltage inputs into a regulated DC output
. Multiple mounting surfaces simplify
installation by providing different mounting options. Units have
built-in remote sensing capability for better load regulation.
FEATURES
• Scre •
Multiple input voltages
• Regulated 24 VDC output up to 7.2A
• Remote sensing
• Transformer isolated
5
1
3
2
4
120V Input
24 VDC 24 VDC
Factory-installed Ju mpers
Without Remote Sensing
(allows power supply to maintain proper
voltage at a remote location)
With Remote Sensing240V Input
Fuse
(not included)
L
N
120 VAC Fuse
(not included)
L1
L2
240 VAC
+
L
O
A
D
OUT-
S-
S+
OUT+
OUT-
S-
S+
OUT+
+
L
O
A
D
Jumper Bars for 120 VAC
(Factory Setting)
5
1
3
2
4
Jumper Bar for 240 VAC
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Weight
SLS-12-017T
4.84"H x 4.00"W x 2.07"D
(12.30 x 10.16 x 5.25 cm)
2.3 lb (1.10 kg)
SLS-24-012T
4.84"H x 4.00"W x 2.07"D
(12.30 x 10.16 x 5.25 cm)
2.3 lb (1.10 kg)
SLS-24-024T
5.62"H x 4.87"W x 2.95"D
(14.27 x 12.37 x 7.49 cm)
4.06 lb (1.84 kg)
SLS-24-036T
7.00"H x 4.87"W x 3.20"D
(17.78 x 12.37 x 8.13 cm)
7.28 lb (3.30 kg)
SLS-24-048T
9.00"H x 4.87"W x 3.20"D
(22.86 x 12.37 x 8.13 cm)
7.88 lb (3.57 kg)
SLS-24-072T
14.00"H x 4.87"W x 3.20"D
(35.56 x 12.37 x 8.13 cm)
14.00 (6.35 kg)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SLS-12-017T Power supply, 12 VDC adjustable ± 5% of rated voltage, 1.7A
SLS-24-012T Power supply, 24 VDC adjustable ± 5% of rated voltage, 1.2A
SLS-24-024T Power supply, 24 VDC adjustable ± 5% of rated voltage, 2.4A
SLS-24-036T Power supply, 24 VDC adjustable ± 5% of rated voltage, 3.6A
SLS-24-048T Power supply, 24 VDC adjustable ± 5% of rated voltage, 4.8A
SLS-24-072T Power supply, 24 VDC adjustable ± 5% of rated voltage, 7.2A
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
6M30 Series Fuse blocks 852
FLM Series Fuses 854

1059. NEW! 999POWER SUPPLIES
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014
COMPACT DC POWER SUPPLY
PW2
Input 120 VAC ± 5% 60 Hz
Output Voltage 12 VDC ± 0.5 VDC @ 200 mA, 24
VDC ± 1 VDC @ 100 mA, 5 VDC ±
0.2 VDC @ 300 mA
Terminals 22-16 AWG
Operating Temperature 32° to 131°F (0° to 55°C), 32° to
131°F (0° to 55°C)
Operating Humidity 95% RH maximum, non-condensing
Mounting Screw slots in base or side of
enclosure
Dimensions 3.0"H x 2.2"W x 1.4"D
(7.6 x 5.6 x 3.6 cm)
Weight 0.4 lb (0.2 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Model PW2 converts unregulated 115 VAC to regulated
DC voltage output. This compact, easy-to-mount power
supply may be used to power transmitters, transducers, controllers, relays, and other peripheral devices requiring 5, 12, or 24 VDC
.
FEATURES
• Compact size
• Regulated power outputs of 5, 12, or 24 VDC
• 115 VAC, 60 Hz input
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PW2-12 Enclosed DC power supply, 115 VAC to 12 VDC
PW2-24 Enclosed DC power supply, 115 VAC to 24 VDC
PW2-5 Enclosed DC power supply, 115 VAC to 5 VDC
PLUG-IN CLASS 2 TRANSFORMER
AM-24830A
DESCRIPTION
The Model AM-24830A is a UL Listed plug-in Class 2
transformer. Simply plug it into any 120VAC wall outlet and
get a 24VAC output with 20VA of available power. Its small
siz
e and screw terminal connections make it a convenient
and portable source of low voltage for many applications
.
Supply Voltage 120 VAC
Output Voltage 24 VAC
Output Current 20W
Operating Temperature 14° to 104°F (-10° to 40°C)
Operating Humidity 20% to 80% RH
Mounting Plug in
Dimensions 3.2"H x 2.2"W x 1.9"D
(8.1 x 5.6 x 4.8 cm)
Weight 2.2 lb (1 kg)
Approvals UL listed, File #E112794, Class 2
Not W
et, Class 3 Wet
Warranty
1 year
ORDERING INFORMATION
FEATURES
• Plugs into any 120VAC wall outlet
• Convenient and portable source of low voltage
• Screw terminal connections
• High efficiency, low heat generation
• UL Listed
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AM-24830A Plug-in Class 2 Transformer, 120 VAC to 24 VAC, 20 VA
SPECIFICATIONS
• Scre
• Easy-to-mount enclosure

1060. NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES 1000NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014
Model Supply Voltage
Supply
Current
Supply
Frequency
Output VoltageOutput Current Dimensions Weight
PS5R-A12
100-240 VAC nominal,
110-340 VDC
0.17A 50/60 Hz 12 VDC 0.6A, 7.5W
2.95"H x 1.77"W x 2.76"D
(7.49 x 4.50 x 7.01 cm)
0.33 lb (0.15 kg)
PS5R-A24
100-240 VAC nominal,
110-340 VDC
0.17A 50/60 Hz 24 VDC 0.3A, 7.5W
2.95"H x 1.77"W x 2.76"D
(7.49 x 4.50 x 7.01 cm)
0.33 lb (0.15 kg)
PS5R-B12
100-240 VAC nominal,
110-340 VDC
0.3A 50/60 Hz 12 VDC 1.2A, 15W
2.95"H x 1.77"W x 3.74"D
(7.49 x 4.50 x 9.50 cm)
0.37 lb (0.17 kg)
PS5R-SB12
100-240 VAC nominal,
110-340 VDC
0.45A 50/60 Hz 12 VDC 1.2 A, 15W
3.54"H x 0.89"W x 3.74"D
(9.0 x 2.25 x 9.50 cm)
0.35 lb (0.16 kg)
PS5R-B24
100-240 VAC nominal,
110-340 VDC
0.3A 50/60 Hz 24 VDC 0.6A, 15W
2.95"H x 1.77"W x 3.74"D
(7.49 x 4.50 x 9.50 cm)
0.37 lb (0.17 kg)
PS5R-C12
100-240 VAC nominal,
110-340 VDC
0.68A 50/60 Hz 12 VDC 2.5A, 30W
2.95"H x 3.54"W x 3.74"D
(7.49 x 9.0 x 9.50 cm)
0.79 lb (0.36 kg)
PS5R-SC12
100-240 VAC nominal,
110-340 VDC
0.9A 50/60 Hz 12 VDC 2.5A, 30W
3.74"H x 1.42"W x 4.25"D
(9.5 x 3.6 x 10.8 cm)
0.55 lb (0.25 kg)
PS5R-C24
100-240 VAC nominal,
110-340 VDC
0.68A 50/60 Hz 24 VDC 1.3A, 30W
2.95"H x 3.54"W x 3.74"D
(7.49 x 9.0 x 9.50 cm)
0.79 lb (0.36 kg)
PS5R-SC24
100-240 VAC nominal,
110-340 VDC
0.9A 50/60 Hz 24 VDC 2.5A, 30W
3.74"H x 1.42"W x 4.25"D
(9.5 x 3.6 x 10.8 cm)
0.55 lb (0.25 kg)
PS5R-D24
100-240 VAC nominal,
110-340 VDC
1.15A 50/60 Hz 24 VDC 2.1A, 50W
2.95"H x 3.54"W x 3.74"D
(7.49 x 9.0 x 9.50 cm)
0.86 lb (0.39 kg)
PS5R-SD24
100-240 VAC nominal,
110-340 VDC
1.7A 50/60 Hz 24 VDC 2.5A, 60W
3.74"H x 1.42"W x 4.25"D
(9.5 x 3.6 x 10.8 cm)
0.63 lb (0.29 kg)
PS5R-Q24
100-240 VAC nominal,
110-340 VDC
1.1A 50/60 Hz 24 VDC 3.1A, 75W
4.72"H x 3.35"W x 5.51"D
(12.0 x 8.5 x 14.0 cm)
1.7 lb (0.8 kg)
PS5R-E24
100-240 VAC nominal,
110-340 VDC
2.5A 50/60 Hz 24 VDC 4.2A, 100W
2.95"H x 3.54"W x 3.74"D
(7.49 x 9.0x 9.50 cm)
0.86 lb (0.39 kg)
PS5R-SE24
100-240 VAC nominal,
110-340 VDC
2.3A 50/60 Hz 24 VDC 3.75A, 90W
4.53"H x 1.81"W x 4.76"D
(11.5 x 4.6 x 12.1 cm)
0.97 lb (0.44 kg)
PS5R-F24
100-240 VAC nominal,
110-340 VDC
1.8A 50/60 Hz 24 VDC 5A, 120W
2.95"H x 5.7"W x 3.74"D
(7.49 x 14.5 x 9.50 cm)
1.3 lb (0.59 kg)
PS5R-SF24
100-240 VAC nominal,
110-340 VDC
1.8A 50/60 Hz 24 VDC 5A, 120W
4.53"H x 1.97"W x 5.1"D
(11.5 x 5.0 x 12.9 cm)
1.39 lb (0.63 kg)
PS5R-G24
100-240 VAC nominal,
110-340 VDC
4A 50/60 Hz 24 VDC 10A, 240W
4.72"H x 7.87"W x 5.51"D
(12.0 x 19.99 x 14.0 cm)
2.6 lb (1.2 kg)
PS5R-SG24
100-240 VAC nominal,
110-340 VDC
3.6A 50/60 Hz 24 VDC 10A, 240W
4.92"H x 3.15"W x 5.9"D
(12.5 x 8.0 x 15.0 cm)
2.21 kb (1.0 kg)
PS5R-TJ24
320-575 VAC (3-phase),
360-575 VAC (2-phase)
3 x 1.1A @ 400
VAC, 3 x 0.8A @
480 VAC
50/60 Hz 24 VDC 20A, 480W
5.12"H x 4.53"W x 6.00"D
(13.0 x 11.5 x 15.25 cm)
4.41 lb (2 kg)
IDEC SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES
PS5R SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The PS5R Series of switching power supplies is available with
an output of 12 or 24 VDC and output power from 7.5-480W. The
output is short circuit protected and regulated. These switching
power supplies, which minimize the heat generated in control panels, have a much higher efficiency than linear power supplies
. They are
small and completely enclosed, and they can be DIN rail or surface mounted
.
FEATURES
• Univer
• Universal AC input (three phase): 320-575 VAC
• Output power from 7.5-480W
• Small size to save panel space
• DIN rail/surface mount enclosure
• Slim-line models to save valuable panel space
• High efficiency operation for minimizing heat generation in control
panels
• Time-saving, spring-loaded screw terminals PS5R-A24
PS5R-C24
PS5R-SC
PS5R-SC
SPECIFICATIONS

1061. NEW! 1001POWER SUPPLIES
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014
IDEC SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES
PS5R SERIES
PS5R-TJ24
+V
-VL1
L2
L3
V. ADJ
DC ON
Ground
320 – 575V AC
(3-phase operation), 50/60 Hz
360 – 575V AC
(2-phase operation), 50/60 Hz
24 VDC
V. ADJ
DC ON
+VNC-V
LN
100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
110-340 VDC
Ground
12 or 24 VDC
+
_
PS5R-A
PS5R-B
+V-V
NL
100-240 VA C, 50/60 Hz
110-340 VA C
Ground
24 VDC
PS5R-SC, -SD, -SE, -SF
(slim-line)
_
+
PS5R-C, -D
V. ADJ
DC ON
-V NC
NCNLNC
+V
Ground
100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
110-340 VDC
12 or 24 VDC
+
_
PS5R-Q
-V
NL
+V
Ground
100-240 VA C, 50/60 Hz
110-340 VDC
24 VDC
+
_
PS5R-E
+V-V
NL
100-120V
Jumper
200-240V
Jumper
100-120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
200-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Ground
Voltage Select
24 VDC
+
_
PS5R-F
24 VDC
Ground
100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
110-340 VDC
+
_
-V
NL
+V
PS5R-G
-V +V
NL
24 VDC+
_
Ground
100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
110-340 VDC
PS5R-SG
(slim-line)
-V
NL
+V
Ground
100-240 VA C, 50/60 Hz
110-340 VDC
24 VDC
–+
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PS5R-A12 Switching power supply, 12 VDC, 7.5W (0.6A)
PS5R-A24 Switching power supply, 12 VDC, 7.5W (0.3A)
PS5R-B12 Switching power supply, 12 VDC, 15W (1.2A)
PS5R-SB12 Switching power supply, 12 VDC, 15W (1.2A), slim-line
PS5R-B24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 15W (0.6A)
PS5R-C12 Switching power supply, 12 VDC, 30W (2.5A)
PS5R-SC12 Switching power supply, 12 VDC, 30W (2.5A), slim-line
PS5R-C24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 30W (1.3A)
PS5R-SC24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 30W (1.3A), slim-line
PS5R-D24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 50W (2.1A)
PS5R-SD24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 60W (2.5A), slim-line
PS5R-Q24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 75W (3.1A)
PS5R-E24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 100W (4.2A)
PS5R-SE24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 90W (3.75A), slim-line
PS5R-F24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 120W (5A)
PS5R-SF24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 120W (5A), slim-line
PS5R-G24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 240W (10A)
PS5R-SG24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 240W (10A), slim-line
PS5R-TJ24 Switching power supply (3-phase), 24 VDC, 480W (20A)

1062.
POWER SUPPLIES 1002
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
DIMENSIONS
DIN RAIL MOUNT POWER SUPPLIES
SDN-P SERIES
Supply Voltage 115/230 VAC auto select
Frequency 47-63 HZ
Fusing Internally fused
Output Voltage 12 VDC, 24 VDC, 48 VDC
Humidity < 90% RH, non-condensing
Storage Temperature -13° to 185°F (-25° to 85°C)
Operating Temperature 14° to 140°F (-10° to 60°C)
Approvals CE, cULs, SEMI F47, RoHS, UL File
#E61379
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The SDN-P Series power supplies ensure compatibility in
demanding applications. They have sag immunity, transient
suppression and are noise tolerant. They have hazardous
location approvals, wide temperature range and high tolerance to shock and vibration allows the SDN-P Series to be used in a wide variety of applications
.
FEATURES
• A •
DC OK signal
• Adjustable voltage
• Narrow width on rail for space critical applications
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SDN 5-24-100P 120W DIN rail power supply, 115/230 VAC input, 24 VDC output
SDN 4-24-100LP 92W DIN rail power supply, 115/230 VAC input, 24 VDC output
SDN 20-24-100P 480W DIN rail power supply, 115/230 VAC input, 24 VDC output
SDN 2.5-24-100P 60W DIN rail power supply, 115/230 VAC input, 24 VDC output
SDN 10-24-100P 240W DIN rail power supply, 115/230 VAC input, 24 VDC output
SPECIFICATIONS
ACCESSORIES
SDN-PMBRK2 Metal chassis mounting kit for SDN series
SDN-P
Model

Number
Dimensions - inches (mm)
Weight
HW D
24 Vdc
SDN 2.5-24-100P 4.88 (124.0) 1.97 (50.0) 4.55 (116.0)
SDN 4-24-100LP 4.88 (124.0) 2.56 (65.0) 4.55 (116.0)
SDN 5-24-100P 4.88 (124.0) 2.56 (65.0) 4.55 (116.0)
SDN 10-24-100P 4.88 (124.0) 3.26 (83.0) 4.55 (116.0)
1.6 lbs (0.73 kg)
2.4 lbs (1.10 kg)
2.4 lbs (1.10 kg)
3.3 lbs (1.50 kg)
24-28V
115/230VAC1.3-0.7A50/60H Z
fifififi fifififififi
US LISTED
PowerSupply
SDN2.5-24-100P
SOLA
Parallel
Single
C
fifififi
L
U
LN
24 VDC/ 2.5A
++
NECC lass 2
Power Supply
OK
--
OK
W
H D

1063. 1003POWER SUPPLIES
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
COMPACT DIN RAIL MOUNT POWER SUPPLIES
SDN-C COMPACT SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The SDN-C Compact Series DIN rail series power supplies
are the next generation of the SDN Series. These models
combine high efficiency and compact size with new visual diagnostic LEDs to offer the most performance available from SolaHD
. These have a patented DIN rail mounting clip and
large, rugged accessible screw terminals.
FEATURES
• Compact packaging to save space on the DIN rail
• Visual diagnostic LEDs for input and output status at a
glance
• Higher efficiency saves energy and lowers amount of
heat generated in panel
• PowerBoost™ overload capability to start high inrush loads
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SDN 5-24-100C 120W compact DIN rail power supply, 115/230 VAC input, 24 VDC output
SDN 10-24-100C 240W compact DIN rail power supply, 115/230 VAC input, 24 VDC output
SDN 5-24-480C 120W compact DIN rail power supply, 380/480 VAC input, 24 VDC output
SDN 10-24-480C 240W compact DIN rail power supply, 380/480 VAC input, 24 VDC output
SDN 20-24-480C 480W compact DIN rail power supply, 380/480 VAC input, 24 VDC output
SDN 40-24-480C 960W compact DIN rail power supply, 480 VAC input, 24 VDC output, three phase
SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS
ACCESSORIES
SDN-PMBRK2 Metal chassis mounting kit for SDN series
SDN-C
24-28 V
115/230 VAC1 .3-0.7 A 50/60HZ
fifififi fifififififi
US LISTED
PowerS upply
SDN2.5-24-100P
SOLA
Parallel
Single
C
fifififi
L
U
LN
24 VDC/2. 5A
++
NECClass2
PowerSupply
OK
--
OK
W D
H
SDN5-24-100C
Model

Number
Dimensions - inches (mm)
Weight
HW D
SDN 5-24-100C4.85 (123.0) 1.97 (50.0) 4.36 (111.0)
SDN 10-24-100C4.85 (123.0) 2.36 (60.0) 4.36 (111.0)
SDN 20-24-480C4.85 (123.0) 3.42 (87.0)4.98 (127.0)
SDN 5-24-480C4.85 (123.0) 1.97 (50.0) 4.36 (111.0)
SDN 10-24-480C4.85 (123.0) 2.36 (60.0) 4.36 (111.0)
SDN 40-24-480C4.85 (123.0) 3.35 (85.0) 4.68 (119.0)
1.1lbs (0.50kg)
1.7lbs (0.80kg)
2.9lbs (1.30kg)
1.2lbs (0.52kg)
1.5lbs (0.70kg)
5.3lbs (2.40kg)
SDN-C Series Dimensions
Supply Voltage
Single Phase 115/230 VAC
Three Phase 380-480 VAC
Frequency
Single Phase 43-67 HZ

Three Phase
50-60 HZ
Fusing
Single Phase Internally fused
Three Phase Externally fused
Output Voltage 24 VDC
Humidity < 90% RH, non-condensing
Storage Temperature -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Operating Temperature -13° to 140°F (-25° to 60°C)
Approvals CE, cULs, SEMI F47, RoHS
Warranty 5 years

1064.
POWER SUPPLIES 1004
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
CONTROL VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SELECTION GUIDE
STEP 1
Determine the total sealed (steady state) VA load of the control circuit. Add the continuous VA requirements of the
maximum number of components that will be energized at any given time. Include both electromagnetic (coils,
solenoids, etc.) and non-electromagnetic components (pilot lights, timers, etc.). Sealed VA data is available from
the component manufacturers. If only current is known, simply multiply current by voltage to get VA.
STEP 2
Determine the total inrush VA load of the control circuit. Add together the inrush VA ratings of the electromagnetic
components (coils, solenoids, etc.) that will be energized simultaneously. Inrush VA data is usually available from the
component manufacturers. Also, add the normal VA requirements of non-electromagnetic components (pilot lights,
timers, etc.) that will be energized at the same time.
STEP 3
Refer to the Regulation Data Chart below. If the supply circuit (primary) voltage is reasonably stable and fluctuates no
more than ± 5%, refer to the 90% Secondary Voltage column. If it fluctuates as much as ±10%, refer to the 95% Secondary
Voltage column. NEMA standards require all electromagnetic devices to operate successfully at 85% of rated voltage.
The 90% Secondary Voltage column is most commonly used for transformer selection.
Selection Example (Steps 1-4)
Determine the size transformer required to
power the following list of components,
assuming stable line voltage.
Sealed VA Inrush VA
Qty
3
2
3
2

Components
Description
Size 1 Contactors
Size 3 Contactors
Relays
Indicating Lamps
TOTALS
63
86
33
14
196
Manufacturer’s Data
555
1156
126
14
1851
Using the chart, we find the inrush VA of
1851 will require a 250 VA transformer,
even though the sealed VA is only 196.
1. Has the proper primary and secondary voltage 2. Exceeds the inrush VA demands
3. Has a nameplate VA that exceeds the sealed VA requirements
50
75
100
150
250
300
350
500
750
1000
1500
2000
3000
5000
REGULATION DATA CHART
Continuous
Nominal VA
Inrush VA @ 20% PF
200 350 400 800
1500 2000 3200 4200 8000
13,000 15,000 20,000 39,000 75,000
(Name Plate Rating) 95% Sec Voltage 90% Sec Voltage 85% Sec Voltage
240 470 575 950
2200 2800 3700 5800
11,000 18,000 24,000 32,000 60,000
120,000
280 580 770
1250 2750 3900 4900 8000
15,000 23,000 31,000 41,000 77,000
150,000
STEP 5
Determine the proper transformer model number from the Kele catalog. Make sure your selection
meets the following conditions:
STEP 4
In the selected column of the Regulation Data Chart, locate the inrush VA closest to,
but not less than, the inrush VA of the control circuit. Read to the far left side of the
chart to determine the continuous nominal VA nameplate rating of the transformer
needed. The secondary voltage delivered under inrush conditions will be a minimum of 85%, 90%, or 95% of rated secondary voltage, depending on the column selected from the Regulation Data Chart. The total sealed VA of the control circuit must not
exceed the nominal VA rating of the transformer selected.
To make the proper transformer selection, the load must be completely analyzed. Every electrically-
energized component in the control circuit must be considered. Electromagnetic control devices have two
current requirements. The first current requirement is called inrush volt-amperes (VA) and is the current
required to energize the coil of the device. Inrush VA typically lasts anywhere from 5-20 ms and can be as
much as 10 to 20 times the normal sealed VA. Sealed VA is the normal current required to maintain the
energized coil in steady state for a period of time.

1065. 1005POWER SUPPLIES
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
POWERING MULTIPLE DEVICES FROM A COMMON TRANSFORMER
After properly sizing a control transformer for your application,
there is an additional step in the selection process that should
be considered
. Even though the necessary steps have been
taken to select a properly-sized transformer to power multiple 24 VAC devices (such as BAS controllers, transducers, actua- tors, and power supplies) there is a potential, but not so obvi- ous problem that can exist
. If not foreseen and corrected, this
problem can cause blown fuses and/or physical damage to devices when the system is energized
.
Many electronic HVAC controllers and interface devices are
designed to take AC power on their input terminal strips.
Ho
wever, because the electronic components on these devic-
es require DC power, the AC power at the terminal strip is converted to DC by use of an internal (onboard) power supply circuit (rectifier/filter/regulator)
. Two common types of power
supply circuits used are called “full-wave bridge rectifier” and “half-wave rectifier
.” The problem with powering multiple devic-
es from one AC power source stems from some devices using the half-wave circuit and some using the full-wave circuit
.
To better understand why mixing half- and full-wave rectifiers
on a common AC power source can be a problem, it is impor- tant to understand the difference between these two power supply circuits
.
The half-wave rectifier is shown in Figure 1. Note that one
side of the AC power input is connected directly to the nega- tive side of the DC output
. On the transformer’s positive half-
cycle, the diode conducts. This allows the transformer current
to charge the filter capacitor, as well as supply load current.
On the tr
ansformer’s negative half-cycle, the diode turns off
.
The
stored charge in the filter capacitor supplies load current
until the next positive half-cycle
. The half-wave rectifier only
uses transformer current every other half-cycle. It is not very
efficient, but it is inexpensive and does a good job for low- current power supplies
.
The full-wave bridge rectifier is shown in Figure 2. Note that
neither side of the A
C power input is connected directly to the
negative side of the DC output
. On the transformer’s positive
half-cycle, diodes D1 and D3 conduct. This allows the trans-
former current to charge up the filter capacitor, as well as supply load current
. On the transformers negative half-cycle,
diodes D2 and D4 conduct, supplying transformer current to the filter capacitor and load
. The full-wave rectifier utilizes the
transformer current on both positive and negative half-waves.
It is more efficient, and that is wh
y it is often used in higher-
current power supplies
.
So what is the prob
lem with using a common AC trans-
former to power a device that has a full-wave rectifier and a second device that has a half-wave rectifier? Consider
Figure 3, which shows just such a setup
. The con-
trol signal “-” terminals on both modules are either directly connected togeth-
er (as shown) or indirectly connected by a common ground
. Looking carefully,
you can see that the minus output of the full-wave rec- tifier is connected directly back to one of its AC inputs via the “pass thru” common connection inside the half- wave device
. This connec-
tion actually places diode D4 in the bridge directly across the AC transformer winding
. Every time the AC
voltage goes to the polar- ity that turns on the diode, the diode shorts out the transformer
. In other words,
the diode shorts the trans- former 50% of the time
.
There are several symptoms
+
+
+
–
24
VAC
Reg
Control
Electronics
–
Control Signal
Input or Output
Transformer
Current Flow
Control Module
Positive Half-cycle
+
+
+
–
24
VAC
Reg Control
Electronics
–
Control Signal
Input or Output
No Transformer
Current Flow
Control Module
Negative Half-cycle
Stored
Charge
H
G H
G
Power Power
Note: AC “G” and Control signal “-” are the same electrical connection.
FIGURE 1. HALF-WAVE RECTIFIER CIRCUIT
+
+
+
-
24
VAC
Reg
Control
Electronics
–
Control Signal
Input or Output
Transformer
Current Flow
Control Module
Positive Half-cycle
H
G
D1
D2D3
D4
+
++
-
24
VAC
Reg
Control
Electronics
–
Control Signal
Input or Output
Transformer
Current Flow
Control Module
Negative Half-cycle
H
G
D1
D2D3
D4
Note: AC “G” and Control signal “-” are not the same electrical connection.
FIGURE 2. FULL-WAVE RECTIFIER CIRCUIT

1066. NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES 1006NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
March 2014
POWERING MULTIPLE DEVICES FROM A COMMON TRANSFORMER
that can occur from this situation:
1) A fuse blows every time the commons of the devices are
connected together.
2) The diode shorting the transformer fails open.
3) The diode shorting the transformer fails shorted, and the
transformer may burn up.
4) The circuit board foil traces connecting to the diode melt
open or are blown off the board.
Now that the problem has been pinpointed, some general
guidelines can be given for connecting multiple AC powered devices together
.
1) It is okay to connect multiple devices to the same AC
transformer and share signal commons if: (a) every device
uses a half-wave rectifier; and (b) the same AC lead on
every device is used for a common.
2) It is okay to connect the signal common of a device that
uses a full-wave rectifier to other signal commons if the
full-wave rectifier device has a dedicated isolated AC
power transformer connected only to the device’s power
screws and nowhere else.
3) It is okay to connect the signal common of a device that
uses a full-wave rectifier to other signal commons if the
device contains its own internal AC isolation transformer.
4) It is okay to power a half-wave rectifier device and a full-
wave rectifier device from the same AC transformer if the
signal commons are absolutely, positively isolated from
each other.
5) If it is absolutely necessary to power a half-wave device
and a full-wave device from the same AC source, and
their DC control signals have to interact, a signal isolator
such as the DT13E will be necessary.
These guidelines all require that the type of input power circuit
(full- or half-wave) be known. Since most devices do not come
with detailed schematic diagrams, this may be difficult to determine
. Following are a few ideas that may help:
1) If a 24 VAC powered device has three wiring terminals,
(power “+”, signal “+” and a shared common for power “-”
and signal “-”), then a half-wave rectifier is being used.
2) If a 24 VAC powered device has four wiring terminals,
(power “+”, power “-”, signal “+”, signal “–”), first check the
product’s data sheet for any clues. Look for any notes that
might indicate that the power “–” and the signal “–”
terminals are electrically the same and hence, a half-wave
device.
3) If no indication is given on the product’s data sheet, try
using an ohmmeter to check the resistance between the
signal “–” terminal and both of the power terminals. A
reading of a couple of ohms or less between the signal
“–” and either power terminal would indicate a common
connection between these terminals and a half-wave
circuit.
4) If no common connection can be found, the device is
probably a full-wave rectifier. However, some devices
incorporate a built-in isolation transformer that isolates both
power terminals from both signal terminals.
The diff
erential pressure model T40 is an
example
. This type of device can be used
with either full- or half-wave (voltage output) devices
.
5) Finally, the manufacturer or supplier of the
device should be able to provide the required information
. Some manufacturers may require
that only their products be connected to a common transformer
. Others may even require
that each of their devices have its own dedi- cated and isolated transformer
.
In summary, many devices (BAS controllers, transducers,
actuators, and power supplies) used for the control of HVAC systems can be externally powered from 24 VAC
. Because
the electronic components of these devices require direct current, the AC power is internally converted to DC
. When
powering multiple devices from a common 24 VAC source, problems can arise due to different techniques that are used to convert the AC to DC
. In other words, it is not as simple as
plugging various appliances into an AC outlet in your house.
Whene
ver you have different devices from different manu-
facturers, be careful to separate those devices that utilize a full-wave rectifier from those using a half-wave rectifier.
When an
y doubt exists, provide a separate transformer
.
The small e
xpense of an additional transformer or two will
more than make up for all of the time and money spent on
troubleshooting
.
+ +
24
VAC
–
–
Control
Sig
Full-Wave Bridge
Module
Half-Wave Module
H
G
H
G
H G
D1
D2D3
D4
Control
Sig
“Pass Thru” Common Connection
Path that ties bridge output
minus back to its own AC input
Power
Power
Control
Electronics
Control
Electronics
FIGURE 3. FULL-WAVE AND HALF-WAVE IN PARALLEL

1067. 1007POWER SUPPLIES
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
UNDERSTANDING CURRENT SINKING, CURRENT SOURCING, AND GROUND LOOPS
I-
I+
+
+
–
–
V
Internal
Power
Supply
Reg
Sense
You’ve just purchased some current to pneumatic
(I/P) transducers and are ready to try them. Each
transducer has been carefully installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and wired to its own 4-20 mA analog output
. All of the transducers are being
powered by a common 24 VDC power supply. Feeling
confident with the installation, you decide it is time to test their operation
. Individual commands are issued to each
unit through the building automation system (BAS) but none of the I/P transducers appear to function properly
.
A command issued to one unit mysteriously causes all

of the other units to react (or perhaps none of the units work at all). After mumbling a few choice words, the
installation and all the wiring are verified to be correct. The
system is trying to deliver a 4-20 mA signal to a device that is designed to accept a 4-20 mA signal
. So what is
the problem? Are all of the transducers defective? While this is possible, it is very unlikely
. Instead, the problem
could be directly related to the fact that all 4-20 mA analog outputs are not created equal
.

Different BAS controllers utilize different electronic
techniques for generating a 4-20 mA current output.
With one method, the analog output typically has its

“I+” terminal connected to the “+” side of an internal current loop power supply whose “-” side is connected to “ground
.” The output has its sensing and regulating
electronics between the “I-” terminal and “ground” (See Figure 1)
. The “I+” terminals are electronically identical.
Because the “I-” terminals carry the different current

values for each output loop, they must be isolated from each other. They cannot be connected together nor
can they be connected to a common or “ground
.” Connecting a 4-20 mA load from
“I+” to “ground” puts the controller’s internal current loop power supply directly across the load (See Figure 2)
. The controller’s
regulating electronics are completely bypassed, which will usually cause the controller’s output fuse to blow, the load to go to full output and remain there or the load to be physically damaged
. A computer
using this type of 4-20 mA signal is commonly referred to as a “current sinking controller
.”

Another method used to generate a 4-20
mA signal puts the sensing and regulating electronics between the internal loop power supply and the analog output “I+” terminal
. The “I-” terminal is connected to
circuit “ground” (See Figure 3). With this method, the “I+”
terminals carry the different current values for each loop and, therefore, must be isolated from each other
. Since
all of the output “I-” terminals are electrically the same, they can be connected together
. They may or may not be
connected to “ground” depending on the manufacturer’s specifications
. A controller using this method to generate a
4-20 mA signal is commonly called “current sourcing.”
FIGURE 1. CURRENT SINKING CONTROLLER
(typical for each output)
Current Sinking
Controller
Internal
Power
Supply
I+
I-
mA
Sense and
Regulate
+
-
Driving a grounded load will cause
unregulated current to bypass the
controller’s electronics

Grounded
Load
FIGURE 2. DRIVING A GROUNDED LOAD WITH A CURRENT
SINKING CONTROLLER

1068.
POWER SUPPLIES 1008
POWER SUPPLIES
17
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
UNDERSTANDING CURRENT SINKING, CURRENT SOURCING, AND GROUND LOOPS
Looking back now at the problem discussed previously, all
of the I/P transducers are being powered from a common
power supply
. After a little research you determine
that your controller is current sinking and upon further examination of the I/P transducer, its power input “-” terminal is found to be common with its signal input “-” terminal
. Since all of the I/P power input “-” terminals are
connected to one common power supply, this effectively ties all of the controller analog output “I-” terminals
together
. (A no-no for current sinking controllers.)
One way to solve this problem is to provide a separate
isolated (not grounded) power supply for each transducer.
This can be costly and, if panel space is at a premium, not very practical
. It may also be necessary to isolate the case
of a metal transducer from ground for proper operation.
Another way to solve this problem is to configure the

computer’s analog outputs for voltage output
. Doing so
will typically allow the controller to drive grounded loads as well as multiple loads powered from a single power supply
. Transducers that are designed to accept a voltage
or that are field selectable for current or voltage should, of course, be used (UCP-422-V, UCP-722, UCP-822)
.
A third solution is to utilize two-wire transducers that are loop-powered and require no external power supply (UCP- 422, UCP-242)
.
Another problem often encountered when interfacing

a computer’s analog output to external equipment is the corruption of the control signal due to “ground loop” currents
. Our instinct would lead us to believe that all
“ground” points are at the same potential. In reality,
there is no such thing as an absolute “ground.” Ground
potentials at different locations are not equal because current flow in the ground conductors causes small voltage potentials to develop from one ground point to another
. Connecting a wire between “grounds” creates a
loop, causing “ground loop” currents to flow through the wire
. This causes voltage drops in the ground wire due to
wire resistance (See Figure 4). Also, since the impedance
of the loop is rather low, a few volts potential difference can produce several amps of current, possibly damaging electrical components
. Even worse, electrical storms
could momentarily cause very large potential differences that would make an extremely large current flow possible
.
Under these circumstances, the current flow can be high enough to burn cables or destroy electrical interfaces
.
One simple way to solve this problem is to isolate or float the “com” connection from ground at either end
. However,
the equipment often has its “com” terminal internally grounded, making it impractical to float
. When this is the
case, a signal isolator such as the Model DT13E should be used
. The DT13E accepts a current or voltage input
and produces a linearly-transferred current or voltage output
. The input and output are electrically isolated
making the DT13E useful for eliminating ground loops, reducing noise pickup, allowing conversion of the signal type (from current input to voltage output and vice versa) and scaling between the input and output
. The DT13E
could also be used to solve the problem discussed earlier by allowing current sinking controllers to control grounded loads
.
The Model DT13 contains an internal power supply which provides regulated and isolated power to each half of the board
. Input conditioning circuitry scales and filters the
DC input and drives a precision isolator, which carries the signal across the isolation barrier
. The output side
of the isolator drives a circuit that reconverts the signal into a duplicate of the input, which can then be scaled as necessary for the application
.
I+
I-
Sense
Reg
+
-
V
+
-
Internal
Power
Supply
FIGURE 3. CURRENT SOURCING CONTROLLER
(typical for each output)
Transmitter Receiver
Voltage drop in “COM” wire
due to loop currents
COMCOM
Ground loop current
Potential difference
in two “grounds”
+
–
–
+
V
FIGURE 4. GROUND LOOP CURRENTS

1069. HUMIDITY
PRESSURE
PRESSURE
P74 Series | p. 1087
PTX1 Series | p. 1059
DPL Series | p. 1009
GC52 | p. 1047
SRCM | p. 1095
A2G | p. 1103
Kele Carries Reliable Instruments for Critical Environments
and General Building Pressure Sensing.

1070. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
PRESSURE
DPAII | p. 1012
PTX1 Series | p. 1059
M264 | p. 1014
PRESSURE
Controllers and Monitors
PCM Series — Pressure Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
MRMS Series
— Multi-Room Monitoring Station
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094
SRCM Series
— Room Condition Monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
SRIM Series
— Room Pressure Monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
SRMD Series
— Room Isolation Monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
SRPM Series
— Room Pressure Monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
Differential Pressure Switches KDPS Series
— Differential Pressure Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070
AFS Series
— Adjustable Differential Pressure Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
RH-3, RH-3-2
— Differential Pressure Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
NS2-0000-02
— Adjustable Differential Pressure Switch Kit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075
RFS-4001
— Differential Pressure Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076
RSS Series
— Adjustablåe Differential Pressure Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077
DDP-109
— Dual Setpoint Differential Pressure Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
DFS-221
— Fixed Differential Pressure Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
1910 Series
— Differential Pressure Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080
1900-5-MR
— Manual Reset Pressure Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080
P32 Series
— Differential Pressure Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081
A2G-40 Series
— Differential Pressure Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082
24-013, 24-014
— Differential Pressure Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
P74 Series
— Differential Pressure Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087
J21K Series
— Differential Pressure Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088
3000 Series
— Photohelic Differential Pressure Switch / Gauge
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
Differential Pressure Transmitters DPL Series
— Low Differential Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
DPA, DPA-M Series
— Differential Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
DPA II Series
— Differential Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
M264 Series
— Differential Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
M265 Series
— Differential Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
260 Series
— Multirange Differential Pressure Transmitter with Display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
M267-MR
— Multi-range Differential Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020
269 Series
— Precision Low Differential Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
CXLdp Series
— Differential Pressure Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023
DXLdp Series
— Differential Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1025
XLDP Series
— Differential Pressure Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
ZPS Series
— Differential Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028
PR274/275 Series
— Differential Pressure Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030
A2G-50 Series
— Differential Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
T30 Series
— Differential Pressure Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
PR264 Series
— Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
PR276 Series
— Duct Static Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
Gauges and Accessories BVA-5
— Bypass Valve Assembly
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053
DPW-3VLV, M230-3VLV, W30-3VLV
— Three and Five-Valve Manifolds
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
K2000 Series
— Low Cost Differential Pressure Gauge
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101
111.10, 111.12 Series
— Dial Gauge
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
2000 Series
— Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gauges
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
232.34, 233.34 Series
— Dial Gauge
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
Series A
— Microprocessor Based Differential Pressure Gauge
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110
25W100
— Refrigeration Gauge
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
PG Series
— Pressure Gauges
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
47B-1, 47S-1, 747B, 747S, PT
— Snubbers, Pigtail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
A300 Series, RPS, SD-01, 21121, 60681
— Air Pressure Sensors, Surge Dampeners
. . . . . . . 1113
Pressure Switches P10 Series
— Pressure Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084
PK Series
— Adjustable Pressure Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
J54 Series
— Pressure Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
Pressure Transmitters P51 Series
— Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
PSS2 Series
— Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057
PTX1 Series
— Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059
209 Series
— Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
50 Series
— Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
PVI-1, PVI-2
— Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
GC51 Series
— Rangeable Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
MBS 1900
— Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
PSD-30 Series
— Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069
A2G-05, -10, -15 Series
— Pressure Gauges / Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitters DPW-692 Series
— Differential Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1039
M230 Series
— Differential Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
231 Series
— Setra Differential Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
231RS Series
— Remote Mounted Differential Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
GC52 Series
— Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
PR282 Series
— Wet to Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
W30 Series
— Differential Pressure Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051

1071. fifl−˚ 1009PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage
4-20 mA Model 9-30 VDC
0-5, 0-10 VDC Model 9-30 VAC/VDC
Signal Output DPL-XX-1
0-10 VDC (3-wire)
DPL-XX-4 4-20mA (2-wire)
DPL-XX-5 0-5 VDC (3-wire)
Maximum Output Impedance
800Ω
Minimum Output Impedance
5,000Ω
Adjustments Adjustable via trim pots
Accuracy ±1.0% full scale
Thermal Effect Compensated temperature range:
0° to 150°F (-18° to 65°C)
Overpressure ±10 psig (68.95 kPa) in positive or
negative direction
Operating Temperature 0° to 150°F (-18° to 65°C)
Storage Temperature -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Enclosure Rating Fire retardant glass filled polyester
(UL94V-0)
Process Connection 1/4" OD press-on fitting
Wiring Terminations Screw terminal strip
Approvals CE
Weight 0.3 lb (0.15 kg)
Warranty 1 year
LOW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
DPL SERIES
3.95 (10.0)
2.75
(7.0)
3.49
(8.9)
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The Kele DPL Series Low Differential Pressure Transmitters offer reliable pressure measurements as low as ±0
.10" w.c. (±25 Pa) with an exceptional 1% full scale
accuracy. The rugged capacitance sensor can withstand
up to 10 psig over pressure without damaging the unit. The
transmitters feature reverse wiring protection and easily accessible zero and span pots
. The DPL Series are designed
for energy management systems, environmental pollution control, HVAC, and building automation applications
.
FEATURES
• 10 psig overpressure
• ±1% full scale accuracy
• Reverse wiring protection
• 4-20 mA, 0-5 or 0-10 VDC output
• Zero and span adjustment
• Bidirectional ranges available
APPLICATION
• HV •
Variable air volume and fan control
• Filter monitoring
• Environmental pollution control
• Furnace draft
• Lab and fume hood control
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
4.27 (10.8)
0.60
(1.5)
1.55
(3.9)

1072. fifl˚
PRESSURE 1010fifl˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
+
9 to 30 VDC
Current
monitoring
device
–
Model
DPL
+–
WIRING
LOW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
DPL SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Readout
or
BAS
-COM
+EXC
OUT
Power
supply
Model
DPL
MODEL
DPL
DPL 10 4--
DESCRIPTION
XXX
Differential pressure transmitter
Range Code (see table)
0-10 V output
4-20 mA output
0-5 V output
Example: DPL-10-4
Differential
pressure transmitter with
4-20mA output, ± 0.1"w.c.
1
4
5
TABLE 1. RANGE CODES
RANGE CODE PRESSURE RANGE "W.C. RANGE CODE BIDIRECTIONAL RANGE "W.C.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0 to 0.25
0 to 0.5
0 to 1.0
0 to 2.5
0 to 5.0
0 to 10.0
0 to 25.0
0 to 50.0
0 to 100 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
±0.1
±0.25
±0.5
±1.0
±2.5
±5.0
±10.0
±25.0
±50.0
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-308-K Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-I Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
SD-01 Surge dampener 1113
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901

1073. fifl−˚ 1011PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage
DPA 24 to 36 VDC @ 23 mA, 24 VAC
±10% @ 0.83 VA
DPA-M (Voltage) 15 to 36 VDC @ 23 mA, 24 VAC ±
10% @ 0.83 VA
DPA-M (Current) 12 to 36 VDC @ 23 mA, 24 VAC
±10% @ 0.83 VA
Signal Output
DPA 4-20 mA @ 500Ω, 1-5 or 2-10 VDC
DPA-M 4-20 mA @ 500Ω, 0-5 or 0-10 VDC
Accuracy ±1% Full Scale Output
Repeatability ±0.3% Full Scale Output
Operating Humidity 10 to 95% RH, non-condensing
Operating Temperature
DPA 32° to 185°F (0° to 85°C)
DPA-M 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Compensated Temperature
Range 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)

Input Range 0-1" W.C. to 0-20" W.C.
Media Compatibility Dry air or inert non-conductive gases
Proof Pressure 100" W.C.
Wiring Termination Terminal (16 to 22 AWG)
Approvals CE, RoHS, REACH
Weight 0.32 lb (0.14 kg)
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The Kele DPA and DPA-M Series are very cost-effective,
low-range differential air pressure transmitters for duct
pressure applications where measurement of pressure
differentials up to 10" W
.C. is required. The DPA and DPA-M
Series incorporate a piezoresistive, silicon, micromachined sensing element and integrated temperature compensation for excellent performance and accuracy
.
FEATURES
• Lo
• 4-20 mA output standard or 1-5/2-10 VDC outputs
• 24 VAC or 24 VDC power
• Brass barb fittings for 1/4" tubing
• Two-year warranty
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
DPA, DPA-M SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
DPA Mini
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DPA Differential pressure transmitter
DPA-M Differential pressure transmitter mini
INPUT RANGE ("W.C.)
1 0-1
2 0-2
3 0-3
4 0-4
5 0-5
10 0-10
20 0-20
300 0-0.3 KPa
500 0-0.5 KPa
1000 0-1.0 KPa
1600 0-1.6 KPa
2500 0-2.5 KPa
OUTPUT SIGNAL
5 1-5 VDC
10 2-10 VDC
20 4-20 mA
DPA-M 105
Example: DPA-M-10-5 Differential pressure
transmitter mini with input range of 0-10" W.C. and 1-5 VDC output signal
DPA-1-20
Wiring
Output Signal Supply Voltage Wire Connections
Output
Ground
VIN
{ {

1074. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1012fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
3.07"
(78.02mm)
5.25"
(133.45mm)
1.08"
(27.52mm)
Factory Calibration
DO NOT ADJUST!
Unit Select
DIP Switches
Config DIP Switches
1/2" NPT Access
Hole with Strain
Relief Fitting
Terminal Block s 16-22 AWG Shielded
Conductors Recommended
Brass Fittings (recommend 1/4" push-on tubing
DESCRIPTION
The Kele DPA II Series Differential Pressure Transmitter
is a cost-effective, versatile low-range differential air pressure
transmitter for applications such as monitoring building
static pressure, filter blockage, measuring flow, clean rooms,
etc
. It has field selectable pressure ranges and outputs
through easy to configure DIP switches. The DPA II Series
incorporates a durable piezoresistive sensing element and integrated temperature compensation for excellent performance and accuracy
. Models with LCD feature an
easy-to-read display for set up reference, trouble shooting assistance, and performance monitoring
.
FEATURES
• Field selectable pressure ranges
• Field-selectable outputs 4-20mA, 1-5 VDC, or 2-10 VDC
• LCD option for easy installation and setup
• 24 VAC or 24 VDC power
• Two-year warranty
Supply Voltage 15-36 VDC, 35 mA
24 VAC ±10%, 0.83 VA
Signal Output 4-20 mA (two-wire) 1-5 or 2-10
VDC (three-wire) Dip switch selectable
Max Output Impedence (mA)

550Ω max
Min Output Impedance (VDC)
100 KΩ min
Accuracy ±0.85% Full Scale Output,
includes linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability
Thermal Effect
± 0.067% FSO/°F (± 0.12%
FSO/°C)
Compensated Temperature Range
32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C)
Media Compatibility Dry air or inert non-conductive
gases
Overpressure 100" W.C.
Operating Humidity 0 to 95% non-condesning
Operating Temperature -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Wetted Parts
Brass fittings, PVC tubing, and
silicon
Enclosure Rating UL94-5VA
Process Connection 1/4 in barbed fittings
Wiring Terminations Screw terminal with cable gland
Approvals RoHS, CE, WEEE, REACH
Weight 0.45 lbs (0.20 kg); 0.50 lbs (0.23
kg) with LCD
Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
DPAII-1-20
DIMENSIONS
DPAII-1-20-LCD
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
DPA II SERIES

1075. fifl˚ 1013PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
DPA II SERIES
WIRING / OUTPUT SELECTION / SPAN SELECTION
Table 2 Output Selection
Table 1 Wiring Connections
Table 3 Span Selection
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
SD-01 Surge dampener 1113
RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-I Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
A-308-K Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb 1113
Example: DPAII-10-5-LCD Differential pressure transmitter with input
r ange of 0 to 10" W.C. and 1 to 5 VDC output signal
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DPAII Differential pressure transmitter
INPUT RANGE
1 0 to 1" w.c.
2 0 to 2" w.c.
3 0 to 3" w.c.
4 0 to 4" w.c.
5 0 to 5" w.c.
10 0 to 10" w.c.
20 0 to 20" w.c.
300 0 to 0.3 KPa
500 0 to 0.5 KPa
1000 0 to 1.0 KPa
1600 0 to 1.6 KPa
2500 0 to 2.5 KPa
OUTPUT SIGNAL
5 1-5 VDC
10 2-10 VDC
20 4-20 mA
DISPLAY OPTION
LCD LCD Option
DPAII 105LCD
JUMPER SELECTABLE *
0 to 2" w. c. 0-300 Pa 0-500 Pa
0 to 1" w. c. 0-300 Pa 0-500 Pa
0 to 4" w. c. 0 to 5" w. c. 0-1000 Pa
0 to 3" w. c. 0 to 5" w. c. 0-1000 Pa
0 to 3" w. c. 0 to 5" w. c. 0-1000 Pa
0-1600 Pa 0-2500 Pa NA
0-3200 Pa 0-5000 Pa 0-5000 Pa
0 to 1" w. c. 0 to 2" w. c. 0-500 Pa
0 to 1" w. c. 0 to 2" w. c. 0-300 Pa
0 to 3" w. c. 0 to 4" w. c. 0 to 5" w. c.
0 to 10" w. c. 0-2500 Pa NA
0 to 10" w. c. 0-1600 Pa NA
Model
DPAII - 1
DPAII - 2
DPAII - 3
DPAII - 4
DPAII - 5
DPAII - 10
DPAII - 20
DPAII - 0.5
DPAII - 0.5
DPAII - 1.01
DPAII - 1.11
DPAII - 2.51
*Jumper selectable for customized applications

1076. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1014fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 9 to 30 VDC, 9 to 33 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA (two-wire), 0-5 VDC (three-
wire), Current (two-wire) 4-20 mA,
Voltage (three-wire) 0-5 VDC
Maximum Output
Impedance mA
800Ω @ 24 VDC, 750Ω @ 24 VDC
Minimum Output Impedance VDC
5000Ω, ≥5000Ω
Accuracy ±1% FS, RSS (at constant temp)
±1% FS Non-linearity ±0.96%
FS Non-repeatability 0.1% FS
Hysteresis 0.2% FS; ±0.4% and
±0.25% optional
Thermal Effect Zero/Span shift 0.033°F (0.018°C),
Compensated temperature range 0° to 150°F (-18° to 65°C) Zero/Span shift 0
.033°F (0.018°C)
Repeatability 0.05% FS
Overpressure Up to 10 psig (68.95 kPa) range
dependant, ±10 psig (68.95 kPa)
Additional Specifications
(Unit is factory calibrated at 0g effect
with diaphragm vertical),
Range Zero offset (%FS/G)
Upto 0.5" WC 0.60
Upto 1.0" WC 0.50
Upto 2.5" WC 0.22
Upto 5.0" WC 0.14, Position effect: (Unit is factory
calibrated at 0g effect with diaphragm vertical) Range (in) Zero offset (%FS/G) 0-10 0
.12 0-5 0.14 0-1.0
0.22 0-0.1 2.10
Operating Temperature 0° to 175°F (-18° to 79°C)
Storage Temperature -65° to 250°F (-54° to 121°C)
Enclosure Rating Fire retardant, glass-filled polyester
Process Connection 3/16" OD barbed brass
Dimensions 5.06" x 2.75" x 2.38" (12.86 x 6.99 x
6.03 cm), 3.00"H x 5.51"W x 1.91"D
(14.00 x 7.62 x 4.85 cm)
Temperature Range 0° to 150°F (-18° to 65°C)
Enclosure Fire-retardant glass filled polyester
(UL 94 V-0 approved)
Hysteresis 0.1% FS
Linearity ±0.96% FS
Approvals CE
Weight 0.55 lb (0.25 kg)
Warranty 3 years
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
M264 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Setra Model M264 Differential Pressure Transmitter is a low-air pressure transmitter able to sense differential pressure in both negative and positive ranges
. The Model
M264 incorporates a tensioned stainless steel diaphragm to form a variable capacitor that will produce variation in the output signal
. The Model M264s durable design will
tolerate an overpressure of 10 psig (68.95 kPa) and has an
unconditional three-year warranty.
FEATURES
• 4-20 mA output signal
• Voltage output signal optional
• 10 psig (68.70 kPa) overpressure
• Three-year unconditional warranty
• 1% accuracy standard, 0.4% and 0.25% optional
• Reverse wiring protected
• Stainless steel diaphragm
• Ideal for air and non-conducting gases
APPLICATION
• HV •
Variable air volume control
• Environmental pollution control
• Lab and fume hood control
• Filter monitoring
• Medical instrumentation
• Velocity pressure measurement
SPECIFICATIONS
M264 Series

1077. fifl˚ 1015PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Model M264
High
Low
1.66
(4.22)
5.06 (12.86)
2.75
(6.99)
in
(cm) 4.56 (11.59)
Zero Span
2.38 (6.03)
COM EXC OUT
0-5 VDC
0-5 VDC Output4-20 mA Output
Power
Supply
9-30 VDC
HighLow
HighLow
Power
Supply
9-30 VDC
4-20 mA
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
M264 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
M264 Differential pressure transmitter
XXX RANGE CODE (see Table 1 below)
C 4-20 mA output (stocked at Kele)
V 0-5 VDC output (call Kele for av ailability)

M264 - 2R5WB - C
Example: M264-2R5WB-C Differential pressure transmitter
with a 4-20 mA output proportional to a range of
-2.5" to 2.5" W.C. (622
Pa)
RANGE
CODE
RANGE
CODE
PRESSURE RANGE
"W.C. Pa "W.C. Pa
BIDIRECTIONAL PRESSURE RANGE
0R1WD
R25WD
0R5WD
001WD
2R5WD
005WD
010WD
025WD
050WD
100WD
0R1WB
R25WB
0R5WB
001WB
2R5WB
005WB
010WB
025WB
0-0.10 0-24.9
0-0.25 0-62.2
0-0.50 0-124
0-1.00 0-249
0-2.50 0-622
0-5.00 0-1244
0-10.0 0-2488
0-25.0 0-6221
0-50.0 0-12441
0-100.0 0-24883
±0.1 ±24.9
±0.25 ±62.2
±0.5 ±124
±1.0 ±249
±2.5 ±622
±5.0 ±1244
±10.0 ±2488
±25.0 ±6221
TABLE 1. SPECIFYING RANGE
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
264-A1 Conduit housing for M264
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-308-K Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-I Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
SD-01 Surge dampener 1113
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
† add -E to the end of part number for 0.4% accuracy or add -F to the end of part number for 0.25% accuracy

1078. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1016fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 4-20 mA: 9-30 VDC @ 10 mA
0-5 mA: 9-30 VDC @ 10 mA,
9 to 3 VAC @ 0.2 VA
0-10 mA: 12 to 30 VAC @ 0.2 VA
Signal Output 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA
Maximum Output
Impedance mA 800Ω
Minimum Output Impedance VDC
50,000Ω
Accuracy ±1% of FS; Optional 0.4% FS and
0.25% FS
Thermal Effect Zero/Span Shift %FS: ±0.033 °F
(±0.06 °C )
Overpressure Up to 10 PSI (Range Dependent)
Measurement Range -50" WC to 100" WC
Response Time 20-30 ms
Operating Temperature 0° to 150°F (-18° to 65°C)
Media Compatibility Dry Air or inert non-conductive gases
Stability Long-Term Stability 0.5% FS/YR
Approvals RoHS
Weight 0.19 lbs (0.09 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
M265 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Setra Model 265 differential pressure transducer provides superior positive and negative pressure sensing required for high efficiency, air-control systems
. The Model
265 is a ±1.0% Full Scale accuracy unit (±0.4%, ±0.25%
FS optional) with an available snap-on conduit enclosure molded from high impact Lexan
®
.
FEATURES
• 1% accuracy improves variable air volume system
performance
• Optional accuracies as high as 0.25% FS
• 24 VDC or 24 VAC excitation
• High level 0-5 VDC , 0-10 VDC or 2-Wire
• 4-20 mA analog outputs are compatible with energy
management systems
• Fully protected against reverse wiring
Current Circuit DiagramV oltage Circuit Diagram
+EXC Connected to positive terminal of DC/AC power supply
-COM Connect as the reference for power
supply and output signal
OUT Connected to positive terminal
of control or pressure
265
9 to 30 VDC
Current
Monitoring
Device
Model
265
+EXC
-COM
OUT
Readout
or
DAS
Power
Supply
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
M265 Series

1079. fifl˚ 1017PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
M265 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
26512R5WD 11T1C Example: 2651-2R5WD-11-T1-C
265 transducer 0to 2.5"
W.C. range, 4-20 mA output,
terminal strip electrical
connection, and
± 1% accuracy
PRESSURE RANGE "W.C.
R25WD 0 to 0.25 0R1WD ± 0.10 0R5WD 0 to 0.50 R25WB ± 0.25
001WD 0 to 1.0 0R5WB ± 0.50
2R5WD 0 to 2.5 001WB ± 1.0
005WD 0 to 5.0 2R5WB ± 2.5
010WD 0 to 10 005WB ± 5.0
025WD 0 to 25 010WB ± 10
050WD 0 to 50 025WB ± 25
100WD 0 to 100 050WB ± 50
MODEL DESCRIPTION 2651 Very low differential pressure transducer
E ± 0.4% FS with calibration certificate
F ± 0.25% FS with calibration certificate
G ± 1% FS with calibration certificate
Differential Bidirectional
EXCITATION / OUTPUT
11 24 VDC/ 4-20 mA
2B 24 VDC/ 0-5 VDC
AB 24 VAC/ 0-5 VDC
AC 24 VAC/ 0-10 VDC
ELECTRICAL TERMINATION
T1 Te rminal strip
ACCURACY
C
± 1% FS without calibration certificate
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
SD-01 Surge dampener 1113
RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-I Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
A-308-K Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb 1113
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

1080. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1018fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage
Current Output 12-30 VDC
Voltage Output 24 VAC/VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA (two wire) , 0-5 VDC
(three-wire), 0-10 VDC (three-wire)
Maximum Output Impedance
800Ω @ 30 VDC
Minimum Output Impedance
10,000Ω
Accuracy ±1.0% FS at constant temperature
Non-linearity ±0.96% FS
Non-repeatability 0.05% FS
Hysteresis 0.1% FS
Compensated Temperature Range
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Thermal Effect Zero/Span shift 0.02% FS/°F
(0.036% FS/°C)
Overpressure 10 psig (69 kPa)
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Storage Temperature 23° to 131°F (-5° to 55°C)
Enclosure UL 94V-0 flame resistant enclosure
plenum rated, glass filled polyester
Process Connection 3/16" OD barbed brass
Approvals Meets CE standards
Weight 0.5 lb (0.2 kg)
Warranty 1 year

MULTIRANGE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER WITH DISPLAY
260 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Setra 260 Series Multirange Differential Pressure Transmitter with Display incorporates many powerful, attractive and easy to use features as standard in a multi- configurable package
. One model with very low selectable
differential pressure ranges is perfect for measuring space static pressure and duct airflow velocity pressure
. A second
model with higher selectab
le ranges is used for sensing duct
static pressure
. Two similar models, with Pascal engineering
units instead of inches of water, are also available. The 260
Series comes standard with a wide variety of selectable output signals, 1-5 VDC, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA, making it compatible with virtually any building automation controller
.
FEATURES
• Optional LCD on all models
• Switches and jumpers for configuration
• Selectable analog output
• Designed for AC/DC unregulated power supplies
• Display feedback of configuration selection
• LCD flashes when out of range
• Push button zero
• Optional integral duct static probe
• Models with ranges in Pascal units
• Eleven-point NIST certification available
APPLICATION
• Space static pressure
• Duct static pressure
• Duct airflow
• Clean room pressure
• Air lock/isolation rooms
• Air filter monitoring
SPECIFICATIONS
260 Series

1081. fifl˚ 1019PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Model Unidirectional ranges Bi-directional ranges
MS1 0" to 0.1" W.C. ±0.1" W.C.
0" to 0.25" W.C. ±0.25" W.C.
0" to 0.5" W.C. ±0.5" W.C.
0" to 1.0" W.C. ±1.0" W.C.
MS2 0" to 1.0" W.C. ±1.0" W.C.
0" to 2.5" W.C. ±2.5" W.C.
0" to 5.0" W.C. ±5.0" W.C.
0" to 10.0" W.C. ±10.0" W.C.
MS3 0 to 25 Pa ±25 Pa
0 to 50 Pa ±50 Pa
0 to 100 Pa ±100 Pa
0 to 250 Pa ±250 Pa
MS4 0 to 250 Pa ±250 Pa
0 to 500 Pa ±500 Pa
0 to 1000 Pa ±1000 Pa
0 to 2500 Pa ±2500 Pa
4.75
(120.7)
4.25
(108)
4.15
(105.4)
1.50
(38.1)
.59
(14.9)
1.03
(26.3)
.87
(22)
LOW
9.20
(233.7)
7.61
(193.2)
Optional Static
Probe Diagram
LOW
150°
1.35
(34.3)
.63
(15.9)
.63
(15.9)
.63
(15.9)
1.3
(31.83)
Ø.86
(21.9)
in
(mm)
Knockout fo r
1/2" conduit
EXC
Power supply
13 - 30VAC/VDC
24 VAC/DC
nominal excitation
Voltage
monitor
+
+
+
-
-
+
-
COMOUT
Voltage – Three-Wire, 0-5, 0-10 VDC Configuration
EXC
Power supply
13 - 30VDC
24V (DC Only)
nominal excitation
Current
monitor
+
+
X
-
-
+
-
COMOUT
Current – Two-Wire, 4-20 mA Configuration
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
MULTIRANGE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER WITH DISPLAY
260 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: 2061MS1S Model 260 transducer 0" to 1.0" W.C.
range with optional static pressure probe.
MS12601 S
MODEL DESCRIPTION
260G Multirange differential pressure transmitter with display
RANGES
MS1 0-0.1" to 0-1.0" W.C. ranges, wall mount
MS2 0-1.0" to 0-10" W.C. ranges, wall mount
MS3 0-25 to 0-250 Pa ranges, wall mount
MS4 0-250 to 0-2500 Pa ranges, wall mount
PROBE OPTION
S Static pressure probe
DISPLAY OPTION
D Display
N No Display
NIST OPTION
NIST 11-point calibration certificate included
D
SELECTABLE RANGES PER MODEL
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-308-K Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-I Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
SD-01 Surge dampener 1113
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901

1082. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1020fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage
Current Output 9 to 33 VDC
Voltage Output 0 to 5 VDC models- 9 to 30 VAC/12
to 40 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC models- 11 to 30 VAC/13 to 40 VDC
Supply VA
0.8 VA
Signal Output 4-20 mA (two-wire), 0-5 VDC (three-
wire), 0-10 VDC (three-wire)
Maximum Output Impedance
800Ω @ 24 VDC
Minimum Output Impedance
≥5000Ω
Accuracy ±1.0% FS at constant temperature
Non-repeatability 0.05% FS
Non-linearity ±0.98% FS
Hysteresis 0.1% FS
Thermal Effect Zero/Span shift 0.033% FS/°F
(0.018%FS/°C), 40° to 150°F
(5° to 65°C)
Overpressure Up to ±10 psig (68.95 kPa) - range
dependant
Position Effect (Unit is factory calibrated at 0g effect
with diaphragm vertical)
Range (in) Zero Offset (%FS/G)
0-0.5 0.60
0-1.0 0.50
0-2.5 0.22
0-5.0 0.14
Operating Humidity 35% to 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 0° to 150°F (-18° to 65°C)
Compensated Temperature Range
40° to 150°F (5° to 65°C)
Enclosure Plastic glass-filled polycarbonate
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4 (IP65)
Process Connection 3/16" OD barbed brass, for 1/4" OD
tubing
Dimensions 2.68"H x 6.20"W x 2.32"D
(6.81 x 15.25 x 5.90 cm)
Approvals CE
Weight 0.56 lb (0.3 kg); 0.59 lb (0.27 kg)
with duct probe
Warranty 1 year
MULTI-RANGE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
M267-MR
DESCRIPTION
The Setra Model M267-MR Differential Pressure Transmitter is a multi-rangeable low air differential pressure transmitter
. One Model M267-MR replaces six single-range
pressure transmitters and is ideal for stocking. Each Model
M267-MR is factory calibrated for its highest range but can easily be recalibrated
. The rugged poly-carbonate NEMA 4
case protects the internal electronics from the environment.
FEATURES
• Measure six ranges with one unit (three positive and
three bidirectional ranges)
• 1% accuracy in each range
• 10 psig (68.70 kPa) maximum overpressure
• Rugged IP65/NEMA 4 case
• Available in current or voltage outputs
• Available in ranges up to 30" W.C. (7.473 kPa)
• Easily reranged with dip switches
APPLICATION
• HV •
Static duct pressure
• Clean room pressure
• Environmental pollution control
• Filter monitoring
SPECIFICATIONS
M267-MR2-C

1083. fifl˚ 1021PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
High Low
1.73
(4.39)
0.80
(2.03)
1.18
(3.0)
1.29
(3.28)
7/8
0.93
(2.36)
3/16'' OD Pressure Fitting
for 1/4'' Push-on Tubing
6.20
(15.75)
5.60
(14.22)
0.18
(0.46)
0.75
(1.91)
0.50
(1.27)
in
(cm)
1.34
(3.40)
2.68
(6.81)
Power
Supply
ON
1 2 3 4
EXC COM SIG
( )
( )
4-20 mA Signal
Power
Supply
Voltage Signal
Current Voltage
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
MULTIRANGE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
M267-MR
ORDERING INFORMATION

M267 MR2 Example: M267-MR2-C Multirange differential pressure transmitter with a 0-0.25" to 0-1.0" W.C. pressure range and a 4-20 mA output.C
RANGE
CODE
PRESSURE RANGE
* MR1 is av ailable only with 0-0.1" W.C. and ±0.05" W.C.
MR1*
MR2
MR3
MR4
0-0.1 24.91
0-0.25 62.03
0-0.5 124.55
0-1.0 249.10
0-1.25 311.38
0-2.5 622.75
0-5.0 1245.50
0-7.5 1868.25
0-15 3736.50
0-30 7473.00
± 0.05 12.46
±0.125 31.14
±0.25 62.03
±0.50 124.55
±0.625 155.69
±1.25 311.38
±2.5 622.75
±3.75 934.13
±7.5 1868.25
±15.0 3736.50
TABLE 1. SPECIFYING RANGE
"W.C. Pa "W.C. Pa
MODEL DESCRIPTION
M267 Multi-range differential pressure transmitter
XXX RANGE CODE (see Table 1 below)
C 4-20 mA output
V5 0-5 VDC output
V10 0-10 VDC output

1084. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1022fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 13.5-30 VDC
Signal Output 4-20mA (2-wire)
Maximum Output
Impedance 800Ω
Adjustments Adjustable via an external security
key
Accuracy ±0.5% full scale
Thermal Effect Compensated temperature range:
20° to 140°F (-6.7° to 60°C)
Overpressure ±2 psig (14 kPa), positive or
negative
Operating Temperature -20° to 160°F (-29° to 71°C)
Storage Temperature -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Enclosure Rating ABS plastic, fire retardant
(UL94 V-0)
Mounting Vertical, DIN rail
Process Connection 3/16" O.D. brass barbed fittings
Wiring Terminations Detachable screw terminal
connector
Approvals CE
Weight 0.56 lb (0.3 kg)
Warranty 1 year
3.9
(9.9)
0.5
(1.2)
0.75 (1.9)
1.3
(3.2)
2.9 (7.3)
3.4 (8.6)
+
-
DESCRIPTION
The Setra 269 Series Precision Low Differential Pressure
Transmitters are designed for high performance applications
such as clean rooms, isolation rooms, and other critical
environments
. The transmitters offer full scale accuracy
of ±0.5% with excellent long term stability. Installation
and calibr
ation is easy with the removable process head,
detachable terminal block and Din Rail mounting
.
FEATURES
• 2 psig overpressure
• 0.5% full scale accuracy
• Reverse wiring protection
• 4-20 mA output
• Removable process head
• Bidirectional ranges available
DIMENSIONS
PRECISION LOW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
269 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
2691-001WB Differential pressure transmitter, ±1.0" W.C.
2691-001WD Differential pressure transmitter, 0-1.0" W.C.
2691-005WB Differential pressure transmitter, ±5" W.C.
2691-005WD Differential pressure transmitter, 0-5" W.C.
2691-010WD Differential pressure transmitter, 0-10" W.C.
2691-0R1WB Differential pressure transmitter, ±0.1" W.C.
2691-0R1WD Differential pressure transmitter, 0-0.1" W.C.
2691-0R5WB Differential pressure transmitter, ±0.5" W.C.
2691-0R5WD Differential pressure transmitter, 0-0.5" W.C.
2691-2R5WB Differential pressure transmitter, ±2.5" W.C.
2691-2R5WD Differential pressure transmitter, 0-2.5" W.C.
2691-R25WB Differential pressure transmitter, ±0.25" W.C.
2691-R25WD Differential pressure transmitter, 0-0.25" W.C.
ACCESSORIES
269425-02 Security cal key (required for calibration)

1085. fifl−˚ 1023PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
DESCRIPTION
The Ashcroft CXLdp Series Differential Pressure
Transmitters are designed for use with clean, dry, air and
other clean, dry, non-corrosive gases
. The CXLdp Series
features a standard accuracy of 0.80%, an optional accuracy
of 0.40%, 4-20 mA output, optional 0-10 V or 0-5 V output
and a standard DIN rail mount.
FEATURES
• Reliab •
Reverse polarity protected
• High proof pressure, 15 psid
• DIN rail mount
• Power indication LED
• Optional NIST traceable calibration
– +
+
––
+
SPANZERO
SPANZERO
+–
POWER SUPPLY
Zero adjust
potentiometer
Zero adjust
potentiometer
Span adjust
potentiometer
Span adjust
potentiometer
POWER
SUPPLY
Common (V-) Vin (V+, Supply)
V
Out
BCS
WIRING
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
CXLDP SERIES
Supply Voltage 12-36 VDC
Supply Current <6 mA for voltage output
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 0-10 V
Maximum Output Impedance mA
545Ω @ 24 VDC
(up to 1091Ω @ 36 VDC)
Accuracy 0.8%, 0.4% ± 0.03% span/°F
Stability ±0.5% FS/yr
Operating Temperature 0° to 160°F (-18° to 71°C)
Compensated Temperature Range
35° to 130°F (2° to 54°C)
Proof Pressure 15 psid (103 kPa)
Burst Pressure 25 psis
Response Time 250 ms
Media Compatibility Clean, dry air and non-corrosive
gases
Dimensions 1.9"W x 3.3"H x 1.3"D
(4.8 x 8.5 x 3.3 cm)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight 0.16 lb (0.07 kg)
Warranty 3 years
SPECIFICATIONS
CXLdp

1086. fifl˚
PRESSURE 1024fifl˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
CX 7MB242P1IWLExample: CX-7-MB2-42-ST-P1IWL Differential pressure
transmitter with 1.0% accuracy that measures
from -0.1" to 0.1" W.C. with a 4-20 mA output

PRESSURE RANGE "W.C.
P1IW 0-0.1 P1IWL ±0.1
P25IW 0-0.25 P25IWL ±0.25
P5IW 0-0.5 P5IWL ±0.5
1IW 0-1.0 1IWL ±1.0
2IW 0-2.0 2IWL ±2.0
2P5IW 0-2.5 2P5IWL ±2.5
3IW 0-3.0 3IWL ±3.0
5IW 0-5.0 5IWL ±5.0
10IW 0-10.0 10IWL ±10.0

XRH - NIST traceable 9 point calibration report
MODEL DESCRIPTION CX CXLdp differential pressure transmitter
4 0.4% accuracy
8 0.80% accuracy
MB2 1/4" barbed stainless steel fittings
F01 1/8" FNPT
42 4-20 mA signal output
10 0-10 VDC signal output
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
101A213-01 1/2" conduit/plenum kit for CXLdp transmitter
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
CXLDP SERIES

1087. fifl−˚ 1025PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 12-36 VDC
Supply Current < 10 mA for voltage
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, 1-6 VDC,
0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC
Maximum Output
Impedance mA 545Ω @ 24 VDC
Accuracy ±0.25%, ±0.5%, ±1.0%
Stability ±0.25% FS/yr
Maximum Pressure 25 psi (172.4 kPa)
Burst Pressure 25 psid (172 kPa)
Proof Pressure 15 psid (103 kPa)
Response Time 250 ms
Operating Humidity 10 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Operating Temperature -20° to 160°F (-28.9° to 71.1°C)
Process Connection 1/8" NPT
Media Compatibility Clean, dry and non-corrosive gas
Enclosure NEMA 1
Dimensions 3.9" W x 5.0" H x 0.9" D
(9.9 x 12.7 x 2.3 cm)
Approvals CE
Weight 0.28 lb (0.13 kg), NEMA 1 case
Warranty 3 years
DESCRIPTION
The Ashcroft DXLdp Series Differential Pressure Transmitters are designed for critical, high accuracy, low pressure applications
. The DXLdp Series is available
in accuracies of ±0.25%, ±0.50% and ±1.00% of Full
Span which include non-linearity (Terminal Point Method) hysteresis, non-repeatability, zero offset, and span setting errors
. It is available with voltage or milliamp outputs. The
models are available in unidirectional and bidirectional ranges from 0
.10" W.C. to 50" W.C. and ±0.05" W.C. to ±25" W.C.
respectiv
ely
.
FEATURES
• Reliab •
Ultra-low pressure ranges 0 to 0.10" W.C. or ±0.05" W.C.
• DIN rail mount reduces installation and calibration costs
•
Easy access zero and span adjustments (optional)
• 0.25% and 0.50% include NIST certificate, option on
1.00% accuracy
• CE Standard with all outputs
• 250ms response time
• LED range status indicators
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Voltage Output Current Output
POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
Rs
WIRING
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
DXLDP SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
DXLdp Series

1088. fifl˚
PRESSURE 1026fifl˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
DX 7F0105STP1IWLExample: DX-7-F01-05-ST-P1IWL Ultra-low differential
pressure transmitter with 1.00% accuracy,
1/8" FNPT process connection, 0-5 VDC signal
output, screw terminal electrical termination,
0.10" W.C. pressure range, no options

PRESSURE RANGE "W.C.
P1IW 0-0.10 P05IWL ±0.05
P25IW 0-0.25 P1IWL ±0.10
P5IW 0-0.50 P25IWL ±0.25
P75IW 0-0.75 P5IWL ±0.50
1IW 0-1.00 P75IWL ±0.75
1P5IW 0-1.50 1IWL ±1.00
2IW 0-2.00 2IWL ±2.00
2P5IW 0-2.50 2P5IWL ±2.50
3IW 0-3.00 3IWL ±3.00
5IW 0-5.00 5IWL ±5.00
10IW 0-10.0 10IWL ±10.00
*units include 9 point NIST traceable calibration certificate
MODEL DESCRIPTION DX DXLdp ultra-low differential pressure transmitter
3* 0.25% accuracy, ±0.02%/F°
5* 0.50% accuracy, ±0.02%/F°
7 1.00% accuracy, ±0.02%/F°
F01 1/8" FNPT
05 0-5 VDC signal output
10 0-10 VDC signal output
15 0-5 VDC signal output
16 1-6 VDC signal output
42 4-20 mA signal output
ST Screw terminal electrical termination
OPTIONAL X-VARIATION
XDL Optional LED
XPV Optional process valve actuator
XNL Optional text jacks
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
SD-01 Surge dampener 1113
RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-I Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
A-308-K Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb 1113
DCP
A-1.2
Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
DXLDP SERIES

1089. fifl−˚ 1027PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 12-36 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC
Maximum Output
Impedance 545Ω @ 24 VDC (up to 1045Ω @
36 VDC)
Accuracy 0.25% or 0.5% ±0.015% span/°F
Stability ±0.5% FS/yr
Operating Temperature -20° to 160°F (-29° to 71°C)
Compensated Temperature Range
35° to 135°F (2° to 57°C)
Proof Pressure 10 psid (69 kPa)
Burst Pressure 25 psig (172 kPa)
Response Time 250 ms
Media Compatibility Clean, dry air and
non-corrosive gases
Dimensions 4.6"W x 4.2"H x 1.9"D
(11.7 x 10.7 x 4.8 cm)
Enclosure 300 Series stainless
Approvals CE
Weight 0.9 lb (0.4 kg)
Warranty 3 years
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANMITTERS
XLDP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Ashcroft XLdp Series Differential Pressure Transmitters are an industrial-quality, differential air pressure transmitter for use with air and other noncorrossive gases
.
The
XLdp models are available in ranges from 0
.1" to 25"
W.C. and can withstand up to 10 psid overpressure. They
are highly accurate and available in accuracies of 0.25% and
0.50%.
FEATURES
• Reliable, stable capacitive sensor
• Low-range models down to ±0.05" W.C.
• Positive or bidirectional ranges available
• Reverse polarity protected
• High proof pressure
• Includes NIST certificate
1-5
VDC
OUT V– V+
24 VDC
Power
Supply
24 VDC
Power
Supply
4-20 mA
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
XL 3MB242STP1IWLExample: XL-3-MB2-42-ST-P1IWL Differential pressure transmitter with 0.25%
accuracy that measures from -0.1" to 0.1" W.C. with a 4-20 mA output
PRESSURE RANGE "W.C.
P1IW 0-0.1 P05IWL ±0.05
P25IW 0-0.25 P1IWL ±0.1
P5IW 0-0.5 P25IWL ±0.25
1IW 0-1.0 P5IWL ±0.5
2IW 0-2.0 1IWL ±1.0
2P5IW 0-2.5 2IWL ±2.0
3IW 0-3.0 2P5IWL ±2.5
5IW 0-5.0 3IWL ±3.0
10IW 0-10.0 5IWL ±5.0
10IWL ±10.0
MODEL DESCRIPTION XL XLdp differential pressure transmitter
3 0.25% accuracy
5 0.50% accuracy
MB2 1/4" barbed stainless steel fittings
42 4-20 mA signal output
15 1-5 VDC signal output
ST Electrical termination
XLDP Series
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-308-K Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901

1090. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1028fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage
4-20 mA Models 7 to 45 VDC
0-5 VDC Models 7 to 45 VDC, 7 to 32 VAC
0-10 VDC Models 13 to 45 VDC, 13 to 32 VAC,
Signal Output Two-wire, 4-20 mA or three-wire, 0-5
or 0-10 VDC
Stability ±0.25% ful scale per year
Maximum Output Impedance
850Ω @ 24 VDC
Minimum Output Impedance
1 kΩ
Accuracy ±0.5% (on 0 to 0.1" W.C., 0-0.25”
W.C., ± 0.1” W.C., and ±0.25” W.C.
r
ange models), ±0
.25 on all other
range models
Thermal Effect ±2% of Span maximum (±1.0 in WC
@ 50°F to 104°F, 10 to 40°C)
Overpressure 1 psi proof pressure,
1.5 psi burst pressure
Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Enclosure UV-resistant Polycarbonate, UL94,
V-0, IP66, NEMA 4
Mounting Four external tabs with holes for
#10 screws
Process Connection 3/16" barbed fitting
(use 1/8" to 3/16” ID tubing)
Wiring Terminations 2 wires (4-20mA Current loop)
3 wires (AC or DC powered,
Voltage out)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Warranty 3 years
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
ZPS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI ZPS Series Differential Pressure Transmitter is an accurate, rugged and economical solution for measuring and reporting duct/building static pressure, room-to-room differential pressure or air flow velocities/volumes
. The ZPS
Series micro-machined silicon piezoresistive pressure sensor is specifically developed for low differential pressure
. The
sensor's custom ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit) provides five-point error correction over the compensated temperature range for excellent accuracy, repeatability and stability
.
FEATURES
• Field-selectable ranges and output signals
• Five direct and five bidirectional standard ranges
• 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, or 0-10 VDC output signal
• Inches of water or Pascal engineering units
• Optional large LCD display
• Microprocessor controlled auto-zero
• Rugged IP66 (NEMA 4) housing
• Short-circuit proof and polarity protected
• Three-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ZPS Series
in
(cm)

1091. fifl˚ 1029PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Power
supply
+
–
+–
(black)
(red)
(white)
X
Power
supply
or
transformer
+–
(black)
(red)
(white)
VDC Signal4-20 mA Signal
4-20 mA Wiring
(See specifications for
power supply information)
0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC Wiring
(See specifications for
power supply information)
+
–
G
H
ZPS ZPS
WIRING
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
ZPS SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-308-K Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-I Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
SD-01 Surge dampener 1113
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
ZPS-ACC01 2” X 4” Stainless steel wall plate with static pickup
ZPS-ACC10 Rooftop or wall-mount outside air pressure pickup port
ZPS-ACC12 Pitot pressure probe assy, 6” long (includes static & total probe assy)

1092. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1030fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 12-40 VDC; 12-35 VAC
(VDC output units only)
Supply Current 10 mA max (VDC output units);
20 mA max (mA output units)
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC
Maximum Output
Impedance 600Ω at 24 VDC for mA output units
Minimum Output Impedance
1K Ω for VDC output units
Accuracy ±1% of FS
Enclosure NEMA 4 (IP-65) or Panel Mount
Media Compatibility Clean dry air or any inert gas
Thermal Effect ±0.0125%/°F(.02%/°C)
Overpressure 10 PSID
Measurement Range Uni-directional: 0 - 0.10" W.C. to 0 -
30" W.C.; Bi-directional: ±0.05" W.C.
to
±15" W
.C.
Operating Humidity 10-90% RH Non-Condensing
Operating Temperature 0° to 175°F (-18° to 80°C)
Dimensions
274
2.2"H x 6.0"W x 4.0"D
(5.6 x 15.2 x 10.2 cm)
275 2.1"H x 5.0"W x 2.3"D
(5.4 x 12.7 x 5.7 cm)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight
Enclosure 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Panel 0.5 lb (0.25 kg)
Warranty 5 years
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
PR274/275 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MAMAC Systems PR274/275 Series Differential Pressure Transmitter incorporates a new micro-
machined glass-on-silicon (Gl-Si) capacitance sensor
. This
technology revolutionizes very low pressure measurement.
T
emperature related zero drift, calibration shift due
to overpressure, non-repeatability, non-linearity, and extremely low pressure sensitivity have been some of the problems which have plagued the controls industry
. The
PR274/275 Series with the new Gl-Si technology not only addresses all of the above shortcomings, but for the first time offers a reliable, accurate means to measure and control building/room pressure, air flow, duct pressure, filter pressure drop, or any other extremely low pressure application
. Up to six field selectable direct or compound
ranges, two enclosure types, field selectable outputs, fully temperature compensated NIST traceable accuracy, non-interacting zero and span adjustments, short circuit and reverse polarity protected output, and a liberal five year warranty are some of the features which make the PR274/275 Series the industry’s highest performance, ultra-stable, low pressure sensor
.
FEATURES
• 100% solid state, micro-machined, glass-on-silicon,
ultra-stable capacitance sensor
• As low as ± 0.05" W.C. (± 12.5 pa)
• Up to 6 field selectable ranges in one unit
SPECIFICATIONS
PR-274/275
• Can resolve less than 0.00001" W.C. (0.0025 pa)
• Two rugged steel enclosure types NEMA-4 (IP-65) or panel
mount for ease of installation
• Short circuit and reverse polarity protected
• Conforms to EMC and RoHS standards

1093. fifl−˚ 1031PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Wiring for mA Low Pressure Transducers with
an External DC Po wer Supply
Wiring for mA Output Transducers where the Controller or
Meter has Internal DC Po wer Supply
Wiring for VDC Low Pressure Transducers when
Applied with External AC Supply
Wiring for VDC Low Pressure Transducers when
Applied with External DC Po wer Supply
WIRING
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
PR274/275 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R80 to 0.10 / -0.05 to 0.05" W.C.
0 to 1.0 / 0 to 0.5 / 0 to 0.25 / -0.5 to 0.5 / -0.25 to 0.25 / -0.125 to 0.125" W.C.
0 to 5.0 / 0 to 2.5 / 0 to 1.25 / -2.5 to 2.5 / -1.25 to 1.25 / -0.625 to 0.625" W.C.
0 to 30 / 0 to 15 / 0 to 7.5 / -15.0 to 15.0 / -7.5 to 7.5 / -3.75 to 3.75" W.C.
0 to 25 / -12.5 to 12.5 Pa
0 to 250 / 0 to 125 / 0 to 62.5 / -125 to 125 / -62.5 to 62.5 / -31.25 to 31.25 Pa
0 to 1250 / 0 to 625 / 0 to 312.5 / -625 to 625 / -312.5 to 312.5 / -156.25 to 156.25 Pa
0 to 7500 / 0 to 3750 / 0 to 1875 / -3750 to 3750 / -1875 to 1875 / -937.5 to 937.5 Pa
Example: PR-274-R2-mA Low pressure sensor with enclosure
mount, R2 range which has six (6) selectable field
r ange options and 4-20 mA output.
PR-274 R2
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PR274 Low pressure sensor with enclosure mount
PR275 Low pressure sensor with panel mount
-
RANGE
OUTPUT
mA 4-20 mA 2-wire
VDC 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC field selectable
mA-
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
SD-01 Surge dampener 1113
RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-I Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
A-308-K Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb 1113
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

1094. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1032fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC or 24 VDC ±10%
Signal Output 4-20 mA 2-wire, 0-10 V 3-wire
Maximum Output
Impedance mA maximum load 500Ω
Minimum Output Impedance VDC
Load R minimum 1kΩ
Accuracy ±1.5% (±3% at range -0.2/0.2" W.C.)
of full span
Compensated Temperature Range
14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)
Thermal Effect Included in total error band ±1,5%
+1P
a (including: general accuracy,
temperature drift, linearity, hysteresis, long term stability and repetition error)
Overpressure

Proof Pressure 100" W.C. (24.9 kPa)
Burst Pressure 120" W.C. (29.9 kPa)
Measurement Range up to 0 to 28" W.C. (0 to 7.0 kPa)
Operating Temperature -4° to 160°F (-20° to 71°C)
Enclosure NEMA 3, Plastic (ABS)
Process Connection Hose barb nozzles (ABS) for
3
/
16
"
and
1
/
4
" hose ID
Dimensions 3.36" H x 2.65" W x 1.69" D
(8.53 x 6.73 x 4.29 cm)
Approvals CE
Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg)
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The Wika A2G-50 Series differential pressure transmitter is the ideal accessory to complete a differential producer primary flow meter such as an averaging pitot tube
. A DP
tr
ansmitter that can be partnered with the AMP series, DPFS
series and FXP series products to enable DP measurement with those devices. The unit is excellent for a room-to-room
differential pressure signal to BAS. Each of the three range
option code has eight selectable DP ranges within that option code
. The user can select between two output signals (0
to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA). There is an optional digital display
for the measured value. The standard unit has a button for
re-zeroing; but there is also an auto-zeroing option that enable the device to re-zero itself every ten minutes to prevent zero point drift
.
FEATURES
• Eight selectable ranges within each option code range
• Selectable 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA output signal
• Compact size
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
A2G-50 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
A2G-50
WIRING

1095. fifl˚ 1033PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
A-308-K Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A2G50-E00-7C-EO-M-Z-Z Differential pressure transmitter, 0 to 10 in WC; No digital display; No auto re-zero
A2G50-E00-7C-EP-M-Z-Z Differential pressure transmitter, 0 to 28 in WC; No digital display; No auto re-zero
A2G50-E00-7C-EQ-M-Z-Z Differential pressure transmitter, "-0.4 to +0.4 in WC; No digital display; No auto re-zero
A2G50-E00-7C-EO-M-A-z Differential pressure transmitter, 0 to 10 in WC; With digital display; No auto re-zero
A2G50-E00-7C-EP-M-A-z Differential pressure transmitter, 0 to 28 in WC; With digital display; No auto re-zero
A2G50-E00-7C-EQ-M-A-z Differential pressure transmitter, "-0.4 to +0.4 in WC; With digital display; No auto re-zero
A2G50-E00-7C-EO-M-A-1 Differential pressure transmitter, 0 to 10 in WC; With digital display; With auto re-zero
A2G50-E00-7C-EP-M-A-1 Differential pressure transmitter, 0 to 28 in WC; With digital display; With auto re-zero
A2G50-E00-7C-EQ-M-A-1 Differential pressure transmitter, "-0.4 to +0.4 in WC; With digital display; With auto re-zero
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
A2G-50 SERIES
DIMENSIONS

1096. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1034fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 11-32 VDC
(protected against reversal of polarity)
Supply VA 1 VA
Signal Output 4-20 mA
Maximum Output Impedance
700Ω @ 24 VDC (= 50 x VDC – 500)
Adjustments Zero/Span adjustments: Non-interactive
adjustments by means of 20-turn
potentiometers for fine resolution
Accuracy 1% of range (including non-linearity and
hysteresis)
Thermal Effect Zero ±0.05%/°C; Span ±0.02%/°C
Measurement Range Up to 10" WC
Vibration Resistance 5G to 50 Hz
Operating Temperature 32° to 115°F (0° to 45°C)
Storage Temperature -20° to 160°F (-30° to 70°C)
Media Compatibility Air, Inert gases
Enclosure Not rated, Flame retardant, glass-
reinforced NORYL
Process Connection 3/16" diameter suitable for 1/8" or 5/32" ID
(1/4" OD) Tygon or polyurethane tubing; integral filters at both ports
Wiring Terminations
3/8" terminals, #6 screws
Approvals CE
Weight 0.42 lb (0.19 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
T30 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Modus T30 Series Differential Pressure Transmitters
are reliable, stable, low-air pressure transmitters with 4-20
mA outputs
. The T30 Series is DC-powered. Higher ranges
utilize piezo-resistive sensors. Ranges are available for 0" to
0.3" W.C. to 0" to 10" W.C.
All models may be furnished in bidirectional ranges, which will
measure both positive and negative pressure differentials.
FEATURES
• Position insensitive
• No moving parts to wear out
• Compact size
• Fast response time due to low internal volume
• Solid-state circuitry for long life
• Low power consumption
• NEMA 4 enclosure and CE certification (Models M30/40)
SPECIFICATIONS
T30 Series
3.00
(7.62)
Span Zero
Pressure Lo Hi
Two holes
0.19 diameter (0.5)
5.15
(13.08)
4.7
(11.94)
4.25
(10.80)
1.50
(3.81)
- +
T30
3/8" Terminal strip
with #6 screws
3/16" OD Pressure fittings
1.48
(3.76)
1.13
(2.87)
0.66
(1.68)
0.13
(0.33)
Side view
T30
Power supply
11-32 VDC
T30
Transmitter
+
–
4-20 mA Signal
–
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION

T30 004 B
RANGE
CODE
0-0.3
0-0.5
0-1.0
0-2.0
0-3.0
0-5.0
0-10.0
5" W.C.
5" W.C.
20" W.C.
20" W.C.
20" W.C.
5 psid
5 psid
PRESSURE RANGE*
*Call Kele for higher pressure ranges or metric ranges
TABLE 1. RANGE
"W.C. Overpressure
Example: T30-004-B Differential pressure transmitter 4 mA @ -0.2" W.C., 12
mA @ 0" W.C., and 20 mA @ + 0.2" W.C., 24 VAC power
Note: NIST certification options av ailable, consult Kele

003
005
010
020
030
050
100
GE
MODEL
03E
04E
05E
06E
07E
08E
09E
MODEL DESCRIPTION
T30 Differential pressure transmitter with NEMA 1 case
004 RANGE CODE (see Table 1 to the right)
OPTIONS (leave blank for standard unit)
B Bidirectional (12 mA @ zero pressure)

1097. fifl−˚ 1035PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 12-40 VDC; 12-35 VAC (VDC output
units only)
Supply Current 10 mA max (VDC output units);
20 mA max (mA output units)
Signal Output 4–20 mA 2-wire,
0–5 VDC/0–10 VDC
(field selectable)
Maximum Output
Impedance mA 600Ω @ 24VDC for mA output units
Minimum Output Impedance VDC
1K Ω for VDC output units
Accuracy ±1% of FS
Thermal Effect ±0.025%/°F(.03%/°C)
Media Compatibility Liquid/gases compatible to 316L
stainless steel
Overpressure 300% of rated pressure
Burst Pressure 500% of rated pressure
Measurement Range 0 to 100 / 0 to 50 / 0 to 25 psig, 0 to
300 / 0 to 150 / 0 to 75 psig, 0 to 500 / 0 to 250 / 0 to 125 psig, 0 to 700 / 0 to 350 / 0 to 175 kP
a, 0 to 2000 / 0 to
1000 / 0 to 500 kPa, 0 to 3500 / 0 to 1750 / 0 to 875 kPa
Operating Humidity 10-90% RH Non-Condensing
Operating Temperature 0° to 180°F (-18° to 82°C)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Warranty 5 years
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PR264 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MAMAC Systems Model PR264 Pressure
Transmitter incorporates sophisticated integrated circuits
and a new fused silicon monolithic cavity pressure sensor
to not only provide a high-level, fully-conditioned and
temperature compensated output, but also to offer up to
three (3) field selectable pressure ranges in one unit
. The
field selectable feature eliminates costly inefficiencies by providing a single unit which can be configured to cover all the pressure ranges for a particular application
.
F
or instance, 25
.0, 50.0, and 100.0 psig in one unit. The
stainless steel monolithic pressure cavity not only provides media compatibility for most of the applications, but also offers a leak-proof solution for today’s environment conscious customers
. Two industry standard output
versions are available, 4-20mA 2-wire loop or field selectable 0-5 VDC/0-10 VDC
. Wide 12-40 VDC or 12-35
VAC unregulated supply voltage and a broad 0°F - 180°F compensated temperature range ensures compatibility to most of the applications
. Rugged NEMA 4 (IP-65)
enclosure
, gasketed cover, external mounting bracket,
fully temperature compensated NIST traceable accuracy and a liberal five year warranty are some of the features which make the Model PR264 the industry’s most reliable, rugged, and economical pressure sensor
.
FEATURES
• 100% solid state fused silicon pressure sensor
• Rugged, leak-proof stainless steel monolithic
pressure cavity with no welds, o-rings, or seams/ bonds
•
Up to 3 field selectable ranges in one unit
• Rugged NEMA-4 (IP-65) enclosure with external
mounting bracket
• Short circuit and reverse polarity protected
• Conforms to EMC and RoHS standards
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
PR264

1098. fifl˚
PRESSURE 1036fifl˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
ON
ON
ON
Wiring Units with mA Output Wiring Units with VDC Output
Zero
Span
1/8"NPT
Female
Zero
Span
1/8"NPT
Female
Wiring for mA Output Pressure Transducers with
an External DC Po wer Supply
Wiring for mA Output Transducers where the Controller or
Meter has Internal DC Po wer Supply
Wiring for VDC Output Pressure Transducers when
Applied with External AC Supply
Wiring for VDC Output Pressure Transducers when
Applied with External DC Po wer Supply
WIRING
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PR264 SERIES
Example: PR-264-R1-mA Pressure sensor,
0-25 / 50 / 100 psig range with
4-20 mA 2-wire output.
R1PR-264
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PR264 Pressure sensor
PRESSURE RANGE
R1 0-25 / 50 / 100 psig
R2 0-75 / 150 / 300 psig
R3 0-125 / 250 / 500 psig
R4 0-175 / 350 / 700 KPa
R5 0-500 / 1000 / 2000 KPa
R6* 0-875 / 1750 / 3500 KPa
OUTPUT
mA 4-20 mA 2-wire
VDC 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC field selectable
mA

1099. fifl−˚ 1037PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 12-40 VDC; 12-35 VAC (VDC output
units only)
Supply Current 10 mA max (VDC output units); 20
mA max (mA output units)
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC
Maximum Output
Impedance 600Ω @ 24VDC for mA output units
Minimum Output Impedance VDC
1K Ω for VDC output units
Accuracy ±1% of FS
Thermal Effect ±0.0125%/°F(.02%/°C)
Overpressure 10 PSID
Media Compatibility Clean dry air or any inert gas
Measurement Range 0-1.25" W.C. to 0-15.0" W.C.
Operating Humidity 10-90% RH Non-Condensing
Operating Temperature 0° to 175°F (-18° to 80°C)
Dimensions 2.25"H x 5.0"W x 2.7"D
(5.7 x 12.7 x 6.8 cm)
Probe Length 8.0" (20.3 cm)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Warranty 5 years
DUCT STATIC PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PR276 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MAMAC Systems Model PR276 Duct Static Pressure Transmitter incorporates sophisticated integrated circuits and a new micro-machined glass-on- silicon (Gl-Si) capacitance sensor to not only provide a high level, fully conditioned and temperature compensated output, but also to offer up to three (3) field selectable pressure ranges in one unit
. The field selectable feature
eliminates costly inefficiencies by providing a single unit which can be configured to cover all the pressure ranges for a particular application
. For instance, 1.25", 2.50"
and 5.00" W.C. are in one unit. To substantially reduce
installation cost and to eliminate costly control panels, the Model PR276 incorporates a pressure sensor and a static pressure tip integrated as one assembly
. Two industry
standard output versions are available, 4-20mA 2-wire loop or field selectable 0-5 VDC/0-10 VDC
. Wide 12-40 VDC
or 12-35 VAC unregulated supply voltage and a broad 25°F−150°F compensated temperature range ensures compatibility to most of the applications
. Rugged NEMA
4 (lP-65) enclosure
, gasketed cover, external mounting
bracket, fully temperature compensated NIST traceable accuracy, and a liberal five year warranty are some of the features which make the Model PR276 not only the most reliable, but the lowest installed cost duct pressure sensor in the industry
.
FEATURES
• 100% solid state, micro-machined, glass-on-silicon,
ultra-stable capacitance sensor
• Duct pressure transducer and static pressure tip integrated as one unit
•
Up to 3 field selectable ranges in one unit
SPECIFICATIONS
PR276
• Rugged NEMA-4 (IP-65) enclosure with external mounting
bracket
• Short circuit and reverse polarity protected
• Conforms to EMC and RoHS standards

1100. fifl˚
PRESSURE 1038fifl˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Wiring for mA Output Duct Pressure Transducers with
External DC Po wer Supply
Wiring for mA Output Duct Pressure Transducers where Controller
or Meter has Internal DC Po wer Supply
Wiring for VDC Output Duct Pressure Transducers when Applied
with External AC Supply
Wiring for VDC Output Duct Pressure Transducers when Applied
with External DC Po wer Supply
WIRING
DUCT STATIC PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PR276 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: PR-276-R10-mA Duct
pressure sensor, 0 to 5.0 /
0 to 2.5 / 0 to 1.25" W.C.
r ange with 4-20 mA 2-wire
output.
R10PR-276
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PR276 Duct pressure sensor
PRESSURE RANGE psid (kPa)
R10 0 to 5.0 / 0 to 2.5 / 0 to 1.25" W.C.
R11 0 to 15 / 0 to 7.5 / 0 to 3.75" W.C.
R12 0 to 1250 / 0 to 625 / 0 to 312.5 pa
R13 0 to 3750 / 0 to 1875 / 0 to 937.5 pa
OUTPUT
mA 4-20 mA 2-wire
VDC 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC field selectable
mA
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
SD-01 Surge dampener 1113
RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-I Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
A-308-K Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb 1113
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

1101. fifl−˚ 1039PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 11-33 VDC
Signal Output Two-wire, 4-20 mA
Maximum Output
Impedance 800Ω at 24 VDC
Accuracy < ±0.5% FS (includes linearity,
hysteresis, and repeatability)
Thermal Effect <0.1% FS/°C
Maximum Operating Pressure 0-60 psid
362 psig (2500 kPa)
100 psid and greater 725 psig (5000 kPa)
Overpressure
0-60 psid 543 psi (3750 kPa)
100 psid and greater 1088 psi (7500 kPa)
Response Time <5 ms
Maximum Differential: Port-to-Port 0-60 psid
174 psid
0-100 psid and Greater Hi: 464 psi, Low: 174 psi
Operating Temperature 5° to 176°F (-15° to 80°C)
Wetted Parts 303 stainless, FPM (Viton
®
) seals
Enclosure Rating
NEMA 4 (IP65)
Process Connection 1/8" FNPT
Wiring Terminations DIN 43650-A connector with terminal
blocks
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight 0.94 lb (0.43 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
DPW-692 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele DPW-692 Series Differential Pressure Transmitter is ideal for monitoring pumps and piping differential pressures in HVAC systems and process systems including tank level monitoring
. The DPW-692 Series
incorporates proven, unique ceramic sensor technology and the stainless steel housing is compatible with a wide variety of liquid or gas media
. The convenient DIN 43650-A wiring
connector makes installation easy and provides NEMA 4 (IP65) environmental protection
.
FEATURES
• Competitively priced
• Very high quality
• Short-circuit proof
• Protection from reverse polarity
• Compact heavy duty housing
• True differential pressure sensing
• 1/2" NPT conduit connector
• NEMA 4 (IP65) environmental rating
• Mounting bracket included
SPECIFICATIONS
DPW-692-100-KIT
Note: The DPW-692 can be field calibrated ±10%; see installation instructions for this procedure. However, due to
the very small recessed calibration screws, field calibration is difficult and not recommended. Kele can provide
factory custom calibration; please allow two weeks for delivery.
CAUTION: Not for use with ammonia.

1102. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1040fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
.59
(15)
.47 (12)
.78 (20)
1/8" NPT
5.12
(130)
.83
(21)
Low
port
High
port
1.18
(30)
3.74
(95)
1.73 (44)
Ø 1.57
(40)
Bracket
1/2"
NPT
Wiring/
conduit
connector
.20
Ø(5)
+
–
+
2
3
1
–
24 VDC
Power
supply
DIN Connector
terminal block
with screw
terminals
4–20 mA
Flathead
screwdriver
2
1
WIRINGDIMENSIONS
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
DPW-692 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
G5100-1101000 DIN 43650-A replacement conduit connector with gasket
DCP
A-1.2
Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
101999 DPW-692 Series replacement mounting bracket with screws
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DPW
-692-25-KIT
0–25 psid, 4–20 mA, 1/8" FNPT with bracket and conduit connector
DPW
-692-35-KIT
0–35 psid, 4–20 mA, 1/8" FNPT with bracket and conduit connector
DPW
-692-60-KIT
0–60 psid, 4–20 mA, 1/8" FNPT with bracket and conduit connector
DPW
-692-100-KIT
0–100 psid, 4–20 mA, 1/8" FNPT with bracket and conduit connector
DPW
-692-200-KIT
0–200 psid, 4–20 mA, 1/8" FNPT with bracket and conduit connector
To order a DPW-692 pre-assembled in a five-valve bypass enclosure, replace -KIT with -BVA suffix.
To order a DPW-692 pre-assembled with a three-valve manifold, replace -KIT with -3VLV suffix.
To order a DPW-692 with factory custom range, add -C suffix to complete model number.
To order a DPW-692 for use with refrigerants, add -R suffix after -KIT. A neoprene seal is used in
place
of Viton
®
. Not applicable with -BVA or -3VLV assemblies.

1103. fifl−˚ 1041PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage
Current models Minimum 9 VDC + (0.02 x circuit
resistance) Maximum 30 VDC + (0
.004 x circuit resistance)
Voltage Models 0-5 VDC
9-30 VDC
0-10 VDC 13-30 VDC,
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC, 0-5 VDC
Maximum Output Impedance
100Ω @ 24 VDC
Minimum Output Impedance
≥5000Ω
Accuracy ±0.25% FS
Non-repeatability 0.05% FS
Non-linearity ±0.20% FS
Hysteresis 0.10% FS
Compensated Temperature Range
30° to 150°F (-1° to 65°C)
Thermal Effect Zero/span shift 2.0% FS/100°F
(1.8% FS/50°C)
Maximum Operating Pressure
250 psig (1723.8 kPa) model
dependant
Operating Temperature 0° to 175°F (-18° to 79°C)
Storage Temperature -65° to 250°F (-54° to 121°C)
Wetted Parts 17-4 PH stainless, 300 Series
stainless steel, viton, silicon rings
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4 (IP65)
Process Connection 1/4-18 FNPT
Approvals CE
Weight 0.9 lb (0.41 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
M230 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Setra Model M230 Differential Pressure Transmitter is a highly accurate differential pressure transmitter that incorporates a capacitive technology to produce a linear electronic signal proportional to the differential pressure
. It will
measure diff
erential pressure in unidirectional applications as
much as 100 psi and bidirectional applications as much as 50 psi. The stainless steel wetted parts and elastomer seals
make this unit ideal for both liquids and gases. The NEMA 4
(IP65) case keeps the internal electronics protected from the environment
.
FEATURES
• 0.25% accuracy
• NEMA 4 (IP65) protection
• Stainless steel wetted parts
• Elastomer seals
• High proof pressure
• Current or voltage outputs
• Mounting bracket included
SPECIFICATIONS
PROOF PRESSURE (High Side)
Range Proof Range Proof
psid kPa psid kPa psid kPa psid kPa
0-1 6.89 20 137.9 ±0.5 ±3.45 20 137.9
0-2 13.79 40 275.8 ±1 ±6.89 40 275.8
0-5 34.47 100 689.5 ±2.5 ±17.24 100 689.5
0-10 68.95 100 689.5 ±5 ±34.47 100 689.5
0-25 172.4 250 1723.7 ±10 ±68.95 200 1379.2
0-50 344.7 250 1723.7 ±25 ±172.4 250 1723.7
0-100 689.5 250 1723.7 ±50 ±344.7 250 1723.7
M230-025PD-C

1104. fifl˚
PRESSURE 1042fifl˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
3.01
(7.65)
in
(cm)
2.15
(5.46)
Bleed
screws
2.44
(6.20)
3.05
(7.75)
1/4-18 NPT High pressure port
1.94
(4.93)
1.00
(2.54)
1.50
(3.81)
1/4-18 NPT Low pressure port
2.00
(5.08)
0.875 (2.2) Opening fo r
1/2" conduit
1.00
(2.54)
Span Zero
Conduit opening
(*red) (*brown)
(*red) (*brown)
(*yellow)
Current
Voltage
EXC OUT COM
Voltage
signal
EXC OUT COM
Power
supply
4-20 mA signal
* Wire colors when
mounted in a BVA
* Wire colors when
mounted in a BVA
+
+
+
+
+
Power
supply
+
WIRINGDIMENSIONS
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
M230 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
OUTPUT C 4-20 mA
V5 0-5 VDC V10 0-10 VDC OPTIONS
BVA Bypass valve assembly
3VLV Three-valve manifold assembly

M230 010PD C
001PD
002PD
005PD
010PD
025PD
050PD
100PD
0R5PB
001PB
2R5PB
005PB
010PB
025PB
050PB
0-1.0 (6.90)
0-2.0 (13.79)
0-5.0 (34.48)
0-10.0 (68.95)
0-25.0 (172.38)
0-50.0 (344.75)
0-100.0 (689.50)
±0.5 (±3.45)
±1.0 (±6.90)
±2.5 (±17.24)
±5.0 (±34.48)
±10.0 (±68.95)
±25.0 (±172.38)
±50.0 (±344.75)
M230-10PD-C Differential pressure
transmitter ranging from 0-10 psid with a
4-20 mA output
Example:
MODEL DESCRIPTION
M230 Differential pressure transmitter
PRESSURE RANGE psid (kPa)

1105. fifl−˚ 1043PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage
Current Model 12-30 VDC
Voltage Model 12-30 VDC/18-28 VAC
Signal Output
Current Model 2-wire, 4-20 mA
Voltage Model 3-wire, 0-5, 0-10, or 1-5 VDC
Maximum Output
Impedance mA 600Ω @ 24 VDC
Minimum Output Impedance VDC
5000 Ω
Accuracy ±1.0% FS
(±2.0% FS for range D model )
Overpressure 2.2X full scale
Burst Pressure 15 X full scale (50 psi)
10 x full scale (75 x 150 psi)
8 x full scale (250 psi)
Response Time 1-5 seconds (adjustable)
Operating Temperature -4° to 185°F (-20° to 85°C)
Wetted Parts 17-4 PH Stainless Steel
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4
Process Connection 1/8" FNPT
Wiring Terminations 1/2" conduit entry (7/8" dia), screw/
crimp terminals
Dimensions 4.0"H x 6.0"W x 2.0"D
(10.2 x 15.2 x 5.1 cm)
Temperature Range 32° to 130°F (0° to 54°C)
Enclosure Die Cast Aluminum, Powder Coated
Media Compatibility Liquids or Gases Compatible with
17-4 PH Stainless Steel
Note Hydrogen not recommended for use
with 17-4 PH stainless steel.
Approvals CE, RoHS compliant
Weight 1.5 lbs (0.68 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
231 SERIES
4.0
(10.2)
4.9
(12.3)
5.1
(12.9)
2.0
(5.1)
5.2
(13.1)
1.0 (2.4)
1.6
(4.0)
High Low
1/2'' Conduit
opening
2.0
(5.1)
5.6
(14.1)
6.0
(15.2)
1.2
(3.1)
1.7
(4.2)
0.4
(0.9)
R0.1
(0.3)
1/8''
FNPT
DESCRIPTION
The Setra 231 Series Multi-Range Differential Pressure
Transmitter is ideal for monitoring pumps and load
differential pressures in HVAC systems and processes where
local indication is needed
. The 231 Series design provides
users with field accessible ranging, choice of outputs, and field zero adjustment
.
FEATURES
• Field selectable ranges and outputs
• Field accessible pushbutton zero and remote zero
• Field selectable port swap
• True 4-20 mA output, and choice of VDC outputs
• Hinged cover
• Heavy duty aluminum NEMA 4 housing
• Optional LCD display
• RoHS compliant
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
231 Series

1106. fifl˚
PRESSURE 1044fifl˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
A B C D
MS1 50 25 10 5
MS2 100 50 20 10
MS3 250 125 50 25
A B C D
RANGES
ZERO
OUTPUT
A B C D
4-20 0-5 0-10 1-5
A B C D
BAR
A.REV
SLOW
BI-DIR
SWAP
PSI
NORM
FAST
UNI-DIR
NORM
+ -
Power supply
12-24 VDC only
digital control
Current
(4-20 mA)
+
–
Remote zero
digital output
+–
Contact closure relay
+
2 wire current output
WIRING
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
231 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: 231G-MS1-2F-D-3VLV Setra differential pressure
transmitter Model 231 ranging from 0 to 50 psid with LCD
display and 3VLV bypass option.
Wet to wet differential pressure transmitter
RANGES: UNIDIRECTIONAL AND BIDIRECTIONAL*
MS1 5, 10, 25, 50 psid and ±5, ±10, ±25, ±50 psid
MS2 10, 20, 50, 100 psid and ±10, ±20, ±50, ±100 psid
MS3 25, 50, 125, 250 psid and ±25, ±50, ±125, ±250 psid
PRESSURE CONNECTION
2F 1/8-18 NPT female (Standard)
DISPLAY OPTION
N No display
D LCD display
MANIFOLD OPTION
3VLV 3 valve bypass option
231G - MS1 - 2F - D - 3VLV
MODELDESCRIPTION
231G
* Line Pressure determines selection of range code.
Remote zero
digital output
A B C D
MS1 50 25 10 5
MS2 100 50 20 10
MS3 250 125 50 25
RANGES OUTPUT
AB CD
4-200 -5 0-10 1-5
Power supply
12-24 VAC/VDC
Digital control
voltage
+
–
+
+
A B C D ZERO A B C D
BAR
A.REV
SLOW
BI-DIR
SWAP
PSI
NORM
FAST
UNI-DIR
NORM
+ -
+–
+
Contact closure relay
3 wire voltage output
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
47B-1 Brass piston style snubber 1112
47S-1 Stainless steel piston style snubber 1112
PT 1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings 1112

1107. fifl−˚ 1045PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
DC/AC
Power Supply
Controller
Voltage
+
+
Relay
.
+EXC.
COM
+OUT
+EXC.
COM
+OUT
HI LO
Supply Voltage 15-30 VDC
Supply Current 40 mA (typical) at 18-30 VAC
Warm Up Time <0.12% FS
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, 1
to 5 VDC
Maximum Output Impendence (Current)
250Ω
Accuracy Pressure Ranges A, B, C ±1.0% FS
Pressure Range D ±2.0% FS
Thermal Effect Compensated 32° to 130°F
(0° to 54°C)
Zero Shift %FS/100°F (50°C)
2.0 (1.8)
Span Shift %FS/100°F(50°C)
2.0 (1.8)
Media Compatibility Liquids or Gases Compatible with
17-4 PH Stainless Steel Note: Hydrogen not recommended for use with 17-4 PH stainless steel
Maximum Operating Pressure
Equal to top of maximum range
specified in order
Overpressure 2X full scale
Burst Pressure 15 x Full Scale (50 psi)
10 X Full Scale (75 x 150 psi)
8 x Full Scale (250 psi)
Response Time 1-5 seconds (adjustable)
Compensated Temperature Range
32° to 130°F (0° to 54°C)
Operating Temperature -4° to 185°F (-20° to 85°C)
Wetted Parts 17-4 PH Stainless Steel
Enclosure Die Cast Aluminum, Powder Coated
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4
Process Connection 1/4-18 NPT Male
Wiring Terminations 1/2" conduit entry (7/8" dia), screw/
crimp terminals
Dimensions 4.0"H x 6.0"W x 2.0"D
(10.2 x 15.2 x 5.1 cm)
Approvals CE, RoHS compliant
Weight 1.5 lbs (0.68 kg) - case only
Warranty 1 year
REMOTE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
231RS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Setra 231RS Series Multi-Range Differential Pressure Transmitter is ideal for monitoring pumps and load differential pressures in HVAC systems and processes where local indication is needed
.
Setra's 231RS Series with remote sensors reduces labor,
materials, and time. The sensors are installed directly into the
pipe and electrical connection is made between the remote sensors and the Model 231RS via cables or conduit
. This
reduces labor cost by one-third and the cost of copper to connect the pressure transducer to the pipe
. Startup time is
reduced since purging air out of the lines is not necessary.
The Multi-Sense® Model 231 wet-to-wet differential pressure
transducer's all inclusive design provides users with field accessible ranging, choice of output and field zeroing
.
FEATURES
• Remote sensors
• Conduit and cable versions
• Field selectable output - 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5, 1 to 5, and 0
to 10 VDC
• Field accessible push-button zero and remote zero
• Jumper selectable port swap
• Optional LCD display
• All cast aluminum, NEMA4 rated housing
APPLICATION
• Ener •
Process control systems
• Flow measurement of various gases or liquids
• Liquid level measurement of pressurized vessels
SPECIFICATIONS
WIRING
Model 231RS

1108. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1046fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Pressure range selection:
1. Examine the pressure application and determine the highest system line pressure.
2. Determine the differential pressure being measured.
3. Find the maximum line pressure in the table on the right that is higher than your highest system line pressure.
4. Verify that your DP falls within the selectable ranges in that row.
5. Follow that row to the left and select that range code.
Example:
Highest System Line Pressure: 125 psig Differential Pressure Measured: 75 psid "Max Line Pressure" Higher than System Line Pressure: 150 psid (75 psid DP falls within ranges in this row) Select Range Code: RS4
REMOTE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
231RS SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
OPERATION
DIMENSIONS
IN
MM
5.56
141.2
6.00
152.4
0.35
8.8
R 0.1
2.5
2.00 50.8
1.22 30.9
1.56 39.6
0.95 24.1
1.24 31.5
5.16
131.1
1.98 50.3
4.00
102.0
Conduit Version
2 x
0.86 21.9
Side View Front View
Bottom View
Cable Version
0.95
1.56 39.6
5.16
131.1
IN
MM
Side View
4.0
102
4.87
123.6
5.08
129.0
1.98 50.3
6.0
152.4
0.35
8.8
R 0.1
2.5
1.22 31.0 1.66 42.2
2.0
50.8
5.56
141.2
Front View
Bottom View
*
Note: Line pressure determines selection of range code.

1109. fifl−˚ 1047PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
?
?
Terminal box
Display (board)
Shield
Power
source
? ?
Receiver
Transmission
cable
?
?
Supply Voltage 12-32 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA (2-wire)
Maximum Output
Impedance 500Ω
Adjustments Zero and Span Adjustable -10% to
110% FS
Accuracy ±0.5% FS (includes linearity,
hysteresis, and repeatability)
Thermal Effect Zero/Span Shift
±0.03% FS/°C @ 73°F (23°C)
Compensated Temperature Range
14° to 140°F (10° to 60°C)
Overpressure Ranges 4IW, 8IW, 4IWL
30 psid (207 kPa)
All Others
100 psid (690 kPa),
Display 4 digit, 10 mm LCD; ±0.5% FS + last
digit accuracy
Wetted Parts 316 SS, viton, and Alumina Ceramic
Operating Temperature 14° to 140°F (-10° to 60°C)
Storage Temperature 5° to 150°F (-15° to 65°C)
Enclosure Rating Epoxy coated aluminum, NEMA 4X
(IP65)
Process Connection 1/4 FNPT
Wiring Terminations

Screw terminals
Approvals CE, EN613261 1997, A1/1998, A2/2001
Weight

1 lb (0.7 kg)
Warranty 1 year
WET/WET DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
GC52 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Ashcroft GC52 Series Low Differential Pressure Transmitter offers reliable, low differential pressure measurement with an accuracy of 0
.5%. The transmitter
is loop powered with an integral LCD display. The GC52
features zero and span adjustment, linear scaling function, digital filter function, and push button configuration
. The
rugged NEMA 4X enclosure allows usage in indoor or outdoor environments
.
FEATURES
• 0.5% accuracy
• Push button configuration
• Linear scaling function
• LED back light
• Loop check function
• 4-20 mA output
• NEMA 4X (IP65) protection
• Scaling function
• Flow measurement and totalization (square root extraction)
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS

1110. fifl˚
PRESSURE 1048fifl˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
4 x Ø .22 (56)
Panel mounting holes
Bracket 0.08 (0.03) thick
0.42 (1.1)
Drain
outlet
inH2O
GC52
4.72
(12)
5.12
(13)
0.69
(1.8)
1.97 (5)
2.36 (6)
4.49 (11.4)
3.62 (9.2)
2.91 (7.4)
2.28 (5.8)
Ø 2.56
(6.5)
2.07
(5.3)
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS
WET/WET DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
GC52 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION

GC52 40IW
4IW
8IW
20IW
40IW
80IW
200IW
400IW
4IWL
8IWL
20IWL
40IWL
80IWL
200IWL
400IWL
0-4.0 (1.0)
0-8.0 (2.0)
0-20.0 (4.98)
0-40.0 (9.95)
0-80.0 (19.9)
0-200.0 (49.7)
0-400.0 (99.5)
±4.0 (±1.0)
±8.0 (±2.0)
±20.0 (±4.98)
±40.0 (±9.95)
±80.0 (±19.9)
±100.0 (±49.7)
±400.0 (±99.5)
GC52-40IW Low differential pressure
transmitter ranging from 0-40"w.c.
Example:
MODEL DESCRIPTION
GC52 Low differential pressure transmitter
PRESSURE RANGE "W.C. (kPa)

1111. fifl−˚ 1049PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Differential Pressure Tranducer with mA Output
Supply Voltage 12-40 VDC; 12-35 VAC
(VDC output units only)
Supply Current 10 mA max (VDC output units);
20 mA max (mA output units)
Signal Output 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
Maximum Output
Impedance mA 600Ω @ 24VDC for mA units
Minimum Output Impedance VDC
1K Ω for VDC output units
Accuracy ±1% of FS
Thermal Effect ±0.025%/°F(.03%/°C)
Media Compatibility Liquid/gases compatible to 316L
stainless steel
Overpressure 300% of rated pressure
Burst Pressure 500% of rated pressure
Measurement Range 0-20 psid, 0-30 psid, 0-50 psid,
0-100 psid, 0-200 psid, 0-300 psid
Operating Humidity 10-90% RH Non-Condensing
Operating Temperature 0° to 180°F (-18° to 82°C)
Dimensions 3.5"H x 5.0"W x 2.0"D
(8.9 x 12.7 x 5.1 cm)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight 1.7 lb (0.75 kg)
Warranty 5 years
WET TO WET DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PR282 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MAMAC Systems Model PR282 Wet to Wet
Differential Pressure Transmitter incorporates
sophisticated integrated circuits and new fused silicon
monolithic cavity pressure sensors to not only provide a
high level, fully conditioned and temperature compensated
output, but also to offer up to six (6) pressure ranges
. The
stainless steel monolithic pressure cavity not only provides media compatibility for most of the applications, but also offers a leakproof solution for today’s environmentally conscious customers
. Three industry standard output
versions are available: 4-20 mA 2-wire loop or 0-5 VDC/0- 10 VDC
. A wide 12-40 VDC or 12-35 VAC unregulated
supply voltage and a broad 0°F−180°F compensated temperature range ensures compatibility to most of the applications
. A rugged NEMA-1 (IP-30) enclosure, fully
temperature compensated NIST traceable accuracy and a liberal five year warranty are some of the features which make the Model PR282 the industry’s most reliable, rugged, and economical pressure sensor
.
FEATURES
• 100% solid state fused silicon pressure sensor
• Rugged, leak-proof stainless steel monolithic
pressure cavity with no welds, o-rings, or seams/
bonds
SPECIFICATIONS
PR282 Series
WIRING
Differential Pressure Transducer with VDC Output
• NIST traceable calibration
• Rugged NEMA-1 (IP-30) enclosure
• Short circuit and reverse polarity protected
• Conforms to EMC and RoHS standards

1112. fifl˚
PRESSURE 1050fifl˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Wiring for VDC Differential Pressure Transducers when applied with
External DC Po wer Supply
Wiring for VDC Differential Pressure Transducers when applied with
External DC Supply
VDC Output Transducer Only 12-35 VAC Transformer
Controller / Meter / Recorder
+ Input Signal
- Common
Shield/Ground
VDC Output Transducer Only 12-40 VDC Po wer Supply
Controller / Meter / Recorder
+ Input Signal
- Common
Shield/Ground
WIRING
WET TO WET DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PR282 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PR282 Differential pressure sensor
OUTPUT
2 0-5 VDC
3 0-10 VDC
4* 4-20 mA
PRESSURE RANGE psid (kPa)
1 0-20 (137.9)
2 0-30 (206.8)
3 0-50 (344.7)
4 0-100 (689.5)
5 0-200 (1379.0)
6 0-300 (2068.4)
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
A12B 24 VDC
B12B 24 VAC
Example: PR-282-3-2-A12B Differential
pressure sensor, 0-10 VDC
output, 0-30 psid range,
with 24 VDC supply voltage .
3PR-282 2 A12B
* Only av ailable in VDC supply voltage.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
Wiring for mA Differential Pressure Transducers with External DC Po wer Supply Wiring for mA Differential Pressure Transducers where the Controller or
Meter has an Internal DC Po wer Supply
mA Output Transducer Only 12-40 VCD Po wer Supply
Controller / Meter / Recorder
mA Output Transducer Only Controller / Meter / Recorder
+ Input Signal
- Common
Shield/Ground
+ Input Signal
- Common
Shield/Ground

1113. fifl−˚ 1051PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 11-32 VDC, 25 mA maximum
Signal Output 4-20 mA
Maximum Output
Impedance 600Ω @ 24 VDC
Accuracy ±0.5% of differential pressure
range, including non-linearity and hysteresis, or ±1
.0% for 0-6 psid
(0-41.4 kPa) range
Thermal Effect Zero: ±0.05% per °C
Span: ±0.03% per °C
Zero: ±0.05% per °C
Span: ±0.03% per °C
Overpressure
0 to 30 psid 100 psi (690 kPa)
60 to 200 psid 300 psi (2069 kPa)
Effect of Static Pressure
Less than 0.25% for static pressure
change from 0-100%
Operating Humidity 10% to 90% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Wetted Parts 316 Stainless Steel
Dimensions 3.56" x 4.54" x 2.18"
(9.01 x 11.53 x 5.54 cm)
Enclosure NEMA 3
Process Connection 1/8" FNPT
Wiring Terminations 14-26 AWG pluggable terminal block
Approvals CE
Weight

1.2 lb (0.54 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
W30 SERIES
2.36 (6.0)
0.60
(1.52)
0.26
(0.65)
2 Mounting holes for
#8 (4 mm) max screw
Bottom ViewFront View
4.02 (10.2)
Mounting holes
4.54
(11.53)
3.56
(9.04)
2.18
(5.5)
1.37
(3.48)
1.35
(3.43)
4.92
(12.50)
1/2'' Conduit connection
1/8-28 Fe male NPT
2 Ports
Mounting
holes
in
(cm)
High
Low
DESCRIPTION
The Modus W30 Series Differential Pressure Transmitters
measure differential pressure in liquids and gases compatible
with 316 stainless steel
. They are an excellent choice for
HVAC and process applications, including measurement of differential pressure across flow elements, heat exchangers, pumps, filters, coils, and liquid level monitoring
.
W30 Series transmitters are housed in a compact, heavy-
duty cast aluminum case designed to NEMA 4 (IP65) standards
. The rugged design allows it to withstand high
overpressure without damaging the unit or affecting calibration
. It is ±0.5% accurate and available in eight ranges
up to 200 psi differential. The W30 Series is a 4-20 mA two-
wire loop-powered device that operates on nominal 24 VDC.
FEATURES
• 316 stainless steel wetted parts
• 4-20 mA two-wire output
• Operates on nominal 24 VDC
• NEMA 4 cast aluminum enclosure
• Accuracy of ±0.5%
• Ranges to 200 psig (1379 kPa) differential
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
W30

1114. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1052fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
The W30 Series transmitter should be mounted on a stable surface, free of vibration and pipe strain. A Model
PT steam syphon is recommended to protect the transmitter on steam applications. Another device that might be
required is the Model 47 pressure snubber to protect the transmitter from pressure pulses.
4-20 mA
Signal
24 VDC
Power supply
+
-
+
-+
-
Enclosure
ground
N/C
W30
WIRING
INSTALLATION
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
W30 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: W30-36E Stainless steel liquid differential pressure
transmitter with a range of 0-100 psig (689.5 kPa)
* The maximum safe
momentary
over
pressure at any port
is two times the
maximum operating
static pressure.
RANGE
RANGE (call Kele for metric ranges)
MANIFOLD OPTION
W30
3VLVThree-valve manifold assembly
BVABypass valve assembly
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE RANGE
psid (kPa)
MAXIMUM OPERATING
STATIC PRESSURE*
psig (kPa)
31E
32E
33E
34E
35E
36E
37E
38E
6
10
15
30
60
100
150
200
(41.4)
(69.0)
(103.4)
(206.8)
(413.6)
(689.5)
(1034)
(1379)
100
(690)
300
(2069)
Liquid differential pressure transmitter
MODEL DESCRIPTION
W30 36E
1500
1000
500
0
0102 03 0 40 VDC
Power Supply Voltage
OPERATING
REGION
MAXIMUM RESISTANCE
Loop Resistance (Ohms)*
*Loop resistance = Wire resistance + Receiver resistance
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
47B-1 Brass piston style snubber 1112
47S-1 Stainless steel piston style snubber 1112
PT 1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings 1112

1115. fifl−˚ 1053PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Maximum Pressure 150 psi (1035 kPa)
Additional
Specifications 150°F (66°C)
Dimensions BVA-5-W30, DPW
18"H x 10"W x 4"D
(45.7 x 25.4 x 10.2 cm)
All Others 12"H x 10"W x 4"D
(30.5 x 25.4 x 10.2 cm)
Weight BVA-5-W30, DPW
15.5 lbs (7.0 kg)
All Others 10.5 lbs (4.8 kg)
Warranty 1 year
BYPASS VALVE ASSEMBLY
BVA-5
DESCRIPTION
Differential pressure transmitters are often installed in
systems with pressures much higher than the differential
pressure being monitored
. During installation, start-up,
or shutdown, the pressure differential may exceed the transmitter differential pressure rating, resulting in severe damage to the transmitter
. A Kele Model BVA-5 Bypass
Valve Assembly will minimize this possibility. When it is
purchased with a transmitter, the transmitter is assembled in a NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosure with two isolation valves, an equalizing valve, and two vent valves mounted and piped
.
Optional pressure sn
ubbers are also available mounted on
the Model BVA-5
.The Model BVA-5 is designed for use on
systems with maximum pressures less than 150 psig (1034.3
kPa) at 150 Deg. F (65 Deg. C).
To Place Transmitter in Service:
1. .
2. Open V-4 and V-5.
3. Slowly open V-1 and V-2 to bleed the lines of air.
4. Close V-4 and V-5.
5. Open V-1 and V-2 fully.
6. Close V-3 to read differential pressure.
To Take Transmitter Out of Service:
1. Open V-3. This will equalize the pressure at the
transmitter.
2. Close V-1 and V-2.
3. Open V-4 and V-5 to release pressure.
OPERATION
NEMA 1
enclosure
Transmitter
BVA-5 piping
Vent Vent
1/8" FNPT low
pressure port
1/8" FNPT high
pressure port
V-5V-4
V-3
V-2V-1
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
BVA-5
CAUTION: A BVA-5 bypass valve assembly is for use
on systems with a maximum pressure of 150 psig
(1034.3 kPa) at 150
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BV
A-5-DPW
5 VALVE BYPASS FOR KELE DPW
BVA-5-PW2 5 VALVE BYPASS FOR PW2
BVA-5-R 5 VALVE BYPASS FOR 360C
BVA-5-SET 5 VALVE BYPASS FOR SETRA
BVA-SRS 5 VALVE BYPASS FOR SRS
BVA-5-VER 5 VALVE BYPASS FOR VERIS
BVA-5-W 5 VALVE BYPASS FOR GE W30
To order NEMA 3R Enclosure add suffix -3R Example: BVA-5-DPW-3R

1116. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1054fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
DP
Transmitter
High
High
Low
Low
V
3
3VLV
V
2
Close Close
V
1
Close
Maximum Pressure 250 psig (1724 kPa)
Maximum Temperature 200°F (93°C)
Process Connection 1/4" FNPT
Dimensions
DPW-3VLV 9.75"H x 7.24"W (24.8 x 18.4 cm)
M230-3VLV 7.875"H x 7.25"W (20 x 18.4 cm)
W30-3VLV 11.125"H x 7.25"W
(28.3 x 18.4 cm)
M230-5VLV 7.83"H x 7.05"W (19.9 x 17.9 cm)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
These Three and Five-Valve Manifolds, machined from brass, are perfect for applications up to 200°F (93°C) and 250 psig (1724 kPa)
. The manifolds can be ordered pre-assembled
with a Model DPW-692, M230, or W30 Series differential pressure transmitter (see transmitter catalog page)
. Each
tr
ansmitter ordered with a manifold is assembled before
shipping
.
FEATURES
• High temperature tolerance
• High pressure tolerance
• Brass construction
• Easy to install
• Easy to operate
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
THREE-VALVE MANIFOLDS
DPW-3VLV, M230-3VLV, W30-3VLV
SPECIFICATIONS
DPW-3VLV
(shown with
transmitter)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DPW
-3VLV
Three-valve manifold for Kele DPW-692 (not included)
M230-3VLV Three-valve manifold for Setra M230 (not included)
W30-3VL
V
Three-valve manifold for Modus W30 (not included)
M230-5VLV Five-valve manifold for Setra M230 (not included)
W30-3VLV
(shown with
transmitter)
M230-3VLV
(shown with
transmitter)
Ordering note: To order with manifold assembled with M230, DPW, or W30 transmitter use "3VLV" or "5VLV"
suffix after appropriate model number.
To place transmitter in service 1
. Open V-3
2. Open V-1
3. Open V-2
4. Bleed air from system
5. Close V-3
To take transmitter out of service 1
. Open V-3
2. Close V-1
3. Close V-2
4. Remove transmitter
To bleed system with 5VLV 1
. Briefly open then close V4 to
remove excess air
2. Briefly open then close V5 to
remove excess air
5 VLV
(shown with
transmitter)

1117. fifl−˚ 1055PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 8-30 VDC
Supply Current <5 mA (1-5 VDC models)
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC
Output Current 0.45 mA maximum
(sink or source, 1-5 VDC models)
Maximum Output
Impedance 800Ω at 24 VDC
Minimum Output Impedance
50,000Ω
Accuracy <0.5% FS includes non-linearity,
repeatability, and hysteresis
(<1% on models with range ≤50 psig)
Stability <0.25% FS per year typical
Thermal Effect <0.5% FS (-40°C to 105°C)
(<1% on models with range ≤50 psig)
Overpressure 3X rated pressure
Burst Pressure 5x rated pressure
Measurement Range 0-15 psi to 0-500 psi
Response Time <1 ms
Operating Temperature -40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Warranty 1 year
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
P51 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The compact and robust Kele P51 Series Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter is designed for use with a wide variety of liquid or gas media and for industrial, process or commercial applications
. The 304L and 316L stainless steel
wetted parts makes the transmitter ideally suited for media such as water, glycol, refrigerants, steam (w/pigtail), and ammonia
. The P51 Series is available in models with a 4-20
mA output or with 1-5 VDC output and come standard with a 3 foot cable
. It is very competitively priced and can be ordered
in an optional enclosure assembly, or enclosed with a gauge for local pressure indication
.
FEATURES
• Rob •
Laser welded stainless steel design
• Reverse polarity protection
• 3' cable standard
• Optional enclosure
• Optional gauge assembly
• Ranges up to 500 psi
4-20 mA
signal
24 VDC
Power
supply
– –
+ +
(red) (white)
4-20 mA
1-5 VDC
signal
24 VDC
Power
supply
– –
+ +
(red) (white)
(black)
1-5 VDC
WIRING
APPLICATION
• Hot/c •
Pneumatics
• Steam (with pigtail)
• Compressors
• Refrigeration
• Agriculture
• Hydraulics
• Process control
• Flow
SPECIFICATIONS
P51 with optional enclosure and gauge
P51

1118. Ω≥≤Ω
PRESSURE 1056Ω≥≤Ω
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
2.36
(60.0)
Cable length
36 (914.4)
0.86
(22.0)
1/8" - 27 NPT
0.85 (21.5)
0.51 (13)
0.16
(4.0)
0.86
(22.0)
HEX
Ø
Ø
DIMENSIONS
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
P51 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: P51-100-20 0-100 psi transmitter with 4-20 mA output,
no options
100 P51 20
MODEL DESCRIPTION
P51 Pressure transmitter
RANGE psig (kPa)
15 0-15 (0-103)
50 0-50 (0-345)
100 0-100 (0-690)
200 0-200 (0-1379)
300 0-300 (0-2069)
500 0-500 (0-3448)
OUTPUT SIGNAL
20 4-20 mA output
5 1-5 VDC output
OPTIONS
E Tr ansmitter in watertight enclosure with stainless steel fittings
E-G Transmitter in enclosure with a pressure gauge, brass fittings
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
47B-1 Brass piston style snubber 1112
47S-1 Stainless steel piston style snubber 1112
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
PT 1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings 1112
ZG-R01 500Ω, 1/2W, 1% resistor 8

1119. fifl−˚ 1057PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 8-30 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA
Maximum Output
Impedance 800Ω @ 24 VDC
Accuracy Models > 75 psi <0.5% of span
Models < 50 psi <1.0% of span
Stability <0.25% of span/year
Thermal Effect -40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C), <0.5%
FS
Overpressure 3x range
Burst Pressure 5x range
Measurement Range 0-15 psi to 0-1000 psi
Media Compatibility Fluids compatible with brass, 304L
and 316 stainless steel
Response Time <1 ms
Operating Temperature -40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Process Connection 1/8" MNPT, 316 stainless steel
Wiring Terminations Splash-proof Packard connector, 16
AWG cable, 36" length
Dimensions Enclosure: 5.11"H x 5.11"W x 2.95"D
(13.0 x 13.0 x 7.5 cm)
Weight 0.3 lb (0.13 kg) with 36" cable
Warranty 1 year
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PSS2 SERIES
0.29
(6.74)
36 (91)
16 AWG Cabl ein
(cm)
0.86 dia
(2.2)
0.86 Hex
(2.2)
1/8'' NPT
3.5
(8.89)
2.6
(6.60)
DESCRIPTION
The Kele PSS2 Series Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter is highly accurate and compact, which makes it ideal for HVAC, building automation, and process gauge pressure applications
. A splash-proof Packard-type electrical
connector is provided for ease of installation. Eleven standard
ranges are available for a wide variety of applications.
FEATURES
• Splash-proof, plug-in electrical connector
• For steam, water, glycol, refrigerant, and more
• 4-20 mA output
• 304L/316L stainless steel wetted parts
• Wide range of pressures
• High overpressure capability
-
+
-
+
4-20 mA
Signal
24 VDC
Power
Supply
(red) (white)
in
(cm)
WIRINGDIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
PSS2
PSS2 with optional
enclosure and gauge
PSS2

1120. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1058fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Mount the PSS2 Series in a manner that protects it from steam or temperatures outside of its operating range. A Model PT
steam pigtail syphon m
ust be installed in all applications where steam is to be monitored
. When monitoring the pressure of a
medium that is above or below the temperature operating range of the transmitter, the sensor should be isolated by a length of
tubing. If 6" to 12" (15.2 to 30.5 cm) of brass tubing is used, temperatures up to 400°F (204°C) can be tolerated. See the
T
echnical Reference section for information on Steam Isolation and Temperature Protection
.
If the PSS2 Series is to be subjected to fluid hammer, pressure surges, or pulsations, a Model 47 pressure snubber is
recommended.
INSTALLATION
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PSS2 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
PSS2 100 G Example: PSS2-100-G Stainless steel pressure transmitter with a 4-20 mA
output ov er the range of 0-100 psig, with pressure gauge, installed
in a watertight enclosure with a transparent cover
* Brass wetted parts option is only for those mediums compatible with brass.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PSS2 Stainless steel 4-20 mA pressure transmitter
PRESSURE RANGE psig (kPa)
15 0-15 (0-103.4)
30 0-30 (0-206.9)
50 0-50 (0-344.8)
75 0-75 (0-517.1)
100 0-100 (0-689.5)
150 0-150 (0-1034)
200 0-200 (0-1379)
300 0-300 (0-2068)
500 0-500 (0-3497)
750 0-750 (0-5171)
1000 0-1000 (0-6895)
OPTIONS (lea ve blank for no options)
E Watertight enclosure (with stainless steel bulkhead fitting)
G* Enclosed with pressure gauge (watertight with transparent cover, brass fittings)
LCD* Model LPI-1C LCD display with enclosure (not watertight, brass fittings)
RED* Model LPI-1CR red digital display with enclosure (not watertight, brass fittings)
CAUTION: Not for use with ammonia. The PSS2 can be used with media that is compatible with 304L and 316L
stainless steel.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
250R-3-1 250 OHM 3 WATT 1% resistor long leads 1299
47B-1 Brass piston style snubber 1112
47S-1 Stainless steel piston style snubber 1112
PT 1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings 1112

1121. fifl−˚ 1059PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Mount the PTX1 Series in a manner that protects it from steam or temperatures outside of its operating range. A Model PT steam
pigtail syphon m
ust be installed on all applications where steam is to be monitored
. When monitoring the pressure of medium that
is above or below the temperature operating range of the transmitter, the sensor should be isolated by a length of tubing. If 6" to
12" (15.2 to 30.5 cm) of brass tubing is used, temperatures up to 400°F (204°C) can be tolerated. See the Technical Reference
section for information on Steam Isolation and Temperature Protection.
If the PTX1 Series is to be subjected to fluid hammer, pressure surges, or pulsations, a Model 47 pressure snubber is
recommended.
Supply Voltage 10-30 VDC @ 25 mA
Signal Output 4-20 mA
Maximum Output
Impedance 650Ω @ 24 VDC maximum
Accuracy ±1% FS
Thermal Effect ±0.04% FS/°F zero and span
Overpressure 200%
Burst Pressure 800%
Response Time 1 ms
Media Compatibility Fluids compatible with brass and
17-4 PH stainless steel
Wetted Materials Diaphragm: 17-4 PH stainless steel
Compensated Temperature Range
-20° to 160°F (-29° to 71°C)
Operating Temperature -40° to 200°F (-40° to 93°C)
Transmitter Case 304 stainless steel
Process Connection 1/8" NPT male 316 stainless steel,
with enclosure:
1/8" FNPT
Wiring Terminations
72" (182 cm) jacketed leads
Dimensions 7.09"H x 4.33"W x 3.54"D
(18.0 x 11.0 x 9.0 cm)
Weight PTX1
0.45 lb (0.20 kg)
PTX1EG 2.05 lb (0.93 kg)
Warranty 1 year
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PTX1 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele PTX1 Series Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter utilizes a thin film strain-gauge bridge and stainless steel diaphragm to provide a highly accurate, stable means of measuring gauge pressures up to 2000 psig (13
.79
MPa). Splash-proof cable connections protect the wiring,
allowing the PTX1 Series to be mounted near the medium being measured
. Optional indication is available as a digital
display or as a 2" (5.1 cm) gauge.
FEATURES
• For steam, water, glycol, ammonia, refrigerants, and
more
• 1% full scale accuracy
• 200% proof pressure
• Wide range of pressures
• 4-20 mA output
• Reverse polarity protected
• Plug-in, splash-proof connector with 6' cable
• Stainless steel wetted parts
• Stainless steel case
• Optional watertight polystyrene enclosure
• Optional LCD/red digital indication
• Optional gauge available for mediums compatible with
brass
INSTALLATION
SPECIFICATIONS
PTX1-07
PTX1-E-07

1122. fifl˚
PRESSURE 1060fifl˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
72.0 Cable
(182.88)
1/8" NPT
male
Hex
(white)
(black)
4-20 mA
24 VDC
Power Supply
in
(cm)
2.73
(6.92)
0.63
(1.59)
Splash-proof
Hirschman
Connector
WIRING
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PTX1 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
* Enclosed models not av ailable in pressure ranges above 1000 psig
** Brass wetted parts; do not use with mediums that are not compatible with brass

Note: NIST certificate av ailable; contact Kele.
Example: PTX1
Stainless steel pressure transmitter with 100 psig
pressure range in enclosure with LCD indication

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
*
15
16
30" Hg Vacuum to 0 (-101.6 Vacuum to 0)
30" Hg Vacuum to 15 (-101.6 Vacuum to 103.4)
0-15 (0-130.4)
3-15 (20.7-103.4)
0-30 (0-206.9)
0-60 (0-413.7)
0-100 (0-689.5)
0-150 (0-1034.3)
0-200 (0-1379.0)
0-300 (0-2068.5)
0-500 (0-3447.5)
0-750 (0-5171.3)
0-1000 (0-6895.0)
0-2000 (0-13,790.0)
30'' Hg Vacuum to 30 (-101.6 Vacuum to 206.9)
30'' Hg Vacuum to 60 (-101.6 Vacuum to 413.7)
MODEL DESCRIPTION PTX1 Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter
OPTIONS Lea ve blank for no options and specify
E* Watertight enclosure (with stainless steel bulkhead fitting)
LCD Model LPI-1C LCD display (enclosure not watertight)
RED Model LPI-1CR red digital display (enclosure not watertight)
G** Pressure gauge (includes enclosure with transparent cover)
XX RANGE (see table above) (must specify range)
* Enclosed models not av ailable in pressure ranges above 1000 psi
** Pressure gauge option av ailable for all mediums compatible with brass
PTX1 E LCD Example: PTX1 Stainless steel pressure transmitter with 100 psig
pressure range in enclosure with LCD indication 07
RANGE
NUMBER
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
0-30" VAC
30" VAC to 15
0-15
3-15
0-30
0-60
0-100
0-150
0-101.6
-101.6 to 103.4
0-130.4
20.7-103.4
0-206.9
0-413.7
0-689.5
0-1034.3
PRESSURE RANGE
psig kPa
RANGE
NUMBER
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0-200
0-300
0-500
0-750
0-1000
0-2000
30'' VAC to 30
30'' VAC to 60
0-1379.0
0-2068.5
0-3447.5
0-5171.3
0-6895.0
0-13790.0
-101.6 VAC to 206.9
-101.6 VAC to 413.7
PRESSURE RANGE
psig kPa
PTX1E-LCD 07
MODEL DESCRIPTION PTX1 Pressure transmitter with cable
PTX1E Pressure transmitter in watertight enclosure, stainless steel fittings
PTX1E-G** Pressure transmitter in watertight enclosure, with gauge, brass fittings PTX1E-LCD** Pressure transmitter enclosed (not watertight), with LCD, brass fittings PTX1E-RED** Pressure transmitter enclosed (not watertight), with red LCD, brass fittings PRESSURE RANGE psig (kPa)
909
750
500
250
0
0 10 20 30
Loop Resistance ( Ω)
Loop Supply Voltage (VDC)
Load Limitations 4-20 mA Output
Vmin = 10V + [0.022A*(R )]
Loop
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
47B-1 Brass piston style snubber 1299
47S-1 Stainless steel piston style snubber 1299
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
PT 1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings 1112

1123. fifl−˚ 1061PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage
Current 14 to 30 VDC (R
L
=250Ω), 2-wire
Voltage 9 to 30 VDC, 3-wire
Signal Output Current
4-20 mA
Voltage 0.5 to 5.5 VDC
Maximum Output Impedance
800Ω @ 24 VDC
Minimum Output Impedance
5000Ω
Accuracy ±0.25% FS
Stability 0.5% FS/year
Non-repeatability 0.05% FS
Non-linearity ±0.22% FS
Hysteresis 0.10% FS
Thermal Effect Zero
±2.0% FS/100°F (±1.8% FS/50°C)
Span ±1.5% FS/100°F (±1.3% FS/50°C)
Overpressure See ordering information
Measurement Range 0 - 1 psi to 2000 psi
Operating Temperature -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Compensated Temperature Range
-4° to 176°F (-20° to 80°C)
Process Connection 1/4" 18 NPT
Enclosure Stainless Steel, Valox
Wetted Materials 17-4 PH stainless steel
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight 0.14 lb (0.07 kg)
Warranty 1 year
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
209 SERIES
GND
in
(cm)
COM OUT
1.62
(4.1)
3.63
(9.2)
EXC
DESCRIPTION
The Setra 209 Series Pressure Transmitter is specifically designed for industrial applications with high performance requirements
. It measures gauge pressure and can be used
with gases or liquids compatib
le with 17-4 PH stainless steel
.
The
209 Series is packaged in a rugged, stainless steel/Valox
housing, which is small and lightweight
. The stainless steel
capacitance sensing element and high level output, IC-based circuit assures excellent stability
.
FEATURES
• Lo •
Highly accurate
• Current output
• Lightweight
• Compatible with most common applications
• Stainless steel construction
• Conduit adapter standard
• Optional voltage output available
APPLICATION
• HV •
Industrial equipment
• Compressor control
• Hydraulic systems
• Process and refrigeration systems
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
209 Series

1124. fifl˚
PRESSURE 1062fifl˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
4-20 mA 0.5-5.5 VDC
GND
R
load
R
load
COMOUT EXC
GND
COM OUT EXC
24 VDC*
Power supply
* See Specifications on previous page for power supply requirements.
4-20
mA
0.5-5.5
VDC
24 VDC*
Power supply
WIRING
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
209 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: 209-050P-G2M11-A1 0-50 psig transmitter with 4-20 mA
output and conduit connection
209 050P G2M11A 1
MODEL DESCRIPTION
209 Pressure transmitter PROOF BURST
RANGE psig (kPa) PRESSURE (psig) PRESSURE (psig)
001P 0-1 (0-7) 2 250
002P 0-2 (0-14) 4 250
005P 0-5 (0-34) 10 250
010P 0-10 (0-69) 20 500
025P 0-25 (0-172) 50 500
050P 0-50 (0-345) 100 750
100P 0-100 (0-690) 200 1000
200P 0-200 (0-1379) 400 2000
250P 0-250 (0-1724) 500 2000
500P 0-500 (0-3448) 1000 3000
10CP 0-1000 (0-6895) 2000 5000
20CP 0-2000 (13790) 3000 6500
OUTPUT
G2M11 4-20 mA analog
G2M24 0.5-5.5 VDC analog
CONNECTION
A1 Threaded conduit connection
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
PT 1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings 1112

1125. fifl−˚ 1063PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 14-30 VDC, 20 mA
Signal Output 4-20 mA @ 800Ω
Accuracy <± 1% of span
Thermal Effect (at 0 to 80°C)
Typ. 1% of span; Max: 2.5% of span
Overpressure (dependent on calibrated range)
typ. ~2x rated pressure
Measurement Range 0-15 to 0-10,000 psi
Response Time <4 mS
Operating Temperature 32° to 176° F (0° to 80° C)
Process Connection 1/4" NPT male
Wiring Terminations DIN 175301-803 A and C, M12x1,
6 ft. cable
Media Compatibility 316L stainless steel
Stability 0.1% of span
Approvals CE
Weight 0.14 lb (0.07 kg)
Warranty 1 year
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
50 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Wika 50 Series pressure transmitter is precision
engineered and manufactured to fit many industrial
and OEM pressure measurement applications
. The
rugged design provides resistance to vibration, shock, wide temperature variations, RFI and other extreme environmental conditions that are typical of industrial and OEM applications
. Performance and reliability is
enhanced by the all stainless steel welded measuring cell that eliminates the need for soft sealing materials that may deteriorate over time
. The state-of-the-art manufacturing
and assembly process increases the long-term reliability of the 50 Series
.
FEATURES
• Pressure ranges: from 0...15 psi up to 0... 10,000 psi
• Non-linearity: ≤±0.5% BFSL
• Signal output: 4-20 mA and 0-10 V
1/4 NPT Male
1/4 NPT
1.06
(27 mm)
.51 (13 mm)
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
50 Series
L-connector
Conductor outer diameter
.18" to .24"
1.06
(27 mm)
.51 (13 mm)
1.14 (29 mm)
max. 1.5 (38 mm)
max. 1.9
(48 mm)
EN175301-801-C
2.4 (60.8 mm)
1/4 NPT
DIMENSIONS

1126. Ω≥≤Ω
PRESSURE 1064Ω≥≤Ω
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
50 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
50426354 Pressure transmitter, 0-15 psia, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426389 Pressure transmitter, 0-100 psia, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426397 Pressure transmitter, 0-15 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426401 Pressure transmitter, 0-25 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426427 Pressure transmitter, 0-50 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50372475 Pressure transmitter, 0-100 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50398083 Pressure transmitter, 0-200 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426460 Pressure transmitter, 0-300 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426478 Pressure transmitter, 0-500 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426486 Pressure transmitter, 0-1000 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426494 Pressure transmitter, 0-1500 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426508 Pressure transmitter, 0-2000 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426516 Pressure transmitter, 0-3000 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50372483 Pressure transmitter, 0-5000 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426532 Pressure transmitter, 0-10,000 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426737 Pressure transmitter, 0-15 psia, 0-10 V, 1/4 MNPT
50426761 Pressure transmitter, 0-100 psia, 0-10 V, 1/4 MNPT
50426770 Pressure transmitter, 0-15 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426788 Pressure transmitter, 0-25 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426800 Pressure transmitter, 0-50 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426818 Pressure transmitter, 0-100 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426834 Pressure transmitter, 0-200 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426842 Pressure transmitter, 0-300 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426851 Pressure transmitter, 0-500 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426869 Pressure transmitter, 0-100 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426877 Pressure transmitter, 0-1500 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426885 Pressure transmitter, 0-2000 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426893 Pressure transmitter, 0-3000 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426907 Pressure transmitter, 0-5000 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
50426915 Pressure transmitter, 0-10000 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
ZG-R01 500Ω, 1/2W, 1% resistor 8
PT 1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings 1112
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
47B-1 Brass piston style snubber 1112
47S-1 Stainless steel piston style snubber 1112

1127. fifl−˚ 1065PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 9-28 V
Supply Current ≤ 5 mA
Signal Output 4-20 mA Ratiometric
(10-90% of V supp)
Output Current up to 5mA
Maximum Output
Impedance Zero for 4-20 mA output
< 25 Ω for ratiometric
Minimum Output Impedance
Zero for 4-20 mA output
< 25 Ω for ratiometric
Accuracy < ± 1.0 % FS
Temperature Effect Included in accuracy
System Pressure 0 to 360 psi
Overpressure 3X rated pressure
Burst Pressure 4X rated pressure
Measurement Range 0 to 360 psi
Response Time < 4 ms
Operating Temperature -4° to 176°F (-20° to 80°C)
Weight 0.33 to 0.66 lbs (0.15 to 0.30 kg)
Approvals CE, UL File# E31024, RoHS
Warranty 18 months from manufacture date
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
MBS 1900
A0, A1
DESCRIPTION
This compact Danfoss MBS 1900 Series pressure
transmitter is designed for use in air and water
applications like booster pumps and air compressors
. It
off
ers a range of output signals and connection options
.
FEATURES
• Stainless steel (316) welded construction for sensor
element and package
• Reverse polarity protection
• EMC protection up to 100V/m
• RoHS conformty
• Digitally compensated
• UL/CSA certified

Electrical Connection 4-20 mA Output (2 wire)
Pin 1: + supply = Black
Pin 2: ÷ supply = White
Pin 3: not used
Earth: Connected
to MBS enclosure
Black
White
WIRING DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
MBS 1900
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MBS19005811A36B04 Pressure transducer for water and air applications, 0-100 psi
MBS19006211A36B04 Pressure transducer for water and air applications, 0-200 psi
MBS19006411A36B04 Pressure transducer for water and air applications, 0-300 psi
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
ZG-R01 500Ω, 1/2W, 1% resistor 8
PT 1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings 1112
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
47B-1 Brass piston style snubber 1112
47S-1 Stainless steel piston style snubber 1112
Cable

1128. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1066fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±10% @ 80 mA
24 VDC ±10% @ 35 mA
Signal Output
Current 4-20 mA (sourcing)
Voltage 1-5 VDC, 2-10 VDC, 3-15 VDC
Maximum Output Impedance (mA)
650Ω
Minimum Output Impedance (VDC)
1-5 VDC: 1250Ω
2-10 VDC 2500Ω
3-15 CDC 3750Ω
Accuracy ±0.1 psig @ 77°F (25°C)
Span Adjustments 3-20 psig (20.7-137.9 kPa)
Zero Adjustments 0-17 psig (0-117.2 kPa)
Pressure Range 0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa)
factory setting
Media Compatibility Air and non-conductive gases
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Process Connection 1/4" barb
Wiring Terminations Terminals
Dimensions PVI-1
3.4"H x 4.9"W x 2"D
(8.6 x 12.4 x 5.1 cm)*
PVI-2 3.25"H x 3.25"W x 1.75"D
(8.26 x 8.26 x 4.45 cm)*
Approvals RoHS
Weight PVI-1
0.85 lb (0.39 kg)
PVI-2 0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Warranty 18 months

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PVI-1, PVI-2
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Model PVI-1 and PVI-2 Pressure Transmitters are designed to provide economical monitoring of control air pressure in HVAC applications
. The Model PVI-1 is
furnished in a unique slim-line design housing, which saves panel space, and can be ordered with an optional DIN rail- mounting adapter
. The Model PVI-2 is a snap-track mounted
version with identical operation. Both versions are available
with an optional pressure indication gauge.Both units have
LED indication for power and for output over range when input pressure exceeds maximum calibrated pressure
. The
output signal is limited to 110% of normal full scale (20 mA, 5/10/15V)
.
FEATURES
• A •
0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa) input pressure range
• 4-20 mA and voltage outputs available simultaneously
• Adjustable zero and span
• LED indication of power and output over range
• Optional pressure gauge
APPLICATION
Models PVI-1 and PVI-2 convert an input pressure to a 4-20 mA current sourcing and a jumper-selectable 1-5, 2-10, or 3-15 VDC output signal that is directly proportional to the input pressure
. The zero and span potentiometers allow for
adjustment if the output signal required is different from the standard calibration
.
SPECIFICATIONS
PVI-1
PVI-2 with Optional Gauge
* Add 0.6"H (1.5 cm) each for mounting tabs and 2.3"H
(5.8 cm) for gauge option.

1129. fifl−˚ 1067PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Voltage Output Jumper
(Shown in 1-5V Position)
PVI-1 (enclosed)
PVI-2 (track mount)
Output
Voltage
Range
Voltage Out
mA Out
COM
24V Po wer
Voltage output and 4-20 mA
outputs are simultaneously active.
Out
Over
Power
Span
Zero
Zero and Span
Pressure
Zero Range
Pressure
Span Range
10V 15V
5V
Voltage Output
4-20 mA Output 650fi
max
24 VAC or VDC
Power Supply
Zero and Span
Selection Dip
Switches
WIRING CALIBRATION
Models PVI-1 and PVI-2 are factory calibrated for 0-20 psig
(0-137.9 kPa). If another pressure range is required, select
the pressure zero range from Table 1 and set SW1 and SW2 accordingly
. Then, select the pressure span range (high
pressure minus low pressure) required from Table 2 and set SW3 and SW4
. Apply the low-end pressure and adjust the
zero pot for the desired output. Apply the high-end pressure
and adjust the span pot. Repeat as required.
Example: To monitor an 8-13 psig signal, the pressure zero
range is 8, so set SW1 ON and SW2 OFF. The pressure
span range is 5 (13-8 = 5), so set SW3 OFF and SW4 OFF.
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PVI-1, PVI-2
ORDERING INFORMATION
OPTIONS (must be factory installed)
PVI-1
Pressure indication gauge
DIN rail mounting
Special calibration (specify range when ordering)
43
47
C
Example: PVI-1-43-47
Enclosed pressure transmitter with
pressure indication gauge and DIN rail mounting
OPTIONS (must be factory installed)
PVI-2
DESCRIPTIONMODEL
Pressure indication gauge
Special calibration (specify range when ordering)
G
C
Example: PVI-2-G
Track-mounted pressure transmitter with
pressure gauge
DESCRIPTIONMODEL
Pressure transmitter
Track-mounted pressure transmitter
TABLE 1. PRESSURE ZERO RANGE
ZERO SW1 SW2
0.00-4.25 psig (0-29.3 kPa) ON ON
4.25-8.50 psig (29.3-58.6 kPa) ON OFF
8.50-12.75 psig (58.6-87.9 kPa) OFF ON
12.75-17.00 psig (87.9 kPa-117.2 kPa) OFF OFF
TABLE 2. PRESSURE SPAN RANGE
SPAN SW3 SW4
3.00-7.25 psig (20.7-50.0 kPa) OFF OFF
7.25-11.50 psig (50.0-79.3 kPa) OFF ON
11.50-15.75 psig (79.3-108.6 kPa) ON OFF
15.75-20.00 psig (108.6-137.9 kPa) ON ON

1130. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1068fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 12-32 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA (2-wire)
Maximum Output
Impedance mA 545Ω @ 24 VDC
Adjustments Zero and Span Adjustable
-10% to 110% FS
Accuracy ±0.25% Full Scale (includes linearity,
hysteresis, and repeatability)
Thermal Effect ±0.02% FS (URL)/°C from 23°C reference
Overpressure (Proof)
1500 psi FS and below 200% FS value
3000, 5000 psi 150% FS value
7500 psi 120% FS value
Measurement Range Vac-15 psi (-101.6 Vac to 103.4 KPa) to
0-7500 psi (0-51710.68 KPa)
Display
Type 4 digit, 10mm LCD with LED backlight
Accuracy ±0.25% FS (URL) + last digit
Operating Temperature -10° to 60°C (14° to 140°F)
Wetted Parts 316 Stainless Steel and 17-4PH SS
Storage Temperature -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F)
Enclosure Rating Epoxy coated aluminum, NEMA 4X (IP65)
Process Connection 1/4 FNPT
Wiring Terminations Cable Gland
(Cable Diameters 0.35" to 0.47")
Approvals CE
Weight Approx. 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Ashcroft GC51 Rangeable Pressure Transmitter is a
compact alternative to the conventional process transmitter
available in compound and gauge ranges
. The ranges span
from Vacuum to 15 PSI, 30 PSI, or 50 PSI compound ranges and 0 to 7500 PSI ranges
. The GC51 Series features a two
wire 4-20mA output, backlit LCD display, stainless steel wetted parts, and NEMA 4X, IP65, robust aluminum housing
.
The r
ange and output allows for rescaling and setting of user
defined units
.
FEATURES
• NEMA 4X (IP65) aluminum die cast housing
• Backlit LCD display
• Min./Max. hold to capture pressure events
• Rotatable display
• Adjustable pressure range and output
• 2 wire 4-20mA output
• Standard 120ms response time
• Internal push button keys with key lock feature
• Optional NIST certification
?
?
Terminal box
Display (board)
Shield
Power source
? ?
Receiver
Transmission cable
WIRING
RANGEABLE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
GC51 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
GC51
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
PT 1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings 1112
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
47B-1 Brass piston style snubber 1112
47S-1 Stainless steel piston style snubber 1112
MODEL DESCRIPTION
GC51-15V Pressure transmitter, Vac to 15 psi
GC51-30V Pressure transmitter, Vac to 30 psi
GC51-50V Pressure transmitter, Vac to 50 psi
GC51-50 Pressure transmitter, 0-50 psi
GC51-100 Pressure transmitter, 0-100 psi
GC51-150 Pressure transmitter, 0-150 psi
GC51-300 Pressure transmitter, 0-300 psi
GC51-500 Pressure transmitter, 0-500 psi
GC51-1000 Pressure transmitter, 0-1000 psi
GC51-1500 Pressure transmitter, 0-1500 psi
GC51-3000 Pressure transmitter, 0-3000 psi
GC51-5000 Pressure transmitter, 0-5000 psi
GC51-7500 Pressure transmitter, 0-7500 psi

1131. fifl−˚ 1069PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 15-35 VDC
Contact Rating 24 VDC @ 500Ω
Contact Type Solid-state (PNP OR NPN)
Accuracy 1.00% of span
Measurement Range 0-15 psi to 0-5000 psi
Shock 50g
Operating Temperature 32° to 176°F (0° to 80°C)
Wetted Parts Pressure connection 316 L stainless
steel (13-8 PH f
or ranges above
150 psi)
Process Connection
1/4" FNPT
Wiring Terminations 6 ft (2m) cable
Approvals CE , UL File E12413, RoHS
Weight 0.44lbs (0.45 kg)
Warranty 2 years
PRESSURE SWITCH
PSD-30 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The design and outstanding functionality of the Wika PSD- 30 pressure switch received the IF Product Design Award in 2009
. The large, ergonomically designed programming
push buttons provide the user with tactile feedback for immediate confirmation that the touch event was registered by the trans-mitter
. The user-friendly menu navigation
layout meets the new German Engineering Federation (VDMA) Standard form for fluid sensors (24574-1, Part 1, pressure switch)
. The goal of the VDMA is to simplify
the use of pressure switches by standardizing menu navigation and display parameters
.The PSD-30 can be
adjusted three different ways to fit specific installation requirements
. The display and electrical connection can
be rotated independently to maximize visibility while still orienting the electrical connection in the best position for the cable connector
. If the transmitter is installed overhead
or upside down the display can be electronically rotated 180°
.Time tested, proven WIKA thin film and piezoresitive
pressure sensor technology is an integral part of the PSD- 30 providing the high quality and long term reliability users demand
.
FEATURES
• A
Negative (NPN) or Positive-Negative-Positive (PNP)
solid state switches
• High visibility, rugged 14-segment red LED display
electronically rotates 180° for top-down installation
• User-friendly, intuitive 3-key operation
• Versions with 4-20 mA or 0-10V analog output
available
• Programming menu meets VDMA Standards for user friendly navigation.
2x PNP + analog output
U+ Positive supply connection
U- Negative supply connection
SP1 Switching point 1
SP2 Switching point 2
S+ Switching point 2
Legend:
Brown
White
Black
Gray
Blue
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
PSD-30
ORDERING INFORMATION
01
02
03
04
05
06*
07
08
09
10
1130" Hg Vacuum to 0 (-101.6 Vacuum to 0)
30" Hg Vacuum to 100 (-101.6 Vacuum to 689.5)
0-15 (0-130.4)
0-25 (0-172.4)
0-50 (0-344.7)
0-100 (0-689.5)
0-200 (0-1379.0)
0-500 (0-3447.5)
0-2000 (0-13,790.0)
0-3000 (0-20,684.3)
0-5000 (0-34,473.8)
Example: PSD-30-03 4-20 mA pressure transmitter with integral
LED displa y, 0-15 psi range.
PSD-30 03
MODEL DESCRIPTION PSD-30 4-20 mA pressure transmitter with integral LED display PSD-30-10V 0-10 V pressure transmitter with integral LED display (models only with *)
-
PRESSURE RANGE psi (kPA)

1132. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1070fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Common
NormallyClosed
Normally Open
1
2
3
2.5"
0
"
5"
Contact Rating 1.5A (0.4A) @ 250V
Contact Type SPST or SPDT
Differential
KDPS-02/03 0.04" WC (10 Pa)
KDPS-04/05 0.08" WC (20 Pa)
KDPS-10 0.40" WC (100 Pa)
KDPS-25 0.60" WC (150 Pa)
Operating Pressure 20" WC (5 kPa)
Measurement Range
KDPS-02 0.08 to 0.80" WC (20 to 200 Pa)
KDPS-03 0.12 to 1.20" WC (30 to 300 Pa)
KDPS-04 0.16 to 1.6" WC (40 to 400 Pa)
KDPS-05 0.20 to 2.00" WC (50 to 500 Pa)
KDPS-10 0.80 to 4.0" WC (200 to 1000 Pa)
KDPS-25 1.0 to 10.0" WC (500 to 2500 Pa)
Media Compatibility Air, non-combustible and inert gases
Operating Temperature -40° to 185°F (-40° C to 85°C)
Mounting Diaphram positioned in any vertical
plane
Enclosure IP54 (with cover) similar to NEMA 12
Process Connection 0.25" (6.0mm) diameter for 0.25" ID
Tubing
Wiring Terminations 0.25" (6.4 mm) copper alloy
Approvals CE, RoHS, UR recognized File
MH46253
Weight 6 oz (171.4g)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KDPS Series Adjustable Differential Pressure Switches are general-purpose, airflow-proving switches designed for HVAC and building automation applications
.
The
KDPS Series can be used to sense positive, negative,
or differential air pressure
. The silicone diaphragm and
calibration spring are housed in a rugged plastic enclosure with a removable cover protecting the set point adjustment knob and snap action switch terminals
. Electrical connections
are made through a 7/8" diameter opening in the cover that accepts a 1/2" conduit connection
. Air sampling connections
accept 1/4" ID tubing.
FEATURES
• T •
Easy, field adjustable set point
• Dual scales
WIRING
APPLICATION
• Pr •
Monitoring filter for excess pressure drop
• Monitoring duct static pressure
• Proving air flow
• Monitoring damper status
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
KDPS SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KDPS-02 Differential pressure switch, 0.08" to 0.80" WC (20 to 200 Pa)
KDPS-03 Differential pressure switch, 0.12" to 1.20" WC (30 to 300 Pa)
KDPS-04 Differential pressure switch, 0.16" to 1.6" WC (40 to 400 Pa)
KDPS-05 Differential pressure switch, 0.20" to 2.00" WC (50 to 500 Pa)
KDPS-10 Differential pressure switch, 0.80" to 4.0" WC (200 to 1000 Pa)
KDPS-25 Differential pressure switch, 1.0" to 10.0" WC (500 to 2500 Pa)
KDPS Series

1133. fifl−˚ 1071PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
APPLICATION
• Pr
• Monitoring filter for excess pressure drop
• Monitoring duct static pressure
• Proving air flow
• Monitoring damper status
Contact Rating AFS-145, 222, 262, 405
15A non-inductive, 277 VAC, 60 Hz
24 VAC @ 2.4A
AFS-460, 460-DSS 15A @ 125-277 VAC
1/4 HP @ 125 VAC
1/2 HP @ 250 VAC
1/2A @ 125 VDC
Contact Type AFS-145, 222, 262, 405 AFS-136, 460-137
SPDT
AFS-460 SPST N.C.
AFS-460-DSS 2-SPST N.C.
Switch Differential AFS-145, 222, 262, 405
Progressive, increasing from
approximately 0.02" W.C. (5.0 Pa) @
minimum set point to approximately 0
.8" W.C. (199 Pa) @ maximum set
point
AFS-460, 460-DSS None, manual reset
Overpressure 0.5 psig (3.5 kPa)
Measurement Range AFS-145, 222, 405
0.05" to 12.0" W.C. (12.5 to 2989 Pa)
AFS-262 0.05" to 2.0" W.C. (12.5 to 498 Pa)
AFS-460 0.4" to 12.0" W.C. (99.3 to 2989 Pa)
AFS-460-DSS 2.0" to 12.0" W.C. (498 to 2989 Pa)
Life Expectancy AFS-145, 222, 262, 405: 100,000
cycles minimum @ 0.5 psig (3.5 kPa)
maximum pressure each cycle and at maximum electrical load AFS-460: 6000 cycles
Operating Temperature
-40° to 180°F (-40° to 82°C)
Process Connection AFS-145
1/8" NPTF
All Others Ferrule and nut compression for
1/4" OD tubing
Approvals CE, UL File MH6213, cCSAus, RoHS
Weight 1.2 lb (0.54 kg)
Warranty 2 years
ADJUSTABLE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
AFS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Cleveland Controls AFS Series Adjustable Differential Pressure Switches are general-purpose, airflow-proving switches designed for HVAC and building automation applications
. The AFS Series can be used to
sense positive, negative, or differential air pressure. The
diaphragm and calibration spring are housed in a plated enclosure with a removable metal guard protecting the set point screw and snap action switch terminals
. Electrical
connections are made through a 7/8 diameter opening in the metal guard that accepts a conduit connection
. Air sampling
connections accept OD r
igid or semi rigid tubing
. The Model
AFS-460 features a manual reset button to close the switch following actuation
. For low current applications use Model
AFS-405 with gold contacts.
FEATURES
• Adjustable set point
• For static or differential pressure
• 15A switch rating
• Manual reset (Model AFS-460)
• Gold contacts (Model AFS-405)
• UR, CSA, FM approved
• Two-year warranty
CU S
SPECIFICATIONS
Action on a rise in differential pressure
C
NO
NC
WIRING
C
NC
Opens on a rise in differential pressure
C
NC
C
NC
A
Lead
B
Lag
Opens on a
rise in
differential
pressure

1134. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1072fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
1.38
(3.50)
6.13
(15.57)2.81
(7.14)
3.25
(8.23)
in
(cm)
1.63
(4.14)
Two mounting holes
3/16 fastener required
1.94
(4.93)
3.88
(9.86)
3.25
(8.23)
0.44
(1.12)
Low pressure inlet (B)
High pressure inlet (A)
0.710
(1.80)
0.78
(1.98)
C NO NC
OPERATION
DIMENSIONS
ADJUSTABLE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
AFS SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AFS-145* Differential pressure switch 0.05" to 12" W.C. (12.5 to 2989 Pa), 1/8" NPTF
AFS-222* Differential pressure switch 0.05" to 12" W.C. (12.5 to 2989 Pa), 1/4" compression fittings
AFS-222-112 Differential pressure switch 0.05" to 12" W.C. (12.5 to 2989 Pa), 1/4" barbed fittings
AFS-262* Differential pressure switch 0.05" to 2" W.C. (12.5 to 498 Pa), 1/4" compression fittings
AFS-262-112 Differential pressure switch 0.05" to 2" W.C. (12.5 to 498 Pa), 1/4" barbed fittings
AFS-405 Differential pressure switch 0.05" to 12" W.C. (12.5 to 2989 Pa), gold contacts
AFS-460* Manual reset differential pressure switch, 0.4" to 12" W.C. (99.3 to 2989 Pa), SPST
AFS-460-136 Manual reset differential pressure switch, 0.4" to 12" W.C. (99.3 to 2989 Pa), 120 VAC, SPDT
AFS-460-137 Manual reset differential pressure switch, 0.4" to 12" W.C. (99.3 to 2989 Pa), 24 VAC, SPDT
AFS-460-DSS* Manual reset differential pressure switch, 2" to 12" WC (498 to 2989 Pa), 2 SPST switches
* C models Kele calibration available
Select a mounting location that is free from vibration. The switch
must be mounted with the diaphragm in any vertical plane in
order to obtain the lowest specified operating setpoint. Avoid
mounting with the sample line connections in the up position.
Surf
ace mount via the two 3/16" diameter holes in the integral
mounting bracket
.
The Model AFS-460-DSS has a lead s
witch (A) and a lag switch
(B)
. The lead switch trips according to the setpoint knob and the
lag switch trips after the lead switch. If dual-switch simultaneous
operation is required, order AFS-460-136 (120 VAC power) or AFS-460-137 (24 VAC power)
.
Locate sampling probe a minimum of 1-1/2 duct diameters
downstream from the air source. Install the sampling probe as
close to the center of the airstream as possib
le
.
Refer to the Dimensions drawing to identify the high pres- sure inlet (A) and the low pressure inlet (B), and connect the sample lines as follows:
Positive Pressure Only
Connect the sample line to (A);
(B) remains open to the atmosphere.
Negative Pressure Only
Connect the sample line to (B);
(A) remains open to the atmosphere.
Two Negative Samples
Connect the higher negative sample to (B);
Connect the lower negative sample to (A).
Two Positive Samples
Connect the higher positive sample to (A);
Connect the lower positive sample to (B).
One Positive and One Negative Sample
Connect the positive sample to (A);
Connect the negative sample to (B).
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
21122 6" aluminum impact tube, 1/4" OD connection 1113
21122-112 6" aluminum impact tube for 1/8" thru 1/4" ID flexible plastic tubing 1113
60681 Static or total pressure sensing kit 1113
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-308-K Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901

1135. fifl−˚ 1073PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Mounting
The RH-3 and RH-3-2 may be used to sense pressure, vacuum, or differentials of pressure and vacuum. Using sheet metal
scre
ws, mount the control vertically on the duct or equipment
. Avoid areas of high vibration. Connect the 1/4" tubing to the air flow
switch using 1/4" compression fittings. Insert the other end of the tubing into area to be sensed. See ordering information for static
pressure tips and duct impact (total pressure) tubes for use with RH-3 and RH-3-2 switches.
Adjustment The adjusting scre
w located in the junction box may be used to change the operating point. The operating range is 0.05" to 12.0"
W.C. for the RH-3, and 0.05" to 2.0" W.C. for the RH-3-2. The differential is 0.02" rising to 0.8" at the highest setting. The switch will
operate at 0.05" and reset before 0.03" on the low end. It will operate at 12.0" and reset before 11.2" on the high end. Rotate the
adjusting scre
w clockwise to increase setting
.
Contact Rating 300 VA pilot duty @ 125-277 VAC,
15A resistive @ 125 VAC, 1/4 hp @ 125 VAC, 1/2 hp @ 250 VAC, 2
.4A @
24 VAC, 0.5A @ 24-125 VDC
Contact Type SPDT
Setpoint Range
RH-3 0.05" to 12.0" W.C. (12.5 to 2989 Pa)
RH-3-2 0.05" to 2.0" W.C. (12.5 to 498 Pa)
Differential 0.02" W.C. (5.0 Pa) @ minimum
setting, 0.8" W.C. (199 Pa) @
maximum setting
Overpressure 0.5 psig (3.5 kPa)
Operating Temperature -40° to 180°F (-40° to 82°C)
Mounting Any vertical plane
Process Connection 1/4" compression, suitable for use
with 1/4" OD copper or plastic tubing
Approvals UL listed, file #MH10196, CSA
Weight 2.0 lb (0.91 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
RH-3, RH-3-2
DESCRIPTION
The Columbus Electric Model RH-3 and RH-3-2 differential
pressure switches monitor low-air pressure, vacuum, or differentials of air pressure
. These switches are commonly
used to prove fan operation, to sense dirty filters, and to monitor pressure drop across coils
.
Models RH-3 and RH-3-2
are shipped with 1/4" compression
fittings, suitable for use with 1/4" OD copper or plastic tubing, and a 12" (30
.5 cm) length of 1/4" plastic tubing.
INSTALLATION
OPERATION When pressure is applied to the high side of the airflow switch or vacuum is applied to the low side, an internal diaphragm moves against and operates the lever of the snap-switch
.
When the airflo
w switch is at rest (not operating), the snap-
switch N
.C. (normally closed) contact is made to the common
terminal. When an increase in differential pressure operates
the snap-switch, the N.O. (normally open) contact is made
to the common terminal. The action of the diaphragm on
the snap-switch is the same whether pressure or vacuum is being sensed
. The wiring from the air sensing switch to other
devices depends upon the application.
SPECIFICATIONS
RH-3

1136. fifl˚
PRESSURE 1074fifl˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION

Two #6 sheet metal,
slotted pan head
(mounting screws
provided)
Scale plate
Junction box
and cover
6/32" Terminals
with screws and
cup washers
(Connector with nut and ferrule,
will accept 1/4" OD tubing of
copper, aluminum, or plastic - both
inlets, typical)
Low pressure inletHigh pressure inlet
Adjustment screw (turn clockwise
to increase setpoint)
0.78
(1.98)
0.71
(1.80)
3.38
(8.58)
0.44
(1.11)1.31
(3.33)
1.38
(3.50)
3.75
(9.53)
3/16" diameter
Two mounting
holes
3.88
(9.85)
1.94
(4.93)
2.81
(7.14)
in
(cm)
6.13
(15.7)
1.63
(4.10)
3.25
(8.25)
0.671
(1.70)
C
NO
NC
Contact
designations
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RH-3 0.05" to 12.0" W.C. (12.5 to 2989 Pa)
RH-3-C 0.05" to 12.0" W.C. (12.5 to 498 Pa) custom calibration
RH-3-2 0.05" to 2.0" W.C. (12.5 to 2989 Pa)
RH-3-2-C 0.05" to 2.0" W.C. (12.5 to 498 Pa) custom calibration
DIMENSIONS
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
RH-3, RH-3-2
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
21122 6" aluminum impact tube, 1/4" OD connection 1113
21122-112 6" aluminum impact tube for 1/8" thru 1/4" ID flexible plastic tubing 1113
60681 Static or total pressure sensing kit 1113
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901

1137. fifl−˚ 1075PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Contact Rating 1/10 hp @ 120-277 VAC; 28 VA pilot
duty @ 24 VAC; 125 VA pilot duty @
120 VAC
Contact Type SPDT
Setpoint Spring Range Black
0.10" to 0.30" W.C. (25 to 75 Pa)
Neutral 0.30" to 0.90" W.C. (75 to 224 Pa)
Yellow 0.90" to 2.50" W.C. (224 to 623 Pa)
Red 2.5" to 5.0" W.C. (623 to 1245 Pa)
Blue 5.0" to 10.0" W.C. (1245 to 2490 Pa)
Overpressure 14" W.C. (3486 Pa)
Life Expectancy 100,000 cycles minimum
Operating Temperature -40° to 190°F (-40° to 88°C)
Enclosure Glass-filled polycarbonate
Diaphragm Material Post-cured silicone
Process Connection 1/4" OD accepts 3/16" ID flexible
tubing
Wiring Terminations Male quick connect terminals
1/4" x 0.032
Approvals CE, CSA, UL Recognized File
MH6213
Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Warranty 1 year
ADJUSTABLE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH KIT
NS2-0000-02
Common
Normallyclosed
terminal
0.4 (10)
terminal
3.08
(78)
0.59 (15)
1.15 (29)
1.27 (32)
1.67 (42)
3.06 (78)
3.15 (80)
3.45 (88)
connector
Negativepressure
NS2-0001-00
DATECODE
Positive pressure
connector
Normallyopen
terminal
R
U
R
CUS
DESCRIPTION
The economical Cleveland Controls Model NS2 Adjustable
Differential Pressure Switch Kit is designed for positive,
negative, or differential pressure monitoring with actuation
on pressure rise or fall
. The set point range can be field
configured between 0.10"w.c. to 10.0"w.c. using the
appropr
iate spring included in the kit
. The kit includes a switch
with quick-connect terminals, 5 different springs to change the set point range, orifice plugs to restrict air flow, mounting brackets, a hex wrench, and instructions
.
FEATURES
• Five pressure ranges in one unit
• Field adjustable setpoint and setpoint range
• Actuated by pressure or vacuum
• SPDT switch
DIMENSIONS AND WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
NS2-0000-02 Adjustable differential pressure switch kit
NS2-0000-02

1138. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1076fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Contact Rating 300 VA pilot duty @ 115-277 VAC,
15A non-inductive to 277 VAC
Contact Type SPDT
Setpoint Range 0.15" to 5.0" W.C. (37.3 to 1245 Pa)
Differential Progressive, increasing from 0.05"
W.C. at minimum setpoint to 0.3"
W.C. at maximum setpoint
Overpressure 0.5 psig (3.5 kPa)
Life Expectancy 100,000 cycles minimum
Operating Temperature -40° to 180°F (-40° to 82°C)
Mounting Any vertical plane, avoid upward
pressure connections
Process Connection
RFS-4001-025 1/4" compression, suitable for use
with 1/4" copper or plastic tubing
RFS-4001-031 Tri-barb connectors for 1/8", 1/4"
and 5/16" ID tubing
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals with cup washers
Approvals UL File #MH6213, CSA
Weight 0.9 lb (0.4 kg)
Warranty 2 years
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
RFS-4001
4.625
(117)
3.75 (95)
4.125 (105)
1.00
(25)
4.098 (104)
1.365 (35)
2.959 (75)
0.798 (20)
0.173 (4)
1.421 (36)
LOW
HIGH
DESCRIPTION
The Cleveland Controls Models RFS-4001-025 and RFS- 4001-031 Differential Pressure Switches are general- purpose, airflow-proving switches designed for HVAC and building automation applications
. They may be used to sense
positive, negative, or differential air pressure.
The plated housing contains a diaphr
agm, calibration spring
and snap-acting switch
. The Model RFS-4001-025 pressure
connections located on each side of the diaphragm, accept copper or flexible 1/4" OD tubing
. The Model RFS- 4001-031
has tri-barb connectors that accept 1/8", 1/4", and 5/16" ID flexible tubing
. An enclosure cover guards against accidental
contact with the live-switch terminal screws and the setpoint- adjusting screw
. The enclosure will accept a 1/2" conduit
connection.
FEATURES
• T
• Adjustable setpoint
• Knockout for 1/2" conduit
• Enclosed terminals
• Compression or barb fittings
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-308-K Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
RFS-4001-031
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RFS-4001-025 Differential pressure switch 0.15" to 5.0" W.C., 1/4" compression fittings
RFS-4001-025-C Differential pressure switch 0.15" to 5.0" W.C., 1/4" compression fittings, custom calibrated
RFS-4001-031 Differential pressure switch 0.15" to 5.0" W.C., tri-barb fittings
RFS-4001-031-C Differential pressure switch 0.15" to 5.0" W.C., tri-barb fittings, custom calibrated
RFS-4001-092 Differential pressure switch

1139. fifl−˚ 1077PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
4.62 (11.7)
5.25 (13.3)
.070 Ø
(0.2)
4.0
(10.2)
2.13 (5.4)
0.25 (0.6)
Male disconnects
High pressure inlet Low pressure inlet
0.5 (1.3)
1.22 (3.1)
COM
NC
NO
3.75 (9.5)
4.12 (10.5)
Contact Rating 5A resistive, 120-277 VAC, 60 Hz;
1A pilot duty (120 VA) @ 120 VAC
Contact Type SPDT
Setpoint Range
RFS-495-011 0.20" to 1.0" W.C. (49 to 249 Pa)
RFS-495-013 1.0" to 4.0" W.C. (249 to 996 Pa)
Overpressure 1 psi (0.06 bar)
Life Expectancy 100,000 cycles minimum @ 1 psi
maximum each cycle and maximum rated load
Operating Temperature
-40° to 190°F (-40° to 88°C)
Diaphragm Material EPDM
Enclosure Thermoplastic
Process Connection Barbed fittings for 1/4" ID or
3/8" ID flexible tubing
Approvals UL recognized, file #MH6213,
CSA, CE
Weight 0.25 lbs (0.11 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The economical Cleveland Controls RSS Series Adjustable Differential Pressure Switches are designed for positive, negative, or differential pressure monitoring with actuation on pressure rise or fall
. The unit is constructed with a high
temperature thermoplastic housing, an internal EPDM diaphragm, and an externally mounted snap action switch
.
Male quic
k connect terminals allows easy installation
.
The field adjustability mak
es these switches ideal for light
industrial and commercial HVAC applications
.
FEATURES
• Adjustable set point
• Actuated by a pressure or vacuum air flow
• Quick connect terminals
• 5A, SPDT switch
DIMENSIONS
ADJUSTABLE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
RSS SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RSS-495-011 Adjustable differential pressure switch, 0.20" to 1.0" W.C. (49 to 249 Pa)
RSS-498-013 Adjustable differential pressure switch, 1.0" to 4.0" W.C. (249 to 996 Pa)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-308-K Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
RSS-495-011

1140. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1078fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Contact Rating 15A resistive, 277 VAC, 60 Hz; 300
VA pilot duty @ 115-277 VAC, 60
Hz
Contact Type Dual SPDT
Setpoint Range 0.05" to 2.0" W.C. (12.5 to 498Pa)
Differential Progressive, 0.02" W.C. (5.0 Pa) @
minimum setpoint to 0.8" W.C.
(199 Pa) @ maximum setpoint
Overpressure 0.5 psi (0.03 bar)
Life Expectancy 100,000 cycles minimum @ 1 psi
maximum each cycle and maximum rated load
Operating Temperature
-40° to 176°F (-40° to 82°C)
Enclosure Zinc-coated steel
Diaphragm Material Silicone
Mounting Diaphragm in vertical plane
Process Connection Compression fittings for 1/4" OD
rigid or semi-rigid tubing
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals with cup washers
Approvals CSA, UL Recognized File MH6213
Weight 1.5 lb (0.68 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Cleveland Controls Model DDP-109 Dual Setpoint Differential Pressure Switch provides dual switch action for HVAC and energy management applications
. Two separately
operated, independently adjustable SPDT snap-acting switches are mounted on a common foot bracket
. Since the
s
witches are set independently, an adjustable "deadband" can
be established for control circuits requiring both high and low actuation points. The unit can measure differential pressures
up to 2" W.C.
FEATURES
• Dual adjustable setpoints
• Independent switch operation
• Actuated by a pressure or vacuum air flow
• 15A SPDT switches
C
NOAlarm
Normal
Normal
Alarm
NC
NO
NC
C
To prove excessive air flow or pressure:
To prove insufficient air flow or pressure:
WIRING
DUAL SETPOINT DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
DDP-109
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DDP-109 Dual setpoint differential pressure switch, 0.05" to 2.0" W.C. (12.5 to 498 Pa)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
DDP-109

1141. fifl−˚ 1079PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Contact Rating 15A resistive to 277 VAC, 60 Hz
300 VA pilot duty @ 115-270 VAC
15A resistive to 277 VAC, 60 Hz
300 VA pilot duty @ 115-270 VAC
Contact Type SPDT
Setpoints Fixed, 0.05" W.C. (12.5 Pa), ±0.02"
W.C.
Differential 0.02" W.C., ±0.01" W.C.
Overpressure 0.5 psi (3.5 kPa bar)
Life Expectancy 100,000 cycles minimum @ 0.5 psi
maximum each cycle and maximum
rated load
Operating Temperature -40° to 180°F (-40° to 82°C)
Mounting Diaphram in vertical plane to obtain
operating set point
Process Connection Barbed fittings for 1/4" ID flexible
tubing
Wiring Terminations Male quick connect terminals
Approvals CE, CSA, FM, UL Recognized
File MH6213
Weight 1.2 lbs (0.5 kg)
Warranty 2 years
FIXED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
DFS-221
3.25 (8.2) 2.94 (7.4)
1.38
(3.5)
0.44
(1.1)
0.78
(1.9)
0.71
(1.8)
1.63
(4.1)
2.84
(7.1)
6.12
(15.6)
3.88 (9.8)
1.94 (4.9)
4.38 (11.1)
0.19 (5)
dia hole
(2 places)
High
pressure
inlet
Low
pressure
inlet
COM N.O. N.C.
DESCRIPTION
The Cleveland Controls Model DFS-221 Fixed Differential
Pressure Switch is an airflow proving switch designed for
duct heater, oven, and other HVAC and energy management
applications
. The unit senses positive, negative, or differential
pressure with SPDT switch actuation on pressure rise at 0.05
WC, ±0.02 WC. The model DFS-221 is equipped with two
barbed sample line connections for use with ID flexible tubing.
Electr
ical connections are made via male quick connect
terminals for easy installation
.
FEATURES
• Fix •
Prove excessive or insufficient pressure
• Quick connect terminals
• 15A, SPDT switch
C
NOAlarm
Normal
Normal
Alarm
NC
NO
NC
C
To prove excessive air flow or pressure:
To prove insufficient air flow or pressure:
WIRING
FM
APPROVED
USC
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DFS-221 Fixed differential pressure switch, 0.05" W.C. (12.5 Pa)
DFS-221

1142. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1080fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Contact Type SPDT
Contact 15A @ 120-240 VAC
Operating Temperature -30° to 180°F (-34° to 82°C)
Process Connection 1/8" FNPT
Dimensions

3-1/2" diameter x 2-11/32" depth
(8.9 x 3.4 cm)
Weight 1.28 lb (0.58 kg)
Approvals UL File #E38121
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
1910 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Dwyer 1910 Series Differential Pressure Switches are
designed to monitor the differential pressure of air in HVAC
applications
. These automatic reset switches are available in ranges
from 0.07" to 20" W.C. (17.4 to 4982.0 Pa) and have SPDT screw
type electrical connections. The optional Model A-602 air filter kit
includes two static pressure tips, aluminum tubing, and fittings, and it allows the 1910 Series to monitor filter pressure drop
.
SPECIFICATIONS 1910-5
DESCRIPTION
The Dwyer Model 1900-5-MR Manual Reset Pressure Switch is designed to monitor duct static and shut down the blower when excess pressure occurs
. The switch must be manually reset before
the system can start again. Switch contacts are SPDT with solder-
type
connections
. The Model 1900-5-MR measures static pressure
only, not differential pressure. Order the A-399 duct pressure kit
separ
ately
.
MANUAL RESET PRESSURE SWITCH
1900-5-MR
ORDERING INFORMATION
1900-5-MR
RELATED PRODUCTS
A-399 Duct pressure kit for Series 1910 and 1900-5-MR, includes mounting flange, tubing, and 1/8" FNPT fitting.
FM
APPROVED
USC
Contact Type SPDT
Operating T
emperature
-30° to 180°F (-39° to 82°C)
Pr
ocess Connection
1.8" FNPT
Dimensions 3-1/2" dia x 2-11/32" depth
(8.9 x 6.4 cm)
Weight 1.3 lb (0.58 kg)
SPECIFICATIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
A-602 Mounting kit for air filter applications. Includes two pressure tips, two
5-foot lengths of aluminum tubing and two adapters.
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
MODEL DESCRIPTION
1910-0 Pressure Switch 0.15 to 0.50 "WC
1910-00 Pressure Switch 0.07 to 0.015 "WC
1910-1 Pressure Switch 0.4 to 1.6 "WC
1910-10 Pressure Switch 3.0 to 11.0 "WC
1910-5 Pressure Switch 1.4 to 5.5 "WC
1910-20 Low differential pressure switch
*NOTE: Add a "-C" at the end of the model
number to request special calibration
MODEL DESCRIPTION
1900-5-MR Manual reset pressure switch, 1.5-5.5" W.C.
1900-5-MR-C Manual reset pressure switch, 1.5-5.5" W.C. with custom calibration
1900-1-MR Manual reset pressure switch, 0.4-1.6" WC
1900-10-MR Manual reset pressure switch, 3-11" WC
*NOTE: Add a "-C" at the end of the model number to request special calibration

1143. fifl−˚ 1081PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Overpressure 1 psig (6.9 kPa)
Indicator Yes, visual scale
Electrical Ratings
P32AF Close differential, 1/4 hp
P32AC Standard differential, 1/2 hp
Operating Temperature -40°F (-40°C) to 165°F (75°C)
Mounting P32AX-1
L Bracket
P32AX-2 U Bracket
Process Connection High pressure: metal 1/8" FNPT
inside x 1/2" NPSM outside; low pressure: molded 1/8" FNPT
Approvals
UL Listed, file MH10588
Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg); 1.1 lb (0.5 kg)
with fittings
Warranty 1 year
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
P32 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Johnson Controls P32 Series Differential Pressure
Switch is used to detect differential pressure or low positive
gauge pressure by using only the high pressure connection
and leaving the low pressure connector open
. It can also
detect v
acuum by using only the low pressure connection
and leaving the high pressure connector open to ambient pressure.
The P32 Series is factory set at the bottom of its operating
range with the diaphragm in a vertical plane. The setting will
change if mounted in other positions.
The P32AF has a close differential, and the P32AC has a
standard differential.
FEATURES
• Easy-to-read setpoint scale
• Versatile mounting options
• Durable construction
• Setpoint switching repeatability
• One-year warranty
APPLICATION
• Air pr
and more
• Maximum air flow controller for variable volume
systems
• Reheat duct-powered systems
• Clogged filter detection
• Detection of icing of air conditioning coils and
initiation of defr
ost cycle
SPECIFICATIONS
P32 Switch with L Bracket
ORDERING INFORMATION
Specify model number as shown in specifications above.
Motor Ratings VAC
AC full load amp
AC locked rotor amp
120
5.8
34.8
Pilot duty - 125 VA, 24 VAC; 360 VA, 120-277 VAC Pilot duty - 125 VA, 24 VAC; 360 VA, 120-277 VAC
Non-inductive or resistive load 10A, 24-277 VAC Non-inductive or Resistive Load 10A, 24-277 VAC
208
3.35
20.1
240
2.9
17.4
Motor Ratings VAC
AC full load amp
AC locked rotor amp
120
9.8
58.8
208
5.65 33.9
240
4.9
29.4
Model
P32AC-1 P32AC-2* P32AF-1 P32AF-2*
Contact
Action
SPDT SPDT SPDT SPDT
Setpoint
Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable
Bracket
L
U
L
U
Scale
Plate
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Differential
"W.C. (Pa)
*Supplied with 1/4" compression fitting, 4" extension tube, two mounting screws, gasket, angle barb fitting installed
Minimum Setpoint
0.07 (17.4) 0.04 (10.0) 0.025 (6.2) 0.025 (6.2)
Maximum Setpoint
0.6 (149.5) 0.20 (49.8) 0.11 (27.4) 0.11 (27.4)
Range
"W.C. (Pa)
0.15-12 (37.4-2990)
0.05-5 (12.5-1246) 0.05-5 (12.5-1246) 0.05-5 (12.5-1246)
Y
B
R
P32 Series
Action on increase
of pressure
RELATED PRODUCTS
FTG-18A-600R Sensing tube kit

1144. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1082fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Contact Rating 2.0 A @ 250 VAC
(with inductive load)
Contact Type SPDT
Differential
A2G40-S00-7C-EH 0.04" W.C. (10 Pa)
A2G40-S00-7C-EI/EJ 0.08" W.C. (20 Pa)
A2G40-S00-7C-EK 0.12" W.C. (30 Pa)
A2G40-S00-7C-EL 0.30" W.C. (80 Pa)
A2G40-S00-7C-EM 0.70" W.C. (180 Pa)
Operating Pressure 200" W.C. (49.8 kPa)
Measurement Range
A2G40-S00-7C-EH .08 to .80" W.C. (20 to 200 Pa)
A2G40-S00-7C-EI 0.12 to 1.2" W.C. (30 to 300 Pa)
A2G40-S00-7C-EJ 0.12 to 2.0" W.C. (30 to 500 Pa)
A2G40-S00-7C-EK 0.16 to 2.4" W.C. (40 to 600 Pa)
A2G40-S00-7C-EL 0.40 to 6.0" W.C. (100 to 1500 Pa)
A2G40-S00-7C-EM 2.0 to 18.0" W.C. (500 to 4500 Pa)
Media Compatibility air and other non-combustible gases
Operating Temperature -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Mounting Enclosure positioned in any vertical
plane
Enclosure NEMA 3
Process Connection Hose barb nozzles (ABS) for
3
/
16
"
and
1
/
4
" hose ID
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals, PG-gland M16
Approvals CE, IP54 NEMA 3
Weight 0.3 lb (0.15 kg)
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The Wika A2G-40 Series differential pressure switch is
useful for DP and clogged filter monitor across filter banks;
overpressure detection in rooms; and air flow proving
for direct fire AHU's or duct heaters
. The clearly visible
adjustment knob makes it easy to set the switchpoint without tools
. This SPDT switch can be set up as a N.O. or N.C.
contact. It features a robust housing in a compact design.
FEATURES
• Adjustment knob enables easy switch point setting
• Switch can be set up as N.O. or N.C.
• Compact size
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
A2G-40 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
A2G-40
Micro Switch
One (1) SPDT (single pole double throw)
1-3 opens / 1-2 cloese on reaching the set point
(differential pressure)
WIRING

1145. fifl˚ 1083PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A2G40-S00-7C-EH Differential pressure switch, .08 to .8 in WC
A2G40-S00-7C-EI Differential pressure switch, 0.12 to 1.2 in WC
A2G40-S00-7C-EJ Differential pressure switch, 0.12 to 2.0 in WC
A2G40-S00-7C-EK Differential pressure switch, 0.16 to 2.4 in WC
A2G40-S00-7C-EL Differential pressure switch, 0.40 to 6.0 in WC
A2G40-S00-7C-EM Differential pressure switch, 2.0 to 18.0 in WC
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
A-308-K Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
A2G-40 SERIES
DIMENSIONS

1146. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1084fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
P10BC, P10FC
Electrical ratings
Motor ratings VAC
AC full load amp
AC locked rotor amp
Non-inductive amp
Model
P10BC-7
P10FC-4
P10BG-3
Number
of
stages
1
2
1
120
16.0
96.0
16.0
Pilot duty - 125 VA @ 24-277 VAC
208
9.2
55.2
9.2
240
8.0
48.0
8.0
277
7.0
42.0
7.2
P10BG
Maximum Allowable Pressure: 150 psig (1034 kPa)
Motor Ratings VAC
AC full load amp
AC locked rotor amp
Non-inductive amp
120
6.0
36.0
6.0
Pilot duty - 125 VA @ 24-277 VAC208
3.4
20.4
3.4
240
3.0
18.0
3.0
277
__
__
2.6
Contact
action
SPDT
2-SPDT
SPDT
Pressure
connector
NPT*
1/8"
1/8"
1/8"
Weight
lb
(kg)
1.0 (0.45)
1.5 (0.68)
1.0 (0.45)
Factory setting
*Includes 1/4" barb fitting installed
psig
(kPa)
12 (83) (R-Y cut-in)
12 (83)
(R-Y cut-in)
(R-Y cut-out)
Low stage
8 (55)
(R-Y cut-in)
High stage
12 (82)
Switch Diff
psig (kPa)
2 (14)
0.2 (1.4)
Low
stage
2 (14)
High
stage
2 (14)
Range
psig
(kPa)
3-20
(21-138)
2-20
(15-138)
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The Johnson Controls P10 Series Pressure Switches use
changes in control air pressure to open or close an electrical
circuit
. The common terminal is red. The red-to-yellow
terminals close an electrical circuit on a rise in pressure; the red-to-blue terminals close a circuit on a drop in pressure
.
FEATURES
• Easil •
Snap-acting contacts in a dust-tight enclosure
• Visible calibration scale
• Field adjustment possible with cover on or removed
• Gas and oil resistant nylon-reinforced diaphragm
• One-year warranty
• Approvals UL File E6688 and CS LR948
B
Y
R
Action on increase
of pressure
WIRING
APPLICATION
Typical applications include pressure-electric switches in pneumatic systems, control of pumps or small air compressors, and pressure-electric interlock of fluid flow systems
.
Specify model number as shown in specifications above.
PRESSURE SWITCH
P10 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
P10BC-7

1147. fifl−˚ 1085PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Contact Rating 5A resistive and inductive @
125 VAC and 250 VAC, 1/4 hp
5A resistive and 3A inductive @
30 VDC
0.5A resistive and 0.25A inductive @
125 VDC
gold clad silver contacts for minimum
loads of 5 mA @ 6 VDC, 2 mA @
12 VDC, and 1 mA @ 24 VDC
Contact Type SPDT
Adjustments Multiturn screw, accessible from
outside enclosure
Repeatability Typically ±1% of span
Overpressure 150 psid (1034.3 kPa) with surges
up to 160°F (71°C) air temp, without
loss of adjustability
Operating Pressure 0-150 psig (0-1034.3 kPa) up to
160°F (71°C) air temp
Life Expectancy 10 million cycles (actual life depends
on load and cycle frequency)
Shock 15G, 10 ms duration
Vibration Resistance MIL STD 810C, 2.5G, 5-500 CPS
Operating Temperature 30° to 160°F (-1° to 71°C)
Wetted Parts Polyurethane diaphragm, ethylene
propylene, polysulphone, brass
Media Temperature Range
200°F (93°C) @ 100 psig (689.5
kPa) working pressure
Storage Temperature -20° to 180°F (-29° to 82°C)
Enclosure Rating Reinforced nylon body, zinc-plated
steel cover with neoprene gasket, NEMA 4
Mounting
Surface mount with two screws
through clearance holes or mount by ports
Process Connection
1/4" FNPT brass
Wiring Terminations 7/8" hole for 1/2" conduit connector
(not provided), three screw terminals 16 AWG max wire size
Approvals
UL File E42272, CSA, CE
Weight 0.4 lb (0.18 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
24-013, 24-014
DESCRIPTION
The Delta-Pro Models 24-013 and 24-014 NEMA 4 Differential Pressure Switches offer a unique blend of small size, excellent performance, environmental protection, and attractive price
. They can be used with liquids or gases.
The precision snap-acting s
witch and sensitive opposing
diaphragms combine to provide a narrow deadband and repeatability of approximately ±1% of span
. Mechanical
contact lif
e is 10 million cycles, and actual switch life can be
very long with typical pilot duty loads
. The Delta-Pro NEMA
4 enclosure is small, yet it can still accommodate a 1/2" NPT conduit connection and terminal block wiring
.
The Delta-Pro is not only lightw
eight but also strong and
durable
. The multiturn adjustment screw is externally
accessible for convenience and excellent resolution. The
Delta-Pro's force-balance design provides excellent vibration resistance
.
FEATURES
• SPDT s •
Gasketed zinc-plated steel cover
• Strong, corrosion-resistant polyester enclosure
• External, multiturn adjusting screw for excellent
resolution
• 7/8" hole for 1/2" NPT conduit connection
• Corrosion-resistant brass port
• Front accessible holes for surface mounting
• NEMA 4 enclosure
APPLICATION
Models 24-013 and 24-014 are used typically to sense differential pressure across devices such as oil or water filters, pumps, heat exchangers, chillers, coils, etc
.
The
y normally provide an alarm or shutdown function in
applications where there is insufficient flow in a system or when excessive pressure differential indicates a problem.
The
y may also be used to indicate pump status
.
SPECIFICATIONS
24-013

1148. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1086fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
MODEL*
24-013
24-014
PORT
1/4 FNPT
Brass
SWITCH
5A
5A
DEADBAND
0.75 (5.2)
1.0 (6.9)
ADJUSTABLE SETTING RANGE psid (kPa)
Minimum
1.0 (6.895 kPa)
4.0 (27.6 kPa)
9.0 (62.1 kPa)
43.5 (299.9 kPa)
Maximum
On fall
* Add the suffix -C to ha ve the unit precalibrated. Please specify the setpoint.
Minimum
2.0 (13.8 kPa) 5.5 (37.9 kPa)
10.0 (69.0 kPa)
45.0 (310.3 kPa)
Maximum psig (kPa)On rise
NC NO COM
3.5
(8.89)
Clear
for #6
screw
1.84
(4.68)
0.875
dia
0.91 (2.31)
2.65 (6.75)
2.37
(6.03)
Setting
adjustment
2.0 (5.08)
3.13 (7.94)
in
(cm)
2.375
(6.03)
Top View
Factory adjustment only, do not change
INSTALLATION
DIMENSIONS
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
24-013, 24-014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
24-013 Differential pressure switch 1-10 psi SPDT
24-013-C Differential pressure switch 1-10 psi SPDT, custom calibrated
24-014 Differential pressure switch 4-45 psi SPDT
24-014-C Differential pressure switch 4-45 psi SPDT, custom calibrated
24-020 Differential pressure switch 1-10 psi SPDT
PERFORMANCE CHART
Mounting
Mount unit in any position. Locate where shock and vibration
are minimal and ambient temperature is below 160°F (71°C).
Surface mounting Inser
t two #6 screws through holes on 2" (5.08 cm) centers
(recommended mounting for maximum vibration resistance).
Suspended unit mounting Mount unit from its tw
o ports. Always hold a wrench on the
pressure port when making pressure connection.
Making pressure connection Connect the high side pressure to the por
t labeled high
. Use
a wrench on the pressure por
t and hold the unit steady
. Then,
thread a 1/4 NPTM fitting into the port.
Wiring Back out the screw terminal just enough to put stripped wire under this terminal block clamp
. Maximum wire size is 16 AWG.
Setpoint adjustment Use a scre
wdriver to turn the external adjusting screw. Turn “in”
(clockwise) to increase differential pressure setting. For best
setting accuracy, set the switch using the actual working pres- sures encountered in the application
. The switch will make on
a differential pressure rise to setpoint and break on a fall below setpoint minus the deadband (subtractive deadband)
.
CAUTION:
Never tighten by turning the switch body
into the fitting.

1149. fifl−˚ 1087PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
These differential pressure controls are used as operating controls and/or alarm controls. They are available for
applications sensing air, oil, or liquid. Typical applications include proof-of-flow across a chiller or water-cooled
condenser, proof-of-flow in a heating system, and lube oil pressure sensing on refrigeration compressors. In the
w
ater chiller application, the control provides low temperature protection
. On proof-of-flow applications, the control
measures pressure drop across two different points in either a closed water circulating system or a city water supply
system. On a proof-of-flow application in a water chiller system, the control activates an alarm or signal light to warn
the operator if a loss of water flow occurs.

DESCRIPTION
The Johnson Controls Model P74 Differential Pressure Switch measures the difference in pressure exerted upon its two sensing elements and operates an SPDT switch at the differential pressure setpoint
. The setpoint may be adjusted
without removing the cover and is visible on a calibrated scale
.
FEATURES
• Brass bellows
• Completely enclosed contact mechanism
• Externally adjustable with visual setpoint scale
• Universal mounting bracket supplied
• Heavy-duty elements withstand high overrun pressure
• For air, oil, or other liquids
• One-year warranty
APPLICATIONS
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
P74 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
P74FA-1C
ORDERING INFORMATION
Specify model number as shown in specifications above.
Model*
P74FA-1
P74FA-5
P74JA-2
P74EA-8
Pressure
differential range
psid (kPa)
FAIC
8-60
(55-414)
2-30
(14-207)
Switch
differential
psig (kPa)
1.5
(10)
3.5
(24)
Maximum
overrun pressure
psig (kPa)
180
(1241)
Connector
size
1/4" male
flare
1/4" FNPT
1/4" male
flare
36" capillary
with 1/4" flare
nut
Switch
action
SPDT
snap-acting
SPDT
snap-acting
SPDT
floating
SPDT
snap-acting
Electrical
rating
6A
120V, 50/60 Hz
6A
120V, 50/60 Hz
1A
24V, 50/60 Hz
16A
120V, 50/60 Hz

1150. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1088fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Setpoint Range
J21K-140 0 to 6 psi (0 to 41 kPa)
J21K-150 0 to 40 psi (0 to 276 kPa)
J21K-232 0 to 25 psi (0 to 172 kPa)
J21K-254 0 to 90 psi (0 to 621 kPa)
J21K-357 0 to 70 psi (0 to 483 kPa)
Operating Pressure
J21K-140 30" Hg vac to 30 psi (1241 kPa)
J21K-150 30" Hg vac to 180 psi (1241 kPa)
J21K-232 30" Hg vac to 110 psi (759 kPa)
J21K-254 30" Hg vac to 120 psi (828 kPa)
J21K-357 30" Hg vac to 350 psi (2413 kPa)
Contact Rating 15A resistive, 125/250/480 VAC
Contact Type SPDT
Deadband
J21K-140 0.1 to 0.4 psi (0.7 to 3 kPa)
J21K-150 0.3 to 0.7 psi (2 to 5 kPa)
J21K-232 0.6 to 1 psi (4 to 7 kPa)
J21K-254 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa)
J21K-357 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa)
Operating Temperature -40° to 160°F (-40° to 71°C)
Wetted Parts Brass or phosphor bronze bellows
Process Connection 1/4 NPTF
Enclosure Type 4X (with water tight conduit
fitting)
Approvals UL listed, file #E42272, CE
Weight 2 lb (0.9 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
J21K SERIES
1.06 (1.7)
4.22 (10.7)
1.73
(4.4)
0.33 (0.8)
0.56 (1.4)
1.88
(4.8)
.875 (1.2)
diameter hole
1.25
(3.2)
Clearance for
1/4 screw
A
2.66 (6.8)
DESCRIPTION
The United Electric J21K Series Differential Pressure Switches utilize opposing metal bellows to detect pressure differences between two pressure sources
. When the
pressure at the high port exceeds the pressure at the low port by a pre-determined amount (setpoint), the mechanism operates a single snap-action switch
. The control setpoint can
be adjusted by turning the internal adjustment hex screw.
FEATURES
• Adjustable setpoint
• Sealed metal bellows
• 15A switch rating
• Epoxy coated enclosure
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
J21K
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
J21K-140 Differential pressure switch, brass bellows, 0 to 6 psi (0 to 41 kPa)
J21K-150 Differential pressure switch, brass bellows, 0 to 40 psi (0 to 276 kPa)
J21K-232 Differential pressure switch, bronze bellows, 0 to 25 psi (0 to 172 kPa)
J21K-254 Differential pressure switch, bronze bellows, 0 to 90 psi (0 to 621 kPa)
J21K-357 Differential pressure switch, stainless steel bellows, 0 to 70 psi (0 to 483 kPa)
"A" Dimension
J21K-140/150 8.0" (20.5 cm)
J21K-232/254 6.5" (16.6cm)
K21K-357 6.875" (17.46 cm)

1151. fifl−˚ 1089PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 9.6 to 32 VDC, <25mA
Contact Rating 0.5A DC PNP (sourcing)
Contact Type 1 NO, 1 NC, open collector transistor
Accuracy <±2.5% of full scale
Repeatability <±0.5% of full scale
Measurement Range
PK6224 0 to 145 psi
PK6222 0 to 1450 psi
PK6220 0 to 5800 psi
Life Expectancy 50 million switching cycles
Visual Indication Power Green LED Switching status
Yellow LED (Energized = Switched)
Shock 50g (11ms)
Operating Temperature -13° to 176°F (-25° to 80°C)
Wetted Parts Stainless 316L
Media Temperature Range
-13° to 176°F (-25° to 80°C)
Enclosure Rating IP67, PBT (Pocan); PC (Makrolon);
FPM (Viton); stainless steel 316L
Process Connection ¼" NPT
Wiring Terminations 4 pin M12 Electrical connector
(order separately)
Dimensions 1.06" diameter x 2.78"H
(2.7 x 7.06 cm)
Approvals UL File E174189, CE
Weight 0.2 lb (0.091 kg)
Warranty 2 years
PRESSURE SWITCH
PK SERIES
1.06 (2.7)
2.7
1/4'' NPT
M12x1
0.51
(1.3)
0.30 (0.75)
2.39 (6.1)
2.78 (7.1)
1
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The IFM Efector PK Series is a low cost series of pressure
switches. Each switch uniquely features a set of two radial
dials for set point and reset. The PK Series has one normally
open and normally closed contact and a green LED for power indication and a yellow LED for switching status
. Each
s
witch carries an IP67 rating for protection for the harshest of
environments
. The PK Series is available in three models that
will switch on pressures ranges up to 5800 psi.
FEATURES
• T •
Solid state electronics
• Two PNP switching outputs (1-NO, 1-NC)
• No software needed
• Local LEDs for power and switching status
4
12
3
1: V+ 2: Switched output NC 4: Switched output NO 3: V- (Blue) common
4: 2:
1
2
4
3
V+
V-
Switched output NC
Switched output NO
Black
Blue
Brown
White
3 3
WIRINGDIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
PK Series

1152. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1090fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
SETTING / CONNECTION DIAGRAM
PRESSURE SWITCH
PK SERIES
3: A green LED inidcates power on and supply voltage normal
4: Process connection ¼” NPT; tightening torque 25 Nm
5: Setting marks
6: Yellow LED: Set value reached, OUT1 = ON / OUT2 = OFF
7: internal thread M5
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PK6220 PK Series pressure switch, 0 to 5800 psi, 1 NO 1 NC contacts
PK6222 PK Series pressure switch, 0 to 1450 psi, 1 NO 1 NC contacts
PK6224 PK Series pressure switch, 0 to 145 psi, 1 NO 1 NC contacts
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Set
Reset
12
34
pnp
500mA
500mA
pnp
9.6 to
32 VDC
1:
Loc
locking ring (1) to the unlocked position
2: Set and Reset Rings: Set rings to desrired "Set" and
"Reset" positions
a) Minimum distance between Set and Reset = 2% of the
final value of the measuring range.
b) To obtain the setting accuracy: Set the rings to the
minimum value, then set the requested value.
RELATED PRODUCTS
EVC001 6’ foot straight connector
EVC002 15’ straight connector
EVC003 30’ straight connector
EVC004 6’ right-angled connector
EVC005 15’ right-angled connector
EVC006 30’ right-angled connector
EVC008 15’ right angled connector with LED indication
EVC009 30’ right angled connector with LED indication
E30094 PK Series protective cover

1153. fifl−˚ 1091PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Setpoint Range
J54-24 3 to 30 psi (21 to 207 kPa)
J54-25 10 to 100 psi (69 to 690 kPa)
J54-27 30 to 300 psi (207 to 2070 kPa)
J54-28 50 to 500 psi (345 to 3448 kPa)
Deadband
J54-24 0.4 to 1.5 psi (3 to 10 kPa)
J54-25 1 to 2.5 psi (7 to 17 kPa)
J54-27 1.3 to 4 psi (9 to 28 kPa)
J54-28 1.5 to 5 psi (10 to 34 kPa)
Contact Rating 15A non-inductive, 125/250/480
VAC, 60 Hz
Contact Type SPDT
Overpressure 200 psi (1379 kPa) above setpoint,
maximum 600 psi (4137 kPa)
Operating Temperature 0° to 160°F (-18° to 71°C)
Wetted Parts Buna-N diaphragm and O-ring,
aluminum
Process Connection 1/4" MNPT
Approvals UL listed E42272, CE
Weight 0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Warranty 1 year
3.5 (8.9)
1.9
(4.9)
1.7
(4.2)
NC NO Common
#6-32 Terminal
screw7/8 Diameter hole
electrical connection
0.69 (1.8)
Adjustment: remove
plastic cover and turn
adjusting screw in for
higher pressure setting
0.63
(1.6)
Wrench flats
1/4 MNPT
4.38
(11.1)
1.69
(4.3)
0.88
(2.2)
1.75
(4.4)
1.4
(3.6)
2.8
(7.1)
DESCRIPTION
The United Electric J54 Series Pressure Switch uses a diaphragm to sense changes in pressure to open or close an electrical circuit
. The control setpoint can be varied by turning
the internal adjustment hex screw. The switch is available with
adjustable ranges from 3 psi (21kPa) to 500 psi (3448 kPa).
FEATURES
• Lo •
NEMA 1 enclosure
• Compact size
• 15A SPDT switch
DIMENSIONS
PRESSURE SWITCH
J54 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
J54 Series
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
J54-24 Pressure switch, 3 to 30 psi (21 to 207 kPa)
J54-25 Pressure switch, 10 to 100 psi (69 to 690 kPa)
J54-27 Pressure switch, 30 to 300 psi (207 to 2070 kPa)
J54-28 Pressure switch, 50 to 500 psi (345 to 3448 kPa)

1154. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1092fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VDC +15%, -10%
Supply Current 75 mA max
Signal Output 4-20 mA sourcing
Maximum Output
Impedance 650Ω max
Local Setpoint Input Built-in three-wire potentiometer
Remote Setpoint Input 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC
Accuracy ±2% of range including non-linearity
and hysteresis
Maximum Overpressure 800% of the pressure range
Resolution 255 steps
Operating Humidity 0% to 90% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 125°F (0° to 52°C)
Process Connection 3/16" dia suitable for 1/4" OD
polyethylene tubing
Approvals RoHS
Weight 1.3 lb (0.61 kg)
Warranty 18 months
PRESSURE CONTROLLER
PCM SERIES
1.5
(3.81)
4.8
(12.19)
2.9
(7.37)
4.0
(10.16)
3.4
(8.64)
0.7
(1.78)
4.6
(11.68)
2.0
(5.08)
2.75
(6.99)
Mounting Slots
for optional
DIN Rail
Adapter

Setpoint Knob
High Pressure Po rt
Low Pressure Po rt
Pressure Po rts
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The Kele PCM Series Pressure Controller is a low air pressure transducer combined with a microprocessor-based proportional or Proportional plus Integral (PI) controller
.
The compact siz
e and ease of installation and setup makes
this unit ideal for standard HVAC applications
. Ranges are
a
vailable from 0-2, 3, or 5 "W
.C. The setpoint adjustment
knob is clearly marked with the appropriate scale for ease of use
. All setup and tuning is easily accomplished by DIP
switches and bottle plug jumpers. Mounting is a snap with
the con
venient mounting tabs or with the DIN rail mounting
option
. Remote setpoint is also possible with voltage or
milliamp signals. The PCM Series can be configured for direct
or reverse acting control.
FEATURES
• Pr •
Easy setup
• DIP switch/jumper setup and tuning
• Selectable proportional band
• Selectable integral reset rate
• Direct or reverse acting
• Optional DIN rail mounting
• Compact size
• Position insensitive
APPLICATION
• Contr •
Isolation rooms
• VAV systems
• Inlet guide vanes and VFDs
• Paint booths
• Relief damper control
• Pressure bypass damper control
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS

1155. fifl−˚ 1093PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
1. Switch A1 off and switch A2 on.
2. Set jumper positions to 1, 8, and 11.
3. Set switch A3 in the on position for direct acting control and in the off
position for reverse acting control.
4. Set switches A4 and A5 in the off position.
5. Set switches A6, A7, and A8 in the on position. This will set the
proportional band at 100%.
6. Set all B switches to the off position.
7. All systems will require a fine-tuning process. Start the tuning
process by decreasing the proportional band in increments through
switches A6 through A8 until the system becomes unstable. Then,
return to the DIP switch settings before the system started to hunt.
8. Switches A4 and A5 are used to select the integral reset rate. This
feature corrects the offset that is inherent with proportional-only controllers
. If it is determined that the integral reset is needed,
increase the rate until this offset is corrected and still maintains stability
.
A6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
A7 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
A8 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
A4 0 0 1 1
A5 0 1 0 1 PWM
INPUT
PWM
INPUT
REM SPT
INPUT
LOC SPT
POT +
LOC SPT
INPUT
LOC SPT
POT –
FEEDBK
INPUT
24 PWR
COMMON
MA SIG
OUTPUT
LOCAL SETPOINT
FEEDBACKREMOTE SETPOINT
B
A
123456 78
123456 78
4-20 mA Sourcing Output Signal to
Controlled Device
–
+
PCM DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
1=ON 0=OFF
PCM JUMPER POSITIONS
A1 0 1
A2 1 0
Local Setpoint Remote Setpoint
A3 0 1
Reverse Acting Direct Acting
Reset Per Minute Rate
Proportional Throttling Range Settings
Off 0.5 1.0 2.0
This Unit’s
Range Is:
0-2" W.C.
0-3" W.C.
0-5" W.C.
10% 20% 35% 50% 65% 80% 90% 100%
All B sw itches should be in the off position
Local Setpoint Jumper Positions 1, 8, 11
For Remote Setpoint:
Voltage Input Jumper Positions 2, 8, 11
Current Input Jumper Positions 1, 8, 11
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
–
+24 VDC Po wer
11
12
Remote Setpoint Input 4-20 mA or 1-5V
Remote Setpoint
+
–
Common
Optional Remote Setpoint Wiring
4-20 mA or 1-5 VDC
WIRING
SETUP FOR LOCAL SETPOINT OPERATION (FACTORY SETTINGS)
PRESSURE CONTROLLER
PCM SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
PCM
— 47020
— Example: PCM-020-47 Pressure controller for a
0-2" W.C. range with DIN rail mounting
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PCM Pressure setpoint controller
PRESSURE RANGE
020 0-2" W.C.
030 0-3" W.C.
050 0-5" W.C.
OPTIONS
47 DIN rail mounting (must be factory installed)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-308-K Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-I Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
SD-01 Surge dampener 1113
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901

1156. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1094fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Supply Voltage 18-32 VAC, 50-60HZ
Supply Watts 10 W
Signal Output BACnet MS/TP ASC
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (Non-condensing)
Operating Temperature 32° to 120°F (0° to 50°C)
Enclosure Rating Fire retardant plastic UL94V-0
Wiring Terminations Removable terminal block
Dimensions 5.84"H x 7.45"W x 2.38"D
(14.8 x 18.9 x 6.05 cm)
Approvals RoHS
Weight 1.1 lb (0.51 kg)
Warranty 1 year
MULTI-ROOM MONITORING STATION
MRMS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Setra Multi-Room Monitoring Station (MRMS)
is a remote monitoring device to view the status of up
to 8-Rooms equipped with other Setra Room Pressure/
Condition Monitors
.
FEATURES
• Remotel •
Auto-discover setra room pressure/condition
monitors
• Built-in audible & visual alarm
• Display room status and room condition
• Flush mount design
• Reduce total installation cost
• BACnet
®
MS/TP protocol
•
High definition color (TFT) touchscreen display
Rear view of the MRMS monitor to show wiring and plumbing connections
The back of the MRMS has electrical connectors labeled with their function. The
mating electrical connectors (supplied) are color coded, keyed, and labeled with
the matching function.
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MRMSS Multi-room monitoring station with logo on face plate
MRMSB Multi-room monitoring station without logo on face plate
SPECIFICATIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-I Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
MRMS Series

1157. fifl−˚ 1095PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 18-32 VAC, 50-60 HZ
Supply Watts 10W maximum, 3W typical
Signal Output
Current 4-20 mA
Voltage

0 to 5, 0 to 10 VDC
Maximum Output Impedance
510Ω
Minimum Output Impedance
5000Ω
Relay Output SPDT: 0.6A @ 120 VAC,
2A @ 30 VDC
Accuracy ±0.5%
±0.25% (optional)
±0.5%
±0.25% (optional)
Overpressure ±1 psi
(15" WC for 0.10" WC or less
models)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (Non-condensing)
Operating Temperature 32˚ to 120˚F (0˚ to 50˚C)
Mounting Flush Mount
Process Connection Barbed Fittings for 1/4" Tubing
Wiring Terminations Removable Terminal Block
Dimensions 5.84"H x 7.45"W x 0.38"D
(14.8 x 18.9 x 1.0 cm)
Enclosure Fire retardant plastic UL94-1C
Approvals CE (EMC Directive 2004/108 EC)
Weight 1.2 lb (0.55 kg)
Warranty 1 year
ROOM CONDITION MONITOR
SRCM SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Setra SRCM Series is a 2-in-1 solution incorporating the best of the SRPM and adding room condition monitoring capability
. A large 4.3" TFT displays room conditions such as
room ID, room pressure mode, room status, room pressure and a slide bar that indicates pressure relative to set point
.
It is also capab
le of displaying a full screen room condition
banner to communicate the current room status and is easily programmed through the SmarTTouch™ display
The SRCM Series incorporates a flush mount design for
the most esthetic installation. The display hinges up for
easy access to a USB port that is provided for quick cloning of multiple units
. The SRCM Series also has Multi-room
dP measurement capabilities with the use of a remote dP transmitter, as well as the ability to display up to eight parameters utilizing BACnet® MSTP
. In addition to the
standard analog and rela
y outputs, the SRCM Series is
available in a BACnet® MSTP configuration that is easily setup through the SmarTTouch™ display.
The SRCM Series is perfect for applications in laboratory,
pharmaceutical, research, isolation room, and surgical suite applications or anywhere maintaining and monitoring differential pressure
.
FEATURES
• Color coded room status indication
• Flush mount design
• New intuitive interactive interface
• Clone configuration capability
• Selectable analog voltage and milliamp outputs
• SPDT alarm relay
• 4.3" TFT LCD display
• Optional BACnet MSTP
• SPDT relay output
• Analog current or voltage outputs
SPECIFICATIONS
Optional Remote Annunciator Setra’s SRAN annunciator allows remote indication of room status at monitoring or nurses station
. A GREEN
LED indicates a nor
mal room condition, a RED LED and
audible alarm signal a breach in room pressure status
.

1158. fifl˚
PRESSURE 1096fifl˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ANALOG (ANL) OUTPUT
COM COM
mA Current Output (4-20 mA)
Vdc Voltage Output (0-5 Vdc, 0-10 Vdc)
INPUTS (wired to door N.O. contact)
COM COM Door
DI Digital Input
COM COM Analog Input2
IN2 Analog Input2 (0-5, 0-10Vdc)
+15 15 Vdc

COM COM Analog Input1
IN1 Analog Input1 (0-5, 0-10Vdc)
+15 15 Vdc
Earth Ground
L1 24 Vac
L2 24 Vac
HIGH or room pressure tubing
contacts here
LOW or reference pressure tubing
connects here




POWER
RELAY
COM COM
+15 +15 Vdc
NO Normally Open
RC Relay COM
NC Normally Closed
COM
B (+)
A (-)
GND
REAR VIEW


WIRING
ROOM CONDITION MONITOR
SRCM SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-I Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
SRAN Remote annunciator with red and green status LEDs, audible alarm and acknowledge switch

1159. fifl−˚ 1097PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 18 to 32 VDC @ 5 mA
Signal Output 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA
(loop-powered)

Accuracy ±1.0% full scale RSS, ±0.5% FS
RSS, or ±0.25% FS RSS
Overpressure Up to 10 psi
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Operating Temperature 21° to 140°F (-6° to 60°C)
Enclosure Rating Fire retardant plastic UL94V-0
Process Connection Barbed fittings for 1/4" ID tubing
Wiring Terminations Screw terminal
Dimensions Wall: 4.44"H x 6.19"W x 1.7"D
(11.3 x 15.7 x 4.3 cm)
Duct: 2.90"H x 5.67"W x 1.7"D
(7.4 x 14.4 x 4.3 cm)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight Wall: 0.6 lb (0.28 kg)
Duct: 0.56 lb (0.25 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Setra SRIM Series room pressure monitor
is designed for critical care low differential pressure
applications that require stringent pressure monitoring
and alarming
. True differential pressure is measured and
displayed. The SRIM Series is a complete system that
includes a convenient 2-Line Character LCD display with an intuitive interface for pressure, calibration, and alarm setup
.
FEATURES
• Large 2-line LCD display
• Membrane keypad for ease of configuration & menu
navigation
• Upper/lower alarm limit setting
• Wall & duct mount versions
• Mounting thickness <50mm
• Easy calibration without removing the wiring or plumbing
Wiring for 4-20 mA and VDC outputs
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
SRIM Series
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-I Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SRIM Room isolation monitor
ROOM PRESSURE MONITOR
SRIM SERIES

1160. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1098fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 15-32 VDC or 24 VAC
Supply Watts 50mA max (per display)
Accuracy ±1% FS ±2 Counts
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Operating Temperature 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)
Enclosure Rating Fire retardant UL94V-0
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Dimensions 5.8"H x 5.8"W x 1.25"D
(14.7 x 14.7 x 31.4 cm)
Approvals CE
Weight 0.8 lb (0.37 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Setra SRMD Model's temperature and humidity display
panel features a CE compliant, high visible, large 1 inch 3.5
digit LCD display and an attractive flush mounted faceplate bezel
. This display panel is compatible with any temperature,
humidity, CO2 sensor that has a 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10 VDC analog output
.
FEATURES
• Highly visible 1" LCD display
• Single LCD display or dual LCD display model
• Available in red, green or blue LCD backlight
• Available with White or Metallic Bezel
• Flush mount design
• Wipe down capable
• Mount in standard 4-11/16" sq. electrical box
• Compatible with any analog sensor with 0-5VDC or 0-10VDC output
Input Wiring
WIRING
ROOM ISOLATION MONITOR
SRMD SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
SRMD Series
ORDERING INFORMATION
SW
SMWhite bezel
Metallic bezel
Example: SRMD-SW-R-T-WNN SRMD single display,
white bezel, red displa y, temperature, with
SRH wall mount sensor.
SRMD SW
MODEL DESCRIPTION SRMD Room monitoring displa y, single display
-
DISPLAY BEZEL COLOR
R
G
BRed Green Blue
DISPLAY COLOR
MEASUREMENT PARAMETER
N
T
H None Temp (14 to 140°F) Humidity (0.0 to 100.0% RH)
SENSOR OPTION
NNN
WNN
DNNNone SRH Wall mount SRH12PW2CT5N SRH Duct mount SRH12PD2CT5N
R T WNN-- -
DW
DMWhite bezel Metallic bezel
Example: SRMD- DW-R-T-W-G-H SRMD dual displa y,
white bezel, red display with temperature on
top, SRH wall mount sensor green display
with humidity on bottom.
SRMD DW
MODEL DESCRIPTION SRMD
Room monitoring display, dual display
-
DISPLAY BEZEL COLOR
R
G
BRed Green Blue
DISPLAY COLOR
MEASUREMENT PARAMETER
N
T
H None Temp (14 to 140°F) Humidity (0.0 to 100.0% RH)
SENSOR OPTION
N
W
D None SRH Wall mount SRH12PW2CT5N SRH Duct mount SRH12PD2CT5N
R T W-- -
R
G
BRed Green Blue
DISPLAY COLOR
MEASUREMENT PARAMETER
N
T
H None Temp (14 to 140°F) Humidity (0.0 to 100.0% RH)
R T--
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-I Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979

1161. fifl−˚ 1099PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 18-32 VAC 50/60 Hz, 85-265 VAC
50/60 Hz
Supply Watts 5W
Signal Output 0-5 VDC (2.5 V @ 0 pressure) 0-10
VDC (5 V @ 0 pressure) 4-20 mA
sourcing (12 mA @ 0 pressure)
Alarm Relay Output SPDT, 5A @ 30 VDC, 120 VAC
Accuracy 0.25% FS or 0.5% FS
Display LCD, 128x128 RGB backlit
Display Resolution 0.001" WC
Display Units Inches of Water ("WC), Pascals (Pa)
Protocol BACnet
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Operating Temperature 32° to 120°F (0° to 50°C)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1, Fire retardant plastic
Mounting Mounts to a 4" x 4" electrical box
Electrical Connection Removable terminal blocks
Process Connection Barbed fittings for 1/4" OD tubing
Dimensions 8.0"H x 5.4"W x 1.6"D
(20.3 x 13.7 x 4.1 cm)
Approvals CSA C22.2 No. 1010 Safety, ANSI
Weight 1.5 lb (0.69 kg)
Warranty 1 year
ROOM PRESSURE MONITOR
SRPM
DESCRIPTION
The Setra Model SRPM Room Pressure Monitor provides a system for monitoring differential pressures in critical low pressure applications
. A backlit LCD provides an intuitive
graphic user interface for ease of unit, security and alarm setup
. Installation costs and on going calibration costs
of ownership are significantly reduced. A red LED, green
LED, backlit LCD, local audible alarm and optional remote annunciator alert personnel of the status of the system
. A
SPDT rela
y output is also available for additional status
indication
. Three analog outputs are available in the same
unit to interface with BAS system. The Model SRPM is
housed in a tough fire resistant plastic housing designed for surface mounting
. The attractive case fits into Hospital and
Pharamceutical applications. Models are available for 120/240
VAC or 24 VAC. The optional SRAN remote annunciator
provides a visual and audible warning of room conditions at a remote location
.
FEATURES
• Easy •
Large 2" x 2" LCD touch screen display
• 0.25% or 0.5% accuracy
• Visual and audible local alarms w/ alarm silence
• Built in alarm horn with local alarm silence
• Optional remote annunciator available
• Selectable analog voltage and milli-amp outputs
• SPDT alarm relay
• Red and green room status LEDs
• Display resolution of 0.001"
• Door status monitor
• Variable alarm delay
• NIST certification included
• Optional BACnet MSTP
APPLICATION
Typical applications include positive-pressure clean
rooms such as pharmaceutical processing areas and
negative-pressure isolation rooms such as hospital
rooms housing contagious patients
.
SPECIFICATIONS
BACNET VERSIONS
Optional Remote Annunciator Setra’s SRAN annunciator allows remote indication of room status at monitoring or nurses station
. A GREEN
LED indicates a nor
mal room condition, a RED LED and
audible alarm signal a breach in room pressure status
.

1162. fifl˚
PRESSURE 1100fifl˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
WIRING
ROOM PRESSURE MONITOR
SRPM
ORDERING INFORMATION
SRPM
R05WB
0R1WB
R25WB
0R5WB
001WB
2R5WB
005WB
A1
V1
E
24 VAC Supply, BACnet
120 VAC Supply voltage
0.5% Accuracy
±0.5" WC
±1.0" WC
±2.5" WC
±5.0" WC
Setra Room Pressure Monitor
±0.05" WC
±0.1" WC
±0.25" WC
Example: SRPM-001WB-A1-E SRPM pressure monitor measuring ±1.0" W.C.
pressure 24VAC supply voltage at 0.5% accuracy.
0.25% AccuracyV
A2
V2
24 VAC Supply voltage
120 VAC Supply, BACnet
ModelDescription
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
4BX11234 4" square steel box 1-1/2" deep, 1/2" and 3/4" KO 218
RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-I Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113
SRAN Remote annunciator with red and green status LEDs,
audible alarm and acknowledge switch
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901

1163. fifl−˚ 1101PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy ±2% of FS through out ranges @
70°F (3% on 0.5" ranges and 4%
on 0.25" ranges)
Operating Pressure -20" Hg to 15 psig (103 kPa)
Media Compatibility Air and compatible gases
Operating Temperature 20° to 140°F (-7° to 60°C)
Enclosure Die-cast aluminum case and bezel
with acrylic cover
Process Connection 1/8" NPT female high and low
pressure taps, duplicated-one pair
side and one pair back.
Included Accessories Two 1/8" FNPT barbed fittings, two
plugs for duplicate pressure taps, and three flush mounting tabs with screws
Weight
1.1 lb (0.51 kg)
Warranty 2 years
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGE
K2000 SERIES
0.5
(1.3)
1/8 FNPT
high pressure port
1/8 FNPT
low pressure port
4.5
(11.4)
3-M4
4.1 (10.3)
0.7 (1.8)
1.8 (4.5)
4.7 (12.0)
1.3 (3.18)
0.4 (1.11)
1.7 (4.3)
in (cm)
DESCRIPTION
The K2000 Series Differential Pressure Gauges can be used in applications for measuring positive, negative, or differential pressure with an accuracy of 2%
. The gauge
includes a 4" (10.2 cm) easy-to-read dial, housed in a rugged
die cast aluminum housing. The K2000 Series has both back
and side connections so that it may be either surface- or flush-mounted
. Ranges are available from 0" to 0.25" W.C. up
to
10" W
.C.
FEATURES
• 2% full-scale accuracy
• Easy-to-read 4" (10.16 cm) white dial and red-tipped pointer
•
Flush or surface mounting
• Easily accessible zero adjustment
• Corrosion-resistant cast aluminum housing
• Back and side connections
APPLICATION
The K2000 Series is ideal for monitoring filter status, duct static pressure, room pressure, fan or blower pressure, paint booths, dust collectors, and cabinet purging
.
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
K2000

1164. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1102fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Mounting the K2000 Series Differential Pressure Gauge: Mount the K2000 with the dial face in the vertical plane. Avoid
areas of excessive vibration, pulsating pressures, or extreme temperature swings. Long runs of pneumatic tubing will not affect
performance but it may affect response times. Once the K2000 is mounted, the pointing needle of the K2000 may need to be
adjusted to the zero position. If adjustment is required, slightly turn the external pointer adjustment screw in either direction as
required.
Using the K2000 to measure diff
erential pressure: The high pressure ports will always be connected to the higher of the
two pressures that are being monitored
. Conversely the lower pressure ports will always be connected to the lower of the two
pressures being measures.
Monitoring v
ariable positive pressures: This application will measure the positive pressure as it varies with respect to the
atmosphere
. Port the highest pressure source to a high port connection of the K2000 and leave the low pressure ports open to
the atmosphere. Make sure any unused high pressure port is plugged.
Monitoring v
ariable negative pressures: This application will measure the negative positive pressure as it varies with respect
to the atmosphere
. Port the low pressure source to a low port connection of the K2000 and leave the high pressure ports open to
the atmosphere. Make sure any unused low pressure port is plugged.
INSTALLATION
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGE
K2000 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
* These ranges are calibrated
for vertical scale position
MODEL
K2000-00*
K2000-0*
K2001
K2002
K2003
K2004
K2005
K2006
K2008
K2010
RANGE
"W.C.
0-0.25 0-0.5 0-1.0 0-2.0 0-3.0 0-4.0 0-5.0 0-6.0 0-8.0 0-10
MINOR
DIV.
0.005 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.20 0.20 0.20
MODEL RANGE
DUAL SCALE
"W.C./Pa
MINOR
DIV.
K2000-00D* K2000-0D* K2001D K2002D K2003D K2004D K2006D K2008D K2010D K2020D 0-0.25/0-60 0-0.5/0-125 0-1.0/0-250 0-2.0/0-500 0-3.0/0-750 0-4.0/0-1000 0-5.0/0-1.5k 0-6.0/0-2.0k 0-8.0/0-2.5k 0-10/0-5.0k
0.005 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.20 0.20 0.20
Order by model number from selection chart above. Contact Kele for pressure ranges, metric ranges, and air
velocity scales other than those shown.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
A-368-K Surface mounting plate 1113
A-605 Mounting kit for air filter application. Includes aluminum surface mounting brackets
with screws, two 5 ft. lengths of 1/4" aluminum tubing, two static pressure tips and
two plastic vent valves. 1113
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901

1165. fifl−˚ 1103PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Output signal 4 ... 20 mA, 2-wire
Output signal 0 ... 10 V, 3-wire
Supply Voltage 15 to 35 VDC (A2G-15 only)
Signal Output 4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC (A2G-15 only)
Maximum Output
Impedance mA 600Ω @ 24 VDC
Dial Size 4.5" (11.4 cm)
Maximum Pressure 80" WC
Accuracy ±5% of full span ranges< 0.5" WC
Range 0 to 0.2" WC to 0 to 50" WC
Operating Temperature -22° to 176°F (-30° to 80°C)
Gauge Movement Frictionless magnetic transmission
Materials Of Construction
Case: Aluminum
Pointer: Plastic black
Set Pointer: Plastic red
Window: Makrolon
Mounting Case: Black thermoplastic,
high impact resistant
Diaphragm Material Silicone rubber
Enclosure Rating NEMA 3 (NEMA 4 Optional)
Mounting LM = lower mount (surface mount)
(A2G-10, 15)
CBM = center back mount (panel
mount)
UBM = recess mount (recess mount)
(A2G-05)
Process Connection 1/8" - 3/16" hose barbed adapters
included
Wiring Terminations PG gland M12 (A2G-15 only)
Approvals CE
Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The Wika A2G-05, -10, -15 Series pressure gauges/
transmitter are the latest innovation in accurate, full-featured
pressure gauges and are ideally suited for the measurement
of low pressure and differential pressure from 0
.2” to 50” WC.
The
A2G-05 Series is ideal for installations with space
limitations
. The unit features a slim case (1.65 in.) which
works well for recessed installation in the walls of clean rooms or in panel doors that have little room behind the panel to spare
.
Both the
A2G-10 and the A2G-15 Series incorporate a two-
piece modular design
. A benefit of the modular design is a
two-part assembly that separates the measuring system from case components
. This allows the replacement of only the
measuring system, which provides reduced repair costs.
In addition to the local displa
y, the A2G-15 features an
electronic output signal and is available with a 2-wire, 4 to 20 mA or 3-wire 0 to 10 VDC output signal
. This A2G-15 gauge
is ideal for applications where a local indication and remote monitoring or evaluation is needed
.
The panel mount version of all three models is extremely
easy to install and requires no tools.
FEATURES
• Zer •
Red mark pointer standard
• Simple mounting and dismounting
• Installation depth 1.65 in. (A2G-05)
• Two part construction (A2G-10, A2G-15)
• Analog output signal (A2G-15)
PRESSURE GAUGES/TRANSMITTER
A2G-05, -10, -15 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
A2G-05-BTF
A2G-10
A2G-15
WIRING (A2G-15 ONLY)

1166. fifl˚
PRESSURE 1104fifl˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
PRESSURE GAUGES/TRANSMITTER
A2G-05, -10, -15 SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A2G WIKA differential pressure gauge series
CONFIGURATION
10 WIKA differential pressure gauge, standard case
15 WIKA differential pressure gauge, standard case, analog output signal
-Surface mount (LM), models -10 and -15 only
PPanel mount (CBM), threaded flange on rear of case models -05, -10 and -15
ANALOG SIGNAL (A2G-15 only)
420 4-20 mA analog signal
010 0-10 VDC analog signal
RANGE CODES
P25 0 to 0.25" WC
P50 0 to 0.05" WC
01 0 to 1.0" WC
02 0 to 2.0" WC
03 0 to 3.0" WC
04 0 to 4.0" WC
05 0 to 5.0" WC
06 0 to 6.0" WC
07 0 to 8.0" WC
08 0 to 10.0" WC
CP10 ±0.1" WC
CP20 ±0.2" WC
CP50 ±0.5" WC
C10 ±1.0" WC
C20 ±2.0" WC
C40 ±4.0" WC
C60 ±6.0" WC
05 WIKA differential pressure gauge, thin case (1 inch case length)
BTFRecess mount (UBM), mounting ring on panel/wall surface with gauge bayonet connection (twist in)
REL ATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

1167. fifl−˚ 1105PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy +3/2/3% of span
(ASME B40.100 Grade B)
Measurement Range 30" Hg Vacuum to 5000 psi
Overpressure
Steady 3/4 of FS value

Fluctuating 2/3 of FS value
Short time FS value
Operating Temperature Ambient
-40°F to 140°F (-40°C to 60°C)
Media 140°F (60°C) maximum
Wetted Parts Copper Alloy
Casing Black Plastic
Window Material Crystal-clear plastic, snap-fit
Dial Size 1.5" (3.8 cm), 2.0" (5.1 cm), 2.5" (6.4 cm),
or 4.0" (10.2 cm) (111.10 Series only)
Dial White plastic with stop pin (1.5", 2.0",
2.5")
White aluminum with stop pin (4")
(111.10 Series only)
Black or black and red lettering
Process Connection
111.10 Series 1/8" or 1/4" NPT lower mount
111.12 Series 1/8" or 1/4" NPT center back mount
Approvals RoHS, UL File SA6444
Warranty 1 year
DIAL GAUGE
111.10, 111.12 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Designed for long, reliable service under rugged conditions, the Wika 111.10 and 111.12 Series pressure gauges are typically used in applications where the media does not corrode brass
.
The lo
w cost 111.10 Series has a lower mount connection and
features a black ABS or painted steel case standard, and a coiled safety Bourdon tube for 800 psig and higher. The 111.12 Series
is specifically designed for flush mounting into panels. This center
back mount pressure gauge features a black ABS or black-painted steel case, a coiled safety Bourdon tube for 800 psig and higher, and option for U-clamp mounting
.
FEATURES
• Copper alloy wetted parts
• Black ABS or painted steel case
• Cost effective design
• Pressure ranges from 30" Hg vacuum to 5000 psig
• Center back mounting with option for U-clamp (111.12
Series only)
• Available in 1-1/2" through 4" sizes
SPECIFICATIONS
111.10 Series
ORDERING INFORMATION
111.12 Series
GAUGE MODEL
111.10 111.12
Dial Size 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 4" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2"
Connection 1/8" LM 1/4" LM 1/4" LM 1/4" LM1/8" CBM1/8" CBM1/4" CBM
Pressure Range
30" Hg Vacuum 9747214 4252901 4253027 4255900 9690128 9690357 4253371
30" Hg Vacuum -15 psi52234681507865634253035 4255918 N/A N/A 4253389
30" Hg Vacuum -30 psiN/A 507865714253043 4255926 N/A 507417134253397
30" Hg Vacuum -60 psiN/A N/A 4253051 4255934 N/A N/A 4253400
30" Hg Vacuum -100 psi50169025503024184253060 4255942 N/A N/A 4253418
30" Hg Vacuum -160 psiN/A N/A 4253078 4255951 N/A N/A 4253426
30" Hg Vacuum -200 psiN/A 506575694253086 4255969 N/A N/A 4253434
0-15 psi 9747222 4252919 4253108 4255977 9690209 9690438 4253451
0-30 psi 9747230 4252927 4253116 4255985 9690217 9690446 4253460
0-60 psi 9747249 4252935 4253124 4255993 9690225 9690455 4253478
0-100 psi 9747257 4252943 4253132 4256000 9690234 9690463 4253486
0-160 psi 9747265 4252951 4253141 4256018 9690242 9690471 4253494
0-200 psi 9747273 4252960 4253159 4256026 9690250 9690489 4253507
0-300 psi 4233372 4252978 4253167 4256034 4233355 9690497 4253515
0-400 psi 4233398 4252986 4253175 4256042 4354385 4386082 4253523
0-600 psi N/A 4252994 4253183 4256051 9690285 4228930 4253531
0-800 psi 50646605 N/A 4253191 4256060 N/A N/A 4253541
0-1000 psi N/A 4253001 4253205 4256078 9765654 4256585 4253559
0-1500 psi N/A 507865984253213 4256086 N/A N/A 4253567
0-2000 psi 50989309507866014253221 4256094 N/A N/A 4253575
0-3000 psi N/A 4253019 4253230 4256107 N/A 500753224253583
0-5000 psi N/A N/A 4253248 4256115 8986154 N/A 4253591

1168. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1106fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy ± 2% of FS (3% on -0 and 4% on
-00 r
anges) throughout range
System Pressure
-20" Hg to 15 psig (103 kPa)
Overpressure Relief plug designed to open at 25
psig (172 kP
a)
Enclosure
Die-cast aluminum
Operating Temperature 20° to 140°F (-7° to 60°C)
Process Connection 1/8" NPT female high and low
pressure taps, duplicated-one pair side and one pair back
Standard Accessories
Two 1/8" NPT plugs for duplicate
pressure taps, two 1/8" pipe thread to rubber tubing adapters, and three flush mounting adapters with screws
Approvals
RoHS
Weight

1.12 lb (0.51 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES
2000 SERIES
MAGNEHELIC ®
Zero Set
Pressure
0
.20
.40 .60
.80
1.0
0.5
(1.27)
Suction
0.69
(1.75)

1.69
(4.29)
0.5
(1.27)
0.48
(1.11)
1.25
(3.17)
4.5 Hole
(11.43)
Pressure
Suction
0.5
(1.27)
4.75
(12.06)
in
(cm)
Note: Dimensions are slightly different on medium
and high pressure models.
DESCRIPTION
The Dwyer 2000 Series Magnehelic
®
Differential Pressure
Gauges provide an accurate, economical indication of positive, negative, or differential air pressure
. The gauge
includes a 4" (10.2 cm) easy-to-read dial and a frictionless
magnetic movement in a cast aluminum housing, and it is resistant to shock, vibration, and overpressure
. The
Magnehelic
®
Gauge has both back and side connections, so
that it may be either surface- or flush-mounted
. Ranges are
a
vailable from 0" to 0
.25" W.C. up to 10'' W.C.
FEATURES
• 2% full-scale accuracy
• Easy-to-read 4" (10.16 cm) white dial and red-tipped pointer
•
Flush or surface mounting
• Easily accessible zero adjustment
• Corrosion-resistant cast aluminum housing
• Back and side connections
APPLICATION
The 2000 Series is ideal for monitoring fan and blower pressures, filter resistance, air velocity, and pressure drop across coils
. It may be used to measure positive, negative, or
differential pressures of air or compatible gases.
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
2001

1169. fifl−˚ 1107PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Mount the 2000 Series Magnehelic Gauge
®
with the dial in a vertical position in a location free of excessive vibration or
pulsating pressures. Sensing lines may be run any distance necessary, but long tubing lengths will increase response time slightly.
If the pointer is not e
xactly on the zero mark with both the high- and low-pressure connections open to the atmosphere, adjust
with the external zero adjust screw
.
To monitor positive pressure, connect tubing from the source of pressure to either of the two high-pressure ports. Plug the other
high-pressure por
t, and vent one or both low-pressure ports to atmosphere
.
To monitor negative pressure, connect tubing from the source of negative pressure to either of the two low-pressure ports. Plug
the other lo
w-pressure port, and vent one or both high-pressure ports to atmosphere
.
To monitor differential pressure, connect tubing from the source of the higher pressure to either of the two highpressure ports.
Connect tubing from the source of the lo
wer pressure to either of the low-pressure ports
. Plug both unused ports.
ORDERING INFORMATION
INSTALLATION
Order by model number from selection chart above. Contact Kele for pressure ranges, metric ranges, and air
velocity scales other than those shown.
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES
2000 SERIES
* These ranges are calibrated
for vertical scale position
MODEL
2000-00*
2000-0*
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2008
2010
RANGE
"W.C.
0-0.25 0-0.50 0-1.0 0-2.0 0-3.0 0-4.0 0-5.0 0-6.0 0-8.0 0-10
MINOR
DIV.
0.005 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.20 0.20 0.20
MODEL
2300-0* 2301 2302
RANGE ZERO
CENTER
"W.C.
0.25-0-0.25
0.5-0-0.5
1-0-1
MINOR
DIV.
0.01 0.02 0.05
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
A-368-K Surface mounting plate 1113
A-605 Mounting kit for air filter application. Includes aluminum surface mounting brackets
with screws, two 5 ft. lengths of 1/4" aluminum tubing, two static pressure tips and
two plastic vent valves. 1113
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901

1170. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1108fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
N.C.
Right Setpoint
Knob

COM
(HI)
Left Setpoint
Knob

N.C.
COM
-
110 Volt

+
110 Volt

(LOW)
Reset Reset
Supply Voltage 110 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 5W
Contact Rating 10A @ 120 VAC, 60 Hz resistive
Accuracy ±2% of full scale @ 70°F (21°C),
±3% on -0 models
, ±4% on -00
models
Overpressure
20" Hg to 25 psig (172 kPa) total
pressure on either side of diaphragm
Operating Temperature 20° to 120°F (-7° to 49°C)
Process Connection 1/8" FNPT
Conduit Entrance 3/4" conduit
Cutout Size 4.75" (12.06 cm) diameter
Depth Required 7.63" (19.37 cm)
Dimensions 5.0"H X 5.0"W X 8.44"D
(12.7 X 12.7 X 21.4
Approvals UL listed, file #E38121, CSA, CE
Weight 4.0 lb (1.81 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH / GAUGE
3000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Dwyer Series 3000 Photohelic
®
Differential Pressure
Switch/Gauge combines two versatile, precise pressure
switches with a time-proven Magnehelic
®
pressure gauge
.
The gauge reading is unaff
ected by switch operation
. External
knobs are used to adjust the two DPDT switch setpoints.
Switch setpoints (indicated b
y red pointers) and system
pressure are fully visible at all times
. Ranges are available
from 0" to 0.25" W.C. up to 10'' W.C. full scale. The 3000
Series may be ordered with the switch assembly remote mounted to facilitate panel mounting
.
FEATURES
• T •
Dependable Magnehelic
®
pressure indication
•
2% F.S. accuracy
• Visible switch set points and pressure indication
• Easily accessible zero adjustment
• 4" (10.2 cm) easy-to-read white dial
• Optional manual reset
• Optional remote mounting of switch assembly
• UL listed, CSA and CE certified
SPECIFICATIONS
A3002
ORDERING INFORMATION
A3000-00
A3000-0
A3001
A3002
A3003
RANGE "W.C. MINOR DIVISION
0-0.25
0-0.50
0-1.0
0-2.0
0-3.0
0.005
0.01
0.02
0.05
0.10
A3004
A3005
A3006
A3008
A3010
MODELMODEL RANGE "W.C. MINOR DIVISION
0-4.0
0-5.0
0-6.0
0-8.0
0-10
0.10
0.10
0.20
0.20
0.20
OPTIONS
RMR Remote mounting gauge and separate relay assembly with 5ft (12.7 cm) interconnecting cable
(additional cable available in 5ft increments)
TAMP Tamper-proof knobs
A-601 Manual reset switch (one required for each circuit)
Contact Kele for pressure ranges other than those shown (metric ranges, air velocity scales, etc.)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
WIRING

1171. fifl−˚ 1109PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy ±0.5% of span
(ASME B40.100 Grade 2A)
±1.0% of span (ASME B40.100 Grade
1A) (for 20,000 psi range and above)
Measurement Range 30" Hg Vacuum to 0 to 0-20,000 psi
Overpressure
Steady FS value
Fluctuating 90% of FS value
Short Time 150% of FS value
Operating Temperature
Ambient -40°F to 150°F (-40°C to 66°C) dry
-4°F to 150°F (-20°C to 66°C)
glycerine filled
-40°F to 150°F (-40°C to 66°C)
silicone filled
Medium max 212°F (100°C)
Wetted Parts 316L stainless steel
Window Material Clear acrylic with Buna-N gasket
Dial Size 4.5" (11.4 cm)
Dial White aluminum with black lettering,
stop pin at 6 o'clock
Pointer Black aluminum, adjustable
Restrictor Stainless steel (0.6 mm)
Fill Fluid Glycerine 99.7% (233.34 Series)
Process Connection 1/4" or 1/2" NPT with M4 internal tap,
lower mount
Approvals RoHS
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
Specifically designed for the chemical and petroleum, and
processing industries, the Wika 232.34 and 233.34 Series
pressure gauges feature 316 stainless steel wetted parts, a
solid-front, blowout back safety case, and adjustable pointer
.
A
vailable in 4-1/2" or 6" dial size, this pressure gauge is field
repairable and field liquid-fillable
.
FEATURES
• Excellent load-cycle stability and shock resistance
• Solid front thermoplastic case
• Positive pressure ranges to 30,000 psi
• XSEL
®
Process Gauge with 5 year warranty on gauge
and 10 year warranty on pressure system (see terms
and conditions)
• All lower mount connection gauges are factory
prepared
DIAL GAUGE
232.34, 233.34 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
232.34 Series
233.34 Series
ORDERING INFORMATION
GAUGE MODEL
232.34 233.34
Dial Size 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 4-1/2"
Connection 1/4" LM 1/2" LM 1/2" LM
Pressure Range
30" Hg Vacuum 9834478 9834729 9833914
30" Hg Vacuum -15 psi 9834486 9834737 9833922
30" Hg Vacuum -30 psi 9834494 9834745 9833930
30" Hg Vacuum -60 psi 9834508 9834753 9833948
30" Hg Vacuum -100 psi 9834516 9834761 9833956
30" Hg Vacuum -160 psi 9834524 9834770 9833965
30" Hg Vacuum -200 psi 9834532 9834788 9833973
30" Hg Vacuum -300 psi 4260163 4260180 N/A
30" Hg Vacuum -400 psi 4260171 4260198 N/A
0-15 psi 9834559 9834800 9833981
0-30 psi 9834567 9834818 9833999
0-60 psi 9834575 9834826 9834006
0-100 psi 9834583 9834834 9834015
0-160 psi 9834591 9834842 9834023
0-200 psi 9834605 9834850 9834031
0-300 psi 9834613 9834869 9834049
0-400 psi 9834621 9834877 9834057
0-600 psi 9834630 9834885 9834065
0-800 psi 9835008 9834974 9834155
0-1000 psi 9834648 9834893 9834074
0-1500 psi 9793318 9834907 9834082
0-2000 psi 9793661 9834915 9834090
0-3000 psi 9748911 9834923 9834104
0-5000 psi 9793521 9834931 9834112
0-10000 psi 9793679 9834940 9834120
0-15000 psi N/A 9834958 9834138
0-20000 psi N/A 9834966 9834146

1172. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1110fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24-240 VAC/VDC, 7 VA
Signal Output 4-20 mA (optional), 120 mA (VDC)
Maximum Output
Impedance 750Ω
Relay Output (2) SPDT
Relay Output Rating 8 Amps @ 250 VAC, 5A @30 VDC
Accuracy 1.0% standard (0.5% and 0.25%
optional)
Thermal Effect +/- 0.02% FS/°F
Maximum Pressure ≤4" WC 2 psi; 5" WC or more 10 psi
Display 4 Digit, red LED, ½" digits, LCD
programming display (A3 and A4 only)
Response Time <100 ms
Operating Temperature -10° to 140°F (-23° to 60°C)
Media Compatibility Air and compatible non combustible,
non corrosive gasses
Enclosure Glass Filled Nylon
Enclosure Rating Face designed to meet NEMA 4X with
optional cover
Process Connection Push on connection for 3/16" tubing
Wiring Terminations screw terminals
Approvals ETL, CE
Warranty 1 year
Ø5.1
(129.5)
1.61
(41)
0.32
(8.1)
4.57
(116)
2.33
(59.1)
LOW HIGH
V






















V








4
/20 4/20 C
1
N
C
I N
0
1

0.95
(24.1)
DESCRIPTION
The Sensocon Series A1 and A2 digital differential pressure gauges utilize a patent pending microprocessor based digital pressure gage for positive, negative, and differential measurement designed to be a direct replacement for mechanical gauges
. The Series A digital differential
pressure gauges utilize an extremely stable piezoresistive sensing technology to give a standard full scale accuracy of 1%
. For applications requiring better accuracy, the Series A1
and A2 are also available with 0.5% or 0.25% accuracy. The
Series A1 and A2 also have an optional 4-20 mA output for applications requiring an output signal
. While the A1 features
a bright LED display, the A2 adds a bright process arch which gives the gauge improved visibility, readability and precision
.
Both the
Series A1 and A2 digital differential pressure
gauges also feature 5 user selectable engineering units including inches of W.C., mm W.C., cm W.C., kPa, and Pa.
The
Sensocon Series A3 and A4 digital differential
pressure controllers are a patent pending microprocessor based pressure controllers for positive, negative, and differential pressure as well as velocity and flow. These
Series A3 and A4 differential pressure controllers include (2) 8A SPDT relays and an associated programming menu that allows full configuration of variables such as setpoints, dead band, engineering units, flow coefficients, and more
.
The prog
ramming is done from a user friendly menu on the
LCD(A3) or OLED (A4) display or uploaded using an Opti Link
FEATURES
•
Mounts in industry standard holes
• 1.6” (41 mm) panel depth
• LED or OLED program display
• Measures flow & velocity
• Optional 4-20 mA output
• Universal power 24-240 VAC/VDC
• Two 8A SPDT relays
DIMENSIONS
DIGITAL GAUGE
SERIES A
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
AS eries A 4.5" panel mount display
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
1LED display
2LED display, process arch
3LED display, process arch, and LCD
4LED display, process arch, and OLED
FUNCTION
0Indication
1Control (2) SPDT relays (A3 and A4 only)
TRANSMITTER
0N one
14-20 mA
ACCURACY
01%
10.50%
20.25%
PRESSURE RANGE*
00 – 0.25" (60 Pa)
10 – 0.5" (125 Pa)
20 – 1" (250 Pa)
30 – 2" (500 Pa)
40 – 3" (750 Pa)
50 – 4" (1 kPa)
60 – 5" (1.25 kPa)
70 – 8" (2.0 kPa)
80 – 10" (2.5 kPa)
90 – 15" (3.75 kPa)
10 0 – 20" (5.0 kPa)
11 0 – 30" (7.5 kPa)
12 0 - 40" (10 kPa)
13 0 - 50" (12.5 kPa)
*All ranges are bi-directional
Model Descpition

1173. fifl−˚ 1111PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Dial Size 2 1/2" (6.4 cm)
Accuracy 1%-2%-5%
Measurement Range 30" Hg vac to 120 psi (retard to 250
psi)
Wetted Parts Brass socket, phosphor bronze
bourdon tube
Process Connection 1/8" NPT, lower
Enclosure Window: Polycarbonate
Case ABS plastic
Warranty 1 year
REFRIGERATION GAUGE
25W100
DESCRIPTION
The Ashcroft Model 25W100 Refrigeration Gauges are
ideal for installation on refrigeration manifolds for testing
air conditioning units
. The compound scale is designed
specifically for R134A refrigerant testing. FlutterGuard™, a
standard f
eature of these gauges, eliminates pointer flutter
.
SPECIFICATIONS
25W100
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
25W1007PH01L-R134A
R134A
Overpressure 125% of FS value
Operating Temperature -40° to 150°F (-40° to 65°C)
Wetted Parts Brass socket, phosphor bronze
bourdon tube
Window Material Acrylic
Process Connection 1/8" NPT or 1/4" NPT, depending
on model (LM = lower mount, CBM
= center back mount, PM = panel
mount)
Warranty
1 year
PRESSURE GAUGES
PG SERIESDESCRIPTION
The PG Series Pressure Gauges are durable, cost-effective,
general-purpose gauges for use in a wide variety of HVAC
controls applications
. All gauges are compatible with air, oil,
and water and have a bronze bourdon tube, acrylic lens, and dual unit psi/kPa scale
. The PG Series (except model PG-05)
has a recalibrator screw. A wide variety of models, options,
and accessories are available, including panel-mount models, specialty gauges, and diaphragm seals
.
SPECIFICATIONS
PG Series
ORDERING INFORMATION
DIAL SIZE
CONNECTION
ACCURACY
CASE
MATERIAL
PRESSURE RANGE
30" Hg VAC/kPa
30" Hg VAC-30 psig
0-15 psig/kPa
0-30 psig/kPa
0-60 psig/kPa
0-100 psig/kPa
0-160 psig/kPa
0-200 psig/kPa
0-300 psig/kPa
0-400 psig/kPa
0-600 psig/kPa
ECONOMY
1-1/2"
1/8" CBM
3-2-3%
BLACK
STEEL
N/A
N/A
N/A
PG-05
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1-1/2"
1/8" LM
2-1-2%
BLACK
STEEL
PG-15-30-0-8L
N/A
PG-15-0-15-8L PG-15-0-30-8L PG-15-0-60-8L PG-15-0-100-8L PG-15-0-160-8L PG-15-0-200-8L PG-15-0-300-8L PG-15-0-400-8L PG-15-0-600-8L
1-1/2"
1/8" CBM
2-1-2%
BLACK
STEEL
PG-15-30-0-8C
N/A
PG-15-0-15-8C PG-15-0-30-8C PG-15-0-60-8C PG-15-0-100-8C PG-15-0-160-8C PG-15-0-200-8C PG-15-0-300-8C PG-15-0-400-8C PG-15-0-600-8C
GAUGE TYPE
2"
1/4" CBM
2-1-2%
BLACK
STEEL
PG-20-30-0-4C
N/A
PG-20-0-15-4C PG-20-0-30-4C PG-20-0-60-4C PG-20-0-100-4C PG-20-0-160-4C PG-20-0-200-4C PG-20-0-300-4C PG-20-0-400-4C PG-20-0-600-4C
2-1/2"
1/4" LM
2-1-2%
BLACK
STEEL
PG-25-30-0-4L PG-25-30-30-4L PG-25-0-15-4L PG-25-0-30-4L PG-25-0-60-4L PG-25-0-100-4L PG-25-0-160-4L PG-25-0-200-4L
N/A N/A N/A
CONTRACTOR
4-1/2"
1/4" LM
1%
STAINLESS
STEEL
PG-45-30-0-4L PG-45-30-30-4L PG-45-0-15-4L PG-45-0-30-4L PG-45-0-60-4L PG-45-0-100-4L PG-45-0-160-4L PG-45-0-200-4L
N/A N/A N/A
2-1/2"
1/4" PM
2-1-2%
BLACK
STEEL
PG-25-30-0-4P N/A PG-25-0-15-4P PG-25-0-30-4P PG-25-0-60-4P PG-25-0-100-4P PG-25-0-160-4P PG-25-0-200-4P
N/A N/A N/A
QUALITY
2"
1/4" LM
2-1-2%
BLACK
STEEL
PG-20-30-0-4L
N/A
PG-20-0-15-4L PG-20-0-30-4L PG-20-0-60-4L PG-20-0-100-4L PG-20-0-160-4L PG-20-0-200-4L PG-20-0-300-4L PG-20-0-400-4L PG-20-0-600-4L
2"
1/4" PM
2-1-2%
BLACK
STEEL
PG-20-30-0-4P
N/A
PG-20-0-15-4P PG-20-0-30-4P PG-20-0-60-4P PG-20-0-100-4P PG-20-0-160-4P PG-20-0-200-4P PG-20-0-300-4P PG-20-0-400-4P PG-20-0-600-4P

1174. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1112fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Maximum Pressure
Brass Snubbers 3000 psig (20,685 kPa)
SS Snubbers 5000 psig (34,475 kPa)
PT 250 psig (1724 kPa)
Maximum Temperature PT
400°F (204°C)
Materials Of Construction Snubbers
Brass, Stainless Steel
PT Steel
Process Connection Snubbers
1/8" MNPT
PT 1/4" NPT (1/8" NPT fittings provided
Dimensions 747 Series
1.2"H X 0.69" diameter
(3.05 X 1.75 cm)
47 Series 1.5"H X 0.69" diameter
(3.81 X 1.75 cm)
PT 5.5" L (14 cm)
0.688
(1.75)
Instrument connection Instrument connection
in
(cm)
Model 47Model 747
1/8" FNPT
1/8" MNPT
Pressure source
Pressure source
1.2
(3.05)
0.688
(1.75)
1/8" FNPT
1/8" MNPT
1.5
(3.81)
Maximum pressure
747B - 3000 psig (20,685 kPa) 47B - 3000 psig (20,685 kPa)
747S - 5000 psig (34,475 kPa) 47S - 5000 psig (34,475 kPa)
DESCRIPTION
Snubbers will stop shocks and pulsations that damage pressure instruments, thus cutting costs of maintenance, calibration, and repair
. They will also assure accuracy of the
instruments and the readings, increase life of instruments, and prevent false operation of control equipment
. Kele offers
two types of pressure snubbers; piston and porous.
Model 47 Snubbers
Model 47 incorporates a piston that moves up and down inside of an internal tube within the snubber
. This movement
of the piston, caused by the shocks and pulsations of the fluid, dampens the effect of these pulsations
.
Model 47 comes with three piston sizes: #02, #2, and #3.
Piston #2 is installed in the f
actory in the snubber
. It is used
f
or most applications, such as water, air, and steam
. The #3
piston is used for a greater snubbing effect, while the #02 piston is used for relatively thick fluids or low pressure water applications
.
Model 747 Snubbers
Model 747 is a porous snubber and a low-cost alternative to piston snubbers
. There are no moving parts. It uses a porous
mater
ial to dampen the effect of shocks and pulsations
. The
Model 747 is available in stainless steel and brass, and it is ordered based on the application, gases or liquids
.
Model PT In steam pressure monitor
ing, the temperature of the steam
is higher than the maximum operating temperature of most pressure transmitters
. A Model PT steam pigtail syphon will
protect a pressure transmitter applied to steam systems. See
the "T
echnical Reference" section in the Kele catalog for more
detailed information
.
DIMENSIONS
SNUBBERS, PIGTAIL
47B-1, 47S-1, 747B, 747S, PT
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
47B-1 Brass piston style snubber
47S-1 Stainless steel piston style snubber
747BE-1 Brass porous style snubber for light oil and water
747BG-1 Brass porous style snubber for air, steam, and other gases
747SE-1 Stainless steel porous style snubber for light oil and water
747SG-1 Stainless steel porous style snubber for air, steam, and other gases
PT 1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings
PTX1
with
47S-1
PT
(Steam Syphon)
747B Snubber
The Model PT is constructed of steel and is suitable for steam pressure to 250 psig (1724 kPa) 400°F (204°C)
. Each is
fur
nished with two 1/4" FPT x 1/8" FPT couplings and one 1/8"
MPT x 1/8" MPT nipple for convenient installation
.

1175. fifl−˚ 1113PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
1. Positive static pressure increases as the filter gets dirty.
2. Differential across filter changes as filter gets dirty.
3. Flow is reduced as filter gets dirty.
4. Negative pressure increases as the filter gets dirty. 5. Fan operation and true air flow: varying amounts of static pressure. Probes must be perpendicular to air flow.
12 3
45
DESCRIPTION
Static Pressure Sensors
The A-300-K Series sensors are used with pressure transmitters and
pressure switches to sense duct pressures
. Two sensors are required
to monitor pressure across coils, filters, blowers, etc. A-301-K and
A-302-K have four radial sensing holes and 4" (10.2 cm) insertion
depth. The A-308-K should be used only where accuracy is not
critical. All mount in a 3/8" hole in the duct. If the interior of the duct is
not accessible, an optional A-345-K flange mounting kit may be used.
Room Static Pressure or Total Pressure Sensor Kit
The versatile Model 60681 Pressure Sensing Kit is used for monitoring static pressure (aspiration) or total pressure (impact)
.
The kit includes a 7" (17.8 cm) universal sensing probe, adjustable
mounting flange, 1/4" adapter, and 3' (0.9 m) length of tubing (1/4" ID
x 3/8" OD). For total (impact) pressure applications, install the curved
tip opening facing into the air stream or away from the air stream for vacuum applications
.
Total Pressure Sensor
The Model 21122 (4") and 21123 (8") sensors are used primarily for proving air flow in ducts
. The opening in the tip of the 4" (10.2 cm)
aluminum tube faces upstream and senses impact (total) pressure.
The "-112" models accept 1/8" to 1/4" ID fle
xible tubing
.
Outdoor Static Pressure Sensor The
A-306-K Outdoor Static Pressure Sensor provides an outdoor
pressure signal for reference in building pressurization applications.
The
A-306-K includes the sensor, 50' (15
.24m) of vinyl tubing,
mounting bracket, and hardware.
Room Static Pressure Sensor The
Model RPS is a stainless steel, wall-mounted room static
pressure sensor. It mounts directly to the wall or to a standard
electrical box. The Model RPS-W is a white plastic, wall-mounted
room static pressure sensor, and the Model RPS-I is ivory. The RPS
sensors have a 100 micron stainless steel breather vent.
Filter Kit The Model
A-605 Filter Kit includes an aluminum surface mounting
bracket and screws, two 5 ft lengths of 1/4" aluminum tubing, two static pressure tips, and two plastic vent valves
.
Surge Dampener
Surge Dampener Model SD-01 absorbs rapid pressure fluctuations to provide steady pressure outputs
. The dampener has two
independent channels - one for the low pressure tubing and one for the high pressure tubing
. Surge dampeners are typically used with
outdoor pressure sensors
, which are subject to wind gusts, and
isolation rooms, clean rooms, or operating rooms where opening or closing doors creates sudden pressure changes.
APPLICATION
AIR PRESSURE SENSORS, SURGE DAMPENERS
A300 SERIES, RPS, SD-01, 21121, 60681
A-300 Series
ORDERING INFORMATION
60681
RPS-W
RPS & SD-01
MODEL DESCRIPTION
60681 Static or total pressure sensing kit
A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression
A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb
A-308-K Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb
A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K)
A-3145K A-301-K duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression with A-345-K mounting flange
A-3245K A-302-K duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb with A-345-K mounting flange
A-3845K A-308-K duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb with A-345-K mounting flange
21122 4" aluminum impact tube, 1/4" OD connection
21122-112 6" aluminum impact tube for 1/8" thru 1/4" ID flexible plastic tubing
21123 8" aluminum impact tube, 1/4" OD connection
21123-112 8" aluminum impact tube for 1/8" thru 1/4" ID flexible plastic tubing
A-306-K Outdoor air static pressure kit
A-605 Mounting kit for air filter application. Includes aluminum surface mounting brackets with screws, two 5 ft. lengths of 1/4"
aluminum tubing, two static pressure tips and two plastic vent valves.
RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb
RPS-I Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb
RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb
SD-01 Surge dampener
B-137 1/4" barb adapter for #21122 and #21123 (standard pack-50)

1176. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1114fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
A REFRESHER ON 4-20 MA SIGNAL
The control signal, 4-20 mA, is the most common type of analog/proportional/modulating (these terms tend to be used
interchangeably in our industry) signal we deal with and there are some fundamental facts about the 4-20 mA signal that we all
know but are worth reviewing
.
The 4-20 mA control signal is
, of course, a variable current signal where 4 mA typically represents the low end of a range, for
example 0%, and 20 mA represents the high end, for example 100%
. This works great for measuring a given pressure range in a
duct, the stroke position of a damper actuator, or the speed command being sent to a variable frequency drive. With the low end of
the signal being 4 mA rather than zero, the instrumentation, and the technician, can distinguish between a zero signal and a broken wire or broken instrument
.
When referring to sensors, there are two-wire 4-20 mA signals, in which the sensor and the output signal are “loop-powered” with
a 24 VDC power supply (Fig. 1), and three-wire 4-20 mA signals where the device requires 24 VAC (or VDC) power and generates
the 4-20 mA signal (Fig. 2) directly. The examples shown are based on the Kele DPA Series differential pressure transmitters, but
the wiring is typical of all the 4-20 mA sensors in our catalog.
Any 4-20 mA signal can be converted to a 2-10 VDC signal by putting a 500Ω resistor across the signal +/- terminals. The controller
will “see” 2-10 VDC across the resistor as the 4-20 mA flows through it (Ohm’s Law, V=IR). In the example above, if a controller
analog input requires a voltage instead of a current signal, installing the resistor across the two input terminals at the controller will do the trick
.
The same resistor solution holds tr
ue for sending a signal to an actuator used to drive a damper or valve
. If a controller analog
utput is 4-20 mA, and the actuator requires a 2-10
VDC signal, just install the resistor at the actuator signal input terminals
. For 1-5
VDC, substitute a 250Ω resistor instead of 500Ω.
Verifying the signal is easy; put a meter in series with the 4-20 mA signal wires so the current flows through the meter. Set it to
measure DC milliamps
, make sure the leads are plugged into the common and milliamp sockets, and set the scale to read in the
range that includes 20 mA
. See the sidebar at the top of the next page to avoid a pitfall that we hear about all too frequently!
There you have it. Give us a call if you have questions. Did you know the Technical Sales Reps in the Kele Sales Department have
combined over 120 years in the HVAC Controls business? We know our business, we can help, and we’re here to make it easy for you!

24 VDC
Power Supply
4-20 mA
Two-wire 4-20 mA
with 24 VDC Po wer Supply
24 VAC
Transformer
4-20 mA
Three-wire 4-20 mA
with 24 VAC Transformer
VAC
G
H
Fig. 1
Fig. 2

24 VDC
Power Supply
4-20 mA
Two-wire 4-20 mA
with 24 VDC Po wer Supply
24 VAC
Transformer
4-20 mA
Three-wire 4-20 mA
with 24 VAC Transformer
VAC
G
H
Fig. 1
Fig. 2

1177. fifl−˚ 1115PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI
PRESSURE EQUATIONS
PRESSURE CONVERSION FA CTORS
psig = in of H 20 x 0 .0361 in of H 20 = psig x 27 .71
psig = ft of H
20 x 0 .4335 ft of H 20 = psig x 2 .31
psig = mm of H
20 x 0 .0014 mm of H 20 = psig x 703 .1
psig = cm of H
20 x 0 .0142 cm of H 20 = psig x 70 .31
psig = in of Hg x 0 .4912 in of Hg = psig x 2 .036
psig = mm of Hg x 0 .0193 mm of Hg = psig x 57 .71
psig = cm of Hg x 0 .193 cm of Hg = psig x 5 .771
psig = kg/cm
2
x 14 .22 kg/cm
2
= psig x 0 .0703
psig = bar x 14 .50 bar = psig x 0 .0689
psig = mbar x 0 .0145 mbar = psig x 68 .95
psig = Pa x 1 .45 x 10
-4
Pa = psig x 6895
psig = kPa x 0 .1450 kPa = psig x 6 .895
psig = atm x 14 .696 atm = psig x 0 .068
psia = psig + 14 .696 (sea level)
AIR PRESSURE / FLOW FORMULAS
V = 4004 P v Where: V = Velocity (fpm)
P
v = Velocity pressure ("W .C .)
P
v* = V 2 P t = Total pressure ("W .C .)
4004 P
s = Static pressure ("W .C .)
P
v = P t - Ps * P v may be determined by a pitot tube .
Scim = SCFM*1728
HEAD PRESSURE FORMULAS
Head (feet) = psig x 2 .31 psig = f eet head x specific gravity*
specific gravity 2 .31
PRESSURE DEFINITIONS
Absolute Pressure The sum of gauge pressure and atmospheric pressure
Atmospheric Pressure The pressure existing at the surface of the earth caused by the weight of a
column of air above the point of measurement; va ries with altitude and weather
conditions, but 14 .696 psia is generally accepted except in high altitude
locations
Gauge Pressure A pressure reading above atmospheric pressure; most instruments read
gauge pressure
Pitot Tube A tube that is inserted in a duct to measure both total pressure and static
pressure and has separate connections so each pressure may be sensed
Pressure Transmitter A device that converts a pressure input into an electrical signal
Snubber A device used to dampen pulsations to pressure instruments
Static Pressure The outward push of a fluid against the walls of a container in ev ery direction
Total Pressure The sum of static pressure and velocity pressure
Velocity Pressure The pressure ex erted by the velocity of a fluid; generally obtained by measuring
total pressure and static pressure and subtracting the static pressure from total
pressure
()
(*Water - 1 .00, Ethylene glycol - 1 .125) WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014

1178. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1116fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18
MEASURING AIRFLOW
Building automation systems (BAS) are often required to
measure the actual airflow in air handling systems. Although
there are many ways to measure airflow, the two most com- monly used with a BAS are the hot wire anemometer and various devices that measure the velocity pressure of the air
.
Once the velocity pressure is known, the BAS is then able to calculate airflow
. Each method has advantages as well as
disadvantages.
Hot Wire Anemometers The primary advantage of the hot wire anemometer is that it can provide an analog output that is proportional to flow, and no square root calculation is required to measure airflow
. The
disadvantages of the hot wire anemometer are that it mea- sures only one point in the cross section of the duct, and it may require periodic recalibration (see Model AVS-200 and
Model EE65 in the Flow section)
.
Differential Pressure Devices Pitot tubes and averaging tubes are among the flow measur
-
ing devices that measure velocity pressure. The pitot tube
may be used with a differential pressure transmitter to deter- mine airflow at a relatively low cost; however, the BAS con- troller must be able to calculate the square root of the velocity pressure
. Also, the pitot tube measures the velocity at only
one point in the duct.
Airflow Calculations with a Pitot Tube Figure 1 shows a typical pitot tube
. In this diagram, P
s is the
static pressure exerted in all directions, such as the pressure inside a balloon. This is sensed by the radial holes in the pitot
tube. P
v is the velocity pressure caused by the momentum of
the air moving in the duct
. P
t is the total pressure and is the
sum of the static pressure and velocity pressure (P
t=Ps+Pv)
.
The opening in the tip of the pitot tube measures total pres
-
sure
. Since only velocity pressure is required to calculate air
flow, the total pressure is piped to the high-pressure port of a differential pressure transmitter, and the static pressure is piped to the low-pressure port of the transmitter
. The differ-
ential pressure that is then measured is the velocity pressure (P
v=Pt-Ps)
. Once the velocity pressure is known, velocity may
be calculated by the following formula:
Air density is normally assumed to be 0.075 lb/ft
3
, based on
70°F dry air at 29
.9” Hg barometric pressure. If corrections
must be made for barometric pressure or air temperature, the
air density may be calculated by the following formula:
If air density is assumed to be standard (0.075 lb/ft
3
), the
output of the differential pressure transmitter may be used to
calculate air velocity by the following formula:
For accurate results, a differential pressure transmitter should
be selected that corresponds as closely as possible to the
velocity pressure to be measured (see Figure 2).
Once the air velocity is known, airflow in cfm is simply the
duct inside area multiplied by air velocity
.
Notice that V is average duct velocity. When using a pitot
tube, velocity can be measured at only one point in the duct
. In a straight duct run, the velocity will be greatest in
the center of the duct and lowest near the duct wall where the effects of friction slow airflow
. The size and the shape of
the duct determine how much the center velocity will deviate from the average velocity
. To obtain an approximate average
duct velocity when a pitot tube is installed in the center of a straight duct, reduce the center velocity by 10%
. This will
yield results that should be accurate to within ±5%.
Air Velocity (fpm) = (C f) x M
o
- 4
where C
f = flow coefficient from Figure 2
M
o= pressure transmitter mA output
Airflow (cfm) = V x A
where V = average duct velocity (ft/min)
A = duct cross sectional area (ft
2
)
P
AIRFLOW
P
Static Pressure
Connection
Total
Pressure
Connection
160-xxx
Pitot
Tube
Low-Pressure Port
High-Pressure Port
T30-xxx
Differential
Pressure
Transmitter
Controller
Input
DCP-250
24 VDC
Power Supply
P
T
V
+
()
S
P
S
P
S
120 VAC
FIGURE 1. MEASURING AIRFLOW WITH A PITOT TUBE
Air Density = 1.325 x P B
T
where P
B = barometric pressure in "Hg
T = absolute temperature (°F + 460)
Velocity (fpm) = 1096 P v
D
where Pv = velocity pressure in “W.C.
D = air density in lb/ft
3WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014

1179. fifl−˚ 1117PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
CONTROLLING DUCT PRESSURE
In this example, we are using the setpoint potentiometer on
the UCM-420A to adjust the pressure, so the local setpoint
should be enabled and the remote setpoint disabled. As
the pressure in the duct increases, the control signal from
the UCM-420A must decrease to slow down the fan speed,
assuming the VFD is direct acting (speed increases with an
increase in control signal); therefore, reverse-acting control
should be selected for the UCM-420A. The integral reset rate
and throttling range required will vary from system to system
and must be determined in the field.
Since pulse-width modulation is not to be used in this
example, all PWM functions are disabled. The jumpers will
be set for three-wire potentiometer local setpoint and
4-20 mA input from the pressure transducer. The instructions
furnished with the UCM-420A explain in detail how to set the
DIP switches and jumpers to accomplish the above setting.

The input to the UCM-420A from the static pressure
transducer has a range of 0-3” W.tC. Therefore, when there is no pressure in the duct, the input will be 4 mA; when the static pressure in the duct is 3” W.C., the input will be 20 mA. The setpoint potentiometer scale on the UCM-420A is labeled 0-100%. In our example, we require 2” W.C. in the duct, so the setpoint potentiometer should be set for 2/3 x 100 = 67%.

Tuning the System As stated earlier, the throttling range and integral reset must be fine-tuned in the field and cannot be calculated. The

throttling range is defined as the amount of signal change at the input required to cause the output to go through its entire range (4-20 mA). For example, a 50% throttling range means
that for every 1 mA change in the input, there will be a 2 mA change in the output. To properly adjust the throttling range, first disable the integral reset and set the throttling range at 100%. Then, reduce the throttling range in increments until the controller begins to hunt. When the controller begins to hunt, the throttling range is too narrow, so widen it one step. The integral reset rate may now be adjusted. The integral reset corrects the output of the UCM-420A to compensate for the offset inherent in proportional-only controllers. The integral reset ramps the output in the direction that forces the input signal to exactly match the setpoint. The number of times per minute this offset is overcome by the output signal is the integral reset rate. The quicker the system responds, the higher (more resets per minute) the reset rate may be set.

A Good Solution
This control system will provide very smooth, precise static pressure control in the discharge duct. It will also save energy since the fan will use only as much horsepower as required to maintain the setpoint pressure. In this example, the pressure is adjusted with the setpoint potentiometer on the UCM-420A. This pressure could also be controlled by a remote potentiometer or an analog or pulse width signal from a BAS controller.
Another application would be controlling multiple zones
(such as VAV boxes) from one BAS controller output by
using the multiplex PWM mode. In this application, a Precon
Type 3 thermistor could be used as the temperature input to
each UCM-420A, and the BAS controller could send eight
different setpoint signals to the zones. Multiple UCM-420As
could receive the same setpoint signal.
PWM
INPUT
PWM
INPUT
REM SPT
INPUT
LOC SPT
POT +
LOC SPT
INPUT
LOC SPT
POT –
INPUT
24 PWR
COMMON
MA SIG
11
12
B3
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
B6
0
0
0
0
1
B7
0
0
1
1
X
B8
0
1
0
1
X
B4
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
B5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
MUX
ADDR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A6
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
A7
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
A8
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
PROP
T .R .
10% 20% 35% 50% 65% 80% 90%
100%
UCM-420A DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
TIME
BASE
2 .65
5 .2
12 .85
25 .6
.59-2 .93
A4
0 0 1 1
A5
0 1 0 1
RESET
PER MIN
OFF
0 .5
1 2
"1" MEANS
TURN SWITCH ON
"0" MEANS
TURN SWITCH OFF
A3
A2
A1
B1
B2
LOCAL
SETPOINT
FEEDBACKREMOTE
SETPOINT
STATUS
B
A
123456 78
123456 78
MODEL DT13E
Signal Isolator*
DCP-250
1 2
3 4 5 6
7 8 9
10
INPUT
OUTPUT +
–
+
–
SIG IN
SIG IN
SIG OUT
SIG OUT
AC PWR
AC PWR
Isolated Control
Signal to VFD
* Required only if the VFD used
requires an isolated control signal
+–
Power Supply
24 VDC
120 VAC
+
–
Connect to duct
Open to the atmosphereHi
Lo
T30-030
Transmitter
UCM-420A
SWITCH OFF SWITCH ON
REVERSE ACTING
BOTH OFF >> REMOTE SETPT
SAMPLE AND HOLD MODE
BOTH OFF >> ANALOG
REMOTE SETPOINT
DIRECT ACTING
LOCAL SETPT ENABLE
REMOTE SETPT ENABLE
PWM REM SETPT SGLE UNIT
PWM REM SETPT MUX MODE
FIGURE 1. VARIABLE AIR VOLUME SYSTEM WIRING

1180. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1118fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
PROVIDING STEAM ISOLATION AND TEMPERATURE PROTECTION
Steam Isolation
All pressure transducers installed on steam lines should
be isolated from the steam to protect them from damage.
A steam pigtail syphon, such as the Model PT, may be used
for this purpose.
Temperature Protection
Frequently, it is necessary to measure the pressure of
fluids at temperatures either above or below the operating
range of available transducers. The expense of a special
transducer can often be avoided if the pressure transducer
is isolated from the pressure source by a short length of pipe
or tubing.
The curves on Figure 1 show how to limit the temperature at
the transducer to a range of 0° to 200°F (-17.8° to 93.3°C)
for fluid temperatures between -400° and 1700°F (-204.4°C
to 926°C). Figure 1 shows the various tubing lengths, sizes,
and materials that can be used.
Deviation from these conditions will require some slight
adjustments in the length of tubing selected, or if there is
any doubt, a Model TM99A handheld thermometer on the
transducer will readily verify proper operating conditions.
Note that a 6” (15.2 cm) length of 1/4” (0.64 cm) stainless
steel tubing will effectively protect a transducer from a
1000°F (537.8°C) pressure source. Thus, pressure
transducers capable of operating at 200°F (93.3°C)
can measure the pressure of fluids having much higher
temperatures.
Model PT
FIGURE 1. TUBING LENGTH TO ISOLATE TRANSDUCER FROM TEMPERATURE SOURCE
The curves shown on the chart are based on the following assumptions:
1. The pressure vessel is insulated to limit radiant heat transfer to the transducer. Thus, the major source of thermal input is
via the connecting tube.
2. The pressure medium has a coefficient of thermal conductivity less than 0.4 BTU/hr/ft
2
/ft/°F (6 cal/hr/cm
2
/cm/°C).
This figure encompasses a wide range of liquids and gases.
3.
The ambient temperature around the transducer is 100°F (37.8°C).
4. The heat-transfer rate (convection) from the tubing to still air is
1.44 BTU/ft
2
/hr°F (1 cal/cm
2
/hr°C).
From Data Instruments Reference
L = Length of Tubing (inches)
O
T = Temperature of Pressure Source (˚F)
T = 100˚F Maximum transducer temperature 200˚F
Minimum transducer temperature 0˚F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
303SS 0 .25 OD X 0 .18 ID
(0 .635 cm OD X 0 .457 cm ID
303SS 0 .25 OD X 0 .18 ID
(0 .635 cm OD X 0 .457 cm ID
BRASS 0 .25 OD X 0 .18 ID
(0 .635 cm OD X 0 .457 cm ID)
303SS 0 .125 OD X 0 .07 ID
(0 .318 cm OD X 0 .18 cm ID)
2000
1800
1600
1400
1200
1000
800
600
400
200
0
-200
-400
A

1181. fifl−˚ 1119PRESSURE
PRESSURE
18
PSI WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
CONTROLLING DUCT PRESSURE
The Model UCM-420A is one of the most versatile products
sold by Kele. Although this product is capable of performing
many control functions, it was primarily designed as a
setpoint controller. Since the introduction of the UCM-420A,
responses from customers indicate that pressure control is a
popular application for this product.
Controlling static pressure in a duct by varying fan
speed with a variable frequency drive (VFD) is a common
application. This system could also be used to control
the pressure with inlet vanes, discharge dampers, bypass
dampers, etc. The same principles involved in this
application could be used in other control applications, such
as controlling water pressure with variable speed pumping,
VAV zone control, or humidifier control. A Model PCM
pressure controller may be used to sense duct pressure
and provide an analog Proportional plus Integral (PI) control
signal to control this pressure. However, in this article, we
utilized a DPL Series pressure transmitter and a UCM-420A
setpoint controller so the relationship between the system
components would be more clearly defined.

A VAV Application Figure 1 shows a simple variable air volume (VAV) system.

As the spaces served by the VAV terminals are satisfied, the zone dampers will modulate closed and, without a pressure control system, the static pressure in the duct will rise. For this example, assume that a static pressure of 2” W.C. is required. To monitor the static pressure in the duct, we will use a DPL Series differential pressure transmitter with a range of 0-3” W.C. The 4-20 mA signal from this device will be fed into a UCM-420A setpoint
controller, which in turn will control the speed of the fan by sending a 4-20 mA control signal to the fan’s VFD. The manual potentiometer on the UCM-420A will be used to
set the static pressure at the desired level. See the wiring diagram in Figure 2 on the next page for system wiring.
This wiring diagram shows a Model DT13E signal isolator. The DT13E will not be needed unless the VFD requires an
isolated control signal.
Programming the UCM-420A
All programming of the UCM-420A is done by DIP switches
and jumpers. A list of the functions programmed by DIP
switches, as well as those programmed by jumpers, is
shown in Table 1. The proper settings for this example are
also shown.
VAV Terminal
VAV Terminal
Supply
Air
Return
Air
PI
Control
Signal
AC Power
In
UCM-420A
24 VDC
T30-030
4-20 mA
VFD
Static
Pressure
Tubing
VAV Terminal
FIGURE 1. VARIABLE AIR VOLUME SYSTEM
TABLE 1. PROGRAMMED FUNCTIONS
DIP Switch Functions
Remote setpoint Disable
enable/disable
Local setpoint Enable
enable/disable
Direct-/Reverse-acting Reverse acting
Integral reset rate As required
Throttling range As required
Single unit PWM Disable
enable/disable
Multiplex PWM Disable
enable/disable
Multiplex unit address Off
PWM time base Off
Jumper Functions
Remote setpoint signal None
Local setpoint signal
Three-wire
potentiometer
Input signal 4-20 mA

1182. fifl−˚
PRESSURE 1120fifl−˚
PRESSURE
PSI
18 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
BACK TO BASICS PRESSURE
One of the many common ties that bind all building automa-
tion and energy management systems is sensing pressure.
Pressure readings throughout a system are g
reat indicators of
system performance
. Sensed pressure can also be used to in-
directly control other variables like temperature and flow. Here
are some of the pressures associated with Building A
utomation
and Energy Management Systems:
Absolute Pressure
The sum of gauge pressure and atmospheric pressure
.
Atmospheric Pressure The pressure e
xisting at the surface of the earth caused by
the weight of a column of air above the point of measurement
.
Atmospher
ic Pressure varies with altitude and weather condi-
tions, but 14
.696 psia is generally accepted except in high
altitude locations.
Compound Pressure Pressure r
anging from vacuum to gauge pressure
.
Diff
erential Pressure
The difference between two pressures
.
Gauge Pressure
A pressure reading above Atmospheric Pressure. Most instru-
ments read gauge pressure.
Static Pressure The outw
ard push of a fluid against the walls of a container
.
T
otal Pressure
The sum of Static Pressure and Velocity Pressure
.
V
elocity Pressure
The pressure exerted by the velocity of a fluid
. Velocity pressure
is generally obtained by measuring Total Pressure and Static Pressure and subtracting the Static Pressure from Total Pres- sure
. The remainder is Velocity Pressure.
The tw
o types of pressure most commonly applied in Building
Automation and HVAC systems are Gauge Pressure and Differ- ential Pressure
. Gauge pressure is often used to indicate things
lik
e the efficiency of compressors (via pressure transducers),
to protect equipment (with pressure switches)
. Differential pres-
sure is often used to control building static pressure (through differential pressure transmitters), protect equipment (through differential pressure switches), and to indicate flow (usually by employing a pitot tube or venturi pressure sensor)
.

1183. HUMIDITY
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS &
CONTACTORS
LY/MK Series | p. 1125 RV8H Series | p. 1132 G7L Series | p. 1150
Hundreds of Options in Stock, and Thousands of Options Available.

1184. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RIB Series | p. 1133
RV8H | p. 1132
DPC Series | p. 1151
RELAYS &
CONTACTORS
Board Mounted Relays
MR Series — Air Products and Controls Multi-Voltage Control Relays. . . . . 1143
RIB M Series
— Functional Devices Modular Panel Relays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145
Contactors DPC Series
— Definite Purpose Contactors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151
T30, T40, T60, T90
— EEC Definite Purpose Contactors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152
Enclosed Relays RIB, RIBT Pilot Series
— Relay In A Box for Pump Level Switch Control
. . . 1133
RIB, RIBT Power Series
— Functional Devices Relay In A Box
. . . . . . . . . . 1135
RIB01 and RIB02 Series
— Functional Devices Relay in a Box Dry C
ontact Input Series
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138
PAM-1, PAM-4
— Air Products and Controls Multi-Voltage Relay Modules
. . 1147
Plug-In General Purpose Relays RH, RJ, RR Series
— IDEC General-Purpose Relays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
SH, SJ, SR Series
— IDEC Relay Sockets
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
G2R-S, LY, MK Series
— Omron General-Purpose Relays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
P2RF, PF, PTF Series
— Omron Relay Sockets
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127
781, 782, 783, 784 Series
— Magnecraft Relays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129
70-781D5-1, 70-782D-1, 70-783D-1, 70-784D-1
— Magnecraft Relay
Sockets
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
RV8H Series
— 6mm Interface Relays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132
20307 Series
— Special Voltage Relays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155
Power Relays KE375, KE900 Series
— Power Relays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148
G7L Series
— Omron Power Relays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150
Specialty Relay Products RIBL Latching Series
— Relay In A Box Latching Relay Series
. . . . . . . . . . 1137
RIBTW Series
— Functional Devices LonWorks Relay in a Box
. . . . . . . . . . 1139
RIBTW2401B-BC
— Functional Devices BACnet Relay in a Box
. . . . . . . . . . 1140
RIBW Series
— Functional Devices Wireless Control Relays
. . . . . . . . . . . . 1141
RSSDN
— IDEC Solid State Relay
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153
Model ALT
— Alternating Relay
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155
PIL-2
— Kele Motor Starter Interface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167
Timing Relays RTE Series
— IDEC Multifunction Electronic Timers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158
TRU Series
— Multifunction Timing Relays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160
821TD10H, TDRSOXP, TDRSRXP
— Magnecraft Time Delay Relays
. . . . . 1162
438USA, 438USA-INT
— Delay On Make / Interval Timers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156
TMV8000, KRDM
— Delay-on-Make Timing Relays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164
TA, CT Series
— Lockout Delay Timer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165
KRDB, KSDB, TDUB
— Delay-on-Break Timing Relays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166

1185. fi 1121RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
RH SERIES
RR Series
RH SERIES (UL ratings)
RR SERIES (UL ratings)
RATED
VOLTAGE
RATED CURRENT (mA) ±15% @ 20°C
60 Hz 50 Hz
COIL RESISTANCE ()
±10% @ 20°C
AC
DC
12
24
120
240
12
24
4PDT
21.2
84.5
7,360
9,120
4PDT
96
388
3PDT
25.3
103
10,800
12,100
3PDT
100
400
DPDT
39.3
153
–
–
DPDT
160
650
SPDT
165
83
16.5
8.3
SPDT
188
750
4PDT
196
98
19.5
9.8
3PDT
165
81
16.4
8.2
DPDT
121
60.5
–
–
SPDT
86
42
8.6
4.9
4PDT
165
83
16.5
8.3
3PDT
140
70
14.2
7.1
DPDT
100
50
–
–
SPDT
75
37
7.5
4.3
SPDT
64
32
DPDT
75
36.9
3PDT
120
60
4PDT
125
62
VOLTAGE
RESISTIVE GENERAL USE HORSEPOWER RATING
RH3
1/3 hp
1/6 hp
–
–
1/3 hp
1/6 hp
–
–
–
–
–
–
RH1
RH2RH4
5A
7.5A
–
–
RH3
6.5A
7.5A
–
–
RH4
RH1
RH2
7A
–
7A
–
RH4
7.5A
10A
–
10A
RH3
7.5A
10A
10A
–
RH1
RH2
10A
–
10A
–
240V AC
120V AC
30V DC
28V DC
RATED
VOLTAGE
Rated Current (mA) ±15% @ 20°C
60 Hz 50 Hz
AC
DC
12
24
120
240
12
24
365
182
35
18
–
–
210
105
20.5
10.5
245
121
24
12.1
120
60
VOLTAGE RESITIVE (A) INDUCTIVE (A)
cos = 0.3
MOTOR LOAD (hp)
7
7.5
7
1/3
1/4
–
10
10
10
240 AC
120 AC
30 DC
RJ Series
Rated Current (mA) ±15% @ 20°C
60 Hz
WITHOUT LED
1
WITH LED
1
50 Hz60 Hz50 Hz
AC
BLADE
& PCB
BLADE
PCB
DC
24V
120V
24V
24V
243
6,400
1,080
1,080
37.5
7.5
43.9
8.8
41.1
7.4
47.5
8.7
Maximum continuous applied voltage
RH, RR 110% of rated voltage
RJ 140% of rated voltage
Pull-in voltage
RH, RR, RJ/AC 80% of rated voltage
RJ, RJ/DC 70% of rated voltage
Drop-out voltage
AC 30% or more of rated voltage
DC 10% or more of rated voltage
Contact material
RH Silver cadmium oxide
RR Silver
RJ Silver nickel alloy
Contact resistance
RH 50 m maximum
RR 30 m maximum
RJ 50 m maximum
Operate time
RH, RR 25 ms maximum
RJ 15 ms maximum
Release time
RH, RR 25 ms maximum
RJ 10 ms maximum
Min load
RH 24 VDC/30 mA, 5 VDC/100 mA
RR 24 VDC/10 mA, 5 VDC/20 mA
RJ 5 VDC/100 mA
Operating temp -22° to 158°F (-30° to 70°C)
Agency approvals UL-recognized component,
(RH, RR): File #E66043,
(RJ): File #E55996
CSA certified, File #LR35144;
CE certified (not RR blade style)
Warranty 1 year
COIL RATINGS CONTACT RATINGS
RJ1S RJ2S
12A @ 250 VA C/30 VDC
12A @ 250 VAC; 6A @ 30 VDC
7.5A @ 250 VAC; 6A @ 30 VDC
7.5A @ 250 VAC; 3A @ 30 VDC
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
Resistive Load
(Maximum)
CONTACT
8A @ 250 VAC/30 VDC
8A @ 250 VAC; 4A @ 30 VDC 4A @ 250 VAC; 4A @ 30 VDC 4A @ 250 VAC; 2A @ 30 VDC
Inductive Load
(Maximum)
RJ Series (UL ratings)
COIL RESISTANCE ()
±10% @ 20°C
COIL RESISTANCE ()
±10% @ 20°C
MODELS
22.1
22.1
25.7
–
1. LED indicator is only available on Blade relays.
IDEC GENERAL-PURPOSE RELAYS
RH, RJ, RR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
IDEC general-purpose relays are available in the RH Series
blade-style relays and the RR Series pin-style relays and the
RJ Series compact relays
.
The RH Series features a 10A switching capacity. They
are available in SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, and 4PDT contact configurations, driven by AC or DC coils, and they have blade terminals for socket mounting
.
The RR Series has a 10A contact rating. The RR Series
relays are available in SPDT, DPDT, and 3PDT configurations driven by AC or DC coils, and they have pin or blade terminals for socket mounting
.
The RJ Series is compact to reduce space requirements.
The
y are available in a 12A SPDT version and an 8A DPDT
version
. They are driven by AC or DC coils and have blade
terminals for socket mounting.
FEATURES
• Blade style, pin style, and compact models
• Indicator light and/or check button available
• Surface or DIN rail mount
• UL recognized, CSA certified
SPECIFICATIONS
RJ Series RH Series RR Series

1186. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1122fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
IDEC GENERAL-PURPOSE RELAYS
RH, RJ, RR SERIES
1 .39 (3 .56) or less
in
(cm)
2 .19 (5 .55)
0 .55 (1 .39)0 .82 (2 .1)
1 .07 (2 .75)
1 .07 (2 .75)
1 .07 (2 .75)
1 .22 (3 .1)
1 .14 (2 .9) 1 .42 (3 .6)
1 .87 (4 .8) or less 1 .42 (3 .64)
0 .2 (0 .5)
1 .42
(3 .64)
1 .418 (3 .6)
1 .418 (3 .6)
RR2P RR1BA, RR2BA, RR3B
RR Series Po wer Relays (blade)
RH Series Relays (blade)
RR3PA
RH2B RH3BRH1B
1 .07 (2 .75)
1 .60 (4 .1)
RH4B
RR Series Relays (pin)
2
4
3
15
1 .06 (2 .7)
0 .5 (1 .27)
1 .13 (2 .38 )
RJ Series Relays (blade)
3
45
6
7
2
18
(+)(-)
RR2P
3 9
8
7
6
5
4
2
10
1 11
(+)(-)
RR3PA
7
AB
5
2
(-)( +)
RR1BA
BA
7
4
1
9
6
3
(+)(-)
RR2BA
8
5
2
7
4
1
9
6
3
BA
(+)(-)
RR3B
9
5
1
13 14
(-)( +)
RH1B
13(-)
14(+)
RH3B
9
5
1
10
6
2
12
8
4
13
(-)
14(+)
RH4B
9
5
1
11
7
3
12
8
4
10
6
2
9
5
1
12
8
4
13 14
(-)( +)
RH2B
1 5 1 8
3
4
2
4
3
2
5
6
7
RJ1S RJ2S
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
RH1B U AC24V
Example: RR2PUAC24V DPDT relay 8 pin with 24V AC coil
U Standard relay
UL Indicator light
ULC Indicator light and check button
AC12V 12 VAC coil voltage
AC24V 24 VAC coil voltage
AC120V 120 VAC coil voltage
AC240V 240 VAC coil voltage
DC12V 12 VDC coil voltage
DC24V 24 VDC coil voltage
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RH1B Relay, SPDT, blade (use SH1B-05 socket)
RH2B Relay, DPDT, blade (use SH2B-05 socke t)
RH3B Relay, 3PDT, blade (use SH3B-05 socket)
RH4B Relay, 4PDT, blade (use SH4B-05 socket)
RJ1S C A24
C No options
CL LED indicator
A24 24 VAC coil voltage
A120 120 VAC coil voltage
D24 24 VDC coil voltage
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RJ1S Relay, SPDT (use SJ1S-05B socket)
RJ2S Relay, DPDT (use SJ2S-05B socket)
RR2P U AC24V
U Standard relay
UL Indicator light
ULC Indicator light and check button
AC12V 12 VAC coil voltage
AC24V 24 VAC coil voltage
AC120V 120 VAC coil voltage
AC240V 240 VAC coil voltage
DC12V 12 VDC coil voltage
DC24V 24 VDC coil voltage
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RR2P Relay, DPDT, 8 pin (use SR2P-05 or SR2P-06)
RR3PA Relay, 3PDT, 11 pin (use SR3P-06 socket)
RR1BA Relay, SPDT, 11 blade (use SR3B-05 socket)
RR2BA Relay, DPDT, 11 blade (use SR3B-05 socket)
RR3B Relay, 3PDT, 11 blade (use SR3B-05 socket)
Legend
NC
NO
Bottom View
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DIN-3F 35 mm DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m), RoHS compliant 860
DIN-3F, BAM-1000 DIN rail 860
SH, SR, SJ Series Relay sockets 1123

1187. fi 1123RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
Model Socket Type
Rated
Voltage
Rated
Current
Hold Down Clip or
SpringWire Size
Wire Size Weight Approvals
SJ1S-05B Blade, DIN rail or surface mount 250V 12A Lever: SJ9Z-C1 (provided) Two 14 AWG 0.06 lb (0.03 kg)
UL recognized File #E62437,
CSA certified File #LR84913, CE
SJ2S-05B Blade, DIN rail or surface mount 250V 8A Lever: SJ9Z-C1 (provided) Two 14 AWG 0.07 lb (0.034 kg)
UL recognized File #E62437,
CSA certified File #LR84913, CE
SH1B-05 Blade, DIN rail or surface mount 250V 10A
Spring: SYS-02F1;
Clip: SFA-101, SFA-202
Two 12 AWG 0.06 lb (0.03 kg)
UL recognized File #E62437,
CSA certified File #LR35144e, CE
SH2B-05 Blade, DIN rail or surface mount 300V 10A
Spring: SY4S-02F1;
Clip: SFA-101, SFA-202
Two 12 AWG 0.10 lb (0.05 kg)
UL recognized File #E62437,
CSA certified File #LR35144e, CE
SH3B-05 Blade, DIN rail or surface mount 300V 10A
Spring: SH3B05F1;
Clip: SFA-101, SFA-202
Two 12 AWG 0.13 lb (0.06 kg)
UL recognized File #E62437,
CSA certified File #LR35144e, CE
SH4B-05 Blade, DIN rail or surface mount 300V 10A
Spring: SH4B-02F1;
Clip: SFA-101, SFA-202
Two 12 AWG 0.16 lb (0.07 kg)
UL recognized File #E62437,
CSA certified File #LR35144e, CE
SR2P-05 8-Pin DIN rail or surface mount 300V 10A
Spring: SR2B-02F1 (RR2P only);
Clip: SFA-203 (RTE-P1 only)
Two 12 AWG 0.10 lb (0.05 kg)
UL recognized File #E62437,
CSA certified File #LR35144e, CE
SR2P-06 8-Pin, DIN rail or surface mount 300V 10A
Spring: SR2B-02F1 (RR2P only);
Clip: SFA-202 (RTE-P1 only)
Two 12 AWG 0.10 lb (0.05 kg)
UL recognized File #E62437,
CSA certified File #LR35144e, CE
SR3P-06 11-Pin, DIN rail or surface mount 300V 10A
Spring: SR3B-02F1 (RR only);
Clip: SFA-202 (RTE-P2 only)
Two 12 AWG 0.13 lb (0.06 kg)
UL recognized File #E62437,
CSA certified File #LR35144e, CE
SR3B-05 Blade, DIN rail or surface mount 300V 10A
Spring: SR3B-02F1 (RR3PA only);
Clip: SFA-202 (RTE-P2 only)
Two 12 AWG 0.14 lb (0.06 kg)
UL recognized File #E62437,
CSA certified File #LR35144e, CE
IDEC RELAY SOCKETS
SH, SJ, SR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The SH and SR Series of IDEC relay sockets are for use with
the IDEC RH / RR Series relays and RTE Series timers. The
SH
and SR Series include both blade and pin style sockets
and are available for one, two, three and four pole relays
.
The
SH and SR sockets can be DIN rail or surface mounted
.
The SJ Series of IDEC relay sockets are for use with the
IDEC RJ1S and RJ2S Series relays. They can be DIN rail or
surface mounted.
FEATURES
• Use with IDEC RH / RR / RJ relays and RTE timers
• Screw terminals with captive wire clamp
• Surface or DIN rail mount
• UL recognized, CSA certified and CE approved
SJ1S, SJ2S
SH1B-05
SH2B-05
SH3B-05
SH4B-05 SR2P-05 SR2P-06 SR3P-06 SR3B-05
SPECIFICATIONS

1188. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1124fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
IDEC RELAY SOCKETS
SH, SJ, SR SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SH1B-05 Relay socket, SPDT blade type, DIN/surface mount
SH2B-05 Relay socket, DPDT blade type, DIN/surface mount
SH3B-05 Relay socket, 3PDT blade type, DIN/surface mount
SH4B-05 Relay socket, 4PDT blade type, DIN/surface mount
SJ1S-05B Relay socket, SPDT blade type, DIN/surface mount
SJ2S-05B Relay socket, DPDT blade type, DIN/surface mount
SR2P-05 Relay socket, DPDT pin type, DIN/surface mount
SR2P-06 Relay socket, DPDT pin type, DIN/surface mount
SR3B-05 Relay socket, three-pole blade type, DIN/surface mount
SR3P-06 Relay socket, 3PDT pin type, DIN/surface mount
DIMENSIONS
1
5
14 13
9
0.32
(0.8)
0.66
(1.7)
0.63
(1.6)
0.63
(1.6)
0.78
(2.0)
0.10
(0.25)
0.57
(1.5)
0.98
(2.5)
1.12
(2.85)
in
(cm)
2.62
(6.7)
1.83
(4.8)
0.16
dia.
(0.42) 0 .14 dia .
(0 .36)
2 Mounting
Holes
0.16 dia
(0.42)
0 .31
(0 .79)
DIN
Rail
0 .17
(0 .44)
0 .22
(0 .55)
SH1B-05
1
5
14 13
12
8
9
0.32
(0.8)
0.86
(2.2)
1.03
(2.6)
1.03
(2.6)
1.17
(3.0)
0.57
(1.5)
0.98
(2.5)
0.7
(1.88)
1.12
(2.85)
2.62
(6.7)
1.83
(4.8)
0.16
dia.
(0.42)
2 Mounting
Holes
0.16 dia
(0.42)
DIN
Rail
0 .14 dia .
(0 .36)
0 .31
(0 .79)
0 .17
(0 .44)
0 .22
(0 .55)
0.10
(0.25)
4
SH2B-05
1
5
14 13
12
8
9
0.32
(0.8)
1.25
(3.2)
1.42
(3.6)
1.42
(3.6)
1.56
(4.0)
0.57
(1.5)
0.98
(2.5)
0.7
(1.88)
1.12
(2.85)
2.62
(6.7)
1.83
(4.8)
0.16
dia.
(0.42)
2 Mounting
Holes
0.16 dia
(0.42)
DIN
Rail
0 .14 dia .
(0 .36)
0 .31
(0 .79)
0 .17
(0 .44)
0 .22
(0 .55)
0.10
(0.25)
4
10
6
2
SH3B-05
15
3
4
2
SJ1S
SJ1S,
SJ2S
63
2
1
7
SJ2S
4 5
8
0.6
(1.6) 0.2 (0.4)
0.1
(0.2)
1.2 (2.9)
2.8
(7.1)
1.4 (3.5)
1.9 (4.9)
2.2 (5.6)
SJ1S, SJ2S
1
5
14 13
12
8
9
0.32
(0.8)
1.65
(4.2)
1.81
(4.6)
1.81
(4.6)
1.97
(5.0)
0.57
(1.5)
0.98
(2.5)
0.7
(1.88)
1.12
(2.85)
2.62
(6.7)
1.83
(4.8)
0.16
dia.
(0.42)
2 Mounting Holes
0.16 dia (0.42)
DIN
Rail
0.14 dia.
(0.36)
0.31
(0.79)
0.17
(0.44)
0.22
(0.55)
0.10
(.25)
4
10
6
2
7
3
11
SH4B-05
0.32
(0.8)
in
(cm)
1.40
(3.6)
1.14
(2.9)
1.14
(2.9)
0.64
(1.7)
0.78
(2.0)
1.12
(2.85)
1.25
(2.85)
2.03
(5.2)
1.28
(3.3)
0.9
(2.5)
0.16
dia.
(0.42)
2 Mounting Holes
0.16 dia. (0.42)
DIN
Rail
0.14 dia.
(0.36)
0.31
(0.79)
0.17
(0.44)
0.20
(0.55)
0.12
(0.25)
5 4
3
2
1
6
7
8
SR2P-05
0.32
(0.8)
1.56
(4.0)
1.3
(3.3)
1.3
(3.3)
0.7
(1.8)
0.86
(2.2)
1.0
(2.55)
2.34
(6.0)
0.97
(2.5)
0.16
dia.
(0.42)
DIN
Rail
0.14 dia.
(0.36)
0.31
(0.79)
0.17
(0.44)
0.20
(0.55)
0.04
(0.25)
543
21
6
78
2 Mounting Holes
0.16 dia. (0.42)
SR2P-06
0.32
(0.8)
2.3
(5.9)
1.3
(3.3)
1.3
(3.3)
2.34
(6.0)
0.16
dia.
(0.42)
0.14 dia.
(0.36)
0.31
(0.79)
0.17
(0.44)
0.20
(0.55)
0.12
(0.25)
4
231
76
9 1110
8 5
0.7
(1.8)
0.86
(2.2)
1.0
(2.55)
1.05
(2.5)
DIN
Rail
2 Mounting Holes
0.16 dia. (0.42)
SR3P-06
.07
(0.2)
0.57
(1.5)
DIN
Rail
2 Mounting
Holes
0.16 dia.
(0.42)
0.31
(0.8)
M3.5 Terminal Screw
0.16
(0.42)
2.9
(7.6)
1.41
(3.6)
0.98
(2.5)
1.45 (3.7)
1.69 (4.3)
2.2
(5.6)
1.12
(2.85)
1.45
(3.7)
4
1
98
6
3
5
2
7
B A
SR3B-05
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DIN-3F, BAM-1000 DIN rail 860
RH, RJ, RR series Relay 1121
RTE Series Time delay relay 1158
in
(cm)
in
(cm)
in
(cm)
in
(cm)
in
(cm)
in
(cm)
in
(cm)
in
(cm)
in
(cm)

1189. fi 1125RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
LY SERIES
Rated
Voltage
Rated Current (mA)
60 Hz 50 Hz
Coil Resistance (Ω)
AC
DC
24
120
24
4PDT
78
2200
350
3PDT
100
2450
410
DPDT
180
4430
650
SPDT
180
4430
650
4PDT
93.6
19
3PDT
80
17.3
DPDT
54
10.8
SPDT
54
10.8
4PDT
80
16.4
3PDT
67
14.8
DPDT
46
9.2
SPDT
46
9.2
36.9 36.958.6 58.669 69
G2R-S SERIES
Rated
Voltage
Rated Current (mA)
60 Hz
Coil Resistance (Ω)
AC
DC
24
120
24
253
7,286
1,100
37.5
7.5
21.8
MK SERIES
Rated
Voltage
Rated Current (mA)
60 Hz
Coil Resistance (Ω)
AC
DC
24
120
24
68
1578
430
88
18
56
Min operating voltage 80% of rated voltage AC/DC
Max continuous applied voltage 110% of rated voltage AC/DC
Drop-out voltage
AC 30% or more of the rated voltage
DC 10% (LY ), 15% (MK, G2R-S) or more of
the rated voltage
Contact material
LY, G2R-S Silver cadmium oxide
MK Silver
Contact resistance 100 mΩ maximum
Operating time 30 ms maximum
Release time 25 ms maximum
Min load
LY, G2R-S 100 mA/5 VDC
MK 10 mA/1 VDC
Agency approv als UL-recognized component,
File #E41643 (LY , G2R-S), #E41515 (MK);
CSA certified, File #LR31928 (LY , G2R-S);
#LR41408 (MK); CE certified
Warranty 1 year
LY SERIES
Contact
Form
UL Contact Ratings
SPDT
DPDT
3PDT
4PDT
15A @ 240 VAC (inductive )
15A @ 28 VDC (resistive )
1/2 hp @ 120 VAC (motor)
13A @ 120 VAC (resistive )
12A @ 240 VAC (inductive )
10A @ 28 VDC (resistive )
1/2 hp @ 120 VAC (motor)
10A @ 240 VAC (inductive )
10A @ 28 VDC (resistive )
1/2 hp @ 240 VAC (motor)
MK SERIES
Contact
Form
UL Contact Rating
DPDT
3PDT
10A @ 250 VAC (resistive )
10A @ 28 VDC (resistive )
7A @ 250 VAC (inductive)
10A @ 120 VAC (resistive )
10A @ 28 VDC (resistive )
10A @ 250 VAC (resistive )
7A @ 250 VAC (inductive)
G2R-S SERIES
Contact
Form
UL Contact Rating
SPDT
DPDT
10A @ 30 VDC (resistive )
10A @ 250 VAC (general purpose)
5A @ 30 VDC (resistive )
5A @ 250 VAC (general purpose)
CONTACT RATINGSCOIL RATINGS
OMRON GENERAL-PURPOSE RELAYS
G2R-S, LY, MK SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Omron general-purpose relays are available in the LY, M K ,
and G2R-S Series. The L Y Series is available in SPDT,
DPDT, 3PDT, and 4PDT contact configurations driven by AC
or DC coils. It has up to a 15A switching capacity and blade
terminals for socket mounting.
The MK Series is available in DPDT and 3PDT configurations
driven by AC or DC coils and has up to a 10A switch rating.
The
MK Series has pin-type terminals for socket-mounting
and comes standard with a mechanical indicator and push-to- test button.
The G2R-S Series is available with SPDT or DPDT contacts
rated up to 10A and driven by AC or DC coils. They are
socket-mounted, and their small size saves space. They come
with a mechanical indicator, optional LED, and lockable test button
.
FEATURES
• Blade-style, pin-style and compact models
• DIN rail or surface mount
• UL recognized, CSA certified, CE certified
SPECIFICATIONS
P2RF
G2R-S
LY
MK

1190. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1126fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
OMRON GENERAL-PURPOSE RELAYS
G2R-S, LY, MK SERIES
in
(cm)
2 .07
(5 .25) max
0 .03
(0 .08)
1 .36
(3 .45) max
1 .36
(3 .45) max
0 .85
(2 .15)
1 .10
(2 .79)
LY1/LY2
MK2/MK3
1 .42
(3 .60)
LY
1 .24
(3 .14)
1 .10
(2 .79)
LY3
1 .63
(4 .14)
1 .4
(3 .5)
LY4
1 .14
(2 .9)
0 .51
(1 .3)
1 .14
(2 .9)
G2R-1, G2R-2
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
1
4
7
1
5
9
2
6
10
3
7
11
4
4
8
12
3
6
9
7
2
4
6
2
5
8
8
10 11 13 14
5
6
7
8
8
9
7
6
5
4
3
2
111
10
1
2
3
MK3MK2LY4LY3LY2LY1 G2R-1
18
6
5
7
3
4
2
G2R-2
15
4
3
2
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
LY SERIES
Use with PTF Series sockets Use with PF Series sockets Use with P2RF Series sockets
MK SERIES G2R-S SERIES
Example: LY2I4NAC24 DPDT relay with push-to-
test button, LED indicator, and 24 VAC coil.
LY LY Series
1 SPDT contact configuration
2 DPDT contact configuration
3 3PDT contact configuration
4 4PDT contact configuration
I4 Push-to-test button (optional)
(two- and four-pole only when
combined with N option)
N LED indicator (optional)
AC24 24 VAC
DC24 24 VDC
AC120 120 VAC
LY 2I4A C24N
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MK MK Series
2 DPDT contact configuration
3 3PDT contact configuration
P —
N LED indicator (optional)
— Two-pole
5 Three-pole
S Push-to-test button (standard)
AC24 24 VAC
DC24 24 VDC
AC120 120 VAC
MK N5 AC24
Example: MK3PN5SAC24 3PDT relay with LED
indicator, push-to-test button, and 24 VAC coil.
3P S
MODEL DESCRIPTION
Example: G2R1SAC24(S) SPDT relay with
24 VAC coil.
G2R G2R Series
1 SPDT contact configuration
2 DPDT contact configuration
S No options
SNI LED indicator, test button
AC24(S) 24 VAC
DC24(S) 24 VDC
AC120(S) 120 VAC
G2R AC24(S)1S
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DINRSTL, DINRALU DIN rail 860
PF, PTF, PRF Series Relay sockets 1127

1191. fi 1127RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
OMRON RELAY SOCKETS
P2RF, PF, PTF SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The PTF and PF Series of Omron relay sockets are for use
with the Omron LY / MK Series Relays. The P2RF is for use
with the G2R-S relays. The PTF and PF Series include both
blade and pin style sockets and are available for one, two, three, and four pole relays
. The P2RF comes with a built-in
relay hold down mechanism. All of these sockets can be DIN
rail or surface mounted.
FEATURES
• Use with Omron LY / MK / G2R-S relays
• Screw terminals with captive wire clamp
• Surface or DIN rail mount
• UL recognized, CSA certified and CE approved
Rated Voltage 250V
Rated Current 10A, 5A, 15A
Terminals M3.5 screws with captive wire
clamps
Dielectric Strength 1500V
Wire Size Up to two 12 AWG
Materials Of Construction
Polyphenylene
Hold Down Clip or Spring
PFC-A1, PYC-A1
Mounting DIN rail or surface mount
Approvals UL-recognized component, File
#E87929; CSA certified, File #LR31928; CE certified
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (IN (CM))
PTF08A-E for use with relay LY1, LY2
Hold-down clip: PYC-A1
Weight: 0
.1 lb (0.05 kg)
PTF11A for use with relay LY 3
Hold-down clip: PYC-A1
Weight: 0
.13 lb (0.06 kg)
PTF14A-E for use with relay LY 4 HoId-down clip: PYC-A1 Weight: 0
.15 lb (0.07 kg)
3
1
4
2
5
78
6
1.12
(2.84)
0.31
(0.78)
1.18
(2.99)
0.75
(1.90)
3.09
(7.84)
max
2.68
(6.80)
1.39
(3.53)
Two Mounting Holes
0.18 (0.46) dia
4
1
6
3
97
10
5
2
8
1.46
(3.70)
0.31
(0.78)
1.18
(2.99)
1.08
(2.74)
3.09
(7.84)
max
2.68
(6.80)
1.39
(3.53)
11
Two Mounting Holes
0.18 (0.46) dia
5
1
8
4
12 9
13
7
3
11
6
2
10
1.79
(4.55)
0.31
(0.78)
1.39
(3.53)
1.18
(2.99)
1.42
(3.60)
3.09
(7.84)
max
2.68
(6.80)
14
Two Mounting Holes
0.18 (0.46) dia

1192. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1128fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
P2RF-05-E SPDT relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (G2R-1 relay)
P2RF-08-E DPDT relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (G2R-2 relay)
PF083A-E 2PDT pin relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (MK2 relays)
PF113A-E 3PDT pin relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (MK3 relays)
PTF08A-E SPDT and DPDT blade relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (LY1 and LY2 relays)
PTF11A 3PDT blade relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (LY3 relays)
PTF14A-E 4PDT blade relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (LY4 relays)
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONT'D (IN (CM))
PF083A-E for use with relay MK2
HoId-down clip: PFC-A1
Weight: 0
.05 lb (0.02 kg)
PF113A-E for use with relay MK3 HoId-down clip: PFC-A1 Weight: 0
.1 lb (0.05 kg)
P2RF-05-E for use with relay G2R-1 Weight: 0
.07 lb (0.03 kg)
1 .3
(3 .3)
Two
Mounting Holes
0 .18 (0 .45) dia
0 .16
(0 .4) 1 .69
(4 .28)
0 .28
(0 .7)
2 .05
(5 .2)
1 .39
(3 .54)
1 .22
(3 .1)
9
101112
3
4
5678
4
3
5
M3 or
0 .14 (0 .36)
dia hole
1 .40
(3 .6)
0 .14 (0 .36)
dia hole
Five M3 .5
2 .40
(6 .1) max
2 .40
(6 .1) max
0 .61
(1 .5) max
0 .20
(0 .5)
3 .37
(8 .6)
max .
2
1
Terminal
Arrangement
Mounting
Holes
6
7
8
M3 or
0 .14 (0 .36)
dia hole
1 .40
(3 .6)
0 .14 (0 .36)
dia hole
Eight M3 .5
2 .40
(6 .1) max
2 .48
(6 .3) max
0 .63
(1 .60) max
0 .16
(0 .4)
3 .37
(8 .6)
max .
3
2
45
1
Terminal
Arrangement
Mounting
Holes
P2RF-08-E for use with relay G2R-2
Weight: 0.07 lb (0.03 kg)
0 .28
(0 .7)
1 .61
(4 .1)
1 .3
(3 .3)
0 .83
(2 .1)
2 .05
(5 .2)
1 .39
(3 .54)
0 .16
(0 .4)
187
65
2
34
Two Mounting Holes
0 .18 (0 .45) dia
Two Mounting Holes
0 .17 dia (0 .42)
OMRON RELAY SOCKETS
P2RF, PF, PTF SERIES
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DIN-3F, BAM-1000 DIN rail 860
NBS Series Block spades

1193. fi 1129RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
MODEL 781 782 783 784
COIL
Pull-in Voltage AC (50/60 Hz) ≤85% of nominal ≤85% of nominal ≤85% of nominal ≤85% of nominal
Pull-in Voltage DC ≤80% of nominal ≤80% of nominal ≤80% of nominal ≤80% of nominal
Dropout Voltage AC/DC ≥10% of nominal ≥10% of nominal ≥10% of nominal ≥10% of nominal
Maximum Voltage 110% of nominal 110% of nominal 110% of nominal 110% of nominal
Coil Power AC (60 Hz) 0.9VA 1.2VA 1.5VA 1.5VA
Coil Power DC 0.7W 0.9W 1.7W 2.0W
Duty Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous
CONTACTS
Contact Material Silver alloy Silver alloy Silver alloy Silver alloy
Contact Rating 20A @ 277 VAC 15A @ 120 VAC 15A @ 120 VAC 15A @ 120 VAC
10A @ 240 VAC Gen. Purp. 12A @ 277 VAC 12A @ 277 VAC 12A @ 277 VAC
15A @ 28 VDC 12A @ 28 VDC 20A @ 28 VDC 15A @ 28 VDC
1/2 hp @ 120 VAC 1/2 hp @ 120 VAC 1/2 hp @ 120 VAC 1/2 hp @ 120 VAC
1 hp @ 250 VAC 1 hp @ 250 VAC 3/4 hp @ 250 VAC 3/4 hp @ 250 VAC
Minimum load 100 mA @ 5 VDC or 0.5W 100 mA @ 5 VDC or 0.5W 100 mA @ 5 VDC or 0.5W 100 mA @ 5 VDC or 0.5W
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
Coil To Contacts 2500 V rms 1600 Vrms 1600 Vrms 1600 Vrms
Across Open Contacts 1600 V rms 1600 Vrms 1600 Vrms 1600 Vrms
Pole to Pole — 1600 V rms 2500 Vrms 2500 Vrms
GENERAL
Operate Time 20 msec 25 msec 25 msec 20 msec
Release Time 20 msec 20 msec 20 msec 20 msec
Electrical Life @ Rated Load 100,000 operations 100,000 operations 100,000 operations 100,000 operations
Mechanical life @ No Load 10,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations
Operating Position Any Any Any Any
Operating Temperature -40° to 131°F (-40° to 55°C) -40° to 131°F (-40° to 55°C) -40° to 131°F (-40° to 55°C) -40° to 131°F (-40° to 55°C)
Weight 0.064 lb (0.029 kg) 0.08 lb (0.036 kg) 0.13 lb (0.06 kg) 0.18 lb (0.08kg)
Agency Approvals UL-recognized component UL-recognized component UL-recognized component UL-recognized component
File #E43641, CSA certified File #E43641, CSA certified File #E43641, CSA certified File #E43641, CSA certified
File 40787, CE: IEC 61810-1 File 40787, CE: IEC 61810-1 File 40787, CE: IEC 61810-1 File 40787, CE: IEC 61810-1
Warranty 1 year 1 year 1 year 1 year
MAGNECRAFT RELAYS
781, 782, 783, 784 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Magnecraft 781, 782, 783, and 784 Series are SPDT,
DPDT, 3PDT, and 4PDT plug-in style relays available with
common AC and DC coil voltages
. They are equipped with a
mechanical flag indicator to show relay status in the manual or powered condition
. Full-featured versions of these relays
also include a bi-polar LED to show coil "on" or "off" status, a push button that allows momentary manual operation without the need for coil power, and a removable lock-down door that can hold the push button and relay contacts in the operate position
.
FEATURES
• SPDT •
Flag indicator
• Optional LED and momentary/maintained pushbutton
• DIN rail/surface mount sockets
• Mating sockets:
SPECIFICATIONS
781: 783: 70-783D11-1
782: 70-782D8-1 784: 70-784D14-1
781
782
783
784

1194. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1130fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
MAGNECRAFT RELAYS
781, 782, 783, 784 SERIES
1.1 max
(2.79)
1.2
(3.08)
1.1 max
(2.79)
1.6 max
(4.06)
1.1 max
(2.79)
0.83 max
(2.10)
1.1 max
(2.79)
1.60 max (4.1)
0.53
(1.4)
781
in (cm)
782 783 784
1 (12)
5 (14)
9 (11)
13 (A1)14 (A2)
781
Bottom
View
1 (12)
5 (14)
9 (11)
13
(A1)1 4 (A2)
4 (42)
8 (44)
12 (41)
782
1 (12)
5 (14)
9 (11)
2 (22)
6 (24)
10 (21)
4 (42)
8 (44)
12 (41)
13
(A1)1 4 (A2)
783
1 (12)
5 (14)
9 (11)
2 (22)
6 (24)
10 (21)
3 (32)
7 (34)
11 (31)
4 (42)
8 (44)
12 (41)
13 (A1) 14 (A2)
784
Numbers correspond to Magnecraft socket terminals. Numbers in parentheses correspond to other brand socket terminals.
LegendNONC
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Description
KIT Includes relay and mating socket. Leave blank to order the relay only.
781XAXC SPDT relay with flag indicator (requires 70-781D5-1A socket)
782XBXC DPDT relay with flag indicator (requires 70-783D11-1 socket)
783XCXC 3PDT relay with flag indicator (requires 70-783D11-1 socket)
784XDXC 4PDT relay with flag indicator (requires 70-784D14-1 socket)
12D 12 VDC coil (782XBXC only)
24D 24 VDC coil
24A 24 VAC coil
120A 120 VAC coil
240A 240 VAC coil (782XBXC only)
Example: KIT-782XBXC-24A DPDT relay with 24 VAC
coil and 70-782D8-1 socket included.
KIT--781XBXC 24A
Model Description
781XAXM4L SPDT relay with flag, LED, momentary/maintained push button (requires 70-781D5-1A socket)
782XBXM4L DPDT relay with flag, LED, momentary/maintained push button (requires 70-782D8-1 socket)
783XCXM4L 3PDT relay with flag, LED, momentary/maintained push button (requires 70-783D11-1 socket)
784XDXM4L 4PDT relay with flag, LED, momentary/maintained push button (requires 70-784D14-1 socket)
12D 12 VDC coil
24D 24 VDC coil
24A 24 VAC coil
120A 120 VAC coil
240A 240 VAC coil
Example: 782XBXM4L-24A DPDT relay with 24 VAC coil, LED, and push button
(socket not included).
-782XBXM4L 24A

1195. fi 1131RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
Plugging an accessory module into the
socket adds additional features to the
relay
.
For use with 70-783D11-1, 70-784D14-1
MOV suppressors
70-ASMM-24 24 VAC/VDC
70-ASMM-120 120 VAC/VDC
70-ASMM-240 240 VAC/VDC
Protection diodes
70-ASMD-250 6-250 VDC
Green LEDs
70-ASMLG-24 24 VAC/VDC
70-ASMLG-120/240 120/240 VAC/VDC
For use with 70-781D5-1A, 70-782D8-1 MOV suppressors
70-BSMM-24 24 VAC/VDC
70-BSMM-120 120 VAC/VDC
70-BSMM-240 240 VAC/VDC
Protection diodes
70-BSMD-250 6-250 VDC
Green LEDs
70-BSMLG-24 24 VAC/VDC
70-BSMLG-120/240 120/240 VAC/VDC
MAGNECRAFT RELAY SOCKETS
70-781D5-1, 70-782D-1, 70-783D-1, 70-784D-1
Voltage Rating 300V
Current Rating 15A
Terminals M3.5 zinc-plated steel
Dielectric Strength 2000 Vms minimum
Wire Size 20-12 AWG
Operating Temperature -40° to 176°F (-40° to 80°C)
Mounting DIN rail or surface mount
Flammability Rating UL 94V-0
Approvals UL-recognized component, File
#E70550, CSA certified File #4078
Weight
781D5 0.07 lb (0.032 kg)
782D 0.12 lb (0.055 kg)
783D 0.14 lb (0.062 kg)
784D 0.17 lb (0.077 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
These Relay Sockets are for use with the Magnecraft
781, 782, 783, and 784 Series relays. These sockets have
fingersafe screw terminals and can be DIN rail or surface mounted
.
5
1
14
9
13
70-781D5-1A
in
(cm)
Socket:
16-781SCHold-down clip*:
3.14
(8.0)
1.18
(3.0)
0.19 (0.51)
58
14
912
1413
70-782D8-1
16-782SC
1.18
(3.0)
2.67
(6.8)
1.06
(2.6)
586
214
912
14
10
13
70-783D11-1
16-783SC
2.67
(6.8)
1.57 (4.0)
1.45 (3.7)
1.10
(2.8)
58 67
2143
912
14
1110
13
70-784D14-1
16-784SC
1.96 (5.0)
2.67
(6.8)
1.81 (4.6)
1.41 (3.6)
*Order metal hold-down clip and accessory modules separately.
0.82
(2.1)
0.67 (1.7)
WIRING SOCKET ACCESSORY MODULES*
SPECIFICATIONS 70-781D5-1A
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
70-781D5-1A Relay socket, SPDT, use with 781 Series relays
70-782D8-1 Relay socket, DPDT, use with 782 Series relays
70-783D11-1 Relay socket, 3PDT, use with 783 Series relays
70-784D14-1 Relay socket, 4PDT, use with 784 Series relays
70-782D8-1
70-783D11-1
70-784D14-1
Hold-down clip
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DINRALU DIN rail, aluminum, 39.4" (1m) 860
DINRSTL DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m) 860
NBS Series Block spades

1196. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1132fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
6MM INTERFACE RELAYS
RV8H SERIES
Number of Poles 1 pole
Contact Configuration Form C, SPDT
Max. Allowable Contact Power
1500 VAC, 180W DC
Rated Load 250 VAC 6A, 30 VDC 6A
Contact Rating 6A
Allowable Switching Voltage
400 VAC, 125 VDC
Allowable Switching Power
1500 VAC, 180W DC
Minimum Applicable Load 6 VDC / 10mA
Mechanical Life Over 10,000,000 operations
Operating Temperature -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 85% non-condensing
Weight
RV8H-L 0.07 lbs (0.03 kg)
RV8H-S 0.06 lbs (0.02 kg)
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The RV8H Series 6mm interface relays provide a compact
solution for general purpose relay requirements. The RV8H
series Interface relays are ideal for HVAC and energy management controllers, PLC and electronic systems, industrial automation, panel builders, assembly machine applications and other applications that require a high switching capability in a compact space
. Installation time is
g
reatly reduced with pre-assembled relays and sockets
.
FEATURES
• Class I, •
Gold plated contacts
• Pre-assembled relay and DIN mount socket
• Lever for easy locking and removal of relay
SPECIFICATIONS
WIRING DIMENSIONS
RV8H-L-AD24RV8H-S-AD24
AC/DC
90% MAX 7% MAX 110%
DC
RV8H-L-D6
RV8H-L-D9
RV8H-L-D12
RV8H-L-D18
RV8H-L-D24
RV8H-L-AD12
RV8H-L-AD18
RV8H-L-AD24
RV8H-L-AD48
RV8H-L-AD60
RV8H-L-AD110
RV8H-L-AD220
SCREW
TERMINALS
SPRING CLAMP
TERMINALS
COIL VOLTAGE
CIRCUIT RESISTANCE
±10%(fifl
AC DC
POWER
CONSUMPTION
(W)
PICKUP
VOLTAGE
DROPOUT
VOLTAGE
MAXIMUM
VOLTAGE
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
RATED
CURRENT
±15% (mA)
RV8H-S-D6 RV8H-S-D9
RV8H-S-D12 RV8H-S-D18 RV8H-S-D24
RV8H-S-AD12 RV8H-S-AD18 RV8H-S-AD24 RV8H-S-AD48 RV8H-S-AD60
RV8H-S-AD110
RV8H-S-AD220
6V 9V
12V 18V 24V 12V 18V 24V 48V 60V
110V - 125V
220V - 240V
35
18.6 14.6
11.6
10.6 15.5 13.3 13.7
4
3.4
3.4 - 3.9 3.3 - 3.6
- - - - -
755
1365 1730
11880
17600
31790 - 31890 65670 - 66070
170 485 820
1550 2270
800
1345 1790
12230 17910
32450 - 32900 65940 - 68570
0.21
0.2 0.2 0.2
0.25
0.2
0.25 0.33
0.2 0.2 0.5
0.85
RV8H-L Screw Terminal
14 NOA1(+) Coil
11 (13+) COM
A2(-) Coil
12 NC
RV8H-S Spring Clamp Te rminal
14 NO
A1(+) Coil
11 (13+) COM
A2(-) Coil
12 (NC)
.24”
(6.1)
.24”
(6.1)
2.74”
(69.6)
2.74”
(69.6)
1.38”
(35)
1.38”
(35)
3.46” (88) 3.67” (93.4)
2.92”
(74.2)
2.92”
(74.2)
in
(mm)
Internal Connection (bottom view)
A1 A2 12 1411
(13+)
Note: To order Class 1 Division 2 RV8H Relays, add -C1D2 at the end of the part number.

1197. fi 1133RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES RELAY IN A BOX
RIB, RIBT PILOT SERIES
Frequnecy 50/60 Hz
Wire Length 16" (40.6 cm)
Life Rating 10 million cycles minimum
mechanical
Relay Status LED, ON - relay activated
Operating Temperature -30° to 140°F (-34° to 60°F)
Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing
Housing Type Plenum rated, NEMA 1, NEMA 4
Conduit Hub 1/2" NPT, 3/4" NPT
Dimensions
A size enclosures 1.7" H x 2.8" W x 1.5" D
(4.32 x 7.11 x 3.81 cm)
B size enclosures 4.0" H x 4.0" W x 1.8" D
(10.16 x 10.16 x 4.57 cm)
G size enclosures 2.3" H x 3.2"W x 1.8" D
(5.84 x 8.13 x 4.57 cm)
Approvals UL listed, UL 916 Energy
Management UL 864 Fire
, cUL listed,
CSFM, UL File S7312
Warranty
1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Relay In A Box (RIB) Pilot Series controls most BAS,
HVAC, low-horsepower motor and lighting applications. The
relays come mounted and pre-wired in a housing, saving the installer the time, trouble, and expense of buying separate components (relay, socket, mounting rail, and enclosure) and assembling them on the job or at the shop
.
The
RIB Pilot Series has a protruding 1/2" or 3/4" NPT
nipple from which all wires exit (except T series)
. To install,
remove a conduit knockout in the equipment, insert the wires and nipple through the hole, tighten the locknut, and connect the wires
.
RIB Pilot Series - 10A Rela
ys
The RIB Pilot Series has relay contacts rated for 10A and is used to control light electrical loads, drive power relays/ contactors, or sense the voltage being fed to electrical loads
.
The
RIB Pilot Series requires a low coil-drive current and is
provided with circuitry to allow powering the relay coil from a wide range of AC or DC voltages.
RIBT Series - High/Low Voltage Separation
The RIBT Series is designed to provide physically separate entrances for connections to the relay input coil and output contacts
. Relay contact wires exit the housing through a
1/2" or 3/4" NPT nipple. The cover of the RIBT Series is
removable, and the coil drive wires can enter the housing through one of two convenient openings with star bushings or 1/2" conduit
. The coil drive wires are secured to screw
terminals within a separate wiring compartment in the RIBT Series
. Most of the RIB's in the Pilot Series are also
available in the RIBT Series.
FEATURES
• Convenient and economical to use
• Relay status indicator via LED
• Coil uses low current and accepts a wide range of AC
and DC voltages
• Closed/Open/Auto switch option available
• Nipple- or screw-mountable
• Compact, gray plastic enclosure
• Color-coded wires for eliminating errors
• UL listed for UL916 Energy Management and UL864
Fire
• Made in the USA
SPECIFICATIONS - GENERAL
RIBU1C RIBU1S
PULL-IN DROP-OUT
COIL DRIVE DC AC DC AC
10-30 VAC/VDC 10 9 2.8 2.1
24 VAC/VDC 20 18 3.8 3
120 VAC – 102 – 9
208-277 VAC – 176 – 13
Coil pull-in/drop-out (nominal values)

1198. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1134fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES RELAY IN A BOX
RIB, RIBT PILOT SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
SPECIFICATIONS - PILOT SERIES
10A resistive
10A resistive
480 VA pilot duty
480 VA ballast
600W tungsten
240W tungsten
1/3 hp for N.O.
1/6 hp for N.C.
1/4 hp for N.O.
1/8 hp for N.C.
10A resistive 277 VAC
480 VA pilot duty 277 VAC
480 VA ballast 277 VAC
600W tungsten 120 VAC N.O.
240W tungsten 120 VAC N.C.
1/3 hp for N.O. 120-240 VAC
1/6 hp for N.C. 120-240 VAC
1/4 hp for N.O. 277 VAC
1/8 hp for N.C. 277 VAC
Status Contact
on RIBU1SM and RIBH1SM:
5A max @ 277 VAC
10A resistive 120-277 VAC
10A resistive 28 VDC
480 VA pilot duty 240-277 VAC
480 VA ballast 277 VAC
600W tungsten 120 VAC N.O.
240W tungsten 120 VAC N.C.
1/3 hp for N.O. 120-240 VAC
1/6 hp for N.C. 120-240 VAC
1/4 hp for N.O. 277 VAC
1/8 hp for N.C. 277 VAC
10A resistive 30 VDC
10A resistive 277 VAC
1/2 hp for N.O. 120/240 VAC
1/3 hp for N.C. 120/240 VAC
10A resistive 30 VDC
10A resistive 277 VAC
180 VA pilot duty 120 VAC
1/8 hp for N.C. 120 VAC
Switch ratings
20A 277 VAC
120/240/277 VAC
28 VDC
240/277 VAC
277 VAC
120 VAC N.O.
120 VAC N.C.
120/240 VAC
120/240 VAC
277 VAC
277 VAC Relay #1
NC
COM
NO
Relay #2 (if present)
(gray)
(purple)
(brown)
(gray)
(purple)
(brown)
RELAY COIL
DRIVE DA TA
12 mA @ 10 VDC
14 mA @ 12 VDC
16 mA @ 24 VDC
18 mA @ 30 VDC
RIBU1C*
RIBU1C-N4†
RIBU2C*
RIBH1C*
RIBH1C-N4†
RIBH2C*
30 mA @ 10 VAC
32 mA @ 12 VAC
42 mA @ 24 VAC
50 mA @ 30 VAC
25 mA @ 120 VAC
35 mA @ 208-277 VAC
Relay #1
Common - White/Yellow wire
10-30 VAC/VDC - White/Blue wire
120 VAC - White/Black wire
208-277 VAC - White/Brown wire
Relay #2 (if present)
Common - White/Purple wire
10-30 VAC/VDC - Gray/White wire
120 VAC - White/Red wire
208-277 VAC - White/Orange wire
RIBU1S*
RIBU2SC
RIBU2S2
RIBU1SM
RIBH1S*
RIBH1SM
Relay #2 of RIBU2SC
NC
COM
NO
Relay #1
Relay #2
Relay #3
Relay #4 (if present)
(gray)
(purple)
(brown)
(brown)
(purple)
(gray)
Relay #1
(orange) (orange)
Closed Open Auto
Closed Open Auto
Relay #2 of RIBU2S2
MODEL TYPE
SIZE/
HUB
OVR
SW
RELAY
CONTACT RATINGS
RELAY
CONTACT WIRING
COIL
DRIVE
1-SPDT
2-SPDT
1-SPDT
2-SPDT
1-SPST-NO
**
1-SPST-NO**
1-SPDT
2-SPST-NO
**
1-SPST-NO**
1-SPST-NO**
1-SPST-NO**
A-1/2
G-3/4
A-1/2
G-3/4
–
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes-2
Yes +
Status
Yes
Yes +
Status
G-1/2
G-3/4
B-3/4
G-1/2
G-1/2
G-1/2
(brown)
(brown)
Closed
Open
Auto
(blue) (yellow) (orange)
STATUS = 2nd Pole of
switch of RIBU1S M, RIBH1SM
10-30 VAC/VDC
120 VAC
50/60 Hz
10-30 VAC
208-277 VAC
50/60 Hz
10-30 VAC/VDC
50/60 Hz
24 VAC/VDC
120 VAC
50/60- Hz
24 VAC/VDC
208-277 VAC
50/60 Hz
10-30 VAC/VDC
120 VAC
50/60 Hz
10-30 VAC/VDC
208-277 VAC
50/60 Hz
Wiring
Input Current
(blue)
(yellow)
(orange)
(gray)
(purple)
(brown)
(black)
(black)
(blue) (blue)
(yellow) (yellow)
(blue) (yellow) (orange)
RIBL3C 3-SPST-NO B-1/2
B-1/2
A-1/2
G-1/2
G-1/2
A-1/2
A-1/2
–
–
–
–
10-30 VAC/VDC
120 VAC
50/60 Hz
10-30 VAC
208-277 VAC
50/60 Hz
1-SPDT
1-DPDT
1-DPDT
1-SPDT
RIBH1SC*
RIBU1SC*
RIBL4C
3-SPST-NO
1-SPDT
SPDT
Manual
Switch
Yes-2
Yes
Yes-2
RIB2401D*
RIB2401D-N4†
RIB2402D
RIB2402D-N4†
NC
COM
NO
(yellow)
Common
(blue) N.C.
(orange) N.O.
Auto
Manual
N.C. - Closed
Open
N.O. - Closed
Common - White/Yellow wire
24 VAC/VDC - White/Blue wire
120 VAC - White/Black wire
208-277 VAC - White/Brown wire
Common - White/Red wire
Relay#1 - White/Black wire
Relay#2 - White/Blue wire
Relay#3 - White/Yellow wire
Relay#4 - White/Brown wire
(if present)
24 mA @ 18 VAC 20 mA @ 20 VDC
32 mA @ 24 VAC 24 mA @ 30 VDC
40 mA @ 30 VAC 36 mA @ 30 VDC
31 mA @ 120 VAC (RIB2401D)
36 mA @ 208-277 VAC (RIB2402D)
30 mA @ 10 VAC 12 mA @ 10 VDC
32 mA @ 12 VAC 14 mA @ 12 VDC
42 mA @ 24 VAC 16 mA @ 24 VDC
50 mA @ 30 VAC 18 mA @ 30 VDC
NC
COM
NO
NC
COM
NO
NC
COM
NO
SIB02S
Wiring
Wiring
Input Current
Input Current
No Relay
Switch Only
Order by model number
* Models may be ordered in RIBT Series with high/low voltage separation.
** Can be ordered normally closed by adding - NC after model number.
† N4 has NEMA 4 housing

1199. fi 1135RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES RELAY IN A BOX
RIB, RIBT POWER SERIES
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Wire Length 16" (40.6 cm)
Life Rating 10 million cycles minimum
mechanical
Relay Status LED, ON - relay activated
Operating Temperature -30° to 140°F (-34° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% non-condensing
Housing Type NEMA 1, plenum rated
Conduit Hub 1/2" NPT, 3/4" NPT
Dimensions
A and G size
enclosures 2.3" H x 3.2" W x 1.8" D
(5.84 x 8.13 x 4.57 cm)
B size enclosures 4" H x 4" W x 1.8" D
(10.16 x 10.16 x 4.57 cm)
Approvals UL listed, UL 916 Energy
Management, UL 864 Fire
, cUL
listed, CSFM, UL File S7312
Warranty
1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Relay In a Box (RIB) Power Series controls most BAS,
HVAC, low-horsepower motor and lighting applications. The
relays come mounted and pre-wired in a housing, saving the installer the time, trouble and expense of buying separate components (relay, socket, mounting rail, and enclosure) and assembling them on the job or at the shop
.
The
RIB Power Series has a protruding 1/2" or 3/4" NPT
nipple from which all wires exit (except T series)
. To install,
remove a conduit knockout in the equipment, insert the wires and nipple through the hole, tighten the locknut, and connect the wires
.
RIB P
ower Series - 20, 30A Relays
The RIB Power Series has relay contacts rated for 20 and 30A
. They require modest coil drive current and are used for
direct switching and control of heavy electrical circuits, such as large resistive, motor, and lighting loads
.
RIBT Series - High/Low Voltage Separation
The RIBT Series is designed to provide physically separate entrances for connections to the relay input coil and output contacts
. Relay contact wires exit the housing through
a 1/2" or 3/4" NPT nipple. The cover of the RIBT Series
is removable and, with star bushings or 1/2" conduit, the coil drive wires can enter the housing through one of two convenient openings
. The coil drive wires are secured to
screw terminals within a separate wiring compartment in the RIBT
. Most of the RIBs in the Power Series are also
available in the T Series.
FEATURES
• Con •
Relay status indicator via LED
• Coil uses low current and accepts a wide range of AC
and DC voltages
• Closed/Open/Auto switch option available
• Nipple or screw mountable
• Compact, gray plastic enclosure
• Color-coded wires for eliminating errors
• UL listed for UL916 Energy Management and UL864
Fire
• Made in the USA
SPECIFICATIONS - GENERAL
RIB, RIBT Power Series
PULL-IN DROP-OUT
COIL DRIVE DC AC DC AC
24 VAC/VDC 22 18 3.8 3
120 VAC – 85 – 35
208-277 VAC – 160 – 60
480 VAC – 340 – 140
Coil pull-in/drop-out (nominal values)

1200. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1136fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
20A resistive 277 VAC
1 hp 120 VAC
2 hp 277 VAC
20A ballast N.O. 120/277 VAC
10A ballast N.C. 120/277 VAC
10A tungsten N.O. 120 VAC
770 VA pilot duty 120 VAC
1110 VA pilot duty 277 VAC
20A resistive 277 VAC
1 hp 120 VAC
2 hp 277 VAC
20A ballast N.O. 120/277 VAC
10A ballast N.C. 120/277 VAC
10A tungsten N.O. 120 VAC
770 VA pilot duty 120 VAC
1110 VA pilot duty 277 VAC
(blue)
(yellow)
(orange)
N.C.
Common
N.O.
RELAY COIL
DRIVE DA TA
24 VAC White/Yellow wires
125 mA @ 24 VAC 50 mA @ 24 VDC
RIB2401B*
Common - White/Yellow wire
24 VAC/VDC - White/Blue wire
120 VAC - White/Black wire
208-277 VAC - White/Brown wire
RIB2401SB*
RIB2402SB*
(orange)
(orange)
Closed Open Auto
(orange) (orange)
(brown) (brown)
Closed
Open
Auto
MODEL TYPE
SIZE-
HUB
OVR
SW
RELAY
CONTACT RATINGS*
RELAY
CONTACT WIRING
COIL
DRIVE
1-SPDT
G-1/2
G-1/2
–
–
Wiring
Common - White/Yellow wire
24 VAC/VDC - White/Blue wire
120 VAC - White/Black wire
208-277 VAC - White/Brown wire
Wiring
120 VAC - White/Black wires
208-277 VAC - White/Brown wires
480 VAC - White/Green wires
Input Current
100 mA @ 120-480 VAC
Wiring
Wiring
Input Current
24 VAC/VDC White/Yellow wires
120 VAC White/Black wires
208-277 VAC White/Brown wires
480 VAC White/Green wires
125 mA @ 24 VAC 50 mA @ 24 VDC
75 mA @ 120 VAC
95 mA @ 208-277 VAC
95 mA @ 480 VAC
Wiring
Input Current
75 mA @ 24 VAC 32 mA @ 24 VDC
42 mA @ 120 VAC
Input Current
24 VAC/VDC - White/Yellow wires
120 VAC - White/Black wires
208-277 VAC - White/Brown wires
480 VAC - White/Green wires
Wiring
190 mA @ 24 VAC 140 mA @ 30 VDC
140 mA @ 120 VAC
170 mA @ 208-277 VAC
120 mA @ 480 VAC
Input Current
24 VAC/VDC
120 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
120 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
120 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
208 - 277 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
208 - 277 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
208 - 277 VAC
75 mA @ 24 VAC 32 mA @ 24 VDC
42 mA @ 120 VAC
62 ma @ 208/277 VAC
Input Current
RIB2402B*
Double Pole Switch
Relay Pole #1 Relay Pole #2
1-SPDT
1-SPST-NO
1-SPST-NO
–
1-SPDT
1-SPDT
G-1/2
G-1/2
Yes
Yes
RIB02S2
RIB04S2
RIB24S2*
RIB01S2
1-DPST-NO
B-1/2
24 VAC/VDC
RIB243P* 1-3PST-NO B-1/2
–120 VACRIB013P 1-3PST-NO B-1/2
–
208-277 VACRIB023P 1-3PST-NO B-1/2 –
480 VACRIB043P 1-3PST-NO
B-1/2
Yes
Double
Pole
RIB2401SBC* G-1/2Yes-2
RIB2402SBC* G-1/2Yes-2
RIB01P B-1/2–120 VAC
20A resistive 300 VAC
20A resistive 28 VDC, 15 VDC
15A resistive 600 VAC
1 hp 120 VAC
2 hp 240-277 VAC
3 hp 480-600 VAC
20A ballast 277-480 VAC
770 VA pilot duty 120 VAC
1,158 VA pilot duty 240 VAC
1,110 VA pilot duty 277 VAC
1,640 VA pilot duty 480 VAC
20A resistive 277 VAC
1 hp 120 VAC
2 hp 240-277 VAC
10A tungsten 120 VAC
20A ballast 277-480 VAC
770 VA pilot duty 120 VAC
1,110 VA pilot duty 277 VAC
1-DPDT
RIB02P B-1/2–208-277 VAC1-DPDT
RIB04P B-1/2–480 VAC1-DPDT
N.C.
Common
N.O.
N.C.
Common
N.O.
(gray)
(purple)
(brown)
(blue) (yellow) (orange)
RIB24P* 1-DPDT G-1/2 –
(blue) (blue)
(yellow) (yellow)
(orange) (orange)
N.O.
N.O.
N.O.
20A resistive 300 VAC
20A resistive 28 VDC
15A resistive 600 VAC
1 hp 120 VAC, 1 PH
2 hp 240-277 VAC, 1 PH
3 hp 480-600 VAC 1 PH
5 hp 240 VAC, 3 PH
7.5 hp 480 VAC 3 PH
20A ballast 277-480 VAC
1466 VA 240 VAC, 3 PH
2112 VA 480 VAC, 3 PH
Auto
Manual
N.C. - Closed
Open
N.O. - Closed
(yellow) Common
(blue)
N.C.
(orange)
N.O.
20A resistive 277 VAC
1 hp 120 VAC
2 hp 277 VAC
20A ballast N.O. 120/277 VAC
10A ballast N.C. 120/277 VAC
10A tungsten N.O. 120 VAC
770 VA pilot duty 120 VAC
1110 VA pilot duty 277 VAC
RIB24P30 1-DPDT 24 VAC/VDC A-3/4 –
N.C.
Common
N.O.
N.C.
Common
N.O.
(gray)
(purple)
(brown)
(blue) (yellow) (orange)
30A resistive 300 VAC
25A resistive 28 VDC
15A resistive 600 VAC
1 hp 120 VAC
2 hp 240-277 VAC
3 hp 480-600 VAC
20A ballast 277-480 VAC
770 VA pilot duty 120 VAC
1,158 VA pilot duty 240 VAC
1,110 VA pilot duty 277 VAC
1,640 VA pilot duty 480 VAC
24 VAC/VDC - White/Yellow wires
Wiring
125 mA @ 24 VAC 50 mA @ 24 VDC
Input Current
For normally closed, add -NC after model number when ordering.
For normally closed, add -NC after model number when ordering.
For normally closed, add -NC after model number when ordering.
208-277 VAC
480 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
120 VAC
*Not rated for electronic ballast
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES RELAY IN A BOX
RIB, RIBT POWER SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS - POWER SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Order by model number
* Models may be ordered in RIBT Series with high/low voltage separation.
** Can be ordered normally closed by adding - NC after the model number.
† N4 has NEMA 4 housing

1201. fi 1137RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
RELAY IN A BOX LATCHING RELAY SERIES
RIBL LATCHING SERIES
Operate Time 50 ms
Pulse
Length
30 seconds (maximum)
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Wire
Type
16" (46 cm) 600 v
Life Rating 1 million cycles minimum
mechanical
Operating Temperature -30° to 140°F (-34° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing
Housing Type NEMA 1, plenum rated
Conduit Hub 0.5" NPT nipple
Dimensions
B, SB 1.7" x 2.8" x 1.5"
(4.32 x 7.11 x 3.81 cm)
BM, SBM 2.3" x 3.2" x 1.8"
(5.84 x 8.13 x 4.57 cm)
Approvals UL listed, UL508, C-UL, CE, RoHS
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The RIBL Latching Series relays are activated by pulse commands from a controller
. The relay contacts are
mechanically latched in the closed position and the load will remain on in the event of a control panel failure period
. If
po
wer is completely lost the contacts will remain in their last
state and the load will activate upon the return of normal power or emergency power.
FEATURES
• NEMA 1 Plastic enclosure
• UL Listed
• Energy efficient (no coil draw when relay is active)
• Optional override switch
• Optional status LED
• Optional auxilary contacts for status control
Wht/Blu
24 Vac/dc (–)
Wht/Yel
24 Vac/dc (+)
Wht/Red
24 Vac/dc (–)
UNLATCH
LATCH
Org
Line
Org
Load
WIRINGSPECIFICATIONS
RIBL12B
RIBL24SBM
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model
Coil
Voltage
Coil Current
Latch / Unlatch
Voltage
Contact
Arrangement
Contact Rating LED Indication
RIBL12B
12 VAC / DC
182mA @ 10 VAC, 250mA @ 12 VAC,
165mA @ 10VDC,
198mA @ 12 VDC,
250mA @ 15VDC
Latch / Unlatch:
10 VDC / 11
VAC Minimum
One SPST
latching relay,
dual coil
20A resistive @ 120-
277 VAC, 20A ballast
@ 120-277 VAC, 16A
electronic ballast @
120-277 VAC, 5540 W
tungsten @ 277 VAC,
720 VA @ 120-277
VAC, 2 hp @ 277 VAC,
3 hp @ 240 VAC, 1.5
hp @ 120 VAC
None
RIBL12BM
ON = Voltage detected
(contact closed)
RIBL12SB None
RIBL12SBM
ON = Voltage detected
(contact closed)
RIBL24B
24 VAC / DC
175mA @ 20 VAC, 210mA @ 24 VAC,
92mA @ 20VDC,
110mA @ 24 VDC, 138mA @ 30 VDC
Latch / Unlatch:
20 VDC / 22
VAC Minimum
None
RIBL24BM
ON = Voltage detected
(contact closed)
RIBL24SB None
RIBL24SBM
ON = Voltage detected
(contact closed)

1202. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1138fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES RELAY IN A BOX DRY CONTACT INPUT SERIES
RIB01BDC, RIB01SBDC, RIB02BDC, RIB02SBDC, RIB21CDC
Coil Rating 120 VAC @ 42 mA, 208-277 VAC @
62 mA, 120-277 VAC @ 50 mA
Contact Rating 20A resistive @ 277 VAC 1110 VA
pilot duty @ 277 VAC 770 VA pilot
duty @ 120 VAC 20A ballast 277
VAC N
.O. 10A ballast 277 VAC N.C
240W tungsten 120 VAC N.C. 2 hp
277
VAC 1 hp 120 VAC, 10A general
use @ 250 VAC 10A resistive @ 30 VDC 1/2 hp 125-250 VAC 470 VA pilot duty 120-240 VAC
Frequency
50/60 Hz
Controlling Contact SPST, 7 VDC, 1µA minimum
Output Type SPDT, SPST-NO
Wire Length 16" (40.6 cm)
Operating Temperature -30° to 140°F (-34.4° to 60°F)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% non-condensing
Housing Type NEMA 1, plemum, NEMA 1, plenum
Conduit Hub 1/2" NPT
Dimensions RIB01, RIB02
2.3" H x 3.2" W x 1.8" D
(5.8 x 8.1 x 4.6 cm), RIB21CDC
1.7" H x 2.8" W x 1.5" D
(4.3 x 7.1 x 3.8 cm)
Approval UL File E68805
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The dry contact input RIB Series is controlled by Class 2
circuits with a dry contact from a BAS controller, thermostat,
switch, another relay, or a solid-state switch
. The power
to energize the RIB Series comes from the load being controlled or a local power source near the relay
. The relay
contacts are isolated from the input power and the dry contact input
.
FEATURES
• Remote power input, dry contact control
• LED indication
• UL listed
• Optional override switch
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RIB01BDC Dry contact input RIB, 120 VAC, SPDT, 20A
RIB01SBDC Dry contact input RIB, 120 VAC, SPST-NO, 20A, override switch
RIB02BDC Dry contact input RIB, 208-277 VAC, SPDT, 20A
RIB02SBDC Dry contact input RIB, 208-277 VAC, SPST-NO, 20A, override switch
RIB21CDC Dry contact input RIB, 120-277 VAC, SPDT, 10A
RIB21CDC-N4 Dry contact input RIB, 120-277 VAC, SPDT, 10A, NEMA 4 housing
SPECIFICATIONS
RIB
(blue)
N.C.
Dry Contact
Input (Class 2)*
Contact Output
(white/red)
(white/blue)
RIB21CDC
120-277 VAC
Black
Neutral or phase red
RIB01BDC
120 VAC
Black
Neutral white
POWER INPUT
RIB02BDC
208-277 VAC
Black
Neutral or phase red
(yellow)
Common
(orange)
N.O.
* If more than one dry contact RIB is used in common, connect all white/blue wires together
RIB
Dry Contact
Input (Class 2)*
(white/red)
(white/blue)
RIB01SBDC
120 VAC
Black
Neutral white
POWER INPUT
RIB02SBDC
208-277 VAC
Black
Neutral or phase red
orange
orange
Closed
Open
Auto
•
•
•
•
WIRING INSTALLATION
Power
Input
Relay
Contact
RIB located at
RTU or Load
BAS Controller,
Thermostat, or
Other Dry Contact
Switch
Minimum rating
7 VDC, 1µA
Low-Voltage
Class 2 Wiring
Starter
Power
208-480 VAC
RTU or
Other Load
RIB01SBDC RIB21CDC

1203. fi 1139RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES LONWORKS RELAY IN A BOX
RIBTW SERIES
Coil Rating 24 VAC @ 111 mA, 24 VDC @ 81
mA, 120 VAC @ 96 mA, 208-277
VAC @ 105 mA
Contact Rating 20 A resitive @ 277 VAC,
20 A ballast N.O. @ 120/277 VAC,
10 A ballast N.C. @120/277 VAC,
10 A tungsten N.O. @ 120 VAC,
1110 VA piot duty @ 277 VAC, 770 VA pilot duty @ 120 VAC, 2 hp @ 277 VAC, 1 hp @ 120 VAC
Frequency
50/60 Hz
Relay Type SPDT, SPST-NO
Duty Continous
Transceiver Type FTT-10A
LED Indication
Green Network status
Red Relay status
Yellow Service status
Operating Temperature -30° to 140°F (35° to 60°C)
Operating
Humidity
5% to 95% non-condensing
Housing Type NEMA 1, plenum rated
Conduit Hub 1/2' NPT
Dimensions 4"H x 4"W x 1.8"D (10.2 x 10.2 x
4.6 cm) with ½" NPT Nipple
Approvals UL listed file #E68805, CE certified,
LonMark 3.3 certified, FCC, ROHS
Weight 0.82 lb (0.38 Kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The RIBTW Series of general-purpose power relays are
controlled from a remote location using a LONWorks network.
The rela
y is powered locally and communication with the
network is over a twisted pair of wires
. Using standard
netw
ork variables (SNVTs) the relay can be commanded on
and off over the network and the relay state is communicated
.
A separ
ate digital input is provided to conveniently allow the
state of a status feedback signal from a current switch (or other switched feedback device) to be communicated on the LONWorks network
.
FEATURES
• Enclosed LonWorks relay with 20A contacts
• Additional dry contact input (powered by Class 2
circuit)
• Models with manual override switch
• LED indication of network status, relay status and
service status
• UL listed and LonMark certified, CE
LON
LON
Dry contact input
Class 2 circuit
24 VAC/VDC
(blue)
N.C.
(yellow)
Comm
(orange)
N.O.
Common
(white/yellow)
Neutral
(white/black)
120 VA C
or (white/brown)
208-270 VAC
RIBTW2401B, RIBTW2402B
LON
LON
Dry contact input
Class 2 circuit
24 VAC/VDC
(orange)
Closed AutoOpen
(orange)
Common
(white/yellow)
Neutral
(white/black)
120 VA C
or (white/brown)
208-270 VAC
RIBTW2401SB, RIBTW2402SB
NOTE: When using 120, 200, or 277 VAC, there will be residual voltage on 24V terminals;
this is not intended to power external devices.
WIRING
APPLICATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RIBTW2401B-LN LonWorks RIB relay, SPDT, 24 VAC/VDC or 120 VAC power input
RIBTW2402B-LN LonWorks RIB relay, SPDT, 24 VAC/VDC or 208-277 VAC power input
RIBTW2401SB-LN LonWorks RIB relay, SPST-NO with manual override switch, 24 VAC/VDC or 120 VAC power input
RIBTW2402SB-LN LonWorks RIB relay, SPST-NO with manual override switch, 24 VAC/VDC or 208-277 VAC power input
SPECIFICATIONS
The relay will go to the default state when the communication
timer times out. Setting the timer value to zero will cause the
communication to never time out.
DESCRIPTION SNVT NAME SNVT TYPE
Command to open/close relayn vi Value SNVT_switch
Command status of relayn vo Fb Value SNVT_switch
Default state of relay on/off nci Default SNVT_switch
Communication timer nci Max Receive T SNVT_elapsed_tm
Invert status of Digital-In nci Invert SNVT_lev_disc
Max time between updatesnci Max Send T SNVT_elapsed_tm
Min time between updatesnci Min Send T SNVT_elapsed_tm
OPEN LOOP SENSOR OBJECT
nci Inve rt
nci Max Send T
nci Min Send T
nvo
Value
NV1
NODE OBJECT
nvi
Request
NV1 nvo
Status
NV2
CLOSED LOOP ACTUATOR
nci Default
nci Max Receive T
nvi
Value
NV1 nvo
Value Fb
NV2
RIBTW2401B

1204. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1140fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES BACNET RELAY IN A BOX
RIBTW2401B-BC
Supply Voltage 24 VAC @ 11 mA, 24 VDC @ 81 mA,
120 VAC @ 96 mA
Contact Rating 20A resistive @ 277 VAC, 20A ballast
N.O. @ 120/277 VAC, N.C. @ 277
V
AC, 10A tungsten N
.O. @ 120 VAC,
1110 VA pilot duty @ 277 VAC, 770
VA pilot duty @ 120 VAC, 2 hp @
277 VAC, 1 hp @ 120 VAC
Frequency
50/60 Hz
Relay Type SPDT
Duty Continuous duty
Life Expectancy 10 million cycles minimum
Baud Rate 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 76800,
and 115200
LED Indication Green: network status,
Red: relay status
Operating Temperature -30° to 140°F (35° to 60°C)
Operating
Humidity
5% to 95% non-condensing
Housing Type NEMA 1, plenum rated
Conduit Hub 1/2" NPT
Dimensions 4" H x 4" W x 1.8" D
(10.2 x 10.2 x 4.6 cm);
1/2" NPT nipple
Approvals UL listed file #E68805, CE certified,
BACnet certified
Weight 0.83 lb (0.38 Kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Model RIBTW2401B-BC is an open-protocol relay controlled from a remote location using a BACnet network
. These are also
available in the LonWorks protocol. The relay is powered locally, and
communication with the network is over a twisted pair of wires. Using
standard BA
Cnet or LonWorks objects, the relay can be commanded
on and off over the network and the relay state communicated back
.
A separ
ate digital input is provided to conveniently allow the state
of a status feedback signal from a current switch (or other switched feedback device) to be communicated on the network. Click on the
related parts and pricing tab for a more complete listing of available models
.
FEATURES
• Enclosed BACnet relay with 20A contacts
• Additional dry contact input (powered by Class 2
circuit)
• LED indication of network status and relay status
• UL listed and BACnet compatible, CE
(blue)
N/C
(yellow)
Comm
(orange)
N/O
(white/yellow)
Neutral
NOTE: When using 120 VAC, there will be residual voltage on 24V terminals;
this is not to be used for powering external devices.
(white/black)
120 VAC
0 12345678 91011 12
MSB
LSB
Baud
rate
MS/TP ADDRESS
1
24 VAC/VDC
Common
Dry contact Digital input
MSTP
REF A(–) B(+)
Relay
override
Connect jumper for terminating
resistor. Disconnect for no
terminating resistor.
*24 V or 120 V required but not both
WIRINGAPPLICATION
SPECIFICATIONS
RIBTW2401B-BC
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RIBTW2401B-BC BACnet RIB relay, SPDT, 24 VAC/VDC or 120 VAC power input
RIBTW2402B-BC BACnet RIB relay, SPDT, 24 VAC/VDC or 208/277VAC power input
BACnet
®
Compatible Relay
Dry contact input (Class 2 circuit)
Network
24 VAC/VDC
Line
Neutral
Load
(orange) (yellow)
Occupancy sensor

1205. fi 1141RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES WIRELESS CONTROL RELAYS
RIBW SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The RIBW Series wireless control relays are enclosed and
offer easy installation without the expense of traditional
hard wiring
. The control relays are used in tandem with the
wireless transmitter Model RIBWE24TDC-EN. Relays can be
mounted up to 100 ft (30 m) from the transmitter.
FEATURES
• Enclosed wireless relay with 20A contacts
• Eliminates hard wiring
• LED indication of relay status
• Continuous duty coil
Relay Type SPDT, continuous duty
Coil Rating
RIBW01B-EN 120 VAC @ 73 mA
RIBW227B-EN 277 VAC @ 80 mA
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Contact Rating 20A resistive @ 120/277 VAC, 20A
ballast N.O. @ 120/277 VAC, 10A
ballast N.C. @120 VAC, 1110 VA pilot
duty @ 120 VAC, 2 HP @ 277 VAC,
1 HP @ 120 VAC
Life Expectancy 10 million cycles minimum
LED Indication Red: on = energized
Operating Temperature -30° to 140°F (35° to 60°C)
Operating
Humidity
5% to 95% non-condensing
Dimensions 2.3"H x 3.2"W x 1.8"D
(5.8 x 8.1 x 4.6 cm) with 0.5"
(1.27 cm) NPT nipple
Housing Type NEMA 1, plenum rated
Wire Length 16" (46CM) 600 v
Approvals UL Listed File E68805, CE, Rohs
Warranty 1 year
TRANSMITTER Supply Voltage
24 VAC @ 42 mA; 24 VDC @ 38 mA,
50/60 Hz
Frequency 315 mHz
Transmission Power 10mW EIRP, maximum
LED Indication On: input activated; slow blink: input
deactivated; fast blink: transmitting
Operating Temperature -30° to 140°F (35° to 60°C)
Operating
Humidity
5% to 95% non-condensing
Dimensions 1.7"H x 2.8"W x 1.5"D
(4.3 x 7.1 x 3.8)
Housing Type NEMA 1, plenum rated
Wire Length 16" (46 cm) 600V
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
RIBW277B-EN2
RIBW01B-EN2

1206. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1142fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES WIRELESS CONTROL RELAYS
RIBW SERIES
WIRING
(blue)
(orange)
(black)
120 or
277 VAC
(white)
Neutral
Wireless
receiver
control
unit
Relay Wiring
Wireless transmitter control unit
(white/yellow)
24 VAC/VDC
(white/blue)
(white/yellow)
24 VAC/VDC
Dry contact
input
(white/red)
Low voltage control input
(white/black)
(white/black)
Wireless
transmission
Transmitter Wiring
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RIBW01B-EN2 2-way wireless encl relay dry-contact, 20A 120 VAC
RIBW24B-EN2 2-way wireless encl relay dry-contact, 20A 24 VAC
RIBW208B-EN2 2-way wireless encl relay dry-contact, 20A 208 VAC
RIBW240B-EN2 2-way wireless encl relay dry-contact, 20A 240 VAC
RIBW277B-EN2 2-way wireless encl relay dry-contact, 20A 277 VAC
RIBWE24TDC-EN2 Wireless trasmitter for RIB relays
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
WWS Series Wireless switch transmitter 679
WWS Series switch cover WWS Series swtich cover plates 679

1207. fi 1143RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
Relay sections (snap-apart)
Contact type
Voltage input
Contact rating
MR-100 MR-200
SERIES
MR-600 MR-800
1 or 4 1, 4, or 8
24 VDC @ 18 mA
24 VAC @ 18 mA
120 VAC @ 18 mA
230 VAC @ 18 mA
24 VDC @ 40 mA
24 VAC @ 40 mA
120 VAC @ 40 mA
230 VAC @ 40 mA
24 VAC, 24 VDC
@15 mA
24 VDC @ 22 mA
24 VAC @ 60 mA
120 VAC @ 20 mA
SPDT SPDTDPDT
10A resistive @ 120 VAC
7A resistive @ 230 VAC/28 VDC
N.O.: 1/6 hp @ 120 VAC
N.C.: 1/8 hp @ 120 VAC
10A @ 120 VAC
7A @ 24 VDC
10A @ 120 VAC
7A @ 30 VDC/277 VAC
1/4 hp @ 120 VAC
1/3 hp @ 230 VAC
32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C) 32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C)
LED
Solid or stranded, 12 to 22 AWG terminals
18-gauge metal back, ABS-94VO plastic cover
1/2" knockouts
On/Auto/Off Switch
–
–
–
–
3.25"H x 2.13"W x 1.5"D (8.25 x 5.39 x 3.81 cm)
5.13"H x 3.13"W x 2.5"D (13 .46 x 7.95 x 6.35 cm) or
5.13"H x 9.5"W x 2.5"D (13.46 x 24.13 x 6.35 cm)
3.5"H x 2.13"W x 1.38"D (8.9 x 5.4 x 3.5 cm)
UL-recognized component, File #S3403
Enclosed model UL listed, File #S3403
UL-recognized component,
File #S3403
* Specifications are for each relay section.
Temperature
Wiring
Track or enclosed Track Track or spacerMounting
Indication
Manual override
Enclosure option
Dimensions
Enclosure dimensions
Agency approvals
SPECIFICATIONS
AIR PRODUCTS AND CONTROLS MULTI-VOLTAGE CONTROL RELAYS
MR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MR Series multi-voltage control relays offer SPDT or
DPDT contacts which may be operated by multiple input
control voltages
.Each relay section contains a red LED,
which indicates the relay coil is energized. Relay sections
may be snapped apart from standard four- or eight-section assemblies and used independently
.These relays are ideal
for applications where local or remote contacts are required for control of electrical loads and general-purpose switching
.
The
y are suitable for use with HVAC, temperature control,
fire alarm, security, building automation, and lighting control systems.
FEATURES
• Multi-v •
LED indication when relay is energized
• Snap-apart relay sections from standard four or eight-
section assemblies
• Track, spacer, or enclosed mounting options
• Dust-proof housing with LED viewing holes on
enclosed models
• Relays rated for 10 million mechanical operations
MR-101/T MR-601/T
MR-801/S
MR-101/C MR-104/T

1208. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1144fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
AIR PRODUCTS AND CONTROLS MULTI-VOLTAGE CONTROL RELAYS
MR SERIES
Ø 18/24 115 230
NC C NO
SPDT Contacts
10A @
120 VAC
Relay
Energized
Indicator
MR-101, -104
Input
Control
Voltage
24 VDC
24 VAC
120 VAC
230 VAC
(–)(+)
A.C.A.C.
L1
H
L2
N
Terminal stri p connections
NC C NO
SPDT Contacts
10A @
120 VAC
Ø 18/24 115 230
NC C NO
DPDT Contacts
10A @
120 VAC
Relay
Energized
Indicator
MR-201, -204 MR-601, -604, -608
Input
Control
Voltage
24 VDC
24 VAC
120 VAC
230 VAC
(–)(+)
A.C.A.C.
L1
H
L2
N
Input
Control
Voltage
24 VDC
24 VAC
120 VAC
(+)
N
AC
(–)
AC
H
Terminal stri p connections
NC C NO
Relay
Energized
Indicator
Supply
24 VAC
24 VDC
24 VAC/VDC
Control
Input
Common
NC C NO
SPDT Contacts
10A @
120 VAC
MR-801, -804, -808
Relay
Energized
Indicator
Terminal stri p connections
ON
AUTO
OFF
SUP CTL COM
Ø 24 115
Note: Multisection relays MR-604
and MR-608 ha ve all supply
and all common terminals
factory jumpered together.
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MR-101/T
MR-101/C
MR-104/T
MR-104/C
MR-201/T
MR-201/C
MR-204/T
MR-204/C
MR-601/T
MR-604/T
MR-608/T
MR-801/T
MR-801/S
MR-804/T
MR-804/S
MR-808/T
MR-808/S
COIL VOLTAGE SECTIONS MOUNTING SWITCH AGENCY APPR OVALS
24 VDC
24 VAC
120 VAC
230 VAC
UL
MEA
CSFM
SPDT (10A)
DPDT (10A) Manual
Override
On/Auto/Off
MODEL
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Recognized
Listed
Recognized
Listed
Recognized
Listed
Recognized
Listed
Recognized
Recognized
Recognized
Recognized
Recognized
Recognized
Recognized
Recognized
Recognized
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
1
4
4
1
4
8
1
1
4
4
8
8
1
1
4
4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Track
(included)
Spacers
(included)
Enclosure
(included)

1209. fi 1145RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES MODULAR PANEL RELAYS
RIB M SERIES
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Life Rating 10 million cycles minimum
mechanical
Relay Status LED, ON - relay activated
Operating Temperature -30° to 140°F (-34° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% non-condensing
Dimensions
C 1.75"H x 4"W x 1.25"L
(4.45 x 10.16 x 3.18 cm)
D 1.75"H x 4"W x 2"L
(4.45 x 10.16 x 5.08 cm)
F 1.75"H x 4"W x 2.45"L
(4.45 x 10.16 x 6.22 cm)
H 1.75"D x 2.75"W x 1.25"L
(4.45 x 6.99 x 3.18 cm)
I 1.75"D x 2.75"W x 1.7"L
(4.45 x 6.99 x 4.32 cm)
J 1.75"D x 4"W x 1.5"L
(4.45 x 10.16 x 3.85 cm)
K 1.75"D x 2.75"W x 2.5"L
(4.45 x 6.99 x 6.35 cm)
L 1.75"D x 2.75"W x 1.25"L
(4.45 x 6.99 x 8.64 cm)
MH1000 14.5"H x 7.7"W x 3.9"D
(36.83 x 19.56 9.91 cm)
MH3500 24.5"H x 10.25"W x 3.9"D
(62.23 x 26.04 x 9.91 cm)
MH38000 24.5"H x 12.5"W x 6.5"D
(62.23 x 31.75 x 16.5 cm)
Approvals UL listed, UL 916 Energy
Management, UL 864 Fire
, cUL
listed, CSFM
. UL FIle E68805
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The RIB M Series modular relay system allows the installer
to mount a combination of relays in an attractive metal
enclosure
. Models are available to control most BAS, HVAC,
low-horsepower motors and lighting applications. The relay
modules snap into a 4" (10.16 cm) wide plastic track. This
system provides a convenient and cost-saving method of mixing and matching relays of different ratings to suit the requirements of the application
.Connections to the modules
are made by wiring to screw terminals. Input connections
can be g
rouped on one side of the enclosure and output
connections on the other to separate high-voltage and low- voltage wires. Plenty of room is provided within the enclosure
for wire runs, and the housings can be stacked vertically or horizontally
. The relay modules can be snap-track mounted
inside the housing as pictured or mounted into an available space in other equipment
. The track is available in 2" (5.08
cm) lengths for mounting one module or in 12" (30.5 cm)
lengths for mounting several modules.
RIBM Pilot Series - 10A, 15A modular relays
These pilot modular relays have contacts rated up to 15A and are used to control light electrical loads, drive power relays/ contactors or to sense the voltage fed to electrical loads
. The
pilot modular relays require a low coil drive current and are provided with circuitry to allow powering the relay coil from a wide range of AC or DC voltages
.
RIBM Power Series - 30A modular relays
The power modular relays have contacts rated up to 30A.
The
y require modest coil drive current and are used for direct
switching and control of heavy electrical circuits such as large resistive, motor, or lighting loads.
FEATURES
• Convenient and economical to use
• Handy, track-mounted modules
• Attractive, stackable metal enclosure
• Relay status indicator via LED
• Coil uses low current and accepts wide range of AC &
DC voltages
• Closed/Open/Auto switch option available
• High density relay packaging
• UL listed enclosure and relay modules
SPECIFICATIONS
RIB M Series
(shown in optional
enclosure)
PULL-IN DROP-OUT
COIL DRIVE DC AC DC AC
10-30 VAC/VDC 10 9 2 .8 2 .1
24 VAC/VDC 22 18 3 .8 3
120 VAC – 85 – 35
208-277 VAC – 160 – 60
Coil pull-in/drop-out (nominal values)

1210. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1146fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
DPST-NO
DPST-NO
–
Yes-2
–
Yes-2
–
Yes
24 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
120 VAC
50/60 Hz
24 VAC/VDC
208-277 VAC
50/60 Hz
24 VAC/VDC
120 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
208-277 VAC
20A resistive 277 VAC
1 hp 120 VAC
2 hp 277 VAC
20A ballast N.O. 120-277 VAC
10A ballast N.C. 120-277 VAC
10A tungsten N.O. 120 VAC
770 VA pilot duty 120 VAC
1,110 VA pilot duty 277 VAC
20A resistive 300 VAC, 28 VDC
15A resistive 600 VAC
1 hp 120 VAC
2 hp 240-277 VAC
3 hp 480-600 VAC
20A ballast 277-480 VAC
770 VA pilot duty 120 VAC
1,158 VA pilot duty 240 VAC
1,110 VA pilot duty 277 VAC
1,640 VA pilot duty 480 VAC
24ZL and 24ZN: 30A res.@ 300 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
COMMON
NC
COM
NO
RIBM2401B
RIBM2401SBC
RIBM2402B
RIBM2402SBC
RIBM2401SB
RIBM2402SB
RIBM24PL
RIBM24ZL
1-SPDT
1-SPST-NO
C
F
F
D
45 mA @ 18 VAC 30 mA @ 22 VDC
75 mA @ 24 VAC 32 mA @ 24 VDC
42 mA @ 120 VAC 42 mA @ 30 VDC
62 mA @ 208-277 VAC
100 mA @ 20 VAC 50 mA @ 24 VDC
125 mA @ 24 VAC 70 mA @ 30 VDC
Closed
Open
Auto
Position of ye llow jumper
selects N.O. vs N.C.
either - 208-277 VAC
or - 120 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
Common
NO
NC
COM
NO
Relay Without Override Switch
Relay With Override Switch
Common
N.C.
N.O.
Auto
Manual
N.C. - Closed
Open
N.O. - Closed
C
F
Wiring
Wiring
Current Input
Current Input
–F
DPDTRIBM24ZN 24 VAC/VDC
NC
COM
NO
Relay #2
(if present)
Relay #1 (and #2 if present)
COIL DRIVE DA TA
RIBMU1C
RIBMU1SC
RIBMNU1C
Relay #1
U1S and H1S
NC
COM
NO
NC
COM
NO
Closed
Open
Auto
Closed
Open
Auto
Closed
Open
Auto
Closed
Open
Auto
MODEL TYPE SIZE*OVR CONTA CT RATINGS CONTA CT WIRINGCOIL DRIVE
1-SPDT
1-SPST –
Yes
U1SM and H1SM
24 VAC/VDC
50-60 Hz
10-30 VAC/VDC
208-277 VAC
50-60 Hz
10-30 VAC/VDC
120 VAC
50-60 Hz
10-30 VAC/VDC
208-277 VAC
50-60 Hz
10-30 VAC/VDC
120 VAC
50-60 Hz
Wiring
Wiring
Current Input
15A general use 125 VAC
10A general use 250 VAC
10A resistive 30 VDC
1/2 hp 125/250 VAC
470 VA pilot duty 120/240 VAC
10A resistive 120/240/277 VAC
15A resistive 150 VAC, 28 VDC
15A inductive 150 VAC
480 VA pilot duty 240/277 VAC
480 VA ballast 277 VAC
600W tungsten 120 VAC N.O.
240W tungsten 120 VAC N.C.
1/3 hp fo r N.O. 120/240 VAC
1/6 hp fo r N.C. 120/240 VAC
1/4 hp fo r N.O. 277 VAC
1/8 hp fo r N.C. 277 VAC
10A resistive 277 VAC
15A resistive 150 VAC
480 VA pilot duty 277 VAC
480 VA ballast 277 VAC
600W tungsten 120 VAC N.O.
240W tungsten 120 VAC N.C.
1/3 hp fo r N.O. 120/240 VAC
1/6 hp fo r N.C. 120/240 VAC
1/4 hp fo r N.O. 277 VAC
1/8 hp fo r N.C. 277 VAC
Status
Status
24C 24S
*Cut appropri ate jumper to
select N.C. or N.O.
**For norm ally closed
contacts, specify NC
after model number
Yes
Yes +
Yes
Yes+
24 VAC/VDC
Current Input
30 mA @ 10 VAC 12 mA @ 10 VDC
32 mA @ 12 VAC 14 mA @ 12 VDC
42 mA @ 24 VAC 16 mA @ 24 VDC
50 mA @ 30 VAC 18 mA @ 30 VDC
25 mA @ 120 VAC
35 mA @ 208-277 VAC
either
or
208-277 VAC
120 VAC
10-30 VAC/VDC
Common
**
*
RIBMH2C 2-SPDT
1-SPST-NO
1-SPST-NO
1-SPST-NO
1-SPST-NO
* See Specification on previous page for dimensions.
RIBM24C
RIBMN24C
RIBMU1S
RIBMNU1S
F
F
1-SPDT
1-SPDT
C
H
C
C
C
K
D
L
C
K
C
H
D
RIBM24S
RIBMN24S
RIBMU2C
RIBMH1C
2-SPDT
–
–
Yes-2
–
–
–
Yes-
2
–
J
J
RIBMNH1C
RIBMH1SC
RIBMH1SM
RIBMNH1SM
RIBMH1S
RIBMNH1S
RIBMU1SM
RIBMNU1SM
Relay Without Override Switch
Relay With Override Switch
Common
N.C.
N.O.
Auto
Manual
N.C. - Closed
Open
N.O. - Closed
STATUS 50 VAC/VDC max and
0.25 A max
I
I
L
24 mA @ 20 VAC 13 mA @ 20 VDC
28 mA @ 24 VAC 16 mA @ 24 VDC
44 mA @ 35 VAC 25 mA @ 35 VDC
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES MODULAR PANEL RELAYS
RIB M SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS - PILOT RELAY MODULES
SPECIFICATIONS - POWER RELAY MODULES
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES
MH1000 Screw-cover housing
MH3500 Hinge-cover housing
MH3800 Hinge-cover housing
MT212-12 Relay track, 12" x 2.75" (30.48 x 6.99 cm)
MT212-2 Relay track, 2" x 2.75" (5.08 x 6.99 cm)
MT4-12 Relay track, 12" x 4" (30.48 x 10.16 cm)
MT4-2 Relay track, 2" x 4" (5.08 x 10.16 cm)

1211. fi 1147RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
Coil Rating
PAM-1 24 VAC @ 31 mA, 24 VDC @ 15 mA,
120 VAC @ 19 mA
PAM-4 9-40 VDC @ 15 mA
Contact Rating SPDT, Form C, 10A @120 VAC, 7A
@ 24 VDC, 250µA @ 5 VDC
Wire Size 12" (30.5 cm), 18 AWG
Operating Temperature -58° to 185°F (-50° to 85°C)
Mounting Pre-drilled mounting screw hole and
mounting screw provided; double-
sided tape also provided
Dimensions 1.5"H x 1"W x 0.9"D
(3.81 x 2.54 x 2.2 cm)
Approvals UL listed File #S3403, CSFM, MEA
Weight 0.15 lb (0.068 kg)
Warranty 1 year
AIR PRODUCTS AND CONTROLS MULTI-VOLTAGE RELAY MODULES
PAM-1, PAM-4
DESCRIPTION
PAM Series relays are small encapsulated multi-voltage
modules that provide 10A Form C contacts.These devices
are ideal for applications where remote relays are required for control or status feedback
. They are suitable for use with
HVAC, temperature control, fire alarm, security, building automation, and lighting control systems
.
PAM Series relays may be mounted by using double-sided
adhesive tape (provided), a self-drilling screw, or they may be loosely placed in a handy box
.
FEATURES
• Multi-v •
Small size
• Multiple mounting options
• Wirenuts, mounting screw, and tape included
• LED indication (PAM-1 only)
9-40 VDC
@ 15 mA
(red)
(black)
(blue)
(yellow)
(orange)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(–)
10A
Contacts
C
N.C.
N.O.
Mounting Hole
24 VAC/
VDC
120V*
(white)
(red)
(black)
(blue)
(yellow)
(orange)
10A
Contacts
C N.C. N.O.
Mounting Hole
Relay Energized LED
PAM-1
PAM-4
* May not be suitable fo r continuous duty use at 120 VAC for extended periods of time.
WIRING
PAM-1
ORDERING INFORMATION
PAM-4
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
P
AM-1
Multi-voltage relay module, 24 VAC/VDC, 120 VAC
PAM-4 Multi-voltage relay module, 9-40 VDC
P
AM-2
Multi-voltage relay module, 12 or 24 VDC
P
AM-SD
Multi-voltage relay module, 20-32 VDC

1212. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1148fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
DESCRIPTION
The KE375 and KE900 Series of 30A relays are heavy
duty power relays commonly used for energy management,
refrigeration, and HVAC control applications
. High power
handling capability and small size make these power relays particularly suited for motor control, heater loads, and lighting control
. The KE900 Series features an open
frame construction, and the KE375 is encased in a clear polycarbonate cover
.
FEATURES
• Small size
• High-power handling capability
• One-, two-, and three-pole models
• 24 VAC, 24 VDC & 120 VAC coils
KE375
KE900D
KE900 KE375
24 VAC/60 Hz, 120 VAC/60 Hz, or 24 VDC
3/16" dia mounting holes Top-mount cover with slotted tabs
30A or 1-1/2 hp @ 120 VAC / 240 VAC
20A or 2 hp @ 600 VAC
30A @ 28 VDC, resistive 3600W @ 120 or 240V (ballast) 2 hp @ 240 VAC
20A @ 600 VAC
20A @ 125 VDC (D models only)
30A @ 300 VAC, 80% PF
15A @ 600 VAC, 80% PF
30A @ 28 VDC 1 hp @ 120 VAC
2 hp @ 240 VAC / 277 VAC
3 hp @ 480/600 VAC, 100,000 cycles
20A @ 277/480 VAC ballast, 6000 cycles
AC: 9.5 VA sealed
DC: 2.0W
AC: 4.6 VA
DC: 2.6W
AC: 85% or less of nominal
DC: 75% or less of nominal
Coil voltage
Coil power
Pull-in voltage
Contact ratings
Mounting
Terminals
Contact material
Dielectric strength
Screw terminals
30 ms
10 oz (283g)
15 ms
3.5 oz (99g)
Silver cadmium oxide
2200V RMS between contacts
2200V RMS between other elements
2200V RMS between contacts
3750V RMS between other elements
UL/cUL listed, File #E37066 UL/cUL-recognized component, File #E37066;
CE certified
0.25" x 0.032" quick connects
Operate/Release
time
Weight
Agency approv als
SPECIFICATIONS
KE900S
POWER RELAYS
KE375, KE900 SERIES

1213. fi 1149RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
POWER RELAYS
KE375, KE900 SERIES
A
1
4
3
6
7 9
B
2
5
8
1 .40
(3 .56)
2 .13
(5 .41)
3 .16
(8 .03)
2 .75
(6 .99)
2 .35
(5 .97)
0 .17
(0 .43)
0 .06
(0 .16)
KE375T
KE900S KE900D KE375T
6
5
3
8
6
4
7
5
3
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
21 21 AB
NC
NO
C
NC
NO
C
NC
NO
C
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KE375T120V
AC
3PDT Power relay 120 VAC coil
KE375T24VAC 3PDT Power relay 24 VAC coil
KE375T24VDC 3PDT Power relay 24 VDC coil
KE900S120V
AC
SPDT Power relay 120 VAC coil
KE900S24VAC SPDT Power relay 24 VAC coil
KE900S24VDC SPDT Power relay 24 VDC coil
KE900D120V
AC
DPDT Power relay 120 VAC coil
KE900D24VAC DPDT Power relay 24 VAC coil
KE900D24VDC DPDT Power relay 24 VDC coil
2 .2
(5 .59)
2 .38
(6 .04)
3 .32
(8 .43)
2 .50
(6 .35)
6-32 Screw (2) Coil Terminals
Two Mounting Holes 0 .19 (0 .48) dia
8-32 Screw
(2) Contact Terminals
1 .66
(4 .22)
1 .88
(4 .76)
2 .50
(6 .35)
1 .88
(4 .76) Two Holes
0 .19 (0 .48) dia
2 .50
(6 .35)
6-32 Screw
(2) Coil Terminals
KE900S KE900D
8-32 Screw
(6) Contact Terminals
0 .81
(2 .08)in
(cm)

1214. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1150fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
Coil Voltage 24V, 26.4V maximum,120V 50/60
Hz.132V maximum
Coil Power AC:2.5 VA, DC: 2.0W
Pull In Voltage 18V, 75V
Drop Out Voltage 3.6V, 18V, 20V
Contact Rating G7L-1A: Resistive: 30A, 277 VAC
General purpose: 25A, 277 VAC
30A 120 VAC Tungsten: 1.5 kW,
120 VAC Horsepower: 1.5 hp,
120 VAC 3 hp, 277 VAC, G7L-2A: Resistive: 25A, 277 VAC General purpose: 25A, 277 VAC 25A 120 VAC Tungsten 1
.3 kW, 120 VAC
Horsepower 1 hp, 120 VAC 2 hp, 277 VAC
Contact Resistance
50 mΩ maximum
Terminals 0.25" x 0.031" quick connects
Contact Material Silver cadmium oxide
Dielectric Strength 2000 VAC between contacts, 4000
VAC between coil and contacts
Operate Time 30 ms maximum
Release Time 30 ms maximum
Operating Temperature -13° to 140°F (-25° to 60°C)
Mounting Top-mount cover with slotted tabs
or DIN rail surface-mount socket with screw terminals
Approvals
UL-recognized component, File
#E41643: CSA certified, File #LR35535: CE certifed
Weight
0.2 lb (0.091 kg)
Warranty 1 year
ORDERING INFORMATION
OMRON POWER RELAYS
G7L SERIES
0.43
(1.1)
0.12
(0.3)
2.69
(6.85) max
2.36(6.0)
1.99 (5.05) max
2.36 ±.007
(6.0 ±0.02) 2.2 (5.6)
1.32
(3.35) max 0.078
(0.2)
0.031
(0.08)
0.177
(0.45)
0.25 (0.64) max
Two Mounting Holes
0.177 (0.45) dia
or M4 tapped holes
1.85
(4.7)
max
2.1
(5.3)
in
(cm)
Depth: 1.0 (2.54)
P7LF-06G7L-1A, -2A
G7L-1A, 2AG7L-1A, -2A
DESCRIPTION
G7L Series relays are heavy duty power relays commonly
used for controlling refrigeration, HVAC equipment, heater
loads, and lighting controls
. High-power handling capability
up to 30A, small size, and low cost characterize these relays.
The
y are available in single and double pole models and
are surface mounted or DIN rail mounted with the PL7F-06 socket.
FEATURES
• High power capability
• Small size
• Low cost
• Push-to-test button
• Optional DIN rail screw terminal socket
0 1
46
0 1
2468
G7L-1A-TUBJ-CB G7L-2A-TUBJ-CB
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
G7L-1A-TUBJ-CB-24V
AC
SPST-N.O. Power relay 24 VAC
G7L-1A-TUBJ-CB-24VDC SPST-N.O. Power relay 24 VDC
G7L-1A-TUBJ-CB-120VAC SPST-N.O. Power relay 120 VAC
G7L-2A-TUBJ-CB-24VAC DPST-N.O. Power relay 24 VAC
G7L-2A-TUBJ-CB-24VDC DPST-N.O. Power relay 24 VDC
G7L-2A-TUBJ-CB-120VAC DPST-N.O. Power relay 120 VAC
DIMENSIONS
G7L Series
SPECIFICATIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS
P7LF-06 DIN rail/surface mount socket

1215. fi 1151RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL FULL-LOAD AMP (FLA) LOCKED-ROTOR AMP (LRA) RESISTIVE HP, SINGLE PHASE HP, THREE PHASE
DPC24A2D30
DPC01A2D30
DPC02A2D30
30 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 180 LRA @ 240/277 VAC
150 LRA @ 480 VAC
120 LRA @ 600 VAC
40A @ 240-600 VAC2 hp @ 120 VAC
3 hp @ 240 VAC
DPC24A2D40
DPC01A2D40
40 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 240 LRA @ 240/277 VAC
200 LRA @ 480 VAC
160 LRA @ 600 VAC
50A @ 240-600 VAC2 hp @ 120 VAC
3 hp @ 240 VAC
DPC24A3C30
DPC01A3C30
30 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 180 LRA @ 240/277 VAC
150 LRA @ 480 VAC
120 LRA @ 600 VAC
40A @ 240-600 VAC2 hp @ 120 VAC
5 hp @ 240/277 VAC
DPC24A3C40
DPC01A3C40
40 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 240 LRA @ 240/277 VAC
200 LRA @ 480 VAC
160 LRA @ 600 VAC
50A @ 240-600 VAC3 hp @ 120 VAC
7 .5 hp @ 240/277 VAC
DPC24A3B50
DPC01A3B50
50 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 300 LRA @ 240 VAC
250 LRA @ 480 VAC
200 LRA @ 600 VAC
65A @ 240-600 VAC3 hp @ 120 VAC
7 .5 hp @ 200/208 VAC
10 hp @ 240 VAC
— — —
—
—
—
10 hp @ 200/208 VAC
10 hp @ 240/277 VAC
15 hp @ 480 VAC
20 hp @ 600 VAC
10 hp @ 200/208 VAC
10 hp @ 240/277 VAC
20 hp @ 480 VAC
25 hp @ 600 VAC
15 hp @ 200/208 VAC
15 hp @ 240 VAC
25 hp @ 480/600 VAC
DPC24A4A30
DPC01A4A30
30 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 180 LRA @ 240/277 VAC
150 LRA @ 480 VAC
120 LRA @ 600 VAC
40A @ 240-600 VAC2 hp @ 120 VAC
5 hp @ 240/277 VAC
DPC24A4A40
DPC01A4A40
40 FLA @ 240-600 VAC
2
DPST-N .O .
2
DPST-N .O .
3
3PST-N .O .
3
3PST-N .O .
3
3PST-N .O .
DPC24A3B60
DPC01A3B60
60 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 360 LRA @ 240 VAC
300 LRA @ 480 VAC
240 LRA @ 600 VAC
75A @ 240-600 VAC3 hp @ 120 VAC
7 .5 hp @ 200/208 VAC
10 hp @ 240 VAC
25 hp @ 200/208 VAC
25 hp @ 240 VAC
30 hp @ 480/600 VAC
3
3PST-N .O .
4
4PST-N .O .
4
4PST-N .O .
240 LRA @ 240/277 VAC
200 LRA @ 480 VAC
160 LRA @ 600 VAC
50A @ 240-600 VAC3 hp @ 120 VAC
7 .5 hp @ 240/277 VAC
10 hp @ 200/208 VAC
10 hp @ 240/277 VAC
15 hp @ 480 VAC
10 hp @ 200/208 VAC
10 hp @ 240/277 VAC
10 hp @ 480 VAC
POLES
MODEL  
I
 
 
 
COIL
VOLTAGE
(VAC)
24
120
208/240
24
120
24
120
24
120
NRUSH
@ 50 Hz
(VA)
31
31
35
65
65
140
140
68
68
 SEALED
@ 50 Hz
(VA)
6
6
7
7.5
7.5
20
20
14
14
INRUSH
@ 60 Hz
(VA)
28
28
32
60
60
132
132
60
60
SEALED 
@ 60 Hz
(VA)
5
5
6
6
6
14
14
9
9
PULL-IN
(VAC)
18
88
177
18
88
18
93
19.2
88
DROP-OUT
RANGE
(VAC)
6-15
20-70
40-140
6-15
20-70
6-15
20-70
6-15
20-70
DIMENSIONS fifi (fifi)
LENGTH WIDTHH EIGHT
3.29 (8.36) 2.00 (5.08) 2.61 (6.63) 0.6 (0.27)
3.29 (8.36) 2.00 (5.08) 2.61 (6.63) 0.6 (0.27)
3.29 (8.36) 2.00 (5.08) 2.61 (6.63) 0.6 (0.27)
3.30 (8.38) 2.90 (7.37) 3.00 (7.62) 1.0 (0.45)
3.30 (8.38) 2.90 (7.37) 3.00 (7.62) 1.0 (0.45)
4.06 (10.3) 3.19 (8.10) 3.56 (9.04) 1.0 (0.91)
4.06 (10.3) 3.19 (8.10) 3.56 (9.04) 1.0 (0.91)
3.42 (8.69) 2.75 (7.00) 3.03 (7.70) 1.5 (0.68)
3.42 (8.69) 2.75 (7.00) 3.03 (7.70) 1.5 (0.68)
No
24 31 62 85 18 6-15 3.29 (8.36) 2.00 (5.08) 2.61 (6.63) 0.6 (0.27) No
No
1203 16 28 58 82 0-70 3.29 (8.36) 2.00 (5.08) 2.61 (6.63) 0.6 (0.27) No
No
No
24 140 20 1321 41 86 -154 .06 (10.3) 3.19 (8.10) 3.56 (9.04) 1.0 (0.91) No
No
1201 40 20 1321 49 32 0-70 4.06 (10.3) 3.19 (8.10) 3.56 (9.04) 1.0 (0.91) No
Yes
24 65 7.56 06 18 6-15 3.30 (8.38) 2.90 (7.37) 3.00 (7.62) 1.0 (0.45) Yes
Yes
120 65 7.56 06 88 20-703 .30 (8.38) 2.90 (7.37) 3.00 (7.62) 1.0 (0.45) Yes
Yes
24 68 14 60 91 9.2 6-15 3.42 (8.69) 2.75 (7.00) 3.03 (7.70) 1.5 (0.68) Yes
Yes
120 68 14 60 98 82 0-70 3.42 (8.69) 2.75 (7.00) 3.03 (7.70) 1.5 (0.68) Yes
APPROX. 
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
OPTIONAL
AUX.
SWITCH
DPC24A2D30
DPC24A2D40
DPC01A2D30
DPC01A2D40
DPC02A2D30
DPC24A3C30
DPC24A3C40
DPC01A3C30
DPC01A3C40
DPC24A3B50
DPC24A3B60
DPC01A3B50
DPC01A3B60
DPC24A4A30
DPC24A4A40
DPC01A4A30
DPC01A4A40
DEFINITE PURPOSE CONTACTORS
DPC SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The DPC Series is an economical line of definite-purpose
contactors designed to control electrical loads such as air conditioning, refrigeration compressor, motors, and resistance heaters
.
FEATURES
• T •
Contact ratings from 30-60 FLA
• Optional auxiliary contacts on select models
CONTACT RATINGS
Two-pole Three-pole Four-pole
IEC 60947-4-1
Line Load Terminals Box lug or dual 0.25” quick connects
Coil Terminals Dual 0.25” quick connects
Auxiliary Contacts 10A, 1/3 hp @ 120/250 VAC 4A @
120 VAC for lamp load
Wire Size 14-4 AWG
Operating Temperature -40° to 149°F (-40° to 65°C)
Approvals UL recognized, File #E246810,
CE certified
Weight 1.5 lbs (0.68 kg)
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS
CN1C Auxiliary contact, (1) SPDT

1216. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1152fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
EEC DEFINITE PURPOSE CONTACTORS
T30, T40, T60, T90
Electrical Life 200,000 electrical operations
Mechanical Life 2,000,000 mechanical operations
Operating Temperature -40° to 149°F (-40° to 65°C)
Approvals CE, CSA, UL Listed #E309604
Warranty 1 year
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The T30, T40, T60 and T90 Series of definite purpose contactors
can be used in air conditioning, compressors, refrigeration, heaters
and HVAC applications
. They are rated for 200,000 electrical
operations and 2 million mechanical operations. The coils are rated
80 to 105% voltage, 65VA inrush and 7.5VA sealed. These contactors
are available in 1, 2 or 3 pole configurations up to 100 Amps.
SPECIFICATIONS
T40A3
T30A1-G
T30A1-A
T40A1-G
T40A1-A
T30A2-G
T30A2-A
T30A2-B
T30A2-C
T40A2-G
T40A2-A
T40A2-B
T40A2-C
T40A2-E
T40A2-G
T40A2-H
T40A3-G
T40A3-A
T40A3-B
T40A3-C
T40A3-H
T40A3-E
T60A3-G-AUX-C11
T60A3-A-AUX-C11
T60A3-B-AUX-C11
T60A3-C-AUX-C11
T60A3-H-AUX-C11
T60A3-E-AUX-C11
T90A3-G-AUX-C11
T90A3-A-AUX-C11
T90A3-B-AUX-C11
T90A3-C-AUX-C11
T90A3-H-AUX-C11
T90A3-E-AUX-C11 30
30
40
40
30
30
30
30
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
60
60
60
60
60
60
90
90
90
90
90
90
40
40
50
50
40
40
40
40
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
75
75
75
75
75
75
100
100
100
100
100
100
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
24
120
24
120
24
120
208
240
24
120
208
240
480
24
277
24
120
208
240
277
480
24
120
208
240
277
480
24
120
208
240
277
480
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
3.78 (9.6)
4.53 (11.5)
4.53 (11.5)
4.53 (11.5)
4.53 (11.5)
4.53 (11.5)
4.53 (11.5)
5.24 (13.3)
5.24 (13.3)
5.24 (13.3)
5.24 (13.3)
5.24 (13.3)
5.24 (13.3)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.64 (6.7)
2.66 (6.75)
2.66 (6.75)
2.66 (6.75)
2.66 (6.75)
2.66 (6.75)
2.66 (6.75)
3.5 (8.9)
3.5 (8.9)
3.5 (8.9)
3.5 (8.9)
3.5 (8.9)
3.5 (8.9)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
2.68 (6.8)
3.11 (7.9)
3.11 (7.9)
3.11 (7.9)
3.11 (7.9)
3.11 (7.9)
3.11 (7.9)
4.53 (11.5)
4.53 (11.5)
4.53 (11.5)
4.53 (11.5)
4.53 (11.5)
4.53 (11.5)
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MODEL
CONTACT AMP RATING
FULL LOAD RESISTIVE
NUMBER
OF POLES
COIL
VOLTAGE
(VAC)
DIMENSIONS in (cm)
HEIGHT WIDTH DEPTH
INCLUDES 1 N.O. & 1
N.C. AUX. CONTACT
FEATURES
• 1, 2, or 3 Pole styles
• FLA up to 90A
• Coil voltage up to 480V
ACCESSORIES
AUX-11-DP 1 NO and 1 NC auxiliary for T30A3, T40A3 only

1217. fi 1153RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
Input Current Regulated 10 mA
Frequency Range 47-80 Hz
Pick Up Voltage 4 VDC
Drop Out Voltage 1 VDC
Voltage Range 4-32 VDC
Contact Type 1 Form A, SPST-N.O.
Off State Leakage 20 mA @ rated voltage (maximum)
Minimum Current
10A, 25A models (Holding) 50 mA,

50A, 75A, 90A models
(Holding) 100 mA
Output Current Limit 10 A, 25 A, 50 A, 75 A, 90 A
Output Voltage 48-660 VAC
Over Voltage Rating 1200 PIV
Voltage Drop 1.6V (maximum) @ rated current
Capacitance 8 pF
Dielectric Strength 4000 rms minimum
Surge Current 1-Cycle 150A, 1-Second 30A,
1-Cycle 300A, 1-Second 75A,
1-Cylce 750A, 1-Second 150A
Reverse Voltage Protection
Yes (-32 VDC)
Zero Voltage Switching Yes
Turn Off Time 1/2 cycle @ 60 Hz
Turn On Time 1/2 cycle @ 60 Hz
Dimensions 2.25" H x 1.75" W x 0.95" D
(5.72 x 4.45 x 2.41 cm)
Approvals UL-recognized component,
File #E194577: CE certified
Weight 0.22 lb (0.10 kg)
Warranty 1 year
IDEC SOLID STATE RELAY
RSSDN
DESCRIPTION
The Model RSSDN is a photo-isolated solid state relay.
The 4-32
VDC input voltage allows the relay to be used on
analog or digital outputs
. While solid-state relays provide
reliable switching and long-life operation, careful application is required as excessive temperature, high inrush currents, or induced currents can affect solid state relay operation
.
FEATURES
• Photo isolation
• 4000V optical isolation
• Zero voltage turn-on
• Input status LED
• High surge capability
• Dual SCR output
3
4
2
1
Control Vo ltage
4-32 VDC
or
AC Line
48-660 VAC
LOAD
LOAD–
+
RSSDN-10A
Observe the polarity of input terminals . Failure to do so may cause
damage to the solid-state relays .
WIRING FIGURE 1. CURRENT DERATING CURVES
SPECIFICATIONS
RSSDN
20
20
15
10
5
25
30 40 50 60 100908070
10A
RMS On-State Current (amps) Relay Base Temp (°C)
10A, 25A
20
80
65
50
20
100
30 40 50 60 100908070
RMS On-State Current (amps) Relay Base Temp (°C)
50A, 75A, 90A
90A
Mounted on-Heatsink
Heatsink
25A Unit-Free Air
10A Unit-Free Air
50A Free Air
75A Mounted on
50A Heatsink
90A Unit-Free Air
Mounted on-Heatsink
Heatsink

1218. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1154fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
Zero-voltage sw itching is ideal for driving incandescent lamps since the
cold fillament will not be subjected to a large inru sh current. Using a ze ro-
switched solid-state relay will reduce inru sh current and prolong lamp life .
When using solid-state relays for driving heaters where the load is
switched on and off rapidly and continuously, severe thermal stress
will result. In such cases, use an solid-state relay at no more than
75% of the rating.
RECOMMENDED HEAT ER LOADS
SSR Rating @ 120 VAC@ 240 VAC
10A 25A 50A
1 kW 2 kW 3 kW
2 kW 4 kW 6 kW
Solid-state relays use high-noise immunity circuitry with a snubber
to handle the electrical noise generated by inductive loads.
UL MOTOR LOAD RATINGS (hp)
SSR Rating@ 120 VAC@ 240 VAC@ 480 VAC
10A 25A 50A 75A 90A
1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4
3/4 3/4
1-1/2
5 5
3/4 3/4
1-1/2
5 5
SSR Rating @ 120 VAC@ 240 VAC
10A 25A 50A
900W
2100W 3800W
1800W 4200W 7500W
RECOMMENDED LOADS
SSR Rating@ 120 VAC@ 240 VAC
10A
25A
50A
1 kW
2 kW
3 kW
2 kW
4 kW
6 kW
RECOMMENDED LAMP LOADS
Heater Loads Lamp Loads
Solenoid Valves and Contactors Motor Loads
IDEC SOLID STATE RELAY
RSSDN
APPLICATION INFORMATION
INSTALLATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RSSDN-10A Solid-state relay, 10A continuous output current
RSSDN-25A Solid-state relay, 25A continuous output current
RSSDN-50A Solid-state relay, 50A continuous output current
RSSDN-75A Solid-state relay, 75A continuous output current
RSSDN-90A Solid-state relay, 90A continuous output current
• Install solid-state relays in dry, well-ventilated areas away from excessive heat.
• Use #6-32 screws, flat washers, and lock washers to secure mounting on heat sinks.
• Vertical mounting is recommended to allow air to flow unimpeded.
• A small-capacity load may not turn off due to the leakage current present after the solid-state relay has turned off. In this
case
, use a resistor in parallel with the load to shunt the leakage current
.
• When the input signal contains a ripple voltage, the lowest ripple amplitude should exceed the minimum pick-up voltage of
4 V.
Heat sinks are required to achieve the full output current rating. The recommended heat sink dimensions and materials are
shown in the Table 1 below.
It is recommended to use a thermal compound (for example, Kele part number TCC-12) between the base of the solid-state
relay and the heat sink for heat dissipation.
Output Rating
TABLE 1. RECOMMENDED HEAT SINK DIMENSIONS / MATERIALS
Dimensions in (cm) Material
10A
25A
50A
75A
90A
12 x 12 x 1/8 (30.5 x 30.5 x 0.3)
15 x 15 x 1/8 (38.1 x 38.1 x 0.3)
15 x 15 x 1/8 (38.1 x 38.1 x 0.3)
17 x 17 x 1/8 (43.2 x 43.2 x 0.3)
17 x 17 x 1/8 (43.2 x 43.2 x 0.3)
Aluminum (black anodized)
Aluminum (black anodized)
Aluminum (black anodized)
Aluminum (black anodized)
Aluminum (black anodized)

1219. fi 1155RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
SPECIAL VOLTAGE RELAYS
20307 SERIES
Coil Rating 208 VAC @ 60 Hz,
277 VAC @ 60 Hz
Coil Power 2.2 VA
Relay Type DPDT (2 form C)
Contact Rating 13A, 1/3 hp @ 120 VAC;
13A, 1/2 hp @ 277 VAC;
3A, 3/4 hp @ 600 VAC;
10A @ 28 VDC NOTE: SR3B-05
soc
ket is rated for 10A, 300 V max
Dimensions
2.2"H x 1.5"W x 1.37"D
(5.6 x 3.8 x 3.5 cm)
Approvals UL recognized File #E7443
Weight 0.5 lb (0.23 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The 20307 Series plug-in style relays offer the flexibility of
using 208 VAC or 277 VAC single-phase voltages for relay
control
. These relays are DPDT and plug into a standard
three-pole general purpose relay socket.
FEATURES
• 208 VAC and 277 VAC coils
• 13A contact rating
• UL recognized
1
4
7
A
(-)
3
6
9
B
(+)
Bottom View
WIRINGSPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
20307-86 Relay, 208 VAC coil, DPDT
20307-87 Relay, 277 VAC coil, DPDT
20307
SR3B-05
• Socket mounting
• Heavy-duty construction
ALTERNATING RELAY
MODEL ALT
Supply Voltage 20-26 VAC/VDC, 95-125 VAC
Supply Current 40 mA
Contact Rating SPDT, 480 VA @ 240 VAC
Control Signal 115 VAC, 2 mA, 24 VAC/VDC, 2 mA
Operating Temperature -4° to 122°F (-20° to 50°C)
Debounce Time Delay 0.5 sec
Aprroval UL File E68520, CSA
Weight 0.35 lb (0.16 Kg)
Warranty 5 years
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The Model ALT alternating relay is commonly used to
alternate between two loads to equalize run-time. When
an external control switch opens, the Model ALT’s output contacts transfer from one state to the other
. When an
external control switch closes, the output contacts remain in their current state
. The SW option offers an override
potentiometer switch on top of the relay that allows manual override control of either load or automatic operation
.
FEA
TURES
•
Alternation between two loads to equalize run time
• Two LEDs to indicate the energized load
• Override switch
• Debounce time delay
N.C.
N.O.
C
Supply Voltage
Control
Switch
Bottom View
1
8
6
5
4
32
7 24 VAC/VDC
or 115 VAC
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AL
T-115-S-SW
Alternating relay, 115 VAC, override switch
ALT-24-S-SW Alternating relay, 24 VAC/VDC, override switch
SPECIFICATIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
OT08PC Octal Relay Socket for Model ALT
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
SR3B-05 Relay socket, three-pole blade type, DIN/surface mount 1123

1220. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1156fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
DELAY ON MAKE / INTERVAL TIMERS
438USA, 438USA-INT
Coil Rating 24-240 VAC (50/60 Hz), 19-288 VAC
(50/60 Hz) or VDC
Leakage Current
438USA-INT Off State: 1 mA maximum @ 240V,
438USA Off State: 0.6 mA @ 24V, 1.8 mA
@ 48 V, 5.4 mA @ 120V, 11.4 mA
@240 V
Output 10 mA to 1A inductive; inrush current
to 25A for 8 ms
Range 1 to 1024 seconds, 1-second
increments
Transient Protection 6000V for 8.3 ms
Voltage Drop 4V maximum, ON state
Accuracy ±10% of setpoint
Adjustments 10-position DIP switch
Recycle Time 100 ms, 50 ms after timing cycle,
200 ms during timing cycle
Repeatability ±1% nominal
Timing Interval timer, Delay on make
(ON-Delay)
Operating Temperature -4° to 185°F (-20° to 85°C)
Storage Humidity 95% non-condensing
Approvals UL-recognized component, File
#E47858; CSA certified, File
#LR31931-3
Weight 0.2 lb (0.091 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Model 438USA universal switch-adjustable time capsule is an all solid state timer that provides delay on make (ON-Delay) control of a load device operating from 19-288 VAC/DC
. The Model 438USA controls up to a 1A load, such
as a relay or solenoid.
The Model 438USA-INT universal switch-adjustable time
capsule is an all solid-state timer that provides interval timing control of a load device operating from 24 to 240 VAC
. The
438USA-INT controls up to a 1A load, such as a relay or solenoid
.
FEATURES
• Encapsulated digital-timing circuitry
• Switch-selectable delay
• Low cost
• Transient protected
• 1A output rating
SPECIFICATIONS
438USA
438USA-INT
OPERATION
General Timing is set via a binary-coded DIP switch and is adjustable from 1 to 1024 seconds
. With all switches closed, there is an
internal, one-second delay; with all switches open, there is a 1024-second delay time
. Prior to applying power to the timer,
set the switches to the correct position for the desired time.
438USA - Delay-on-Make (ON-Delay)
When power is applied, the Model 438USA remains in the off state, allowing only leakage current to flow
. Once the preset
time per
iod elapses, the unit switches on, allowing full current
to flow and the load to energize
. The load remains energized
as long as power is applied. When power is removed, the unit
resets and is ready for another timing period.
438USA-INT - Interval
When voltage is applied, the Model 438USA-INT turns on, permitting full load current to flow
. At the end of the preset
timing per
iod, the unit turns off and permits only leakage
current to flow through the load
. To recycle, the operating
voltage must be removed and reapplied.

1221. fi 1157RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
1234 5678 910
OPEN
1
512
16
8
2
1
32
16
8
2
1
+1*
540 sec
60 sec
539
+1*
59
2345678910
OPEN
To delay 540-second interval To delay 60-second interval
DELAY ON MAKE / INTERVAL TIMERS
438USA, 438USA-INT
123456 78 910
LOAD
19-288 VAC/VDC
Input
Terminals
0.25 Spade
1.7
(4.31)
0.90
(2.29)
0.27
(.69)
0.20
(0.51)
0.36
(0.91)
2.25
(5.71)
2.65
(6.73)
Four Mounting Holes
0.16 (0.41) dia
0.76
(1.93)
in
(cm)
438USA
TIME SETTINGS
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
438USA-INT Universal switch-adjustable time capsule, interval timer
438USA Universal switch-adjustable time capsule, delay on make (ON-delay) timer
12 34 56 78 910
24 - 240 VAC LOAD *
(yellow) (white)(black)(white)
0 .90
(2 .29)
0 .20
(0 .51)
2 .65
(6 .731)
Four Mounting Holes
0 .16 (0 .3962) dia
2 .25
(5 .72)
0 .76
(1 .93)
1 .7
(4 .32)
Four 20 AWG wire (two for operating
voltage and two for load circuit)
438USA-INT
* Do not apply voltage to load wires .
The load is powered from the input
voltage .
Power
Load
Time
Delay
FIGURE 1. TIMING
438USA
Power
Load
Timing
Interval
438USA-INT

1222. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1158fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
IDEC MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC TIMERS
RTE SERIES
Time Delay Settings 0.1 sec to 600 hours
Contact Configuration 2 Form C, DPDT (delay outputs)
Load Type 10A resistive @ 240 VAC, 30 VDC;
7A inductive @ 240 VAC, 30 VDC;
1/6 hp @ 120 VAC; 1/3 hp @ 240
VAC
Input
AD models 24 VAC/VDC (3.5 VA/1.7W)
AF models 120VAC (6.6 VA)
Operating Temperature -4° to 149°F (-20° to 65°C)
Operating Humidity 35% to 85% RH
Reset Time 100 ms maximum
Accuracy ±0.2%, ±20 ms
Setting Error ±10% maximum
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ minimum (500 VDC)
Dielectric Strength Between power and output
terminals: 2000 VAC, 1 minute
Between contacts of different poles:
2000 VAC, 1 minute
Between contacts on the same
pole: 1000 VAC, 1 minute
Electrical Life 500,000 operations (resistive)
Mechanical Life 50 million operations
Weight 0.2 lb (0.091 kg)
Approvals UL listed, File #E66043, CE
Warranty 1 year
RTE-P 8/11 Pin: A = 3 .06 (7 .79)
RTE-B 11 Blade: A = 2 .95 (7 .49)
in
(cm)
1 .57
(4 .0)
1 .40
(3 .6)
A
DESCRIPTION
The RTE Series multi-function electronic timers are socket- mounted adjustable time delay relays available in two function groups
. The timer functions and time ranges are easily
selected by setting external switches. The knob on the front
of the timer is used to set the precise delay period within the selected time range
.
Timer Functions R
TE-B1/RTE-P1 (Power-Triggered)
-ON-Delay, Interval, OFF-Cycle, ON-Cycle RTE-B2/RTE-P2 (Signal-triggered) -ON-Delay, OFF-Cycle, OFF-Delay, ON-Cycle, Single-Shot
FEATURES
•
Selectable 10 timing functions and 20 time ranges
• Time delay settings from 0.1 second to 600 hours
• Two Form C delayed output contacts
• Space-saving package
• High repeat accuracy of ±0.2%
• On and timing out LED indicators
• Standard 8-pin, 11-pin, or 11-blade relay socket
• UL Listed, CE certified
Control
Signal Switch Control
Signal Switch
Power
(AC or DC)
Power
(AC or DC)
3
45
6
7
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
111
2
1
4
7
A
3
6
9
2
5
8
B
81
2
1
4
7
AB
2
5
8
3
6
9
Delay Delay
Delay Delay
RTE-B1/RTE-P1
Bottom View
Do not apply voltage Do not apply voltage
to terminals 5 and 6 . to terminals 2 and 5 .
RTE-B2/RTE-P2
Delay Delay
Delay Delay
Power
(AC or DC)
Power
(AC or DC)
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
SR2P-06
RTE

1223. fi 1159RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
IDEC MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC TIMERS
RTE SERIES
OPERATION
E: Signal OFF-Delay
C: Cycle 1 (power start, OFF first)
A: ON-Delay 1 (power start)
Set timer for desired delay, apply power to coil . First transfer of contacts occurs
after preset delay has elapsed, after the next elapse of preset delay contacts return
to original position . The timer now cycles between on and off as long as power is

applied (duty ratio 1:1) .
ITEM TERMINAL NO.
Power
Delayed
Contact
Indicator
Set Time
PWR
OUT
(1)1-4,5-8
(2)1-7,3-9
(NC)
(1)1-3,6-8
(2)4-7,6-9
(NO)
(1)2-7
(2)A-B
OPERATION
TT
When a preset time has elapsed after the start input turned on while power is on,
the NO output contact goes on .
RTE-P1, -B1
ITEM TERMINAL NO.
Power
Delayed
Contact
Indicator
Set Time
PWR
OUT
(A)1-4,8-11
(B)1-7,3-9
(NC)
(A)1-3,9-11
(B)4-7,6-9
(NO)
(A)2-10
(B)A-B
OPERATION
Start
(A)5-6
(B)2-5
T
When the start input turns on while power is on, the NO contact goes on . The
output oscillates at a preset cycle (duty ratio 1:1) .
ITEM TERMINAL NO.
Power
Delayed
Contact
Indicator
Set Time
PWR
OUT
(A)1-4,8-11
(B)1-7,3-9
(NC)
(A)1-3,9-11
(B)4-7,6-9
(NO)
(A)2-10
(B)A-B
OPERATION
Start
(A)5-6
(B)2-5
TT aTT TT TT T
When power is turned on while the start input is on, the NO output contact goes
on . When a preset time has elapsed after the start input turned off, the NO output
contact goes off .
ITEM TERMINAL NO.
Power
Delayed
Contact
Indicator
Set Time
PWR
OUT
(A)1-4,8-11
(B)1-7,3-9
(NC)
(A)1-3,9-11
(B)4-7,6-9
(NO)
(A)2-10
(B)A-B
OPERATION
Start
(A)5-6
(B)2-5
TT aTa T
When the start input turns on while power is on, the NO output contact goes on .
When a preset time has elapsed, the NO output contact goes off .
ITEM TERMINAL NO.
Power
Delayed
Contact
Indicator
Set Time
PWR
OUT
(A)1-4,8-11
(B)1-7,3-9
(NC)
(A)1-3,9-11
(B)4-7,6-9
(NO)
(A)2-10
(B)A-B
OPERATION
Start
(A)5-6
(B)2-5
TT a
Set timer for desired delay, apply power to coil . Contacts transfer after preset time
has elapsed, and remain in transferred position until timer is reset . Reset occurs
with removal of power .
ITEM TERMINAL NO.
Power
Delayed
Contact
Indicator
Set Time
PWR
OUT
(1)1-4,5-8
(2)1-7,3-9
(NC)
(1)1-3,6-8
(2)4-7,6-9
(NO)
(1)2-7
(2)A-B
OPERATION
T
Set timer for desired delay, apply power to coil . Contacts transfer immediately, and
return to original position after preset time has elapsed . Reset occurs with removal
of power .
ITEM TERMINAL NO.
Power
Delayed
Contact
Indicator
Set Time
PWR
OUT
(1)1-4,5-8
(2)1-7,3-9
(NC)
(1)1-3,6-8
(2)4-7,6-9
(NO)
(1)2-7
(2)A-B
OPERATION
T
Note: T = Set Time, Ta = Shorter than set time, (1): RTE-P1, (2): RTE-B1, (A): RTE-P2, (B): RTE-B2
Functions in same manner as Mode C, with the exception that first transfer of
contacts occurs as soon as power is applied . The ratio is 1:1 . Time On = Time Off
ITEM TERMINAL NO.
Power
Delayed
Contact
Indicator
Set Time
PWR
OUT
(1)1-4,5-8
(2)1-7,3-9
(NC)
(1)1-3,6-8
(2)4-7,6-9
(NO)
(1)2-7
(2)A-B
OPERATION
TT
RTE-P2, -B2
When the start input turns on while power is on, the output oscillates at a preset
cycle (duty ratio 1:1), starting while the NO contact off .
ITEM TERMINAL NO.
Power
Delayed
Contact
Indicator
Set Time
PWR
OUT
(A)1-4,8-11
(B)1-7,3-9
(NC)
(A)1-3,9-11
(B)4-7,6-9
(NO)
(A)2-10
(B)A-B
OPERATION
Start
(A)5-6
(B)2-5
TT aTT T TTTT T
When the start input turns on while power is on, the NO output contact goes on .
When a preset time has elapsed while the start input remains on, the output contact
goes off . When the start input turns off, the NO contact goes on again . When a
preset time has elapsed after the start input turned off, the NO contact goes off .
D: Signal ON/OFF-Delay
ITEM TERMINAL NO.
Power
Delayed
Contact
Indicator
Set Time
PWR
OUT
(A)1-4,8-11
(B)1-7,3-9
(NC)
(A)1-3,9-11
(B)4-7,6-9
(NO)
(A)2-10
(B)A-B
OPERATION
Start
(A)5-6
(B)2-5
TT aTT aT T
A: ON-Delay 2 (signal start)
C: Cycle 4 (signal start, ON first)
F: One-Shot (signal start)
B: Cycle 2 (signal start, OFF first)
B: Interval (power start)
D: Cycle 3 (power start, ON first)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
R
TE-B1AD24
11 Blade 24 VAC/VDC On-delay, interval, off-cycle, on-cycle SR3B-05
RTE-B1AF20 11 Blade 100-240 VAC On-delay, interval, off-cycle, on-cycle SR3B-05
RTE-B2AD24 11 Blade 24 VAC/VDC On-delay, off-cycle, off-delay, on-cycle, single shot SR3B-05
RTE-B2AF20 11 Blade 100-240 VAC On-delay, off-cycle, off-delay, on-cycle, single shot SR3B-05
RTE-P1AD24 8 Pin 24 VAC/VDC On-delay, interval, off-cycle, on-cycle SR2P-06
RTE-P1AF20 8 Pin 100-240 VAC On-delay, interval, off-cycle, on-cycle SR2P-06
RTE-P2AD24 11 Pin 24 VAC/VDC On-delay, off-cycle, off-delay, on-cycle, single shot SR3P-06
RTE-P2AF20 11 Pin 100-240 VAC On-delay, off-cycle, off-delay, on-cycle, single shot SR3P-06
RTE-P1D12 8 pin 12 VDC On- Delay, interval, off-cycle, on-cycle SR3P-05C
RTE-P2D12 11 pin 12 VDC On-delay, off-cycle, off-delay, on-cycle, single shot SR3P-05C
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
SR2P-06 Relay socket, DPDT pin type, DIN/surface mount 1123
SR3B-05 Relay socket, three-pole blade type, DIN/surface mount 1123
SR3P-05C Relay socket, SPDT, DPDT, or 3PDT blade type, DIN/surface mount 1123
SR3P-06 Relay socket, 3PDT pin type, DIN/surface mount 1123

1224. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1160fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
MULTIFUNCTION TIMING RELAYS
TRU SERIES
Input Voltage 19 to 264 VAC and 19 to 30 VDC
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Output Type Electromechanical relay
Contact Configuration SPDT & DPDT, isolated
Load Type 10A resistive @ 120/240 VAC, 28
VDC; 1/3 HP @ 120/240 VAC
Electrical Life 1 million operations
Mechanical Life 10 million operations
Accuracy ±0.1%
Adjustments 4 position DIP switch
Operating Temperature -4° to 149°F to (-20° to 65°C)
Storage Temperature -22° to 185°F (-30° to 85°C)
Mounting Plug-in socket
Approvals CE, CSA, UR File #E57310
Weight 0.38 lb (0.17kg)
Warranty 10 years
DESCRIPTION
The TRU Series is a multifunction, knob adjustable, universal
time delay relay. It includes six of the most popular timing
functions selected b
y a slide switch
. The time delay is knob
adjustable and the time delay range is switch selectable.
The repeat accur
acy is ± 0
.1%. Both function and time range
can be selected on the top face of the unit. In addition to
m
ultifunctioning and multiple time ranges, the TRU Series
features universal input voltage; 19 to 264VAC and 19 to 30VDC and full 10A output relay. The TRU Series can directly
replace up to 1000 competitive time delay relay models.
FEATURES
• Micr •
Six timing functions are switch selectable
• 0.1s - 1000m in six ranges
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
TRU Series
≤2.39
(60.7)
≤1.78
(45.2)
≤3.44 (87.3)
≤2.91 (73.9)

1225. fi 1161RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
MULTIFUNCTION TIMING RELAYS
TRU SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TR
U1
Multifunction tming relay, 24-240VAC, 24VDC, DPDT, adjustable 8 pin plug-in
TRU2 Multifunction timing relay, 24-240VAC, 24VDC, SPDT, adjustable 8 pin plug-in
TRU3 Multifunction timing relay, 24-240VAC, 24VDC, DPDT, adjustable 11 pin plug-in

L1 N/L2

Delay-on-Make
Interval
Recycling
8-pin DPDT
L1 N/L2
11-pin DPDT
S1 = Initiate Switch
L1 N/L2
Delay-on-Make Interval Single Shot Recycling (ON Time First, Equal Recycle Delays) Delay-on-Break Retriggerable Single Shot
8-pin SPDT
RELATED PRODUCTS
NDS-11 11 pin socket base, 300VAC, surface or DIN mount
NDS-8 8 pin socket base, 300VAC, surface or DIN mount

1226. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1162fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
MAGNECRAFT TIME DELAY RELAYS
821TD10H, TDRSOXP, TDRSRXP
Coil Rating
821 12 to 240 VAC/VDC (-15%, + 10%),
3 VA
TDR 12/24/120 VAC/VDC (-20%, +10%),
5 VA
Relay Type
821 SPDT
TDR, 822 DPDT
Contact Rating
821 15A @ 240 VAC, 15A @ 24 VDC
(resistive)
TDR 12A @ 240 VAC, 12A @ 24 VDC
(resistive)
Input Pulse Time 50 ms minimum; 821, SRXP only
Minimum Load 100 mA
Transient Protection Yes
Contact Material Silver alloy
Electrical Life
821 70,000 operations @ full load
TDR 100,000 operations @ full load
Reverse Polarity Protected
Wire Size
821 14 AWG maximum
TDR 20-12 AWG with socket
Mechanical Life 10 million operations @ no load
Setting Error
821, 822 ±5% of mechanical setting
TDR ±10% of mechanical setting
Time Delay Adjust Potentiometer, Removeable knob
Time Range
821, 822 0.1 sec to 10 days
TDR 0.1 sec to 10 hours
Repeatability 0.2%
Reset Time 150 ms maximum
Timing Functions On-delay, interval, Off-delay, One-
shot, Repeat cycle, Pulse, On and
Off-delay, Retriggerable memory
latch, On-delay, interval , Off-delay,
one-shot, On-delay, interval
LED Indication
Green Input Red Blinks = timing, on
= energiz
ed
Operating Temperature
-4° to 131°F (-20° to 55°C)
Mounting
821 DIN rail/surface mount
TDR DIN rail/surface mount socket
Dimensions
TDRSOXP w/socket 2.02" x 1.6" x 0.83"
(5.1 x 4.1 x 2.1 cm)
TDRSRXP w/socket 2.05" x 2.32" x 0.97"
(5.2 x 5.0 x 2.5 cm)
821TD10H 3.5" x 0.69" x 2.55"
(9 x 1.8 x 6.5 cm)
TDRSOXP/TDRSRSP 1.73" x 1.42" x 2.8"
(4.5 x 3.6 x 7.1 cm)
Approvals
821 UL File E234203, RoHS
TDR UL File E43641, RoHS
Weight
821 0.1 lb (0.05 Kg)
TDR 0.3 lb (0.13 Kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Magnecraft 821TD10H, TDRSOXP, and TDRSRXP are
adjustable time delay relays available with various timing
functions
. The 821TD10H is a DIN rail mounted product
offering multiple timing functions, multiple timing scales, and universal voltage input
. The TDRSOXP and TDRSRXP
are dual function, low cost time delay relays used with DIN/ surface mount sockets
.
Timing Functions 821TD10H
- On-delay, Interval, Off-delay, One-shot, Repeat
cycle, Pulse, On & Off-delay, Memory latch TDRSOXP - On-delay, Interval TDRSRXP - Off-delay, Retriggerable One-shot
FEATURES
•
Adjustable timing ranges from 0.1 second to 10 days
(821TD10H)
• Selectable timing functions
• Indication LEDs show power, timing (821TD10H) and
relay energized
• The compact model 821TD10H DIN rail mounts without a soc
ket
• Models TDRSOXP and TDRSRXP DIN rail or surface mount with industry standard sockets
SPECIFICATIONS
821TD10H, TDRSOXP, TDRSRXP

1227. fi 1163RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
t
P
R
On-Delay
821 Function: A
TDRSOXP: SW1 OFF
R
P
OFF-Delay S break
821 Function: D
TDRSRXP: SW1 OFF
t
S
t
P
R
Interval
821 Function: C
TDRSOXP: SW1 ON
t t
tt
P
R
Repeat Cycle: OFF First
821 Function: B
R
P
On and Off Delay
S make/break
821 Function: I
t t
t t
S
R
P
Memory Latch - S make
821 Function: J
S
P
R
Repeat Cycle: ON First
821 Function: F
t t
t
A1
+–
SA2
15 16 18
Time
Adjust
Multiplier
Red Timing/
Output LED
Green Input
LED
Function
Select
Time Scale
Select
Time Scale
Selection
1 sec
10 sec
1 min
10 min
1 hr
10 hr
1 day
10 day
Always ON
Always OFF
Time Adjust
Multiplier
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
P - Power R - Relay Output S - Control Switch t - Time Delay
Time Range Digital Switch Position
II III IV
0.1sec-1sec OFF OFF OFF
1sec-10sec OFF OFF ON
10sec-100sec OFF ON OFF
0.1min-1min OFF ON ON
1min-10min ON OFF OFF
10min-100min ON OFF ON
0.1hr-1hr ON ON OFF
1hr-10hr ON ON ON
TDRSOXP/TDRSRXP
Time Range Selection
TDRSOXP
TDRSRXP
821TD10H
Green
Input
LED
Digital Switches
Fine Adjust Knob
Red
Relay
LED
On
Output
I
II
III
IV
off on
Function
Time
Time
Time
PulseP ulse
t
P
R
Pulse (0.5 sec)
821 Function: G
t
1
2
3
4
56
7
8
9
10
R
P
One-Shot - S make
821 Function: H
TDRSRXP: SW1 ON*
t
S
*
* Retriggerable: time delay period restarts any time the control switch is opened and closed.
S
R
Retriggerable One Shot
821 Function: E
t
P
t t
MAGNECRAFT TIME DELAY RELAYS
821TD10H, TDRSOXP, TDRSRXP
Control switch ignored
functions “A” to “E”
Control switch required
functions “F” to “J”
12-240V Power (AC or DC)
CONTROL
SWITCH
A1
+–
SA2
15 16 18
COMN CNO
821TD10HTDRSRXPTDRSOXP
24 or 120V
Power
(AC or DC)
Non-polarity Sensitive
81
54
27
36
24 or 120V
Power
(AC or DC)
Non-polarity Sensitive
Use shielded wire for external trigger.
Dry switch only.
Use shielded wire for external trigger.
Dry switch only.
111
21 0
39
48
57
6
External
Control
Switch
+ –
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
OPERATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
821TD10H-UNI Time-delay relay, SPDT, multifunction, 12-240 VAC/VDC, 0.1 sec to 10 days
TDRSOXP-120 Time-delay relay, on-delay/interval, 120 VAC/VDC, 0.1 sec to 10 hours
TDRSOXP-24 Time-delay relay, on-delay/interval, 24 VAC/VDC, 0.1 sec to 10 hours
TDRSRXP-120 Time-delay relay, off-delay/single-shot, 120 VAC/VDC, 0.1 sec to 10 hours
TDRSRXP-24 Time-delay relay, off-delay/single-shot, 24 VAC/VDC, 0.1 sec to 10 hours
70-464-1 Relay socket, eight-pin, use with TDRSOXP time delay relay
70-465-1 Relay socket, 11-pin, use with TDRSRXP time delay relay

1228. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1164fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
DELAY-ON-MAKE TIMING RELAYS
TMV8000, KRDM
Operating Temperature
TMV8000 -4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)

KRPS
-40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)

KRDM
-4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Storage Temperature
TMV8000 -22° to 185°F (-30° to 85°C)

KRPS/KRDM
-40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Operating Humidity 95% RH non-condensing
Power Consumption ≤ 2VA for AC; ≤ 2W for DC
Mounting Surface mount with one #10 screw
Dimensions 2"W x 2"H x 1.21"D
(5.08 x 5.08 x 3.07 cm)
Approvals CE, CSA, UR File #E57310
Warranty 10 years
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
These Delay-on-Make timers cover all the popular voltages
and time delays. These are a cost effective approach for
applications that require small size, isolation, reliability and long life
. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration and
humidity.
L1 N/L2

L1 N/L2
A knob is supplied for adjustable
units, or R
T
terminals 4 & 5 for
external adjust. See external adjustment vs. time delay chart. The untimed load is optional. S1 is not used for some functions.
V = Voltage C = Common, Transfer Contact NC = Normally Closed NO = Normally Open S1 = Initiate Switch UTL = Untimed Load
Load may be connected to terminal 3 or 1. TMV8000 has knob adjustment.
V = Voltage C = Common, Transfer Contact NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed
A knob is supplied for adjustable units, or R
T

terminals 4 & 5 for external adjust. See external
adjustment vs time delay chart.
Relay contacts are isolated.

L1 N/L2
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
TMV8000
TMV8000
KRPSA2M
KRPS Series
KRDM421
KRDM Series
SPECIFICATIONS TMV8000 KRPSA24M KRDM221* / KRDM421**
Supply Voltage
24-240 VAC/DC, 50/60 Hz 24-240 VAC/DC, 50/60 Hz 24 VAC/DC* / 120 VAC**, 50/60 Hz
Output Type Solid State Isolated Relay Contacts Isolated Relay Contacts
Output Form NO, open during timing SPDT SPDT
Output Rating (@ 40°C) 1A steady state, 10A inrush @ 55°C
10A @ 125VAC; 5A @ 230VAC; 1/4
hp @ 125VAC
10A @ 125VAC; 5A @ 230VAC &
28VDC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC
Timing Range 0.1 to 8 min adjustable 0.1 to 10 min adjustable 1 - 100 seconds adjustable
Repeat Accuracy ±2% ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater
Timing Tolerance ≤ ± 10% ≤ ± 2% ≤ ± 5%
Reset Time ≤ 100ms ≤ 150ms ≤ 150ms
Circuitry Protection Encapsultated Encapsultated Encapsultated
Isolation Voltage - ≥ 1500V RMS input to output≥ 1500V RMS input to output
Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 M Ω ≥ 100 M Ω ≥ 100 M Ω
Termination
.25 in. (6.35mm) male quick
connect terminals
.25 in. (6.35mm) male quick
connect terminals
.25 in. (6.35mm) male quick

connect terminals
Weight 0.15 lb (0.07kg) 0.16 lb (0.08kg) 0.16 lb (0.08kg)
FEATURES
•
Onboar •
Compact 2" x 2" size
• Adjustable timing ranges

1229. fi 1165RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
SPECIFICATIONS CT1S30 T2D120A15M TA24A3 / TA24A5
Function DOM & DOB Lockout Lockout
Supply Voltage 24 VAC 24 VAC or 120/230 VAC in 2 ranges12 or 24 VDC, 24 VAC
Output Type Solid State Solid State Solid State
Output Form NO NO NO
Output Rating 0.75A steady state, 5A inrush @ 55°C 1A steady state, 10A inrush @ 60°C75mA, 1A @ 60°C
Timing Range 1 to 600s - -
Lockout Time - 1s - 100m in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed fixed 0.5, 1, 2, 3, or 5m
Repeat Accuracy ± 5% ± 1% or 20ms, whichever is greater -
Timing Tolerance ± 20% ± 30% -15% to 35%
Circuitry Protection Encapsultated Encapsultated Encapsultated
Anticipator Resistor ≥ 3000 Ω ≥ 3000 Ω ≥ 1800 Ω
Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ ≥ 100 MΩ ≥ 100 MΩ
Voltage Drop ˜= 1.25V ˜= 2.5V @ 1A ˜= 1.25V
Weight 0.15lb (
0.07kg) 0.15lb ( 0.07kg) 0.15lb ( 0.07kg)
LOCKOUT DELAY TIMER
TA, CT SERIES
Operating Temperature

TA / CT Series -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)

T2D Series
-4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Storage Temperature -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Operating Humidity 95% RH non-condensing
Terminations 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick
connect terminals
Mounting Surface mount with one #10 screw
Dimensions 2"W x 2"H x 1.21"D
(5.08 x 5.08 x 3.07cm)
Approvals CE, CSA, UR File #E57310
Warranty 10 years
DESCRIPTION
The TA Series prevents rapid recycling of a compressor. A lockout
delay is started when the thermostat opens, or input voltage is lost.
Eliminates tr
ipped circuit breakers or blown fuses caused by a locked
rotor during short cycling
. The TA will not allow the compressor to
start when the line voltage is low. Because of the fast initiate time,
bounce of the thermostat will not be transmitted to the compressor
relay coil. A 30 second delay provides anti-reversing protection for
scroll compressors. The CT Series combines a delay-on-make and
delay-on-break time delay into one unit and may be used to control fan delays in heating and/or cooling equipment
.
FEATURES
• Loc •
Low voltage brownout protection
• Circuitry to activate the cooling anticipator (24VAC models)
L1 N
1
Random Start
Plus Lockout
L1 N
S1 = Initiate Switch, Contact, or Thermostat
CR = Compressor Relay (Load)
CA = Optional Cooling Anticipator
V = Voltage
L1 N/L2
V = Voltage
L = Load
S1 = Initiate Switch or Thermostat
CR = Compressor Relay
THMS = Wall Thermostat
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
CT1S30
CT1S30
T2D120A15M
T2D120A15M
TA24A3
TA24A3

1230. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1166fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
DELAY-ON-BREAK TIMING RELAYS
KRDB, KSDB, TDUB
Operating Temperature -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Storage Temperature
KRDB/TDUB -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)

KSDB
-40° to 176°F (-40° to 80°C)
Operating Humidity 95% RH non-condensing
Mounting Surface mount with one #10 screw
Dimensions 2"W x 2"H x 1.21"D
(5.08 x 5.08 x 3.07 cm)
Approvals CE, CSA, UR File #E57310
Warranty 10 years
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The KRDB Series is a compact time delay relay measuring
only 2 in. (50.8 mm) square. Its microcontroller timing circuit
pro
vides excellent repeat accuracy and stability
. The KSDB
Series is designed for general purpose commercial and industrial applications where a small, cost effective, reliable solid-state timer is required
. This series is designed for popular AC and DC voltage.
The
TDUB Series combines digital timing circuitry with universal
voltage operation and offers DIP switch selectable time delays ranging from 0.1 seconds to 102.3 minutes in three ranges.
FEATURES
• External or onboard adjustment knob
• 1A solid state or Isolated 10Aoutput
• Compact 2 x 2" time delay relay
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
KRDB421 KSDB421 TDUB3000A

L1 N/L2
UTL = Optional Untimed Load
S1 = Initiate Switch L = Timed Load
L1 N/L2
(Positive Switching)
(Negative Switching)
UTL = Optional Untimed Load
L = Load
S1 = Initiate Switch
R
T
is used when external adjustment
is ordered.

L1 N/L2
.
V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch C = Common, Transfer Contact NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed UTL = Untimed Load (optional)
A knob is supplied for adjustable units. The untimed load is optional. Relay contacts are isolated.
KRDB421 KSDB Series TDUB3000A
SPECIFICATIONS KRDB421 KSDB421 / KSDB431* TDUB3000A
Supply Voltage 12, 24, or 110 VDC; 24, 120, or 230 VAC 12, 24, or 110 VDC; 24, 120, or 230 VAC24 to 240 VAC, 12 to 24 VDC
Output Type Isolated Relay Contacts Solid State Solid State
Output Form SPDT NO, closed before & during timing NO, closed before & during timing
Output Rating (@ 40°C)
10A resistive @ 125VAC; 5A resistive @
230VAC & 28VDC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC
1A steady state, 10A inrush @ 60°C 1A steady state, 10A inrush @ 60°C
Timing Range
0.1s-1000m in 6 adjustable ranges
or fixed
0.1s-1000m in 6 adjustable ranges
or fixed
0.1-102.3s in 0.1s increments; 1-1023s
in 1s increments
Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater
Timing Tolerance ≤ ±5% ≤ ±5% ≤ ±5%
Reset Time ≤ 150ms ≤ 150ms ≤ 150ms
Circuitry Protection Encapsulated Encapsulated Encapsulated
Isolation Voltage ≥1500V RMS input to output
≥2000V RMS terminals to mounting
surface
≥2000V RMS terminals to mounting
surface
Insulation Resistance ≥100 MΩ ≥100 MΩ ≥100 MΩ
Termination
0.25 in (6.35mm)
Male quick connect terminals
0.25 in (6.35mm)
Male quick connect terminals
0.25 in (6.35mm)
Male quick connect terminals
Weight 0.16lb (0.08kg) 0.15lb (0.07kg) 0.15lb (0.07kg)

1231. fi 1167RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC @ 50 mA
Input SPST switch or relay
Output One N.O. contact rated 120 VAC,
5A; one N.C. contact rated 120
VAC, 5A
Output Pulse Time 300 ms (contact Kele for special
pulse time requiements, 5 sec
maximum)
Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Warranty 18 months
ORDERING INFORMATION
KELE MOTOR STARTER INTERFACE
PIL-2
Latch (start)
Local start (push button)
+
–
24 VAC/VDC
Command
contact
M
Local stop
(push bu tton)
Starter hold-in contact
L2L1
Unlatch
(stop)
Power
Power
Command
PIL-2
PULSE OUT
UL L
CMD IN
OFF ON
CMD
IN
UL LPUP
Starter coil
3
(7.62)
2.25
(5.72)
PWR
+
PWR
–
LED Indication PULSE OUT - UL ON only during unlatch (stop) pulse PULSE OUT - L ON only during latch (start) pulse CMD IN - OFF ON only when command contact is open CMD IN - ON ON only when command contact is closed
Power-up
jumper
(shown in PUP
position)
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The PIL-2 is designed to provide momentary contact closures to control motor starters with momentary start/stop push buttons
. The PIL-2 acts as a remote start/stop station using a
single maintained contact from a controller, switch, or relay.
FEATURES
• LED indicators: Pulse out: latch/unlatch, Command
in: off/on
• 24 VAC/DC power
• Selectable power-up state (PUP)
• Snap-track mounting for easy installation
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PIL-2 Motor starter interface, 300 ms pulse
PIL-2-C Motor starter interface, special pulse (specify when ordering)
OPERATION
The Model PIL-2 is operated by a single maintained N.C.
or N.O. contact from a switch, relay, or controller. Closing
the input contact causes the N.O. latch output to close
momentar
ily for 300 ms to start a motor
. Opening the input
contact causes the N.C. unlatch output to open momentarily
for 300 ms to stop a motor. A power-up feature allows the
selection of either an immediate pulse out (PUP position), based on the current state of the input contact, or a pulse out only when the input contact changes state
. LEDs indicate
input state and output latch or unlatch pulses.
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
PIL-2

1232. fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS 1168fi
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
MOTOR LOAD SIZING
A resistive load is one that offers simple resistance to the
flow of current. An example would be an electric heater.
An inductive load would be found in a motor,
transformer, solenoid, or other device that has
magnetizing coils. Inductive loads are often rated in amps
with a separate motor rating in horsepower. They are
characterized by high inrush current when contacts close, and by resistance to the stopping of current flow when contacts open (arcing)
.
A pilot duty load is another specific type of inductive load
that often has a separate rating. Pilot duty ratings come
into play when relay contacts control the coils of other relays or contactors
.
A lighting load can be ballast type (fluorescent and
HID lighting) or tungsten (incandescent). Ballasts are
somewhat inductive, particularly the non-electronic types.
Tungsten lighting presents a very low resistance at start- up (high starting current) when the filaments are cold, but behaves like a resistive load once the lamps are bright and hot
. Tungsten loads can be the most destructive of all
to a relay’s contacts unless they are specifically designed to handle such an inrush
.
FULL LOAD CURRENT (AMPS) VS HP
THREE PHASE SINGLE PHASE
Volts 115V 230V 460V 115V 230V
HP
1/6 4.4 2.2
1/4 5.8 2.9
1/3 7.2 3.6
1/2 421 9.8 4.9
3/4 5.6 2.8 1.4 13.8 6.9
1 7.2 3.6 1.8 16 8
1-1/2 10.4 5.2 2.6 20 10
2 13.6 6.8 3.4 24 12
5 15.2 7.6 56 28
7-1/2 22 11 80 40
10 28 14 100 50
15 38 19
20 52 26
25 64 32
30 77 39
40 101 51
FULL LOAD CURRENT (AMPS) VS HP
THREE PHASE SINGLE PHASE
Volts 115V 230V 460V 115V 230V HP 1/6 4.4 2.2
1/4 5.8 2.9
1/3 7.2 3.6
1/2 421 9.8 4.9
3/4 5.6 2.8 1.4 13.8 6.9 1 7.2 3.6 1.8 16 8 1-1/2 10.4 5.2 2.6 20 10 2 13.6 6.8 3.4 24 12 5 15.2 7.6 56 28
7-1/2 22 11 80 40
10 28 14 100 50
15 38 19
20 52 26
25 64 32
30 77 39
40 101 51
MOTOR LOAD SIZING

1233. HUMIDITY
TEMPERATURE SENSORS & TRANSMITTERS
TEMPERATURE
SENSORS &
TRANSMITTERS
ACI Duct Series | p. 1201
ST-AV81H | p. 1236 KTOSA Series | p. 1219 ST-SK Series | p. 1174
Kele Stocks the Top Brands in Temperature Sensing.
BA/Immersion | p. 1214
Series
KTUS* Series| p. 1224
TM

1234. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
TEMPERATURE SENSORS & TRANSMITTERS
TE-6300 Series | p. 1186
BA/Strap-On | p. 1257
ST-O Series | p. 1217
TM
TEMPERATURE
SENSORS
& TRANSMITTERS
All Purpose
KTA* Series — All-Purpose Thermistor and RTD
Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205
ST-A* Series
— All-Purpose Thermistor and RTD
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207
KTM*, KTMR* Series
— Encapsulated Thermistor and
RTD Sensor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245
ST-R*, ST-R*R Series
— Encapsulated Thermistor and
RTD Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247
KTMP* Series
— Mini Probe Thermistor and RTD
Sensor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249
ST-MP* Series
— Mini Probe Thermistor and RTD
Sensor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
KTM*S, KTM*SC Series
— Stainless Steel Sheath
Thermistor and RTD Sensor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251
ST-R*S, ST-R*SC Series
— Stainless Steel Sheath
Thermistor and RTD Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
Averaging ST-FZR Series
— Rigid Averaging Thermistor and RTD
Sensor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230
ST-AV81R, ST-AV85R, ST-AV91R
— Platinum Curve
Rigid Averaging Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232
ST-FZ* Series
— Averaging Thermistor & RTD Sensors
. . 1234
ST-AV81H, ST-AV85H
— Averaging RTD Sensors
. . . . . . 1236
ST-AV91H
— 1000 Ohm 375 Platinum Averaging
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237
ACI Averaging Series
— Averaging Thermistor and RTD
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238
BA/ Averaging Series
— Averaging Thermistor and RTD
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239
TE707C Series
— Flexible Plenum and Armored Averaging
Thermistor and RTD Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241
TE200FDC Series
— Flexible Averaging Thermistor and
RTD Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1242
AS103759
— Combination Averaging Sensor/Freezestat
. . 1243
Duct KTD* Series
— Duct Thermistor and RTD Sensors
. . . . . . 1195
ST-D* Series
— Duct Thermistor and RTD Sensors
. . . . . 1197
KTV* Series
— VAV Box Duct Thermistor and RTD
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
ACI Duct Series
— Duct Thermistor and RTD Sensors
. . . 1201
BA/ Duct Series
— Duct Thermistor and RTD Sensors
. . . 1202
5, 77, 78 Universal Duct, Immersion, OSA
— Kele Nickel-Iron/
Balco Immersion, Duct & Outdoor RTD Sensors
. . . 1204
KTUS*, KTOS* Series
— Duct, Immersion, OSA,
Thermistor and RTD Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224
KTU* Series
— Universal-Mount Thermistor and RTD
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1226
ST-U* Series
— Universal-Mount Thermistor and RTD
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228
Immersion KTW* Series
— Immersion Thermistor and RTD
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209
ST-W* Series
— Immersion Thermistor and RTD
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211
ACI Immersion Series
— Immersion Thermistor and
RTD Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213
BA/ Immersion Series
— Immersion Thermistor and
RTD Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214
Infrared Transmitters TY7321A1009
— Infrared Room Temperature
Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1289
OSA KTO* Series
— OSA Thermistor and RTD Sensors
. . . . . . 1216
ST-O* Series
— Outside Air Thermistor and RTD Sensor
. 1217
KTOSA* Series
— OSA Thermistor and RTD Sensors
. . . 1219
ACI OSA Series
— OSA Thermistor and RTD Sensors
. . . 1221
BA/ OSA Series
— OSA Temperature Sensors
. . . . . . . . . 1222
RTD Transmitters AS Room, Duct, OSA, and Immersion Sensors
— Platinum
Room, Duct, OSA, and Immersion RTD Sensors
. . . 1189
S241HC, TT111H-0800
— High Temperature Sensor &
Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266
ST-T90 Series
— 1000 Ohm 375 Platinum RTD Fixed
Temperature Transmitters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271
ST-T91 Series
— Rangeable Platinum Room Temperature
Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273
TT859
— Platinum 1000 Ohm Space Temperature Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275
T91H, T91L, T91U Series — 1000 Ohm 375
Platinum RTD Rangeable Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . 1277
T85U Series
— 1000 Ohm RTD Rangeable
Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1279
T81U Series
— 100 Ohm Platinum RTD Rangeable
Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281
T71U Series
— 100 Ohm Platinum RTD Rangeable
Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282
T5U, T63U Series
— 1000 Ohm RTD Rangeable
Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
TT801, TT807 Series
— Platinum RTD Temperature
Industrial Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284
TT809 Series
— 1000 Ohm Platinum RTD Rangeable
Temperature Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286
T81PNR, T85PNR, T90PNR Series
— Platinum RTD
Temperature Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
Room KTR* Series
— Room Temperature Thermistor and RTD
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169
ST-S*E, ST-S*EW Series
— Executive Style Thermistor
and RTD Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171
TE200AD Series
— Executive Style Thermistor and RTD
Sensor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173
ST-S*K Series
— Decorator Room Thermistor and RTD
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174
KTES* Series
— Room Thermistor and RTD Sensors
. . . . 1176
ST-S*P Series
— Surface-Mount Room Thermistor and
RTD Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
ACI Room Series
— Room Thermistor and RTD
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180
BA/ Room Series
— Room Thermistor and RTD
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
KTP* Series
— Stainless Steel Flush-Mount Thermistor
and RTD Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182
ST-S* Series
— Stainless Steel Flush-Mount Thermistor
and RTD Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
5, 77, 78 Room Sensors
— Nickel-Iron / Balco Room RTD
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188
KTB* Series
— Button Style Thermistor and RTD
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
ST-B* Series
— Button Style Thermistor and RTD
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192
ST-BP Series
— Paintable Button Style Flush Mount Wall
Thermistor and RTD Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1193
Sensor Options and Accessories Sensor Options
— Room Temperature Thermistor and
RTD Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
Temperature Sensor Accessories
— Accessories for
Temperature Products
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297
Plate Pal Series
— Room Temperature Display
. . . . . . . . . 1300
Specialty TE-6300 Series
— 1000 Ohm Nickel Room, Duct, OSA
RTD Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
ACI Bullet/Button Series
— Bullet/Button Thermistor and
RTD Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
ST-STP* Series
— Strap-on Thermistors and RTD
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255
ACI Strap-On Series
— Strap-On Thermistor and RTD
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256
BA/ Strap-On Series
— Strap-on Thermistor and RTD
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257
ST-TS* Series
— Submersible Thermistor and RTD
Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259
ST-L* Series
— Ring Lug Thermistor and RTD Sensors
. . 1260
BA/*RPFEP Series
— Extreme Temperature Sensors
. . . . 1262
BA/*-TB Series
— Thermobuffer Temperature Sensor
. . . . 1264
AS10 Series
— Thermal Vial Temperature Sensing
System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267
S101144, S469, S665PDY48BC, S667PDY40BC
— Thermal
Ribbon RTD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268
TE200G Series
— Thermal Glass Thermistor And
Rtd Sensors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270
Temperature Switches TK Series
— Temperature Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291
Wells and Adaptors WB, WS
— Sensor Thermowells and Well Adapters
. . . . . 1293
WEL-B, WEL-S, F2B-D, F2N-B, F2S-D
— Sensor
Thermowells and Well Adapters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294

1235. fi 1169TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.50°F (0.28°C)
RTD ±0.60°F (0.33°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 81
100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD 100% (no drift platinum)
Heat Dissipation
2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature 1°C)
Enclosure Rating White plastic
Mounting Directly to wall or single gang
back box
Wiring Terminations Terminals
Approvals CE
Weight 0.2 lb (0.09 kg)
Warranty 3 years
ROOM TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
KTR* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Model KTR* Room Temperature Thermistor and RTD Sensor is a cost-effective room temperature sensor with an accuracy of ±0
.5°F (0.28°C). The thermistor is made of a
very stable, pre-aged material that offers the reliability needed in control systems
. The platinum RTD comes in 100 ohm and
1000 ohm and is compatible with most HVAC systems. All
sensors come with a three-y
ear warranty
.
FEATURES
• Economical
• Attractive new design
• Three-year warranty
• ±0.5°F (0.28°C) accuracy
• Durable housing
• White color
• Thermistor or RTD
• Locking cover screws
APPLICATION
The KTR* Series is designed to be wall mounted indoors where appearance and accuracy are important
. The sensor
may be mounted directly to the drywall or on standard electrical boxes
. It comes in all the most common thermistors
or RTDs. Options may be mixed and matched for each
application.
SPECIFICATIONS
KTR*
in
(cm)
2.75 (6.98)
0.18
(.47)
Adjust
Tab
0.33
(.85)
Wire Way
Front
Back Plate
Side
0.94
(2.38)
4.5
(11.43)

Typical logo
location
LED
MB
2.64
(6.7)
1.25
(3.2)
1.5
(3.8)
3.31
(8.40)
1.31
(2.54)
.5
(1.27)
DIMENSIONS
KTR*-A10K-J1-LED-MB

1236. fi
TEMPERATURE 1170fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Toggle bolts or other direct wa ll-mount screws can be used where
back box is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting
directly to electrical outlet boxes.
The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (1.5m) above the floor,
on an interior wall, out of the sun, and away from any heating or cooling
generating devices.
Mounting
Screws
Wire Access
Hole
Mounting Back Plate
Option Board Clip
Cover
Locking
1/16" Allen Screws
installed as needed
Self-Latching
Cover
Basic model comes with screw terminal block, white decorator face-
plate, two #6-32 screws fo r handy-box mounting, and two #6 x 1" screws
for direct wa ll mounting. Locking cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16"
Allen key head, installed as needed.
Note: Adjust option requires option board removal to mount back plate.
To BAS
Controller
RT1
SW3
R6
RT2
JP2
SW1
D2
D3
A
K
A
K
R4
R5
R2
J4
POT
LED
OUT
J3
IN
JP1
71
8
R3
J1
J2
J7
7
6
1
1
82
SENSOR
+
+
+
-
-
-
LED
MB
Button
SETPOINT ADJUST
Axxx Po t to BA S Controller
TB4 fo r MB only
JP2
Pot Action
Sensor
Sensor to BA S Controller
LED
24 VAC/VDC
Communication Wiring
J1 or J2
RJ11 plug with cover off;
for J2 option
COVER ON
CCRJ11AD accessory ;
required fo r J1 option
RJ11 plug
Push button will short out the
pot or sensor momentarily
Customer Contact
C
Axxx
2
1
8
7
JP1
MB
Button Jumper
1-2 Pot
3-4 Pot
5-6 Sensor
7-8 Sensor
DA
Shipped DA
Left to right
Low to high resistance
DA Low to high resistance
RA Hi
gh to low resistance
RA
MOUNTING AND SENSOR ONLY WIRING WIRING TYPICAL COVER OPTIONS
ROOM TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
KTR* SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Sample Order
KTR3 K ele room sensor with 10,000fi Type III
thermistor
KTR85-A10K-MB K ele room sensor with 1000fi 385 RTD
with 10kfi adjust pot and momenta ry switch
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KTR Kele room sensor housing
SENSOR SELECTION
3 10,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III
21 2252fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
22 3000fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
24 10,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
27 100,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
42 20,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV
81 100fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
85 1000fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (blue leads)
91 1000fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum cur ve (green leads)
R OOM SENSOR OPTIONS
XA100K Setpoint adjust with 100,000fi span
XA10K Setpoint adjust with 10,000fi span
XA20K Setpoint adjust with 20,000fi span
XA400 Setpoint adjust with 400fi span (R5 for offset)
XCL1 Custom logo one color ( CL2=two color, CL3=three color)
XD Dual sensors
XJ1
RJ11 externally-accessible communication jack( CCRJ11AD required)
XJ2 Internal RJ11 communication jack
XLED LED lamp indicator, standard 24 VAC/VDC voltage
XM
Momentary pushbutton switch, jumpered across sensor or pot (JP1)
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST certificate, one refe rence point 32°F(0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)
XN3
NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)
TB4 Separate termination fo r MB option
XP
Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XPA Ultra high accurance, themistors only ±0.135°F, 0.075°C
XPL Red LED lamp externally powered 24VAC/VDC
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
10-531 White adaptor plate
7" x 5.25" (KTR,KHR) 1297
CC-RJ11AD Adapter cable for
XJ1 option with
female RJ11
8-pin connector 1300
KT1 Mounting screwdriver
1/16" allen key 1390

T81U-XR
100 ohm, Type 81
4-20 mA temperature transmitter,
custom rangeable 1281

T85U-XR
1000 ohm, Type 85
4-20 mA temperature transmitter,
custom rangeable 1279

T91U-XR
1000 ohm, Type 91
4-20 mA temperature transmitter,
custom rangeable 1277

1237. fi 1171TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Toggle bolts or other direct wa ll-mount screws can be used where conduit is
not required. Adapters are not required when mounting directly to electrical
outlet boxes.
Basic model comes with screw terminal block, white decorator faceplate, two
#6-32 screws for handybox mounting, and two #6 x 1" screws for direct wall
mounting. Cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16" allen key head.
The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (12.7 cm) above the floor,
on an interior wall, away from any heating or cooling generating devices.
White Faceplate (standard)
Plate Mounting Screws
Wire Access
Hole
Optional Customer-
Supplied Handy Box
Cover Mounting 1/16 Allen Screws
ST-S*EW
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD Type 63
±0.72°F (0.40°C)
Type 71 ±0.054°F (0.03°C)
Type 81, 85 ±0.27°F (0.15°C)
Type 91 ±0.54°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 63
1000Ω Nickel
Type 71, 81 100Ω PT 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <0.09°F (0.05°C) over 5 years
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature by 1°C)
Enclosure ST-S*E: Beige plastic with tan metal
face plate ST-S*EW: White plastic with white metal face plate
Mounting
Directly to wall or single gang box
Wiring Terminations Terminals
Approvals CE
Weight 0.15 lb (0.07 kg)
Warranty Lifetime
EXECUTIVE STYLE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-S*E, ST-S*EW SERIES
XK
Custom Logo
(your company logo)
XJ1
External Communication
Jack for use with handheld
terminals, requires adapter
cable CC-RJ11AD
XTA/XTAC (ST-S*E only)
Analog Temperature Display
50° to 90°F, 10° to 32°C
XJ2
Internal
Communi-
cation Jack
under the
cover
XM
Exposed Momentary Push
Button (cannot be used with
XA, XJ1, or XJ2 options)
XA
Setpoint Adjust to provide a
10 kfi to 30 kfi resistance
input (1-3 kfi and 1-1.4 kfi available)
XME
Concealed Membrane
Momentary Push Button
XPL
Red LED Indicator Lamp
INCDEC
90 80 70 60 50
F
DESCRIPTION
The Precon Model ST-S*E and ST-S*EW Executive
Thermistor and RTD Sensor provides precision room
temperature sensing for building automation systems in beige
or white respectively
. The active sensing element is made of a
highly stable, precision thermistor material or platinum RTD.
FEATURES
• Lifetime warranty
• ±0.36°F (±0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
• ±0.27°F (±0.15°C) or ±0.54°F (±0.30°C) RTD accuracy
• Ultra high accuracy optional
• Wide selection of thermistor or RTD curves
• Vented housing for quick temperature response
• Adaptable with many options
• Traditional beige or white covers
• Durable plastic housing and base plate
• Easy to mount to wall or electrical box
TM
TYPICAL MOUNTING TYPICAL COVER WITH MULTIPLE OPTIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ST-S*E-XA-XME-XTA

1238. fi
TEMPERATURE 1172fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
EXECUTIVE STYLE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-S*E, ST-S*EW SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: ST-S3-E-XA-XTA 10,000fi  Type III executiv e sensor zone with
  setpoint adjustment and analog display
ST-S3 XA XTA
*  Circuit board option   |  **  Cannot be mounted in conjunction with *options  |      Not av ailable on EW housing
E
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-S3 10,000fi executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype III (gray leads)
ST-S21 2252fi executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads)
ST-S22 3000fi executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)
ST-S24 10,000fi executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (yellow leads)
ST-S27 100,000fi executive thermistor  @ 77°F (25°C), T ype II (gray leads)
ST-S42 20,000fi executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads)
ST-S63 1000fi nickel executive RTD @ 70°F (21°C), (yellow leads)
ST-S71     100fi ultra high accurate  executive RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
ST-S81     100fi executive RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (yellow leads)
ST-S85     1000fi executive RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (blue leads)
ST-S91     1000fi executive RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum cur ve (green leads)
E Executive beige enclosure with wide back plate
EW Executive white enclosure with narrow back plate
OPTIONS (List options in alphabetical order with dashes)
XA * Setpoint adjustment (10,000fi  to 30,000fi, resistance input)
XA10K * Setpoint adjustment (1,000fi  to 3,000fi, resistance input)
XA2K * Setpoint adjustment (1,000fi  to 1,400fi, resistance input)
    XD  Dual sensors
    XGR  Gr ay decorator faceplate (tan is standard)
    XJ1 *  RJ11 externally-accessible communication jack (CCRJ11AD required)
    XJ2 *  Internal RJ11 communication jack
    XK  Custom Logo  
    XM **  Momentary switch wired N.O . to terminal block
    XME  Membrane momentary switch wired only N.O . to terminal block, tan faceplate only
    XMP  Membrane push button switch (XME) with terminals for separate button termination
    XN  NIST certificate of conformance
    XN1  NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C)
    XN2  NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F (0°C/70°C)
    XN3  NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F (0°C/25°C/70°C)
    XP  Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
    XPA  Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, ±0.135˚F (0.075˚C)
    XPL *  Red LED lamp externally powered 24VAC/VDC
    XTA  Analog temperature display , 50 to 90°F ± 1°F
    XTAC   Centigrade analog temperature display 10 to 32°C ± 1°C
    XZ  Three wire RTD connections (Optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71)
                
4.50
(11.43)
1.20
(3.05)
Side View
0.75
(1.90)
3.31
(8.40)
2.37
(6.02)
0.63
(1.58)
0.88
(2.22)
1.87
(4.76)
1.43
(3.63)
Cover Securing Screws
Cover Hooks
Board Hooks
Mounting Holes
typical
Wire-Way
Hole
4.50
(11.43)
3.23 (8.20)
3.23 (8.20)
1.20
(3.05)
Bottom View
Front View
in
(cm)
4.50
(11.43)
2.75 (6.99)
1.20
(3.05)
Bottom View
Front View
2.75 (6.99)
ST-S*E ST-S*EW
DIMENSIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
10-531 White adaptor plate 7" x 5.25" (KTR,KHR) 1297
CC-RJ11AD Adapter cable for XJ1 option with female RJ11 8-pin connector 1300
KT1 Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key 1390
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277

1239. fi 1173TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (±0.2°C)
RTD ±0.54°F (±0.3°C)
Sensor Type
Thermistor 2,252Ω, 3,000Ω, 10,000Ω
Type II & III, 20,000Ω
RTD 100Ω Platinum 385 curve, 1,000Ω
Platinum 385 curve
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Output Range
14° to 158°F (-10° to 70°C)
Wiring Terminations 6" leads
Approvals CE, RoHs
Weight 0.2 lb (0.09 Kg)
Warranty 5 years
EXECUTIVE STYLE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR
TE200AD SERIES
4.50
(11.43)
2.75 (6.99)
1.25
(3.2)
Bottom View
Front View
2.75 (6.99)
TE200AD
DESCRIPTION
The Greystone Energy Systems Model TE200AD Series Executive Room Thermistor and RTD Sensor provides precision room temperature sensing for building automation systems
. The active sensing element is made of a highly
stable, precision thermistor material or platinum RTD.
FEATURES
• ±0.36°F (±0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
• ±0.54°F (±0.3°C) RTD accuracy
• Wide selection of thermistor or RTD curves
• Vented housing for quick temperature response
• Durable plastic housing and base plate
• Easy to mount to wall or electrical box
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
TE200AD
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: TE200AD24AS 10,000fi Type II executiv e sensor with membrane
momentary switch.
TE200AD24 AS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TE200AD2 100fi executive RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve, 3 wire (red, red, white leads)
TE200AD6 3000fi executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), (blue leads)
TE200AD7 10,000fi executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype III (gray leads)
TE200AD8 2252fi executive ther mistor @ 77°F (25°C), (gray leads)
TE200AD12 1000fi executive RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (gray leads)
TE200AD20 20,000fi executive ther mistor @ 77°F (25°C), (gray leads)
TE200AD24 10,000fi executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (yellow leads)
OPTIONS
AS Membrane momentary switch wired only N.O . to terminal block
BS Momentary switch wired N.O.


RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281

1240. fi
TEMPERATURE 1174fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD Type 63
±0.72°F (0.40°C)
Type 71 ±0.054°F (0.03°C)
Type 81, 85 ±0.27°F (0.15°C)
Type 91 ±0.54°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 k
Ω, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 k
Ω, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 63
1000Ω Nickel
Type71, 81 100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <0.09°F (0.05°C) over 5 years
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature by 1°C)
Enclosure White plastic
Mounting Directly to wall or single gang box
Wiring Terminations Terminals
Approvals CE
Weight 0.15 lb (0.07 kg)
Warranty Lifetime
DECORATOR ROOM THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-S*K SERIES
in
(cm)
2.75 (6.98)
0.18
(.47)
Adjust
Tab
0.33
(.85)
Wire Way
Front
Back Plate
Side
0.94
(2.38)
4.5
(11.43)
Typical logo
location
1.5
(3.8)
3.31
(8.40)
1.31
(2.54)
.5
(1.27)
XM option
DESCRIPTION
The PreCon Model ST-S*K White Decorator Thermistor and RTD Sensor provides precision room temperature sensing for building automation systems
. The thermistor
element is made of a highly stable, pre-aged precision thermistor material accurate to within ±0
.36°F (0.2°C) while
the platinum RTD is avaialble in 100Ω and 1000Ω models.
Both are compatab
le with most HVAC systems
.
FEATURES
• Lif •
Attractive new design
• ±0.36°F (0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
• ±0.27°F (0.15°C) or 0.54°F (0.30°C) RTD accuracy
• Durable housing
• White color
• Thermistor or RTD
• Locking cover screws
TM
APPLICATION
The ST-S*K Series is designed to be wall mounted indoors where appearance and accuracy are important
. The sensor
may be mounted directly to the drywall or on standard electrical boxes
. It is available in all common thermistors or
RTDs.
OPTIONS
• Setpoint slide adjust
• Momentary override switch
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ST-S*K

1241. fi 1175TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Toggle bolts or other direct wa ll-mount screws can be used where
back box is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting
directly to electrical outlet boxes.
The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (1.5m) above the floor,
on an interior wall, out of the sun, and away from any heating or cooling
generating devices.
Mounting
Screws
Wire Access
Hole
Mounting Back Plate
Option Board Clip
Cover
Locking
1/16" Allen Screws
Installed as needed
Self-Latching
Cover
Basic model comes with screw terminal block, white decorator face-
plate, two #6-32 screws fo r handy-box mounting, and two #6 x 1" screws
for direct-wall mounting. Locking cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16"
Allen key head, installed as needed.
Note: Adjust option requires option board removal to mount back plate.
To BAS
Controller
MOUNTING AND SENSOR ONLY WIRING
DECORATOR ROOM THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-S*K SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example:  ST-S3K-XA 10,000fi T ype III decorator sensor with setpoint adjustment
ST-S3K XA
* Circuit board option 
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-S3K 10,000fi decorator thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III (gray leads)
ST-S21K 2252fi decorator thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads)
ST-S22K 3000fi decorator thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)
ST-S24K 10,000fi decorator thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (yellow leads)
ST-S27K 100,000fi decorator thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype II (gray leads)
ST-S42K 20,000fi decorator thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads)
ST-S63K 1000fi nickel decorator RTD @ 70°F (21°C), (yellow leads)
ST-S71K 100fi ultra high accurate decorator RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
ST-S81K  100fi decorator RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (yellow leads)
ST-S85K  1000fi decorator RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (blue leads)
ST-S91K  1000fi decorator RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum cur ve (green leads)
OPTIONS
XA * Setpoint adjustment (10,000fi to 30,000fi, resistance input)
XA10K* Setpoint adjustment (1,000fi to 3,000fi, resistance input)
XA2K * Setpoint adjustment (1,000fi to 1,400fi, resistance input)
XD Dual sensors in one probe
XK Custom Logo  
XM Momentary switch wired N.O. to terminal block
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F(0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, ±0.135˚F (0.075˚C)
XPL * Red LED lamp externally powered 24VAC/VDC

Sensor Mounted
to Cover
XA Setpoint
Adjust
Potentiometer
Comp
Sens
P S
Ext
Sens
Out
Communication
Bus Terminal
Setpoint Adjust
Sensor Terminals
LED Terminals
24 VAC/VDC
Jumper Pins fo r
Momentary Push button
Option allow locating
the N.O. contacts
across the sensor
(S) or the setpoint (P)
Controller Temp
Sensor (standard)
In
Sensor
LED
Pot
Optional Board Terminations
(multiple options shown)
WIRING
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
10-531 White adaptor plate 7" x 5.25" (KTR,KHR) 1297
KT1 Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key 1390
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277

1242. fi
TEMPERATURE 1176fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.50°F (0.28°C)
RTD ±0.60°F (0.33°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 81
100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24F (0.13) over five years
RTD 100% (no drift platinum)
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature 1°C)
Enclosure White plastic
Mounting Directly to wall or single gang box
Wiring Terminations Terminals
Approvals CE
Weight 0.12 lb (0.05 kg)
Warranty 3 years
TKTES* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KTES* Series Room Thermistor and RTD Temperature Sensor is a cost-effective room temperature thermistor with an accuracy of ±0
.5°F (±0.28°C). The
thermistor is made of a very stable, pre-aged material that offers the reliability needed in most HVAC systems, and it comes with a three-year warranty
.
FEA
TURES
•
Economical
• Attractive design
• Three-year warranty
• ±0.5°F (±0.28°C) accuracy
• Durable housing
• White color
APPLICATION
The KTES* Series is designed to be wall mounted indoors
where appearance is important. The sensor may be mounted
directly to the drywall or on a standard US electrical outlet bow without adapters
.
OPTIONS
• Setpoint slide adjust
• Momentary override switch
SPECIFICATIONS
4.50
(11.43)
3.25
(8.25)
2.75
(6.98)
0.76
(1.93)
Front View Side View
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS
KTES*

1243. fi 1177TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
SENSORPOT
PS
Sensor Plate
XA
Set Point
Adjust
Solder
Pads
XM
Momentary
Push Button
Override Select
Pot Termination
Factory Jumpers
cut and resolder jumper
to P (potentiometer)
solder pads
Sensor Termination
and Push Button (N.O.)
Plate
Mounting
Screws
Optional Customer-
Supplied Handibox
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used
where conduit is not required. Adapters are not required
when mounting directly to electr
ical outlet boxes
.
Basic model comes with scre
w terminal block, two #6-32
screws for handibox mounting or for direct wall mounting
.
The sensor should be mounted appro
ximately 5' (1
.5m)
above the floor, on an interior wall, away from any heating or cooling generating devices
.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
ROOM THERMISTOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
KTES* SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KTES3 10,000 fi Room Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III Material (gray leads)
KTES21 2252 fi Room Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II Material (green leads)
KTES22 3000 fi Room Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II Material (blue leads)
KTES24 10,000 fi Room Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II Material (yellow leads)
KTES27 100,000 fi Room Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II Material (gray leads)
KTES42
KTES81
KTES85
KTES91
20,000 fi Room Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV Material (green leads)
KTES27
OPTIONS
XAExample: KTES27-XA 100,000 fi Type II room sensor thermistor with set point adjust option
100Ω Room RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve, (yellow leads)
1000Ω Room RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve, (blue leads)
1000Ω Room RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve, (green leads)
XA Setpoint adjustment (10,000 to 30,000, resistance input)
XA2K Setpoint adjustment (1,000 to 1,400, resistance input)
XA10K Setpoint adjustment (1,000 to 3,000fi, resistance input)
XD Dual sensors
XM Momentary switch (jumpered across sensor)
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F(0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XZ Three wire RTD connections
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice

1244. NEW!
TEMPERATURE 1178NEW!
TEMPERATURE
20
NEW!WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD Type 63
±0.72°F (0.40°C)
Type 71 ±0.054°F (0.03°C)
Type 81, 85 ±0.27°F (0.15°C)
Type 91 ±0.54°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 63
1000Ω Nickel
Type 71, 81 100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <0.09°F (0.05°C) over 5 years
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature by 1°C)
Enclosure Beige plastic with aluminum plate
Mounting Directly to wall or BKT-1 bracket to
mount to single gang box
Wiring Terminations 8’ (2.4m) of 24 AWG pigtails pre-
stripped, Type 71 & 81 sensors have 18” leads
Approvals
CE
Weight 0.1 lb (0.05 kg)
Warranty Lifetime
SURFACE-MOUNT ROOM THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-S*P SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Precon Model ST-S* P Surface-Mount Room Thermistor and RTD Sensor provides precision room temperature sensing for building automation systems
. The
active sensing element is made of a highly stable, precision thermistor material or platinum RTD
.
FEATURES
• Lif •
±0.36°F (0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
• ±0.27°F (0.15°C) or 0.54°F (0.30°C) RTD accuracy
• Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Vented housing for quick temperature response
• Adaptable with many options
• Traditional tan cover with brushed aluminum faceplate
• Durable plastic housing and base plate
• Easy to mount to wall or back box
TM
APPLICATION
The wall-mounted enclosure is designed to be mounted indoors vertically or horizontally
. The separate base plate may
be mounted directly to the drywall or a standard electrical outlet box with adapters
. The cover is secured with tamper
resistant hex screws. Where moisture is a concern, the
moisture-proofing R or R# option is required.
OPTIONS
• Setpoint adjustment
• Moistureproof with 18" (0.45m) leads
• Momentary switch override
SPECIFICATIONS
ST-S*P

1245. fi 1179TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Cover
Mounting
1/16 Allen Screws
Toggle bolts or other direct wa ll-mount screws can be used where conduit
is not required. Adapters are required when mounting directly to electrical
outlet boxes.

Basic model comes with base plate, cover, brushed aluminum faceplate,
18" (45.7 cm) of 24 AWG wire, and two #6 x 1 screws for direct wall
mounting. Cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16" allen key head.

Terminate with butt splices or soldering. Wire nuts are not recommended.
Optional Customer-
Supplied Handy Box
The sensor should be mounted approximately five feet above the floor,
on an interior wall, away from any heating or cooling generating devices.
Accessory Mounting
Bracket BKT-1
Adapter plate
ISPL-1 or SSPL-1
Base Plate
0
1
2
3
-1
-2
-3
XA
XM
Setpoint Adjust provides a 0Ω to 10 kΩ resistance input
Momentary Switch
MOUNTING TYPICAL COVER WITH MULTIPLE OPTIONS
SURFACE-MOUNT ROOM THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR
ST-S*P SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
ST-S27P XM
Example: ST-S27P-XB 100,000fi T ype II surface-mount zone sensor
  thermistor with momentary ov erride option
*Circuit board option
MODEL DESCRIPTION ST-S3P   10,000fi surface-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype III (gray leads)
ST-S21P   2252fi surface-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads) ST-S22P   3000fi surface-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)
ST-S24P   10,000fi surface-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (yellow leads)
ST-S27P   100,000fi surface-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype II (gray  leads)
ST-S42P   20,000fi surface-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads) ST-S63P  1,000fi nickel surface-mount RTD @ 70°F (21°C), (yellow leads) ST-S71P 
100fi ultra high accurate surface-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
ST-S81P  100fi surface-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (yellow leads)
ST-S85P  1000fi surface-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (blue leads)
ST-S91P  1000fi surface-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum cur ve (green leads)
OPTIONS
XA *  Setpoint adjustment (10,000fi to 30,000fi, resistance input)
XA10K*  Setpoint adjustment (1,000fi to 3,000fi, resistance input)
XA2K *  Setpoint adjustment (1,000fi to 1,400fi, resistance input)
XD   Dual sensors in one probe
XK   Custom Logo  
XM   Momentary switch wired N.O. to terminal block
XN   NIST certificate of conformance
XN1   NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F(0°C)
XN2   NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)
XN3   NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)
XP   Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XPA   Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, ±0.135˚F (0.075˚C)
XPL *   Red LED lamp externally powered 24VAC/VDC
XZ   Three wire RTD connections (Optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71)
1.75
(4.45)
in
(cm)
3.13
(7.94)
2.13
(5.4)
DIMENSIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
BKT-1 Handy-box mounting bracket for wall sensor
ISPL-1 Plastic ivory switch plate cover for handy-box mounting
KT1 Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key 1390
SSPL-1 Stainless steel switch plate cover for handy-box mounting
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1246. fi
TEMPERATURE 1180fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD ±0.50°F (0.4°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
10 kΩ Type II & III, 20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD 100Ω, 1000Ω 385 curve
Thermistor Temperature Range
32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <±0.1°C drift
Heat Dissipation Thermistor, 3 mW/°C (power
needed to raise the temperature by 1°C)
Enclosure
Plastic
Mountng Direct to wall or single gang box
Wiring Terminations 10" (0.25m) of 22 AWG wire or
terminal strip
Approvals CE, RoHs
Weight 0.12 lb (0.05 Kg)
Warranty 5 years
ROOM THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ACI ROOM SERIES
ACI/*R/LCD
Room
in
(cm)
2 .75 (7 .0)
2 .25 (5 .7)
3 .84 (9 .8)
0 .60 (1 .5)
0 .92 (2 .3)
4 .51
(10 .4)
1 .15 (2 .9)
0 .89
(2 .3)
100 .0
F C
DESCRIPTION
The ACI Series Room Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed specifically for HVAC system temperature control
.
The room sensors come in ther
mistor and RTD sensor curves
compatible with most BAS systems available today
.
Room sensors are vented for indoor use with options that
include setpoint adjust, push-button override, communication jacks, and display
. The ACI Room Sensor should be
mounted approximately 5' (12.7 cm) above the floor. It can be
mounted to a standard bac
k box or directly to the wall using
appropriate anchors for the wall covering
.
FEATURES
• ±0.36°F (0.2°C) accuracy
• Five-year warranty
• Wide selection of thermistor or RTD curves
• Delta-style room enclosure
• Digital display option
• Custom logos
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
A/AN-- -RS 10KCWRA DF
Example: A/AN-RS-10KCWRA-DF
ACI 10,000W therm istor, Type 3 Room with setpoint, 0 to 10kfi,
cool wa rm, reverse acting with 3.5 digit LCD Fahrenheit display
*Specs do not show in actual part number.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A/AN 10,000W thermistor @ 77°F (25°C) (ACI/10AN), Type 3
A/CP 10,000W thermistor @ 77°F (25°C) (ACI/10CP), Type 2
A/20K 20,000W thermistor @ 77°F (25°C) (ACI/20,000), Type 42
A/100K 100Kfi thermistor @77°F (25°C)
A/100-2W100W RTD @ 32°F (0°C), two-wire 385 curve, Type 85
A/1K-2W 1000W RTD @ 32°F (0°C), two-wire 385 curve, Type 85
MOUNTING CONFIGURATION
R Room mounted
RORoom with ov erride
RSRoom with setpoint
RSORoom with setpoint & ov erride
OPTIONS (RS, RSO ONLY)*
10KCWRA Adjust pot (0 to 10kfi); cool wa rm, reverse acting
10KCWDA Adjust pot (0 to 10kfi); cool wa rm, direct acting
1KCWRA Adjust pot (0 to 1kfi); cool wa rm, reverse acting
Display (R only )
DF3.5 digit Fahrenheit display ; 24 VAC/VDC
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1247. fi 1181TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD 385 Curve
±0.27°F (0.15°C)
375 Curve ±0.54°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type Thermmistor
10 kΩ Type II & III
RTD 100Ω, 1000Ω, 385 curve; 1000Ω,
375 curve
Temperature Range 32° to 158°F (-0° to 70°C)
Stability Thermistor
< 0.036 F (0.02C) per year
RTD 0.14 °C with 6,000 continuous hours
at 400 °C
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power need to raise the
temperature 1C), 0.4°C/mW at 0°C
Enclosure ABS plastic, UL94V-0
Mounting Directly to wall or single gang box
Wiring Terminations Terminals
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight 0.25 lb (0.1 kg)
Warranty Lifetime
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI BA Series Room Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed specifically for HVAC systems
. The room
sensors come in a variety of enclosure styles, including Delta, Precon, stainless steel plate, and BAPIstat II
. This series is
available with thermistor, RTD, and semiconductor sensors, which makes the BA sensors compatible with every BAS system in use today
.
FEATURES
• ±0.36°F (±0.2°C) Thermistor accuracy
• ±0.27°F (±0.15°C) or ±0.54°F (±0.30 RTD°C) RTD
accuracy
• ±2.7°F (±1.5°C) semiconductor accuracy
• Lifetime limited sensor warranty
• Wide selection of thermistor, RTD, and semiconductor curves
BAS/HVAC TEMPERATURE SENSORS
BA/ ROOM SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BA/ Room temperature sensor surface mount
SENSOR TYPE
10K2 10,000
Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type 2
10K3 10,000
Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type 3
100 100
Ω RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
1K 1000
Ω RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
1K375 1000
Ω RTD @32°F (0°C), 375 curve
ROOM ENCLOSURE
R Delta style enclosure
BB BAPIstat II style enclosure
SP Stainless steel plate style enclosure
Example: BA/10K3-R Delta room 10,000 Ω thermistor sensor BA/ 10K3 R
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229
BA/*R BA/*-SP

1248. fi
TEMPERATURE 1182fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.50°F (0.28°C)
RTD ±0.60°F (0.33°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 81
100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range
Thermistor/RTD -40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD 100% (no drift platinum)
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature 1°C)
Enclosure 304 Stainless steel plate
Mounting Single gang back box
Wiring Terminations 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG wire leads,Type
71 & 81 sensors have 18" leads
Approvals CE
Weight 0.2 lb (0.10 kg)
Warranty 3 years
STAINLESS STEEL FLUSH-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
KTP* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Precon KTP* Series Stainless Steel Flush-Mount Thermistor and RTD Sensors provide room temperature sensing for building automation systems
. The active sensing
element is made of a highly stable, thermistor material or platinum RTD
. This design provides moisture/vapor resistance
and is bonded to a 304 stainless steel plate. The back is
insulated to reduce interior wall temperature influence. This
sensor is intended for interior use only.
FEATURES
• Three-y •
±0.50°F (±0.28°C) thermistor accuracy
• ±0.60°F (±0.33°C) RTD accuracy
• Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Insulated backing for room temperature response
• Vandal-resistant flush mounting
• 304 stainless steel finish
• Easy to mount to wall or back box
• Standard size plate to cover mounting holes
APPLICATION
The KTP* Series sensors are designed to be mounted on indoor walls
. They are ideal for use in schools or cold storage
lockers, where vandalism or fork lifts can damage ordinary wall sensors
. The sensors have an insulated back that
reduces the conductive influences of wall temperatures, yet
allows significant convective influences to be sensed. Security
screws (XS option) are available where tamper proofing is required
.
OPTIONS
• Setpoint adjustment
• Momentary switch override
• Security screws
SPECIFICATIONS
KTP*

1249. fi 1183TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where conduit
is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting directly to electrical
outlet boxes. Tighten mounting screws, crushing foam gasketing until plate
edges lightly touch the wall. Insulate or seal all interior holes to prevent drafts
from affecting the temperature readings. Terminate with butt splices or
soldering. Wire nuts are not recommended.
Basic model comes with screws for stainless steel faceplate, two #6-32
screws for handy-box mounting, and 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG wire. Security
screws (XS Option) are #6-32 with a spanner head.
Optional Customer-
Supplied Handy Box
The sensor should be mounted approximately five feet above the floor,
on an interior wall, away from any heating or cooling generating devices.
OVERRIDE
UP DN
0
-1
-2
-3 3
2
1
XM
Momentary
Push Button
XA
Setpoint Adjust provides a
0fi to 10 kfi ± 3% resistance input
XS Security Screw s
MOUNTING TYPICAL COVER WITH MULTIPLE OPTIONS
STAINLESS STEEL FLUSH-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
KTP* SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KTP3 10,000fi flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype III (gray leads)
KTP21 2252fi flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads)
KTP22 3000fi flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)
KTP24 10,000fi flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (yellow leads)
KTP27 100,000fi flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype II (gray leads)
KTP42 20,000fi flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads)
KTP81 100fi flush-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (yellow leads)
KTP85 1000fi flush-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (blue leads)
KTP91 1000fi flush-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum cur ve (green leads)
KTP3
OPTIONS
X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AW G
XA Setpoint adjustment (10,000 to 30,000, resistance input)
XA1500 Setpoint adjustment (0 to 1,500, resistance input)
XA2K Setpoint adjustment (1,000 to 1,400, resistance input)
XA10K Setpoint adjustment (1,000 to 3,000fi, resistance input)
XD Dual sensors
XK Custom logo
XM Momentary switch wired N.O . to terminal bl ock
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F(0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XS Security screws (SD-6 spanner screwdriver required)
XZ Three wire RTD connections (Optional only on Type 81)
XM Example: KTP3-XM 10,000fi T ype III stainless steel flush-mount sensor
with momentary switch
2.75
(6.99)
3.25
(8.25)
4.5
(11.43)in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
KT1 Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key 1390
SD-6 Security spanner screwdriver (required for XS option)
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1250. fi
TEMPERATURE 1184fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD Type 63
±0.72°F (0.40°C)
Type 71 ±0.054°F (0.03°C)
Type 81, 85 ±0.27°F (0.15°C)
Type 91 ±0.54°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 63
1000Ω Nickel
Type 71, 81 100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <0.09°F (0.05°C) over 5 years
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature by 1°C)
Enclosure Brushed stainless steel
Mounting Directly to wall or single gang box
Wiring Terminations 8' of 24 AWG pigtails prestripped
ends, Type 71 & 81 sensors have 18" leads
Approvals
CE
Weight 0.2 lb (0.1 kg)
Warranty Lifetime
STAINLESS STEEL FLUSH-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-S* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The PreCon Model ST-S* Stainless Steel Flush-Mount Thermistor and RTD Sensor provides precision room temperature sensing for building automation systems
.
The activ
e sensing element is made of a highly stable
precision thermistor material or Platinum RTD
. This material
is ruggedized to provide moisture/vapor resistance and is bonded to a 304 stainless steel plate
. The back is insulated
to reduce interior wall temperature influence. This sensor is
intended for interior use only.
FEATURES
• Lif •
±0.36°F (0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
• ±0.27°F (0.15°C) or 0.54°F (0.30°C) RTD accuracy
• Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Insulated backing for room temperature response
• Vandal-resistant flush mounting
• Adaptable with many options
• 304 Stainless steel finish
• Easy to mount to wall or back box
• Standard size plate to cover mounting holes
TM
APPLICATION
The Model ST-S* is designed to be wall mounted indoors.
It is ideal f
or use in schools or cold storage lockers, where
vandalism or fork lifts can damage ordinary wall sensors
.
The sensor has an insulated bac
k which reduces conductive
in
fluences of wall temperatures, yet allows significant
convective influences to be sensed. Security screws, XS
option, are available where tamper proofing is required.
OPERATION
• Setpoint adjustment
• Momentary switch override
• Security screws
SPECIFICATIONS
ST-S*

1251. fi 1185TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where conduit
is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting directly to electrical
outlet boxes. Tighten mounting screws, crushing foam gasketing until plate
edges lightly touch the wall. Insulate or seal all interior holes to prevent drafts
from affecting the temperature readings. Terminate with butt splices or
soldering. Wire nuts are not recommended.
Basic model comes with screws for stainless steel faceplate, two #6-32
screws for handy-box mounting, and 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG wire. Security
screws (XS Option) are #6-32 with a spanner head.
Optional Customer-
Supplied Handy Box
The sensor should be mounted approximately five feet above the floor,
on an interior wall, away from any heating or cooling generating devices.
OVERRIDE
UP DN
0
-1
-2
-3 3
2
1
XM
Momentary
Push Button
XA
Setpoint Adjust provides a
0fi to 10 kfi ± 3% resistance input
XS Security Screw s
MOUNTING TYPICAL COVER WITH MULTIPLE OPTIONS
STAINLESS STEEL FLUSH-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-S* SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-S3 10,000fi flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype III (gray leads)
ST-S21 2252fi flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads)
ST-S22 3000fi flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)
ST-S24 10,000fi flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (yellow leads)
ST-S27 100,000fi flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype II (gray leads)
ST-S42 20,000fi flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads)
ST-S63 1000fi flush-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), nickel cur ve (yellow leads)
ST-S71 100fi flush-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (yellow leads)
ST-S81 100fi flush-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (yellow leads)
ST-S85 1000fi flush-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (blue leads)
ST-S91 1000fi flush-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum cur ve (green leads)
ST-S27
OPTIONS
X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AW G
XA Setpoint adjustment (0 to 10kfi ±3%)
XA10K Setpoint adjustment (1,000 t0 3,000flfiresitance input)
XA1500 Setpoint adjustment (0fi to 1,500fi, resistance input)
XA2K Setpoint adjustment (1,000fi to 1,400fi, resistance input)
XD Dual sensors
XK Custom logo
XM Momentary switch wired N.O . to terminal bl ock
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F(0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XS Security screws (SD-6 spanner screwdriver required)
XZ Three wire RTD connections (Optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71)
XM Example: ST-S27-XM 100,000fi T ype II stainless steel flush-mount sensor
with momentary switch
2.75
(6.99)
3.25
(8.25)
4.5
(11.43)in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
KT1 Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key 1390
SD-6 Security spanner screwdriver (required for XS option)
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1252. fi
TEMPERATURE 1186fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
1000 OHM NICKEL-RTD / ROOM / DUCT / OSA
TE-6300 SERIES
FEATURES
• Easy to mount
• Proven long performance
• Many mounting styles
• Single assembly ordering
• PVC enclosure
• Stainless steel insertion probe
TE-6312P-1
TEMPERATURE TE-63xx
°F °C RESISTANCE fi
-50 -46 674
-40 -40 699
-30 -34 725
-20 -29 751
-10 -23 777
0 -18 803
10 -12 830
20 -7 858
30 -1 885
40 4 914
50 10 942
60 16 971
70 21 1000
80 27 1030
90 32 1060
100 38 1090
TEMPERATURE TE-63xx
°F °C RESISTANCE fi
110 43 1121
120 49 1152
130 54 1184
140 60 1216
150 66 1248
160 71 1281
170 77 1314
180 82 1348
190 88 1382
200 93 1417
210 99 1452
220 104 1487
230 110 1524
240 116 1560
250 121 1597
PERFORMANCE CHARTS
TE-6316P-1
TE-6311P-1
TE-6313P-1 TE-6300-603
TE-6314P-1
Accuracy
Room/Probe ± 0.34°F (± 0.18°C)
Averaging ±3°F (±1.67°C)
Sensor Type 1000Ω nickel @ 70°F (21°C)
Temperature Range -50° to 220°F (-46° to 104°C)
Sensitivity Approx 3Ω/°F (5.4 Ω/°C)
Operating Temperature -50° to 122°F (-46° to 50°C)
Enclosure PVC conduit box
Wiring Terminations 6" (15.24 cm) of 22 AWG
Probe Duct/OSA/Strap-on
0.25" (0.64 cm) stainless steel
Wall Thin film on circuit board with coating
Averaging 0.093" (0.24 cm) copper
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION
The Johnson Controls Room, Duct and OSA 1000Ω Nickel RTD sensors are specifically designed for HVAC and BAS systems
. The active element is a nickel-based sensor that has
been proven to be very stable and robust with many years of service life
. The sensors come complete and ready to install
for their specific applications.
Model TE-6300-603 TE-6311P-1 TE-6312P-1 TE-6313P-1 TE-6314P-1 TE-6316P-1
T
ype Strap-on Duct Immersion OSA Wall Averaging
Accessories APB-28 N/A
WB-9
TCC-111
N/A N/A M-648-K
Weight 0.05 lb (0.02 Kg) 0.45 lb (0.2 Kg) 0.4 lb (0.18 Kg) 0.35 lb (0.16 Kg) 0.3 lb (0.14 Kg) 1.0 lb (0.45 Kg)
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS

1253. fi 1187TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
4.46
(11.33)
3.47
(8.81)
4.47
(11.35)
2.75
(6.99)
0.25 (0.63)
7.5 max
(19.05)
7.5 max
(19.05)
Mounting Plate
1.72
(4.37)
3.13
(7.95)
2.13
(5.41)
1.81
(4.60)
Mounting Plate
0.67
(1.70) 45˚
TE-6313 Outdoor Air Sensor
TE-6311 Duct Probe Sensor
TE-6314 Wall-Mount Sensor
TE-6316 Duct Averaging Sensor
TE-6312 Well Insertion Sensor
TE-6300 Strap-On Sensor
4.47
(11.35)
2.75
(6.99)0.09
(0.24)
1.72
(4.37)
6.0 max
(15.24)
2.75
(6.99)
1/2" NPT
0.25 (0.63)
4.5 (11.43)
WB-9 or WS-9
0.25
(0.63)
3 (7.62)
4.47
(11.35)
1.72
(4.37)
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS
1000 OHM NICKEL-RTD / ROOM / DUCT / OSA
TE-6300 SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TE-6300-603 Strap-on 1000Ω nickel RTD
TE-6311P-1 Duct-mount 1000Ω nickel RTD
TE-6312P-1 Immersion 1000Ω nickel RTD
TE-6313P-1 OSA-mount 1000Ω nickel RTD
TE-6314P-1 Wall-mount 1000Ω nickel RTD
TE-6316P-1 Duct averaging 1000Ω nickel RTD
Type 63 models may be used in place of these located on this page.
CROSS REFERENCES
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
APB-28 Adjustable pipe bracket 2"-8" diameter 1391
CC-1G-K Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip 1391
M-648-K Copper-clad capillary mounting clip 1391
T63U-XR 1000 ohm Nickel, 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1283
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298
WB-9 9in brass bulb well
WS-9 9in SS bulb well

1254. fi
TEMPERATURE 1188fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Sensitivity
Type 5 2.2Ω/°F @ 70°F (21°C)
Type 77 2.48Ω/°F @ 70°F (21°C) two red
wires
Type 78 4.96Ω/°F @ 70°F (21°C) two gray
wires
Sensor Type Type 5
1000Ω Nickel ±0.12% @ 70°F
(21°C)
Type 77 1000Ω Balco ±0.12% @ 70°F°F
(21°C)
Type 78 2000Ω Balco ±0.12% @ 70°F
(21°C)
Temperature Range -30° to 240°F (34° to 115°C)
Sensor Type Type 5, 77
1000Ω ±0.12% @ 70°F (21°C)
Type 78 2000Ω ±0.12% @ 70°F (21°C)
Mounting Directly to wall or single gang box
Warranty 1 year
NICKEL-IRON / BALCO RTD ROOM SENSORS
TYPE 5, 77, 78 ROOM SENSORS
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Wire Wound Nickel-Iron RTD Balco Room Sensors are used to provide reliable, accurate temperature readings in surface-mount room environments
. The room
sensors feature a stainless steel insulated plate, a standard plastic ventilated enclosure, or a deluxe executive enclosure design
. The stainless steel plate is ideal for areas of
vandalism or where the sensor can be easily knocked off the wall
. The sensors are designed for interior use only in the
temperature range of -30° to 140°F (-34° to 60°C).
SPECIFICATIONS
ST-T*E ST-S*
ST-S*K ST-S*P
MODEL DESCRIPTION ST-S Surface-mount room sensor
RTD SENSOR TYPE
5 1000fi nickel-iron, Balco sensor
77 100
0fi nickel-iron, Balco sensor
78 200
0fi nickel-iron, Balco sensor
ENCLOSURE
P Plastic ventilated room enclosure
E Executive-style room enclosure with tan faceplate
– Stainless steel plat
e
K Decorator-style room enclosure
ST-S 5 E
Example: ST-S5E Executi
ve style 1000fi nickel-iron room
sensor with tan faceplate

RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
KT1 Mounting screwdriver 1/16” allen key 1390
T5U Series Temperature transmitter for 1000Ω nickel-iron Balco sensor 1283
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1255. fi 1189TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy ±0.9°F (0.5°C) or ±0.2% R
o
trim
Stability Better than 0.05°C per year
Sensor Type 1000Ω platinum two-wire 0.00375
Ω/Ω/°C, 100Ω platinum three-wire
0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C
Temperature Range Room "S"
-58° to 175°F (-50° to 80°C)
Duct "D", "E" -58° to 500°F (-50° to 260°C)
OSA "O", "W" -58° to 175°F (-50° to 80°C)
Immersion "P", "Q" -50° to 500°F (-46° to 260°C)
Probe Length Range 2" to 48" long
Probe Material Room
0.187" diameter aluminum
Duct 0.25" diameter stainless steel
OSA 0.187" diameter stainless steel
Immersion 0.25" diameter stainless steel
Enclosure Room
Plastic with aluminum faceplate
Duct, Immersion Electro zinc-plated box with 1/2"
knockout
OSA White polyvinyl with weatherresistant
box
Wiring Terminations 4" 22 AWG silver-plated stranded
copper, Teflon insulated
Warranty 3 years
PLATINUM ROOM, DUCT, OSA, AND IMMERSION RTD SENSORS
AS ROOM, DUCT, OSA, AND IMMERSION SENSORS
DESCRIPTION
The Minco Room, Duct, Outside Air, and Immersion Temperature RTD Sensors use a thin film platinum element for fast, accurate point measurement for energy and environmental control applications
.
The
Model AS _ _ _ S industrial room-mount housing
provides an accurate, professional appearance
. This housing
can either direct mount or mount directly to a standard handibox or wire mold
.
The Model AS _ _ _ D duct-mount sensor features a rugged,
stainless steel probe mounted in a standard handibox, making installation quick and easy with self-tapping screws
.
The
Model AS _ _ _ E uses a weather resistant box
The Model AS _ _ _ O outside air sensor features a non- heat conductive, solar reflecting noncorrosive shield. This
configuration is completely sealed against moisture in weather conditions
. The slotted shield allows air to flow freely
to the stainless steel probe to provide accurate measurement.
Installation is made easy with a 1/2" f
emale threads
.
The Model AS _ _ _ Q immersion probes are designed with
a 1/2" tapered thread for easy installation in thermowells. The
Model AS _ _ _ P uses a weather-resistant box.
FEATURES
• Lo •
Rugged design
• Platinum RTDs
• Interchangeable sensors
• NIST certification available
SPECIFICATIONS
WB-6
AS2PW000S
AS2PW055Q
AS2PW040O
AS2PW080D

1256. fi
TEMPERATURE 1190fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
1.88
(4.76)
LLL
8.0
(20.32)
4.0
(10.16)
0.25
(0.64)
dia
AS___040O Outside Air Sensor
AS___000S
Room-Mount Sensor
AS___080D Duct-Mount Sensor
Stainless Steel
Probe
1/2" Knockouts
Foam Gasket
AS___055Q Immersion Probe
Mounted in Handy Box
1.88
(4.76)
1.0
(2.54)
4.0
(10.16)
0.25
(0.64)
dia
LLL
5.5
(13.97)
1/2" Knockouts
1/2" NPT Typical
both sides
Stainless Steel
Probe
in
(cm)
Housing Bottom View
Housing Top View
2.75
(6.98)
1.58
(4.01)
4.50
(11.43)
2.88
(7.30)
4.63
(11.75)
2.0
(5.08)
1.5
(3.81)
5.5
(13.97)
1/2" FNPT
DIMENSIONS
PLATINUM ROOM, DUCT, OSA, AND IMMERSION RTD SENSORS
AS ROOM, DUCT, OSA, AND IMMERSION SENSORS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AS3 Assembly probe for three-wire RTDs (PD sensors only)
AS2 Assembly probe for two-wire RTDs
PD 100Ω 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C platinum cur ve, 6" leads, three-wire RT D
PW 1000Ω 0.00375 Ω/Ω/°C platinum cur ve, 6" leads, two-wire RTD
LLL Length LLL in 0.1" increments 040 = 4.0", 120 = 12.0", 0.000 fo r all space sensors “S”
D Duct mount, handy-box 1/2" knockouts, LLL typically = 8.0" (080)
E D uct mount, weatherproof box, LLL typically = 8.0" (080)
O Outside air, weatherproof box with weather shield, LLL = 4.0" (040)
Q Immersion, handy-box 1/2" knockouts, LLL typically = 5.5" for 6" well insertion (055)
P Immersion, weatherproof box, LLL typically = 5.5" fo r 6" well insertion (055)
S Space, indoor room, wall-mount housing, LLL = 000
W W all mount, outside, weatherproof box, LLL typically 4.0" (040)
000 No transmitter
801 TT-801, 3-wire fixed range, 100Ω, 385 cur ve, PD sensor only
807 TT-807, 2-wire fixed range, 1000Ω, PW sensor only
XX No transmitter
EN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-20°/140°F) or (-29°/60°C)
S Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°F) or (-18°/38°C)
A Range codes per Minco letter ranges (20°/120°F) or (-7°/49°C)
BI Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/130°F) or (-1°/54°C)
KK Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/180°F) or (-1°/82°C)
BN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/240°F) or (-1°/116°C)
N Range codes per Minco letter ranges (32°/122°F) or (0°/50°C)
H Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40°/90°F) or (4°/32°C)
M Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-50°/50°C)
C Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°C)
BW Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/250°C)
JW Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/500°C)
1 No calibration data, sensor or transmitter
2 Sensor/Transmitter matched at 0°C with NIST
Sample order:
AS3PD080D000XX1:
8" duct probe with three-wire,
100Ω, 385 curv e platinum RTD
AS2PW055Q000XX1:
5.5" immersion probe with two-
wire, 1000Ω, 375 cur ve RTD
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229
WB-6 Brass well 1293
WS-6 Stainless steel well 1293

1257. fi 1191TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.60°F (0.33°C)
RTD ±0.50°F (0.28°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD
Type 81 100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24F (0.13) over five years
RTD 100% (no drift platinum),
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature 1°C)
Enclosure Button style brass, aluminum, 304
Stainless steel
Mounting Directly to wall
Wiring Terminations 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG wire leads,
type 81 sensors have 18" leads
Approvals CE
Weight 0.25 lb (0.10 kg)
Warranty 3 years

0.625
(1.6)
Insulating
Wall Housing
Sensor
Housing
0.50
(1.3)
0.9
(2.3)
in
(cm)
0.32
(0.8)
wall
0.80
(2.0)
0.875
(2.2)
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KTB* Series Button Style Flush-Mount
Thermistor and RTD Sensors provide room temperature
sensing for building automation systems
. The active sensing
element is made of a highly stable, thermistor material or platinum RTD
. This design provides moisture/vapor resistance
and is bonded to either brass, steel or aluminum button style housing easily mountable into any wall
. This sensor is
intended for interior use only.
FEATURES
• Three-y •
±0.50°F (±0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
• ±0.60°F (±0.33°C) RTD accuracy
• Ultra high accuracy available
• Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Optional brass, steel, or aluminum metal button style
housing
• Small, nearly invisible footprint
DIMENSIONS
BUTTON STYLE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
KTB* SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KTB3 10,000fi button style thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III (gray leads)
KTB21 2252fi button style thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads)
KTB22 3000fi button style thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)
KTB24 10,000fi button style thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (yellow leads)
KTB27 100,000fi button style thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (gray leads)
KTB42 20,000fi button style thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads)
KTB81 100fi button style RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
KTB85 1000fi button style RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
KTB91 1000fi button style RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads)
OPTIONS
B Brass housing
A Aluminum housing
S Steel housing
KTB*
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229
TB-A Aluminum button enclosure only
TB-B Brass button enclosure only
TB-S Stainless Steel button enclosure only

1258. fi
TEMPERATURE 1192fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD
Type 63 ±0.72°F (0.40°C)
Type 71 ±0.054°F (0.03°C)
Type 81, 85 ±0.27°F (0.15°C)
Type 91 ±0.54°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III, 20 kΩ,
100 kΩ
RTD Type 63
1000Ω Nickel
Type 71, 81 100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <0.09°F (0.05°C) over 5 years
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise the
temperature by 1°C)
Enclosure Brass, aluminum,304 Stainless steel
housing
Mounting Directly to the wall
Wiring Terminations 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG pigtails with
prestripped ends, type 71 & 81 have 18" leads
Approvals
CE
Weight 0.2 lb (0.1 kg)
Warranty Lifetime
BUTTON STYLE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-B* SERIES
0.625
(1.6)
Insulating
Wall Housing
Sensor
Housing
0.50
(1.3)
0.9
(2.3)
in
(cm)
0.32
(0.8)
wall
0.80
(2.0)
0.875
(2.2)
DESCRIPTION
The Precon ST-B* Series Button Style Flush-Mount
Thermistor and RTD Sensors provide precision room
temperature sensing for building automation systems
. The
active sensing element is made of a highly stable, precision thermistor material or platinum RTD
. This design provides
moisture/vapor resistance and is bonded to either brass, steel or aluminum button style housingeasily mountable into any wall
. This sensor is intended for interior use only.
FEATURES
• Lif •
±0.36°F (±0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
• ±0.27°F (±0.15°C) or ±0.54°F (±0.30°C) RTD accuracy
• Ultra high accuracy available
• Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Optional brass, steel, aluminum metal buttonstyle
housing
• Small, nearly invisible footprint
TM
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-B3 10,000fi button style thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III (gray leads)
ST-B21 2252fi button style thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads)
ST-B22 3000fi button style thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)
ST-B24 10,000fi button style thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (yellow leads)
ST-B27 100,000fi button style thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (gray leads)
ST-B42 20,000fi button style thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads)
ST-B63 1000fi button style nickel RTD @ 70°F (21°C), (yellow leads)
ST-B71 100fi ultra high accuracy button style RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
ST-B81 100fi button style RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
ST-B85 1000fi button style RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
ST-B91 1000fi button style RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads)
OPTIONS
B Brass housing
A Aluminum housing
S Steel housing
ST-B Button Sensor
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable

1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
TB-A Aluminum button enclosure only
TB-B Brass button enclosure only
TB-S Stainless Steel button enclosure only

1259. fi 1193TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
1.31
(3.33)
2.213
(5.62)
1.05
(2.67)
1.53
(3.89)
in
(cm)
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD Type 63
±0.72°F (0.40°C)
Type 71 ±0.054°F (0.03°C)
Type 81, 85 ±0.27°F (0.15°C)
Type 91 ±0.54°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 63
1000Ω Nickel
Type 71, 81 100Ω, Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω, Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω, Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40 to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Termpaerature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <0.09°F (0.05°C) over five years
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature by 1°C)
Mounting Directly to wall
Wiring Terminations All Others
8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG prestripped
pigtails, Type 71 & 81 sensors have 18" leads
Enclosure
White plastic
Approvals CE
Weight 0.1 lb (0.05 kg)
Warranty Lifetime

DESCRIPTION
The Precon ST-BP* Series Paintable Button Style Flush-
Mount Thermistor and RTD Wall Sensors provide precision
room temperature sensing for building automation systems
.
The ST
-BP Series drastically descreases the footprint of the
traditional box sensor so that it becomes virtually invisible once it is painted to match the decor. The active sensing
element is made of a highly stable, precision thermistor material or platinum RTD
. This design is intended for interior
use only is bonded to a plastic paintable housing.
FEATURES
• Lif •
Paintable housing
• Flush mount
• Installs in drywall
• No back box required
• Virtually undetectable when painted
DIMENSIONS
PAINTABLE BUTTON STYLE FLUSH MOUNT WALL SENSOR
ST-BP* SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST
-BP3
10,000Ω paintable flush-mount button style thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III (gray leads)
ST-BP21 2252Ω paintable flush-mount button style thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads)
ST-BP22 3000Ω paintable flush-mount button style thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)
ST-BP24 10,000Ω paintable flush-mount button style thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (yellow leads)
ST-BP27 100,000Ω paintable flush-mount button style thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (gray leads)
ST-BP42 20,000Ω paintable flush-mount button style thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads)
ST-BP63 1000Ω paintable flush-mount button style nickel RTD @ 70°F (21°C), (yellow leads)
ST-BP71 100Ω paintable flush-mount ultra high accuracy button style RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
ST-BP81 100Ω paintable flush-mount button style RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
ST-BP85 1000Ω paintable flush-mount button style RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
ST-BP91 1000Ω paintable flush-mount button style RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads)
ST-BP*
TM
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277

1260. fi
TEMPERATURE 1194fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
BULLET/BUTTON TEMPERATURE SENSORS
ACI BULLET/BUTTON SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The ACI Bullet/Button Series Thermistor and RTD Sensors are
designed specifically for HVAC system temperature control. The
button and bullet style sensors come in thermistor or RTD sensor curves
.
The
A/*BP Stainless Steel Thermistor and RTD Sensor is for
under-insulation mounting and direct contact to the pipe
. Clean off
an
y insulation or rust to promote solid contact, and secure with tie
wraps so the probe is parallel to the pipe
.
FEATURES
• Five-year warranty
• Stainless steel casing (BP)
• Small footprint for hidden applications (BBS. SBS)
• Brass or stainless button casing (BBS, SBS)
• Available in thermistor or RTD
ACI Button Sensor
ACI Bullet Sensor
Accuracy Thermistor
±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD ±0.50°F (0.4°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
10 kΩ Type II & III, 20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD 100Ω, 1000Ω 385 curve
Temperature Range -40° to 302°F (-40° to 150°C)
Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <±0.1°C drift
Heat Dissipation Thermistor, 3 mW/°C (power needed to
raise the temperature by 1°C)
Enclosure Button
Brass, Stainless
Bullet Stainless
Flush Stainless
Mounting
Button, Surface mount Directly to wall
Bullet Strap on to pipe
Flush Directly to wall
Wiring Terminations 10" of 22 AWG wire or terminal strip
Approvals CE, RoHs
Weight
Button 0.12 lb (0.05 Kg)
Bullet 0.04 lb (0.02 Kg)
Surface mount 0.2 lb (0.09 Kg)
Warranty 5 years
24" Leads
(0 .6m)
1" Long x
0 .250" OD
Bullet Probe
(2 .5cm x 0 .6cm Ø)
A/*-BP
Stainless Steel Probe
0 .17
(0 .43)
0 .38
(0 .96)0 .9
(2 .3)
1 .6
(4 .1)
0 .215
(0 .55)
0 .15
(0 .38)
0 .615
(1 .6)
Spacer
A/*BBS, SBS
Button Sensor
0 .88
(2 .23)
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
in
(cm)
ORDERING INFORMATION
A/ANB P
Example: A/AN-BP ACI bullet 10,000fi thermistor sensor
MODEL DESCRIPTION (choose one)
A/AN 10,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type 3
A/CP 10,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type 2
A/20K 20,000fi⁄thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type 42
A/100K 100kfi⁄thermistor@ 77°F (25°C), Type 27
A/100-2W 100fi⁄RTD @ 32°F (0°C), two-wire 385 cur ve
A/1K-2W 1000fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C), two-wire 385 cur ve
MOUNTING CONFIGURATION (choose one)
BP Stainless steel bullet probe
BBS Brass button sensor
SBS Stainless steel button sensor
SP Flush mount sensor
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229
ACI Flush Mount Sensor

1261. fi 1195TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.50°F (0.28°C)
RTD ±0.60°F (0.33°C)
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD 100% (no drift platinum)
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature 1°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 k
Ω, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ, Type II & III,
20 k
Ω, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 81
100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Enclosure Metal handy box, weather resitant
box optional
Mounting Directly to duct, wall or single gang
box
Wiring Terminations 8' (2.4m), 24 AWG wire leads, type
81 sensors have 18" (0.45m) leads
Probe Seamless 304 stainless steel tube,
1/4" OD
Approvals CE
Weight
KTD 0.72 lb (0.33 kg)
KTDNB 0.2 lb (0.09 kg)
Warranty 3 years
DUCT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
KTD* SERIES
Vinyl Grommet
Mounting T-Bar
4.0
(10.2)
in
(cm)
0.25
(0.64)
1.70
(4.3)
KTD
*
3.88
(9.89)
4.87
(12.38)
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KTD* Duct Thermistor and RTD Sensors are
designed to be cost effective with accuracies of ±0.5°F
(±0.28°C). Each uses metal enclosures and is constructed for
easy installation with any building automation system (BAS).
The ther
mistor is made of a very stable, pre-aged material
that offers long-life reliability for HVAC control
. The platinum
RTD comes in 100Ω and 1000Ω versions. All sensors come
with a three-y
ear warranty
.
FEATURES
• Economical
• Metal enclosures with stainless steel probes
• Three-year warranty
• Thermistor or RTD sensor selections
APPLICATION
The KTD* Series sensors are designed for direct mounting
on sheet metal duct systems. Where conduit is required, the
duct sensors have a universal nylon mounting connector that adapts to a 1/2" knockout in a standard handy box
. The nylon
fitting has a 1/2" NPT female conduit fitting.
The duct temper
ature sensors are waterproof and can be
used in high humidity and condensing air
. The sensors are
point-sensitive and come standard with 9" (22.8 cm) insertion
depth. The XL option provides custom lengths.
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
KTDNB3-GF KTDNB3
KTD3 KTD3-W

1262. fi
TEMPERATURE 1196fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KTD    Duct temperature sensor
  KTDNB    Duct temperature sensor with no box
    SENSOR SELECTION
    3         10,000
fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III
    21       2252
fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
    22       3000
fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
    24       10,000
fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
    27       100,000
fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
    42       20,000
fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV
    81       100
fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 
    85       1000
fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 
    91       1000
fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) 
OPTIONS
 
Example: KTD-3 Duct sensor with 10,000fi thermistorKTD 3
QD¼ Nylon insulated Quick Disconnect 1/4"
X25  25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AW G
XC25  25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable
XCO  1/2" LB condulet fitting 
XCP25  25' Non-shielded plenum cable
XD  Dual sensors in one probe
XG Greenfield fitting (factory  installed)
XH Handy box housing (factory installed)
XHP Non-metallic handy box housing ( factory installed)
XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 108"
XL2 Custom length insertion probe, 4-7/8"(12.38 cm)
XL2 in Custom length insertion probe, 2"(5.08 cm)
XLT Liquid-tight fitting (factory  installed)
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XNB 1/2" MNPT brass close nipple
XNP 1/2" MNPT plastic close nipple
XN1 NIST certificate, one refe rence point 32°F(0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)
XN3
NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only,  ±0.135˚F (0.075˚C)
XW Weather resistant housing (factory installed)
XZ Three wire RTD connections (optional only on Type 81)
DUCT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
KTD* SERIES
Direct duct-mount screws can be used where conduit is not required. Adapters
are not required when mounting directly to outlet boxes. Install grommet in the
9/16" (1.43 cm) insertion hole.
Basic model comes with 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG, 9" (22.86 cm) probe with T-bar,
grommet, and #6 x 1 screws for direct duct mounting.
Insertion Hole is 9/16" (1.43 cm)
Vinyl Grommet
1/2" NPT
Basic Installation
Greenfield Fitting
Duct temperature sensor with
Greenfield fitting option (GF)
MOUNTING
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1263. fi 1197TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD Type 63
±0.72°F (0.40°C)
Type 71 ±0.054°F (0.03°C)
Type 81, 85 ±0.27°F (0.15°C)
Type 91 ±0.54°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 k
Ω, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 k
Ω, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 63
1000Ω Nickel
Type 71, 81 100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <0.09°F (0.05°C) over 5 years
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature by 1°C)
Mounting Directly to duct, wall, or single gang
box
Wiring Terminations 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG pigtails with
prestripped ends, type 71 & 81 sensors have 18" leads
Approvals
CE
Weight 0.25 lb (0.1 kg) with no options
Warranty Lifetime
DUCT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-D* SERIES
3.88
(9.89)
9.0
(22.86)
Standard
0.25
(0.64)
Vinyl Grommet
1/2" NPT
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The PreCon Model ST-D* Duct Thermistor and RTD Sensor provides precision remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation
. The active sensing element is a highly stable
precision thermistor material or platinum RTD. The sensing
element is sealed with a thermally conductive compound in a 9" (22
.8 cm) long 304 stainless steel tube attached to a 4"
(10 cm) electrical strap. The slots in the mounting bracket
form mounting ears for direct duct mounting and standard electrical boxes
. The grommet on the tube fitting seals a 9/16"
(1.43 cm) insertion hole.
FEATURES
• Lifetime warranty
• Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Tip sensitive for precise temperature response
• Adaptable with many options
• 304 stainless steel probe
• Greenfield fitting standard
• Ultra high accuracy optional
TM
APPLICATION
The ST-D* Series sensors are designed for direct mounting
on sheet metal duct systems. Where conduit is required, the
duct sensors have a universal nylon mounting connector that adapts to a 1/2" knockout in a standard handy box
. The nylon
fitting has a 1/2" NPT female conduit fitting.
The duct temperature sensors are waterproof and can be
used in high humidity and condensing air. The sensors are
point-sensitive and come standard with 9" (22.8 cm) insertion
depth. The XL option provides custom lengths.
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ST-D3
ST-D91-XH

1264. fi
TEMPERATURE 1198fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Direct duct-mount screws can be used where conduit is not required. Adapters
are not required when mounting directly to outlet boxes. Install grommet in the
9/16" (1.43 cm) insertion hole.
Basic model comes with 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG, 9" (22.86 cm) probe with T-bar,
grommet, and #6 x 1 screws for direct duct mounting.
Insertion Hole is 9/16" (1.43 cm)
Vinyl Grommet
1/2" NPT
Basic Installation
Greenfield Fitting
Duct temperature sensor with
Greenfield fitting option (GF)
MOUNTING
DUCT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-D* SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-D3 10,000fi duct thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype III (gray leads)
ST-D21  2252fi duct thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads)
ST-D22  3000fi duct thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)
ST-D24  10,000fi duct thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (yellow leads)
ST-D27  100,000fi duct thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype II (gray leads)
ST-D42  20,000fi duct thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads)
ST-D63  1000fi nickel duct RTD @ 70°F (21°C), (yellow leads)
ST-D71  100fi ultra high accurate duct RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
ST-D81  100fi duct RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cu rve (yellow leads)
ST-D85  1000fi duct RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cu rve (blue leads)
ST-D91  1000fi duct RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum cu rve (green leads)
ST-D3 XG
OPTIONS (List options in alphabetical order with dashes) QD
¼ Nylon insulated Quick Disconnect 1/4"
X25  25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AW G
XC25  25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable
XCO  1/2" LB condulet fitting  XCP25  25' Non-shielded plenum cable XD  Dual sensors in one probe XG Greenfield fitting (factory  installed)
XH Handy box housing (factory  installed)
XHP Non-metallic handy box housing ( fa ctory installed)
XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 108"
XL2 Custom length insertion probe, 4-7/8"(12.38 cm)
XL2 in Custom length insertion probe, 2"(5.08 cm)
XLT Liquid-tight fitting (factory  installed)
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XNB 1/2" MNPT brass close nipple
XNP 1/2" MNPT plastic close nipple
XN1 NIST certificate, one refe rence point 32°F(0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)
XN3
NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, ±0.135˚F (0.075˚C)
XW Weather resistant housing (factory installed)
XZ Three wire RTD connections (optional only on Type 81, standard on 
 T ype 71, not av ailable with XC25 and XCP25)
Example: ST-D3-XG 10,000 fi Type III duct temperature sensor 
  with Greenfield fitting 
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
KT1 Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key 1390
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1265. fi 1199TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
KTV3-CP5
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.50°F (0.28°C)
RTD ±0.60°F (0.33°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252kΩ, 3kΩ, 10kΩ Type II & III,
20kΩ, 100kΩ
RTD Type 81
100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD 100% (no drift platinum)
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature 1°C)
Enclosure Metal handy box, weather resistant
box optional
Mounting T-bar with protective grommet seal,
Directly to Duct or Single gang box
Wiring Terminations 5' (1.5m), 24 AWG wire leads
with optional quick disconnects and plenum rated cable, type 81 sensors have 18" leads
Probe
Seamless 304 stainless steel tube,
1⁄4" OD, 4.87" (12.4 cm) long
Approvals CE
Weight 0.15 lbs (0.07 kg)
Warranty 3 years
VAV BOX DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSORS
KTV* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KTV* VAV Box Duct Thermistor and RTD sensors are designed to be cost-effective with accuracies of 0
.5°F
(0.28°C). Each mounts directly to the duct and is constructed
for easy installation with optional quick disconnects and plenum cable when needed
. The thermistor is made of a very
stable, pre-aged material that offers long-life reliability for HVAC control
. The platinum RTD comes in 100Ω and 1000Ω
versions. All sensors come with three-year warranty.
FEATURES
• Economical
• Stainless steel probes
• Three-year warranty
• Wide thermistor or RTD sensor selections
• Simple traditional mounting
OPTIONS
• Greenfield fittings
• Plenum cable
• 1/4" quick connects
SPECIFICATIONS
KTV3-QD-CP5
KTV3-GF
KTV3-QD
KTV3
Mounting KTV*
Drill a 
9
∕16" (1.43 cm) hole for probe insertion. 
Using the provided #6 screws, secure to the  duct with the T-bar mounting ears.
Wiring Terminate to controller directly with push-on 
quick connects or to terminals.
Basic model comes with 5' (1.5 m) of 24 AW G wire, 
4.87" (12.38 cm) probe with T-bar, grommet,  and #6 x 1 screws for direct duct mounting.
*Select sensor number on ordering information table.
MOUNTING/WIRING

1266. fi
TEMPERATURE 1200fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
3.88
(9.89)
3.88
(9.89)
4.87
(12.38)
Standard
4.87
(12.38)
Standard
0.25
(0.64)
5' (1.52 m)
wire or cable
Vinyl Grommet
1/2" NPT
1.37
(3.49)
Insertion Hole is
9/16" (1.43 cm)
Vinyl Grommet
Greenfield
Fitting
Duct temperature sensor with
Greenfield fitting option (GF)
1/2" NPT
Basic Installation
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS
VAV BOX DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSORS
KTV* SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: KTV-3-N1 VAV duct sensor with 10,000 fi thermistor with Greenfield fittingKTV 3- GF
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KTV VAV box duct temperature sensor
SENSOR SELECTION
3 10,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III
21 2250fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
22 3000fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
24 10,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
27 100,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
42 20,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV
63 1000fi nickel RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
81 100fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
85 1000fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
91 1000fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads)
OPTIONS
QD¼ Nylon insulated quick disconnect ¼"
X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG
XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG jacketed cable
XCP5 5' (1.2m) non-shielded 22AWG plenum cable
XCP25 25' (7.6m) non-shielded 22AWG plenum cable
XD Dual sensors in one probe
XG Greenfield fitting (factory installed)
XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 60"
XL2 in Custom length insertion probe, 2"(5.08 cm)
XL9 Custom length insertion probe, 9"(22.86 cm)
XLT Liquid-tight fitting (factory installed)
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F(0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XW W eather resistant housing
XZ Three wire RTD connections (Type 81 only) (Not with XC25, XCP25)
-
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1267. fi 1201TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD ±0.50°F (0.4°C)
Sensor Type
Thermistor 10 kΩ Type II & III, 20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD 100Ω, 1000Ω 385 curve
Temperature Range -40° to 275°F (-40° to 135°C)
Stability
Thermistor 0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <±0.1°C drift
Heat Dissipation Thermistor, 3 mW/°C (power
needed to raise the temperature by
1°C)
Measurement Range -40° to 302°F (-40° to 150°C)
Enclosure Galvanized metal box
Wiring Terminations 10" of 22 AWG wire or terminal
strip
Approvals CE
Weight
4" 0.6 lb (0.27 Kg)
8" 0.72 lb (0.72 Kg)
12" 0.9 lb (0.41 Kg)
18" 1.0 lb (0.45 Kg)
Warranty 5 years
in
(cm)
0 .125 (0 .3)
Foam
Insulation
4 5 .8 (14 .7)
8 7 .8 (19 .8)
12 11 .7 (30)
18 17 .7 (45)
1 .9 (4 .9)
1 .9 (4 .9)
0 .90
(2 .3)
See
Table
0 .76 (1 .9)
ACI/*-D/AV Duct/Averaging
DESCRIPTION
The ACI Duct Series Thermistor and RTD Sensors are
designed specifically for HVAC system temperature control.
The duct sensors come in ther
mistor and RTD sensor curves
compatible with most BAS systems available today
. Duct
sensors come with a f
oam-backed handy box and 8” probe
.
The
A/*D Duct Sensor should be mounted close to the
center of the duct and penetrate through any duct insulation at least 1” (2
.5 cm) into the airflow. The probes are sensitive
within 1” of the tip and insert through a 3/8” (1 cm) hole. Use
standard metal scre
ws to secure to the duct
.
FEATURES
• Five-y •
Wide selection of thermistor or RTD curves
• Stainless steel probes
DIMENSIONS
DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSORS
ACI DUCT SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
A/AN-D-8-G-D
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A/AN-D-8-GD Duct mount 10 kΩ type III thermistor with 8" (20.3 cm) insertion (ACI/AN-D8)
A/CP-D-8-GD Duct mount 10 kΩ type II thermistor with 8" (20.3 cm) insertion (ACI/CP-D8)
A/20K-D-8-GD Duct mount 20 kΩ type IV thermistor with 8" (20.3 cm) insertion (ACI/20K-D8)
A/100K-D-8-GD Duct mount 100 kΩ type II thermistor with 8" (20.3 cm) insertion
A/100-2W-D-8-GD Duct mount 100Ω RTD 385 curve, two-wire with 8" (20.3 cm) insertion (ACI/100-2-D8)
A/1K-2W-D-8-GD Duct mount 1 kΩ RTD 385 curve, two-wire with 8" (20.3 cm) insertion (ACI/1000-2-D8)
Handy Box Height
8 12 18 4
AN 4.19 (10.6) 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71)
CP 3.18 (8.07) 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71)
20 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71)
100K 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71)
100 3.91 (9.93) 3.57 (9.06) 3.58 (9.09) 3.58 (9.09)
1K 3.57 (9.06) 3.57 (9.06) 3.58 (9.09) 3.58 (9.09)

1268. fi
TEMPERATURE 1202fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD ±0.55°F (±0.30°C)
Sensor Type
Thermistor 10 kΩ Type II & III
RTD 100Ω, 1000Ω, 385 curve; 1000Ω,
375 curve
Temperature Range 32° to 158°F (-0° to 70°C)
Stability < 0.036°F (0.02°C) per year, 0.14°C with
6,000 continuous hours at 400°C
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power need to raise the
temperature 1°C), 0.4°C/mW at 0°C
Enclosure/Weight NB
No Box; 0.5 lb (0.23 Kg)
JB 2" x 4" J-box with 1/2" knockouts:
0.65 lb (0.29 Kg)
BB BAPI-Box - IP66 rated, UV-resistant
polycarbonate; 0.8 lb (0.36 Kg)
BB2 BAPI-Box 2 - IP66 rated, UV-resistant
polycarbonate; 0.8 lb (0.36 Kg)
BB4 BAPI Box 4 - IP44 Nylon & plastic;
0.8 lb (0.36 Kg)
WP NEMA 3R cast aluminum;
0.8 lb (0.36 Kg)
Mounting Directly to duct
Wiring Terminations 22 AWG wire, etched teflon leads 
Approvals CE, RoHS
Warranty Lifetime
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI BA Series Duct Thermistor and RTD Sensors are available in a variety of easy-to-mount installation types
.
The
y come in thermistor and RTD sensors and feature etched
Te
flon leadwires and encapsulated sensors to create a
watertight package that can perform in the real world.
FEA
TURES
•
±0.36°F (±0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
• ±0.27°F (±0.15°C) or ±0.54°F (±0.3°C) RTD
• Lifetime limited sensor warranty
• Wide selection of mounting styles
DUCT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
BA/ DUCT SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
BA/10K2-D3-JB
BA/10K2-D4-BB4
BA/10K2-D4-NB
BA/10K2-D4-BB2
BA/10K2-D4-NB BA/10K2-D4-WP
DIMENSIONS

1269. fi 1203TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: BA/10K3-D8-J B BAPI 8 " duct 10,000fi thermistor
sensor with JB box
BA/ 10K3 D8 JB
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BA/ Probe temperature sensor
REQUIRED SENSOR TYPE
10K2 10,000
fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type 2
10K3 10,000
fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type 3
100 100
fi RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
1K 1000
fi RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
1K375 1000
fi RTD @32°F (0°C), 375 curve
REQUIRED PROBE TYPE AND LENGTH
D8 Duct mount with 8" probe (other lengths av ailable 4", 12", 18")
REQUIRED MOUNTING ENCLOSURE
NB No box with 18" leads
JB 2" x 4" J-box with 1/2" knockouts
BB IP66 rated, UV resistant
BB2 IP66 rated, UV resistant polycarbonate
WP NEMA 3R weatherproof UV resistant enclosure
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229
DUCT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
BA/ DUCT SERIES
DIMENSIONS
BA/10K2-D4-BB
BA/10K2-D4-BB4
BA/10K2-D4-JB

1270. fi
TEMPERATURE 1204fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Temperature Range -30° to 240°F (34° to 115°C)
Sensor Type
Type 5, 77 1000Ω ±0.12% @ 70°F (21°C)
Type 78 2000Ω ±0.12% @ 70°F (21°C)
Sensitivity Type 5
2.2Ω/°F @ 70°F (21°C)
Type 77 2.48Ω/°F @ 70°F (21°C) two red wires
Type 78 4.96Ω/°F @ 70°F (21°C) two gray wires
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Wire Wound Nickel-Iron Balco RTD Sensors are
installed in rugged housings to measure the most important
HVAC applications
. The Duct and Immersion Sensors all
have 304 stainless steel probes for use in almost any area.
The Immersion Probe comes with a standard brass or
optional stainless steel thermowell.
The Duct Sensor has mounting tabs for direct mounting on a
duct or installation in a handibox.
The Outdoor Sensor, rated for outdoor temperatures,
is equipped with a sun shield and weatherproof box for mounting under the eaves or another sheltered area
.
The
Type 78 and 77 Raw Sensors are mounted in a 2" (5
cm) long aluminum case with te
flon insulated lead wires. This
sensor can be used for strap-on applications. The Type 5 raw
sensor is mounted in a 2.5" (6.35 cm) PVC case.
The Universal Sensor may be used for duct, immersion, and
OSA temperature sensing.
NICKEL-IRON / BALCO RTD IMMERSION, DUCT & OUTDOOR SENSORS
TYPE 5, 77, 78 UNIVERSAL DUCT, IMMERSION, OSA
SPECIFICATIONS
ST-O
ST-D 5 XW Example: ST-D5-XW 1000fi Balco duct sensor
with a weatherproof housing
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-R Raw sensor
ST-U Universal duct, immersion, or OSA sensor
ST-D Duct sensor
ST-W Immersion sensor with brass well
ST-O Outdoor air sensor
R TD SENSOR TYPE
5 1000fi nickel-iron, Balco sensor
77 1000fi nickel-iron, Balco sensor
78 2000fi nickel-iron, Balco sensor
OPTIONS
XW
Weather resistant housing (factory installed ST-D and ST-W only)
XH Handy-box (factory installed ST-D and ST-W only)
E Immersion sensor without well (ST-W only)
S Stainless steel thermowell (ST-W and ST-U only)
O Kit with OSAB weather shield (ST-U only)
B WEL-B brass well (ST-U only)
ST-R5
ST-U
ST-D
ST-W
WEL-B
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
F-1000-331 Nylon bushing for open wiring 908
OSAB OSA weather shield, gasket, and bracket 1226
T5U-XR 1000 ohm Nickel, 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1283
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298
WEL-B Brass well 1294
WEL-S 304 stainless steel well 1294

1271. fi 1205TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.50°F (0.28°C)
RTD ±0.60°F(0.33°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 81
100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD 100% (no drift platinum)
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature 1°C)
Mounting Ductly to duct, wall or customer
supplied back box, no adapters needed for standard box
Wiring Terminations
8' (2.44m) of 24 AWG wire leads,
Type 81 sensors have 18" (0.45m)
leads
Probe Seamless 304 stainless steel tube,
1/4" OD
Approvals CE
Weight 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) w/o options
Warranty 3 years
ALL-PURPOSE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
KTA* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KTA* Series All-Purpose Thermistor and RTD Sensors provide remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation
. The active sensing element is made of a
highly stable thermistor material or platinum RTDs.
The KTA* Series sensors are rugged, point-sensitive
waterproof sensors featuring a 9" (22.8 cm) 304 stainless
steel probe and brass fitting. The brass fitting has a 1/2" NPT
male thread. The sensors are supplied with two 1/2" locknuts
for easy installation in handy boxes (or other enclosures with 1/2" knockouts)
.
FEATURES
• Three-y •
Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Tip sensitive for precise temperature response
• All metal construction with 304 stainless steel probes
• Easy to mount to duct, wall, or back box
• Waterproof probe
APPLICATION
The KTA* Series Sensors are waterproof and can be used where it is possible for the sensed temperature to fall below the ambient dew point, causing condensation to occur on the sensor
. However, it is important that the field connection be
made as far as possible from the sensed media. The sensing
element is sealed with a thermally conductive compound in a versatile 9" long stainless steel tube with a brass electrical fitting
. The all-purpose probe is suitable for plenum mounting,
duct mounting, immersion wells, or outside air.
SPECIFICATIONS
KTA*

1272. fi
TEMPERATURE 1206fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Locknuts provide direct mounting and can be used where conduit
is not required. Mount directly to electrical outlet boxes as shown below.
All-Purpose Sensor with
Customer-Supplied Handy Box
Secure sensor to handy box with locknuts.
Secure handy box to duct with screws.
Hole
1-1/16"(2.7 cm)
Basic model comes with two locknuts for mounting to a va riety of
box options.
8.25
(20.96)
0.25
(0.64)
9.25
(23.51)
1.0
(2.54)
1.0
(2.54)
0.83
(2.06)
1.5
(3.81)
Typical Insertion
1/2" NPT Thread
in
(cm)
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
KELE ALL-PURPOSE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR
KTA* SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
KTA24 XPExample: KTA24-XP 10,000 fi Type II all-purpose temperature sensor with matched sensor
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KTA3 10,000fi all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype III (gray leads)
KTA21 2252fi all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads)
KTA22 3000fi all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)
KTA24 10,000fi all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (yellow leads)
KTA27 100,000fi all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype II (gray leads)
KTA42 20,000fi all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads)
KTA81 100fi all-purpose RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cu rve (yellow leads)
KTA85 1000fi all-purpose RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cu rve (blue leads)
KTA91 1000fi all-purpose RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum cu rve (green leads)
OPTIONS
QD
¼ Nylon insulated Quick Disconnect ¼"
X25 25’ (7.6) lead length 24 AW G
XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable
XCO ½" LB condulet fitting
XCP25 25' Non-shielded plenum cable
XD Dual sensors in one probe
XH Handy box housing (factory installed)
XHP Non-metallic handy box housing (factory installed)
XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 108"
XL2 Custom length insertion probe, 4-7/8" (12.38 cm)
XL2 in Custom length insertion probe, 2" (5.08 cm)
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F (0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F (0°C/25°C/70°C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XW Weather resistant housing (factory installed)
XZ
Three wire RTD connections (optional only on Type 81, not av ailable with XC25 and XCP25)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1273. fi 1207TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD Type 63
±0.72°F (0.40°C)
Type 71 ±0.054°F (0.03°C)
Type 81, 85 ±0.27°F (0.15°C)
Type 91 ±0.54°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 63
1000Ω Nickel
Type 71, 81 100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <0.09°F (0.05°C) over 5 years
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature by 1°C)
Mounting Directly to duct, wall, or
customersupplied back box, no adapters needed for standard boxes
Wiring Terminations
8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG pigtails with
prestripped ends, type 71 & 81 have 18" leads
Approvals
CE
Weight 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) w/o options
Warranty Lifetime
ALL-PURPOSE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-A* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Precon ST-A* Series All-Purpose Thermistor and RTD Sensors provide precision remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation
. The active sensing element is made
of a highly stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTDs
.
The ST-A* Series sensors are rugged, point-sensitive
waterproof sensors featuring a 9" (22.8 cm) 304 stainless
steel probe and brass fitting. The brass fitting has a 1/2" NPT
male thread. The sensors are supplied with two 1/2" locknuts
for easy installation in handy boxes (or other enclosures with 1/2" knockouts)
.
FEATURES
• Lif •
Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Tip sensitive for precise temperature response
• Adaptable with many options
• All metal construction with 304 stainless steel probe
• Easy to mount to duct, wall, or back box
• Waterproof probe
TM
APPLICATION
The ST-A* Series Sensors are waterproof and can be used where it is possible for the sensed temperature to fall below the ambient dew point, causing condensation to occur on the sensor
. However, it is important that the field connection be
made as far as possible from the sensed media. The sensing
element is sealed with a thermally conductive compound in a versatile 9" long stainless steel tube with a brass electrical fitting
. The all-purpose probe is suitable for plenum mounting,
duct mounting, immersion wells, or outside air.
SPECIFICATIONS
ST-A*

1274. fi
TEMPERATURE 1208fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Locknuts provide direct mounting and can be used where conduit
is not required. Mount directly to electrical outlet boxes as shown below.
All-Purpose Sensor with
Customer-Supplied Handy Box
Secure sensor to handy box with locknuts.
Secure handy box to duct with screws.
Hole
1-1/16"(2.7 cm)
Basic model comes with two locknuts for mounting to a va riety of
box options.
8.25
(20.96)
0.25
(0.64)
9.25
(23.51)
1.0
(2.54)
1.0
(2.54)
0.83
(2.06)
1.5
(3.81)
Typical Insertion
1/2" NPT Thread
in
(cm)
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
ALL-PURPOSE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-A* SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
ST-A24 XPExample: ST-A24-XP 10,000 fi Type II all-purpose temperature sensor with matched sensor
MODEL DESCRIPTION 
ST-A3  10,000fi all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype III (gray leads)
ST-A21  2252fi all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads)
ST-A22  3000fi all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)
ST-A24  10,000fi all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (yellow leads)
ST-A27  100,000fi all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype II (gray leads)
ST-A42  20,000fi all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads)
ST-A63  1000fi nickel all purpose RTD @ 70°F (21°C), (yellow leads)
ST-A71  100fi ultra high accurate all pur pose RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
ST-A81  100fi all-purpose RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cu rve (yellow leads)
ST-A85  1000fi all-purpose RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cu rve (blue leads)
ST-A91  1000fi all-purpose RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum cu rve (green leads)
  OPTIONS
QD
¼   Nylon insulated Quick Disconnect ¼" 
  X25   25’ (7.6) lead length 24 AW G
  XC25   25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable 
  XCO   ½" LB condulet fitting
  XCP25   25' Non-shielded plenum cable  
  XD   Dual sensors in one probe   
  XH   Handy box housing (factory installed)   
  XHP   Non-metallic handy box housing ( factory installed)  
  XL   Custom length insertion probes 1" to 108"   
  XL2   Custom length insertion probe, 4-7/8"(12.38 cm)   
  XL2 in   Custom length insertion probe, 2"(5.08 cm)   
  XN   NIST certificate of conformance
  XN1   NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F(0°C)  
  XN2   NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)  
  XN3   NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)   
  XP   Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)  
  XPA   Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, ±0.135˚F (0.075˚C)  
  XW   Weather resistant housing (factory installed) 
  XZ   Three wire RTD connections (optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71, not 
    available with XC25 and XCP25)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1275. fi 1209TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.50°F (0.28°C)
RTD ±0.60°F (0.33°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 81
100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD 100% (no drift platinum)
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature 1°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Enclosure Metal, weather resistant
Mounting 1/2" conduit fitting directly to duct or w
all
Wiring Terminations 8', 24 AWG wire leads, type 81
sensors have 18" leads
Probe Seamless 304 stainless steel tube,
1/4" OD
Approvals CE
Weight
KTWNB 0.65 lb (0.30 kg) standard w/o
options
KTW 1.1 lb (0.5 Kg) w/o options
Warranty 3 years
IMMERSION THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
KTW* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KTW* Immersion Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed to be cost-effective with accuracies of ±0
.5°F
(±0.28°C). Each sensor is constructed for easy installation
with any building automation system (BAS). The thermistor
is made of a very stable, pre-aged material that offer long-life reliability for HVAC control
. The platinum RTD comes in 100Ω
and 1000Ω versions. All sensors come with a three-year
warranty.
FEATURES
• Economical
• Metal enclosures with stainless steel probes
• Three-year warranty
• ±0.5°F (±0.28°C) accuracy
• Wide selection of thermistor or RTD sensors
APPLICATION
The KTW Series Sensors are waterproof and feature a 304 stainless steel probe and brass fitting
. The fitting has 1/2"
NPSM female threads to accept the standard Greenfield fitting
. It also has 1/8" NPSM male threads for installing
into an optional Model WEL-B thermowell. The thermowells
are designed with close tolerances, eliminating the need for thermal grease under normal conditions
. Each well is
designed so that the sensor assembly can be easily removed after installation
. The well screws into a 1/2" FNPT saddle (or
Thredolet
®
fitting) furnished by the installing contractor
.
OPTIONS
• 304 stainless steel well, maximum temperature 900°F
(482°C), maximum pressure 3000 psig (20,685 kPa)
• Handy-box enclosure
• Custom lengths (wells available)
• 1/2" LB conduit fitting
• Liquid-tight fitting
• Weather resistant box
• Matched pairs used for BTU measurement
• NIST Traceable
SPECIFICATIONS
KTW3
KTWNB3-LTKTWNB3
KTW3-W

1276. fi
TEMPERATURE 1210fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
FlowFlow
Angle must not allow end of well
to contact the other side of pipe.
Install the wells as shown to obtain
optimum well strength.
Mounting
Install well into customer-supplied 1/2" FNPT saddle (or Thredolet
®
). Screw
sensor into the well via the 1/8" NPSM brass fitting.
Wiring
Terminate with butt splice or soldering. Wire nuts are not recommended.
in
(cm)
KTW
*
4.0 (10.2)
1.70
(4.3)
4.87
(12.38)
0.25 (0.63)
5.13
(13.03) 3.25
(8.26)
1/2" NPT
WEL-B
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
IMMERSION THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
KTW* SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
  KTW    Well immersion temperature sensor 
  KTWNB Well immersion temperature sensor with no box
    SENSOR SELECTION
    3         10,000
fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III
    21       2252
fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
    22       3000
fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
    24       10,000
fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
    27       100,000
fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
    42       20,000
fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV
    81       100
fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
    85       1000
fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
    91       1000
fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads)
OPTIONS
B  WEL-B brass well included
QD¼  Nylon insulated quick disconnect ¼"
S  WEL-S 304 stainless steel well included
X25  25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AW G
XC25  25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cabl e
XCO  ½" LB condulet fitting
XCP25  25' non-shielded plenum cable
XD  Dual sensors in one probe
XHP  Non-metallic handy box housing ( factory installed)
XL  Custom length insertion probes 1" to 60" 
XL2 in Custom length insertion probe, 2"(5.08 cm)(Specify E without well)
XL9  Custom length insertion probe, 9"(22.86 cm)(Specify E without well)
XLT  Liquid-tight fitting (factory installed)
XN  NIST certificate of conformance
XN1  NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F(0°C)
XN2  NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)
XN3  NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)
XNB  ½" MNPT brass close nipple (not  available with KTW)
XNG  No Greenfield fitting(½" NPSM threads) (not av ailable with KTW)
XNP  ½" MNPT plastic close nipple (not av ailable with KTW)
XP  Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XPA  Ultra high accuracy, all thermistors, ±0.135˚F (0.075˚C)
XW W eather resistant housing (not av ailable with KTWNB)
XZ  Three wire RTD connections(Type 81 only) (Not with XC25, XCP25)
Example: KTW-3-B  Immersion sensor with 10,000 fi thermistor and brass wellKTW 3 B
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229
WEL-B Brass well 1294
WEL-S 304 stainless steel well 1294

1277. fi 1211TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD Type 63
±0.72°F (0.40°C)
Type 71 ±0.054°F (0.03°C)
Type 81, 85 ±0.27°F (0.15°C)
Type 91 ±0.54°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 k
Ω, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 k
Ω, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 63
1000Ω Nickel
Type 71, 81 100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <0.09°F (0.05°C) over 5 years
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature by 1°C)
Mounting Directly to pipe in supplied brass
well, no adapters needed for standard boxes, customer-supplied 1/2" Thredolet
®
required in pipe
Wiring Terminations
8' (2.44 m) of 24 AWG pigtails with
prestripped ends, type 71 & 81 have 18" leads
Approvals
CE
Weight 0.65 lb (0.3 kg) w/o well
Warranty Lifetime
IMMERSION THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-W* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The PreCon Model ST-W* Immersion Thermistor and RTD
Sensor provides precision remote temperature sensing for
building automation systems and mechanical equipment
room instrumentation
. The active sensing element is a highly
stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTD.
The sensing element is sealed with a temper
ature conductive
compound in a 4-7/8" (12
.4 cm) stainless steel tube and
brass fitting. A brass thermowell is the standard well
provided with each sensor. A Greenfield connector is factory
installed for flexible connection. The sensor probe assembly
is removable from the thermowell for replacement without draining the system
.
FEATURES
• Lifetime warranty
• ±0.36°F (±0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
• ±1°F (0.53°C) RTD accuracy
• Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Brass thermowell for quick temperature response
• Adaptable with many options
• Easy to mount and remove from thermowell
• Waterproof stainless steel probe
TM
APPLICATION
The Model ST-W* is a waterproof sensor featuring a 304
stainless steel probe and brass fitting. The fitting has a 1/2"
NPT female threads to accept the standard Greenfield fitting.
It has 1/8" NPT male threads f
or installing into a furnished
WEL-B thermowell
. The thermowells are designed with close
tolerances, eliminating the need for thermal grease under normal conditions
. Each well is designed so that the sensor
assembly can be easily removed after installation. The well
screws into a 1/2" NPT saddle (or Thredolet
®
fitting) furnished
by the installing contractor
.
OPTIONS
• 304 stainless steel well, maximum temperature 900°F
(482°C),maximum pressure 3000 psig (20,685 kPa)
• Handy-box enclosure
• Custom lengths (wells available)
• 1/2" LB conduit fitting
• Liquid-tight fitting
• Weather resistant box
• Matched pairs used for BTU measurement
• NIST Traceable
SPECIFICATIONS
TCC-12
WEL-B
ST-W24

1278. fi
TEMPERATURE 1212fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
FlowFlow
Angle must not allow end of well
to contact the other side of pipe.
Install the wells as shown to obtain
optimum well strength.
Mounting
Install well into customer-supplied 1/2" FNPT saddle (or Thredolet
®
). Screw
sensor into the well via the 1/8" NPSM brass fitting.
Wiring
Terminate with butt splice or soldering. Wire nuts are not recommended.
1/2" NPT
5.13
(13.03)
3.25
(8.26)
4.87
(12.38)
0.25 (0.63)
1.37
(3.49)
(XL)
1/8" NPSM
Sensor
Sensor in Well
Greenfield
Fitting
in
(cm)
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
IMMERSION THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-W* SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
ST-W3 SX P
Example: ST-W3-S-XP 10,000fi T ype III immersion sensor with a matched
   10,000fi T ype III immersion sensor and stainless steel well
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-W3  10,000fi immersion thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype III (gray leads)
ST-W21  2252fi immersion thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads)
ST-W22  3000fi immersion thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)
ST-W24  10,000fi immersion thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (yellow leads)
ST-W27  100,000fi immersion thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype II (gray leads)
ST-W42  20,000fi immersion thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads)
ST-W63  1000fi nickel immersion RTD @ 70°F (21°C), (yellow leads)
ST-W71  100fi ultra high accurate immersion RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (blue leads)
ST-W81  100fi immersion RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (yellow leads)
ST-W85  1000fi immersion RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (blue leads)
ST-W91  1000fi immersion RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum cur ve (green leads)
  WELL DESIGNATION
    –  Sensor with standard brass well
  E  Sensor without well
    S  Sensor with stainless steel well 900°F (482°C) max temp, 3000 psig (20.7 kPa) max pressure
    OPTIONS
    QD¼  Nylon insulated quick disconnect ¼"
    X25  25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AW G
    XC25  25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable
    XCO  ½" LB condulet fitting
XCP25 25' non-shielded plenum cable
    XD  Dual sensors in one probe
    XH  Handy box housing (factory installed)
    XHP  Non-metallic handy box housing ( factory installed)
    XL  Custom length insertion probes 1" to 108"(Specify E without well)
    XL2 in  Custom length insertion probe, 2"(5.08 cm)(Specify E without well)
    XL9  Custom length insertion probe, 9"(22.86 cm)(Specify E without well)
    XLT  Liquid-tight fitting (factory installed)
    XN  NIST certificate of conformance
    XN1  NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F(0°C)
    XN2  NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)
    XN3  NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)
    XNB  ½" MNPT brass close nipple
    XNG  No Greenfield fitting(½" NPSM threads)
    XNP  ½" MNPT plastic close nipple
    XP  Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
    XPA  Ultra high accuracy, all thermistors, ±0.135˚F (0.075˚C)
    XW W eather resistant housing
    XZ  Three wire RTD connections (Optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71, not
      available for use with XC25 & XCP25 options)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1279. fi 1213TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD ±0.50°F (0.4°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
10 kΩ Type II & III, 20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD 100Ω, 1000Ω 385 curve
Temperature Range -40° to 302°F (-40° to 150°C)
Stability Thermistor
±0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <±0.1°C drift
Heat Dissipation Thermistor, 3 mW/°C (power
needed to raise the temperature
by 1°C)
Enclosure Galvanized metal box
Wiring Terminations 10” of 22 AWG wire or terminal strip
Approvals RoHS CE
Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 Kg)
Warranty 5 years
ORDERING INFORMATION
IMMERSION THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ACI IMMERSION SERIES
in
(cm)
A/*-I-X-GD
Immersion
1/2" Conduit
Knockouts
1/2" Male NPT
Nylon Fitting
1/2" Male
NPT Threads
4 .0
(10 .6)
5 .5
(14 .0)
2 .9
(5 .9)
1 .8
(4 .8)
0 .25 (0 .64)
DESCRIPTION
The ACI Immersion Series Thermistor and RTD Immersion Sensors are designed specifically for HVAC system temperature control
. The immersion sensors come in
thermistor and RTD sensor curves compatible with most BAS systems available today
.
The
ACI Immersion Sensor threads into a 1/2" (1
.27 cm)
well (included), which is secured into the pipe to a customer- supplied 1/2" saddle or Thredolet
®
.
for accurate readings. Faster response can be achieved by
using TCC-12 thermal conductive compound at the bottom of the well
.
FEA
TURES
•
Five-year warranty
• Wide selection of thermistor or RTD curves
• Stainless steel probes
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A/AN-I-4-GD Immersion 10 kΩ type III thermistor with well and 4” (10.1 cm) insertion
A/CP-I-4-GD Immersion 10 kΩ type II thermistor with well and 4” (10.1cm) insertion
A/20K-I-4-GD Immersion 20 kΩ type IV thermistor with well and 4” (10.1 cm) insertion
A/100-2W-I-4-GD Immersion 100Ω RTD 385 curve with well and 4” (10.1 cm) insertion
A/1K-2W-I-4-GD Immersion 1 kΩ RTD 385 curve with well and 4” (10.1 cm) insertion
A/AN-I-4-GD
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
ACI/4 ACI brass thermowell
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1280. fi
TEMPERATURE 1214fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD ±0.55°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type
Thermistor 10 kΩ Type II & III
RTD 100Ω, 1000Ω, 385 curve; 1000Ω,
375 curve
Temperature Range 32° to 158°F (-0° to 70°C)
Stability
Thermistor <0.036°F (0.02°C) per year
RTD 0.14°C with 6,000 continuous
hours at 400°C
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power need to raise the
temperature 1°C), 0.4°C/mW at 0°C
Enclosure JB
2" x 4" J-box with 1/2" knockouts
BB BAPI-Box Enclosure - IP66 rated,
UV-resistant polycarbonate
BB2 BAPI-Box 2 Enclosure - IP66 rated,
UV-resistant polycarbonate
BB4 BAPI Box 4- IP20 nylon & plastic
WP NEMA 3R Aluminum
Mounting Directly to pipe
Wiring Terminations 22 AWG wire, etched teflon leads 
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight
I2 0.65 lb (0.29 Kg)
I4 & I8 0.8 lb (0.36 Kg)
Warranty Lifetime
IMMERSION THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
BA/ IMMERSION SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI BA Series Thermistor and RTD Immersion Sensors are designed specifically for HVAC systems
. They
come in thermistor and RTD sensors and feature double encapsulated sensor etched Te
flon leadwires to create a
watertight package that can perform in the real world.
FEATURES
• ±0.36°F (±0.2°C) thermistor accuracy
• ±0.27°F (±0.15°C) or ±0.54°F (±0.3°C) RTD
• Lifetime limited sensor warranty
• Wide selection of mounting styles
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
BA/10K2-I8-JB
BA/10K2-I4-BB2
BA/10K2-I2-BB4
BA/10K2-I8-BB2
BA/10K2-I8-BB

1281. fi 1215TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
IMMERSION THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
BA/ IMMERSION SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: BA/10K3-I8-JB BAPI 8 " immersion10,000Ω thermistor sensor
with JB box
BA/ 10K3 I8 JB
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BA/ Probe temperature sensor
REQUIRED SENSOR TYPE
10K2 10,000
Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
10K3 10,000
Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III
100 100
Ω RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
1K 1000
Ω RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
1K375 1000
Ω RTD @32°F (0°C), 375 curve
REQUIRED PROBE TYPE AND LENGTH
I2 Immersion probe 2" long, 1/2" well thread Order BA/2 well seperately
I4 Immersion probe 4" long, 1/2" well thread Order BA/4 well seperately
I8 Immersion probe 8" long, 1/2" well thread Order BA/8 well seperately
REQUIRED MOUNTING ENCLOSURE
NB No box with 18" leads
JB 2" x 4" J-box with 1/2" knockouts
BB NEMA 4 weatherproof, UV resistant plastic
BB2 BAPI-Box 2 enclosure - IP66 rated, UV resistant polycarbonate
WP NEMA 3R weatherproof enclosure
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
BA/2 2" BAPI stainless steel well
BA/4 4" BAPI stainless steel well
BA/8 8" BAPI stainless steel well
DIMENSIONS
BA/10K2-I8-BB4
BA/10K2-I8-JB
BA/10K2-I8-WP

1282. NEW!
TEMPERATURE 1216NEW!
TEMPERATURE
20
NEW!WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
OSA THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
KTO* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KTO* OSA Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed
to be cost-effective with accuracies of ±0.5°F (±0.28°C). Each uses
metal enclosures and is constr
ucted for easy installation with any
building automation system (BAS)
. The thermistor is made of a very
stable, pre-aged material that offers long-life reliability for HVAC control
. The platinum RTD comes in 100Ω and 1000Ω versions. All
sensors come with a three-y
ear warranty
.
FEATURES
• Metal enclosures with plastic weather shield
• Three-year warranty
• ±0.5°F (±0.28°C) accuracy
in
(cm)
Foam Gasket
Stainless
Sheathed
Sensor
2.0
(5.08)
2.88
(7.30)
4.63
(11.75)
6.13
(15.56)
1.5
(3.81)
KTO*
Mounting KTO*
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount
screws can be used for outside mounting.
For conduit connections, 3/4" NPT threads
are available in the back and side.
Do not mount
sensor in vertical
position with
the weather
shield pointing up.
Correct position for mounting
outdoor air sensor
3/4" NPT
Side and rear
Use AD-2
adaptor
for 1/2" NPT
applications
Shaded side of building
Preferred mounting location
for outdoor air sensor
For best results, do not mount
above doors, windows,
air intakes, or exhausts.
MOUNTINGDIMENSIONS
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.50°F (0.28°C)
RTD ±0.60°F (0.33°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD
Type 81 100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range
Thermistor/RTD -40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD 100% (no drift platinum)
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise the
temperature 1°C)
Enclosure Metal, weather resistant
Mounting 3/4" conduit fittings
Wiring Terminations 8', 24 AWG wire leads, type 81 sensors
have 18" leads
Approvals CE
Weight 0.75 lb (0.3 kg) with no options
Warranty 3 years
SPECIFICATIONS
KTO3
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION 
KTO3 OSA temperature sensor, 10,000
NEthermistor Type III
KTO21 OSA temperature sensor, 2252
fithermistor Type II
KTO22 OSA temperature sensor, 3,000
NEthermistor Type II
KTO24 OSA temperature sensor, 10,000
NEthermistor Type II
KTO27 OSA temperature sensor, 100,000
NEthermistor Type II
KTO42 OSA temperature sensor, 20,000
NEthermistor Type IV
KTO81 OSA temperature sensor, 100
NERTD 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
KTO85 OSA temperature sensor, 1,000
NERTD 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
KTO91 OSA temperature sensor, 1,000
NERTD 385 platinum curve (green leads)
  OPTIONS
X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG
XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable
XCP25 25' Non-shielded plenum cable
XD Dual sensors in one probe
XG Greenfield fitting (factory  installed)
XLT Liquid-tight fitting (factory  installed)
XMT Mounting tabs
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST certificate, one refe rence point 32°F(0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST certificate, three refe rence points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only,  ±0.135˚F (0.075˚C)
XTB Terminal block
XZ
Three wire RTD connections(optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71, not av ailable with XC25 & XCP25 options)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAG E
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
AD-2 Knock-out adapter -3/4in TO 1/2in

1283. fi 1217TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD Type 63
±0.72°F (0.40°C)
Type 71 ±0.054°F (0.03°C)
Type 81, 85 ±0.27°F (0.15°C)
Type 91 ±0.54°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 k
Ω, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 k
Ω, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 63
1000Ω Nickel
Type 71, 81 100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <0.09°F (0.05°C) over 5 years
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature by 1°C)
Enclosure Metal, weather resistant
Mounting Directly to wall with screws or toggle
bolts
Wiring Terminations 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG pigtails with
prestripped ends, type 71 & 81 have 18" leads
Approvals
CE
Weight 0.75 lb (0.3 kg) with no options
Warranty Lifetime
OUTSIDE AIR THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR
ST-O* SERIES
2.88
(7.30)
4.63
(11.75)
2.0
(5.08)
1.5
(3.81)
5.5
(13.97)
Stainless
Sheathed
Sensor
Foam Gasket
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The PreCon Model ST-O* Outside Air Thermistor and
RTD Sensor provides precision remote temperature sensing
for building automation systems and mechanical equipment
room instrumentation
. The active sensing element is a highly
stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTD. The
temperature-sensitive element is sheathed in a stainless steel tube and mounted inside a ventilated, treated, white PVC shield to minimize radiant energy and weather related effects
.
The w
eather shield is mounted on a weather resistant outlet
box for easy installation on an protected outdoor surface
. This
rugged enclosure will assure a long life, even under extreme weather conditions
.
FEATURES
• Lif •
Vented weather shield for quick temperature response
• Moistureproof with 8 ft (2.4m) lead
• Weather resistant enclosure
• Ultra high accuracy optional
TM
APPLICATION
The ST-O* Outside Air Sensor is ideal for measuring outdoor ambient air temperatures
. It comes with a weather resistant
enclosure that should be shielded from direct exposure to the elements on the shaded side of the building
. For best results
do not mount above doors, windows, air intakes, or exhausts.
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ST-O*

1284. fi
TEMPERATURE 1218fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Mounting
Toggle bolts or other direct wall mount
screws can be used for outside mounting.
For conduit connections, 3/4" NPT threads
are available in the back and side.

Wiring
Terminate using the full 8' (2.44m) lead
length provided to avoid moisture migration
from the field connection. Solder the leads
where possible or use crimp-type butt splice.
Wire nuts are not recommended.
Correct Position for
Mounting Outdoor
Air Sensor.
3/4" NPT
Side and Rear
Shaded side of building
Preferred Mounting Location for Outdoor Air Sensor
Do not mount sensor
in vertical position with the sun shield pointing up.
For best results do not mount above doors, windows, air intakes, or exhausts.
(Use AD-2
for 1/2"
application)
MOUNTING
OUTSIDE AIR THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR
ST-O* SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION 
ST-O3 OSA temperature sensor, 10,000
fi thermistor Type III
ST-O21 OSA temperature sensor, 2250
fithermistor Type II
ST-O22 OSA temperature sensor, 3,000
fi thermistor Type II
ST-O24 OSA temperature sensor, 10,000
fi thermistor Type II
ST-O27 OSA temperature sensor, 100,000
fi thermistor Type II
ST-O42 OSA temperature sensor, 20,000
fi thermistor Type IV
ST-O63 1000
finickel OSA RTD @ 70°F (21°C), (yellow leads)
ST-O71 100
fi ultra high accurate OSA RTD @ 32° (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
ST-O81 100
fi OSA temperature sensor RTD @ 32°F (0°C) 381 platinum curve (yellow leads)
ST-O85 1000
fi OSA temperature sensor RTD @ 32°F (0°C) 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
ST-O91 1000
fi OSA temperature sensor RTD @ 32°F (0°C) 375 platinum curve (green leads)
  OPTIONS
X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG
XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable
XCP25 25' Non-shielded plenum cable
XD Dual sensors in one probe
XG Greenfield fitting (factory  installed)
XLT Liquid-tight fitting (factory  installed)
XMT Mounting tabs
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST certificate, one refe rence point 32°F(0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST certificate, three refe rence points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only,  ±0.135˚F (0.075˚C)
XTB Terminal block
XZ
Three wire RTD connections(optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71, not av ailable with XC25 & XCP25 options)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
AD-2 Knock-out adapter -3/4in TO 1/2in

1285. fi 1219TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.50°F (0.28°C)
RTD ±0.60°F (0.33°C),
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD 100% (no drift platinum)
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature 1°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252kΩ, 3kΩ, 10kΩ Type II & III,
20kΩ, 100kΩ
RTD Type 81
100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω PT 375 Curve
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Enclosure White plastic
Mounting Directly to wall
Wiring Terminations 8', 24 AWG wire leads, type 81
sensors have 18" leads
Probe Seamless 304 stainless steel tube with 1
.5" (3.8 cm) diameter weather
shield
Approvals CE
Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) w/o options
Warranty 3 years
KTOSA*
Outside Air Sensor
in
(cm)
3.30
(8.38)
2.50 (6.35)
4.10 (10.4)
1/2" Conduit Hole*
(face down)
1/2" Conduit Hole*
(face down)
*Must face down to maintain wa ter-tight integrity
Removeable
Sensor Cover
Mounting
Tabs (2)
Mounting
Tabs (2)1.30 (3.30)
3.20 (8.12)
2.50
(6.35)
Mounting
Box
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KTOSA* Series OSA Temperature Thermistor and RTD Sensors are very economical and are specifically designed for HVAC applications
. The mounting styles are
based on proven techniques for installation efficiency and use stainless steel probes for durability
. The sensors come with
a three year warranty and are made with the highest quality material that offers the reliability needed in HVAC systems
.
FEA
TURES
•
Economical
• Proven mounting designs
• Three-year warranty
• NEMA 3R enclosure
APPLICATION
The KTOSA* Series Sensors are used for outside air
temperature sensing. The design allows for two-point
mounting. The weather shield protects the encapsulated
sensor probe from the effects of rain, sleet, and snow.
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
KTOSA*
OSA THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
KTOSA* SERIES

1286. fi
TEMPERATURE 1220fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KTOSA3 OSA temperature sensor, 10,000
fithermistor Type III
KTOSA21 OSA temperature sensor, 2250
fithermistor Type II
KTOSA22 OSA temperature sensor, 3,000
fithermistor Type II
KTOSA24 OSA temperature sensor, 10,000
fithermistor Type II
KTOSA27 OSA temperature sensor, 100,000
fithermistor Type II
KTOSA42 OSA temperature sensor, 20,000
fithermistor Type IV
KTOSA81 OSA temperature sensor, 100
fiRTD 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
KTOSA85 OSA temperature sensor, 1,000
fiRTD 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
KTOSA91 OSA temperature sensor, 1,000
fiRTD 375 platinum curve (green leads)
OPTIONS
QD
¼ Nylon insulated quick disconnect ¼"
X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AW G
XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG jacketed cable
XCP25 25' (7.6m) non-shielded 22AWG plenum cable
XD Dual sensors
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F(0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XZ Three wire RTD connections (Type 81 only) (Not with XC25, XCP25)
OSA THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
KTOSA* SERIES

1287. fi 1221TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F(0.2°C)
RTD ±0.5°F (0.4°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
10 kΩ Type II & III, 20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD 100Ω, 1000Ω 385 curve
Temperature Range -40° to 302°F (-40° to 150°C)
Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <±0.1°C drift
Heat Dissipation Thermistor, 3 mW/°C (power
needed to raise the temperature by 1°C)
Enclosure
Plastic
Wiring Terminations 10" of 22 AWG wire or terminal
strip
Approvals CE, RoHs
Weight 0.68 lb (0.31 Kg)
Warranty 5 years
ORDERING INFORMATION
A/*-O
Outside Air
0 .18 (0 .46)
O .D . Ref . (2)
2 .25
(5 .71)
3 .60 (9 .14)
3 .75 (9 .52)
Top View Side View
5 .00
(12 .7)
0 .85
(2 .16)
PG11 0 .5 (1 .27)
NPT Knockouts (4)
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The ACI Series OSA Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed specifically for HVAC system temperature control
.
The OSA sensors come in ther
mistor and RTD sensor curves
compatible with most BAS systems available today
. OSA
sensors mount in a NEMA 4 bo
x with weather shield and
easy-mount tabs
.
The ACI OSA Sensor should be located on an outside wall
facing north in the northern hemisphere. Using the tabs on
the bo
x, mount to the exterior wall using screws appropriate
for the wall construction
.
FEATURES
• ±0.36°F (0.2°C) accuracy
• Five-year warranty
• Wide selection of thermistor or RTD curves
• Stainless steel probes
• Weather tight Housing
DIMENSIONS
OSA THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ACI OSA SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A/AN-O OSA Temperature sensor 10 kΩ type III thermistor
A/CP-O OSA Temperature sensor 10 kΩ type II thermistor
A/20K-O OSA Temperature sensor 20 kΩ type IV thermistor
A/100-2W-O OSA Temperature sensor 100Ω RTD 385 curve
A/1K-2W-O OSA Temperature sensor 1 kΩ RTD 385 curve
A/AN-O
SPECIFICATIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1288. fi
TEMPERATURE 1222fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD ±0.55°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
10kΩ Type II & III
RTD 100Ω, 1000Ω, 385 curve; 1000Ω,
375 curve
Temperature Range 32° to 158°F (-0° to 70°C)
Stability Thermistor
< 0.036 F (0.02C) per year
RTD 0.14°C with 6,000 continuous hours
at 400°C
Heat Dissipation Thermistor
2.7 mW/°C (power need to raise
the temperature 1°C)
RTD 0.4°C/mW at 0°C
Enclosure WP
NEMA 3R metal enclosure
BB BAPI-Box IP66 rated UV-resistant
Plastic enclosure
BB2 BAP-Box 2 IP66 rated UV-resistant
Plastic enclosure
Mounting Directly to wall
Wiring Terminations 22 AWG wire, etched teflon leads 
Weight 0.8 lb (0.36 Kg)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Warranty Lifetime
in
(mm)
2.75
(69.9)
1/2" NPT
Typical 2.16
(54.9)
0.25
(6.4)
Medical-grade
Closed Cell
Foam
Insulating Pa d
5.0
(127.0)
Vented
Sensor
Guard
4.50
(114.3)
(WP) OSA Probe
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI BA Series OSA Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed specifically for HVAC systems to be mounted outdoors
. The UV-resistant plastic shield keeps the sensor out
of the sunlight and allows for excellent air circulation. They
come in thermistor and RTD sensors and feature etched te
flon leadwires to perform under real world conditions.
FEATURES
• Quic •
Well ventilated, light colored sensor guard
• three watertight enclosure styles
• Lifetime limited sensor warranty
DIMENSIONS
OSA TEMPERATURE SENSORS
BA/ OSA SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
BA/1K375-O-BB2

1289. fi 1223TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
OSA TEMPERATURE SENSORS
BA/ OSA SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: BA/10K3-O-BB BAPI 5 " OSA 10,000Ω thermistor sensor with
NEMA 4 weatherproof enclosure
BA/ 10K3 O BB
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BA/ Probe temperature sensor
REQUIRED SENSOR TYPE
10K2 10,000
Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type 2
10K3 10,000
Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type 3
100 100
Ω RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
1K 1000
Ω RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
1K375 1000
Ω RTD @32°F (0°C), 375 curve
REQUIRED PROBE TYPE AND LENGTH
O OSA probe 5" long
REQUIRED MOUNTING ENCLOSURE
JB 2" x 4" J-box with 1/2" knockouts
BB NEMA 4 weatherproof, UV resistant plastic
BB2 BAPI-Box 2 enclosure - IP66 rated, UV resistant polycarbonate
WP NEMA 3R weatherproof enclosure
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277

1290. fi
TEMPERATURE 1224fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
The Model KTUS uses a proven universal style enclosure for use in duct and immersion applications. The direct-mount design
incorporates a 2.5" x 2.5" (6.4 x 6.4 cm) termination box with a 4.87" (12.4 cm) stainless steel probe. The probe may be inserted
into a duct with 0.4" (1 cm) hole or immersion using a WEL-B or a WEL-S.
The Model KTOS is used for outside air temperature sensing. The design allows for two-point mounting and 1.5" (3.8 cm) wall
separation for more accurate performance. The weather shield protects the stainless steel probe from the effects of rain, sleet,
and snow.
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.50°F (0.28°C)
RTD ±0.60°F (0.33°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 81
100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD 100% (no drift platinum)
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature 1°C)
Enclosure White plastic
Mounting Directly to well, duct,or wall
Wiring Terminations 8’, 24 AWG wire leads, type 81
sensors have 18” leads
Probe Seamless 304 stainless steel tube,
1⁄4” OD, 4.87” long
Approvals CE
Weight 0.2 lb (0.1 kg) w/o options
Warranty 3 years
DUCT, IMMERSION, OSA, THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
KTUS*, KTOS* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KTUS/KTOS Series of Duct, Immersion, OSA Thermistor and RTD Temperature Sensors are very economical and are accurate to within ±0
.5°F (±0.28°C). The
Kele KTUS/KTOS Series sensors are ideally suited for HVAC applications
. The mounting designs are based on proven
techniques for installation efficiency with stainless steel probes for durability
. These sensors come with a three-year
warranty and are made of a very stable, pre-aged material which offers the reliability needed in HVAC systems
.
FEATURES
• Economical
• Three-year warranty
• Flame retardant, plenum rated
• Adaptable with many mounting options
• 304 stainless steel waterproof probes
• Paintable plastic
• NEMA 3R, IP22
PROBE TYPES
SPECIFICATIONS
KTUS*
KTOS*

1291. fi 1225TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
4.87
(12.38)
0.25
(0.63)
3.25 (8.26)
2.5 (6.35)
1/8" NPT
2.3
(5.84)
in
(cm)
0.88 (2.24)
Mounting
Tabs
KTUS*
Multipurpose Duct and Immersion Sensor
DIMENSIONS
DUCT, IMMERSION, OSA, THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
KTUS*, KTOS* SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
KTUS 3 Example: KTUS-3-B 10,000 fi Type III universal mount thermistor sensor with brass wellB
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KTUS Universal-mount sensor, duct, and immersion (order wells separately)
KTOS Universal-mount sensor, OSA
THERMISTOR SENSOR TYPE
3 10,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III
21 2252fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
22 3000fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
24 10,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
27 100,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
42 20,000fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV
81 100fi RTD@ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (yellow leads)
85 1000fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (blue leads)
91 1000fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum cur ve (green leads)
OPTIONS
B Brass well included (WEL-B for US* only)
QD¼ Nylon insulated quick disconnect ¼"
S 304 stainless steel well included (WEL-S for US* only)
X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AW G
XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable
XCP25 25' non-shielded plenum cable
XD Dual sensors in one probe
XG Greenfield fitting (factory installed)
XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 60"
XL2 in Custom length insertion probe, 2"(5.08 cm)(Specify E without well)
XL9 Custom length insertion probe, 9"(22.86 cm)(Specify E without well)
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F(0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
Correct position for mounting outdoor air sensor
1/2"
Conduit Hole
Gasket
5.5
(13.97)
4.75
(12.07)
8.38
(21.28)
0.75 (1.91)
KTOS*
OSA Sensor
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1292. fi
TEMPERATURE 1226fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Shaded
Exposure
When choosing location for any outdoor air temperature sensors:
1. Do not mount above building openings (windows, doors)
2. Keep sensor out of direct sunlight
Do not
mount sensor
in vertical position with the
weather shield pointing up.
Duct: Drill a 9/16" (1.43 cm) hole for insertion into the duct. Attach
probe snug to the duct with self tapping screws.
Well Insertion: Install the well into the customer-supplied 1/2" saddle
(Thredolet
®
), then thread the sensor into the well. For better heat
transfer you may apply thermal compound to the tip of the sensor before
insertion. Mounting tabs may be removed.
OSA: Insert the shield into the bracket and thread the KT-U
* through
the gasket to the shield. Secure the assembly to the wall using the
appropriate hardware for the wall surface. The ideal orientation of the
sensor is horizontal with the knockout facing down and located on an
outside wall with a shaded exposure. Mounting tabs may be removed.
The sensor and shield may be painted to the architect’s specifications.
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.50°F (0.28°C)
RTD ±0.60°F (0.33°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 81
100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range
Thermistor/RTD -40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD 100% (no drift platinum)
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature 1°C)
Enclosure UL 94V-0, plenum-rated plastic
NEMA 3R, IP22, UV protected with snap-off cover
Mounting
Directly to duct, immersion well, or
OSA wall mount with appropriate bracket
Wiring Terminations
8', 24 AWG wire leads, type 81
sensors have 18" leads
Probe Seamless 304 stainless steel tube,
1⁄4" OD, 4.87" long
Approvals CE
Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) w/o options
Warranty 3 years
UNIVERSAL-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
KTU* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KTU* Series Universal-Mount Thermistor and
RTD Sensors provide remote temperature sensing in multiple
applications such as duct, OSA, and immersion installations
for building automation systems
. The active sensing element
is a highly stable thermistor material or platinum RTD.
The sensing element is sealed with a thermally conductive
compound in a 4-7/8" (12.38 cm) long stainless steel probe
and is attached to a 2.5" (6.35 cm) square enclosure. The
tabs on the enclosure provide mounting ears for direct duct mounting and are easily removable if they are not needed
.
This m
ultipurpose enclosure minimizes the number of stock
parts required to handle multiple applications
.
FEATURES
• Three-y •
Flame retardant, plenum rated
• Adaptable with many mounting options
• 304 stainless steel waterproof probes
• Paintable plastic
• NEMA 3R, IP22
The Duct Temperature application is designed for direct
mounting on sheet metal duct systems. The sensor is point
sensitive and comes standard with a 4-7/8" (12.38 cm)
insertion depth. The XL option is available for custom lengths
up to 36" (91.44 cm).
The
Immersion Temperature application is designed to be
threaded directly into a 1/8" NPT well
. The wells are available
in brass or 304 stainless steel and are designed for pipe
insertion using a 1/2" threaded saddle (Thredolet
®
).
The Outside Air Temperature application uses a wall
bracket with a vented weather shield to minimize the effect of rain, snow, or other weather-related in
fluences. This rugged
enclosure and bracket will ensure long life even in severe weather conditions
.
SPECIFICATIONS
PROBE APPLICATIONS
WEL-B KTU*
WEL-S OSAB
MOUNTING

1293. fi 1227TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Correct position for mounting outdoor air sensor
1/2"
Conduit Hole
Gasket
1/2" NPT
5.13
(13.03)
3.25
(8.26)
4.87
(12.38)
0.25
(0.63)
5.5
(13.97)
4.75
(12.07)
8.38
(21.28)
0.75 (1.91)
3.25 (8.26)
2.5 (6.35)
1/8 NPT
ST-U*
Duct/Multipurpose Sensor
ST-U
*B and ST-U*S
Well Sensor
ST-U
*O
Sensor for OSA
2.3
(5.83)
0.88 (2.24)
2.5 (6.35)
0.75
(1.91)
Mounting
Tabs
Well
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS
UNIVERSAL-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
KTU* SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
KTU3 B Example: KTU3B 10,000fi Type III immersion sensor with brass well
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KTU3 10,000fi universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype III (gray leads)
KTU21 2252fi universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads)
KTU22 3000fi universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)
KTU24 10,000fi universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (yellow leads)
KTU27 100,000fi universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype II (gray leads)
KTU42 20,000fi universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads)
KTU81 100fi universal-mount RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (yellow leads)
KTU85 1000fi universal-mount RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (blue leads)
KTU91 1000fi universal-mount RTD @32°F (0°C), 375 platinum cur ve (green leads)
OPTIONS
B WEL-B brass well included
O OSAB outside weathershield, gasket, and bracket for wall mount included
QD1/4 Nylon insulated quick disconnect 1/4"
S WEL-S 304 stainless steel well included
X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AW G
XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable
XCP25 25' Non-shielded plenum cable
XD Dual sensors in one probe
XG Greenfield fitting (factory installed)
XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 108"
XL2 in Custom length insertion probe, 2"(5.08 cm)
XL9 Custom length insertion probe, 9"(22.86 cm)
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F(0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XZ Three wire RTD connections (Type 81 only) (Not with XC25, XCP25)
Correct position for mounting outdoor air sensor
1/2"
Conduit Hole
Gasket
1/2" NPT
5.13
(13.03)
3.25
(8.26)
4.87
(12.38)
0.25
(0.63)
5.5
(13.97)
4.75
(12.07)
8.38
(21.28)
0.75 (1.91)
3.25 (8.26)
2.5 (6.35)
1/8 NPT
ST-U*
Duct/Multipurpose Sensor
ST-U
*B and ST-U*S
Well Sensor
ST-U*O
Sensor for OSA
2.3
(5.83)
0.88 (2.24)
2.5 (6.35)
0.75
(1.91)
Mounting
Tabs
Well
in
(cm)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
F-1000-331 Nylon bushing for open wiring
OSAB OSA weather shield, gasket, and bracket
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298

1294. fi
TEMPERATURE 1228fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD Type 63
±0.72°F (0.40°C)
Type 71 ±0.054°F (0.03°C)
Type 81, 85 ±0.27°F (0.15°C)
Type 91 ±0.54°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 k
Ω, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 k
Ω, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 63
1000Ω Nickel
Type 71, 81 100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range
Thermistor/RTD -40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <0.09°F (0.05°C) over 5 years
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature by 1°C)
Enclosure UL 94V-0, plenum-rated plastic
NEMA 3R, IP22 UV protected with snap-off cover
Mounting
Directly to duct, immersion well, or
OSA wall mount with appropriate bracket
Wiring Terminations
8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG pigtails with
prestripped ends, type 71 & 81 have 18" leads
Approvals
CE
Weight 0.25 lb (0.1 kg) w/o options
Warranty Lifetime
UNIVERSAL-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-U* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The PreCon Model ST-U* Universal-Mount Thermistor
and RTD Sensor provides precision remote temperature
sensing in multiple applications such as Duct, OSA, and
Immersion installations for building automation systems
. The
active sensing element is a highly stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTD
.
The sensing element is sealed with a thermally conductive
compound in a 4-7/8" (12.38 cm) long stainless steel probe
and is attached to a 2.5" (6.35 cm) square enclosure. The
tabs on the enclosure provide mounting ears for direct duct mounting and are easily removable if they are not needed
.
This m
ultipurpose enclosure minimizes the number of stock
parts required to handle multiple applications
.
FEATURES
• Lif •
Flame retardant, plenum rated
• Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Adaptable with many mounting options
• 304 stainless steel probes
• Easy to mount to duct, well, or wall
• Waterproof probe
• Paintable plastic
• NEMA 3R, IP22
• Brass or stainless well
• Outside air kit
• Custom lengths
• Matched sensor pairs
• Ultra high accuracy optional
TM
The Duct Temperature application is designed for direct
mounting on sheet metal duct systems. The sensor is point
sensitive and comes standard with a 4-7/8" (12.38 cm)
insertion depth. The XL option is available for custom lengths
up to 36" (91.44 cm).
The Immersion Temperature application is designed to be
threaded directly into a 1/8" NPT well. The wells are available
in brass or 304 stainless steel and are designed for pipe insertion using a 1/2" threaded saddle (Thredolet®)
.
The Outside Air Temperature application uses a wall
bracket with a vented weather shield to minimize the effect of rain, snow, or other weather related in
fluences. This rugged
enclosure and bracket will ensure long life even in severe weather conditions
.
SPECIFICATIONS
PROBE APPLICATIONS
WEL-B ST-U*
WEL-S OSAB

1295. fi 1229TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Shaded
Exposure
When choosing location for any outdoor air temperature sensors:
1. Do not mount above building openings (windows, doors)
2. Keep sensor out of direct sunlight
Do not
mount sensor
in vertical position with the
weather shield pointing up.
Duct: Drill a 9/16" (1.43 cm) hole for insertion into the duct. Attach
probe snug to the duct with self tapping screws.
Well Insertion: Install the well into the customer-supplied 1/2" saddle
(Thredolet
®
), then thread the sensor into the well. For better heat
transfer you may apply thermal compound to the tip of the sensor before
insertion. Mounting tabs may be removed.
OSA: Insert the shield into the bracket and thread the KT-U
* through
the gasket to the shield. Secure the assembly to the wall using the
appropriate hardware for the wall surface. The ideal orientation of the
sensor is horizontal with the knockout facing down and located on an
outside wall with a shaded exposure. Mounting tabs may be removed.
The sensor and shield may be painted to the architect’s specifications.
Correct position for mounting outdoor air sensor
1/2"
Conduit Hole
Gasket
1/2" NPT
5.13
(13.03)
3.25
(8.26)
4.87
(12.38)
0.25
(0.63)
5.5
(13.97)
4.75
(12.07)
8.38
(21.28)
0.75 (1.91)
3.25 (8.26)
2.5 (6.35)
1/8 NPT
ST-U*
Duct/Multipurpose Sensor
ST-U
*B and ST-U*S
Well Sensor
ST-U
*O
Sensor for OSA
2.3
(5.83)
0.88 (2.24)
2.5 (6.35)
0.75
(1.91)
Mounting
Tabs
Well
in
(cm)
MOUNTINGDIMENSIONS
UNIVERSAL-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-U* SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
ST-U3 B Example: ST-U3B 10,000fi  Type III immersion sensor with brass well
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-U3  10,000fi universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype III (gray leads) 
ST-U21 2252fi universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads)  
ST-U22 3000fi universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)  
ST-U24 10,000fi universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (yellow leads)  
ST-U27 100,000fi universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype II (gray leads)  
ST-U42 20,000fi universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads)
ST-U63  1000fi nickel universal-mount RTD @70°F (21°C), (yellow leads)
ST-U71 
100fi ultra high accurate unive rsal-mount RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads)
ST-U81  100fi universal-mount RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (yellow leads)
ST-U85  1000fi universal-mount RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (blue leads)
ST-U91  1000fi universal-mount RTD @32°F (0°C), 375 platinum cur ve (green leads)
  OPTIONS
  B WEL-B brass well included
  O OSAB Outside weathershield, gasket, and bracket for wall mount included
QD
¼  Nylon insulated quick disconnect 1/4"
S WEL-S 304 stainless steel well included
X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AW G
XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable
XCP25 25' Non-shielded plenum cable
XD Dual sensors in one probe
XG Greenfield fitting (factory installed)
XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 108"
XL2 in Custom length insertion probe, 2"(5.08 cm)
XL9 Custom length insertion probe, 9"(22.86 cm)
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F(0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, ±0.135˚F (0.075˚C)
XZ Three wire RTD connections(optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71, 
     not av ailable with XC25 & XCP25 options)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
F-1000-331 Nylon bushing for open wiring
OSAB OSA weather shield, gasket, and bracket
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298
WEL-B Brass well 1294
WEL-S 304 stainless steel well 1294

1296. fi
TEMPERATURE 1230fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD Type 81, 85
±0.27°F (0.15°C)
Type 91 ±0.54°F (0.30°C)
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <0.09°F (0.05°C) over 5 years
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature by 1°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 81
100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Enclosure Metal handy box
Mounting Directly to duct with back box
Wiring Terminations 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG prestripped
pigtails, Type 81 sensor has 18" leads
Approvals
CE
Weight 12"
0.5 lb (0.23 kg)
18" 0.6 lb (0.3 kg)
24" 0.7 lb (0.32 kg)
36" 0.8 lb (0.37 kg)
Warranty Lifetime
RIGID AVERAGING THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR
ST-FZR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Precon ST-FZR* Series Rigid Averaging Thermistor and RTD Sensor provides precision remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation
. The active sensing
elements are constructed of highly stable precision thermistor materials or platinum RTDs
.
The sensing elements are sealed in a 304 stainless steel probe attached to a standard handy bo
x with mounting
bracket attached.
FEATURES
• Lifetime warranty
• ±0.36°F (±0.2°C) accuracy
• Wide selection of thermistor curves
• Four lengths to fit to most duct sizes
• Easy to mount to duct wall
• Four sensing elements in a series-parallel arrangement
• Rigid sensor
TM
APPLICATION
The ST-FZR* Series is designed for direct mounting to sheet
metal for average duct temperature sensing. The sensors
contain four sensing elements. The thermistors are configured
in a series/parallel method, which creates an end result of total average resistance, equal to the same span as a standard thermistor, with a temperature range of 32° to 160°F (0° to 71°C)
.
OPTIONS
• W
• 25' lead length
SPECIFICATIONS
ST-FZR Rigid Averaging Sensor

1297. fi 1231TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supports typically not required
356-090
Swivel Flange Bracket
for angle mounting
as needed
Vinyl Grommet
Mounting T-Bar
4.0
(10.2)
in
(cm)
0.25
(0.64)
1.70
(4.3)
3.88
(9.89)
L
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
RIGID AVERAGING THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR
ST-FZR SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: ST-FZR3-12 10,000 Ω Type III av eraging thermistor sensor with 12" (7.62m) probe
and four sensing elements
ST-FZR3 12
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-FZR3 10,000Ω av eraging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III (gray leads)
ST-FZR21 2252Ω av eraging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads)
ST-FZR22 3000Ω av eraging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)
ST-FZR24 10,000Ω av eraging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C) Type II (yellow leads)
ST-FZR27 100,000Ω av eraging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (gray leads)
ST-FZR42 20,000Ω av eraging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads)
ST-FZR81 100Ω Room RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads)
ST-FZR85 1000Ω Room RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (blue leads)
ST-FZR91 1000Ω Room RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum cur ve (green leads)
INSERTION LENGTH
12 12'' length (30.48 cm)
18 18'' length (45.72 cm)
24 24'' length (60.96 cm)
36
36'' length (91.44 cm)
QD¼ Nylon insulated quick disconnect ¼"
X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AW G
XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG jacketed cable
XCO ½" LB condulet fitting
XCP25 25' (7.6m) non-shielded 22AWG plenum cable
XLT Liquid-tight fitting (factory installed)
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F(0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)
XNB ½'' MNPT brass close nipple
XNP ½'' MNPT plastic close nipple
XW W eather resistant housing
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
356-090 Swivel flange bracket
T81PNR Series Temperature transmitter for type 81, 385 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted 1288
T81U Series Temperature transmitter for type 81, 385 platinum curve sensor, track mounted 1281
T85PNR Series Temperature transmitter for type 85, 385 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted 1288
T85U Series Temperature transmitter for type 85, 385 platinum curve sensor, track mounted 1279
T90PNR Series Temperature transmitter for type 91, 375 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted 1288
T91U Series Temperature transmitter for type 91, 375 platinum curve sensor, track mounted 1277
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1298. fi
TEMPERATURE 1232fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ST-AV91R-18
Accuracy ±0.27°F (±0.15°C)
Sensor Type
Type 81 100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range -50° to 275°F (-45° to 135°C)
Sensor Length 12" (30.5 cm), 18" (45.7 cm), 24" (61
cm), 36" (91.4 cm)
Sensitivity
Type 81 0.21Ω/°F @ 32°F (0°C)
Type 85, 91 2.1Ω/°F @ 32°F (0°C)
Materials Of Construction
Element Casing 0.188" (4.8 mm) Brass
Enclosure Metal, weather-resistant
Dimensions Element diameter 0.188" (4.8 mm)
Wiring Terminations 22 AWG Teflon insulated, white/red
Weight
12" 1.2 lb (0.54 Kg)
18" 1.4 lb (0.63 Kg)
24" 1.8 lb (0.82 Kg)
36" 2.1 lb (0.95 Kg)
Warranty 3 years
PLATINUM CURVE RIGID AVERAGING SENSORS
ST-AV81R, ST-AV85R, ST-AV91R
DESCRIPTION
The Minco Continuous-resistance element ST-AV*R Platinum Curve Rigid Averaging Sensors provide accurate sensing of duct temperatures when a small, inaccessible area must be covered
. They average temperatures over their entire
length and terminate in a weather-resistant housing. They
are available in 12", 18", 24", and 36" (30.5, 45.7, 61, and
91.4 cm) lengths. The sensor uses an element that closely
matches platinum resistance/temperature characteristics over the specified range
. It is available in 100Ω and 1000Ω 385
curve and 1000Ω 375 curve. The sensors have a brass case
that is rigid for easy single-point mounting.
FEATURES
• Contin •
Rigid sensor
• 12", 18", 24", 36" (30.5, 45.7, 61, and 91.4 cm) lengths
• 100Ω and 1000Ω 385 curve
• Weather-resistant box
APPLICATION
• Small ducts without access
• Mixed air chambers
• Hot/Cold deck discharge
• Face/Bypass discharge
• Unit vents
SPECIFICATIONS
4.5
(11.43)
1/2"
NPT
2.0
(5.08)
4.5
(11.43)
in
(cm)
1.38
(3.49)
0.188
(4.8 mm)
12 (30.5)
18 (45.7)
24 (61.0)
36 (91.4)
0.25
(0.64)
2.75
(6.99)
2.0
(5.08)
Brass Averaging
Probe
0.25
(0.635)
DIMENSIONS

1299. fi 1233TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supports typically
not required
Transmitter can be mounted
in the electrical box.
356-090
Swivel Flange Bracket
for angle mounting
as needed
(white)
(red)
WIRING DIMENSIONS
PLATINUM CURVE RIGID AVERAGING SENSORS
ST-AV81R, ST-AV85R, ST-AV91R
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-AV81R 100fi 385 rigid av eraging duct probe
ST-AV85R 1000fi 385 rigid av eraging duct probe
ST-AV91R 1000fi 375 rigid av eraging duct probe
INSERTION LENGTH
12 12" length
18 18" length
24 24" length
36 36" length
WIRING OPTIONS
XZ 3 wire (ST-AV81R only)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
356-090 Swivel flange bracket
T81PNR Series Temperature transmitter for type 81, 385 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted 1288
T81U Series Temperature transmitter for type 81, 385 platinum curve sensor, track mounted 1281
T85PNR Series Temperature transmitter for type 85, 385 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted 1288
T85U Series Temperature transmitter for type 85, 385 platinum curve sensor, track mounted 1279
T90PNR Series Temperature transmitter for type 91, 375 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted 1288
T91U Series Temperature transmitter for type 91, 375 platinum curve sensor, track mounted 1277

1300. fi
TEMPERATURE 1234fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
Sensor Type 2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
Temperature Range
Thermistor/RTD -40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Stability 0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature by 1°C)
Temperature Coefficient
Negative temperature coefficient
Mounting Directly to duct with back box, clips
available for serpentine mounting
Wiring Terminations 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG prestripped
pigtails
Approvals CE
Weight 8'
1.25 lb (0.6 kg)
12' 1.5 lb (0.7 kg)
25' 2.3 lb (1.04 kg)
Warranty Lifetime
AVERAGING THERMISTOR SENSORS
ST-FZ* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Precon ST-FZ Series Averaging Thermistor Sensor provides precision remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation
. The active sensing elements are highly
stable precision thermistor material accurate to within ±0
.36°F (0.2°C).
The sensing elements are sealed in a 3/16" (0.48 cm) soft-
drawn copper coiled tube, attached to a standard handibox with mounting bracket attached
.
FEATURES
• Lif •
±0.36°F (0.2°C) accuracy
• Wide selection of thermistor curves
• Adaptable to most duct sizes
• Easy to mount to duct wall
• 3/16" (0.48 cm) soft copper sensor
• Copper facilitates quick average temperature response
TM
APPLICATION
The Model ST-FZ* is designed for direct mounting to sheet metal for average duct temperature sensing
. The sensor is
multi-point sensitive through the length of the temperature conductive tubing
.The 8' (2.4 m) and 12.5' (3.8 m) models
contain four sensing elements and the 25' (7.6 m) model has
nine sensing elements. The thermistors are configured in a
series/parallel method which creates an end result of total average resistance, equal to the same span as a standard thermistor, with a temperature range of 32° to 160°F (0° to 71°C)
.
OPTIONS
• 8' (2.4m) long element for very small ducts
• 12.5' (3.8m) long element for small ducts
• 25' (7.6m) long element for larger ducts
• Weather resistant handy box
SPECIFICATIONS
ST-FZ*

1301. fi 1235TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
CC-1G-K
Capillary
Supports
Drill a 5/8" (1.6 cm) hole for probe insertion and serpentine
the sensor across the duct, turning at each end using the
Model M-648 end clip and Model M-633 mid-duct support.
Avoid kinking the tube as this could cause a short circuit.
Using the provided #6 screws, secure the box to the duct
either with the mounting ears or through the box holes.
5/8" (1.6 cm) hole
2.25
(5.72)
8, 12.5, or 25'
(2.44, 3.81, or 7.62m)
4.25
(10.80)
3/16" (0.47) Tubing
in
(cm)
Front View Side View
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
AVERAGING THERMISTOR SENSORS
ST-FZ* SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: ST-FZ3-25 10,000 Ω Type III av eraging thermistor sensor with 25' (7.62m) probe
and nine sensing elements
ST-FZ3 25
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-FZ3 10,000Ω av eraging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III (gray leads)
ST-FZ21 2252Ω av eraging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads)
ST-FZ22 3000Ω av eraging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)
ST-FZ24 10,000Ω av eraging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C) Type II (yellow leads)
ST-FZ27 100,000Ω av eraging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (gray leads)
ST-FZ42 20,000Ω av eraging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads)
SENSING ELEMENT
8 8' (2.44m) probe length, four elements total
12 12.5' (3.81m) probe length, four elements total
25 25' (7.62m) probe length, nine elements total
QD¼ Nylon insulated quick disconnect ¼"
X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AW G
XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG jacketed cable
XCO ½" LB condulet fitting
XCP25 25' (7.6m) non-shielded 22AWG plenum cable
XLT Liquid-tight fitting (factory installed)
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F(0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)
XNB ½'' MNPT brass close nipple
XNP ½'' MNPT plastic close nipple
XW W eather resistant housing
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
CC-1G-K Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip 1391
M-633 Copper-plated capillary mounting mid-duct support 908
M-648-K Copper-clad capillary mounting clip 1391
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1302. fi
TEMPERATURE 1236fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
ST-AV81H
ST-AV81H12
ST-AV81H50
ST-AV85H
ST-AV85H12
ST-AV85H50
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-AV81H Example: ST-AV81H 100fi 385 platinum averaging duct
sensor with 24' (7.3m) element
XZ Three-wire option (100fi sensor only; Type 81)
100fi av eraging duct sensor 24' (7.3m), 385 platinum curve
100fi av eraging duct sensor 12' (3.7m), 385 platinum curve
100fi av eraging duct sensor 50' (15.2m), 385 platinum curve
1000fi av eraging sensor 24' (7.3m), 385 platinum curve
1000fi av eraging sensor 12' (3.7m), 385 platinum curve
1000fi av eraging sensor 50' (15.2m), 385 platinum curve
Accuracy ±0.27°F (±0.15°C)
Sensor Type
Type 81 100Ω ±0.25% @ 32°F (0°C)
Type 85 1000Ω ±0.25% @ 32°F (0°C)
Temperature Range -40° to 240°F (-40° to 115°C)
Sensitivity
Type 81 0.217Ω/°F @ 32°F (0°C)
Type 85 2.17Ω/°F @ 32°F (0°C)
Sensor Length/Weight
12 ft (3.7m); 1.3 lb (0.59 Kg)
24 ft (7.3m); 1.95 lb (0.88 Kg)
50 ft (15.24m); 3.6 lb (1.6 Kg)
Element Casing Copper 0.19" dia (0.48 cm)
Enclosure Weather resistant
Wiring Terminations 22 AWG, Teflon insulated
Warranty 3 years
DESCRIPTION
The Minco continuous-resistance element 100 Ω and
1000Ω Platinum Curve Averaging RTD Sensors provide
accurate sensing of duct temperatures when a large area
must be covered
. They average temperatures over their entire
length and terminate in a weather resistant housing.The
averaging sensors use elements that closely match platinum resistance/temperature characteristics over the specified range
.The sensors have copper cases that are bendable to
a radius of 4" (10.2 cm), and they can crisscross a duct or
plenum to average out temperature stratification.
FEATURES
• Contin •
Flexible copper probe
• 12' (3.7m), 24' (7.3 m) or 50' (15.2 m) lengths
• Weather resistant box
• 100 or 1,000 ohm 385 sensor
TYPICAL APPLICATION
100 & 1000 OHM PLATINUM CURVE AVERAGING SENSORS
ST-AV81H, ST-AV85H
SPECIFICATIONS
CC-1G-K
ST-AV85H
CC-1G-K
Capillary
Mounting Clip
Transmitter can be mounted
in the electrical box.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
CC-1G-K Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip 1391
M-648-K Copper-clad capillary mounting clip 1391
T81PNR Series Temperature transmitter for type 81, 385 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted 1288
T81U Series Temperature transmitter for type 81, 385 platinum curve sensor, track mounted 1281
T85PNR Series Temperature transmitter for type 85, 385 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted 1288
T85U Series Temperature transmitter for type 85, 385 platinum curve sensor, track mounted 1279

1303. fi 1237TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
CC-1G-K
Capillary
Mounting Clip
Transmitter can be mounted
in the electrical box.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Accuracy ±0.54°F (±0.30°C)
Sensor Type 1000Ω ±0.25% @ 32°F (0°C)
Temperature Range -40° to 240°F (-40° to 115°C)
Temperature Coefficient
0.00375Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve
Sensitivity 2.1Ω/°F @ 32°F (0°C)
Operating Temperature -40° to 240°F (-40° to 115°C)
Element Casing Copper 0.19" dia. (0.48 cm)
Sensor Length/Weight
24 ft (7.3m); 1.95 lb (0.88 Kg)
12 ft (3.7m); 1.31 lb (0.59 Kg)
50 ft (15.2m); 3.6 lb (1.63 Kg)
Enclosure Metal, weather resistant
Warranty 3 years
1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM AVERAGING SENSORS
ST-AV91H
DESCRIPTION
The Minco continuous resistance element ST-AV91H 1000Ω 375 Platinum Averaging RTD Sensors provide accurate sensing of duct temperatures when a large area must be covered
. Temperatures are averaged over the entire
length and terminate in a weather resistant housing. The
ST-AV91H uses an element that closely matches platinum resistance/temperature characteristics over the specified range
. The sensors have a copper case that is bendable to a
radius of 4" (10.2 cm). They can crisscross a duct or plenum
to average out temperature stratification.
FEATURES
• Contin •
Flexible copper probe
• 12' (3.7m), 24' (7.3 m) or 50' (15.2 m) lengths
• Weather resistant box
• 1,000 ohm 375 sensor
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST
-AV91H-12
Platinum averaging duct sensor 12' (3.7m)
ST
-AV91H50
Platinum averaging duct sensor 50' (15.2m)
ST-AV91H Platinum averaging duct sensor 24' (7.3m)
CC-1G-K
ST-AV91H
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
CC-1G-K Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip 1391
M-648-K Copper-clad capillary mounting clip 1391
T90PNR Series Temperature transmitter for type 91, 375 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted 1288
T91U Series Temperature transmitter for type 91, 375 platinum curve sensor, track mounted 1277

1304. fi
TEMPERATURE 1238fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD ±0.5°F (0.4°C)
Sensor Type
Thermistor 10 kΩ, 20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD 100Ω, 1000Ω 385 curve
Temperature Range -40° to 275°F (-40° to 135°C)
Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <±0.1°C drift
Heat Dissipation Thermistor, 3 mW/°C
(power needed to raise the temperature by 1°C)
Enclosure
Galvanized metal box, plastic and
NEMA4X available
Wiring Terminations 10" of 22 AWG wire or terminal strip
Approvals CE
Weight 1.2 lb (0.54 kg)
Warranty 5 years
in
(cm)
A/*-A-X-60
Averaging
0.90
(2.3)
4.0
(10.2)
0.125 (0.3)
Foam
Insulation
D 8" (20.3 cm)
A12 12' (3.6 m)
A24 24' (7.3 m)
0.76 (1.9)
1.70
(4.3)
DESCRIPTION
The ACI Series Averaging Thermistor and RTD Sensors
are designed specifically for HVAC system temperature
control
. The averaging sensors come in thermistor and RTD
sensor curves compatible with most BAS systems available today
. Averaging sensors come with a foambacked handy box
and in 12' (3.7m) or 24' (7.3) lengths.
The
ACI Averaging Sensor should be mounted across a
duct in a serpentine fashion with bends in a smooth ark using an M-648-K or CC-1G-K clip
. The RTD probe is sensitive
for the entire length, while the thermistor is sensitive at nine evenly spaced sensor locations
. Use standard metal screws
to secure to the duct.
DIMENSIONS
AVERAGING TEMPERATURE SENSORS
ACI AVERAGING SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
A/AN-A-12-GD
FEATURES
• Lengths of 12' (3.7 m) or 24' (7.3 m)
• Two-year warranty
• Bendable copper
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A/AN-A-12-GD Averaging sensor with 12' (3.6 m) length, 10 kΩ thermistor, Type 3 (ACI/AN-A12)
A/CP-A-12-GD Averaging sensor with 12' (3.6 m) length, 10 kΩ thermistor, Type 2 (ACI/CP-A12)
A/20K-A-12-GD Averaging sensor with 12' (3.6 m) length, 10 kΩ thermistor, Type 42 (ACI/20K-A12)
A/100-2W-A-12-GD Averaging sensor with 12' (3.6 m) length, 1 kΩ RTD 385 curve, two-wire (ACI/100-2-A12)
A/1K-2W-A-12-GD Averaging sensor with 12" (3.6 m) length, 1 kΩ RTD 385 curve, two-wire (ACI/1000-2-A12)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
CC-1G-K Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip 1391
T85PNR Series Temperature transmitter for type 85, 385 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted 1288
T85U Series Temperature transmitter for type 85, 385 platinum curve sensor, track mounted 1279
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1305. fi 1239TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD ±0.55°F (±0.30°C)
Sensor Type
Thermistor 10 kΩ Type II & III
RTD 100Ω,1000Ω, 385 curve; 1000Ω,
375 curve
Temperature Range
32° to 158°F (-0° to 70°C°)
Stability < 0.036°F (0.02°C) per year, 0.14°C with
6,000 continuous hours at 400°C
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power need to raise the
temperature 1°C), 0.4°C/mW at 0°C
Enclosure
NB No box with 18" leads
JB 2" x 4" J-box with 1/2" knockouts
BB BAPI Box IP66 rated, NEMA 4 UV-resistant
polycarbonate
BB2 BAPI Box 2 IP66 rated, NEMA 4 UV-resistant
polycarbonate
BB4 BAPI Box 4 IP44 Nylon & Plastic
WP NEMA 3R cast aluminum
Mounting Directly to Duct, with clips to mount coil
Wiring Terminations
22 AWG wire, etched teflon leads 
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight 1 to 2 lbs (Varies with probe length)
Warranty Lifetime
AVERAGING THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
BA/ AVERAGING SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI BA Series Averaging Thermistor and RTD Sensors are availible in a variety of easy to mount installation types
. They come in thermistor and RTD sensors and
feature etched Teflon leadwires. Flexible probes are made
of bendable aluminum while the rigid probes are made of stainless steel
.
FEATURES
• Fle
(7.3m)
• Several enclosure styles with mounting tabs for easy
installation
• Limited lifetime warranty
SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS
BA/10K2-A8-BB4
BA/10K2-A8-JB
BA/10K2-A8-NB
BA/10K2-A8-BB
BA/10K2-A8-BB2
BA10K2-A8-BB4

1306. fi
TEMPERATURE 1240fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: BA/10K3-A8-J B BAPI 8 " averaging 10,000fi
therm istor sensor with JB box
BA/ 10K3 A8 JB
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BA/ Probe temperature sensor
REQUIRED SENSOR TYPE
10K2 10,000
fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type 2
10K3 10,000
fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type 3
100 100
fi RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
1K 1000
fi RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
1K375 1000
fi RTD @32°F (0°C), 375 curve
REQUIRED PROBE TYPE AND LENGTH
A8 Flexible av eraging probe 8' long
A12 Flexible av eraging probe 12' long
A24 Flexible av eraging probe 24' long
RA12 Rigid av eraging probe 12" long
RA2 Rigid av eraging probe 24" long
RA4 Rigid av eraging probe 48" long
REQUIRED MOUNTING ENCLOSURE (JB is standard)
NB No box with 18" leads
JB 2" x 4" J-box with 1/2" knockouts
BB NEMA 4 weatherproof, UV resistant plastic
BB2 IP66 UV resistant polycarbonate enclosure
BB4 IP66 UV resistant polycarbonate enclosure
WP NEMA 3R weatherproof enclosure


RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
CC-1G-K Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip 1391
M-648-K Copper-clad capillary mounting clip 1391
AVERAGING THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
BA/ AVERAGING SERIES
BA/10K2-A8-JB
BA/10K2-A8-NB
BA/10K2-A8-WP

1307. fi 1241TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD
Platinum ±0.1%
Nickel/Balco ±0.5°F (0.3°C)
Sensor Type
Thermistor 2252Ω, 3000Ω, 10,000Ω Type II & III,
20,000Ω, 100,000Ω
100Ω Platinum 385 curve, 1,000Ω
Platinum 385 curve
RTD 100 Platinum 385 curve, 1,000 Platinum
385 curve, 1,000 Nickel, 1,000 Balco
Element Casing Plenum rated cable or Metallic Armored
cable
Sensor Length/Weight Plenum
6 ft (1.8 m); 1.0 lb (0.45 Kg)
12 ft (3.6 m); 1.05 lb (0.48 Kg)
24 ft (7.2 m); 1.15 lb (0.51 Kg)
Armored 6 ft (1.8 m); 1.23 lb (0.56 Kg)
12 ft (3.6 m); 1.45 lb (0.66 Kg)
24 ft (7.2 m); 1.91 lb (0.86 Kg)
Operating Temperature -40° to 200°F (-40° to 93°C)
Enclosure Metal, NEMA 4X
Wiring Terminations 5" (15.2 cm) of 22 AWG pigtails
Approvals CE, RoHs
Warranty 5 years
CC-1G-K
Capillary
Mounting Clip
Sensor can be mounted
in the electrical box.
DESCRIPTION
The Mamac Systems Model TE707C Flexible Plenum
and Armored Averaging Temperature Sensors provides
accurate temperature sensing for ducts when large areas
must be covered in building automation systems and
mechanical equipment room instrumentation
.The flexible
sensors are easy to install and are moisture sealed. The
sensors can come in lengths of 6', 12' or 24'.
FEA
TURES
•
Plenum rated or Metallic Armored cable
• Weather proof box
• Variety of thermistors and RTDs
• 6' (1.8m), 12' (3.6m) and 24' (7.2m) lengths
DIMENSIONS
FLEXIBLE PLENUM AND ARMORED AVERAGING THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
TE707C SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
TE-707C
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
CC-1G-K Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip 1391
M-648-K Copper-clad capillary mounting clip 1391
TE707C 12
Example: TE707C-12-A-1 10,000fi Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C);
T ype III (green leads), 6 foot (1.8 m), plenum rated cable.

MODEL DESCRIPTION
TE707C Flexible av eraging sensor with NEMA 4X enclosure
OPTIONS
1 100fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C); 385 Platinum curve (yellow leads)
3 1,000fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C); 385 Platinum cur ve (red leads)
4 1,000fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C); Nickel (voilet leads)
5 1,000fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C); Balco (brown leads)
7 10,000fi Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C); Type III (green leads)
10 3,000fi Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C); (black leads)
12 10,000fi Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C); Type II (green & red leads)
15 100,000fi Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C); (orange & black leads)
17 20,000fi Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C); (green & blue leads)
18 2,252fi Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C); (red & yellow leads)
A 6 foot (1.8 m)
B 12 foot (3.6 m)
C 24 foot (7.2 m)
1 Plenum rated cable
2 Armorer cable
A 1

1308. fi
TEMPERATURE 1242fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD
Platinum ±0.54°F (0.3°C)
Nickel ±0.72°F (0.4°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2252Ω, 3000Ω, 10,000Ω Type II &
III, 20,000Ω
100Ω Platinum 385 curve, 1,000Ω
Platinum 385 curve, 1,000Ω Nickel,
1,000Ω Balco
Sensor Length/ Weight 6 ft (1.8 m); 0.5 lb (0.22 Kg)
12 ft (3.6 m); 0.61 lb (0.27 Kg)
20 ft (6.1 m); 0.71 lb (0.32 Kg)
24 ft (7.2 m); 0.81 lb (0.36 Kg)
Operating Temperature -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
Enclosure Metal, NEMA 4X
Approvals CE, RoHs
Warranty 1 year
FLEXIBLE AVERAGING THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
TE200FDC SERIES
CC-1G-K
Capillary
Mounting Clip
Sensor can be mounted
in the electrical box.
DESCRIPTION
The Greystone Energy Systems TE200FDC Series
Flexible Averaging Thermistor and RTD Sensor provides
accurate temperature sensing for ducts when large areas
must be covered in building automation systems and
mechanical equipment room instrumentation
.The flexible
sensors are easy to install and are moisture sealed. The
sensors can come in lengths of 6', 12', 20' or 24'.
FEATURES
• Plen •
Weather proof box
• Variety of thermistors and RTDs
• 6' (1.8m), 12' (3.6m), 20' (6.1m) and 24' (7.2m) lengths
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
TE200FDC
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
CC-1G-K Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip 1391
M-648-K Copper-clad capillary mounting clip 1391
MODEL DESCRIPTION TE200FDC Flexible av eraging sensor with NEMA 3R enclosure
OPTIONS
2 100fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C); 385 Platinum cur ve (red, red, white leads)
12 1,000fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C); 385 Platinum cur ve (gray leads)
13 1,000fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C); Nickel (gra y leads)
5 1,000fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C); Balco (???? leads)
7 10,000fi Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C); Type III (light gray leads)
6 3,000fi Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C); (light blue leads)
24 10,000fi Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C); Type II (yellow leads)
20 20,000fi Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C); (green leads)
8 2,252fi Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C); (gray leads)
A 6 foot (1.8 m)
B 12 foot (3.6 m)
C 20 foot (6.1 m)
D 24 foot (7.2 m)

TE200FDC 12
Example: TE200FDC-12-A 1,000fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C); 385 platinum cur ve (gray leads), 6 foot (1.8 m).

A

1309. fi 1243TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Ø 0.375
2.5 REFV aries by model
¾ - 14 NPSM (Z)
Supply Voltage 24V VAC/VDC
Accuracy ±0.9°F (±0.5°C)
Sensor Casing PVC coated flexible galvanized steel
Sensor Type 1000Ω RTD Pt 385 curve
Sensor Length 10' (3.1 m), 24' (7.3 m), 50' (15.2 m)
Alarm Contacts 0.3 A at 125 VAC, Max. Voltage 125
VAC, or
1A at 30 VDC, Max. Voltage 110 VDC
Alarm Relay Setpoint 30° to 44°F (-1.1° to 6.7°C)
Maximum Output
Impedance 635Ω
Optional Relay Output Rating
25 A at 277 VAC
25 A at 120 VAC
1 HP at 120 VAC
2 HP at 277 VAC
Enclosure Metal handy box, 2" x 4", 4", x 4", or
2" x 4" weather resistant
Wiring Terminations AWG 18 leadwires, 3/4-14 NPSM (Z)
electrical connection
Warranty 3 years
COMBINATION AVERAGING SENSOR/FREEZESTAT
AS103759
DESCRIPTION
The Minco AS103759 Chill Out™ combination sensor is a solid state low temperature cutout and duct averaging sensor all within one product
. The AS103759 Series sensor provides
a digital alarm contact and a 1000Ω 385 platinum resistance
curve for accurate monitoring of your duct conditions. The
solid state design and the 3/8" tubing eliminate concerns of gas leaks or kinking the capillary during installation
. The
AS103759 Series Sensor features a ultra flexible plenum-
rated PVC coated galvanized steel armor sensor case. Switch
points are f
actory set at 38°F (3
.3°C) but are easliy field
adjustable. Upon a power loss the AS103759 Series Sensor
reverts to its normal state.
FEATURES
• Averaging sensor and freeze stat in one sensor
• Solid state technology
• Mounts in any direction
• Ultra flexible
• Power loss detection
• Field adjustable
• Digital alarms signal
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
AS103759
WIRING
CONTACT “1”
ALARM OUTPUT [ORANGE]
(NO CONTACT, CLOSES WHEN POWER APPLIED)
ALARM OUTPUT [BLUE]
(NC CONTACT, OPENS WHEN POWER APPLIED)
24VAC (COM) [BLACK]
24VAC [WHITE]
TEMPERATURE SENSOR [RED]
TEMPERATURE SENSOR [RED]
RESET SWITCH (OPTIONAL)
LED
SET POINT ADJUSTMENT
CONTACT “2, 3”
ALARM OUTPUT, NO [ORANGE]
24VAC (H) [WHITE]
24VAC (N) [BLACK]
TEMPERATURE SENSOR [RED]
TEMPERATURE SENSOR [RED]
ALARM OUTPUT, NC [BLUE]
RESET SWITCH
(OPTIONAL)
SET POINT ADJUSTMENT
LED
0
2468
24 VAC
or
24 VDC
110
VAC
NEUTRAL
110 VAC OUTPUT (H)
110 VAC OUTPUT
(N)
NEUTRAL
HOT
HOT
HOT

1310. fi
TEMPERATURE 1244fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
COMBINATION AVERAGING SENSOR/FREEZESTAT
AS103759
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AS103759PF Chill Out™ combination av earging sensor (1000 ohm 385 RTD) and freeze stat
RELAY TYPE
N Non-latching relay (auto reset)
L Latching relay (manual reset)
E Latching relay (remote reset)
ELEMENT LENGTH
10 10’ (3.1m)
24 24’ (7.3m)
50 50’ (15.2m)
CONTACT RATING
1 0.3 A relay rating
2 25 A VAC powered controller/coil
3 25 A VDC powered controller/coil
ENCLOSURE STYLE
N No enclosure
S Standard handy box (2" x 4")
L Dougle gang handy box (4" x 4")
W W eather resistant utility box (2" x 4")
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP
A-1.2
Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
TE-6001-8 Duct temperature element holder without box
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

1311. fi 1245TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.50°F (0.28°C)
RTD ±0.60°F (0.33°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 81
100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range
Thermistor/RTD -40 to 221°F (-40 to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD 100% (no drift platinum)
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature 1°C)
Mounting Directly to wall or customer supplied
enclosure using customer-supplied clips
Wiring Terminations
8', 24 AWG wire leads, type 81
sensors have 18" leads
Approvals CE
Weight
KTM 0.01 lb (0.005 Kg)
KTMR 0.05 lb (0.02 Kg)
Warranty 3 years
ENCAPSULATED THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR
KTM*, KTMR* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KTM, KTMR Series Thermistor and RTD encapsulated sensors provide remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation
. The active sensing element is a highly
stable thermistor material or platinum RTD.
The sensor is encapsulated with a lo
w mass, high
conductivity compound for good heat transfer characteristics
.
It is enclosed in a tough, miniature cylinder
, 0
.17" (0.43 cm) in
diameter, which is small enough to be installed in most HVAC thermostat enclosures
.
FEATURES
• Three-y •
Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Adaptable miniature sensor
• High heat dissipation constant
• Easy to mount with clips
• Pre-aged, highly stable thermistor material
APPLICATION
KTM* The KTM* Series Encapsulated Sensor (white) is intended for indoor use only, in areas not subject to moisture or condensation
. The sensor may be installed under the cover
of an existing pneumatic thermostat. Caution should be
e
xercised when applying the sensor to existing electric
thermostats
. Heat is often generated by anticipators or other
electronics that will affect the sensor reading. The sensor
operating range is 35° to 140°F (2° to 60°C). Do not use in
conditions belo
w 35°F (2°C) or where condensation could
occur
.
KTM*R The
KTM*R Series Rugged Encapsulated Sensor (red)
is suitable for temperature extremes and is immune to the effects of moisture and condensation
. Precon uses a three-
stage
, rugged coating process to moistureproof any sensor
which is to be used below ambient dewpoint
. The sensor
operating range is -30° to 230°F (-34° to 110°C). Vibration or
wire stress below 32°F (0°C) can cause the rugged coating to crack
.
OPTIONS
• 25' (7.6m) of 24 AWG zipcord
• Matched sensor pairs
• Rugged sensor coating
SPECIFICATIONS
KTM*
KTM*R

1312. fi
TEMPERATURE 1246fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Vents
Customer-Supplied
Enclosure
Aluminum Mounting
Clip Accessory PN-46
Mounting
Secure to enclosure or wall using cable ties, clips, or brackets. To obtain
optimum performance, the sensor enclosure/assembly must be highly
conductive. Any sensor element surrounded by insulating media will not
perform properly at all temperatures or with the proper temperature
response times. An accurate room sensor must have good ventilation and a
high thermal-conducting metal which is in direct contact with the sensor.
The enclosure must be insulated from the building mounting surface to limit
wall temperature influence on the sensor.
Rear View
0.17
(0.43)
0.5
(1.27)
24 AWG, 8' (2.4m) zipcord lead wire
0.18
(0.46)
0.5
(1.27)
3.5
(8.89)
24 AWG, 8' (2.4m) zipcord lead wire
R Option Rugged Coating
KTM* KTMR*
in
(cm)
MOUNTING
DIMENSIONS
ENCAPSULATED THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR
KTM*, KTMR* SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
KTM3 R X25 Example: KTM3R-X25 10,000fi T ype III thermistor with 3.5" rugged coating
and 25' (7.6m) cable length
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KTM3 10,000fi encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype III (gray leads)
KTM21 2252fi encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads)
KTM22 3000fi encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)
KTM24 10,000fi encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (yellow leads)
KTM27 100,000fi encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype II (gray leads)
KTM42 20,000fi encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads)
KTM81 100fi encapsulated RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (yellow leads)
KTM85 1000fi encapsulated RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (blue leads)
KTM91 1000fi encapsulated RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum cur ve (green leads)
OPTIONS
R Rugged (3.5" moistureproof coating; adding a # following the R extends the coating in feet)
QD
¼ Nylon insulated quick disconnect
X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AW G
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F (0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F (0°C/25°C/70°C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XZ Three wire RTD connections (Optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71)
RELA TED PRODUCTS PAGE
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277

1313. fi 1247TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.28°C)
RTD
Type 63 ±0.72°F (0.40°C)
Type 71 ±0.054°F (0.03°C)
Type 81, 85 ±0.27°F (0.15°C)
Type 91 ±0.54°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type
Thermistor 2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD
Type 63
Type 71, 81 100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient
Thermistor Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability
Thermistor 0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD 100% (no drift platinum)
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature 1°C)
Mounting Directly to wall or customer supplied
enclosure using customer-supplied clips
Wiring Terminations
8', 24 AWG wire leads, type 71 & 81
sensors have 18" leads
Approvals CE
Weight
ST-R* 0.01 lb (0.005 Kg)
ST-R*R 0.05 lb (0.02 Kg)
Warranty Lifetime
ENCAPSULATED THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-R*, ST-R*R SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The PreCon ST-R*, ST-R*R Thermistor and RTD encapsulated Sensors provide precision remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation
. The active
sensing element is a highly stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTD
.
The sensor is encapsulated with a lo
w mass, high
conductivity compound for good heat transfer characteristics
.
It is enclosed in a tough, miniature cylinder
, 0
.17" in (0.43 cm)
diameter, which is small enough to be installed in most HVAC thermostat enclosures
.
FEATURES
• Lif •
Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Adaptable miniature sensor
• High heat dissipation constant
• Easy to mount with clips
• Pre-aged, highly stable thermistor material
TM
APPLICATION
ST-R*
The Model ST-R* Encapsulated Thermistor Sensor (white) is
intended for indoor use only, in areas not subject to moisture
or condensation
. The sensor may be installed under the
cover of an existing pneumatic thermostat. Caution should
be e
xercised when applying the sensor to existing electric
thermostats
. Heat is often generated by anticipators or other
electronics that will affect the sensor reading. The sensor
operating range is 35° to 140°F (2° to 60°C). Do not use in
conditions belo
w 35°F (2°C) or where condensation could
occur
.
ST-R*R
The Model ST-R*R Ruggedized Encapsulated Thermistor Sensor (red) is suitable for temperature extremes and is immune to the effects of moisture and condensation
.
PreCon
uses a three-stage, ruggedized coating process to
moisture proof any sensor which is to be used below ambient dewpoint. The sensor operating range is -30° to 230°F (-34°
to 110°C).
OPTIONS
• 25' (7.6m) of 24 AWG zipcord
• Matched sensor pairs
• Rugged sensor coating
SPECIFICATIONS
ST-R*
ST-R*R

1314. fi
TEMPERATURE 1248fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Vents
Customer-Supplied
Enclosure
Aluminum Mounting
Clip Accessory PN-46
Mounting
Secure to enclosure or wall using cable ties, clips, or brackets. To obtain
optimum performance, the sensor enclosure/assembly must be highly
conductive. Any sensor element surrounded by insulating media will not
perform properly at all temperatures or with the proper temperature
response times. An accurate room sensor must have good ventilation and a
high thermal-conducting metal which is in direct contact with the sensor.
The enclosure must be insulated from the building mounting surface to limit
wall temperature influence on the sensor.
Rear View
0.17
(0.43)
0.5
(1.27)
24 AWG, 8' (2.4m) zipcord lead wire
0.18
(0.46)
0.5
(1.27)
3.5
(8.89)
24 AWG, 8' (2.4m) zipcord lead wire
R Option Rugged Coating
KTM
*
KTMR
*
in
(cm)
MOUNTING
DIMENSIONS
ENCAPSULATED THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-R*, ST-R*R SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
ST-R3 R X25
Example: ST-R3R-X25   10,000fi T ype III thermistor with 3.5" rugged coating
  and 25' (7.6m) cable length
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-R3 10,000fi encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype III (gray leads)
ST-R21 2252fi encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads)
ST-R22 3000fi encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)
ST-R24 10,000fi encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (yellow leads)
ST-R27 100,000fi encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), T ype II (gray leads)
ST-R42 20,000fi encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads)
ST-R63  1000fi nickel encapsulated RTD @ 70°F (21°C), (yellow leads)
ST-R71  100fi ultra high accurate encapsulated RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (blue leads)
 ST-R81  100fi encapsulated RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (yellow leads)
 ST-R85  1000fi encapsulated RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (blue leads)
 ST-R91  1000fi encapsulated RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum cur ve (green leads)
OPTIONS
R Rugged (3.5" moistureproof coating; adding a # following the R extends the coating in feet) 
QD
¼ Nylon insulated quick disconnect ¼" 
X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AW G
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F (0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F (0°C/25°C/70°C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, ±0.135˚F (0.075˚C)
XZ Three wire RTD connections (Optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277

1315. fi 1249TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD
Type 63
±0.72°F (0.40°C)
Type 81,85 ±0.27°F (0.1°C)
Type 91
±0.054°F (0.03°C)
Sensor Type
Thermistor 2.252 k
Ω, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 k
Ω, 100 kΩ
RTD
Type 63
1000Ω Nickel
Type 81 100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature
Coefficient

Thermistor Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability
Thermistor 0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <0.09°F (0.05°C) over 5 years
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature 1°C)
Mounting Directly to surface
Wiring Terminations 8', 24 AWG wire leads, type 81
sensors have 18" leads
Approvals CE
Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Warranty 3 years
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KTMP* Series Thermistor and RTD temperature
probe is designed for applications requiring a small sensor
with a fast thermal response
. Constructed with stainless
steel housing, the probe is available with a choice of several thermistor and RTD sensor curves
.
FEATURES
• Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Fast response time
• 0.19" round x 0.50" long (0.48 x 1.27 cm) housing
MINI PROBE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR
KTMP* SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KTMP3 10,000fi mini probe thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III (gray leads)
KTMP21 2252 mini probe thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III (green leads)
KTMP22 3000 mini probe thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III (bl•e leads)
KTMP24 •0,000 mini probe thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III (yello• leads)
KTMP27 •00,000 mini probe thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III (gray leads)
KTMP42 20,000 mini probe thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III (green leads)
KTMP81 •00 mini probe •T  @ 32˚F (0˚C), 3-5 Platin•m C•rve (yello• leads)
KTMP85 •000 mini probe •T  @32˚F (0˚C), 3-5 Platin•m C•rve (bl•e leads)
KTMP91 •000 mini probe •T  @ 32˚F (0˚C), 375 Platin•m C•rve (green leads)
OPTIONS
R Rugged moistureproof coating 3.5"
R# Rugged moistureproof coating. # equals number of feet of the coating
X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST cer tifcate, one reŽerence point 32‘F (0‘C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F (0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST cer tifcate, three reŽerence points 32‘F’77‘F’•5-‘F (0‘C’25‘C’70‘C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XZ Three wire RTD connections (Type 81 only)
KT-MP3 XN1 Example: KT-MP3-XN1 10,000fi mini probe sensor with NIST one reference point certificate
KTMP*
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298

1316. fi
TEMPERATURE 1250fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD
Type 63 ±0.72°F (0.40°C)
Type 81,85 ±0.27°F (0.15°C)
Type 91 ±0.05°F (0.03°C)
Sensor Type
Thermistor 2.252 kΩ, 3Ω, 10 kΩ Type II & III, 20 kΩ,
100 kΩ
RTD
Type 63 1000Ω Nickel
Type 81 100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature
Coefficient

Thermistor Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability
Thermistor 0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <0.09°F (0.05°C)over 5 years
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise the
temperature by 1°C)
Mounting Directly to surface
Wiring Terminations 24 AWG, UL low voltage to 105°C
Connections 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG
prestripped pigtails, type 71 & 81 sensors have 18" leads
Approvals
CE
Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg)
Warranty Lifetime
MINI PROBE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR
ST-MP* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Precon ST-MP* Series Thermistor and RTD
temperature probe is designed for applications requiring a
small sensor with a fast thermal response
. Constructed with
stainless steel housing, the probe is available with a choice of several thermistor and RTD sensor curves
.
FEATURES
• Lif •
Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Fast response time
• 0.19" round x 0.50" long (0.48 x 1.27 cm) housing
TM
SPECIFICATIONS
ST-MP*
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-MP3 10,000fi mini probe thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III (gray leads)
ST-MP21 2252 mini probe thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III (green leads)
ST-MP22 3000 mini probe thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III (blue leads)
ST-MP24 •0,000 mini probe thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III (yello• leads)
ST-MP27 •00,000 mini probe thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III (gray leads)
ST-MP42 20,000 mini probe thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III (green leads)
ST-MP63 •000 ni• el mini probe -TD @ 70˚F (26˚C), Type III (yello• leads)
ST-MP71 (not available in this style) 
ST-MP81 •00 mini probe -TD @ 32˚F (0˚C), 385 Platinum Curve (yello• leads)
ST-MP85 •000 mini probe -TD @32˚F (0˚C), 385 Platinum Curve (blue leads)
ST-MP91 •000 mini probe -TD @ 32˚F (0˚C), 375 Platinum Curve (green leads)
OPTIONS
R Rugged moistureproof coating 3.5"
R# Rugged moistureproof coating. # equals number of feet of the coating
X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST •er tif•ate, one re‘eren•e point 32’F (0’C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F (0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST •er tif•ate, three re‘eren•e points 32’F“77’F“•58’F (0’C“25’C“70’C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, ±0.135˚F (0.075˚C)
XZ Three wire RTD connections (Type 81 only)
ST-MP3 XN1 Example: ST-MP3-XN1 10,000fi  mini probe sensor with NIST one reference point certificate
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298

1317. fi 1251TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.50°F (0.28°C)
RTD ±0.60°F (0.33°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 81
100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD 100% (no drift platinum)
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature 1°C)
Mounting Directly to wall or customer supplied
enclosure using customer-supplied clips
Wiring Terminations
8', 24 AWG wire leads, type 81
sensors have 18" leads
Approvals CE
Weight
KTM*S 0.15 lb (0.07 Kg)
KTM*SC 0.45 lb (0.2 Kg)
Warranty 3 years
STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR
KTM*S, KTM*SC SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Stainless Steel Sheath Thermistor and RTD Sensors provide remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation
.
The activ
e sensing element is a highly stable thermistor
material or platinum RTD
. The sensing element is rugged and
sealed with a thermally conductive compound in a versatile 3" (7
.6 cm)- long stainless steel tube. The probe is waterproof,
and the sensor is ideal for use in refrigeration cases or as a strap-on sensor for pipes
.
KTM*S The
KTM*S Stainless Steel Sheath Sensors are suitable
for direct application to pipe surfaces for chilled or hot water measurement
. They are also used for freezer cases where
moisture protection is important. These rugged strap-on
sensors come with 8' (2.4m), 24-gauge zipcord leads.
KTM*SC The
KTM*SC Stainless Steel Sheath Sensors come with a
rugged, 25' (7
.6m) cable that allows for termination away from
areas of condensation. It is an ideal choice for freezer case
applications.
FEATURES
• Three-y •
Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Tip sensitive for precise temperature response
• Durable 304 stainless steel casing
• Easy to mount to wall, box, or pipe
• Waterproof probeAPPLICATION
Strap-on Applications: Where it is not practical to install immersion wells, the Stainless Steel Sheath Sensors may be strapped to the pipe
. The -C option provides a 25' (7.6m)
rugged cable that may be strapped on the outside of the pipe insulation
. Pipe strap accessory (APB-28) provides a bracket
under the insulation to hold the sensor securely in place.
SPECIFICATIONS
KTM*S
KTM*SC

1318. fi
TEMPERATURE 1252fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
0.25
(0.64)
3.0
(7.62)
Polyolefin Sheath
in
(cm)
Stainless Tube
When used as a strap-on sensor, best results are obtained when
conductive compound (TCC-12) is applied between the sensor and the pipe.
In addition, the sensor should be inserted under insulation with at least
2' (0.61m) on each side of the sensor. Adjustable pipe bracket APB-28
is available for use with this sensor.
Tie Rap or
Adjustable
Pipe Bracket
Mounting
Secure to wall or pipe using cable ties, clips, or brackets.
Wiring
Terminate with butt splices or solder connections. Wire
nuts are not recommended.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR
KTM*S, KTM*SC SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KTM3S 10,000fi stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III (gray leads)
KTM21S 2252fi stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads)
KTM22S 3000fi stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)
KTM24S 10,000fi stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (yellow leads)
KTM27S 100,000fi stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (gray leads)
KTM42S 20,000fi stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads)
KTM81S 100fi stainless steel RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (yellow leads)
KTM85S 1000fi stainless steel RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (blue leads)
KTM91S 1000fi stainless steel RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum cur ve (green leads)
OPTIONS
C 25'(7.6m) 22 AWG cable non-pleum (not av ailable with XZ option)
QD
¼ Nylon insulated quick disconnect ¼"
X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG (KTM*S only)
XCP25 25' (7.6m) Non-shielded 22AWG plenum cable (not with “c” models)
XD Dual sensors in one probe (Not with "C" models)
XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 60"
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F (0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F (0°C/25°C/70°C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XZ
Three wire RTD connections (optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71,
not av ailable with XC25 and XCP25)
KTM3S C Example: KTM3S-C 10,000fi stainless steel sheath thermistor
with 25' (7.6m) cable
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
#20 Self-vulcanizing stretch tape, 6' (1.83m) roll, 1" (2.54 cm) wide
APB-28 Adjustable pipe bracket 2"-8" diameter 1391
PN-46 Aluminum sensor holder with adhesive backing 1391
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1319. fi 1253TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD Type 63
±0.72°F (0.40°C)
Type 71 ±0.054°F (0.03°C)
Type 81, 85 ±0.27°F (0.15°C)
Type 91 ±0.54°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 63
1000Ω Nickel
Type 71, 81 100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <0.09°F (0.05°C) over 5 years
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature by 1°C)
Mounting Directly to wall or pipe using
standard clips and brackets
Wiring Terminations 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG pigtails with
prestripped ends, Type 71 & 81 sensors have 18" leads
Approvals
CE
Weight
ST-R*S 0.15 lb (0.07 Kg) with no options
ST-R*SC 0.45 lb (0.2 Kg) with no options
Warranty Lifetime
STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-R*S, ST-R*SC SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The PreCon Stainless Steel Sheath Thermistor and RTD Sensors provide precision remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation
. The active sensing element is a highly
stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTD.The
sensing element is ruggedized and sealed with a thermally conductive compound in a versatile 3" (7
.6 cm) long stainless
steel tube. The probe is waterproof, and the sensor is ideal for
use in refrigeration cases, or as a strap-on sensor for pipes.
ST
-R*S
The Model ST-R*S Stainless Sheath Sensor is suitable for direct application to pipe surfaces for chilled or hot water measurement. It is also used for freezer cases where
moisture protection is important. This rugged strap-on sensor
comes with an 8-ft (2.4m), 24-gauge zipcord lead.
ST-R*SC
The Model ST-R*SC Stainless Steel Sheath Sensor comes with a rugged 25-ft (7
.6m) cable when ordered with the "C"
option. The 25-ft (7.6m) cable allows for termination away
from areas of condensation. It is an ideal choice for freezer
case applications.
FEATURES
• Lifetime warranty
• Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Tip sensitive for precise temperature response
• Durable 304 stainless steel casing
• Easy to mount to wall, box, or pipe
• Waterproof probe
TM
APPLICATION
Strap-on Applications: Where it is not practical to install
immersion wells, the Stainless Sheath Thermistor Sensor
may be strapped to the pipe
. The "C" option provides a 25'
(7.6m) rugged cable that may be strapped on the outside of
the pipe insulation. Pipe strap accessory (APB-28) provides a
bracket to hold the sensor securely in place.
SPECIFICATIONS
ST-R*S
ST-R*SC

1320. fi
TEMPERATURE 1254fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
0.25
(0.64)
3.0
(7.62)
Polyolefin Sheath
in
(cm)
Stainless TubeWhen used as a strap-on sensor, best results are obtained when
conductive compound (TCC-12) is applied between the sensor and the pipe.
In addition, the sensor should be inserted under insulation with at least
2' (0.61m) on each side of the sensor. Adjustable pipe bracket APB-28
is available for use with this sensor.
Tie Rap or
Adjustable
Pipe Bracket
Mounting
Secure to wall or pipe using cable ties, clips, or brackets.
Wiring
Terminate with butt splices or solder connections. Wire
nuts are not recommended.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-R*S, ST-R*SC SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-R3S 10,000fi stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III (gray leads)
ST-R21S 2252fi stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (green leads)
ST-R22S 3000fi stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (blue leads)
ST-R24S 10,000fi stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (yellow leads)
ST-R27S 100,000fi stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II (gray leads)
ST-R42S 20,000fi stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV (green leads)
ST-R63S  1000fi nickel stainless steel RTD @ 70°F (21°C), (yellow leads)
ST-R71S  100fi ultra high accurate stainless steel RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (blue leads)
ST-R81S  100fi stainless steel RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (yellow leads)
ST-R85S  1000fi stainless steel RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum cur ve (blue leads)
ST-R91S  1000fi stainless steel RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum cur ve (green leads)
OPTIONS
C 25’ (7.6m) 22 AWG cable non-plenum (not available with XZ option)
QD
¼ Nylon insulated quick disconnect ¼"
X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AW G
XCP25 25' (7.6m) Non-shielded 22AWG plenum cable (not with “c” models)
XD Dual sensors in one probe (Not with "C" models)
XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 60"
XN NIST certificate of conformance
XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C)
XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F (0°C/70°C)
XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F (0°C/25°C/70°C)
XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors)
XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, ±0.135˚F (0.075˚C)
XZ
Three wire RTD connections (optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71, 
     not av ailable with XC25 and XCP25)
ST-R3S C Example: ST-R3S-C 10,000fi stainless steel sheath thermistor with 25' (7.6m) cable
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
#20 Self-vulcanizing stretch tape, 6' (1.83m) roll, 1" (2.54 cm) wide
APB-28 Adjustable pipe bracket 2"-8" diameter 1391
PN-46 Aluminum sensor holder with adhesive backing 1391
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1321. fi 1255TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD
Type 63 ±0.72°F (0.40°C)
Type 71 ±0.054°F (0.03°C)
Type 81, 85 ±0.27°F (0.15°C)
Type 91 ±0.54°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III, 20 kΩ,
100 kΩ
RTD
Type 63 1000Ω Nickel
Type 71, 81 100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Stability
Thermistor 0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <0.09°F (0.05°C) over 5 years
Enclosure Metal handy box
Mounting Directly to pipe using adjustable straps, 6" pipe
standard, 10" with option
Wiring Terminations 8' (2.44m), 24 AWG zipcord using crimp or
solder connection, type 71 & 81 have 18" leads
Approvals CE
Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Warranty Lifetime
STRAP-ON THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-STP* SERIES
4.0
(10.2)
in
(cm)
1.50 (3.81)
1.00 (2.54)
1.70
(4.3)
DESCRIPTION
The Precon ST-STP* Thermistor and RTD Series strap-on sensor
provides precision monitoring of a pipe surface temperature. The
unique design features the sensor attached to a flexible copper plate
that will conform to the pipe surface. The rubber pad provides spring
tension plus surrounds the copper plate to eliminate the effects of ambient air temperature
.
FEA
TURES
•
Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Adjustable steel straps fit multiple pipe sizes
• Fexible copper plate conforms to pipe surface
• Copper plate is insulated from ambient air
• Lifetime warranty
• Ultra high accuracy optional
TM
APPLICATION
Strap-on Applications: Where it is not practical to install immersion
wells, the ST-STP* Strap on Sensor is a great substitute. The copper
plate at the bottom of the flexible rubber base assures good thermal
conductivity to the sensor. The sensor is positioned directly behind
and attached to the copper conduction plate. Each ST-STP* utilizes a
metal threaded ring clamp to secure it to the pipe and models 6" and under include a pair of high strength zip ties as an optional mounting method
. A small amount of thermal conducting compound (TCC-12)
helps to ensure maximum conductivity.
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-STP3 10,000fi strap-on thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III (gray leads)
ST-STP21 2252fi strap-on thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II (green leads)
ST-STP22 3000fi strap-on thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II (blue leads)
ST-STP24 10,000fi strap-on thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II (yellow leads)
ST-STP27 100,000fi strap-on thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), T ype II (gray leads)
ST-STP42 20,000fi strap-on thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type IV (green leads)
ST-STP63 1000fi nickel strap-on RTD @ 70˚F (21˚C) (yellow leads)
ST-STP71 100fi strap-on  RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C) (blue leads)
ST-STP81 100fi strap-on RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C) (yellow leads)
ST-STP85 1000fi strap-on RTD @32˚F (0˚C) (blue leads)
ST-STP91 1000fi strap-on RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C) (green leads)
OPTIONS
XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, ±0.135˚F (0.075˚C)
XW Weather resistant housing
X10 10" (25.4 cm) maximum pipe size 
ST-STP3 XW Example: ST-STP3-XW 10,000fi  strap-on thermistor sensor with weather resistant housing
ST-STP*
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229

1322. fi
TEMPERATURE 1256fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD ±0.50°F (0.4°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
10 kΩ Type II & III, 20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD 100Ω, 1000Ω 385 curve
Temperature Range -40° to 302°F (-40° to 150°C)
Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <±0.1°C drift
Heat Dissipation Thermistor, 3 mW/°C (power needed
to raise the temperature by 1°C)
Enclosure Galvanized metal box
Wiring Terminations 10" of 22 AWG wire or terminal strip
Approvals RoHS, CE
Weight 0.8 lb (0.36 Kg)
Warranty 5 years
ORDERING INFORMATION
in
(cm)
A/*-S
Strap-On
1 .9
(4 .8)
4 .0 (10 .2)
5 .0
(12 .7)
1 .5 x 1 .5
(3 .8 x 3 .8)
Foam Pa d
Worm
Gear
DESCRIPTION
The ACI Strap On Series Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed specifically for HVAC system temperature control
.
The str
ap-on sensors come in thermistor and RTD sensor
curves compatible with most BAS systems available today
.
Str
ap-on sensors come with a handy box and stainless steel
strap for 5" (12
.7 cm) pipes.
The
ACI Strap-On Sensor mounts directly to a 2" to 5" (5
.1
to 12.7 cm) pipe. Clean off any insulation or rust to promote
solid contact of the copper plate to the pipe. Wrap and tighten
the strap around the pipe and compress the foam fully for a firm mount
. Faster response can be achieved by using TCC-
12 thermal conductive compound.
FEA
TURES
•
Fits pipes 2" to 5" (5.1 to 12.7 cm)
• Five-year warranty
• Stainless steel strap
DIMENSIONS
STRAP-ON THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ACI STRAP-ON SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
A/AN-S-GD
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A/AN-S-GD Strap-on sensor with 5" (12.7 cm) diameter strap, 10 kΩ thermistor, Type 3
A/CP-S-GD Strap-on sensor with 5" (12.7 cm) diameter strap, 10 kΩ thermistor, Type 2
A/20K-S-GD Strap-on sensor with 5" (12.7 cm) diameter strap, 20 kΩ thermistor, Type 42
A/100K-S-GD Strap-on sensor with 5" (12.7 cm) diameter strap, 100 kΩ thermistor, Type 27
A/100-2W-S-GD Strap-on sensor with 5" (12.7 cm) diameter strap, 100Ω RTD, 385 curve
A/1K-2W-S-GD Strap-on sensor with 5" (12.7 cm) diameter strap, 1000Ω RTD, 385 curve

1323. fi 1257TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD ±0.55°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type
Thermistor 10 kΩ Type II & III, 20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD 100Ω, 1000Ω, 385 curve;
1000Ω, 375 curve
Temperature Range 32° to 158°F (-0° to 70°C)
Stability Thermistor
< 0.036°F (0.02°C) per year
RTD 0.14°C with 6,000 continuous hours
at 400°C
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power need to raise the
temperature 1°C), 0.4°C/mW at 0°C
Enclosure JB
2x4 steel handy box
BB BAPI Box IP66 rated UV-resistant
plastic enclosure
BB2 BAPI Box 2 IP66 rated UV-resistant
plastic enclosure
BB4 BAPI Box 4 IP44 nylon and
plastic enclosure
Mounting Straps or Clamps to pipe
Wiring Terminations 22 AWG wire, etched teflon leads 
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight JB, BB4
0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
BB, BB2 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Warranty Lifetime
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI BA Strap-On Temperature Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed specifically for HVAC systems to monitor water temperature in retrofit or filled pipe applications
.
The
y fit around the outside of a pipe and measure the water
temperature by sensing the surface temperature of the pipe
.
The
y come in thermistor and RTD sensors and feature etched
te
flon leadwires to perform under real world conditions.
FEATURES
• Strap-on or clamp-on models
• Lifetime limited sensor warranty
• Wide selection of mounting styles
STRAP-ON THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
BA/ STRAP-ON SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
BA/10K-2-STP-BB4
BA/10K-2-STP-JB
BA/10K-2-SB4
BA/10K-2-S-JB
DIMENSIONS
BA/10K2-J-BB4 BA/10K-2-S-JB

1324. fi
TEMPERATURE 1258fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
BA/10K2-S-BB2
BA/10K2-S-BB
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: BA/10K-2-S-JB BAPI Clamp-on 10,000Ω RTD thermistor
with JB box
BA/ 10K2 S JB
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BA/ Probe temperature sensor
REQUIRED SENSOR TYPE
10K2 10,000
Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
10K3 10,000
Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III
100 100
Ω RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
1K 1000
Ω RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
1K375 1000
Ω RTD @32°F (0°C), 375 curve
REQUIRED PROBE TYPE AND LENGTH
S Clamp-on for 2" to 4" dia. pipe and 1.25" copper plate pad
STP Spring-loaded for 5" to 14.5" dia. pipe and 1.25" copper plate pad
REQUIRED MOUNTING ENCLOSURE
JB 2" x 4" J-box with 1/2" knockouts
BB BAPI-Box - IP66, NEMA 4 UV resistant polycarbonate
(Not av ailable for spring-loaded units)
BB2 BAPI-Box 2 - IP66, NEMA 4 UV resistant polycarbonate
BB4 BAPI-Box 4 - IP44, nylon and plastic
STRAP-ON THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
BA/ STRAP-ON SERIES
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
DIMENSIONS

1325. fi 1259TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-TS3 10,000fi tank sensor thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III (gray leads)
ST-TS21 2252fi tank sensor thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II (green leads)
ST-TS22 3000fi tank sensor thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II (blue leads)
ST-TS24 10,000fi tank sensor thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II (yellow leads)
ST-TS27 100,000fi tank sensor thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), T ype II (gray leads)
ST-TS42 20,000fi tank sensor thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type IV (green leads)
ST-TS63 1000fi nickel tank sensor RTD @ 70˚F (21˚C) (yellow leads)
ST-TS71 100fi tank sensor  RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C) (blue leads)
ST-TS81 100fi tank sensor RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C) (yellow leads)
ST-TS85 1000fi tank sensor RTD @32˚F (0˚C) (blue leads)
ST-TS91 1000fi tank sensor RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C) (green leads)
OPTIONS
XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length cable
XD Dual sensors
XN1 NIST Certificate, one reference point 32˚F (0˚C)
XN2 NIST Certificate, two reference point 32˚F (0˚C)
XN3 NIST Certificate, three reference point 32˚F (0˚C)
XP Matched pair
XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, ±0.135˚F (0.075˚C)
  S  Stainless steel thermowell
ST-TS3 XN1 Example: ST-TS3-XN1 10,000fi tank sensor thermistor with NIST one reference 
  point certificate
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD Type 63
±0.72°F (0.40°C)
Type 71 ±0.054°F (0.03°C)
Type 81, 85 ±0.27°F (0.15°C)
Type 91 ±0.54°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type
Thermistor 2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III, 20 kΩ,
100 kΩ
RTD Type 63
1000Ω Nickel
Type 71, 81 100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range
Thermistor/RTD -40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient
Thermistor Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <0.09°F (0.05°C) over 5 years
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise the
temperature by 1°C)
Mounting Lower sensor into cooling tower tank,
support cable at wiring box, use water proof connectors
Wiring Terminations
8' (2.44m) 2 conductor for SJO 18/2 water
resistant cable
Approvals CE
Weight 0.8 lb (0.36 kg)
Warranty Lifetime
SUBMERSIBLE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-TS* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Precon ST-TS* Series Tank Thermistor and RTD
Sensors provide precision remote temperature sensing for
cooling tower tanks for use in building automation systems
.
The activ
e sensing element is a highly stable precision
thermistor material or platinum RTD
.
The sensing element is r
ugged and sealed in a thermally
conductive compound
. The housing is a standard brass
immersion well that has the weight to keep the sensor submersed and is compatable for all liquids suitable with brass
. Water resistant cable is used.
FEATURES
• Lifetime warranty
• Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Brass thermowell for quick temperature response
• Water resistant cable
• Ultra high accuracy optional
• One piece design
TM
SPECIFICATIONS
1/2" NPT
3.25
(8.26)
0.5
(1.27)
5.13
(13.03)
4.94
(12.54)
in
(cm)
ST-TS*
DIMENSIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE

T85U-XR
1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229
ST-TS*

1326. fi
TEMPERATURE 1260fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD Type 63
±0.72°F (0.40°C)
Type 71 ±0.054°F (0.03°C)
Type 81, 85 ±0.27°F (0.15°C)
Type 91 ±0.54°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2.252 kΩ, 3 kΩ, 10 kΩ Type II & III,
20 kΩ, 100 kΩ
RTD Type 63
1000Ω Nickel
Type 71, 81 100Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 85 1000Ω Pt 385 Curve
Type 91 1000Ω Pt 375 Curve
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD
-40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
Temperature Coefficient Thermistor
Negative temperature coefficient
RTD Positive temperature coefficient
Temperature Stability Thermistor
0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years
RTD <0.09°F (0.05°C) over 5 years
Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to raise
the temperature by 1°C)
Mounting Directly to stud or bolt
Wiring Terminations 24 AWG, UL low voltage to 105°C
Connections 8’ (2.4m) of 24 AWG
prestripped pigtails, type 71 & 81 sensors have 18” leads
Approvals
CE
Weight 0.1 lb (0.05 kg) w/o options
Warranty Lifetime
DESCRIPTION
The Precon ST-L* Series Thermistor and RTD Ring Lug Sensors provide precision equipment temperature sensing for building automation systems
. The active sensing element
is made of a highly stable, precision thermistor material or platinum RTD
.
The ring lug design allows the sensor to be mounted to a bolt
or stud to monitor equipment temperature. A common use
is to monitor motor winding temper
ature by mounting to the
motor housing
. It comes in sizes to accommodate 1/4", 5/16"
and 3/8" studs or bolts.
FEATURES
• Lif •
Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves
• Ring lug mounting for equipment monitoring
• Three stud sizes available
• Ultra high accuracy optional
TM
RING LUG THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR
ST-L* SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
ST-L*

1327. fi 1261TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
RING LUG THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
ST-L* SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-L3 10,000fi lug thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type III (gray leads)
ST-L21 2252fi lug thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II (green leads)
ST-L22 3000fi lug thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II (blue leads)
ST-L24 10,000fi lug thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II (yellow leads)
ST-L27 100,000fi lug thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type II (gray leads)
ST-L42 20,000fi lug thermistor @ 77˚F (26˚C), Type IV (green leads)
ST-L63 1000fi nickel lug RTD @ 70˚F (21˚C) (yellow leads)
ST-L71 100fi lug  RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C) 385 Platinum Curve (blue leads)
ST-L81 100fi lug RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C) 385 Platinum Curve (yellow leads)
ST-L85 1000fi lug RTD @32˚F (0˚C) 385 Platinum Curve (blue leads)
ST-L91 1000fi lug RTD @ 32˚F (0˚C) 375 Platinum Curve (green leads)
OPTIONS
25 1/4" Stud Size
31 5/16" Stud size
38 3/8" Stud size
XN1  NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F(0°C)
QD¼  Nylon insulated quick disconnect ¼" 
      X25  25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG
      XC25  25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG jacketed cable 
      XCP25  25' (7.6m) non-shielded 22AWG plenum cable
      XN  NIST certificate of conformance
      XN1  NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F(0°C)  
      XN2  NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F(0°C/70°C) 
      XN3  NIST certificate, three reference points 32°F/77°F/158°F(0°C/25°C/70°C)

ST-L3 25 XN1 Example: ST-L3-25-XN1
10,000fi mini probe sensor with NIST one 
                  reference point certificate
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277

1328. NEW!
TEMPERATURE 1262NEW!
TEMPERATURE
20
NEW!WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
DIMENSIONS
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.20°C)
RTD ±0.55°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type
Thermistor 10kΩ, Type II & III
RTD 100Ω, 1000Ω 385 curve,
1000Ω 375 curve
Temperature Range
Thermistor -40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)

RTD

1002 212° to 410°F (100° to 210°C)

1k1
-328° to 32°F (-200° to 0°C)

1K3
392° to 1112°F (200° to 600°C)
Stability <0.036°F (0.02°C) per year, 0.14°C
with 6,000 continuous hours at 400°C
Heat Dissipation
2.7 mW/°C (power need to raise the
temperature 1°C), 0.4°C/mW at 0°C
Enclosure BB
BAPI Box-IP66, UV-resistant,
polycarbonate
BB2 BAPI Box 2-IP66, UV-resistant,
polycarbonate
BB4 BAPI Box 4-IP44, Nylon & plastic
WP NEMA 3R, cast aluminum
Mounting Directly to wall or pipe
Wiring Terminations 22 AWG wire, etched teflon leads 
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight
RPFEP5 0.55 lb (0.25 Kg)
RPFEP10 0.6 lb (0.27 Kg)
RPFEP15 0.65 lb (0.29 Kg)
Warranty Lifetime
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI BA Series Extreme Temperature Thermistor and
RTD Sensors are designed for use in applications from -200°
to 600°C
. The parts come with stainless steel probe and
packages to handle moisture and wide temperature ranges.
FEATURES
• Three watertight enclosure
• Limited Lifetime warranty
EXTREME TEMPERATURE SENSORS
BA/*RPFEP SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
BA/10K2RPFEP5BB2 BA/10K2RPFEP5BB4
BA/10K2RPFEP5BB
BA/10K2RPFEP5BB
BA/10K2RPFEP5BB2

1329. fi 1263TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
EXTREME TEMPERATURE SENSORS
BA/*RPFEP SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BA Remote probe sensor
REQUIRED SENSOR TYPE
10K2 10K thermistor @77°F (25°C), Type 2, -40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
10K3 10K thermistor @77°F (25°C), Type 3, -40° to 221°F (-40° to 105°C)
1002 100 ohm RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 cur ve, range 212° to 410°F (100° to 210°C)
1K1 1000 ohm RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 cur ve, range -328° to 32°F (-200° to 0°C)
1K2 1000 ohm RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 cur ve, range 212° to 410°F (100° to 210°C)
1K3 1000 ohm RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 cur ve, range 392° to 1,112°F (200° to 600°C)
REQUIRED PROBE TYPE AND LENGTH
RPFEP5 Sensor with 5' wire leads, PTFE jacketed cable for 1K3, fiberglass insulated for 10K2,10K3, 1002, 1K1 & 1K2
RPFEP10 Sensor with 10' wire leads, PTFE jacketed cable for 1K3, fiberglass insulated for 10K2,10K3, 1002, 1K1 & 1K2
RPFEP15 Sensor with 15' wire leads, PTFE jacketed cable for 1K3, fiberglass insulated for 10K2,10K3, 1002, 1K1 & 1K2
REQUIRED MOUNTING ENCLOSURE
BB IP66, UV resistant
BB2 IP66, UV resistant, polycarbonate
BB4 IP66, UV resistant, nylon & plastic
WP NEMA 3R weatherproof UV resistant enclosure
BA 1K1 RPFEP10 BB Example: BA1K1RPFEP10BB
1000 ohm 385 curve-328 to 32°F, with 10' fiberglass insulated leads
and BAPI-box
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
DIMENSIONS
BA/10K2RPFEP5BB4 BA/10K2RPFEP5WP

1330. NEW!
TEMPERATURE 1264NEW!
TEMPERATURE
20
NEW!WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD ±0.55°F (0.30°C)
Sensor Type
Thermistor 10kΩ, Type II & III
RTD 100Ω, 1000Ω 385 curve, 1000Ω 375
curve
Temperature Range 32° to 158°F (-0° to 70°C)
Stability
Thermistor <0.036°F (0.02°C) per year
RTD 0.14 °C with 6,000 continuous hours
at 400°C
Heat Dissipation 0.4°C/mW at 0°C, 2.7 mW/°C (power
need to raise the temperature 1°C)
Enclosure/Weight
HB Hanging Bracket with 30" jacketed
cable; 0.55lb (0.25 Kg)
BB BAPI Box- IP66, UV-resistant
polycarbonate; 0.8 lb (0.36 Kg)
BB2 BAPI Box 2- IP66, UV-resistant
polycarbonate; 0.8 lb (0.36 Kg)
Mounting Directly to wall or with hanging
bracket
Wiring Terminations 22 AWG wire, etched teflon leads 
Approvals CE, RoHS
Warranty Lifetime
THERMOBUFFER TEMPERATURE SENSORS
BA/*-TB SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI BA Series Thermobuffer Sensors are designed specifically for freezers and coolers to simulate the temperature of the contents and not the air temperature
.
The fluid-filled chamber allows for slower reaction to abrupt
temperature changes from opening or closing the cooler door.
The
Thermobuffer helps eliminate spikes and short cycling of
refrigeration equipment
.
FEATURES
• Fluid-filled to mimic core temperatures
• Decreases false high limit alarms
• Stainless steel or aluminum
SPECIFICATIONS
BA/10K2TBM3042HB
BA/10K2TBM3044BB
BA/10K2TBM3044BB2

1331. fi 1265TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Example: BA/100TBM3044H B Thermobuffer probe 100fi
RTD 385 curv e, with hanging bracket and jacketed cabl e.
BA/ 10K3 TB-M3044
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BA/ Probe temperature sensor
REQUIRED SENSOR TYPE
10K2 10,000
fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II
10K3 10,000
fi thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III
100 100
fi RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
1K 1000
fi RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 curve
REQUIRED PROBE TYPE AND LENGTH
TB-M3042 Thermobuffer probe 2" long, 304 stainless chamber
TB-M3044 Thermobuffer probe 4" long, 304 stainless chamber
TB-MAL2 Thermobuffer probe 2" long, aluminum chamber
TB-MAL4 Thermobuffer probe 4" long, aluminum chamber
HB Hanging bra cket with jacketed cabl e
BB BAPI box NEMA 4X
BB2 BAPI box 2 NEMA 4X
HB
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
THERMOBUFFER TEMPERATURE SENSORS
BA/*-TB SERIES
DIMENSIONS
THERMAL-THERMOBUFFER
BB-THERMOBUFFER
BB2-THERMOBUFFER

1332. fi
TEMPERATURE 1266fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
S241HC Sensor
Sensor Type 1000Ω ±0.1% @ 32°F (0°C)
Temperature Coefficient
0.00375 Ω/Ω/°C
Sensitivity 2.1Ω/°F @ 32°F (0°C)
Measurement Range -58° to 932°F (-50° to 500°C)
Probe Material 304 Stainless
Wiring Terminations Two-wire nickel coated stranded
copper, 24" long 22 AWG fiberglass insulated
Weight
0.5 lb (0.23 Kg)
Warranty 3 years
TT111H-0800 Fixed Transmitter Supply Voltage
8.5-30 VDC unregulated
Sensor Input 1000Ω platinum 0.00375 Ω/Ω/°C
Measurement Range 0° to 800°F (-18° to 427°C)
Signal Output 4-20 mA
Maximum Output Impedance
750Ω ± 0.1% @ 24 VDC min
Accuracy Calibration accuracy ±0.05% of span
Operating Temperature -58° to 160°F (-50° to 70°C)
Well Operating Pressure
3000 psig (20.7 mPa) max
Well Material 304 Stainless steel
Weight 0.35 lb (0.16 Kg)
Warranty 3 years
1.1
(2.79)
5.5
(13.97)
24.0
(60.94)
1.53
(3.89)
0.51
(1.30)
0.14
(0.36)
0.91
(2.31)
Mounting Hole
0.141" dia (0.36)
1/2" Pipe Thread (typical both sides)
0.25
(0.64)
2.0
(5.10)
S241HC Probe
in
(cm)
TT111H-0800 Transmitter
zero
span
1
2
3
4
DESCRIPTION
The Minco S241HC High Temperature RTD Sensor is directly inserted to monitor the temperature of boiler stacks, steam lines, and other applications where the temperature may rise above the operating range of standard sensors
.
When used with the
TT111H-0800 Transmitter, a 4-20 mA
output is provided that is linear from 0° to 800°F (-18° to 427°C).
FEATURES
• All stainless steel probe
• 24" high temperature leads
• Small transmitter size
• Well available (WS-6)
• High temperature span, 0° to 800°F (-18° to 427°C)
+
+
–
–
4321
TT111H-0800
Transmitter
24 VDC
Power
Supply
S241HC
Sensor
4-20 mA Signal
GFF-50
Accessory
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
HIGH TEMPERATURE SENSOR & TRANSMITTER
S241HC, TT111H-0800
SPECIFICATIONS
S241HC
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TT111H-0800 High temperature transmitter 0° to 800°F (-18° to 427°C)
S241HC High temperature probe, limited to 932°F (500°C)
GFF-50
WS-6
TT111H
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
GFF-50 1/2” galvanized mounting flange
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298
WS-6 Stainless steel well 1293

1333. fi 1267TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 8.5 to 35 VDC loop powered
Signal Output 4-20 mA @ 400Ω
Accuracy ±0.50% of span
Measurement Range -148° to 32°F (-100° to 0°C)
-58 to 122°F (-50° to 50°C)
32 to 212°F (0° to 100°C)
Sensor Type

PM Curve 100Ω platinum three-wire
0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C
PF Curve 1000Ω platinum two-wire
0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C
Display 3-1/2 digit LCD, updates 3 times
per second
Operating Temperature
Probe -328° to 248°F (-200° to 120°C)
Transmitter -13° to 185°F (-25° to 85°C)
Materials Probe: material Stainless steel
Thermal vial 6 oz (175 ml) polyethylene bottle
with cap
Thermowell Delrin
Enclosure Polycarbonate
Wiring Terminations 22 AWG Teflon insulated with TFE
jacket overall
Dimensions 4.5" L x 2.6" W x 2.2" D
(11.5 x 6.5 x 5.6 cm)
Weight 0.97 lb (0.43 Kg)
Warranty 3 years
THERMAL VIAL TEMPERATURE SENSING SYSTEM
AS10 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Minco AS10 Thermal Vial Temperature Sensing System is ideal for freezers, coolers, and refrigeration units to monitor the temperature of the contents, rather than the air temperature
. The vial is filled with fluid such as glycol or water
which emulates the material being stored. The corresponding
4-20 mA output is matched calibrated to the RTD for improved system accuracy
.
FEATURES
• Sensor and transmitter calibrated together
• Optional display
• Sealed vial eliminates leakage
• NIST certification include
SPECIFICATIONS
AS10
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AS103282Thermal vial sensing system
PM  100Ω 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve
PF  1000Ω 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve
LLL   Cable length LLL in 1" increments
FDisplay in °F
BNo display
Z    Range -148° to 32°F (-100° to 0°C)
M     Range -58° to 122°F (-50° to 50°C)
C     Range 32° to 212°F (0° to 100°C)
Sample order:
AS103282PM72FZ:   
Thermal vial 100fi, 385 curv e platinum 
RTD with 72" cabl e, display and Z 
temperature range
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP
A-1.2
Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
AC101540 Thermal Vial mounting bracket

1334. NEW!
TEMPERATURE 1268NEW!
TEMPERATURE
20
NEW!WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Accuracy ±0.12% @ 0°C
Stability <0.1°C/year
Time Constant 1 sec
Measurement Range -4° to 350°F (-20° to 177°C)
Sensor Type
Type PW 1000Ω platinum RTD TCR 0.00375
Ω/Ω/°C (385 available)
Type PD 100Ω platinum RTD TCR 0.00385
Ω/Ω/°C
Materials Of Construction
Polyamide film with elastomer
cover, silicone rubber
Mounting Adhesive backing (flat surface)
AC766 pipe-mount kit with tape (conduit) #20 stretch tape (round surface)
Wiring Terminations
26 AWG stranded copper
Dimensions S665PDY48BC
0.472" W X 0.197"H, 48" leads
(1.2 X 0.5 cm)
S667PDY40BC 0.600" W X 0.197"H, 40" leads
(1.5 X 0.5 cm)
Weight 0.1 lb (0.05 Kg)
Warranty 3 years
Wire Nuts
Field Wires
Buckle
Thermal-
Ribbon
™
S469PW
#20 Stretch Tape
Fill in with
Insulation
T91U
Transmitter
Utility Box
Strap
AC766
Conduit
Pipe Insulation
THERMAL RIBBON RTD
S101144, S469, S665PDY48BC, S667PDY40BC
DESCRIPTION
The Minco Model S101144 and S469 Self-adhesive,
Flexible Ribbons RTD Sensors feature imbedded RTDs
to sense temperature
. The platinum 1000Ω RTD sensor is
inserted and used with a transmitter or directly into a BAS system
. The self-adhesive backing makes installation easy
and it adheres to all types of surfaces. The fl exible thin
ribbon maximizes contact to the measured surface which makes response time very fast
. The accuracy is the same as
immersion sensors.
The Minco S665 & S667 Series RTD Sensors are 100 ohm
flexible ribbon sensors that are easily adapatble to most any
clean, flat surface. The S665 Series is a thin film sensor with
an elastomer cover. The S667 Series is a silicone rubber,
elastomer covered thin film sensor with a foil backing, capable of submersion applications
.
FEATURES
• Small, •
Platinum stability and
accuracy
• Fast response
• Easy mounting
• Self-adhesive backing
• Pliable
MOUNTING
APPLICATION
• Metal pipe
• Metal tanks
• Windows
• Glass displays
• Condensation control
with dew point sensor
SPECIFICATIONS
S469PW
Close-up of
sensor tip
S101144PW
#20
AC766

1335. fi 1269TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
THERMAL RIBBON RTD
S101144, S469, S665PDY48BC, S667PDY40BC
40 (101.6) 36 (91.44)
0.47
(1.10)
1.5 (3.81)
0.20
(0.51)
0.38
(0.95)
Thickness
0.08 (0.20) max
Thickness
0.05 (0.12) maxS101144PW S469PW
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
S101144PW 1000Ω, 375 thermal tab RTD with adhesive backing
S469PW 1000Ω, 375 rubber strip RTD with adhesive backing
S665PDY48BC 100Ω Thermal tab thin film adhesive back elastomer cover
S667PDY40BC 100Ω Thermal tab thin film adhesive back silicone rubber, waterproof
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
#20 Self-vulcanizing stretch tape, 6’ (1.83m) roll, 1” (2.54 cm) wide
AC766 Pipe mount kit with #20 stretch tape and 5’ (1.5m) nylon strap
T81U Series Temperature transmitter for type 81, 385 platinum curve sensor, track mounted 1281
T91U Series Temperature transmitter for type 91, 375 platinum curve sensor, track mounted 1277

1336. fi
TEMPERATURE 1270fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
5' (1.5)
1.3'
(3.2)
0.4
(0.9)
Thickness
0.4 (0.9) maxTE200G
in
(cm)
Accuracy
Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C)
RTD Platinum
±0.54°F (0.3°C)
Nickel ±0.72°F (0.4°C)
Sensor Type Thermistor
2,252Ω, 3,000Ω, 10,000Ω
Type II & III, 20,000Ω
RTD 100Ω Platinum 385 curve, 1,000Ω
Platinum 385 curve, 1,000Ω Nickel,
1,000Ω Balco
Measurement Range -4° to 221°F (-20° to 105°C)
Materials Of Construction Aluminum
Wiring Terminations 5' (1.5 m) of 22 AWG stranded copper
Approvals CE, RoHs
Weight 0.4 lb (0.18 Kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Greystone Energy Systems Model TE200G Glass
Thermistor and RTD Sensors feature imbedded sensors to
sense temperature
. The model TE200G is a single point glass
temperature sensor encapsulated in an aluminum probe.
Small in siz
e and ideal for mounting on windows to provide
fast response
.
FEATURES
• Small and thin
• Fast response
• Easy mounting
• Pliable
APPLICATION
• Metal pipe
• Metal tanks
• Windows
• Glass displays
• Condensation control with dew point sensor
DIMENSIONS
THERMAL GLASS THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS
TE200G SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
TE200G
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279
T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
#20 Self-vulcanizing stretch tape, 6' (1.83m) roll, 1" (2.54 cm) wide
MODEL DESCRIPTION TE200G Glass sensor
OPTIONS
2 100fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C); 385 Platinum cur ve (red, red, white leads)
12 1,000fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C); 385 Platinum cur ve (gray leads)
13 1,000fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C); Nickel (gra y leads)
5 1,000fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C); Balco (???? leads)
14 10,000fi Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C); Type III (light gray leads)
6 3,000fi Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C); (light blue leads)
24 10,000fi Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C); Type II (yellow leads)
20 20,000fi Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C); (green leads)
8 2,252fi Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C); (gray leads)

TE200G 12 Example: TE200G-12 1,000fi RTD @ 32°F (0°C); 385 platinum cur ve (gray leads).

1337. fi 1271TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Power Supply
10.5-45 VDC
4-20 mA
Signal
2.25
(5.72)
1.8
(4.57)
1.0
(2.54)
Height
LOOP
TEMP
SENSOR
TEMP
SENSOR
LOOP
Type 91
1000fi 375 Platinum
RTD Sensor
(sold separately)
LOOP UP
Loop Power
LED
Snap
Track
Power Supply
10.5-45 VDC
4-20 MA
Signal
MODEL ST-T90E
Loop Power LED
SENSOR
JP1
Room Transmitter
Universal Transmitter
Supply Voltage 10.5-45 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA, two-wire, loop-powered
Limit: 25 mA
Minimum Output
Impedance 675Ω @ 24 VDC
Accuracy Sensor
±0.54°F (0.30°C)
Transmitter 0.1°F or 0.2% of span
Rangeability -30° to 250°F (34° to 121°C)
Min span of 40°F (22°C)
Rangeability
Zero -30° to 210°F (-34.4° to 98.9°C)
Minimum Span 40°F (4.4°C)
Usable Range -30° to 250 °F (-34.4° to 121.1°C)
Sensor Type 1000Ω thin film platinum TCR
0.00375Ω/Ω/°C
Sensitivity 2.1Ω/°F @ 32°F
Operating Humidity 0% to 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
Approvals CE (EN50081-1, EN50082- 1) Optional CE (EN50081-2, EN50082-2) Industr
ial RF/EM
hardened
Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) either style
"E" or "K"
Warranty 18 months
1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM RTD FIXED TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS
ST-T90 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Model ST-T90 Series is a fixed range 1000Ω, 375
platin
um room temperature transmitter that provides stable,
accurate room sensing for temperature control of Building Automation Systems. The attractive white vented housing
mounts easily and is constructed of durable plenum rated plastic with a white enameled aluminum faceplate
. The
ST-T910E is the Executive style room transmitter amd the ST-T90K is the Design style room transmitter
.
FEATURES
• Lo •
High accuracy
• No drift platinum RTD sensors
• Panel mounting for duct, immersion, OSA, and room
• UL 94V-0 plenum rated housing
• Used with Type 91 sensor
SPECIFICATIONS
ST-T90K
ST-T90E
WIRING

1338. fi
TEMPERATURE 1272fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
The Room Temperature application uses a vented room enclosure designed to minimize self-heating for accurate room
measurement.
The Duct Temperature application is designed for direct mounting on sheet metal duct systems. The sensor is point sensitive and
comes standard with a 4-7/8" (12.38 cm) insertion depth. Averaging probes come in 24' (7.3m) lengths and mount in a weather-
resistant metal box.
The Immersion Temperature application is designed to be threaded directly into a 1/8" NPT well with a 3-1/4" (8.2 cm)
insertion. The wells are available in brass or 304 stainless steel and are designed for pipe insertion using a 1/2" threaded saddle
(Thredolet®).
The Outside Air Temperature application uses a wall bracket with a vented weather shield to minimize the effect of rain or snow
and other weather related influences. This rugged enclosure and bracket will ensure long life even in severe weather conditions.
1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM RTD FIXED TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS
ST-T90 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-T90ERoom temperature transmitter
ST-T90KDesigner room temperature transmitter
RANGE
0 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C) Room transmitter only
1 20° to 120°F (-6.7° to 48.8°C) All mounting types
2 -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) OSA, duct, or immersion
3 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) All mounting types
4 30° to 240°F (-1° to 116°C) OSA, duct, or immersion
11 0° to 35°C (32° to 97°F) All mounting types
12 -30° to 45°C (-22° to 113°F) OSA, duct, or immersion
13 0° to 100°C (32° to 212°F) OSA, duct, or immersion
14 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F) All mounting types
ST-T90E
1-Example: ST-T90E-1 Room temperature transmitter
with a range of 20° to 120°F (-6.7° to 48.8°C)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
KT1 Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key 1390
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1398
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1398
APPLICATION

1339. fi 1273TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 10.5-45 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA, two-wire, loop-powered
Maximum Output
Impedance 675Ω @ 24 VDC
Sensor Element 1000Ω thin film platinum TCR
0.00375Ω/Ω/°C
Accuracy Sensor accuracy: ±0.2% of 1000Ω at
0°C
Transmitter accuracy 0.1°F or 0.2% of span
Rangeability -30° to 250°F (34° to 121°C)
(Min span of 40°F (22°C)) Standard: 40° to 90°F (4° to 32°C)
Rangeability

Zero -30° to 210°F (-34.4° to 98.9°C)
Minimum Span 40°F (4.4°C)
Usable Range -30° to 250°F (-34.4° to 121.1°C)
Sensitivity 2.1Ω/°F @ 32°F
Operating Temperature 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
Approvals CE (EN50081-1, EN50082-1);
Optional CE (EN50081-2, EN50082- 2) Industrial RF/EM hardened
Weight
0.3 lb (0.14 kg) either style "E" or "K"
Warranty 18 months
4.50
(11.43)
3.23
(8.20)
in
(cm)
2.75 (6.98)
4.5
(11.43)
1.5
(3.8)
0.18
(.47)
DESCRIPTION
The Kele ST-T91 Rangeable Platinum Room Temperature Transmitter Series provides stable, accurate room sensing for temperature control and building automation systems, and it is CE approved for level-one applications
. The attractive
vented housing mounts easily and is constructed of a durable plastic with a tan enameled aluminum faceplate
. The ST-T91E
is the Executive style room transmitter and the ST-T91K is the Design style room transmitter
.
The ST-T91 Series has a loop-powered 4-20 mA output with
a standard temperature range of 40° to 90°F (4° to 32°C), although other ranges can be field calibrated between -30° to 250°F (-34° to 121°C)
. To adjust the ST-T91 Series, set the
DIP switches to match the desired range, and use the zero and span pots to fine tune
. A high accuracy digital ohmmeter
and decade box are required.
The ST-T91 Series has a special 20 mA loop calibration test
signal to provide easy system verification. Simply move the
bottle plug jumper from norm to 20, and the transmitter will output a constant 20 mA
. The loop up LED provides power
indication for the 4-20 mA output.
FEATURES
• High accuracy
• No-drift platinum
• Loop calibration test signal
• Low cost
• Decorative enclosure
• Loop power LED indication
• CE approved (commercial and industrial)
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ST-T91E
RANGEABLE PLATINUM ROOM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
ST-T91 SERIES
ST-T91K

1340. fi
TEMPERATURE 1274fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Plate
Mounting
Screws
Cover Mounting 1/16" Allen Screws
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can
be used where conduit is not required. Adapters are
not required when mounting directly to electrical outlet
boxes.
Basic model comes with screw terminal block, tan
decorator faceplate, two #6-32 screws for handy-box
mounting, and two #6 x 1 screws fo r direct wall mount-
ing. Cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16" Allen key head.
Wire Access
Hole
Optional Customer-
Supplied Handy Box
The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (1.5m)
above the floor, on an interior wall, and away from any
heating or cooling generating devices.
Tan
Faceplate
Standard
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be
used where back box is not required. Adapters are not
required when mounting directly to electrical outlet
boxes.
The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (1.5m)
above the floor, on an interior wa ll, out of the sun, and
away from any heating or cooling generating devices.
Mounting
Screws
Wire Access
Hole
Mounting Back Plate
Option Board Clip
Cover
Locking
1/16" Allen Screws
Installed as needed
Self-Latching
Cover
Basic model comes with screw terminal block, two #6-32
screws for handy-box mounting, and two #6 x 1" screws
for direct wall mounting. Locking cover screws are #6-32
with a 1/16" Allen key head, installed as needed.
To BAS
Controller
Power Supply
10.5-45 VDC
4-20 mA
Signal
MODEL ST-T91E,K
Loop Po wer LED
12345
54321
O
N
NORM 20
SENSOR
JP1
SPAN
ZERO
ST-T91E ST-T91K
Norm = Normal operation
20 = Forced 20 mA output
Loop LED indicates proper loop
and power connections
±
ORDERING INFORMATION
ST-T91E XR1Example: ST-T91E-XR1 Rangeable platinum room temperature transmitter
with calibration 20° to 120°F
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ST-T91K Designer room temperature transmitter, 4-20 mA = 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C)
ST-T91E Executive room temperature transmitter, 4-20 mA = 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C)
CE CERTIFICATION
– Commercial CE (EN50081-1 and EN50082-1)
EMC Industrial CE, RF/EM hardened (EN50081-2 and EN50082-2)
OPTIONS
XR Custom range (specific range)
XR1 Range option = 20° to 120°F (-6.7° to 48.8°C)
XR2 Range option = 0° to 100°F (-17.7° to 37.8°C)
XR3 Range option = 30° to 100°F (-1.1° to 37.8°C)
XR11 Range option = 32° to 97°F (0° to 35°C)
XR14 Range option = 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
MOUNTING WIRING
RANGEABLE PLATINUM ROOM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
ST-T91 SERIES
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
KT1 Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key 1390

1341. fi 1275TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 9.4-35 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA, two-wire
Maximum Output
Impedance 730Ω @ 24 VDC
(Supply voltage - 9.4 VDC)/0.02A
Accuracy ±0.5°F (0.3°C) @ room temp or
±0.8% of span operating @
24 VDC transmitter
Linearity Transmitter: ±0.1% of span
(negligible)
Stability Sensor: Better than 0.09°F (0.05°C)
per year
Rangeability Zero: -10° to 60°F (-23° to 15°C)
Span:35° to 150°F (2° to 66°C)
Span Adjust Non-interacting
Zero Adjustments Non-interacting
Sensor Element 100Ω platinum RTD, 385 curve
1000Ω platinum RTD, 375 curve
Operating Temperature -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Enclosure Enclosure Plastic housing with alumin
um faceplate
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals, non-polar, connect
either way
Dimensions 4.5"H x 2.75"W x 1.58"D
(11.43 x 6.98 x 4.01 cm)
Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg)
Warranty 3 years
PLATINUM 1000 OHM SPACE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
TT859 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Minco TT859 Platinum 1000Ω Space Temperature Transmitter is DIP switch rangeable
. Non-interacting multi-
turn controls provide a constant resolution adjustment. Gold-
plated DIP s
witches ensure stable overlapping incremental
selections between -10° to 60°F (-23 to 15°C) for zero and 35° to 150°F (2° to 66°C) for span. The well ventilated
housing allows quick and accurate temperature sensing and effective heat dissipation from the circuit
. Repeatability is
e
xcellent because the TT859 uses a platinum RTD as the
sensing element
. Calibrated system accuracy of the TT859
is typically 0.25°F (0.14°C) with optional sensor matching.
Once installed, it can be field-calibrated or re-ranged through
coarse switch adjustments and fine tune with multi-turn zero and span pots
. The two-wire termination points are insensitive
to power supply polarity. This prevents reversed hookups and
simplifies installation.
FEATURES
• Substitute for discontinued Hy-Cal transmitters
• 4-20mA signal
• Optimum flow-through ventilation
• Easy zero and span ranging (non-interacting)
• On-line calibration
• Non-polar connections
SPECIFICATIONS
TT859PW

1342. fi
TEMPERATURE 1276fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Housing Top View Housing Side View
2.75
(6.98)
1.58
(4.01)
4.50
(11.43)
Transmitter mounted in cover
1
2
3
4
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2
3
4
SPAN
ADJ.
ZERO
ADJ.
24 VDC
4-20mA
Signal
+
–
+
–
RTD
TT859
WIRINGDIMENSIONS
PLATINUM 1000 OHM SPACE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
TT859 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
TT859 Space temperature transmitter
PW 1000 fi 0.00375 fi/fi/°C platinum curve
1 4-20mA DC output
S Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°F) (-18°/38°C)
H Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40°/90°F) (4°/32°C)
1 No calibration data, sensor or transmitter
2 Sensor/transmitter matched at 0°C with NIST
TT859 Example: TT859PW1S1 Room transmitter, 375 curve platinum RTD,
ranged for 0°/100°F
PW 1S 1
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TT859
Decorative Wall-Mount
Temperature Transmitter
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

1343. fi 1277TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 10.5-45 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA, two-wire
Maximum Output
Impedance 675Ω @ 24 VDC
375Ω with display
Sensor Element 1000Ω platinum TCR 0.00375
Ω/Ω/°C
Accuracy 0.1°F or 0.2% of span
Rangeability T91U Zero
-30° to 210°F (-34° to 98.9°C)
Minimum Span 40°F (4.4°C)
Usable range -30° to 250°F (-34.4° to 121.1°C)
T91H Zero
200° to 960°F (93° to 515°C)
Minimum Span 40°F (4.4°C)
Usable range 200° to 1000°F (93.3° to 573.8°C)
T91L Zero
-300° to -8°F (-184° to -22°C)
Minimum Span 40°F (4.4°C)
Usable range -300° to 32°F (-184.4° to 0°C)
Display Display option (XTD) 3-1/2 digit LCD,
NEMA 4 (IP65)
Operating Humidity 0% to 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
Dimensions 1"H x 1.8"W x 2.25"L
(2.5 x 4.6 x 5.7 cm)
Approvals CE (EN50081-1, EN50082-1) Optional CE (EN50081-2, EN50082- 2) Industr
ial RF/EM Hardened
Weight 0.16 lb (0.07 kg) w/o options
Warranty 18 months
1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER
T91H, T91L, T91U SERIES
1.8 (4.57)
2.25
(5.72)
Height:
0.75 (1.9)
including
track
LOOP
TEMP
SENSOR
TEMP
SENSOR
LOOP
LOOP UP MODEL T91U
SPAN
ZERO
12345 O
N
NORMAL 20
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The Kele T91U 1000Ω RTD rangeable transmitter is a range selectable, two-wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter used with Type 91 1000
Ω platinum RTD sensors. The transmitter is available
in six standard ranges, or it can be set for any range between -30° to 280°F (-34° to 156°C) with a minimum span of 40°F (22°C)
.
T
o adjust the T91U, set the DIP switches to match the desired
range, and use the zero and span pots to fine tune
. A high
accur
acy digital ohmmeter and decade box are required
.
The T91U has a special 20 mA loop calibration test signal
to provide easy system verification. Simply move the bottle
plug jumper from norm to 20, and the transmitter will output a constant 20 mA
. The loop-up LED provides power indication
for the 4-20 mA output.
The T91H and T91L are specialty units for very high
temperature and very low temperatures respectively. Both
units are r
angeable within their specialty limits
.
FEATURES
• DIP s •
Loop-calibration test signal
• Low cost
• Snap-track mounting
• Loop-powered LED indication
• Fits into card slot of ST-U91 housing
• Very high-range and low-range models availableCE
approved (commercial and industrial)
• Conformal coated
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
T91U
T91U-13-WE-XTD

1344. fi
TEMPERATURE 1278fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Power Supply
10.5-45 VDC
4-20 mA
Signal
LOOP
TEMP
SENSOR
TEMP
SENSOR
LOOP
1000Ω 375 Platinum
RTD Sensor
(sold separately)
LOOP UP MODEL T91U
SPAN
ZERO
Loop Power LED
12345 O
N
NORMAL 20
MOUNTING
1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER
T91H, T91L, T91U SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
T91U 2 D
Example: T91U-2-D
Transmitter with range of -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
mounted and wired in duct sensor enclosure
†
Indicate at time of order
* Includes sensor mounted and wired. Check temperature limits in the catalog for each probe
MODEL DESCRIPTION
T91U 4-20 mA RTD transmitter standard rangeability
T91H 4-20 mA RTD transmitter high temperature rangeability (XR range only)
T91L 4-20 mA RTD transmitter low temperature rangeability (XR range only)
CE CERTIFICATION
– Commercial CE (EN50081-1 and EN50082-1)
EMC Industrial CE, RF/EM hardened (EN50081-2 and EN50082-2)
RANGE
2 -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) (T91U only)
3 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) (T91U only)
4 30° to 240°F (-1° to 116°C) (T91U only)
12 -22° to 113°F (-30° to 45°C) (T91U only)
13 32° to 212°F (0° to 100°C) (T91U only)
14 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) (T91U only)
XR
†
Special Range (See previous page for rangeability limits)
SENSOR TYPE
— Transmitter only
D ST-D91-XW duct sensor*
O ST-O91 outside air sensor*
W ST-W91-XW immersion sensor* with brass well
WE ST-W91-E-XW immersion sensor* without well
WS ST-W91-S-XW immersion sensor* with stainless steel well
AV ST-AV91H averaging sensor*
XTD Digital display option for (D) duct or (W) immersion sensors
XWM Single gang weather resistant box (Mounted without sensor)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
AS2PW055P000XX1 Low temperature probe, limited to -50°F (-46°C)
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
S241HC High temperature probe, limited to 932°F (500°C)

1345. fi 1279TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
DESCRIPTION
The Kele T85U 1000Ω RTD rangeable transmitter is a
range selectable, two-wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter used
with Type 85 1000Ω platinum RTD sensors
. The transmitter is
available in six standard ranges, or it can be set for any range between -30° to 280°F (-34° to 156°C) with a minimum span of 40°F (22°C)
.
T
o adjust the T85U, set the DIP switches to match the desired
range, and use the zero and span pots to fine tune
. A high
accur
acy digital ohmmeter and decade box are required
.
The T85U has a special 20 mA loop calibration test signal
to provide easy system verification. Simply move the bottle
plug jumper from norm to 20, and the transmitter will output a constant 20 mA
. The loop-up LED provides power indication
for the 4-20 mA output.
FEATURES
• Class A Sensors
• Dip switch rangeable
• Loop calibration test signal
• Low cost
• Snap-track mounting
• Loop-powered LED indication
• Fits into card slot of ST-U85 housing
• CE approved (commercial and industrial)
• Available as a complete assembly
• Conformal coated
1000 OHM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER
T85U SERIES
T85U
T85U-13-WE-XTD
1.8 (4.57)
2.25
(5.72)
Height:
0.75 (1.9)
includes
track
LOOP
TEMP
SENSOR
TEMP
SENSOR
LOOP
LOOP UP
MODEL T85U
SPAN
ZERO
12345 O
N
NORMAL 20
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS
APPLICATIONS
• Duct
• OSA
• Immersion
• Averaging
Supply Voltage 10.5-45 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA, two-wire, loop-powered,
Limit 25 mA
Maximum Output
Impedance 675Ω @ 24 VDC
Sensor Accuracy DIN Class A, ±0.27°F (±0.15°C)
Transmitter Accuracy ±0.02°F (±0.01°C) at 77°F (25°C)
Rangeability -30° to 250°F (-34° to 121°C) Minim
um span of 40°F (22°C)
Rangeability
Zero -30° to 210°F (-34.4° to 98.9°C)
Minimum Span 40°F (4.4°C)
Usable Range -30° to 250°F (-34.4° to 121.1°C)
Loop Calibration Output
20 mA ± 0.2%
Sensor Element
1000Ω platinum TCR 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C
Operating Humidity 0% to 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
Wiring Terminations Terminals
Approvals CE (EN50081-1, EN50082-1)
Optional CE (EN50081-2, EN50082-
2) Industr
ial RF/EM Hardened
Weight
0.16 lb (0.07 kg) w/o options
Warranty 18 months
SPECIFICATIONS

1346. fi
TEMPERATURE 1280fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Power Supply
10.5-45 VDC
4-20 mA
Signal
LOOP
TEMP
SENSOR
TEMP
SENSOR
LOOP
1000fi 385 Platinum
RTD Sensor
(sold separately)
LOOP UP MODEL T85U
SPAN
ZERO
Loop Po wer LED
12345 O
N
NORMAL 20
WIRING
1000 OHM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER
T85U SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
T85U 2 D
Example: T85U-2-D
Transmitter with range of -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
mounted and wired in duct sensor enclosure
†
Indicate at time of order
* Includes sensor mounted and wired. Check temperature limits in the catalog for each probe.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
T85U 4-20 mA RTD transmitter standard rangeability
CE CERTIFICATION
– Commercial CE (EN50081-1 and EN50082-1)
EMC Industrial CE, RF/EM hardened (EN50081-2 and EN50082-2)
RANGE
2 -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
3 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C)
4 30° to 240°F (-1° to 116°C)
12 -22° to 113°F (-30° to 45°C)
13 32° to 212°F (0° to 100°C)
14 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
XR
†
Special Range (See previous page fo r rangeability limits)
SENSOR TYPE
— Transmitter only
D ST-D85-XW duct sensor*
O ST-O85 outside air sensor*
W ST-W85-XW immersion sensor* with brass well
WE ST-W85-E-XW immersion sensor* without well
WS ST-W85-S-XW immersion sensor* with stainless steel well
AV ST-AV85H av eraging sensor*
XTD Digital display option fo r (D) duct or (W) immersion sensors
XWM Single gang weather resistant box (Mounted without sensor)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

1347. fi 1281TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
T71U 4-20 mA RTD transmitter
RANGE
2 -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
3 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C)
4 30° to 240°F (-1° to 11 6°C)
XR
†
Special Range
SENSOR TYPE
— Transmitter only
D ST-D71-XW duct sensor*
O ST-O71 outside air sensor*
W ST-W71-XW immersion sensor* with well
AV ST-AV71H averaging sensor*
XWM Single gang weather resistant box (mounted without sensor)
T71U 2D Example: T71U-2-D transmitter with range of -20° to 140°F
(-29° to 60°C) mounted and wired in duct sensor enclosure
†
Indicate at time of order
* Includes sensor mounted and wired
Supply Voltage 10.5-45 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA, loop-powered
Maximum Output
Impedance 675Ω @ 24 VDC
Sensor Element 100Ω platinum
Accuracy 0.1°F or 0.2% of span TCR
0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C
Rangeability -30° to 250°F (-34° to 121°C) Minim
um Span 40°F (22°C)
Rangeability
Zero -30° to 210°F (-34.4° to 98.9°C)
Minimum Span 40°F (4.4°C)
Usable Range -30° to 250°F (-34.4° to 121.1°C)
Operating Humidity 0% to 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
Dimensions 1.8"W x 2.25"L x 1"H
(4.6 x 5.7 x 2.5 cm)
Approvals CE
Weight 0.16 lb (0.07 kg) w/o options
Warranty 18 months
LOOP
NORM
TEMP
SENSOR
TEMP
SENSOR
20
LOOP
1.8
(4.58)in
(cm)
2.25
(5.72)
Height: 1.0
(2.54)
100fi
RTD Sensor
(sold separately)
4-20 mA
Signal
Power Supply
10.5-45 VDC
DESCRIPTION
The Kele T81U Platinum RTD Rangeable Transmitter is a
two-wire, 4-20 mA transmitter designed for use with Type 81
100
Ω platinum RTD sensors. The transmitter is available in
three standard ranges, or it can be set for any range between -30° to 250°F (-34° to 121°C) with a minimum span of 40°F (22°C)
.
To adjust the T81U, set the DIP switches to match the desired
range and use the zero and span pots to fine tune. A high
accur
acy digital ohmmeter and decade box are required
.
The
T81U has a special 20 mA loop calibration test signal to
provide easy system verification
. Simply move the bottle plug
jumper from NORM to 20, and the transmitter will output a constant 20 mA
. The Loop Up LED provides power indication
for the 4-20 mA output.
FEATURES
• DIP s •
Loop calibration test signal
• Snap-track mounting
• Loop-powered LED indication
• Conformal coated
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
100 OHM PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER
T81U SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
T81U
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

1348. fi
TEMPERATURE 1282fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
100 OHM PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER
T71U SERIES
LOOP
NORM
TEMP
SENSOR
TEMP
SENSOR
20
LOOP
1.8 (4.58)
in
(cm)
2.25
(5.72)
Height: 1.0 (2.54)
100
RTD Sensor
(sold separately)
4-20 mA
Signal
Power Supply
10.5-45 VDC
DESCRIPTION
The Kele T71U Platinum RTD Rangeable Transmitter is a
two-wire 4-20 mA transmitter designed for use with Type 71
100Ω platinum RTD sensors
. The transmitter is available in
three standard ranges, or it can be set for any range between 30° to 250°F (-34° to 121°C) with a minimum span of 40°F (22°C)
.
To adjust the T71U, set the DIP switches to match the desired
range and use the zero and span pots to fine tune. A high
accur
acy digital ohmmeter and decade box are required
.
The T71U has a special 20 mA loop calibration test signal to
provide easy system verification. Simply move the bottle plug
jumper from NORM to 20, and the transmitter will output a constant 20 mA
. The Loop Up LED provides power indication
for the 4-20 mA output.
FEATURES
• DIP s
• Loop calibration test signal
• Snap-track mounting
• Loop-powered LED indication
• Conformal coated
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
T71U
MODEL DESCRIPTION
T71U 4-20 mA RT D transmitter
CE Certification
— Commercial CE (EN50081-1 and EN50082-1)
EMC Industrial CE, RF/EM hardened (EN50081-2 and EN50082-2)
RANGE
2 -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
3 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C)
4 30° to 240°F (-1° to 116°C)
XR
†
Special Range
SENSOR TYPE
— Transmitter only
D ST-D71-XW duct sensor*
O ST-O71 outside air sensor*
W ST-W71-XW immersion sensor* with well
XWM Single gang weather resistant box
(mounted without sensor)
NIST Calibration Certificate
XN3 3 point NIST certificate for T71U and sensor
combination (not av ailable with the AV option)
T71U 2D Example: T71U-2-D
transmitter with range of -20° to 140°F
(-29° to 60°C) mounted and wired in duct sensor
enclosure
†
Indicate at time of order
* Includes sensor mounted and wired
Supply Voltage 10.5-45 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA, loop-powered
Maximum Output
Impedance 675Ω @ 24 VDC
Sensor Element 100Ω platinum
Accuracy 0.1°F or 0.2% of span TCR 0.00385
Ω/Ω/°C
Rangeability
Zero -30° to 210°F (-34.4° to 98.9°C)
Minimum Span 40°F (4.4°C)
Usable Range -30° to 250°F (-34.4° to 121.1°C)
Operating Humidity 0% to 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
Dimensions 1.8"W x 2.25"L x 1"H
(4.6 x 5.7 x 2.5 cm)
Approvals CE
Weight 0.16 lb (0.07 kg) w/o options
Warranty 18 months
SPECIFICATIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT

1349. fi 1283TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 10.5-45 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA, loop-powered
Maximum Output
Impedance 675Ω @ 24 VDC
Sensor Element 1000Ω RTD
Accuracy 0.2°F or 0.4% of span
Rangeability
Zero -30° to 210°F (-34.4° to 98.9°C)
Minimum Span 40 °F(4.4°C)
Usable Range -30° to 250°F (-34.4° to 121.1°C)
Operating Temperature 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
Dimensions 1.8"W x 2.25"L x 1"H
(4.6 x 5.7 x 2.54 cm)
Weight 0.16 lb (0.09 kg)
Warranty 18 months
1000 OHM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER
T5U, T63U SERIES
LOOP
NORM
TEMP
SENSOR
TEMP
SENSOR
20
LOOP
1.8
(4.58)
in
(cm)
2.25
(5.72)
Height: 1.0
(2.54)
100fi
RTD Sensor
(sold separately)
4-20 mA
Signal
Power Supply
10.5-45 VDC
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Models T5U and T63U Transmitters are field
rangeable, two-wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitters designed
for use with Type 5 nickel-iron sensors, the Precon Type 63
sensors, or the JCI TE6300 Series
. Each one delivers reilable
and accurate performance for a wide variety of applcations.
This tr
ansmitter can be combined with any Type 63 Precon
sensors incorporating the optional “XW” weather resistant box for a one package application solution.
To adjust the temperature transmitter, set the DIP switches to
match the desired range, and use the zero and span pots to fine tune
. A high accuracy digital ohmmeter and decade box
are required.
FEATURES
• Dip s
• Loop calibration test signal
• Low cost
• Snap-track mounting
• Loop-powered LED indication
• Conformal coated
APPLICATION
• TΩ Nickel-Iron RTDs •
Transmitter for Johnson Controls 1000Ω Nickel RTDs
• Transmitter for Precon’s Type 63 RTDs
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
T63U
ORDERING INFORMATION
T63U 2 Example: T63U-2 transmitter for 1000fi nickel RTD with range of
-20° to 140°F
†Indicate at time of order
MODEL DESCRIPTION
T5U 4-20 mA 1000 fi nickel-iron RTD transmitter
T63U
4-20 mA 1000fi nickel RTD transmitter
RANGE
2
-20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
3 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C)
4 30° to 240°F (-1° to 116°C)
XR
† Special range (see specifications for rangeability limits)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

1350. fi
TEMPERATURE 1284fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 8.5-35 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA
Maximum Output
Impedance 750Ω @ 24 VDC,
(Supply voltage - 8.5) / 0.02A
Accuracy ±0.1% of span
Linearity ±0.1% of span
Sensor Type TT801 Three-wire, 100Ω 385
platinum RTD (accepts two-wire input also)
TT807 Two-wire, 1000Ω 375 or
385 platinum RT
Calibration Range Min span 35°F (19°C)
Max span 1112°F (600°C)
Zero Limited by the sensor used
Span Adjustments ±5% typical, factory-set, non-
interacting
Zero Adjustments ±5% typical, factory-set, non-
interacting
RTD Current RTD current
TT801 1 mA nominal
TT807 0.2 mA nominal
Protection Polarity Diode protected
Operating Temperature -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Mounting Mounts inside a handy box
Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg)
Warranty 3 years
PLATINUM RTD TEMPERATURE INDUSTRIAL TRANSMITTER
TT801, TT807 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Minco TT801 and TT807 two-wire 4-20 mA temperature transmitters connect to platinum 100
Ω
and 1000 Ω RTDs. The TT800s are custom calibrated for
those tough high and low temperature application ranges.
These compact tr
ansmitters are extremely rugged and have
excellent performance specifications
.The TT801 accepts
a two-wire or three-wire 100 Ω RTD input, and the TT807
accepts a two-wire 1000 Ω input. The 4-20 mA signal is
factory calibrated over the full range of the user-specified temperature span to provide excellent performance for either thin film or wire-wound platinum RTDs
.
FEATURES
• 4-20 mA signal transmitter
• 1000/100Ω RTD input
• Wide, high and low calibration ranges
• Standard handy-box mounting
• Two and three-wire RTD wiring optional
• Factory calibrated
• Functional equivalent to HCT-801 and HCT-807
• 100% substitute for the discontinued Hycal
transmitters
MOUNTING
SPECIFICATIONS
-1fiF OFFSET FOR CABLE LENGTHS BELOW
WIRE GAUGE 1000fi 100fi
(AWG) ft (m) ft (m)
12 1200 (365) 120 (36)
14 800 (244) 80 (24)
16 500 (152) 50 (15)
18 310 (94) 31 (9.4)
20 200 (60) 20 (6)
22 124 (38) 12 (3.8)
Values provided are for two-wire stranded copper and are for
reference only. Terminations may also affect the offset.
Note: Three-wire transmitters have two white wires and
one black wire. Connect the white wires to the two common
sensor leads and black to the other lead. If the sensor has
only tw
o leads, short the two transmitter white wires together
and connect to one side of the sensor
. Connect the black to
the other side. See Table 1 on previous page.
TT801PD1BN

1351. fi 1285TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
MINCO
3.75
(9.52)
3.28
(8.33)
1.75
(4.45)
0.7
(1.78)
2.5
(6.35)
1/4" dia, two places
(for #8 mtg screw)
Optional Customer-
Supplied Handy Box
and Cover
in
(cm)
(white)
(white)
(black)
Optional Field Wiring
100fi
Platinum
RTD Sensor
TT801
(white)
(black)
1000fi
Platinum
RTD Sensor
Power Supply
(red)
(black)
4-20 mA
Signal
TT807
Power Supply
(red)
(black)
4-20 mA
Signal
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
PLATINUM RTD TEMPERATURE INDUSTRIAL TRANSMITTER
TT801, TT807 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
TT801 Transmitter for three-wire PT100 RTDs (must use a PD sensor curve)
TT807 Transmitter for two-wire PT1000 RTDs (must use a PW, PF sensor curve)
PD 100fi 0.00385 fi/fi/°C platinum cur ve, 6" leads
PF 1000fi 0.00385 fi/fi/°C platinum cur ve, 6" leads
PW 1000fi 0.00375 fi/fi/°C platinum cur ve, 6" leads
1 4-20 mA DC output
EN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-20°/140°F) or (-29°/60°C), former B2 code
S Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°F) or (-18°/38°C)
A Range codes per Minco letter ranges (20°/120°F) or (-7°/49°C)
BI Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/130°F) or (-1°/54°C)
KK Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/180°F) or (-1°/82°C) (not available with PF, PW models)
BN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/240°F) or (-1°/116°C), former B1 code
N Range codes per Minco letter ranges (32°/122°F) or (0°/50°C), former B3 code
H Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40°/90°F) or (4°/32°C)
M Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-50°/50°C)
C Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°C)
BW Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/250°C) (not available with PF, PW models)
JW Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/500°C) (not available with PF, PW models)

MODEL DESCRIPTION
Example: TT807PW1A PT1000 transmitter for 1000fi, 375 cur ve platinum RTD, ranged for 20°/120°FTT807 PW 1 A
Note: Three-wire transmitters have two white wires and one black wire. Connect the white wires to the two common sensor leads
and black to the other lead. If the sensor has only two leads, short the two transmitter white wires together and connect to
one side of the sensor. Connect the black to the other side. See Table 1 on previous page.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

1352. fi
TEMPERATURE 1286fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 9.4-35 VDC
Signal Output 4-20 mA, two-wire
Maximum Output
Impedance 730Ω @ 24 VDC; (Supply voltage -
9.4) / 0.02A
Accuracy Transmitter accuracy ±0.1% of span
Transmitter linearity ±0.1% of span
Sensor accuracy ±0.12%
Rangeability Zero -50° to 212°F (-45° to 100°C)
Span 30° to 320°F (17° to 180°C)
Sensor Type 1000 platinum RTD, two-wire
0.00375 Ω/Ω/°C TCR
0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C TCR
Operating Temperature -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)
Enclosure Cast aluminum moisture-resistant
1/2” FNPT and gasketed cover, suitable for outdoor use, UL #459L
Averaging Sensor
Copper
Probe Stainless steel
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals; non-polar, for
connections either way; 4" (10 cm) 22 AWG leads
Weight Duct
0.8 lb (0.36 Kg)
AVG 12'
1.5 lb (0.68 Kg)
24' 2 lb (0.91 Kg)
50' 3.6 lb (1.63 Kg)
OSA 0.75 lb (0.34 Kg)
Immersion 0.75 lb (0.34 Kg)
Wall 0.75 lb (0.34 Kg)
Warranty 3 years
1000 OHM PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
TT809 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Minco TT809 is a 1000Ω Platinum RTD User-
Rangeable Temperature Transmitter. Zero setting can
be an
ywhere from -50° to 212°F (-45° to 100°C) and span
from 30° to 320°F (17° to 180°C)
. The TT809 comes factory
calibrated, and once installed, it can be field calibrated with high precision DVM and decade box
. The TT809 is easily
calibrated by adjusting the zero pot to match the calibration reference
.
The gasketed cast-metal housing provides excellent weather
resistance. The screw terminal connections on the transmitter
circuit, 1/2" NPT threaded connection, and adjustable mounting brackets simplify installation
. Several varieties of
precision 1000Ω platinum RTD probes are easily mated with
the transmitter housing.
FEATURES
• Switc •
One-point field calibration
• Non-polar loop connections
• Weatherproof sensor interface housing
• Non-interacting zero/span adjustment
SPECIFICATIONS
OSA (O)
WS-6
TT-809-A
Wall-Mount
(W)
Duct (E)
Immersion (P)
Averaging (V)
Mated Probe Selection

1353. fi 1287TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
TT809PW055P Immersion
TT809PW000W Enclosure Only
4.5
(11.43)
in
(cm)
2.0
(5.08)
6.5
(16.5)
5.5
(13.97)
0.25
(0.64)
TT809PW040O Outdoor
2.88
(7.30)
4.63 (11.75)
2.0
(5.08)
1.5
(3.81)
5.5 (13.97)
2.75
(6.99)
2.0
(5.08)
8.0 (20.32) (E)
or
24' (7.31m)
Coiled Copper (V)
0.25
(0.635)
TT809PW080E Duct; TT809PW288V Averaging
4.5 (11.43) 1/2"
NPT
2.0
(5.08)
Foam Gasket
1/2" FNPT
Power Connection Sensor Connection
Span and Zero
Adjustments
2.75
(6.99)
The TT809 has range switch adjustments and non-interacting
zero and span pots. The weatherproof box is standard and
provides easy accessibility for installation and service.
Zero Po t
Span Po t
1234
1000 RT D
375 Platinum
or
385 Platinum
4-20 mA
Signal
9.4 -35V
Power
Supply
TT809
Temperature Transmitter
- -
+
+
WIRINGDIMENSIONS
1000 OHM PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
TT809 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
TT809 Assembly probe for two-wire RTDs
PW 1000 fi 0.0375 fi/fi/°C platinum cur ve, 6" leads
LLL
Length LLL in 0.1" increments 040 = 4.0", 120 = 12.0", 0.000 fo r “W” without sensors
E Duct mount, weather-resistant box, LLL typically = 8.0"
V Duct av eraging, weather-resistant box, LLL must be = 144", 288", or 600"
O Outside air, weather-resistant box with weather shield, LLL = 4.0"
P Immersion, weather-resistant box, LLL typically = 5.5" for 6" well insertion
W W all mount, weather-resistant box, LLL typically 4.0" or 000 fo r no probe"
1 4-20 mA DC output
BI Range codes 30°/130°F (-1°/54°C)
S Range codes 0°/100°F (-18°/38°C)
H Range codes 40°/90°F (4°/32°C)
N Range codes 32°/122°F (0°/50°C)
EN Range codes -20°/140°F (-29°/60°C)
1 No calibration data, sensor, or transmitter
2 S ensor/transmitter matched at 0°C with NIST
3 S ensor/transmitter matched at 0°, 100°, and 260°C with NIST
MODEL DESCRIPTION Sample order:
TT809PW080E1S1 Transmitter with 8" duct
probe, 375 curve platinum
RT D, ranged for 0°/100°F
TT809PW055P1BI2 Transmitter with 5.5"
immersion probe, 375
curve RTD, with NIST
at 0°C, ranged for 30°/130°F
TT809PW000W1N1 Transmitter only for two-
wire 1000fi, 375 curve

RTD, ranged for 32°/122°F
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
CC-1G-K Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip 1391
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
M-648-K Copper-clad capillary mounting clip 1391
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298
WB-6 Brass well 1293
WS-6 Stainless steel well 1293

1354. fi
TEMPERATURE 1288fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Supply Voltage 10.5 -45 VDC
Signal Output 4-20mA, loop-powered
Maximum Output
Impedance mA 675Ω @ 24VDC
Accuracy 0.1°F or 0.2% span
Sensor Type 1000Ω platinum 375 curve, 1000Ω
platinum 385 curve, 100Ω platinum 385 curve
Operating Temperature
0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 0% to 95% non-condensing
Mounting Directly to wall or enclosure
Dimensions 2.8” x 1.9” x 0.6”
( 7.1 x 4.8 x 1.4 cm)
Weight 0.5 lb ( 0.2 Kg)
Warranty 18 months
DESCRIPTION
The Kele T*PNR Series Temperature Transmitters are fixed range, two-wire 4-20mA transmitters used with Type 81, 85 and 91 series sensors
. The transmitters are available
in six standard ranges for temperature control and building automation
.
The Kele T81PNR Series is used with the Type 81 100Ω
platium RTD sensor.The Kele T815NR Series is used with
the Type 85 1000Ω 385 platium RTD sensor. The Kele
T91PNR Series is used with the Type 91 1000Ω 375 platium RTD sensor
.
FEATURES
• Lo •
Mounted on cover of handy box
• Easy to install
• Six preconfigured ranges
• Comes with 2" x 4" handibox (already installed)
• Conformal coated
WIRING
PLATINUM RTD TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
T81PNR, T85PNR, T90PNR SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Supply
10.5-45 VDC
LOOP
LOOP
TEMP
TEMP
SENSOR
SENSOR
RTD SENSOR
(sold separately)
4-20 MA
Signal
Loop Po wer
LED
T90PNR 3Example: T90PNR-3 transmitter for 1000fi platinum RTD with a 4-20mA
output for 0° to 100°F(-18° to 38°C)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
T81PNR Transmitter for type 81 100fi 385 platinum RTD
T85PNR
Transmitter for type 85 1000fi 385 platinum RTD
T90PNR
Transmitter for type 91 1000fi 375 platinum RTD
RANGE
2
-20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C)
3 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C)
4 30° to 240°F (-1° to 116°C)
12 -22° to 113°F (-30° to 45°C)
13 32° to 212°F (0° to 100°C)
14 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
T81PNR
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

1355. fi 1289TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±15% (50/60 Hz), 0.3 VA
Signal Output 1-5 VDC, 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Accuracy ±3.6°F (2°C)
Sensor Coverage Adjustable (344 degrees
horizontal/65 degrees vertical)
Sensing Distance Unlimited (without obstructions)
View Angle 52 degrees,
distance to sensing = 1:1
Response Time 10 sec
Emissivity 0.95
Operating Humidity 10% to 90% RH non-condensing
Operating Temperature 59° to 95°F (15° to 35°C)
Enclosure Rating Fire-resistant plastic (white)
Weight 0.6 lb (0.27 kg)
Warranty 1 year
INFRARED ROOM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
TY7321A1009
DESCRIPTION
The Yamatake Model TY7321 is a non-contact infrared room
radiant-temperature transmitter. Infrared energy is one of the
main components of the perceived temperature in a space.
The
Model TY7321 has a wide 52° fixed viewing angle which
averages the heat energy of the office environment and offers a 1-5 VDC signal for temperature. It mounts conveniently
to any ceiling or wall via back box or direct to ceiling tiles or plaster
. The lens coverage is adjustable and points
horizontally up to 344° and vertically up to 65°.
FEATURES
• Non-contact with 52° view angle
• 1 to 5 VDC signal, 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
• Ten-second response
• 344° swivel coverage
• Ceiling or wall mount
• Attractive white base and cover
The TY7321A1009 is used when mounting a physical sensor is not possible in room applications. The thermopile senses the
background heat radiation over an open-air environment and averages the energy into a 1-5V temperature signal. It is ideal in
open office en
vironments when the cubical walls prevent sensor mounting
. Museums or marble entrance halls are also useful
ceiling applications. When directed at a sun-drenched outdoor window, the unit measures the effects from the sun so that the
supply air can be increased to compensate for thermal loading.
SPECIFICATIONS
+
+
–
24 VAC
1-5 VDC
Signal
Terminate to Base
2
3
1
1
3
2
4
6
5
4
WIRING
TY7321A1009
APPLICATION

1356. fi
TEMPERATURE 1290fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
5.5 (13.97)
Base Mounting Screw
Terminal Cover
Boxless Type Box Type
Washer
Spring Mounting
Bracket
in
(cm)
3.4 (8.64)
2.2 (5.59)
2.9
(7.37)
0.35
(0.90)
9.0
(2.39)
Sensing
Window
Mounting Base
to Back Box
1.8
(4.57)
2.6
(6.60)
3.5
(8.89)
Spring
Mounting Bracket
Base
Mounting Screw
Square Hole
Wiring
Terminal Cover
Sensor
Mounting
Base
Align the small slot on
the sensor with the
triangle on the mounting
base. Turn the sensor
until it clicks.
2.25
(5.72)
Turn the base
mounting screw two
or three times to
attach loosely.
Push the mounting base
into hole. Turn the base
mounting screw until spring
brackets are firmly engaged
above ceiling.
Mounting
Base
Base Assembly Base Installation Sensor Installation
MOUNTING
DIMENSIONS
INFRARED ROOM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
TY7321A1009
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TY7321A1009 Infrared room temperature transmitter, ceiling mount
65°
Adjustable
Vertical
344°
Adjustable
Horizontal
52° Fixed Optics
D:S = 1:1
MOUNTING
RELATED PRODUCTS
691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2

1357. fi 1291TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
4
12
3
1: V+
2: Switched Output NO
3: V-
4: Switched Output NO
2:
4:
1
4
2
3
V+
V-
TK7330
Switched Output NO
Switched Output NO
White
Brown
Black
Blue
4
12
3
1: V+ 2: Switched Output NC 3: V-
4: Switched Output NO
2: 4:
1
4
2
3
V+
V-
TK6330
Switched Output NO
Switched Output NC
Supply Voltage 9.6 to 32 VDC, 530 mA
Media Temperature Range
-13° to 284°F (-25° to 140°C)
Setpoint Range TK6330
3° to 284°F (-16° to 140°C)

TK7330
-4° to 284°F (-20° to 140°C)
Reset TK6330
Adjustable: -4° to 277°F
(-20° to 136°C)
TK7330 Fixed: 9°F (5°C)
Contact Rating 0.5A DC PNP (sourcing)
Contact Type TK6330
1 NO, 1 NC, open collector transistor
TK7330 2 NO, open collector transistor
Accuracy ±5.4°F (3.0°C)
Repeatability ±0.18°F (0.1°C)
Wetted Parts Stainless 316L/1.4404
Visual Indication Power Green LED Switching status
Yellow LED (Energized = Switched)
Shock 50g (11ms)
Vibration Resistance 20g (10 to 2000 Hz)
Operating Temperature -13° to 158°F (-25° to 70°C)
Enclosure IP67; Material: PBT (Pocan); PC
(Makrolon); FPM (Viton); stainless steel 316L
Process Connection
¼" NPT
Wiring Terminations 4 pin M12 Electrical connector
(order separately)
Dimensions 1.06" diameter x 4.15"H
(2.7 x 10.5 cm)
Approvals UL File E179189, CE
Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 Kg)
Warranty 2 years
TEMPERATURE SWITCH
TK SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The IFM Efector TK Series Temperature Switch is a versatile temperature switch that is configured for set point and reset through two radial setting rings
. These temperature
switches are ideal for maximum and minimum temperature indication applications
. The switch points can be set up out
of the box without being installed and applied to the system.
Once set, the
y can be locked by a third rotating ring
. The TK
Series is available with either set point and reset adjustment or two set points and a fixed reset
. Each TK Series
Temperature Switch should be ordered with a separate cable assembly available in 6' (1
.8 m), 15' (4.6 m), 30 ft (9.1 m)
lengths.
FEATURES
• Two, easy to use dual setup dials
• Solid state electronics
• Two PNP switching outputs
• No software needed
• Local LEDs for power and switching status
WIRING - TK7330
SPECIFICATIONS
WIRING - TK6330
TK6330

1358. fi
TEMPERATURE 1292fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
1.06 (2.7)
1.06 (2.7)
M12x1
1/4 -18 NPT
1.38 (3.5)
1.89 (4.8)
3.78 (9.6)
4.15 (10.6)
in
(cm)
0.32 (0.82)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TK6330 TK Series temperature switch, adjustable reset, 3° to 284°F (-16° to 140°C), 1 NO 1 NC contacts
TK7330 TK Series temperature switch, fixed reset, 9°F (5°C) -4° to 284°F (-20° to 140°C), 2 NO contacts
*Connector required, see below
DIMENSIONS
TEMPERATURE SWITCH
TK SERIES
1: Locking ring 2: Setting ri ngs (manually adustable after unlocking)
3: LED green: supply voltage O. K.
4: Setting marks 5: LED yellow: value [SET] reached, OUT1 = ON / OUT2 = OFF
6: Process connection 1/4'' NPT pin 4 = OUT1 / pin 2 = OUT2
Minimum distance between [SET] and [RESET] = 5.4?F (TK6330)
To obtain the setting accuracy: Set both rings to the minimum
value, then set the requested va lues.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
SET
RESET
TK6330 TK7330
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
SWITCH 1
SWITCH 2
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
E30094 VK/TK Series protective cover
EVC001 6' (1.8 m) foot straight connector
EVC002 15' (4.6 m) straight connector
EVC003 30' (9.1 m) straight connector
EVC004 6' (1.8 m) right-angled connector
EVC005 15' (4.6 m) right-angled connector
EVC006 30' (9.1 m) right-angled connector
EVC007 6' (1.8 m) right angled connector with LED indication
EVC008 15' (4.6 m) right angled connector with LED indication
EVC009 30' (9.1 m) right angled connector with LED indication

1359. fi 1293TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTIONMODEL
WB
WBF
WS
WSF
FB-3
FS-3
2.5" element length
4.0" element length
6.0" element length
9.0" element length
Specify custom length (12", 15", 18", or 24")
2.5 (6.35)
4 (10.16)
6 (15.24)
9 (22.86)
12-24
2 (5.08)
3.5 (8.89)
5.5 (13.97)
8.5 (20.40)
XX - 0.5 = Probe length
2.5
4
6
9
XX
LENGTH DESIGNATION (well only)
in (cm) in (cm)
Precon
XL-probe length
Minco
probe length
Example: WBF-9 brass well with 9" element length and FB-3 adapter
WBF
–
9
Brass well
Brass well with FB-3 1/2" to 1/8" well adapter
304 stainless steel well
304 stainless steel well with FS-3 1/2" to 1/8" well adapter
1/2" to 1/8" brass well adapter for use with Precon and T102 sensors
1/2" to 1/8" stainless steel well adapter for use with Precon and T102 sensors
0.5
(1.27)
1.13
(2.86)
0.26
(0.66)
0.5
(1.27)
1.75
*
(4.44)
0.88
(2.22)
External Dimensions
Internal Dimensions
A
B
C
D
C
D
AB
1/2" NPT
1/8" NPSM
1/2" NPT
FB-3
FS-3
0.75
(1.91)
in
(cm)
NOTE: Inside threads are 1/2" NPSM; outside threads are 1/2" NPT.
*For WB-2.5 and WS-2.5 the head dimension is 1.5" long
DIMENSIONS
SENSOR THERMOWELLS AND WELL ADAPTERS
WB, WS
FS-3
MODEL ELEMENT INSERTION SHANK DIA OVERALL
LENGTH A LENGTH B LENGTH C LENGTH D
WB-2.5 2.5 (6.35) 1.4 (3.56) N/A 2.75 (6.99)
WS-2.5 2.5 (6.35) 1.4 (3.56) N/A 2.75 (6.99)
WB-4 4.0 (10.16) 2.5 (6.35) N/A 4.3 (10.92)
WS-4 4.0 (10.16) 2.5 (6.35) N/A 4.3 (10.92)
WB-6 6.0 (15.24) 4.5 (11.43) 0.625 (1.59) 6.3 (16.00)
WS-6 6.0 (15.24) 4.5 (11.43) 0.625 (1.59) 6.3 (16.00)
WB-9 9.0 (22.86) 7.5 (19.05) 0.625 (1.59) 9.3 (23.62)
WS-9 9.0 (22.86) 7.5 (19.05) 0.625 (1.59) 9.3 (23.62)
FB-3 0.44 (1.12) 0.31 (0.79) 0.5 (1.27) 0.75 (1.91)
TCC-111
TCC-12
FB-3 Adapter
WS-4
WB-6
DESCRIPTION
WB and WS Bulb Wells are used with standard or custom
length PreCon immersion thermistors and Type 63, 71, 81,
85 and 91 RTD sensors by using the FB-3 (brass) or FS-3
(stainless steel) adapter
. These wells are also used directly
with Minco immersion sensors and are designed to be installed into a standard 1/2" saddle or Thredolet®
.
WB Brass Wells are compatible with noncorrosive liquids.
The
y will withstand a maximum temperature of 400°F (204°C)
at a static pressure of 1000 psi (6
.9MPa).
WS 304 Stainless Steel
Wells are compatible with corrosive
or noncorrosive liquids
. These will withstand a maximum
temperature of 1000°F (538°C) at a static pressure of 4500 psi (31 MPa)
.
WARRANTY 1 year
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298

1360. fi
TEMPERATURE 1294fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
SENSOR THERMOWELLS AND WELL ADAPTERS
F2B-D, F2N-B, F2S-D, WEL-B, WEL-S
1/8-27 NPSM Internal Thread
1/2" NPT
3.25
(8.26)
0.5
(1.27)
5.13
(13.03)
4.94
(12.54)
WEL-B Brass Well or
WEL-S Stainless Steel Well
1/2" NPSM Female Thread
0.69
(1.75)
0.63
(1.58)
1/8" NPSM
Male Fitting
F2B-D Brass
F2S-D Stainless Steel
F2N-D Nylon
1.31
(3.33)
1/2" NPSM Female Thread
(insertion length add 0.31" (0.97))

Well Adapters
1/8" NPSM
Male Fitting
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
WEL-B and WEL-S Sensor Wells are used with standard
length Kele and Precon branded immersion thermistor and
RTD sensors
. These wells may be used with 5" (12.7 cm)
Minco immersion sensors by using the "H" option adapter.
The w
ell is designed to be installed into a standard 1/2"
saddle or Thredolet®
The WEL-B Brass Thermowell is the standard thermowell
for inserting into noncorrosive liquid lines
. It will withstand
a maxim
um temperature of 400°F (204°C) and a maximum
static pressure of 1000 psig (6
.9 MPa).The WEL-S 304
Stainless Steel Thermowell is inserted into corrosive liquid
pipe lines. It will withstand a maximum temperature of 1000°F
(538°C) and a maximum static pressure of 4500 psig (31 MPa)
.
The F2S-D Stainless Steel, F2N-D Nylon, or the F2B-D
Brass Well Adapter allows a 1/4" (0.64 cm) diameter sensor
probe with a 1/2" NTSM fitting to be used with a standard WEL-B or WEL-S Thermowell
.
WARRANTY 1 year
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION WEL Bulb wells
B Brass bulb well
S 304 Stainless steel bulb well
OPTIONAL ADAPTER
F2B-D* brass adapter for use with WEL-B
F2S-D* stainless steel adapter for use with WEL-S
H
Example: WEL-B
brass bulb well with F2B-D brass adapter
* For use with Minco sensor probe length LLL=5.5"
WELB H
F2N-D
TCC-111
TCC-12
F2B-D
F2S-D
WEL-B
WEL-S
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
F2B-D Brass adapter 1/2” NPT to 1/8” NPS adapter
F2N-D Nylon adapter 1/8” NPSM x 1/2” NPSM
F2S-D Stainless steel adapter 1/8” NPS x 1/2” NPSM
TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298
TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298

1361. fi 1295TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
XA
OPTIONS
SENSOR OPTIONS
4.625
(11.75)
4.0
(10.2)
2.0
(5.08)
in
(cm)
1/2"
NPT
1/2" NPT
XCO
XH
4"
1.88
2.13
2.95
(7.5)
2.95
(7.5)
1.65
(4.2)
in
(cm)
XHP
SETPOINT OPTION FOR FLUSH SENSOR (ST-S*)
Two-wire with resistance from 0Ω to 10,000Ω (0Ω to 1500Ω
optional XA1500), flush enclosure with pigtails for the
connection
GREENFIELD FITTING (factory installed) Option available with ST-D sensor
SETPOINT OPTION FOR EXECUTIVE SENSOR (ST-S*E) Two-wire with resistance from 10,000Ω to 30,000Ω , (1000Ω to
3000Ω, opt
. XA10K),(1000Ω to 1400Ω, opt. XA2K)
HAND
Y-BOX HOUSING (factory installed) Equipped with
eleven 1/2" knockouts, option available with ST-A, ST-D, and ST-W sensors
SETPOINT OPTION FOR SPACE SENSOR (ST-S*P) Two-wire with resistance from 0Ω to 10,000Ω (0Ω to 1500Ω
optional XA1500), space enclosure with pigtails for the connection
PLASTIC EUROPEAN-TYPE HANDY BOX Complete with four 3/4" cutouts, two open cable cutouts and snap-on cover, option available on all ST-A, ST-W, and ST-D sensors
1/2" STANDARD SERVICE CONDUIT (LB) FITTING Available for the ST-A all-purpose and ST-W immersion sensors
1/2" SEALTITE STRAIGHT FITTING Used for liquid-tight connection, available for the ST-W immersion sensors
XGXA
XA
XLT

1362. fi
TEMPERATURE 1296fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
XTA
Red Indicator
Lamp
OPTIONS
SENSOR OPTIONS
1.0
(2.5)
0.25
(0.63)
in
(cm)
1.75
(4.44)
5.0
(12.70)
(red)
5.0
(12.70)
0.5
(1.27)+
–
(black)
Adjust Po t
(18-22 mA)
in
(cm)
XME
XK
Executive
Space
XME
XPL
XS
XTA/XTAC
CLM-20
CUSTOM LOGO Any logo or wording added to the space or
executive enclosure, minimum order and customer artwork
required
SECURITY SCREWS For use with ST-S* sensors, see SD-6
spanner screwdriver
MOMENTARY PUSH BUTTON Wired N
.O. with pigtails, N.C.
a
vailable upon request for
flush and executive enclosures
ANALOG BIMETAL THERMOMETER Measures 50° to 90°F for ST-S*E sensors XTA Measures 13° to 29°C for ST-S*E sensors XTAC
MOMENTARY MEMBRANE PUSH BUTTON Wired N
.O. with
pigtails or to ter
minals when used with options requiring circuit
cards, available with executive room enclosures only
DIGITAL THERMOMETER OPTION 3-1/2 digit display readout from 15° to 32°C with one-year battery, 3/8" high, display updates every 10 seconds
RED LED INDICATOR LAMP Powered externally with 24 VAC/
VDC and connected via a terminal block
Decorator
XM
CLM-20 Limits the output of any 4-20 mA transmitter to a factory set 20 mA, wired in series, and adds 125
Ω of effective load to the
transmitter

1363. fi 1297TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ACCESSORIES FOR TEMPERATURE PRODUCTS
TEMPERATURE SENSOR ACCESSORIES
Adjustable fo r
2" to 8" pipe
(5-20 cm)
4.25
(10.80)
in
(cm)
in
(cm)
4.25
(8.25)
2.5
(6.35)
2.75
(6.99)
4.25
(10.80)
in
(cm)
5.25"
7"
Rear View (not actual size)
A
A
B
B
B
C C
C
D
D
4½'' 1
3/ 16
''
1¾''
3¼''
2¼''3¼''
29
∕
32
''
2.25
(5.72)
in
(cm)
1.0
(2.54)
2.65
(6.73)
0.37
(0.95)
Exposed Insert
TM
APB-28
BKT-1
BKT-2
KT-1
10-531
SSPL-2 ISPL-1
ADJUSTABLE PIPE BRACKET
MODEL APB-28
The APB-28 is used with Model ST-R*SC, STR* S, KTM*SC,
KTM*S sensors. The bracket can be used on pipe sizes from
2" to 8" (5.08 to 20.32 cm) outside diameter. Precon TCC-12
thermal conducting compound should be used with the bracket to improve heat transfer between the pipe and the temperature sensor
. Insulate approximately 2' (61m) on each side of the
probe for best results.
AD
APTER BRACKET
MODEL BKT-1
The BKT-1 can be used with Models WMB-1 or ST-S*P to
mount directly on a standard electrical box
. Mounting screws
are provided.
DRYWALL ADAPTER BRACKET
MODEL BKT-2
The BKT-2 is used to mount wall sensors directly to drywall
quickly and securely. Simply cut a hole and bend the ears over
the back of the drywall. Then, secure with supplied drywall
screws
ADAPTER PLATE
MODEL ISPL-1, SSPL-1
The ISPL-1 ivory model and the SSPL-1 stainless steel
model are standard light switch plates that can be used with
the BKT-1 as attractive mounting plates for installing a Model
WMB-1 or ST-S*P on a standard electrical box
. Mounting
scre
ws are provided
.
SENSOR AD
APTER PLATE
MODEL 10-531
The 10-531 plate is ideal for cover mounting holes from old
sensors
. For the KTR*, ST-S*EW, ST-T90EW, ST-T91K.
SENSOR COVER REMOVER TOOL 1/16"
MODEL KT-1
The KT-1 tool fits Kele and most TAC, Johnson Controls, and
Siemens covers. The tool has a 1/16" hex top and a reversible
blade (flat and Philips).

1364. fi
TEMPERATURE 1298fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ACCESSORIES FOR TEMPERATURE PRODUCTS
TEMPERATURE SENSOR ACCESSORIES
1.63
(4.13)
2.63
(6.67)
in
(cm)
Shown with
custom logo
1.38
(3.49)
1.75
(4.45)
in
(cm)
Shown with
custom logo
0.31
(0.8)
0.63
(1.59)
in
(cm)
XS Option Screw Head
3.88
(9.84)
in
(cm)
PN-10
PN-26
PN-46
SD-6
TCC-12
TCC-111
BRUSHED ALUMINUM FACEPLATE
MODEL PN-10
The PN-10 is a blank Brushed Aluminum Faceplate for use
with the WMB-1 enclosure. Customized logos are available.
DECORATIVE FACEPLATE
MODELS PN-26, PN-32
The gray PN-26 or tan PN-32 Decorative Faceplates are
available for use with the WMB-2 enclosure. Customized logos
are available.
RAW SENSOR CLIP
MODEL PN-46
The PN-46 is used where an aluminum clip is desired to mount
a raw sensor into an existing enclosure. The PN- 46 includes
adhesive backing for easy installation.
SPANNER DRIVER
MODEL SD-6
The SD-6 Spanner Driver is used to install the security screws
(XS option) for the ST-S* sensor.
THERMAL CONDUCTING COMPOUND MODEL TCC-12
The
TCC-12 Thermal Conducting Compound is a metal oxide-
filled, dielectric, silicone-based compound that facilitates heat
transfer by filling voids and gaps between mating surfaces
. The
operating temperature range is -65° to 400°F (-54° to 204°C).
The compound is pac
kaged in convenient, single-application,
0
.13 fl oz (12 gram) tubes.
THERMAL CONDUCTING COMPOUND MODEL TCC-111
The
TCC-111 Thermal Conducting Compound consists of
an aluminum powder in a barium grease-based compound
.
It f
acilitates heat transfer by filling voids and gaps between
mating surfaces
. The operating temperature limit is 300°F
(148°C). The compound is packaged in a convenient 3.75 fl oz
(111 mL) tub.

1365. fi 1299TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ACCESSORIES FOR TEMPERATURE PRODUCTS
TEMPERATURE SENSOR ACCESSORIES
0.31
(0.79)
1/2 EMT
Conduit Nut
4.25
(10.8)
4.31
(10.95)
5.86
(14.88)
7.13
(18.11)
1.75
(4.45)
3.75 (9.53)
Probe
Insert
WMB-1 WMB-2
ES-1051
13F142 TR10K
SOLAR COMPENSATOR
MODEL M-2500
The Model M-2500 Solar Compensator is a non-directional
device used to compensate for the solar effects on buildings.
Mount outside in sunlight to measure the solar gain e
xperienced by the building envelope
. Any 1/4" probe may be
inserted into the solar chamber. This device is ideal for tuning
perimeter hot water reset to each building's requirements.
PRECISION RESISTORS
MODEL 250R-3-1, 13F142, ZGR01, TR10K
The 250R-3-1 is a 250Ω 3-watt 1% resistor used to convert
a 4-20 mA signal to a 1-5 volt signal and is perfect for use in
areas with limited access.
The 13F142 is a 250Ω, 3-watt, 1% resistor packaged with
instructions to convert a 4-20 mA signal to a 1-5V signal.
The ZGR01 is a 500Ω, 1/2-watt, 1.2% resistor used to convert
a 4-20mA signal to a 2-10V signal.
The
TR10K is a 10,000
Ω, 1/4-watt, 0.1% resistor with alligator
clips for static testing of Type 3 or 24 thermistors at 77°F.
WALL SENSOR ENCLOSURE
MODEL WMB
The WMB is a vented, plastic wall enclosure. A raw sensor can
be snapped directly in contact with the aluminum faceplate. The
WMB can be mounted directly to sheet rock block walls using
the screws provided.
NON-CFC FREEZE SPRA
Y
MODEL ES-1051
The ES-1051 is ideal for quick point-to-point sensor wiring
verification and freezestat operability
. Freeze each sensor in
order, check the trend printout, and rework the terminations as needed
. Each unit contains 8 fl oz (235 mL).
M-2500
WMB-3 WMB-4
in
(cm)

1366. fi
TEMPERATURE 1300fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
3.81
(9.7)
3.125
(7.9)
Standard
paddle switch
Standard
toggle sw itch
Two-digit, 0.5" LCD display
1.31 (3.3)
2.4
(6.1)
5.44
(13.8)
75°F
DESCRIPTION
EXTERNAL COMMUNICATIONS JACK
MODEL XJ1
For use with handheld terminals, requires adapter cable
CCRJ11AD
MODEL DESCRIPTION
12201 Single gang ivory toggle, °F/°C and % RH
11101 Single gang white rocker, °F/°C and % RH
12100 Single gang white toggle, °F/°C
12200 Single gang ivory toggle, °F/°C
11100 Single gang white paddle, °F/°C
12101 Single gang white toggle, °F/°C and % RH
INTERNAL COMMUNICA
TIONS JACK
Model XJ2 For use with handheld terminals
CABLE ACCESSORY FOR XJ1 MODEL CC-RJ11AD The CC-RJ11AD is used to interface to the XJ1 option on the ST-S*E sensor
. The CC-RJ11AD is 6" (15.24 cm) long with an 8-pin
(four pins used) connector for the XJ1 side and a female RJ11 connector on the other.
P
OUT
IN
POT
COMP
SENS
SENSOR
EXT
SENS
S
Customer-
Supplied
Handheld
Terminal
Customer-
Supplied
Telephone
Extension
XJ1
External
Jack
XJ2
Internal Jack
CC-RJ11AD
6
2
4
5
3
87
Female
RJ11
Mounted under
board
6 - RT2
5 - OUT +
4 - OUT –
3 - IN–
2 - IN+
not used
Adapter Pinout, CC-RJ11AD
plug
4
8
2
6
3
P
OUT
IN
POT
COMP
SENS
SENSOR
XJ2 Internal
RJ11 Jack
XJ2
(under cover)
EXT
SENS
S
1
2
3
4
5
6
Top Down
Pin Numbers
P
OUT
IN
POT
COMP
SENS
SENSOR
XJ1 External Jack (see pinout below)
EXT
SENS
S
XJ1
1234
X678
Top View
Pin Numbers
11101 12100
ROOM TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
PLATE PAL SERIES
APPLICATION
The Plate Pal is used for retrofit of wall mounted
lighting plates when a temperature or humidity
display is needed
. It fits over a standard toggal or
paddle plate and mounts to a standard US handy box without adapters
. The switch is still used to control the
appliance under power.
PLATE PAL ROOM TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
11000, 12000 SERIES The Plate Pal is a room temperature indicator, built into a switch plate, for either °F or °C and % RH
. GPA 76 or LR44 battery
included. Colors are available in white or ivory.
Inter-Sensor
Communications
XJ1 Pinout XJ2 Pinout
8-Pin Connector Termination RJ11 Connector
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .OUT + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .OUT – . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN – . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
in
(cm)

1367. fi 1301TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
SENSOR LOCATION SCREENING/FEWER CALLBACKS
At some point in each building automation professional’s career, there comes a rite of passage. It’s when the boss hands off a set
of floor plans with no space sensor locations marked, and orders him to get the job done. In some cases, the boss (or one of the
old-timers) takes a few minutes to explain the rationale for sensor placement, the pitfalls to be avoided, and the subtle variations
that have proven to reduce or eliminate complaints and callbacks over the years. Some companies even require formal training and
a competency trial before conferring the coveted title of Sensor Spotter. Far too often, however, the get-it-done command comes
in an e-mail message from BOB (Boss On Beach), and there is no opportunity for discussion. We sincerely hope that all of our
customers who have been tossed into the deep end for such a swimming lesson know that they can call Kele (or pop over to www.
kele.com) and tap into hundreds of man-years of engineering experience. We’re here to make it easy for you – it’s what we do. For
example, here are some of the obvious and not-so obvious factors to consider when spotting and installing wall-mount temperature or humidity sensors:
1) The most obvious factor of all is making sure the sensor location is in the space served by the air handler (or other
terminal unit) with which it is associated. If the ceiling is in place, it’s best to at least have a chat with the folks who
installed the sheet metal – make sure nobody decided to do some re-zoning without informing you. This has bitten more
than just a few of us over the years (your humble author included).
2) Avoid locations in which the sun will shine on the sensor. In fact, it’s better to stay at least several feet away from any
portion of wall that gets direct sunlight. Surface temperatures of sunlit walls can be as much as 20°F (11°C) higher than
room air, and this heat can be conducted to a nearby sensor.
3) Avoid outside walls, unless the only other choice involves direct sunshine.
4) Avoid other sources of heat within the space. If not yet occupied, ask where electrical equipment will be placed. A
temperature sensor on a wall above a copy machine can make a room mighty cold. If sensing humidity, an elevated
temperature at the sensor location will cause it to report lower values than a sensor at actual room temperature.
5) Avoid the supply air stream. Note that this is not always as simple as it sounds. For those who haven’t been exposed to
it before, the Coanda effect can cause grief. Coanda described the tendency of fluid streams above a certain velocity to
cling to a surface. It’s particularly significant with linear slot diffusers, but it happens with all diffusers to a degree. The
point is that even if the room supply air diffuser is a good distance away from the wall, its output may travel across the ceiling and down the wall, causing false readings at the sensor
. It’s best to line up with the corners of diffusers if they
can’t be avoided altogether. We’ve seen cases in which shelves had to be built to shield a wall sensor from direct blasts
of supply air.
6) Avoid leaks. Even in interior rooms, the air from the space within the wall can be warmer or cooler than the conditioned
area. In some cases, the moisture content can be very different, too. Seal the holes, including the hole for the sensor
cable.
7) Finally, insulate from the wall if needed. If the best choice for a sensor location is on an exterior wall, remember that
the wall itself will heat up and cool down according to outdoor conditions. Also, when night setback is practiced, wall
surface temperatures take many more hours to return to equilibrium on morning startup than the room air temperature does
. An insulating pad such as the BA-FOAMBACK is a good solution, though we’ve seen cases in which standoffs
were needed in order to totally eliminate the effects of a hot or cold wall. If followed, the tips outlined here will help keep
the really troublesome locations out of the picture when spotting sensors. These tips are not the end-all, though. There
will always be rooms in which sensor location is debatable, and those debates will always be fun to have. In fact, we
hope you’ll call or e-mail our Kele Technical Sales staff when they arise. We’d love to be included!
SENSOR TYPE TEMPERATURE SENSOR DESCRIPTION TYPICAL SENSOR USER
3 10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F, Type III material AET, American Automatrix, Ando ver, Carrier, Delta, Invensys, Teletrol, York
21 2252Ω thermistor @77°F, Type II material Anderson Cornelius, JCI (A319)
22 3000Ω thermistor @77°F, Type II material Alerton, ASI, AT S, Snyder General
24 10,000Ω thermistor @77°F, Type II material Alerton, Automated Logic, TAC (INET), Triangle Microsystems, Trane
27 100,000Ω thermistor @77°F, Type II material Siemens (Landis and Staefa)
42 20,000Ω thermistor @77°F, Type IV material Honeywell (XL)
51 1800Ω thermistor @77°F, Type V material TAC (VISTA)
81 100Ω platinum RTD @ 32°F, 385 cur ve Transmitter av ailable for any user
85 1000Ω platinum RTD @ 32°F, 385 cur ve JCI, Siemens, Trane (transmitter available for any user)
91 1000Ω platinum RTD @ 32°F, 375 cur ve JCI, Siemens (transmitter available for any user)
5 1000Ω Balco RTD @ 70°F TAC (Siebe) (transmitter available for any user)

1368. fi
TEMPERATURE 1302fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
PRECON THERMISTOR QUALITY
History
In 1945, Bell Labs refined the process of making stable and reproducible thermistors. The telephone company then started
to use this technology in large quantities. Precon, now Kele Precision Manufacturing (KPM), started producing thermistors in
1967 and has satisfied customers for over 36 years. Like Bell Labs, KPM controlled the complete manufacturing process in
order to manufacture a superior product. Other manufacturers purchase prefabricated glass bead thermistors, which are usually
procured from the lowest bidder.
Manufacturing Process
Precon brand sensors start with the highest quality chemical ingredients, using only
the best raw materials to ensure precision and stability. The mixture is pre-aged to
render the precise thermistor curve required, guaranteeing repeatability and long term stability, specified at 0
.24°F for five years. The leads are then attached, and the sensor
is trimmed and chemically cleaned. This step ensures interchangeability of ±0.36°F
and eliminates impurities for long life. At this point, each sensor is tested before
encapsulation. This produces a 100% product yield. The Precon sensor’s exclusive
encapsulation, in a heat-conductive housing, makes the sensor complete. It protects
the sensor from moisture and ph
ysical damage and provides a heat dissipation
constant of 1
.5 mW/°F. Each sensor is then inserted into the appropriate mounting
hardware for the HVAC application. This includes wall, duct, immersion, OSA, pipe,
freezer, concealed, or custom housing. Each mounting design was specifically
developed to make mounting easy and durable for HVAC use.
Comparisons
Manufacturing quality is obvious when comparing a Precon sensor side by side with a typical HVAC counterpart. It is easy to
pic
k out the sensor that lasts! Heat dissipation is critical to good temperature measurement
. As seen in the graph below, Precon
sensors dissipate heat at three times the rate of glass bead-type sensors, so be sure to ask if the thermistor you buy is based on a glass bare bead sensor
.
The most common BAS thermistor voltage is 2-3 VDC. At the 2V level, the Precon sensor is within 0.3°F of its zero-power point,
while the competition is within 0.75° to 1.5°F. Since power (heat) is proportional to the applied voltage squared, the error value
grows rapidly as monitoring voltage increases. When this error is added to the basic accuracy of the thermistor, errors begin to
accumulate and become unacceptably large. Large errors cause energy waste and significant comfort problems if not corrected.
Precon sensors take the risk out of temperature sensing by reducing the errors added by the BAS.
Benefits
All Precon sensors are equipped with a lifetime warranty.
The process above is the best in the world and KPM backs it up.
Mean time between sensor failure is over 117 years. This number
is even more amazing considering it includes all failures of any kind, including customer damage or misapplication
. The fact is,
Precon thermistors grow more stable with time.
The biggest benefit is to your customer ­– no warranty call
backs. Long sensor life is typically far beyond the building life.
Each w
arranty call back due to sensor failure costs not only a
minimum of one hour of down time for your service technician but also incalculable damage to your reputation and perceived competence with your customer
.
Precon sensors are the most cost-effective when looking at the
big picture of installation – system performance, no call backs, and company reputation
. Sensors are often the smallest cost on
an
y project
. Why short change your customer? Use a Precon sensor.
9.00
8.00
7.00
6.00
5.00
4.00
3.00
2.00
1.00
0.00
1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00
10K Thermistor Error Due to
Self-Heating Effect @ 75°F
Applied Voltage From BAS Input
Brand Y
Self-Heating
Error @
0.28 mW/°F
Error In °F
PreCon Self-Heating Error @ 1.50 mW/°F
Brand X
Self-Heating
Error @
0.56 mW/°F
PRECON
Encapsulated
Bare Bead
Competition

1369. fi 1303TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
20 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
SENSOR RESISTANCE CHART – RTD SENSORS
RTD SENSOR RESISTANCE
FAHRENHEIT CENTIGRADE
Element
Code
Base
Resis-
tance
Type 78
2000Ω
Nickel
Iron
@ 70°F
Type
71/81
100Ω
Platinum
@ 32°F
Type 85
1000Ω
Platinum
@ 32°F
Type 91
1000Ω
Platinum
@ 32°F
Type 63
1000Ω
Nickel
@ 32°F
Type 5
1000Ω
Nickel
Iron
@ 32°F
Element
Code Base
Resistance
@ 21°C
Type 78
2000Ω
Nickel
Iron
@ 0°C
Type
71/81
100Ω
Platinum
@ 0°C
Type 85
1000Ω
Platinum
@ 0°C
Type 91
1000Ω
Platinum
@ 0°C
Type 63
1000Ω
Nickel
@
0°C
Type 5
1000Ω
Nickel
Iron
@ 0°C
TCR 0.00527 0.00385 0.00385 0.00375 TCR 0.00527 0.00385 0.00385 0.00375
°F Ohms Ohms Ohms Ohms Ohms °C Ohms Ohms Ohms Ohms Ohms
-40 84.26 842.59 846.58 699.00 779.00 -40 84.26 842.59 846.58 699.00 779.00
-30 1543.24 86.46 864.57 868.01 724.72 797.50 -30 88.21 882.13 885.13 745.30 875.26
-20 1585.02 88.65 886.51 889.41 753.22 894.70 -20 1653.81 92.16 921.60 923.55 792.80 799.82
-10 1627.74 90.84 908.42 910.76 777.96 835.40 -10 1735.31 96.08 960.83 961.84 841.30 877.28
0 1671.38 93.03 930.29 932.07 806.66 854.80 0 1816.81 100.00 1000.00 1000.00 891.10 919.26
10 1715.90 95.21 952.11 953.34 831.40 874.60 10 1903.45 103.90 1039.04 1038.04 942.00 956.90
20 1761.28 97.39 973.90 974.57 859.98 894.70 20 1990.09 107.80 1077.95 1075.96 994.10 995.66
30 1807.48 99.57 995.65 995.77 885.91 915.10 30 2081.54 111.68 1116.75 1113.76 1047.50 1035.44
40 1854.46 101.74 1017.36 1016.92 913.72 935.90 40 2172.99 115.54 1155.45 1151.45 1102.20 1076.20
50 1902.22 103.90 1039.04 1038.04 942.00 956.90 50 2269.00 119.40 1193.99 1189.01 1158.20 1113.89
60 1950.74 106.07 1060.67 1059.12 970.94 978.30 60 2365.01 123.24 1232.43 1226.45 1215.60 1160.90
70 2000.01 108.23 1082.27 1080.17 1000.00 1000.00 70 2465.34 127.08 1270.75 1263.76 1274.30 1204.64
80 2050.02 110.38 1103.83 1101.18 1029.69 1022.00 80 2565.66 130.90 1308.95 1300.96 1334.40 1249.88
90 2100.75 112.54 1125.36 1122.15 1063.13 1044.40 90 2670.05 134.70 1347.03 1338.04 1396.00 1287.32
100 2152.21 114.68 1146.84 1143.08 1091.04 1067.00 100 2774.44 138.50 1385.00 1375.00 1459.00 1343.00
110 2204.38 116.83 1168.29 1163.98 1123.20 1090.00 110 2882.64 142.29 1422.85 1411.84 1523.50 1391.00
120 2257.24 118.97 1189.71 1184.84 1152.37 1113.30 120 2990.84 146.06 1460.60 1448.56 1589.60 1440.20
130 2310.79 121.11 1211.09 1205.66 1183.71 1137.00 130 3102.61 149.82 1498.20 1485.15 1657.20
140 2365.02 123.24 1232.43 1226.45 1215.60 1160.90 140 3214.37153.58 1535.80 1521.63 1726.40
150 2419.91 125.37 1253.73 1247.19 1248.21 1185.20 150 3329.46 157.31 1573.08 1557.99 1797.20
160 2475.46 127.50 1275.00 1267.90 1284.32 1209.50 160 3444.54 161.04 1610.40 1594.22 1869.70
170 2531.65 129.62 1296.23 1288.58 1315.62 1234.70 170 3562.69 164.75 1647.50 1630.34 1943.80
180 2588.47 131.74 1317.42 1309.21 1348.09 1260.00 180 3680.84 168.46 1684.60 1666.33 2019.70
190 2645.92 133.86 1338.58 1329.81 1399.19 1285.60 190 3801.81 172.15 1721.46 1702.21 2097.30
200 2703.98 135.97 1359.70 1350.37 1419.63 1311.40 200 3922.77 175.84 1758.40 1737.96 2176.70
210 2762.64 138.08 1380.79 1370.90 1452.44 1337.70 210 179.50 1794.96 1773.60
220 2821.89 140.18 1401.84 1391.39 1487.67 1364.20 220 183.17 1831.70 1809.11
230 2881.72 142.29 1422.85 1411.84 1523.50 1391.00 230 186.80 1868.00 1844.50
240 2942.13 144.38 1443.83 1432.25 1560.22 1418.20 240 190.45 1904.50 1879.78
260 148.57 1485.67 1472.97 260 197.69 1976.90 1949.96
270 150.65 1506.54 1493.27
280 152.74 1527.38 1513.53
290 154.82 1548.17 1533.76
300 156.89 1568.94 1553.95
More detailed charts are available at www.kele.com in Technical Reference
.

1370. fi
TEMPERATURE 1304fi
TEMPERATURE
20 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
SENSOR RESISTANCE CHART – PRECON THERMISTORS
PRECON TYPE II PRECON TYPE III PRECON TYPE IV
Model 21 Model 22 Model 24 Model 27 Model 3 Model 42
2252fi @ 77°F 3000fi @ 77°F 10,000fi @ 77°F 100,000fi @ 77°F 10,000fi @ 77°F 20,000fi @ 77°F
±0.36°F from ±0.36°F from ±0.36°F from ±0.36°F @ 77°F ±0.36°F from ±0.36°F from
32° to 158°F 32° to 158°F 32° to 158°F ±1.3°F from 32° to 158°F 32° to 158°F 32° to 158°F
Temp°F Resistance (fi) Resistance (fi) Resistance (fi) Resistance (fi) Resistance (fi) Resistance (fi)
-35 63.08K 84.09K 280.1K 2801K 203.6K 672.1K
-30 52.72K 70.27K 234.1K 2341K 173.6K 557.2K
-25 44.20K 58.92K 196.3K 1963K 148.3K 463.4K
-20 37.19K 49.56K 165.1K 1651K 127.1K 386.7K
-15 31.38K 41.83K 139.3K 1393K 109.2K 323.7K
-10 26.57K 35.41K 118.0K 1180K 94.07K 271.9K
-5 22.57K 30.07K 100.2K 1002K 81.23K 228.0K
0 19.22K 25.61K 85.35K 853.5K 70.32K 192.6K
5 16.42K 21.88K 72.91K 729.1K 61.02K 163.1K
10 14.07K 18.74K 62.48K 624.8K 53.07K 138.7K
15 12.08K 16.10K 53.64K 536.4K 46.27K 118.3K
20 10.41K 13.87K 46.23K 462.3K 40.42K 101.0K
25 8988 11.98K 39.91K 399.1K 35.39K 86.60K
30 7782 10.37K 34.56K 345.6K 31.06K 74.40K
35 6755 8999 30.00K 300.0K 27.31K 64.10K
40 5877 7830 26.10K 261.0K 24.06K 55.30K
45 5126 6830 22.76K 227.6K 21.24K 47.89K
50 4482 5971 19.90K 199.0K 18.79K 41.40K
55 3927 5231 17.44K 174.4K 16.65K 36.10K
60 3448 4594 15.31K 153.1K 14.78K 31.44K
65 3035 4043 13.48K 134.8K 13.15K 27.46K
70 2676 3565 11.88K 118.8K 11.72K 24.02K
75 2365 3150 10.50K 105.0K 10.46K 21.06K
80 2094 2789 9298 92.98K 9354 18.50K
85 1858 2475 8250 82.50K 8378 16.29K
90 1651 2200 7331 73.31K 7516 14.37K
95 1471 1959 6532 65.32K 6754 12.69K
100 1312 1748 5826 58.26K 6078 11.24K
105 1173 1562 5209 52.09K 5479 9.97K
110
1050 1399 4663 46.63K 4947 8.86K
115 941.8 1254 4182 41.82K 4472 7.88K
120 846.0 1127 3757 37.57K 4049 7.03K
125 761.3 1014 3381 33.81K 3671 6.27K
130 686.1 913.9 3047 30.47K 3333 5.61K
135 619.4 825.0 2750 27.50K 3031 5.03K
140 559.9 745.9 2486 24.86K 2759 4.51K
145 507.0 675.4 2251 22.51K 2515 4.06K
150 459.7 612.4 2041 20.41K 2296 3.65K
155 417.5 556.2 1854 18.54K 2098 3.29K
160 379.6 505.8 1686 16.86K 1920 2.97K
165 345.7 460.7 1535 15.35K 1759 2.69K
170 315.2 420.1 1400 14.00K 1614 2.43K
175 287.8 383.7 1278 12.78K 1482 2.20K
180 263.1 350.8 1168 11.68K 1362 2.00K
185 240.9 321.2 1070 10.70K 1254 1.82K
190 220.8 294.5 980.5 9805 1156 1.65K
195 202.6 270.3 899.6 8996 1066 1.51K
200 186.2 248.4 826.8 8268 984.0 1.38K
205 171.3 228.5 760.7 7607 909.8 1.26K
210 157.8 210.5 700.7 7007 841.9 1.15K
215 145.5 194.1 646.1 6461 779.8 1.05K
220 134.3 179.2 596.4 5964 723.0 967.5
225 124.2 165.6 551.5 5515 671.0 888.4
230 114.9 153.2 510.2 5102 623.3 818.4
235 106.4 141.9 472.5 4725 579.5 753.0
240 98.7 131.5 438.3 4383 539.4 693.6
PRECON THERMISTOR SENSOR RESISTANCE
The Precon sensor has a dissipation constant in still air at 25°C of 2.7 mW/°C. The heat dissipation constant is an
expression in milliwatts of the power required to raise the temperature of a thermistor 1°C above the ambient.

1371. HUMIDITY
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS
& CONTROLLERS
Thermostat | p. 1392
Guards
VT7600 | p. 1327
Series
UT8001 | p. 1367
Prestige IAQ | p. 1305 Series
PXR4 Series | p. 13591F80 Series | p. 1338
Offering Mechanical, Digital, and Communicating Thermostats
to Complete your Projects.

1372. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
A19/A28/ | p. 1378
A319/A419
T170 Series | p. 1372
Zip Economizer
|
p. 1354
THERMOSTATS
& CONTROLLERS
Accessories
Testing Devices and Tools — Thermostat Tools and Change-Over Thermostats. . . . . . . 1390
Sensor Mounting Accessories
— Thermostat Remote Sensor Accessories
. . . . . . . . . . . 1391
Thermostat Guards
— Thermostat Guards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
Bulb/Aqua Stats A19, A28, A319, A419 Series
— Bulb Thermostats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378
Communicating Thermostats Prestig
e IAQ — Programmable/Wireless Thermostats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
VT7200, VT7300 Communicating
— Zone and FCU Communicating Thermostats (BACnet,
LON, N2)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321
VT7600 Communicating
— AHU Communicating Thermostat Single and Multistage,
Programmable and Non-programmable (BACnet, LON, N2)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312
T7350,
W7350 Series — T7350 Series Programmable Commercial Thermostats and W7350
Controller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
Fan Coil Thermostats VT7200, VT7300 Series — Zone Thermostats and FCU Thermostats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310
TB7100A100 MultiPro™ Series
— MultiPro™ Multispeed and Multipurpose Thermostats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332
TB6575, TB8575 SuitePro™ Series
— Digital Fan Coil Thermostats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346
T158, T168 Series
— Floating and Proportional Thermostats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1370
T170 Series
— Fan Coil Thermostat with ADA-Compliant Digital Display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1372
T180 Series
— Programmable Fan Coil Thermostats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
T155, T167 Series
— Line and Low Voltage Two-Position and Proportional Thermostats
. 1376
Low/High Limit Thermostats A11 Series
— Low Temperature Limit Controls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
A70 Series
— Low & High Temperature Limit Controls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381
L480 Series
— Low Limit Temperature Controls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382
TSA, TF142
— Low-Limit Temperature Controls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1384
TC-105, TC-100
— Duct High Temperature Limits
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
Mechanical Thermostats ET Series, UT8001
— Two-Position Room Thermostats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367
T22, T25, T26, T46
— Line-Voltage Thermostats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368
TF115,
TH109, and TRF115 Series — NEMA 4X Industiral Controls Thermostats
. . . . . . . 1386
T631F/G, TW155/255 Series — NEMA 4X Rated Thermostats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388
TC-1100 Series
— Two Position Room Thermostats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
Programmable/Non-Programmable Thermostats 1F95,
1F95EZ and 1F97 Series Thermostats — Big Blue™ and Blue™ Universal and Single
Stage Programmable/Non-programmable Thermostats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323
VT7600 Series
— Single and Multistage Programmable and Non-programmable Thermostats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327
T87, TH3000, and TH4000 Series
— Residential Thermostats, Programmable and Non-
programmable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330
TH5000, TH6000, TB7000 Series
— FocusPro™ Residential and Light Commercial
Thermostats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334
TH8000 Series, TB8220 Series
— VisionPro™ Programmable Thermostats
. . . . . . . . . . . 1336
1F80 Series
— Residential and Light Commercial Thermostats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
T4000,
T8000, and T12000 Series Thermostats — Digital Display Programmable Thermostats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
1F72,
1E78 and 1F78 Series Thermostats — Residential LCD Display Programmable/Non-
Programmable Thermostats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344
Proportional Room Thermostats (No Fan Control) TB6980 and TB7980 Series
— Floating and Proportional Zone Thermostats
. . . . . . . . . . . 1348
RTC-2P
— Proportional Room Thermostats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
Stand Alone Controllers and Temperature Switches T775 Series
— Single or Multi-Loop Standalone Controller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1350
System 450
— System 450 Modular Controls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1352
ZIP Economiz
er Series — Economizer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
PXR4
— Setpoint Controllers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359
R820 Series
— SCR Power Controller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
UCM-420A
— Setpoint Controllers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363

1373. fi˚ 1305THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
PROGRAMMABLE/WIRELESS THERMOSTAT
PRESTIGE IAQ
Suppy Voltage 24 VAC
System Type 4 heat/2 cool heat pump and up to
3 heat/2 cool conventional
Sensor Type
Temperature Onboard 20kΩ NTC
Humidity Capacitive
Communication RedLINK devices
Baud Rate 900 MHz frequency range
Analog Input EIM
2 Universal inputs, temperature or
dry contact selectable (not available
with single- piece thermostat)
Output
EIM 7
Standalone 6 (USB on some models)
Contact Rating
EIM terminals W-O/B, Y, W3-Aux2, A-L/A
Maximum Current 1.0A,
EIM terminals G, U1, U2, U3
Maximum Current 0.5A
EIM terminals W2-Aux1, Y2
Maximum Current 0.6A
Temperature Sensor Accuracy
± 1.5° at 70°F (0.75° at 21°C)
Temperature Setting Range
Heating 40° to 90°F (4.5° to 32°C)
Cooling 50° to 99°F (10° to 37°C)
Operating Temperature
Thermostat 32° to 120°F (0° to 48.9°C)
EIM -40° to 165°F (-40° to 73.8°C)
Operating Humidity
Thermostat 5% to 90% condensing,
EIM 5% to 95% non-condensing
Dimensions
Thermostat
Prestige IAQ 4-1/2"W x 3-1/2"H x 7/8"D
(11.5 x 8.9 x 2.2 cm)
Prestige 2.0 6-13/16"W x 3-7/8"H x 1-7/16"D
(17.3 x 9.9 x 3.6 cm)
EIM 9.34"H X 4.83"W X 1.6"D
(23.7 x 12.3 x 4.1 cm)
Measurement Range Building material and content
dependent
Weight 2.0 lb (maximum item)
Approvals This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC Rules. (15.19, 15.21,
15.105)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 5 years (excludes batteries)
DESCRIPTION
The Prestige High Definition (HD) Color Touchscreen Thermostat provides control of 24 VAC of heating and cooling systems
. RedLINK™ enabled to work with compatible
wireless accessories. These newly updated thermostats come
in a variety of colors and can be accessed via the internet or through the mobile app available from Honeywell
. The new
Prestige is on the leading edge of design and remote access when it comes to thermostats for both residential and light commercial applications
. Check out the entire line for one that
fits your application.
FEATURES
• 60% smaller than Prestige 2.0 and available in 4 colors
• Delta T Alerts and Diagnostics inform customers when
their system is not operating as expected
• Residential or light commercial use
• User Interaction Log provides a searchable history of
setting changes
• Assignable outputs for indoor air quality and staging
control
• Selectable staging options
• Customizable service reminders
• Up to 4H/2C heat pump or 3H/2C conventional systems
SPECIFICATIONS
Prestige IAQ-EIM

1374. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1306fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
PROGRAMMABLE/WIRELESS THERMOSTAT
PRESTIGE IAQ
WIRING - THX9321& THX9421
Typical wiring of a 3-heat / 2-cool heat pump system with one
transformer.
Prestige THX9321 and heat pump system with
one transformer
Typical wiring of a 2-heat / 2-cool conventional system with one
transformer.
Prestige THX9321 and 2-heat / 2-cool
conventional system with one transformer
Typical wiring of a 3-heat / 2-cool heat pump system with two
transformers.
Prestige THX9321 and heat pump system with
two transformers
Typical wiring for geothermal radiant heat, geothermal
forced-air and backup heat with one transformer.
Prestige THX9321 and geothermal radiant heat,
geothermal forced-air and backup heat with one
transformer
1 U1 and U2 terminals are dry contacts.
2 L/A terminal sends continuous output when thermostat is set to EM HEAT mode except when set up for Economizer or TOD.
See “Economizer Module Wiring Diagrams” beginning on page 151.
3 U1 or U2 terminals must be used for geothermal radiant heat (ISU 2010). Thermostat allows 2 stages of radiant heat—geothermal
(stage 1) and boiler (stage 2).
4 “U” terminals are normally open dry contacts when set up for geothermal radiant heat. You must install a field jumper if radiant
heat is powered by system transformer. Do NOT install a field jumper if radiant heat has its own transformer.
5 Remove jumper if using separate transformers.
6 Connect the THP9045 Wiresaver Module to the K terminal in heating/cooling applications that do not have a common wire at the
thermostat. The K terminal cannot be used in heat-only applications. See THP9045 installation instructions for more information.
NOTE: For additional set-up, wiring, and operation, see installation manual.
CHANGEOVER VA LVE
BACKUP HEAT
COMPRESSOR STAGE 1
COMPRESSOR STAGE 2
FAN RELAY
COMPRESSOR MONITO R
OR ZONE PANEL
120
VAC
O/B
AUX/E
Y
Y2
G
L/A
K
C
Rc
R
U1
U1
U2
U2
24
VAC
Transformer
Thermostat
C
R
1
2
HEAT STAGE 1
HEAT STAGE 2
COMPRESSOR STAGE 1
COMPRESSOR STAGE 2
FAN RELAY
120
VAC
W
W2
Y
Y2
G
A
K
C
Rc
R
U1
U1
U2
U2
24
VAC
Transformer
Thermostat
C
R
1
5
6
31
CHANGEOVER VA LVE
COMPRESSOR STAGE 1
COMPRESSOR STAGE 2
FAN RELAY
COMPRESSOR MONITO R
OR ZONE PANEL
120
VAC
O/B
AUX/E
Y
Y2
G
L/A
K
C
Rc
R
U1
U1
U2
U2
24
VAC
Air Handler
Transformer
120
VAC
24
VAC
Backup Heat
Transformer
C
R
R
C
Thermostat
BACKUP HEAT
1
2
CHANGEOVER VA LVE
BACKUP HEAT
COMPRESSOR STAGE 1
COMPRESSOR STAGE 2
FAN RELAY
COMPRESSOR MONITO R
OR ZONE PANEL
120
VAC
O/B
AUX/E
Y
Y2
G
L/A
K
C
Rc
R
U1
U1
U2
U2
24
VAC
Transformer
Thermostat
C
R
GEOTHERMAL
RADIANT
HEAT
STAGE 1
32
4
6
6 6

1375. fi˚ 1307THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
PROGRAMMABLE/WIRELESS THERMOSTAT
PRESTIGE IAQ
The RedLINK Internet Gateway requires a physical Ethernet connection to an open port on a user-supplied router. The router
must be connected to the internet via a user's Internet Provider for access to the Honeywell server. There is no need for a static
IP address. To date, there have been no reported issues with port blocking or firewalls preventing access.

In order to guard against possib
le wireless signal overload, assure that all wireless RedLINK devices including the RedLINK
Internet Gateway are spaced a minimum of 2 feet apart from each other for proper operation
.
1. Connect power to the RedLINK Internet Gateway using the supplied 120VAC power supply wall module.
2. Connect the supplied Ethernet cable from the RedLINK Internet Gateway to an available port on a designated Router (router
supplied by others).
3. Using the Prestige Thermostat Contractor Installation Options Menu select Wireless Device Manager, then select Add Device.
4. Press and release the Connect button located on the bottom of the RedLINK Internet Gateway. The device will appear on the
Thermostat. Exit the menu.
5. Note the Device MAC ID and Device CRC information on the bottom of the device (required for account assignment).
CHANGEOVER VA LV E
BACKUP HEAT
STAGE 1
FAN RELAY
SENSORS
TO THERMOSTAT
HEAT PUMP
AIR HANDLER
TRANSFORMER
120
VAC
24
VAC
COMPRESSOR
STAGE 1
COMPRESSOR
STAGE 2
O/B
AUX1
AUX2
O/B
BACKUP HEAT
STAGE 2
COMPRESSOR
MONITOR OR
ZONE PA NEL
R
C
AUX1
AUX2
G
L/A
Y2
Y
POWER
HEAT
COOL
FAN
U1
U2
U3
STATUS
LEDS
JUMPERS
L/A
EIM
CONNECT OPTIONAL
SENSORS TO
S1 AND S2 TERMINALS
S4 S4
S3 S3
CONNECT OPTIONAL
SENSORS TO
S3 AND S4 TERMINALS
A B
C D
22
3
1
3
4
Typical wiring of a heat pump system with up to
4-stage heat and 2-stage cool with one transformer
Typical wiring of a conventional system with up to
3-stage heat and 2-stage cool with one transformer
HEAT STAGE 1
HEAT STAGE 2
HEAT STAGE 3
FAN
TO THERMOST AT
STATUS
LEDs
JUMPERS
SENSORS
CONV
FURNACE
R
C
W
W2
W3
G
Y2
Y
TRANSFORMER
120
VAC24
VAC
COMPRESSOR
STAGE 1
COMPRESSOR
STAGE 2
POWER
HEAT
COOL
FAN
U1
U2
U3
A
S4 S4
S3 S3
CONNECT
OPTIONAL SENSORS
TO S3 AND S4
TERMINALS
CONNECT
OPTIONAL SENSORS
TO S1 AND S2
TERMINALS
A
B
C
D
EIM
2
3
1
4
2
5
NOTES
REDLINK WIRELESS GATEWAY (THM6000R1002) CONTRACTOR SETUP
See installation instructions for additional wiring options.
WIRING - EIM

1376. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1308fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
PROGRAMMABLE/WIRELESS THERMOSTAT
PRESTIGE IAQ
1. Visit www.mytotalconnectcomfort.com and click “Create an Account.” There is no charge for this service.
2. Enter required account information including email, password and security questions/answers.
3. Account verification email will be sent to account email - log into email and validate account to return to
www.mytotalconnectcomfort.com
4. Enter New Location for RedLINK Internet Gateway including location type (commercial or residential) and alert email accounts
5. Assign RedLINK Internet Gateway to location by entering the unique device MAC ID and device CRC information (Found on
bottom of THM6000R1002)

Account is now active and may be accessed via any supported web browser or smart phone application.
ACCOUNT SETUP
GATEWAY SETUP
Connect power cord to
an electrical outlet not
controlled by a wall switch
Connect RedLINK Gateway to a
router or modem with Ethernet
THM6000R1002
cable (RJ45).
Supplied by Others

1377. fi˚ 1309THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
PROGRAMMABLE/WIRELESS THERMOSTAT
PRESTIGE IAQ
ORDERING INFORMATION
PRESTIGE KITS
Kit
Part Number
Included in Kit
Part Number Description
Prestige IAQ Kit
YTHX9421R5101WW
THX9421R5021WW Thermostat - White Front, White Side
THM5421R1021 Equipment Interface Module
C7089R1013 Wireless Outdoor Sensor
50062329-001 Discharge/Return Sensors (Qty. 2)
Prestige IAQ Kit
YTHX9421R5101BB
THX9421R5021BB Thermostat - Black Front, Black Side
THM5421R1021 Equipment Interface Module
C7089R1013 Wireless Outdoor Sensor
50062329-001 Discharge/Return Sensors (Qty. 2)
Prestige IAQ Kit
YTHX9421R5101SG
THX9421R5021SG Thermostat - Silver Front, Gray Side
THM5421R1021 Equipment Interface Module
C7089R1013 Wireless Outdoor Sensor
50062329-001 Discharge/Return Sensors (Qty. 2)
Prestige IAQ Kit
YTHX9421R5101WG
THX9421R5021WG Thermostat - White Front, Gray Side
THM5421R1021 Equipment Interface Module
C7089R1013 Wireless Outdoor Sensor
50062329-001 Discharge/Return Sensors (Qty. 2)
Prestige IAQ Kit
YTHX9421R5085WW
THX9421R5021WW Thermostat - White Front, White Side
THM5421R1021 Equipment Interface Module
50062329-001 Discharge/Return Sensors (Qty. 2)
Prestige IAQ Kit
YTHX9421R5085BB
THX9421R5021BB Thermostat - Black Front, Black Side
THM5421R1021 Equipment Interface Module
50062329-001 Discharge/Return Sensors (Qty. 2)
Prestige IAQ Kit
YTHX9421R5085SG
THX9421R5021SG Thermostat - Silver Front, Gray Side
THM5421R1021 Equipment Interface Module
50062329-001 Discharge/Return Sensors (Qty. 2)
Prestige IAQ Kit
YTHX9421R5085WG
THX9421R5021WG Thermostat - White Front, Gray Side
THM5421R1021 Equipment Interface Module
50062329-001 Discharge/Return Sensors (Qty. 2)
Prestige 2.0 Kit
YTHX9321R5061
THX9321R5030 Thermostat
REM5000R1001 Portable Comfort Control
Prestige 2.0 Kit
YTHX9321R5079
THX9321R5030 Thermostat
C7089R1013 Wireless Outdoor Sensor
Note: Part numbers can be ordered separately
.

1378. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1310fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ZONE AND FCU COMMUNICATING THERMOSTAT (BACNET, LON)
VT7200, VT7300 COMMUNICATING
Supply Voltage 19-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Supply VA 2 VA
Display Two line backlit LCD, ±0.2°F (±0.1°C)
Control Accuracy Temperature, ±0.9°F (±0.5°C)
VT7350C50xx, VT7350F50x
Dehumidification, ±5% RH from 20% to
80% RH
Thermostat Type Zone (VT7200) or FCU (VT7300)
Cover Controls
Zone Models Up/down/override buttons
Heat/Cool “on" LEDs
FCU Models Up/down/°C-or-°F/fan/mode buttons
Fan/Heat/Cool “on" LEDs
Control Outputs See terminal designation table
VT7200C50xx 5 triacs (H/C, 2-position or floating
control)

VT7200F50xx 1 triac, 2 analog outputs (H/C
proportional 0 to 10 VDC)
VT7300C50xx, VT7350C50xx
3 relays (fan), 5 triacs (H/C, 2-position
or floating control)
VT7300F50xx, VT7350F50xx
3 relays (fan), 1 triac, 2 analog outputs
(H/C proportional 0 to 10 VDC)
Triacs and relays 30 VAC, 1A, 3A inrush
Analog outputs 0-10 VDC, 2KΩ minimum impedance,
direct or reverse acting
Auxiliary Inputs 2 digital inputs, 1 universal input, 1
remote sensor
Configurable as Service/status reminders
Door/window/motion sensor switch
Filter alarm
Central night setback clock
Remote occupied override switch
Heat/Cool changeover, contact or
sensor
Digital Inputs Dry contact
Universal Input Dry contact or 10K Type 2 Model 24
thermistor
Remote Sensor Thermistor, 10K Type 2 Model 24
Control Type Proportional plus integral (PI)
Proportional Band Heating and cooling, 2°F (1.1°C)
Floating Time Base Adjustable, 0.5 to 9 minutes
Cycles Per Hour Adjustable 3 to 8
Override Timer 0 to 24 hours, 1-hour increments,
pushbutton reset
Sensor Offset Adjustable ±5°F (±2.5°C), ±15% RH
(humidity models)
Deadband Adjustable 2° to 5°F (1° to 2.5°C)
Setpoint Adjusted depending on heating or
cooling mode
, heating and cooling
setpoints are changed simultaneously with respect to the deadband
Cooling limits 54° to 100°F (12°C to 37.7°C)
Heating limits 40° to 90°F (4.5° to 32°C)
Keypad Lockout Selectable system/fan/unoccupied
System Setting O=off, H=heating, C=cooling,
A=automatic changeover
(FCU models) O/C, O/H, O/A/H/C, H/O/C
Fan Setting L=low, M=medium, H=high, A=auto
(FCU models) L/M/H, L/H, L/M/H/A, L/H/A, On/A
Wiring 18 AWG maximum, 22 AWG
recommended
Enclosure UL FR1, flame retardant plastic
Color White
Mounting Standard vertical, 2" x 4" box
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 4.94"H x 3.38"W x 1.13"D
(12.5 x 8.6 x 2.9 cm)
Weight 0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Approvals UL Listed File #E234137, cULus, CE,
LonMark
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
VT7200 Zone thermostats are digital-display, heating/cooling,
with outputs for two-position, floating, and proportional terminal
unit control
. They are ideal for baseboard heat, unit heaters,
radiant panels, reheat, or VAV box (pressure-dependent) control
. VT7300 Fan Coil Unit (FCU) thermostats are digital-
display, heating / cooling, with outputs for two-position, floating, or proportional control
. In addition, they include multi-speed
fan relays for high, medium, and low fan speed control. Both
ther
mostats offer remote temperature sensor and remote digital
inputs configured for night setback, filter alarm, motion sensor, door/window switch, or service indication. All models offer
standard BACnet or LON open-protocol communications.
SPECIFICATIONS
VT7200C5031B
BACnet Zone
Thermostat
VT7305C5031B
BACnet FCU
Thermostat
FEATURES
•
BACnet or LON communication
models
• Stand-alone operation on
comm
unication loss
•
Two-position, floating, or proportional
models
• Remote room sensor option
• Adjustable deadband
• Single setpoint adjustment
• Setpoint range limits (heating and
cooling)
• Three configurable inputs for night
setback, setback override, motion sensor, door or window switch, filter alarm, service advisory, heat/cool changeover °F/°C (configurable)
•
Display offset
• Adjustable temporary occupied time
• Heat, cool, and reheat time base
outputs are configurable
• Direct or reverse acting (proportional
models)
• Keypad lockout functions
• Dehumidification control models
• Three-speed fan control (FCU model)
• Selectable system control (FCU
model)
• PIR cover sensor (Optional)

1379. fi˚ 1311THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ZONE AND FCU COMMUNICATING THERMOSTAT (BACNET, LON)
VT7200, VT7300 COMMUNICATING
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES PAGE
COV-PIR-FCU-C-5031 PIR cover for FCU thermostat
COV-PIR-ZN-5031 PIR cover for Zone thermostat
TG511A1000 Thermostat guard- clear-medium size 1392
TABLE 1. TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS BY THERMOSTAT (FCU & ZONE)
ZONE THERMOSTATS FAN COIL UNIT (FCU) THERMOSTATS ** Terminals and function are not present on every thermostat
VT7200C-E
VT7200C-B
2-position/
floating
< LON
< BACnet
Terminal**
Thermostat Function**
1 High speed fan (FCU)
2 Medium speed fan (FCU)
3 Low speed fan (FCU)
4 24 VAC hot power for thermostat, fan and BO-(1,2,3,4) AO-(1,2)
5 24 VAC common for thermostat, fan and BO-(1,2,3,4) AO-(1,2)
6 BO-5, aux output, configurable (reheat, occupied/un-occupied)
7 BO-5, aux output, configurable (reheat, occupied/un-occupied)
8 BO-3, open heating
9 BO-4, close heating
9 AO-2, heating
10 BO-1, open cooling
10 AO-1, cooling
11 BO-2, close cooling
12 BI-1, configurable (night set back clock, motion detector, window switch)
13 RS, remote sensor, 10 K fithermistor
14 Scom, common for remote sensor, BI-(1,2), and UI-1
15 BI-2, configurable (door, filter, service, remote override)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X X X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X X X X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X X X X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
16 UI-3, configurable (change over contact or sensor, supply air sensor)
OCCO
24 VAC2 4 VAC
T-2T-1
Prop
H
Prop
C
Fan
L
24 V
HOT
24 V
COM
FCU & ZONE
electronics
FCU & ZONE SERIES THERMOSTATS
2-Pos
or Fltg
Proportional
0-10 VDC
Internal device connection
(TRIAC ’s except as noted)
2-Pos, Fltg, Proportional
depending on model
2-Pos
or Fltg
Window
D/N clock
motion
Remote
room
sensor
Door
filter
service
rem.
override
C/O
or
Supply
air
temp.
BO-5 BO-5 BO-3
B
O
4
A
O
2
A
O
1
B
O
1
BO-2 BI-1 RS
S
COM
BI-2 UI-3
Type 2
sensor
Type 2
Sensor
Network
card
To network
• BACnet
• Lon Talk
Ref
** Common device reference on BACnet networks as needed.
**
Fan
M
Relays
Fan
H
* CH
24 VAC Transformer
(provided by others)
Note: Terminals are Therm ostat Dependent See Table 1.
*One Transformer Wiring (Delete T2)
Alternate Device Based on Set-up
+–
Fan
L
Fan
M
Fan
H
AUX
Proportional
VT7200F-E
VT7200F-B
2 position/
floating
VT7300C-E
VT7300C-B
2-position
VT7300A-E
VT7300A-B
2 position/
floating/RH
VT7350C-E
VT7350C-B
Proportional
VT7300F-E
VT7300F-B
Proportional/
RH
VT7350F-E
VT7350F-B
MODEL THERMOST AT TYPE
VT7200 Zone controller
VT7300 F ancoil controller commercial (override occupancy)
VT7305 F ancoil controller hospitality (hotel/lodging with temp scale)
VT7350 F ancoil controller commercial (override occupancy) with humidity sensor
VT7355 F ancoil controller hospitality (hotel/lodging with temp scale) with humidity sensor
OUTPUTS
C 2 floating + 1 digital (for VT7200), 2 floating + 1 auxiliary (for VT73xx)
F 2 analog + 1 digital (for VT7200), 2 analog + 1 auxiliary (for VT73xx)
COVER
5000 Viconics logo
5031 Blank cover (no logo)
5500 PIR cover with Viconics logo
5531 PIR cover blank (no logo)
COMMUNICATION PR OTOCOL
E Echelon/LONworks
B BACnet
P Wireless/Zigbee Pro
W Wireless
VT7305 C 5031 W Example: VT7305C5031W Hospitality fancoil controller with
2 floating + 1 auxiliary outputs in a bl ank cover case
with wireless communication protocol

1380. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1312fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
AHU COMMUNICATING THERMOSTAT SINGLE AND MULTISTAGE,
PROGRAMMABLE AND NON-PROGRAMMABLE, (BACNET, LON)
VT7600 COMMUNICATING
Supply Voltage
20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Supply VA 2 VA
Display Two-line backlit LCD
Controls Five menu-driven push buttons – up,
down, menu, no, yes/scroll
Thermostat Type Seven-day programmable models, non-
programmable models
Optimal Start Progressive recovery (enable/disable)
Heat Pump High/Low OSA lockout (emer heating/comp.
heating)
Stages (Dependent upon model) 1H/1C,
2H/2C, (3H/2C heat pump) 2H/2C +
proportional mixed-air economizer
Memory (schedule) Permanent EEPROM
Clock (12 or 24 hour) Six-hour power fail retention
System Switching Off/Auto/Cool/Heat
Fan Switching On-continuous
Auto-on demand
Smart-on/occupied, off/unoccupied
Control Accuracy ±0.9°F (±0.5°C) @ 70°F (21°C)
Setpoint Range
Heating 40° to 90°F (4.5° to 32°C)
Cooling 54° to 100°F (12° to 37.5°C)
Setpoint High/Low Limits Individually adjustable, H/C
Remote Sensor
Room Sensor Room sensor input auto-detected 10K
T
ype 2 thermistors Outside Air Outside air input auto-detected 10K
T
ype 2 thermistors Mixed Air Mixed air input auto-detected
(economizer model only) 10K Type 2 thermistors
Auxiliary Inputs
Two dry contact digital inputs
Four Types Service/status reminders
Filter alarm
Central night setback clock
Remote occupied override timer
Control Output 1A relays 30 VAC, 3A surge maximum
Auxillary Contact Output 1A relay 30 VAC, N.O./N.C. follows
occupied schedule
Mixed Air Output Proportional 0-10V DC, 2 kΩ minimum
(economizer model)
Control Type Proportional plus integral
Deadband Adjustable 2° to 4°F (1° to 2°C)
OSA Lockout Limits
Heating 15° to 120°F (26° to 49°C), 5°F
increments
Cooling -40° to 95°F (-40° to 35°C), 5°F
increments
Low Limit Protection Enable/disable, heating @ 47°F (5.5°C)
Power Up Delay 10 to 120 seconds
Keypad Lockout Three levels (full, none, partial)
Cycles Per Hour Adjustable, heating 3-8 CPH, cooling
3-4 CPH
Display Offset Adjustable ±5°F (2.5°C), 1°F
increments
LED Indicators Three green on (fan, cooling, heating)
Wiring 18 AWG max, 22 AWG recommended
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Enclosure ULFR1 flame-retardant plastic
Color White
Mounting Standard vertical 2" x 4" box
Dimensions 4.94"H x 3.38"W x 1.13"D
(12.5 x 8.6 x 2.9 cm)
Weight 0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Approvals UL Listed File #E234137, cUL, CE,
LonMar
k
RoHS Statement
Yes
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The VT7600 Communicating Thermostats are digital
display, single or multistage, seven-day programmable or
nonprogrammable PI thermostats (°F or °C) for use with
AHU controls and heat pumps for both heating and cooling
applications
. The VT7600 has both system and fan switching
with internal sensor or remote sensor capabilities. Five
buttons control a simplified menu for over 20 configurable parameters
. A communication card is added for multiple
protocols, including BACnet and LON. Other control features
are listed below.
SPECIFICATIONS
FEATURES
ALL MODELS
• No logo on thermostat cover
• 1H/1C, 2H/2C (3H/2C heat pump)
models
• Fan switching (on/auto/smart)
• System switching (O/A/C/H)
• Two line 8 digit backlit LCD Display
• Three status LEDs (Fan, Clg, Htg)
• Five control keys
• Remote sensor and OSA sensor inputs
•
Adjustable deadband
• PIR co •
Permanent program retention
• Two configurable DI inputs
• Two line LCD display (°F or °C)
• Proportional + Integral control
ECONOMIZER MODELS •
Mixed-air (0-10V) control outputs
• Mixed-air sensor input
• Mixed-air setpoint (SP)
• Economizer changeover S.P.
temperature
• OSA damper minimum position in %
PROGRAMMABLE MODELS •
Two or four configurable events per
day
• Progressive recovery or none
• 12 or 24 hour clock
• Six hour clock retention
• Occ/Unocc auxiliary contact out
COMMUNICATION MODELS •
BACnet
• LON
• Wireless
• Wireless/ Zigbee Pro
VT7600A5031B
BACnet Thermostat

1381. fi˚ 1313THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
AHU COMMUNICATING THERMOSTAT SINGLE AND MULTISTAGE,
PROGRAMMABLE AND NON-PROGRAMMABLE, (BACNET, LON)
VT7600 COMMUNICATING
WIRING
VT7600A-E
VT7600A-B
VT7600B-E
VT7600B-B
VT7605B-E
VT7605B-B
VT7600H-E
VT7600H-B
VT7652A-E
VT7652A-B
VT7652B-E
VT7652B-B
VT7656B-E
VT7656B-B
VT7652H-E
VT7652H-B
TABLE 1. TERMINAL DESIGNATION BY THERMOSTAT MODEL
THERMOSTAT MODEL VT7600
Note: Terminals and functions are not present on every thermostat
Y1 Y2 G D1 D2O/B RS OS MSS comW1 W2EC
0-10V
24V 24V
AUX
Aux ACT.
Rev.
valve
Type 2 Type 2 Type 2
Heat 1
*
*
*
Cool 1 Cool 2
24 VAC Thermostat Power
(provided by installer)
VT
electronics
VT7600 SERIES THERMOSTAT
T-1 T-2
Fan Heat 2
Note: All outputs are
24 VAC.
Internal relays and connections
sensor inputs
Thermistor
* If using the same power source for the thermostat and heating loads, delete transformer T-2 and install a jumper across RC and RH. Then wire W1 and W2 common to T1 ( ).
Note: Terminals are thermostat-dependent. See Table 1.
RC C RH
** Common device reference on BACnet.
+
**
–
Ref
Network
card
To Network BACnet LonTalk
Function
LON
BACNET
Energizes on a call for first stage cooling (first stage heating HP)
Energizes on a call for second stage cooling (second stage heating HP)
Energizes fan in accordance with the selected fan mode
24 VAC from equipment transformer
24 VAC (common) from equipment transformer
RH 24 VAC for heating stages (jumper to RC for single power systems)
W1 Energizes on a call for first stage heating (third stage heating HP)
W2 Energizes on a call for second stage heating
O/B HP reversing valve configurable (O = on or B = on)
AUX Configurable auxiliary output (follows schedule)
D1 Configurable digital input
D2 Configurable digital input
EC 0 - 10 VDC economizer actuator output
RS Remote room sensor
Scom Sensor common
OS Outdoor air sensor
MS Mixed air sensor

1382. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1314fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
AHU COMMUNICATING THERMOSTAT SINGLE AND MULTISTAGE,
PROGRAMMABLE AND NON-PROGRAMMABLE, (BACNET, LON)
VT7600 COMMUNICATING
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES PAGE
TG511A1000 Thermostat guard- clear-medium size 1392
COV-PIR-HPUMP-5031 PIR cover for HP thermostat
COV-PIR-RTU-5032 PIR cover for RTU thermostat
MODEL THERMOST AT TYPE
VT7600 R TU controller, no local schedule
VT7605 R TU + economizer controller, no local schedule
VT7606 R TU + IAQ + economizer controller, no local schedule
VT7607 R TU + humidity controller, no local schedule
VT7652 R TU controller, local schedule
VT7656 R TU + economizer controller, local schedule
VT7657 R TU + humidity controller, local schedule
OUTPUTS
A 1H/1C (VT7600 and VT7652 only)
B 2H/2C (Not av ailable on VT7606)
E 2H/2C + IAQ + economizer controller (VT7606 and VT7656 only)
F 2C + Analog heat controller (VT7600 and VT7652 only)
H 3H/3C Heatpump controller (VT7600 and VT7652 only)
W 2H/2C + humidity +watersource heatpump controller (VT7600 and VT7652 only)
COVER
5000 Viconics logo
5031 Blank cover (no logo)
5500 PIR cover w/ Viconics logo
5531 PIR cover blank (no logo)
COMMUNICATION PR OTOCOL
E Echelon/LONworks
B BACnet
P Wireless/Zigbee Pro
W Wireless
VT7605 B 5031 W Example: VT7605B5031W RTU + economizer with 2 heat/2 cool,
blank cover, wireless

1383. fi˚ 1315THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
T7350 SERIES PROGRAMMABLE COMMERCIAL THERMOSTATS
AND W7350 CONTROLLER
T7350, W7350 SERIES
T7350 Models
Mounting Means
Mounts on subbase; subbase mounts
on wall using two 5/8” long #6-32 screws (included)
.
Throttling Range for Modulating Outputs
Automatically adjusts based on heat/cool
stages.
Manually adjustable with TStatSpec
software or PDA
Clock Accuracy (at 77°F [25°C])
±1 min./month (30 days)
Minimum Stage Operation Time (fixed)
Minimum On Heat: 1 minute; cool: 3 minutes
Minimum Off (Cool and Heat Pump)
1 minute
Power 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz.; 20 to 30 VAC, 50/60
Hz
Input
Temperature 20KΩ
Humidity 0-10 VDC
Outdoor 3000 PTC
Discharge Air 20KΩ
Occupancy Sensor Dry contact switching 30 VDC at
1 mA
All Relay Outputs (at 30 Vac)
Running 1.5A maximum
Inrush 7.5A maximum
Modulating Output 4 to 20 mA with 510 ohm maximum
terminating resistance
System Current Draw (without load)
5 VA maximum at 30 Vac, 50/60 Hz
NOTE: Relays are N.O. Single-Pole, Single-Throw (SPST).
Outdoor Sensor Wiring Requires 18 gauge wire
Humidity Ratings 5% to 90% RH, noncondensing.
Emergency Heat Indication
Display indicates when Emergency Heat
is activated (Em)
Temperature Ratings
Operating Ambient 30° to 110°F (-1° to 43°C)
Shipping -30° to +150°F (-34°°C to +66°C)
Display Accuracy ±1°F (±1°C)
Setpoint
Range Heating: 40° to 90°F (4° to 32°C)
Cooling 45° to 99°F (7° to 37°C)
Deadband 2°F (1°C)
Loss of Power The thermostat maintains programmed
times and temperatures for the life of the product
. Clock and day information is
retained for a minimum of 48 hours.
NOTE: To achieve the 48-hour power-loss clock retention, the T7350
must be powered for at least 5 minutes.
DESCRIPTION
The T7350 Commercial Programmable Thermostat controls 24
VAC single zone heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC)
equipment
. The T7350 consists of a thermostat and a subbase. The
thermostat includes the keypad and display for 7-day programming and the subbase includes equipment control connections
. T7350M
models have 2 modulating outputs for heat and/or cool, and the T7350H models have LonWorks
®
capability
.
The W7350 WebStat is a web-based building manager that allows
contractors and facility managers to view and command T7350H Commercial Programmable Thermostats
. It communicates over
the LonWorks
®
network to perform building management control
of the T7350H thermostats through a web browser. It runs building
management applications such as trending, scheduling and alarming.
The
WebStat Bundle (W7350A1000) includes the WebStat controller,
a LON
®
card, and a power supply
.
FEATURES
• 7-da
periods per day
• Individual heat and cool setpoints for Occupied and Not
Occupied periods
• Advanced configuration using TStatSpec software or PDA
• PID control minimizes temperature fluctuations
• Recovery ramp control automatically optimizes equipment
start times based on building load
• Keypad multi-level lockout available with all models
SPECIFICATIONS
T7350 Series
• Remote sensor capability for temperature (including outdoor air
and discharge air) and humidity sensors
• T7350M provides 2 modulating heat and/or cool outputs
• T7350H provides networking capability on LonWorks® bus
using Free Topology Transceiver (FTT)
• T7350H conforms to LonMark
®
Space Comfort Profile for
rooftop applications
• W7530 web-based controller supports up to 20 W7350H
thermostats

1384. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1316fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Communicating Model T7350H:
Connection Terminals for the LonWorks
Bus.
Network jack for quick access by personal
computer based tools.
Communications service-pin pushbutton
to simplify startup.
LonMark Functional Profile
8500_20 Space Comfort Controller.
LonMark SCC Object Type
8504 Rooftop See Fig. 2.
LonMark Program Identifier
80:00:0C:55:04:03:04:2E.
LonMark Application Interoperability
Version 3.3
Honeywell LonMark Plug-In file downloads:
plugin.ge51.honeywell.de/index.htm#
TStat Spec System Requirements
Windows XP or Windows 7
PDA System Requirements
Palm OS
®
3.5.x to 5.2.1
Dynamic Heap 256K bytes
Free RAM Space 1000K bytes
Serial Communications RS-232
Approvals European Community Mark (CE) Listed.
UL 873 Recognized, NEC Class 2.FCC
Part 15 subpart J Class A.cUL.
Dimensions
T7350 models 6-3/4"W x 4-1/2"H x 2-3/16"D
(17.1 x 11.4 x 5.6 cm)
W7350 model 6-23/32"W x 4"H x 2-3/16"D
(17.1 x 10.2 x 5.6 cm)
Weights
T7350 models 1.25 lb (0.57 kg)
W7350 model 1.25 lb (0.57 kg)
Warranty 1 year
Note: For more specification data on the W7350 please see
manufacturer’s specification sheet. (www.kele.com)
T7350 SERIES PROGRAMMABLE COMMERCIAL THERMOSTATS
AND W7350 CONTROLLER
T7350, W7350 SERIES
T7350 THERMOSTAT FEATURES
Model Applications
Maximum Stages
a
Features
Auxiliary
Relay
LONWORKS®
Capability?Heat Cool
T7350A
Conventional or
Heat Pump
1
b
1
b
Yes No
T7350B 2
b
2
b
Outdoor, Discharge Air Capability Yes No
T7350D
3 (2)
c
3 (4)
c
Humidity, Occupancy, Outdoor, Discharge Air Capability
Yes No
T7350H1009 Isolated
Normally
Open
Yes
T7350H1017
Modulating 2 modulating, 2
b
relay
Humidity, Occupancy, Outdoor, Discharge Air Capability, 4-20 mA output (2-10 VDC with 500 ohm resistor)
Yes
T7350M Yes No
a
All models are down-selectable and can be configured to control fewer stages than the maximum allowed.
b
One extra stage (of either heat or cool) can be configured using the auxiliary relay.
c
Heat pump applications for these models have a maximum of two heat stages and two cool stages.
DEFAULT SETPOINTS
Control Occupied Not Occupied Standby
Heating 70°F (21°C) 55°F (13°C) 67°F (19°C)
Cooling 75°F (24°C) 85°F (29°C) 78°F (26°C)
SPECIFICATIONS (continued)

1385. fi˚ 1317THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
WHEN INSTALLED ON A SYSTEM WITH TWO TRANSFORMERS, REMOVE THE FACTORY-INSTALLED JUMPER.
1
2
2
RCX
SUBBASE
W1 GY1AUXRH
1
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
L1 (HOT)
L2
COMPRESSOR
CONTACTOR 1
HEATING
TRANSFORMER
COOLING TRANSFORMER
FAN RELAY
HEAT RELAY 2
HEAT RELAY 1
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.

WHEN INSTALLED ON A SYSTEM WITH TWO TRANSFORMERS, REMOVE THE FACTORY-INSTALLED JUMPER.

USE ECONOMIZER INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION DIRECTIONS.
1
2
2
3
RC 1W X G Y1
W2 Y2
AUX RH
DISCHARGE
AIR
SENSOR
OUTDOOR AIR SENSOR
OS OS AS AS
1
3
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
L1 (HOT)
L2
COMPRESSOR
CONTACTOR 1
COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR 2
HEATING TRANSFORMER
COOLING TRANSFORMER
HEAT
RELAY 1
FAN
RELAY
ECONOMIZER
HEAT
RELAY 2
SUBBASE
T5 T6 T7 T4 T3
TR23 REMOTE SENSOR
987654321 101112
GND
SENSOR
SET PT
LED
BYPASS
Typical hookup of T7350A in two-stage heat and one-stage cool conventional system with two transformers
Typical hookup of T7350B in two-stage heat and two-stage cool conventional system with two transformers
WIRING
T7350 SERIES PROGRAMMABLE COMMERCIAL THERMOSTATS
AND W7350 CONTROLLER
T7350, W7350 SERIES

1386. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1318fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
ENSURE TRANSFORMER IS SIZED TO HANDLE THE LOAD.
HEAT/COOL SYSTEMS WITH ONE TRANSFORMER REQUIRE THE FACTOR Y-INSTALLED JUMPER.
USE ECONOMIZER INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTA LLATION DIRECTIONS.
NO NEED TO WIRE HC TERMINAL BECAUSE THE T3 TERMINAL IS INTERNALL Y TIED TO HC, WHICH IS ALSO TIED TO TERMINAL 1 COMMON AT THE SENSOR.
1
2
3
2
3
4
RC
AUX
X
SUBBASE
W1 GY1
W3/Y4Y 3W 2Y2
AUXRH
T5 T6 T7 T4 T3
DISCHARGE
AIR
SENSOR
OUTDOOR AIR SENSOR
MOTION SENSORHUMIDITY SENSOR
M
OSOS ASAS
MHC HPHS
1
4
L1
(HOT)
L2
COMPRESSOR
CONTACTOR 1
COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR 2
HEAT RELAY 1 FAN RELAY
ECONOMIZER
HEAT RELAY 2
COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR 3
HEAT RELAY 3
TR23-H REMOTE SENSOR
987654321 101112
GND SENSOR SET PT
LED
BYPASS
5
Typical hookup of T7350D in three-stage heat and three-stage cool conventional system with one transformer.
Typical hookup of T7350H1009 in three-stage heat and three-stage cool conventional system with one transformer
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
ENSURE TRANSFORMER IS SIZED TO HANDLE THE LOAD.
HEAT/COOL SYSTEMS WITH ONE TRANSFORMER REQUIRE THE FACTORY-INSTALLED JUMPER.
USE ECONOMIZER INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION DIRECTIONS.
1
2
3
2
3
4
RC
AUX
X
SUBBASE
W1 GY1
W3/Y4Y 3W 2Y2
AUXRH
DISCHARGE
AIR
SENSOR
OUTDOOR AIR SENSOR
MOTION SENSOR
M
OSOS ASAS
MEBEB
1
4
L1
(HOT)
L2
L
ONWORKS®
BUS
COMPRESSOR
CONTACTOR 1
COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR 2
HEAT RELAY 1 FAN RELAY
ECONOMIZER
HEAT RELAY 2
COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR 3
HEAT RELAY 3
LONWORKS®
BUS
T5 T6 T7 T4 T3
HUMIDITY SENSOR
HC HPHS
TR23-H REMOTE SENSOR
987654321 101112
GND
SENSOR
SET PT
LED
BYPASS
5
WHEN USING THE TR23-H FOR HUMIDITY SENSING THERE IS NO NEED TO WIRE HC TERMINAL BECAUSE THE T3 TERMINAL IS INTERNALLY TIED TO HC,
WHICH IS ALSO TIED TO TERMINAL 1 COMMON AT THE SENSOR
5
WIRING
T7350 SERIES PROGRAMMABLE COMMERCIAL THERMOSTATS
AND W7350 CONTROLLER
T7350, W7350 SERIES

1387. fi˚ 1319THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Typical hookup of T7350H1017 for system with two independent heat stages (one modulating),
two independent cool stages (one modulating), and two transformers.
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
ENSURE TRANSFORMER IS SIZED TO HANDLE THE LOAD.
HEAT/COOL SYSTEMS WITH ONE TRANSFORMER REQUIRE THE FACTORY-INSTALLED JUMPER.
USE ECONOMIZER INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION DIRECTIONS.
1
2
3
3
4
RCX
SUBBASE
W1 GY1
MH MC
AUXRH
T5 T6 T7 T4 T3
DISCHARGE
AIR
SENSOR
OUTDOOR AIR SENSOR
MOTION
SENSOR
HUMIDITY
SENSOR
M
OSOS AS MXAS
MHC HPHS
21
4
L1
(HOT)
L2
COMPRESSOR
CONTACTOR 1
HEAT RELAY 1 FAN RELAY
ECONOMIZER
MODULATING
HEAT
(4-20 mA)
–
+
MODULATING
COOL
(4-20 mA)
–
+
R
X
R
X
WHEN USING THE TR23-H FOR HUMIDITY SENSING THERE IS NO NEED TO WIRE HC TERMINAL BECAUSE THE T3 TERMINAL IS INTERNALL Y TIED TO HC,
WHICH IS ALSO TIED TO TERMINAL 1 COMMON AT THE SENSOR.
5
5
TR23-H REMOTE SENSOR
987654321 101112
GND SENSOR SET PT
LED
BYPASS
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
WHEN INSTALLED ON A SYSTEM WITH TWO TRANSFORMERS, REMOVE THE FA CTORY-INSTALLED JUMPER.
USE ECONOMIZER INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION DIRECTIONS.
1
2
3
WHEN USING THE TR23-H FOR HUMIDITY SENSING THERE IS NO NEED TO WIRE HC TERMINAL BECAUSE THE T3 TERMINAL IS INTERNALL Y TIED TO HC, WHICH
IS ALSO TIED TO TERMINAL 1 COMMON AT THE SENSOR.
4
Typical hookup of T7350M for system with two independent heat stages (one modulating),
two independent cool stages (one modulating), and one transformer.
2
RCX
SUBBASE
W1 GY1
MH MC
AUXRH
DISCHARGE AIR SENSOR
OUTDOOR AIR SENSOR
MOTION SENSOR
M
OSOS AS MXAS
M
1
3
L1
(HOT)
HEATING
TRANSFORMER
COOLING
TRANSFORMER
L2
1
L1 (HOT)
L2
COMPRESSOR
CONTACTOR 1
HEAT RELAY 1 FAN
RELAY
ECONOMIZER
MODULAT ING
HEAT
(4-20 mA)
–
+
MODULAT ING
COOL
(4-20 mA)
–
+
R
X
R
X
LONWORKS
®
BUS
LONWORKS
®
BUS
AUX
EBEB
T5 T6 T7 T4 T3
HUMIDITY SENSOR
HC HPHS
TR23-H REMOTE SENSOR
987654321 101112
GND SENSOR SET PT
LED
BYPASS
4
WIRING
T7350 SERIES PROGRAMMABLE COMMERCIAL THERMOSTATS
AND W7350 CONTROLLER
T7350, W7350 SERIES

1388. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1320fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
T7350A1004 Single stage heat pump compatible with auxiliary
T7350M1008 Modulating with 2 stage heat and 2 stage cool
T7350B1002 Multi-stage heat pump compatible with auxiliary
T7350D1008 Multi-stage heat pump compatible with occupancy and humidity feature and auxiliary
T7350H1009 Multi-stage heat pump compatible with occupancy and humidity feature communicating LonWorks®
T7350H1017 Modulating with 2 stage heat and 2 stage cool with occupancy and humidity feature communicating LonWorks®
W7350A1000 Webstat controller for T7350 series thermostats
ACCESSORIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
50014064-001 Infra-red thermostat module for T7350 Series
C7041B2005 Duct temperature sensor, 6 inch
C7041B2013 Duct temperature sensor, 12 inch
C7041C2003 Duct temperature sensor, 18 inch
C7041J2007 Duct temperature averaging sensor, 12 foot
C7089R2013 Wireless outdoor sensor
T7350 SERIES PROGRAMMABLE COMMERCIAL THERMOSTATS
AND W7350 CONTROLLER
T7350, W7350 SERIES

1389. fi˚ 1321THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ZONE THERMOSTAT AND FCU THERMOSTAT
VT7200, VT7300 SERIES
Supply Voltage 19-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Supply Current 2 VA
Display Two-line backlit LCD, ±0.2°F (0.1°C)
Control Accuracy Temperature, ±0.9°F (±0.5°C)
VT7355C50xx, VT7355F50xx
Dehumidification, ±5% RH from 20 to
80%
Thermostat Type Zone (VT7200) or FCU (VT7300)
Cover Controls
Zone Models Up/down/override buttons Heat/Cool
“on” LEDs
FCU Models Up/down/°C-or-°F/fan/mode buttons
Fan/Heat/Cool “on” LEDs
Control Outputs See terminal designation table
VT7200C50xx 5 triacs (H/C, 2-position or floating)
VT7200F50xx 1 triac, 2 analog outputs (H/C
proportional 0 to 10 VDC)
VT73(05,55)C50xx 3 relays (fan), 5 triacs (H/C,
2-position or floating control)
VT73(05, 55)F50xx 3 relays (fan), 1 triac, 2 analog
outputs (H/C proportional 0 to 10 VDC)
Triacs and Relays 30 VAC, 1A, 3A inrush
Analog Outputs 0-10 VDC, 2K minimum impedance,
direct or reverse acting
Auxiliary Inputs 2 digital inputs, 1 universal input,
1 remote sensor
Configurable as Service/status reminders
Door/window/motion sensor switch
Filter alarm
Central night setback clock
Remote occupied override switch
Heat/Cool changeover, contact or
sensor
Digital Inputs Dry contact
Universal Input Dry contact or 10K Type 2 Model 24
thermistor
Remote Sensor Thermistor, 10K Type 2 Model 24
Control Type Proportional plus integral (PI)
Proportional Band Heating and cooling, 2°F (1.1°C)
Floating Time Base Adjustable, 0.5 to 9 minutes
Cycles Per Hour Adjustable 3 to 8
Override Timer 0 to 24 hours, 1-hour increments,
pushbutton reset
Sensor Offset Adjustable ±5°F (±2.5°C), ±15% RH
(humidity models)
Deadband Setpoint Adjustable 2° to 5°F (1° to 2.5°C)
Adjusted depending on heating
or cooling mode
, heating and
cooling setpoints are changed simultaneously with respect to the deadband
Cooling Limits
54° to 100°F (12° to 37.7°C)
Heating Limits 40° to 90°F (4.5° to 32°C)
Keypad Lockout Selectable system/fan/unoccupied
System Setting O=off, H=heating, C=cooling,
A=automatic changeover
FCU Models O/C, O/H, O/A/H/C, H/O/C
Fan Setting L=low, M=medium, H=high, A=auto
FCU Models L/M/H, L/H, L/M/H/A, L/H/A, On/A
Enclosure UL FR1, flame retardant plastic
Mounting Standard vertical, 2" x 4" box
Wiring 18 AWG maximum, 22 AWG
recommended
Color White
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (-30° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0–95% RH non-condensing
Dimensions 4.94"H x 3.38"W x 1.13"D
(12.5 x 8.6 x 2.9 cm)
Weight 0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Approvals UL, cUL, File #E234137, CE
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
VT7200 Zone thermostats are digital-display, heating/cooling,
with outputs for two-position, floating, and proportional
terminal unit control
. They are ideal for baseboard heat,
unit heaters, radiant panels, reheat, or VAV box (pressure- dependent) control
. VT7300 Series Fan Coil Unit (FCU)
thermostats are digital-display, heating / cooling, with outputs for two-position, floating, or proportional control
. In addition,
the
y include multispeed fan relays for high, medium, and low
fan speed control
. Both thermostats offer remote temperature
sensor and remote digital inputs configured for night setback, filter alarm, motion sensor, door/window switch, or service indication
.
FEATURES
• Zone or FCU control models
• Two-position, floating, or proportional models
• Remote room sensor option
• Adjustable deadband
• Setpoint range limits (heating and cooling)
• Three configurable inputs for any of: night setback,
setback override, motion sensor, door or window switch, filter alarm, service advisory, heat/cool changeover
SPECIFICATIONS
VT7305C50xx
FCU Thermostat
• °F/°C (configurable)
• Display offset
• Adjustable temporary occupied time
• Heat, cool, and reheat time base outputs are
configurable
• Direct or reverse acting (proportional models)
• Keypad lockout functions
• Dehumidification control models
• Three-speed fan control (FCU model)
• Selectable system control (FCU model)
VT7200C50xx
Zone Thermostat

1390. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1322fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
ZONE THERMOSTAT AND FCU THERMOSTAT
VT7200, VT7300 SERIES
TABLE 1. TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS BY THERMOSTAT MODEL
ZONE THERMOSTATS FAN COIL UNIT (FCU) THERMOSTATS ** Terminals and functions are not present on every thermostat
VT7200C5031
2-Position
or Floating
VT7200F5031
Proportional
VT7305C5031
2-Position
or Floating
VT7355C5031
2-Position or
Floating/RH
VT7305F5031
Proportional
VT7355F5031
Proportional/RH
Terminal** Thermostat Function**
XX XX 1H igh speed fan
XX XX 2 Medium speed fan
XX XX 3 Low speed fan
XX XX XX 4 24 VAC power for thermostat, fan and BO-(1, 2, 3, 4), AO-(1, 2)
XX XX XX 5 24 VAC common for thermostat, fan and BO-(1, 2, 3, 4), AO-(1, 2)
XX XX XX 6 BO-5, auxiliary output, configurable (reheat, occupied, or unoccupied)
XX XX XX 7 BO-5, auxiliary output, configurable (reheat, occupied, or unoccupied)
XX X8 BO-3, open heating, (VT7200C5031, VT7355C5031)
XX X9 BO-4, close heating (VT7200C5031, VT7355C5031)
XX X9 AO-2, heating (VT7305F5031, VT7355F5031)
XX X1 0 BO-1, open cooling (VT7200C5031)
XX X1 0 AO-1, cooling (VT7305F5031, VT7355F5031)
XX X1 1 BO-2, close cooling, (VT7200C5031, VT7355C5031)
XX XX XX 12 BI-1, configurable (night setback clock, motion detector, window switch)
XX XX XX 13 RS, remote sensor, 10 kfithermistor
XX XX XX 14 SCOM, common for remote sensor, BI-(1, 2) and UI-1
XX XX XX 15 BI-2, configurable (door, filter, service, remote override)
XX XX XX 16 UI-3, configurable (changeover contact or sensor, supply air sensor
)
OCCO
24 VAC 24 VAC
T-2T-1
Prop
H
Prop
C
Fan
L
24 V
HOT
24 V
COM
VT7200/7300
Electronics
VT7200/7300 SERIES THERMOST ATS
2-Pos
or Fltg
Proportional
0-10 VDC
Internal Device Connection
(TRIACs except as noted)
2-Pos, Fltg, Proportional
Depending on Model
2-Pos
or Fltg
Window
D/N Clock
Motion
Remote
Room
Sensor
Door
Filter
Service
Rem.
Override
C/O
or
Supply
Air
Temp.
BO-5 BO-5 BO-3
B
O
4
A
O
2
A
O
1
B
O
1
BO-2 BI-1R S
S
COM
BI-2 UI-3
Type 2
Sensor
Type 2
Sensor
Fan
M
Relays
Fan
H
* CH
24 VAC Transformer
(provided by others)
Note: Terminals are Thermostat Dependent
See Table 1.
*One Transformer Wiring (Delete T2)
Alternate Device Based on Set-up
Fan
L
Fan
M
Fan
H
AUX
WIRING
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
680-243-6 Changeover thermostat with conduit fitting
COV-FCU-L Blank cover for fan coil thermostats
COV-ZN Blank cover for zone thermostats
KTR24 Remote room thermistor sensor 1169
KTR24-LED-MB Remote room sensor with override button and LED 1169
ST-D24 10K Type 2 duct temperature themistor 1197
ST-R24SC Strap-on pipe thermistor 1247
MODEL THERMOSTAT TYPE
VT7200Zone Controller
VT7300Fancoil Controller Commercial (Override Occupancy)
VT7305Fancoil Controller Hospitality (Hotel/Lodging w/ Temp Scale)
VT7350Fancoil Controller Commercial (Override Occupancy) w/ Humidity Sensor
VT7355Fancoil Controller Hospitality (Hotel/Lodging w/Temp Scale) w/ Humidity Sensor
OUTPUTS
C2 floating + 1 digital (for VT7200), 2 floating + 1 auxiliary  (for VT73xx)
F2 analog + 1 digital (for VT7200), 2 analog + 1 auxiliary  (for VT73xx)
COVER
5000Viconics logo
5031Blank Cover (no logo)
5500PIR Cover w/ Viconics logo
5531PIR Cover Blank (no logo)
VT7305 C 5031 Example: VT7305C5031
Hospitality fancoil controller with 2 floating
and 1 auxiliary outputs with a blank cover

1391. fi˚ 1323THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
BIG BLUE™ AND BLUE™ UNIVERSAL AND SINGLE STAGE PROGRAMMABLE/
NON-PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTATS
1F95, 1F95EZ AND 1F97 SERIES THERMOSTATS
Supply Voltage
24 VAC
Input Current 1.5A per terminal
Temperature Range 32° to 105°F (0° to 41°C)
Setpoint Range 45° to 99°F (7° to 37°C)
Schedule Type 4 (Morning, Day, Evening, Night), 2
(Day and Night), 2 (Day and Night)
Materials Of Construction
ABS plastic
Mounting Any except upside down
Accuracy ±1°
Program Options 7 day, 5+1+1
Bulb and Capillary No
Control Type Low voltage thermostat
Cycles Per Hour Cool 2.5
Cycles Per Hour Heat 5
Enclosure NEMA 1
Remote Sensor Select models only
Sensor Type Thermistor
System Type Universal - SS, MS or HP
Deadband 1°
Differential 1°
Display Type LCD
Storage Temperature -40° to 150°F (-40° to 65°C)
Operating Temperature 32° to 105°F (0° to 41°C)
Dimensions
1F95-1277/1F97-1277/1F95-1280/1F95-1291
6-2/7"L x 5-1/8"Hx 1-3/4"D
(16 x 13 x 4.4 cm)
1F95-0680/1F95-0671/1F95EZ-0671
6-2/5"L x 4-3/5"H x 1-3/4"D
(16.26 x 11.7 x 4.4 cm)
Weight
1F95-1277/1F97-1277/1F95-1280/1F95-1291
1.91 lb (0.87 kg)
1F95-0680/1F95-0671/1F95EZ-0671

1.05 lb (0.48 kg)
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The White Rodgers 1F95 Series universal model
thermostats are quickly configured for single stage, multi-
stage or heat pump and heat pump dual fuel systems
.
The
y can also be selected as programmable or non-
programmable
. The White Rodgers 1F97 Series universal
model thermostats is for single stage use only, but comes with all of the other features mentioned above
. The White
Rodgers 1F97EZ Series universal model thermostat comes with a large “Easy Reader” display
. These thermostats feature
the largest display on a keypad operated thermostat, as well as simple and logical installer setup and programming, enhanced by audio confirmation of entries
. Variable keypad
security prevents tampering and there is also temporary and vacation overrides for added convenience
. These thermostats
offer power stealing assist for maximum battery life, remote sensing, as well as the exclusive Cool Savings™ feature which adjusts the setpoint after 20 minutes to compensate for humidity loss thus providing the ultimate in comfort control and energy savings
.
FEATURES
• Lar •
Quick one button programming
• Configurable as manual heat/cool, auto changeover,
heat only or cool only
• Exclusive battery power monitor
• Indoor remote sensing averaging option
SPECIFICATIONS
1F95-1277-ST
• Choice of programming options and time periods
• Intuitive menu-driven set-up, programming and
operation, with audio prompt to confirm entries
• Choice of battery powered with optional power stealing
assist or hardwired with battery backup

1392. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1324fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
BIG BLUE™ AND BLUE™ UNIVERSAL AND SINGLE STAGE PROGRAMMABLE/
NON-PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTATS
1F95, 1F95EZ AND 1F97 SERIES THERMOSTATS
Single Stage (SS)
Energiz- ed in Cool Mode
Energized in Heat or Off Mode
System
O RH +B
CLASS II
TRANSFORMER
HOT
24VAC
NEUTRAL
120VAC
WG C* -
Jumper
Energized on call for Cool (Com- pressor)
Blower/ Circula- tor Fan Energiz- ed on call for Cool & for Heat (if ELE is sel- ected)
24 Volt
(Hot) Cool
Power Temp- erature Sensor
Remote Temp- erature Sensor
Power Remote Temp-
erature Sensor
Energized on call for Heat
Third wire for 3-wire zone valve
Diagnostic Indicator (See Note
)
Y RC S 6 L
{
To Remote Te mperature Sensor
24 Volt
(Hot) Heat
24 Volt
Com- mon (option- al)
1
* Common connection required fo r diagnostic or malfunction indication.
1F97-1277
Single Stage System with Single Transformer
NOTE: For more wiring and installation information please go to www.kele.com and select the related documents for this family or call your Kele sales representative.
Single Stage 1 (SS1)
Multi- Stage 2 (MS2) O
Energized Constantly
in
Cool Mode
B
Energized Constantly
in Heat, Off,
Emergency
Mode
No Output
Cool
Mode
2nd
StageCool Mode 1st Stage
Blower/ Circulator Fan Energized on Call for Cool (and Heat if configured for Electric Heat)
No Output
Heat Mode 2nd Stage
Heat Mode 1st Stage Optional*
24 Volt
(Com-
mon)
24 Volt (Hot) Cool
System
Y GW/E C 6L RC
CLASS II
TRANSFORMER
HOT
24VAC
NEUTRAL
120VAC
24 Volt (Hot) Heat
RHY2 W2
Jumper
Diagnostic Indicator Input or System Malfunction Switch Input
Comfort Alert II Module
or Similar System
Diagnostic Module
See Module Instructions
for details
O/B
* Common connection required fo r diagnostic or malfunction indication.
1F95EZ-0671
Single Stage or Multi-Stage System (No Heat Pump) with Single Transformer
Single Stage 1 (SS1)
Multi- Stage 2 (MS2) O
Energized Constantly
in
Cool Mode
B
Energized Constantly
in Heat, Off,
Emergency
Mode
No Output
Cool
Mode
2nd
StageCool Mode 1st Stage
Blower/ Circulator Fan Energized on Call for Cool (and Heat if configured for Electric Heat)
No Output
Heat Mode 2nd Stage
Heat Mode 1st Stage Optional*
24 Volt
(Com-
mon)
24 Volt
(Hot) Cool
System
Y GW/E C A1L RC
CLASS II
TRANSFORMER
HOT
24VAC
NEUTRAL
120VAC
24 Volt
(Hot) Heat
RHY2 W2
Jumper
Diagnostic Indicator Input or System Malfunction Switch Input
Comfort Alert II Module
or Similar System
Diagnostic Module
See Module Instructions
for details
O/B
Energized
Pre-purge,
Morning,
Day, Eve,
Night
* Common connection required for diagnostic or malfunction indication.
1F95-0680
Single Stage or Multi-Stage System (No Heat Pump) with Single Transfo rmer
1F95-0680
only
WIRING

1393. fi˚ 1325THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
BIG BLUE™ AND BLUE™ UNIVERSAL AND SINGLE STAGE PROGRAMMABLE/
NON-PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTATS
1F95, 1F95EZ AND 1F97 SERIES THERMOSTATS
Single
Stage 1
(SS1)
Multi-
Stage 2
(MS2)
O
Energized Constantly
in
Cool Mode
B
Energized Constantly
in Heat, Off,
Emergency
Mode
No Output
Cool
Mode
2nd
StageCool Mode 1st Stage
Blower/ Circulator Fan Energized on Call for Cool (and Heat if configured for Electric Heat)
No Output
Heat Mode 2nd Stage
Heat Mode 1st Stage Optional*
24 Volt
(Com-
mon)
24 Volt (Hot) Cool
System
Y GW/E CL RC
CLASS II
TRANSFORMER
HOT
24VAC
NEUTRAL
120VAC
24 Volt (Hot) Heat
RHY2 W2
Jumper
Diagnostic Indicator Input or System Malfunction Switch Input
Comfort Alert II Module
or Similar System
Diagnostic Module
See Module Instructions
for details
O/B
* Common connection required for diagnostic or malfunction indication.
1F95-0671
Single Stage or Multi-Stage System (No Heat Pump) with Single Transformer
1F95-1277
Single Stage or Multi-Stage System (No Heat Pump) with Single Transformer
Single Stage 1 (SS1)
Multi- Stage 2 (MS2)
Energiz- ed in Cool & Off Mode
Ener- gized in Heat Mode
System
O RH +B
CLASS II
TRANSFORMER
HOT
24VAC
NEUTRAL
120VAC
W/EG C -W2
Jumper
No OutputCool Mode 1st Stage (Com- pressor)
Blower/ Circula- tor Fan Energiz- ed on call for Cool & for Heat (if ELE is sel- ected)
24 VAC
(Hot) Cool
Power remote Temp-
erature Sensor
Remote Temp- erature Sensor signal
Power Remote Temp- erature Sensor
Heat Mode 1st Stage
Power Closed Conn- ection for 3-wire zone valve
Fault Indicator or System Malfunc- tion Switch
Y2 Y RC S 6 L
{
To Remote Te mperature Sensor
Cool mode 2nd Stage (Com- pressor)
24 VAC
(Hot) Heat
24 VAC
Com- mon (option- al) *
Heat Mode 2nd Stage
No Output
Ener- gized on call for Heat
Comfort Alert II module or similar malfunction module
Required for fault or malfunction indication, remote temperature sensor, or for continuous
backlight operation.
*24 VAC common connection
optional for system operation.
WIRING (continued)

1394. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1326fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
BIG BLUE™ AND BLUE™ UNIVERSAL AND SINGLE STAGE PROGRAMMABLE/
NON-PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTATS
1F95, 1F95EZ AND 1F97 SERIES THERMOSTATS
1F95-1280/1F95-1291
Single Stage or Multi-Stage System (No Heat Pump) with Single Transfo rmer
Single Stage 1
(SS1)
Multi Stage 2
(MS2)
System RC RH CY Y2 W/EW 2G O/B6 L
HOT
24VAC
NEUTRAL
120VAC
Call for heat
Heat mode-1st
stage
Heat mode-2nd
stage
No output
24 volt
power for
cooling
24 volt
power for
heating
Cool mode-2nd
stage
24volt
common
(optional
for system
operation,
required
for remote
sensor)
Call for cool No Output
Cool mode-1st
stage
Blower/Circulator fan
energize d on a call
for cool or Fan On
(also energize d in
heating if configured
for Electric Heat)
Installer
Configuration
Menu selects
“O” or “B”for
changeov er
function. Set
to “O” term inal
energized in Cool
& Off mode. Set
to “B” term inal
energized in
Heat & emergency
mode
Power closed
connectionfor
SPDT 3-wire
zonevalve
“Call for Service”
(malfunction
indicator) for
Heat Pumps
with “L” terminal
connection.
Original production
1F95-1291’s
do not have this
connection
A1
Damper or
Economizer
Operation
(see configuration
menu item 31)
Remote Sensor Terminals 
1F95-1280 
Damper Terminal 
+ S -
Supply voltage
to remote
temperature
sensor
Remote
temperature
sensor signal
Supply vo ltage
to remote
temperature
sensor
1F95-1291 Humidification/De-humidification Terminals
HM DHM
Humidification Terminal, Energizes on
call for heat if Humidity setpoint is
above room humidity. Can also be used
to prov ide humidification independent of
a call fo r heat and/or in cooling mode if
Automatic Humidification is selected in
Configuration Menu item #34
De-energize s on call fo r Dehumidifica-
tion to lower the fan speed. The DHM
terminal is only used on systems with a
compatible dehumidification fe ature that
have the required term inal connection
on the contol module or have a relay
installed to lower the fan speed
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
ACCESSORIES
F145-1328 Indoor remote sensor for 1F95
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
ATK63 Wire guard for duplex thermostats 1392
F29-0198 Thermostat guard - 8.125"H x 4.375"W x 3.375"D (20.6 x 11.1 x 8.6 cm) inside dim. 1392
MODEL DESCRIPTION
1F95-1277 Single or Multi-stage programmable or non-programmable thermostat with 12 inch touch screen
1F97-1277 Heat pump programmable thermostat with 12 inch touch screen
1F95-1280 Single or Multi-stage programmable or non-programmable thermostat with 12 inch touch screen
1F95-1291 Single or Multi-stage programmable or non-programmable thermostat with humidity control and
12 inch touch screen
1F95-0680 Single or Multi-stage heat pump compatible thermostat commercial style with 6 inch display
1F95-0671 Single or Multi-stage heat pump compatible thermostat universal style with 6 inch display
1F95EZ-0671 Single or Multi-stage heat pump compatible thermostat universal style with EZ read 6 inch display
Note:
All models available in a 6-pack
.

1395. fi˚ 1327THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
SINGLE AND MULTISTAGE PROGRAMMABLE AND NON-PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT
VT7600 SERIES
Supply Voltage 20 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Supply VA 2 VA
Display Two-line backlit LCD
Controls Five menu-driven buttons: up, down,
menu, no, yes/scroll
Thermostat Type 7-day programmable and non-
programmable models
Optimal Start Progressive recovery enable/disable
Heat Pump High/Lo Outside air lockout (emergency heating/
compressor heating)
Stages Available 1H/1C, 2H/2C, (3H/2C heat pump) 2H/2C
+ proportional mixed air economizer
Memory (schedule) Permanent, EEPROM
Clock Six-hour power-fail retention
System Switching Off/Auto/Cool/Heat
Fan Switching On-continuous
Auto-on demand
Smart-(on/occupied, off/unoccupied)
Control Accuracy ±0.9°F, (± 0.5°C) at 70°F (21°C)
Setpoint Range
Heating 40° to 90°F (4.5° to 32°C)
Cooling 54° to 100°F (12° to 37.5°C)
Setpoint High/Low Limits Individually-adjustable heating / cooling
Remote Sensor
Room Sensor Room sensor input auto-detected
10K Type 2 thermistors
Outside Air Outside air input auto-detected
10K Type 2 thermistors
Mixed Air Mixed air input auto-detected (economizer
model only) 10K Type 2 thermistors
Ancillary Inputs Two dry-contact digital inputs, applied for:
Service/status reminders
Filter alarm
Night setback clock
Remote occupied override timer
Control Output 1A relays, 30 VAC, SPST, 3A surge
maximum
Auxiliary Contact Output 1A relay, 30 VAC, SPDT, follows occupied
schedule
Mixed Air Output Proportional 0-10 VDC, 2K Ω minimum
impedance (economizer model only)
Control Type Proportional plus integral
Dead Band Adjustable 2° to 4°F (1° to 2°C)
Outside Air Lockout Limits
Heating 15° to 120°F (26° to 49°C), 5° increments
Cooling -40° to 95°F (-40° to 35°C), 5° increments
Low Limit Protection Enable/disable, heating on at 47°F
(5.5°C)
Power-up Delay Adjustable 10 to 120 seconds
Keypad Lockout 3 levels, (full, none, partial)
Cycles Per Hour Adjustable, heating 3-8; cooling, 3-4
Display Offset Adjustable ± 5°F, (±2.5C), 1°F increments
LED Indicators Three green “on” (fan, cooling, heating)
Wiring 18 AWG maximum, 22 AWG
recommended
Mounting Standard vertical 2" x 4" box
Enclosure UL FR1 flame retardant plastic
Color White
Operating Temperature 32°F to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 4.94"H x 3.38"W x 1.13"D
(12.5 x 8.6 x 2.9 cm)
Weight 0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Approvals UL Listed File #E234137, cUL, CE
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The VT7600 Series is a digital display single or multistage
7-day programmable or non-programmable PI thermostat
(°F or °C)
. It is used with AHU control and heat pump for
both heating and cooling applications. The VT7600 has both
system and fan switching with internal or remote sensor capabilities
. Five buttons control a simple menu for setup of
over 20 configurable parameters. Other control features are
listed below.
FEATURES
ALL MODELS
• Fan switching (on/auto/smart)
• System switching (off/auto/cooling/
heating)
• Two line 8 digit backlit LCD Display
• Three status LEDs (fan, cooling,
heating)
• Five control keys
• Remote and outside air sensor inputs
•
Two configurable digital inputs
• Fahrenheit or Celsius operation
• Permanent program retention
• Temporary setpoints
• Proportional plus integral control
• Cycles per hour for heating and
cooling
SPECIFICATIONS
VT7600
ALL MODELS •
Screen lockout (partial/total)
• Power fail start up delay
• H/C changeover (manual or auto)
• Adjustable deadband
• Individual setpoint range stops
H/C
• Extended fan run time
• Extended occupancy time
• Frost low limit protection
• Outside air lockout H/C
• No logo on thermostat
• Room sensor calibration
• Outside air calibration
PROGRAMMABLE MODELS •
Two or four events per day
• Progressive recovery or none
• 12 or 24 hour clock
• Six-hour clock retention
• occupied/unoccupied output contact
ECONOMICAL MODELS •
Mixed-air (0-10V) control output
• Mixed-air sensor input
• Mixed-air setpoint
• Economizer changeover temp
• Outside air damper minimum
position (percent)
HEAT PUMP MODELS •
Configurable heat pump O/B control
• OSA lockout for HP emergency/comp
heating

1396. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1328fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
SINGLE AND MULTISTAGE PROGRAMMABLE AND NON-PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT
VT7600 SERIES
VT7600A VT7600B VT7600H VT7652A VT7652B VT7656B VT7652H Terminal** Function**
TABLE 1. TERMINAL DESIGNATION BY THERMOSTAT MODEL
THERMOSTAT MODEL VT7600
**Terminals and functions are not present on every thermostat
Y1 Y2 G D1 D2O/B RS OS MSS comW1 W2EC
0-10V
24V 24V
AUX
Aux ACT.
Rev.
Vlv.
Type 2
Model 24
Type 2
Model 24
Type 2
Model 24
Heat 1
*
*
*
Cool 1 Cool 2
24 VAC Thermostat Power
(provided by installer)
VT
Electronics
VT7600 SERIES THERMOSTAT
T-1 T-2
Fan Heat 2
Note: All outputs are
24 VAC.
Internal relays and connections
Sensor Inputs
Thermistor
* If using the same power source for the thermostat and heating loads, delete transformer T-2 and install a jumper across RC and RH, then wire W1 and W2 common to T1 ( ).
Note: Terminals are thermostat-dependent. See Table 1.
RC C RH
Y1 Energizes on a call for first stage cooling (first stage heating HP)
Y2
Energizes on a call for second stage cooling (second stage heating HP)
G Energizes fan in accordance with the selected fan mode
RC
24 VAC from equipment transformer
C 24 VAC (common) from equipment transformer
H
24 VAC for heating stages (jumper to RC for single power systems)
W1
Energizes on a call for first stage heating (third stage heating HP)
W2
Energizes on a call for second stage heating
O/B
HP reversing valve configurable (O = on or B = on)
AUX
Configurable auxiliary output (follows schedule)
D1
Configurable digital input
D2
Configurable digital input
EC
0 - 10 VDC economizer actuator output
RS Remote room sensor
Scom
Sensor common
OS
Outdoor air sensor
MS
Mixed air sensor
WIRING

1397. fi˚ 1329THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL THERMOST AT TYPE
VT7600 R TU controller, no local schedule
VT7605 R TU + economizer controller, no local schedule
VT7606 R TU + IAQ + economizer controller, no local schedule
VT7607 R TU + humidity controller, no local schedule
VT7652 R TU controller, local schedule
VT7656 R TU + economizer controller, local schedule
VT7657 R TU + humidity controller, local schedule
OUTPUTS
A 1H/1C (VT7600 and VT7652 only)
B 2H/2C (not av ailable on VT7606)
E 2H/2C + IAQ + economizer controller (VT7606 and VT7656 only)
F 2C + analog heat controller (VT7600 and VT7652 only)
H 3H/3C heatpump controller (VT7600 and VT7652 only)
W 2H/2C + humidity + watersource heatpump controller (VT7600 and VT7652 cover)
COVER
5000 Viconics logo
5031 Blank cover (no logo)
5500 PIR cover w/ Viconics logo
5531 PIR cover blank (no logo)
VT7605 B 5031 Example: VT7605B5031
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
KTR24 Remote room thermistor sensor 1169
KTR24-LED-MB Remote room sensor with override button and LED 1169
ST-D24 10K Type 2 duct temperature themistor 1197
ST-FZ24-8 Averaging duct thermistor sensor, Type 2, Model 24 1234
ST-O24 OSA thermistor sensor, Type 2, model 24, ±0.36°F (0.20°C) 1217
ACCESSORIES PAGE
COV-HPUMP Cover, heat pump, no logo
COV-MULTI Cover, conventional, no logo
COV-SEN-O Cover, no logo, sensor with override
TG511A1000 Thermostat guard- clear-medium size 1392
SINGLE AND MULTISTAGE PROGRAMMABLE AND NON-PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT
VT7600 SERIES

1398. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1330fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
HONEYWELL RESIDENTIAL THERMOSTATS, PROGRAMMABLE AND NON-PROGRAMMABLE
T87, TH3000, AND TH4000 SERIES
Supply Voltage 24 VAC power-stealing (T87, T8775)
20 to 30 VAC or 750 mV 50/60 Hz,
(TH3110, TH4110)
Battery 2 AA alkaline, (TH3110, TH4110)
System Compatibility Conventional gas/oil and electric
(all models) Heat pump, (T8775, TH3110, TH4110)
Digital Display
Adjustable °F or °C, backlit
T8775 LCD, 0.75 sq in
TH3110 LCD, 1.32 sq in
TH4110 LCD, 1.73 sq in
Controls Fan, system, setpoint (programmable
on TH4110)
T87 Dial and slide switches
TH3110, TH4110 2 to 5 soft keys and slide switches
Accuracy ±1°F (±0.5°C), (T8775, TH3110,
TH4110) ±2°F (±1°C), (T87N)
Switch Type 1A relay, (T87N, TH3110, TH4110)
Electronic, (T8775) 0.02A to 1.5A
triac
Stages 1 heat and 1 cool, manually switched
System Switch Heat/Off/Cool
Fan Switch Auto/On
Set Point Range
Heat and Cool 40° to 90°F (4.5° to 32°C) , (T87N)
Heating Digital 40° to 90°F (4.5° to 32°C), (T8775,
TH3110, TH4110)
Cooling Digital 50° to 99°F (10° to 37°C), (T8775,
TH3110, TH4110)
Control Type Proportional plus integral (PI)
Clock 12-hour, ±1 minute/month, 10-year
battery (TH4110)
Compressor Cycle Adjustable cycles per hour
(T8775, TH3110, TH4110)
Minimum Compressor Off Time
Five minutes, fixed (T8775),
adjustable (TH3110, TH4110)
Wiring 18 to 22 AWG, no shield required
Night Setback Program Times
5+2-day, 4 periods/day (TH4110)
Night Setback Recovery
Adaptive intelligent recovery
Color White
Operating Temperature
TH3110, TH4110 32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C)
T8775, T87N 40° to 110°F (4° to 43°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 90% RH (all models)
Dimensions
TH4110 3.8"H x 5.8"W x 1.25"D
(9.6 x 14.7 x 3.2 cm)
T87 Round 3.69" diameter x 1.75" deep
(1.5 x 0.7 cm)
Weight 0.75 lb, (0.34 kg)
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The T87 Series is the latest design of the most recognized thermostat in the world
. The T87 is an analog- or digital-
display thermostat made for typical residential use on heating and cooling systems with either conventional heat or heat pump
. The TH3000 Series is a digital thermostat
for typical residential systems with either conventional heat or heat pump
. The TH4000 Series is a five-day-plus-
two programmable digital thermostat. It is also for typical
residential systems with either conventional heat or heat pump
.
FEATURES
• Five-y •
Traditional look for existing systems
• Mercury-free design
• Power-stealing design (T87, T8775)
• 24 VAC power (TH3110, TH4110)
• °F or °C selectable (digital types only)
• Standard terminal designations
SPECIFICATIONS
T87N1000
Non-programmable
TH3110D1008
Non-programmable
TH4110D1007
Programmable
T8775C1005
Non-programmable

1399. fi˚ 1331THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
HONEYWELL RESIDENTIAL THERMOSTATS, PROGRAMMABLE AND NON-PROGRAMMABLE
T87, TH3000, AND TH4000 SERIES
T87 SERIES THERMOSTAT TERMINATION TH SERIES THERMOSTAT TERMINATION
WY GB O
H
O
C
*
**
**
Rc R
WY GO Rc RB C
Thermostat
Electronics Thermostat
Electronics
Heat Heat Cool Fan
CLG
VLV
Conv.
Cool
Conv.
HP
Fan
HTG
VLV
HP HP
24 VAC 24 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC TRANSFORMER
(provided by others)
24 VAC TRANSFORMER
(provided by others)
**Power Stealing CKT
*Install jumper if a single transformer is used
(this is most of the time).
Conv. Conventional application
HP Heat pump application
Internal thermostat connections
Wiring if 2nd transformer needed (T2)
T1 T2
T1
*
T2
Conv.Conv.
HP
HP HP
CLG
VLV
HTG
VLV
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
T8775C1005 Round digital thermostat 1H/1C (conventional or heat pump), system (H/O/C), fan auto/on
T87N1000 Round analog thermostat 1H/1C (conventional or heat pump), system (H/O/C), fan auto/on
TH3110D1008 Digital thermostat 1H/1C (conventional or heat pump), system (H/O/C), fan auto/on
TH4110D1007 Programmable (5+2 day) thermostat 1H/1C (conventional or heat pump), system (H/O/C), fan auto/on
ACCESSORIES PAGE
50000066-001 Round decorative cover plate, 5.5" diameter (T87)
50002883-001 Cover goof plate, 6"H x 8.3"W (TH6000 Series, TH5000 Series) 1391
50010944-001 Range stops for T87 thermostats
TABLE 1. TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS BY THERMOSTAT MODEL
RESIDENTIAL ROUND RESIDENTIAL DIGITAL DISPLAY ** Terminals and functions are not present on every thermostat
T87N1000
1H/1C
T8775
1H/1C
TH3110
1H/1C
TH4110
1H/1C, Programmable
Terminal** Thermostat Function**
• •
C 24 VAC common (must come from cooling transformer), (TH3110, TH4110)
O O O O
B Change-over heating valve, (energized when in heating)
• • • •
R 24 VAC power for heating (typically jumpered with Rc for common powered systems)
• • • •
Rc 24 VAC power for cooling and single transformer systems
O O O O
O Changeover cooling valve, (energized when in cooling)
• • • •
G Fan relay
• • • •
Y Cooling 1st stage conventional and 1st stage heating for heat pump (B terminal energized)
• • • •
W Heating 1st stage (conventional heat)
O = Heat pump application only
•
= Conventional heating application

1400. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1332fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
MULTIPRO™ MULTISPEED AND MULTIPURPOSE THERMOSTAT
TB7100A100 MULTIPRO™ SERIES
Supply Voltage 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Battery Optional, 2-AA
Contact Ratings 0.02- 1.0A, 0.60A maximum current
for fan terminals
Memory 10 year
Remote Sensor Indoor/Setback/Changeover
Accuracy ±1°F (0.5°C), system dependent
Output SPST relays
Control Proportional plus Integral (PI)
Deadband Adjustable, 2°/9°F, (1.5°/5°C)
Setpoint/Setback Adjustable with programmable limits
Heating 40 to 90°F (10 to 32°C)
Cooling 50 to 99°F (10 to 37°C)
Display Accuracy ±1°F (±0.5°C)
Changeover Manual or Auto changeover
selectable
System Settings Heat-Off-Cool-Auto
Fan Setting Auto-On
Fan Speeds Low, Medium, High
Dimensions 3.75"H x 6.0"W x 1.375"D
(9.5 x 15.2 x 3.5 cm)
Weight 1.0 lb (0.45kg)
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
The TB7100A1000 MultiPRO™ Multispeed and
Multipurpose Thermostat is an effortless, seven-day
programmable or nonprogrammable thermostat that provides
universal system compatibility, precise comfort control and is
easy-to-program
.
FEATURES
• Large, clear backlit display with backlight
• Menu-driven programming
• Speedy same-schedule programming, no need to copy
multiple days
• Programmable or non-programmable modes
• Remote setback input for occupancy sensors or
timeclocks
• Real-time clock keeps time during power failures and
automatically updates to daylight savings
SPECIFICATIONS
APPLICATION
• 1H/1C conventional
• Up to 2H/1C heat pump
• 4-pipe fan coil (three fan speeds)
• 2-pipe fan coil (three fan speeds)
• 2-pipe fan coil with Auxiliary Heat (3 fan speeds)
• PTAC (Hi, Lo fan speed)
TB7100A100
WIRING - HEAT PUMP WITH AUXILIARY HEAT
Typical wiring of single transformer
1H/1C system.
Typical hookup of dual transformer
1H/1C system.
COMPRESSOR CONTA CTOR INDOOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK
FAN RELAY
POWER SUPPLY . PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION
IS OPTIONAL.
1
2
3
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
W1
G2
G3
S1
S2
2
3
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
HEAT RELAY
COMPRESSOR CONTACTO R
HEAT RELAY
FAN RELAY
COOLING
TRANSFORMER
HEATING
TRANSFORMER
POWER SUPPLY . PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
REMOVE FA CTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION
IS OPTIONAL. WHEN USED, THE COMMON MUST CONNECT
TO THE COOLING TRANSFORMER SECONDARY .
1
3
2
3
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
L1 (HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
2
INDOOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK
W1
G2
G3
S1
S2
Typical hookup of single-stage heatpump
with auxiliary heat (2H/1C).
Typical wiring of 4 pipe fan coil. Typical wiring of 2 pipe fan coil with reheat.
COMPRESSOR CONTACTO R
CHANGEOVER VA LVE
1
2
3
4
5
FAN RELAY
POWER SUPPLY . PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION
IS OPTIONAL.
"O/B" TERMINAL SET TO CONTROL AS EITHER "O" OR "B"
IN THE INSTALLER SETUP.
OPTIONAL INDOOR REMOTE SENSOR OR REMOTE SETBACK.
WIRES MUST HAVE A CABLE SEPA RATE FROM THE THERMOSTAT
CABLE.
3
L
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
AUXILIARY HEAT RELAY
4
2
INDOOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK
5
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
W1
G2
G3
S1
S2
COOLING RELAY INDOOR TEMPERAT URE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK
HEAT RELAY
LOW FA N RELAY
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS
OPTIONAL.
1
2
3
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
W1
G2 G3
S1 S2
2
3
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
HIGH FA N RELAY
MEDIUM FA N RELAY
INDOOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK/CHANGEOVER
PIPE SENSOR
TWO PIPE HEAT/COOL RELAY
LOW FA N RELAY
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS
OPTIONAL.
1
2
3
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
W1
G2
G3
S1
S2
2
3
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
HIGH FA N RELAY
AUXILIARY HEAT RELAY
MEDIUM FA N RELAY
Wiring two TR21 (20K ohm) Sensors and one
TR21-A (10K ohm) Sensor to provide a temperature
averaging network
T4 T3
TR21-A
1
1
THE TR21-A IS A 10K OHM SENSOR.
S1 S2
T T
SUBBASE
TR21
TT
TR21
TR21/TR21-A WIRING
Typical wiring of single transformer
1H/1C system.
Typical hookup of dual transformer
1H/1C system.
COMPRESSOR CONTA CTOR INDOOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK
FAN RELAY
POWER SUPPLY . PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION
IS OPTIONAL.
1
2
3
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
W1
G2
G3
S1
S2
2
3
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
HEAT RELAY
COMPRESSOR CONTACTO R
HEAT RELAY
FAN RELAY
COOLING
TRANSFORMER
HEATING
TRANSFORMER
POWER SUPPLY . PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
REMOVE FA CTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION
IS OPTIONAL. WHEN USED, THE COMMON MUST CONNECT
TO THE COOLING TRANSFORMER SECONDARY .
1
3
2
3
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
L1 (HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
2
INDOOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK
W1
G2 G3
S1 S2
Typical hookup of single-stage heatpump
with auxiliary heat (2H/1C).
Typical wiring of 4 pipe fan coil. Typical wiring of 2 pipe fan coil with reheat.
COMPRESSOR CONTACTO R
CHANGEOVER VA LVE
1
2
3
4
5
FAN RELAY
POWER SUPPLY . PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION
IS OPTIONAL.
"O/B" TERMINAL SET TO CONTROL AS EITHER "O" OR "B"
IN THE INSTALLER SETUP.
OPTIONAL INDOOR REMOTE SENSOR OR REMOTE SETBACK.
WIRES MUST HAVE A CABLE SEPA RATE FROM THE THERMOSTAT
CABLE.
3
L
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
AUXILIARY HEAT RELAY
4
2
INDOOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK
5
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
W1
G2
G3
S1
S2
COOLING RELAY INDOOR TEMPERAT URE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK
HEAT RELAY
LOW FA N RELAY
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS
OPTIONAL.
1
2
3
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
W1
G2 G3
S1 S2
2
3
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
HIGH FA N RELAY
MEDIUM FA N RELAY
INDOOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK/CHANGEOVER
PIPE SENSOR
TWO PIPE HEAT/COOL RELAY
LOW FA N RELAY
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS
OPTIONAL.
1
2
3
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
W1
G2
G3
S1
S2
2
3
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
HIGH FA N RELAY
AUXILIARY HEAT RELAY
MEDIUM FA N RELAY
Wiring two TR21 (20K ohm) Sensors and one
TR21-A (10K ohm) Sensor to provide a temperature
averaging network
T4 T3
TR21-A
1
1
THE TR21-A IS A 10K OHM SENSOR.
S1 S2
T T
SUBBASE
TR21
TT
TR21

1401. fi˚ 1333THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
MULTIPRO™ MULTISPEED AND MULTIPURPOSE THERMOSTAT
TB7100A100 MULTIPRO™ SERIES
WIRING - CONVENTIONAL
Typical wiring of single transformer
1H/1C system.
Typical hookup of dual transformer
1H/1C system.
COMPRESSOR CONTA CTOR INDOOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK
FAN RELAY
POWER SUPPLY . PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION
IS OPTIONAL.
1
2
3
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
W1
G2
G3
S1
S2
2
3
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
HEAT RELAY
COMPRESSOR CONTACTO R
HEAT RELAY
FAN RELAY
COOLING
TRANSFORMER
HEATING
TRANSFORMER
POWER SUPPLY . PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
REMOVE FA CTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION
IS OPTIONAL. WHEN USED, THE COMMON MUST CONNECT
TO THE COOLING TRANSFORMER SECONDARY .
1
3
2
3
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
L1 (HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
2
INDOOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK
W1
G2
G3
S1
S2
Typical hookup of single-stage heatpump
with auxiliary heat (2H/1C).
Typical wiring of 4 pipe fan coil. Typical wiring of 2 pipe fan coil with reheat.
COMPRESSOR CONTACTO R
CHANGEOVER VA LVE
1
2
3
4
5
FAN RELAY
POWER SUPPLY . PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION
IS OPTIONAL.
"O/B" TERMINAL SET TO CONTROL AS EITHER "O" OR "B"
IN THE INSTALLER SETUP.
OPTIONAL INDOOR REMOTE SENSOR OR REMOTE SETBACK.
WIRES MUST HAVE A CABLE SEPA RATE FROM THE THERMOSTAT
CABLE.
3
L
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
AUXILIARY HEAT RELAY
4
2
INDOOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK
5
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
W1
G2
G3
S1
S2
COOLING RELAY INDOOR TEMPERAT URE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK
HEAT RELAY
LOW FA N RELAY
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS
OPTIONAL.
1
2
3
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
W1
G2 G3
S1 S2
2
3
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
HIGH FA N RELAY
MEDIUM FA N RELAY
INDOOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK/CHANGEOVER
PIPE SENSOR
TWO PIPE HEAT/COOL RELAY
LOW FA N RELAY
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS
OPTIONAL.
1
2
3
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
W1
G2
G3
S1
S2
2
3
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
HIGH FA N RELAY
AUXILIARY HEAT RELAY
MEDIUM FA N RELAY
Wiring two TR21 (20K ohm) Sensors and one
TR21-A (10K ohm) Sensor to provide a temperature
averaging network
T4 T3
TR21-A
1
1
THE TR21-A IS A 10K OHM SENSOR.
S1 S2
T T
SUBBASE
TR21
TT
TR21
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TB7100A1000 Multispeed and multipurpose thermostat
Typical wiring of single transformer
1H/1C system.
Typical hookup of dual transformer
1H/1C system.
COMPRESSOR CONTA CTOR INDOOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK
FAN RELAY
POWER SUPPLY . PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION
IS OPTIONAL.
1
2
3
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
W1
G2
G3
S1
S2
2
3
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
HEAT RELAY
COMPRESSOR CONTACTO R
HEAT RELAY
FAN RELAY
COOLING
TRANSFORMER
HEATING
TRANSFORMER
POWER SUPPLY . PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
REMOVE FA CTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION
IS OPTIONAL. WHEN USED, THE COMMON MUST CONNECT
TO THE COOLING TRANSFORMER SECONDARY .
1
3
2
3
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
L1 (HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
2
INDOOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK
W1
G2 G3
S1 S2
Typical hookup of single-stage heatpump
with auxiliary heat (2H/1C).
Typical wiring of 4 pipe fan coil. Typical wiring of 2 pipe fan coil with reheat.
COMPRESSOR CONTACTO R
CHANGEOVER VA LVE
1
2
3
4
5
FAN RELAY
POWER SUPPLY . PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION
IS OPTIONAL.
"O/B" TERMINAL SET TO CONTROL AS EITHER "O" OR "B"
IN THE INSTALLER SETUP.
OPTIONAL INDOOR REMOTE SENSOR OR REMOTE SETBACK.
WIRES MUST HAVE A CABLE SEPA RATE FROM THE THERMOSTAT
CABLE.
3
L
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
AUXILIARY HEAT RELAY
4
2
INDOOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK
5
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
W1
G2
G3
S1
S2
COOLING RELAY INDOOR TEMPERAT URE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK
HEAT RELAY
LOW FA N RELAY
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS
OPTIONAL.
1
2
3
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
W1
G2
G3
S1
S2
2
3
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
HIGH FA N RELAY
MEDIUM FA N RELAY
INDOOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR/REMOTE
SETBACK/CHANGEOVER
PIPE SENSOR
TWO PIPE HEAT/COOL RELAY
LOW FA N RELAY
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS
OPTIONAL.
1
2
3
C
G
Y
O/B
RC
R
W1
G2
G3
S1
S2
2
3
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
24 VAC
HIGH FA N RELAY
AUXILIARY HEAT RELAY
MEDIUM FA N RELAY
Wiring two TR21 (20K ohm) Sensors and one
TR21-A (10K ohm) Sensor to provide a temperature
averaging network
T4 T3
TR21-A
1
1
THE TR21-A IS A 10K OHM SENSOR.
S1 S2
T T
SUBBASE
TR21
TT
TR21
ACCESSORIES
C7189U1005 Remote indoor thermistor sensor: 10K ohm NTC (TB7220)
TR21 Wall mount remote indoor sensor: 20K ohm NTC (Type 42)
TR21-A Wall mount remote indoor sensor: 10K ohm NTC (use for averaging only)
WIRING - FAN COIL

1402. NEW!
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1334NEW!
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21
NEW!WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
FOCUSPRO™ RESIDENTIAL AND LIGHT COMMERCIAL THERMOSTATS
TH5000, TH6000, TB7000 SERIES
Supply Voltage 20 to 30 VAC or 750 mV, 50/60 Hz
Battery Optional, 2-AA
System Compatibility Conventional and heat pump
Display 2.98 to 5.09 sq in, model dependent
(°F or °C)
Display Offset -3° to +3°F (-3° to +3°C), TB7220
only
Controls 4 to 6 soft keys, model dependent
Keypad Lockout Configurable, TB7220 only
Sensor Type Thermistor
Accuracy ±1°F (±0.5°C)
Switch Type Y1,Y2,W,E: 1A relay
W2,G,O/B,L,A: 0.5A relay
Stages & Control See terminal designation table
Memory 10 years, then AA batteries required
System Switch Selectable, Heat/Off/Cool/Auto, plus
emergency heat on TH5220 and
TH6220
Fan Switch Auto/On
Setpoint Rrange
Heating 40° to 90°F (4.5° to 32°C)
Cooling 50° to 99°F (10° to 37°C)
Setpoint Limits Full setpoint span (TH5220, TH6220,
TB7220 only)
Control Type Proportional plus integral (PI)
TB7220 tuned for larger spaces/ equipment
Deadband
3°F (1.7°C) fixed (all except TB7220)
Adjustable 2° to 9°F (1.1° to 5°C),
TB7220 only
Remote Sensor 10K thermistor, TB7220 only
Clock ±1 minute/month, 10-year battery
TH6000, TB7220 only
DST Auto Adjust Yes, TB7220 only
Compressor Cycle Adjustable cycles per hour and
minimum off time
Purge Duration Adjustable, TB7220 only
Heat Pump Lockout Adjustable, TB7220 only
Remote Sensors Two, indoor and outdoor, TB7220
only
Wiring 18 to 22 AWG, no shield required
Night Setback Program Times
TB7220 7-day, 2 or 4 periods/day
TH6220 5+2- or 5+1+1-day, 4 periods/day
Color White
Operating Temperature 32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C)
TB7220 0° to 120°F (-18° to 49°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 90% RH non-condensing
Dimensions
TH5110 3.42"H x 4.5"W x 1.3"D
(8.7 x 11.4 x 3.3 cm)
TH6000, TH5220 3.56"H x 5.81"W x 1.5"D
(9.0 x 14.7 x 3.8 cm)
TB7220 3.75"H x 6.0"W x 1.4"D
(9.5 x 15.2 x 3.6 cm)
Weight 0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Warranty 5 years, all except TB7220 (2 years)
DESCRIPTION
The TH5000 Series is a single or multi-stage digital
thermostat made for typical residential heating and cooling
systems with either conventional heat or heat pump
. The
TH6000 Series is a five-day-plus-two programmable thermostat
. It is available in single- or multi-stage models for
typical residential H/C systems with either conventional heat or heat pump
. The TB7220 is a seven-day programmable
thermostat made for light commercial applications. The
TB7220 is multi-stage, for conventional heat or heat pump with additional algorithms to accommodate larger spaces and larger equipment in commercial applications
. Algorithms
include configurable recovery ramp and pre-occupancy purge cycle
. It also has remote sensor capability.
FEATURES
• Five-year warranty
• Large digital backlit display
• Auto or manual heat-cool operation
• Relay switch type
• °F or °C selectable
• Standard terminal designations
SPECIFICATIONS
TH5220D1029
Non-Programmable TH6220D1028
Programmable
TB7220U1012
Commercial Programmable
TH5110D1022
Non-Programmable

1403. fi˚ 1335THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
FOCUSPRO™ RESIDENTIAL AND LIGHT COMMERCIAL THERMOSTATS
TH5000, TH6000, TB7000 SERIES
TH and TB SERIES THERMOSTAT TERMINATION
Factory Jumper (remov e if heating transformer is used).
Wiring if Separate Heating Transformer is Needed.
Internal Thermostat Connections
Conventional Heating
Heat Pump Heating
Economizer Enable or Time of Day Output
ECON.
TOD
EM. H.
Enable
EM
Heat
S2
T
Remote Sensors HP Conv .
HP
ECON/TOD
Conv.
Conv.C onv.HP
Internal Relays
and Connections
T
S1 AL E
Y
2
A
U
X
W
2
W
1
O
B
GC Y1 R
T1
24 VAC24 VAC
T2
Rc
Thermostat
Electronics
Cool
2
Heat
2
Fan
Rev.
VLV
Heat
1
Cool
1
*
*
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TH5110D1022 Digital thermostat 1H/1C (HP), system (H/O/C/A), fan auto/on
TH5220D1029 Digital thermostat 2H/2C (HP), system (H/O/C/A/Em), fan auto/on
TH6110D1021 Programmable (5-2 day) thermostat 1H/1C (HP), system (H/O/C/A), fan auto/on
TH6220D1028 Programmable (5-2 day) thermostat 2H/2C (2H/1C HP), system (H/O/C/A/Em), fan auto/on
TB7220U1012 Programmable (7-day) thermostat 3H/2C (HP), system (H/O/C/A), fan auto/on
TABLE 1. TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS BY THERMOSTAT MODEL
RESIDENTIAL
THERMOSTATS
RESIDENTIAL PROGRAMMABLE
THERMOSTATS COMMERCIAL ** Terminals and functions are not present on every thermostat
TH5110
1H/1C
TH5220
2H/2C
TH6110
1H/1C,
programmable
TH6220
2H/2C,
programmable
TB7220
3H/2C,
programmable Terminal** Thermostat Function**

Rc 24 VAC power for cooling, for a split heating-cooling system

R 24 VAC power for heating (typically jumpered with Rc for common-powered systems)

Y1 Cooling 1st stage

C 24 VAC common (must come from cooling transformer)

W1 Heating 1st stage
OO OOO O/B Changeover valve (replaces W1 for heat pump)

G Fan relay

W2 Heating 2nd stage (TH5220, TH6220, TB7220)
OO Aux 2nd stage heat for heat pump application (TH5220, TH6220, replaces W2 for HP)

Y2 Cooling 2nd stage (TH5220, TH6220, TB7220)
OO E Emergency heat relay (TH5220, TH6220, replaces Y2 for HP)

L Emergency heat enabled annunciate (TH5220, TH6220)

A Economizer or time-of-day output powered by the R terminal (TB7220)

S1 Remote sensor 1 set for room or OSA (TB7220)

S2 Remote sensor 2 set for room or OSA (TB7220)
O = Heat pump application only

= Conventional heating application
RELATED PRODUCTS
32003796-001 Cover goof plate, 6"H x 8.3"W (TH7220)
50002883-001 Cover goof plate, 6"H x 8.3"W (TH6000 Series, TH5000 Series)
C7089U1006 Outdoor sensor with mounting clip (TB7220)
C7189U1005 Remote indoor thermistor sensor: 10K ohm NTC (TB7220)

1404. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1336fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
VISIONPRO™ PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT
TH8000 SERIES, MODEL TB8220
Supply Voltage 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Battery Optional, 3-AAA
Supply Current H/C - 1.0A, fan - 0.6A
Memory 10 years, then 3-AAA batteries
required
Sensor Type Built-in 10K thermistor
Remote Sensor Room or OSA (accessory required)
Accuracy ±1°F (0.5°C), system dependent
Outputs SPST relays
Control Proportional plus Integral (PI)
Dead-band Adjustable, 2°/9°F, (1.5°/5°C)
Setpoint/Setback Adjustable with programmable limits
Heating 40 to 90°F (10 to 32°C)
Cooling 50 to 99°F (10 to 37°C)
RH 40 to 80%, (TH8321)
Keypad Lockout Unlocked, locked completely, or
locked except setpoint
Display 3.5" x 2.5" backlit touch screen,
temperature, humidity (TH8321),
system, fan, time, day, setpoint,
service reminders (TH), OSA temp if
wired
Display Offset
±3°F (1.5°C), in 1°F (0.5°C)
increments
Touch Screen Controls
Setpoints Up/Down
System Heat/Off/Cool/Auto
Fan control On/Auto/Circ (TH), On/Auto (TB)
Schedule 7 day, 2 or 4 periods
Hold (TH) Permanent or time out
Holiday (TB) Time out by days
Clock 12-hour or 24-hour, ±1 min./month
Screen °F/°C, backlight
Override Occupied time out
Menu Service set up, over 40 parameters
Enclosure White plastic, indoors only
Color Premier white
Wiring Terminals for 18 AWG wire
Operating Temperature 0° to 120°F (-18° to 49°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Mounting Horizontal with base included
Dimensions 4.56"H x 6.0"W x 1.37"D,
(11.6 x 15.24 x 3.5 cm)
Weight 1.1 lb (0.5 kg)
Approvals UL, cUL, California Title 24 (TB),
and ADA compliant
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The Vision Pro™ T_8000 is a 7-day programmable
thermostat designed for universal system compatibility and
is easy to program for precise comfort control. Programming
is done using the large clear backlit display by just touching the screen and following the menu
. The thermostat is
configurable for system type (Conventional/Heat pump), system stages (1H/1C through 3H/2C), Fan control (electric/ gas), with some models offering humidity control features
.
The
T_8000 is powered by 24VAC and/or 3 AAA batteries for
time and program retention
.
FEATURES
• Five-year warranty
• Scheduling or non-scheduling
• Large backlit touch screen display
• Menu touch screen interaction
• Fan switching (touch screen)
• System switching (touch screen)
• Setpoint and configuration (touch
screen)
• 1H/1C or 2H/2C or 3H/2C HP
• Heat pump O = on or B = on
• Emergency heat (electric/gas)
• De-humidification control models
• Fahrenheit or Celsius operation
• 24 VAC and/or 3-AAA batteries
• 10-year built-in memory retention
• Base included
• Remote sensor option (room or
OSA)
• Seven-day schedule or manual
• 12- or 24-hour clock
• 2 or 4 occupied/unoccupied periods
per da
y
•
Adaptive intelligent recovery
• Proportional + Integral control
• Integral adjustment (Fast, Norm,
Slow)
• Minimum compressor off timer
• Cycles/hour for cooling and heating
• OSA heat pump compressor lockout
• Screen lockout (partial/total)
• Auto daylight savings time
• Service reminders (TH) (filter, UV
lamp, humidity pad)
• 30-day low battery indication
• Clean screen timer
• Change over (manual or auto)
• SP hold permanent or time out (TH)
• Holiday and override (TB)
• Individual setpoint range stops H/C
• Extended fan run time
• Temperature display offset ±3℉
• Installer “test function”
• Adjustable H/C deadband
•
Economizer/scheduled contact (TB)
SPECIFICATIONS
APPLICATION
Designed specifically for low-voltage control requiring time
scheduled occupied-unoccupied control. Ideal for roof top
units (small business or retail), homes, condos, cottages, and any packaged AHU operation
. TH8110U1003

1405. fi˚ 1337THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
VISIONPRO™ PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT
TH8000 SERIES, MODEL TB8220
Y2
L
E
AUX
S1
S2
RC
Jumper
Supplied
(remove as
needed)
R
O/B
Y
G
C
RC
R
W
Y
G
C
Y2
W2
S1
Screw Terminals
for 1
8 AWG
Heat Pump
Conventional
S2
(A) (A)
TB8220 only
(W1)
WIRING THERMOSTAT KEYS AND DISPLAY
The occupied status is time programmed to change the
occupied and unoccupied setpoints. The thermostat
control uses the setpoint as displayed using a PI control of single or multiple stages of heating and cooling equipment
. The fan is controlled by demand in the AUTO
mode for H/C, with delay fan off as programmed by the installer
. In the ON mode the fan is continuous on and in
the CIRC mode (TH only) the fan runs by demand plus an additional random circulation amount up to 35% of the scheduled occupied time
. System control is selectable
for Heat/Off/Cool/Auto. Automatic engages the H/C
automatically with an adjustable deadband between the H/C setpoints with control status displayed on the LCD as Heating On or Cooling On, and a wait indicator during anti-cycle control
.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TB8220U1003 24V commercial, seven-day
programmable 2H/2C or 3H/2C HP
w/system and fan switch
TH8110U1003
24V residential, 1H/1C or HP seven- day programmable thermostat w/ system and fan switch
TH8320U1008
24V residential, 2H/2C or 3H/2C HP seven-day programmable thermostat with system and fan switch
TH8321U1006
24V residential, 2H/2C or 3H/2C HP seven-day programmable thermostat with system and fan switch and humidity
GENERAL CONTROL SEQUENCE
SCHED
FAN
AUTO
SYSTEM
HEAT HOLD
or
HOLIDA Y DONE CLOCK SCREEN MORE OVERRIDE
(TB)
AM
TUE
Cool ON
Following
Schedule
Outside
Air
Set To Inside
Screen Locked
SYSTEM
Selects HEAT/OFF/COOL/AUTO
FAN
Selects ON/AUTO/CIRC (TH)
Selects ON/AUTO(TB)
HOLD (TH)
Sets a Pe rmanent Hold
and Activities Vacation Hold
HOLIDA Y (TB)
Sets Holiday
Un-Occ Time-Out
TIME
Display current time of day,
override hold time remaining, or
number of vacation or holiday days
remaining
FOLLOWING SCHEDULE
Shows the thermostat is following
the programmed schedule
RECOVERY
During occupied wa rm-up or cool-down
SCHED
Enters
Scheduling
Mode
CLOCK
Sets the
time forward
or back
SCREEN
Locks out the screen
to allow for cleaning
MORE
Shows additional
accessory and
maintenance options
PROGRAM
ENTER
DOWN ARROW
Lowers temperature setting
UP ARRO W
Raises temperature setting
Current setpoint temperature
Heating, cooling, or anti-cycle wait status
Current inside temperature
Day of week Touch screen function/status
L LED lamp
INSTALLATION / MOUNTING
The base plate is mounted directly to the wall or 2" x 4"
horizontal or vertical back box. Use 18 AWG wire and
terminals shown above. Position thermostat over the base
plate and push onto pins. No leveling required.
TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS
Designator Typical connection
AUX Auxiliary heat relay (heat pump TH)
C Common connection
E, (A) Emergency heat, (time-of-day or economizer)
G Fan relay
L 24 VAC LED light output (externally switched)
O/B Changeover valve (heat pump)
S1, S2 Indoor or outside air sensor termination
R 24 VAC system or heat transformer
RC 24 VAC cooling transformer
W First stage heating
W1 Second stage heating (heat pump TB)
W2 Second stage heating
Y First stage cooling
Y2 Second stage cooling
Note:

Not all terminals shown are used on all models. Be
sure to use the con
ventional OR heat pump terminals,
NOT both
.
RELATED PRODUCTS
PRODUCTS
209651A Wall adaptor plate 7.37” x 5.75”
C7089U1006 Outdoor sensor with mounting clip
(TB7220)
C7189U1005 Remote indoor thermistor sensor:
10K Ω NTC (TB7220)

1406. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1338fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
1F86-EZ-0251
1F86-344
RESIDENTIAL AND LIGHT COMMERCIAL THERMOSTATS
1F80 SERIES
Supply Voltage 0 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz or DC 0.05 to
1.5 Amps (load per terminal)
1.5 Amps maximum load (all
terminals combined)
Setpoint Temperature Range
45° to 90°F (7° to 32°C)
Rated Differential 0.4° to 1.7°F
Standard Systems Gas, oil, electric, heat pump, millivolt
systems, 2- or 3-wire hydronic zone
valve
Thermal Specifications (dependent
on model selected)
Operating Ambient Temperature
32° to 105°F (0° to 40°C)
Operating Humidity Range
90% non-condensing maximum
Dimensions 1F87-361, 1F80-361, 1F86-344, 1F85-277

6.1"W x 3.8"H x 1.1"D
(15.5 x 9.7 x 2.8 cm)
1F80-0471,1F80ST-0471, 1F86-0471, 1F86ST-0471,
1F86EZ-0251
4.4"W x 3.4"H x 1.2"D
(11.2 x 8.6 x 3.04 cm)
1F82-0261,1F80-0261,1F80-0224, 1F89-0211, 1F86-0244,
1F82-261, 1F89-211, 1F89EZ-0251
4.8"W x 3.8"H x 1.5"D
(12.2 x 9.7 x 3.8 cm)
1F85-0422, 1F83-0471, 1F83-0422, 1F85-0477,
1F85ST-0422
5.1"W x 3.9"H x 1.2"D
(12.9 x 9.9 x 3.05 cm)
Weight 0.75 lb (0.34 kg) approximate
average
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The 1F80 Series thermostats come with a wide variety of options
. These versatile thermostats can be used for
residential and light commercial applications with both programmable and non-programmable options
. There are
also choices of displays including the White Rodgers Blue
™

digital display as well as the classic green display. With
universal, multi-stage, single stage, and heat pump options the right choice is easy to find in this family of thermostats
.
FEATURES
• 2" or 4" Blue™ or classic digital display (classic only
available in 2")
• Choice of battery powered, dual power or hardwired
models
• Fossil fuel or electric heat compatible
• Permanent Program retention during power loss
• Configuration menu allows keypad selection of options
• Selectable Celsius or Fahrenheit temperature display
• Air filter change indicator option
• Keypad lockout and setpoint temperature limit options
SPECIFICATIONS
1F80-0471

1407. fi˚ 1339THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
RESIDENTIAL AND LIGHT COMMERCIAL THERMOSTATS
1F80 SERIES
Single
Stage 1
(SS1)
Multi-
Stage 2
(MS2) O
Energized Constantly
in Cool Mode
B
Energized Constantly
in Heat, Off,
Emergency
Mode
No
Output
Cool
Mode
2nd
Stage
Cool Mode
1st Stage
Blower/
Circulator
Fan Energized
on Call for
Cool (and
Heat if
configured
for Electric
Heat)
No Output
Heat Mode
2nd Stage
Heat
Mode
1st Stage
Optional*
24 Volt
(Com-
mon)
24 Volt
(Hot)
Cool
System
Y GW/E CL RC
CLASS II
TRANSFORMER
HOT
24VAC
NEUTRAL
120VAC
24 Volt
(Hot)
Heat
RHY2 W2
Jumper
Fault
Indicator
or
System
Malfunction
Switch
Comfort Alert II Module
or Similar System
Malfunction Module
O/B
* Common connection
required for fault or
malfunction indication.
1F85-471
Single Stage or Multi-Stage System (No Heat Pump) with Two Transformers
Single
Stage 1
(SS1)
Multi-
Stage 2
(MS2)
O
Energized Constantly
in
Cool Mode
B
Energized Constantly
in Heat, Off,
Emergency
Mode
No Output
Cool
Mode
2nd
StageCool Mode 1st Stage
Blower/ Circulator Fan Energized on Call for Cool (and Heat if configured for Electric Heat)
No Output
Heat Mode 2nd Stage
Heat Mode 1st Stage Optional*
24 Volt
(Com-
mon)
24 Volt (Hot) Cool
System
Y GW/E CL RC
CLASS II
TRANSFORMER
HOT
24VAC
NEUTRAL
120VAC
24 Volt (Hot) Heat
RHY2 W2
Jumper
Fault Indicator or System Malfunction Switch
Comfort Alert II Module
or Similar System
Malfunction Module
O/B
* Common connection
required for fault or
malfunction indication.
1F83-0422/1F85-0422
Single Stage or Multi-Stage System (No Heat Pump) with Single Transformer
TRANSFORMER
Single
Stage 1
(SS1)
Multi-
Stage 2
(MS2) O
Energized Constantly
in Cool Mode
B
Energized Constantly
in Heat, Off,
Emergency
Mode
No
Output
Cool
Mode
2nd
Stage
Cool Mode
1st Stage
Blower/
Circulator
Fan Energized
on Call for
Cool (and
Heat if
configured
for Electric
Heat)
No Output
Heat Mode
2nd Stage
Heat
Mode
1st Stage
Optional*
24 Volt
(Com-
mon)
24 Volt
(Hot)
Cool
System
Y GW/E CL RC
CLASS II
HOT
24VAC
NEUTRAL
120VAC
24 Volt
(Hot)
Heat
RHY2 W2
Jumper
Fault
Indicator
or
System
Malfunction
Switch
System Malfunction
Module
O/B
1F85-0477
Single Stage or Multi-Stage System (No Heat Pump) with Single Transformer
* Common connection
required for fault or
malfunction indication.
WIRING

1408. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1340fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
1F80-0224/1F86-0244, 1F80-0261/1F87-0261
Typical Wiring Diagram for Single Transformer Single Stage Systems
RC
24 VAC 120 VAC
Hot
Neutral
THERMOSTAT
SYSTEM
G W
TRANSFORMER
(Class II Current Limited)
Changeover
Relay*
YO/B
Compressor
Contactor
* Changeover Relay is energized in COOL when O/B switch is in the “O” position
Changeover Relay is energized in HEAT when O/B switch is in the “B” position
Heat Relay
Fan
Relay
Optional
Optional Jumper for
Single Stage Heat Pump
L RC
24 VAC 120 VAC
Hot
SYSTEM
MONITOR
SWITCH
Neutral
THERMOSTAT
SYSTEM
G W2
TRANSFORMER
(Class II Current Limited)
Changeover
Relay*
YO/B
Compressor
Contactor
* Changeov er Relay is energized in COOL when O/B switch is in the “O” position
Changeover Relay is energized in HEAT when O/B sw itch is in the “B” position
Aux/Emergency
Heat Relay
(Stage 2)
Fan
Relay
Optional
If safety circuits are in
only one of the systems,
remove the transformer
of the system with NO
safety circuits.
NOTE
1F82-0261/1F89-0211
Typical Wiring Diagram for Single Transformer Systems
L RE
24 VAC 120 VAC
Hot
SYSTEM
MONITOR
SWITCH
Neutral
SYSTEM
G W2
TRANSFORMER
(Class II)
Changeover
Relay*
CYO/B
Compressor
Contactor
* Changeover Relay is energized in COOL when O/B switch is in the “O” position
Changeover Relay is energized in HEAT when O/B switch is in the “B” position
Aux
Relay
(Stage 2)
Fan
Relay
Emergency
Relay
See Note **
** Jumper required to use a single Aux Heat for both Second Stage Heat and Emergency
If safety circuits are in
only one of the systems,
remove the transformer
of the system with NO
safety circuits.
NOTE
1F82-261, 1F89-211
Single Transformer Systems
WIRING (continued)
RESIDENTIAL AND LIGHT COMMERCIAL THERMOSTATS
1F80 SERIES

1409. fi˚ 1341THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
1F80-224, 1F80-361, 1F86-344
Heat/Cool, 4-wire, Single Transformer Systems
RHY
24 VAC 120 VAC
Hot
Neutral
THERMOSTAT
SYSTEM
G W
TRANSFORMER
Heating
System
Fan
Relay
Cooling
System
RC
JUMPER
WIRE
OC
‡
B
RED jumper wire (provided with thermostat) must be
connected between thermostat RH and RC terminals
for proper thermostat operation with this system.
NOTE
WIRING (continued)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
1F80-0224 Single stage dual power with 24 hour programmable option with 2 inch blue display
1F80-0261 Single stage dual power with 5-1-1 day programmable option with 2 inch blue display
1F80-0471 Single stage dual power with 5-1-1 day programmable option with 4 inch blue display
1F80-361 Single stage dual power non-programmable with classic display
1F80ST
-0471
Single stage dual power with 5-1-1 day programmable option with 4 inch blue display (spanish)
1F82-0261 Heat pump programmable dual power with 2 inch blue display
1F82-261 Heat pump programmable dual power with classic display
1F83-0422 Multi stage or single stage with heat pump (2 stage heat)option non-programmable with 4 inch blue display
1F83-0471 Multi stage or single stage with heat pump (3 stage heat)option non-programmable with 4 inch blue display
1F85-0422 Multi-stage or single-stage heat pump (2 stage heat) compatible programmable or non-programmable with 4 inch blue
display
1F85-0477 Multi-stage or single-stage heat pump (3 stage heat) compatible programmable or non-programmable with 4 inch blue display
1F85-277
Multi-stage or single-stage heat pump compatible programmable or non-programmable with classic display
1F85ST
-0422
Multi-stage or single-stage heat pump (2 stage heat) compatible programmable or non-programmable with 4 inch blue display (spanish)
1F86-0244
Single stage or heat pump non-programmable with 2 inch blue display
1F86-0471 Single stage or heat pump non-programmable with 4 inch blue display
1F86-344 Single stage non-programmable with classic display
1F86EZ-0251 Single stage or heat pump non-programmable with 2 inch blue display with home sleep and away options
1F86ST
-0471
Single stage or heat pump non-programmable with 4 inch blue display (spanish)
1F87-361 Single stage or heat pump with 7 day programmable option with classic display
1F89-0211 Heat pump non-programmable with 2 inch blue display
1F89-211 Heat pump non-programmable with classic display
1F89EZ-0251 Heat pump non-programmable with EZ read screen with home, sleep, and away options

Note: All models available in a 6-Pack.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A
TK63
Thermostat guard (6.9"H x 4.7"W x 1.75"D - inside dim.) 1392
F29-0198 Thermostat guard (8.125"H x 4.375"W x 3.375"D - inside dim.) 1392
RESIDENTIAL AND LIGHT COMMERCIAL THERMOSTATS
1F80 SERIES

1410. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1342fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
DIGITAL DISPLAY PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTATS
T4000, T8000, AND T12000 SERIES THERMOSTATS
Supply Voltage 24 VAC (20-30 VAC) 50/60Hz (±10%)
Output Voltage 20-30 VAC
Output Current 0.02 - 1.0 A per terminal; W1 (B/O),
W2 (AUX), G, A, E, Y1, Y2. NOTE:
Total current draw must not exceed
2.5A.
Temperature Range 50° to 90° F (10° to 32° C)
Operating Temperature 0° to 120°F (-17° to 48°C
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH, Non-condensing
Additional Specifications
AA Batteries can be used for power
(recommended for back-up)
Compatibility SD card: T8000 and T12000 Series
Differential 1°F (0.5°C)
Display Type Digital with blue backlight
Fan Cycling (Auto) or Continuous (On);
1 speed
Fan Switching Off-Heat-Cool-Auto-Emergency
(Emergency not available on T4000 models)
Lockout
Keypad with 3 digit code capability
Remote Sensor Yes
Switch Type Push button (selectable)
System Type Conventional or Heat Pump
Dimensions 4.3"H x 5.7"W x 1.3"D
(10.92 x 14.48 x 3.3 cm)
Weight 1.1 lb (.49 kg)
Approvals ASHRAE 90.1 AND CA Title 24
Building Code Compliant
Warranty 2 years
DESCRIPTION
Peco offers a wide range of programmable thermostats to meet your needs
. The T4500 Series thermostats offer single
or multistage heating and cooling. The T4900 Series offer up
to 3 stages of heating and 2 cooling. Both series come with
24vac power or battery power options. The T8000 Series
offer multistage heating and cooling with a large digital display
. The T12000 Series can be used in single stage or
multistage heating and cooling applications and it comes with a touchscreen display
.
FEATURES
• 7 da •
Keypad lockout feature
• Occupancy sensor input
• Holiday scheduling
• Remote sensor input
• Outdoor air sensor input for T8000 and T12000
• SD Card programming option on T8000 and T12000
• Blue backlit display
• 24 VAC or battery powered
• Terminal block wiring connections
SPECIFICATIONS
T4000 Series
T8000 Series
T12000 Series

1411. fi˚ 1343THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
DIGITAL DISPLAY PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTATS
T4000, T8000, AND T12000 SERIES THERMOSTATS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
T12511-001 Programmable 3 heat, 2 cool 24 VAC or battery powered large screen
T12532-001 Non-programmable 1 heat, 1 cool 24 VAC or battery powered
T12532-IAQ Programmable 3 heat, 2 cool 24 VAC or battery powered with scheduling
T4011-001 Non-programmable 1 heat, 1 cool 24 VAC or battery powered
T4522-001 Programmable 1 heat, 1 cool 24 VAC or battery powered
T4932SCH-001 Programmable 3 heat, 2 cool 24 VAC or battery powered large screen with humidity control
T4932SCH-002 Programmable 2 heat, 2 cool 24 VAC or battery powered
T8532-001 Programmable 3 heat, 2 cool 24 VAC or battery powered with humidity control and scheduling
T8532-IAQ Programmable 1 heat, 1 cool 24 VAC or battery powered
ACCESSORIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SP155-017 Indoor remote sensor
SB200-001 Occupancy sensor
TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS AND SYSTEM TYPES,
T4000 SERIES
Conventional Terminal LettersHeat Pump Terminal Letters
CUnswitched side, 24 VACC Unswitched side, 24 VAC
W1Stage 1 Heat B/OReversing Valve
W2Stage 2 Heat AUXAuxiliary (Stage 3 Heat)
GFan G Fan
A A
E E
Y1Stage 1 Cool Y1
Compressor Stage 1,
Heat /Cool 1
Y2Stage 2 Cool (or Dehumidify)Y2
Compressor Stage 2,
Heat /Cool 2 (or Dehumidify)
RH
Power for heating, switched
side, 24 VAC
RH
Power for heating, switched
side, 24 VAC
RC
Power for cooling, switched
side, 24 VAC
RC
Power for cooling, switched
side, 24 VAC
SCSensor Common SCSensor Common
S1Indoor Remote SensorS1Indoor Remote Sensor
TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS & SYSTEM TYPES, T8000 & T12000 SERIES
Conventional Terminal Letters Heat Pump Terminal Letters
C Unswitched side, 24 VACC Unswitched side, 24 VAC
W1Stage 1 Heat B/OReversing Valve
W2Stage 2 Heat AUXAuxiliary (Stage 3 Heat)
G Fan G Fan
A
Economizer/Damper/ Humidity
A Economizer/Damper/Humidity
E Stage 3 Heat E Emergency Heat
Y1Stage 1 Cool Y1
Compressor Stage 1, Heat / Cool 1
Y2
Stage 2 Cool (or Dehumidify)
Y2
Compressor Stage 2, Heat / Cool 2 (or Dehumidify)
RH
Power for heating, switched side, 24 VAC
RH
Power for heating, switched side, 24 VAC
RC
Power for cooling, switched side, 24 VAC
RC
Power for cooling, switched side, 24 VAC
SCSensor Common SC Sensor Common
S1Indoor Remote SensorS1 Indoor Remote Sensor
S2Occupancy Setback Input*S2 Occupancy Setback Input*
S3Outdoor Remote SensorS3 Outdoor Remote Sensor"

1412. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1344fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
RESIDENTIAL LCD DISPLAY PROGRAMMABLE/
NON-PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTATS
1F72, 1E78 AND 1F78 SERIES THERMOSTATS
Supply Voltage
24VAC
Display Yes
Display Type LCD
Accuracy ±1°
Additional Specification
s
1F78-151,1F72-151,1E78-151

Program option 5/2 Day
1F78-144,1E78-140,1F79-111
Non-programmable
Control Type Low Voltage Thermostat
Deadband 1°
Differential 1°
Rated Differentials - Single Stage Models:
Fast Slow
Heat (Single Stage) 0.8°F 1.5°F
Cool (Single Stage) Fixed 1.2°F
Heat Pump 1.2°F 1.5°F
Aux./Emer. Heat 0.8°F 1.2°F
Dimensions
1F78-151,1F78-144,1F72-151,1F79-111
6.25"L x 4.25"H x 1.75"D
(15.8 x 10.8 x 4.45 cm)
1E78-151,1E78-140 4.29"L x 6.2"Hx 6.2"D
(10.9 x 15.75 x 15.75 cm)
Enclosure Nema 1
Input Current
1F78-151,1F78-144,1F72-151,1F79-111, 1E78-151
0.05 to 1.0 Amp (load per terminal)
E78-140 0.05 to 1.5 Amps (load per terminal)
Fan Switching Yes
Reset Yes
RoHS Statement No
Sensing Element Yes
Sensor Type Thermistor
Temperature Range 32° to 105°F (0° to 41°C)
Operating Temperature 32° to 105°F (0° to 41°C)
Shipping Temperature -4° to 150°F (-20° to 65°C)
Setpoint Range 45° to 90°F (7° to 32°C)
Schedule Type 1F78-15,1F72-151, 1E78-151

4 (Morning, Day, Evening, Night),
Materials Of Construction
ABS Plastic
Mounting Any except upside down
Weight 0.58 lb (0.26 kg)
Warranty 5 years
System Type
1F78-151,1F78-144,1E78-140,1E78-151
Single Stage
1F79-111,1F72-151 Heat Pump
Wiring Terminations
1F78-151,1F78-144,1E78-151
RC, RH, W, Y, G, O, B
1F72-151,1F79-111 R, C, Y, W2, G, O/B, L, E,
1E78-140 R, C, Y, W/2, G, O/B, L
DESCRIPTION
The 1F72 Series thermostats are configured for heat pump systems and have a 5-2 day programming option
. The
1F78 Series thermostat is available in programmable or non-programmable
. The programmable option is a 5-2 day
configuration with up to 4 period settings per day. The 1E78
model numbers are vertical versions with the same features as the 1F78 models
. This series offers the perfect upgrade
from mechanical thermostats at an affordable cost. The large
dimensional design of these thermostats covers wall marks left by most mechanical thermostats without the need for a wall plate
.
FEATURES
• Lar •
Includes B/O terminals
• Fossil fuel or electric heat compatible
• Electronic accuracy
• Selectable Celsius or Fahrenheit temperature display
SPECIFICATIONS
1F72-151-ST
1F78-151
1F78-144
1E78-1511E78-140

1413. fi˚ 1345THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
RESIDENTIAL LCD DISPLAY PROGRAMMABLE/
NON-PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTATS
1F72, 1E78 AND 1F78 SERIES THERMOSTATS
1E78-151
RHY
24 VAC 120 VAC
Hot
Neutral
THERMOSTAT
SYSTEM
G W
Typical wiring diagram for heat/cool,
4-wire, single transformer systems
TRANSFORMER
Heating
System
Fan
Relay
Cooling
System
RC
JUMPER
WIRE
OB
RED jumper wire (provided with thermostat) must be
connected between thermostat RH and RC terminals
for proper thermostat operation with this system.
NOTE
RHY
24 VAC 120 VAC
Hot
Neutral
THERMOSTAT
SYSTEM
G W
Heat/cool, 4-wire, single transformer systems
TRANSFORMER
Heating
System
Fan
Relay
Cooling
System
RC
JUMPER
WIRE
RED jumper wire (provided
with thermostat) must be
connected between thermo-
stat's RH and RC terminals
for proper thermostat oper-
ation with this system.
NOTE
OB
1F78-144, 1F78-151
L RE
24 VAC 120 VAC
Hot
SYSTEM
MONITOR
SWITCH
Neutral
THERMOSTAT
SYSTEM
G W2
TRANSFORMER
(Class II)
Changeover
Relay*
CYO/B
Compressor
Contactor
* Changeover Relay is energized in COOL when O/B switch is in the “O” position
Changeover Relay is energized in HEAT when O/B switch is in the “B” position
Aux
Relay
(Stage 2)
Fan
Relay
Emergency
Relay
See Note **
** Jumper required to use a single Aux Heat for both Second Stage Heat and Emergency
If safety circuits are in only one of the systems, remove
the transformer of the system with NO safety circuits.
NOTE
1F72-151, 1F79-111
Typical wiring diagram for single transformer systems
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
1F78-151 Thermostat; SS/programmable/classic display
1F78-144 Thermostat; SS/non-programmable/classic display
1F72-151 Thermostat; HP/programmable/classic display
1E78-151 Thermostat; SS/programmable/vertical/classic display
1E78-140 Thermostat; SS/non-programmable/vertical/classic display
1F79-111 Thermostat; HP/non-programmable/classic display
Note:
All models available in a 6-pack
.

1414. NEW!
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1346NEW!
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21
NEW!WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
DIGITAL FAN COIL THERMOSTAT
TB6575, TB8575 SUITEPRO™ SERIES
Supply Voltage
TB6575A1000 and TB6575B1000
120 VAC ±10% at 50/60Hz
240 VAC ±10% at 50/60Hz
TB8575A1000 20 to 30 VAC at 50/60Hz (using
24 VAC Class 2 NEMA rated
transformer)
Component Ratings
Fan Relay 24 VAC 1.0A
120 VAC 6.0A
240 VAC 3.0A
Heat/Cool Relay 24 VAC 1.0A
120 VAC 1.0A
240 VAC 1.0A
Onboard Temperature Sensor
Type 10K NTC
Working Range 0° to 120°F (18° to 49°C)
Display Range 32° to 99°F (0° to 37°C)
Accuracy ±2.0°F at 70°F
Remote Temperature Sensor (optional) (Type 42)
Type 20K NTC
Working Range 0° to 120°F (18° to 49°C)
Display Range 32° to 99°F (0° to 37°C)
Accuracy ±2.0°F at 70°F
Remote Pipe Sensor (optional) (Type 42)
Type 20K NTC
Working Range 32° to 199°F (0° to 93°C)
Display Range 32° to 199°F (0° to 93°C)
Accuracy ±5.0°F over the temperature sensing
range
Remote Setback Input
TB6575 9 VDC, < 4 mA
TB8575 16 VDC, < 5 mA
TB6575/TB8575 Dry contact, maximum resistance of
100Ω
Operating Temperature 0° to 120°F (18° to 49°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 90% RH, non-condensing
Weight 1.0 lb (0.45kg)
Approvals CSA Certified C/US for Canada and
the U.S.A.
Warranty 2 years

DESCRIPTION
The SuitePRO™ is a family of Digital Fan Coil thermostats
for residential and commercial applications such as hotels,
condominiums, school classrooms, etc
. All three models
are suitab
le for multiple applications
. Changes in output
wir
ing and external links between wiring terminals allow you
to configure the thermostat for the appropriate application
.
V
alves and auxiliary electric heaters can be controlled using a
relay or contactor controlled by the system switch
.
FEATURES
• Simple, intuitive user interface.
• Pre-installed lead wires for fast installation (TB6575A
and TB6575B models only)
• Backlit display permits easy viewing in any light.
• Proportional plus Integral (P+I) control algorithm for
precision temperature regulation.
• Adjustable deadband for auto changeover using the
Heat and Cool setpoint settings.
• Adjustable maximum heating and minimum cooling
setpoint limits using range stops.
• EEPROM permanently retains user settings, including
setpoints, during power loss (no batteries required).
• Selectable °C or °F display via Installer Setup.
• Optional remote indoor temperature sensor.
• Freeze protect algorithm turns on heat when needed.
CU S
SPECIFICATIONS
APPLICATION
TB6575A1000
• 2-pipe or 4-pipe with seasonal/manual/automatic heat/
cool changeover
TB6575B1000 •
2-pipe with seasonal or manual heat/cool changeover
TB8575A1000 •
2-pipe or 4-pipe with manual and seasonal heat/cool
changeover
TB6575A100

1415. fi˚ 1347THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
DIGITAL FAN COIL THERMOSTAT
TB6575, TB8575 SUITEPRO™ SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TB6575A1000 Universal 120/240 VAC line voltage (2 or 4 pipe)
TB6575B1000 120/240 VAC line voltage (2 pipe only)
TB8575A1000 Universal 24 VAC low voltage (2 or 4 pipe)
WIRING - 24 VAC (TB8575)
Two pipes (Heat or Cool) Manual Changeover
wiring diagram (120/240/277 VAC shown).
N
L (HOT)
REMOTE SENSOR
REMOTE SETBACK
VALVE
FAN
L
W/Y
Y/A
GI
Gm
Gh
N
Rs
Sc
SB
Ps
Four pipes (Heat and Cool) Manual/Auto
changeover wiring diagram (120/240/277 VAC shown).
N
L (HOT)
REMOTE SENSOR
REMOTE SETBACK
HEAT VALVE
FAN
COOL VALVE
L
W/Y
Y/A
GI
Gm
Gh
N
Rs
Sc
SB
Ps
Two pipes (Heat or Cool) Manual Changeover
wiring diagram (24 VAC shown).
24 VAC
VALVE
FAN
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
REMOTE SENSOR
REMOTE SETBACK
1POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND
OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
R
W/Y
Y/A
GI
Gm
Gh
C
Rs
Sc
SB
Ps
Four pipes (Heat and Cool) Manual/Auto 
Changeover wiring diagram (24 VAC shown).
24 VAC
HEAT VALVE
FAN
L1 (HOT)
L2
1
REMOTE SENSOR
REMOTE SETBACK
1POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND
OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
COOL VALVE
R
W/Y
Y/A
GI
Gm
Gh
C
Rs
Sc
SB
Ps
Wiring diagram when missing a wire for 
electromechanical retroft (24 VAC shown).
24 VAC
HEAT VALVE
FAN
COOL VALVE
REMOTE SETBACK
REMOTE SENSOR
L1 (HOT)
L2
5
3
4
1
2
1
2
REMOVE PRE-WIRED WIRE FROM TERMINAL 5 (MID FA N SPEED).
JUMPER TERMINALS 5 AND 6 (MID AND HIGH FA N SPEEDS). FA N
MEDIUM SETTING WILL OPERAT E ON HIGH SPEED.
CONNECT TERMINAL 7 TO THE MID FA N SPEED WIRE FROM
PREVIOUS SYSTEM.
REWIRE THE PREVIOUS MID FA N SPEED WIRE TO THE NEUTRAL
CIRCUIT IN THE SYSTEM.
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
CHANGE INSTALLER SETUP IS CODE 9 TO 2 FOR
2 SPEED FA N CONTROL.
3
4
5
6
6
L
W/Y
Y/A
GI
Gm
Gh
C
Rs
Sc
SB
Ps
WIRING - 120/240/277 VAC (TB6575A/B)
Two pipes (Heat or Cool) Manual Changeover
wiring diagram (120/240/277 VAC shown).
N
L (HOT)
REMOTE SENSOR
REMOTE SETBACK
VALVE
FAN
L
W/Y
Y/A
GI
Gm
Gh
N
Rs
Sc
SB
Ps
Four pipes (Heat and Cool) Manual/Auto
changeover wiring diagram (120/240/277 VAC shown).
N
L (HOT)
REMOTE SENSOR
REMOTE SETBACK
HEAT VALVE
FAN
COOL VALVE
L
W/Y
Y/A
GI
Gm
Gh
N
Rs
Sc
SB
Ps
Two pipes (Heat or Cool) Manual Changeover
wiring diagram (24 VAC shown).
24 VAC
VALVE
FAN
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
REMOTE SENSOR
REMOTE SETBACK
1POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND
OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
R
W/Y
Y/A
GI
Gm
Gh
C
Rs
Sc
SB
Ps
Four pipes (Heat and Cool) Manual/Auto 
Changeover wiring diagram (24 VAC shown).
24 VAC
HEAT VALVE
FAN
L1
(HOT)
L2
1
REMOTE SENSOR
REMOTE SETBACK
1POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND
OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
COOL VALVE
R
W/Y
Y/A
GI
Gm
Gh
C
Rs
Sc
SB
Ps
Wiring diagram when missing a wire for 
electromechanical retroft (24 VAC shown).
24 VAC
HEAT VALVE
FAN
COOL VALVE
REMOTE SETBACK
REMOTE SENSOR
L1 (HOT)
L2
5
3
4
1
2
1
2
REMOVE PRE-WIRED WIRE FROM TERMINAL 5 (MID FA N SPEED).
JUMPER TERMINALS 5 AND 6 (MID AND HIGH FA N SPEEDS). FA N
MEDIUM SETTING WILL OPERAT E ON HIGH SPEED.
CONNECT TERMINAL 7 TO THE MID FA N SPEED WIRE FROM
PREVIOUS SYSTEM.
REWIRE THE PREVIOUS MID FA N SPEED WIRE TO THE NEUTRAL
CIRCUIT IN THE SYSTEM.
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
CHANGE INSTALLER SETUP IS CODE 9 TO 2 FOR
2 SPEED FA N CONTROL.
3
4
5
6
6
L
W/Y
Y/A
GI
Gm
Gh
C
Rs
Sc
SB
Ps

1416. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1348fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
FLOATING AND PROPORTIONAL ZONE THERMOSTAT
TB6980 AND TB7980 SERIES
Supply Voltage 24 VAC
Supply Current 25 mA
Control Proportional + integral (PI)
Display 1” x 1’’ LCD with 0.5’’ high
temperature digits
Readout Backlighting 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C) with 1°F
(0.5°C) resolution 12-second dwell,
button-activated
Outputs Triac, 24 VAC, 0-10 VDC, or 2-10
VDC
TB6980A #1 Floating control, heating (reverse
acting) or cooling (direct acting)
TB6980B #1 Floating control, heating (reverse
acting) or cooling (direct acting)
#2 0 or 2-10 VDC or on/off, heating
(reverse acting)
#3 On/off, following output 1
TB7980A #1 0 or 2-10 VDC heating (reverse
acting) or cooling (direct acting)
TB7980B #1 0 or 2-10 VDC heating (reverse
acting) or cooling (direct acting)
#2 0 or 2-10 VDC or on/off, heating
(reverse acting)
#3 On/off, following output 1
Inputs Night setback, open = occupied
Changeover, digital input or sensor
Remote sensor, 500141xx-xxx
Configuration Parameters

Application Room, supply air, changeover
Output 1 Cooling or heating
Damper Minimum 0-50%
Actuator Timing 80-160 seconds (Tx6980 only)
Output 2 Heating, floating control, on/off, or
proportional
Output 3 Minimum on time (1 second, 10
minutes, 15 minutes) or signal percent of output 1
Setback Value 2° to 18°F (1° to 9°C), in 2°F (1°C)
increments
Setpoint Limits Minimum 50° to 94°F (10° to 34°C)
Maximum 51° to 95°F (11° to 35°C)
Internal Switch Settings (Switches 1, 2, and 6 only)
SW1 °F or °C
SW2 Normal or configuration mode
SW6 Output 2 (proportional or triac
control)
Memory Protection Configuration and setpoint
Setpoint Buttons Range 50° to 90°F (10 to 35°C)
Override Button 2-hour night setback override
(Pushing twice cancels override)
Operating Temperature 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 0-95% RH, non-condensing
Sensor Changeover Deadband = 9°F (5°C), or contact
Wiring 22 to 18 AWG
Mounting Direct or to 2” x 4” box Cover secured
with set screw
Dimensions 4.6”H x 2.7”W x 1.0”D
(11.8 x 6.9 x 2.7 cm)
Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg)
Warranty 2 years
2.7
(6.9)
1
(2.54)
in
(cm)
Override
4.6
(11.8)
Configuration and status display
Side
view
Heating modeCooling mode
Temperature display
Output display
mode
Temperature
adjustment
button
Override
button
DESCRIPTION
Model T6980 is a floating-control zone thermostat. Model
T7980 is a proportional-control zone thermostat. Both have
PI control algorithms and models with dual outputs are
available. The digital display can be °F or °C, and will also
display bar graphs and pushbuttons for setpoint and override functions
. The microprocessor-based thermostat is dipswitch
configurable for application, including night setback value and minimum / maximum setpoint limits
.
FEATURES
• Floating control output (T6980)
• Proportional control outputs (T7980)
• Digital display (°F or °C and output bar graph)
• PI control algorithms
• Single or dual-output models
• Vertical mounting
• Night setback override (2-hour)
• Remote sensor capable
• Room or discharge air control
• Minimum and maximum setpoint limits
• Minimum damper open %
• 12-second backlighting
• Two-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
TB6980B1006
in
(cm)

1417. fi˚ 1349THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
FLOATING AND PROPORTIONAL ZONE THERMOSTAT
TB6980 AND TB7980 SERIES
TB6980B
1 24Va c
2 COM
3 OPEN
4 CLOSED
5 T2/ AN 2
6 T2/COM
7 T3
8 T3
9 COM
10 Sensor
11 c/over
12 NSB
Internally connected. T2/COM is internally connected if SW6=analog.
Alternative 2 POS/Proportional hookup.
Only terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11 , 12 are used on TB6980A thermostats.
TRANSFORMER ACTUAT OR ACTUA TORACTUATOR
24V
TM
PIPE OR DUCT STAT
(OPEN = H/C DEFA ULT OUTPUT 1)
TIME CLOCK (NSB=CLOSED)
TRI-STATE
L C R
SOP-2ETATS-IRT
L C R
+ -
ACTUAT OR
REMOTE
SENSOR
TB7980B
1 24Va c
2 COM
3 AN 1
4 COM
5 T2/ AN 2
6 T2/COM
7 T3
8 T3
9 COM
10 Sensor
11 c/over
12 NSB
Internally connected. T2/COM is internally connected if SW6=analog.
*Can be a different power source or the same as main transformer.
Only terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, 12 are used on TB7980A thermostats.
MAIN
TRANSFORMER
RELAY OR
ACTUATOR
RELAY OR
ACTUAT OR
RELAY OR
ACTUAT OR
TRANSFORMER
*
24V 24V
TM
PIPE OR DUCT STAT
(OPEN = H/C DEFA ULT OUTPUT 1)
TIME CLOCK (NSB=CLOSED)
2-POS
PROP.
(0, 2) - 10V
PROP/
2 POS
PROP/
2 POS
+ -+ -
REMOTE
SENSOR
WIRING
CONFIGURATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
Application Output 1 type Output 2 type a Output 3 type Output 3 NSB value Output 1 Maximum Minimum
(Htg only) (follows Output 1) activa tion min. opening setpoint setpoint
0 Internal sensor 0 Cool / 0-10V 0 Not used 0 Not used 0 100% 1 1°C (2°F) 0 0%
1 Room 1 Heat / 0-10 V 1 SSR 24 VAC 1 SSR 24 VAC 1 10% 2 2°C (4°F) 1 10%
2 Return 2 Cool / 2-10 V 2 N.C. Valve 2 N.C. Valve 2 20% 3 3°C (6°F) 2 20%
3 Supply 3 Heat / 2-10 V 3 N.O . Valve 3 N.O. Valve 3 30% 4 4°C (8°F) 3 30%
4 Auto changeover 4 Mech. relay 4 Mech. relay 4 40% 5 5°C (10°F) 4 40%
5 Limited cooling 5 SSR 3-32 V 5 Contact 5 50% 6 6°C (12°F) 5 50%
6 SCR 0-10 V 6 60% 7 7°C (14°F)
7 Act. 0-10 V 7 70% 8 8°C (16°F)
8 Act. / 2-10 V 8 80% 9 9°C (18°F)
9 90%
Application Output 1 type Output 2 type a Output 3 type Output 3 NSB value Output 1 Output 1 Maximum Minimum
(Htg only) (follows Output 1) activa tion min. opening opening time setpoint setpoint
0 Internal sensor 0 Cool 0 Not used 0 Not used 0 100% 1 1°C (2°F) 0 0% 0 80
1 Room 1 Heat 1 SSR 24 VAC 1 SSR 24 VAC 1 10% 2 2°C (4°F) 1 10% 1 90
2 Return 2 N.C. Valve 2 N.C. Valve 2 20% 3 3°C (6°F) 2 20% 2 100
3 Supply 3 N.O. Valve 3 N.O. Valve 3 30% 4 4°C (8°F) 3 30% 3 110
4 Auto changeover 4 Mech. relay 4 Mech. relay 4 40% 5 5°C (10°F) 4 40% 4 120
5 Limited cooling 5 SSR 3-32 V 5 Contact 5 50% 6 6°C (12°F) 5 50% 5 130
6 SCR 0-10 V 6 60% 7 7°C (14°F) 6 140
7 Act. 0-10 V 7 70% 8 8°C (16°F) 7 150
8 Act. / 2-10 V 8 80% 9 9°C (18°F) 8 160
9 90%
Can be set
between
35°C (95°F)
and
’’minimum
setpoint + 1’’
Default value
is 35°C (95°F)
Can be set
between
10°C (50°F)
and ’’maximum
setpoint - 1’’
Default value
is 10°C (50°F)
Can be set
between
35°C (95°F)
and ’’minimum
setpoint + 1’’
Default value
is 35°C (95°F)
Can be set
between
10°C (50°F)
and ’’maximum
setpoint - 1’’
Default value
is 10°C (50°F)
a. If Output 2 type is set to 0-4, set the SW6 switch to Triac. If the output type is set to 5-8, set the switch to Analog.
a. If Output 2 type is set to 0-4, set the SW6 switch to Triac. If the output type is set to 5-8, set the switch to Analog.
TB7980B
TB6980B
88888888
88888888
88888888
88888888
88888888
88888888
88888888
88888888
88888888
88888888
88888888
88888888
88888888
888888888 8888888 SP HI SP LO
SP HI SP LO
Shading =
Factory Setting
Model
TB6980A1007
TB6980B1006
TB7980A1006
TB7980B1005
Description
Floating (tri-state)
Floating (tri-state)
Proportional
(0 or 2-10 VDC)
Proportional
(0 or 2-10 VDC)
Output 1
Floating, heating and
cooling
Floating, heating and
cooling
Proportional, heating
and cooling
Proportional, heating
and cooling
Output 2 None
Proportional
or two-position,
heating
None
Proportional
or two-position,
heating
Output 3 None
Two-position,
heating or cooling,
as determined by
output 1
None
Two-position, heating
and cooling, as
determined by output 1
RELATED PRODUCTS
50014156-002 Remote room temperature sensor
50014157-001 Remote duct temperature sensor

1418. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1350fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
HONEYWELL SINGLE- OR MULTI-LOOP STANDALONE CONTROLLER
T775 SERIES
Supply Voltage 24, 120, or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Supply VA 8 VA maximum at 60 Hz,
10 VA maximum at 50 Hz
Display Backlit digital 2.5" x 1.5",
configurable °F or °C
Operation 6-key, menu-driven, with simple
programming lock
Memory Program is non-volatile; time is retained
for 24 hours
Clock 12 hour (AM/PM) for night setback/
shutdown, daylight savings time
enable/disable
Scheduling 7-day, two events per day
Setpoint Model specific (see I/O configuration
table)
Temperature -40° to 248°F (-40° to 120°C)
Humidity (T775U) 0-100%
Pressure (T775U) -500 to 500 psi -30 to 30 inches W.C.
-3000 to 3000 P
a or kPa
Signal Input
Model-specific (see I/O configuration
table)
Temperature RTD 1.1 k at 77°F, PTC, 2.1 /°F, Platinum
1 kΩ at 32°F, 385 curve
Digital input Dry contact, all models (Used for
system shutdown or night setback)
Analog (T775U) 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
Input Calibration Temperature offset ±10°F
Universal offset ±10% of scale
Signal Output Model-specific (see I/O configuration
table)
Relays/tri-state 10A at 24 VAC (resistive), 1/2 hp at 120
VAC
125 VA pilot duty
Modulating 0 or 2-10 VDC, 2 kΩ minimum
impedance
4-20 mA, 600Ω maximum impedance
Series 90, 135Ω
Temperature Sensor Included in all T775-A,B,L,M,P,R
versions
Probe 50021579-001, 8" leads
Range -60°F to 270°F (-51° to 132°C)
Accuracy ±1°F at 77°F
Control Type Model-specific (see I/O configuration
table)
Relay on/off Differential control, adjustable ±1° to
±150°F
Modulating PI or PID, with adjustable tuning
Throttling range ±1° to ±150°F
Derivative and integral times 0 to 3600
seconds
Multiple loops depending on model
Wiring Terminal blocks separated by function
Enclosure Plenum rated plastic, UL94V NEMA 1,
NEMA 4X versions Hinged cover with LCD window Five (1/2") knockouts on four sides
Color
Two-tone gray
Mounting Surface screw tabs or DIN rail
Operating Temperature -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 8.2"H x 4.9"W x 3"D
(20.7 x 12.5 x 7.4 cm) Door opens out
4" (10.2 cm)
Weight 2.2 lb (1 kg)
Approvals UL Listed File #E4436, File #XAPX.
E4436 cULus, CE, C-tick, FCC
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
Model T775 is a standalone multi-point and multi-loop
controller designed for a wide range of applications. The
I/O point mix is unit-specific with temperature, humidity, and pressure input models available
. Relay or analog output
models may be selected as well. Single-loop, two-loop, and
reset controllers may be selected, all including a seven-day time clock for output disable or night setback
. The relay output
controllers have adjustable differential control algorithms.
Analog output controllers ha
ve adjustable throttling range,
proportional plus integral (PI), or proportional, integral, and derivative (PID) control. The backlit display is easy to read,
and the menu-driven setup is simple. The T775 is available
in NEMA 1 or NEMA 4X enclosures for the most demanding environments
.
FEATURES
• Standalone controller
• Multiple power input (24, 120, or 240 VAC)
• Single- or dual-loop models
• Throttling range, PI and PID tunable modulating
models
• Adjustable differential two-position models
• Humidity, pressure, and universal input models
• Two-position 10A relay model
• Analog output 0 or 2 to 10 VDC, 4-20 mA, and 135Ω
models
SPECIFICATIONS
T775M2048
closed door
• Integral seven-day time clock for night setback or
shutdown
• Remote night setback or shutdown input
• °F or °C temperature display
• Daylight savings time compensation
T775M2078 open door
with wiring

1419. 1351THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
HONEYWELL SINGLE- OR MULTI-LOOP STANDALONE CONTROLLER
T775 SERIES
B
R
W
–
+
B
T
T
R
W
–
+
–
+
+C
Knockout E
Knockout C
Output
Relay 1
Output
Relay 4
Output
Relay 3
Sensor B
Sensor A
Output
Relay 2
Knockout D
Power
120/240 VAC
Power
24 VAC
Digital
Input
Mod 2
Mod 1
2
Knockout A
Knockout B
T
T
NC
NO
C
NC
NO
C
NO
NC
C
NO
NC
C
120
COM
240
4
1
3
T775A/B/M/R Series 2000 Controller
NC
NO
C
NC
NO
C
NO
NC
C
NO
NC
C
T T
–
+
+C
Knockout E
Knockout C
Output
Relay 1
Output
Relay 4
Output
Relay 3
Sensor B
Sensor A
Output
Relay 2
Knockout D
Power
120/240 VAC
Power
24 VAC
Digital
Input
5
Knockout A
Knockout B
T
T
120
COM
240
NO
NC
C
1
3
T T
Sensor C
–
+
T775 Bus
Digital
Output
Alarm
T775P Series 2000 Controller
NO
NC
C
NO
NC
C
C
S
T
T
V
–
+
B
T
T
R
W
–
+
–
+
+C
Knockout E
Knockout C
Output
Relay 1
Sensor B
Sensor A
Output
Relay 2
Knockout D
Power
120/240 VAC
Power
24 VAC
Digital
Input
Mod 2
Mod 1
2
Knockout A
Knockout B
B
R
W
–
+
120
COM
240
4
1
3
T775U Series 2000 Controller
1
2
3
4
5
When used for temperature or 4-20 mA
sensing, sensors A and B use the two TT
connections and are polarity insensitive.
For Mod 1 and Mod 2 current (mA) or
voltage (VDC) output, use signal (+) and
common (–). For Mod 1 and Mod 2 Series
90 output, use W, R, and B.
A separate earth ground is required for any
power source (24, 120, or 240 VAC).
For Series 90 connections, you must insert
a 340Ω resistor across terminals R and W.
The resistor is included with the controller.
Relay 4 can be used for pump output. The
pump output is always the last relay output.
NOTES FOR ALL DIAGRAMS
2-Pos
Float
Prop
Temp
Univ
Reset
BLR
Seq
ALM
Staging
NSB
Two-position control
Floating (tri-state) control
Proportional control
Temperature input, RTD
Universal input
OSA Reset control
Boiler special
Sequencer control
Alarm relay SPDT
Boiler or pump staging
Night setback function
N/A
T775A200Ω
T775B20Ω2
T775B20Ω0
T775B202Ω
T775M200Ω
T775M20ΩΩ
T775M2022
T775R20Ω5
T775R20ΩΩ
T775R2027
T775R200Ω
T775P200Ω
T775L2007
T775U20ΩΩ
T775S200Ω
T775R20ΩΩ
2-Position 2-Position or Floating* 2-Position or Floating* 2-Position or Floating* Proportional Proportional Proportional 2-Position or Floating* Proportional, Reset Proportional, 2-Position, Reset 2-Position or Floating* 2-Position, Reset, BLR 2-Position, Reset, Sequential 2-Position & Proportional** 2-Position Proportional, 2-Position, Reset1 Temp 2 Temp 2 Temp 2 Temp 2 Temp 2 Temp 2 Temp 2 Temp 2 Temp 2 Temp 2 Temp 3 Temp 2 Temp 1 Temp,1 Univ
2 Temp
1 SPDT
2 SPDT
4 SPDT
4 SPDT
2 Analog
2 Analog, 2 SPDT
2 Analog, 2 SPDT
2 SPDT
2 Analog
2 Analog, 2 SPDT
4 SPDT
4 SPDT, 1 ALM
4 SPDT
2 Analog, 2 SPDT
4 SPDT for sequence expansion on T775(L,P)
2 Analog, 4SPDT
1
2
2
2
2
2
2 (1 if Floating)
1 with Reset 1 with Reset 1 with Reset 1 with Reset 1 with Reset
2, 1 with Reset 2, 1 with Reset
1 with Reset
Staging
Clock NSB Clock NSB Clock NSB Clock NSB Clock NSB Clock NSB Clock NSB Clock with Reset Clock with Reset Clock with Reset Clock with Reset
Multi-stage and Seq
RH,PSI,in W.C.
Clock with Reset
NEMA 1
NEMA 1
NEMA 1
NEMA 4X
NEMA 1
NEMA 1
NEMA 4X
NEMA 1
NEMA 1
NEMA 1
NEMA 1
NEMA 1
NEMA 1
NEMA 1
NEMA 1
NEMA 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 1
None
N/A
2
*Each Floating (tri-state) output has two SPDT relays. **Sensor B can only be used for reset.
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
RELATED PRODUCTS
50021579-001 Replacement temperature sensor (typically supplied with T775)
C7031D2003 5-inch immersion temperature sensor w/box
C7031J2009 12-foot averaging temperature sensor with wiring box
C7046D1008 8-inch duct temperature sensor w/box
C7130B1009 Room temperature sensor
T775-SENS-WR Temperature sensor with water-resistant 5-foot leads
T775-SENS-WT Temperature sensor with water-tight 6-foot leads
MODEL DESCRIPTION
T775A2009 Single loop SPDT controller with one RTD
T775B2016 Single loop floating or twin SPDT controller, NEMA 4
T775B2024 Two-output floating or four SPDT controller, NEMA 4, with one RTD
T775B2032 Single loop floating or two SPDT controller, with one RTD
T775B2040 Two-output floating or four SPDT controller, with one RTD
T775M2006 Two-analog-output proportional controller, with one RTD
T775M2014 Two-output proportional controller with 4 SPDT NEMA 4
T775M2022 Two-output proportional and two-output SPDT controller, NEMA 4, with one RTD
T775M2030 Two-output proportional controller with 4 SPDT
T775M2048 Two-analog-output proportional controller with two SPDT outputs and one RTD
T775R2001 Two-output floating or four-output SPDT reset controller, with two RTDs
T775R2019 Two-output proportional reset controller with four SPDT outputs and two RTDs
T775R2027 Two-output proportional reset controller with two SPDT outputs and two RTDs
T775R2035 One-output floating or two-output SPDT reset controller, with two RTDs
T775R2043 Two-output proportional reset controller, with two RTDs
T775P2003 Four on/off boiler control outputs with reset and three RTDs
T775L2007 Dual loop, Four on/off sequence control outputs (1 loop with reset) and one RTD
T775U2016 Dual loop, Universal input, two proportional outputs, and two SPDT outputs( 1 loop with reset)
T775S2008 T775(P,L), four-relay expansion module

1420. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1352fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
MODULAR ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM 450
Supply Voltage
Power Module 110/120 VAC or 220/240 VAC at 50/60
Hz (100 mA maximum) 24 VAC, 10 VA
secondary
Control Modules C450YNN-1 Power Supply Module or 24
(20-30) VAC Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV)(Europe) or Class 2 (North America) 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum
Supply VA
C450CPN-1C 1.3 VA maximum using 0-10V out
1.5 VA maximum using 4-20 mA out
C450CQN-1C 2.0 VA maximum using 0-10V out
2.4 VA maximum using 4-20 mA out
C450CBN-1C 0.9 VA maximum
C450RBN-1C 0.9 VA maximum
C450CCN-1C 1.3 VA maximum
C450RCN-1C 1.3 VA maximum
C450SPN-1C 1.1 VA maximum using 0-10V out
1.3 VA maximum using 4-20 mA out
C450SQN-1C 1.8 VA maximum using 0-10V out
2.2 VA maximum using 4-20 mA out
C450SBN-1C 0.8 VA maximum
C450SCN-1C 1.2 VA maximum
Input Signal 0-5 VDC for humidity sensors and static
pressure transducers; 0.5 to 4.5 VDC for
pressure transducers;1,035Ω at 25°C (77°F) for A99 PTC temperature sensors
Analog Output Voltage Mode (0-10 VDC)

10 VDC maximum output voltage, 10
mA maximum output current requires an external load of 1,000Ω or more
.
The A
O operates in Voltage Mode when
connected to devices with impedance greater than 1,000Ω. Devices that fall
below 1,000Ω may not operate as intended with Voltage Mode applications
.
Current Mode (4-20 mA)
Requires an external load between
0-300Ω The AO operates in Current Mode when connected to devices with impedance less than 300Ω
. Devices that
rise above 300Ω may not operate as intended with Current Mode applications
.
Relay Outputs 1/2 HP at 120/240 VAC, SPDT
AC Motor Ratings 120 VAC 208/240 VAC
AC Full-load Amperes: 9.8A 4.9A
AC Locked-Rotor Amperes: 58.8A 29.4A
10A AC Non-inductive at 24/240 VAC
Pilot Duty: 125 VA at 24/240 VAC
Mounting Lexan 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail
mounting or direct surface mount
Operating Temperature -40° to 150°F (-40° to 66°C) for 0-10 VDC
outputs and relay outputs
-40 to 104°F (-40° to 40°C) for 4-20 mA
outputs
Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing);
Maximum Dew Point 29°C (85°F)
Dimensions 5.0”H x 2.4”W x 2.4”D
(12.7 x 6.1 x 6.1 cm)
Weight
C450CPN-1C 0.43 lb (0.19 kg)
C450CQN-1C 0.43 lb (0.19 kg)
C450CBN-1C 0.46 lb (0.21kg)
C450RBN-1C 0.46 lb (0.21kg)
C450CCN-1C 0.49 lb (0.22kg)
C450RCN-1C 0.49 lb (0.22kg)
C450SPN-1C 0.33 lb (0.15 kg)
C450SQN-1C 0.33 lb (0.15 kg)
C450SBN-1C 0.38 lb (0.17 kg)
C450SCN-1C 0.41 lb (0.18 kg)
C450YNN-1C 0.86 lb (0.39 kg)
Approvals
North America cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734,
Vol. 1; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15,
Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
Europe CE Compliant; Low Voltage Directive
(2006/95/EC); EMC Directive (2004/108/ ED); RoHS Directive (2002/95/EC); WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC) Australia C-Tick Compliant (N1813)
Warranty
3 years
DESCRIPTION
The System 450 from Johnson Controls/PENN is a family of
modular digital electronic controllers that is easily assembled
and configured to provide reliable temperature, pressure, and
humidity control for a wide variety of commercial HVAC and
industrial process applications
. The System 450 is designed
to replace the System 350 and System 27, and provide many additional features and benefits with a small number of model variations
. All of the modules are field configurable out-of-the-
box and can monitor and control temperature, pressure and humidity simultaneously
.
FEATURES
• Plug-together connectors and DIN rail or direct wall-
mount capability
• Multi-purpose, field-configurable, and designed for
global use
• Backlit LCD and 4-button touch pad user interface
SPECIFICATIONS
• Up to 3 inputs and up to 10 outputs allow flexibility in
configuring systems from simple to complex
• Versatile all-in-one stand-alone control modules
provide for scalable digital and/or analog control for temperature, pressure, and humidity

1421. fi˚ 1353THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
MODULAR ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM 450
LC1
LNO1
LNC1
LC2
LNO2
LNC2
240
VAC
120
VAC
Relay
Output 1
Relay
Output 2
Analog
Output
3
Power
Module
240 VAC
Supply Po wer
to Power Module
5V
C
S1
Red
Blk
Wht
P499 Pressure Transducer
Sn-1 Control Sensor in UI Display
(P500 Sensor Type)
C
S2
A99 Temperature Sensor
Sn-2 Control Sensor in UI Display
(°F Sensor Type)
Cooling Equipment
Control Circuit
(24 to 240 VAC)
C450CCN-1C C450SPN-1CC450YNN-1C
L1
L2
L1
L2
0-10 VDC or
4-20 mA
Analog Output
Signal
L1 L2
AO2
COM
AO1
Condenser Fa n
Speed Control
Analog Input
Circuit
Sn-1
Sn-2
Sn-3
Heating Equipment
Control Circuit
(24 to 240 VAC)
Sensor 1: Jumper positioned on one pin
(or removed) sets Sn-1 to Active (Pressure).
Jumper positioned across two
pins sets Sn-2 and Sn-3 to Passive (Temperature).
Sensors 2 and 3:
Sn-1
Sn-2
Sn-3
Jumper Settings
Active/Passive
Sensor Jumpers
(See Jumper Settings)
WIRING - EXAMPLE FOR ROOM HEATING AND COOLING WITH CONDENSER FAN SPEED CONTROL
(SEE JCI BULLETINS FOR OTHER EXAMPLES)
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
C450CBN-1C Control module with LCD, 1xSPDT output
C450CCN-1C Control module with LCD, 2xSPDT outputs
C450CPN-1C Control module with LCD, 1 analog output
C450CQN-1C Control module with LCD, 2 analog outputs
C450RBN-1C Reset control module with LCD, 1xSPDT output
C450RCN-1C Reset control module with LCD, 2xSPDT outputs
C450SBN-1C Relay expansion module with 1xSPDT output
C450SCN-1C Relay expansion module with 2xSPDT outputs
C450SPN-1C Analog expansion module with 1 analog output
C450SQN-1C Analog expansion module with 2 analog outputs
C450YNN-1C Power module, 120 or 240 VAC input
ACCESSORIES PAGE
A99-CLP-1 Mounting clip for A99 temperature sensor
A99BA-200C PTC Sensor with 6.5 ft (2m) shielded cable
A99BB-200C PTC Sensor with 6.5 ft (2m) PVC cable
A99BB-25C PTC Sensor with 9.75 in (0.25m) PVC cable
A99BB-600C PTC Sensor with 19.5 ft (6m) PVC cable
A99BC-1500C PTC Sensor with high temperature 49 ft (15m) sillcon cable
A99BC-25C PTC Sensor with high temperature 9.75 in (0.25m) sillcon cable
A99BC-300C PTC Sensor with high temperature 9.75 ft (3m) sillcon cable
BOX10A-600R PVC enclosure for A99 temperature sensor for outdoors
DPT2650-0R5D-AB Low differential pressure transducer 0 to 0.5 in WC
DPT2650-10D-AB Differential pressure transducer 0 to 10 in WC
HE-67S3-0N00P Duct mount humidity sensor with A99B type temperature sensor
HE-67S3-0N0BT Wall mount humidity sensor with A99B type temperature sensor
P499RCP-101K Electronic pressure transducer 0-100 psi
P499RCP-105K Electronic pressure transducer 0-500 psi
P499RCP-107K Electronic pressure transducer 0-750 psi
SHL10A-603R Sun shield for A99 sensor for outdoor sunny locations
TE-6001-1 Duct temperature element holder with box 1391
WEL11A-601R Immersion well for A99 sensor for fluid temperature liquid sensing
Note: Sensor not included

1422. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1354fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ECONOMIZER
ZIP ECONOMIZER SERIES
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±20%, 50/60Hz, Class 2 power
source
Operating Temperature
ECON-ZIP-TH Only -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C)
All Other Models -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity
ECON-ZIP-TH Only 0 to 100% RH
All Other Models 5 to 95% RH non-condensing
Connectors 1/4” male spade connectors
Power Consumption Rating*
ECON-ZIP-BASE Shown on next page with full technical
specifications
ECON-ZIP-COM 2.5 VA (ECON-ZIP-COM), 6.5 VA (ECON-
ZIP-BASE + ECON-ZIP-COM)
ECON-ZIP-EM 1.5 VA (ECON-ZIP-EM), 5.5 VA (ECON-
ZIP-BASE + ECON-ZIP-EM)
Communication Interface
ECON-ZIP-COM RS485 Interface, Optical Isolation max. 1k
VDC (f
or max
.1 min), Pin 4: RS485 Com
Gnd, Pin 7: RS485 Com A, Pin 8: RS485
Com B
Supported Remote Alarm
ECON-ZIP-COM Normal Current: 0.5A, Inrush Current: 1A
Indoor Fan Speed Selection
ECON-ZIP-EM 100,000 cycles @ inrush current of 3A,
normal current 1.5A
Exhaust Fan Selection
ECON-ZIP-EM 100,000 cycles @ inrush current of 3A,
normal current 1.5A
Supported CO2 Sensor
ECON-ZIP-EM 0-10 VDC, Sensor auto-detection
Auxiliary Input -Purge Contact
ECON-ZIP-EM On/Off - 24 VAC, 50/60HZ - Current Load
min 10mA
Auxiliary Input -Remote Potentiometer
ECON-ZIP-EM 2-10 VDC
Current Consumption
ECON-ZIP-TH Max. 5mA
Rated Impulse Voltage
ECON-ZIP-TH 800V
Software Class
ECON-ZIP-TH A
Control Pollution Degree
ECON-ZIP-TH 3
Temperature Sensor Type
ECON-ZIP-TH NTC 10kOhm
Humidity Sensor Type
ECON-ZIP-TH 0-10 VDC (0 to 100% RH) max load
10kOhm, Class 2 limited energy
Accuracy
ECON-ZIP-TH ±3% 35-65% rH @ 75°F (23.9°C)
±5% 0-34%, 66-100% rH @ 75°F (23
.9°C)
Response Time: Less than 45 seconds @
40 FPM, 75°F (23.9°C)
Hysterisis: Less than 2.5% rH
Long Term Stability: Less than 1% rH/year
Approvals
ECON-ZIP-TH Only UL60730-1, -2-9 and -2-13. UL2043
compliant, CE
2004/108/EC “Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)”, EN60730-1, -2-9 and-2-13
All Other Models cULus acc. to UL873, CAN/CSA C22.2,
No. 24-93
Suitable Actuators
ECON-ZIP-BASE AFB24-SR, NFB24-SR, LF24-SR, TFB24-
SR
Housing NEMA 1
Housing Material UL94-5VA
RoHS Conformally coated
Weight
ECON-ZIP-BASE 1 lb (0.45 kg)
All Others 8 oz (0.22 kg)
Warranty 5 years
*The power consumption is for the control only and does not include connected loads such as actuator, compressors, fans, and sensors
.
For transformer sizing, the power consumption of these attached components must be included
.
DESCRIPTION
The ZIP Economizer saves energy in buildings by using cool outside
air as a means of cooling the indoor space. This application can
drastically reduce HVAC energy costs while also improving air quality.
The
ZIP has easy plug and play features and by adding the different
modules available in the series you can conveniently control many aspects of the space including temperature and humidity as well as remote alarm indication
.The ZIP base unit offers an extended
temperature transflective LCD display, with on board help, providing information throughout the entire set up
. The base unit is designed to
provide most common economizer functions such as two stages of mechanical cooling, intergrated cooling, four chage over strategies for free cooling and damper position feedback
. One of the unique
f
eatures on the ZIP Economizer is the patented ZIP code set up
function which will automatically find your location once entered to maximize energy savings for your location and also make you compliant with the local energy codes
.
FEATURES
• Plug and play self-configuring
• Patented zip code recognition
• Easy to read LCD display
• Alarm notification
• Expandable modules available
• Onboard help and troubleshooting
• TH module CE 2004/108/EC
SPECIFICATIONS
ECON-ZIP-BASE

1423. fi˚ 1355THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ECONOMIZER
ZIP ECONOMIZER SERIES
TECHNICAL DATA - ECON-ZIP-BASE
Power Supply 24 VAC ± 20%, 50/60 Hz; Class 2 power source
Power Consumption Rating*
4 VA Base Control (ECON-ZIP-BASE)"
5.5 VA Base Control with Energy Module
(ECON-ZIP-BASE + ECON-ZIP-EM)
5 VA Base Control with Communication Module
(ECON-ZIP-BASE + ECON-ZIP-COM)"
6.5 VA Base with Energy Module and Communica-
tion Module
Rated Impulse Voltage 330V
Connectors 1/4" male spade connectozrs
Environmental RoHS, Conformally Coated
Software Class A
Control Pollution Degree 3
Temperature Input Signal NTC 10kOhm
Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing
Humidity Input Signal 0-10 VDC; corresponds to 0 to 100%
Housing NEMA 1
Housing Material UL94-5VA
Ambient Temperature Range -40°F to +158°F (-40°C to +70°C)
Storage Temperature Range -40°F to +176°F (-40°C to +80°C)
Display 2x16 character LCD; LED backlight; transflective
Display Op. Range** -22°F to +176°F (-30°C to +80°C)
Agency Listing cULus acc. to UL873, CAN/CSA C22.2, No. 24-93
Energy Code Compliant ASHRAE 90.1, CA Title 24, NECB
I/O SPECIFICATIONS - ECON-ZIP-BASE
Type Name Description Electrical Specification
Input R Supply Hot 24 VAC, ± 20%, 50/60Hz
Input G Fan Signal (occupied) On/Off, 24 VAC, ± 20%, 50/60Hz Input C Supply Common Common Input Y Cooling requirement
Stage 1
On/Off, 24 VAC, ± 20%, 50/60Hz
Input Y2 Cooling requirement
Stage 2
On/Off, 24 VAC, ± 20%, 50/60Hz
Input W Heating requirement
Stage 1
On/Off, 24 VAC, ± 20%, 50/60Hz
Input SAT ± Supply Air Temperature
Sensor
Type: 10K NTC (Type II thermistor)
Input OAT ± Outdoor Air Temperature Type: 10K NTC (Type II thermistor) Input OAH ± Outdoor Air Humidity 0-10 VDC
Auto Detection: Sensor present if voltage
0.5V-10V
Input RAT ± Return Air Temperature Type: 10K NTC (Type II thermistor)
Input RAH ± Return Air Humidity 0-10 VDC
Auto Detection: Sensor present if voltage
0.5V-10V
Output CC1 Compressor 1
RTU Stage 1
Mechanical Cooling
Circuitry
100,000 cycles @ inrush current of 3A,
normal current 1.5A
Impedance for Auto detection @ 24 V:
<60O Ohm @ 60Hz
<80O Ohm @ 50Hz
Output CC2 Compressor 2
RTU Stage 2
Mechanical Cooling
Circuitry
100,000 cycles @ inrush current of 3A,
normal current 1.5A
Impedance for Auto detection @ 24 V:
<60O Ohm @ 60Hz
<80O Ohm @ 50Hz
Output Act 1 Actuator supply common Common
Output Act 2 Actuator supply hot 24 VAC, 50/60Hz
Output Act 3 Actuator control output 2-10 VDC
Input Act 5 Actuator feedback signal 2-10 VDC
The power consumption is for the control only and does not include connected loads
such as actuator, compressors, fans, and sensors. For transformer sizing, the power
consumption of these attached components must be included.
*At low temperature, the display has decreased response time, below -22°F (-30°C) it
will not function."
DIMENSIONS - ECON-ZIP-BASE
ZIP Economizer™ Base Unit

1424. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1356fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ECON-ZIP-TH
Return
Enthalpy
ECON-ZIP-TH
Outdoor
Enthalpy
-SR Actuator
Rooftop Unit Terminal
Thermostat
R
C
G
Y1
Y2
W1
W2
Occ
Purge
CC2
RTU Stage 2
Mechanical Cooling
Circuitry
CC1
RTU Stage 1
Mechanical Cooling
Circuitry
Outdoor Air
Temperature
Return Air
Temperature
Supply Air
Temperature
1
When Temperature and Humidity sensors are used for enthalpy, respective temperat ure
only sensors are not used and OAT and RAT and wiring shall terminate at ECON-ZIP-T H
1
1
2Return Air Temperature and Humidity sensors are only required when differential
temperature or differential enthalpy high limit changeover strategy is used
2
2
3
When the thermostat is not equipped with occupancy control, ”Fan On” output “G” shall
be wired to ECON-ZIP-BASE
3
3
4
4
W1 must be wired to ECON-ZIP-BASE when unit is a Heat Pump, using 2 speed fan,
and when it is desired to record operational hours in heating
5
Existing refrigeration safety devices may exist, consult RTU wiring diagram
5
WIRING - ECON-ZIP-BASE
ECONOMIZER
ZIP ECONOMIZER SERIES

1425. fi˚ 1357THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ECON-ZIP-EM
CO2 Sensor
Remote Potentiometer
24Vac
Power
2-10Vdc
Signal
24Vac
Power
0-10Vdc
Signal
CO2 SensorEFCLSF
EFC
Indoor Fan Low
Speed Relay /
VFD Enable
Power Exhaust
Fan Relay
1
1Power Source should be same as ECON-ZIP-BASE
Purge Contact
Thermostat
24Vac
2
2 Not Supplied by Belimo
2
3 Sold Separately by Belimo
3
4 If the RTU has a 2 speed fan (IF wired), then W1 on
the ECON-ZIP-BASE needs to be wired as well, since
the fan shall not run in part load when heating.
DIMENSIONS - ECON-ZIP-EM
WIRING - ECON-ZIP-EM
ZIP Economizer™ Communication Module
I/O SPECIFICATIONS - ECON-ZIP-EM
Type Name Description Electrical Specification
Input CO2 ± CO2 sensor input 0-10 VDC (0-2000 ppm)
Sensor auto-detection
Output IF Indoor fan low speed
enable
100,000 cycles @ inrush current of 3A,
normal current 1.5A
Impedance for Auto detection @24 V:
<600 Ohm @ 60Hz
<800 Ohm @ 50Hz
Output EF Exhaust fan enable 100'000 cycles @ inrush current of
3A, normal current 1.5A Impedance for
Auto detection @ 24 V:
<600 Ohm @ 60Hz
<800 Ohm @ 50Hz
Input AUX1 ± Auxiliary input Purge
contact input
On/Off, 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Current load min. 10mA
Input AUX2 ± Auxiliary input Remote
Potentiometer Input
2-10 VDC
ECONOMIZER
ZIP ECONOMIZER SERIES

1426. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1358fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
DIMENSIONS - ECON-ZIP-COM
DIMENSIONS - ECON-ZIP-TH
WIRING - ECON-ZIP-COM
WIRING - ECON-ZIP-TH
ZIP Economizer™ Communication Module
ZIP Economizer™ Temperature & Humidity Sensor
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ECON-ZIP-B
ASE
Economizer module
ECON-ZIP-COM Economizer communication module (plug-in)
ECON-ZIP-EM Economizer energy module (plug-in)
ECON-ZIP-10K Economizer temperature sensor (plug-in)
ECON-ZIP-TH Economizer temperature and humidity sensor module (plug-in)
ECONOMIZER
ZIP ECONOMIZER SERIES

1427. fi˚ 1359THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
SETPOINT CONTROLLER
PXR4
Supply Voltage 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Supply VA 10 VA at 120 VAC
Input
Current 4-20 mA DC, impedance: 250Ω with
external resistor
Voltage 1-5 VDC, impedance: 450 kΩ
minimum
Input Scaling Range -1999 to 9999
Input Sampling Cycle 0.5 seconds
Input Filter 0-900.0 seconds in 0.5 second step
Output
Current 4-20 mA DC, 600Ω maximum
Control Type PID control or fuzzy logic control,
man
ual or autotuning
Proportional Band
0% to 999.9% in 0.1% steps
Integral Time 0-3200 seconds in 1-second steps
Derivative Time 0-999.9 seconds in 1-second steps
Action Direct or reverse, programmable
Indication Accuracy ±0.5% full scale ±1 digit at 73°F
Memory Nonvolatile, no battery required
Diagnostics Monitored by watchdog timer
Noise Reduction
Normal Mode (50/60 Hz), 50 dB or more
Common Mode (50/60 Hz), 140 dB or more
Termination 8-pin socket
Enclosure ABS plastic, black, 1/16 DIN NEMA
4X front panel
Mounting Flush panel or surface mount
Operating Temperature 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions
SR2P-056 1.89" x 1.89" x 3.33"
(4.8 × 4.8 × 8.47 cm)
Weight 0.5 lb (0.23 kg)
Approvals UL Listed File #E131280, CE
cer
tified
Warranty
1 year
DESCRIPTION
The new Model PXR4 Set Point Controller is one of the
most technically advanced instruments in the industrial
and commercial markets today
. It is also one of the least
e
xpensive controllers of its kind
. Through the use of a
specially designed Fuji microprocessor, the Model PXR4 incorporates the latest technology for controlling applications
.
With simple
, finger-tip programming from the front panel,
the operator can tailor the operation of the controller quickly and easily. By automatically setting proportional band,
integral (reset) time, and derivative (rate) time by means of the autotuning function, control parameter guesswork is eliminated
. In addition, this controller employs Fuji's patented
fuzzy logic algorithms. The Model PXR4 can learn processes,
using the PID parameters as a starting point. This intelligence
allows your process to reach its set point in the shortest time possible while virtually eliminating overshoot
.
FEATURES
• Any type single-loop control application
• Input 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC; Output 4-20 mA
• PID control or fuzzy logic control
• Manual or autotuning
• Programmable control action, reverse or direct
• LED indication of the process variable and setpoint
• Output status indication
• Fault indication of input sensor
SPECIFICATIONS
PXR4 Controls
• Selectable indication resolution
• Digital filtering to suppress electrical noise
• Easily programmed with two-level, menu-driven format
• Nonvolatile memory, no battery required
• 1/16 DIN package
• NEMA 4X faceplate
PXR4

1428. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1360fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
SETPOINT CONTROLLER
PXR4
4-20 mA
Transmitter
4-20 mA
Control Output
250 Resistor (included)
Install for 4-20 mA transmitter;
remove for 1-5 VDC transmitter .+
+
+
–
–
–
+–
+–
1
2
3
45
6
7
8
24 VDC
Power
Supply
Power Supply
100-240 VAC
50/60 HZ
Terminals 2 and 5
are internally
common
WIRING
1 .89
(4 .80)
in
(cm)
1 .89
(4 .80)
0 .28
(0 .71)
3 .66
(9 .30)
2 .8
(7 .15)
1 .76
(4 .48)
Panel Cutout Dimensions
1 .77" square (4 .50)
Note: Bracket for flush
panel mounting is
included . Order
socket separately .
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PXR4 Setpoint controller, 100 to 240 VAC power
SR2P-06 Relay socket, DPDT pin type, DIN/surface mount
ATXINS Hooded solder-type socket for flush panel mount
INSTALLATION
The controller should be installed as far away as possible from any device generating high frequency noise. Input signal and
po
wer cables connected to the instrument should be wired away from power line and load line to minimize inductive noise
.
Pref
erably, the instrument power cable should be twisted to avoid noise
.
The following guidelines for location should also be observed:
1. Do not install in a location with corrosive gases (sulfuric gas, ammonia, etc.)
2. Do not install in a location subject to vibration, impact, water, or high temperatures.
INPUT
Scalable 4-20 mA/1-5 VDC
input allows monitoring of
the following:
•
Temperature
• Humidity
• Pressure
• Air flow
• Water flow
• Any 4-20 mA/1-5 VDC
transmitter within a range of -1999 to 9999
OUTPUT 4-20 mA output allows control of the following: •
Valve actuators
• Damper actuators
• Variable speed drives
• Resistance transducers
• I/P transducers
• Step controllers
APPLICATION

1429. fi˚ 1361THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
SCR POWER CONTROLLER
R820 SERIES
Supply Voltage 24 VAC, +10%/-15%, 50/60 Hz;
Supply VA 2 VA Use Class 1 (properly fused)
or Class 2, CSA or UL recognized
transformer
Input Signal 0-10 VDC (2-10 VDC control range),
4-20 mA, 0-135 Ω,
dip switch selectable
low signal = no heat
high signal = full heat
Input Impedance
Voltage 10K
Ω
Current 250 Ω
Thermostatic Protection
Cuts off at rise to 180°F (82°C), self-
resetting
Operating Temperature
32° to 95°F (0° to 35°C), full rating,
amperage de-rated up to 175°F (80°C)
Operating Humidity
0 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Approvals CSA; UL, File #E191074
Warranty 1 year
R820 Single Phase
R820-321
R820-211
R820-341
R820-421
R820-441
R820-471
R820-621
R820-641
R820-671
Weight (LBS)A
4.5”
10.0”
6.5”
4.5”
4.5”
4.5”
6.5”
6.5”
10.0”
1.80
2.40
1.80
1.80
1.80
2.40
2.40
3.50
3.50
DESCRIPTION
The R820 Series SCR (Silicon Control Rectifier) controllers
provide cost effective modulation of electric loads using
industry standard proportional control signals from
thermostats or building automation systems
. The R820
Series incorporates a compact control board mounted to a multi-fin, anodized heat sink with an exceptionally high heat dissipation rate
. Models are available in single phase or
3-phase and can control loads up to 600V.
FEATURES
• Compact, microprocessor-based controller saves
space in control panels
• Integrated, self-resetting thermostatic protection
increases safety
• Multi-input control signal maximizes application and
system flexibility
• Integral heat sink minimizes installation time and
wiring costs
• Status LED confirms proper operation
DIMENSIONS
DIMENSIONSSPECIFICATIONS
R820
R820 Three Phase
R820-323
R820-213
R820-343
R820-423
R820-443
R820-623
R820-643
Weight (LBS)A
6.5”
6.5”
10.0”
10.0”
6.5”
10.0”
10.0”
2.60
3.70
3.70
2.65
3.70
3.70
2.65
3.00"
3.75"
5.25"
2.00"
A
Cutout
template
SINGLE PHASE
3.00"
5.25"
A
2.00"
5.75"
Cutout
Template
Amp Calculation
Single Phase kW x 1000/E x PF
Three Phase kW x 1000/1.73 x E x PF
E = Voltage PF = Power factor

1430. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1362fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
SCR POWER CONTROLLER
R820 SERIES
Common
24 VAC
Input
2nd SSR on 3 phase
models only
To load
(controlled leg)
To load
(uncontrolled leg)
To load
(controlled leg)
R
W
B
0 VDC = 0% capacity
10 VDC = 100% capacity
2 VDC = 0% capacity
4 mA = 0% capacity
20 mA = 100% capacity
10 VDC = 100% capacity
0 Ohms = 0% capacity
135 Ohms = 100% capacity
0-10 VDC
Thermostat Control
2-10 VDC or
4-20 mA from BA S
0-135 fi
Thermostat Control
0 to 10 VDC control signal (2 to 10 VDC control range)
4 to 20 mA control signal
0 to 135 fi control signal
Off
Off
Off Off
Off
Off
OffOff
On
On
On
On
SWITCH #1 SWITCH #2 SWITCH #3 SWITCH #4INPUT SIGNAL
Common
24 VAC
0 to 10 VDC
output
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
021-0474 Replacement circuit board
R820-211 SCR power controller 240V, 10A, single phase
R820-213 SCR power controller, 240V, 10A, 3 phase
R820-321 SCR power controller 347V, 25A, single phase
R820-323 SCR power controller 347V, 25A, 3 phase
R820-341 SCR power controller 347V, 45A, single phase
R820-343 SCR power controller 347V, 45A, 3 phase
R820-421 SCR power controller 480V, 25A, single phase
R820-423 SCR power controller 480V, 25A, 3 phase
R820-441 SCR power controller 480V, 45A, single phase
R820-443 SCR power controller 480V, 45A, 3 phase
R820-471 SCR power controller 480V, 75A, single phase
R820-621 SCR power controller 600V, 25A, single phase
R820-623 SCR power controller 600V, 25A, 3 phase
R820-641 SCR power controller 600V, 45A, single phase
R820-643 SCR power controller 600V, 45A, 3 phase
R820-671 SCR power controller 600V, 75A, single phase
ACCESSORIES
021-0474 Replacement circuit board
CAUTION: HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING - High voltages are present at the terminals of these devices; follow the
installation instructions carefully. All wiring must conform with national and local electrical codes.

1431. fi˚ 1363THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
SETPOINT CONTROLLER
UCM-420A
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC ±10%
Supply Current 130 mA maximum @ 24 VAC, 65 mA
maximum @ 24 VDC
Remote Setpoint Input 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, PWM
Local Setpoint Input 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, three-wire
potentiometer or PreCon two-wire
potentiometer (ST-S3E-XA)
PWM Time Base 0.1-2.65, 5.2, 12.85, 25.6, or 0.59-
2.93 sec
Analog Output 4-20 mA sourcing
Output Resolution 255 steps
Output Burden 650Ω maximum
Input 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC or PreCon
Type III thermistor (thermistor range 50° to 90°F)
Input Impedance
250Ω (mA signal), 10 k (voltage
signal)
LED Status
Green Power
Red PWM output
Accuracy ±1%
Remote Setpoint Potentiometer
UCM-SPA 0-10k
Ω
Enclosure
UL94V-0
Operating Temperature 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Weight
UCM-420A 1.3 lb (0.61 kg)
UCM-SPA 0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 18 months
DESCRIPTION
The Model UCM-420A is a low cost microprocessor-
based Proportional plus Integral (PI) controller that may
be used for a wide variety of control applications
. All setup
and prog
ramming is done by DIP switches and bottle plug
jumpers on the Model UCM-420A
. Set points may be local
and/or remote. The output may be direct- or reverse-acting.
FEATURES
• PI control
• DIP switch/jumper programming
• Selectable throttling range
• Selectable integral reset rate
• Direct or reverse-acting
• Setpoint potentiometer on unit
• Optional DIN rail mounting
• Optional setpoint potentiometer with stainless steel wall plate (UCM-SP
A)
MODES OF OPERATION
SPECIFICATIONS
UCM-420A UCM-SPA-50-90F
Setpoint Controller
The UCM-420A input monitors the process being controlled.
This input ma
y be a 4-20 mA or 1-5 VDC signal from a pressure
sensor, flow transmitter, temperature sensor, etc
., or an input
from a Precon Type III temperature thermistor. Then, the UCM-
420A provides a 4-20 mA PI output signal to control a valve,
VFD, damper, etc., based on a setpoint as described below.
1. Local setpoint controller- The potentiometer mounted
on the unit may be used to control the setpoint. The local
setpoint may also be a UCM-SPA setpoint potentiometer, the setpoint option of a Precon Model ST-S3EXA temperature sensor, a 4-20 mA signal, or a 1-5 VDC signal
.
2. Remote setpoint controller- In this mode, the setpoint
signal may be a 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, or time-based pulse- width signal from a BAS controller
.
3. Remote setpoint controller with local adjustment- The
UCM-420A accepts a remote setpoint signal as described above in #2
. Then, a local setpoint signal, as described in
#1, may be used to adjust the setpoint. The local setpoint
will have authority to adjust the setpoint ±12.5% of the input
range. If the local setpoint is from a Precon ST-S3E-XA, it will
have authority to adjust the setpoint ±9.4% of the input range.
Sample and Hold
The UCM-420A may be used to monitor a 4-20 mA or 1-5V
control signal. If the signal being monitored is lost, the UCM-
420A will hold the last valid value for the signal until the signal returns
.
Pulse Width to 4-20 mA Converter
The UCM-420A may be used to convert a time-based pulse- width AC or DC signal to a 4-20 mA output
.
4-20 mA Signal Generator
If the de
vice to be controlled by the UCM-420A needs to be
calibrated before the system is started up, the UCM-420A may
be used to generate a 4-20 mA output in one mA increments
.

1432. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1364fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
SETPOINT CONTROLLER
UCM-420A
4.8
(12.19)
4.0
(10.16)
3.4
(8.64)
0.7
(1.78)
4.6
(11.68)
2.0
(5.08)
2.75
(6.99)
Optional
DIN rail
adapter
Setpoint knob
in
(cm)
PWM
INPUT
PWM
INPUT
REM SPT
INPUT
LOC SPT
POT +
LOC SPT
INPUT
LOC SPT
POT –
FEEDBK
INPUT
24 PWR
COMMON
MA SIG
OUTPUT
11
B3
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
B6
0
0
0
0
1
B7
0
0
1
1
X
B8
0
1
0
1
X
B4
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
B5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
MUX
ADDR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A6
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
A7
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
A8
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
PROP
T.R.
10% 20% 35% 50% 65% 80% 90%
100%
UCM-420A DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
TIME
BASE
2.65
5.2
12.85
25.6
.59-2.93
A4
0 0 1 1
A5
0 1 0 1
RESET
PER MIN
OFF
0.5
1 2
“1” MEANS
TURN SWITCH ON
“0” MEANS
TURN SWITCH OFF
SWITCH OFF SWITCH ON
A3
A2
A1
B1
B2 REVERSE ACTING
BOTH OFF >> REMOTE SETPT
SAMPLE AND HOLD MODE
BOTH OFF >> ANALOG
REMOTE SET POINT
DIRECT ACTING
LOCAL SETPT ENABLE
REMOTE SETPT ENABLE
PWM REM SETPT SGLE UNIT
PWM REM SETPT MUX MODE
LOCAL
SETPOINT
FEEDBACKREMOTE
SETPOINT
STATUS
LED
B
A
123456 78
123456 78
24 VAC/VDC power
4-20 mA, 1-5V or Thermistor input signal
4-20 mA sourcing output signal to
controlled device
4-20 mA or 1-5V remote setpoint signal
(only if remote setpoint is analog signal)
24 VAC/VDC PWM signal from BAS
(only if remote setpoint is PWM)
+
–
+
–
–
+
+
–
+
– Remote
Setpoint
(if used)
BAS Controller
PWM Contacts
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SEE
LOCAL
SETPOINT
WIRING
BELOW
12
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTIONMODEL
UCM-420A
OPTIONS
DIN rail mount (must be factory installed)47
47UCM-420A Example: UCM-420A-47
Setpoint controller with DIN rail mounting
Setpoint controller with local setpoint potentiometer
RELATED PRODUCTS
UCM-SPA Setpoint potentiometer, 0-10 kΩ, three-wire potentiometer on stainless steel plate for
remote mounting, 0-100% setpoint
UCM-SPA-50-90F Setpoint potentiometer for 50° to 90°F
UCM-SPA-C Custom range setpoint potentiometer (specify at time of order, must match range of
device wired to feedback input)
Three-wire potentiometer
(5K to 50K MAX) local setpoint
(10K factory installed)
Local setpoint potentiometer
Local setpoint input
Local setpoint potentiometer
Two-wire potentiometer local
setpoint
(XA option on Precon ST-S3E-XA
thermistor)
Increase
setpoint
Increase
setpoint
Local setpoint (Factory setting)
4-20 MA or 1-5V
+

–
+
–
Local setpoint potentiometer
Local setpoint input
Local setpoint potentiometer+
–
Local setpoint potentiometer
Local setpoint input
Local setpoint potentiometer+
–
Common
Common
(black)
(green)
(red)
LOCAL SETPOINT WIRING OPTIONS
LOCAL SET POINT WIRING OPTIONS

1433. fi˚ 1365THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
PROPORTIONAL ROOM THERMOSTAT
RTC-2P
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz
Supply VA 3 VA
Outputs Proportional, 2-10V standard, 0-10V
configurable (install 42K resistor in
R14/R15)
Control PI algorithm
Inputs
Remote sensor 10K Type III thermistor
Changeover Contact or thermistor, Type III
Setback Isolated 24V contact
Shutdown Isolated 24V contact
Controls Setpoint buttons up/down, Setback-
enable button or 30 minute override
Range 40° to 90°F (4° to 32°C)
Display 0.35" (0.89 cm), two-digit LCD
Proportional Band
Cooling 1.8°F (1.0°C)
Heating 2.7°F (1.5°C)
Reset Integral Time 15 minutes
Changeover Contact or 80°F (26.6°C) with a
Type III thermistor
Deadband -1.8° to 9.0°F (-1.0° to 5.0°C)
Dimensions 4.0"H x 4.9"W x 1.2"D
(12.45 x 10.16 x 3.05 cm)
Weight 0.45 lb (0.2 kg)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Model RTC-2P Room Thermostat Proportional Controller features two proportional outputs (heating and cooling)
. The
proportional plus Integral (PI) control is suitable for pressure dependent VAV box control, as well as fan coil, baseboard, or air handler applications
. The occupant controls include
a digital display and buttons for setpoint adjustment and night setback/setup override
. The Model RTC-2P comes
with a remote setback input for use with BAS systems and a changeover input for one-pipe system applications
. Field
setup is through push b
uttons with adjustments for setback
temperatures, deadband, and °F or °C display
.
FEATURES
• Digital display for °F or °C
• Set point adjustment buttons
• Night setback manual button or clock input
• Remote sensor input
• Changeover input
• Two proportional outputs heating and cooling
• PI control algorithm
• 0-10V or 2-10V outputs
The stand-alone Model RTC-2P is ideal for use when a central temperature control system may not be possible. Applications
include an
y pressure-dependent VAV box control
. The H/C output can also be used for modulating control of room-based
discharge air, fan coil valves, or baseboard heat.
APPLICATION
SPECIFICATIONS
RTC-2P

1434. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1366fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
PROPORTIONAL ROOM THERMOSTAT
RTC-2P
Cooling
Actuator
Heating
Actuator
1
2
3
5
8
9
17
16
15
14
13
12
120 VAC
RTC-2P
24 VAC
L1
Night
Setback
Contact
(open for NSB)
C
C
L1
Remote
Shutoff
Contact
Remote Sensor
Type III
10 kfi Thermistor
Changeover
Contact or
Type III
10 kfi Thermistor
(closed for heating)
TB1 TB2
TB1-1 = Common
TB1-2 = 24 VAC
TB1-3 = Cooling 0-10V*
TB1-5 = N/C
TB1-8 = Heating 0-10V*
TB1-9 = Setback, remote
(TB1-1 and TB2-17 are connected internally.)
* 0-10V or 2-10V selectable by 42.2K resistor installation;
resistor provided
TB2-17 = Common
TB2-16 = Remote Shutoff
TB2-15 = Remote Space Sensor
TB2-14 = Remote Space Sensor
TB2-13 = Heat/Cool Changeover
TB2-12 = Heat/Cool Changeover
Yc
Yh
Cooling
Actuator
Heating
Actuator
1
2
3
5
8
9
17
16
15
14
13
12
120 VAC 24 VAC
L1
Night
setback
contact
(open for night setback)
C
C
L1Remote
shut-down
contact
Remote sensor
type III
10 kfi thermistor
assumes
J4 open,
J5 closed
TERMINALS
Changeover contact
(closed for heating)
or
Type III thermistor
above 80°F heating
below 65°F cooling
TB1TB2
Yc
Yh
assumes
J2 closed
**
**
Separate
transformer
recommended
External Clock Input
* 0-10 VDC or 2-10 VDC selectable. Install 42 kfi resistor across R14/R15 for 0-10
VDC output.
** If one common transformer is used, the actuators
must use 1/2 wave rectified power, and polarity
must be observed.
TB1-1 = Common TB1-2 = Hot 24 VAC**
TB1-3 = Cooling 0-10V* TB1-5 = N/C TB1-8 = Heating 0-10V* TB1-9 = Setback, remote
(TB1-1 and TB2-17 are connected internally)
(42 kfi Resistor provided)
TB2-17 = Common TB2-16 = Remote shut off TB2-15 = Remote space sensor TB2-14 = Remote space sensor TB2-13 = Heat/Cool changeo ver
TB2-12 = Heat/Cool changeo ver
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
R
TC-2P
Room temperature controller, two-output H/C proportional thermostat
BOARD LAYOUT
24 VAC
COM
FPM 0-10V
Yc 0-10v
17
SPACE T
DOWN
S10
16
15
14
13
12
1
2
3
5
8
9
VALUE
UP
S4
VALUE DOWN
S5
Vmax Vmin
S1
Vhtg
LED SETBACK GREEN
DEADBD ADJ
PRO ADJ
Q1
R15
R14
F/C
J4/5 SELECT
INT/EXT
SPACE SNSR
SPACE
TEMP
SENSOR
S9
J4J5
S8
S2
SETBACK
S3
SPACE T UP
S6
USER STBCK
S6J1
EXT OVRD
J2 J3
TB1
Resistor Sockets for R14, R15 (42 .2K 1%)
TB2
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
ST-R3S Pipe strap-on sensor 10K Ω Type III thermistor 1253
ST-S3E Room sensor 10K Ω Type III thermistor 1171
ST-U3 Universal duct and immersion sensor 10K Ω Type III thermistor 1228

1435. fi˚ 1367THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
TWO-POSITION ROOM THERMOSTATS
ET SERIES, UT8001
DESCRIPTION
The ET Series Two-Position Room Thermostat are designed
for on/off control with set points from 50° to 90°F. The
ET5-S-1S Series is a heating-only thermostat and uses a snap-acting switch for line or low voltage applications
. The
ETD5-S-1S Series is a heating/cooling thermostat and uses a snap-acting switch for line or low voltage application
. Model
UT8001 Two-Position Room Thermostat are designed for low voltage on/off control of a manually selected heating or cooling applications
. It operates with set points from 50° to
90°F from a bi-metal and magnetic reed switch. Fan switching
includes manual On/Auto control.
FEATURES
• Line or low voltage ET5 heating
• Line or low voltage ETD5 heating/cooling
• Low voltage UT8001 with fan and system switch has
single or dual transformer with adjustable anticipator or mV operation, thermometer, and vertical or horizontal mounting
NC
C
Open on temperature rise
ET5-S-1S
NO
NC
C
C-N.C. open on temperature rise
C-N.O. close on temperature rise
ETD5-S-1S
COOL
OFF
HEAT
ON
GYRC WRH
4W
J2
G/O
J1
E
G/O = gas or oil (fan delay) E = electric (immediate fan)
AUTO
OFF
Heat control
Transformer (heat)
Transformer (cool if used
remove J2)
Cooling control
Fan control (set up J1)
J2 off = two transformers J2 on = one transformer
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ET5-S-1S Line or low-voltage heating thermostat
ETD5-S-1S Line or low-voltage heating or cooling thermostat
UT8001 Low-voltage thermostat with fan and system switch
SPECIFICATIONS
ETD5-S-1S
Two position
Line or Low Voltage
UT8001
Conventional
UT8001
Setpoint range 50° to 90°F (10° to 32°C)
Anticipator UT8001 only (0.1A to 1A)
Control type Two-position, on/off
Mounting 2" x 4" (5.1 x 10.2 cm) vertical switch box
Weight 0.5 lb (0.23 kg)
Approvals UL Listed File #E46315; CSA (ET5), cUL
(UT8001)
Warranty 2 years
Model Supply VoltageSupply Current Switch Contact TypeDifferential Dimensions
ET5-S-1S 24-277 VAC 22A None SPST, snap acting Heating 2°F
4.75"H x 2.75"W x 2.75"D
(12.1 x 7.0 x 7.0 cm)
ETD5-S-1S 24-277 VAC 22A None SPDT, snap acting
Heating 2°F, Cooling
4°F
4.75"H x 2.75"W x 2.75"D
(12.1 x 7.0 x 7.0 cm)
UT8001 24 VAC 1A Fan and system Magnetic reed
Heating 3°F, Cooling
3°F
4.75"H x 2.75"W x 1.5"D
(12.1 x 7.0 x 3.8 cm)

1436. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1368fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Thermostat Range 40° to 90°F (5° to 30°C)
Mounting Separate mounting plate
Sensing Element Liquid filled for positive trouble-free
operation (anticipator not required)
Thermometer 50° to 90°F (10° to 30°C), bimetal
type ma
y be field calibrated
Approvals
UL Listed File #E6688/XAPX
Weight 1.30 lb (0.59 kg)
Warranty 1 year
LINE-VOLTAGE THERMOSTAT
T22, T25, T26, T46
DESCRIPTION
These thermostats are designed for line-voltage control of
residential, commercial, or industrial heating or year-round
air conditioning
. A liquid-charged temperature sensing
element, highly efficient diaphragm, and lever provide precise temperature control
. Anticipators are not required.
Model T26 is a line-voltage thermostat for heating or cooling
and includes horizontal mounting faceplate kit.
Model T25 is a line-v
oltage two-stage thermostat
.
Applications include tw
o stages of heating or cooling or auto
changeover control of heating and cooling
.
Model T22 is a line-voltage thermostat with a system selector
switch for off/auto or heat/off/cool operation.
Model T46 is a line-v oltage, heating, cooling or heating/
cooling thermostat with integral system and fan switching. It is
designed to control line-v
oltage fan coils or zone valves
.
FEATURES
• Knob or concealed set point adjustment
• Line- or low-voltage control
• UL listing
• Mounts on standard single- or double-gang box
• Bimetal thermometer
• Ideal for fan coil applications
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
SPECIFICATIONS
T22
T26
T25
T46
T22, T25, T26, T46 Thermostats, (T26T-3, T22T) Heavy Duty Thermostat
Pilot Duty and Motor Ratings 120V 208V 240V 277V
AC full load amp 6 (8) 3.4 (8) 3 (8) T25-125 VA pilot duty
AC locked rotor amp 36 (48) 21 (48) 18 (48) -
AC non-inductive amp 6.5 (10) 6.5 (10) 6.5 (10) 6.5 (10) not T46 or T25
T46 System and Fan Swith Rating Only
Switch Rating 120V 208V 240V 277V
AC full load amp 12 6.9 6 5.2
AC locked rotor amp 34.8 19.1 17.4 14.4

1437. fi˚ 1369THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
LINE-VOLTAGE THERMOSTAT
T22, T25, T26, T46
2.96
(7.52)
1.86
(4.72)
1.16
(2.95)
1.5
(3.81)
0.25
(0.64)
4.71
(11.96)
4.71
(11.96)
2.34
(5.94)
3.27
(8.31)
0.60
(1.52)
4.84
(12.29)
T46
2.96
(7.52)
T26
5.21
(13.23)
2.81
(7.14)
in
(cm)
T22, T25
T25, T26, T46
1.2 (3.05)
0.91
(2.3)
1.88
(4.8)
0.41
(1.0)
2.34
(5.94)
3.27
(8.31)
0.60
(1.52)
T22
1.2 (3.05)
Single-gang box
Front ViewF ront View Side View
Double-gang box
R
Y
B
H
H
H
High Stage Low Stage
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
(red)
(blue)
high (orange)
med (yellow)
low (brown)
(violet)
(gray)
(lt blue)
(black)
L (hot)
1
neutral
To Heating
To Cooling
To Fan
high (orange)
med (yellow)
low (brown)
(red)Heat
(gray)
(blue) Cool(black)
L (hot)
1
neutral
To Heating
To Cooling
To Fan
HCHC
Manual or
Automatic
Changeover
Switch DPDT
Relay or
Switch
Off/auto selector sw itch with fan speed
contro l and manual or automatic changeover
switch, heating and coolingHeat/off/cool selector sw itch
with fan speed control,
heating and cooling
T25
T22AAA
Heating
system
T22JAA
T22SFB
T22TFB
Cooling
system
H/C
system
T26
T46SAA
T46SDA
Action on increase
in temperature
Action on
increase in
temperature
Comes with jumper
(remove as needed)
R
Y
B
L
L
L
Cool
Heat
Common
12
h
AUTO
OFF
1
3 21
2
h
AUTO
OFF
OFF OFF
h
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL ADJUSTMENT 
TYPE
T46SDA-1
T46SAA-1
T26S-18*
T26T-3*
T25A-1
T25A-16
T22AAA
T22JAA
T22SFB
T22TFB
Knob
Knob
Knob
Knob
Knob
Concealed
Knob
Knob
Knob
Knob
SELECTOR 
SWITCH
DIFFERENTIAL ˚F (˚C)
HEATING        COOLING
Off/Auto
Low/Med/High
Heat/Off/Cool
Low/Med/High
None
None
None
Off/Auto
Off/Auto
Heat/Off/Cool
Heat/Off/Cool
WEIGHT
lb (kg)
1.3
(0.59)
1.3
(0.59)
1.0
(0.45)
1.0
(0.45)
1.5
(0.68)
1.5
(0.68)
1.3
(0.59)
1.3
(0.59)
1.3
(0.59)
1.3
(0.59)
0.7 (0.4)
0.7 (0.4)
1.75 (1.0)
3 (1.7)
1.75 (1.0)
0.7 (1)
N/A
1.75 (1)
3 (1.7)
0.7 (0.4)
0.7 (0.4)
2.25 (1.3)
3 to 4
(1.7 to 2.2)
2.25 (1.3)
N/A
2.25 (1.3)
2.25 (1.3)
3 to 4
(1.7 to 2.2)
APPLICATION
Heating or cooling
SPDT
Heating and cooling
SPDT
Heating or cooling
SPDT
Heating or cooling
SPDT, heavy-duty
Two-stage 2 SPDT switches,
two-stage heating, cooling, or one-
stage heating and one-stage
cooling
Heating Only
SPST
Cooling Only
SPST
Heating and cooling
SPDT
Heating and cooling
SPDT
3 between stages (1.7)
*Includes faceplate for horizontal mounting. The plate is for on-the-job installation ov er a ve rtical plate. Field convert to other configurations.
ACCESSORIES
PLT333-12R T26 and T46 vertical plate with no adjust knob and no thermometer
PLT333-3R T26 and T46 vertical plate with thermometer and no adjust knob
PLT333-9R T26 and T46 horizontal plate with no adjust knob and no thermometer

1438. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1370fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
SPECIFICATIONS
PECO FLOATING AND PROPORTIONAL THERMOSTATS
T158, T168 SERIES
2.75
(6.99)
in
(cm)
Two Mounting Slots
0.16 x 0.36
(0.41 x 0.91)
0.5 (1.27)
Opening
for Wiring
0.34 (0.86)

2.1 (5.33)
3.3 (8.38)
4.5 (11.43)
1.0
(2.54)
DESCRIPTION
The T158 Series is a microprocessor-based floating or
two-position low voltage thermostat. The T168 Series is
a microprocessor-based proportional 4-20 mA or 0-10V thermostat
. Both series are designed for fan coil and air
handler applications for both two- and four-pipe systems.
The processor pro
vides control algorithms for precise stable
control under varying capacity and load conditions without the need for field calibration or tuning. These versatile
thermostats have options for a variety of high voltage fan and system switching
. Models are also available with an
unoccupied setback input. Terminations are provided for
remote sensors for both air and water temperature.
FEATURES
• Electronic Proportional plus Integral (PI) control
• Two-position, floating, and proportional control models
• Remote sensor capability
• Optional unoccupied control inputs
• Fan and system switching models
• °F or °C digital display
• Built-in start up diagnostics
• Seasonal changeover models
• Four selection service menu
DIMENSIONS
TB-158-100
Off
Switch Open
T168 Program Ju mpers and Switch Settings
On
Switch Closed
#1: Not used #2: Electric heat (on at setpoint) #3: °C display #4: 4-20 mA output #5: Must be “ON”
#6: Setback
Heating 60°F (15°C)
Cooling 85°F (29°C)
Not used Staged heat (on at maximum output plus 1°F) °F display 0-10 VDC output Normal operation Setback Heating 50°F (10°C) Cooling 90°F (32°C)
Unjumpered
Jumpers
Jumpered
JP1 Remote sensor JP2 Four pipe JP3 Not used JP4 Cooling 4-20 mA JP5 Heating 4-20 mA
Local sensor
Two pipe
Not used
Cooling 0-10 VDC
Heating 0-10 VDC
I.D.
Dip Switch
123456
OFF ON

L1 (hot)
Lo
Med L2 or Neutral
Hi
TA168

Fan

Optional Remote Changeover Probe
Optional Remote Probe
24 VAC
Transformer
Aux
Heat
Htg (RA)
0-10 VDC
or 4-20 mA
Setback Input
Line Voltage
Connections
Low Voltage
Connections
Demand
Output
Remove JP1
for Remote Sensor
External Relay
On/Off
Damper
Typical Wiring for Proportional Control
Clg (DA)
0-10 VDC
or 4-20 mA
*
*
If the changeover probe is used
on a cold pipe, the control is as
shown above on the outputs. If the
changeover probe is on a hot pipe,
it reverses the action of the cooling
output above. Heating is disabled.
Notes: 1. Units ha ve a three-minute warm up.
2. Cycle power after dip switches are
changed.
1
2
3
4

5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Notes: JP 4 and 5 must both be the same.
Two pipe disabl es term inal 11.
T168 WIRING
T158 T168
Supply Voltage 20-28 VAC 20-28 VAC
Supply Current 25 mA @ 24 VAC 25 mA @ 24 VAC
Control Type Two-position or floating Proportional 4-20 mA, 600Ω load, 0-10 VDC, 1000Ω min
Output Capacity 10 VA @ 24 VAC (Triac) 10 VA @ 24 VAC (Triac) , (Heating/Damper/Demand)
Stroke Time 30-300 sec (120 sec default) 30-300 sec (120 sec default)
Temperature Offset ±5°F (0° default) ±5°F (0° default)
Fan Demand Delay 0-10 min. (0 default) 2-10 min. (2 default)
Cooling Minimum Off 30-600 sec (120 sec default) 30-600 sec (120 sec default)
Fan Switching 24 VA @ 24 VAC , 125 VA @ 120 VAC 24 VA @ 24 VAC, 125 VA @ 120 VAC
Setpoint With Setback 50° to 90°F (10° to 32°C) 50° to 90°F (10° to 32°C)
Proportional Band 2°F (1°C) 2°F (1°C)
Heat/Cool Deadband 3°F (1.6°C) 3°F (1.6°C)
Material Of Construction Flame-retardant PVC, UV stabilized Flame-retardant PVC, UV stabilized
Color Cool gray Cool gray
Display 0.36" (0.9) LCD (°F or °C) 0.36" (0.9) LCD (°F or °C)
Weight 0.28 lb (0.13 kg) 0.28 lb (0.13 kg)
Approvals UL-recognized component File# E50023, CEUL-recognized component File# E50023, CE
Warranty 5 year 5 year

1439. fi˚ 1371THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
PECO FLOATING AND PROPORTIONAL THERMOSTATS
T158, T168 SERIES
L1 (hot)
Lo
Med L2 or Neutral
Hi
Typical Wiring for On/Off Control
Typical Wiring for Three-Wire Floating Control
TA158 (1H/1C) TH158 (Heat Pump)

Fan

Optional remote changeover probe
Optional remote probe
Optional remote probe
Optional remote probe
24 VAC
transformer
Heat
output
Cool output
Setback input
L1 (hot)
Lo
Med L2 or Neutral
Hi

Fan
Optional pipe changeover probe
24 VAC
transformer
Heat
output
Cool output
Setback input
Open
Open
Close
Close
Line-voltage
connections
Low-voltage
connections
Line-voltage
connections
Low-voltage
connections
1
2
3
4

Typical Wiring for On/Off Control
Fan
24 VAC
transformer
W1-2nd heat
output
Y1-Cooling comp. output
Setback input
Remove JP1
for remote sensor Type 24
Remove JP1
for remote sensor Type 24
Remove JP1
for remote sensor Type 24

*JP4 Installed = Two pipe
Uninstalled = Four pipe Type 24
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Triac
control
Triac
control
External relay or
spring return actuator
External relay
Tri-state actuator
TB158 (Floating)
1
2
3
4

5 6 7
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
^
^
^
On/Off
damper
External relay or
spring return actuator
B-Heating reversing vlv
O-Cooling reversing vlv
L1 (hot)
Lo
Med L2 or Neutral
Hi
TB158 (Two-Position)

Fan

Optional remote changeover probe
Optional remote probe
24 VAC
transformer
2nd heat
only output
1st heat output
Cool output
Setback input
Line-voltage
connections
Low-voltage
connections
1
2
3
4

Demand
output
Remove JP1
for remote sensor
Type 24
Triac
control
External relay or spring return actuator
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
On/Off
damper
*JP4 Installed = Two pipe
Uninstalled = Four pipe
Type 24
Typical Wiring for On/Off Control
TC158 (2H/1C)
Optional remote probe
All low voltage
connections
Typical Wiring for On/Off Control
Fan
24 VAC
transformer
2nd heat output
Demand output
Setback input
1
2
3
4

5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Remove JP1
for remote sensor
Type 24
External relay or
spring return actuator
Triac
Triac
control
1st heat output
1st cool output
*JP4 Installed = Two pipe
Uninstalled = Four pipe Type 24
Off Switch Open
On Switch Closed
DA (N.O.)**
RA (N.O.)** °C ON/OFF ON/OFF 60/85°F (15/29°C)
RA (N.C.)** (only used when #4 is off) DA (N.C.)** (only used when #5 is off)
°F Modulating 3-Wire Modulating 3-Wire 50/90°F (10/32°C)
Control Function
#1: Heating action #2: Cooling action #3: Temp display
#4: Heating signal #5: Cooling signal #6: Unocc setpoints
T158 Program Switch Settings
Dip Switch
123456
OFFO N
* If the changeover probe is used on a cold pipe, the control is as shown above on the outputs. If the
changeover probe is on a hot pipe,
it reverses the action of the cooling
output above. Heating is disabled.
** Refers to valve or damper position
Notes: 1. Units have a three-minute warm up.
2. Cycle power after dip switches are
changed.
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
Fan HI*
N/C
N/C
All low voltage
connections
1
2
3
4

5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Triac
Triac
control
N/C
N/C
Fan HI*
N/C
N/C
Auto/ON
*HI fan speed required
acc. cover C158FAOH
Auto/ON
Low voltage
Low voltage
*HI fan speed required
acc. cover C158FA OH
N/C = no connection
T158 WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
PART NUMBER CONTROL OUTPUTS USER CONTROL 2 PIPE / 4 PIPE
NEW
MODEL
OLD
MODEL
PROPORTIONAL
4-20 mA/0-10V
FLOATING
TRIAC
ON/OFF
TRIAC
HEAT PUMP
TRIAC
DAMPER
OCC/UNOCC
DEMAND
OUTPUT
FAN^
SWITCHING
SYSTEM MODE
SWITCHING
CHANGE OVER
PROBE INPUT
TA158-100^
TB158-100^
TC158-100^
TH158-100^
TA168-100^
--
ALL TB158
--
--
ALL TA168
--
--
--
--
1H/1C
--
1H/1C
--
--
--
1H/1C
[2H]/(1C)***
2H/1C
1H/1C
2nd Heating
--
--
--
1O/1B
--
1-Triac
--
--
1-Triac
--
(1-Triac)***
1-Triac
1-Triac
1-Triac
O/H/M/L*
O/H/M/L*
Auto/On**
Auto/On**
O/H/M/L*
Heating/Cooling/Auto/Off
Heating/Cooling/Auto/Off
Heating/Cooling/Auto/Off
Heating/Cooling/Auto/Off
Heating/Cooling/Auto/Off
Yes, 2 or 4 pipe
Yes, 2 or 4 pipe
No, 4 pipe only
No, 4 pipe only
Yes, 2 or 4 pipe
^ Changing the cover on T158 and T168 thermostats may change or eliminate the fan switching (See accessories C158-_ _). (New models only)
* O/H/M/L = Off/High/Medium/Low, 24-277V fan contacts, Off shuts down the thermostat with no display.
** Auto/On = Fan is automatically on during equipment demand or On always, 24 VAC low-voltage control. No O/H/M/L operation.
*** Alternate outputs based on DIP switch [4 heating] and (5 cooling). Switches 4 and 5 are independent. See TB158 wiring diagrams above depending on switch settings.
Note: All Triac outputs are 24 VAC with 24 VAC potential on disconnected terminals (open circuit condition).
RELATED PRODUCTS
65345 Thermostat base plate, 4.75” x 4.75”
CA158 Thermostat cover for TA158-100 without fan switch
CA158-FFN Thermostat cover for TA158-100 with fan off/on switch
CA168 Thermostat cover for TB168-100 with fan switch
CA168-FFN Thermostat cover for TB168-100 with fan off/on switch
CB158 Thermostat cover for TB158-100 without fan switch
CB158-FFN Thermostat cover for TB158-100 with fan off/on switch
CC158 Thermostat cover for TC158-100 with fan switch
CC158-FAOH Thermostat cover for TC158-100 with fan auto/on/high switch
CH158 Thermostat cover for TH158-100 without fan switch
CH158-FAO Thermostat cover for TH158-100 with fan auto/on switch
CH158-FHLA Thermostat cover for TH158-100 with fan high/low/auto switch

1440. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1372fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
FAN COIL THERMOSTAT WITH ADA-COMPLIANT DIGITAL DISPLAY
T170
Supply Voltage 24-277 VAC, ±10%, 50/60 Hz
Supply Current 45 mA
Sensor Type Built-in 10K thermistor Type II
Remote Sensor 10K thermistor Type II, acc. required
Output Control 6-SPST relays
H/C/Damper, Fan-L/M/H
Output Amps

Note: Combined load not to exceed
20A
Control Proportional plus Integral (PI)
Dead-band 3°F (1.6°C)
Setpoint 50° to 90°F (10° to 32°C), adjustable
Setback (H/C) 55° to 90°F (13° to 32°C), adjustable
8°F (4.4°C) minimum separation
Keypad Lockout All buttons disabled except setpoint
Display 1" x 1.5" backlit digital display room
temp., setpoint, system and fan
status
Display Offset ±9°F (5°C), in 1°F (0.5°C) increments
Button Controls
Up, Down Temperature select
System Heat/Cool/Auto/Off
Fan Control On/Off/Auto
Fan Speed Hi/Medium/Low, hold for °F/°C
Adjustments Service menu set up, 9 parameters
Enclosure Vinyl plastic for indoor use only
Switch Cycles 100,000 cycles
Termination 6" flying leads 18-14 AWG
Color White
Mounting Horizontal on wall. Screw direct or
4" x 4" back box
Operating Temperature 130°F (54°C) Maximum
Operating Humidity 98% RH non-condensing
Dimensions 4.4"H x 5.8"W x 1.4"D
(11.2 x 14.7 x 3.5 cm)
Weight 0.7 lb (0.32 kg)
Approvals UL, ULC, File# E50023 and ADA
compliant
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The T170 is specifically designed for 1H, 1C, on/off vent
damper and multi speed fan control applications. The large
ADA compliant backlit display shows temperature °F or
°C with a simple push of a button and indicates fan and
system status
. The T170 is powered from 24-277 volts with
direct-wired manual fan or auto-staging fan models. Remote
temper
ature sensor, pipe change over sensor, setback input
and occupancy sensor inputs are all standard
.
FEATURES
• 1H/1C and On-Off vent damper
• H/C/A/O system switching
• Fan switch Auto/On/Off
• L/M/H manual fan speed or fan auto staging models
• 24-277 VAC power
• Large backlit ADA compliant display/buttons
• Occupancy motion detector inputs
• Door switch or setback input
• Remote sensor and service alert input
• Change over sensor input
SPECIFICATIONS
T170-001
APPLICATION
Designed specifically for direct line-voltage or low voltage
wiring of fan coils used for heating and cooling, with fan and
damper controls
. Ideal for hotels, dormitories, retirement
centers, resorts, condos, cottages, schools, vestibule entrances, and so on
.
• Keypad lockout
• 2-pipe auto purge cycle
• 2-pipe or 4-pipe operation
• Setback from occupancy or clock
• Temperature or continuous set point display
• Temperature offset display
• Setpoint limits, H and C
• Fan off delay
• H/C setback selection
• Easy occupant switched °F or °C display
SB200-001SE200-001 SA200-001
Voltage RES LRA FLA HP
120 VAC 6.0 34.8 5.8 1/4
240 VAC 5.0 17.4 2.9 1/4
277 VAC 4.2 14.4 2.4 1/4

1441. fi˚ 1373THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
FAN COIL THERMOSTAT WITH ADA-COMPLIANT DIGITAL DISPLAY
T170
SETBACK
F
C SETPOINT
SYSTEM
AUTO
COOL
AUTO
FAN ON
OFF LOWMEDHI
HEAT
SYSTEM FAN SPEED
HOLD F/C
5.8
(14.73)
3.28
(8.33)
1.50
(3.81)
Wire
Way 4.4
(11.17)
1.25
(3.175)
Note: The cover snaps into place firmly, making occupant tampering difficult. Be sure to install jumpers, select
v oltage, and wire properly before snapping cover into place.
White/Black
Setback Input, JP3 remov ed.
Open = occupied, closed = unoccupied
Door Switch, JP3 installed.
Open when door is open.
Remote sensor probe, JP1 removed.
Service Alarm (Open = Normal),
JP1 installed. Circuit common
Pipe sensor
Occupancy detector
(Open = Occupied)
White/Yellow
White/Violet
White/Blue
White/Gray
Yellow L2 / NEUTRAL
Low voltage
THERMOS TAT
CONNECTIONS
Line voltage
L1
Blue
Cool
(Main output)
Red
White/Brown
White/Red
White/Orange
Brown
Black,14 AW G
Heat
(Secondary output)
Fan low
Fan medium
Fan high
Outside air
damper
T
T
T - Type 24 thermistor sensor
Note: Unused wires must
ha ve their ends
taped, as they may
ha ve live voltage
on them from the
thermostat.
T170
18 AWG (6" pigtails) 14 AWG
WIRING
INSTALLATION / JUMPERS
DIMENSIONS / MOUNTING
ORDERING INFORMATIONT
MODEL DESCRIPTION
T
A170-001
24-277V, H/C/Dpr thermostat with system, fan, and
three-speed manual fan switch
TB170-001 24-277V, H/C/Dpr thermostat with system, and fan
switch off/auto with three-speed auto staging fan
on demand every 2° (2° differential)
CAUTION:
SWITCH
CIRCUIT BOARD
In Cover
24V 110-
277V
JP4
JP4 JUMPER SELECTION
This jumper selects between 2-pipe
(jumper ON) and 4-pipe (jumper OFF)
operation. (Shipped OFF)
JP3 JUMPER SELECTION
This jumper is shipped normally open.
Placement of a jumper allows for
Occupancy Detection and Door Switch
Only Operation. (Shipped OFF)
JP1 JUMPER SELECTION
Removal of this jumper allows the
sensor to be located in a remote
location, or N.C. service alarm.
(Shipped ON)
VOLTAGE SELECTION SWITCH*
This switch must be placed in the
appropriate position prior to application
of power. (Shipped at 110-277V)
JP3
JP1
HIGH VOLTAGE - REMOVE POWER BEFORE SERVICING
2/4 PIPE
SELECTION
2-PIPE
JP4 ON
4-PIPE
JP4 OFF
WATER
TEMP
Cold
Cooling Only - DA
The fan will not cycle on
with a heat demand.
Cooling - DA Heating - RA
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Heating Only - RA
The fan will not cycle on
with a cool demand.
Heating Only - RA
The fan will not cycle on
with a cool demand.
Cold
Hot
Hot
MAIN
OUTPUT
SECONDA RY
OUTPUT
OUTPUT OPERATION
*Switch selection is as follows:
24V = 24 VAC; 110-277 V = 120, 240, or 277 VAC
*
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
680-243-6 Changeover thermostat with conduit fitting
AQS00661 24 VAC/VDC water sensor/switch 572
SA200-001 Ceiling 360-degree occupancy motion sensor,
24 VAC/VDC, form C contacts
SB200-001 Wall occupancy/motion sensor, 110-degree view,
24 VAC/VDC, form C contacts
SE200-001 Plunger style door switch
SE200-002 Magnetic door/window switch, N.C.-SPST
ST-R24S Changeover temperature sensor 1254
ST-S24E Remote room temperature sensor 1171

1442. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1374fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
PROGRAMMABLE FAN COIL THERMOSTAT
T180 SERIES
Supply Voltage 24-277 VAC, ±10%, 50/60 Hz
Supply Current 45 mA
Sensor Type Built-in 10K thermistor Type II
Remote Sensor 10K thermistor Type II, acc. required
Output Control 6-SPST relays
H/C/Damper, Fan-L/M/H
Output Loads

Note: Combined load not to exceed 20A
Control Proportional plus Integral (PI)
Dead-band 3°F, (1.6°C)
Setpoint 50° to 90°F (10° to 32°C), adjustable
Setback (H/C) 55° to 90°F (13° to 32°C), adjustable
8°F (4.4°C) minimum separation
Keypad Lockout All buttons disabled except setpoint
Display 1" x 1.5" backlit digital display Room
temp., setpoint, system and fan
status
Display Offset ±9°F (5°C), in 1°F (0.5°C) increments
Button Controls
Up, Down Temperature select
System Heat/Cool/Auto/Off
Fan Control On Hi-Med-Lo/Auto Hi-Med-Lo
Program Clock-°F/°C-Set-Copy-Hold
Adjustments Service menu set up, 9 parameters
Enclosure Vinyl plastic for indoor use only
Switch Cycles 100,000 cycles
Termination 6" flying leads 18-14 AWG
Color White
Mounting Horizontal on wall. Screw direct or
4" x 4" back box
Operating Temperature 130°F (54°C)
Operating Humidity 98% RH non-condensing
Dimensions 4.4"H x 5.8"W x 1.4"D
(11.2 x 14.7 x 3.5 cm)
Approvals UL Listed File #E50023, ULC,
and ADA compliant
Warranty 5 years
DESCRIPTION
The T180 Series is a 7-day, 4-event programmable FCU
thermostat. The large ADA compliant backlit display shows
temperature °F or °C with a simple push of a button and indicates fan and system status
. The T180 is powered from
24-277 volts with direct-wired manual fan or auto-staging fan models
. Remote temperature sensor, pipe changeover
sensor, setback input and occupancy sensor inputs are all standard
.
FEATURES
• 7-day, 4-event schedule
• 1H/1C and On-Off vent damper
• H/C/A/O system switching
• Fan switch Auto/On/Off
• L/M/H manual fan speed or fan staging models
• 24-277 VAC power
• Large backlit ADA compliant display/buttons
• Occupancy motion detector inputs
• Door switch or setback input
• Remote sensor and service alert input
• Change over sensor input
SPECIFICATIONS
T180-001APPLICATION
Designed specifically for direct high voltage or low voltage
wiring of fan coils used for heating and cooling, with fan and
damper controls
. Ideal for hotels, dormitories, retirement
centers, resorts, condos, cottages, schools, vestibule entrances, and so on
.
• Keypad lockout
• 2-pipe or 4-pipe operation
• Setback from occupancy or clock
• Temperature or continuous set point display
• Temperature offset display
• Setpoint limits, H and C
• Fan off delay
• H/C setback selection
• Easy occupant switched F or C display
SB200-001SE200-001 SA200-001
Voltage RES LRA FLA HP
120 VAC 6.0 34.8 5.8 1/4
240 VAC 5.0 17.4 2.9 1/4
277 VAC 4.2 14.4 2.4 1/4

1443. fi˚ 1375THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
CAUTION:
SWITCH
CIRCUIT BOARD
In Cover
24V 110-
277V
JP4
JP4 JUMPER SELECTION
This jumper selects between 2-pipe
(jumper ON) and 4-pipe (jumper OFF)
operation. (Shipped OFF)
JP3 JUMPER SELECTION
This jumper is shipped normally open.
Placement of a jumper allows for
Occupancy Detection and Door Switch
Only Operation. (Shipped OFF)
JP1 JUMPER SELECTION
Removal of this jumper allows the
sensor to be located in a remote
location, or N.C. service alarm.
(Shipped ON)
VOLTAGE SELECTION SWITCH*
This switch must be placed in the
appropriate position prior to application
of power. (Shipped at 110-277V)
JP3
JP1
HIGH VOLTAGE - REMOVE POWER BEFORE SERVICING
2/4 PIPE
SELECTION
2-PIPE
JP4 ON
4-PIPE
JP4 OFF
WATER
TEMP
Cold
Cooling Only - DA
The fan will not cycle on
with a heat demand.
Cooling - DA Heating - RA
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Heating Only - RA
The fan will not cycle on
with a cool demand.
Heating Only - RA
The fan will not cycle on
with a cool demand.
Cold
Hot
Hot
MAIN
OUTPUT
SECONDA RY
OUTPUT
OUTPUT OPERATION
*Switch selection is as follows:
24V = 24 VAC; 110-277 V = 120, 240, or 277 VAC
*
PROGRAMMABLE FAN COIL THERMOSTAT
T180 SERIES
SYSTEM FAN PROGRAM
White/Black
Setback Input, JP3 remov ed.
Open = occupied, closed = unoccupied
Door Switch, JP3 installed.
Open when door is open.
Remote sensor probe, JP1 removed.
Service Alarm (Open = Normal),
JP1 installed. Circuit common
Pipe sensor
Occupancy detector
(Open = Occupied)
White/Yellow
White/Violet
White/Blue
White/Gray
Yellow L2 / NEUTRAL
Low voltage
THERMOS TAT
CONNECTIONS
Line voltage
L1
Blue
Cool
(Main output)
Red
White/Brown
White/Red
White/Orange
Brown
Black,14 AW G
Heat
(Secondary output)
Fan low
Fan medium
Fan high
Outside air
damper
T
T
T - Type 24 thermistor sensor
Note: Unused wires must
ha ve their ends
taped, as they may
ha ve live voltage
on them from the
thermostat.
T170
18 AWG (6" pigtails) 14 AWG
WIRING
INSTALLATION / JUMPERS
DIMENSIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TA180-001 24-277V, H/C/Dpr thermostat with system, fan, and
three-speed manual fan switch
TB180-001 24-277V, H/C/Dpr thermostat with system, and fan switch off/auto with three-speed auto staging fan on demand every 2° (2° differential)
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
680-243-6 Changeover thermostat with conduit fitting
SA200-001 Ceiling 360-degree occupancy motion
sensor, 24 VAC/VDC, form C contacts
SB200-001 Wall occupancy/motion sensor, 110-degree
view, 24 VAC/VDC, form C contacts
SE200-001 Plunger style door switch
SE200-002 Magnetic door/window switch, N.C.-SPST
ST-R24S Changeover temperature sensor 1253
ST-S24E Remote room temperature sensor 1171

1444. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1376fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Cool
Off
Heating
Cooling
Temp Inc
Temp Dec
Temp Dec
Temp Inc
1°F 1°F
Heat
On
Setpoint
Heat
Off
TA155-047
Cool
On
{
{
TB155-048
1°F 1°F 2°F
Heat
On
4°F Deadband
Cool
Off
Cool
On
Temp Dec
Temp Inc
Setpoint
Heat
Off
Manual switchover
TA167
°F Temperature Increase
Cooling
TB3-2
0 VDC
10 VDC
Setpoint
Auto switchover
Heating
TB3-1
0°F-3° -2° -1° 0.8°F 2°1° 3°
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PECO LINE AND LOW VOLTAGE TWO-POSITION AND PROPORTIONAL THERMOSTATS
T155 AND T167 SERIES
T155
Supply Voltage 24-277 VAC
Supply Current 25 mA @ 24 VAC
Output Capacity 10 VA @ 24 VAC
20 VA @ 120-277 VAC
Control Type Two position
Differential 1°F (0.5°C)
Deadband 4°F (2.2°C) (TB155 only)
T167 Supply Voltage
24 VAC
Supply Current 25 mA
Control Type Proportional
Proportional Band 2°F (1°C)
Control Output 0-10 VDC, 1 kΩ min
Deadband
0-10V actuator 0°F (possible H and C output ON)
2-10V actuator 0.8°F (0.44°C)
General Fan/System Switch Rating

24 VA @ 24 VAC
125 VA @ 120-277 VAC
Setpoint 50° to 90°F (10° to 32°C)
Operating Temperature 32° to 130°F (0° to 55°C)
Construction Flame-retardant PVC
Color Cool gray
Weight 0.28 lb (0.13 kg)
Approvals UL Listed File #E50023, CE
Warranty 5 years
2.75
(6.99)
in
(cm)
Two Mounting Slots
0.16 x 0.36
(0.41 x 0.91)
0.5 (1.27)
Opening
for Wiring
0.34 (0.86)
2.1 (5.33)
3.3 (8.38)
4.5 (11.43)
1.0
(2.54)
DESCRIPTION
The T155 Series is a general-purpose, electronic, two-
position line-voltage and low-voltage thermostat. The T167
Series is a 0 to 10 VDC proportional heating/cooling low voltage thermostat
. Both are designed for a variety of two-
and four-pipe, heating, and cooling applications. Both manual
and automatic changeover models include a provision for a remote thermistor temperature sensor
.
FEATURES
• Electronic design performance
• Two-position and Proportional models
• Remote sensor capability
• Fan and system switching models
• °F scale standard
• °C or warmer/cooler dials available
• Setpoint stops available
SEQUENCE GRAPHS
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
TB155-048
Two-position
TA167-007
Proportional

1445. fi˚ 1377THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
PECO LINE AND LOW VOLTAGE TWO-POSITION AND PROPORTIONAL THERMOSTATS
T155 AND T167 SERIES
CONNECTIONS
TB3
1 Heat
2 Cool
3 System Switched Output
CONNECTIONS
TB1
4 L2 or Neutral
(System and Fan)
3 No Connection
2 Remote Sensor
1 Remote Sensor
TB1
TB2
TB3
CONNECTIONS TB2 1 Stat & VLV L1 (Hot) 2 High 3 Med 4 Low 5 Fan L1 (Hot)
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
TB1
TB3
JP1*
T155
CLG
VLV
L2 or
Neutral
T155 Terminal Identification
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
Htg
Clg
TB1
TB3
TB155 (changeover)
Htg/Clg
Vlv
* Remove JP1
for remote
sensor
* Remove JP1
for remote
sensor
L2 or Neutral
Remote
sensor
Remote
sensor
HTG
VLV
Stat and Valve L1 (24-277 VAC)
Hi Med Low
Fan L1
Fan L2
JP1*
JP1*
TB2 System switch not off^
N.C. valves
N.C. valve
^Connect TB3-3 to TB2-5 for fan on during system on
25'
(7.6m)
max
25'
(7.6m)
max
680-243-6
Changeover stat
(pipe mount)
** Stat L1 voltage present on wiring
**
1
2
3
4
5
Stat and Valve L1(24-277 VAC)
Hi
Med
Low
Fan L1
L2
TB2 System switch not off^
** Stat L1 voltage present on wiring
**
*
All connections
potentially High voltage
Shown
sys.
off
Shown sys. off
* Remove JP1
for remote
sensor
^Connect TB3-3 to TB2-5 for fan on during system on
T155 WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
PART NUMBER CONTROL OUTPUTS USER CONTROL OPTIONAL SENSORS COVERS
NEW
MODEL
OLD KELE
MODEL
PROPORTIONAL
0-10 VDC
ON/OFF
TRIAC
FAN ^
SWITCHING
SYSTEM MODE ^
SWITCHING
TWO PIPE
CHANGEOVER
TA155-047
^
TB155-048^
TA167-006^
TA167-007^
All TA155-043
All TB155-047
--
--
--
--
1H and 1C
1H or 1C
1H or 1C
1H and 1C
--
--
H/M/L*
H/M/L*
None
H/M/L*
Htg/Off/Clg**
On/Off**
None
Htg/Off/Clg**
None, manual only
Yes, requires C/O
^^ stat
Yes, requires C/O^^ stat
None, manual only
horz. & ve rt.
horz. & ve rt.
vertical
vertical
^ Changing the cover on T155 and T167 thermostats may eliminate the fan and system sw itching (See accessories C155-_ _). (New models only)
^^ Must use a changeover thermostat such as the 680-243-6. * H/M/L = High/Medium/Low, 24-277 VAC fan contacts, Off is wired through the system sw itch and shuts down the thermostat.
** Fan is off when system switch is Off, 24-277 VAC fan control.
Note: All Triac outputs are 24-277 VAC with vo ltage potential in an open circuit.
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
TB1
TB3
JP1*
TA167-007, H or C
TA167-006 w/o TB2, H and C
HTG
VLV
T167 Terminal Identification
TA167-006 (changeover)
HTG/CLG
VLV
* Remove JP1
for remote
sensor
* Remove JP1
for remote
sensor
*
Remote
sensor
CLG
VLV
Hi Med Low
Fan L1 (24-277 VAC)
Fan L2 (24-277 VAC)
JP1*
JP1*
TB2
N.C. valves
N.C. valve
25'
(7.6m)
max
680-243-6
Changeover stat
CONNECTIONS (Low voltage)
TB1
4 24 VAC, Hot
3 24 VAC, Common
2 Remote Probe
1 Remote Probe
CONNECTIONS (Low voltage)
TB3
2 Cool
1 Heat
CONNECTIONS (High voltage)
TB2
1 High
2 Med
3 Low
4 L1
2 1
24 VAC
0-10 VDC
0-10 VDC
4 3 2 1
TB1
TB3
2 1
*
Remove JP1
for remote
sensor
*
Remote
sensor
25'
(7.6m)
max
24 VAC 0-10 VDC (C)
0-10 VDC (H)
C H
C H
T167 WIRING
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
65170 Warmer/cooler setpoint dial
65345 Thermostat base plate, 4.75" x 4.75"
65410 10°-34°C setpoint dial
65860 Setpoint range stop tabs, 2°F increments
680-243-6 Changeover thermostat with conduit fitting
68671 Remote sensor for T155
CA155 Thermostat cover for TA155-047, without fan or system switch, vertical only
CA155-HOC Thermostat cover for TA155-047, with system H/O/C switch and no fan switch, vertical only
CA167 Thermostat cover for TA167, without fan or system switch
CA167-HOC Thermostat cover for TA167-007, with system H/O/C switch and no fan switch
CB155 Thermostat cover for TB155-048, without fan or system switch, vertical only
CB155-SNF Thermostat cover for TB155-048, with system On/Off switch and no fan switch, vertical only
KTR24 Remote room thermistor sensor 1169
ST-U24 10K Ω Universal sensor with box 1228

1446. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1378fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
BULB THERMOSTATS
A19, A28, A319, A419 SERIES
Voltage
Power
Setpoint Adjust
Sensor
Ambient Temp
Differential
Dimensions
Approvals
Weight
Warranty
None required
None required
Screwdriver slot or knob (concealed av ailable)
Liquid-filled bulb and capillary
Typical 140°F (60°C), strap-on 290 °F (143°C)
x2, x3, x4 multiplier from min differential
4.5"H x 2.2"W x 2.0"D (11.43 x 5.59 x 5.08 cm)
UL Listed File #E6688, CSA
1.2 lb (0.55 kg)
1 year
A19/A28 A319 A419
120/208/240 VAC 50/60 Hz
-30° to 140°F (-34° to 60°C)
1° to 30°F (0.5° to 17°C)
5.0"H x 2.4"W x 2.4"D (12.70 x 6.10 x 6.10 cm)
1.8 VA 1.8 VA
Dial Buttons and 3/8" display
Thermistor PTC
UL Listed File #E27734, CSA
1.75 lb (0.75 kg)
1 year 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The A19 Series is a single stage, heating or cooling, SPDT
temperature control that uses a liquid-filled sensing element
and capillary
. The unit has an exposed or concealed set point
dial with adjustable differential, and it will switch line voltages.
The A28 Series is a two stage, heating or cooling, w/2-SPDT
temperature control that uses a liquid-filled sensing element and capillary
. The unit has an exposed or concealed set point
dial with adjustable differential, and it will switch line voltages.
The A319 Series is a single stage, heating or cooling, SPDT
temperature control that uses a Type 21 thermistor sensor.
The unit uses a set point dial and oper
ates on 120 VAC or
240 VAC with a wide adjustable differential
. A separate LED
indicates relay operation.The A419 Series is a single stage,
heating or cooling, SPDT temperature control that uses a PTC sensor
. This unit features a digital display and buttons
to adjust the set point differential, setback temperature, anti- short cycle delay, and failsafe control
. The unit operates on
120 or 240 VAC and a 3/8" (0.95 cm) display with H/C,
°F /°C and setback indication. A separate LED indicates relay
operation.
Action on increase of temperature
A28 has two sets of contacts
Y2
B
R
X4
X3
X2
Min
Differential
adjustment
multiplier
(if min, diff = 3)
(if X2, diff = 6)
Cutout
adjust
screw
Setpoint shaft
with slot for knob
or concealed
with plug
3
1
heat
Y
B
R
3
2
1
1/2" Knockout
Probe
included
240
120
AC
(All other settings are
through the keyboard)
(+) BIN
(–) COM
(+) SEN
P5
Heat/Cool
Cut In/Out
Keypad
Unlock
P4
NC
NO
C
COM
Differential
Potentiometer
Jumper Block
Position
Heating
Cooling
Relay Energized
LED Indicator
1/2" Knockout
Probe
included
240
120
NC
NO
C
COM
A319 A419
FUNCTION JUMPER SETTING JUMPER
LABEL POSITION *
Cooling/ P4-Heat Cooling* Remo ved
Heating Heating Installed
Setpoint P4-Cut-out Cut-in* Removed
Cut-out Installed
Keypad Lock P5-Unlock Locked Remo ved
Unlocked* Installed
*Factory settings
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
A319
A19DAC-1 (with
convertible knob)
A19BAC-1
(with convertible
concealed plug)
A419
A19ABC-24

1447. fi˚ 1379THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
BULB THERMOSTATS
A19, A28, A319, A419 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
A19BAC-1C
*A19ABA-40
A19ABC-4C
A19ABC-24
A19ABC-36
SINGLE-STAGE SPACE AND REMOTE BULB THERMOSTAT
Model Switch
Action
Range
°F (°C)
Diff °F (°C)
Adjustable
Bulb and
Capillary
Bulb
Well # *
Range
Adjuster
Electrical Ranges
Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 240
A19ACA-14
Note: A19DAC-1 not for use as a limit control
SPDT
SPST
1
SPDT
SPDT
SPDT
-30 to 100
(-34 to 38)
-30 to 100
(-34 to 38)
-30 to 100
(-34 to 38)
-30 to 100
(-34 to 38)
Manual
reset
3/8" x 4"
6' cap
3/8" x 4"
6' cap
3/8" x 4"
8' cap
3/8" x 4"
20' cap
WEL14A-602R
WEL14A-602R
WEL14A-602R
WEL14A-602R
3 to 12
(1.7 to 6.7)
3 to 12
(1.7 to 6.7)
3 to 12
(1.7 to 6.7) Screwdriver
slot
Screwdriver
slot
AC full load amp16.0
9.2 8.0
50 to 130
(10 to 55)
3.5 to 14
(1.9 to 8.0)
WEL14A-603R Knob
AC locked rotor amp 96.0 55.2 48.0
AC full load amp16.0 9.2 8.0
AC locked rotor amp 96.0 55.2 48.0
3/8" x 5"
8' cap
Convertible
Convertible
Noninductive or
resistance load amp
(not lamp loads)
22A
120-277 VAC
MANUAL RESET - REMOTE LIQUID BULB THERMOST AT
SPST
Open
Low
A319ABC24-1
A319ABC12-1
A419ABC-1C
SPST
SPST
SPDT
-30 to 212
(-34 to 100)
-20 to 100
(-30 to 38)
100 to 220
(38 to 105)
1 to 30
(0.5 to 17.0)
Model Switch
Action
Range
°F (°C)
Diff °F (°C)
Adjustable
Bulb and Capillary
Range
Adjuster
Electrical Ranges
Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 240
Knob
Noninductive
AC full load amp16.0 9.2 8.0
AC locked rotor amp 96.0 55.0 48.0
15.0 10.0 10.0
1 to 30
(0.5 to 17.0)
1 to 30
(1.0 to 30.0)
Knob
Type 21 thermistor included
8' (2.4 m) Lead
Type 21 thermistor included
8' (2.4 m) Lead
PTC sensor included
6.6' (2m) Lead
0.25 diameter
Buttons
with digital
display
Horsepower 1.0 1.0 0.5
SPDT
100 to 240
(38 to 116)
Knob
Model Switch
Action
Range
°F (°C)
Diff °F (°C)
Fixed
Mounting to Coil
Range
Adjuster
Electrical Ranges
Motor Ratings VAC 120 240
AC full load amp 10.0 6.0
AC locked rotor amp
Pilot duty - 125 VA, 24-600 VAC
60.0 36.0
A19DAC-110
(5.6)
Direct clamp-on strap
* Bulb well not supplied
CHANGEOVER STRAP-ON LIQUID BULB THERMOST AT (AQUASTAT)
SOLID STATE SENSOR THERMOSTAT
A28AA-4C
A28AA-29C
A28MA-2C
A28AJ18C
TWO-STAGE SPACE AND REMOTE BULB THERMOSTAT
Model Switch
Action
Range
°F (°C)
Diff °F (°C)
Adjustable
Bulb and
Capillary
Bulb
Well # *
Range
Adjuster
Electrical Ranges
Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 240
2-SPDT
2-SPDT
2-SPDT
2-SPDT
30 to 110
(-1 to 43)
40 to 120
(4 to 49)
20 to 80
(-7 to 28)
1.4" x 2.25"
2' coil
3/8" x 4"
6' cap
3/8" x 5"
10' cap Space
Thermostat
NEMA 3R
WEL14A603R
WEL14A-603R
3.5 (1.9)
3 interstage
5 (2.8)
8 interstage
1.5 (0.8)
2 to 7 adj
interstage
ConvertibleAC full load amp16.0
9.2 8.0
-30 to 100
(-34 to 38)
5 (2.8)
2 to 7 adj
interstage
WEL14A-602R ConvertibleAC locked rotor amp 55.2
9.2
48.0
8.0
3/8" x 4"
8' cap
Screwdriver
slot
Convertible
Noninductive or
resistance load amp
(not lamp loads)
Noninductive or
resistance load amp
(not lamp loads)
22A
120-277 VAC
30 to 110
(-1 to 43)
1.4" x 2.25"
coil Space
Thermostat3.5 fixed
(1.9)
Convertible
A19ADB-1C
100 to 240
(38 to 116)
Manual
reset
3/8" x 3.5"
6' cap
WEL14A-602R Knob
AC full load amp10.0— 6.0
AC locked rotor amp 60.0—36.0
SPST
Open
High
Model Switch
Action
Range
°F (°C)
Diff °F (°C)
Adjustable
Bulb and
Capillary
Bulb
Well # *
Range
Adjuster
Electrical Ranges
Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 240
96.0
10.0
*A19ABA-40 contacts open on temperature decrease.
ACCESSORIES PAGE
PLT344-1R DIN rail end clips
SHL10A-603R Sun shield for A99 sensor for outdoor sunny locations
TE-6001-1 Holder for duct sensor 1391
TE-6001-2 Holder for OSA sensor 1391
WEL14A-602R 4-15/16 COPPER BULB WELL
WEL14A-603R 5-13/16 COPPER BULB WELL

1448. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1380fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
HERMOSTATS & CON
Mount sensing element horizontally for proper measurement.
Typically mounted downstream of a coil with capillary
exposed to all areas likely to encounter low temperatures
A11
Series
Top of Duct
HERMOSTATS & CON
SPST - Normally closed
opens on decrease
in temperature
A11 Series
2
1
ORDERING INFORMATION
JOHNSON CONTROLS LOW TEMPERATURE LIMIT CONTROL
A11 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The A11 Series Low-Temperature Limit Controls
incorporate a 20' (6 m), vapor-charged sensing element. The
A11 Series reacts to the coldest 16" (40.6 cm) section of
the control's sensing element. It is suitable for monitoring the
trailing face of a coil for freeze protection.
FEATURES
• Snap-acting contacts
• External temperature scale
• Easy set point adjustment
• Unaffected by ambient temperature at the control and
4' (1.2m) capillary
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A11A-1 Manual reset low-temperature limit control
A11B-1 Auto reset low-temperature limit control
INSTALLATION
Sensing Element 20' (6 m) of 1/8" copper tube
Capillary 4' (1.2 m)
Switch SPST, N.C.
Action N.C. opens on decrease in temp
Switch Rating 16A @ 120 VAC, 9.2A @ 208 VAC,
8A @ 240 VAC
Pilot Duty 125 VA @ 24-277 VAC
Range (Cut Out) 35° to 45°F (2° to 7°C)
Setpoint Adjust Slot screwdriver
Differential
A11A 12°F (6.7°C) manual reset
A11B 12°F (6.7°C) auto reset
Sensor R-134A vapor filled
Operating Temperature 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C)
Element 250°F (121°C) maximum
Dimensions 3"H x 5.4"W x 2.4"D
(7.6 x 13.7 x 6 cm)
Weight 1.75 lb (0.79 kg)
Approvals UL listed, File#SA516; CSA certified,
File#LR948
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
APPLICATION
• Lo
A11A-1
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
CC-1G-K Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip 1391
ES1051 Freeze spray, 8 fl oz 1390
M-648K Copper-clad capillary mounting clip 1391

1449. fi˚ 1381THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Line Line
M2 M1
Control
Circuit
Auxiliary
Contacts
A70 Series
Low Limit - Action on temperature decrease
High Limit - Action on temperature increase
Mount sensor horizontally for proper measurement .Typically
mounted downstream of a coil with capillary exposed to all
areas likely to encounter low or high temperatures as required .
M-648-K
Capillary
Supports
(order separately)
Max Bulb
Temp
˚F (˚C)
ORDERING INFORMATION
LOW & HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT CONTROLS
A70 SERIES
MODEL
A70GA-1*
Low Limit
Open Low
15 to 55*
(-10 to 13)
15 to 55*
(-10 to 13)
35 to 80
(1.7 to 27)
100 to 170
(38 to 77)
Open Low
Open Low
Open High
A70HA-1*
Low Limit
A70HA-2
Low Limit
A70KA-1
High Limit
TEMP
RANGE
°F (°C)
20' of 1/8"
(6m of 0.32 cm)
OD tubing
20' of 1/8"
(6m of 0.32 cm)
OD tubing
3/8" x 3"
(0.95 x 7.6 cm)
6' (1.9m)cap
3/8" x 10"
(0.95 x 25.4 cm)
6' (1.9m) cap
BULB/
CAPILLARY
Screwdriver
Slot
Screwdriver
Slot
AC Full Load
Amp
16.0 9.2 8.0 – 6.0 3.3 3.0 –
16.0 9.2 8.0 7.2 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0AC Non-
Inductive Amp
Screwdriver
Slot
Screwdriver
Slot
Pilot Duty
*The low cut-out stop is set and sealed at 35°F (1.6°C). The control responds to the lowest temperature along any 1' (30.5 cm) section of the 20' (6m) element.
125 VA, 24-600 VAC
57.5 VA, 120-300 VDC
Approvals UL Listed File #SA516
RANGE
ADJUSTER
MOTOR
RATINGS
(VAC)
LINE-M2 (Main)
120 208 240 277
ELECTRICAL RATING
LINE-M1 (Auxiliary)
Auto
5 (2.8)
Manual
Reset
Manual
Reset
Manual
Reset
RESET
°F (°C)
400
(260)
400
(260)
250
(121)
240
(116)
MAX
BULB
TEMP
°F (°C)
120 208 240 277
SWITCH
ACTION
(Main contacts)
LINE-M2
DESCRIPTION
The A70 Series heavy-duty temperature-limit controls
incorporate a vapor charged sensing element. A70G, A70H,
and A70K have a four-wire, two-circuit contact block that contains two isolated sets of contacts
. The contacts are
designed to transfer at set point so that when the main contact opens, the auxiliary contact closes simultaneously
.
T
ypical applications include shutdown of a ventilation system
and BAS alarm indication upon low or high temperature
.
FEATURES
• Automatic or manual reset models
• Long-life, snap-acting contacts
• Easy set point adjust
• One-year warranty
Line Line
M2 M1
Control
Circuit
Auxiliary
Contacts
A70 Series
Low Limit - Action on temperature decrease
High Limit - Action on temperature increase
Mount sensor horizontally for proper measurement .Typically mounted downstream of a coil with capillary exposed to all areas likely to encounter low or high temperatures as required .
M-648-K
Capillary
Supports
(order separately)
Max Bulb
Temp
˚F (˚C)
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A70GA-1 Low-limit temperature control, automatic reset, 20' (6m) element
A70HA-1 Low-limit temperature control, manual reset, 20' (6m) element
A70HA-2 Low-limit temperature control, manual reset, 3" (7.6 cm) element, 6' (1.9m) capillary
A70KA-1 High-limit temperature control, manual reset, 10" (25.4 cm) element, 6' (1.9m) capillary
INSTALLATION
SPECIFICATIONS
A70HA-1
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
CC-1G-K Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip 1391
ES1051 Freeze spray, 8 fl oz 1390
M-648-K Copper-clad capillary mounting clip 1391

1450. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1382fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
LOW LIMIT TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS
L480 SERIES
Sensing Element 20' (6m) element, 1/8" dia., no bulb,
controller operates at coldest point
Switch action
L480B SPDT, automatic reset, makes R-B,
breaks R-W on temperature fall
L480G SPST, manual reset, breaks circuit
on temperature fall
L482A 2 SPST, manual reset, main switch
(M2) opens, aux. switch (M1) closes
on temperature fall
Switch Ratings See Table 1 and Table 2
Conduit Connection 7/8" (22mm) hole for 1/2" conduit
with 1-3/32" (28mm) knockout ring for
3/4" conduit
Setpoint Range
L480B, G 20° to 60°F (-5° to 15°C)
L482A 15° to 55°F (-9.4° to 13°C), with
setpoint stops minimum 34°F
Setpoint Adjustment Slotted screwdriver
Differential
L480B, G Non-adjustable, additive, fixed at
10°F (6°C)
L482A Non-adjustable, additive, fixed at 5°F
(3°C)
Operating Temperature
L480B, G -20° to 125°F (-11° to 52°C)
L482A 20° to 140°F (-7° to 60°C)
Maximum Element Temperature
L480B, G 225°F (107°C)
L482A 250°F (121°C)
Dimensions
L480B, G 3.3"H x 3.7"W x 2.3"D
(8.4 x 9.4 x 5.9 cm)
L482A 4.7"H x 3.9"W x 2.1"D
(11.9 x 10.1 x 5.3 cm)
Weight
L480B 1.5 lb (0.68 kg)
L480G 1.6 lb (0.73 kg)
L482A 2.3 lb (1.04 kg)
Approvals UL Listed File #E49725, Vol. No. 2,
dated 02-09-66;
Guide No
. SDFY2
CSA Cer
tified Listing G, File No
.
LR1620;
Guide No
. 400-E-0
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The L480 Series low limit controllers operate electric dampers, valves and compressor or fan motors to provide temperature or limit control of air conditioning systems and refrigeration units
. The L480B has an SPDT switch and
automatically resets; the L480G has an SPST switch that opens on a fall in temperature and requires manual reset
.
The
L482A has two SPST switches and manual reset; the
main switch opens, and the auxiliary switch closes, on a fall in temperature.
FEATURES
• Dual temperature scale plate provides both Fahrenheit
and Celsius readings
• No sensing bulb, the controller operates at the coldest
point (1 foot section) of the 20 ft. element for complete coverage
•
Dustproof and moisture proof enclosed switch for
trouble-free operation
• Horizontal or vertical mounting for installation flexibility
SPECIFICATIONS
L480B1239
APPLICATION
• Air handling unit coil freeze protection
• Freezer cabinets
• Display cases
• Beverage coolers
• Frost alarm for storehouses, orchards
L482A1004

1451. fi˚ 1383THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
LOW LIMIT TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS
L480 SERIES
L1 (HOT)
Alarm
Load
L2
L480B
R
B
W
L1 (HOT)
LoadL2
L480G L482A
L1
(HOT)
L2
TO BAS
INPUT OR
ALARM DEVISE
LINE 2 LINE 1
M2 M1
Load
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
L480B1239 Auto reset, SPDT, 20 ft
L480G1044 Manual reset, SPST, 20 ft
L482A1004 Manual reset, 2 SPST, 20 ft
TABLE 1: AMPERE RATINGS L480B, G
120 VAC 240 VAC
Full Load 10.2 6.5
Locked Rotor 61.2 39.0
DC Rating: 0.2A @ 120 VDC, 0.1 A @ 240 VDC
Pilot Duty: 125 VA
TABLE 2: AMPERE RATINGS L482A
120 VAC 208 VAC 240 VAC 277 VAC
Switch M2 (Main)
Full Load 16.0 9.2 8.0 -
Locked Rotor 96.0 55.2 48.0 -
Non-inductive 16.0 9.2 8.0 7.2
Switch M1 (Auxillary)
Full Load 6.0 3.3 3.0 -
Locked Rotor 36.0 19.8 18.0 -
Non-inductive 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0
Pilot Duty (both poles): 125 VA @ 24 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA @ 120 to 300 VDC
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
CC-1G-K Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip 1391
ES1051 Freeze spray, 8 fl oz 1390
M-648-K Copper-clad capillary mounting clip 1391

1452. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1384fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Install capillary element in a horizontal
serpentine pattern across the duct on
the downstream side of the coil so it is
exposed to areas where low tempera-
tures will occur. Do not kink or apply
excessive force to the capillary element.
Capillary
Duct
Low
Limit
TSA TF142
2 4
1
22 24 12 14
21
11
Switch action on
decrease in temperature
(Contact 1 to 4 Opens;
Contact 1 to 2 Closes
)
Switch action on
decrease in temperature
(Contacts 11-14 and 21-24 Open;
Contacts 11-12 and 21-22 Close)
ORDERING INFORMATION
LOW-LIMIT TEMPERATURE CONTROL
TSA, TF142
DESCRIPTION
Models TSA and TF142 provide low-limit temperature control
in operating dampers, valves, compressors, or fan motors
in HVAC systems
. Manual and automatic reset models are
available with SPDT or DPDT switching action. Models TSA
and TF142 respond to the lowest temperature sensed along any 1' (0
.3m) section of the capillary element.
FEATURES
• SPDT and DPDT models
• Manual and automatic reset models
• Easy set point adjustment
• Manual test lever
• One year warranty
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TSA-DOP Low-limit temperature control, SPDT, manual reset
TSA-COP Low-limit temperature control, SPDT, automatic reset
TF142-SODP20 Low-limit temperature control, DPDT, manual reset
TF142-SODP06 Low-limit temperature control, DPDT, manual reset, 6 ft cap
TF142-SOAP20 Low-limit temperature control, DPDT, automatic reset
TF142-SOAP06 Low-limit temperature control, DPDT, automatic reset, 6 ft cap
INSTALLATION
SPECIFICATIONS
TSA
TF142
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
CC-1G-K Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip 1391
ES1051 Freeze spray, 8 fl oz 1390
M-648-K Copper-clad capillary mounting clip 1391
Model TSA-DOP TSA-COP TF142-SODP20/SODP06 TF142-SOAP20/SOAP06
Reset Manual Automatic Manual Automatic
Setpoint Range 35° to 68°F (2° to 20°C) 34° to 70°F (1° to 21°C)
Differential 4.5°F (2.5°C) fixed 4.5°F (2.5°C) fixed
Switch Type SPDT, snap acting DPDT, snap acting
Contact Rating
Inductive 24 FLA, 144 LRA @ 120-240 VAC 2 hp @ 120
VAC; 3 hp @ 240 VAC Pilot duty 720 VA max @ 120-600
VAC 144 VA max @ 24 VAC
Inductive 14 FLA, 84 LRA @ 120 VAC; 12 FLA, 72 LRA @ 240 VAC 3/4
hp @ 120 VAC; 2 hp @ 240 VAC Pilot duty 720 VA max @ 120-600
VAC 144 VA max @ 24 VAC
Sensing Element Vapor-filled copper capillary, tin-plated 5/64” (0.2 cm) x 20’ (609.6 cm), or 6’ (182.9 cm) TF Models 3/32” (0.2cm)
Operating Temperature
-60° to 160°F (-51° to 71°C) Sensing Element
300°F (149°C) max
-60° to 160°F (-51° to 71°C) Sensing Element
300°F (149°C) max
Dimensions 2.94”H x 3.34”W x 1.56”D (7.47 x 8.48 x 3.56 cm)3.63”H x 5.5”W x 2.63”D (9.21 x 13.97 x 6.67 cm)
Weight 1 lb (0.45 kg) 2.8 lb (1.3 kg)
Approvals UL and ULC listed, CE, File # E85974, E300881
Warranty 1 year
Accessories
M-648-K capillary mounting clip
(order separately)
Mounting clips supplied with each control

1453. fi˚ 1385THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
DUCT HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT
TC-105, TC-100
DESCRIPTION
Models TC-105 and TC-100 feature a helix bimetal element
that senses rapid increases in duct temperature, such as in
a fire, and operate an SPST switch that opens with a rise in
temperature
. A manual reset button will reactivate the TC-105
and TC-100 after the high-temperature condition has cleared.
FEATURES
• Low-cost duct high-temperature limit control
• Adjustable set point
• Manual reset
• UL listed
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TC-100-1A-3C Duct high-temperature limit with 11" (27.9 cm) element and adjustable setpoint
TC-105-1A-3C Duct high-temperature limit with 5" (12.7 cm) element and adjustable setpoint
0 .75 (1 .91)
Duct cut-out
hole
2 .19
(5 .56)
3 .16
(8 .03)
4 .0
(10 .16)
in
(cm)
2 .75 (6 .99)
0 .42
(1 .07)
1 .9 (4 .83)
0 .23 (0 .58)
Mounting
hole
0 .95 (2 .42)
0 .5 (1 .27)
Knockout
0 .5 (1 .27)
Knockout
Factory Set
@ 125°F
250
200
150
100
N .C . Contact
Screw Terminals
(opens on
temp rise)
WIRING DIMENSIONS
Contacts SPST N.C. mechanical latching
Electrical Capacity 9.8 full load amps @ 115 VAC 4.9
full load amps @ 230 VAC
Element Length 5” (12.7 cm) or 11” (27.9 cm)
Manual Reset Button External access
Setpoint Range 100° to 250°F (38° to 122°C) field
adjustab
le, factory set @125°F
(51
.6°C)
Differential 25°F (13.8°C) fixed
Weight
TC100 1 lb (0.48 kg)
TC105 0.75 lb (0.36 kg)
Approvals UL listed, File #MH7076
Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
TC-105-1A-3C

1454. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1386fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
NEMA 4X INDUSTRIAL CONTROL THERMOSTATS
TF115, TH109, AND TRF115 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Peco’s TF115-023, TH109-009, TRF115-005, and TRF115-
007 industrial control thermostats offer reliable control in
industrial, agricultural, and commercial applications
. The
TH109-009 has 40-100°F range with a molded plastic enclosure and stainless steel hardware
. The TF115-023
has a low mass, high surface area stainless steel coiled sensor which provides rapid temperature response
. Both the
TRF115-005
and TRF115-007 both have remote bulbs with
capillary tubes
. All of these thermostats come with SPDT
switches and are NEMA 4X, UL listed, and are suitable for use under NEC article 547
.
FEATURES
• Good f •
Rugged, weather resistant NEMA 4X enclosure
• Tolerates moist conditions
• One SPDT switch on T115 models
• Two SPDT switches on TH109 models
TH109-009 TF115
TRF115-005
RATINGS
Voltage Rating FLA LR Non-Inductive Pilot Duty
120 VAC 16.0 VA 80.0 A 25.0 A 125 VA
208 VAC 13.2 VA 66.0 A 25.0 A 125 VA
240 VAC 12.0 VA 60.0 A 25.0 A 125 VA
277 VAC 10.0 VA 50.0 A 22.0 A 125 VA
ORDERING INFORMATION AND SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Number
Temperature
Range
Differential Switch Action Bulb Enclosure
Rating
Warranty Dimensions Weight,
Standard
Approvals
TF115-001 40° to 110°F
(4° to 43°C)
Fixed 3°F
(-16°C)
Single pole/Double
throw (SPDT)
Coiled Air-
Stainless Steel
NEMA 4X 2 Years 3.1"W x 6.5"H x 2.5"D
(7.9 x 16.5 x 6.4 cm)
2.1 lb
(.49 kg)
UL, CSA
TF115-023 -30° to 100°F
(-34° to 38°C)
Fixed 6°F
(-14°C)
Single pole/Double
throw (SPDT)
Coiled Air-
Stainless Steel
NEMA 4X 3 Years 3.1"W x 6.5"H x 2.5"D
(7.9 x 16.5 x 6.4 cm)
2.1 lb
(0.49 kg)
UL, CSA
TRF115-005 0° to 120°F
(-17° to 49°C)
Fixed 3°F
(-16°C)
Single pole/Double
throw (SPDT)
5 foot Stainless
Remote
NEMA 4X 4 Years 3.1"W x 6.5"H x 2.5"D
(7.9 x 16.5 x 6.4 cm)
2.1 lb
(0.49 kg)
UL, CSA
TRF115-007-30° to 100°F
(-34° to 38°C)
Fixed 6°F
(-14°C)
Single pole/Double
throw (SPDT)
8 foot Copper
Remote
NEMA 4X 5 Years 3.1"W x 6.5"H x 2.5"D
(7.9 x 16.5 x 6.4 cm)
2.1 lb
(0.49 kg)
UL, CSA
TH109-009 40° to 100°F
(4° to 38°C)
3°F (-16°C)/
Stage
2-Single pole/Double
throw (SPDT)
Coiled Air-
Stainless Steel
NEMA 4X 6 Years 3.5"W x 7.3"H x 4.9"D
(8.9 x 18.5 x 12.4 cm)
2.1 lb
(0.49 kg)
UL, CSA

1455. fi˚ 1387THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
NEMA 4X INDUSTRIAL CONTROL THERMOSTATS
TF115, TH109, AND TRF115 SERIES
TH109-009
VIOLET
BROWN
L1
BLUE
BLACK
CAN BE TIED TO A LOUVER
OR CURTAIN CONTROL
RED
PINK
HIGH COOL
LOW COOL
L2 OR NEUTRAL
TEMP RISE
VIOLET
BROWN
L1
BLUE
BLACK
RED
PINK
HIGH HEAT
LOW HEAT
L2 OR NEUTRAL
TEMP RISE
VIOLET
BROWN
L1
BLUE
BLACK
L1
REDPINK
FIRST STAGE COOL
SECOND STAGE COOL
L2 OR NEUTRAL
TEMP RISE
Two Stage Cooling
VIOLET
BROWN
L1
BLUE
BLACK
L1
RED
PINK
SECOND STAGE HEAT
FIRST STAGE HEAT
L2 OR NEUTRAL
TEMP RISE
Two Stage Heating
VIOLET
BROWN
L1
BLUE
BLACK
L1
RED
PINK
HEATING LOAD
COOLING LOAD
L2 OR NEUTRAL
TEMP RISE
Auto Changeover Contro l
1 Heat/1 Cool with 3°F dead band
Two Speed Heating
Two Speed Cooling
Wiring Connections
Double pole, double
throw contacts
operate sequentially
with 3°F (1.7°C)
nominal separation on
temperature rise or fall.
TF115-001
TF115-023
TRF115-005
TRF115-007
WIRING

1456. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1388fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Dimensions in (cm)
TW155/255 6.87"H x 3.125"W x 3.375"D
(Not including knob)
(17.4 x 7.9 x 8.6 cm)
T631F/G 5"H x 6.5"W x 3"D
(12.7 x 16.5 x 7.6 cm)
Approvals
TW155/255 ETL Canada/USA
T631F/G UL listed File No. E4436 Vol. 1 Sec
UL Guide XAPX; CSA Certified File
No. LR1620 Guide No. 400-E-O;
Meets NEC Article 547-4
Maximum Operating Temperature
TW155/255 110°F (43°C)
T631F/G 145°F (63°C)
ORDERING INFORMATION
NEMA 4X RATED THERMOSTATS
T631F/G, TW155/255 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The T631F/G Series and the TW155/255 Series thermostats
have NEMA 4X enclosure ratings and provide line voltage
control of heating, cooling and ventilation systems in areas
that are subject to washdown such as barns, poultry and hog
houses, pump buildings and crop storage areas
.
L1 L1 L1
L1
L2
L2
L2
L2
Load Load Load Load
Black Black Black
Black
Black Black
TW155
Heating
TW255
Heating
TW155
Cooling
TW255
Cooling
Blue Blue
Blue
Blue Blue
Red RedRed
Red
Red
Switch makes black to
red on temperature fall.
Switch makes black to
red on temperature fall.
Switch makes black to
blue on temperature rise.
Switch makes black to
blue on temperature rise.
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TW155 SPDT, NEMA 4 Thermostat, external setpoint, 120 to 277 VAC rating
TW255 DPDT, NEMA 4 Thermostat, external setpoint, 120 to 277 VAC rating
T631F1068 SPDT, NEMA 4 Thermostat, internal setpoint, 24 to 240 VAC rating
T631F1084 SPDT, NEMA 4 Thermostat, external setpoint, 24 to 240 VAC rating
T631F1092 SPDT, NEMA 4 Thermostat, external setpoint, 120 to 240 VAC rating
T631G1059 SPDT (2), NEMA 4 Thermostat, external setpoint, 120 to 240 VAC rating
SPECIFICATIONS
T631F TW155
T631G
1
L1
(HOT)
L2
RB W
WBR
Power
Supply
1
Provide Disconnect Means And Overload
Protection As Required.
T631G Hookup For Heating And Cooling
(Or Ventilating) Control.
Heating
Equipment
Cooling or
Ventilating
Load
Add
Jumper
Wire
Fan Switch
Speed Change
Switch
R B W
2
Power
Supply
L1
(HOT)
L2
Heating
System
1
1
2
Provide Disconnect Means And Overload
Protection As Required.
Switch Makes R To B On Temperature Fall.
T631F Hookup For Heating Control
T631F
Contact Rating (A)
ModelSetpoint
Range
°F (°C)
Differential °F
(°C)
Ouput24 VAC
120
VAC
240
VAC
277
VAC
TW155External
40 to 110
(4 to 43)
FIXED 1 SPDT-
22 FLA
(3/4 HP)
22 FLA
(1.5HP)
22 FLA
(1.5HP)
TW255External
40 to 110
(4 to 43)
FIXED DPDT -
22 FLA
(3/4 HP)
22 FLA
(1.5 HP)
22 FLA
(1.5HP)
T631F1068Internal
35 to 100
(2 to 38)
FIXED 2 (1.1)
1 SPDT2 FLA
7.4 FLA
44 LRA
3.7 FLA
22 LRA
3 FLA
18 LRA
T631F1084External
35 to 100
(2 to 38)
FIXED 2 (1.1)
1 SPDT2 FLA
7.4 FLA
44 LRA
3.7 FLA
22 LRA
3 FLA
18 LRA
T631F1092External
35 to 100
(2 to 38)
FIXED 3.5 (1.9)1 SPDT
(1 HP)
-
16 FLA
96 LRA
8 FLA
48 LRA
-
T631G1059External
35 to 100
(2 to 38)
FIXED 2 (1.1)
Interstage 0 to 7 (0 to 4)
2 SPDT
(1 HP)
-
16 FLA
96 LRA
8 FLA
48 LRA
-

1457. fi˚ 1389THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
TWO POSITION ROOM THERMOSTATS
TC-1100 SERIES
Supply Voltage 24-240 VAC
Contacts
Cooling SPDT 3.0A @ 24/120V,
1.5A @ 240V
Heating SPDT 4.4A @ 24/120V,
2.2A @ 240V
Pilot Duty 40 VA @ 24V, 210 VA @ 120/240V
Control Type Two-position, on/off
Sensor Bimetal snap acting
Range Limits Dial stop pins
Differential 2°F (1°C)
Connections 6.0" (15.24 cm) leads, 14 AWG
Mounting Vertical, 2" x 4" (5.1 x 10.2 cm)
switch box
Dimensions 4.38"H x 2.86"W x 1.63"D
(11.13 x 7.26 x 4.14 cm)
Weight 0.8 lb (0.36 kg)
Approvals UL File #XAPX.E9429
Warranty 2 years

DESCRIPTION
The TC-1100 Series two-position, single-pole double-throw
room thermostat is for single-stage heating or single-stage
cooling
. The TC-1100 Series comes in three setpoint spans
to cover most any application: 55° to 85°F, 45° to 75°F, and 75° to 105°F
. The TC-1100 Series comes standard with
thermometer and set point as shown. It is also packaged with
cover plates for set point only or for blank cover.
FEATURES
• High and low voltage
• Thumbwheel set point
• UL listing
• Plates with set point or blank cover
• Fits standard single-gang switch box
TC-1100 Series
Orange-Brown makes on
temperature drop
L1
Orange
Red Brown
Temp
Drop
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TC-1101 Two-position SPDT H/C thermostat, setpoint 55° to 85°F
TC-1102 Two-position SPDT H/C thermostat, setpoint 45° to 75°F
TC-1103 Two-position SPDT H/C thermostat, setpoint 75° to 105°F
TC-1101-116 Two-position SPDT H/C thermostat, setpoint 13° to 29°C
SPECIFICATIONS
TC-1101

1458. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1390fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
THERMOSTAT TOOLS AND CHANGE-OVER THERMOSTAT
ZS002, KT-1, JC5309, ES-1051, 680243-6
Supply Voltage 24 VAC from the air conditioning system
Connections Eight 30" leads, 18 AWG, with alligator clips
Red R - Power
Blue C - Common
White W1 – Heat 1
Gray W2 – Heat 2
Yellow Y1 – Cool 1
Violet Y2 – Cool 2
Orange O/B – Heat pump reversing valve
Green G – Fan control
Enclosure 5" x 8" plastic with hook (for hanging) and
magnetic holding strip
Mode Three modes, continuity/analyze/activate
LED Indication 19 LEDs, Power/Mode/Control
Switching Capability Six 2-position controls and one 3-position
mode s
witch
DESCRIPTION
Model ZS002 is a handheld thermostat substitution tool and
an air conditioning system testing tool for up to two stages of
heating and cooling in conventional or heat pump systems
.
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ZS002 Air conditioning system testing tool
ZS002
DESCRIPTION Thermostat Screwdrivers allow removal of sensor and thermostat covers for service
.
KT-1 JC5309
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
KT1 Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key
JC-5309 Flexible 1/16" Allen key pocket screwdriver
DESCRIPTION Freeze Spray is for testing sensors and thermostats
. Cool
do
wn the elements to test thermostat operation or point-to-
point wiring verification
. This non-corrosive and contaminant-
free aerosol has no CFCs and saves checkout time.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ES1051 Freeze spray, 8 fl oz ES-1051
680243-6
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
680243-6 Pipe-mounted thermostat change-over switch with
conduit fitting
DESCRIPTION Model 680243-6 changeover switch is snap-acting SPDT and made to strap onto water pipes
. It is used for heating/cooling
changeover inputs to room thermostats. It has a fixed setpoint
of 85°F and a 20°F lowside differential (off at 65°F). The
maximum fluid temperature is 220°F and maximum ambient is 125°F
.
Ingredients: Chemical Name CAS# Wt.% Range
Tetrafluoroethane 811-97-2 94.0-99.0%
Methanol 67-56-1 0.1-1.5
Circuit Made Switch Makes
White- Blue (Cold) Below 60°F
White-Black (Hot) Above 88°F

1459. fi˚ 1391THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
THERMOSTAT REMOTE SENSOR ACCESSORIES
356-90K, APB-28, CC-1G, M645K, M-2500, PN-46, TE6001
DESCRIPTION
Models TE6001, CG-1G, M645K, 356-90K, M-2500, APB-28,
and PN-46 are all sensor mounting brackets for averaging,
duct, and outside air probe applications
. They have a 1/4"
clip or guide to firmly hold a temperature sensor for the application
.
TE6001-1 Duct temperature element holder with box
APB-28 Adjustable pipe bracket 2"-8" diameter
PN-46 Aluminum sensor holder with adhesive backing
BA/ADP-525-7-WMW Warm white adaptor plate 7" x 5.25"
B
A/ADP-525-7-OFW Off white adaptor plate 7" x 5
.25"
BA/ADP-525-7-CPW Copla white adaptor plate 7" x 5.25"
BA/FOAMBACK White foam back insulator, 4.4" x 2.6"
BA/FOAMBACK-GREY Grey foam back insulator, 4.4" x 2.6"
Hole Diameter: 1.65"
65345 White wall plate 4" x 4" (PECO)
Hole Diameter: 1.5"
TE6001-8 Duct temperature element holder without box
M-648K Copper-clad capillary and sensor holder mounting clip
CC-1G-K Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip
DESCRIPTION
Wall adaptor plates (goof plates) offer concealment of
plaster irregularities, and are ideal to cover up old thermostat
mounting holes or paint ridges
. Foam backing pads offer
wall insulation for better temperature readings. Switch plate
displa
ys offer readouts for temperature at every light switch
.
50002883-001 White wall plate 6" x 8.3" (TH5000, TH6000)
Hole Dimensions: 2.25" x 2"
10-531 White adapter plate 7" x 5.25" (KTR, KHR)
Hole Dimensions: 2" x 1.5"

1460. fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS 1392fi˚
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS
21 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
THERMOSTAT GUARDS
ATK, BA, TG, TG500 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The TG, ATK and BAPI-Guard Thermostat Guards are
used to enclose and protect wall thermostats and sensors
against tampering, damage, and unauthorized adjustment of
thermostat settings
.
FEATURES
TG500 Series Vented Guards •
Patented, double-wall construction
• Available in various sizes
• Opaque plastic, clear plastic or painted steel
• Includes ring base, cover, lock and two keys
BAPI-Guard Series Vented Guards •
Clear low profile design
• All mounting and hardware included
• Key lock for vertical or horizontal mounting
• Two sizes to fit most applications
• Hammer tough
A
TK Series
•
Available in wire and cast aluminum
• Vertical and horizontal mounting
TG Series Vented Guards •
One piece U.V. stabilized high impact molded
polycarbonate housing
• Ring base is 16 gauge steel with white finish and four
mounting holes
• Stainless steel fastners secure housing to base
• Ventilation holes allow air to circulate freely
BAPI-GUARD
TG510A
TG-1
ATK03
ATK04
Model Size Cover
Ring
Base
Solid
Wall
Plate
Inside Dimensions Outside Dimensions
Height Width Depth Height Width Depth
in (cm) in (cm) in (cm) in (cm) in (cm) in (cm)
TG510A1001 Small Clear Clear Opaque 4.38 (11.13) 4.38 (11.13) 2.25 (5.72) 5.88 (14.94) 5.88 (14.94) 2.5 (6.35)
TG510D1005 Painted Steel (off-white) Opaque 4.38 (11.13) 4.38 (11.13) 2.25 (5.72) 5.88 (14.94) 5.88 (14.94) 2.5 (6.35)
BA/BG2 Clear Clear — 4.8 (12.3) 2.9 (7.4) 1.43 (3.65) 6.75 (17) 4.75 (12) 2.1 (5.4)
ATK03 Wire — 4.25 (10.80) 2.63 (6.66) 1.63 (4.12) — — —
ATK04 Cast Aluminum 4.25 (10.80) 2.75 (6.98) 1.63 (4.12)
F229-0225 Clear 3.88 (9.86) 3.5 (8.89) 2.5 (6.35)
TG511A1000 Medium Clear Clear Opaque 5.06 (12.85) 6.06 (15.39) 2.63 (6.68) 6.5 (16.51) 7.5 (19.05) 2.94 (7.47)
TG511D1004 Painted Steel (off-white) Opaque 5.06 (12.85) 6.06 (15.39) 2.63 (6.68) 6.5 (16.51) 7.5 (19.05) 2.94 (7.47)
F29-0227 Clear — — 5.25 (13.34) 4.63 (11.76) 3.25 (8.26)
TG-1 Large Pearlescent White — 2.8 (7.1) 5.0 (12.7) 3.1 (7.9) 5.375 (13.7) 7.75 (19.7) 4.25 (10.8)
TG-2 Clear White 2.8 (7.1) 5.0 (12.7) 3.1 (7.9) 5.375 (13.7) 7.75 (19.7) 4.25 (10.8)
TG-37 Prismatic White 3.0 (7.6) 5.5 (14.0) 3.1 (7.9) 5.875 (14.9) 8.5 (21.6) 4.125 (10.5)
TG512A1009 Clear Clear Opaque 5.88 (14.94) 8.38 (21.29) 3.0 (7.62) 7.25 (18.42) 9.75 (24.77) 3.38 (8.59)
TG512D1003 Painted Steel (off-white) Opaque 5.88 (14.94) 8.38 (21.29) 3.0 (7.62) 7.25 (18.42) 9.75 (24.77)
BA/BG Clear Clear — 6.9 (17.5) 4.7 (11.8) 1.75 (4.43) 9.45 (24) 9.45 (24) 3.0 (7.6)
ATK63 Wire — — 6.50 (16.51) 6.38 (16.21) 3.0 (7.62) — — —
F29-0231 Clear 7.06 (17.93) 4.13 (10.49) 2.25 (5.72)
F29-0413 6.36 (16.15) 3.5 (8.89) 3.25 (8.26)
F29-0198 8.13 (20.65) 4.63 (11.76) 3.63 (9.22)
F29-0220 Painted Steel (beige) 7.13 (18.11) 4.63 (11.76) 3.25 (8.26)
F29-0222 Mounted 6.63 (16.84) 4.50 (11.43) 338 (8.58)
F29-0192 Hinged 6.25 (15.88) 4.75 (12.07) 3.0 (7.62)
F29-0193 Hinged 6.0 (15.24) 3.82 (9.7) 3.13 (7.95

1461. HUMIDITY
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
TOOLS & TEST
EQUIPMENT
AMI300 Series | p. 1413
HM40A1AB | p. 1398CVC | p. 1394
Kele Provides Handheld Solutions for Verifying Your Installation Accuracy.

1462. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
ASG | p. 1393
DT-1K | p. 1397
PCA3 Series| p. 1403
TOOLS & TEST
EQUIPMENT
Data Loggers
EL-USB Series Data Logger — Lascar Data Logger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395
Hand Held Devices TK100 Series
— Digital Thermometer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396
TM99A
— Digital Handheld Thermometer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397
DT-1K
— Digital Temperature Probe
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397
HM40A1AB
— Vaisala RH / Temperature Meter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1398
BR200
— Extech Video Borescope
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1398
42540
— Extech Handheld Infrared Thermometer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399
60101-0201
— Infrared camera
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399
7001
— Amphenol Advance Systems Handheld CO2 / Temperature Meter
. . 1400
BLD7800
— Amphenol Advance Systems Handheld Digital Hygrometer
. . . .1400
AQ100, AQ200 Series
— Environmental IAQ Meters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401
BTU1100 Series
— Combustion Analyzer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402
PCA3 Series
— Hand-Held Combustion Analyzer Kits
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403
CO10
— Extech Carbon Monoxide Meter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
HD400
— Extech Light Meter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
SL100, SL200 Series
— Portable Solarimeters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406
HD100 Series
— Thermo-hygrometers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407
LV100, VT100, VT200 Series
— Thermo-Anemometer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408
CT100 Series
— Hand-Held Tachometer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409
MP100, MP200 Series
— Differential Pressure Meters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410
475-FM Series
— Dwyer Handheld Digital Manometer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
490 Series
— Dwyer Wet/Wet Handheld Digital Manometer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412
AMI300 Series
— Multifunctional IAQ Analyzer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413
Magenepull XP1000 SERIES
— Cable Retrieval System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1414
Signal Generators ASG
— Kele Handheld Portable Analog Signal Generator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
CVC
— Kele Handheld Portable Digital Display Signal Generator
. . . . . . . . . 1394

1463. fi 1393TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 9V battery or 120 VAC plug-in
power supply
Battery Life 30 hours
Output Impedance
Voltage 1000Ω minimum
Current 300Ω maximum
Output 0-20 mA (2 mA increments)
0-10 VDC (1 VDC increments)
Accuracy at 72°F
Current ±0.5% FS or ±0.1 mA
Voltage ±0.5% FS or ±0.05 VDC
Auto Shutoff Times 2-20 minute (2-minute increments)
Ramping Time Intervals 2-20 second (2-second increments)
Resolution
Current 2 mA
Voltage 1 VDC
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Accessories included 6' (1.83m) wire leads, carrying case
Approvals RoHS
Weight 0.66 lb (0.29 kg) with accessories
Warranty 1 year
KELE HANDHELD PORTABLE ANALOG SIGNAL GENERATOR
ASG
2.4
(6.1)
0.85
(2.2)
4.7
(11.9)
mA source
output
in
(cm)
Voltage
output
Programming
buttons
mA two-wire
transmitter
output
External
power
ASG
DESCRIPTION
The Kele ASG is a handheld, battery- or plug-in power supply powered, pocket size analog signal generator
. It generates a
0-10 VDC signal in increments of 1 volt or a 0-20 mA signal in increments of 2 mA
. LED bar graph visually indicates analog
signal level. The ASG can also continuously ramp to user-
defined minimum or maximum values with user-defined ramp- time settings
.
FEATURES
• P •
Pocket size with carrying case
• Bar graph LED for signal display
• 0-20 mA (2 mA increments)
• 0-10 VDC (1 VDC increments)
• Ramp function to minimum and maximum values
• Variable ramp function timing
• Low battery indication
• User-defined auto shutoff times for battery
conservation
• Separate milliamp and voltage output jacks
• 6' (1.83m) leads with alligator clips
• Perfect for loop-powered circuits and externally powered circuits
APPLICATION
• T
actuators
• Calibrating transducers, digital displays, and other
analog signal devices
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
ASG with accessories
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
ASG mA/VDC handheld portable analog signal generator with accessories
ASG-CABLE Replacement cable for ASG/CVC

1464. fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT 1394fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 9V battery or 120 VAC plug-in
power supply
Battery Life 30 hours
Outpuy Impedance
Voltage 1000Ω minimum
Current 300Ω maximum
Output 0-20 mA (1 mA increments)
0-10 VDC (1 VDC increments)
Accuracy at 72°F
Current ±0.5% FS ±0.1 mA ± 0.05 VDC
Voltage ±0.5% FS or ±0.05 VDC
Ramping Time Intervals 2-20 second (1-second increments)
Resolution
Current 1 mA
Voltage 1 VDC
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Display 0.5" (1.3 cm) blue backlit LCD
Low Battery Alerts below 7 VDC
Auto Shutoff Times 1-20 minute (1-minute increments)
Additional Specifications
6' (1.83m) wire leads, carrying case
Approvals RoHS
Weight 0.92 lb (0.42 kg) with accessories
Warranty 1 year
Outline Text - have to go to client
original image to get live text
for alterations
Top ViewFront View
Display backlight
switch
Programming Buttons
All connection jacks
on top of unit
Battery (9V)
compartment in back
in
(cm)
2.5
(6.4)
1.4
(3.6)
5.5
(14.0)
DESCRIPTION
The Kele CVC is a handheld, battery or plug-in power supply
powered, pocket size digital signal generator. It generates a
0-10 VDC signal in increments of 1 volt or a 0-20 mA signal in increments of 1 mA
. A digital display visually indicates
analog signal level. The CVC can also continuously ramp to
user-defined minimum or maximum values with user-defined ramp-time settings
.
FEATURES
• P
• Digital signal display
• 0-20 mA (2 mA increments)
• 0-10 VDC (1 VDC increments)
• Ramp function to minimum and maximum values
• Variable ramp function timing
• Low battery indication
• User-defined auto shutoff times for battery
conservation
• Separate milliamp and voltage output jacks
• Perfect for loop-powered circuits and externally powered circuits
APPLICATION
• T
actuators
• Calibrating transducers, digital displays, and other
analog signal devices
DIMENSIONS
KELE HANDHELD PORTABLE DIGITAL DISPLAY SIGNAL GENERATOR
CVC
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
CVC with
accessories
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CVC mA/VDC handheld portable digital display signal generator with accessories
ASG-CABLE Replacement cable for ASG/CVC

1465. fi 1395TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
APPLICATION
• Food and pharmaceutical storage
• Temperature-controlled haulage
• Refrigerator or freezer monitoring
• HVAC monitoring
• Factory floors and warehousing
• Laboratory conditions
• Pressure monitoring
DESCRIPTION
The
Lascar USB Data Loggers measure and record a
variety of parameters such as temperature, humidity, voltage,
current and carbon monoxide
. Simply insert any of these
loggers into your computer's USB port, name it, choose your required samplinge rate and set high and low alarms
. Logged
data is displa
yed using Lascar's FREE configuration and
analysis software
.
FEATURES
• Compatible with Windows 2000
®
, XP® Vista
®
32-bit and
Windows 7
®
64-bit
•
Assign unique logger identity
• Set sample rate and alarm thresholds
• Choose delayed start time if required
• Download data in .txt format to be viewed as graph or exported to standard spreadsheet
EL Series
ORDERING INFORMATION
• Flo •
Level monitoring
• Power usage
• Gas detection
• pH level monitoring
Supply Voltage
3.6 Volt lithium battery (except EL-USB-
RT)
EL-USB-RT USB connection only
Battery Life 1 year (depending on sample rate,
ambient temperature, and alarm LED
use)
LED Indication Blinking for operation verification
Dimensions
1 1.02" dia. x 3.86" (2.59 x 9.8 cm)
2, 3, 4 1.04" dia. x 4.06" (2.64 x 10.31 cm)
2-LCD, CO 0.90" dia. x 4.90" (2.28 x 12.45 cm)
RT 0.40" dia. x 3.03" (1.04 x 7.7 cm)
Weight 0.22 lb (0.1 kg)
Approvals RoHS
Warranty
1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
RELATED PRODUCTS
B
AT 3V6 1/2AA
3.6 Volt lithium battery
Model Type Measurement Range
Reading
Capacity
Sample
Intervals
Additional Features
EL-USB-1 Temperature -31° to 176°F (-35° to 80°C)16,000 Samples
10 seconds to 12
hours
NEMA 4X, IP67 cap
installed
EL-USB-2 Temperature & humidity
-31° to 176°F (-35° to 80°C)
0 to 100% RH
16,000 Samples/
channel
10 seconds to 12
hours
NEMA 4X, IP67 cap
installed
EL-USB-2-LCD
Temperature & humidity,
2-1/2 digit LCD display
-31° to 176°F (-35° to 80°C)
0 to 100% RH
16,000 Samples/
channel
10 seconds to 12
hours
LCD status, latest log,
no download required
EL-USB-RT
Real-time temperature
and humidity
-4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)
0 to 100% RH
7 Days 1 second only
Email, sound and LED
alarm, 7 days of data on HD
EL-USB-3 Voltage input 0 to 30 VDC 32,000 Samples1 second to 12 hoursAlligator clip leads
EL-USB-4 Current input 4 to 20 mA 32,000 Samples1 second to 12 hoursAlligator clip leads
EL-USB-CO Carbon monoxide 0 to 1000 ppm 32,000 Samples
10 seconds to 5
minutes
Audible alarm in cap
LASCAR DATA LOGGER
EL-USB SERIES DATA LOGGER

1466. fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT 1396fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 9V alkaline 6LR61 battery included
Battery Life 9 hours approximately
Measuring Element Thermocouple type K, J or T class 1
Accuracy
Type K Max either ±1.1°F or ±0.4% of
reading
Type J Max either ±0.8°F or ±0.4% of
reading
Type T Max either ±0.5°F or ±0.4% of
reading
Auto Shutoff Times Adjustable 0 to 120 minutes
Display 2 line LCD, 1.4"H x 2"W
(3.5 x 5.0 cm)
Measurement Range Units °F or °C

Type K
-328° to 2372°F (-200° to 1300°C)
Type J -158° to 1382°F (-105° to 750°C)
Type T -328° to 752°F (-200° to 400°C)
Resolution 0.1°F
Operating Temperature 0° to122°F (-18° to 50°C)
Storage Temperature -4° to 176°F (-20° to 80°C)
Cable Type Retractable, 18" to 95"
(46 to 241 cm)
Housing Type Shock-proof ABS, IP54 standard
Keypad 5 metal-coated keys
Dimensions
Housing 5.8"H x 2.8"W x 1.4"D
(14.8 x 7.1 x 3.5 cm)
Case 18"H x 8.5"W x 3"D
(46 x 22 x 7.6 cm)
Language English, French
Approvals CE
Weight 1.1 lb (0.5 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The E Instruments TK100 Digitial Thermometer is a
single-channel, hand-held digital thermometer with large
2-line display
. The TK102 has dual channels for measuring
differential temperature. A variety of probes
are available for
different temperature measurement applications
.
FEATURES
•
Selection of units for °F or °C display
• Hold function minimum and maximum values
• Adjustable automatic shut-off to save battery life
• Adjustable display for easy reading in varying light
conditions
• Adjustable alarms for instant notification of extremes
• Delta T (TK102) for easy differential measurement
DIGITAL THERMOMETER
TK100 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TK100 Digital thermometer, 1-channel (Probe sold seperately)
TK102 Digital thermometer, 2-channel (Probe sold seperately)
FK-PFA-05-MM Thermocouple K Wire Probe .5M
SKA150 Thermocouple K Ambient Probe with Handle
SKC150 Thermocouple K contact probe
SKG150 Thermocouple K general use probe 150mm
SKV150 Thermocouple K velcro pipe probe 1.5m cable
SKP150 Thermocouple K pricking probe
TK100 Shown with Probe
(sold seperately)

1467. fi 1397TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage (2) 1.5 V Alkaline AAA Battery
included
Battery Life 1800 hours
Accuracy ±0.3°F (±0.20°C) or ±0.5% of
reading
Display Units Four digits, one decimal point, °F or
°C
Probe 10K thermistor, detachable (#1075)
Range -40° to 302°F (-40° to 151°C)
Resolution 0.1°F or °C
Operating Humidity Maximum 90% Non-condensing
Operating Temperature 0° to 130°F max (-18° to 54°F)
Display Backlit 0.5" LCD
Dimensions 7.5"H x 4.0"W x 2.5"D (19.05 x 10.16
x 6.35 cm) closed case
Auto Shutoff Times 5 minutes
Approvals CE, RoHS, Certificate of Calibration
Weight 0.63 lb (0.29 kg)
Warranty
Probe 1 year
Instrument 5 year
DESCRIPTION
This economical, all-purpose solid-state thermometer is
perfect for field/factory use in a variety of applications in which
a fast response is required
.
FEATURES
• F •
Large, illuminated LCD display
• Certified calibration
• Membrane keypad operation
DIGITAL HANDHELD THERMOMETER
TM99A
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
TM99A Digital probe thermometer
TM99A
DESCRIPTION
The DT-1K Digital Thermometer Probe is easy to operate.
T
ouch probe to the object and press the ON button to
measure the temperature
.
FEA
TURES
•
Multi-usage
• High accuracy
• Pen-style digital
• Battery included
DIGITAL TEMPERATURE PROBE
DT-1K
Supply Voltage (1) 1.5V Button cell AG13
battery included
Accuracy ±2°F or ±1°C
Measurement Range -58° to 572°F (-50° to 300°C)
Resolution 0.1°F or °C
Display Units °F or °C
Low Battery Yes
Memory Last measured temperature
Auto Shutoff Times 45 minutes
Probe Length 6" pointed
Probe Material Stainless steel
Approvals CE
Weight 0.10 lb (0.05 kg)
Warranty 1 year
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DT-1K Digital thermometer probe
SPECIFICATIONS
DT-1K

1468. fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT 1398fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Supply Voltage 2 x AA Alkaline 1.5 Volt Battery
Sensor Response Time 17 seconds
Sensor Type

Humidity
HUMICAP
®
180R
Temperature PT 1000 RTD
Humidity Accuracy
±1.5% (0% to 90% RH)
±2.5% (90% to 100% RH)
Humidity Range 0% to 100% RH
Temperature Accuracy ± 0.36°F ( ± 0.22°C)
Temperature Range 14° to 140°F (-10° to 60°C)
Display LCD
Dimensions 9.4"L x 2.8"W x 1.7"D
(23.8 x 7.2 x 4.4 cm)
Approvals CE, NIST Traceable certificate
included
Weight 0.6 lb (0.3 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
This handheld, pocket-sized Vaisala Model HM40A1AB RH/
Temperature Meter provides a fast and convenient way to
accurately spot-check relative humidity and
temperature.
FEATURES
•
Measurement of humidity, temperature, dewpoint, wet
bulb and enthalpy
• Large graphical display
• Multiple languages
• 2 x AA 1.5 Volt Battery
• Belt clip
VAISALA RH / TEMPERATURE METER
HM40A1AB
SPECIFICATIONS
HM40A1AB
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HM40A1AB RH / Temperature meter with F/C reading
EXTECH VIDEO BORESCOPE
BR200
ORDERING INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
The Extech BR200 Video Borescope Inspection Camera
is ideal for inspecting hard to reach spaces. Battery-powered,
light weight, and able to light up dark places. This easy-to-
use tool can capture images, date/time stamp them, and download to a PC
.
FEATURES
• Captured video with date/time stamp is played back on
a monitor via wireless/ video input jack connection
• Transfer Video and images to your PC via the microSD
card (with included SD adaptor) or USB cable (included) and viewed using Windows
®
Media Player
•
NTSC or PAL operation with menus in 10 languages:
English, Chinese, German, French, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Japanese, Dutch, and Russian
•
Mini water-proof (IP67) camera for high resolution
viewing
• Two bright LED lamps with dimmer to illuminate
viewed object
• Glare-free, close-up field of view
• 39" (1m) flexible gooseneck retains configured shape
BR200
Model Description Dimensions Weight
BR200 Flexible video borescope with 39" cable 7.3" x 5.7" x 1.6" (18.6 x 14.5 x 4.1 cm)3 lb (1.4 kg)
BR200-EXT 38" Extension cable 38" (96.52 cm) x 0.5" (1.27 cm)Ø 1 lb (0.5 kg)

1469. fi 1399TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 9 V Alkaline Battery
Accuracy ±2% + 2° <932°F (500°C)
±2.5% + 5° >932°F (500°C)
Distance To Spot Ratio 16:1
Emissivity 0.1 to 1.00 adjustable
Range -58° to 1400°F (-50° to 760°C)
Operating Temperature 32°-122°F (0°-50°C)
Dimensions 3.9"H x 2.2"W x 9"D
(10 x 5.6 x 23 cm)
Approvals CE
Weight 0.63 lb (0.29 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Extech Model 42540 makes non-contact measurements
of surface temperatures that are difficult or dangerous to
reach
. It features laser sighting, has an
accuracy of 2% and
is powered by a 9V battery
.
FEATURES
•
Single-point laser sighting
• Maximum temperature display
• Backlit graphic display
• Carrying case
EXTECH HANDHELD INFRARED THERMOMETER
42540
SPECIFICATIONS
42540
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
42540 Laser-sighted handheld
infrared thermometer
INFRARED CAMERA
60101-0201
DESCRIPTION
The Extech 60101-0201 Infrared Camera is for identifying
hot or cold spots in rooms, panels, and on equipment.
Using high accur
acy Infared Technology, the 60101-0201
is lightweight and compact, perfect for inspecting thermally sensitive targets.
FEATURES
• High accuracy of 2% and thermal sensitivity of 0.1°C
• -4°F to 482°F (-20°C to 250°C) measuring range
• Focus-free lenses for convenient viewing
• 2.8” (71mm) high resolution color LCD
• 10, 000 pixels
• >5 hour continuous operation on a single charge for
uninterrupted inspections
• Complete with 2G miniSD™ Card, Li-Ion rechargeable
battery with 100-240V AC adaptor/charger with EU, UK, US and Australian plugs, FLIR Tool reporting software with mini USB cable, built-in manual lens shutter, and hard case
•
Type IP43 dust & splash proof housing
• Warranty: 2 years on camera, 5 years on battery, 10
years on detector
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION DIMENSIONS WEIGHT
60101-0201 Extech i5 thermal imaging camera 8.8" x 3.1" x 3.3" (22.3 x 7.9 x 8.3 cm) 0.81 lb (0.54 kg)
60101-0201

1470. fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT 1400fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 120V/6V adapter (included) or Four AA
alkaline batteries (not included)
Battery Life Up to 80 hours
Output (via RJ-45 jack) 0-4VDC = 100 Ωmin 0-4000 ppm
0-4VDC = 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
Accuracy
CO2 ±50 ppm or 5% of reading
Temperature

±2°F (±1°C)
Calibration every 12 months
Repeatability ±20 ppm
Pressure Dependence 0.13% per mm Hg, user input for elevation
correction
Response Time <60 sec CO2
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F ( 0° to 50°C), 0% to 95% RH
Display Four-digit 1/2" LCD, CO2, and
temperature
Range
CO2 From 0-10,000 ppm
Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Dimensions 6.5"H x 3.0"W x 1.5"D
(16.5 x 7.6 x 3.8 cm)
Weight 2.1 lb (0.95 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Amphenol Advanced Sensors Model 7001 uses
dual-beam infrared technology for accuracy and stability.
Con
vienent battery operation offers mobility and temperature
is displayed in °F or °C
.
AMPHENOL ADVANCE SYSTEMS HANDHELD CO2 / TEMPERATURE METER
7001
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
7001 Handheld digital CO2/Temperature meter
SPECIFICATIONS
7001 with AC Adapter
DESCRIPTION
The Amphenol Advanced Sensors BLD Psyclone is an
inexpensive, accurate hand held digital hygrometer that
displays %RH, dry bulb, and dew point temperature (in °F and
°C)
.
FEATURES
• Lo •
Displays RH, drybulb and dewpoint temperatures
• Carrying case
AMPHENOL ADVANCE SYSTEMS HANDHELD DIGITAL HYGROMETER
BLD7800
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BLD7800 Handheld digital hygrometer and temperature meter with case
BLDCERT Handheld digital hygrometer and temperature meter with case and NIST certificate
BLD7800 with Carrying Case
Supply Voltage (2) 1.5V Alkaline AA Battery
Battery Life 1 year approximately
Accuracy ±2% 10-90% RH @ 77°F (25°C)
Measurement Range -4° to 185°F (20° to 85°C)
Humidity Range 1.0 to 99.0% non condensing
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Dimensions 6.5"H x 2.5"W x 1.2"D
(16.5 x 6.5 x 3.0 cm)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight 0.44 lb (0.2 Kg)
Warranty 2 years limited
SPECIFICATIONS

1471. fi 1401TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage
AQ100 (1) 9V alkaline 6LR61 included
AQ200 (4) 1.5 V alkaline AA included
Battery Life 9 hours continuous
Accuracy AQ100 CO2
±3% of reading or ±50 ppm
Temperature
±0.4% of reading or ±0.3°F
Range
AQ100
CO2 0 to 5000 ppm
Temperature -4° to 176°F (-20° to 80°C)
Resolution AQ100

CO2 1 ppm
Temperature 0.1°F or °C
Sensor Type AQ100

CO2 Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR)
Temperature Pt100 Class A

AQ200

CO2 Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR)
Temperature Pt100 Class A (AIQ probe)
semiconductor (climatic probe)
CO Electrochemical
Humidity Capacitive
Operating Temperature 0° to 122°F (-17.7° to 50°C)
Storage Temperature -4° to 176°F (-20° to 80°C)
Connection Type AQ100
18" (450 mm) to 8’ (2.4m), retractable
AQ200 Top: 2 secured mini-DIN for SMART-
plus probes Side: 1 USB port
Keypads 5 keys, metal coated, (AQ200
Joystick)
Housing Type Shock-proof ABS Environmental
Enclosure Rating IP54
Dimensions
AQ100 Body only: 5.8"H x 2.8"W x 1.4"D
(14.8 x 7.1 x 3.5 cm)
AQ200 Body only: 6.4"H x 3.2"W x 2.3"D
(16.2 x 8.1 x 5.7 cm)
Auto Shutoff Times Adjustable 0 to 120 minutes
Language
AQ100 English, French
AQ200 English, French, Dutch, German,
Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Swedish, Norwegian, Finnish, Danish
Approvals
CE
Weight AQ100
0.42 lb (0.19 kg)
AQ200 0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Warranty 1 year
ENVIRONMENTAL IAQ METERS
AQ100, AQ200 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The E Instruments AQ100 Series Environmental Meter
is an economical, fixed probe, hand-held air quality sensor
for ambient temperature and CO2 measurement
. It uses
NDIR (non dispersiv
e infrared) technology and comes with a
soft carrying case
. The AQ200 Series has interchangeable
measurement modules, as opposed to a fixed probe, and is available in popular "kits" with temperature/CO2/humidity or temperature/CO2/humidity/CO, for example
. The AQ200
Series also comes standard with a voltage/current module (0-10V, 4-20 mA), two Pt100 channels, and a PC output with software
.
FEATURES
• Selection of units
• Minimum/maximum and hold functions
• Automatic shutoff
• Adjustable backlight
• Calibration certificate available with some models
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
A
Q100S
Air quality tester, CO2 & temperature, fixed probe
AQ200 Air quality tester kit CO2, temperature
A
Q200CO
Air quality tester kit CO, CO2, temperature, humidity
A
Q200P
Air quality tester kit CO2, temperature, humidity
AQ100S
AQ200

1472. fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT 1402fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage Rechargeable battery with AC
charger (8-9 hours single charge)
Accuracy
O2 ±0.2% of volume
CO ±10 ppm (400ppm), ±5% range (400
to 2000ppm), ±10 range (>2000ppm)
Tair 1°F

Tgas
±2°F

Pressure/Draft
±0.008"WC (up to 0.16" WC), ±5%
(>0.16"WC)
Range
O2 0-25%

CO
0-8000ppm

CO2
0-99.9%
Tair -10° to 212° F (-23° to 100° C)

Tgas
-10° to 1830°F (-23° to 1000°C)

Tdifferential
-10° to 1830°F (-23° to 1000°C)

Pressure/Draft
±80" WC
Excess Air 0-850%
Efficiency

0-100%
Resolution
O2 0.1%
CO 1ppm

CO2
0.1%
Tair 0.1°F
Tgas 0.1°F
Tdifferential 0.1°F
Pressure/Draft 0.001" WC
Excess Air 0.01
Efficiency 0.1
Sensor Type
O2, CO electrochemical
CO2, Tdifferential calculated
Excess air, Efficiency

calculated
Tair PT100
Tgas TcK
Pressure/Draft semi-conductor
Operating temperature 23° to 104°F (-5° to 40°C)
Dimensions 12"H x 18"W x 10"D
(30 x 46 x 25 cm)
Type Fuels: Natural gas, #2 oil, #4 oil,
heavy oil, propane, butane, biofuel
5%, coal, diesel, wood/pellets
Weight Unit: 2.4 lb (1.1 kg), Kit: 10 lb (4.5 kg)
Warranty 2 years
COMBUSTION ANALYZER
BTU1100 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The E Instruments BTU1100-1 combustion gas analyzer
is the latest and most innovative all-in-one tool for complete
boiler and burners set-ups, servicing and maintenance
. The
BTU1100-1 measures O2, CO, CO2, efficiency, excess air, draft, pressure, and temperature
. It has a large blue backlit
digital display with zoom, heavy duty metal connections, a 10' dual hose with 12" probe, data memory, PC capabilities, and an integral non-thermal impact printer
. Also included are
a rechargeab
le battery and AC plug, vinyl case, calibration
certificate, water trap and an extra roll of printer paper
. The
BTU1100-2 has all those features plus smoke pump, smoke filter papers and comparison chart
.
FEATURES
• CO sensor with NOx filter
• Built-in non-thermal printer
• Draft and differential pressure meter
• Two-channel thermometer
• Ambient CO monitor
• One-button operation
• Rechargeable battery and AC charger
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
BTU1100-1 Combustion analyzer kit (O2, CO, CO2, draft, probes, case, printer)
BTU1100-2 Combustion analyzer kit, includes smoke pump kit
• Zoom function
• Immediate response time
• External condensation trap
• 600 test internal memory and PC capability
• Field replaceable sensors
BTU1100 series

1473. fi 1403TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
HAND-HELD COMBUSTION ANALYZER KITS
PCA3 SERIES
Supply Voltage Four Alkaline AA batteries, optional
100-240 VAC adapter
Accuracy
Ambient Air ±2°F, (32° to 212°F), ±1°C, (0° to
100°C)
Stack Temperatures ±4°F, (32° to 255°F), ±2°C, (0° to
124°C); ±8°F, (482° to 752°F), ±4°C, (250° to 400°C)
O2
±0.3% on flue gas
CO, SO2 ±5% of reading or ±10 ppm between
0-2000 ppm
NO ±5% of reading or ±5 ppm between
0-2000 ppm
NO2 ±5% of reading or ±5 ppm between
0-500 ppm
Pressure / Draft ±2% of reading or ±0.02" W.C.
Fuel Types Natural gas, oil #2, oil #4, oil #6,
propane, coal, wood, kerosene, bagasse, and digester gas
Measurement Range Ambient Air Temperature
Ambient air temp -4° to 999°F
(-20° to 537°C)
Stack Temperature -4° to 2192°F (-20° to 1200°C)
O2 0% to 20.9%
CO 0-4000 ppm
NO 0-3000 ppm
NO2 0-500 ppm
SO2 0-5000 ppm
Pressure / Draft -72" to 72" W. C.
Display Graphic LCD alpha-numeric with
zoom function
Warm Up Time 60 seconds
Calculated Range Combustion Efficiency
0.1% to 100%
Excess Air 1.0% to 250%
CO2 0 to fuel dependent maximum
NOx (NO + NO2) 0-3500 ppm
Memory 500 combustion test records plus
500 complete logged combustion test records
Dimensions
9.0"H x 3.0"W x 2.5"D
(22.9 x 7.6 x 6.3 cm)
Weight 2 lb (0.91 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The Bacharach PCA3 Series Hand-Held Combustion Analyzer Kits are designed for on-demand sampling to determine combustion efficiency, excess air, stack gas O2 and CO levels, stack temperature, draft, and differential pressure
. The analyzer can measure up to four gases
simultaneously with standard O2, CO, and optional NO, NO2, or SO2
. The units perform combustion calculations for ten
preprogrammed fuels. The large backlit graphic display shows
eight different measurements and calculated values. The kits
include factory calibrated and installed sensors, probe and hose assembly, protection boot, USB cable, software, printer, batteries, hard carrying case, and manual
.
FEATURES
• O2 and CO measurement standard
• Field replaceable pre-calibrated sensors
• Ten preprogrammed fuels
• Calculates combustion efficiency
• Backlit graphic LCD with zoom capability
• Datalogging stores 500 combustion test records
• Auto zero function
SPECIFICATIONS
PCPA3-275-KIT

1474. fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT 1404fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
HAND-HELD COMBUSTION ANALYZER KITS
PCA3 SERIES
FUNCTIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PCA3-225-KIT Handheld combustion analyzer kit with O2 and CO
PCA3-265-KIT Handheld combustion analyzer kit with O2, CO, NO, and NO2
PCA3-275-KIT Handheld combustion analyzer kit with O2, CO, NO, and SO2
T-STACKT -AIR
F1/F2/F3 -
Soft menu buttons,
functions defined by
labels appearing above
them on LCD
USB -
Connector
Arrrow buttons -
- Moves cursor
up the display, or
increments an
alpha-numeric
value
- Moves cursor
up the display, or
increments an
alpha-numeric
value
- Moves cursor
left or moves to
top of menu
list
- Moves cursor
right or moves to
bottom of menu
list
RUN/HOLD:
Starts and stops
combustion efficiency
test
Pressing during the
5 second turn-off
period will keep the
analyzer turned ON
ENT:
Selects a highlighted
menu item or confirms
data entry
ESC:
Displays previous menu
or screen
I/O:
Turns unit ON/OFF
Depress for 1-2 seconds
Backlit ON/OFF
T-STACK -
Probe’s stack gas
thermocouple
connector
POWER -
AC adapter
connection
Delta P reference
pressure hos e
fitting
T-AIR -
Ambient air T/C
connector
Delta P draft
hose fitting
GAS -
Probe’s gas
hose connector
ACCESSORIES
0024-1254 AC power adapter, 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

1475. fi 1405TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
CO10
HD400
EXTECH CARBON MONOXIDE METER
CO10
DESCRIPTION
The Extech CO10 Carbon Monoxide Meter is for performing
localized safety checks for CO. Offering fast response time
and portability, it is a perfect tool for targeting troubled ventilation areas in parking garages, motor pools, and storage facilities
.
FEATURES
• Er
• One button operation
• Easy to read 1999 count backlit displays CO levels from
0 to 1000ppm
• Audible alarm starting at 35 ppm with continuous
beeping when above 200 ppm
• Backlight for low light conditions
• Max Hold and Data Hold buttons
• Auto power off
• Complete with 9V battery, protective rubber holster and
carrying case
ORDERING INFORMATION
EXTECH LIGHT METER
HD400
DESCRIPTION
The Extech HD400 Heavy Duty Light Meter allows the
user to take indoor and outdoor light level readings. It is ideal
to mak
e sure lighting requirements are being met, and to
assist with fine tuning lighting control systems for optimum performance and efficiency.
FEATURES
• Wide range to 40,000Fc or 400,000 Lux
• Cosine and color corrected measurements
• Utilizes precision silicon photo diode and spectral
response filter
• Peak mode (10µS) captures highest reading
• Relative mode indicates change in light levels
• Min/Max and Data Hold
• Large backlit LCD display with 40-segment bar graph
• Heavy Duty rugged double molded housing
• Built-in USB port
• Includes light sensor with 3' (0.91m) cable and
protective cover, Windows
®
compatible software with
USB cable, hard carrying case, and 9V battery
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Description Dimensions Weight
CO10 Carbon monoxide meter 6.3” x 2.2” x 1.57” (16.0 x 5.6 x 4.0 cm)2 lb (0.9 kg)
Model Description Dimensions Weight
HD400 Heavy duty light meter 6.7” x 3.1” x 1.6” (17.0 x 8.0 x 4.0 cm)2 lb (0.9 kg)

1476. fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT 1406fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 3 LR3 Alkaline AAA batteries
(included)
Battery Life 72 hours minimum
Accuracy 5% of measurement
Measurement Range
Irradiance 1 to 1300 W/m
2
(instantaneous)
Irradiation 1 Wh/m2 to 500 kWh/m
2

(cumulative)
Measurement Frequency
2 measurements per second
Calculation Frequency

1 calculation per minute (W/m
2
)
Measurement Capacity Results are saved when unit is
powered off
SL100 3 days of cumulative data (Wh/m
2
)
SL200 31 days of cumulative data (Wh/m
2
),
44,640 data points
Operating Temperature Instrument
14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C)

Solar Cell
-22° to 140°F (-30° to 60°C)
Cable Length 4.1ft (1.25m), plug-in at instrument
Housing Type Shock-proof ABS, IP40-SC200
Dimensions
Instrument 4.7"H x 2.3"W x 1.3"D
(12 x 5.8 x 3.3 cm)
Solar Cell 1.2" diameter x 1.3"H (3.0 x 3.2 cm)
Solar Cell Specifications
Sensor Photovoltaic Polycrystalline silicon
Spectral Response 400 to 1100 nm

Nominal Sensitivity
100 mv for 1000 W/m
2
Response in Cosine Corrected up to 80°

Temp Coefficient
+0.1%/°C
Effective Area 1 cm2
Humidity

100% RH (IP66 housing)

UV Performance
Excellent (translucent PMMA filter)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Weight Meter with case 0.5 lb (0.23 kg)
Solar cell 0.13 lb (0.06 kg)
Warranty 1 year
PORTABLE SOLARIMETERS
SL100, SL200 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The E Instruments SL100 and SL200 Solar Meters are
portable, easy to use hand-held solar energy meters that are
perfect for verification of solar panel orientation or for spot
checking solar energy where photovoltaic cells are being used
to generate electricity
. These tools measure instantaneous
solar irradiance and irradiation over time, with the ability to average and record minimum/maximum values
.The Model
SL100 can measure continuous exposure for up to 3 days, the Model SL200 has memory to record and store data for up to 31 days, software for PC interface and calibration certificate
. Both include an IP66 remote solar cell with 4.1 ft.
(1.25m) cable and carrying case.
FEATURES
• Instantaneous, average, minimum/ maximum values
and hold function
• Large adjustable graphic display for easy reading in
varying light conditions
• Weatherproof (IP66) remote solar cell with plug-in
cable
• Calibration Certificate - SL200 model
• USB port for trend data transfer to PC - SL 200 model
SPECIFICATIONS
SL100, SL200 Series
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
SL100 Portable solarimeter, up to 3 days continuous measurement
SL200 Portable solarimeter, up to 31 days continuous measurement, PC interface

1477. fi 1407TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 9V alkaline 6LR61 included
Battery Life 9 hours approximately
Accuracy
RH ±1.8% RH from 59° to 77°F
(15°C to 25°C) drift <1% RH/year
Dew point greater of ±0.6°F or ±0.8% of reading
Ambient Temperature greater of ±0.3°F or ±0.4% of
reading
Auto Shutoff Times Adjustable 0 to 120 minutes
Display 2 line LCD, 1.4”H x 2”W
(3.5 x 5.0 cm)
Measurement Range RH
5% to 95% RH
Dew Point -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C)
Ambient Temperature -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C)
Resolution
RH 0.1% RH
Dew Point 0.1°F
Ambient Temperature 0.1°F
Operating Temperature
Instrument 0° to 122°F (-18° to 50°C)
Probe -4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C)
Cable Type Retractable, 18” to 95” (46 to 241 cm)
Keypads 5 metal-coated keys
Housing Type Shock-proof ABS, IP54 standard
(IP65 model HD150S)
Dimensions
Housing 5.8"H x 2.8"W x 1.4"D
(14.8 x 7.1 x 3.5 cm)
Case 18"H x 8.5"W x 3"D
(46 x 22 x 7.6 cm)
Language English, French
Measuring Element Capacitive (CMOS) sensor
Measuring units RH % Dew point °F or °C Ambient temperature °F or °C
Approvals
CE
Weight 0.42 lb (0.19 kg)
Warranty 1 year
THERMO-HYGROMETERS
HD100 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The E Instruments HD100S Thermo-Hygrometer is a
portable digital thermo-hygrometer with integral probe for
measurement of relative humidity, dew point, and ambient
temperature
. The HD150S comes with an
IP65 protective
housing and a white case, making it acceptable for the
food industry
.
FEATURES
•
Selection of units for both temperature and humidity/
dew point
• Hold function and minimum/maximum values
• Adjustable automatic shut-off for maximum battery life
• Large adjustable backlit display for easy reading in
varying light conditions
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HD100S Portable digital thermo-hygrometer
HD150S Portable digital thermo-hygrometer in white IP65 housing
HD100S

1478. fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT 1408fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage
LV100, VT100 (1) 9V alkaline 6LR61included

LV200
(4) 1.5V alkaline LR6 included
Battery Life
LV100, VT100 Life Up to 9 hours continuous
LV200 Life Up to 9 hours continuous
Sensor Type
LV100
Vane Probes 0.5" (1.4 cm), 2.8" (7.0 cm)
4.0" (10.0 cm), hall effect
Temperature Pt100 class A

VT100

Hotwire, Air Velocity NTC Thermistor
Temperature Pt100 Class 1/3 DIN

VT200
Hotwire, Air Velocity
NTC Thermistor
Temperature Pt100 Class 1/3 DIN

70 mm, 100 mm Vane
Hall effect
14 mm Vane Proximity
Thermocouple Type K, J and T Class 1
PT100 Smart-plus Pt100 Class 1/3 DIN
Operating Temperature 0° to 122°F (-17.7° to 50°C)
Storage Temperature -4° to 176°F (-20° to 80°C)
Cable Type
LV100 18" (450 mm) to 8' (2.4 m), retractable
VT100 6.5' (2 m)
Connection Type VT 200 ONLY
Instrument Connections Top 2 secured mini-DIN for SMART-plus
probes
Side 1 USB port for EIG cable only, 1 power
supply plug
Module Connections Thermocouple 4 inputs for compensated
miniature plug thermocouple
Current / Voltage Two stereo jacks
Display
LV100, VT100 2 line LCD, 1.4"H x 2"W (3.5 x 5.0 cm)
VT200 Color graphic, 320 x 240 pixels,
2.8"H x 2.0"W (5.4 x 5.0 cm),
6 different measurements
(4 simultaneously)
Range LV101
157 to 591 FPM (0.8 to 3 m/s)
610 to 7874 FPM (3.1 to 44 m/s)
VT100, VT200 29.5 to 591 FPM (0.15 to 3 m/s)
610 to 5906 FPM (3.1 to 30 m/s)
Keypads 5 keys, metal coated (optional joystick
VT200)
Housing Type Shock-proof ABS
Enclosure Rating IP54
Dimensions LV100, VT100
Body only: 5.8"H x 2.7"W x 1.4"D
(14.8 x 7.1 x 3.5 cm)
VT200 Body only: 6.4"H x 3.2"W x 2.3"D
(16.2 x 8.1 x 5.7 cm)
Auto Shutoff Times Adjustable 0 to 120 minutes
Language LV100, VT100
English, French
VT200 English, French, Dutch, German,
Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Swedish, Norwegian, Finnish, Danish
Approvals
CE
LV100, VT100 0.42 lb (0.19 kg)
VT200 0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The E Instruments LV100 Series Portable Thermo-
Anemometers are available with either a 0.5" (14 mm), 2.7"
(70 mm) or 4" (100 mm) fixed vane probe for measurement of air flow velocity and a thermistor for ambient temperature
.
The
VT100S Series has a 0
.3" (8 mm) diameter, 12" (305
mm) long stainless steel hot-wire probe for measurement of air flow and ambient temperature
. The VT200 Series
has interchangeable temperature and air flow velocity measurement modules for maximum flexibility; it is the ultimate meter for air flow/temperature needs
. All are supplied
with calibr
ation certificate and soft carrying case
.
FEATURES
• Selection of units
• Hold function with min/max values
• Automatic average
THERMO-ANEMOMETER
LV100, VT100, VT200 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
L
V101S
Thermo-Anemometer 0.5 in. vane, fixed
LV107S Thermo-Anemometer 2.7 in. vane, fixed
L
V110S
Thermo-Anemometer 4.0 in. vane, fixed
L
V120S
Thermo-Anemometer 4.0 in. vane, integral
L
V130S
Thermo-Anemometer 4.0 in. vane, integral, rotating
VT100S Thermo-Anemometer 12 in. Hotwire, fixed
VT200 Thermo-Anemometer base unit, no probes
VT200F Thermo-Anemometer includes Hotwire probe
VT200H Thermo-Anemometer includes 2.7 in. vane probe
VT200L Thermo-Anemometer includes 4.0 in. vane probe
VT200P Thermo-Anemometer includes 0.5 in vane probe
VT200TF Thermo-Anemometer includes gooseneck hotwire probe
VT200TP Thermo-Anemometer includes telescopic 0.5 in. vane probe
• A
• Adjustable backlit digital display

1479. fi 1409TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 9V alkaline 6LR61 included
Battery Life Up to 25 hours continuous
Accuracy
Optical ± (0.3% rdg ± 1 RPM)
Contact ± (1% rdg ± 1 RPM)
Measuring Elements

Optical
Phototransistor
Contact ETC type adapter
Measurement Range Optical
60-60,000 RPM (units Tr/min, RPM)
Contact 30-20,000 RPM (units m/min, ft/min, 1n/min)
Resolution

Optical 1 RPM
Contact 1 RPM
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Cable Type Retractable, 18" to 95" Retractable,
18" to 95" (46 to 241 cm)
Display 2 lines, 12 characters 0.5"H x 1.5"W
(1.3 x 3.8 cm)
Keypads 5 elastomer keys
Housing Type Shock-proof ABS
Dimensions 5.7"H x 3"W x 1.3"D
(14.5 x 7.6 x 3.3 cm)
Auto Shutoff Times Adjustable 0 to 120 minutes
Language English, French
Approvals CE
Weight 0.42 lb (0.19 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The E Instruments CT100OS Hand-Held Tachometer is
a compact, hand-held tachometer with optical probe and
reflective tape, for measuring revolutions per minute (RPM)
on motor shafts or any rotating device
. The CT100CS adds a
contact tip for direct physical rotation measurement.
FEATURES
• Unit selection and English or French language
selection
• Hold function and minimum, maximum values
• Optical or contact sensor to meet most applications
HAND-HELD TACHOMETER
CT100 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CT100CS Portable tachometer with optical and contact sensor
CT100OS Portable tachometer with optical sensor
CT100
Probes with contact tip
and with optical tip

1480. fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT 1410fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage
MP105, MP120 (1) 9V alkaline 6LR61 included

MP200
(4) 1.5V alkaline LR6 included
Battery Life MP105, MP120
Up to 9 hours continuous
MP200 Up to 9 hours continuous
Pressure Piezoresistive
Thermocouple Type K, J, and T Class 1
Current / Voltage 2 stereo jacks for V, mA
Connector
MP105 Pressure 0.18" (4.6mm)
nickel-plated threads
MP120 Pressure 0.24" (6.2mm)
nickel-plated threads
MP200 Pressure 0.24" (6.2mm) nickel-
plated barbs and 0.18" (4.6mm)
nickel-plated barbs, and 1 input for compensated miniature plug thermocouple
.
Display
MP105, MP120 2 line LCD, 1.4"H x 2"W
(3.5 x 5.0 cm)
MP200 Color display, 128 x 128 pixels
2.2"H x 2.0"W (5.4 x 5.0 cm)
Keypads 5 keys, metal coated,(MP200
Joystick)
Housing Type Shock-proof ABS
Enclosure Rating IP54
Auto Shutoff Times Adjustable 0 to 120 minutes
Dimensions MP105, MP120
Body only: 6.1"H x 2.7"W x 1.4"D
(15.6 x 7.1 x 3.5 cm)
MP200 Body only: 6.6"H x 3.2"W x 2.3"D
(16.9 x 8.1 x 5.7 cm)
Operating Temperature 0° to 122°F (-17.8° to 50°C)
Language
MP105, MP120 English, French
MP200 English, French, Dutch, German,
Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Swedish, Norwegian, Finnish, Danish
Approvals
CE
Weight 0.42 lb (0.19 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The E Instruments MP100 Series Differential Pressure
Meter portable digital manometers have a built-in pressure
sensor and come with tubing and a carrying case
. The
MP200 Series thermo-anemo-manometer comes in different pressure range models and has interchangeable measurement modules for temperature (thermo), air velocity (anemo), and air flow with pitot tube
. The MP200 Series
also includes one Thermocouple K/J/T channel, calibration certificate, and a PC output
.
FEATURES
• T
• Selection of units
• Automatic calibration
• Hold and min/max functions
• Adjustable automatic shutoff
• Adjustable backlit display
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE METERS
MP100, MP200 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MP105 Differential pressure micro-manometer -200 to 200 in. H2O (±0.5% accuracy)
MP120 Differential pressure micro-manometer -4 to 4 in. H2O (±0.5% accuracy)
MP200G Differential pressure micro-manometer -40 to 40 in. H2O (±0.2% accuracy)
MP200H Differential pressure micro-manometer -200 to 200 in. H2O (±0.3% accuracy)
MP200HP Differential pressure micro-manometer -29 to 29 in. H2O (±0.3% accuracy)
MP200M Differential pressure micro-manometer -10 to 10 in. H2O (±0.2% accuracy)
MP200P Differential pressure micro-manometer -2 to 2 in. H2O (±0.2% accuracy)
MP105
MP200

1481. fi 1411TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Device Type Service of Air and some combustible
gases
Supply Voltage 9V alkaline battery
Battery Life Up to 100 hours
Accuracy ±0.5% FS, 60° to 78°F (15.6° to
25.6°C); ±1.5% FS from 32° to 60°F
(0° to 15.6°C) and 78° to 104°F
(25.6° to 40°C)
Pressure Range
475-000-FM 0-1.00" W.C. (0-0.249 kPa)/ 5 psig
(35 kPa) maximum
475-0-FM-AV 0-10.00" W.C. (0-2.49 kPa)/5 psig (35
kPa) maximum
475-00-FM-AV 0-4.00" W.C. (0-0.995 kPa)/5 psig (35
kPa) maximum
475-0-FM 0-10.00" W.C. (0-2.49 kPa)/5 psig (35
kPa) maximum
475-1-FM 0-19.99" W.C. (0-4.97 kPa)/10 psig
(69 kPa) maximum
Operating Temperature 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
Connection Type Two barbed for use with 1/8" (3.18
mm) or 3/16" (4.76 mm) ID tubing
Display 0.5" liquid crystal, 3-1/2 digits
Dimensions 6.6" x 2.8" x 0.9"
(16.8 x 7.1 x 2.3 cm)
Air Velocity Kit Air velocity kit includes the 475-
FM Manometer, (2) A303 Static Pressure tips, (2) 9' lengths of 3/16" ID rubber tubing, (1) 166-6-CF Pitot Tube, (1) A-397 Step Drill bit, A532 Air Velocity slide chart, Instructions, and a molded plastic Carrying Case, Air velocity kit includes the 475-FM manometer, (2) static pressure tips, (2) 9' lengths of 3/16" ID rubber tubing, (1) 166-6-CF pitot tube, (1) A-397 step drill bit, air velocity slide chart, instructions, and a molded plastic carrying case
Approvals
FM, CE
Weight
Unit 0.3 lb (0.14 kg)
Kit 0.6 lb (0.27 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DWYER HANDHELD DIGITAL MANOMETER
475-FM SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Dwyer 475-FM Series Mark III handheld digital manometer is ideal for field-calibrating, monitoring, or troubleshooting HVAC systems, clean rooms, and a wide range of other low-pressure applications
. This handy
instrument measures positive, negative, or differential pressures of air and natural gases
. The 475-FM Series is
approved and intrinsically safe for hazardous locations, Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, and T4
.
FEATURES
• Measures positive, negative or differential pressure
• Handheld and battery powered
• Intrinsically safe for hazardous locations FM
APPROVED
USC
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
475-0-FM Handheld digital manometer, 0-10" W.C.
475-0-FM-AV Handheld digital manometer, 0-10" W.C. with air velocity kit
475-00-FM Handheld digital manometer, 0-4" W.C.
475-000-FM Handheld digital manometer, 0-1" W.C.
475-000-FM-AV Handheld digital manometer, 0-1" W.C. with air velocity kit
475-1-FM Handheld digital manometer, 0-19.99" W.C.
AV Kit
475-1-FM-1

1482. fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT 1412fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
DWYER WET/WET HANDHELD DIGITAL MANOMETER
490 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Dwyer 490 Series wet/wet digital manometers are
versatile, handheld, and battery operated. Units are highly
accur
ate (±0
.5% FS) for positive or positive-differential
pressure measurement,and they can tolerate most liquid media compatible with 316L stainless steel
. There are seven
common English and metric pressure units (psi, "H2O, "Hg, mm Hg, kPa, Bar, or mBar), so conversions are not necessary
.
FEATURES
• Measures either positive or positive differential
pressure
• High accuracy (±0.5% FS)
• Tolerant of most liquid media compatible with 316L
stainless steel
• Seven English and metric pressure units (psi,"H2O,
"Hg, mm Hg, kPa, Bar, or mBar)
• Two 1/8" female NPT connections
Device Type Service of compatible, non-
combustible gases and liquids
Supply Voltage 9V alkaline included
Battery Life Up to 100 hours
Accuracy ±0.5% FS from 60° to 78°F
(15.6° to 25.6°C)
±1.5% FS from 32° to 60°F (0 to
15.6°), 78° to 104°F (25.6° to 40°C)
Wetted Materials Type 316L stainless steel
Pressure Range 490-1
0-15 psid (0-103 kPa)/30 psig max
(207 kPa)
490-2 0-30 psid (0-207 kPa)/60 psig
(413 kPa) maximum
490-3 0-50 psid (0-345 kPa)/100 psig (689
kPa) maximum
Operating Temperature 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C)
Dimensions 9"H x 4.7"W x 0.9"D
(27.9 x 11.9 x 2.3 cm)
Connection Type Two 1/8" (3.18 mm) female NPT
Display 0.42" (10.6 mm), 4-1/2 digit LCD
Approvals CE
Weight 0.88 lbs (0.4 kg)
Warranty 1 year
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
490-1 Wet/Wet digital manometer, 0-15 psid
490-2 Wet/Wet digital manometer, 0-30 psid
490-3 Wet/Wet digital manometer, 0-50 psid
A-402A Gray nylon carrying case
SPECIFICATIONS
490

1483. fi 1413TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage (4) 1.5V alkaline LR6 AA batteries
included
Battery Life 9 hours aproximately
Measurement Range Refer to AMI300 brochure
Sensor Type
CO2 Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR)
CO Electrochemical

Temperature
Pt100 Class A (Semiconductive in
Climatic module)
Hygrometry Capacitive
Air Pressure Piezoresistive
Hotwire, Air Velocity NTC thermistor
70 mm, 100 mm Vane Hall effect
14 mm Vane Proximity
Thermocouple Type K, J and T Class 1
Tachometry Optical sensor, ETC adapter for
connect
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Cable Type 18" (450 mm) to 8’ (2.4 m),
retractable
Connection Type
Instrument Connections
Top: 2 secured mini-DIN for
SMARTplus probes
Side: 1 USB port for EIG cable only
1 power supply plug
Module Connections Thermocouple
4 inputs for compensated mini plug
thermocouple
Pressure Two 1/4" (6.2 mm) diameter
Current / Voltage Two stereo jacks
Display Color graphic, 320 x 240 pixels,
2.8"H x 2.0"W, 6 different
measurements (4 simultaneously)
Keypads 5 keys, metal-coated, 1 joystick
Housing Type Shock-proof ABS
Enclosure Rating IP54
Dimensions Analyzer only: 6.8"H x 3.4"W x 2.2"D
(17.2 x 8.5 x 5.7 cm)
Auto Shutoff Times Adjustable 0 to 120 minutes
Language English, French, Dutch, German,
Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Swedish, Norwegian, Finnish, Danish
Approvals
CE
Weight 0.84 lb (0.38 kg)
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The E Instuments AMI300 Series Multifunctional
IAQ Analyzer is an all-in-one tool for measurement
and verification of air quality including temperature and
differential temperature, humidity, dewpoint, wet bulb,
enthalpy, air pressure and air velocity, CO2, CO, current and
voltage
. Includes PC software and USB cable allowing full
datalogging, trend reporting, and data management.
FEATURES
• Backlit digital color display
• Calibration certificate and transport case included
• Manometer probes for pressure, air velocity, and air
flow (using pitot tubes or other sensing elements)
• Vane probes for direct air velocity and air flow
• Thermo-hygrometer probes for dew point, wet bulb and
enthalpy
MULTIFUNCTIONAL IAQ ANALYZER
AMI300 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
AMI300
ORDERING INFORMATION
• Air quality probes for CO2, CO, temperature, and
humidity
• Tachometry probes with optical only or optical plus
contact sensor
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AMI300 Air quality analyzer, base unit, no probes, includes MDP500M pressure module
ETC Tachometry probe contact adapter, 30 to 20,000 RPM
FC300 Hotwire probe for AMI300, 12" (30 cm) length, 5/16" (0.8 cm) diameter
FC900 Hotwire gooseneck probe for AMI300, 36" (90 cm) length, 3/8" (1.0 cm) diameter
HE100 Vane probe for AMI300, 4.0" (10.0 cm) vane diameter
HE14 Vane probe for AMI300, 0.5" (1.4 cm) vane diameter
HE70 Vane probe for AMI300, 2.7" (7.0 cm) vane diameter
HET14 Vane probe for AMI300, telescopic, 0.5" (1.4 cm) vane diameter
HR110 Hygrometry probe, plastic, 4.3" (11 cm) length, 1/2" (1.3 cm) diameter
HRI300 Hygrometry probe, stainless, 11.8" (30 cm) length, 1/2" (1.3 cm) diameter
MDP10000 Pressure module -40 to 40" H2O
MDP2000M Pressure module -29 to 29 psid
MDP2500 Pressure module -10 to 10" H2O
MDP500 Pressure module -2 to 2" H2O
MDP500M Pressure module -200 to 200" H2O
R
TO
Tachometry probe optical tape , 3.3 ft (1m) tape
SCO2T IAQ probe for AMI300, CO2, temperature
SCO2TH IAQ probe for AMI300, CO2, temperature, humidity
SCO
T
IAQ probe for AMI300, CO, temperature
SVTH IAQ probe for AMI300, telescopic, velocity, temperature, humidity
TOP Tachometry probe for AMI300, optical, 60 to 50,000 RPM, includes 3.3 ft (1m) tape

1484. fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT 1414fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
CABLE RETRIEVAL SYSTEM
MAGNEPULL XP1000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Magnepull is the most advanced cable retrieval system
on the market today. Using powerful rare earth magnets,
Magnepull works through drywall, insulation, and carpet to pull wire more quickly and easily than the old fish-tape method
. Magnepull is designed for commercial or residential
installation of HVAC and building automation cable, satellite TV, home theater, security, thermostat or telecom wire and makes a wiring project a one-man job
.
The
XP1000-3 bullet drop magnet with leader and drop chain
comes with the XP1000-LC system
. Other drop magnets
such as the
XP1000-3-1 (without leader, for confined spaces),
XP1000-4 (with 8/32" threaded stud), and XP1000-6 (1/2" diameter bullet for smaller wires, also has the 8/32" threads) are also available
.
The MS800-1 Magnespot is used to locate a reference
marker through sheetrock, ceilings or floorings.
FEATURES
• Re •
Smooth rolling design prevents wall damage
• Easy to use in tight places
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
XP1000-LC-MS Magnepull cable retrieval system w/ Magnespot
XP1000-LC Magnepull cable retrieval system w/o Magnespot
XP1000-3 Drop magnet with leader, 0.75 in. diameter
XP1000-3-1 Drop magnet with eye fitting, 0.75 in. diameter
XP1000-4 Drop magnet with threaded bullet, 0.75 in. diameter
XP1000-6 Drop magnet with leader, 0.50 in. diameter
MS800 Magnespot reference point locator with marker
MS800-1 Magnespot reference marker
XP1000-LC
XP1000-3
XP1000-3-1
MS800-1
XP1000-6
XP1000-4
MS800

1485. fi 1415TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
WHAT IS COMBUSTION?
Combustion takes place when fuel, most commonly a fossil fuel, reacts with the oxygen in air to produce heat. The heat created by
the burning of a fossil fuel is used in the operation of equipment such as boilers, furnaces, kilns, and engines. Along with heat, CO2
(carbon dio
xide) and H20 (water) are created as byproducts of the exothermic reaction
.
By monitoring and regulating some of the gases in the stack or exhaust, it is easy to improve combustion efficiency, which
conserves fuel and lowers expenses. Combustion efficiency is the calculation of how effectively the combustion process runs. To
achieve the highest levels of combustion efficiency, complete combustion should take place. Complete combustion occurs when all
of the energy in the fuel being burned is extracted and none of the Carbon and Hydrogen compounds are left unburned. Complete
comb
ustion will occur when the proper amounts of fuel and air (fuel/air ratio) are mixed for the correct amount of time under the
appropriate conditions of turbulence and temperature
.
Although theoretically stoichiometr
ic combustion provides the perfect fuel to air ratio, which thus lowers losses and extracts all of
the energy from the fuel; in reality, stoichiometric combustion is unattainable due to many varying factors
. Heat losses are inevitable
thus making 100% efficiency impossible.
In pr
actice, in order to achieve complete combustion, it is necessary to increase the amounts of air to the combustion process
to ensure the burning of all of the fuel
. The amount of air that must be added to make certain all energy is retrieved is known as
excess air.
In most comb
ustion processes, some additional chemicals are formed during the combustion reactions
. Some of the products
created such as CO (carbon mono
xide), NO (nitric oxide), NO2 (nitrogen dioxide), SO2 (sulfur dioxide), soot, and ash should be
minimized and accurately measured
. The EPA has set specific standards and regulations for emissions of some of these products,
as they are harmful to the environment.
Comb
ustion analysis is a vital step to properly operate and control any combustion process in order to obtain the highest
combustion efficiency with the lowest emissions of pollutants
.
COMBUSTION
CH4 + 2O2 CO2 + 2H2O + Heat
C + O2 CO2 + Heat
2H2 + O2 2H2O + Heat
Fuel
Oxygen
Heat
BTU1100 series
BTU2200 series

1486. fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT 1416fi
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT
22 WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
CONSUMPTION & CAPACITY
Selecting the proper E/P transducer for an application involves more than choosing the input signal and output pressure range. Air
consumption and capacity are impor
tant specifications when considering the best transducer for the job
.
AIR CONSUMPTION
An E/P transducer is designed to vary air pressure to a pneumatic load like an actuator based on a varying electronic signal from
some sort of controller. The source of air pressure used by E/P transducers originates at the air compressor and makes its way to
pneumatic devices throughout the building via tubing.
Different types of E/P transducers use different techniques to vary the air pressure to their output or branch line. Some transducers
incorporate a design that is similar to pneumatic thermostats and controllers with a nozzle and flapper, for example the UCP-242 and UCP-422
. These transducers will allow a small amount of air to escape to the atmosphere (air consumption), measured in units
of scfm (standard cubic feet per minute). Actual air consumption can be affected by the amount of main air pressure but is normally
specified as an average value such as 0.008 scfm. Since there is a given amount of air available in the main air lines and the air
compressor’s storage tank, the number of pneumatic devices that consume air will affect how often the air compressor runs as well as the size of its storage tank
.
If the a
vailable pneumatic air supply will not support numerous air consuming E/P transducers, there is another type of transducer
design that uses two solenoid valves to increase and decrease pressure in the branch line and does not constantly bleed air, other than what is exhausted from the branch line during normal operation
. The UCP-722 and UCP-822, for example, consume no air in
steady state.
AIR CAPACITY
A pneumatic transducer’s air capacity specification defines how much air volume can flow through the transducer in a given amount of time
. Air capacity is usually specified in units of scim (standard cubic inches per minute) or scfm at a particular main air pressure
with a minimal pressure drop across the transducer. A typical air capacity specification for a pneumatic transducer might be 500
scim at 20 psi with a 1 psi pressure drop.
Calculating the exact time it would take an E/P transducer to completely fill an actuator to full pressure is more than dividing the
total volume connected to the E/P transducer’s output (including the actuator and tubing) by the E/P transducer’s air capacity. You
must also consider the force of the internal actuator spring and the load connected to the actuator. These act against the pressure
building in the actuator as opposing forces and slow the rate at which pressure builds in the actuator.
Depressur
izing a given volume of air actually takes longer than it does to pressurize
. When building up pressure, the transducer
allows main air to flow into the branch line. When depressurizing, the E/P transducer opens the branch line to the atmosphere
allowing air to escape from the actuator and tubing.
Selecting the proper E/P tr
ansducer for an application is important
. Kele stocks a complete selection of electronic to pneumatic
transducers that will meet the requirements of most any application.
PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS
CONSUMPTION & CAPACITY
UCP-722
UCP-422

1487. HUMIDITY
TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
ARM Series | p. 1454
PWA-2A | p. 1437
UCP-422 | p. 1419
EP311 | p. 1435
T-1000 | p. 1431
CP-8551 | p. 1433
Kele is the Top Provider of Transducer Control Devices,
Connecting Sensors and Peripheral Devices.

1488. MODEL/SERIES PAGEProducts manufactured
in the United States
Products that are
new to the catalog
kele.com
TRANSDUCERS
UPC-722 | p. 1417
EPC Series | p. 1471
UMX-8 | p. 1466
TRANSDUCERS
Electronic Transducers
EP-311/313 Series — Electronic / Pneumatic Transducer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
PWA Series
— Pulse / Tri-State-to-Analog Transducer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
UAT-1, UAT-2 Series
— Universal Analog Transducer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
VTI Series
— Voltage & Current Converter / Rescaler
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
DT13E Series
— Isolated DC to DC Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
UMM-1, UMM-2 Series
— Universal Math Module
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447
RES-1E Series
— Universal Resistance Transducer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449
PTA Series
— Pulse Width Modulation to Current/Voltage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
PTA2 Series
— Pulse Width Modulation to Current/Voltage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
ARM Series
— Current or Voltage Rescaling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
AUD Series
— Floating Point to Analog
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
6N1-ISO Series
— Six Input to One Output
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
AIM 1 Series
— Analog Input to Optically Isolated Analog Output
. . . . . . . . . 1455
AIM 2 Series
— Analog Adj
. Input to Optically Isolated Analog Output. . . . . 1455
DRN3.1 Series
— Pulse Width Modulation/Analog/Floating Point to
Isolated Output
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
DRN 4 Series
— Pulse Width Modulation/Analog/Floating Point to
Resistance Output
.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
MOB-4, MOB-8
— Manual Override Boards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470
UPD Series
— Universal Pulse Divider
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
Multiplexers ATL Series
— Current or Voltage to Four SPDT Relays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
AAR Series
— Analog to Two Relay
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
AFP Series
— Analog to Floating Point
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
UCS-121 Series
— Sequencer Control Module - Single Stage
. . . . . . . . . . . 1456
UCS-221E
— Sequencer Control Module - Two Stage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
UCS-421E
— Sequencer Control Module - Four Stage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
UCS-621E
— Kele Sequencer Control Module - Six Stage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462
UCS-821E
— Sequencer Control Module - Eight Stage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464
UMX-4, UMX-8
— Multi-Function Input / Output Expander
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466
Pneumatic Transducers UCP-242
— Current / Pneumatic Transducer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417
UCP-422 Series
— Electronic / Pneumatic Transducer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419
UCP-422 Series M Option
— Options for UCP-422 Series
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
UCP-422 Series F, V Options
— UCP-422 Series F, V Options
. . . . . . . . . . 1422
UCO-44, UCO-44T Options
— Options for UCP-422
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1423
UCP-722 Series
— Universal Electronic / Pneumatic Transducer
. . . . . . . . . 1425
UCP-822A Series
— Universal Electronic / Pneumatic Transducer
. . . . . . . . 1427
DIN-L1
— DIN Rail Adapter Bracket
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429
IP300
— Electronic/Pneumatic Transducer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430
T-1000
— Current / Pneumatic Transducer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
22/07-16
— Current / Pneumatic Transducer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1432
CP-8500 Series
— Electronic/Pneumatic Transducer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433
EFP Series
— Floating Point to Pneumatic Transducer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
EPW Series
— Pulse Width Modulation to Pneumatic Transducer
. . . . . . . . . 1453
EPC Series
— Analog to Pneumatic Transducer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453

1489. fi 1417TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage None, loop powered
Input 4-20 mA
Input Impedance 500Ω @ 4-20 mA
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Air Capacity 515 scim (135 cm
3
/s) @ 20 psig
(138 kPa) supply
Air Connections 1/4" OD tubing with inline filter
Air Consumption .008 scfm (3.8 cm
3
/s) @ 20 psig
(138 kPa) supply
Maximum Pressure 25 psig (172 kPa)
Linearity 2% of span
Hysteresis 1% of span
Output 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa)
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Weight 0.6 lb (0.27 kg)
Warranty 18 months
CURRENT / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER
UCP-242
4-20 mA
Signal
in
(cm)
4.63
(11.75)
3.25
(8.3)
Air Connections Main (Supply): black Branch (Output): white or clear
– + COM SIG +
Depth: 2 (5.1)
DESCRIPTION
The UCP-242 Current/Pneumatic Transducer provides
low cost pneumatic control of valves, dampers, or other
pneumatic devices
. The UCP-242 comes with snap-track
for easy mounting. Quick-disconnect terminals provide easy
wiring removal for servicing. Barbed fittings for 1/4" plastic
tubing and an in-line filter are provided.
FEATURES
• Inline filter provided
• Snap-track mounting
• 1/4" (0.64 cm) barbed tube connectors
• Quick-disconnect terminals
• Loop-powered control
• Excellent linearity
• Low hysteresis
• No calibration required
SPECIFICATIONS
OPERATION
The UCP-242 accepts a 4-20 mA signal and outputs 3-15
psig. The unit is loop-powered, requiring no power supply
for controlling pneumatic devices. Upon a loss of signal, the
UCP-242 will eventually bleed the pressure in the branch line
. This transducer is well suited for the control of small to
medium volume loads, such as small to medium pneumatic actuators
. Large volume loads, such as large pneumatic
actuators, or long tubing runs may also be controlled but will exhibit a slower response time
.
DIMENSIONS

1490. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1418fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Installation
Mount the UCP-242 inside a NEMA 1 control panel in a clean, dry environment. Barbed fittings are provided for terminating 1/4"
(0.64 cm) plastic tubing. The UCP-242 must be mounted in an upright position (refer to arrows on unit). For best results, the
transducer should be mounted within five degrees of upright position. Wire terminations are marked for 4-20 mA operation.
Wiring Mak
e all electrical connections in accordance with job wiring diagrams and in compliance with local and national electrical codes.
Wir
ing terminations are made on screw terminals labeled SIG + and COM
.
Checkout
Verify with a meter that a 4-20 mA DC signal is present and that polarity is correct. Verify that 20 psig (137.9 kPa)
main air is present. Be sure the UCP-242 is mounted in an upright position.
To check transducer operation:
1. Adjust the input signal to 20 mA. Branch pressure should be 15 psig (103.4 kPa).
2. Adjust the input signal to 4 mA. Branch pressure should be 3 psig (20.7 kPa).
Note: This is a rough functional check only. The UCP-242 is a highly accurate device and laboratory quality meters and gauges
are required to properly check calibration.
CURRENT / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER
UCP-242
INSTALLATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
UCP-242 Current/pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA input, 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) output
CAUTION: The Model UCP-242 utilizes parts that can be damaged by supply air containing synthetic compressor oil vapor, acid fumes, or other corrosive vapors. Synthetic compressor oils must not be used. Standard control air filtering practices should be observed:
• Supply air must be dried, oil-separated, and filtered using a refrigerated air dryer, a particulate filter, and a
coalescing type filter.
• The system must be properly maintained such that all particles larger than 0.03 microns are filtered out and that
less than 0.1 ppm oil vapor exists.
• At the compressor, using an absorbent pre-filter followed by a coalescing oil removal filter, such as the K-337 or
K-339, is recommended.
• Using an oil-indicating device prior to installing any UCP-242 is also recommended. This device will provide an
indication of the amount of oil being discharged from the air compressor.
• At the UCP-242, installing the inline filter (Model FILN05 provided with the UCP-242) in the main air line is
recommended.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
B-373-1 Gauge tee with mounting tabs 903
PG-05 Pressure gauge, 0-30 psig (10-200 kPa) 1111

1491. fi 1419TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
• DIN rail mounting
• Pressure gauge
• PWM input
• Tri-state input
•
Feedback and span
adjustment
• Failsafe • Manual output adjustment
Supply Voltage
Without Options None, loop powered
With Options 24 VAC/VDC
Supply VA
With F, M, V Options 180 mA maximum (half-wave)
With UCO Options 100 mA maximum (half-wave) at 24
VAC, 50 mA at 24 VDC
Input 4-20 mA, 2-10 VDC (V option)
Input Impedance 500Ω @ 4-20 mA, 160 kΩ (V option)
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Air Capacity 515 scim (135 cm
3
/s) @ 20 psig
(138 kP
a) supply
Air Connections
Brass barbs for 1/4" OD tubing
Air Consumption 0.008 scfm (3.8 cm
3
/s) @ 20 psig
(138 kPa) supply
Maximum Pressure 25 psig (172 kPa)
Linearity 2% of span
Hysteresis 1% of span
Output 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa)
Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Weight 1.4 lb (0.64 kg)
Warranty 1 year
ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER
UCP-422 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The UCP-422 Series electronic/pneumatic transducer
provides low-cost pneumatic control of valves, dampers, or
other pneumatic devices
. The UCP-422 consists of a totally-
enclosed transducer with provisions for optional DIN rail or surface mounting in either of two planes
. Externally-mounted
pneumatic filters are not required. Quick-disconnect terminals
provide easy wiring removal for servicing. When DIN rail
mounting is used, this compact device requires only a 4"H x 2"W (10
.2 x 5.1 cm) mounting area, providing efficient use of
panel space.
FEATURES
• Slim-line mounting to save panel space
• Universal mounting tabs
• Totally enclosed
• 1/4" (0.64 cm) barbed tube connectors
• Quick-disconnect terminals
• Loop-powered control (base model)
• No external filter required
• Excellent linearity
• Low hysteresis
• No calibration required
OPERATION
The UCP-422 Series accepts a 4-20 mA signal and outputs
3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa). Used in its base configuration, it
requires no power supply for controlling pneumatic devices.
Upon a loss of signal or po
wer, the UCP-422 will eventually
bleed the pressure in the branch line
. This transducer is well
suited for the control of small to medium volume loads, such as small to medium pneumatic actuators
. Large volume loads,
such as large pneumatic actuators or long tubing runs may also be controlled but will exhibit slower response time
.
4.8
(12.2)
4.0
(10.1)
6.3
(16)
3.4
(8.6)
0.7
(1.8)
4.6
(11.7)
2.0
(5.0)
2.75
(6.9)
Optional
DIN Rail
Adapter
COM
SIG IN +
Removable
Mounting Tabs
Removable
Mounting Tabs
in
(cm)
Optional Gauge Assembly
( rotate 90 degrees
for two-position display)
Branch
MainB
M
UCP-422
4-20 mA
Signal–
+
SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS
OPTIONS
Shown with Optional Pressure Gauge

1492. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1420fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Installation
Mount the UCP-422 inside a NEMA 1 control panel in a clean, dry environment. Barbed fittings are provided for terminating
1/4" (0.64 cm) plastic tubing. The UCP-422 must be mounted in an upright position (refer to arrow on unit). For best results, the
transducer should be mounted within five degrees of the upright position.
Wiring Mak
e all electrical connections in accordance with job wiring diagrams and in compliance with national and local electrical codes.
Wir
ing terminations are made on screw terminals labeled SIG IN + and COM
. Other terminals are provided where options are
specified (see options for UCP-422 on the following pages).
Checkout
Verify with a meter that a 4-20 mA DC signal is present and that polarity is correct. Verify that 20 psig (138 kPa) main air is
present. Be sure the UCP-422 is mounted in the upright position. Note: This is a rough functional check only. The UCP-422 is a
highly accurate device, and laboratory quality meters and gauges are required to properly check calibration.
To check transducer operation:
1. Adjust the input signal to 20 mA (or appropriate max DC voltage input). Branch pressure should be 15 psig (103 kPa).
2. Adjust the input signal to 4 mA (or appropriate min DC voltage input). Branch pressure should be 3 psig (21 kPa).
CAUTION: The UCP-422 uses parts that can be damaged by supply air containing synthetic compressor oil vapor, acid fumes, or other corrosive vapors. Synthetic compressor oils must not be used. Standard control air filtering practices should be observed: •
Supply air must be dried, oil-separated, and filtered using a refrigerated air dryer, a particulate filter, and a
coalescing type filter.
• The system must be properly maintained such that all particles larger than 0.03 microns are filtered out and that
less than 0.1 ppm oil vapor exists.
• At the compressor, using an absorbent pre-filter followed by a coalescing oil removal filter, such as the K-337-1 or
K-339, is recommended.
ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER
UCP-422 SERIES
INSTALLATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
UCP-422Electronic/Pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA / 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa)
OPTIONS (for more information on each option, see the following catalog pages)
F
M
M2
V#
43
44
44T
47
UCP-422 M43
Feedback loop control allows remote electronic readout of the output pressure. Units equipped with
feedback loop control may be calibrated between 3 and 15 psig. Special input/output calibrations should
be specified at time of order entry (i.e., 4-20 mA/8-13 psig). (Factory-installed option only.)
Manual output adjust allows easy checkout and manual selection
of the output pressure (factory-installed option only)
UCO-43 Pressure gauge indication (0-30 psig/0-200 kPa) - allows for local pressure indication
without giving up valuable panel space (factory-installed option only)
UCO-44 Pulse-width modulation - features selectable pulse-width time bases of 0.1-2.65,
5.2, 12.85, 25.6, or 0.59-2.93 sec (factory-installed option only)
UCO-44T Tri-state input - allows va riable pneumatic output control based on a selectable
tri-state input time base (factory-installed option only)
UCO-47 DIN rail mounting adapter - allows the UCP-422 to be mounted along with other devices
on the same rail (factory-installed option only)
Loop-powered manual adjust
24V-powered manual adjust
Voltage input V1: 1-5V, V2: 2-10V, V3: 3-15V (factory-installed option only)
Example: UCP-422-M-43-47 Electronic/Pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA to 3-15 psig,
manual output adjust, pressure gauge, DIN rail
47
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
EP3-24VAC 24 VAC three-way air valve 895

1493. fi 1421TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
COM
SIG IN +
AUX
FBK OUT
24 VDC
SIG IN -
Branch
MainB
M
DIS EN
DISEN
For normal operation, place jumper plug
over two posts next to DIS (disable).
DIS EN
For manual override, place jumper plug
over two posts next to EN (enable).
Turn manual pot to adjust output pressure.
M
A
N
U
A
L
Input
Signal
Jumper (shown in
normal position)
24 VAC/VDC
Power Supply
Manual Adjust
Pot
UCP-422-M2 with or without
24V-Powered Options (F, V, 44, 44T)
COM
SIG IN +
Branch
MainB
M
4-20 mA Loop-Powered UCP-422 only
No 24V-Powered Options
DIS EN
DISEN
For normal operation, place jumper plug
over two posts next to DIS (disable).
DIS EN
For manual override, place jumper plug
over two posts next to EN (enable).
Turn manual pot to adjust output
pressure.
M
A
N
U
A
L
Input
Signal
Jumper (shown in normal position)
Manual Adjust
Pot
UCP-422 SERIES
M OPTION
DESCRIPTION
The M Option Manual Output Adjust allows local adjustment of the UCP-422 output. This feature simplifies checkout and
troubleshooting and is available in both loop-powered and 24V-powered configurations. The 24V-powered configuration is
provided standard when the M Option is ordered with the (F) Feedback, (V) Voltage, (44) Pulse Width, or (44T) Tri-state options
for the UCP-422.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
UCP-422-M Electronic/Pneumatic transducer with loop-powered manual output adjust option
UCP-422-M2 Electronic/Pneumatic transducer with 24V-powered manual output adjust option
UCP-422-M LOOP-POWERED MANUAL ADJUST
The UCP-422 is loop-powered. For manual override
operation, the input signal must be at 20 mA, or
24 VDC may be applied to the input terminals.
UCP-422-M2 24V-POWERED MANUAL ADJUST
For manual override operation, 24V power must be
applied to the +24 VDC and COM terminals. 24V power
is not required for normal transducer operation, unless options F, V, 44, or 44T are ordered
.

1494. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1422fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
RECALIBRATION
F Option
1. Make all connections according to the wiring diagram, or as
shown on the job diagrams, in compliance with national and local codes
. Make all connections with power removed. Failure
to do so could result in circuit board damage.
2. Connect the highest quality gauge available to the branch line
of the transducer.
3. Move the jumper to the CAL position (see Wiring).
4. Vary the input signal to the transducer until the gauge indicates the minimum branch pressure desired to output
. If the transducer
is equipped with the manual output adjust option, set the minimum branch pressure by putting the manual output adjust jumper in the ENABLE position and turning the manual pot
.
5. Adjust ZERO pot for 4 mA output from the transducer feedback
terminals.
6. Repeat step 4 to set the maximum branch pressure. If
maxim
um pressure cannot be reached, adjust GAIN pot
.
7. Adjust the SPAN pot for 20 mA output from the transducer
feedback terminals.
8. Since SPAN and ZERO pots are interactive, repeat steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 until results are accurate.
9. Move CAL jumper back to the normal position and move the manual output adjust jumper back to the disable position.
10. Input the maximum input signal and adjust the GAIN pot until the desired maximum pressure is indicated on the gauge.
V Option 1
. Make all connections according to the wiring diagram, or as shown on the job diagram, in compliance with national and local
codes. Make all connections with power removed. Failure to do so could result in circuit board damage.
2. Connect the highest quality gauge available to the branch line of the transducer.
3. Apply the new input voltage desired for maximum pressure (limited to a range of 5-15 VDC).
4. Adjust the GAIN pot until the pressure gauge shows a slight change in pressure.
5. Now, adjust the GAIN pot until maximum pressure shows on the gauge.
6. The transducer is now recalibrated to the new voltage input span (max to min 5:1 ratio).
DESCRIPTION
F Option
The
Feedback Loop Control F Option outputs a current
sourcing 4-20 mA signal representative of the branch output
pressure
. The standard range is 4-20 mA to 3-15 psig (20.7-
103.4 kPa). F Option also allows for custom ranging the
output (i.e., 4-20 mA to 8-13 psig). Any range from 3-15 psig
(with a minimum 5 psig span) can be field-calibrated. This
option requires 24 VAC/DC power.
V Option The
Voltage Input V Option allows the UCP-422 to be
controlled by any voltage signal with a 5:1 ratio span. For
example, the voltage signal span could be 1-5V, 2-10V, or 3-15V
. This option requires 24 VAC/VDC power.
UCP-422 SERIES
F, V OPTIONS
COM
SIG IN +
AUX
FBK OUT
24 VDC
SIG IN -
UCP-422-F
CAL
CAL
CAL
Input
Signal
+
–
24 VAC or
24 VDC
Power Supply
Feedback
Load
+
–
+
–
Normal
jumper position
Calibrate
jumper position
Power Requirements: 24 VAC @ 180 mA
24 VDC @ 90 mA
Feedback Output: 4-20 mA, 800Ω max
GAIN
ZERO
SPAN
UCP-422-F WIRING
UCP-422-V WIRING
COM
SIG IN +
AUX
FBK OUT
24 VDC
SIG IN -
UCP-422-V
Voltage Signal
Input
+
–
24 VAC/VDC
Power Supply
+
–
Power Requirements
Voltage Option Only: 24 VAC @ 75 mA
24 VDC @ 35 mA

Voltage and Feedback Options:
24 VAC @180 mA
24 VDC @ 90 mA
Field-Adjustable
Voltage
Voltage Signal Input
Impedance: 160 k Ω
Power LED
Signal LED
GAIN
ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTIONMODEL
UCP-422
Feedback loop control (4-20 mA/3-15 psig standard)*
Voltage input V1:1-5V, V2: 2-10V, V3: 3-15V
F
V#
UCP-422
* Special ranges must be specified at time of order entry .
Important! Options cannot be field-installed .
OPTIONS
Electronic/Pneumatic transducer

1495. fi 1423TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Shown with Optional Pressure Gauge
UCP-422
UCO-44, UCO-44T OPTIONS
DESCRIPTION
The UCO-44 and UCO-44T Options are designed to be
used with the Kele UCP-422 Series electronic/pneumatic
transducer
. The UCO-44 Option allows the UCP-422 to be
controlled by a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signal. The
UCO-44T Option allows the UCP-422 to be controlled by a tri-state input signal
. These options are mounted in an
expander ring attached to the UCP-422.
OPERATION
UCO-44 Option
The UCO-44 Option accepts a pulse-width modulated input
and produces an internal 4-20 mA current signal that controls
the UCP-422
. The standard time base is 25.6 seconds but is
switch-selectable for any of the other four ranges. The UCO-
44 Option responds to the elapsed time when the controlling computer closes the contacts wired in series with the signal SIG IN + or SIG IN - terminals
. Each pulse received will
produce a corresponding pressure output. The transducer will
hold this signal until given a pulse with a different value.
UCO-44T Option
The
UCO-44T Option is controlled from two discrete contact
closures or one tri-state output from a controlling computer
.
Each signal giv
en the transducer will ramp an internal 4-20
mA signal up or down to control the UCP-422
. A contact
closure wired in ser
ies with the SIG IN + terminal will increase
the output in proportion to the length of the signal given
. A
contact closure wired in ser
ies with the SIG IN - terminal will
decrease the output in proportion to the length of the signal
given
.
LED INDICATION
PWR LED - On when 24V is present SIG LED - On only when an input signal is present
SPECIFICATIONS
UCP-422
Enclosure
UCP-422 Enclosure
Side View
in
(cm)
3.0
(7.6)
4.8
(12.2)
4.0
(10.1)
4.8
(12.2)
UCO-44/UCO-44T
Option
Expander Ring
Power LED
Signal LED
AUX
24
VDC
FBK
OUT
SIG
–
COM
SIG
+
FEATURES
• Selectable PWM time base 0.1-2.65, 5.2, 12.85, 25.6, or
0.59-2.93 sec
• Selectable tri-state time base 2.55, 5.1, 12.75, 25.5, 59.9,
90.5, or 119.9 sec
• 255-step resolution
• Positive or negative input reference
• AC/DC voltage
• LED indication
DIMENSIONS
Model Supply Voltage Supply VA Input Output
UCP-422-44
24 VAC/VDC
100 mA maximum (half-wave)
at 24 VAC, 50 mA at 24 VDC
PWM; time base 0.1 to 2.65, 0.1
to 5.2, 0.1 to 12.85, 0.1 to 25.6
(factory setting), or 0.59 to 2.93
seconds (internally DIP switch
selectable)
3-15 psig (21-103 kPa)
UCP-422-44T
Tri-state; time base 2.55, 5.1,
12.75, 59.9, 90.5, 119.9, or
factory-set 25.5 seconds (inter-
nally DIP switch selectable)

1496. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1424fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele .com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
24 VAC or
24 VDC
Power Supply
+
–
Tri-state board is located in
UCO-44T expander ri ng
housing attached to the
UCP-422 enclosure.
BAS controller
Tri-state contacts
decrease
increase
U
P
AUX
+24
FBK
SIG IN
OUT
VDC
COM
SIG IN
UCP-422
ENCLOSURE
+
–
Important! To change the time base, the transducer must be disassembled. A time base other than the factory setting may be
specified at the time of order entry.
Time Base Selection
1. Remove two screws from the bottom plate
of the enclosure.
2. Carefully remove the PWM/Tri-state board
and locate time base select switches.
3. Set switches 3, 4 & 5 to desired time base
as shown in table. Switches #1,#2,#6,#7
& #8 are not used and should be in the off position
.
4. Carefully reassemble the transducer,
ensuring that socket and pins are properly aligned
.
5. No other adjustment or calibration is required.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
UCP-422-44 Electronic / pneumatic transducer PWM option (factory installed)
UCP-422-44T Electronic / pneumatic transducer tri-state option (factory installed)
UCP-422 SERIES
UCO-44, UCO-44T OPTIONS
U
P
UCP-422
ENCLOSURE
AUX
+24
FBK
SIG IN
OUT
VDC
COM
SIG IN
+
-
PWM board is located
in UCO-44 ex pander ring
housing attached to the
UCP-422 enclosure.
24 VAC/VDC
Power
+
–
24 VAC/VDC
Power
for
Signal
+
–
BAS Controller
PWM Contacts
*
WIRING
CALIBRATION
TABLE 1. TIME BASE SELECTION
PWM TIME
BASE (sec)
0.1-2.65
0.1-5.2
0.1-12.85
0.1-25.6
(factory setting)
0.59-2.93
TRI-STATE
TIME BASE (sec)
2.55
5.1
12.75
25.5
(factory setting)
59.9
90.5
119.9

3
Off Off Off Off

On On
On
SWITCH
4
Off Off On On

Off Off
On

5
Off On Off On

Off On
Off
U P
UCP-422
ENCLOSURE
AUX
+24
FBK
SIG IN
OUT
VDC
COM
SIG IN
+
-
BAS Controller
PWM Contacts
24 VAC/VDC
Power
+
–
*
PWM Wiring
Separate 24V Supplies
for Power & Signal
*
Signal input is optoisolated & polarity insensitive.
PWM computer contact can s
witch either PWM wire lead
.
PWM Wiring
Common 24V Supply for Power & Signal
Tri-State Wiring

1497. fi 1425TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC
Supply VA 150 mA maximum (half-wave)
Input 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, or 4-20 mA
Input Impedance 10 kΩ, VDC input; 250 Ω,
4-20 mA input
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Air Capacity 333 scim (5456 cm
3
/min) @ 20 psig
(138 kPa) supply; 523 scim (8570
cm
3
/min) @ 45 psig (310 kPa) supply
Air Connections
Brass barbs for 1/4" OD tubing
Air Consumption None in steady state
Maximum Pressure 45 psig (310 kPa)
Media Compatibility Clean dry air
Minimum Tubing Length 15 ft. (4.6 m)
Repeatability <1% full scale
Linearity <1% full scale
Hysteresis <1% full scale
Output 0-20 psig (0-140 kPa) or 3-15 psig
(21-103 kPa)
Operating Temperature 25° to 140°F (-4° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 10 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 3.5"H x 3.3"W x 1.9"D
(8.5 x 8.3 x 4.6 cm)
Weight 0.8 lb (0.36 kg)
Approvals CE
Warranty 5 years
UNIVERSAL ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS
UCP-722 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The UCP-722 Series microcontroller based electro-
pneumatic transducer incorporates high performance poppet
valve technology and low power coils with digital control to
provide unmatched accuracy and proven reliability
. In addition
to pro
viding reliable, stable operation, the poppet valves
used in the UCP-722 consume no air
. The UCP-722 features
jumper-selectable pressure ranges and an LCD display. Field
selectab
le analog inputs for 0-5V, 0-10V, or 4-20mA signals
are standard
.
OPERATION
The UCP-722 converts a jumper-selectable analog input to
a 0-20 or 3-15 psig output. The transducer is powered with
24 VAC/VDC. Upon a loss in power, the UCP-722 air valves
remain closed, so branch pressure will remain at the last value
. The optional pressure loss alarm provides a contact
closure if the UCP-722-PL is unable to achieve the desired output within a fixed length of time
.
SPECIFICATIONS
1.86
(4.6)
3.26
(8.3)
in
(cm)
3.45
(8.8)
FEATURES
• Jumper-selectable control range (0-20 psig or 3-15
psig)
• Field-selectable inputs ( 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA)
• LCD display for local indication of readings
• No air consumption and quiet operation
• Easy mounting with snap track housing
• Optional pressure loss alarm
DIMENSIONS

1498. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1426fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
UNIVERSAL ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS
UCP-722 SERIES
JUMPER CONFIGURATION
INPUT Select CURRENT (4-20 mA) or
V
OLTAGE (0-5V or 0-10V)
VOLTAGE
For voltage mode of operation,
select 0-5V or 0-10V
SCALING Select 0-20 psi or 3-15 psi scaling
MODE Select AUTO for normal operation,
or MANUAL to adjust pressure using pushbuttons
POWER/SIGNAL OPTIONS
ALARM MODE RELAY
The alarm contacts will open if
the unit cannot obtain 80% of
commanded pressure within two (2)
minutes
GND/COMMON
Power supply ground and signal
common
INPUT SIGNAL 4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC, or 0-5 VDC
input from control system
POWER 22-30 VDC, 20-30 VAC. From
control system or external power supply or transformer
NOTE:
In 24 VAC transformer applications, one side of
transformer secondary is connected to signal.
QUICK INSTALL
CAUTION: Use electrostatic discharge precautions (e.g., use
of wrist strips) during installation and wiring to prevent equipment damage
.
1. Mount transducer using screws provided. Take care to avoid
damaging electronic components.
2. Wire transducer as shown in wiring diagram.
3. Configure jumpers for desired operation as shown.
4. Attach pressure tubing to hose barbs. Observe MAIN and
BRANCH port labels. Use flexible 1/4" O.D. poly tubing for
main and branch pneumatic connections.
CAUTION: Main supply pressure must not exceed 45 psig.
PL OPTION
PRESSURE LOSS ALARM OPTION
Normally closed, solid-state contacts open if main
supply pressure fails, or transducer is otherwise unable
to produce correct branch pressure. Connect to digital
input of control system f
or alarm status indication
. If
commanded pressure is not within 80% inside a tw
o (2)
minute window, alarm contacts will open
.
• 0-20 psi alarm contact will not change state when
commanded pressure is four (4) psi or less
• 3-15 psi alarm contact will not change state when
commanded pressure is 5.4 psi or less
ORDERING INFORMATION
TO DIGITAL INPUT – OPTIONAL
PRESSURE LOSS ALARM
GND/COMMON
INPUT SIGNAL
POWER
FROM
CONTROL SYSTEM
ALARM
MODE
(option)
MANUAL ADJUST
0-20 psi
3-15 psi
ON
OFF
0-5V
0-10V
Current
Voltage
GND/COM
INPUT SIGNAL
POWER
MODE
Auto
Manual
PRESSURE
RANGE
PRESSURE
LOSS
ALARM
(OPTIONAL)
INPUT
MODE
VOLTAGE
MODE
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
UCP-722 Universal electronic/pneumatic transducer, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, or 4-20 mA input, 3-15 psig or 0-20 psig
output
UCP-722-PL Universal electronic/pneumatic transducer, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, or 4-20 mA input, 3-15 psig or 0-20 psig
output, with pressure loss alarm
INSTALLATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DIN-L1 DIN rail adapter bracket for snap-track mounted devices 1429

1499. fi 1427TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
1.8
(4.6)
3.73
(9.5)
in
(cm)
3.45
(8.8)
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC
Supply VA 350 mA maximum (half-wave)
Input 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, tri-
state, PWM
Input Impedance 10 kΩ, VDC input; 250 Ω, 4-20 mA
input
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Air Capacity 333 scim (5456 cm
3
/min) @ 20 psig
(138 kPa) supply; 523 scim (8570
cm
3
/min) @ 45 psig (310 kPa) supply
Air Connections
Brass barbs for 1/4" OD tubing
Air Consumption None in steady state
Maximum Pressure 45 psig (310 kPa)
Media Compatibility Clean, dry air
Minimum Tubing Length
15 ft. (4.6 m)
Repeatability <1% full scale
Linearity <1% full scale
Hysteresis <1% full scale
Output 0-25 psig (0-175 kPa) configurable
Operating Temperature 41° to 140°F (5° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 10 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 3.5"H x 3.3"W x 1.9"D
(8.5 x 8.3 x 4.6 cm)
Weight 0.8 lb (0.36 kg)
Approvals CE
Warranty 5 years
KELE UNIVERSAL ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS
UCP-822A SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele UCP-822A microcontroller based electronic/ pneumatic transducer incorporates high performance poppet valve technology and low-power coils with digital control to provide unmatched accuracy and proven reliability
.
In addition to pro
viding reliable, stable operation, the poppet
valves used in the UCP-822A consume no air
. The UCP-
822A features programmable pressure ranges and an LCD display
. This universal transducer has field selectable analog
inputs for 4-20mA, voltage, tri-state, or PWM.
FEATURES
• Extended PWM and Tristate settings
• Programmable pressure output up to 25 psig
• Field-selectable signal inputs (4-20mA, voltage, tri-
state, PWM)
• LCD display for local indication of readings
• No air consumption and quiet operation
• Easy mounting with snap track housing
• Pressure loss or manual mode alarm
• Optional analog output 4-20mA or 0-10 VDC selectable
OPERATION
The UCP-822A-PL converts a selectable analog, tri-state or
PWM input to a programmable psig output (0-25 psig range).
The tr
ansducer is powered with 24 VAC/VDC
. Upon a loss in
po
wer, the UCP-822A-PL air valves remain closed, so branch
pressure will remain at the last value
. The pressure loss alarm
provides a contact closure if the UCP-822A-PL is unable to achieve the desired output within a fixed length of time
. This
alarm may be changed to alarm if the transducer is set for manual operation
. The UCP-822A-A O-PL adds an analog
output for feedback of the branch pressure.
SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS

1500. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1428fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
KELE UNIVERSAL ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS
UCP-822A SERIES
WIRING
GND
INPUT
+24V
CH2
CH1/PWM
4-20mA
0-10V
ALARM
POWER
SOURCE
Digital Input
(Contact Closure)
4-20 mA PROCESS METER
Analog Output
(0-5 or 0-10V or 4-20 mA
Common
Current/Voltage Control,
Current Output Example
• Input switch settings same as example 1
• Output jumper set to 4-20mA
GND
INPUT
+24V
CH2
CH1/PWM
4-20 mA
0-10V
ALARM
POWER
SOURCE
PWM CONTACT
+-
Pwm Control Example
• Input switch set to "PWM"
• Tri-State jumper set to "ON"
GND INPUT +24V
CH2
CH1/PWM
4-20 mA
0-10V
ALARM
POWER
SOURCE
TRI-STATE CONTACTS
CH1
OR
CH2
OR
+-
-+
Subtract
Pressure
Add Pressure
Tri-state Control Example
• Input switch set to “TRI-STATE”
• Tri-State jumper set to “ON”
Current/Voltage Co ntrol,Voltage Output Example
GND INPUT +24V
CH2
CH1/PWM
4-20 mA
0-10V
ALARM
POWER
SOURCE
Digital Input
(Contact Closure)
0-10V PROCESS METER
+
–
+
–
Analog Out
Common+-
• Input switch set to voltage (0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC)
• Input volt jumper set to either 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC
• Input switch set to 4-20 mA
• Output jumper set to 0-10 VDC
CONFIGURATION
Auto
Manual
GND
INPUT
24V
CH2
CH1/PWM
OPERATION
MODE
TRISTAT E
ALARM
P-LOSS MAN
INPUT VOLTAGE
0-10V 0-5V
TRI-PULL-UP
ON OFF
OUTPUT
4-20 mA 0-10V
ALARM
OUTPUT
4-20 mA / 0-10V
Tristate Timing
Network
FS Point
Zero
RUN
4-20 mA
Voltage
Tristate
PWM
Network
Control
SETTINGINPUT
Subtract
Pressure
Add Pressure
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
UCP-822A-A
O-PL
Universal electronic/pneumatic transducer, VDC, mA, tri-state, or PWM input, 0-25 psig output, analog output
UCP-822A-AO-PL-R Universal electronic/pneumatic transducer, VDC, mA, tri-state, or PWM input, 0-25 psig output, analog
output, w/restrictor
UCP-822A-PL Universal electronic/pneumatic transducer, VDC, mA, tri-state, or PWM input, 0-25 psig output
UCP-822A-PL-R Universal electronic/pneumatic transducer, VDC, mA, tri-state, or PWM input, 0-25 psig output, w/restrictor
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
DIN-L1 DIN rail adapter bracket for snap-track mounted devices 1429

1501. fi 1429TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Materials Of
Construction 0.090 aluminum with ASA61 gray
paint
Weight 0.1 lb (0.045 kg)
Warranty 18 months
DIN RAIL ADAPTER BRACKET
DIN-L1
Side View Rear View
in
(cm)
0.48
(1.2)
0.063
(0.2)
1.35
(3.4)
0.33
(0.8)
Holes drilled and tapped
for #8-32 machine screw
(typical for six shown)
4.0
(10.2)
3.0
(7.6)
0.33
(0.8)
Slot thru
1.412 O.C.
1.04
(2.6)
0.063
(0.2)
0.102
(0.3)
0.102
(0.3)
1.00
(2.5)
0.67
(1.7)
0.67
(1.7)
0.67
(1.7)
0.67
(1.7)
0.67
(1.7)
0.80
(0.2)
DESCRIPTION
The Kele DIN-L1 is designed to allow the vertical mounting of
track-mounted components in an assembled panel. Flexibility
is provided in mounting transducers and power supplies. The
bracket comes with a DIN rail mounting adapter and (2) #8-32 machine screws for easily mounting Snap-Track
. Holes are
pro
vided to line up with the slots in Snap-Track
.
FEA
TURES
•
Vertical mounting saves space
• Holes provided for Snap-Track
• Convenient for transducers and power supplies
• DIN rail adapter and 2 mounting screws provided
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DIN-L1 DIN rail adapter bracket for snap-track mounted devices
DIN-L1
DIN-L1 with UCP-722 and DIN rail
mounted (DIN rail not included)

1502. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1430fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC
Supply VA 1 VA @ 24 VAC; 50 mA @ 24 VDC
Input 1-5 VDC, 2-10 VDC, or 4-20 mA
Input Impedance 100 kΩ @ 1-5 VDC; 200 kΩ @
2-10 VDC; 250Ω @ 4-20 mA
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Air Capacity 200 scim (55 mL/s)
Air Connections 3/16" diameter barbs for 1/4" OD
tubing; 1/8" FNPT gauge port
Air Consumption 28.8 scim (7.9 mL/s) @ 20 psig
(138 kPa) supply
Maximum Pressure 30 psig (207 kPa)
Linearity 1% of full scale
Hysteresis 0.75% full scale
Output 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa)
Operating Temperature 40° to 120°F (4° to 49°C)
Operating Humidity 10 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Weight 5.5 oz (155 g)
Warranty 1 year
24V
2-10V
1.5V
4-20
mA
GND
1-5V
0.875
(2.2)
3.375
(8.6)
0.875
(2.2)
2.75
(6.9)
2.53
(6.4)
IN GNDO ut
in
(cm)
DESCRIPTION
The KMC Controls IP300 Electronic / Pneumatic
Transducer converts an analog voltage or current input
signal into a linear pneumatic output signal of 3 to 15 psig
.
The pneumatic output pro
vides accurate positioning of
dampers and valve actuators used in HVAC systems
. The
IP300 features three selectable inputs of 1-5 VDC, 2-10 VDC, or 4-20 mA
. The unit can be mounted in any orientation with
the 3.25" snap track. The transducer is equipped with an
internal filter and a gauge tap for pressure output indication.
FEATURES
• Three user-selectable inputs
• 24 VAC or VDC power supply
• Gauge tap for pressure output indication
• Zero and span adjustment
• Snap track mounting
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER
IP300
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
IP300 Electronic/pneumatic transducer from KMC
IP300
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
PG-05 Pressure gauge, 0-30 psig (10-200 kPa), 1.5" dial, 1/8" NPT center back mount 1111

1503. fi 1431TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage None, loop powered
Input 4-20 mA, 1-9 VDC (-1 model)
Input Impedance 180Ω @ 4-20 mA, 985Ω @ 1-9 VDC
Wiring Terminations Leads with 1/2" NPT conduit
connection
Air Capacity 7,776 scim (7.6 m
3
/hr) @ 25 psig
(175 kPa) supply; 20,736 scim (20
m
3
/hr) @ 100 psig (700 kPa) supply
Pressure Range
18 psig (124 kPa) minimum, 100 psig
(690 kPa) maximum
Air Connections 1/4" FNPT with auxiliary gauge port
Air Consumption 0.1 scfm (0.2 m
3
/hr) @ midrange
Repeatability
<0.5% of span
Linearity <±1% of span
Hysteresis <1% of span
Output 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa); adjustable,
can split range 3-9 or 9-15 psig
Operating Temperature -20° to 160°F (-30° to 70°C)
Dimensions 2.2"H x 4.2"W x 2.3"D
(5.5 x 10.8 x 5.7 cm)
Weight 2.1 lb (0.94 kg)
Approvals CE
Warranty 18 months
CURRENT / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER
T-1000
DESCRIPTION
The T-1000 Industrial-grade Current / Pneumatic Transducer reduces a supply pressure to a regulated output pressure that is directly proportional to a 4-20 mA input signal
. An integral pneumatic volume booster is included in
the design to provide high flow capacity up to 20,736 scim (20 m3/hr)
.
FEATURES
• High airflow capacity
• Wide supply pressure range
• Direct or reverse acting
• Convenient external span and zero adjustments
• Bracket included for panel or wall mounting
Zero
Span
4-20 mA
Signal
(black)
in
(cm)
(white)
Alternate Output/
Gauge Po rt
plugged
Supply
Air
1/4'' FNPT
Output
Air
1/4'' FNPT
WIRING / PIPING
APPLICATION
The T-1000 is calibrated at the factory for direct-acting
operation but may be used in the reverse-acting mode by
reversing the polarity of the signal leads and recalibrating
.
When calibr
ated for reverse-acting applications, the T-1000
transducer provides a minimum of its full rated output pressure (i.e., 15 psig/103 kPa) upon input signal failure.
The 4-20 mA input to 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) output can be
recalibrated using zero and span adjustments to provide 3-9 psig (21-62 kPa) or 9-15 psig (62-103 kPa) output for split ranging applications
.
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
T
-1000
Current/pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA input, 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) output
T-1000-1 Current/pneumatic transducer, 1-9 VDC input, 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) output
T-1000-C Current/pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA input, 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) output, pre-calibrated
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
010115-000 DIN rail adapter for T-1000 current/pneumatic transducer
M-111 1/4" MNPT x 1/8" FNPT bushing
PG-05 Pressure gauge, 0-30 psig (10-200 kPa), 1.5" dial, 1/8" NPT center back mount 1111
T-1000

1504. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1432fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage None, loop powered
Input 4-20 mA
Input Impedance 200 Ω nominal
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Air Capacity 2764 scim (755 cm
3
/s) @ 20 psig
(138 kPa) supply
Air Connections 1/8" FNPT
Air Consumption 0.08 scfm (37.8 cm
3
/s) @ 20 psig
(138 kPa) supply
Maximum Pressure 40 psig (276 kPa)
Linearity 3%
Hysteresis 0.3%
Output 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa), linear to
input and direct acting
Operating Temperature -40° to 180°F (-40° to 82°C)
Weight 0.6 lb (0.3 kg)
Approvals CE
Warranty 1 year
DESCRIPTION
The ABB 22/07-16 current/pneumatic transducer is a
compact, high performance instrument providing many of
the same characteristics that are found on industrial-grade
transducers
. This I/P transducer is designed for high air
capacity HVAC applications where mounting space is limited and an industrial appearance is important
.
FEA
TURES
•
Loop-powered control
• Small size
• Mounts in any position
• High air capacity
• High repeatability
• DIN rail mounting
1.42
(3.61)
1.42
(3.61)
1.26
(3.2)
4.17
(10.59)
4-20 mA
Signal
Main Air
20 psig
1/8" FNPT
Pressure
Connections
Output Air
Signal
3-15 psig
M
B
S/Zul
NPT 1/8"
+
_
in
(cm)
DIMENSIONS / WIRING / PIPING
OPERATION
The 22/07-16 converts a 4-20 mA signal to a 3-15 psig (21-
103 kPa) pressure signal using a unique converting system
with a stationary coil and low-mass moving magnet that
gives this unit high repeatability and reliability
. The unit is not
sensitive to vibrations or shock and can be mounted in any position without recalibration
. The 22/07-16 is supplied with
screw-type terminals for electric connection and 1/8" FNPT ports for pneumatic connections
. A clip-on base is provided
for DIN rail mounting.
CURRENT / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER
22/07-16
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
22/07-16 Current/pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA input, 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) output
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
B-132 1/4" barb x 1/8" MNPT fitting 903
B-373-1 Gauge tee with mounting tabs 903
BAM-1000 35 mm aluminum DIN mounting rail 39.4" (1m) 860
DIN-3F 35 mm DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m), RoHS compliant 860
PG-05 Pressure gauge, 0-30 psig (10-200 kPa), 1.5" dial, 1/8" NPT center back mount 1111

1505. fi 1433TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage
CP-8551 None, 4-20 mA loop-powered
CP-8552, -8511 20 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz or
24 to 30 VDC
Supply VA 3.9 VA (CP-8552)
Supply Watts
CP-8552 1.6 W maximum
CP-8511 3.8 W
Input
CP-8551 4-20 mA
CP-8552 4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC, 6-9 VDC,
jumper selectable
CP-8511 4-20 mA, 1-5 mA, 6-9 VDC, 1-5 VDC,
0-10 VDC, 1-11 VDC, 2-10 VDC,
jumper selectable
Input Impedance
CP-8551 550Ω
CP-8552 550Ω (current input); >10 kΩ
(voltage input)
CP-8511 250Ω @ 4-20 mA; 1000Ω @ 1-5 mA;
>10 kΩ for voltage inputs
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals for 16 to 22 AWG
wire
Action
CP-8551, -8552 Direct acting
CP-8511 Direct or reverse acting,
jumper selectable
Air Capacity 550 scim (150 ml/s)
Air Connections Barbed fittings for 1/4" OD tubing
Air Consumption 0.012 scfm (5.66 ml/s) @ 20 psig
(138 kPa) supply
Maximum Pressure 30 psig (207 kPa) maximum
Media Compatibility Clean, dry air, 20 psig nominal
supply pressure
Linearity ± 1% of span @ 75°F (24°C)
Hysteresis 0.75% of span @ 75°F (24°C)
Output 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa)
Output Voltage 20 VDC auxiliary output (CP-8511
only), 50 mA maximum
Adjustments
CP-8552 Adjustable start point and span
potentiometers for voltage input
CP-8511 Field adjustable zero potentiometer
Manual Override Auto/manual switch enables output
override using a manual output potentiometer, LED goes off when in Manual mode (CP-8511 only)
Feedback
Auto/manual feedback provided
by isolated open collector output transistor (TP1, TP2) (CP-8511 only)
Operating Temperature
32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing
Mounting Vertical, within 5°
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1
Dimensions
CP-8551, -8552 4.6"H x 2.8"W x 2.6"D
(11.8 x 7.1 x 6.8 cm)
CP-8511 4.6"H x 5.0"W x 2.6"D
(11.8 x 12.7 x 6.8 cm)
Weight
CP-8551, -8552 0.4 lb (0.2 kg)
CP-8511 0.8 lb (0.4 kg)
Approvals UL 873, file #E9429; CSA,
C22.2 No. 24-93;
CE, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC,
low voltage directive 72/23/EEC
Warranty 1 year
ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER
CP-8500 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele CP-8500 Series Electronic / Pneumatic
Transducers handle a wide variety of pneumatic valve and
damper applications that require a 3-15 psig control signal
from an electronic controller output
. The CP-8551 is a basic
two-wire loop-powered unit with 4-20 mA input. The CP-8552
is a 3-wire unit with a jumper-selectable input for 4-20 mA, 6-9 VDC or 0-10 VDC
. The CP-8511 has a variety of jumper-
selectable inputs, a pressure gauge, manual override, and 20 VDC power output for auxiliary components
.
FEATURES
• P •
High accuracy and low hysteresis for precise control
• Long-term, driftless operation with high repeatability
for long life and high performance
• Low air consumption to save energy
• High airflow capacity to handle large pneumatic
components and long tubing runs
• Models with field-selectable inputs
• Integral 20 VDC auxiliary power supply, pressure gauge and manual override on CP-8511
SPECIFICATIONS
CP-8551 CP-8511-024

1506. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1434fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
WIRING
ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER
CP-8500 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
CP-8551 Current/pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA input, 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) output
CP-8552 Current or voltage/pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA, 6-9 VDC or 0-10 VDC input, 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) output
CP-8511-024 Current or voltage/pneumatic transducer, multiple field selectable mA or VDC inputs, 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) output
CP-8551
+4 to 20 mA Current Input Signal
Signal Common
MM
B
+
–
3 to 15 psig
(21 to 103 kPa
to controlled device
(direct acting)
Typical
Controller
+20 V supply: 50 mA maximum
current output to drive other devices.
COM terminal is internally connected to 24G. When
multiple CP-8511s or other devices are powered
by a common source, uniform wiring polarity must
be maintained between all 24H and 24G terminals.
Check to ensure that the controller’s COM terminal
is not connected to any other ground reference.
CP-8511
M
Branch
24H
24G
2
1
1
2
M
B
+IN
COM
24 Vac
50/60 Hz
+20
Optional
Control
Equipment
(Not Provided)
3 to 15 psig
(21 to 103 kPa
to controlled device
(direct acting)
CP-8552
MM
B
Signal Common
Voltage Input Signal
Power Common
24 Vac/dc
1
+IV1
24H
COM
1
2
3
CP-8552 Wired for voltage input
(factory calibrated for 0-10 VDC
range, if switched to 6-9 VDC
range the zero and span must
be re-calibrated)
+4 to 20 mA Current Input Signal
3 to 15 psig
(21 to 103 kPa
to controlled device
(direct acting)
CP-8552
MM
B
Signal Common
+IV1
COM
1
2
3
CP-8552 Wired for current input
(loop-powered)
CP-8551 2-wire 4-20 mA
loop powered
CP-8511 Wiring
CP-8511
24H
24G
+IN
COM
+20
OC
OE
Jumper
Square
post
Jumper
block
Zero adjust
potentiometer
Branch
pressure
gauge
Manual adjust
potentiometer
TP1 (+) & TP2 (-)
connection
Auto/manual
switch
Green LED
Main and branch
air connections
"B" & "M" (output)
Transducer
MANUALAUTO
MB
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
BAM-1000 35 mm aluminum DIN mounting rail 39.4" (1m) 860
DIN-3F 35 mm DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m), RoHS compliant 860
FILN05 Inline disposable air filter, straight, with barbs for 1/4" OD tubing 900
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901

1507. fi 1435TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER
EP-311/313 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Mamac Model EP-311/313 Series incorporates quiet
low wattage poppet valves and a pressure sensor to measure
and adjust the branch line pressure proportional to the input
.
This unit has no air consumption and is imm
une to supply
line pressure fluctuations
. The Model EP-313 incorporates
a manual override switch and, in the manual mode, the pressure can be increased or decreased with two push button switches
. This feature is most desirable for check out/
commissioning and manual operation in case of controller failure
.
The Univ
ersal 24 VAC/24 VDC supply voltage and field-
selectable 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, or 0-10 VDC inputs ensure single unit compatibility to most of the systems
. Unique steel
chassis design substantially reduces the o
verall size of the
unit and, at the same time, provides for ease of installation in a control panel directly or with a snap track. A precision
gauge is pro
vided for the branch line pressure
. Rugged
alumin
um manifold, brass barb fittings, floating poppet
solenoid valves, silicon pressure sensor, high performance electronics and a liberal five year warranty are some of the features which make the Model EP-311/313 Series the highest performing and the most reliable electropneumatic transducers in the industry
.
FEATURES
• 100% solid state piezoresistive silicon pressure sensor
• High air flow capacity
• Field selectable 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC input
• Smallest size in the industry
• Short circuit and reverse polarity protected inputs and
outputs
• Conforms to EMC and RoHS standards
Supply Voltage 18-28 VAC/VDC
Supply Current 150 mA
Input Signal 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC
Input Impedance 301Ω (4-20mA); 10K Ω
(0-5/0-10 VDC)
Signal Output 3-15 psig or 0-20 psig
Thermal Effect ±0.025%/°F(0.03%/°C)
Media Compatibility Clean dry air or any inert gas
Accuracy ±1% of FS
Operating Temperature 25° to 150°F (4° to 65°C)
Operating Humidity 10-90% RH Non-Condensing
Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Approvals CE, RoHS
Warranty 5 years
Maximum Supply Pressure
40 psig
SPECIFICATIONS
EP-311/313
For Technical / Applicaton Assistance call your nearest office
Shown in inches and mllimeteres (mm)
DIMENSIONS

1508. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1436fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
Wiring Diagram for 24 VAC Supply Configuration Wiring Diagram for 24 VDC Supply Configuration
WIRING
MODEL DESCRIPTION
EP311020 Electropneumatic transducer without manual override, 0-20 psig
EP311315 Electropneumatic transducer without manual override, 3-15 psig
EP313020 Electropneumatic transducer with manual override, 0-20 psig
EP313315 Electropneumatic transducer with manual override, 3-15 psig
ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER
EP-311/313 SERIES
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901

1509. fi 1437TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±10% or 24 VDC ±10%
Supply Current 120 mA half wave @ 24 VAC, or 50
mA @ 24 VDC
Input
PWA-1A, -2A Pulse-width-modulation (PWM)
PWA-1T, -2T Tri-state/Floating, two dry contacts
Input Signal
PWA-1A, -2A PWM: Time base 0.1-2.56, 5.2,
12.85, 25.6 or 0.59-2.93 seconds,
DIP switch selectable
PWA-1T, -2T Tri-state/floating: time base 2.55,
5.1, 12.75, 25.5, 59.9, 90.5, or 119.9
seconds, DIP switch selectable
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Accuracy ±1% of span
Output Simultaneous current and voltage
outputs
Output Burden 650Ω maximum (4-20 mA); 25 mA
maximum combined current and
voltage
Output Current Factory set at 4-20 mA, adjustable
0-20 mA zero and span
Output Resolution 255 steps
Output Voltage Factory set 1-5 VDC, adjustable
(18 VDC maximum)
Operating Temperature 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions
PWA-1A, -1T 3.4"H x 2.0"W x 4.8"D
(8.6 x 5.1 x 12.4 cm)
PWA-2A, -2T 3.3"H x 4.6"W x 1.5"D
(8.3 x 11.8 x 3.8 cm)
Weight 0.8 lb (0.36 kg)
Warranty 18 months
DESCRIPTION
The Kele PWA-1A Pulse-to-analog Transducer converts a DIP switch selectable pulse-width modulation (PWM) input to 0-18V and 0-20 mA outputs (factory set for 1-5V and 4-20 mA)
. The PW A-1A is furnished in a unique slim-line design
housing, which saves panel space, and can be ordered with an optional DIN rail mounting adapter
. The PWA-2A is a
snap-track mounted version of the PWA-1A.
The PWA-1T tri-state-to-analog transducer converts two
contact closure inputs (tri-state/floating control) to 0-18V
and 0-20 mA outputs (factory set for 1-5V and 4-20 mA)
. It is
mounted in a unique slim-line design housing, which sa
ves
panel space, and can be ordered with an optional DIN rail mounting adapter. The PW A-2T is the snap-track mounted
version of the PWA-1T.
On all models, the outputs are zero and span adjustable for
a wide variety of ranges (factory set for 4-20 mA and 1-5 V).
Current and v
oltage outputs are active simultaneously
.
FEATURES
• 255-step resolution in any range
• Adjustable zero and span
• Positive or negative input reference
• 0-20 mA and 0-18 VDC outputs (field adjustable)
• 4-20 mA and 1-5 VDC factory-set outputs
• User-selectable time base
• Jumper-selectable manual output
SPECIFICATIONS
PWA-1A
(PWA-1T)
PULSE / TRI-STATE-TO-ANALOG TRANSDUCERS
PWA SERIES
PWA-2A
(PWA-2T)

1510. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1438fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
VOLTS ADJ
MA ZERO
MA SPAN
MAN
OVR
See Table 1 -
LED Indication
+
+
–
–
24 VAC/VDC
Power Supply
24 VAC/VDC
Power Supply
24 VAC/VDC
for Signal
1-5V and 4-20 mA outputs
are simultaneously active
1-5V and 4-20 mA outputs
are simultaneously active
STAT
L2
SIG
L1
Manual Override Jumper
(shown in manual position)
+
–
1-5V
Output
4-20 mA Output
1-5V Output
4-20 mA Output
* PWM signal input terminals are optoisolated and polarity insensitive. PWM computer
contacts can switch either positive or negative PWM wire lead.
Separate 24V Supplies for Po wer and Signal Common 24V Supply for Po wer and Signal
BAS Controller
PWM Contacts*
BAS Controller PWM Contacts*
SIG IN +
SIG IN –
COM
24V PWR
MA OUT
VOLTS OUT
Manual Override
Potentiometer
MODE
TIME
BASE
MUX
ADDR
VOLTS ADJ
MA ZERO
MA SPAN
MAN
OVR
See Table 1.
LED Indication
STAT
L2
SIG
L1
Manual Override Jumper
(shown in manual position)
PWA-1A
(enclosed)
PWA-2A
(track mounted)
PWA-1A
(enclosed)
PWA-2A
(track mounted)
SIG IN +
SIG IN –
COM
24V PWR
MA OUT
VOLTS OUT
Manual Override
Potentiometer
MODE
TIME
BASE
MUX
ADDR
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
12345678
12345678
PWA-1A / PWA-2A WIRING
PWA-1A / PWA-2A PWM AND MULTIPLEXED PWM-TO-ANALOG CONTROL
PULSE / TRI-STATE-TO-ANALOG TRANSDUCERS
PWA SERIES
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
Switch 1
Switch
2 3
Switch
45 6
Switch
78
Operating
Mode
Operating
Mode
PWM Time
Base (sec)
Single Unit PWM Contro l
Always off
Off 0.1-2.65
0.1-5.2
0.1-12.85
0.1-25.6
0.59-2.93
Off Off Off Off On
Off On Off On Off
Off Off On On Off
Single Unit
PWM Control
OffO ff Off
JUMPER SETTINGS
MAN
OVR
MAN
OVR
Automatic
Control
Manual
Control
MANUAL OUTPUT CONTROL
The 24V power supply must be connected and the override jumper moved to the MAN OVR
position covering the center and inner jumper pins. The manual adjustment potentiometer can
then be used to vary the output.
AUTOMATIC OUTPUT CONTROL
Move the override jumper to cover the center and the outer jumper pins.

1511. fi 1439TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
L2- STAT (green) L1- SIG (red)
Steady Green Steady Red
Power On PWM or tri-state
Slow Green Blink signal present
Attention mode
Rapid Green Blink
Select mode
VOLTS ADJ
MA ZERO
MA SPAN
TS POL
STAT
L2
SIG
L1
MAN
OVR
Manual Overri de Jumper
(shown in manual position)
Manual Overri de Potentiometer
VOLTS
OUT
MA
OUT
COM
24 V
PWR
SIG IN
SIG IN
+
–
+
–
PWA-1T (enclosed)
PWA-2T (track mounted)
24 VAC/VDC
Power Supply
1-5V and 4-20 mA outputs
are simultaneously active
1-5V
Output4-20 mA
Output
The PWA-1T and PWA-2T provide a 4-20 mA current source and 1-5 VDC
output proportional to the length of time an increase or decrease signal is
held. A contact closure wired in series with the SIG IN + terminal will
increase the output signal in proportion to the length of the signal given.
A contact closure wired in series with the SIG IN – terminal will decrease
the output signal in proportion to the length of the signal given.
Tri-state example: Using a standard PWA-1T
or PWA-2T with a 25.5-
second time base and a 4-20 mA and 1-5V span with output currently at
4 mA and 1V, pulsing would operate as follows:
1. 5.1-sec increase pulse issued
2. Another 5.1-sec increase pulse issued
3. 5.1-sec decrease pulse issued
Output increases 20% to 7.2 mA, 1.8V
Output increases another 20% to 10.4 mA, 2.6V
Output decreases 20% to 7.2 mA, 1.8V
See Table 1.
LED Indication
BAS
Controller
Tri-state
Contacts
Increase
Decrease
– ++
+
–
–
PWA-1T / PWA-2T TRI-STATE-TO-ANALOG CONTROL
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
Switch
2 3
Switch
45 6
Switch
78
Operating
Mode
Operating
Mode
Tri-state
Time Base
Tri-state control Off 2.55 sec
5.1 sec
12.75 sec
25.5 sec
59.9 sec
90.5 sec
119.9 sec
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
Tri-state Control Off Off Off
Switch 1
Always off
JUMPER SETTINGS
MAN
OVR
MAN
OVR
Automatic
Control
Manual
Control
PWA-1T / PWA-2T WIRING
TABLE 1. LED INDICATION
PULSE / TRI-STATE-TO-ANALOG TRANSDUCERS
PWA SERIES
MANUAL OUTPUT CONTROL
The 24V power supply must be connected and the override jumper moved to the "MAN OVR"
position covering the center and inner jumper pins. The manual adjustment potentiometer can
then be used to vary the output.
AUTOMATIC OUTPUT CONTROL
Move the override jumper to cover the center and the outer jumper pins.

1512. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1440fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Tools required: a multimeter and a signal generator.
The PWA-1A, PWA-2A, PWA-1T, and PWA-2T outputs are factory set at 4-20 mA and 1-5V. To change the calibration, see the
instructions below. After calibration, alternate between minimum and maximum input pulses and fine tune the mA and voltage
potentiometers for desired mA or volt outputs (typically just one more pass is necessary).
FOR APPLICATIONS REQUIRING CURRENT (mA) ONLY OR CURRENT AND VOLTAGE OUTPUT
1. Using a signal generator:
PWA-1A, -2A: Apply a minimum input pulse signal.
PWA-1T, -2T: Apply a contact closure equal to the selected time base, such as 25.5 sec, to the SIG - terminal.
2. With a multimeter connected to mA output, set MA ZERO potentiometer at desired minimum mA output.
3. Using a signal generator:
PWA-1A, -2A: Apply a maximum input pulse signal.
PWA-1T, -2T: Apply a contact closure equal to the selected time base to the SIG + terminal.
4. Set MA SPAN potentiometer at desired maximum mA output.
5. Calibration of mA output is complete. If voltage output is also required, proceed to step 6.
6. With multimeter connected to voltage output, set maximum voltage output desired with the VOLT ADJ potentiometer.
7. Determine the ratio of maximum mA output to minimum mA output (i.e., 20 mA maximum output: 4 mA minimum output = 5:1).
8. The minimum voltage is automatically set according to the ratio of maximum-to-minimum mA output. Using the example from
step 7 above for the mA range and using a 10V maximum voltage output, the ratio remains the same (i.e., 20 mA maximum: 4
mA minimum = 5:1 = 10V:2V). The minimum voltage output would be automatically set at 2V. Note: To change voltage output,
repeat Steps 3, 6, 7, and 8.
FOR APPLICATIONS REQUIRING VOLTAGE OUTPUT ONLY
1. Determine the minimum and maximum voltage output required (0-18V total range).
2. Using the following formula, determine the minimum mA output: minimum mA output = 20 mA x desired minimum volts desired
maximum volts
3. Using a signal generator:
PWA-1A, -2A: Apply a minimum input pulse signal.
PWA-1T, -2T: Apply a contact closure equal to the selected time base, such as 25.5 sec, to the SIG - terminal.
4. With a multimeter connected to mA output, set MA ZERO potentiometer at calculated minimum mA output (from formula in step
2).
5. Using a signal generator:
PWA-1A, -2A: Apply a maximum input pulse signal.
PWA-1T, -2T: Apply a contact closure equal to the selected time base to the SIG + terminal.
6. Set MA SPAN potentiometer at 20 mA.
7. With multimeter connected to voltage output, set the VOLT ADJ potentiometer to desired maximum voltage. The minimum
voltage is automatically set according to the ratio of maximum-to-minimum mA output.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL
PWA-1A
PWA-2A
PWA-1T
PWA-2T
DESCRIPTION
OPTIONS
PWA-1A 47Example: PWA-1A-47
Enclosed pulse-to-analog transducer with DIN rail mounting
Pulse-to-analog enclosed transducer
Pulse-to-analog snap-track mount transducer
Tri-state-to-analog enclosed transducer
Tri-state-to-analog snap-track mount transducer
47
C
DIN rail mounting adapter (For PWA-1A and PWA-1T only)
Factory calibrate for special output range (specify range when ordering)
CALIBRATION
PULSE / TRI-STATE-TO-ANALOG TRANSDUCERS
PWA SERIES

1513. fi 1441TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±10%, half-wave; or 24 VDC
±10%
Supply Current 50 mA maximum @ 24 VDC;
100 mA maximum @ 24 VAC
Input Jumper selectable and adjustable;
Voltage ranges from 0-1.09 VDC
(w/minimum span 55 mV) to 0-20
VDC (w/minimum span 1V); Current
ranges from 0-4 mA (minimum span
0
.2 mA) to 0-40 mA (minimum span
2.2 mA); Three-wire potentiometer
ranges from 0-100Ω to 0-10 kΩ; Two - wire variable resistance ranges from 0-100Ω to 0-5 kΩ
Input Signal
DC voltage, current, or resistance
Input Impedance 250Ω @ 0-4 mA & 0-40 mA; 156Ω @
0-1.09 VDC & 0-10.9 VDC; 293Ω @
0-2 VDC & 0-20 VDC
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Action Direct or reverse acting
Linearity <0.1% of span
Output Jumper selectable and fully
adjustable zero/span; 0-18 VDC @ 20 mA maximum load; 0-20 mA @ 650Ω maximum load
Output Current
For sensor excitation only, jumper
selectable; 1.2 mA @ 5 kΩ
maximum, 5 mA @ 1.5 kΩ maximum,
10 mA @ 750 kΩ maximum
Output Voltage For sensor excitation only, jumper
selectable; 1.2 VDC @ 12 mA
maximum (100Ω minimum),
5 VDC @ 12 mA maximum
(417Ω minimum), 10 VDC @ 12 mA
maximum (834Ω minimum)
Operating Temperature 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions
UAT- 1 3.4"H x 2.0"W x 4.8"D
(8.6 x 5.1 x 12.4 cm)
UAT- 2 3.3"H x 4.6"W x 1.0"D
(8.3 x 11.8 x 2.5 cm)
Weight 0.8 lb (0.36 kg)
Warranty 18 months
UNIVERSAL ANALOG TRANSDUCERS
UAT-1, UAT-2 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele UAT-1 and UAT-2 Series Universal Analog Transducers are used for analog signal conversion or signal scaling
. They will accept a DC voltage, current, or
resistive input signal and output a non-isolated voltage or current output
. These transducers can be direct or reverse
acting and are easily field calibrated to meet a wide variety of applications
.The UAT- 1 is furnished in a unique slim-
line design housing, which saves panel space, and can be ordered with an optional DIN rail mounting adapter
. The
UAT- 2 is a snap-track mounted version, and its operation is
identical to the UAT- 1.
SPECIFICATIONS
FEATURES
• DC voltage, current, or resistive input
• Inputs from 0-20 VDC, 0-40 mA or 0-10 kΩ
• Input and output jumper selectable and easily field
calibrated
• Outputs from 0-18 VDC or 0-20 mA
• Direct or reverse acting, jumper selectable
• Reference voltage and current available to power an
input device or sensor
UAT- 1
UAT- 2

1514. ÷Ω≥≤
TRANSDUCERS 1442÷Ω≥≤
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
1. Set output OUT jumper to V or MA as desired.
2. Set INPUT jumpers for type and range of input signal
present. See “Input Jumpers” table above.
3. If using the reference output for sensor excitation, set the
two REF jumpers for the proper output type and value.
Choices are 1.2V, 5V, 10V, 1.2 mA, 5 mA, 10 mA. If not using
the ref
erence output, jumper as a voltage output
.
4. Set action ACT jumper to direct D or reverse R as desired.
5. Set span jumper SPN to LO. Turn SPAN pot clockwise 25
turns.
6. Remove both Z1 jumpers. Trim ZERO 1 pot for minimum
desired output value. Presence/absence of input signal has
no eff
ect on this adjustment
.
7. Reinstall both Z1 jumpers. Set Z2 jumper to LO position.
8. Apply an input signal value that is to produce minimum
output. Trim ZERO 2 pot for minimum output value (same
value set in step 6). If desired value cannot be achieved,
remove Z2 jumper and trim ZERO 2 pot again. If desired
v
alue is still not achieved, place Z2 jumper in HI position and
trim ZERO 2 pot again
.
9. Apply input signal value that is to produce maximum output.
T
rim SPAN pot for maximum output value
. If SPAN pot does
not go high enough, move the SPN jumper from LO position
to HI position.
10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 until both minimum and maximum
output values are correct. Typically, just one more pass is
sufficient.
11. Apply a midpoint input signal. Verify that output goes to
center of output range.
UNIVERSAL ANALOG TRANSDUCERS
UAT-1, UAT-2 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
ZERO 1
ZERO 2
SPAN
Z1
Z2
SPN
ACT
INPUT
OUT
SIG OUT

24V PWR
COM
REF OUT
SIG IN
UAT-1
UAT-2
0-18 VDC or
0-20 mA Output
Jumper-Selectable,
Adjustable
24 VAC/VDC
Power Supply
COMSIG
IN
REF
OUT
0-20 VDC or
0-40 mA Input
Jumper-Selectable,
Adjustable
(no connection required
to REF OUT terminal)
COM SIG IN COM SIG IN
REF OUT (VOLTS)
Three-Wire Po tentiometer
100fi min to 10 kfi max
elemen
t
COM SIG IN
REF OUT
(MA)
Two-Wire Variable Resistance
100fi min to 5 kfi max
element

NRM NRM
HI LO
HI LO
D R
REF
1.2 5 10
MA V
X1 ÷ 10
MA 10V 20V
MA V
Power LED
WIRING
CALIBRATION
UAT-1 Example: UA T-1C Universal analog transducer with factory calibration
MODEL DESCRIPTION
UAT-1 Universal analog enclosed/field-calibrated transducer
UAT-2 Universal analog snap-track mounted/field-calibrated transducer
OPTIONS
C Factory calibration (specify input and output when ordering)
47 DIN rail mounting adapter (UAT-1 only)
C
INPUT INPUT REF
SIGNAL RANGE JUMPER POSITIONS JUMPERS
0-1.09V, 55 mV min span ÷ 10 10V
0-2V, 100 mV min span ÷ 10 20V
0-10.9V, 550 mV min span x 1 10V
0-20V, 1V min span x 1 20V
0-4 mA, 0.22 mA min span ÷ 10 mA
0-40 mA, 2.2 mA min span x 1 mA V 10
Three-wire potentiometer x 1 (None) V 10
10V ref (834Ω min)
Three-wire potentiometer x 1 (None) V 5
5V ref (417Ω min)
Three-wire potentiometer x 1 (None) V 1.2
1.2V ref (100Ω min)
Two-wire va riable resistance mA 10
10 mA ref (750Ω max)
Two-wire va riable resistance mA 5
5 mA ref (1.5 kΩ max)
Two-wire va riable resistance mA 1.2
1.2 mA ref (5 kΩ max)
If (ref mA) x (max Ω)
≥1.09V
x 1 (None)
If (ref mA) x (max Ω)
≤1.09V
÷ 10 (None)
If REF output is
required for
external sensor
excitation, jumper
for appropriate
voltage or current
source.If not used,
set jumpers to:
INPUT JUMPERS
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
UCM-SPA Setpoint potentiometer, 0-10 kΩ, three-wire potentiometer on stainless steel
plate for remote mounting, 0-100% setpoint 1363

1515. fi 1443TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 22-27 VDC, half-wave
Supply Current
VTI-1 50 mA
VTI-2 100 mA
Input 1-19 VDC range (1V minimum span)
or 4-40 mA range
Input Signal Loss threshold 0.7 VDC
Input Impedance
VTI-1 301 kΩ @ 1-19 VDC; 250Ω @ 4-40
mA with 4 mA minimum span; 500Ω
@ 2-38 mA with 2 mA minimum
span; 750Ω @ 1
.3-25 mA with 1.33
mA minimum span
VTI-2 150 kΩ @ 1-19 VDC; 250Ω @ 4-40
mA with 4 mA minimum span; 500Ω @ 2-38 mA with 2 mA minimum span; 750Ω @ 1
.3-25 mA with 1.33
mA minimum span
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Action Direct or reverse acting
Linearity <1% of span
Output
VTI-1 Single
VTI-2 Dual
Output Burden 850Ω maximum @ 24 VDC;
Rmaximum=(Vsupply - 7)/20 mA
Output Current 4-20 mA
Output Voltage Reference voltage 10 VDC @ 15 mA
maximum (1-19 VDC input), 6 VDC @ 10 mA maximum (1-11 VDC input)
Operating Temperature
32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions
VTI-1 1.8"H x 2.3"W x 0.8"D
(4.5 x 5.7 x 2.2 cm)
VTI-2 4.0"H x 2.3"W x 1.8"D
(10.2 x 5.7 x 4.5 cm)
Weight
VTI-1 2 oz (69 g)
VTI-2 6 oz (207 g)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 18 months
VOLTAGE & CURRENT CONVERTER / RESCALER
VTI SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele VTI Series Voltage and Current Converter / Rescaler will convert voltage signals in the range of 1-19V or current signals in the range of 1
.33-76 mA into a 4-20 mA
non-isolated signal. This current source signal can be direct
or reverse acting and can be used to drive grounded 4-20 mA loads utilizing a single power supply
. The VTI also accepts
an input from a resistive potentiometer. The VTI-1 is a single-
input, single-output device, and the VTI-2 accepts a single input and provides dual outputs
.
FEATURES
• Converts voltage, current or potentiometer signal into
4-20 mA signal
• Direct or reverse acting
• 6 or 10 VDC output reference voltage available to power
input device
• Loss of input signal results in 0 mA output
• LED indication of valid input signal (VTI-1)
• Dual output model
• Independently configurable outputs
APPLICATION
• Voltage to current conversion
• Resistance to current conversion
• Current to current scaling
• Setpoint adjustment using potentiometer
• Signal duplication (one input/two outputs)
• Averaging of 4-20 mA loops
• Signal reversal
• Signal sequencing
SPECIFICATIONS
VTI-2-H VTI-1

1516. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1444fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
4-20 mA
Output
24 VDC
Power Supply
V SIG IN
+ 24V PWR
COM
REF V OUT
MA SIG OUT
VTI with XR1
UCM-SPA or Potentio-
meter Sensor - any
end-to-end value from
100Ω to 10 kΩ. Specify
pot range when
ordering.
(red) (black)
Locate VTI close
to potentiometer
to minimize noise
pickup.
UAD-R1
Increase
4-20 mA
(blue)
(white)
(black)
(yellow)
(purple)
Using a Potentiometer to Vary a
4-20 mA Signal
4-20 mA
Output #1
24 VDC
Power
Supply
VTI-2
V SIG IN
COM
MA SIG OUT #1
REF V OUT
+ 24V PWR
Voltage
or
Current
Signal
(blue)
(white)
(black)
(purple)
(yellow)
4-20 mA
Output #2
MA SIG OUT #2
(brown)
(no connection)
Signal Duplication
Example: One 4-20 mA input becomes two identical 4-20 mA outputs.
4-20 mA Output
24 VDC
Power Supply
V SIG IN
+ 24V PWR
COM
REF V OUT
MA SIG OUT
VTI
4-20 mA
Voltage or
Current Signal
(blue)
(white)
(black)
(purple)
(yellow)
(no connection)
Voltage to Current,
Current to Current, and Signal Reversal
For signal reversal (20-4 mA OUT), specify reverse acting when ordering.
4-20 mA
Output #1
24 VDC
Power
Supply
VTI-2
V SIG IN
COM
MA SIG OUT #1
REF V OUT
+ 24V PWR
(white)
(black)
(purple)
(yellow)
4-20 mA
Output #2
MA SIG OUT #2
(brown)
(no connection)
Voltage
or
Current
Signal
(blue)
Signal Sequencing

Example: Output #1 is 4-20 mA ov er a 4-12 mA (1-3V) input.
Output #2 is 4-20 mA over a 12-20 mA (3-5V) input.
WIRING
VOLTAGE & CURRENT CONVERTER / RESCALER
VTI SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
OPTIONS
-XR1 P otentiometer to current converter
(includes UAD-R1, potentiometer not included)
ENCLOSURE
- Leav e blank for snap-track mounting (VTI-1 only)
H 1/2'' Threaded hub mount
P P anel mount
D DIN rail mount
VTI-1 Voltage and current converter/rescaler, single output*
VTI-2 Voltage and current converter/rescaler, dual output*
Example: VTI-1-XR1
Potentiometer to current converter, snap-track mounted
Important! The VTI is
not intended for field
calibration and must be
factory-calibrated.
Please supply the
following information at
time of order: input,
output, and direct or
reverse acting.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
*
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
UCM-SPA Setpoint potentiometer, 0-10 kΩ, three-wire potentiometer on stainless
steel plate for remote mounting, 0-100% setpoint 1363

1517. fi 1445TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage
DT13E-120 120 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz
DT13E-24 24 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz
Supply VA
DT13E-120 6 VA
DT13E-24 12 VA
Input Current or voltage, jumper selectable
Input Signal 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC,
1-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC,
0-15 VDC, or 3-15 VDC
Input Impedance 20 kΩ @ 5 VDC; 13.3 kΩ @ 10 VDC;
12 kΩ @ 15 VDC; 125Ω maximum @
20 mA
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Linearity Better than 0.5% of span
Isolation 1000 V (DC or AC peak) maximum
Output Current or voltage, jumper selectable,
zero/span adjustable to 20% offset
Output Current 0/4-20 mA, 650Ω maximum load
Output Voltage 0-5 VDC, 1-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC,
2-10 VDC, 0-15 VDC, or 3-15 VDC;
6 mA maximum load
Response Time 70 ms typical
Operating Temperature 14° to 140°F (-10° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 2.3"H x 5"W x 1.3"D
(5.7 x 12.7 x 3.2 cm)
Weight 0.65 lb (0.3 kg)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
ISOLATED DC TO DC TRANSMITTER
DT13E SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The DT13E is a signal isolator that accepts a current or
voltage input and provides a linearly transferred current or
voltage output
. The input and output are electrically isolated,
making the DT13E useful for ground-loop elimination, common-mode signal rejection and noise pickup reduction
.
The
DT13E is designed to function effectively in electrically
noisy environments
. The DT13E can interface with recorders,
data loggers, personal computers, programmable controllers, HVAC controllers, building automation controllers, variable speed drives, and other process monitoring and control systems
. Snap-track is included for easy mounting.
OPERATION
The DT13E Series input-conditioning circuitry scales and
filters the DC input and drives a precision isolator, which
carries the signal across the isolation barrier
. The output side
of the isolator drives a circuit that reconverts the signal into a replica of the input, which is again scaled (if necessary) to meet the user's requirement
.
SPECIFICATIONS
FEATURES
• Eliminates ground loop wiring problems
• Multiple input/output ranges are jumper-selectable
• 24 and 120 VAC powered models
• Snap-track mounting for easy installation
DT13E (0.5% linearity)

1518. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1446fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Table 1 shows the input and output configurations available
with the DT13E. Determine the signal requirements for the
application, and set the input and output jumpers according to the table
. The input jumpers are located on the DT13E near
the SIG IN terminals. The output jumpers are located near the
SIG OUT terminals. If CAL appears in the table for desired
signals,the DT13E will also require field calibration of the zero and span pots
.
To field calibrate the DT13E, apply the appropriate supply
voltage to the AC power terminals. The red PWR LED will be
on continuously. Apply the minimum input signal to the SIG IN
terminals. Adjust the zero pot until desired minimum output is
reached. Now apply the maximum input signal, and adjust the
span pot until the desired maximum output is reached. Repeat
this process as necessar
y until accurate results are achieved
.
ISOLATED DC TO DC TRANSMITTER
DT13E SERIES
Input
signal
mA or V
+
–
Sourcing output signal mA or V
+
–
Zero pot
mA
Volt
5V
10V
15V
mA
5V
10V
15V
Volts mAOUT
IN AC Power
Input jumpers
Span pot
Output jumpers
Output jumpers
Power LED
AC Power
VAC IN
DT13E
WIRING
SETUP / CALIBRATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DT13E-120 Isolated DC-to-DC transmitter, 120 VAC
DT13E-120-C Isolated DC-to-DC transmitter, 120 VAC, pre-calibrated
DT13E-24 Isolated DC-to-DC transmitter, 24 VAC
DT13E-24-C Isolated DC-to-DC transmitter, 24 VAC, pre-calibrated
INPUT
SIGNAL
0-20 mA
4-20 mA
0-5V
1-5V
0-10V
2-10V
0-15V
3-15V
TABLE 1. INPUT AND OUTPUT CONFIGURATIONS
OUTPUT SIGNAL
JUMPERS 0-20 mA 4-20 mA 0-5V 1-5V 0-10V 2-10V 0-15V 3-15V
INPUT 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA
OUTPUT mA, mA mA, mA, CAL V, V, 5V V, V, 5V, CAL V, V, 10V V, V, 10V, CAL V, V, 15V V, V, 15V, CAL
INPUT 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA
OUTPUT mA, mA, CAL mA, mA V, V, 5V, CAL V, V, 5V V, V, 10V, CAL V, V, 10V V, V, 15V, CAL V, V, 15V
INPUT 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V
OUTPUT mA, mA mA, mA, CAL V, V, 5V V, V, 5V, CAL V, V, 10V V, V, 10V, CAL V, V, 15V V, V, 15V, CAL
INPUT 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V
OUTPUT mA, mA, CAL mA, mA V, V, 5V, CAL V, V, 5V V, V, 10V, CAL V, V, 10V V, V, 15V, CAL V, V, 15V
INPUT 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V
OUTPUT mA, mA mA, mA, CAL V, V, 5V V, V, 5V, CAL V, V, 10V V, V, 10V, CAL V, V, 15V V, V, 15V, CAL
INPUT 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V
OUTPUT mA, mA, CAL mA, mA V, V, 5V, CAL V, V, 5V V, V, 10V, CAL V, V, 10V V, V, 15V, CAL V, V, 15V
INPUT 15V 15V 15V 15V 15V 15V 15V 15V
OUTPUT mA, mA mA, mA, CAL V, V, 5V V, V, 5V, CAL V, V, 10V V, V, 10V, CAL V, V, 15V V, V, 15V, CAL
INPUT 15V 15V 15V 15V 15V 15V 15V 15V
OUTPUT mA, mA, CAL mA, mA V, V, 5V, CAL V, V, 5V V, V, 10V, CAL V, V, 10V V, V, 15V, CAL V, V, 15V

1519. fi 1447TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
DESCRIPTION
The UMM Series universal math module is a unique
multifunction micro-computer based interface that can be
utilized to solve a variety of signal selection and manipulation
applications
. The UMM-1 is furnished in a unique slim-line
design housing, which saves panel space, and can be ordered with an optional DIN rail-mounting adapter
. The
UMM-2 is a snap-track mounted version with operation identical to the UMM-1
. The UMM models accept up to four
analog inputs, providing a single analog output according to the operating mode selected
. This versatile product allows the
user to select from many operating modes.
FEATURES
• DIP switch-selectable operating modes
• Accepts voltage or milliamp input signals
• LED status indication
• User-selectable direct or reverse acting
• Accepts 24 VAC/VDC power
• Slim-line design housing or snap-track mounted
models
• Furnished with detailed setup instructions
USER-SELECTABLE OPERATING MODES
• Highest or lowest signal selection
• Minimum or peak signal hold selection
• Multiple signal averaging
• High and low limit control
• Action reversal
• Square root extraction (SQ model)
UNIVERSAL MATH MODULE
UMM-1, UMM-2 SERIES
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±10%, half-wave;
or 24 VDC ±10%
Supply Current 50 mA maximum @ 24 VDC; 100 mA
maximum @ 24 VAC
Input 4 analog inputs
Input Signal 0-5 VDC, 1-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC,
2-10 VDC, 0-20 mA, or 4-20 mA
Input Impedance 70 kΩ with voltage input; 250Ω with
current input
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Action Direct or reverse, DIP switch
selectable
Accuracy
Standard ±1% of full scale
SQ Model 1% FS @ 25%-100% of range, 1.5%
FS @ 10%-25% of range, 2% FS @ 5%-10% of range, 5% FS @ 0%-5% of range
Output
1 analog output, voltage or current
Output Burden 500Ω minimum @ 5 VDC; 1000Ω
minimum @ 10 VDC; 650Ω maximum @ 20 mA
Output Current
Selectable: 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA
Output Voltage Selectable: 0-5 VDC, 1-5 VDC,
0-10 VDC or 2-10 VDC
Operating Temperature 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions
UMM-1 3.4"H x 2.0"W x 4.8"D
(8.6 x 5.1 x 12.4 cm)
UMM-2 3.3"H x 4.6"W x 1.0"D
(8.3 x 11.8 x 2.5 cm)
Weight
UMM-1 0.88 lb (0.4 kg)
UMM-2 0.44 lb (0.2 kg)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 18 months
SPECIFICATIONS
UMM-1
UMM-1-SQ
UMM-2
UMM-2-SQ

1520. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1448fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
UNIVERSAL MATH MODULE
UMM-1, UMM-2 SERIES
High and Low Signal Selection
The UMM configured for this mode will accept two, three, or four
analog input signals and output the signal that is either the highest or
lowest of the input signals
. To increase the number of input signals,
UMMs may be cascaded by wiring the output of one UMM to the input of another UMM
. Two UMMs wired in this fashion would allow
up to seven input signals. No calibration is required; however, high
and low limits can be set on the output.
Minimum and Peak Hold Signal Selection
In the peak hold operating mode, up to three analog inputs are monitored
. The highest (peak) input signal is remembered, passed
to the output, and held until a higher input signal level occurs. In the
minim
um hold mode, up to three inputs are monitored
. The lowest
input signal is remembered, passed to the output, and held until a lower input signal level occurs
. A contact closure will reset the output
signal.
Multiple Signal Averaging
The UMM configured for this operating mode will accept two, three, or four analog input signals and output a signal that is the average of the input signals
. To average up to seven inputs, the primary UMM
accepts four inputs, and its output is wired to the first input of the secondary UMM
. The output of the secondary UMM is the average of
up to seven inputs. The sum can be derived by multiplying the signal
average by the number of inputs.
High/Low Limit Control and Signal Reversal
The UMM may be used as a single input limit control, allowing the output to be limited to an adjustable upper and/or lower limit
. When
the input signal reaches the upper or lower limit setting, the output will remain at that particular limit setting
. The high/low limit function
can also be combined with other operating modes such as high/low signal selection, peak/minimum hold selection, or signal averaging
.
The output of the UMM can be selected to increase as the input increases (direct action), or the output can be re
versed to decrease
as the input increases (reverse action)
.
Square Root Extraction When the UMM is ordered with the optional square root function (SQ option), it ma
y be used as a single input square root extractor,
providing an output proportional to the square root of the input signal.
The square root function can also be combined with other oper
ating
modes such as high/low signal selection, peak/minimum hold selection, or signal averaging.
ORDERING INFORMATION
24 VAC
or VDC
Signal Out
mA or V
Signal
mA or V
Signal
mA or V
Signal
mA or V
Signal
Mode
DIP
Switches
M
O
D
E
UMM
Input
Jumpers
Output Jumper
SIG OUT
24V PWR
COM
SIG IN4
SIG IN3
SIG IN2
SIG IN1
+
+
–
–
IN4
IN3
IN2
IN1
OUT
DIS MA V
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
HI
LIM
LO
LIM
* In the minimum and peak hold operating modes, a
normally open momentary switch is wired to SIG IN4
and 24V PWR to allow reset of the output.
DESCRIPTIONMODEL
UMM-1
UMM-2
OPTIONS (factory installed only)
SQ
47
Example: UMM-1-SQ-47
Universal math module with square root option and DIN rail
mounting adapter
Universal math module enclosed in slim-line housing
Universal math module snap-track mounted
Square root extractor
DIN rail mounting adapter (UMM-1 and UMM-1-SQ only)
WIRING (TYPICAL)USER-SELECTABLE OPERATING MODES
• All input signals wired to the SIG IN terminals must
be of the same type and range.
• The output signal from the SIG OUT terminal
must be of the same type and range as the input
signals.
• Always disable (jumper to DIS position) any input
that is not to be used.

1521. fi 1449TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±10%, half-wave; or 24 VDC
±10%
Supply Current 220 mA @ 24 VAC, 100 mA @
24 VDC
Input Various selectable analog and pulse
width modulated (PWM)
Input Signal 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 1-5
VDC, 0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC, 0-15
VDC, 3-15 VDC, or PWM
Pulse Rate PWM time base selections
0.1-2.65, 5.2, 12.85, 25.6,
or 0.59-2.93 seconds
Input Impedance 250Ω (current); 27.5 kΩ (voltage)
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Accuracy ±1% of span
Linearity ±1% of span
Output 0-135Ω, 0-1000Ω, 0-270Ω, 0-500Ω,
Special range (specify upon ordering, min span = 30 Ω,
maximum span = 1 MΩ)
Output Resolution 255 steps
Operating Temperature 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 3.3"H x 6.5"W x 1.3"D
(8.3 x 16.5 x 3.2 cm)
Weight 0.7 lb (0.32 kg)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
UNIVERSAL RESISTANCE TRANSDUCER
RES-1E SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The RES-1E Series universal resistance transducer provides
a precision resistance output for DDC control of electric
actuators or other electronic devices that operate from a
variable resistive circuit
. Various selectable analog and
pulse-width modulated (PWM) inputs are available, and the transducer may be powered from 24 VAC or 24 VDC
. The
RES-1E is furnished with snap-track for easy mounting.
FEATURES
• Ideal f •
Replaces potentiometer or temperature sensor in boiler/c
hiller reset circuits
• 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-5V, 1-5V, 0-10V, 2-10V, 0-15V, 3-15
VDC or PWM input signals, DIP switch selectable
• AC/DC powered
• Replaces motorized slide-wire potentiometer controller
• 0-135Ω, 0-270Ω, 0-500Ω, and 0-1000Ω standard outputs,
custom ranges available
• Snap-track mounting
• Failsafe mode and signal loss feature
• LED indication
OPERATION
The RES-1E simulates a three-wire potentiometer output
proportional to an analog or PWM input signal. The resistance
between output terminals B and R increases (W and R decreases) as the input signal increases
. The resistance
between output terminals B and R decreases (W and R increases) as the input signal decreases
. When 24V power
is interrupted at the RES-1E power terminals, the failsafe mode internally connects the output terminals to the fallback pot terminals, allowing an alternate back-up controller or potentiometer to be used for control
.
SPECIFICATIONS

1522. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1450fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
* For analog inputs that are valid all the wa y to zero, there is no condition where power loss memory and signal loss hold apply.
INPUT TYPE SIGNAL RANGE OPTIONS SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
Analog 0-5V * 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0
Analog 0-10V * 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0
Analog 0-15V * 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
Analog 0-20 mA * 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
Analog 1-5V No PLMEM, no SLH 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
Analog 2-10V No PLMEM, no SLH 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
Analog 3-15V No PLMEM, no SLH 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
Analog 4-20 mA No PLMEM, no SLH 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1
Analog 1-5V No PLMEM, with SLH 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
Analog 2-10V No PLMEM, with SLH 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1
Analog 3-15V No PLMEM, with SLH 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
Analog 4-20 mA No PLMEM, with SLH 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
Analog 1-5V With PLMEM, with SLH 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1
Analog 2-10V With PLMEM, with SLH 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
Analog 3-15V With PLMEM, with SLH 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Analog 4-20 mA With PLMEM, with SLH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
POWER LOSS MEMOR Y, ANALOG INPUT WITH NON-ZERO START VALUE:
At powerup, if analog input is below normal start value, the resistance output will go to the value set by the last valid analog input
before power was lost.
If power loss memory is disabled and, at powerup, analog input is below norm al start value, the resistance output will go to minimum
until a va lid analog input is received.
SIGNAL LOSS HOLD, ANALOG INPUT WITH NON-ZERO START VALUE:
If the analog input drops below the normal start value, the resistance output will stay at the value set by the last va lid analog input.
If signal loss hold is disabled and the analog input drops below the normal start value, the resistance output will go to minimum until
a valid analog input is received.
Option “PLMEM” = power loss memory, option “SLH” = signal loss hold
Res Output
BR W
Fallback
BR W
Pulse
Signal24V COMCOM
I-V
Sig
12345678
STAT
Analog Current or
Voltage Input Signal
+
–
+
–
Resistance Output
to controlled device
Optional Connection
to back up thermostat
or potentiometer
B-R Resistance increases
with signal increase
W-R Resistance decreases
with signal increase
24 VAC/VDC Po wer
Notes:
1. If the RES-1E input signal is voltage, multiple RES-1Es may be powered
from the same power supply or transformer.
2. If the RES-1E input signal is current from a current sourcing controller,
multiple units may be powered from the same power supply or transformer.
3. If input signal is current from a current sinking controller, each RES-1E must
have a separate power supply or transformer.
UNIVERSAL RESISTANCE TRANSDUCER
RES-1E SERIES
ANALOG CONTROL WIRING
CURRENT OR VOLTAGE ANALOG CONTROL

1523. fi 1451TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
Separate 24V Supplies for Po wer and Signal
** PWM signal input terminals are optoisolated and polarity insensitive.
PWM computer contacts can switch either PWM wire lead.
BAS Controller
PWM Contacts**
24 VAC/VDC
Power
Res Output
BR W
Fallback
BR W
Pulse
Signal
24V COMCOM
I-V
Sig
12345678
STAT
24 VAC/VDC
Power
+
–
Resistance Output
to controlled device
Optional Connection
to back up thermostat
or potentiometer
Optional Connection
to back up thermostat
or potentiometer
B-R Resistance increases with signal increase
W-R Resistance decreases
with signal increase
B-R Resistance increases
with signal increase
W-R Resistance decreases
with signal increase
24 VAC/VDC
Power for PVM
Signal
BAS Controller
PWM Contacts**
Common 24V Supply for Po wer and Signal
Res Output
BR W
Fallback
BR W
Pulse
Signal
24V COMCOM
I-V
Sig
12345678
STAT
Resistance Output to controlled device
INPUT TYPE SIGNAL RANGE OPTIONS SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
PWM 0.1-2.65 sec No PLMEM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PWM 0.1-2.65 sec With PLMEM 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
PWM 0.1-5.2 sec No PLMEM 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
PWM 0.1-5.2 sec With PLMEM 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
PWM 0.1-12.85 sec No PLMEM 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
PWM 0.1-12.85 sec With PLMEM 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
PWM 0.1-25.6 sec No PLMEM 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
PWM 0.1-25.6 sec With PLMEM 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
PWM 0.59-2.93 sec No PLMEM 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
PWM 0.59-2.93 sec With PLMEM 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
POWER LOSS MEMORY , PWM INPUT:
At powerup, the resistance output will go to the value set by the last PWM pulse before power was lost. The output will remain at
this value until a new PWM pulse is received.
If power loss memory is disabled, the resistance output will go to minimum at powerup and remain there until a new PWM pulse is
received.
Option “PLMEM” = power loss memory
UNIVERSAL RESISTANCE TRANSDUCER
RES-1E SERIES
PWM CONTROL
PWM CONTROL WIRING

1524. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1452fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
INSTALLATION
Mount the device inside an enclosure near the controlled equipment, avoiding areas of temperature extremes, corrosive vapors,
or electromagnetic interference
. Use track slots for screw attachment. Note: Protect circuit board from metal filings created during
panel construction. Make all connections according to wiring diagram or as shown in the job diagram and in compliance with
national and local codes. Use shielded #18 gauge cable for connections from the transducer to the controller. The unit comes
precalibrated for easy application.
CHECKOUT
Tools required: Volt ohmmeter, signal analyzer or other signal source.
1. Verify that the input selector switches are in the correct position for the input signal to be used.
2. Verify that either 24 VAC or VDC is present at the power terminals.
3. With the controlled device disconnected, connect an ohmmeter to the B and R terminals on the RES-1E output. With no signal
input, the resistance between B and R should be at minimum, and the resistance between W and R should be at maximum resistance
.
4. Apply the minimum input signal for the range selected to the input terminals. The RES-1E should output less than 2% of full
range, the minimum resistance of the RES-1E.
5. Slowly increase the input signal. The resistance reading will increase linearly toward full range. If the resistance does not vary
with the input signal, check the polarity of the input wiring.
LED INDICATION
Steady green: power on and idle Slow green blink (three blinks/pause): Signal loss hold Rapid green blink: PWM pulse being received
CAUTION: Make all connections with power removed. Failure to do so could result in circuit board damage.
UNIVERSAL RESISTANCE TRANSDUCER
RES-1E SERIES
INSTALLATION AND CHECKOUT
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
RES-1E Universal resistance transducer, 0-135Ω output
RES-1E-1000 Universal resistance transducer, 0-1000Ω output
RES-1E-270 Universal resistance transducer, 0-270Ω output
RES-1E-500 Universal resistance transducer, 0-500Ω output
RES-1E-S Universal resistance transducer, special range output
(specify Ω range; min span = 30 Ω, maximum span = 1 MΩ, start can be above zero)
RELATED PRODUCTS
R-PAK Resistance board only for RES-1E (specify range, minimum span 3Ω, maximum span 1 MΩ)

1525. fi 1453TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS
EFP, EPW, EPC, PTA AND PTA2 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Floating Point to Pneumatic Output
Input: Two Digital (relay, triac, transistor) 9-24 VAC/VDC.
Output:
Jumper selectable 0-10, 0-15, or 0-20 psig air
pressure
. Rate of Change: 45 sec., 90 sec., 1 min., and 2 min.
Man
ual Override
. Power: 24 VDC or 24 VAC @ 180 mA.
Size: 4.0"L x 3.5"W x 1.9"H (10.2 x 8.9 x 4.8 cm).
Input: Floating Point
Output: Pneumatic (0-10 psig, 0-15 psig, 0-20 psig, & field adjustable)
EFP Series
DESCRIPTION
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) to Pneumatic Output.
Input: 0.1-10, 0.02-5, 0.1-25.5, 0.59 to 2.93, 0.023-6, or 0-10
sec. duty cycle, or 0-20 V phase cut. Trigger: 9-24 VAC/VDC.
Output:
0-10, 0-15, 0-20 psig
. Manual override. Feedback: 0-5
VDC = output. Power: 24 VDC or 24 VAC @ 200 mA. Valved
exhaust & Fail-safe model, or bleed type of 14, 41, or 73 scim
.
Input: Analog
Output: Pneumatic (0-10 psig, 0-15 psig, 0-20 psig, & field adjustable)
EPW Series
DESCRIPTION
Analog to Pneumatic Output Input: 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, and 0-15 VDC @ Infinity Ω or 0-20 mA @ 250Ω
. Output: 0-20 psig. Feedback: 0-5 VDC
= selected output. Power: 24 VDC or 24 VAC (50/60 Hz) @
180 mA. Valved exhaust (EPC2), Fail-Safe model (EPC2FS),
and bleed-type 41 scim (EPC). Anodized Aluminum manifold.
Siz
e: 3
.25"L x 3.25"W x 1.88"H (8.26 x 8.26 x 4.78 cm).
Input:
Analog
Output: Pneumatic (0-10 psig, 0-15 psig, 0-20 psig, & field adjustable)
EPC
DESCRIPTION
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) to Analog Current or Voltage Output
.
Input: PWM (relay, transistor, or triac): 0.02-5, 0.023-6, 0.1-10,
0.1-25.5, or 0.59-2.93, 0-10 sec. 0-10 sec. duty cycle pulse.
Fle
xible Output (Adjustable or Fixed): 0-20 VDC or 0-20 mA
.
P
ower: 24-35 VDC or 21
.6 to 26.4 VAC 50/60 Hz @ 250 mA.
Input: PWM
Output: Analog (voltage or current)
PTA Series
DESCRIPTION
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) to Analog Current or Voltage Output
.
Input: PWM (relay, transistor, or triac) Ver 1: 0.02-5.0, 0.59-
2.93, 0.1-10, or 0.1-25.5 sec. Ver 2: 0-10 seconds (continuous
pulse sampled in 10 sec. window), 0.23-6, or 0-25.2 sec.
Output r
ange: 0-10 VDC
. Power: 24 VDC or 24 VAC @
135 mA. Size: 2.2"L x 2.25"W x 1.0"H (5.6 x 5.7 x 2.5 cm).
Input:
PWM
Output: Analog (0-10 VDC)
PTA2 Series

1526. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1454fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE .kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
ELECTRONIC TRANSDUCERS
AAR, ARM, ATL, AUD AND 6N1-ISO SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Analog to Two Relay Outputs.
Input ranges and impedance: 0-12 VDC @ 1MΩ, 0-24 VDC
@ 20KΩ, 0-20 mA @ 499Ω. Output: Two (2) Form C relays,
rated 10 amps @ 120 VAC. Power: 24 VAC or 24 VDC @ 45
mA max.
Size: 3.25"L x 2.41"W x 1.00"H (8.26 x 6.12 x 2.54 cm).
Input: Analog
Output: Two Relays (high and low trip level & adjustable
deadband)
AAR
DESCRIPTION
Analog Current or Voltage Rescaling Module.
Re-scales/reverses analog signal. Input: 0-35 VDC @ 1MΩ,
0-44 mA @ 250Ω. Output: 0-20 VDC @ 5KΩ, 0-44 mA @
750Ω. Power: 24 VDC or 22-26 VAC @ 200 mA.
Size: 3.69"L x 2.17"W x 1.00"H (9.37 x 5.51 x 2.54 cm).
Input: Analog
Output: Analog (rescale & reverse)
ARM
DESCRIPTION
Analog Current or Voltage to Four Adjustable SPDT Relays.
Input ranges and impedance: 0-12 VDC @ 10MΩ, 0-24 VDC
@ 20KΩ and 0-20 mA @ 500Ω. Output: Four (4) form C
relays. Fixed deadband 3% standard (1% and 10% optional).
P
ower: 24 VAC or 24 VDC @ 180 mA max
.
Size: 3.25"L x 2.75"W x 1.5"H (8.26 x 6.99 x 3.81 cm).
Input: Analog
Output: Four relays (trip level adjustable & fixed deadband)
ATL Series
DESCRIPTION
Floating Point to Analog Output.
Two Digital Inputs: Contact closure, transistor, or Triac. Trigger
Level: 5-26.4 VDC or 24-26.4 VAC (50/60 Hz). Output: 10
presets from 0-1 VDC to 0-20 VDC and 0-20 mA. Rate of
Change:
5 to 360 seconds
. Power: 24-35 VDC or 24 VAC
(50/60 Hz) @ 208 mA.
Size: 3.75"L x 2.25"W x 1.15"H (9.53 x 5.72 x 2.92 cm).
Input: Floating Point
Output: Analog (voltage or current)
AUD Series
DESCRIPTION
Six Analog or Digital Inputs (Binary) to One Analog Output.
Input ranges and impedance: 0-5 V @ 1MΩ, 0-10 V @ 20KΩ,
0-20 V @ 10KΩ, 0-20 mA @ 249Ω, and digital inputs of 15,
24 VDC or 24 VAC. Output ranges: 0-5, 0-10, 0-20 VDC or
0-20 mA. Power: 24 VAC @ 255 mA max.
Size: 4.0"L x 4.6"W x 1.0"H (10.2 x 11.7 x 2.5 cm).
Input: Analog
Output: Analog (average, high, or lowest of 6, difference of 2 signals)
6N1-ISO

1527. fi 1455TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY .kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ANALOG/PWM/FLOATING POINT TRI-STATE TRANSDUCERS
DRN3.1, AIM1, AIM2, AFP AND DRN4 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Analog Input to Optically Isolated Analog Output
(1:1 Ratio) Input ranges and impedance: 0-5, 0-10 VDC @
20kΩ, and 0-20 mA @ 250Ω
. Output ranges and impedance:
0-5, 0-10 VDC @ 5kΩ, and 0-20 mA (source or sink) @ 500Ω
. Power: 24 VAC @ 100 mA max.
Size: 3.3"L x 3.4"W x 1.5"H (8.4 x 8.6 x 3.8 cm).
Input: Analog
Output: Analog (optically isolated)
DESCRIPTION
Analog Adjustable Input to Optically Isolated Analog Output
(Rescales & Limits Output). Input ranges and impedance: 0-1,
0-5, 1-5, 0-10, and 2-10 VDC @ 9.5kΩ, 0-1, 0-20 & 4-20 mA
@ 250Ω. Output: Same except for 0-1 VDC @ 5kΩ, & 0-20
mA @ 500Ω. Power: 24 VAC @ 200 mA max. Source or sink
inputs & outputs.
Size: 4.6"L x 3.3"W x 1.2"H (11.7 x 8.4 x 3.1 cm).
Input: Analog
Output: Analog (isolated, rescale, & limit)
DESCRIPTION
Analog to Floating Point
.
Selectable inputs: 0-5, 1-5, 0-10, 2-10, 0-15, 3-15 VDC,
0-20 & 4-20 mA. Output: Floating point (digital UP/DOWN).
Selectab
le rates of change: Standard- 30, 60 or 90 sec
., Ver.
2- 120, 150 or 180 sec., Ver.3 -14, 16.5 or 19 sec., Ver.4-
Same as Standard Version but relays do not turn off at min.
and max. Ver5: 90, 135, or 180 sec. Ver6: 18, 75, 360 sec.
P
ower: 24 VAC/ 24 VDC @ 190 mA max
.
Size: 4.0"W x 3.5"L x 1.2"H (10.2 x 8.9 x 3.1 cm).
Input: Analog
Output: Floating Point (isolated)
DESCRIPTION
Pulse Width Modulation/Analog/Floating Point/Tri-State to
Resistance Output.
Actuator mounted. Inputs-Pulse: 0.02-5, 0.59-2.93, 0.023-
6 and 0.1-25.5 sec. Digital Floating Point: 55 sec. rate of
change, Analog: 0-5, 1-5, 0-10, 2-10 VDC, & 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
. Output: 0-135Ω, 32 step resolution. Power 24 VDC or 24
VAC @ 130 mA.
Size: 2.3"L x 3.5"W x 1.5"H (5.8 x 8.9 x 3.8 cm).
Input: Analog, PWM, Floating Point
Output: Resistance (0-135Ω)
DRN3.1
AIM1
AIM2
AFP
DRN4
DESCRIPTION
Pulse Width Modulation / Analog / Floating Point to Optically
Isolated Resistance Output.
Input: 0.1-10, 0-10 sec. duty cycle, 0.023-6, 0.02-5, 0.59-2.93,
and 0.1-25.5 sec. Rates of change: available from 30-240 sec.,
Analog: 0-5, 1-5, 0-10, 2-10, 0-15, 3-15 VDC, 0-20 and 4-20 mA
. Output: 12 ranges, 0-135Ω to 0-40 kΩ and Custom. 256
Step Resolution. Power: 24 VDC/VAC @ 250 mA.
Size: 4.75"L x 3.25"W x 1.0"H (12.1 x 8.3 x 2.5 cm).
Input:
Analog, PWM, Floating Point
Output: Resistance (0-135Ω to 0-40kΩ & custom ranges)

1528. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1456fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±10%, half-wave; or 24 VDC
±10%
Supply Current 50 mA @ 24 VAC; 25 mA maximum
@ 24 VDC
Input 0.5-20 mA or 0.75-15 VDC, jumper
selectable
Input Impedance 250Ω (mA input); 10 kΩ (VDC input)
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Accuracy ±1%
Time Constant 30 seconds, jumper enabled
Output One SPDT relay, factory set at 12
mA, 9 VDC; adjustable via setpoint
potentiometer
Relay Differential Factory set at 0.5 mA or 0.375V,
adjustable 0.2-2V or 0.25-3 mA
Relay Output Rating 5A @ 120 VAC
Operating Temperature 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions
UCS-121 3.3"H x 1.5"W x 1.3"D
(8.2 x 3.8 x 3.2 cm)
UCS-121-H 4.0"H x 2.3"W x 1.8"D
(10.2 x 5.7 x 4.4 cm)
Weight 0.4 lb (0.18 kg)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 18 months
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - SINGLE STAGE
UCS-121 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The UCS-121 Series is a solid-state device used to control on/off type loads in HVAC and lighting systems from an analog current or voltage signal
. The UCS-121 can be used
to convert an analog current or voltage signal from a BAS controller or sensor/transmitter into a SPDT digital output
. The
UCS-121 is provided with a mounting track or in a hub-mount enclosure for easy installation
.
FEATURES
• One sta •
Voltage or current input
• LED indication of relay status
• Adjustable relay setpoint
• Adjustable relay differential
• Snap-track or hub enclosure
• Jumper-enabled time constant
S
P
T
D
I
F
To
Controlled
Load
Relay ON
LED
RLY
NO
RLY
COM
RLY
NC
24 V
PWR
COM
SIG
IN
24 VAC/VDC
Signal
mA or V
+
+
_
_
DIR REV
DLY NODLY
mA V
Input Ju mper
T.C. Jumper
Action Jumper
Relay N.O.
Relay N.C.
Relay
Common
WIRING
OPERATION The UCS-121 accepts a 0
.5-20 mA or 0.75-15V input signal
to produce a single-stage relay output. The relay has a single-
turn potentiometer adjustment to set the trip point. The relay
differential is factory set to 0.5 mA or 0.375V but can be
easily adjusted in the field using the single-turn differential adjustment potentiometer on the UCS-121
. With the action
jumper in the direct DIR position, the relay will energize when the input signal increases to the setting of the setpoint pot SPT and will de-energize when the input signal decreases below the setting of the differential pot DIF
. With the action
jumper in the reverse REV position, the relay will de-energize when the input signal increases to the setting of the SPT and will energize when the input signal decreases below the setting of the DIF
. To enable a 30-second time constant,
place the T.C. jumper in the DLY position. The NODLY position
removes the time constant.
SPECIFICATIONS
UCS-121

1529. fi 1457TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
The UCS-121 can be ordered preset to the application to save time during installation. Specify the -C option for factory setup and
calibration. The UCS-121 can also be set up and calibrated in the field.
Input Jumpers
Set the input jumper for the type of input signal, mA or V, to be used. Set the action jumper for either direct DIR or reverse REV
action. See Operation for a description of direct and reverse action.
Setpoint Adjustment
1. When making adjustments, the load being controlled should be disconnected from the UCS-121 and the T.C. jumper placed in
the NODL
Y position
.
2. Connect a meter in series with the SIG IN terminal and the 0.5-20 mA signal to read a current signal. To read a voltage input,
0.75-15 VDC, connect the meter across the COM and SIG IN terminals.
3. Turn the setpoint pot SPT fully counterclockwise to its minimum position.
4. Adjust the input signal to the desired relay trip point.
5. Turn the setpoint pot clockwise until the RELAY ON LED turns off (or turns on if the action jumper is in the REV reverse
position).
6. Adjust the relay trip point by slowly turning the setpoint pot SPT counterclockwise until the RELAY ON LED turns on (or turns
off if the action jumper is in the REV reverse position).
7. The relay trip point is now set. Verify setting by varying the input signal up and down and observing the RELAY ON LED.
8. Set the jumper to the DLY position to add a 30-second time constant or to the NODLY position for no time constant.
Differential Adjustment
The relay differential is factory set for 0.5 mA or 0.375V, which should be suitable for most applications without requiring any
adjustment. If the relay differential must be adjusted, follow these steps:
1. When making adjustments, the load being controlled should be disconnected from the UCS-121 and the T.C. jumper placed in
the NODL
Y position
.
2. The relay setpoint should be set prior to adjusting the relay differential. See instructions above.
3. Connect a meter in series with the SIG IN terminal and the 0.5-20 mA signal to read a current signal. To read a voltage input,
0.75-15 VDC, connect the meter across the COM and SIG IN terminals.
4. Adjust the input signal to any value greater than the relay trip point setting so that the RELAY ON LED turns on (or turns off if
the action jumper is in the REV reverse position).
5. Turn the differential pot DIF fully clockwise to its maximum position.
6. Adjust the input signal to the desired relay differential value. The relay differential value should be equal to the setpoint value
minus the required relay differential. For example, if the relay setpoint is adjusted for 10V and a 1V differential is required, the
input signal should be adjusted for a input value of 9V (10V - 1V = 9V).
7. Turn the differential pot very slowly counterclockwise until the RELAY ON LED turns off (or turns on if the action jumper is in the
REV reverse position).
8. The relay differential is now set. Verify settings by varying the input signal up and down and observing the RELAY ON LED.
9. Set the jumper to the DLY position to add a 30-second time constant or to the NODLY position for no time constant.
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - SINGLE STAGE
UCS-121 SERIES
ORDERING INFORMATION
CALIBRATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
UCS-121 Sequencer control module, single stage
UCS-121-C Sequencer control module, single stage, pre-calibrated
UCS-121-H Sequencer control module, single stage, hub enclosure
UCS-121-H-C Sequencer control module, single stage, hub enclosure, pre-calibrated
RELATED PRODUCTS
TR-3 Extra long 3-1/4"W x 4'L snap track

1530. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1458fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±10%, half-wave;
or 24 VDC ±10%
Supply Current 100 mA @ 24 VAC; 50 mA @
24 VDC maximum
Input 0-20 mA or 0-15 VDC, jumper
selectable
Input Impedance 250Ω (mA input); 49.7 kΩ
(VDC input)
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Accuracy ±1%
Output Two SPDT relays, adjustable via
setpoint potentiometers
Relay Differential Factory set at 0.5 mA or 0.375V,
adjustable using plug-in resistors
Relay Output Rating 10A @ 120 VAC
Operating Temperature 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Weight 0.4 lb (0.18 kg)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - TWO STAGE
UCS-221E
DESCRIPTION
The UCS-221E is a solid-state device used for multistage
control in HVAC systems, sequencing boilers or chillers, or
floating/tri-state control of VAV boxes from a single analog
signal
. The UCS-221E can be used to obtain a digital output
from a voltage or current producing sensor. Units may be
daisy chained to provide additional stages of control, and a mounting track is supplied for easy installation
.
OPERATION
The UCS-221E accepts a 0-20 mA or 0-15V input signal to
produce a two-stage relay output. Each relay has a multi-
turn potentiometer adjustment to set the pull-in point. Relay
1 can be jumper-selected to pull in on either a rise or fall in signal
. Relay 2 always pulls in on a signal rise. Individual relay
differential is easily adjusted by using different value plug- in differential resistors
. Multiple UCS models can be daisy
chained to oper
ate additional stages from one input signal
.
A maxim
um of eight slave units can be daisy chained
.
SPECIFICATIONS
2.25
(5.72)
2.25
(5.72)
1 2
24 V
POWER
COMMON
SIGNAL
INPUT
CHAIN
OUTPUT
1
SEQ
CH
V
MA
FLT
2
Depth: 1.19
(3.02)
in
(cm)
FEATURES
• Two stages of relay control
• Voltage or current input
• LED indication of relay status
• Adjustable relay setpoints
• Adjustable relay differentials
• Snap-track mounted
DIMENSIONS

1531. fi 1459TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - TWO STAGE
UCS-221E
Note: Chain out is used to connect the
master unit to the first slave.
Additional slaves are connected
from signal input to signal input.
Signal
(mA or V)
24 VAC/VDC
Jumper should be
in chain (CH) position
when using
UCS-221E
as a slave unit.
Plug-in Differential Resistors (1/4W, 1%)
18.2 k
Ω = 0.5 mA or 0.375V (factory supplied)
See Table 1 for other differentials.
Connections to
UCS slave units
(Max eight units)
24V Po wer
Terminal
Common
Terminal
Signal Input
Terminal
TABLE 1. OTHER DIFFERENTIALS
Other Differential Resistors can be used
(customer supplied)
9.1 kΩ
= 0.25 mA or 0.1875V
36.5 kΩ = 1.0 mA or 0.75V
54.9 kΩ = 1.5 mA or 1.125V
73.2 kΩ = 2.0 mA or 1.5V
+
–
+
–
Factory Relay Settings
Relay 1: 5.3 mA, 4V
Relay 2: 6.6 mA, 5V
Relay Contact Wiring for
Floating/Tri-state Contro l
(set mode Ju mper in FLT position)
1 2
CW CCW COM
Make all connections according to the diagram below or as shown on the job diagrams and in compliance with national
and local codes. Make all connections with power removed. Failure to do so could result in circuit board damage. Use
shielded #18-gauge cable for connections from the UCS-221E to the controller, shield grounded at the controller.
1 2
24 V
POWER
COMMON
SIGNAL
INPUT
CHAIN
OUTPUT
1
SEQ
CH
V
MA
FLT
2
1 2
24 V
POWE R
COMMON
SIGNAL
INPUT
CHAIN
OUTPUT
1
SEQ
CH
V
MA
FLT
2
WIRING
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
UCS-221E Sequencer control module, two relay outputs, field calibrated
UCS-221E-C Sequencer control module, two relay outputs, pre-calibrated (specify settings when ordering)
1. Set jumpers to desired position as follows:
Mode jumper - In FLT position, Relay 1 energizes on a decrease in signal. In the SEQ position, Relay 1 energizes on an
increase in signal. Relay 2 always energizes on an increase in signal.
Input jumpers - Select mA position f
or a 0-20 mA input, or V position for a 0-15 VDC input
. If the UCS-221E is used as a slave
control, place the bottle-plug jumper in the chain position.
2. Connect a meter in series with the SIGNAL INPUT terminal and the 0-20 mA (+) signal to read a current signal. To read a
voltage input, connect across the COMMON (-) and SIGNAL INPUT (+) terminals.
3. Adjust the input signal to the desired pull-in current or voltage for Relay 1.
4. If Relay 1 LED is on, turn setpoint adjustment potentiometer clockwise (counterclockwise if Relay 1 has mode jumper in FLT
position) until it de-energizes; otherwise, proceed to step 5.
5. Adjust Relay 1 pull-in point by turning the setpoint adjustment potentiometer counterclockwise (clockwise if Relay 1 has mode
jumper in FLT position) until the relay energizes. (The potentiometers are 25-turn potentiometers.)
6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for Relay 2 using setpoint adjustment potentiometer.
7. When using a 0-20 mA input, the CHAIN OUTPUT produces a 0 to 12 VDC signal, which is proportional to the input signal.
Connections should be made betw
een CHAIN OUTPUT and COMMON
. If a voltage input is used, the CHAIN OUTPUT is
directly proportional to the input.
SETUP / CALIBRATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
B-5 5"x4"x3" two-piece aluminum box with two 1/2" conduit knockouts 269

1532. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1460fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±10%, half-wave;
or 24 VDC ±10%
Supply Current 160 mA @ 24 VAC;
80 mA @ 24 VDC maximum
Input 0-20 mA or 0-15 VDC, jumper
selectable
Input Impedance 250Ω (mA input);
49.7 kΩ (VDC input)
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Accuracy ±1%
Output Four SPDT relays, adjustable via
setpoint potentiometers
Relay Differential Factory set at 0.5 mA or 0.375V,
adjustable using plug-in resistors
Relay Output Rating 10A @ 120 VAC
Operating Temperature 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Weight 0.6 lb (0.25 kg)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - FOUR STAGE
UCS-421E
DESCRIPTION
The UCS-421E is a solid-state device used for multistage
control in HVAC systems, sequencing boilers or chillers, or
floating/tri-state control of VAV boxes from a single analog
signal
. The UCS-421E can be used to obtain a digital output
from a voltage or current producing sensor. Units may be
daisy chained to provide additional stages of control, and a mounting track for easy installation
.
OPERATION
The UCS-421E accepts a 0-20 mA or 0-15V input signal to
produce a four-stage relay output. Each relay has a multi-turn
potentiometer adjustment to set the pull-in point. Relays 1
and 4 can be jumper-selected to pull in on either a rise or fall in signal
. Relays 2 and 3 always pull in on a signal rise. The
UCS-421E considers an input signal below 1 mA or 0.75V to
be a loss of signal, and all relays will de-energize if the SLD jumper is removed
. If the SLD jumper is installed, the signal
loss f
eature is disabled and the relays in the FLT mode will
stay energized
. Individual relay differential is easily adjusted
by using different value plug-in differential resistors. Multiple
UCS models can be daisy chained to oper
ate additional
stages from one input signal
. A maximum of eight slave units
can be daisy chained.
SPECIFICATIONS
2.25
(5.72)
3.66
(9.30)
Depth: 1.19
(3.02)
in
(cm)
CH
V
mA
SLD
FLT
SEQ
FLT
SEQ
1234
1 2 3 4
24V
POWER
COMMON
SIGNAL
INPUT
CHAIN
OUTPUT
FEATURES
• Four stages of relay control
• Voltage or current input
• LED indication of relay status
• Adjustable relay setpoints
• Adjustable relay differentials
• Loss of signal feature
• Snap-track mounted
DIMENSIONS

1533. fi 1461TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - FOUR STAGE
UCS-421E
CH
V
mA
SLD
FLT
SEQ
FLT
SEQ
1234
1 2 3 4
24V
POWER
COMMON
SIGNAL
INPUT
CHAIN
OUTPUT
Plug-in Differential Resistors (1/4W, 1%)
18.2 k
Ω = 0.5 mA or 0.375V (factory supplied)
See Table 1 for other differentials.Jumper should be in chain position (CH)
when using UCS-421E as a sla ve unit.
Remove jumper to enable
signal loss feature.
Chain Output is used to connect the master
unit to the first slave. Additional slaves are
connected from signal input to signal input.
Connections to UCS slav e
units (max eight units)
24V Po wer Terminal
Common Terminal
Signal Input Terminal
24 VAC/VDC
TABLE 1. OTHER DIFFERENTIALS
Other Differential Resistors can be used
(customer-supplied):
9.1 kΩ = 0.25 mA or 0.1875V
36.5 kΩ = 1.0 mA or 0.75V
54.9 kΩ = 1.5 mA or 1.125V
73.2 kΩ = 2.0 mA or 1.5V
Signal
mA or V
+
–
+
–
Factory Relay Settings
Relay 1: 5.3 mA, 4V
Relay 2: 6.6 mA, 5V
Relay 3: 8.0 mA, 6V
Relay 4: 9.3 mA, 7V
Relay Contact Wiring
for Floating/Tri-state
Control (set #1 mode
Jumper in FLT position)
1 (3) 2 (4)
CWCCW COM
Make all connections according to the diagram below or as shown on the job diagrams and in compliance with
national and local codes. Make all connections with power removed. Failure to do so could result in circuit
board damage. Use shielded #18-gauge cable for connections from the UCS-421E to the controller, shield
grounded at the controller.
WIRING
1. Set jumpers to desired position as follows:
Mode jumpers - In FLT position, Relays 1 and 4 energize on a decrease in signal. In the SEQ position, Relays 1 and 4 energize
on an increase in signal. Relays 2 and 3 always energize on an increase in signal.
Input jumpers - Select mA position f
or a 0-20 mA input or V position for a 0-15 VDC input
. If the UCS-421E is used as a slave
unit, place the bottle plug jumper in the chain position.
2. Connect a meter in series with the SIGNAL INPUT terminal and the 0-20 mA (+) signal to read a current signal. To read a
voltage input, connect across the COMMON (-) and SIGNAL INPUT(+) terminals.
3. Adjust the input signal to the desired pull-in current or voltage for Relay 1.
4. If Relay 1 LED is on, turn its setpoint adjustment clockwise (counterclockwise if Relay 1 has mode jumper in FLT position) until
it de-energizes; otherwise, proceed to step 5.
5. Adjust Relay 1 pull-in point by turning its setpoint adjustment counterclockwise (clockwise if Relay 1 has mode jumper in FLT
position) until the relay energizes. (The potentiometers are 25-turn potentiometers.)
6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for Relays 2, 3, and 4 using corresponding setpoint adjustments.
7. When using a 0-20 mA input, the CHAIN OUTPUT produces a 0-12 VDC signal, which is proportional to the input signal.
Connections should be made betw
een CHAIN OUTPUT and COMMON
. If a voltage input is used, the CHAIN OUTPUT is
directly proportional to the input.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
UCS-421E Sequencer control module, four relay outputs, field calibrated
UCS-421E-C Sequencer control module, four relay outputs, pre-calibrated (specify settings when ordering)
SETUP / CALIBRATION
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
B-7 7"x5"x3" two-piece aluminum box with two 1/2" conduit knockouts 269

1534. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1462fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±10%, half-wave; or 24 VDC
±10%
Supply Current 220 mA @ 24 VAC;
110 mA @ 24 VDC maximum
Input 0-20 mA or 0-15 VDC, jumper
selectable
Input Impedance 250Ω (mA input);
49.7 kΩ (VDC input)
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Accuracy ±1%
Output Six SPDT relays, adjustable via
setpoint potentiometers
Relay Differential Factory set at 0.5 mA or 0.375V,
adjustable using plug-in resistors
Relay Output Rating 10A @ 120 VAC
Operating Temperature 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Weight 0.7 lb (0.32 kg)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
KELE SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - SIX STAGE
UCS-621E
DESCRIPTION
The UCS-621E is a solid-state device used for multistage
control in HVAC systems, sequencing boilers or chillers, or
floating/tri-state control of VAV boxes from a single analog
signal
. The UCS-621E can be used to obtain a digital output
from a voltage or current producing sensor. Units may be
daisy chained to provide additional stages of control, and a mounting track is supplied for easy installation
.
OPERATION
The UCS-621E accepts a 0-20 mA or 0-15V input signal to
produce a six-stage relay output. Each relay has a multi-turn
potentiometer adjustment to set the pull-in point. Each of
the six rela
ys is jumper-selectable to pull in on either a rise
or fall in signal
. Individual relay differential is easily adjusted
by using different value plug-in differential resistors. Multiple
UCS models can be daisy chained to oper
ate additional
stages from one input signal
. A maximum of eight slave units
can be daisy chained.
SPECIFICATIONS
2.25
(5.72)
5.25
(13.34)
Depth: 1.19
(3.02)
in
(cm)
CH
V
mA
SEQ FLT SEQ FLT
1234 56
SEQ FLT
1 2 3 4 5 6
24V
POWER
COMMO N
SIGNAL
INPUT
CHAIN
OUTPUT
FLT
SEQ
FEATURES
• Six stages of relay control
• Voltage or current input
• 24 VAC/VDC power
• LED indication of relay status
• Adjustable relay setpoints
• Adjustable relay differentials
• Snap-track mounted
DIMENSIONS

1535. fi 1463TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
KELE SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - SIX STAGE
UCS-621E
CH
V
mA
SEQ FLT SEQ FLT
1234 56
SEQ FLT
1 2 3 4 5 6
24V
POWER
COMMON
SIGNAL
INPUT
CHAIN
OUTPUT
Connections to UCS slav e
units (max eight units)
24V Po wer Terminal
Common Terminal
Signal Input Terminal
24 VAC/VDC
Signal
mA or V
+
–
+
–
FLT
SEQ
Plug-in Differential Resistors (1/4W, 1%)
18.2 kΩ = 0.5 mA or 0.375V (factory supplied)
See Table 1 for other differentials.Jumper should be in chain position (CH)
when using UCS-621E as a sla ve unit.
Chain Output is used to connect the master
unit to the first slave. Additional slaves are
connected from signal input to signal input.
Factory Relay Settings
Relay 1: 5.3 mA, 4V
Relay 2: 6.6 mA, 5V
Relay 3: 8.0 mA, 6V
Relay 4: 9.3 mA, 7V
Relay 5: 10.7 mA, 8V
Relay 6: 12.0 mA, 9V
Relay Contact Wiring
for Floating/Tri-state
Control (set #1 mode
Jumper in FLT position)
1 2
CWCCW COM
TABLE 1. OTHER DIFFERENTIALS
Other differential resistors can be used
(customer-supplied):
9.1 k
Ω = 0.25 mA or 0.1875V
36.5 k
Ω = 1.0 mA or 0.75V
54.9 k
Ω = 1.5 mA or 1.125V
73.2 k
Ω = 2.0 mA or 1.5V
Make all connections according to the diagram below or as shown on the job diagrams and in compliance with
national and local codes. Make all connections with power removed. Failure to do so could result in circuit
board damage. Use shielded #18-gauge cable for connections from the UCS-621E to the controller, shield
grounded at the controller.
WIRING
1. Set jumpers to desired position as follows:
Mode jumpers - In FLT position, the relays energize on a decrease in signal. In the SEQ position, the relays energize on an
increase in signal.
Input jumpers - Select mA position f
or a 0-20 mA input or V position for a 0-15 VDC input
. If the UCS-621E is used as a slave
unit, place the bottle plug jumper in the chain position.
2. Connect a meter in series with the SIGNAL INPUT terminal and the 0-20 mA (+) signal to read a current signal. To read a
voltage input, connect across the COMMON (-) and SIGNAL INPUT(+) terminals.
3. Adjust the input signal to the desired pull-in current or voltage for relay 1.
4. If Relay 1 LED is on, turn its setpoint adjustment clockwise (counterclockwise if Relay 1 has mode jumper in FLT position) until
it deenergizes; otherwise, proceed to step 5.
5. Adjust Relay 1 pull-in point by turning its setpoint adjustment counterclockwise (clockwise if Relay 1 has mode jumper in FLT
position) until the relay energizes. (The potentiometers are 25-turn potentiometers.)
6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for relays 2 through 6 using setpoint adjustments.
7. When using a 0-20 mA input, the CHAIN OUTPUT produces a 0-12 VDC signal, which is proportional to the input signal.
Connections should be made betw
een CHAIN OUTPUT and COMMON
. If a voltage input is used, the CHAIN OUTPUT is
directly proportional to the input.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
UCS-621E Sequencer control module, six relay outputs, field calibrated
UCS-621E-C Sequencer control module, six relay outputs, pre-calibrated (specify settings when ordering)
SETUP / CALIBRATION

1536. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1464fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±10%, half-wave; or 24 VDC
±10%
Supply Current 280 mA @ 24 VAC;
140 mA @ 24 VDC maximum
Input 0-20 mA or 0-15 VDC, jumper
selectable
Input Impedance 250Ω (mA input);
49.7 kΩ
(VDC input)
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Accuracy ±1%
Output Eight SPDT relays, adjustable via
setpoint potentiometers
Relay Differential Factory set at 0.5 mA or 0.375V,
adjustable using plug-in resistors
Relay Output Rating 10A @ 120 VAC
Operating Temperature 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Weight 0.8 lb (0.36 kg)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - EIGHT STAGE
UCS-821E
DESCRIPTION
The UCS-821E is a solid-state device used for multistage
control in HVAC systems, sequencing boilers or chillers, or
floating/tri-state control of VAV boxes from a single analog
signal
. The UCS-821E can be used to obtain a digital output
from a voltage or current producing sensor. Units may be
daisy chained to provide additional stages of control, and a mounting track is supplied for easy installation
.
OPERATION
The UCS-821E accepts a 0-20 mA or 0-15V input signal to produce an eight-stage relay output
. Each relay has a multi-
turn potentiometer adjustment to set the pull-in point. Each of
the eight rela
ys is jumper selectable to pull in on either a rise
or fall in signal
. Individual relay differential is easily adjusted
by using different value plug-in differential resistors. Multiple
UCS models can be daisy chained to oper
ate additional
stages from one input signal
. A maximum of eight slave units
can be daisy chained.
SPECIFICATIONS
2.25
(5.72)
6.82
(17.32)
Depth: 1.19
(3.02)
in
(cm)
CH
V
mA
SEQ FLT SEQ FLT
34 512 6 78
SEQ FLT SEQ FLT
321 4 5 6 7 8
24V
POWER
COMMO N
SIGNAL
INPUT
CHAIN
OUTPUT
FLT
SEQ
FEATURES
• Eight stages of relay control
• Voltage or current input
• 24 VAC/VDC power
• LED indication of relay status
• Adjustable relay setpoints
• Adjustable relay differentials
• Snap-track mounted
DIMENSIONS

1537. fi 1465TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - EIGHT STAGE
UCS-821E
CH
V
mA
SEQ FLT SEQ FLT
34 512 6 78
SEQ FLT SEQ FLT
321 4 5 6 7 8
24V
POWER
COMMON
SIGNAL
INPUT
CHAIN
OUTPUT
Connections to UCS slav e
units (max eight units)
24V Po wer Terminal
Common Terminal
Signal Input Terminal
24 VAC/VDC
Signal
mA or V
+
–
+
–
FLT
SEQ
Plug-in Differential Resistors (1/4W, 1%)
18.2 kΩ = 0.5 mA or 0.375V (factory supplied)
See Table 1 for other differentials.
Jumper should be in chain position (CH)
when using UCS-821E as a sla ve unit.
Chain Output is used to connect the master
unit to the first slave. Additional slaves are
connected from signal input to signal input.
Factory Relay Settings
Relay 1: 5.3 mA, 4V
Relay 2: 6.6 mA, 5V
Relay 3: 8.0 mA, 6V
Relay 4: 9.3 mA, 7V
Relay 5: 10.7 mA, 8V
Relay 6: 12.0 mA, 9V
Relay 7: 13.3 mA, 10V
Relay 8: 14.7 mA, 11V
Relay Contact Wiring
for Floating/Tri-state
Control (set #1 mode
Jumper in FLT position)
1 2
CWCCW COM
TABLE 1. OTHER DIFFERENTIALS
Other differential resistors can be used
(customer-supplied):
9.1 k
Ω = 0.25 mA or 0.1875V
36.5 k
Ω = 1.0 mA or 0.75V
54.9 k
Ω = 1.5 mA or 1.125V
73.2 k
Ω = 2.0 mA or 1.5V
Make all connections according to the diagram below or as shown on the job diagrams and in compliance with national and
local codes. Make all connections with power removed. Failure to do so could result in circuit board damage. Use shielded
#18-gauge cable for connections from the UCS-821E to the controller, shield grounded at the controller.
WIRING
1. Set jumpers to desired position as follows:
Mode jumpers - In FLT position, the relays energize on a decrease in signal. In the SEQ position, the relays energize on an
increase in signal.
Input jumpers - Select mA position f
or a 0-20 mA input or V position for a 0-15 VDC input
. If the UCS-821E is used as a slave
unit, place the bottle plug jumper in the chain position.
2. Connect a meter in series with the SIGNAL INPUT terminal and the 0-20 mA (+) signal to read a current signal. To read a
voltage input, connect across the COMMON (-) and SIGNAL INPUT(+) terminals.
3. Adjust the input signal to the desired pull-in current or voltage for Relay 1.
4. If Relay 1 LED is on, turn its setpoint adjustment clockwise (counterclockwise if Relay 1 has mode jumper in FLT position) until
it de-energizes; otherwise, proceed to step 5.
5. Adjust Relay 1 pull-in point by turning its setpoint adjustment counterclockwise (clockwise if Relay 1 has mode jumper in FLT
position) until the relay energizes. (The potentiometers are 25-turn potentiometers.)
6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for relays 2 through 8 using setpoint adjustments.
7. When using a 0-20 mA input, the CHAIN OUTPUT produces a 0-12 VDC signal, which is proportional to the input signal.
Connections should be made betw
een CHAIN OUTPUT and COMMON
. If a voltage input is used, the CHAIN OUTPUT is
directly proportional to the input.
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
UCS-821E Sequencer control module, eight relay outputs, field calibrated
UCS-821E-C Sequencer control module, eight relay outputs, pre-calibrated (specify settings when ordering)
SETUP / CALIBRATION

1538. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1466fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±10%, half-wave;
or 24 VDC ±10%
Supply Current
UMX-4 210 mA @ 24 VAC;
90 mA @24 VDC maximum
UMX-8 350 mA @ 24 VAC;
150 mA @ 24 VDC maximum
Input PWM, 0-20 mA, 0-5V, 0-10V,
0-15V, jumper selectable
Input Impedance 250Ω (mA input) maximum;
46.4 kΩ minimum (VDC input)
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Override Transistor switch, 30 VDC @
100 mA maximum
Output
UMX-4 Four SPDT relays
UMX-8 Eight SPDT relays
Feedback
UMX-4 One output, 1-5V (3 mA) for relays
1 - 4
UMX-8 Two outputs, 1-5V (3 mA) for relays
1 - 4 and for relays 5 - 8
Relay Output Rating 5A @ 24 VAC/VDC
Operating Temperature 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions 3.3"H x 7.0"W x 1.6"D
(8.3 x 17.8 x 4.0 cm)
Weight 1.1 lb (0.5 kg)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 18 months
MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT / OUTPUT EXPANDER
UMX-4, UMX-8
DESCRIPTION
The UMX-8 is a unique microcomputer-based multifunction
interface that expands the input or output capability of building
automation controllers
. It has eight SPDT output relays that
provide on/off control from a jumper-selectable PWM, current or voltage input signal
. The sequence of operation can be
easily selected by DIP switches. A dual mode allows two
UMX-8s to be controlled in sequence from a single input signal
. HOA switches allow for manual override of each relay
output. Feedback and LEDs provide status indication of the
UMX-8.The UMX-4 provides four SPDT output relays. All
jumper positions and DIP s
witch settings are identical to the
UMX-8
. The operation of the UMX-4 is identical to relays 1-4
on the UMX-8. Feedback and LEDs provide status indication
of the UMX-4.
FEATURES
• Four or eight SPDT relay outputs
• HOA switches
• LED status indication
• Field-selectable functions
• Output status feedback
• Override indication
• Field-selectable PWM, current, or voltage inputs
• Pull-apart terminal blocks
STANDARD CONTROL SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS
Multiplexed Relay Output Expander - Provides up to 16
relay outputs expansion from one BAS output
Multiplexed Input Expander - Provides up to 16 inputs
expansion from one BAS output and one BAS input
RTU or AHU Controller - Provides multistage heating and
cooling sequences with economizer
Sequencer - Up to 16 stages of sequential control
Custom Sequences - Consult Kele for details
SPECIFICATIONS
APPLICATION
The UMX is recommended for use only with BAS controllers
programmable to issue discrete PWM, current, or voltage
signal commands
. For sequential relay control from a varying
analog current or voltage signal, use a UCS sequencer module
.

1539. fi 1467TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
PWM Pulse-Width-Modulated Input Signal
ANA Current/Voltage Input Signal
L1 Level 1 UMX (Dual UMX Mode)
L2 Level 2 UMX (Dual UMX Mode)
HSL Hold Outputs on Signal Loss (Current/Voltage)
CSL Clear Outputs on Signal Loss (Current/Voltage) DIP Switches
SVT Short Signal Validation Time (Current/Voltage) 0 Off
LVT Long Signal Validation Time (Current/Voltage) 1 On
L1, L2 - UMX Levels - Dual UMX Mode Only
In the Dual UMX mode, two UMXs respond in sequence to a single input signal. Using the DIP switch settings shown in Table 3,
assign the first UMX to Level 1 (L1) and the second UMX to Level 2 (L2). Dual UMX control is available in most current/voltage
and PWM modes. PWM time base doubles in Dual UMX mode.
HSL,
CSL - Signal Loss Hold - Current/Voltage Input Mode Only
When using a current/voltage input, the UMX can be programmed to either hold all relays in their current state (HSL) or turn all relays off (CSL) upon a loss of the input signal
. Use DIP switch settings shown in Table 2 or Table 3 to program this feature.
SVT, LVT - Signal Validation Time - Current/Voltage Input Mode Only
When varying a current/voltage input signal to the UMX it is necessary for the input to remain at the desired value for a set length of time
. This prevents other relays on the UMX from energizing while the input signal is changing values. This set length of time, or
validation time, can be selected for either one (1) second (SVT) or three (3) seconds (LVT). Use the DIP switch settings in Table 2
or 3 to select the validation time.
Single and Dual UMX Control The UMX can be operated in both a single and dual operating mode
. In the single mode, one UMX is controlled from a single
current/voltage or PWM signal. In the dual mode, two UMXs are controlled in sequence, providing up to 16 relay outputs from
a single current/voltage or PWM input. This dual UMX control is not available with all control sequences. Refer to the control
sequences in Tables 2 and 3 for availability. If single UMX control is used, refer to Table 2 for DIP switch settings. For dual UMX
control, refer to Table 3.
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)
To control the UMX from a PWM signal, put the input selection jumper on the UMX in the PW position. Set the operating mode
DIP switches (Tables 2 or 3) as required. Refer to the control sequence in Tables 4 through 7 for time base and control sequence
information.
Current/Voltage Input (ANA)
The UMX can be controlled from a current or voltage input. To operate in this mode, set the input selection jumpers on the UMX
as shown in Table 1. Set the operating mode DIP switches (See Tables 2 or 3) as required. Refer to the Control Sequence Tables
4 through 7 for time base and control sequence information.
DIP SWITCHES
PWM ANA L1 L2 HSL CSL SVT LVT 1 2 3 4
X X 0 0 1 0
X X 0 0 1 1
X X X X 1 0 0 0
X X X X 1 0 0 1
X X X X 1 0 1 0
X X X X 1 0 1 1
X X X X 1 1 0 0
X X X X 1 1 0 1
X X X X 1 1 1 0
X X X X 1 1 1 1
TABLE 3. DUAL UMX CONTROL
TABLE 1. CURRENT/VOLTAGE INPUT JUMPERS
Current/Voltage input 0-20 mA 0-5V 0-10V 0-15V
AN MA 5V 10V 15V
DIP SWITCHES
PWM ANA L1 L2 HSL CSL SVT LVT 1 2 3 4
X 0 0 0 1
X X X 0 1 0 0
X X X 0 1 0 1
X X X 0 1 1 0
X X X 0 1 1 1
TABLE 2. SINGLE UNIT UMX CONTROL
MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT / OUTPUT EXPANDER
UMX-4, UMX-8
OPERATION
OPERATING MODE (DIP SWITCHES 1, 2, 3, AND 4)

1540. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1468fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
SINGLE* UMX RELAYS
UMX-8
UMX-4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3.5 0.75 1.50 2.25 0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4.0 1.00 2.00 3.00 1.0 X X X X X X X 1
5.0 1.25 2.50 3.75 1.5 X X X X X X X 0
6.0 1.50 3.00 4.50 2.0 X X X X X X 1 X
7.0 1.75 3.50 5.25 2.5 X X X X X X 0 X
8.0 2.00 4.00 6.00 3.0 X X X X X 1 X X
9.0 2.25 4.50 6.75 3.5 X X X X X 0 X X
10.0 2.50 5.00 7.50 4.0 X X X X 1 X X X
11.0 2.75 5.50 8.25 4.5 X X X X 0 X X X
12.0 3.00 6.00 9.00 5.0 X X X 1 X X X X
13.0 3.25 6.50 9.75 5.5 X X X 0 X X X X
14.0 3.50 7.00 10.50 6.0 X X 1 X X X X X
15.0 3.75 7.50 11.25 6.5 X X 0 X X X X X
16.0 4.00 8.00 12.00 7.0 X 1 X X X X X X
17.0 4.25 8.50 12.75 7.5 X 0 X X X X X X
18.0 4.50 9.00 13.50 8.0 1 X X X X X X X
19.0 4.75 9.50 14.25 8.5 0 X X X X X X X
20.0 5.00 10.00 15.00 9.0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
*Dual UMX control av ailable in PWM mode only. PWM time base doubles in “Dual UMX” mode.
4.0 1.00 2.00 3.00 -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6.0 1.50 3.00 4.50 1.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
8.0 2.00 4.00 6.00 2.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
10.0 2.50 5.00 7.50 3.0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
12.0 3.00 6.00 9.00 4.0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
14.0 3.50 7.00 10.50 5.0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
16.0 4.00 8.00 12.00 6.0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
18.0 4.50 9.00 13.50 7.0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
20.0 5.00 10.00 15.00 8.0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
*Dual UMX control av ailable in both current/voltage and PWM modes. PWM time base doubles in “Dual UMX” mode.
4.0 1.00 2.00 3.00 0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6.0 1.50 3.00 4.50 1.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
8.0 2.00 4.00 6.00 2.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
10.0 2.50 5.00 7.50 3.0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
12.0 3.00 6.00 9.00 4.0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
14.0 3.50 7.00 10.50 5.0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
16.0 4.00 8.00 12.00 6.0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
18.0 4.50 9.00 13.50 7.0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
20.0 5.00 10.00 15.00 8.0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
*Dual UMX control av ailable in both current/voltage and PWM modes. PWM time base doubles in “Dual UMX” mode .
4.0 1.00 2.00 3.00 1.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6.0 1.50 3.00 4.50 2.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
8.0 2.00 4.00 6.00 3.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
10.0 2.50 5.00 7.50 4.0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
12.0 3.00 6.00 9.00 5.0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
14.0 3.50 7.00 10.50 6.0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
16.0 4.00 8.00 12.00 7.0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
18.0 4.50 9.00 13.50 8.0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
20.0 5.00 10.00 15.00 9.0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
*Dual UMX control av ailable in both current/voltage and PWM modes. PWM time base doubles in “Dual UMX” mode.
TABLE 4.
OUTPUT
EXPANDER
(each relay
independently
controllable)
For current/voltage
signal, DIP switches
5, 6, 7, and 8 are
OFF, OFF, ON, OFF.
For PWM signal, use
OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF.
TABLE 5.
4 or 8 INPUT
EXPANDER
For current/voltage
signal, DIP switches
5, 6, 7, and 8 are
OFF, ON, OFF, ON .
For PWM signal, use
OFF, OFF, ON, ON.
TABLE 6.
4 or 8 STAGE
SEQUENCER
For current/voltage
signal, DIP switches
5, 6, 7, and 8 are
OFF,
ON, OFF, OFF.
For PWM signal, use
OFF, OFF, ON, OFF.
Note: for adjustable
thresholds, use UCS
Series
TABLE 7.
RTU
CONTROLLER
3 HEAT, 3 COOL,
FAN, ECONOMIZER
For current/voltage
signal, DIP switches
5, 6, 7, and 8 are
OFF, ON, ON, OFF
For PWM signal, use
OFF, ON, OFF, OFF.
PWM (SEC)
mA 5V 10V 15V 200 mSec Minimum
Delay Between
Pulses
Note: Each input command may va ry to approximately
50% of the change to the next highest or lowest
command and still be considered valid.
Relay status
0 = Command OFF
1 = Command ON
X = No change of state
DISCRETE CURRENT AND VOLTAGE COMMANDS
CONTROL SEQUENCES (DIP SWITCHES 5, 6, 7, AND 8)
MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT / OUTPUT EXPANDER
UMX-4, UMX-8

1541. fi 1469TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele.com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
UMX-4 Four stage multifunction expander with HOA switches
UMX-8 Eight-stage multifunction expander with HOA switches
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
UMX-8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
POWER
PWM
OVERRIDE
AUTO OFF HAND
FBK2
FBK1
24V PWR
COM
PWM
PWM
ANA
OVERRIDE
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
24V
R
LED Indication:
Power (green): On when power is present
PWM (yellow): On when PWM signal is present
Override (red): On when any override switch is
out of the Au to position
Any outputs driving an ex ternal relay or an inductive load
should have a varistor installed at the relay as shown .
Note:
V39ZA1 Varistor
LED Indication: Relay LEDs (red):
on when relay is energized in AU TO
or HAND position
Input jumpers shown
jumpered for 0-10V input
Note:If driving a DC relay, a reverse connection diode is
recommended across the relay coil (such as 1N4004) .
Override Output, Transistor Switch 30 VDC @ 100 mA max
switch closes to common when any override switch is
out of the Au to position .
Current or Voltage Signal (if used)
PWM BAS Controller Contacts (if PWM is used) PWM term inals are optoisolated and polarity insensitive .
Contacts may be wired in series to either PWM terminal .
Any 24V source can be used to power the PWM signal .
24 VAC/VDC Power Supply
Feedback Status (1-5 VDC) for Relay s 1-4
Feedback Status (1-5 VDC) for Relays 5-8
PWAN
15V
10V
5V
MA
Override Switches: Apply 24V to the
UMX for the ov erride switches to
function in the HAND position .
The UMX-8 has two feedback voltage output circuits labeled FBK1 (relay outputs 1-4) and FBK2 (relay outputs 5-8). The UMX-4 has one
feedback voltage output circuit labeled FBK1 (releay outputs 1-4). When a relay output is energized, the following voltage is added to the
feedback output:
FBK1 - Feedback Circuit #1 FBK2 - Feedback Circuit #2
Relays 1,2,3,4 Off 1.0V Relays 5,6,7,8 Off 1.0V
Relay 1 On Add 0.27V Relay 5 On Add 0.27V
Relay 2 On Add 0.53V Relay 6 On Add 0.53V
Relay 3 On Add 1.07V Relay 7 On Add 1.07V
Relay 4 On Add 2.13V Relay 8 On Add 2.13V
Example: If outputs 1 and 3 are energized and 2 and 4 are de-energized, the voltage output on FBK1 will be 2.34V
(1V + 0.27V +1.07V = 2.34V). The same would be true for FBK2 if relay outputs 5 and 7 were energized,
and 6 and 8 were de-energized.
FEEDBACK
WIRING
MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT / OUTPUT EXPANDER
UMX-4, UMX-8

1542. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1470fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC
Supply Current
MOB-4 65 mA maximum @ 24 VAC/VDC
(half wave)
MOB-8 130 mA maximum @ 24 VAC/VDC
(half wave)
Input Voltage input to hand-off-auto toggle
switches
Wiring Terminations Wire-captive screw terminals
Output Voltage output based on hand-off-
auto toggle switch position
Switching Capability 1A @ 24 VAC/VDC
Operating Temperature -10° to 140°F (-23° to 60°C)
Operating Humidity 10% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions
MOB-4 3.3"H x 3.8"W x 1.6"D
(8.3 x 9.5 x 4.1 cm)
MOB-8 3.3"H x 7.5"W x 1.6"D
(8.3 x 19.1 x 4.1 cm)
Weight
MOB-4 0.4 lb (0.2 kg)
MOB-8 0.8 lb (0.4 kg)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 1 year
MANUAL OVERRIDE BOARDS
MOB-4, MOB-8
DESCRIPTION
The MOB Series manual override boards are designed to
add hand/off/automatic operation to on/off controller outputs.
The
y may also be used as stand-alone override switch banks
.
FEATURES
• AC or DC operation
• Ability to convert four or eight outputs to hand/off/auto
operation
• Wire-captive screw termination
• LED indication
• Feedback monitoring of switch positions
• Snap-track mounted
Hand/Off/Auto mode can be selected individually for each channel (1-8 or 1-4) with a three-position toggle switch
. Each
channel LED will light an
y time that output is commanded on
from the hand or auto mode
.
24 VAC or VDC must be applied to the HOT and RETURN
terminals for the hand position to operate. The hand voltage
source (hot terminal) and each auto IN voltage source can be separate sources as long as they all share a common return connection
.
The status contact is closed when all channel switches are
in the auto position. Moving any switch to the off or hand
position will cause the status contact to open.
Normally Closed to input of
monitoring computer
Contact opens if any switch
is not in AUTO position.
MOB-4
STATUS
HAND
OFF
AUTO
1234
RETURN HOT
AUTO
IN
OUT
AUTO
IN
OUT
AUTO
IN
OUT
AUTO
IN
OUT
1234
24 VAC / VDC
Motor or Motor
Starter Coil
Pilot Relay
24V
120 VAC
typical
Digital Output from BAS, PLC, or
Other Controller
Safeties
R
MSL N
Power Supply*
24VAC/VDC
* See Operation for
power supply considerations
WIRINGOPERATION
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION
MOB-4 Manual override board, 4-channel hand-off-auto control
MOB-8 Manual override board, 8-channel hand-off-auto control
SPECIFICATIONS

1543. fi 1471TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCERS
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.kele .com888-397-5353 USAMarch 2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
In1 –
In1 +
24
VAC
24 VAC
Power
Wiring Typical
To Pulse 
Counter 
Circuitry
+
–
Out1 +
Out1 –
In2 –
In2 +
Out2 +
Out2 –
O
F
F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
O
F
F
Pulse Ratio Rescaling Instructions
The UPD is factory set to provide one output pulse for 10 input pulses. This 
ratio is easily changed in the field. Each switch is assigned a pulse value 
shown in the table below. Simply turn “ON” the combination of switches that 
adds up to the number of input pulses you would like each output pulse to 
represent. For example, if you would like each output pulse to represent 100 
input pulses, turn on the following:
Switch 3  4
Switch 6  32
Switch 7  64
Total  100
Contacts at
Monitored Device
  Switch  ON Value
  1  1
  2  2
  3  4
  4  8
  Switch  ON Value
  5  16   6  32   7  64   8  128
DIP Switch Divider
Input Frequency (pulse/second)
output pulse period (seconds) =
Note: Make divider even number for equal time high and low pulse.
Supply Voltage 24 VAC ±10%
Supply VA
UPD-2 2.5 VA
UPD-4 5.0 VA
Input Mechanical switch contact or open-
collector transistor
Input Signal Factory set scale 10:1; DIP switch
adjustable range 1:1 to 255:1
Input Pulse Time Contact minimum open or close
time 10 ms, maximum frequency
50 Hz
Wiring Terminations Screw terminals
Output 30 VDC, 6 mA maximum contact
rating (observe polarity)
Operating Temperature 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C)
Operating Humidity 0% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions
UPD-2 3.3"H x 4.1"W x 1.0"D
(8.3 x 10.5 x 2.5 cm)
UPD-4 3.3"H x 8.3"W x 1.0"D
(8.3 x 21.0 x 2.5 cm)
Weight 0.5 lb (0.23 kg)
RoHS Statement Yes
Warranty 18 months
UNIVERSAL PULSE DIVIDER
UPD SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The UPD Series universal pulse divider accepts pulse signals
from devices such as electric meters and flow sensors,
rescales these pulses, and provides an isolated pulse
output
. This allows the receiving devices to monitor higher
frequencies than they are able to accept directly. The UPD-2
provides two separate channels and the UPD-4 provides four channels
. The output pulse signal is optically isolated from the
input signal and each channel is isolated from the others.
FEATURES
• Two or four channels
• Optically-isolated signals
• 24 VAC power
• Snap-track mounted
• User-adjustable pulse divider ratio
• Operates with mechanical switch or open-collector
transistor devices
WIRING
APPLICATION
The function of the UPD Series is to count input pulses and
produce one output pulse for a specified number of input
pulses
. The pulse ratio from the UPD is user-adjustable
through an eight-position DIP switch and may represent from one to 255 input pulses
. An input pulse is defined as
a contact opening, then closing, and then re-opening. The
duty cycle or contact open/close ratio does not need to be exactly 50%
. The input pulse rate may not exceed 50 pulses
per second. The minimum open or closed time, whichever is
shorter, must not be less than 10 milliseconds.
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION UPD-2 Universal pulse divider, two channel
UPD-4 Universal pulse divider, four-channel
Make all connections according to the diagram below or
as shown on the job diagrams and in compliance with
national and local codes
. Make all connections with the
power removed. Failure to do so could result in circuit board
damage.

1544. fi
TRANSDUCERS 1472fi
TRANSDUCERS
23
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.kele.com888-397-5353 USA March 2014
TRANSDUCER SELECTION CHART
TRANSDUCER SELECTION CHART
IP-300
UCP-722
UCP-822
EPC
UCP-242
UCP-422
CP-8551
CP-8552
CP-8511
UCP-422-V
CP-8552
CP-8511
EP-311/313
UCP-422-44
T-1000
22/07-16
RES-1E
DRN3.1/4
RES-1E
DRN3.1/4
RES-1E
DRN3.1/4
PVI-1
PVI-2
VTI-1
UAT
ARM
VTI-1-XR1
VTI-2-XR1
UAT
DT-13E
AIM-1/2
DT-13E
AIM-1/2
PWA-1T
PWA-2T
AUD
PWA-1A
PWA-2A
PTA/2
T-1000
UCP-422-44T
IP-300
UCP-722
UCP-822
EPC
UCP-822
EPW
UCP-822
EFP
VTI-2
UMM
6N1-ISO
VTI-1
UAT
ARM
VTI-2
UMM
6N1-ISO
PNEUMATIC
STANDARD CAPACITY
OUTPUTS
FROM
TRANSDUCERS
INPUTS TO
TRANSDUCERS
MILLIAMP
TRANSDUCER SELECTION
VOLTAGE
TRI-STAT E
(FLOATING)
PULSE-
WIDTH
PNEUMATIC RESISTANCE
PNEUMATIC
HIGH CAPACITY
PNEUMATIC
INDUSTRIAL CAPACITY
RESISTANCE
ANALOG
(MILLIAMP OR VOLTAGE)
ISOLATED ANALOG
(MILLIAMP OR VOLTAGE)
UMX-4
UCS-221E
AAR
UMX-4
UCS-221E
AAR
UMX-8UMX-8
UCS-621E
UMX-8
UCS-621E
UMX-8
UMX-8
UCS-821E
UMX-8
UCS-821E
UMX-4
UCS-421E
ATL
UMX-4
UCS-421E
ATL
UMX-4
UMX-4
UMX-4
UCS-121 UCS-121
UCS-221E UCS-421E UCS-621E UCS-821E
AFP
UCS-221E UCS-421E UCS-621E UCS-821E
AFP
DIGITAL 1-STAGE
DIGITAL 2-STAGE
DIGITAL 4-STAGE
DIGITAL 6-STAGE
DIGITAL 8-STAGE
TRI-STATE
(FLOATING)

1545. KELE.COM
Check us out online! Our selection continues to
grow after this catalog is printed. Visit kele.com or
call us at 888-397-KELE (5353).

1546. For a secure way of life
TM
Blu eRid g e
Te c hnolo g ie s
Pilla
Electrical
Products, Inc.
Pilla
Electrical
Products, Inc.
HEADQUARTERS SINGAPORE OFFICE
888.397.KELE (5353) | 3300 BROTHER BLVD, MEMPHIS, TN 38133 (65) 6282.9120 | 48 MACTAGGART RD #11-01, SINGAPORE, 368088
TAGGING
& LABELING
PG
A3
VALVE
ASSEMBLY
PG
A3
CUSTOM

APPROVED
PANEL
ASSEMBLY
PG
A2
CUSTOM
CALIBRATION
PG
A23
T30 SERIES
PG 1034
UGVL SERIES
PG 170
ST-S*EW
PG 1171
VT7600
PG 1312